UV hash ti Wut
Ea
a
i i uate
it i i Weulis 1H i
ee ae ie .
rit tH ti ii i tit eta mls ie af
Bue H i neat i Hein iiayesy
a a a ae a
Hi bie i i i Git
tire File kitts
A ao
ie i : (isn
THT it
i eu Hn j
yt NG tee it yh} i a ante
a ane i ate H x \ ane cea Hee ‘i Be :
Cra H i ea
i N fit } i eit tate a Tt a ti tah
i a Hi an ate in a 2 aan
i Penna eta sala i Ate crit atti
E Catan ae a oe
o ST a ae SU ghia a
ity eee yg at ae yet Ru Mh HH han ie i in Wily Puy eats ty nite
it ay matte tit rein Hake Alte riamneeapare ik caret
HH Hi fi abla Hn part hi qe i rit i al ath ite aes thty
nn if if i te AES i i HE ih na fe Ba dit eau Heat ae
Ani te ie eat a ded ih icant matt i : ati Wheaituly tase :
Pati slit a He WHA it ns sh os i
Hot i i 7
i} He aa
i st
i aera i
Sa a
nee nt ie
TpaitrareeT neonates i i He
i : a Hh 7 ae
iv i
} alent, ai it
‘ sata Neder it tet ‘i
Heuaiewuaer ante : ie
a
te oo
en PaNG ie cittt Neath i ae
Sen na a an i Wiig t
THR ne pier GTR i at :
ae ae :
i niet sane Best
Hert Se Ha Santi ee : cS
Jamar baum qe an i Huy tea se
eae Hue eateries et st
ee ee i ie :
hanya, ; : he sua iid
ai en aaa i fs rie i niu
oe
a Tae a a a ey
HRC abate a angels
ee
+}
Hie
ty
tet
ii
it
pat
4
a4)
a ie
Tey nate y
ars aa See Tibi
Tiedt sia ae qanue ut rath -
gute ale f mt) i tity else if
SE tat ‘Ay i ot
Graves ea ; ; i fone fut
Ta th i ihe ita AG
i vy Puy Ee re ei islets
i ‘ i ve ui ve ner ah i
: i ie i scene DIN
( it aise bene Rete et sic
ROR eT ot
Hae
ae
i
Le
rots
“ Berit ‘ reitresy
rays path as fe
Widest a Genes it
sib
“
a
itr
eH
Bett x
ie ty lay a
Fe it hi aii uf i jaune
ee elt a bite i An {i
ats at Ha tRe Hallas,
ea t Bispace
ly ai sihehs tee
Shsakl Rid $y) aS
; i :
Binns 1 ; ait :
a : | i H ‘ ner aides eat et
ite H i : trees apie tate
ty i ; ‘ i ia i ‘ 4 . x tS . Z tee merece! Geetis:
i ion ds on
ny He ah
tei abies
a na
tite aunt
iit
tetas
a
gabe
i
Oy eared
i eutanuley
Het
Ralph Ht. Holcomb
Ralph H ‘ Heleomb
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2023 with funding from
No Sponsor
https://archive.org/details/thayersgreekenglOO0Othay
GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON
OF THE
NEW TESTAMENT
A ]
apy Tadevoews TOV dvoudtov exioKeris.
EPICTETUS, Diss. i. 17, 12.
maius quiddam atque divinius est sermo humanus quam quod totum mutis
litterarum figuris comprehendi queat.
HERMANN, Opusce. iil. 253.
TA PHMATA A EFQ AEAAAHKA YMIN TINEYMA EXTIN KAI ZOH EXTIN
A
GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON
OF THE
NEW TESTAMENT
BEING
@rimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti
TRANSI.ATED REVISED AND ENLARGED
BY
JOSEPH HENRY THAYER, D.D.
HON. LITT.D. DUBLIN
BUSSEY PROFESSOR OF NEW TESTAMENT CRITICISM AND INTERPRETATION IN
THE DIVINITY SCHOOL OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY
CORRECTED EDITION
NEW YORK - CINCINNATI - CHICAGO
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
Copyright, 1886, by Harrzr & BrorHEns.
All rights reserved.
Copyright, 1889, by Harper & BroraeErs,
All rights reserved,
E-P 10
PREFACE.
WARDS the close of the year 1862, the “Arnoldische Buchhandlung” in Leipzig
published the First Part of a Greek-Latin Lexicon of the New Testament, prepared,
upon the basis of the “Clavis Novi Testamenti Philologica” of C. G. Wilke (second edition,
2 vols. 1851), by Professor C. L. Wit1saLp Grimm of Jena. In his Prospectus Professor
Grimm announced it as his purpose not only (in accordance with the improvements in classical
lexicography embodied in the Paris edition of Stephen’s Thesaurus and in the fifth edition of
Passow’s Dictionary edited by Rost and his coadjutors) to exhibit the historical growth of a
word’s significations and accordingly in selecting his vouchers for New Testament usage to
show at what time and in what class of writers a given word became current, but also duly
to notice the usage of the Septuagint and of the Old Testament Apocrypha, and especially to
produce a Lexicon which should correspond to the present condition of textual criticism, of
exegesis, and of biblical theology. He devoted more than seven years to his task. The
successive Parts of his work received, as they appeared, the outspoken commendation of
scholars diverging as widely in their views as Hupfeld and Hengstenberg; and since its
completion in 1868 it has been generally acknowledged to be by far the best Lexicon of the
New Testament extant.
An arrangement was early made with Professor Grimm and his publisher to reproduce
the book in English, and an announcement of the same was given in the Bibliotheca Sacra for
October 1864 (p. 886). The work of translating was promptly begun; but it was protracted by
engrossing professional duties, and in particular by the necessity —as it seemed — of preparing
the authorized translation of Liinemann’s edition of Winer’s New Testament Grammar, which
was followed by a translation of the New Testament Grammar of Alexander Buttmann.
Meantime a new edition of Professor Grimm’s work was called for. To the typographical
accuracy of this edition liberal contributions were made from this side the water. It appeared
in its completed form in 1879. “Admirable”, “unequalled”, “invaluable”, are some of the
epithets it elicited from eminent judges in England; while as representing the estimate of
the book by competent critics in Germany a few sentences may be quoted from Professor
Schiirer’s review of it in the Theologische Literaturzeitung for January 5, 1878: “The use of
Professor Grimm’s book for years has convinced me that it is not only unquestionably the
best among existing New Testament Lexicons, but that, apart from all comparisons, it is a work
vl PREFACE.
of the highest intrinsic merit, and one which is admirably adapted to initiate a learner into an
acquaintance with the language of the New Testament. It ought to be regarded by every
student as one of the first and most necessary requisites for the study of the New Testament,
and consequently for the study of Theology in general.”
Both Professor Grimm and his publisher courteously gave me permission to make such
changes in his work as might in my judgment the better adapt it to the needs of English-
speaking students. But the emphatic commendation it called out from all quarters, in a
strain similar to the specimens just given, determined me to dismiss the thought of issuing
a new book prepared on my predecessor’s as a basis, and —alike in justice to him and for
the satisfaction of students —to reproduce his second edition in its integrity (with only the
silent correction of obvious oversights), and to introduce my additions in such a form as should
render them distinguishable at once from Professor Grimm’s work. (See [] in the list of
“‘Explanations and Abbreviations” given below.) This decision has occasionally imposed on
me some reserve and entailed some embarrassments. But notwithstanding all minor draw-
backs the procedure will, I am sure, commend itself in the end, not only on the score of
justice to the independent claims and responsibility of both authors, but also on account of
the increased assurance (or, at least, the broader outlook) thus afforded the student respect-
ing debatable matters, — whether of philology, of criticism, or of interpretation.
Some of the leading cbjects with the editor in his work of revision were stated in
connection with a few specimen pages privately printed and circulated in 1881, and may here
be repeated in substance as follows: to verify all references (biblical, classical, and—so far
as practicable— modern) ; to note more generally the extra-biblical usage of words; to give
the derivation of words in cases where it is agreed upon by the best etymologists and is of
interest to the general student; to render complete the enumeration of (representative) verbal
forms actually found in the New Testament (and exclude all others); to append to every verb
a list of those of its compounds which occur in the Greek Testament; to supply the New
Testament passages accidentally omitted in words marked at the end with an asterisk; to note
more fully the variations in the Greek text of current editions; to introduce brief discussions
of New Testament synonyms; to give the more noteworthy renderings not only of the
“Authorized Version” but also of the Revised New Testament; to multiply cross references;
references to grammatical works, both sacred (Winer, Buttmann, Green, etc.) and classical
(Kihner, Kriiger, Jelf, Donaldson, Goodwin, etc.); also to the best English and American
Commentaries (Lightfoot, Ellicott, Westcott, Alford, Morison, Beet, Hackett, Alexander, The
Speaker’s Commentary, The New Testament Commentary, etc.), as well as to the latest
exegetical works that have appeared on the Continent (Weiss, Heinrici, Keil, Godet, Oltramare,
etc.); and to the recent Bible Dictionaries and Cyclopedias (Smith, Alexander’s Kitto,
McClintock and Strong, the completed Riehm, the new Herzog, etc.), besides the various
Lives of Christ and of the Apostle Paul.
Respecting a few of these specifications an additional remark or two may be in place:
One of the most prominent and persistent embarrassments encountered by the New
Testament lexicographer is occasioned by the diversity of readings in the current editions of
the Greek text. A slight change in the form or even in the punctuation of a passage may
PREFACE. vat
entail a change in its construction, and consequently in its classification in the Lexicon. In
the absence of an acknowledged consensus of scholars in favor of any one of the extant
printed texts to the exclusion of its rivals, it is incumbent on any Lexicon which aspires after
general currency to reckon alike with them all. Professor Grimm originally took account of
the text of the ‘ Receptus’, together with that of Griesbach, of Lachmann, and of Tischendorf.
In his second edition, he made occasional reference also to the readings of Tregelles. In the
present work not only have the textual statements of Grimm’s second edition undergone
thorough revision (see, for example, “Griesbach ” in the list of “Explanations and Abbrevia-
tions”), but the readings (whether in the text or the margin) of the editions of ‘Tregelles and
of Westcott and Hort have also been carefully noted.
Again: the frequent reference, in the discussion of synonymous terms, to the distinctions
holding in classic usage (as they are laid down by Schmidt in his voluminous work) must not
be regarded as designed to modify the definitions given in the several articles. On the
contrary, the exposition of classic usage is often intended merely to serve as a standard of
comparison by which the direction and degree of a word’s change in meaning can be measured.
When so employed, the information given will often start suggestions alike interesting and
instructive. —
On points of etymology the statements of Professor Grimm have been allowed to stand,
although, in form at least, they often fail to accord with modern philological methods. But
they have been supplemented by references to the works of Curtius and Fick, or even more
frequently, perhaps, to the Etymological Dictionary of Vanicek, as the most compendious
digest of the views of specialists. The meaning of radical words and of the component parts
of compounds is added, except when it is indubitably suggested by the derivative, or when
such words may be found in their proper place in the Lexicon.
The nature and use of the New Testament writings require that the lexicographer should
not be hampered by a too rigid adherence to the rules of scientific lexicography. <A student
often wants to know not so much the inherent meaning of a word as the particular sense it
bears in a given context or discussion: —or, to state the same truth from another point of
view, the lexicographer often cannot assign a particular New Testament reference to one or
another of the acknowledged significations of a word without indicating his exposition of the
passage in which the reference occurs. In such a case he is compelled to assume, at least to
some extent, the functions of the exegete, although he can and should refrain from rehearsing
the general arguments which support the interpretation adopted, as well as from arraying the
objections to opposing interpretations.
Professor Grimm, in his Preface, with reason calls attention to the labor he has expended
upon the explanation of doctrinal terms, while yet guarding himself against encroaching upon
the province of the dogmatic theologian. In this particular the editor has endeavored to enter
into his labors. Any one who consults such articles as aiwv, aidvios, Bactrela Tov Geod etc.,
Sixaros and its cognates, Sédéa, emis, Cun, Odvaros, Geds, Kicpos, K’ptos, rloris, TvEdpa, odpé, Poe, oulw
and its cognates, vids rod dvOpurrov, vids Tod 6cod, Xpurrés, and the like, will find, it is believed, all
the materials needed for a complete exposition of the biblical contents of those terms. On the
comparatively few points respecting which doctrinal opinions still differ, references have been
vill PREFACE.
added to representative discussions on both sides, or to authors whose views may be regarded
as supplementing or correcting those of Professor Grimm.
Convenience often prescribes that the archeological or historical facts requisite to the
understanding of a passage be given the student on the spot, even though he be referred for
fuller information to the works specially devoted to such topics. In this particular, too, the
editor has been guided by the example of his predecessor; yet with the constant exercise of
self-restraint lest the book be encumbered with unnecessary material, and be robbed of that
succinctness which is one of the distinctive excellences of the original.
In making his supplementary references and remarks the editor has been governed at
different times by different considerations, corresponding to the different classes for whose
use the Lexicon is designed. Primarily, indeed, it is intended to satisfy the needs and to
guide the researches of the average student; although the specialist will often find it
serviceable, and on the other hand the beginner will find that he has not been forgotten.
Accordingly, a caveat must be entered against the hasty inference that the mention of a
different interpretation from that given by Professor Grimm always and of necessity implies
dissent from him. It may be intended merely to inform the student that the meaning of the
passage is still in debate. And the particular works selected for reference have been chosen —
now because they seem best suited to supplement the statements or references of the origi-
nal; now because they furnish the most copious references to other discussions of the same
topic ; now because they are familiar works or those to which a student can readily get access;
now, again, because unfamiliar and likely otherwise to escape him altogether.
It is in deference, also, to the wants of the ordinary student that the references to
grammatical works — particularly Winer and Buttmann — have been greatly multiplied. The
expert can easily train his eye to run over them; and yet even for him they may have their
use, not only as giving him the opinion of eminent philologists on a passage in question, but
also as continually recalling his attention to those philological considerations on which the
decision of exegetical questions must mainly rest.
Moreover, in the case of a literature so limited in compass as the New Testament, it
seems undesirable that even a beginner should be subjected to the inconvenience, expense, and
especially the loss of facility, incident to a change of text-books. He will accordingly find
that not only have his wants been heeded in the body of the Lexicon, but that at the close of
the Appendix a list of verbal forms has been added especially for his benefit. The other
portions of the Appendix will furnish students interested in the history of the New Testament
vocabulary, or investigating questions — whether of criticism, authorship, or biblical theology
— which involve its word-lists, with fuller and more trustworthy collections than can be found
elsewhere.
Should I attempt, in conclusion, to record the names of all those who during the many
years in which this work has been preparing have encouraged or assisted me by word or pen,
by counsel or book, the list would be a long one. Express acknowledgments, however, must be
made to Grorce B. Jewert, D.D., of Salem and to Professor W. W. Eaton now of Middlebury
College, Vermont. The former has verified and re-verified ali the biblical and classical
PREFACE. Ix
_ references, besides noting in the main the various readings of the critical texts, and rendering
valuable aid in correcting many of the proofs; the latter has gathered the passages omitted
from words marked with a final asterisk, completed and corrected the enumeration of verbal
forms, catalogued the compound verbs, had an eye to matters of etymology and accentuation,
and in many other particulars given the work the benefit of his conscientious and scholarly
labor. To these names one other would be added were it longer written on earth. Had the
lamented Dr. ABBor been spared to make good his generous offer to read the final proofs, every
‘user of the book would doubtless have had occasion to thank him. He did, however, go
through the manuscript and add with his own hand the variant verse-notation, in accordance
with the results of investigation subsequently given to the learned world in his Excursus on
the subject published in the First Part of the Prolegomena to Tischendorf’s Editio Octava
Critica Major.
To Dr. Caspar Rent Gregory of Leipzig (now Professor-elect at Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore) my thanks are due for the privilege of using the sheets of the Prolegomena
just named in advance of their publication; and to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press,
Oxford, for a similar courtesy in the case of the Seventh Edition of Liddell and Scott’s
Lexicon.
No one can have a keener sense than the editor has of the shortcomings of the present
volume. But he is convinced that whatever supersedes it must be the joint product of several
laborers, having at their command larger resources than he has enjoyed, and ampler leisure
than falls to the lot of the average teacher. Meantime, may the present work so approve itself
to students of the Sacred Volume as to enlist their co-operation with him in ridding it of every
remaining blemish
— iva & doyosg Tod Kupiou Tpéxy Kat Sofdlyrar
J. H. THAYER.
CaMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS.
Dec. 25, 1888.
In issuing this “Corrected Edition” opportunity has been taken not only to revise the
supplementary pages (725 sq.), but to add in the body of the work (as circumstances per-
mitted) an occasional reference to special monographs on Biblical topics which have been
published during the last three years, as well as to the Fourth Volume of Schmidt's Synonymik
(1886), and also to works which (like Meisterhans) have appeared in an improved edition.
The Third edition (1888) of Grimm, however, has yielded little new material; and Dr. Hatch’s
“Essays in Biblical Greek” comes to hand too late to permit references to its valuable dis-
cussions of words to be inserted.
To the correspondents, both in England and this country, who have called my attention to
errata, I beg to express my thanks; and I would earnestly ask all who use the book to send
me similar favors in time to come : — dredés oddev ovdevds pérpov.
April 10, 1889.
tet mee
: ; ee
- vrai ey am) beta, cs ot. huts is ; she ke
7 | ¢ | | | t ; J ; ” .
a : Tine Al; vga de ees . - -~ he
. <P eee eo
q t f
b
& a ‘ ou
fey ‘ ’ >
-— '
t an fi ! ‘ ‘ ;
ie Rin ’ : a olor,
' a -
é ; >on
% : PKK w) 5 iy j , j ha feta Baas art ni mye :
é i] bs » : } 1
lay: ™~, A 5 i 4 ' #4) sven tie
vaste? > ~ =
7
‘ al “i ; é
: =~ s»4
ri L | Lowes
=
: : F ‘ oh Pa so
- gi
— .
~
< ee
P = x
~ aa |
= T
i .
= 4 i
‘ J =
~
— .
>
a
i
= -
——
sS
—
1 =~
f Vas
w >
- = S 7
7 f-
=~ 7
= i
= 8
6 J. Li
~ &
oy
- ay
—< => Ri
, = my
LIST OF ANCIENT AUTHORS
QUOTED OR REFERRED TO IN THE LEXICON.
N. B. In the preparation of this list, free use has been made of the lists in the Lexicons of Liddell and Scott and of Sophocles, also
ef Freund’s Triennium Philologicum (1874) vols. i, and ii., of Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography, of Smith and Wace’s
Dictionary of Christian Biography, of Engelmann’s Bibliotheca Scriptorum Classicorum (8th ed. 1880), and of other current works of
reference. An asterisk (*) before a date denotes birth, an obelisk (+) death.
AcHILLES TaTIUS ..
B.C
Acts of Paul and Thecla, of Pilar. ee
Thomas, of Peter and Paul, of Renae
bas, etc., at the earliest from
IA LDAN oo chemo ns) fo te” 'e
IABSOHINES! ..iet over ie va Us
PAE SOHYEUS cl) se Vel emetechrs
INE SORE Ure cre: tes <6. Fel te. se
ANCE RCS) 30 ey ae ee ae
AGATHARCHIDES . .-. .
ALCAEUS MYTILENAEUS . .
INECIPHRONG-D es clue 6
FASTGMDANiars PEs ie) Reacts mcs
ALEXANDER APHRODISIENSIS
INGO AG o
AmBrosE, Bp. of Milan. anes
AMMIANUS MARCELLINUS .
Ammonivs, the grammarian .
ANIAOREON “Wn co) ey uisl 6. 3 ove
ANAXANDRIDES . .. 6 «
ANAXIMANDER. .« 2. 6 « «
IANDOCIDES st «6 er
TANIDTR IVAN ESS alte! sfuc 60) 0 ace
ANTIPHON . . seas
ANTONINUS, M. AURELIUS .
Apo.tLoporus of Athens . .
APpoLLonius Dyscotus . .
APOLLONIUS RHODIUS. . .
INS Se Sh. ee ee PC
APPULEIUS . . .
on 6345
#525, 1456
570
1172
610
610
350
530
350
580
405
380
412
140
200
AQUILA (translator of the O. T. oa 8
ANTES ae ee ere Ss
ARCHILOCHUS .
ARCHIMEDES, the athenoician A
IN AS OGWES ed. to 6G. B
270
700
250
- ¢,.400
{
A.D.
500 ?
2d cent. on
c. 180
c. 500
200 ?
200
374
+c. 400
390
+180
140
150
160
2d cent. (under
rian.)
1 But the current Fables are not his; on the History of Greek
Fable, see Rutherford, Babrius, Introd. ch. ii.
2 Only a few fragments of the odes ascribed to him are genuine.
B.O.
PARE TAR US cums Soy "oh ss ito atet a onmts
ARISTAENETUS! 0) ee 6 1. vomits
FARIGTEOAS oeeltatitedlron os ace ol oun 270
ARISTIDES, P. AELIUS .... .
ARISTOPHANES. . . . . . “444, 380
ARISTOPHANES, the ee 5 200
ARISTOTLE | *384, 322
ARRIAN (pupil and frend of ies)
ARTEMIDORUS DaLpiIaNnus (oneiro-
CMH) so “5 0 0 B Ou lo Go Cc
INGSEUWSINS UES Go 6 G& OG OO 6
ATHENAEUS, the grammarian .. .
ATHENAGORAS of Athens . ... .
AUGUSTINE, Bp. of Hippo. . .. .
Avsonius, Decimus Maenus .
Baszrius (see Rutherford, Babrius, lace
chi.) . .... ~. « © (some say 50?)
BarnaBASs, Epistle written . . . .
Baruch, Apocryphal Book of . . «. .
IEESPUSLAINOS 9 & oo OO oO Gx
BasiL THE GREAT, Bp..of Cesarea .
Basti of Seleucia. . . . + «= -
Bel and the Dragon. . ». « « « « 2dcent.?
IO Ag ced 6 6 OK iO 200
CaEsar, GAIUS UL tes - « tMarch 15, 44
CALLIMACHUS ... .- aes 260
Canons and Constitutions, osalice
CAPITOLINUS, JULIUS (one of the “ Hist.
4 ”
August. scriptores sex”) . .. .
(Crag eS oe OF
(Chan siniitie Sey mo oo boo o
A.D.
80?
450?
160
*c. 100
160
1373
228
1772
+430
tc. 390
c. 225
c. 100?
c. 752
c. 900
1379
450
3d and 4th cent.
c. 310
1050
1 But his letter is spurious; see Hody, De Bibl. text. orig. 1. i.;
A. Kurz, Arist. ep. etc (Bern 1872).
2 The law-book of the Byzantine Empire, founded upon the work
of Justinian and consisting of sixty books.
It was begun under
the emperor Basil of Macedonia (886), completed under his son
Leo, and revised in 945 under Constantine Porphyrogenitus; (ed.
Heimbach, 6 vols. 1833-70).
ANCIENT AUTHORS.
B.C.
Cexsus, A. Cornewius, the medical
WIILGTME <a UMio ae tlt et iis) uisy tee cs Maou s
(Oo 48 ay alee ety Boe em Chg 820
CHARITON ee sen co) ee eel or ce
Curysierus of Tyana (in Athenaeus)
Curysostom, D10, the orator, see Dio Chrys.
Curysostom, Joun, Bp. of Constan-
tiNOPle ses i we) ue) mes Ee
CICERO eerie ens ae . tDec. 7, 48
Cremens ALEXANDRINUS. . + + =
Ciemens Romanvs, Epistle written -
CLEOMEDES)..- a welemuctuig ss) Sues
COLUMEDLAW Gr." suet en fon en eres
ConsTANTINUS PORPHYROGENITUS,
emperorfrom . ... <«+ « «
Constitutiones apostolicae. . . + + «
CRATINUS 0s os es we «1488
(CGHBIONS 6 oc e.g 6S 6 6 G 6 411
(QHUTINS. “a GS ok God leds 6 Be 401
CURTIUS Pie. Ne cleus bonus fiom CMe e Me
CXPREANE: treme Were t reece eras ts
Cyrit of Alexandria ..... «
Cyripotderusaleom’ 5). <5 « «
D)HMOCRINUSH Yom cis me) os) Gens cote 420
DEMOSTHENES. . 3 s « . « « “880, 1322
Dexiprus, the historian . ... .
Dipymus of Alexandria .....
DTOMCASSTUS 1. ie eset ss. 6 ue
Dio CurysostOM ... .-. .
DTOCLES memeemes Nes teers as Beamsclve. cc 470
IDTODORUS SICULUS wa elie) a> ec « 40
Diogenes LAERTIUS .... .
Dioenetus, Epistleto . . .. .
Dionysius Psreupo-AREOPAGITA . .
Dionysius of Halicarnassus. . . . 30
Dionysius PERIEGETES ...
DioscoripEs .. 5
IDyawnGa: Gea Aes ae 300
Ecclesiasticus (Wisdom of Jeans the
Son of Sirach; Grk. trans.) . . . ¢. 1322
INNIS gue mci deste Actes . 7169
Enoch, Bookof . . . ; 2d cent. on
ErHreM Syrus .. tare 5
'PTOHARMUS» ss) eee von ae Sede 480
PLOT TUS siete) lst cumteyine ane
MIPICURUS a euuelus teme - «+ *8342, +270
EPIMENIDES. . ... a DG, 600
EprpHantius, Bp. of Salamis 5 5 x
ERATOSTHENES. . - . . fe. 196
Esdras, First Book of (Vileate: Third) 1st cent. 2
Esdras, Second Book of (Vulgate Fourth)
Esther, Additionsto . .... . 2dcent.?2
Etymologicum Magnum .... .
HUBULUS Tom ismecnn cmrenrs ate eure 350
(EU OLUD gieees earthed oth Smee ot ee oe 300
Iwao GS oO To o
EURIPIDES . . .
Eusesivs, Bp. of Caesarea 1 : aia
Evstarares of Constantinople, gram.
WEESEETY Go! Geng ge ube
- 429
- *480, 1406
XII
A.D. B.C.
Evruymivs ZicaBenus or Zigadenus
20 (Zygadenus). . - «+ « « « «
ELORUS, JULIUS «©. = «ee os
450? GALEN. . . ° .
q GELLIUS, Actus "(author of Noctes
Atticae) . « « 2 « © © © © «
GENESIUS .. at elas
+407 Geoponica (20 bia. on " agriculture com.
piled by Cassianus Bassus). . . .
200 Germanus of Constantinople, the
93-97 Me! ee Do oH 9g oo Oo
100? Goreras of Leontini. . . 5 5 = = 480
50 Greeoory of Nazianzus . . 2. . « -
Grigory of Nyssa . . «2 « « @
911-959 Harrocration (lexicon to the Ten
3d and 4th cent. Attic Orators) . 2 2. 6 «+ « « «
IFECATAK US.) 610) 1-0 sont eee 510
Heeesiprus (quoted in Eusebius) . .
Hexioporus, Bp. of Tricca in Thessaly
50 Herac ives Ponrticts (but the Alleg.
$257 Homer. are spurious). . ... - 390
+444 HE RAGLUTUS aes ns onsen meme 500
1386 1a boa) RA Si My AGC
debore busi on Gmc O GG « oe 432
HERMOGENES . - « « + © © « =
e. 270 Hero ALEXANDRINUS . . + + © « 250
c. 895 Heropian, the grammarian . .. .
200 Heropian, the historian .. -..
100 HERODOTUS. << (+ «fe ic (ete) 3404551405
HsioD.—.—<—- «ies fo eel OOO
Hesycuivs of Alexandria, the lexicog-
c. 200 ENN Gee OG GO UGS
2dor3d cent | HIEROCLES . . . + 6 eee
500 ? HiERONYMUS, see Neroiaer
[pheeonoy) Sei GG GO Wo.
300 ? HIPPOGRATHS %~/ <i 4) fe 430
100% HiPPOLYDUSM@. nis Wehh« eee mer
UT PRON ss, (esos) toto 540
Hrirtrvs (the continuator of Caesar’s
Commentaries)". = = © fos0 .m T43
ELOMER Wien outed cs BA OE bin ion baeme tts)
HoRaPo.ito, grammarian . Sy locus
c. 375 HORACE. gos. eaten te 8
Isha G iG HA be 6 6 || eRe
100 IenaTIUS. . . Le hese ame
TRENAEUS, Bp. of Tye Se Ge
TSAWUS.27 ws es tel) cree ne ne ee 370
1403 Isrporus Hispatensis, Bp. of Seville
IEW oe neg Go 0 6 bo ESTA CSE
JAMBLICHUS. . : :
Istcent.? | Jeremiah, Ep. of (6th ci of Baruch)
JEROME (Sophronius (?) Eusebius Hie-
1000 ? OMA G Gg 6 no Sorc
JOANNES DAMASCENUS . ose
JOANNES MoscoHus ..... . «
JOSEPHUS) Geuaet ne, se) ene
Judith. . ., eg a - . 175-100
tc. 340 JuLiIaNn, Roman emperor oom F
Justinian, Roman emperor from . .
1160
eee
~ Called Pamphili (as friend of the martyr Pamphilus).
JUSTIN, the historian
Justin Martyr .
JUVENAL. ¢.
ANCIENT AUTHORS
A.D,
450
360
400 ?
ce. 110
178
1636
300
Ist cent. $
$420
730
t620
75
361-363
527-565
150?
150
100
ANCIENT AUTHORS.
UROTANTDEUS | Ul 1s ais, Wl 8 cs) 5) Ve) bistne
Lampripius, the historian. ... .
Leo ‘Philosophus’,emperor. . . .
Lisantivs, the rhetorician. . . . .
WORE BS oie ee kee tae Oe
BOE GoGo 6 O60 6 6
HGON GUS Mrmr sss) o Sis se ome tes
Lucan, the epic poet. . 2 2.
Lucian of Samosata, the satirist . .
Lucixivs, the Roman satirist . . .
Lucretius, the Roman poet... .
USY.COPHRONiCs = cans me teetee cine irs
Lycureus of Athens, the orator . .
ALY NOBUS es 6 6 -- AR oty ist hice
Lystas, the Auienng ener. opened
VERANO ING Sha on iad ect Gabteet
IDSEVEQNTIS. G@ Bib oo eole es Ones
Macarius . . altel ol chs
Maccabees, First Book of A ee
Maccabees, Second Bookof.... .
Maccabees, Third Bookof .- .. .
Maccabees, Fourth Bookof. . . .
Macuon.. . i he ab
NACROBIUS#-0 3) oar 6) t's site remit
Matauas, Joun, the anriatiat Ps
Mamnasses, Prayerof. ....
Manerno, the Egyptian priest . . .
MAR CTON Min. Ss lisa ie.) Sere
MAxIMos LY REUSe Ser rsh Oc:
Mera, Pomronius, the Roman geog-
rapher=.) = 5G. tn Gn Ac
MELEAGER, the founder of the epi-
gram. anthologies . . . .. . .
MrnirO; bp. of Sardis) 59... st.
MENANDER, the poet. . . . ...
MenanDer, the Byzantine historian .
Mimnermus, the poet ......
Morris, the “ Atticist” and lexicog-
TNS 6 ogend o ToS ce iGeeo ce a
WIOSCHION EEC Sts mr ener tet Tene eh 6
IMOSCHUS ME Cnseno tte: Misi srt/e is) fs
Musonius Rurus .......
INERUDOSUUS sme cee Nise sone es a te
INEEOS Meee tmeme es her ke Fete Bees oo, be
INTOANDEHR (0c. «: cre) 6) et ee) 6
Niceruorvs, patriarch of Constanti-
NOPLCWEN UN puesto Nhe noe Ge Bret Ne te
Nicreruorus Brrennivs, the histo-
WON 6 9 6 € oo ¢ Sate ee
NicrrHorus GREGORAS, Byzantine his-
torian . . .
Nicreras hcominaaue (algo Chionistes),
Byzantine historian . .
Nicodemus, Gospel of, see Acta of Pilate
Nicotaus DaMAScENUS .
Nicomacuus GmRASENUS. . .
Nitus, the pupil and friend of Soha
Chrysostom .. .
Nonnus of Panopolis in , Upper Reyph
the poet . . .... - ae
Numenivus of Apameia, the philoso.
pher (as quoted by Origen). . . -
B.C.
*59
1103
55
c. 270
1329
800
410
434
105-63 ?
c. 752
Ist. cent ?
280
325
14
A.D.
310
310
886
350
yi
250
400 2
165
160 2
c. 350
c. 40?
420
600 ?
140
45
ce. 175
583
2d cent.
110?
66
400?
+828
$1137
+1359
1200
50
420
500 ?
c. 150
XII
B.C.
NumeEntus (as quoted by Athen.) . . c. 350
OceLLtus Lucanus . ...... 400?
Orcumentus, Bp. of Trica . . . .
Otymproporus, the Neo-Platonic phi-
OED NOR Bg eh we Be SoBe Oe
Oppian of Anazarbus in Cilicia (auth.
of the aAveurixd) 6. .
Oppian of Apameia in Syria (anth. of
the muvnyettkd) « 2 6 6 2 ww
CHIC ho oe OS 2G GG. o
OROSTUSHEAULUS <uncmesins me ouo mons
OMPROLUD 6 Fn ho & Oo 0
Opti cl fp Wate Se oe oe
PALAEPHATUS . . « . . q
Papias, Bp. of Hierapolis, first half of .
PAUSANIAS#\. (ls) ‘olmed le) Nem celufeimetets
PeTRus ALEXANDRINUS . . » ..
PuHavaris, spurious epistles of . . .
PsHavorinus, Varinus! ....
PHILEMON, COMICUS) sel ec) elk erere
JBN 5 & & J G6 60.0 9 6
IeeoewOO MN 4 GO Oo oto o Gul
PHILOSTRATUS. . Sean mor OG
PHOOKLIDES 5. ispae ah estas
PsEuDO-PHOCYLIDES (in the Sibyl.
Tiley Gb vid) 9. 2 0 SG 0. 0. 0
Puorrus (Patriarch of Constantinople)
Puryrnicuos, the grammarian . . .
PHYLARCHUS .. .« aweei Ns are 210
Pinpar . . *521(4 ma after Aeschylus), {441
Prato, Comicus, contemporary of Ari-
stophanes. . . ah, oh Tonehe™ sthb's 427
Prato, the phlloconher Sa em ion 427511542;
IWIN. Came tm, Oo a Oo D+ {ters
Puiny the elder, the naturalist . . .
Puiny the younger, the nephew and
adopted son of the preceding . . .
Prorinvus, the philosopher
PLUTARCH . . « & = C
Pou.ux, author of ie Brannoriese ane
PoryYaENus, author of the otparnyh-
OED e ancos sows! rely sl pielinre! ACT sane @
POGYBIUSie itt) ns
IRIH CNN 69.4 GO 0-4 0 Oo o & ¢
Porrurry, pupil of Plotinus. .
PosmpIPPUS. ... - a0
Posipontus, philosopher (teacher of
Ciceroand Pompey) - - --.- + 78
Procuius, philosopher . ... »
Hows oC 4 6 5 a o oO Ss
Protevangelium Jacoti . . . « +
Psalter of Solomon. . » « « + +
Psexxus the younger, philosopher .
Protemy, the geographer. . . « «
PYTHAGORAS . =. - be yo 80
QUINTILIAN, iMiocoricinus teacher ©
Pliny the younger. . . - « -
Quintus SMYRNAEUS . . ». « - -
50
540
$122
280
.*48, t16
. 63-48 7
531
ANCIENT AUTHORS.
A.D.
89
237
1st cent. ?
850
180
t79
$113
+270
+120
180
163
4155, Feb.23
270
450
2d cent.
1050
160
+95
380 ?
1 The Latin name of the Italian Guarino Favorino, who died
A. D. 1537, and was the author of a Greek Lexicon compiled mainly
from Suidas, Hesychius, Harpocration, Eustathius, and Phryni-
chus. ist ed. Rome, 1523, and often elsewhere since.
ANCIENT AUTHORS.
B.C.
SALLusT . . ; *86, 135
Sapientia (Sal.), see aivisdou of Solomon.
SarpPHo 7
Seneca, L. Annies the philosopher
(son of the rhetorician)
Septuagint, Greek translation of 0. T. @:
Sextus Empiricus
Sibylline Oracles, of various dates, rang-
ing perhapsfrom ...... .-
Sizrus Irayicus, poet. . ... .
Simonipes of Amorgos, “ Iambo-
graphus” . . :
Simonipes of Ceos (author of the of
taph on the Spartans that fell at
UME TG o 6 6 oo Go
Srmp.icius, the commentator on Aris-
totle and Epictetus ..... ©
Sirach, see Ecclesiasticus.
Socrates ‘Scholasticus’, of Constan-
tinople, historian . .
Socratss (in Stobaeus) . ... -
Soxinvs, surnamed Polyhistor . .
Solomon, Psalms of, see Psalter ete.
Solomon, Wisdom of, see Wisdom ete.
Soton, the lawgiver and poet. . . . 594
Song of the Three Children. . . . 2d cent.?
610
280-150
170
693
525
SOO) 6 6 6 o oo oo a ER CUS
Sopuronius of Damascus. .. .
SOmonr «(om ug deo Go o& SG ?
SozomeEn, historian . .. .. e
Srartius, the Roman poet. . . . .
SrToparEvs, i.e. John of Stobi in Mace-
donia (compiler of Anthol.) . . .
Srrapo, the geographer . ... . *66
SrraTon, epigrammatists . . . . .
SHOWUURE COMO G oc ag 6 6 407
Surronivs, the historian, friend of
Jedbany GINS) YOY 5 Go oe oo
Suipas, the lexicographer. . . ..
BYR 56 6 6 65 0 5 6 6 oc ROC
Symmacuus (translator of the O. T.
iio Ced)) 6 go 6 & Oo OG Oo 6
Synesius, pagan philosopher and
bishop of Ptolemais . .....
LUGE 6 ob Goo oo 6 6 6
TaTIAN . mete
Teaching of the Troelbe: Apeics| 6 Cc
FLERENOR. oes cs temo ee 6c 4159
A.D.
165
225 ?
to the 4th cent.
7101
439
300 ?
638
450
$96
500 ?
$24
150?
+160
1100?
200?
410
te.117
c. 160
2d cent. ?
XIV
TERTULLIAN . « « © « « o£
Testaments of the Twelve Pao mrs
THEAGES. . « « © © « © #¢ « »@
THEMISTIUS <5 «(s,s 1s) 46 cotmenees
THEOCRITUS
THEODORET. «© « «© © © © © © @
Turoporus METOCHITA . . + « «
Turoporion (translator of O. T. into
Greek) before <= <<) @i\eqpe ee
THHOGNIS: (28bb ees Peseias (ommaniemne
TuEopHitus, Bp. of Antioch. . . .
THEOPHRASTUS, pupil and successor of
Aristotle . . . ote
THEOPHYLACT, Abp. of Bulgaria ae
THEOPHYLACT SIMOCATTA . ~~ «
Tuomas MacisTer, lexicographer and
grammarian}. - = - <= « « «6
THUCYDIDES « » = >
TiBpuLLUs) Voom = ee Siar. BIC
TimaeEvs, the historian of Sicily G0
Timaeus the Sophist, author of Lexicon
to Plato .)>-7T- Stoo a
TimaeEus of Locri, Pythagorean phi-
LONG oo oc 6 6 mao
Timon, the “ pando me or satirist .
TIMOCLES . + « + “oa Boe
SUS Re one eae oO RO
TrRYPHIODORUS, a versifier ... .
Tzerzes, Byzantine grammarian and
POCE Ley) 6) 20 ie: | <5! Reto? eteweren i) oes
VaLerRius Maximus .. .
Varro, ‘vir Romanorum eruditissi-
mus 2/(Quintil:) s.r mcnne
VEGETIUS, on the artof war. ...
NGwOH GB GC ae
Virruvivs, the only pas ee on
architecture . . . c
Voriscus, historian (cf. Capi lnes |e
Wisdom of Solomon (abbr. Sap.) . .
XENOPHANES, founder of the Eleatic
WMG 6 6 BO 6 6 & a
XENOPHON . .. . . (Anabasis)
XENOPHON of Ephesus, romancer . .
Zeno of Citium .... . 59
ZENODOTUS, first librarian at ieee
Gig G= S yg Sues! tet Ss, eee
ZONARAS, the chronicler om 5 6 8
Zostmvus, Roman historian ... .
. DY ey Kae yt oe 0 ie
BO
280
322
423
18
260
3875?
c. 279
3850
c. 200?
ANCIENT AUTHORS.
A.D.
+220?
c. 125%
355
420
1300
160
180
1078
610
1310
250 ?
c. 310
400 ?
1118
420
LIST OF BOOKS
REFERRED TO MERELY BY THEIR AUTHOR’S NAME OR BY SOME EXTREME
ABRIDGMENT OF THE TITLE.
Alberti = Joannes Alberti, Observationes Philologicae in
sacros Novi Foederis Libros. Lugd. Bat., 1725.
Aristotle: when pages are cited, the reference is to the
edition of the Berlin Academy (edited by Bekker and
Brandis ; index by Bonitz) 5 vols. 4to, 1831-1870. Of the
Rhetoric, Sandys’s edition of Cope (3 vols., Cambridge,
1877) has been used.
Baumlein = W. Baumlein, Untersuchungen iiber griechi-
sche Partikeln. Stuttgart, 1861.
B.D. = Dr. William Smith’s Dictionary of the Bible, 3 vols.
London, 1860-64. The American.edition (4 vols., N. Y.
1868-1870), revised and edited by Professors Hackett and
Abbot, has been the edition used, and is occasionally
referred to by the abbreviation “ Am. ed.”
BB. DD. = Bible Dictionaries: — comprising especially the
work just named, and the third edition of Kitto’s Cyclo-
pedia of Biblical Literature, edited by Dr. W. L. Alex-
ander: 3 vols., Edinburgh, 1870.
Buhdy.= G. Bernhardy, Wissenschaftliche Syntax der
Griechischen Sprache. Berlin, 1829.
B. = Alexander Buttmann, Grammar of the New Testament
Greek. (Authorized Translation with numerous Addi-
tions and Corrections by the Author: Andover, 1873.)
Unless otherwise indicated, the reference is to the page
of the translation, with the corresponding nage of the
German original added in a parenthesis.
Bitm. Ausf. Spr. or Sprehl. = Philipp Buttmann, Ausfihr-
liche Griechische Sprachlehre. (2d ed., Ist vol. 1830, 2d
vol, 1839.)
Bttm. Gram. = Philipp Buttmann’s Griechische Gram-
matik. The edition used (though not the latest) is the
twenty-first (edited by Alexander Buttmann: Berlin,
1863). Its sections agree with those of the eighteenth
edition, translated by Dr. Robinson and published by
Harper & Brothers, 1851. Whenthe page is given, the
translation is referred to.
Bttm. Lexil. = Philipp Buttmann’s Lexilogus u. s. w. (Ist
vol. 2d ed. and 2d vol. Berlin, 1825.) The work was
translated and edited by J. R. Fishlake, and issued in one
volume by John Murray, London, 1836.
*Bible Educator” =a collection (with the preceding name)
of miscellaneous papers on biblical topics by various
writers under the editorship of Rev. Professor E. H.
Plumptre, and published in 4 vols. (without date) by
Cassell, Petter, and Galpin.
Chandler = Henry W. Chandler, A Practical Introduction to
Greek Accentuation. Second edition, revised: Oxford,
1881.
Cremer = Hermann Cremer, Biblisch-theologisches Wérter-
buch der Neutestamentlichen Gracitat. ‘Third greatly
enlarged and improved Edition’: Gotha, 1883. Of the
‘Fourth enlarged and improved Edition’ nine parts
(comprising nearly two thirds of the work) have come to
hand, and are occasionally referred to. A translation
of the second German edition was published in 1878
by the Messrs. Clark.
Curtius = Georg Curtius, Grundziige der Griechischen Ety-
mologie. Fifth edition, with the co-operation of Ernst
Windisch: Leipzig, 1879.
Dict. of Antiq. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiqui-
ties. Edited by Dr. William Smith. Second edition:
Boston and London, 1869, also 1873.
Dict. of Biog. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography
and Mythology. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 3 vols.
Boston and London, 1849.
Dict. of Chris. Antiq. = A Dictionary of Christian Antiqui-
ties, being a Continuation of the Dictionary of the Bible.
Edited by Dr. William Smith and Professor Samuel
Cheetham. 2 vols. 1875-1880.
Dict. of Chris. Biog. = A Dictionary of Christian Biogra-
phy, Literature, Sects and Doctrines; etc. Edited by
Dr. William Smith and Professor Henry Wace: vol.
i. 1877; vol. ii. 1880; vol. iii, 1882; (not yet complete).
Dict. of Geogr. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geogra-
phy. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 2 vols. 1854-1857.
Edersheim = Alfred Edersheim, The Life and Times of
Jesus the Messiah. 2 vols. Second edition, stereotyped.
London and New York, 1884.
Elsner = J. Elsner, Observationes sacrae in. Novi Foederis
libros etc. 2 vols., Traj. ad Rhen. 1720, 1728.
Etym. Magn.=the Etymologicum Magnum (see List of
Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford’s edition (1 vol. folio,
Oxford, 1848) has been used.
Fick = August Fick, Vergleichendes Worterbuch der In.
dogermanischen Sprachen. Third edition. 4 vols. Got
tingen, 1874-1876.
List oF Books.
Géttling = Carl Goettling, Allgemeine Lehre vom Accent
der griechischen Sprache. Jena, 1835.
Goodwin = W. W. Goodwin, Syntax of the Moods and
Tenses of the Greek Verb. 4th edition revised. Boston
and Cambridge, 1871.
Graecus Venetus—=the Greek version of the Pentateuch,
Prov., Ruth, Canticles, Eccl., Lam., Dan., according to a
unique MS. in the Library of St. Mark’s, Venice ; edited
by O. v. Gebhardt. Lips. 1875, 8vo pp. 592.
Green =Thomas Sheldon Green, A Treatise on the Grammar
of the New Testament etc. etc. A new Edition. Lon-
don, Samuel Bagster and Sons, 1862.
Also, by the same author “Critical Notes on the New
Testament, supplementary to his Treatise on the Gram-
mar of the New Testament Dialect.” London, Samuel
Bagster and Sons, 1867. }
Hamburger=J. Hamburger, Real-Encyclopadie fiir Bibel und
Talmud. Strelitz. First Part 1870; Second Part 1883.
Herm. ad Vig., see Vig. ed. Herm.
Herzog = Real-Encyklopiidie fiir Protestantische Theologie
und Kirche. Edited by Herzog. 21 vols. with index,
1854-1868. ; :
Herzog 2 or ed. 2 =a second edition of the above (edited by
Herzog t, Plitt ,and Hauck), begun in 1877 and not yet
complete.
Hesych. = Hesychius (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.)
The edition used is that of M. Schmidt (5 vols. Jena,
1858-1868).
Jelf= W. E. Jelf, A Grammar of the Greek Language.
Third edition. Oxford and London, 2 vols. 1861. (Sub-
sequent editions have been issued, but without, it is
believed, material alteration.)
Kautzsch = EL. Kautzsch, Grammatik des Biblisch-Aramié-
ischen. Leipzig, 1884.
Keim = Theodor Keim, Geschichte Jesu von Nazara u. s. w.
8 vols. Ziirich, 1867-1872.
Klotz ad Devar. = Matthaeus Devarius, Liber de Graecae
Linguae Particulis, ed. R. Klotz, Lips., vol. i. 1835, vol.
li. sect. 1, 1840, vol. ii. sect. 2, 1842.
Krebs, Observy. = J. T. Krebsii Observationes in Nov. Test.
e Flavio Josepho. Lips. 1755.
Kriiger = K. W. Kriiger, Griechische Sprachlehre fiir Schu-
len. Fourth improved and enlarged edition, 1861 sq.
Kypke, Observv. = G. D. Kypke, Observationes sacrae in
Novi Foederis libros ex auctoribus potissimum Graecis et
antiquitatibus. 2 vols, Wratis]. 1755.
L. and S.= Liddell and Scott, Greek-English Lexicon etc.
Seventh edition, 1883.
Lob. ad Phryn., see Phryn. ed. Lob.
Loesner = C. F. Loesneri Observationes ad Novum Test. e
Philone Alexandrino. Lips. 1777.
Lghtft.= Dr. John Lightfoot, the learned Hebraist of the
17th century.
Bp. Lghtft. = J. B. Lightfoot, D.D., Bishop of Durham; the
8th edition of his commentary on the Epistle to the Gala-
tians is the one referred to, the 7th edition of his com-
mentary on Philippians, the 7th edition of his commen-
tary on Colossians and Philemon.
Lipsius = K. H. A. Lipsius, Grammatische Untersuchungen
iiber die Biblische Gracitat (edited by Prof. R. A. Lip-
sius, the author’s son). Leipzig, 1863.
Matthiae = August Matthid, Ausfihrlich Griechische Gram-
matik. Third edition, 3 Pts., Leipz. 1835,
xVI
List oF Books.
McC. and S.—McClintock and Strong's Cyclopedia of
Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical Literature. 10
vols. 1867-1881; with Supplement, vol. i. (1885), vol. ii.
with Addenda (1887). New York: Harper and Brothers.
Meisterhans = K. Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen
Inschriften. Berlin, 1885. (2d edition, 1888.)
Mullach= F. W. A. Mullach, Grammatik der Griechischen
Vulgarsprache u. s. w. Berlin, 1856.
Munthe= C. F’. Munthe, Observationes philolog. in sacros
Nov. Test. libros ex Diod. Sic. collectae etc. (Hafn. et
Lips. 1755.)
Palairet = EL. Palairet, Observationes philol.-crit. in sacros
Novi Foederis libros ete. Lugd. Bat. 1752.
Pape= W Pape, Griechisch-Deutsches Handworterbuch.
Second edition. 2 vols. Brunswick, 1866. A continuation
of the preceding work is the “ Woérterbuch der Griechi-
schen Eigennamen.” Third edition, edited by G. E. Ben-
seler. 1863-1870.
Passow = Franz Passow’s Handworterbuch der Griechischen
Sprache as re-edited by Rost, Palm, and others. Leipz.
1841-1857.
Phryn. ed. Lob.=Phrynichi Eclogae Nominum et Verbo-
rum Atticorum etc. as edited by C. A. Lobeck. Leipzig,
1820. (Cf. Rutherford.)
Poll. = Pollux (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) The
edition used is that published at Amsterdam, 1 vol. folio,
1706. (The most serviceable is that of William Dindorf,
5 vols. 8vo, Leipzig, 1824.)
Pss. of Sol. = Psalter of Solomon; see List of Ancient
Authors, etc.
Raphel= G. Raphelii annotationes in Sacram Scripturam
.».ex Xen., Polyb., Arrian., et Herodoto collectae. 2
vols. Lugd. Bat. 1747.
Riddell, Platonic Idioms= A Digest of Idioms given as an
Appendix to “ The Apology of Plato” as edited by the
Rev. James Riddell, M. A.; Oxford, 1867.
Riehm (or Riehm, HWB.) = Handworterbuch des Biblischen
Altertums u.s.w. edited by Professor Edward C. A.
Riehm in nineteen parts (2 vols.) 1875-1884.
Rutherford, New Phryn.= The New Phrynichus, being a
revised text of the Ecloga of the Grammarian Phryni-
chus, etc., by W. Gunion Rutherford. London, 1881.
Schaff-Herzog = A Religious Encyclopedia etc. by Philip
Schaff and associates. 3 vols. 1882-1884. Funk and
Wagnalls, New York. Revised edition, 1887.
Schenkel (or Schenkel, BL.) = Bibel-Lexikon u. s. w. edited
by Professor Daniel Schenkel. 5 vols. Leipz. 1869-1875.
Schmidt = J. H. Heinrich Schmidt, Synonymik der Griechi-
schen Sprache. 4 vols. Leipz. 1876, 1878, 1879, 1886.
Schéttgen = Christiani Schoettgenii Horae Hebraicae et Tal-
mudicae etc. 2vols. Dresden and Leipzig, 1733, 1742.
Schiirer = Emil Schiirer, Lehrbuch der Neutestamentlichen
Zeitgeschichte. Leipzig, 1874. The “Second Part” of a
new and revised edition has already appeared under the
title of Geschichte des Jiidischen Volkes im Zeitalter
Jesu Christi, and to this new edition (for the portion of
the original work which it covers) the references have
been made, although for convenience the title of the
first edition has been retained. An English translation
is appearing at Edinburgh (T. and T. Clark).
Scrivener, F. H. A.: — A Plain Introduction to the Criticism
of the New Testament etc. Third Edition. Cambridge
and London, 1883.
List or Books.
Bezae Codex Cantabrigiensis ete. Cambridge and
London, 1864.
A Full Collation of the Codex Sinaiticus with the
Received Text of the New Testament ete. Second
Edition, Revised. Cambridge and London, 1867.
Six Lectures on the Text of the New Testament ete.
Cambridge and London, 1875.
Sept.—the translation of the Old Testament into Greek
known as the Septuagint. Unless otherwise stated, the
sixth edition of Tischendorf’s text (edited by Nestle) is
referred to ; 2 vols. (with supplement), Leipzig, 1880. The
double verse-notation occasionally given in the Apocry-
phal books has reference to the edition of the Apocrypha
and select Pseudepigrapha by O. F. Fritzsche; Leipzig,
1871. Readings peculiar to the Complutensian, Aldine,
Vatican, or Alexandrian form of the text are marked
respectively by an appended Comp., Ald., Vat., Alex.
For the first two the testimony of the edition of Lam-
bert Bos, Franck. 1709, has been relied on.
The abbreviations Aq., Symm., Theod. or Theodot.,
appended to a reference to the O. T. denote respectively
the Greek versions ascribed to Aquila, Symmachus, and
Theodotion ; see List of Ancient Authors, etc.
“Lag.” designates the text as edited by Paul Lagarde,
of which the first half appeared at Gottingen in 1883.
Soph. = E. A. Sophocles, Greek Lexicon of the Roman and
Byzantine Periods (from B.c. 146 to a.p. 1100.) Bos-
ton: Little, Brown & Co. 1870. The forerunner (once
or twice referred to) of the above work bears the title
“A Glossary of Later and Byzantine Greek. Forming
vol. vii. (new series) of the Memoirs of the American
Academy.” Cambridge, 1860.
Steph. Thes. =the “ Thesaurus Graecae Linguae” of Henry
Stephen as edited by Hase and the Dindorfs. 8 vois.
Paris, 1831-1865. Occasionally the London (Valpy’s)
edition (1816-1826) of the same work has been referred
to.
Suid. = Suidas (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford’s
edition (2 vols. folio, Oxford, 1834) has been followed.
‘Teaching ’=The Teaching of the Twelve Apostles (Ac
daxh tev Sddexa dxootéAwy.) The edition of Harnack
XVII
List oF Books.
(in Gebhardt and Harnack’s Texte und Untersuchungen
u.s.w. Second vol., Pts. i. and ii., Leipzig 1884) has
been followed, together with his division of the chapters
into verses.
Thiersch= Friedrich Thiersch, Griechische Grammatik u. s. w.
Third edition. Leipzig, 1826.
Trench = Abp. R. C. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testa
ment. Ninth edition, improved. London, 1880.
Vaniéek = Alois Vaniéek, Griechisch-Lateinisches Etymolo-
gisches Worterbuch. 2 vols. Leipz. 1877.
By the same author is “ Fremdworter im Griechischen
und Lateinischen.” Leipzig, 1878.
Veitch = William Veitch, Greek Verbs irregular and de-
fective, etc. New Edition. Oxford, 1879.
Vig. ed. Herm.= Vigeri de praecipuis Graecae dictionis
Idiotismis. Edited by G. Hermann. Fourth edition.
Leipzig, 1834. A meagre abridgment and translation by
Rev. John Seager was published at London in 1828.
Vulg. =the translation into Latin known as the Vulgate.
Professor Tischendorf’s edition (Leipzig, 1864) has been
followed.
Wetst. or Wetstein=J. J. Wetstein’s Novum Testamen-
tum Graecum ete. 2vols. folio. Amsterdam, 1751, 1752.
W.= G. B. Winer, Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testa-
ment etc. Revised and Authorized Translation of the
seventh (German) edition of the original, edited by Liine-
mann; Andover, 1883. Unless otherwise indicated, it is
referred to by pages, the corresponding page of the orig-
inal being added in a parenthesis. When Dr. Moulton’s
translation of the sixth German edition is referred to,
that fact is stated.
Win. RWB.= G. B. Winer, Biblisches Realw6rterbuch
u.s.w. ‘Third edition. 2 vols., Leipzig and New York,
1849.
Win. De verb. Comp. etc. = G. B. Winer, De verborum
cum praepositionibus compositorum in Novo Testamente
usu. Five academic programs ; Leipzig, 1843.
Other titles, it is believed, are so fully given as to be easily
verifiable.
EXPLANATIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS.
As respects Puncruation —it should be noticed, that
since only those verbal forms (or their representatives) are
given in the Lexicon which actually occur in the Greek
Testament, it becomes necessary to distinguish between a
form of the Present Tense which is in use, and one which
is given merely to secure for a verb its place in the alphabet.
This is done by putting a se mi-colon after a Present which
actually occurs, and a colon after a Present which is a
mere alphabetic locum tenens. '
Further: a punctuation-mark inserted before a classic
voucher or a reference to the Old Testament (whether such
voucher or reference be included in a parenthesis or not)
indicates that said voucher or reference applies to other
passages, definitions, etc., besides the one which it imme-
diately follows. The same principle governs the insertion
or the omission of a comma after such abbreviations as
“absol.”, “ pass.”, etc.
A hyphen has been placed between the component parts
of Greek compounds only in case each separate part is in
actual use; otherwise the hyphen is omitted.
[] Brackets have been used to mark additions by the Amer-
ican editor. To avoid, however, a complexity which
might prove to the reader confusing, they have been
occasionally dispensed with when the editorial additions
serve only to complete a statement already made in part
by Professor Grimm (as, in enumerating the forms of
verbs, the readings of the critical editors, the verbs com-
pounded with otv which observe assimilation, etc. etc.) ;
but in no instance have they been intentionally omitted
where the omission might seem to attribute to Professor
Grimm an opinion for which he is not responsible.
* An asterisk at the close of an article indicates that all the
instances of the word’s occurrence in the New Testament
are noticed in the article. Of the 5594 words composing
the vocabulary of the New Testament 5300 are marked
with an asterisk. To this extont, therefore, the present
work may serve as a concordance as well as a lexicon.
A superior * or » or ° etc. appended to a verse-numeral
designates the first, second, third, etc., occurrence of a given
word or construction in that verse. The same letters ap-
pended to a page-numeral designate respectively the first,
second, third, columns of that page. A small a. b. c. ete.
after a page-numeral designates the subdivision of the page.
The various forms of the GREEK Text referred to are
represented by the following abbreviations :
R or Rec. = what is commonly known as the Textus Recep-
tus. Dr. F. H. A. Scrivener’s last edition (Cambridge
and London 1877) has been taken as the standard.1 To
designate a particular form of this “ Protean text” an
abbreviation has been appended in superior type; as, ™
for Elzevir, * for Stephen, °* for Beza, es for Erasmus.
G or Grsb. = the Greek text of Griesbach as given in his
manual edition, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1805. Owing to a dis-
regard of the signs by which Griesbach indicated his
judgment respecting the various degrees of probability
belonging to different readings, he is cited not infre-
quently, even in critical works, as supporting readings
which he expressly questioned, but was not quite ready
to expel from the text.
L or Lchm. = Lachmann’s Greek text as given in his larger
edition, 2 vols., Berlin, 1842 and 1850. When the text
of his smaller or stereotyped edition (Berlin, 1831,) is re-
ferred to, the abbreviation “ min.” or “ ster.” is added to
his initial.
T or Tdf.—the text of Tischendorf’s “Editio Octava
Critica Major ” (Leipzig, 1869-1872).
Tr or Treg. = “The Greek New Testament” ete. by S. P.
Tregelles (London, 1857-1879).
WH=“The New Testament in the Original Greek. The
Text Revised by Brooke Foss Westcott D.D. and Fen-
ton John Anthony Hort D.D. Cambridge and London,
Macmillan and Co. 1881.”
KC=“Novum Testamentum ad Fidem Codicis Vaticani”
as edited by Professors Kuenen and Cobet (Leyden,
1860).
The textual variations noticed are of course mainly those
which affect the individual word or construction under dis-
cussion. Where an extended passage or entire section is
textually debatable (as, for example, Mk. xvi. 9-20; Jn. v.
3 fin.—4; vii. 53 fin. — viii. 11), that fact is assumed to be
known, or at least it is not stated under every word contained
in the passage.
As respects the NUMBERING OF THE VERSES —the edition
of Robert Stephen, in 2 vols. 16°, Geneva 1551, has been
EE eee
* Respecting the edition issued by the Bible Society, which was
followed by Professor Grimm, see Carl Bertheau in the Theolo-
gische Literaturzeitung for 1877, No. 5, pp. 103-106.
EXPLANATIONS AND
followed as the standard (as it is in the critical editions of
Tregelles, Westcott and Hort, etc.). Variations from this
standard are indicated by subjoining the variant verse-nu-
meral within marks of parenthesis. The similar addition
in the case of references to the Old Testament indicates the
variation between the Hebrew notation and the Greek.
In quotations from the EneLisn BrstE—
A. V.= the current or so-called “ Authorized Version ” ;
R. V.=the Revised New Testament of 1881. But when a
rendering is ascribed to the former version it may be
assumed to be retained also in the latter, unless the con-
trary be expressly stated. A translation preceded by
R. V.is found in the Revision only.
A. S. = Anglo-Saxon.
Abp. = Archbishop.
absol. = absolutely.
acc. or accus. = accusative.
ace. to = according to.
ad 1. or ad loc. =at or on the passage.
al. = others or elsewhere.
al. al. = others otherwise.
Ald. =the Aldine text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List
of Books).
Alex. =the Alexandrian text of the Septuagint (see Sept.
in List of Books).
ap. = (quoted) in
App. = Appendix.
appos. = apposition.
Aq. = Aquila (see Sept. in List of Books).
art. = article.
augm. =augment.
auth. or author. = author or authorities.
B. or Bttm. see List of Books.
B. D. or BB. DD. see List of Books.
betw. = between.
Bibl. = Biblical.
Bp. = Bishop.
br. =brackets or enclose in brackets.
c. before a date =about.
Cantabr. = Cambridge.
cf. = compare.
ch. = chapter.
cl. =clause.
cod., codd. = manuscript, manuscripts.
Com., Comm.=commentary, commentaries.
comp. = compound, compounded, etc.
compar. = comparative.
Comp. or Compl. =the Complutensian text of the Septua-
gint (see Sept. in List of Books).
contr. = contracted, contract.
dim. or dimin. = diminutive.
dir. disc. = direct discourse.
e. g. =for example.
esp. = especially.
XIX
ABBREVIATIONS.
eX., xx. example, examples.
exc. = except.
excrpt.=an excerpt or extract.
fin. or ad fin. at or near the end.
G or Grsb. = Griesbach’s Greek text (see above).
Graec. Ven. = Graecus Venetus (see List of Books).
i. e. = that is.
ib. or ibid.=in the same place.
indir. disc. = indirect discourse.
init. or ad init.—at or near the beginning.
in 1. or in loc. = in or on the passage.
i. q.=the same as, or equivalent to.
KC= Kuenen and Cobet’s edition of the Vatican text (sew
above).
L or Lchm. = Lachmann’s Greek text (see above).
L. and S. = Liddell and Scott (see List of Books).
1. or lib. = book.
1.c., ll. cc. =passage cited, passages cited.
Lag.=Lagarde’s edition of the Septuagint (see Sept. in
List of Books).
mrg.—=the marginal reading (of a critical edition of the
Greek Testament).
Opp. = Works.
opp. to= opposed to.
paral. =the parallel accounts (in the Synoptic Gospels).
Pt. or pt. = part.
q. v. = which see.
R or Rec. = the common Greek text (see above).
r.= root.
rel. or relat. = relative.
sc. namely, to wit.
Skr. = Sanskrit.
sq., sqq- = following.
Steph. = Stephanus’s Thesaurus (see List of Books).
Stud. u. Krit.=the Studien und Kritiken, a leading Ger.
man Theological Quarterly.
s. v.=under the word.
Symm.= Symmachus, translator of the Old Testament into
Greek (see Sept. in the List of Books).
T or Taf. = Tischendorf’s Greek text (see above).
Theod. or Theodot.= Theodotion (see Sept. in the List of
Books).
Tr or Treg. = Tregelles’s Greek text (see above).
u. i.=as below.
u. 8. =as above.
Vv. = see.
var. = variant or variants (various readings).
Vat.=the Vatican Greek text (see above, and Sept. in the
List of Books).
Vulg.=the Vulgate (see List of Books).
w.= with (especially before abbreviated names of cases).
writ. = writer, writers, writings.
WH= Westcott and Hort’s Greek text (see above).
Other abbreviations will, it is hoped, explain themselves.
Per 2yvanaak \ lr net
wots: Slenuniney he cee! Lira arsiiey teehee silhat ae =
enorme 20; OR att cla — baie ‘Sidhe ih
Piet Po a4 ay tes pt Sarthe aa id dint aff sual siiptie: «i bo - Qe
bag alien hie yo OW) eee dal) ate ody onl merseal ben
etd oye) det Aree at tiepes 7 vice VU mes Gell yan ia eruiisdny ds WHS ofa aa rt
dhalunt Io eal sonj anti y aegis =" neh Sod fe * dead ons i bun tee =e
” a = * I
BY
, ay ;
. 7 og 2}
J Sta ne ;
= sealeame f 1) 8 ‘ Sagi aaa aaeih reen cee etl
i : erat, bpd zi th) ire> - ogy 'Y Sites bret, * b-Hestl toe 4
+
aatae lett’ o nt gta i tea Sal? i jo; 2 inl Pre oate Inti Tet in jaa. res iste eee
faties Ovts in tO ae Os ieee ) ater rime, toetyet ail ww ree
me MaTe 1 Sw Gh Tm, ietrwa) sel de erial whi il oly ferclasgin ' :
et Soe) néusin? ad5 be nei the eae) ok aed toe Wo beer mélange A od hase
- $ dite } ae -4iO0 prepa eld +
Atose dr) j-cuzloosl he hai dood = aie! 4A : oS
asin tt saan’ fae) SNe ter fatintey < baa al
z . taal pao! }
: a Die) Mars nite mir, Waa conte Sell sib
th tee, 904) Ait gahaian tlh. iq esti bee ered et |
2 “: ’ Fnitemy 120 St |
Mel Deg ti faghsid p20} gaityarx bunly shes uel Sages |
‘ ; se a Wihaaditl NY ol aan
<a Swilpalll NO |
Pr. peepee = uae on = MT Pe UQieet all oft |.
a apo BEG Tt WET) aS stare: iaereaccil pes Tele 4
; ite. any ade
ay
phy tae
Aaliete ves) txes 2 Pe yeiiss ol Peat
os a , te
+: < is ps, Minus he}.
Pd , arty role: oe ee a) j
“ '
=e at paleo, fin tel, 1 443} rw kent Te a ei aaly ads “Hirse{
rial GMa Met sa hat Aon Brere yale ret 1 taeey}
fe - wh: UPrOnlLP yy sinelouwl Tt: sas
; Bevtrar: alg -rntden> i
ee ; ele ee 2 i
ed Pontes 2M ait Tew Cais AT ibang y et nye |
- = {Pee ey 9h Lorton eine ee On | =|
, Pe Se Geaprt< 38 Avorel x intuit Ley ee
dit J
dy th. ie th Fafa aD es | Ts iris a} |
«
of ¥
an yenia so } fi vite ws
1} Sere) 5
* 4-4
Fo a ee
" : =r
mld te - ~ 7* : : 7
: = Sapriinet 2gNih so btnitns *Garhte> ay |
13 ge) DAR GE ep). Phe iol ;
‘+ - - ;
; tm x i7} mii :
; a ak P ‘
i =|" a y ont ' _ i j ww
| aaa oy io aa eg
Herticy 2 ‘als ORE Fira hte - —_ rs > j :
iy a ~ tena Sli
y sheer wal Pyar : q na
aaa Yihay Dinka ss
- i
Somes! aK: i ie vd i i. —
; led 4 ; ‘
: 7
. ’
vy :
* 7S ’
a ‘
yi
es ma
,
‘ i.
. , :
; j ~ iM
f iP ea)
NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON.
A
A a, adda
A, a, GAda, 7d, the first letter of the Greek alphabet,
opening the series which the letter closes. Hence the
expression ey eius ro A [LT TrWH ada] kai rd 2
(a L WH], Rev. i.8, 11 Rec., which is explained by the
appended words 7 dpyx7) kai rd TéAos, xxi. 6, and by the
further addition 6 mp&ros kal 6 écxaros, xxii. 13. On
the meaning of the phrase cf. Rev. xi. 17; Is. xli. 4;
xliv. 6; xlviii. 12; [esp. B. D. Am. ed. p. 73]. A,
when prefixed to words as an inseparable syllable, is
1. privative (crepnrixdy), like the Lat. in-, the Eng.
un-, giving a negative sense to the word to which it is
prefixed, as a8apns; or signifying what is contrary te it,
as dripos, atysdw; before vowels generally av-, as dvairvos.
2. copulative (dOpoorxdy), akin to the particle dua
fef. Curtius § 598], indicating community and fellow-
ship, as in ddeddds, dxddovbos. Hence it is 3. in-
tensive (emrarixdy), strengthening the force of terms,
like the Lat. con in composition; as arevifw fr. drevys
[yet cf. W.100(95)]. This use, however, is doubted or
denied now by many [e. g. Lob. Path. Element. i. 34
sq.]- Cf. Kiihner i. 741, § 339 Anm. 5; [Jelf § 3420];
Bttm. Gram. § 120 Anm. 11; [Donaldson, Gram. p.334;
New Crat. §§ 185, 213; L. and S.s. v.].*
*Aapav, indecl. prop. name (6 ’Aapoy, -vos in Joseph.),
J O8 (fr. the unused Hebr. radical TaN, —Syr. pact”
libidinosus, lascivus, —[enlightened, Fiirst; acc. to Die-
trich wealthy, or fluent, like V8], acc. to Philo, de
ebriet. § 32, fr. 1 mountain and equiv. to dpewvds), Aaron,
the brother of Moses, the first high-priest of the Israel-
ites and the head of the whole sacerdotal order: Lk. i. 5;
Acts vii. 40; Heb. v.4; vii. 11; ix. 4.*
*ABaSSuv, indecl., 11728, 1. ruin, destruction, (fr.
338 to perish), Job xxxi. 12. 2. the place of destruc-
tion i,q. Orcus, joined with inv, Job xxvi. 63; Prov.
xv. 11. 3. as a proper name it is given to the an-
gel-prince of the infernal regions, the minister of death
and author of havoc on earth, and is rendered in Greek
by "ArodAvav Destroyer, Rev. ix. 11." »
‘ABid0ap
OBapris, -és, (Bdpos weight), without weight, light ; trop.
not burdensome: dBapj ipiv euavtdov érnpnoa I have
avoided burdening you with expense on my account,
2 Co. xi. 9; see 1 Th. ii. 9, cf. 6. (Fr. Aristot. down.)*
"ABBA [WH -84], Hebr. 28 father, in the Chald. em-
phatic state, 838 i.e. 6 rarnp, a customary title of God in
prayer. Whenever it occurs in the N. T. (Mk. xiv. 36;
Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6) it has the Greek interpretation
subjoined to it; this is apparently to be explained by
the fact that the Chaldee 83s, through frequent use in
prayer, gradually acquired the nature of a most sacred
proper name, to which the Greek-speaking Jews added
the appellative from their own tongue.*
"“ABeA [WH “AGB. (see their Intr. § 408)], indecl. prop.
name (in Joseph. [e. g. antt. 1, 2, 1] “ABeNos, -ov), 937
(breath, vanity), Abel, the second son born to Adam
(Gen. iv. 2 sqq.), so called from his short life and sudden
death [cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 5], (Job vii. 16; Ps. xxxix.
6): Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; Heb. xi. 4; xii. 24.*
*ABid, indecl. prop. name (Joseph. antt. 7, 10, 3; 8,
10, 1 6ABias [W. § 6,1 m.], -a), TAN and 31738 (my
father is Jehovah), Abia [or Abijah, cf. B. D.s. v.],
1. aking of Judah, son of Rehoboam: Mt. i. 7 (1 K. xiv.
Sis texvenl))s 2. a priest, the head of a sacerdotal
family, from whom, when David divided the priests into
twenty-four classes (1 Chr. xxiv. 10), the class Adza,
the eighth in order, took its name: Lk. i. 5.*
*ABidbap, indecl. prop. name (though in Joseph. antt.
6, 14, 6 ’ABidOapos, -ov), 18 (father of abundance),
Abiathar, a certain Hebrew high-priest: Mk. ii. 26,—
where he is by mistake confounded with Ahimelech his
father (1 S. xxi. 1 sqq.); [yet cf. 1 S. xxii. 20 with 1
Chr. xviii. 16; xxiv. 6, 31; also 2 S. xv. 24-29; 1 K. ii.
26, 27 with 2 S. viii. 17; 1 Chr. xxiv. 6, 31. It would
seem that double names were esp. common in the case
of priests (cf. 1 Mace. ii. 1-5; Joseph. vit. §§ 1, 2)
and that father and son often bore the same name (cf
Lk. i. 5, 59; Joseph. 1. c. and antt. 20,9, 1). See Me
Clellan ad loc. and B. D. Am. ed. p. 7].*
"ABirnvn 2
"ABAnvy [WH ‘ABerd. (see 8. v. et], -7s, 7, (SC. xopa,
the district belonging to the city Abila), Abilene, the
name of a region lying between Lebanon and Hermon
towards Phoenicia, 18 miles distant from Damascus and
37 [acc. to the Itin. Anton. 38] from Heliopolis: Lk. iii.
1. Cf. Avoavias [and B. D. s. v.].*
*ABiovs, 5, indecl. prop. name, T3138 (father of the
Jews (al. of glory]), Abiud, son of Zorobabel or Zerub-
babel: Mt. i. 13.*
"ABpadp [Rect ‘ASp.; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] (Joseph.
"ABpayos, -ov), D128 (father of a multitude, cf. Gen.
xvii. 5), Abraham, the renowned founder of the Jewish
nation: Mt. i. 1 sq.; xxii. 32; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. vill. 33;
Acts iii. 25; Heb. vii. 1 sqq., andelsewhere. He is ex-
tolled by the apostle Paul as a pattern of faith, Ro. iv. 1
sqq. 17 sqq.; Gal. iii. 6 (cf. Heb. xi. 8), on which account
all believers in Christ have a claim to the title sons or
posterity of Abraham, Gal. iii. 7, 29; cf. Ro. iv. 11.
d-Burcos, in classic Greek an adj., -os, -ov, (fr. 6 Buoads
i. q. BvOds), bottomless (so perhaps in Sap. x. 19), un-
bounded (mAovros dBuvoaos, Aeschyl. Sept. (931) 950).
In the Scriptures 4) d8vacos (Sept. for DIN) se. xapa, the
pit, the immeasurable depth, the abyss. Hence of ‘the
deep’ sea: Gen. i. 2; vii. 11; Deut. viii. 7; Sir. i. 3;
xvi. 18, etc.; of Orcus (a very deep gulf or chasm in the
lowest parts of the earth: Ps. lxx. (Ixxi.) 21 逫 rév aBio-
coy ths yjs, Kur. Phoen. 1632 (i605) raprapov aBvoca
xdopara, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 5 a8vccwr dvefiyviaora
criuara, ibia. 59, 3 6 éemBderav ev rais aBvocors, of God;
[Act. Thom. 32 6 ryv aBvccoy tov taprapov oikay, of the
dragon]), both as the common receptacle of the dead,
Ro. x. 7, and especially as the abode of demons, Lk. viii.
31; Rev. ix. 1 sq. 11; xi. 7; xvii.8;xx.1,3. Among prof.
auth. used as a subst. only by Diog. Laért. 4, (5,) 27 carfA-
Ges eis péXaway Tdovtéws ABvocov. Cf. Knapp, Scripta
var. Arg. p. 554 sq.; [J. G. Miiller, Philo’s Lehre von der
Weltschépfung, p. 173 sq.; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Deep].*
“AyaBos(on the breathing see WH. Intr. § 408], -ov, 6,
the name of a Christian prophet, Agabus: Acts xi. 28;
xxi. 10. (Perhaps from 31) to love (ef. B. D. s. v.].)*
ayaboepyew, -@; (fr. the unused EPPO — equiv. to
épdo, epydfouat— and adyabdv); to be dyaboepyés, bene fi-
cent (towards the poor, the needy): 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V.
do good}. Cf. dyafovpyé. Found besides only in ecel.
writ., but in the sense to do well, act rightly.*
dyabo-rovew, <3; 1 aor. inf. dyaborojoa; (fr. dyabo-
wotds); 1. to do good, do something which profits
others: Mk. iii. 4 [Tdf. dyadév moujoa; Lk. vi. 9]; to
show one’s self beneficent, Acts xiv. 17 Rec.; tud, to do
some one a favor, .o benefit, Lk. vi. 33, 35, (equiv. to
2077, Zeph. i. 12; Num. x. 32; Tob. xii. 13, etc.). 2.
to do well, do right: 1 Pet. ii. 15, 20 (opp. to duaprdve) ;
fii. 6,17; 3 Jn. 11. (Not found in secular authors, ex-
cept in a few of the later in an astrological sense, to
furnish a good omen.)*
Gyaborota [WH -roia (see I,¢)], -as, 9, @ course of
right action, well-doing: év dyaborotia, 1 Pet. iv. 19 i. q.
éyaborowivres acting uprightly (cf. xii. Patr. Jos. § 18];
ayabos
if we read here with L Tr mrg. év dyaOomouiacs we must
understand it of single acts of rectitude [cf. W. § 27, 3;
B. § 123, 2]. (In eccl. writ. dyafom. denotes bene/fi-
cence.)*
dyaborovds, -dv, acting rightly, doing well: 1 Pet. ii. 14.
[Sir. xlii. 14; Plut. de Is. et Osir. § 42.]*
dyaQss, -7, -dv, (akin to &yaya to wonder at, think
highly of, dyaorés admirable, as explained by Plato,
Crat. p. 412 ¢. [al. al.; cf. Donaldson, New Crat. § 323]),
in general denotes “ perfectus, . . . qui habet in se ac
facit omnia quae habere et facere debet pro notione
nominis, officio ac lege” (Irmisch ad Hdian. 1, 4, p.
134), excelling in any respect, distinguished, good. It
can be predicated of persons, things, conditions, quali-
ties and affections of the soul, deeds, times and sea-
sons. To this general signif. can be traced back all
those senses which the word gathers fr. the connec-
tion in which it stands; 1. of a good constitution or
nature: yn, Lk. viii. 8; dSévdpov, Mt. vii. 18, in sense
equiv. to ‘fertile soil,’ ‘a fruitful tree,’ (Xen. oec. 16, 7
yn ayadn, ..- yj Kaxn, an. 2, 4, 22 xopas moddis kK. ayabys
ovens). In Lk. viii. 15 dya6) xapdia corresponds to the
fig. expression “good ground”, and denotes a soul in-
clined to goodness, and accordingly eager to learn sav-
ing truth and ready to bear the fruits (kaprotvs dyabous,
Jas. iii. 17) of a Christian life. 2. useful, salutary:
ddars ayabn (joined to SaHpyya réAeov) a gift which is
truly a gift, salutary, Jas. i. 17; ddéuara dyad, Mt. vii.
115; éevroAy dy. a commandment profitable to those who
keep it, Ro. vii. 12, ace. to a Grk. scholium equiv. to eis
Td cupépov elanyoupérn, hence the question in vs. 13: 6
ovv dyaboy euoi yéyove Oavatos; ay. pepis the ‘good
part,’ which insures salvation to him who chooses it,
Lk. x. 42; épyov ay. (differently in Ro. ii. 7, etc.) the
saving work of God, i. e. substantially, the Christian
life, due to divine efficiency, Phil. i. 6 [ef. the Comm.
ad loc.]; eis dyaOdv for good, to advantage, Ro. viii. 28
(Sir. vii. 13; mdvra trois evoeBéar eis dyabd, ... Trois éuap-
twdois els kaka, Sir. xxxix. 27; 1d Kaxdy.. « ylyvera eis
dya0dv, Theognis 162); good for, suited to something :
mpos oixodopny, Eph. iv. 29 [cf. W. 363 (340)] (Xen.
mem.4,6,10). 3. of the feeling awakened by what is
good, pleasant, agreeable, joyful, happy: tyépat dy. 1 Pet.
iii. 10 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Sir. xiv. 14; 1 Mace.
x. 55); éAmis, 2 Th. ii. 16 (waxapéa éAmis,Tit. ii. 13);
ouveidnots, a peaceful conscience, i. q. consciousness of
rectitude, Acts xxiii. 1; 1 Tim. i. 5, 19; 1 Pet. iii. 1;
reconciled to God, vs. 21. 4. excellent, distinguished:
so ti dyad, Jn. 1. 46 (47). 5. upright, honorable :
Mt. xii. 345 xix.16; Lk. vi. 45; Acts xi. 243 1 Pet. iii.
11, etc.; movnpot x. dyadoi, Mt. v. 45; xxii. 103 dyad. kat
Sixaios, Lk. xxiii, 505 xapBia dyad) e. wad}, Lk. viii. 15
(see xahds, b.); fulfilling the duty or service demanded,
SovAe dyabe x. moré, Mt. xxv. 21, 23; upright, free
from guile, particularly from a desire to corrupt the
people, Jn. vii. 12; pre-eminently of God, as consum-
mately and essentially good, Mt. xix. 17 (Mk. x. 18;
Lk. xviii. 19) ; dy. Onoavpds in Mt. xii. 85; Lk. vi. 45
ayaloupyéw
denotes the soul considered as the repository of pure
thoughts which are brought forth in speech; miotis dy.
the fidelity due from a servant to his master, Tit. ii. 10
[WH mrg. om.]; on dyad. épyov, dy. épya, see Epyov.
In a narrower sense, benevolent, kind, generous: Mt.
xx. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 18; pveia, 1 Th. iii. 6 (cf. 2 Mace. vii.
20); beneficent (Xen. Cyr. 3, 8, 4; 310, Jer. xxxiii. 11;
Ps. xxxiv. 9; Cic. nat. deor. 2, 25, 64 “optimus i.e.
beneficentissimus”), Ro. v. 7, where the meaning is,
Hardly for an innocent man does one encounter death;
for if he even dares hazard his life for another, he does
so for a benefactor (one from whom he has received
favors); cf. W. 117 (111); [Gifford in the Speaker’s
Com. p. 123]. The neuter used substantively de-
notes 1. a good thing, convenience, advantage, and
in partic. a. in the plur., external goods, riches: Lk. i.
53; xii. 18 sq. (Sir. xiv. 4; Sap. vii. 11); ra dyad cov
comforts and delights which thy wealth procured for
thee in abundance, Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to xakd, as in Sir.
xi. 14); outward and inward good things, Gal. vi. 6, cf.
Wieseler ad loc. b. the benefits of the Messianic king-
dom: Ro. x. 153 ra pedXovra dy. Hebsixeslisx ill 2.
what is upright, honorable, and acceptable to God: Ro.
xii. 2; épydfecOar 76 ay. Ro. ii. 10; Eph. iv. 28; mpaccesy,
Ro. ix. 11; [2 Co. v.10]; Saxe, 1 Th. v. 15; pupei-
oO, 3 Jn. 11; xodrAaca To dy. Ro. xii. 9; ri pe epwras
mept tov dyabod, Mt. xix. 17 GL T Tr WH, where the
word expresses the general idea of right. Spec., what
is salutary, suited to the course of human affairs: in the
phrase dsdkovos eis rd dy. Ro. xiii. 4; of rendering ser-
vice, Gal. vi. 10;-Ro. xii. 21; 1d dy. cov the favor thou
conferrest, Philem. 14.
[“ It is to be regarded as a peculiarity in the usage of the
Sept. that 210 good is predominantly [*] rendered by kadds.
... The translator of Gen. uses dyads only in the neut.,
good, goods, and this has been to a degree the model for the
other translators. ...In the Greek O. T., where of Séracoz is
the technical designation of the pious, of ayaGol or 6 ayabds
does not occur in so general a sense. The avyp dyads is
peculiar only to the Prov. (xiii. 22, 24; xv. 3); cf. besides
the solitary instance in 1 Kings ii.32. Thus even in the usage
of the O. T. we are reminded of Christ’s words, Mk. x. 18,
ovtels ayabds ef uh eis 6 Oeds. In the O. T. the term ‘right-
eous’ makes reference rather to a covenant and to one’s rela-
tion to a positive standard ; a&ya8dés would express the abso-
lute idea of moral goodness” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u.
bibl. Sprachgeist, Leipz. 1859, p. 60). Cf. Tittm. p. 19. On
the comparison of dyads see B. 27 (24).]
&yaoupyéw, -S; Acts xiv. 17 L T Tr WH for R dyaéo-
mom. The contracted form is the rarer [cf. WH. App.
p- 145], see ayaOoepyéw; but cf. xaxovpyos, lepoupyéw.*
dya0woivn, -7s, 7, [on its formation see W. 95 (90);
WH. App. p. 152], found only in bibl. and eccl. writ.,
uprightness of heart and life, [A. V. goodness]: 2 Th. i.
11; Gal. v. 22 (unless here it denote kindness, benefi-
cence); Ro. xv. 14; Eph. v. 9. [Cf. Trench § lxiii.;
Ellic. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. ¢.]*
dyadArdopar, see dyadAidw.
dyadNacts, -ews, 7}, (dyaAidw), not used by prof. writ.
but often by the Sept.; exultation, extreme joy: Lk. i.
ww
ayatraw
14, 44; Acts ii. 46; Jude 24. Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv.
(xlv.) 8) oil ef gladness with which persons ~- were
anointed at feasts (Ps. xxiii. 5), and which the writer,
alluding to the inaugural ceremony of anointing, uses
as an emblem of the divine power and majesty to which
the Son of God has been exalted.*
GyahAdw, -@, and -doua, (but the act. is not used
exc. in Lk. i. 47 [yadAiaca], in Rev. xix. 7 [ayan-
Aédpey] LT Tr WH [and in 1 Pet. i. 8 WH Tr mrg.
(dya\dare), cf. WH. App. p. 169]); 1 aor. Nyadduacd-
pny, and (with a mid. signif.) nyadrdOnv (Jn. v. 35;
Rec. yyahAudoOnv) ; a word of Hellenistic coinage (fr.
dydddouat to rejoice, glory [yet cf. B. 51 (45)]), often in
Sept. (for Oa, yD j2), wiv), to exult, rejoice exceed-
ingly: Mt. v.12; Lk. x. 21; Acts ii. 26; xvi. 34; 1 Pet.
i. 8; iv. 13; éy rem, 1 Pet. i. 6, dat. of the thing in
which the joy originates [cf. W. § 33 a.; B. 185 (160)];
but Jn. v. 35 means, ‘to rejoice while his light shone’
[i. e. in (the midst of) ete.]. emi ru, Lk.i.47; foll. by
iva, Jn. viii. 56 that he should see, rejoiced because it
had been promised him that he should see. This divine
promise was fulfilled to him at length in paradise; cf.
W. 339 (818); B. 239 (206). On this word see Gelpke
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 645 sq.*
G-yapos, -ov, (ydywos), unmarried: 1 Co. vii. 8, 32;
used even of women, 1 Co. vii. 11, 34 (Eur. Hel. 690 [and
elsewhere]), where the Grks. commonly said dvavdpos.*
dyavakréw, -@; 1 aor. nyavaktnoa; (as mAcoverTew COMES
fr. mAoevéxrns, and this fr. mAéov and éya, so through a
conjectural dyavaxrns fr. @yav and dyopzat to feel pain,
grieve, [al. al.]); to be indignant, moved with indigna-
tion: Mt. xxi.15; xxvi.8; Mk. x. 14; xiv. 43; mepi riwos
[ef. W. § 33 a.], Mt. xx.24; Mk. x. 413 foll. by dr, Lk.
xiii. 14. (From Hdt, down.) *
dyavakryots, -ews, H, indignation: 2Co. vii.11. [(From
Plat. on.) ]*
ayardo, -; [impf. ryder] ; fut.dyarjow; 1 aor. nyd-
moa; pf. act. [1 pers. plur. yyamjxapev 1 Jn. iv. 10 WH
txt.], ptcp. nyamnxws (2 Tim. iv. 8); Pass., [pres. dya-
mopar]; pf. ptcep. yyamnpevos; 1 fut. dyarnOnoopat; (akin
to dyapat [Fick, Pt. iv. 12; see dyaOés, init.]); to love,
to be full of good-will and exhibit the same: LK. vii. 47;
1Jn.iv.7sq.; with acc. of the person, to have a pre-
ference for, wish well to, regard the welfare of: Mt. v. 43
sqq-; xix. 19; Lk. vii. 5; Jn. xi.5; Ro. xiii. 8; 2 Co. xi.
11; xii.15; Gal. v.14; Eph. v. 25, 28; 1 Pet. i. 22, and
elsewhere; often in 1 Ep. of Jn. of the love of Chris-
tians towards one another; of the benevolence which
God, in providing salvation for men, has exhibited by
sending his Son to them and giving him up to death,
rie ls eOrnvalinS (ome sme bein Ose Le) neniver tele 9);
[noteworthy is Jude 1 L T Tr WH rois év Oe marpi
jyarnpevs ; see ev, 1.4, and cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii.
12]; of the love which led Christ, in procuring human
salvation, to undergo sufferings and death, Gal. ii. 20;
Eph. v. 2; of the love with which God regards Christ,
Jn. iii. 35; [v. 20 L mrg.]; x. 17; xv. 9; Eph. i. 6.
When used of love to a master, God or Christ, the word
ayanrn
involves the idea of affectionate reverence, prompt obe-
dience, grateful recognition of benefits received: Mt. vi.
24; xxii. 37; Ro. viii. 28; 1 Co. ii. 9; viii. 3; Jas. il 2
1 Pet. i. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 10, 20, and elsewhere. With an
ace. of the thing dyardw denotes to take pleasure in the
thing, prize it aboveother things, be unwilling to abandon tt
or do without it: Sicatoodyny, Heb. i. 9 (i. e. steadfastly
to cleave to); tiv dd€av, In. xii. 43; rHv mpwroKabedpiar,
Lk. xi. 43; 7d oxdros and 7d das, Jn. iii. 19; tov Kdcpoy,
1 Jn. ii. 15; rdv viv aidva, 2 Tim. iv. 10, — both which
last phrases signify to set the heart on earthly advan-
tages and joys; riv Wuxiy abrdv, Rev. xii. 11; Cony,
1 Pet. iii. 10 (to derive pleasure from life, render it
agreeable to himself); to welcome with desire, long for :
ray émupdveay adtod, 2 Tim. iv. 8 (Sap.i.1; vi. 13; Sir.
iv. 12, ete.; so of a person: yyar7On, Sap. iv. 10, cf.
Grimm ad loc.). Concerning the unique proof of love
which Jesus gave the apostles by washing their feet, it
is said 7ydarnoev adrovs, Jn. xiii. 1, cf. Liicke or Meyer
ad loc. [but al. take jyd. here more comprehensively,
see Weiss’s Mey., Godet, Westcott, Keil]. The combi-
nation dydmnv ayaray twa occurs, when a relative inter-
venes, in Jn. xvii. 26; Eph. ii. 4, (2 S. xiii. 15 where
70 pioos & eulonoev adrny is contrasted; cf. Gen. xlix. 25
evAdynoé oe cvAdoyiav; Ps. Sal. xvii. 35 [in cod. Pseude-
pig. Vet. Test. ed. Fabric. i. p. 966; Libri Apocr. etc.,
ed. Fritzsche, p. 588] dd&av fy eSdéarev adryv); cf. W.
§ 32, 2; [B. 148 sq. (129) ]; Grimm on 1 Mace. ii. 54.
On the difference betw. dyamdw and didéa, see puréw.
Cf. ayarn, 1 fin.
é&ydarn, -ns, 7, 2 purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyt-
tenbach, following Reiske’s conjecture, long ago re-
stored adyamnoay in place of dyamns, dv in Plut. sympos.
quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof.
auth. fr. [Aristot.], Plut. on used dydmyous. “The Sept.
use dydzn for 1378, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8;
vii. 6; viii. 4,6, 7; [‘‘ It is noticeable that the word first
makes its appearance as a current term in the Song
of Sol.;— certainly no undesigned evidence respect-
ing the idea which the Alex. translators had of the
love in this Song” (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl.
Sprachgeist, p. 63)]; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. ix. 1,6; [2 S. xiii.
15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo
and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it.
Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas.; it
occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and
Rev., but frequently in the writings of Paul, John, Peter,
Jude” (Breischn. Lex. s. v.); [Philo, deus immut. § 14].
In signification it follows the verb dyardw; conse-
quently it denotes 1. affection, good-will, love, bene-
volence: Jn. xv. 18; Ro. xiii. 10; 1 Jn. iv. 18. Of the
love of men to men; esp. of that love of Christians
towards Christians which is enjoined and prompted by
their religion, whether the love be viewed as in the
soul or as expressed: Mt. xxiv. 12; 1 Co. xiii. 1-4, 8;
xiv. 1; 2 Co. ii. 4; Gal. v. 6; Philem. 5, 7; 1 Tim. i.
5; Heb. vi. 10; x. 243 Jn. xiii. 853 1 Jn. iv. 7; Rev.
li.4,19, etc. Of the love of men towards God: i) ayann
4 ayaTnTos
Tov God (obj. gen. [W. 185 (175)]}), Lk. xi. 42; Jn. Vv.
42; 1 Jn. ii. 15 (rod marpés); iii. 17; iv. 125 v. 3. Of
the love of God towards men: Ro. v. 8; viii. 39; 2 Co.
xiii. 13 (14). Of the love of God towards Christ : Jn. xv.
10; xvii. 26. Of the love of Christ towards men:
Jn. xv. 9 sq.3 2 Co. v. 14; Ro. viii. 35; Eph. iii. 19.
In construction: dy. eis twa, 2 Co. ii. 8 [7]; Eph. i.
15 [L WH om. Tr mrg. br. ray dydmny]; tH €& tpay ev
jpiv i. e. love going forth from your soul and taking up
its abode as it were in ours, i. q. your love to us, 2 Co.
viii. 7 [W. 193 (181 sq.); B. 329 (283)]; pe? tpar
i. e. is present with (embraces) you, 1 Co. xvi. 24; pe&
jpov i. e. seen among us, 1 Jn. iv. 17. Phrases: éyew
dydanny eis twa, 2 Co. ii. 4; Col. i. 4 [LT Tr, but WH
br.]; 1 Pet. iv. 8; dydmnv diddva to give a proof of
love, 1 Jn. iii. 1; dyanay dydnny twd, Jn. xvii. 26;
Eph. it: 4 (v. in ayarde, sub fin.) ; ay. TOU TVEVPLATOS it e.
enkindled by the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 380; 6 vios rHs
dydnns the Son who is the object of love, i. q. ayamnrés,
Col. i. 18 (W. 237 (222); [B. 162 (141)]); 6 @eds ris
dy. the author of love, 2 Co. xiii. 11; kdmos ris ay.
troublesome service, toil, undertaken from love, 1 Th.
i. 33 dy. rhs adnOcias love which embraces the truth,
2 Th. ii. 10; 6 Ocds dyarn éoriv God is wholly love, his
nature is summed up in love, 1 Jn. iv. 8,163 Pidnpa
ayarns a kiss as a sign among Christians of mutual affec-
tion, 1 Pet. v. 14; dua ryv ay. that love may have oppor-
tunity of influencing thee (‘in order to give scope to the
power of love’ De W., Wies.), Philem. 9, cf. 14; é
ayarn lovingly, in an affectionate spirit, 1 Co. iv. 21;
on love as a basis [al. in love as the sphere or element],
Eph. iv. 15 (where ev ay. is to be connected not with
GAnbevovres but with aiénooper), vs. 16; && dyanns influ-
enced by love, Phil. i. 17 (16) ; xara dydmny in a manner
befitting love, Ro. xiv. 15. Love is mentioned together
with faith and hope in 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1 Th. i. 3;
v. 8, Col. i. 4 sq.; Heb. x. 22-24. On the words
ayann, ayanay, cf. Gelpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849,
p- 646 sq.; on the idea and nature of Christian love
see Késtlin, Lehrbgr. des Ev. Joh. ete. p. 248 sqq.,
332 sqq.; Rickert, Theologie, ii. 452 sqq.; Lipsius,
Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 188 sqq.; [Reuss, Théol.
Chrét. livr. vii. chap. 13]. 2. Plur. dyama, -év,
agapae, love-feasts, feasts expressing and fostering mu-
tual love which used to be held by Christians before the
celebration of the Lord’s supper, and at which the
poorer Christians mingled with the wealthier and par-
took in common with the rest of food provided at the
expense of the wealthy: Jude 12 (and in 2 Pet. ii. 13
L Tr txt. WH mrg.), cf. 1 Co. xi. 17 sqq.; Acts ii. 42,
46; xx. 7; Tertull. Apol. c. 39, and ad Martyr. c. 3;
Cypr. ad Quirin. 3,3; Drescher, De vet. christ. Agapis.
Giess. 1824; Mangold in Schenkel i. 53 sq.; [B. D.s. v.
Love-Feasts; Dict. of Christ. Antiq. s. v. Agapae; more
fully in McC. and S. s. v. Agape].
dyamnrés, -7, -dv, (dyardw), beloved, esteemed, dear,
favorite; (opp. to €x9pds, Ro. xi. 28): 6 vids pov (rov
Geo) 6 dyamynrés, of Jesus, the Messiah, Mt. iii. 12
*Ayap
{here WH mrg. take 6 dy. absol., connecting it with
what follows]; xii. 18; xvii. 5; Mk.i.11; ix. 7; Lk.
ill, 22; ix. 35 (where L mrg. T Tr WH 6 éxdedeypévos) ;
2 Pet. 1.17, cf. Mk. xii. 6;\Lkiw xx) 13; [ef. Ascensio
Isa. (ed. Dillmann) vii. 23 sq.; viii. 18, 25, ete.]. dya-
mtot Oeod [W. 194 (182 sq.) ; B. 190 (165)] is applied
to Christians as being reconciled to God and judged by
him to be worthy of eternal life: Ro. i. 7, cf. xi. 28;
1 Th. i. 4; Col. iii. 12, (Sept., Ps. lix. (Ax.) 7; evii.
(eviii.) 7; exxvi. (exxvii.) 2, dyamnroi cov and airod, of
pious Israelites). But Christians, bound together by
mutual love, are dyamnroi also to one another (Philem.
16; 1 Tim. vi. 2); hence they are dignified with this
epithet very often in tender address, both indirect (Ro.
xvi. 5, 8; Col. iv. 14; Eph. vi. 21, etc.) and direct
(Ro. xii. 19; 1 Co. iv. 14; [Philem. 2 Rec.]; Heb. vi.
Vast tO hot. ie PEs 2 Petenis bef. dite 7
GLTTr WH],etc.). Generally foll. by the gen.; once
by the dat. aya. nyiv, 1 Th. ii. 8 [yet cf. W. § 31, 2;
B. 190 (165) ]. dyarnros év kvpio beloved in the fel-
lowship of Christ, equiv. to dear fellow-Christian, Ro.
xvi. 8. [Not used in the Fourth Gospel or the Rev. In
class. Grk. fr. Hom. Il. 6, 401 on; cf. Cope on Aristot.
rhet. 1, 7, 41.]
"Ayap [WH "Ay. (see their Intr. § 408)], 7, indecl.,
(in Joseph. ’Aydpa, -ns), 14°) (flight), Hagar, a bond-
maid of Abraham, and by him the mother of Ishmael
(Gen. xvi.): Gal. iv. 24, [25 L txt. T om. Tr br.].
Since the Arabians according to Paul (who had for-
merly dwelt among them, Gal. i. 17) called the rocky
Mt. Sinai by a name similar in sound to 1A (SS
i. e. rock), the apostle in the passage referred“ to em-
ploys the name Hagar allegorically to denote the servile
sense of fear with which the Mosaic economy imbued
its subjects. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. pp. 978, 2366 note*;
Bp. Lghtft.’s remarks appended to his Com. on Gal.
Joka |i
dyyapedo ; fut. dyyapetow; 1 aor. nyydpevoa; to em-
ploy a courier, despatch a mounted messenger. A word
of Persian origin [used by Menander, Sicyon. 4], but
adopted also into Lat. (Vulg. angariare). ”Ayyapou were
public couriers (tabellarii), stationed by appointment
of the king of Persia at fixed localities, with horses
ready for use, in order to transmit royal messages from
one to another and so convey them the more speedily to
their destination. See Hdt. 8, 98 [and Rawlinson’s
note]; Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 17 (9); ef. Gesenius, Thesaur.
s. v. NN; [B. D. s. v. Angareuo; Vanitek, Fremd-
worter s. v. dyyapos]. These couriers had authority to
press into their service, in case of need, horses, vessels,
even men they met, [cf. Joseph. antt. 13, 2,3]. Hence
dyyapetew twa denotes to compel one to go a journey,
to bear a burden, or to perform any other service:
Mt. v. 41 (Sorts ce dyyapetoes pidoy Ev i. e. whoever
shall compel thee to go one mile); xxvii. 32 (7yydpevoav
iva app i. e. they forced him to carry), so Mk. xv. 21.*
dyyetov, -ov, 74, (i. q- Td Gyyos), a vessel, receptacle:
Mt. xiii. 48 [R GL]; xxv. 4. (From Hdt. down.)*
aryyedos
Gyyehla, -as, 7, (dyyeAos), a message, announcement,
thing announced ; precept declared, 1 Jn. i. 5 (where
Ree. has émayyed‘a) [cf. Is. xxviii. 9]; iii, 11. [From
Hom. down. ]*
dyyehAw ; [1 aor. #yyeda, Jn. iv. 51 T (for dmjyy.
R GL Tr br.)]; (dyyedos) 3 to announce : ayyehXovca,
Jn. xx.18 LT Tr WH, for RG dmayyéAr. [From Hom.
down. Comp.: dv-, an-, Ow, €&-, én-, mpo-en-, Kar-,
mpo-KaT-, Tap-ayyeAdw. |*
dyyedos, -ov, 6, 1. a messenger, envoy, one who is
sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vii. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2:
Jas. li. 25. [Fr. Hom. down.] 2. In the Scriptures,
both of the Old Test. and of the New, one of that host
of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish
and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the.
universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute
his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxvili. 2; Mk. i. 13; Lk.
XVi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts
vil. 85; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, cf. Heb. i. 14), now to
make them known to men (Lk. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq.;
Acts x13) KKVILN232° Mi. 1.520 it 13 txocvitin ds fn:
xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions éyyedos
(angel, messenger of God, 38912) and dyyedou kupiov or
ayy. Tov Geod. They are subject not only to God but
also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, cf. Eph. i.
21; Gal.iv. 14), who is described as hereafter to return
to judgment surrounded by a multitude of them as ser-
vants and attendants: Mt. xiii. 41, 49; xvi. 27; xxiv.
Sl pxxye ol; 2) Chi. Wek ude 4. Single angels
have the charge of separate elements; as fire, Rev. xiv.
18; waters, Rev. xvi. 5, cf. vii. 1 sq.; Jn. v. 4 [RL].
Respecting the adyyehos tis dBiocov, Rev. ix. 11, see
’*ABaddav, 3. Guardian angels of individuals are men-
tioned in Mt. xviii. 10; Acts xii. 15. ‘The angels of the
churches’ in Rev. i. 20; ii. 1, 8, 12, 18; iii. 1, 7, 14 are not
their presbyters or bishops, but heavenly spirits who exer-
cise such a superintendence and guardianship over them
that whatever in their assemblies is worthy of praise or
of censure is counted to the praise or the blame of their
angels also, as though the latter infused their spirit into
the assemblies; cf. De Wette, Diisterdieck, [ Alford,] on
Rev. i. 20, and Liicke, Einl. in d. Offenb. d. Johan. ii.
p- 429 sq. ed. 2; [Bp. Lghtft. on Phil‘p. p. 199 sq.].
did rods ayyéAous that she may show reverence for the
angels, invisibly present in the religious assemblies of
Christians, and not displease them, 1 Co. xi. 10. &6y
dyyéAows in 1 Tim. iii. 16 is probably to be explained
neither of angels to whom Christ exhibited himself in
heaven, nor of demons triumphed over by him in the
nether world, but of the apostles, his messengers, to
whom he appeared after his resurrection. This appel-
lation, which is certainly extraordinary, is easily un-
derstood from the nature of the hymn from which the
passage epavepwbn . . . ev dd&n seems to have been taken;
cf. W. 639 sq. (594), [for other interpretations see Ellic.
adloc.]. In Jn.i. 51 (52) angels are employed, by a beau-
tiful image borrowed from Gen. xxviii. 12, to represent
the divine power that will aid Jesus in the discharge
aryryos
of his Messianic office, and the signal proofs to appear
in his history of a divine superintendence. Certain of
the angels have proved faithless to the trust committed
to them by God, and have given themselves up to sin,
Jude 6; 2 Pet. ii. 4 (Enoch e. vi. etc., cf. Gen. vi. 2), and
now obey the devil, Mt. xxv. 41; Rev. Kile Ciel OO:
vi. 3 [yet on this last passage cf. Meyer; he and others
maintain that ayy. without an epithet or limitation never
in the N. T. signifies other than good angels]. Hence
dyyehos Saray is trop. used in 2 Co, xii. 7 to denote
a grievous bodily malady sent by Satan. See daipov;
[Soph. Lex. s. v. éyyehos; and for the literature on the
whole subject B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Angels, — and to the
reff. there given add G. L. Hahn, Theol. des N. T., i.
pp. 260-384; Delitzsch in Riehm s. v. Engel; Kiibel
in Herzog ed. 2, ibid.].
dyyos, -eos, 76, (plur. ayyn), i. q. dyyeiov q. v.: Mt.
xiii. 48 T Tr WH. (From Hom. down; [cf. Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 23].) *
éye, (properly impv. of dyw), come! come now! used,
as it often is in the classics (W. 516 (481)), even when
more than one is addressed: Jas. iv. 13; v. 1.*
&yedn, -Ns, 9, (yw to drive), a herd: Mt. viii. 30 sqq.;
Mk. v. 11, 13; Lk. viii. 32 sq. (From Hom. down.) *
GyeveahSyntos, -ov, 6, (yeveadoyéw), of whose descent
there is no account (in the O. T.), [R. V. without gene-
alogy]: Heb. vii. 3 (vs. 6 py yeveadoyovpevos). No-
where found in prof. auth.*
ayevis, -€os (-ovs), 6, 7, (yévos), opp. to evyevns, of no
family, a man of base birth, a man of no name or repu-
tation; often used by prof. writ., also in the secondary
sense iynoble, cowardly, mean, base. In the N. T. only
in 1 Co. i. 28, ra dyer Tod Kécpov i. e. those who among
men are held of no account; on the use of a neut. adj.
in ref. to persons, see W. 178 (167) ; [B. 122 (107)].*
dyidto; 1 aor. pyiaca; Pass., [pres. adyrafouat]; pf. Hyi-
acpa; 1 aor. ny:doOnv; a word for which the Greeks use
dyifew, but very freq. in bibl. (as equiv. to wap, weap)
and eccl. writ.; to make dytov, render or declare sacred
or holy, consecrate. Hence it denotes 1. to render
or acknowledge to be venerable, to hallow: +d dvopa rod
cod, Mt. vi. 9 (so of God, Is. xxix. 23; Ezek. xx. 41;
Xxxviil. 23; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 4); [LK. xi. 2]; Tov
Xprordy, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (R G esr). Since the stamp
of sacredness passes over from the holiness of God to
whatever has any connection with God, dyd¢ew de-
notes 2. to separate from things profane and dedicate to
God, to consecrate and so render inviolable; a. things
(mav mpwrdrokov, ra dpoevxd, Deut. xv. 19; Ayépav, Ex.
xx. 8; oikov, 2 Chr. vii. 16, ete.) : tov ypvodv, Mt. xxiii.
17; 16 dapov, vs. 19; cxedos, 2 Tim. ii. 21. b. persons.
So Christ is said by undergoing death to consecrate
himself to God, whose will he in that way fulfils, Jn.
xvii. 19; God is said éysacac Christ, i. e. to have selected
him for his service (cf. dopifew, Gal. i. 15) by having
committed to him the office of Messiah, Jn. x. 36, cf.
Jer. i. 5; Sir. xxxvi. 12 [&& airav fyiace, wal mpds adroy
ityywev, of his selection of men for the priesthood]; xlv.
6 Gy Los
4; xlix. 7. Since only what is pure and without
blemish can be devoted and offered to God (Lev. xxii.
20; Deut. xv. 21; xvii. 1), dyago signifies 3. to
purify, (dré rév dxabaposy is added in Lev. xvi. 19;
28. xi. 4); and a. to cleanse externally (mpos thy THs
capkos xabapérnra), to purify levitically: Heb. ix. 13;
1 Tim. iv. 5. b. to purify by expiation, free from the
guilt of sin: 1 Co. vi. 11; Eph. v. 26; Heb. x. 10, 14, 29;
xiii. 12; ii. 11 (equiv. to 193, Ex. xxix. 33, 36); cf.
Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 840 sqq., [Eng. trans. ii. 68
sq.]. ¢. to purify internally by reformation of soul: Jn.
xvii. 17, 19 (through knowledge of the truth, cf. Jn. viii.
32); 1 Th. v. 23; 1 Co. i. 2 (€v Xpior “Inood in the
fellowship of Christ, the Holy One); Ro. xv. 16 (ev
mvevpare a&yio imbued with the Holy Spirit, the divine
source of holiness); Jude 1 (L T Tr WH nyamnpéevos
Eq. iW-.) gy Fee V gos ae In general, Christians are
called yacpévor [cf. Deut. xxxiii. 3], as those who,
freed from the impurity of wickedness, have been
brought near to God by their faith and sanctity, Acts
xx. 32; xxvi. 18. In 1 Co. vii. 14 dysa¢eoOar is used in
a peculiar sense of those who, although not Christians
themselves, are yet, by marriage with a Christian, with-
drawn from the contamination of heathen impiety and
brought under the saving influence of the Holy Spirit dis-
playing itself among Christians; cf. Neander ad loc.*
dytacpés, -od, 6, a word used only by bibl. and eccl.
writ. (for in Diod. 4, 39; Dion. Hal. 1, 21, dyopds is
the more correct reading), signifying 1. consecration,
purification, rd dy:dfew. 2. the effect of consecration:
sanctification of heart and life, 1 Co. i. 30 (Christ is he to
whom we are indebted for sanctification); 1 Th. iv. 7;
Ro. vi. 19, 22; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. xii. 14; dyaopos
mvevparos sanctification wrought by the Holy Spirit, 2 Th.
ii. 13; 1 Pet.i.2. It is opposed to lust in 1 Th. iv. 3 sq.
(It is used in a ritual sense, Judg. xvii. 3 [Alex.]; Ezek.
xlv. 4; [Am. ii. 11]; Sir. vii. 31, ete.) [On its use in
the N. T. ef. Ellic. on 1 Th. iv. 3; iii. 13.]*
dytos, -a, -ov, (fr. rd dyos religious awe, reverence ;
G{w, Gfouat, to venerate, revere, esp. the gods, parents,
(Curtius § 118]), rare in prof. auth.; very frequent in
the sacred writ.; in the Sept. for wIIP; 1. properly
reverend, worthy of veneration: 76 dvopa Tov beod, Lk. i.
49; God, on account of his incomparable majesty, Rev.
iv. 8 (Is. vi. 3, etc.), i. q. &vSofos. Hence used a. of
things which on account of some connection with God
possess a certain distinction and claim to reverence, as
places sacred to God which are not to be profaned,
Acts vii. 33; rémos dys the temple, Mt. xxiv. 15 (on
which pass. see BdeAvypa, ¢c.); Acts vi. 13; xxi. 28; the
holy land or Palestine, 2 Macc. i. 29; ii. 18; 7d G@yov and
ta diya [W. 177 (167)] the temple, Heb. ix. 1, 24 (cf.
Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 477 sq.) ; spec. that part of
the temple or tabernacle which is called ‘the holy
place’ (WApD, Ezek. xxxvii. 28; xlv. 18), Heb. ix. 2
[here Rec* reads éyia]; dysa dyiov [W. 246 (231), cf. Ex.
XxIx. 37; xxx. 10, etc.] the most hallowed portion of
the temple, ‘the holy of holies,’ (Ex. xxvi. 33 [ef. J oseph.
ae
aylos
antt. 3, 6, 4]), Heb. ix. 3, in ref. to which the simple
ra dya is also used: Heb. ix. 8, 25; x. 19; xiii. 11;
fig. of heaven, Heb. viii. 2; ix. 8,12; x. 19; dyia médus
Jerusalem, on account of the temple there, Mt. iv. 5;
xxvil. 53; Rev. xi. 2; xxi, 2; xxii. 19, (Is. xlviii. 2;
Neh. xi. 1,18 [Compl.], etc.) ; 16 dpos 7d Gyrov, because
Christ’s transfiguration occurred there, 2 Pet. i. 18;
9 (Geod) ayia diaOjKn i. e. which is the more sacred be-
cause made by God himself, Lk. i. 72; 1d dyov, that
worshipful offspring of divine power, Lk. i. 35; the
blessing of the gospel, Mt. vii. 6; dywwrdrn miotis, faith
(quae credituri.e.the object of faith) which came from
God and is therefore to be heeded most sacredly, Jude
20; in the same sense dyia évroAy, 2 Pet. ii. 21; KAjous
dyia, because it is the invitation of God and claims us
as his, 2 Tim. i. 9; dyrat ypapai (ra BiBAla ta aya,
1 Mace. xii. 9), which came from God and contain his
words, Ro. i. 2. b. of persons whose services God
employs; as for example, apostles, Eph. iii. 5; angels,
1 Th. iii. 13; Mt. xxv. 31 [Rec.]; Rev. xiv. 10; Jude
14; prophets, Acts iii. 21; Lk. i. 70, (Sap. xi. 1); (of)
Zytot (rod) Oeov dvOpwmo, 2 Pet. i. 21 [R GL Tr txt.];
worthies of the O. T. accepted by God for their piety,
Mt. xxvii. 52; 1 Pet. iii. 5. 2. set apart for God,
to be, as it were, exclusively his; foll. by a gen. or
dat.: r@ kvpio, Lk. ii. 23; rod Oeod (i. q. ekdexrds Tod
6cod) of Christ, Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34, and acc. to the true
reading in Jn. vi. 69, cf. x. 36; he is called also 6 dytos
mais Tov Oeov, Acts iv. 30, and simply 6 Gytos, 1 Jn. ii.
20. Just as the Israelites claimed for themselves the
title of dysor, because God selected them from the other
nations to lead a life acceptable to him and rejoice in
his favor and protection (Dan. vii. 18, 22; 2 Esdr.
viii. 28), so this appellation is very often in the N. T.
transferred to Christians, as those whom God has se-
lected ék rod xécpov (Jn. xvii. 14, 16), that under the
influence of the Holy Spirit they may be rendered,
through holiness, partakers of salvation in the kingdom
of God: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Ex. xix. 6), ef. vs. 5; Acts ix. 13,
82, 41; xxvi. 10; Ro. i. 73 viii. 27; xii. 13; xvi. 15;
Co. vi. 1,25 Phils iv. 21 sq-; Col.i. 12;-Heb. vi105
Jude 3; Rev. v. 8, etc.; [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Saints].
3. of sacrifices and offerings; prepared for God with
solemn rite, pure, clean, (opp. to dxdOapros) : 1 Co. vii.
14, (cf. Eph. v. 3); connected with dypos, Eph. i. 4;
v. 27; Col. i. 22; dmapyn, Ro. xi. 16; @voia, Ro. xii. 1.
Hence 4. in a moral sense, pure, sinless, upright,
holy: 1 Pet. i. 16 (Lev. xix. 2; xi. 44); 1 Co. vii. 34;
Sixavos x. dytos, of John the Baptist, Mk. vi. 20; dytos k.
Sixacos, of Christ, Acts iii. 14; distinctively of him, Rev.
iii. 7; vi. 10; of God pre-eminently, 1 Pet. i. 15; Jn.
xvii. 113; Gysae dvacrpodai, 2 Pet. iii. 11; vopos and
évro\n, i. e. containing nothing exceptionable, Ro. vii.
12; PéiAnpa, such a kiss as is a sign of the purest love,
1 Th. v. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 12; Ro. xvi. 16.
On the phrase ré dytov mvedpa and 16 mvedpa 7d aytov,
see mvevpa, 4 a. Cf. Diestel, Die Heiligkeit Gottes,
in Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. iv. p. 1 sqq.; [Baudissin,
ayvita
Stud. z. Semitisch. Religionsgesch. Heft ii. p. 3 sqq.3
Delitzsch in Herzog ed. 2, v. 714 sqq.; esp.] Cremer,
Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p. 32 sqq. [trans. of 2d ed. p. 34
sqq-3; Oehler in Herzog xix. 618 sqq.; Zezschwitz, Pro
fangricitit u.s. w. p. 15 sqq.; Trench § lxxxviii.; Camp-
bell, Dissertations, diss. vi., pt. iv. ; esp. Schmidt ch. 181].
dyoTns, -nTos, 7, sanctity, in a moral sense; holiness:
2 Co. i.12 L T Tr WH; Heb. xii. 10. (Besides only
in 2 Mace. xv. 2; [cf. W. 25, and on words of thie
termination Lob. ad Phryn. p. 350].) *
dytwrivy [on the see reff. in dyadwovm, init.], -ns, 7,
a word unknown to prof. auth. [B. 73 (64)]; 1. (God’s
incomparable) majesty, (joined to peyadompémea, Ps. xev.
(xevi.) 6, cf. exliv. (exlv.) 5): mvedpa dywwovrns a spirit
to which belongs dywovrn, not equiv. to mvedpa yoy,
but the divine [?] spiritual nature in Christ as contrasted
with his oap&, Ro. i. 4; cf. Riickert ad loc., and Zeller
in his Theol. Jahrbb. for 1842, p. 486 sqq.; [yet ef.
Mey. ad loc.; Gifford (in the Speaker’s Com.). Most
commentators (cf. e. g. Ellic. on Thess. as below) regard
the word as uniformly and only signifying holiness].
2. moral purity: 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Co. vii. 1*
GyKadn, -ns, 7, (aykn, dyads [fr. r. ak to bend, curve,
cf. Lat. uncus, angulus, Eng. angle, etc.; cf. Curtius § 1;
Vaniéek p. 2 sq.]), the curve or inner angle of the arm:
deEacOat eis tas aykddas, Lk. ii. 28. The Greeks also
said dyads aBeiv, év dyxddas mepupéepew, etc., see evay-
kaXiCoua. [(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.)]*
dyxurtpoy, -ov, 76, (fr. an unused dyxit to angle [see
the preceding word]), a fish-hook: Mt. xvii. 27.*
dykvpa, -as, 7, [see dyxaAn], an anchor — [ancient an-
chors resembled modern in form: were of iron, provided
with a stock, and with two teeth-like extremities often
but by no means always without flukes; see Roschach in
Daremberg and Saglio’s Dict. des Antiq. (1878) p. 267;
Guhl and Koner p. 258]: pimrew to cast (Lat. jacere),
Acts xxvii. 29 ; éxreivety, vs. 30 ; mepuatpety, vs. 40. Fig-
uratively, any stay or safeguard: as hope, Heb. vi. 19;
Eur. Hee. 78 (80); Heliod. vii. p. 352 (350).*
dyvados, -ov, 6, }, (yvamrrw to dress or full cloth, cf.
dppagdos), unmilled, unfulled, undressed : Mt. ix. 16; Mk.
ii. 21. [Cf. Moeris s. v. dkvamrov; Thom. Mag. p. 12, 14.]*
dyvela [WH dyvia (see I, ¢)], -as, 7, (dyvedo), purity,
sinlessness of life: 1 Tim. iv. 12; v. 2. (Of a Nazirite,
Num. vi. 2, 21.) [From Soph. O. T. 864 down.] *
dyvite; 1 aor. #ynoa; pf. ptcp. act. iyrikds; pass.
Hyveopevos; 1 aor. pass. tryvicOnv [W. 252 (237) ]; (ayvos) 5
to purify; 1. ceremonially: ¢yavrov, Jo. xi. 55 (to
cleanse themselves from levitical pollution by means
of prayers, abstinence, washings, sacrifices) ; the pass.
has a reflexive force, to take upon one’s self a purifica-
tion, Acts xxi. 24, 26; xxiv. 18 (1.437, Num. vi. 3), and
is used of Nazirites or those who had taken upon them-
selves a temporary or a life-long vow to abstain from wine
and all kinds of intoxicating drink, from every defilement
and from shaving the head [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Nazarite].
2. morally: ras xapSias, Jas. iv. 8; tas Wuxds, 1 Pet. i,
22; éavrov, 1 Jn. iii. 8. (Soph., Eur., Plut., al.)*
aryvie wos
dyviopes, -0d, 6, purification, lustration, [Dion. Hal. SS
22, i. p. 469,13; Plut. de defect. orac. 15]: Acts xxi. 26
(equiv. to 143, Num. vi. 5), Naziritic; see dyvito, 1.*
&yvoéw (INO [cf. ywooke }), -6, [impv. ayvoeira 1 Co.
xiv. 38 R G Tr txt. WH mrg.]; impf. 7yrdovv; 1 aor.
nyvonoa; [Pass., pres. dyvoovpa, ptep. dayvoovpevos; fr.
Hom. down]; a. to be ignorant, not to know: absol.,
1 Tim. i. 13; rwd, ri, Acts xiii. 27; xvii. 23; Ro. x. 33
é rm (as in [Test. Jos. § 14] Fabricii Pseudepigr. ii.
p- 717 [but the reading jyvoouv eal mace tovros is NOW
given here; see Test. xii. Patr. ad fid. cod. Cant. etc., ed.
Sinker, Cambr. 1869]), 2 Pet. ii. 12, unless one prefer to
resolve the expression thus: €v rovrows, 4 dyvoovot BAac-
gnpodrres, W. 629 (584), [ef. B. 287 (246) |; foll. by ors,
Ro. ii. 4; vi. 3; vii. 1; 1 Co. xiv. 38 (where the antece-
dent clause érz xrA. is to be supplied again); od deAw
ipas ayvoeiv, a phrase often used by Paul, [an emphatic]
scitote: foll. by an ace. of the obj., Ro. xi. 25; timep rivos,
6rt, 2 Co. i. 8; wepi twos, 1 Co. xii. 1; 1 Th. iv. 13; foll.
by dr, Ro. i. 13; 1 Co.x.1; in the pass. dyvoetra: ‘he
is not known’ i. e. ace. to the context ‘he is disregarded,’
1 Co. xiv. 88 L T Tr mrg. WH txt. ; dyvoovpevor (opp.
to émvywwookopevor) men unknown, obscure, 2 Co. vi. 9;
dyvoovpevds tu unknown to one, Gal. i. 22; ov« dyvoeiv
to know very well,'ri, 2 Co. ii. 11 (Sap. xii. 10). b. not
to understand: ri, Mk. ix. 32; Lk. ix. 45. c. to err, sin
through mistake, spoken mildly of those who are not
high-handed or wilful transgressors (Sir. v.15; 2 Macc.
xi. 31): Heb. v. 2, on which see Delitzsch.*
Gyvonpa, -ros, 7d, @ sin, (strictly, that committed through
ignorance or thoughtlessness [A. V. error]): Heb. ix. 7
(1 Mace. xiii. 39; Tob. iii. 3; Sir. xxiii. 2); cf. dyvo€a, c.
[and Trench § Ixvi. ].*
dyvoua, -as, 7, [fr. Aeschyl. down], want of knowledge,
ignorance, esp. of divine things: Acts xvii. 80; 1 Pet.
i. 14; such as is inexcusable, Eph. iv. 18 (Sap. xiv.
22); of moral blindness, Acts iii. 17. [Cf. dyvoéw.]*
dyvos, -n, -ov, (GCopat, see dyios) ; 1. exciting rever-
ence, venerable, sacred: mip Kat 7 orodds, 2 Mace. xiii.
8; Eur. El. 812. 2. pure (Eur. Or. 1604 dyvds yap
eit xetpas, GAN’ ov ras dpevas, Hipp. 316 sq. dyvas ...
xeipas aiwaros épets, xeipes pev dyvai, dpyy 8 exe
piacpa); a. pure from carnality, chaste, modest: Tit.
ii. 5; map6évos an unsullied virgin, 2 Co. xi. 2 (4 Mace.
xvil. 7). b. pure from every fault, immaculate: 2 Co.
Vite dt seh iv. o/s leis ve 22s le betaitin dss iinet.
3 (of God [yet cf. exeivos 1 b.]); Jas. iii. 17. (From Hom.
down.) [Cf. reff. s. v. dys, fin. ; Westc. on 1 Jn. iii. 3.]*
dyvérns, -nTos, 7, [dyvds], purity, uprightness of life:
2 Co. vi. 6; in 2 Co. xi. 3 some critical authorities
add kai ris dyvornros after dmAdrnros (so L Tr txt., but
Tr mrg. WH br.), others read ris éyvérnros xat before
dmhor. Found once in prof. auth., see Boeckh, Corp.
Inserr.i. p.583 no. 1133 1. 15: Sixaroodyns everev Kal éyr6-
T™TOS.*
dyvas, adv., purely, with sincerity: Phil. i. 16 (17).*
dyverla, -as, 9, (yrdots), want of knowledge, igno-
cance: 1 Pet. ii, 15; 1 Co. xv. 34, (Sap. xiii. 1)
8 aypavréea
&-yvarros, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], unknown: Acts xvii.
23 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Altar ].*
dyopé,, -ds, 7, (dyeipo, pf. iyopa, to collect), [fr. Hom.
down | ; 1. any collection of men, congregation, as-
sembly. 2. place where assemblies are held; in the
N. T. the forum or public place, — where trials are held,
Acts xvi. 19; and the citizens resort, Acts xvii. 17; and
commodities are exposed for sale, Mk. vii. 4 (dm dyopas
sc. éAOovres on returning from the market if they have
not washed themselves they eat not; W. § 66, 2 d. note);
accordingly, the most frequented part of a city or vil-
lage: Mt. xi. 16, (Lk. vii. 32); Mk. vi. 56; Mt. xx. 3;
xxiii. 7; Mk. xii. 88; [Lk. xi.43]; xx.46. [See B. D.
Am. ed. s. v. Market. ]*
ayopatw ; [impf. jyopagov; fut. dyopacw]; 1, aor. iyd-
paca; Pass., pf. ptcep. myopacpeévos; 1 zor. nyopac np ;
(ayopa); 1. to frequent the market-place. 2. to buy
(properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.];
used a. literally: absol., Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15;
Lk. xix. 45 [not G T Tr WH]; i, Mt. xiii. 44, 46;
xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8; vi.5; with mapa
and gen. of the pers. fr. whom, Rev. iii. 18, [Sept.,
Polyb.]; é« and gen. of price, Mt. xxvii. 7; simple gen.
of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said
to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it
were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly
understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9,10]; 1 Co. vii.
23 (with gen. of price added; see rin, 1); 2 Pet. ii. 1.
He is also said to have bought them for God é TO
aipare avrov, by shedding his blood, Rev. v. 9; they,
too, are spoken of as purchased az6 ris yas, Rev. xiv. 3,
and amo tév avOparer, vs. 4, so that they are withdrawn
from the earth (and its miseries) and from (wicked)
men. But ayopdg{w does not mean redeem (eEayopatw),
—as is commonly said. [Comp.: ¢&-ayopd¢w. |
ayopatos (rarely -aia), -aiov, (dyopa), relating to the
market-place; 1. frequenting the market-place, (either
transacting business, as the xcamndou, or) sauntering idly,
(Lat. subrostranus, subbasilicanus, Germ. Pflastertreter,
our loafer): Acts xvii. 5, (Plat. Prot. 347 ¢. dyopatot kat
gaidor, Arstph. ran. 1015, al.). 2. of affairs usually
transacted in the market-place: dyopaiou (sc. nuepar [W.
590 (549)] or cvvodo. [Mey. et al.]) dyovrat, judicial
days or assemblies, [A. V. mrg. court-days], Acts xix.
38 (Tas ayopaious roveic ba, Strabo 13, p. 932), but many
think we ought to read aydpao here, so G L ef. W.
53 (52); but see [Alf. and Tdf. ad loc.; Lipsius, Gram.
Untersuch. p. 26;] Meyer on Acts xvii. 5; Gottling
p- 297; [Chandler ed. 1 p. 269].*
dypa,-as, 7, [a@yo}; 1. acatching, hunting: Lk. v. 4.
2. the thing caught: &ypa rév ixOdav ‘the catch or haul
of fish’ i.e. the fishes taken [A. V. draught], Lk. v. 9.*
dypdpparos, -ov, [ypduual, illiterate, without learning:
Acts iv. 13 (i. e. unversed in the learning of the Jewish
schools ; cf. Jn. vii. 15 ypdupara pi) pepadnnds).*
dyp-avhéw, -; to be an aypavdos (dypds, addj), i. &
to live in the fields, be under the open sky, even by night:
Lk. ii. 8, (Strabo p. 301 a.; Plut. Num. 4).*
aypevo
Gypetea: 1 aor. Hypevoa; (dypa); to catch (properly,
wild animals, fishes): fig., Mk. xii. 13 tva abrév dypevowot
Acy@ in order to entrap him by some inconsiderate re-
mark elicited from him in conversation, cf. Lk. xx. 20.
(In Anthol. it often denotes to ensnare in the toils of
love, captivate; cf. maydevo, Mt. xxii. 15; caynvevo,
Leian. Tim. 25.) *
Gypt-Ehatos, -ov, (4yptos and éAaos or éAaia, like éypudp-
meQos) 3 1. of or belonging to the oleaster, or wild olive,
(oxvradyny dypiédaov, Anthol. 9, 237, 4; [ef. Lob. Para-
lip. p. 376]); spoken of a scion, Ro. xi. 17. 2. As
subst. 4 dypséAaos the oleaster, the wild olive, (opp. to
kaddcehavos [cf. Aristot. plant. 1, 6]), also called by the
Greeks xorwos, Ro. xi. 24; cf. Fritzscheon Rom. vol. ii.
495 sqq. [See B. D. s. v. Olive, and Tristram, Nat.
Hist. of the Bible, s. v. Olive. The latter says, p. 377,
‘the wild olive must not be confounded with the Oleaster
or Oil-tree ’.]*
dyptos, -a,-ov, (dypds), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. living
or growing in the fields or the woods, used of animals in
a state of nature, and of plants which grow without
culture: pede aypiov wild honey, either that which is
deposited by bees in hollow trees, clefts of rocks, on the
bare ground (1 8. xiv. 25 [cf. vs. 26]), ete., or more cor-
rectly that which distils from certain trees, and is gath-
ered when it has become hard, (Diod. Sic. 19, 94 fin.
speaking of the Nabathaean Arabians says dvera: rap’
avrois wéAL TOAD TO KaAOVpEVOY AypLOV, @ XpavTar TOTS
pe vdaros; cf. Suid. and esp. Suicer s. v. dxpis): Mt. iii.
4; Mk.i. 6. 2. fierce, untamed: xipata Oaddoons,
Jude 13 (Sap. xiv. 1).*
*Ayplamas, -a (respecting this gen. see W. § 8, 1 p. 60
(59); B. 20 (18)), 6, see “Hpwdns, (3 and) 4.
dypés, -od, 6, [fr. dyw; prop. a drove or driving-place,
then, pasturage; cf. Lat. ager, Germ. Acker, Eng. acre;
Fick, Pt.i. p. 8]; a. a field, the country: Mt. vi. 28;
xxiv.18, Lk. xv.15; [Mk.xi.8 TTr WH], etc. b.
i. q. xapiov, a piece of land, bit of tillage: Actsiv. 37; Mk.
x..29; Mt. xiil. 24, 27, etc: Cc. of adypot the farms,
country-seats, neighboring hamlets: Mk. v. 14 (opp. to
mods); vi. 36; Lk. ix. 12. [(From Hom. on.)]
aypuTvéw, -@; (dypumvos equiv. to dimvos); to be sleep-
less, keep awake, watch, (i. q. ypyyopéw [see below]) ;
[fr. Theognis down]; trop. to be circumspect, attentive,
ready: Mk. xiii. 33; Lk. xxi. 36; es rt, to be intent
upon a thing, Eph. vi. 18; démép twos, to exercise con-
stant vigilance over something (an image drawn from
shepherds), Heb. xiii. 17. [SYN. dypumvetv, ypnyo-
peiv, vnperv: “dypumveiy may be taken to express sim-
ply ... absence of sleep, and, pointedly, the absence of
it when due to nature, and thence a wakeful frame of
mind as opposed to listlessness; while ypryopeiy (the
offspring of éypyyopa) represents a waking state as
the effect of some arousing effort... i. e. a more stir-
ring image than the former. The group of synonyms
is completed by vnpetv, which signifies « state untouched
by any slumberous or beclouding influences, and thence,
one that is guarded against advances of drowsiness or
*
ayo
bewilderment. Thus it becomes a term for warinese
(cf. vade kal pépvac’ dmoreiv) against spiritual dangers
and beguilements, 1 Pet. v. 8, ete.” Green, Crit. Notes
on the N. T. (note on Mk. xiii. 33 sq.).]*
dyputvia, -as, 7, sleeplessness, watching: 2 Co. vi. 5;
xi. 27. [From Hat. down.]*
dy; impf. pyov; fut. do; 2 aor. #yayov, inf. dyayeiv,
(more rarely 1 aor. 7£a, in émdyo 2 Pet. ii. 5); Pass.,
pres. dyouat; impf. nydunv; 1 aor. #yOnv; 1 fut. axOn-
couat; [fr. Hom. down]; to drive, lead. 1. properly
[A. V. ordinarily, to bring]; a. to lead by laying
hold of, and in this way to bring to the point of desti-
nation: of an animal, Mt. xxi. 7; Lk. xix. 35; Mk. xi.
7 (T Tr WH ¢épovew) ; [Lk. xix. 30]; rua foll. by es
with ace. of place, Lk. iv. 9 [al. refer this to 2 ¢.]; x.
345 (Hyayov k. eionyayoy eis, Lk. xxii. 54); Jn. xviii. 23;
Acts vi. 12; \ix. 2;ixvii..5 [R.G)3 xxi. 345. xxil, 5,;24
Rec. ; xxiii. 10, 31; émi with acc., Acts xvii. 19; as,
Lk. iv. 29; mpds twa, to persons, LK. [iv. 40]; xviii.
40; Acts ix. 27; Jn. viii. 3[Ree.]. __b. to lead by accom-
panying to (into) any place: eis, Acts xi. 26 (25); gas,
Acts xvii. 15; spés teva, to persons, Jn. i. 42 (43); ix.
13; Acts xxiii. 18; foll. by dat. of pers. to whom, Acts
xxi. 16 on which see W. 214 (201) at length, [cf. B.
284 (244) ], (1 Mace. vii. 2 @yew adrods aire). c. to
lead with one’s self, attach to one’s self as an attendant:
twa, 2 Tim. iv. 11; 1 Th. iv. 14, (Joseph. antt. 10, 9, 6
amnpev eis Thy Avyumtov aywv Kal ‘Iepepiay). Some refer
Acts xxi. 16 to this head, resolving it dyovres Mvdowva
nmap © &eroOapev, but incorrectly, see W. [and B.] as
above. d. to conduct, bring: twa, [Lk. xix. 27]; Jn.
Wit. 45° (xix, 413i| 3 Acts v.25 26, [i27i] si xix. 37 sexx.
12; xxv. 6, 23; médov, Mk. xi. 2 (where T Tr WH
dépere) ; [Lk. xix. 30, see a. above]; twa rum or ti Tu,
Mt. xxi. 2; Acts xiii. 23 G L T Tr WH. e. to lead
away, to a court of justice, magistrate, etc.: simply,
Mk. xiii. 11; [Acts xxv. 17]; émi with acc., Mt. x. 18;
Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr WH dayopeévous) ; [Lk. xxiii. 1];
Acts [ix. 21]; xviii. 12; (often in Attic); [pds with
acc., Jn. xviii. 183 L T Tr WH]; to punishment: simply
(2 Mace. vi. 29; vii. 18, ete.), Jn. xix. 16 Grsb. (R kal
annyayor, which L T Tr WH have expunged); with
telic inf., Lk. xxiii. 832; [foll. by ta, Mk. xv. 20 Lchm.];
émi oayny, Acts viii. 32, (émt Oavarw, Xen. mem. 4, 4,
3; an. 1, 6,10). 2. tropically ; a. to lead, guide,
direct: Jn. x. 163; els peravotay, Ro. ii. 4. b. to lead
through, conduct, to something, become the author of
good or of evil to some one: es ddfav, Heb. ii. 10, (eis
[al. émi] cadoxayabiar, Xen. mem. 1, 6, 14; els SovAeiav,
Dem. p. 213, 28). ¢. fo move, impel, of forces and
influences affecting the mind: Lk. iv. 1 (where read é»
Th épnpe [with L txt. T Tr WH]); mvevpare beod dyer Oar,
Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v. 18; émOvpias, 2 Tim. iii. 6; sim-
ply, wrged on by blind impulse, 1 Co. xii. 2— unless im-
pelled by Satan’s influence be preferable, cf. 1 Co. x. 20;
Eph. ii. 2; [B. 383 (828) sq.]. 3. to pass a day,
keep or celebrate a feast, etc. : rpirny jyépav ayet sc. 6
*Ixpan\, Lk. xxiv. 21 [others (see Meyer) supply adros
ayoyn
ar 6 "Ingois; still others take dyes as impers., one passes,
Vulg. tertia dies est; see B. 134 (118)]; yeveriov dyope-
vov, Mt. xiv.6 RG; dyopator (q. v. 2), Acts xix. 38; often
in the O. T. Apocr. (cf. Wahl, Clavis Apocr. s. v. dyo,
3), in Hdt. and Attic writ. 4. intrans. to go, depart,
(W. § 38, 1, p. 251 (236) ; [B. 144 (126)]): dyopev let
us go, Mt. xxvi. 46; Mk. xiv. 42; Jn. xiv. 31; mpos
rwa, Jn. xi. 153 es with acc. of place, Mk. i. 38; Ju.
xi. 7, (Epict. diss. 3, 22, 55 dyapev émt tov avOvmarov) ;
{foll. by tva, Jn. xi. 16. Comp.: ar, én-ar-, an-, ovv-aT-,
bt-, eio-, map-eo-, €E-, em-, KAT-, PET-, Tap-, WEPL-, TPO-, MPOT-s
our, émvovr-, in-dyo. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] ss
dywyh, -7s, 4, (fr. dye, like dy fr. @w); 1. prop-
erly, aleading. 2. figuratively, a. trans. a conduct-
ing, training, education, discipline. b. intrans. the life
led, way or course of life (a use which arose from the
fuller expression dywy? Tod Biov, in Polyb. 4, 74, 1.4; cf.
Germ. Lebensfiihrung): 2 Tim. iii. 10 [R. V. conduct],
(Esth. ii. 20; 2 Mace. iv. 16; 4 €v Xpior@ dywyy, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 6; dy) dywyn, ibid. 48, 1). Often in
prof. auth. in all these senses.*
ayév, -Bvos, 6, (@yw); 1. a place of assembly (Hom.
Tl. 7, 298; 18,376); spec. the place in which the Greeks
assembled to celebrate solemn games (as the Pythian,
the Olympian); hence 2. a contest, of athletes, run-
ners, charioteers. In a fig. sense, a. in the phrase
(used by the Greeks, see tpéxyo, b.) rpéyew tov dydva,
Heb. xii. 1, that is to say ‘Amid all hindrances let us
exert ourselves to the utmost to attain to the goal of
perfection set before the followers of Christ’; any
struggle with dangers, annoyances, obstacles, standing
in the way of faith, holiness, and a desire to spread the
gospel: 1 Th. ii. 2; Phil. i. 80; 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim.
vend b. intense solicitude, anxiety: mepi twos, Col.
ii. 1 (ef. Eur. Ph. 1350; Polyb. 4, 56,4]. On the ethical
use of figures borrowed from the Greek Games cf.
Grimm on Sap. iv. 1; [Howson, Metaphors of St. Paul,
Essay iv.; Conyb. and Hows. Life and Epp. of St.
Paul, ch. xx.; Me. and S. iii. 733° sq.; BB.DD. s. v.
Games ].*
&yovla, -as, 7) ; 1. i. q. dywv, which see. 2. It is
often used, from Dem. (on the Crown p. 236, 19 fv 6
Pilinmos ev PdBo kai word} dywvia) down, of severe
mental struggles and emotions, agony, anguish: Lk.
xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; (2 Mace. iii. 14,
16; xv.19; Joseph. antt. 11,8, 4 6 dpyvepeds Av ev ayevia
cai dcer). (Cf. Mield, Otium Norv. iii. on Lk. 1. ¢.]*
Gyovifonar; impf. nyorCdunv; pf. nyovicpat; a depon.
mid. verb (cf. W. 260 (244)]; (dyayv) ; 1. to enter a
contest ; contend in the gymnastic games: 1 Co. ix. 25.
2. univ. to contend with adversaries, Jight: foll. by iva
pn, Jn. xviii. 36. 3. fig. to contend, struggle, with
difficulties and dangers antagonistic to the gospel: Col.
i. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 10 (L T Tr txt. WH txt.; for Ree.
dvediCoueOa) ; dyovifoua dydva (often used by the
Greeks also, esp. the Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv.
7. 4. to endeavor with strenuous zeal, strive, to obtain
something ; foll. by an inf., Lk. xiii. 24; Sp rwos ev tais
10
aderdos
mpogevxais, wa, Col. iv. 12. [Comr.: dyt-, én-, Kat-,
ovy-aywvigopat. |*
“ABdu, ies prop. name (but in J oseph. “Adapos, -ov),
DIN (i. e. acc. to Philo, de leg. alleg. i. 29, Opp. is p.62
oa Mand, ynivos ; acc. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 YTyErns j
ace. to Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 2 muppés, with which Gesenius
agrees, see his Thesaur. i. p. 25)5 1. Adam, the first
man and the parent of the whole human race: Lk. iii. 38;
Ro. v.14; 1 Co. xv. 22, 45; 1 Tim. ii. 13 sq.; Jude 14.
Tn accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the
former Adam (WRIT D1 ), the first man, the author
of ‘all our woe,’ and the latter Adam (}}0NN87 078),
the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ
is called 6 éryaros "Addu (see €oxaros, 1) and contrasted
with 6 mparos dvOpwmos; Ro. v. 14 6 péAdoy se. ’Adap.
[2. one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 WH mrg.
(cf. ’Adpety). |*
&Sdavos, -ov, (Samdvn), without expense, requiring no
outlay: 1 Co. ix. 18 (a ddaravoy Ojow rd evayyedtor
‘that I may make Christian instruction gratuitous”).*
*ASS( or ’AdSei T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 155, and
s. v. €t,¢], 6, the indecl. prop. name of one of the ances-
tors of Christ: Lk. iii. 28.*
aSeAHh, -Fs, 7, (see adeAdds), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sis-
ter ; 1. a full, own sister (i.e. by birth): Mt. xix.
29: Lk. x39) sq.5 dns xi. 1, 3,07) X1x- 205 NO. XVIeLOS
etc.; respecting the sisters of Christ, mentioned in Mt.
xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3, see ddedgés, 1. 2. one connected
by the tie of the Christian religion: 1 Co. vii. 15; ix. 5;
Philem. 2 LT Tr WH; Jas. ii. 15; with a subj. gen., a
Christian woman especially dear to one, Ro. xvi. 1.
&S8eAdéds, -od, 6, (fr. a copulative and dedAdis, from the
same womb; cf. aydotwp), [fr. Hom. down]; hse
brother (whether born of the same two parents, or only
of the same father or the same mother): Mt. i. 2; iv. 18,
and often. That ‘the brethren of Jesus,’ Mt. xii. 46, 47
[but WH only in mrg.]; xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 3 (in the
last two passages also sisters); Lk. viii. 19 sq.; Jn. ii.
125"vul. 3; Acts’ 1.14: "Gal, 1 19591 Co.eixeo.mare
neither sons of Joseph by a wife married before Mary
(which is the account in the Apocryphal Gospels [ef.
Thilo, Cod. Apocr. N. T. i. 362 sq.]), nor cousins, the
children of Alphzeus or Cleophas [i. e. Clopas] and Mary
a sister of the mother of Jesus (the current opinion
among the doctors of the church since Jerome and Au-
gustine [cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal., diss. ii-]), accord-
ing to that use of language by which ddeAdés like the
Hebr. n& denotes any blood-relation or kinsman (Gen.
xiv. 1651'S. xx." 29) 2°K. “x TS3"7 WChre xxi 22:
etc.), but own brothers, born after Jesus, is clear prin-
cipally from Mt. i. 25 [only in R G]; Lk. ii. 7— where,
had Mary borne no other childrén after Jesus, instead
of vidv mpwrdroxov, the expression vidv povoyevn would
have been used, as well as from Acts i. 14, cf. Jn. vii. Ds
where the Lord’s brethren are distinguished from the
apostles. See further on this point under ’IdkaBos, 3.
(Cf. B. D. s. v. Brother; Andrews, Life of our Lord,
pp. 104-116; Bib. Sacr. for 1864, pp. 855-869; for 1869
aderdhorns
pp: 745-758; Laurent, N. T. Studien pp. 153-193; Mc-
Clellan, note on Mt. xiii. 55.] 2. according to a
flebr. use of nx (Ex. ii. 11; iv. 18, etc.), hardly to be
met with in prof. auth., having the same national ances-
tor, belonging to the same people, countryman; so the
Jews (as the oméppa ABpady, viol Iopana, cf. Acts xiii.
26; [in Deut. xv. 3 opp. to 6 ddAérptos, cf. xvii. 15;
xv. 12; Philo de septen. § 9 init.]) are called aSeAqoi:
Mt. v.47; Acts iii. 22 (Deut. xviii. 15); vii. 23; xxii.
5; xxvill. 15, 21; Ro. ix. 3; in address, Acts ii. 29;
iii. 17; xxiii. 1; Heb. vii. 5. 3. just as in Lev. xix.
17 the word nx is used interchangeably with p> (but,
as vss. 16, 18 show, in speaking of Israelites), so in the
Sayings of Christ, Mt. v. 22, 24; vii. 3 sqq., ddeAdds is
used for 6 mAnoiov to denote (as appears from Lk. x.
29 sqq.) any fellow-man, — as having one and the same
father with others, viz. God (Heb. ii. 11), and as de-
scended from the same first ancestor (Acts xvii. 26);
ef. Epict. diss. 1, 13, 3. 4. a fellow-believer, united to
another by the bond of affection; so most frequently of
Christians, constituting as it were but a single family:
Mt. xxiii. 8; Jn. xxi. 23; Acts vi. 3 [Lchm. om.]; ix.
SO LEXimls eG alenien2 stl COoaves lien) Philvin t4,eete.s in
courteous address, Ro. i. 13; vii. 1; 1 Co. i. 10; 1 Jn.
ii. 7 Rec., and often elsewhere ; yet in the phraseology
of John it has reference to the new life unto which men
are begotten again by the efficiency of a common father,
even God: 1 Jn. ii. 9 sqq.; ili. 10, 14, ete., cf. v. 1.
5. an associate in employment or office: 1 Co. i. 1;
2Co. i. 1; ii. 18(12); Eph. vi. 21; Col. i. 1. 6. brethren
of Christ is used of, a. his brothers by blood; see 1
above. b. all men: Mt. xxv. 40 [Lchm. br.]; Heb. ii.
11 sq. [al. refer these exx. to d.] cc. apostles: Mt.
xxviii. 10: Jn. xx. 17. a. Christians, as those who are
destined to be exalted to the same heavenly d0£a (q. v.
III. 4 b.) which he enjoys: Ro. viii. 29.
&beAhstys, -nTos, 7, brotherhood; the abstract for the
concrete, a band of brothers i.e. of Christians, Chris-
tian brethren: 1 Pet. ii. 17; v. 9. (1 Mace. xii. 10, 17,
the connection of allied nations; 4 Macc. ix. 23; x. 3,
the connection of brothers; Dio Chrys. ii. 137 [ed.
Reiske]; often in eccl. writ.) *
G-8ydos, -ov, (Ojos), not manifest: Lk. xi. 44; indis-
tinct, uncertain, obscure: porn, 1 Co. xiv. 8. (In Grk.
auth. fr. Hes. down.) [Cf. 87Aos,fin.; Schmidt ch. 130.]*
&SnAStys, -NTos, 7, uncertainty: 1 Tim. vi. 17 mAovToU
ddndérnre equiv. to mrovt@ adnre, cf. W. § 34, 3a.
[Polyb., Dion. Hal., Philo.]*
&Shrws, adv., uncertainly: 1 Co. ix. 26 oUT@ Tpexa,
és otk adjdos i.e. not uncertain whither; cf. Mey.
ad loc. [(Thuc., al.)]*
GSqpovéw, -6; (fr. the unused ddjpov, and this fr. a
priv. and dipos; accordingly uncomfortable, as not at
home, cf. Germ. unheimisch, unheimlich ; cf. Bttm. Lexil.
ii. 136 [Fishlake’s trans. p. 29 sq. But Lob. (Pathol.
Proleg. p. 238, ef. p. 160) et al. connect it with ddqjpor,
adjoar; see Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. ii. 26]); to be troubled,
distressed: Mt. xxvi. 87; Mk. xiv. 38; Phil. ii. 26.
et
adiuxéw
(Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 3 ddqpovqoa ras Wuyxds, and often in
prof. auth.) *
“Ads, dons, -ov, 6, (for the older ’Aidns, which Hom.
uses, and this fr. a priv. and i8eiv, not to be seen, [ef. Lob.
Path. Element. ii. 6 sq.]); in the classics 1. a prop.
name, fades, Pluto, the god of the lower regions; so in
Hom. always. 2. an appellative, Orcus, the nether world,
the realm of the dead (cf. Theocr. idyll. 2, 159 schol. rv rod
Gov kpover rUANY: TodT Cotw drobaveira]. In the Sept.
the Hebr. 5}sxw is almost always rendered by this word
(once by 6dvaros, 2 S. xxii. 6); it denotes, therefore, in
bibl. Grk. Orcus, the infernal regions, a dark (Job x.
21) and dismal place (but cf. yéevva and mapadeuos) in
the very depths of the earth (Job xi. 8; Is. lvii. 9;
Am. ix. 2, ete.; see 48vacos), the common receptacle
of disembodied spirits: Lk. xvi. 23; eis ddov sc. ddpov,
Acts ii. 27, 31, ace. to a very common ellipsis, cf. W.
592 (550) [B. 171 (149)]; (but L T Tr WH in vs. 27
and T WH in both verses read eis ddyv; so Sept. Ps. xv.
(xvi.) 10); mvAat ddov, Mt. xvi. 18 (avAwpot adov, Job
XXxvill. 17; see mvAn)}; KAeis tov ddov, Rev. i. 18;
Hades as a power is personified, 1 Co. xv. 55 (where L
T Tr WH read Oavare for R G addy [cf. Acts ii. 24 Tr
mrg.]); Rev. vi. 8; xx.13 sq. Metaph. ws ddov [kara-
Baivew or] xaraBiBaecOa to [go or] be thrust down
into the depth of misery and disgrace: Mt. xi. 23 [here
LTr WH karaBaivew]; Lk. x. 15 [here Tr mrg. WH txt.
kataBaivew]. [See esp. Boettcher, De Inferis, s. v.”Acdns
in Grk. index. On the existence and locality of Hades
cf. Greswell on the Parables, App. ch. x. vol. v. pt. ii.
pp- 261-406; on the doctrinal significance of the word
see the BB.DD. and E. R. Craven in Lange on Rey.
pp. 364-377. ]*
&-5.d-KptTos, -ov, (Staxpive to distinguish); 1. undis-
tinguished and undistinguishable: dav, Polyb. 15, 12, 9;
Néyos, Leian. Jup. Trag. 25; for 373, Gen. i. 2 Symm.
2. without dubiousness, ambiguity, or uncertainty (see
Siaxpivw, Pass. and Mid. 3 [al. without variance, ef. d:a-
Kpivw, 2]): 7 avwdev copia, Jas. iii. 17 (Ignat. ad Eph.
3, 2 Inoots Xpuoros 7d adiaxptroy nuav (nv [yet al. take
the word here i. q. inseparable, cf. Zahn in Patr. Apost.
Opp., ed. Gebh., Harn. and Zahn, fase. ii. p. 7; see also
in general Zahn, Ignatius, p. 429 note!; Bp. Lghtft. on
Tgnat. l.c.; Soph. Lex.s.v. Used from Hippocr. down. }).*
dSiddevrrros, -ov, (Scadeia@ to intermit, leave off), wninter-
mitted, unceasing: Ro. ix.2; 2Tim.i.3. [Tim. Loer. 98 e.]*
dBiarelrtas, adv., without intermission, incessantly, as-
siduously: Ro.i.9; 1 Th. i. 2(8); ii-135 v.17. [Polyb.,
Diod., Strabo; 1 Mace. xii. 11.]*
&-51a-p0opla, -as, 7, (fr. advapOopos incorrupt, incor-
ruptible; and this from advadeipw), incorruptibility,
soundness, integrity: of mind, év ry didackadia, Tit. ii.
7 (LT Tr WH adéopiav). Not found in the classics."
aSixéw, -@; [fut. adunow]; 1 aor. Adiknoa; Pass.,
[pres. dducodpac]; 1 aor. ndicnOnv; literally to be adsxos.
1. absolutely; a. to act unjustly or wickedly, to sin:
Rev. xxii. 11; Col. iii. 25. b. to be a criminal, to have
violated the laws in some way: Acts xxv. 11, (often so
a0lKnpa
in Grk. writ. [cf. W. § 40, 2¢.]). ©. to do wrong: 1 Co.
vi. 8; 2 Co. vii. 12. a. to do hurt: Rev. ix. hoe a2:
transitively; a. ri, to do some wrong, sim m some re-
spect: Col. iii. 25 (6 ndiknoe ‘the wrong which he hath
done’). b. twa, to wrong some one, act wickedly
towards him: Acts vii. 26 sq. (by blows); Mt. xx. 13
(by fraud); 2 Co. vil. 2; pass. ddixcio Gat to be
wronged, 2 Co. vii. 12; Acts vii. 24; mid. ddvcovpar
to suffer one’s self to be wronged, take wrong [W.
§ 38, 3; ef. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 87 sq.]: 1 Co.
vi. 7; twa ovdev [B. § 131, 10; W. 227 (213)], Acts
xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12; rwa 7, Philem. 18; [ddcKcovpevor
pucdov dduias (R. V. suffering wrong as the hire of
wrong-doing), 2 Pet. ii. 13 WH Tr mrg.]. ¢. twa,
to hurt, damage, harm (in this sense by Greeks of every
period): Lk. x. 19; Rev. vi. 6; vii. 2 sq.; ix. 4, 10;
xi. 5; pass. od pi) adixnOA ex tod Oavarov shall suffer
no violence from death, Rev. ii. 11.*
&Slknpa, -ros, rd, (ddixew), [fr. Hdt. on], a misdeed [76
GOdukoy .. . dray mpaxOn, adiknua eorw, Aristot. Eth. Nic.
5, 7]: Acts xviii. 14; xxiv. 20; Rev. xviii. 5.*
aSuxla, -as, 7, (ddtxos), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. injustice,
of a judge: Lk. xviii. 6; Ro. ix. 14. 2. unrighteous-
ness of heart and life; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 25 Grsb.;
Acts vill. 23 (see ovvdecpos); Ro. i. 18, 29; ii. 8; vi.
13; 2 Tim. ii. 19; opp. to 7 ddnOea, 1 Co. xiii. 6; 2 Th.
iil. 12; opp. to 7 dS:cavoodvn, Ro. 1ii. 5; Heb. i. 9 Tdf. ;
owing to the context, the guilt of unrighteousness, 1 Jn.
i. 9; darn rijs dSixias deceit which unrighteousness
uses, 2 Th. ii. 10; pucOds ddicias reward (i. e. penalty)
due to unrighteousness, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [see ddicéw, 2 b.
fin.]. b. spec., unrighteousness by which others are
deceived: Jn. vii. 18 (opp. to ddnéOjs); papovas ris
adixias deceitful riches, Lk. xvi. 9 (cf. darn tod mdovtov,
Mt. xiii. 22; others think ‘riches wrongly acquired’;
[others, riches apt to be used unrighteously; cf. vs. 8 and
Mey. ad loc.]) ; kéopos rips ddixias, a phrase having ref-
erence to sins of the tongue, Jas. iii. 6 (cf. kdopos, 8) ;
treachery, Lk. xvi. 8 (oixovopos ris adixias, [al. take it
generally, ‘acting unrighteously’]). 3. a deed violat-
ing law and justice, act of unrighteousness: waca ddikla
duapria éori,1 Jn. v.17; epydrat tis aducias, Lk. xiii. 27;
ai adtxiat iniquities, misdeeds, Heb. viii. 12 (fr. Sept.
Jer. xxxvili. (xxxi.) 34; ef. Dan. iv. 20 (24)); prods
adixias reward obtained by wrong-doing, Acts i. 18;
2 Pet. ii. 15; spec., the wrong of depriving another
of what is his, 2 Co. xii. 13 (where a favor is ironically
called adcxia).*
aBukos, -ov, (Sikn), [fr. Hes. down]; descriptive of one
who violates or has violated justice ; 1. unjust, (of
God as judge): Ro. iii. 5; Heb. vi. 10. 2. of one
who breaks God’s laws, unrighteous, sinful, (see ddicia,
2): [1 Co. vi. 9]; opp. to Sikacos, Mt. v. 45; Acts xxiy.
15; 1 Pet. iii. 18; opp. to evaeBns, 2 Pet. ii. 9; in this
sense acc. to Jewish speech the Gentiles are called
Gtxot, 1 Co. vi. 1 (see auapradds, b. S3) 5 3. spec., of
one who deals fraudulently with others, Lk. xviii. 11 2
who is false to a trust, Lk. xvi. 10 (opp. to TloTOs) }
12
QOUuVaTOS
| deceitful, papwvas, ibid. vs. 11 (for other interpretations
see dd.kia, 2 b.).* ‘ 4
dSlkws, adv., unjustly, undeservedly, without fault: ied
oxewv, 1 Pet. ii 19 [A. V- wrongfully. (Fr. Hdt. on.)]
"ASyelv, 6, Admin, the indecl. prop. name of one of
the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33, where Tdf. reads
rod Adpuelv roo "Apvei for Rec. rou Apap (q- v-), [and WH
txt. substitute the same reading for rod ’ApivadaB rod
’Apdp of R G, but in their mrg.’Addp (q. v. 2) for Adpet ;
on the spelling of the word see their App. p. 155 ].*
6-56kipos, -ov, (Sdxipos), [fr. Eur. down], not standing
the test, not approved; properly of metals and coin,
dpyipuov, Is. i. 22; Prov. xxv. 4; vopsopa, Plat. legg.
v. p. 742 a., al.; hence, which does not prove itself to
be such as it ought: yh, of sterile soil, Heb. vi. 8; ina
moral sense [A. V. reprobate], 1 Co. ix. 27; 2 Co. xiii.
5-7; vods, Ro. i. 283 wept tyv miorw, 2 Tim. iii. 8;
hence, unfit for something: mpos may épyov ayabdv ad.
A Drie te UNS
&-Sodos, -ov, (Sddos), [fr. Pind. down], guileless; of
things, unadulterated, pure: of milk, 1 Pet. ii. 2. [Cf.
Trench § lvi.]*
"A8Spaputrqvds, -7, -ov, adj., of Adramyttium ( Adpapvr-
tiov, Adpapwrreiov, Adpappuresoy [also ’Arpapur., etc., cf.
Poppo, Thue. pt. i. vol. ii. p. 441 sq.; Wetst. on Acts,
as below; WH ‘Adpapvrtnvos, cf. their Intr. § 408 and
App. p. 160]), a sea-port of Mysia: Acts xxvii. 2, [mod-
ern Edremit, Ydramit, Adramiti, etc.; cf. Mc. and S.
s. v. Adramy ttium ].*
’ASplas [WH ‘Adp.], -ov, 6, Adrias, the Adriatic Sea
i. e., in a wide sense, the sea between Greece and Italy:
Acts xxvii. 27, [cf. B. D. s. v. Adria; Dict. of Grk. &
Rom. Geog. s. v. Adriaticum Mare].*
dSpérys [Recs adp.], -nros, 7, or better (cf. Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. ii. 417) ddporns, -jros, [on the accent cf. Ebeling,
Lex. Hom. s. v.; Chandler §§ 634, 635], (fr. ddpdos
thick, stout, full-grown, strong, rich [2 K. x. 6, 11, etc.]),
in Grk. writ. it follows the signif. of the adj. dSpés; once
in the N. T.: 2 Co. viii. 20, bountiful collection, great
liberality, [R. V. bounty]. (dSpoovvn, of an abundant
harvest, Hes. épy. 471.) *
aduvatéw, -@: fut. advvatnaw; (advvatos); a. not to
have strength, to be weak ; always so of persons in classic
Grk. b. a thing ddvvarei, cannot be done, is impos-
sible; so only in the Sept. and N. T.: od« ddvvarjces
mapa 76 Ged [rod Oeod L mrg. T Tr WH] za pipea,
Lk. i. 37 (Sept. Gen. xviii. 14) [al. retain the act. sense
here: from God no word shall be without power, see
mapa, I. b. cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.];
ovdey ddvvatnce: ipiv, Mt. xvii. 20, (Job xlii. 2).*
4-Svvaros, -ov, (Svvayat), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. without
strength, impotent: rois mooi, Acts xiv. 8; fig. of Chris-
tians whose faith is not yet quite firm, Ro. xv. 1 (opp.
to duvarés). 2. impossible (in contrast with Suvarov) :
mapa Twn, for (with) any one, Mt. xix. 26; Mk.x.27; Lk.
Xvili. 27; 7d addy. rod vopov ‘what the law could not do’
(this God effected by, etc.; [al. take 75 d8uv. here as nom.
absol., cf. B. 381 (326); W.574 (534) ; Meyer or Gif-
aow
t
ford ad loc.]}), Ro. viii. 3; foll. by acc. with inf., Heb.
vi. 4,18; x.4; by inf., Heb. xi. 6.*
dS (deidw); common in Grk. of every period; in
Sept. for 73¥; to sing, chant; 1. intrans.: rivi, to the
praise of any one (Judith xvi. 1 (2)), Eph. v. 19; Col.
iii. 16, (in both passages of the lyrical emotion of a
devout and grateful soul). 2. trans.: g@dyv, Rev. v.
Di XLVenS | EX Veroet
del, [see aay], adv., [fr. Hom. down], always; 1. per-
petually, incessantly: Acts vii. 51; 2 Co. iv. 11;'vi. 10;
Hite 12 ee bsii1n10: 2. invariably, at any and every
time when according to the circumstances something is
or ought to be done again: Mk. xv. 8 [T WH om.] (at
every feast); 1 Pet. iii. 15; 2 Pet. i. 12.*
detds,-ov, 6, (like Lat. avis, fr. dys on account of its
wind-like flight [ef. Curtius § 596]), [fr. Hom. down], in
Sept. for Ww, an eagle: Rev. iv.7; viii. 13 (Rec. dyyédov) ;
xii. 14. In Mt. xxiv. 28; Lk. xvii. 37 (asin Job xxxix.
30; Prov. xxx. 17) it is better, since eagles are said
seldom or never to go in quest of carrion, to understand
with many interpreters either the vultur percnopterus,
which resembles an eagle (Plin. h. n. 10, 3 “quarti
generis — viz. aquilarum — est percnopterus”), or the
vultur barbatus. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Adler; [ Tristram,
Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 172 sqq.]. The meaning of
the proverb [cf. exx. in Wetst. on Mt. 1. c.] quoted in
both passages is, ‘where there are sinners (cf. mréya),
there judgments from heaven will not be wanting ’.*
&Lvpos, -ov, (Cyun), Hebr. ND, unfermented, free from
leaven; properly: dpro, Ex. xxix. 2; Joseph. antt.
3, 6,6; hence the neut. plur. ra dupa, N1¥D, unleavened
loaves; 7 €opt) Tav a@pov, NI¥DT IN, the (paschal)
festival at which for seven days the Israelites were
accustomed to eat unleavened bread in commemoration
of their exit from Egypt (Ex. xxiii. 15; Lev. xxiii. 6),
Lk. xxii. 1; 7 mp@rn (sc. nuepa) rdv ag. Mt. xxvi. 17;
Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii.7; ai nuepar ray af. Acts xii. 3 ;
xx. 6; the paschal festival itself is called ra a¢vpa, Mk.
xiv. 1, [cf. 1 Esdr.i. 10,19; W.176 (166); B. 23 (21)].
Figuratively : Christians, if such as they ought to be,
are called dvpor i. e. devoid of the leaven of iniquity,
free from faults, 1 Co. v. 7; and are admonished
éopratew ev atvpors eiduxpweias, to keep festival with the
unleavened bread of sincerity and truth, vs. 8. (The
word occurs twice in prof. auth., viz. Athen. 3, 74
(dprov) dvpov, Plat. Tim. p. 74 d. d{upos cap€ flesh not
yet quite formed, [add Galen de alim. fac. 1, 2].)*
*Atép, Azor, the indecl. prop. name of one of the
ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 13 sq.*
”Atwros, -ov, 7, TW, Azotus, Ashdod, one of the five
chief cities of the Philistines, lying between Ashkelon
and Jamnia [i. e. Jabneel] and near the Mediterranean :
Acts viii. 40; at present a petty village, Msdid. A suc-
cinct history of the city is given by Gesenius, Thesaur.
iii. p. 1366; Rauwmer, Palistina, p. 174; [Alex.’s Kitto
or Me. and S. s. v. Ashdod ].*
sea . : >
dnSla, -as, 4, (fr. andys, and this fr. a priv. and 7d0s
pleasure, delight), [fr. Lysip. down] ; 1. unpleasant-
13
abetéw
ness, annoyance. 2. dislike, hatred: év dndia, cod.
Cantabr. in Lk. xxiii. 12 for Rec. év éyOpa.*
hp, depos, 6, (dnuu, do, [cf. dvepos, init.]), the air (par-
ticularly the lower and denser, as distinguished from the
higher and rarer 6 aiOjp, cf. Hom. Il. 14, 288), the at-
mospheric region: Acts xxii. 23; 1 Th. iv. 17; Rev. ix.
2; xvi. 17; 6 dpywy tis eEovaias rod dépos in Eph. ii. 2
signifies ‘the ruler of the powers (spirits, see é£oucia
4 c. 88.) in the air,’ i. e. the devil, the prince of the de-
mons that according to Jewish opinion fill the realm of
air (cf. Mey. ad loc.; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air; Stuart
in Bib. Sacr. for 1843, p. 139 sq.]). Sometimes indeed,
dnp denotes a hazy, obscure atmosphere (Hom. II. 17,
644; 3,381; 5, 356, etc.; Polyb. 18, 3,7), but is nowhere
quite equiv. to oxdros, —the sense which many injudi-
ciously assign it in Eph. lc. dépa dépew (cf. verberat
ictibus auras, Verg. Aen. 5, 377, of pugilists who miss
their aim) i.e. to contend in vain, 1 Co. ix. 26; eis
dépa Aadetv (verba ventis profundere, Lucr. 4, 929 (932))
‘to speak into the air’ i. e. without effect, used of
those who speak what is not understood by the hearers,
1p Cor xiv 9
abavacrla, -as, 7. (aOavatos), immortality: 1 Co. xv.
53 sq.; 1 Tim. vi. 16 where God is described as 6 povos
éxav abavaciay, because he possesses it essentially — ‘ex
THs oikelas ovalas, ovK EK OeAnpatos GXov, KaOarrep ot Aouror
mavres aOavaror’ Justin, quaest. et resp. ad orthod. 61
p- 84 ed. Otto. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) *
&-Oéptros, -ov, a later form for the ancient and prefer-
able aOéusoros, (Oepites, Oepiotos, Oepitw, Oeuis law,
right), contrary to law and justice, prohibited by law,
illicit, criminal: 1 Pet. iv. 3 [here A. V. abominable];
adéuirov eori rue with inf., Acts x. 28.*
d-beos, -ov, (eos), [fr. Pind. down], without God, know-
ing and worshipping no God, in which sense Ael. v. h.
2, 31 declares dru pndels tov BapBapwyv aeos; in classic
auth. generally slighting the gods, impious, repudiating
the gods recognized by the state, in which sense certain
Greek philosophers, the Jews (Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 14, 4),
and subsequently Christians were called Geo. by the
heathen (Justin, apol. 1, 13, etc.). In Eph. ii. 12 of
one who neither knows nor worships the true God;
so of the heathen (cf. 1 Th. iv. 5; Gal. iv. 8); Clem.
Alex. protr. ii. 23 p. 19 Pott. dOéous . . . of rov dvras byra
Gedv nyvonxact, Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 25 aiyumrvaki abedrns,
Hos. iv. 15 Symm. otkos a6etas a house in which idols are
worshipped, Ignat. ad Trall. 10 deo rovreoriv amioroe
(of the Docetae); [al. understand Eph. 1. c. passively
deserted of God, Vulg. sine Deo; on the various mean-
ings of the word see Mey. (or Ellic.) ].*
&-erpos, -ov, (Gecpds), lawless, [A. V. wicked]; of one
who breaks through the restraints of law and gratifies
his lusts: 2 Pet. ii. 7; iii. 17. [Sept., Diod., Philo,
Joseph., Plut.]*
dOeréw, -3; fut. dbernow; 1 aor. nOérnoa; a word met
with first (yet very often) in Sept. and Polyb.; a.
properly, to render dOerov; do away with Oerov tT i. e.
something laid down, prescribed, established : diaOnxny, Gal.
abérnats
iii. 15, (1 Mace. xi. 36; 2 Mace. xiii. 25, etc.) ; acc. to
the context, ‘to act towards anything as though it were
annulled’; hence to deprive a law of force by opinions
or acts opposed to it, to transgress it, Mk. vii. 9; Heb.
x. 28, (Ezek. xxii. 26); miorw, to break one’s promise
or engagement, 1 Tim. v. 12; (Polyb. 8, 2, 5; 11, 29, 3,
al.; Diod.-excerpt. [i. e. de virt. et vit.] p. 562, 67).
Hence _b. to thwart the efficacy of anything, nullify,
make void, frustrate: rv Bovdjy rod Oeod, Lk. vii. 30
(they rendered inefficacious the saving purpose of God) ;
riv ovveow to render prudent plans of no effect, 1 Co.
i. 19 (Is. xxix. 14 [where xpvipo, yet cf. Bos’s note]).
c. to reject, refuse, slight: tiv xapw tov Geod, Gal. ii. 21
[al. refer this to b.]; of persons: Mk. vi. 26 (by break-
ing the promise given her); Lk. x. 16; Jn. xii. 48;
1 Th. iv. 8; Jude 8 (for which xarapoveiy is used in
the parallel pass. 2 Pet. ii. 10). [For exx. of the use
of this word see Soph. Lex. s. v.]*
a0érnots, -ews, 9, (dOeréw, q. v.; like vouOérnovs fr.
voubereiv), abolition: Heb. vii. 18; ix. 26; (found occa-
sionally in later authors, as Cicero ad Att. 6, 9; Diog.
Laért. 3, 39, 66; in the grammarians rejection; more
frequently in eccl. writ.).*
*AOfvat, -av, ai, (on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166)),
Athens, the most celebrated city of Greece: Acts xvii.
Tose wexvili essed hs tise llse
*AOnvaios, -aia, -aiov, Athenian: Acts xvii. 21 sq.*
é0A€w, -@; [1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. abAnon];
(GOdos a contest); to engage in a contest, contend in
public games (e. g. Olympian, Pythian, Isthmian), with
the poniard [?], gauntlet, quoit, in wrestling, running,
or any other way: 2 Tim. ii. 5; (often in classic auth.
who also use the form d6Xevw). [COMP.: cvv-abdéw. ]*
GANors, -ews, 7, contest, combat, (freq. fr. Polyb. down) ;
fig. d@Anots maOnudrwr a struggle with sufferings, trials,
Heb. x. 32; [of martyrdom, Ign. mart. 4; Clem. mart. 25].*
ABpoitw: pf. pass. ptep. nOpocpévos; (fr. dOpdos i. q.
‘Opoos [a noisy crowd, noise], with a copulative [see A,
a, 2]); to collect together, assemble; pass. to be assembled,
to convene: Lk. xxiv. 33 LT Tr WH. ([Soph.,] Xen.,
Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.; O. T. Apocr.; sometimes in
Sept. for yap.) [Comp.: én-, cvv-abpoite. ] *
dbupéw, -6 ; common among the Greeks fr. [Aeschyl.,]
Thuc. down; to be Gvpos (Gvuds spirit, courage), to be
disheartened, dispirited, broken in spirit: Col. iii. 21.
(Sept. 1S. i. 6 sq., ete.; Judith vii. 22; 1 Mace. iv.
27.) *
4@a0s [R G Tr], more correctly adégos (L WH and T
[but not in his Sept. There is want of agreement among
both the ancient gramm. and modern scholars; cf. Steph.
Thes. i. col. 875 c.; Lob. Path. Element. i. 440 sq. (cf.
ii. 377) ; see I, «]), -ov, (Gof [i. €. Owif, cf. Etym. Mag.
p: 26, 24] punishment), [fr. Plat. down], unpunished,
innocent: atua abgov, Mt. xxvii. 4 [Tr mre. WH txt.
Sixaov}, (Deut. xxvii. 25; 1 S. xix. 5, etc.; 1 Mace. i.
37; 2 Macc. i. 8); did twos, after the Hebr. 1) *pa
({Num. xxxii. 22; ef. Gen. xxiv. 41; 2S. iii. 28; W.197
(185); B. 158 (138)]), ‘innocent (and therefore far)
14
Adio:
from,’ innocent of, Matt. xxvii. 24 (the guilt of the mur-
der of this innocent man cannot be laid upon me) ; dé
ris dpaprias, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2 [ef. Num. v. 31].
The Greeks say aOg@os Tivos [both in the sense of free
from and unpunished for].*
atyeos [WH ~-yos; see their App. p. 154, and I, tl,
-ela, -etov, (al, gen. -yds goat, male or female), of a goat,
(cf. apndetos, inmecos, vewos, mpoBareos, etc.) : Heb. xi.
37. [From Hom. down. ]*
alyiadds, -o0, 6, the shore of the sea, beach, (fr. Hom.
down]: Mt. xiii. 2,48; Jn. xxi. 4; Acts xxi. 5; xxvii.
39,40. (Many derive the word from dyvupu and das, as
though equiv. to dxrj, the place where the sea breaks ;
others fr. atyes billows and as [Curtius § 140; Vanicek p.
83]; others fr. dicow and dds [Schenkl, L. and S., s. v.],
the place where the sea rushes forth, bounds forward.) *
Alytrrvos, -a, -ov, a gentile adjective, Egyptian: Acts
Vil 225045) 287 kod SoeldeDe xia zoe
Atyutros, -ov, 7, [always without the art., B. 87 (76) ;
W. § 18, 5 a.], the proper name of a well-known coun-
try, Egypt: Mt. ii. 13 sq.; Acts ii. 10; Heb. iii. 16, etc. ;
more fully yj Atyumtos, Acts vii. 36 [not L WH Tr txt.],
40; xiii. 17; Heb. viii. 9; Jude 5, (Ex. v. 12; vi. 26,
etc.; 1 Mace. i. 19; Bar. i. 19 sq., ete.) ; yn Atyutros,
Acts vii. 11; éy Atyimrov sc. yn, Heb. xi. 26 Lchm.,
but cf. Bleek ad loc.; B. 171 (149); [W. 384 (359)].
In Rev. xi. 8 Avy. is figuratively used for Jerusalem i. e.
for the Jewish nation viewed as persecuting Christ and
his followers, and so to be likened to the Egyptians in
their ancient hostility to the true God and their endeav-
ors to crush his people.
atStos, -ov, (for deidios fr. dei), eternal, everlasting :
(Sap. vii. 26) Ro. i. 20; Jude 6. (Hom. hymn. 29, 3;
Hes. scut. 310, and fr. Thuc. down in prose; [freq. in
Philo, e. g. de profug. § 18 (¢w7 aidios), § 31; de opif.
mund. § 2, § 61; de cherub. § 1, § 2, § 3; de post.
Cain. § 11 fin. Syn. see aidmos].) *
alSas, (-cos) -ots, 7; fr. Hom. down; a sense of shame,
modesty: 1 Tim.ii.9; reverence, Heb. xii. 28 (Aarpevew
Ge peta aidois kai evAaBeias, but L T Tr WH eiAaBeias
kat d€ous). [SYN. aid@s, aio xvvn: Ammonius distin-
guishes the words as follows, aidas cali aicytvn duadépet,
dre» pev aides eorw evtpom) mpds Exacrov, os ceBopevas
tus Exe ainxtyn & ed’ ois Exaoros duaptav aicyvverat, os
pa Sov ru mpagas. Kal aideirat pev tis Tov matépa* aicxuve-
tat d€ bs peGvoxerat, etc., etc.; accordingly aié. is promi-
nently objective in its reference, having regard to
others; while aicy. is subjective, making reference to
one’s self and one’s actions. Cf. Schmidt ch. 140. It is
often said that ‘aid. precedes and prevents the shame-
ful act, aicy. reflects upon its consequences in the shame
it brings with it’ (Cope, Aristot. rhet. 5, 6, 1). aid.
is the nobler word, aicx. the stronger; while “aid. would
always restrain a good man from an unworthy act, aicy.
would sometimes restrain a bad one.” Trench §§ xix.
xX."
AlBiow, -oros, 6, (aidw to burn, and a [dy] the face;
swarthy), Ethiopian (Hebr. wid): Acts viii. 27, here
ela
the reference is to upper Ethiopia, called Habesh or
Abyssinia, a country of Africa adjoining Egypt and
including the island Meroé; [see Dillmann in Schenkel
i. 285 sqq.; Alex.’s Kitto or Mc. and S. s. v. Ethiopia.
Cf. Bib. Sacr. for 1866, p. 515].*
alpa, -ros, rd, blood, whether of men or of animals;
1. a. simply and generally: Jn. xix. 34; Rev. viii. 7
Sq. ; xi. 6; xvi. 3 sq. 6° (on which passages cf. Ex. vii.
20 sqq-) 3 xix. 135 vos atwaros, Mk. v. 25, [(anyy ap.
29)]; Lk. viii. 43 sq.; O@pouBot aiwaros, Lk. xxii. 44
[L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where
the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden,
Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; cf. Lev. iii. 17; vii. 16 (26);
xvii. 10; see Knobel on Lev. vii. 26 sq.; [Kalisch on
Lev., Preliminary Essay § 1]; Riickert, Abendmahl, p.
94. b. As it was anciently believed that the blood is
the seat of the life (Lev. xvii. 11; [cf. Delitzsch, Bibl.
Psychol. pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans. p. 281 sqq.)]), the
phrase odpé x. afua (D1) Vw3, a common phrase in Rab-
binical writers), or in inverse order aipa x. cap&, denotes
man’s living body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co.
xv. 50; Heb. ii. 14, and so hints at the contrast between
man and God (or even the more exalted creatures, Eph.
vi. 12) as to suggest his feebleness, Eph. vi. 12 (Sir. xiv.
18), which is conspicuous as respects the knowledge of
divine things, Gal. i. 16; Mt. xvi.17. ec. Since the
first germs of animal life are thought to be in the blood
(Sap. vii. 2; Eustath. ad Il. 6, 211 (ii. 104, 2) rd d€ aiparos
avti Tov oméppatos hacw of cool, as Tov oméppatos VAnY
70 aiva €xyovros), the word serves to denote generation
and origin (in the classics also): Jn. i. 13 (on the plur.
cf. W.177 (166)); Acts xvii. 26 [R G]. d. It is
used of those things which by their redness resemble
blood : af. crapvAjs the juice of the grape [‘ the blood
of grapes,’ Gen. xlix. 11; Deut. xxxii. 14], Sir. xxxix.
26; 1.15; 1 Mace. vi. 34, ete.; Achill. Tat. ii. 2; ref-
erence to this is made in Rev. xiv. 18-20. eis atya,
of the moon, Acts ii. 20 (Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)), i. gq. ds aipa,
Rey. vi. 12. 2. blood shed or to be shed by violence
(very often also in the classics); a.: Lk. xiii. 1 (the
meaning is, whom Pilate had ordered to be massacred
while they were sacrificing, so that their blood mingled
with the blood [yet cf. W. 623 (579)] of the victims) ;
ai. dOgov [or dixaov Tr mrg. WH txt.] the blood of an
innocent [or righteous] man viz. to be shed, Mt. xxvii.
A; éxxeiv and éexxdveww aiva (D1 DY, Gen. ix. 6; Is. lix.
7, etc.) to shed blood, slay, Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 50;
Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rev. xvi. 6* [here Tdf.
aipata]; hence aiua is used for the bloody death itself:
Mt. xxiii. 30, 35; xxvii. 24; Lk. xi. 51; Acts [ii. 19,
yet cf. 1d. above;] xx. 26; Rev. xvii. 6; péxpts atpa-
tos unto blood i. e. so as to undergo a bloody death,
Heb. xii. 4, (rdv airiov ris... uéxpis aipatos ordcews,
Heliod. 7, 8); 71) aiparos ‘price of blood’ i. e. price
received for murder, Mt. xxvii. 6; dypés aiyaros field
bought with the price of blood, Mt. xxvii. 8, i. q. xepiov
aiparos, Acts i. 19 — unless in this latter passage we
prefer the explanation, which agrees better with the
15
aipoppoée
context, ‘the field dyed with the blood of Judas’;
the guilt and punishment of bloodshed, in the following
Hebraistic expressions: év air aipara (Rec. alya [so L
Tr WH)]) ecipéén i.e. it was discovered that she was
guilty of murders, Rev. xviii. 24 (cf. médis aipdroy,
Ezek. xxiv. 6); rd aipa avrod ef’ jpas (sc. édXOerw) let
the penalty of the bloodshed fall on us, Mt. xxvii. 25;
76 aipa ipav emi ry Kehadjy ipav (sc. éXOéra) let the
guilt of your destruction be reckoned to your own ac-
count, Acts xviii. 6 (cf. 2S. i. 16; Josh. ii. 19, etc.) ;
endyew 7d aipd twos emi twa to cause the punishment of
a murder to be visited on any one, Acts v. 28; éx(nreiw
TO aipa twos amo twos (/D 1 /D DI wpa, 2 S. iv. 11;
Ezek. iii. 18, 20; xxxiii. 8), to exact of any one the
penalty for another’s death, Lk. xi. 50; the same idea
is expressed by éxd:xeiy 7d alua twos, Rev. vi. 10; xix.
2. b. It is used specially of the blood of sacrificial
victims having a purifying or expiating power (Lev.
xvil. 11)):) Heb: ix. 7, 12) sq. 18-22) 255 x.4 > xin 28);
xiii. 11. c. Frequent mention is made in the N. T.
of the blood of Christ (aiva tov Xpiorov, 1 Co. x. 16;
Tov Kupiov, xi. 27; Tod dpviov, Rev. vii. 143; xii. 11, cf.
xix. 13) shed on the cross (al. rod oravpod, Col. i. 20) for
the salvation of many, Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. xiv. 24, cf.
Lk. xxii. 20; the pledge of redemption, Eph. i. 7 (dzo-
AUvrpwats dia Tod al. ad’tod; so too in Col. i. 14 Rec.);
1 Pet. i. 19 (see adyopatw, 2 b.); having expiatory effi-
cacy, Ro. iii. 25; Heb. ix. 12; by which believers are
purified and are cleansed from the guilt of sin, Heb. ix.
14; xii. 24; [xill. 12]; 1 Jn.i. 7 (cf. 1 Jn. v. 6, 8); Rev.
i. 5; vil. 14; 1 Pet. i. 2; are rendered acceptable to
God, Ro. v. 9, and find access into the heavenly sanc-
tuary, Heb. x. 19; by which the Gentiles are brought
to God and the blessings of his kingdom, Eph. ii. 13,
and in general all rational beings on earth and in
heaven are reconciled to God, Col. i. 20; with whicl,
Christ purchased for himself the church, Acts xx. 28,
and gathered it for God, Rev. v. 9. Moreover, since
Christ’s dying blood served to establish new religious
institutions and a new relationship between men and
God, it is likened also to a federative or covenant sacri-
fice: 16 aia tis Svabnkns the blood by the shedding of
which the covenant should be ratified, Mt. xxvi. 28;
Mk. xiv. 24, or has been ratified, Heb. x. 29; xiii. 20
(cf. ix. 20); add, 1 Co. xi. 25; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject
this pass. ] (in both which the meaning is, ‘this cup con-
taining wine, an emblem of blood, is rendered by the
shedding of my blood an emblem of the new covenant’),
1 Co. xi. 27; (cf. Cic. pro Sestio 10, 24 foedus san-
guine meo ictum sanciri, Liv. 23, 8 sanguine Hannibalis
sanciam Romanum foedus). mivew 76 aipa adrod (i. e.
of Christ), to appropriate the saving results of Christ’s
death, Jn. vi. 53 sq.56. [ Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 34 sq.]®
aiparekxuola, -as, 7, (aja and éxyvvw), shedding of
blood: Heb. ix. 22. Several times also in eccl. writ.*
aipoppo¢w, -; to be aiudppoos (aia and péw), to suffer
from a flow of blood: Mt. ix. 20. (Sept. Lev. xv. 38,
where it means menstruous, and in medical writ.) *
Aivéas
Alvéas, -ov, 6, Ae’neas, the prop. name of the para-
lytic cured by Peter: Acts ix. 33 sq.”
alverts, -ews, 9, (aivéo), praise: Ovoia aiverews (nt
minn, Lev. vii. 13), Heb. xiii, 15 @ thank-offering,
[A. V. ‘sacrifice of praise ’], presented to God for some
benefit received; see Ovaia, b. (aiveous often occurs in
Sept., but not in prof. auth.) *
alvéw, -6; (found in prof. auth. of every age [“ only
twice in good Attic prose” (where émaw. mapaw. etc.
take its place), Veitch], but esp. freq. in Sept. and the
Apoer. of the O. T.; from aivos); to praise, extol: tov
Oedv, Lk. ii. 13, 20; xix. 87; xxiv. 53 [WH om. Tr txt.
br.]; Acts ii. 47; iii, 8 sq.; Ro. xv. 11; with dat. of
person, 76 Oe@, to sing praises in honor of God, Rev.
xix. 5 L T Tr WH, as Sept. in 2 Chr. vii. 3 (for
o) m7), 1 Chr. xvi. 36; xxiii. 5; Jer. xx. 13 ete. (for
6 Son); [W.§ 381, 1£; B. 176 (153). Comp. én-, map-
awvea. |.*
alvtypa, -ros, ro, (common fr. [Pind. frag. 165 (190), ]
Aeschyl. down; fr. aiviocopat or aivitropai te to express
something obscurely, [fr. atvos, q. v.]); 1. an obscure
saying, an enigma, Hebr. 11 (Judg. xiv. 13, Sept.
mpoBrnua). 2. an obscure thing: 1 Co. xiii. 12, where
év aiviypare is not equiv. to aivrypatixds i. €. duaupds
obscurely, but denotes the object in the discerning of
which we are engaged, as BAémew év tum, Mt. vi. 4; cf.
De Wette ad loc.; the apostle has ia mind Num. xii.
8 Sept.: év cider Kal od Ov aimypareav. [Al. take év lo-
cally, of the sphere in which we are looking; al. refer
the pass. to 1. and take év instrumentally. ] *
atvos, -ov, 6, (often used by the Grk. poets) ; l. a
saying, proverb. 2. praise, laudatory discourse: Mt.
xxi. 16 (Ps. viii. 3); Lk. xviii. 43.*
Aivév, 7, (either a strengthened form of {yt and equiv.
to ;7y, or a Chaldaic plur. i. q. 12°) springs; [al. al.]),
Aenon, indecl. prop. name, either of a place, or of a
fountain, not far from Salim: Jn. iii. 23, [thought to be
Wady Far’ah, running from Mt. Ebal to the Jordan; see
Conder in “ Pal. Explor. Fund” for July 1874, p.191 sq.3
Tent Work in Palestine, i. 91 sq. ; esp. Stevens in Journ. of
Exeget. Soc., Dec. 1883, pp. 128-141. Cf. B.D. Am. ed.].*
1. (fr. aipéw), act of taking, cap-
ture: ths wodews, the storming of a city; in prof. auth.
2. (fr. aipéoua), choosing, choice, very often in prof.
writ.: Sept. Lev. xxii. 18; 1 Mace. viii. 30. 3. that
which is chosen, a chosen course of thought and action;
hence one’s chosen opinion, tenet; ace. to the context,
an opinion varying from the true exposition of the
Christian faith (heresy): 2 Pet. ii. 1 (cf. De Wette ad
loc.), and in eecl. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. 4. a
body of men separating themselves from others and
following their own tenets [a sect or party]: as the Sad-
ducees, Acts v.17; the Pharisees, Acts xv. Ne 2.0.00, 3
the Christians, Acts xxiv. 5, 14 (in both instances with
a suggestion of reproach) ; xxviii. 22, (in Diog. Laért.
1 (18,) 18 sq., al., used of the schools of philosophy).
5. dissensions arising from diversity of opinions and
aims: Gal. v. 20; 1 Co. xi19. [Cf Mey. ll. ce.; B.D.
“ is
aiperis, -ews, 7 5
16
apo
Am. ed. s. v. Sects; Burton, Bampt. Lect. for 1829;
Campbell, Diss. on the Gospels, diss. ix. pt. iv.] *
aipertto: 1 aor. ppériaa [ Treg. jp., see I,¢]; (fr. aipe-
rés, see aipéw); to choose: Mt. xii. 18. (Often in Sept. in
O. T. Apocr. and in eccl. writ. ; the mid. is found in
Ctes. Pers. § 9 [cf. Hdt. ed. Schweig. vi. 2, p. 354]. Cf.
Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 144.) *
aiperixds, -7, -ov, [see aipéw]; 1. fitted or able to
take or choose a thing; rare in prof. auth. 2. schis-
matic, factious, a follower of false doctrine: Tit. iii. 10.*
aipéw, -6: [thought by some to be akin to @ypa, dypéw,
xelp, Eng. grip, ete.; cf. Bttm. Lexil. i. 131— but see
Curtius § 117]; to take. In the N. T. in the mid.
only : fut. aipnoowa; 2 aor. eihounv, but G L T Tr WH,
eitdunv, 2 Th. ii. 18, cf. [Tdf Proleg. p. 123; WH.
App. p. 165;] W. § 13, 1a.; B. 40 (85), see amépyouat
init.; [ptep. Aopevos, Heb. xi. 25]; to take for one’s self, to
choose, prefer: Phil. i. 22; 2 Th. ii. 13; paddor foll.
by inf. with # (common in Attic), Heb. xi. 25. [Come.:
dv-, ad-, d:-, €&, Kab-, mept-, mpo-arpéw. | *
atpw (contr. fr. poet. deipw); fut. dpe; 1 aor. Apa,
inf. dpa, impy. dpov; pf. jpxa (Col. ii. 14); Pass.,
[pres. aipopat]| ; pf. Appac (Jn. XX. is 1 aor. 7pOny ;
(on the rejection of iota subscr. in these tenses see
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 418, 439 ;[W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut.
apOnoounar; [fr. Hom. down]; in the Sept. generally i. q.
RWI; to lift up, raise. 1. to raise up; a. to raise
from the ground, take up: stones, Jn. viii. 59; serpents,
Mk. xvi. 18; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b. to raise up-
wards, elevate, lift up: the hand, Rev. x. 5; the eyes,
Jn. xi. 41; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, cry
out, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts iv. 24, (also in prof. writ.) ;
THY Wux7y, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, affect strongly
(with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, etc.); in Jn. x.
24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and
hope, cf. Liicke [or Meyer] ad loc. c. to draw up:
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 (avacrmav, Hab. i. 15); oxadnv, Acts
XXvii. 17; anchors from the bottom of the sea, Acts xxvii.
13, where supply tas a@ykdpas; cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; [W.
594 (552); B. 146 (127)]. 2. to take upon one’s self
and carry what has been raised, to bear: twa émi xeipay,
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11, (Ps. xe. (xci.) 12); a sick man,
Mk. ii. 3; vyov, Mt. xi. 29 (Lam. iii. 27); a bed, Mt.
ix.6; Mk. ii. 9, 11 sq.; Lk. v. 24 sq.; Jn. v. 8-12;
tov otavpov, Mt. [x. 38 Lchm. mrg.]; xvi. 24; xxvii. 32;
Lk. ix. 23; Mk. viii. 34; x.21 [in R Lbr.]; xv. 21; [Aé6ov,1
Rey. xviii. 21; to carry with one, [A. V. take]: Mk. vi. 8:
Lk. ix. 3; xxii. 36. Both of these ideas are expressed
in class. Grk. by the mid. atpeo@au. 3. to bear away
what has been raised, carry off; a. to move from its
place: Mt. xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23, (dpOyre be thou taken up,
removed [B. 52 (45)], sc. from thy place); Mt. xxii.
13 [Rec.]; Jn. ii. 16; xi. 39, 41; xx. 1. b. to take
off or away what is attached to anything: Jn. xix. 31,
38 sq.; to tear away, Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; to rend
away, cut off, Jn. xv. 2. e. to remove: 1 Co. v. 2
(cast out from the church, where dp67 should be read
for Rec. ¢£ap0q); tropically: faults, Eph. iv. 31; nw
> ie
ata Pavopar
dpapriay, Jn. i. 29, [386 Lehm. in br.], to remove the guilt
and punishment of sin by expiation, or to cause that sin
be neither imputed nor punished (aipew dudprnya, 1 S.
Xv. 255 avounya, 1 S. xxv. 28, i. e. to grant pardon for
an offence) ; but in 1 Jn. iii. 5 ras duaprias jydy aipew
is to cause our sins to cease, i. e. that we no longer sin,
while we enter into fellowship with Christ, who is free
from sin, and abide in that fellowship, cf. vs. 6. d. to
carry off, carry away with one: Mt. xiv. 12, 20; xv. 37;
xx. 145; xxiv. 17 sq.; Mk. vi. 29, 43; viii. 8, 19 sq.;
Salis IY Sop an cos MA ease basil Bid by b-ocrey Wey tlie
Acts xx. 9. e. to appropriate what is taken: Lk.
Xix. 21 sq.; Mk. xv. 24. f. to take away from another
what is his or what is committed to him, to take by force:
Lk. vi. 30; xi. 52; ri dmo with gen. of pers., Mt. xiii.
IORI A Oiexexvn im ly kevalilvel 2.6 lS se xiK. 24, 26%
[Mtscxxy..29) ;:\Miktiv.(15), 253° In. x.’ 185 xvii 22’
perhaps also with the mere gen. of the pers. from whom
anything is taken, Lk. vi. 29; xi. 22; Jn. xi. 48, unless
one prefer to regard these as possessive gen. g. to take
and apply to any use: Acts xxi. 11; 1 Co. vi. 15. h. to
take from among the living, either by a natural death,
Jn. xvii. 15 (é€k Tod Koopou take away from intercourse
with the world), or by violence, Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk.
xxiii. 18; Jn. xix. 15; Acts xxi. 36; with the addition
of do ths yns, Acts xxii. 225; aiperar ard rhs yns 7 Cw)
avrov, of a bloody death inflicted upon one, Acts viii. 33
(Is. lili. 8). i. of things; to take out of the way, de-
stroy: xetpoypapov, Col. ii. 14; cause to cease: ri
xptow, Acts viii. 33 (Is. liii. 8). [Comp.: am-, é&, én-,
per-, ovv-, Umrep-aipo. |*
aicOdvopar: 2 aor. 7oOdunv; [fr. Aeschyl. down];
depon. mid. to perceive ; 1. by the bodily senses ;
2. with the mind; to understand: Lk. ix. 45.*
ale Onots, -ews, 7, (aicOavopa.), (fr. Eurip. down], per-
ception, not only by the senses but also by the intellect ;
cognition, discernment; (in the Sept., Prov. i. 22; ii. 10,
etc., i. q. Ny): Phil. i. 9, of moral discernment, the
understanding of et hical matters, as is plain from what
is added in vs. 10.*
alcOyrfpiov, -ov, To, an organ of perception, external
sense, [Hippoc.]; Plat. Ax. 366 a.; Aristot. polit. 4, 3,
9, al.; faculty of the mind for perceiving, understanding,
judging, Heb. v. 14, (Jer. iv. 19 aigOnr. THs Kapdias,
4 Mace. ii. 22 [com. text] ra évdov aiaOnrnpia).*
aloxpoxepSijs, -és, (aioxpds and xepdos; cf. alaxporabys
in Philo [de merc. meretr. § 4]), eager for base gain,
[greedy of filthy lucre]: 1 Tim. iii. 3 Rec., 8; Tit. i. 7.
(Hdt. 1, 187; Xen., Plat., al.; [ef. turpilucricupidus,
Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 63].) *
aloxpoxepSas, adv., from eagerness for base gain, [ for
filthy lucre]: 1 Pet. v. 2, cf. Tit. i 11. Not found
elsewhere.*
alex podoyla, -as, 7), (fr. aicxporoyos, and this fr. atoxpés
and éyw), foul speaking (Tertull. turpiloquium), low and
obscene speech, [R. V. shameful speaking]: Col. iii. 8.
(Xen., Aristot., Polyb.) [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ; Trench
Ki 30.6:0 046 fig
UT
Saawy,
aLTEW
aloxpés, -d, -dv, (fr. aioxos baseness, disgrace), base, dis-
honorable: 1 Co. xi. 6; xiv. 35; Eph. v. 12; Tit. i.11*
alexpérys, -nTos, 7, baseness, dishonor: Eph. v. 4
[A. V. filthiness]. (Plat. Gorg. 525 a.)*
alexivn, -ns, 9, (atoxos [cf. aicxpds]) ; 1. subjec-
tively, the confusion of one who is ashamed of anything,
sense of shame: er aioxivns suffused with shame, Lk.
xiv. 9; rd xpumta tis alcxtmms those things which
shame conceals, opp. to pavépwars ris édnOetas, 2 Co. iv.
2 (evil arts of which one ought to be ashamed). 2. ob-
jectively, ignominy: visited on one by the wicked, Heb.
xii. 2; which ought to arise from guilt, Phil. iii. 19
(opp. to 6d£a). 3. a thing to be ashamed of: 4 aloxtvn
THs yupvdrnros (gen. of appos.) nakedness to be ashamed
of, Rev. iii. 18, ef. xvi. 15; plur. [ef. W. 176 (166)] af
aicyivat basenesses, disgraces, shameful deeds, Jude 13.
[(Aeschyl., Hdt., al.) Syn. see aides, fin.]*
alcxive: (aicyos [cf. aicypds]); 1. to disfigure:
mpdcwrov, Hom. Il. 18, 24, and many others. Zeato
dishonor: Sept. Prov. xxix. 15. 3. to suffuse with
shame, make ashamed: Sir. xiii. 7. In the N. T. only
pass., aioxvvonar; fut. aicyvvOjoopar; 1 aor. noxvvOnv; to
be suffused with shame, be made ashamed, be ashamed :
21 Co xesst Phila 206M PetiiveedGe py aioyvvOdpev
dm avrod that we may not in shame shrink from him,
1 Jn. ii. 28 (Sir. xxi. 22 alcyuvOnoerar amd mpoodrov
[Is. i. 29; Jer. xii. 13; cf. B. § 147, 2]); foll. by inf.
(on which see W. 346 (325)), Lk. xvi. 8. [Comp.: éz-
(-yat), kat-arxive. ]*
airéw, -@; fut. airnow; 1 aor. #tnoa; pt. #tnka; Mid.,
pres. airodpar; impf. yrovuny; fut. airnoowar; 1 aor.
nrnoapny ; [fr. Hom. down]; to ask; mid. to ask for
one’s self, request for one’s self; absol.: Jas. i. 6; Mt.
vii. 7; mid., Jas. iv. 3; Jn. xvi. 26; Mk. xv. 83 airei-
oat rt, Jn. xv. 7; Mt. xiv..7; Mk. vi. 24; x. 38; xi. 24;
xy. 43; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq.3 Lk. xxiii. 52; Acts xxv. 3,15,
etc. ; aireiv with acc. of the pers. to whom the request
is made: Mt. v. 42; vi. 8; Lk. vi. 303; airetoOac with
ace. of the pers. asked for — whether to be released,
Mt. xxvii. 20; Mk. xv. 6 [here T WH Tr mre. mapair.
q. v-]; Lk. xxiii. 25; or bestowed as a gift, Acts xiii.
21; aireiy re and twos, Mt. xx. 20 L Tr txt. WH txt.;
(kar 20 Mire Warts a led ves Lo, We ii WEEE (so
airetoOat in Plut. Galb. 20) [ef. B. 149 (180)]; rt mapa
twos, Acts iii. 2; Mt. xx. 20 RG T Tr mre. WH mrg.;
Jas. i. 53.1 Jn. v. 15 R'G; foll. by the inf., Jn. iv. 95
mid., Acts ix. 2; [airety ru ev r. dvduate Xpiorov, Jn. xiv.
13; xvi. 24 (see dvopa, 2 €.); Tl ev TH mpocevyn, Mt.
xxi. 22]5 atreiv twa 71, Mt. vii. 9; Lk. xi. 11; Mk. vi.
22; Jn. [xiv. 14 T but L WH Tr mrg. br.]; xvi. 23;
tmép twos foll. by iva, Col. i. 9 [ef. B. 237 (204)]; airet-
oa with the acc. and inf., Lk. xxiii. 23; Acts iii. 14;
with inf. only, Acts vii. 46 (yrnoaro eipeiv he asked that
he himself might find ; others wrongly translate #rnoaro
desired) ; Eph. iii. 18. With the idea of demanding
prominent : aireiv rt, Lk. i. 63; 1 Co. i. 225 revd vu, Lk.
xii. 48; 1 Pet. iii. 15.
[The constructions of this word in the Greek Bible, the
aiTnpa
Apost. Fathers, etc., are exhibited in detail by Prof. Ezra
Abbot in the No. Am. Rev. for Jan. 1872, p. 182 sq. He
there shows also (in opposition to Trench, § xl., and others)
that it is not “the constant word for the seeking of the infe-
rior from the superior,” and so differing from épwrdw, which
has been assumed to imply ‘a certain equality or familiarity
between the parties’; that the distinction between the words
does not turn upon the relative dignity of the person asking
and the person asked; but that airéw signifies to ask for
something to be given not done, giving prominence to the
t hing asked for rather than the person, and hence is rarely
used in exhortation. ’Epwrdw, on the other hand, is to re-
quest a person to do (rarely to give) something ; referring
more directly to the person, it is naturally used in exhorta-
tion, ete. The views of Trench are also rejected by Cremer,
4te Aufl.s.v. The latter distinguishes airéw from similar
words as follows: “airéw denotes the request of the will,
émiduuéw that of the sensibilities, d5éoua: the asking of
need, while épwrdw marks the form of the request, as does
e%xeoGa: also, which in classic Greek is the proper expres-
sion for a request directed to the gods and embodying itself
in prayer.” ’Epwrdw, airéw and déoua are also compared
briefly by Green, Critical Notes, etc. (on Jn. xiv. 13, 16).
who concludes of epwrdw “it cannot serve to indicate directly
any peculiar position, absolute or relative, of the agent.
The use of the word may, therefore, be viewed as having
relation to the manner and cast of the request, namely, when
carrying a certain freedom of aim and bearing; a thing
inseparable from the act of direct interrogation”; cf. further
Schmidt ch. 7. Comp.: dar, é&-, ém-, map-(-a1), mpoo-airtéw. |
atrnpa, -ros, 76, (airew), [fr. Plato down], what is or
has been asked for: Lk. xxiii. 24; plur. [A. V. requests],
Phil. iv. 6 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; things asked for, 1 Jn. v.
15. [See the preceding word, and Trench § li.]*
airla, -as, 7; 1. cause, reason: Acts x. 213; xxii.
24; xxviii. 20; xatd macav airiay for every cause, Mt.
xix. 3; 8¢ hy airiay for which cause, wherefore, Lk. viii.
47; 2 Tim. i. 6,12; Tit. i. 13; Heb. ii. 11; ef. Grimm
on 2 Mace. iv. 28. 2. cause for which one is worthy
of punishment; crime of which one is accused: Mt.
xxvil. 37; Mk. xv. 26; Jn. xviii. 38; xix. 4,[6; Acts
Xxlil. 28]; airia @avdrov [A. V. cause of death] crime
deserving the punishment of death, Acts xiii. 28; xxviii.
18. 3. charge of crime, accusation: Acts xxv. 18, 27.
(All these signif. in prof. writ. also; [but L. and S. now
make signif. 3 the primary].) In Mt. xix. 10 the words
el odtws early 7 airia tod dvOpmmov pera Tis yuvatkés find a
simple explanation in a Latinism (causa i. q- res: si ita res
se habet, etc.) if the case of the man with his wife is so.*
alrlapa, -ros. 7d, see aitiwpa.
[alridopat, -Byar: to accuse, bring a charge against;
ytiacaueda is a various reading in Ro. iii. 9 for the
mponttacdueba of the printed texts. (Prov. xix. 3; Sir.
xxix. 5; freq. in prof. writ.) Syn. see Katnyopew.* |
atrios, "a, -0v, that in which the cause of anything
resides, causative, causing. Hence 1. 6 airwos the
author : carnpias, Heb. v. 9 (the same phrase is freq.
in prof. writ.; cf. the opp. ai. ris dmwXelas in Bel and
the Dragon vs. 41; rév kaxov, 2 Mace. xiii. 4; Leian.
Tim. 36 ed. Lips.; rav dya@av, Isocr. ad Phil. 49 p:
106 a.; cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 94.sq.). 2. 76
18 °
7
alL@pv
airiov i. q. 4 airia; a. cause: Acts xix. 40 [ef. 5B.
400 (342) n.J. b. crime, offence: Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 22.
(airvos culprit.) [See airia, 3.]*
airlopa, -ros, rd, (airidopat) ; in Acts xxv. 7 the read-
ing of the best codd. adopted by GLT Tr WH for Rec.
airlapa: accusation, charge of guilt. (A form not found
in other writ.; [yet Mey. notes airiwous for airiaots,
Eustath. p. 1422, 21; see B. 73; WH. App. p. 166].)*
alpviStos, -ov, (aipyns, apavis, apve q. V-), unexpected,
sudden, unforeseen: Lk. xxi. 34 [here WH evisd., see
their Intr. § 404 and App. p. 151]; 1 Th. v. 3. (Sap.
xvii. 14; 2 Mace. xiv. 17; 3 Mace. iii. 24; Aeschyl.,
Thue. 2, 61 7d aldvidiov kai drpoadéxnrov, Polyb., Joseph.,
Plut., Dion. Hal., al.) *
alxpodrwcota, -as, 7, (aixuddwros, q. V.), captivity: Rev.
xiii. 10; abstr. for concer. i. q. aiyyddwrot (cf. ddedpdrns
above), Eph. iv. 8 (fr. Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19, [ef. B. 148
(129); W. 225 (211)]); also ef rus aixpadwotay ovvayet
(acc. to the common but doubtless corrupt text), Rev.
xiii. 10 (as in Num. xxxi. 12, ete.). [Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph., Plut., al. }*
alxpadwrevw; 1 aor. pypadwrevoa; a later word (cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 92 (88)]); to make captive,
take captive: 2 Tim. iii. 6 Rec.; freq. in the Sept. and
O. T. Apocr. ; to lead captive: Eph.iv.8 (Ezek. xii. 3;
{1 Esdr. vi. -15]).*
alxpaduritw; 1 fut. pass. alypadoricOjcopa; a.
equiv. to aiyydAwrov roe, which the earlier Greeks use.
b. to lead away captive: foll. by eis with acc. of place,
Lk. xxi. 24, (1 Mace. x. 33; Tob.i.10). ce. fig. to sub-
Jugate, bring under control: 2 Co. x. 5 (on which passage
see vonua, 2); twa ti, Ro. vii. 23 [yet T Tr ® ete. in-
sert ev before the dat.]; to take captive one’s mind, capti-
vate: yuvaxapia, 2 Tim. iii. 6 [not Rec.], (Judith xvi. 9
TO KdAXNOS alts yad@Tice Wux7v aitod). The word
is used also in the Sept., Diod., Joseph., Plut., Arr.,
Heliod.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 91 (87); Ellic.
on) 2 Mim: 1e:|*
alxp-Gdwros, -ov, (fr. aiyun a spear and ddards, verbal
adj. fr. d\@vat, prop. taken by the spear), [fr. Aeschyl.
down], captive: Lk. iv. 18 (19).*
aldy, -avos, 6, (as if aiév— poet. for dei— ay, so teaches
Aristot. de caelo 1, 11, 9, vol. i. p. 279%, 27; [so Proclus
lib. iv. in Plat. Timaeo p. 241; et al.]; but more prob-
able is the conjecture [cf. Etym. Magn. 41, 11] that
ai@v is so connected with anus to breathe, blow, as to
denote properly that which causes life, vital force; cf.
Harless on Eph. ii. 2). [But aidv (=aiFav) is now gen-
erally connected with aiei, dei, Skr. évas (aivas), Lat.
aevum, Goth. aivs, Germ. ewig, Eng. aye, ever; cf. Curtius
§ 585; Fick, Pt. i. p. 27; Vanitek p. 79; Benfey, Wur-
zellex. i. p. 7 sq.; Schleicher, Compend. ed. 2, p. 400;
Pott, Etym. Forsch., ed. 2, ii. 2, p. 442; Ebeling, Lex.
Hom. s. v.; L. and S. s. v. det; Cremer, edd. 2, 3,4 (al-
though in ed. 1 he agreed with Prof. Grimm); Pott and
Fick, however, connect it with Skr. dyus rather than
évas, although both these forms are derived from i to
go (see Pott, Schleicher, Fick, Vanitek, u. s.).] In
7
AlL@yV
Greek authors 1. age (Lat. aevum, which is aidy
with the Aeolic digamma), a human lifetime (in Hom.,
Hadt., Pind., Tragic poets), life itself (Hom. Il. 5, 685
me kal Nizrot air ete.). 2. an unbroken age, perpetuity
of time, eternity, (Plat. Tim. p. 37 d. 38. a.; Tim. Locr.
p- 97d. [quoted belew]; Plut., al.). With this signifi-
cation the Hebrew and Rabbinic idea of the word nbjiy
(of which in the Sept. aim» is the equiv.) combines in
the bibl. and eccl. writ. Hence in the N. T. used
1. a. univ.: in the phrases els rév aidva, DoIy> (Gen.
vi. 3), for ever, Jn. vi. 51,58; xiv. 16; Heb. v. 6; vi.
20, etc.; and strengthened eis tov aiéva tot aidévos, Heb.
i. 8 [ff Ps. xliv. (alv.) 7 Alex., cf. W. § 36, 2] (Tob.
vi. 18; Ps. lxxxii. (ixxxiii.) 18, ete.); efs aidva, Jude
13 els nuépay aidvos unto the day which is eternity
(gen. of appos.), 2 Pet. iii. 18 [cf. Sir. xviii. 10 (9)];
with a negation: ever, Jn. iv. 14 [Lehm. in br.]; viii.
51; x. 28; xi. 26; xiii. 8; 1 Co. viii. 13; or not for
ever, not always, Jn. viii. 353; eis rods aldvas unto the
ages, i. e. as long as time shall be (the plur. dendtes the
individual ages whose sum is eternity): [Lk. i. 33];
Root. 25, ix. 5; xi.36; [xvi. 27 R G Tr WH]; 2 Co.
xi. 31; Heb. xiii. 8; eis mavras rt. aidvas, Jude 25; eis
Tovs ai@vas Tov ai@ywy (in which expression the endless
future is divided up into various periods, the shorter of
which are comprehended in the longer [cf. W. § 36, 2;
among the various phrases to express duration com-
posed of this word with prep. or adjuncts, (which to the
number of more than fifteen are to be found in the
Sept., cf. Vaughan on Ro. i. 25), this combination of
the double plural seems to be peculiar to the N. T.]):
[Ron svi2? Er]; Gal. i.5; [ Phil: iv:.20]; 1 Tim. i.
ee i2 eee eiveelone Imeet.iv. Wile) KRevainG, 18% iv.
ORS seven Ona Vilel2 sex NOGe Xe LOR ex Ven dS XIX. 355 eX Ke
10; xxii. 5; eis aidvas aiwvwy, Rev. xiv. 11; 6 aidy trav
ai@vev the (whole) age embracing the (shorter) ages,
Eph. iii. 21 (ef. Mey. [or Ellic.] ad loc.) ; do rév aidvev
from the ages down, from eternity, Col. i. 26; Eph. iii.
9; mpo ta@v aiwvey before time was, before the founda-
tion of the world, 1 Co. ii. 7; mpddeors raév aldvev
eternal purpose, Eph. iii. 11. b. in hyperbolic and
popular usage: dd tod aidvos (odipn, Gen. vi. 4, cf.
Deut. xxxii. 7) from the most ancient time down, (within
the memory of man), from of old, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21;
xv. 18, (Tob. iv. 12 oi warépes nuay amd Tod aidvos ;
Longin. 34 rovs dm aidvos pntopas); also ex Tov aidvos,
Snes 2 (le esary ii. 19,)221(28)\5) Diods iv. S38 of the
temple of Venus tiv &€ aidvos dpyjv AaBov, 17, 1 Tovs
€& ai@vos Bacweis, (excerpt. de legat. xl.] p. 632 rhv e&
aidvos mapadeSopevny €devOepiav). 2. by meton. of the
container for the contained, of aidves denotes the worlds,
the universe, i. e. the aggregate of things contained in
time, [on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)]: Heb.
doses. 8; and (2).1. Tim, i. 175° [Rev., xv..3, WH
txt.; ef. Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 13; Tob. xiii. 6, 10; Sir.
xxxvi. 22; Philo de plant. Noé § 12 bis; de mundo
§ 7; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 7; Clem. Rom. 1CoraGila 2s
35, 3 (narnp tr. a.); 55, 6 (Oeds r. a.); Constt. Ap. 7, 34;
19
5 fa
al@p
see Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. etc. i. p. 106 n.J. So
aioy in Sap. xiii. 9; xiv. 6; xviii. 4; the same use oc-
curs in the Talmud, Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic; cf. Bleek,
Hebrierbr. ii. 1, p. 36 sqq.; Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p.
1036; [cf. the use of of aidves in the Fathers i. q. the
world of mankind, e. g. Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 2}. 3. As
the Jews distinguished 7379 DYipn the time before the
Messiah, and 830 pdipn the time after the advent of the
Messiah (cf. Riehm, Lehrb. d. Hebrierbr. p- 204 sqq.;
[Schiirer § 29, 9]), so most of the N.T. writers distin-
guish 6 aidy otros this age (also simply 6 aidy, Mt. xiii. 22;
Mk. iv. 19 GL T Tr WH; 6 éveards aidy, Gal. i. 4; 6
vov aioy, 1 Tim. vi.17; [2 Tim. iv. 10]; Tit. ii. 12), the
time before the appointed return or truly Messianic ad-
vent of Christ (i. e. the zapovaia, q. v.), the period of insta-
bility, weakness, impiety, wickedness, calamity, misery,
—and ai@y peAdwr the future age (also 6 aly éxeivos, Lk.
xx. 35; 6 aldy 6 epxouevos, Lk. xviii. 30; Mk. x. 30;
of ai@ves of emepxopevor, Eph. ii. 7), i. e. the age after
the return of Christ in majesty, the period of the con-
summate establishment of the divine kingdom and all
its blessings: Mt. xii. 32; Eph. i. 21; ef. Fritzsche on
Rom. vol. iii. 22 sq. Hence the things of ‘this age’
are mentioned in the N. T. with censure: 6 aiwy odros,
by meton. men controlled by the thoughts and pursuits
of this present time, Ro. xii. 2, the same who are called
viot Tov ai. rovrov in Lk. xvi. 8; xx. 343 xara tov alava
Tov Kocpov Tovtov conformably to the age to which this
(wicked) world belongs, Eph. ii. 2 [ef. Trench § lix.
sub fin.]; ayamav tov viv aidva, 2 Tim. iv. 10 (see
dyamdw); dpxovres Tov ai. rovrov, 1 Co. ii. 6 (see dpywv) ;
6 Oeds Tov ai. rovrov the devil, who rules the thoughts
and deeds of the men of this age, 2 Co. iv. 4; ai pepysvae
Tov aidvos the anxieties for the things of this age, Mk.
iv. 19; mAovowos €v t@ viv aidve rich in worldly wealth,
1 Tim. vi. 17; copia rod ai. rovr. such wisdom as be-
longs to this age, — full of error, arrogant, hostile to
the gospel, 1 Co. ii. 6; cu¢yrntis Tov ai. rour. disputer,
sophist, such as we now find him, 1 Co. i. 20; cuvrédeta
Tov ai. rovr. the end, or rather consummation, of the age
preceding Christ’s return, with which will be connected
the resurrection of the dead, the last judgment, the de-
molition of this world and its restoration to a more ex-
cellent condition [ef. 4 Esdr. vii. 43], Mt. xiii. 39 sq. 49;
xxiv. 3; xxviii. 20; it is called ouvtéXea tay aidvev in
Heb. ix. 26 [so Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 10, test. Benj. 11
(cf. Vorstman p. 133) ]; ra réAn Tov aidver the ends (last
part) of the ages before the return of Christ, 1 Co. x. 11;
duvdpers Tod péAXovros aidvos powers which present them-
selves from the future or divine order of things, i.e. the
Holy Spirit, Heb. vi. 5; rod aiavos éxeivou Tuxeiv to partake
of the blessings of the future age, Lk. xx. 35. Among
the N. T. writers James does not use the word aidy,
[On the word in its relation to xéopos see Trench § lix.
Its biblical sense and its relation to D2) are discussed by
Stuart, Exeget. Essays on Words relating to Fut. Punish-
ment, Andover, 1830 (and Presbyt. Publ. Committee, Phil.) ;
Tayler Lewis in Lange’s Com. on Eccl. pp. 44-51; J. W.
Hanson, Aion-Aionios, (pp. 174), Chicago, 1880. See esp.
7
al@vV
E. Abbot, Literature of the Doctrine of a Future Life, ete.,
(New York, 1867), Index of subjects s. v. For its meanings
in eccl. writ. see Suicer, Thesaur. Kccles. i. col. 140 sqq., cf.
ii. col. 1609; Huet, Origeniana (App. to vol. iv. of De la
Rue’s Origen) lib. ii. c. ii. quaest. 11, § 26. Its use in Hom.,
Hes., Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Eur., Aristot., Plato, Tim,
Locr., is exhibited in detail by E. S. Goodwin in the Christ.
Exam. for March and May, 1831, March and May, 1832.
“On aidy as the complete period, either of each particular life
or of all existence, see Arist. cael. 1, 9, 15; on aidy and
xpévos, cf. Philo [quis rer. div. her. § 34] i. 496, 18 sq. ; [de
mut. nom. § 47] i.619, 10sq.” L. and 8. ed. 6; see also Philo
de alleg. leg. iii. 8; quod deus immut. § 6 fin. ; de prof. § 11;
de praem. et poen. § 15; and (de mund. opif. § 7) esp. dy Gi
Miiller, Philu’s Lehre v. d. Weltschépfung, p. 168 (Berl. 1864).
Schmidt (ch. 44) gives the distinction, for substance, as fol-
lows: both words denote the abstract idea of time and with
special reference to its extent or duration; xpdévos is the
general designation for time, which can be divided up into
portions, each of which is in its turn a xpévos ; on the other
hand, aiév, which in the concrete and simple language of
Homer (Pindar and the Tragedians) denotes the allotted
lifetime, even the life, of the individual (Il. 4,478 pivvvOdd.0s
dé of aidy etc.), in Attic prose differs from xpévos by denot-
ing time unlimited and boundless, which is not conceived of
as divisible into aiéves (contrast here biblical usage and see
below), but rather into xpdvor.. In philosophical speech it is
without beginning also. Cf. Tim. Locr. 97 c. d. xpdvw 5& ra
mépea Tdode Tas Tmepiddws A€yorTl, &s exdaunoey 6 Beds ody
Kdoum: ov yap hy mpd Kdcuw YoTpa: Sidrep ovs eviavTds ove
a&pav meplodor, ais werpéeTat 6 yervatds xpdvos ovTos. cikay
dé éort TH byevvdtw xpdve, dv ai@va TwoTayopevoues* ws
yap ToT atd.oy mapdderyua, Toy idavikdy Kocmoy, Ode 6 wpayvds
éyevvdbn, olTws ds mpds Tapdderyua, Toy ai@va, bde 6 xpdvos
aby Kooy eOausovpynin —after Plato, Timaeus p. 37 d.
(where see Stallbaum’s note and reff.) ; Isocr. 8, 834 rods 5é
mer edoeBelas x. Sixacoctyns (Gvtas (6p) év te roils Twapodcr
Xpdvots doparas did-yovras ka wep) Tod ciumayTos ai@vos
Hdlous Tas édArldas Exovras. The adj. &xpovos independent
of time, above and beyond all time, is synon. with aidvos ;
where time (with its subdivisions and limitations) ends eter-
nity begins: Nonnus, metaph. evang. Johan. i. 1, &xpovos Fy,
axixntos, ev apphtw Adyos apxf. Thoroughly Platonic in
cast are the definitions of Gregory of Nazianzus (orat.
XXXViil. 8) aidy yap obre xpdvos ore xpdvov Ti Wépos* ovdE
yap metpnTev, ar Srep juiv 6 xpdvos HAlov Popa weTpobuevos,
TOVTO ToIs Gidlots aidy, Td) TUUMapeKTEWdpuEVoY Tots OdaLY oldy
Tt Xpovikdy Kivnua Kad didornua (Suicer u. s.). So Clem.
Alex. strom. i. 13, p. 756 a. ed. Migne, ‘O y ody aidy rod
xpdvov Td méAAov Kal Td everras, avtap 5) Kod 7d mappxnkds
axaptatws cuvlarnot. Instances from extra-biblical writ. of
the use of aidéy in the pluralare: roy am aldvev pvdor,
Anthol. vol. ili. pt. ii. p. 55 ed. Jacobs; eis ai@vas, ibid. vol.
ly. eplgr. 492 ; é« mepitpomijs aidvwy, Joseph. b. j. 3, 8, 5; els
aidvas diapéver, Sext. Empir. adv. Phys. i. 62. ‘The dis-
cussions which have been raised respecting the word may
give interest to additional reff. to its use by Philo and Jo-
sephus. Philo: 6 mas (&ras, obumas) or mas (etc.) 6 aldy:
de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de cherub. § 1 (a noteworthy passage,
cf. de congressu erud. § 11 and reff. s. y. Odvaros) ; de sacrif.
Ab. et Caini § 11; quod det. pot. § 48; quod deus immut.
§ 1, § 24; de plantat. § 27; de sobrietate § 13; de migr. Abr.
§ 2; de prof. § 9; de mut. nom. § 34; de somn. LSM Ese
§ 38; de legat. ad Gaium § 38; (4) waxpds ai.: de sacrif. Ab.
et Caini § 21; de ebrietate § 47; de prof. § 20; ai. bhkioros:
20
al@vios
de sobrietate § 5; de prof. § 21; 6 &meipos ai.: de legat. ad
Gaium § 11; 6 zumpoodev ai.: de praem et. poen. § 6 ; ai.
modus: de Abrah. § 46; rfs ai.: de merc. meretr. § 1; 80’ ai.:
de cherub. § 26; de plantat. § 27; eis Tov ai.: de gigant. § 5;
ey (7@) ai.: de mut. nom. § 2 (bis) (note the restriction) 5
quod deus immut. § 6; é ai.: de somn. i. § 3; én’ ai.: de
plantat. § 12 (bis); de mundo § 7; mpd ai.: de mut. nom.
§ 2; mpds ai.: de mut. nom. § 11; (6) at.: de prof. § 18; de
alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de cherub. § 22; de migr. Abr. § 22; de
somn. i. § 18, § 22; de Josepho § 5; de vita Moys. ii. § 3;
de decalogo § 14; de victimis § 3; frag. in Mang. ii. 660
(Richter vi. p. 219); de plantat. § 12 (bis) ; de mundo § 7.
Josephus: (6) mas aidy: antt. 1, 18,7; 3,8,10; c. Ap. 2,
11, 3; 2, 22,15; maxpds ai.: antt. 2, 7,3; woAds ai.: c. Ap. 2,
31, 1; rocodros ai.: c. Ap. 1, 8, 4; mA7O0s aidvos: antt
procem. §3; dm’ ai.: b. j. prooem. § 4; dr ai.: antt. 1, 18, 8;
4, 6,4; b. j. 6, 2,13 eis (roy) ai.: antt. 4, 8,18; 5, 1, 27; 7,
9, 5%) 7,145,055 €&cat. 2b. je Se Ojos (6) armantt. 195292)
b. j. 1, 21, 10; plur. (see above) 3, 8,5. See aidyos.]
aidvios, -ov, and (in 2 Th. ii. 16; Heb. ix. 12; Num.
xxv. 18; Plat. Tim. p. 38 b. [see below]; Diod. i. 1;
[ef. WH. App. p. 157; W. 69 (67); B. 26 (23)]) -os,
-a, -ov, (aiwyv); 1. without beginning or end, that which
always has been and always will be: Oeds, Ro. xvi. 26, (6
povos aimvios, 2 Mace. i. 25); mvetdpa, Heb. ix. 14. 2:
without beginning: xpovots aiwvious, Ro. xvi. 25; mpd ypo-
vov aiwviov, 2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 2; evayyédvov a gosper
whose subject-matter is eternal, i. e. the saving purpose
of God adopted from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. 3. with-
out end, never to cease, everlasting: 2 Co. iv. 18 (opp. to
mpocKatpos) ; aiwyov avrov, joined to thee forever as a
sharer of the same eternal life, Philem. 15; Bapos d0&ns,
2 Co. iv. 17; Baowdeia, 2 Pet. i. 11; Sofa, 2 Tim. ii. 10;
1 Pet. v.10; wy (see Cw, 2 b.); KAnpovouia, Heb. ix.
15; Avtpwors, Heb. ix. 12; mapdkdnows, 2 Th. ii. 16;
oxnvai, abodes to be occupied forever, Lk. xvi. 9 (the
habitations of the blessed in heaven are referred to, cf.
Jn. xiv. 2, [also, dabo eis tabernacula aeterna, quae
praeparaveram illis, 4 Esdr. (Fritzsche 5 Esdr.) ii. 11];
similarly Hades is called uidyos toros, Tob. iii. 6, cf.
Eccl. xii. 5); owrnpia, Heb. v. 9; [so Mk. xvi. WH, in
the (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]. Opposite ideas
are: xoAaows, Mt. xxv. 46; xpiva, Heb. vi. 2; xpious,
Mk. iii. 29 (Ree. [but L T WH Tr txt. dpapriparos;
in Acta Thom. § 47, p. 227 Tdf., ovat cot rodro els dpeow
dpaptidy kal NUTpov aiwviayv mapartopdrey, it has been
plausibly conjectured we should read Adrpov aidnoy (cf.
Heb. ix. 12)]); ddeOpos [Lchm. txt. dA€Opios |, 2 Th. i.
9, (4 Mace. x. 15); mip, Mt. xxv. 41, (4 Mace. xii. 12
aiavio rupt x. Bacdvo.s, at eis ddov Tov aiéva ovk avncoval
ce).
[Of the examples of aidévios from Philo (with whom it is
less common than 4af8:os, q. v., of which there are some fifty
instances) the following are noteworthy: de mut. nom. § 2;
de caritate § 17; xédacis ai. frag. in Mang. ii. 667 fin.
(Richter vi. 229 mid.) ; cf. de praem. et poen. § 12. Other
exx. are de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de poster. Caini § 35; quod
deus immut. § 30; quis rer. div. her. § 58; de congressu
quaer. erud. § 19; de prof. § 38; de somn. ii. § 43; de Jose-
pho § 24; guod omn. prob. lib. § 4, § 18; de ebrietate § 32;
de Abrah. § 10; (wh ai.: de prof.§ 15; @eds (6) ai.: de plan
axabapota
tat. § 2, § 18 (bis), § 20 (bis); de mundo § 2. From Jose-
phus: antt. 7, 14, 5; 12,7, 3; 15,10, 5; b. pul Sis PS (he)
1; «Aéos ai.: antt. 4, 6, 5; b.j.3, 8,5; uvhun ai.: antt. 1
13,4; 6, 14,4; 10, 11,7; 15, 11,1; ofkov pey aidmnoy exes
(of God), antt. 8, 4,2; epvadx6n 5 Iwdyyns decpots aiwvias,
Dit.6,5 95.45
Syn. a%5:10s, aidvios: at. covers the complete philo-
sophic idea — without beginning and without end ; also either
without beginning or without end; as respects the past, it
is applied to what has existed time out of mind. aidnos (fr.
Plato on) gives prominence to the immeasurableness of eter-
nity (while such words as cvvex4s continuous, unintermitted,
diareAns perpetual, lasting to the end, are not so applicable
to an abstract term, like aidy) ; aidéyios accordingly is esp.
adapted to supersensuous things, see the N. T. Cf. Tim.
Locr. 96 c. @edby 5€ Thy wey aidvioy vdos dph udvos etec.; Plat.
Tim. 37 d. (and Stallbaum ad loc.); 38 b. c.; legg. x. p.
904 a. dvdrcOpov 5é dy yevdpuevov, GAA’ odk aidviov. Cf. also
Plato’s d:advi0s (Tim. 38 b.; 39 e.). Schmidt ch. 45.]
akabapoia, -as, 7, (dxdOapros), [fr. Hippocr.. down],
uncleanness ; a. physical: Mt. xxiii. 27. b. ina
moral sense, the impurity of lustful, luxurious, profli-
gate living: Ro. i. 24; vi. 19; 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v.
NOS phasive 19k ty. cds) Col ids 19 Ch. ive 75 used
of impure motives in 1 Th. ii. 3. (Dem. p. 553, 12.)
Cf. Tittmann i. p. 150 sq.*
a&kaldprns, -nTos, 7, impurity: Rev. xvii. 4,— not found
elsewhere, and the true reading here is ra dxd@apra rijs.*
&kdPapros, -ov, (kadaipw), [fr. Soph. down], in the Sept.
i. gq. N10, not cleansed, unclean; a. inaceremonial
sense, that which must be abstained from according to
the levitical law, lest impurity be contracted: Acts x.
14; xi. 8 (of food); Acts x. 28; 1 Co. vil. 14 (of
men); 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. Is. lii. 11, of things pertain-
ing to idolatry); Rev. xviii. 2 (of birds). b. in a
moral sense, wnclean in thought and life (freq. in Plat.) :
Eph. v. 5; ra dxdOapra ths mopveias, Rev. xvii. 4 (ace.
to the true reading); mvevpara, demons, bad angels, [in
twenty-three pass. of the Gospels, Acts, Rev.]: Mt. x.
1; xii. 48; Mk. i. 23, 26; iii. 11, ete.; Lk. iv. 33, 36; vi.
18, etc.; Acts v. 16; viii. 7; Rev. xvi. 13; xviii. 2,
(mvevpata movnpa in Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vii. 215; vill. 2;
xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq.).
dkatpéopar, -odpar: [impf. nKapovpny]; (dkarpos inop-
portune) ; to lack opportunity, (opp. to evxaipéw ); Phil.
iv. 10. (Phot., Suid., Zonar.; dxatpeiv, Diod. excerp.
Vat. ed. Mai p. 30 [frag. l. x. § 7, ed. Dind.].)*
dxatpws, (kaipos), adv., unseasonably, [A. V. out of
season], (opp. to edxaipws): 2 Tim. iv. 2 (whether sea-
sonable for men or not). (Sir. xxxv. 4; [Aeschyl. Ag.
808]; Plat. de rep. x. p. 606 b.; Tim. 33 a.; 86 ¢.;
Xen. Eph. 5, 7; Joseph. antt. 6, 7, 2, al.) *
d-KaKos, -ov, (KaKkds) ; a. without guile or fraud,
harmless; free from guilt: Heb. vii. 26; [cf. Clement.
frag. 8 ed. Jacobson, (Bp. Lyhtft. S. Clement of Rome
etc. p. 219): dkaxos 6 Tarnp mvetpa edwxev ckaxov ]}.
b. fearing no evil from others, distrusting no one, [cf.
Eng. guileless]: Ro. xvi. 18. ([Aeschyl.,] Plat., Dem.,
Polyb., al.; Sept.) [Cf Trench § lvi.; Tittmann i. p.
27 sq.|*
21
axatactacla
KO (dky a point [but see in dxpn]); a. a
thorn, bramble-bush, brier: Mt. vii. 16; Lk. vi. 44; Heb.
vi. 8; es ras dxdvOas i. e. among the seeds of thorns, Mt.
xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7 [L mrg. én], 18 [Tdf. éat]; Lk. viii.
14 (vs. 7 €v péom trav dxavOdy) ; él rds dk. i. e. upon
ground in which seeds of thorns were lying hidden,
Mt. xiii. 7. b. a thorny plant: orépavoy é& axavbdy,
Mt. xxvii. 29; Jn. xix. 2,—for bare thorns might have
caused delirium or even death; what species of plant is
referred to, is not clear. Some boldly read dxdvOwr,
from dkavOos, acanthus, bear’s-foot; but the meaning of
dkava is somewhat comprehensive even in prof. writ. ;
ef. the class. Grk. Lexx. s. v. [On the “Crown of
thorns” see BB.DD. s. v., and for reff. Me. and S.]*
dxdvOwos, -ov, (dkavOa; cf. duapavrwos), thorny, woven
out of the twigs of a thorny plant: Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix.
5. (Is. xxxiv. 18.) Cf. the preceding word.*
d-Kapos, -ov, (kapros), [fr. Aeschyl. down], without
Jruit, barren; 1. prop.: dévdpa, Jude 12. 2. metaph.
not yielding what it ought to yield, [A. V. unfruitful]:
Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; destitute of good deeds, Tit.
iii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 8; contributing nothing to the instruc-
tion, improvement, comfort, of others, 1 Co. xiv. 14;
by litotes pernicious, Eph. v.11, (Sap. xv. 4; ef. Grimm
on Sap. i. 11).*
d-KaTd-yvarros, -ov, (kataywaoke), that cannot be con-
demned, not to be censured: Tit. ii. 8. (2 Mace. iv. 47,
and several times in eccl. writ.) *
d-Kata-KdduTtos, -ov, (karaxad’mtT), not covered, un-
veiled: 1 Co. xi. 5,18. (Polyb. 15, 27, 2; [Sept., Philo].) *
d-Kardé-KpiTos, -ov, (katakpive), wncondemned ; punished
without being tried: Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25. (Not
found in prof. writ.) *
d-Katé-hutos, -ov, (katadva), indissoluble; not subject to
destruction, [A. V. endless]: ¢wn, Heb. vii. 16. (4 Mace.
x. 11; Dion. Hal. 10, 31.) *
dkatdmractos, -ov,—found only in 2 Pet. ii. 14 in codd.
A and B, from which L WH Tr mrg. have adopted
it instead of the Rec. dxaramatarous, q. v. It may be
derived fr. maréopat, pf. mémacpat, to taste, eat; whence
dkxaramaoros insatiable. In prof. writ. karamacros [which
Bttm. conjectures may have been the original reading]
signifies besprinkled, soiled, from xatanaoow to besprin-
kle. For a fuller discussion of this various reading see
B. 65 (57), [and WH. App. p. 170].*
dkardraveros, -ov, (kataravw), unable to stop, wnceas-
ing; passively, not quieted, that cannot be quieted; with
gen. of thing (on which cf. W. § 30, 4), 2 Pet. ii. 14
[R G T Tr txt.] (eyes not quieted with sin, sc. which
they commit with adulterous look). (Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph., Plut.) *
dxatacracta, -as, 7, (akatdoraros), instability, a state
of disorder, disturbance, confusion: 1 Co. xiv. 33; Jas.
ili. 16; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.14,1; [Prov. xxvi. 28; Tob.
iv. 13]); plur. disturbances, disorders : of dissensions,
2 Co. xii. 20; of seditions, 2 Co. vi. 5 (cf. Mey. ad loc.) ;
of the tumults or commotions of war, Lk. xxi. 9. (Polyb.,
Dion. Hal.) *
GKaTaoTAaTos
d-xaté-cratos, -ov, (kabiornus), unstable, inconstant,
restless: Jas. i. 8,and LT Tr WH in iii. 8 also, but less
fitly; [cf. Hermae Past. |. ii. mand. 2, 3 mounpov mevpa
éorw 7 KatadaA\id, Kal axatdoraroy Saiporvov, pndemore
eipnvevoy, ddd etc.]. ([Hippocr. et al. ] Polyb. 7, 4, 6,
al. [Sept. Is. liv. 11].) *
d-katdoyxeros, -ov, (karéyo to restrain, control), that
cannot be restrained: Jas. iii. 8 R G. (Job xxxi. 11;
3 Mace. vi. 17; Diod. 17, 38 dxar. Sdxpva, al.)*
’AxeASapd, or "AxeNSapdx (Lehm.), [or ‘“Axedd. WH
(see their Intr. § 408)], or AyeAdapdy (T Tr), fr. Chald.
NDI pn (field of blood), Akeldama: Acts i. 19; see
alua, 2a. [B. D. s.v.3 esp. Kautzsch, Gram. pp. 8, 173].*
dxépatos, -ov, (Kepavyupe) § a. unmixed, pure, as
wine, metals. b. of the mind, without admixture of
evil, free from guile, innocent, simple: Mt. x. 16; Ro.
xvi. 19; Phil. ii. 15; (and freq. in prof. writ.). [Cf.
Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.; Trench § lvi.; Tittmann i. 27 sq.]*
dxduvijs, -és, (kAivw), not inclining, firm, unmoved: Heb.
x. 23. (Freq. in prof. writ.) *
dxpdtw: 1 aor. F#xuaoca; (dun); to flourish, come to
maturity: Rev. xiv. 18. (Very freq. in prof. writ.) *
dxph, -7s, 7, (cf. dxn [on the accent cf. Chandler § 116;
but the word is ‘a mere figment of the grammarians,’
Pape (yet cf. L. and 8.) s. v.], atypn, Lat. acies, acuo) ;
among the Greeks a. prop. a point, to prick with (cf.
[the classic] aiyun). b. extremity, climax, acme, highest
degree. c. the present point of tume. Hence accus.
[W. 230 (216), 464 (432 sq.); B. 153 (184)] dxpjy with
adverbial force, i. q. és, even now, even yet: Mt. xv. 16.
(Theocr. id. 4, 60; Polyb. 4, 36, 8; Strat. epigr. 3 p.
101 ed. Lips. ; Strabo 1. i. [c. 3 prol.] p. 56; Plut. de
glor. Athen. 2, 85, al.) Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 123.*
don, -7s, 7, (fr. an assumed pf. form jxoa, cf. dyopa
above [but cf. Epic dkoun; Curtius p. 555]); = 1. hear-
ing, by which one perceives sounds; sense of hearing:
1 Co. xii. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 8. Hebraistically, dxo dxoverw
by hearing to hear i. e. to perceive by hearing, Mt. xiii.
14; Acts xxviii. 26, (Is. vi. 9); cf. W. § 44, 8 Rem. 3
p- 339; § 54, 3 p. 466; [B. 183 sq. (159)]. 2. the
organ of hearing, the ear: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii. 1; 2 Tim.
iv. 3,4; Acts xvii. 20; Heb. v. 11. 3. thing heard;
a. instruction, namely oral; spec. the preaching of the
gospel, [A. V. txt. report]: Jn. xii. 88; Ro. x. 16 sq. (ris
eriorevae TH akon nav; fr. Is. liii. 1, Hebr. ny3nw, which
in 2S. iv. 4, etc., is rendered ayyeXia); don micrews
preaching on the necessity of faith, (Germ. Glaubens-
predigt), Gal. iii. 2,5; Aédyos dxojs i. gq. d. dxovabeis [cf.
W. 531 (494 sq.)]: 1 Th. ii. 13; Heb. iv. 2. b. hear-
say, report, rumor; twvéds, concerning any one: Mt. iv.
24; xiv. 1; xxiv. 6; Mk. i. 28; xiii. 7. (Freq. in Grk.
writ.) *
dxodovdéw, -d; fut. dxodovdjcw ; impf. nxodovdour ;
1 aor. nxoovOnoa; pf. nkodovdnxa (Mk. x. 28 LT Tr
WH); (fr. dxodAovdos, and this fr. a copulative and xéAev-
dos road, prop. walking the same road) ; 1. to follow
one who precedes, join him as his attendant, accompany
him: Mt. iv. 25; viii. 19; ix. 19; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. a3
29 akovw
v. 24, [37 Lchm.]; xiv. 51 [RG]; Lk. xxii. 39,545 xxiii.
27; Jn. i. 37 sq. 43 (44); vi. 2; xvi. 15; xx. 6, etc.3
Acts xii. 8; xiii. 43; xxi. 36; 1Co. x. 4; distinguished
fr. mpodyew in Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9; trop. Ta epya
airav dxodovbe! per’ avraéy, their good deeds will accom-
pany them to the presence of God the judge to be
rewarded by him, Rev. xiv. 13; on the other hand,
jKodovOnoay adtis ai duapriat dxpt TOU ovpavod, Rev. xviii.
5, but here for jxokovOncoav G LT Tr WH have re-
stored éxodAnOnoav; [onpeta Tots mioTevoaow akoAovbjoe
ravra, Mk. xvi. 17 Tr WH txt. (where al. mapakon. q. V-) ]-
to follow one in time, succeed one: Rey. xiv. 8 sq.
(Hdian. 1, 14, 12 (6) ra yotv dxodovOycavra, al.) Since
among the ancients disciples were accustomed to accom-
pany their masters on their walks and journeys — (al.
derive the usage that follows from the figurative sense
of the word directly; cf. e. g. 2 Mace. viii. 36 76
dxodovbeiv Tots vopos; M. Antonin. 1. vii. § 31 dxodov-
Onoov be, and Gataker ad loc.], dkoAovdéw denotes 2
to join one as a disciple, become or be his disciple; side
with his party, [A. V. follow him]: Mt. iv. 20, 22; ix. 9;
xix. 27 sq.; Mk. i. 18;:vili.34; LE: v. 11,27; ete;
Jn. viii. 12 (where Jesus likens himself to a torch which
the disciple follows); ovx dxodovOet “iv he is not of
our band of thy disciples, Mk. ix. 38. to cleave stead-
fastly to one, conform wholly to his example, in living and if
need be in dying also: Mt. x. 38; xvi. 243; Jn. xii. 26 ;
xxi. 22. This verb is not found in the Epp. exc. in
1 Co. x. 4. As in the classics, it is joined mostly with
a dat. of the obj.; sometimes with pera tivos, Lk. ix. 49;
Rev. vi. 8 [Treg. mrg. dat.]; xiv. 13; (so also in Grk.
writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 353 sq.; [Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 458 sq.]) ; émiow twos, Mt. x. 38; Mk.
viii. 34 (where R L WH Tr mrg. édéeiv), Hebr. 357
sydd vm, cf. 1 K. xix. 21; see W. 234 (219); [B. 172
(150), cf. dxoX. carom twos, Arstph. Plut. 13. Comp.:
e&, ém-, KaT-, Tap-, cvy- axodovbea |.
dxovw [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense cf. W.
274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. Feovov; fut. (in
best Grk. usage) dxovcoua, Jn. v. 25 RGL, 28 RGL;
Acts ili. 22; vil. 37-R-G; xvii. 325 [xxi] 22)|5) xxv;
22; xxvill. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.], and (a later form)
dxovow, Mt. xii. 19; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x.
16; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26]; Ro. x. 14
[R G]; and T Tr WH in Jn. v. 25, 28, (cf. W.82 (79); B.
53 (46) [Veitch s. v.]); [1 aor. jxovca, Jn. iii. 32, ete.]; pf.
axnxoa; Pass.,[pres. dxovopat; 1 fut.dxoveOncopat]; 1 aor.
nxovoOnyv ; [fr. Hom. down]; tohear. I. absol. 1. tobe
endowed with the faculty of hearing (not deaf): Mk. vii.
37; Lk. vii. 22; Mt.xi.5. 2. to attend to (use the facul-
ty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in
exhortations : dxovere, Mk. iv. 3; dxovoare, Jas. ii. 5;
6 €xov dra akovew dxoverw, Mt. xi. 153 xiii. 9, [in both
T WHom. Tr br. dxovew] ; Mk. iv. 23; Lk. xiv. 35 (34);
6 €xwv ods dkovodtw, Kev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 13, 22.
ete. 3. trop. to understand, perceive the sense of
what is said: Mt. xiii. 15 sq.; Mk. viii. 18; 1 (Co. xiv.
2. IL. with an object [B. § 132, 17; W. 199 (187 sa-)];
aKkovuw 3
od
1. axovw m1, to hear something ; a. to perceive by the
ear what is announced in one’s presence, (to hear im-
mediately): ryv dovqy, Mt. xii. 19; Jn. iii. 8; Rev.
iv. 1; v.11; xviii. 4; Acts xxii. 9, etc.; réov domacpov,
Lk. i. 41 (cf. 44); TadsAdalav, the name ‘Galilee,’ Lk.
xxiii. 6 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. Pad.; cf. B. 166 (145) ];
avdotaow vexpav, the phrase ‘dvdor. vexpay,’ Acts xvii.
32; tov Noyov, Mk. v. 36 [R GL] (on this pass. see mapa-
cove, 2); Mt. xix. 22; Jn. v. 24, etc.;
Acts ii. 22; v. 24; Mt. vii. 24; fnuara, 2 Co. xii. 4;
ri A€yovow, Mt. xxi. 16; pass., Mt. ii. 18; Rev. xviii.
22 sq.; rl &« Twos, 2 Co. xii. 6 [R G]; foll. by dr [B.
800 (257 sq.)], Acts xxii. 2; Mk. xvi. 11; Jn. iv. 42;
xiv. 28. b. to get by hearing, learn (from the mouth
of the teacher or narrator): Acts xv. 17; Mt. x. 27 (8
eis TO os dxovere, What is taught you in secret) ; Ro. xv.
Zils Eph i. 135 Coll i. 6s In. xiv. 24; 1 Jn. ii. 7, 24;
lil. 11; Xpuordv i. e. to become acquainted with Christ
from apostolic teaching, Eph. iv. 21 (cf. wadeiv rév Xpiorov,
vs. 20 [B. 166 (144) note; W. 199 (187) note]); _ pass.,
Lk. xii. 3; Heb. ii. 1; 7i with gen. of pers. fr. whom
one hears, Acts i. 4; rl apd twos, Jn. viii. 26,40; xv.
155 Acts x. 225) xxviii. 22; 2) Tim. ii. 2, (Thue. 6, 93;
Xen. an. 1, 2, 5 [here Dind. om. rapa]; Plat. rep. vi.
p- 506 d., al.; [B. 166 (145); W. 199 (188)]); [mapa
tevos, without an obj. expressed, Jn. i. 40 (41)]; &k
twos, Jn. xii. 34 (€x Tov vouov, from attendance on its
public reading); ao with gen. of pers., 1 Jn.i.5; with
mepi twos added, Acts ix. 13; foll. by dr, Mt. v. 21,
27, 33, 38,48. ce. dxova tt, a thing comes to one’s ears, to
Jind out (by hearsay), learn, (hear [(of)] mediately):
with ace. of thing, ra épya, Mt. xi. 2; 60a érole, Mk.
iii. 8 [Treg. txt. mouet] ; modeuous, Lk. xxi. 9; Mt. xxiv.
6; Mk. xiii. 7; to learn, absol. viz. what has just been
mentioned: Mt. ii. 3; xxii. 7 [R L]; Mk. ii. 17; iii.
215 Gal. 1. 13; Eph. i. 15; Col. 1. 4; Philem. 5, etc.
foll. by 6rt, Mt. ii. 22; iv. 12; xx. 30; Mk. vi. 55;
Se IVA DX MODE XImO exile 2 Galled, 23):
mepi twos, Mk. vii. 25; ri mepi twos, Lk. ix. 9; xvi. 2;
xxiii. 8[RGL]; foll. by an ace. with ptcep. [B. 303
(260)]: Lk. iv. 23; Acts vii. 12; 2 Th. iii. 11; 3 Jn.
4; foll. by acc. with inf. in two instances [cf. B. 1. c.]:
Jn. xii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 18. pass.: Acts xi. 22 (nxovoOn
6 Ndyos eis Ta Sra Tis éxkAnoias was brought to the ears) ;
1 Co. v. 1 (dkoverat ropveia ev tpiv); Mt. xxviii. 14
(éav dxovoby rovro emt [L Tr WH mrg. ind] 10d yepo-
vos); Mk. ii. 1; Jn. ix. 32 nxovoGn dre. d. to give ear
to teaching or teacher: rods Adyous, Mt. x. 14; to follow
with attentive hearing, rv Adyov, In. viii. 43 ; ra pyyara
tov Oeov, 47. e. to comprehend, understand, (like Lat.
audio) : Mk. iv. 33; Gal. iv. 21 [(Lchm. mrg. dvaywo-
oxere) yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]; (Gen. xi. 7). 2. dxovew is
not joined with the genitive of the obj. unless one hear
the person or thing with his own ears [B. 166 (144)] ;
a. with gen. of a person; simply; a. to perceive any
one’s voice: of i.e. of Christ, whose voice is heard in
the instruction of his messengers (Lk. x. 16), Ro. x. 14,
LW. 199 (187) note?]. B. to give ear to one, listen,
\ ,
Tovs oyous,
axpiBns
hearken, (Germ. ihm zuhéren, ihn anhoren): Mt. ii. 9;
Mk. vii. 14; xii. 37; Lk. ii. 46; x. 16; xv.1; xix. 48;
xxi. 38; Acts xvii. 32; xxiv. 24 (in both these pass.
Tivos mepi Tivos); XXV. 22; Jn. vi.60. y. to yield to, hear
and obey, hear to one, (Germ. auf einen horen) : Mt. xvii.
5, (Mk. ix. 7; Lk. ix. 35); Jn. iii. 29; x.8; Acts iii.
22 sq.; iv. 19; vil. 37 [RG]; 1 Jn. iv. 5 sq. Hence
8. its use by John in the sense to listen to, have regard
to, of God answering the prayers of men: Jn. ix. 31; xi.
41; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq. (the Sept. render pnw by eicaxodw).
€. with gen. of pers. and ptep. [B. 301 (259)]: Mk. xiv.
58; Lk. xviii. 36; Jn. i. 37; vii. 832; Acts ii. 6, 11;
Rey. xvi. 5; fxovca rod Ovovactnpiov Aéyovros, Rev. xvi.
7GLT [Tr WH cod.Sin.], a poetic personification ;
cf. De Wette ad loc., W. § 30, 11. b. with gen. of a
thing: ris Braodnpias, Mk. xiv. 64 (Lchm. rv Bda-
odnpiay, as in Mt. xxvi. 65; the ace. merely denotes the
object; rhs Brac. is equiv. in sense to adrod Baodnyodv-
ros, [cf. B. 166 (145)]) ; rév Adyar, Lk. vi. 47, (Mt. vii.
24 rods Adyous) ; In. vii. 40 (L T Tr WH cod. Sin., but
R Grév ddyor, [cf. B.u.s.]); cvppovias x. xopav, Lk. xv.
25; Tov orevaypod, Acts vii. 34; rhs amodoyias, Acts
xxli. 1. The frequent phrase dkovew rijs povis (i. q. YOW
p32, Ex. xviii. 19) means a. to perceive the distinct
words of a voice: Jn. v. 25,28; Acts ix. 7; xi. 7; xxii.
18 181), Tie Zp ali g Ie 78 Ineo seh 1638 ooh by B. to
yield obedience to the voice: Jn. v. 25 (of adxovoarres sc.
ths pevns); X. 16, 27; xviii. 37; Rev. iii. 20. In Jn.
xii. 47; xviii. 37; Lk. vi. 47; Acts xxii. 1, it is better
to consider the pron. pod which precedes as a possess.
gen. rather than, with B. 167 (145 sq.), to assume a
double gen. of the object, one of the pers. and one of
the thing. The Johannean phrase dxovew mapa rot
Geod, or ri mapa Oeod, signifies a. to perceive in the soul
the inward communication of God: Jn. vi. 45. b. to be
taught by God’s inward communication: Jn. viii. 26, 40,
(so, too, the simple dxovew in v. 30); to be taught by the
devil, ace. to the reading of LT Tr WH, jeovoare
mapa Tov matpds, in Jn. viii. 388. For the rest cf. B. 165
(144) sqq.; 301 (258) sqq. [Comp.: &-, eio-, én-, rap-,
mpo-, Umr-akove. |
dxpacia, -as, 7, (dkpatns), want of self-control, inconti-
nence, intemperance: Mt. xxiii. 25 (Grsb. ddixia) ; 1 Co.
vii. 5. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.524sq. [(Aristot. on.)] *
dxparts, -€s, EN. -€os, -ods, (Kpdros), without self-con-
trol, intemperate: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Freq. in prof. writ. fr.
Plato and Xen. down.) *
&kpatos, -ov, (Kepavyupt), unmixed, pure: Rev. xiv. 10
(of wine undiluted with water, as freq. in prof. writ.
and Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15)).*
dxplBeva, -elas, 7, (axpiBns), exactness, exactest care:
Acts xxii. 8 (xara axpiBecay rod vouov in accordance
with the strictness of the Mosaic law, [ef. Isoc. areop.
p. 147 e.]). [From Thue. down.]*
dxptBrjs, -és, Zen. -ovs, exact, careful. The neut. compar.
is used adverbially in Acts xviii. 26; xxiii. 15, 20; xxiv.
22; 4 dxpiBeorarn atpeots the straitest sect i.e. the most
precise and rigorous in interpreting the Mosaic law, and
axpiBow
in observing even the more minute precepts of the law
and of tradition, Acts xxvi. 5. [From Hdt. down.]*
dxptBda, -: 1 aor. nKpiBaca; (dxpiBys); 1. in prof.
writ. to know accurately, to do exactly. 2. to investi-
gate diligently: Mt. ii. 7, 16, (dxpyBas eferatew, Vs. 8);
Aristot. gen. anim. 5, 1; Philo, m. opif. § 25 pera mdaons
ééerdcews axpBorvres. [Al. to learn exactly, ascertain ;
ef. Fritz. or Mey. on Mt. u. s.] *
dxpiBas, adv., exactly, accurately, diligently: Mt. ii. 8;
Lk. i. 3; Acts xviii. 25; 1 Th. v. 2; dxpiBas mepumareiy
to live carefully, cireumspectly, deviating in no respect
from the law of duty, Eph. v.15. [Fr. Aeschyl. down. ]*
axpls, -iSos, 7, [fr. Hom. down], a locust, particu-
larly that species which especially infests oriental coun-
tries, stripping fields and trees. Numberless swarms of
them almost every spring are carried by the wind from
Arabia into Palestine, and having devastated that coun-
try migrate to regions farther north, until they perish
by falling into the sea. The Orientals are accustomed
to feed upon locusts, either raw or roasted and seasoned
with salt [or prepared in other ways], and the Israelites
also (acc. to Ley. xi. 22) were permitted to eat them;
(cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Heuschrecken; Furrer in Schen-
kel iii. p. 78 sq.; [BB.DD.s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of
the Bible, p. 313 sqq.]): Mt. iii. 4; Mk.i.6. A marvel-
lous and infernal kind of locusts is described in Rev. ix.
3, 7, ef. 2, 5 sq. 8-12; see Diisterdieck ad loc.*
dKkpoaThptov, -ov, 76, (akpodopar to be a hearer), place
of assemblage for hearing, auditorium; like this Lat.
word in Roman Law, dxpoar. in Acts xxv. 23 denotes a
place set apart for hearing and deciding cases, [yet cf.
Mey. ad loc.}. (Several times in Plut. and other later
writers.) *
dxpoaris, -00, 6, (akpodopat, [see the preceding word]),
a hearer: tov vopov, Ro. ii. 13; tod Adyov , Jas. i. 22 sq.
25. (Thuce., Isocr., Plat., Dem., Plut.) *
dxpoBurria, -as, 7, (a word unknown to the Greeks,
who used 7 axpotoc6ia and 76 axpordaOuoy, fr. 7600p i. e.
membrum virile. Accordingly it is likely that rhv méa6nv
of the Greeks was pronounced rj Biarny by the Alex-
andrians, and dkpoBvoria said instead of dxporocbia —
i. €. rd dkpov tis méabns; cf. the acute remarks of
Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. 186, together with the
opinion which Winer prefers 99 (94), [and Cremer, 3te
Aufl. s. v.]), in the Sept. the equiv. of mw the prepuce,
the skin covering the glans penis; a. prop.: Acts xi.
3; Ro. ii. 25, 26; 1 Co. vii. 19; Gal. v. GEEviElocnGol:
we 11 3 Judith xiv. 10; 1 Mace. i. 15); év dxpoBvoria
éy having the foreskin ( Tertull. praeputiatus), uncir-
cumeised i.e. Gentile, Ro. iv. 10; ép axp. sc. dv, 1 Co.
vil. 18; equiv. to the same is 8? akpoBvorias, Ro. iv. 11;
7 ey TH akpoB. miotis the faith which one has while he is
uncircumcised, Ro.iv.11sq. b. by meton. of the abstr.
for the concr., having the foreskin is equiv. toa Gentile :
Ro. ii. 26 ae iii. 30; iv. 9; Eph. ii 115 9 ek hicews axpoB.
one uncircumcised by birth ora Gentile, opp. to a Jew who
shows himself a Gentile in character, Ro. ii. 27; edayyé-
Avov rns axpof. gospel to be preached to the Gentiles, Gal.
24
anaBacTpov
ry. (fe c. in a transferred sense: 7 éxpoB. THs capKos
(opp. to the mepiropn dyeporoinros or regeneration, Col.
ii. 11), the condition in which the corrupt desires rooted
in the cap were not yet extinct, Col. ii. 13 (the expression
is derived from the circumstance that the foreskin was
the sign of impurity and alienation from God, [cf. B. D.
s. v. Circumcision }).*
dxpo-ywviatos, -ala, -aiov, a word wholly bibl. and eccl.,
[W. 99 (94); 236 (221)], (dkpos extreme, and yovia
corner, angle), placed at the extreme corner ; AlOos cor-
ner-stone; used of Christ, 1 Pet. ii.6; Eph. ii. 20; Sept.
Is. xxviii. 16 for 739 728. For as the corner-stone
holds together two walls, so Christ joins together as
Christians, into one body dedicated to God, those who
were formerly Jews and Gentiles, Eph. ii. 20 [yet cf.
Mey. ad loc.] compared with vss. 14, 16-19, 21 sq.
And as a corner-stone contributes to sustain the edifice,
but nevertheless some fall in going around the corner
carelessly ; so some are built up by the aid of Christ,
while others stumbling at Christ perish, 1 Pet. ii. 6-8 ;
see yovia, a.*
dxpo@iviov, -ov, 7d, (fr. dxpos extreme, and @is, gen.
Owds, a heap; extremity, topmost part of a heap), gener-
ally in plur. ra dxpoOina the first-fruits, whether of crops
or of spoils (among the Greeks customarily selected from
the topmost part of the heaps and offered to the gods,
Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 35); in the Bible only once: Heb. vii.
4, of booty. (Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., Thuc., Plut., al.) *
dkpos, -a, -ov, (ax point [see axun]), [fr. Hom. down],
highest, extreme; 10 axpov the topmost point, the extremity
[ef. B. 94 (82)]: Lk. xvi. 24; Heb. xi. 21 [see mpoo-
kuvéew, a. fin.]; axpa, axpov yns, ovpavov, the farthest
bounds, uttermost parts, end, of the earth, of heaven:
Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; cf. Deut. iv. 832; xxviii. 643
Tsien 5 Jer xii oe
*AkddAas, -ov, [but no gen. seems to be extant, see B. 20
(18) ], 6, Aquila, a Jew of Pontus, a tent-maker, convert
to Christ, companion and ally of Paul in propagating
the Christian religion: Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26; Ro. xvi.
3; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Tim. iv. 19; [see B. D.].*
axupdw, -@; 1 aor. nKvipwoa; (akvpos without author-
ity, not binding, void; fr. xipos force, authority), to
render void, deprive of force and authority, (opp. to kvpd@
to confirm, make valid): évroAnv, Mt. xv. 6 [R G;
vopoy, ibid. T WH mre. |; Aédyor [ibid. L Tr WH txt.) >
Mk. vii. 13, (cf. dOeréw) ; Suajxnv, Gal. iii. 17. ({1 Esdr.
vi. 31]; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut.)*
dxwditws, adv., (koto), without hindrance: Acts
XXvili. 31. [Plato, Epict., Hdian.]*
dkwv, dkovoa, dxov, (contr. fr. dékov, a priv. and éker
willing), not of one’s own will, unwilling: 1 Co. ix. 17.
(Very freq. among the Greeks.) *
[ada, 75, read by Tdf. in Mt. v.13; Mk. ix. 50; Lk.
Xiv. 34; see Gdas. ]
AdBacrpoy, -ov, 7d, (in the plur. in Theoer. 15, 114;
Anth. Pal. 9, 153; in other prof. writ. 6 and 7 aAdBa-
orpos; [the older and more correct spelling drops the
p, cf. Steph. Thesaur. s. v. 1385 d.; L. and S. s. v. dd&
aXalovela
Baorpos]}), a box made of alabaster, in which unguents are
preserved, (Plin. h. n. 13, 2 (3), [al. 13, 19,] “unguenta
optime servantur in alabastris”) ; with the addition of
pupov (as in Lcian. dial. mer. 14, 2; [Hdt. 3, 20]): Lk.
vii. 37; Mt. xxvi. 7; Mk. xiv. 3 (where L T adopt rv
addB., Tr WH [Mey.] ryv ad.; Mt. and Lk. do not add
the article, so that it is not clear in what gender they
use the word, [cf. Tdf.’s crit. note ad loc.]). Cf. Win.
RWB. [or B. D.] s. v. Alabaster.*
ddafovela, and ddagovia (which spelling, not uncommon
in later Grk., T WH adopt [see I, ¢]), -as, 7, (fr. ddago-
vevopat i. e. to act the ddator, q. V-) ; a. in prof. writ.
[{fr. Arstph. down] generally empty, braggart talk, some-
times also empty display in act, swagger. For illustration
see Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 12; mem. 1, 7; Aristot. eth. Nic.
4,18, p. 1127 ed. Bekk.; [also Trench § xxix.]. b.
an insolent and empty, assurance, which trusts in its own
power and resources and shamefully despises and violates
divine laws and human rights: 2 Macc. ix. 8; Sap. v. 8.
c. an impious and empty presumption which trusts in the
stability of earthly things, [R. V. vaunting]: Jas. iv. 16
(where the plur. has reference to the various occasions
on which this presumption shows itself; [cf. W. § 27, 3;
B. 77 (67)]); rov Biov, display in one’s style of living,
[R. V. vainglory], 1 Jn. ii. 16.*
dAralev, -dvos, 6, 7, (An wandering), [fr. Arstph. on],
an empty pretender, a boaster: Ro. i. 30; 2 Tim. iii. 2.
[Trench §xxix.; Tittmanni. p. 73sq.; Schmidt ch. 172, 2.]*
dAaddtw; [fr. Pind. down]; a. prop. to repeat fre-
quently the cry daha, as soldiers used to do on entering
battle. b. univ. to utter a joyful shout: Ps. xlvi.
(xlvii.) 2; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 2; and in prof. writ. c. to
wail, lament: Mk. v. 38, (7 Jer. iv. 8; xxxii. 20 (xxv.
34)); cf. dAoAv Co, Lat. ululare. [Syn.see kalo fin.] — d.
to ring loudly, to clang: 1 Co. xiii. 1, [cf. ev kupBadros
@daduypod, Ps. cl. 5 |.*
d-AdAnTos, -ov, (AaAnros fr. A\akéw; [cf. W. 23]), not to
be uttered, not to be expressed in words: orevaypoi mute
sighs, the expression of which is suppressed by grief,
Ro. viii. 26, [al. ‘which (from their nature) cannot be
uttered’; cf. Mey. ad loc.; W. 97 (92)]. (Anth. Pal. 5,
4 guvicropa adadnroyr i. e. of love-secrets.) *
d-ados, -ov, (Addos talking, talkative), [fr. Aeschyl.
on], speechless, dumb, wanting the faculty of speech: Mk.
vii. 37; mvedpa, Mk. ix. 17, 25, because the defects of
demoniacs were thought to proceed from the nature and
peculiarities of the demons by which they were pos-
sessed. (Sept. Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 14; xxx. (xxxi.)
19; dAdAov Kal Kakod mvevtparos mAnpys, Plut. de orac.
def. 51 p. 438 b.) *
das, -atos, 76, (a later form, found in Sept. and N. T.
[Aristot. de mirab. ause. § 138; Plut. qu. conv. iv. 4, 3, 3],
ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 220; dat. ddrare Col. iv. 6), and
Ds, adds, 6, (the classic form [fr. Hom. down]; Sir.
xxii. 15 (13); xliii. 19; Sap. x. 7; 1 Mace. x. 29, ete. ;
Mk. ix. 49 dai dat. [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br.],
and in vs. 50 L T Tr WH @a ace. [yet without the
art.] with nom. 76 das), finally, nom. and ace. dda Tdf.
25
ahextopopwvia
in Mk. ix. 50 [also Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34 (where see
his note)] (similar to yada, gen. ydAaros, a form noted
by certain grammarians, see [WH. App. p- 1583]
Kihner i. 353 sq.; but see what Fritzsche, Com. on Sir.
(xxxix. 26) p. 226 sq., says in opposition) ; salt; a
Salt with which food is seasoned and sacrifices are
sprinkled: Mk. ix.49 RG; cf. ddifw. 2. ddas ris yis,
those kinds of saline matter used to fertilize arable
land, Mt. v.13"; here salt as a condiment cannot be
understood, since this renders land sterile (Deut. xxix.
23; Zeph. ii. 9; Judg. ix. 45); ef. Grohmann in Kiiuf-
fer’s Bibl. Studien, 1844, p. 82 sqq. The meaning is,
‘It is your prerogative to impart to mankind (likened
to arable land) the influences required for a life of devo-
tion to God.’ In the statement immediately following,
eay Oe Gdas «TA., the comparison seems to be drawn from
salt as a condiment, so that two figures are blended;
[but it is better to adopt this latter meaning throughout
the pass., and take yf to denote the mass of mankind,
see s. v. 4 b. and cf. Tholuck et al. ad loc.]. In Mk.
ix. 50* and Lk. xiv. 34 salt is a symbol of that health
and vigor of soul which is essential to Christian virtue ;
[ef. Mey. on the former pass. ]. 3. Salt is a symbol
of lasting concord, Mk. ix. 50 *, because it protects food
from putrefaction and preserves it unchanged. Ac-
cordingly, in the solemn ratification of compacts, the
Orientals were, and are to this day, accustomed to par-
take of salt together. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salz;
[BB.DD. s. v. Salt]; Knobel on Leviticus p. 370. 4.
Wisdom and grace exhibited in speech: Col. iv. 6 [where
see Bp. Lehtft.].*
"Aracoa: Acts xxvii. 8; cf. Aacaia.
[ddeets, 6, T WH uniformly for ddueds, see Tdf.’s note
on Mk. i. 16 and N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. 1.; esp. ed. 8,
Proleg. p. 82 sq.; WH. App. p. 151.]
ddelpwo: impf. #Aecpov; 1 aor. #reupa; 1 aor. mid.
impy. dAeupar; [allied with Nim-os grease; cf. Curtius
§ 340; Vaniéek p. 811; Peile p. 407; fr. Hom. down];
to anoint: rwa or ti, Mk. xvi. 1; Jn. xii. 35; revd or ri
run [W. 227 (218) ], as éXai@, Lk. vii. 46°; Mk. vi. 13;
Jas. v. 14; pipe, Jn. xi. 2; Lk. vii. 38, 46°; Mid.:
Mt. vi. 17 (lit. ‘anoint for thyself thy head,’ unge tibi
caput tuum; cf. W. 257 (242); B. 192 (166 sq.)). Cf.
Win. RWB. s. v. Salbe; [B.D. or McC. and S. s. v.
Anoint, ete. Syn. : “ d\eipewis the mundane and profane,
xpiew the sacred and religious, word.” Trench § xxxviii.
Comp. : é&-adeido }.*
dArexropohwvia, -as, 7), (ddéxrwp and davn [W. 25]),
the crowing of a cock, cock-crowing: Aesop. fab. 79 [44].
Used of the third watch of the night: Mk. xiii. 35; in
this passage the watches are enumerated into which the
Jews, following the Roman method, divided the night;
(ef. Win. RWB. s. v. Nachtwachen; B. D.s. v. Watches
of Night; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Cock-crowing ; Wetst. on
Mt. xiv. 25; Wéeseler, Chron. Syn. p. 406 note]. (For
writ. who use this word see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 229, [and
add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.) Strab. 7, frag. 35 p. 83, 24;
Orig. i. 825 b.; Constt. Ap. 5, 18; 5, 19; 8, 34].) *
GNEKTWP
Gdéxrwp, -opos, 6, acock, (Lat. gallus gallinaceus) : Mt.
xxvi. 34, 74sq.; Mk. xiv. 30, 68 [Lehm. br.], 72; Lk. xxii.
34, 60 sq.3 Jn. xiii. 38; xvili. 27. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
229; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 307; W. 23; see also
BB.DD.s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 221 sq. 5
esp. Egli, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Theol., 1879 p. 517 sqq. ].*
*AretavSpeds, -cws, 6, an Alexandrian, a native or a resi-
dent of Alexandria (a celebrated city of Egypt): Acts
vi. 9: xviii. 24. [(Plut. Pomp. 49, 6; al.)]*
*AdeEavSpivds [ct. Tdf.’s note on Acts xxvii. 6; G LTr
Cobet, al. -Spivos; Chandler § 397 note], -n, -ov, Alexan-
drian: Acts xxvii. 6; xxviii. 11. [(Polyb. 34, 8, 7.)]*
*AdéEavSpos [i. e. defender of men], -ov, 6, Alexander ;
1. a son of that Simon of Cyrene who carried the cross
of Jesus: Mk. xv. 21. 2. a certain man of the kin-
dred of the high priest: Acts iv. 6. 3. a certain
Jew: Acts xix. 33. 4. a certain coppersmith, an op-
ponent of the apostle Paul: 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim. iv.
14; [al. doubt whether both these passages relate to the
same man; cf. e. g. Ellic. on the former }.*
éAevpoy, -ov, 7d, (dAevo to grind), wheaten flour, meal:
Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21.
cirov, GAdita S€ Tey KpiOdv.
seph., al.) *
dAnPera, -as, 4}, (dAnOns), [fr. Hom. down], verity, truth.
I. objectively; 1. univ. what is true in any matter
under consideration (opp. to what is feigned, fictitious,
false): Jas. ili. 14; ddnderav A€yeuy, epeiv, Jn. vill. 45 sq.;
xvi. 7; Ro. ix. 1; 1 Co. xii. 6; 1 Tim. ii. 7; etmev atta
macav tiv adnOeay, everything as it really was, Mk. v.
33, (so in classics); paptupetv ty adnOeia to testify ac-
cording to the true state of the case, Jn. v. 33; ina
broader sense, Aadeiv adnevav to speak always according
to truth, Eph. iv. 25; [aAndelas pnuara amopbéyyouat, as
opp. to the vagaries of madness, Acts xxvi. 25]; adj@eca
éyévero, was shown to be true by the event, 2 Co. vii. 14.
év adnOcia in truth, truly, as the case is, according to
fact: Mt. xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 23 sq. (as accords with the
divine nature); 2 Co. vii. 14; Col. i 6; ém ddnéelas
a. truly, in truth, according to truth: Mk. xii. 32; Lk.
iv. 25, (Job ix. 2 Sept.; Philo, vit. Moys.i.§ 1). b. of
a truth, in reality, in fact, certainly: Mk. xii. 14; Lk.
xx. 21; [xxii. 59]; Acts iv. 27; x. 34, (Clem. Rom.
1Cor. 23, 5 and 47, 8); [cf. W. § 51, 2f.; B. 336 (289)];
kar’ G\nevay in accordance with fact, i. e. (ace. to the
context) justly, without partiality: Ro. ii. 2; etre mpo-
gacet, cire addneia, Phil. i. 18; ev &pyo k. adnbeia,
1 Jn. iii, 18 [Rec. om. év; so Eph. iv. 21 WH mrg.].
2. In reference to religion, the word denotes what is
true in things appertaining to God and the duties of man,
(‘moral and religious truth’); and that a. with the
greatest latitude, in the sceptical question ri éorw aAn-
Odea, Jn. xviii. 38; b. the true notions of God which
are open to human reason without his supernatural in-
tervention: Ro. i. 18; also 7 dAjOeca Oeod the truth of
which God is the author, Ro. i. 25, cf. 19, (1 dd#Oeva rod
Xpiorov, Evang. Nicod. c. 5, 2; accordingly it is not, as
many interpret the phrase, the true nature of God Lyet
Hesych. d\eupa kupios ta Tov
(Hadt., Xen., Plat., Jo-
26
arnGevw
see Mey. ad loc.]); truth, the embodiment of which the
Jews sought in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 20. c. the truth,
as taught in the Christian religion, respecting God and
the execution of his purposes through Christ, and respect-
ing the duties of man, opposed alike to the superstitions
of the Gentiles and the inventions of the Jews, and
to the corrupt opinions and precepts of false teachers
even among Christians: 7 dAnOea rov evayy. the truth
which is the gospel or which the gospel presents, Gal. ii.
5, 14, [cef. W. § 34, 3 a.]; and absol. 9 dAnOea and
dAnOeva: Jn. i. 14,17; viii. 32, 40; [xvi 13]; xvii. 19;
1 Jn i 85.4, 212 Jno Galoaitata(huce.) canvents
2 Co. iy...2)5 xis 8) Eph iy 24002) Leite Oy slee sal
Tim. ii. 7 (€v miore: x. ddnOeia in faith and truth, of
which I became a partaker through faith) ; iii. 15; iv.
35 vi. 52 2 Tim. i. 18% i. 8s iv.4e) Wit. 14502 ees.
i. 12; [3 Jn. 8,12]; 6 Adyos rHs adnOeias, Col. i.5; Eph.
i. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; Adyos ddnOeias, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i.
18; dd0s THs ad. 2 Pet. ii. 2; amiatis adnOeias, 2 Th. ii.
13 [W. 186 (175)]; taxon ths ad. 1 Pet. i. 22; émliyrva-
ots ths GA. Heb. x. 26; 1° Pim. ii. 4; 2 Dima. 25); ai.
7; (Tit. i. 1]; avedpa tis ad. the Spirit (of God) which
is truth (1 Jn. v. 6) and imbues men with the knowledge
of the truth, Jn. xiv.17; [xvi. 13]; xv. 26; 1 Jn. iv. 6;
eyo eiut 7 adAnGeca I am he in whom the truth is summed
up and impersonated, Jn. xiv. 6; 7 dd7nOeud cov [ Rec. ]
(i. e. Oeov) the truth which is in thee and proceeds from
thee, Jn. xvii. 17; [€rrw adAnOeva Xpiorod év poi i. e.
controls, actuates, me, 2 Co. xi. 10]; etvas ex ris adnbeias
to be eager to know the truth, Jn. xviii. 37 (see éx, II. 7,
and eipi,V. 3 d.); to proceed from the truth, 1 Jn. ii. 21;
to be prompted and controlled by the truth, 1 Jn.iii. 19;
paptupety TH adnO. to give testimony in favor of the
truth in order to establish its authority among men, Jn.
XVill. 37; adnOecav roreitvy to exemplify truth in the life,
to express the form of truth in one’s habits of thought
and modes of living, Jn. iii. 21; 1 Jn. i. 6, (Tob. xiii. 6;
iv. 6; cf. Neh. ix. 33; 6ddv dAnOelas aipetiCecOa, Ps.
exvill. (cxix.) 30); so also mepumareiv év rp ad. 2 Jn. 4;
3 Jn. 3 sq.; drebeiv rf dd. is just the opposite, Ro. ii. 8;
so also mAavnOjvat awd ths ad. Jas. v. 19. II. sub-
jectively; truth as a personal excellence; that candor
of mind which is free from affectation, pretence, simula-
tion, falsehood, deceit: Jn. yiii. 44; sincerity of mind
and integrity of character, or a mode of life in harmony
with divine truth: 1 Co. v. 8; xiii. 6 (opp. to ddcia) ;
Eph. iv. 21 [see I. 1 b. above]; v. 9; [vi. 14]; cod 9
ad7Gea the truth as it is discerned in thee, thy habit of
thinking and acting in congruity with truth, 3 Jn. 3;
7) GAnOea tod Geod which belongs to God, i. e. his holi-
ness [but cf. mepuroeto, 1 b. fin.], Ro. iii. 7; spec. ve-
racity (of God in keeping his promises), Ro. xv. 8; év
aAnéeia sincerely and truthfully, 2 Jn. 1; 3Jn.1. The
word is not found in Rev. ({nor in 1 Thess., Philem.,
Jude]). Cf. Hélemann, “ Bibelstudien ”, (Lpz. 1859) Ite
Abth. p. 8 sqq.; [ Wendt in Stud. u. Krit., 1883, p. 511 sqq.]*
aAnbevw ; in prof. writ. ([Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Aristot.,
al.) to speak the truth; a. to teach the truth: ri
arnOns
Gal. iv. 16. b. to profess the truth (true doctrine) :
Eph. iv. 15. [R. V. mrg. in both pass. to deal truly.]*
adnbfs, -és, (a priv. and A7jOe, Aabeiv [AavOdve], 7d
Anos, — cf. duabys; lit. not hidden, unconcealed), [fr.
Hom. down]; Avirues Jn. dv.wlS3ex541);' xix. 35%
1 Jn. ii. 8, 27; Acts xii. 9 (an actual occurrence, opp.
to épapa); Phil. iv. 8; paprupia, Jn. v. 31 sq.; viii.
13 sq. 17; xxi. 24; 3 Jn. 12; Tit. i. 13; xpious, just,
Jn. viii. 16 (LT Tr WH dann); mapomia, 2 Pet. ii.
22; xdpts, grace which can be trusted, 1 Pet. v. 12.
2. loving the truth, speaking the truth, truthful: Mt. xxii.
16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. vii. 18; 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to
mavos); of God, In. iii. 33; viii. 26; Ro. iii. 4 (opp. to
Wevorns). 3. i. q. aAnO@vds, 1: Jn. vi. 55 (L T Tr
WH; for Rec. ddnOas), as in Sap. xii. 27, where dAnOis
Geds is contrasted with ots éddxouv Oeovs. Cf. Riickert,
Abendmahl, p. 266 sq. [On the distinction betw. this
word and the next, see Trench § viii. ; Schmidt ch. 178, 6.]*
GAnPivds, -7, -ov, (freq. in prof. writ. fr. Plato down;
[twenty-three times in Jn.’s writ.; only five (acc. to
Lchm. six) times in the rest of the N.T.]); 1. “that
which has not only the name and semblance, but the real
nature corresponding to the name” (Tittmann p. 155;
[‘‘ particularly applied to express that which is all that it
pretends to be, for instance, pure gold as opp. to adul-
terated metal” Donaldson, New Crat. § 258; see, at
length, Trench § viii.]), in every respect corresponding to
the idea signified by the name, real and true, genuine;
a. opp. to what is fictitious, counterfeit, imaginary,
simulated, pretended: 6eds (TDN TORN, 2) Che xv.1 3);
1 Th. i. 9; Heb. ix. 14 Lehm.; Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. v. 20.
(adn Owoi pirat, Dem. Phil. 3, p. 113, 27.) b. it con-
trasts realities with their semblances: oxnvn, Heb. viii.
2; the sanctuary, Heb. ix. 24. (6 tmros contrasted
with 6 év Ti eixdm, Ael. v. h. 2, 3.) c. opp. to what is
imperfect, defective, frail, uncertain: Jn. iv. 23, 37; vii.
28; used without adjunct of Jesus as the true Messiah,
Rev. iii. 7; pas, Jn. i. 9; 1 In. ii. 8; kpiows, Jn. vill. 16
(L T Tr WH;; Is. lix. 4); xpioess, Rev. xvi. 7; xix. 2;
pros, as nourishing the soul unto life everlasting, Jn.
vi. 32; duredos, Jn. xv. 1; paprvpia, Jn. xix. 35; pdprus,
Rey. iii. 14; Seomdrns, Rev. vi. 10; 680%, Rev. xv. 3;
coupled with mords, Rev. iii. 14; xix. 11; substantively,
7d dAnOwdv the genuine, real good, opp. to external
riches, Lk. xvi. 11, ([ois pev yap ddnOwds mdovros ev
ovpav@, Philo de praem. et poen. § 17, p. 425 ed.
Mang.; cf. Wetst. on Lk. 1. c.]; d6Anrai, Polyb. 1, 6, 6).
2. i. 4. ddnOns, true, veracious, sincere, (often so in Sept.) :
xapdia, Heb. x. 22 (per? adnOeias ?v xapdia arnOiv7, Is.
Xxxvili. 3); Adyor, Rev. [xix. 9]; xxi. 5; xxii. 6, (Plut.
apoph. p. 184 e.). [Cf. Cremer 4te Aufl. s. v. dhjOea. ] *
dd40w; (a com. Grk. form for the Attic ddéa, cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 151); to grind: Mt. xxiv. 41; Lk. xvii.
35. It was the custom to send women and female slaves
to the mill-houses [?] to turn the hand-mills (Ex. xi. 5),
who were called by the Greeks yuvaixes dderpides (Hom.
Od. 20, 105); [cf. B. D. s. v. Mill].*
ddAnOds, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], truly, of a truth, in
27
anrXa
reality; most certainly: Jn. i. 47 (48) ; iv. 42; vi. 14, 05
Rec. ; vii. 26, 40; viii. 31; xvii. 8; Mt. xiv. 33; xxvi.
73; (Mk. xiv. 70; Mt.] xxvii. 54; [Mk. xv. 39]; Lk.
ix. 27; xii. 44; xxi. 3; Acts xii. 11; 1 Th.ii.13; 1 Jn.
1s Gs
ddtevs, -€ws, 5, (Gs, adds, the sea), [fr. Hom. down];
a fisherman, fisher: Mt. iv. 18 sq.; Mk. i. 16 sq.; Lk.
v. 2, —in all which pass. T and WH have dneeis fr. the
form dXeevs, q. v.*
Gebw; (dduevs) ; to fish: Jn. xxi. 3. [Philo, Plut.]*
dritw: (GAs, adds, salt); to salt, season with salt, sprin-
kle with salt; only the fut. pass. is found in the N. T.:
ev tim dducOnoerat; by what means can its saltness be
restored? Mt. v.13; @voia adi ddicOjoerat, the sacrifice
is sprinkled with salt and thus rendered acceptable to
God, Mk. ix. 49 [R GL Tr txt. br.], (Lev. ii. 13; Ezek.
xliii. 24; Joseph. antt. 3, 9, 1; cf. Knobel on Lev.
p- 369 sq.; Win. RWB. s. v. Salz; [BB.DD. s. v. Salt]);
mas mupt dduoOnoera, every true Christian is rendered
ripe for a holy and happy association with God in his
kingdom by fire, i. e. by the pain of afflictions and
trials, which if endured with constancy tend to purge
and strengthen the soul, Mk. ix. 49. But this ex-
tremely difficult passage is explained differently by
others ; [cf. Meyer, who also briefly reviews the history
of its exposition]. (Used by the Sept., Aristot., [cf.
Soph. Lex.|; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10 [shorter form] d\i-
oOnre ev Xpiota, iva pry SiapOapy tis ev vuiv.) [Comp.:
ovv-adi¢@, — but see the word. |*
dAiocynpa, -ros, Td, (dAvoyew to pollute, which occurs
Sir. xl. 29; Dan.i.8; Mal. i. 7,12; akin to diva, ddwéo
to besmear [ Lat. linere, cf. Lob. Pathol. Element. p. 21;
Rhemat. p. 123; Steph., Hesych., Sturz, De Dial. Alex.
p- 145]), pollution, contamination: Acts xv. 20 (rod
dméxerOar xtX. to beware of pollution from the use
of meats left from the heathen sacrifices, cf. vs. 29).
Neither ddvoyéw nor ddtoynpa occurs in Grk. writ.*
d\Ad, an adversative particle, derived from @AXa,
neut. of the adj. dAdos, which was originally pronounced
addés (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly,
other things sc. than those just mentioned. It differs
from 8é, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [cf. W. 441
sq. (411) ]. I. But. So related to the preceding words
that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to con-
cessions; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6;
Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii.
48-0 Ro. v. 14) sq55 x. 16; 1 Co. iv..4352)Co. i-.6;5
Phil. ii. 27 (GAN 6 Oeds ete.), ete. 2. an objection :
Jn vale 273) Ro. x. 18) sq.3 1 Copxy. 353" Jas. ii, 18.
3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7;
5 DBR 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk.
xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation,
nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp.
with xai added, Lk. xii. 7; xvi. 21; xxiv. 22. dAD’ ode,
but... not even (Germ. ja nicht einmal): Lk. xxiii. 15;
Acts xix. 2; 1 Co. iii. 2 [Rec. otre]; cf. Fritzsche op
Mk. p. 157. 6. or forms a transition to the cardinas
matter, especially before imperatives: Mt. ix. 18; Mk
adra
ix. 22; xvi. 7; Lk. vii. 7; In. viii. 26; xvi. 4; Acts ix.
6 [not Rec.]; x. 20; xxvi. 16. 7. it is put ellipti-
cally: dN’ iva, i. €. GAAG TOTO yéyover, iva, Mk. xiv. 49 ;
Afiy ait, WS 076 HR 1 Ahn sib IGE 8. after a condi-
tional or concessive protasis it signifies, at the begin-
ning of the apodosis, yet [cf. W. 442 (411)]: after kat
ei, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [RG]; Mk. xiv. 29 RGL, (2 Mace.
viii. 15); after ei «ai, Mk. xiv. 29 [T Tr WH]; 2 Co.
iv. 16; v. 16; xi. 6; Col. ii. 5, (2 Mace. vi. 26); after
ei, 1 Co. ix. 2; Ro. vi. 5, (1 Mace. ii. 20); after édy,
1 Co. iv. 15; after etrep, 1 Co. viii. 6 [L Tr mrg. WH br.
avn]; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 93 8q.; Kiihner ii.
p- 827, § 535 Anm. 6. 9. after a preceding pev: Mk.
ix. 18 [T om. Tr br. pév]; Acts iv. 16; Ro. xiv. 20;
1 Co. xiv. 17. 10. it is joined to other particles;
adda ye [Grsb. ddAdye] (twice in the N. T.): yet at least,
1 Co. ix. 2; yet surely (aber freilich), Lk. xxiv. 21 [LT
Tr WH add xai yea and ete.], cf. Bornemann ad loc.
In the more elegant Greek writers these particles are
not combined without the interposition of the most
emphatic worc between them; cf. Bornemann l. c¢.;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 15 sq. 24 sq.; Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p.
101; [W. 444 (413)]. add # (arising from the blending
of the two statements ovdev aAXo # and oddey aAXo, GAda)
save only, except: 1 Co. iii. 5 (where aAX 7H omitted
by G L T Tr WH is spurious); Lk. xii. 51, (Sir.
Xxxvii. 12; xliv. 10); and after Ma itself, 2 Co. i. 13
{here Lehm. br. aX’ before #]; cf. Klotz u. s. ii. 31 sqq.;
Kiihner ii. p. 824 sq. § 535, 6; W. 442 (412); [B. 374
(320) ]. add ov but not, yet not: Heb. iii. 16 Gf punctu-
ated maperixpavav ; adX ov) for ‘but why do I ask? did
not all,’ ete.; cf. Bleek ad loc. [W. 442 (411)]. adN
ovdxi will he not rather? Lk. xvii. 8. II. preceded by
a negation: but (Lat. sed, Germ. sondern) ; 1. ovk
(Gy. GANG? Mt. xix. 1135) Mk y. 395 Jn. vit. 16)
1 Co. i. 173; vii. 10, 19 [oddév]; 2 Co. vii. 9; 1 Tim. v.
23 [unxére], etc. By a rhetorical construction ovk
-.. GdAd sometimes is logically equiv. to not so much
.as: Mk. ix. 87 (odk éué déyerat, adda Tov arooTei-
Aavra pe); Mt. x. 20; Jn. xii. 44; Acts v. 4; 1 Co. xv.
10; 1 Th. iv. 8; by this form of speech the emphasis is
laid on the second member; ef. Fritzsche on Mk. Dp:
773 sqq.; W. § 55, 8 b.; [B. 356 (306)]. od pdvov...
GAA kai not only... but also: Jn. v. 18; xi. 52 [adn
iva kai, etc.]; Ro. i. 32, and very often. When kai is
omitted (as in the Lat. non solum... sed), the grada-
tion is strengthened: Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. adds kal];
1Jn.v.6; add\dy\a TOAA® paddov, Phil. ii. 12; cf. Fritzsche
l. c. p. 786 sqq.; W. 498 (464); [B. 369 sq. (317)].
2. The negation to which dddd pertains is suppressed,
but can easily be supplied upon reflection [W. 442
(412)]}: Mt. xi. 7-9; Lk. vii. 24-26, (in each passage,
before ddXa supply ‘ you will say you did not go out into
the wilderness for this purpose’); Acts xix. 2 (we have
not received the Holy Spirit, but ...); Gal. ii. 3 (they
said not one word in opposition to me, but. . ») 3 2 Co.
vii. 11 (where before dAdd, repeated six times by ana-
phora, supply od pdvov with the accus. of the preceding
28
adopae
word). It is used in answers to questions having the
force of a negation [W. 442 (412)]: Jn. vil. 49; Acts
xv. 11; 1 Co. x. 20. dAda iva [or GAN’ iva, cf. W. 40;
B. 10] elliptical after a negation [W. 316 sq. (297);
620 (576); Fritzsche on Mt. p. 840 sq.]: Jn. i. 8 (sup-
ply adda HAGev, va) ; ix. 3 (adda TUpAds eyevero [or eyer
On |, wa); Mk. iv. 22 (dAXa ToLodvTo eyevero, (va) eaieeelthe
best Mss. seem to elide the final a before nouns, but
not before verbs” Scrivener, Plain Introduction, etc.,
p- 14; but see Dr. Gregory’s full exhibition of the facts
in Tdf. Proleg. p. 93 sq., from which it appears that
“elision is commonly or almost always omitted before a,
almost always before v, often before ¢ and n, rarely
before o and , never before «; and it should be noticed
that this coincides with the fact that the familiar words
év, iva, Ort, ov, ws, prefer the form add”; see also WH.
App. p. 146. Cf. W..§ 5, 1 a.; B. p. 10.]
Drdcow: fut. addrAd€o; 1 aor. 7#AdAa~a; 2 fut. pass.
ddAaynoopa; (dAdos); [fr. Aeschyl. down]; to change:
to cause one thing to cease and another to take its
place, ra ny, Acts vi. 14; tiv parvny to vary the voice,
i.e. to speak in a different manner according to the
different conditions of minds, to adapt the matter and
form of discourse to mental moods, to treat them now
severely, now gently, Gal. iv. 20 [but see Meyer ad
loc.]. to exchange one thing for another: ri é&v tum,
Ro. i. 23 (2 V7 Ps. ev. (evi.) 20; the Greeks say da-
Adooew ri twos [cf. W. 206 (194), 388 (363); Vaughan
on Rom.1|.¢.]). to transform: 1 Co. xv. 51 sq.; Heb. i.
12. [Comp.: dm-, dv-, kat-, amo-Kat-, weT-, Tvy-addaooe. | *
ddaxsbev, adv., from another place: Jn. x. 1 (i. q.
@dobev [which the grammarians prefer, Thom. Mag.
ed. Ritschl p. 10, 13; Moeris ed: Piers. p.11]; ef.
éxaotaxdbev, mavtaxdbev). [(Antiph., al.)]*
®dAaxod, adv., i. gq. dAoM, elsewhere, in another place:
Mk. i. 38 (T Tr txt. WH Tr mrg. br.). Cf. Borne-
mann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 127 sq. [Soph.,
Xen., al.; see Thom. M. and Moer. as in the preced.
word. | *
dAAnyopew, -&: [pres. pass. ptep. adAnyopotpevos ]; i. e.
@\Xo péev ayopeta, do b€ vow, “aliud verbis, aliud
sensu ostendo ” (Quint. instt. 8, 6, 44), to speak alle-
gorically or in a figure: Gal. iv. 24. (Philo, Joseph.,
Plut., and gram. writ.; [ef. Mey. on Gal. l. ¢.].)*
éAAnAovia, [ WH. ‘AAA. and -a; see Intr. § 408], Hebr.
W197, praise ye the Lord, Hallelujah: Rev. xix. 1, 3 sq.
6. [Sept. Pss. passim; Tob. xiii. 18; 3 Mace. vii. 13.]*
GAAfAwv, gen. plur. [no nom. being possible]; dat.
-OlS, -als, -Ols; ACC. -oUS, -as, -a, One another ; reciprocally,
mutually: Mt. xxiv. 10; Jn. xiii. 35; Acts xxviii. 25;
Ro. i. 12; Jas. v. 16; Rev. vi. 4, and often. [Fr. Hom.
down. ]
dAXoyevtjs, -€s, (GAXos and yévos), sprung from another
race, a foreigner, alien: Lk. xvii. 18. (In Sept. [Gen.
xvii. 27; Ex. xii. 43, etc.], but nowhere in prof. writ.)*
DAopor; impf. 7AASpyv; aor. praunv and HArAdsunv (Bitm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 108; [W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)]); to
leap (Lat. salio): Acts iii. 8; xiv. 10 (Rec. #AXero;
aAXos :
GLT Tr WH #araro); to spring up, gush up, of water,
Jn. iv. 14, (as in Lat. salire, Verg. ecl. 5, 47; Suet.
Octav. 82). [Comp.: é, ep-dddopat. | *
GXos, -7, -o, [cf. Lat. alius, Germ. alles, Eng. else; fr.
Hom. down], another, other; a. absol.: Mt. xxvii.
42; xx. 3; Mk. vi. 15; Acts xix. 32; xxi. 34 (oe
pev GdXo), and often. b. as an adj.: Mt. ii. 12; iv.
21; Jn. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 29 (dAAn ovveldnars 2. e. 7) Ouy.
@Xov Twvds). ce. with the art.: 6 dos the other (of
two), Mt. v. 39; xii. 13, ete. [ef. B. 32 (28), 122 (107)];
pi dAou all others, the remainder, the rest: Jn. xxi. 8;
1 Co. xiv. 29.
[SYN. &AAos, repos: &A. as compared with ér. denotes
numerical in distinction from qualitative difference; %a. adds
(‘one besides’), &r. distinguishes (‘one of two’); every ér.
is an GA., but not every &A. is a ér.; %A. generally ‘ denotes
simply distinction of individuals, érepos involves the sec-
ondary idea of difference of kind’; e.g. 2Co. xi. 4; Gal.i.
6,7. See Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on the latter pass.; Trench
§ xcv.; Schmidt ch. 198.]
GdAoTpto-erickoros (LT Tr WH ddorprer.), -ov, 6,
(@Xsrptos and émicxoros), one who takes the supervision
of affairs pertaining to others and in no wise to himself, [a
meddler in other men’s matters |: 1 Pet. iv. 15 (the writer
seems to refer to those who, with holy but intemperate
zeal, meddle with the affairs of the Gentiles — whether
public or private, civil or sacred —in order to make them
conform to the Christian standard). [Hilgenfeld (cf.
Kinl. ins N. T. p. 630) would make it equiv. to the Lat.
delator.| The word is found again only in Dion. Areop.
ep. 8 p. 783 (of one who intrudes into another’s office),
and [Germ. of Const. ep. 2 ad Cypr. c. 9, in] Coteler.
Kecl. Graec. Mon. ii. 481 b.; [cf. W. 25, 99 (94)]*
GAASTpLOs, -a, -ov; 1. belonging to another (opp. to
iStos), not one’s own: Heb. ix. 25; Ro. xiv. 4; xv. 20;
2aConmx.alol sq.nmlelbim. ve22eIN- xo.) inmneut.. Lk
xvi. 12 (opp. to TO tperepor). 2. foreign, strange:
yn, Acts vii. 6; Heb. xi. 9; not of one’s own family,
alien, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; an enemy, Heb. xi. 34, (Hom. U.
5, 214; Xen. an. 3, 5, 5).*
GAASdvdAos, -ov, (dAdos, and PdAov race), foreign, (in
prof. auth. fr. [Aeschyl.,] Thuc. down); when used in
Hellenistic Grk. in opp. to a Jew, it signifies a Gen-
tile, [A. V. one of another nation]: Acts x. 28. (Philo,
Joseph. )*
ddXws, adv., (dAdos), [fr. Hom. down], otherwise:
1 Tim. v. 25 (ra dds exovra, which are of a different
sort i. e. which are not xada épya, [al. which are not
mpddnda }).*
édodw, -&; (connected with 7 ddws or 7 ddwn, the
floor on which grain is trodden or threshed out); to
thresh, (Ammon. 16 emt rH GA@ mareiv kat TpiBew Tas
ordxvas): 1 Co. ix. [9], 10; 1 Tim. v. 18 (Deut. xxv.
4). In prof. auth. fr. Arstph., Plato down.*
d-doyos, -ov, (Adyos reason) ; 1. destitute of reason,
brute: ¢aa, brute animals, Jude 10; 2 Pet. ii. 12, (Sap.
xi. 16; Xen. Hier. 7, 3, al.). 2. contrary to reason,
absurd: Acts xxv. 27, (Xen. Ages. 11,1; Thue. 6, 85;
often in Plat., Isocr., al.).*
29
Gdeomnt
4A6n [on the accent see Chandler § 149], -ns, 9, (com-
monly £vdaddén, dydddoyov), Plut., the aloe, aloes: In.
xix. 39. The name of an aromatic tree which grows in
eastern India and Cochin China, and whose soft and
bitter wood the Orientals used in fumigation and in
embalming the dead (as, acc. to Hdt., the Egyptians
did), Hebr. DOAN and nions [see Muhlau and Volck
s. vv.], Num. xxiv. 6; Ps. xlv. 9; Prov. vii. 17; Cant.
iv. 14. Arab. Alluwe; Linn.: Excoecaria Agallochum.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Aloé [Low § 235; BB.DD].*
GAs, ddds, 6, see Gras.
Gdukds, -7, -dv, salt (i. g. GApvpds): Jas. iii, 12.
((Hippoer., Arstph.,] Plat. Tim. p. 65 e.; Aristot.,
Theophr., al.) *
GAvTos, -ov, (Avi), free from pain or grief: Phil. ii. 28.
(Very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Plat. down.)*
dAvots, or as it is com. written ddvows [see WH. App.
p- 144], -ews, 7, (fr. a priv. and Avo, because a chain is
advros i. e. not to be loosed fal. fr. r. val, and allied w.
eihéw to restrain, ddi¢o to collect, crowd; Curtius § 660;
Vanitek p. 898]), a chain, bond, by which the body, or
any part of it (the hands, feet), is bound: Mk. v. 3; Acts
xxi. 33; xxviii. 20; Rev. xx. 1; ev dAvoee in chains, a
prisoner, Eph. vi. 20; ov« émavaxiv6n tH Gd. pou he was
not ashamed of my bonds i. e. did not desert me be-
cause I was a prisoner, 2 Tim. i. 16. spec. used of a
manacle or hand-cuff, the chain by which the hands are
bound together [yet cf. Mey. on Mk. u.i.; per contra
esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 8]: Mk. v. 4; [Lk. viii. 29];
Acts xii. 6 sq. (From Hdt. down.)*
d-AuoitTeAts, -és, (AvotreAjs, See Avowrehew), Unprofit-
able, (Xen. vectig. 4,6); by litotes, hurtful, pernicious :
Heb. xiii. 17. (From [Hippocr.,] Xen. down.)*
adda, rd, indecl.: Rev. i. 8; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. See A.
*Addatos [WH ‘AA¢., see their Intr. § 408], -aiov, 6,
cam, cf. \3M ’Ayyaios, Hag.i.1), Alpheus or Alpheus;
1. the father of Levi the publican: Mk. ii. 14, see Aevi,
4, 2. the father of James the less, so called, one of
the twelve apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15;
Actsi. 13. He seems to be the same person who in Jn.
xix. 25 (cf. Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40) is called KAwzas
after a different pronunciation of the Hebr. DIN ace.
to which M was changed into x, as N09 gacex, 2 Chr.
xxx. 1. Cf. Idxk@Bos, 2; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Alpheus;
also Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. pp. 256, 267 (Am. ed. pp.
92,103); Wetzel in Stud. u. Krit. for 1883, p. 620 sq. ].*
drwy, -ovos, 7, (in Sept. also 6, cf. Ruth iii. 2; Job
xxxix. 12), i. q. 9 Aas, gen. dro, a ground-plot or thresh-
ing-floor, i. e. a place in the field itself, made hard after
the harvest by a roller, where the grain was threshed
out: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. In both these pass., by
meton. of the container for the thing contained, dwy is
the heap of grain, the flooring, already indeed threshed
out, but still mixed with chaff and straw, like Hebr.
m1, Ruth iii. 2; Job xxxix. 12 (Sept. in each place
GdGva) ; [al. adhere to the primary meaning. Used by
Aristot. de vent. 8, Opp. ii. 973°, 14].*
Gddané, -exos, 7, a for: Mt. viii. 20: Lk. ix. 58.
addA@ols
Metaph. a sly and crafty man: Lk. xiii. 32; (in the
same sense often in the Grk. writ., as Solon in Plut. Sol.
30, 2; Pind. Pyth. 2, 141; Plut. Sulla 28, 5).*
GArwors, -ews, 7, (dAdw, dickopat to be caught), a catch-
ing, capture: 2 Pet. ii. 12 eis GAwow to be taken, [some
would here take the word actively: to take]. (Hr.
Pind. and Hdt. down.) * ;
dpa [Skr. sa, sama; Eng. same; Lat. simul; Germ.
sammt, ete.; Curtius § 449; Vanitek p. 972. Fr. Hom.
down |; 1. adv., at the same time, at once, together :
Acts xxiv. 26; xxvii. 40; Col. iv. 3; 1 Tim. v. 13;
Philem. 22; all to a man, every one, Ko. iii. 12. 2:
prep. [W. 470 (439)], together with, with dat. : Mt. xiii.
29. dua mput early in the morning: Mt. xx. 1, (in Grk.
writ. dua TO rio, dua TH npepa). In 1 Th. iv. 17 and
v. 10, where dua is foll. by ovv, dua is an adv. (at the
same time) and must be joined to the verb.*
[Syx. &ua, duod: the distinction given by Ammonius
(de diff. voc. s. v.) et al., that dua is temporal, duov local,
seems to hold in the main; yet see Ro. iii. 12, and cf. Hesych.
8. V.
orien -és, gen. -ovs, (uavOavw, whence épador, rd pddos,
cf. ddnOns), unlearned, ignorant: 2 Pet. iii. 16. (In Grk.
writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
dywapdvrivos, -ov, (fr. dudpavros, as podwos made of
roses, fr. pddov a rose; cf. dxavOwos), composed of ama-
ranth (a flower, so called because it never withers or
fades, and when plucked off revives if moistened with
water; hence it is a symbol of perpetuity and immor-
tality, [see Paradise Lost iii. 353 sqq.]; Plin. h. n. 21
(15), 23 [al. 47]): orépavos, 1 Pet. v.4. (Found besides
only in Philostr. her. 19, p. 741; [and (conjecturally) in
Boeckh, Corp. Inserr.155, 39, c. B. C. 340].) *
apdpavros, -ov, (fr. papaivw; cf. auiavros, dpavros, etc.),
not fading away, unfading, perennial; Vulg. immarcesci-
bilis; (hence the name of the flower, [Diose. 4, 57, al.];
see dpapdytivos): 1 Pet. i. 4. Found elsewhere only in
Sap. vi. 133 [Cay apap. Sibyll. 8, 411; Boeckh, Corp.
Inserv. ii. p. 1124, no. 2942 c, 4; Leian. Dom. ¢. 9].*
dpaptdave; fut. duaprnow (Mt. xviii. 21; Ro. vi. 15;
in the latter pass. LT Tr WH give duyaprncepev for
RG dpaprnoopev), in class. Grk. duaprpcopa; 1 aor.
(later) judprnoca, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, 16 Col W.:
82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. jwaprov; pf. ndptynka 3
(ace. to a conjecture of Bitm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. a priv.
and pepo, peipoua, pépos, prop. to be without a share in,
sc. the mark); prop. to miss the mark, (Hom. Il. 8, 311,
ete.; with gen. of the thing missed, Hom. II. 10, 372;
4,491; rod oxomov, Plat. Hipp. min. p. 375 a.3 ris 6d00,
Arstph. Plut. 961, al.); then to err, be mistaken; lastly
to miss or wander from the path of uprightness and honor,
to door go wrong. [Even the Sept., although the Hebr.
son also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve
duapt. exclusively for the idea of sin; and where the
Hebr. signifies to miss one’s aim in the literal sense,
they avail themselves of expressive compounds, in par-
ticular efayapravew, Jude. xx. 16.” Zezschwitz, Profan-
graec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63 sq.] In the N. T.
30
€ y
apapTta
to wander from the law of God, violate God’s law, sin;
a. absol.: Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. v. 14; viii. 11; ix. 2 sq.;
1 Jn. i. 10; ii. 1; iii. 6, 8 sq.; v. 18; Ro. ii. 12; iii. 23;
y. 12, 14, 16; vi. 15; 1 Co. vii. 28, 36; xv. 34; Eph.
iv. 26; 1 Tim. v. 20; Tit. iii, 11; Heb. iii. 17; x. 26
(€xovaiws) ; [2 Pet. ii. 4]; of the violation of civil laws,
which Christians regard as also the transgression of divine
law, 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. dpaprdvew duapriay to commit
(lit. sin) a sin, 1 Jn. v. 16, (ueydAnv duapriay, Ex. xxxii.
30 sq. Hebr. ANUT NOM; aicxpav dp. Soph. Phil. 1249;
peydXa dpaptnpata dpapraver, Plat. Phaedo p.113 e.); ef.
dyarrdw, sub fin. dpaprdvew eis twa [B. 173 (150); W. 233
(219)]: Mt. xviii. 15 (LT WH om. Tr mrg. br. eis ge),
21; Lk. xv. 18, 21; xvii. 3 Rec., 4; 1 Co. vill. 12; ri es
Kaicapa, Acts xxv. 8; eis ro iStov o@pa, 1 Co. vi. 18, (eis
avrovs re kai eis GAXous, Plat. rep. 3, p. 396a.; «is rd
Oeiov, Plat. Phaedr. p. 242 ¢.; eis Oeovs, Xen. Hell. 1, 7,
19, etc.; [cf. dp. xupio 6e@, Bar. i. 13; ii. 5]); Hebraisti-
cally, évamidv (1397) twos [B. § 146, 1] in the presence of,
before any one, the one wronged by the sinful act being,
as it were, present and looking on: Lk. xv. 18, 21, (1S.
vii. 6; Tob. iii. 3, etc.; [ef. évavre xupiov, Bar. i. 17]).
[For reff. see duapria.
dpdprnpa, -ros, rd, (fr. duaptéw i. q. duaptave, cf. adi-
Knua, adio-ynpa), a sin, evil deed, [“ Differunt 7 dpapria et
To dudptnua ut Latinorum peccatus et peccatum. Nam
TO duaptnua et peccatum proprie malum facinus indi-
cant; contra 7 duapria et peccatus primum peccationem,
76 peccare, deinde peccatum, rem consequentem, valent.”
Fritzsche ; see duapria, fin. ; cf. also Trench § lxvi.]: Mk.
ili. 28,-and du TP Trtxt. WH) 29; iv.12 @vhereG Dir
txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. ra dapr.) ; Ro. iii. 25; 1 Co.
vi. 18; 2 Pet. i. 9 (R[L WH txt. Tr mrg.] dpapridy).
In prof. auth. fr. Soph. and Thue. down; [of bodily de-
fects, Plato, Gorg. 479 a.; du. pynwouxdv, Cic. ad Att.
13, 21; dp. ypadixdv, Polyb. 34, 3,11; drav pév mapaddoyas
1 BAGBn yevnrar, arvxnuas drav dé pr mapaddyas, dvev dé
kakias, Gudptnua: dtav b€ eida@s péev fu) mpoBovdrevaas de,
adixnua, Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 10 p. 1135", 16 sq.].*
dpaptia, -as, 7, (fr. 2 aor. duapteiv, as dmorvyia fr.
drotvxeiv), a failing to hit the mark (see duaprav). In
Grk. writ. (fr. Aeschyl. and Thue. down). 1st, an error
of the understanding (cf. Ackermann, Das Christ]. im
Plato, p. 59 Anm. 3 [Eng. trans. (S. R. Asbury, 1861)
p-57n.99]). 2d, a bad action, evil deed. Inthe N. T.
always in an ethical sense, and 1. equiv. to 7d dyap-
Tdvewv a sinning, whether it occurs by omission or com-
mission, in thought and feeling or in speech and actior.
(cf. Cic. de fin. 3, 9): Ro. v. 12 sq. 20; if? dpapriay
etvat held down in sin, Ro. iii. 9; emtpevey TH duaptia, Ro.
Vi. 1; droOvnoxew rh dp. and ¢hv év airy, Ro. vi. 25 rv dp.
ywooew, Ro. vii. 7; 2 Co. v. 21; vexpos th dp. Ro. vi.
11} epi duaprias to break the power of sin, Ro. viii. 3 [ef.
Mey.]; oépa tijs du. the body as the instrument of sin,
Ro. vi. 6; amdry ris dp. the craft by which sin is accus-
tomed to deceive, Heb. iii. 13; &v@pwmos ris du. [avopias
T Tr txt. WH txt.] the man so possessed by sin that he
seems unable to exist without it, the man utterly given up
Comp. : mpo-apapravo. |*
dpaptia
to sin, 2 Th. ii. 3 [W. § 34, 3 Note 2]. In this sense 4
duapria (i. q. 7d duaprdvery) as a power exercising domin-
ion over men (sin as a principle and power) is rhetorically
represented as an imperial personage in the phrases 4
dp. Baowever, Kuprever, katepyaterar, Ro. vy. 21; vi. 12,
14; vil. 17, 20; dovdevew rH dy. Ro. vi. 6; Sodd0s THs
dp. Jn. viii. 34 [WH br. Gom. ris du.]; Ro. vi. 17; vdpos
THs dp. the dictate of sin or an impulse proceeding from
it, Ro. vii. 235; viii. 2; dvvapis ris du. 1 Co. xv. 56; (the
prosopopeia occurs in Gen. iv. 7 and, acc. to the read-
ing dyapria, in Sir. xxvii. 10). Thus dyapria in sense,
but not in signification, is the source whence the
several evil acts proceed; but it never denotes vitiosity.
2. that which is done wrong, committed or resultant sin,
an offence, a violation of the divine law in thought or in
act (7) duapria éoriv H dvouia, 1 Jn. iii. 4); a. generally:
Jas. i. 15; Jn. viii. 46 (where duapr. must be taken to
mean neither error, nor craft by which Jesus is corrupt-
ing the people, but sin viewed generally, as is well
shown by Liicke ad loc. and Ullmann in the Stud. u.
Krit. for 1842, p. 667 sqq. [cf. his Siindlosigkeit Jesu
p- 66 sqq. (Eng. trans. of 7th ed. p. 71 sq.)]; the
thought is, ‘If any one convicts me of sin, then you may
lawfully question the truth and divinity of my doctrine,
for sin hinders the perception of truth’); yepis dyaprias
so that he did not commit sin, Heb. iv. 15; oveiy dpap-
riav and thy dp. Jn. viii. 34; 1 In. iii. 8; 2 Co. xi. 7;
1 Pet. ii. 22; yew duapriay to have sin as though it were
one’s odious private property, or to have done something
needing expiation, i. q. to have committed sin, Jn. ix.
41; xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; 1 Jn.i. 8, (so aiua éyew, of one
who has committed murder, Eur. Or. 514); very often
in the plur. duapria [in the Synopt. Gospels the sing.
occurs but once: Mt. xii. 31]: 1 Th. ii. 16; [Jas. v. 16
LT Tr WH]; Rev. xviii. 4 sq., ete.; mA7O0s dpapriay,
Jas. v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 8; movety duaprias, Jas. v. 15; also
in the expressions d@eots duapri@v, apuevat tas ap., etc.
(see ddinut, 1 d.), in which the word does not of itself
denote the guilt or penalty of sins, but the sins are con-
ceived of as removed so to speak from God’s sight,
regarded by him as not having been done, and there-
fore are not punished. év dyapr. od eyewwnOns dros thou
wast covered all over with sins when thou wast born,
i. e. didst sin abundantly before thou wast born, Jn. ix.
34; év rais dp. droOvncxew to die loaded with evil deeds,
therefore unreformed, Jn. viii. 24; ére €v duapriass etvat
still to have one’s sins, sc. unexpiated, 1 Co. xv. 17.
b. some particular evil deed: tiv dp. tavrny, Acts vii. 60;
naca dpapria, Mt. xii. 31; dpapria mpds Oavaror, 1 Jn. v. 16
(an offence of such gravity that a Christian lapses from
the state of ¢w# received from Christ into the state of
Odvaros (cf. Odvaros, 2) in which he was before he be-
came united to Christ by faith; cf. Liicke, DeWette, [esp.
Westcott, ad 1.]). 3. collectively, the complex or
aggregate of sins committed either by a single person or by
many: atpew Thy Gp. Tod Kéopov, Jn. i. 29 (see atpa, 3
&.) 3 droOunokew ev TH dp. Jn. viii. 21 (see 2 a. sub fin.) ;
mepi duaprias, sc. Ouoias [W. 583 (542); B. 393 (336) ],
31
Ae“TToS
expiatory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (acc. to the usage of the
Sept., who sometimes so translate the Hebr. MNUM and
NNO, e. g. Lev. v. 115 vii. 27 (87); Ps. xxxix. Gl) OR
Xe@pis duaprias having no fellowship with the sin which
he is about [?] to expiate, Heb. ix. 28. 4. abstract for
the concrete, i. q. duaprwdds: Ro. vii. 7 (6 vépos dpapria,
opp. to 6 vépos aysos, vs. 12); 2 Co. v. 21 (roy... duapriav
eroinoev he treated him, who knew not sin, as a sinner).
Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. 289 sqq.; [see Gpdptnpa ;
Trench § Ixvi.].
Gudprupos, -ov, (udprus), without witness or testimony,
unattested: Acts xiv.17. (Thuc., Dem., Joseph., Plut.,
Leian., Hdian.) *
dpaptwrds, -dv, (fr. the form dyapra, as peiSwdros from
eidouar), devoted to sin, a (masc. or fem.) sinner. In
the N. T. distinctions are so drawn that one is called
dpaptadds who is a. not free from sin. In this sense
all men are sinners; as, Mt. ix. 13; Mk.ii.17; Lk. v. 8,
D2. Pelle 2 excvatial See NOsilien Gs mValeOl il opmental oy
Heb. vii. 26. b. pre-eminently sinful, especially wicked ;
a. univ.: 1 Tim.i.9; Jude 15; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. vi. 32-
84; vii. 37, 39; xv. 7, 10; Jn. ix. 16, 24 sq. 31; Gal. ii.
17; Heb. xii. 3; Jas. iv. 8; v.20; 1 Pet.iv.18; duapria
itself is called duaprwdds, Ro. vii. 13. 8. spec., of men
stained with certain definite vices or crimes, e. g.
the tax-catherers: Lk. xv. 2; xviii. 13; xix. 7; hence the
combination reA@vat kal Guaprwdoi, Mt. ix. 10 sq.; xi. 19;
Mk. ii. 15 sq.; Lk. v. 30; vil. 34; xv. 1. heathen,
called by the Jews sinners xar’ eEoynv (1 Mace. i. 34;
ii. 48, 62; Tob. xiii. 6): Mt. xxvi. 45 [?]; Mk. xiv. 41;
Lk. xxiv. 7; Gal. ii. 15. (The word is found often in
Sept., as the equiv. of NOM and yw, and in the O. T.
Apocr.; very seldom in Grk. writ., as Aristot. eth. Nic.
2,9 p. 11094, 33; Plut. de audiend. poét. 7, p. 25 c.)*
d&paxos, -ov, (udyn), in Grk. writ. [fr. Pind. down]
commonly not to be withstood, invincible; more rarely
abstaining from fighting, (Xen. Cyr. 4,1, 16; Hell. 4, 4,
9); in the N. T. twice metaph. not contentious: 1 ‘Tim.
ii. 3; Tit. i. 2.*
dud, -: 1 aor. xunoa; (fr. dua together; hence to
gather together, cf. Germ. sammeln; [al. regard the init.
a as euphonic and the word as allied to Lat. meto, Eng.
mow, thus making the sense of cutting primary, and that
of gathering in secondary; cf. Vanitek p. 673]); freq. in
the Grk. poets, to reap, mow down: ras xe@pas, Jas. v. 4.*
dyebvcrros, -ov, 7, amethyst, a precious stone of a violet
and purple color (Ex. xxviii. 19; ace. to Phavorinus so
called dca 76 drreipyew THs péOns [so Plut. quaest. conviv.
iii. 1, 3, 6]): Rev. xxi. 20. [Cf. B. D.s. v.]*
dpedéw, -@; fut. dueAnow; 1 aor. nuéAnoa; (fr. duedns,
and this fr. a priv. and péd@ to care for); very com. in
prof. auth.; to be careless of, to neglect: twvds, Heb. ii. 3;
viii. 9; 1 Tim. iy. 14; foll. by inf., 2 Pet. i. 12 RG;
without a case, dueAnoarres (not caring for what had just
been said [A. V. they made light of it]), Mt. xxii. 5.*
G-peparros, -ov, (ueugouar to blame), blameless, deserv-
ing no censure (Tertull. irreprehensibilis), free from fault
or defect: Lk.i.6; Phil. ii. 15; iii.6; 1 Th. iii. 13 [WH
QLEUTTTOS
mrg. duéumtos]; Heb. viii. 7 (in which nothing is lack-
ing); in Sept. i. q. DM, Jobi. 1, 8 ete. Com. in Grk.
writ. (Cf. Trench § ciii.]* _ '
6-péurrws, adv., blamelessly, so that there is no cause for
censure: 1 Th. ii. 10; [iii 18 WH mrg.]; v. 23. [Fr.
Aeschyl. down. Cf. Trench § cili. ]* ,
Gugpipvos, -ov, (uepysva), free from anciety, free from
care: Mt. xxviii. 14; 1 Co. vii. 32 (free from earthly
cares). (Sap. vi. 16; vil. 23; Heian. 2,°45'°3% 93,97, 115
Anth. 9, 359, 5; [in pass. sense, Soph. Ajax 1206 ].) *
d-perdQeros, -ov, (uerariOnp), not transposed, not to be
transferred ; fixed, unalterable: Heb. vi. 18; 70 dperade-
tov as subst., immutability, Web. vi. 17. (38 Mace. v. 1;
Polyb., Diod., Plut.) *
d-pera-Kivntos, -ov, (uetakiwéew), not to be moved from tts
place, unmoved; metaph. firmly persistent, [A. V. unmov-
able]: 1 Co. xv. 58. (Plat. ep. 7, p. 343 a.; Dion. Hal.
8, 74; [Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 16,9; 2, 32,3; 2, 35, 4].)*
d-perapéeAntos, -ov, (werapcAouar, petapeher), not re-
pented of, unregretted: Ro. xi. 29; cwtnpia, by litotes,
salvation affording supreme joy, 2 Co. vii. 10 [al. con-
nect it with weravoray|. (Plat., Polyb., Plut.) *
dperavenros, -ov, (ueTavoéw, q. V.), admitting no change
of mind (amendment), unrepentant, impenitent: Ro. ii. 5.
(In Leian. Abdic. 11 [passively ], i. q. duerapeAnros, q. V-3
[Philo de praem. et poen. § 3].)*
dyeTpos, -ov, (weTpoy A Measure), without measure, im-
mense: 2 Co. x. 18, 15 sq. (els Ta derpa Kavxaabat to
boast to an immense extent, i. e. beyond measure, ex-
cessively). (Plat., Xen., Anthol. iv. p. 170, and ii. 206,
ed. Jacobs. )*
auqv, Hebr. 78 ; 1. verbal adj. (fr. 28 to prop;
Niph. to be firm), firm, metaph. faithful: 6 aunv, Rev.
lii. 14 (where is added 6 pdprus 6 muatés K. dAnOivds). 2.
it came to be used as an adverb by which something is
asserted or confirmed: a. at the beginning of a dis-
course, surely, of a truth, truly; so freq. in the discourses
of Christ in Mt. Mk. and Lk.: dujy rAéyo tiv ‘I sol-
emnly declare unto you,’ e.g. Mt. v.18; Mk. iii. 28;
Lk. iv. 24. The repetition of the word (duhv dunv), em-
ployed by John alone in his Gospel (twenty-five times), has
the force of a superlative, most assuredly: Jn. i. 51 (52) 5
ili. 3. b. at the close of a sentence; so it is, so be it,
may it be fulfilled (yévoiro, Sept. Num. v. 22; Deut. xxvii.
15, ete.): Ro.i. 25; ix.5; Gal.i.5; Eph. iii. 21; Phil. iv.
20; 1 Tim.i.17; Heb. xiii. 21; 1 Pet. iv.11; Rev. i. 6,
and often; cf. Jer. xi. 5; xxxv. (xxviii.) 6; 1 K. i. 30.
It was a custom, which passed over from the synagogues
into the Christian assemblies, that when he who had
read or discoursed had offered up a solemn prayer to
God, the others in attendance responded Amen, and
thus made the substance of what was uttered their own:
1 Co. xiv. 16 (rd dun, the well-known response Amen),
cf. Num. v. 22; Deut. xxvii. 15 sqq.; Neh. v.13; viii. 6.
2 Co. i. 20 ai emayyedia... rd vai, kai... 7d apny, i. e.
had shown themselves most sure. [Cf. B. D.s. v. Amen. |
dyttewp, -opos, 6, 1, (untnp), without a mother, mother-
tess; in Grk. writ- 1. born wethout a mother, e. g.
3
9 "Aurnias
a
Minerva, Eur. Phoen. 666 sq., al.; God himself, inasmuch
as he is without origin, Lact. instt. 4, 13, 2. 2. bereft
of a mother, Hadt. 4, 154, al. 3. born of a base or un-
known mother, Eur. Ion 109 ef. 837. 4. unmotherly,
unworthy of the name of mother: parnp duntrep, Soph.
El. 1154. Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 305 sqq. 5:
in a signif. unused by the Greeks, ‘whose mother is not
recorded in the genealogy’: of Melchizedek, Heb. vii. 3;
(of Sarah by Philo in de temul. § 14, and rer. div. haer.
§ 12; [ef. Bleek u.s.]); ef. the classic dvohupmids.*
d-plavros, -ov, (uwaivw), not defiled, unsoiled ; free from
that by which the nature of a thing ts deformed and de-
based, or its force and vigor impaired: koirn pure, free
from adultery, Heb. xiii. 4; xAnpovoyia (without detect),
1 Pet. i.4; Opnoxeia, Jas. i. 27; pure from sin, Leb. vii.
26. (Also in the Grk. writ.; in an ethical sense, Plat.
lege. 6, p. 777 e.; Plut. Pericl. c. 39 Bios xa@apos kai
duiayros.)*
"Apwvad4éB, 6, I3}Dy (servant of the prince, [al. my
people are noble; but cf. B. D. s. v.]), [A. V. Aminadab],
the prop. name of one of the ancestors of Christ (1 Chr.
ii. 10 [A. V. Amminadab]): Mt. i. 4; Lk. iii. 33 [not
WH. See B. D.s. v.].*
dppos, -ov, 7, sand; acc. to a Hebr. comparison dy. rhs
Gardoons and dy. mapa 7d xethos THS Gad. are used for
an innumerable multitude, Ro. ix. 27; Heb. xi. 12;
Rey. xx. 8, equiv. to xii. 18 (xiii. 1). Acc. to the con-
text sandy ground, Mt. vii. 26. (Xen., Plat., Theophr.
often, Plut., Sept. often.) *
dpvos, -ov, 6, [fr. Soph. and Arstph. down], a lamb:
Acts vill. 32; 1 Pet.i. 19; rod Geod, consecrated to God,
Jn. i. 29, 36. In these passages Christ is likened to a
sacrificial lamb on account of his death, innocently and
patiently endured, to expiate sin.
dorBr, -7s, 7, (fr. due(Ba, as adoupy fr. dreipo, oro187n
fr. oreiBw), a very com. word with the Greeks, requital,
recompense, in a good and a bad sense (fr. the signif. of
the mid. duei(Boua: to requite, return like for hke): in a
good sense, 1 Tim. v. 4.*
Gurredos, -ov, 7, (fr. Hom. down], a vine: Mt. xxvi. 293
Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xxii 18; Jas. iii. 12. In Jn. xv. 1,4 sq.
Christ calls himself a vine, because, as the vine imparts
to its branches sap and productiveness, so Christ infuses
into his followers his own divine strength and life. dur.
Ths yns in Rev. xiv. 18 [Rec* om. ras dum.], 19, signifies
the enemies of Christ, who, ripe for destruction, are
likened to clusters of grapes, to be cut off, thrown into
the wine-press, and trodden there.*
Gyarehoupyés, -ov, 6, 7), (fr. dumedos and EPTOQ), a vine-
dresser: Lk. xiii. 7. (Arstph., Plut., Geopon., al.; Sept.
for 075.)*
dumedov, -Gvos, 6, a vineyard: Mt. xx. 1 sqq.; xxi. 28,
[33], 39 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sqq.; Lk. [xiii. 6]; xx. 9 sqq.;
1 Co. ix. 7. (Sept.; Diod. 4,6; Plut. pro nobilit. ¢. 3.)*
"Apmdtas [T ’AumAlatos, Tr WH Limrg. ’Aumdcazos;
hence accent "Auras; cf. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. p. 505;
Chandler § 32], -ov, 6, Amplias (a contraction from the
Lat. Ampliatus, which form appears in some authorities,
See dpviov.*
-Aurrlatos
cf. W. 102 (97)), a certain Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi.
8. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p.174; ef. The Athenewm
for March 4, 1882, p. 289 sq.]*
*"ApmAlaros (Tdf.) or more correctly ’Ayrhdros (L
mrg. Tr WH) i. q. ’AumAias, q. v.
dpive: 1 aor. mid. jyuvdunv; [allied w. Lat. munio,
moenia, ete., Waniéek p. 731; Curtius § 451]; in Grk.
writ. [fr. Hom. down] to ward off, keep off any thing
from any one, ri ru, ace. of the thing and dat. of pers. ;
hence, with a simple dat. of the pers., to aid, assist any
one (Thue. 1, 50; 3, 67, al.). Mid. dydvoua, with ace.
of pers., to keep off, ward off, any one from one’s self; to
defend one’s self against any one (so also 2 Mace. x. 17;
Sap. xi. 3; Sept. Josh. x. 13); to take vengeance on any
one (Xen. an. 2, 3, 23; Joseph. antt. 9, 1, 2): Acts vii.
24, where in thought supply rdv ddcKodvra [cf. B. 194
(168) note; W. 258 (242) ].*
audidte; [fr. dudi, lit. to put around]; to put on,
clothe: in Lk. xii. 28 L WH dyquager for Rec. dueévvvcr.
(A later Grk. word; Sept. [2 K. xvii. 9 Alex.]; Job
xxix. 14; [xxxi.19]; xl.5; Ps. lxxii. 6 Symm.; several
times in Themist.; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 112; [Veitch
s.v.; B.49 (42 sq.) ; Steph. s. v. col. 201 ec. quotes from
Cram. Anecdot. Ox. vol. ii. p. 338, 31 76 peév audiélo éort
kowas, TO be audidla Awpixdv, Gomep TO Umoméfw Kal
imondta}.) Cf. audreto.*
apdi-Badrw ; to throw around, i. q. repiBadrdo, of a gar-
ment (Hom. Od. 14, 342); to cast to and fro now to one
side now to the other: anet, Mk.i.16 GL T Tr WH [ace.
to T Tr WH used absol.; cf. of dudiBoreis, Is. xix. 8].
(Hab. i. 17.)*
dpdiBAnotpov, -ov, 7d, (aupuBddd@), in Grk. writ. any-
thing thrown around one to impede his motion, as chains,
a garment; spec. a net for fishing, [casting-net]: Mk. i.
16 RGL; Mt.iv.18. (Sept.; Hes. scut. 215; Hat. 1,
141; Athen. 10, 72, p. 450.) [Syn. see dicrvoy, and cf.
Trench § lxiv.; B. D.s. v. net. ]*
dudréto, i. g. dudrevvype; in Lk. xii. 28 duduéCer T Tr.
Cf. audidgo.
_dudvévyupe; pf. pass. nudiecpar; (€vvume); [fr. Hom.
down]; to put on, to clothe: Lk. xii. 28 (RG; cf. auduego) ;
Mt. vi. 30; év rue [B. 191 (166) ], Lk. vii. 25; Mt. xi. 8.*
*Apdlrodis, -ews, 7, Amphipolis, the metropolis of
Macedonia Prima [cf. B. D. s. v. Macedonia]; so called,
because the Strymon flowed around it [ Thue. 4, 102];
formerly called ’Evvéa 680i (Thue. 1,100): Acts xvii. 1
[see B. D.].*
&pdodov, -ov, 75, (dui, 656s), prop. 4 road round any-
thing, a street, [Hesych. dugpoda- af prpat. dyuiat. diodo
(al. d:€€080e Stopvypai, al. ) mAareia); Lex. in Bekk. An-
ecdota i. p. 205, 14 "Audodov: 7 Somep ex Terpayovou
Suryeypappérn 686s. For exx. see Soph. Lex.; Wetst. on
Mk. 1. c.; cod. D in Acts xix. 28 (where see Tdf.’s
note)]: Mk. xi.4. (Jer. xvii. 27; xxx. 16 (xlix. 27), and
in Grk. writ.) *
dudérepor, -ar, -a, [fr. Hom. down], both of two, both the
one and the other: Mt. ix. 17, etc.; 1a audédrepa, Acts
xxiii. 8; Eph. ii. 14.
38
av
G-papnTos, -ov, (uapdopar), that cannot be censured,
blameless: Phil. ii. 15 RG (cf. réxva popnrd, Deut.
xxx. 5); 2 Pet. iii. 14. (Hom. Il. 12, 109; [Hesioa,
Pind., al. ;] Plut. frat. amor. 18; often in Anthol.)*
Gpopov, -ov, 7d, amomum, a fragrant plant of India,
having the foliage of the white vine [al. ampeloleuce]
and seed, in clusters like grapes, from which ointment
was made (Plin. h. n. 12, 13 [28]): Rev. xviii. 13 GL
TTrWH. [See B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]*
d-popos, -ov, (uamos), without blemish, free from faulti-
ness, as a victim without spot or blemish: 1 Pet. i. 19
(Lev. xxii. 21); Heb. ix. 14; in both places allusion is
made to the sinless life of Christ. Ethically, without
blemish, faultless, unblamable: Eph. i. 4; v. 27; Col. i.
22; Phil. ii 15 LT irWH; Jude 24; Rev. xiv...5,
(Often in Sept.; [Hesiod, Simon., Iambl.], Hdt. 2, 177,
Aeschyl. Pers. 185; Theocr. 18, 25.) [Syn. see Trench
§ ciii.; Tittmann i. 29 sq.]*
"Apay, 6, indecl., Amon, (}\8 artificer [but cf. B. D.]),
king of Judah, son of Manasseh, and father of Josiah:
Mt.i.10, [LT Tr WH -pos. Cf. B. D.].*
*Apds, 6, Amos, (y Was strong), indecl. prop. name of one
of Christ’s ancestors: [Mt.i.10 L T Tr WH ]; Lk. iii. 25.*
éy, a particle indicating that something can or could
occur on certain conditions, or by the combination of
certain fortuitous causes. In Lat. it has no equivalent;
nor do the Eng. haply, perchance, Germ. wohl (wol),
etwa, exactly and everywhere correspond to it. The
use of this particle in the N. T., illustrated by copious
exx. fr. Grk. writ., is shown by W. § 42; [cf. B. 216
(186) sqq. Its use in classic Grk. is fully exhibited (by
Prof. Goodwin) in L. and S. s. v.].
It is joined _I. in the apodoses of hypothetical sen-
tences 1. with the Impf., where the Lat. uses the
impf. subjunctive, e. g. Lk. vii. 39 (eyiveckey dy, sciret,
he would know) ; Lk. xvii. 6 (€Xéyere av ye would say) ; Mt.
xxiii. 830 (non essemus, we should not have been); Jn.
Vero nevilledonwixe Alt xv 9s exvin.oo ly Co..xi. oi
Gal. i.10; iii. 21 [but WH mrg. br.]; Heb. iv. 8; viii. 4,
ie 2. with the indic. Aor. (where the Lat. uses the
plpf. subj. like the fut. pf. subj., J would have done it),
to express what would have been, if this or that either
were (ei with the impf. in the protasis preceding), or
had been (ei with the aor. or plpf. preceding): Mt. xi.
21 and Lk. x. 13 (ay perevdnoay they would have re-
pented); Mt. xii 23; xii. 7 (ye would not have con-
demned); Mt. xxiv. 43 (he would have watched), 22 and
Mk. xiii. 20 (no one would have been saved, i.e. all even now
would have to be regarded as those who had perished ;
ef. W. 304 (286)); Jn. iv. 10 (thow wouldst have asked) ;
xiv. 2 (e¢rov dv I would have said so); 28 (ye would have
rejoiced); Ro. ix. 29 (we should have become); 1 Co. ii.
8; Gal. iv. 15 (RG); Acts xviii. 14. Sometimes the
condition is not expressly stated, but is easily gathered
from what is said: Lk. xix. 23 and Mt. xxv. 27 (J should
have received it back with interest, sc. if thou hadst given
it to the bankers). 3. with the Plupf.: Jn. xi. 21
[R Tr mrg.] (ovk dy érebvnxer [LT Tr txt. WH ameOavev }
a
av
would not have died, for which, in 32, the aor. od« ay
dméOave); Jn. xiv. 7 [not Tdf.] (ef with the plpf. preced-
ing); 1 Jn. ii. 19 (they would have remained with us).
Sometimes (as in Grk. writ., esp. the later) dy is omitted,
in order to intimate that the thing wanted but little
(impf.) or had wanted but little (plpf. or aor.) of being
done, which yet was not done because the condition was
not fulfilled (cf. Alex. Bttm. in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1858,
p- 489 sqq.; [N. T. Gram. p. 225 (194)]; Fritzsche on
Rom. vol. ii. 33; W. § 42, 2 p. 305 (286)), e. g. In. vill. 39
(where the d is spurious); xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; Acts
xxvi. 82; Ro. vii. 7; Gal. iv. 15 (@& before edaxare
has been correctly expunged by LT TrWH). II.
Joined to relative pronouns, relative adverbs, and ad-
verbs of time and quality, it has the same force as the
Lat. cumque or cunque, -ever, -soever, (Germ. irgend,
etwa). 1. foll. by a past tense of the Indicative, when
some matter of fact, something certain, is spoken of ;
where, “when the thing itself which is said to have
been done is certain, the notion of uncertainty involved
in d& belongs rather to the relative, whether pronoun or
particle” (Klotz ad Dev. p. 145) [ef. W. § 42, 3.a.]; daoe
dy as many as: Mk. vi. 56 (dc00 dv rrovro [Ayavto L
txt. T Tr txt. WH] airod as many as touched him (cf. B.
216 (187)]); Mk. xi. 24 (60a dy mpocevxdpevor aireiobe
{Grsb. om. dy], but L txt. T Tr WH have rightly restored
Soa mpocevyeabe x. aireiobe). KaOdre dv in so far or so often
ws, according as, (Germ. je nachdem gerade) : Acts ii. 45;
tv. 85. as dv: 1 Co. xii. 2 (in whatever manner ye were
led [ef. B. § 139, 13; 383(329)sq.]). 2. foll. bya Sub-
junctive, a. the Present, concerning that which
may have been done, or is usually or constantly done
(where the Germ. uses mégen); nvixa dv whensoever, as
ofien as: 2 Co. iii. 15 L T Tr WH; os ay whoever, be he
who hemay: Mt. xvi. 25 (LT Tr WH eédy) ; [Mk. viii. 35
(where T Tr WH fut. indic.; see WH. App. p. 172)];
Lk. x.5 (Lu T Tr WH aor.), 8; Gal. v.17 (T Tr WH éap,
Lbr. édv); 1 Jn. ii. 5; iii. 17; Ro. ix. 15 (Ex. xxxiii. 19);
xvi. 2; 1 Co. xi. 27, ete. doris dv: 1 Co. xvi. 2 [Tr WH
eav; WH mrg. aor.]; Col. iii. 17 (Ltxt. Tr WH éav). dco
av: Mt. vii. 12 (T WH eay); xxii. 9 (LT Tr WH dp).
mov dv whithersoever: Lk. ix. 57 (L Tr édv); Rev. xiv. 4
(L Tr[T ed. 7 not 8, WH] have adopted imdye:, defended
also by B. 228 (196)); Jas. iii. 4 (RGLTrmrg. in
br.). dodkis av how often soever: 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. (where
LT Tr WH eav). ds dy in what way soever: 1 Th. ii. 7
((ef. Ellic. ad loc.; B. 232 (200)], LT Tr WH éav). _b..
the Aorist, where the Lat. uses the fut. pf.; ds dv: Mt.
v. 21, 22 (etn whoever, if ever any one shall have said) ;
31 sq. [in vs. 32 L T Tr WH read was 6 drodiar]; x.
11; xxvi. 48 (Tdf. edv); Mk. iii. 29, 35; ix.41,ete. darts
av: Mt. x. 33 [L Tr WH txt. om. av]; xii. 50; Jn. xiv.
13 (Tr mrg. WH pres.]; Acts iii. 23 (Tdf. éav), ete. cou
av: Mt. xxi. 22 (Treg. édv) ; xxiii. 3 (T WH éav); Mk. iii.
28 (fr WH édy); Lk. ix. 5 (LT Tr WH pres.); Jn. xi.
22; Acts ii. 39 (Lehm. ods); iii. 22. Smov av: Mk.
xiv. 9 (T WH eéav); ix. 18 (LT Tr WH edv). Gypis ov
dy until (donec) : 1 Co. xv. 25 Rec.; Rev. ii. 25. fas dp
34
| s€pos], (Polyb. 4, 20, 10 dvd pépos dew).
oh
ava
until (usque dum): Mt. ii. 13; x. 11; xxii. 44; Mk. vi.
10; Lk. xxi. 32; 1 Co. iv. 5, etc. nvixa ay, of fut. time,
not until then, when ...or then at length, when ...: 2Co.
iii. 16 (T WH txt. éav) [ef. Kiihner ii. 951; Jelf ii. 565).
as ay as soon as [B. 232 (200)]: 1 Co. xi. 834; Phil. ii.
23. ad’ ob dv éeyepOn, Lk. xiii. 25 (from the time, what-
ever the time is, when he shall have risen up). But éav
(q. v-) is also joined to the pronouns and adverbs men-
tioned, instead of av; and in many places the Mss. and
edd. fluctuate between dy and édy, (exx. of which have
already been adduced); [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH.
App. p. 173 “predominantly dy is found after conso-
nants, and éay after vowels”. Finally, to this head
must be referred érap (i. q. 6re dv) with the indic. and
much oftener with the subj. (see érav), and dos dy, al-
though this last came to be used as a final conjunction
in the sense, that, if it be possible: Lk. ii. 85; Acts iii.
20 (19); xv.17; Ro. iii. 4; see das, II.1b. [Cf. W.309
(290 sq.); B. 234 (201).] III. dy is joined to the
Optat. [W. 303 (284); B. 217 (188)]; when a certain
condition is laid down, as in wishes, J would that etc.:
Acts xxvi. 29 (evéaiunv [Tdf. evédyunv] dv I could pray, se.
did it depend on me) ; in direct questions [W.|1.c.; B.
254 (219)]: Acts viii. 31 (és dv Suvaipny; i.e. on what
condition, by what possibility, could I? cf. Xen. oec. 11,
5); Acts xvii. 18 (ri dy Odor. . . K€ yerv what would he
say ? it being assumed that he wishes to utter some defi-
nite notion or other); Acts ii. 12RG; in dependent
sentences and indirect questions in which the nar-
rator introduces another’s thought [W. § 42,4; B.l.c.]:
Lk. i. 623 vi. 113 ix. 46; [xv.26 L br. Tr WH ef. xviii
36 Lbr. Tr br. WH mrg.]; Acts v. 24; x. 17; xvii. 20
RG. IV. davis found without a mood in 1 Co. vii. 5
(ed pn te dv [WH br. dv], except perhaps, sc. yévouro, [but
cf. Bttm. as below]). as dy, adverbially, tanquam (so
already the Vulg.), as if: 2 Co. x. 9 (like éomep dv in Grk.
writ. ; cf. Kiihner ii. 210 [§ 398 Anm. 4; Jelf § 430]; B.
219 (189); [L. and S. s. v. D. III.)).
dy, contr. from édy, 7f; foll. by the subjunc.: Jn. xx.
23 [Lchm. éay. Also by the (pres.) indic. in 1 Jn. v. 15
Lehm.; see B. 223 (192); W. 295 (277)]. Further,
LT Tr WH have received dy in Jn. xiii. 20; xvi. 23;
[so WH Jn. xii. 32; cf. W. 291 (274); B. 72 (63)].*
ava, prep., prop. upwards, up, (cf. the adv. dve, opp. to
xara and xdrw), denoting motion from a lower place to a
higher [cf. W. 398 (372) n.]; rare in the N. T. and only
with the accus. 1. in the expressions dva pécov (or
jointly avdpecor [so R* Tr in Rev. vii. 17]) into the midst,
in the midst, amidst, among, between, — with gen. of place,
Mt. xiii. 25; Mk. vii. 31; Rev. vii. 17 [on this pass. see
péoos, 2 sub fin.]; of pers., 1 Co. vi. 5, with which cf.
Sir. xxv. 18(17) dvd pécov rod (Fritz. rév) mdnolov adrod;
cf. W.§ 27, 1 fin. [B. 332 (285) ], (Sir. xxvii. 2; 1 Mace. vii.
28; xiii. 40, etc.; in Sept. for 713, Ex. xxvi. 28; Josh.
Xvi. 9; xix. 1; Diod. 2, 4 dvd pécov rav yerkwv [see pecos,
2]); ava pepos, (Vulg. per partes), in turn, one after an-
other, in succession: 1 Co. xiv. 27 [where Rec* writes dva-
2. joined to
avaBabuos
numerals, it has a distributive force [W. 398 (372); B.
331 sq. (285)]: In. ii. 6 (dvd perpynras dv0 # rpeis two or
three metrete apiece); Mt. xx. 9 sq. (¢daBov dva dyvdpioy
they received each a denarius); Lk. ix. 3 [Tr br. WH om.
avd; ix. 14]; x. 1 (dvd d00 [WH dvd dv0 [Sv0]] two by
two); Mk. vi.40 (L T Tr WH xara); [Rev. iv. 8]; and
very often in Grk. writ.; cf. W. 398 (372). It is used
adverbially in Rev. xxi. 21 (ava eis éxacros, like ava téa-
apes, Plut. Aem. 32; cf. W. 249 (234); [B. 30 (26) }).
3. Prefixed to verbs dvd signifies, a. upwards, up, up
to, (Lat. ad, Germ. auf), as in dvaxpovew, dvaBaivew,
dvaBadrXeuv, avaxpatew, etc. b. it corresponds to the
Lat. ad (Germ. an), to [indicating the goal], as in dvay-
yéAdew (al. would refer this to d.], dvdmrew. ec. it de-
notes repetition, renewal, i. q. denuo, anew, over again, as
d. it corresponds to the Lat. re, retro, back,
Cf. Win.
in dvayevvav.
backwards, as in dvaxaurrewy, avaxywpeiv, etc.
De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 3 sq.*
Gva-Babpds, -ov, 6, (Babuds, and this fr. Baive) ; ale
an ascent. 2. ameans of going up, a flight of steps,
a stair: Acts xxi. 35,40. Exx. fr. Grk. writ. in Lod. ad
Phryn. p. 324 sq.*
dva-Batve ; [impf. dveBawov Acts ili. 1; fut. dvaBnoopar
Ro. x. 6, after Deut. xxx. 12]; pf. dvaBéBnxa; 2 aor.
aveBnv, ptcp. avaBds, impv. avaBa Rev. iv. 1 (dvaBnOe
Lehm.), plur. dvdBare (for RG davaBnre) Rev. xi. 12 L
T Tr[WH; cf. WH. App. p. 168°]; W. $14, 1h.; [B. 54
(47); fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 1}323 a. to go up,
move to a higher place, ascend: a tree (émi), Lk. xix.
4; upon the roof of a house (emi), Lk. v. 19; into a ship
(eis), Mk. vi. 51; [Mt. xv. 39 GTrtxt.; Acts xxi. 6
Tdf.]; eis 76 dpos, Mt. v. 1; Lk. ix. 28; Mk. iii. 13; eis rd
imepaov, Acts i. 13; eis rov odpavdv, Ro. x. 6; Rev. xi. 12;
eis Tov ovp. is omitted, but to be supplied, in Jn. i. 51 (52) ;
yi. 62, and in the phrase dva8. mpés tov marépa, Jn. xx. 17.
(It is commonly maintained that those persons are fig.
said dvaBeBnxeva eis Tov ovpavdv, who have penetrated the
heavenly mysteries: Jn. iii. 13, cf. Deut. xxx. 12; Prov.
xxiv. 27 (xxx. 4); Bar. iii. 29. But in these latter pass.
also the expression is to be understood literally. And as
respects Jn. iii. 13, it must be remembered that Christ
brought his knowledge of the divine counsels with him
from heaven, inasmuch as he had dwelt there prior to
his incarnation. Now the natural language was ovdeis
jv év T@ ovpav@; but the expression avaBéBnkev is used
because none but Christ could get there except by as-
cending. Accordingly ei yy refers merely to the idea,
involved in dvaBéBnxcv, of a past residence in heaven.
Cf. Meyer [or Westcott] ad loc.) Used of travelling to a
higher place: «is ‘Iepoodd. Mt. xx. 17 sq.; Mk. x. 32 sq.,
etc.; eis 76 iepdy, Jn. vii. 14; Lk. xviii. 10. Often the place
to or into which the ascent is made is not mentioned, but
is easily understood from the context: Acts viii. 31 (into
the chariot) ; Mk. xv. 8 (to the palace of the governor,
acc. to the reading dvaBds restored by L T Tr txt. WH
for RG dvaBonvas), etc.; or the place alone is men-
tioned from which (dz, éx) the ascent is made: Mt. iii,
16; Acts viii. 39; Rev. xi. 7. b. in a wider sense
35
2) ,
avayatov
of things rising up, to rise, mount, be borne up, spring
up: of a fish swimming up, Mt. xvii. 27; of smoke rising
up, Rey. viii. 4; ix. 2; of plants springing up from the
ground, Mt. xiii. 7; Mk. iv. 7, 32, (as in Grk. writ.;
Theophr. hist. plant. 8, 8, and Hebr. my); of things
which come up in one’s mind (Lat. suboriri) : dvaBatv. ém
tv kapd. or év tH kapdia, Lk. xxiv. 38; 1 Co. ii. 9; Acts
Vii. 23 (avéBn emi thy x. it came into his mind i. e. he re-
solved, foll. by inf.), after the Hebr. a9-bx my, Jer. iii.
16, etc. [B. 135 (118)]. Of messages, prayers, deeds,
brought up or reported to one in a higher place: Acts
x. 4; xxi. 31 (tidings came up to the tribune of the
cohort, who dwelt in the tower Antonia). [Comp.: mpoo-,
ovy-avaBaive. |
dva-Baddw: 2 aor. mid. dveBadrdpnv; 1. to throw or
toss up. 2. to put back or off, delay, postpone, (very
often in Grk. writ.) ; in this sense also in mid. (prop. to
defer for one’s self): twa, to hold back, delay; ina
forensic sense to put off any one (Lat. ampliare, Cic.
Verr. act. 2,1, 9 § 26) i. e. to defer hearing and decid-
ing (adjourn) any one’s case: Acts xxiv. 22; cf. Kypke
[or Wetst.] ad loc.*
dva-BiBdfw: 1 aor. dveBiBaca; to cause to go up or as-
cend, to draw up, (often in Sept. and Grk. writ.): Mt.
xiii. 48, (Xen. Hell. 1, 1, 2 mpds tiv yy dveRiBale tas
éavrov tpinpets).*
dva-Bdérw ; 1 aor. avéBhea; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1;
to look up: Mk. viii. 24, [25 RGL]; xvi. 4; Lk. xix. 5;
xxi.1; Acts xxii. 133 eis rwa, ibid.; ets rév otpavdv, Mt.
xiv. 19; Mk. vi. 41; vii. 34, (Plat. Axioch. p. 370b.;
Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 9). 2. to recover (lost) sight: Mt. xi.
5; xx. 34; Lk. xviii. 41 sqq., ete. ([Hdt. 2, 111;] Plat.
Phaedrus p. 243 b. wapaypjya aveBdree, Arstph. Plut.
126); used somewhat loosely also of the man blind from
birth who was cured by Christ, Jn. ix. 11 (12) (cf. Meyer
ad loc.), 17 sq. (Paus. 4, 12, 7 (10) cuvéBn rov ’Oduovea
. . TOY ek yeverns Tuproy avaBréar). Cf. Win. De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 7 sq.
dva-BreWs, -ews, 7, recovery of sight: Lk. iv. 18 (19),
(Sept. Is. xi. 1). [Aristot.]*
dva-Bodw, -4: 1 aor. dveBdnoa; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hadt.
down]; to raise a cry, to cry out anything, say it shout-
ing: Lk. ix. 38 (LT Tr WH ¢Bénoe) ; Mk. xv. 8 (where
read dvaBds, see dvaBaive, a. sub fin.); with the addition
of ova peyddn, Mt. xxvii. 46 [Tr WH Limrg. eBédnoe],
(as Gen. xxvii. 38; Is. xxxvi. 13, etc.). Cf. Win. De
verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 6 sq.; [and see Boda, fin.].*
dva-Bodr, -fs, 7), (avaBadXo, q. V-), often in Grk. writ.,
a putting off, delay: moveicOat dvaBorny to interpose (lit.
make) delay, Acts xxv. 17, (as in Thue. 2,42; Dion. Hal.
11, 33; Plut. Camill. c. 35).*
dvayatov, -ov, Td, (fr. ava and yaia i. e. yp), prop. any-
thing above the ground; hence a room in the upper part
of a house: Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. xxii. 12,(in GL T Tr WH).
Also written dv@yatov (which Tdf. formerly adopted;
ef. Xen. an. 5, 4, 29 [where Dind. dvaxelwv]), avwyeov
(Rec.), dvwyewv; on this variety in writing cf. Lod. ad
Phryn. p. 297 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 358];
avayyérXro
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 611 sq.; B. 13 (12); [WH. App.
p- 151].*
dv-ayyéAdw; impf. dvnyyeAdov; [fut. dvayyeA@]; 1 aor.
aviyyyevda; 2 aor. pass. dvyyyéAny, Ro. xv. 21; 1 Pet. i. 12
(several times in Sept.; 1 Mace. ii. 31; W. 82 (78);
[Veitch s. v. dyyéddo]) 3 to announce, make known, (cf.
dvd, 3b.]: ri, Acts xix. 18; foll. by re, Jn. v. 15 [L mrg.
WHtkxt. T cémev]; 60a «rd. Acts xiv. 27; [Mk. v.19 R
GLmrg.]; [absol. with es, Mk. v. 14 Rec.]; equiv. to
disclose: ri rim, Jn. iv. 25; xvi. 18-15; used of the for-
mal proclamation of the Christian religion: Acts xx.
20; 1 Pet.i.12; 1Jn.i.53 mepi twos, Ro. xv. 21 (Is. lii.
15); to report, bring back tidings, rehearse, used as in
Grk. writers (Aeschyl. Prom. 664 (661); Xen. an. 1, 3,
21; Polyb. 25, 2, 7) of messengers reporting what they
have seen or heard, [cf. dvd u. s.]: ri, Acts xvi. 38
(where L T Tr WH amnyy.); 2 Co. vii. 7.
dva-yevvaw, -: 1 aor. dveyévynoa; pf. pass. dvayeyév-
vnpar; to produce again, beget again, beget anew; metaph. :
rwvd, thoroughly to change the mind of one, so that he
lives a new life and one conformed to the will of God,
1 Pet.i.3; passively ék twos, ibid. i. 23. (In the same
sense in eccl. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. Among prof.
auth. used by Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 1 rév ek Tod oracid few
a’tois dvayevvwpevav [yet Bekker dv yevopévar] desvav
which originated.)*
éva-ywookeo ; [impf. dveyivockey Acts vill. 28]; 2 aor.
avéyver, (inf. dvayvévai Lk. iv. 16], ptep. dvayvovs; Pass.,
[pres. avaywaokopar]; 1 aor. dveyvecOny; in prof. auth.
1. to distinguish between, to recognize, to know accurately,
to acknowledge; hence 2. to read, (in this signif.
[“ first in Pind. O. 10 (11). 1”] fr. [Arstph.,] Thue.
down): ri, Mt. xxii. 831; Mk. xii.10; Lk. vi. 3; Jn. xix.
20; Acts viii. 30, 32; 2 Co.i.13; [Gal. iv. 21 Lchm.
mrg.]; Rev.i. 3; v.4 Rec.; rua, one’s book, Acts viii.
28, 30; ev with dat. of the book, Mt. xii. 5; xxi. 42; Mk.
xii. 26; with ellipsis of év r@ vouw, Lk. x. 26; foll. by or
[objective], Mt. xix. 4; [foll. by 67: recitative, Mt. xxi.
16]; ré emoinoe, Mt. xi. 3; Mk. ii. 25. The obj. not
mentioned, but to be understood from what precedes :
Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Acts xv. 31; xxiii. 34; Eph.
iii. 4; pass. 2 Co. ili. 2. to read to others, read aloud:
2 Co. iii. 15; Acts xv. 21, (in both places Moiojes i. q.
the books of Moses); [Lk. iv.16; Acts xiii. 27]; 1 Th.
v.20; -Colviv. 16.*
avaykatw; [impf. nvaycafoy]; 1 aor. qvdyxaca; 1 aor.
pass. nvaykaoOny; (fr. avaykn); [fr. Soph. down]; to
necessitate, compel, drive to, constrain, whether by force,
threats, etc., or by persuasion, entreaties, etc., or by
other means: twd, 2 Co. xii. 11 (by your behavior
towards me); ria foll: by inf., Acts xxvi. 11; xxviii.
19; Gal. ii. 3,14 (by your example); vi. 12; Mt. xiv.
22; Mk. vi. 45; Lk. xiv. 23.*
Gvaykaios, -aia, ~aiov, (avaykn), [fr. Hom. down (in vari-
ous senses) ], necessary ; a. what one cannot do with-
out, indispensable: 1 Co. xii. 22 (ra pédn); Tit. iii. 14
(xpeta). b. connected by the bonds of nature or of
friendship: Acts x. 24 (dvayxaio. [A. V. near] didor).
36
’ / 4
avadetKvupLe
c. what ought according to the law of duty to be done,
what is required by the condition of things: Phil. i. 24.
dvaykaidv éort foll. by acc. with inf., Acts xiii. 46; Heb.
Vili. 8. dvaykaiov nyetoGar to deem necessary, foll. by
ints, Phil 25602 Cos txtor
dvaykaorés, adv., by force or constraint; opp. to éxov-
giws, 1 Pet.v. 2. (Plat. Ax. p. 366 a.)*
évayKn, -18, 73 1. necessity, imposed either by the
external condition of things, or by the law of duty, re-
gard to one’s advantage, custom, argument: kar’ avaykyy
perforce (opp. to cara éxovowov), Philem. 14; && avayxns
of necessity, compelled, 2 Co. ix. 7; Heb. vii. 12 (neces-
sarily) ; éy@ avdykny I have (am compelled by) neces-
sity, (also in Grk. writ.) : 1 Co. vii. 37; Heb. vii. 27; foll.
by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 RLbr.; Jude 3; av. por
énixerras necessity is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16; dvaykn
(i. q. dvaykaidv éort) foll. by inf.: Mt. xviii. 7; Ro. xiii.
5; Heb. ix. 16, 23, (so Grk. writ.). 2. in a sense rare
in the classics (Diod. 4, 43), but very common in Hellen-
istic writ. (also in Joseph. b. j. 5,13, 7, etc.; see W. 30),
calamity, distress, straits: Lk. xxi. 23; 1 Co. vii. 26; 1 Th.
iii. 7; plur. év dvdycas, 2 Co. vi. 4; xii. 10.*
dva-yvepito: 1 aor. pass. dveyvapicOnv; to recognize:
Acts vii. 13 [Tr txt. WH txt. éyvwpic@y | was recognized
by his brethren, cf. Gen. xlv.1. (Plat. politic. p. 258 a.
avayvepicew Tovs ovyyevets.)*
dvd-yvaots, -ews, 7, (dvayiwwaoka, q- V-) 3 a. a know-
ing again, owning. b. reading, [fr. Plato on]: Acts
xiii. 15; 2 Co. iii. 14; 1 Tim. iv. 13. (Neh. viii. 8 i. q.
spp.)
av-dyo: 2 aor. avjyayor, inf. dvayayeiv, [ptep. dvaya-
yov]; Pass., [pres. dvayowar]; 1 aor. [ef. sub fin.] avy-
x4nv; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead up, to lead or bring into
a higher place; foll. by ets with ace. of the place: Lk.
ii. 22; iv. 5 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.]; xxii. 66 [T
Tr WH amnyayor|; Acts ix. 39; xvi. 34; Mt. iv. 1 (eis
tT. €pnuov, sc. fr. the low bank of the Jordan). iva ék
vexpov fr. the dead in the world below, to the upper
world, Heb. xiii. 20; Ro. x. 7; twa 7 da@ to bring one
forth who has been detained in prison (a lower place),
and set him before the people to be tried, Acts xii. 4;
Ovaiav 7G cid to offer sacrifice to the idol, because
the victim is lifted up on the altar, Acts vii. 41. Navi-
gators are kar’ e£oynv said dvayer@a (pass. [or mid.])
when they launch out, set sail, put to sea, (so avaywyn
in Justin. Mart. dial. c. Tr. ¢. 142 [and in the classies]) :
Lk. viii. 22; Acts xiii. 13; xvi. 11; xviii. 21; xx. 3,13;
xxi. [1], 2; xxvii. 2, 4, 12, 21; xxviii. 10 sq. (Polyb.
1, 21,43; 23, 3, ete.) [Comp.: émr-avaya. | *
dva-Selkvupt: 1 aor. avederéa, [impv. dvadecEov; fr. Soph.
down]; to lift up anything on high and exhibit it for all
to behold (Germ. aufzeigen) ; hence to show accurately,
clearly, to disclose what was hidden, (2 Mace. ii. 8 ef.
6): Acts i. 24 (show which of these two thou hast
chosen). Hence dvaé. rw to proclaim any one as elected
to an office, to announce as appointed (king, general,
etc., messenger): Lk. x. 1, (2 Mace. ix. 14, 23, 25; x.
11; xiv. 12, 26; 1 Esdr. i. 35; viii. 23; Polyb. 4, 48,
avaceréis
3; 51, 3; Diod. i. 66; 13, 98; Plut. Caes. 37, ete.;
Hdian. 2, 12, 5 (3), al.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt.
iii. p. 12 sq.*
Gvd-BSeikis, -ews, 9, (dvadeixvupe, q. V.), @ pointing out,
public showing forth; tev xpévev, Sir. xliii. 6. a pro-
claiming, announcing, inaugurating, of such as are elected
to oflice (Plut. Mar. 8 indrav dvdbeéis [ef. Polyb. 15, 26,
7]): Lk. i. 80 (until the day when he was announced
[A. V. of his shewing] to the people as the forerunner
of the Messiah; this announcement he himself made at
the command of God, Lk. iii. 2 sqq.).*
Gva-S€xopar: 1 aor. dvedeEdunv; fr. Hom. down; to
take up, take upon one’s self, undertake, assume; hence
to receive, entertain any one hospitably: Acts xxviii. 7;
to entertain in one’s mind: ras émayyeNias, i. e. to em-
brace them with faith, Heb. xi. 17.*
dva-SiSmp.: 2 aor. ptep. avadovs; 1. to give forth,
send up, so of the earth producing plants, of plants
yielding fruit, ete.; in prof. auth. 2. acc. to the sec-
ond sense which ava has in composition [see dvd, 3 b.],
to deliver up, hand over: émotodnv, Acts xxiii. 33, (the
same phrase in Polyb. [29, 10, 7] and Plut.).*
dva-la, -@: 1 aor. avéfnoa; a word found only in the
N. T. and ecel. writ.; to live again, recover life; a.
prop:, in Rec. of Ro. xiv. 9; Rev. xx. 5. b. trop.
one is said ava¢nv who has been vexpés in a trop. sense ;
a. to be restored to a correct life: of one who returns to
a better moral state, Lk. xv. 24 [WH mre. ¢(jcer] ([A. V.
is alive again], cf. Mey. ad loc.), 32 (T Tr WH éfyoe).
B. to revive, regain strength and vigor: Ro. vii. 9; sin is
alive, indeed, and vigorous among men ever since the
fall of Adam; yet it is destitute of power (vexpda éort)
in innocent children ignorant of the law; but when they
come to a knowledge of the law, sin recovers its power
in them also. Others less aptly explain dvé{nce here
began to live, sprang into life, (Germ. lebte auf ).*
ava-tyTéw, -; [impf. dve(nrovy]; 1 aor. dve(nrnaa; ‘to
run through with the eyes any series or succession of
men or things, and so to seek out, search through, make
diligent search, Germ. daran hinsuchen, aufsuchen’ (Win.
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 14): revd, Lk. ii. 44, (and
45 Ltxt. T Tr WH); Acts xi. 25. (See exx. fr. Grk.
writ. [fr. Plato on] in Win. 1. c.) *
éva-Ldvvupe: to gird up; mid. to gird up one’s self or
for one’s self: dvafoodpevor ras dogvas, 1 Pet. i. 13, i.e.
prepared, —a metaphor derived from the practice of the
Orientals, who in order to be unimpeded in their move-
ments were accustomed, when about to start on a jour-
ney or engage in any work, to bind their long and flow-
ing garments closely around their bodies and fasten them
with a leathern girdle; cf. repufavvys. (Sept. Judg.
xviii. 16; Prov. xxix. 85 (xxxi. 17); Dio Chrys. or. 72,
2, ed. Emp. p. 729; Didym. ap. Athen. 4, (17) p. 139
doral)™
éva-lwmupéw, -; (rd Cdmvpov i.e. a. the remains of
a fire, embers; 0. that by which the fire is kindled
anew or lighted up, a pair of bellows) ; to kindle anew,
rekindle, resuscitate, [yet on the force of dya- cf. Ellic.
37
avabeuartivo
on 2 Tim. as below]; generally trop., to kindle up, in-
Jlame, one’s mind, strength, zeal, (Xen. de re equest. 10,
16 of a horse roused to his utmost; Hell. 5, 4, 46; An-
tonin. 7, 2 gavracias; Plut. Pericl. 1,4; Pomp. 41, 2;
49,5; Plat. Charm. p. 156 d.; ete.) : 7d ydpeopa, 2 Tim.
1. 6, i. @. rd mvedpa, vs. 7. Intrans. to be enkindled, to
gain strength: Gen. xlv. 27; 1 Mace. xiii. 7, and in prof.
auth.; avatwmupnodro 4 iors, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 27, 3
[see Gebh. and Harn. ad loc.].*
dva-8dhrko: 2 aor. dvéGadov; (Ps. xxvii. (xxviil.) 7;
Sap. iv.4; very rare in Grk. writ. and only in the poets,
ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 195; [Veitch s. v. OdAkw; W.
87 (83); B. 59 (52)]); to shoot up, sprout again, grow
green again, flourish again, (Hom. Il. 1, 236; Ael. v. h.
5, 4); trop. of those whose condition and affairs are
becoming more prosperous: Phil. iv. 10 dve@ddere 75
brép euod ppoveiv ye have revived so as to take thought for
me [the inf. being the Grk. accus., or accus. of specifica-
tion, W. 317 (298); cf. Ellic. ad loc.]. Others, ace. to
a trans. use of the verb found only in the Sept. (Ezek.
xvii. 24; Sir. i. 18, etc.), render ye have revived (allowed
to revive) your thought for me [the inf. being taken as an
object-ace., W. 323 (303); B. 263 (226); cf. Bp. Lehtft.
ad loc.]; against whom see Meyer ad loc.*
éva-Sena, -ros, 7d, (i. G. TO dvareOeipevor) § 1. prop,
a thing set up or laid by in order to be kept; spec. a
votive offering, which after being consecrated to a god
was hung upon the walls or columns of his temple, or put
in some other conspicuous place: 2 Mace. ii. 13, (Plut.
Pelop. c. 25); Lk. xxi. 5in LT, for dvaOjpaor RG Tr
WH; for the two forms are sometimes confounded in the
codd.; Moeris, dvd@nya drrikés, avabepa EAnuixds. Cf.
emiOnua, émideua, etc., in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 249 [cf. 445;
Paral. 417; see also Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p.41]. 2.
dvadepa in the Sept. is generally the translation of the
Heb. oan, a thing devoted to God without hope of being
redeemed, and, if an animal, to be slain [Lev. xxvii. 28,
29]; therefore a person or thing doomed to destruction,
Josh. vi. 17; vii. 12, etc. [W. 32]; a thing abominable
and detestable, an accursed thing, Deut. vii. 26. Hence
in the N. T. dvaOewa denotes a. acurse: dvabeuare dva-
Geparicew, Acts xxiii. 14 [W. 466 (434); B. 184 (159)].
b. a man accursed, devoted to the direst woes (i. q. émt-
kardparos): avdbepa gore, Gal. i. 8 sq.; 1 Co. xvi. 22;
dvaepa déyew twa to execrate one, 1 Co. xii. 3 (RG,
but LT Tr WH have restored dvaGepa “Inaods, sc. €oT@) ;
dvabepa etvat dd Tod Xptorod, Ro. ix. 3 (pregnantly 1. q.
doomed and so separated from Christ). Cf. the full re-
marks on this word in Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 247
sqq.; Wieseler on Gal. p. 39 sqq-; [a trans. of the latter
by Prof. Riddle in Schaff’s Lange on Rom. p. 302 sq. ;
see also Trench §v.; Bp. Lightfoot on Gal. lL. c.; Elli-
cott ibid.; Tholuck on Rom. 1. ¢.; BB.DD. s. vv. Anath-
ema, Excommunication ].*
dva-Separite; 1 aor. dvebeuarica; (avabepa, q. V-); a
purely bibl. and eccl. word, to declare anathema or ace
cursed; in the Sept. i. q. D-IND to devote to destruction,
(Josh. vi. 21, ete.; 1 Mace. v. 5); éavrév to declare one’s
9: /
avalewpéw
self liable to the severest divine penalties, Acts xxiii.
12, 21; dvadéyare dvabeparicew (Deut. xiii. 15; xx. 17,
[W. § 54, 3; B. 184 (159)]}) éavrdy foll. by inf., to bind
one’s self under a curse to do something, Acts xxiii. 14.
absol., to asseverate with direful imprecations: Mk. xiv.
71. [Comr.: xat-avabepar ico. | =
éva-Yewpéw, -&; prop. ‘to survey a series of things from
the lowest to the highest, Germ. daran hinsehen, lings
durchsehen’, [to look along up or through], (Win. De verb.
comp. Pt. iii. p. 3); hence to look at attentively, to observe
accurately, consider well: ri, Acts xvii. 23, Heb. xiii. 7.
(Diod. Sic. 12, 15 é& erurodis pev Oewpovpevos --- avabew-
povpevos Sé Kai per’ axpiBeias eSeracopevos; 14, 109; 2,
5; Leian. vit. auct. 2; necyom. 15; Plut. Aem. P. 1
[uncertain]; Cat. min. 14; [adv. Colot. 21, 2].)*
dva-Onpa, -ros, 70, (avatiOnur), a gift consecrated and
laid up in a temple, a votive offering (see avaBepa, 1): Lk.
xxi.5 [RG@TrWH]. (3 Macc. iii. 17; cf. Grimm on
2 Mace. iii. 2; koopeiv dva@npace occurs also in 2 Mace.
ix. 16; Plato, Alcib. ii. § 12, p. 148 e. dvaOnuaci te ke-
koopnkanev Ta iepa avtav, Hdt. 1, 183 7rd pev dy tepov
ovT@ Kexoopntrat* éorte dé Kat Ova avaOnwata modAa.)*
dvatSea (TWH avadia; see I, t), -as, 7, (dvadys, and
this fr. 7 aidms a sense of shame); fr. Hom. down;
shamelessness, impudence: Lk. xi. 8 (of an importunate
man, persisting in his entreaties; [A. V. amportunity]).*
dy-alpeots, -ews, 7, (fr. avatpew, 2, q. v.), a destroying,
killing, murder, ‘taking off’: Acts viii. 1; xxii. 20 Ree.
(Sept. only in Num. xi. 15; Judg. xv. 17; Jud. xv. 4;
2 Mace. v. 13. Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 5; Hdian. 2, 13, 1.)*
dy-arpéw, -@; fut. dveho, 2 Th.ii. 8 (L T Tr WH tat. cf.
Jud. vii. 18; Dion. Hal. 11,18; Diod. Sic. 2, 25; cf. W.
82 (78); [B. 53 (47); Veitch s. v. aipéw, “ perh. late
€\6’’]), for the usual dvarpnow; 2 aor. aveiAoy; 2 aor. mid.
avevdounv (but dveidaro Acts vii. 21, aveiday Acts x. 39,
aveiare Acts ii. 23, in GLTTr WH, after the Alex.
form, cf. W. 78 (71) sq.; B. 39 (34) sq. [see aipéw]) ;
Pass., pres. avaipodpat; 1 aor. avppeOnv ; 1. to take up,
to lift up (from the ground) ; mid. to take up for myself
as mine, to own, (an exposed infant): Acts vii. 21; (so
avaipetoOa, Arstph. nub. 531; Epict. diss. 1, 23, 7;
[Plut. Anton. 36, 3; fortuna Rom. 8; fratern. am. 18,
etc. |). 2. to take away, abolish; a. ordinances, es-
tablished customs, (to abrogate): Heb. x.9: b. aman,
to put out of the way, slay, kill, (often so in Sept. and
Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 66] Thuc. down): Mt. ii. 16; Lk.
Xxii. 2); xxiii. 32; Acts li. 23; v. 33, 36; vil. 28; ix. 23
sq. 29; x.39; xil. 2; xill. 28; xxii. 20; xxiii. 15, 21, 27;
xxv. 3; xxvi.10; 2 Th.ii.8 LT Tr WH txt.; éaurdy, to
kill one’s self, Acts xvi. 27.*
dy-altios, -ov, (airia) guiltless, innocent: Mt. xii. 5, 7.
(Often in Grk. writ.; Deut. xxi. 8 sq. i. q. ‘pi Sus. 62.)*
dva-Kab-(lo: 1 aor. dvexabica; to raise one’s self and
sit upright ; to sit up, sit erect: Lk. vii. 15 [Lchm. mrg.
WH imrg. exaficev]; Acts ix. 40. (Xen. cyn. 5, 7, 19;
Plut. Alex. c.14; and often in medical writ.; with
éaurdy, Plut. Philop. c. 20; mid. in same sense, Plat.
Phaedoc. 3 p. 60 b.)*
38
avakepanratow
ava-kawwitw; (kawds); to renew, renovate, (cf. Germ.
auffrischen) : twa eis petavotay so to renew that he shall
repent, Heb. vi. 6. (Isoer. Areop. 3; Philo, leg. ad Gaium
§ 11; Joseph. antt. 9, 8, 2; Plut. Marcell. c. 6; Leian.
Philop. c. 12; Sept. Ps. cii. (cili.) 5; ceili. (civ.) 30, ete. ;
eccl. writ.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10.*
éva-Kawv6w, -@: [pres. pass. dvaxawotpa]; a word
peculiar to the apostle Paul; prop. to cause to grow up
(dvd) new, to make new; pass., new strength and vigor
is given to me, 2 Co. iv. 16; to be changed into a new
kind of life, opposed to the former corrupt state, Col.
iii. 10. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10 [or Mey.
on Col. l.c.; Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 16, 17 dvaxatvo-
row. Cf. Késilin in Herzog ed. 2, i. 477 sq.]*
dva-kaivwous, -ews, 7, a renewal, renovation, complete
change for the better, (cf. dvaxawow) : Tov voos, object. gen.,
Ro. xii. 2; mvevparos dyiov, effected by the Holy Spirit,
Tit. iii. 5. (Etym. Magn., Suid.; [Herm. vis. 3, 8, 9;
other eccl. writ.]; the simple xaivwors is found only in
Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 10.) [Cf. Trench § xviii.]*
dva-kahimrw: [Pass., pres. ptcp. avaxaduntopevos ; pf.
ptep. dvaxexaduppevos | ; to unveil, to uncover (by
drawing back the veil), (i. q. mM, Job xii. 22; Ps. xvii.
(xvili.) 16): xaAvppa . . . pr) dvaxaduTropevoy the veil...
not being lifted (lit? unveiled) [so WH punctuate, see
W. 534 (497); but LT Alf. ete. take the ptep. as a
neut. ace. absol. referring to the clause that follows with
ore: it not being revealed that, etc.; (for avaxaX. in this
sense see Polyb. 4, 85,6; Tob. xii. 7,11); see Meyer ad
loc.], is used allegor. of a hindrance to the understand-
ing, 2 Co. iii. 14, (dvaxahimrew ovyxadvppa, Deut. xxii.
30 Alex.) ; dvaxexaduppév@ mpocamea with unveiled face,
2 Co. iii. 18, is also used allegor. of a mind not blinded,
but disposed to perceive the glorious majesty of Christ.
(The word is used by Eur., Xen., [Aristot. de sens. 5,
vol. i. p. 444°, 25], Polyb., Plut.)*
Gva-kdprrw: fut. dvaxauyo; 1 aor. avécapya; to bend
back, turn back. In the N. T. (as often in prof. auth. ;
in Sept. i,q. 33) intrans. to return: Mt. ii. 12; Lk.
x. 6 (where the meaning is, ‘ your salutation shall return
to you, as if not spoken’); Acts xviii. 21; Heb. xi. 15.*
ava-Kepat; [impf. 3 pers. sing. dvéxecro]; depon. mid.
to be laid up, laid: Mk. v.40 RLbr. [ef. Eng. to lay out].
In later Grk. to lie at table (on the lectus tricliniaris [cf.
B.D. s. v. Meals]; the earlier Greeks used xeio Oat, xata-
ketoOa, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 216 sq.; Fritzsche [or
Wetst.] on Mt. ix. 10): Mt. ix. 10; xxii. 10 sq.; xxvi.
7,20; Mk. [vi. 26 T Tr WH]; xiv.18; xvi.14; Lk. vii.
37 (LT Tr WH xardxerrar) ; xxii. 27; Jn. xii. 2 (Rec.
ovvavakeup.) ; xiii. 23, 28. Generally, to eat together, to
dine: Jn. vi.ll. (Cf. dvarinre, fin. Comp.: ovuv-avd-
keunat. | *
dva-Kehararda, -< : [pres. pass. dvaxedaAarodpar ; 1 aor.
mid. inf. dvaxehadaooacba]; (fr. kehadaido, q. V., and
this fr. kepadavov, q. v.); to sum up (again), to repeat
summarily and so to condense into a summary (as, the
substance of a speech; Quintil. 6. 1 ‘rerum repetitio et
congregatio, quae graece dvaxepadaiwors dicitur’, [€pyov
avakANive
pnTopexys . . . avaxeparawoacbar mpds dvdpvnow, Aristot.
frag. 123, vol. v. p. 1499", 33]); so in Ro. xiii. 9. In
Eph. i. 10 God is said dvaxepadadoacba ra mdvra ev TO
Xpior@, to bring together again for himself (note the
mid.) all things and beings (hitherto disunited by sin)
into one combined state of fellowship in Christ, the uni-
versal bond, [ef. Mey. or Ellic. on Eph. 1. c.]; (Protev.
Jac. 13 eis eye avexeadrarwbn 7 iotopia ’Addp, where cf.
Thilo).*
dva-kAtve: fut. dvaxkwo; 1 aor. avéexdwa; Pass., 1 aor.
avexNiOnv; fut. dvak\Onoopnar; [fr. Hom. down]; to lean
against, lean upon ; a. to lay down: twa, Lk. ii. 7 (ev
(rH) paryn). b. to make or bid to recline: Mk. vi. 39
(eméra€ev avrois, sc. the disciples, dvaxNivac [-kdcOqva L
WH txt.] mavras i.e. the people); Lk. ix 15 (T Tr WH
kareéxAwvav); xii. 37. Pass. to lie back, recline, lie down:
Mt. xiv. 19; of those reclining at table and at feasts,
Lk. vii. 36 (RG); xiii. 29; Mt. viii. 11,—3in the last
two pass. used fig. of participation in future blessedness
in the Messiah’s kingdom.*
ava-kémtTw: 1 aor. dvexowa; to beat back, check, (as the
course of a ship, Theophr. char. 24 (25), 1 [var.]):
twa foll. by an inf. [A. V. hinder], Gal. v. 7 Rec., where
the preceding érpéyere shows that Paul was thinking of
an obstructed road; cf. éyxérrw.*
dva-Kpato: 1 aor. [“rare and late,” Veitch s. v. xpafo;
8. 61 (53) ] avécpaéa; 2 aor. dvéxpayov (Lk. xxiii. 18 T
Tr txt. WH) ; to raise a cry from the depth of the throat,
'o cry out: Mk.i. 23; vi.49; Lk. iv. 333 viii. 28; xxiii.
18. Exx. fr. prof. auth. in Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt.
ili. p. 6 sq.*
dva-Kpivw; 1 aor. avéxpwa; Pass., [pres. avaxpivopac] ;
1 aor. dvexpiOnv; (freq. in Grk. writ., esp. Attic) ; prop.
by looking through a series (dva) of objects or particulars
to distinguish (xpivw) or search after. Hence a. to
investigate, examine, inquire into, scrutinize, sift, ques-
tion: Acts xvii. 11 (ras ypapds); 1 Co. x. 25, 27 (not
anxiously questioning, sc. whether the meat set before
you be the residue from heathen sacrifices). Spec. in a
forensic sense (often also in Grk. writ.) of a judge, to
hold an investigation; to interrogate, examine, the ac-
cused or the witnesses; absol.: Lk. xxiii. 14; Acts xxiv.
8. twa, Acts xii. 19; xxviii. 18; pass., Actsiv.9. Paul
has in mind this judicial use (as his preceding term
drodoyia shows) when in 1 Co. ix. 3 he speaks of rois
éué dvaxpivovot, investigating me, whether I am a true
apostle. b. univ. to judge of, estimate, determine (the
excellence or defects of any person or thing): ri, 1 Co.
ii. 15; twa, 1 Co. iy. 8 sq.; pass., 1 Co. ii. [14], 15; xiv.
24. [Cf. Lghift. Fresh Revision, etc. iv. § 3 (p. 67 sq.
Am. ed.).]*
dvé-Kpiris, -ews, 9, an examination; as a law-term
among the Greeks, the preliminary investigation held
for the purpose of gathering evidence for the informa-
tion of the judges (Meier and Schémann, Att. Process,
pp- 27, [622; cf. Dict. of Antiq. s. v.]); this seems to
be the sense of the word in Acts xxv. 26.*
dya-kudlo: 1. to roll up. 2. to roll back: avaxe-
39
avadvots
kuAtorat 6 Nibos, Mk. xvi. 4 T Tr WH. (Alexis in Athen.
vi. p. 237¢.; Leian. de luctu 8; Dion. Hal., Plut., ails)
ava-kimre: 1 aor. avéxua; to raise or lift one’s self
Up ; a. one’s body: Lk. xiii. 11; Jn. viii. 7, 10; (Xen.
de re equ. 7, 10, al.; Sept. Job x. 15). b. one’s soul;
to be elated, exalted: Lk. xxi. 28; (Xen. oec. 11, 5;
Joseph. b. j. 6, 8, 5, al.).*
dva-apBdvw ; 2 aor. dvéAaBov; 1 aor. pass. avehn pny
(aveAnppony L.T Tr WH; cf. W. p. 48 [B. 62 (54);
Veitch (s. v.AayBdve) ; see NayBdve, and s. v. M, p]); [fr.
Hdt. down]; 1. to take up, raise: eis rov ovpavov, Mk.
xvi. 19; Acts i. 11; x. 16, (Sept. 2 K. ii. 11); without
case, Acts i. 2,22; 1 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. W. 413 (385) ],
(Sir. xlviii. 9). 2. to take up (a thing in order to
carry or use it): Acts vii.43; Eph. vi. 13,16. to take
to one’s self: twa, in order to conduct him, Acts xxiii.
31; or as a companion, 2 Tim. iv.11; or in Acts xx. 13
sq. to take up sc. into the ship.*
dva-Anfrs (dvddAnuyis LT Tr WH; see M, p), -ews, 9,
(ava\apBave), [fr. Hippoer. down], a taking up: Lk. ix.
51 (sc. ets tov ovpavdv of the ascension of Jesus into
heaven; [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi § 18; Suicer,
Thesaur. Eccles. s. v.; and Meyer on Lk. 1. ¢.]).*
dv-adickw: fr. the pres. dvadéw [3 pers. sing. dvadoi,
2 Th. ii. 8 WH mrg.] come the fut. dvadkoow; 1 aor.
avjdwoa and dvddwoa [see Veitch]; 1 aor. pass. dyn\o-
@nv; (the simple verb is found only in the pass. éAéoxopat
to be taken; but a in dXiokopac is short, in dvadicxw
long; ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 113; [Veitch s. vv.; “the
diff. quantity, the act. form, the trans. sense of the pf.,
and above all the difference of sense, indicate a diff.
origin for the two verbs.” lL. and S.J); [fr. Pind.
down]; 1. to expend; to consume, e. g. ypnpara (to
spend money ; very often in Xen.). 2. to consume,
use up, destroy: Lk. ix. 54; Gal. v.15; 2 Th. ii. 8 RG
WH mre. (Sept. Jer. xxvii. (1.) 7; Prov. xxiii. 28; Gen.
xli. 30, etc.) [Comp.: kat-, mpoc-avadicxa. |*
avadoyla, -as, 7, (avadoyos conformable, proportional),
proportion: Kata thy dvadoyiay THs Tictews, 1. q. KaTa Td
pérpov miorews received from God, Ro. xii. 6, cf. 3.
(Plat., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.)*
dva-Aoy(topar: 1 aor. dvehoyodyny; dep. mid. to think
over, ponder, consider: commonly with acc. of the thing,
but in Heb. xii. 3 with acc. of the pers. ‘to consider by
weighing, comparing,’ etc. (3 Mace. vii. 7. Often in
Grk. writ. fr. Plat. and Xen. down.) *
évados, -ov, (dds salt), saltless, unsalted, (dprot avadot,
Aristot. probl. 21, 5, 1; dpros dvados, Plut. symp. v.
quaest. 10 § 1): dAas dvaXoyr salt destitute of pungency,
Mk. ix. 50.*
[dvaddw, see dvadicoke. |
dvd-Avors, -ews, 7, (dvadvo, q. V-)} 1. an unloosing
(as of things woven), a dissolving (into separate parts).
2. departure, (a metaphor drawn from loosing from
moorings preparatory to setting sail, cf. Hom. Od. 15,
548; [or, acc. to others, fr. breaking up an encampment;
cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 23]), Germ. Aufbruch: 2 Tim.
iv. 6 (departure from life; Philo in Flacc. § 21 [p. 544
avadvw
ed. Mang. ] 7 ék rov Biov redevrala dvdAvois; [Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 44, 5 @yxaprrov k. redelav €axov THY avaddvow; Kuseb.
h. e. 3, 32, 1 paprupio roy Biov avahivoat, cl. 8, Be (Cake
GvdAvots drs cvvovcias, Joseph. antt. 19, 4, 1).*
éva-Abw: fut. dvadiow; 1 aor. avédvoa; 1. to un-
loose, undo again, (as, woven threads). 2. to depart,
Germ. aufbrechen, break up (see avdhuous, 2), 80 very
often in Grk. writ.; to depart from life: Phil. i. 23,
(Leian. Philops. c. 14 bxroxaidecxaérns dv avedvev; add
Ael. v. h. 4, 23; [dvéduoev 6 émiakoros TAdroy év kvpia,
Acta et mart. Matth. § 31]). to return, ek Tav ydpor,
Lk. xii. 36 [B. 145 (127); for exx.] ef. Kuinoel [and
Wetstein] ad loc.; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 25.*
dvaydpryros, -ov, (fr. dy priv. and the form dpapréa),
sinless, both one who has not sinned, and one who cannot
sin. In the former sense in Jn. viii. 7; Deut. xxix. 19;
2 Mace. viii. 4; xii. 42; [Test. xii. Patr. test. Benj.
§ 3]. On the use of this word fr. Hdt. down, cf. Ull-
mann, Siindlosigkeit Jesu, p. 91 sq. [(abridged in) Eng.
trans. p. 99; Cremer s. v.].*
dva-pévo; [fr. Hom. down]; twa, to wait for one
(Germ. erharren, or rather heranharren [i. e. to await
one whose coming is known or foreseen]), with the
added notion of patience and trust: 1 Th. i. 10 [cf. El-
licott ad loc.]. Good Greek; cf. Win. De verb. comp.
Ctew et. iit. py 15 sq.
[dva-p€pos, i. e. ava pépos, see ava, 1.]
[dvé-perov, i. €. dvd péecoy, see ava, 1. ]
dva-pipvicKe ; fut. dvauynow (fr. the form praw); Pass.,
[pres. avapupynokopar|; 1 aor. dveuynoOnv; [fr. Hom.
down]; to call to remembrance, to remind: tuva re one of
a thing [W. § 32, 4a.], 1 Co. iv. 17; to admonish, twa
foll. by inf., 2 Tim.i. 6. Pass. to recall to one’s own mind,
to remember; absol.: Mk. xi. 21. with gen. of the thing,
Mk. xiv. 72 Rec. ri, Mk. xiv. 72 LT Tr WH; context-
ually, to (remember and) weigh well, consider: 2 Co. vii.
15; Heb. x. 32; cf. W. § 30, 10¢.; [B. § 132,14];
Matth. ii. p- 820 sq. [Comp. : €T-avapipLvnoka. Syn.
see dvdpyyots fin. ]*
dvdpvycs, -ews, 7, (dvauipvnoKw), a remembering, recol-
lection: eis r. éuiyy dvdpynow to call me (affectionately)
to remembrance, Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co.
xi. 24 sq. €v adrais (sc. Ovalas) dvdurnots dpaptiay. in
offering sacrifices there is a remembrance of sins, i. e.
the memory of sins committed is revived by the sacri-
fices, Heb. x. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.*
[S¥N. avduynots, bréuynois: The distinction between these
words as stated by Ammonius et al. —viz. that avduy. denotes
an unassisted recalling, dréuy. a remembrance prompted by
another, —seems to be not wholly without warrant; note
the force of id (cf. our ‘sug-gest’). But even in class. Grk.
the words are easily interchangeable. Schmidt ch. 14;
sea § cvii. 6, cf. p. 61 note; Ellic. or Holtzm. on 2 Tim.
1D:
dva-vedw, -: to renew, (often in Grk. writ.); Pass. [W.
§ 39, 3 N. 3; for the mid. has an act. or reciprocal
force, cf. 1 Mace. xii. 1 and Grimm ad loc.] dvaveotobat
TO mrvevpart to be renewed in mind, i. e. to be spiritually
transformed, to take on a new mind [see pois, 1 b. fin. ;
40
avaTrave
mvedpa, fin.}, Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Tittmann i. p. 60; [Trench
§§ lx. xviii.], and dvaxawéw above.*
dva-vidw : [‘in good auth. apparently confined to the
pres.’; 1 aor. dvévna]; to return to soberness (éx péOns.
which is added by Grk. writ.) ; metaph.: 2 Tim. ii. 26
€k THs Tod OuaBdrov trayidos [W. § 66, 2 d.] to be set free
from the snare of the devil and to return to a sound mind
[‘one’s sober senses’]. (Philo, legg. alleg. ii. § 16 dva-
met, Todr gore petavoet; add Joseph. antt. 6, 11, 10;
Ceb. tab. 9; Antonin. 6, 31; Charit. 5,1.) [See dypv-
mvew, fin. |*
*Avavias [ WH. ‘Avap., see their Intr. § 408], -a [but on
the gen. cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Ananias (77330, fr. jan to be
gracious, and 7 Jehovah, [cf. Mey. on Acts vy. 1]):
1. a certain Christian [at Jerusalem], the husband of
Sapphira: Acts v. 1-6. 2. a Christian of Damascus:
Acts ix. 10-18; xxii. 12 sqq. 3. a son of Nedebaeus,
and high priest of the Jews c. A.D. 47-59. In the year
66 he was slain by the Sicarii: Acts xxiii. 2 sq.; xxiv.
1 sq.; Joseph. antt. 20, 5, 2; 6,2; 9, 2-4; b.j. 2,17, 6;
Oy {Cie Ba Diss vel
dv-avtt-ppytos [ WH avartipnros; see P, p|,-ov, (a priv.,
dyri, and pyros fr. PEG to say), not contradicted and not
to be contradicted ; undeniable, [not to be gainsaid]; in the
latter sense, Acts xix. 36. (Occasionady in Grk. writ.
fr. Polyb. down.)*
dvavtipphtes [WII davavripnras, see their App. p. 163,
and P, pj, adv., without contradiction: Acts x. 29 (I came
without gainsaying). Polyb. 23, 8, 11, [al.].*
dv-d£vos, -ov, (a priv. and aéuos), [fr. Soph. down], un-
worthy (rwés): unfit for a thing, 1 Co. vi. 2.*
dy-agiws, adv., [fr. Soph. down], in an unworthy man-
ner: 1 Co. xi. 27, and 29 Rec. [Cf W. 463 (431).]*
dvd-travois, -ews, 7, (dvaraio), [fr. Mimnerm., Pind.
down |; 1. intermission, cessation, of any motion, busi-
ness, labor: avdmavow ovd« €xovat héyovres [Rec. Néyovra]
equiv. to ov dvaravorrat déyortes they incessantly say,
Rev. iv. 8. 2. rest, recreation: Mt. xii. 43; Lk. xi.
24; Rey. xiv. 11, (and often in Grk. writ.); blessed
tranquillity of soul, Mt. xi. 29, (Sir. vi. [27] 28; li. 27;
Sap.iv. 7). [The word denotes a temporary rest, a
respite, e. g. of soldiers; cf. Schmiat ch. 25; Bp. Lehtft.
on Philem. 7; Trench § xli.] *
dvo-rave: fut. dvaraicw; 1 aor. dvémavoa; pf. pass.
avaréravpat; Mid., [pres. avaravopar]; fut. avamavcopat
(Rev. vi. 11 [Lchm. ed. min., Tdf. edd. 2, 7, WH; but
GLT Tr with R -cwvrac}), and in the colloquial speech
of inferior Grk. dvaranoopa (Rev. xiv. 13 L T Tr WH,
cf. Bttm. (57) esp. Eng. trans. p. 64 sq.; Kiihner i. 886;
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 170]; see also in
enavaravw); 1 aor. averavoduny; (a common verb fr.
Hom. down): to cause or permit one to cease from any
movement or labor in order te recover and collect his
strength (note the prefix ava and distinguish fr. ckara-
mavo, [see dvamavors, fin.]), to give rest, refresh; mid. to
give one’s self rest, take rest. So in mid. absol. of rest after
travelling, Mk. vi. 31; and for taking sleep, Mt. xxvi.
45; Mk. xiy. 41; of the sweet repose one enjoys after
Z. /
avaTrelOw
toil, Lk. xii. 19; to keep quiet, of calm and patient expec-
tation, Rev. vi. 11; of the blessed rest of the dead,
Rev. xiv. 13 (ek rév xor@v exempt from toils [ef. B. 158
(138) ]; Plat. Critias in. ék waxpas 6500). By a Hebraism
Oy m3, Isa. xi. 2) rd mvetpa ef? tuas avamaverai rests
upon you, to actuate you, 1 Pet. iv. 14. Act. to refresh,
the soul of any one: twa, Mt. xi. 28; 76 avedud Tivos,
1 Co. xvi. 18; ra orddyxva tivds, Philem. 20. In pass.,
Philem. 7; 2 Co. vii. 13 (a0 mdvrov tyev from your
sight, attentions, intercourse). [Comp.: én-,cvr- (-par). ]*
dva-relOw ; to stir up by persuasion (cf. Germ. aufreizen),
to solicit, incite: twa te trouoat, Acts xviii. 13. So also
in Hadt., Thuc., Plat., Xen., al.*
dvatretpos, a false spelling (arising from itacism, [cf.
Phryn. in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 9, 22: dud tod n TH
tpitny, ov Sia ths a SupOdyyou ws of dpabeis]) in some
Mss. in Lk. xiv. 18, 21 (and adopted by L Tr WH; [see
WH. App. p. 151]) for avamnpos, q. v.
dva-réwarw : 1 aor. avéreuw a; [fr. Pind. and Aeschyl.
down | ; 1. to send up; i.e. a. toa higher place;
b. to a person higher in office, authority, power, (Plut.
Marius c.17; [Philo de creat. princip. § 8; Joseph. b. j.
2, 20, 5]): twa mpds twa, Lk. xxiii. 7, 15; Acts xxv. 21
LTTrWH. ~ 2. to send back: twa, Philem. 12 (11);
viva tum, Lk. xxiii. 11.*
dva-rySae: [1 aor. ptep. dvamndjcas]; (Hom. Ml. 211,
379; often in Plat., Xen., Dem.); to leap up, spring up,
startup: avarndnoas, Mk. x.50 LT Tr WH; ef. Fritzsche
ad loc. (1 8S. xx. 34; Prov. xviii. 4 [Ald. etc.]; Tob.
AULA, cvilsed spavil-16+))?
dvé-rnpos, -ov, (prop. pds fr. the lowest part to the
highest —dva; hence Suid. 6 ka6’ imepBorny rennpwpévos,
[cf. Lob. Path. Elementa i. 195]), disabled in the limbs,
maimed, crippled; injured in, or bereft of, some member
of the body: Lk. xiv. 13, 21 dvamnpovus, xwXovs, tupdovs.
In both these pass. L Tr WH have adopted with certain
Mss. the spelling dvareipovs — manifestly false, as aris-
ing from itacism. (Plat. Crito p.53 a. yodol kai rupdoi
Kal drow avdrnpo; Aristot. h. a. 7, 6 [vol. i. p. 585°,
29] yivovra €& avarnpey dvdrnpor; Lys. ap. Suid. piva kal
éra dvdnnpos ; 2 Mace. viii. 24 trois pédeow dvamjpous.)*
éva-nimrw: 2 aor. dvérecoy, 3 pers. plur. dverecoy Mk.
vi. 40 (T Tr WH dvénecay); Jn. vi. 10 (LT Tr WH
dvérecay), inf. dvareceiv, impy. avareve Lk. xiv. 10 (Rec.
dvarecov fr. 1 aor. dvéreca, {(Grsb. dvdrecat i. e. 1 aor.
mid. impv.)]); Lk. xvii. 7 [RG dvdmecas, cf. WH. App.
p- 164; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; see rinra], ptep. avareoay ;
cf. W. § 13, 1 p. 73 (71); [B. 39 (34) sq., 67 (59); fr.
Eur. down]; to lie back, lie down: absol., Mk. vi. 40;
In. vi. 10, (sc. on the ground) ; émt ryv yjv, Mt. xv. 35; emt
ris yas, Mk. viii. 6. In later Grk. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 216; [W. 23 (22)]) for dvaxhivopat to recline at table:
Lk. xi. 37; xiv. 10; xvii. 7; xxii. 14; Jn. xiii. 12; xxi.
20 fal. refer this to the following signif.]. to lean back,
In. xiii. 25 L Tr WH. [It denotes an act rather than a
state, and in the last pass. differs from dvdxecpat, vs. 23,
by indicating a change of position. ]*
ava-rAnpda, -2; fut. dvamAnpoow; 1 aor. dvenAnpoca ;
41
; 5
avactacts
[pres. pass. dvamAypotpar]; (dvd to, up to, e. g. to fill a
vessel up to the brim; up to the appointed measure or
standard, Germ. an/fiillen); [fr. Eurip. down]; a
to fill up, make full, e. g. a ditch (Strabo 5, 6 p. 223);
hence trop. duaprias, 1 Th. ii. 16 (to add what is still
wanting to complete the number of their sins; on the
meaning, cf. Gen. xv. 16; Dan. viii. 23; ix. 24; Mt. xxiii.
32; 2 Mace. vi. 14). dvamAnpodra 4 mpopnteta the
prophecy is fully satisfied, the event completely corre-
sponds to it, Mt. xiii. 14. réy vdpor to fulfil i. e. observe
the law perfectly, Gal. vi. 2, (Barn. ep. 21 dvamd. racav
évrohnv) ; tov Térov twés to fill the place of any one,
1 Co. xiv. 16 (after the rabbin. pypn NOD to hold the
position of any one, [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]). 2. to
supply : 76 borépnua, Phil. ii. 30, (Col. i. 24) ; 1 Co. xvi. 17
(they by their presence supplied your place in your ab-
sence); cf. Plat. symp. p. 188 e. adn’ ef re e&€Aurrov, voy
epyov (sc. é€oriv) dvamAnpdca. Cf. Win. De verb.
comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 11 sq.; [Ellic. on Phil. 1. c., or Mey.
on Gal. l.c. Comp.: davr-, mpoo-avardnpéde }.*
dvatroAsynTos, -ov, without defence or excuse, Ro. i. 20;
also that cannot be defended, inexcusable, Ro. ii. 1.
(Polyb., Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 46; Plut. Brut. 46, al.) *
dva-rrbicow: 1 aor. dvémrvéa; (avd—cf. the Germ. auf
i. q. auseinander, see dvakvw—and rricow to fold up,
roll together) ; to wnroll, [i. e. open for reading]: 7d
BuBriov (as in Hat. 1, 48 and 125), Lk. iv. 17 [RG T],
(2 K. xix.14). The books of the Hebrews were rolls
nian) fastened to [one or] two smooth rods and fur-
nished with handles, so that they could be rolled up and
unrolled; [cf. B. D.s. v. Writing].*
dv-Grrw; 1 aor. ayaa; 1 aor. pass. dvnpOnv; to light
up, kindle: Lk. xii. 49; Acts xxviii. 2[ RG]; Jas. iii. 5.
[From Hdt. down. | *
dv-aplOunrtos, -ov, (a priv. and dpiOuéw), innumerable:
Heb. xi. 12. [From Pind. down.]*
dva-celw; 1 aor. avecerca; to shake up; trop. to stir
up, excite, rouse: tov dydov, Mk. xv. 113; rév Aadv, Lk.
xxiii. 5. (So in Diod. 13, 91; 14, 10; Dion. Hal. antt.
8, 81.)*
ava-cKevdtw; (oxevato, fr. cxedos a vessel, utensil) ;
1. to pack up baggage (Lat. vasa colligere) in order to
carry it away to another place: Xen. an. 5, 10, (6, 2) 8.
Mid. to move one’s furniture (when setting out for some
other place, Xen. Cyr. 8, 5,4 drav dé dvacxevdfwvrat,
cuvtiOnot peév exaoTos Ta oKevn) ; hence 2. of an
enemy dismantling, plundering, a place (Thue. 4, 116) ;
to overthrow, ravage, destroy, towns, lands, etc.; trop.
Woxds, to turn away violently from a right state, to un-
settle, subvert: Acts xv. 24.*
dva-cmde, -: dvacracw; 1 aor. pass. dveomacOny; to
draw up: Lk. xiv.5; Acts xi.10. [From Hom. down. ]*
avé-cracts, -ews, 7), (avicrnus), [fr. Aeschyl. down];
1. a raising up, rising, (e.g. fr. a seat): Lk. ii. 34 (opp.
to nmra@o.s; the meaning is ‘It lies [or ‘is set’ A. V.]
like a stone, which some will lay hold of in order to
climb; but others will strike against it and fall’). 2.
arising from the dead (eccl. Lat. resurrectio), [Aeschyl.
, ,
avacTaTow
Eum. 648]; a. thatof Christ: Actsi. 22; il. 31; iv.
33; Ro. vi. 5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 21; with the addi-
tion of vexpav, Ro. i. 4 (a generic phrase : the resurrection-
of-the-dead, although it has come to pass as yet only in
the case of Christ alone; cf. Acts xvii. 32; W. § 30, 2a.
fin.); ék vexpdy, 1 Pet.i.3. b. that of all men at the
end of the present age. This is called simply dvaoracts
or dvdoraots, Mt. xxii. 23, [28], 30; Mk. xii. 18, 23;
Lk. xx. 27, 33, 36; Jn. xi. 24; Acts xvii. 18; xxiii. 8; 2
Tim. ii. 18; by meton. i. q. the author of resurrection, Jn.
xi. 25; with the addition of # ék vexpdv, Lk. xx. 35; Acts
iv. 2; or simply of trav vexpav [on the distinction which
some (e. g. Van Hengel on Ro. i. 4; Van Hengel and Bp.
Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 11; Cremer s. v.) would make between
these phrases, see W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78)], Mt. xxii.
31; Acts xvii. 32; xxiii. 6; xxiv. 15 [Rec.], 21; xxvi.
23; 1 Co. xv. 12 sq. 21,42; Heb. vi. 2.
urrection to hfe (dv. ets Conv, 2 Mace. vii. 14 [cf. Dan. xii.
2]), and dy. ris kpicews resurrection to judgment, Jn. v.
29, (on the genitives cf. W. 188 (177)); the former is
dvdot. Tov dixaiov, Lk. xiv. 14; xpeitrwv avacracts, Heb.
xi. 35 (so called in comparison with a continuance of life
on earth, which is spoken of as an dvdoraots by a kind of
license; [cf. W. 460 (429)]). 1 avaor. 7 mporn in Rev.
xx. 5 sq. will be that of true Christians, and at the end
of a thousand years will be followed by a second resur-
rection, that of all the rest of mankind, Rev. xx. 12 sqq.
On the question whether and in what sense Paul also
believed in two resurrections, separated from each other
by a definite space of time, cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr.
fiir wissenschaftl. Theol., 1873, p. 388 sq. c. the res-
urrection of certain in ancient Jewish story who were
restored to life before burial: Heb. xi. 35.*
dvacratéw, -@; 1 aor. dvectdtwoa; a verb found no-
where in prof. auth., but [in Dan. vii. 23 Sept.; Deut.
xxix. 27 Graec. Venet.] several times in the O. T. frag-
ments of Aquila [e. g. Ps. x. 1] and Symmachus [e. g.
Ps. lviii. 11; Is. xxii. 3], and in Eustathius, (fr. dvaoraros,
driven from one’s abode, outcast, or roused up from
one’s situation; accordingly equiv. to avacrarov roid),
to stir up, excite, unsettle; foll. by an ace. a. to excite
tumults and seditions in the State: Acts xvii. 6; xxi.
38. b. to upset, unsettle, minds by disseminating
religious error: Gal. v. 12.*
dva-cravpdw, -6; 10 raise up upon a cross, crucify, (avd
as in dvackodonif): Heb. vi. 6, (very often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hdt. down). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt.
iii. p. 9 sq.; [Winer admits that in Heb. ].c. the meaning
to crucify again, or afresh, may also be assigned to this
verb legitimately, and that the absence of a precedent
in prof. writ. for such a sense is, from the nature of the
case, not surprising ].*
dya-crevatw: 1 aor. dverrévata; to draw sighs up from
the bottom of the breast, to sigh deeply: Mk. viii. 12.
(Lam. i. 4; Sir. xxv. 18 (17); 2 Mace. vi. 30, and in
Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. choéph. 335,] Hat. 1, 86 down.) *
dva-orpédw: fut. dvaorpérpo ; [1 aor. avéorpea; Pass.,
pres. avaorpepopat]; 2 aor. dvecrpadny ; 1.
avaot. Cans res-
to turn
42
avat (On
upside down, overturn: ras tpané{as, Jn. ii. 15, (dippous,
Hom. I. 23, 436). 2. to turn back; intrans. [W.
251 (236)] to return, like the Lat. reverto i. q. revertor,
(as in Grk. writ.; in Sept. i. q. 23): Acts v. 22; xv.
16 (here dvaotpéw xai has not like the Hebr. 13¥ the
force of an adverb, again, but God in the Messiah’s
advent returns to his people, whom he is conceived of
as having previously abandoned; cf. W. 469 (437)).
3. to turn hither and thither; pass. reflexively, to turn
one’s self about, sojourn, dwell, év in a place ; a. liter-
ally: Mt. xvii. 22, where L TWH Tr txt. cvorpehopevar,
cf. Keim ii. p. 581 [Eng. trans. iv. p. 303]. (Josh. v. 5;
Ezek. xix. 6, and in Grk. writ.) b. like the Hebr.
0 to walk, of the manner of life and moral character,
to conduct one’s self, behave one’s self, live: 2 Co. i. 12
(€v tO koopm) ; 1 Tim. iii. 15 (ev otk@ Ocod); Eph. ii. 3
(€vois among whom); 2 Pet. ii. 18 (€v wavy). simply
to conduct or behave one’s self, ‘walk’, (Germ. wandeln) :
1 Pet.i.17; Heb. x. 33; (xadés) xiii. 18. ([Cf. its use
e. g. in Xen. an. 2, 5,14; Polyb.1, 9,7; 74,13; 86, 5
etc., (see dvacrpopy, fin.); Prov. xx. 7 Sept.; Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 21, 8; ete.]*
dva-rtpopt, -7s, 7, (fr. the pass. dvaorpepopat, see the
preceding word), prop. ‘walk,’ i. e. manner of life, be-
havior, conduct, (Germ. Lebenswandel): Gal. i. 13; Eph.
iv.22; 1’ Eim-siv.cb23Jassi1i.13%) let. 15 15,483 2s
iii. 1 sq. 16; 2 Pet. ii. 7; plur. dyvac avacrpodai the ways
in which holy living shows itself, 2 Pet.iii.11. Hence
life in so far as it is comprised in conduct, Heb. xiii. 7.
(This word, in the senses given, is found in Grk. writ.
fr. Polyb. 4, 82,1 down; in the Scriptures first in Tob.
iv. 14; 2 Mace. v. 8; add Epict. diss. 1, 9,5; 4, 7, 5,
[and (fr. Soph. Lex. s.v.) Agatharchides 134, 12; 153,
8; Aristeas 16].)*
dva-taéccopar; [1 aor. mid. inf. dvaraéacba]; (mid.
of dvardocw), to put together in order, arrange, compose :
dupynow, Lk. i. 1 (so to construct [R. V. draw up] a nar-
rative that the sequence of events may be evident.
Found besides only in Plut. de sollert. anim. c. 12, where
it denotes to go regularly through a thing again, re-
hearse it; [in Eccl. ii. 20 Ald., and in eccl. writ. e. g.
Tren. 3, 21, 2 sub fin.]).*
dva-réhw ; 1 aor. dvérevda; pf. dvaréradka; a. trans.
to cause to rise: tov jALov, Mt. v. 45, (of the earth bring-
ing forth plants, Gen. iii. 18; of a river producing
something, Hom. Il. 5, 777). b. intrans. to rise, arise:
light, Mt. iv. 16, (Is. lviii. 10); the sun, Mt. xiii. 6; Mk.
iv.6; xvi. 2; Jas.i-11; the clouds, Lk. xii. 54; poods-
pos, 2 Pet. i.19. trop. to rise from, be descended from,
Heb. vii. 14. The earlier Greeks commonly used dva-
rédAew of the sun and moon, and émrédXewv of the stars;
but Aelian., Paus., Stob. and other later writ. neglect
this distinction; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 124 sq. [Comp.:
e&-avatédro. | *
ava-rlOmpu: 2 aor. mid. dveOéunv; [in various senses fr.
Hom. down]; in the mid. voice to set forth a thing
drawn forth, as it were, from some corner (dvd), to set
Jorth [in words], declare, [R. V. lay before]: rwi ru, Acts
avatonrn
xxv. 14; Gal. ii. 2, (2 Mace. iii. 9; [Mic. vii. 5]; Artem.
oneir. 2, 64 ruil rd dvap; Diog. Laért. 2, 17, 16 p. 191
ed. Heubn.; Plut. amat. narr. p. 772d.) Cf. Fritzschio-
rum Opusce.’p. 169; [Holsten, Zum Evang. des Paulus
u. d. Petrus p. 256 sq. Comp.: mpoo-avatiOny. | *
Gvatohh, -7s, 7, (fr. dvatédXo, q. v.), as in Grk. writ.;
1. a rising (of the sun and stars); light rising é£ ious,
Lk. i. 78. 2. the east (the quarter of the sun’s ris-
ing): Mt. ii. 2,9; Rev. xxi. 13 (Grsb. dvarodév) ; Hdian.
2, 8, 18 (10); 3, 5,1; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 14, 3, [6; 1, 26,
6; Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 6; Ignat. ad Ro. 2, 2; Melito ap. Euseb.
h. e. 4, 26,14; with pdéov added, Rev. vii. 2[RGT Tr
WH txt.]; Plur. eastern regions, the east, [W. 176 (166)]:
Mt. ii. 1; viii. 11; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29, (Sept., Hdt.,
Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.; Philo in Flace. § 7); with the
addition of 7Atov, Rev. xvi. 12 [-Ajs T Tr txt. WH txt.;
vil. 2 L WH mrg. ].*
ava-tperw ; [1 aor. dvérpeva]; to overthrow, overturn, de
stroy: [rac rparéZac, Jn. ii. 15 WH txt.] ; ethically, to sud-
vert: oicouvg families, Tit. i. 11. rnv rw wiotw, 2 Tim.
ii. 18. (Common in Grk. writ., and in the same sense. )*
dva-rpépw: 2 aor. pass. averpapnv; pf. pass. ptcp. dva-
teOpappevos; 1 aor. mid. aveOpelrdunv; to nurse up, nour-
ish up, (Germ. aufndhren, auffiittern); prop. of young
children and animals nourished to promote their growth
(Xen. mem. 4, 3, 10, ete.; Sap. vii. 4); to bring up: Lk.
iv.16 TWHmrg.; Acts vii. 20 sq.; with the predomi-
nant idea of forming the mind, Acts xxii. 3, (4 Mace.
x. 2, and often in Grk. writ.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. iii. p. 4.*
dva-patvw: 1 aor. dvédhava, Doric for the more com.
avednva, (Acts xxi. 3 RT WH [with Erasm., Steph.,
Mill]; cf. Passow p. 2199; [ Veitch, and L. and S., s. v.
dairw; W.89 (85); B. 41 (385)]; see emaivw); Pass.,
[pres. advapaivopar]; 2 aor. avepavny; [fr. Hom. down];
to bring to light, hold up to view, show; Pass. to appear,
be made apparent: Lk. xix.11. An unusual phrase is
avapavertes thy Kimpov having sighted Cyprus, for avapa-
veions npiv ths Kumpou, Acts xxi. 3; cf. B. 190 (164); W.
§ 39,1 a.p. 260 (244); here R* TWH [see above] read
dvapavavres tiv K. after we had rendered Cyprus visible
(to us); [R. V. had come in sight of Cyprus.].*
dva-bépw; fut. dvoiaw (Lev. xiv. 20; Num. xiv. 33,
etc.) ; 1 aor. dvnveyxa; 2 aor. avynveyxov; [see reff. s. v.
depo; impf. pass. avepepounv; fr. Hom. down]; 1. to
carry or bring up, to lead up; men to a higher place:
Mt. xvii. 1; Mk. ix. 2; pass., Lk. xxiv. 51 [Tdf.om. WH
reject the cl.]. dvapépew ras duaprias emt rd Evdov, 1 Pet.
ii. 24 (to bear sins up on the cross, sc. in order to expi-
ate them by suffering death, [cf. W.428sq.(399)]). 2.
to put upon the altar, to bring to the altar, to offer; (Sept.
etc.): Heb. vii. 27; xiii. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 5; with emi 7d
Ovovacrnpiov added, Jas. ii. 21, (Gen. viii. 20; Lev. xiv.
20; [Bar.i.10; 1 Mace. iv. 53]); [éavrdv, Heb. vii. 27,
T Tr mrg. WH mre. mpoceveyxas]. Cf. Kurtzu.s. 3.
43
> ,
Avdpovixor
to lift up on one’s self, to take upon one’s self, i. e. to place
on one’s self anything as a load to be upborne, to sus-
tain: ras dpaprias i. e. by meton. their punishment, Heb.
ix. 28 (Is. liii. 12; rv wopvetavy, Num. xiv. 33); ef. Win.
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 5 sq.*
dva-hwvew, -@: 1 aor. dvepavnoa; to cry out with a loud
voice, call aloud, exclaim: Lk.i.42, (1 Chr. xv. 28; xvi.
4; [Aristot. de mund. 6, vol. i. p. 400°, 18]; Polyb.,
often in Plut.)*
dvd-x vets, -ews, 7, (avaxéw [to pour forth]), rare in Grk.
writ. (Strabo, Philo, Plut.; av. yvyjs, in a good sense,
Philo de decal. § 10 mid.]; an overflowing, a pouring
out: metaph., 1 Pet. iv. 4 dowrias dvdyvors the excess
(flood) of riot in which a dissolute life pours itself
forth.*
dva-xwpéw, -6; 1 aor. dveyopynoa; (freq. in Grk. writ.) ;
1. to go back, return: Mt. ii. 12 sq. [al. refer this to next
head]. 2. to withdraw; a. univ., so as to leave room:
Mt. ix. 24. b. of those who through fear seek some
other place, or shun sight: Mt. ii. 14, 22; iv.12; xii. 15;
xiv. 135 xy. 21; xxvil.5; Mk. iii. 7;-Jn. vi. 15 [Tdf.
evyer]; Acts xxiii. 19 (kar idtav); xxvi. 31.*
ava-putis, -ews, 7, (avaixw, q. Vv-), a cooling, refresh-
ing: Acts ili. 20 (19), of the Messianic blessedness to be
ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven; Vulg.
refrigerium. (Ex. viii. 15; Philo de Abr. § 29; Strabo
10, p. 459; and in eccl. writ.)*
ava-Wixo: 1 aor. avevEa; to cool again, to cool off,
recover from the effects of heat, (Hom. Od. 4, 568; Il. 5,
795; Plut. Aem. P. 25, ete.); trop. to refresh: twa, one’s
spirit, by fellowship, consolation, kindnesses, 2 Tim. i.
16. (intrans. to recover breath, take the air, cool off, re-
vive, refresh one’s self, in Sept. [Ps. xxxviil. (xxxix.) 14;
28. xvi. 14; Ex. xxiii. 12; 1S. xvi. 23; ete., in] 2 Mace.
iv. 46; xiii. 11; and in the later Grk. writ.)*
avSparrobiorts, -od, 6, (fr. avdparodi¢w, and this fr. rd
avdparodov—fr. dvynp and rovs—a slave, a man taken in
war and sold into slavery), a slave-dealer, kidnapper,
man-stealer, i. e. as well one who unjustly reduces free
men to slavery, as one who steals the slaves of others
and sells them: 1 Tim. i. 10. (Arstph., Xen., Plat.,
Dem., Isocr., Lys., Polyb.)*
*Av8peas, -ov, 6, Andrew, (a Grk. name [meaning
manly; for its occurrence, see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ;
B. D. s. v. Andrew, init.]), a native of Bethsaida in
Galilee, brother of Simon Peter, a disciple of John the
Baptist, afterwards an apostle of Christ: Jn. i. 40, 44
(41, 45); vi.8; xii. 22; Mt.iv.18; x.2; Mk.i.16, 29;
iii. 184 xiii. 3; Lk. vi. 14; Actsi.13*
dvBpitw: (davnp); to make a man of or make brave,
(Xen. oec. 5,4). Mid. pres. avdpi¢ouar; to show one’s
self a man, be brave: 1 Co. xvi. 13 [A. V. quit you like
men]. (Often in Sept.; Sir. xxxiv. 25; 1 Mace. ii. 64;
Xen., Plat., App., Plut., al.)*
’AvBpdvikos, -ov, 6, Androni’cus, (a Grk. name, [lit. man
of victory; for its occurrence see Pape, Kigennamen,
s. v.]), a Jewish Christian and a kinsman of Paul: Ro.
xvi. 7.*
avdpopovos
dv8po-pévos, -ov, 6, a manslayer: 1Tim.i.9. (2 Mace.
ix. 28; Hom., Plat., Dem., al.) [Cf. poveds.]*
dv-éykAnTos, -ov, (a priv. and éykadéw, q. V-), that can-
not be called to account, unreprovable, unaccused, blame-
less: 1Co.i. 8; Col. i. 22; 1 Tim. iii. 10; Tit. i. 6 sq. (3
Mace. v. 31; Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) (Cf.
Trench § ciii.]*
dy-exSuyynros, -ov, (a priv. and exduyyéouas, q. V-), wn-
speakable, indescribable: 2 Co. ix. 15 dwped, to describe
and commemorate which words fail. (Only in eccl. writ.
[Clem. Rom.1Cor 20,5; 49,4; Athenag., Theoph., al.].)*
dy-ex-AdAnTOs, -ov, (a priv. and ekAahéw), unspeakable :
1 Pet. i. 8 (to which words are inadequate). ([Diose.
medicam. p. 93 ed. Kiihn]; Heliod. 6, 15 p. 252 (296) ;
and in eccl. writ.)*
' dvékXeurrros, -ov, (a priv. and ékeime to fail), unfailing:
Lk. xii. 33. ([Hyperid. p. 58° ed. Teubner]; Diod. 4,
84; 1, 36, cf. 3,16; Plut. de orac. defect. p. 438 d., and
in eccl. writ.)*
dv-exrés, -dv, and in later Grk. also -ds, -7, -ov [cf. W.
68 (67); B. 25 (22)], (dvexouar to bear, endure); fr.
Hom. down; bearable, tolerable: avexrorepov gorau the
lot will be more tolerable, Mt. x. 15; xi. 22, 24; Mk.
vi. 11 RLbr.; Lk. x. 12,14. (nn Grk.-writ. fr. Hom.
down.)*
dy-eXet wv, -ov, ZN. -ovos, (a priv. and éAenpav), without
mercy, merciless: Ro. i. 31. (({Aristot. rhet. Alex. 37
p- 1442>, 13]; Prov. v. 9, etc.; Sir. xiii. 12)ete.; Sap. xii.
HF sab ile
dv-éheos, -ov, without mercy, merciless: Jas. i. 13 LT
Tr WH, unusual form for dvitewos RG. The Greeks
said dyndens and dvedens, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 710 sq. ;
W. 100 (95).*
dveutfo: (vemos); to agitate or drive by the wind; pres.
pass. ptcp. dveptCopevos, Jas. i. 6. Besides only in schol.
on Hom. Od. 12, 336 év6a jv oxemn mpos TO jar) dvepiCer Oa,
[Hesych. s. v. dvavEar- avepicoar; Joannes Moschus
(in Patr. Graec. Ixxxvii. p. 3044 a.) dveuiCovros rod mAolov
velificante nave]. The Greeks said dvepow. Cf. krvdo-
vicopa.* ,
dvepos, -ov, 6, (dw, anu to breathe, blow, [but etymolo-
gists connect dm with Skr. vd, Grk. djp, Lat. ventus,
Eng. wind, and dvewos with Skr. an to breathe, ete.; cf.
Curtius §§ 419,587; Vanitek p. 28]), [fr. Hom. down],
wind, a violent agitation and stream of air, [ef. (Trench
§ Ixxili.) mvedua, 1 fin.]: Mt. xi. 7; xiv. 24; Jas. iii. 4,
etc.; of a very strong and tempestuous wind: Mt. vii.
25; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. viii. 24, ete. of Téccapes divepor, the
four principal or cardinal winds (Jer. xxv. 15 (xlix. 36)),
ths yns, Rev. vii. 1; hence the four quarters of the
heavens (whence the cardinal winds blow): Mt. xxiv.
31; Mk. xiii. 27; (Ezek. xxxvii. 9; 1 Chr. ix. 24).
Metaph. dveyos tis d:dackaXéas, variability and empti-
ness [?] of teaching, Eph. iv. 14.
dy-év8exros, -ov, (a priv. and éydexros, and this fr. éydé-
Xopat, q. v.), that cannot be admitted, inadmissible, unal-
lowable, improper: avevdexrov eore rod pi édOeiv it cannot
be but that they will come, Lk. xvii. 1 [W. 328 (308) ;
44
sys
aAveVv@
B. 269 (231)]. (Artem. oneir. 2, 70 6 apibmos mpos Tov
pédovra ypdvov avéevdexros, [Diog. Laért. 7, 50], and sev-
eral times in eccl. and Byzant. writ.) *
dveEepedvytos, I Tr WH -pavvnros (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.
81; B. 58 (50); Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 117;
see épavvde ], -ov, (a priv. and e€-epevvaw), that cannot be
searched out: Ro. xi. 33. (Symm. Prov. xxv. 3; Jer.
xvii. 9. Dio Cass. 69, 14.)*
dveEl-Kakos, -ov, (fr. the fut. of avéyouar, and xaxdv; cf.
classic d\eElkakos, aynoixakos), patient of ills and wrongs,
forbearing: 2 Tim. ii. 24. (Leian. jud. voc. 9; [Justin
M. apol. 1, 16 init.; Pollux 5, 138].)*
aveftxviacros, -ov, (a priv. and 退yvalo to trace out),
that cannot be traced out, that cannot be comprehended,
[A. V. unsearchable|: Ro. xi. 33; Eph. iii.8. (Job v.
9; ix. 10; [xxxiv. 24]; Or. Manass. 6 [see Sept. ed.
Tdf., Proleg. § xxix.]; several times in eccl. writ.)*
dy-er-aloxvvtos, -ov, (a priv. and émaxvvw), (Vulg.
inconfusibilis), having no cause to be ashamed: 2 Tim. ii.
15. ({Joseph. antt. 18, 7,1]; unused in Grk. writ. [W.
236 (221)].)*
dv-errt-Anatos [LT Tr WH -Anumros; see M, p J, -ov, (a
priv. and émiAauBave), prop. not apprehended, that cannot
be laid hold of; hence that cannot be reprehended, not open
to censure, irreproachable, [Tittmann i. p. 31; Trench
§ ciii.]: 1 Tim. iii. 2; v. 7; vi-14. (Freq. in Grk. writ.
fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)*
av-épxopar: 2 aor. avndGov; [fr. Hom. down]; to go
up: Jn. vi. 3; to a higher place; to Jerusalem, Gal. i. 17
[L Tr mrg. amndOov], 18; (1 K. xiii. 12). [Compe.:
ér-avepyop.at. | *
&v-eots, -ews, 7, (avinut to let loose, slacken, anything
tense, e. g. a bow), a loosening, relaxing; spoken of a
more tolerable condition in captivity: €yew daveow to be
held in less rigorous confinement [R. V. have indulgence],
Acts xxiv. 23, (Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 10 @udaky pev yap Kal
THPNTLS HY, peTa pevTor Gvecews THs eis Siairav). relief,
rest, from persecutions, 2 Th. i. 7; from the troubles of
poverty, 2 Co. viii. 13; relief from anxiety, quiet, 2 Co.
ii. 13 (12); vii.5. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. [Hdt.
5, 28] down.) [SyYN. see avazavots, fin.]*
dv-erdtw; pres. pass. davera¢ouar; (€ra(@ to examine,
test); to investigate, examine; twa, to examine judicially :
Acts xxii. 24, 29. (Judg. vi. 29 cod. Alex.; Sus. [i. e.
Dan. (Theod.) init.] 14; [Anaph. Pilati A 6 p. 417 ed.
Tdf.]. Not found in prof. auth.)*
dvev, prep. with gen., without: 1 Pet. iii. 1; iv. 9.
with gen. of the pers. without one’s will or intervention,
(often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down): Mt. x. 29.
[Compared with ywpis, see Tittm. i. p. 93 sq.; Ellic. on.
Eph. ii. 12; Green, Crit. Notes, ete. (on Ro. iii. 28).]*
dy-et-Beros, -ov, not convenient, not commodious, not fit :
Acts xxvii. 12. (Unused by Grk. writ.; [Moschion 53].)*
dv-evplokw: 2 aor. dvedpov, 3 pers. plur. dvedpav, Lk.
ii. 16 (T Tr WH; see evipioxw) ; to find out by search:
td, Lk. ii. 16; Acts xxi. 4. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hat.
down.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 13 sq.*
dv-éx@: in the N. T. only in the mid. dvéyoua; fut.
aves
avéEouar (W. 82(79)\: impf. avetydpnv 2 Co. xi. [1 Rec®!?},
4 [Rec.] (GT TrWH mre. dvetxsuny [cf. Moeris ed.
Piers. p. 176; (but L WH txt. in vs. 4 dvéy.); cf. WH.
App. p. 162; W. 72 (70); B. 35 (31)]); 2 aor. qvecyd-
pnw Acts xviii. 14 (LT Tr WH dveoyduny, reff. u. s.);
to hold up, (e. g. kepadny, xeipas, Hom. et al.) ; hence in
mid. to hold one’s self erect and firm (against any pers.
or thing), to sustain, to bear (with equanimity), to bear
with, endure, with a gen. of the pers. (in Grk. writ. the
accus. is more com., both of the pers. and of the thing),
of his opinions, actions, etc.: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19;
Lk. ix. 41; 2 Co. xi.19; Eph. iv. 2; Col. iii.13. foll. by
gen. of the thing: 2 Th. i. 4 [WH mre. évey.] (ais by
attraction for éy, unless ds be preferred [B. 161 (140);
cf. W. 202 (190)]). fol. by puxpdv re with gen. of both
pers. and thing, 2 Co. xi. 1 (acc. to the reading pov
puxpdv te adpoovyns [Ree LT TrWH]; cf. Meyer
ad loc.). without a case, 1 Co. iv. 12 (we endure). foll.
by e@ tus, 2 Co. xi. 20. Owing to the context, to bear
with i. e. to listen: with gen. of the pers., Acts xviii. 14;
of the thing, 2 Tim. iv. 3; Heb. xiii. 22. [Comp.: mpos-
avéxa. | *
aveipids, -ov, 6, [for d-verr-ids con-nepot-ius, cf. Lat. ne-
pos, Germ. nichte, Eng. nephew, niece; Curtius § 342], a
cousin: Col. iv. 10. (Num. xxxvi.11; Tob. vii.2.) [Cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 306; but esp. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. 1. ¢.;
also B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Sister’s Son. | *
dvnPov, -ov, 7d, dill, anise [(?); cf. BB.DD.s. v.; Tris-
tram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 419 sq.]: Mt. xxiii. 23.
(Arstph. nub. 982; [Aristot., al.]; often in Theophr.
hist. pl.) *
av-hKw ; [impf. dvjcev]; in Grk. writ. to have come up
to, arrived at, to reach to, pertain to, foll. generally by
eis 71; hence in later writ. dvnkes ti tive something apper-
tains to one, is due to him sc. to be rendered or performed
by others (1 Mace. x. 42; xi. 35; 2 Mace. xiv. 8), and
then ethically 76 dvnkov what is due, duty, [R. V. befitting],
Philem. 8; 71a ovx« dvnkovta unbecoming, discreditable,
Eph. v. 4 (LT Tr WH 4i otk dvjxev, W. 486 (452) ; [B.
350 (301) ]); impers. as dvqKke as was fitting, sc. ever
since ye were converted to Christ, Col. iii. 18, [W. 270
(254); cf. B. 217 (187) and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
dv-hpepos, -ov (a priv. and jpepos), not tame, savage,
fierce: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Anacr. 1, 7]
Aeschyl. down.)*
dvtip, dvdpés, 6, a man, Lat. vir. The meanings of this
word in the N. T. differ in no respect fr. classic usage ;
for it is employed 1. with a reference to sex, and
so to distinguish a man from a woman; either a. asa
male: Acts viii. 12; xviil.12; 1Tim.ii.12; or b. asa
husband: Mt.i.16; Mk. x.2; Jn.iv. 16 sqq.; Ro. vii. 2
sqq-; 1 Co. vii. 2 sqq.; Gal. iv. 27; 1 Tim. iii. 2, 12; chit:
i. 6, etc.; a betrothed or future husband: Mt.i.19; Rev.
xxi. 2, ete. 2. with a reference to age, and to dis-
tinguish an adult man from a boy: Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38
(where dv8pes, yuvaixes and maidia are discriminated) ;
with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue:
1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to vnmws); Eph. iv. 13; Jas. iii. 2, (in
45
avOpat
the last two pass. réXevos dyjp). 3. univ. any male
person, a man; so where ris might have been used:
Lk. viii. 41; ix. 38; Acts vi.11; x.5,ete. where dup
and ris are united: Lk. viii. 27; Actsv.1; x.1. or
dynp and és he who, etc.: Ro. iv. 8; Jas.i.12. where
mention is made of something usually done by men, not
by women: Lk. xxii. 63; Acts v.36. where angels or
other heavenly beings are said to have borne the forms
of men: Lk. ix. 30; xxiv.4; Acts x. 30. where it is so
connected with an adjective as to give the adj. the force
of a substantive: dvjp duaprwdds a sinner, Lk. v. 8;
Aerpot Gvdpes, Lk. xvii. 12; or is joined to appellatives :
dvnp povets, Acts iii. 14; dv. mpopyrns, Lk. xxiv. 19,
(83) wR, Judg. vi.8; [cf. W. 30; § 59,1; B. 82 (72);
other reff. s. v. dvOpwzros, 4 a. fin.]); or to gentile names:
avdpes Nuwevira, Mt. xii. 41; dyqp "lovdaios, Acts xxii. 3;
av. Ai@iow, Acts viii. 27; dvd. Kimpior, Acts xi. 20; esp.
in addresses of honor and respect [W. § 65, 5d.; B.
82 (72)], Actsi. 11; ii. 14; xiii. 16; xvii. 22, ete.; even
adpes adedoi, Acts i. 16; [ii. 29,37; vii. 2]; xiii. [15],
26, ete. 4. when persons of either sex are included,
but named after the more important: Mt. xiv. 35; Acts
iv.4; [Meyer seems inclined (see his com. on Acts
1. c.) to dispute even these examples; but al. would refer
several other instances (esp. Lk. xi. 31; Jas. i. 20) to
the same head ].
av0-lornpr: pt. avOgornka; 2 aor. avréotny, [impv. av-
tiotynte |, inf. avriorjvac; Mid., pres. dvOiorayar; impf.
avOiorauny; (avti and iornpt); to set against; as in Grk.
writ., in the mid., and in the pf. plpf. [having pres. and
impf. force, W. 274 (257)] and 2 aor. act., to set one’s
self against, to withstand, resist, oppose: pf. act., Ro. ix.
19; xiii. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 15 [RG]. 2 aor. act., Mt. v.39;
Lk. xxi. 15; Acts vi. 10; Gal. ii. 11; Eph. vi. 13; 2 Tim.
iii. 8; [iv. 15 LT TrWH]. impv., Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet. v.
9. Mid.: pres., 2 Tim. iii. 8. impf., Acts xiii. 8.*
av0-oporoyeop.ar, -odpar: [impf. dvOwporoyovpny]; (avri
and 6podoyéonar) ; in Grk. writ. (fr. Dem. down) 1.
to reply by professing or by confessing. 2. to agree
mutually (in turn), to make a compact. 3. to acknowl-
edge in the presence of (avri before, over against; cf.
eEoporoyeioOar évayre kupiov, 2 Chr. vil. 6) any one, (see
Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ili. p. 19 sq.): ras duaprias
to confess sins, Joseph. antt. 8, 10, 3 [Bekk. reads avopo-
Aoyoupevous |]; cf. 1 Esdr. viii. 88 (90). ruvi, to declare
something in honor of one, to celebrate his praises, give
thanks to him, Lk. ii. 38; (for 7/7 in Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.)
13; 3 Mace. vi. 33; [Dan. iv. 31 (84) Sept.; Test. xii.
Patr. test. Jud. § 1]).*
vos, -eos, 76, [fr. Hom. down]; a flower: Jas. i. 10
sq.; 1 Pet. i. 24.*
évOpaxvé [on accent cf. Etym. Magn. 801, 21; Chand-
ler § 95], -ds, 7, a heap of burning coals: Jn. xviii. 18;
xxi. 9. (Sir. xi. 32; 4 Mace. ix. 20; Hom. I. 9, 213,
etc.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Coal.]*
évOpak, -axos, 6, coal, (also, fr. Thuc. and Arstph. down,
a live coal), dvOp. mupds a coal of fire i. e. a burning or
live coal; Ro. xii. 20 dvp. mupds capevery emi Thy Kehadny
’ ,
avOpwrdpEer Kos
rwos, a proverbial expression, fr. Prov. xxv. 22, signify-
ing to call up, by the favors you confer on your enemy,
the memory in him of the wrong he has done you (which
shall pain him as if live coals were heaped on his head),
that he may the more readily repent. The Arabians
call things that cause very acute mental pain burning
coals of the heart and fire in the liver; cf. Gesenius in
Rosenmiiller’s Bibl.-exeg. Repert. i. p. 140 sq. [or in his
Thesaurus i. 280; cf. also BB.DD. s. v. Coal].*
GvOpwr-dperkos, -ov, (dvOpwmos and dpeckos agreeable,
pleasing, insinuating; cf. evdpeckos, dvodpeckos, avrd-
peoxos in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 621); only in bibl. and
eccl. writ. [W. 25]: studying to please men, courting the
favor of men: Eph. vi. 6; Col. iti. 22. (Ps. ii. (liii.) 6 ;
[Ps. Sal. iv. 8, 10].)*
dvOpdmuvos, -ivy, -wov, (dvOpwros), [fr. Hdt. down],
human; applied to things belonging to men: xelpes,
Acts xvii. 25 LT TrWH; ¢vors, Jas. ili. 7; or insti-
tuted by men: xriovs, [q. v. 3], 1 Pet. ii. 13; adjusted to
the strength of man: mecpaopuds [R. V. a temptation such
as man can bear], 1 Co. x. 18 (cf. Neander [and Heinrici]
ad loe.; Pollux 3, 27, 131 6 ov« dv ris Umopéverev, 6 ovK ay
ris eveykn »+- TO S€ evavriov, Kkovpov, etopor, diaroy, av-
Opamwov, avextov). Opp. to divine things, with the im-
plied idea of defect or weakness: 1 Co. ii. 4 Rec.; 13
(copia, originating with man); iv. 3 (dvOpwmivn npuépa
the judicial day of men, i.e. human judgment). dvépa-
muwov Aey@, Ro. vi. 19 (I say what is human, speak as
is usual among men, who do not always suitably weigh
the force of their words; by this expression the apos-
tle apologizes for the use of the phrase dovA@éjvar 7H
Stxaroovyy ).*
dvOpwrroKtévos, -ov, (kreivw to kill), a manslayer, mur-
derer: Jn. vill. 44. contextually, to be deemed equal to
a murderer, 1 Jn. iii. 15. (Kur. Iph. T. (882) 389.) [Cf.
Trench § lxxxiii. and qovevs. |*
dvOpwrros, -ov, 6, [perh. fr. aynp and dy, i. e. man’s face;
Curtius § 422; Vaniéek p.9. From Hom. down]; man.
It is used 1. univ., with ref. to the genus or nature,
without distinction of sex, a human being, whether male
or female: Jn. xvi. 21. And in this sense a. with the
article, generically, so as to include all human individ-
uals: Mt. iv. 4 (ém apr ¢noerat 6 dvOpwmos) ; Mt. xii. 35
(6 dya@6s av6. every good person); Mt. xv. 11, 18; Mk.
ii. 27; vil. 15,18, 20; Lk.iv.4; Jn. ii. 25 [W. § 18, 8];
vii. 51; Ro. vii.1,ete. b. sothat aman is distinguished
from beings of a different race or order; a. from ani-
mals, plants, etc.: Lk. v.10; Mt.iv.19; xii. 12; 2 Pet.
ii. 16; Rev. ix. 4, 7, 10, 15, 18; xi. 18, ete. B. from
God, from Christ as divine, and from angels: Mt. x. 32;
xix.6; Mk. x. 9; Lk. ii. 15 (TWH om., L Tr br.] (opp.
to angels); Jn. x. 33; Acts x. 26; xiv.11; 1 Th. ii. 13;
Gal. i. 10, 12; 1 Co. iii. 21; vii. 23; Phil. ii. 7,7 (8);1Tim.
ii. 5; Heb. viii. 2; xiii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 4, ete. c. with
the added notion of weakness, by which man is led
into mistake or prompted to sin: otk dvOpemoi (RG
gapkixot) €ore; 1 Co. iii. 4; copia avOpamrev, 1 Co. ii. 5;
avOparav émOupiat, 1 Pet. iv. 2; care 2Oawmoy TepiTrareire
46
avOpwrros
ye conduct yourselves as men, 1 Co. iil. 3; Aaheiy or
éyew kara dvOperor, to speak according to human modes
of thinking, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii.5; xara avOpwrov heya,
I speak as a man to whom analogies from human affairs
present themselves, while I illustrate divine things by an
example drawn from ordinary human life, Gal. iii. 15;
kara dvOp. Onpopaxeiv, as man is wont to fight, urged on by
the desire of gain, honor and other earthly advantages,
1 Co. xv. 82; ovk éort Kara GvOp. is not accommodated
to the opinions and desires of men, Gal. i. 11; [for exx.
of xara dv. in prof. auth. see Wetstein on Rom. u. s.];
with the accessory notion of malignity: mpocéyere
and tov avOpdanav, Mt. x. 17; eis xetpas avOpanev, Mt.
xvii. 22; Lk. ix. 44. 4. with the adjunct notion of
contempt, (as sometimes in Grk. writ.) : Jn. v.12; the
address dvOpare, or dvOpwre, is one either of contempt
and disdainful pity, Ro. ix. 20 (Plat. Gorg. p. 452 b. od
dé... tis et, & dvOpwre), or of gentle rebuke, Lk. xxii.
58,60. The word serves to suggest commiseration: id
[T Tr WH idov] 6 avp. behold the man in question, mal-
treated, defenceless, Jn. xix. 5. e. with a reference
to the twofold nature of man, 6 éo@ and 6 ¢£w avOpamos,
soul and body: Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; 2 Co. iv. 16,
(Plat. rep. 9, 589 a. 6 évrés GvOpwmos; Plotin. Enn. 5, 1,
10 6 etow GvOp.; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 61sq; [Mey.
on Ro. 1. ¢.; Ellic. on Eph. 1. ¢.]); 6 xpumrés tis xapdias
avOp. 1 Pet. iii. 4. f. with a reference to the twofold
moral condition of man, 6 madaids (the corrupt) and 6
katvos (6 véos) avOp. (the truly Christian man, conformed
to the nature of God): Ro. vi.6; Eph. ii. 15; iv. 22, 24;
Col. iii. 9 sq. g. with a reference to the sex, (context-
ually) a male: Jn. vii. 22 sq. 2. indefinitely, without
the article, dv@pwmos, a. some one, a (certain) man,
when who he is either is not known or is not import-
ant: i. q. ris, Mt. xvii. 14; xxi. 28; xxii.11; Mk. xii. 1;
xiv. 13; Lk. v. 18; xiii. 19, ete. with the addition of ris,
Mt. xvii: 12/5) kx. 30a xiv. 2, 16)) xvid dictexca ll OF
Jn.v.5. in address, where the speaker either cannot
or will not give the name, Lk. v. 20; or where the writer
addresses any and every reader, Ro. ii. 1, 3. b. where
what is said holds of every man, so that dv6p. is equiv.
to the Germ. indef. man, one: Ro. iii. 28; 1 Co. iv.1;
vii. 1; xi. 28; Gal. ii.16. So also where opp. to domes:
tics, Mt. x. 36; to a wife, Mt. xix. 10; to a father, Mt.
x. 85; to the master of a household, Lk. xii. 36 sq.,—in
which passages many, confounding sense and signifi-
cation, incorrectly say that the word av6p. signifies father
of a family, husband, son, servant. 3. in the plur. of
av6p. is sometimes (the) people, Germ. die Leute: Mt.
V. U3, MG soya 55) 1 Sis a viling2 7 seeing) O eel keexaar4 dass
vill. 24, 27; Jn. iv. 28; ovdels dvOpdrwv (nemo homi-
num) no one, Mk. xi. 2; 1 Tim. vi.16. 4. It is joined
a. to another substantive, —a quasi-predicate of office,
or employment, or characteristic, — the idea of the pred-
icate predominating [W. § 59, 1]: dOpwros €umropos a
merchant (-man), Mt. xiii. 45 [WH txt. om. &v6p.]; otko
Seondrns, Mt. xiii. 52; xx. 1; xxi. 33; Baoiders, Mt.
Xvill, 23; xxii. 2; gdyos, Mt. xi 19. (So in Hebr.
>] ,
avOutTrateva
D0 WN a eunuch, Jer. xxxviii. 7 sq., 1713. WN a priest,
Lev. xxi. 9; also in Grk. writ.: a6. édirns, Hom. Il. 16,
263, al.; cf. Matthiae § 430, 6; [Kriiger § 57, 1,1]; but
in Attic this combination generally has a contemptuous
force; cf. Bnhdy. p. 48; in Lat. homo gladiator, Cic.
epp. ad diversos 12, 22,1). b. toa gentile noun: dé.
Kupnvaios, Mt. xxvii. 32; “Iovdatos, Acts xxi. 39; ‘Po-
patos, Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25, (acc. to the context, a Ro-
man citizen). 5. 6 avOp., with the article, the partic-
ular man under consideration, who he is being plain
from the context: Mt. xii. 13; xxvi. 72; Mk. iii.5; Lk.
xxiil. 6; Jn. iv. 50. otros 6 dv6., Lk. xiv. 30; Jn. ix. 16,
24 [L Trmrg. WH]; xi. 47; 6 dvO. odtos, Mk. xiv.
TIE eka, 4,014, 47 5 In. ix) 24 [RG Trixt:):
Xvill di? 9 Acts vie tSs xx. 265) x<xvin3l,325 Goave,
éxeivos, Mt. xii. 45; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv.21. 6. Phrases:
6 a0. tis duaprias (or with T Tr txt.WH txt. r. dvopias),
2 Th. ii. 3, see duapria, 1 p. 30 sq. av6. rod Geod a man
devoted to the service of God, God’s minister: 1 Tim.
vi. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 17, (of the evangelists, the associates
of the apostles) ; 2 Pet. i. 21 (of prophets, like o7Ox wrx
often in the O. T.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 85). For
6 vids Tod avOpaHmov and viol roy avOp., see under vids.
dv0-vraretw ; (avri for i. e. in lieu or stead of any one,
and émarev to be tmaros, to be supreme, to be consul) ;
to be proconsul: Acts xviii. 12[RG; cf. B. 169 (147)].
(Plut. comp. Dem. ec. Cic. c. 3; Hdian. 7, 5, 2.) *
4v0-itraros, -ov, 6, [see the preceding word], proconsul:
INCtSixdlinida Oy ls) xval.) 12D Mh Pri Wikis xix38) The
emperor Augustus divided the Roman provinces into
senatorial and imperial. The former were presided
over by proconsuls; the latter were administered by
legates of the emperor, sometimes called also proprae-
tors. (Polyb., Dion. H., Leian., Plut., and often in Dio
Cass.) [B.D.s.v. Proconsul; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Prov-
ince; esp. Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for 1878,
p- 289. sq. |*
év-inpr, [ptep. plur. duevres]; 2 aor. subj. dvd, ptep.
plur. dvévres; 1 aor. pass. dvéOnv; to send back; to relax;
contextually, to loosen: ri, Acts xvi. 26, (rods decpors,
Plut. Alex. M. 73); xxvii. 40. trop. ryv dmewWny, to give
up, omit, calm [2], Eph. vi. 9; (rhv €x@pav, Thuc. 3, 10;
ri épynv, Plut. Alex. M. 70). to leave, not to uphold, to
let sink : Heb. xiii. 5, (Deut. xxxi. 6).*
dy-(News, -w, gen. -@, (iAews, Attic for tAaos), without
mercy, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 [RG]. Found nowhere
else [exc. Hdian. epim. 257]. Cf. dvédeos.*
&vurros, -ov, (virrw to wash), unwashed: Mt. xv. 20;
Mk. vii. 2, and RLmrg.in 5. (Hom. Il. 6, 266, etc.)*
dy-tornpr: fut. dvacrnow; 1 aor. avéatnoa; 2 aor. av-
éorny, impv. dvdorn& and (Acts xii. 7; Eph. v. 14 and
L WH txt. in Acts ix. 11) dvdora (W. § 14, 1h.; [B.47
(40)]); Mid., pres. dvicrapa; fut. dvaornoopa; [fr.
Hom. down]; I. Transitively, in the pres. 1
aor. and fut. act., to cause to rise, raise up, (OPN);
a. prop. of one lying down: Acts ix. 41. b. to raise up
from death: Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54; Acts ii. 32; xiii. 34,
(so in Grk. writ.). ¢. to raise up, cause to be born:
47
"Avvas
orépua offspring (Gen. xxxviii. 8), Mt. xxii. 24, [ef. W.
33 (32)]; tov Xpuordy, Acts ii. 30 Rec. to cause to ap-
pear, bring forward, twa tw one for any one’s succor:
mpopntny, Acts iii. 22; vii. 37; rdv aida adrod, Acts iii.
26. II. Intransitively, in the pf. plpf. and 2
aor. act., and in the mid.; 1. to rise, stand up; used
a. of persons lying down (on a couch or bed): Mk. i.
35; v.42; Lk. viii. 55; xi. 7; Acts ix. 34, 40. of per-
sons lying on the ground: Mk. ix. 27; Lk. xvii. 19;
xxil. 46; Acts ix. 6. b. of persons seated: Lk. iv. 16
(avéorn avayvevar); Mt. xxvi.62; Mk. xiv. 60; Acts
xxiii. 9. ¢. of those who leave a place to go elsewhere:
Mt. ix. 9; Mk. ii 14; [x.50 RG]; Lk. iv. 38; xxiii. 1;
Acts ix. 39. Hence of those who prepare themselves
for a journey, (Germ. sich aufmachen): Mk. vii. 24; x.
1; Lk. i. 89; xv. 18, 20; Acts x. 20; xxii. 10. In the
same way the Hebr. DIP (esp. DP) is put before verbs
of going, departing, etc., according to the well
known oriental custom to omit nothing contributing to
the full pictorial delineation of an action or event; hence
formerly Dp) and dvacrds were sometimes incorrectly
said to be redundant; cf. W. 608 (565). dvaorqvar amd
to rise up from something, i. e. from what one has been
doing while either sitting or prostrate on the ground;
Lk. xxii. 45. d. of the dead; 2 aor., with é« vexpar
added: Mt. xvii. 9 RG WH mrg.; Mk. ix. 9 sq.; xii. 25;
Lk. xvi. 31; xxiv. 46; Jn. xx. 9; Eph. v. 14 (here fig.) ;
with ék vexpov omitted: Mk. viii. 31; xvi.9; Lk. ix. 8,
19, [22 L T Trmrg. WH mrg.]; xxiv. 7; Ro. xiv. 9 Ree.;
so (without ex vekp.) in the fut. mid. also: Mt. xii. 41;
[xvii. 23 L WH mrg.]; xx. 19 [RGLTrmrg. WH mrg.];
Mk. x. 34; Lk. xi. 32; xviii. 33; Jn. xi. 23 sq.; 1 Th. iv.
16. 2. to arise, appear, stand forth; of kings, proph-
ets, priests, leaders of insurgents: Acts v. 36 sq.; vii.
18. mid., Ro. xv.12; Heb. vii.11,15. of those about
to enter into conversation or dispute with any one, Lk.
x. 25; Acts vi. 9; or to undertake some business, Acts
v.6; or to attempt something against others, Acts v. 17.
Hence dvaornva emi twa to rise up against any one: Mk.
iii. 26, (OY Dip). [Syn. see éyeipw, fin. Comp.: ér-,
eE-aviornp. |
"Avva [WH “Avva, see their Intr. § 408], -as [on this
gen. cf. B. 17 (15); Ph. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 188], 7,
Anna, (7131) grace), the prop. name of a woman (so in
1S. i. 2 sqq.; ii. 1 Alex.; Tob. i. 9, 20, ete.), a prophetess,
in other respects unknown : Lk. ii. 36.*
”Avvas [WH “Avvas, see their Intr. § 408], -a (on this
gen. cf. W. § 8, 1 p. 60 (59)), 6, (in Joseph. ”Avaves; fr.
Hebr. 13m to be gracious), a high-priest of the Jews,
elevated to the pontificate by Quirinius the governor of
Syria c. A. D. 6 or 7; but afterwards, A. D. 15, deposed
by Valerius Gratus, the procurator of Judea, who put in
his place, first Ismael, son of Phabi, and shortly after
Eleazar, son of Annas. From the latter, the office
passed to Simon; from Simon c. A.D. 18 to Caiaphas,
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.); but Annas, even after he
had been put out of office, continued to have great influ-
ence: Jn. xviii. 138, 24. This explains the mistake [but
avonrtos
see reff. below (esp. to Schiirer), and cf. dpxvepevs, 2] by
which Luke, in his Gospel iii. 2 (ace. to the true read-
ing dpyepéws) and in Acts iv. 6, attributes to him the
pontificate long after he had been removed from office.
Cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Annas; Keim in Schenkel i. p.
135 sq.; Schiirer in the Zeitschr. fiir wissensch. Theol.
for 1876, p. 580 sq. [also in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23
iv.; and BB.DD. s. v.].*
d-vénros, -ov, (vontds fr. voew) ; 1. not understood,
unintelligible ; 2. generally active, not understanding,
unwise, foolish: Ro.i. 14 (opp. to copot) ; Lk. xxiv. 25;
Gal. iii. 1, 3; Tit. iii. 3. émcOvpiae avdnrot, 1 Tim. vi. 9.
(Prov. xvii. 28; Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 13; and often in Attic
writ.; [ef. Trench § Ixxv.; Ellic. on Gal. iii. 1; Schmidt
ch. 147 § 20].)*
dvoua, -as, 7, (dvous [i. e. dvoos without understand-
ing]), want of understanding, folly: 2 Tim. iii. 9. mad-
ness expressing itself in rage, Lk. vi. 11, [dv0 & dvoias
yen, TO prev paviay, rd 5€ dpabiay, Plato, Tim. p. 86 b.].
([Theogn. 453]; Hat. 6, 69; Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.)*
dv-olyw ; (dvd, oly i. e. olyyupe); fut. dvoifo; 1 aor.
#vor€a and (Jn. ix. 14 and as a var. elsewh. also) avéwéa
(an earlier form) [and nvéoéa WH in In. ix. 17, 32 (cf.
Gen. viii. 6), so Tr (when corrected), but without iota
subser.; see I, +]; 2 pf. avéwya (to be or stand open; cf.
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 250 sq.; [ Rutherford, New Phryn.
p- 247; Veitch s. v.]; the Attic writ. give this force
mostly to the pf. pass.); Pass., [pres. dvoiyoua: Mt. vii.
8LTrtxt. WHmrg.; Lk. xi. 10 Tr mrg. WH mrg.}; pf.
ptep. dvewypévos and nvewypévos, (jvorypevos Acts ix. 8
Taf.) ; 1 aor. dvedxOnv, nvedxOnv, and jvotyOny, inf. dve-
@xOjva (with double augm. Lk. iii. 21); 2 aor. nvotyny
(the usual later form); 1 fut. dvoryOnoopae (Lk. xi. 9
Tdf., 10 LT); 2 fut. dvovynoowar; (on these forms, in
the use of which both codd. and edd. differ much, cf.
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 121 sq.]; WH. App. pp. 161, 170; Betm.
Gram. p. 280 [21st Germ. ed.]; Bitm. N. T. Gr. 63 (55);
W. 72 (70) and 83 (79); [Veitch s. v.]); to open: a
door, a gate, Acts v.19; xii. 10,14; xvi. 26 sq.; Rev.
iv. 1; very often in Grk. writ. Metaph., to give en-
trance into the soul, Rev. iii. 20; to furnish opportunity
to do something, Acts xiv. 27; Col. iv. 3; pass., of an
opportunity offered, 1 Co. xvi. 9; 2 Co. ii. 12; Rev. iii.
8; cf. @vpa. simply dvolyew tii to open (the door [B.
145 (127)]) to one; prop.: Lk. xii. 36; Acts v. 23; xii.
16; Jn.x.3; ina proverbial saying, to grant something
asked for, Mt. vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq-; parabolically, to
give access to the blessings of God’s kingdom, Mt. xxv.
11; Lk. xiii. 25; Rev. iii. 7. rods O@noavpovs, Mt. ii. 11,
(Sir. xliii. 14; Eur. Ion 923); ra pynueta, Mt. xxvii. 52;
tapos, Ro. iii. 133; rd péap, Rev. ix. 2. heaven is said to
be opened and something to descend fr. it, Mt. iii. 16; Lk.
iii. 21; Jn. i. 51 (52); Acts x. 11; or something is said
to be seen there, Acts vii. 56 RG; Rev. xi. 19 (6 vads
+++ 6€YT@ ovpav@) ; [xv. 5]; xix. 11. dvoty. To ordua: of
a fish’s mouth, Mt. xvii. 27; Hebraistically, of those who
begin to speak [W. 33 (32), 608 (565) ], Mt. v.2; Acts
vill. 32, 35; x. 84; xviii. 14; foll. by eis Braodnpiar [-plas
48
AVOLWS
LT Tr WH], Rev. xiii. 6; ev mapaBodais, i.e. to make
use of (A. V. in), Mt. xiii. 35, (Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2;
év éreox Leian. Philops. § 33); mpds twa, 2 Co. vi. 11 (76
ordpa nav avéwye mpos tas our mouth is open towards
you, i. e. we speak freely to you, we keep nothing back) ;
the mouth of one is said to be opened who recovers the
power of speech, Lk. i. 64; of the earth yawning, Rev.
xii. 16. dv. dkods twos i. e. to restore the faculty of hear-
ing, Mk. vii. 35 (LT Tr WH). dv. rots dpOarpous [W.-
33 (32) ], to part the eyelids so as to see, Acts ix. 8, 40;
rwés, to restore one’s sight, Mt. ix. 30; xx. 33; Jn. ix.
10, 14, 17, 21, 26, 30, 32; x. 21; xi. 37; metaph., Acts
xxvi. 18 (to open the eyes of one’s mind). dvotyw thy
oppayida, to unseal, Rev. v. 9; vi. 1, 3,5, 7, 9,12; vill. 1;
dv. rd BiBXiov, ByBrapid.oy, to unroll, Lk. iv. 17 L TrWH;
Rev. v. 2-5; x. 2, 8; xx.12. [Comp.: dcavotyw.]*
dy-o.xo-Sopéw, -@: fut. dvorxodounow; to build again,
(Vulg. reaedifico): Acts xv.16. ({Thuc. 1, 89,3]; Diod.
11, 39; Plut. Them. 19; Cam. 31; Hdian. 8, 2, 12 [5
ed. Bekk.].)*
Gvorkts, -ews, 7, (dvolyw, q. V-), an opening: ev avoige
Tov otdpatds pov as often as I open my mouth to speak,
Eph. vi. 19. (Thue. 4, 68, 4; rév muddy, id. 4, 67, 3;
xetov, Plut. mor. [symp. l. ix. quaest. 2, 3] p. 738 c.)*
dvopia, -as, 7, (avopos) ; 1. prop. the condition of
one without law, — either because ignorant of it, or because
violating it. 2. contempt and violation of law, iniquity,
wickedness: Mt. xxiii. 28; xxiv. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3 (T Trtxt.
WH txt. ; ef. duapria, 1 p. 30 sq.), 7; Tit. ii. 14; 1 Jn. iii.
4. opp. to 7 dicacoovyn, 2 Co. vi. 14; Heb. i. 9 [not Tdf.],
(Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24 avouia paddov fp Sixacocvyn xpapevor) ;
and to 7 dicaroovyn and 6 dyacpéds, Ro. vi. 19 (79 avopia
eis THY avoptay to iniquity — personified — in order to work
iniquity) ; trovety THv avopiay to do iniquity, act wickedly,
Mt. xiii. 41; 1 Jn. iii. 4; in the same sense, epydaeoOat
my av. Mt. vii. 23; plur. ai avoyiac manifestations of dis-
regard for law, iniquities, evil deeds: Ro. iv. 7 (Ps. xxxi.
(xxi); Hebs vill. 12. [RG 5ix.7ay dine Grk.
writ. fr. [Hdt. 1, 96] Thue. down; often in Sept.) [Syn.
ef. Trench § lxvi.; Tittm.i.48; Ellic. on Tit. ii. 14.]*
&-vopos, -ov, (vdpos) 1. destitute of (the Mosaic)
law: used of Gentiles, 1 Co. ix. 21, (without any sugges-
tion of ‘iniquity’; just asin Add. to Esth. iv. 42, where
Gvopot arepitpnros and adAédrpeoe are used together). 2.
departing from the law, a violator of the law, lawless,
wicked; (Vulg. iniquus; [also injustus]): Mk. xv. 28 [R
LTrbr.]; Lk. xxii. 37; Acts ii. 23, (so in Grk. writ.) ;
opp. to 6 dixavos, 1 Tim.i.9; 6 dvopos (kar é€oynv), he in
whom all iniquity has as it were fixed its abode, 2 Th.
ii. 8; dv. €pyov an unlawful deed, 2 Pet. ii. 8; free from
law, not subject to law, [Vulg. sine lege]: pr dv dvopos
Geod [B. 169 (147)] (Rec. eG), 1 Co. ix. 21. (Very
often in Sept.) [Sy¥N. see dvopia, fin.]*
dvépas, adv., without the law (see dvopos, 1), without a
knowledge of the law: dv. dvapraveyw to sin in ignorance
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 12; dméAAvoGat to perish, but
not by sentence of the Mosaic law, ibid. (dvduws Chr to
live ignorant of law and discipline, Isoc. panegyr. c. 10
avopbow
§ 39; dvdpws drdhAvobat to be slain contrary to law, as
in wars, seditions, etc., ibid. c. 44 § 168. In Grk. writ.
generally unjustly, wickedly, as 2 Mace. viii. 17.)*
Gy-op0dw, -d: fut. dvopOdcw; 1 aor. avapOeca; 1 aor.
pass. avep6oOnv (Lk. xiii. 13; without the aug. avopba6nv
LTTr; cf.[ WH. App. p. 161]; B. 34 (30); [W. 73]
(70)); 1. to set up, make erect: a crooked person, Lk.
xii. 13 (she was made straight, stood erect) ; drooping
hands and relaxed knees (to raise them up by restoring
their strength), Heb. xii. 12. 2. to rear again, build
anew: oxnmy, Acts xv. 16 (Hdt. 1,19 rév vndv... rdv
éverpnoav; 8,140; Xen. Hell. 4, 8,12, ete.; in various
senses in Sept.).*
éy-dovos, -ov, (a priv. and dcvos, q. v-), unholy, impious,
wicked: 1 Tim. i. 9; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (In Grk. writ. from
[Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down.) *
dyvox 4, -7s, 7, (compare dvéxouai twos, s. Vv. dvéxo p. 45),
toleration, forbearance; in this sense only in Ro. ii. 4;
iii. 26 (25). (In Grk. writ.a holding back, delaying,
fr. dvéxw to hold back, hinder.) [Cf. Trench § liii.]*
dvr-ayevigonat; to struggle, fight; mpds rt, against a
thing, Heb. xii. 4 [ef. W. § 52, 4,3]. (Xen., Plat., Dem.,
etc.)*
dyt-dAaypa, -ros, Td, (dvri in place of, in turn, and
@aypa see ddddoow), that which is given in place of
another thing by way of exchange ; what is given either in
order to keep or to acquire anything: Mt. xvi. 26; Mk.
viii. 37, where the sense is, ‘nothing equals in value the
soul’s salvation.’ Christ transfers a proverbial expres-
sion respecting the supreme value of the natural life
(Hom. Il. 9, 401 od yap euoi Wuyns avragiov) to the life
eternal. (Ruthiv.7; Jer. xv.13; Sir. vi. 15, ete.; Eur.
Or. 1157; Joseph. b. j. 1, 18, 3.)*
Gyt-ava-tAnpdw, -@; (avri and dvamAnpda, q. V-); to fill
up in turn: Col. i. 24 (the meaning is, ‘what is wanting
of the afflictions of Christ to be borne by me, that I
supply in order to repay the benefits which Christ con-
ferred on me by filling up the measure of the afflictions
laid upon him’); [Mey., Ellic., etc., explain the word
(with Wetst.) by ‘dvti torepnuaros succedit dvamAnpopa’;
but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc., who also quotes the pas-
sages where the word occurs]. (Dem. p. 182, 22; Dio
Cass. 44,48; Apollon. Dyse. de constr. orat. i. pp. 14,
1 (ef. Bttm. ad loc.]; 114, 8; 258, 3; 337, 4.)*
Gyt-arro-SiSwpi: fut. avramodwcw; 2 aor. inf. dvrarodov-
vat; 1 fut. pass. dvtarod0Oncopa; (avri for something
received, in return, dodidwpe to give back); to repay,
requite ; a. in a good sense: Lk. xiv. 14; Ro. xi. 35;
evyapioriay tivi, 1 Th. iii. 9. b. in a bad sense, of
penalty and vengeance ; absol.: Ro. xii. 19; Heb. x.
30, (Deut. xxxii. 35); OrAdpw rwi, 2 Th. i. 6. (Very
often in the Sept. and Apocr., in both senses; in Grk.
writ. fr. [Hdt.] Thuc. down.)*
dyvt-amr6-Sopa, -ros, 7d, (see avrarodiSwpe), the thing paid
back, requital; a. in a good sense: Lk. xiv.12. _ b.
in a bad sense: Ro. xi.9. (In Sept. i. q. 5103, Judg. ix.
16 [ Alex.], ete.; the Greeks say dvrarddoaxs [cf. W. 25].)*
dvr-aré-Socts, -ews, 7, recompense: Col. ili. 24.
49
Ur!
avTt
Sept. i. q. 533, Is. lix. 18, etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thue.
down.)*
dyt-atro-kplvopar; 1 aor. pass. dvramexpiény [see dro-
kpiva, ii.]; to contradict in reply, to answer by contradict
ing, reply against: rwi mpds tt, Lk. xiv. 6; (Sept. Judg.
v.29 [Alex.]; Job xvi. 8; xxxii. 12; Aesop. fab. 172
ed. de Furia, [p. 353 ed. Coray]). Hence i. q. to alter-
cate, dispute: with dat. of pers. Ro. ix. 20. (In a mathe-
matical sense, to correspond to each other or be parallel,
in Nicomach. arithm. 1, 8, 11 p. 77 a. [p. 17 ed. Hoche].)
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iii. p. 17.*
Gvt-eirrov, a 2 aor. used instead of the verb ayrideyety,
to speak against, gainsay; [fr. Aeschyl. down]: Lk. xxi.
15; Acts iv.14. Cf. eérov.*
avt-éxw: Mid., [pres. dvréyouat]; fut. dvOéEopar; to
hold before or against, hold back, withstand, endure; in
the N. T. only in Mid. to keep one’s self directly opposite
to any one, hold to him firmly, cleave to, paying heed to
him: tivds, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; rév dobevady, to aid
them, care for them, 1 Th. v. 14; rod Adyou, to hold to,
hold it fast, Tit.i.9. (Deut. xxxii. 41; Is. lvi. 4, 6; Prov.
iii. 18, etc., and often in Grk. writ.) Cf. Kihner
§ 520 b. [2te Aufl. § 416, 2; cf. Jelf § 536]; W. 202 (190);
[B. 161 (140) ].*
dvrt [before év, av@; elsewhere neglecting elision] a
preposition foll. by the gen. (answering to the Lat. ante
and the Germ. prefixes ant-, ent-), in the use of which
the N. T. writ. coincide with the Greek (W. 364 (341)) ;
1. prop. it seems to have signified over against, opposite
to, before, in a local sense (Bttm. Gram. p. 412; [ef. Cur-
tius § 204]). Hence 2. indicating exchange, suc-
cession, for, instead of, in place of (something). a. univ.
instead of: avri ixOvos dduv, Lk. xi. 11; avril mepiBodaiov
to serve as a covering, 1 Co. xi. 153; dvti rod Aeyew, Jas.
iv. 15, (dvri rod with inf. often in Grk. writ. [W. 329
(309); B. 263 (226)]). b. of that for which any thing
is given, received, endured: Mt. v. 38; xvii. 27 (to
release me and thyself from obligation) ; Heb. xii. 2 (to
obtain the joy; ef. Bleek, Liinemann, or Delitzsch ad
loc.) ; of the price of sale (or purchase): Heb. xii. 16;
Nbrpov avri woAdG@y, Mt. xx. 28; Mk.x.45. Then co.
of recompense: xakdy avti Kaxod amodiddvar, Ro. xii. 17;
1 Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9, (Sap. xi. 16 (15)). dv dy
equiv. to dyti rovTwy, ore for that, because: Lk. i. 20; xix.
44; Acts xii. 23; 2 Th. ii. 10, (also in prof. auth. [exx.
in Wetst. on Luke i. 20]; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 710; [W.
364 (342), cf. 162 (153); B. 105 (92)]; Hebr. wx Nn,
Deut. xxi. 14; 2K.xxii.17). a. of the cause: av6 dv
wherefore, Lk. xii. 3; dyti rovrov for this cause, Eph. v.
81. e. of succession to the place of another: ’Apy.
Baowrever dvri ‘Hpodov in place of Herod, Mt. ii. 22, (1 K.
xi. 44; Hdt.1, 108; Xen. an. 1,1, 4). xdpu dvri xadpr-
ros grace in the place of grace, grace succeeding grace
perpetually, i. e. the richest abundance of grace, Jn. i.
16, (Theogn. vs. 344 avt’ anéyv dvias [yet cf. the context
vs. 342 (vss. 780 and 778 ed. Welcker); more appro-
priate are the reff. to Philo, i. 254 ed. Mang. (de poster.
Caini § 43, vol. ii. 39 ed. Richter), and Chrys. de sacer-
avTLBAXXW
dot. I. vi. c. 13 § 622]). 3. As a prefix, it denotes
a. opposite, over against: dvrurépay, avrimapepxecOa. b.
the mutual efficiency of two: avriBddreu, aVTLKGAELY,
avridowopev. Cc. requital: dvryucbia, avrarrodibap. a.
hostile opposition: dvriypicros. e. official substitution,
instead of: avOvmaros.*
dyti-BdAAw; fo throw in turn, (prop. Thue. 7, 25 ; Plut.
Nic. 25): Adbyous mpds ddAndous to exchange words with
one another, Lk. xxiv. 17, [ef. 2 Mace. xi. 13].*
dyri-Sia-riOnpe: [pres. mid. dyrdvariGewar]; in mid. to
place one’s self in opposition, to oppose: of heretics, 2 Tim.
ii. 25, cf. De Wette [or Holtzm.] ad loc. ; (several times
in eccl. writ.; in the act. to dispose in turn, to take in hand
in turn: tivd, Diod. exc. p. 602 [vol. v. p. 105, 24 ed.
Dind.; absol. to retaliate, Philo de spec. legg. § 15; de
concupise. § 4]).*
dyr(SuKkos, -ov, (Sin); as subst. 6 dvridicos a. an op-
ponent in a suit at law: Mt. v. 25; Lk. xii. 58; xviii. 3,
(Xen., Plat., often in the Attic orators). b. univ. an
adversary, enemy, (Aeschyl. Ag. 41; Sir. xxxiii. 9; 1S.
ii. 10; Is. xli. 11, etc.): 1 Pet. v. 8 (unless we prefer to
regard the devil as here called avridicos because he ac-
cuses men before God).*
dyti-leots, [(riOnuc), fr. Plato down],-ews, 7; a. op-
position. b. that which is opposed: 1 Tim. vi. 20 (av-
ribéces THS Wevdav. yvoo. the inventions of false knowl-
edge, either mutually oppugnant, or opposed to true
Christian doctrine).*
ayri-Kab-iornpe : 2 aor. avtixaréotny; [fr. Hdt. down];
in the trans. tenses 1. to put in place of another.
2. to place in opposition, (to dispose troops, set an army
in line of battle); in the intrans. tenses, to stand against,
resist: Heb. xii. 4, (Thue. 1, 62. 71).*
Gyti-Kadéw, -@: 1 aor. avtexddeoa; to invite in turn:
tid, Lk. xiv. 12. [Xen. conviv. 1, 15.]*
avri-Kerpa ; 1. to be set over against, lie opposite to,
in a local sense, ([Hippocr. de aére p. 282 Foes. (191
Chart.) ; Strab. 7, 7,5]; Hdian. 6, 2, 4 (2 Bekk.); 3,15,
17 (8 Bekk.); [cf. Aristot. de caelo 1, 8 p. 277°, 23]). 2.
to oppose, be adverse to, withstand: twi, Lk. xiii. 17; xxi.
15; Gal. v.17; 1Tim.i.10. simply (6) dvrixefyevos, an
adversary, [Tittmann ii. 9]: 1 Co. xvi. 9; Phil. i. 28; 2 Th.
ii. 4; 1 Tim. v.14. (Dio Cass. 39, 8. Ex. xxiii. 22; 2
Mace. x. 26, ete.; [see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
avrikpy (I TWH dvrixpus [Chandler § 881; Treg.
avtixpus. Cf. Lob. Path. Elementa ii. 283]; ad Phryn. p.
444; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 500 sq.]; Bttm. Ausf.
Spr ii. 366), adv. of place, over against, opposite: with
gen., Acts xx. 15. (Often in Grk. writ.; Philo de vict.
off. §3; de vit. Moys. iii. §7; in Flacc. § 10.)*
avrt-AopBdve: Mid., [pres. dvriAapBdvoua]; 2 aor.
dvrehaBouny; to take in turn or in return, to receive one
thing for another given, to receive instead of; in mid.,
freq. in Attic prose writ., 1. to lay hold of, hold fast
to, anything: twvds. 2. to take a person or thing in
order as it were to be held, to take to, embrace; with a
gen. of the pers., to help, succor: Lk. i. 54; Acts xx. 35,
(Diod. 11,13; Dio Cass. 40, 27; 46,45; often in Sept.).
50
"Apt yeva
with a gen. of the thing, to be a partaker, partake of:
ris evepyecias of the benefit of the services rendered by
the slaves, 1 Tim. vi. 2; cf. De Wette ad loc. (unre éo6i-
wv mredveoy idovav avrAnWerat, Porphyr. de abstin. 1,
46; [cf. Euseb. h. e. 4, 15, 37 and exx. in Field, Otium
Norv. pars. iii. ad l.c.]) [Comp.: ovwavri-AapBadvopat. | *
dyti-Adyw ; [impf. dvréAeyor ] ; to speak against, gainsay,
contradict; absol.: Acts xiii. 45 [L Tr WH om.]; xxviii.
19; Tit.i.9. rut, Acts xiii. 45. foll. by wn and ace. with
inf.: Lk. xx. 27 [Lmrg. Tr WH déyorres], (as in Grk.
writ.; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.; [W. § 65, 2 B.;
B. 355 (805) ]). to oppose one’s self to one, decline to obey
him, declare one’s self against him, refuse to have anything
to do with him, [ef. W. 23 (22)]: tui, Jn. xix. 12, (Leian.
dial. inferor. 30, 3); absol., Ro. x. 21 [cf. Meyer]; Tit.
ii. 9, (Achill. Tat. 5, 27). Pass. avridéyopat I am dis-
puted, assent or compliance is refused me, (W. § 39, 1):
Lk. ii. 34; Acts xxviii. 22.*
dvti-Anyts [LT Tr WH -Anpyis; see M, J, -ews, 7, (avti-
AapBavopat), in prof. auth. mutual acceptance (Thue. 1,
120), a laying hold of, apprehension, perception, objection
of a disputant, ete. In bibl. speech aid, help, (Ps. xxi.
20 [ef. vs. 1]; 1 Esdr. viii. 27; Sir. xi. 12; li. 7; 2 Mace.
xv. 7, etc.); plur., 1 Co. xii. 28, the ministrations of
the deacons, who have care of the poor and the sick.*
avtidoyla,-as, 7, (avtiNoyos, and this fr. avriAéyw), [fr.
Hdt. down]; 1. gainsaying, contradiction: Heb. vii. 7;
with the added notion of strife, Heb. vi. 16, (Ex. xviii.
16; Deut. xix.17,ete.). 2. opposition in act, [this sense
is disputed by some, e. g. Liin. on Heb. as below, Mey.
on Ro. x. 21 (see dvriAéyw); contra ef. Fritzsche on Ro.
l.e.]: Heb. xii. 3; rebellion, Jude 11, (Prov. xvii. 11).*
avtt-Aodop€w -d : [impf. dvreAorddpovr | ; to revile in turn,
to retort railing: 1 Pet. ii. 23. (Leian. conviv. 40; Plut.
Anton. 42; [de inimic. util. § 5].)*
avri-Autpoy, -ov, 76, what is given in exchange for another
as the price of his redemption, ransom: 1'Tim. ii. 6. (An
uncert. translator in Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9; Orph. lith. 587;
fefmVWen2oll))s
dyti-petpéw, -d: fut. pass. dvtyserpnOnoopar; to measure
back, measure in return: Mt. vii. 2 Rec.; Lk. vi. 38 (L.
mrg. WH mrg. perpéw], (in a proverbial phrase, i. q. to
repay; Leian. amor. ec. 19).*
dyTiptoOla, -as, 7, (avtivicOos remunerating) a re-
ward given in compensation, requital, recompense; a. in
a good sense: 2 Co. vi. 13 (tiv adray avtimtobiay mrariv-
Onre kai tpets, a concise expression for Be ye also en-
larged i. e. enlarge your hearts, just as I have done (vs.
11), that so ye may recompense me, —for 76 adré, 6 éorw
dvriyucdia; cf. W. 530 (493), and § 66, 1 b.; [B. 190
(164); 396 (339)]). b. in a bad sense: Ro. i. 27.
(Found besides only in Theoph. Ant.; Clem. Al.; [Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 3.5; 9, 7; 11, 6], and other Fathers. )*
"Avridxeta, -as, 7, Antioch, the name (derived fr. various
monarchs) of several Asiatic cities, two of which are men-
tioned in the N. T.; 1. The most celebrated of all,
and the capital of Syria, was situated on the river Oron-
tes, founded by Seleucus [I. sometimes (cf. Suidas s. v.
"Avtioyevs
ZéAevkos, col. 3277 b. ed. Gaisf.) called] Nicanor [else-
where (cf. id. col. 2137 b. s. v. KoNacoaevs) son of Ni-
canor; but commonly Nicator (cf. Appian de rebus
Syr. § 57; Spanh. de numis. diss. vii. § 3, vol. i. p. 413)],
and named in honor of his father Antiochus. Many
‘EdAnuorai, Greek-Jews, lived in it; and there those
who professed the name of Christ were first called
Christians : Acts xi. 19 sqq.; xiii. 1; xiv. 265 xv. 22 sqq.;
Gal. ii. 11; cf. Reuss in Schenkel i. 141 sq.; [BB. DD.
s.v.; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 121-126; also the
latter in the Dict. of Geogr. s. v.; Renan, Les Apotres,
chiexiit)). 2. A city of Phrygia, but called in Acts
xlil. 14 Antioch of Pisidia [or ace. to the crit. texts the
Pisidian Antioch (see Wcidios) | because it was on the
confines of Pisidia, (more exactly 4 mpos Tuctdia, Strabo
Zon WES) A CtSmsive LO) 21m 2a fim. ii. ls.) his
was founded also by Seleucus Nicator, [cf. BB. DD. s. v.;
Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 168 sqq.].*
*Avrvoxevs, -ews, 6, an Antiochian, a native of Antioch:
ACtS(VisOe*
GvrTi-srap-épxopar: 2 aor. dytimapnddov; to pass by op-
posite to, [A. V. to pass by on the other side]: Lk. x. 31 sq.
(where the meaning is, ‘he passed by on the side oppo-
site to the wounded man, showing no compassion for
him’). (Anthol. Pal. 12, 8; to come to one’s assistance
against a thing, Sap. xvi.10. Found besides in eccl. and
Byzant. writ.) *
*Avritas [Tdf. Avreimas, see s. v. et, e],-a (cf. W. § 8, 1;
[B. 20 (18)]), 6, Antipas (contr. fr. Avrimatpos W. 1038
(97)), a Christian of Pergamum who suffered martyrdom,
otherwise unknown: Rev. ii. 13. On the absurd inter-
pretations of this name, cf. Diisterd. [Alf., Lee, al.] ad
loc. Fr. Gérres in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1878, p. 257 sqq., endeavors to discredit the opinion
that he was martyred, but by insufficient arguments.*
*Avrturratpls, -idos, 7, Antipatris, a city situated between
Joppa and Cesarea, in a very fertile region, not far
from the coast ; formerly called XaBap(a8a [ al. Kapapoa-
Ba (or -cdBa) | (Joseph. antt. 13, 15, 1), and afterwards
rebuilt by Herod the Great and named Antipatris in
honor of his father Antipater (Joseph. b. j. 1, 21, 9): Acts
xxiii. 31. Cf. Robinson, Researches ete. iii. 45 sq. ; Later
Researches, iii. 138 sq., [also Bib. Sacr. for 1843 pp. 478-
498; and for 1853 p. 528 sq. ].*
dvti-répay, or (acc. to the later forms fr. Polyb. down)
dvrimepa [T WH], avrimepa [L Tr; cf. B. 321; Lob.
Path. Elem. ii. 206; Chandler § 867], adv. of place, over
against, on the opposite shore, on the other side, with a gen. :
LK. viii. 26.*
dytitrinrw; a. to fall upon, run against, [fr. Aristot.
down]; b. to be adverse, oppose, strive against: rw,
Acts vii. 51. (Ex. xxvi.5; xxxvi.12ed. Compl.; Num.
xxvii. 14; often in Polyb., Plut.)*
dyTi-oTpaTevoua ; 1. to make a military expedition,
or take the field, against any one: Xen. Cyr. 8, 8, 26.
2. to oppose, war against: wi, Ro. vii. 23. (Aristaenet.
2, 1, 13.)*
dyti-tdoow or -rrw: [pres. mid. dytiraccopar] ; to range
51
>
avTNew
in baitle against; mid. to oppose one’s self, resist: rw,
Ro. xiii. 2; Jas.iv.6; v.63 1 Pet. v.5; cf. Prov. iii. 34.
absol., Acts xviii. 6. (Used by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
down.) *
avri-rumos, -ov, (tUmtw), in Grk. writ. Le proOp-aias
actively, repelling a blow, striking back, echoing, reflecting
light; resisting, rough, hard. b. passively, struck back,
repelled. 2. metaph. rough, harsh, obstinate, hostile.
In the N. T. language dvrirymov as a subst. means up
a thing formed after some pattern (rimos [q. v- 4 a.]),
(Germ. Abbild): Heb. ix. 24 [R. V. like in pattern].
2. a thing resembling another, its counterpart; something
in the Messianic times which answers to the type (see
tumos, 4 y.) prefiguring it in the O. T. (Germ. Gegenbild,
Eng. antitype), as baptism corresponds to the deluge :
1 Pet. iii. 21 [R. V. txt. after a true likeness ].*
dyti-xpirtos, -ov, 6, (avTi against and Xpuords, like
avtideos opposing God, in Philo de somn. 1. ii. § 27, ete.,
Justin, quaest. et resp. p. 463 c. and other Fathers; [see
Soph. Lex. s.v., ef. Trench § xxx.]), the adversary of the
Messiah, a most pestilent being, to appear just before the
Messiah’s advent, concerning whom the Jews had con-
ceived diverse opinions, derived partly fr. Dan. xi. 36
sqq-; vil. 25; viii. 25, partly fr. Ezek. xxxviii. xxxix.
Cf. Hisenmenger, Entdecktes Judenthum, ii. 704 sqq. ;
Gesenius in Ersch and Gruber’s Encyel. iv. 292 sqq.
s.v. Antichrist ; Bohmer, Die Lehre v. Antichrist nach
Schneckenburger, in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. vol.
iv. p. 405 sqq. The name 6 advrtixpioros was formed
perhaps by John, the only writer in the N. T. who uses
it, [five times]; he employs it of the corrupt power and
influence hostile to Christian interests, especially that
which is at work in false teachers who have come from the
bosom of the church and are engaged in disseminating
error: 1 Jn. ii. 18 (where the meaning is, ‘what ye have
heard concerning Antichrist, as about to make his ap-
pearance just before the return of Christ, is now fulfilled
in the many false teachers, most worthy to be called
antichrists ,’ [on the om. of the art. ef. B. 89 (78) ]); 1 Jn.
iv. 3; and of the false teachers themselves, 1 Jn. ii. 22; 2
Jn.7. In Paul and the Rev. the idea but not thename
of Antichrist is found; yet the conception differs from
that of John. For Paul teaches that Antichrist will be an
individual man [cf. B. D. as below], of the very worst
character (rov dvOp. rns dyaptias; see dpapria, 1), in-
stigated by the devil to try to palm himself off as God:
2 Th. ii. 3-10. The author of the Apocalypse discovers
the power of Antichrist in the sway of imperial Rome,
and his person in the Emperor Nero, soon to return
from the dead: Rev. xiii. and xvii. (Often in eccl.
writ.) [See B. D.s.v. (Am. ed. for additional reff.), also
B. D. s. v. Thess. 2d Ep. to the; Kdhler in Herzog ed.
2, i. 446 sq.; Westcott, Epp. of St. John, pp. 68, 89.]*
dythéw, -3 1 aor. fytAnoa; pt. jvrAnka; (fr. 6 dvrdos,
or 76 dvrAo», bilge-water, [or rather, the place in the hold
where it settles, Eustath. com. in Hom. 1728, 58 6 romos
év0a Ddop ouppéer, 76 Te Gvwbev kai ex Tov dppowdy]); — a
prop. to draw out a ship’s bilge-water, to bale or pump
avTAnpa
out. b. univ. to draw water: Jn. ii. 8; iv. 15; dap,
Jn. ii. 9; iv. 7. (Gen. xxiv. 13, 20; Ex. ii. 16, 19; Is.
xii. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
dvtAnpa, -ros, 76; a. prop. what is drawn, (Dioscor. 4,
64). b. the act of drawing water, (Plut. mor. [de solert.
an. 21, 1] p. 974. [but this example belongs rather under
c.]). ¢. a thing to draw with [ef. W. 93 (89)], bucket
and rope let down into a well: Jn. iv. 11.*
GytopOadpew, -; (dvrépbadpos looking in the eye);
1. prop. to look against or straight at. 2. metaph. to
bear up against, withstand : r@ dvéu@, of a ship, (cf. our ”
‘look the wind in the eye,’ ‘face’ (R. V.) the wind]: Acts
xxvii.15. (Sap. xii. 14; often in Polyb.; in eccl. writ.)*
&vvSpos, -ov, (a priv. and vdwp), without water: mryai,
2 Pet. ii. 17; rémou, desert places, Mt. xii. 43; Lk. xi. 24,
(4 dvvSpos the desert, Is. xliii. 19; Hat. 3, 4, ete. ; in Sept.
often yi dvvdpos), [desert places were believed to be the
haunts of demons; see Is. xiii. 21; xxxiv. 14 (in Sept.),
and Gesen. or Alex. on the former pass.; cf. further,
Bar. iv. 35; Tob. viii. 3; 4 Mace. xviii. 8; (Enoch x. 4) ;
Rev. xviii. 2; cf. d. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. Gesell.
xxi. 609]; veeAar, waterless clouds (Verg. georg. 3, 197
sq. arida nubila), which promise rain but yield none,
Jude 12. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
dy-uTrdKptTos, -ov, (a priv. and troxpivopa), unfeigned,
undisguised: Ro. xii. 9; 2 Co. vi. 6; 1 Tim. i.5; 2 Tim.
i. 5; 1 Pet. i. 22; Jas. iii. 17. (Sap. v.19; xviii. 16. Not
found in prof. auth., except the adv. dvumoxpirws in
Antonin. 8, 5.)*
dyvuToTaKTos, -ov, (a priv. and troracaa) ; 1. [pas-
sively] not made subject, unsubjected : Heb. ii. 8, [ Artem.
oneir. 2, 30]. 2. [actively] that cannot be subjected
to control, disobedient, unruly, refractory: 1 Tim.i.9 ; Tit.
i. 6,10, ([Epict. 2,10,1; 4, 1, 161; Philo, quis rer. div.
her. §1]; dcpynows avum. a narrative which the reader
cannot classify, i. e. confused, Polyb. 3, 36, 4; 3, 38,4; 5,
21, 4).*
advo, adv., [fr. Hom. down]; a. above, in a higher
place, (opp. to kdrw) : Acts ii. 19; with the article, 6, 4,
76 dvw: Gal. iv. 26 (4 dve ‘Iepovoadnp the upper i. e. the
heavenly Jerusalem) ; Phil. iii. 14 (4 dvw kAjors the call-
ing made in heaven, equiv. to émovpdvos, Heb. iii. 1);
the neut. plur. ra advo as subst., heavenly things, Col. iii.
1 sq.; €k téy dvw from heaven, Jn. viii. 23. fas dv, In.
ii. 7 (up to the brim). b. upwards, up, on high: In. xi.
41 (aipw) ; Heb. xii. 15 (dvw pier).*
dvwyatov and dydyeov, see under avdyatov.
dvabev, (dvw),adv.; a. from above, Jrom a higher place:
and advobev (W. §50,7N. 1), Mt. xxvii. 51 [Tdf. om.
amd]; Mk. xv. 38; ek rév dvodev from the upper part,
from the top, Jn. xix. 23. Often (also in Grk. writ.)
used of things which come from heaven, or from God as
dwelling in heaven: Jn. iii. 31; xix.11; Jas. 1.173 iii.
15,17. b. from the first: Lk. i. 3; then, from the begin-
ning on, from the very first: Acts xxvi.5. Hence C3
anew, over again, indicating repetition, (a use some-
what rare, but wrongly denied by many [Mey. among
them ; cf. his comm. on Jn. and Gal. as below]) : Jn. iii. 3,
52
aktos
7 dv. yevvnOjvat, where others explain it from above, i. e.
from heaven. But, acc. to this explanation, Nicodemus
ought to have wondered how it was possible for any one
to be born from heaven; but this he did not say; [ef.
Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 63]. Of the repetition of phys-
ical birth, we read in Artem. oneir. 1, 13 (14) p. 18
[i. p. 26 ed. Reiff] (dvdpt) ere r@ Exovre eyxvov yuvaixa
onpaiver maida aire yerrnoec Oat Gpovov kata mayta. ovTw
yap dvabev airs bd£ere yevvacOa; cf. Joseph. antt. 1, 18,
3 dirlav tvobev roeicOa, where a little before stands
mporépa dria; add, Martyr. Polyc. 1, 1; [also Socrates
in Stob. flor. exxiv. 41, iv. 135 ed. Meineke (iii. 438 ed.
Gaisf.); Harpocration, Lex. s. vv. dvadicdoacba, avabe-
oat, avarrodi(opeva, avacvvtrakis ; Canon. apost. 46 (al. 39,
Coteler. patr. apost. opp. i. 444); Pseudo-Basil, de bapt.
1, 2, 7 (iii. 1537) ; Origen in Joann. t. xx. c. 12 (opp. iv.
322 c.Dela Rue). See Abbot, Authorship of the Fourth
Gospel, etc. (Boston 1880) p. 34 sq.]. maAw avwbev (on
this combination of synonymous words cf. Kuhner § 534,
1; (Jelf § 777, 1]; Grimm on Sap. xix. 5 (6)): Gal. iv. 9
(again, since ye were in bondage once before).*
dvwrepikds, -7, -dv, (dvm@tepos), Upper: Ta dvwrepiKa pépn,
Acts xix. 1 (i.e. the part of Asia Minor more remote
from the Mediterranean, farther east). (The word is
used by [Hippocr. and] Galen.)*
dvdrepos, -<pa, -epov, (compar. fr. dva, cf. xar@repos,
see W. §11, 2 c.; [B. 28 (24 sq.)]), higher. The
neut. dvwrepov as adv., higher; a. of motion, to a higher
place, (up higher): Lk. xiv.10. _b. of rest, in a higher
place, above i.e. in the immediately preceding part of
the passage quoted, Heb. x. 8. Similarly Polyb. 3, 1,1
tpitn avatepov BiBrm. (In Lev. xi. 21, with gen.)*
dv-whedhs, -és, (a priv. and ddedos) ; fr. Aeschyl. down ;
unprofitable, useless: Tit. iii. 9. Neut. as subst. in Heb.
vil. 18 (61a 76 atrjs avadedés on account of its unprofita-
bleness).*
délvn, -ns, 7, ([perh. fr.] dyrups, fut. ao, to break), an
axe: Lk. iii. 9; Mt.iii.10. (As old as Hom. and Hadt.)*
d£tos, -a, -ov, (fr. dy, do; therefore prop. drawing
down the scale ; hence) a. weighing, having weight;
with a gen. having the weight of (weighing as much as)
another thing, of like value, worth as much: Bods aé.os,
Hom. Il. 23, 885; with gen. of price [W. 206 (194) ],
as a&. dé€ka pv@y, common in Attic writ.; wav tiptoy ovK
a&wov aitns (codias) é€art, Prov. iii. 15; viii. 11; ovk
gore otaOuos mas détos éyxpatovs Wuy7s, Sir. xxvi. 15;
ovk ata mpds tr. dd€ay are of no weight in comparison
with the glory, i.e. are not to be put on an equality
with the glory, Ro. viii. 18; ef. Fritzsche ad loc. and
W. 405 (878); [B. 540 (292)]. b. befitting, congru-
ous, corresponding, twés, to a thing: tis peravoias, Mt.
iii. 8; Lk. iii. 8; Acts xxvi. 20; déa dv émpaéapev, Lk.
xxiii. 41. a&udv éore it is befitting: a. it is meet, 2 Th.
i. 3 (4 Mace. xvii. 8); B. a is worth the while, foll. by
tov with ace. and inf., 1 Co. xvi. 4;— (in both senses very
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hdt. down, and often
with éori omitted). c. of one who has merited any-
thing, worthy, — both in a good reference and a bad;
akidw
5
Q
3)
atradXNaoow
a. in a good sense; with a gen. of the thing: Mt. x. | i. 2sq.; by teaching and commanding, rivi r1, Mt. viii.
10; Lk. vii. 4; [x. 7]; Acts xiii. 46; 1 Tim.i. 15; iv. 9;
v. 18; vi.1. foll. by the aor. inf.: Lk. xv.19, 21; Acts
xill. 25; Rev. iv. 11; v. 2, 4,9, 12; foll. by Ha: Jn. i. 27
(wa vow, a construction somewhat rare; cf. Dem. pro
cor. p. 279, 9 dcodv, iva BonOnon [ (dubious) ; see s. v. iva,
II. 2 init. and c.]) ; foll. by és with a finite verb (like Lat.
dignus, qui): Lk. vii. 4 [B. 229 (198)]. It stands alone,
but so that the context makes it plain of what one is
said to be worthy: Mt. x. 11 (to lodge with); Mt. x. 13
(se. rhs eipnyns) ; Mt. xxii. 8 (sc. of the favor of an invi-
tation); Rev. iii. 4 (sc. to walk with me, clothed in
white). with a gen. of the person, — worthy of one’s
‘fellowship, and of the blessings connected with it: Mt.
x. 37 sq.; Heb. xi. 38, (rod Oeod, Sap. iii.5; Ignat. ad
Eph. 2). §. in a bad sense; with a gen. of the thing:
mdnyov, Lk. xii. 48; @avdrov, Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts [xxiii.
29]; xxv. 11, [25]; xxvi. 31; Ro. i. 32; absol.: Rev.
xvi. 6 (sc. to drink blood).*
Gfidw, -@; impf. n€iovy; 1 aor. nfiwoa; Pass., pf. néio-
pat; 1 fut. a€iwOnooua; (dfs); as in Grk. writ. a.
to think meet, fit, right: foll. by an inf., Acts xv. 38;
XXViil. 22. b. to judge worthy, deem deserving: twa
with an inf. of the object, Lk. vii. 7; rivd tuvos, 2 Th. i.
11; pass. with gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. v. 17; Heb. iii.
3; x.29. [Comp.: kxat-aido. | *
Gilws, adv., suitably; worthily, in a manner worthy of:
with the gen., Ro. xvi. 2; Phil. i. 27; Col.i.10; 1 Th.
ii. 12; Eph.iv.1; 3Jn.6. [From Soph. down. ] *
G-dpatos, -ov, (6pdw), either, not seen i. e. unseen, or
that cannot be seen i. e. invisible. In the latter sense
of God in Col. i. 15; 1 Tim. i. 17; Heb. xi. 27; ra adpara
avtrov his (God’s) invisible nature [perfections], Ro. i.
20; ra dpata Kal ta ddpara, Col. i. 16. (Gen. i. 2; Is.
xlv.3; 2 Macc. ix.5; Xen., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.)*
ar-ayyé\Aw; impf. dmyyyedAov; fut. drayyeAO; 1 aor.
annyyeAa; 2 aor. pass. annyyeAnv (Lk. viii. 20); [fr.
Hom. down]; 1. dnd twos to bring tidings (from a
person or thing), bring word, report: Jn. iv.51[RGL
Tr br.]; Acts iv. 23; v. 22; [xv. 27]; with dat. of the pers.,
Mt. ii. 8; xiv. 12; xxviii. 8, [8 (9) Rec.], 10; Mk. xvi.
[10], 13; Acts v. 25; xi. 13; [xxiii 16,19]; revi re, [Mt.
xi. 4; xxviii. 11 (here Tdf. avayy.)]; Mk. [v.19 (L mrg.
R G dyayy.)]; vi. 30; Lk. [vii. 22; ix. 36]; xiv. 215 xxiv.
9; Acts xi. 13; [xii. 17; xvi. 38 L T Tr WH; xxiii. 17];
rwi foll. by é7, Lk. xviii. 837; [Jn. xx. 18 RG; foll. by
mas, Lk. viii. 836]; ri mpds twa, Acts xvi. 36; rtivi rept
twos, Lk. vii. 18; xiii. 1; ri mepi revos, Acts xxviii. 21;
[foll. by Aéywv and direct disc., Acts xxii. 26]; foll. by
acc. with inf., Acts xii. 14; els with acc. of place, to
carry tidings to a place, Mk. v. 14 (Rec. dyyyy.); Lk.
viii. 34; with addition of an acc. of the thing announced,
Mt. viii. 33, (Xen. an. 6, 2 (4), 25; Joseph. antt. 5, 11,
3; eis rods dvOpwmovs, Am. iv. 13 Sept.). 2. to pro-
claim (dé, because what one announces he openly lays,
as it were, off from himself, cf. Germ. ab kiindigen), to
make known openly, declare: univ., mepi twos, 1 Th. i. 9;
“ruv) epi r. Jn. xvi. 25 LT Tr WH]; by teaching, ri, 1 Jn.
|
33; rwi, with inf., Acts xxvi. 20; [xvii. 30 TWHTr
mrg.]; by avowing and praising, Lk. viii. 47; rut mr,
Heb. ii. 12 (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 23 [yet Sept. dupyjoopat]) ;
[Mt. xii. 18]; foll. by dru, 1 Co. xiv. 25.*
dn-dyxw [cf. Lat. angustus, anxius, Eng. anguish, ete.;
Curtius § 166]: 1 aor. mid. dmny&duny; to throttle, stran-
gle, in order to put out of the way (dané away, cf. dro-
kreivw to kill off), Hom. Od. 19, 230; mid. to hang one’s
self, to end one’s life by hanging: Mt. xxvii. 5. (2S. xvii.
23; Tob. iii. 10; in Attic from Aeschyl. down.)*
dr-dyo; [impf. dmjyov (Lk. xxiii. 26 Tr mrg. WH
mrg.)]; 2 aor. dmnyayov; Pass., [pres. amdyopac]; 1 aor.
amnxOnv; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead away: Lk. xiii. 15
(sc. a6 ths drys); Acts xxiii. 10 (Lchm. [ed. min.]);
17 (sc. hence); xxiv. 7[R G] (away, ex rav xeipav jyav) ;
1 Co. xii. 2 (led astray mpds ra eidSwda). Used esp. of
those led off to trial, prison, punishment: Mt. xxvi. 57;
xxvii. 2,31; Mk. xiv. 44,53; xv.16; Lk. xxi.12 (T Tr
WH); [xxii. 66 T Tr WH]; xxiii. 26; Jn. xviii. 13 RG
[#yayor LT Tr WH]; xix. 16 Rec.; Acts xii. 19; (so
also in Grk. writ.). Used of a way leading to a certain
end: Mt. vii. 13, 14 (els thy ame@devav, eis thy Cwny).
[Come. : ovr-amdyw. | *
G-rralSevros, -ov, (madevw), without instruction and dis-
cipline, uneducated, ignorant, rude, [W. 96 (92)]: ¢yrn-
ces, stupid questions, 2 Tim. ii. 23. (dn classics fr.
(Eurip.,] Xen. down; Sept.; Joseph.)*
dr-alpw: 1 aor. pass. amnpOnv; to lift off, take or carry’
away; pass., amd twos to be taken away from any one:
Mt.ix.15; Mk. ii. 20; Lk.v. 35. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down.) *
dar-attéw, -@; to ask back, demand back, exact something
due (Sir. xx. 15 (14) onpepov Savecet kal avprov amairnoet) :
Lk. vi. 30; ryv Wuyxnv cov aratrodow [Tr WH airotow]
thy soul, intrusted to thee by God for a time, 7s demanded
back, Lk. xii. 20, (Sap. xv. 8 76 ris Wuyqs amairnbeis
xpeos)- (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
dar-adyéw, -6: [pf. ptep. amndrynkos]; to cease to feel
pain or grief; a. to bear troubles with greater equa-
nimity, cease to feel pain at: Thue. 2, 61 ete. b. to
become callous, insensible to pain, apathetic: so those whe
have become insensible to truth and honor and shame
are called dandynkdres [A. V. past feeling] in Eph. iv.
19. (Polyb. 1, 35, 5 dmndynxvias Wuxas dispirited and
useless for war, [cf. Polyb. 16, 12, 7].)*
dr-od\d\doow: 1 aor. arn\d\aka; Pass., [pres. dmad\do-
copa]; pf. inf. dmndAddxdar; (dAAdoow to change; dro,
sc. rds); com. in Grk. writ.; to remove, release; pass.
to be removed, to depart: an adtév ras vocous, Acts xix.
12 (Plat. Eryx. 401 ¢. ef ai vdcou dmaddayeinoay ex tov
copdrov); in a transferred and esp. in a legal sense,
ané with gen. of pers., to be set free, the opponent being
appeased and withdrawing the suit, to be quit of one:
Lk. xii. 58, (so with a simple gen. of pers. Xen. mem. 2,
9,6). Hence univ. to set free, deliver: tia, Heb. ii. 15;
(in prof. auth. the gen. of the thing freed fr. is often
added; ef. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1, p. 339 sq.).*
aTradNoTp Low
dw-addorpidw, -: pf. pass. ptep. damAorpiapevos ; to
alienate, estrange; pass. to be rendered GAdorptos, to be
shut out from one’s fellowship and intimacy: rwés, Eph.
ji. 12; iv. 18; sc. rod Geov, Col. i. 21, (equiv. to 14/, used
of those who have estranged themselves fr. God, Ps.
lvii. (Iviii.) 4; Is. i. 4 [Ald. ete.]; Ezek. xiv. 5, 7; [ Test.
xii. Patr. test. Benj. § 10]; trav marpiov Soyparav, 3 Mace.
i. 3; dmadXorptody Twa Tov Kada@s ExovTOS, Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 14,2). (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hippoer.,] Plato down.)*
daadés, -7,-dv, tender: of the branch of a tree, when full
of sap, Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28. [From Hom. down. ]*
dr-avréo, -: fut. dravrnow (Mk. xiv. 138; but in better
ork. dravrjcopas, cf. W. 83 (79) ; [B. 53 (46) ]); 1 aor.
dnnyrnaa; to go to meet; in past tenses, to meet: ruvi, Mt.
xxviii. 9 [T Tr WH én-]; Mk. v. 2 RG; xiv. 13; Lk. xvii.
12 [L WHom. Tr br. dat.; T WH mrg. read ir-|; Jn. iv.
51 RG; Acts xvi. 16 [RG L]. Inamilitary sense of a
hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 RG, asin 1 S. xxii. 17; 2
S. i. 15; 1 Macc. xi. 15, 68 and often in Grk. writ.*
dmdvrno ss, -ews, 7, (dnavtdw), a meeting; eis ardvtnoiv
rivos or tem to meet one: Mt. xxv.1 RG; vs. 6; Acts
xXvill. 15; 1 Th. iv. 17. (Polyb. 5, 26,8; Diod. 18, 59;
very often 31, Sept. equiv. to NX [ef. W. 30].)*
drag, adv., onve, one time, [fr. fons down]; a. univ.:
2 Co. xi. 25; Leb. ix. 26 sq.; 1 Pet. iii. 20 Ree.; ere
Gna€, Heb. xii. 26 sq. ; da& rod éuavrov, Heb. ix. 7, [Hdt.
2, 59, ete.]. b. lke Lat. semel, used of what is so done
as to be of perpetual validity and never need repetition,
“once for all: Heb. vi.4; x. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 18; Jude vss. 3,
5. c. kcal dmaé cai dis indicates a definite number [the
double «ai emphasizing the repetition, both once and
again i.e.] twice: 1 Th. i,18; Phil.iv. 16; on the other
hand, dma€ cai dis means [once and again i. e.] several
times, repeatedly: Neh. «iii. 20; 1 Mace. iii. 30. Cf.
Schott on 1 Th. ii. 18, p. 86, [Meyer on Phil. 1. c.].*
d-rapa-RBartos, -ov, (mapaBuive), fr. the phrase rapaBai-
vey vouoy to transgress 1. e. to violate, signifying either
unviolated, or not to be violated, inviolable: iepaatvn un-
changeable and therefore not liable to pass to a successor,
Heb. vii. 24; cf. Bleek and Delitzsch ad loc. (A later
word, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 313.; in Joseph., Plut., al.)*
d-Trapa-cKevacrros, -ov, (mapacke aw), unprepared : 2 Co.
ix. 4. (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 15; an. 1, 1, 6 [var.]; 2,3, 21;
Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 41; Hdian. 3, %,19 [(11) ed. Bekk.];
adv. drapackevaoros, [Aristot. rher. Alex. 9 p. 1430* 3];
Clem. hom. 32, 15.) *
Gmr-apvéopat, -otpar: depon. verb; Fut. dmapyjcopa; 1
aor. arnpynodpnv; 1 fut. pass. drapymbnoopa with a pass.
signif. (Lk. xii. 9, as in Soph. Phil. 527, [cf. B. 53 (46) ]);
to deny (ab nego) : tuvd, to affirm that one has no acquaint-
ance or connection with him; of Peter denying Christ :
Mt. xxvi. 34 sq. 75; Mk. xiv. 30 sq. 72, [Lk. xxii. CUui5
Jn. xiii. 388 RGLmrg.; more fully da. wh eid€var Incoor,
Lk. xxii. 34 (L Tr WH om. py, conceruing which cf.
Kiihner ii. p. 761; [Jelf § 749, 1; W. § 65, 2 B.; B. 355
(305)]). éaurév to forget one’s self, lose sight of one’s
self and one’s own interests: Mt. xvi. 24, Mk. viii. 34;
Lk. ix. 23 R WH mrg.*
54
¢
aTvras
drdpri [so Tdf. in Jn., T and Tr in Rev.], or rather dz’
dpre (cf. W.§ 5, 2 p. 45, and 422 (393) ; [B. 320 (275),
Lipsius p. 127]; see dpre), adv., from now, henceforth:
Mt. xxiii. 39; xxvi. 29, 64 (in Lk. xxii. 69 do rod viv);
Jn. i. 51 (52) Rec.; xiii. 19; xiv. 7; Rev. xiv. 13 (where
connect dn’ dpre with paxdpior). In the Grk. of the OoTi6
is not found (for the Sept. render NAyN by aw6 rod viv),
and scarcely [yet L. and S. cite Arstph. Pl. 388; Plat.
Com. Sof. 10] in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ.
For the similar term which the classic writ. employ is
to be written as one word, and oxytone (viz. dmaprt),
and has a different signif. (viz. completely, exactly) ; cf.
Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. i. p. 296; Lob. ad Phryn. p.
20 sq.*
dmaptirpés, -0b, 6, (arapri¢w to finish, complete), com-
pletion: Lk. xiv. 28. Found besides only in Dion. Hal.
de comp. verb. ce. 24; [Apollon. Dyse. de adv. p. 532, 7,
alice: W. 1p. 24i|-*
dr-apxf, -7s, 7, (fr. dmdpxouar: a. to offer firstlings
or first-fruits; b. to take away the first-fruits; cf. ao in
dmoSexatéw), in Sept. generally equiv. to NWN; the jirst-
Jruits of the productions of the earth (both those in a
natural state and those prepared for use by hand), which
were offered to God; cf. Win. RWB. -s. v. Erstlinge,
[BB.DD. s. v. First-fruits]: 7 amapyn sc. tod pupayaros,
the first portion of the dough, from which sacred loaves
were to be prepared (Num. xv. 19-21), Ro. xi. 16.
Hence, in a transferred use, employed a. of persons
consecrated to God, leading the rest in time: az. THs
*Ayatas the first person in Achaia to enroll himself as a
Christian, 1 Co. xvi. 15; with eis Xpuordv added, Ro.
xvi. 5; with a reference to the moral creation effected
by Christianity all the Christians of that age are called
anapxn tes (a kind of first-fruits) trav rov Geod Kricpdroy,
Jas. i. 18 (see Huther ad loc.), [noteworthy is efAaro ipas 6
eds arapyny etc. as first-fruits| 2 Th. ii. 13 L Tr mre.
WH mrg.; Christ is called dz. rév Kexolunuevoy as the
first one recalled to life of them that have fallen asleep,
1 Co. xv. 20, 23 (here the phrase seems also to signify
that by his case the future resurrection of Christians is
guaranteed ; because the first-fruits forerun and are, as
it were, a pledge and promise of the rest of the har-
vest). b. of persons superior inexcellence to others
of the same class: so in Rey. xiv. 4 of a certain
class of Christians sacred and dear to God and Christ
beyond all others, (Schol. ad Eur. Or. 96 dmapyy édé-
YyeTo ov pdvov Td mpa@rov TH Ta&er, GAA Kal TO TpPaTov TH
Ti). C. ot Exovres THY am. TOU mvevparos Who have the
first-fruits (of future blessings) in the Spirit (rod a».
is gen. of apposition), Ro. viii. 23; cf. what Winer § 59,
8 a. says in opposition to those [e. g. Meyer, but see
Weiss in ed. 6] who take rod wv. as a partitive gen.,
so that of ¢y. r. dm. rod my. are distinguished from the
great multitude who will receive the Spirit subsequently.
Cn Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down.) *
d-ras, -aca, -av, (fr. dua [or rather 4 (Skr. sa; cf. a
copulative), see Curtius § 598 ; Vani¢ek p- 972] and ras;
stronger than the simple zas), [fr. Hom. down]; quite
aTracTulopar
all, the whole, all together, all; it is either placed before
a subst. having the art., as Lk. iii. 21; viii. 37; xix. 37;
or placed after, as Mk. xvi. 15 (els rov xégpov Gravra into
all parts of the world); Lk. iv. 6 (this dominion whole-ly
i.e. all parts of this dominion which you see); xix. 48.
used absolutely, —in the mase., as Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk. iii.
16 (fT WH Trumrg. raow]; [iv.40 WH txt. Tr mrg.]; v.
26; ix. 15 [WH mrg. wavras|; Mk. xi. 32 [Lehm. aavres];
Jas. iii. 2;—in the neut., as Mt. xxviii. 11; Lk. v. 28
[RG]; Acts ii. 44; iv. 32 [L WH Tr mrg. navra]; x. 8;
xi. 10; Eph. vi. 13; once in John viz. iv. 25 T Tr WH;
[dravres otro, Acts ii. 7 LT; drravtes tpeis, Gal. iii. 28 T
Tr; cf. was, Il. 1 fin. Rarely used by Paul; most fre-
quently by Luke. On its occurrence, cf. Alford, Grk.
Test. vol. ii. Proleg. p. 81; Ellicott on 1 Tim. i. 16].
Gr-aomdafopat: 1 aor. amnomacduny; to salute on leav-
ing, bid farewell, take leave of: twa, Acts xxi. 6 L T Tr
WH. (Himer. eclog. ex Phot. 11, p. 194.) *
dratéw,- G; 1 aor. pass. 7matnOnv; (amatn); fr. Hom.
down ; to cheat, deceive, beguile : rnv xapdiav abrov [RT Tr
WH mrg., air. G, éavr. L WH txt.], Jas. i. 265 rivd re, one
with a thing, Eph. v. 6 ; pass. 1 Tim. 1i. 14 (where L T Tr
WH é€amarnOecioa), cf. Gen. iii. 13. [Comp.. é&-araraa.]*
arétn, -ns, 7, [fr. Hom. down], deceit, deceitfulness :
Col. ii. 8; rod wAovTOv, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; ris ddixias,
2 Th. ii. 10; tis dwaprias, Heb. iii. 13; ai emiOupiar tis
anazns the lusts excited by deceit, i.e. by deceitful influ-
ences seducing to sin, Eph. iv. 22, (others, ‘deceitful
lusts’; but cf. Mey. ad loc.). Plur. dwdarac: 2 Pet. ii. 13
(where L Tr txt. WH mrg. cy dydrats), by a paragram
(or verbal play) applied to the agapae or love-feasts (cf.
dyarn, 2), because these were transformed by base men
into seductive revels.*
Gmé&twp, -opos, 6, 7, (matnp), a word which has almost
the same variety of senses as dunrwp, q.v.; [fr. Soph.
down]; [without father i. e.] whose father is not recorded
in the genealogies: Heb. vii. 3.*
Gar-atyacpa, -ros, 70, (fr. dnavyagw to emit brightness,
and this fr. avyn brightness; cf. drooxiacya, dreixacya,
dreikovcpa, annxnua), reflected brightness: Christ is
called in Heb. i. 3 amavy. ras S0éns trod Geod, inasmuch
as he perfectly reflects the majesty of God; so that the
same thing is declared here of Christ metaphysically,
which he says of himself in an ethical sense in Jn. xii.
45 (xiv. 9): 6 Oewpady eve Oewpei rov wéppavrd pe. (Sap.
vii. 26 ; Philo, mund. opif. § 51; plant. Noé § 12; de con-
cup. § 11; and often in eccl. writ.; see more fully in
Grimm on Sap. 1. ¢., p. 161 sq.) [Some interpreters still
adhere to the signif. effulgence or radiance (as distin-
guished from refulgence or reflection), see Kurtz ad
loc.; Soph. Lex. s.v.; Cremer s. v.]* |
dar-ciSov, (d76 and efdov, 2 aor. of obsol. eid), serves as
2 aor. of apopdw, (cf. Germ. absehen) ; 1. to look
away from one thing and at another. 2. to look at
from somewhere, either from a distance or from a certain
present condition of things; to perceive: as av anid (L
T Tr WH ddide [see adeidov]) ra mepi éue as soon as I
shall have seen what issue my affairs will have [A.V.
55
J
amrelpactos
how it will go with me], Phil. ii. 23.
5, ete.) *
dre(Bera, [WH -Gia, exc. in Heb. as below (see I, t) J, -as,
7. (aretOns), disobedience, (Jerome, inobedientia), obsti-
nacy, and in the N. T. particularly obstinate opposition to
the divine will: Ro. xi. 30, 32; Heb. iv. 6,11; viol r. dmet-
Geias, those who are animated by this obstinacy (see
vids, 2), used of the Gentiles: Eph. ii. 2; v. 6; Col. iii.
6 [RG Lbr.]. (Xen. mem. 3, 5,5; Plut., al.) *
darevbw, -6; impf. 7re(Oovv; 1 aor. nmelOnaoa; to be dmecbns
(q- V-); not to allow one’s self to be persuaded ; not to com-
ply with; a. to refuse or withhold belief (in Christ, in
the gospel; opp. to morevw) : TO vid, In. ili. 36; TO
Ady@, 1 Pet. ii. 8; iii. 1; absol. of those who reject the
gospel, [R. V. to be disobedient; cf. b.]: Acts xiv. 2;
xvi. 5 [Rec.]; xix. 9; Ro. xv. 31; 1 Pet. ii. 7(T Tr WH
dmaroiaw). b. to refuse belief and obedience: with dat.
of thing or of pers., Ro. ii. 8 (rj dAnOeia) ; xi. 30 sq. (76
eG) ; 1 Pet. iv. 17; absol., Ro. x. 21 (Is. lxv. 2) ; Heb. iii.
18; xi. 31; 1 Pet.iii. 20. (In Sept. com. equiv. to 79,
W710; in Grk. writ. often fr. Aeschy]. Ag. 1049 down ; in
Hom. et al. dmeiv.) *
aarevOis, -€s, Zen. -ovs, (elOouac), impersuasible, uncom-
pliant, contumacious, [A. V. disobedient]: absol., Lk. i.
17; Tit.i.16; iii. 3; revit, 2 Tim. iii. 2; Ro. i.30; Acts
xxvi. 19. (Deut. xxi: 18; Num. xx. 10; Is. xxx..9;
Zech. vii. 12; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down; [in Theogn.
1235 actively not persuasive ].) *
daredéw, -@: impf. jreidovy; 1 aor. mid. 7reAnodpnvy;
to threaten, menace: 1 Pet. ii. 23; in mid., ace. to later
Grk. usage ([App. bell. civ. 3, 29]; Polyaen. 7, 35, 2),
actively [B. 54 (47)]: Acts iv. 17 (amecAy [L T Tr WH
om.] dmesdeio Oar, with dat. of pers. foll. by yn with inf.,
with sternest threats to forbid one to etc., W. § 54, 3;
[B. 183 (159)]). (From Hom. down.) [Comp.: mpos-
amrethéw. | *
darethh, -71s, 7, a threatening, threat: Acts iv. 17 R G (cf.
drethéw), 29; ix.1; Eph. vi. 9. (From Hom. down.) *
dar-et; (elut to be); [fr. Hom. down]; to be away, be
Gbsentcela Conve 3)02( Con x01, 01 sexi 2, 105) Cols ide
Phil. i. 27; [in all cases exc. Col. 1. c. opp. to mapecue].*
dar-cypt: impf. 3 pers. plur. ajecay; (efus to go); [fr.
Hom. down]; to go away, depart: Acts xvii. 10.*
dar-cirov : (eirrov, 2 aor. fr. obsol. éra) ; 1. to speak
out, set forth, declare, (Hom. Il. 7, 416 dyyeAinv améecrev,
9, 809 rov pdOov dmoeurety). 2. to forbid: 1 K. xi. 2,
and in Attic writ. 3. to give up, renounce: with ace.
of the thing, Job x. 3 (for DN), and often in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom.down. In the same sense 1 aor. mid. dzeurayuny,
2 Co. iv. 2 [see WH. App. p. 164], (cf. aicxiv, 1); so
too in Hdt.1, 59; 5, 56; 7,14, [etc.], and the later writ.
fr. Polyb. down.*
dmrelpacros, -ov, (metpatw), as well untempted as un-
temptable: dmeipactos xaxay that cannot be tempted by
evil, not liable to temptation to sin, Jas. i. 13; cf. the
full remarks on this pass. in W. § 30, 4 [cf. § 16, 3 a.; B.
170 (148)]. (Joseph. b. j.5,9,3; 7, 8, 1, and eccl. writ.
The Greeks said dreiparos, fr. metpaw.) *
(In Sept., Jon. iv.
G7reLpos
dsretpos, -ov, (meipa trial, experience), inexperienced in,
without experience of, with gen. of the thing (as in Grk.
writ.) : Heb. v.18. [(Pind. and Hat. down.)]*
dar-ex-Séxopar; [impf. dretedexdunv]; assiduously and
patiently to wait for, [cf. Eng. wait it out]: absol., 1 Pet.
iii. 20 (Rec. éxd€xouat) ; ti, Ro. viii. 19, 23, 25; 1 Co. i.
7; Gal. v. 5 (on this pass. cf. éAmis sub fin.) ; with the
acc. of a pers., Christ in his return from heaven : Phil.
iii. 20; Heb. ix. 28. Cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritz
schiorum Opusce. p. 155 sq.; Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt.
iv. p. 14; [Ellic. on Gal. l.c.]. (Scarcely found out of
the N. T.; Heliod. Aeth. 2, 35; 7, 23.)*
Gar-ex-Stopar: 1 aor. dmexducdpnpy ; 1. wholly to put
off from one’s self (dd denoting separation fr. what is
put off): rov madadyv dvOpwror, Col. iii. 9. 2. wholly
to strip off for one’s self (for one’s own advantage), de-
spoil, disarm: rid, Col. ii. 15. Cf. Win. De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. iv. p. 14 sq., [esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. ii.15]. (Jo-
seph. antt. 6, 14, 2 dmexdvs [but ed. Bekk. perexdds] rHv
Baowdixny é€oO7ra.) *
dm-€k-Svois, -ews, 7, (drexdvouat, g.v.), a putting off,
laying aside: Col. ii. 11. (Not found in Grk. writ.) *
dmr-eXatvw: 1 aor. dmndaca; to drive away, drive off:
Acts xviii. 16. (Com. in Grk. writ.) *
dar-eAeypds, -od, 6, (dmedcyyo to convict, expose, refute ;
éAeypos conviction, refutation, in Sept. for ¢deyéts),
censure, repudiation of a thing shown to be worthless:
édOeiv cis amedeypov to be proved to be worthless, to be
disesteemed, come into contempt [R. V. disrepute], Acts
xix. 27. (Not used by prof. auth.)*
Gar-ceW0epos, -ov, 6, 7, @ manumitted slave, a freedman,
(ard, cf. Germ. los, [set free fr om bondage]) : rod cupiov,
presented with (spiritual) freedom by the Lord, 1 Co.
vil. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) *
"AmédAns [better -AAns (so all edd.); see Chandler
§§ 59, 60], -ov, 6, Apelles, the prop. name of a certain
Christian: Ro. xvi. 10. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p.
174.]*
dr-ehri{o (Lehm. apeArifo, [ef. gram. reff. s. v. apei-
Sov]); to despair [W. 24]: pndev amedmigovres nothing
despairing sc. of the hoped-for recompense from God the
requiter, Lk. vi. 35, [T WH mre. pydeva dredr.; if this
reading is to be tolerated it may be rendered despairing
of noone, or even causing no one to despair (cf. the
Jerus. Syriac). Tdf. himself seems half inclined to take
pndéva as neut. plur., aform thought to be not wholly un-
precedented ; cf. Steph. Thesaur. v. col. 962]. (Is. xxix.
19; 2 Mace. ix. 18; Sir. xxii. 21; [xxvii. 21; Judith ix.
11]; often in Polyb. and Diod. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)*
dmr-évavrt, adv., with gen. [B. 319 (278)]; 1. over
against, opposite: tov rdov, Mt. xxvii. 61; [rod yatodu-
Aaxiov, Mk. xii. 41 Tr txt. WH mrg.]. 2. in sight of,
before: Mt. xxi. 2 RG; xxvii. 24 (here L Tr WH txt.
karévavrt); Acts iii. 16; Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.)
2). 3. in opposition to, against: rév Soypdtwv Kai-
gapos, Acts xvii. 7. (Common in Sept. and Apocr. ;
Polyb. 1, 86, 3.)*
Gmépavtos, -ov, (repaivw to go through, finish; cf. dud-
56
amépyopuat
pavros), that cannot be passed through, boundless, endless «
yeveadoyiat, protracted interminably, 1 Tim. i. 4. (Job
xxxvi. 26; 3 Mace. ii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down.) *
Gmepirmaotws, adv., (meptomdw, q. V.), without distrac-
tion, without solicitude: 1 Co. vii. 35. (The adjective
occurs in Sap. xvi. 11; Sir. xli. 1; often in Polyb. [the
adv. in 2, 20, 10; 4,18, 6; 12, 28,4; cf. W. 463 (431) ]
and Plut.) *
G-mrept-rpnros, -ov, (mepiréuvw), uncircumcised ; metaph.
Grepitpntot 7H Kapdia (Jer. ix. 26; Ezek. xliv. 7) xai r-
wai (Jer. vi. 10) whose heart and ears are covered, i. e.
whose soul and senses are closed to divine admonitions,
obdurate, Acts vii. 51. (Often in Sept. for 99; 1 Mace.
i. 48; ii. 46; [Philo de migr. Abr. § 39]; Plut. am.
prol. 3.)*
dar-epxopar; fut. dmeAevoouar (Mt. xxv. 46; Ro. xv.
28; W. 86 (82)); 2 aor. dwmdOov (anda in Rev. x.
[where RG Tr -6ov], aw7dOav L T Tr WH in Mt. xxii.
22; Rev. xxi. 1, 4 [(but here WH txt. only), etc., and
WH in Lk. xxiv. 24]; ef. W. § 13,1; Mullach p. 17 sq.
[226]; B. 39 (84); [Soph. Lex. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123;
WH. App. p. 164 sq.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. p. lxiv.;
Scrivener, Introd. p. 562; Collation, etc., p. liv. sq.]) ;.
pf. dmedyAvOa (Jas. i. 24); plpf. dmeAndvdew (In. iv. 8) ;
[fr. Hom. down]; to go away (fr. a place), to departs
1. properly, a. absol.: Mt. xiii. 25; xix. 22; Mk. v.
20; Lk. viii. 39; xvii. 23; Jn. xvi. 7, ete. Ptep. areAdav
with indic. or subj. of other verbs in past time to go
(away) and ete.: Mt. xiii. 28,46; xviii. 30; xxv. 18, 25;
xxvi. 36; xxvii.5; Mk. vi. 27 (28), 37; Lk. v.14. b. with
specification of the place into which, or of the per-
son to whom or from whom one departs: eis with
ace. of place, Mt. v. 30 L T Tr WH; xiv. 15; xvi. 21;
xxii.5; Mk. vi. 36; ix. 43; Jn. iv. 8; Ro. xv. 28, ete.;
eis 6d0v €Ovav, Mt. x. 5; eis 7d mépav, Mt. viii. 18; Mk.
viii. 13; [60 tudy eis Maxed. 2 Co. i. 16 Lehm. txt.]; éni
with ace. of place, Lk. [xxiii. 33 RGT]; xxiv. 24; émi
with ace. of the business which one goes to attend to:
ert (the true reading for R G eis) tiv eumopiav airod, Mt.
xxi. 5; eet, Mt. ii. 22; €£o with gen., Acts iv. 15; mpos
twa, Mt. xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Rev. x. 9; amo tuvos, Lk. i. 38;
viii. 87. Hebraistically (ef. ‘M8 39M) dmépy. rico
twos to go away in order to follow any one, go after him
figuratively, i. e. to follow his party, follow him as a leader :
Mk. i. 20; Jn. xii. 19; in the same sense drépy. mpés twa,
Jn. vi. 68; Xen. an. 1, 9, 16 (29); used also of those
who seek any one for vile purposes, Jude 7. Lexicog-
raphers (following Suidas, ‘déA6y- avti rod émavehOn’)
incorrectly ascribe to dmépyeoOai also the idea of return-
ing, going back, — misled by the fact that a going away
is often at the same time a going back. But where this
is the case, it is made evident either by the connection,
as in Lk. vii. 24, or by some adjunct, as eis rév otkov
avrov, Mt. ix. 7; Mk. vii. 30, (oikade, Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 6);
mpos éavrov ['Treg. mp. adréy] home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G,
but L Tr br. TWH reject the vs.]; Jn. xx. 10 [here T
Tr mpés abrovs, WH m. air. (see abrov)]; eis ra drica,
Jn. vi. 66 (to return home); xviii. 6 (to draw back, re-
améxw
treat). 2. trop.: of departing evils and sufferings,
Mk. i. 42; Lk. v. 13 () Aémpa dnAdOev dn airod); Rev.
ix. 12; xi. 14; of good things taken away from one, Rev.
xviii. 14 [RG]; of an evanescent state of things, Rev.
xxi. 1 (Rec. wappde), 4; of a report going forth or
spread eis, Mt. iv. 24 [Treg. mrg. é&7\Gev].
axxo; [impf. dretyov Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.;
pres. mid. dméyouar] ; 1. trans. a. to hold back,
keep off, prevent, (Hom. Il. 1, 97 [Zenod.]; 6, 96; Plat.
Crat. c. 23 p.407b.). b. to have wholly or in full, to
have received (what one had a right to expect or de-
mand; cf. arodiddvat, awodapBavew, [ Win. De verb. comp.
ete. Pt. iv. p.8; Gram. 275 (258); B. 203 (176); acc. to
Bp. Lghtft. (on Phil. iv. 18) do denotes correspon-
dence, i. e. of the contents to the capacity, of the pos-
session to the desire, ete.]): twa, Philem. 15; pucGov,
Mt. vi. 2, 5, 16; wapdkAnow, Lk. vi. 24; wdvra, Phil. iv.
18; (often so in Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.
L¢.J). Hence c. dméyer, impers., it is enough, suffi-
cient: Mk. xiv. 41, where the explanation is ‘ye have
slept now long enough’; so that Christ takes away the
permission, just given to his disciples, of sleeping longer;
cf. Meyer ad loc.; (in the same sense in (Pseudo-)
Anacr. in Odar. (15) 28, 33; Cyril Alex. on Hag. ii.
9 [but the true reading here seems to be dréya, see P. E.
Pusey’s ed. Oxon. 1868]). 2. intrans. to be away,
absent, distant, [B. 144 (126)]: absol., Lk. xv. 20; azo,
Lk. vii. 6; xxiv. 13; Mt. [xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; xv.
8; MK. vii. 6, (Is. xxix. 13). 3. Mid. to hold one’s self
off, abstain: dmo twos, from any thing, Acts xv. 20
[RG]; 1 Th. iv. 3; v. 22, Jobi. 1; ii. 3; Ezek. viii. 6) ;
twos, Acts xv. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 3; 1 Pet.ii.11. (So in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
amortéw, -d; [impf. Arlcrovv]; 1 aor. Amiotnoa; (amt-
aTos) ; 1. to betray a trust, be unfaithful : 2 Tim. ii. 13
(opp. to motos pever); Ro. iii. 3; [al. deny this sense in
the N. T.; cf. Morison or Mey. on Rom. 1. c.; Ellic. on
2*Vim: 1<-]: 2. to have no belief, disbelieve: in the
news of Christ’s resurrection, Mk. xvi. 11; Lk. xxiv.
41; with dat. of pers., Lk. xxiv. 11; in the tidings con-
cerning Jesus the Messiah, Mk. xvi. 16 (opp. to m-
orevo), [so 1 Pet. ii. 7 T Tr WH]; Acts xxviii. 24. (In
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)*
dmortia, -as, 4, (fr. dmuctos), want of faith and trust;
1. unfaithfulness, faithlessness, (of persons betraying a
trust): Ro. iii. 3 [cf. reff. s. v. dmurrew, 1]. 2. want of
faith, unbelief: shown in withholding belief in the divine
power, Mk. xvi. 14, or in the power and promises of
God, Ro. iv. 20; Heb. iii. 19; in the divine mission of
Jesus, Mt. xiii. 58; Mk. vi.6; by opposition to the gos-
pel, 1 Tim.i.13; with the added notion of obstinacy,
Ro. xi. 20, 23; Heb. iii. 12. contextually, weakness of
faith: Mt. xvii. 20 (where LT Tr WH édryomoriar) ;
Mk. ix. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. and Hdt. down.)*
é&-mertos, -ov, (muorés), [fr- Hom. down], without faith
1. unfaithful, faithless, (not to be trusted,
incredible,
or trust;
perfidious) : Lk. xii. 46; Rev. xxi. 8. 2.
of things: Acts xxvi. 8; (Xen. Hiero 1, 9; symp. 4,
57
> U
aTro
49; Cyr. 3,1, 26; Plat. Phaedr. 245 ¢.; Joseph. antt. 6,
10, 2, ete.). 3. unbelieving, incredulous: of Thomas
disbelieving the news of the resurrection of Jesus, Jn.
xx. 27; of those who refuse belief in the gospel, 1 Co.
vi. 6; vil. 12-15; x. 27; xiv. 22 sqq.; [1 Tim. v. 8];
with the added idea of impiety and wickedness, 2 Co.
iv. 4; vi. 14 sq. of those among the Christians them-
selves who reject the true faith, Tit. i. 15. without
trust (in God), Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix.19; Lk. ix. 41.*
amhérns, -nTos, 7), singleness, simplicity, sincerity, men-
tal honesty; the virtue of one who is free from pretence
and dissimulation, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. Cyr. 1, 4,
3; Hell. 6,1,18,down): év ém\drnre (L T Tr WH dyto-
tTyTt) kal eiAcxpweia Ged i. e. infused by God through the
Spirit [W. § 36, 3 b.], 2 Co. i. 12; év dad. ris Kapdias
(229 WW, 1 Chr. xxix. 17), Col. iii. 22; Eph. vi. 5, (Sap.
i. 1); eis Xpiordy, sincerity of mind towards Christ, i. e.
single-hearted faith in Christ, as opp. to false wisdom
in matters pertaining to Christianity, 2 Co. xi. 3; év
dmornre in simplicity, i. e. without self-seeking, Ro. xii.
8. openness of heart manifesting itself by benefactions,
liberality, (Joseph. antt. 7,13, 4; but in opposition see
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. 62 sq.]: 2 Co. viii. 2; ix. 11,
13 (rs kowewvias, manifested by fellowship). Cf. Kling
s. v. ‘Einfalt’ in Herzog iii. p. 723 sq.*
amdods, -7, -odv, (contr. fr. -dos, -dn, -dov), [fr. Aeschyl.
down], simple, single, (in which there is nothing compli-
cated or confused; without folds, [cf. Trench § lvi.]);
whole; of the eye, good, fulfilling its office, sound: Mt.
vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, —[al. contend that the moral sense
of the word is the only sense lexically warranted; cf.
Test. xii. Patr. test. Isach. § 3 od xareAdAnoad Tivos, ete.
mopevopevos ev amhornte opGadpar, ibid. § 4 mavra dpa
év dmddrnrt, pn émdexopevos 6pGadpois movnpias amo THs
mAdyms Tod Koopov; yet cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xii. 8].*
dmddés, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down ], simply, openly, frank-
ly, sincerely: Jas.i. 5 (led solely by his desire to bless).*
daé, [ir. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive,
(Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [cf. Eng. of, off }),
jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On
its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr.
1D is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B.
321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words
beginning with a vowel see Tdf. Proleg. p. 94; ef. W.
§ 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order
to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples,
but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by
this preposition. dé, then, is used
I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation,
after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing,
removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see aipw, dmépyopuat,
dmotwdcow, aroywopew, apiornut, pevyw, etc.): ameond-
o6n an avrav, Lk. xxii. 41; Bade dro ood, Mt. v. 29 sq.;
€xBdro 7d Kappos axd [LT Tr WH ek] rod db@adpod, Mt.
vil. 4; ap [L WH Tr txt. Tap (q. vy. Ia.) ] ns exBeBAnket
dayzdma, Mk. xvi. 9; xabeire ard Opdver, Lika 2: V2 2h0f
the separation of apart from the whole; where of
a whole some part is taken: dm rod ivariov, Mt. ix. 16;
’ ,
dd 58 Bee
and pedtootov xnpiov, Lk. xxiv. 42 [RG, but Tr br. the | kécpou, Ro. i. 20; amd Bpépous Tea. a child, 2 Tim. iii.
clause]; do rav éWapiov, Jn. xxi. 10; Ta amo Tov mAolov | 15; amo THs mapOevias, LK. 11. 36; ag’ hs (se. muepas) nee
fragments of the ship, Acts xxvii. 44; évoopicaro amo Lk. vii. 45; Acts xxiv. ll 5 Hen iii. 4; ap is nuepas,
rhs tyns, Acts v. 2; ékxe® amd ToU mvevparos, Acts ii. | Col. i. 6,9; ag’ ob equiv. to amo Tourov dre [cf. B. 82
17; éxdeEdpevos an’ adraév, Lk. vi. 13; riva ano ray dv0, | (71); 105 (92)], Lk. xiii. 25 j xxiv. 21 Ps Xvi. 18,
Mt. xxvii. 21; dv érepnoarro dd viv Iopana, sc. rwés [R. | (Hat. 2,44; and in Attic) ; ad’ of after rpia érn, Lk. xiii.
V. whom certain of the children of Israel did price (cf. | 7T Tr WH; amo rod viv Srom the present, henceforth, Lk. i.
ris, 2.c.); but al. refer this to II. 2 d. aa. fin. q. v.], Mt. | 48; v.10; xii. 52; xxii. 69; Acts Xyill.-65 2 Co. Vv. 16;
xxvii. 9, (€£7XOov dnd Tov lepéwy, sc. Twés, 1 Mace. vii. do rore, Mt. iv. 17; xvi. 21; xxvi. 16; Lk. xvi. 16; amd
33); after verbs of eating and drinking (usually joined | mépvar since last year, a year ago, 2 Co. viii. 10; ix. 2;
in Grk. to the simple gen. of the thing [cf. B. 159 (139); | awd mpoi, Acts xxviii. 23; cf. W. 422 (393) 3 [B. 320
W. 198 (186) sq.]): Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28; mivew dnd, | (275)]; Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 47, 461. c. of distance of
Lk. xxii. 18 (elsewhere in the N. T. ék). 3. of any | Order or Rank,—of the terminus from which in any
kind of separation of one thing from another by which | succession of things or persons: amé drerovs (sc. mardds)
the union or fellowship of the two is destroyed; | kal xatwrépw, Mt. ii. 16, (rods Aeviras amd eixocaetovs
a. after verbs of averting, loosening, liberating, ransom- | kat énavo, Num. i. 20; 2 Esdr. iii. 8); dd ’ABpaap €ws
ing, preserving: see ayopdtw, amadAdoow, anoorpépa, | Aaveid, Mt. i. 17; €Bdopos dno Adap, Jude 14; amd puxpod
ehevbepda, Oepareva, kabapi€w, Lovo, AvTpdw, AVw, pYopat, | Ews peyddov, Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11; a@pyeo@ar amd
colo, pudrdoce, etc. b. after verbs of desisting, abstain- | twos, Mt. xx. 8; Lk. xxiis db xxiv.27; Jn.vii. 9 >7Acts
ing, avoiding, ete.: see dméxo, mavw, xataravo, Bema, | Vili. 35; x. 37.
mpogexo, purddocopa, etc. c. after verbs of concealing II. of Origin; whether of local origin, the place
and hindering: see xptntw, koddw, mapaxad’mro. a. | whence; or of causal origin, the cause from which. 1.
Concise constructions, [ef. esp. B. 322 (277)]: dvdbeya | of the Place whence anything is, comes, befalls, is
dé Tod Xpiorod, Ro. ix. 3 (see dvdGeua sub fin.); Aovew | taken; a. after verbs of coming; see €pxopat, jKa, etc. :
dnd tév mAnyaev to wash away the blood from the stripes, | do [L. Tr WH am’ ] dyopas sc. €XOovres, Mk. vil. 4; dyyedos
Acts xvi. 33; peravoeiv amd tis kaxias by repentance to | dm (rod) ovpavod, Lk. xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass. ];
turn away from wickedness, Acts viii. 22; dmoOvnoxew | Tov am ovpavev sc. Aadodvta, Heb. xii. 25, etc.; of the
amo twos by death to be freed from a thing, Col. ii. 20; | country, province, town, village, from which any one has
POcipecOar and ths dwAorntos to be corrupted and thus | originated or proceeded [cf. W. 364 (342); B. 324
led away from singleness of heart, 2 Co. xi. 3; efcaxov- | (279)]: Mt. ii. 1; iv. 25; Jn. 1.44 (45); xi. 1; piadmd
aGels amo t. eddaBeias heard and accordingly delivered | épous Sua, Gal. iv. 24. Hence 6 or of amd twvos a native of,
from his fear, Heb. v. 7 (al. heard for i. e. on account of | a man of, some place: 6 amd Na¢ape@ the Nazarene, Mt.
his godly fear [cf. Il. 2b. below]). 4. of a state of | xxi. 11; 6 amd Apiuadaias, Mk. xv. 43; Jn. xix. 38 [here
separation, i.e. of distance; and a. of distance of | GLTrWHom. 6]; of azo “Idamns, Acts x. 233 of amé
Place,—of the local terminus from which: Mt. xxiii. | IraAéas the Italians, Heb. xiii. 24 [cf. W. § 66, 6]. A
345 xxiv. 31, etc.; after paxpdv, Mt. viii. 30; Mk. xii. | great number of exx. fr. prof. writ. are given by Wieseler,
34; Jn. xxi. 8; after dréyew, see dméyw 2; awd dvwbev | Untersuch. iib. d. Hebrierbr. 2te Hilfte, p. 14 sq. b.
€ws kato, Mk. xv. 38; amd paxpobev, Mt. xxvii. 55, etc. | of the party or society trom which one has proceeded,
(cf. B. 70 (62); W. § 65, 2]. Acc. to later Grk. usage | i.e. a member of the sect or society, a disciple or votary
it is put before nouns indicating local distance: Jn. xi. | of it: of dad ris éxxAnoias, Acts xii. 1; of aad rhs alpé-
18 (jv eyybs os dd oradiov Sexarevre about fifteen fur- | cews rdv bapicaiwy, Acts xv. 5, (asin Grk. writ.: of dé
longs off) ; Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xiv. 20, (Diod.i. 51 émdve ris | rhs Sroas, of dd rhs ’Axadnplus, etc.). ¢. of the material
Todews ard déxa cxXoivav ipyny dpvée, [also 1,97; 4,56; | from which a thing is made: dd rprydv kauqdov, Mt.
16,46; 17,112; 18,40; 19, 25, ete.; ef. Soph. Lex. | iii. 4 [W. 370 (347); B. 324 (279)]. 4. trop. of that
s. v. 5]; Joseph. b. j. 1, 3, 5 rodro dd’ é£axociwy cradiov from or by which a thing is known: amd trav caprav
évrevdev éoriv, Plut. Aem. Paul. c. 18,5 dare rods mpo- | emcywooxev, Mt. vii. 16, 20 [here Lchm. ék r. x. ete.]
Tous vexpovs amd dvoiv oradioy katumeceiv, vit. Oth. c. 11, | (Lys. in Andoc. § 6; Aeschin. adv. Tim. p- 69 ed.
1 kateorparoméSevoev and mevtjKovra oradiwv, vit. Philop. | Reiske) ; pavOdvew dé twos to learn from the example
c. 4, 3 hv yap dypds abta dnd oradiov eixoot THs médews) ; | of any one, Mt. xi. 29; xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; but in
cf. W. 557 (518) sq.; [B. 153 (133)]. bof distance | Gal. iii. 2; Col. i. 7; Heb. v. 8, avd. dad rivos means
of Time,—of the temporal terminus from which, (Lat. | to learn from one’s teaching or training [cf. B. 324
inde a): dwd rhs Spas exeivns, Mt. ix. 22; xvii. 18; Jn. | (279) c.; W. 372 (348)]. e. after verbs of seeking, in-
Sab Ol ; dn’ ex. THS Nuepas, Mt. xxii. 46; Jn. xi. 53; [amd | quiring, demanding: amareiv, Lk. xii. 20[Tr WH air. ];
Geeta tnapae sets 28 18; Phil.i.5 (LT Tr WH ris mp. | Cyreiv, 1 Th. ii. 6 (alternating there with é« [cf. W. § 50,
Hu-l; ap npepav dpxaiov, Acts xv. 7; dn’ éraév, Lk. viii. | 2]); éx¢yreiv, Lk. xi. 50 sq.; see airéw. 2. of causal
43; Roeey 23 ; ar aidvos and amd r. adver, Lk. i. 70, | origin, or the Cause; and a. of the material cause,
ete. ; dn’ dpxiis, Mt. xix. 4, 8, etc.; dmd xaraBodjjs kdopov, | so called, or of that which supplies the material for the
Mt. xiii. 35 [LT Tr WHom. xoop.], etc.; dd xricews | maintenance of the action expressed by the verb: so
omy,
amjTro
yeriCer Oa, xopratec Oa, rovreiv, Siaxoveiv amd Tins, — see
those verbs. b. of the cause on account of which
anything is or is done, where commonly it can be ren-
dered for (Lat. prae, Germ. vor): od idivato amd Tod
BxAov, Lk. xix. 3; odxére icyvoav ad Tod mrnOovs, Jn.
xxi. 6, (Judith ii. 20) ; amd r. dd€ns rod dorés, Acts xxii.
11; [here many would bring in Heb. v. 7 (W.371 (348) ;
B. 322 (276)), see I. 3d. above]. c. of themoving or
impelling cause (Lat. ex, prae; Germ. aus, vor), for,
out of: amd tis xapas avrod tmdye, Mt. xiii. 44; dad Tod
PdBov for fear, Mt. xiv. 26; xxviii. 4; Lk. xxi. 26.
Hebraistically : poBeiaGa amd twos (ja N72), Mt. x. 28;
Lk. xii. 4; pevyew amd twos Gis) D1), to flee for fear of
one, Jn. x. 5; Mk. xiv. 52 (RG, but L Tr mrg. br. dv’
airav) ; Rev. ix.6; cf. pevyw and W. 223 (209 sq.). d.
of the efficient cause, viz. of things from the force of
which anything proceeds, and of persons from whose
will, power, authority, command, favor, order, influence,
direction, anything is to be sought; aa. in general: dé
tov umvov by force of the sleep, Acts xx. 93 dad cod
onpuetov, Mt. xii. 38; dad Odéns eis SdEav, 2 Co. iii. 18
(from the glory which we behold for ourselves [cf. W.
254 (238)] in a mirror, goes out a glory in which we
share, cf. Meyer ad loe.); a6 kupiov mvevtparos by the
Spirit of the Lord [yet cf. B. 343 (295)], ibid.; dreOpov
dé mpocwrov Tov kupiov destruction proceeding from the
(incensed, wrathful) countenance of the Lord, 2 Th.
i. 9 (on this passage, to be explained after Jer. iv. 26
Sept., cf. Ewald); on the other hand, dvawvécs amd mpo-
oorov T. k. Acts iii. 20 (19); amexravOnoay amo (Rec. tr)
Tay mAnyav, Rev. ix. 18.
Tov, an expression esp. com. in John, of himself (myself,
etc.), from his own disposition or judgment, as distin-
guished from another’s instruction, [cf. W. 372 (348)]:
Ie sai, Be seas Any ve IE as cael sane KDR ee26
13; xviii. 34 [L Tr WH dzé ceavr.]; 2 Co. iii.5; x. 7(T
Tr WH ef é. (see emi A. I. 1 ¢’.)]; of one’s own will and
motion, as opp. to the command and authority of another:
Jn. vii. 17 sq. 28; viii. 42; x.18, (Num. xvi. 28) ; by one’s
own power: Jn. xv. 4; by one’s power and on one’s own
judgment: Jn. viii. 28; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in
Kypke, Observ. i. p. 391. [Cf. edyny éxovres ad’ (al. ef’ see
émit A. I. 1 f.) éavray, Acts xxi. 23 WH txt.] after verbs
of learning, knowing, receiving, aré is used of him to whom
we are indebted for what we know, receive, possess, [cf. W.
370 (347) n., also De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p.7 sq. ; B. 324
(279); Mey. on 1 Co. xi. 23; per contra Bp. Lghtft.
on Gal. i. 12]: dkovew, Acts ix. 13; 1Jn.i.5; ywookew,
Mk. xv. 45; NapBdvew, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; 1 Jn. ii. 27; iil.
22 L T Tr WH; éyew, 1 Jn. iv. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3, ete. ;
mapadapBavew, 1 Co. xi. 23; d€yecOa, Acts xxvii. 21;
respecting pavOdavew see above, Il. 1 d.; Aarpedo 76 bed
dmé mpoydvev after the manner of the Aarpeia received
from my forefathers [cf. W. 372 (349); B. 322 (277)], 2
Tim. i. 3. yiverat pot, 1 Co. i. 80; iv. 5; xapes ard Geod
or rod 6eo0, from God, the author, bestower, Ro. i. 7; 1
Co. i. 3; Gal. i. 3, and often ; Kai Todo a6 Geod, Phil. i. 28.
Gnéarodos ané etc., constituted an apostie by authority
> (ea a > 2c: col > bl
ad’ €avtov, ap’ éavtaev, ar’ euav-
59
aToBaive
and commission, etc. [cf. W. 418 (390)], Gal.i.1. after
macyew, Mt. xvi. 21; [akin to this, acc. to many, is Mt.
XXVii. 9 dy erysnoavro ard rév vidy Iopajd, R. V. mrg.
whom they priced on the part of the sons of Israel; but see
in I. 2 above]. bb. When do is used after passives
(which is rare in the better Grk. auth., cf. Bnhdy. p. 222
sqq-; [B.325 (280); W. 371 (347 sq.)]), the connection
between the cause and the effect is conceived of as looser
and more remote than that indicated by ind, and may
often be expressed by on the part of (Germ. von Seiten),
[A. V. generally of}: dmd rod cod dmodedevyyévoy ap-
proved (by miracles) according to God’s will and ap-
pointment, Acts ii. 22; dad 6eod meupd¢ouae the cause of
my temptation is to be sought in God, Jas. i. 13; dme-
arepnnevos [T Tr WH ddvorep.] af’ iuay by your fraud,
Jas. v.4; amodoxpateo Oa, Lk. xvii. 25; [éStxaroOny copia
and tov rexvov, Lk. vii. 35 acc. to some; see dixaida, yA
TéTov nrotmacpevov ano Tod Geod by the will and direction
of God, Rev. xii. 6 ; 6yNovpevor amd (Rec. ind, [see 6xXێw])
mveupatey axadapt. Lk. vi. 18 (whose annoyance by dis-
eases [(?) cf. vs. 17] proceeded from unclean spirits
[A. V. vexed (troubled) with ete.]); dm r. capkos éomtXo-
pévov by touching the flesh, Jude 23 ; [add Lk. i. 26 T Tr
WH ameorakn 6 dyyeXos and (R G Lins) rot beot]. As
in prof. auth. so also in the N. T. the Mss. sometimes
vary between amé and tro: e.g. in Mk. viii. 31; [ Lk. viii.
43]; Acts iv. 36; [x. 17, 33; xv. 4]; Ro. xiii. 1; [xv.
24]; Rev ix. 18; see W. 370 (347) sq.; B. 325 (280)
sq.; [ef. Vincent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App.
§ 41].
III. Phrases having a quasi-adverbial force, and in-
dicating the manner or degree in which anything is
done or occurs, are the following: do r. kapdiav tpav
from your hearts, i. e. willingly and sincerely, Mt. xviii.
353 amo pépous in part, 2 Co. i. 14; ii. 5; Ro. xi. 253 xv.
24; ab puas sc. either pavis with one voice, or yywpuns or
Woyns with one consent, one mind, Lk. xiv. 18 (cf. Kuinoel
ad loc.; [ W. 423 (394) ; 591 (549 sq.); yet see Lob. Par-
alip. p. 363]).
IV. The extraordinary construction a6 6 dv (for Ree.
amd Tov 6) Kal 6 HY Kal 6 epydpuevos, Rev. i. 4, finds its ex-
planation in the fact that the writer seems to have used
the words 6 dv «rd. as an indeclinable noun, for the
purpose of indicating the meaning of the proper name
m7; cf. W. § 10, 2 fin.; [B. 50 (43) ].
V. In composition azo indicates separation, liberation,
cessation, departure, as in droBddX, droxinrw, arroxuNa,
dmodvw, aroAtTpwats, amahyew, amepxopnac; finishing and
completion, as in drapti¢w, amoreh€w ; refers to the pat-
tern from which a copy is taken, as in anoypadeww, adopot-
ovy, etc.; or to him from whom the action proceeds, as
in dmodeixvupt, amroToApda, etc.
drro-Balvw: fut. dropsnoopar; 2 aor. amreBnv; Lento
come down from: a ship (so even in Hom.), azd, Lk. v. 2
[Tr mrg. br. an’ abrov]; eis tay ynv, In. xxi. 9. 2:
trop. to turn out, ‘eventuate,’ (so fr. Hdt. down) : arroBn-
erat bpiv eis paproproy it will issue, turn out, Lk. xxi. 13; ets
owrtnplav, Phil. i. 19. (Job xiii. 16; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) *
aTroBaAdrw
daro-BdAXw : 2 aor. dréBadov; [fr. Hom. down]; to throw
off, cast away: a garment, Mk. x. 50. trop. confidence,
Heb. x. 35.*
&mo-Brérw: [impf. dméBrerov]; to turn the eyes away
from other things and fix them on some one thing ; to look
at attentively : eis re (often in Grk. writ.) ; trop. to look
with steadfast mental gaze: eis r. proOamodociav, Heb. xi.
26 [W. § 66, 2d.].*
&m6-BAntos, -ov, thrown away, to be thrown away, re-
jected, despised, abominated: as unclean, 1 Tim. iv. 4,
(in Hos. ix. 3 Symm. equiv. toNpv unclean; Hom. Il. 2,
361; 3, 65; Leian., Plut.)*
daro-Bodh, -7s, 77, @ throwing away ; 1. rejection, re-
pudiation, (dmoBddXecba to throw away from one’s self,
cast off, repudiate): Ro. xi. 15 (opp. to mpdaAnpyis airav,
objec. gen.). 2. a losing, loss, (fr. dmoBaddw in the
sense of lose): Acts xxvii. 22 dmroBodr Wuxis ovdepia
éorat e& yey no one of you shall lose his life [W. § 67,
le.]. .(Plat., Plut., al.)*
&rro-yivopat: [2 aor. dmeyevopny] ; 1. to be removed
from, depart. 2. to die, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down); hence trop. amoy. tui to die to any thing: rats
dpaptias amoyevdpevor i. e. become utterly alienated from
our sins, 1 Pet. ii. 24 [W. § 52, 4,1 d.; B. 178 (155) ].*
&rro-ypah, -7s, 7), (amoypdda) ; a. a writing off, trans-
cript (from some pattern). b. an enrolment (or regis-
tration) in the public records of persons together with their
property and income, as the basis of an dmoripnots (census
or valuation), i.e. that it might appear how much tax
should be levied upon each one: Lk. ii. 2; Acts v. 37;
on the occurrence spoken of in both pass. cf. Schiirer,
Ntl. Zeitgesch. § 17, pp. 251, 262-286, and books there
mentioned; [McClellan i. 392-399; B. D. s. v. Taxing ].*
arro-ypadw: Mid., [pres. inf. dmoypapeoOar]; 1 aor.
inf. adnoypayacOa; [pf. pass. ptcp. droyeypappevos ; fr.
Hdt. down]; a. to write off, copy (from some pattern).
b. to enter in a register or records; spec. to enter in the
public records the names of men, their property and income,
to enroll, (cf. dmoypadn, b.); mid. to have one’s self registered,
to enroll one’s self [W.§ 38, 3]: Lk. ii. 1, 3, 5; pass. of ev
ovpavois aroyeypappevor those whose names are inscribed
in the heavenly register, Heb. xii. 23 (the reference is
to the dead already received into the heavenly city, the
figure being drawn from civil communities on earth,
whose citizens are enrolled in a register).*
Grro-Selkvupt; 1 aor. dmédeEa; pf. pass. ptep. drodedery-
pevos; (freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. Nem. 6, 80 down) ;
1. prop. to point away from one’s self, to point out, show
forth; to expose to view, exhibit, (Hdt. 3, 122 and often) :
1 Co. iv. 9. Hence 2. to declare : twa, to show, prove
what kind of a person any one is, Acts ii. 22 (where cod.
D gives the gloss [SedoxipJacpévov) ; 2 Th. ii.4[Lcehm. mrg.
drodevyviovra]. to prove by arguments, demonstrate: Acts
xxv. 7. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 16 sq.*
Grrd-SerEts, -ews, 7, (dmodeixvups, q. v.), [fr. Hdt. down];
a. amaking manifest, showing forth. b. a demonstration,
proof: amddegis mveiparos cai duvduews a proof by the
Spirit and power of God, operating in me, and stirring in
60
aTroblow
the minds of my hearers the most holy emotions and
thus persuading them, 1 Co. ii. 4 (contextually opposed
to proof by rhetorical arts and philosophic arguments,
—the sense in which the Greek philosophers use the
word ; [see Heinrici, Corinthierbr. i. p. 103 sq.]).*
dro-Sexarevw, Lk. xviii. 12, for dmodexaréw q. v-; [ef.
WH. App. p. 171].
Gro-Sexatow, -&, inf. pres. dodexaroiv, Heb. vii. 5 T
Tr WH (cf. Delitzsch ad loc.; B. 44 (38); [Tdf.’s note
ad loc.; WH. Intr. § 410]); (8exarow q. v-); a bibl. and
eccl. word ; Sept. for wy; to tithe 1. e. 1. with acc. of
the thing, to give, pay, a tenth of any thing: Mt. xxiii. 23 ;
Lk. xi. 42; xviii. 12 where T WH, after codd. 8* B only,
have adopted dzodexarevw, for which the simple dexarevo
is more common in Grk. writ.; (Gen. xxviii. 22; Deut.
xiv. 21(22)). 2. rwa, to exact, receive, atenth from any
one: Heb. vii. 5; (18. viii. 15,17). [B.D.s.v. Tithe.] *
ar6-Sextos [so L T WH accent (and Ree. in 1 Tim. ii.
3) ; al. dmodexrés, cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 498; Gottling p. 313
sq-; Chandler § 529 sq.], -ov, (see dmodéxouar), a later
word, accepted, acceptable, agreeable: 1 Tim. ii. 3; v. 4.*
é&rro-S€xop.a1; depon. mid. ; impf. aredexdunv; 1 aor. are-
deEdunv; 1 aor. pass. awedéxOnv; common in Grk. writ.,
esp. the Attic, fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. used only by
Luke; to accept what is offered from without (ar, cf. Lat.
excipio), to accept from, receive: twa, simply, to give
one access to one’s self, Lk. ix.11 LT Tr WH; Acts
xxviii. 30; with emphasis [cf. Tob. vii. 17 and Fritzsche
ad loc.], to receive with joy, Lk. viii. 40; to receive to
hospitality, Acts xxi. 17 L T Tr WH;; to grant one ac-
cess to one’s self in the capacity in which he wishes to be
regarded, e. g. as the messenger of others, Acts xv. 4 (L
T Tr WH mapedéxOnoav) ; as a Christian, Acts xviii. 27;
metaph. ri, fo receive into the mind with assent: to ap-
prove, Acts xxiv. 3; to believe, roy Aédyov, Acts ii. 41; (so
in Grk. writ. esp. Plato; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p. 232).*
aroSpew, -@; 1 aor. dmednunoa; (awddypos, q- V+); to
go away to foreign parts, go abroad: Mt. xxi. 33; xxv. 14
sq.; Mk. xii.1; Lk. xv. 13 (els yopav); xx.9. (In Grk.
writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
Gré-Syp0s, -ov, (fr. awd and d%pos the people), away
from one’s people, gone abroad: Mk. xiii. 34 [R. V. so-
Journing in another country]. [From Pind. down.]*
Grro-SiSwpi, pres. ptep. neut. amodidodv (fr. the form
-O.dda, Rev. xxii. 2, where T Tr WH mre. -didovs [see
WH. App. p. 167]) ; impf. 3 pers. plur. dmedidouv (for the
more com. aredidocay, Actsiv. 33; cf. W. § 14, 1c.) ; fut.
adrodaow; 1 aor. aréSoxa; 2 aor. anédwv, impv. arddos,
subj. 3 pers. sing. dod and in 1 Thess. v. 15 Tdf. drrodoi
(see did@pt), opt. 3 pers. sing. drodey [or rather, -8gy ; for
-do7 is a subjunctive form] (2 Tim. iv. 14, for arrodoin,
cf. W.§ 14, 1¢.; B. 46 (40); yet T Tr WH dmoddcer) ;
Pass., 1 aor. inf. dmodo@jvac; Mid., 2 aor. dweddsuny, 3 pers.
sing. amédoro (Heb. xii. 16, where L WH dédSero; cf. B.
47 (41); Delitzsch on Hebr. p. 632 note; [WH. App. p.
167]); a common verb in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, and
the N. T. does not deviate at all from their use of it;
prop. to put away by giving, to give up, give over, (Germ.
atrodtopivo
abgeben, [ct. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 12 sq.
who regards dé as denoting to give from some reserved
store, or to give over something which might have been
retained, or to lay off some burden of debt or duty; cf.
Cope on Aristot. rhet.1,1,7]); 1. to deliver, relinquish
what is one’s own: 76 cdpa tod Inood, Mt. xxvii. 58 ; hence
in mid. to give away for one’s own profit what is one’s own,
i. e. to sell [W. 253 (238)]: ri, Acts v. 8; Heb. xii. 16;
twa, Acts vii. 9, (often in this sense in Grk. writ., esp.
the Attic, fr. Hdt. 1, 70 down; in Sept. for 139, Gen.
xxv. 33 etce.; Bar. vi. [i. e. Ep. Jer.] 27 (28)). 2. to
pay off, discharge, what is due, (because a debt, like a
burden, is thrown off, amd, by being paid) : a debt (Germ.
abtragen), Mt. v. 26; xviii. 25-30, 34; Lk. vii. 42; x. 35;
xii. 59; wages, Mt. xx.8; tribute and other dues to the
government, Mt. xxii. 21; Mk. xii.17; Lk. xx. 25; Ro.
xili. 7; produce due, Mt. xxi. 41; Heb. xii. 11; Rev. xxii.
2; épxovs things promised under oath, Mt. v. 33, cf.
Num. xxx. 3, (edyqv a vow, Deut. xxiii. 21, etc.) ; con-
jugal duty, 1 Co. vii. 3 ; duou8ds grateful requitals, 1 Tim.
v. 4; Adyoy to render account: Mt. xii. 36; Lk. xvi. 2;
Acts xix. 40; Ro. xiv. 12 L txt. Tr txt.; Heb. xiii. 17;
1 Pet. iv. 5; papripiov to give testimony (as something
officially due), Acts iv. 33. Hence _ 38. to give back, re-
store: Lk. iv. 20; [vii. 15 Lehm. mrg.]; ix. 42; xix. 8.
4. to requite, recompense, in a good or a bad sense: Mt.
vi. 4, 6,18; xvi. 27; Ro.ii. 6; 2 Tim.iv. [8], 14; Rev.
Xvili. 6; xxii. 12; kakov avti Kakod, Ro. xii. 17; 1 Th. v.
15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. [Comp.: avt-arodiSape. |*
daro-S-opit ; (Svopi{@, and this fr. dpos a limit); by
drawing boundaries to disjoin, part, separate from anoth-
er: Jude 19 (of dmod.opifovres éavrovs those who by
their wickedness separate themselves from the living
fellowship of Christians; if éaur. be dropped, with Rec
GLT Tr WH, the rendering is making divisions or sep-
arations). (Aristot. pol. 4, 4, 13 [p. 1290», 25].)*
drro-BSokipdte : (see doxiudtw); 1 aor. dreSoxipaca; Pass.,
1 aor. dredoxipdoOnv; pf. ptep. dmodedoxiacpevos ; to dis-
approve, reject, repudiate: Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. viii. 31; xii.
NORSK ix se2 Op eRVLl yOu exx lies Me etaind. e715, ELebs-xil.
17. (Equiv. to ON? in Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 22; Jer. viil. 9,
etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 6, 130 down.)*
&ro-S0xh, -7s, 9, (amodéxopuat, q. v.), reception, admis-
sion, acceptance, approbation, [A. V. acceptation]: 1 Tim.
i.15;iv.9. (Polyb. 2, 56,1; 6, 2, 13, etc. ; 6 Adyos dmo-
Soxjs tuyxaver id. 1, 5,5; Diod. 4, 84; Joseph. antt. 6, 14,
4; al. [cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 124].) *
dmdé-leors, -ews, 7, [dmoriOnur], a putting off or away: 2
Pet. i. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 21. [In various senses fr. Hippoc.
and Plato down. |*
éaro-O4{Kn, -7NS, 9, (aroriOnuc), a place in which any thing
is laid by or up; a storehouse, granary, [A. V. garner,
barn]: Mt. iii. 12; vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; xii. 18,
24. (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 26; Thue. 6, 97.)*
aro-Oncavpite ; to put away, lay by in store, to treasure
away, [seponendo thesaurum colligere, Win. De verb.
comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 10]; to store up abundance for future
use: 1 Tim. vi. 19. [Sir. iii. 4; Diod., Joseph., Epict., al. ]*
61
> /
aTodvncKw
drr0-OX (Bw ; to press on all sides, squeeze, press hard : Lk.
viii. 45. (Num. xxii. 25; used also of pressing out grapes
and olives, Diod. 3, 62; Joseph. antt. 2, 5, 2; [al.].)*
&ro-Avickw, impf. dméOynoxov (Lk. viii. 42); 2 aor.
anéOavov ; fut. drobavodpa, Ro. v. 7; Jn. viii. 21, 24,
(see @oxe) ; found in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to die
(amd, so as to be no more; [cf. Lat. emorior; Eng. die
off or out, pass away]; Germ. absterben, ver sterben) ;
I. used properly 1. of the natural death of men:
Mt. ix. 24; xxii. 24; Lk. xvi. 22; Jn. iv.47; Ro. vii. 2,
and very often; dmroOvnckortes dvOpwmor subject to death,
mortal, Heb. vii. 8 [B. 206 (1 78) |. 2. of the violent
death —both of animals, Mt. viii. 32, and of men, Mt.
Xxvi. 35; Acts xxi. 13 etc.; 1 Pet. iii. 18 LT Tr WH txt.;
ev dévm paxaipas, Heb. xi. 37; of the punishment of
death, Heb. x. 28; often of the violent death which
Christ suffered, as Jn. xii. 33; Ro. v. 6, etc. 3.
Phrases: drroOvnok. ék tivos to perish by means of some-
thing, [cf. Eng. to die of], Rev. viii. 11; év rq dpapria,
év Tats duaprias, fixed in sin, hence to die unreformed,
Jn. vill. 21, 24; ev 7G ’ASddw by connection with “Adam,
1 Co. xv. 22; év kvpi@ in fellowship with, and trusting in,
the Lord, Rev. xiv. 13; dmoOvjok. m1 to die a certain
death, Ro. vi. 10, (@avarov paxpdv, Charit. p. 12 ed. D’Or-
ville [1. i. c. 8 p. 17, 6 ed. Beck; cf. W. 227 (213); B. 149
(130) ]); 77. dpapria, used of Christ, ‘that he might
not have to busy himself more with the sin of men,’ Ro.
vi. 10; éavr@ to become one’s own master, independent,
by dying, Ro. xiv. 7 [ef. Meyer]; r@ xupig to become
subject to the Lord’s will by dying, Ro. xiv. 8 [cf. Mey.];
Oud teva i. e. to save one, 1 Co. viii. 11; on the phrases dzo-
Ovinok. mepi and dep tuvos, see mepi I. c. 6. and tmép I.
2and 8. Oratorically, although the proper signification
of the verb is retained, ca® juépav amobvnoxo I meet
death daily, live daily in danger of death, 1 Co. xv. 31,
cf. 2 Co. vi.9. 4. of trees which dry up, Jude 12; of
seeds, which while being resolved into their elements in
the ground seem to perish by rotting, Jn. xii. 24; 1 Co. xv.
36. II. tropically, in various senses ; 1. of eternal
death, as it is called, i. e. to be subject to eternal misery,
and that, too, already beginning on earth: Ro. viii. 13;
Ain, Nain HE or OS, 2. of moral death, in various
senses; a. to be deprived of real life, i.e. esp. of the
power of doing right, of confidence in God and the hope
of future blessedness, Ro. vii. 10; of the spiritual torpor
of those who have fallen from the fellowship of Christ,
the fountain of true life, Rev. iii. 2. b. with dat. of the
thing [cf. W. 210 (197); 428 (398); B. 178 (155)], to
become wholly alienated from a thing, and freed from
all connection with it: 76 vdue, Gal. ii. 19, which must
also be supplied with amo@avdvr es (for so we must read
for Rec*!4 droOavévros) in Ro. vii. 6 [ef. W. 159 (150) ];
Th dpapria, Ro. vi. 2 (in another sense in vs. 10; see I.
3 above); dé rév orotxeloy Tov Kécpov so that your re-
lation to etc. has passed away, Col. ii. 20, (amd rev mabav,
Porphyr. de abst. animal. 1, 41 [cf. B. 322 (277) ; W. 370
(347)]); true Christians are said simply dro@aveiy, as hav-
ing put off all sensibility to worldly things that draw them
aTroKkad ia Tn pt
away from God, Col. iii. 3; since they owe this habit -of
mind to the death of Christ, they are said also amo@aveiv
oiv Xpiord, Ro. vi. 8; Col. ii. 20. [Comp.: ovramo-
Ounce. |
ro-Kad-lornpt, amoxabiordw (Mk. ix. 12 amoxabiora
RG), and droxabiorav (Mk. ix. 12 LT Tr [but WH
énoxariardve, see their App. p. 168]; Acts i..6; cf. W.
78 (75); [B. 44 sq. (39)]); fut. amoxataotngw; 2 aor.
dmexaréorny (with double augm., [cf. Ex. iv. 7; Jer. xxiii.
8], Mk. viii. 25 T Tr WH); 1 aor. pass. amoxareat any
or, acc. to the better reading, with double augm. amexare-
ordbny, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. vi. 10 gnat. ad Smyrn.
11; cf.[ WH. App. p. 162]; W. 72 (69 sq.) ; [B. 35 (31)];
Mullach p. 22); asin Grk. writ. fo restore to its former state ;
2 aor. act. to be in its former state : used of parts of the
body restored to health, Mt. xii. 13; INOS hol, BE UD yy.
10; of a man cured of blindness, Mk. viii. 25; of the
restoration of dominion, Acts i. 6 (1 Mace. xv. 3); of
the restoration of a disturbed order of affairs, Mt. xvii.
11; Mk. ix. 12; ofa man at a distance from his friends
and tobe restored to them, Heb. xiii. 19.*
dmro-Kadvare : fut. droxahve ; 1 aor.dmrexaduia; [ Pass.,
pres. dmoxahimrouat|; 1 aor. dmexadiOnv; 1 fut. azo-
caupOnoopat; in Grk. writ. fr. [| Hdt. and] Plat. down; in
Sept. equiv. to ra) ; 1. prop. to uncover, lay open what
has been veiled or covered up; to disclose, make bare: Ex.
xx. 26; Lev. xviii. 11 sqq.; Num. v. 18; Sus. 32; ra
o776n, Plat. Prot. p. 352 a.; tv cepadny, Plut. Crass. 6.
2. metaph. to make known, make manifest, disclose,
what before was unknown; a. pass. of any method
whatever by which something before unknown becomes
evident: Mt. x. 26; Lk. xii. 2. b. pass. of matters which
come to light from things done: Lk. ii. 85 [some
make the verb mid. here]; Jn. xii. 38 (Is. lili. 1); Ro. i.
18; from the gospel: Ro. i. 17. c. dmoxadirrew Ti
tur is used of God revealing to men things unknown
[Dan. ii. 19 Theod., 22, 28; Ps. xevii. (xeviii.) 2; 1S. ii.
27, cf. iii. 21], especially those relating to salvation : —
whether by deeds, Mt. xi. 25; xvi. 17; Lk. x. 21 (by in-
timacy with Christ, by his words and acts) ;— or by the
Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 10; xiv. 30; Eph. iii. 5; Phil. iii. 15;
1 Pet. i. 125 rv vidv adrod év euoi who, what, how great
his Son is, in my soul, Gal. i. 16. Of Christ teaching men:
Mt. xi. 27; Lk. x. 22. d. pass. of things, previously
non-existent, coming into being and to view: as, 4 dééa,
Ro. viii. 18 (e’s mas to be conferred on us); 1 Pet. v.
1; 7 cwrnpia, 1 Pet. i. 5; 4 miotis, Gal. iii. 23; the day
of judgment, 1 Co. iii. 13. e. pass. of persons, previ-
ously concealed, making their appearance in public: of
Christ, who will return from heaven where he is now
hidden (Col. iii. 3) to the earth, Lk. xvii. 30; of Anti-
christ, 2 Th. ii. 3, 6, 8.*
{On this word (and the foll.) cf. Westcott, Introd. to the
Study of the Gospels, p. 9 sq. (Am. ed. 34 sq.) ; Liicke, inl.
in d. Offenb. d. Johan. 2d ed. p. 18 sqq.; esp. /. G. B. van
Bell, Disput. theolog. de vocabulis pavepody et amoxaddmrey in
N. T., Lugd. Bat., 1849. gavepdw is thought to describe an ex-
ternal manifestation, to the senses and hence open to all, but
single or isolated ; amoxaAdmrw an internal disclosure, to the
> /
2 LTOKAPAO, Kia
believer, and abiding. The amoxdAuiis or unveiling precedes
and produces the pavépwous or manifestation ; the former looks
toward the object revealed, the latter toward the persons to
whom the revelation is made. Others, however, seem to
question the possibility of discrimination ; see e. g. Fritz-
sche on Rom. vol. ii. 149. Cf. 1 Co. iii. 13.]
érro-Kdduipis, -ews, 7], (dmoxadimra, q. V.), an uncovering ;
1. prop. a laying bare, making naked (1 S. xx. 30).
2. tropically, in N. T. and eccl. language [see end], a.
a disclosure of truth, instruction, concerning divine
things before unknown—esp. those relating to the
Christian salvation — given to the soul by God himself,
or by the ascended Christ, esp. through the operation of
the Holy Spirit (1 Co. ii. 10), and so to be distinguished
from other methods of instruction; hence, cara damoxd-
Avpw yropiferda, Eph. iii. 3. avedpa droxadiwews, a
spirit received from God disclosing what and how great
are the benefits of salvation, Eph. i. 17, cf. 18. with gen.
of the obj., rod puarnpiov, Ro. xvi. 25. with gen. of the
subj., kupiov, Incod Xpiotov, 2 Co. xii. 1 (revelations by
ecstasies and visions, [so 7]); Gal.i.12; Rev. i. 1 (rev-
elation of future things relating to the consummation of
the divine kingdom) ; kar’ amoxduwu, Gal. ii. 2; Aadeiv
ev amok. to speak on the ground of [al. in the form of}
a revelation, agreeably to a revelation received, 1 Co.
xiv. 6; equiv. to drroxexaduppevoy, in the phrase dmokd-
Aviw éyew, 1 Co. xiv. 26. b. equiv. to 7d dmoxadv-
mrecGa as used of events by which things or states or
persons hitherto withdrawn from view are made visible
to all, manifestation, appearance, cf. amoxahinta, 2, d.
and e.: dds eis dwoxad. eOvayv a light to appear to the
Gentiles [al. render ‘a light for a revelation (of divine
truth) to the Gentiles,’ and so refer the use toa. above],
Lk. ii. 32; dmox. Sixatoxpicias Oeod, Ro. ii. 53 tv viav
tov Geov, the event in which it will appear who and what
the sons of God are, by the glory received from God at
j the last day, Ro. viii. 19; ris ddéns rod Xpicrod, of the
glory clothed with which he will return from heaven, 1
Pet. iv. 13; of this return itself the phrase is used dzo-
KdAvyis Tod Kupiov “I. Xpiarod: 2 Th. i. 7; 1 Co.i. 7; 1 Pet.
1.7, 13. (Among Grk. writ. Plut. uses the word once,
Cat. maj. c. 20, of the denudation of the body, [also in
Paul. Aemil. 14 a. t8drwv; in Quomodo adul. ab amic. 32
a. duaprias; cf. Sir. xi. 27; xxii. 22 etc. See Trench
§ xciv. and reff. s. v. droxadtnra, fin.]) *
Grro-Kapadoxla, -as, 7, (fr. aoxapadoxeiv, and this fr. dz,
kapa the head, and 8oxeiv in the Jon. dial. to watch;
hence kapadoxeiv [Hdt. 7. 163, 168; Xen. mem. 3, 5, 6;
Eur., al.] to watch with head erect or outstretched, to
direct attention to anything, to wait for in suspense;
amoxapadoxeiy (Polyb. 16, 2, 8; 18, 31, 4; 22, 19, 3;
[Plut. parall. p. 310, 43, vol. vii. p- 235 ed. Reiske];
Joseph. b. j. 3, 7, 26, and in Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 7 Aq. for
Soin), anxiously [?] to look forth from one’s post.
But the prefix do refers also to time (like the Germ.
ab in abwarten, [ef. Eng. wait it out]), so that it signifies
constancy in expecting; hence the noun, found in Paul
alone and but twice, denotes), anzious([?] and persistent
expectation: Ro. viii. 19; Phil. i. 20. This word is very
aToKaTav\Xacow 63
fully discussed by C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum
Opusce. p. 150 sqq. ; [cf. Ellic. and Lghtft. on Phil. 1. Cale
@ro-Kat-ahhacow or -rrw: 1 aor. dmoxarH\Aaéa; 2 aor.
pass. droxatnAAdynre (Col. i. 22 (21) L Tr mrg. WH mreg.);
to reconcile completely (dr6), [al. to reconcile back again,
bring back to a former state of harmony; Ellic. on Eph.
ii. 16; Bp. Lghtft. or Bleek on Col. i. 20; Win. De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 7 sq.; yet see Mey. on Eph. 1. c.;
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 278; (see dé V.)], (cf. karad-
Adoow): Col. i. 22 (21) [cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.]; ruvd
tu, Eph. ii. 16; concisely, rdvra els airdv [better adréy
with edd.; cf. B. p. 111 (97) and s. v. abrod], to draw to
himself by reconciliation, or so to reconcile that they
should be devoted to himself, Col. i. 20 [W. 212 (200)
but cf. § 49, a.c.8.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor
in the Grk. O. T.)*
Gtro-KaTd-oTacis, -ews, 7, (amoxabiornut, q. V-), restora-
tion: trav mdvtwv, the restoration not only of the true
theocracy but also of that more perfect state of (even
physical) things which existed before the fall, Acts iii.
21; cf. Meyer ad loc. (Often in Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.)*
[G1o-kat-toTdve, see droxubictnpt. |
and-Ketpat; to be laid away, laid by, reserved, (a6 as in
dmobnoavpifa [q. v.], amoOnkn); a. prop.: Lk. xix. 20.
b. metaph., with dat. of pers., reserved for one, awaiting
him: Col. i. 5 (€Amis hoped-for blessedness) ; 2 Tim. iv.
8 (aredavos) ; Heb. ix. 27 (dmoOaveiv, as in 4 Mace. viii.
10). (In both senses in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down.) *
Gtroxecadl{w: 1 aor. umexepadiaa; (Kedadn); to cut off
the head, behead, decapitate: Mt. xiv. 10; Mk. vi. 16, 27
(28); Lk. ix. 9. A later Grk. word: [Sept. Ps. fin.] ;
Epict. diss. 1, 1, 19; 24; 29; Artem. oneir. 1, 35; cf.
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 690 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 341.*
dro-kXelw : 1 aor. dméxAetoa; to shut up: thy Ovpav, Lk.
xiii. 25. (Gen. xix. 10; 2S. xiii. 17sq.; often in Hdt.;
in Attic prose writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *
Gmo-Kémtw: 1 aor. amexowa; fut. mid. amroxdwopua; to
cut off, amputate: Mk. ix. 43, [45]; Jn. xviii. 10, 26;
Acts xxvii. 32; dpedov kal drroxdwovra: I would that they
(who urge the necessity of circumcision would not only
circumcise themselves, but) would even mutilate them-
selves (or cut off their privy parts), Gal. v. 12. dmoxé-
mrecOat occurs in this sense in Deut. xxiii. 1; [Philo de
alleg. leg. iii. 3 ; de vict. off. § 13; cf. de spec. legg.i.§7];
Epict. diss. 2, 20,19; Leian. Eun. 8; [Dion Cass. 79, 11;
Diod. Sic. 3, 31], and other pass. quoted by Wetst. ad
loc. [and Soph. Lex. s.v.]. Others incorrectly : I would
that they would cut themselves off from the society of
Christians, quit it altogether ; [cf. Mey. and Bp. Lghtft.
Exel Joyen| be
aé-Kpipa, -ros, 7d, (drroxpivopa, q. V- in dmoxpivw), an
answer: 2 Co. i. 9, where the meaning is, ‘On asking
myself whether I should come out safe from mortal peril,
J answered, “I must die.”’ (Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 6 of
an answer (rescript) of the Roman senate; [similarly in
Polyb. excpt. Vat. 12, 26°, tale) *
amo-kpive : [Pass., 1 aor. drexpibny; 1 fut. dmoxpiOnoo-
5) ,
ATTOKPUTT Toe
| pa]; i. to part, separate; Pass. to be parted, separated,
(1 aor. drexpiénv was separated, Hom. Il. v.12; Thue.
2, 49; [4, 72]; Theoph. de caus. plant. 6, 14, 10; [other
exx. in Veitch s. v.]). ii. ta give sentence against one, de-
cide that he has lost; hence Mid., [pres. drroxpivouat; 1 aor.
3 pers. sing. drexpivaro]; (to give forth a decision from
myself [W. 253 (238)]), to give answer, to reply ; so from
Thue. down (and even in Hdt. 5, 49 [Gaisf.]; 8, 101
[Gaisf., Bekk.], who generally uses imoxpivoyac). But
the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. do not give this
sense to the pass. tenses dmexpiOnv, amoxpiOnooua. “The
example adduced from Plat. Alcib. Secund. p. 149 b. [ef.
Stallb. p. 388] is justly diseredited by Sturz, De dial. Alex.
p- 148, since it is without parallel, the author of the dia-
logue is uncertain, and, moreover, the common form is
sometimes introduced by copyists.” Lobeck ad Phryn. p.
108; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 186 sq.; Veitch
s.v.; W. 23 (22)]. But from Polyb. down droxpiOjvat
and damoxpivacOa are used indiscriminately, and in the
Bible the pass. forms are by far the more common. In the
N. T. the aor. middle dzexpivaro is found only in Mt.
SOQ Mba lA WW ahaa bike Tn, Ge soa YS dha, ve ihe
19; xii. 23[RGLTr mrg.]; Acts iii. 12; in the great
majority of places amexpi@n is used; cf. W. § 39, 2; [B.
51 (44)]. 1. to give an answer to a question proposed,
to answer; a. simply: cadés, Mk. xii. 28; vovveyas, 34;
épOas, Lk. x. 28; mpds tt, Mt. xxvii. 14. b. with ace.:
Adyov, Mt. xxii. 46 ; ovdev, Mt. xxvii. 12; Mk. xiv. 61; xv.
4 sq. c. with dat. etc.: i éxdorw, Col. iv. 6; together
with the words which the answerer uses, Jn. v. 7, 11; vi.
7, 68, ete.; the dat. omitted: Jn. vii. 46; viii. 19, 49, ete.
mpos twa, Acts xxv. 16. joined with davat, or déyeww, or
eiveiv, in the form of a ptep., as dmoxpiels etre or en
or Aéyer: Mt. iv. 4; vill. 8; xv. 13; Lk. ix. 19; xiii. 2;
Mk. x. 3, ete.; or dmexpiOn déyov: Mt. xxv. 9, 37, 44;
Lk. iv.4[RGL]; viii. 50[RG Tr mrg. br.]; Jn. i. 26;
x. 83 [Ree.]; xii. 23. But John far more frequently says
drekpiOn kai etre: Jn. i. 48 (49); li. 195 iv. 13; vii. 16, 20
[R G], 52, etc. d. foll. by the inf.: Lk. xx. 7; foll. by
the acc. with inf.: Acts xxv. 4; foll. by ore: Acts xxv. 16.
2. In imitation of the Hebr. ny (Gesenius, Thesaur.
ii. p. 1047) to begin to speak, but always where something
has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks
refer [W. 19]: Mt. xi. 25; xii. 38; xv.15; xvii. 4; xxii.
Pecxvitlieoige Miki. D5) 16 ake dur WEL 5 oxy 24ssiexdey 1 Als exate
35; Lk. xiv. 3; Jn. ii. 18; v.17; Acts iii. 12; Rev. vii.
13. (Sept. [Deut. xxvi. 5]; Is. xiv. 10; Zech. i. 10,
iii. 4, etc.; 1 Mace. ii. 17; viii. 19; 2 Macc. xv. 14.)
[Comp.: dvt-aroxpivopat. |
daré-Kpiots, -ews, 1), (dmoKpivopat, SC amrokpiva), a reply-
ing, an answer: Lk. ii. 47; xx. 26; Jn. i. 22; xix. 9.
(From [Theognis, 1167 ed. Bekk., 345 ed. Welck., andj
Hdt. down.) *
dro-Kptrrw: 1 aor. amexpuwa; pf. pass. ptcp. amokexpup-
pévos; a. to hide: ri, Mt. xxv.18 (L T Tr WH ékpowe).
b. Pass. in the sense of concealing, keeping secret : copia,
1 Co. ii. 7; pvaornpiov, Col. i. 26 (opp. to pavepovoGar) ;
with the addition of ev 76 6eo, Eph. iii. 9; ri amo twos,
>? >
aTroKpupos
Lk. x. 21; Mt. xi. 25 (L T Tr WH ékpuwas), in imitation
of the Hebr. 1, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 10; exviii. (cxix.)
19; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 17; cf. kptmro, [B. 149 (130) ;
189 (163); W. 227 (213)]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down.) *
a&mrékpudos,-ov, (droxpUrrw), hidden, secreted : Mk. iv. 22;
Lk. viii. 17. stored up: Col. ii. 3. (Dan. xi. 43 [Theod. ];
Is. xlv.3; 1 Macc. i. 23; Xen., Eur.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
the word, Col. 1. c., and Ign. i. 351 sq.].)*
daro-krelva, and Aeol. -«révvw (Mt. x. 283 LT Tr; Mk.
xi GW ire hi xii 4 ir 2 Connie ar;
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 507 sq.; [7'd/. Proleg. p. 79]; W.
83 (79); [B. 61 (54)]), dmoxréva (Grsb. in Mt. x. 28; Lk.
xii. 4), droxraive (Lehm. in 2 Co. iii. 6; Rev. xiii. 10),
droxrévyuytes (Mk. xii. 5 WH); fut. drokrev@; 1 aor.
dméxrewa; Pass., pres. inf. drokrévveoOa (Rev. vi. 11
GLTTr WH); 1 aor. drexravOny (Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii.
227; W.1.c.; [B. 41 (35 sq.)]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1.
prop. to kill in any way whatever, (dm i. e. so as to put
out of the way; cf. [Eng. to kill of], Germ. abschlach-
ten): Mt. xvi. 21; xxii. 6; Mk. vi. 19; ix. 31; Jn. v.18;
viii. 22; Acts iii. 15; Rev. ii. 13, and very often ; [dmoxr.
év Oavdre@, Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, cf. B. 184 (159); W. 339
(319)]. to destroy (allow to perish): Mk. iii. 4 [yet al.
take it here absol., to kill]. 2. metaph. to extinguish,
abolish : rv €xOpav, Eph. ii. 16 ; to inflict moral death, Ro.
vii. 11 (see amoOvncka, II. 2) ; to deprive of spiritual life
and procure eternal misery, 2 Co. iii. 6 [Lchm. drroxraiver ;
see above ].
daro-Kv€w, -G, OY drroKvw, (hence 3 pers. sing. pres. either
aroxvet [so WH] or droxvet, Jas. i. 15; cf. W. 88 (84);
B. 62 (54)); 1 aor. amexinoa; (kiw, or kvéw, to be preg-
nant; cf. éyxvos); to bring forth from the womb, give
birth to: twa, Jas. i. 15; to produce, ibid. 18. (4 Mace.
xveli@se Dion. Hals 15) 70ssblut., cians, Aeliva hs 54>
Hdian. 1, 5, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; 1, 4, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.].)*
&rro-kvAlw: fut. droxuNiow ; 1 aor. amexvAuoa; pf. pass.
[3 pers. sing. dmoxexvliorae Mk. xvi. 4 RG Lbut T Tr
WH avakex.], ptcp. droxexvdiopevos ; to roll off or away:
Mt. xxviii. 2; Mk. xvi. 3; Lk. xxiv. 2. (Gen. xxix. 3, 8,
10; Judith xiii. 9; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 37; 5, 11, 3;
Leian. rhet. praec. 3.) But see dvaxvAlw.*
Grro-apBave; fut. amodnoua (Col. iii. 24; LT Tr
WH drodnuecde; see NapBdva) ; 2 aor. dréXaBov; 2 aor.
mid. dreAaBounv; fr. Hdt. down; 1. io receive (from
another, do [cf. Mey. on Gal. iv. 5; Ellic. ibid. and Win.
De verb. comp. etc. as below]) what is due or promised
(cf. drodidwps, 2): 7. viobeciav the adoption promised to
believers, Gal. iv. 5; ra dya6d cov thy good things, “ which
thou couldst expect and as it were demand, which seemed
due to thee” (Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. iv. p. 13),
Lk. xvi. 25. Hence 2. to take again or back, to recover:
Lk. vi. 34 [T Tr txt. WH daBeiv]; xv. 27; and to receive
by way of retribution: Lk. xviii. 30 (L txt. Tr mrg. WH
txt. AaBy); xxiii. 41; Ro. i. 27; 2 Jn. 83; Col. iii. 24.
3. to take from others, take apart or aside; Mid. rid, to
take a person with one aside out of the view of others:
with the addition of a6 rod byXov Kar idlay in Mk. vii.
64
ATTONAY Mt
33, (Joseph. b. j. 2, 7, 2; and in the Act., 2 Mace. vi. 22;
‘Yordorea drokaBov porvov, Hdt. 1, 209; Arstph. ran.
78; idia éva tév TpL@v arodaBor, App. b. civ. 5, 40).
4. to receive any one hospitably: 3 Jn. 8, where L T Tr
WH have restored troAapBaveuv.*
dmréAXavors, -ews, 7, (fr. droAatw to enjoy), enjoyment
(Lat. fructus): 1 Tim. vi. 17 (eis dédavow to enjoy) ;
Heb. xi. 25 (dwaprias dod. pleasure born of sin). (In
Grk. writ. fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)*
dro-helrw: [impf. dwéAeurov, WH txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 13,
20; Tit. i.5]; 2 aor. dwédurov; (fr. Hom. down] ; 1. to
leave, leave behind: one in some place, Tit. i. 5 LT Tr
WH;; 2 Tim. iv. 13, 20. Pass. dwodeterat it remains, is
reserved: Heb. iv. 9; x. 26; foll. by acc. and inf., Heb.
iv. 6. 2. to desert, forsake: a place, Jude 6.*
@mro-hetxw: [impf. dmédeyov]; to lick off, lick up: Lk.
xvi. 21 RG; cf. émAeixo. ([Apollon. Rhod. 4, 478];
Athen. vi. c. 13 p. 250 a.) *
én-odAvpe and dmrodAvo ([drodAdver Jn. xii. 25 T TrWH],
impv. aoAdve Ro. xiv. 15, [cf. B. 45 (39); WH. App. p.
168 sq.]); fut. doA€ow and (1 Co. i. 19 avod@ fr. a pass.
in the O. T., where often) dwode (cf. W. 83 (80); [B.
64 (56)]); laor. dmaAeoa; to destroy; Mid., pres. dmé)-
Avpat; [impf. 3 pers. plur. draddvvto 1 Co. x. 9 T Tr
WH]; fut. drododpar; 2 aor. dtwAdpunv; (2 pf. act. ptep.
dmodwhos) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to perish. 1. to destroy
i. e. to put out of the way entirely, abolish, put an end to,
ruin: Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34; xvii. 27, 29; Jude 5; rip
codiay render useless, cause its emptiness to be perceived,
1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Sept. of Is. xxix. 14) 5 to kill: Mt. ii. 13;
xii. 14; Mk. ix. 22; xi. 18; Jn. x. 10, ete.; contextually,
to declare that one must be put to death: Mt. xxvii. 20;
metaph. to devote or give over to eternal misery: Mt. x.
28; Jas. iv. 12; contextually, by one’s conduct to cause
another to lose eternal salvation: Ro. xiv. 15. Mid. to
perish, to be lost, ruined, destroyed; a. of persons; a.
properly : Mt. viii. 25; Lk. xiii. 3, 5, 33; Jn. xi. 50; 2
Pet. iii.6; Jude 11, ete.; dmodAdAvpar Ao, Lk. xv. 17; &v
payaipa, Mt. xxvi. 52; cataBadddpevor, GAN ovK amoAAT-
pevot, 2 Co. iv. 9. 8B. tropically, to incur the loss of true
or eternal life; to be delivered up to eternal misery: Jn.
iii. 15 [R Lbr.], 16; x. 28; xvii. 12, (it must be borne in
mind, that ace. to John’s conception eternal life begins
on earth, just as soon as one becomes united to Christ by
faith) 3) Ro, 11512); 16 Co. viii xv. Sie Rete 19:
Hence of ca fopuevor they to whom it belongs to partake of
salvation, and of droAdvpevor those to whom it belongs to
perish or to be consigned to eternal misery, are con-
trasted by Paul: 1 Co. 1.18; 2Co. ii. 15; iv. 3; 2 Th. ii.
10, (on these pres. pteps. cf. W. 342 (321); B. 206
(178)). b. of things; to be blotted out, to vanish away:
i) evmpérea, Jas. i. 11; the heavens, Heb. i. 11 (fr. Ps. ci.
(cii.) 27); to perish, —of things which on being thrown
away are decomposed, as pédos rod oaparos, Mt. v. 29
sq-; remnants of bread, Jn. vi. 12; or which perish in
some other way, as Bpdoats, Jn. vi. 27; ypuciov, 1 Pet. i. 7;
— or which are ruined so that they can no longer subserve
the use for which they were designed, as of doxoi: Mt.
-AtroANVwv
axew Mika tis 22 Mlukevens ve 2. to destroy i.e. to lose;
a. prop.: Mt. x. 42; Mk. ix. 41 (rov puoOov adrov); Lk.
KVtas SX 20s KVILESS 3 Ny Xie 2) 2 Jn. 8, etc.
b. metaph. Christ is said to lose any one of his followers
(whom the Father has drawn to discipleship) if such a
one becomes wicked and fails of salvation: Jn. vi. 39, cf.
xvili. 9. Mid. to be lost: Opié ek tis Kkepadijs, Lk. xxi.
18; 6. amd rhs Kepadijs, Acts xxvii. 34 (Rec. meceira.) ;
Ta Aapmpa drodero amo cov, Rev. xviii. 14 (Rec. dmjdOe).
Used of sheep, straying from the flock: prop. Lk. xv. 4
(76 droAwdos, in Mt. xviii. 12 7d mAavapevov). Metaph.
in accordance with the O. T. comparison of the people
of Israel to a flock (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 6; Ezek. xxxiv. 4,
16), the Jews, neglected by their religious teachers, left
to themselves and thereby in danger of losing eternal sal-
vation, wandering about as it were without guidance, are
called ra mpdBata Ta aroh@déra Tod oikov Iopand: Mt. x.
6; xv. 24, (Is. lili.6; 1 Pet. ii. 25); and Christ, reclaim-
ing them from wickedness, is likened to a shepherd and
is said (nreiv cal cd ew 7d drodwAds: Lk. xix. 10; Mt.
xvill. 11 Ree. [Come.: cvv-amddAvp. |
*Arohddev, -ovros, 6, (ptep. fr. dwoAAvw), Apollyon (a
prop. name, formed by the author of the Apocalypse),
i. e. Destroyer: Rev. ix. 11; ef. ABdddev, [and B. D.
Chivelee
*ArroAhovia, -as, 7, Apollonia, a maritime city of Mace-
donia, about a day’s journey [ace. to the Antonine Itiner-
ary 32 Roman miles] from Amphipolis, through which
Paul passed on his way to Thessalonica [36 miles fur-
ther]: Acts xvii. 1. [See B. D.s. v.]*
*Aro)ds [acc. to some, contr. fr. "AmoAA@vios, W. 102
(97) ; ace. to others, the o is lengthened, cf. Fick, Griech.
Personennamen, p. xxi. ], gen. -o (cf. B. 20 (18) sq.; [W.
62 (61) ]), accus. -® (Acts xix. 1) and -dy (1 Co. iv. 6 T
Vile ete iielion le VWeElecieVieeeA pp. ps 505
Kihner i. p. 315), 6, Apollos, an Alexandrian Jew who
became a Christian and a teacher of Christianity,
attached to the apostle Paul: Acts xviii. 24; xix. 1; 1
Conia? ii. 4 sqq225)ive6; xvi. 12se0it. ai.A3.*
Grodoyéopat, -odpat; impf. dredoyovpny (Acts xxvi. 1);
1 aor. dmedoynodpny; 1 aor. pass. inf. drodoynOjvat, in a
reflex. sense (Lk. xxi. 14) ; a depon. mid. verb (fr. Adyos),
prop. to speak so as to absolve (amo) one’s self, talk one’s
self off of a charge etc. ; 1. to defend one’s self, make
one’s defence: absol., Lk. xxi. 14; Acts xxvi. 1; foll. by
6rt, Acts xxv. 8; ri, to bring forward something in de-
fence of one’s self, Lk. xii. 11; Acts xxvi. 24, (often so
in Grk. writ. also) ; ra mepi €yavrod ar. either I bring for-
ward what contributes to my defence [?], or I plead my own
cause [R. V. make my defence], Acts xxiv. 10; mepi with
gen. of the thing and emi with gen. of pers., concerning a
thing before one’s tribunal, Acts xxvi. 2; with dat. of
the person whom by my defence I strive to convince that
I am innocent or upright, to defend or justify myself in
one’s eyes [A. V. unto], Acts xix. 83; 2 Co. xii. 19, (Plat.
Prot. p. 359 a.; often in Leian., Plut. ; [ef. B. 172 (149) ]).
2. to defend a person ora thing (so not infreq. in
prof. auth.): Ro. ii. 15 (where acc. to the context the
65
/
aTroAvwW
deeds of men must be understood as defended) ; ra epi
€wov, Acts xxvi. 2 (but see under 1).*
Grrohoyla, -as, 7, (See droAoyéopat), verbal defence, speech
in defence: Acts xxv. 16; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 7,174
(16); 2 Tim. iv. 16; with a dat. of the pers. who is to hear
the defence, to whom one labors to excuse or to make
good his cause: 1 Co. ix. 3; 1 Pet. iii. 15; in the same
sense 7) dro. 9 mpds twa, Acts xxii. 1, (Xen. mem. 4, 8, 5).*
Gtro-hotw : to wash off or away; in the N. T. twice in
1 aor. mid. figuratively [cf. Philo de mut. nom. § 6, i. p.
585 ed. Mang.]: dmedovoace, 1 Co. vi. 11; Bamrioat Kad
arddovoa tas dpaprias gov, Acts xxii. 16. For the sin-
ner is unclean, polluted as it were by the filth of his sins.
Whoever obtains remission of sins has his sins put, so to
speak, out of God’s sight, —is cleansed from them in
the sight of God. Remission is [represented as] ob-
tained by undergoing baptism; hence those who have
gone down into the baptismal bath [lavacrum, cf. Tit.
iii. 5; Eph. v. 26] are said amodovcacba to have washed
themselves, or tas duapt. dmodovcacba to have washed
away their sins, i.e.to have been cleansed from their
sins.*
daro-Aitpwcts, -ews, 7, (fr. awohutpdw signifying. a. to
redeem one by paying the price, cf. Avtpov: Plut. Pomp.
24; Sept. Ex. xxi. 8; Zeph. iii.1; b. to let one go
free on receiving the price: Plat. legg. 11 p. 919 a.;
Polyb. 22, 21, 8; [ef.] Diod. 13, 24), a releasing effected
by payment of ransom; redemption, deliverance, liberation
procured by the payment ofaransom; 1. prop.: rédewv
aixpatwrov, Plut. Pomp. 24 (the only pass. in prof. writ.
where the word has as yet been noted; [add, Joseph.
antt. 12, 2,3; Diod. frag. 1. xxxvii. 5, 3 p. 149, 6 Dind.;
Philo, quod omn. prob. lib. § 17]). 2. everywhere in
the N. T. metaph., viz. deliverance effected through the
death of Christ from the retributive wrath of a holy God
and the merited penalty of sin: Ro. iii. 24; Eph. i. 7;
Col. i. 14, (cf. ekayopdto, ayopdf{w, Autpda, etc. [and
Trench § Ixxvii.]) ; dmodvrp. rav rapaBacewr deliverance
from the penalty of transgressions, effected through
their expiation, Heb. ix. 15, (ef. Delitzsch ad loc. and
Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. p. 178); pa arodutpaceas,
the last day, when consummate liberation is experienced
from the sin still lingering even in the regenerate, and
from all the ills and troubles of this life, Eph. iv. 30; in
the same sense the word is apparently to be taken in 1
Co. i. 30 (where Christ himself is said to be redemption,
i.e. the author of redemption, the one without whom we
could have none), and is to be taken in the phrase dzo-
urp. THs mepuroujoews, Eph. i. 14, the redemption which
will come to his possession, or to the men who are God’s
own through Christ, (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; tod c@paros,
deliverance of the body from frailty and mortality, Ro.
viii. 23 [W. 187 (176)]; deliverance from the hatred
and persecutions of enemies by the return of Christ
from heaven, Lk. xxi. 28, cf. xviii. 7 sq.; deliverance or
release from torture, Heb. xi. 35.*
daro-Abw ; [impf. dreAvoy]; fut. drodvow; 1 aor. ame-
Avoa; Pass., pf. dmodeAvpat; 1 aor. awehvOny; [fut. dzro-
aTrOMaAT Tw
Avénoouar|; impf. mid. dweAvdpny (Acts xxviii. 25) ; used
in the N. T. only in the historical books and in Heb.
xiii. 23; to loose from, sever by loosening, undo, [see amé,
v.45 1. to set free: twa twos (so in Grk. writ. even
fr. Hom. down), to liberate one from a thing (as from a
bond), Lk. xiii. 12 (dmoAéAvoa [thou hast been loosed
i. e.] be thou free from [cf. W. § 40, 4] 17s doOeveias [LT
ano7.ac0.|). 2. to let go, dismiss, (to detain no longer) ;
twa, a. a suppliant to whom liberty to depart is given
by a decisive answer: Mt. xv. 23; Lk. ii. 29 (‘me whom
thou hadst determined to keep on earth until I had seen
the salvation prepared for Israel, cf. vs. 26, thou art now
dismissing with my wish accomplished, and this dismis-
sion is at the same time dismission also from life’ —in ref-
erence to which dmodvey is used in Num. xx. 29; Tob.
iii. 6; [cf. Gen. xv. 2; 2 Mace. vii. 9; Plut. consol. ad
Apoll. §13 cf. 11 fin.]) ; [Acts xxiii. 22]. b. to bid de-
part, send away: Mt. xiv. 15, 22 sq.; xv. 32, 39; Mk. vi.
36,45; viii. 3, 9; Lk. viii. 38; ix. 12; xiv. 4; Acts xiii. 3;
xix. 41 (rv éxkAnoiav) ; pass. Acts xv. 30, 33. 3. to
let go free, to release; a. acaptive, i. e. to loose his bonds
and bid him depart, to give him liberty to depart: Lk.
xxii. 68 [RGL Trin br.]; xxiii. 22; Jn. xix. 10; Acts
xvi. 35 sq.; xxvi. 82 (dmodeAvobae edvvaro [might have
been set at liberty, cf. B. 217 (187), § 139, 27¢.; W. 305
(286) i. e.] might be free; pf. as in Lk. xiii. 12 [see 1 above,
and W. 334 (313) ]); Acts xxviii. 18; Heb. xiii. 23; don.
twa tur to release one to one, grant him his liberty: Mt.
FSG WAY, MG PN ASS Wise aie Oy Os Wik, Woy g Wie seaun, |G],
17 [RL in br. ], 18, 20, 25; (Jn. xviii. 39]. b. to acquit
one accused of a crime and set him at liberty: Jn. xix.
12; Actsiii.13. cc. indulgently to grant a prisoner leave
to depart: Acts iv. 21, 23; v.40; xvii. 9. d. toreleasea
debtor, i.e. not to press one’s claim against him, to remit
his debt: Mt. xviii. 27; metaph. to pardon another his
offences against me: Lk. vi. 37, (ris duaptias amodvec Oar,
2 Mace. xii. 45). 4. used of divorce, as drove rv
yevaixa to dismiss from the house, to repudiate: Mt. i.
NORA BILEC ER sibs Gh CEOS Wig se 4 ZR Mi I< xan, IS
[1 Esdr. ix. 36]; and improperly a wife deserting her
husband is said rév dvdpa arodvew in Mk. x. 12 [ef. Diod.
12, 18] (unless, as is more probable, Mark, contrary to
historic accuracy [yet cf. Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 10], makes
Jesus speak in accordance with Greek and Roman usage,
acc. to which wives also repudiated their husbands [reff.
in Mey. adl.]); (cf. nov’, Jer. iii. 8; Deut. xxi. 14; xxii.
19, 29). 5. Mid. drodvopa, prop. to send one’s self
away; fo depart [W. 253 (238)]: Acts xxviii. 25 (re-
turned home; Ex. xxxiii. 11).*
Gro-paccw: (udoow to touch with the hands, handle,
work with the hands, knead), to wipe off; Mid. droudo-
copa. to wipe one’s self off, to wipe off for one’s self: rov
komoptov vyiv, Lk. x. 11. (In Grk. writ. fr. Arstph.
down.) *
é.1ro-véww ; (ve. to dispense a portion, to distribute), to
assign, portion out, (ard as in drobidap [q.v., cf. aad, V.]):
Twi Te Viz. Tysnv, Showing honor, 1 Pet. iii. 7, (so Hdian.
1, 8,1; tay Temny Kal THY evxapiotiay, Joseph. antt. 1, 7,
66
aTroppintw
1; 1@ enioxdr@ macav evrporny, Ignat. ad Magnes. 3;
first found in [Simon. 97 in Anthol. Pal. 7, 253, 2 (vol. i
p- 64 ed. Jacobs)]; Pind. Isthm. 2, 68; often in Plat.,
Aristot., Plut., al.).*
Garo-virrw : to wash off; 1 aor. mid. admewwaunv; in
mid. to wash one’s self off, to wash off for one’s self: tas
x<ipas, Mt. xxvii. 24, cf. Deut. xxi.6 sq. (The earlier
Greeks say drovito — but with fut. dmovifyo, 1 aor. azeé-
va; the later, as Theophr. char. 25 [380 (17)]; Plut.
Phoc. 18; Athen. iv. c. 31 p. 149 ¢., dmovinra, although
this is found [but in the mid.] even in Hom. Od. 18,
179.) *
aro-rinra: 2 aor. anemecov; [ (cf. mimrw); fr. Hom.
down]; to fall off, slip down from: Acts ix. 18 [W. § 52,
4,1a.].*
dtro-rhavaw, -@; 1 aor. pass. drerAavnOnv; to cause to
go astray, trop. to lead away from the truth to error: twa,
Mk. xiii. 22; pass. to go astray, stray away from: amo THs
miarews, 1 Tim. vi. 10. ([Hippocr.]; Plat. Ax. p. 369 d.;
Polyb. 3, 57,4; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) *
aro-rh€w ; 1 aor. dmémdevoa; [fr. Hom. down]; to sail
away, depart by ship, set sail: Acts xiii. 4; xiv. 263; xx.
Lot exosvai ular
daro-mbve: [1 aor. arémduva (?)]; to wash off: Lk. v. 2
(where L Tr WH txt. émAvvov, TWH mrg. -av, for R G
drérduvay [possibly an impf. form, ef. B. 40 (35);
Soph. Glossary, ete. p. 90]). (Hom. Od. 6, 95; Plat.,
Plut., and subseq. writ.; Sept. 2S. xix. 24, [cf. Jer. ii. 22,
iv. 14; Ezek. xvi. 9 var.].) *
dro-rviyw: 1 aor. dnémmuga; 2 aor. pass. amemviyny;
(aro as in aroxteive q. v. [cf. to choke off ]); to choke:
Mt. xiii. 7 (T WH mrg. émyEav) ; Lk. viii. 7 (of seed over-
laid by thorns and killed by them) ; to suffocate with
water, to drown, Lk. viii. 33 (as in Dem. 32, 6 [i.e.p.
883, 28 etc.; schol. ad Eur. Or. 812]).*
daropéw, -@ : impf. 3 pers. sing. nmdper (Mk. vi. 20 TWH
Trmrg.) ; [pres. mid. dropodpar] ; to be dropos (fr. a priv.
and wdpos a transit, ford, way, revenue, resource), i. e.
to be without resources, to be in straits, to be left wanting,
to be embarrassed, to be in doubt, not to know which way
to turn; [impf. in Mk. vi. 20 (see above) moda nmdper he
was in perplexity about many things or much perplexed
(cf. Thue. 5, 40,3; Xen. Hell. 6, 1, 4; Hdt. 3,4; 4,179;
Aristot. meteorolog. 1, 1) ; elsewhere] Mid. to be at a loss
with one’s self, bein doubt; not to know how to decide or
what to do, to be perplexed: absol. 2 Co. iv. 8; mepi rwvos,
Lk. xxiv.4 LT Tr WH; sepi rivos tis Ayer, In. xiii. 22 ;
dmopodpat év dyiv I am perplexed about you, I know not
how to deal with you, in what style to address you, Gal.
iv. 20; dmopovpevos eyo eis [T Tr WH om. eis] rv rept
rovrov [-rov LT Tr WH] (jrnow I being perplexed how
to decide in reference to the inquiry concerning him [or
these things], Acts xxv. 20. (Often in prof. auth. fr. Hat.
down ; often also in Sept.) [Comp.: &-, e&amopéw. ] *
Gropia, -as, 7, (dopéw, q. V.), the state of one who is
dropos, perplexity: Lk. xxi. 25. (Often in Grk. writ. fr.
[Pind. and] Hdt. down; Sept.) *
dro-ppimrw: 1 aor. dméppua [T WH write with one p;
aropgavilw
see P,p]; [fr. Hom. down]; to throw away, cast down; re-
flexively, to cast one’s self down: Acts xxvii. 43 [R.V. cast
themselves overboard]. (So in Lcian. ver. hist. 1, 30 var. ;
[Chariton 3, 5, see D’Orville ad loc.]; ef. W. 251 (236) ;
[B. 145 (127)].)*
dr-ophavitw: [1 aor. pass. ptep. droppaucbels]; (fr.
dppavds bereft, and amd se. rwéds), to bereave of a parent or
parents, (so Aeschyl. choéph. 247 (249)) ; hence metaph.
anoppanabevres ap’ tpav bereft of your intercourso and
society, 1 Th. ii. 17 [here Rec*” (by mistake) dopant
obevtes |.*
daro-cKkevatw: 1 aor. mid. dmeckevacdynv; (ocKevdt@ to
prepare, provide, fr. oxevos a utensil), to carry off goods
and chattels; to pack up and carry off; mid. to carry off
one’s personal property or provide for its carrying away,
(Polyb. 4, 81, 11; Diod. 13, 91; Dion. Hal. 9, 23, ete.) :
arooxevacduevot having collected and removed our bag-
gage, Acts xxi. 15; but L T Tr WH read émoxevacdpe-
vot (q- V.).*
drro-oKlacpa, -ros, Td, (oxid¢w, fr. axed), a shade cast by
one object upon another, a shadow: tpomns amookiacpa
shadow caused by revolution, Jas.i.17. Cf. amavyaopa.*
Garo-o-1 dw, -@ ; 1 aor. dméomaca; | aor. pass. dmeomacOnv ;
to draw off, tear away: r. paxarpav to draw one’s sword, Mt.
XXvVi. 51 (e€xomay T. pax. (or poudpaiay), 1S. xvii. 51 [Alex.
ete.]; omav, 1 Chr. xi. 11; Mk. xiv. 47); amoonay rovs
padnras driow éavrav to draw away the disciples to their
own party, Acts xx. 30, (very similarly, Ael. v. h. 13, 32).
Pass. reflexively: aroomacOevtes am airy having torn
ourselves from the embrace of our friends, Acts xxi. 1;
aneondabn amr avrév he parted, tore himself, from them
about a stone’s cast, Lk. xxii. 41; cf. Meyer adloc. (n
prof. auth. fr. [ Pind. and] Hdt. down.) *
dmoorac ia, -as, 7, (apiorapuac), a falling away, defection,
apostasy; in the Bible sc. from the true religion: Acts
MIMD iivos 1 (soshs xxii. 225-2) Chr: xxix. 19);
Xxxiii. 19]; Jer. ii. 19; xxxvi. (xxix.) 32 Compl. ; 1 Macc.
ii. 15). The earlier Greeks say aéartacts ; see Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 528; [W. 24].*
drrortéctov, -ov, rd, very seldom in native Grk. writ.,
defection, of a freedman from his patron, Dem. 35, 48
[940, 16]; in the Bible 1. divorce, repudiation: Mt.
xix. 7; Mk. x. 4 (BiBXlov arocraciov, equiv. to 19D
nn book or bill of divorce, Deut. xxiv. 1, 3; [Is.1.1;
Jer. iii. 8]). 2. a bill of divorce: Mt.v. 31. Grotius
ad loc. and Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. ad loc., give a copy
of one.*
dmo-oreyato: 1 aor. dnectéyaca; (areydta, fr. oréyn) ;
to uncover, take off the roof: Mk. ii. 4 (Jesus, with his
hearers, was in the imepgor q. v., and it was the roof of
this which those who were bringing the sick man to Jesus
are said to have ‘dug out’; [cf. B.D. s. v. House, p.
1104]). (Strabo 4, 4, 6, p. 303; 8, 3, 30, p. 542.) *
dmo-crté\Aw; fut. drooredS; 1 aor. dméoreiha; pf. ame-
oradxa, [3 pers. plur. dréoradxay Acts xvi. 36 L T Tr WH
(see yivopat init.) ; Pass., pres. dmrooréAopat |; pf. dméorad-
pat; 2 aor. dmeordAny; [fr. Soph. down]; prop. to send
off, sena away ; 1. to order (one) to go to a place ap-
67
aTrooTéAA@
pointed; a.-either persons sent with commissions,
or things intended for some one. So, very frequently,
Jesus teaches that God sent him, as Mt. x. 40; Mk. ix.
37; Lk. x.16; Jn. v. 36, etc. he, too, is said to have sent
his apostles, i.e. to have appointed them: Mk. vi. 7; Mt.
x.16; Lk. xxii. 35; Jn. xx. 21, ete. messengers are sent:
LK. vii. 3 ; ix. 52; x. 1; servants, Mk. vi. 27; xii. 2; Mt.
Xxi. 86; xxii. 3; an embassy, Lk. xiv. 32; xix. 14; an-
gels, Mk. xiii. 27; Mt. xxiv. 31, ete. Things are said
to be sent, which are ordered to be led away or con-
veyed to any one, as Mt. xxi. 3; Mk. xi. 3; 76 dpémavov
i.e. reapers, Mk. iv. 29 [al. take drooré\Xo here of
the “ putting forth” of the sickle, i.e. of the act of reap-
ing ; cf. Joel (iii. 18) iv. 13; Rev. xiv. 15 (s. v.réuma, b.)];
tov Aoyor, Acts x. 36; xiii. 26 (L T Tr WH ééamearddn)
THY errayyeNiav (equiv. to rd éemnyyeApevoy, i. e. the prom-
ised Holy Spirit) éf’ das, Lk. xxiv. 49 [T Tr WH é€a-
moaTéAdw]; Ti Oud yerpos twos, after the Hebr. 373, Acts
xi. 30. b. The Place of the sending is specified : door.
ets tia Torov, Mt. xx. 2; Lk. i. 26; Acts vii. 34; x. 8;
xix. 22; 2 Tim. iv. 12; Rev. v. 6, etc. God sent Jesus eis
Tov Koopov: Jn. ili. 17; x. 363 xvil. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9. eds
[unto i.e.] among: Mt. xv. 24; Lk. xi. 49; Acts [xxii. 21
WH mrg.]; xxvi.17; [év (by a pregnant or a Lat. con-
struction) cf. W. §50, 4; B. 329 (283): Mt. x. 16; Lk.
x. 3; yet see 1 a. above]; dmiaw twos, Lk. xix. 143; ¢umpo-
obév twos, Jn. iii. 28; and mpd mpooamov tivds, after
the Hebr. 359, before (to precede) one: Mt. xi. 10;
Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; x. 1. mpos twa, to one: Mt. xxi.
BA eo Mika xii, 2 seen ke viled,) 20) InmvercomeACtS
viii. 14; 2 Co. xii. 17, ete. Whence,or by or from
whom, one is sent: tnd rod Oeov, Lk. i. 26 (T Tr
WH. ard) ; mapa Oeod, Jn. i. 6 (Sir. xv. 9); awd with gen.
of pers., from the house of any one: Acts x. 17 [T WH
Tr mrg. t76], 21 Rec.; é with gen. of place: Jn. i. 19.
c. The Object of the mission is indicated by an infin.
following: Mk. iii. 14; Mt. xxii. 3; Lk.i.19; iv. 18 (Is.
Ixi. 1, [on the pf. cf. W. 272 (255); B.197 (471) ]); Lk.
ix. 2; Jn. iv. 88; 1Co.i.17; Rev. xxii. 6. [foll. by eis for.
eis Suaxoviav, Heb. i. 14. foll. by wa: Mk. xii. 2,13; Lk.
KO 20 eel nea Osetia vise Valeo Oirelre mepiivien Oem [LOLs DY,
érws: Actsix.17.] foll. by an ace. with inf.: Acts v. 21.
foll. by rua with a pred. ace.: Acts iii. 26 (edAoyovvra
ipas to confer God’s blessing on you [cf. B. 203 (176)
sqq.]) ; Acts vii. 35 (dpyovra, to be aruler); 1Jn. iv. 10.
d. drooréAXew by itself, without an acc. [cf. W. 594
(552); B. 146 (128)]: as dmooreANeww mpds twa, JD. V
33; with the addition of the ptep. Aéyor, A€youea, AE
yovres, to say through a messenger : Mt. xxvii. 19 ; Mk. iif.
31 [here gavoivres adrév R G, xadovvres avr. LT Tr
WH); Jn. xi. 3; Acts xiii. 15; [xxi. 25 mepi rev memurreu-
kérav ebvav hpeis dreoteiAaper (L Tr txt. WH txt.) xpl-
vavres ete. we sent word, giving judgment, ete.]. When
one accomplished anything through a messenger, it is ex-
pressed thus: dmooreiXas or méuvas he did so and so; as,
dmooretaas aveive, Mt. ii. 16; Mk. vi. 17; Acts vii. 14;
Rey. i. 1; (so also the Greeks, as Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 6 méuwpas
jpora, Plut. de liber. educ. c. 14 mepyas aveihe Tov Ocd-
ator Tepew
xpirov; and Sept. 2 K. vi. 13 dmooreitas Anopat auto).
2. to send away i.e. to dismiss; a. to allow one to de-
part: twa ev dpéoet, that he may be in a state of liberty,
Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. lviii. 6). b. to order one to depart,
send off: Mk. viii. 26; rwa xevdv, Mk. xii. 3. ¢. to drive
away: Mk. v.10. [Comp.: é§-, cvv-arooré\o. SYN. see
méeure, fin. |
daro-o-repéw, -@; 1 aor. dmeorépnoa; [Pass., pres. dzo-
orepotpar]; pf. ptcp. dmeorepnpévos ; to defraud, rob, de-
spoil: absol., Mk. x. 19; 1 Co. vi. 8; adAndovs to with-
hold themselves from one another, of those who mutually
deny themselves cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5. Mid. to allow
one’s self to be defrauded [W. § 38, 3]: 1 Co. vi. 7; twa
rivos (as in Grk. writ.), to deprive one of a thing; pass.
dmeorepnpévot tis GdnOeias, 1 Tim. vi. 5 [W. 196 (185); B.
158 (138)]; ri to defraud of a thing, to withdraw or keep
back a thing by fraud: pass. pods ameorepnpevos, Jas.
v. 4 (T Tr WH dovorepypévos, see apvarepéw; [cf. also
dé, II. 2 d. bb. p. 59°]), (Deut. xxiv. 14 [(16) Alex.];
Mal. iii. 5).*
G1r0-cTOAN, -is, 7), (aTooTEAA®) ; 1. a sending away :
Tipodéovros eis Sexediavy, Plut. Timol. 1, etc.; of the
sending off of a fleet, Thuc. 8,9; also of consuls with an
army, i. e. of an expedition, Polyb. 26, 7, 1. 2. a send-
ing away i.e. dismission, release: Sept. Eccl. viii. 8.
3. a thing sent, esp of gifts: 1 K. ix. 16 [ Alex.]; 1 Mace.
ii. 18 ete. cf. Grimm ad loc. 4. in the N. T. the office
and dignity of the apostles of Christ, (Vulg. apostolatus),
apostolate, apostleship: Acts i.25; Ro. 1.53; 1 Co. ix. 2;
Gal. ii. 8.*
Gréo-roAos, -ov, 6; 1. a delegate, messenger, one sent
forth with orders, (Hat. 1, 21; 5, 38; for mow in 1 K. xiv.
6 [Alex.]; rabbin. mov): Jn. xiii. 16 (where 6 ardor. and
6 mépapas avréy are contrasted) ; foll. by a gen., as rap ék-
kAnowav, 2 Co. viii. 23; Phil. ii. 25; dmdor. rijs 6uodoyias
npav the apostle whom we confess, of Christ, God’s chief
messenger, who has brought the xAjois émovpdyos, as
compared with Moses, whom the Jews confess, Heb. iii.
ie 2. Specially applied to the twelve disciples whom
Christ selected, out of the multitude of his adherents, to
be his constant companions and the heralds to proclaim to
men the kingdom of God: Mt. x. 1-4; Lk. vi. 13; Acts i.
26; Rev. xxi. 14, and often, but nowhere in the Gospel
and Epistles of John; [“the word dadéarodos occurs 79
times in the N. T., and of these 68 instances are in St.
Luke and St. Paul.” Bp. Lghtft.]. With these apostles
Paul claimed equality, because through a heavenly inter-
vention he had been appointed by the ascended Christ
himself to preach the gospel among the Gentiles, and
owed his knowledge of the way of salvation not to man’s
instruction but to direct revelation from Christ himself,
and moreover had evinced his apostolic qualifications by
many signal proofs: Gal. i. 1, 11 sq.; ii. 8; 1Co.i. vas
ix. 1 sq.; xv. 8-10; 2 Co. iii. 2 sqq.; xii. 12; 1 Tim. ii. ie
2 Tim. i. 11, cf. Acts xxvi. 12-20. According to Paul,
apostles surpassed as well the various other orders of
Christian teachers (cf. 8.SdoKados, evayyeAoTnS, mpo-
nts), as also the rest of those on whom the special
68
aTocuvaywyos
gifts (cf. ydpurpa) of the Holy Spirit had been bestowed,
by receiving a richer and more copious conferment of
the Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28sq.; Eph.iv.11. Certain false
teachers are rated sharply for arrogating to themselves
the name and authority of apostles of Christ: 2 Co. xi.
Diplo ome veilars: 3. Ina broader sense the name is
transferred to other eminent Christian teachers; as
Barnabas, Acts xiv. 14, and perhaps also Timothy and
Silvanus, 1 Th. ii. 7 (6), cf. too Ro. xvi. 7 (7). But in
Lk. xi. 49; Eph. iii. 5; Rev. xviii. 20, ‘ apostles’ is to be
taken in the narrower sense. [On the application of
the term see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. pp. 92-101; Har-
nack on ‘Teaching’ ete. 11, 3; ef BB.DD. s. v.]
érocroparitw ; (cropari¢w — not extant —from ordya) ;
prop. to speak amb ordparos, (cf. droarndia) ; Lotto
recite from memory: Themist. or. 20 p. 238 ed. Hard. ;
to repeat to a pupil (anything) for him to commit to mem-
ory: Plat. Euthyd. p. 276 c., 277 a.; used of a Sibyl
prophesying, Plut. Thes. 24. 2. to ply with questions,
catechize, and so to entice to [off-hand] answers: twa, Lk.
xi. 53.*
drro-ot pew ; fut. drootpéo ; 1 aor. dréotpeya; 2 aor.
pass. ameorpadny; [pres. mid. aroorpépowa; fr. Hom.
down]; 1. to turn away : twa or ti ad twos, 2 Tim. iv.
4 (rHv dxony amd THs adnOeias) ; to remove anything from
any one, Ro. xi. 26 (Is. lix. 20); amoorpépew twa simply,
to turn him away from allegiance to any one, tempt to
defection, [A. V. pervert], Lk. xxiii. 14. 2. to turn
back, return, bring back: Mt. xxvi. 52 (put back thy
sword into its sheath); Mt. xxvii. 3, of Judas bringing
back the shekels, where T Tr WH éozpewe, [cf. Test. xii.
Patr. test. Jos. § 17]. (In the same sense for 2w7, Gen.
Kiv..16; xxviii. 15; xliili. 11 (12), 20 (21), ete.; Bar.i.
8; ii. 34, ete.) 3. intrans. to turn one’s self away, turn
back, return: dro tev rovnpr@v, Acts iii. 26, cf. 19, (amd
dpaptias, Sir. viii. 5; xvii. 21 [26 Tdf.]; to return from
a place, Gen. xviii. 33 ; 1 Mace. xi. 54, ete.; [see Kneucker
on Bar. i. 13]; Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 12); cf. Meyer on Acts
l. c.; [al. (with A. V.) take it actively here: in turning
away every one of you, ete.]. 4. Mid., with 2 aor.
pass., to turn one’s self away from, with acc. of the obj.
(cf. [Jelf § 548 obs. 1; Kriig. § 47, 23,1]; B. 192 (166));
to reject, refuse: twa, Mt. v. 42; Heb. xii. 25; thy ady-
Gevav, Tit. i. 14; in the sense of deserting, rwd, 2 Vim. i. 15.*
daro-rTvyéw, -; to dislike, abhor, have a horror of: Ro.
xii. 9; (Hdt. 2, 47; 6, 129; Soph., Eur., al.). The
word is fully discussed by Fritzsche ad loc. [who takes
the dro- as expressive of separation (cf. Lat. refor-
midare), al. regard it as intensive; (see amd, V.)].*
dmocuwvaywyos, -ov, (cuvayayn, q. V-), excluded from the
sacred assemblies of the Israelites ; excommunicated, [ A. V.
put out of the synagogue]: Jn. ix. 22; xii. 42; xvi. 2.
Whether it denotes also exclusion fr. all intercourse with
Israelites (2 Esdr. x. 8), must apparently be left in
doubt ; cf. Win. [or Riehm] R W B. s. v. Bann; Wieseler
on Gal. i. 8, p. 45 sqq. [reproduced by Prof. Riddle in
Schaff’s Lange’s Romans pp. 304-306; cf. B. D. s. v.
Excommunication]. (Not found in prof. auth.)*
aTotadcaw
Gro-rdcow: 10 set apart, to separate; in the N. T. only
in Mid. drordocopa; 1 aor. dmeragauny; 1. prop. to
separate one’s self, withdraw one’s self from any one, i.e.
to take leave of, bid farewell to, (Vulg. valefacio [ete.]) :
tui, Mk. vi. 46; Lk. ix. 61; Acts xviii. 18, 21 [here L T
Tr om. the dat.];, 2 Co. ii. 13. (That the early Grk.
writ. never so used the word, but said domd(ecai twa, is
shown by Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 23 sq.; [cf. W. 23 (22);
B. 179 (156)].) 2. trop. to renounce, forsake: rwi,
Lk. xiv. 33. (So also Joseph. antt. 11, 6,8; Phil. alles.
lil. § 48; rais rod Biov ppovrict, Euseb. h. e. 2,17, 5; [ro
Bio, Ignat. ad Philadelph. 11, 1; cf. Herm. mand. 6, 2,
9; Clem. Rom. 2Cor.6, 4 and 5 where see Gebh. and
Harn. for other exx., also Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
daro-reAéw, -@ ; [1 aor. pass. ptep. doredeaGeis] ; to per-
fect; to bring quite to an end: idoets, accomplish, Lk. xiii.
32 (LT Tr WH for RG émirede); 1) dpapria dmrorede-
ocioa having come to maturity, Jas.i.15. (Hdt., Xen.,
Plat., and subseq. writ.) *
Garo-riOynpe: 2 aor. mid. amweOéunv; [fr. Hom. down]; to
put off or aside; in the N. T. only mid. to put off from
one’s self: ra iwaria, Acts vii. 58 ; [to lay up or away, év rH
vAaky (i. e. put), Mt. xiv. 3 L T Tr WH (so eis puda-
xnv, Lev. xxiv. 12; Num. xv. 34; 2 Chr. xviii. 26; Polyb.
24, 8, 8; Diod. 4, 49, etc.)]; trop. those things are said
to be put off or away which any one gives up, renounces:
as Ta épya Tov okorous, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. iv. 22[cf. W.
347 (325); B.274 (236) ], 25; Col. iii. 8; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet.
ii. 1; Heb. xii. 1; (civ dpynv, Plut. Coriol. 19; rév mdovd-
Tov, THY padakiay, ete. Luc. dial. mort. 10, 8; 1. eXevOepiav
k. mappnoiay, ibid. 9, etc.).*
dro-tiwdco0; 1 aor. drerivaéa; [1 aor. mid. ptcp. dzo-
twaédyuevos, Acts xxviii. 5 Tr mrg.]; to shake off: Lk. ix.
5; Acts xxviii. 5. (1S. x. 2; Lam. ii. 7; Eur. Bacch.
253; [dmorwax67, Galen 6, 821 ed. Kiihn].) *
d@mo-rive and dro-tiw: fut. droriaw; (amo as in amobi-
dap [cf. also dao, V.]), to pay off, repay: Philem. 19.
(Often in Sept. for p>w’; in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) *
daro-rohpdw, -6 ; prop. to be bold of one’s self (an [q. Vv.
V.]), i. e. to assume boldness, make bold: Ro. x. 20; cf.
Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt.iv. p.15. (Occasionally in
Thuc., Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) *
daoropta, -as, 7, (the nature of that which is dmdropos,
cut off, abrupt, precipitous like a cliff, rough; fr. dzo-
tépvm), prop. sharpness, (differing fr. droroun a cutting
off, a segment); severity, roughness, rigor: Ro. xi. 22
(where opp. to ypynororns, as in Plut. de lib. educ. c. 18
to mpadrns, in Dion. Hal. 8, 61 to 76 émeckés, and in Diod.
p- 591 [exept. Ixxxiii. (frag. l. 32, 27, 3 Dind.)] to qpe-
porns).* ahs
Grrorépws, adv., (cf. droropia); a. abruptly, precipt-
tously. b. trop. sharpiy, severely, [ef. our curtly]: Tit. i.
13; 2 Co. xiii. 10. On the adj. améropos cf. Grimm on
Sap. p. 121 [who in illustration of its use in Sap. v. 20,
22; vi. 5, 11; xi. 10; xii. 9; xviii. 15, refers to the
similar metaph. use in Diod. 2, 57; Longin. de sublim.
27; and the use of the Lat. abscisus in Val. Max. 2, 7,
14, etc.; see also Polyb. 17, 11, 2; Polyc. ad Phil. 6, 1].*
69
aTroxpnets
Garo-rpérrw : [fr. Hom. down]; to turn away; Mid. [pres.
amorpemopat, impv. drorpérov] to turn one’s self away
Jrom, to shun, avoid : twd or ri (see dmoorpéda sub fin.),
2 Tim. iii. 5. (4 Mace. i. 33; Aeschyl. Sept. 1060; Eur.
Iph. Aul. 336; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p- 815°, 18; Polyb.
al. ].)*
dr-ove ta, -as, 1), (dmeivat), absence: Phil. ii. 12.
Aeschyl. down. ] *
daro-pépw : 1 aor. arjveyka; 2 aor. inf. dmeveykeiv; Pass.,
[pres. inf. dmopépeoOa|; 1 aor. inf. drevexOnva; [fr.
Hom. down]; to carry off; take away: rwd, with the idea
of violence included, Mk. xv. 1; eis rémov twa, Rev. xvii.
3; xxi. 10; pass. Lk. xvi. 22. to carry or bring away
(Lat. defero): ri eis with acc. of place, 1 Co. xvi. 3; 7
amo Twos éri twa, with pass., Acts xix. 12 (LT Tr WH
for Rec. émupépeoOar).*
amro-pevyw [ptep. in 2 Pet. ii. 18LT Tr WH; W. 342
(321)]; 2 aor. drépvyov; [fr. (Hom.) batrach. 42, 47
down]; to flee from, escape; with acc., 2 Pet. ii. 18
(where L T wrongly put a comma after dod. [W. 529
(492) ]), 20; with gen., by virtue of the prep. [B. 158
(138); W. § 52, 4, 1 c:],-2 Pet. i. 4*
daro-pOeyyouar; 1 aor. dmepbeyEdunv; to speak out,
speak forth, pronounce, not a word of every-day speech,
but one “belonging to dignified and elevated discourse,
like the Lat. profari, pronuntiare; properly it has the
force of to utter or declare one’s self, give one’s opinion,
(einen Ausspruch thun), and is used not only of prophets
(see Kypke on Acts ii. 4,— adding from the Sept. Ezek.
xiii. 9; Mic. v. 12; 1 Chr. xxv. 1), but also of wise men
and philosophers (Diog. Laért. 1,63; 73; 79; whose
pointed sayings the Greeks call drop6éypara, Cic. off. 1,
29)”; [see POcyyoua]. Accordingly, “it is used of the
utterances of the Christians, and esp. Peter, on that illus-
trious day of Pentecost after they had been fired by the
Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4, 14; and also of the disclosures
made by Paul to [before] king Agrippa concerning the
drokddvys kupiov that had been given him, Acts xxvi.
25.” Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 16.*
dro-opriftopar; (poprifa to load; dpros a load), to
disburden one’s self; ti, to lay down a load, unlade, dis-
charge: rov yopov, of a ship, Acts xxi. 3; cf. Meyer and
De Wette ad loc.; W. 349 (328) sq. (Elsewhere also
used of sailors lightening ship during a storm in order to
avoid shipwreck: Philo de praem. et poen. § 5 KuBep-
HTS, XEpoveav emvywvopevay, aropopri¢era ; Athen. 2, 5,
p- 37 c. sq. where it occurs twice.) *
drré-xpyois, -ews, 7, (amoxpdona to use to the full, to
abuse), abuse, misuse: Col. ii. 22 d €or mavra eis POopav
Th amoxpnoe “all which (i.e. things forbidden) tend to
destruction (bring destruction) by abuse”; Paul says
this from the standpoint of the false teachers, who in
any use of those things whatever saw an “abuse,” i.e. a
blameworthy use. In opposition to those who treat the
clause as parenthetical and understand dmoxpnots to
mean consumption by use (a being used up, as in Plut.
moral. p. 267 f. [quaest. Rom. 18]), so that the words do
not give the sentiment of the false teachers but Paul’s
[From
aToxapéw
judgment of it, very similar to that set forth in Mt. xv.
17; 1 Co. vi. 13, cf. De Wette ad loc. [But see Meyer,
Ellicott, Lightfoot. ] *
drro-Xwpéo, -; 1 aor. dweydpnoa; [fr. Thuc. down];
to go away, depart: ed twos, Mt. vii. 23; Lk. ix. 39;
Acts xiii. 13; [absol. Lk. xx. 20 Tr mrg.].*
Garo-xwpltw: [1 aor. pass. dmexopicOnv]; to separate,
sever, (often in Plato) ; to part asunder: pass. 6 ovpavos
dmexopicbn, Rev. vi. 14; reflexively, to separate one’s
self, depart from: dmoxwpiaOjvar avtovs an’ d\Anhov, Acts
Veo Onn
dro-ixo; to breathe out life, expire; to faint or swoon
away: Lk. xxi. 26. (So Thue. 1, 134; Bion 1, 9, al.;
4 Mace. xv. 18.)*
"Amos, -ov, 6, Appius, a Roman praenomen ; ’Ammiou
dépov Appii Forum (Cic. ad Att. 2,10; Hor. sat. 1, 5,
3), [R. V. The Market of Appius], the name of a town
in Italy, situated 43 Roman miles from Rome on the
Appian way, — (this road was paved with square [(?)
polygonal] stone by the censor Appius Claudius Caecus,
B. ©. 312, and led through the porta Capena to Capua,
and thence as far as Brundisium) : Acts xxviii. 15. [Cf.
BB.DD.]*
d-rpéo-tTos, -ov, (mpocrevas to go to), wnapproachable, in-
accessible: pas ampéorrov, 1'Tim. vi. 16. (Polyb., Diod.,
[Strabo], Philo, Leian., Piut.; @éyyos admpéourov, Tatian
c. 20; dd&a [pas], Chrys. [vi. 66 ed. Montf.] on Is.
Vale 2a)
dmpdckotos, -ov, (mpookdrrTa, q- V- ) ; 1. actively,
having nothing for one to strike against; not causing to
stumble; a. prop.: 6dds, a smooth road, Sir. xxxv.
(xxxil.) 21. b. metaph. not leading others into sin by
one’s mode of life: 1 Co. x. 82. 2. passively, a. not
striking against or stumbling; metaph. not led into sin;
blameless: Phil. i. 10 (joined with eidukpwets). b. with-
out offence: cvveidnors, not troubled and distressed by a
consciousness of sin, Acts xxiv. 16. (Not found in prof.
auth. [exc. Sext. Emp. 1, 195 (p. 644, 13 Bekk.)].)*
arporwmodnmrws [-Anumtos LT Tr WH; cf. reff. s. v.
M, »], a word of Hellenistic origin, (a priv. and mpocw-
moArmrTns, q. V-), without respect of persons, i.e. impar-
tially: 1 Pet. i, 17, (Hp. of Barn. 4, 12; [Clem. Rom. 1
Cor.1,3]). (The adj. drpocwmddnmros occurs here and
there in eccl. writ.) *
d-rraioros, -ov, (mraio, q. v.), not stumbling, standing
Jirm, exempt from falling, (prop., of a horse, Xen. de re
eq. 1,6); metaph.: Jude 24. [Cf. W. 97 (92); B. 42
(37).J*
darrw; 1 aor. ptep. das; (cf. Lat. apto, Germ. heften) ;
[fr. Hom. down]; 1. prop. to fasten to, make adhere
to; hence, spec. to fasten fire to a thing, to kindle, set on
Jire, (often so in Attic) : Myvov, Lk. viii. 16 ; xi. 335 xv.
8, (Arstph. nub. 57; Theophr. char. 20 (18); Joseph.
antt. 4, 38,4); mdp, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr txt. WH we pe-
afdvrev]; mupdv, Acts xxviii.2 LT Tr WH. 2. Mid.,
[pres. drropac]; impf. yrduny [Mk. vi. 56 RG Tr mre. |;
1 aor. nYduny; in Sept. generally for yai, wan; prop.
to fasten one’s self to, adhere to, cling to, (Hom. Il. 85,67)
70
AToONELA
a. to touch, foll. by the obj. in gen. [W. § 30, 8c.; B. 167
(146); cf. Donaldson p. 483]: Mt. viii. 3 ; Mk. iii. 10;
vii. 33; viii. 22, etc.; Lk. xviii. 15; xxil. 51, very
often in Mt., Mk. and Lk. In Jn. xx. 17, pq pov Garov is
to be explained thus: Do not handle me to see whether
Tam still clothed with a body ; there is no need of such
an examination, “for not yet” ete.; cf. Baumg.- Crusius and
Meyer ad loc. [as given by Hackett in Bib. Sacr. for
1868, p. 779 sq., or B. D. Am. ed. p. 1813 sq.]. _b. yuvat-
xos, of carnal intercourse with a woman, or cohabitation,
1 Co. vii. 1, like the Lat. tangere, Hor. sat. 1, 2,54; Ter.
Heaut. 4, 4,15, and the Hebr. yi}, Gen. xx. 6; Prov. vi.
29, (Plat. de legg. viii. 840 a.; Plut. Alex. Magn. c. 21).
c. with allusion to the levitical precept dxa@aprov py
dnrea6e, have no intercourse with the Gentiles, no fel-
lowship in their heathenish practices, 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr.
Is. lii. 11) ; and in the Jewish sense, py ayy Col. ii. 21
(the things not to be touched appear to be both women
and certain kinds of food, so that celibacy and abstinence
from various kinds of food and drink are recommended ;
cf. De Wette ad loc. [but also Meyer and Bp. Lghtft.;
on the distinction between the stronger term dmrecOa
(to handle?) and the more delicate O:yeiv (to touch ?) cf.
the two commentators just named and Trench § xvii. In
classic Grk. also dmreoOa: is the stronger term, denoting
often to lay hold of, hold fast, appropriate; in its carnal
reference differing from Oryyavew by suggesting unlaw-
fulness. @ryydvew is used of touching by the hand as a
means of knowledge, handling for a purpose; Wnradpav
signifies to feel around with the fingers or hands, esp. in
searching for something, often to grope, fumble, cf. Wnda-
pivda blindman’s buff; Schmidt ch.10.]). da. to touch i.e.
assail: twés, any one, 1 Jn. v. 18, (1 Chr. xvi. 22, ete.).
(Comp. : av, xa6-, rept-arra. |
’Amoia, -as, 7, Apphia, name of a woman: Philem. 2.
[Apparently a Phrygian name expressive of endearment,
cf. Suidae Lex. ed. Gaisf. col. 534 a. "Angd: ddeAdis x.
ddeAgov troxdpicpa, ete. cf. Ampis. See fully in ‘Bp.
Lghtft.’s Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 306 sqq.]*
an-wléw, -6: to thrust away, push away, repel; in the
N. T. only Mid., pres. draOéopar (-odpar) ; 1 aor. drwodunv
(for which the better writ. used adrewoduny, cf. W 90 (86);
B. 69 (61)) ; to thrust away from one’s self, to drive away
Jrom one’s self, i. e. to repudiate, reject, refuse: twa, Acts
vii. 27, 39; xiii. 46; Ro. xi. 1 sq.; 1 Tim.i. 19. (er.
ii. 36 (37); iv. 30; vi. 19; Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 14 and often.
In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
drddeva, -as, H, (fr. awddAvpt, q. v-); 1. actively, a
destroying, utter destruction: as, of vessels, Ro. ix. 22;
Tod pvpov, waste, Mk. xiv. 4 (in Mt. xxvi. 8 without a
gen.), (in Polyb. 6, 59, 5 consumption, opp. to rnpyots) ;
the putting of a man to death, Acts xxv. 16 Rec.; by
meton. a destructive thing or opinion: in plur. 2
Pet. ii. 2 Ree.; but the correct reading doedyelats was
long ago adopted here. 2. passively, a perishing, ruin,
destruction; a. in general: 76 dpyupidv cov abv oot ein eis
am. let thy money perish with thee, Acts viii. 20; BuOi¢ew
Tid eis O\NeOpov k. amwAetav, with the included idea cf
Mv
apa
misery, 1 Tim. vi.9; aipécers dmwXetas destructive opin-
ions, 2 Pet. ii. 1; émdyew éavrois drdderay, ibid. cf. vs. 3.
b. in particular, the destruction which consists in the loss
of eternal life, eternal misery, perdition, the lot of those
excluded from the kingdom of God: Rev. xvii. 8, 11, cf.
xix. 20; Phil. iii.19; 2 Pet. iii. 16; opp. to 4 mepiroinots
Ts puxis, Heb. x. 39; to 7} fon, Mt. vii. 13; to cwrnpia,
Phil. i. 28. 6 vids ris dmwdeias, a man doomed to eternal
misery (a Hebraism, see vids, 2): 2 Th. ii. 3 (of Anti-
christ) ; Jn. xvii. 12 (of Judas, the traitor) ; juépa kpicews
k. dmohetias Tov doeBav, 2 Pet. iii. 7. (In prof. auth. fr.
Polyb. u. s. [but see Aristot. probl. 17, 3, 2, vol. ii. p. 916%,
26; 29,14, 10 ibid. 952», 26; Nicom. eth. 4, 1 ibid. 11202,
2, etc.]; often in the Sept. and O. T. Apocr.)*
dpa, an illative particle (akin, as it seems, to the verbal
root APQ to join, to be fitted, [cf. Curtius § 488; Vanitek
p- 47]), whose use among native Greeks is illustrated
fully by Kiihner ii. §§ 509, 545; [Jelf §§ 787-789],
and Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 160-180, among others; [for
a statement of diverse views see Bdumlein, Griech. Par-
tikeln, p. 19 sq.]. It intimates that, “under these cir-
cumstances something either is so or becomes so” (Klotz
lc. p. 167): Lat. igitur, consequently, [differing from
ovv in ‘denoting a subjective impression rather than a
positive conclusion.’ L. and S. (see 5 below) ]}. In the
N. T. it is used frequently by Paul, but in the writings
of John and in the so-called Catholic Epistles it does
not occur. On its use in the N. T. cf. W. §§ 53, 8 a. and
61,6. Itis found 1. subjoined to another word : Ro.
vii. 21; viii.1; Gal. iii. 7; eet dpa since, if it were other-
wise, 1 Co. vii. 14; [v. 10, cf. B.§ 149,5]. When placed
after pronouns and interrogative particles, it refers to a
preceding assertion or fact, or even to something exist-
ing only inthe mind. ris dpa who then? Mt. xviii. 1 G.e.
one certainly will be the greater, who then?); Mt. xix.
25 (i. e. certainly some will be saved; you say that the
rich will not; who then?); Mt. xix. 27; xxiv. 45 (I bid
you be ready; who then ete.? the question follows from
this command of mine); Mk. iv. 41; Lk. i. 66 (from all
these things doubtless something follows ; what, then ?) ;
LK. viii. 25; xii. 42; xxii. 23 (it will be one of us, which
then ?); Acts xii. 18 (Peter has disappeared ; what, then,
has become of him?). «i dpa, Mk. xi. 13 (whether, since
the tree had leaves, he might also find some fruit on it) ;
Acts vii. 1 [Rec.] (dpa equiv. to ‘since the witnesses tes-
tify thus’); Acts viii. 22 (if, since thy sin is so grievous,
perhaps the thought etc.) ; etmep dpa, 1 Co. xv. 15, (8I-DN,
ei dpa, Gen. xviii. 3). ovx dpa, Acts xxi. 38 (thou hast
a knowledge of Greek ; art thou not then the Egyptian,
as I suspected ?); pyre dpa (Lat. num igitur), did I then
etc., 2) Co. i. 17. 2. By a use doubtful in Grk. writ.
(cf. B. 371 (318); [W. 558 (519)]) it is placed at the
beginning of a sentence; and so, so then, accordingly,
equiv. to dare with a finite verb: apa paprupetre [pdapru-
pés éore T Tr WH], Lk. xi. 48 (Mt. xxiii. 31 Sore pap-
rupeire); Ro. x. 17; 1 Co. xv. 18; 2 Co. v. 14 (15) (in
LT Tr WH noconditional protasis preceding) ; 2 Co. vii.
12; Gal. iv. 31 (LT Tr WH &:6); Heb. iv. 9. 3. inan
vA
apahos
apodosis, after a protasis with ¢?, in order to bring out
what follows as a matter of course, (Germ. so ist ja the
obvious inference is): Lk. xi. 20; Mt. xii. 28; 2 Co. v.
14 (15) (R G, a protasis with e preceding); Gal. ii.
21; ii. 29; v. 11; Heb. xii. 8; joined to another word,
1 Conexvenl 4: 4. with yé, rendering it more pointed,
dpaye [L. Tr uniformly dpa ye; so R WH in Acts xvii.
27; cf. W. p. 45; Lips. Gram. Untersuch. p. 123], surely
then, so then, (Lat. ttaque ergo): Mt. vii. 20; xvii. 26;
Acts xi. 18 (L T Tr WH om. yé); and subjoined to a
word, Acts xvii. 27 [W. 299 (281)]. 5. dpa ody, a
combination peculiar to Paul, at the beginning of a sen-
tence (W. 445 (414); B. 371 (818), [“dpa ad internam
potius caussam spectat, ody magis ad externam.” Klotz
ad Devar. ii. p. 717; dpa is the more logical, ody the
more formal connective; “dpa is illative, ody continua-
tive,” Win. l.c.; cf. also Kiihner § 545, 3]), [R. V.] so
then, (Lat. hinc igitur) : Ro. v. 18; vii. 8, 25; viii. 12; ix.
16,18; xiv. 12 (L Tr om. WH br. ody) ; 19 [L mre. dpa];
Gab vl WOR lft NOS i Aye Ge SAN ie a
dpa, an interrogative particle [“implying anxiety
or impatience on the part of the questioner.” L. and
S. s. v.], (of the same root as the preceding dpa, and only
differing from it in that more vocal stress is laid upon
the first syllable, which is therefore circumflexed); 1.
num igitur, i. e. marking an inferential question to which
a negative answer is expected: Lk. xviii. 8; with ye
rendering it more pointed, dpa ye [G T dpdaye]: Acts viii.
30; [dpa ody... di@kopev Lehm. ed. min. also maj. mrg.
are we then pursuing ete. Ro. xiv. 19]. 2. ergone i.e.
a question to which an aflirmative answer is expected,
in an interrogative apodosis, (Germ. so ist also wohl ?),
he is then? Gal. ii. 17 (where others [e. g. Lchm.] write
dpa, so that this example is referred to those mentioned
under dpa, 3, and is rendered Christ is then a minister of
sin; but pa yévouro, which follows, is everywhere by
Paul opposed to a question). Cf. W. 510 (475) sq. [also
B. 247 (218), 371 (818); Herm. ad Vig. p. 820 sqq.;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 180 sqq.; speaking somewhat
loosely, it may be said “dpa expresses bewilderment as
to a possible conclusion. . . dpa hesitates, while dpa con-
cludes.” Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. ¢.].*
dpd, -as, 1), 1. aprayer; asupplication; much often-
er 2. an imprecation, curse, malediction, (cf. kardpa) ;
so in Ro. iii. 14 (cf. Ps. ix. 28 (x. 7)), and often in Sept.
(In both senses in native Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
’ApaBia, -as, 7, [fr. Hdt. down], Arabia, a well-known
peninsula of Asia, lying towards Africa, and bounded by
Egypt, Palestine, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, the
Gulf of Arabia, the Persian Gulf, the Red Sea [and the
Ocean]: Gal. i. 17; iv. 25.*
[dpaBov Tdf., see appaSav. |
[dpaye, see dpa, 4. |
[dpdye, see dpa, 1.]
*Apdp, Aram [or Ram], indecl. prop. name of one of
the male ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 3 sq.; Lk. iii. 33
[not T WH Tr mrg.; see Adpety and "Apvei].*
dpados T Tr for dppados, q. v-
"Apa
“Apa, -a8os, 6, an Arabian: Acts ii. 11.*
dpyéw, -3; (to be dpyds, q. v-); to be idle, inactive ; con-
textually, to linger, delay: 2 Pet. ii. 3 ols 76 kpiwa &xmahat
ovk dpyei, i.e. whose punishment has long been impend-
ing and will shortly fall. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down.)
[Comp. : xat-apyéo. |*
aépyés, -év, and in later writ. fr. Aristot. hist. anim. 10,
40 [vol. i. p. 627%, 15] on and consequently also in the
N. T. with the fem. dpy7, which among the early Greeks
Epimenides alone is said to have used, Tit. i. 12; cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 104 sq.; id. Paralip. p. 455 sqq.; W. 68
(67), [ef. 24; B. 25 (23)], (contr. fr. depyos which Hom.
uses, fr. a priv. and épyov without work, without labor,
doing nothing), inactive, idle; a. free from labor, at
leisure, (dpydv eivar, Hdt. 5, 6): Mt. xx. 3, 6 [Rec.]; 1
Tim. v.13. b. lazy, shunning the labor which one ought
to perform, (Hom. Il. 9, 320 6, 7 depyos avyp, 6, re moAda
€opyas) : riotts, Jas. ii. 20 (LT Tr WH for RG vexpa) ;
yaorépes dpyai i.e. idle gluttons, fr. Epimenides, Tit. i. 12
(Nicet. ann. 7, 4, 135 d. ets dpyds yaorépas bxeTnynoas) ;
dpyos Kal dxapros ets tt, 2 Pet. i. 8. c. of things from
which no profit is derived, although they can and ought
to be productive; as of fields, trees, gold and silver, (cf.
Grimm on Sap. xiv. 5; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2]) ; unprojit-
able, pnpa dpydr, by litotes i. q. pernicious (see dkapros) :
Mt. xii. 36.*
[Syn.apyds, Bpadbs, vwOpds: apy. idle, involving blame-
worthiness; Bp. slow (tardy), having a purely temporal ref-
erence and no necessary bad sense; vw§p. sluggish, descrip-
tive of constitutional qualities and suggestive of censure.
Schmidt ch. 49; Trench § civ.]
dpytpeos -ovs, -€a -G, -eov -odv, of silver; in the contracted
formin Acts xix. 24 [but WH br.]; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev.
ix. 20. [From Hom. down. ]*
dpyipiov, -ov, Td, (fr. apyupos, q. V-), (fr. Hdt. down];
Ls stlverns Acts 11.65; vil. 165 xx. dd, 1 Bet-1stS;) [il
Comite 2a er Walt: 2. money: simply, Mt. xxv.
TSO eMikcoxive dies Uke ixe 35 xix 15, 23s exxil. os Nets
viii. 20; plur., Mt. xxviii. [12], 15. 3. Spee. a silver
coin, silver-piece, (Luther, Silberling), Spe, aikdos, shekel
[see B. D. s. v.], i. e. a coin in circulation among the
Jews after the exile, from the time of Simon (c. B.c.
141) down (cf. 1 Mace. xv. 6 sq. [yet see B. D.s. v.
Money, and reff. in Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 7]) ; ac-
cording to Josephus (antt. 3, 8, 2) equal to the Attic
tetradrachm or the Alexandrian didrachm (ef.
orarnp [B. D. s. v. Piece of Silver]) : Mt. xxvi. 15; xxvii.
3,5 sq. 9. In Acts xix. 19, dpyupiou pupiddes révre fifty
thousand pieces of silver (Germ. 50,000 in Silber i. q.
Silbergeld), doubtless drachmas [cf. dyvdpioy] are meant ;
ef. Meyer [et al.] ad loc.*
dpyupoKérros, -ov, 6, (dpyupos and kémrw to beat, ham-
mer; a silver-beater), a silversmith: Acts xix. 24. (Judg.
xvii. 4; Jer. vi. 29. Plut. de vitand. aere alien. c. 7.) *
dpyvpos, -ov, 6, (apyds shining), (fr. Hom. down], silver :
1 Co. iii. 12 [T Tr WH dpyvpior] (reference is made to
the silver with which the columns of noble buildings
were covered and the rafters adorned); by meton.
things made of silver, silver-work, vessels, images of the
72
"Apétas
gods, ete.: Acts xvii. 29; Jas. v. 3; Rev. xviii. 12. silver
coin: Mt. x. 9.*
“Apeos [Tdi. “Aptos] wayos, -ov, 6, Areopagus (a rocky
height in the city of Athens not far from the Acropolis
toward the west; rdyos a hill,” Apetos belonging to (Ares)
Mars, Mars’ Hill; so called, because, as the story went,
Mars, having slain Halirrhothius, son of Neptune, for the
attempted violation of his daughter Alcippe, was tried
for the murder here before the twelve gods as judges;
Pausan. Attic. 1, 28, 5), the place where the judges con-
vened who, by appointment of Solon, had jurisdiction of
capital offences, (as wilful murder, arson, poisoning, ma-
licious wounding, and breach of the established religious
usages). The court itself was called Areopagus from
the place where it sat, also Arewm judicium (Tacit.
ann. 2, 55), and curia Martis (Juv. sat. 9, 101). To
that hill the apostle Paul was led, not to defend himself
before the judges, but that he might set forth his
opinions on divine subjects to a greater multitude of
people, flocking together there and eager to hear some-
thing new: Acts xvii. 19-22; cf. vs. 32. Cf. J. H. Krause
in Pauly’s Real-Encycl. 2te Aufl. i. 2 p. 1497 sqq. s. v.
Areopag; [ Grote, Hist. of Greece, index s. v.; Dicts. of
Geogr. and Antiq.; BB.DD. s. v. Areopagus; and on
Paul’s discourse, esp. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Mars’ Hill].*
*Apeorraytrns, Tdf. -yeirns [see s. v. et, +], -ov, 6, (fr. the
preceding [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. 697 sq.]), a member of the
court of Areopagus, an Areopagite: Acts xvii. 34.*
dperketa (T WH -xia [see I, «]), -as, 4, (fr. dperxedo to
be complaisant; hence not to be written [with R GL
Tr] dpéoxera, [cf. Chandler § 99; W. § 6, 1 g.; B. 12
(11)]), desire to please: wepumareiv a€iws Tov Kupiov eis
macav apecketav, to please him in all things, Col. i. 10;
(of the desire to please God, in Philo, opif. § 50; de
profug. § 17; de victim. § 3 sub fin. In native Grk. writ.
commonly in a bad sense: Theophr. char. 3 (5); Polyb.
31, 26,5; Diod. 13, 53; al.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.]).*
dpéckw ; impf. #pecKov; fut. dpéow; 1 aor. #peca; (APQ
[see dpa init.]); [fr. Hom. down]; a. to please: rwi, Mt.
xiv. 6; Mk. vi..22; Ro. viii. 8; xv. 23/1 Th. 1.15 5)iv. 1;
1 Co. vii. 32-34; Gal. i. 10; 2 Tim. ii. 4; evadmidv
twos, after the Hebr. *»y3, Acts vi. 5, (1 K. iii. 10; Gen.
xxxiv. 18, etc.). b. to strive to please; to accommodate
one’s self to the opinions, desires, interests of others: rwi,
1 Co. x. 33 (wavta macw dpéoxw) ; 1 Th. ii 4. dpéokerv
éavt@, to please one’s self and therefore to have an eye
to one’s own interests: Ro. xv. 1, 3.*
dperrés, -7, -dv, (dpéoxw), pleasing, agreeable: rwvi, Jn.
viii. 29; Acts xii. 3; évamidy twos, 1 Jn. iii. 22 (cf.
dpécka, a.) ; aperrdy é€aore foll. by ace. with inf. it is fit,
Acts vi. 2 [yet cf. Meyer ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr.
[Soph.] Hdt. down.) *
*Apéras [WH ‘Ap., see their Intr. § 408], -a (cf. W.
§ 8,15; [B. 20 (18)]), 6, Aretas, (a name common to many
of the kings of Arabia Petraea or Nabathaean Arabia
(cf. B. D. s.v. Nebaioth] ; cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch.
§ 17 b. p. 233 sq.); an Arabian king who made war (A. p.
36) on his son-in-law Herod Antipas for having repu-
apeth T
diated his daughter; and with such success as Rouiplete:
ly to destroy his army (Joseph. antt. 18, 5). In conse-
quence of this, Vitellius, governor of Syria, being ordered
by Tiberius to march an army against Aretas, prepared
for the war. But Tiberius meantime having died
[March 16, a. p. 37], he recalled his troops from the
march, dismissed them to their winter quarters, and
departed to Rome. After his departure Aretas held
sway over the region of Damascus (how acquired we do
not know), and placed an ethnarch over the city: 2 Co.
xi. 32. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Wieseler in Herzog i.
p- 488 sq.; Keim in Schenkel i. p. 238 sq.; Schiirer in
Riehm p. 83 sq.; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Aretas; Meyer
on Acts, Einl. § 4 (cf. ibid. ed. Wendt) ].*
dper, -js, 7, [See pa init.], a word of very wide signi-
fication in Grk. writ.; any excellence of a person (in
body or mind) or of a thing, an eminent endowment, prop-
erty or quality. Used of the human :nind and in an
ethical sense, itdenotes 1. a virtuous course of thought,
feeling and action; virtue, moral goodness, (Sap. iv. 1;
v.13; often in 4 Mace. and in Grk. writ.): 2 Pet. i. 5
[al. take it here specifically, viz. moral vigor; cf. next
head]. 2. any particular moral excellence, as modesty,
purity; hence (plur. ai dperai, Sap. vill. 7; often in 4
Mace. and in the Grk. philosophers) ris dpern, Phil. iv.
8. Used of God, it denotes a. his power: 2 Pet. i. 3.
b. in the plur. his excellences, perfections, ‘ which shine
forth in our gratuitous calling and in the whole work of
our salvation’ (Jn. Gerhard) : 1 Pet. ii. 9. (In Sept. for
Wn splendor, glory, Hab. iii. 3, of God; Zech. vi. 13, of
the Messiah; in plur. for ni9nn praises, of God, Is. xiii.
Bie xtts-12 5 xiii. 7.) *
dpyv, 6, nom. not in use; the other cases are by syncope
dpvos (for dpévos), apvi, dpva; plur. dpves, dpvav, apvdot,
dpvas, a sheep, a lamb: Lk. x. 3. (Gen. xxx. 32; Ex.
Xxiil. 19, etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
dpOpew, -d: 1 aor. npiOunoa; pf. pass. jnplOunua;
(apOpuds) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to number: Mt. x. 30; Lk.
xii. 7; Rev. vii. 9. [Comp.: kxar-aptOpew. | *
dprOyds, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], a number; a. a fixed
and definite number: rév dpiOpov mevraxioxiduot, in num-
ber, Jn. vi. 10, (2 Mace. viii. 16; 3 Mace. v. 2, and often
in Grk. writ.; W. 230 (216); [B. 153 (134)]); é« rod
apibpov tav dadexa, Lk. xxii. 3; dp. dvOpmrov, a number
whose letters indicate a certain man, Rev. xiii. 18. b.
an indefinite number, i. q. a multitude: Acts vi. 7; xi.
Bien Rey.exx.0-
*Apadata [WH ‘Ap., see their Intr. § 408], -as, 7,
Arimathea, Hebr. 717 (a height), the name of several
cities of Palestine; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1275.
The one mentioned in Mt. xxvii. 57; Mk. xv. 43; Lk.
xxiii. 51; Jn. xix. 38 appears to have been the same as
that which was the birthplace and residence of Samuel,
in Mount Ephraim: 1 S. i. 1, 19, ete. Sept. ’Appabaip,
and without the art. ‘Payaéu, and acc. to another read-
ing ‘Papaaip, 1 Mace. xi. 34; ‘Paya6d in Joseph. antt.
13,4, 9. Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 34; Keim, Jesus
von Naz. iii. 514; [B. D. Am. ed.].*
Q
3) Appayedav
"Aploerapxos, -ov, 6, [lit. best-ruling], Aristarchus, a cer-
tain Christian of Thessalonica, a ‘fellow-captive’ with
Paul [ef. B. D. Am. ed.; Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on Col. as
below]: Acts xix. 29; xx. 4; xxvii. 2; Col. iv. 10;
Philem. 24.*
apirtdw, -G: 1 aor. qpiornoa; (rd dpioroy, q. v.); a.
to breakfast: Jn. xxi. 12, 15; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4,1; and
often in Attic). b. by later usage to dine: mapd run,
Lk. xi. 37; (Gen. xliii. 24; Ael. v. h. 9, 19).*
dpiorrepds, -d, -dy, left: Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xxiii. 33; [Mk.
x. 37 T Tr WH, on the plur. cf. W. § 27, 3]; Sma dpr-
otepa i. e. carried in the left hand, defensive weapons, 2
Co. vi.7. [From Hom. down.]*
*AptrréBovdos, -ouv, 6, [lit. best-counselling], Aristobulus,
a certain Christian (ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. and Bp. Lghtft.
on Phil. p. 174 sq.]: Ro. xvi. 10.*
dpirroy, -ov, 7d, [fr. Hom. down]; a. the first food,
taken early in the morning before work, breakfast;
dinner was called deizvov. But the later Greeks called
breakfast 76 dkpdticpa, and dinner dpuorov i. e. deimvov
peonpSpwor, Athen. 1, 9,10 p.11b.; and so in the N. T.
Hence b. dinner: Lk. xiv. 12 (oteiv dprorov } Setrvor,
to which others are invited); Lk. xi. 88; Mt. xxii. 4
(érounagev). [B. D.s.v. Meals; Becker’s Charicles, sc.
vi. excurs. i. (Eng. trans. p. 312 sq.).]*
dpketés, -7, -dv, (dpxéw), sufficient: Mt. vi. 34 (where
the meaning is, ‘ Let the present day’s trouble suffice for
a man, and let him not rashly increase it by anticipating
the cares of days to come’; [on the neut. cf. W. § 58, 5;
B. 127 (111)]); dpxeréy r@ padnrn [A.V. it is enough for
the disciple i.e.] let him be content etc., foll. by iva, Mt. x.
25; foll. by an inf., 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Chrysipp. ap. Athen.
3, 79 p. 113 b.) *
dpxéw, &; 1 aor. #pxeoa; [ Pass., pres. dpxotdpar]; 1 fut.
apxecOnoopa; to be possessed of unfailing strength; to be
strong, to suffice, to be enough (as against any danger;
hence to defend, ward off, in Hom.; [al. make this the
radical meaning, cf. Lat arceo; Curtius § 7]): with dat.
of pers., Mt. xxv. 9; Jn. vi. 7; dpxet vou 7 xapis pou my
grace is sufficient for thee, sc. to enable thee to bear the
evil manfully; there is, therefore, no reason why thou
shouldst ask for its removal, 2 Co. xii. 9; impersonally,
dpkei qpiv tis enough for us, we are content, Jn. xiv. 8.
Pass. (as in Grk. writ.) to be satisfied, contented: rwvi,
with a thing, Lk. iii. 14; Heb. xiii. 5; 1 Tim. vi. 8; (2
Mace. v. 15); ét rom, 3 Jn. 10. [Comp.: en-apréw. |*
dpxros, -ov, 6, 7, or [so GL T Tr WH] dpkos, -ov, 6, 7,
a bear: Rev. xiii. 2. [From Hom. down. ]*
dppa, -aros, rd, (fr. APQ to join, fit; a team), a chariot:
Acts viii. 28 sq. 38; of war-chariots (i. e. armed with
scythes) we read dppara immev mohdGv chariots drawn by
many horses, Rev. ix. 9, (Joel ii. 5. In Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down).*
‘Appayedév [Grsb. *"App., WH*Ap Mayeday, see their
Intr. § 408; Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] or (so Rec.) ’Appayeddar,
Har-Magedon or Armageddon, indecl. prop. name of an
imaginary place: Rev. xvi. 16. Many, following Beza
and Glassius, suppose that the name is compounded of
appolw
7 mountain, and j730 or 11710, Sept. Mayedo, Mayedda.
Megiddo was a city of the Manassites, situated in the
great plain of the tribe of Issachar, and famous for a
double slaughter, first of the Canaanites (Judg. v. 19),
and again of the Israelites (2 K. xxiii. 29 sq.; 2 Chr.
xxxv. 22, ef. Zech. xii. 11); so that in the Apocalypse
it would signify the place where the kings opposing
Christ were to be destroyed with a slaughter like that
which the Canaanites or the Israelites had experienced
of old. But since those two overthrows are said to have
taken place ért Udare May. (Judg. 1. c.) and ev ro
medio May. (2 Chr. l.c.), it is not easy to perceive
what can be the meaning of the mountain of Megiddo,
which could be none other than Carmel. Hence, for
one, I think the conjecture of L. Capellus [i. e. Louis
Cappel (akin to that of Drusius, see the Comm.)] to be
far more easy and probable, viz. that ‘Appayedev is for
‘Appapeyedav, compounded of 8271 destruction, and
ja. [Wieseler (Zur Gesch. d. N. T. Schrift, p. 188),
Hitzig (in Hilgenf. Einl. p. 440 n.), al., revive the deriva-
tion (cf. Hiller, Simonis, al.) fr. 7 yy city of Megiddo. }*
dppote, Attic dpporrw: 1 aor. mid. nppocapny; (appos,
Guava) is 1. to join, to fit together; so in Hom. of car-
penters, fastening together beams and planks to build
houses, ships, ete. 2. of marriage: dppocew til ryy
Ovyarépa (Hdt. 9, 108) to betroth a daughter to any one;
pass. dppocerar yuri avdpi, Sept. Prov. xix. 14; mid.
dppooacOa thy Ovyatépa twos (Hdt. 5, 32; 47; 6, 65)
to join to one’s self, i. e. to marry, the daughter of any
one; dppodcacbai twi tia to betroth, to give one in mar-
riage to any one: 2 Co. xi. 2, and often in Philo, ef.
Loesner ad loc.; the mid. cannot be said to be used
actively, but refers to him to whom the care of betroth-
ing has been committed; [cf. B. 193 (167) ; per contra
Mey. ad loc.; W. 258 (242)].*
dppds, -ov, 6, (APO to join, fit), a joining, a joint: Heb.
ive) 25 (Soph. Xxen., ala; Sire xxvil. 2.)\*
dpvas, see apny.
*Apvel, 6, indecl. prop. name of one of the ancestors of
Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 T WH Tr mrg.*
dpvéopar, -oduat; fut. apynoopar; impf. npvovunv; 1 aor.
npodyuny (rare in Attic, where generally jpynény, cf.
Matth. i. p. 538 [better Veitch s. v.]); pf. #ovnua; a
depon. verb [(fr. Hom. down) ] signifying 1. to deny,
i.e. ciety... otk [to say... not, contradict]: Mk. xiv. 70;
Mt. xxvi. 70; Jn. i. 20; xviii. 25, 27; Lk. viii. 45; Acts
iv. 16; foll. by érz od instead of simple 67, in order to
make the negation more strong and explicit: Mt. xxvi.
72; 1 Jn. ii. 22; (on the same use in Grk. writ. ef.
Kiihner ii. p. 761; [Jelf ii. 450; W. § 65,2 8.; B. 355
(305)]). 2. to deny, with an ace. of the pers., in
various senses: a. dpv. "Incodv is used of followers of
Jesus who, for fear of death or persecution, deny that
Jesus is their master, and desert his cause, [to disown]:
Mt. x. 33; Lk. xii. 9; [Jn. xiii. 38 L txt. T Tr NASER
2 Tim. ii. 12, (dpv. 76 dvoua adrod, Rev. iii. 8, means
the same); and on the other hand, of Jesus, denying
that one is his follower: Mt. x. 33; 2 Tim. ii. 12.
74
apTravw
b. dpv. God and Christ, is used of thése who by cher-
ishing and disseminating pernicious opinions and immo-
rality are adjudged to have apostatized from God and
Christ ; 1 Jn. ii. 22 (cf. iv. 2; 2Jn. 7-11); Jude 4; 2 Pet.
ii.l. c. dpv. €avrdv to deny himself, is used in two senses,
a. to disregard his own interests : Lk. ix. 23 [R WH mrg.
dnapv.|; cf. amapvéopa. . to prove false to himself, act
entirely unlike himself: 2 Tim. ii. 13. 3. to deny i.e.
abnegate, abjure; ri, to renounce a thing, forsake it: ryv
doéBevav x. Tas émOupias, Tit. ii. 12; by act to show es-
trangement from a thing: ry miorw, 1 Tim. v. 8; Rev.
ii. 135 ryv Svvapw tas evoeBelas, 2 Tim. iil. 5. 4. not
to accept, to reject, refuse, something offered : twa, Acts
iii. 14; vii. 85; with an inf. indicating the thing, Heb.
xi. 24. [Comp.: dm-apvéopat. |
dpviov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. fr. dpny, q. v-), [fr. Lys. down],
a little lamb, a lamb: Rev. xiii. 11; Jesus calls his fol-
lowers ra dpvia pov in Jn. xxi. 15; 76 dpviov is used of
Christ, innocently suffering and dying to expiate the
sins of men, very often in Rev., as v. 6, 8,12, etc. (Jer.
xi. 19; xxvii. (1.) 45 ; Ps. exiii. (cxiv.) 4, 6; Joseph. antt.
3,8; 10.)
dpotpidw, -@; (dporpor, q. v-); to plough: Lk. xvii. 7;
1 Co. ix..10.. (ent. xxiii 10)5 (ab sax. 19))\;) Mic ain.
12. In Grk. writ. fr. Theophr. down for the more
ancient dpda; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 254 sq. [W. 24].) *
dpotpoy, -ov, Td, (apdw to plough), a plough: Lk. ix. 62.
(in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
dptayn, -7s, 7, (dprdtw), rapine, pillage; 1. the act
of plundering, robbery: Heb. x. 34. 2. plunder, spoil :
Mite xxinls 25 = Lkexi..39s(is. iia Nahai in
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
dprraypds, -0v, 6, (dpmatw) ; 1. the act of seizing, rob-
bery, (so Plut. de lib. educ. c. 15 (al. 14, 37), vol. ii. 12 a.
the only instance of its use noted in prof. auth.). ZA.
a thing seized or to be seized, booty: adpraypov nyeioOai Tt
to deem anything a prize, — a thing to be seized upon
or to be held fast, retained, Phil. ii. 6; on the meaning
of this pass. see popp7; (jyetoOat or rroveia Pai Ti Gpwaypa,
Euseb. h. e. 8, 12, 2; vit. Const. 2, 31; [Comm. in Luce.
vi., cf. Mai, Nov. Bibl. Patr. iv. p. 165]; Heliod. 7, 11
and 20; 8, 7; [Plut. de Alex. virt. 1,8 p. 330 d.]; ut om-
nium bona praedam tuam duceres, Cie. Verr. ii. 5, 15, 39;
[see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 133 sq. (cf. p. 111) ; Wetstein
ad loc.; Cremer 4te Aufl. p. 153 sq.]).*
dptratw ; fut. dpmace [Veitch s. v.; cf. Rutherford, New
Phryn. p. 407]; 1 aor. jpmaca; Pass., 1 aor. npmdoOny ;
2 aor. npmaynv (2 Co. xii. 2,4; Sap. iv. 11; cf. W. 83
(80); [B. 54 (47); WH. App. p.170]); 2 fut. épmayn-
copa; [(Lat. rapio; Curtius § 331); fr. Hom. down];
to seize, carry off by force: ti, [Mt. xii. 29 not RG, (see
diaprafw)]; Jn. x. 12; to seize on, claim for one’s self
eagerly: tiv Bacirelav tod Geov, Mt. xi. 12, (Xen. an. 6,
5, 18, ete.) ; to snatch out or away: ri, Mt. xiii. 19; ri ék
xetpds Tevos, Jn. x. 28 sq.; twa ek mupds, proverbial, to
rescue from the danger of destruction, Jude 23, (Am.
iv.11; Zech. iii. 2); rw, to seize and carry off speedily,
Jn. vi. 15; Acts xxiii. 10; used of divine power trans
aprrag
ferring a person marvellously and swiftly from one place
to another, to snatch or catch away: Acts viii. 39; pass.
mpos t. Oedv, Rev. xii. 5; foll. by gs with gen. of place,
2 Co. xii. 2; eis 7. mapddecov, 2 Co. xii. 4; els dépa, 1
Th. iv. 17. [Comp.: 6:-, cvv-aprage. }*
dptat, -ayos, 6, adj., rapacious, ravenous: Mt. vii. 15;
Lk. xviii. 11; as subst. a robber, an extortioner: 1 Co. v.
30 sq.; vi. 10. (In both uses fr. [Arstph.], Xen. down.)*
dppaBdv [Tdf. dpaBav: 2 Co. i. 22 (so Lehm.); v. 5,
(but not in Eph. i. 14), see his Proleg. p.80; WH. App.
p- 148; cf. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; B. 32 (28 sq.) ; cf. P, p],-avos, 6,
(Hebr. y\37y, Gen. xxxviii. 17 sq. 20; fr. a7y to
pledge; a word which seems to have passed from the
Pheenicians to the Greeks, and thence into Latin), an
earnest, 1. e. money which in purchases is given as a
pledge that the full amount will subsequently be paid
[Suid. s. v. dpaBar], (cf. [obs. Eng. earlespenny ; caution-
money], Germ. Kaufschilling, Haftpfennig) : 2 Co. i. 22;
v. 5, rov dppaBava tod mvevparos i. e. TO TvEdpAa ws appa-
Bava sc. rs K\npovopias, as is expressed in full in Eph.
i. 14 [cf. W. § 59, 8a.; B. 78 (68)]; for the gift of the
Holy Spirit, comprising as it does the duvduers rod péd-
Aovtos aidvos (Heb. vi. 5), is both a foretaste and a
pledge of future blessedness ; cf. s. v. dtapyn, c. [B.D.
s.v. Earnest.] (Isae. 8, 23 |p. 210 ed. Reiske]; Aristot.
Polepineseo) [pul 259%, 127; al.) *
dppados, I Tr WH dpados (cf. W. 48; B. 32 (29);
[WH. App. p. 163; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80; cf. P, p]), -ov,
(parre to sew together), not sewed together, without a
seam: Jn. xix. 23.*
dppnyv, see dpanv.
dp-pytos, -ov, (pytds, fr. PEQ); a. unsaid, unspoken:
Hom. Od. 14, 466, and often in Attic. b. unspeakable
(on account of its sacredness), (Hdt. 5, 83, and often in
other writ.): 2 Co. xii. 4, explained by what follows:
& ovk efdv avOpamm@ hadjoa.*
dppwotos, -ov, (pavvupt, q. V.), without strength, weak;
Sick: Mtexive 14 -eMikeevieo, 133 xvi. 18% 1-Co: xi. 80:
({Hippocer.], Xen., Plut.) *
dpoevoxoirns, -ov, 6, (d4paqv a male; xoirn a bed), one
who lies with a male as with a female, a sodomite: 1 Co.
Vis Ost Dima 105° CAntbol. 95,686, 5; ecel- writ.)
dpony, -evos, 6, dpaev, Td, also (acc. to R G in Rev. xii.
5, 13, and in many edd., that of Tdf. included, in Ro. i.
27° ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 78; [W. 22]) dppny,
-evos, 6, dppev, To, [fr. Hom. down], male: Mt. xix. 4;
Mikex. 6 kite 23) Ro.i.27; Gall ii. 28; Rey. xin. 5,
13 (where Lehm. reads dpoevay; on which Alex. form
of the acc. cf. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; 66 (64) ; Mullach p. 22 (cf.
p- 162]; B.13 (12); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 36; Td. Proleg.
p- 118; Miiller’s note on Barn. ep. 6, 2 p. 158; WH.
App. p- 157; Scrivener, Collation ete. p. liv.]).*
*Aprends, -d, 6, (abbreviated fr. ’Aprepidwpos [i. e. gift
of Artemis], cf. W. 102 (97); [B. 20 (17 sq.); Lod.
Pathol. Proleg. p. 505 sq.; Chandler § 32]), Artemas, a
friend of Paul the apostle: Tit. iii. 12. [Cf. B. D. s. v.]*
“Aprepis, -dos and -tos, 9, Artemis, that is to say,
the so-called Tauric or Persian or Ephesian Ar-
75
Mv
apTos
temis, the goddess of many Asiatic peoples, to be dis-
tinguished from the Artemis of the Greeks, the sister of
Apollo; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. p. 39; [B. D.s. v. Diana].
A very splendid temple was built to her at Ephesus,
which was set on fire by Herostratus and reduced to
ashes; but afterwards, in the time of Alexander the
Great, it was rebuilt in a style of still greater magnifi
cence: Acts xix. 24, 27 sq. 34 sq. Cf. Stark in Schenke)
i. p. 604 sq. s. v. Diana; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus,
Lond. 1877].*
dprépwv, -ovos (LT Tr WH -wvos, cf. W. §9,14.; [B.
24 (22) ]), 6, top-sail [or foresail?] of a ship: Acts xxvii.
40; cf. Meyer ad loe.; [esp. Smith, Voyage and Shipwr.
of St. Paul, p. 192 sq.; Graser in the Philologus, 3d
suppl. 1865, p. 201 sqq.].*
dptt, adv., ace. to its deriv. (fr. APO to draw close to-
gether, to join, Lat. arto; [cf. Curtius § 488]) denoting
time closely connected; 1. in Attie “just now, this
moment, (Germ. gerade, eben), marking something begun
or finished even now, just before the time in which we
are speaking ” (Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 20): Mt. ix. 18;
1 Th. iii. 6, and perhaps Rev. xii. 10. 2. acc. to later
Grk. usage univ. now, at this time; opp. to past time:
Jn. ix. 19, 25; xiii. 33; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Gal.i.9 sq. opp.
to future time : Jn. xiii. 37; xvi. 12, 31; 2 Th. ii. 7; opp.
to fut. time subsequent to the return of Christ: 1 Co.
xill. 12; 1 Pet.i.6,8. of present time most closely lim-
ited, at this very time, this moment: Mt. iii. 15; xxvi. 53;
Jn. xiii. 7; Gal. iv. 20. dype ris dpre Spas, 1 Co. iv. 11;
€ws apt, hitherto; until now, up to this time: Mt. xi. 12;
Aim NOS sails sank OIE TOS, ips wails 78 saiaGs dling
ii. 9. am dpte, see dmaptt above. Cf. Lobeck ad Phryn.
p: 18 sqq.; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 70 sq.].*
[Syn. &prs, #57, vdv: Roughly speaking, it may be said
that &pri just now, even now, properly marks time closely con-
nected with the present; later, strictly present time, (see
above, and compare in Eng. “just now” i. e. a moment ago,
and “ just now” (emphat.) i.e. at this precise time). viv now,
marks a definite point (or period) of time, the (objective)
immediate present. #5n now (already) with a suggested ref-
erence to some other time or to some expectation, the sub-
jective present (i.e. so regarded by the writer). #5 and
éprt are associated in 2 Thess. ii. 7; viv and #45 in 1 Jn. iv.
8. See Kiihner §§ 498, 499; Baumlein, Partikeln, p. 138 sqq. ;
Ellic. on 1 Thess. iii. 6; 2 Tim. iv. 6.]
dpri-yévynros, -ov, (dpre and yevydw), just born, new-
born: 1 Pet. ii. 2. (Lcian. Alex. 13; Long. past. 1, (7)
9; 2, (3) 4.)*
dprios, -a, -ov, (APQ to fit, [ef. Curtius § 488]) ; al,
Jitted. 2. complete, perfect, [having reference appar.
ently to ‘special aptitude for given uses’]; so 2 Tim.
iii. 17, [cf. Ellicott ad loc.; Trench § xxii.]. (In Grk
writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
dpros, -ov, 6, (fr. APQ to fit, put together, [ef. Etym
Magn. 150, 36—but doubtful]), bread; Hebr. on};
1. food composed of flour mixed with water and baked ;
the Israelites made it*in the form of an oblong or round
cake, as thick as one’s thumb, and as large as a plate or
platter (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Backen; [BB.DD.]);
aptbe 76 apxXn
hence it was not cut, but broken (see xAdovs and xAdw) : | and so) often carries with it a suggestion of nature or origi-
Mt. iv. 3; vii.9; xiv.17,19; Mk. vi.36 [T Tr WH om. nal character. Cf. Schmidt ch. 46; Feonch § Pas
L br.], 37 sq.; Lk. iv. 3; xxiv. 30; Jn. vi. 5 sqq.; Acts ’Apxé-Aaos, -ov, 6, Archelaus, (fr. dpyw and Aads, ruling
xxvii. 35, and often; dprou ris mpobécews, loaves conse- the people), a son of Herod the Great by Malthace, the
crated to Jehovah, see mpdGeacs ; on the bread used at the | Samaritan. He and his brother Antipas were brought
love-feasts and the sacred supper [W. 35], cf. Mt. xxvi. | up with a certain private man at Rome (Joseph. antt.
26; Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; Acts ii. 42,46; xx. 7; 1 | 17,1, 3). After the death of his father he ruled ten
Co. x. 16 sq.; xi. 26-28. 2. As in Grk. writ., and like | years as ethnarch over Judea, Samaria, and Idumeza,
the Hebr. om, food of any kind: Mt. vi. 11; Mk. vi. 8; (with the exception of the cities Gaza, Gadara, and
Lk. xi. 3; 2Co. ix. 10; 6 dpros rév réxvev the food served Hippo). The Jews and Samaritans having accused him
to the children, Mk. vii. 27; dprov dayeiv or éo6iew to | at Rome of tyranny, he was banished by the emperor
take food, to eat (an? dx) [W. 33 (32)]: Mk. iii. 20; (Augustus) to Vienna of the Allobroges, and died there
Lk. xiv. 1, 15; Mt. xv. 2; dptov cay<ity mapa twos to (Joseph. antt. 17, 9, 3; 11,4; 13, 2; b.j. 2,7, 3): Mt.
take food supplied by one, 2 Th. iii. 8; rév éavrod apr. ii. 22, [See B. D. s. v. and cf. “Hpwdns.]*
éc6lew to eat the food which one has procured for him- dpx4, -As, 7, (fr. Hom. down], in Sept. mostly equiv. to
self by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 125 pyre dprov éabiov, UNI, MUNI, noTA; 1. beginning, origin; a. used
pyre oivoy rivov, abstaining from the usual sustenance, absolutely, of the beginning of all things: év dpx7, Jn. i.
or using it sparingly, Lk. vii. 33; tpdyew rdv dprov pera | 1 sq. (Gen. i. 1); aw dpyjs, Mt. xix. 4 (with which cf.
twos to be one’s table-companion, his familiar friend, Jn. | Xen. mem. 1, 4, 5 6 e& apxjs mowdv avOpamous), 8; Jn.
xiii. 18 (Ps. xl. (xli.) 10). In Jn. vi. 32-35 Jesus calls him- | viii. 44; 1 Jn. i. 1; ii. 13 sq.; ili. 8; more fully am’ apyijs
self rdv dprov rod Ocod, Tr. d. €k Tod odpavod, T. ad. THs Cons, | KTiTEws OF KdcpoV, Mtixxiy. 213 Mk x. 6; x11219); 20h:
as the divine Adyos, come from heaven, who containing ii. 13 (where L[Tr mrg. WH mrg. ] arapyny, q. v.) ; 2 Pet.
in himself the source of heavenly life supplies celestial | iii. 4; car’ dpyas, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cil.) 26). b. ina
nutriment to souls that they may attain to life eternal. | relative sense, of the beginning of the thing spoken of:
dpriw: fut. doricw; Pass., pf. #prvuar; 1 fut. dpruéy- | €& apxis, fr. the time when Jesus gathered disciples, Jn.
copat; (APQ to fit) ; to prepare, arrange; often soin Hom. | vi. 64; xvi.4; dm’ dpyjs, Jn. xv. 27 (since I appeared in
In the comic writers and epigrammatists used of pre- | public); as soon as instruction was imparted, 1 Jn. ii.
paring food, to season, make savory, ({ra dpa, Aristot. | [7], 24; iii. 11; 2 Jn. 5 sq.; more fully év dpy7 rod evay-
eth. Nic. 3, 13 p. 1118*, 29]; jprupévos ofvos, Theophr. | yeAiov, Phil. iv. 15 (Clem. Rom.1 Cor. 47, 2 [see note in
de odor. § 51 [frag. 4, c. 11]); so Mk. ix. 50; Lk. xiv. | Gebh. and Harn.ad loc. and cf.] Polye. ad Philipp. 11, 3);
34; metaph. 6 Adyos dare jprupevos, full of wisdom and | from the beginning of the gospel history, Lk. i. 2; from
grace and hence pleasant and wholesome, Col. iv. 6.* the commencement of life, Acts xxvi. 4; év dpyj, in the
"Aphatds, 6, Arphazad, (1WD} 8), son of Shem (Gen. | beginning, when the church was founded, Acts xi. 15.
x. 22, 24; xi. 10, 12, [ef. Jos. antt. 1, 6,4]): Lk. iii. 36.* | The acc. dpynv [cf. W. 124 (118) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i.
dpx-dyyedos, -ov, 6, (fr. dpyxt, q. v., and dyyedos), a bibl. | 18] and ry dpynv in the Grk. writ. (cf. Lennep ad Pha-
and eccl. word, archangel, i. e. chief of the angels (Hebr. | larid. p. 82 sqq. and p. 94 sqq. ed. Lips.; Briickner in De
“ww chief, prince, Dan. x. 20; xii. 1), or one of the princes | Wette’s Hdbch. on John p. 151) is often used adver-
and leaders of the angels (DWN ONwWH, Dan. x. 13): | bially, i. q. dws altogether, (properly, an ace. of ‘direc-
1 Th. iv. 16; Jude 9. For the Jews after the exile dis- | tion towards’: usque ad initium, [cf. W. 230 (216); B.
tinguished several orders of angels, and some (as the | 153 (134)]), commonly followed by a negative, but not
author of the book of Enoch, ix. 1 sqq.; ef. Dillmann | always [cf. e.g. Dio Cass. frag. 101 (93 Dind.); xlv. 34
ad loc. p. 97 sq.) reckoned four angels (answering to | (Dind. vol. ii. p. 194); lix. 20; lxii. 4; see, further,
the four sides of the throne of God) of the highest rank; | Lycurg. § 125 ed. Matzner]; hence that extremely diffi-
but others, and apparently the majority (Tob. xii. 15, | cult passage, Jn. viii. 25 rqv... Suiv, must in my opinion
where cf. Fritzsche; Rev. viii. 2), reckoned seven | beinterpreted as follows: J am altogether or wholly (i. e. in
(after the pattern of the seven Amshaspands, the high- | all respects, precisely) that which I even speak to you (1
est spirits in the religion of Zoroaster). See s. vv. 'a- | not only am, but also declare to you what I am; therefore
Spend pea Mixanh.* you have no need to question me), [ef. W. 464 (432) ; B.
apxaios, -aia, -atov, (fr. dpxyy beginning, hence) prop. | 253 (218)]. dpxiv Aan Bdvew to take beginning, to begin,
that has been from the beginning, original, primeval, old, | Heb. ii. 3. with the addition of the gen. of the thing
ancient, used of men, things, times, conditions: Lk. ix. | spoken of: ddivav, Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9) [here
8,19; Acts xv. 7, 215 xxi. 16; 2 Pet.ii. 5; Rev. xii. 9; | RG plur.) ; trav onpeiwy, Jn. ii. 11]; nuepav, Heb. vii. 33
XX. 25 of dpxaiot the ancients, the early Israelites: Mt. | roo evayyeAiov, that from which the gospel history took
v. 21, 27 [Ree.], 33; r& dpyaia the man’s previous moral | its beginning, Mk. i. 15 ris tmocrdcews, the confidence
condition: 2 Co. v. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and | with which ire have made a bootie, opp. to pé
Hdt. down.)* a fy onic Elen ae eee Pieters eg Saher s 31g
‘ teAovus, tieb. 11. 14. ra orotxeta ths apyns, Heb. v. 12
yeaa : . “s s - i on at é s: in mad. the Simple idea of (rhs apxns is added for greater explicitness, as in’ Lat. ru-
, px: (“onpatver nal rd dpxis execu,” | dimenta prima, Liv. 1,3; Justin. hist. 7,5; and prima
apxnyos
elementa, Horat. sat. 1, 1, 26, etc.); 6 ris apxns Tov
Xptarovd Adyos equiv. to 6 rod Xprorod Adyos 6 rhs dpxijs,
i. e. the instruction concerning Christ such as it was at
the very outset [cf. W. 188 (177) ; B. 155 (136)], Heb.
vi.l. 2. the person or thing that commences, the first per-
son or thing in aseries, the leader : Col. i. 18; Rev. i. 8 Rec.;
xxi. 6; xxii. 13; (Deut. xxi. 17; Job xl. 14 (19), etc.).
8. that by which anything begins to be, the origin, active
cause (a sense in which the philosopher Anaximander,
8th cent. B. C., is said to have been the first to use the
word; cf. Simpl. on Aristot. phys. f. 9 p. 326 ed. Brandis
and 32 p. 334 ed. Brandis, [cf. Teichmiiller, Stud. zur
Gesch. d. Begriffe, pp. 48 sqq. 560 sqq.]): 9 dpxy rhs
xtioews, of Christ as the divine Adyos, Rev. iii. 14 (cf.
Diisterdieck ad loc.; Clem. Al. protrept. 1, p. 6 ed.
Potter, [p. 30 ed. Sylb.] 6 Adyos dpx7 beta r&v rdvrav ;
in Evang. Nicod. c. 23 [p. 308 ed. Tdf., p. 736 ed.
Thilo] the devil is called 9 dpx} rod Oavdrov Kai pita
THs Gpuaprias). 4. the extremity of a thing: of the cor-
ners of a sail, Acts x. 11; xi. 5; (Hdt. 4, 60; Diod.
1, 35; al.). 5. the first place, principality, rule, magis-
tracy, [ef. Eng. ‘ authorities’, (dpyw twds): Lk. xii. 113
xx. 20; Tit. iii. 1; office given in charge (Gen. xl. 13, 21;
2 Mace. iv. 10, etc.), Jude 6. Hence the term is trans-
ferred by Paul to angels and demons holding dominions
entrusted to them in the order of things (see dyyeNos,
2 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16; Mey. on Eph. i. 21]):
Ro. viii. 88; 1 Co. xv. 24; Eph. i. 21; iii. 10; vi. 123
Col. i.16; 11.10, 15. See eovaia, 4c. BB.*
apxnves, -dv, adj., leading, furnishing the first cause or
occasion: Eur. Hipp. 881; Plat. Crat. p. 401 d.; chiefly
used as subst. 6, 7, apynyds, (apxn and aya) ; 1. the
chief leader, prince: of Christ, Acts v. 31; (Aeschyl.
Ag. 259; Thue. 1, 132; Sept. Is. iii. 5 sq.; 2 Chr. xxiii.
14, and often). 2. one that takes the lead in any thing
(1 Mace. x. 47 dpx. Adyav eipnuikadyv) and thus affords an
example, a predecessor in a matter: ths riotews, of Christ,
Heb. xii. 2 (who in the pre-eminence of his faith far sur-
passed the examples of faith commemorated in ch. xi.),
[al. bring this under the next head; yet cf. Kurtz ad
loc.]. So dpxnyds duaprias, Mic. i. 13; (nArovs, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 14, 1; rAs ordoews Kal dixooracias, ibid. 51,
1; tis anooracias, of the devil, Iren. 4, 40, 1; rovavrns
idocopias, of Thales, Aristot. met. 1, 3, 7 [p. 983° 20].
Hence 3. the author: rhs Cons, Acts iil. 15; ras corn-
pias, Heb. ii. 10. (Often so in prof. auth. : rév rdvrov,
of God, [Plato] Tim. Locr. p. 96 ¢.; rod yévous rev av-
dparav, of God, Diod. 5, 72; apxnyos kal airvos, leader and
author, are often joined, as Polyb. 1, 66, 10; Hdian. 2, 6,
22 [14 ed. Bekk.]). Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii.1, p.301 sq.*
dpxu, (fr. doy, dpyds), an inseparable prefix, usually
to names of office or dignity, to designate the one who
is placed over the rest that hold the office (Germ. Ober-,
Erz-, [Eng. arch- (chief-, high-)]), a8 dpydyyehos, apxt-
Tmolpny [q. Vals dpxtepeds, apxiarpos, apxtevvovyxos, dpxure-
pérns (in Egypt. inscriptions), etc., most of which belong
to Alexand. and Byzant. Grk. Cf. Thiersch, De Pen-
tateuchi versione Alex. p. 77 sq.
TT
apylepevs
dpx-teparikés, -7, -dv, (dpye and feparixds, and this fr.
iepdopat [to be a priest]), high-priestly, pontifical : yevos,
Acts iv. 6, [so Corp. Inserr. Graec. no. 4363; see Schiirer
as cited s. v. dpxvepevs, 2 fin.]. (Joseph. antt. 4, 4, 7; 6,
6,85 15,8; 4,)*
dpx-tepets, -€ws, 6, chief priest, high-priest. 1. He who
above al others was honored with the title of priest, the
chief of the priests, yan 175 (Lev. xxi. 10; Num. xxxv.
25, [later UNIT 15, 2K. xxv. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 11, ete.]);
Mt. xxvi. 3, and often in the Gospels, the Acts, and the
Ep. to the Heb. It was lawful for him to perform the
common duties of the priesthood; but his chief duty
was, once a year on the day of atonement, to enter the
Holy of holies (from which the other priests were ex-
cluded) and offer sacrifice for his own sins and the sins
of the people (Lev. xvi.; Heb. ix. 7, 25), and to preside
over the Sanhedrin, or supreme Council, when convened
for judicial deliberations (Mt. xxvi. 3; Acts xxii. 5;
xxlll. 2). According to the Mosaic law no one could
aspire to the high-priesthood unless he were of the tribe
of Aaron, and descended moreover from a high-priestly
family ; and he on whom the office was conferred held
it tilldeath. But from the time of Antiochus Epiphanes,
when the kings of the Seleucide and afterwards the
Herodian princes and the Romans arrogated to them:
selves the power of appointing the high-priests, the office
neither remained vested in the pontifical family nor was
conferred on any one for life; but it became venal, and
could be transferred from one to another according to
the will of civil or military rulers. Hence it came to
pass, that during the one hundred and seven years inter-
vening between Herod the Great and the destruction of
the holy city, twenty-eight persons held the pontifical
dignity (Joseph. antt. 20, 10; see "Avvas). Cf. Win.
RW B.s. v. Hoherpriester; Oehler in Herzog vi. p. 198
sqq-; [BB.DD. s. vv. Highpriest, Priest, ete. The
names of the 28 (27?) above alluded to are given, to-
gether with a brief notice of each, in an art. by Schiirer
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, pp. 597-607]. 2. The
plur. dpytepeis, which occurs often in the Gospels and
Acts, as Mt. ii. 4; xvi. 21; xxvi. 3; xxvii. 41; Mk. viii. 31;
xiv. 1; xv.1; Lk. xix. 47; xxii. 52, 66; xxiii. 4; xxiv. 20;
Jn. vii. 32; xi. 573 xviii. 85; Actsiv. 23; v. 243 ix. 14,
21; xxii. 30; xxiii. 14, ete., and in Josephus, comprises,
in addition to the one actually holding the high-priestly
office, both those who had previously discharged it and
although deposed continued to have great power in the
State (Joseph. vita 38; b. j. 2,12, 6; 4,3,7; 9; 4,4, 3;
see “Avvas above), as well as the members of the families
from which high-priests were created, provided they had
much influence in public affairs (Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 2).
See on this point the learned discussion by Schiirer, Die
dpxvepeis im N.T., in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, p.
593 sqq. and in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23 iii. p. 407
sqq- [Prof. Schiirer, besides reviewing the opinions of
the more recent writers, contends that in Ro instance
where indubitable reference to the heads of the twenty-
four classes is mad (neither in the Sept. 1 Chr. xxiv
apxeTrotunv
3 sq.; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 14; Ezra x. 5; Neh. xii. 7; nor in
Joseph. antt. 7, 14, 7) are they called apytepeis ; that the
nearest approximations to this term are periphrases
such as dpxovres Trav iepéwv, Neh. xii. 7, or pvAapxot Trav
iepéwv, Esra apocr. (1 Esdr.) viii. 92 (94) ; Joseph. antt.
11, 5,4; and that the word dpytepeis was restricted in its
application to those who actually held, or had held, the
high-priestly office, together with the members of the
few prominent families from which the high-priests still
continued to be selected, cf. Acts iv. 6; Joseph. b. j. 4,
3, 6.] 3. In the Ep. to the Heb. Christ is called
‘high-priest,’ because by undergoing a bloody death he
offered himself as an expiatory sacrifice to God, and
has entered the heavenly sanctuary where he continually
intercedes on our behalf: ii. 17; iii. 1; iv. 14; v. 10;
vi. 20; vii. 26; viii. 1; ix.11; ef. Winzer, De sacerdotis
officio, quod Christo tribuitur in Ep. ad Hebr. (three
Programs), Leips. 1825 sq.; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des He-
brierbriefes, ii. pp. 431-488. In Grk. writ. the word is
used by Hadt. 2, [(37), 142,] 143 and 151; Plat. legg. 12
p- 947 a.; Polyb. 23, 1, 2; 32, 22, 5; Plut. Numac. 9,
al.; [often in Inserr.]; once (viz. Ley. iv. 3) in the
Sept., where iepeds péyas is usual, in the O. T. Apocr. 1
Esdr. v. 40; ix. 40, and often in the bks. of Mace.
dpxi-rotuny, -evos [so L T Tr WH KC (after Mss.), but
Grsb. al. -unv, -uévos; cf. Lob. Paralip. p 195 sq.; Steph.
Thesaur. s. v.; Chandler § 580], 6, a bibl. word [Test.
xii. Patr. test. Jud. § 8], chief shepherd: of Christ the
head of the church, 1 Pet. v. 4; see wouuny, b.*
"Apxummos [Chandler § 308], -ov, 6, [i.e. master of the
horse], Archippus, a certain Christian at Colosse: Col.
iv. 17; Philem. 2. [Cf. B. D. s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col.
and Philem. p. 308 sq. ]*
dpXirvvaywyos, -ov, 6, (cvvaywyn), ruler of a synagogue,
noon wx: Mk. v. 22, 35 sq. 38; Lk. viii. 49; xiii. 14;
Acts xiii. 15; xviii. 8,17. It was his duty to select the
readers or teachers in the synagogue, to examine the
discourses of the public speakers, and to see that all
things were done with decency and in accordance with
ancestral usage; [cf. Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Synagogue].
(Not found in prof. writ.; [yet Schiirer (Theol. Literatur-
Zeit., 1878, p. 5) refers to Corp. Inserr. Graec. no 2007 f.
(Addenda ii. p. 994), no. 2221° (ii. p. 1031), nos. 9894,
9906; Mommsen, Inscrr. Regni Neap. no. 3657; Garrucci,
Cimitero degli antichi Ebrei, p. 67; Lampridius, Vita
Alexandr. Sever. c. 28; Vopiscus, Vit. Saturnin. c. 8;
Codex Theodos. xvi. 8, 4, 13, 14; also Acta Pilat. in
Tdf.’s Ev. Apocr. ed. 2, pp. 221, 270, 275, 284; Justin.
dial. c. Tryph. c. 137; Epiph. haer. 30,18; Euseb. h. e.
7, 10, 4; see fully in his Gemeindeverfassung der Juden
in Rom in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt
(Leips. 1879), p. 25 sq.].) *
dpXi-reKTwV, -ovos, 6, (TExTwy, q. V.), @ master-builder,
architect, the superintendent in the erection of buildings :
1 Co. iii. 10. (Hdt., Xen., Plat. and subseq. writ.; Is.
iii. 3; Sir. xxxviii. 27; 2 Mace. ii. 29.) *
dpxi-rehdvns, -ov, 6, a chief of the tazx-collectors, chief
publican: Lk. xix. 2. [See reAdyns.]*
78
apxo
px -rplkALvos, -ov, 6, (rpixdwov [or -vos (sc. ofkos), a room
with three couches ]), the superintendent of a dining-room,
a rpixdundpxns, table-master: Jn. ii. 8 sq. [cf. B.D. s. v.
Governor]. It differs from “the master of a feast,”
cupmoo.ipyns, toast-master, who was one of the guests se-
lected by lot to prescribe to the rest the mode of drink-
ing; cf. Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 1. But it was the duty of
the dpycrpixdwos to place in order the tables and couches,
arrange the courses, taste the food and wine beforehand,
etc. (Heliod. 7, 27.) [Some regard the distinction be-
tween the two words as obliterated in later Grk.; cf.
Soph. Lex. s. v., and Schaff’s Lange’s Com. on Jn. 1. c.]*
dpxopar, see apxo.
épxw; [fr. Hom. down]; to be first. 1. to be the first
to do (anything), to begin, —a sense not found in the
Grk. Bible. 2. to be chief, leader, ruler: twos [B. 169
(147) ], Mk. x. 42; Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10).
Mid., pres. dpyopwa; fut. dpfouar (once [twice], Lk. xiii.
26 [but not Tr mrg. WH mrg.; xxiii. 30]); 1 aor. np&a-
pny; to begin, make a beginning: do twos, Acts x. 37
[B. 79 (69) ; cf. Matth. § 558]; 1 Pet. iv. 17; by bra-
chylogy apédpevos amo tivos €ws twos for, having begun
from some person or thing (and continued or continu-
ing) to some person or thing: Mt. xx. 8; Jn. viii. 9 [i.e.
Rec.]; Acts i. 22; cf. W. § 66, 1 c.; [B. 374 (320) ]; dp&a-
pevoy is used impers. and absol. a beginning being made,
Lk. xxiv. 27 (so in Hat. 3, 91; cf. W. 624 (580) ; [B. 374
sq. (821) ]); carelessly, apéduevos amd Maovoéws Kat amd
mavrav mpopntey dinpunvevey for, beginning from Mo-
ses he went through all the prophets, Lk. xxiv. 27; W.
§ 67, 2; [B. 374 (320 sq.)]. dv A#pEaro roceiv re kat di8d-
okey, dxpt hs nucpas which he began and continued both
to do and to teach, until ete., Acts i. 1 [W. § 66,1 ¢.; B.
u. s.]. ”Apxouat is connected with an inf. and that so of-
ten, esp. in the historical books, that formerly most inter-
preters thought it constituted a periphrasis for the finite
form of the verb standing in the inf., as #p£aro knptooew
for éxnpv&e. But through the influence principally of
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 539 sq.), ef. W. § 65, 7 d., it is now
conceded that the theory of a periphrasis of this kind was
arash assumption, and that there is scarcely an example
which cannot be reduced to one of the following classes :
a. the idea of beginning has more or less weight or im-
portance, so that it is brought out by a separate word:
Mt. xi. 7 (the disciples of John having retired, Christ
began to speak concerning John, which he did not do
while they were present) ; Lk. iii. 8 (do not even begin
to say; make not even an attempt to excuse yourselves) ;
Lk. xv. 14 (the beginning of want followed hard upon the
squandering of his goods) ; Lk. xxi. 28; 2Co. iii. 1; esp.
when the beginning of an action is contrasted with its
continuance or its repetition, Mk. vi. 7; viii. 31 (cf. ix.
315; x. 33 sq.); or with the end of it, Lk. xiv. 30 (opp.
to éxrehecat) ; Jn. xiii. 5 (cf. 12). b. dy. denotes some-
thing as begun by some one, others following : Acts xxvii.
35 sq. [W. § 65, 7d.]. ¢. dpy. indicates that a thing was
but just begun when it was interrupted by something
else: Mt. xii. 1 (they had begun to pluck ears of corn,
See dpxav.
dpywr
but they were prevented from continuing by the inter-
ference of the Pharisees); Mt. xxvi. 22 (Jesus answered
before all had finished), 74; Mk. ii. 23; iv. 1 (he had
searcely begun to teach, when a multitude gathered unto
him); Mk. vi.2; x. 41; Lk. v.213 xii.45 sq.; xiii. 25;
Acts xi. 15 (cf. x. 44); xviii. 26, and often. d. the ac-
tion itself, instead of its beginning, might indeed have
been mentioned; but in order that the more attention
may be given to occurrences which seem to the writer
to be of special importance, their initial stage, their be-
ginning, is expressly pointed out: Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. xiv.
18; Acts ii. 4, etc. e. dpx. occurs in a sentence which
has grown out of the blending of two statements: Mt. iv.
17; xvi. 21 (fr. amo tore exnpvée... €devEe, and rdre
npEaro xnpvocew... dSecxvverv). The inf. is wanting
when discoverable from the context: dpydpevos, sc. to
discharge the Messianic office, Lk. iii. 23 [W. 349
(828) ]; ap&dpevos sc. Aéyerv, Acts xi. 4. [Comp.: év-
(-pat), mpo-ev-(-ar), tn-, mpo-vr -dpxo. |
dpxev, -ovros, 6, (pres. ptcp. of the verb dpyo), [fr.
Aeschyl. down], a ruler, commander, chief, leader: used
of Jesus, dpywy trav Bacikewy THs ys, Rev. i. 5; of the
rulers of nations, Mt. xx. 25; Acts iv. 26; vii. 35;
univ. of magistrates, Ro. xiii. 3; Acts xxiii. 5; espe-
cially judges, Lk. xii. 58; Acts vii. 27, 35 (where note
the antithesis: whom they refused as dpyovra kal d:ka-
orn, him God sent as dpyovra— leader, ruler— kai hutpo-
mv); Acts xvi. 19. of dpyovres Tov aidvos rovrou, those
who in the present age (see aiwy, 3) by nobility of birth,
learning and wisdom, power and authority, wield the
greatest influence, whether among Jews or Gentiles, 1 Co.
ii. 6, 8; cf. Neander ad loc. p. 62 sqq. Of the members
of the Jewish Sanhedrin: Lk. xxiii. 13, 35; xxiv. 20;
Jn. iii. 1; vii. 26, 48; xii.42; Actsiii.17; iv. 5, 8; xiii.
27; xiv. 5. of the officers presiding over synagogues :
Mt. ix. 18,23; Lk. viii. 41 (dpyev tis cvvaywyis, cf. Mk.
v. 22 dpxtovvdywyos), and perhaps also Lk. xviii. 18;
dpxev tév Sapicaiwy, one who has great influence among
the Pharisees, Lk. xiv. 1. of the devil, the prince of
evil spirits: (6) dpyov trav Sapoviov, Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24;
Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15; 6 dp. Tod xdcpov, the ruler of the
irreligious mass of mankind, Jn. xii. 31; xiv. 30; xvi. 11,
(in rabbin. writ. poipa WW; dpy. Tod aidvos rovrou,
Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 1 [ad Maen. 1, 3]; dpywy rod Katpov ths
avopias, Barn. ep. 18, 2); rs eEovoias tod a€pos, Eph. ii. 2
(see dnp). [See Hort in Dict. of Chris. Biog., s.v. Archon. ]*
dpwpa, -ros, 76, (fr. APO to prepare, whence dprva to
season; [al. connect it with r. ar (dpéw) to plough (cf.
Gen. xxvii. 27) ; al. al.]), spice, perfume: Mk. xvi. 1; Lk.
xxiii. 56; xxiv.1; Jn. xix.40. (2 K.xx.13; Esth. ii. 12;
Cant. iv.10,16. {Hippoer.], Xen., Theophr. and subseq.
writ.) *
‘Aod, 6, (Chald. DX to cure), Asa, king of Judah, son
of king Abijah (1 K. xv. 8 sqq.): Mt.i 7 sq. [LT Tr
WH read ’Acad¢ q. v-]*
éralyw: in 1 Th. iii. 3, Kuenen and Cobet (in their
N. T. ad fidem cod. Vat., Lugd. 1860 [pref. p. xc.]), fol-
owing Lchm. [who followed Valckenaer in following J.
79
aaédyeva
J. Reiske (Animad. ad Polyb. p. 68) ; see Valck. Opusce.
ii. 246-249] in his larger edit., conjectured and received
into their text pndev doaiverOa, which they think to be
equiv. to dyeoOa, xareras pépew. But there is no ne-
cessity for changing the Rec. (see caive, 2 b. B.), nor can
it be shown that doaive is used by Grk. writ. for dodw.*
d-cddevtos, -ov, (carevw), unshaken, unmoved: prop.
Acts xxvii. 41; metaph. BaovAe/a, not liable to disorder
and overthrow, firm, stable, Heb. xii. 28. (Eur. Bacch.
391; eXevdepia, Diod. 2, 48 ; evdaipovia, ibid. 3,47; novyia,
Plat. Ax. 370 d.; Plut., al.) *
"Acdp, 6, (}O8 collector), a man’s name, a clerical
error for R G Aad (q. v.), adopted by L T Tr WH in
Mt. i. 7 sq.*
&-oBerros, -ov, (oBévyvpe), unquenched (Ovid, inexstinc-
tus), unquenchable (Vulg. inexstinguibilis) : mip, Mt. iii.
12; Lk. iii. 17; Mk. ix. 43, and RG Lbr. in 45. (Often
in Hom. ; mip dof. of the perpetual fire of Vesta, Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 76; [of the fire on the altar, Philo de
ebriet. § 34 (Mang. i. 378); de vict. off. § 5 (Mang. ii.
254); of the fire of the magi, Strabo 15, (3) 153; see
also Plut. symp. 1. vii. probl. 4; Aelian. nat. an. 5,3; cf.
Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 6, 41, 15].) *
do éBeva, -as, 7, (aoeBns, q- V-), want of reverence towards
God, impiety, ungodliness: Ro. i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 16; Tit.
ii. 12; plur. ungodly thoughts and deeds, Ro. xi. 26 (fr.
Is. lix. 20); ra epya doeBeias [Treg. br. aveB.] works of
ungodliness, a Hebraism, Jude 15, cf. W. § 34, 3 b.; [B.
§ 132,10]; ai émiOupia rdv doeBecoy their desires to do
ungodly deeds, Jude 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Eur.], Plat.
and Xen. down; in the Sept. it corresponds chiefly to
ywy.)*
doeBéw, -6; 1 aor. noéBnoa; (aoeBns, gq. v-); from
[Aeschyl.], Xen. and Plato down; to be ungodly, act im-
piously: 2 Pet. ii. 6; doeBeiv épya doeBeias [Treg. br.
doeBelas], Jude 15, cf. W. 222 (209); [B. 149 (130)}.
(Equiv. to pwa, Zeph. iii. 11; yw, Dan. ix. 5.) *
doeBis, -és, (c¢Bw to reverence); fr. Aeschyl. and
Thuc. down, Sept. for pw; destitute of reverential awe
towards God, contemning God, impious: Ro. iv. 5; v. 63
1 Tim. i. 9 (joined here with dyaprwdds, as in 1 Pet. iv.
18); 2 Pet. ii. 5; iii. 7; Jude 4, 15.*
doéAyeva, -as, 7, the conduct and character of one who
is doeAyns (a word which some suppose to be com-
pounded of a priv. and 3éAyn, the name of a city in Pi-
sidia whose citizens excelled in strictness of morals [so
Etym. Magn. 152, 38; per contra cf. Suidas 603 d.];
others of a intens. and cadayeiy to disturb, raise a din ;
others, and now the majority, of a priv. and cédyo i. q-
6éryw, not affecting pleasantly, exciting disgust), un-
bridled lust, excess, licentiousness, lasciviousness, wanton-
ness, outrageousness, shamelessness, insolence: Mk. vii.
22 (where it is uncertain what particular vice is spoken
of); of gluttony and venery, Jude 4; plur., 1 Pet. iv. 3;
2 Pet. ii. 2 (for Rec. dmwdeias), 18; of carnality,
lasciviousness: 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v.19; Eph.iv. 19; 2
Pet. ii. 7; plur. “wanton (acts or) manners, as filthy
words, indecent bodily movements, unchaste handling of
donpos
80
*Aciapyns
males and females, etc.” (Fritzsche), Ro. xiii. 13. (In | folks: Mt. x. 8; Mk. vi. 56; Lk. ix. 2 Rec.; Jn. v. 3, 7,
bibl. Grk. besides only in Sap. xiv. 26 and 3 Mace. ii, 26.
Among Grk. writ. used by Plat., Isocr. et sqq.; at length
by Plut. [Lucull. 38] and Lcian. [dial. meretr. 6] of the
wantonness of women [Zob. ad Phryn. p.184n.].) Cf.
Tittmann i. p. 151 sq.; [esp. Trench § xvi.].*
Gonos, -ov, (ojpa a mark), unmarked or unstamped
(money); unknown, of no mark, insignificant, ignoble :
Acts xxi. 39. (3 Macc. i. 3; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ;
trop. fr. Eur. down.) *
’Aotp, 6, an indecl. Hebr. prop. name, (wk [i. e. hap-
py, Gen. xxx. 13]), (in Joseph. “Aonpos, -ov, 6), Asher,
the eighth son of the patriarch Jacob: Lk. ii. 36; Rev.
vii. 6.*
aobéved, -as, 7, (acbevns), (fr. Hdt. down}, want of
strength, weakness, infirmity; a. of Body; a. its native
weakness and frailty: 1 Co. xv.43; 2 Co. xiii. 4. B. feeble-
ness of health; sickness: Jn. v.5; xi. 4; Lk. xiii. 11,12;
Gal. iv. 13 (doOévea tis capkds) ; Heb. xi. 34; in plur.:
Mt. viii. 17; Lk. v.15; viii. 2; Acts xxviii. 9; 1 Tim. v.
23. b. of Soul; want of the strength and capacity re-
quisite a. to understand a thing: Ro. vi. 19 (where ao.
oapxds denotes the weakness of human nature). B. to do
things great and glorious, as want of human wisdom, of
skill in speaking, in the management of men: 1 Co. ii.
3. y. to restrain corrupt desires ; proclivity to sin : Heb.
vy. 2; vii. 28; plur. the various kinds of this proclivity,
Heb. iv. 15. 8. to bear trials and troubles: Ro. viii. 26
(where read 17 doOeveia for Rec. rais doOeveiats) ; 2 Co.
xi. 30; xii. 9; plur. the mental [?] states in which this
weakness manifests itself: 2 Co. xii. 5, 9 sq.*
doevéw, -; impf. nodevovv; pf. noOévnxa (2 Co. xi. 21
LT TrWH); Laor. nodevnoa; (aoGevns) ; [fr. Eur. down];
to be weak, feeble; univ. to be without strength, power-
less: Ro. viii. 83; rhetorically, of one who purposely ab-
stains from the use of his strength, 2 Co. xiii. 4; and
of one who has no occasion to prove his strength, 2 Co.
xiii. 9; contextually, to be unable to wield and hold sway
over others, 2 Co. xi. 21; by oxymoron, érav adodeva, tére
duvards eis when I am weak in human strength, then am
I strong in strength divine, 2 Co. xii. 10; ets rua, to be
weak towards one, 2 Co. xiii. 3; with a dat. of the respect
added: micret, to be weak in faith, Ro. iv. 19; miores, to
be doubtful about things lawful and unlawful to a Chris-
tian, Ro. xiv. 1; simple doOevetv with the same idea sug-
gested, Ro. xiv. 2, 21 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br.]; 1 Co.
vill. 9 Rec., 11 sq.; ris doOevet, kal ovk doOevd; who is
weak (in his feelings and conviction about things law-
ful), and I am not filled with a compassionate sense of
the same weakness? 2 Co. xi. 29. contextually, to be
weak in means, needy, poor: Acts xx. 35 (so [Arstph.
pax 636]; Eur. in Stob. 145 vol. ii. 168 ed. Gaisf.), cf.
De Wette [more fully Hackett, per contra Meyer] ad
loc. Specially of debility in health: with vécous added,
Lk. iv. 40; simply, to be feeble, sick: Lk. vii. 10 [RG Tr
mre. br.]; Mt. xxv. 36, 39 L txt. T Tr WH; Jn. iv. 46;
xi. 1-3, 6; Acts ix. 37; Phil. ii. 26 sq.; 2 Tim. iv. 20;
Jas. v. 14; of doGevotvres, and dabevodvres, the sick, sick
13) Ud£. ; vi.-2% Acts xix. 12.*
doOévnpa, -aros, 7d, (acGevéw), infirmity: Ro. xv. 1
(where used of error arising from weakness of mind).
[In a physical sense in Aristot. hist. an. 11, 7 vol. i. 638%,
37; gen. an. 1, 18 ibid. p. 726° 15.]*
daPevis, -és, (rd cOevos strength), weak, infirm, feeble ;
[fr. Pind. down]; a. univ.: Mt. xxvi.41; Mk. xiv. 38;
1 Pet. iii. 7; 1d doevés rod Geod, the act of God in which
weakness seems to appear, viz. that the suffering of the
cross should be borne by the Messiah,1 Co. i. 25. b. spec.:
contextually, unable to achieve anything great, 1 Co. iv.
10; destitute of power among men, 1 Co. i. 27 [Lchm.
br.]; weaker and inferior, nédos, 1 Co. xii. 22; sluggish
in doing right, Ro. v. 6; wanting in manliness and dig-
nity, 2 Co. x. 10; used of the religious systems anterior
to Christ, as having no power to promote piety and sal-
vation, Gal. iv. 9; Heb. vii. 18; wanting in decision
about things lawful and unlawful (see doGevew), 1 Co.
Vill. 7.9 Jo Er WH l0isix: 29) Thy. 1 Aveecw or
the body, feeble, sick: Mt.xxv. 39 RG L mrg., 43 sq.;
LE: ix. 25a Erbe. sex.) Soe Acts tv9 se Verto sqeudneoe
xi. 30.*
Acta, -as, 7, Asia; 1. Asia proper, 7 idSiws Kadov-
perm’ Acta (Ptol. 5,2), or proconsular Asia[often so called
from the 16th cent. down; but correctly speaking it was
a provincia c onsularis, although the ruler of it was vested
with ‘proconsular power.’ The ‘ Asia’ of the N. T.
must not be confounded with the ‘ Asia proconsularis’
of the 4th cent.], embracing Mysia, Lydia, Phrygia and
Caria [cf. Cic. pro Flac. c. 27]: Acts vi. 9 [L om. Tr mrg.
br.]; xvi. 6 sqq.; 1 Pet.i.1; Rev.i.4; and, apparently, Acts
xix. 265 xx. 165\'2:Co. 1. 8'3\ 2 Dim. ad, ete: Cf. Wane
RW B.s.v. Asien; Stark in Schenkel i. p. 261 sq. ; [BB.
DD. s. v. Asia; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii. ;
Wieseler, Chron. d. apost. Zeit. p. 31 sqq.]. Ya, AN
part of proconsular Asia, embracing Mysia, Lydia, and
Caria, (Plin. h. n. 5, 27, (28) [al. 5, 100]): Acts ii. 9.
*Acravés, -od, 6, a native of Asia, Asian, Asiatic: Acts
xx. 4. ((Thuc., al.)]*
"Acvapxns, -ov, 6, an Asiarch, President of Asia: Acts
xix. 31. Each of the cities of proconsular Asia, at the
autumnal equinox, assembled its most honorable and
opulent citizens, in order to select one to preside over
the games to be exhibited that year, at his expense, in
honor of the gods and the Roman emperor. Thereupon
each city reported the name of the person selected to a
general assembly held in some leading city, as Ephesus,
Smyrna, Sardis. This general council, called rd xowdy,
selected ten out of the number of candidates, and sent
them to the proconsul; and the proconsul, apparently,
chose one of these ten to preside over the rest. This
explains how it is that in Acts l.c. several Asiarchs
are spoken of, while Eusebius h. e. 4, 15, 27 mentions
only one; [perhaps also the title outlasted the ser
vice]. Cf. Meyer on Acts l.c.; Win. RWB. sg. v.
Asiarchen; [BB.DD. s. v.; but esp. Le Bas et Wadding-
ton, Voyage Archéol. Inserr. part. v. p. 244 sq.; Kuhn.
aoitia
Hie stidtische u. biirgerl. Verf. des rom. Reichs, i. 106
sqq.; Marquardt, Rom. Staatsverwalt. i. 374 sqq.; Stark
in Schenkel i. 263; esp. Bp. Lght/t. Polycarp, p. 987 sqq. ].*
aorta, -as, 7, (dorros q. v.), abstinence from food (wheth-
er voluntary or enforced): moAAn long, Acts xxvii. 21.
(Hdt. 3, 52; Eur. Suppl. 1105; [Aristot. probl. 10,35;
eth. Nic. 10 p. 1180", 9]; Joseph. antt. 12, 7; al.)*
G-cvT0s,-ov, (ciros), fasting ; without having eaten: Acts
xxvii. 33. (Hom. Od. 4, 788; then fr. Soph. and Thuc.
down. )*
GoKéw, -G; 1. to form by art, to adorn; in Homer.
2. to exercise (one’s self), take pains, labor, strive; foll.
by an inf. (as in Xen. mem. 2, 1, 6; Cyr. 5,5, 12, ete.) :
Acts xxiv. 16.*
GoKés, -ov, 6, a leathern bag or bottle,in which water or
wine was kept: Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37 sq.
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept.) [BB.DD.
s. v. Bottle; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 92.] *
dopéves, adv., (for nopevas ; fr. Somat), with joy, glad-
ly: Acts ii. 41 [Rec.]; xxi. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
[the adv. fr. Aeschyl.] down.) *
G@cohos, -ov, (copds), unwise, foolish: Eph. v. 15.
[From Theogn. down. ]*
doméfopar ; [impf. 7omaouny]; 1 aor. nomacdpny; (fr.
ond» with a intensive [q. v., but cf. Vanivek p. 1163 ;
Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 324 sq.]; hence prop. to draw to
one’s self [W. § 38, 7 fin.]; cf. doxaipw for cxaipw, dorai-
p® for craipa, dorapite for orapifw) ; [fr. Hom. down];
a. with an acc. of the pers., to salute one, greet, bid wel-
come, wish well to, (the Israelites, on meeting and at
parting, generally used the formula 1? Dinvi) used
of Aib86 accosting any one: Mt. x. 12; Mk. ix. 15; xv.
18; Lk.7i. 40; Acts oxi Oe wOL tose who visit one to
see him a little while, departing almost immediately af-
terwards: Acts xviii. 22; xxi. 7; like the Lat. salutare,
our ‘ pay one’s respects to,’ of those who show regard for
a distinguished person by visiting him: Acts xxv. 13,
(Joseph. antt. 1,19, 5; 6,11,1). of those who greet one
whom they meet in the way: Mt. v.47 (in the East even
now Christians and Mohammedans do not salute each
other) ; Lk. x. 4 (asa salutation was made not merely by
a slight gesture and a few words, but generally by em-
bracing and kissing, a journey was retarded by saluting
frequently). of those departing and bidding farewell:
Acts xx. 1; xxi. 6{[RG]. of the absent, saluting by
letter: Ro. xvi. 3, 5-233 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Co. xiii. 12
(18); Phil. iv. 21 sq.; Col. iv. 10-12, 14 sq.; 1 Th. v. 26,
etc. év pirnpare: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii.
12; 1 Pet. v. 14. b. with an acc. of the thing, to receive
joyfully, welcome: ras émayyeNias, Heb. xi. 13, (rHv cup-
dopay, Eur. Ion 587; rav evvoar, Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 3;
rods Aédyous, ibid. 7, 8, 45 so saluto, Verg. Aen. 3, 524).
[Comp.: dr-aomafopat. |
doracés, ae 6, (adondfopa), a salutation, — either
oral: Mt. xxiii. 7; Mk. xii. 38; Lk. i. 29, 41,445; xi. 43;
Kx 465 or tessa 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col. iv. 18; 2 Th. iii,
17. [From Theogn. down. ]*
&-omdos, -ov, (oridos a spot), spotless: auvos, 1 Pet. i.
81
aoTHp
19; (dmmos, Hdian. 5, 6, 16 [7 ed. Bekk.]; p#Aov, Anthol.
Pal. 6, 252, 3). metaph. free from censure, irreproach-
able, 1 Tim. vi. 14; free from vice, unsullied, 2 Pet. iii.
14; dmé rod xécpov, Jas. i. 27 [B. § 182, 5]. (In eccl.
writ.) *
doris, -idSos, 7, an asp, a small and most venomous ser-
pent, the bite of which is fatal unless the part bitten be
immediately cut away: Ro. iii. 13. (Deut. xxxii. 33;
Is. xxx. 6 [etc. Hdt., Aristot., al.] Ael. nat. an. 2, 24; 6,
38; Plut. mor. p. 380 f. i. e. de Isid. et Osir. § 74; Op-
pian. cyn. 3,433.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Asp; Priston, Nat.
Hist. of the Bible, p. 270 sqq.]*
&o-movSos, -ov, (arovd7 a libation, which, as a kind of
sacrifice, accompanied the making of treaties and com-
pacts; cf. Lat. spondere) ; [fr. Thuc. down]; 1. with-
out a treaty or covenant; of things not mutually agreed
upon, e. g. abstinence from hostilities, Thue. 1, 37, etc.
2. that cannot be persuaded to enter into a covenant, im-
placable, (in this sense fr. Aeschyl. down; esp. in the
phrase Gomovdos modenos, Dem. pro cor. p. 314, 16;
Polyb. 1, 65, 6; [Philo de sacrif. § 4]; Cic. ad Att. 9,
10, 5; [ef. Trench § lii.]): joined with doropyos, Ro. i.
31 Rec.; 2 Tim. iii. 3.*
adocdpiov, -ov, Td, an assarium or assarius, the name of
a coin equal to the tenth part of a drachma [see Snvdpiov],
(dimin. of the Lat. as, Rabbin. 10's), [a penny]: Mt. x.
29; Lk. xii. 6. (Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. v.
Rathing’ alte
docov, adv., nearer, (compar. of éyx: near [cf. éyyts]) :
Acts xxvii. 13 [here Rec.***Agco. (or”Aac. q. v.), Recbe el
aoa., (cf. Tdf. ad loc.) ; but see Meyer]. (Hom., Hdt.,
tragic poets; Joseph. antt. 19, 2, 4.) *
”Acoos [so all edd., perh. better -oads ; Chandler § 317,
cf. § 319; Pape, Kigennamen s. v. ], -ov, 7, Assos, a mari-
time city in Asia Minor, on the Migean Sea [Gulf of
Adramyttium], and nine [ace. to Tab. Peuting. (ed.
Fortia d’Urban, Paris 1845, p. 170) 20 to 25] miles [see
Hackett on Acts as below ] distant [to the S.] from Troas,
acity of Lesser Phrygia: Acts xx. 13 sq.; [formerly read
also in Acts xxvii. 13 after the Vule.; cf. docov. See
Papers of the Archzxol. Inst. of America, Classical
Series i. (1882) esp. pp. 60 sqq.].*
detatéw, -&; (doratos unstable, strolling about; cf.
dxardoratos); to wander about, to rove without a setiled
abode, [A. V. to have no certain dwelling-place]: 1 Co. iv.
11. (Anthol. Pal. appendix 39, 4.) *
daretos, -ov, (dorv a city) ; 1. of the city; of pol-
ished manners (opp. to éypotxos rustic), genteel, (fr. Xen.
and Plat. down). 2. elegant (of body), comely, fair,
(Judith xi. 23; Aristaenet. 1,4, 1 and 19, 8): of Moses
(Ex. ii. 2), Heb. say PBI ath T@ Oem added, unto God,
God being judge, i.e. rat fair, Acts vii. 20; cf. W.§ 31, 4
a. p. 212 (199); [248 (232)]; B.179 (156) ; (Philo, vit.
Moys. i. § 3, says of Moses yevundets 6 mats evOvs dw éve-
paver dorevorépay i car iStmrnv). [Cf Trench § evi. ]*
doTtp, RS. 6, [fr. r. star (prob. as strewn over the
sky), cf. dotpov, Lat. stella, Germ. Stern, Eng. star; Fick,
Pt. i. 250; Curtius § 205; Vanicek p. 1146; fr. Hom.
ATTHPLKTOS
down]; a star: Mt. ii. 7, 9, 10 [acc. -épay 8* C; see
pony fin.]; xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev.
vi. 13; viii. 10-12; ix. 1; xii. 1, 4; 6 dornp avrov, the
star betokening his birth, Mt. ii. 2 (i. e. ‘the star of the
Messiah,’ on which cf. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeo-
rum § 14; Anger, Der Stern der Weisen, in Niedner’s
Zeitschr. f. d. histor. Theol. for 1847, fasc. 3; [B. D.s. v.
Star of the Wise Men]); by the figure of the seven
stars which Christ holds in his right hand, Rev. i. 16;
ii. 1; iii. 1, are signified the angels of the seven churches,
under the direction of Christ, ibid. i. 20; see what was
said s. v. dyyeAos, 2. dorip 6 mpwivos the morning star,
Rey. xxii. 16 [Rec. dpOpivos | ; il. 28 (Sao avt@ rov dorépa
t. mpwivoy I will give to him the morning star, that he
may be irradiated with its splendor and outshine all
others, i. e. I will cause his heavenly glory to excel that
of others). dorépes mAavnrat, wandering stars, Jude 13
(these are not planets, the motion of which is scarcely
noticed by the commonalty, but far more probably comets,
which Jude regards as stars which have left the course
prescribed them by God, and wander about at will — cf.
Enoch xviii. 15, and so are a fit symbol of men mAavaytes
«ai mAavopevot, 2 Tim. iii. 13).*
d-orhprktos, -ov, (aTnpitw), unstable, unsteadfast : 2 Pet.
li. 14; iii. 16. (Anthol. Pal. 6, 203, 11.) *
do-ropyos, -ov, (aropyn love of kindred), without natural
affection: Ro. i. 31; 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Aeschin., Theocr.,
Plut., al.) *
doroxéw, -: 1 aor. noTroxnoa; (to be doroyos, fr.
oroxos a mark), to deviate from, miss, (the mark): with
gen. [W. § 30, 6], to deviate from anything, 1 Tim. i. 6
(Sir. vii. 19; viii. 9); mepi re, 1 Tim. vi. 21; 2 Tim. ii.
18. (Polyb., Plut., Leian., [al.].)*
dotpamh, -7s, 7, lightning: Lk. x.18; xvii. 24; Mt. xxiv.
27; xxviii. 3; plur., Rev. iv.5; vill. 5; xi. 19; xvi.18;
of the gleam of a lamp, Lk. xi. 36 [so Aeschyl. frag. (fr.
schol. on Soph. Oed. Col. 1047) 188 Ahrens, 372 Dind.].*
dotparre; (later form orpdmrw, see domd tomar init.
[prob. allied with dornp q. v.]); to lighten, (Hom. Il. 9,
237; 17, 595, and often in Attic): Lk. xvii. 24. of
dazzling objects: éo6ns (RG écOnoes), Lk. xxiv. 4
(and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. Oed. Col. 1067;
Eur. Phoen. 111,down). [Comp.: é&-, mepraotpdrrw.|*
do-rpov, -ov, Td, [(see dornp init.), fr. Hom.down]; 1.
a group of stars, a constellation ; but not infreq. also — 2.
i.q. dornp a star: Lk. xxi. 25; Acts xxvii. 20; Heb. xi.
12; the image of a star, Acts vii. 43.*
"A-cty-kpitos [T WH ’Acivep.], -ov, 6, (a priv. and
avyxpivw to compare; incomparable); Asyncritus, the
name of an unknown Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi. 14.*
G-ctpdwvos, -ov, not agreeing in sound, dissonant, inhar-
monious, at variance: mpds dddAovs (Diod. 4, 1), Acts
xxviii. 25. (Sap. xviii. 10; [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 8, lal;
Plat., Plut., {al.].) *
G-rbveros, -ov, unintelligent, without understanding: Mt.
xv. 16; Mk. vii. 18; stupid: Ro.i. 21; x.19. In imita-
tion of the Hebr. 923, ungodly (Sap. i. 5; Sir. xv. 7 sq.
[ct. dovvereiv, Ps. xviii. (cxix.) 158]), because a wicked
82
5) ,
agcwTla
man has no mind for the things which make for salva-
tion: Ro. i. 31 [al. adhere here to the Grk. usage; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.down.) [Cf.
aods, fin. ]*
d-oby-leros, -ov, 1. uncompounded, simple, (Plat.,
Aristot., al.). 2. (cuvridewa to covenant), covenant-
breaking, faithless: Ro. i. 31 (so in Jer. iii. 8, 11; Dem.
de falsa leg. p. 383, 6; cf. Pape and Passow s. v.; dour
Gereiv to be faithless [Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 15; 2 Esdr. x. 2;
Neh. i. 8, etc.]; dovvOecia transgression, 1 Chr. ix. 1
[Ald., Compl. ; 2 Esdr. ix. 2,4; Jer. ili. 7]; edouvOeretv
to keep faith; [cf. Trench § lii.]).*
drpddeva, -as, 7, (dopadns), [fr. Aeschyl. down]; a.
jirmness, stability: €v mdéon ao. most securely, Acts v.
23. trop. certainty, undoubted truth: hoya (see dédyos,
I. 7), Lk. i. 4, (rod Adyou, the certainty of a proof, Xen.
mem. 4, 6,15). b. security from enemies and dangers,
safety: 1 Th. v. 3 (opp. to kivévvos, Xen. mem. 3, 12, 7).*
dopadts, -és, (opddAw to make to totter or fall, to
cheat, [cf. Lat. fallo, Germ. fallen, etc., Eng. fall, fail],
opdad\opa to fall, to reel), [fr. Hom. down]; a. firm
(that can be relied on, confided in) : a@yxvpa, Heb. vi. 19
(where L and Tr have received as the form of acc. sing.
dopadny [Tdf. 7 -Anv; cf. Tdf. ad loc.; Delitzsch, Com.
ad loc.] see dpony). trop. certain, true: Acts xxv. 26;
To aodanes, Acts xxi. 34; xxii.30. b. suited to confirm:
twi, Phil. iii. 1 (so Joseph. antt. 3, 2, 1).*
dopadifw: 1 aor. pass. inf. aodadioOnvar; 1 aor. mid.
nopadiodunv ; (aopadns); esp. freq. fr. Polyb. down; to
make firm, to make secure against harm ; pass. to be made
secure: Mt. xxvii. 64 (6 rados) [B. 52 (46)]; mid.
prop. to make secure for one’s self or for one’s own ad-
vantage, (often in Polyb.): Mt. xxvii. 65 sq.; to make
fast rovs médas eis ro EvAov, Acts xvi. 24 [W. § 66, 2 d.;
B. § 147, 8].
do badds, adv., [fr. Hom. down], safely (so as to prevent
escape): Mk. xiv. 44; Acts xvi. 23. assuredly: ywo-
oxewv, Acts ii. 36 (eiddres, Sap. xviii. 6).*
Goxnpovew, -@; (to be dcynpwv, deformed ; ry Keda-
Ajv adoynpoveiv, of a bald man, Ael. v. h. 11, 4); to act un-
becomingly ({Eur.], Xen., Plat., al.) : 1 Co. xiii. 5; emi twa,
towards one, i. e. contextually, to prepare disgrace for
her, 1 Co. vii. 36.*
aoxnpootvn, -7s, 7, (acynuov ); fr. Plato down; un-
seemliness, an unseemly deed: Ro. i. 27; of the pudenda,
one’s nakedness, shame: Rev. xvi. 15, as in Ex. xx. 26;
Deut. xxiii. 14, ete. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.)*
GTX HLwV, -ovos, neut. daynuov, (cxynua); a. deformed.
b. indecent, unseemly: 1 Co. xii. 23, opp. to evoyjpov.
({Hat.], Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) *
dowria, -as, 7, (the character of an dowzos, i. e. of an
abandoned man, one that cannot be saved, fr. cada, oda
i. q. ta€@, [d-cw-ro-s, Curtius § 570]; hence prop. incor-
rigibleness), an abandoned, dissolute, life; profligacy, prod-
igality, [R. V. riot]: Eph. v. 18; Tit. i. 6; 1 Pet. iv. 4;
(Prov. xxviii. 7; 2 Mace. vi. 4. Plat. rep. 8, p. 560 e.;
Aristot. eth. Nic. 4, 1, 5 (3) p. 1120*, 3; Polyb. 32, 20,
9; 40, 12, 7; cf. Cic. Tusc. 3, 8; Hdian. 2, 5, 2 (1 ed.
aoWOTWS
Bekk.), and elsewhere). Cf. Tittmann i. p. 152 sq.;
[Trench § xvi.].*
dodtws, adv., (adj. dowros, on which see doartia), dis-
solutely, profligately: Gv (Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 8), Lk.
xv. 13 [A. V. riotous living].*
Graktéw, -@: 1 aor. nraxtnoa; to be draxtos, to be disor-
derly; a. prop. of soldiers marching out of order or
quitting the ranks: Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 6, etc. Hence b.
to be neglectful of duty, to be lawless: Xen. Cyr. 8,1, 22;
oec. 5, 15; Lys. 141, 18 [i.e. c. Alcib. or. 1§ 18], al. c.
to lead a disorderly life: 2 Th. iii. 7, cf. 11.*
draxtos, -ov, (rdcow), disorderly, out of the ranks,
(often so of soldiers); irregular, inordinate (éraxrot
7Sovai immoderate pleasures, Plat. lez. 2, 660 b.; Plut.
de lib. edue. ¢. 7), deviating from the prescribed order or
(ce eleven ance hem tie 6. (ne Grk. write fre
[Hdt. and] Thue. down ; often in Plat.) *
a-réxtas, adv., disorderly: 2 Th. iii. 6 drdxtws mepura-
tetv, which is explained by the added kat py Kara tH
mapadoow nv mapédaBe map nuov; cf. ibid. 11, where it is
explained by pndev epyatsuevor, adda meprepyatopevor.
(Often in Plato.) *
Grekvos, -ov, (rexvov), without offspring, childless: Lk.
xx. 28-30. (Gen. xv. 2; Sir. xvi. 3. In Grk. writ. fr.
Hesiod opp. 600 down.)*
arevifw; 1 aor. nréuca; (fr. drevns stretched, intent,
and this fr. reivw and a intensive ; [yet cf. W. § 16,4 B. a.
fin., and s. v. A, a, 3]); to fix the eyes on, gaze upon: with
dat. of pers., Lk. iv. 20; xxii. 56; Acts iii. 12; x.4; xiv. 9;
xxiii. 1; foll. by ets with ace. of pers., Acts iii. 4; vi. 15;
xiii. 9; metaph. to fix one’s mind on one as an example,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 23 ets rs, Acts i.10; vii. 55; 2 Co.
iii. 7, 13; ets zt, to look into anything, Acts xi. 6. (3
Mace. ii. 26. [Aristot.], Polyb. 6, 11, 5 [i. e. 6, 11%, 12
Dind.]; Diod. 3, 39 [Dind. évar.]; Joseph. b. j. 5, 12, 3;
Leian. cont. 16, al.) *
drep, prep., freq. in the poets [fr. Hom. down], rare
in prose writ. fr. Plat. [?] down; without, apart from:
with gen. [ Dion. Hal. 3,10; Plut. Num. 14, Cat. min. 5];
in the Bible only in 2 Macc. xii. 15; Lk. xxii. 6 (Grep
éxAov in the absence of the multitude; hence, without
tumult), 35. [* Teaching’ 3, 10; Herm. sim. 5, 4, 5.]*
dripatw; 1 aor. nrivaca; [Pass., pres. driysd¢opar]; 1
aor. inf. driwacOnva; (fr. dryos; hence) to make aripos,
to dishonor, insult, treat with contumely, whether in word,
in deed, or in thought: [Mk. xii. 4 T Tr mrg. WH (cf.
dripdw and -udo)]; Lk. xx. 11; Jn. viii. 49; Acts v. 41;
Ro. ii. 23; Jas. ii. 6 [W. § 40, 5, 2; B. 202 (175) ]. Pass.:
Ro. i. 24, on which cf. W. 326 (305 sq.); [and § 39, 3
N. 3]. (Un Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept.) *
étiypdw, -&: [1 aor. jripnoa]; (Ty); to deprive of
honor, despise, treat with contempt or contumely : twa, Mk.
xii. 4 L Tr txt. Ariunoav (see drat and -ydw). (In
Grk. writ. [chiefly Epic] fr. Hom. down.) *
drusta, -as, %, (dresos), dishonor, ignominy, disgrace, (fr.
Hom. down]: 1 Co. xi. 14; opp. to dda, 2 Co. vi. 8; 1
Co. xv. 43 (€v dria sc. dv, in a state of disgrace, used
of the unseemliness and offensiveness of a dead body) ;
83
‘writ. transitively, to beam upon, irradiate. 2.
avdadns
kat’ drysiay equiv. to drives, with contempt sc. of myself,
2 Co. xi. 21 [R. V. by way of disparagement, cf. kara, I.
fin.]; md6n atuias base lusts, vile passions, Ro. i. 26, ef.
W.§ 34, 3b.; |B. § 132,10]. eds druiay for a dishonor-
able use, of vessels, opp. to tryin: Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. ii.
20%
dripos, -ov, (ry); fr. Hom. down; without honor, un-
honored, dishonored: Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi. 4; 1 Co. iv.
10 (opp. to évdoéos) ; base, of less esteem: 1 Co. xii. 23
[here the neut. plur. of the compar., dridrepa (Rec.*#
atTu.@repa) |.*
aridw, -@: [pf. pass. ptcp. 7riyzwpevos]; (dros); fr.
Aeschyl. down ; to dishonor, mark with disgrace: Mk. xii.
4 RG, see arya [and dripdto].*
Grpls, -idos, 7, vapor: Jas. iv. 14; canvod (Joel ii. 30
[al. iii. 3]), Acts ii. 19 [opp. to cards in Aristot. meteor.
2, 4 p. 359», 29 sq., to vepos ibid. 1, 9 p. 346%, 32].
(In Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 75 and] Plat. Tim. p. 86 e.
down.) *
G-Topos, -ov, (Tévw to cut), that cannot be cut in two or
dwided, indivisible, [ Plat. Soph. 229 d.; of time, Aristot.
phys. 8, 8 p. 263°, 27]: ev dréum in a moment, 1 Co.
XV. O02.”
Gros, -ov, (rémos), out of place; not befitting, unbe-
coming, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. down; very often in
Plato); in later Grk. in an ethical sense, improper,
wicked : Lk. xxiii. 41 (G@romév tt mpaooey, as in Job xxvii.
6; 2 Macc. xiv. 23); Acts xxv.5 LT Tr WH; (Sept.
for }\8 Job iv. 8; xi. 11, ete. Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 6;
Plut. de aud. poét. c. 3 @avAd and aroma) ; of men: 2 Th.
lil. 2 (Gromer kal movnpoi; Luth. unartig, more correctly
unrighteous [(iniquus), A. V. unreasonable, cf. Ellic. ad
loc.]). inconvenient, harmful: Acts xxviii. 6 undێv dromov
eis avTov yuvduevov, no injury, no harm coming to him,
(Thue. 2, 49; Joseph. antt. 11, 5, 2; Hdian. 4, 11, 7 [4,
ed. Bekk.]).*
’Arrédea [-Aia T WH (see I, ¢) J, -as, 7, A ttalia, a mar-
itime city of Pamphylia in Asia, very near the borders
of Lycia, built and named by Attalus Philadelphus, king
of Pergamum; now Antali [or Adalia; cf. Dict. of Geog.]:
Acts xiv. 25.*
avydtw: 1 aor. inf. avydacar; (avy) ; 1. in Grk.
in the
Bible intrans. to be bright, to shine forth: 2 Co. iv. 4 [L
mrg. Tr mrg. caravy. see dwriopds, b.], (Lev. xiii. 24-28,
[ete.]). [Comp.: &:-, xat-avyd¢o. |*
avy, -js, 9, brightness, radiance, (cf. Germ. Auge [eye],
of which the tragic poets sometimes use avyn, see Pape
for L. and S.; cf. Lat. lumina]), especially of the sun;
hence #Aiov is often added (Hom. and sqq.), daylight;
hence dypts [-pe T Tr WH] adyjs even till break of day,
Acts xx. 11 (Polyaen. 4, 18 p. 386 xara rnv mparny adbyny
THs npepas). [Syn. see heyyos. fined
Atyovoros, -ov, 6, Augustus {ef. Eng. Majesty; see
aeBaords, 2], the surname of G. Julius Caesar Octavia-
nus, the first Roman emperor: Lk. ii. 1.*
av0déns, -es, (fr. ad’rés and Adopar), selfpleasing, self
willed, arrogant: Tit. i. 7; 2 Pet.ii.10. (Gen. xlix. 3, 7;
> /
av0aipertos
Prov. xxi. 24. In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down.) [Trench § xciii.]*
ai0-alpetos, -ov, (fr. adros and aipéopuar), self-chosen ; in
Grk. writ. esp. of states or conditions, as dovAeia, Thue.
6, 40, etc., more rarely of persons; voluntary, of free
‘choice, of one’s own accord, (as otpatnyés, Xen. an. 5, 7,
29, explained § 28 by és €avrdv €Anrat) : 2 Co. viii. 3, 17.*
aiGevréw, -3 ; (a bibl. and eccl. word ; fr. avOevrns contr.
fr. avroevrns, and this fr. airés and évrea arms [al. évrns,
ef. Hesych. cuvévrns: ovvepyos; cf. Lobeck, Technol. p.
121]; hence a. acc. to earlier usage, one who with his
own hand kills either others or himself. 6. in later Grk.
writ. one who does a thing himself, the author (rns mpdgews,
Polyb. 23, 14, 2, etc.) ; one who acts on his own authority,
autocratic, i. q. adroxparwp an absolute master ; cf. Lobeck
ad Phryn. p. 120 [also as above; cf. W. § 2,1 ¢.]); to
govern one, exercise dominion over one: twos, 1 Tim.
iiv12%
avAéw, -&: 1 aor. nvAnca; [pres. pass. ptep. rd avdAov-
pevov]; (avdds) ; to play on the flute, to pipe: Mt. xi.17;
LK. vii. 32; 1Co. xiv. 7. (Fr. [Alem., Hdt.,] Xen. and
Plat. down.) *
avd, -7s, 7, (dw to blow; hence) prop. a place open to
the air (Svamvecpevos tomos avd7 déyerat, Athen. 5, 15 p.
189 b.); 1. among the Greeks in Homer’s time an
uncovered space around the house, enclosed by a wall, in
which the stables stood (Hom. Od. 9, 185; Il. 4, 433);
hence among the Orientals that roofless enclosure in the
open country in which flocks were herded at night, a sheep-
fold: Jn. x. 1, 16. 2. the uncovered court-yard of the
house, Hebr. 1¥N, Sept. addy, Vulg. atrium. Inthe O. T.
particularly of the courts of the tabernacle and of the
temple at Jerusalem; so in the N. T. once: Rev. xi. 2
(rnv avryy tiv eEwbev [Rec.st gowbev] tov vaovd). The
dwellings of the higher classes usually had two adAai, one
exterior, between the door and the street, called also
mpoavdwov (q. V.); the other interior, surrounded by the
buildings of the dwelling itself. The latter is mentioned
Mt. xxvi. 69 (where ¢£ is opp. to the room in which the
judges were sitting) ; Mk. xiv. 66; Lk. xxii.55. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Hauser ; [B. D. Am.ed.s. v. Court; BB.DD.
s.v. House]. 3. the house itself, a palace: Mt. xxvi.
3, 58; Mk. xiv. 54; xv. 16; Lk. xi. 21; Jn. xviii. 15, and °
so very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Od. 4, 74 down [ef.
Eustath. 1483, 39 r@ ris adAjjs dvouare ra Sépara dnAot,
Suid. col. 652 ¢. addy + 9 rod Baoidéas oikia. Yet this sense
: denied to the N. T. by Meyer et al.; see Mey. on Mt.
etal
atAnris, -od, 6, (atAéw), a flute-player : Mt. ix. 23; Rev.
xviii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn. and] Hdt. 6, 60
down.) *
avAtLopar: depon.; impf. nddAcounv; 1 aor. nddlcOny
[Veitch s. v.; B.51 (44); W.§ 39, 2]; (adn); in Sept.
mostly for 1p; 1. prop. to lodge in the court-yard
esp. at night; of flocks and shepherds. 2. to pass the
night in the open air, bivouac. 3. univ. to pass the
night, lodge: so Mt. xxi. 17; Lk. xxi. 37 (€Eepyopevos
nvAifero eis rd Epos, going out to pass the night he retired
84
auTdpKee
to the mountain; cf. B. § 147,15). (In Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down.) *
aidés, -od, 6, (dw, adw), (fr. Hom. down], a pipe: 1Co.
xiv. 7. [Cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch. v.]*
attave, and earlier (the only form in Pind. and Soph.
[Veitch s. v. says, ‘Hes. Mimnerm. Soph. Thuc. always
have at or avfopa, and Pind. except avédavor Fr. 130
(Bergk)’]) ato (Eph. ii. 21; Col. ii. 19) ; impf. nééavor ;
fut. avénow ; 1 aor. niénoa; [Pass., pres. avédvoyat | ; 1 aor.
nv&nOny ; 1. trans. to cause to grow, to augment: 1
Co. iii. 6 sq.; 2Co.ix. 10. Pass. to grow, increase, become
greater: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv.8 L T Tr WH; 2 Co. x. 15;
Col. i. 6 [not Rec.]; eis ray émtyvwow rod Oeod unto the
knowledge of God, Col. i. 10 (GL T Tr WH 79 erryroce
Tov Geov) ; eis cwtnpiay [not Rec.] to the attaining of sal-
vation, 1 Pet. ii. 2. 2. acc. to later usage (fr. Aristot.
an. post. 1, 13 p. 78°, 6, etc., down; but nowhere in Sept.
[cf. B. 54 (47); 145 (127); W. § 38, 1]) intrans. to grow,
increase: of plants, Mt. vi. 28; Mk. iv. 8 Rec.; Lk. xii.
27 [not Tdf.; Trmrg. br. avé.]; Lk. xiii. 19; of infants,
Lk. i. 80; ii. 40; of a multitude of people, Acts vii. 17.
of inward Christian growth: eis Xpeorov, in reference to
[W. 397 (371); yet cf. Ellic. ad loc.] Christ, Eph. iv.
15; els vady, so as to form atemple, Eph. ii. 21; ev xapire,
2 Pet. iii. 18; with an acc. of the substance, ry avénow,
Col. ii. 19 [ef. W. § 32, 2; B. § 131, 5, also Bp. Lehtft.’s
note ad loc.]; of the external increase of the gospel
it is said 6 Adyos nvEave: Acts vi. 7; xii. 24; xix. 20;
of the growing authority of a teacher and the number of
his adherents (opp. to éAatrove Ga), Jn. iii. 30. [Comp.:
ovr, dmep-avédve. | *
avénots, -ews, 7, (avEw), increase, growth: Eph. iv. 16;
tov Geod, effected by God, Col. ii. 19; cf. Meyer ad loe.
({Hat.], Thuc., Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) *
aigw, see avdva.
atipiov, adv., (fr. avpa the morning air, and this fr. ato
to breathe, blow; [acc. to al. akin to jas, Lat. aurora;
Curtius § 613, cf. Vanitek p. 944]), to-morrow (Lat. eras) :
Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; Acts xxiii. 15 Rec., 20; xxv. 22;
1 Co. xv. 32 (fr. Is. xxii. 13) ; onpepov kai avpiov, Lk. xiii.
32 sq.; Jas. iv. 13 [Rec.st G; al. orp. 4 avp.]. 7) adprov se.
nuepa [W. § 64, 5; B. § 123, 8] the morrow, Mt. vi. 34;
Acts iv. 3; émi tiv avpiov, on the morrow, i. e. the next
morning, Lk. x. 35; Actsiv. 5; 76 [L ra; WH om] rijs
avpiov, what the morrow will bring forth, Jas. iv. 14.
[From Hom. down. ]*
atotnpés, -d, -dv, (fr. avo to dry up), harsh (Lat. au-
sterus), stringent of taste, adarnpdy Kal yAvKd (Kal mexpdv),
Plat. legg. 10, 897 a.; otvos, Diog. Laért. 7, 117. of
mind and manners, harsh, rough, rigid, [ef. Trench
§ xiv.]: Lk. xix. 21, 22; (Polyb. 4, 20, 7; Diog. Laért.
7, 26, etc. 2Mace. xiv. 30).*
airdpkeia, -as, 7, (adrapkns, q. V-), @ perfect condition
of life, in which no aid or support is needed; equiv. to
Teretdtns KtHoews dyabdv, Plat. def. p. 412 b.; often in
Aristot. [defined by him (pol. 7, 5 init. p. 1326, 29) as
follows : 76 mavra imdpyew x. Seic bar pnOevds avrdpkes; cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 11]; hence, a sufficiency of the
avTdapKns
necessaries of life: 2 Co. ix. 8; subjectively, a mind con-
tented with its lot, contentment: 1 Tim. vi. 6; (Diog.
Laért. 10, 130).*
atrdépxns [on the accent see Chandler § 705 ], -es, (avrds,
apxéw), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sufficient for one’s self, strong
enough or possessing enough to need no aid or support;
independent of external circumstances; often in Grk.
writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. 1, 32 down. Subjectively,
contented with one’s lot, with one’s means, though the slender-
est: Phil. iv. 11, (so Sir. xl. 18; Polyb. 6, 48, 73 Diog.
Laért. 2, 24 of Socrates, abrdpxns cat ceuvds). (CE. abrdp-
reva. | *
avro-KaTd-KptTos, -ov, (adTos, kataxpiva), self-condemned :
Tit. iii. 11; (eccl. writ. [ef. W. § 34, 3]).*
avréparos, -ov, and -7, -ov, (fr. adrdés and pepaa to desire
eagerly, fr. obsol. theme pdw), moved by one’s own im-
pulse, or acting without the instigation or intervention of
another, (fr. Hom. down) ; often of the earth producing
plants of itself, and of the plants themselves and fruits
growing without culture; [on its adverbial use cf. W.
§ 54, 2]: Mk. iv. 28; (Hdt. 2,94; 8, 138; Plat. polit. p.
272 a.; [Theophr. h. p. 2,1]; Diod. 1, 8, ete. Lev. xxv.
5,11). of gates opening of their own accord: Acts xii.
10, (so in Hom. Il. 5, 749; Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 7; Apoll.
Rh. 4, 41; Plut. Timol. 12; Nonn. Dion. 44, 21; [Dion
Cass. 44, 17]).*
airémrns, -ov, 6, (avtdés, OIITQ), seeing with one’s own
eyes, an eye-witness, (cf. adrjxoos one who has himself
heard a thing): Lk.i. 2. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*
avrés, -7, -d, pron. (“ derived from the particle ad with
the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself
it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has
either been previously mentioned or, when the whole
discourse is looked at, must necessarily be supplied.”
Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p, 268]). It is
used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T.
far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this
very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they de-
viate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9 [On
classic usage cf. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which
dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger
pp. 732-736.]
I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to
distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with
another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. uf
When used to express Opposition or Distinction,
it is added a. to the subjects implied in the verb, the
versonal pronouns ¢y, jpeis, ov, etc., being omitted: Lk.
v. 37 (adrés exxvOnoera the wine, as opp. to the skins) ;
Lk. xxii. 71 (adrol yap jnxovoapev we ourselves, opp. to
witnesses whose testimony could have been taken); Jn.
ii. 25 (ards éyivwoxev, opp. to testimony he might have
called for); Jn. iv. 42 (we ourselves, not thou only) ; Jn.
ix. 21 [T Tr WH om.]; Acts xviii. 15 (dweode avrot) ;
xx. 34; xxii. 19; 1 Th. i. 9, ete.; with a negative added,
‘he does not himself do this or that,’ i. e. he leaves it to
others: Lk. vi. 42 (adrés, viz. thou, od Bdérov); Lk. xi.
46 (adrol, viz yr, ov mpoowavere), 52; In. XVliil. 28; 3
85
ee
QvuToOS
Jn. 10. With the addition of xai to indicate that a thing
is ascribed to one equally with others: Lk. xiv. 12
(unmore Kal adroi oe Gytixadéowat); xvi. 28; Acts ii. 22
(GL T TrWHom. eat]; Jn. iv. 45; xvii. 19, 21; Phil.
ii. 24, etc. In other pass. cal adrds is added to a subject
expressly mentioned, and is placed after it ; and in trans-
lation may be joined to the predicate and rendered like-
wise: Lk. i. 36 (4 ovyyevis cov Kal abt) cuvetAnduia vidv
tly kinswoman herself also, i. e. as well as thou); Mt.
XXVii. 57 (4s cal adros euadnrevoe [LT Tr WH txt. ren]
T@ "Inood); Lk. xxiii. 51 [RG]; Mk. xv. 43; Acts viii.
13 (6 d€ Sivev Kai aitds émictevoe); xv. 32; xxi. 24; 1
Jn. ii. 6; Gal. ii. 17; Heb. xiii. 3. b. it is added to
subjects expressed, whether to pronouns personal or
demonstrative, or to nouns proper or common: Jn. iii.
28 (avrol tpeis ye yourselves bear witness, not only have
I affirmed) ; Acts xx. 30 (€& dua atrav from among
your own selves, not only from other quarters) ; Ro. xv.
14 (kat adrds éyo I of myself also, not only assured by
report, cf. i. 8); 1 Co. v. 13 (€€ ipay airév from your
own society, opp. to them that are without, of whose
character God must be the judge) ; 1 Co. vii. 35; xi. 13;
1 Th. iv. 9; avrot odror, Acts xxiv. 20; adrod rovrov
(masc.), Acts xxv. 25; "Incods airos Jesus himself, per-
sonally, opp. to those who baptized by his command,
Jn. iv. 2; adrdés "Incods, opp. to those who believed on
him on account of his miracles, Jn. ii. 24; Jesus himself,
not others only, Jn. iv. 44; adr. Aaveid, opp. to the doc-
tors of the law, whose decision did not seem quite to
agree with the words of David, Mk. xii. 36 sq.; Lk. xx.
42; a’rés 6 Saravas, opp. to his ministers, 2 Co. xi. 14;
avros 6 beds, God himself, not another, Rev. xxi. 3; aira
Ta émovpama, the heavenly things themselves [i. e. sanc-
tuary ], opp. to its copies, Heb. ix. 23 [see émoupamos, 1 ¢.].
c. it is used to distinguish one not only from his compan-
ions, disciples, servants, — as Mk. ii. 25 (adrds kal of per’
avrod) ; Jn. ii. 12; iv. 53; xviii. 1,— but also from things
done by him or belonging to him, as Jn. vii. 4 (rl movet Kat
(nret abrés [L Tr mrg. WH mrg. adr ]) ; 1 Co. iii. 15 (rads
70 €pyov kataxanoerat, avros S€ ooOnoera) ; Lk. xxiv. 15
(abrés (6) *Inoots, Jesus himself in person, opp. to their
previous conversation about him). d. self to the exclu-
sion of others, i. e. he etc. alone, by one’s self: Mk. vi. 31
(ipeis abrot ye alone, unattended by any of the people;
cf. Fritzsche ad loc.) ; Jn. xiv. 11 (did ra épya abra [WH
mrg. avrod]); Ro. vii. 25 (adrés éye I alone, unaided by
the Spirit of Christ; cf. viii. 2); 2 Co. xii. 13 (atrds éya,
unlike the other preachers of the gospel) ; Rev. xix. 12;
cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 733 iii.; Matth. § 467, 5; Kihner
§ 468 Anm. 2; [Jelf § 656, 3]; with the addition of
povos (as often in Attic writ.): Jn. vi. 15. e. self, not
prompted or influenced by another, i. e. of one’s self, of
one’s own accord: Jn. xvi. 27 (so even Hom. Il. 17, 254;
and among Attic writ. esp. Xen.). 2. When it gives’
Prominence, it answers a. to our emphatic he, she,
it: Mt. i. 21 (adrés odoet HE and no other); Mt. v. 4-10
(abrof); vi. 4 [RG]; xvii. 5 (avrod dxovere); Lk. vi. 35;
xvii. 16; xxiv. 21; Jn. ix. 21 (adros [T Tr WH om.]...
avuros
airoy...adrés); Acts x.42[L txt. Tr txt. WH obros];
Gal. iv. 17 (abrovs) ; Eph. ii. 10 (adrod) ; Col. i. 17; 1 Jn.
ii. 2; iv. 5; Jas. ii. 6 sq. So in Grk. writ. also fr. Hom.
down; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 734 v. It is used with the same
force after relative sentences, where Greek prose uses
obros: Mt. xii. 50 (Gores dv ronan . - » » adTds pov ddedds
éorv, where in Mk. iii. 35 odros) ; Mt. xxvi. 48 ; Mk. xiv.
44; cf. B. 107 (94) sq. Less emphatically, adrds is put
before subjects, serving to recall them again: Mt. iii. 4
(adrds 5€ Iwdvyns now he, whom I spoke of, John) ; Mk.
vi. 17 (adrés yap ‘Hpwdns) ; Ro. viii. 16 (adr6 76 mvevpa).
b. it points out some one as chief, leader, master of
the rest (often so in Grk., as in the well-known phrase of
the Pythagoreans airds ea [cf. W. § 22, 3, 4 and p. 150
(142)]): of Christ, Mt. viii. 24; Mk. iv. 38; vi. 47; viii.
29; Lk. y. 16 sq.; ix. 515 x. 38; ~of God, Lk. vi. 35;
Heb. xiii. 5; 1 Jn. iv. 19 [not Lehm.]. c. it answers
to our very, just, exactly, (Germ. eben, gerade): Ro. ix. 3
(airés ¢yo I myself, the very man who seems to be inimi-
cal to the Israelites); 2 Co. x. 1 (I myself, who bore
myself lowly in your presence, as ye said); avra ra €pya,
Jn. v. 36; often in Luke ev adr tH jpépa or Spa, ait
T@ katp@, in that very day, hour, season: Lk. ii. 38; x. 21;
Xuks 1S sabi, I, GIS sce, WO) scam, NY OSe she MBL Be aCe
xvi. 18. In the writings of Paul atrd rovro this very
thing: Gal. ii. 10; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i..6; eis avro
|rvdro for this very purpose, on this very account: Ro. ix.
173 xii. 6; 2 Co. v. 5; ph. vi. 223) Col. 8; and im
the same sense [ for this very thing] the simple accus.
(as in Attic, cf. Matth. § 470, 7; Kiihner ii. 267 Anm. 6;
W. § 21 N. 2) rodro aird, 2 Co. ii. 3 [but see Mey. ad
loc.], and avré rovro, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm. reads here airo/].
a. even, Lat. vel, adeo, (in Hom. ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p.
733 il.) : kal adri 7 Kriows, Ro. viii. 21; oddé 7 vows adrn,
1 Co. xi. 14; cai [Tr om. L WH br. kat] adrés 6 vids, 1 Co.
xv. 28; kal airy Sdppa even Sarah herself, although a
feeble old woman, Heb. xi. 11 [yet WH mrg. reads the
dat. avr7 Sdppa; see karaBorn, 1].
II. ards has the force of a simple personal pronoun
of the third person, answering to our unemphatic he, she,
it; and that 1. as in classic Grk., in the oblique
cases, him, her, it, them, etc.: numberless instances, —
as in the gen. absolute, e. g. adrod €AOdvros, NaAnoavtos,
etc.; or in the ace. with inf., efs 76 efvat adrods dvamoXo-
yirovs, Ro. i. 20; or after prepositions, éé adrod, év avTo,
etc.; or where it indicates the possessor, 6 rarhp adrod ;
or a person as the (dir. or indir.) object of an active
verb, as émdaoe: ara, Mt. vii. 9; domdoacbe avtnv, Mt.
x. 12; dels adrovs, Mt. xxvi. 443 Av Scavedov adrois, Lk.
i. 225 od« eta adrd Nadeiv, Lk. iv. 413 4 oxoria adts od
xatéAaBe, Jn. i. 5. But see atrovd below. 2. Contrary
to Grk. usage, in the N. T. even in the Nominative it
is put for a simple personal pronoun of the third person,
where the Greeks say ofros or 6 8é, or use no pronoun at
all. This has been convincingly shown by B. 107 (93)
sqq.; and yet some of the examples adduced by him are not
decisive, but either must be or can be referred to the usage
illustrated under I. 1;—those in which aérés is used of
86
autos
Christ, apparently to I. 1b. But, in my opinion, the
question is settled even by the following: avrés, Mt.
xiv. 2; Mk. xiv. 15; Lk.i. 22; xv. 14; so too in the Sept.
(cf. Thiersch, De Pentat. vers. Alex. p. 98); Sir. xlix. 7;
Tob. vi. 11; adroi, Mk. ii. 8 (otras adroit Siadoyifovrat in
Grsb.); Lk. ix. 36; xiv. 1; xxii. 23; adrdé, Lk. xi. 14
[Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.]. Whether airy and atrai
also are so used, is doubtful; cf. B. 109 (95). 3.
Sometimes in the oblique cases the pron. is omitted,
being evident from the context: Mk. vi. 5 (émsOeis, sc.
avrois); Jn. iii. 34 (didaor, sc. aire); In. x. 29 (dedaxe
pot, sc. avrovs) ; Acts xiii. 3 (améAvaay, sc. avrovs) ; Rev.
Xviii. 21 (€Badev, sc. adrov), etc. 4. Not infrequently
avros in the oblique cases is added to the ver b, although
the case belonging to this very verb has preceded: Mt.
Vili. 1 (karaBavre bé adtr@ [L Tr WH gen. absol.] ad rot
épovs nkodovOnoay ait@) ; Mt. iv. 16; v. 40; viii. 23, 28
[RG]; ix. 28; xxv. 29 (a6 [om. by LT Tr WH] rod py
éxovros ... am avrov); xxvi. 71 [RGLbr. T]; Mk. v. 2
[RG]; ix. 28[ RG]; Jn. xv. 2 (wav kAjpa. . . atperavro) ;
Acts vii. 21 [RG]; Jas. iv. 17; Rev. ii. 7; vi. 4 [LTr
mrg. br.]; cf. W. § 22,4 a.; B. 142 (125). Doubtless
the writer, while writing the earlier words with the in-
tention of joining them to the leading verb to follow,
marked off these very words as a clause by themselves,
as if they formed a protasis; and so, when he came to
the leading verb, he construed it just as though it were
to form an apodosis. 5. By a Hebraism avrds is used
redundantly in relative sentences: js etye rd Ouyatpiov
avrjs, Mk. vii. 25 ; of 7@ podome adrod, 1 Pet. ii. 24 (RG
T, but Tr mre. br. avrov) ; esp. in the Apocalypse: jv
ovdels Stvatat KNetaat aiTny, Rev. iii. 8 (ace. to the true
text); ofs €606n adrois, Rey. vii. 2; add vs. 93; xiii. 12;
xvii. 9; far oftener in the Sept.; rare in Grk. writ. [fr.
Callim. ep. 44]; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 709; [B.§ 143,1]; W.
22,4 b. where add to the exx. Hdian. 8, 6, 10 [5 Bekk.]
ois emipoirdot avtois Tas AouTas Toders TUAAL avolyyurTo.
But to this construction must not be referred Mt. iii. 12
ob TO mrvov év TH xet—pl avTov, nor 1 Pet. ii. 24 ds Tas
duaptias nudy avtos avnveyxev. For in the latter pas-
sage adrds is in contrast with ws, who must otherwise
have paid the penalty of our sins; and in the former the
sense is, ‘he holds his winnowing-shovel in his hand.’
6. Very often avrés is used rather laxly, where the
subject or the object to which it must be referred is not
expressly indicated, but must be gathered especially
from some preceding name of a province or city, or from
the context : Mt. iv. 23 (wepujyev tiv Tadidaiav diddoKov év
Tals Tuvaywyais avTay, 1. e. of the Galileeans) ; Acts vill. 5
(Sapapelas exnpvocer adrois, i. e. rots Sapapetras) ; Xx. 2
(avrovs, i. e. the inhabitants rév pepar éexeivov ); 2 Co. ii.
13 (adrois, i.e. the Christians of Troas); Mt. xix. 2 (dyAou
ToAXol kal eOepanevoev avtous, i.e. their sick); 1 Pet. iii.
14 (PoBov adray, i.e. of those who may be able caxdcat
you, vs. 13); Lk. xxiii. 51 (7m BoudR adrady, i. e. of those
with whom he had been a BovAeurns) ; Heb. viii. 8 (abrois
[LT WH Tr mrg. airovs; see ueupopar] i. e. rots Zxovee
THY ScaOneny thy mparny) ; Lk. ii. 22 (rod caOapiopod airav,
avutTov
of the purification prescribed by the law of Moses to
women in child-bed) ; Jn. viii. 44 (Wevorns éoriv Kal 6
maTnp avtov, i. e. of the liar; cf. Baumg.-Crusius and
Meyer ad loc.). By this rather careless use of the pro-
noun it came about that at length avroi alone might be
used for dv@pwmou: Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14,17
[here T WH Tr mrg. airov]; cf. W. § 22, 3; B. § 127, 8.
7. Sometimes, in relative sentences consisting of several
members, the second member is not joined to the first by
the relative és, but by a loose connection proceeds with
kat avros; as, Lk. xvii. 31; Acts ili. 13 (dv tyets mapeSdxare
kal npynoacée adtov [LT WH om. Tr br. airév]) ; 1 Co.
vill. 6 (€€ 06 ta mdvra Kal npeis eis adtov, for Kal els dv
nets) ; 2 Pet. ii. 3. This is the usage likewise of Greek
as well as of Hebrew; cf. W. 149 (141); [B. 283 (248)];
Buhdy. p. 304.
III. 6 airos, 7) av’ry, 76 adro, with the article, the same;
1. without a noun: 6 adros, immutable, Heb. i. 12; xiii.
8, (Thue. 2, 61); 1d av’ré:— roveiv, Mt. v. 46 [R GT
WH txt., 47 L T Tr WH); Lk. vi. 33; Aéyew, to profess
the same opinion, 1 Co. i. 10; dvedigew, not in the same
manner but reproached him with the same, cast on him
the same reproach, Mt. xxvii. 44, (dvetdi¢ew rovadra, Soph.
Oed. Col. 1002). ra avira: Acts xv. 27; Ro. ii. 1; Eph.
vi. 9. emt rd aire [Rec* passim émroavto] (Hesych.
6p00, emt Tov avtov Tomov), to the same place, in the same
place: Mt. xxii. 34; Actsi. 15; ii.1; 1 Co. xi. 20; xiv. 23,
(Ps. ii. 2; 2S. ii. 13; 3 Macc. iii.1; Sus. 14); together:
ik. xvii. 35; Acts ii. 19[lL ir WH join it to ch.
ii.; 1 Co. vii. 5]; kara rd adrd, (Vulg. simul), together :
Acts xiv. 1 (for 1m, Ex. xxvi. 24; 1 K. iii.18; exx. fr.
Grk. writ. are given by Kypke, Observy. ii. p. 69 sqq.).
Like adj. of equality 6 airés is foll. by the dat.: éy kai
76 abro TH eEvpnuevn, 1 Co. xi. 5, (Sap. xviii. 11; 4 Mace.
viii. 5; x. 2, 13, and often in Grk. writ., cf. W. 150 (141)).
2. With a noun added: Mt. xxvi. 44; Mk. xiv. 39 (rov
airdv Aéyov) ; Lk. vi. 88[R GL mrg.] (76 aité perp) ;
Phil. i. 30; 1 Co. i. 10 (€v 7 adr vot); 1 Co. xii. 4 (7d
8¢ atrd mvedpa), etc. 7a aird (with the force of a subst. :
the same kind) rév maOnpdrwy, 1 Pet. v.9. [Cf. radrd.]
avrod, prop. neuter:genitive of the pron. adréds, in that
place, there, here: Mt. xxvi. 36; [Lk. ix. 27 (RB L &ée) ];
Acts xv. 34 (a spurious vs. [see WH. App. ad loc. ]) ; xviii.
19 (LTr mrg. ékei); xxi. 4 (Lehm. adrois).*
avrod, -js, -00, of himself, herself, itself, 1. q. €avtod, q. V-
It is very common in the edd. of the N. T. by the Elzevirs,
Griesbach, Knapp, al.; but Bengel, Matthaei, Lchm.,
Tadf., Trg. have everywhere substituted avrov, arg, etc.
for abrod, air, ete. “For I have observed that the
former are used almost constantly [not always then?
Grimm] not only in uncial codd. of the vili. ix. and x.
cent., but also in many others (and not N. T. codd. alone).
That this is the correct mode of writing is proved also
by numerous examples where the pron. is joined to prep-
ositions; for these last are often found written not ed,
ad, ne, kad, av, etc., but em, am, per, Kar; avr.” Taf.
Proleg. ad N. T., ed. 2 p. xxvi. [ed. 8 p. 126]; cf. his
Proleg. ad Sept., ed. 1 p. Ixx. [ed. 4 p. xxxiii. (not in
87
abaipew
c
ed. 6)]. Bleek entertains the same opinion and sets it
forth at length in his note on Heb. i. 3, vol. ii. 1 p-
67 sqq. The question jg hard to decide, not only be-
cause the breathings and accents are wanting in the
oldest codd., but also because it often depends upon the
mere preference of the writer or speaker whether he
will speak in his own person, or acc. to the thought of
the person spoken of. Certainly in the large majority
of the passages in the N. T. avrod is correctly restored;
but apparently we ought to write 8v abrod (Rec. éavrod
[so L mrg. T WH)), Ro. xiv. 14 [Ltxt. Tr 8? abr]; els
airdy, Col. i. 20 [al. ets adr.]; adros wept abrod [T Tr txt.
WH éavrod], Jn.ix. 21. Cf. W.151 (143); [B.111(97) sq.;
Bp. Lghtft. on Col.1. ¢., and see esp. Hortin Westcott and
Hort’s Grk. Test., App. p. 144 sq.; these editors have in-
troduced the aspirated form into their text “nearly twen-
ty times” (e. g. Mt. vi. 84; Lk. xii. 17, 213 xxiii. 12; xxiv.
12; Jn. ii. 24; xiii. 32; xix.17; xx. 103 Acts xiv.17; Ro.
1,275 2 Co. ii.5; Eph. ii. 15; Phil.tii, 21; 13n. v. 10;
Rev. viii. 6, etc.). Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 482].
attépupos, -ov, (adrds and dap a thief, dwpd a theft),
(fr. Soph. down]; prop. caught in the act of theft; then
univ. caught in the act of perpetrating any other crime;
very often in the phrases ém airodope (as one word
eravTopopm) Twa hapBadvewv, Pass. NapBdver Oat, Karadap-
BaverOa, ddicxeo Oa, (fr. Hdt. 6, 72 on), the crime being
specified by a participle: potyevopérn, Jn. viii. 4 [RG],
as in Ael. nat. an. 11,15; Plut. mor. vi. p. 446 ed. Tauchn.
[x. p. 723 ed. Reiske, cf. Nicias 4, 5; Eumen. 2, 2]; Sext.
Empir. adv. Rhet. 65 [p. 151 ed. Fabric. ].*
aité-xeup, -pos, 6, (avtds and yelp, cf. paxpdyerp, ddiKd-
xeup), doing a thing with one’s own hand: Acts xxvii. 19.
(Often in the tragedians and Attic orators.) *
avxéw ; (in pres. and impf. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down,
but rare in prose); prop. to lift up the neck, hence to
boast: peydda adyei, Jas. iil. 5 L T Tr WH for R G pe-
yahauxet q. v.*
avxpnpés, -d, -dv, (advypew to be squalid), squalid, dirty,
(Xen., Plat., sqq.), and since dirty things are destitute of
brightness, dark: 2 Pet. i. 19, Aristot. de color. 3 76
Aapmpov #) oTiABov . . . 7) Tovvavriov avxpnpoy Kal adapts.
(Hesych., Suidas, Pollux.) *
dp-aipéw, -@; fut. dpaipnow (Rev. xxii. 19 Ree. [fr.
Erasmus, apparently on no Ms. authority; see Tdi.’s
note]), and dped@ (ibid. G L T Tr WH; on this rarer fut.
ef. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 100) ; 2 aor. dpetdov; 1 fut. pass.
apaipeOnoopat; Mid., pres. dparpotpar; 2 aor. aperduny ;
[see aipéw]; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; ¢o take from,
take away, remove, carry off : ti, Lk. i. 25; to cut off, rd
driov, Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. xiv.47[L T Tr WH 70 drapiov];
Lk. xxii. 50 [76 ods], (r7v kepadny twos, 1 Mace. vii. 47;
for N73, 1S. xvii. 51); to take away, ri amd with gen.
of a thing, Rev. xxii. 19; ri dwé with gen. of pers. Lk.
x. 42 [(T WH om. L Tr br. awd], (Gen. xxxi. 31; Job
xxxvi. 7; Prov. iv. 16 [Alex.], etc.) ; mid. (prop. to
take away or bear off for one’s self), Lk. xvi. 3, (Lev.
iv. 10; Mic. ii. 8; in Grk. writ. with a simple gen. for
do twos); apaipety tas dpaptias to take away sins, of
apavns
victims expiating them, Heb. x. 4, (Jer. xi. 15 ; Sir. xlvii.
11); mid. of God putting out of his sight, remembering
no more, the sins committed by men, i.e. granting par-
don for sins (see duapria, 2 a.): Ro. xi. 27."
&dhavijs, -és, (paivw), not manifest, hidden: Heb. iv. 13.
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hat. down.) (Cf.
d7dos, and Schmidt ch. 130.]*
ddavitw; [Pass., pres. dpavigopa]; 1 aor. npaviaOny ;
(dpavns); a. to snatch out of sight, to put out of view, to
make unseen, (Xen. an. 3, 4, 8 fAtov vebéAn mapaxaduaca
Aipdnce sc. riv wow, Plat. Phil. 66 a. dpavifovres xpi-
mropev). b. to cause to vanish away, to destroy, consume :
Mt. vi. 19 sq. (often so in Grk. writ. and Sept. [cf. B.
§ 130, 5]); Pass. to perish: Acts xiii. 41 (Luth. vor
Schrecken vergehen) ; to vanish away, Jas. iv. 14, (Hat. 7,
6; 167; Plat. et sqq.). c. to deprive of lustre, render
unsightly; to disfigure : rd mpdacwroy, Mt. vi. 16.*
ahaviopds, -0d, 6, (apavitw, q. v.), disappearance; de-
struction: Heb. viii. 13. (Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Leian., al.; often in Sept., particularly for naw and
manu.) *
&-havros, -ov, (fr. gaivopar), taken out of sight, made
invisible: dpavros éeyévero an’ avtav, he departed from
them suddenly and in a way unseen, he vanished, Lk.
xxiv. 31. (In poets fr. Hom. down; later in prose writ.
also; Diod. 4, 65 eumecay eis 76 xdopa .. . dpavros éyévero,
Plut. orac. def. c. 1. Sometimes angels, withdrawing
suddenly from human view, are said d@aveis yiverOa:
2 Mace. iii. 34; Acta Thom. § § 27 and 43.) *
&heSpav, -Gvos, 6, apparently a word of Macedonian
origin, which Suidas calls ‘barbarous’; the place into
which the alvine discharges are voided; a privy, sink;
found only in Mt. xv. 17; Mk. vii. 19. It appears to
be derived not from af’ éSpév a podicibus, but from
dedpos, the same Macedon. word which in Lev. xii. 5;
xv. 19 sqq. answers to the Hebr. 11) sordes menstruorum.
Cf. Fischer’s full discussion of the word in his De vitiis
lexx. N. T. p. 698 sqq.*
aherbla (apeideca Lohm., see s. v. €t,1),-as, 7, (the dispo-
sition of a man who is dfedys, unsparing), unsparing
severity: with gen. of the object, rod caparos, Col. ii. 23
(rév capdrov apedeiv, Lys. 2, 25 (193, 5); Diod. 13, 60;
79 etc. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]; in Plat. defin. p.
412 d. apedia means liberality).*
&d-<idov, i. q. dreidov, q. v. Cf. B. 7; Mullacn p. 22;
W. 45 (44); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 91 sq., Sept. ed. 4 Proleg.
p- xxxiii.; Scrivener’s ed. of cod. Cantab. Intr. p. xlvii.
(11); esp. WH. App. p. 143 sq., Meisterhans § 20, and
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 23; Curtius p. 687 sq.].
GdedASrys, -nTos, 7, (fr. adedns without rock, smooth,
plain, and this fr. peddeds rocky land), simplicity, [A.V.
singleness |: kapdias, Acts ii. 46, (found only here [and in
eccl. writ.]. The Greeks used dpéAeta).*
ad-edmritw, i. q. dredriva, q. v.3 cf. aeidov.
db-eots, -ews, 7, (apinur); ‘1. release, as from bond-
age, imprisonment, etc.: Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. lxi. 1 Sq: 3
Polyb. 1, 79, 12, etc.). 2. dears duapridy forgiveness,
pardon, of sins (prop. the letting them go, as if they had
88
aint
not been committed [see at length Trench § xxxiii.])»
remission of their penalty: Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. i. 4; Lk.
i. 77; iii. 3; xxiv. 47; Acts ii. 38; v. 31; x.43; xiii. 38;
xxvi. 18; Col. i. 14; rév maparroparev, Eph. i. 7; and
simply apeots: Mk. iii. 29; Heb. ix. 22; x. 18, (povov,
Plat. legg. 9 p. 869 d.; éyxAnudrwr, Diod. 20, 44 [so
Dion. Hal. 1. 8 § 50, see also 7, 33; 7, 46; esp. 7, 64;
dpaptnudrev, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. 17; al.]).*
dh, -ns, 7, (ante to fasten together, to fit), (Vulg.
junctura [and nexus]), bond, connection, [A. V. joint (see
esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below)]: Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii.
19. (Plut. Anton. c. 27.) *
abOapela, -as, 7, (4pOapros, cf. axabapoia), (Tertull.
and subseq. writ. incorruptibilitas, Vulg. incorruptio [and
incorruptela]), incorruption, perpetuity : rod x6cpov, Philo
de incorr. mund. § 11; it is ascribed to 76 Oeioy in Plut.
Arist. c. 6; of the body of man exempt from decay after
the resurrection, 1 Co. xv. 42 (év aé. sc. dv), 50, 53 sq.;
of a blessed immortality (Sap. ii. 23; vi. 19; 4 Macc.
xvii. 12), Ro. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 10. twa dyamay év adpOap-
cia to love one with never diminishing love, Eph. vi.
24 [cf. Mey. ad loc. The word seems to have the mean-
ing purity, sincerity, incorruptness in Tit. ii. 7 Rec.**].*
d-pOapros, -ov, (POeipw), uncorrupted, not liable to cor-
ruption or decay, imperishable: of things, 1 Co. ix. 25;
1 Pet. i. 4, 23; iii. 4; [aO. xnpuypa tHs aiwviov cwrnpias,
Mk. xvi. WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’). im-
mortal: of the risen dead, 1 Co. xv. 52; of God, Ro. i.
2321 Time 1 179) 3(Sap-e xii) 15) xviii. 64-9 [Aristotaly
Plut., Leian., al. [Cf. Trench § lxviii.])*
&-p8opla, -as, 7, (4pGopos uncorrupted, fr. Pbeipw), un-
corruptness: Tit. ii. 7 LT Tr WH; see ddvapOopia.*
ap-inpt; pres. 2 pers. sing. ddeis (fr. the form apéo,
Rev. ii. 20 for Rec. éas), [3 pers. plur. dgvotow Rev. xi.
9 Tdf. edd. 2, 7,fr. a form ddgvéw ; cf. B. 48 (42)]; impf. 3
pers. sing. #¢ve, with the augm. before the prep., Mk. i.
34; xi. 16, fr. the form d¢iw ; whence also pres. 1 pers.
plur. dpiowev Lk. xi. 4 L T Tr WH for ddiewer Rec. and
3 pers. apiovow Rev. xi.9 L T Tr WH; [see WH. App.
p- 167]; fut. apjow; 1 aor. apjxa, 2 pers. sing. -Kes Rev.
ii. 4 T Tr WH [cf. comidw]; 2 aor. impv. ages, dere, subj.
3 pers. sing. ap, 2 pers. plur. apyre, [inf. adetvae (Mt.
xxii. 23 L T Tr WH; Lk. v. 21 L txt. T Tr WH),
ptep. ageis, apévres; Pass., pres. dpiewa, [yet 3 pers.
plur. ddiovra: Jn. xx. 23 WH mrg. ete.; ef. dpi above];
pf. 3 pers. plur. dpéwvrat (a Doric form [cf. W. § 14, 3 a.;
B 49 (42); Kiihner § 285, 4], Mt. ix. 2,5; Mk. ii. 5, [9]
— in both these Gospels L [exc. in Mk. mrg.] T Tr WH
have restored the pres. 3 pers. plur. ddievrar; Lk. v. 20,
23; vil. 47, [48]; Jn. xx. 23 L txt. T Tr txt. WH txt.;
1 Jn. ii. 12) ; 1 aor. dpedny; fut. apeOjooua; cf. W. § 14,
3; B. 48 (42); [WH. App. p. 167; Veitch s. v. input] 5
(fr. dro and tinue); [fr. Hom. down]; to send from (azo)
one’s self; 1. to send away; a. to bid go away or
depart: rovs dxdovs, Mt. xiii. 36 [al. refer this to 3 be-
low]; tiv yuvaixa, of a husband putting away his wife,
1 Co. vii. 11-13, (Hdt. 5, 39; and subst. apeois, Plut.
Pomp. c. 42, 6). b. to send forth, yield up, emit: rd
doping
wvevpa, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 (rv Wuyqv, Gen. xxxv.
18; Hat. 4, 190 and often in other Grk. writ. [see mvedua,
2]), pomp to utter a cry (emittere vocem, Liv. 1, 58), Mk.
xv. 37 (Gen. xlv. 2 and often in Grk. writ.; [ef. Heinichen
on Kuseb. h. e. 8,14, 17]). c. to let go, let alone, let be;
a. to disregard: Mt. xv.14. 8B. to leave, not to discuss
now, a topic, used of teachers, writers, speakers, etc.:
Heb. vi. 1, (Eur. Andr. 392; Theophr. char. praef. § 3;
for other examples fr. Grk. writ. see Bleek on Heb. vol.
ii. 2 p. 144 sq.), [al. take the word in Heb. 1. c. as expres-
sive of the duty of the readers, rather than the purpose of
the writer; and consequently refer the passage to 3 be-
low]. y. to omit, neglect: Mt. xxiii. 23, [Lk. xi. 42 R G];
MK. vii. 8; Ro.i. 27. . to let go, give up, a debt, by not
demanding it (opp. to kpareiv, Jn. xx. 23), i. e. to remit,
Sorgive: rd Savevov, Mt. xviii. 27; rav dpecdny, Mt. xviii.
32; ra dpecAnyara, Mt. vi. 12; ra waparrapara, vi. 14 sq. ;
Mk. xi. 25 sq. [T Tr WH om. verse 26]; ras duaprias, ra
épaprnuara, Tas avopias, Mt. ix. 2, 5 sq.; xii. 31; Mk. ii. 5,
7; ii. 28; Lk. v. 20 sq. 23; Ro. iv. 7 (fr. Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.)
1); 1 Jn.i. 9; Jas. v.15, (Is. xxii. 14; xxxiii. 24, etc.) ;
t. €mivovay THs Kapdias, Acts viii. 22, (ryv airiay, Hat. 6,
30; ra xypea, Ael. v. h. 14, 24); absolutely, dquevae revi to
forgive one: Mt. xii. 32; xviii. 21, 35; Mk. iv. 12; Lk.
xi. 4; xii. 10; xvii. 3 sq.; xxiil. 34 [L br. WH reject the
pass.]. e. to give up, keep no longer : tiv mpatny aydamny,
Rev. ii. 4. 2. to permit, allow, not to hinder; a. foll. by
a pres. inf. [B. 258 (222)]: Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16 dgere
€pxer Oat kal pr) K@dvere adrd, Mt. xiii. 30; Mk. i. 34; Jn.
xi. 44; xviii. 8. by the aor. inf.: Mt. viii. 22; xxiii. 13
(14); Mk. v. 37; vii. 12, 27; Lk. viii. 51; ix. 60; xii. 39 ;
Rev. xi. 9. b. without an inf.: Mt. ili. 15 (apes apr per-
mit it just now). with acc. of the pers. or thing permitted:
Mt. iii. 15 rére dbinow adrov, Mk. v. 19; xi. 6; xiv. 6; Lk.
xi. 8; Jn. xi. 7 RG; xi. 48; Acts'v. 38 (LT Tr WH;
RG édoare); Rev. ii. 20 (Ree. eas). c. apinus rwi t1, to
give up a thing to one: Mt. v. 40 (des avr@ kai rd ipdriov).
d. foll. by va: Mk. xi. 16; Jn. xii. 7 LD T Tr WH, a later
construction, cf. W. § 44, 8; B. 238 (205). e. foll. by
the simple hortative subjunc.: Mt. vii.4; Lk. vi. 42
(aes exBadro) ; Mt. xxvii. 49; Mk. xv. 36, (adere idwpev) ;
Epict. diss. 1, 9, 15 dpes deiEwpev, 3, 12, 15 apes ido.
Cf. B. 209 (181) sq.; W. 285 (268). 3. to leave, go
away from one; to depart from any one, a. in order to
go to another place: Mt. xxii. 22; xxvi. 44; Mk. viii. 13
(Mt. xvi. 4 karadur@y) ; rile NO) S b-onhly OY ioe Abily sayy Gie o-oyal
28. b. to depart from one whom one wishes to quit:
Mt. iv. 11; so of diseases departing, apjxev riva 6 muperos,
Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31; Lk. iv. 39; Jn.iv.52. c. to de-
part from one and leave him to himself, so that all mutual
claims are abandoned : rév marépa, Mt. iv. 22; Mk. i. 20;
Mt. xviii. 12 (Lk. xv. 4 xaradeiwer). Thus also aduévat
ta éavrod to leave possessions, home, etc.: Mt. iv. 20;
xix. 27, 29; Mk. i. 18; x. 28sq.; Lk. v.11; xviii. 28 sq.
d. to desert one (wrongfully): Mt. xxvi. 56; Mk. xiv.
50; Jn.x.12. e. to goaway leaving something behind:
Mt. v. 24; Jn. iv. 28. f. to leave one by not taking him
as a companion : opp. to mapakapBadvew, Mt. xxiv. 40 sq.; '
89
,
apopmovow
Lk. xvii. 34 sq. g. to leave on dying, leave behind one:
Texva, yuvaixa, Mt. xxii. 25; Mk. xii. 20, 22, (Lk. xx. 81
katadeimm). h. to leave so that what is left may re-
main, leave remaining: od pi apeOy Se AiOos emi riOov
[or Aié@], Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk. xiii. 2; Lk. xxi.6. i. aduevat
foll. by the acc. of a noun or pron. with an acc. of the
predicate [B. § 144, 18]: Lk. x. 30 (jpc0avq); In. xiv.
18 (rivd dppavov) ; Mt. xxiii. 38; Lk. xiii. 35, (but Lehm.
om. épnuos in both pass., WH txt. om. in Mt., G T Tr
WH om. in Luke; that being omitted, d¢vévac means to
abandon, to leave destitute of God’s help); Acts xiv.17
(dudprupoy éavrdv [LT Tr airév (WH air. q. v.)]).
A-tkveopar, -odpar: 2 aor. ddixopuny ; (ixveouat to come) ;
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to come from
(ané) a place (but often the prep. has almost lost its
force) ; to come to, arrive at; in the N. T. once, tropically :
Ro. xvi. 19 (pay imaxon eis rdvras adixero your obedi-
ence has reached the ears of [A. V.is come abroad unto}
all men; Sir. xlvii. 16 eis porous dpixero rd dvopd cov.
Joseph. antt. 19, 1, 16 eis 7d O€arpov. . . dixero 6 Aéyos).*
d-pid-dyabos, -ov, (a priv. and giAdyabos), opposed to
goodness and good men, [R. V. no lover of good]; found
only in 2 Tim. iii. 3.*
d-pih-dipyupos, -ov, (a priv. and giddpyvpos), not loving
money, not avaricious; only in the N. T., twice viz. 1
Tim. iii. 3; Heb. xiii. 5. [Cf. Trench § xxiv.]*
dd-teis, -ews, 7, (addexvéeowat), in Grk. writ. generally
arrival; more rarely departure, as Hdt. 9, 17; Dem.
1463, 7; [1484, 8]; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,47; 3 Mace. vii.
18; and so in Acts xx. 29.*
dp-iornpr: 1 aor. dméotnoa; 2 aor. dnéornv; Mid.,
pres. apicrapa:, impv. dpioraco (1 Tim. vi. 5 Rece.; cf.
W. § 14,1 e.); [impf. dgioraunv]; fut. dmoorncopar;
1. transitively, in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. active, to
make stand off, cause to withdraw, to remove; trop. to
excite to revolt: Acts v. 37 (dméotyce \abv.. . drigw avrod
drew away after him; twa do twos, Deut. vii. 4, and in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 76 down). 2. intransitively,
in pf., plpf., 2 aor. active, to stand off, stand aloof, in
various senses [as in Grk. writ.] acc. to the context: amo
with gen. of pers. to go away, depart, from any one, Lk.
xiii. 27 (fr. Ps. vi. 9; cf. Mt. vii. 23 droywpetre dm €o0d) 5
Acts xii. 10; xix. 9; to desert, withdraw from, one, Acts
xv. 88; to cease to vex one, Lk. iv. 13; Acts v. 38; xxii.
29; 2 Co. xii. 8; to fall away, become faithless, dé Beod,
Heb. iii. 12; to shun, flee from, amd ths adikias, 2 Tim.
ii. 19. Mid. to withdraw one’s self from: absol. to fall
away, Lk. viii. 13; [ris miorews, 1 Tim. iv. 1, cf. W. 427,
428 (398)]; to keep one’s self away from, absent one’s
self from, Lk. ii. 37 (otc apioraro ard [T Tr WH om.
dé] Tod fepod, she was in the temple every day) ; from
any one’s society or fellowship, 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec.*
ddbvw, adv., (akin to aipuns, see in aidvidios above), sud-
denly: Acts ii. 2; xvi. 26; xxviti.6. (Sept.; [Aeschyl.],
Thue. and subseq. writ.) *
addPws, adv., (poBos), without fear, boldiy: Lk. i. 74;
Phil. i. 14; 1 Co. xvi. 10; Jude 12. [From Xen. down. ]*
a-opordw, -@: [pf. pass. ptep. dpopowpeévos (on augm.
apopaw
see WH. App. p. 161)]; to cause a model to pass off
(dm6) into an image or shape like it, —to express itself in
it, (cf. dmetxaceww, dmeckoviCerv, anomhaacety, drropupeto Oar);
to copy ; to produce a fac-simile : ra kaha eidn, of painters,
Xen. mem. 3, 10, 2; often in Plato. Pass. to be made
like, rendered similar: so Heb. vii. 3. (Ep. Jer. 4 (5),
62 (63), 70 (71); and in Plato.) *
dd-opdw, -@; to turn the eyes away from other things
and fiz them on something; cf. dmoBhénw. trop. to turn
one’s mind to: eis twa, Heb. xii. 2 [W. § 66, 2 d.], (ets
6edv, 4 Mace. xvii. 10; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. cf. Bleek
on Heb. vol. ii. 2 p. 862). Further, cf. dmeidov.*
&dh-opitw; impf. apapicov ; Attic fut. apopid Mt. xxv. 32
(T WH adopioe) ; xiii. 49, LW. Sls, tress 9B 1371(382)) ili;
1 aor. apapica; Pass., pf. ptep. dpwpicpévos ; 1 aor.
impv. adopicOnre ; (6pi{w to make a épos or boundary) ;
to mark off from (amo) others by boundaries, to limit, to
separate: éavrov, from others, Gal. ii. 12; rods waOnrds,
from those unwilling to obey the gospel, Acts xix. 9; ék
peécov tivaev, Mt. xiii. 49; amo twos, xxv. 32. Pass. in a
reflex. sense: 2 Co. vi. 17. absol.: in a bad sense,
to exclude as disreputable, Lk. vi. 22; in a good sense, tua
eis Tt, 10 appoint, set apart, one for some purpose (to do
something), Acts xiii. 2; Ro. i. 1; twa foll. by a telic
inf., Gal. i. 15 [(?) seethe Comm. ad loc.]. ([Soph. ], Eur.,
Plat., Isocr., Dem., Polyb., al.; very often in Sept. esp. for
S727, 4377, OI, 730, etc.) *
&dh-opph, -7s, 7), (amo and éppn q. V-) ; 1. prop. a
place from which a movement or attack is made, a base
of operations: Thue. 1, 90 (rjv TeAomovynoov maow ava-
xXopnoty te kal apoppny txavyy eivac); Polyb. 1,41, 6. 2.
metaph. that by which endeavor is excited and from which
ut goes forth ; that which gives occasion and supplies matter
for an undertaking, the incentive ; the resources we avail
ourselves of in attempting or performing anything: Xen.
mem. 3, 12, 4 (rots €ayvr@v maol KadXlovs apoppas eis Tov
Biov xaraXeinovor), and often in Grk. writ. ; AauBdvew, to
take occasion, find an incentive, Ro. vii. 8, 11; d:Sdvar, 2
Co. v.12; 1 Tim. v. 14, (3 Mace. iii. 2; both phrases often
also in Grk. writ.); 2 Co. xi. 12; Gal. v.13. On the mean-
ings of this word see Viger. ed. Herm. p. 81 sq.; Phryn.
ed. Lob. p. 223 sq.; [utherford, New Phryn. p. 304].*
appitw; (adpds) ; to foam: Mk. ix.18, 20. (Soph. El.
719; Diod. 3, 10; Athen. 11, 43 p. 472 a.; [al.].)
[Come. : en-appica. | =
adpéds, -od, 6, foam: Lk. ix. 39. (Hom. Il. 20, 168;
fals|;))* :
ahpocivn, -ns, 7, (dppwv), foolishness, folly, senseless-
ness: 2 Co. xi. 1,17, 21 ; thoughtlessness, recklessness, Mk.
vii. 22. [From Hom. down.]*
dppwv, -ovos, 6, 1), -ov, 76, (fr. a priv. and ¢pny, cf. -
pov, cappwv), [fr. Hom. down], prop. without reason
([eiSaAa, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 4]; of beasts, ibid. 1, 4, 14),
senseless, foolish, stupid ; without reflection or intelligence,
acting rashly: Lk. xi. 40; xii. 20; Ro. ii. 20; 1 Co. xv.
36 ; 2 Co. xi. 16, 19 (opp. to ppdvpos, asin Prov. xi. 29) ;
2 Co. xii. 6,11; Eph. v. 17 (opp. to cumévres) ; 1 Pet.
ii. 15. [A strong term; cf. Schmidt ch. 147 § 17.]*
90
axXr0s
db-vrvéw, -G: 1 aor. dpirvaca; (invde to put to sleep,
to sleep); a. to awaken from sleep (Anthol. Pal. 9, 517,
5). b. to fall asleep, to fall off to sleep: Lk. viii. 23;
for this the ancient Greeks used cka@umvow; see Lobeck
ad Phryn. p. 224. [Herm. vis. 1, 1.]*
d-vortepéw, -@: (a later Grk. word) ; 1. to be be-
hindhand, come too late (amo so as to be far from, or to
fail, a person or thing); used of persons not present at
the right time: Polyb. 22, 5, 2; Posidon. ap. Athen. 4,
37 (i.e.4 p.151e.); [al.]; dad dyabis nyépas to fail (to
make use of) a good day, to let the opportunity pass by,
Sir. xiv. 14. 2. transitively, to cause to fail, to with-
draw, take away from, defraud: To pavva cov ovK apuarte-
pnoas dé otopatos avtav, Neh. ix. 20 (for 3D to with-
hold); pf. pass. ptep. dpuarepnpevos (pioOos), Jas. v. 4
T Tr WH after 8 B*, [Rec. dwearepnuevos, see amocte-
pew, also s. v. amo, II. 2 d. bb., p. 59°].*
adpwvos, -ov, (part), voiceless, dumb; without the faculty
of speech; used of idols, 1 Co. xii. 2 (cf. Ps. exv. 5 (exiil.
18); Hab. ii. 18); of beasts, 2 Pet. ii. 16. 1 Co. xiv. 10
rogaira yevn hovev kcal ovdev aitav [LT Tr WH om.
avr.] dpevor, i. e. there is no language destitute of the
power of language, [R. V. txt. no kind (of voice) 7s with-
out signification], (cf. the phrases Bios aBiwros a life un-
worthy of the name of life, ydpis dyapes). used of one
that is patiently silent or dumb: duvos, Acts viii. 32 fr.
Is. lili. 7. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theog.], Pind., Aeschyl.
down.)*
“Axat [WH “Ayas], 6, (so Sept. for 1M& possessing, pos-
sessor; in Joseph. ’Ayd(ns, -ov, 6), Ahaz, king of Judah,
[fr.c. B.C. 741 to c. B. c. 725; cf. B. D.s. v. Israel, king-
dom of], (2 K. xvi. 1 sqq.; 2 Chr. xxviii. 16 sqq.; Is. vii. 1
sqq.)> Mit. 4.°9:*
*Axata [WH ’Ayaia (see I, c)], -as, 7, Achaia; ak
in a restricted sense, the maritime region of northern
Peloponnesus. 2. in a broader sense, fr. B. c. 146
on [yet see Dict. of Geog. s. v.], a Roman province em-
bracing all Greece except Thessaly. So in the N. T.:
Acts xviii. 12, 27; xix. 21; Ro. xv. 26; xvi. 5 Rec.; 1
Co. xvi. 15; 2 Co... Vsix: 24 xi 105)1 Tha. 7 equ Ls:
Srpvelia
*Axaikés, -od, 6, Achaicus, the name of a Christian of
Corinth: 1 Co. xvi. 17.*
axdporos, -ov, (xapifouar), ungracious; a. unpleasing
(Hom. Od. 8, 236; 20, 392; Xen. oec. 7, 37; al.). b.
unthankful (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 90 down): Lk.
vi. 35; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Sir. xxix. 17; Sap. xvi. 29.)*
["Axas, Mt. i. 9 WH; see”Ayag.]
*Axelp, 6, Achim, prop. name of one of the ancestors
of Christ, not mentioned in the O. T.: Mt. i. 14.*
dX etpo-rolnTos, -ov, (xetporroinros, q. V.), not made with
hands : Mk. xiv. 58; 2 Co. v. 1; Col. ii. 11 [where ef. Bp.
Lehtft.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor in the Sept.
[W. § 34, 3].)*
[AxeASapdyx : Acts i. 19 T Tr for R G ’AxedASapd q. v.]
axdts, -vos, 7, @ mist, dimness, (Lat. caligo), esp. over
the eyes, (a poetic word, often in Hom.; then in Hesiod,
Aeschyl. ; in prose writ. fr. [Aristot. meteor. 2, 8 p. 367%,
aypetos
17 etc. and] Polyb. 34, 11, 15 on; [of a cataract, Dios-
cor. Cf. Trench § ¢.]): Acts xiii. 11. (Joseph. antt. 9,
4, 3 ras Tév modepiov ders duavpdca roy Gedy mapeKdreL
ayhvyv avrais éemBaddvra. Metaph. of the mind, Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6 dydvos -yéepeuw.) *
Ox petos, -ov, (xpetos useful), useless, good for nothing:
Mt. xxv. 30 (Soddos, cf. Plat. Ale. i. 17 p. 122 b. rap
oixera@v Tov axpevoraroy) ; by an hyperbole of pious mod-
esty in Lk. xvii. 10 ‘the servant’ calls himself dypeiov,
because, although he has done all, yet he has done noth-
ing except what he ought to have done; accordingly
he possesses no merit, and could only claim to be called
‘profitable,’ should he do more than what he is bound to
do; cf. Bengel ad loc. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54 dypeiov kai dvadenés. Sept.
2S. vi. 22 equiv. to Saw low, base.) [Syn. cf. Tittmann
iil. p. 11 sq.; Ellic. on Philem. 11.]*
axpeidw, -G: 1 aor. pass. nxperHOny; (dypeios, q. V.); to
make useless, render unserviceable: of character, Ro. iii.
12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3), where L mrg. T Tr WH read
nxpe@Onoay fr. the rarer dxpeos i. q. dypeios. (Several
times prop. in Polyb.) *
a-xpyoros, -ov, (ypnoros, and this fr. ypaopac), useless,
unprofitable: Philem. 11 (here opp. to etypnoros). (In
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. e. Batrach. 70; Theogn.] down.)
(Syn. cf. Tittmann ii. 11 sq.; Trench $c. 17; Ellic. on
Philem. 11.]*
d&xpt and dxpts (the latter of which in the N. T. is
nowhere placed before a consonant, but the former be-
fore both vowels and consonants, although euphony is
so far regarded that we almost constantly find dypx fs
npépas, axpis ov, cf. B. 10 (9); [W. 42]; and aypr of is
not used except in Acts vii. 18 and Rev. ii. 25 by L T
Tr WH and Lk. xxi. 24 by T Tr WH; [to these in-
stances must now be added 1 Co. xi. 26 T WH; xv. 25
T WH; Ro. xi. 25 WH (see their App. p. 148); on the
usage in secular authors (‘where -p: is the only Attic
form, but in later auth. the Epic -pis prevailed’, L. and
S. s. v.) ef. Lobeck, Pathol. Elementa, vol. ii. p. 210 sq.;
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 64; further, Klotz ad Devar.
vol. ii. 1 p. 230 sq. ]); a particle indicating the terminus
ad quem. (Onits use in the Grk. writ. cf. Klotz u.s. p.
224 sqq.) It has the force now of a prep. now of a
conj., even to; until, to the time that; (on its derivation
see below). 1. asa Preposition it takes the gen.
[cf. W. § 54, 6], and is used a. of Place: Acts xi. 5;
Milos xx. 40 Demre. Wi om, Tr txt- brs]; xxviii.
15; 2 Co. x. 13 sq.; Heb. iv. 12 (see peptopos, 2); Rev.
xiv. 20; xviii. 5. b. of Time: dypz xatpod, until a sea-
son that seemed to him opportune, Lk. iv. 13 [but cf.
kaipos, 2 a.]; until a certain time, for a season, Acts
xiii. 11; [ype (vel peype, q. v. 1 a.) rod Oepurpod, Mt. xiii.
30 WH mrg. cf. éws, II. 5]; dype hs qyépas until the day
that etc. Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2;
[dype (Rec. et al. gos) ris muépas hs, Acts i. 22 Tdf.];
dype ravrns ths jpepas and aype ths Hpépas ravrns, Acts
91
aapuyos
ii. 29; xxiii. 1; xxvi. 22; dype [-pes R G] qpepav mwévre
even to the space of five days, i. e. after [A. V. in] five
days, Acts xx. 6; dypus [-pe T Tr WH] avyns, Acts xx. 113
Gyoe tod viv, Ro. viii. 22; Phil. i. 5; aye rédous, Heb.
vi. 11; Rev. ii. 26; see besides, Acts iii. 21; [xxii. 22];
Ro.i.13; v.13; 1 Co.iv. 11; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. iv. 2;
Phil. i. 6 [-pp LT WH]. co. of Manner and Degree:
dxpt Oavarov, Acts xxii. 4 (even to delivering unto
death) ; Rev. ii. 10 (to the enduring of death itself) ; Rev.
xii. 11; and, in the opinion of many interpreters, Heb.
iv. 12 [see pepiopos, 2]. . joined to the rel. of (aypis
ob for ype rovrov, @) it has the force of a conjunc-
tion, until, to the time that: foll. by the indic. pret., of
things that actually occurred and up to the beginning of
which something continued, Acts vii. 18 (dypis od
dveotn Baowdevs) ; xxvii. 33. foll. by a subj. aor. having
the force of a fut. pf., Lk. xxi. 24 L T Tr WH; Ro. xi.
25; 1 Co. xi. 26 [Rec. dypis of dv]; Gal. iii. 19 [not
WH txt. (see 2 below)); iv. 19 [T Tr WH péxpis];
Rev. vii. 3 Rec. G; dypis od dy until, whenever it may
be [[cf. W. § 42, 5 b.], 1 Co. xv. 25 [Rec.]; Rev-ii. 25.
with indie. pres. as long as : Heb. iii. 13 ; ef. Bleek ad loc.
and B. 231 (199). 2. axpts without of has the force
of a simple Conjunction, until, to the time that:
foll. by subj. aor., Lk. xxi. 24 RG; Rev. vii. 3 L T Tr
Wilicexyv-.8i) [Exvilel’ 7 Rec.iis xx. 35(id) Ja) Dir) WiEla);
with indic. fut., Rev. xvii. 17 [L T Tr WH]; [dypis ay
foll. by subj. aor., Gal. iii. 19 WH txt. (see 1 d. above) ].
Since dype is akin to dxj and axpds [but ef. Vaniéek p.
22; Curtius § 166], and péxpe to pijKos, waxpds, by the
use of the former particle the reach to which a thing is
said to extend is likened toa height, by the use of
pexpt, toalength; dypu, indicating ascent, signifies up
to; méxpt, indicating extent, is unto, as far as; cf. Klotz
u. Ss. p- 225 sq. But this primitive distinction is often
disregarded, and each particle used of the same thing ;
cf. dype rédous, Heb. vi. 11; péxpe rédovs, ibid. iii. 6, 14;
Xen. symp. 4, 37 mepieori por kal eoOiovre AX pe Tod py
mewnv adixeabat kal mivovte pe x pe TOd py Supqy. Cf. Fritz-
sche on Ro. v. 13, vol. i. p. 308 sqq.; [Ellic. on 2 Tim.
ii. 9. ”Aype occurs 20 times in the writings of Luke; else-
where in the four Gospels only in Mt. xxiv. 38. ].*
dxupoy, -ov, 7d, a stalk of grain from which the kernels
have been beaten out; straw broken up by a threshing
machine, chaff: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. (In Grk. writ.
fr. Hdt. 4, 72; Xen. oec. 18. 1, 2, 6 down; mostly in plur.
ra dyvpa; in Job xxi. 18 Sept. also of the chaff wont to
be driven away by the wind.) *
épevd4s, -és, (Weddos), without lie, truthful: Tit. i. 2.
(In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. theog. 233 down.) *
éavO0s, -ov, 7, wormwood, Absinthe: Rev. vii. 11; 6
éyyuvos ibid. is given as a prop. name to the star which
fell into the waters and made them bitter.*
diuxos, -ov, (Wun), without a soul, lifeless : 1 Co. xiv. 7.
(In Grk. writ. from [Archil., Simon. and] Aeschylus
down.) *
B
Badr
Baéd [so accented also by Pape (Eigenn. s. v.), Kue-
nen and Cobet (Ro. as below); but LT (yet the name
of the month, 1 K. vi. 5 (38), Baad) Tr WH etc. Baad ;
so Etym. Magn. 194, 19; Suid. 1746 a. ete. Dind. in
Steph. Thesaur. s. v. BdaA or Badd}, 6, 7, an indecl. noun
(Hebr. ya, Chald. 73 contr. fr. 9773), lord: Ro. xi. 4.
This was the name of the supreme heavenly divinity
worshipped by the Shemitic nations (the Phenicians,
Canaanites, Babylonians, Assyrians), often also by the
Israelites themselves, and represented by the Sun: r7
Badd, Ro. xi. 4. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v.
and J. G@. Miiller in Herzog i. p. 637 sqq.; Merz in Schen-
kel i. 322 sqq.; Schlottmann in Riehm p. 126 sq. Since
in this form the supreme power of nature generating
all things, and consequently a male deity, was wor-
shipped, with which the female deity Astarte was as-
sociated, it is hard to explain why the Sept. in some
places say 6 Baé® (Num. xxii. 41 ; Judg. ii. 13; 1 K. xvi.
31; xix. 18, etc.), in others 7 Badd (Hos. ii. 8; 1 S. vii.
4, etc. [yet see Dillmann, as below, p. 617]). Among
the various conjectures on this subject the easiest is
this: that the Sept. called the deity 7 Badd in derision,
as weak and impotent, just as the Arabs call idols
goddesses and the Rabbins nix; so Gesenius in
Rosenmiiller’s Repert. i. p. 139 and Tholuck on Ro. l.c.;
[yet cf. Dillmann, as below, p. 602; for other opinions
and reff. see Meyer ad loc.; cf. W. § 27,6 N.1. But
Prof. Dillmann shows (in the Monatsbericht d. Akad. zu
Berlin, 16 Juni 1881, p. 601 sqq.), that the Jews (just
as they abstained from pronouncing the word Jehovah)
avoided uttering the abhorred name of Baal (Ex. xxiii.
13). Asasubstitute in Aramaic they read Mypv, Son
or SINS, and in Greek aicxtvn (cf. 1 K. xviii. 19, 25).
This substitute in Grk. was suggested by the use of
the fem. article. Hence we find in the Sept. 4 B. every-
where in the prophetic bks. Jer., Zeph., Hos., ete., while
in the Pentateuch it does not prevail, nor even in J udges,
Sam., Kings, (exe. 1 S. vii. 4; 2 K. xxi. 3). It disap-
pears, too, (when the worship of Baal had died out) in
the later versions of Aq., Sym., ete. The apostle’s use in
Ro. |. ¢. accords with the sacred custom; ef. the substi-
tution of the Hebr. nuéa in Ish-bosheth, Mephi-bosheth,
etc. 2S. ii. 8, 10; iv. 4 with 1 Chr. viii. 338, 34, also 2S.
xi. 21 with Judg. vi. 32; etc.]*
Bavdav, -dvos, 4, (Hebr. 523 fr. 5a to confound, ace.
to Gen. xi. 9; ef. Aeschyl. Pers. 52 BaBvrayv & 7 rodv-
XpuTos mappexrov dxdov méwrer odpSnv. But more cor-
rectly, as it seems, fr. 53 383 the gate i. e. the court or
city of Belus [Assyr. Bab-Il the Gate of God; (perh. of
Il, the supreme God); cf. Schrader, Keilinschr. u. d. |
Babive
Alt. Test. 2te Aufl. p. 127 sq.; Oppert in the Zeitsch. d.
Deutsch. Morg. Gesellschaft, viii. p. 195]), Babylon,
formerly a very celebrated and large city, the residence
of the Babylonian kings, situated on both banks of the
Euphrates. Cyrus had formerly captured it, but Darius
Hystaspis threw down its gates and walls, and Xerxes
destroyed [?] the temple of Belus. At length the city
was reduced almost to a solitude, the population hav-
ing been drawn off by the neighboring Seleucia, built
on the Tigris by Seleucus Nicanor. [Cf. Prof. Rawlin-
son in B.D.s.v. and his Herodotus, vol. i. Essays vi.
and viii., vol. ii. Essay iv.] The name is used in the
ING “ARE 1. of the city itself: Acts vii. 43; 1 Pet.
yv. 13 (where some have understood Babylon, a small
town in Egypt, to be referred to; but in opposition cf.
Mayerhoff, Einl. in die petrin. Schriften, p. 126 sqq.;
[ef. 3 fin. below]). 2. of the territory, Babylonia:
Mt. i. 11 sq. 17; [often so in Grk. writ.]. 3. alle-
gorically, of Rome as the most corrupt seat of idolatry
and the enemy of Christianity: Rev. xiv. 8 [here Rec.*!
BaBovAwy]; xvi. 19; xvii. 5; xviii. 2, 10, 21, (in the
opinion of some 1 Pet. v. 13 also; [ef. 1 fin. above]).*
Babdws, adv., deeply: épOpov Babews sc. dvros (cf. Bnhdy.
p- 338), deep in the morning, at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1
LT Tr WH; so Meyer ad loc. But Baéws here is more
correctly taken as the Attic form of the gen. fr. Babds,
q: v.; cf. B. 26 (23); [Lobd. Phryn. p. 247].*
Badyds, -od, 6, (fr. obsol. Baw i. q. Baive, like oraOuds
[fr. torn-pe]), threshold, step; of a grade of dignity and
wholesome influence in the church, [R. V. standing], 1
Tim. iii. 13 [ef. Ellic. ad loc.]. (Used by [Sept.1 S. v.
5; 2K. xx. 9; also Sir. vi. 36]; Strabo, [Plut.], Leian.,
Appian, Artemid., [al.]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 324.) *
Bd00s, -eos (-ovs), 7d, (connected with the obsol. verb
Bat, Bdw [but cf. Curtius § 635; Vanitek p. 195]; cf.
Babus, Baccwv, and 6 BuvOds, 6 Buccds; Germ. Boden),
depth, height, —[ace. as measured down or up]; a
prop. : Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; Ro. viii. 39 (opp. to dopa) ;
Eph. iii. 18 (opp. to twos); of ‘the deep’ sea (the ‘high
seas’), Lk. v. 4. 2. metaph.: 7 Kard Babous mrwyeta
avraéy, deep, extreme, poverty, 2 Co. vill. 2; ra Bdén rod
Geod the deep things of God, things hidden and above
man’s scrutiny, esp. the divine counsels, 1 Co. ii. 10 (rod
Sarava, Rev. ii. 24 Rec.; xapdias dvOphmov, Judith viii.
14; [ra B. ths Oeias ywooews, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 40,1 (cf.
Lghtft. ad loc.)]); inexhaustible abundance, immense
amount, mAovrou, Ro. xi. 33 (so also Soph. Aj. 130; Badds
mdovtos, Ael. v. h. 3, 18; xaxdv, [Aeschyl. Pers. 465,
712]; Eur. Hel. 303; Sept. Prov. xviii. 3).*
Babive : [impf. <8d0vvov]; (Babs) ; to make deep : Lk.
Badus
vi. 48, where éoxaye nai €BdOuve is not used for Babéas
éoxae, but ¢8aévve expresses the continuation of the
work, [he dug and deepened i. e. went deep]; cf. W. § 54,
5. Cn Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Babus, -eia, -v, [cf Bados], deep; prop.: Jn. iv. 11.
metaph.: vmvos, a deep sleep, Acts xx. 9 (Sir. xxii. 7;
often also in Grk. writ.) ; dp6pos (see Babéws), Lk. xxiv.
1 ([Arstph. vesp. 216]; Plat. Crito 43 a.3 Polyaen. 4, 9,
15 rt BaOéos dpOpov, Plat. Prot. 310 a. [cf. also Philo
de mutat. nom. § 30; de vita Moys. i. § 32]); ra Badéa
tov arava, Rev. ii. 24 (G L T Tr WH; cf. Bd6os).*
Batoy [al. also Bdiov (or even Baioy, Chandler ed. 1 p.
272) ; on its deriv. (fr. the Egyptian) cf. Steph. Thesaur.
8. V. Bais], -ov, 76, a palm-branch ; with rév howikwy added
[so Test. xii. Patr. test. Naph. § 5] (after the fashion of
oixodeomdrns THs oikias, tmomddiov Tov Today, [cf. W. 603
(561) ]), Jn. xii. 13. (A bibl. and eccles. word: 1 Macc.
xiii. 51; Cant. vii. 8 Symm.; Lev. xxiii. 40 unknown trans.
In the Grk. church Palm-Sunday is called 4 xupax} rav
Baiwy. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. N. T. p. 18 sqq.;
[Sturz, Dial. Maced. ete. p. 88 sq.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)*
Badadp, 6, indecl., (in Sept. for py, ace. to Gesenius
[“ perhaps” fr. 53 and 0 YP non-populus, i. e. foreign ; ace.
to Jo. Simonis as to 0: y poa a swallowing up of the
people; in Joseph. 6 Badapos), Balaam (or Bileam), a
native of Pethor a city of Mesopotamia, endued by Je-
hovah with prophetic power. He was hired by Balak
(see BaAdx) to curse the Israelites ; and influenced by the
love of reward, he wished to gratify Balak; but he was
compelled by Jehovah’s power to bless them (Num. xxii.—
xxiv. ; Deut. xxiii. 5 sq.; Josh. xiii. 22; xxiv. 9; Mic. vi.
5). Hence the later Jews saw in him a most abandoned
deceiver: Rev. ii. 14; 2 Pet.ii.15; Jude ll. Cf. Win.
RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v.*
Badax, 6, indecl., (P? 52 empty [so Gesen. in his Thesaur.,
but in his later oats he adopts (with Fiirst et al.) an on
sense ‘one who makes empty,’ ‘a devastator,’ ‘ spoiler’ ;
see BD. Am. ed. s. v.]), Balak, king of the Moabites
(Num. xxii. 2 sq. and elsewhere) : Rev. ii. 14.*
Baddvriov and BaddAdvriov (so L T Tr WH; cf. [Tdf.
Proleg. p. 79]; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 620; W. p.43; Passow,
Lex. [also L. and S.] s. v.), -ov, 7d, a@ money-bag, purse:
Lk. x. 4; xii. 33; xxii. 35 sq. (Sept. Jobxiv.17 cf. [Simon.
181]; Arstph. ran. 772; Xen. symp. 4, 2; Plat. Gorg.
p- 508 e.; Hdian. 5, 4, 4 [3 ed. Bekk.], and other writ.) *
BorAXAw; fut. Barto; pf. BEBAnKa ; 2 aor. Baroy (3 pers.
plur. @Badov in Lk. xxiii. 34; Acts xvi. 23, €Badav, the
Alex. form, in Acts xvi. 37 L T Tr WH; [Rev. xviii. 19
Lehm., see WH. App. p. 165 and] for reff. dmrépyouat
init.) ; Pass., [pres. BdAdouar]; pf. BéBAnpar; plpf. eBe-
BAnpunv; 1 aor. eBAnOnv; 1 fut. BAnOnoopar; to throw, —
either with force, or without force yet with a purpose,
or even carelessly ; 1. with force and effort:
Bddrew twa panicuacr to smite one with slaps, to buffet,
Mk. xiv. 65 Rec. (an imitation of the phrases, rwa Bad-
New AiGous, BeAcor, Tééots, etc., Kakois, Woy, TKOppacL,
etc., in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow i. p. 487; [L. and S. s. v.
I. 1 and 3]; for the Rec. ¢8addov we must read with
93
Barr(w
Fritzsche and Schott ¢8adov, fr. which arose ¢daBov,
adopted by L T Tr WH; Badeiv and AaBeiy are often
confounded in codd.; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. v. 6; [Scriv-
ener, Introd. p. 10]); Bdddew AiBous emi ru or twa, In.
Vill. (7), 59; your emi ras keadds, Rev. xviii. 19 [WH
mrg. ereB.]; Komoprov eis tov dépa, Acts xxii. 23; rl els
Tv Oadacoav, Mk. ix. 42; Rev. viii. 8; xviii. 21; els 76
mop, Mt. iii. 10; xviii. 8; Lk. iii. 9; Mk. ix. 22; Jn. xv.
6; ets KAiBavov, Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28; eis yéevvav, Mt. v.
[29], 30[ RG]; Mk. ix. 47; eis r. yay, Rev. viii. 5, 7; xii.
4, 9, 18; eis r. Anvov, Rev. xiv. 19; eis 7. Ayygv, Rev. xix.
20; xx. 10, 14 sq. ; eis r. dBuccov, Rev. xx. 3; absol. and
in the pass. to be violently displaced from a position
gained, Rev. xii. 10 LT Tr WH. an attack of disease
is said BaAXew rid eis Krivny, Rev. ii. 22; Pass. to lie sick
abed, be prostrated by sickness: BéBAnpat emi Krivms, Mt.
ix. 2; Mk. vii. 30 [RG Lmrg.]; with émi kdivns omitted,
Mt. viii. 6, 14, cf. Lk. xvi. 20; rua eis udakyjy, to cast one
into prison, Mt. v. 25; xviii. 30; Lk. xii. 58; xxiii. 19
[R GL], 25; Jn. iii. 24; Acts xvi. 23 sq. 37; Rev. ii. 10;
[B8. éxi twa tH xeipa or Tas yxeipas to lay hand or hands
on one, apprehend him, Jn. vii. 44 L Tr WH, also 30 L
mrg.]; dpémavoy eis yiv to apply with force, thrust in, the
sickle, Rev. xiv. 19; pdayaupav Badd (to cast, send) ént
tT. ynv, Mt. x. 34, which phrase gave rise to another
found in the same passage, viz. eipnyny RadX. em tr. yqv
to cast (send) peace; ¢&, to cast out or forth: Mt: v.
13; xiii. 48; Lk. xiv. 85 (34); 1 Jn. iv. 18; Jn. xv. 6;
éavtov Kato to cast one’s self down: Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9;
éavTov eis Tr. Oddaccay, Jn. xxi. 7; pass. in a reflex. sense
[B. 52 (45)], BAnOnrr, Mt. xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23; ri ag’
éavrov to cast a thing from one’s self, throw it away: Mt.
v. 29 sq.; xviii. 8; Udwp ek Tod ardparos, Rev. xii. 15 sq.
(cast out of his mouth, Luther schoss aus threm Munde) ;
evamov with gen. of place, to cast before (eagerly lay
down), Rey. iv. 10; of a tree casting its fruit because
violently shaken by the wind, Rev. vi. 13. Intrans. to
rush (throw one’s self [cf. W. 251 (236) ; 381 (357) note};
B. 145 (127)]): Acts xxvii. 14; (Hom. II. 11, 722; 23,
462, and other writ.; [cf. L. and S. s. v. III. 1]). 2.
without force and effort; to throw or let go of a thing
without caring where it falls: kdjpoyv to cast a lot into the
urn [B. D. s. v. Lot], Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24; Lk.
xxiii. 34; Jn. xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19; (xvBous, Plat.
lege. 12 p. 968 e. and in other writ.). to scatter: xompia
[Rec.* xompiav], Lk. xiii. 8; seed emi ris yjs, Mk. iv. 26;
els knrrov, Lk. xiii. 19. to throw, cast, into: apyiptoy eis
rov kopBavav [L mrg. Tr mrg. xopBav], Mt. xxvii. 6;
xarxov, Sapa, etc., els Td yaCopvAdkcoy, Mk. xii. 41-44;
Lk. xxi. 1-4, cf. Jn. xii. 6. PddAew ri Tim, to throw, cast,
a thing to: rov dprov rots kvvapios, Mt. xv. 26; Mk. vii.
27; eumpoobev rwvos, Mt. vii. 6; évemedy tevos, Rev. ii. 14
(see oxavdador, b. B.); to give over to one’s care uncertain
about the result: dpyvpwov rots tparegirats, to deposit, Mt.
xxy. 27. of fluids, to pour, to pour in: foll. by ets, Mt.
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37; In. xiii. 5, (olvoy eis rov
nidov, Epictet. 4, 13, 12; of rivers, poop eis dda, Ap. Rhod.
2, 401, etc.; Sept. Judg. vi. 19 [Ald., Compl.]); to pour
Barrifw
out, émt twos, Mt. xxvi. 12. 3. to move, give motion
to, not with force yet with attention and for a pur-
Bos e; ets Tt, to put into, insert: Mk. vii. 33 (rovs daxrvAovs
eis Ta dra) ; Jn. xx. 25, 27; xviii. 11; yadivous eis 7d orepa,
Jas. iii. 3; to let down, cast down: Jn. v. 7; Mt. iv. 18
[cf. Mk. i. 16 Rec.]; Mt. xvii. 27. Metaph. : ets tiv kapdi-
ay rwés, to suggest, Jn. xiii. 2 (7h ev Oupo twos, Hom. Od.
1, 201; 14, 269; eds vodv, schol. ad Pind. Pyth. 4, 133;
al.; éuBaddewy eis voov Tit, Plut. vit. Timol. ce. 3). [Comp.:
Gudu-, dva-, avri-, amo-, dua-, €k-; ép-, Wap-eu-, eT, KaTa-,
pera-, mapa-, Tept-, Mpo-, TUp-, UTEp-, Umro-Badrw. |
Parritw; [impf. ¢Bdmrifov]; fut. Batic; 1 aor. éBa-
mica; Pass., [pres. Bamri¢opar]; impf. eBamreCopny 5 pt.
ptep. BeBanriopévos; 1 aor. €Barricbyy; 1 fut. Barrio On-
goat; 1 aor. mid. €Banricduny ; (frequent. [?] fr. Barra,
like BadXifw fr. BddAXAw) ; here and there in Plat., Polyb.,
Diod., Strab., Joseph., Plut., al. I. 1. prop. to dip
repeatedly, to immerge, submerge, (of vessels sunk, Polyb.
1,51, 6; 8, 8,4; of animals, Diod. 1, 36). 2. to cleanse
by dipping or submerging, to wash, to make clean with
water; in the mid. and the 1 aor. pass. to wash one’s self,
bathe; so Mk. vii. 4 [where WH txt. fpavricwyra]; Lk.
xi. 38, (2 K. v. 14 ¢Bamricaro ev t@ “lopddvp, for 530;
Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 30; Judith xii. 7). 3. metaph. to
overwhelm, as i8taras tats eioopais, Diod. 1, 73; épAnpacr,
Plut. Galba 21; 77 cupdopa BeBarticpeévos, Heliod. Aeth.
2,3; and alone, to inflict great and abounding calamities
on one: éBdamricay rH méXw, Joseph. b. j. 4, 3, 3; 1) dvopia
pe Bamriger, Is. xxi. 4 Sept.; hence BamriferOar Banticpa
(cf. W. 225 (211); [B. 148 (129)]; cf. AoveaGar ro Nov-
tpdv, Ael. de nat. an. 3, 42), to be overwhelmed with ca-
lamities, of those who must bear them, Mt. xx. 22 sq. Rec. ;
Mk. x. 38 sq.; Lk. xii. 50, (cf. the Germ. etwas auszubaden
haben, and the use of the word e. g. respecting those who
cross a river with difficulty, gos trav pacray ot mefot Ba-
mriCopevor SteBarvov, Polyb. 38, 72,4; [for exx. see Soph.
Lex. s. v.; also 7. J. Conant, Baptizein, its meaning and
use, N. Y. 1864 (printed also as an App. to their revised
version of the Gosp. of Mt. by the “ Am. Bible Union ”’) ;
and esp. four works by J. W. Dale entitled Classic, Ju-
daic, Johannic, Christic, Baptism, Phil. 1867 sqq.; D. B.
Ford, Studies on the Bapt. Quest. (including a review of
Dr. Dale’s works), Bost. 1879). IT? In the Notait
is used particularly of the rite of sacred ablution, first in-
stituted by John the Baptist, afterwards by Christ’s com-
imand received by Christians and adjusted to the con-
tents and nature of their religion (see Bamricpa, 3), viz.
fan immersion in water, performed as a sign of the re-
moval of sin, and administered to those who, impelled by
a desire for salvation, sought admission to the benefits
of the Messiah’s kingdom ; [for patristic reff. respecting
the mode, ministrant, Pnico etc. of the rite, cf. Soph.
Lex. s. v.; Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Baptism]. a. The
word is nd absolutely, to administer the rite of ablu-
tion, to baptize, (Vulg. baptize; Tertull. tingo, tinguo, [ cf.
mergito, de corona mil. § 3]): Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 25 sq. 28;
lii. 22 aa, 26; iv. 2; x.40; 1 Co. i. 17; with the Roenaie
noun 70 Bdantiopa, Acts xix.4; 6 Carries substantively
94
Banrticpa
i. q. 6 Bartiorns, Mk. vi. 14, [24 T Tr WH]. roa, Jn.
iv.1; Acts viii. 38; 1 Co.i.14,16. Pass. to be baptized:
Mt. iii. 13 sq. 16; Mk. xvi. 16; Lk. iii. 21; Acts ii. 41;
viii. 12, 13, [836]; x.47; xvi. 15; 1 Co.i.15LTTr WH;
x.2LT Tr mrg. WH mrg. Pass. in a reflex. sense [i. e.
Mid. cf. W. § 38, 3], to allow one’s self to be initiated by
baptism, to receive baptism: Lk. [iii. 7,12]; vii. 30; Acts il.
38; ix.18;xvi.33; xvill. 8; with the cognate noun ro Ba-
nricpa added, Lk. vii. 29; 1 aor. mid., 1 Co. x.2 (L T Tr
mrg.WH mre. ¢Bamricénoay [cf. W. § 38, 4 b.]); Acts xxii.
16. foll. by a dat. of the thing with which baptism is per-
formed, véart, see bb. below. b. with Prepositions;
aa. eis, to mark the element into which the immersion
is made: eis tov lopdavnv, Mk. i. 9. to mark the end:
eis perdvotay, to bind one to repentance, Mt. iii. 11; els
70 lwdvvov Banticpa, to bind to the duties imposed by
John’s baptism, Acts xix. 3 [cf. W. 397 (871) ]; ets dvopa
twos, to profess the name (see évoua,2) of one whose fol-
lower we become, Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts vill. 16; xix. 5;
1 Co. i. 18,15; eis dbeow dpapri@y, to obtain the forgive-
ness of sins, Acts ii. 88; eis tov Mavany, to follow Moses
as a leader, 1 Co. x. 2. to indicate the effect: els &
copa, to unite together into one body by baptism, 1 Co.
xii. 13; eis Xpiordv, eis Tov Oavatoy avrod, to bring by bap-
tism into fellowship with Christ, into fellowship in his
death, by which fellowship we have died to sin, Gal. iii.
27; Ro. vi. 8, [ef. Mey. on the latter pass., Ellic. on the
former]. bb. év, with dat. of the thing in which one is
immersed: év r@ "Iopdavy, Mk. i. 5; ev tO Udare, Jn. i. 31
(L T Tr WH ev v6., but cf. Mey. ad loc. [who makes the
art. deictic]). of the thing used in baptizing: év vdart,
Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. év];
Jn. i. 26, 33; cf. B. § 138,19; [ef. W. 412 (384); see
ev, I. 5 d.a.]; with the simple dat., vdar., Lk. iii. 16;
Acts i. 5; xi. 16. ev mvevpare ayi@, to imbue richly with
the Holy Spirit, (just as its large bestowment is called an
outpouring): Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i.8 [L Trbr. ev]; Lk. iii.
16; Jn.i. 33; Acts i.5; xi. 16; with the addition kai rupi
to overwhelm with fire (those who do not repent), i. e. to
subject them to the terrible penalties of hell, Mt. iii. 11.
ev dvduate Tov kupiov, by the authority of the Lord, Acts
x. 48. ce. Pass. exit [L Tr WH ev] r@ dvduate "Inood
Xpworod, relying on the name of Jesus Christ, i. e. repos-
ing one’s hope on him, Acts ii. 38. dd. inép ray
vexp@v on behalf of the dead, i. e. to promote their eternal
salvation by undergoing baptism in their stead, 1 Co. xv.
29; ef. [W. 175 (165) ; 279 (26 2); 382 (358); Meyer (or
Beet) ad loc.]; esp. Neander ad loc.; Riickert, Progr.
on the passage, Jen. 1847; Paret in Ewald’s Jahrb. d.
bibl. Wissensch. ix. p. 247; [cf. B. D. s. v. Baptism XII
Alex.’s Kitto ibid. VI.].*
Bamrticpa, -ros, 76, (Sarri¢w), a word peculiar to N. T.
and eccl. writ., immersion, submersion ; 1. used trop.
of calamities and afflictions with which one is quite over-
whelmed: Mt. xx. 22 sq. Rec.; Mk. x. 38 sq.; Lk. xii. 50,
(see Bamrifo, I. 3). 2. of John’s baptism, that
purificatory rite by which men on confessing their sins
were bound to a spiritual reformation, obtained the par-
Bamrric 105
don of their past sins and became qualified for the benefits
of the Messiah’s kingdom soon to be set up: Mt. iii. 7;
xxi. 25; Mk. xi. 30; Lk. vii. 29; xx. 4; Acts i. 22; x. 37;
Xvili. 25; [xix. 3]; Bdmr. peravoias, binding to repentance
[W. 188 (177)], Mk. i. 4; Lk. iii. 3; Acts xiii. 24; xix. 4.
3. of Christian baptism; this, according to the view
of the apostles, is a rite of sacred immersion, commanded
by Christ, by which men confessing their sins and pro-
fessing their faith in Christ are born again by the Holy
Spirit unto a new life, come into the fellowship of Christ
and the church (1 Co. xii. 13), and are made par-
takers of eternal salvation; [but see art. “ Baptism ” in
BB.DD., McC. and S., Schaff-Herzog]: Eph. iv. 5; Col.
ii. 12 [L mrg. Tr -ué q. v.]; 1 Pet. iii. 21; e&s rov Oavarov,
Ro. vi. 4 (see Banri¢a, II. b. aa. fin.). [Trench § xcix.]*
Bartiopés, -od, 6, (Bamrifw), a washing, purification
effected by means of water: Mk. vii.4,8 [RGL Tr in
br.] (e07dv kai rornpiwy) ; of the washings prescribed
by the Mosaic. law, Heb. ix. 10. Bamricpdv didaxis
equiv. to d.dax7s repli Barricpav, Heb. vi. 2 [where L txt.
WH txt. Barr. didaynv], which seems to mean an expo-
sition of the difference between the washings prescribed
by the Mosaic law and Christian baptism. (Among
prof. writ. Josephus alone, antt. 18, 5, 2, uses the word,
and of John’s baptism; [respecting its interchange with
Banricpa cf. exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v. 2 and Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. ii. 12, where L mrg. Tr read Bamricpos; cf.
drench=§-xcix. |.) *
Barrictis, -ov, 6, (Banrifw), a baptizer; one who ad-
ministers the rite of baptism; the surname of John, the
forerunner of Christ: Mt. iii. 1; xi. 11 sq.; [xiv. 2, 8;
xvi. 14; xvii. 13]; Mk. vi. 24 [T Tr WH ov Banrifovros],
25; viii. 28; Lk. vii. 20, 28[T Tr WH om. ], 33; ix. 19; also
given him by Josephus, antt. 18,5, 2, and found in no other
prof. writ. [Joh. d. Taufer by Breest (1881), Kohler (’84).]*
Barre: [fut. Bayo, Jn. xiii. 26 T Tr WH]; 1 aor.
éBawa ; pf. pass. ptep. BeBaypévos ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; in Sept. for 530 ; a. to dip, dip in, immerse: ti,
Jn. xiii. 26 [but in 26* Lehm. éepBawas, as in 26° L txt.
RG]; foll. by a gen. of the thing into which the object is
dipped (because only a part of it is touched by the act
of dipping), Lk. xvi. 24 (cf. drrecOai twos, Nover Oat mora-
poio, Hom. Il. 5, 6; 6, 508; cf. B. § 132, 25; [W. § 30,
8 c.]). b. to dip into dye, to dye, color: iwarvov aipart,
Rey. xix. 13 [Tdf. mepipepappeévor, see 8. V. mepippaive ;
WH fpeparticpevor, see parvtifw]. (Hat. 7, 67; Anth. 11,
68; Joseph. antt. 3, 6,1.) [Comp.: éyu-Barre. | *
Bap, Chald. 13 [cf. Ps. ii. 12; Prov. xxxi. 2]; Bap Iwva
son of Jonah (or Jonas): Mt. xvi. 17, where L T WH
Baptwva (q. v.-) Barjonah (or Barjonas), as if a surname,
like BapydBas, etc. [R.V. Bar-Jonah. Cf. "lavas, 2.]*
Bapafas, -a, 6, (fr. 13 son, and NaN father, hence son
of a father i. e. of a master [cf. Mt. xxiii. 9]), a captive
robber whom the Jews begged Pilate to release instead of
Christ: Mt. xxvii. 16 sq. (where codd. mentioned by
Origen, and some other authorities, place ’Incovv before
BapaBBav, approved by Hitizeches De Wette, Meyer,
Bieek, al.; [ef. WH. App. and Tdf.’s note ad loc. ; also
95
Bap@oropaios
Treg. Printed Text, etc. p. 194 sq.]), 20 sq. 26; Mk. xv.
7,11,15; Lk. xxiii. 18; Jn. xviii. 40.*
Baphs.3 6, indecl., (p)3 lightning), Barak, a commander
of the Israelites (Jude. iv. 6, 8): Heb. xi. 32. [BB.DD.]*
Bapaxtas, -ov, 6, [71973 Jehovah blesses], Barachiah :
in Mt. xxiii. 35 said to have been the father of the Zach-
ariah slain in the temple; cf. Zayapias.*
BapBapos, -ov; 1. prop. one whose speech is rude,
rough, harsh, as if repeating the syllables BapBédp (cf.
Strabo 14, 2, 28 p.662; dvoparomenoinrar 7 Nes, Etym.
Magn. [188, 11 (but Gaisf. reads Bpdyyos for BépBapos) ;
cf. Curtius § 394; VWanidek p. 561]); hence 2.
one who speaks a foreign or strange language which is
not understood by another (Hat. 2, 158 BapBapovs mavras
of Alytmrwoe Kadeovar Tors pi ohior dpoyhocoovs, Ovid.
trist. 5, 10, 37 barbarus hic ego sum, quia non intelligor
ulli) ; so 1 Co. xiv. 11. 3. The Greeks used BapBapos
of any foreigner ignorant of the Greek language and the
Greek culture, whether mental or moral, with the added
notion, after the Persian war, of rudeness and brutality.
Hence the word is applied in the N. T., but not re-
proachfully, in Acts xxviii. 2, 4, to the inhabitants of
Malta [i. e. Mediry, q. v-], who were of Phenician or
Punic origin; and to those nations that had, indeed,
some refinement of manners, but not the opportunity of
becoming Christians, as the Scythians, Col. iii. 11 | but
cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. But the phrase "EdAnves te kat
BapBapor forms also a periphrasis for all peoples, or indi
cates their diversity yet without reproach to foreigners
(Plat. Theaet. p. 175 a.; Isocr. Euag. c. 17 p. 192b.;
Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 1 and in other writ.) ; so in Ro. i. 14.
(In Philo de Abr. § 45 sub fin. of all nations not Jews.
Josephus b. j. prooem. 1 reckons the Jews among bar-
barians.) Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. ii. 21 p. 61; [Bp.
Lghtft. on Col. u. s.; B.D. s. v. Barbarian ].*
Bapéw, -5: to burden, weigh down, depress; in the N. T.
found only in Pass., viz. pres. ptcp. Bapotpevor, impv.
BapeicOw; 1 aor. ¢BapnOnv; pf. ptcp. BeBapnuevos; the
better writ. do not use the pres.; they use only the
pteps. BeBapnws and BeBapynuevos; see Matth. § 227; W.
83 (80); [B. 54 (47); Veitchs.v.]. Used simply: to be
weighed down, oppressed, with external evils and calami-
ties, 2 Co. i. 8; of the mental oppression which the
thought of inevitable death occasions, 2 Co. v.4; épOad-
pot BeBapnpévor, sc. Urv@, weighed down with sleep, Mk.
xiv. 40 (LT Tr WH. karaBapuvopevor); Mt. xxvi. 43;
with Urvm added, Lk. ix. 32; €y (3) kpauraAn, Lk. xxi)
34 Rec. BapyrOacw, [see Bapivw}, (Hom. Od. 19, 122
ov BeBapnores, Diod. Sic. 4, 38 7H voow); py BapeicOw
let it not be burdened, sc. with their expense, 1 Tim. v.
16, (eiogopais, Dio Cass. 46, 32). [Comp.:
Bapéw. | *
Bapéws, adv., (Bapis, q: v-), heavily, with difficulty: Mt.
xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 27, (Is. vi. 10). [From Hat. on.]*
Tanpdohopatos, -0v, 6, abn 43 son of Tolmai), Bar-
tholomew, one of the twelve apostles of Christ: Mt. x. 3;
Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14; Actsi.13. [See Na@avand ana
BBAy DA
émt-, KaTa-
Bapinoods
Bap-inois, 6, (13 son, piv Jesus), Bar-Jesus, a cer-
tain false prophet: Acts xiii. 6 [where Tdf. -cov; see
his note. Cf. ’EAvyas].*
Bap-ovas, -a [cf. B. 20 (17sq-)], 6, (fr. 13 son, and
737 Jonah [al. HY ie. Johanan, Jona, John; cf. Mey.
on Jn. i. 42 (43) and Lghtft. as below]), Bar-Jonah [or
Bar-Jonas], the surname of the apostle Peter: Mt. xvi. 17
[LT WH; in Jn. i. 42 (43); xxi. 15 sqq. son of John;
see Lghtft. Fresh Revision, etc., p. 159 note (Am. ed.
p- 137 note)]; see in Bap and "Iwvas, 2.*
. BapvéBas, -a [B. 20 (18) ], 6, (03 son, and 833; acc. to
Luke’s interpretation vids mapaxAjoeas, i. e. excelling in
the power rns Tapakhnoews, Acts iv. 36; see mapdkAnots,
5), Barnabas, the surname of Joses [better Joseph], a
Levite, a native of Cyprus. He was a distinguished
teacher of the Christian religion, and a companion and
colleague of Paul: Acts ix. 27; xi. 22, [25 Rec.], 30; xii.
25; xiii—xv.; 1 Co.ix.6; Gal. ii. 1, 9,13; Col. iv. 10.*
Bapos, -eos, 76, heaviness, weight, burden, trouble: load,
émiriOévat tivi (Xen. oec. 17, 9), to impose upon one diffi-
cult requirements, Acts xv. 28; Baddew emi twa, Rev. ii.
24 (where the meaning is, ‘I put upon you no other in-
junction which it might be difficult to observe’; cf.
Diisterdieck ad loc.); Baoragetv 76 Bapos rwves, 1. e. either
the burden of a thing, as rd Bapos r7s juepas the weari-
some labor of the day Mt. xx. 12, or that which a person
bears, as in Gal. vi. 2 (where used of troublesome moral
taults; the meaning is, ‘bear one another’s faults’).
aiavov Bapos dons a weight of glory never to cease, i. e.
vast and transcendent glory (blessedness), 2 Co. iv. 17;
cf. W. § 34, 33 (wAovrov, Plut. Alex. M. 48). weight i. q.
authority: év Bape: etvat to have authority and influence,
1 Th. ii. 7 (6), (so also in Grk. writ.; cf. Wesseling on
Diod. Sic. 4, 61; [exx. in Suidas s. v.]). [SyN. see
dykos. | *
' Bapoafds [-caB8as LTTrWH; see WH. App. p.
159], -a [B. 20 (18) ], 6, Barsabas [or Barsabbas] (i. e.
son of Saba [al. Zaba]) ; 1. the surname of a certain
Joseph: Acts i. 23, [B. D. s. v. Joseph Barsabas]. 2
the surname of a certain Judas: Acts xv. 22, [B. D.s. v.
Judas Barsabas].*
Bap-riparos [Tdf. -uaios, yet cf. Chandler § 253], -ov, 6,
(son of Timeus), Bartimaeus, a certain blind man: Mk.
x. 46.*
Bapive: to weigh down, overcharge: Lk. xxi. 34 (1 aor.
pass. subj.) BapuvOaowv Ree. [cf. W. 83 (80); B. 54 (47)],
for BapnOdow; see Bapéw. [Comp.: xara-Bapive.]*
Bapis, -cia,-v, heavy; 1. prop. i.e. heavy in weight :
popriov, Mt. xxiii. 4 (in xi. 30 we have the opposite,
ehappoyv). 2. metaph. a. burdensome: évrodn, the
‘keeping of which is grievous, 1 Jn. v.3. b. severe, stern:
entatorn, 2 Co. x. 10 [al. imposing, impressive, cf. Wet-
stein ad loc.]. ¢. weighty, i. e. of great moment: ra Bapv-
Tepa Tov vopov the weightier precepts of the law, Mt.
‘xxii. 235 airtduara [better airidpara (q. v.)], Acts xxv.
7. d. violent, cruel, unsparing, [A. V. grievous]: vKot,
‘Acts xx. 29 (so also Hom. I. i. 89; Xen. Ages. 11, 12).*
Bapiripos, -ov, (Bapus and rin), of weighty (i. e. great)
96
Bacirela
value, very precious, costly: Mt. xxvi. 7 [RG Trtxt.
WH], (so Strabo 17 p. 798; selling at a great price,
Heliod. 2, 30 [var.]; possessed of great honor, Aeschyl.
suppl. 25 [but Dindorf (Lex. s. v.) gives here (after a
schol.) severely punishing |).*
Bacavitw: [impf. €8acdu¢ov]; 1 aor. éBacanca; Pass.,
[pres. Bacavitowa}; 1 aor. eBacavicOnv; 1 fut. Bacan-
cOncopa; (Bacavos) ; 1. prop. to test (metals) by the
touchstone. 2. to question by applying torture. 3.
to torture (2 Mace. vii.13); hence 4. univ. to ver with
grievous pains (of body or mind), to torment: twd, Mt.
vill. 29; Mk. v.7; Lk. viii. 28; 2 Pet. ii.8; Rev. xi. 10;
passively, Mt. viii. 6; Rev. ix.5; xx. 10; of the pains of
child-birth, Rev. xii. 2 (cf. Anthol. 2, p. 205 ed. Jacobs) ;
with ¢v and the dat. of the material in which one is tor-
mented, Rev. xiv. 10. 5. Pass. to be harassed, dis-
tressed; of those who at sea are struggling with a head
wind, Mk. vi. 48; of a ship tossed by the waves, Mt.
xiv. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. Often in O. T.
Apocr.) *
Bacavirpds, -0v, 6, (Bacavita, q. V-) ; 1. a testing by
the touchstone or by torture. 2. torment, torture; a.
the act of tormenting: Rey. ix. 5. b. the state or con-
dition of those tormented: Rev. xviii. 7,10,15; 6 xamvos
tov Bacauopov aitay the smoke of the fire by which they
are tormented, Rev. xiv.11. (4 Macc. ix. 6; xi. 2; [al.];
bad wine is called Bacavcpos by Alexis in Athen. 1, 56
p- 30f.)*
Bacavioris, -od, 6, (Bacavifw), one who elicits the truth
by the use of the rack, an inquisitor, torturer, ({ Antiphon ;
al.]; Dem. p. 978,11; Philo in Flace. § 11 end; [de
concupise. § 1; quod omn. prob. lib. 16; Plut. an vitios.
ad infel. suff. § 2]); used in Mt. xviii. 34 of a jailer
(SeopopvAaé Acts xvi. 23), doubtless because the busi-
ness of torturing was also assigned to him.*
Bdcavos, -ov, 7, [Curtius p. 439]; a. the touchstone,
[called also basanite, Lat. lapis Lydius], by which gold
and other metals are tested. b. the rack or instrument
of torture by which one is forced to divulge the truth. c.
torture, torment, acute pains : used of the pains of disease,
Mt. iv. 24; of the torments of the wicked after death,
ev Bacavos imdpyew, Lk. xvi. 23 (Sap. iii. 1; 4 Mace.
xiii. 14); hence 6 réros ris Bacavov is used of Gehenna,
Lk. xvi. 28. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn.], Pind. down.) *
Bacrdcla, -as, 7, (fr. Baowkevo; to be distinguished fr.
Bacitea a queen; cf. iepeia priesthood fr. iepedo, and
i€peca a priestess fr. iepevs), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. royal
power, kingship, dominion, rule: Lk. i. 833; xix. 12, 153
xxii. 29; Jn. xviii. 36; Acts i. 6; Heb. i. 8; 1 Co. xv.
24; Rev. xvii. 12; of the royal power of Jesus as the
triumphant Messiah, in the phrase épyeoOai év r7 Bac.
avrod, i. e. to come in his kingship, clothed with this pow-
er: Mt. xvi. 28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [eis r}v 8B. L mrg. Tr mrg.
WH txt.]; of the royal power and dignity conferred on
Christians in the Messiah’s kingdom: Rev. i. 6 (ace. to
Tr txt. WH mrg. éeroinoey quiv or L qd [yet RG TWH
txt. Tr mrg. judas] Baoideiav [Rec. Bacireis]); Tod Oeod,
the royal power and dignity belonging to God, Rev. xii.
Bacircia
10. 2. a kingdom i.e. the territory subject to the
rule of a king: Mt. xii. 25 sq.; xxiv. 7; Mk. iii. 24; vi.
23; xiii. 8; Lk. xi. 17; xxi. 10; plur.: Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv.
SeeHebixt. 33: 3. Frequent in the N. T. in refer-
ence to the Reign of the Messiah are the following
phrases: 7 Baotreia tod Oeod (STINT xn, Targ. Is.
xl. 9; Mie. iv. 7), prop. the kingdom over which God rules;
H Bacideia rod Xprorod (NIU naan, Targ. Jonath. ad
Is. liii. 10), the kingdom of the Messiah, which will be
founded by God through the Messiah and over which the
Messiah will preside as God’s vicegerent; 4 Bao. rév
ovpavev, only in Matthew, but very frequently [some 33
times], the kingdom of heaven, i. e. the kingdom which is
of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin. writ.
Down man is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed
universally, not the Messianic kingdom); sometimes
simply 7 Baoweia: Mt. iv. 23, etc.; Jas. ii. 5; once 7 Bac.
tov Aaveid, because it was supposed the Messiah would be
one of David’s descendants and a king very like David,
Mk. xi. 10; once also 7 Bac. rod Xpyorod kat Oeod, Eph. v.
5. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel —
who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after
four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one an-
other and the last of them shown itself hostile to the
people of God, at length its despotism should be broken,
and the empire of the world pass over for ever to the holy
people of God (Dan. ii. 44; vii. 14, 18, 27) — the Jews
were expecting a kingdom of the greatest felicity, which
God through the Messiah would set up, raising the dead
to life again and renovating earth and heaven; and that
in this kingdom they would bear sway for ever over all
the nations of the world. This kingdom was called the
kingdom of God or the kingdom of the Messiah; and in
this sense must these terms be understood in the utter-
ances of the Jews and of the disciples of Jesus when
conversing with him, as Mt. xviii. 1; xx. 21; Mk. xi. 10;
Lk. xvii. 20; xix. 11. But Jesus employed the phrase
kingdom of God or of heaven to indicate that perfect order
of things which he was about to establish, in which all those
of every nation who should believe in him were to be gathered
together into one society, dedicated and intimately united
to God, and made partakers of eternal salvation. ‘This
kingdom is spoken of as now begun and actually pres-
ent, inasmuch as its foundations have already been
laid by Christ and its benefits realized among men
that believe in him: Mt. xi. 12; xii. 28; xii. 41 (in
this pass. its earthly condition is spoken of, in which it
includes bad subjects as well as good); Lk. xvii. 21; 1
Co. iv. 20; Ro. xiv. 17 (where the meaning is, ‘the es-
sence of the kingdom of God is not to be found in ques-
tions about eating and drinking’); Col. i. 13. But far
more frequently the kingdom of heaven is spoken of as
a future blessing, since its consummate establishment
is to be looked for on Christ’s solemn return from the
skies, the dead being called to life again, the ills and
wrongs which burden the present state of things being
done away, the powers hostile to God being vanquished :
97
Bacinrela
27; xiii. 28 sq.; xiv. 15; xxii. 18; 2 Pet. i. 11; also in
the phrases cicépyeoOar eis +. Bac. 7. odpavar or +. bod:
Mt. v. 20; vii. 21; xviii. 3; xix. 23, 24; Mk. ix. 47; x
23, 24, 25; Lk. xviii. 24 [T Tr txt. WH elomropevovrat |,
25; Jn. iii. 5; Acts xiv. 22; «Anpovduos tris Bacireias,
Jas. ii. 5; KAnpovoueiy 7. B. r. 6.; see d. below. By a sin-
gular use 4 Bac. tod Kupiov 7 emovpdvios God’s heavenly
kingdom, in 2 Tim. iv. 18, denotes the exalted and perfect
order of things which already exists in heaven, and into
which true Christians are ushered immediately after
death; cf. Phil. i. 23; Heb. xii. 22 sq. The phrase Bac.
Tap ovpavav or rod ‘cod, while retaining its meaning king-
dom of heaven or of God, must be understood, according
to the requirements of the context, a. of the beginning,
growth, potency, of the divine kingdom: Mt. xiii. 31-33,
Mk. iv. 30; Lk. xiii. 18. . of its fortunes: Mt. xiii. 24;
Mk. iv. 26. c. of the conditions to be complied with in
order to reception among its citizens: Mt. xviii. 23; xx.
1; xxll. 2; xxv. 1. d. of its blessings and benefits,
whether present or future: Mt. xiii. 44 sq.; Lk. vi. 20;
also in the phrases (nreiv rv Bac. r. Oeot, Mt. vi. 33
[L T WH om. +. cod]; Lk. xii. 31 [adrod L txt. T Tr
WH]; dexe06a +. Bac. T. 6. ds madiov, Mk. x. 15; Lk.
XVili. 17; KAnpovopeiv r. B. 7. 6. Mt. xxv. 34; 1 Co. vis
9 sq.; xv. 50; Gal. v. 21; see in xAnpovopew, 2. e. of
the congregation of those who constitute the royal ‘city
of God’: soveiv twas Baothelay, Rev. i. 6 G T WH txt.
Tr mrg. [ef. 1 above]; v. 10 (here RG Baoweis, so R in
the preceding pass.), cf. Ex. xix. 6. Further, the foll.
expressions are noteworthy: of persons fit for admis-
sion into the divine kingdom it is said avréy or rowotrwr
éotiv n Bac. rv ovp. or Tov Oeod: Mt. v. 3, 10; xix. 143
Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. S.ddvau tii +r. Bac. is used of
God, making men partners of his kingdom, Lk. xii. 32;
mapadapBavery of those who are made partners, Heb. xii.
28. dvatnv Bac. Tr. ovp. to advance the interests of the
heavenly kingdom, Mt. xix. 12; evexev rps Bao. r. 8. for the
sake of becoming a partner in the kingdom of God, Lk:
xviii. 29. Those who announce the near approach of the
kingdom, and describe its nature, and set forth the condi
tions of obtaining citizenship in it, are said duayyeAAew ri
Bao. r. 0. Lk. ix. 60; evayyediCer Oar trip B. 7. 6. Lk. iv. 43;
viii. 1; xvi. 16; mepi tins Bao. r. 6. Acts vill. 12; knptooew
tiv Bao. t. 0. Lk. ix. 2; Acts xx. 25; xxvill. 31; 7d evayt
yédov THs Bac. Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; xxiv. 14; with the addi-
tion of rod cod, Mk. i. 14 RLbr. Fyytxev 7 Bac. r. ovp.
or Tov Geo%, is used of its institution as close at hand: Mt,
iii. 2; iv. 17; Mk. i. 15; Lk. x. 9,11. it is said ¢pyeoOa
i. e. to be established, in Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20;
Mk. xi. 10. In accordance with the comparison which
likens the kingdom of God to a palace, the power of ad-
mitting into it and of excluding from it is called kd¢is
Ths B. rT. ovp. Mt. xvi. 19; KAelew thy B. 7. ovp. to keep
from entering, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14). vlol rs Bac. are those
to whom the prophetic promise of the heavenly kingdom
extends: used of the Jews, Mt. viii. 12; of those gathered
out of all nations who have shown themselves worthy of
Mt. vi. 10 ; viii. 11; xxvi. 29; Mk. ix. 1; xv. 43; Lk. ix. | a share in this kingdom, Mt. xiii. 38. (In the O. 'f;
Bac tdevos
Apocr. 7 Bac. rod be0d denotes God’s rule, the divine ad-
ministration, Sap. vi.5; x. 10; Tob. xiii. 1; so too in Ps.
ci. (ciii.) 19; civ. (ev.) 11-13; Dan. iv. 33; vi. 26; the
universe subject to God’s sway, God’s royal domain, Song
of the Three Children 32; 4 Baoweia, simply, the O. T.
theocratic commonwealth, 2 Mace. i. 7.) Cf. Fleck, De
regno divino, Lips. 1829; Bauwmg.-Crusius, Bibl. Theol.
p- 147 sqq.; Tholuck, Die Bergrede Christi, 5te Aufl. p.
55 sqq. [on Mt. v. 3]; Célin, Bibl. Theol. i. p. 567 sqq.,
ii. p. 108 sqq.; Schmid, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 262 sqq.
ed. 4; Baur, Neutest. Theol. p. 69 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. d. N. T. § 13; [also in his Leben Jesu, bk. iv. ch.
2]; Schiirer, [Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29 (esp. par. 8) and
ref. there; also] in the Jahrbb. fiir protest. Theol.,
1876, pp. 166-187 (cf. Lipsius ibid. 1878, p. 189) ; [B.D.
Am. ed. s. v. Kingdom of Heaven, and reff. there].
Bactdevos, (rarely -ela), -evor, royal, kingly, regal: 1 Pet.
ii. 9. As subst. rd Bacidetov (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 3; Prov.
xviii. 19 Sept.; Joseph. antt. 6, 12, 4), and much oftener
(fr. Hdt. 1, 30 down) in plur. ra Bacidera (Sept. Esth.
i. 9, etc.), the royal palace: Lk. vii. 25 [A. V. kings’
courts ].*
Bactrets, -éws, 6, leader of the people, prince, com-
mander, lord of the land, king; univ.: ot Baowdets tHs
vis, Mt. xvii. 25; Rev. xvi. 14 [LT Tr WH om. ris yas],
etc.; ray é6vav, Lk. xxii. 25; of the king of Egypt, Acts
vii. 10, 18; Heb. xi. 28, 27; of David, Mt.i. 6; Acts xiii.
22; of Herod the Great and his successors, Mt. ii. 1 sqq.;
Lk.i.5; Acts xii.1; xxv. 13; of a tetrarch, Mt. xiv. 9;
Mk. vi. 14, 22, (of the son of aking, Xen. oec. 4, 16 ; “re-
ges Syriae, regis Antiochi pueros, scitis Romae nuper
fuisse,” Cic. Verr. ii. 4, 27, cf. de senectute 17, 59; [Verg.
Aen. 9, 223]); of a Roman emperor, 1 Tim. ii. 2; 1 Pet. ii.
17, cf. Rev. xvii. 9 (10), (so in prof. writ. in the Roman
age, as in Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 6; Hdian. 2, 4, 8 [4 Bekk.];
of the son of the emperor, ibid. 1, 5, 15 [5 Bekk.]); of
the Messiah, 6 Baoweds trav “Iovdaiwv, Mt. ii. 2, etc.; rod
"Iopand, Mk. xv. 32; Jn. i. 49 (50); xii. 13; of Chris-
tians, as to reign over the world with Christ in the mil-
lennial kingdom, Rev. i. 6; v. 10 (Rec. in both pass. and
Grsb. in the latter; see Baoweia, 3 e.); of God, the su-
preme ruler over all, Mt. v. 35; 1 Tim. i. 17 (see aldy,
2); Rev. xv. 3; Baowdet’s Baoiréwr, Rev. xvii. 14 [but
here as in xix. 16 of the victorious Messiah]; 6 Bac.
ray Baothevdvtoy, 1 Tim. vi. 15, (2 Mace. xiii. 4; 3 Mace.
v. 35; Enoch 9,4; [84, 2; Philo de decal. § 10]; cf. [xé-
pros trav Bao. Dan. ii. 47]; Kdpsos tr. kupiwv, Deut. x. 17;
Ps. exxxv. (cxxxvi.) 3; [so of the king of the Par-
thians, Plut. Pomp. § 38, 1]).
Bactretw; fut. Bacirevow; 1 aor. éBacirevoa; (Bact
Acvs) ; —in Grk. writ. [fr. Hom. down] with gen. or dat.,
im the sacred writ., after the Hebr. (Oy bwin), foll. by
éni with gen. of place, Mt. ii. 22 (where LT WHom.
‘Ar br. émi); Rev. v.10; foll. by émé with acc. of the
pers., Lk. i. 33; xix. 14,27; Ro. v.14; [ef. W. 206 (193
8q-); B. 169 (147)]—t0 be king, to exercise kingly power,
«q reign: univ., 1 Tim. vi. 15; Lk. xix. 14, 27; of the
governor of a country, although not possessing kingly
98
Bactalw
rank, Mt. ii. 22; of God, Rev. xi. 15, 17; xix. 6; of the
rule of Jesus, the Messiah, Lk. i. 33; 1 Co. xv. 25; Rev.
xi. 15; of the reign of Christians in the millennium,
Rev. v. 10; xx. 4, 6; xxii. 5; hence Paul transfers the
word to denote the supreme moral dignity, liberty, bless-
edness, which will be enjoyed by Christ’s redeemed ones:
Ro. v. 17 (cf. De Wette and Thol. ad loc.) ; 1 Co. iv. 8.
Metaph. to exercise the highest influence, to control: Ro.
v. 14, 17, 21; vi. 12. The aor. €Bacitevoa denotes I
obtained royal power, became king, have come to reign, in
1 Co. iv. 8 [ef. W. 302 (283); B. 215 (185)]; Rev. xi.
17; xix. 6, (as often in Sept. and prof. writ.; cf. Grimm
on 1 Mace. p. 11; Breitenbach or Kiihner on Xen.
mem. 1, 1,18; on the aor. to express entrance into a
state, see Bnhdy. p. 382; Kriiger § 53, 5,1; [Kihner
§ 886, 5; Goodwin § 19 N.1]). [Comp.: ovp-Baot-
deve. | *
BactAuKds, -7, -dv, of or belonging to a king, kingly,
royal, regal; of a man, the officer or minister of a prince,
a courtier: Jn. iv. 46, 49, (Polyb. 4, 76, 2; Plut. Sol. 27;
often in Joseph.). subject toa king: of a country, Acts
xil. 20. befitting or worthy of a king, royal: éoOns, Acts
xii. 21. Hence metaph. principal, chief: vouos, Jas. ii.
8 (Plat. Min. p. 317 ¢. 7d dpOdv vdpos eoti BactrrKos,
Xen. symp. 1, 8 Baoidixdv xaddos; 4 Mace. xiv. 2).*
[BactAtckos, -ov, 6, (dimin. of Bacwdevs), a petty king;
a reading noted by WH in their (rejected) marg. of Jn.
iv. 46,49. (Polyb., al.)*]
Bacidtooa, -ns, 7, queen: Mt. xii.42; Lk. xi. 31; Acts
vill. 27; Rev. xviii. 7. (Xen. oec. 9, 15; Aristot. oec.
9 [in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 84; ef. frag. 385 (fr. Poll. 8,
90) p. 1542", 25]; Polyb. 23, 18, 2 [exerpt. Vales. 7],
and often in later writ.; Sept.; Joseph.; the Atticists
prefer the forms Baowdis and Bacihea; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 225; [on the termination, corresponding to Eng. -ess,
cf. W. 24; B. 73; Soph. Lex. p. 37; Sturz, De dial.
Maced. et Alex. p. 151 sqq.; Curtius p. 653].) *
Baors, -ews, 7, (BAQ, Baive) ; 1. a stepping, walk
ing, (Aeschyl., Soph., al.). 2. that with which one
steps, the foot: Acts iii. 7, (Plat. Tim. p. 92a. et al.;
Sap. xiii. 18).*
Backalve: 1 aor. é8dcxava, on which form cf. W. [75
(72)]; 83 (80); [B. 41 (385); Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25 sq.;
Paralip. p. 21 sq.]; (Ba¢w, Baoxw [pace ] to speak, talk);
tia [ W. 223 (209) ]; 1. to speak ill of one, to slander,
traduce him, (Dem. 8, 19 [94,19]; Ael. v. h. 2, 18, etc.).
2. to bring evil on one by feigned praise or an evil eye,
to charm, bewitch one, (Aristot. probl. 20, 34 [p. 926°,
24]; Theocr. 6,39; Ael. nat. an. 1, 35); hence, of those
who lead away others into error by wicked arts (Diod.
4,6): Gal. iii. 1. Cf. Schott [or Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc.;
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 462.*
Bacratw; fut. Bacrdcw; 1 aor. éBdcraca; 1. to take
up with the hands: didovs, Jn. x. 31, (dav, Hom. Od. 11,
594; rv pdxatpay dxd tis ys, Joseph. antt. (Peavey)
2. to take up in order to carry or bear; to put upon one’s
self (something) to be carried; to bear what is burden-
some: Tov oravpdy, Jn. xix. 17; Lk. xiv. 27, (see orareds
Batos
2a. and b.); Metaph.: Baord¢ew m, to be equal to un-
derstanding a matter and receiving it calmly, Jn. xvi.
12 (Epict. ench. 29, 5); opriov, Gal. vi. 5; Baordce
TO kpiva, must take upon himself the condemnation of
the judge, Gal. v. 10 (uawin wi, Mic. vii. 9). Hence
to bear, endure: Mt. xx. 12; Acts xv. 10 (¢vydv); Ro.
vel Galenvin2 se Revs 110.0 sq. (Hpict. diss. 1, 3, 2;
Anthol. 5, 9, 3; in’ this sense the Greeks more com-
monly use dépew.) 3. simply to bear, carry: Mt. iii.
11; Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. vii. 14; xxii. 10; Rev. xvii. 7;
pass., Acts iii. 2; xxi. 35. 76 dvopd pov evaruov ebvar,
so to bear it that it may be in the presence of Gentiles,
i. e. by preaching to carry the knowledge of my name
to the Gentiles, Acts ix. 15. to carry on one’s person:
Lk. x. 4; Gal. vi. 17 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; of the womb
carrying the fetus, Lk. xi. 27; to sustain, i. e. uphold,
support: Ro. xi. 18. 4. by a use unknown to Attic
writ., to bear away, carry off: vocovs, to take away or
remove by curing them, Mt. viii. 17 (Galen de compos.
medicam. per gen. 2, 14 [339 ed. Bas.] Wopas re Oepa-
mevet Kal Ura@ma Baord¢er) [al. refer the use in Mt. 1. c.
to 2; cf. Meyer]. Jn. xii. 6 (€8aora¢e used to pilfer [R.
V. txt. took away; cf. our ‘shoplifting’, though perh. this
lift is a diff. word, see Skeat s. v.]); Jn. xx. 15, (Polyb.
1, 48, 2 6 dvepos trols mupyous TH Bia Baordge, Apollod.
bibl. 2, 6, 2; 3,4, 3; Athen. 2, 26 p. 46 f.; 15, 48 p. 693 e.;
very many instances fr. Joseph. are given by Krebs,
Observv. p. 152 sqq.). [Sywn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.]*
Béros, -ov, 7 and (in Mk. xii. 26 GLTTr WH) 6,
(the latter acc. to Moeris, Attic; the former Hellenistic ;
ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 532; W. 63 (62) [cf. 36; B. 12
(11)]), [fr. Hom. down], a thorn or bramble-bush [cf.
B. D. s. v. Bush]: Lk. vi. 44; Acts vii. 30, 35; emt rod
(ris) Bdrov at the Bush, i. e. where it tells about the Bush,
Mk. xii. 26; Lk. xx. 37; cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xi. 2; [B.D.
s. v. Bible IV. 1].*
Baros, -cv, 6, Hebr. na a bath, [A. V. measure], a Jew-
ish measure of liquids containing 72 sextarii [between
8 and 9 gal. ], (Joseph. antt. 8, 2, 9): Lk. xvi. 6 [see B.D.
s.v. Weights and Measures II. 2].*
Barpaxos, -ov, 6, a frog, (fr. Hom. [i. e. Batrach., and
Hadt.] down): Rev. xvi. 13.*
Barrohoyéw [T WH Barrad. (with 8 B, see WH. App.
p- 152)],-@: 1 aor. subj. BarroAoynow; a. to stammer,
and, since stammerers are accustomed to repeat the
same sounds, b. to repeat the same things over and
over, to use many and idle words, to babble, prate; so Mt.
vi. 7, where it is explained by év 77 moAvAoyia, (Vulg.
multum loqui; [A. V. to use vain repetitions ]); cf. Tho-
luck ad loc. Some suppose the word to be derived from
Battus, a king of Cyrene, who is said to have stuttered
(Hat. 4, 155); others from Battus, an author of tedious
and wordy poems; but comparing Barrapi¢ew, which
has the same meaning, and BdpBapos (q- v-), it seems
far more probable that the word is onomatopoetic. (Sim-
plic. in Epict. [ench. 30 fin.] p. 340 ed. Schweigh.) *
BSeAvypa, -ros, 76, (BdeAvooouat), a bibl. and eccl. word;
in Sept. mostly for H3yIn, also for ypy and ypw, a Soul
99
BeBatow
thing (loathsome on acct. of its stench), a detestable thing;
(Tertull. abominamentum) ; Luth. Greuel; [A. V. abom-
imation]; a. univ.: Lk. xvi. 15. b. in the O. T. often
used of idols and things pertaining to idolatry, to be
held in abomination by the Israelites; as 1 K. xi. 6 (5);
XX. (xxi.) 26; 2 K. xvi. 3; xxi. 2; 1 Esdr. vii. 13; Sap.
xii. 23; xiv. 11; hence in the N. T. in Rev. xvii. 4 sq.
of idol-worship and its impurities; movetv BdéAvypya k.
Weddos, Rev. xxi. 27. c. the expression 76 BS. rHs épn-
paoews the desolating abomination [al. take the gen. al. ;
e. g. Mey. as gen. epex.] in Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14,
(1 Mace. i. 54), seems to designate some terrible event
in the Jewish war by which the temple was desecrated,
perh. that related by Joseph. b. j. 4,9, 11 sqq. (Sept.
Dan. xi. 31 5 xii. 11, BS. (ris) Epnpocews for pnw Ypy
and onw wv, Dan. ix. 27 Bd. rév épnudcewy for Dy3pw
DnwD the abomination (or abominations) wrought by the
desolator, i. e. not the statue of Jupiter Olympius, but a
little idol-altar placed upon the altar of whole burnt-
offerings; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 31; Hengstenberg,
Authentie des Daniel, p. 85 sq.; [the principal explana-
tions of the N. T. phrase are noticed in Dr. Jas. Mori-
son’s Com. on Mt. 1. ¢.].) *
BSeAuKTSs, -7, dv, (BdeAvacopuar), abominable, detestable:
Tit. i. 16. (Besides only in Prov. xvii. 15; Sir. xli. 5;
2 Mace. i. 27; [cf. Philo de victim. offer. § 12 sub fin.].)*
BSeAtccw: (Bde quietly to break wind, to stink) ;
1. to render foul, to cause to be abhorred: tiv dopny, Ex.
v. 21; to defile, pollute: ras uxds, r. puxny, Lev. xi. 43;
xx. 25; 1 Mace. i. 48; pf. pass. ptcp. é8d5eAvypévos abomi-
nable, Rev. xxi. 8, (Lev. xviii. 30; Prov. viii. 7; Job xv.
16; 3 Mace. vi. 9; BdeAvocdpevos, 2 Macc. v. 8). In
native Grk. writ. neither the act. nor the pass. is found.
2. Bdekicoopa; depon. mid. (1 aor. éBdedvEduny often
in Sept. [Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 10]; in Grk. writ. depon. pas-
sive, and fr. Arstph. down) ; prop. to turn one’s self away
from on account of the stench; metaph. to abhor, detest:
Thy Os 122.”
BéBatos, -aia (W. 69 (67); B. 25 (22)), -atov, (BAQ,
Baivw), (fr. Aeschyl. down], stable, fast, firm; prop.: ayxu-
pa, Heb. vi. 19; metaph. sure, trusty: émayyehia, Ro. iv.
16; KAnots Kat exroyn, 2 Pet. i. 10; Adyos mpodntixds, 2
Pet. i. 19; unshaken, constant, Heb. iii. 14; édsis, 2 Co.
i.7 (6), (4 Mace. xvii. 4) ; wappyoia, Heb. iii. 6 (but WH
Tr mrg. in br.) ; valid and therefore inviolable, Adyos,
Heb. ii. 2; dca6qxn, Heb. ix. 17. (With the same mean-
ings in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
BeBardw, -4; fut. BeBardow; 1 aor. éBeBaiwoa; Pass.,
[pres. BeBavodpar] ; 1 aor. €BeBawOnv ; (BéBaos) ; to make
firm, establish, confirm, make sure: rov ddyov, to prove its
truth and divinity, Mk. xvi. 20; rds émayyedias make
good the promises by the event, i. e. fulfil them, Ro. xv.
8 (so also in Grk. writ. as Diod. 1,5); Pass. : 76 paptup.oy
Tov Xpiorov, 1 Co.i.6; 7 cwrnpia... eis nuas €BeBarwOn,
a constructio praegnans [W. § 66, 2 d.] which may be re-
solved into eds nas mapedoOn Kal ev nuiv BéBatos eyevero,
Heb. ii. 3 cf. 2; see BéBatos. of men made steadfast and
constant in soul: Heb. xiii. 9; 1 Co. i. 8 (BeBarooee tpas
BeBaiworts
dveykAnrous will so confirm you that ye may be unre-
provable [W. § 59, 6 fin.]); 2 Co. i. 21 (BeBarov npas
eis Xpuordv, causing us to be steadfast in our fellowship
with Christ; cf. Meyer ad loc.); év rH mioret, Col. ii. 7
[LT Tr WH om. év]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Thue. and Plat.
down.) [Comp.: dca-BeBardopat. | *
BeBatwors, -ews, 7, (BeBaidw), confirmation: rod evayye-
Xiov, Phil. i. 7; e’s BeBaiwow to produce confidence, Heb.
vi. 16. (Sap. vi.19. Thuc., Plut., Dio Cass., [al.]) *
BEBndos, -ov, (BAQ, Baive, Bnrds threshold) ; 1. ac-
cessible, lawful to be trodden; prop. used of places; hence
2. profane, equiv. to Yn [i. e. unhallowed, common],
Lev. x.10; 1S. xxi. 4; opp. to dys (as in [ Ezek. xxii.
26]; Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 18): 1 Tim. iv. 7; vi. 20;
2 Tim. ii. 16; of men, profane i.e. ungodly: 1 Tim. i. 9;
Heb. xii. 16. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)
[C£. Trench § ci.]*
BeBndréw, -; 1 aor. €BeBnrwaa; (BEBndos) ; to profane,
desecrate: rb odBBarov, Mt. xii. 5; 7d iepov, Acts xxiv. 6.
(Often in Sept. for S5n; Judith ix. 8; 1 Mace. ii. 12,
etc. ; Heliod. 2, 25.) *
BeeAfeBotvA and, as written by some [yet no Greek]
authorities, BeekCeBov8 [cod. B BeefeBovA, so cod. & exc.
in Mk. iii. 22; adopted by WH, see their App. p. 159; cf.
B. 6], 6, indecl., Beelzebul or Beelzebub, a name of Satan,
the prince of evil spirits: Mt. x. 25; xii. 24,27; Mk. iii.
22; Lk. xi.15,18,19. The form BeeA€eBovA is composed
of 5337 (rabbin. for 537 dung) and 5y3, lord of dung
or of filth, i. e. of idolatry; cf. Lightfoot on Mt. xii. 24.
The few who follow Jerome in preferring the form BeeA-
(<BovB derive the name fr. 3335 Sys, lord of flies, a false
god of the Ekronites (2 K. i. 2) having the power to
drive away troublesome flies, and think the Jews trans-
ferred the name to Satan in contempt. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Beelzebub: and J. G. M(iiller) in Herzog vol. i. p.
768 sqq-; [BB.DD.,; cf. also Meyer and Dr. Jas. Mori-
son on Mt. x. 25; some, as Weiss (on Mk.1.c.; Bibl. Theol.
§ 23 a.), doubt alike whether the true derivation of the
name has yet been hit upon, and whether it denotes Satan
or only some subordinate ‘ Prince of demons’]. (Besides
only in ecel. writ., as Ev. Nicod. ec. 1 sq.) *
BediaA, 6, Oya worthlessness, wickedness), Belial, a
name of Satan, 2 Co. vi. 15 in Rec.belz 1. But BeAlap
(q: v-) is preferable, [see WH. App. p. 159; B. 6].*
BeXlap, 6, indecl., Beliar, a name of Satan in 2 Co. vi.
15 Rec.** @ T Tr WH, etc. This form is either to be as-
cribed (as most suppose) to the harsh Syriac pronuncia-
tion of the word BeAiaA (q. v.), or must be derived from
yy? 53 lord of the forest, i.e. who rules over forests and
deserts, (cf. Sept. Is. xiii. 21; Mt. xii. 43; [BB.DD. s. v.
Belial, esp. Alex.’s Kitto]). Often in eccl. writ.*
Bedovn, -ns, 7, (Bédos); a. the point of a spear. b. a
needle: Lk. xviii. 25 LT TrWH;; see padis. ([Batr. 130],
Arstph., Aeschin., Aristot., al.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 90.)*
BéXos, -eos, Td, (BaAAw), a missile, a dart, javelin, arrow:
Eph. vi. 16. [From Hom. down.]*
BeAtlwv, -ov, gen. -ovos, better; neut. adverbially in 2
‘Lim. i. 18 [W. 242 (227); B. 27 (24). Soph., Thuc., al.]*
100
Bnbeoda
Bevvayity [-welv L T Tr WH; see WH. App. 155, and
8. Vv, et, ¢],6,(}"10733, 1. e. 1°19)-73 son of the right hand, i. e.
of good fortune, Gen. xxxv. 18), Benjamin, Jacob’s
twelfth son; pvd1) Bevtapiv the tribe of Benjamin: Acts
xii, 21% Ro. xi. 1; Phil’. 55" Rev. vi-8>
Bepvixn, -ns, 7, (for Bepevixn, and this the Macedonic
form [cf. Sturz, De dial. Mac. p. 31] of bepevixn [i. e. vic-
torious]), Bernice or Berenice, daughter of Herod Agrip-
pa the elder. She married first her uncle Herod, king
of Chalcis, and after his death Polemon, king of Cilicia.
Deserting him soon afterwards, she returned to her
brother Agrippa, with whom previously when a widow
she was said to have lived incestuously. Finally she
became for a time the mistress of the emperor Titus
(Joseph. antt. 19, 5,1; 20, 7,1 and 3; Tacit. hist. 2, 2
and 81; Suet. Tit. 7): Acts xxv. 13, 23; xxvi. 30. Cf.
Hausrath in Schenkel i. p. 896 sq.; [Farrar, St. Paul, ii.
599 sq. ].*
Bépoua, -as, 7, (also Beppora [1. e. well-watered]), Berea,
a city of Macedonia, near Pella, at the foot of Mount
Bermius: Acts xvii. 10, 13.*
Bepouaios, -a, -ov, Berwan: Acts xx. 4.*
[Bnfcaida, siven by Lmrg. Tr mrg. in Lk. x. 13 where
Ree. etc. ByOcaida, q. v-]
BnbaBapd, -as, [-pa Rec.bez*, indecl.], 7, (WII M3
place of crossing, i. e. where there is a crossing or ford,
cf. Germ. Furthhausen), Bethabara: Jn. i. 28 Ree. [in
Rec.*” of 1st decl., but cf. W. 61 (60)]; see [WH.
App. ad loc. and] Byavia, 2.*
BnGavia, -as; 7, (773) 13 house of depression or misery
[cf. B.D. Am. ed.]), Bethany; 1. a town or village
beyond the Mount of Olives, fifteen furlongs from Jeru-
salem: Jn. xi. 1,18; xii. 1; Mt. xxi. 17; xxvi.6; Lk. xix.
29 [here WH give the accus. -wd (see their App. p. 160),
cf. Tr mrg.]; xxiv. 50; Mk. xi.1,11sq.; xiv.3; nowa
little Arab hamlet, of from 20 to 30 families, called ei-
*Aziriyeh or el-’ Azir (the Arabic name of Lazarus) ; cf.
Robinson i. 431 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v.]. 2. a town or
village on the east bank of the Jordan, where John bap-
tized: Jn. i. 28 L T Tr WH, [see the preceding word].
But Origen, although confessing that in his day nearly
all the codd. read ev Bnéavia, declares that when he
journeyed through those parts he did not find any place
of that name, but that Bethabara was pointed out as the
place where John had baptized; the statement is con-
firmed by Eusebius and Jerome also, who were well ac-
quainted with the region. Hence it is most probable that
Bethany disappeared after the Apostles’ time, and was
restored under the name of Bethabara; cf. Liicke ad
loc. p. 391 sqq. [Cf. Prof. J. A. Paine in Phila. S. S.
Times for Apr. 16, 1881, p. 243 sq.]*
BndeoS4, 9, indec., (Chald. 830M 3, i. e. house of
mercy, or place for receiving and caring for the sick),
Bethesda, the name of a pool near the sheep-gate at
Jerusalem, the waters of which had curative powers:
Jn. v. 2 [here Lmrg. WH mrg. read BnOcaida, T WH txt.
Bn6{aba (q. v.)]. What locality in the modern city is
its representative is not clear; cf. Win. RWB. s. v.;
BnOfaba
Arnold in Herzog ii. p. 117 sq.; Robinson i. 330 sq.
342 sq.; [B.D. s. v.; “The Recovery of Jerusalem”
(see index) ].*
Bnota0a, 7, (perh. fr. Chald. xnv1 m3 house of olives;
not, as some suppose, 8A 13 house of newness, Germ.
Neuhaus, since it cannot be shown that the Hebr. NM is
ever represented by the Grk. ¢), Bethzatha: Jn. v. 2
T [WH txt.] after codd. 8 LD and other authorities
(no doubt a corrupt reading, yet approved by Keim ii.
p- 177, [see also WH. App. ad loc.]), for Rec. Bybecdd,
q-v. (Cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.] *
BnOdrcép, 7, [indecl.], (in Joseph. not only so [antt. 8,
10, a; but also BnOAe€un, "78s anbtr6,°S, 0 ;oll, @ 5° [1% 1,
3]; dé BnOdcuwv, 5, 2, 8; ex ByOrceuewr, 5, 9,13 [ef. 7,
13; 9, 2]), Bethlehem, (ond na house of infeed a little
town, named from the fertility of its soil, six Roman
miles south of Jerusalem; now Beit Lachm, with about
3000 [ 5000”, Baedeker] inhabitants: Mt. ii. 1, 5 sq. 8,
16; Lk. ii. 4,15; Jn. vii. 42. Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.; Rob-
inson i. p. 470 sqq.; Raumer p. 313 sqq.; Todler, Beth-
lehem in Palastina u.s.w. 1849; [\Socin (i.e. Baedeker),
Hadbk. ete., s. v.; Porter (i.e. Murray) 1b; 3B. DDi*
Bylo aida (WH -oaida; see I, «| and (Mt. xi, 21 R'G
T WH) -6d», 7, indecl. but with ace. [which may, how-
ever, be only the alternate form just given; cf. WH.
App. p. 160] Bnécaidav [B. 17 uy sq-) 3 Win. 61 (60);
Tdf. Proleg. p. 119 sq.], (Syr. i, p OES aii i. e. house or
place of hunting or fishing), Bethsaida; 1. a small
city (ones, Jn. i. 44 (45)) or a village (kdun, Mk. viii. 22,
23) on the western shore of the Lake of Gennesaret:
Jn. i. 44 (45); Mt. xi. 21; Mk. vi. 45; Lk. x. 13 [here
Lumrg. Trmrg. Bydcaida; cf. Tdf. Proleg. u. s.]; Jn.
xil. 21 (where ris TadsAaias is added). 2. a village
in lower Gaulanitis on the eastern shore of Lake Gennes-
aret, not far from the place where the Jordan empties
into it. Philip the tetrarch so increased its population
that it was reckoned as a city, and was called Julias in
honor of Julia, the daughter of the emperor Augustus
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2,1; Plin. h.n. 5,15). Many think
that this city is referred to in Lk. ix. 10, on account of
Mk. vi. 32,45; Jn. vi.1; others that the Evangelists
disagree. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Raumer p. 122 sq.;
[BB.DD. s. v. 3. In Jn. vy. 2 Lehm. mrg. WH mrg.
read ByOaaidda; see s. v. Bnbecda. |*
BnOdayq [but Lchm. uniformly, Treg. in Mt. and Mk.
and RG in Mt. 47 (B. 15; W. 52 (51); ef. Tdf. Proleg.
p- 103); in Mt. xxi. 1 Tdf. ed. 7 -cgayn], 7, indecl., (fr.
m3 and 15 house of unripe figs), Bethphage, the name
of acountry-seat or hamlet (Euseb. calls it xopn, Jerome
villula), on the Mount of Olives, near Bethany: Mt. xxi.
1; Mk. xi. 1 RGTrtxt. WHtxt., but Trmrg. in br.;
Lk. xix. 29. [BB.DD. s. v.]*
Bia, -ros, 7d, (fr. BAQ, Baivw), [fr. Hom. (h. Merc.),
Pind. down]; 1. a step, pace: Biya modds the space
which the foot covers, a foot-breadth, Acts vii. 5 (for
oiy-7D Deut. ii. 5, cf. Xen. an. 4, 7,10; Cyr. 7, 5, 6).
2. a raised place mounted by steps; a platform, tribune:
101
RuBriLox
used of the official seat of a judge, Mt. xxvii. 19; Jn
xix. 13; Acts xvili. 12, 16 sq.; xxv. 6, 10,[17]; of the
judgment-seat of Christ, Ro. xiv. 10 (LT Tr WH rod
deod) ; 2 Co. v.10; of the structure, resembling a throne,
which Herod built in the theatre at Caesarea, and from
which he used to view the games and make speeches to
the people, Acts xii. 21; (of an orator’s pulpit, 2 Macc.
xiii. 26; Neh. viii. 4. Xen. mem. 3, 6,1; Hdian. 2, 19,
2 [1 ed. Bekk.]).*
BipvdAdos, -ov, 6, 7, beryl, a precious stone of a pale
green color (Plin. h. n. 37, 5 (20) [i. e. 37, 79]): Rev.
xxi. 20. (Tob. xiii. 17; neut. BypvdAdAvov equiv. to ONY.
Ex. xxviii. 20; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix. 13)). Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Edelsteine, 11; [esp. Riehm, HWB. ib. 3 and 12].*
Bla, -as, 7); 1. strength, whether of body or of mind:
Hom. and subseq. writ. 2. strength in violent action,
force: pera Bias by the use of force, with violence, Acts
v. 26; xxiv. 7 [Ree.]; shock rév kuparev, Acts xxvii. 41
[R G, but Tr txt. br. al. om. rév kupareav]; dvd 7. Biav rot
dyAov, the crowd pressing on so violently, Acts xxi. 35.
[Syn. see duvapus, fin. ]*
Bidtw: (Bia); to use force, to apply force; twa, to
force, inflict violence on, one; the Act. is very rare and
almost exclusively poetic, [fr. Hom. down]; Pass. [B.
53 (46) ]in Mt. xi. 12 ) Baordela Tr. op. Bidaerat, the king-
dom of heaven is taken by violence, carried by storm, i. e.
a share in the heavenly kingdom is sought for with the
most ardent zeal and the intensest exertion; cf. Xen.
Hell. 5, 2,15 (23) mondeus ras BeBracpevas; [but see Weiss,
Jas. Morison, Norton, in loc.]. The other explanation:
the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence sc. from its ene-
mies, agrees neither with the time when Christ spoke the
words, nor with the context; cf. Fritzsche, De Wette,
Meyer, ad loc. Mid. Biagopar foll. by ets re to force one’s
way into a thing, (és rhv Woridaav, Thue. 1, 63; &s 76 e€a,
7, 69; eis tyv mapeuBodrnv, Polyb. 1, 74, 5; els ra evrds,
Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19 3 €is 76 otpardmedov, Plut. Otho
12, etc.): eis 7. BaciXelay Tod Geod, to get a share in the
kingdom of God by the utmost earnestness and effort,
Lk. xvi. 16. [Comp.: mapaSidgoua. ]*
Blatos, -a,-or, (Bia), violent, forcible: Acts ii. 2 [A. V.
mighty]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Biacris, -0d, 6, (Bide) ; 1. strong, forceful: Pind.
Ol. 9, 114 [75]; Pyth. 4, 420 [236; but Pind. only uses
the form Brards, so al.]. 2. using force, violent: Philo,
agric. § 19. In Mt. xi. 12 those are called Buaorai by
whom the kingdom of God Bidgeras, i. e. who strive to
obtain its privileges with the utmost eagerness and
effort.*
BiBrapiBrov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of the dimin. Bi8Adpuor fr.
7) BiBXos), a little book: Rev. x. 2, 8 [LL Tr WH BiBNiov,
Taf. 2 and 7 BiBrdSdprov, q. v-], 9,10. Not found in prof.
auth. [Herm. vis. 2, 4, 3]; cf. W. 96 (91).*
PiBALSdpuov, -ov, rd, (fr. BiBridcov, like iwariddprov fr.
iparidvov), a little book: Rev. x. 8 Tdf. [edd. 2 and] 7
(Arstph. frag. 596.) *
BiBAlov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of BiBdos), a small book, a
scroll: Lk. iv. 17, 20; Jn. xx. 30; Gal. iii. 10; 2 Tim. iv.
SiBros
13, etc.; a written document; a sheet on which some-
thing has been written, B. dmooraciou [bill of divorce-
ment]: Mt. xix. 7; Mk. x.4; see anoardovor, 1. BiBXiov
(ais, the list of those whom God has appointed to eter-
nal salvation: Rev. xiii. 8 [Rec. 79 BiBA@]; xvil. 8; xx.
12; xxi. 27; see Con, 2b. [From Hat. down.]
BiPros, -ov, 7, (or rather 7 BvBdos [but the form PiBn.
more com. when it denotes a writing], the plant called
papyrus, Theophr. hist. plant. 4, 8, 2 sq.; [ Plin. h. n.
13, 11 sq. (21 sq.)]; fr. its bark [rather, the cellular sub-
stance of its stem (for it was an endogenous plant) ]
paper was made [see Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 433 sq. ;
esp. Dureau de la Malle in the Mémoires de l’Acad. d.
Inserr. etc. tom. 19 pt. 1 (1851) pp. 140-183, and (in
correction of current misapprehensions) Prof. E. Abbot
in the Library Journal for Noy. 1878, p. 323 sq., where
other reff. are also given]), a written book, a roll or scroll:
Mt. i. 1; Lk. iii. 4; Mk. xii. 26; Acts i. 20; ris (wis,
Phil. iv. 3; Rev. iii. 5, etc.; see BiBAiov. [From Aeschyl.
down. |
BiBpdoxw: pf. BeBpwxa; to eat: Jn. vi. 13.
writ. fr. Hom. down; often in Sept.) *
Bubuvia, -as, 7, Bithynia, a province of Asia Minor,
bounded by the Euxine Sea, the Propontis, Mysia,
Phrygia, Galatia, Paphlagonia: Acts xvi. 7; 1 Pet.i.1.
[Cf. B. D.s.v.; Dict. of Grk. and Rom. Geog. s. v.; Cony-
beare and Howson, St. Paul, ete. ch. viii. ] *
Bios, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down]; a. life extensively,
i.e. the period or course of life [see below and
Trench § xxvii.]: Lk. viii. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 4;
1 Jn. ii. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 3 [Rec.]. b. (as often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 230, 575; Hdt., Xen.) that by which
life is sustained, resources, wealth, [A. V. living]: Mk.
xii. 44; Lk. viii. 43 [WH om. Tr mrg. br. cl.]; xv. 12,
80; xxi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 17 [goods]. (For on? in Prov.
xxxi. 14 (xxix. 32).) * ;
[Syn. Blos, (wh: ¢. existence (having death as its antithe-
sis); 8. the period, means, manner, ofexistence. Hence
the former is more naturally used of animals, the latter of
men; cf. zoology, biography. N.T. usage exalts (wh, and
so tends to debase Bios. But see Bp. Lghift. Ign. ad Rom. 7.]
ida, -6: 1 aor. inf. Budcar; for which in Attic the 2
aor. inf. Bidvat is more common, cf. W. 84 (80); [B. 54
(48) ; Veitch or L. and S.s. v.]; (Bios) ; [fr. Hom. down];
to spend life, to live: rdv ypovov, to pass the time, 1 Pet. iv.
2; (Job xxix. 18; jyépas, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 2). [Syn.
see Bios, fin.]*
Biwors, -ews, 3), manner of living and acting, way of life:
Acts xxvi. 4. (Sir. prolog. 10 81d ris evvdpou Bidceas ;
not found in prof. auth.) *
Biwrixds, ~7, -dv, pertaining to life and the affairs of this
life: Lk. xxi. 34; 1 Co. vi. 3.sq. (The word, not used in
Attic, first occurs in Aristot. h. a. 9, 17, 2 [p. 616%, 27];
Xpetar Br@rcxat is often used, as Polyb. 4, 73, 8; Philo, vit.
Moys. iii. § 18 fin.; Diod. 2, 29; Artemid. oneir. le wile
Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 354 sq.) *
BdaBepés, -d, -dv, (BAdrrw), hurtful, injurious, (Xen.
mem. 1, 5, 3 opp. to aPeAumos): 1 Tim. vi. 9 emOvpiat
(In Grk.
102
Bracdnula
BdaBepai, cf. 7Sovat BA. Xen. mem. 1, 3, 11. (Often in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. e.h. Mere. 36 (taken fr. Hes. opp.
365)] down; once in Sept., Prov. x. 26.) *
Brarrw: fut. BAdWo; 1 aor. ~Brawpa; to hurt, harm, in-
jure: twd, Mk. xvi. 18; Lk. iv. 35. (Very often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down; Tob. xii. 2; 2 Mace. xii. 22, ete.) *,
Bracrdve, 3 pers. sing. pres. subj. Baor@ fr. the form
Bdaoraw, Mk. iv. 27 LT Tr WH (cf. B. 55 (48); [Eecl.'
ii. 6; Herm. sim. 4, 1 sq.]); 1 aor. €BAdornca (cf. W.
84 (80); [B.1.¢.]); 1. intransitively, to sprout, bud,
put forth leaves: Mk. iv. 27; Mt. xiii. 26; Heb. ix. 4;,
(Num. xvii. 8; Joel ii. 22, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind.
down). 2. in later Grk. writ. transitively, to produce:
tov kaproy, Jas. v.18. (Gen. i. 11, etc.) *
Badorros [i. €. a sprout], -ov, 6, Blastus, the chamber-
lain of king Herod Agrippa I.: Acts xii. 20 [cf. Mey.
ad loc. ].*
Prardnpéw, -2; impf. é8racgnuovy; 1 aor. éBracdn-
pnoa; Pass., [pres. BAacpnpotpar}; 1 fut. BAaodnpnOn-
copa; (BAdodnpos, q. Vv.) ; to speak reproachfully, rail at,
revile, calumniate, (Vulg. blasphemo); absol.: Lk. xxii.
65; Acts xill. 45; xvill.6; xxvi. 11; 1 Tim.i. 2031 Pet.
iv.4; with acc. of pers. or thing (as in later Grk., Joseph.,
Plut., Appian, etc.): Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. iii. 23 L T Tr
WHS: xva 296) Uikcocxt 3 9m hitslie ca asalinge rd Uae
10; with the cognate noun Bracdnziay, to utter blasphe-
my (Plat. legge. 7 p. 800 c.; see dyamdw ad fin.), Mk. iii.
28 R G (where LT Tr WH Goa for écas, see above) ;
[foll. by év, 2 Pet. ii. 12; cf. Bttm. as at end, and see
dyvoew, a.|. Pass. BAaodnpodpat to be evil spoken of, re-
viled, railed at: Ro. iii. 8; xiv. 16; 1 Co. iv. 13 (T WH
Tr mrg. dvodnuovpevor); x. 30; Tit. ii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 2;
TO Ovopa Tivos, Ro. ii. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 1! Spec. of those
who by contemptuous speech intentionally come short
of the reverence due to God or to sacred things (for
1, 2 K. xix. 6, 22 cf. 4; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. x. 34);
absol.: Mt. ix.3; xxvi. 65; Mk.ii.7 LT Tr WH; [Jn.
x. 36]; roy Oeov, Rev. xvi. 11, 21; thy Oedv, Acts xix. 37
(GLTTr WH iv Gedv); 75 dvopa tod Geod, Rev. xiii.
6; xvi. 95 rd mvedua Tov Geo (BAaadnpeirac), 1 Pet. iv.
14 Rec.; dogas, Jude 8; 2 Pet. ii. 10 (see dda, III. 3 b. y.);
eis TO mvedpa TO Gy. Mk. iii. 29; Lk. xii. 10, (eis Geos,
Plat. rep. 2 p. 381 e.). The earlier Grks. say Bdacd.
els TLva, Tept or Kata Twos; {on the N. os constructions
cf. W. 222 (208); 629 (584); B. 146 (128)].*
Prarpypla, -as, 7, railing, reviling, (Vulg. blasphemia) ;
a. univ. slander, detraction, speech injurious to another’s
good name: Mt. xii. 31; xv. 19; Mk. iii. 28; vii. 22; Eph.
iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; 1 Tim. vi. 4; Jude 9 (xpicts Bra-
onpias, i. q. kpiots BAdopnyos in 2 Pet. ii. 11, a judgment
pronounced in reproachful terms); Rev.ii.9. _b. spe-
cifically, impious and reproachful speech injurious to the
divine majesty: Mt. xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 7 [RG]; xiv. 64;
Lk. v. 21; Jn. x. 33; Rev. xiii. 5 [not Lehm.]; évoua or
dvopara Braodnpias i. gq. BrAdognya (cf. W. § 34, 3 b.;
[B. § 132, 10]): Rev. xiii. 1; xvii. 3 [RG Tr, see yeno] ;
Tov mvevparos, gen. of obj., Mt. xii. 31; mpds tov Gedy, Rev.
xiii. 6. (Kur., Plat., Dem., al.; for M8), Ezek. xxxv.
Braodnpos
12.) [BB.DD. s. v. Blasphemy; Campbell, Diss. on the
Gospels, diss. ix. pt. ii.] *
Prdonpos, -ov, (Brdé sluggish, stupid, and pnun speech,
report, [al. BAdrrw (q. v.) and ¢.]), speaking evil, slan-
derous, reproachful, railing, abusive: Acts vi. 11 (pnyara
Braognpa cis Movony kai tov bedv); [vi. 13 Rec. (6. BX.
kata Tov Témov Tov dyiov)]; 2 Pet. ii. 11 (see Bracdnpia,
a.); Rev. xiii. 5 [Lchm.]; Brdodnpos as subst. a blas-
phemer: 1 Tim. i. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Is. Ixvi. 3; Sap. i.
6; Sir. iii. 16; 2 Mace. ix. 28; [x. 36 (ef. 4)]; in Grk.
writ. fr. Dem. down.) *
Br€ppa, -ros, 7d, (BAErw); a look, glance: Breupare x. xo;
in seeing and hearing, 2 Pet. ii. 8 [cf. Warfield in Presbyt.
Rev. for 1883 p. 629 sqq.]. (Eur., Arstph., Dem., Plut., al.) *
Prérw ; [impf. e8rerov]; fut. Brew; 1 aor. 2Brewa;
[pres.-pass. BAérouar]; Sept. for ANI, 139, TIN, wan;
in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; to see, discern; 1.
with the bodily eye; a. to be possessed of sight, have
the power of seeing, opp. to rugdds: Mt. xii. 22; xiii. 16;
xv. 31; Jn. ix. 7, 15,19, 25; Acts ix. 9; Ro. xi. 8, 10;
Rev. iii. 18, etc. (Soph. Oed. Col. 73; Arstph. Plut. 15;
Xen. mem. 1, 3,4; Ael. v. h. 6, 12, etc. Ex. iv. 11;
xxiii. 8, etc. Tob. xi. 15). 1d Bdérew sight, the power
of seeing, Lk. vii. 21 (@LTTrWHom. 7d). b. to
perceive by the use of the eyes, to see, look, descry; a.
absol.: Brerdvrav avtev while they were looking, Acts i.
9; [xxii 11 Trmrg. WH mrg.]; épyou cat Bdéme, Rec. in
Rev. vi. 1, 3,5, 7. . with acc. of pers. or thing: Mt.
Wile 3 +, X14; xxlv;2; Mksv.31; vill. 23.sq.; xiii. 2;
Lk. vi. 41; xxiv. 12[T om. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.];
Jn. i. 29; Acts iv. 14, ete.; [Rev. xviii. 18 Rec. épavres];
tiv povnv, him who uttered the voice, Rey. i. 12; dpapa,
Acts xii. 9; he who has free access to one, as princes,
ministers, and personal friends have to a king, is said
BX. 76 mpdca@rdy Tivos Qopn 23 °N5, 2 K. xxv. 19; Jer.
lii. 25; Esth. i. 14); hence in Mt. xviii. 10 angels of
closest access or of highest rank are referred to (see
dpxayyedos). Pass. ra Brerdueva the things that are
seen: 2 Co. iv. 18; Heb. xi.3 (LT Tr WH 16 Brerdpevor,
the sum-total or complex of things seen) ; Amis BAeropen)
hope of things that are seen, i. e. that are present, Ro.
vill. 24. c. to turn the eyes to anything, to look at,
look upon, gaze at: yvvaixa, Mt. v. 28; ets re or teva [W.
§ 33 g.], Lk. ix. 62; Jn. xiii. 22; Acts ill. 4; els rov
ovpavdy, Acts i. 11 T Tr WH; in the sense of looking into
(i. e. in order to read), BiBdriov, Rev. v. 3 sq. d. univ.
to perceive by the senses, to feel: rov dvepov toxupdv [T WH
om. icx. ], Mt. xiv. 30, (krimov dédopka, Aeschyl. sept. 104).
e. to discover by use, to know by experience: ri, Ro. vii.
23; foll. by drt, 2 Co. vii. 8; by attract. 7d Anpiov, dre KTA.
Rey. xvii. 8; imép & Bremer pe for trép tovro, 6 Bremer pe
3vra, lest he think me greater than on personal knowl-
edge he finds me to be, 2 Co. xii. 6. 2. metaph. to see
with the mind’s eye; a. to have (the power of) un-
derstanding: Bdémovtes od BA€rovat, though endued with
understanding they do not understand, Mt. xiii. 13; Lk.
viii. 10. b. to discern mentally, observe, perceive, dis-
cover, understand; absol.: dv éadmrpov, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of
103
Bodw
the omniscient God Bdérev ev 16 kpumra seeing in secret,
where man sees nothing, Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 {here LT Tr
WH Bd. ev tr. kpupaio); eyyifoveay tiv npepav, Heb. x.
25 (fr. certain external signs); "Ingoty . . . éoreavope-
vov, we see (from his resurrection and from the effects
and witness of the Holy Spirit) Jesus crowned, Heb. ii.
9; foll. by dru, Heb. iii. 19; Jas. ii. 22, c. to turn the
thoughts or direct the mind to a thing, to consider, contem-
plate, look to; absol. Bdémere take heed: Mk. xiii. 23, 33;
with an acc. of the thing or pers., 1 Co. i. 26; x. 18;
2Co. x. 7; Phil. iii. 2; Col. ii. 5; foll. by ras with indie.
[W. 300 (282); B. 255 (219)], Lk. viii. 18; 1 Co. iii.
10; Eph. v. 15; to weigh carefully, examine, foll. by
interrog. ré with indic. Mk. iv. 24; ets mpécamdy tuwvos,
to look at i. e. have regard to one’s external condition,
—used of those who are influenced by partiality: Mt.
xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14. By a use not found in Grk. auth.
éavtov Bdéretv to look to one’s self (i. q. sibi cavere): Mk.
xill. 9; foll. by iva py [cf. B. 242 (209)], 2 Jn. 8; Bre-
mew amd Twos (i. q. sibi cavere ab aliquo) to beware of one
[W. 223 (209), cf. 39 (38); B. 242 (209), cf. 323 (278)],
Mk. viii. 15; xii. 38; look to in the sense of providing,
taking care: foll. by ta, 1 Co. xvi. 10; foll. by pn with
subj. aor., Mt. xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii. 5; Lk. xxi. 8; Acts xiii.
40; 1 Co. viii. 9 (unmws); x. 12; Gal. v.15; Heb. xii.
25; foll. by py with fut. indic., Col. ii. 8; Heb. iii. 12.
The Grks. say épav pn, [cf. W. 503 (468 sq.); B. 242 sq.
(209) ]. 3. in a geographical sense, like Lat. specto
[Eng. look], of places, mountains, buildings, etc., turned
towards any quarter, as it were facing it: foll. by xara
with acc., Acts xxvii. 12 [ef. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Phenice],
(Sept. [Num. xxi. 20]; Ezek. xi. 1; [xliv. 1; xlvii. 1];
mpos, Xen. Hell. 7, 1,17; mem. 3, 8,9; Hdian. 6, 5, 2;
Diog. Laért. 1, 2, 48; Sept. Ezek. ix. 2; xl. 24; [xlvi.
1]; eis, viii. 3, ete. [for other exx. see Soph. Lex. s. v.]).
[Syn. see s. v. dpdw. COmMpP.: dva-, dmo-, dia-, ép-, emt,
mept-, mpo-BrEra. |
BAnréos, -a, -ov, (Baddow), which must be thrown or put,
(see Bdddo, 2); found only in neut.: Mk. ii. 22 (WH
Tom. Trbr.); Lk. v. 38 BAnréov éori. foll. by acc. rév
oivov, cf. Matth. § 447, 3a.; [B. 190 (165)]. (Besides
only in Basil i. p. 137 c. ed. Benedict.) *
Boavepyés ([ RG, so Suid. (ed. Gaisf. 751 a.); but] L T
Tr WH Boammpyés), Boanerges, Hebr. #3) 131. e. sons of
thunder (as Mark himself explains it), [the name given
by our Lord to James and John the sons of Zebedee]:
Mk. iii. 17; 3 pronounced Boa as Noabhyim for Nebhy-
im; see Lahtft. Horae Hebr. ad loc.; w39, in Ps. lv. 15
a tumultuous crowd, seems in Syriac to have signified
thunder; so that the name Boavynpyes seems to denote
fiery and destructive zeal that may be likened to a thun-
der-storm, and to make reference to the occurrence nar-
rated in Lk. ix.54. [Cf. Dr. Jas. Morison’s Com. on Mk.
Le.; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.]*
Bodw, -@; [impf. ¢Bdav Acts xxi. 34 Rec.]; 1 aor.
éBénoa; (Bon); fr. Hom. down; in Sept. mostly for
NIP, px, DPY, to ery aloud, shout, (Lat. boo) ; 1. to
raise a cry: of joy, Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); of pain,
Boés
Mt. xxvii. 46 Lmrg. Tr WH; Acts viii. 7. 2. to cry
i. e. speak with a high, strong voice: Mt. iii. 3, Mk. i. 3, Lk.
iii. 4, Jn. i. 23, (all fr. Is. xl. 3); Mk. xv. 34; Lk. ix. 38
(RG dvaG.); [xviii 38]; Acts xvii. 6; xxi. 34 Rec. ;
xxv. 24 (RG ém.). 3. mpés twa to cry to one for
help, implore his aid: Lk. xviii. 7 [T Tr WHairé; cf.
W. 212 (199)], (1 S. vii. 8; 1 Chr. v. 20; Hos. vii. 14,
etc. for dy ptt): [Comp. : dva-, émt-Bodw. | *
[Syn. Boda, raréw, kpdlw, kpavyd lw: It is not un-
instructive to notice that in classic usage KaAeiy denotes
‘to cry out’ for a purpose, to call; Body to cry out as a mani-
festation of feeling; xpd¢ew to cry out harshly, often of
an inarticulate and brutish sound; thus kaAeiy suggests 1n-
telligence; Boay sensibilities; xpd¢ew instincts;
hence, Body esp.a cry for help. «pavyd¢ev, intensive of
xpd(w, denotes to cry coarsely, in contempt,etc. Cf. Schmidt
ch. 3.]
Boés, 6, Mt. i. 5 T WH, for Rec. Bodg, q. v-
Bor, -js, 7, a@ cry: Jas. v. 4 (of those imploring ven-
geance). From Hom. down.*
PorOea, -as, 7, (see Bonbéw), help: Heb. iv. 16, (often
in Sept., chiefly for MUy and Wy; in Grk. writ. fr.
Thuc. and Xen. down); plur. helps: Acts xxvii. 17
[see Hackett ad loc.; B.D. s. v. Ship 4; Smith, Voyage
and Shipwr. of St. Paul, pp. 106 sq. 204 sq.; cf. trofav-
vupe |.*
__Bon-8éw, -; 1 aor. eBonOnoa; (fr. Bon a cry and Ob
to run); in Sept. chiefly for 11; in Grk. writ. fr.
[Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; prop. to run to the cry (of
those in danger); hence univ. to help, succor, bring aid:
tut, Mt. xv. 25; Mk. ix. 22, 24 (BonOer pov ri amoria,
“quod fiduciae meae deest bonitate tua supple,’ Gro-
tus) 3) Acts xvi. 9); ocx19028)) 2 Co.) va. 23) Heba ii. 18)
Rey. xii. 16.*
Bonds, -dv, helping, (vjes, Hdt. 5, 97; ornprypa, Tob.
viii. 6); mostly as subst. [so fr. Hdt. down] a helper:
Heb. xiii. 6 (of God, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 7, as often
in Sept.).*
Bo8vvos, -ov, 6, a pit, a ditch: Mt. xii. 11; xv.14; Lk.
vi. 39. (Solon in Bekker’s Anecd. i. 85; Xen. oec. 19,
3; Theophr. hist. pl. 4, 2, 2 [(var.); al.]; Sept. 2S.
xviii. 17, etc.) *
Bodn, -7s, 7, (BdAAw), @ throw: dced AlOov Bodny about
a stone’s throw, as far as a stone can be cast by the hand,
Lk. xxii. 41, (ace) rééou Bodnv, Gen. xxi. 16; péxpe ALBov
x. dkovtiov Bodjs, Thuc. 5, 65; && deovriov Borns, Xen.
Hell. 4, 5, 15).*
Bodttw: 1 aor. €Bodica; (Borls a missile, dart; a line
and plummet with which mariners sound the depth of
the sea, a sounding-lead) ; to heave the lead, take sound-
ings: Acts xxvii. 28. (Besides only in Eustath. ; [Mid.
intrans. to sink in water, Geopon. 6, ile)
Boris, -i8os, 7, (BadrAw), a missile, dart, javelin: Heb.
xil. 20 Ree. fr. Ex. xix. 13. (Neh. iv. 17; Num. xxiv.
8; [Sap. v. 22; Hab. iii. 11]; Plut. Demetr. Bh)
Bodf, 6, (133 fleetness [but see B.D. Am. ed.]), Booz,
[more commonly] Boaz, a kinsman of Ruth, afterwards
her (second) husband, (Ruth ii. 1 sqq-; 1 Chr. ii. 11):
104
BovAn
Mt. i. 5 [Bods L Tr, Boés T WH]; Lk. iii. 32 [LD T Tr
WH Boos |.*
BépBopos, -ov, 6, dung, mire: 2 Pet. ii. 22. (Sept.;
Aeschyl., Arstph., Plat., sqq.; €v BopBdp@ xvdier Oa, of
the vicious, Epict. diss. 4, 11, 29.) *
Boppds, -a [W. § 8, 1; B. 20 (18)], 6, (equiv. to
Bopéas, -€ov), often [in Attic writ.], in Sept. for yiD¥;
1. Boreas; the north-north-east wind. 2. the north:
Lk. xiii. 29; Rev. xxi. 13, [cf. W. 121 (115) s. v. pe-
onpBpia].*
Bécxw; as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, to feed: Mk.
v.14; Lk. xv. 15; dpvia, mpoBara, Jn. xxi. 15, 17, (in a
fig. disc. portraying the duty of a Christian teacher to
promote in every way the spiritual welfare of the mem-
bers of the church); 6 Booxoy a herdsman: Mt. viii. 33;
Lk. viii. 34. In Pass. and Mid. [pres. ptep. Bookopevos,
cf. W. § 38, 2 note] of flocks or herds, to feed, graze:
Mt. viii. 30; Mk. v. 11; Lk. viii. 32. (in Sept. for
Eee
[Synx. Béokety, rotmalvery: m. is the wider, B. the nar-
rower term; the former includes oversight, the latter de-
notes nourishment; 7. may be rendered tend, B. specifically
feed. See Trench § xxv.; Mey. on Jn. u. s.; Schmidt ch. 200.]
Booép, 6, (W3 a torch, a lamp; Sept. Beop, Num.
xxii. 5; xxxi. 8; Deut. xxiii. 4; by change of J} into o,
Boodp), Bosor, the father of Balaam: 2 Pet. ii. 15 [WH
txt. Bewp |.*
Boravn, -ns, 7, (Bdoxw), an herb fit for fodder, green
herb, growing plant: Heb. vi. 7. (Hom., Pind., Plat.,
Eur., Diod., Ael., al. Sept. for sw, V¥Nn, Avy. [Met-
aph. of men, Ignat. ad Eph. 10, 3; ad Trall. 6,1; ad
Philad. 3, 1].)*
Bétpus, -vos, 6, a bunch or cluster of grapes: Rev. xiv.
18 [ef. B. 14 (13)]. (Gen. xl. 10; Num. xiii. 24 sq.
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
BovAevtis, -od, 6, a councillor, senator, (buleuta, Plin.
epp.): first in Hom. Ul. 6, 114; of a member of the
Sanhedrin, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 50. (Job iii. 14;
eae ILG))
Bovdcto : 1. to deliberate, take counsel, resolve, give
counsel, (Is. xxiii. 8; [fr. Hom. down)). 2. to be a
councillor or senator, discharge the office of a senator:
Xen. mem. 1, 1,18; Plat. Gorg. p. 473 e.; [al.]. In the
N. T. Mid., [pres. BovAetdouar; impf. éBovdrevdunv; fut.
Bovrevoupa, Lk. xiv. 31 Lmrg. T WH; 1 aor. éBoudeved-
pny]; 1. to deliberate with one’s self, consider: foll.
by ei, Lk. xiv. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 6, 8). 2. to take
(counsel, resolve: foll. by inf., Acts v. 33 [RGTTr
mrg.]; xv. 87 [Rec.]; xxvii. 39;-ct, 2 Co. i. 17; foll.
by a, Jn. xi. 53 LT Trtxt. WH; xii. 10 [ef. W. § 38,
3]. [Comp.: mapa- (“yar), cvp-Bovrevo. | * >
Bovdh, -fs, 7, (BovAopuac), fr. Hom. down; often in
Sept. for 7¥}) ; counsel, purpose: Lk. xxiii. 51 (where
distinguished fr. » mpa&s); Acts v. 38; xxvii. 12 (see
TiOnpt, 1 a.),42; plur. 1 Co. iv. 5; 4 BovAt rod Geod, Acts
xill. 36; esp. of the purpose of God respecting the sal-
vation of men through Christ: Lk. vii. 30; Acts ii. 23;
iv. 28; [Heb. vi. 17]; macav'riy BovAny tod Geod all the
BovrAnpa
contents of the divine plan, Acts xx. 27; 4 BovA1) rod
Gednparos aitov the counsel of his will, Eph. i. 11.*
BotAnpa, -ros, 7d, (Bovdopar), will, counsel, purpose :
Acts xxvii. 43; Ro. ix. 19; 1 Pet. iv. 3 (Rec. 6éAnua).
(2 Mace. xv. 5; in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down.) [Syn.
ef. 6€Xq, fin.] *
BotvdAopar, 2 pers. sing. Botdes Lk. xxii. 42 (Attic for
BovAn, cf. W. § 13, 2.a.; B. 42 (37)); impf. eBovAduny
(Attic [(cf. Veitch), yet commonly] 7Bovdsuny); 1 aor.
€BovdnOny (Mt. i. 19) and nBovdnOnv (2 Jn.12 RG; but
al. €8ovdn6. cf. [ WH. App. p. 162]; W.§ 12, 1¢.; B.33
(29)); Sept. for nas, yon; [fr. Hom. down]; to will,
wish ; and 1. commonly, to will deliberately, have a
purpose, be minded : foll. by an inf., Mk. xv. 15; Acts v.
28,33 (L WH Tr txt. for RG T éBovdevovro) ; xii. 4; xv.
37 (LT Tr WH for R éBovdevoarto) ; xviii. 27; xix. 30;
Xx OOM Axi 2S exxVidomexcxvalls 16s) 2 Colao.
Heb. vi. 17; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 10 (rods Bovdopévous sc.
emidéxerOat Tors adeAhovs); Jude 5; Jas. i. 18 (BovAnbeis
amekinoev nuas of his own free will he brought us forth,
with which will it ill accords to say, as some do, that they
are tempted to sin by God). with an acc. of the obj.
tovro, 2 Co. i.17(L T Tr WH for R Bovdevopevos) ; foll.
by an acc. with inf. 2 Pet. iii. 9. of the will electing or
choosing between two or more things, answering to
the Lat. placet mihi: Mt. i. 19 (cf. evOupetoOar, 20) ; xi.
27 [not L mrg.]; Uk. x. 22; xxii.42; Acts xxv. 20; [1
Co. xii. 11]; Jas. iii. 4; iv.4; foll. by the subj. BovAecde,
bpiv amodvow; ts it your will I should release unto you?
(cf. W. § 41a. 4b.; B. § 139, 2), Jn. xviii. 39. of the
will prescribing, foll. by an acc. with inf.: Phil. i.
12 (ywooke byuas Bovhouac I would have you know,
know ye); 1 Tim. ii. 8; v. 14; Tit. iii. 8. 2. of will-
ing as an affection, to desire: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. vi.
9 (of BovAdpwevor mrovreiv); Acts xvii. 20; xviii. 15;
€BovNopnv (on this use of the impf. see B. 217 (187) sq.;
[cf. W. 283 (266); Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 13]), Acts
xxv. 22; Philem. 13. On the difference between BovdAopa
and 6éda, see OéXao, fin.*
Bovvés, -od, 6, a Cyrenaic word acc. to Hdt. 4, 199,
which Eustath. [831, 33] on Il. 11, 710 says was used by
. Philemon [No@. 1], a comic poet (of the 3d cent. B. c.).
It was rejected by the Atticists, but from Polyb. on [who
(5, 22, 1 sq.) uses it interchangeably with Adqos] it was
occasionally received by the later Grk. writ. (Strabo,
Pausan., Plut., al.) ; in Sept. very often for y33; (perh.
fr. BAG to ascend [cf. Hesych. Bovvoi: Bapoi, and Bopides
in Hadt. 2, 125 (Schmidt ch. 99, 11)]); @ hill, eminence,
mound: Lk. iii. 5 (Is. xl. 4); xxiii. 30 (Hos. x. 8). Cf.
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 153 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 355 sq.; [Donaldson, New Crat. § 469 ].*
Bots, Bods, acc. sing. Body, [acc. plur. Béas, B.14 (13)],
5 4, an ox, a cow: Lk. xiii. 15; xiv. 5,19; In. ii. 14 sq.;
1 Co. ix. 9; 1 Tim. v.18. [From Hom. down. ]*
Bpafetov, -ov, rd, (BpaBevs the arbiter and director of a
contest, who awards the prize; called also BpaBevris,
Lat. designator), the award to the victor in the games, a
prize, (in eccl. Lat. brabeum, brabium), (Vulg. bravium) :
105
Bpéxo
1 Co. ix. 24; metaph. of the heavenly reward for Chris-
tian character, Phil. iii. 14. (Oppian, cyn. 4, 1G
Lycophr. 1154; dmopovas Bp. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. ay
[where see Lehtft., Gebh. and Harn.]; dpOapoias, Mart.
Polye. 17.) *
BpaBevw ; in Grk. writ. fr. Isoc. and Dem. down; 1.
to be a BpaBeds or umpire (see BpaBeiov). 2. to decide,
determine. 3. to direct, control, rule : Col. iii. 15 [where
see Meyer ; contra, Bp. Lghtft. Comp.: xara-BpaBeto.]*
Bpasive; (Bpadvs); to delay, be slow; 1. rarely
trans. to render slow, retard: riv cwrnpiay, Sept. Is. xlvi.
13; pass. 6dds, Soph. El. 1501 [ef. O. C. 1628]. Mostly
2. intrans. to be long, to tarry, loiter, (so fr. Aeschyl.
down): 1 Tim. ii. 15; unusually, with gen. of the thing
which one delays to effect, 2 Pet. iii. 9 ris émayyeXias
[A. V. 2s not slack concerning his promise] i.e. to fulfil his
promise; cf. W. § 30,6 b. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22.)*
BpaduTo€w, -@; (Bpadvs and mois) ; to sail slowly: pres.
ptep. in Acts xxvii. 7. (Artem. oneir. 4, 30.) *
Bpabts -cia, -v, slow; a. prop.: els te, Jas. i. 19. b.
metaph. dull, inactive, in mind ; stupid, slow to apprehend
or believe, (so Hom. Il. 10, 226; opp. to cuverds, Polyb.
4, 8,7; rdv votv, Dion. Hal. de Att. oratt.7 [de Lys.
judic.]; dvcpa6ia: Bpadurns év pabnoe, Plat. defin. p.
415 e.): with a dat. of respect, 77 kapdia, Lk. xxiv. 25.
[Sy¥N. see dpyés, fin.] *
Bpadurys (on accent cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 417 sq.;
[Chandler §§ 634, 635; W. 52 sq. (52)]), -jros, 4, (Bpa-
dvs), slowness, delay: 2 Pet. iii. 9. (From Hom. down.) *
Bpax wv, -ovos, 6, [fr. Hom. down], the arm: the Bpa-
xtov of God is spoken of Hebraistically for the might, the
power of God, Lk. i. 51 (ef. Deut. iv. 84; v.15; xxvi. 8);
Jn. xii. 38 (Is. liii. 1); Acts xiii. 17.*
Bpax is, -eta, -, short, small, little, (fr. Pind., Hdt., Thuc.
down); a. of place; neut. Bpaxv adverbially, a short
distance, a little: Acts xxvii. 28 (2S. xvi. 1; Thue. 1, 63).
b. of time; Bpaxv re a short time, for a little while: Heb.
ii. 7, 9, (where the writer transfers to time what the
Sept. in Ps. viii. 6 says of rank); Acts v. 34 [here
LT Tr WH om. rr]; pera Bpaxd shortly after, Lk. xxii. 58.
c. of quantity and measure; Bpayv m [Trtxt. WH
om. L Tr mrg. br. tu] some little part, a little: Jn. vi. 7
(Bpaxd ri rod pédtros, 1S. xiv. 29; €Aatov Bpaxd, Joseph.
antt. 9, 4, 2; Bpaxyvraros ABavwrds, Philo de vict. off.
§ 4); dua Bpaxéwy in few sc. words, briefly, Heb. xiii. 22
(so [Plat., Dem., al. (cf. Bleek on Heb. 1. c.)] Joseph.
b. j- 4, 5, 4; €v Bpaxurdr dndodv to show very briefly,
Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 15).*
Bpedos, -ovs, 7d; a. an unborn child, embryo, fetus :
Lk. i. 41, 44; (Hom. Il. 23, 266; Plut. rep. Stoic. 41
7 Bp. €v tH yaotpi). b. a new-born child, an infant, a
babe, (so fr. Pind. down) : Lk. ii. 12, 16; xviii. 15; Acts
vii. 19; 1 Pet. ii. 2; awd Bpépovs from infancy, 2 Tim.
iii. 15 (so éx Bpepous, Anth. Pal. 9, 567).*
Bpéxw; 1 aor. €BpeEa; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; 1.
to moisten, wet, water: Lk. vii. 38 (7. wedas Sdxpvor, cf.
Ps. vi. 7), 44. 2. in later writ. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 291 [W. 23]) to water with rain (Polyb. 1€, 12, 3), to
Bpovtn
cause to rain, to pour the rain, spoken of God: émi rwa,
Mt. v. 45; to send down like rain: kipios &Bpebe Oetov x.
mop, Gen. xix. 24; xdAaCav, Ex. ix. 23; [pdvva, Ps. xxvii.
(Ixxviii.) 24]; impers. Bpéxet it rains (cf. W. § 58, 9 b.
B.): Jas. v.17; with added acc., wip x. Oeiov, Lk. xvii.
29 ; with added subject, terds, Rev. xi. 6.*
Bpovrh, -fs, 4, thunder: Mk. iii. 17 (on which see
Boavepyés) ; Jn. xii. 29; Rev. iv. 5; Vi. 1 j-yill. 5 5 x. 3isq.;
xi. 19; xiv. 2; xvi. 18; xix.6. [From Hom. down.]*
Bpox%, -js, 9, (Bpéxw, q. v-), a later Grk. word (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 291), a besprinkling, watering, rain: used
of a heavy shower or violent rainstorm, Mt. vii. 25, 27;
Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 10; civ. (ev.) 32, for ow.*
Bpoxos, -ov, 6, a noose, slip-knot, by which any person
or thing is caught, or fastened, or suspended, (fr. Hom.
down): Bpdxov émBadrew tii to throw a noose upon one,
a fig. expression borrowed from war [or the chase] (so
Bp. meptBdddAev Twi, Philo, vit. Moys. ili. § 34; Joseph.
b. j. 7, 7,4), i.e. by craft or by force to bind one to some
necessity, to constrain him to obey some command, 1 Co.
vii. 35.*
Bpvypss, -00, 6, (Bptyw, q. v-), a gnashing of teeth: with
tav éddévrwv added, a phrase denoting the extreme an-
guish and utter despair of men consigned to eternal
condemnation, Mt. vill. 12; xiii. 42, 50; xxii. 13; xxiv.
51; xxv. 80; Lk. xiii. 28. (In Sir. li. 3 Bovypés is at-
tributed to beasts, which gnash the teeth as they attack
their prey; in Prov. xix. 12 Sept. for D7) snarling,
growling; in the sense of biting, Nic. th. 716, to be de-
rived fr. Bpvxw to bite; cf. Fritzsche on Sir. as above,
p. 308.) *
Bpvxo: [impf. ¢8pvyov]; to grind, gnash, with the
teeth: dddvras emi tiva, Acts vii. 54, (Job xvi. 93; Ps.
XXXiv. (xxxv.) 16; xxxvi. (xxxvil.) 12 for Dw pw
and D.2u Pan; intrans. without dddvras, [Hermipp. ap. ]
Plut. Pericl. 33 fin.; [Hipp. (see L. and 8.)]). Of the
same origin as Bpixw (cf. déy@ and déxw), to bite, chew ;
see Hermann on Soph. Philoct. 735; [Hilendt, Lex.
Soph. s. v. Bpvx |.*
Bevo ; 1. intrans. to abound, gush forth, teem with
Juices, (Lakin to BAvw, rvo ; see Lob. Techn. p. 22 sq.;
Curtius p. 531], cf. Germ. Brust, Briihe); often so fr.
Hom. down (Il. 17, 56 épvos dvOci Bpver). 2. more
rarely trans. to send forth abundantly: absol. to teem, 7
yn Bpver, Xen. venat. 5, 12; with an acc. of flowers,
fruits, Xdperes 66da Bpvovar, Anacr. 44, 2 (37, 2); to send
Sorth water, Jas. iii. 11.*
BpGpa, -ros, 7d, (Bpdw i. q. BiBpwaKw), that which is
eaten, food; (fr. Thuc. and Xen. down): 1 Co. viii. 8,
13; x. 3; Ro. xiv. 15, 20; plur.: Mt. xiv. 15; Mk. vii. 19;
LK. iii. 11; ix. 13; 1 Co. vi. 13; 1 Tim. iv. 3; Heb. xiii.
9; Bpopara x. ropara meats and drinks, Heb. ix. 10 (as
in Plat. legg. 11 p. 932e.; 6 p. 782 a.; Critias p. 115 b.;
in sing. Xen. Cyr. 5, 2,17). of the soul’s aliment, i. e.
either instruction, 1 Co, iii. 2 (as solid food opp. to 76
106
Bopos
yada), or that which delights and truly satisfies the mind,
Jn. iv. 34.*
Bpdotpos, -ov, (Bpaors), eatable: Lk. xxiv. 41. (Lev.
xix. 23; Ezek. xlvii.12. Aeschyl. Prom. 479; [Antiatt.
in Bekker, Anecd. p. 84, 25].) *
Bpdcts, -ews, 7, (Bpdw, BiBpacka) ; 1. the act of eat-
ing, (Tertull. esus): Bp@ots x. méows, Ro. xiv. 17 (on
which see Bagvheia, 3); with gen. of the obj. 1 Co. viii.
4 (Plat. de rep. 10 p. 619 c. maidwy adrod); in a wider
sense, corrosion: Mt. vi. 19 sq. 2. as almost every-
where in Grk. writ. that which is eaten, food, aliment:
Heb. xii. 16; efs Bpdow for food, 2 Co. ix. 10 (Sap. iv.
5); Bpaots cai [so WH txt. Tr mrg.; al. 4] wéats, Col. ii.
16, (Hom. Od. 1, 191; Plat. legg. 6, 783 ¢.; Xen. mem.
1, 38,15; {cf. Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 200 note; per
contra Mey. or Ellic. on Col. |. c.]). used of the soul’s
aliment — either that which refreshes it, Jn. iv. 32, or
nourishes and supports it unto life eternal, Jn. vi. 27, 55.*
Bpdockw, unused pres. whence pf. BeBpwxa; see Pi-
Bpocka.
Bv0itw; [pres. pass. BuOi€ouar]; (BuOds, gq. v.); to
plunge into the deep, to sink: date Bubi¢ecbat aita, of
ships (as Polyb. 2,10, 5; 16, 3,2; [Aristot., Diod., al.]),
so that they began to sink, Lk. v. 7; metaph. rua eis dhe
Opov [A. V. drown], 1 Tim. vi. 9.*
Bv8ds, -od, 6, the bottom (of a ditch or trench, Xen. oec.
19,11); thé bottom or depth of the sea, often in Grk. writ.
fr. Aeschyl. Prom. 432 down; the sea itself, the deep sea:
2 Co. xi. 25, as in Ps. evi. (evii.) 24; so Lat. profundum
in Lucan, Phars. 2, 680 “ profundi ora videns.” *
Bupcets, -€ws, 6, (Sipea a skin stripped off, a hide), a
tanner: Acts ix. 43; x. 6,32. (Artem. oneir. 4, 56.)
[Cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Tanner. ]*
Bicowvos, -n, -ov, (7 Biocos, q. v.; cf. dxdvOwos, dua-
pavrivos), made of fine linen; neut. Bicowoy sc. ipdriov
(W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)]), (a) fine linen (garment) :
Rev. xviii. 12 (Rec. Biooov), 16; xix. 8,14 [WH mrg.
AevkoBvoowov (for Bicowvov Aevxdv)]. (Gen. xli. 42;
1 Chr. xv. 27. Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Diod. 1, 85; Plut.,
al.) *
Bicoos, -ov, 7, [ Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v.], byssus, a
species of Egyptian flax (found also in India and Achaia)
—or linen made from it—very costly, delicate, soft,
white, and also of a yellow color, (see respecting it
Pollux, onomast. l. 7c. 17 § 75): Lk. xvi. 19; Rev. xviii.
12 Rec. (In Sept. generally for wy, also 733, cf. 1 Chr.
xv. 27; 2 Chr. v. 12; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Baumwolle ;
[BB.DD. s. vv. Byssus and Linen]. Joseph. antt. 3, 6,
1 sq.; 3, 7, 2; Philostr. vit. Apoll. 2, 20 [p. 71 ed.
Olear.]; on the flax of Achaia growing about Elis, cf.
Pausan. 5, 5,257, 217-7.) *
Bwpds, -od, 6, (see Bovvds), an elevated place; very
freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a raised place on
which to offer sacrifice, an altar: Acts xvii. 23. (Often
in Sept. for 9317.) * ,
107
TaB Baba
TaBBaea [-04 WH], 7, indecl., Gabbatha, Chald. xn33,
(Hebr. 33 the back); hence a raised place, an elevation,
(cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche, Ueber die Verdienste Tholucks
u.s.w. p. 102 sq.; Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. luth. Theol.
for 1876, p.605 ; [ Wiinsche, Neue Beitriige u.s.w. p. 560];
but see the somewhat diff. opinion of Keim, Jesu von
Nazara, iii. 865): Jn. xix. 18, where is added the
rather loose interpretation AvOdarporoyr, i. e. a stone pave-
ment, which some interpreters think was a portable
pavement, or the square blocks such as the Roman gen-
erals carried with them, to be laid down not only under
their seats in general, but also under those they occupied
in administering justice (cf. Suet. Jul. Caes. 46 and
Casaubon ad loc.). This opinion is opposed by the cir-
cumstance that John is not accustomed to add a Greek
interpretation except to the Hebr. names of fixed Jewish
localities, cf. v. 2; ix. 7; xix. 17; and that this is so in
the present case is evident from the fact that he has
said eis rdézoy, i. e. in a definite locality which had that
name. Besides, it cannot be proved that that custom of
the military commanders was followed also by the gov-
ernors of provinces residing in cities. Doubtless the
Chaldaic name was given to the spot from its shape,
the Greek name from the nature of its pavement.
Cf. below under AcOdorpwrov; Win. RWB. s. v. Litho-
stroton; [BB.DD.s. v. Gabbatha; Tholuck, Beitrige
zur Spracherklarang u.s.w. p. 119 sqq. ].*
TaBpraa, 6, (98923, fr. 12] strong man, hero, and oy
God), indecl., Gabriel, one of the angel-princes or chiefs
of the angels (Dan. viii. 16; ix. 21): Lk. i. 19, 26; see
dpxdyyedos [and reff. s. v. dyyedos, fin.; BB.DD. s. v.].*
yayypa.va, -ns, 7, (ypdw or ypuivw to gnaw, eat), a gan-
grene, a disease by which any part of the body suffering
from inflammation becomes so corrupted that, unless
a remedy be seasonably applied, the evil continually
spreads, attacks other parts, and at last eats away the
bones: 2 Tim. ii. 17 [where cf. Ellic.]. (Medical writ.
[cf. Wetst. ad l. c.]; Plut. diser. am. et adulat. c. 36.) *
T'48, 6, (3) fortune, cf. Gen. xxx. 11; [xlix. 19; on the
meaning of the word see B.D. s. v.]), indecl., Gad, the
seventh son of the patriarch Jacob, by Zila Leah’s
maid: Rev. vii. 5.*
Ta8apnvés, -7, -dv, (fr. the prop. name Tadapda; cf. the
adj. ABAnry, MaydaAnvn), of Gadara, a Gadarene. Gad-
ara was the capital of Perea (Joseph. b. j. 4, 7, 3),
situated opposite the southern extremity of the Lake
of Gennesaret to the south-east, but at some distance
from the lake on the banks of the river Hieromax (Plin.
h. n. 5, 16), 60 stadia from the city Tiberias (Joseph.
vita 65), inhabited chiefly by Gentiles (Joseph. antt. 17,
yalopuNdxtov
11,4); cf. Win. RWB.s. v. Gadara; Riietschi in Herzog
iv. p. 636 sq.; Kneucker in Schenkell ii. 313 sq.; Riehm,
HWB. p. 454; [BB.DD. s.v.]. yépa rév Tadapnvav
the country of the Gadarenes, Gadaris: Mk. v. 1 Ree.;
Lk. viii. 26 Ree., 37 RG [but here 7 Tepixwpos trav T.],
and in Mt. viii. 283 TTrWH; but the Mss. differ in
these pass.; see lepaonvoi and Tepyeonvot.*
yata, -ns, 7, a Persian word, adopted by the Greeks
and Latins (Cic. off. 2, 22), the royal treasury, treasure,
riches, (Curt. 8, 18, 5 pecuniam regiam, quam gazam
Persae vocant): Acts viii. 27. ({Theophr.], Polyb.,
Diod. 17, 35 and 64; Plut., al. Sept. 2 Esdr. v. 17;
Wilee20»))™
Téfa, -ys [B. 17 (15)], 9, (ty i.e. strong, fortified,
(cf. Valentia); the Y being represented by y, cf. mp}
Topuoppa), formerly a celebrated city of the Philistines,
situated on a hill near the southern border of the land
of Israel, between Raphia and Ascalon, twenty stadia
[‘at the most,’ Arrian.exp. Alex. 2, 26; “seven,” Strabo
16, 30] from the sea and eleven geographical miles from
Jerusalem. It was fortified and surrounded by a mas-
sive wall. Although held by a Persian garrison, Alex-
ander the Great captured it after a siege of two months,
but did not destroy it ([Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 4]; Diod.
17, 48; Plut. Alex. 25; Curt. 4,6 sq.). Afterwards, in
the year B. c. 96, Alexander Jannezus, king of the Jews,
took it after a year’s siege and destroyed it (Joseph.
antt. 18, 13, 3). Gabinius rebuilt it B. c. 58 (Joseph.
l.c. 14, 5, 8). Finally the emperor Augustus gave it
[B. c. 30] to Herod the Great (Joseph. I. c. 15, 7, 3),
after whose death it was annexed to Syria (Joseph. 1. c.
17, 11,4). Modern Ghuzzeh [or Ghazzeh], an unforti-
fied town, having an area of two English miles, with
between fifteen and sixteen thousand inhabitants. Men-
tioned in the N. T. in Acts viii. 26, where the words
avrn €otiv épnyos refer to 7 65és; Philip is bidden to take
the way which is épypos, solitary; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [W.
§ 18, 9 N. 3; B. 104 (91)]. A full history of the city
is given by Stark, Gaza u. d. philistdische Kiiste. Jena,
1852; a briefer account by Win. RWB. [see also BB.
DD.] s. v. Gaza; Arnold in Herzog iv. p. 671 sqq.*
yato-~puddxtoy, -ov, 70, (fr. yata, q. v., and d@vAakn ; hence
i. q. OnovavpopvAdkcov, Hesych.), a repository of treasure,
esp. of public treasure, a treasury: Esth. iii. 9; 1 Esdr.
viii. 18, 44; 1 Macc. iii. 28. In Sept. used for naw?
and 73¥) af apartments constructed in the courts of ‘the
temple, i in which not only the sacred offerings and things
needful for the temple service were kept, ‘but j in nen
also the priests, etc., dwelt: Neh. xiii. 7; x. 37 sqq.; of
the sacred treasury, in which not only treasure but also
Taios
the public records (1 Mace. xiv. 49; cf. Grimm ad loc.)
were stored, and the property of widows and orphans was
deposited (2 Mace. iii. 10; cf. Grimm ad loc.) : 1 Mace.
xiv. 49; 2 Mace. iii. 6, 28, 40; iv. 42; v.18. Josephus
speaks of both yafopvdakca (plur.) in the women’s court
of Herod’s temple, b. j. 5, 5, 2; 6, 5, 2; and 70 ya¢od.,
antt. 19, 6,1. Inthe N. T.,in Mk. xii. 41,43; Lk. xxi.
1; Jn. viii. 20 (ev 7d yafop. at, near, the treasury [yet
cf. W. § 48, a. 1¢.]), ro yag. seems to be used of that re-
ceptacle mentioned by the Rabbins to which were fitted
thirteen chests or boxes, NDI i. e. trumpets, so called
from their shape, and into which were put the contribu-
tions made voluntarily or paid yearly by the Jews for
the service of the temple and the support of the poor;
ef. Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. et Talm. p. 536 sq.; Liicke
[Tholuck, or Godet] on Jn. viii. 20; [B.D. Am. ed.s. v.
Treasury]. (Strabo 2 p. 319 [i. e. 7, 6, 1].)*
Téios [WH Laios (cf. I, +) ], -ov, 6, Gaius or Caius; the
name of a Christian 1. of Derbe: Actsxx.4. 2. of
Macedonia: Acts xix. 29. 3. of Corinth, Paul’s host
during his [second] sojourn there: Ro. xvi. 23; 1 Co. i.
14. 4. of an unknown Christian, to whom the third
Ep. of John was addressed: 3 Jn. vs.1. [B.D. Am. ed.
s.v. Gaius; Farrar, Early Days of Christianity, ii. 506.]*
yada, -Aaxros [cf. Lat. Jac; Curtius § 123], 70, [from
Hom. down], milk: 1 Co. ix. 7. Metaph. of the less
difficult truths of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 2; Heb.
vy. 12 sq. (Quintil. 2, 4, 5 “doctoribus hoe esse curae
velim, ut teneras adhuc mentes more nutricum mollius
alant et satiari velut quodam jucundioris disciplinae
lacte patiantur,” [cf. Siegfried, Philo von Alex. p. 329,
cf. p. 261]); of the word of God, by which souls newly
regenerate are healthfully nourished unto growth in the
Christian life, 1 Pet. ii. 2.*
Taddrns, -ov, 6, a Galatian, (see Tadaria): Gal. iii. 1.
(1 Mace. viii. 2; 2 Mace. viii. 20.) *
Tadaria, -as, 7, Galatia, Gallogrecia, a region of Asia
Minor, bounded by Paphlagonia, Pontus, Cappadocia,
Lycaonia, Phrygia, and Bithynia. It took its name from
those Gallic tribes that crossed into Asia Minor B. c. 278,
and after roaming about there for a time at length set-
tled down permanently in the above-mentioned region,
and intermarried with the Greeks. From B.c. 189 on,
though subject to the Romans, they were governed by
their own chiefs; but B.C. 24 [al. 25] their country was
formally reduced to a Roman province, (cf. Liv. 37, 8;
38, 16 and 18; Joseph. antt. 16,6; Strabo 12, 5,1 p. 567;
Flor. 2, 11 [i. e. 1, 27]): Gal. i..23.1,Co. xvis1 3, 2:Tim.
iv.10[T Tr mrg. PadXiav]; 1 Pet.i.1. Cf. Grimm, Ueb.
d. (keltische) Nationalitiit der kleinasiat. Galater, in
the Stud. u. Krit. for 1876, p. 199 sqq.; replied to by K.
Wieseler, Die deutsche Nationalitat d. kleinas. Galater.
Giitersl. 1877; [but see Hertzberg in the Stud. u. Krit.
for 1878, pp. 525-541; Bp. Lghtft. in his Com. on Gal.,
Dissertation i. also Intr. § 1].*
Tadarixés, -7, -dv, Galatian, belonging to Galatia: Acts
Xvi. 6; xviii. 23.*
yoAjvn, -s, 7, (adj. 6, ), yadnvds calm, cheerful), calm-
108
yapéw
ness, stillness of the sea, a calm: Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 39;
Lk. viii. 24. (From Hom. down.) *
Tadtdala,-as,}, Galilee, (fr. A993, 2K. xv. 29; an,
Josh. xx. 7; xxi. 32; 9) YW, 1 K. ix. 11, i.e. the carcle
or circuit, by which name even before the exile a cer-
tain district of northern Palestine was designated ; Sept.
YadvAaia) ; the name of a region of northern Palestine,
bounded on the north by Syria, on the west by Sidon,
Tyre, Ptolemais and their territories and the promontory
of Carmel, on the south by Samaria and on the east by
the Jordan. It was divided into Upper Galilee (extend-
ing from the borders of Tyre and Sidon to the sources of
the Jordan), and Lower Galilee (which, lower and more
level, embraced the lands of the tribes of Issachar and
Zebulun and the part of Naphtali bordering on the Sea of
Galilee): 7 dvw kat 7 karo TadwAaia (Joseph. b. j. 3, 3, 1,
where its boundaries are given). It was a very fertile
region, populous, having 204 towns and villages (Joseph.
vit. 45), and inasmuch as it had, esp. in the upper part,
many Gentiles among its inhabitants (Judg. i. 30-33;
Strabo 16, 34 p. 760), it was called, Mt. iv. 15, TadcAata
raev ebver (Is. viii. 23 (ix. 1)), and, 1 Mace. v. 15, TaduAaia
dAdopvAwv. Often mentioned in the Gospels, and three
times in the Acts, viz. ix. 31; x. 37; xiii. 31. [Cf. Mer-
rill, Galilee in the Time of Christ, Boston 1881.]
TadtXaios, -aia, -aiov, Galilean, a native of Galilee: Mt.
xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 70; Lk. xiii. 1 sq.; xxii. 59; xxiii. 6;
Jn aive-4 bt teAeE slap Lemire seve 37.*
TadAia, -as, 7, Gallia: 2 Tim. iv. 10 T Tr mrg., by
which is to be understood Galatia in Asia Minor or TaA-
Nia 7 éga, App. b. civ. 2,49. [See esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com.
on Gal. pp. 3, 31 (Am. ed. pp. 11, 37).]*
TadAlov, -avos, 6, Gallio, proconsul of Achaia, elder
brother of L. Annaeus Seneca the philosopher. His
original name was Marcus Annaeus Novatus, but after
his adoption into the family of Junius Gallio the rheto-
rician, he was called Gallio: Acts xviii. 12,14,17. [Cf.
B.D. Am. ed.; Farrar, St. Paul, i. 566 sq.]*
Topadiqd, 6, (9x93 recompense of God [God the
avenger, Fiirst]; Num. i. 10; ii. 20), indecl., Gamaliel
(distinguished by the Jews from his grandson of the
same name by the title 1pu, the elder), a Pharisee and
doctor of the law, son of R. Simeon, grandson of Hillel,
and teacher of the apostle Paul. He is said to have had
very great influence in the Sanhedrin, and to have died
eighteen years before the destruction of Jerusalem. A
man of permanent renown among the Jews: Acts v. 34;
xxii. 3. Cf. Gratz, Gesch. d. Juden, iii. p. 289 sqq.;
Schenkel, BL. ii. p. 328 sqq.; [esp. Alex.’s Kitto s. v.
Gamaliel I. (cf. Farrar, St. Paul, i. 44 and exe. v.)].*
yopéw, -&; impf. éyduouv (Lk. xvii. 27); 1 aor. éynua
(the classic form, [Mt. xxii. 25 LT Tr WH]; Lk. xiv.
20; 1 Co. vii. 28° RG, 28°) and é¢ydaunaa (the later form,
Mt. v. 32; [xxii. 25 RG]; Mk. vi.17; x. 11; 1 Co. vii.
9, [28° L T Tr WH], 33); pf. yeyaunea; 1 aor. pass.
eyannOny; (cf. W. 84 (80); B.55 (48); Bitm. Ausf. Spr.
ii. 134; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 742; [Veitch s. v.]); 1.
used of the man, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, to lead
yapitoo
in marriage, take to wife; a. with the addition of yuvaixa
or other ace. : Mt. v. 32 [here WH br. the cl.]; xix. 9;
Mk. vi. 17; x.11; Lk. xiv. 20; xvi. 18. b. without a
case, absol. to get married, to marry, [ef. B. 145 (127)]:
Mt. xix. 10; xxii. 25, 30; xxiv. 38; Mk. xii. 25; Lk. xvii.
27; xx. 34 sq.; 1 Co. vil. 28, 33; (Ael. v. h. 4, 1; of yeya-
pyxores, Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4; opp. to dyawor, Xen. symp.
9,7). Pass. and Mid. yayéopai run, of women [Lat. nu-
bere alicui, cf. B. § 133, 8], to give one’s self in marriage
[W. § 38, 3]: 1 aor. pass., Mk. x. 12 (where L T Tr WH
yapnon dor for RG yaun67 add); 1 Co. vii. 39. P23,
contrary to Grk. usage, the Act. yayeiv is used of women,
to give one’s self in marriage; and a. with the acc.:
Mk. x. 12 L T Tr WH (see above); b. absol.: 1 Co.
vii. 28, 34 (4 yaynoaca, opp. to 7 dyapos) ; 1 Tim. v. 11,
14, 3. absol. of both sexes: 1 Tim. iv. 3; 1 Co. vii.
9 sq. 36 (yapeir@oar, sc. the virgin and he who seeks her
to wife). In the O. T. yapeiy occurs only in 2 Mace.
Xiv. 25."
youl{w; [Pass., pres. yapifouar; impf. éeyapecdunr];
(yapos); to give a daughter in marriage: 1 Co. vii. 38*
[L T Tr WH, 38°] GLT Tr WH; Pass.: Mt. xxii. 30
eli Wels xxiv. 38) WH); Mk. xii 25:5) Eko xvii:
27; xx. 35 [WH mrg. yapioxovra]. (The word is men-
tioned in Apoll. de constr. 3, 31 p. 280, 10 ed. Bekk.)
[Comp.: éx-yapifo. | *
yaploke, i. q. yauiCo, q. v. [Mt. xxiv. 38 Lchm.]; Pass.
[pres. yapioxopat]; Mk. xii. 25 RG; Lk. xx. 34 LT Tr
WH, [35 WH mrg.; cf. W. 92 (88); and Tdf.’s note
on Mt. xxii. 30]. (Aristot. pol. 7, 14,4 ete.) [Come.:
ex-yapioka. | *
ydpos, -ov, 6, [prob. fr. r. gam to bind, unite; Curtius
p- 546 sq.], as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.down; = 1. a wed-
ding or marriage-festival: Jn. ii. 1 sq.; Rev. xix. 7 (un-
der the figure of a marriage here is represented the inti-
mate and everlasting union of Christ, at his return from
heaven, with his church) ; 16 detrvoy Tov yapou, ibid. 9 (a
symbol of the future blessings of the Messiah’s kingdom) ;
esp. a wedding-banquet, a marriage-feast: Mt. xxii. 8, 10
{here T WH Tr mrg. vuppor], 11, 12; plur. (referring
apparently to the several acts of feasting), Mt. xxii. 2
sqq. 9; xxv. 10; Lk. xii. 36; xiv. 8, (cf. W. § 27, 3; B.
23 (21)). 2. marriage, matrimony: Heb. xiii. 4.*
yp, a conjunction, which acc. to its composition, yé
and dpa (i. q. dp), is properly a particle of affirma-
tion and conclusion, denoting truly therefore, verily
as the case stands, “ the thing is first affirmed by the par-
ticle yé, and then is referred to what precedes by the
force of the particle dpa” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p.
232; cf. Kihner ii. p. 724; [Jelf § 786; W. 445 (415)
sq.]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently
the reason and nature of something previously men-
tioned are set forth, it comes to pass that, by the use
of this particle, either the reason and cause of a forego-
ing statement is added, whence arises the causal or
argumentative force of the particle, for (Lat. nam,
enim; Germ. denn); or some previous declaration is ex-
109
yap
Sor, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet, Germ. ndmlich).
Thus the force of the particle is either conclusive,
or demonstrative, or explicative and declara-
tory; cf. Rost in Passow’s Lex. i. p. 535 sqq.; Kiihner
il. pp. 724 sqq. 852 sqq.; [ef. L. andS.s. v.]. The use
of the particle in the N. T. does not differ from that in
the classics.
I. Its primary and original Conclusive force is
seen in questions (in Grk. writ. also in exclamations) and
answers expressed with emotion; where, acc. to the con-
nexion, it may be freely represented by assuredly, verily,
Sorsooth, why, then, etc. : év yap rovra ete. ye profess not
to know whence he is; herein then is assuredly a mar-
vellous thing, why, herein etc. Jn. ix. 30; od ydp, ddda
etc. by no means in this state of things, nay verily, but
etc. Acts xvi. 37; certainly, if that is the case, 1 Co. viii.
11 LT Tr WH. It is joined to interrogative particles
and pronouns: ya yap etc. Jn. vii. 41 (do ye then sup-
pose that the Christ comes out of Galilee? What, doth
the Christ, etc.?); py yap... ov«, 1 Co. xi. 22 (what!
since ye are so eager to eat and drink, have ye not, etc. ?) ;
tis yap, Ti ydp: Mt. xxvii. 23 (ti yap kakdy énoingev, ye
demand that he be crucified like a malefactor, Why, what
evil hath he done?); Mt. ix. 5 (your thoughts are evil;
which then do ye suppose to be the easier, etc. ?) ; Mt. xvi.
26; xxiii. 17,19; Lk.ix. 25; Acts xix. 35; ri ydp; for ré
yap éort, what then ? i.e. what, under these circumstances,
ought to be the conclusion? Phil. i. 18 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.];
mas yap, Acts viii. 31; cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 245 sqq.; Kiihner
li. p. 726; [Jelf ii. p. 608]; W. 447 (416). Here belongs
also the vexed passage Lk. xviii. 14 7 yap ékxeivos (soG T
Tr mrg., but L WH Tr txt. map’ éxeivov) or do ye sup-
pose then that that man went down approved of God?
cf. W. 241 (226).
II. It adduces the Cause or gives the Reason of
a preceding statement or opinion ; 1. univ.: Mt. ii.
Deleyae 24 eM see 2 2-8 xevG ie Uke 14d, 18s xox dwe the
Q5iew Actaiie 25.3 hori. 9, 11) 1 Co. xi. 55 Heb. ii. Sigal In:
ii. 19; Rev. i. 3, and very often. In Jn. iv. 44 yap
assigns the reason why now at length Jesus betook him-
self into Galilee; for the authority denied to a prophet
in his own country (Galilee), he had previously to seek
and obtain among strangers; cf. 45; Meyer [yet see ed.
6 (Weiss)] ad loc.; Strauss, Leben Jesu, i. 725 ed. 3;
Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 385 sq. ed. 1 [Am. trans. pp.
100, 168]; Ewald, Jahrbb. d. bibl. Wissensch. x. p. 108
sqq- 2. Often the sentences are connected in such a
way that either some particular statement is established
by a general proposition (‘the particular by the uni-
versal’), as in Mt. vii. 8; xiii. 12; xxii. 14; Mk. iv. 22,
25; Jn. iii. 20; 1 Co. xii. 12; Heb. v. 13, etc.; or what
has been stated generally, is proved to be correctly
stated by a particular instance (‘the universal by the
particular’): Mk. vii. 10; Lk. xii. 52, 58; Ro. vii. 2; 1
Comie26exii- 8: 3. To sentences in which some-
thing is commanded or forbidden, yap annexes the rea-
son why the thing must either be done or avoided: Mt.
plained, whence ydp takes on an ex plicative force: | i. 20 sq.; ii. 20; iii. 9; vii. 2; Ro. xiii. 11; Col. iii. 3;
yap
1 Th. iv. 3; Heb. ii. 2, and very often. In Phil. ii. 13
ydp connects the verse with vs. 12 thus: work out your
salvation with most intense earnestness, for nothing
short of this accords with God’s saving efficiency within
your souls, to whom you owe both the good desire and
the power to execute that desire. 4. To questions,
yap annexes the reason why the question is asked: Mt.
ii. 2 (we ask this with good reason, for we have seen
the star which announces his birth); Mt. xxii. 28; Ro.
xiv. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Gal. i. 10. 5. Frequently the
statement which contains the cause is interrogative; ris,
ti ydp: Lk. xxii. 27; Ro. iv. 3; xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. 16; vii.
16; Heb.i.5; xii. 7; ri ydp for ri ydp éots, Ro. iii. 3 (cf.
Fritzsche ad loc.; [Ellic. on Phil. i. 18]); iva ré ydp, 1
Co. x. 29; mola ydp, Jas. iv. 14 [WH txt. om. Tr br. yap].
6. Sometimes in answers it is so used to make good the
substance of a preceding question that it can be ren-
dered yea, assuredly: 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Th. ii. 20; cf.
Kuhner ii. p. 724. 7. Sometimes it confirms, not a sin-
gle statement, but the point of an entire discussion: Ro.
ii. 25 (it is no advantage to a wicked Jew, for ete.). On
the other hand, it may so confirm but a single thought
as to involve the force of asseveration and be rendered
assuredly, yea: Ro. xv. 27 (evddxnoav ydp); so also kal
yap, Phil. ii. 27. 8. It is often said that the sentence
of which yap introduces the cause, or renders the reason,
is not expressed, but must be gathered from the con-
text and supplied in thought. But that this ellipsis
is wholly imaginary is clearly shown by Klotz ad Devar.
ii. 1 p. 236 sq., cf. W. 446 (415) sq. The particle is
everywhere used in reference to something expressly
stated. Suffice it to append a very few examples; the
true nature of many others is shown under the remain-
ing heads of this article: In Mt. v. 12 before ydp some
supply ‘nor does this happen to you alone’; but the rea-
son is added why a great reward in heaven is reserved
for those who suffer persecution, which reason consists
in this, that the prophets also suffered persecution, and
that their reward is great no one can doubt. In Ro. viii.
18 some have supplied ‘do not shrink from this suffer-
ing with Christ’; but on the use of yap here, see III. a.
below. On Mk. vii. 28 [T Tr WH om. L br. ydp],
where before kai yap some supply ‘but help me,’ or ‘yet
we do not suffer even the dogs to perish with hunger,’
see 10 b. below. In Acts ix. 11 before yap many supply
‘he will listen to thee’; but it introduces the reason for
the preceding command. 9. When in successive state-
ments yap is repeated twice or thrice, or even four or five
times, either a. one and the same thought is confirmed
by as many arguments, each having its own force, as there
are repetitions of the particle [Mey. denies the codrdi-
nate use of yap in the N.T., asserting that the first is
argumentative, the second ex plicative, see his Comm.
on the pass. to follow, also on Ro. viii. 6]: Mt. vi. 32; Ro.
xvi. 18 sq.; or b. every succeeding statement contains
the reason for its immediate predecessor, so that the state-
ments are subordinate one to another: Mk. vi. 52; Mt.
xvi. 25-27; Jn. iii. 19 sq.; v.21 sq.; Acts ii. 15; Ro. iv.
t
110
yé
13-15 ; viii. 2 sq. 5 sq.; 1 Co. iii. 8.sq.; ix. 15-17 (where
five times in GL T Tr WH); 1 Co. xvi. 7; Jas. ii. 10,
etc.; or c. it is repeated in a different sense: Mk. ix.
39-41; Ro. v. 6 sq. (where cf. W. 453 (422)); x. 2-5
(four times) ; Jas. iv.14 [WH txt. om. Tr br. the first yap,
L WH mrg. om. the second]. 10. xai ydp (on which cf.
Kiihner ii. p. 854 sq.; W.448 (417); [Ellic. on 2 Thess.
iii. 10]) is a. for, and truly, (etenim, namque, [the sim-
ple rendering for is regarded as inexact by many; cf.
Mey. on 2 Co. xiii. 4 and see Hartung, Partikeln, 1.137 sq. ;
Kriiger § 69, 32, 21]): Mk. xiv. 70; Lk. xxii. 37 [L Tr
br. yap]; 1 Co. v. 7; xi. 9; xii. 13. b. for also, for even,
(nam etiam): Mt. viii. 9; Mk. x. 45; Lk. vi.32; Jn. iv.
45; 1Co. xii. 14,ete. In Mk. vii. 28 xai yap [RG L br. }
ra kuvapia etc. the woman, by adducing an example, con-
firms what Christ had said, but the example is of such a
sort as also to prove that her request ought to be granted.
ré yap for indeed (Germ. denn ja): Ro. vii. 7; cf. Fritz-
sche ad loc.; W. 448 (417). idov yap, see under idov.
III. It serves to explain, make clear, illus-
trate, a preceding thought or word: fori. q. that 1s,
namely ; a. so that it begins an exposition of the
thing just announced [cf. W. 454 (423) sq.]: Mt. i. 18
[RG]; xix.12; Lk. xi. 30; xviii. 32. In Ro. viii. 18 yap
introduces a statement setting forth the nature of the
ovvdogéacOjva just mentioned. _b. so that the explana-
tion is intercalated into the discourse, or even added by
way of appendix: Mt. iv. 18; Mk.i. 16; ii. 15; v. 42;
Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. xvi. 5. In Mk. xvi. 4 the information
nv yap péeyas opddpa is added to throw light on all that
has been previously said (in vs. 3 sq.) about the stone.
Iv. As respects Position: yap never occupies the
first place in a sentence, but the second, or third, or even
the fourth (6 rod eot yap vids, 2 Co. i. 19 — acc. to true
text). Moreover, ‘not the number but the nature
of the word after which it stands is the point to be no-
ticed,” Hermann on Soph. Phil. 14387.
yaortp, -pds (poet. -épos), 7, in Grk. auth. fr. Hom.
down ; in Sept. for }03; 1. the belly; by meton. of
the whole for a part, 2. Lat. uterus, the womb: év ya-
otpt éxeu to be with child [see éya, I. 1 b.]: Mt. i. 18, 23;
oda MWe sabia Nr SI eSoce VE MMi ee live weit
2; (in Sept. for 7379, Gen. xvi. 4 sq.; xxxviii. 25; Is.
vii. 14, ete.; Hdt. 3, 32 and vit. Hom. 2; Artem. oneir.
2,18 p. 105; 3, 32 p.177; Pausan., Hdian., al.); ova-
AapBaveoOa €v yaorpi to conceive, become pregnant, Lk.
soul. 3. the stomach; by synecdoche a glutton, gor-
mandizer, aman who is as it were all stomach, Hes. theog.
26 (so also yaorpis, Arstph. av. 1604; Ael.v. h. 1, 28; and
Lat. venter in Lucil. sat. 2, 24 ed. Gerl. ‘ vivite ventres’) :
yaorepes apyai, Tit. i. 12; see dpyds, b.*
yé, an enclitic particle, answering exactly to no one
word in Lat. or Eng.; used by the bibl. writ. much more
rarely than by Grk. writ. How the Greeks use it, is
shown by (among others) Hermann ad Vig. p. 822 sqq.:
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 272 sqq.; Rost in Passow’s Lex.
i. p. 538 sqq.; [L. and S.s. v.; 7. S. Evans in Journ.
of class. and sacr. Philol. for 1857, p. 187 sqq.J. It indi-
vyé |
cates that the meaning of the word to which it belongs
has especial prominence, and therefore that that word
is to be distinguished from the rest of the sentence and
uttered with greater emphasis. This distinction “can
be made in two ways, by mentioning either the least
important or the most; thus it happens that yé seems
to have contrary significations: at least and even” (Her-
mann l.c¢. p. 822). 1. where what is least is indi-
cated ; indeed, truly, at least: Sva ye tiv avaidecay, Lk. xi.
8 (where, since the force of the statement lies in the
substantive not in the preposition, the Greek should have
read a thy ye dvaid., cf. Klotz l.c. p. 327; Rost 1. c. p.
542; [L.and S. s. v. [V.]); dud ye 70 mapéyewv roe Kdrrov, at
least for this reason, that she troubleth me [A. V. yet
because etc.], Lk. xviii. 5 (better Greek dia 16 ye ete.).
2. where what is most or greatest is indicated; even:
6s ye the very one who etce., precisely he who etc. (Germ.
der es ja ist, welcher etc.), Ro. viii. 32; cf. Klotz 1. ¢. p.
305; Matthiae, Lex. Euripid. i. p. 613 sq. 3. joined
to other particles it strengthens their force; a. adda ye
[so most edd.] or d\Adye [Grsb.] (cf. W. § 5, 2): Lk.
xxiv. 21; 1 Co. ix. 2; see adda, 1.10. b. dpa ye or dipaye,
see dpa, 4. dpa ye, see dpa, 1. c. etye[soGT, but L Tr
WH <i ye: cf. W. u.s.; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 123],
foll. by the indic. if indeed, seeing that, “of a thing be-
lieved to be correctly assumed” (Herm. ad Vig. p. 831;
ef. Fritzsche, Praeliminarien u.s.w. p. 67 sqq.; Anger,
Laodicenerbrief, p. 46; [W.448 (417 sq.). Others hold
that Hermann’s statement does not apply to the N. T.
instances. Acc. to Meyer (see notes on 2 Co. v. 3; Eph.
ili. 2; Gal. iii. 4) the certainty of the assumption resides
not in the particle but in the context; so Ellicott (on Gal.
l.c., Eph. 1.c.); cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1.c.; Col.i. 23. Her-
mann’s canon, though assented to by Bornemann (Cyrop.
2, 2, 3 p. 132), Stallbaum (Meno p. 36), al., is qualified
by Bdumlein (Partikeln, p. 64 sq.), who holds that ye
often has no other effect than to emphasize the condition
expressed by e?; cf. also Winer ed. Moulton p. 561]), 7,
that is to say; on the assumption that, (see etrep s. v. ei, HI.
13): Eph. iii. 2; iv. 21; Col. i. 23; with «ai added, if
that also, if it be indeed, (Germ. wenn denn auch): eye
[L Tr WH mrg. ef rep] kai evdvodpevor, od yupvoi evped.
if indeed we shall be found actually clothed (with a new
body), not naked, 2 Co. v. 3 (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; etye kai
eixy Sc. rooaira énaéere, if indeed, as I believe, ye have
experienced such benefits in vain, and have not already
received harm from your inclination to Judaism, Gal. iii.
4 [yet cf. Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft., al. adloc.]. d. ei d¢
phye Lor ef dé pn ye Lchm. Treg.] (also in Plat., Arstph.,
Plut., al.; ef. Bornemann, Scholia ad Lue. p. 95 ; Klotz ad
Devar. ii. 2 p. 527), stronger than e/ 6é py [B. 393 (336
sq.); cf. W. 583 (548); 605 (563) ; Mey. on 2 Cor. xi. 16],
a. after affirmative sentences, but unless perchance, but
if not : Mt. vi. 1; Lk. x. 6; xiii. 9. B. after negative sen-
tences, otherwise, else, in the contrary event: Mit xcelivae
Lk. v. 36 sq.; xiv. 32; 2Co.xi.16. e. xaiye [so GT,
but L Tr WH xai ye; cf. reff. under etye above], (cf.
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 319; [W.438 (408)]), a. and at
aNNbA
Tebonpavij
least: Lk. xix. 42 [Tr txt. WH om. L Trmrg. br.].
and truly, yea indeed, yea and: Acts ii. 18; xvii. 27 LT
Tr WH. f. xairovye [so G'T WH, but L xairou ye, Tr
kai tou ye; cf. reff. under c. above. Cf. Klotz ad Devar.
li. 2 p. 654; W. 444 (413)], although indeed, and yet
indeed: Jn. iv. 2; also in Acts xiv. 17 [RG]; xvii. 27
Rec. g. pevodvye see in its place.
[and in its place ].*
Tedemv, 6, indecl. [in the Bible (cf. B. p. 15 (14)), and
in Suidas (e. g. 1737 a.) ; but] in Joseph. antt. 5, 6, [3 and]
4 Tedewv, -@vos, (j\13 cutting off, [al. tree-feller i. e.
mighty warrior], fr. y1), Gideon, a leader of the Israel-
ites, who delivered them from the power of the Midianites
(Judg. vi—viii.) : Heb. xi. 32 [where A. V. unfortunately
follows the Grk. spelling Ge deon].*
yéevva [al. would accent yeévva, deriving it through the
Chaldee. In Mk. ix. 45 Rec. yéeva], -ns [B. 17 (15)],
7, (fr. D377 7°43, Neh. xi. 30; more fully 03-73 873, Josh.
xv. 8; xviii. 16; 2 Chr. xxviii. 3; Jer. vii. 32; D33-°33 74,
2 K. xxiii. 10 K’thibh; Chald. Di, the valley of the
son of lamentation, or of the sons of lamentation, the
valley of lamentation, 037 being used for 053 lamenta-
tion; see Hiller, Onomasticum; cf. Hitzig [and Graf] on
Jer. vii. 31; [Bottcher, De Inferis, i. p. 82 sqq.]; acc. to
the com. opinion 037] is the name of a man), Gehenna,
the name of a valley on the S. and E. of Jerusalem [yet
apparently beginning on the W., cf. Josh. xv. 8; Pressel
in Herzog s. v.], which was so called from the cries of
the little children who were thrown into the fiery arms
of Moloch [q.v.],i. e. of an idol having the form of a
bull. The Jews so abhorred the place after these horri-
ble sacrifices had been abolished by king Josiah (2 K.
xxiii. 10), that they cast into it not only all manner of
refuse, but even the dead bodies of animals and of un-
buried criminals who had been executed. And since
fires were always needed to consume the dead bodies,
that the air might not become tainted by their putrefac- .
tion, it came to pass that the place was called yéevva rod
mupds [this common explanation of the descriptive gen.
tov mupds is found in Rabbi David Kimchi (fl. ¢. a. p.
1200) on Ps. xxvii. 13. Some suppose the gen. to refer
not to purifying fires but to the fires of Molech; others
regard it as the natural symbol of penalty (cf. Lev. x. 2;
Num. xvi. 35; 2 K.i.; Ps. xi. 6; also Mt. iii. 11; xiii. 42;
2Th. i. 8, etc.). See Boticher,u.s. p.84; Mey., (Thol.,)
Wetst. on Mt. v. 22]; and then this name was transferred
to that place in Hades where the wicked after death will
suffer punishment: Mt. v. 22, 29 sq.; x. 28; Lk. xii. 5;
Mk. ix. 43, 45; Jas. ili. 6; yéevva rov mupéds, Mt. v. 22;
xviii. 9; Mk. ix.47[RG Trmrg. br.]; xpiows tis yeevrys,
Mt. xxiii. 33; vids tHs yeévyns, worthy of punishment in
Gehenna, Mt. xxiii. 15. Further, cf. Dillmann, Buch
Henoch, 27, 1 sq. p. 131 sq.; [B. D. Am. ed.; Béticher,
u. s. p. 80 sqq.; Hamburger, Real-Encycl., Abth. I. s. v.
Holle; Bartlett, Life and Death eternal, App. H.].*
TeOonpava, or Medonuavet (T WH), or Pebonnavet (L
Tr); [on the accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; W.
§6,1m.; indecl. B. 15 (14)], (fr. nj press, and Nynw ai),
De pnreye, see prt,
yelT@v
Gethsemane, the name of a ‘ place’ (yepiov [an enclosure
or landed property]) at the foot of the Mount of Olives,
beyond the torrent Kidron: Mt. xxvi. 36; Mk. xiv. 32.
[B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]*
yeltwy, -ovos, 6, 7), [fr. yj, hence originally ‘of the same
land,’ cf. Curtius § 132], fr. Hom. down, a neighbor : Lk.
dhe WAR sae, Gp OR Ahi tee
yeddw, -@; fut. yeddow (in Grk. writ. more com. yeAdoo-
pat [B. 53 (46); W.84 (80)]); [fr. Hom. down]; to laugh:
Lk. vi. 21 (opp. to kAaiw), 25. [Comp.: xara-yehdo. ]*
yédus, -wros, 6, laughter: Jas.iv.9. [From Hom. down. }*
yenitw: 1 aor. éyéuica; Pass., [pres. yeui¢ouar]; 1 aor.
eyeptoOnv; (yéuo, q- v.); to fill, fill full; a. absol. in
pass.: Mk. iv. 37; Lk. xiv. 23. b. ri rwvos, to fill a thing
full of something : Mk. xv. 36; Jn. ii. 7; vi. 13; Rev. xv.
8, (Aeschyl. Ag. 443; al.); ri dad tuvos, of that which
is used for filling, Lk. xv. 16 [not WH Trmrg.]; also in
the same sense ri é« twos, Rev. viii. 5; [ef. Lk. xv. 16 in
WH mrg.], (}9 non, Ex. xvi. 32; Jer. li. 34, ete. [ef.
W. § 30, 8b.; B. 163 (143)])-*
yéno, defect. verb, used only in pres. and impf., [in
N.T. only in pres. indic. and ptep.1; to be full, filled full ;
a. ruvds (as generally in Grk. writ.) : Mt. xxiii. 25 Lchm.,
27; Lk. xi. 89; Ro. iii. 14 (fr. Ps. ix. 28-(x.7)) ; Rev. iv.
6,8; v.8; xv. 7; xvii. 3 R G (see below), 4; xxi. 9. b.
ék rivos: Mt. xxiii. 25 (yéuovow e€ dprayns [Lom. Tr br.
e&] their contents are derived from plunder; see yepiga,
b. [and reff. there]). c. Hebraistically (see mAnpdw, 1
[ef. B. 164 (143); W. § 30, 8 b.]), with acc. of the mate-
rial, yéwovra [Treg. yeuov ra] dvdpuara Bacdypias, Rev.
xvii. 3 [LT Tr WH (see above and cf. B.80 (70)) ].*
yeved., -as, 7, (TENQ, yivoua [cf. Curtius p.610]) ; Sept.
often for 11; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 1. abe-
getting, birth, nativity: Hdt. 3, 33; Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 8, ete. ;
(others make the collective sense the primary signif.,
see Curtius u. s.]. 2. passively, that which has been
begotten, men of the same stock, a family; a. prop. as
early as Hom.; equiv. to MMawWN, Gen. xxxi. 3, etc.;
oa ery ‘PaxdBny k. thy yeveay adtis, Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 5.
the several ranks in a natural descent, the successive mem-
bers of a genealogy: Mt. i. 17, (EB8dun yeved odrds eorw
and Tov mpewrov, Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 2). b. metaph. a
race of men very like each other in endowments, pursuits,
character ; and esp. in a bad sense a perverse race: Mt.
xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41; xvi. 8; [Acts ii. 40].
3. the whole multitude of men living at the same time: Mt.
xxiv. 34; Mk. xiii. 30; Lk. i. 48 (waoae ai yeveal) ; Xxi.
32; Phil. ii. 15; used esp. of the Jewish race living at
one and the same period: Mt. xi. 16; xii. 39,41 sq. 45;
xvi. 4; xxiii. 36; Mk. viii. 12, 838; Lk. xi. 29 sq. 32, 50
sq-; xvii. 25; Acts xiii. 36; Heb. iii. 10; aOpero. ris
yeveas tavtns, Lk. vii. 31; dvdpes ris yev. rad. Lk. xi. 31 ;
ty O€ yevedv adrod tis Sinynoerat, who can describe the
wickedness of the present generation, Acts viii. 33 (fr.
Is. liii. 8 Sept.) [but cf. Mey. ad loc.]. 4. an age (i.e.
the time ordinarily occupied by each successive genera-
tion), the space of from 30 to 33 years (Hat. 2, 142 et al. ;
Heraclit. in Plut. def. orac. ¢. 11), or 6 xpévos, ev 6 yev-
112
yeveTH
vavra mapéxer Tov e& avTod yeyevynpevoy 6 yevvnoas (Plut.
l.c.); in the N. T. com. in plur. : Eph. iii. 5 [W. § 33,
9 a.; B. 186 (161)]; mapwxnyevats yeveais in ages gone
by, Acts xiv. 16; amd trav yeveav for ages, since the gener-
ations began, Col. i. 26; &« yevedv dpxaiwy from the gen-
erations of old, from ancient times down, Acts xv. 21; eis
yeveds yevedv unto generations of generations, through
all ages, for ever, (a phrase which assumes that the longer
ages are made up of shorter; see aiav, 1 a.): Lk. i. 50
RL(OW 17, Is. li. 8) ; els yeveds k. yeveds unto genera-
tions and generations, ibid. T Tr WH equiv. to 111) 9,
Ps. Ixxxix. 2sq.; Is. xxxiv.17; very often in Sept.; [add,
els maaas Tas yeveds TOU aldvos TV aiavar, Eph. iii. 21, cf.
Ellic. ad loc.] (yevea is used of a century in Gen. xv. 16,
cf. Knobel ad loc., and on the senses of the word see the
full remarks of Keim iii. 206 [v. 245 Eng. trans. ]).*
yeveadoyéw, -: [pres. pass. yeveadoyodpar]; to act the
genealogist (yeved and déyw), to recount a family’s origin
and lineage, trace ancestry, (often in Hdt.; Xen., Plat.,
Theophr., Lcian., Ael., al.; [Sept. 1 Chr. v. 2]); pass. to
draw one’s origin, derwwe one’s pedigree: &« twos, Heb.
vii. 6.*
yeveadoyla, -as, 7, a genealogy, a record of descent or
lineage, (Plat. Crat. p. 396 c.; Polyb. 9, 2,1; Dion. Hal.
antt. 1,11; [al.]. Sept. [edd. Ald., Compl.] 1 Chr. vii.
5, 7; ix. 22; [iv.33 Compl.; Ezra viii. 1 ib.]); in plur.
of the orders of wons, according to the doctrine of the
Gnostics: 1 Tim.i.4; Tit. iii. 9; cf. De Wette on Tit. i.
14 [substantially reproduced by Alf. on 1 Tim. 1.¢.; see
also Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe, pp. 126 sq. 134 sq. 143].*
yevéora, -wv, ra [cf. W. 176 (166)], (fr. the adj. yeve-
ovos fr. yéveois), a birth-day celebration, a birth-day feast :
Mk. vi. 21; Mt. xiv. 6; (Alciphr. epp. 3, 18 and 55; Dio
Cass. 47, 18, etc.; 9 yevéeotos nuepa, Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 7).
The earlier Greeks used yevéoua of funeral commemora-
tions, a festival commemorative of a deceased friend
(Lat. feriae denicales), see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 103 sq.;
[Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 184; W. 24 (23)]. Cf.
Keim ii. p. 516 [iv. 223 Eng. trans. ].*
yéverts, -ews, 7, (TEN [Curtius § 128]), in Grk. writ.
for the first time in Hom. Il. 14, 201 [ef. 246]; 1.
source, origin: BiBdos yevéoeds Tivos a book of one’s lin-
eage, i. e. in which his ancestry or his progeny are enu-
merated (i. g. nit 750, Gen. v. 1, ete.), [Mt. i. 1].
2. used of Dirth, nativity, in Mt. i. 18 and Lk. i, 14, for
Rec. yévnors (jpépar rhs yevéreds pov equiv. to df’ ob
eyernOnv, Judith xii. 18 cf. 20); mpdcwmroy ris yevéreas
his native (natural) face, Jas. i. 23. 3. of that which
follows origin, viz. existence, life: 6 rpoxds ths yevérews
the wheel [cf. Eng. “machinery ”] of life, Jas. iii. 6 (cf.
Grimm on Sap. vii. 5); but others explain it the wheel
of human origin which as soon as men are born begins
to run, i. e. the course [cf. Eng. “round ”’] of life.*
yeverh, -s, 9, (TENQ, yivouac), (cf. Germ. die Geworden-
heit), birth; hence very often ék« yeverjs from birth on
(Hom. Il. 24, 535; Aristot. eth. Nic. 6, 13, 1 p- 1144°, 6
ete.; Polyb. 3, 20,4; Diod. 5, 32, al.; Sept. Lev. xxv. 47):
Jn. ix. 1
yevnwa
yévnpa, -aros, 76, (fr. yivouar), a form supported by the
dest Mss. in Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xii. 18; xxii.
18; 2 Co. ix. 10, and therefore adopted by T [see his
Proleg. p. 79] Tr [L WH (see WH. App. p. 148 and be-
low) ], printed by Grsb. only in Lk. xii. 18; 2 Co. ix. 10,
but given by no grammarian, and therefore attributed by
Fritzsche (on Mk. p. 619 sq.) to the carelessness of tran-
scribers, — for Rec. [but in Lk. l. c. Rs reads yerny.] yer
ympa, q.v. In Mk. xiv. 25 Lchm. has retained the com-
mon reading; [and in Lk. xii. 18 Tr txt. WH have
oirov. In Ezek. xxxvi. 30 codd. A B read yevjyara].*
yevvaw, -O ; fut. yevrnow; 1 aor. éyévynoa; pf. yeyévynka;
[Pass., pres. yevvaopat, -Gyar}; pf. yeyévynpar; 1 aor.
éyevv Onv; (fr. yevva, poetic for yévos); in Grk. writ. fr.
Pind. down; in Sept. for 39°; to beget; 1. properly :
of men begetting children, Mt. i. 1-16; Acts vii. 8, 29;
foll. by é« with gen. of the mother, Mt. i. 3, 5, 6; more
rarely of women giving birth to children, Lk. i. 13, 57;
xxill. 29; Jn. xvi. 21; eis SovAciay to bear a child unto
bondage, that will be a slave, Gal. iv. 24, ([Xen. de rep.
Lac. 1, 3]; Leian. de sacrif. 6; Plut. de liber. educ. 5;
al.; Sept. Is. xvi. 9; 4 Mace. x. 2, etc.). Pass. to be
begotten: +o ev airy yevynbey that which is begotten in
her womb, Mt. i. 20; to be born: Mt. ii. 1, 4 [W. 266
(250) ; B. 203 (176) ]; xix.12; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21; Lk.
i. 35; Jn. iii. 4; [Acts vii. 20]; Ro. ix. 11; Heb. xi. 23;
with the addition eis roy kéopov, Jn. xvi. 21; foll. by év
with dat. of place, Acts xxii. 3; dad twos, to spring from
one as father, Heb. xi. 12 [L WH mrg. éyevnd. see Taf.
ad loc.]; €« twos to be born of a mother, Mt. i. 163; éx
mopvetas, JN. Vili. 41; €& aiparwy, ex OeAnuaros avdpés, Jn.
i. 13; €x ts capkés, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.* yeyernu.]; év duap-
tiats dAos, Jn. ix. 34 (see duapria, 2a.) ; eis te, to be born
for something, Jn. xviii. 37; 2 Pet. ii. 12 [Tdf. yeyeynp.
so Rec.* >]; with an adj.: rupAds yeyevunuat, Jn. ix. 2,
19 sq. 32; “Papatos to be supplied, Acts xxii. 28; r7
Suaréxra, ev 7 eyerynOnuev, Acts ii. 8; yerynOeis kata odpKka
begotten or born according to (by) the working of nat-
ural passion; xara mvedpa according to (by) the working
of the divine promise, Gal. iv. 29, cf. 23. 2. metaph.
a. univ. to engender, cause to arise, excite: payas, 2 Tim.
ii. 23 (BAdByv, A’mny, etc. in Grk. writ.). b. in a Jew-
ish sense, of one who brings others over to his way of
life : ipas éyévvnca I am the author of your Christian
life, 1 Co. iv. 15; Philem. 10, (Sanhedr. fol. 19, 2 “If
one teaches the son of his neighbor the law, the Scrip-
ture reckons this the same as though he had begotten
him”; [cf. Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 8]). c. after Ps. ii. 7,
it is used of God making Christ his son; a. formally to
show him to be the Messiah (vidv rod Ged), viz. by the
resurrection: Acts xiii. 33. £. to be the author of the
divine nature which he possesses [but ef. the Comm. on
the pass. that follow]: Heb.i. 5; v.5. d. peculiarly, in
the Gospel and 1 Ep. of John, of God conferring upon
men the nature and disposition of his sons, imparting to
them spiritual life, i.e. by his own holy power prompting
and persuading souls to put faith in Christ and live a
new life consecrated to himself; absol.: 1 Jn. v. 1;
8
113
ryévos
mostly in pass., ék Oeod or ek Tod Oeod éyewvnOncav, yeyer-
ynTat, yeyevynevos, ete.: Jn. i. 13; 1 Jn. i. 29 [ Rec.* ye-
yevntar]; iii. 9; iv. 7; v.1, 4, 18; also ek roo mvevpatos
yervacOa, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.* yeyeynu.], 8; &€& Vdaros Kai
mvevpatos (because that moral generation is effected in
receiving baptism [(?) cf. Schaff’s Lange, Godet, West-
cott, on the words, and reff. s. v. Bamricpa, 3]), Jn. iii. 5;
dvabev yervacOa, Jn. iii. 3, 7 (see dvaber, c.) equiv. to
Texvoy Oeod yiverOa, i. 12. [CoMmP.: dva-yerydw.]*
yévvnpa, -ros, rd, (fr. yevvdw), that which has been be-
gotten or born; a. as in the earlier Grk. writ. fr. Soph.
down, the offspring, progeny, of men or of animals: ey:
dvav, Mt. iii. 7; xii. 34; xxiii. 33; Lk. ili. 7; (yuvacxdy,
Sir. x. 18). b. fr. Polyb. [1, 71, 1 ete.] on [cf. W. 23],
the fruits of the earth, products of agriculture, (in Sept.
often yevynyara tis ys): Lk. xii. 18 (where Tr [txt.
WH] rov cirov) ; tis apmédov, Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25;
Lk. xxii. 18; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 286. Metaph. fruit,
reward, profit: ths dixaoavyns, 2 Co. ix. 10, (Hos. x. 12;
ths copias, Sir. i. 17; vi. 19). Further, see yévnua.*
Tevvycapér [so GT Tr WH], -péé [Lchm. in Mt. xiv.
34], [Tevnoaper Rec. in Mk. vi. 53; cf. Tdf. ed. 2 Proleg.
p- xxxv., ed. 7 Proleg. p. liv. note®], (Targums 40°) or
0134 [ace. to Delitzsch (Romerbr. in d. Hebr. iibers. p-
27) 10°34, 10333]; Tevynodp, 1 Macc. xi. 67; Joseph. b.j.
2, 20, 6 etc.; Genesara, Plin. 5, 15), Gennesaret, a very
lovely and fertile region on the Sea of Galilee (Joseph.
b. j. 3, 10, 7): 1 yy Tevyno. Mt. xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53; 9
Nipyn Tevyno. Lk. v. 1, anciently n> 0%, Num. xxxiv.
11,or}733 D*, Josh. xii. 3, fr. the city N33, Deut. iii. 17,
which was near by; called in the Gospels 4 @ddacoa ris
T'advAaias, Mk. i. 16; Mt. iv. 18; 9 @ddaoca rns TiBept-
doos, Jn. vi. 1; xxi. 1. The lake, ace. to Joseph. b. j. 3,
10, 7, is 140 stadia long and 40 wide; [its extreme di-
mensions now are said to average 121m. by 63 m., and
its level to be neazly 700 ft. below that of the Mediter-
ranean]. Cf, Riietschi in Herzog v. p. 6 sq.; Furrer in
Schenkel ii. p. 322 sqq.; [ Wilson in “The Recovery of
Jerusalem,” Pt. ii.; Robinson, Phys. Geog. of the Holy
Land, p. 199 sqq.; BB.DD. For conjectures respecting
the derivation of the word cf. Alex.’s Kitto sub fin. ; MZer-
rill, Galilee in the Time of Christ, § vii.].*
yévvnots, -ews, 7, (yervaw), a begetting, engendering,
(often so in Plat.) ; nativity, birth: Rec. in Mt.i. 18 and
Lk. i. 14; see yéveots, 2.*
yewynrds, -7, -dv, (yevvaw), begotten, born, (often in Plat. ;
Diod. 1, 6 sqq.); after the Hebr. (AWS 33°, Job xiv. 1,
ete.), yevyntol yuvaxav [B. 169 (147), born of women]
is a periphrasis for men, with the implied idea of weak-
ness and frailty: Mt. xi. 11; Lk. vii. 28.*
yévos, -ous, rd, (TENQ, yivopat), race; a. offspring:
twos, Acts xvii. 28 sq. (fr. the poet Aratus) ; Rev. xxii.
16. b. family: Acts [iv. 6, see dpyvepeds, 2 fin.]; vii. 18
[al. refer this to c.]; xiii. 26. ¢. stock, race: Acts vii.
19; 2Co. xi. 26; Phil. iii. 5; Gal. i. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 9; (Gen.
xi. 6; xvii. 14, etc. for DY); nation (i. e. nationality or
descent from a particular people): Mk. vii. 26; Acts iv.
36; xviii. 2,24. d. coner. the aggregate of many md
Tepacnvos
viduals of the same nature, kind, sort, species : Mt. xiii. 47 ;
xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; Mk. ix. 29; 1 Co.
xii. 10, 28; xiv. 10. (With the same significations in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Tepacnvés, -od, 6, Gerasene, i.e. belonging to the city
Gerasa (ra Tépaca, Joseph. b. j. 3, 3, 3): Mt. viii. 28
{Lchm.]; Mk. v.1 [LT WH Tr txt.]; Lk. viii. 26 and 37
[L. Tr WH] ace. to very many codd. seen by Origen. But
since Gerasa was a city situated in the southern part of
Ferza (Joseph. |. c., ef. 4, 9, 1), or in Arabia (Orig.
opp. iv. 140 ed. De la Rue), that cannot be referred to
here; see Tadapnvds, and the next word.*
Tepyeonvés, -7, -dv, Gergesene, belonging to the city
Gergesa, which is assumed to have been situated on the
eastern shoreof Lake Gennesaret: Mt. viii. 28 Rec. But
this reading depends on the authority and opinion of
Origen, who thought the variants found in his Mss.
Tadapnvev and Tepaonvey (see these words) must be made
to conform to the testimony of those who said that there
was formerly a certain city Gergesa near the lake. But
Josephus knows nothing of it, and states expressly (antt.
1, 6, 2), that no trace of the ancient Gergesites [A. V.
Girgashites, cf. B. D. s. v.] (mentioned Gen. xv. 20;
Josh. xxiv. 11) had survived, except the names preserved
in the O. T. Hence in Mt. viii. 28 we must read Tada-
pnvav [so T Tr WH] and suppose that the jurisdiction
of the city Gadara extended quite to the Lake of Gennes-
aret; but that Matthew (viii. 34) erroneously thought
that this city was situated on the lake itself. For in Mk.
v. 14 sq.; Lk. viii. 34, there is no objection to the sup-
position that the men came to Jesus from the rural dis-
tricts alone. [But for the light thrown on this matter
by modern research, see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gadara;
Thomson, The Land and the Book, ii. 34 sqq.; Wilson
in “The Recovery of Jerusalem” p. 286 sq.]*
yepovoia, -as, 7, (adj. yepovoros, belonging to old
men, yepwv), a senate, council of elders; used in prof.
auth. of the chief council of nations and cities (év rais
ToAeot ai yepovoia, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 16; in the O. T. of
the chief council not only of the whole people of Israel,
Kx. iii. 16, ete.; 1 Mace. xii. 6, ete. ; but also of cities,
Deut. xix. 12, etc.) ; of the Great Council, the Sanhedrin
of the Jews: Acts v. 21, where to 76 cuvedpiov is added
kal naoay thy yepougiay Trav vidy “Iopand and indeed (kal
explicative) all the senate, to signify the full Sanhedrin.
[Cf. Schiirer, Die Gemeindeverfassung d. Juden in Rom
in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt. Leips.
1879, p. 18 sq.; Hatch, Bamp. Lects. for 1880, p. 64 sq.}*
yEépev, -ovros, 6, [fr. Hom. down], an old man: Jn. iii. 4.
[Syn. cf. Augustine in Trench § evii. 2.]*
yevo: [cf. Lat. gusto, Germ. kosten; Curtius § 131]; to
cause to taste, to give one a taste of, rwd (Gen. xxv. 30).
In the N. T. only Mid. yevouar: fut. yevooua; 1 aor.
eyevodpny ; 1. to taste, try the flavor of : Mt. xxvii. 34;
contrary to better Grk. usage (cf. W. § 30, 7c. [and p. 36;
Antnol. Pal. 6, 120]) with ace. of the OQipAdins mW, ey
to taste, i.e. perceive the flavor of, partake of, enjoy:
tivos. Lk. xiv. 24 (yevrerai pou rod Seimvov, i. e. shall par-
114
yi
take of my banquet); hence, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
. down, i. q. to feel, make trial of, experience: twos, Heb.
vi. 4; pjpa Gevd, ib. 5, (THs yrooews, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
36,2). as in Chald., Syr. and Rabbin. writers, yeveo@at
rov Gavdrov [W. 33 (32)]: Mt. xvi. 28; Mk. ix. 1; Lk.
ix. 27; Jn. viii. 52; Heb. ii. 9; [ef. Wetstein on Mt. 1. c.;
Meyer on Jn. 1. ¢.; Bleek, Liinem., Alf. on Heb. Exen
foll. by ére: 1 Pet. ii. 3 (Ps. xxxiil. (xxxiv.) 9). 3. to
take food, eat: absol., Acts x. 10; xx. 11; cf. Kypke,
Observy. ii. p. 47; to take nourishment, eat —[but sub-
stantially as above J, with gen. pndevos, Acts xxiii. 14; with
the ellipsis of a gen. denoting unlawful food, Col. ii. 21.*
yewpyew, -& : [pres. pass. yewpyotpar]; (yewpyds, q- V-) 5
to practise agriculture, to till the ground: rhv yqv (Plat.
Theag. p. 121 b.; Eryx. p. 392 d.; [al.]; 1 Esdr. iv. 6;
1 Mace. xiv. 8); Pass.: Heb. vi. 7.*
yedpytov, -ov, 70, a (cultivated) field: 1 Co. iii. 9 [A. V.
husbandry (with marg. tillage) |. (Prov. xxiv. 45 (30);
xxxi. 16 (xxix. 34); Theag. in schol. Pind. Nem. 3, 21;
Strabo 14, 5, 6 p. 671; [al.].)*
yewpyds, -od, 6, (fr. yy and EPTQ), fr. [Hdt.], Xen. and
Plat. down; a husbandman, tiller of the soil: 2 Tim. ii.
6; Jas. v. 7; several times in Sept. ; used of a vine-dresser
(Ael. nat. an. 7, 28; [Plat. Theaet. p. 178 d.; al.]) in
Mt. xxi. 33 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sq. 7,9; Lk. xx. 9 sq. 14,
164 Jn.scn, 1%
yi, gen. ys, 7, (contr. fr. yéa, poet. yata), Sept. very
often for ys and M78, earth ; 1. arable land: Mt.
XL) pee wee Kv. 18,20; 265 2S Si ado kexitin veep xdive
35 (34); Jn. xii. 245 Heb. vi. 7; Jas.v. 7; Rev. ix. 4;
of the earthy material out of which a thing is formed,
with the implied idea of frailty and weakness: ex ys
xoikds, 1 Co. xv. 47. 2. the ground, the earth as a
standing-place, (Germ. Boden) : Mt. x. 29; xv. 35; xxiii.
35:3) Exvil. 513) Mk. vail. 65 1x. 203) xive355) ko xxiny 44
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; xxiv. 5; Jn. viii. 6, 8, [ie
Rec.]; Acts ix. 4, 8. 3. the main land, opp. to sea or
water: Mk. ivot3 vi. 47; Uksv.3)5 vilin. 2703 Inavie 2k:
Xxi.. 8 sq. 11; Rev. xu. 12: 4. the earth as a whole,
the world (Lat. terrarum orbis); a. the earth as opp.
to the heavens: Mt. v.18, 35; vi.10; xvi.19; xviii.18;
xxiv. 835; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. 11.14; Jn. xii. 32; Acts ii. 19;
iv. 24; 2 Pet. iii. 5,7, 10,13; Rev. xxi. 1; ra éml ris yas
the things and beings that are on the earth, Eph. i. 10;
Col. i.16 [T WH om. L Trbr. ra]; involving a suggestion
of mutability, frailty, infirmity, alike in thought and in
action, Mt. vi. 19; ra emt ris yhs (equiv. to ra émiyeca,
Phil. iii. 19) terrestrial goods, pleasures, honors, Col. iii.
2 (opp. to ra dvw); Ta peAn bpav Ta emi rhs yns the mem-
bers of your earthly body, as it were the abode and
instruments of corrupt desires, Col. iii.5; 6 dv é« rH yns
++ Aadet (in contrast with Christ as having come from
heaven) he who is of earthly (human) origin, has an
earthly nature, and speaks as his earthly origin and
nature prompt, Jn. iii. 31. b. the inhabited earth, the
abode of men and animals: Lk. xxi. 35; Actsi. 8; x. 12;
xi. 6; xvii. 26; Heb. xi. 13; Rev. iii. 10; aipew fonv
Twos Or Twa amd Ths yhs, Acts viii. 33; xxu. 22; KAnpo-
ynpas
vopety THY ynv (See KAnpovopew, 2), Mt. v. 5 (4); mip Bad-
Rew emi [ Ree. els] ri yay, i. e. among men, Lk. xii. 49, cf.
51 and Mt. x. 34; émi rijs ys among men, Lk. xviii. 8;
Jn. xvii. 4. 5. a country, land enclosed within fixed
boundaries, a tract of land, territory, region; simply, when
it is plain from the context what land is meant, as that
of the Jews: Lk. iv. 25; xxi. 23; Ro. ix. 28; Jas. v.
17; with a gentile noun added [then, as a rule, anar-
throus, W. 121 (114 sq.)]: y@ “Iopand, Mt. ii. 20 sq.;
*Tovda, Mt. ii. 6; Tevynoaper, Mt. xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53; So-
Sdpav x. Toudppev, Mt. x. 15; xi. 24; Xaddalwv, Acts vii.
4; Alyunros, (see Alyumros); 1 Iovdaia yi, In. iii. 22;
with the addition of an adj.: d\Xorpia, Acts vii. 6; éxeivn,
Mt. ix. 26, 31; with gen. of pers. one’s country, native
land, Acts vii. 3.
Yiipas, -aos (-ws), Ion. ynpeos, dat. ynpei, ynpet, rd, [fr.
Hom. down], old age: Lk. i. 36 ev ynpe G LT Tr
WH for Rec. év yng, a form found without var. in Sir.
xxv. 3; [also Ps. xci. (xcii.) 15; cf. Gen. xv. 15 Alex.;
KT Des exxve Shibess leOhr. xxix. 28 ib.) Clem) Rom:
1 Cor. 10, 7 var.; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 117]; Fritzsche
on Sir. iii. 12; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 155; W.
[386 and] 64 (62); [B. 15 (14) ]*
Ypdckw or ynpdw: 1 aor. éynpaca; fr. Hom. down; [ef.
W. 92 (88); Donaldson, New Crat. § 387]; to grow old:
Jn. xxi. 18; of things, institutions, etc., to fail from age,
be obsolescent: Heb. viii. 13 (to be deprived of force and
authority ; [here associated with maNaovpevos — the lat-
ter (used only of things) marking the lapse of time, while
ynpaokwy carries with it a suggestion of the waning
strength, the decay, incident to old age (cf. Schmidt ch.
46,7; Theophr. caus. pl. 6, 7,5): “that which is becom-
ing old and faileth for age” etc.]}).*
y(vopat (in Ionic prose writ.and in com. Grk. fr. Aristot.
on for Attic yiyvopar) ; [impf. éyuvdpny] ; fut. yernropar ; 2
aor. éyevduny (often in 3 pers. sing. optat. yevorro ; [ptep.
yevdpevos, Lk. xxiv. 22 Tdf. ed. 7]), and, with no diff. in
signif., 1 aor. pass. éyevnOny, rejected by the Atticists (cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 108 sq.; [Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p.
75, 6 sq.]), not rare in later Grk., common in Sept. (Acts
iv. 4; 1 Th. ii. 14; 1 Co. xv. 10, etc.), impv. yernOnrw (Mt.
vi. 10; xv. 28, etc.) ; pf. yeyevnuat and yéeyova, 3 pers. plur.
yeyovay L T Tr WH in Ro. xvi. 7 and Rev. xxi. 6 (cf.
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. p.
37 sq.; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 187]; W. 36 and 76 (73)
sq.; Mullach p. 16; B. 43 (37 sq.)), [ptep. yeyovas] ;
plpf. 3 pers. sing. éyeydvec (Jn. vi. 17 [not Tdf.]; Acts
iv. 22 [where L T Tr WH yeydver, cf. W. § 12, 9; Bao
(29); Tdf.’s note on the pass.]); to become, and
1. to become, i.e. to come into existence, begin to be, re-
ceive being: absol., Jn. i. 15, 30 (€umpooGév pov yeyover) ;
Jn. viii. 58 (piv ABpaap yevée Oat) ; 1 Co. xv. 37 (7d c@pa
TO yernadpevov) : x twos, to be born, Ro. i. 8 (ex orépparos
Aavid); Gal. iv. 4 (é« yuvaikds) ; Mt. xxi. 19 (unkére €k
gov kaprros yevnrat, come from) ; of the origin of all things,
Heb. xi. 3; 8:4 rwos, Jn.i. 3,10. to rise, arise, come on,
apvear, of occurrences in nature or in life: as yiverat
Bporrn, Jn. xii. 29; dorpann, Rev. vill. 5; cevopds, Rev.
115
| vi. 17 [not Tdf.].
ry vomat
[vi. 12; xi. 13]; xvi. 18; yadxjun, Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv.
39; Lk. viii. 24; Naika, Mk. iv. 37; yoyyvopes, Acts
vi. 13 (yrnows, In. iii. 25 [foll. by ék of origin ; ordous Kat
Cyrnots |, Acts xv. 2 [Grsb. questions ¢yr., Rec. reads
ovcnr.|; médepos, Rev. xii. 7; Baowdeca [or ai B.] Krd.
Rev. xi. 15; xii 10; yapd, Acts viii. 8, and in many other
exx. Here belong also the phrases yiverac jpépa it be-
comes day, day comes on, Lk. iv. 42; vi. 13; xxii. 66;
Acts xii. 18; xvi. 35; xxiii. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39; y. dpé
evening comes, Mk. xi. 19, i. q. y. dyia, Mt. viii. 16, xiv.
15, 23; xvi. 2[T br. WH reject the pass.]; xxvi. 20;
MK. xiv.17; Jn. vi. 16, etc.; mpwia, Mt. xxvii.1; Jn.
xxl. 4; vv, Acts xxvii. 27 [ef. s. v. émeyiv. 2]; oxoria, Jn.
Hence
2. to become i. q. to come to pass, happen, of events;
a. univ.: Mt. v. 18; xxiv. 6, 20, 34; Lk. i. 20; xii. 54;
xxl. 28; Jn. i. 28; xiii. 19, ete.; rodro yéyover, iva ete.
this hath come to pass that ete., Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4; xxvi.
56; Ta yevopueva or yuvdueva, Mt. xviii. 81; xxvii. 54;
xxvill. 11; Lk. xxiii. 48; [ef. ra yevdueva adyabd, Heb.
ix. 11 LWH txt. Trmrg.]; 7d yevduevov, Lk. xxiii. 47;
7d yeyovds, Mk. v. 14; Lk. xxiv. 12 [Tom. L Trbr. WH
reject the vs.]; Acts iv. 21; 7d pnua 7d yeyovds, Lk. ii.
15; ra peddAovra yiverOa, Lk. xxi. 36; Acts xxvi. 22; rh
avactacw 7dn yeyoveva, 2 Tim. ii. 18 ; Oavarov yevouevov
a death having taken place (Germ. nach erfolgtem Tode),
Heb. ix. 15. a) yévorro, a formula esp. freq. in Paul (and
in Epictetus, cf. Schweigh. Index Graec. in Epict. p. 392),
Sar be it! God forbid ! (cf. Morison, Exposition of Rom.
Lie PeouucG alu OG MNO wn, Oxrcilesn vin, lornvils
16 11S) S obi NENG Sib Thy TLS Th Coy Na ise (Cell wie ee itl,
(equiv. to n'°9n, Josh. xxii. 29, ete.); ef. Sturz, De dial.
Maced. ete. p. 204 sq.; ri yéeyovev, dre etc. what has come
to pass, that ete. i. q. for what reason, why? Jn. xiv. 22 (rt
eyévero, Ort. . . Eccles. vii. 11 (10); ri ear, ds etc., Eur.
Troad. 889). b. Very common in the first three Gos-
pels, esp. that of Luke, and in the Acts, is the phrase kat
éeyevero (*77") foll. by 1); cf. W. § 65, 4 e. [also § 44, 3 ¢.],
and esp. B.§ 141,6. a. kal éyévero kai with a finite verb:
Mk. ii. 15 ([Tr txt. cal yiverac], TWH kai yiv. [foll. by
acc. and inf.]); Lk. ii. 15 [R G Lbr. Tr br.]; viii. 1; xiv.
1; xvii. 11; xix. 15; xxiv. 15 [WH br. kai]; foll. by kat
idov, Mt. ix. 10 [T om. «ai before id.]; Lk. xxiv. 4. B.
much oftener kai is not repeated: Mt. vii. 28; Mk. iv. 4;
Lk. i. 23; ii. [15 TWH], 46; vi. 12; vii. 11; ix. 18, 33; xi.
1; xix. 29; xxiv. 30. y. «ai éyev. foll. by acc. with inf. :
Mk. ii. 23 [W. 578 (537) note]; Lk. vi. 1,6 [RG éyev. dé
kai]. cc. In like manner eyevero d€ a. foll. by xai with
a finite verb: Lk. v.1; ix. 28 [WH txt. om. L br. ai,
51; x.88RGT,LTrmrg. br. cai]; Actsv.7. B. eyévero
dé foll. by a fin. verb without cai: Lk. i. 8; ii. 1,6; [vi
12RGL}]; viii. 40 [WH Tr txt. om. éyev.]; ix. 375 xi.
14, 27. y. éyevero O€¢ foll. by acc. with inf.: Lk. iii. 21;
[vi. 1,6 LT Tr WH, 12T Tr WH]; xvi. 22; Acts iv.
5; ix. 3 [without d€], 32, 37; xi. 26 RG; xiv. 1; [xvi.
16; xix. 1]; xxviii.8,[17]. 5. eyév. d€ [as dé eyév.] foll.
by rod with inf.: Acts x. 25 (Rec. om. rod), cf. Mey. ad
loc. and W. 328 (307); [B.270(232)]. d. with dat. of
rylvopat
pers. fo occur or happen to one, befall one: foll. by inf.,
Acts xx. 16; édv yevnrat (sc. adr@) evpety avré, if it happen
to him, Mt. xviii. 13; épol 8€ py yevouro avxaoOat far be it
from me to glory, Gal. vi. 14, (Gen. xliv. 7, 17; 1 Kiexxs
(xxi.) 3; Alciphr. epp. 1, 26); foll. by ace. with inf. it
happened to me, that etc.: Acts xi. 26 LT Tr WH [but
acc. implied]; xxii. 6, 17, [ef. W. 323 (303); B. 305
(262)]; with adverbs, go, fare, (Germ. ergehen) : ev, Eph.
vi. 3, (ui yévorrd vot or Kakds, Ael. v. h. 9, 36). with
specification of the thing befalling one: ré yéyovev [LT
Trtxt. WH éyév.] airé, Acts vii. 40 (fr. Ex. xxxii. 1);
éyévero[L T Tr WH eyivero] raon Wuxi poBos fear came
upon, Acts ii. 43.— Mk. iv. 11; ix. 21; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. v.
14; xv. 7; Ro. xi. 25; 1 Co. iv.5; 2Co.i.8 [GLTTr
WH om. dat.]; 2 Tim. iii. 11; 1 Pet. iv. 12; with the
ellipsis of jyiv, Jn. 1.17. éyévero (adrd) yvoun a purpose
occurred to him, he determined, Acts xx. 3 [B. 268 (230),
but T Tr WH read éyév. yrouns; see below, 5 e. a.].
foll. by prepositions: ém avr7 upon (Germ. bei or an)
her, Mk. v. 33 [RGLbr.]; ets rwa, Acts xxviii. 6.
3. to arise, appear in history, come upon the stage:
of men appearing in public, Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 6, [on which
two pass. cf. W. 350 (328); B. 308 (264) sq.]; 2 Pet. ii.
1; yeydvacr, have arisen and now exist, 1 Jn. ii. 18.
4. to be made, done, finished: ra épya, Heb. iv. 3; dia
xetpay, of things fabricated, Acts xix. 26; of miracles to
be performed, wrought: dia trav xeupov twos, Mk. vi. 2;
dia revos, Acts ii. 43; iv. 16, 30; xii. 9; dno twos, Lk. ix.
7 (RL [but the latter br. ta’ adrod]); xiii. 17; xxiii. 8;
yevoueva eis Kadapy. done unto (on) Capernaum i. e. for
its benefit (W. 416 (388) ; [cf. B. 333 (286) ]), Lk. iv. 23
[Rece. év 77 K.]. of commands, decisions, purposes, re-
quests, etc. to be done, executed: Mt. vi. 10; xxi. 21; xxvi.
42; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xiv. 22; xxiii. 24; Acts xxi. 14; ye-
yioetat 6 Noyos will be accomplished the saying, 1 Co. xv.
54. joined to nouns implying a certain action: 7 dré-
Nea yeyove, Mk. xiv. 4; dmoypadn, Lk. ii. 2; emayyedia
yevopévn v70 Geod given by God, Acts xxvi. 6; dvdxpuois,
Acts xxv. 26; vojov perabecis, Heb. vii. 12; dpeors, Heb.
ix. 22. of institutions, laws, ete. to be established, en-
acted: 76 oaBBarov éyévero, the institution of the Sabbath,
Mk. ii. 27; 6 vopos, Gal. iii. 17 ; od yéyovev obras hath not
been so ordained, Mt. xix. 8. of feasts, marriages, en-
tertainments, fo be kept, celebrated: rd macxa, Mt. xxvi.
2G. q. Mp3, 2 K. xxiii. 22); 7d cdBBarov, Mk. vi. 2; ra
eykaina, Jn. x. 22; [-yevertous yevopevors (cf. W.§ 31,9b.;
RG yeveciov dyouevav), Mt. xiv. 6], (ra ’OXtpria, Xen.
Hell. 7, 4, 28; "IcOua, 4, 5, 1); ydpos, Jn.ii.1. ovrws
yévnrat €v euoi so done with me, in my case, 1 Co. ix. 15.
5. to become, be made, “in passages where it is speci-
fied who or what a person or thing is or has been ren-
dered, as respects quality, condition, place, rank, charac-
ter” (Wahl, Clavis Apocr. V. T. p- 101). a. with a
predicate added, expressed by a subst. or an adj.: of AiAou
ovo. dprou yevorra, Mt. iv. 3; Lk. iv. 3; Vdwp oivoy yeye-
npevov, In. ii. 9; dpxvepeds yeropevos, Heb. vi. 20 ; Sudkovos,
Col. i. 25; 6 Novos odp§ eyevero, In. i. 14 ; dvnp, 1 Co. xiii.
11, and many other exx. ; ydpus odkére yiveras ydpus grace
116
yivopat
ceases to have the nature of grace, can no longer be called
grace, Ro. xi. 6; dkapmos yiverat, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19;
—in Mt. xvii. 2; Lk. viii. 17; Jn. v. 6, and many other
places. contextually, to show one’s self, prove one’s self:
Lk. x. 36; xix. 17; xxiv. 19; Ro. xi. 34; xvi. 2; 2 Co. i.
18 Rec.; 1 Th. i. 6; ii. 7; Heb. xi. 6, etc.; esp. in exhor-
tations : yiveoOe, Mt. x. 16; xxiv. 44; Lk. vi. 36; Eph.
iv. 32; Col. iii. 15; pa) yivov, Jn. xx. 27; pr yiverOe, Mt.
vi. 16; Eph. v. 7,17; 1 Co. x. 7; pr yeropeda, Gal. v. 26;
hence used declaratively, i. q. to be found, shown: Lk.
xiii. 2 (that it was shown by their fate that they were
sinners); Ro. iii. 4; 2 Co. vii. 14;— yivopai rwi ts to
show one’s self (to be) some one to one: 1 Co. ix. 20,
22. _b. with an interrog. pron. as predicate : ri 6 [lerpos
éyévero what had become of Peter, Acts xii. 18 [cf. use of
ri éyev.in Act. Phil. in Hell. § 23, Tdf Acta apost. apocr.
p-104]. ce. yiverOa ws or aoei twa to become as or like
toone: Mt. x. 25; xviii. 3; xxviii. 4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. xxii.
44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Ro. ix. 29 (fr. Is. i. 9);
1 Co. iv.13; Gal.iv.12. d. yiveoOat eis te to become i.e.
be changed into something, come to be, issue in, something
(Germ. zu etwas werden) : éyevnOn eis cepadrny yovias, Mt.
xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx. 175. Acts iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 7,
— all after Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 22. Lk. xiii. 19 (els devdpov
peya); Jn. xvi. 20; Acts v. 36; Ro. xi. 9 (fr. Ps. lxviii.
(Ixix.) 23) ;1 Th. iii. 5; Rev. viii. 11; xvi. 19, ete. (equiv. to
5 7°77; but the expression is also classic; cf. W. § 29, 3 a.;
B.150(1381)). e. yiverOar with Cases; a. with the gen.
to become the property of any one, to come into the power
of a person or thing, [cf. W. § 30,5; esp. B. 162 (142)]:
Lk. xx. 14 [L mrg. éorar], 33; Rev. xi. 15 ; [yvopuns, Acts
xx. 3 T Tr WH (cf. éAmidos peyadns yiv. Plut. Phoe. 23,
4)]; mpopnreia idias émiktcews ov yiverar NO One Can ex-
plain prophecy by his own mental power (it is not a mat-
ter of subjective interpretation), but to explain it one
needs the same illumination of the Holy Spirit in which
it originated, for etc. 2 Pet. i. 20. yevéoOar with a gen.
indicating one’s age, (to be) so many years old: Lk. ii.
42;1Tim.v.9. 8. with the dat. [cf. W. 210 sq. (198)]:
yiverOa avdpi to become a man’s wife, Ro. vii. 3 sq. (70
wy, Ley. xxii. 12; Ruthi.12,ete.). f. joined to prep-
ositions with their substantives; & tu, to come or pass
into a certain state (cf. B. 330 (284) ]: év dywvia, Lk. xxii.
44 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.]; év éxordacer, Acts xxii.
17; ev wvevpari, Rev. i. 10; iv. 2; év dy [R. V. came with
(in) glory], 2 Co. iii. 7; év mapaBdoe, 1 Tim. ii. 14; év
éavt@, to come to himself, recover reason, Acts xii. 11
(also in Grk. writ.; ef. Hermann ad Vig. p. 749); év
Xpior®, to be brought to the fellowship of Christ, to be-
come a Christian, Ro. xvi. 7; év duowpate dvOpdmrav, to
become like men, Phil. ii. 7; ev Aoyw kodaxeias [R. V.
were we found using | flattering speech, 1 Th. ii.5. érdve
twos to be placed over a thing, Lk. xix. 19. pera twos or
auv tin to become one’s companion, associate with him:
Mk. xvi. 10; Acts vii. 38; xx. 183; $26 twa to be made
subject to one, Gal. iv. 4. [Cf.h. below.] g. with speci-
fication of the terminus of motion or the place of rest : eis
with acc. of place, to come to some place, arrive at some
york
thing, Acts xx. 16; xxi. 17; xxv.153 ds eyeveto .. . €is
Ta ta pov when the voice came into my ears, Lk. i. 44;
eis with acc. of pers., of evils coming upon one, Rev. xvi. 2
RG; of blessings, Gal. iii. 14; 1 Th. i. 5 [Lehm. mpos; Acts
xxvi. 6 LT Tr WH]; yevéoOa emi rod rémov, Lk. xxii.
40; emi ris yps, In. vi. 21 [Tdf. em Thy y-]; &de, ib. 25
(éxei, Xen. an. 6,3 [5], 20; [ef. B. 71]); émi with ace. of
place, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts xxi. 35; [Jn. vi. 21 Tdf.];
eyévero Suwypos emi riv éxkAnolay, Acts viii. 1; eyevero
Bos or OauBos émi mdvras, Lk. i. 65; iv. 36; Acts v. 5,
115; [€koraors, Acts x. 10 (Ree. érémeoev)]; éAkos kaxdv
k. tmovnpov emt t. avOpamous, Rev. xvi. 2 LT Tr WH;
eyévero piya eri tia, Adyos or havi) mpds twa (came to) :
Lk. iii. 2; Jn. x. 835; Acts vii. 31 [Rec.]; x. 13, (Gen. xv.
1, 4; Jer. i. 2,11; xiii. 8; Ezek. vi. 1; Hos. i. 1); [émay
yeAia, Acts xiii. 32; xxvi. 6 Rec.]; xara with acc. of place,
Lk. x. 32 [Tr WH om.]; Acts xxvii. 7, (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1,
15) ; xard with gen. : 1d yevouevoy priya Kal? dAns Tis “Iov-
éaias the matter the report of which spread throughout
all Judea, Acts x. 37; mpds twa, 2 Jn. 12 (Rec. éddeiv) ;
1 Co. ii. 3; ovv Tun, to be joined to one as an associate,
Lk. ii. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3,8); éyyis yiveoOa, Eph. ii. 13;
twos, Jn. vi. 19; hh. [with ex of the source (see 1
above): Mk. i. 11 (Tdf. om. éyév.); ix. 7 (T Trmrg.
WH); Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35; Acts xix. 34]; yiverOa éx
pécov, to be taken out of the way, 2 Th. ii. 7; yevéoOa
6pobvupaddy, of many come together in one place, Acts xv.
25 cf. ii. 1 [but only in RG; yevopevors éuobvpaddy in xv.
25 may mean either having become of one mind, or possi-
bly having come together with one accord. On the alleged
use of yivowa in the N. T. as interchangeable with eiyi
see Iritzschior. Opusce. p. 284 note. Comp.: dmo-, d:a-,
€mt-, Tapa-, ovp.- Tapa-, mpo-yivopat. |
ywaokw (Attic yryvocke, see yivoua init.; fr. INOO,
as BiBpooke fr. BPO) ; [impf. éyivwcxor]; fut. yroooua: ;
2 aor. éyvwv (fr. PNQMI), impv. yah, yore, subj. yuo
(3 pers. sing. yvot, Mk. v. 43; ix. 30; Lk. xix.15 LT Tr
WH, for RG yo [B. p. 46 (40); ef. SiSope init.]), inf.
yrava, ptep. yrous; pf. éyvoxa (Jn. xvii. 7; 3 pers. plur.
Zyvoxay for eyvexacr, see reff. in yivoyat init.); plpf.
eyvaxe ; Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. ywookerar (ME. xiii.
28 Trmrg.)]; pf. éyyoopar; 1 aor. éyvacOny; fut. yrooOy-
cova; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. for py; Lat.
nosco, novi (i. e. EnNOsco, gnOv1) ;
I. univ. 1. to learn to know, come to know, get a
knowledge of; pass. to become known : with ace., Mt. xxii.
18; Mk. v.43; Acts xxi. 34; 1 Co. iv. 19; 2 Co.ii.4; Col.
iv. 8; 1 Th.iii.5,etc. Pass., Mt. x. 26; Acts ix. 24; Phil.
iv. 5, ete.; [impers. ywaoxerat, Mk. xiii. 28 Trmrg.T 2, 7];
ti é« tivos, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44; 1 Jn. iv. 6; revd or ri
év rm, to find a sign ina thing by which to know, to recog-
nize in or by something, Lk. xxiv. 35; Jn. xiii. 35; 1
Jn. iv. 2; card ri yvdoouat rov7o, the truth of this promise,
Lk. i. 18 (Gen. xv. 8); epi ris Sidaxijs, Jn. vii. 17. often
the object is not added, but is readily understood from
what precedes: Mt. ix. 30; xii. 15 (the consultation held
by the Pharisees) ; Mk. vii. 24 (he would have no one
know that he was present); Mk. ix. 30; Ro. x. 19, ete. ;
LL
ywworKw
foll. by drt, Mt. xxi. 45; Jn. iv. 1; v. 6; xii. 9, etc.; foll.
by the interrog. ri, Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xvi. 4; dad Tivos, to
learn from one, Mk. xv. 45. with acc. of pers. to recog-
nize as worthy of intimacy and love, to own; so those
whom God has judged worthy of the blessings of the gos-
pel are said i76 rod Gevd ywwoxesOat, 1 Co. viii. 3; Gal.
iv. 9, [on both cf. W. § 39, 3 Note 2; B. 55 (48)]; neg-
atively, in the sentence of Christ oddémore éyvav ipas, I
never knew you, never had any acquaintance with you,
Mt. vii. 23. to perceive, feel: éyva7é cdpart, drt ete. Mk.
Vv. 29; éyvav Siva é&ehOovicay an’ éuodv, Lk. viii. 46.
2. to know, understand, perceive, have knowledge of; a.
to understand : with acc., ta Neydpeva, Lk. xviii. 34; &
dvaywaookers, Acts viii. 30; foll. by dr, Mt. xxi. 45; dn.
vill. 27 sq.; 2 Co. xiii. 6; Gal. iii. 7; Jas. ii. 20; foll. by
interrog, ri, Jn. x. 6; xiii. 12, 28; 6 KaTepydaopac ov yt-
veokw I do not understand what I am doing, my conduct
is inexplicable to me, Ro. vii. 15. b. to know: rd 6éAnya,
Lk. xii. 47; ras xapSias, Lk. xvi. 15 ; tov pi) yvdvra dpapriav
ignorant of sin, i. e. not conscious of having committed it,
2 Co. v. 21; émiaroAr) yuvwokopevn Kai dvaywaokopérn, 2 Co.
ili. 2; twa, to know one, his person, character, mind,
plans: Jn. i. 48 (49); ii. 24; Acts xix.15; 2 Tim. ii. 19
(fr. Num. xvi. 5); foll. by 67, Jn. xxi. 17; Phil. i. 12;
Jas. i. 3; 2 Pet. i. 20; foll. by acc. with inf. Heb. x. 34;
foll. by an indirect question, Rev. iii. 3; &AAnnorl ywack.
to know Greek (graece scire, Cic. de fin. 2, 5): Acts xxi.
37, (emioracba ovpiori, Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 81; graece nescire,
Cic. pro Flac. 4, 10); tore (Rec. éore) ywaoortes ye
know, understanding etc. [R. V. ye know of a surety,
etc.], Eph. v. 5; see W. 355 (333) ; [ef. B. 51 (44); 314
(269)]. impv. ywookere know ye: Mt. xxiv. 32 sq. 43;
Mk. xiii. 29; Lk. x.11; Jn. xv.18; Acts ii. 36; Heb. xiii.
23; 1 Jn. ii. 29. 3. by a Hebraistic euphemism [cf.
W. 18], found also in Grk. writ. fr. the Alexandrian age
down, ywwooxw is used of the carnal connection of male
and female, rem cum aliquo or aliqua habere (cf. our
have a [criminal] intimacy with): of a husband, Mt. i.
25; of the woman, Lk. i. 34; (Gen. iv. 1, 17; xix. 8; 1
S. i. 19, etc.; Judith xvi. 22; Callim. epigr. 58,3; often
in Plut.; cf. Végelin, Plut. Brut. p. 10 sqq.; so also Lat.
cognosco, Ovid. met. 4, 596; novi, Justin. hist. 27, 3, 11).
II. In particular ywaooke, to become acquainted with,
to know, is employed in the N. T. of the knowledge of
God and Christ, and of the things relating to them or pro-
ceeding from them; a. 7dv 6edy, the one, true God, in
contrast with the polytheism of the Gentiles: Ro. i. 21;
Gal. iv. 9; also rév pdvov ddnOivor Oedv, Jn. xvii. 3 cf. 1 Jn.
v. 20; rov Oedv, the nature and will of God, in contrast
with the false wisdom of both Jews and Gentiles, 1 Co.
i. 21; rov marépa, the nature of God the Father, esp.
the holy will and affection by which he aims to sanctify
and redeem men through Christ, Jn. viii. 55; xvi. 3;
1 Jn. ii. 3 sq. 14 (13); iii. 1, 6; Iv. 8; a peculiar knowl-
edge of God the Father is claimed by Christ for him-
self, Jn. x. 153 xvii. 25; yvaOr rov Kvptov, the precepts
of the Lord, Heb. viii. 11; 7d OéAnpa (of God), Ro. ii.
18; voov xupiov, Ro. xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. 165 rv copiay rod
7
YLUWOKW
Geov, 1 Co. ii. 8; Tas ddovs Tov 6cod, Heb. iii. 10 (fr.
Ps. xciv. (xev.) 10). b. Xpuordy, his blessings, Phil.
iii. 10; in Xpuordv éyvoxevar kara odpka, 2 Co. VollGy
Paul speaks of that knowledge of Christ which he had
before his conversion, and by which he knew him merely
in the form of a servant, and therefore had not yet seen
in him the Son of God. Acc. to J ohn’s usage, ywookety,
eyvaxevat Xpiordv denotes to come to know, to know, his
Messianic dignity (Jn. xvii. 3; vi. 69); his divinity (rov
dn’ dpyijs, 1 In. ii. 13 sq. ef. Jn. i. 10), his consummate
kindness towards us, and the benefits redounding to us
from fellowship with him (in Christ’s words ywaokopa
ind rdv épay, Jn. x. 14 [ace. to the crit. texts yuookovaly
pe Ta eud]); his love of God (Jn. xiv. 31); his sinless
holiness (1 Jn. iii. 6). Johnunites morevew and ywockery,
at one time putting morevew first: vi. 69 [cf. Schaff’s
Lange or Mey. ad loc.]; but at another time ywooxew :
x. 88 (ace. to RG, for which L T Tr WH read ta ware
kal ywookyre [R. V. know and understand]) ; xvii. 8 [L
br. «.éyv.]; 1 Jn. iv. 16 (the love of God). ¢. y. ra rod
mvevparos the things which proceed from the Spirit, 1 Co.
li. 14; rd mvedpa T. dAnOelas kal rd Tv. THS mavns, 1 Jn. iv.
63 ra pvornpta Tis BaotAelas Tay oipavaer, Mt. xiii. 11; rhv
dAndecav, Jn. viii. 832; 2 Jn. 1; absol., of the knowledge
of divine things, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of the knowledge of
things lawful for a Christian, 1 Co. viii. 2.
[Syn. yevdonety, eidévat, ewmiotacbat, cvviévar:
In classic usage (cf. Schmidt ch. 13), ywaéonev, distinguished
from the rest by its original inchoative force, denotes a dis-
criminating apprehension of external impressions, a knowl-
edge grounded in personal experience. idévar, lit. ‘to have
seen with the mind’s eye,’ signifies a clear and purely mental
perception, in contrast both to conjecture and to knowledge
derived from others. érlarac@a: primarily expresses the
knowledge obtained by proximity to the thing known (cf.
our understand, Germ. verstehen) ; then knowledge viewed as
the result of prolonged practice, in opposition to the process
of learning on the one hand, and to the uncertain knowledge
of a dilettante on the other. gvyéva: implies native insight,
the soul’s capacity of itself not only to lay hold of the phe-
nomena of the outer world through the senses, but by combi-
nation (ctv and ééva) to arrive at their underlying laws.
Hence ovyévai may mark an antithesis to sense-perception ;
whereas ‘yiwdéoxew marks an advance upon it. As applied
e. g. to a work of literature, yiwéonxew expresses an acquaint-
ance with it; émlorac@a the knowledge of its contents;
ovvievat the understanding of it, a comprehension of its mean-
ing. ywéonev and eidéva: most readily come into contrast
with each other; if eiSévacand émicrac@a are contrasted, the
former refers more to natural, the latter to acquired knowl-
edge. In the N. T., as might be expected, these distinctions
are somewhat less sharply marked. Such passages as John
1. 26, 31, 48 (49) ; vii. 27 sq.; xxi. 17; 2 Co. v.16; 1 Jn. vy. 20
may seem to indicate that, sometimes at least, yivécxw and
ola are nearly interchangeable; yet see Jn. iii. 10, 11; viii.
55 (yet cf. xvii. 25); 1 Jn. ii. 29 (know... perceive), and the
characteristic use of e/déva: by John to describe our Lord’s
direct insight into divine things: iii. 11 ; v. 32 (contrast 42) ;
Vil. 29; viii. 55; xii. 50, etc; cf. Bp. Lghtft.’s note on Gal.
iv. 9; Green, ‘Critical Notes’ etc. p. 75 (on Jn. viii. Do) is
Westcott on John ii. 24. ywdonw and emlorama are associ-
ated in Acts xix. 15 (cf. Green, as above, p. 97); ofa and
118
yrAoooa
ywéorw in] Co.ii.11; Ephv.5; ofda and éricrapa in Jude
10. Come.: dva-, dia-, ém-, KaTa-, mpo-ywdoKw.]
yAedkos, -ous, 74, must, the sweet juice pressed from the
grape; Nicand. alex. 184, 299; Plut., al. ; Job xxxii. 19;
sweet wine: Acts ii. 18. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Wine. ] *
yAukds, -eta, -v, sweet: Jas. ili. 11 (opp. to mexpdy) ; 12
(opp. to ddu«év); Rev. x. 9, [10]. [From Hom. down. ]*
yAéooa, -ns, 7, [fr. Hom. down], the tongue ; 1. the
tongue, a member of the body, the organ of speech: Mk.
vii. 83, 35; Lk. 7. 649 xvi. 24> 1/Co.xive uadas. 1. 2615
itis 5 6°87 1 Petnitt- 10) Jn. ii: 18; Rev.) xvi. 10)]:
By a poetical and rhetorical usage, esp. Hebraistic, that
member of the body which is chiefly engaged in some act
has ascribed to it what belongs to the man; the tongue
is so used in Acts ii. 26 (7yaA\Atdoaro 7 yh@ood pov) ; Ro.
iii. 13; xiv. 11; Phil.ii. 11 (the tongue of every man) ; of
the little tongue-like flames symbolizing the gift of foreign
tongues, in Acts ii. 3. 2. a tongue, i. e. the language
used by a particular people in distinction from that of
other nations: Acts ii.11; hencein later Jewish usage (Is.
Ixvi. 18; Dan. iii. 4; v.19 Theod.; vi. 25; vii. 14 Theod.;
Jud. iii. 8) joined with puAn, Aads, €vos, it serves to desig-
nate people of various languages [cf. W. 32], Rev. v. 9;
vii. 9; x.11; xi. 9; xiii. 7; xiv.6; xvii.15. Yandel ére-
pas yhwooas to speak with other than their native i. e. in
foreign tongues, Acts ii. 4 cf. 6-11; yAoooats Nadetv Kat-
vais to speak with new tongues which the speaker has not
learned previously, Mk. xvi. 17 [but Tr txt. WH txt. om.
Tr mrg. br. kawais]; cf. De Wette on Acts p. 27 sqq. [cor-
rect and supplement his reff. by Mey. on 1 Co. xii. 10;
cf. also B. D. s. v. Tongues, Gift of }. From both these
expressions must be carefully distinguished the simple
phrases Aadety yAoooats, yAwooars \adeiv, Aadeivy yAooon,
yhooon Aadeiv (and mpocevyecOa yAooon, 1 Co. xiv. 14),
to speak with (in) a tongue (the organ of speech), to speak
with tongues ; this, as appears from 1 Co. xiv. 7 sqq., is the
gift of men who, rapt in an ecstasy and no longer quite
masters of their own reason and consciousness, pour forth
their glowing spiritual emotions in strange utterances,
rugged, dark, disconnected, quite unfitted to instruct or to
influence the minds of others: Acts x. 46; xix. 6; 1 Co.
xii. 30; xiii. 1; xiv. 2,4-6, 13,18, 23,27,39. The origin of
the expression is apparently to be found in the fact, that
in Hebrew the tongue is spoken of as the leading instru-
ment by which the praises of God are proclaimed (9 rév
Gciwv Juveav pedodos, 4 Mace. x. 21, cf. Ps. xxxiv. (xxxy.)
28; Lxv. (Ixvi.) 17; lxx. (Ixxi.) 24; exxv. (cxxvi.) 2; Acts
ii. 26; Phil. ii. 11; Aadetv ev yAdoon, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.)
4), and that according to the more rigorous conception
of inspiration nothing human in an inspired man was
thought to be active except the tongue, put in motion by
the Holy Spirit (kataypirat repos adtod rois povnrnpiors
opyavois, oTomatt Kal yNorTy mpds pnyvow dv dv Gedy,
Philo, rer. div. haer. § 53, [1.510 ed. Mang.]) ; hence the
contrast 6+a Tov vods [crit. edd. 76 voi] Nadeiv, 1 Co. xiv.
19 cf. 9. The plur. in the phrase yAéooas Nadeiv, used
even of a single person (1 Co. xiv. 5 sq.), refers to the
various motions of the tongue. By meton. of the cause for
yN@oo dKojmov
the effect, yAdaoar tongues are equiv. to Adyor év yooon
(1 Co. xiv. 19) words spoken in a tongue (Zungenvortrda-
ge): xiil. 8; xiv. 22; yevn yrooodr, 1 Co. xii. 10, 28, of
which two kinds are mentioned viz. mpocevyy and Wards,
1 Co. xiv. 15; yAdooay yw, something to utter with a
tongue, 1 Co. xiv. 26. [On ‘Speaking with Tongues’
see, in addition to the discussions above referred to,
Wendt in the 5th ed. of Meyer on Acts (ii. 4); Heinrici,
Korinthierbriefe, i. 372 sqq.; Schaff, Hist. of the Chr.
Church, i. 234-245 (1882); Farrar, St. Paul, i. 95 sqq.]*
yAwoodkopov, -ov, rd, (for the earlier yAwscokopeioy or
yAewacokopniov [W. 24 (23), 94 (90); yet see Boeckh,
Corp. inscrr. 2448, viii. 25, 31], fr. yAdooa and kopéw to
tend); a. acase in which to keep the mouth-pieces of
wind instruments. b. a small box for other uses also; esp.
a casket, purse to keep moneyin: Jn. xii. 63 xiii. 293 ef.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 98 sq. (For j/78 a chest, 2 Chr. xxiv.
8, 10 sq.; Joseph. antt. 6, 1, 2; Plut., Longin., al.) *
aes, -€os, 6, (also [earlier] xcvadeds, fr. yaar or
kvantw to card), a fuller: Mk. ix. 3. (Hdt., Xen., and
sqq-3) Sept. Is. vil. 33) xxxvi. 2; 2K. xviiiy17.) *
yvnovos, -a, -ov, (by syncope for yevnouos fr. yivouar,
yev-, [cf. Curtius § 128]), legitimately born, not spurious ;
genuine, true, sincere: Phil. iv. 3; 1 Tim. i. 2; Tit.i.4;
TO THS aydamns yunovoy i. q. THY yynovornra [A. Y. the sin-
cerity |, 2 Co. viii. 8. (From Hom. down.) *
yrnclws, adv., genuinely, faithfully, sincerely: Phil. ii.
20. [From Eur. down. ] *
yvodos, -ov, -6, (for the earlier [and poetic] dvodos,
akin to véedos [so Bitm. Lexil. ii. 266; but see Curtius
pp- 704 sq. 706, cf. 5385; Vanicek p. 1070]), darkness,
gloom: Heb. xii. 18. (Aristot. de mund. c. 2 fin. p. 392»,
12; Lcian. de mort. Peregr. 43; Dio Chrys.; Sept. also
for jaya cloud, Deut. iv. 11, ete. and for Say. ‘thick
cloud,’ Ex. xx. 21, etc.; [Trench § c.].) *
youn, -ns, 7, (fr. yevodoke) ; 1. the faculty of know-
ing, mind, reason. 2. that which is thought or known,
one’smind; a. view, judgment, opinion : 1 Co.i. 10; Rev.
xvii. 13. b. mind concerning what ought to be done,
aa. by one’s self, resolve, purpose, intention: éyévero
yyopn [T Tr WH yvopuns, see yivopar 5 e. a.| Tod Umoorpe-
gew, Acts xx. 3 [B. 268 (230)]. bb. by others, judg-
ment, advice: diSdvat yvopuny, 1 Co. vii. 25, [40]; 2 Co. viii.
10. cc. decree: Rev. xvii. 17; xopis trys ons yryauns,
without thy consent, Philem. 14. (In the same senses in
Grk. writ.; [cf. Schmidt, ch. 13, 9; Mey. on 1 Co.i. 10].) *
yopitw; fut. yropiow (Jn. xvii. 26; Eph. vi. 21; Col.
iv. 7), Attic 6 (Col. iv. 9 [L WH -iow; B. 37 (82);
WH. App. p- 163]); 1 aor. éyvwpica; Pass., [ pres. yvopi-
Coua}]; 1 aor. éyvwpicOnv; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
down [see ad fin.]; Sept. for jrqin and Chald. prin;
1. trans. to make known: ri, Ro. ix. 22 sq.; ré ron, Lk.
ii, 15; Jn. xv. 15; xvii. 26; Acts ii. 28; 2 Co. viii. 1;
Eph. iii. 5, 10, [pass. in these two exx.]; Eph. vi. 21;
Col. iv. 7, 9; 2 Pet. i.16; ruwvi rd puornptov, Eph. i. 9;
iii. 3 [GLT Tr WH read the pass.]; vi. 19; rwi dru,
1 Co. xii. 3; revi Te, drei. q. ret Ore Tt, Gal. i. 11; foll. by
ri interrog. Col. i. 27; mepi twos, Lk. ii. 17 LT Tr WH;
S19
yvo@ortos
yropifecOw mpos rov Oedv be brought to the knowledge of
God, Phil. iv. 6 ; ywopitecOas ets révra ta €6vn to be made
known unto all the nations, Ro. xvi. 26; contextually
and emphatically i. q. to recall to one’s mind, as though
what is made known had escaped him, 1 Co. xv. 1; with
ace. of pers. [(Plut. Fab. Max. 21, 6)], in pass., to
become known, be recognized: Acts vii. 13 Tr txt. WH
GX. 2. intrans. to know: ri aipnoopat, ov yropi¢o, Phil.
i. 22 [WH mrg. punctuate ri aip.; od yv.; some refer
this to 1 (R. V.mrg. I do not make known), cf. Mey. ad
loc. In earlier Grk. yrapifa signifies either ‘to gain a
knowledge of,’ or ‘ to have thorough knowledge of.’ Its
later (and N. T.) causative force seems to be found
only in Aeschyl. Prom. 487; cf. Schmidt vol. i. p. 287;
Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. le. Comp.: dva-, d:a-yvopita].*
yous, -ews, 7, (ywooko), [fr. Thue. down], knowl!-
edge: with gen. of the obj., owrnpias, Lk. i. 77; roo
Geov, the knowledge of God, such as is offered in the
gospel, 2 Co. ii. 14, esp. in Paul’s exposition of it, 2 Co.
x. 53 ths ddEns rod Geod ev mpotam@ Xpiotod, 2 Co. iv. 6;
*Ingod Xprorod, of Christ as a saviour, Phil. iii. 8; 2 Pet.
li. 18; with subj. gen. rod deod, the knowledge of things
which belongs to God, Ro. xi. 33. -yvdats, by itself, sig-
nifies in general intelligence, understanding: Eph. iii. 19;
the general knowledge of the Christian religion, Ro. xv.
14; 1 Co. i. 5; the deeper, more perfect and enlarged
knowledge of this religion, such as belongs to the more
advanced, 1 Co. xii. 8; xiii. 2,8; xiv. 6; 2Co. vi. 6; viii. 7;
xi. 6; esp. of things lawful and unlawful for Christians, 1
Co. viii. 1, 7, 10 sq.; the higher knowledge of Christian
and divine things which false teachers boast of, Wevdavu-
pos yvdots, 1 Tim. vi. 20 [ef. Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe,
p- 182 sq.]; moral wisdom, such as is seen in right living,
2 Pet. i.5; and in intercourse with others : kara yydouw,
wisely, 1 Pet. iii. 7. objective knowledge : what is known
concerning divine things and human duties, Ro. ii. 20;
Col. ii. 3; concerning salvation through Christ, Lk. xi.
52. Where yvdors and copia are used together the for-
mer seems to be knowledge regarded by itself, the
latter wisdom as exhibited in action: Ro. xi. 33; 1
Co. xii. 8; Col. ii.3. [“yv. is simply intuitive, cod. is
ratiocinative also; yy. applies chiefly to the appre-
hension of truths, cop. superadds the power of reason-
ing about them and tracing their relations.” Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. ].c. To much the same effect Fritzsche (on Ro.
l. c.), “-yv. perspicientia veri, cod. sapientia aut mentis
sollertia, que cognita intellectaque veritate utatur, ut res
efficiendas efficiat.” Meyer (on 1 Co. 1. c.) nearly re-
verses Lehtft.’s distinction ; elsewhere, however (e. g. on
Col. l.c., ef. i. 9), he and others regard cod. merely as
the more general, yv. as the more restricted and special
term. Cf. Lehtft. u.s.; Trench § Ixxv.]*
yveorns, -ov, 6, (a knower), an expert; a connoisseur :
Acts xxvi. 8. (Plut. Flam. c. 4; Ocds 6 tov xpuntrav
yrdarns, Hist. Sus. vs. 42; of those who divine the future,
1 Sh oealihig By, Gy GlOa)) >’
yvwords, -7, -ov, known: Acts ix. 42; rwi, Jn. xviii. 15
sq.; Actsi.19; xv.18 RL; xix. 17; xxviii. 22; yrooror
yoyyuSo
Zorw ipiv be it known to you: Acts ii. 14; iv. 10; xili. 38;
xxviii. 28; contextually, notable, Acts iv. 16; yvworor
noteivy to make known, disclose: Acts xv. 17 sq. GT Tr
WH [al. construe yvwor. as pred. of ratra: R. V. mrg.
who doeth these things which were known; cf. Mey. ad
loc.]. 1d yrwordy rod Oecd, either that which may be
known of God, or i. q. yoeous Tod Ge0d, for both come to
the same thing: Ro. i.19; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. and W.
235 (220), [and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. plur. of
yrooro! acquaintance, intimates, (Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 12;
[Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 9,19]; Neh. v.10): Lk. ii. 44; xxiii.
49. (In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
yoyyvtw ; impf. eyoyyugov; 1 aor. eyoyyuca; to murmur,
mutter, grumble, say anything in a low tone, (acc. to Pollux
and Phavorinus used of the cooing of doves, like the
rovOpite and rovdopi¢w of the more elegant Grk. writ. ;
ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 358; [W. 22; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.
ii. 14]); hence of those who confer together secretly, ri
mepi twos, Jn. vii. 32; of those who discontentedly com-
plain: 1 Co. x. 10; mpos twa, Lk. v. 30; per’ dddAnror,
Jn. vi. 43; kard twos, Mt. xx. 11; wept twos, Jn. vi. 41,
61. (Sept.; Antonin. 2,3; Epict. diss. 1, 29, 55; 4, 1,
79; [al.].) [Comp.: 81a- yoyyi¢o. | *
yoyyverpes, -0v, 6, (yoyyvla, q. V.), @ murmur, murmur-
ing, muttering; applied to a. secret debate: mepi twos,
Jn. vii. 12. b. secret displeasure, not openly avowed:
mpos tia, Acts vi. 1; in plur. ywpls or dvev yoyyvopev
without querulous discontent, without murmurings, i. e.
with a cheerful and willing mind, Phil. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iv.
9 (where L T Tr WH read the sing.). (Ex. xvi. 7 sqq. ;
Sap. i. 10 sq.; Antonin. 9, 37.) *
yoyyverns, -ov, 6, a murmurer, (Vulg., Augustine, mur-
murator), one who discontentedly complains (against
God; for pepyiporpor is added): Jude 16. [ Prov. xxvi.
21 Theod., 22 Symm.; xxvi. 20, 22 Graec. Ven.]*
“y6ns, -nTos, 6, (yodw to bewail, howl) ; 1. a wailer,
howler: Aeschyl. choéph. 823 [Hermann et al. yonrjs].
2. a juggler, enchanter, (because incantations used to be
uttered in a kind of howl). 3. a deceiver, impostor :
2 Tim. iii. 13; (Hdt., Eur., Plat., and subseq. writ.).*
Todyoba [Tr WH, or -6a R GLT (see Tdf. Proleg.
} 102; Kautzsch p.10); also-68 L WH mrg. in Jn. xix.
17; ace. -av Tdf. in Mk. xv. 22 (WH -dy, see their App.
p- 160), elsewhere indecl., W. 61 (60)], Golgotha, Chald.
87272, Heb. noida (fr. 54 to roll), i. €. xpaviov, a skuil
[Lat. calvaria], the name of a place outside of Jerusa-
lem where Jesus was crucified; so called, apparently,
because its form resembled a skull: Mt. xxvii. 33; Mk.
xv. 22; Jn. xix.17. Cf. Tobler, Golgatha. St. Gall. 1851;
Furrer in Schenkel ii. 506 sqq.; Keim, Jesus von Naz.
iii. 404 sq.; [Porter in Alex.’s Kitto s. v.; F’. Howe, The
true Site of Calvary, N. Y., 1871].*
Tépoppa [or Nopoppa, cf. Chandler § 167], -as, 4, and -ev,
ra, (cf. B. 18 (16); Tdf Proleg. p. 116; WH. App. p.
156], Gomorrah, (Ny, cf. ny Gaza), the name of a city
in the eastern part of Judea, destroyed by the same earth-
quake [cf. B. D.s. v. Sea, The Salt] with Sodom and its
neighbor cities: Gen. xix. 24. Their site is now occu-
120
ypaupa
pied by the Asphaltic Lake or Dead Sea [cf. BB. DD.
s. vv. Gomorrah and Sodom]: Mt. x. 15; Mk. vi. 11 RL
in br.; Ro. ix. 29; 2 Pet. ii. 6; Jude 7.*
yopos, -ov, 6, (yew); a. the lading or freight of a ship,
cargo, merchandise conveyed ina ship: Acts xxi. 3, (Hdt.
1, 194; [Aeschyl.], Dem., al.; [in Sept. the load of a
beast of burden, Ex. xxiii.5; 2 K.v.17]). b. any mer-
chandise: Rev. xviii. 11 sq.*
yovets, -€ws, 6, (TENQ, yéeyova), [Hom. h. Cer., Hes.,
al.]; a begetter, parent; plur. of yoveis the parents: Lk. it
41,43 Ltxt. T Tr WH;; [viii 56]; xxi. 16; Jn. ix. 2, 3,
20:22) 28:621Co: x11 4 RO. 30s) Eph. virlee@ol nar
20; 2 Tim. iii. 2; acc. plur. yovets: Mt. x. 21; [xix. 29
Lehm. mrg.]; Lk. ii. 27; [xviii 29]; Mk. xiii. 12; [Jn.
ix. 18]; on this form cf. W. § 9, 2; [B. 14 (13)].*
y6vu, yovaros, To, [fr. Hom. down], the knee: Heb. xii.
12; riOévae ta yovata to bend the knees, kneel down, of
persons supplicating: Lk. xxii. 41; Acts vil. 60; ix. 40;
xx. 86; xxi. 5; of [mock] worshippers, Mk. xv. 19, so
also mpoomintew trois yovaci twos, Lk. v. 8 (of a suppliant
in Eur. Or. 1332); xdymrew ra ydvara to bow the knee, of
those worshipping God or Christ: tui, Ro. xi. 4; mpds
twa, Eph. iii. 14; reflexively, yévu xdyrrec revi, to i.e. in
honor of one, Ro. xiv. 11 (1 K. xix. 18) ; é€v dvdpare Incod,
Phil. ii. 10 (Is. xlv. 23).*
yovuTeréw, -@; 1 aor. ptep. yovumernoas; (yovumerns,
and this fr. yévv and TIETQ i. q. rimrw) ; to fall on the
knees, the act of one imploring aid, and of one express-
ing reverence and honor: rwi, Mt. xvii. 14 Rec.; rwa,
ibid.G LT Tr WH; Mk. i. 40 RG Tr txt. br. WH br.; x.
17; cf. W. 210 (197); [B. 147 sq. (129)]; eumpoobev
twos, Mt. xxvii. 29. (Polyb., Heliod.; eccl. writ.) *
ypappa, -ros, 76, (ypapo), that which has been written ;
1. a letter i. e. the character: Lk. xxiii. 38 [R G Lbr. Tr
mrg. br.]; Gal. vi. 11. 2. any writing, a document or
record; a. a note of hand, bill, bond, account, written ac-
knowledgment of debt, (as scriptio in Varr. sat. Men. 8, 1
(cf. Edersheim ii. 268 sqq.]): Lk. xvi. 6 sq. ((Joseph.
antt. 18, 6,3], in Ltxt. T Tr WH plur. ra ypdppata; so
of one document also in Antiph. p. 114, (30); Dem. p.
1034, 16; Vulg. cautio). b. a letter, an epistle: Acts
XXVill. 21; (Hdt. 5, 14; Thue. 8,50; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,
26, etc.). C. Ta lepd ypdupara the sacred writings (of the
O. T.; [so Joseph. antt. prooem. § 3; 10, 10,4 fin.; e. Ap.
1,10; Philo, de vit. Moys. 3, 39; de praem. et poen. § 14;
leg. ad Gai. § 29, ete.— but always rat. y.]): 2 Tim. iii. 15
[here TWHom. L Tr br. r4]; ypdupa i. q. the written
law of Moses, Ro. ii. 27; Mwicéws ypdupara, Jn. v. 47.
Since the Jews so clave to the letter of the law that
it not only became to them a mere letter but also a hin-
drance to true religion, Paul calls it ypdupa in a disparag:
ing sense, and contrasts it with 7d rvedua i. e. the divine
Spirit, whether operative in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 29,
or in the gospel, by which Christians are governed, Ro.
vil. 6; 2 Co. iii. 6 sq. [but in vs. 7RGT WH read the
plur. written in letters, so Lmrg. Tr mrg.]. 3. Ta
ypappara, like the Lat. litterae, Eng. letters, i. q. learning :
Acts xxvi. 24; eidévar, weuabnnévar yp. (cf. Germ. studiri
ypaupareds
haben), of sacred learning, Jn. vii.15. (pavOdvew, emiora-
oOat, etc., ypdupara are used by the Greeks of the rudi-
ments of learning; cf. Passow i. p. 571; [L. and S.s. v.
hea.) *
Ypapparevs, -ews, (acc. plur. -eis, W. § 9, 2; [B. 14
(13)]), 6, (ypauua), Sept. for 79D and qo; i. in
prof. auth. and here and there in the O. T. fe. g. 2S.
vill. 17; xx. 25; 2 K. xix. 2; xxv. 19; Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 2],
a clerk, scribe, esp. a public scribe, secretary, recorder,
whose office and influence differed in different states:
Acts xix. 35, (Sir. x. 5); [ef. Lghtft. in The Contemp.
Rev. for 1878, p. 294; Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus,
App. Inscrr. fr. the Great Theatre, p. 49 n.]. 2. in
the Bible, a man learned in the Mosaic law and in the
sacred writings, an interpreter, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 343; 1
Co. i. 20, (called also vopuxds in Lk. x. 25, and vowodidd-
oxados in Lk. v.17; [Meyer (on Mt. xxii. 35), while deny-
ing any essential diff. betw. ypayparevs and vopixds
(cf. Lk. xi. 52, 53 — yet see crit. txts.), regards the latter
name as the more specific (a jurisconsult) and Classic,
yp: as the more general (a learned man) and Hebraistic;
it is also the more common in the Apocr., where voy.
occurs only 4 Mace. v. 3. As teachers they were called
vopodiOdoxaro. Cf. B. D. s. v. Lawyer, also s.v. Scribes
I. 1 note]); Jer. viii. 8 (cf. ii. 8); Neh. viii. 1 sq. xii.
26, 36; 2 Esdr. vii. 6, 11, and esp. Sir. xxxviii. 24, 31
sqq-; xxxix. 1-11. The ypappareis explained the mean-
ing of the sacred oracles, Mt. ii. 4 [yp. rod Aaod, Josh. i. 10;
1 Mace. v. 42; ef. Sir. xliv. 4]; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11; xii.
35; examined into the more difficult and subtile ques-
tions of the law, Mt. ix.3; Mk. ii. 6 sq.; xii. 28; added
to the Mosaic law decisions of various kinds thought to
elucidate its meaning and scope, and did this to the detri-
ment of religion, Mt. v. 20; xv. 1 sqq.; xxiii. 2 sqq.; Mk.
vii. 1 sqq.; ef. Lk. xi. 46. Since the advice of men skilled
in the law was needed in the examination of causes and
the solution of difficult questions, they were enrolled in
the Sanhedrin; and accordingly in the N. T. they are
often mentioned in connection with the priests and elders
of the people: Mt. xxi. 15; xxvi.3 RG; Mk. xi. 18, 27;
xiv. l; xv. 15 LK. xix.47; xxl; xxil.2. Cf. Schiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 25 ii.; AKlépper in Schenkel v. 247
sqq-; [and thorough articles in BB.DD. s. v. Scribes; cf.
W. Robertson Smath, The O. T. in the Jewish Ch., Lect.
iii. ]. 3. univ. a religious teacher: ypappareds pabnrev-
Geis eis 179 Baowd. TSv ovp. a teacher so instructed that
from his learning and ability to’'teach advantage may
redound to the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xiii. 52 [but GT
Tr WH read paé. 77 Bacidcia (L ev 7. 8.); and many in-
terpret made a disciple unto the k. of h. (which is person-
ified); see uanreva, fin. ]}.
yparrés, -1, -dv, written: Ro. ii.15. [Gorg. apol. Palam.
p- 190 sub fin. ; Sept.; al.]*
yeapt, -fs, 7, (ypdpa, cf. yrupy and yipo); a. a
writing, thing written, [fr. Soph. down ] : raca ypapn every
scripture sc. of the O. T., 2 Tim. iii. 16; plur. ypadat
éyat, holy scriptures, the sacred books (of the O. T.),
Ro. i. 2; mpopnrixai, Ro. xvi. 26; ai ypapai ray mpopyrar,
121
ypapw
Mt. xxvi. 56. b. 4 ypagn, the Scripture kar ekoxny, the
holy scripture (of the O. T.), — and used to denote either
the book itself, or its contents [some would restrict the
sing. ypapn always to a particular passage; see Bp.
Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 22]: Jn. vii. 38; x. 35; Acts viii. 32;
Ro. iv. 3; Gal. iii. 22; iv. 80; Jas. ii. 8; 1 Pet. ii. 6; 2
Pet. i. 20; also in plur. ai ypadai: Mt. xxi. 42; xxvi. 54;
Mk. xiv. 49; Lk. xxiv. 27; Jn. v. 39; Acts xvii. 2, 11;
Xvill. 24, 28; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq.; once ai ypapai comprehends
also the books of the N. T. already begun to be collected
into a canon, 2 Pet. iii. 16; by meton. 4 ypapy is used
for God speaking in it: Ro. ix.17; Gal. iv. 30; 4 ypapy
is introduced as a person and distinguished from God in
Gal. iii.8. eiS€var ras ypadds, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii. 24;
ovmevat, Lk. xxiv. 45. ¢. a certain portion or section of
holy Scripture: Mk. xii. 10; Lk. iv. 21; Jn. xix. 37; Acts
i. 16. [Cf. B.D. s. v. Scripture. ]
yeapo; [impf. ¢ypapov]; fut. ypayro; 1 aor. éypaya;
pf. yeypapa; Pass., [pres. ypapoua]; pf. yéypappac;
[plpf. 3 pers. sing. éeyéypanro, Rev. xvii. 8 Lchm.]; 2
aor. eypadny; (prop. to grave, scrape, scratch, engrave;
ef. Germ. graben, eingraben ; ypawev S€ of daréov dypis
aixun, Hom. I. 17, 599; ojpara ypawas év mivaxt, ib. 6,
169; hence to draw letters), to write; 1. with reference
to the form of the letters; to delineate (or form) letters
on a tablet, parchment, paper, or other material: 76 da-
KTUA® eypahev eis rHv ynv made figures on the ground, Jn.
viii. 6 Rec. ; ovra ypddo so am I accustomed to form my
letters, 2 Thess. iii. 17; mydikows ypdupace éypaya with
how large (and so, ill-formed [?]) letters I have written,
Gal. vi. 11; cf. Winer, Rickert, Hilgenfeld ad loc. [for
the views of those who regard éyp. as covering the close
of the Ep. only, see Bp. Lghtft. and Mey.; ef. W. 278
(261); B. 198 (171 sq.)]- 2. with reference to the
contentsof the writing; a. to express in written char-
acters, foll. by the words expressed: éypawe héyou: lady
yns eott TO dvopa avrod, Lk. i. 63; x ypade: 6 Bactreds
Tov “lovdai@v Krd. Jn. xix. 21; ypawov: pakxdpiou rr.
Rev. xiv. 13. ypapo tt, Jn. xix. 22; pass. Rev. i. 3; ri
émi Tt, Rev. ii. 17; xix. 163 ri em ruva, iii. 12; emi twos,
xiv. 1. b. to commit to writing (things not to be for-
gotten), write down, record : Rev. i. 19 (ypawov a cides) ;
x. 4; ypdadeuw eis BiBriov, Rev. i. 11; emt rd BiBdlov ris
Cons, Rev. xvii. 8; yeypapp. év r. BiBAi@ Lor 77 BiBro ], ev
rois BuBriots, Rev. xiii. 8; xx. 12,153; xxi. 27; xxii. 18,
19; ra dvopara tpav eypdadn [év-(ey- Tr see N,v) yeyp.T Tr
WH] ev rois ovpavois, i.e. that ye have been enrolled
with those for whom eternal blessedness has been pre-
pared, Lk. x. 20; ypapew ri rem, to record something for
some one’s use, Lk.i.3. ¢. eypddyn and yéypanra (in the
Synoptists and Paul), and yeypaupevoy éori (in John),
are used of those things which stand written in the sacred
books (of the O. T.); absol. yéypamraz, foll. by the quo-
tation fr. the sacred vol.: Mt. iv. 4, 6 sq. 10; xxi. 13;
Mk. vii. 6; xi. 17; xiv. 27; Lk. iv. 8; xix. 46; xaOds
yeyparrat, Acts xv. 15, very often in Paul, as Ro. i. 17;
ii. 24; iii. 4 [see below]; 1 Co.i. 31; ii. 9; 2 Co. viii. 15;
ix. 9; xaOdmep yeyp. Ro. xi. 8 T Tr WH; [iii. 4 T Tr
rypawons
WH); yéyparra ydp, Mt. xxvi. 31; Lk. iv. 10; Acts
xxiii. 5; Ro. xii. 19; xiv. 11; 1 Co. iii. 19; Gal. iii. 10, 13
Rec. ; iv. 22, 27; 6 Novos 6 yeypappévos, 1 Co. xv. 54; Kara
rd yeypappevor, 2 Co. iv. 13; yeypappevor éori, Jn. i. 17;
vi. 81; xii. 145 eypddy 5€ mpds vovdeciay judy, 1 Co. x.
11; éypadn dv npas for our sake, Ro. iv. 24; 1 Co. ix. 10;
with the name of the author of the written words or of
the books in which they are found: yeéypanra: év BiBAw
Warpar, Acts i. 20; ev BiBA@ Trav mpodpyray, Acts vii. 42;
év t6 mpdro [R WH devrép@] Wary, Acts xiii. 335; ev
‘Hoaia, Mk. i. 2 [not Rec.], etc. tw or ri to wrile of 1. e.
in writing to mention or refer to a person or a thing: 6»
éypae Maiajs whom Moses had in mind in writing of
the Messiah, or whose likeness Moses delineated, Jn. i.
45 (46); Movojs ypader tiv Stxaoovyny thy €k vopor,
Moses, writing the words 671 6 moiujcas atta krX., points
out the righteousness which is of the law, Ro. x. 5. ye-
yparrat, ypapew, etc. mepi twos, concerning one: Mt.
xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21; Jn. v.46; Acts xiii. 29; él rov
vidov Tov avOpwrov, that it should find fulfilment in him,
Mk. ix. 12 sq. [ef. iva, II. 2b.]; em adré, on himi. e. of
him (cf. W. 393 (368) [and emi, B. 2f. 8.]), Jn. xii. 16;
Ta yeypaupeva TH vio Tod avOp. written for him, allotted
to him in Scripture, i.e. to be accomplished in his ca-
reer, Lk. xviii. 31; cf. W. § 31, 4; [yet cf. B. 178 (154) ];
Mavons eypaev tpiv iva etc. Moses in the Scripture com-
manded us that ete. [ef. B. 237 (204) ], Mk. xii. 19; Lk.
xx. 28. d. ypadeww twi to write to one i.e. by writing (in
a written epistle) to give information, directions, ete. to
one: Ro. xv. 15; 2 Co. ii. 4, 9 [dat. implied]; vii. 12;
Philem. 21; 2 Pet. iii. 15; 1 Jn. ii. 12 sqq.; dv ddtyor, 1
Pet. v. 123 8a wéAavos kal kaddpov, 3 Jn. 13; foll. by the
words written or to be written in the letter: Acts xv.
23; Rev. ii. 1,8, 12,18; iii. 1, 7,14; ypadew rwi m1, 1 Co.
xiv. 37; 2 Co.i. 13; ii.3 [LT Tr WH om. the dat.]; Gal.
i. 20; 1 Tim. iii. 14; 1 Jn.i.4 [RGL)]; ii. 1; wepi twos,
il dite 1 ATE ANGI eas AIH BUCop tes, 105 SE INN ie, OS ye Ie
Jude 3; dua xerpds Tivos, to send a letter by one, Acts xv.
23 [see yelp]; ypadew ruvi, foll. by an inf., by letter to
bid one do a thing, Acts xviii. 27; foll. by pn with inf.
(to forbid, write one not to ete.), 1 Co. v. 9, 11. 3.
to fill with writing, (Germ. beschreiben) : BiBdtov yeypap-
pevov eowbey Kal dmicbev a volume written within and be-
hind, on the back, hence on both sides, Rev. v. 1 (Ezek.
ii. 10); ef. Diisterdieck, [ Alford, al.] ad loc. 4. to
draw up in writing, compose : BiBdiov, Mk. x. 4; Jn. xxi.
25 [Tdf. om. the vs.; see WH. App. ad loc.]; ritAoy, Jn.
xix. 19; émecrodny, Acts xxiii. 25; 2 Pet. iii. 1; évrodjy
tue to write a commandment to one, Mk. x. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 7
sq-; 2Jn.5. [Comp.: dro-, éy-, én, xara-, mpo-ypddo. |
ypaddns, -es, (fr. ypatds an old woman, and eidos), old-
womanish, anile, [A. V. old wives’]: 1 Tim. iv. 7. (Strabo
1 p. 32 [p. 44 ed. Sieben.]; Galen; al.) *
Yenyopéw, -@; 1 aor. eypnydpnaa; (fr. éypryopa, to have
been roused from sleep, to be awake, pf. of eyetpw; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 118 sq.; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 158;
[W. 26 (25); 92 (88)]); to watch; 1. prop.: Mt.
XXlv. 43; xxvi. 38, 40; Mk. xiii. 34; xiv. 34, 37; Lk. xii.
122
ryupvorns
37, 39 RGL Trtxt. WH txt. As to sleep is often i. q.
to die, so once, 1 Th. v. 10, ypny- means to live, be alive
on earth: | 2. Metaph. to watch i.e. give strict attention
to, be cautious, active :— to take heed lest through remiss-
ness and indolence some destructive calamity suddenly
overtake one, Mt. xxiv. 42; xxv. 13; Mk. xiii. 35, [37];
Rey. xvi. 15; or lest one be led to forsake Christ, Mt.
xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; or lest one fall into sin, 1 Th. v.
6; 1 Co. xvi. 13; 1 Pet. v. 8; Rev. iii. 2sq.; or be cor-
rupted by errors, Acts xx. 31; év tum, to be watchful in,
employ the most punctilious care in a thing: Col. iv. 2.
(Sept. ; [Bar. ii. 9; 1 Macc. xii. 27; Aristot. plant. 1, 2
p- 816°, 29.37]; Joseph. antt.11, 3,4; Achill. Tat. ; al.)
[SyN. see dypurvéw. Comp.: d1a- ypnyopéa. |*
yupvatw; [pf. pass. ptcep. yeyvuvacpévos]; (yupvos) 5
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; 1. prop. to exz-
ercise naked (in the palestra). 2. to exercise vigor-
ously, in any way, either the body or the mind: éavroy
mpos evoéBerav, of one who strives earnestly to become
godly, 1 Tim. iv. 7: yeyupvacpévos exercised, Heb. v. 14;
xii. 11; kapSiav yeyupy. mreoveEias (Rec. mreove€ias), a
soul that covetousness or the love of gain has trained in
its crafty ways, 2 Pet. ii. 14; cf. W. § 30, 4.*
yupvacia, -as, 7, (yuuvatw); a. prop. the exercise of
the body in the palestra. b. any exercise whatever:
copatixy yupvacia, the exercise of conscientiousness rel-
ative to the body, such as is characteristic of ascetics
and consists in abstinence from matrimony and certain
kinds of food, 1 Tim. iv. 8. (4 Macc. xi. 19. In Grk.
writ. fr. Plat. leee. i. p. 648 c. down.) *
yupvyteto (yuurtrevo LT Tr WH; [cf. Tdf. Proleg.
p- 81; W. 92 (88)]); Cyopunrns); [A. V. literally to be
naked i. e.] to be lightly or poorly clad: 1 Co.iv.11. (So
in Dio Chrys. 25, 3 and other later writ.; to be a light-
armed soldier, Plut. Aem. 16; Dio Cass. 47, 34, 2.) *
yopvés, -7, -dv, in Sept. for OV) and ony, naked, not
covered ; 1. prop. a. unclad, without clothing: Mk.
xiv. 52; Rey. iii. 17; xvi. 15; xvii. 16; 7d yupvdv, sub-
stantively, the naked body: én yupvov, Mk. xiv. 51; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc.; (ra yupva, Leian. nav. 33). b. ill-
clad: Mt. xxv. 36, 38, 43 sq.; Acts xix. 16 (with torn
garments); Jas. 11.15; (Job xxii. 6; xxiv.10; xxvi. 6).
c. clad in the undergarment only (the outer garment or
cloak being laid aside): Jn. xxi. 7; (1S. xix. 24; Is. xx.
2; Hes. opp. 389; often in Attic; sonudus, Verg. Georg.
fo 209)). d. of the soul, whose garment is the body,
stript of the body, without a body: 2 Co. v. 8, (Plat. Crat.
c. 20 p. 408 b. 7 uxt yupr7 rod cadpartos). 2. metaph.
a. naked, i. e. open, laid bare: Heb. iv. 13, (yupvds 6 &dns
évemtov avtod, Job xxvi. 6; exx. fr. Grk. auth. see in
Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 585). b. only, mere, bare, i. q-
Wr6s (like Lat. nudus) : yupvds xoxcos, mere grain, not
the plant itself, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 24, 5
onéppata mecovta eis THY yy Enpa kal yupva Svadverar).*
yupvorns, -nTos, 7, (yupvos), nakedness: of the body,
Rey. ili. 18 (see aicytvn, 3); used of want of clothing,
Ro. viii. 35; 2 Co. xi. 27. (Deut. xxviii. 48; Antonin.
11, 27.) *
yuvatkapov
yovarkdpioy, -ov, ro, (dimin. fr. yun), a little woman;
used contemptuously in 2 Tim. iii. 6 [A. V. silly women ;
ef. Lat. muliercula]. (Diocles. com. in Bekk. Anecd. p.
87, 4; Antonin. 5, 11; occasionally in Epictet.) On
dimin. ending in dpsov see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 180; Fritz-
sche on MK. p. 638; [cf. W. 24, 96 (91)].*
yevaiketos, -ela, -etov, of or belonging to a woman, femi-
nine, female: 1 Pet. iii. 7. (From Hom. down; Sept.) *
yevt}, -aikos, 7; 1. univ. a woman of any age, wheth-
er a virgin, or married, or a widow: Mt. ix. 20; xiii. 33;
xxvil. 55; Lk. xiii. 11; Acts v.14, etc.; 1) pepynoreupérn
rut youn, Lk. ii. 5 RG; 4 vmavdpos yuvn, Ro. vii. 2; yun
xnpa, Lk. iv. 26 (1 K. vii. 2 (14); xvii. 9; femina vidua,
Nep. praef. 4). 2. a wife: 1 Co. vii. 3 sq. 10, 13 sq.;
Eph. v. 22, ete. ; yuvn rivos, Mt. v. 31 sq. ; xix. 8,5; Acts
v. 1,7; 1 Co. vii. 2; Eph. v. 28; Rev. ii. 20 [G@ L WH
mrg.|, etc. of a betrothed woman: Mt. i. 20, 24. 4 yun)
Tov marpos his step-mother: 1 Co. v. 1 (a8 Aws, Lev. xviii.
8). yew yuvaixa: Mt. xiv.43 xxii. 28; Mk. vi. 18 SX
23; Lk. xx. 33; see gyo, I. 2b. fin. ydvat, as a form of
address, may be used — either in indignation, Lk. xxii.
57; or in admiration, Mt. xv. 28; or in kindness and
favor, Lk. xiii. 12; Jn. iv. 21; or in respect, Jn. ii. 4;
xix. 26, (as in Hom. Il. 3, 204; Od. 19, 221; Joseph. antt.
1, 16, 3).
Aafié (the form in Ree. after the more recent codd.
[minuscules, cf. Tdf. on Mt. i. 1, and Treg. on LK. iii.
31]), Aavid (Grsb., Schott, Knapp, Theile, al.), and Aav-
e() (LT Tr WH [on the e see WH. App. p. 155 and
s.v. et,4]; cf. W.p.44; Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 538;
in Joseph. [antt. 6, 8,1 sqq. also Nicol. of Damas. fr. 31 p.
114] Aavidys, -ov), 6, (1, and esp. after the exile 7177,
[i. e. beloved]), David, indecl. name of by far the most
celebrated king of the Israelites: Mt. i.1, 6,17, etc. 7
oxnyn A. Acts xv. 16; 7 Kdels Tod A. Rev. ii. 7; 6 Opovos
A. Lk. i. 32; é6 vids A., a name of the Messiah, viz. the
descendant of David and heir to his throne (see vids,
1b.); 4 pi¢a A. the offspring of David, Rev. v. 5; xxii.
16; % Baowreia rod A. Mk. xi. 10 (see Baowrela, 3); ev
Aavid, in the book of the Psalms of David, Heb. iv. 7 [al.
take it personally, cf. i. 1 sq.; yet see év, I. 1 d.].
Sapovifopar; 1 aor. pass. ptep. Saywoncdeis; (Saiuav) ;
to be under the power of ademon: dd dos Kar &Anv Saypo-
vi¢erat rvxnv, Philem. in Stob. ecl. phys. 1 p. 196; of
the insane, Plut. symp. 7, 5, 4, and in other later auth.
In the N. T. dapomfouevor are persons afflicted with
especially severe diseases, either bodily or mental (such
as paralysis, blindness, deafness, loss of speech, epilepsy,
123
Oatoviov
Téy, 6, (414), indecl. prop. name, Gog, king of the land
_ of Magog [q. v. in BB.DD.], who it is said in Ezek.
XXXViil. sq. will come from the remote north, with innu-
merable hosts of his own nation as well as of allies, and
will attack the people of Israel, reéstablished after the
exile; but by divine interposition he will be utterly de-
stroyed. Hence in Rev. xx. 8 sq. 6 Tey and 6 Mayay
are used collectively to designate the nations that at the
close of the millennial reign, instigated by Satan, will
break forth from the four quarters of the earth against
the Messiah’s kingdom, but will be destroyed by fire
from heaven.*
yovia, -as, 7, [fr. Hdt. down], an angle, i.e. a. an
external angle, corner (Germ. Ecke): rév mrarevdy, Mt.
vi. 5; keadr) ywvias, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx.
17; Actsiv. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 7, (3a wn, Ps. exvii. (exviii.)
22), the head of the corner, i. e. the corner-stone, (axpo-
yoviatos, q. V-); ab Tégoapes yeovia ths ys, the four ex-
treme limits of the earth, Rev. vii. 1; xx. 8. b. like
Germ. Winkel, Lat. angulus, Eng. (internal) corner,
i. q. a secret place: Acts xxvi. 26, (so Plat. Gorg. p. 485 d.
Biov Bidvar ev ywvia, pict. diss. 2, 12,17; [for other ex-
amples see Wetstein on Acts |. c.; Stallbaum on Plato
I. ¢.]).*
A
melancholy, insanity, ete.), whose bodies in the opinion
of the Jews demons (see dauwovov) had entered, and so
held possession of them as not only to afflict them with
ills, but also to dethrone the reason and take its place
themselves; accordingly the possessed were wont to ex-
press the mind and consciousness of the demons dwell-
ing in them; and their cure was thought to require the
expulsion of the demon — [but on this subject see B.D.
Am. ed. s. v. Demoniacs and reff. there; Weiss, Leben
Jesu bk. iii. ch. 6]: Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16, 28,33; ix. 32;
Kil, 22" xv. 225 Mk. i. 32; v.15 sqi; Jn. x. 215) Satuo-
vuobels, that had been possessed by a demon [demons],
Mk. v.18; Lk. viii. 36. They are said also to be 6yAov-
pevor Ud OY amd Tvevpdr@v axabdpror, Lk. vi. 18 [T Tr
WH evoxr.]; Acts v.16; xaradvvacrevdpevot td Tod Sua-
Bodov i. e. by his ministers, the demons, Acts x. 38.*
Sapdvioy, -ov, Td, (neut. of adj. darydros, -a, -ov, divine,
fr. daipwv; equiv. to rd Geto) ; 1. the divine Power,
deity, divinity; so sometimes in prof. auth. as Joseph.
b. j. 1, 2,8; Ael. v. h. 12, 57; in plur. cawa damona,
Xen. mem. 1, 1, 1 sq., and once in the N. T. &éva daupc-
ma, Acts xvil. 18. 2. a spirit, a being inferior to God,
: superior to men [av 76 Saysomov petagv ears Oeod re Kat
Satpoviwdns
Ovnrod, Plat. symp. 23 p. 202 e. (where see Stallbaum)],
in both a good sense and a bad; thus Jesus, after his
resurrection, said to his disciples ov« eipi Sayduoy doa-
parov, as Ienat. (ad Smyrn. 3, 2) records it; mvevpa
Sapoviov dxabdprov (gen. of apposition), Lk. iv. 33;
(movnpov, Tob. iii. 8,17; Satwdvoy 4 mvedpa trovnpdy, ibid.
vi. 8). But elsewhere in the Scriptures used, without
an adjunct, of evil spirits or the messengers and ministers
of the devil [W. 23 (22)]: Lk. iv. 85; ix. 1, 42; x. 17;
Jn. x. 21; Jas. ii. 19; (Ps. xe. (xci.) 6; Is. xiii. 21; xxxiv.
14; Tob. vi. 18; viii. 3; Bar. iv. 35); mvevpara dapovior
(Ree. Sadvov) i.e. of that rank of spirits that are
demons (gen. of appos.), Rev. xvi. 14; dpyov rev dapo-
viov, the prince of the demons, or the devil: Mt. ix. 34;
xii. 24; Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15; they are said eiaépyeoOar
els twa, to enter into (the body of) one to vex him with
diseases (see Saipovitouar): Lk. viii. 30, 32 sq.; &«BAn-
Ojva and é&pyerOar €k Tivos or ao twos, when they are
forced to come out of one to restore him to health: Mt.
ix. 333 xvii. 18% Mk. vii. 29, 80; Lk. iv. 85,41; viii. 2,
33,35. ékBaddew Satpdua, is used of those who compel
demons to come out: Mt. vii. 22; xii. 27 sq.; Mk. i. 34,
39; Lk. ix. 49, ete. yew Saydmov, to have a demon, be
possessed by a demon, is said of those who either suffer
from some exceptionally severe disease, Lk. iv. 33; viii.
27 (ey. dayudma) ; or act and speak as though they were
mad, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; Jn. vii. 20; viii. 48 sq. 52;
x. 20. According to a Jewish opinion which passed
over to the Christians, the demons are the gods of the
Gentiles and the authors of idolatry; hence damova
stands for o>: Ps. xev. (xcvi.) 5, and ow Deut.
xxxii. 17; Ps. ev. (evi.) 37, ef. Bar. iv. 7: mpookuveiv ra
Sayduia Kal ra eidoda, Rev. ix. 20. The apostle Paul,
though teaching that the gods of the Gentiles are a fiction
(1 Co. viii. 4; x. 19), thinks that the conception of them
has been put into the minds of men by demons, who
appropriate to their own use and honor the sacrifices
offered tv idols. Hence what the Gentiles @vovc1, he
says Saipoviots Ovovgw Kal ov Oem, 1 Co. x. 20 (fr. the
Sept. of Deut. xxxii. 17, cf. Bar. iv. 7), and those who
frequent the sacrificial feasts of the Gentiles come into
fellowship with demons, 1 Co. x. 20 sq.; [ef. Baudissin,
Stud. zur semit. Religionsgesch. vol. i. (St. ii. 4) p. 110
sqq-]. Pernicious errors are disseminated by demons
even among Christians, seducing them from the truth,
1 Tim.iv.1. Josephus also makes mention of daipdma
taking possession of men, antt. 6, 11, 2 sq.; 6, 8, 2; 8,
2,5; but he sees in them, not as the N. T. writers do,
bad angels, but the spirits of wicked men deceased, b. ip
7648:
Sarpowddys, -es, (Sayudrov, q. v., and eidos), resembling
or proceeding from an evil spirit, demon-like: Jas. iii. 15.
[Schol. Arstph. ran. 295; Ps. xc. 6 Symm.]*
Saipwv, -ovos, 6, 73 1. in Grk. auth. a god, a god-
dess; an inferior deity, whether good or bad; hence
ayaodaipoves and kaxodaivoves are distinguished [cf. W.
23 (22) ]. 2. Inthe N. T. an evil spirit (see Saipdviov,
2): Mt. viii. 31; Mk. v.12 [RL]; Lk. viii. 29 [RGL
124
Aapacknvos
mrg.]; Rev. xvi. 14 (Rec.); xviii. 2 (where LT Tr WH
Saoviov). [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Demon; cf. dac-
povicopat. | *
Saxvw; tobite; a. prop. withthe teeth. b. metaph.
to wound the soul, cut, lacerate, rend with reproaches:
Gal. v. 15. So even in Hom. Il. 5, 493 piOos dake
pévas, Menand. ap. Athen. 12, 77 p. 552 e., and times
without number in other auth.*
Sdxpv, -vos, 7d, and 70 Sdkpvov, -ov, [fr. Hom. down],
a tear: Mk. ix. 24 RG; Acts xx.19, 31; 2Co.ii.4; 2
Tim. i.4; Heb. v. 7; xii.17. The (nom.) form 76 da-
kpvov in Rev. vii. 17; xxi. 4, (Is. xxv. 8). dat. plur.
dakpvor in Lk. vii. 38, 44, (Ps. exxv. (exxvi.) 5; Lam.
lieth).
Saxptw: 1 aor. éddxpvoca; to weep, shed tears: Jn. xi.
35. [From Hom. down. Syn. see kdala, fin. ]*
SaxrvAtos, -ov, 6, (fr. SdxruAos, because decorating the
fingers), a ring: Lk. xv. 22. (From Hdt. down.) *
Saxrvdos, -ov, 6, [fr. Batrach. 45 and Hdt. down], a
jinger: Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk. xi. 46; xvi. 24; Mk. vii. 33;
Jn. viii. 6 Rec.; xx. 25,27; ev daxrid@ Oeov, by the power
of God, divine efficiency by which something is made
visible to men, Lk. xi. 20 (Mt. xii. 28 ev mvevpare Aeon) ;
Ex. viii. 19, [ef. xxxi. 18; Ps. viii. 4].*
Aadpavovda [on the accent cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 103], n,
Dalmanutha, the name of a little town or village not far
from Magdala [better Magadan (q. v.) ], or lying within
its territory: Mk. viii. 10 (cf. Mt. xv. 39), see Fritzsche
ad loc. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]. Derivation of the name
uncertain; cf. Keim ii. 528 [(Eng. trans. iv. 238), who
associates it with Zalmonah, Num. xxxiii. 41 sq., but
mentions other opinions. Furrer in the Zeitschr. des
Deutsch. Palaestin.-Vereins for 1879, p. 58 sqq. identi-
fies it with Minyeh (abbrev. Manutha, Lat. mensa) ].*
Aodparia [Lehm. Ae\u. (“ prob. Alexandrian but pos-
sibly genuine,” Hort) ], -as, 7, Dalmatia, a part of Ilyri-
cum on the Adriatic Sea; on the east adjoining Pannonia
and upper Moesia, on the north separated from Liburnia
by the river Titius, and extending southwards as far as
to the river Drinus and the city Lissus [ef. Dict. of Geog.
s.v.; Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, ii. 126 sq.; Lewin, St.
Paul, ii. 357]: 2 Tim. iv. 10.*
Sapdtw: 1 aor. edduaca; Pass., [pres. dSaydgouar]; pf.
deSduacpa; [akin to Lat. domo, dominus, Goth. gatam-
jan; Eng. tame; cf. Curtius § 260]; com. fr. Hom.
down; to tame: Mk. v. 4; Jas. iii. 7; to restrain, curb,
THY yAoooar, Jas. iii. 8.*
Sdpadts, -ews, 7, (fem. of 6 SaydAns a young bullock
or steer), @ young cow, heifer, (Aeschyl., Dion. Hal.,
Leian., al.); used in Num. xix. 2, 6, 9 sq. for m5 and
in Heb. ix. 13 of the red heifer with whose ashes, by the
Mosaic law, those were to be sprinkled who had become
defiled. (Besides in Sept. chiefly for my.) *
Adpapis, -d0s, 7, Damaris, a woman of Athens con-
verted by Paul: Acts xvii. 34; [cf. Mey. ad loc.; B. D.
Reeves
Aapacknvds, -7, -ov, of Damascus, Damascene; sub-
stantively of Aawacknvoi: 2 Co. xi. 32.*
Aapackos
Aapackds, -od, 7, Damascus, (Hebr. py), a very an-
cient (Gen. xiv. 15), celebrated, flourishing city of Syria,
lying in a most lovely and fertile plain at the eastern
base of Antilibanus. It had a great number of Jews
among its inhabitants (Joseph. b. j. 2, 20, 2 ef. 7, 8, 7).
Still one of the most opulent cities of western Asia,
having about 109,000 inhabitants [in 1859 about
150,000; of these 6,000 were Jews, and 15,000 Chris-
tians” (Porter)]: Acts ix. 2 sqq.; xxii. 5 sqq.; 2Co. xi.
32; Gal.i.17. (Cf. BB.DD.s.v., esp. Alex.’s Kitto.]*
Saveitw (T WH davife [see I, «]); 1 aor. éSdvecoa (Lk.
vi. 34 Ltxt. TWH Tr mrg.); 1 aor. mid. éSavecoduny ;
(Sdvecov, q. v.); [fr. Arstph. down]; to lend money: Lk.
_ vi. 34 sq.; Mid. to have money lent to one’s self, to take a
loan, borrow (cf. W. § 38,3; Riddell, Platon. idioms,§ 87]:
Mt. v.42. (Deut. xv. 6,8; Prov. xix.17; in Grk. auth.
fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) *
[Syn.: daveiCo, kixpnme: 8. to lend on interest, as a
business transaction ; «fyp. to lend, grant the use of, asa
friendly act.]
Saveov [WH Samor, see I, +], -elov, 7d, (Sdvos a gift),
a loan: Mt. xviii. 27. (Deut. xv. 8; xxiv. 13 (11);
Aristot. eth. Nic. 9, 2, 3; Diod.1, 79; Plut.; al.) *
Savacrys (IT WH danorns [see I,c }), -od, 6, (Saveita,
q. v.), @ money-lender, creditor: Lk. vii. 41. (2 K. iv. 1;
Ps. eviii. (cix.) 11; Prov. xxix. 13; Sir. xxix. 28. Dem.
p- 885, 18; Plut. Sol. 13, 5; de vitand. aere, etc. 7, 8;
ale .)*
Savife, see daveifw.
Aavinar, 6, Owas and OM]7 i. e. judge of God [or God
is my judge]), Daniel, prop. name of a Jewish prophet,
conspicuous for his wisdom, to whom are ascribed the
well-known prophecies composed between B. C. 167-164;
[but cf. BB.DD.]: Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14 Rec.*
[Saviov, see ddverov. |
Savicths, see daverorns.
Sarravaw, -6: fut. daravnoe; 1 aor. édamavnca; (Sardyn) ;
fr. [Hdt. and] Thuc. down; to incur expense, expend,
spend: ti, Mk. v. 26 (1 Mace. xiv. 32); emi with dat. of
pers., for one, in his favor, Acts xxi. 24; tsép twos, 2 Co.
xii. 15. in a bad sense, to waste, squander, consume:
mavra, Lk. xv. 14; wa ev rais ndovais tpav Saravnonte,
that ye may consume, waste what ye receive, in luxuri-
ous indulgence —[év marking the realm in rather than
the object on]: Jas. iv. 3. [Comp.: éx-, mpoc- Saravda. }*
Samdvn, -7s, 7, (fr. daar to tear, consume, [akin are
Seirvoy, Lat. daps; Curtius § 261]), expense, cost: Lk. xiv.
28. (2 Esdr. vi. 4; 1 Mace. iii. 30, ete. Among Grk.
writ. Hes. opp. 721, Pind., Eur., Thuc., et sqq.) *
AavetS and Aavid, see AaBis.
8é (related to 47, as pev to pry, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii.
2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive,
but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more
freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other
books, very rare inthe Epp. of John and the Apocalypse.
[On its general neglect of elision (when the next word
begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App.
p. 146; W.§5,1a.; B.p.10sq.] It is used 1.
125 de
univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is
added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: éay
yap apnre ... eav S€ py adjre, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; éav Se 6
opOudpos xrr. Mt. vi. 23; Aevoovrar Sé yuepar, Mk. ii. 20;
it opposes persons to persons or things previously men-
tioned or thought of,—either with strong emphasis:
eyd dé, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; pets 8¢, 1 Co. i. 23;
2 Co. x. 13; ob de, Mt. vi. 6; dpets dé, MK. viii. 29; of dé
viol tns BaotNetas, Mt. viii. 12; ai ddwmexes... 6 d€ vids
tov avOp. Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58; mas 6 Nads... of dé
Gapicaio, Lk. vii. 29 sq.; 6 O€ mvevparixds, 1 Co. ii. 15,
and often; —or with a slight discrimination, 6 dé, adrés dé:
Mk. i. 45; v.34; vi. 37; vii.6; Mt. xiii. 29, 37,52; xv.
23 sqq.; Lk.iv. 40,435 v. 16; vi. 8; vili. 10,54; xv. 29;
of 6¢, Mt. ii. 5; Mk. iii. 4; viii. 28, etc., etc.; with the addi-
tion also of a prop. name, as 6 dé “Incots: Mt. viii. 22
[Tdf. om. I.]; ix.12[RG Trbr.], 22 [Tdf. om.’I.]; xiii.
57; Mk.i.41[RGLmrg. Tr mrg.]; dmoxp. d€ (6) Sipov,
Lk. vii. 43 RG Lbr.; 7 dé Mapia, Lk. ii. 19, ete. a
pev... O€, see pev. 3. after negative sentences, but,
but rather (Germ. wohl aber): Mt. vi. 19 sq. (uy @noav-
pitere ... Onoaupifere b€); x. 5 sq.; Acts xii. 9,14; Ro.
iii. 4; iv. 5; 1Co.i.10; vii. 37; 1 Th. v. 21 [mot Rec.];
Eph. iv. 14 sq.; Heb. ii. 5 sq.; iv. 18,15; ix. 12; x. 26 sq.;
xii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 12 (ody éavrois tpiv [ Rec. np.] dé); Jas.
dept SSCs lit. 4. it is joined to terms which are re-
peated with a certain emphasis, and with such additions
as tend to explain and establish them more exactly; in
this use of the particle we may supply a suppressed neg-
ative clause [and give its force in Eng. by inserting J
say, and that, so then, ete.]: Ro. iii. 21 sq. (not that com-
mon dkatocvvn which the Jews boast of and strive after,
but dccavoc. dia mictews) ; Ro. ix.30; 1 Co. il. 6 (codiav
d€ 0d Tod aidvos rovrov) ; Gal. ii. 2 (I went up, not of my
own accord, but ete.); Phil. ii. 8; cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii.
2 p. 361 sq.; L. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. ii. col. 928 ; [ef.
W. 443 (412) ]. 5. it serves to mark a transition to
something new (6¢ metabatic) ; by this use of the parti-
cle, the new addition is distinguished from and, as it were,
opposed to what goes before: Mt. i. 18; ii. 19; x. 21;
Lk. xii. 13; xiii. 1; Jn. vii. 14,37; Actsvi. 1; Ro. viii.
28; 1 Co. vii. 1; viii. 1, ete., etc.; so also in the phrase
eyéveto dé, see yivopa, 2 Cc. 6. it introduces explana-
tions and separates them from the things to be explained :
Jn. iii. 19; vi. 39; 1 Co. i. 12; vii. 6, 29; Eph. v. 32, ete. ; —
esp. remarks and explanations intercalated into the dis-
course, or added, as it were, by way of appendix: Mk. v.
13 (Aaav dé ete. R Lbr.) ; xv. 25; xvi. 8[ RG]; Jn. vi.10;
ix. 14; xii. 3; rodro d€ yéyove, Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4. Owing
to this use, the particle not infrequently came to be con-
founded in the Mss. (of prof. writ. also) with ydp; cf.
Winer on Gal. i. 11; Fritzsche on Mk. xiv. 2; also his
Com. on Rom. vol. i. pp. 234, 265; ii. p. 476; iil. p. 196;
[W. 452 (421); B. 363 (312)]. 7. after a parenthe-
sis or an explanation which had led away from the sub-
ject under discussion, it serves to take up the discourse
again [cf. W. 443 (412)]: Mt. iii.4; Lk. iv. 1; Ro. v. 8;
2 Co. ii. 12; v. 8; x. 2; Eph. ii. 4; ef. Klotz ad Devar.
dénaus
ii. 2 p. 376 sq. 8. it introduces the apodosis and,
as it were, opposes it to the protasis: Acts xi.17 R GQ
Mace. xiv. 29; 2 Mace. i. 34); after a participial con-
struction which has the force of a protasis : Col. i. 22 (21);
cf. Matthiae ii. 1470; Kiihner ii. 818; [Jelf § 770]; Klotz
u. s. p. 370 sq.; [B. 364 (312) ]. 9. cat... dé, but...
also, yea and, moreover also: Mt. x. 18; xvi. 18; Lk. ti. 35
[WH txt.om. L Tr br. d¢]; Jn. vi. 513 xv. 27; Acts ili. 24;
xxii. 29; Ro. xi. 23; 2 Tim. iii. 12; 1Jn.i.3; 2 Pet. i.
5; ef. Klotz u.s. p. 645 sq.; B. 364 (312); [also W. 443
(413); Ellic. on 1 Tim. iii. 10; Mey. on Jn. vi. 51]. kat
éav S€ yea even if: Jn. vill. 16. 10. dé never stands
as the first word in the sentence, but generally second ;
and when the words to which it is added cannot be sep-
arated, it stands third (as in Mt. x. 11; xviii. 25; Mk. iv.
34; Lk. x. 31; Acts xvii. 6; xxviii. 6; Gal. iii. 23; 2 Tim.
iii. 8, etc.; in od pdvoy dé, Ro. v. 3, 11, ete.), or even in
the fourth place, Mt. x.18; Jn. vi. 51; viii. 16 sq.; 1 Jn.
iS Ie Conive docu luknecxi. 69 nL W ay:
S€qors, -ews, 7, (Séoua); 1. need, indigence, (Ps. xxi.
(xxii.) 25; Aeschin. dial. 2, 39 sq.; [Plato, Eryx. 405 e.
bis]; Aristot. rhet. 2, 7 [ii. p. 1385*, 27]). 2. a seek-
ing, asking, entreating, entreaty, (fr. Plat. down) ; in the
N.T. requests addressed by men to God (Germ. Bittge-
bet, supplication); univ.: Jas. v.16; 1 Pet. iii. 12; as
often in the Sept., joined with mpocevx7 (i. e. any pious
address to God [see below]): Acts i. 14 Rec.; Eph. vi.
18; Phil. iv. 6; plur. 2 Tim. i. 3; joined with mpocevyxai,
1 Tim. v. 5; with ynoreta, Lk. ii. 37; moveiaOar dénov,
Phil. i. 4; a. Senoecs, Lk. v. 33; 1 Tim. ii. 1. contextu-
ally, of prayers imploring God’s aid in some particular
matter: Lk. i. 13; Phil. i.19; plur. Heb. v. 7; suppli-
cation for others: [2 Co.i. 11]; mepi tuwvos, Eph. vi. 18;
imép twos, 2 Co. ix. 14; Phil. i. 4; with the addition
mpos Tov Oedv, Ro. x. 1.*
[Syn. dé€no.s, tpocevxh, vreviis: mp., as Prof.
Grimm remarks, is unrestricted as respects its contents,
while 5. is petitionary; moreover mp. isa word of sacred char-
acter, being limited to prayer to God, whereas 8. may also be
used of a request addressed toman. In Byzantine Grk. it is
used of a written supplication (like our petition) ; cf. Soph.
Lex.s.v. See more at length Trench § li.; also Bp. Lehtft.
on Phil. iv. 6; Ellic. on Eph. vi. 18; ef. Schmidt ch. vii. In
1 Tim. ii. 1 to these two words is added @revtis, which ex-
presses confiding access to God; thus, in combination, dénots
gives prominence to the expression of personal need, mpoc-
evxh to the element of devotion, évrevgis to that of child-
like confidence, by representing prayer as the heart’s con-
verse with God. See Huther’s extended note ad loc. ; Ellic.
ad loc.; Trench u. s.]
Set; subjunc. pres. dé); impf. ¢e; an impers. verb
[ef. B. § 132, 12; cf. § 131, 3; fr. Hom. down]; (déa,
sc. Tivos, to have need of, be in want of; ef. Germ. es
bedarf), it ts necessary, there is need of, it behooves, is
right and proper, foll. either by the inf. alone (cf. our
one ought), or by the acc. with inf. [ef. B. 147 (129)],
it denotes any sort of necessity; as a. necessity
lying in the nature of the case: Jn. iii. 30; 2 Tim. ii.
6. b. necessity brought on by circumstances or by
126
OELKVUW
the conduct of others toward us: Mt. xxvi. 35 (kay d€n
pe dnoaveiv), cf. Mk. xiv. 31; Jn. iv. 4; Acts xxvii. 21;
2 Co. xi. 30; [xii. 1 LT Tr WH txt.]; or imposed by a
condition of mind: Lk. 11. 49; xix. 5. c. necessity in
reference to what is required to attain some end: Lk.
xii. 12; Jn. iii. 7; Acts ix. 6; xvi. 30; 1 Co. xi. 19; Heb.
ix. 26 (on this cf. W. 283 (266); [also B. 216 (187) ;
225 (195)]); Heb. xi. 6. d. a necessity of law and
command, of duty, equity: Mt. xviii. 33; xxiii. 23; Lk.
Mi AQ; ox 4s xy. S2ee XV RXTE 20s
Acts v. 29; xv. 5; Ro. i. 27 (dvtiypioOiav, qv eer, sc. drro-
AapBaverOa, the recompense due by the law of God);
Ro. viii. 26; xii. 3; 1 Co. viii. 2, ete. or of office: Lk.
iv.48; xiii. 33; Jn.ix.4; x.16; Eph. vi. 20; Col. iv. 4;
2 Tim. ii. 24. e. necessity established by the counsel
and decree of God, esp. by that purpose of his which
relates to the salvation of men by the intervention of
Christ and which is disclosed in the O. T. prophecies :
Mt. xvii. 10; xxiv.6; Mk.ix.11; Actsiv.12; 1 Co. xv.
53; in this use, esp. of what Christ was destined finally
to undergo, his sufferings, death, resurrection, ascen-
sion: Lk. xxiv. 46[RGLUbr.]; Mt. xxvi. 54; Jn. iii. 14;
Acts iii. 21, ete. (of the necessity of fate in Hdt. 5, 33;
with the addition xara 16 Oeompomov, 8,53; Thue. 5, 26.)
[Syn.: 57, xp: def seems to be more suggestive of
moral obligation, denoting esp. that constraint which arises
from divine appointment ; whereas xp signifies rather the
necessity resulting from time and circumstance. Schmidt
ch. 150.]
Setypa, -ros, To, (Selxvupe) 5 a. prop. thing shown.
b. a specimen of any thing, example, pattern: mupos
aiwviov, set forth as a warning, Jude 7. (From Xen.,
Plat., Isocr. down.) *
Seayparitw: 1 aor. ederyyatica; (Setypa); to make an.
example of, to show as an example; twa, to expose one
to disgrace (cf. mapadetypatifw, Oeatpifw): Mt.i.19 LT
Tr WH; Col. ii. 15. A word unknown to Grk. writ.
[Cf. Act. Petr. et Paul. § 33; W. 25 (24); 91 (87);
Sevypariocpds occurs on the Rosetta stone, line 30; Boeckh,
Inserr. 4697. Comp. : mapa-Serypario. |*
Sexviw (Secxvdew, Mt. xvi. 21; Seccviers, Jn. ii. 18; Tod
decxvvorros, Rev. xxii. 8 [not Tdf.]) and Seievupe (1 Co.
xii. 31; Mt.iv.8; Jn. v. 20; cf. B. 45 (39)); fut. deiéo;
1 aor. ea; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. derxyGeis (Heb. viii. 5) ;
Sept. mostly for ANW; to show, exhibit ; 1. prop. to
show 1. e. expose to the eyes: twi Tt, Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 5;
xx. 24 (for Rec. emdcié.); xxii. 12; xxiv. 40 [RGL,
but Tom. Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Mk. xiv. 15; Jn.
xx. 20; Acts vii. 3; 680v tux, metaph., in which one
ought to go, i. e. to teach one what he ought to do, 1 Co.
xl. 31; xard rév tumov tov SetyOevra cor, Heb. viii. 5;
éaurov Secxyvuvat tivi to expose one’s self to the view of
one, Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; Setéov fyiv cov
marépa render the Father visible to us, Jn. xiv. 8 sq.; of
things presented to one in a vision: tui rt, Rev. xvii. 1;
XXL. 9 sq.; xxii. 1,8; Seféad rum, a Set yever Oa, Rey. i. 1;
iv. 1; xxil. 6. to show, i. q. to bring to pass, produce
what can be seen (Germ. sehen lassen) ; of miracles per-
Seudla
formed in presence of others to be seen by them: onpeiov,
Jn. il. 18, (Bar. vi. [1. e. ep. Jer.] 66; ojpa, Hom. Od. 3,
174; Il. 13, 244); épya &k twos, works done by the aid
of one, Jn. x. 32; rip émipavecav "Incod Xpiorod, spoken
of God, as the author of Christ’s visible return, 1 Tim.
vi. 15; épya Secxview is used differently in Jn. v. 20, to
show works to one for him to do. 2. metaph. a.
with acc. of the thing, fo give the evidence or proof of a
thing: miotw, Jas. ii. 18; Ti &k Twos, as rHv miotw ex TeV
épyar, ibid.; ra épya ex ths Kans avaorpopijs, Jas. ili. 13.
b. to show by words, to teach: foll. by ér, Mt. xvi. 21
(d:ddoxerv in Mk. viii. 31 for Seccvdew); foll. by an inf.
Acts x. 28. [Comp.: dva-, dmo-, év-, émt-, dro-Seikvupe. | *
Setdia, -as, 7, (SetAds), timidity, fearfulness, cowardice :
2Tim.i.7. (Soph., [Hdt.], Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc., and
subseq. writ.) *
[Syn. detAla, $d Bos, edAdBera: “of these three words
the first is used always in a bad sense; the second is a mid-
dle term, capable of a good interpretation, capable of an evil,
and lying pretty evenly between the two; the third is quite
predominantly used in a good sense, though it too has not
altogether escaped being employed in an evil.” Trench § x.
q. v.; cf. déos.|
Sedridw, -@; (derdla, q. v.) ; to be timid, fearful: In. xiv.
27. (Deut. xxxi. 6; i. 21 and often in Sept.; Sir. xxii.
16; xxxi. (xxxiv.) 16; 4 Mace. xiv. 4. Diod. 20, 78.
The Greeks prefer the comp. amodetAa.) *
SetAds, -7, -ov, (OeiSa to fear), timid, fearful: Mt. viii.
26; Mk. iv. 40; in Rev. xxi. 8 of Christians who through
cowardice give way under persecutions and apostatize.
(From Hom. down.) *
Sciva, 6, 7, 70; gen. Seivos; dat. dei; acc. Tov, Thy, TO
Sciva (cf. Matthiae § 151), such a one, a certain one, i. e.
one whose name I cannot call on the instant, or whose
name it is of no importance to mention; once in the
Scriptures, viz. Mt. xxvi. 18. (Arstph., Dem., al.) *
Servds, adv., (Oeuvds), terribly, grievously: Mt. viii. 6 ;
Lk. xi. 53. [From Hdt. down.]*
Samvew, -@: [fut. deuvnow]; 1 aor. eSeimynoa; (det-
mvov); to sup: Lk. xvii. 8; xxii. 20 [WH reject the
whole pass., see their App.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; in an alle-
gory, Seervnow per airod, I will make him to share in
my most intimate and blissful intercourse: Rev. iii. 20.*
Scimvov, -ov, Td, and acc. to a rare and late form 6
Seimvos in Lk. xiv. 16 Lchm. [ef. Tdf. on Rev. xix. 9, 17,
also W. 65 (64); on deriv. cf. damdvnj, (in Hom. the
morning meal or breakfast, cf. Passow [more fully L. and
S.]s.v.; this the Greeks afterwards call 6 dpucrov q. v.
[and reff. there], designating as 76 deimvov the evening
meal or supper) ; 1. supper, esp. a formal meal usu-
ally held at evening: Lk. xiv. 17, 24; Jn. xiii. 2, 4; XX.
20; plur.: Mt. xxiii. 6; Mk. xii. 39; Lk. (xi. 43 Lehm.
in br.) ; xx. 46; used of the Messiah’s feast, symbolizing
salvation in the kingdom of heaven: Rev. xix. 9, 17;
kuptakoy Seimvoy (see kuptakds, 1), 1 Co. xi. 20; srovety
Seinvovy, Lk. xiv. 12 (dpscrov 4 Seimvov); 16 (Dan. v. 1
[Theodot.]); with the addition ri, Mik, vie 21 dn:
xii. 2. 2. univ. food taken at evening: 1 Co. xi. 21.*
127
Aexatronus
Seacdarpovia, -as, 7, (Serodaipov), fear of the yods; 1.
in a good sense, reverence for the gods, piety, religion :
Polyb. 6, 56, 7; Joseph. antt. 10, 3, 2; kal GeoduArjs
Bios, Diod. 1, 70. 2. i. q. 9 Sevdia mpds 7d Sarpdvioy
(Theophr. char. 16 (22) init. [cf. Jebb p. 263 sq. ]) 5 su-
perstition : [Polyb. 12, 24,5]; Plut. [Sol. 12, 4]; Alex. 75,
1; de adulat. et am. 25, and in his Essay qepi ris Secor
datpovias; Antonin. 6, 30 OeooeBis xopis derorSaovias.
3. religion, in an objective sense; in which sense Jose-
phus, antt. 19, 5, 3, says Claudius commanded the Jews
py Tas TOV Grow €Ovav Seco Warpovias eEovdevitew. Festus
in the presence of Agrippa the Jewish king employs
the word ambiguously and cautiously, in Acts xxv. 19,
of the Jewish religion, viz. so as to leave his own judg-
ment concerning its truth in suspense. Cf. Zezschwitz,
Profangriicitiit u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 59; [K. F. Her-
mann, Lehrb. d. gottesdienstl. Alterthiimer, §8 note 6;
Trench § xlviii.; (cf. Kenrick, Bibl. Essays, 1864, p. 108
sqq.; Mield, Otium Norv. iii. p. 80 sq.) ].*
Seror-Salpwv, -ov, gen. -ovos, (Seidw to fear, and daipor
deity), fearing the deity or deities, like the Lat. religiosus 3
used either 1. ina good sense, reverencing god or the
gods, pious, religious: Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 58; Ages. 11, 8;
Aristot. pol. 5,11 [p. 1315%, 1]; or 2. in abad sense,
superstitious : Theophr. char. 16 (22); Diod. 1, 62; 4,
51; Plut. de adul. c. 16; de superstit. c. 10 sq. Paul
in the opening of his address to the Athenians, Acts
xvii. 22, calls them, with kindly ambiguity, cara mdvra
SevaSayoveorepovs (sc. than the rest of the Greeks LW.
244 (229)], cf. Meyer ad loc.), as being devout without
the knowledge of the true God; cf. Bengel ad loc.*
Ska, of. at, ra, [fr. Hom. down], ten: Mt. xx. 24, ete.
brivis nep@v Séxa, i.e. to last a short time: Rey. ii. 10;
ef. Dan. i. 12, 14; Num. xi. 19; Ter. heaut. 5, 1, 36
decem dierum vix mi est familia.
Sexa-5¥o, rare in the earlier writ., frequent in the later
(see Passow s. v. deka [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v.; cf. W. 23
(22); Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18]), and in Sept.; i. q.
dadexa, twelve: Acts xix. 7 and xxiv. 11, in both places
LT Tr WH 6adexa; [Rev. xxi. 16 Tdf. edd. 2, 7].*
[Sexa-ێ, sixteen: Rev. xiii. 18 Lmrg. (Sept. al.) *]
[Sexa-oxrd for déxa kal dxra, eighteen: Tdf. in Lk. xiii. 4,
11, but WH om. L Tr br. kai; cf. s. v. cai, I. 1 b.*]
Scxa-névre, for the earlier evrexaidexa, fifteen: Jn. xi.
18; Acts xxvii. 28; Gal. i. 18; [Gen. vii. 20 Ald.,
Compl.; Ex. xxvii. 15; 1 Mace. x. 40; Polyb. 3, 56, 3
var.; Diod. 2,13; Plut. Dion 38, 1; al.; cf. dexadvo].*
Acké-roAts, -ews, 9, Decapolis (regio decapolitana, Plin.
h. n. 5, 16.17), i.e. a region embracing ten cities. This
name is borne by a district of the tribe of Manasseh
beyond the Jordan and bordering upon Syria, embrac-
ing ten principal cities with smaller towns also scattered
in among them. But the ancient geographers vary in
their enumeration of these ten cities. Pliny ]. c. reckons
Damascus among them, which Josephus seems to have
excluded, calling Scythopolis peyiorny ris Sexarodeos,
b. j. 8, 9, 7. All seem to agree in this, that Gadara,
Hippo, Pella and Seythopolis were of the number. Cf.
dexatéooapes
Win. RWB. s. v. Decapolis; Vaihinger in Herzog iii.
325 sq.; Riehm, HWB. 266 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v.]: Mt.
iv. 25; Mk. v. 20; vii. 31.*
Sexa-rérorapes, -cv, ol, ai, -capa, Ta, fourteen : WOE Th ee
2 Co. xii. 2; Gal. ii 1. [Gen. xxxi.41; Tob. viii. 19; x.
7; Polyb. 1, 36, 11; cf. dexadvo. | *
Sexdrn, -ns, }, (dékaros), the tenth part of any thing,
a tithe; specially the tenth part of booty taken from the
enemy: Heb. vii. 2,4; the tithes of the fruits of the
earth and of the flocks, which, by the law of Moses, were
presented to the Levites in the congregation of Israel:
Heb. vii. 8 sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Simon. 133 Bgk. ;
Hat. 2, 135]; 4, 152 down; Sept. for Vwyn.) [CE
BB.DD. s. v. Tithe. ]*
Séxaros, -7, -ov, (Séxa), [fr. Hom. down], the tenth: Jn.
i. 39 (40); Rev. xxi. 20; 1d déxarov, subst., the tenth
part: Rev. xi. 13.* ,
Sexarda, -G: pf. dedexarwxa; pf. pass. dedexdrwpar; (dé-
xaros); to exact or receive the tenth part (for which Grk.
writ. use Sexaredo [W. 24]): with acc. of pers. from
_ whom, Heb. vii. 6 [on the pf. cf. W. § 40, 4a.; Lght/t.
St. Clement, App. p. 414]; Pass. to pay tithes (Vulg.
decimor): Heb. vii. 9. (Neh. x. 37.) [Comp.: dzo-
dexarow. | *
Sexrds, -7, -ov, (Séyouar), accepted, acceptable: Lk. iv.
24; Phil. iv. 18; tui, Acts x. 35; the phrases xacpds
dexrés, 2 Co. vi. 2 (Is. xlix. 8 for ji¥9 Nyy), and éewavrds
dexrés, Lk. iv. 19 (Is. lxi. 2 for f¥7 3), denote that
most blessed time when salvation and the free favors of
God profusely abound. (Ex. xxviii. 34; Is. lvi. 7, [ete.].
Among prof. auth. used by Jambl. protr. symb. § 20
p- 350.) *
Sehedtw ; [pres. pass. eAeaCouar]; (S€Aeap a bait); 1.
prop. to bait, catch by a bait: Xen. mem. 2, 1, 4, et al.
2. as often in prof. auth., metaph. to beqguile by blandish-
ments, allure, entice, deceive: twd, 2 Pet. ii. 14, 18; Jas.
i. 14, on this pass. cf. Philo, quod omn. prob. lib. § 22
mpos emOupias edavverat i) up nOovijs Seheaerau.*
[Acdparia see Aadyaria. |
S€vBpov, -ov, 74, a tree: Mt. vii. 17, ete.; yiverOar dévdpov
or efs dévdpor, to grow to the shape and size of a tree,
Mt. xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19. [(Hom., Hat.), Arstph.,
Thue. down. |
Se£o-Bddos, -ov, 6, (fr. defuds and BadrAw), throwing with
the right hand, a slinger, an archer: Acts xxiii. 23 in
Lchm. ed. min.; cf. the foll. word.*
SeftoAGBos, -ov, 6, (SeEids and AapBdvw), a word un-
known to the earlier writ., found in Constant. Por-
phyrogenitus (10th cent.) de them. 1, 1, who speaks
of deEvoAaBor, as a kind of soldiers, in company with
bow-men (rofoPédpor) and peltasts; [they are also men-
tioned by Theoph. Simoe. (hist. 4, 1) in the 7th cent. ;
see the quotations in Meyer]. Since in Acts xxiii. 23
two hundred of them are ordered to be ready, appar-
ently spearmen are referred to (carrying a lance in the
right hand); and so the Vulg. has taken it. The great
number spoken of conflicts with the interpretation of
those who suppose them to be soldiers whose duty it was
128
deEvos
to guard captives bound by a chain on the right hand.
Meyer ad loc. understands them to be [either] javelin-
men [or slingers ].*
Sefids, -d, -dv, (fr. d€éyopar, fut. SeEopar, or fr. déxw, which
is akin to defkvups; prop. of that hand which is wont to
take hold of as well as to point out; just as d&vos comes fr.
déw, fut. of dyw; [cf. Curtius §§ 11, 266]), the right: Mt.
v. 29, 39; Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xvili. 10; Rev. x. 2; 4 de&a
xelp, Mt. v. 30; Lk. vi. 6; Acts iii. 7; Rev. i. 16; xiii.
16; and (with yetp omitted) 7 defa (like 4 dpiorepa),
Mt. vi. 3; xxvii. 29; Rev. i. 20; ii.1; v.73 éemirny defcav
[on the right hand i. e.] at the right side, Rev. v. 1 [but
al. take it more closely, in the right hand; cf. vs. 7 and
xx. 1]; dddvae ryv Seévdy or ras Seéids, to pledge either
a mutual friendship, or a compact, by joining the right
hands: Gal. ii. 9 (1 Mace. vi. 58; xi. 50, 62, 66; xiii. 50;
2 Mace. xi. 26; xii. 11; xiii. 22; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur.
ii. pp. 566 and 599; and in prof. auth. as Xen. an. 1, 6,
6; 2,5, 3; Joseph. antt. 18, 9, 3 defcav re cat mloriv Siddvae
rw); God is said to have done something 17 Se&a adrovd
with his right hand i.e., ace. to Hebr. idiom, by his own
power [ef. W. 214 (201) ]: Acts ii. 33; v. 31; ra émda ra
de&ca, arms carried in the right hand and used for attack,
as the sword, the spear, kal dpiorepa those carried in the
left hand, for the purpose of defence, as the shield: 2
Co. vi. 7; ra deEtad pepn Tod mAoiov, Jn. xxi. 6. Ta deLa
the right side [W.176 (166)]: Mk. xvi. 5; &k deEav
twos on one’s right hand (Lat. ad alicutus dextram), Mt.
xxv. 33 sq.; xxvii. 38; Mk. xv. 27; Lk.i.11; xxiii. 33;
evar, Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8, he is at my right
hand, sc. asa leader, to sustain me). Asin thisexpression
the Greeks use the prep. éx, so the Hebrews sometimes
use 1) (11) from i.e. at the right, 9 Oyxp from i.e.
at the side of any one) and the Romans ab (sedere a
dextra alicuius, proximum esse ab aliquo), because they
define the position of one standing or sitting next another
by proceeding from the one next to whom he is said to
stand or sit [cf. W. 367 (344)]. KaOioa ex deévdv x. &&
eVavipev Tivos Bacidéas, to occupy the places of honor
nearest the king, Mt. xx. 21, 23; Mk. x. 37, 40; (aw
| pp, 1 K.ii.19; Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 10). Hence, after
Ps. cix. (cx.) 1 as applied to the Messiah (Mt. xxii. 44;
Mk. xii. 36; Lk. xx. 42), Christ is said to have ascended
caOnoGa or kabicat ex defcav (at or on the right hand) of
God, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; xvi. 19; Lk. xxii. 69;
Acts ii. 34; Heb. i. 13; etvae or xaOioat év deéa r. Oeod,
Ro. viii. 34; Eph. i. 20; Col. iii. 1; Heb. i. 3; viii.1; x.12;
xii. 2, — to indicate that he has become a partner in God’s
universal government (cf. Knapp, De J. Chr. ad dextram
dei sedente, in his Scripta var. arg. p. 41 sqq-; [ Stuart,
Com. on Heb., excurs. iv.]). That these expressions are
tobe understood in this figurative sense, and not of a fixed
and definite place in the highest heavens (as Chr. Fr.
Fritzsche in Nov. Opusce. acad. p. 209 sqq. tries to prove,
after the orthodox theologians of the reformed church),
will be questioned by no one who carefully considers
Rev. iii. 21. Christ is once spoken of as éords éx Sega
Tov Oeov, as though in indignation at his adversaries [ace.
Sévpar
to others, to welcome his martyred servant] he had risen
from his heavenly throne, Acts vii. 55 sq-
Séopor; 3 pers. sing. impf. édero (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 220; W. 46; [Veitch s. v. dw to need fin.]), Lk. viii.
38 (where Lchm. édeciro, Tr WH é8eiro 3 cf. Mey. ad loc.;
[WH. App. p. 166]; B.55 (48)); 1 aor. édenOnv; (fr.
dé to want, need; whence mid. déoua to stand in need
of, want for one’s self); [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to want,
lack: twos. 2. to desire, long for: trwés. 3. to ask,
beg, (Germ. bitten); a. univ. —the thing asked for be-
ing evident from the context: with gen. of the pers. from
whom, Gal. iv. 12; the thing sought being specified
in direct discourse: Lk. v. 12; viii. 28; ix. 38 (acc. to
the reading ériBdeyov RL); Acts viii. 34 (Sonal cov,
mepi Tivos 6 mpopnrns héyer TodTo; of whom, I pray thee,
doth the prophet say this?); Acts xxi. 39; 2 Co. v. 20;
foll. by the inf., Lk. viii. 38; ix. 38 (acc. to the reading
emBrevrar Tr WH); Acts xxvi. 3 (whereG LT Tr WH
om. god after déouar) ; foll. by tva, Lk. ix. 40 (cf. W. 335
(315) ; [B. 258 (222)]); foll. by ro with inf. 2 Co. x. 2
[ef. B. 263 (226), 279 (239); W. 321, 322 (301 sq.)];
with gen. of pers. and ace. of thing, 2 Co. viii.4 (GL T
Tr WH; for Ree. adds dé£acOat nyas without warrant),
[ef. B. 164 (143); W.198 (186)]. b. spec. of requests
addressed to God ; absol. to pray, make supplication: Acts
iv. 31; rov Oeod, Acts x. 2; foll. by ef dpa, Acts viii. 22
[B. 256 (220); W. 300 (282)]; rod cupiov, dmas etc. Mt.
ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; without the gen. deod, — foll. by et ras,
Ro. i. 10 [ef. W. and B. ll. ce.]; by twa, Lk. xxi. 36 ; xxii.
32; by the telic eis ré, 1 Th. iii. 10 [cf. B. 265 (228)];
umép Twos mpos Toy KUpLoV, mas, Acts Vill. 24. [SYN. see
airéw and Sénois. COomMpP.: mpoo-déopar. | *
Séov, -ovros, ro, (ptep. of dei, q. v-), fr. [Soph. and] Hat.
down, that of which there is need, which is requisite, due,
proper: déov éori there is need, 1 Pet. i. 6 [T Tr txt. WH
om. Tr mrg. br. é.]; foll. by ace. with inf. Acts xix. 36;
Ta py) deovra that are not proper, 1 Tim. v. 13.*
8€os, -ovs, Td, (Seidw), [fr. Hom. down], fear, awe: pera
evAaBelas kai déovs, Heb. xii. 23 L T Tr WH.*
[Syn. 5é0s (apprehension), $6 Bos (fear): Ammonius s. v.
3. says dé0s Kad PdBos diapeper: Séos wey ydp ears ToAVXpé-
vios Kakod bmdvoia. PpoBos dé 7 mapavtixa mrdnots. Plato
(Laches p. 198b.) : dé0s yap elvar mpooSoKlay weAAoVTOS KaKod.
Cf. Stallbaum on Plato’s Protag. p. 167; Schmidt ch. 139 ;
and see s. v. detA‘a.|
AepBaios, -ov, 6, of Derbe, a native of Derbe: Acts xx. 4.*
AépBn, -ns, 7, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia, on the confines
of Isauria, [on its supposed site see Lewin, St. Paul, i.
151 sq.; B.D.s.v.; cf. Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, Index
8. v.)]: Acts xiv. 6,20; xvi. 1.*
Séppa, -ros, 7d, (fr. dépw or deipw, as Képpa fr. keipw), a
skin, hide, leather: Heb. xi. 37. (Hom. et sqq.) *
Seppdrivos, -n, -ov, (S¢ppa), made of skin, leathern (Vulg.
pelliceus): Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6; cf. 2 K.i. 8. (Hom.,
Hat., Plat., Strab., al.) *
8épw; 1 aor. Zderpa; 2 fut. pass. dapnoopar ; ato
flay, skin: Hom. Il. 1,459; 23, 167, ete. 2. to beat,
thrash, smite, (cf. Germ. durchgerben, [low Eng. hide]), so
sometimes in prof. auth. fr. Arstph. ran. 619 [cf. vesp.
9
129
deopoptraké
485] down: rd, Mt. xxi. 85; Mk. xii. 3,5; Lk. xx. 10
sq.; xxii. 63; Jn. xviii. 23; Acts v. 40; xvi. 37; xxii.
19; els mpdowmov S€pew twd, 2 Co. xi. 20; dépa dépew
(see dnp), 1 Co. ix. 26; Pass.: Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xii. 47
(Sapnoerat moANds, sc. mAnyds, will be beaten with many
stripes) ; 48, (ddiyas, cf. Xen. an. 5, 8, 12 malew oAtyas,
Soph. El. 1415 raiew dumdjv, Arstph. nub. 968 (972)
tomrecOar moddds, Plat. lege. 8 p. 845 a. paortyovc bat
mAnyas; cl. [W. 589 (548)]; B. [82 (72)]; § 134, 6).*
Seopetw; [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. eSeopedtero (Lk.
viii. 29 T Tr WH)]; (Seopds); a. to put in chains:
Lk. viii. 29 T Tr WH; Acts xxii. 4; (Sept. Judg. xvi. 11;
Eur. Bacch. 616; Xen. Hier. 6, 14; Plat. leoo. 7 p.
808 d.). b. to bind up, bind together: gopria, Mt. xxiii.
4; (Spdypara, Gen. xxxvii.7; Judith viii. 3. [Hes. opp.
479, al.]).*
Seopew, -@ : [impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. éSecpetro] ; to bind,
tie: Lk. vili.29 RG L; see deopedo. ([Aristot. de plant.
1 2)p. 817215 al.||;: Heliod. 8,19.) *
S€opn, -ns, or as others write it [e. g. Rec.st T; yet cf.
Lob. Paralip. p. 396; Chandler § 132] decpn, -js, 7, (dé),
a bundle: Mt. xiii. 30. (Ex. xii. 22. Dem., Dion.
Hal., al.) *
Sérptos, -ov, 6, bound, in bonds, a captive, a prisoner,
[fr. Soph. down]: Mt. xxvii. 15 sq.; Mk. xv. 6; Acts
XVI, 25, 27; xxiii. 18; xxv. 14, 27; xxviii. 16 [RG],
17; Heb. x. 34 GLT Tr txt. WH; xiii. 3; 6 déopu0¢
Tov Xpiorod "Inood, whom Christ, i. e. his truth which I
have preached, has put in bonds (W. 189 (178) ; [B. 169
(147)]), Eph. iii. 1; 2 Tim.i.8 ; Philem. 1, 9; in the same
sense 6 déopu0s ev kupio, Eph. iv. 1; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on
Philem. 13].*
Serpds, -od, 6, (dé), [fr. Hom. down], a band or bond:
Mk. vii. 35 (€Av6n 6 Seopds THs yAwoons airod, i. e. the
impediment in his speech was removed); Lk. xiii. 16
(AvOjvat amd Tod Secpod, of a woman bowed together,
held fast as it were by a bond). The plur. form 7d de-
opa, the more com. form in Grk. writ. (W. 63 (62) [cf. B.
23 (21); see below]), is found in Lk. viii. 29; Acts xvi.
26; xx. 23; the other form of decpol in Phil. i. 13 (dor
rovs Seapovs pov havepors ev Xprore yeveoOar, so that my
captivity became manifest as made for the cause of Christ),
[Seopa sunt’ vincula quibus quis constringitur, sed de-
opos est in carcerem conjectio et captivitas in vinculis ...
Utraque forma et ceteri Graeci omnes et Attici utuntur,
sed non promiscue ut inter se permutari possint.” Cobet
as quoted in Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 353]; the gen.
and dat. in Acts xxii. 30 Rec.; xxiii. 29; xxvi. 29, 31;
Phil. i. 7, 14, 16 (17); Col. iv. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 9; Philem.
10; Heb. x. 34 R Tr mrg.; xi. 36 ; Jude 6; év rots Seapois
rov evayyeAlov, in the captivity into which the preaching
of the gospel has thrown me, Philem. 13 [W. 189 (178) ;
ef. ref. s. v. Séopuos, fin. }.*
Seopo-iraf, -xos, 6, (Seopds and pvraé, like @ycavpo~
pira€ [cf. W. 100 (95)]), a keeper of a prison, a jailer :
Acts xvi. 23, 27,36. (Joseph. antt. 2, 5,1; Leian. Tox.
30; [Artem. oneir. 3, 60; al.]; dpxySeopoptrag, Gen
XxXxix. 21-23.)*
Seapwrnptov
Seopwrhprov, -ov, 76, a prison, jail: Mt. xi. 2; Acts v.
21,23; xvi. 26. (Gen. xl. 3; [Hat.], Thuc., Plat., Dem.,
Ale) ie
Seopadrns, -ov, 6, one bound, a prisoner: Acts xxvil.
1,42. (Gen. xxxix. 20; Bar. i.9; Hdt., Aeschyl., Soph.,
Thuc., subseq. writ.) *
Seomérys, -ov, 6, [fr. Pind. down], a master, lord (as of
SovAor, ofkérar): 1 Tim. vi. 1, [2]; 2 Tim. ii. 21; Tit. ii.
9; 1 Pet. ii. 18; God is thus addressed by one who calls
himself his dodAos: Lk. ii. 29, cf. Acts iv. 24, 29, (Seore-
ts Tov mavrav, Job v. 8; Sap. vi. 8) ; Christ is so called,
as one who has bought his servants, 2 Pet. ii. 1; rules
over his church, Jude 4 [some take 6. here as designating
God; cf. R. V. mrg.]; and whose prerogative it is to
take vengeance on those who persecute his followers,
Rev. vi. 10.*
[Syn. deomdrys, kUptos: 5. was strictly the correla-
tive of slave, SodAo0s, and hence denoted absolute ownership
and uncontrolled power; «vpios had a wider meaning, appli-
cable to the various ranks and relations of life, and not sug-
gestive either of property or of absolutism. Ammonius s. v.
deomdrns says 8. 6 TOY apyupwryhtwy: KUptos OE Kab TaTHp viod
kad ards Tis éavtov. So Philo, quis rer. div. heres § 6 éare
tov Seamdrny Kvpioyv civat Kad ett woavel poBepdy KuUpiov, od
udvov Td Kdpos kal Td Kpdtos amdyTwv aynuuevoy, GAAG Kar
déos Kal pdBoy tkavdy éumorqoa. Cf. Trench § xxviii.; Wool-
sey, in Bib. Sacr. for 1861, p. 599 sq.; Schmidt ch. 161, 5.]
Sectpo, adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. of place, a. hither;
to this place. b. in urging and calling, here! come!
(Sept. esp. for 9 and 7139): Mt. xix. 21; Mk. x. 21; Lk.
xviii. 22 ; Jn. xi. 43 (Sedpo €Ew come forth). Acts vii. 34;
Rey. xvii. 1; xxi. 9; Sedpo eis yay, jv krd. Acts vil. 3
(dedpo eis rv oikdv gov, 1 K.i. 53; ets Trodeuaida, 1 Mace.
xli.45). 2. of time, hitherto, now: dypt tod dedpo up to
this time, Ro.i.13 (uéxpe Sedpo, [Plat. lege. 7 p. 811 cals
Athen. 1, 62 p. 34.c.; Plut. vit. Num. 4; Pomp. 24).*
Seire, adv., used when two or more are addressed [cf.
B. 70 (61)]; perhaps fr. dedp’ ire [yet see Bitm. Gram.
2ite Aufl. § 115 Anm. 8], see Sedpo, 1; irs Hom:
down, come hither, come here, come: foll. by an impv.,
detre, kAnpovounoare, Mt. xxv. 34; Sedre, iSere, Mt. xxviii.
6; Jn. iv. 29; Sedre, dpvotnoare, Jn. Xxi. 12; Sedre, cvvd-
xOnre (Ree. 8. kal cuvdyerGe), Rev. xix. 17. dSedre dricw
pov come after me, be my disciples: Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17,
(equiv. to INS 3199, 2 K. vi. 19); debre eds 7. yapous, Mt.
Xxil. 4; eis épnuov rémov, Mk. vi. 31; Sedre mpds pe, Mt.
xi. 28. 2. It gets the force of an interjection, come !
come now ! foll. by a hortat. subj.: Sedre, dmoxreivaper,
Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. xii. 7 and RG in Lk. xx. 14. (Sept.
mostly for 334, sometimes for 3"3.) *
Sevtepatos, -aia, -aiov, (Sevrepos), [Hdt., Xen., al.], of
or belonging to the second; of one who comes, or does a
thing, on the second day (cf. rpuraios, rerapraios, etc.) :
Sevrepator FAPoper, Acts xxviii. 13; cf. W. § 54, 2; [B.
§ 123, 9].*
Sevtepd-mpwros, -ov, second-first (cf. Sevtepeoyaros sec-
ond-last, last but one): éy oaBBarw Sevreporpwre in Lk.
vi. 1 seems to be, the second of the first sabbaths after the
feast of the Passover; cf. Redslob in the Intelligenzblatt
130
déyouas
zur Hall. Lit. Zeit. 1847, N. 70; Ewald, Jahrbb. d. bibl.
Wissensch. i. p. 72; [WH. App. ad loc.]. The various
opinions of others are reviewed by Meyer [and McClel-
lan] ad loc. and Liibkert in the Stud. und Krit. for 1835,
p- 664 sqq. (Eustrat. in vita Eutych. n. 95 calls the first
Sunday after Easter devrepomporny kupuaxny). [But the
genuineness of the word is questionable. It is wanting in
NBL1, 33, 69 and some other authorities. Hence Tr txt.
WH om. the word, L Tr mrg. br. it. Tischendorf, after
expunging it in his 2d ed., restored it in his 7th, subse-
quently put it in brackets, and finally (ed. 8) inserted
it again. It is questioned or discarded, by Mey., Bleek,
Alf., Weiss (on Mk. p. 101), Holtz., Hilgenf., Volkm.,
Farrar (Com. ad loc. and Life of Christ i.435), al. For
the evidence see Tdf.’s note, and for discussions of it
see WH. App. ad loe.; Scrivener, Intr. p.515 sq. ; Green,
“ Developed Criticism ” ad loc.]*
Sedrepos, -épa, -epov, [fr. Hom. down; Curtius § 277],
second: Mt. xxii. 26; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xii. 38; Jn. iv. 54;
Rev. iv. 7, etc.; the second, the other of two: Mt. xxii.
39; Mikey xil. 313 1 Comxv. 4.79 Wit. 160592) Petrino le
Heb. viii. 7; x. 9; Sevrepos Aavaros (see Oavaros, 3), Rev.
ii. 11; xx. 14; xxi. 8; devrépa yapis in 2 Co. i. 15 is not
a double benefit, but a second, opp. to the former which
the Corinthians would have had if Paul in passing
through Achaia into Macedonia had visited them apére-
pov, [WH txt. Trmrg. read deur. yapav, q. v.]. The
neuter Sevrepov is used adverbially in the second place, a
second time [cf. W. § 37,5 Note 1]: Jn. iii. 4; Rev. xix.
3; madw is added, as often in Grk. writ. (see dvodey,
fin.): Jn. xxi. 16; also rd Sevrepov, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Jude
53 ék dSevrépov (1 Mace. ix. 1), Mk. xiv. 72; Jn. ix. 24;
Acts xi. 9; Heb. ix. 28; cf. W. § 51,1d.; with ma\w added,
Mt. xxvi. 42; Acts x. 15, (Hom. Od. 3, 161 émi Sedrepov
adrtis) ; €v TO Sevrép@ at the second time, Acts vii. 13 (when
they had come the second time) ; devrepov in a partition,
then, in the second place: 1 Co. xii. 28.
S€xopar; [fut. 2 pers. plur. dé£eoOe, Eph. vi. 17 Rec.>e7];
laor. édeEauny ; pf. dédeypnar (Acts viii. 14) ; depon. mid.;
Sept. mostly for np? ; 1. to take with the hand: 76
yodppa [L txt. T Tr WH 1a ypappata], Lk. xvi. 6 sq.; 7d
motnpiov, Lk. xxii. 17; to take hold of, take up, r. mept-
keadaiav, tT. axatpay, Eph. vi. 17; ro mai8iov eis rds
aykddas, Lk. ii. 28. 2. to take up, receive, (Germ. auf
nehmen, annehmen); a. used of a place receiving one:
dv Set odpaviv Sar Gat (odp. is subject), Acts iii. 21, (Plat.
Theaet. p. 177 a. reXevrnoavtas aitods...6 TeV KaKov
xaOapos Téros ot déEerar). b. with acc. of pers. to receive,
grant access to, a visitor; not to refuse intercourse or friend-
ship: Lk. ix. 11 RG; Jn. iv. 45; 2 Co. vii. 15; Gal. iv.
14; Col. iv.10; to receive to hospitality, Mt. x. 14, 40 Sq: 3
MK. vi. 11; Lk. ix. 5, 53; x. 8,10; Acts xxi. 17 Ree. ;
Heb. xi. 31, (often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down) ; radio,
to receive into one’s family in order to bring up and edu-
cate, Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37; Lk. ix. 48; to receive eis
T. otkous, Tas oxnvas, Lk. xvi. 4,9; déEat 7d mvetpd pov, to
thyself in heaven, Acts vii. 59. c. with acc. of the thine
offered in speaking, teaching, instructing; to receive Ge
déw
vorably, give ear to, embrace, make one’s own, approve,
not to reject: tov Adyov, Lk. viii. 13; Acts viii. 14; xi.
1; xv. 11; 1 Th.i. 6; ii. 13; Jas. i. 21; ra rod mvet-
patos, 1 Co. ii. 14; rv mapakAnow, 2 Co. viii. 17; Thy ayarny
THs GdnOeias sc. commended to them, 2 Th. ii. 10; [add
the elliptical constr. in Mt. xi. 14], (often in Grk. writ.) ;
to receive a benefit offered, not to reject it, 2 Co. viii. 4
Rec. d. to receive i. q. to take upon one’s self, sustain,
bear, endure : twa, his bearing and behavior, 2 Co. xi. 16,
(tiv adcxiav, Hebr. wi, Gen. 1. 17; may, 6 éav érayO9,
Sir. ii. 4; pddov yaXerdv, Hom. Od. 20, 271, and often in
Grk. writ.). 3. to receive, get, (Germ. empfangen) :
ematodds, Acts xxii. 5; ypdaupara, Acts xxviii. 21; THY
Baovh<iay rod Oeod, to become a partaker of the benefits
of God’s kingdom, Mk. x.15; Lk. xviii. 17; Adya COvra,
Acts vii. 38 ; edayyéAuov, 2 Co. xi. 4; rHv ydpw Tod Ged,
2 Co. vi. 1;—i. q. to learn: Phil. iv. 18 [(?) see the
Comm. ad loc. ].*
(Syn. d3éxo0ua1, AauBdvw: The earlier classic use
of these verbs sustains in the main the distinction laid down
in the glossaries (e. g. Ammonius s. v. AaBetv: AaBety pév
€or, TO Kelwevdy Tt aveddcbar’ SééacOa Sé, 7d Sidduevoy ek
xepds), and the suggestion of a self-prompted taking still
adheres to A. in many connexions (cf. AaBety twa yuvatka,
apxnv AaBetv) in distinction from a receiving of what is
offered ; in use, however, the words overlap and distinctions
disappear ; yet the suggestion of a welcoming or an ap-
propriating reception generally cleaves to §. See Schmidt
eh. 107, who treats of the comp. of 5. in detail. Comp.: dva-,
amo-, Sia-, eio-, éx-, am-ek-, ev-, emt-, mapa-, mpoo-, b0-déxomuar. |
Sw: [fut. dco]; 1 aor. éyc0a; pf. ptep. dedexas (Acts
xxii. 29) ; Pass., pf. dedeuar; 1 aor. inf. deOqvae (Acts xxi.
33); Sept. chiefly for 0%; [fr. Hom. down] ; to bind, tie,
fasten; 1. prop.: ri, eis Seopds, Mt. xiii. 30 [Tr WH
br. G prob. om. eis, cf. B. 150 (131) ; W. 225 (211) ]; 606vn
tégoapow apxais dedep. a sheet bound by the four cor-
ners (to the sky), Acts x. 11 (GLUT Tr WH om. Sdedep.
kai); an animal, to prevent it from straying about, dvos
bedSepevn, TaXos Oedeyevos, Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix.
30; with mpds r. Odpay added, Mk. xi. 4; with acc. of
pers. to bind, to fasten with chains, to throw into chains :
ayyéAous, Rey. ix. 14; a madman, rédais kal ddvoeor, Mk.
v. 3 sq.; captives, Mt. [xii. 29]; xiv. 3; xxii. 13; xxvii.
2; Mk. [iii. 27]; vi.17; xv.1; Jn. xviii.12; Acts ix. 14;
xxi. 11; xxii. 29; Rev. xx. 2; Pass., Mk. xv.7; Jn. xviii.
24; Acts ix. 2, 21 (in the last two pass. dedepévoy dyew
twa); Acts xxi. 13; xxii.5; xxiv. 27; Col. iv. 3; dddceor,
Acts xii. 6; xxi. 33; 6 Adyos Tov Geov ov dederar, fig. for
these bonds of mine in no way hinder its course, i. e.
the preaching, extension, and efficacy of the gospel, 2
Tim. ii. 9; the bodies of the dead, which were wont to
be bound with bandages and linen cloths: 6 reOynxas
deSepevos Tovs 7OOas k. Tas xetpas Ketpiacs, bound hand and
foot with grave-cloths, Jn. xi. 44; 7d cpa doviors (Tdf.
2, 7 év dOov.), to swathe in linen cloths, Jn. xix. 40. 2.
metaph. a. Satan is said dja a woman bent together,
i. e. by means of a demon, as his messenger, taking pos-
session of the woman and preventing her from standing
upright, Lk. xiii. 16 cf. 11. b. to bind, i. e. put under
131
onr\ow
obligation, sc. of law, duty, etc.: dedeuevos Td mvetpare,
bound or constrained in my spirit, i. e. compelled by my
convictions, Acts xx. 22 (so not infreq. in Grk. auth.
as Plat. rep. 8 p. 567 d. dvdyky déderar 4} mpoordrret ad-
7); with dat. of pers. dedéa0ar rwi to be bound to one:
avopi, of a wife, Ro. vii. 2; yuvaiki, of a husband, 1 Co.
vil. 27; dédera absol., opp. to edevOépa eori, ibid. 39;
(Achill. Tat. 1, 11 p. 41 @dAy d€denar mapOevo, Jambl.
vit. Pyth. 11, 56 tiv péev dyapov, ... tiv S€ mpds dvdpa de-
depevny). c. by a Chald. and rabbin. idiom (equiv. to
DN) to forbid, prohibit, declare to be illicit: Mt. xvi.
19; xviii. 18. [Comp.: kara-, Tept-, ovv-, Umo-béa. | *
84, (shortened fr. 76n [al. al.]), a particle which, the
Epic phrases 61) rére, 6) yap excepted, is never placed
at the beginning of a sentence, but is joined to some pre-
ceding word, and indicates that “what it introduces can
be taken as something settled, laid down in deed and in
truth” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 392): now therefore,
then, verily, in truth, (Lat. jam, igitur, sane, ete.—al-
though neither Lat., Germ., [nor Eng.] has a word pre-
cisely equiv. to 67). 1. added to relative pronouns:
ds 6n who is such a one as, who preéminently, who then,
Mt. xiii. 23. 2. joined to imperatives and hortatory
subjunctives it signifies that the thing enjoined must be
done forthwith, at once [cf. W. § 43, 3 a.], so that it may
be evident that it is being done (cf. Passow i. p. 612),
where the Lat. says agedum, jam, Germ. doch, nur, [Eng.
now, only, but]: Lk. ii. 15; Acts [vi. 3 LLWH mre. br.];
xi 2s)xve56); ICorvie20, (Sirs xliv. 1). 3. surely,
certainly: 2 Co. xii. 1 RG.*
Syravyas, (fr. djrAos and avyn), radiantly, in full light,
clearly: Mk. viii. 25 TWH mrg. with codd. 8*CLA for
Ree. rndavyés. Hesych. says dndavyads: dyav davepas ;
add dndavyéoe rexpnpiors, Democrit. in Fabricius, Biblioth.
Gr. iv. p. 333. With the exception of this word [dnAo-
motéw, (Plut. Pericl. 33, 8; al.) ] and the very rare dyXo-
gavns, d7Aos is not found in composition.*
SfAos, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], clear, evident, manifest :
Mt. xxvi. 73; d7Aov se. éoriv it is manifest, evident, foll.
by ére (4 Mace. ii. 7; Xen. an. 1, 3, 9; al.): 1 Co. xv. 27
[here some would take the words adverbially and paren-
thetically i.e. SnAovdre manifestly cf. W. § 64, 2 a.]; Gal.
iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi. 7 (here L T Tr WH om. 87)ov).*
[Syn. 59A0s, pavepés: 4. evident, what is known and un-
derstood, ¢. manifest, as opp. to what is concealed or invisible ;
5. points rather to inner perception, ¢. to outward appear-
ance. Cf. Schmidt ch. 129.]
Sydow, -G; [impf. edjArouv; fut. dyAdow]; 1 aor. €d7-
hooa; Pass., fimpf. 3 pers. sing. éSndodTo (1 Pet. i. 11
WH mrg.)]; 1 aor. ednAwOnv; (d7A0s) ; Sept. for yin
and sometimes for 7777; in Grk. auth. fr. [Aeschyl. and]
Hdt. down; to make manifest: ri, 1 Co. iii. 138; to make
known by relating, to declare: ri, Col. i. 8; ruvt mepi twos,
6rt, 1 Co. i. 11; to give one to understand, to indicate,
signify: ti, Heb. xii. 27; 2 Pet. i. 14; foll. by ace. with
inf. Heb. ix. 8; ets rt, point unto, 1 Pet. i. 11.*
[Syn. dnAda, éupaviCw: eud. to manifest to the sight,
make visible; 5. to render evident to the mind, of such dis-
closures as exhibit character or suggest inferences ; hence
Anpas
esp. of prophetical, typical, or other supernatural disclosures.
Cf. Schmidt ch. 129 § 6; Bleek on Heb. ix. 8.]
Anpas, 6, Demas, (prop. name, contracted apparently
fr. Anpnrpros, cf. W. 103 (97); [on its declension, cf. B.
20 (18)]),a companion of Paul, who deserted the apos-
tle when he was a prisoner at Rome and returned to
Thessalonica: Col. iv. 14; Philem. 24; 2 Tim. iv. 10.*
Snpnyopéw, -O : [impf. ednunydpovr]; (to be a dnunydpos,
fr. Sjos and dyopeva to harangue the people) ; to address
a public assembly, make a speech to the people: éSnprydper
mpos avrovs [A. V. made an oration], Acts xii. 21. (Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat., Dem., al. Prov. xxx. 31 (xxiv. 66);
4 Mace. v. 15.) *
Anp-tpios, -ov, 6, Demetrius ;
Ephesus, a heathen: Acts xix. 24, 38.
Christian: 3 Jn. 12.*
Syprovpyds, -0d, 6, (Ontos public, belonging to the peo-
ple, and EPTQ; cf. tepoupyds, dumehoupyés, etc.), often in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; a. prop. a workman for the
public. b. univ. the author of any work, an artisan,
framer, builder: rexvirns x. dnpsoupyds, Heb. xi. 10; (Xen.
mem. 1,4, 7 [ef. 9] codod tivos Snuroupyod réxynua. God
is called 6 rod odpavod Snprovpyds in Plat. rep. 7 p. 530 a. ;
6 Snp. rev ddov in Joseph. antt. 1, 7, 1, and often in eccl.
writ. from Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 11; 26,1; 33, 2 on;
[cf. Philo, de mut. nom. § 4; de opif. mund. ed. Miiller
p- 1383; Piper, Einl. in monument. Theol. § 26; Soph.
Lex. s. v.]. In the Scriptures, besides, only in 2 Mace.
iv. 1 kaxav Syp.). [Cf Trench § cv.]*
Sfpos, -ov, 6, the people, the mass of the people assembled
in a public place: Acts xii. 22; xix. 33; dyew [RG],
eloeN et cis rov Sjpov: Acts xvii. 5 [LT Tr WH mpoay hs
xix. 30. [From Hom. down. ] *
[Syn. 59 wos, Aads: inclassic Grk. djuos denotes the peo-
ple as organized into a body politic, Aads the unorganized
people at large. But in biblical Grk. Aads is used esp. of the
chosen people of God; 540s on the other hand (found only
in Acts) denotes the people of a heathen city. Cf. Trench
§ xeviii.; Schmidt ch. 199.]
Sypdcros, -a, -ov, esp. freq. in Attic; belonging to the
people or state, public (opp. to tdios): Acts v. 18; in dat.
fem. dyyooia used adverbially (opp. to idia) [ef. W. 591
(549) note], publicly, in public places, in view ofall: Acts
xvi. 373 xviii. 28; Sny. kal Kar’ oikovs, Acts xx. 20; (2
Mace. vi. 10; 3 Mace. ii. 27; in Grk. writ. also by public
authority, at the public expense).*
Syvaprov, -ov, 7d, [Plut., Epict., al.],a Lat. word, a de-
narius, a silver coin, originally consisting of ten [whence
its name], afterwards [fr. B. c. 217 on] of sixteen asses;
about [3.898 grams, i. e. 8} pence or 162 cents; rapidly
debased fr. Nero on; cf. BB.DD. s.v. Denarius]: Mt.
XViil. 28; xx. 2, 9,13; xxii.19; Mk. vi. 37; xii. 15; xiv.
55 LK vil. 415 x. 35; xx. 24> Jn. views xiib: Rev. vi.
6 [cf. W. 587 (546); B. 164 (143)]; 1d dvd dnvdpuor se.
év the pay of a denarius apiece promised to each work-
man, Mt. xx. 10 T Tr[txt., Tr mrg. WH br. 76 ].*
Sf-rore (fr. dy and moré), adv., now at length (jam
aliquando) ; at any time ; at last, ete., Just exactly ; [hence
it generalizes a relative, like the Lat. cumque; see Lob.
1. a silversmith of
2. a certain
132
bua
ad Phryn. p. 373]: 6 dymore voonpatt, with whatsoever
disease, Jn. v. 4 [RG, but L oi@dnrorotv].*
Sh-rov [L WH 67 wov; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.
123 sq.], adv., (fr. 67 and mov), prop. now in some way,
whatever that way is ; it is uséd when something is affirmed
in a slightly ironical manner, as if with an affectation of
uncertainty, perhaps, doubtless, verily : ov Snrov not surely
(Germ. doch nicht etwa), hardly I trow; (cf. Rost in
Passow i. p. 613”; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 427 sq.). Once
in Scripture : Hes. Hip hG.e
[Ala, see Zevs. ]
84, [written 6’ before a vowel, exc. in prop. names
and 2 Co. v. 7; Ro. viii. 10” Tdf. Proleg. p. 94], akin
to dis and Lat. dis in composition, prop. denoting a divis-
ion into two or more parts; a preposition taking the
gen. and the ace. In its use the bibl. writ. differ in no
respect fr. the Grk.; cf. W.377 (853) sqq.; 398 (372) sq.
A. with the GENITIVE: through; I. of Place;
1. prop. after verbs denoting an extension, or a motion,
or an act, that occurs through any place: 60 ddAns 6600
dvaywpeiv, Mt. ii. 12; 8¢ dvvdpav rorev, Mt. xii. 43; dua
Ts Sapapetas, In. iv.4; diva trys Ovpas, Jn. x. 1 sq.; add,
IVE. xs 24's Mien OS noe tt Oe kant Oe veut On
XVill- 25/3) 2. CO. mio sy LED, Pxcm SG eet Zon ClCa small
vpov, through your city, Ro. xv. 28; [on da mavtov,
Acts ix. 32, see was, II. 1]; 6 dca ravrwr, diffusing his
saving influence through all, Eph. iv.6; ca €ec@a dia
mupos, 1 Co. iii. 15; dcaowg. d¢ vdaros, 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Ev.
Nicod. c. 9 p. 568 sq. ed. Thilo [p. 228 ed. Tdf.] dca
Garacons ws dia Enpas); Brerew Sv eadrrpov, 1 Co. xiii.
12 [cf. W. 380 (3856)]. Add the adverbial phrase 6/7
ddov from top to bottom, throughout, Jn. xix. 23 (met-
aph. in every way, 1 Mace. vi. 18). From this use of
the preposition has come 2. its tropical use of a
state or condition in which (prop. passing through
which as through a space) one does or suffers some-
thing, where we, with a different conception, employ
with, in, ete. (Germ. bei, unter, mit): 6 dua ypapparos kK.
mepitopns mapaBarns vouov, Ro. ii. 27 [W. 380 (355) ]; of
muatevovtes Ov axpoBvorias who believe though uncircum-
cised (see axpoBvatia, a.), Ro. iv. 11; dia mpookoppatos
eoGiewv, with offence, or so as to be an offence [ef. W. 380
(356), and see mpdoxoppa], Ro. xiv. 20; dua ricrews repi-
maretv, ov dia etdouvs (see eidos, 1), 2 Co. v. 7; ra de
[Lchm. mrg. (cf. Trmrg.) 7a idva (see Mey. ad loc.) ] rod
o@paros, done in the body (i. e. while we were clothed
with our earthly body [al. take dca here instrumentally ;
see ITI. 2 below]), 2 Co. v.10; 8a odd dv Saxpior, 2 Co,
li. 4; Oca Sd€ns, clothed with glory, 2 Co. iii. 11; ¢pxecOa,
eioépx. dua Twos with a thing, Heb. ix. 12; 1 Jn. v. 6, [but
ef. W. 380 (355)]; 80 tropovis, Ro. viii. 25, (Sia révOous
TO ynpas Siayew, Xen. Cyr. 4, 6, 6; cf. Matthiae ii.
p. 1353).
II. of Time [ef. W. 380 (356); Ellic. or Mey. on
Gal. ii. 1; Fritzsche as below]; 1. of continued
time; hence a. of the time throughout (during) which
anything is done: Mt. xxvi. 61; Mk. xiv. 58; 80 dAns
(ris RG) vucrés, Lk. v. 5; dca ravrds tov Chr, Heb. rb 1%
dia
dia mavros [so L WH Tr (exe. Mk. v.5; Lk. xxiv. 53)],
or written together §camavros [so GT (exe. in Mt.); ef.
W. 46 (45); Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p- 125], continually,
always: Mt. xviii. 10; Mk. v. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53; Acts ii.
25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); x. 2; xxiv. 16; Ro. xi. 10 (fr.
Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24); 2Th. iii. 16; Heb. ix. 6; xiii. 15,
(often in Grk. writ.). b. of the time within which a
thing is done: 81a ris vuxrés (LT Tr WH &:d vuxrds), by
night, Acts v. 19; xvi. 9; xvii. 10; xxiii. 31, (Palaeph.
1,10); 60 quepdv teaoapdxorra, repeatedly within the
space of forty days, Acts i. 3;— (denying this use of the
prep., C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p.
164 sq. would refer these instances to the use noted
under a. [see Win., Ellic., Mey. u. s.]). 2. of time
elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed
through: Gal. ii. 1 [ef. W. 380 (356)]; 8? jpepar,
(some) days having intervened, after (some) days, Mk. ii.
1; dv erév mrevovev, Acts xxiv. 17; exx. fr. Grk. auth. in
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 50; [W. 380 (356); L. and S.s. v. A.
II. 2; Soph. Lex. s.v.2; Field, Otium Norv. iii. p. 14].
III. of the Means or Instrument by which any-
thing is effected; because what is done by means of a
person or thing seems to pass as it were through the
same [cf. W. 378 (354) ]. 1. of one who is the author
of the action as well as its instrument, or of the effi-
cient cause: Sv avrod (i. €. Tod Geod) Ta mavra Sc. eoriv
or éyevero, Ro. xi. 36; also 60 od, Heb. ii. 10; 80 08 ekdy-
Onre, 1 Co.i. 9; add [Gal. iv. 7 L T Tr WH, see below];
Heb. vii. 21 ( tarp maca 81a tov Geod rovrov, i. e. Aes-
culapius, kuBepvara, Plat. symp. p. 186 e.; cf. Fritzsche
on Rom. vol.i. p. 15, [and for exx. Soph. Lex.s.v.1]); of
him to whom that is due which any one has or has done;
hence i. q. by the fault of any one: 6 of rd oxavdadov
épxerar, Mt. xviii. 7; du’ Evds avOp. 7 Guapria.. . eiandée,
Ro. v. 12, cf. 16-19; nodéver dua ths capkés, Ro. viii. 3;
by the merit, aid, favor of any one: év (a Baoirevoovor
dua ete. Ro. v. 17, cf. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 21; dua rod Xpucrod,
and the like: Ro. v. 1 sq. 11; Acts x. 43; Gal. iv. 7
[Rece., but see above]; dofaCew r. Oedy Sua Inoot Xpiorod,
1 Pet. iv. 11, and edyapioreiv TG Ged Sia "Ino. Xp. Ro. i.
8; vii. 25 (where L T Tr WH txt. ydpis r@ Oe) ; Col. iii.
17, — because the possibility both of glorifying God and
of giving thanks to him is due to the kindness of Christ;
kavxaoOa ev TH Oe@ Sia “Ino. Xp. Ro. v.11; dvaravecOa
O:d tivos, Philem. 7; of memiorevKores bia THs xaperos, Acts
Xvili. 27; woAAjjs elpnyns Tvyxdvovtes Sia god... did THs
ans mpovoias, Acts xxiv. 2 (3); tmepukay dia Tod dyann-
cavros npas, Ro. vill. 37; meprocevew did tuvos, by the
increase which comes from one, Phil. i. 26; 2 Co. i. 5;
ix. 12; dca r7s budv Senoews, Phil. i.19; add, Philem. 22;
Rome? 2/Co.i-45) Gal. iv. 23: 1 Pet.i.5. 2. of the
instrument used to accomplish a thing, or of the instru-
mental cause in the stricter sense: —with gen. of
pers. by the service, the intervention of, any one; with gen.
of thing, by means of, with the help of, any thing; a. in
passages where a subject expressly mentioned is said to
do or to have done a thing by some person or by some
‘thing: Mk. xvi. 20 (rod xupiov Tov Adyov BeBatodvros Sia
133
Oud
T. onpetov) ; Lk. i. 70; Actsi. 16; ii. 22 (répaor x. onpel-
ous, ois emoinoe Sv aitod 6 eds); viii. 20; x. 36; xv. 23
(ypawavres Sid xewpos adtav); xx. 28; xxi. 19; xxviii.
25; Ro. ii. 16; iii. 31; vii. 13; [viii 11 Rec.bez ez L ed.
min. TWH txt.]; xv. 18; xvi.18; 1 Co. i. 21 [ef. W.
381 (857) ]; ii. 10; iv.15; vi. 14; xiv. 9,19 [PEGal sexys
57; 2Co.i.4; iv.14 RG; v.18, 20; ix. 13 [ef. W. 381
(357)]; x.9; xii.17; Eph.i.5; ii. 16; Col. i. 20, 22; ii.
8; 1 Th.iv.14; 2Th.ii14; Tit. iii5; Heb.i.2,3(R
Gl gr tials viol 23) vied 94 gix GOH wt?) I. 24.3
Rev. i. 15; y7 e€ vdaros (material cause) x. S¢ aros cuve-
oTGoa TH TOU Oceod Aoy@, 2 Pet. iii. 5 [W. 419 (390) cf.
217 (204)]. b. in passages in which the author or prin-
cipal cause is not mentioned, but is easily understood
from the nature of the case, or from the context: Ro. i.
125 1 Co. xi: 12 [ef. W881 (857) ];- Phil. 1 20; 1 ‘Th. iii.
7; 2 Th. ii. 2,15; Heb. xi. 39 [cf. W. u.s., also § 50, 3];
xii. 11,15; 1 Pet. i. 7; 8cd woddGv papripav, by the me-
diation (intervention) of many witnesses, they being
summoned for that purpose [cf. W. 378 (354); A. V.
among], 2'Tim. ii. 2. Where it is evident from the relig-
ious conceptions of the Bible that God is the author or
first cause: Jn. xi. 4; Acts v. 12; Eph. iii. 10; iv. 16;
Cols 95) 2 Lim. 1-65 Heb. x. 105.2) Pet. i165 0d Ce-
cba dia tr. ricrews, Eph. ii. 8; cuveyetperOar dia tr. rior.
Col. ii. 12; Scxacodo at dia tr. wiot. Gal. ii. 16, ef. Ro. iii.
30; in the phrases sa rod “Ino. Xpiorod, and the like:
Afitgue ti eringnly mR INO ocnictee Invent aya ve Wie Il (ORs ae
57; 1Jn.iv.9; Phil.i.113; dca tod evayyediov, 1 Co. xv.
2; Eph. iii. 6; dua Adyou Geov, 1 Pet. i. 23, cf. 3; da
vopov, Ro. iii. 27; iv. 18; 80 dmoxadiews Inc. Xp. Gal.
i. 12, cf. 15 sq.; dua rod (dyiov) mvetparos, Ro. v. 5; 1 Co.
xii. 8; Eph. iii. 16; morevew dia tevos (see moteva,
1b. y.), In. i. 7; 1 Co. iii. 5; onpetov yéyove Sv adray,
Acts iv. 16; 6 Néyos bv ayyéAwv AadnOeis, Heb. ii. 2, ef.
Gal. iii. 19; 6 vopos did Movaéws €666n, Jn. 1.173; in pas-
sages in which something is said to have been spoken
through the O. T. prophets, or some one of them [cf.
Lghtft. Fresh Revision ete. p. 121 sq.}: Mt. ii. 5,17 LT
Tr W-H,-28 ;- [iii. 3 LT Tr WH); iv. 145 vin. 17; xu.
17; xxi. 4; xxiv. 15; xxvii. 9; Acts ii. 16; or to have
been so written: Lk. xviii. 31; with the added mention
of the first cause: ind rod Kupiov dia Tod pod. Mt. i. 22;
ii. 15, cf. Lk. i. 70; Acts i. 16; xxviii. 25; Ro. i. 2; in
passages relating to the Logos: mdvra dv avrov (i. e.
through the divine Logos [cf. W. 379 (355) ]) éyevero or
éxric6y: Jn. i. 3; 1 Co. viii. 6 (where he is expressly
distinguished from the first cause: e€ adrod [W. 419
(391)]); Col. i. 16 [W. 1. e.], cf. Heb. i. 2, (Philo de
cherub. § 35). The instrumental cause and the princi-
pal are distinguished in 1 Co. xi. 12 (dca ris yuvatkos .. «
ex row beod) ; Gal. i. 1 (am dvOporav .. . ¢ dvOperov [cf.
W. 418 (390)]). 3. with the gen. of a thing did is used
to denote the manner in which a thing is done, or the
formal cause: ete dia mapaBodns, Lk. viii. 4; ede 80
dpdparos, Acts xviii. 9; drayyédXew dua Adyou, by word of
mouth, Acts xv. 27; 1@ Noy Oe emirtodar, 2 Co. x. 11;
cf. 2 Th. ii. 15; mloris evepyoupevn d¢ ayamns, Gal. v. 63
oud
kexdporas Ov émayyenias, Gal. iii. 18; Sovdevew dua THs
ayanns, Gal. v.13; emoréddew dua Bpaxéov, Heb. xiii.
22; ypapew dv ddiywr, 1 Pet. v. 12, (Plat. Gorg. p. 449 b.
dud pwaxpaov Adyous rroveia Oat [see dALyos, fin.; cf. W. § 51,
1b.]); Sea xdprov cat pédavos, 2 Jn. 12; dud pedavos k.
kaddpov, 3 Jn. 13, (Plut. Sol. 17, 3). To this head I
should refer also the use of Sud revos in exhortations etc.,
where one seeks to strengthen his exhortation by the
mention of a thing or a person held sacred by those
whom he is admonishing (61a equiv. to by an allusion to,
by reminding you of [ef. W. 381 (357)]): Ro. xii. 1;
xv. 30; 1Co.i.10; 2Co.x.1; 1 Th. iv. 2 [yet ef. W.379
(355) note]; 2 Th. iii. 12 RG.
B. with the AccusaTivn [W. 398 (872) sq.]. ‘I. of
Place; through; often so in the Grk. poets, once in the
N. T. ace. to LT Tr WH viz. Lk. xvii. 11 8ca pécoy
Sapapetas, for RG dia péov Zap. [but see péaos, 2].
II. of the Ground or Reason on account of which
anything is or is not done; by reason of, because of
(Germ. aus Grund). 1. of the reason for whicha
thing is done, or of the efficient reason, when for
greater perspicuity it may be rendered by (cf. Kiihner
§ 434 Anm.]; a. with ace. of the thing: 8¢ qy, viz.
Tv Tov Oeod npepay (prop. by reason of which day i. e.
because it will come [cf. W. 400 (373)}), 2 Pet. iii. 12;
6a 7 Adyov (prop. by reason of the word i. e. because
the word has cleansing power), Jn. xv. 3; dua rd GeAnua
gov (Vule. propter voluntatem tuam i. e. because thou
didst will it), Rev. iv. 11; add, Rev. xii. 11; xiii. 14,
(dvaBimoKerar Sid THY Tod maTpos vow, Plato, symp. p.
203 e.); cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 1. b. with ace. of
the person, by whose will, agency, favor, fault, any-
thing is or is done: dia tov marépa... dv eué (prop. be-
cause the father lives... because I live [cf. W. 399
(373)]), Jn. vi. 57; Ova tov vmordEavra, by the will of
him who subjected it, opp. to ovx éxovaa, Ro. viii. 20
[ef. Win. 399 (373) note]; pa elarns dre did KUptov ané-
otny, Sir. xv. 11; so too in the Grk. writ. of every age;
cf. Kruger § 68, 23; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 25. Much
oftener 2. of the reason or cause on account
of which anything is or is done, or ought to be done;
on account of, because of; a. in the phrases d.a todro
for this cause; for this reason; therefore; on this account ;
since this is so: Mt. vi. 25; xii. 27, 313; xiii. 13, etc.;
Mk. vi. 14; xi. 24; Lk. xi. 49; xiv. 20; Jn. vi. 65; ix.
23; Acts ii. 26; Ro. i. 26; iv. 16; v.12; xili.6; xv. 9;
1 Co. iv. 17; xi. 10, 30; 2 Co. iv. 1; Eph. i. 15; v. 17;
VisdheCOli9 s le Chie Sree aiesonlhw ish woul
ie WOR Jeklosse OR wig ih div, thy, GS Sidi NS ae, van
15; xil. 12; xviii. 8. foll. by dru, for this cause... be-
cause, therefore ... because: Jn. vy. 16, 18; viii. 47; x.
17; xii. 18, 39; 1 Jn. iii. 1; cf. Tholuck ed.7 on Jn. x.
17, [he questions, at least for x. 17 and xii. 39, the canon
of Meyer (on xii. 39), Luthardt (on x. 17), al., that in this
phrase in Jn. the rodro always looks backwards]. in the
opposite order (when the words that precede with dr: are
to be emphasized): Jn. xv. 19. It indicates the end
and purpose, being foll. either by iva, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1
134
Ota
Tim. i. 16; Philem. 15, (in the opp. order, Jn. i. 31); or
by émas, Heb. ix. 15. dia ri [so L Tr WH] and written
together dcari [so GT; ef. W.45; Lipsius, Gram. Unters.
p. 126], why? wherefore? Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; xvii. 19;
Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v. 30; Jn. vii.45; Acts v. 3; Ro. ix. 32; 1
Co. vi. 7; Rev. xvii. 7. 60 hv airiay, see airia, 1. ris 7 airia,
8¢ fv, Acts x. 21; xxiii. 28; dia ravrnv thy airiay, Acts
xxviii. 20; 61a radra, Eph.v.6,etce. b. used, with theace.
of any noun, of the mental affection by which one is im-
pelled to some act [Eng. for; cf. W. 399 (372) ]: dua pOd-
vov, because prompted by envy, for envy, Mt. xxvii. 18;
Mk. xv. 10; da rov PdBov tuvds, Jn. vii. 13; xix. 38; xx.
19; Rev. xviii. 10,155; dea rv wodAnv ayannv, Eph. ii. 4.
of any other cause on account of which one is said to do
or to have done something, —as in Mt. xiv. 3,9; xv. 3, 6;
Jn. iv. 39, 41 sq.; xii. 11; xiv. 11; Acts xxviii. 2; Ro.
iii. 25 (Oca THv mdpeow Tey mpoyey- duaptnu. because of the
pretermission etc., i. e. because he had left the sins un-
punished); Ro. vi. 19; xv. 15; 2 Co. ix. 14; Gal. iv. 13
(0 doGéverav ris capKés, on account of an infirmity of the
flesh, i. e. detained among you by sickness; cf. Wieseler
[or Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc.) ; — or to suffer or have suffered
something, Mt. xxiv. 9; xxvii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts
xxi. 353 2'Co. iv: 113 Col. 11-6 ; 11 Bet. mi. 145 Rey. 149)
vi. 9;—or to have obtained something, Heb. ii. 9; v.14; 1
Jn. ii. 12; or to be or to become something, Ro. viii. 10;
xi. 28; Eph. iv. 18; Heb. v. 12 [W. 399 (8738)]; vii. 18.
of the im peding cause, where by reason of some per-
son or thing something is said to have been impossible:
Mt. xiii. 58; xvii. 20; Mk. ii. 4; Lk. v. 19; viii. 19; Acts
xxi. 34; Heb. iii. 19; iv. 6. 6a with the ace. of a pers.
is often i. q. for the benefit of, [Eng. for the sake of |: Mk.
M27 dN. Xt. 42.) xii 30s 1s Corsxa. Os Lebanese a eaviage
da rovs exAextovs, Mt. xxiv. 22; Mk. xiii. 20; 2 Tim. ii.
10; dca Xptordv for Christ’s sake, to promote his cause,
1 Co. iv. 10; dv tpyas, Jn. xii. 30; 2 Co. iv. 15; viii. 9;
Phil. i. 24; 1 Th.i.5. dud twa, because of the example
set by one: 2 Co. ii. 10; Ro. ii. 24; 2 Pet. ii. 2; dud rov
Xpiordv for Christ, to become a partner of Christ, Phil.
lil. 7 (equiv. to va Xpiorov Kepdnow, vs. 8). Cc. dud 7d,
because that, for that, is placed before the inf., — either
standing alone, as Lk. ix. 7; Heb. vii. 23; — or having a
subject acc. expressed, as Mt. xxiv. 12; Mk. v. 4; Lk. ii.
4; xix.11; Acts iv. 2; xii. 20; xviii. 2; xxvii. 4, 9; xxviii.
18; Phil. i. 7; Heb. vii. 24; x.2; Jas. iv. 2; — or with its
subject acc. evident from the context, as Mt. xiii. 6; Mk.
iv. 6; Lk. xi. 8; xviii.5; xxiii.8; Acts viii. 11; xviii. 3.
C. In Composition &d indicates 1. a passing
through space or time, through, (8:aBaive, Stepxopar, Oud-
Ai¢w, etc.) ; hence 2. continuity of time (d:apéve, dia-
Tedéw, Suatnpew), and completeness of action (Staxabapive,
dafovvypt). 3. distribution (dadidaps, diayyéAXo, Sta-
gnuito). 4. separation (diadvo, diaipéw). 5. rival
ry and endeavor (d:ariva, diaxaredéyyopuat; cf. Herm. ad
Vig. p. 854; [Winer, as below, p. 6]). 6. transition
from one state to another (SiadAdooe, SwpOda). [Cf. Win
er, De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v.; Valckenaer on Hat. 5,
18; Caitier. Gazophyl. ed. Abresch, Cant. 1810, p. 39; A.
ScaBalyw
Rieder, Ueb. d. mit mehr als ein. prap. zusammeng. verba
im N. T. p.17 sq.] No one of the N. T. writers makes
more freq. use of verbs compounded with &4 than Luke,
[see the list in Winer, u. s. p. 3 note; on their constr. W.
§ 52, 4, 8].
Sta-Baivw: 2 aor. dueBnv, inf. SiaBjvat, ptep. d:aBas; as
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; (Plin. pertranseo) ; to pass
through, cross over; a. transitively : riv Odd\accap ds bid
Enpas, Heb. xi. 29. b. intrans.: apds twa, Lk. xvi. 26;
ets with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 9; (for Ay), LS. xiii. 7) +
Sta-BaddAw : 1 aor. pass. SuveBANOnY ; 1. prop. to throw
over or across, to send over, (rida twos). 2. very often,
fr. Hdt. down, to traduce, calumniate, slander, accuse,
defame (cf. Lat. perstringere, Germ. durchziehen, [Sd
as it were from one to another; see Winer, De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 17]), not only of those who bring a
false charge against one (dié€8Anto mpos airéy ddixas,
Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 3), but also of those who disseminate
the truth concerning a man, but do so maliciously, insidi-
ously, with hostility [ef. Lucian’s Essay de calumn. non
temere credend.], (Dan. iii. 8 Sept.; Dan. vi. 24 Theo-
dot.) ; so SueBAnOn aire os Scacxopri¢wy, Lk. xvi. 1 (with
dat. of pers. to whom the charge is made, also in Hat. 5,
35, et al.; rua mpos tiva, Hdt. 5, 96, et al.; foll. by as
with ptep., Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 23; Plat. epp. 7 p. 334 a.).
[SYN. see carnyopéw. | *
Sia-BeBardopar (-ovpac); mid. to affirm strongly, assert
confidently, [cf. W. 253 (238)]: mepi twos (Polyb. 12,
11 (12), 6), 1 Timi. 7 [ef. WH. App. p. 167]; Tit. iii.
8. (Dem. p. 220, 4; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut., Ael.) *
Sta-Brérw: fut. diaBrAeCYo; 1 aor. deBreWa; to look
through, penetrate by vision; a. to look fixedly, stare
straight before one (Plat. Phaedo p. 86 d.): deBreve, of
a blind man recovering sight, Mk. viii. 25 TWH Tr txt.
[some refer this tob.]. _b. to see clearly: foll. by an inf.
expressing the purpose, Mt. vii. 5; Lk. vi.42. (Aristot.,
Dineyyes
SidBodos, -ov, (SuaBadrw, q. V-), prone to slander, slander-
ous, accusing falsely, (Arstph., Andoc., Plut., al.): 1
Tim. iii. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. ii. 35; as subst. 6 dcaBodos,
a calumniator, false accuser, slanderer, [see xatnyopéw,
fin.], (Xen. Ages. 11, 5; [Aristot., al.]): Sept. Esth. vii.
4; viii. 1. In the Bible and in eccl. writ. 6 d:aBodos
[also dua8. without the art.; cf. W. 124 (118); B. 89
(78)] is applied kar’ é€oxnv to the one called in Hebr.
vn, 6 caravas (q. v.), viz. Satan, the prince of demons,
the author of evil, persecuting good men (Jobi.; Zech.
iii. 1 sqq., cf. Rev. xii. 10), estranging mankind from God
and enticing them to sin, and afflicting them with dis-
eases by means of demons who take possession of their
bodies at his bidding; the malignant enemy of God and
the Messiah: Mt. iv. 1, 5, [8, 11]; xiii. 39; xxv. 41; Lk.
iv. 2, (8, 5 RL, 6, 13]; viii. 12; Jn. xiii. 2; Acts x. 38;
Eph. iv. 27; vi. 11; 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.; 2 Tim. ii. 26; Heb.
ii. 14; Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet. v. 8; Jude 9; Rev. ii. 10; xii.
9,12; xx. 2,10; (Sap. ii. 24; [cf. Ps. eviii. (cix.) 6; 1 Chr.
xxi.1]). Men who resemble the devil in mind and will
are said eivat €x Tod diaBodov to be of the devil, prop. to de-
135
didyw
rive their origin from the devil, trop. to depend upon the
devil in thought and action, to be prompted and governed
by him: Jn. viii. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 8; the same are called
texva Tod d1aZ. children of the devil, 1 Jn. iii. 10; viol
tov 6. sons of the devil, Acts xiii. 10, cf. Mt. xiii. 38; Jn.
viii. 38; 1Jn. ili. 10. The name d:d8oXos is fig. applied
to a man who, by opposing the cause of God, may be
said to act the part of the devil or to side with him: Jn.
vi. 70, cf. Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. [Cf. curdy fin.]*
St-ayyeAAw ; 2 aor. pass. dupyyéAnv; fr. Pind. down; to
carry a message through, announce everywhere, through
places, through assemblies of men, etc.; to publish abroad,
declare, [see did, C. 3]: ri, Lk. ix. 60; Acts xxi. 26 (diay
yéddav, sc. to all who were in the temple and were
knowing to the affair) ; with the addition év rdon 79 ya,
Ro. ix. 17 fr. Ex. ix. 16. (Lev. xxv. 9; Josh. vi.10; Ps.
ii. 7; [lviii. (lix.) 13]; Sir. xliii. 2; 2 Mace. iii. 34.) *
Sid-ye, see yé, 1.
Sta-yivopar: 2 aor. dueyevouny ; 1. to be through, con-
tinue. 2. to be between, intervene; hence in Grk. writ.
fr. Isaeus (p. 84, 14, 9 [or. de Hagn. hered.] ypévev diaye-
vowevov) down, the aor. is used of time, to have intervened,
elapsed, passed meanwhile, (ef. xpdvov perakd Siayevopevov
Lys. 93, 6]: jpepdv Sicayevopévay sway, Acts xxv. 13;
ikavov xpovov Stayevowevov, Acts xxvil. 9 ; Suayevopevov rod
oaBBarov, Mk. xvi. 1.*
Sia-ywwdoke ; fut. diayyocopa; 1. to distinguish (Lat.
dignosco), i. e. to know accurately, ascertain exactly: ti,
Acts xxiii. 15; (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2.
in a legal sense, to examine, determine, decide, (cf. Cic.
cognosco): ta xa@’ tuas your case, Acts xxiv. 22; (2
Mace. ix. 15; Dem. p. 629, 25; p. 545, 9; al.).*
Sia-yvopif{o: 1 aor. dveyvapica; to publish abroad, make
known thoroughly: mepit tivos, Lk. ii. 17 RG. Besides,
only in [ Philo, quod det. pot. § 26, i. 210, 16 ed. Mang.
and] in Schol. in Bekk. Anecd. p. 787, 15 to discriminate.*
Sid-yvwots, -ews, 7, (see draywacka) ; 1. a distin-
guishing. 2. in a legal sense (Lat. cognitio), examina-
tion, opinion, decision, (Sap. iii. 18; Plat. legg. 9 p.865 c.):
Acts xxv. 21.*
Sia-yoyytto: impf. dveyoyyugov; to murmur (ba i.e.
either through a whole crowd, or ‘among one another,’
Germ. durch einander [cf. 6:4, C.]); hence it is always
used of many indignantly complaining (see yoyyi¢@) :
Lk. xv. 2; xix. 7. (Ex. xvi. 2, 7,8; [Num. xiv. 2]; Josh.
ix. 24 (18), etc.; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 24; Clem. Alex. i.
p- 528 ed. Pott.; Heliod. 7, 27, and in some Byzant. writ.)
Cf. Win. De verb, comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 16 sq.*
Sta-ypnyopéw, -@: 1 aor. dueypnydpnaa; to watch through,
(Hdian. 3, 4, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.] mdons ris vueros . . . dua-
ypnyopnaavtes, Niceph. Greg. Hist. Byz. p. 205 f. and 571
a.); to remain awake: Lk. ix. 32 (for they had overcome
the force of sleep, with which they were weighed down,
BeBapnp. Urve) ; [al. (e.g. R. V. txt.) to be fully awake,
ef. Niceph. u. s. p. 205 f. dav dreBaddsunv dorep ot dia-
ypnyopnaavres Ta év Tois Unvois dveipatra; Win. De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 11 sq.].*
Si-dyo ; 1. to lead through, lead across, send across.
diadéyomas
2. with rév Biov, rev xpdvov, etc., added or understood,
to pass: Biov, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (very often in Grk. writ.) ;
Sudyer &v tun, sc. tov Bio to live [W. 593 (551 sq.) ; B.
144 (126)], Tit. iii. 3 (ey prooopia, Plat. Phaedr. p.
259 d.; év elpqvy kai cxodH, Plut. Timol. 3).*
Sra-Séxopar: 1 aor. duedeEduny; prop. to receive through
another anything left or bequeathed by him, to receive in
succession, receive in turn, succeed to: thy aoxnyny the
tabernacle, Acts vii. 45. (ryv apyny, thy Baowelay, etc.,
in Polyb., Diod., Joseph., al.) [Cf. d€xopau. |*
SidSypa, -ros, 74, (Suad€@ to bind round), a diadem, i. e.
the blue band marked with white with which Persian
kings used to bind on the turban or tiara; the kingly or-
nament for the head: Rev. xii. 3; xiii. 1; xix. 12. (Xen.
Cyr. 8,3, 13; Esth.i.11; ii.17 for 193; 1 Mace. i. 9.)*
[Syn. B:ddqpma, orépavos: ot. like the Lat. corona is
a crown in the sense of a chaplet, wreath, or garland — the
badge of “victory in the games, of civic worth, of military
valor, of nuptial joy, of festal gladness”; d:d5nua is a crown
as the badge of royalty, BactAclas yydpioua (Lucian, Pisc. 35).
Cf. Trench § xxiii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 1; Dict. of
Christ. Antiq. s. v. Coronation p. 464sq.; B. D. Am. ed.s. v.)
Diadem; but ef. erépavos, a.]
S1a-8(Sopr ; fut. diadvddoow (Rev. xvii. 13 Rec.) ; 1 aor.
biéS@xa; 2 aor. impy. duddos; Pass., impf. 3 pers. sing.
dcedid070 (Acts iv. 35), for which LT Tr WH read Sce-
didero (see arodidapt) ; 1. to distribute, divide among
several [cf. da, C. 3]: ri, Lk. xi. 225 ri rem, Lk. xviii. 22
(Lehm. dds); Jn. vi. 11 (Tdf. éxev) ; pass. Acts iv. 35.
Its meaning is esp. illustrated by Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 7 rév
Kvpov AaBovta tov Kpedy Ovadiddvat Tots . . . Oeparevtais
. . Totadra érrotet, €ws SuediSov mavta a éaBe Kpéa. a
to give over, deliver: ri ru, Rev. xvii. 13; but here GL
T Tr WH have restored 6.ddacr (cf. d(d@pt, init.).*
814-50xX0s, -ov, 6, 7, (Stadéxouar), succecding, a successor :
Acts xxiv. 27. (Sir. xlvi. 1; [xlviii. 8]; 2 Macc. xiv. 26;
often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hat. 5, 26 down.) *
Sia-Lovvio or duafovyupe: 1 aor. dveCwoa; 1 aor. mid.
dueCwodunv; pf. pass. ptcp. dueCoopevos; to bind or gird
all around (6a; this force of the prep. appears in the
trop. use of the verb in Plut. Brut. 31, 2 as & 1 pro€ pueioa
kai Stalaoaca mavtaxdbev thy modi Siehape tod-
An) : €avrdv, Jn. xiii. 4; Pass. Sca¢ovvvpai re to be girded:
@ (by attraction for 6 [yet cf. Mey.]) Av dueCwopevos, In.
xiil. 5; Mid. dvag@vvupat re to gird one’s self with a thing,
gird a thing around one’s self: Jn. xxi. 7; (Ezek. xxiii.
15 [Alex.]. in Grk. writ. occasionally fr. Thue. on).
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 13.*
SraOAKn, -ns, 7, (SiariOnuc) ; 1. a disposition, arrange-
ment, of any sort, which one wishes to be valid, (Germ.
Verordnung, Willensverfiigung): Gal. iii. 15, where un-
der the name of a man’s disposition is meant specifically a
testament, so far forth as it is a specimen and example of
that disposition [cf. Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; esp. the
last disposal which one makes of his earthly possessions
after his death, a testament or will (so in Grk. writ. fr.
[Arstph.], Plat. lege. 11 p. 922 ¢. sqq. down): Heb. ix.
16 sq. 2. a compact, covenant (Arstph. ay. 440),
very often in the Scriptures for m3 (Vulg. testamen-
136
dcaOnKn
tum). For the word covenant is used to denote the close
relationship which God entered into, first with Noah
(Gen. vi. 18; ix. 9 sqq. [cf. Sir. xliv. 18]), then with
Abraham, Isaac and Jacob and their posterity (Lev.
xxvi. 42 [cf. 2 Mace. i. 2]), but esp. with Abraham (Gen.
xv. and xvii.), and afterwards through Moses with the
people of Israel (Ex. xxiv.; Deut. v. 2; xxvill. 69 (xxix.
1)). By this last covenant the Israelites are bound to
obey God’s will as expressed and solemnly promulged in
the Mosaic law; and he promises them his almighty
protection and blessings of every kind in this world,
but threatens transgressors with the severest punish-
ments. Hence in the N.T. we find mention of ai m\dkes
THs Siabnkns (V3 nim, Deut. ix. 9, 15), the tables of
the law, on which the duties of the covenant were inscribed
(Ex. xx.); of 9 KiBwrds ths dia8. (193 TIN, Deut. x.
8; xxxi. 9; Josh. iil. 6, etc.), the ark of the covenant or
law, in which those tables were deposited, Heb. ix. 4;
Rev. xi. 193; of 4 dsaOqxn mepitopis the covenant of cir-
cumcision, made with Abraham, whose sign and seal was
circumcision (Gen. xvii. 10 sqq-), Acts vii. 8; of ré aiwa
ths SwaOnkns the blood of the victims, by the shedding and
sprinkling of which the Mosaic covenant was ratified,
Heb. ix. 20 fr. Ex. xxiv. 8; of ai d:a0ijKae the covenants,
one made with Abraham, the other through Moses with
the Israelites, Ro. ix. 4 [L txt. Tr mrg. 7 d:a8nxn] (Sap.
Xvili. 22; Sir. xliv. 11; 2 Mace. viii. 15; Ep. of Barn. 9;
[ef. W. 177 (166)]); of ai ScabjKar tHs emayyedias, the
covenants to which the promise of salvation through the
Messiah was annexed, Eph. ii. 12 (cvvOqKar ayabav trro-
oxéoewy, Sap. xii. 21); for Christian salvation is the
fulfilment of the divine promises annexed to those coy-
enants, esp. to that made with Abraham: LK. i. 72 sq.;
Acts ili. 25; Ro. xi. 27; Gal. iii. 17 (where dcaOjxn is
God’s arrangement i. e. the promise made to Abraham).
As the new and far more excellent bond of friendship
which God in the Messiah’s time would enter into with
the people of Israel is called AWIN 173, caww7 dcaOyKy
(Jer. xxxvili. (xxxi.) 31),— which divine promise Christ
has made good (Heb. viii. 8-10; x. 16), — we find in the
N. T. two distinct covenants spoken of, vo d:a6jKae (Gal.
iv. 24), viz. the Mosaic and the Christian, with the
former of which (77 mparn dca6nkn, Heb. ix. 15, 18, ef.
vill. 9) the latter is contrasted, as caw Suabnxn, Mt. xxvi.
28; Mk. xiv. 24 (in both pass. in RGL [in Mt. in Tr
also]); Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xi. 25;
2 Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8; xpeirrav duaOjn, Heb. vii. 22;
aimvos diaOnxn, Heb. xiii. 20; and Christ is called xpeir-
Tovos OY Kawns or veas Siabynkns peoitns: Heb. viii. 6; ix.
15; xii. 24. This new covenant binds men to exercise
faith in Christ, and God promises them grace and salva-
tion eternal. This covenant Christ set up and ratified by
undergoing death; hence the phrases 76 aiva ris Kawvas
diaOhKns, Td aiva ris SuaOnKns, (see aiua sub fin.), [Heb.
x. 29]; 7d alud pov ris duajxns, my blood by the shed-
ding of which the covenant is established, Mt. xxvi. 28
T WH and Mk. xiv. 24 T Tr WH (on two gen. after one
noun cf, Matthiae § 380, Anm.1; Kiihner ii. p. 288 sq.;
Sialpecis
[Jelf § 543, 1, cf. § 466; W.§ 30, 3 Note 3; B. 155 (136) ]).
By metonymy of the contained for the container 4 radaud
diaOyen is used in 2 Co. iii. 14 of the sacred books of the
O. T. because in them the conditions and principles of
the older covenant were recorded. Finally must be
noted the amphiboly or twofold use [ef. Philo de mut.
nom. § 6] by which the writer to the Hebrews, in ix. 16
sq., substitutes for the meaning covenant which d.a6jxn
bears elsewhere in the Ep. that of testament (see 1 above),
and likens Christ to a testator, — not only because the
author regards eternal blessedness as an inheritance be-
queathed by Christ, but also because he is endeavoring
to show, both that the attainment of eternal salvation is
made possible for the disciples of Christ by his death
(ix. 15), and that even the Mosaic covenant had been
consecrated by blood (18 sqq.). This, apparently, led
the Latin Vulgate to render dca6jyxn wherever it occurs
in the Bible [i. e. in the New Test., not always in the
Old; see B.D. s. v. Covenant, and B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Testament] by the word testamentum.* 5
St-alpecis, -ews, 7, (dtarpew, q. V-) ; 1. division, dis-
tribution, (Hadt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. distinction, differ-
ence, (Plat. Soph. p. 267 b. riva d:aipeow dyvwcias re Kal
yooews Onooper; al.) ; in particular, a distinction arising
from a different distribution to different persons, [A. V.
diversity]: 1 Co. xii. 4-6, cf. 11 dcacpody i8ia exaor@ kabos
BotyXerat.*
Si-aip€w, -@; 2 aor. dvetAov; 1. to divide into parts,
to part, to tear, cleave or cut asunder, (Hom. and subseq.
writ.; Gen. xv. 10; 1 K. iii. 25). 2. to distribute: ri
mut (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 51; Hell. 3, 2, 10): Lk. xv. 12; 1
Co. xii. 11; (Josh. xviii. 5; 1 Chr. xxiii. 6, etc.).*
[8ta-Kabaipw: 1 aor. duexaddapa (un-Attic and later form ;
cf. Moeris, ed. Piers. p. 137; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25; Veitch
s. v. kaOaipw), inf. duaxabapa; to cleanse (throughly cf. 8.4,
C. 2 i.e.) thoroughly: Lk. iii. 17 TWH Lmrg. Trmrg. ;
for RG d:axabapifw. (Fr. Arstph. and Plat. down.) *]
Sia-Kabapitw: fut. daxabapio [ B. 37 (32); W.§ 13,1 ¢.;
WH. App. p. 163]; to cleanse thoroughly, (Vulg. per-
mundo): tiv ddova, Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17 [T WH ete.
diaxabapa, q. v-]. (Not found in prof. auth., who use
Siaxabaipw, as tiv do, Alciphr. ep. 3, 26.) *
Sva-Kat-cAeyxopar: impf. dsaxarnreyxdpyy; to confute
with rivalry and effort or in a contest (on this use of the
prep. dud in compos. cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 854; [al. give
it here the sense of completeness ; see did, C. 2]): with
dat. of pers. [W. § 31,1£.; B. 177 (154) ]; not found exe.
in Acts xviii. 28 [R. V. powerfully confuted].*
Staxovéw, -d; impf. dinxdvouy (as if the verb were com-
pounded of 8:4 and dkovéw, for the rarer and earlier form
édvaxévour, cf. B. 35 (31); Ph. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. §86 Anm.
6; Kriiger § 28, 14, 13); [fut. dcaxovnow]; 1 aor. dinko-
ynoa (for the earlier é8:axdynoa) ; Pass., pres. ptcp. d:a-
kovoupevos; 1 aor. inf. ScaxovnOjva, ptcp. dvaxovnbeis ;
(dtdkovos, q. v-) ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.], Hdt. down ; to
be a servant, attendant, domestic; to serve, wait upon; 1.
univ.: [absol. 6 dS:axovdv, Lk. xxii. 26]; with dat. of
pers. to minister to one; render ministering offices to : Jn.
137
dtakovia
xii. 26; Acts xix. 22; Philem. 13; Pass. to be served,
ministered unto (W. § 39,1; [B. 188 (163)]): Mt. xx.
28; Mk. x. 45. 2. Like the Lat. ministrare, to wait
at table and offer food and drink to the guests, [ef. W. 5938
(552)]: with dat. of pers., Mt. iv. 11; viii. 15; Mk.i. 135
31; Lk. iv. 39; xii. 37; xvii. 8; absol. 6 dScaxovdy, Lk.
xxii. 27; so also of women preparing food, Lk. x. 40; Jn.
xii. 2; (Menand. ap. Athen. 6 c. 46, p. 245 ¢.; Anacr.
4,6; al.; pass. dtaxovetoOat ind twos, Diod. 5, 28; Philo,
vit. contempl. § 9). 3. to minister i.e. supply food and
the necessaries of life: with dat. of pers., Mt. xxv. 44;
xxvii. 55; Mk. xv. 413 dujxdvouv adrois é« (Rec. amd)
T&v UrapxévT@y avtais, Lk. viii. 3; to relieve one’s neces-
sities (e. g. by collecting alms): Ro. xv. 25; Heb. vi. 10;
tparéfais , to provide, take care of, distribute, the things
necessary to sustain life, Acts vi. 2. absol., those are
said dvakoveiv, i. e. to take care of the poor and the sick,
who administer the office of deacon (see didkovos, 2) in
the Christian churches, to serve as deacons: 1 Tim. iii.
10, 13; 1 Pet. iv. 11 [many take this last ex. in a gen-
eral rather than an official sense]. 4. with ace.
of the thing, to minister i.e. attend to, anything, that may
serve another’s interests: ydpis Svaxovoupéevn O Huadv, 2
Co. viii. 19; [ddporns, ibid. 20]; 60a Sinxdvnoe, how many
things I owe to his ministration, 2 Tim. i. 18; émuaroAy
diaxovnbecioa ip judy, an epistle written, as it were, by
our serving as amanuenses, 2 Co. iii. 3. with ace. of the
thing and dat. of pers., to minister a thing unto one, to
serve one with or by supplying any thing: 1 Pet. i. 12; ri
eis EavTovs, i. e. els GAAHAOvs to one another, for mutual
use, 1 Pet. iv. 10.*
StaKovia, -as, 7, (Sudxovos), [fr. Thuc., Plat. down], ser-
vice, ministering, esp. of those who execute the commands
of others; 1. univ.: 2 Tim. iv. 11; Heb.i. 14. 2
of those who by the command of God proclaim and pro-
mote religion among men; a. of the office of Moses:
7 Svak. Tod Oavarov, concisely for the ministration by
which the law is promulgated that threatens and brings
death, 2 Co. iii. 7; tis xataxpicews, the ministration by
which condemnation is announced, ibid. 9. b. of the
office of the apostles and its administration: Acts i.
17, 2baterxe 242 scat 195" Ros xinl35-2) Contvaalise vi. i;
1 Tim. i. 12; rod Adyou, Acts vi. 4; rod mvevparos, the
ministry whose office it is to cause men to obtain and
be governed by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. iii. 8; rhs Suxato-
ovvns, by which men are taught how they may become
righteous with God, ibid. 9; ris karaddayjs, the ministry
whose work it is to induce men to embrace the offered
reconciliation with God, 2 Co. v. 18; mpds thy tyav dca-
xoviav, that by preaching the gospel I might minister
unto you, 2 Co. xi. 8. c. of the ministration or service
of all who, endowed by God with powers of mind and
heart peculiarly adapted to this end, endeavor zealously
and laboriously to promote the cause of Christ among
men, as apostles, prophets, evangelists, elders, etc. : 1 Co.
xii. 5; Eph. iv. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 5. What ministry is re-
ferred to in Col. iv. 17 is not clear. 3. the ministra-
tion of those who render to others the offices of Christian
SuaKovos
affection: 1 Co. xvi. 15; Rev. ii. 19, esp. of those who
succor need by either collecting or bestowing benefac-
tions [Acts xii. 25]; the care of the poor, the supplying
or distributing of charities, (Luther uses Handreichung) :
Acts vi. 1; 2 Co. ix. 13; 9 Stakovia 7 eis Tovs dyious, 2 Co.
viii. 45 ix. 1; 4 dcaxovia THs Aevroupyias, the ministration
rendered through this Aecroupyia, 2 Co. ix. 12; mwéprew
eis Ovaxoviay twi, to send a thing to one for the relief of
his want [A. V. to send relief unto], Acts xi. 29 (kopigew
Xpnpara ToAAG eis Staxoviav rdv xnpdv, Acta Thomae § 56,
p- 233 ed. Tdf.); 7 Suaxovia pov 7) ets ‘Iepovoad. “my min-
istration in bringing the money collected by me, a minis-
tration intended for Jerusalem” (Fritzsche), Ro. xv. 31
[here L Tr mrg. read 7 Swpodopia . . . év etc. }. 4. the
office of deacon in the primitive church (see dudkovos,
2) 5) Rossdi. 7. 5. the service of those who prepare
and present food: Lk. x. 40 (as in Xen. oec. 7, 41).*
Stdkovos, -ov, 6, 7, (of uncert. origin, but by no means,
as was formerly thought, compounded of da and kéus,
so as to mean prop. ‘raising dust by hastening’; cf.
eyxovety ; for a in the prep. dd is short, in d:dkovos long.
Bttm. Lexil. i. p. 218 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 231 sq.] thinks
it is derived fr. obsol. d:dkw i. q. Senko [allied with doko ;
cf. Vanicek p. 363]); one who executes the commands
of another, esp. of a master; a servant, attendant, min-
aster ; 1. univ.: of the servant of a king, Mt. xxii.
13; with gen. of the pers. served, Mt. xx. 26; xxiii. 11;
Mk. ix. 85; x. 43, (in which pass. it is used fig. of those
who advance others’ interests even at the sacrifice of their
own) ; THs €xxAnoias, of one who does what promotes the
welfare and prosperity of the church, Col. i. 25; Scdxovor
Tov Geod, those through whom God carries on his admin-
istration on earth, as magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4; teachers
of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 5; 2 Co. vi.4; 1 Th. iii.
2RTTr WHtxt. Lmrg.; the same are called dudkovor
(rod) Xpuorod, 2 Co. xi. 23; Col. i. 7; 1 Tim. iv. 6; ev xupic,
in the cause of the Lord, Col. iv. 7; [Eph. vi. 21]; 6 dud.
pov my follower, Jn. xii. 26; rod Sarava, whom Satan
uses as a servant, 2 Co. xi. 15; [duaprias, Gal. ii. 17];
dudk. meptrouns (abstr. for coner.), of Christ, who labored
for the salvation of the circumcised i.e. the Jews, Ro. xy.
8; with gen. of the thing to which service is rendered,
i.e. to which one is devoted: kawis Siabjxns, 2 Co. iii. 6 ;
Tov evayyeNiov, Eph. iii. 7; Col. i. 23; Sccaoovyns, 2 Co.
ae By, 2. a deacon, one who, by virtue of the office
assigned him by the church, cares for the poor and has
charge of and distributes the money collected for their
use, [ef. BB.DD., Dict. of Christ. Antiq., Schaff-Herzog
s. v. Deacon; Bp. Lyhift. Com. on Phil. dissert. i. § i. ;
Julius Miiller, Dogmatische Abhandlungen, p. 560
sqq:|2 Phil. i. 1; 1 Tim, iii,.8,12,-ef. Acts vi. $ sqq: 3
7) Sudkovos, a deaconess (ministra, Plin. epp. 10, 97), a wo-
man to whom the care of either poor or sick women was
entrusted, Ro. xvi.1 [cf. Dicts. as above, s. v. Deaconess;
Lghtft. as above p. 191; B. D.s. v. Phebe]. 3. a
waiter, one who serves food and drink: Jn. ii. 5, 9, as in
Xen. mem. 1, 5, 2; Hier. 3, 11 (4, 2); Polyb. 31,4, 5;
Lceian. de merced. cond. § 26; Athen. 7, Pa2olia 0;
138
diaxplvw
420e.; see diaxovéw, 2 and -via, 5; [also Wetst. on Mt. iv.
WE
[Syn. dideovos, d00A0s, Oepdrar, Srnpérns: “ did-
kovos represents the servant in his activity for the work; not
in his relation, either servile, as that of the dSovAos, or more
voluntary, as in the case of the Oepdrwy, to a person”
Trench; [yet cf. e. g. Ro. xiii. 4; 2 Cor. vi. 4 etc.]. dovAos
opp. to éAev@epos, and correlate to Seamdrns or Kvptos, denotes
a bondman, one who sustains a permanent servile relation to
another. O@epdrwy is the voluntary performer of services,
whether as a freeman or a slave ; it is a nobler, tenderer word
than SovAos. sémnp. acc. to its etymol. suggests subordi-
nation. Cf. Trench § ix.; B. D.s. v. Minister ; Mey. on
Eph. iii. 7; Schmidt ch. 164.]
Staxdortor, -at, -a, (wo hundred : Mk. vi. 37; Jn. vi. 7, ete.
St-axotw: fut. duaxovcoua; prop. to hear one through,
hear to the end, hear with care, hear fully, (ef. da, C. 2]
(Xen., Plat., sqq.) : of a judge trying a cause, Acts xxiil.
85; so in Deut. i. 16; Dio Cass. 36, 53 (36).*
Sta-kplyw ; impf. dvéxpevov; 1 aor. duexpwva; Mid., [pres.
Siaxpivopar]; imp. dcexpivdpny; 1 aor. dtexpiOny Gin prof.
auth. in a pass. sense, to be separated ; cf. W. § 39, 2; [B.
52 (45) ]) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; in Sept. chiefly
for WDW, also for }-q7J ete. 1. to separate, make a dis-
tinction, discriminate, [cf. dua, C. 4]: ovdev dvexpwe petakd
jay te kat avtav, Acts xv. 9; pndev diaxpivavra, making
no difference, sc. between Jews and Gentiles, Acts xi. 12
LT Tr WH; like the Lat. distinguo, used emphatically :
to distinguish or separate a person or thing from the rest,
in effect i.q. to prefer, yield to him the preference or
honor: rw, 1 Co. iv. 7 [ef. W. 452 (421)]; ro cepa (rod
kupiov), 1 Co, xi. 29. 2. to learn by discrimination,
to try, decide: Mt. xvi. 3 [T br. WH reject the pass.]; 1
Co. xiv. 29; éaurdv, 1 Co. xi. 813 to determine, give judg-
ment, decide a dispute: 1 Co. vi. 5. Pass.and Mid. to be
parted, to separate one’s self from; 1. to withdraw from
one, desert him (Thue. 1,105; 3, 9); of heretics withdraw-
ing from the society of true Christians (Sozom. 7, 2 [p. 705
ed. Vales. ] ex rovrov of pev Suaxpibertes tdta exxAnotagoy) :
Jude 22 acc. to the (preferable) reading of L T Tr txt.
eheyyere Svaxpivomevous, those who separate themselves from
you, i.e. who apostatize ; instead of the Rec. édeetre dca-
kpivdpevot, which is to be rendered, making for yourselves
a selection; cf. Huther ad loc.; [others though adopting
the reading preferred above, refer d:axp. to the following
head and translate it while they dispute with you; but
WH (see their App.) Tr mrg. follow codd. 8B and a few
other author. in reading éAeare Svakpivopévous acc. to
which d:axp. is probably to be referred to signification 3:
R. V. txt. “on some have mercy, who are in doubt” ]. 2.
to separate one’s self in a hostile spirit, to oppose, strive
with, dispute, contend: with dat. of pers. Jude 9, (Polyb.
2, 22, 11 [ef. W. § 31,1 g.; B.177 (154) ]); mpds twa, Acts
xi. 2, (Hidt. 9, 58). 3. in a sense not found in prof.
auth. to be at variance with one’s self, hesitate, doubt: Mt.
xxl 21; Ro. xiv. 23; Jas.i. 6; ev r9 xapdia aitod, Mk. xi.
23 ; ev éaut@ [i. e.-rois], Jas. ii. 4 [al. refer this to 1: do
ye not make distinctions among yourselves}; pndev Srapi-
vonevos, nothing doubting i. e. wholly free from doubt,
Sedxpiors
Jas. i. 6; without any hesitation as to whether it be law-
ful or not, Acts x. 20 and acc. to RG in xi. 12; 0d dee-
kpiOn rh amoria he did not hesitate through want of faith,
Ro. iv. 20.*
Sid-Kpiorts, -ews, 7, (Scaxpiva), a distinguishing, discern-
ing, judging: mvevpatayv, 1 Co. xii. 103; Kadod re Kal KaKov,
Heb. v. 14; py els dcaxpicess Suadoyeopev not for the pur-
pose of passing judgment on opinions, as to which one is
~ to be preferred as the more correct, Ro. xiv. 1 [see d:a-
Aoyropes, 1]. (Xen., Plat., al.) *
Sta-kwrvw: impf. Svex@Avoy; (dud in this compound does
not denote effort as is com. said, but separation,
Lat. dis, cf. Germ. verhindern, Lat. pro hibere; cf. da-
kXeio, to separate by shutting, shut out; cf. Win. De verb.
comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 17 sq.); to hinder, prevent: twa,
Mt. iii. 14 [on the tense ef. W. § 40, 3c.; B. 205 (178)].
(From Soph. and Thue. down.) *
Sta-Aakéw: impf. dveAddovv; impf. pass. dceAadovunv;
to converse together, to talk with, (dia denoting by turns,
or one with another; see d.axaredéyxopuar), Ti, pass.
[were talked of ], Lk. i. 65; mpds dddndovs (as Polyb. 23,
9, 6), ri dv mooecay [-cavev al. ], of the conference of men
deliberating, Lk. vi. 11. (Hur. Cyel. 175.) *
Sva-héyouor; impf. dveAcydunv; [1 aor. 3 pers. sing. dve-
éeEaro (LT Tr WH in Acts xvii. 2; xviii. 19)]; 1 aor.
diedex nv; (mid. of diadéye, to select, distinguish) ; 1.
to think different things with one’s self, mingle thought with
thought (cf. diaroyi¢opat) ; to ponder, revolve in mind ; so
in Hom. 2. as very freq. in Attic, to converse, dis-
course with one, argue, discuss: absol., Acts [xviii. 4];
xix. 8 sq.; [xx. 9]; mepi twos, Acts xxiv. 25; revi, with
one, Acts xvii. 17; xviii. 19; xx. 7; Heb. xii. 5; dé trav
ypaper, drawing arguments from the Scriptures, Acts
XVil. 2; mpds twa, Acts xvii. 17; xxiv. 12; with the idea
of disputing prominent: mpds ddAndous, foll. by interrog.
tis, Mk. ix. 843; mepi twos, Jude 9.*
Sta-Aeimw: [2 aor. duehumov]; to interpose a delay, to in-
termit, leave off for a time something already begun: ob
Scédere [T WH mre. d1€Xeurev] karadsAodea (on the ptep.
cf. W. § 45, 4 a.; [B. 300 (257)]), she has not ceased
kissing, has continually kissed, Lk. vii. 45. (Is. v. 14;
Jer. xvii. 8; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *
§td-AeKTos, -ov, 7, (Stareyw) ; 1. conversation, speech,
discourse, language (Plat., Dem., al.). 2. fr. Polyb.
[ef. Aristot. probl. 10, 38 rod dvOpamov pia porn, adra
SiddXexrot troANai] down, the tongue or language peculiar
to any people: Acts i. 19; ii. 6, 8; xxi. 40; xxil. 2; xxvi.
14. (Polyb. 1, 80, 6; 3, 22, 3; 40, 6, 3 sq. ; peOepunvevew
els THY “EdAjvev Siddextov, Diod. 1, 37; maca pev duddexros,
4 8 Adj) Suafepsvrws dvopdtrov mrovtei, Philo, vit.
Moys. ii. § 7; [ef. Miiller on Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 22, 4 fin.].)*
[Sta-Auprdve (or -Avprdve) : impf. dceAcuravov; to in-
termit, cease: Kal@v ob SveNipmavev, Acts viii. 24 WH (re-
jected) mrg.; cf. W. 345 sq. (323 sq.); B. 300 (257).
(Tobit x. 7; Galen in Hippoer. Epid. 1, 3; cf. Bornem.
on Acts 1. c.; Veitch s. v. \yuravea.) *]
Sradrdocow: 2 aor. pass. Sudddynv; (see dua, C. 6);
1. to change: ti dvri twos [cf. W. 206 (194)]. 2. to
139
Stapaptvpopat
change the mind of any one, to reconcile (so fr. [Aeschy].]
Thuc. down): twa rw. Pass. to be reconciled, rwi, to re-
new friendship with one: Mt. v. 24; (1 S. xxix. 4; 1
Esdr. iv. 31). See Fritzsche’s learned discussion of this
word in his Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [in opp. to
Tittmann’s view that it implies mutual enmity; see
kara\\doow, fin.]; cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. pp.
7,10; [Tholuck, Bergrede Christi, p.171 (on Mt. v. 24)].*
Sta-Aoyifopar; dep. mid.; impf. dvedoyeCdunv; [1 aor.
Suehoyiodpnv, Lk. xx. 14 Lehm.]; (dd as in Svadéyopat) ;
to bring together different reasons, to reckon up the reasons,
to reason, revolve in one’s mind, deliberate: simply, Lk. i.
29; v. 21; ev tH kapdia, Mk. ii. 6, 8; Lk. v. 22; with ad-
dition of mepi rivos, Lk. iii. 15 ; év éavré [or -rois], with-
in himself, etc., Mk. ii. 8; Lk. xii. 17; év éavrois i. q. ep
ahAjdovs among themselves, Mt. xvi. 7 sq.; mpds éavrovs
i. q. mpos aAAnAovs, one turned towards another, one with
another, Mk. ix. 33 Rec.; xi. 31 LT Tr WH; Lk. xx.
14; mpos adAndous, Mk. viii. 16; map’ éavrois [see apd,
IL. ¢-], Mt.xxi« 25 [L Tr WH txt.-év €.]; re, Jn. x12 50
Rec.; éru equiv. to mept tovrov éri, Mk. viii. 17. (For
awn several times in the Psalms; 2 Mace. xii. 43; in
Grk. writ. fr. Plat. and Xen. down.) *
Sia-oyiopds, -od, 6, (duadoyi{ouar), Sept. for NawND
and Chald. }1'y9, in Grk. writ. fr. Plat. down, the thinking
of aman deliberating with himself; hence _—1. athought,
inward reasoning: Lk. ii. 35; v. 22; vi. 8; ix. 46 sq.;
Ro. xiv. 1 [yet some bring this under 2]; the reasoning
of those who think themselves to be wise, Ro. i. 21; 1
Co. iii. 20; an opinion: kprat dcadoytopav mormpay judges
with evil thoughts, i.e. who follow perverse opinions, rep-
rehensible principles, Jas. ii. 4 [ef. W. 187 (176)]; pur-
pose, design: Mt. xv. 19; Mk. vii. 21. 2. a deliberat-
ing, questioning, about what is true: Lk. xxiv. 38; when
in reference to what ought to be done, hesitation, doubt:
ing: xopls yoyyvopar kal duaroyoper, Phil. ii. 14 [‘ yoyy.
is the moral, dad. the intellectual rebellion against
God’ Bp. Lehtft.]; xapis dpyns x. Suadkoyeopov, 1 Tim. ii.
8; [in the last two pass. al. still advocate the rendering
disputing; yet cf. Mey. on Phil. 1. ¢.].*
Sta-Abw: 1 aor. pass. SueAVOnv ; to dissolve [cf. dua, C. 4]:
in Acts v. 36 of a body of men broken up and dispersed,
as often in Grk. writ.*
Sta-papripopat; dep. mid.; impf. dcvewaprupduny (Acts
ii. 40 Rec.); 1 aor. dcewaprupayny; in Sept. mostly for
ym; often in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down; see a multitude
of exx. fr. them in Wzn. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 20
sqq.; to call gods and men to witness [ ia, with the inte r-
position of gods and men; cf. Ellic. (after Win.) on 1
Aptian, Se CAIs 1. to testify, i. e. earnestly, religiously to
charge: foll. by an impy. Acts ii. 40; évamoy rod Ocod k.
Xpiorod "Incod, 2 Tim. iv.1, (2 K. xvii. 13; Xen. Cyr. 7,
1,17 od py mpdrepov euBarrXe rots ToNepto.s, OvapapTupopat,
mplv etc.) ; also with évamcov rod Beod kd. foll. by iva [cf.
B. 237 (204)], 1 Tim. v. 21, (foll. by yy, Ex. xix. 21);
foll. by the inf. 2 Tim. ii. 14 [not Lehm.], (Neh. ix. 26).
2. to attest, testify to, solemnly affirm: Acts xx. 23; 1 Th.
iv. 6; Heb. ii. 6; foll. by drt, Acts x. 42; with dat. of pers.
Siapayopat
to give solemn testimony to one, Lk. xvi. 28 ; with ace. of
the obj. to confirm a thing by (the interposition of)
testimony, to testify, cause it to be believed : rov hébyov Tov
kuplov, Acts Vill. 25; TO evayyedLor, Acts xx. 24; rv Ba-
otrelay Tod be0d, Acts xxviii. 23; for all the apostolic in-
struction came back finally to testimony respecting things
which they themselves had seen or heard, or which had
been disclosed to them by divine revelation, (Acts i. 21
sq.; v.82; x.41; xxil. 18); with the addition of e/s and
an acc. of the place unto which the testimony is borne:
Ta rept euod eis ‘Iepova. Acts xxiii. 11; with the addition
of a dat. of the pers. to whom the testimony is given : rots
Iovdaiors Tov Xpiorov “Incody, the Messianic dignity of
Jesus, Acts xviii. 5; "Iovd. ry perdvovay kai miorwy, the
necessity of repentance and faith, Acts xx. 21, (77 ‘Iepouc.
ras dvopias, into what sins she has fallen, Ezek. xvi. 2).*
Sia-pdxopor: impf. Sepaxduny; to fight it out; contend
fiercely: of disputants, Acts xxiii 9. (Sir. vill. 1, 3;
very freq. in Attic writ.) *
Sia-néve ; [impf. dicwevoy]; 2 pers. sing. fut. dvapevets
(Heb. i. 11 Knapp, Bleek, al., for Rec. [GL T Tr
WH al.] Scayévecs); 1 aor. deewewa; pf. dapepevnxa; to
stay permanently, remain permanently, continue, [ cf. per-
dure; Oud, C. 2] (Philo de gigant. § 7 mvedpua Ociov pévery
Suvarov €y uyn, Stapever Se advuvarov) w= Galwiiaos opp.
to awédXvpat, Heb. i. 11 fr. Ps. ci. (cil) 27; with an adj.
or adv. added denoting the condition : d:éwewe kwpds, Lk.
i. 22; ovr, as they are, 2 Pet. iii. 4; to persevere: & rm,
Lk. xxii. 28. (Xen., Plat. and subseq. writ.) *
Sia-pepi{o: impf. dveuepefov; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur.
duapepicare; Pass., [pres. dsapepiCouar]; pf. ptep. diape-
pepiopevos; 1 aor. dtepepicOnv; fut. dStaepro Onoopar; | Mid.,
pres. dtaepiCowar; 1 aor. dvepeproauny]; to divide; a
to cleave asunder, cut in pieces: (a diapepioGevra sc. by
the butcher, Plat. lege. 8 p. 849 d.; acc. to a use pecu-
liar to Lk. in pass. to be divided into opposing parts, to be
at variance, in dissension: emi twa, against one, Lk. xi.
17 sq.; émi Tum, xii. 52 sq. 2. to distribute (Plat. polit.
p- 289 c.; in Sept. chiefly for pon): ti, Mk. xv. 24 Rec.;
ti tom, Lk. xxii. 17 (where L T Tr WH eis ێavrovs for
RG éavrois); Acts ii. 45; Pass. Acts ii. 3; Mid. to dis-
tribute among themselves: ri, Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24
GLTTr WH; Lk. xxiii. 34; with éavrois added, (Mt.
xxvii. 35 Rec.]; Jn. xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19.*
Sta-pepiopds, -od, 6, (StapepiCw), division ; 1. a part-
ing, distribution: Plat. lege. 6 p. 771 d.; Diod. 11, 47;
Joseph. antt. 10, 11, 7, Sept. Ezek. xlviii. 29; Mie. vii.
Dy. 2. disunion, dissension: opp. to eipnyn, Lk. xii.
51; see dianepicw, 1.*
Sia-vepw: 1 aor. pass. SuevewéOnv; to distribute, divide,
(Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.): pass. e’s rov Nady to be dis-
seminated, spread, among the people, Acts iv. 17.*
Sta-vetw ; to express one’s meaning by a sign, nod to,
beckon to, wink at, (Sud, because “the sign is conceived of
as passing through the intervening space to him to whom
it is made” Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 4): Lk.
1.22. (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; Sir. xxvii. 22; Diod. 3,
18; 17 37; Lcian. ver. hist. 2, 44; Icarom. 15; [al.].)*
140
dvatrepaw
S.a-vénpna, -ros, 76, (Suavoéw to think), a thought: Lk. xi.
17. (Sept.; Sir.; often in Plat.) *
Sidvowa, -as, 7, (dud and vods), Sept. for a> and 325;
very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl.] Hdt. down ; 1.
the mind as the faculty of understanding, feeling, desiring:
Mt. xxii. 37; Mk. xii. 30 [Tr mrg. br.]; Lk. x. 27; Eph.
i.18 Rec.; iv. 18; Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; 1 Pet. i.13. zh,
understanding: 1 Jn. v. 20. 3. mind i. e. spirit (Lat.
animus), way of thinking and feeling: Col. i. 21; Lk. i.
DI? Pet alicgt- 4. thought; plur. contextually in a
bad sense, evil thoughts: Eph. ii. 3, as in Num. xv. 39
punoOnoecbe Tacdy THY evTohay kupiov. . kal ov dvacTpa-
dnoeobe oriow tay Siavoray tpav.*
St-av-oly ; impf. dinvoryov; 1 aor. dinvorEa; Pass., 1 aor.
dunvoixOnv ; [2 aor. diunvotyny]; pf. ptep. dinvovypevos (Acts
vii. 56 LT Tr WH); [on variations of augm. see reff. s. v.
avoiyw}|; Sept. chiefly for NPD and NN3; occasionally in
prof. auth. fr. Plat. Lys. p. 210 a. down; to open by di-
viding or drawing asunder (8.a), to open thoroughly (what
had been closed) ; 1. prop.: dpcev d.iavotyov pntpay,
a male opening the womb (the closed matrix), i. e. the
first-born, Lk. ii. 23 (Ex. xiii. 2, ete.); ovpavous, pass.,
Acts vii. 56 LT Tr WH; the ears, the eyes, i. e. to restore
or to give hearing, sight: Mk. vii. 34, 35 RG; Lk. xxiv.
31, (Gen. iii. 5,7; Is. xxxv. 5; 2 K. vi. 17, ete.). 2.
trop.: tas ypapds, to open the sense of the Scriptures,
explain them, Lk. xxiv. 32; rév vody twos to open the
mind of one, i. e. cause him to understand a thing, Lk.
xxiv. 453; riv kapdiay to open one’s soul, i. e. to rouse in
one the faculty of understanding or the desire of learn-
ing, Acts xvi. 14, (2 Macc. i. 4; Themist. orat. 2 de
Constantio imp. [p. 29 ed. Harduin] Stavotyerai pov 4 kap-
dia x. Suavyeorépa yiverar 7 vx7); absol., foll. by drs, to
explain, expound sc. airds, i. e. ras ypapas, Acts xvii. 3.
Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 19 sq.*
Sia-vuKrepevw ; (opp. to Sujpeped@) ; to spend the night,
to pass the whole night, (cf. dua, C.1]: & rem, in any em-
ployment, Lk. vi. 12. (Diod. 13, 62; Antonin. 7, 66; Plut.
mor. p. 950 b.; Hdian. 1, 16, 12 [5 Bekk.] ; Joseph. antt.
6, 13,9; b.j. 2,14, 7 [Job ii. 9; Phil. incorr. mund. § 2;
in Flac. § 6]; with ry vixra added, Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 3.)*
' S-aviw: 1 aor. ptep. dvavveas ; to accomplish fully, bring
quite to an end, finish: tov mAovv, Acts xxi. 7. (2 Mace.
xii. 17; fr. Hom. down.) [Cf. Field, Otium Norv. iii.
p- 85 sq.]*
Sta-tavrtés, see dud, A. II. 1. a.
Sta-rapa-rpiBy, -7s, 7, constant contention, incessant
wrangling or strife, (mapatpi8) attrition; contention,
wrangling); a word justly adopted in 1 Tim. vi. 5 by
GLT Tr WH (for Ree. rapadiarpiBai, q. Vv.) 3; not found
elsewhere [exc. Clem. Al. ete.]; cf. W. 102 (96). CE.
the double compounds S:araparnpeiy, 2 S. iii. 30; also
(doubtful, it must be confessed), Siarapaxtmropat, 1 K.
vi. 4 Ald.; Svarapogive, Joseph. antt. 10, 7, 5. (Steph.
gives also dvamapdyw, Greg. Nyss. ii. 177 b.; S:amapa-
AapBave; Svarapaciwrdw, Joseph. Genes. p. 9 a.; dca-
mapagtpw, Schol. Lucian. ii. 796 Hemst.]*
Sta-repdw, -3; 1 aor. Suerépaca; to pass over, cross over,
SiaTrA€w
e.g. ariver, a lake: Mt. ix.1; xiv. 34; Mk. vi. 53 [here
T WH follow with émt rv yay for (to) the land (cf. R. V.
mrg.)]; foll. by ets with acc. of place, Mk. v. 21; Acts
Xxi. 2; mpds with acc. of pers. Lk. xvi. 26. ([Eur.], Ar-
stph., Xen., subseq. writ.; Sept. for 72.) *
Staahéw: 1 aor. ptep. diamAevoas; (Plin. pernavigo),
to sail across: méXayos (as often in Grk. writ.), Acts
xxvil. 5 [W. § 52, 4, 8].*
Sta-movew: to work out laboriously, make complete by la-
bor. Mid. [pres. Scarovotpat]; with 1 aor. pass. d:emo-
wOnv (for which Attic writ. duerovnodunv); a. to exert
one’s self, strive; b. to manage with pains, accomplish
with great labor ; in prof. auth. in both senses [fr. Aeschyl.
down]. c. to be troubled, displeased, offended, pained,
[cf. collog. Eng. to be worked up; W. 23 (22)]: Acts iv.
2; xvi. 18. (Aquila in Gen. vi. 6; 1 S. xx. 30; Sept. in
Eccl. x. 9 for 1¥3; Hesych. Scamovndeis + AumnGeis.) *
Sta-rropetdw: to cause one to pass through a place ; to car-
ry across; Pass., [pres. Ssaropevouar; impf. dveropevdunr] ;
with fut. mid. [(not found in N. T.) ; fr. Hdt. down]; to
journey through a place, go through: as in Grk. writ. foll.
by &:4 with gen. of place, Mk. ii. 23 L Tr WH txt.; Lk.
vi. 1; foll. by ace. [W. § 52, 4, 8] to travel through: Acts
xvi.4; absol.: Lk. xviii. 36; Ro. xv. 24; with the addition
kara 7roXevs Kal kopas, Lk. xiii. 22. [SyN. see ¢pyoua. | *
Si-arropéw, -6 : impf. diyrdpovy; Mid., [pres. inf. dcamo-
petoOa (Lk. xxiv. 4 RG)]; impf. dSenropovpny (Acts ii.
12 T Tr WH); in the Grk. Bible only in [Dan. ii. 3
Symm. and] Luke; prop. thoroughly (8:a)amopéw (q. v-),
to be entirely at a loss, to be in perplexity: absol. Acts ii.
12; foll. by dca 76 with inf. Lk. ix. 7; mepi twos, Lk. xxiv.
4 (here the mid. is to be at a loss with one’s self, for which
LT Tr WH read the simple dropeio Oa) ; Acts v. 24; ev
éavr@ foll. by indir. discourse, Acts x. 17. (Plat., Aristot.,
Polyb., Diod., Philo, Plut., al.) *
Sva-rpayparevopar: 1 aor. dterpayparevodpny; thorough-
ly, earnestly (dia) to undertake a business, Dion. Hal. 3, 72;
contextually, to undertake a business for the sake of gain:
Lk. xix. 15. (in Plat. Phaedo p.77 d. 95 e. to examine
thoroughly.) *
Sta-mpiw: impf. pass. drempudpuny ; to saw asunder or in
twain, to divide by a saw: 1 Chr. xx. 3; Plat. conv. p.
193 a.; Arstph. eqq. 768,and elsewhere. Pass. trop. to
be sawn through mentally, i. e. to be rent with vexation,
[A. V. cut to the heart], Acts v. 33; with the addition
tais kapdias aitav, Acts vii. 54 (cf. Lk. ii. 35); peyddos
eyadératvoyv kal dvexpiovto kad’ nav, Euseb. h. e. 5, 1, 6
[15 ed. Heinich. ; cf. Gataker, Advers. misc. col. 916 g.].*
St-aprdtw: fut. duapraow; 1 aor. [subj. 3 pers. sing.
dcaprdon |, inf. dapraca ; to plunder: Mt. xii. 29* (where
LT Tr WH dpzdoac), 29° (R T Tr WH); Mk. iii. 27.
[From Hom. down. ]*
Sta-ppfyvupe and dcappnoow (Lk. viii. 29 [RG; see be-
low]); 1 aor. 8:éppn€a; impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. deeppyyvuro
(Lk. v. 6, where Lchm. txt. dvepyyuvto and T Tr WH
dupnooero (L mrg. dtepp.), also L T Tr WH dcapjocor
in Lk. viii. 29; [WH have dcépnfev in Mt. xxvi. 65,
and S:apnéas in Mk. xiv. 63; see their App. p. 163, and
141
dvacmropa
8. v. P, p]); to break asunder, burst through, rend asunder :
7a Seopa, Lk. viii. 29 ; 7d Siervov, pass., Lk. v. 6; ra iparta,
xX'Ta@vas, to rend, which was done by the Jews in extreme
indignation or in deep grief [cf. B. D. s. v. Dress, 4]: Mt.
xxvi. 65; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts xiv. 14, cf. Gen. xxxvii. 29,
34, etc.; 1 Mace. xi. 71; Joseph. b.j. 2, 15, 4. (Sept.,
[Hom.], Soph., Xen., subseq. writ.) *
Stacadéw, -@: 1 aor. duecapnoa; (capns clear); 1.
to make clear or plain, to explain, unfold, declare: rip
mapaBorny, Mt. xiii. 36 L Tr txt. WH; (Eur. Phoen.
398; Plat. legg. 6, 754 a.; al.; Polyb. 2, 1,1; 3, 52,5). 2.
of things done, to declare i. e. to tell, announce, narrate :
Mt. xviii. 31; (2 Mace. 1, 18; Polyb.1,46,4; 2, 27, 3).
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 622 sqq.; Win. De
verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 11.*
Sta-celw: 1 aor. du€oeroa; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down;
to shake thoroughly ; trop. to make to tremble, to terrify (Job
iv. 14 for M57), to agitate; like concutio in juridical
Latin, to extort from one by intimidation money or other
property : twa, Lk. iii. 14 [A. V. do violence to]; 3 Mace.
vii. 21; the Basilica; [Heinichen on Euseb. h.e. 7, 80, 7].*
Sta-ckopmitw; 1 aor. dtecxdpmica; Pass., pf. ptep. dce-
oKopmicpevos ; 1 aor. Stecxopric ny ; 1 fut. dvecxopmriaOn-
copa. ; often in Sept., more rarely in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb.
1,47,45; 27, 2,10 on (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W. 25]);
to scatter abroad, disperse: Jn. xi. 52 (opp. to cvvayw) ;
of the enemy, Lk. i. 51; Acts v. 37, (Num. x. 35, etc.;
Joseph. antt. 8, 15,4; Ael. v. h. 13, 46 (1, 6) 6 dpaxov
tovs pev Sueakdpmice, tovs Sé améxrewe). of a flock of
sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31 (fr. Zech. xiii. 7); Mk. xiv. 27; of
property, to squander, waste: Lk. xv. 13; xvi. 1, (like d:a-
oreipo in Soph. El. 1291). like the Hebr. 771 (Sept.
Ezek. v. 2,10, 12 [ Ald.], ete.) of grain, to scatter i. e. to
winnow (i.e. to throw the grain a considerable distance, or
up into the air, that it may be separated from the chaff;
opp. to cuvayw, to gather the wheat, freed from the chaff,
into the granary [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Agriculture]): Mt.
KxV. 24,-26.*
Sta-07dw: Pass., [pf. inf. dveomaca|; 1 aor. dveomd-
aOnv; to rend asunder, break asunder: ras ddioes, Mk.
v. 4 (ras vevpds, Judg. xvi. 9); of a man, fo tear in
pieces: Acts xxiii. 10, (rods dvdpas kpeovpynddv, Hat. 3,
13).*
Sta-cmelpw: 2 aor. pass. dueomapyy; to scatter abroad,
disperse; Pass. of those who are driven to different places,
Acts viii. 1, 4; xi. 19. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and]
Hdt. down ; very often in Sept.) *
Sia-cropd, -Gs, 7, (Siaomeipw, cf. such words as dyopd,
diapOopa), (Vulg. dispersio), a scattering, dispersion: aré-
pov, Opp: to ovpyuées x. mapagevéis, Plut. mor. p. 1105 a. ; in
the Sept. used of the Israelites dispersed among foreign
nations, Deut. xxvili. 25; xxx. 4; esp. of their Babylo-
nian exile, Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 17; Is. xlix. 6; Judith v.
19; abstr. for concr. of the exiles themselves, Ps. exlvi.
(exlvii.) 2 (i. gq. O17) expelled, outcasts) ; 2 Macc. i. 27;
els r. Suacrropav THv “EAAjver unto those dispersed among
the Greeks [W. § 30, 2 a.], Jn. vii. 35. Transferred to
Christians [i. e. Jewish Christians (?)] scattered abroad
dtacTEAAW
among the Gentiles: Jas. i. 1 (év rij duaoropG, sc. ober) ;
maperidnuot Siacropas Ldvrov, sojourners far away from
home, in Pontus, 1 Pet. i. 1 (see rapemidnuos). [BB.DD.
s. v. Dispersion; esp. Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 31.]*
Bia-créAdw: to draw asunder, divide, distinguish, dis-
pose, order, (Plat., Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut.; often in
Sept.) ; Pass. 76 ScacreAAsuevor, the injunction: Heb. xii.
20, (2 Mace. xiv. 28). Mid., [pres. duaoréhAopac] ; impf.
SveorerAAduny; 1 aor. Suecrerdpyy; lo open one’s self i. e.
one’s mind, to set forth distinctly, (Aristot., Polyb.) ;
hence in the N. T. {so Ezek. iii. 18, 19; Judith xi. 12]
to admonish, order, charge: twi, Mk. viii. 15; Acts xv.
24 ; foll. by tva [cf. B. 237 (204) ], Mt. xvi. 20 R T Tr WH
mrg.; Mk. vii. 36; ix. 9; dseareiAaro roAAa, iva etc. Mk.
v. 43.*
Sidornpa, -ros, 76, [(Stacrjvac) |, an interval, distance ;
space of time: ws @pav rpiav diaor. Acts v. 7, (Lex moAAov
dcacrnparos, Aristot. de audib. p. 800°, 5 ete.]; rerpaeres 6.
Polyb. 9,1, 1; [cvpmas 6 ypdvos nuepev k. vuKtav éore bid-
otnpa, Philo, alleg. leg. i. § 2 etc., see Siegfried s. v. p.
66]).*
S1a-cT ody, -75, 1), (OcacreAAw, cf. avatoAn), a distinction,
difference: Ro. iii. 22; x. 12; of the difference of the
sounds made by musical instruments, 1 Co. xiv. 7.
({Aristot., Theophr.], Polyb., Plut., al.) *
Sia-cTpépw; 1 aor. inf. diacrpéewar; pf. pass. ptep. dre-
otpappevos [cl. WH. App. p.170 sq.]; fr. Aeschyl. down;
a. to distort, turn aside: tas ddovs Kupiov Tas evdeias, fig-
uratively (Prov. x. 10), to oppose, plot against, the saving
purposes and plans of God, Acts xiii. 10. Hence b.
to turn aside from the right path, to pervert, corrupt: 76
6vos, Lk. xxiii. 2 (Polyb. 5, 41,1; 8, 24,3); twa ard
tivos, to corrupt and so turn one aside from etc. Acts
xiii. 8, (Ex. v. 4; voluptates animum detorquent a vir-
tute, Cic.) ; Sueorpaupevos perverse, corrupt, wicked: Mt.
xvii. 17; Lk. ix. 41; Acts xx. 30; Phil. ii. 15.*
Sia-cd~o: 1 aor. déecwoa; 1 aor. pass. dveodOnv; in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; often in Sept., esp. for oon and
WIN; to preserve through danger, to bring safe through ;
to save i. e. cure one who is sick (cf. our collog. bring
him through): Lk. vii. 3; pass. Mt. xiv. 36; to save i. e.
keep safe, keep from perishing: Acts xxvii. 43; to save
out of danger, rescue: Acts xxviii. 1; ék ris daracons,
ibid. 4; —as very often in Grk. writ. (see exx. in Win.
De verb. comp. ete. Pt. v. p. 9 sq.) with specification of
the person to whom or of the place to which one is
brought safe through: mpds @dcuxa, Acts xxiii. 24; emt
thy ynv, Acts xxvii. 44; ets ru, 1 Pet. iii. 20.*
dia-rayf, -js, 9, (Suardoow), a purely bibl. [2 Esdr. iv.
11] and eccl. word (for which the Greeks use Suarakis),
a disposition, arrangement, ordinance: Ro. xiii. 2; edd-
Bere tov vdpov eis duarayds dyyéAwv, Acts vii. 53, ye re-
ceived the law, influenced by the authority of the ordain-
ing angels, or because ye thought it your duty to receive
what was enjoined by angels (at the ministration of an-
gels {nearly i. q. as being the ordinances ete.], similar
to eis dvopa déxerOa, Mt. x. 41; see eis, B. II. 2 d.; LW.
398 (372), cf. 228 (214), also B. 151 (131)]). On the
142
Svat Onpt
Jewish opinion that angels were employed as God’s
assistants in the solemn proclamation of the Mosaic law,
ef. Deut. xxxiii. 2 Sept.; Acts vii. 38; Gal. ili. 19; Heb.
ii. 2; Joseph. antt. 15, 5,3; [Philo de somn. i. § 22; Bp.
Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. ¢.].*
Sié-raypa, -ros, TO, (Suaracow), an injunction, mandate:
Heb. xi. 23 [Lehm. 8éypa]. (2 Esdr. vii. 11; Add. Esth.
iii. 14 [in Tdf. ch. iii. fin., line 14]; Sap. xi. 8; Philo,
decal. § 4; Diod. 18, 64; Plut. Marcell. c. 24 fin.;
fal)*
Sta-rapdocow, or tra: 1 aor. pass. duerapdxOnv; to agi-
tate greatly, trouble greatly, (Lat. perturbare) : Lk. i. 29.
(Plat., Xen., al.) *
Sia-récow; 1 aor. dera€a; pf. inf. diarerayévar (Acts
xviii. 2 [not Tdf.]); Pass., pf. ptep. dcareraypévos; 1 aor.
ptep. d:araybeis; 2 aor. ptep. diarayeis; Mid., pres. dia-
racooua; fut. diardéouar; 1 aor. Svera€aunv; (on the
force of 6:4 cf. Germ. verordnen, [Lat. disponere, Win.
De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 7 sq.]); to arrange, ap-
point, ordain, prescribe, give order: twi, Mt. xi.1; 1 Co.
xvi. 1; foll. by acc. with inf., Lk. viii. 55; Acts xviii. 2
[here T reray. Tr mrg. br. d:a-; revi foll. by inf. 1 Co. ix.
14]; ri, pass., 6 vopos duatayels d¢ dyyéhav (see Statayn) :
Gal. iii. 19, (Hes. opp. 274); rwi tt, pass.: Lk. ili. 13;
xvii. 9 [Rec.], 10; Acts xxiii. 31. Mid.: 1 Co. vii. 17;
ovtw@ Av duateraypévos (cf. W. 262 (246) ; [B. 193 (167)]),
Acts xx. 13; tui, Tit. i. 5; ri, 1 Co. xi. 34; revi, foll. by
inf.: Acts vil. 44; xxiv. 23. [Comp.: ém-dvaraccopat. | *
Sta-reA€w, -6; to bring thoroughly to an end, accomplish,
[ef. dd, C. 2]; with the addition of rév Biov, rdv xpovor,
etc., it is joined to participles or adjectives and denotes
the continuousness of the act or state expressed by the
ptcp. or adj. (as in Hdt. 6,117; 7,111; Plat. apol. p.
31 a.); oftener, however, without the accus. it is joined
with the same force simply to the pteps. or adjs.: thus
dotrot Otatedette ye continue fasting, constantly fast, Acts
XXvii. 33 (so doadéorepos [al. -raros] Suatedc?, Thue. 1,
34; often in Xen.; W. 348 (326); [B. 304 (261) ]).*
Sia-rnpéw, -; 3 pers. sing. impf. duvernper; to keep con-
tinually or carefully (see 8a, C. 2): Lk. ii. 51, (Gen.
XXXVil. 11); ewavrdv ex twos (cf. rnpetv &k Twos, Jn. xvii.
15), to keep one’s self (pure) from a thing, Acts xv. 29;
ané twos for 7v foll. by te Ps. xi. (xii.) 8. (Plat.,
Dem., Polyb., al.) *
Sia-ri, see dua, B. I. 2 a. p. 134°.
Sva-riOnp : 10 place separately, dispose, arrange, appoint,
[ef. Sua, C. 3]. In the N. T. only in Mid., pres. dcatibe-
pac; 2 aor. Svebéunv; fut. Scadnoopac ; 1. to arrange,
dispose of, one’s own affairs; a. tl, of something that
belongs to one (often so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. down) ;
with dat. of pers. added, in one’s favor, to one’s advan-
tage; hence to assign a thing to another as his possession :
twit Bacireiay (to appoint), Lk. xxii. 29. b. to dispose
of by will, make a testament: Heb. ix. 16 sq.; (Plat. lege.
11 p. 924e.; with dcadnxnv added, ibid. p. 923 c., etc.).
2. Staridepas Suabyxny roi (7D NY 3 Id, Jer. xxxviii.
(xxxi.) 31 sqq.), to make a covenant, enter into cove-
nant, with one, [cf. W. 225 (211); B. 148 (129 sq.)]:
Scat piBo
Heb. viii. 10, (Gen. xv. 18) ; rpés twa, Acts iii. 25; Heb.
x. 16, (Deut. vii. 2); perd tivos, 1 Mace. i. 11. The
Grks. said ovuvridewar mpds twa, ai mpos Tia ouvOnKat,
Xen. Cyr. 3,1, 21. [Comp.: avri-StatiOnpu. | *
Sia-rpiBo; impf. dierpiBov; 1 aor. dvérpea; to rub
between, rub hard, (prop. Hom. Il. 11, 847, al.) ; to wear
away, consume; xpdvoy or nuépas, to spend, pass time:
Acts xiv. 3,28; xvi.12; xx.6; xxv. 6, 14, (Lev. xiv. 8;
Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.); simply to stay, tarry, [ef. B.
145 (127); W. 593 (552)]: Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54 [WH Tr
txt. Euewev]; Acts xii. 19; xiv. 18 (Lchm. ed. min.); xv.
35; (Judith x. 2; 2 Mace. xiv. 23, and often in prof.
auth. fr. Hom. I]. 19, 150 down).*
Sia-rpoph, -7s, 7, (Statpepw to support), sustenance :
1 Tim. vi. 8. (Xen. vect. 4, 49; Menand. ap. Stob.
floril. 61, 1 [vol. ii. 386 ed. Gaisf.]; Diod. 19, 32; Epict.
ench. 12; Joseph. antt. 2, 5,7; 4,8, 21; often in Plut.;
1 Mace. vi. 49.) *
St-avyatw: 1 aor. Siuyiyaca; to shine through, (Vule.
elucesco), to dawn; of daylight breaking through the
darkness of night (Polyb. 3, 104, 5, [ef. Act. Andr. 8
p- 116 ed. Tdf.]): 2 Pet. i. 19. [Plut. de plac. philos.
3, 3, 2; al. (see Soph. Lex. s. v.).]*
Stavyis, -és, (advyn), translucent, transparent: Rev. xxi.
21, for the Rec. dvapayns. ([Aristot.], Philo, Apoll.
Rh., Leian., Plut., Themist.; often in the Anthol.) *
Stadavijs, -¢s, (Suapaivw to show through), transparent,
translucent: Rev. xxi. 21 Rec.; see dsavyns. (Hadt.,
Arstph., Plat., al.) *
Sia-hépw; 2 aor. dijveyxoy [but the subj. 3 pers. sing.
Sveveyxn (Mk. xi. 16), the only aor. form which occurs,
can come as well fr. 1 aor. dunveyxa; cf. Veitch s. v.
depo, fin.]; Pass., [pres. Suahépouar]; impf. dSuehepdpny ;
[fr. Hom. (h. Mere. 255), Pind. down]; 1. to bear or
carry through any place: ocxevos dia Tov tepov, Mk. xi.
16. 2. to carry different ways,i.e. a. trans. to carry
in different directions, to different places: thus persons
are said d:apépec Oa, who are carried hither and thither
ina ship, driven to and fro, Acts xxvii. 27, (Strab. 3, 2, 7
p: 144; oxados tm evartioy mvevpdtev diapepdspevor, Philo,
migr. Abr. § 27; Leian. Hermot. 28; often in Plut.);
metaph. to spread abroad: Sveépero 6 Adyos Tov Kupiou
Sv OAns rhs xopas, Acts xiii. 49, (dyyeAias, Leian. dial.
deor. 24,15; pnun Svapepera, Plut. mor. p. 163 d.). b.
intrans. (like the Lat. differo) to differ: Soxipacew ra
diafépovra to test, prove, the things that differ, i. e. to
distinguish between good and evil, lawful and unlawful,
Ro. ii. 18; Phil. i. 10, (8taxpiots Kadov re kat kaxov, Heb.
v. 14); cf. Thol. Com. on Rom. p. 111 ed. 5.; Theoph.
Ant. ad Autol. p. 6 ed. Otto Soxiudgovres ta Staépovra,
iro pas, # okéros, }) Nevkdy, #) péhay KTA.); [al., adopting a
secondary sense of each verb in the above passages, trans-
late (cf. A. V.) to approve the things that excel; see Mey.
(yet cf. ed. Weiss) on Ro. 1. c.; Ellic. on Phil. 1 c.].
Siahépw rivds, to differ from one, i.e. to excel, surpass
one: Mt. vi. 26; x. 81; xii. 12; Lk. xii. 7, 24, (often so
in Attic auth.) ; twos év tw, 1 Co. xv. 41; [twos ovdev,
Gal. iv. 1]. c. impersonally, d:apeper it makes a differ-
148
duax eval
ence, it matters, is of importance: ovidev por diadéper it
matters nothing to me, Gal. ii. 6, (Plat. Prot. p. 316 b.
jpiv ovdev Siadéeper, p. 358 e.; de rep. 1 p. 340 ¢.; Dem.
124, 3 (in Phil. 3,50); Polyb. 8, 21,9; Ael. v. h. 1, 25;
al.; [ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 394; Wetst. on Gal. 1. ¢.]).*
Sia-pevyw: [2 aor. dvepvyov]; fr. Hdt. down; to flee
through danger, to escape: Acts xxvii. 42, (Prov. xix. 5;
Josh. viii. 22).*
Sia-pypito; 1 aor. duepnuca; 1 aor. pass. Suepypicbnv 3
to spread abroad, blaze abroad : rév Nébyov, Mk. i. 45; Mt.
xxviii. 15 [T WH mrg. epnpiod.]; twa, to spread abroad
his fame, verbally diffuse his renown, Mt. ix. 31; in Lat.
dijfamare aliquem, but in a bad sense. (Rarely in Grk.
writ., as Arat. phaen. 221; Dion. Hal. 11, 46; Palaeph.
incred. 14, 4; [cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p.
14 sq. ].) *
S.a-pelpw; 1 aor. duepOetpa; Pass., [pres. dvapbeipo-
pa]; pf. ptep. dupOappévos; 2 aor. dvepOdpnv; Sept.
very often for nmvi, occasionally for $3n; in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down; 1. fo change for the worse, to cor-
rupt: minds, morals; ryyv yyy, i.e. the men that in-
habit the earth, Rev. xi. 18; SvepOappevor rov vody, 1 Tim-
vi. 5, (rn dtavoray, Plat. legg. 10 p. 888 a.; rHv yrounrs
Dion. Hal. antt.5, 21; rods épOadpovs, Xen. an. 4, 5, 12).
2. to destroy, ruin, (Lat. perdere); a. to consume, of bodily
vigor and strength: 6 é£@ jpav dvOpemros duapbeiperat [is
decaying |, 2 Co. iv. 16; of the worm or moth that eats pro-
visions, clothing, ete. Lk. xii. 33. b. to destroy (Lat. de-
lere) : Rev. viii. 9; to kill, StapOeipew rods etc. Rev. xi. 18.*
Sra-h0opa, -as, 7, (SiapOeipw), corruption, destruction ;
in the N. T. that destruction which is effected by the de-
cay of the body after death: Acts ii. 27, 31; xiii. 34-37
[cf. W. § 65, 10], see cide, I. 5 and troarpépa, 2. (Sept.
for nnw; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)*
8d-hopos, -ov, (diapépw) 5 1. different, varying in
kind, (Hdt. and sqq.): Ro. xii. 6; Heb. ix. 10. 23
excellent, surpassing, ({Diod.], Polyb., Plut., al.) : com-
par. duapopwrepos, Heb. i. 4; viii. 6.*
Sia-puvrddcow: 1 aor. inf. duapvddEa; fr. Hdt. down;
to guard carefully: twa, Lk. iv. 10 fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 11.
“The seventy chose to employ this term esp. of God’s
providential care; cf. Gen. xxviii. 15; Josh. xxiv. 17;
Ps. xl. (xli.) 3. Hence it came to pass that the later
writers at the close of their letters used to write d.adu-
harrow, Suapvdrdéor tpas 6 Geds, cf. Theodoret. iii. pp. 800,
818, 826, (edd. Schulze, Nosselt, etc. Hal.).” Win. De
verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 16.*
Sta-xerpttw : 1 aor. mid. dvexeepiodpny ; to move by the use
of the hands, take in hand, manage, administer, govern, (fr.
[ Andoc., Lys.], Xen. and Platodown). Mid. to lay hands
on, slay, kill [with one’s own hand]: teva (Polyb. 8, 23, 8;
Diod. 18, 46; Joseph., Dion. Hal., Plut., Hdian.), Acts
ya oO) KxvIe 2117 :
Sia-xAevdtw; to deride, scoff, mock, [“deridere i. e.
ridendo exagitare” Win.]: Acts ii. 13 G LT Tr WH.
(Plat. Ax. p. 364 b.; Dem. p. 1221, 26 [adv. Polycl. 49];
Aeschin. dial. 3,2; Polyb. 17,4, 4; al.; eccles. writ.) Ct.
Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 17.*
orayop So
Sia-xwpltw: to separate thoroughly or wholly (cf. 8d, C.
2), (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept.). Pass. pres. d:a-
xepitoya ([in reflex. sense] cf. droxwpi{w) to separate
one’s self, depart, (Gen. xiii. 9,11, 14; Diod. 4,53): amd
twos, Lk. ix. 33.*
SiSaxriKds, -7, -dv, (i. q. SsdaoKadcxds in Grk. writ.), apt
and skilful in teaching: 1 Tim. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 24. (Ot
dSaxrixi) dperj, the virtue which renders one teachable,
docility, Philo, praem. et poen. § 4; [de congressu erud.
§ 7].)*
Sidanrés, -7, -dv, (didacKe) 5 1. ‘hat can be taught
(Pind., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. taught, instructed, foll. by
gen. by one [cf. W. 189 (178); 194 (182); B. 169 (147) ]:
rod be0d, by God, Jn. vi. 45 fr. Is. liv. 13; mvevparos d&ylov
[GLT Tr WH om. dylov], by the (Holy) Spirit, 1 Co. ii.
13. (vovernuara keivns d:daxra, Soph. El. 344.) *
SiSacKaAla, -as, 7, (Siddoxados), [fr. Pind. down]; 1.
teaching, instruction: Ro. xii. 7; xv. 4 (els thy querépav
didackadiav, that we might be taught, [A. V. for our
learning]); 1 Tim. iv. 13, 16; v.17; 2 Tim. iii. 10, 16;
ADitcniian( 2. teaching i.e. that which is taught, doc-
trine: Eph. iv. 14; 1 Tim.i.10; iv.6; vi.1,3; 2 Tim. iv.
3; Tit.i.9; ii.1,10; plur. ddacxadla teachings, precepts,
(fr. Is. xxix. 13), Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7; dvOpamer, Col. ii.
22; Satpovior, 1 Tim. iv. 1.*
SiSdoKados, -ov, 6, (SiddoKxw), a teacher; in the N. T. one
who teaches concerning the things of God, and the duties
of man; 1. of one who is fitted to teach, or thinks
himself so: Heb. v. 12; Ro. ii. 20. 2. of the teachers
of the Jewish religion: Lk. ii. 46; Jn. iii. 10; hence the
Hebr. 37 is rendered in Greek d:8dcxados: Jn. i. 38 (39) ;
xx. 16; cf. below, under faGBi, and Pressel in Herzog
xu. p. 471 sq.; [Campbell, Dissert. on the Gospels, diss.
vii. pt. 2]. 3. of those who by their great power as
teachers drew crowds about them; a. of John the Bap-
tist: Lk. iii. 12. b. of Jesus: Jn.i.38 (39); iii. 2; viii. 4;
xi. 28; xiii. 13 sq.; xx. 16; often in the first three Gospels.
4. by preéminence used of Jesus by himself, as the one
who showed men the way of salvation: Mt. xxiii. 8 L T
Tr WH. 5. of the apostles: 6 dudaoKados tov ebvar,
of Pauly te Tims ar-7.5 2) Bima) 11: 6. of those who
in the religious assemblies of Christians undertook the
work of teaching, with the special assistance of the Holy
Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28 sq.; Eph. iv. 11; Acts xiii. 1, ef.
Jas. iii. 1. 7. of false teachers among Christians: 2
Tim. iv. 3. [Hom. (h. Merc. 556), Aeschyl., al.]
Sidackw; impf. édidackor ; fut. Sidaéo; 1 aor. didaka;
1 aor. pass. eduddyOnv; (AAQ [cf. Vanitek p. 327]) ; [fr.
Hom. down]; Sept. for yqin, Mn, and esp. for 94;
to teach; 1. absol. a. to hold discourse with others
in order to instruct them, deliver didactic discourses: Mt.
iv. 23; xxi. 23; Mk. i. 213 vi.6; xiv. 49; Lk. iv. 15; v.
17; vi. 6; Jn. vi. 59; vii.14; xviii. 20, and often in the
Gospels; 1 Tim. ii. 12. b. to be a teacher (see 8.da-
ovanos, 6): Ro. xii. 7. ¢. to discharge the office of teach-
e» conduct one’s self as a teacher: 1 Co. iv. 17. 270
construction; a. either in imitation of the Hebr. 9 +94
(Job xxi. 22), or by an irregular use of the later Greeks
144
dudayn
(of which no well-attested example remains exc. one in
Plut. Marcell. c. 12), with dat. of person: r@ Baddk, Kev.
ii. 14 (ace. to the reading now generally accepted for the
Ree.bez lz ry Bad.) ; cf. B. 149 (130); W. 223 (209), cf.
227 (213). b. acc. to the regular use, with acc. of pers.,
to teach one: used of Jesus and the apostles uttering in
public what they wished their hearers to know and re-
member, Mt. v. 2; Mk. i. 22; ii. 18; iv. 2; Lk. v. 3; Jn.
viii. 2; Acts iv. 2; v.25; xx. 20; rods "EAAnvas, to act
the part of a teacher among the Greeks, Jn. vii. 35; used
of those who enjoin upon others to observe some ordi-
nance, to embrace some opinion, or to obey some pre-
cept: Mt. v. 19; Acts xv. 1; Heb. viii. 11; with esp.
reference to the addition which the teacher makes to
the knowledge of the one he teaches, to impart instruc-
tion, instil doctrine into one: Acts xi. 26; xxi. 28; Jn.
ix. 8343; Ro. ii. 21; Col. iii. 16; 1 Jn. ii. 27; Rev. ii. 20.
c. the thing taught or enjoined is indicated by a foll.
ére: MK. viii. 81; 1 Co. xi. 14; by a foll. infin., Lk. xi.
1; Mt. xxviii. 20; Rev. ii. 14; mepi revos, 1 Jn. ii. 27;
év Xptor@ didaxOjvat, to be taught in the fellowship of
Christ, Eph. iv. 21; foll. by an ace. of the thing, to teach
i.e. prescribe a thing: ddackaXias, évrddpata avOporer,
precepts which are commandments of men (fr. Is. xxix.
13), Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7, [B. 148 (129)]; ray 6ddv Tov
Oeod, Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Lk. xx. 21: radra, 1 Tim.
iv. 11; 4 py det, Tit. i115 to explain, expound, a thing:
Acts xviii. 11, 25; xxviii. 31; drootaciay ard Moicéws,
the necessity of forsaking Moses, Acts xxi. 21. 4d. with
acc. of pers. and of thing, to teach one something [W. 226
sq. (212); B. 149 (180)]: [exeivos pas didaéer mavra,
Jn. xiv. 26]; rod diSdcxew tuas twa ra orotyeia, Heb. v.
12 (where RG TTrand others read—not so well —
tiva; [but cf. B. 260 (224) note, 268 (230) note]) ; érépous
d.ddEau, sc. adrd, 2 Tim. ii. 2; hence pass. d:day6qvai re
[B. 188 (163); W. 229 (215)]: Gal. i. 12 (edsday6yy, se.
avtd), 2 Th. ii. 15.
88ax7H, -7s, 9, (diddoxnw), [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. teach-
ing, viz. that which is taught: Mk. i. 27; Jn. vii. 16; Acts
xvii. 19; Ro. [vi.17]; xvi. 17; 2 Jn. 10; Rev. ii. 24; 9
66. Tivos, one’s doctrine, i. e. what he teaches: Mt. vii.
28; xvi. 12; xxii. 33; Mk.i. 22; xi. 18; Lk. iv. 82; Jn.
Xvili. 19; Acts v. 28; Rev. ii. 14 sq.; 9 dudax7} of God,
Tov Kuplov, Tov Xpiorov, the doctrine which has God,
Christ, the Lord, for its author and supporter: Jn. vii.
17; Acts xiii. 12; 2Jn. 9; with the gen. of the object,
doctrine, teaching, concerning something: Heb. vi. 2 [W.
187 (176); 192 (181); 551 (513)]; plur. Heb. xiii. 9.
2. [the act of] teaching, instruction, (cf. iSacKxadla [on the
supposed distinction betw. the two words and their use
in the N. T. see Ellic. on 2 Tim. iv. 2; they are asso-
ciated in 2 Tim. iv. 2,3; Tit.i.9]): Actsii.42; 2 Tim.
iv. 2; ev rh dSaxH, while he was teaching, a phrase by
which the Evangelist indicates that he is about to cite
some of the many words which Jesus spoke at that
time, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; rod kara rip didaynv meorod
Adyov, the faithful word which is in accordance with the
received (2 Tim. iii. 14) instruction, Tit. i. 9; in partic-
Diopenuon
ular, the teaching of the dddcoxaXos (q. v. 6) in the relig-
ious assemblies of Christians: Aadeiv év dudaxq to speak
in the way of teaching, in distinction from other modes
of speaking in public, 1 Co. xiv. 6; %yw dudayqv, to have
something to teach, ibid. 26.*
SiSpaxpov, -ov, rd, (neut. of the adj. d/Spaxpos, -ov, sc.
voptopa; fr. dis and Spaxpn), a didrachmon or double-
drachma, a silver coin equal to two Attic drachmas or
one Alexandrian, or half a shekel, [about one third of a
dollar] (see in dpyvpiov, 3): Mt. xvii. 24. (Sept. often
for Pw; [Poll., Galen].) *
SiSupos, -n, -ov, and -os, -ov, twofold, twain, (double, Hom.
Od. 19, 227; as rpidvpos triple, rerpadvpos quadruple,
énradvpos) ; hence twin (sc. mais, as rpidvpot raides, viol,
Germ. Drillinge, three born at a birth), Hebr. pn, a
surname of the apostle Thomas [cf. Luthardt on the
first of the foll. pass.; B.D. s.v. Thomas]: Jn. xi. 16;
xx. 24; xxi. 2. (Hom. I. 23, 641.) *
SiGwpt (5.56, Rev. iii. 9 LT WH; [818 Tr, yet see
WH. App. p. 167]), 3 pers. plur. d:8cacx (Rev. xvii. 13
[not Rec.]), impv. 8/8ov (Mt. v. 42 RG); impf. 3 pers.
sing. €diSov, 3 pers. plur. edidovy (ediSocay, Jn. xix. 3 L T
Tr WH [see éyw]); fut. 8a0@; 1 aor. ¢Swxa [2 pers.
sing. -xes, Jn. xvii. 7 Trmrg., 8 Trmrg.; cf. reff. s. v.
kortaw |, subjunc. decn [and dac@per] fr. an imaginary
indic. form édea, [ Mk. vi. 37 T Trmrg.]; Jn. xvii. 2 (Tr
mrg. WH dacer); Rev. viii. 3 (LT Tr WH dacer; cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; B. 36 (31); W. 79 (76); [Veitch
s. v. 810. fin., also Soph. Lex. s. v. and esp. Intr. p. 40;
WH. App. p. 172]); pf. dé5xa [on the interchange
between the forms of the pf. and of the aor. in this verb
ef. B. 199 (172)]; plpf. ededoxew and without augm.
[W. § 12,9; B. 33 (29)] dedaxew, Mk. xiv. 44; and L
txt. T Tr WH in Lk. xix. 15; 3 pers. plur. dedaxecay, Jn.
xi. 57; 2 aor. subjune. 8 pers. sing. 6 [de7, Jn. xv. 16 Tr
mrg.; Eph. i.17 WH mrg.; 2 Tim. ii. 25 L WHmrg.;
607, Mk. viii. 37 T Tr WH; cf. B. 46 (40); WH. App. p.
168; Kuenen and Cobet, praef. p. lxi.], plur. dépev, dare,
ddouv, optat. 3 pers. sing. 867 for doin, Ro. xv. 5; [2 Th.
iii. 16]; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18; [ii. 25 T Tr WH txt.; Eph. i.
17RG;; iii. 16 RG] and elsewhere among the variants
([ef. W. § 14,1 g.; B. 46 (40), cf. § 139, 37 and 62]; see
[WH. App. u.s-; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122;] Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 346; [Kiihner § 282 Anm. 2; Veitch s. v. didoue ad
fin.]), impy. dds, Sére, inf. dovvat, ptep. dovs; Pass., pf.
SSopar; 1 aor. €dd0nv; 1 fut. SoOjoopar; cf. B. 45 (39)
sq-; [WHu.s.]. In the Sept. times without number for
}D2, sometimes for Div; and for Chald. 377; [fr. Hom.
down]; to give;
A. absolutely and generally: paxdpidy éore paddov
SSdvat, 4} AapBavew, Acts xx. 35.
B. In construction; I. rut rt, to give something
to some one, — in various senses ; 1. of one’s own ac-
cord to give one something, to his advantage; to bestow,
give asa gift: Mt.iv.9; Lk. i. 32; xli. 32, and often;
Sdpara [cf. B. 148 (129)], Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13; Eph.
iv. 8 (Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19); 1a trdpxovra what thou
hast rois mrwxois, Mt. xix. 21; xpnuara, Acts xxiv. 26.
145
didmps
2. to grant, give to one asking, let have: Mt. xii. 39; xiv.
7 sq-3 Xvi. 4; xx. 235; Mk. vi. 22,253 viii. 12; x. 40;
Lk. xi. 29; xv. 163 Jn. xi. 22; xiv. 16; xv.16; xvi. 23;
Acts iii. 6; Jas.i.5; [noteworthy is 1 Jn. v. 16 décet (se.
prob. 6 eds) airé Lwiy rois dpaprdvovow etc., where
avr@ seems to be an ethical dat. and r. cpap. dependent
on the verb; see B. 133 (116) note, cf. 179 (156); W. 523
(487), cf. 530 (494)]; in contradistinction from what
one claims: Jn. iii. 27; xix. 11. 3. to supply, furnish,
necessary things: as dprov ri, Mt. vi. 11; Lk. xi. 3; Jn.
vi. 32, 51; rpopyv, Mt. xxiv. 45; Bpdow, In. vi. 27; be-
sides in Mt. xxv. 15, 28 sq.; Mk. ii. 26; iv. 25; Lk. vi.
4; vill. 18; xii.42; xix. 24,26; Jn. iv. 10, 14, 15; Eph.
Viel: 4. to give over, deliver, i.e. a. to reach out,
extend, present: as Mt. xiv. 19; xvii.27; Mk. vi. 41;
xiv. 22 sq.; Lk. ix.16; xxii.19; 7d Wopiov, In. xiii. 26;
76 mornpiov, Jn. xviii. 11; Rev. xvi. 19; rads yeipas dd6-
vat to give one the hand, Acts ix. 41; Gal. ii.9. b. of a
writing: amoordovov, Mt. v.31. c. to give to one’s care,
intrust, commit; aa. something to be administered;
univ.: mavrt @ €566y modv, Lk. xii. 48; property, money,
Mt. xxv. 15; Lk. xix. 13,15; dumeddva, a vineyard to
be cultivated, Mk. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 16; ras Kreis [kAeidas]
tis Bao. Mt. xvi. 19; Hv kpiow, Jn. v. 22; xpiva, Rev.
xx. 4; rv eEovolay éavta@v, Rev. xvii. 13 [not Rec.]; ra
épya, ta reXetwow aitd, Jn. v. 86; 1d epyov, iva rounce,
Jn. xvii. 4; 7d dvopa Tov Geod, to be declared, Jn. xvii. 11
[not Rec.,12 T Tr WH]. bb. to give or commit to some
one something to be religiously observed: 8vaOnxnv meptro-
pis, Acts vii. 8; tv meprropyy, the ordinance of circum-
cision, Jn. vil. 22; rédv vouov, ibid. vs. 19; dya Cavra,
Acts vii. 38. 5. to give what is due or obligatory, to
pay: wages or reward, Mt. xx. 4,14; xxvi. 15; Rev. xi.
18; dpyvpuov, as a reward, Mk. xiv. 11; Lk. xxii. 5;
taxes, tribute, tithes, etc.: Mt. xvii. 27; xxii. 17; Mk.
xii. 14 (15) ; Lk. xx. 22; xxiii. 2; Heb. vii. 4; @vaiay se. ro
kupig, Lk. ii. 24 (Ovoiay amodoivat 7H Ged, Joseph. antt.
7, 9,1)3 Adyov, render account, Ro. xiv. 12 [L txt. Tr txt.
azrob. J. 6. diS@pe is joined with nouns denoting an
act or an effect; and a. the act or effect of him who
gives, in such a sense that what he is said d.ddva (either
absolutely or with dat. of pers.) he is conceived of as
effecting, or as becoming its author. Hence didepe
joined with a noun can often be changed into an active
verb expressing the effecting of that which the noun de-
notes. Thus &ddvai aivoy r@ Oe is equiv. to aivety rov
Oeov, Lk. xviii. 43 ; amoxpioly Tie 1. q. aroxpiver Oa, Jn.
i. 22; xix. 95 eyxom)py Sodvar 7G edayyeNig 1. q. €yxorrew
rd evayy. to hinder (the progress of) the gospel, 1 Co.
ix. 12; évrodny rim i. q. évreAXeoOat rut, Jn. xi. 575 xii.
49; xiii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 23; doéav rwi i. q. SoEaCew Tuva (see
dé€a, II.); epyaciav, after the Lat. operam dare, take
pains, [A. V. give diligence], i. q. epydgecOa, Lk. xii. 58;
[ovpBotror, cf. the Lat. consilium dare, i. q. cvpBovdev-
ecba, Mk. iii. 6 Trtxt. WH txt. ]; StacroAnv tive i. q.
SuacréAXew Tt, 1 Co. xiv. 7; mapayyediav, 1 Th. iv. 2;
mapakdnow, 2 Th. ii. 16; €deos i. q. erect, 2 Tim. i. 16,
18; dydrnyv, show [A. V. bestow], 1 Jn. ili. 1; exdiknosy,
diSmpt
2 Th. i. 8; Bacanopov, Rev. xviii. 7; pamvopa i. q. pami-
ew twa, Jn. xviii. 22; xix. 3; PiAnua i. q. pedrety tuva,
Lk. vii. 45. or b. the noun denotes something to be
done by him to whom it is said to be given: Oudovae revi
perdvoray, to cause him to repent, Acts v. 31; xi. 18;
yvaow oornpias, Lk. i. 77; eArida revi, 2 Th. ii. 16. ve
Joined with nouns denoting strength, faculty, power,
virtue, diSepe (rwi re) is equiv. to to furnish, endue, (one
with a thing): Lk. xxi. 15 (8o@ tpiv oropa k. copiay) ;
Acts vii. 10; ééovolav, Mt. ix. 8; x.1; Lk. x.19; Jn.
xvii. 2; Rev. ii. 26; vi. 8; xiii. 7; Sdvoray, 1 Jn. v. 20;
ovveow, 2 Tim. ii. 7; and in the very common phrase
didovar TO mvevpa. [I/. 8. revi revos to give to one (a
part) of ete. : Rey. ii. 17 (G LT Tr WH) d60@ aire rod
pavva, cf. W. 198 (186); B. 159 (189).]
II. diS@pi re without a dative, and didepi twa. aie
diSopi re; a. with the force of to cause, produce, give
forth from one’s self: terov, from heaven, Jas. v. 18;
caprév, Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 7, 8 sq., (Deut. xxv. 19; Sir.
xxiii. 25); onpeia, Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22 [not Tdf.];
Acts ii. 19, (Ex. vii. 9; Deut. xiii. 1, ete.) ; tmdderypa,
Jn. xiii. 15; péyyos, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24, (pds,
Is. xiii. 10); Qawrnv, 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq.; dia ris yhooons
Adyor, ibid. 9; yvepnv, to give one’s opinion, to give ad-
vice, 1 Co. vii. 25; 2Co. viii. 10. 1b. Sdeddvar xAnpovs
Con 103, Lev. xvi. 8), to give i. e. hand out lots, sc. to
be cast into the urn [see kAjpos, 1], Actsi. 26. c. didapi
zt with pred. acc.: Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45, (to give up asa
Avrpov); Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 37, (to pay as an equiv-
alent). 2. Sidwpi twa; a. where the noun refers to
the office one bears, to appoint: xperds, Acts xiii. 20. b.
to cause to come forth: didwps ek THs cuvaywyns Tov Satava
Tov heydvrav (sc. twas [cf. B. 158 (188); W. § 59, 4b.]),
Rey. iii. 9; so also the sea, death, Hades, are said to
give (up) the dead who have been engulfed or received
by them, Rev. xx. 13. 3. Sidapi tud tur; a. to give
one to some one as his own: as the object of his saving
eare, Heb. ii. 13; to give one to some one, to follow him
as a leader and master, Jn. vi. 37, 89; x. 29; xvil. 6, 9,
12 [but see B. I. 4. c. aa. above], 24; xviii. 9; in these
pass. God is said to have given certain men to Christ,
i. e. to have disposed them to acknowledge Christ as the
author and medium of their salvation, and to enter into
intimate relations with him, hence Christ calls them ‘his
own’ (ra eud, Jn. x. 14). b. to give one to some one to
care for his interests: Jn. iii. 16 (€xev sc. adrd, i. e. ro
koopm); Acts xiii. 21. cc. to give one to some one to whom
he already belonged, to return: Lk. vii. 15 (ix. 42 dré
Sexe [so Lmrg. in vii. 15]). . diSape euaurdy ren, to
one demanding of me something, I give myself up as it
were; an hyperbole for disregarding entirely my private
interests, I give as much as ever I can: 2 Co. viii. 5. 4.
didwpi ra with a predicate acec.: éavrdy rirov, to render
or set forth one’s self as an example, 2 Th. iii. 9; with
a predicate of dignity, office, function, and a dat. of
the person added for whose benefit some one invested
with said dignity or office ts given, that is, is bestowed:
abrov éSwxev keharny imep mavta tH exkAnoia, head over
146
did@pme
all things to the church, Eph. i. 22; €dwxev rods pev azo-
orddous KTA. SC. TH ExkAnoia, Eph. iv. 11. For in neither
of these passages are we obliged, with many interpreters,
to translate the word appointed, made, after the use of
the Hebr. }3; esp. since in the second Paul seems to
wish to confirm the words quoted in vs. 8, éOwxe Sdpara
rois avOpanos. Those in the church whom Christ has
endued with gifts and functions for the common advan-
tage the apostle reckons among the dduara given by him
after his ascension to heaven.
III. Phrases in which to the verb didwu, either stand-
ing alone or joined to cases, there is added 1. an
infinitive, either alone or with an accusative; d(depi rue
foll. by an infin. denoting the object: diepi tun hayet,
give, supply, something to eat, give food [B. 261 (224);
W. 318 sq. (299) ], Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35,42; Mk. vi. 37;
v: 48: Lk. vil. 555 ix. 13; Rev. i. 7; meet, In.iv. 7, 105
with the addition of an object acc. depending on the
dayety or muetv: Mt. xxvii. 34; Mk. xv. 23 [RGL]; with
an acc. added depending on the verb 6i6wpu: Jn. vi. 31;
Rey. xvi. 6; foll. by an infin. indicating design [cef. B.
u. s.], to grant or permit one to ete.: Lk. i. 73 sq. (Sodvae
juiv apoBas Natpevew ait) ; In. v.26; Acts iv. 29; Ro.
xv. 5; Eph. iii. 16; Rev. iii. 21; vi.4; vii. 2; [foll. by es
with the infin. : Ro. xv. 16, cf. B. 265 (228) ]; by aconstr.
borrowed from the Hebrew, cai dec@ rois . . . kal tpodn-
tevoovat, Rey. xi. 3; in the passive, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv.
11 (piv d€60ra yrdvac [G LT Tr WH om. yrevar] to you
it has been granted ete.) ; foll. by the acc. and inf.:
don [LT Tr WH 86] dyin. . . xarouxjoae tov Xpiotov ev
Tats kapdias tpov, Eph. iii. 16 sq.; eSwkev aitov eudavn
yeveoOa, Acts x. 40; od Saces Tov dardy cov ideiv Sdia-
pOopav (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10), Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35. 2.
diSwpi tun, foll. by va, to grant or permit, that ete. [B.
238 (205); W. 337 (316), cf. 545 (507) ]: Mk. x. 37; Rev.
xix. 8. to commission, Rev. ix. 5.
IV. didwpi re, or tuvi re, or revi or teva, foll. by a prep-
osition with a noun (or pronoun) ; 1. revi €k twos [ cf.
W. § 28,1; B. 159 (139)]: ddre jyiv (a part) ék rod éAaiov
ipov, Mt. xxv. 8; éx rav dpray, easily to be supplied from
the context, Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4; ék rod mvevparos aitod
eOwxev nuiv, 1 Jn. iv. 13; otherwise in Jn. iii. 34 6 eds ob
didwor rd mvedpa &x érpov, by measure i. e. according to
measure, moderately, [cf. W. § 51, 1 d.]; otherwise in
Rev. iii. 9 SiSape ex tis cvvaywyijs, (see II. 2 b. above).
twi amd twos: Lk. xx. 10 wa ard Tod Kaprod Tov dumedd-
vos d6ow [LT Tr WH 8acovew] airé, sc. the portion
due. ri foll. by ets with a noun, to give something to be
put into, Lk. vi. 38 pérpov Shcovow eis Tov KéArov bpav
(shall they give i. e. pour into your bosom), or upon, Lk.
Xv. 22 ddre Saxtudiov eis Ty xetpa adrod (put a ring on
his hand) ; eis rév dypév for the field, to pay its price, Mt.
XXvil. 10; tui te eis Tas xeipas, to commit a thing to one,
deliver it into one’s power: Jn. xiii. 3 (Hebr. 5 73 13,
Gen. ix. 2; xiv. 20; Ex. iv. 21); eds r. 8savouay, or em res
kapoias (Jer. xxviii. (xxxi.) 33), put into the mind, fasten
upon the heart, Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; or eis r. kapOias with
inf. of the thing, Rev. xvii.17; (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 20 d:dsvac
Sceyelpw
Tivi te eis THY uxny). éavrov diddvai eis with ace. of place,
to betake one’s self somewhere, to go into some place:
Acts xix. 31, (eis rémous mapaBdXous, Polyb. 5, 14, 9; ets
térous tpaxeis, Diod. 14,81; els ras épnuias, Diod. 5, 59 ;
Joseph. antt. 15, 7,7; eis xounv twa, Joseph. antt. 7, 9, 7).
2. didepi re Ev Tim, 1. e. to be or remain in, so that it is in,
[ef. W. 414 (386); B. 329 (283)]: &v rH yeupi twos, In.
ill. 35; ev rats kapdSiats, 2 Co. i. 22; ev 77 Kapd. rwvds, 2 Co.
vill. 16, (cf. 1 K. x. 24); etpnyny Sodva: ev rH yh to bring
peace to be on earth, Lk. xii. 51. 3. Sidapi re tmép
twos, give up for ete. [ef. W. 383 (858) sq.]: Jn. vi. 51;
éavtov Urép twos, Tit. ii. 14; éavrov dvridurpoy tmép Twos,
1 Tim. ii. 6 ; éaurdy wept [R WH txt. irep; cf. wepi, Ic. 8.]
tev duaptioy, for sins, i. e. to expiate them, Gal. i. 4.
4. diddvat Twi Kata Ta Epya, THY mpakiw, to give one acc.
to his works, to render to one the reward of his deeds:
Rev. ii. 23 [ Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 4]; (cf. drodacet, Mt. xvi.
273) Ko. i. 6). 5. Hebraistically, dédexa évamidy cov
Ovpay dvewyperny I have set before thee a door opened
i. e. have caused the door to be open to thee, Rev. iii. 8.
[Syn. 5cddvat, Swpeto@ar: 88. to give in general, an-
tithetic to AauBdverw ; Swp. specific, to bestow, present ; 5.5. might
be used even of evils, but dwp. could be used of such things
only ironically ; see Sdua, fin. Come.: dva-, dmo-, dvt-aro-,
Sia-, €x-, emt-, weTa-, mapa-, mpo- didwyur.|
Si-eyetpw; 1 aor. dunyecpa; Pass., impf. dinyeepdpnv [but
Tr WH (Tedd. 2, 7) Sceyetpero in Jn. vi. 18, cf. B. 34 (30);
WH. App. p. 161]; 1 aor. ptcp. dveyepOeis; to wake up,
awaken, arouse (from repose; differing from the simple
éyeipw, which has a wider meaning); from sleep: tu,
Mk. iv. 38 [here T Tr WH éyeipovowy]; Lk. viii. 24; pass.,
Lk. viii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; Mk. iv. 39; with the addi-
tion dz Tod Urvov, Mt. i. 24 (LT Tr WH eyep6eis) ; from
repose, quiet: in pass. of the sea, which begins to be agi-
tated, to rise, Jn. vi. 18. Metaph. fo arouse the mind;
stir up, render active: 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1, as in 2 Macc.
xv. 10, twa rots Oupois. (Several times in the O.T.
Apocr. [cf. W. 102 (97)]; Hippocr., [Aristot.], Hdian. ;
occasionally in Anthol.) *
Si-evOvpdopat, -odpar ; to weigh in the mind, consider : rept
riwos, Acts x. 19, for Rec. évéup. (Besides, only in eccl.
writ.) *
Si-eE<pxopar: [2 aor. dveEnAPov]; to go out through
something: duefehOodaa, sc. dia hpvydvev, Acts xxviii. 3
. Tdf. edd. 2, 7. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph., Hdt.],
Eur. down.) *
81-é£-o80s, -ov, 7; fr. Hdt. down; a way out through,
outlet, exit: d€£080u rév 6dav, Mt. xxii. 9, lit. ways through
which ways go out, i.e. acc. to the context and the design
of the parable places before the city where the roads from
the country terminate, therefore outlets of the country high-
ways, the same being also their entrances ; [ef. Ob. 14;
Ezek. xxi. 21; the R. V. renders it partings of the high-
ways]. The phrase figuratively represents the territory
of heathen nations, into which the apostles were about to
go forth, (as is well shown by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T.
p. 634 sqq.). Used of the boundaries of countries, it is
equiv. to the Hebr. nixyin, Num. xxxiv. 4 sq. 8 sq., and
147
Suépyopuat
often in the book of Joshua, [cf. Rieder, Die zusammen-
gesetzten Verba u. s. w. p. 18. Others understand the
crossings or thoroughfares here to represent the most
frequented spots. |*
St-eppyveta, -as, 7, (dreppunveva, q. v-), interpretation: of
obscure utterances, 1 Co. xii. 10 L txt. (Not yet found
elsewhere.) *
St-eppnvevtijs, -o0, 6, (duepunvevo, q. V-), an interpreter:
1 Co. xiv. 28 [L Tr WH mrg. épynv.]. (Eccles. writ.) *
St-eppnvedo ; impf. dunpunvevoy and (without augm. cf.
B. 34 (30)) Scepunvevov (Lk. xxiv. 27 L Tr mrg.); 1 aor.
(also without augm.; so “all early Mss.” Hort) dcep-
pyvevoa (Lk. 1. c.T Tr txt. WH); [pres. pass. dvepunveto-
pac]; to interpret [did intensifying by marking transition,
(cf. Germ. verdeutlichen) ; Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt.
v. p- 10sq.]; 1. to unfold the meaning of what is said,
explain, expound: ri, Lk. xxiv. 27; absolutely, 1 Co. xii.
BOG shi 3, IB Or, 2. to translate into one’s native
language: Acts ix. 36, (2 Mace. i. 36; Polyb. 3, 22, 3,
and several times in Philo [cf. Siegfried, Glossar. Phil.
SoVeell))-*
Si-€pxopar; impf. Supydunv; fut. Suedevcoua (Lk. ii.
35; see W. 86 (82); [cf. B. 58 (50)]); 2 aor. dundOov;
pf. ptep. dseknAvOas (Heb. iv. 14); [fr. Hom. down];
1. where da has the force of through (Lat. per; [cf.
dia, C.]): to go through, pass through, [on its construc-
tions cf. W. § 52,4, 8]; a. dia rwvos, to go, walk, jour-
ney, pass through a place (Germ. den Durchweg neh-
men): Mt. xii. 43; xix. 24 RL Tr mrg. WH mre.; Mk.
x. 25 [Rec.* eioedOeity]; Lk. xi. 24; xviii. 25 L Trmre.;
Jn. iv. 4; 1 Co. x.1; d:a pécov atta, through the midst
of acrowd, Lk. iv. 30; Jo. viii. 59 Rec.; [8:4 pécov (L T
Tr WH 6. peoor, see dd, B. I.) Sapapetas, Lk. xvii. 11];
O0 tpar, i. e. did THS XoOpas tov, 2 Co. i. 16 (where Lehm.
txt. amedOeiv) ; [Oud mavrwy sc. Toy dyiwy (see mas, II. 1),
Acts ix. 32]. b. with ace. to travel the road which leads
through a place, go, pass, travel through a region: Lk.
Kix, ISSACts xi. 10% xii, 6 3) xiv. 24 xv. 3;41 5) xviei6
Xvil. 23 (ra ceBaopara) ; xviii. 23; xix. 1,21; xx. 2; 1Co.
xvi. 5; Heb. iv. 14; of a thing: ray Wuyxny dveAevoerae
popoaia, penetrate, pierce, Lk. ii. 35, (of a spear, dart,
with gen. Hom. Il. 20, 263; 23, 876). c. absolutely:
éxeivns sc. 6000 (dv before exetvys in Rec. is spurious) Fyed-
he dvepxeoOat, for he was to pass that way, Lk. xix. 4.
d. with specification of the goal or limit, so that the pre+
fix dua makes reference to the intervening space to be
passed through or gone over: évOdde, Jn. iv. 15 T WH,
Tr mrg.; [els tHv Ayatay, Acts xviii. 27]; es ro mépay,
to go, cross, over to the farther shore, Mk. iv. 35; Lk.
viii. 22; 6 Oavatos SindOev eis mavras avOpwmrovs, passed
through unto all men, so that no one could escape its
power, Ro. v. 12; ews twds, go even unto, etc. Lk. ii. 15;
Acts ix. 38; xi. 19, 22 RG[W. 609 (566) ]. 2. where
dia answers to the Latin dis [cf. dua, C.]; to go to differ-
ent places (2 Chr. xvii. 9; Am. vi. 2): Acts viii. 4, 40;
[x. 38]; SveAOdvres ard ris Tépyns having departed from
Perga sc. to various places, Acts xiii. 14 [al. refer this
to 1, understanding SteAdovres of passing through the ex-
duepwTdw
tent of country]; év ofs d:7\Gov among whom i.e. in
whose country J went about, or visited different places,
Acts xx. 25; dujpyovro card ras kdpas they went about
in various directions from one village to another, Lk. ix.
6; of a report, to spread, go abroad: duepxerat 6 dédyos,
Lk. v. 15; Thuc. 6, 46; Xen. an. 1, 4, 7. [S¥N. see
€pxopat. | *
Siepwrdw: 1 aor. ptcp. dSuepwrjaas ; to ask through (i. e.
ask many, one after another) : ri, to find out by asking,
to inquire out, Acts x. 17. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb.,
Dio Cass. 43, 10; 48, 8.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc.
Pt. v. p. 15.*
Stertjs, -és, (Sis and éros), [fr. Hdt. down], of two years,
two years old : dé Sierovs sc. mardéds, Mt. ii. 16, cf. Fritzsche
ad loc.; [others take dcerovs here as neut.; see Meyer ].*
Sierla, -as, 7, (from Suerns, cf. rpreria, rerpaetia), the
space of two years: Acts xxiv. 27; xxviii. 30. (Philo
in Flace. § 16; [Graec. Ven. Gen. xli. 1; xlv. 5].)*
Si-nyéopat, -oduas, [impv. 2 pers. sing. dunyod, ptcp. di-
yovpevos]; fut. Sinynoopar; 1 aor. dinynodpny; to lead or
carry a narration through to the end, (cf. the fig. use of
Germ. durchfiihren) ; set forth, recount, relate in full:
absol. Heb. xi. 32; ri, describe, Acts viii. 33 (see yeved,
3); rwi foll. by indir. disc., més etc., Mk. v. 16; Acts ix.
27; xii. 17 [here T om. Tr br. the dat.]; foll. by 4 efor,
Mk. ix. 9; 60a émoinoe or éroinaay, Lk. viii. 39; ix. 10.
(Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. often for 150.)
(Comp. : éx-dinyéopa. | *
S-hynots, -ews, 7, (Sunyeouar), a narration, narrative :
Lk. i. 1; used of the Gospel narratives also in Euseb.
h. e. 8, 24, 7; 8,39, 12; cf. Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. 1871, p. 36. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sir. vi. 35
(84) ; ix. 15, ete.; 2 Mace. ii. 32; vi. 17.)*
Si-nverns, -és, (fr. Sujveyxa, Suapépw, as the simple
nvekns fr. #veyxa, pépw), fr. Hom. down, continuous:
eis 70 Sunverés, continually, Heb. vii. 3; x. 1, 12, 14, (&-
Krar@p és TO dunvexes npeOn, App. b. c. 1, 4).*
Si0GAaccos, -ov, (Sis and Oadacca) ; 1. resembling
[or forming] two seas: thus of the Euxine Sea, Strab. 2,
5, 22; Dion. Per. 156. 2. lying between two seas, i. e.
washed by the sea on both sides (Dio Chrys. 5 p. 83):
témos iAddacoos, an isthmus or tongue of land, the ex-
tremity of which is covered by the waves, Acts xxvii.
41; al. understand here a projecting reef or bar against
which the waves dash on both sides; in opposition ef.
Meyer ad loc. (In Clem. hom. p. 20, ed. Dressel [Ep.
Petr. ad Jacob. § 14], men dddsyioror x. evdordCovres Tept
tev THs dhnOecias emayyeAudroy are allegorically styled
témot SiOddraccor dé kai Onpiddecs.) *
Si-ixveopon [L WH duxy. (see I, ¢)], -odpar; to go through,
penetrate, pierce: Heb. iv. 12. (Ex. xxvi. 28; Thuce.,
Theophr., Plut., al.; in Homer transitively, to go through
in narrating.)*
Si-tornpe: 1 aor. Sueornoa; 2 aor. dueornv; [fr. Hom.
down]; to place separately, put asunder, disjoin; in the
mid. [or pass.] and the pf. and 2 aor. act. to stand apart,
to part, depart: Bpaxd dé Scacrnoarres, sc. éavrovs or THY
vaiv (cf. B. 47 (41)), when they had gone a little distance
148
Sixalos
viz. from the place before mentioned, i. e. having gone
a little farther, Acts xxvii. 28; of time: duacrdons Spas
juas one hour having intervened, Lk. xxii. 59; déorn
dr avréy parted, withdrew from them, Lk. xxiv. 51.*
8.-icx vpttopar [L WH ducy. (see I,e) ]: impf. dcioyupitd-
pny; 1. to lean upon. 2. to affirm stoutly, assert
confidently: Lk. xxii. 59; Acts xii. 15. (Lys., Isae.,
Plat., Dem., Joseph. antt. 2, 6,4; Ael. hist. an. 7, 18;
Dio Cass. 57, 23; al.) *
[Sixdtw; 1 aor. pass. édicdoOnv; fr. Hom. down; to
judge, pass judgment: absol. Lk. vi. 37 Tr mrg. (al. xa-
Tadik.).* |
Sixaoxpicla, -as, 7, righteous judgment: Ro. ii. 5. (an
uncert. trans. in Hos. vi. 5 [where Sept. xpiva]; Test.
xii. patr. [test. Levi § 3] p. 547, and [§ 15] p. 581, ed.
Fabric. ; Justin. Mart. resp. de resurrect. xi. (15) 28 p.
360 ed. tert. Otto; [Hippol. p. 801 a.ed. Migne]; Basil
iii. p. 476 d. ed. Garn. or p. 694 ed. Par. alt. 1839. [Cf.
Ws 255099) (94)i)-)*
Slkatos, -ala, -avov, (fr. dikn right), [fr. Hom. down],
prop. the Hebr. pray, observant of n Sixn, righteous, ob-
serving divine and human laws; one who is such as he
ought to be; (Germ. rechtbeschaffen; in the earlier lan-
guage, whence appropriated by Luther, gerecht in a
broad sense; in Grk. writ. used even of physical things,
as Urmos, Xen. mem. 4, 4,5; yndvov dcxardrarov, most fer-
tile, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 38; [appa Sixavoy, ib. 2, 2, 26]); a He
in a wide sense, upright, righteous, virtuous, keeping the
commands of God; a. univ.: Mt.i.19 (the meaning is,
it was not consistent with his uprightness to expose his
betrothed to public reproach); Mt. x. 41; xiii. 43, 49;
XXIli, 285 xxvi 37/465 EkestnG, lids xiveal4 > xviii xx.
20.3 Ro. wo? [ef Well? (11)]5-2 Dim-dt9)5 Jas: -v26}
16; 1 Pet. iii. 12; 1 Jn. iii. 7, [10 Lehm.]; Rev. xxii.
11; opp. to dwaprwrol kal aceBets, 1 Pet. iv. 18; Sixacoe
kat Gdixot, Mt. v.45; Acts xxiv. 15; used of O. T. char-
acters noted for piety and probity: Mt. xiii. 17; [xxiii.
29]; Heb. xii. 23; thus of Abel, Mt. xxiii. 35; Heb. xi.
4; of Lot, 2 Pet. ii. 7 sq. (Sap. x. 4 sq.) ; of those who
seem to themselves to be righteous, who pride them-
selves on their virtues, whether real or imaginary: Mt.
ix. 13; Mk. ii.17; Lk. v. 32; xv. 7, (Kecl. vii. 17 (16)).
Joined with evAaBns, Lk. ii. 25 (Fn eddAaBA k. Sixara, 7d
Sikavov xk. evdaBes, Plat. polit. p. 311 a. b.); with aytos,
Mk. vi. 20; with dyaOés, Lk. xxiii. 50; with PoBovpevos rov
Gedy, Acts x. 22; epya Sixara, opp. to movnpa, 1 Jn. iii. 12.
Neut. 7d Sixatov, that which regard for duty demands, what
as right: 2 Pet. i. 13; plur. Phil. iv. 8; dSikaudy éort, Eph.
vi. 1; Phil.i.7; with the addition of évwmov rod Geod, God
being judge, Actsiv.19. b. the negative idea predomi-
nating: innocent, faultless, guiltless, (for »}}, Prov. i. 11;
Job ix. 23, etc.) ; thus used of Christ in the speech of
Gentiles: Mt. xxvii. 19, 24 RG Lbr. Tr br. WH mrg.;
Lk. xxiii. 47; aiva Sixavov (Prov. vi. 17; Joel iii. 19
(24); Jon. i. 14), Mt. xxiii. 35; [xxvii. 4 Tr mrg. WH
txt.]; 4 €vroAn dyia x. Stxaia (having no fellowship
with sin [al. al., see the Comm. ad loc.]) x. dyaOn, Ro. vii.
12. _c. preéminently, of him whose way of thinking,
Suxacocvvn
feeling, and acting is wholly conformed to the will of
God, and who therefore needs no rectification in heart or
life ; in this sense Christ alone can be called Sikatos : Acts
vii. 52; xxii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 18; 1 Jn. ii.1; dytos x. Sixatos,
Acts iii. 14; among the rest of mankind it is rightly de-
nied that one dixaios can be found, Ro. iii. 10 (Keel. vii.
21 (20) dvOpwros odk gore dixatos ev rH yh, bs mounoer dyabdv
kal ovx dpaprncera). of God: holy, Ro. iii. 26 (where
it is to be closely rendered just or righteous, on account
of the following kai rév Sicavodvra and the justifier or who
pronounces righteous, but the substantial meaning is
holy, that quality by virtue of which he hates and pun-
ishes sin); 1 Jn. ii. 29. d. contextually, approved of
God, acceptable to God, (Germ. gottwohlgefillig): Ro. v.
19; with the addition é« micrews, acceptable to God by
faith [W. 136 (129)]: Ro.i.17; Gal. iii. 11; Heb. x. 38;
dik. mapa TO Oe, Ro. ii. 13. 2. In a narrower sense,
rendering to each his due; and that ina judicial sense, pass-
ing just judgment on others, whether expressed in words or
shown by the manner of dealing with them: Tit. i. 8;
so of God recompensing men impartially according to
their deeds, Rev. xvi. 5; in the same sense also in Jn.
xvii. 25 (who does not award the same fate to the loving
and faithful disciples of Christ and to ‘the world’); 1
Jn. i. 9 (who executes the laws of his government, and
therefore also the law concerning the pardon of sins) ;
6 dikatos KptTns, of Christ, 2 Tim. iv. 8; Kplots Sixaia, Jn.
vers Osevals 24522hh.i. 5 we plur. Rev. xvi. 7.5) xix, 2% ak
6801 T. Peod Sikarat x. dAnOwai, Rev. xv. 3; neut. 7d Sicacov,
what is due to others, Col. iv. 1; what is agreeable to
justice and law, Lk. xii. 57; Sixacoy se. éoriv, it is agreeable
to justice, 2 Th. i. 6; accordant with deserts, Mt. xx. 4,
and 7 Ree. [See reff. s. v. duxada, fin. ; cf. dyads, fin. ] *
Sikaroctvn, -ns, 7, (Sicasos); most frequently in Sept.
for pry and APT, rarely for 101; the virtue or quality
or state of one whois Sixacos ; 1. in the broad sense,
the state of him who is such as he ought to be, righteousness
(Germ. Rechtbeschaffenheit) ; the condition acceptable to
God (Germ. Gottwohlgefilligkeit); a. univ.: Adyos ths
dixacootyns (like Adyos ris KatadAayns, A. TOU gTavpov),
the doctrine concerning the way in which man may at-
tain to a state approved of God, Heb. v. 13; Bacweds
Sixarocvvns, the king who himself has the approbation of
God, and who renders his subjects acceptable to God,
Heb. vii. 2; cf. Bleek ad loc. b. integrity, virtue, purity
of life, uprightness, correctness in thinking, feeling, and
acting: Mt. iii. 15; v. 6, 10, 20; vi.1 GLTTr WH; Acts
xiii. 10; xxiv. 25; Ro. vi. 13, 16, 18-20 (opp. to duapria,
dvopia, and dxabapaia) ; Ro. viii. 10 (opp. to dpapria) ;
Ro. xiv. 17 (? [see c.]) ; 2 Co. vi. 7, 14 (opp. to dvopia, as in
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24); 2 Co. xi. 15; Eph. v. 9; vi. 14; Phil.
i.11; 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 22; iii. 16; iv. 8; ARs rune is)
Heb. i. 9; xii. 11; Jas. iii. 18; 1 Pet. iii. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 5,
21; iii. 13, and very often in the O. T. ; év 656 duxacocvvns,
walking in the way of righteousness i. q. an upright,
righteous, man, Mt. xxi. 32; rod Geov, the righteousness
which God demands, Mt. vi. 33; Jas.i. 20; of righteous-
ness which manifests itself in beneficence : 2 Co. ix. 9 sq.
149
duxatoovvn
(cf. Tob. xiv. 11; Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p- 1151; so
Chald. Ap7y, Dan. iv. 24, and in the Talmud and rabbin.
writ. [Buxtorf. col. 1891 (p. 941 ed. Fischer) ; cf. W. 32]) ;
where Six. kai doudrns are connected, — Lk. i. 75; Eph.
iv. 24, (Sap. ix. 3; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 4 and occasion-
ally in prof. writ.), the former denotes right conduct
towards men, the latter piety towards God (cf. Plat.
Gorg. p. 507 b.; Grimm on Sap. p. 181 sq.; [ef. Trench
§ Ixxxviii. p. 828 sq.; for additional exx. see Wetst. on
Eph. 1. ¢.; cf. dcvos]; edoéBeta x. Stxatoavyn, Diod. 1, 2);
motety tiv dtxaoa. to do righteousness, to live uprightly :
1 Jn. ii. 29; iii. 7; iii. 10 [not Lchm.]; and in Rev. xxii.
11 ace. to the text now accepted; in like manner épyd¢e-
o6at Sikacoovyny, Acts x. 35; Heb. xi. 33; Cv tT Sixato-
avn, to live, devote the life, to righteousness, 1 Pet. ii. 24 ;
mAnpovy racay dixatoovryy,to perform completely whatever
is right, Mt. iii.15. When affirmed of Christ, Suatootvy
denotes his perfect moral purity, integrity, sinlessness:
Jn. xvi. 8, 10; when used of God, his holiness: Ro. iii.
5, 25 sq. c. in the writings of PAUL 7 dicacootvn has a
peculiar meaning, opposed to the views of the Jews and
Judaizing Christians. To understand this meaning, the
foll. facts esp. must be kept in view: the Jews as a peo-
ple, and very many who had become converts from among
them to Christianity, supposed that they secured the
favor of God by works conformed to the require-
ments of the Mosaic law, as though by way of merit; and
that they would thus attain to eternal salvation. But this
law demands perfect obedience to all its precepts,
and threatens condemnation to those who do not render
such obedience (Gal. iii. 10, 12). Obedience of this
kind no one has rendered (Ro. iii. 10), neither Jews nor
Gentiles (Ro. i. 24—ii. 1), for with the latter the
natural law of right written on their souls takes the place
of the Mosaic law (Ro. ii. 14 sq.). On this account Paul
proclaims the love of God, in that by giving up Christ,
his Son, to die as an expiatory sacrifice for the sins of
men he has attested his grace and good-will to mankind,
so that they can hope for salvation as if they had not
sinned. But the way to obtain this hope, he teaches, is
only through faith (see iors [esp. 1 b. and d.]), by
which a man appropriates that grace of God revealed
and pledged in Christ; and this faith is reckoned by
God to the man as dccacootvn; that is to say, 6. denotes
the state acceptable to God which becomes a sinner’s posses-
sion through that faith by which he embraces the grace of
God offered him in the expiatory death of Jesus Christ
(see dicaid@, 3 b.). In this sense 7 Sukacocvyn is used
without an adjunct in Ro. iv. 5 sq. 11; v.17, 21; ix. 30 sq.;
Ro. xiv. 17 (? [see b.]) ; 1 Co. i. 30; Gal. v.53 dixacoodyn
Ge0d, ) rod Oeod Sixatoovvn, the righteousness which God
ascribes, what God declares to be righteousness [ W. 186
(175) ], Ro. i. 17; iii. 21; x. 3; by a pregnant use, equiv.
to that divine arrangement by which God leads men to a
state acceptable to him, Ro. x. 4; as abstract for con-
crete, equiv. to those whom God accounts righteous, 2
Co. v. 21; dx. Geod dia miorews, Ro. iii. 22; 7 Sex. ths
mictews, which is acquired by faith, or seen in faith, Ro.
buKalow
iv. 11, 13; 4 ék Ocod Sixatoo. which comes from God, i.e.
is adjudged, imputed, Phil. iii. 9 (where the addition émi
1h miorer depends on éxey, having . . . founded upon faith
[cf. W. 137 (130); 392 (367); yet ef. Ellic. ad loc.]);
i) ex mioteas Stxatoc. which comes from faith, Ro. ix. 30;
x. 6; 4 da miatews Xptorod, Phil. ili. 9; 7 xara mat St
kavoc. according to, appropriate to, faith, Heb. xi. 7 (but
it should be kept in mind that the conception of ‘faith’
in the Ep. to the Heb. is broader than in Paul’s writings
[ef. e. g. Kurtz ad loc.]); Christ is called dixavoovyn, as
being the one without whom there is no righteousness,
as the author of righteousness, 1 Co. i. 30; eis duxacoovvny,
unto righteousness as the result, to obtain righteousness,
Ro. x. 4, 10; 9 miotes Noyiterai run eis dixacoovyny faith
is reckoned to one for righteousness, i. e. is so taken into
account, that righteousness is ascribed to it or recognized
in it: Ro. iv. 3, 6,9, 22; Gal. iii. 6; Jas. ii. 235 7 dcaxovia
ths Suxavoa. (see dakovia, 2 b.), 2 Co. iil. 9. Opposed to
this dccaoovvn arising from faith is 7 ék vduov dixaoc., a
state acceptable to God which is supposed to result from
obedience to the law, Ro. x. 5 sq.; 7 dux. év voz relying on
the law, i.e. on imaginary obedience to it, Phil. iii. 6; 7
idia Stxatoc. and 7 éu7) dux., such as one supposes that he
has acquired for himself by his own works, Ro. x. 3;
Phil. iii. 9, ef. Gal. ii. 21; iii. 21. 2. in a closer sense,
justice, or the virtue which gives each one his due; it is said
to belong to God and Christ, as bestowing iodrupov mioti
upon all Christians impartially, 2 Pet. i.1; of judicial
justice, Ro. ix. 28 RG Tr mrg. in br.; xpivew év dtxato-
ovvn, Acts xvii. 31; Rev. xix.11. [See reff. s. v. ducaida,
fin. ]*
Sikarde, -6 ; fut. Sicaroow; 1 aor. edikaiwoa; Pass., [pres.
Sixarotpar]; pf. SeOuxatwpar; 1 aor. edixardOnv ; fut. dixaco-
Onoopar; (dikaos); Sept. for Pas and pawn ; ibe
prop. (acc. to the analogy of other verbs ending in da, as
tuprda, SovrAdw) to make Sixaos; to render righteous or
such as he ought to be; (Vulg. justifico) ; but this mean-
ing is extremely rare, if not altogether doubtful; éScxai-
@oa THY Kapdiay pov stands for ely) Wapayinn lets Ibe-onk
(Ixxiii.) 13 (unless I have shown my heart to be upright
be preferred as the rendering of the Greek there). 2.
tid, to show, exhibit, evince, one to be righteous, such
as he is and wishes himself to be considered (Ezek. xvi.
51 sq.3 thy Wuxijy adrod, Jer. iii. 11, and, probably, 8c
xatouv Sicaov, Is. lili. 11): 9 copia edikadOn ard tov
Texvev adrijs, the wisdom taught and exemplified by John
the Baptist, and by Jesus, gained from its disciples (i. e.
from their life, character, and deeds) the benefit of be-
ing shown to be righteous, i. e. true and divine [cf. B.
322 (277); al. interpret, was acknowledged to be right-
eous on the part of (nearly i. q. by) her children; ef. B.
325 (280); see amd, II. 2d. bb.], Lk. vii. 35; Mt. xi. 19
[here T Tr txt. WH read épyev i. e. by her works];
Pass., of Christ: ed:caim6y év mvedpart, evinced to be
righteous as to his spiritual (divine [(?) ef. e. g. Ellic. ad
loc., or Mey. on Ro. i. 4]) nature, 1 Tim. iii. 16; of God:
bras SixatwOjs €v Trois Adyots cov, Ro. iii. 4 fr. Ps. 1. (li.) 6
(xvpios pdvos dixatwOncera, Sir. xviii. 2); pass. used re-
150
duKaLow
flexively, to show one’s self righteous : of men, Rev. xxii.
11 Ree.; (ri dicatwOapev ; Gen. xliv. 16). 3. rwwa, to
declare, pronounce, one to be just, righteous, or such
as he ought to be, (cf. époudw to declare to be like, liken i. e.
compare; dad, Sap. vi. 11; d&ido, which never means
to make worthy, but to judge worthy, to declare worthy,
to treat as worthy; see also coda, 2b.); a. with the
negative idea predominant, to declare guiltless one
accused or who may be accused, acquit of a charge or
reproach, (Deut. xxv. 1; Sir. xiii. 22 (21), etc.; an un-
just judge is said dicavoty Tov aoeBy in Ex. xxiii. 7; Is. v.
23): éavrdy, Lk. x. 29; pass. ov dedixaiwpar, sc. with God,
1 Co. iv. 4; pregnantly with ard trav duapriay added, to
be declared innocent and therefore to be absolved from
the charge of sins [cf. B. 322 (277)], Acts xiii. 38 (39)
(so dé duaprias, Sir. xxvi. 29; simply, to be absolved, sc.
from the payment of a vow, Sir. xviii. 22 (21)); hence
ficuratively, by a usage not met with elsewhere, to be freed,
dé ths duaprias, from its dominion, Ro. vi. 7, where cf.
Fritzsche or [(less fully) Meyer]. b. with the posi-
tive idea predominant, to judge, declare, pronounce,
righteous and therefore acceptable, (God is said dxavovy
dixatov, 1 K. viii. 32): €autdv, Lk. xvi. 15; €dcxalwoay tov
Gecv declared God to be righteous, i.e. by receiving the
baptism declared that it had been prescribed by God
rightly, Lk. vii. 29; pass. by God, Ro. ii. 13; &e€ épyov
edixaimbn, got his reputation for righteousness (sc. with
his countrymen [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]) by
works, Ro. iv. 2; é« rév Adywv, by thy words, in contrast
with caradixafec Oa, sc. by God, Mt. xii. 37. Especially
is it so used, in the technical phraseology of Paul, re-
specting God who judges and declares such men as put
faith in Christ to be righteous and acceptable to him,
and accordingly fit to receive the pardon of their sins
and eternal life (see dccacocvvn, 1 c.): thus absolutely,
Stxarovy twa, Ro. iii. 26; iv. 5; vill. 80, 33 (sc. nuas, opp.
to éyxaXetv) ; with the addition of ex (in consequence of)
miatews, Ro. iii. 30; Gal. iii. 8; of dca THs mictews, Ro.
ili. 30; men are said dixarovaOar, SicarwOnvat, TH xdpere
tov Geov, Tit. iii. 7; Swpeav rH xdp. T- Geod, Ro. iii. 24;
miotet, Ro. iii. 28; ek miorews, by means of faith, Ro. v.
1; Gal. ii. 16; ili. 24; ev r@ aipate tov Xpiorod (as the
meritorious cause of their acceptance, as the old
theologians say, faith being the apprehending or
subjective cause), Ro. v. 9; ev 7@ dvduate rob Kupiou
“Inood kal €v T@ mvEvpaTt Tov Oeod nuav, by confessing the
name of the Lord (which implies faith in him, Ro. x. 10,
ct. 2 Co. iv. 13), and by the Spirit of God (which has
awakened faith in the soul), 1 Co. vi. 11; ev Xpior@
through Christ, Gal. ii. 17; Acts xiii. 39; it is vehement-
ly denied by Paul, that a man Sckavodras && Epyav vdpov,
Gal. ii. 16,—with the addition évdmuov adrod, i. e. of
God, Ro. iii. 20, cf. vs. 28; iv. 2, (see dtxacocvyn, 1 ¢. sub
fin.) ; —a statement which is affirmed by James in ii. 21,
24 sq. (though he says simply ¢& épywv Sixavodras, signifi-
cantly omitting véuov) ; to the same purport Paul de-
nies that a man 8:catodra: ev véuw, in obeying the law, or
by keeping it, Gal. v. 4; with the addition mapa TO Oe@,
Sikatwpa
in the sight of God, Gal. iii. 11. Lk. xviii. 14 teaches
that a man dicaodta by deep sorrow for his sins, which
so humbles him that he hopes for salvation only from
divine grace.
The Pauline conceptions of Sikatos, Sixatootivn, Sixaide,
are elucidated esp. by Winzer, De vocabulis Sixauos, etc.,
in Ep. ad Rom., Lips. 1831; Usteri, Paulin. Lehrbegritf
p- 86 sq. ed. 4 ete.; Neander, Gesch. der Pflanzung u.s.w.
ll. p. 567 sqq. et passim, ed. 3, [Robinson’s trans. of ed.
4, pp. 382 sqq., 417 sqq.]; Baur, Paulus p. 572 sqq.
[(Zeller’s) ed. 2, vol. ii. 145-183; Eng. trans. vol. ii. p.
134 sqq.]; Rauwenhoff, Disquisitio etc., Lugd. Bat. 1852;
Lipsius, Die paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, Lpz. 1853;
Schmid, Bibl. Theologie des N. T. p. 562 sqq. ed. 2, [p.
558 sqq. ed. 4; Eng. trans. p. 495 sq.]; Ernesti, Vom
Ursprung der Siinde u.s.w. i. p. 152 sqq.; Messner, Lehre
der Apostel, p. 256 sqq., [summary by S. R. Asbury in
Bib. Sacer. for 1870, p. 140 sq.]; Jul. Kostlin in the
Jahrbb. fiir deutsche Theol. 1856 fase. 1 p. 85 sqq.;
Wieseler, Commentar ii. d. Br. an d. Galater, p. 176 sqq.
[see in Schaff’s Lange’s Rom. p. 122 sq.]; Kahnis, Lu-
therische Dogmatik, Bd. i. p. 592 sqq.; Philippi, Dog-
matik, v. 1 p. 208 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. § 65;
Ritschl, Die christl. Lehre v. d. Versohnung u. Rechtf.
li. 318 sqq.; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 172 sqq. [ Eng.
trans. vol. i. p. 171 sqq.; but esp. Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit.
Expos. of the Third Chap. of the Ep. to the Rom. pp.
163-198. On the patristic usage see Reithmayr, Gala-
terbrief, p. 177 sq.; Cremer, Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p.
285; Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.].
In classic Grk. 8:xarow (Ionic dixarew, Hdt.) is hs
i. q. Sikatov vopitw, to deem right or fair: ri, often foll.
by the inf.; to choose what is right and fair, hence univ.
to choose, desire, decide: Hdt., Soph., Thuc., al. 2.
with acc. of person, ro Sixavov mod twa to do one justice,
in a bad sense, viz. to condemn, punish, one: Hdt., Thuc.,
Plat., al.; hence d:xavovaba, to have justice done one’s
self, to suffer justice, be treated rightly, opp. to dd.Kceto Oat,
Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 9, 11 p. 1136*, 18 sqq. (in like
manner the German rechtfertigen in its early forensic
use bore a bad sense viz. to try judicially (so for dvaxpi-
ve, Acts xii. 19 Luther), then condemn; execute judg-
ment, esp. put to death.) *
Stkalwpa, -ros, 70, (fr. Suxatow; 6 SediKaiwrar or ro dedi-
kavopévov), Sept. very often for pn, Pr, and vaw ; for
myn, Deut. xxx. 16; 1 K. ii. 3; plur. occasionally for
Da; 1. that which has been deemed right so as to
have the force of law; a. what has been established and
ordained by law, an ordinance: univ. of an appointment
of God having the force of law, Ro. i. 32; plur. used of
the divine precepts of the Mosaic law: rod kupiov, Lk.
i. 6; rod vopov, Ro. ii. 26; 7d Sixai@pa Tod vopou, collec-
tively, of the (moral) precepts of the same law, Ro. viii.
4; Sixatdpara Aarpelas, precepts concerning the public
worship of God, Heb. ix. 1; 8:xatcpata capkos, laws re-
specting bodily purity [(?) cf. vii. 16], ibid. vs. 10. b.
a judicial decision, sentence; of God— either the favor-
able judgment by which he acquits men and declares
151
dlNoyos
them acceptable to him, Ro. v. 16; or unfavorable: sen-
tence of condemnation, Rev. xv. 4, (punishment, Plat. legg.
9,864 e.). 2. a@righteous act or deed : rd Skarmpata ray
dyiov, Rev. xix. 8 (tév marépwv, Bar. ii. 19); €vds Stxai-
wpa, the righteous act of one (Christ) in his giving him-
self up to death, opp. to the first sin of Adam, Ro. v. 18,
(Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 7, 7 p. 1135, 12 sq. kadetrar dé
paddoy dixaorpaynpa 76 Kowvdr, Sixaiopa dé 7d éravdpOopa
Tov aduxyjparos, (cf. rhet. 1, 13, 1 and Cope’s note on 1, 3,
9}). (Cf. reff. in 8ccatdw.] *
Stkalws, adv., (fr. Hom. down]; 1. justly, agreeably
to right: kpivew (see Sixatos, 2), 1 Pet. ii. 23; to suffer,
Lk. xxiii. 41. 2. properly, as is right: 1 Co. xv. 34.
3. uprightly, agreeably to the law of rectitude: 1 Th. ii.
10 (6giws kal dixaiws, as Plat. rep. 1 p. 331 a. [ef. Trench
§ lxxxvili. p..328])) ; Lit. i. 12.* |
Stkalwors, -ews, 7, (fr. duxardw, equiv. to rd Sixarody, the
act Tov Otxatovvros; in extra-bibl. writ. fr. Thue. on, the
justification or defence of a cause; sentence of condem-
nation; judgment in reference to what is just), the act
of God’s declaring men free from guilt and acceptable to
him; adjudging to be righteous, [A. V. justification]: da
Thy Oixaiwow nuar, because God wished to declare us
righteous, Ro. iv. 25; eis dixcalwow Cons, unto acquittal,
which brings with it the bestowment of life, Ro. v. 18.
(Cf. reff. in dixadw. |*
SikarrHs, -o0, 6, (ducalw), a judge, arbitrator, umpire:
Lk. xii. 14 [here crit. texts kpurnv]; Acts vii. 27 (fr. Ex.
ii. 14); Acts vii. 35. (Sept. for o5w%; in Grk. writ. fr.
[Aeschyl. and] Hdt. on.) *
[Syn. dixacrnhs, kpirns: acc. to etymol. and classic usage
5. is the more dignified and official term ; k. gives prominence
to the mental process, whether the ‘judge’ be a magistrate
or not. Schmidt ch. 18, 6.]
Slkn, -ns, 4, [allied with Sekyyps, Curtius § 14], fr.
Hom. down; 1. custom, usage, [cf. Schmidt ch. 18,
4 cf.3]. 2. right, justice. 3. asuitatlaw. 4.4
judicial hearing, judicial decision, esp. a sentence of con-
demnation; so in Acts xxv. 15 [L T Tr WH karadixny].
5. execution of the sentence, punishment, (Sap. xvill. 11;
2 Mace. viii. 11): Siknv tméxew, Jude 7; diknv rivew
(Soph. El. 298; Aj. 113; Eur. Or. 7), to suffer punish-
ment, 2 Th. i. 9. 6. the goddess Justice, avenging
justice: Acts xxviii. 4, as in Grk. writ. often fr. Hes.
theog. 902 on; (of the avenging justice of God, personi-
fied, Sap. i. 8, ete.; cf. Grimm ad loc. and Com. on 4
Mace. p. 318, [he cites 4 Mace. iv. 13, 21; Ville dS e215
ix. 9; xi. 3; xii. 12; xviii. 22; Philo adv. Flacc. § 18;
Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 8]).*
Sixrvov, -ov, 76, [perhaps fr. AIKEIN to cast, cf. Etym.
Magn. col. 275, 21], a net: Mt. iv. 20 sq.; Mk. i. 18 sq.;
Lk. v. 2, 4-6; Jn. xxi. 6, 8,11. (Hom. et sqq.) *
[Syn. dfxrvov, dupiBaAnorpor, caynhvn: 5. seems to be
the general name for nets of all kinds; whereas au. and cay.
designate specifically nets for fishing: — the former a cast-
ing-net, generally pear-shaped ; the latter a sezne or drag-net.
Cf. Trench § lxiv.; B.D. s. v. Net.]
Sidoyos, -ov, (Sis and Aéyw); 1. saying the same thing
twice, repeating: Poll. 2, 118 p. 212 ed. Hemst.; whence
610
didoyetv and d:Aoyia, Xen. de re equ. 8, 2. 2. double-
tongued, double in speech, saying one thing with one person,
another with another (with intent to deceive): 1 Tim.
rath, teh
86, conjunction i. q. d¢ 6, [fr. Thuc. and Plato down],
wherefore, on which account: Mt. xxvii. 8; ke 113555 vile
7; Acts x. 29; Ro. i. 24; ii. 1; 1 Co. xii. 3; 2 Co. vi. 17;
Heb. iii. 7; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. i. 13, and often. [Cf. W.
445 (414); B. 233 (200); on Paul’s use, see Ellic. on
Gal. iv. 31.]
Si-08e0w: impf. diddevov; [1 aor. diodevoa] ; 1. to
pass or travel through: rémov twa, Acts xvii. 1; (Sept.,
Polyb., Plut., al.). 2. to travel hither and thither, go
about: with card moAw kal kopny added, through city
and village, Lk. viii. 1.*
Avovicros, -ov, 6, Dionysius, an Athenian, a member
of the Areopagus, converted to Christianity by Paul’s
instrumentality: Acts xvii. 34. [Cf. B.D.s. v.]*
8i6-mep, conjunction, (fr. 6:0 and the enclitic particle
mép [q. v-]), [fr. Thuc. down]; on which very account,
[A. V. wherefore]: 1 Co. viii. 13 [Treg. 810 mep]; x. 14;
xiv. 13 where LT Tr WH 610.*
Stomeris, -és, (fr. Ads of Zeus, and wero for mimo; in
prof. writ. also Svimerns), fallen from Zeus, i. e. from
heaven: rd Swomerés, sc. @ya\pa (which is expressed in
Eur. Iph. T. 977; Hdian. 1, 11, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.; cf. W.
234 (219); 592 (551)]), an image of the Ephesian Ar-
temis which was supposed to have fallen from heaven,
Acts xix. 35; [cf. Meyer ad loc.; Farrar, St. Paul, ii.
13 sq.].*
§16p0ap.0, -ros, 70, (fr. SvopAdw to set right); correction,
amendment, reform: Acts xxiv. 2 (3) LT Tr WH for
RG xarop$oparwyv. (Hippocr., Aristot., Polyb. 3, 13;
Plut. Num.17; Diog. Laért. 10, 121; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 250 sq. ].) *
Si-dp0wos, -ews, 7, (fr. dv0opAde) ; 1. prop. in a
physical sense, a making straight, restoring to its natural
and normal condition something which in some way pro-
trudes or has got out of line, as (in Hippocr.) broken or
misshapen limbs. 2. of acts and institutions, refor-
mation: katpds dupAacews a season of reformation, or
the perfecting of things, referring to the times of the
Messiah, Heb. ix. 10. (Aristot. Pol. 3, 1, 4 [p. 1275»,
13]; vduov, de mund. 6 p. 400°, 29; [cf. Joseph. c. Ap.
2, 20, 2]; Polyb. 3, 118, 12 rév modtrevpdrwy, Diod. 1,
75 rév duaptnudrev, Joseph. antt. 2, 4, 4; b. Tp diy 2X0,
al.; (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 250 sq.].)*
St-optcow; Pass., 1 aor. inf. SuopvyOjvar (Mt. xxiv. 43
T Tr WH; LK. xii. 39 TWH Trmrg.); 2 aor. inf. d:0-
pryjvat, [cf. WH. App. p. 170; fr. Hom. down]; to dig
through: a house (Xen. symp. 4, 30; Job xxiv. 16 Sept.),
Mt. xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 39; absol. Mt. vi. 19 sq. [W. 594
(552); B. 146 (127)].*
[Atds, see Ais. }
Avéc-kovpot (Phrynichus prefers the form Avdécxopor;
in earlier Attic the dual ra Atooxép@ was more usual, cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 235), -wv, of, (fr. Avs of Zeus, and
Kodpos or kdpos boy, as xépn girl), Dioscuri, the name
152
dicTomos
given to Castor and [(Polydeuces, the Roman) ] Pollux,
the twin sons of Zeus and Leda, tutelary deities of
sailors: Acts xxviii. 11 [R. V. The Twin Brothers; cf.
B.D. s. v. Castor and Pollux].*
071, conjunction, equiv. to da rodro, dre; Lon
this account that, because, [ef. W. 445 (415)}: LK. ii. 73
xxi. 28; Acts [xiii. 35, where RG 6:6]; xvii. 31 Rec.;
xx. 26 TWH Trurg.; xxii. 18; 1 Co. xv. 9; Gal. ii. 16
(LT Tr WH 6x); Phil. ii. 26; 1 Th.ii.8; iv.6; Heb.
xi. 5, 23; Jas.iv.3; 1 Pet.i. 16, 24; ii. 6 [Rec. 8:6 xa‘).
2. for (cf. Fritzsche on Ro. i. 19, vol. i. p. 57 sq.; [per
contra Mey. ad loc.; Ellic. on Gal. ii. 16; (cf. Jebb in
Vincent and Dickson, Modern Greek ete. ed. 2, App.
§ 80, 3)]): Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 20 Rec.; xviii. 10; Ro.i. 19,
21. iii, 20)" vill. 75 (GA h. aise ir WEE for iG;
5.0); [1 Pet.i. 16 Tdf. From Hdt. down.]*
Avotpepfs [L WH -rpégns; cf. Chandler §§ 634, 637],
6, (fr. Avos and rpéda, nourished by Zeus, or foster-child
of Zeus), Diotrephes, a Christian man, but proud and
arrogant: 3Jn.vs.9sq. [Cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. ]*
Simddos (-os), -dn (-7), -dov (-odv), [fr. Hom. down],
twofold, double: 1 Tim. v. 17; Rev. xviii. 6; SerAdrepos
(a compar. found also in Appian. hist. praef. § 10, from
the positive form SimAds [B. 27 (24) ]) tpav, twofold more
than yourselves, Mt. xxiii. 15 [{(cf. Just. M. dial. 122) ].*
Simdda, -6: [1 aor. édimAwoa]; (durAdos); to double:
SutAdoare aitn [only RG] durda [ra 6. T Tr WH br. ]
i.e. return to her double, repay in double measure the
evils she has brought upon you, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V.
double unto her the double]. (Xen. Hell. 6,5, 19; Plut.
Cam. 41; Diog. Laért. 6, 22.) *
Sls, adv., [Curtius § 277; fr. Hom. down], twice: Mk.
xiv. 30,72; dis rov caBBarov twice in the week, Lk. xviii.
12; kal dma& kal dis (see drag, c.), Phil. iv. 16; 1 Th. ii.
18. In the phrase Sis dmoGavevta, Jude 12, Sis is not
equiv. to completely, absolutely; but the figure is so ad-
justed to the fact, that men are represented as twice
dead in a moral sense, first as not having yet been re-
generated, and secondly as having fallen from a state of
grace ; see droOvnoke, I. 4; [but ef. the various interp.
as given in (Mey.) Huther or in Schaft’s Lange (Fronm.)
ad loc. Inthe Babyl. Talm. (Ber. 10 a.) we read, ‘ Thou
art dead here below, and thou shalt have no part in the
life to come’ ].*
As, an unused nominat. for Zevs, gen. Avds, acc. Ala
(Aiav, Acts xiv. 12 Tdf. ed. 7; see in dppnv and B. 14
(373)), Zeus, Jupiter, the supreme divinity in the belief
of Greeks and Romans; the father of gods and men:
Acts xiv. 12sq. (2 Mace. vi. 2.) [Cf. Zets.]*
Sto-pupids, -ddos, 7, twice ten thousand, two myriads:
Rev. ix. 16 LT (WH dis pupuddes), for RG dv0 pupiddes.*
Sirratw: 1 aor. edictaca; (dis); to doubt, waver: Mt.
xiv. 31; xxviii. 17. (Plat., [Soph.], Aristot., Plut., al.) *
Sioropos, -ov, (dis and ordua), having a double mouth,
as a river, Polyb. 34, 10, 5; [680 i. e. branching, Soph.
O.C. 900]. As ordua is used of the edge of a sword and
of other weapons, so dicropos has the meaning two-edged :
used of a sword in Heb. iv. 12; Rev. i. 16; ii. 12, and
doy (Avox
ace. to Schott in xix. 15; also Judges iii. 16; Prov. v. 4 :
Ps. exlix. 6; Sir. xxi. 3; Eidos, Eur. Hel. 983.*
Sto-x ror, -ar, -a, two thousand: Mk. v. 13.
Hdt. down. ]*
di-vditw [RG T Tr wi. (see Y, v)]; (Algo to defecate,
cleanse from dregs or filth) ; to filter through, strain thor-
oughly, pour through a filter: tov kdvema, to rid wine of a
gnat by filtering, strain out, Mt. xxiii. 24. (Amos vi. 6
dwhiopevos olvos, Artem. oneir. 4, 48 %oéav SiwAlCew
mporepov Tov oivoyv, Dioscor. 2, 86 did pakous Awod Swi bev
[et passim; Plut. quaest. conviv. 6, 7, 1, 5]; Archyt. ap.
Stob. floril. i. p. 13, 40 metaph. Oeds cidexpiv® kal Swr-
Opmevay exer THY aperdy.) *
Sixdtw: 1 aor. inf. diydoar; (dixa) ; to cut into two parts,
cleave asunder, dissever: Plat. polit. p. 264 d.; metaph.
dixdfw rid Kard Tivos, to set one at variance with [lit.
against] another: Mt. x. 35. [C£. Fischer, De vitiis
lexx. etc. p. 334 sq.] *
Stxorracla, -as, 7, (dixooraréw to stand apart), dissen-
ston, division; plur.: Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. iii. 3 [Ree.];
Gal. v. 20. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Solon in Dem.
p- 423, 4 and Hdt. 5, 75 on; [1 Mace. iii. 29].) *
Sixoropéw, -d: fut. d.yotounow; (Siyorouos cutting in
two) ; to cut into two parts (Ex. xxix. 17): Mt. xxiv. 51;
Lk. xii. 46, —in these passages many suppose reference
to be made to that most cruel mode of punishment, in use
among the Hebrews (1S. xv. 33) and other ancient nations
(see Win. RWB. s. v. Lebensstrafen; [B. D. s. v. Pun-
ishments, III. b. 3; esp. Wetstein on Mt. 1. c.]), by which
criminals and captives were cut intwo. But in the text
the words which follow, and which imply that the one
thus ‘cut asunder’ is still surviving, oppose this interpre-
tation; so that here the word is more fitly translated cut
up by scourging, scourge severely, [but see Meyer on Mt.
l.¢.j. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) *
Supa, -6, subjune. pres. 3 pers. sing. dupa (Jn. vil. 37;
Ro. xii. 20; often so fr. the Maced. age on for the Attic
din, cf. W. § 13, 3 b.; [B. 44 (38)]; Lob. ad Phryn. p.
61); fut. dupnow; 1 aor. edinoa; (dia thirst); [fr.
Hom. down]; to thirst; 1. absolutely, to suffer thirst ;
suffer from thirst: prop., Mt. xxv. 35,37, 42, 44; Jn. iv.
15; xix. 28; Ro. xii. 20; 1 Co. iv. 11; figuratively, those
are said to thirst who painfully feel their want of, and
eagerly long for, those things by which the soul is re-
freshed, supported, strengthened: Jn. iv. 13 sq.; vi. 35;
vii. 37; Rey. vii. 16; xxi. 6; xxii. 17; (Sir. xxiv. 21 (20);
Niee2 4) 2. with an ace. of the thing desired: ry di
cacoovyny, Mt. v. 6, (Ps. Lxii. (Ixiii.) 2; in the better Grk.
writ. with gen.; cf. W. § 30,10 b.; [B. 147 (129) ]; éAevbe-
pias, Plat. rep. 8 p. 562c.; reyijs, Plut. Cat. maj. 11; al.;
Oi AWE Oc
Slbos, -eos (-ovs), 7d, thirst: 2 Co. xi. 27.
down, for the older dia. ] *
Bhbuxos, -ov, (Sis and Wyn), double-minded; a. wa-
vering, uncertain, doubting: Jas. i. 8, (oi dirvyot kal of
[From
[From Thuc.
ScordCovres rept THs TOD Geod Suvdpews, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
11, 2; radairwpol eiow ot Sixrvxor, of Siotdfovres Thy Puxny
[al. rh Wuyx7], ibid. 23, 3; pn yivou Sipuxos ev mpocvevy7
158
doypa
gov, et €orat i) ov, Constt. apostol. 7,11; pi) yivov dipuyos
€v mpoevx7n gov, paxdpios yap 6 py Sirrdoas, Ignat. ad
Heron. 7; (cf. reff. in Miiller’s note on Barn. ep. 19, 5]).
b. divided in interest sc. between God and the world:
Jas.iv.8. Not found in prof. writ. [Philo, frag. ii. 663].
Swwypds, -00, 6, (Sudkw), persecution: Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv.
17; x. 30; Acts viii. 1; xiii. 50; Ro. viii. 35; plur., 2 Co.
xii. 10; 2 Th. i. 4; 2 Tim. iii.11. [Fr. Aeschyl. down.]*
Sidkrys, -ov, 6, (Sidkw), a persecutor: 1 Tim. i. 13.
Not found in prof. writ.*
SidKw; impf. ediwxov; fut. diaéo (Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk.
xxi. 12; Jn. xv. 20; 2S. xxii. 38; Sap. xix. 2; a rarer
form for the more com. Attic dudéopuar, cf. Bitm. Ausf.
Spr. ii. 154; W.84 (80); [B. 53 (46); esp. Veitch s. v.;
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 377])3; 1 aor. édiwfa; Pass.,
[pres. dudkopat]; pf. ptep. dediaypevos; 1 fut. SiayOnoopar;
(fr. di@ to flee) ; Sept. commonly for A175 1. to make
to run or flee, put to flight, drive away: (rivd) dad 1édews
eis modu, Mt. xxiii. 34, cf. x. 23 Grsb. 2. to run swiftly
in order to catch some person or thing, to run after; absol.
(Hom. Il. 23, 344; Soph. El. 738, ete.; diokew Spduo,
Xen. an. 6, 5, 25; cf. 7, 2, 20), to press on: fig. of one
who in a race runs swiftly to reach the goal, Phil. iii. 12
(where distinguished fr. cara\apBavew, [cf. Hdt. 9, 58;
Leian. Hermot. 77]), vs. 14. to pursue (in a hostile
manner): twa, Acts xxvi. 11; Rev. xii. 138. Hence,
3. in any way whatever to harass, trouble, molest one ;
to persecute, (cf. Lat. persequor, Germ. verfolgen) : Mt.
v. 10-12, 44; x. 23; Lk. xxi. 12; [xi. 49 WH Tr mrg.];
Jn. v. 16; xv. 20; Acts vii. 52; ix. 4 sq.; xxii. 4, 7 sq.;
Xxvi. 14 sq.; Ro. xii. 14; 1 Co. iv. 12; xv. 9; 2 Co. iv.
98) Gals i) 13, 23 sciv29 sy. 115 Phillie 6 32 bin. aii.
12; Pass. with a dat. denoting the cause, to be maltreated,
suffer persecution on account of something, Gal. vi. 12
[here Lmrg. T read S:@xovrar (al. -kwvrar), see WH. App.
p- 169; on the dat. see W. § 31, 6c.; B. 186 (161)].
4. without the idea of hostility, to run after, follow after :
some one, Lk. xvii. 23. 5. metaph. with acc. of thing,
to pursue i. e. to seek after eagerly, earnestly endeavor to
acquire: Ro. ix. 80 (distinguished here fr. xaradapBa-
ve); 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 22, (in both pass. opp. to
hevyew) ; vdpov Sixatooiyys, Ro. ix. 31, (Prov. xv. 9; 10 dé
xatov, Deut. xvi. 20; Sir. xxvii. 8, where distinguished fr.
caradapBavewv); Tr. prro€eviay, Ro. xii. 13; ra rhs etpnyns,
Ro. xiv. 19 [here Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH mrg. T read 6c
éxoper (for the dudkwpev of al.), see WH. App. p. 169]; r.
dayamny, 1 Co. xiv. 1; 76 dyabdy, 1 Th. v. 15; eipnynv, Heb.
xii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 11 (here joined with (yreiv rv) ; times
without number in Grk. writ. (fr. Hom. I. 17, 75 Svokew
dkixnta on; as TyAds, dpernv, ta kara, [cf. W. 30.]).
[Comp.: ék-, kara-diako. | *
Sdypa, -ros, 7d, (fr. Soxéa, and equiv. to rd dedoypevor),
an opinion, a judgment (Plat., al.), doctrine, decree, ordi-
nance; 1. of public decrees (as ris rédews, Plat. lege.
1 p. 644 d.; of the Roman Senate, [Polyb. 6, 18, Dis
Hdian. 7, 10, 8 [5 ed. Bekk.]): of rulers, Lk. ii. 1; Acts
xvii. 7; Heb. xi. 23 Lehm., (Theodot. in Dan. ii. 13; iii.
10; iv. 3; vi. 13, ete., — where the Sept. use other words).
doypativo
2. of the rules and requirements of the law of Moses, 3
Mace. i. 3; duatfpnows rev dyiwy Soyparor, Philo, alleg.
legg. i. § 16; carrying a suggestion of severity, and of
threatened punishment, rov vopoy rav evTor@y ev Odypact,
the law containing precepts in the form of decrees [A. V.
the law of commandments contained in ordinances], Eph.
ii. 15; 1d Kad? jpav xerpdypador Tois Séypaoe equiv. to 7d
rois déypaot (dat. of instrument) dy Kaé npeav, the bond
against us by its decrees, Col. ii. 14 ; cf.W.§ 31, 10 Note 1,
[B. 92 (80); on both pass. see Bp. Lghtft. on Coll. eri:
3. of certain decrees of the apostles relative to right
living: Acts xvi. 4. (Of all the precepts of the Chris-
tian religion: BeBarwOjvat ev rois Séypaow Tov Kupiov kal
rav droordAwr, Ignat. ad Magnes. 13,1; of the precepts
(‘ sentences’ or tenets) of philosophers, in the later prof.
writ. : Cic. acad. 2, 9, 27 de suis decretis, quae philosophi
vocant dogmata.) [On the use of the word in general,
see Bp. Lghtft. as above; (cf.‘ Teaching’ etc. 11, 3). |*
Boyparite: io decree, command, enjoin, lay down an or-
dinance: Diod. 4, 83, ete.; Esth. iii. 9; 2 Mace. x. 8 [ete. ];
Sept. (not Theodot.) Dan. ii. 13; Pass. [pres. doyparigo-
pac}; ordinances are imposed upon me, I suffer ordinances
to be imposed upon me: Col. ii. 20 [R. V. do ye subject
yourselves to ordinances ; cf. W. § 39,1 a.; B. 188 (163) ;
Mey. or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ].*
Soxéw, -6; impf. eddxovv; 1 aor. éofa; (akin to déyoua
or déxouat, whence déxos an assumption, opinion, [cf. Lat.
decus, decet, dignus; Curtius § 15; ef. his Das Verbum,
i. pp. 376, 382]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to be of opin-
ton, think, suppose : foll. by acc. with inf., Mk. vi. 49[RG
L Tr]; 2 Co. xi. 16; 1 Co. xii. 23 ; with an inf. relating
to the same subject as that of doxéw itself, Lk. viii. 18
(6 Soxet ¢yew) ; xxiv. 37 (€OdKouy mvedpa Gewpeiv); Jn.
Va SOs) xvin Oo ACtsExil 9S xxvii dis md Conmmmel en vite
ZO Viti VAR 3 IIE ih erha KC ale yaGcoe eden rbh CoP Alek sk
26; pay dd&nre Aeyew ev Eavtots do not suppose that ye
may think, Mt. iii. 9; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. foll. by érz,
Mt. vi. 7; xxvi. 53; [Mk. vi. 49 T WH]; LE. xii. 51;
xiii. 2, 4; xix. 11; Jn. v. 45; xi. 13, [31 T Tr WH); xiii.
29 xx lon 1 Comive 912i @o.xi14 19 assivebe aso used
that the object is easily understood from the context : Mt.
xxiv. 44 (7 dpa ov Sokeire 6 vids rod dvOpdhmou epyerat) ;
Lk. xii. 40; xvii. 9 [R GL br. Tr mrg. br.]; forming a
parenthesis in the midst of a question: mo, Soxeire,
xelpovos d&wOnoerar tyswpias; Heb. x. 29; (Arstph.
Acharn. 12 més roir fcewé pov, Soxeis, THY Kapdlay ;
Anacr. 40, 15 [i. e. 35 (33), 16] mécov, Soxeis, rovodow,
€pas, dcovs od Baddets;). [Syn. see nyeopat, fin. | 2
intrans. to seem, be accounted, reputed: Lk. x. 363 xxii.
24; Acts xvii. 18; xxv. 27; 1 Co. xii. 22; 2Co. x. 9;
Heb. xii. 11; ¢0€a €wavTe@ Seiv mpaEa, I seemed to my-
self, i.e. I thought, Acts xxvi. 9 [ef. B. 111 (97)]; of
Soxovvres dpxewv those that are accounted to rule, who
are recognized as rulers, Mk. x. 42; of Soxodvres etval tt
those who are reputed to be somewhat (of importance),
and therefore have influence, Gal. ii. 6, [9], (Plat. Euthyd.
p- 303 c.); simply, of Soxotvres those highly esteemed, of
repute, looked up to, influential, Gal. ii. 2 (often in Grk.
154
doxyen
writ. as Eur. Hec. 295, where cf. Schafer ; [cf. W. § 45,
7]). By way of courtesy, things certain are sometimes
said Soxeiv, as in Heb. iv. 1 (cf. Cic. offic. 3, 2, 6 ut tute
tibi defuisse videare) ; 1 Co. xi. 16 [but cf. Mey. ad loc.];
cf. W. § 65, 7c. 3. impers. Soxet pou, it seems to me;
i.e. a. I think, judge: thus in questions, ri cou (dpiv)
Soxet; Mt. xvii. 25 ; xviii. 12; xxi. 28; xxii. 17, 42; xxvi.
66; Jn. xi. 56; xara 70 Soxody avrois as seemed good
to them, Heb. xii. 10, (Leian. Tim. § 25, and rapa 16
Soxody jyiv, Thuc. 1, 84). b. 0 pos it seemed good to,
pleased, me; I determined: foll. by inf., Lk. i.3; Acts xv.
22, 25, 28, 34 Rec.; also often in Grk. writ. Comp.:
€v-, guv- ev- boxew.*
|Syn. Soxetv2, patverOat: atv. (primarily of luminous
bodies) makes reference to the actual external appear-
ance, generally correct but possibly deceptive; d5ox. refers
to the subjective judgment, which may or may not
conform to the fact. Hence such a combination as doxet
galvecGa is no pleonasm. Cf. Trench § lxxx.; Schmidt
chaas:|
Soxipdtw; [fut. doxyuacw)]; 1 aor. édoxipaca; Pass.,
[pres. Soxiatopar]; pf. dedoxiuwaopar; (ddxuos); Sept.
chiefly for jN32; as in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt., Thuce.], Xen.
and Plat. on, to try; 1. to test, examine, prove, scruti-
nize (to see whether a thing be genuine or not), as
metals: ypvatov 8a mupds (Isocr. p. 240 d. [i. e. Pana-
then. § 14]; ad Demon. p. 7 b. [here Bekk. Bacavifopev];
Sept., Prov. viii. 10; Sir.ii.5; Sap. iii. 6; adpyupov, Prov.
xvii. 8, [ef. Zech. xiii. 9]), 1 Pet. i. 7; other things: Lk.
S56 sexivel 9s 2 Convatieiss) Gall svaer4 kel nett Ayo
7a Scahépovta, Ro. ii. 18; Phil. i. 10, [al. refer these pass.
to2; see dSuapépw, 2 b.]; men, 1 Tim. iii. 10 (in the pass.) ;
éavtov, 1 Co. xi. 28; 2 Co. xiii. 5, (cf. eLerater éavrdv, Xen.
mem. 2, 5, 1 and 4); @edv, Heb. ii. 9 (RG, fr. Ps. xciv.
(xev.) 9; on the sense of the phrase see metpafw, 2 d. B.) ;
Ta mvevpara, foll. by et whether etc. 1 Jn. iv. 1; foll. by
indir. dise., Ro. xii. 2; 1 Co. iti. 13; Eph. v. 10. 2. to
recognize as genuine after examination, to approve, deem
worthy: 1 Co. xvi. 3; twa orovdatov dvta, 2 Co. viii. 225
ev @ Soxiuacer for év TOUT, & Soxiager in that which he
approves, deems right, Ro. xiv. 22; Sedoxedopeba bb Tot
Geod murtevOnvat TO evayyedtov we have been approved by
God to be intrusted with the business of pointing out to
men the way of salvation, 1 Th. ii. 4; ov« éSoxiuacay tov
Oedv éxew €v exvyvoce: they did not think God worthy to
be kept in knowledge, Ro. i. 28. [On Soxtpafw (as com-
pared with meipafw) see Trench § lxxiv.; Cremer s. v.
meipatw. COMP.: dmodoxindto. | *
Soxipacia, -as, 7, a proving, putting to the proof: et-
pa¢ew év Soxiuacig to tempt by proving, Heb. iii. 9 LT
TrWH. ({Lys.], Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.;
Aidos Sokiacias, Sir. vi. 21.) *
SoKiph, -7s, 7, (Soxepos) ; 1. in an active sense, a
proving, trial: @Xiyews, through affliction, 2 Co. viii. 2.
2. approvedness, tried character: Ro. v. 4; 2 Co. ii. 9;
Phil. ii. 225 rs Staxovias, exhibited in the contribution,
2i@omxenls. 3. a proof [objectively], a specimen of
tried worth: 2 Co. xiii. 3. (Diosc. 4, 186 (183); occa-
sionally in eccl. writ.) *
Ooki Lov
Soxiprov, -ov, 7d, (Soxyun) ; 1. i. gq. rd Soxipdcew, the
proving: ths miorews, Jas. i. 3. 2. that by which some-
thing is tried or proved, a test: Dion. Hal. ars rhet. 11;
yiéooa yevoews Soxiniov, Longin. de sublim. 32,5; 8oxi-
puov S€ otpatwrév kdpatos, Hdian. 2, 10, 12 [6 ed.
Bekk.]; in Sept. of a crucible or furnace for smelting:
Prov. xxvii. 21; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7. 3. equiv. to doxuun,
2: tev ths miotews, your proved faith, 1 Pet. i. 7.
This word is treated of fully by Fritzsche in his Prili-
‘minarien u.s.w. pp. 40, 44.*
Séxipos, -ov, (Séxouar); fr. Hdt. down; 1. prop.
accepted, particularly of coins and metals, Gen. xxiii. 16;
2 Chr. ix.17; Lcian. Herm. 68, etc.; hence univ. proved,
tried: in the N. T. one who is of tried faith and integ-
rity [R. V. approved], Ro. xvi. 10 (rév Séxipov ev Xpiora,
the approved servant of Christ); 1 Co. xi. 19; 2 Co. x.
18; xii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 15 (wapuordvar éavtov Sdxtpov TO
6c); Jas. i. 12. 2. accepted i. q. acceptable, pleasing :
evdpeotos TH Ged x. Sdxtwos [L mrg. -yos] trois dvOparo.s,
Ro. xiv. 18.*
Sods, -od, 7, (fr. d€kouar for Séyouar, in so far as it has
the idea of bearing [cf. Curtius § 11]); fr. Hom. down;
a beam: Mt. vii. 3-5; Lk. vi. 41 sq.*
SdAu0s, -a, -ov, (SdAos); fr. Hom. on; deceitful: 2 Co.
36 IB Re
Sort6w@: (dorLos) 3 to deceive, use deceit: in Ro. iii. 13,
fr. Ps. v. 10, impf. édo0Avodcay an Alexandrian form for
edodtovy, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 349; W.§ 13, 2f.; Mul-
lach p. 16; B. 43 (37); [ef. €yo]. (Not found in prof.
writ.; [Numb. xxv. 18; Ps. civ. (cv.) 25. Cf. W. 26
(25)].)*
86Xos, -ov, 6, (fr. dékw to catch with a bait [(?); Lat.
dolus, cf. Curtius § 271]; see deded{w above); prop. bait,
Hom. Od. 12, 252; a lure, snare; hence craft, deceit,
guile: Mt. xxvi. 4; Mk. xiv. 1; vii. 22; Jn. i. 47 (48);
Wets xin. 10; 2 Co. xii. 165 Ro. 1. 29; 1°Th. ii. 3 (ote
ort ev Som, there is no deceit under it); 1 Pet. ii. [1],
22, and Rev. xiv. 5 Rec., after Is. lili. 9; Aadreiv Soro
to speak deceitfully (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14), 1 Pet.
iii. 10.*
S0Ada, -G; (dodos) 5 1. to ensnare: Hes., Hdt. and
succeeding writers. 2. to corrupt, ([BdérAAwov and
AiBavov, Dioscor. 1, 80. 81]; rév otvoy, Leian. Hermot. 59) :
Tov Acyov Tov Geod, divine truth by mingling with it wrong
notions, 2 Co. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § Ixii. and see xamn-
Aevoo. | *
Sdpa, -ros, 76, (Oidwpue), a gift: Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13;
Eph. iv. 8; Phil. iv. 17. (Plat. def. p. 415b.; Plut.;
often in Sept., chiefly for mp.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt.
p- 291 sq. [who quotes Varro de ling. Lat. |. iv. p. 48 ed.
Bip. “dos crit pecunia si nuptiarum causa data: haec
Graece derivy, ita enim hoe Siculi: ab eodem Donum.
Nam Graece ut ipsi dapov, ut alii ddua, et ut Attici ddars.” | *
[Syw. ddua, 56c1s, 5Gpov, Swped: Séc. act. a giving, pass.
thing given, cf. medical “dose”; dap. specific “ present,” yet
not always gratuitous or wholly unsuggestive of recom-
pense; but dwped differs from dap. in denoting a gift which
is also a gratuity, hence of the benefactions of a sover-
155
doéa
eign; a ddc1s cod is what God confers as possessor of all
things; a dwped Oeod is an expression of his favor; a dapopr
Gcov is something which becomes the recipient’s abiding pos-
session. Philo de cherub. § 25, says mavu éxdnAws mapioras
(Num. xxviii. 2), dr. ray bvtwy Ta wey XdpiTOs péons Hélwrat,
hn kadetrat Sdo1s, TA 5E Gwelvovos, hs bvoma viketov dwped.
Again, de leg. alleg. iii. § 70 (on the same bibl. pass.), d:a-
Tnpnoes bri Sapa Soudtwy diapepovor Ta ev yap eudacw
Meyebous TeAclwy wyabay Snrodow... 7d dé cis Bpaxdtarov
goraArat KTA. Hence ddua, ddots, gift; Swped, Spor, henefac-
tion, bounty, etc.; yet cf. e. g. Test. xii. Patr. test. Zab. § 1
eye ciut ZaBovddy, Sdars aya Tots yovetat wov, with Gen.
XXX. 20 Seddpyta 6 Beds por SGpov kaddv...k. ekddece Td
dvoua avtod ZaBovady. Cf. Schmidt ch. 106.]
86£a, -ns, 7, (Soxéw), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. most freq.
for 1/23, several times for 1/4, 170, ete. ;
I. opinion, judgment, view: in this sense very often in
prof. writ.; but in the Bible only in 4 Macc. v. 17 (18).
II. opinion, estimate, whether good or bad, concerning
some one; but (like the Lat. existimatio) in prof. writ.
generally, in the saered writ. always, good opinion con-
cerning one, and as resulting from that, praise, honor,
Glorym, Lexiv., 10); Heb-siti..3 7-0 Pet. vy. 45. opp. to
atiuia, 2 Co. vi. 8; opp. to aicxvvn, Phil. iii. 19; joined
with ren, Ro. ii. 7,10; 1 Pet. i. 7; 2 Pet.i.17; dc&a ruvds,
praise or honor coming to some one, Lk. ii. 32; Eph. iii.
13; coming from some one, Jn. viii. 54; xii. 43; top
avOparev, Tov Geov, Jn. xii. 43; Ro. iii. 23 ; persons whose
excellence is to redound to the glory of others are called
their ddéa: thus, tpets eore 7 Sdoéa nudv, 1 Th. ii. 20;
adderdoi nuav doéa Xpiorod, 2 Co. viii. 23. Cnrety rnv idiav
dd€av, or r. O6€. adrod, Jn. vii. 18; vill. 50; of God, to
endeavor to promote the glory of God, Jn. vii. 18;
Enrewv Sdéav €E avOpwmrev, 1 Th. ii. 6; tHv dd€ay r. rapa
Tov Geod, Jn. v. 443 AapBavew Sd€av (Lat. captare hono-
rem) to seek to receive, catch at glory, Jn. v. 41,44; to
receive glory, 2 Pet.i. 17; Rev. v. 12; tiv day, the glory
due [cf. W. 105 (100) sq.; B. 88 (77); Ellic. on Gal. i.
5, ef. B. 89 (78)], Rev. iv. 115; diddvar déav rH Gee,
mim Wd Dw or (Jer. xiii. 16) 13, to vive or ascribe
glory to God, why and how being evident in each
case from the context: thus, by declaring one’s grati-
tude to God for a benefit received, Lk. xvii. 18; by not
distrusting God’s promises, Ro. iv. 20; by celebrating
his praises, Rev. iv. 9; xi. 13; xiv. 7; [xvi. 9]; xix. 7
(riv d6éav the glory due); by rendering its due honor
to God’s majesty, Acts xii. 23; dds dd€av rH Ged, ac-
knowledge that God knows all things, and show that
you believe it by the confession you are about to make,
Jn. ix. 24, cf. 1S. vi. 5; Josh. vii. 19; Ev. Nicod. ¢. 14 [p.
622 ed. Thilo, 296 ed. Tdf.]; cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. i. 12.
els 60£av Geod, so as to honor God, to promote his glory
(among men): Ro. xv. 7; 1 Co. x. 31; Phil.i. 11; ii. 11;
eis ri dE. 7. Oeod, Ro. iii. 7; 2 Co. iv. 15; 76 Oe@ mpos
dd£av, 2 Co. i. 20; mpos thy Tod Kupiov doFav, 2 Co. viii. 19 ;
imép ris ddEns Tod Geod, Jn. xi. 4; in doxologies: do€a ev
vwiorots dea, Lk. ii. 14, Chexix So 5 avT@ 7 d0€a, Ro. xi.
36; Eph. ili. 21; 2 Pet. iii. 18; @ 7) d0€a, Ro. xvi. 27; Gal.
i. 5; 2 Tim. iv. 18; Heb. xiii. 21; rO Oe@ 4 d0€a, Phil. iv.
d0€a
20; roy kat dda,1 Tim. i. 17. [Even in classic Grk.
dofa is a word of wide signif., ranging from one’s private
opinion, fancy, to public opinion, repute, renown
(kAéos; cf. the relation of pjyn topdvar). Coupled with
rin it denotes rather the splendid condition (evident
glory), tin the estimate and acknowledgment of it
(paid honor). ]
III. As a translation of the Mebr. 323, in a use for-
eign to Grk. writ. [W. 32], splendor, brightness ; ale
properly: rod @wros, Acts xxii. 11; of the sun, moon,
stars, 1 Co. xv. 40 sq.; used of the heavenly brightness,
by which God was conceived of as surrounded, Lk. ii. 9;
Acts vii. 55, and by which heavenly beings were sur-
rounded when they appeared on earth, Lk. ix. 31; Rev.
xviii. 1; with which the face of Moses was once made
luminous, 2 Co. iii. 7, and also Christ in his transfigura-
tion, Lk. ix. 82; d0£a rov kupiov, in Sept. equiv. to Wi33
mim, in the targ. and talm. 4)3W, Shekinah or Shechi-
nah [see BB.DD. s. v.], the glory of the Lord, and simply
7 d0éa, a bright cloud by which God made manifest to
men his presence and power on earth (Hx. xxiv. 17; xl.
28 (34) sqq., etc.) : Ro.ix.4; Rev. xv. 8; xxi. 11, 23; hence,
6 beds rs Sons (God to whom belongs de€a) PO, Acts
Vii. 2; XepouBelv ddéys, on whom the divine glory rests
(so dd£a without the article, Ex. xl. 28 (34); 1S. iv. 22;
Sir. xlix. 8), Heb. ix. 5. 2. magnificence, excellence,
preéminence, dignity, grace: Baowetat rod Kocpov k. 7 Sofa
avtay, i. e. their resources, wealth, the magnificence and
greatness of their cities, their fertile lands, their throng-
ing population, Mt. iv. 8; Lk. iv. 6; 7 d0€a trav Bacideiov
Ths yns, Rev. xxi. [24; trav eOvav, ibid.] 26; used of
royal state, splendid apparel, and the like: Mt. vi. 29;
Lk. xii. 27, (Esth. v.1; Joseph. antt. 8, 6,5); glorious form
and appearance: e. g. of human bodies restored to life,
opp. to 7 druuia which characterized them when they
were buried, 1 Co. xv. 43; 4 d0&a rs capes “omne id,
quod in rebus humanis magnificum dicitur ” (Calvin), 1
Pet. i. 24; elvai rm S0€a to be aglory, ornament, to one,
1 Co. xi. 15 ; univ. preéminence, excellence: 2 Co. iii. 8-11.
3. majesty; a. that which belongsto God; and a. the
kingly majesty which belongs to him as the supreme
ruler ; so in pass. where it is joined with Baowheia, Sivapis,
kpdros, e€ovoia, and the like: Mt. vi. 13 Rec.; esp. in
doxologies, 1 Pet. iv. 11; v.11 RG; Jude 25; Rev. i.
6; these pass. I have preferred to distinguish fr. those
cited above, II. fin., and yet in pass. similar to each other
in form it is not always clear whether 8d€a is used to de-
note praise and honor, or regal majesty, as in Rev. vii.
12 7 eddoyia x. 9 Sdéa Kk.) copia x. 4 ebyaptoria K. Ty
k. 9 ioxds, Rev. xix. 1 4 cornpia k. 7 dd€a k. t) TYyLh KH
dvvauts ; likewise in Rey. v. 12, [13]. of the judicial
majesty of God as exhibited at the last day, Jude vs. 24.
aynp eixav x. d0éa bed tmdpxev, whose function of govern-
ment reflects the majesty of the divine ruler, 1 Co. xi. 7;
(7) yor dd€a avdpds, because in her the preéminence and
authority of her husband are conspicuous, ibid. 8. maj-
esty in the sense of the absolute perfection of the
deity : Ro. i. 23; 2 Co. iv.6; Heb.i.3; 2 Pet.i. 17; 1 Pet.
156
d0€a
iv. 14; év 0&7 i. q. évddEas, i. e. as accords with his di-
vine perfection, Phil. iv. 19 [cf. Mey. and Bp. Lghtft.
ad loc.]; of the majesty of his saving grace: Ro. ix. 23;
Eph. i. 12, 14, 18; iii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 11; 2 Pet. i. 3 [W.
381 (356)]; more fully ddéa ris xdperos, Eph.i. 6; 6 ma
tip ths d0éns, the Father whose characteristic is majesty,
Eph. i. 17; the majesty of God as exhibited in deeds of
power: Jn. xi. 40; Ro. vi. 4 (whence dd€a for ip, Sept.
Is. xii. 2; xlv. 24); hence rd patos rhs Sdéns adrod, the
might in which his majesty excels, Col. i. 11. b. maj-
esty which belongs to Christ; and a. the kingly
majesty of the Messiah, to which belongs his kingly state,
the splendor of his external appearance, the retinue of
angels, and the like (see in III. 1): Mk. x. 37; in this
sense it is said that Christ will come hereafter to set up
the Messianic kingdom év r7 60&n rod marpos, clothed by
the Father in kingly array, Mt. xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38 ;
LK. ix. 26; pera buvapews «. d0&ns modAjs, Mt. xxiv. 30;
Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27 cf. Mt. xxv. 31; Tit. ii. 13; 1 Pet.
iv. 13; also xaOica émi Opdvov dSdEns aitod, Mt. xix. 28;
xxv. 31, cf. 1S. ii. 8; 7 d0&a rhs icxvos adrod, the majesty
of his Messianic power with which he will punish his
adversaries, 2 Th.i. 9. 8B. the absolutely perfect inward
or personal excellence of Christ: 2 Co. iii. 18; iv. 4; in
which he excels by virtue of his nature as 6 Oetos déyos,
Jn. i. 14; xii. 41; of which majesty he gave tokens in
the miracles he performed, Jn. ii. 11 cf. xi. 40; 6 kvpuos
tas Soéns, 1 Co. ii. 8; Jas. ii. 1. y. the majesty (glory) of
angels, as apparent in their exterior brightness, Lk. ix.
26; in a wider sense, in which angels are called dd€az as
being spiritual beings of preéminent dignity: Jude vs. 8;
2 Pet. ii. 10. 4. amost glorious condition, most exalted
state; a. of that condition with God the Father in heav-
en to which Christ was raised after he had achieved his
work on earth: Lk. xxiv. 26; Jn. xvii. 5 (where he is
said to have been in the same condition before his incar-
nation, and even before the beginning of the world); ib.
22, 24; Heb. ii. 7,9; 1 Pet. i. 11, 21; 7d capa tis Soéns
avrov, the body in which his glorious condition is mani-
fested, Phil. iii. 21; dveknpén ev d6€y, was taken up (into
heaven) so that he is now ev dd&y, 1 Tim. iii. 16 [ef. W.
413 (385); B. 328 (283)]. b. the glorious condition of
blessedness into which it is appointed and promised that
true Christians shall enter after their Saviour’s return from
heaven: Ro. viii. 18, 21; ix. 23; 2 Co. iv. 17; Col. i. 27
(twice ; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; iii.4; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. ii.
10; 1 Pet. v.1; which condition begins to be enjoyed
even now through the devout contemplation of the divine
majesty of Christ, and its influence upon those who con-
template it, 2 Co. iii. 18; and this condition will include
not only the blessedness of the soul, but also the gain of
amore excellent body (1 Co. xv. 43; Phil. iii. 21); ef.
Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 203 sqq. 3 4 dé£a
Tod Geov, which God bestows, Ro. v. 2; 1 Th. ii. 12; d0€a
Tov kup. jy. "Ino. Xp. the same in which Christ rejoices,
2 Th. ii. 14 (cf. Ro. vill. 17, ete.) ; eis Sdéav fpadr, to
render us partakers of dd£a, 1 Co. ii. 7. Cf. Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. des N. T. § 76 d.*
dofdta |
Sofdtw ; [impf. edd£acov] ; fut. dofdow; 1 aor. éddéaca;
Pass., [pres. do£d¢ouai]; pf. deSd£acpar; 1 aor. edogdaaOnp ;
(d0€a); Vulg. honorifico, glorifico, clarifico ; Sept. chiefly
for 123, several times for $9, (in Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq.
35 So€d¢eoOa stands for TTP to shine) ; 1. to think,
suppose, be of opinion, (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat.,
Thuc., et sqq-; nowhere in this sense in the sacred writ-
ings). 2. fr. Polyb. (6, 53, 10 deSoéacpévor em aperq) on
to praise, extol, magnify, celebrate: twa, pass., Mt. vi. 2;
Lk. iv. 15; éavrdy, to glorify one’s self, Jn. viii. 54; Rev.
xvill. 7; Tov Adyov Tod Kupiov, Acts xiii. 48; 76 dvoua rod
kupiov, Rev. xv. 43; rov bedv, Mt. v. 163; ix. 8; xv. 31; Mk.
ii. 12; Lk. v. 25 sq.; vii. 16; xiii. 13; xvii. 155 xvili. 43;
xxill. 47; Acts xi. 18; xxi. 20 [Rec. xvpiov]; Ro. xv. 6,
9 Wi. $'445'3'b.5°832 (311) 1371 Ret. ti-125) iv. 14 Rec;
with the addition of émi rw, for something, Lk. ii. 20;
Acts iv. 21; 2 Co. ix. 13; év éuoi, on account of me (prop-
erly, finding in me matter for giving praise [cf. W. 387
(362) sq.]), Gal. i. 24; é€v r@ dvduare rovr@, 1 Pet. iv. 16 L
era WiE: 3. to honor, do honor to, hold in honor:
Tv Staxoviay pov, by the most devoted administration of
it endeavoring to convert as many Gentilesas possible to
Christ, Ro. xi. 13 ; a member of the body, 1 Co. xii. 26;
Geov, to worship, Ro. i. 21; with the adjunct év 76 copart,
by keeping the body pure and sound, 1 Co. vi. 20; ro
Gavar», to undergo death for the honor of God, Jn. xxi.
1 4. By a use not found in prof. writ. to make glori-
ous, adorn with lustre, clothe with splendor; a. to impart
glory to something, render it excellent: pf. pass. dedd&a-
cpa to excel, be preéminent; dedofacpevos excelling, emi-
nent, glorious, 2 Co. ili. 10; dedofacpevn xapa surpassing
i. e. heavenly joy, [A. V. full of glory], 1 Pet.i. 8. b.
to make renowned, render illustrious, i. e. to cause the
dignity and worth of some person or thing to become mani-
fest and acknowledged: rov Néyov tov Geov, 2 Th. iii. 1;
Christ, the Son of God, Jn. viii. 54; xi. 4; xvi. 14; xvii.
10; God the Father, Jn. xiii. 31 sq.; xiv. 13; xv. 83; xvii.
1,4; 1 Pet.iv.115 76 dvopa rod Geod, Jn. xii. 28. c, to
exalt to a glorious rank or condition (Is. xliv. 23; lv. 5,
etc. ; joined to todr, Is. iv. 2; Esth. ili. 1): oby €avroy
éddéace did not assume to himself the dignity (equiv. to
odx éavT@ THY Typny eae, vs. 4), the words yernOnvat dp-
xtepéa being added epexegetically (W. § 44, 1), Heb. v.
5; of God exalting, or rather restoring, Christ his Son
to a state of glory in heaven: Jn. vii. 39; xii. 16, [23];
xiii. 31 sq.; xvii. 1,5; Acts iii. 13; (see dd£a, Il. 4a.);
of God bringing Christians to a heavenly dignity and
condition, (see dé€a, III. 4 b.): Ro. viii. 30. [Comp.:
év-, ovv-bo&d oa. | *
Aopxds, -d5os, 4, (prop. a wild she-goat, a gazelle, “mapa
70 d€pk, TO Berra: d&vdepkes yap TO (@ov k. evopparoy 3
Etym. Magn. [284, 6]), Dorcas, a certain Christian wo-
man: Acts ix. 36, 39; see TaBi0a.*
Sdc1s, -ews, 7, (didapc) ; 1. a giving, [fr. Hat.
down]: Adyos Sdcews x. AnWews, an account of giving
and receiving [i. e. debit and credit accounts ; cf. Aoyos
II. 3], Phil. iv. 15; here Paul, by a pleasant euphemism,
refers to the pecuniary gifts, which the church bestow-
157
dovA0s
ing them enters in the account of expenses, but he him-
self in the account of receipts; cf. Van Hengel ad loc. ;
So ddous kal AjYs, Of money given and received, Sir. xli.
19; xlii. 7; [Herm. mand. 5, 2, 2], and plur. Epict. diss. 2,
8) ale 2. a gift, [fr. Hom. down]: Jas. i. 17. [Syn.
see Soya, fin. |*
Sérns, -ov, 6, (Sida), for the more usual dornp, a giver,
bestower: 2 Co. ix. 7 fr. Prov. xxii. 8. Not found else-
where.*
Sovlaywyéw [ Rec." -ayay-], -; (SovAdywyos, cf. madd-
yoyos) ; to lead away into slavery, ciaim as one’s slave,
(Diod. Sic. 12, 24, and occasionally in other later writ.) ;
to make a slave and to treat as a slave i. e. with severity,
to subject to stern and rigid discipline: 1 Co. ix. 27.
Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum N. T. p. 472 sq.*
Sovdeta (‘Tdf. -ia, [see I, ¢]), -as, 7, (Sovred@) ; slavery,
bondage, the condition of a slave: tis bOopas, the bond-
age which consists in decay [W. § 59, 8 a., cf. B. 78 (68) ],
equiv. to the law, the necessity, of perishing, Ro. viii.
21; used of the slavish sense of fear, devoid alike of
buoyancy of spirit and of trust in God, such as is produced
by the thought of death, Heb. ii. 15, as well as by the
Mosaic law in its votaries, Ro. viii. 15 (veda Sovdelas) ;
the Mosaic system is said to cause SovAeéa on account of
the grievous burdens its precepts impose upon its adhe-
rents: Gal. iv. 24; v.1. [From Pind. down.]*
Sovredw; fut. SovAevow; 1 aor. edSovrAevoa; pf. dedov-
Aevka; (SovdAos) ; Sept. for Tap ; 1. prop. to be a slave,
serve, do service: absol., Eph. vi. 7; 1 Tim. vi. 23 ruvi,
Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; Ro. ix. 12; said of nations in
subjection to other nations, Jn. viii. 33; Acts vii. 7; men
are said dovAeveww who bear the yoke of the Mosaic law,
Gal. iv. 25 (see SovAeia). 2. metaph. to obey, submit
to; a. in a good sense: absol. to yield obedience, Ro.
vii. 6; revi, to obey one’s commands and render to him the
services due, Lk. xv. 29; God: Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13;
1 Th. i.9; kupig and 7@ xvpio, Acts xx. 19; Ro. xii. 11
(not Rec.*, see below); Eph. vi. 7; Christ: Ro. xiv.
18; Col. iii. 24; vouw eod, ace. to the context, feel myself
bound to, Ro. vii. 25; rots Beots, to worship gods, Gal. iv.
8; 7@ xaip@ (Anth. 9, 441, 6), wisely adapt one’s self to,
Ro. xii. 11 Ree. (see above), cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; per-
form services of kindness and Christian love: dAAnAows,
Gal. v. 13; used of those who zealously advance the in-
terests of anything: @s marpl réxvoy ovv eyol edovAcevoev
els 7 evayyéAtoy equiv. to as marpi réxvov Sovdever, epot
edovdevoey Kal oUTw adv epor edovd. etc. Phil. ii. 22 [W.
422 (393) ; 577 (537)]. b. ina bad sense, of those who
become slaves to some base power, to yield to, give one’s
self up to: 7h dpapria, Ro. vi. 6; vou dpyaprias, Ro. vii.
253 éemOvpias x. pdovais, Tit. ili. 3, (Xen. mem. 1, 5, 5;
apol. Socr. 16; Plat. Phaedrus p. 238 e.; Polyb. 17, 15,16;
Hdian. 1, 17, 22 [9 ed. Bekk.]) ; rH kowdia, Ro. xvi. 18,
(yaorpi, Anthol. 11, 410,4; Xen. mem. 1, 6, 8; abdomini
servire, Sen. de benef. 7, 26, 4; ventri obedire, Sall. [Cat. i.
1]); papwva, to devote one’s self to getting wealth : Mt. vi.
24; Lk. xvi. 13.
8000s, -n, -ov, (derived by most fr. dé to tie, bind;
Tois OToLXELoLs TOU KOcpov, Gal. iv. 9.*
S0vA0@
by some fr. AEAQ to ensnare, capture, [(?) al. al.; ef.
Vanitek p. 322]); serving, subject to: mapeotnoare ta
ueAn tar SoddAa TH dxabapaia, Ro. vi. 19. Then substan-
tively, 7 dovAn a female slave, bondmaid, handmaid: rod
Geov, rod Kupiov, one who worships God and submits to
him, Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29 (iii. 2)); Lk. i. 38, 48.
6 dodAos, Sept. for T2yp ; 1. a slave, bondman, man of
servile condition; a. properly: opp. to édevOepos, 1 Co.
vii. 21; xii. 13; Gal. iii. 28; Eph. vi. 8; Col. iii. 11; Rev.
vi. 15; xili. 16; xix. 18; opp. to kupios, Seamdrns, otKo-
derrorns, Mt. x. 24; xiii. 27 sq.; Lk. xii. 46; Jn. xv. 15;
Eph. vi. 5; Col. iii. 22; iv. 1; 1 Tim. vi. 1; Tit. ii. 9,
and very often. b. metaph. a. one who gives himself
up wholly to another’s will, 1 Co. vii. 23; or dominion,
THs dpaptias, Jn. vill. 34; Ro. vi. 17, 20; rs POopas, 2
Pet. ii. 19, (rév dover, Athen. 12 p. 531 ¢.3 trav ypnpa-
tov, Plut. Pelop. c. 3; rov mivew, Ael. v. h. 2,41). 8.
the dodAot Xpicrod, Tov Xpiorov, "Incod Xprarod, are those
whose service is used by Christ in extending and ad-
yancing his cause among men: used of apostles, Ro. i. 1;
Galeri lO eehilhis tise im yi eo 4a ett alo ageulselrs
2 Pet. i. 1; of other preachers and teachers of the
gospel, Col. iv. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 24; Jude vs. 1; of the
true worshippers of Christ (who is xvpios ravrwy, Acts
x. 36), Eph. vi. 6. the do0A0t rod Geo, NIM 33}, are
those whose agency God employs in executing his pur-
poses: used of apostles, Acts iv. 29; xvi. 17; of Moses
(Josh. i. 1), Rev. xv. 3; of prophets (Jer. vii. 25; xxv.
4), Rev. i.1; x. 7; xi. 18; of all who obey God’s com-
mands, his true worshippers, Lk. ii. 29; Rev. ii. 20; vii. 3;
xix. 2,5; xxii. 3,6; (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 23; Lxviii. (Ixix.)
37; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 4,21). y. dodAds Twos, devoted to
another to the disregard of one’s own interests: Mt. xx.
27; Mk. x. 44; strenuously laboring for another’s sal-
vation, 2 Co. iv. 5. 2. aservant, attendant, (of a king):
Mt. xviii. 23, 26 sqq. [Syn. see d:dxovos. ]
Sovddw, -@: fut. Soukacw; 1 aor. eSovAwoa; pf. pass.
dedovA@par; 1 aor. pass. €SovAdOnv; (SodAos) ; [fr. Aes-
chyl. and Hdt. down]; to make a slave of, reduce to bond-
age ; a. prop.: rivd, Acts vii. 6; rotr@ cal [yet TWH
om. Tr br. xa] deSovAwras to him he has also been made a
bondman, 2 Pet. ii. 19. b. metaph.: ¢uavrov rum give
myself wholly to one’s needs and service, make myself a
bondman to him, 1 Co. ix. 19 ; SovAoda dal rim, to be made
subject to the rule of some one, e. g. 77 Sicacocivy, TO
Ged, Ro. vi. 18, 22; likewise tad m1, Gal. iv. 3; SeSovr\o-
pévos oive, wholly given up to, enslaved to, Tit. ii. 3
(SovAevew viv, Liban. epist. 319) ; SedovA@par ev Tin, to
be under bondage, held by constraint of law or necessity,
in some matter, 1 Co. vii. 15. [Comp.: xara-doudéo.] *
S0x%, -7s, 7, (Séyouae to receive as a guest), a feast,
banquet, [cf. our reception]: Soxynv mod, Lk. v. 29; xiv.
13. (i. gq. WNW, Gen. [xxi. 8]; xxvi. 30; Esth. i. 35 v.
4 sqq.; Athen. 8 p. 348 f.; Plut. moral. p. 1102 b. [ive.
non posse suav. vivi ete. 21, 9].) *
Spdkwy, -ovros, 6, (apparently fr. S€pxopat, 2 aor. eSpa-
ov; hence dpdxwy prop. equiv. to é& Brérav [Etym.
Magn. 286, 7; cf. Curtius § 13]); Sept. chiefly for pan;
158
dvvapas
a dragon, a great serpent, a fabulous animal, (so as early
as Hom. Il. 2, 308 sq., ete.). From it, after Gen. iil.
1 sqq., is derived the fig. description of the devil in Rev.
Kil. 8-175 xiii. 2,4, 11>) xvin ISaexox Zoi baudessen,
Studien zur semitisch. Religionsgesch. vol. i. (iv. 4) p.
281 sqq.|*
Spdpw, fo run, see rpéxa.
Spdccopar; to grasp with the hand, to take: teva, 1 Co.
iii. 19 [B. 291 (250); W. 352 (330)]. (In Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down; Sept.) *
Spaxp, -7s, 7, (Spdooouat, [hence prop. a grip, a hand-
ful]), [fr. Hdt. down], a drachma, a silver coin of [near-
ly] the same weight as the Roman denarius (see Snvdptov) :
Lk. xv. 8 sq.*
Spérravoy, -ov, 70, (i. q- Speman, fr. Sper to pluck, pluck
off), a sickle, a pruning-hook, ahooked vine-knife, such as
reapers and vine-dressers use: Mk. iv. 29; Rev. xiv.
14-19. (Hom. and subseq. writ.; Sept.) *
Sp6p.0s, -ov, 6, (fr. APAMQ [q. v.] ; cf. vopos, tpduos, and
the like), a course (Hom. et sqq.); in the N. T. fig., the
course of life or of office : mAnpovaba Tov Spdpov, Acts xiii.
25; reXecoov, Acts xx. 243; reAeiv, 2 Tim. iv. 7.*
ApoveAda, [al. ApovardAa, cf. Chandler § 120], -ns, 9,
Drusilla, daughter of Agrippa the elder, wife of Felix,
the governor of Judza, a most licentious woman (Joseph.
antt. 20, 7, 1 sq.): Acts xxiv. 24; cf. Win. RWB. [and
B. D.] s. v.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19, 4.*
Stvapar, depon. verb, pres. indic. 2 pers. sing. ddvacas
and, acc. to a rarer form occasional in the poets and fr.
Polyb. on to be met with in prose writ. also (cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 359; [WH. App. p.168; W.§ 13, 2b.; Veitch
s. v.]), divn (Mk. ix. 22 sq. L T Tr WH; [LKk. xvi. 2
T WH Tr txt. ]; Rev. ii. 2); impf. eSvvaunv and Attic
novvapny, between which forms the Mss. and editions are
almost everywhere divided, [in Mk. vi. 19; xiv. 5; Lk.
viii. 19; xix. 3; Jn. ix. 33; xii. 39 all edd. read 78., so
RG in Mt. xxvi9; LE. i) 22); Jn: xi, 3.7/3) Rev. atva3 5
on the other hand, in Mt. xxii. 46; Lk. i. 22; Jn. xi. 87;
Rev. xiv. 3, L T Tr WH all read é8., so T WH in Mt.
xxvi. 9; RGin Mt. xxii. 46. Cf. WH. App. p. 162;
W. § 12,1b.; B. 33 (29)]; fut. durqoopar; 1 aor. ndvvnbns
and (in Mk. vii. 24 T WH, after codd. 8B only; in Mt.
xvii. 16 cod. B) ndvvacOny (cf. [WH u.s. and p. 169];
Kihner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.; W. 84 (81); B. 33
(29); Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 402]); Sept. for 55»; ta
be able, have power, whether by virtue of one’s own ability
and resources, or of a state of mind, or through favora-
ble circumstances, or by permission of law or custom;
a. foll. by an inf. [W. § 44, 3] pres. or aor. (on the dis-
tinction between which, cf. W. § 44, 7). a. foll. vy a
Pressints:) Mtivi24-sixuloswVikst ave wii 3 on canvas
395) Jn. it.) 2); ved 9s Acts xcuvila U5); ol Cosxe Qilsaebs
v. 7; 1 Jn. iii. 9; Rev. ix. 20, and often. 8. foll. by an
aor. inf.: Mt. iii. 9; v.14; Mk. i. 45; ii. 4; v. 3; Lk. viii.
19; xiii. 11; Jn. iii. 3 sq.3 vi. 52; vii. 34, 36; Acts iv. 16
[UR Gals: veS 9x47 Ww Rosvill. 3 9tex vie 5a Oo mii: HAs
iii. 1; vi. 5; 2 Co. iii. 7; Gal. iii. 21; Eph. iii. 4, 20; 1 Th.
iii..93.1 Tim. vi. 7; 163 2 Tim. ii..13.3 1.7, 15s Hebi.
Svvapis
18; ili. 19; [xi. 19 Lehm.]; Jas. i. 21; Rev. iii. 8; v. 3;
v.. 17, and very often. b. with inf. omitted, as being
easily supplied from the context: Mt. xvi. 3 [here T br.
WH reject the pass.]; xx. 22; Mk. vi.19; x. 39; Lk. ix.
40; xvi. 26; xix. 3; Ro. viii. 7. c. joined with an accus.
dvvapai 1, to be able to do something (cf. Germ. ich vermag
etwas): Mk. ix. 22; Lk. xii. 26; 2 Co. xiii. 8, (and in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. on). 4. absol., like the Lat. possum
(as in Caes. b. gall. 1, 18, 6), i. q. to be able, capable,
strong, powerful: 1 Co. iii. 2; x. 13. (2 Chr. xxxii. 13;
1 Mace. v. 40 sq.: in 2 Mace. xi. 13 cod. Alex., and
often in Grk. writ. as Eur. Or.889; Thue. 4, 105; Xen.
an. 4, 5, 11 sq.; Isoc., Dem., Aeschin.)
| Sivapis, -ews, 7; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for on, m2,
ty, M3, NI¥ (an army, a host); strength, ability, power ;
a. univ. inherent power, power residing in a thing by vir-
tue of its nature, or which a person or thing exerts and
puts forth: Lk. i. 17; Acts iv. 7; 1 Co. iv. 20; 2 Co. iv.
75 xii. 9 (7 dUvaps ev doOeveia Tedeirat [RG redewdrac]) ;
xiii. 4; 1 Th.i. 5; Heb. vii. 16; xi.34; Rev. i. 16; xvii.
18; idia Suvdper, Acts iii. 12; peyddn Suvaper, Acts iv. 33;
éxdor@ kata thy idiay Siva, Mt. xxv. 15; imep dvvayw,
beyond our power, 2 Co. i. 8; év duvaper sc. dv, endued
with power, Lk. iv. 36; 1 Co. xv. 43; so in the phrase
EpyecOar ev Suvaper, Mk. ix. 1; powerfully, Col. i. 29; 2
Th. i.11; contextually i.q. evidently, Ro. i. 4; év duvapec
onpei@y x. Tepatwv, through the power which I exerted
upon their souls by performing miracles, Ro. xv. 19; dv».
eis Tt, Heb. xi. 11; dvv. emt ra Saipoma Kat vooovs Oepa-
mevew, Lk. ix.1; 9 Svvapis tis dpaptias 6 vdpos, sin exer-
cises its power (upon the soul) through the law, i. e.
through the abuse of the law, 1 Co. xv. 56; ris dvactdacews
tov Xpiorodv, the power which the resurrection of Christ
has, for instructing, reforming, elevating, tranquillizing,
the soul, Phil. iii. 10; ris edoeBeias, inhering in godliness
and operating upon souls, 2 Tim. iii. 5; duvdpecs péAXovros
aidvos (see aiay, 3), Heb. vi. 5; 1o mvedvpa tns Suvdpews
(see mvedpa, 5), 1 Pet. iv. 14 Lehm.; 2 Tim. i. 7; dvvayus
is used of the power of angels: Eph. i. 21 [cf. Mey.
ad loc.]; 2 Pet. ii. 11; of the power of the devil and
evil spirits, 1 Co. xv. 24; rod éyOpod, i. e. of the devil,
Lk. x. 19; rod Spdxovros, Rev. xiii. 2; angels, as excelling
in power, are called duvdpers [cf. (Philo de mutat. nom.
§ 8 durduets dompator) Mey. as above; Bp. Lghtft. on
Col. i. 16; see dyyedos]: Ro. viii. 38; 1 Pet. iii. 22.
dvvapis Tod Beod, univ. the power of God: Mt. xxii.
29; Mk. xii. 24; Lk. xxii. 69; Acts viii. 10; Ro. i. 20;
ix. 17; 1 Co. vi.14; dvvapis tWiorov, Lk. i. 35; 7 ddvaws,
esp. in doxologies, the kingly power of God, Mt. vi.
13' Rec. ; Rev. iv. 115 vil. 12; xi. 17; xii. 10; xv. 8; xix.
1; and the abstract for the concrete (as 473237 in Jew-
ish writ.; cf. Buztorf, Lex. talm. col. 385 [p. 201 sq. ed.
Fischer]) equiv. to 6 duvards, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62;
dvvapus Tod Oeod is used of the divine power considered
as acting upon the minds of men, 1 Co. ii. 5; 2 Co. vi.
7; Eph. iii. 7, 20; [2 Tim.i. 8; 1 Pet. i. 5]; els twa, 2
Co. xiii. 4 [but WH in br.]; Eph. i. 19; evdver@ai dvvayu
€€ vyous, Lk. xxiv. 49; by meton. things or persons in
159
Ovvaucs
which God’s saving power shows its efficacy are called dv«
vaprers Jeod : thus 6 Xpiords, 1 Co. i. 24; 6 Adyos Tod oraupov,
1 Co.i. 183; 7d evayye\vov, with the addition eis ow7npiav
mavri etc. Ro. i. 16 (ef. W. § 36, 3 b.]. Sdvapes is ascribed
to Christ, now in one sense and now in another: a power
to heal disease proceeds from him, Mk. v. 30; Lk. v. 17;
vi. 19; viii.46; the kingly power of the Messiah is his,
Mt. xxiv. 30; [Mk. xiii. 26]; Lk. xxi. 27; 2 Pet. i.16;
Rev. v. 12; dyyedou Hs Suvdpews adrov (see dyyedos, 2),
ministering to his power, 2 Thess. i. 7 [W. § 34, 3 b. note];
metaphysical [or essential] power, viz. that which
belongs to him as 6 Oeios Néyos, in the expression 76 pjya
ths Suvdp. avrod the word uttered by his power, equiv.
to his most powerful will and energy, Heb. i. 3; moral
power, operating on the soul, 2 Co. xii. 9 RG; and called
7) Ocia avrod Sivays in 2 Pet. i. 3; 9 Svvapis rod Kupiov,
the power of Christ invisibly present and operative in a
Christian church formally assembled, 1 Co.v.4. Svvayus
Tov dylov mvevparos: Acts i.8 [W.125 (119)]; mv.
dywov x. Svvapis, Acts x. 383; dmodevEis mvevparos Kat dv-
vapews (see drdderéts, b.), 1 Co. ii. 4; ev rH Suvdper rod
mvevpatos, under or full of the power of the Holy Spirit,
Lk. iv. 14; ev duvdper mvedpartos dyiov, by the power and
influence of the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 13; by the power
which, under the influence of the Holy Spirit, I exerted
upon their souls, Ro. xv.19. _b. specifically, the power
of performing miracles: Acts vi. 8; maca dvvapis, every
kind of power of working miracles (with the addition
kal onueiows x. Tépact), 2 Th. ii. 9; plur.: [Mt. xiii. 54;
xiv. 2; Mk. vi. 14]; 1 Co. xii. 28 sq.; Gal. iii. 5; évep-
ynpara Suvapewy, 1 Co. xii. 10; by meton. of the cause for
the effect, a mighty work [ef. W. 32; Trench § xci.]: 8%-
vapuy arovetv, Mk. vi. 5; ix. 39; so in the plur., Mk. vi. 2;
Lk. xix. 37; joined with onpeia, Acts viii. 13; with onpeia
kx. Tépata, Acts ii. 22; 2 Co. xii. 12; Heb. ii. 4 [?]; moveiy
Suvdpers, Mt. vii. 22; [xiii. 58]; Acts xix. 11; yivovrat
duvdpets, Mt. xi. 20 sq. 23; Lk.x.13. ¢. moral power
and excellence of soul: 1 Co.iv. 19; 2 Co. iv. 7; Eph. iii.
16; Col.i.11. d. the power and influence which belong to
riches; (pecuniary ability), wealth: rob orpnvovs, ‘riches
ministering to luxury’ (Grotius), Rev. xviii. 3; kara dv-
vauev kai irrép [al. rapa] duvapey, according to their means,
yea, beyond their means, 2 Co. viii. 3; (in this sense, for
Sn, Sept. Deut. viii. 17 sq.; Ruth iv. 11; not infreq. in
Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8, 4,34; an. 7, 7, 21(36)). e.
power and resources arising from numbers: Rev. iii. 8.
f. power consisting in or resting upon armies, forces,
hosts, (so, both in sing. and in plur., often in Grk. writ.
fr. Hdt., Thuc., Xen. on; in the Sept. and in Apocr.) ;
hence dvrdpers Tod odpavod the hosts of heaven, Hebraisti-
cally the stars: Mt. xxiv. 29; Lk. xxi. 26; and 6. ev rots
ovpavois, Mk. xiii. 25; equiv. to DWI N2¥, 2 K. xvii.
16; xxiii. 4; Is. xxxiv. 4; Jer. viii. 2; Dan. viii. 10, ete.
[cf. caBawd]. g. Like the Lat. vis and potestas, equiv.
to the (force i. e.) meaning of a word or expression: 1
Co. xiv. 11; (Plat. Crat. p. 394 b.; Polyb. 20, 9, 11;
Dion. Hal. 1, 68; Dio Cass. 55, 3; al.).*
[Syn. Bla dbvauts, evépyera, efovela, ioxvs, Kparos:
buvapow
Bua force, effective, often oppressive power, exhibiting itself
m single deeds of violence; dvv. power, natural ability, gen-
eral andinherent ; évépy. working, power in exercise, opera-
tive power; étoue. primarily liberty of action ; then, authority
—eitheras delegated power, or as unrestrained, arbitrary
power; iox. strength, power (esp. physical) as an endowment ;
xpdros, might, relative and manifested power — in the N. T.
chiefly of God ; 7d «pdros rijs tox. Eph. vi. 10, 7 évépy. Tis Suv.
Eph. iii. 7, 4 évépy. rod xp. ris ix. Eph.i.19. Cf. Schmidt
ch. 148; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 16; Mey. on Eph. i. 19.]
Svvapdw, -@: [pres. pass. duvayovpat]; to make strong,
confirm, strengthen: Col. i. 11; [Eph. vi. 10 WH mrg.];
1 aor. édvvapwOnoar, Heb. xi. 34 (RG éved.). (Ps. lxvii.
(Ixviii.) 29; Eccl. x. 10; Dan. ix. 27 [Theod.; Ps. Ixiv.
(Ixy.) 4 Aq.; Job xxxvi. 9 Aq.] and occasionally in eccl.
and Byz. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 605; [W. 26
(25)].) [Comp.: év-duvapoa. | *
Suvderys, -ov, 6, (Svvaua); fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. on;
powerful ; 1. a prince, potentate: Lk. i. 52; used of
God (Sir. xlvi. 5; 2 Mace. xv. 3, 23, ete.; of Zeus, Soph.
Ant. 608), 1 Tim. vi. 15. 2. a courtier, high officer,
royal minister: Acts viii. 27 [A. V. (a eunuch) of great
authority; but see Meyer ad loc.], (Suvdora bapad, Gen.
1A) ss
Suvatéw, -@; (Suvards); to be powerful or mighty; show
one’s self powerful: 2 Co. xiii. 3 (opp. to dobeva) ; to be
able, have power: foll. by an inf., Ro. xiv. 4 L T Tr WH;
2 Co. ix.8 LT Tr WH. Not found in prof. writ. nor
in the Sept.*
Suvarés, -7, -dv, (Ovvapat) ; [fr. Pind. down], Sept. for
3731; able, powerful, mighty, strong; 1. absolutely; a.
mighty in wealth and influence: 1 Co. i. 26; (Rev. vi. 15
Rec.) ; of Suvaroi, the chief men, Acts xxv. 5, (Joseph.
b. j. 1, 12, 4 fKov "Iovdalwy of Suvatoi; Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 1;
Thue. 1,89; Polyb. 9,23, 4). 6 duvards, the preéminently
mighty one, almighty God, Lk. i.49. b. strong in soul:
to bear calamities and trials with fortitude and patience,
2 Co. xii. 10; strong in Christian virtue, 2 Co. xiii. 9;
firm in conviction and faith, Ro. xv. 1. 2. in con-
struction; a. duvards ete with inf., to be able (to do some-
thing; [B. 260 (224); W. 319 (299)]): Lk. xiv. 31; Acts
xi. 17; Ro. iv. 21; xi. 23; xiv.4 RG; 2 Co.ix.8 RG;
2 Tim. i. 12; Tit.i. 9; Heb. xi. 19 (Lehm. 8vvarat) ; Jas.
iii. 2. b. Suvards ev tun, mighty i. e. excelling in some-
thing : ev py K. Adyw, Lk. xxiv. 19; ev Néyous kal epyots,
Acts vii. 22; év ypadais, excelling in knowledge of the
Scriptures, Acts xviii. 24. c. mpds tt, mighty i.e. having
power for something: 2 Co. x. 4. d. neuter Suvarév [in
pass. sense, cf. B. 190 (165) ] possible: ef Suvardv (éort),
Mt. xxiv. 24; xxvi. 39; Mk. xiii. 22; xiv. 35; Ro. xii.
18; Gal. iv. 15; od« Av Suvardy foll. by inf. Acts ii. 24;
duvardv ri €ori tun [B. 190 (165)], Mk. ix. 23; xiv. 36;
Acts xx. 16 ; mapa 6e6 mavra Suvard éort, Mt. xix. 26; Mk.
x. 27; Lk. xviii. 27. 1d duvaréy adtod, what his power
could do, equiv. to riv Svvauw adrod, Ro. ix. 22, cf. W.
§ 34, 2.*
Sivw, dvw; 2 aor. edvy; 1 aor. (in Grk. writ. transi-
tively) éSvca (Mk. i. 32 L Tr WH), cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr.
ii. p. 156 sq.; W. p. 84 (81); B. 56 (49); [Veitch s. vv.];
160
duc eppnvevtoy
to go into, enter; go under, be plunged into, sink in: ir. the
N. T. twice of the setting sun (sinking as it were into the
sea), Mk. i. 82; Lk.iv.40. So times without number in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. on; Sept., Gen. xxviii. 11; Lev. xxii.
7, etc.; Tob. ii. 4; 1 Mace. x. 50. [Comp.: ék-, da-ex-
(-yat), év-, én-ev-, mrap-evo-, émt-duve. | *
Sv0, cenit. indecl. duo (as in Epic, and occasionally in
Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Polyb., al. for dvotv, more common in
Attic [see Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 289 sq.]); dat.
dvai, duciv, ({-of in Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts xxi. 33
(Tr -civ), -civin Mt. xxii. 40; Mk. xvi.12; Lk. xii.52(RG
-ai); Acts xii. 6 (R GL-oi) ; Heb. x. 28; Rev. xi.3 (RG
-ci) ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.98; WH. App. p. 147]—a form not
found in the older and better writ., met with in Hippocr.,
Aristot., Theophr., frequent fr. Polyb. on, for the Attic
dvoiv); acc. dvo (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 210; Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. i. p. 276 sq.; W. § 9, 2 b.; Passow i. p. 729); two:
absol., ovk ért etat Svo, dAAa capé pia, Mt. xix. 6; Mk. x. 8;
dv0 4 tpeis, Mt. xviii. 20; 1 Co. xiv. 29; pets emi duct x. dv0
ém tpiot, Lk. xii. 52; ava and xara vo, two by two [W.
398 (372); 401 (374); B. 30 (26)], Lk. ix.3 [WH om.
Tr br. ava]; x. 1 [WH ava dvo [6v0]; cf. Acta Philip.
§ 36, ed. Tdf. p. 92]; Jn. ii. 6 [apiece]; 1 Co. xiv. 27; dvo
dv0 two and two, Mk. vi. 7 (so, after the Hebr., in Gen.
vi. 19, 20; but the phrase is not altogether foreign even
to the Grk. poets, as Aeschyl. Pers. 981 pupia pupia for
kata pupiadas, cf. W. 249 (234), [ef. Be (88) ]); neut. eis
dvo into two parts, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; with gen.
800 tév pabntav(adrov),Mk. xi. 1; xiv. 13; Lk. xix. 29;
[Mt. xi. 2 RG]; rév olker@v, Acts x. 7. dvo e& adray,
Lk. xxiv. 13 [cf. Bttm. 158 (138); Win. 208 (191)}.
with a noun or pronoun: vo damorgdpevor, Mt. viii. 28.
dv0 paxarpat, Lk. xxii. 38; emi otdparos dv0 paptipav, Mt.
Xvili. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1; dual xupious, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi.
13; eide do ddeAhovs, Mt. iv. 18; preceded by the article,
oi dvo the two, the twain: Mt. xix. 5; Mk. x.8; 1 Co. vi.
16; Eph. v. 31; rods dv0, Eph. ii. 15; ai [Rec. only] dvo
Sia€jxar, Gal. iv. 24; odrou [Lchm. br. odr.] of dv0 vioi pov,
Mt. xx. 21; mepi rav dv0 ddeAPay, Mt. xx. 24; €v ravras
tais Svolv évrodais, Mt. xxii. 40; rods dv0 ixOvas, Mt. xiv.
19; Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16; S00 dyvapia, Lk. x. 35.
Sus, an inseparable prefix conveying the idea of dif fi-
culty, opposition, injuriousness or the like, and
corresponding to our mis-, wn- [Curtius § 278]; opp. to ed.
Svc-Bdcraktos, -ov, (Bacrdtw), hard [A. V. grievous] to
be borne: Mt. xxiii. 4 [T WH txt. om. Tr br. dveBdor.]
and Lk. xi. 46 gopria dua 8aorakra, said of precepts hard
to obey, andirksome. (Sept. Prov. xxvii. 3; Philo, omn.
prob. lib. §5; Plut. quaest. nat. c. 16, 4 p. 915 f.)*
Sucevtepia, -as, 7, (€vrepoy intestine), dysentery, (Lat.
tormina intestinorum, bowei-complaint): Acts xxviii. 8
RG; see the foll. word. (Hippocr. and med. writ.;
Hat., Plat., Aristot., Polyb., al.) *
Sucevrépiov, -ov, To, a later form for ducevrepia, q. v.:
Acts xxviii. 8 LT Tr WH. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 518.*
Sucepphvevtos, -ov, (€punvedw), hard to interpret, diffi-
cult of explanation: Heb.v.11. (Diod. 2, 52; Philo de
somn. § 32 fin.; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) *
vais
[Storts, -ews, 7); 1. a sinking or setting, esp. of the
heavenly bodies; 2. of the quarter in which the sun
sets, the west: Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘ Shorter Conclu-
sion.’ (So both in sing. and in plur.: Aristot. de mund.
3 p. 393°, 17; 4 p. 394°, 21; Polyb. 1, 42, 5 etc.)*]
SbcrKoXos, -ov, (kodov food) ; 1. prop. hard to find
agreeable food for, fastidious about food. 2. difficult
to please, always finding fault; (Eur., Arstph., Xen.,
Plat., al.). 3. univ. difficult (Xen. oec. 15, 10 4 yewp-
yia SvoKondds eort padeiv) : mas SvoKoAdv ott, foll. by acc.
with inf., Mk. x. 24.*
SucKddws, adv., (dvcxodos), [fr. Plato down], with diffi-
culty: Mt. xix. 23); Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24.*
Svopn, -7s, 7, [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], much often-
er in plur. [W. § 27, 3] dvcpai, ai, (Sv@ or dvve, q. v.),
sc. nAiov, the setting of the sun: Lk. xii. 54 [ace. to the
reading of T WH Tr mrg. émi 8. may possibly be un-
derstood of tume (cf. W. 375 sq. (352)); see emi, A. IL;
al. take the prep. locally, over, in, and give dvop. the
meaning which follows ; see emi, A. I. 1b.]; the region of
sunset, the west, [anarthrous, W.121 (115) ]: Rev. xxi. 13;
aro avatodey kal Suopoy, from all regions or nations, Mt.
vill. 11; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29; in Hebr. wow sian,
Josh. i. ‘4, Often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. on, both with
and without 7Alov.*
SurvdyTos, -ov, (voew), hard to be understood: 2 Pet. iii.
16. (ypnopds, Leian. Alex. 54; Diog. Laért. 9, 13 duc-
vonrov te kal duceénynrov; [ Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. 816%,3].)*
Sve pypew, -o: [ pres. pass. dvopnpuodtpac] ; (Svadnuos) ;
to use ill words, defame ; pass. to be defamed, 1 Co. iv. 13
TWH Trmrg. (1 Mace. vii. 41; in Grk. writ. fr. Aes-
chyl. Agam. 1078 down.) *
Svopnpla, -as, 7, both the condition of a Svaodnpos, i. e.
of one who is defamed, viz. ill-repute, and the action of
one who uses opprobrious languag. viz. defamation, re-
proach : 6a Svodnpias k. evpnpias [A. V. by evil report and
good report], 2 Co. vi. 8. (1 Mace. vii. 38; 3 Mace. ii.
26. Dion. H. 6, 48; Plut. de gen. Socr. § 18 p. 587 f.) *
Siw, see dvve.
848exa, oi, ai, ra, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20;
x.1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for dexadvo];
Rev. vii. 5 [RGcef']; xxi. 21, etc.; of dHdexa, the twelve
apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix.
35; x. 32; xi. 11; Mt. xxvi. 14, 20; Lk. xxii. 3, ete.
Bwdexaros, -y, -ov, twelfth : Rev. xxi. 20. [Fr. Hom. on. ]*
SaSexd-hvdrov, -ov, 7d, (fr. dddexa, and dvA7y tribe), the
twelve tribes, used collectively of the Israelitish people, as
consisting of twelve tribes: Acts xxvi.7. (Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 55, 6; Prot. Jac. c.1, 3; Aads 6 SwSexddvdros, Orac.
Sibyll. Cf. Sexapudos, rerpapvuados, Hat. 5, 66; [W. 100
(95)].)*
161
Swpodopia
Sapa, -ros, 76, (S€uw to build) ; 1. a building, house,
(Hom. et sqq.). 2. a part of a building, dining-room,
hall, (Hom. et sqq.). 3. in the Script. equiv. to 13,
house-top, roof [W. 23]: Mt. xxiv. 17; Mk. xiii. 15; Lk.
v.19; xvii. 31. The house-tops of the Orientals were
(and still are) level, and were frequented not only for
walking but also for meditation and prayer: Acts x. 9;
hence emt Sapdrwv, on the house-tops, i. e. in public: Mt.
x. 27; Lk. xii. 35 emi rd dua...
*Iopanr, 2S. xvi. 22.*
Swped,, -as, 7, (Sidepr) ; from [Aeschyl. and] Hat. down;
a gift: Jn. iv. 10; Acts vill. 20; xi. 17; Ro. v. 15; 2 Co.
ix. 15; Heh. vi. 4; 4 xdpes €500n xara 6 pérpov THs Swpeds
Tov Xptorov, according to the measure in which Christ
gave it, Eph. iv. 7; with an epexegetical gen. of the
thing given, viz. rov dyiov mvevdparos, Acts ii. 38; x. 45;
Sixaoovyns, Ro. v. 17 [LU WH Tr mrg. br. r. dap.]; rs
Xaptros tov Oeod, Eph. iii. 7. The ace. dwpedv (prop. as
a gift, gift-wise [ef. W. 230 (216) ; B. 153 (134) ]) is used
adverbially ; Sept. for pI; a. freely, for naught, gratis,
gratuitously: Mt. x. 8; Ro. iii. 24; 2 Co. xi. 7; 2 Th. iii. 8;
Rev. xxi. 6; xxii. 17, (Polyb. 18,17, 7; Ex. xxi. 11; dwpedr
avev apyvpiov, Is. lii. 3). b. by a usage of which as yet.
no example has been noted fr. Grk. writ., without just
cause, unnecessarily: Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 5:
EXxiv. (xxxy.) 19); Gal. ii. 21, (Jobi.9[?]; Ps. xxxiv
(xxxy.) 7 [where Symm. dvatriws]; so the Lat. gratuitus .
Liv. 2, 42 gratuitus furor, Sen. epp. 105, 3 [bk. xviii. ep
2, § 3] odium aut est ex offensa... aut gratwium). [Syn.
see Odua, fin. | *
Swpedy, see dwped.
to present, bestow, (Hes., Pind., Hadt., al.) ;
pass. Ley. vii. 5 (Heb. text vs. 15). But much more
frequently as depon. mid. dwpéopat, -ovwar (Hom. et sqq.) :
1 aor. Swpnodpnv; pt. deOmpnuar; tii rt, Mk. xv. 45;
DERet ates, 4c
Sapnpa, -ros, 70, (Swpéopar) ; a gift, bounty, benefaction :
Ro. v.16; Jas.i. 17. ({Aeschyl.], Soph., Xen., al.) [Cf.
Sopa, fin. | *
Sapov, -ov, ro, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. generally for
lee often also for ANID and Ww; a gift, present: Eph.
ii. 8; Rev. xi. 10; of "gifts offered as an expression of
ieee Whores Whe oye Pionaces and other gifts offered to
God, Mt. v. 23 sq.; viii. 4; xv.5; xxiii. 18 sq.; Mk. vii.
11; Heb. v, 1; viii. 3 sq.; ix. 9; xi. 4; of money cast into
the treasury for the purposes of the temple and for the
support of the poor, Lk. xxi. 1, [4]. [S¥n. see doa, fin. ] *
Swpodopla, -as, 7), (Swpopédpos bringing gifts), ihe offering
of a gift or of gifts: Ro. xv. 31 L Trmrg. cf. Siaxovia, 3.
(Alciphr. 1,6; Pollux 4, 47 [p. 371 ed. Hemst.]; several
times in eccless writ.) *
kat opOadpovs mavrds
Swope, -a:
162
E
éa
%a, an interjection expressive of indignation, or of
wonder mixed with fear, (derived apparently from the
impv. pres. of the verb éay [acc. to others a natural,
instinctive, sound]), freq. in the Attic poets, rare in
prose writ. (as Plat. Prot. p. 314 d.), ha! ah/: Mk. i.
24 RG; Lk. iv. 34; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 32 sq.*
é4y; I. aconditional particle (derived fr. ef dv), which
makes reference to time and to experience, introducing
something future, but not determining, before the event,
whether it is certainly to take place; if, in case, (Lat.
si; Germ. wenn; im Fall, dass; falls; wofern) ; cf., among
others, Hermann ad Viger. p. 832; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2
p. 450 sqq.; W. 291 (273) sq. It is connected 1. with
the Subjunctive, according to the regular usage of the
more ancient and elegant classic writers. a. with the
subjunc. Present: Mt. vi. 22 (€dv odv 6 dpOaryos cou
drAovs 7, if it be the case, as to which I do not know,
that thine eye etc.); ibid. 23; xvii. 20; Lk. x. 6 ; Jn. vii.
17; viii. 54 [RG L mrg.]; ix. 31; xi. 9,10; Acts v. 38;
xiii. 415 Ro. ii. 25 sq.; 1 Co. ix. 165~Gal. v. 2; 1 Tim: i.
8 [not Lchm.]; Heb. xiii. 23; 1 Jn. i. 9; ii. 3, 15 ete.
b. with the subjunc. Aorist, corresponding to the Lat.
fut. perf.: Mt. iv. 9 (€av mpooxuynons por if thou shalt
have worshipped me) ; v. 46; ix. 21; Mk. iii. 24; ix. 50;
Lk. xiv. 84; xvii. 4; xx. 28; Jn. v. 43; xi. 57; Ro. vii. 2;
x. 9; 1 Co. vii. 8, 39; viii. 10; xvi. 10 (Cav €AOn Tupo-
Geos; for although he was already on his way to Cor-
inth, yet some hindrance might still prevent his arriy-
ing) ; 2 Co. ix.4; Gal. vi. 1; Jas. ii. 2; 1 Jn. v. 16 [Lehm.
pres.]; Rev. iii. 20, and often; also in the oratio obliqua,
where the better Grk. writ. use the Optative: Jn. ix. 22;
xi. 57; Acts ix. 2 (W. 294 (276); [cf. B. 224 (193))).
The difference between the Pres. and the Aor. may be seen
especially from the following passages: 2 Tim. ii. 5 édv
&€ kal dOAR tes, ov oTrepavodrat, dv pH) vouiuws aOAnon, 1
Co. xiv. 23 édy ody ovvedOn 1 exkAnoia . . . Kal ravres yAoo-
cats Nadaow, eicé war S€ ididrat 7) Amico, vs. 24 édv Sé
mavres mpopyntevwaw, eiaéAOn Sé tis Gmioros, Mt. xxi. 21
‘av Exnte miotw Kai py StaxpiOjre. Also ei (“quod per
‘se nihil significat praeter conditionem,” Klotz 1. ¢. p.
455) and édy are distinguished in propositions subjoined
the one to the other [W. 296 (277 sq.)]: Jn. xiii. 17 e?
tavra oldare, pakdptot €ore, €ay moire ava, Jn. iii. 12; 1
Co. vii. 36; in statements antithetic, Acts v. 38 sq.; or
parallel, Mk. iii. 24-26. Finally, where one of the evan-
gelists uses e¢ another has éav, but so that each particle
retains its own force, inasmuch as one and the same thing
is differently conceived of by the different minds: Mk.
ix.43 éav oxavdadiCy [-hion L mrg. T WH txt.] 9 xe/p cov,
and vs. 47 éav 6 dpOadpds cov cxavdariln oe, i. e. if so
» J
€ap
be that etc.; on the other hand, Matthew, in xviii. 8 sq.
and vy. 29 sq. concerning the same thing saysei. c. irreg-
ularly, but to be explained as an imitation of the Hebr. DX
which is also a particle of time (cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. s. v.
4), édv with the Subjune. Aor. is used of things which the
speaker or writer thinks will certainly take place, where
érav when, whenever, should have been used: edv tWoa,
Jn. xii. 32; éav ropevOa, Jn. xiv. 3; eav havepo67, 1 Jn.
ii. 28 (LT Tr WH, for érav RG) ; iii. 2; edv axovonre,
Heb. iii. 7 fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8; (€av eioeAOns eis tov
vuppava, Tob. vi. 17 (16) [al. drav]; av aroOdvea, Oarpov
pe, Tob. iv. 3, cf. vs. 4 drav dmobavn, Oaypov airny; for DR
when, Is. xxiv. 13; Am. vil.2). da. sometimes when the
particle is used with the Subj. Aor. the futurity of a thing
is not so much affirmed as imagined, it being known to
be something which never could happen: éay etn 6
movs, if the foot should say, or were to say, 1 Co. xii.
15; éedv €\Ow mpds vyas yoooats Aadoy, 1 Co. xiv. 6,
2. By a somewhat negligent use, met with from the
time of Aristotle on, gay is connected also with the In-
dicative, [cf. Klotz l. ce. p. 468 sqq.; Kiihner § 575
Anm.5; W. 295 (277); B. 221 (191) sq.; Tdf. Proleg.
p- 124 sq.; WH. App. p. 171; Soph. Lex. s. v.; Vin-
cent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. § 77]; and
a. with the indic. Future, in meaning akin, as is well
known, to the subjunc.: [éav dt0 cupdovncovew, Mt.
xviil. 19 T Tr]; éav obrot cuwmnoovor, Lk. xix. 40 LT fr
WH; dav... dd7ynoe, Acts viii. 31 T Tr WH, (édv BeBn-
Ae@oovow adra, Lev. xxii.9); butalso b. with the indie.
Present: eay Saveifere, Lk. vi. 34 Lmrg. Trtxt.; éav
ornxere, 1 Th. iii. 8 T Trtxt. WH; éav re dwoOvncKopey,
Ro. xiv. 8 Lehm. with an indic. Preterite, but one
having the force of a Pres.: éav[Lchm. av] ofSapev, 1 Jn.
v.15 without var. 3. édv joined with other particles;
a. éav € kai but if also, but even if, [A. V. but and if (re-
tained by R. V. in 1 Co.)]; with the Subjunc.: Mt. xviii.
17; 1 Co. vii. 11,28; 2 Tim.ii.5. b. édv wal: Gall. vi.
1. c. édv pn if not, unless, except; with the subjunc.
Present: Mt. x. 13; Lk. xiii. 3 [Lchm. txt. aor.]; Acts
xv. 1 [Rec.]; 1 Co. viii. 8; ix. 16 [RGL mrg. TWH
mrg.]; Jas. ii. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 21; with the subjunc. Aorist :
Mt. vi. 15; xviii. 35; Mk. iii. 27; Jn. iii. 3 ; viii. 24; 1 Co.
xiv. 6 sq. 9; Ro. x.15; [xi. 23 RL]; 2 Tim. ii.5; Rev. ii.
5, 22[R L], and often. with the Indicative pres. : éay pi
morevere, Jn. x. 838 Tdf. Insome passages, although the
particles éav wn retain their native force of unless, if not,
yet so far as the sense is concerned one may translate
them but that, without : Mt. xxvi. 42 (the cup cannot pass
by without my drinking it); ob ydp éorw xpumrdy, éav
pt pavepw6 (Treg.), there is nothing hid, but that it shall
éavTrep
be made manifest (properly, nothing whatever is hid, ex-
cept that it should be made manifest), Mk. iv. 22; ovdes
ear, os adikev oikiay . . . édv 4) XdBy, but that shall re-
ceive (properly, unless he shall receive ... it cannot be
said that any one has left), Mk. x. 29, 30, [ef. B. § 149, 6.
On the supposed use of éay un (ei py) as equiv. to dAda,
cf. Mey. on Mt. xii. 4; Gal. i. 7; ii. 16; Fritzsche on Ro.
xiv. 14 fin.; Ellic. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. ll. cc. See e?,
Il.8¢.B8.] d. éavmep [L Tr separately, eav rep] if only,
if indeed: Heb. iii. 6 (where L br. wep, and T Tr WH
read éav), 14; vi. 3; it occurs neither in the Sept. nor in
the O. T. Apocr. ; on its use in Grk. writ. cf. Klotz, 1. ¢.
p- 483 sq. e. davte... édy Te, sive... sive, whether...
‘or: Ro. xiv. 8; (often in Sept. for ON .. . DN, as Ex. xix.
13; Lev. iii-1; Deut. xviii. 3). Cf. Klotz, |. c. p. 479
sq.; Kiihner § 541; [B. 221 (191)]. f. «dv for kai éay,
seexdv. II. The classic use of the conditional par-
ticle éav also in the contracted form dy (see p. 34” above)
seems to have led the biblical writers of both Testaments
to connect éay with relative pronouns and adverbs in-
stead of the potential particle dv, as és éav [so Tdf. in
12 places], 6 ¢ay [so Tdf. uniformly], etc. (this use
among prof. writ. is very doubtful, cf. W. p. 310 (291);
IB 27(63)))2 Mts-v. 19; x. 14 [RG]; xv. 532-Mk. vi. 22
sq-; Lk. ix. 48 [WH dy]; xvii. 33; Acts vii. 77 RGT];
1 Co. vi. 18; Eph. vi. 8 [RG Ltxt.]; 3 Jn. 5, ete.; dmov
éav, Mt. viii. 19; xxvi.13; Mk. vi.10[L Tr dy]. décdkes
éav, Rev. xi. 6. od éav, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (1 Mace. vi. 36).
xaOo éav, 2 Co. viii. 12 [Tdf. av; doris éav, Gal. v. 10 T
Tr WH; jis éav, Acts iii. 23 Tdf. For many other exx.
see Soph. Lex. s. vy. édv, 3.] In many places the codd.
vary between éay and dy; cf. ay, II. p. 34; [andesp. Tdf.
Proleg. p. 96].
édv-rep, see eav, I. 3 d.
éavrod, -75, -ov, etc. or (contracted) atrod, -js, -od, (see
p- 87); plur. éavrév; dat. -ois, -ais, -ois, etc.; reflexive
pronoun of the 3d person. It is used 1. of the 3d
pers. sing. and plur., to denote that the agent and the
person acted on are the same; as, ow ew eavrdv, Mt.
xxvii. 42; Mk. xv. 31; Lk. xxiii. 35; tyodv éavrdv, Mt.
xxiii. 12, ete. éavr@, éavtdy are also often added to
middle verbs: dveyepioavro <éavrois, Jn. xix. 24 (Xen.
mem. 1, 6, 13 woueioOat Eavta idrov); cf. W. § 38, 6; [B.
§135,6]. Of the phrases into which this pronoun enters
we notice the following: dd’ éavrod, see dé, I. 2 d. aa. ;
80 éavrod of itself, i. e. in its own nature, Ro. xiv. 14 [Tr
L txt. read air.]; ev éavr@, see in diadoyiCerOa, heyeu,
elmeiv. eis éavrov epyecOa to come to one’s self, to a
better mind, Lk. xv. 17 (Diod. 13, 95). xa@ éaurdv by
one’s self, alone: Acts xxviii. 16 ; Jas. ii. 17.
by him i.e. at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2 (Xen. mem. 3, 13, 3).
mpos éaurdv, to himself i.e. to his home, Lk. xxiv. 12
[RG; T om., WH (but with air.) reject, L Tr (but the
latter with adr.) br., the verse]; Jn. xx. 10 [T Tr air.
(see abtod) ]; with [cf. our to] himself, i. e. in his own mind,
spocevxyerOau, Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf. om.], (2 Mace. xi. 13) ;
in the gen., joined with a noun, it has the force of a pos-
sessive pronoun, as rods €avray vexpovs: Mt. viii. 22; Lk.
> lol
map €avT@,
163
‘EBpaios
ix. 60. 2. It serves as reflexive also to the 1st and 2d
pers., as often in classic Greek, when no ambiguity is
thereby occasioned; thus, év éavrois equiv. to év jyiv ad-
trois, Ro. viii. 23; éavrovs equiv. to nas adrovs, 1 Co. xi.
31; ad’ €avrod i. q. dro ceavrod [read by L Tr WH], Jn.
Xviil. 34; €avrdy i. q. ceavrdv [read by L T Tr WH], Ro.
xiii. 9; éavrots for byiv adrois, Mt. xxiii. 31, etc.; ef. Mat-
thiae § 489 II.; W.§ 22,5; [B.§ 127,15]. 3. It is
used frequently in the plural for the reciprocal pronoun
GdAnrwy, GAANAots, GAAHAovs, reciprocally, mutually, one
another: Mt. xvi. 7; xxi.38; Mk. x. 26 [Trmrg. WH
avrov]; xvi. 3; Lk. xx. 5; Eph. iv. 32; Col. iii. 13, 16;
1 Pet. iv. 8, 10; see Matthiae § 489 III. ; Kihnerii. p. 497
sq-; Bnhdy. p. 273; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 13].
édw, -@; impf. etwv; fut. ddow; 1 aor. efaca; fr. Hom.
down; 1. to allow, permit, let: foll. by the inf., ov«
ay etace Svopvynva [T Tr WH -x6jjvac], Mt. xxiv. 43; by
the acc. of the person and the inf., Lk. iv. 41 (ovk eta abra
Aadeiv); Acts xiv. 16; xxiii. 32; xxvii. 32; xxvili.4; 1 Co.
x. 13; by the ace. alone, when the inf. is easily supplied
from the context, ov« elagev avtovs, sc. mopevOjva, Acts
XVi. 7; ovk elwy adrdy, sc. eiveAGeiv, Acts xix. 30; [ef. W.
476 (444) ]. 2. twa, to suffer one to do what he wishes,
not to restrain, to let alone: Rev. ii. 20 Rec.; Acts v. 38
RG; éare sc. adrovs, is spoken by Christ to the apostles,
meaning, ‘do not resist them, let them alone,’ (the fol-
lowing éws rovrov is to be separated from what precedes;
[al. connect the words closely, and render ‘ suffer them
to go even to this extreme’; but cf. Mey. ad loc. ed.
Weiss]), Lk. xxii. 51. 3. To give up, let go, leave:
Tas aykUpas ... elov eis THY Oddaccay, they let down into
the sea [i. e. abandoned; cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 3009* bot. ],
Acts xxvii. 40. [Comp.: mpoo-edo. |*
EBSopqKovra, of, ai, ra, [fr. Hdt. down], seventy: Acts
vii. 14 [here Rec.e!% €Bdounkovramévre]; XXill. 23; xxvii.
37; of EBdopnkovra [éBd. dv0 L br. WH br.], the seventy
disciples whom Jesus sent out in addition to the twelve
apostles: Lk. x.1,17. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Seventy Dis-
ciples. ] *
[éBSopnxovra-dé for €Bdounxovra €&, seventy-six: Acts
xxvii. 37 Rec.*]
€BSopnxovraxis, [Gen. iv. 24], seventy times: €Bdopnkoy-
rdkis émrd, seventy times seven times, i. e. countless times,
Mt. xviii. 22 [cf. W. § 37,5 Note 2; B. 30 (26) and see
énra, fin.; al. (cf. R. V. mrg.) seventy-seven times, see
Mey. ad loc. ].*
[€BSopqxovra-mévre, seventy-five: Acts vil. 14 Rec.e
(Gen. xxv. 7; Ex. xxxix. 6 (xxxviil. 27); 1 Esdr. v. 12).*]
EBSopos, -7, -ov, seventh: In. iv. 52; Heb. iv. 4; Jude
14; Rev. viii. 1; xi. 15, ete. [From Hom. down. ]
’ERép [R* G], more correctly [L T WH]”Efep [on the
accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Treg. E8., cf.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr. § 408; cf. B. IDS Sb We
Heber], 6, Eber or Heber, indeclinable proper name of a
Hebrew: Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24 sq.).*
‘EBpaixés, -7, -6v, Hebrew: Lk. xxiii. 38 (RGL br. Tr
mrg. br.).*
‘EBpaios [WH ’EBp., see their Intr. § 408], -ov, 6, a
‘EBpais
Hebrew (2p a name first given to Abraham, Gen. xiv.
13, afterwards transferred to his posterity descended
from Isaac and Jacob; by it in the O. T. the Israelites
are both distinguished from and designated by foreign-
ers, as afterwards by Pausan., Plutarch, al. The name
is now generally derived from 12 for 17127 13) i. e. of
the region beyond the Euphrates, whence 3} equiv. to
one who comes from the region beyond the Euphrates; Gen.
xiv. 13 Sept. 6 meparns. Cf. Gesenius, Gesch. d. hebr.
Sprache u. Schrift, p. 11 sq.; Thesaurus, ii. p. 987;
Knobel, Volkertafel der,‘Genesis, p. 176 sqq.; Bleek, Kinl.
in d. A. T. ed. 1, p. 73 sq. [Eng. trans. i. 76 sq.]; [B. D.
s.v. Hebrew. For Syn. see Iovdaios.]). Inthe N.T. 1.
any one of the Jewish or Israelitish nation: 2 Co. xi. 22;
Phil. iii. 5. (In this sense Kuseb. h. e. 2, 4, 3 calls Philo,
the Alexandrian Jew, ‘Efpaios, although his education
was Greek, and he had little [if any ] knowledge even of
the Hebrew language; and in Praep. evang. 8, 8, 34 he
applies the same word to Aristobulus, who was both an
Alexandrian, and a Greek-speaking Jew.) 2. Ina nar-
rower sense those are called ‘E8paiou who lived in Pales-
tine and used the language of the country, i. e. Chaldee ;
from whom are distinguished of “EAAnuerai, gq. v- That
name adhered to them even after they had gone over to
Christianity: Acts vi.1. (Philo in his de conf. lingg.§ 26
makes a contrast between ‘EBpaior and jets; and in his
de congr. erud. grat. § 8 he calls Greek 7) nuerépa duddexros.
Hence in this sense he does not reckon himself as a He-
brew.) 3. All Jewish Christians, whether they spoke
Aramaic or Greek, equiv. to muarol é& “EBpatwy; so in the
heading of the Epistle to the Hébrews; called by Euseb.
h. e. 3, 4, 2 of €& “EBpaiwpy dvres. [Cfi. K. Wieseler, Unters.
ii. d. Hebrierbrief, 2te Halfte. Kiel, 1861, pp. 25-30.] *
‘EBpats [WH ’EGp., see their Intr. § 408], -idos, 7, He-
brew, the Hebrew language; not that however in which
the O. T. was written, but the Chaldee (not Syro-Chal-
daic, as it is commonly but incorrectly called; cf. A.
Th. Hoffmann, Grammat. Syriac. p. 14), which at the
time of Jesus and the apostles had long superseded it
in Palestine: Acts xxi. 40; xxii. 2; xxvi. 14; ‘EBpats down,
4 Mace. xii. 7; xvi. 15. [Cf. B. D.s. v. Shemitice Lan-
guages etc.; ib. Am. ed.s.v. Lang. of the New Test.]*
‘EBpaiort [WH ’EBp., see their Intr. § 408], adv.,
(€Bpaifw), in Hebrew, i. e. in Chaldee (see the foregoing
word and reff.) : Jn. v. 2; xix. 13,17, 20; [xx. 16 T Tr
WH ULbr.]; Rev. ix.11; xvi. 16. [Sir. prol. line 13.]*
éyy{o; impf. #yyfov; Attic fut. éyyd (Jas. iv. 8 [Bttm.
37 (32); W. § 13, 1 ¢.]); 1 aor. #yyoa; pf. WyyeKa }
(éyy’s); in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. and Diod. on; Sept. for
wa) and 2p. 1. trans. to bring near, to join one thing
to another: Polyb. 8, 6, 7; Sept., Gen. xlviii. 10; Is. v.
8. 2. intrans. to draw or come near, to approach;
absol., Mt. xxi. 34; Lk. xviii. 40; [xix. 41]; xxi. 28;
xxii. 1; xxiv. 15; Acts vii. 17; xxi. 33; xxiii. 15; [Heb.
x. 25]; pf. ityyexe has come nigh, is at hand: § BaowX. rod
Geot, Mt. iii. 2; iv. 17; x. 7; Mk.i.15; Lk. x.11; with
the addition éd’ tpas, vs. 9; 9 épnywors, Lk. xxi. 20; 4
é&pa, Mt. xxvi. 45; 6 mapadiSovs pe, Mt. xxvi. 46; [Mk.
164
eyryts
xiv. 42 (where Tdf. #yyev)]; 6 xaupos, Lk. xxi. 8; 9
npepa, Ro. xiii. 12; ro réAos, 1 Pet. iv. 7; 1) Tapovala Tov
kupiov, Jas. v. 8. Construed with the dat. of the person or
the place approached: Lk. vii. 12; xv. 1, 25; xxii. 47;
Acts ix. 3; x.9; xxii. 6; éyyiCew r@ Oe (in Sept. used esp.
of the priests entering the temple to offer sacrifices or to
perform other ministrations there, Ex. xix. 22; xxxiv. 30;
Lev. x. 3, etc.): to worship God, Mt. xv. 8 Ree., fr. Is.
xxix. 13; to turn one’s thoughts to God, to become ac-
quainted with him, Heb. vii. 19 ; Jas. iv. 8; 6 Beds eyyifer
rwi, God draws near to one in the bestowment of his
grace and help, Jas. iv.8. oll. by ets and the acc. of the
place: Mt. xxi. 1; Mk. xi.1; Lk. xviii. 35; xix. 29; xxiv.
28; [foll. by aps w. the dat., Lk. xix. 37, see B. § 147, 28;
al. regard this as a pregn. constr., cf. W. §§ 48, e.; 66,
2d.]; péxpe Gavdrov #yyice, to draw nigh unto, be at the
point of, death, Phil. ii. 30 (éyyifeuw eis @avarov, Job xxxiii.
22) ; with an adv. of place, dou kAémtns ovk eyyi¢e, Lk.
xii. 33. [Comp.: mpoo-eyyiCw. | *
[éyyiore, neut. plur. superl. (fr. éyyis) as adv., nearest,
next: WH (rejected) mrg. in Mk. vi. 36 (al. cvcA@).*]
éy-ypado [T WH evyp., see ev, ILI. 3]: pf. pass. eyyé-
ypaupar; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; to engrave ; in-
scribe, write in-or on: ti, pass. with dat. of the means
[with] and foll. by ev with dat. of the place (in minds,
tablets), 2 Co. iii. 2,3; to record, enrol: ra dvopara, pass.
Tks 0 Jira WV Ee
€yyvos, -ov, 6, 7, a surety, (Cic. and Vulg. sponsor):
kpetrrovos Suabykns éyyvos, he by whom we get full assur-
ance of the more excellent covenant made by God with
us, and of the truth and stability of the promises con-
nected with it, Heb. vii. 22. (2 Macc. x. 28; Sir. xxix.
15 sq. Xen. vect. 4,20; Aeschin. Epp. 11,12 p. 128 a.;
Aristot. oec. 2, 22 [vol. ii. p. 1350*, 19], Polyb., Diod., al.)*
éyyts, adv., (fr. €v and yviov [limb, hand], at hand; [but
rather allied w. dyxt, dyxe, anzius, anguish, etc.; see
Curtius § 166; Vaniéek p. 22]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept.
for INP; near ; 1. of Place and position; a.
prop.: absol. Jn. xix. 42, [ef. also 20 GL T Tr WH (but
see below)]; with gen. (Matthiae § 339, 1 p. 812; W.
195 (183); [471 (439); B. § 132, 24]), Lk. xix.11; Jn.
lil. 23; vi. 19, 23; xi. 18, 54; xix. 20 [Rect., but see above];
Acts i. 12; with dat. (Matthiae § 386, 6; Kiihner § 423,
13; [Jelf § 592, 2]), Acts ix. 38; xxvii. 8. b. trop-~
ically; of éyyus, those who are near of access to God i.e.
Jews, and oi paxpay, those who are alien from the true
God and the blessings of the theocracy, i. e. Gentiles:
Eph. ii. 17 (cf. Is. lvii. 19) ; eyybs yiverOa, to be brought
near, sc. to the blessings of the kingdom of God, Eph. ii.
13, (so with the Rabbins not infrequently to make nigh
is equiv. to to make a proselyte, cf. Wetstein ad l.c.;
[Schéttgen, Horae ete. i. 761 sq.; Valck. Schol. i. 363]) ;
éyyis cov Td pyud eorw, near thee i. e. at hand, already,
as it were, in thy mind, Ro. x. 8 fr. Deut. xxx. 14, [cf.
B. § 129,11; W. 465 (434)]. 2. of Time; concern-
ing things imminent and soon to come to pass: Mt. xxiv.
32; xxvi. 18; Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 80, 31; Jn. ii. 13;
vi.4; vil. 2; xi. 55; Rev.i. 3; xxii.10; of the near ad-
eryrybrepov
vent of persons: 6 kuptos éyyvs, of Christ’s return from
heaven, Phil. iv. 5 (in another sense, of God in Ps. exliv.
(exlv.) 18); with the addition éi @vpas, at the door,
Mt. xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; éyyis kardpas, near to being
cursed, Heb. vi. 8; dpaviopod, soon to vanish, Heb. viii.
13.*
éyyétepov, neut. of the compar. éyyirepos (fr. éyyis),
used adverbially, nearer: Ro. xiii. 11.*
éyelpm; fut. éyep@; 1 aor. jyepa; Pass., pres. éyeipo-
pa, impv. 2 pers. sing. éye(pov (Mk. ii. 9 Tr WH), Lk.
viii. 54 (where L Tr WH é@yewpe), 2 pers. plur. éyeipeade;
pf. éynyeppac; 1 aor. nyépOnv [cf. B. 52 (45); W. § 38,
1]; 1 fut. éyep@joopar; Mid., 1 aor. impv. éyepar Ree. ;
but, after good codd., Grsb. has in many pass. and lately
LT Tr WH have everywhere in the N. T. restored
eyetpe, pres. act. impv. used intransitively and employed as
a formula for arousing ; properly, rise, i. e. wp / come ! cf.
aye; so in Kur. Iph. A.624; Arstph. ran. 340; cf. Fritzsche
on Mk. p. 55; [B. 56 (49), 144 (126) sq.; Kihner § 373,
2]; Sept. generally for yy and npn; to arouse, cause
to rise ; 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Homer down, to arouse
from sleep, to awake: Acts xii. 7; [Mk. iv. 38 T Tr WH];
pass. fo be awaked, wake up, [A. V. arise, often including
thus the subseq. action (cf. 3 below) ]: Mt. xxv. 7; Mk. iv.
27; [amd rod Urvov, Mt.i. 24 LT Tr WH); éyepOeis with
the impv. Mt. ii. 13, 20; with a finite verb, Mt. ii. 14, 21;
vili. 26; [ Lk. viii. 24 RG L Tr mrg.]; éyeipeoOe, Mt. xxvi.
46; Mk. xiv. 42. Metaph. é& trvov éyepOjnvat, to arise
from a state of moral sloth to an active life devoted to
God, Ro. xiii. 11; likewise é¢yeupe [Rec. -par] arise, 6
cabevSov, Eph. v. 14. 2. to arouse from the sleep of
death, to recall the dead to life: with vexpovs added, Jn.
v.21; Acts xxvi. 8; 2Co.i. 9. yeupe [Rec. -par] arise,
Mk. v. 41; pass. éyeipov, Lk. viii. 54[RGT]; éyépOnte,
arise from death, Lk. vii. 14; éyeipovrat ot vexpot, Mt. xi.
Dem icavit 22) xx. 35 LiConxv. 15, 16,<29, 32) s.xxvi.
19); éyetpew ex vexp@v, from the company of the dead
[ef. W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78)], Jn. xii. 1,9; Acts iii. 15 ;
ivelOsxii. 30; Ro. iv. 24+ vill. 11; x. 9;-Gal.1. 1;40ph.
ie20neColei~t2% 1 Th. 1105 Heb. xi..195 A. Pet. 1521);
pass., Ro. vi. 4, 9; vii. 4; 1 Co. xv. 12, 20; Jn. il. 22; xxi.
14; Mk. vi. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. ex vexp.]; Lk. ix. 7;
[Mt. xvii. 9 L T Tr WH txt.]; do rév vexpov, Mt. xiv.
2; xxvii. 64; xxviii. 7, (vexpov ex Oavarov kai €& ddou, Sir.
“xviii. 5; for VPu, 2 K. iv. 31); eyeipew simply: Acts
v. 30; x. 40; xiii. 37; 1 Co. vi. 14; 2Co.iv. 14; pass., Mt.
xvi. 21; xvii. 23 [L WH mrg. dvaornoerac]; [xx.19 T Tr
txt. WH txt.]; xxvi. 32; xxvii.63; Mk. [vi. 16 T WH
(see above) ]; xvi. 6; Lk. xxiv. 6 [WH reject the clause ],
84; Ro. iv. 25; 1 Co. xv. 4, ete. 3. in later usage gen-
erally to cause to rise, raise, from a seat, bed, etc.; pass.
and mid. to rise, arise; used a. of one sitting: éyei-
pera [L. Tr WH nyép6n] raxv, Jn. xi. 29, cf. vs. 20; pres.
act. imperative éyeipe (see above), Mk. x. 49 [not Rec. ],
ef. vs. 46 ; hence (like the Hebr. 01P, Gen. xxii. 3; 1 Chr.
xxii. 19),in the redundant manner spoken of s. v. dviornus,
II. 1 ¢. it is used before verbs of going, ete.: éyepbeis
nxodovbe [-noev RG] aire, Mt. ix. 19; &yeupe [R G -pac]
165
eyKalvia
kal wéerpynoov, Rev. xi. 1. b. of one reclining : éye(perau
€k Tov Seimvov, Jn. xiii. 4; eyeipeode, Jn. xiv. 31. c. of
one lying, to raise up : iyeipev adrov, Acts x. 26; éeyépOnre
arise, Mt. xvii. 7; &yetpe (see above) Acts iii. 6 [L Tr
txt. br.]; nyép6n ard ths yjs he rose from the earth,
Acts ix. 8; to [raise up i. e.] draw out an animal from a
pit, Mt. xii. 11. d. of one ‘down’ with disease, lying
sick: act., Mk. ix. 27; Acts iii. 7; €yEpet avTov 6 KUptos,
will cause him to recover, Jas. v. 15; pass. Mt. viii. 15,
éyetpe ([ Rec. -pat, so Grsb. (doubtfully in Mt.) ], see above)
arise: Mt. ix.5; Jn.v. 8; Acts iii. 6 [T WH om. Tr br.].
4. To raise up, produce, cause to appear; a. to cause to
appear, bring before the public (any one who is to attract
the attention of men): #yepe TO “Iopayd owripa, Acts
xill. 23 Rec.; #yeupev adrvis tov Aaveld eis Bacidéa, Acts
xlil. 22 (so D'pi3, Judg. ii. 18; iii. 9,15); pass. éye/pouar,
to come before the public, to appear, arise: Mt. xi. 11; xxiv.
11, 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Lk. vii.16; Jn. vii. 52 [cf. W. 266
(250); B. 204 (177)]; contextually, to appear before a
judge: Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31. -b. emi twa to raise up,
incile, stir up, against one; pass. to rise against: Mt. xxiv.
7; Mk. xiii. 8; Lk.xxi.10. ce. to raise up i. e. cause to
be born: rékva revi, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; Képas owrnpias,
Lk. i. 69 (see dviornus, I. c. eEaviornus, 1); Odi rots
Seapots pov, to cause affliction to arise to my bonds, i. e.
the misery of my imprisonment to be increased by trib
ulation, Phil. i. 16 (17) LT Tr WH... of buildings
to raise, construct, erect: tov vady, Jn. ii. 19 sq. (so DPN
Deut. xvi. 22; 1 K. xvi. 32. Aelian. de nat. an. 11, 10,
Joseph. antt. 4, 6,5; Hdian. 3, 15, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.]; 8, 2,12
[5 ed. Bekk.]; Lcian. Pseudomant. § 19; Anthol. 9, 696.
1 Esdr. v. 43 ; Sir. xlix.13; Lat. excito turrem, Caes. b. g.
5, 40; sepulcrum, Cic. lege. 2, 27,68). [Ammonius: dya-
ornvar kal eyepOnvar Siapéper dvagrjvar pev yap ent
épyov, éeyepOnvar be €& Umvov; cf. also Thom. Mag.
ed. Ritschl p. 14, 10 sq. But see exx. above. Comp.:
6u-, €&-, en-, ovr-eyelpa. |
eyepors, -ews, 7, (€yeipw), arousing, excitation: rod Ovpod,
Plat. Tim. p. 70 ¢.; a rising up, Ps. exxxviil. (cxxxix.)
2; resurrection from death: Mt. xxvii. 53.*
éyxaderos [T WH eév., see év, HI. 3], -ov, 6, 7, (eyxabt-
nus [to send down in (secretly) ]), suwborned to lie in
wait; a lier-in-wait, spy, [ef. Lat. insidiator; Eng. insid-
ious]: used in Lk. xx. 20 of one who is suborned by
others to entrap a man by crafty words. (Plat. Ax. p.
368 e.; Dem. p. 1483, 1; Joseph. b. j.6, 5, 2; Polyb. 13,
5, 1, al.; Sept., Job [xix. 12]; xxxi. 9.)*
éykatvia [T WH év., see ev, III. 3], -wv, ra, (fr. év and
xa.vés) ; only in bibl. and ecel. writ., [on the plur. cf. W.
§ 27, 3; B. 23 (21)]; dedication, consecration; thus in 2
Esdr. vi. 16,17; Neh. xii. 27 for 43); in particular,
[Vulg. encaenium i. e. renovation], an annual feast cele-
brated eight days beginning on the 25th of Chislev (mid-
dle of our December), instituted by Judas Maccabaeus
[B. c. 164] in memory of the cleansing of the temple from
the pollutions of Antiochus Epiphanes (ai jépae éyxar-
viopod Tod Ovovaornpiov, 1 Mace. iv. 59): Jn. x.22. Cf.
Win. RWB. [also Riehm, HWB.] s. v. Kirchweihfest ;
PA /
éyKxawilSw
Ochler in Herzog iv. p. 389; Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 54;
iv. 52; Dillmann in Schenkel iii. 534 sq.; [BB.DD.
(esp. Kitto) s. v. Dedication, Feast of the].*
éy-cawwlto [T WH eévk., see év, LI. 3]: 1 aor. évexainoa;
pf. pass. éykexaivicpat; a word exclusively bibl. and eccl.
[W. 33]; to innovate,1. e. 1. torenew: 2 Chr. xv. 8.
2. to do anew, again: onpeia, Sir. xxxiil. (xxxvi.) 6.
3. to initiate, consecrate, dedicate, (Deut. xx. 5; 1 K.
viii. 63; 1S. xi. 14, etc.): Stadqxnv, Heb. ix. 18; 6ddy,
Heb. x. 20.*
éy-kakéw, -@ [(see below); 1 aor. évexdxnaa]; (kakds) ;
[prop. to behave badly in; hence] to be weary in any-
thing, or fo lose courage, flag, faint: adopted by L T Tr
WH in place of R G éxxaxéo (q. v-) in Lk. xviii. 1; 2 Co.
iv. 1,16; Gal. vi. 9; Eph. iii. 13; 2 Th. iii. 13 — except
that T WH write évk. in Lk. xviii. 1; Gal. vi. 9; Eph.
iii. 13; so WH in 2 Th. iii. 13, also; see ev, IIL. 3; [cf.
Tdf.’s note on 2 Co. iv. 1; Meyer ibid., who thinks that
éxx. may have been a colloquial form. See the full exhi-
bition of the usage of the Mss. given by Dr. Gregory in
his Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8, p. 78.] (ound a few times in
Symmachus [Gen. xxvii. 46; Num. Xxi. 5; Is. vii. 16;
also Prov. iii. 11 Theod.]; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 2, 2; in
prof. writ. only in Polyb. 4, 19, 10 rd wéurrew ras BonOeias
évexaxnoayv they culpably neglected to send aid, [add
Philo de confus. lings. § 13 (Mang. i. 412, 36) ov« éxka-
Kovpevos exvauOny |.)*
éy-kahéw [see ev, IIT. 3] -6; fut. éyxadéow; impf. évexd-
Aouy; [ pres. pass. eykadoduat]; prop. to call (something) in
some one (ey [i. e. prob. in his case ; or possibly, as rooted
in him]}); hence, to call to account, bring a charge against,
accuse: as in classic Grk. foll. by dat. of the person [cf.
W. § 30, 9 a.], Acts xix. 38; xxiii. 28, (Sir. xlvi. 19) ; xara
with gen. of the pers. to come forward as accuser against,
bring a charge against: Ro. viii. 33. Pass. to be accused
(cf. B. § 134, 4, [§ 133, 9; yet cf. Mey. on Acts as below,
W.u.s.]); with gen. of the thing: ordoews, Acts xix.
40, (doeBelas és tov TiBépiov eyxAnOeis, Dio Cass. 58, 4;
act. with dat. of the pers. and gen. of the thing, Plut.
Arist. 10,9; see W.u.s.; Matthiae § 369); mepi rov-
Twv, Gv eycadodpat, unless this is to be resolved into rept
router & etc., acc. to the well-known construction éyka-
Aety tri mt, Acts xxvi. 2; mepi twos (act. Diod. 11, 83)
Acts xxiii. 29; xxvi. 7, [B. § 133, 9]. (In Grk. writ. fr.
Soph. and Xen. down.) [Syn. see xarnyopéa, fin.] *
€y-kata-helrw [Acts ii. 27, 31, TWH évc.; T also in
Ro. ix. 29, see his note and cf. év, III. 3]; [impf. eykare-
Aecrov (WH txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 10, 16)]; fut. eyxaranelyo ;
2 aor. €yxarédumov; Pass., [pres. éyxatadelmopat]; 1 aor..
éyxareheipOny; Sept. for ay; 1. to abandon, desert,
(ev equiv. to &v rw, in some place or condition), i. e. to
leave in straits, leave helpless, (colloq. leave in the lurch) :
rivd, Mt. xxvii. 46 and Mk. xv. 34 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2;
Heb. xiii. 5; pass. 2 Co. iv. 9; after the Hebr. ay with
5, twa es ddou [or Env], by forsaking one to let him go
into Hades, abandon unto Hades, Acts ii. 27,31 (not R).
to desert, forsake : twa, 2 Tim. iv. 10, 16; THY EmLTUVAywynY,
Heb. x. 25. 2. io leave behind among, to leave surviv-
166
eyKparela
ing: jiv oméppa, Ro. ix. 29 fr. Is. i. 9. (Hes. opp. 376;
Thuc., sqq.) *
éy-kat-ouxew [T WH eévx., see ev, II. 3], -@; to dwell
among : év avrois among them, 2 Pet. ii. 8. (Very rare
in prof. writ. as [Hdt. 4, 204]; Eur. frag. [188] ap. Dion
Chrys. or. 73 fin.; Polyb. 18, 26, 13.) *
éy-Kkavxdopar [T WH evx., see ev, III. 3]; to glory in:
foll. by év with dat. of the obj. (Ps. li. (lii-) 3; xevi. (xcvii.)
7; ev. (evi.) 47), 2Th.i.4 LTTr WH. (With simple
dat. of thing in eccl. writ. and Aesop’s Fables.) *
éy-kevtpttw [T WH evk., see ev, III.3]: 1 aor. everew
tpica; Pass., 1 aor. évexevtpioOnv ; 1 fut. eykevtpio Onc opat
to cut into for the sake of inserting a scion; to inoculate,
ingraft, graft in, (Aristot. ap. Athen. 14, 68 [p. 653 d.J;
Theophr. h. p. 2, 2,5; Antonin. 11, 8): twa, Ro. xi. 17,
19, 23, 24 [cf. W. § 52, 4,5]; in these pass. Paul likens
the heathen who by becoming Christians have been ad-
mitted into fellowship with the people for whom the
Messianic salvation is destined, to scions from wild trees
inserted into a cultivated stock ; [cf. Beet on vs. 24;
B. D. s. v. Olive ].*
éykAnpa. [see év, III. 3], -ros, rd, (€yxadew), accusation :
the crime of which one is accused, Acts xxv. 16; €yxAnya
éxew, to have laid to one’s charge, be accused of a crime,
Acts xxiii. 29. (Often in Attic writ. fr. Soph. and Thue.
on.) *
ee see katnyopéw; cf. Isoc. 16, 2 Tas wey yap Slkas
brép Tay iSlwy eyKANMAaTwY AayxavouT, Tas BE KATNYO-
plas tmép tay Ths méAEws TMpayudtwy mo.ovyTat, Kal TrElw
xpdvov diatpiBovor Toy matépa wov bia BaAAovTes F KTA.|
éy-KopBoopar [see ev, III. 3], -odpwar: [1 aor. mid. évexop-
Boodunv]; (fr. év and xopSde to knot, tie, and this fr.
xopBos knot, band, (Germ. Schleife), by which two things
are fastened together), to fasten or gird on one’s self; the
éyxéuB8epua was the white scarf or apron of slaves, which
was fastened to the girdle of the vest [éfpis], and dis-
tinguished slaves from freemen; hence 1 Pet. v. 5 ray
tarewopp. ¢ykouSwoacde, gird yourselves with humility
as your servile garb (€yxéuB@pa) i. e. by putting on humil-
ity show your subjection one to another. That this idea
lies in the phrase is shown by C. F. A. Fritzsche, with his
usual learning, in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 259 sqq.*
éy-xomrt [WH évx. T éxk., see ev, IIT. 3], -7s, 9, (eyxért),
properly, a@ cutting (made in the road to impede an en-
emy in pursuit [(?)], hence), a hindrance: 1 Co. ix. 12.
(Diod. 1, 32; Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. p. 157, 15 (22) ;
Longin. de sublim. 41, 3; [al.].)*
éy-k6rrw [in Acts T WH évk., so T in 1 Pet. where R
exk.; see év, ITI. 3]; 1 aor. évexowa; Pass., [pres. éyxdmro-
pac]; impf. évexomrduny; to cut into, to impede one’s course
by cutting off his way; hence univ. to hinder (Hesych.:
€urodiC@, Siaxwdvw) ; with dat. of the obj., Polyb. 24, 1,
12; in the N. T. with ace. of the obj., 1 Th. ii. 18; foll.
by inf., Gal. v. 7 (see dvaxorrw); inf. preceded by roa,
Ro. xv. 22; eis 7d pr) eyxdrrecOat ras mpocevyas tpay, that
ye be not hindered from praying (together), 1 Pet. iii.
7; 1. q.to detain [A. V. to be tedious unto] one, Acts xxiv.
4 (cf. Valcken. Schol. i. 600 sq.].*
éykparaa [see ev, III. 3], -as, 9, (€yxparns), self-control,
eyKpatevopas
Lat. continentia, temperantia, (the virtue of one who mas-
ters his desires and passions, especially his sensual ap-
petites): Acts xxiv. 25; Gal. v. 23 (22); 2 Pet. i. 6.
(Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sir. xviii. 29; 4 Mace. v. 34.) *
éykpatevouar [see ev, III. 3]; depon. mid.; to be self
controlled, continent (€yxparns) ; to exhibit self-government,
conduct one’s self temperately: [used absol. Gen. xiii.
30]; with dat. of respect, 77 yAooon, Sir. xix. 6 var.;
wavra, in everything, every way, 1 Co. ix. 25 (ina figure
drawn from athletes, who in preparing themselves for
the games abstained from unwholesome food, wine, and
sexual indulgence) ; ov« éyxpareveoOat, said of those who
cannot curb sexual desire, 1 Cc. vii. 9. Though this
word does not occur in the earlier Grk. writ. that have
come down to us [exc. in Aristot.eth. Eudem. 2, 7 p.
1223°, 13 ed. Bekk.], yet its use is approved of by Phry-
nichus ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 25].*
éykparns [see ev, III. 3], -és, (kpdros) ; 1. prop.
equiv. to 6 év kparet dy, strong, robust: Aeschyl., Thuc.,
sqq. 2. having power over, possessed of (a thing),
with a gen. of the object ; so fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down.
3. mastering, controlling, curbing, restraining : appodiciay,
Xen. mem. 1, 2,1; Hdovqs, ibid. 4, 5, 10; éavrod, Plat. ;
absol. (without a gen.), controlling one’s self, temperate,
continent, ([ Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 4 p. 1146", 10 sqq.]; Sir.
xxvi. 15; Sap. viii. 21; Philo de Jos. § 11): Tit. i. 8.*
éy-kpivo [T WH ev., see ev, III. 3]: [1 aor. évéxpwa] ;
to reckon among, judge among: twa tum, to judge one
worthy of being admitted to a certain class [A. V. to
number with], 2 Co. x.12. (From Xen. and Plato down.) *
éy-Kpittw: 1 aor. évexpuya; to conceal in something,
ti els re (Diod. 3, 63 ; Apollod. 1, 5,1 § 4); contextually,
to mingle one thing with another: Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii.
21 here T Tr WH éxpuwev. (ri rux, Hom. Od. 5, 488.) *
éykvos [WH érk., see ev, III. 3.], -ov, for the more
usual éeyxvpoyr, (fr. €v and kiw), big with child, pregnant:
Lk. ii. 5. (Hdt.1, 5 ete.; Diod. 4, 2; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,
33.) *
éy-xplw [see ev, III. 3]: 1 aor. act. impv. éyypicov, mid.
(in T Tr) &yxptoae [but L WH 1 aor. act. infin. éyxpioa
(Grsb. éyxpica ; cf. Veitch s. v. ypia, fin.)]; to rub in,
besmear, anoint ; Mid. to anoint for one’s self: robs dpOad-
povs, Rev. iii. 18 [cf. Bttm. 149 sq. (131) ; W. § 32, 4 a.].
(Tob. vi. 9; xi. 7; Strab., Anthol., Epict., al.)*
éyo, gen. €uod, enclitic pov; dat. éuoi, enclitic pot; acc.
ene, enclitic pe; plur. ques, etc.; personal pronoun, J.
1. The nominatives éya and nets, when joined to a verb,
generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis,
as Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (éyo pev... 6 dé);
Mt. iii. 14 (eyo. . . Zy@, kai ov) ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often ;
jets, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; jpets x. of bapi-
caiot, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are
used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them,
as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2;
Lk. vii. 27; cf. B. § 129, 12. dod eye, 37, behold me,
here am I: Acts ix. 10 (1 S. iii. 8). éya, like "38, Jam:
Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [cf. W. 585 (544) ; B. 125 (109)].
2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and acc.
167
edadilo
are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with
prepositions: €umpoodev pov, Jn. i. 15; éaicw pov, Mt.
iil. 11; ioxupdrepds pov, ibid.; ris pou A yaro, Mk. v. 31;
Aéyer pou, Rev. v. 5; dpynonrai pe, Mt. x. 33; Lk. xii. 9,
(on the accent in these expressions cf. W. § 6, 3; [Lip-
sius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 59 sqq.; Lob. Path. Elementa
li. p. 323 sq.; Tdf. N.T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. xi. sq.; ed. 8
p- 104]); but d¢ euod, kar’ éuod, mpd euod, etc., ody, év pol,
mept, Ou’, €m’, kar’, eis éué. ‘The only exception is mpds, to
which the enclitic pé is generally joined, Mt. xxv. 36;
Mk. ix. 19, and very often; very rarely mpés éyé, Jn.
vi. 37%, and acc. to L T Tr WH in Acts xxii. 8, 13;
xxiv. 19; [also Acts xxiii. 22 T Tr WH; Jn. vi. 35 and
45 T Tr txt. WH; Lk.i.43 TWH; Mt. xix. 14; Jn. vi.
37°, 65, Tdf.; Jn. vi. 44 Tr txt. WH mrg.; 1 Co. xvi. 11
L Tr; but mpés pe, Mt. iii. 14 Tdf. and xi. 28 Grsb.; cf.
Lipsius u. s. p. 61 note]. Moreover, the full forms éyov,
€yol, éwe are used in case of emphasis or antithesis; thus,
épov, Lk. x. 16 ; ewoi, Jn. vii. 23; x. 38, etc.; éué, Mk. xiv.
7; dn. vii. 7, ete. 3. Asin classic Greek, od and yay
are very often used for the possessive pronouns éuds and
nuérepos [B. § 127, 21]; and when so used, a. they are
generally placed after their substantives, as 6 oikés pov, 9
(w7 jpav, etc. — the fuller form éyod only for the sake of
distinction or antithesis [cf. B. § 127, 22], as pnrépa adrod
kal énov, Ro. xvi. 13; micrews tay te Kai épod, Ro. i. 12.
But b. they are sometimes placed before substantives,
even which have the article, when no emphasis resides
in the pron. or antithesis is involved in its use [W. § 22,
7N.1; B.u.s.]: pov rods Adyous, Mt. vii. 24, 26; even
before prepositions, pou td thy oréynv, Mt. viii. 8; less
frequently ney, as quay tv médAw, Acts xvi. 20; it is
prefixed for emphasis in jay 76 roXlirevpa, Phil. iii. 20,
cf. W. u. s.; Rost § 99, 4 p. 452 sqq. 7th ed. adduces a
multitude of exx. fr. Grk. auth.; [cf. Kriiger, § 47, 9, 12
who states the rule as follows: when joined to a subst.
having the art. the reflexive gen., with avrod ipsius,
and dAAnAoy, requires the attributive position, the
personal gen., and atdrod ejus, the partitive posi-
tion]. 4. ri éyol (npty) Kat col (ipiv); what have 1
(we) to do with thee (you) ? [cf. B. 138 (121); W. 211
(198); 585 (544) ]: Mt. viii. 29; Mk. i. 24; v. 7; Lk. viii.
28; Jn.ii.4; Heb. 32) -nn, Judg. xi. 12; 2K. iii. 13,
2S. xvi. 10; 2 Chr. xxxv. 21; 1 Esdr. i. 24; also in
classic Greek; cf. Gell. n. a. 1, 2; Epict. diss. 2, 9, 16;
ri npiv Kk. avT@, ibid. 1,1, 16; ri €pot Kai avrois, ibid. 1, 27,
13; 22,15. ri yap por, what does it concern me? what
have I to do ete.: 1 Co. v.12; ef. Bos, Ellipses Graec. p.
599, ed. Schaefer; Buhdy. p. 98; Kruger § 48, 3, 9;
Kiihner ii. 364 sq.; [B. as above, also 394 (337); W.
586 (545)].
Baditw: Attic fut. eédagid [B. 37 (32); W.§ 13,1 ¢.];
(see ¢Sapos) ; to throw to the ground,—both of cities,
buildings, to raze, level with the earth, and of men; in
both applications in Lk. xix. 44 [by zeugma (?) cf. W.
§66,2e.]. (Ps. cxxxvi. (cxxxvii.) 9; Is. iii. 26; Ezek.
xxxi. 12; Hos. xiv. 1 (xiii. 16); Am. ix. 14 [Ald.]; rare in
prof. writ., as [Aristot. probl. 23, 29]; Polyb. 6, 33, 6.)*
edagos
> . ’
%ados, -eos (-ous), rd, bottom, base, ground: minrew els | ‘ gentile’).
ro aos, Acts xxii. 7. (Sept. ; in class. writ. fr. Hom.
down.) *
€Spatos, (rarely fem. -aia [W. § 11, 1]), -atov, (édpa seat,
chair) ; 1. sitting, sedentary, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2:
firm, immovable, steadfast, (Eur., Plat., al.); in the N. at
metaph., of those who are fixed in purpose: 1 Co. xv.
58; Col. i. 23; &oryxev ev rH xapdia, 1 Co. vii. 37.*
Spalwpa, -ros, 76, (€Spaidw to make stable, settle firmly),
a stay, prop, support, (Vulg. firmamentum) : 1 Tim. iii. 15
[A.V. ground]. (Eccl. writ.)*
"Etextas [WH ‘E¢-; L -xeias, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 85],
(MPN strength of Jehovah, i. e. strength given by Je-
hovah; Germ. Gotthard; Sept.’E¢exias), [gen. -ov, ef. B.
17 (16) no. 8], Hezekiah, king of Judah (2 K. xviii. 1
sqq-; xx. 1 sqq.; Is. xxxviii. 1 sqq.): Mt. i. 9, 10.*
€0cho-Opnokela [T WH -xia, see I, ¢], -as, 9, (fr. €6€do
and Opnoxela, q. v. [ef. W.100 (95) ]), voluntary, arbitrary
worship, (Vulg. superstitio), [A. V. will-worship], i. e.
worship which one devises and prescribes for himself,
contrary to the contents and nature of the faith which
ought to be directed to Christ ; said of the misdirected
zeal and practices of ascetics: Col. ii. 23; Suid. é@edo-
Opnokei> iio OeAnpare oeBer 7d Soxodv. Cf. eOeAddovdAos,
eGedoSovAcia, eOeXompdEevos one who acts the part of a
prozenus without having been appointed to the office,
etc. The explanation of others: simulated, counterfeit re-
ligion (cf. in Greek lexicons edeAopiddaogos, ebedoxaos,
etc.), does not square so well with the context. (The
word is found besides in Mansi, Collect. Concil. vol. iv.
p- 13880, and in Theodoret, vol. iv. ep. clxi. p. [1460 b.
ed. Migne] 1331, Halle ed.; [ Euseb. h. e. 6, 12,1; Jerome
ep. exxi. vol. i. 1034 ed. Migne]. Epiph. haer. 1, 16 [i.
p. 318, 3 ed. Dind.] attributes e@cdo re pia oo Opnokeia
to the Pharisees. )*
€bédw, see Aero.
€Bitw: (€os q. v.); to accustom; Pass. to be accustomed ;
pf. ptep. ro ei@icpevov usage, custom: tod vduov, pre-
scribed by the law, Lk. ii. 27. (Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc.,
Xen., Plat., al.) *
Ovdpxns, -ov, 6, (fr. €4vos and dpyxa), [i. q. founder of
a nation, Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 56], an ethnarch, one
set over a people as ruler, but without the authority and
name of king (Leian. in Macrob. $17 dyrl évdpxov
Baowhevs avayopevdels Boorépov; so the governor whom
the Alexandrian Jews used to have was called é6vdpxns,
of whom Josephus says, antt. 14, 7, 2, ds Suocket re 7d ZOv0s
kal Suara Kpicers kal cvpBoraiwv émipedeirar Kal mpooTay-
patwy, ws dy rodreias dpywv adtoredovs ; likewise Simon
Maccabaeus, 1 Macc. xiv. 47; xv. 1, 2; Joseph. antt.
13, 6,6; cf. [19, 5, 2]; b. j. 2, 6,3): 2 Co. xi. 326 edvapyns
“Apéra Tov Bact\ews, the governor of Damascene Syria,
ruling in the name of king Aretas[(q.v.); cf. B. D.s. v.
Governor, 11].*
€Ovixds, -7, -ov, (€Ovos) ; 1. adapted to the genius or
customs of a people, peculiar to a people, national: Polyb.,
Diod., al. 2. suited to the manners or language of for-
eigners, strange, foreign; so in the grammarians [ef. our
168
él, b
3. in the N. T. savoring of the nature of
pagans, alien to the worship of the true God, heathenish ;
substantively, 6 é@vxds the pagan, the Gentile: Mt. xviii.
17; plur., Mt. v. 47 GLT Tr WH; vi. 7; and 3 Jn. 7
1 AU Btre \yi eli
COvikds, adv., (see €Ovxos), like the Gentiles: Gal. ii. 14,
[W. 463 (431). Apollon. Dysk. p. 190, 5; Diog. Laért.
7, 56].
€Ovos, -ovs, TO} 1. a multitude (whether of men or
of beasts) associated or living together; a company, troop,
swarm: €Ovos éraipwy, €Ovos Axarav, €vos aay, Hom. I1.;
Zbvos pedttoodov, 2, 87; puidwv eOvea, ib. 469. 20
multitude of individuals of the same nature or genus, (76
ZOvos to Orv h TO dppev, Xen. oec. 7, 26): wav €Ovos
avOparev, the human race, Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems
to belong under the next head ]. 3. race, nations Mt.
xxi. 43; Acts x. 35, etc.; €Ovos emi €Ovos, Mt. xxiv. 7;
MK. xiii. 8; of dpyovres, of Baoihels trav Cbvav, Mt. xx. 25;
Lk. xxii. 25; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people,
Lk. vii. 5; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53; xviii. 35; Acts x.
22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10; xxvi. 4; xxviii. 19. 4. (ra) €Ovn,
like 0°39 in the O. T., foreign nations not worshipping
the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [cf. Trench § xeviii.]: Mt.
iv. 15 (Tadvdala rév eOver), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7 RG; ef.
Rev. xv.3 GLTTr WH mr. after Jn. x. 7], and very
often; in plain contradistinction to the Jews: Ro. iii.
29; ix. 24; [1 Co.i.28 GLT Tr WH]; Gal. ii. 8, etc.; ¢
Aads (rod Geod, Jews) cal ra €6vn, Lk. ii. 32; Acts xxvi,
17, 23; Ro. xv. 10. 5. Paul uses ra €6vn even of Gen-
tile- Christians: Ro. xi. 13; xv. 27; xvi. 4; Gal. ii. 12
(opp. vs. 13 to of ‘Tovdaior i. e. Jewish Christians), vs. 14;
Eph. iii. 1, cf. iv. 17 [W. § 59, 4 a.; B. 130 (114)].
os, -eos (-ovs), [cf. 740s], ro, fr. Aeschyl. [Agam.
728 (?); better fr. Soph.] down, custom: Lk. xxii. 39;
€Oos é€ori te foll. by an inf., Jn. xix. 40; Acts xxv. 16;
Heb. x. 25; contextually, usage prescribed by law, in-
stitute, prescription, rite: Lk. i. 9; ii. 42; Acts xvi. 21;
xxi. 21; xxvi. 3; xxvill. 17; repiréuveoOar Te Cet Moicéas,
Acts xv.1; addd&er ra €6n & rapédaxe Movons, Acts vi. 14.*
€8w (of the pres. only the ptcp. €4wy is used, in Hom.) :
pf. etwOa, to be accustomed, used, wont; [plpf. as impf.
(W. 274 (257 sq.)) etoOewv]; foll. by inf.: Mt. xxvii. 15;
Mk. x. 1. Ptep. rd efwOds in a pass. sense, that which is
wont; usage, custom: kata 76 eiwOds Tux as one’s custom
is, as is his wont, Lk. iv. 16; Acts xvii. 2.*
[eu, v: ec and ¢ are freq. interchanged in N. T. spelling.
This is due partly to itacism, partly to the endeavor to mark
the « sound as long or short. See the remarks on this subject
in WH. App. p. 152 sq. (ef. Intr. § 399); Tdf. Proleg. p. 83
sq.; Soph. Lex.s. v. ««. The use of « for ec is noticed s. y. 1,1;
instances in which e: is substituted for : are the foll.: ’ABei-
Anvh WH; °Addef T Tr WH; ’Avreimas T; "Apeotayelrns T;
Beviauely LT Tr WH; Aaveld L T Tr WH; ’E¢enelas L;
"EAapelrns TWH; ’EAciodBer WH; ’Eodci TTr WH; Ed-
veixn Rec.*; ‘HAei T Tr WH; ’HAclas T WH; ‘lepecxd T
WH; ‘IepocoAuueirns TWH; ’Iopanaefrns T WH, 80 Tr in
Jn. i. 47 (48); Iwoefas LT Tr WH; Keis L T Tr WH;
Kupeivos Tr mrg. WH mrg.; Aevefs T WH, so Trexc. in Mk.
ii. 14; Aevefrns T WH, so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36; Aevertixds
TWH Meaxef TTr WH; Nnpef TTr WH; Nuvevelrns T
=)
WH, so Trin Mt. xii. 41.; ’O¢elas L T Tr WH; Mewaaros T
WH; Seucetv T Tr WH; TaBedd WH; XepovBely LT
Tr WH (-Biu RG); Xopateiy T Tr WH; agelScia lL; cidda
T Tr WH; érapxela T WH; emimddera WH; fret T; ravorel
TWH; fabBei TWH; paBBovvel WH; caBaxdavel T Tr
WH; rarcrdd WH; téxe10v WH; rpameCelrns T WH.]}
el, is first a conditional particle, if (Lat. si); secondly,
an interrogative particle, whether, (Lat. an, num, ne).
I. ei CONDITIONAL (on the difference between it and
€dy, see edv, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety
of conditions, with various tenses and moods; viz. 1.
with the Indicative of all tenses, when anything is
simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to
have been done, or to be about to be, (W. § 41 b., 2; ef. 42,
2; [B. 220(190)]). a. withthe Ind. Present; a. foll.
in the apodosis by the ind. pres.: Mt. xix. 10 (€ odtws
€otly 9 aitia... ov ovppeper yauijoar); xi. 14; Ro. vii.
16, 20 ; vill. 25; xiv. 15; 1 Co.ix.17; Gal. ii. 18; v.18;
Heb. xii. 8; Jas. ii. 8 sq., etc. B. foll. by an Imperative
in the apodosis, — either the pres., as [Mt. xix.17 L Tr
txt. WH txt.]; Mk. iv. 23; vii.16 RGL; Jn.xv.18; Acts
xiii. 15; xxv. 5; 1 Co. vii. 12, 15; Jas. iii. 14, ete.; or the
aor., as Mt. v. 29, 30; viii. 31; xix. 17[RGTTrmre.
WH mrg.]; Mk. ix. 22 [cf. B. 55 (48)]; Lk. xxii. 67 (66);
1 Co. vii. 9. y. foll. by the Future in the apodosis: Lk.
xvi. 31; Acts v. 39 L. T Tr WH; xix. 39; Ro. vit. 11, 13;
2 Co. xi. 30, ete. 8. foll. by the Perfect or the Aorist in
the apodosis, where it is declared that, if this or that is,
something else has or has not occurred: Mt. xii. 26, 28;
Lk. xi. 20; 1 Co. xv. 16; Gal. ii. 21; Ro. iv. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 20.
«. foll. by the Imperfect, either with or without ay, where
in the protasis something is simply assumed to be, but the
apodosis shows that what has been assumed cannot be
the case. Three passages falling under this head have
a doubtful or disputed text: ei éyere (T Tr WH, for the
RG Leiyere) .. . €heyere dv etc. Lk. xvii. 65 ef... pynpo-
vevovow (T Tr, for RG L WH éeurnpdvevov) . . . efyov ay,
Heb. xi. 15 (where by the pres. tense the writer refers
to the language of the Jewish Fathers as at present re-
corded in the sacred Scriptures; cf. rovadra Néyortes vs.
14); ef réxva Tod ’ABp. €ore (G LT Tr WH, for R fre)
... éroeire (( WH txt. ro. | R Ladd dy), Jn. viii. 39; cf.
Bitm. in Stud. u. Krit. for 1858 p. 474 sqq. [N. T. Gram.
§ 139, 26; but cf. Mey. on Lk. 1.c.]. But 2Co.xi4e...
knpvooe ... aveixerbe GT Tr WH mrg. (avéxeobe L WH
txt.) must not be referred to this head; here Paul in the
protasis supposes something which actualy occurred,
in the apodosis censures a thing which actually occurred
viz. the readiness with which his readers gave ear con-
tinually (this is indicated by the impf.) to false teachers.
On the difficulty of the passage cf. Holsten in the Zeit-
schr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874,p. 1 sqq.; [cf. also B.
226 (195); but W. 306 (287) and Mey. ad loc.]. with
a question as the apodosis: Mt. vi. 23; Ine vest svi 28s
viii. 46; 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. with the Ind. Future: Mt.
xxvi. 33; Jas. ii.11 RG; 1 Pet.ii.20. c. with the Ind.
Perfect: Jn.xi.12; Actsxvi.15; Ro. vi. 5; xi. 6 (where
after ef supply Aeiuya yeyover fr. what precedes), 2 Co. ii.
5; v.16; vii.14. d. with the Ind. Aorist, —foll. by the
—_ 169
€l
Pres. in the apodosis, Lk. xix.8; Ro. iv. 2; xv. 27; foll.
by a question in the apodosis, Lk. xvi. 11,12; Jn. xviii.
23; 1 Co. iv. 7; ix.11; foll. by the Aor. in the apodosis,
Rev. xx. 15; by the Impv. in the apodosis, Jn. xviii. 23;
xx. 15; Ro. xi. 17 sq.; 1 Tim. v. 9, 10; Philem. 18; by
the Fut. in the apodosis, Jn. xiii. 32; xv. 20; Heb. xii.
25 (where supply ov« expev&dyeba in the apodosis). 2.
Not infrequently, when a conclusion is drawn from some-
thing that is quite certain, ed with the Indie. is used argu-
mentatively so as to be equiv. in sense to ézet, (cf. the
use of Germ. wenn) [cf. W. 448 (418)]: Mt. xii. 28; Lk.
xxii. 31; Jn. vii. 4; Ro.v.17; vi. 5; viii. 31; xi. 6, 12;
Col. ii. 20; iii. 1, ete. 3. When it is said what would
have been, or what would be now or in the future, if
something else were or had been, ei is used with the Impf.,
Plpf., and Aor. ind.; in the apodosis it is followed in
direct disc. by av with the impf. or the plpf. or the aor. ;
sometimes ay is omitted, (on the causes of the omission,
see B. § 139, 27) ; sometimes the apodosis is made a ques-
tion, [cf. W. 304 (285) sq.]. a. ef with the Impf., foll.
in the apodosis by ay with the impf.: Mt. xxiii. 30; Lk.
Vil. 39 (et obros Hv mpopyrns, éyivwoxey dy if thisman were
a prophet, he would know); Jn. v. 46; viii. 42; ix. 41;
avn s1eCo. 3-314 Gal. 1; 103) Heb. vill. 4) 72GES
were etc. there would not be sought ete. viz. in the O. T.
passage quoted vs. 8); by a question in the apodosis:
1 Co. xii. 19; Heb. vii. 11; by da with the aor., where
the Latin uses the plupf. subjunc.: Jn. xi. 32 (ef As Bde
if thou hadst been here, ov« dv awéOavé pov 6 ddeAdpos my
brother would not have died [when he did (cf. below) ;
B. § 139, 25 regards the impf. in prot. as expressing dur-
ation ]); Jn. iv. 10; xviii. 30 (¢¢ py) Av otros Kakorroids, OvK
dy oot mapedoxapey avtdv, we would not have delivered
him to thee); Acts xviii. 14; by dv with the plupf.: Jn.
xi. 21 (et fs Gde . . . ov dy ereOvnxer, would not have died
[and be now dead; cf. W. 304 (285) and see above; but
L T Tr txt. WH read the aor. here also]); 1 Jn. ii. 19.
b. ef with the Plpf., foll. in the apodosis by dy with the
plpf. or the aor., in the sense of the Latin plpf. subj. :
Mt. xii. 7 (ei eyv@xerre if ye had understood i.e. if ye
knew, ov« dy katedtcdoate rovs avaitious ye would not
have condemned the guiltless) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 and Lk. xii.
39, (ei nOec if he had perceived i. e. if he knew, éyprydpn-
cev dv he would have watched, sc. before the thief had
approached [Tr txt. WH om. dv in Lk. 1. ¢.]) ; Jn. iv. 10;
viii. 19; xiv. 7[RGL]. c. with the Aor. in the same
sense as the Lat. plpf. subjunc. : ¢¢ €560n vdpos . .
dv ék vopov Av 7 Sxacoovry if a law had been given, right-
eousness would in truth come from the law, Gal. iii. 21;
ei airovs "Incovs xarémavoey if Joshua had given them
rest, odk dy mepi GAAns eAdder he would not be speaking,
sc. in the passage quoted, Heb. iv. 8; apodosis without
dv, Jn. xv. 22, see dv I. 3 p. 33 sq. 4. As in classic
Greek, ei with the Ind. is often joined to verbs expressing
wonder, surprise, or other strong emotion (where dru
might have been expected), when the thing spoken of is
either not quite certain, or, although certain, yet in ac-
cordance with the well-known Greek urbanity is repre-
m”
+» OVT@S
el 170 e
sented as not quite free from doubt (Matthiae ii. p. 1474
sq.; Kiihner ii. p. 887 sq.; [Jelf § 804, 9]; W.§ 60, 6; [B.
§ 139, 52]). Thus it is joined —to the verb davpdfw : éOav-
patev, et 75n TéOvnxe, for the matter had not yet been in-
vestigated; hence it is added émnparnoev avrdv, et 75n
[RGTTrmrg. WH mrg. madav} anéOavev, Mk. xv. 44 ;
pr Oavpdcere, «i pioet twas 6 kdopos (the thing is certain)
1 Jn. iii. 13; to the phrase dmorov kpiverac: Acts xxvi.
8, (with mapddogov preceding, Leian. dial. mort. 13, 1) ;
to caddy éorw and Avovredet: Mk. ix. 42 and Lk. xvii. 2
(Mt. xviii. 6 has cupéper, a); Mt. xxvi. 24 and Mk.
xiv. 21; topéya éori: 1 Co. ix. 11 (on which see 8 below) ;
2 Co. xi. 15; ri Oéda, ef 45n avnpby (7d mop), how would I
if (i. e. that) it were already kindled (but it has not yet
been kindled), Lk. xii. 49 (al. al., but uf. Meyer ad loc.; [so
B. 1. c.; cf. W. 448 (418); see ris, le. y. fin.]; Sir. xxiii.
14 bednoets, ef pr) €yevun Ons; [in addition to the other inter-
pretations noticed by Win. and Mey. ll. cc. mention may
be made of that which takes 6é\w as subjunc. : what am
I to choose if (as I may well assume) it has already been
xindled; cf. Green, ‘Crit. Notes’ ad loc.]). 5. Con-
trary to Greek usage, in imitation of the Hebr. D8, ef with
the Indic. is so used in oaths and asseverations that by
aposiopesis the formula of imprecation [constituting
the apodosis] is suppressed (W. § 55 fin.; B. § 149, 4):
Gpny eyo tyiv, et SoOnoerat . . . onuetov (fully expressed,
‘may God punish me, if it shall be given,’ i.e. it shall by
no means be given), Mk. viii. 12; ®pooa, ei eiveAevoovrat
eis tHv Katanavolv pov (fully, ‘let my name no longer be
Jehovah, if they shall enter’ etc.), Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3, fr.
Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11 Sept. (Hebr. ox, Gen. xiv. 23; Num.
xiv. 30; 18. xiv. 45, ete.; we have the full expression
in 1 8. iii. 17; Cant. ii. 7, etc.). 6. Sometimes, as in
classic Grk., after a protasis with ei and the Indic., the
apodosis is suppressed on account of mental agitation
and left to be supplied by the reader or the hearer from
the context, (cf. W. 599 sq. (557)): ef Bove mapeveyKeiv
7 motnptoy tovTo (sc. mapéveyxe [but here L Tr WH
adopt the impv. in place of the inf.; yet cf. B. 396
(339)]), Lk. xxii. 42; ef d€ wvedpa eAdAnoer aite } dyye-
Xos, supply in place of an apodosis the question what
then? Acts xxiii. 9 (the apod. added in Rec., pi) deo-
pax@uev, is spurious); ef éyyas... Ta mpds elpnynv cov,
sc. emioteves dv éyoi, Lk. xix. 42 [B. 396 (339)]. a
The conditional ef is joined with the O ptative, to in-
dicate that the condition is merely thought of or
stated as a possibility, (ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p.
491 sqq.; W. 293 (275) sq.; B. § 139, 24). No example
of this construction is found in the Gospels; very few
in the rest of the N.T. a. univ. in short intercalated
clauses: ei rvxou if it so chance, it may be, (see ruyydva,
2), 1 Co. xiv. 10; xv. 37; ef Oédox TO OeXnpa Tov Geod, 1
Pet. iii. 17 (Rec. 6é\e). b. where it indicates that
something may occur repeatedly (ef. Klotz l. e. p.
492 sq.): ei kal mdoyoure, 1 Pet. iii. 14 [ef. W.u.s.]. ce.
where the condition represents the mind and judgment
of others: cic 5» €Bovevovro [R G -cavto], ei Sdvawwro
eEooa (WH txt. exoaoa (q. v.)] 7d mAoioy, into which
bay [or rather ‘upon which beach’; see e£w6éw] they
determined to run the ship, if they could; as though the
navigators had said among themselves, ¢£acopev, ei Suva-
pea, Acts xxvii. 39; so also et re €xovev pds pe, if they
think they have anything against me, Acts xxiv. 19.
8. with the Subjunctive, when it is assumed that
something may take place, but whether it will in reality is
unknown before the event, in order to make the event
seem to be more certain than if éay were used (Klotz
lc. p. 500 sqq.; W. 294 (276) sq.; B. § 139, 22): et...
Oepicwpev, 1 Co. ix. 11 Tdf. edd. 2, 7, [Lchm. mrg.; al.
-couev]; (Sept. Gen. xliii. 3 sq.; Sir. xxii. 26; 4 Mace.
vi. 20). But see III. below, under ei py, ei ptt, et mos,
elre .. . €lTE, €L TLS.
II. ef INTERROGATIVE, whether. ‘The conditional
particle gets this force if a question is asked about any-
thing, whether it is or is not so, and that about which
the question is put is uttered as it were conditionally ”
(Klotz 1. c. p. 508; [W. § 57,1; Bttm. 248 (214) sqq ;
254 (218) sq.]). 1. As in Grk. writ. in an indirect
question after verbs of seeing, asking, deliberating,
knowing, saying, etc. a. with the Indic. Present:
as ovd’ ei mvedpa Gyov Eat, nkovcapyev (prop., acc. to
the conditional force of the particle, ‘if there is [i. e. has
appeared, been given; cf. efi, I. 2] a Holy Spirit, we did
not even hear’), Acts xix. 2; iwpev, ef pyerar, Mt. xxvii.
49; Mk. xv. 36; Bovdeverac [T WH L mrg. -cerac], ei
duvatés éotiv, Lk. xiv. 31; twa etmns, ei od ef, Mt. xxvi.
63; [iva yuo thy Soxiny tyov et (WH mrg. 7) . . imjxooi
éore, 2 Co. ii. 9 (see WH. Intr. § 404)]; after otk oi8a,
Jn. ix. 25; after xpivare, Acts iv. 19; Soxiudcere [(?),
metpacere ], 2 Co. xiii. 5. b. with the Indic. Future
[cf. W. 300 (282); B. § 139, 61 b.]: defOqrt, ef dpa
agpeOnoerai oor, Acts viii. 22; ri ofdas, ef... caoets, 1
Co. vii. 16 ; mapernpouyr, ei Oeparedoer [ Tdf. rever], Mk. iii.
2 and in Lk. vi. 7 [RG WH mrg.]; #6ev (sc. to see), ef
dpatietpnoet, Mk. xi. 13. c. withthe Indic. Aorist:
ovk otda, et twa GAXov €Barrica, whether I baptized, 1 Co.
1.165 emnp@rnoay, ei mada [L Tr txt. WH txt. #3] dwé-
Oavev, whether he were long dead, Mk. xv. 44; eimé pos,
el... amédoade, Actsv.8. d. with the Subjunctive
Aorist [cf. B. 255 sq. (220); W. 298 (280) sq.]: Sudko,
el kal karaddB I press on (sc. retpmpevos Or oKoray, try-
ing to see), whether I may also lay hold, Phil iii. 12.
So si is used in Latin, e. g. Nep. vit. Hann. 8 Hannibal
. .. Africam accessit in finibus Cyrenaeorum (sc. exper-
turus), si forte Carthaginienses ad bellum possent induci;
Caes. b. g. 1, 8, 4 si perrumpere possent, conati; add
Caes. b. g. 2, 9, 1. Cf. Kiihner ii. p. 1032 sq.; [Jelf
§ 877 b.]. 2. Contrary to the usage of Grk. auth.,
like the Hebr. o8 and interrog. 4, it is used in the Sept.
and the N. T. (esp. by Luke) also in direct ques-
tions (cf. the collog. use of the Germ. 0b; e. g. ob ich’s
wohl thun soll?) ; cf. W. § 57,1; B. 248 (214), and, in
opposition to those who have striven to absolve the sa-
cred writers from this misuse of the particle (esp. Fritz-
sche and Meyer [see the latter’s note on Mt. xii. 10 and
Lk, xiii. 23; he quotes with approval the language of
€ 171 et
Ast (Lexicon Platon. vol. i. 601), ‘dubitanter inter-
rogat, ita ut interrogatio vide atur directa esse’]), cf.
Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 30 sqq. : —eéré
Tus avT@, KUpre, ef dALyou of cwCSpevor; Lk. xiii. 23; Kvpre,
ei matagopev ev paxaipa [-py T Tr WH]; Lk. xxii. 49;
kupte, et .. . dmoxabiotavers T. Bacwrciav; Actsi. 6; cf. be-
sides, Mt. xii. 10; xix. 3; Mk. viii. 23 (acc. to the read-
ing of [Tdf. 2, 7} Tr [mrg. WH txt.] ef re Brérers for
RGLTTr txt. WH mrg. Brére) ; Acts xix. 2, etc. (Gen.
xvii. 17; xliii. 6; 1S. x. 24, etc.; in the O. T. Apocr. 2
Mace. vii. 7; xv. 3; 4 Macc. xviii. 17 fr. Ezek. xxxvii.
3 Sept.; Tob. v. 5).
III. «i with other particles and with the indef. pron.
ris, Th. 1. ei dpa, see dpa, 1. 2. tye, see yé, 3c.
3. ef dé kai, a. but ifalso, so that cai belongs to some
word that follows: Lk. xi. 18 (but if Satan also). b.
but though, but even if, so that xai belongs to ef: 1 Co. iv.
7; 2 Co. iv. 3; v.16 [RG; al. om. 8€]; xi. 6; see 6 below.
4. ci d¢ pn, but if not; if it is or were otherwise, [B. 393
(336 sq.), cf. 345 (297) ; W. as below]: Jn. xiv. 2 (ei dé
pn, SC. ovtas Hv), 11 (et dé py, sc. evol morevere, i. e. my
words). As in these passages so generally the phrase
stands where a word or clause must be repeated in
thought from what immediately precedes; it thus has
the force of the Lat. alioquin, otherwise, or else, [W. 583
(543) ]: Rev. ii. 5, 16; also after negative declarations,
Mk. ii. 21 sq.; cf. Matthiae § 617 b. 5. ei d€ pnye, see
yé, 3d. 6. eixai, a. if even, if also, (cf. ed b€ Kai, 3 a.,
[and 7 below]): 1 Co. vii. 21 [cf. Mey. ad loc.; Bp.
Lehtft. on Philem. p. 324]; 2 Co. xi.15. b. though, al-
though: Lk. xi. 8; 2 Co. iv. 16; vii. 8,12; Phil. ii. 17;
Col. ii. 5 [ei yap cai]; Heb. vi. 9; with the optat. 1 Pet.
iii. 14; see I. 7 b. above. 7. cal ei, even if: Mk. xiv.
29(T Tr WH ei cai]; 1 Pet. iii. 1; cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 519
[who says, “In ei eat the conditional particle e has
the greater force; in kai ef the conjunctive particle
cai. Hence kai ei is used of what is only assumed to
be true ; e xai, on the other hand, of what is as it is said
to be.” Biumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 151) says, “ In
ei xai the cai naturally belongs to the conditional clause
and is taken up into it, 7f even; in the combination kat
ei the xai belongs to the consequent clause, even ‘if.
Sometimes however the difference disappears.” Kriiger
(§ 65, 5, 15): “with xal ¢?, the leading clause is regarded
as holding under every condition, even the one
stated, which appears to be the most extreme; with «i
kai the condition, which may also come to pass, is re-
garded as a matter of indifference in reference
to the leading clause ;”” Sauppe (on Dem. OL. ii. § 20) is
very explicit: “ai ei and ei xai both indicate that some-
thing conflicts with what is expressed in the leading
clause, but that that is (or is done) notwithstanding. kat
ei, however, represents the thing adduced in the condi-
tional sentence to be the only thing conflicting ; but when
the conditional particle precedes (ei xa‘), the represen-
tation is that something which is (or may be) accom-
panied by many others (kai) conflicts ineffectually. Ac-
cordingly the phrase «ai ei greatly augments the force of
what follows, ei kai lays less emphasis upon it; although
it is evident that ei kai can often be substituted for cat
ei.” Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq.; W. 444 (413); Ellic. on
Phil. ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, § 41; Paley,
Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. ei pn, a. in a conditional
protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses
as the simple ¢, see I. above, if not, unless, except, [W.
477 (444) sqq.; B. 345 (297)]: Mt. xxiv. 22; Jn. ix. 33;
xv. 22, 24; Ro. vii. 7, ete. b. it serves, with the entire!
following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been
said, only, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308) ]: Mk.
vi. 5; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition e py
éxdoT@ xrA. strives to prevent any one in applying what
had been said a little while before, viz. ov SeSovAwra. . .
év roovrors to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironi-
cal answers, unless perchance, save forsooth that, (Kiih-
ner § 577, 7; [Jelf § 860, 5 Obs.]): ef wy xpnCopev xrd.
2 Co. iii. 1 Rec. cc. ef yn very often coalesce into one
particle, as it were, which takes the same verb as the
preceding negation: unless, i. q. except, save, [Kiihner
§ 577, 8; B. 359 (308)]; a. univ.: Mt. xi. 27; xii. 39;
Mk. ii. 26; viii. 14; Jn. iii. 13; Ro. vii. 7; xiii. 1, 8; 1
Co. viii. 4; xii. 3; 2 Co. xii. 5, etc. as in classic Greek,
pdvos, povov, is added pleonastically: Mt. xvii. 8; xxi.
19; xxiv. 36 ; Acts xi. 19; Phil. iv. 15; Rev. xiii. 17, ete.
8. after negatives joined to nouns it is so used as to re-
fer to the negative alone (hence many have regarded it
as used for adda [i.e. as being not exceptive but ad-
versative]), and can be rendered in Lat. sed tantum,
but only: Mt. xii. 4 (ovx e€dv nv aire payeiv ovde trois per
avtod, ef pr) Tois tepevor povors, as if ovk efdv nv payeiv
alone preceded) ; Lk. iv. 26 sq.; Ro. xiv. 14; Rev. ix.
4; xxi. 27 (éav pr is so used in Gal. ii. 16; on Gal. i. 19
see "IdkwBos, 3); cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 195;
[see éav, I. 3c. and reff.]._ -y. when preceded by the in-
terrogative ris in questions having a negative force: Mk.
Merete kiya Jl cmROsxial opal Conia! 102 Coma 2s xir.
13; Heb. iii. 18; 1 Jn.ii. 22; v.5; (Xen. oec. 9,1; Ar-
stph. eqq. 615). 8. with other conjunctions: ef yy ta,
Jn. x.103; ef py Grav, Mk. ix. 9; ri ear, ef py dre etc., 2
Co. xii. 13; Eph. iv. 9. €. it has its own verb, and
makes a phrase by itself: 4 ovK €or GdAo, ei py Tues
elow of rapdooorres tpas which means nothing else, save
that there are some who trouble you, Gal. i. 7 [so
Winer (Com. ad loc.) et al.; but see Meyer].
el py, arising from the blending of the two expressions
el pr and éxrds ei, like the Lat. nisi si equiv. to praeter-
quam si, except in case, except: 1 Tim. v. 19; with the
indic. aor. 1 Co. xv. 2; with the subjune. pres. 1 Co. xiv.
5; (Leian. de luctu c. 19; dial. meret. 1, 2, ete.). Cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 459; W.§ 65, 3¢.; [B. indexs. v. éxrds
ei pn]. 9. ef pv, assuredly, surely, in oaths: Heb. vi.
14 LT Tr WH (for RG# pny [q. v.]) and several times
in Sept. as Ezek. xxxiii. 27; xxxiv. 8; [cf. xxxvi. 5;
Xxxvill. 19; 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 23], etc.; here, if ef did not
come from # by itacism, ¢e? pny must be explained as a
confusion of the Hebraistic ef yn (see I. 5 above) and
the Grk. formula of asseveration 4 ynv; cf. Bleek on Heb.
d. éxros
et 172
vol. ii. 2 p. 248 sqq., and what Fritzsche says on the
other side, Com. on Bar. ii. 29; Judith i. 12; [ef. Kneu-
cker on Bar. 1.c.; B. 359 (308); Tdf. Proleg. p.59; WH.
App. p. 151; B.D.s. v. New Testament, I. 31]. 10.
el wy te or pyre, unless in some respect, unless perchance,
unless indeed : ironically, with the indic. pres. 2 Co. xiii.
5; hesitatingly, with the subjunc. aor. Lk. ix. 13; cf.
Meyer ad loc. [also W. 294 (276); B. 221 (191)]; ef py
tt dv: 1 Co. vii. 5, see dy, 1V. 11. ef ov (fully discussed
by W. § 55, 2c. and B. 345 (297) sqq.), ifnot; this com-
bination is used much more frequently in the N. T. than
in the more elegant Grk. auth.; it differs from e? wy in
this, that in the latter 7 belongs to the particle ei, while
in e? vd the od refers to some following word and denies
it emphatically, not infrequently even coalescing with it
intoasingleidea. a. when the idea to which od belongs
is antithetic a. toa positive term, either preceding
or following: ef d€ od poryevers hovevers dé, Jas. ii. 11
[in R G the fut.]; ef yap 6 Oeds... ovk epeicato,...
G\Ad... mapédaxev els kpiow, 2 Pet. ii. 4 sq.3 €f Kat ov
ei Oe
rod, Jn. X. 37 sq.3 ei yap emorevete...,€i O€ .. . Ov T-
orevere, Jn. v. 46 sq.; add, Mk. xi. 26 RGL; Ro. viii.
9;.1 Co. ix. 2; xi.6; Jas. iii. 2. 8. to some other idea
which is negative (formally or virtually): e..
dxovovow,ovde ... mecaOnoovra, Lk. xvi. 31; e..
epeiaarto, ovde cod peicera [ Rec. -onrar], Ro. xi. 21; add,
1 Co. xv. 13, 15-17; 2 Th. iii. 10; foll. in the apodosis
by a question having the force of a negative: Lk. xvi.
11 sq.; Jn. iii. 12; 1 Tim. iii.5. sy. the od denies with
emphasis the idea to which it belongs: kaddv Av aire, ef
ovk eyevv7 On, good were it for him not to have been born,
Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. 8. the whole emphasis is
placed on the negative itself: ef od otk ef 6 Xpiords, Jn.
i.25. b. the ov coalesces, as it were, with the word to
which it belongs into a single idea: ed 5€ ov« éyxparevow
ra, if they are incontinent, 1 Co. vii. 9; et tis Trav iSiov
ov mpovoet [or -eirae T Tr txt. WH mrg.], neglects, 1
Tim. v. 8; add, Lk. xiv. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 22; Rev. xx. 15,
ete. 12. ef ovv, if then: Mt. vi. 23; vii. 11; Lk. xi. 13,
36; Jn. xiii. 14; xvili.8; Acts xi. 17; Col. iii. 1; Philem.
LTS [On el plev ody see pep Tie 4.] 13. elrep [so TWH
(exc. in 2 Co. v. 3 mrg.), but L Tr ei wep; cf. W. 45;
Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 123], (ef and mép, and this ap-
parently from wep), prop. if on the whole; if only, pro-
vided that, is used “of a thing which is assumed to be,
but whether rightly or wrongly is left in doubt ” (Herm.
ad Vig. p. 831, [so W. 448 (417); but cf. Baumlein,
Griech. Partikeln, p. 202 (cf. 64 bot.) ; Klotz ad Devar. ii.
2 p. 528, and esp. s. v. etye (in yé, 3c.) and the reff. to
Mey., Lghtft., Ellic., there given]): Ro. viii. 9,17; 1 Co.
vill. 5; xv. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 3 (where L T Tr WH ¢?); by
a species of rhetorical politeness it is used of that about
which there is no doubt: 2 Th. i. 6; Ro. iii. 30 L T Tr
WH; 2Co. v. 3 L Tr WH mrg. 14. ei mos [L Tr
WH] or eirws [G T], if in any way, if by any means, if
possibly: with the optat. pres. (see I. 7 above), Acts
xxvii. 12; interrogatively, with the indic. fut. Ro. i. 10;
dadocer... Sid ye +++ Owoet, Lk. xi. 8; ef od Tod...
>
- OUK
. OUK
elow
with the subjune. aor., so that before ei the word oxomap
or meipdpevos must be mentally supplied (see Il. 1d.
above): Ro. xi. 14; Phil. iii. 11. 15. cire... elre,
a. whether... or [as disjunc. conjunc., sive ... sive; cf.
W. 440 (409 sq.) ; B. 221 (191)], without a verb follow-
ing: Ro. xii. 6-8; 1 Co. iii. 22; viii. 5; 2 Co. v. 9sq. ;
Phil. i. 18, 20, 27; 2 Th. ii. 15; Col. i. 16, 20; 1 Pet. ii.
13 sq.; ere ody... etre, 1 Co. xv. 11; foll. by the indie.
pres., 1 Co. xii. 26; xiii. 8; 2 Co. i. 6; foll. by the sub-
june. pres. 1 Th. v. 10, where the use of the subjunc.
was occasioned by the subjunc. (jc@pev in the leading
clause; cf. W. 294 (276); B.221 (191). b. whether...or
[as indirect interrogatives, wtrum...an; cf. B. 250 (215)]
(see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Matthiae p. 1476 sq.) : after
ovK otda, 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 16. ci tis, ef re: exx. of this
combination have already been given among the preced-
ing; here may be added «i ris érepos, et te €repov, and if
(there be) any other person or thing, —a phrase used as
a conclusion after the mention or enumeration of several
particulars belonging to the same class (in the classics
ei Tis GAXos, et Kai Tus GAXos, kal et TL GAXo, etc., in Hdt.,
Xen., Plat., al.): Ro. xiii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 10; ef us with
subjune. pres. Rev. xi. 5 Rec.; with the subjune. aor.,
ibid. T Tr WH txt.
[elye, see ye, 3c. ]
elSéa, -as, 7, Mt. xxviii. 3 T Tr WH, a poet. form for idéa,
q.v-[cef. WH. App. p. 153], (Bar. vi. [ep. Jer.] 62; Arstph.
Thesm. 438 var.). Cf. B.5; [W. 48 (47); see et, ¢].*
elSos, -ovs, 76, (EIAQ), in Sept. chiefly for WNW and
18h; prop. that which strikes the eye, which is exposed
to view ; 1. the external appearance, form, figure,
shape, (so fr. Hom. down): Jn. v. 37; coparix@ cides,
Lk. iii. 22; 76 efd0s rod mpocwmov aitod, Lk. ix. 29; dia
eiSovs, as encompassed with the visible appearance (of
eternal things), (see dia, A. I. 2), 2 Co. v. 7, — com. ex-
plained, by sight i. e. beholding (Luth.: im Schauen) ;
but no ex. has yet been adduced fr. any Grk. writ. in
which eiSos is used actively, like the Lat. species, of vision;
(ordpa kara ordua, ev etdet, kal ov Sv dpaparov Kat évu-
nviwv, Clem. homil. 17, 18; cf. Num. xii. 8 Sept.). 2
form, kind : a6 ravtés eiSous movnpod améxeobe, i. e. from
every kind of evil or wrong, 1 Th. v. 22 [ef. wovnpéds, sub
fin.]; (Joseph. antt. 10, 3,1 may eiSos wovmpias. The
Grks., esp. Plato, oppose ré efSos to rd yevos, as the Lat.
does species to genus. Cf. Schmidt ch. 182, 2).*
el8, idw, Lat. video, [Skr. vid, pf. véda know, vind-a-
mi find, (cf. Vedas); Curtius § 282], an obsol. form of
the present tense, the place of which is supplied by épdq.
The tenses coming from ¢i$ and retained by usage form
two families, of which one signifies to see, the other to
know.
I. 2 aor. eiSov, the com. form, with the term. of the
1 aor. (see reff. s. v. dmépxouat, init.) efSa, Rev. xvii. 3
L,6 LT Tr; 1 pers. plur. eiSauev, LT Tr WH in Acts
iv. 20; Mk. ii. 12; Tr WH in Mt. xxv. 37; WH in Mt.
xxv. 38; Mk. ix. 38; Lk. ix. 49; 3 pers. plur. efdap,
T WH in Lk. ix. 32; Tr WH in Lk. x. 24; Acts vi. 158
xxviii. 4; T Tr WH in Mk. vi. 50; LT Tr WHin Jn
€l0w’
i. 39 (40); Acts ix.35; xii.16; WH in Mk. vi. 33; add
av Tdf. in Mt. xiii.17; Lk. x. 24; Zov (an Epic form,
cf. Matthiae i. p. 564; [Veitch p. 215]; very freq. in
Sept. and in 1 Macce., cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 54; on
the freq. interchange of iSov and ef8ov in codd., cf. Jacobs
ad Achill. Tat. 2, 24; [WH. App. pp. 162, 164; Tdf.
Sept. Proleg. p. lx.; N.T. Proleg. p. 89; B. 39 (34)]),
Tdf. in Rev. iv.1; vi. 1, 2,5, 8, 9,12; vii.l,ete.; 3 pers.
sing. tev, Tdf. in Lk. v.2; Rev.i.2; 2 pers. plur. ieze,
Phil. i. 30 Rec.; 3 pers. plur. i8ov, Tdf. in [Lk. ii. 20];
Jn. xix. 6; subjunc. io; impv. ide (Attic 28¢, cf. W. § 6,
1a.; [B. 62 (54); Gdéttling, Accentl. 52]), [2 pers. plur.
tere, Jn. i. 39 (40) RGL]; inf. ideiv; ptep. dav; (Sept.
_mostly for N84, sometimes for MIN and yy); to see (have
seen), be seeing (saw), i.e. 1. to perceive (with the
eyes; Lat. conspicere, Germ. erblicken); a. univ. twd
or ri: Mt.ii.2; iv.16; xiv.14; xxviii. 6; Mk.i.10, 16;
ii. 14; Lk. v. 26; vii. 22; Jn.i.47 (48) sq.; Vi. 26; xix.
6; Acts ix. 35; xii. 16; Gal. i.19; 1 Tim. vi. 16, and very
often. ovdérore ovtws eidouev we never saw in such fash-
ion, i.e. such a sight never befell us, Mk. ii. 12, old Germ.
also hat man nicht gesehen, seit etc.; cf. Kuinoel ad Mat.
p- 280 ed. 4. deity re and dxovoai r are conjoined in Lk.
vii. 22; Acts xxii. 14; 1 Co. ii.9; Jas. v. 11; iSety and
idety re are also used by those to whom something is pre-
sented in vision, as the author of the Apocalypse relates
that he saw this or that: Rev. i. 12,17; iv. 1 [here efdov
x. i6ov a formula peculiar to Rev. ; see i8ov, sub fin.]; v.
1 sq. 6, 11; vi. 9; vii. 1, 9, ete.; Jn. xii. 41; iSeiv dpapa,
Acts x. 17; xvi. 10; ideiv év dpdyari, Acts ix. 12 [RG];
x. 3; ev TH pacer, Rev. ix. 17; elliptically iSety re &« rwvos
sc. éxrropevdev, Rev. xvi. 13, cf. i. 16; Hebraistically (on
which see W. § 45, 8; B. § 144, 30) tSav efSov I have
surely seen: Acts vii. 34 after Ex. iii. 7. Frequent in
the historical books of the N. T. is the ptep. idar, idavres,
continuing the narrative, placed before a finite verb, and
either having an acc. added, as in Mt. ii. 10; iii. 7; v. 1;
viii. 34; Mk. v.22; ix. 20; Lk. ii. 48; vii.13; Jn.v.6;
vi. 14; Acts xiii. 12; xiv. 11, etc.; or the acc. is omitted,
as being evident from the context: Mt. ix. 8,113 xxi.
20; Mk. x.14; Lk.i. 12; ii.17; Acts iii. 12; vii. 31, etc.
b. with the acc. of a pers. or a thing, and a ptep. [cf.
W. §45,4a.]: Mt. iii. 7,16; viii.14; Mk. i. 16; vi. 33;
Ek ix. 49; xxi. 2; Jn. i. 33, 47 (48) sq.; Acts ii._9;
xi. 13; 1 Co. vili.10; 1Jn. v.16; Rev. ix. 1, and often.
ce. foll. by dru: Mk. ii. 16 L T Tr WH; ix. 25; Jn. vi.
22, 24, etc. . foll. by an indirect question with the
indic.: with ris, Lk. xix. 3; with ri, Mk. v. 14; with
mnarixos, Gal. vi.11. e. &pyou al ide, a formula of invi-
tation, the use of which leaves the object of the seeing to
be inferred by the hearers from the matter under consid-
eration: Jn. xi. 34 (35); i. 46 (47) (here ie is equiv. to
by seeing learn, sc. that Jesus is the Messiah), and Grsb.
in Rev. vi. 1, 5; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) (where T Tr WH
épy. x. dyerOe). The Rabbins use the phrases IM) 8)
and 81) 82 to command attention. f. ideiv used
absol. and morevew are contrasted in Jn. xx. 29. 2:
like the Lat. video, to perceive by any of the senses: Mt.
173
elow
xxvii. 54; Mk. xv. 39; Lk. xvii. 15. 3. univ. to per-
ceive, notice, discern, discover: thy riatw avrav, Mt. ix. 2;
| tas evOuunoers a’tay, ib. 4 (where L Tr WH txt. eidds
for idav) ; r. duadoyeopoy rhs kapdias adbray, Lk. ix. 47 [T
WH txt. Tr mrg. eis]; ide with acc. of the thing, Ro.
xi. 22; foll. by dr, Mt. xxvii. 3, 24; Acts xii.3; xiv. 9;
xvi. 19; Gal. ii. 7, 14; ie, dre, Jn. vii. 52; ety twa, Sre,
Mk. xii. 34 [Trbr.the acc.]. 4. to see, i. e. to turn
the eyes, the mind, the attention to anything; a. to
pay attention, observe: foll. by ei interrog. Mt. xxvii. 49;
by moraros, 1 Jn. iii. 1. b. mepi twos (cf. Lat. videre de
aliqua re), to see about something [A. V. to consider of ],
i.e. to ascertain what must be done about it, Acts xv. 6.
c. to inspect, examine: ri, Lk. xiv. 18. 4. twa, to look
at, behold : Jn. xxi. 21; Mk. viii. 33. 5. to experience,
ri, any state or condition [cf. W. 17]: as tov Odvarov, Lk.
ii. 26; Heb. xi. 5, (Joseph. antt. 9, 2, 2 [oiSev]), cf. Jn.
vill. 51 (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 49); ryv diapdopay, to
pass into a state of corruption, be dissolved, Acts ii. 27,
31; xiii. 35-37, (Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10); ry Baow. rt. Oeod,
to partake of salvation in the kingdom of God, Jn. iii.
3; mévOos, Rev. xviii. 7; tav So€av rov Geov, by some mar-
vellous event get a signal experience of the beneficent
power of God, Jn. xi. 40; orevoywpias, 1 Mace. xiii. 3,
(ddoxou xdpwv, Hom. Il. 11, 243); on the same use of the
verb 787 and the Lat. videre, cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii.
p. 1246. mpepay, to live to see a day (a time) and en-
joy the blessings it brings: nuépas dyads, 1 Pet. iii. 10
fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; ryv nuépav eunv (Christ’s lan-
guage) the time when I should exercise my saving power
on earth, Jn. viii. 56; eid sc. r. Hu. éuny, from the abode
of the blessed in paradise he in spirit saw my day, ibid.
(see dyaAAtdo, sub fin.) ; émOvpnoere piav Tov nyepav.. .
idetv, ye will wish that even a single day of the blessed
coming age of the Messiah may break upon your
wretched times, Lk. xvii. 22; so in Grk. writ., esp. the
poets, fuap, nuépay idetv, in Latin videre diem; cf. Kuinoel
on Jn. viii. 56. 6. with acc. of pers. to see i. e. have
an interview with, to visit: Lk. viii. 20; Jn. xii.21; Acts
xvi. 40; xxviii. 20; Ro. i. 11; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Phil. i. 27;
1 Th. iii.6; 2 Tim.i.4; 3Jn. 14; 76 rpdcwndy twos: 1 Th.
ii. 17; iii. 10, (Leian. dial. d. 24, 2[cf. Rutherford on Babr.
11, 9]); with an ace. of place, to visit, go to: Acts xix. 21.
[Syn.: ‘When efdoy, idety are called “momentary preter-
ites,’ it must not be supposed that thereby a quickly-past
action is designated ; these forms merely present the action
without reference to its duration.... The un-
augmented moods, too, are not exclusively past, but present
or future as well, —the last most decidedly in the imperative.
Now it is obvious that when a perception is stated without
regard to its duration, its form or mode cannot have
prominence; hence ideiy is much less physical than épay.
ideiv denotes to perceive with the eyes; dpay [q. v.], on the
other hand, to see, i. e. it marks the use and action of the
eye as the principal thing. Perception as denoted by idezy,
when conceived of as completed, permits the sensuous ele
ment to be forgotten and abides merely as an activity of the
soul; for oda, «idévai, signifies not “to have seen,” but “to
know.?’ Schmidt ch. xi. Comp.: am-, ém-, mpo-, cuv-, bmep-
etdow.|
ldo
II. 2 pf. of8a, ofSas (1 Co. vii. 16; Jn. xxi. 15, for the
more com. ota), olSapev (for topev, more com. in Grk.),
oldare (iore, the more usual classic form, is found only in
Eph. v.5 G LT Tr WH and Heb. xii. 17, [prob. also in
Jas. i. 19 ace. to the reading of L'T’ Tr WH; but see be-
low]), of8act (and once the Attic taac1, Acts xxvi. 4),
impv. tore, once, Jas. i. 19 LT Tr WH, [but see above],
subjunc. €i64, inf. e/déva, ptep. cides, etdvia (Mk. v. 33;
Acts v. 7); plpf. #dev, 2 pers. everywhere 7des, 3 pers.
qdet, plur. 2 pers. #decre, 3 pers. 7Se.cav (for the more com.
yoecay [Veitch p. 218; B. 43 (38)]); fut. eidjow (Heb.
viii. 11); cf. W. 84 (81); B. 51 (44); Sept. chiefly for
pv; like the Lat. novi it has the signification of a pres-
ent to know, understand ; and the pipt. the signif. of an
inipts [ef. W. 274 (257)].
1. to know: with acc. of the thing, Mt. xxv. 13; Mk.
Xp 19s ene ke At Kl. Ivy X1Ve 4 ACUSIV Cs NGe Wilds ok
Co. ii. 2; Rev. ii. 2, 9, ete.; rodro [ Rec. ; a mavra | foll.
by dre etc. Jude 5; with acc. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 72, 74;
Jn. i. 81; vi. 42; Acts iii. 16; 2 Co. v.16, ete.; rov Oedy,
Tit. i. 16, cf. Jn. viii. 19; xv. 21; Gentiles are called ot
pay eiddres Tr. Oeoy in 1 Th. iv. 5; 2 Th.i. 8, ef. Gal. iv. 8;
the predicate of the person is added (as often in Attic),
eidas avtov advdpa Sikaov, sc. dvra, Mk. vi. 20 [B. 304
(261)]; in the form of a ptcp. 2 Co. xii. 2. to an accus.
of the object by attraction (W. § 66,5 a.; B. 377 (323))
an epexegetical clause is added [cef. esp. B. 301 (258) ],
with dru, 1 Co. xvi. 15; 2 Co. xii. 3 sq.; Acts xvi. 3; or
an indirect question [B. 250 (215) sq.], Mk. i. 24; Lk.
iv. 34; xiii. 25, 27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29. eidévae is used
with the ace. and inf. in Lk. iv. 41; 1 Pet. v. 9; foll. by
6ru, Mt. ix. 6; Jn. xix. 35; Acts ii. 30; Ro. v. 3, and very
often; otSaper foll. by dre is not infrequently, so far as
the sense is concerned, equiv. to it is well known, ac-
knowledged : Mt. xxii. 16; Lk. xx. 21; Jn. ill. 2; ix. 31;
Row: 2 3 iii. 197; vil. 114°; vin: 22598): 2'Co. v. 1: 1 Lim. 1.
8; 1 Jn. ili. 2; v. 20; cf. Lightfoot [in his Horae Hebr.
et Talm.] and Baumg.-Crusius on Jn. iii. 2. freq., esp.
in Paul, is the interrog. formula ov« oiSare and 4 otk
oldare 6rt, by which something well known is commended
to one for his thoughtful consideration: Ro. xi. 2; 1 Co.
iii. 165 v.6; vi. 2sq. 9, 15 sq. 19; ix. 13, 24; od« ofSare
foll. by an indir. quest. Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.]; od« ofSas dru, Jn.
xix. 10; ovk noetre, Lk. ii. 49; efSévae foll. by an indir.
quest. [cf. B. u. s.], Mt. xxvi. 70; Jn. ix. 21, 25, 30; xiv.
5; xx.13; 1 Co.i.16; vii. 16; 2Co. xii. 2sq.; Ro. viii.
26; Eph. vi. 21; 1 Tim. iii. 15, and very often. 2. to
know i. e. get knowledge of, understand, perceive; a. any
fact: as, rds evOuynoes, Mt. xii. 25; ry tmdkpiow, Mk.
xil. 15; rods diadoytopovs aitay, Lk. vi. 8; xi. 17; with
the addition of év éaur@ foll. by ér, Jn. vi. 61. b. the
force and meaning of something, which has a definite
meaning: 1 Co. ii. 11 sq.; rv mapaBoAnv, Mk. iv. 13;
pvornpa, 1 Co. xiii. 2; foll. by an indir. quest. Eph. i. 18.
c. as in class. Grk., foll. by an inf. in the sense of to know
how (Lat. calleo, to be skilled in): Mt. vii. 11; Lk. xi.
13; xii. 56; Phil. iv. 12; 1 Th.iv.4; 1 Tim. iii. 5; Jas.
iv. 17; 2 Pet. ii.9; ads oidare, sc. dapadicacbat, Mt. xxvii.
174
€LKOCL
65. 3. Hebraistically, eiSévac ra to have regard for
one, cherish, pay attention to: 1 Th. v.12, (Sept. Gen.
xxxix. 6 for yt). [SYN. see ywaoka. ]
elSwretov [-Acov T WH; see I, ¢], -ov, 7d, (€tS@Aov, q. V-5
ef. "AokAnmeiov, "AmoAAwvetov, “Hpakdeiov, etc. [W. 95
(90) ]), an idol’s temple, temple consecrated to idols: 1 Co.
viii. 10 (1 Mace. i. 47; x. 83; 1 Esdr. ii. 9; not found
in prof. auth.; for in the frag. fr. Soph. [152 Dind.] in
Plut. de amico et adul. c. 36 éd@Ava has of late beep
restored).*
elSwddOutos, -ov, (etdodov and Oiw), a bibl. and eccl.
word [W. 26; 100 (94) ], sacrificed to idols; 76 eidwdd8v-
rov and ra eidwAd6ura denote the flesh left over from the
heathen sacrifices; it was either eaten at feasts, or sold
(by the poor and the miserly) in the market: Acts xv.
29; xxi. 25; 1 Co. viii. 1, 4, 7,10; x.19,;28 (here L txt-
T Tr WH read iepd6urov, q. v-); Rev. ii. 14, 20. [Cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 308 sq.] *
elSwdo-Aatpela [-rpia WH; see I, ¢], -as, 7, (€id@dov,
q: v-, and Aarpeia), (Tertull. al. idololatria), the worship
of false gods, idolatry: Gal. v. 20; used of the formal sac-
rificial feasts held in honor of false gods, 1 Co. x. 14; of
avarice, as a worship of Mammon [q. v. ], Col. iii. 5 [Bp.
Lehtft. ad loc. ]; in plur., the vices springing from idolatry
and peculiar to it, 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 26].)*
elSwAoAGTpNs, -ov, 6, (etdwAov, and Aarpis i. e. a hireling,
servant, slave), a worshipper of false gods, an idolater,
(Tertull. idololatres) : 1 Co. v.10; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15;
any one, even a Christian, participant in any way in the
worship of heathen, 1 Co. v. 11; vi. 9; esp. one who at-
tends their sacrificial feasts and eats of the remains of
the offered victims, 1 Co. x. 7; a covetous man, as a
worshipper of Mammon, Eph. v. 5; cf. Meyer ad loc.
(Eccl. writ. [ef. W. 100 (94 sq.) ].)*
elSwdov, -ov, 7d, (etdos [cf. W. 96 (91); Etym. Magn.
296, 9]), in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, an image, likeness,
i.e. whatever represents the form of an object, either
real or imaginary; used of the shades of the departed
(in Hom.), of apparitions, spectres, phantoms of the
mind, ete.; in bibl. writ. [an zdol, i. e.] 1. the image
of a heathen god: Acts vii.41; 1 Co. xii.2; Rev. ix. 20,
(Is. xxx. 22; 2 Chr. xxiii. 17, ete.; Oedv 7) Sapdvev
eidoda, Polyb. 31, 3, 13); 2. a false god: Acts xv.
20 (on which see adicynua); Ro. ii. 22; 1 Co. viii. 4,7;
x. 19; 2 Co. vi. 16; 1 Th.i. 9, (often in Sept.); @udAdc-
cew éavtov ard T. cidoAwv, to guard one’s self from all
manner of fellowship with heathen worship, 1 Jn. v. 21.*
elk (L WH R™ eixn; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 342;
B. 69 (61); [W.§5,4e.; Jelf § 324 Obs. 6; Kiihner
§ 336 Anm. 7; esp. Etym. Magn. 78, 26 sq.; and reff. s. v.
I, ¢]), adv.; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; 1. in-
considerately, without purpose, without just cause: Mt. v.
22 RGTrbr.; Ro. xiii. 4 (i. e. ‘not to hide it in the
scabbard, but to draw it’ Fritzsche); Col. ii. 18. 2,
in vain; without success or effect: 1 Co. xv. 2; Gal. iii.
4; iv. 11. [From Xenophon, Aeschyl. down.]*
elxoot [or -o1v; Tdf. uses ov ten times before a conso-
nant, and says -o« “etiam ante vocalem fere semper in
y
eLK@
codd. antiquiss.” Proleg. p. 98; WH everywhere -o,
cf. their App. p. 148; B. 9], of, ai, rd, twenty: Lk. xiv.
31; Acts i. 15, ete. [From Hom. down.]
exw : 1 aor. eféa; to yield, [A. V. give place]: twi, Gal.
ii. 5. (From Hom. down.) [Comp.: im-eixo.] *
EIKQ: whence 2 pf. go.xa with the force of a pres.
[W. 274 (257)]; to be like: rwi, Jas. i. 6, 23. [From
Hom. down. |*
elxay, -dvos, (acc. eikdvav, Rev. xiii. 14 Lcehm.; see
Gpony ), 7, (EIKQ, q. v.); [fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down];
Sept. mostly for poy; an image, figure, likeness; a. Mt.
xxii. 20; Mk. xii. 16; Lk. xx. 24; Ro. i. 23; 1 Co. xv. 49;
Rey. xiii. 14'sq.; xiv. 9,11; xv.2; xvi. 2; xix. 20; xx. 4;
7) eikov TOY Tpaypdrev, the image of the things (sc. the
heavenly things), in Heb. x. 1, is opp. to 7 oxid, just as
in Cic. de off. 3, 17 solida et expressa effigies is opp. to
umbra; eixav rt. Geod is used of the moral likeness of re-
newed men to God, Col. iii. 10; ekay rod viod rod Oeod
the image of the Son of God, into which true Christians
are transformed, is likeness not only to the heavenly
body (cf. 1 Co. xv. 49; Phil. iii. 21), but also to the most
holy and blessed state of mind, which Christ possesses :
Ro. viii. 29; 2Co.iii. 18. b. metonymically, eikav twos,
the image of one; one in whom the likeness of any one
is seen: eixwv Oeod is applied to man, on account of his
power of command (see dda, III. 3 a. a.), 1 Co. xi. 7; to
Christ, on account of his divine nature and absolute
moral excellence, Col. i.15; 2 Co. iv. 4; [cf. Bp. Lghtft.
and Mey. on Col. |. ¢.].*
[Syn. eixdv, duotwpua : du. denotes often not mere
similarity but likeness (see éduolwpua, b. and cf. Mey. on Ro. i.
23), visible conformity to its object ; etx. adds to the idea of
likeness the suggestions of representation (as a de-
rived likeness) and manifestation. Cf. Trench § xv.;
Lghtft. u. s.]
eiAuxpivea (-ia T [WH, seeI,+; on the breathing see
WH. App. p. 144]), -as, 7, (etAcxpuns, q. V-), purity, sin-
cerity, ingenuousness : 1 Co. v. 8; 2 Co. ii. 17; rod Geos,
which God effects by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. i. 12 [W.
§ 36, 3b.]. (Theophr., Sext. Empir., Stob.) *
elAtxpivijs, -és, ([on the breathing see WH. App. p.
144; L.and S.s. v. fin.]; com. supposed to be fr. efAy or
@dn sunlight, and xkpivw, prop. found pure when unfolded
and examined by the sun’s light ; hence some write «iA.
[see reff. above]; acc. to the conjecture of others fr.
eidos, etdetv, prop. sifted and cleansed by rapid move-
ment or rolling to and fro), pure, unsullied, sincere ; of the
soul, an eiAckpujs man: Phil. i. 10; dcdvoca, 2 Pet. iii. 1.
(Sap. vii. 25, where cf. Grimm, Exet. Hdb.; [see, on the
word, also Trench § Ixxxv.]; [Hippocr.], Xen., Plat.,
[Aristot., Plut.], Polyb., Philo, [al.]}.)*
[Syn. efArkpivhs, adapds: Acc. to Trench u. s. the
former word expresses freedom from the falsehoods, the
latter from the defilements, of the flesh and of the world. ]
eiAlcow, Ionic and poetic and occasional in later prose
for édicow [W. § 2, 1 a.]: [pres. pass. eiticcopat]; (eto
to press close, to roll up, [ef. L. and S. s. v. fin.]), to roll
up or together: Rev. vi. 14 RG; but LT Tr WH have
restored édtcodu. (From Hom. down.) *
175
? fs
€Lpb
elyt (fr. €w, whence éyi in inscriptions [?]; Aeol. éupi
[Curtius (yet éupu, so G. Meyer) § 564; Veitch p. 228)),
impv. io6, gore, less usual Fro, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12;
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48, 5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.)
31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 c. [here it has given place to gorw
(or ir), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers.
plur. éorwoav, Lk. xii. 35 ; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. eivar; impf.
—ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, jy, 2 pers.
joOa (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form fs (Mt.
Xxv. 21, 23; Jn. xi. 21, 32; xxi. 18; Rev. iii.15 GLT
Tr WH), 3 pers. jv, 1 pers. plur. jyev, — ace. to the mid.
form, com. in later Grk. [cf. Veitch p. 226], #unv (Mt. xxv.
35 sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 cf. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal. i.10,
etc.), plur. #ueOa (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts
xxvil. 37 LT Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph.
ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); ef. Lob. ad Phryn. pp.
149, 152; fut. €roua; cf. W.§ 14, 2; B.49 sq. (43); to
be;
I. eiui has the force of a predicate [i.e. is the sub-
stantive verb]: to be,i.e. 1. toexist; a. passages
in which the idea of the verb preponderates, and some
person or thing is said to exist by way of distinction
from things non-existent: éorw 6 Oeds, Heb. xi. 63 6
dv kai 6 qv [W. 68 (66), cf. 182 (172); B. 50 (43)], Rev.
i.4,[8; iv. 8]; xi. 17; xvi. 5; ev dpyq Av 6 Aoyos, Jn. i. 1;
mp ’ABpadp yevér Oat, eyo eipi, Jn. viii. 58 [so WH mrg.
in 24, 28; xiii. 19 (see I. 5 below)]; mp6 rod rév Kédcpov
etvat, Jn. xvii. 5; Av, kat ovK eore kalmep éativ Rec., acc.
to the better reading cai mdpeorae [G Tr WH, but LT
mapéora., correctly ; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. § 108 Anm. 20;
Chandler § 803], Rev. xvii. 8; éopev, Acts xvii. 28; ra
pa) évra and ra évra things that are not, things that are,
Ro. iv. 17; things that have some or have no influence,
of some or of no account, 1 Co. i. 28, (€kadeoev nuas ov
dvras Kai nO€Anoev ex pr) OvTos eivat nas, Clem. Rom. 2
Cor. i. 8 [ef. Gebh. and Harn. ad loc. and esp. on Herm.
vis. 1,1, 6]). Hence b. i. q. to live: ef #ueOa [or Ayer
Rec.] ev rats nuepars trav narépav nuedy if we had been
(viz. living) in the days of our fathers, Mt. xxiii. 30;
ovk eivat is used (as in class. Grk., cf. Passow i. p. 792,
[L. and S.s.v. A. I. 1]) of the dead [who are not, are no
more|: Mt. ii: 18. c. i. q.to stay, remain, be in a place :
Mt. ii. 13,15; Mk. i.45[L WH br. qv]; v. 21; Lk.i. 80;
see V.4 below. 4. i. q. to be found, the subject being
anarthrous; as, #v dvOpwmos there was (found, Germ. es
gab) a man, etc.: Lk. xvi. 1, 19; xviii. 23; Jn. iii. 1;
iv. 6; v. 2; vi. 10; 1 Co. viii. 5; xii. 4-6; xiv. 10; xv.
44; 1 Jn. v. 16, and often; €oovrar euraixra, Jude 18;
gore, Av, €orae with a negative: ov« éare Sixatos there is
not (sc. found) a righteous man, Ro. iii. 10; add 12, 18;
wndvos ovk éorat ért there shall be no longer time, Rev. x.
6; add, Rev. xxii. 3,5 [ Rec. adds éexet]; xxi. 25 [here exet
stands]; dvdoraats vexp@v ovk €or, 1 Co. xv. 12; yun eivae
avaoraowy, Mt. xxii. 23 and its parall.; Acts xxiii. 8. Here
belong also the phrases eicty, of etc., otrwes etc., there are
(some) who etc. : Mt. xvi. 28; xix. 12; Mk. ix.1; Lk. ix.
27; Jn. vi. 64; Acts xi. 20; ovdels éorww, ds, Mk. ix. 39
sq.; x. 29; Lk. i. 61; xviii. 29; with a noun added, é
> /
ELpLt
npépat eioiv, ev ais etc. Lk. xiii. 14; ris éorer, 6s, Mt. vii. 9
(L Tr WH om. éor.]; xii. 11 [Tr om. WH br. éor.]; €or
6 with a ptep. there is (viz. is not wanting) one that ete.
Jn. v. 32 [?], 45; viii. 50. e. when used of things,
events, facts, etc., edva is i. q. to happen, take place:
viv xpiow éoriv, Jn. xii. 81; yoyyvopds jv, In. vii. 12;
OdpvBos tod daod, Mk. xiv. 2; oxiopa, cxiopara, Jn. ix.
16; 1Co.i.10; xii. 25; Epides, 1 Co.i. 11; aipéoess, 1 Co.
xi. 19; mévOos, mdvos, kpavyn, Rev. xxi. 4; €covras Auot
k. Aowot [RG Tr mrg. in br., al. om. x. Now. ] K. Teropol,
Mt. xxiv. 7; dvayxn peyddn, Lk. xxi. 23; dvdoracw ped-
Aew ceoba, Acts xxiv.15. of times and seasons: yespav
€or, Jn. x. 22; wé, Jn. xiii. 30; Woyxos, Jn. xviii. 18;
kavowy, Lk. xii. 55; éorépa, Acts iv. 3; rpoia, Jn. xviii. 28
[Ree.]; oxoria, Jn. xx. 1; ort, Av dpa,—as extn, Lk.
xxiii. 44; Jn. iv. 6; xix. 14 [LT Tr WH]; i. 39 (40),
etc.; also of feasts: Jn. v. 1, 10; ix. 14; Acts xii. 3; Lk.
xxiii. 54; Mk. xv. 42. univ. 76 éoduevov what will be,
follow, happen: Lk. xxii. 49; more radra €orat; Mt. xxiv.
3; més €ora todro; Lk. i. 34; after the Hebr., cai éora
(equiv. to 7°) foll. by the fut. of another verb: Acts ii.
17 (fr. Joel ii. 28 (iii. 1)) ; 21 (fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)) ; Acts
iii. 23; Ro. ix. 26 (fr. Hos. i. 10 (ii. 1)).
what then is it? i. e. how stands the case? what follows
therefore? Acts xxi. 22; 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. 2eeincs
rapes, to be present; to be at hand; to be in store: oiwos
ovx éorwy, Jn. ii. 3 Tdf.; mapmdddov [Rec.] 6yAov dvros,
when there was present, Mk. viii. 1; add, ii.15; Mt. xii.
10 RG; Heb. viii. 4; otra yap jv mvedpa (dyor), was
not yet present, i.e. had not yet been given [which some
authorities add], Jn. vii. 39; so also in the words e? rvetpa
dyvov éorw [but RG Tr accent dydv éor., cf. Chandler
§ 938], Acts xix. 2; dxovoas . . . évra aira, that there was
an abundance of grain, Acts vii. 12; dvvayis kupiov fv els
TO iaoOa avrovs, was present to heal them, Lk. v. 17.
3. éorw with inf., as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down (see
Passow i. p. 792 sq.; [L. and S. s. v. A. VI.]; see exx.
fr. the O. T. Apocr. in Wahl, Clavis apocryph. p. 155),
it is possible to etc.; with a negative (as more com. in
classic Grk. also), at is impossible: Heb. ix. 5; 1 Co. xi.
20, [cf. W. § 44, 2 b.].
II. civi [as acopula] connects the subject with the
predicate, where the sentence shows who or what a per-
son or thing is as respects character, nature, disposition,
race, power, dignity, greatness, age, ete. 1. univ.:
eyo eipe moeoBurns, Lk. i. 18; ya eius TaBpenr, Lk. i. 19;
épnuds eorw 6 tomos, Mt. xiv. 15; mpodnrns ef ov, In. iv.
19; od ef 6 Xpiords, Mt. xxvi. 63; xaOapoi éore, Jn. xiii.
, ES > ,
TL OVY E€OTLY;
10; tpeis €ore rd Gdas THs yns, Mt. v.13; “Iovdaious evar
éavrovs, Rev. iii. 9, cf. ii. 9, and countless other exx. 2.
eiui, as a copula, indicates that the subject is or is to be
compared to the thing expressed by the predicate: 4
ohpayis pov THs amoctoAns tpets eore, ye are, as it were,
the seal attesting my apostleship, i. e. your faith is proof
that the name of apostle is given me rightfully, 1 Co. ix.
2; 1) emurroAy (sc. cvorarixn, cf. vs. 1) dpeis eore, i. e. ye
yourselves are like a letter of recommendation for me,
or ye serve as a substitute for a letter of recommenda-
176
eupee
tion, 2 Co. iii. 2; rovré €ore 16 capa pov, this which I
now hand to you is, as it were, my body, Mt. xxvi. 26;
Mk. xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; tpeis vads Geot eoré [L txt.
T Tr txt. WH npeis . . . doper] ye [we] are to be regarded
as the temple of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 Co. vi. 19; 6 Oeds
vads avrns eoriv [eatt(v) RG Tr], «. rd dpviov, they are to
be regarded as its temple, they occupy the place of a tem-
ple in the city because present with every one in it, Rev.
xxi. 22. Hence 3. eivas, getting an explicative
force, is often i. q. to denote, signify, import, as 6 aypés
éorwv 6 kéopos, Mt. xiii. 37-39, 19 sq. 22sq.; Lk. viii. 11
sq. 14 sq.; Gal. iv. 24 sq.; Rev. xvii. 15; xix. 8, (Sept.
Gen. xli. 26 sq.; Ezek. xxxvii. 11); rodr gore [so TWH
uniformly, exc. that WH om. v edeAk. in Heb. ii. 14],
Lchm. rouvréorw [exe. in Ro. x. 6, 7, 8; also Treg. exe. in
Mt. xxvii. 46; Mk. vii. 2; Actsi. 19; Ro. ix. 8; x. 6, 7, 8;
sometimes written rodrd ear, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 111; ef.
W. 45; B. 11 (10)], an explanatory formula (equiv. to
Toure onuaivet) which is either inserted into the discourse
as a parenthesis, or annexed to words as an apposition
(cf. W. 530 (493); B.400 (342). Itisto be distinguished
from rodtro dé €or: Todt €or introduces an incidental
explanation for the most part of the language; rovro
dé éorw subjoins an explanatory statement, relating gen-
erally to the thought; (cf. our “that is to say,” and
“that is”); see Ro. i. 12 and Fritzsche ad loc.]- Mt.
xxvii. 46; Mk. vit. 2; Acts i.19; Ro. vii. 18; x. 6-8;
Philem. 12; Heb. ii. 14; vii. 5, etc.; likewise 6 €or, Mk.
iii. 17; vii. 11, 34; Heb. vii. 2; 6 éore peOeppnvevdpevor,
this signifies, when interpreted, ete. Mk. xv. 34; Acts iv.
36; see 6 c. below. 4. In the Bible far more frequent-
ly than in prof. auth., and in the N. T. much oftener in
the historical than in the other books, a participle
without the article serves as the predicate, being
connected with the subject by the verb eiva: (cf. W. § 45,
5 and esp. B. 309 (265) sqq.); and a. so as to form a
mere periphrasis of the finite verb; a. with the Pres-
ent ptcp. is formed—a periphrasis of the pres.: éort
mpocavamAnpovoa . .. kal mepiaaevovaa, 2 Co. ix. 12;—a
periph. of the impf. or of the aor., mostly in Mark and
Luke [B. 312 (268)]: jv xadevdav, Mk. iv. 38; Av mpod-
you, X. 32; jv ovyxabnpevos, xiv. 54; jv dtavevov, Lk. i.
223 joav caOnpevot, v.17; Av exBaddrov, xi. 14; Aoav Kabe-
(opevoe [Lchm., al. ca@npevor], Acts ii. 2, and other exx.;
once in Paul, Phil. ii. 26 éturodv jv ; — a periph. of the
fut.: fcovrat mimrovres [éexm. RG], Mk. xiii. 25. 8B. with
the Perfect ptcp. is formed—a periph. of the aor.
[impf. (?)]: qv éoras, Lk. v. 1; —a periph. of the plpf. :
joav édndvOéres, cvvednrvdvia, Lk. v.17; xxiii. 55; esp.
with the pf. pass. ptep.: jv 7 emtypagy éemyeypaupevn, Mk.
XV. 265 Hv adT@ Kexpnyatiopévor, Lk. ii. 26; jv reOpappevos,
Lk. iv. 16 ; add, viii. 2; xxiii.51; Actsi.17,etc. -y. once
with an Aorist ptep. a periph. of the plpf. is formed:
jv... Brndeis (R GL Tr mrg. BeBAnpévos) ev rH vAaky,
Lk. xxiii. 19 T Tr txt. WH; on the same use of the aor.
sometimes in Grk. writ. cf. Passow i. p. 793; [L and S.
s. v. B. 2; yet cf. B. § 144, 24 fin.]._-b. so as to indi-
cate continuance in any act or state [B. 310 sq,
Seer?
€bae
(266) ]: qv dddoxwr was wont to teach, Mk. i. 22; Lk.
iv. 31; xix. 47; qv [T Tr txt. WH Ader] knpicowr, Mk.
i. 39; Lk. iv. 44; joav vnorevovres held their fast, Mk. ii.
18; qoav ovdAAadodvtes were talking, Mk. ix.4; fv ovyKv-
mrovoa, Lk. xiii. 11; Av deAwv, Lk. xxiii. 8; Fv mpoadex6-
pevos, Mk. xv. 43 (LK. xxiii. 51 mpooedéxero) ; once in
Paul, Gal. i. 23 jay dkovovres. with the Future [ef.
B. 311 (267)]: dora dedepevor, €orat AeAvpévoy, i. q. shall
remain bound, shall remain loosed, Mt. xvi. 19; gorau
matoupevn shall continue to be trodden down, Lk. xxi. 24,
and other exx. c. to signify that one is in the act of
doing something: jy épyduevoy was in the act of coming,
Jn. i. 9 [cf. Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc.]; fv imoorpépwr, Acts
viii. 28. d. the combination of eiyac with a ptep. seems
intended also to give the verbal idea more force and
prominence by putting it in the form of a noun [see B.
and W.u.s.]: qv éxov xtnpatra moAdd (Germ. wohlha-
bend, [Eng. was one that had]), Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22;
éon orwmav, Lk. i. 20; qv exoraccdpevos (obedient, in sub-
jection), Lk. ii. 51 5 tos eEovciay éxwy, be thou ruler over,
LK. xix. 17; Av cuvevdoxar, Acts viii. 1; Cv eiys, Rev. i. 18,
and in other exx. three times in Paul: e? . . . #Amxdres
éopev pdovov if we are those who have only hoped, or to
whom nothing is left but hope, 1 Co. xv. 19; jv... karad-
Adoowyr, the reconciler, 2 Co. v.19; dra €or Adyov éyovra
codias, are things having a reputation of wisdom, Col. ii.
23, (Matthiae § 560 [(so Kiihner § 353 Anm. 3)] gives
exx. fr. prof. auth. in which several words intervene be-
tween etvac and the ptep.). e. Of quite another sort are
those exx. in which eiva: has its own force, being equiv.
to to be found, to be present, to stay, (see I. above), and
the ptcp. is added to express an act or condition of the
subject (cf. B. § 144, 27): év rots pryjpace... qv (was
i. e. stayed) kpatwv, Mk. v. 5; fv d€ éxet (was kept there)
. . « Booxopevn, Mk. v. 11; Mt. viii. 30; joav év rH 686
avaBaivovres, Luther correctly, they were in the road, go-
ing up ete. Mk. x. 32; eioly dvdpes . . . evyny Exovres, Acts
xxi. 23; add, Mt. xii. 10[ RG]; xxvii. 55; Mk. ii. 6, (in
the last two exx. Acav were present) ; Lk. iv. 33; Jn. i. 28;
iii. 23; Acts xxv. 14; Ro. iii. 12, ete.; dvwOév éeorww,
xaraBaivor etc. (insert a comma after éariv), is from above,
xaraBaivov etc. being added by way of explanation, Jas.
i. 17 (cf. B. 310 (266)]. 5. The formula eyo eiys (J
am he), freq. in the Gospels, esp. in John, must have its
predicate supplied mentally, inasmuch as it is evident
from the context (cf. Kriiger § 60, 7); thus, eyo ety,
sc. "Ingots 6 Nag. Jn. xviii. 5 [here L mrg. expresses 6
"Inoovs, WH mrg. Ino.], 6, 8; itis J whom you see, not
another, Mt. xiv. 27; Mk. vi. 50; Lk. xxiv. 36 (Lchm.
in br.); Jn. vi. 20; sc. 6 xaOjpevos x. mpooatrar, Jn. ix.
9; simply epi, J am teacher and Lord, Jn. xiii. 13; ovk
eiul sc. €& adrav, Lk. xxii. 58; Jn. xviii. 25; 2 am not
Elijah, Jn. i. 21; spec. I am the Messiah, MK. xiii. 6 ;
xiv. 62; Lk. xxi. 8; Jn. iv. 26; viii. 24, 28; xill. 19; I
am the Son of God, Lk. xxii. 70 (like x17 ‘38, Deut.
xxxii. 39; Is. xliii. 10); cf. Keim iii. 320 [Eng. trans. vi.
34; Hofmann, Schriftbeweis, i. 63 sq.]. The third pers.
is used in the same way: ékeivds €arw, SC. 6 vids rod Geod,
177
Cth
ELfue
In. ix. 37; sc. 6 mapaddowy epé, Jn. xiii. 26. 6. Of
the phrases having a pronoun in place of a predi-
cate, the following deserve notice: a. ris eit, ef, eoriv,
a formula of inquiry, used by those desiring — either to
know what sort of a man one is whom they see, or what
his name is, Jn. i. 19; viii. 25; xxi. 12; Acts xxvi. 15 —
or that they may see the face of some one spoken of, and
that he may be pointed out to them, Lk. xix. 3; Jn. ix.
36 ; od ris ef 6 with a ptep., who (i. e. how petty) art thou,
that etc.? the question of one administering a rebuke and
contemptuously denying another’s right to do a thing,
Ro. ix. 20; xiv. 4, (Strabo 6, 2, 4 p. 271 od ris ef 6
Tov "Ounpov péyov os pOéypacor;) ; ey@ tis eijur; who
(how small) am J? the language of one holding a modest
opinion of himself and recognizing his weakness, Acts
xi.17, cf. Ex.iii. 11. b. eui ris, like sum aliquis in Lat.,
to be somebody (eminent): Acts v. 363 etvai ru, like the
Lat. aliquid esse, to be something (i. e. something excel-
lent): Gal. ii. 6; vi. 3; in these phrases ris and 7} are
emphatic; cf. Kiihner § 470, 3; [W.170(161); B.114
(100)]; etvai re after a negative, to be nothing, 1 Co. iii.
7, cf. Mey. ad loc.; also in questions having a negative
force, 1 Co. x. 19 [ef. W. § 6, 2]. oddév ets, 1 Co. xiii.
2; 2 Co. xii. 11; ovd€y cory, it is nothing, is of no ac-
count, Mt. xxiii. 16,18; Jn. vill. 54; Acts xxi. 24; 1 Co.
vil.19. ¢. ris eott, e. &. 7 mapaBoAn, what does it mean ?
what is the explanation of the thing? LK. viii. 9 ris ety 9
mapaBorn airy; Acts x. 17 ri dy etn 7O dpapa; Mk. i. 27
ti €ote TovTo; what is this? expressive of astonishment,
Lk. xv. 26 ri etm radra; what might be the cause of the
noise he heard? Lk. xviii. 36; Jn. x. 6 riva jy, a édddee
avrois. ti €ore what does it mean? Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7;
Lk. xx. 17; Jn. xvi. 17 sq.; ri €or ef py Ore, Eph. iv. 9;
see II. 3 above. d. odros, avrn, totré éotw foll. by a
noun, equiv. to in this is seen, is contained, etc. a. is so
employed that the pronoun refers to something which
has just been said: otros yap é€ott 6 vdpos, the law is
summed up in what I have just mentioned, comes to this,
Mt. vii. 12. B. in John’s usage it is so employed that
the pronoun serves as the subject, which is defined by a
noun that follows, and this noun itself is a substitute as
it were for the predicate: airy éoriv ) vikn... 1 miotes
jpav, 1 Jn. v. 43 adry eoriv 7 paptupia Tov Ged, hy ete.
1Jn.v.9 Rec. odros, adrn, rovré éore foll. by dre [B. 105
(92) ; ef. W.161 (152) ]: Jn. ii. 19; 1 Jn.i.5; v.11, 14;
foll. by iva (to say that something ought to be done, or
that something is desired or demanded [cf. W. 338
(317); B. 240 (207)]): Jn. vi. 29, 39 sq.; xv. 12; 1 Jn.
ili. 11, 23; v. 3; foll. by dre ete. Jn. i. 19 [W. 438 (408) ].
7. The participle dv, oda, dv, dvres, dvra, joined to a sub-
stantive or an adjective, has the force of an intercalated
clause, and may be translated since or although I am, thou
art, etc., [here the Eng. use of the ptep. agrees in the main
with the Grk.]: ef odv ipeis, rovnpot dvres, oidare, Mt. vii.
11; add, xii. 34; Lk. xx. 36; Jn. iii. 4; iv. 9; Acts xvi. 21;
Ro. v. 10; 1 Co. viii. 7; Gal. ii. 3; Jas. iii. 4, and often;
twice with other participles, used adjectively [B. 310
(266)]: Svres dnnddXorpropévor, Col. i. 215 eoKoTiopevor
oa
>? fa
ele
[RG, al. sropevor], Eph. iv. 18. 8. Sometimes the
copula gorw (with the accent [see Chandler § 938]) stands
at the beginning of a sentence, to emphasize the truth of
what the sentence affirms or denies: Lk. viii. 11; 1 Tim.
vi. 6; fare Sé wiotts etc. Heb. xi. 1 (although some explain
it here [as a subst. verb], ‘ but faith exists’ or ‘is found,’
to wit in the examples adduced immediately after [see
W.§ 7, 3]); several times so used in Philo in statements
(quoted by Delitzsch on Heb. xi. 1) resembling defini-
tions. od« éorw: Mt. xiii.57; Mk. xii. 27; Acts x. 34;
1 Co. xiv. 33; Jas. iii. 15.
III. cipi joined with Adverbs; 1. with adverbs
of place; a. where? to be, be busy, somewhere: éxei,
Mt. ii. 15; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. 1 [L om. Tr br. jr], ete. ;
évOade, Acts xvi. 28; érw, Jn. xx. 26; ov, Mt. ii. 9; xviii.
20; Actsxvi. 13; dmov, Mk. ii.4; v.40; Jn. vi. 62; Acts
xvii. 1, etc.; mov, Mt. ii. 2; Jn. vii. 11, etc.; Sde, Mt.
xxviii. 6; Mk. ix. 5, ete. b. with adverbs of dis-
tance: dmévayti twos, Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 2);
éxros twos, 2 Co. xii. 2, [3 xwpis r. LT Tr WH]; éeurpo-
obev rivos, Lk. xiv. 2; evros revos, Lk. xvii. 213 évamov
twos, Rev. i.4; vii. 15; paxpay amo twos, Jn. xxi. 8; Mk.
xii. 834; moppo, Lk. xiv. 32; eave, Jn. iii. 31%, [31° G T
WH wmrg. om. the cl.]; of the situation of regions and
places: avrimépa [or -riepa etc. see s. v.] twos, Lk. viii.
26; eyyus, — now standing absol. Jn. xix. 42; now with
gen., Jn. xi. 18; xix. 20, etc.; now with dat., Acts ix. 38;
xxvii. 8. c. whence? to be from some quarter, i. e. to
come, originate, from: modev, Mt. xxi. 25; Lk. xiii. 25,
27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29; xix. 9; ii. 9 (wobev éoriv sc. 6
otvos, whence the wine was procured) ; évredOev, Jn. xviii.
36. 2. with adverbs of quality; ovras eiui, to be
thus or so, to be such; absol. Mt. xiii. 49; with ey tyiv
added, Mt. xx. 26 [here RG T éorat]; ovras érrat, so will
it bei. e. come to pass, Mt. xiii. 40, (49 [see above]) ;
ovtas éoriv or €orat, of things, events, etc., such is or will
be the state of the case [W. 465 (484) ]: Mt. xix. 10; xxiv.
27, 37,39; Mk. iv. 26; Ro. iv. 18 (Gen. xv. 5); so of
persons, Jn. iii. 8. KxaOas €or as, even as, he ete. is, 1
Jn. iii. 2, 7; iv. 17; etui domep tis to be, to do as one,
to imitate him, be like him, Mt. vi. 5 [RG]; Lk. xviii.
11(RGTWH txt.]; gor oo Somep ete. regard him
as a heathen and a publican, i. e. have no fellowship with
him, Mt. xviii. 17; eipt ds or doi tis, to be as i. e. like
or equal to any one, Mt. [vi. 5 LT Tr WH]; xxii. 30;
xxviii. 3; Lk. xi. 44; [xviii. 11 L Tr WH mrg.]; xxii.
27; 1 Co. vii. 29 sq.; ta omhdyyva mepiccorépas eis Spas
éorw he is moved with the more abundant love toward
you, 2 Co. vii. 15. —But see each adverb in its place.
IV. ciui with the oblique cases of substantives or of
pronouns; 1. civai rivos, like the Lat. alicuaus esse,
i. q. to pertain to a person or a thing, denotes any kind of
possession or connection (Possessive Genitive) ; cf. Krii-
ger §47, 6,4sqq.; W.§ 30,5 b.; B.§ 132,11. a. of things
which one owns: éora cod waca [ Ree. mdvra], Lk. iv. 7;
od early 7 ovn atrn, Acts xxi. 11; add, Mk. xii. 7; Jn.
x. 12; xix. 24;—or for the possession of which he is
fitted: rwwds éorw § Bacidela Tr. odp. or Tod beod, he is fit
178
ebpeb
for a share in the kingdom of God, Mt. v. 3,10; xix. 14;
Mk. x. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. madvra tyr éots, all things
serve your interests and promote your salvation, 1 Co.
iii. 21. b. of things which proceed from one: 2 Co. iv.
7. ¢. to be of one’s party, be devoted to one: 1 Co. i. 12;
2 Tim. ii. 19; rod Xpeorod, Mk. ix. 41; Ro. viii. 9; 1 Co.
j.12; 2 Co. x.7; hence also ris 6800 (sc. rod Kupiov) etvat,
Acts ix. 2 [cf. B. 163 (142)]. d. to be subject to one ; to
be in his hands or power: Mt. xxii. 28; Acts xxvii. 23;
Ro. ix. 16; xiv. 8; 1 Co. ili. 23; vi. 19, 20 Rec.; mvetdpa-
ros, Lk.ix.55 Rec. Hence e. tobe suitable, fit, for one:
Actsi. 7. £. tobeofa kind or class: eivat vuxros, oxdrovs,
jpépas, 1 Th. v. 5, S; or to be of the number of [a partit.
gen., cf. B. 159 (139) ]: Acts xxiii. 6; 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim.
i. 15. g. with a gen. of quality: Heb. x. 39; xii. 11.
h. with agen. of age: Mk. v. 42; Lk. iii. 23; Acts iv. 22,
(Tob. xiv.11). With this use (viz. 1) of etvat, those ex-
amples must not be confounded in which a predicate
nominative is to be repeated from the subject (cf. Kriiger
§ 47, 6,1): ov« oti 6 eds vexpov, adda CovTay, SC. Beds,
Mt. xxii. 32, cf. Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx. 38; ratrara pnpara
ov« fore Satworcouevov, sc. pnuata, Jn. X. 21; ovk éorw
dkxatraoracias 6 Geos, adda eipnvyns, 1 Co. xiv. 33; ddXo
BiBrLov, 6 é€ore rHs Cons, Rev. xx. 12; add, 2 Co. ii. 3;
1 Pet. iii. 3. 2. eiui with the dative (cf. Kriiger
§ 48, 3 [who appears to regard the dat. as expressing a~
less close or necessary relationship than the gen.]; W.
§ 31,2); a. fore pot, npiv, etc. it is mine, ours, etc., I, we,
ete., have: Lk. i. 7; ii. 7,10; xiv. 10; Jn. xviii. 10, 39;
xix) 40.3 Acts! vil) Sievilis 21f-s5.6.)Roixs 2,93 1:Coe,
ix. 16; 1 Pet.iv. 11, and often. ov« gore nui [al. tp.] 7
mdaAn mpos ete. we have not a struggle against ete. Eph.
vi. 12; elotv nity we have here etc. Acts xxi. 23; ré
éorat nuiv what shall we have? what will be given us?
Mt. xix. 27; tiv eorw 7 émayyedia the promise belongs
to you, Acts ii. 39. b. etvai tuvi tu to be something to (or
for) some one, used of various relations, as of service,
protection, etc.: oxedos exdoyns €aTi pot odtos, sc. Tov
with inf. Acts ix. 15; écec@é jo pdprupes, Acts [i. 8
RG, ef.] xxii. 15; €copar ait@ Oeds K. adtos ~orat por
vids, Rev. xxi. 7; €xovrai jot ads, 2 Co. vi. 16 [RG];
eis TO eva adrov.... marépa... trois etc. Ro. iv. 11. ce.
eivai twvi tt, to be to one as or for something, to pass for
etc.: 1Co.i. 18; ii. 143 ix. 2, cf. Mt. xviii. 17. d. elvat
Twi tt, to be i. e. conduce, redound to one for (or as)
something (cf. Kriiger § 48, 8, 5): 1 Co. xi. 14 sq.; 2
Co. ii. 15; Phil. i. 28; ovai S€ poi éore, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hos.
ix. 12). e. €orat revi, will come upon, befall, happen to,
one: Mt. xvi. 22; Lk.i. 45. f. Acts xxiv. 110d mXelous
clot poe juépat 7) Sexadvo [L T Tr WH om. 4 and read
deadexa] not more than twelve days are (sc. passed) to
me i.e. it is not more than twelve days. Lk. i. 36 odros
pay exros €otw airy this is the sixth month to (with) her.
Those passages must not be brought under this head in
which the dative does not belong to the verb but de-
pends on an adjective, as xadés, xowawvds, pidos, ete.
V. eiyi with Prepositions and their cases. as
amo Tevos (romov), to come from, be a native of’: Jn.1. 44
ely
(45) [cf. amd, I. 1 a.]. 2. eis ru, a. tohave betaken
one’s self to some place and to be there, to have gone into
(cf. W. § 50, 4 b.; [B. 333 (286)]): eds ofkov, Mk. ii. 1
[RG; al. év]; eis rov dypdv, Mk. xiii. 16 [RG]; es rt.
coitny, Lk. xi. 7; eis rov xéAmov, Jn. i. 18, where cf.
Tholuck, [W. 415 (387); B. u.s.]; (on Acts viii. 20 see
dm@Aea, 2a.). metaph. to come to: eis xodiy mxpias
(hast fallen into), Acts viii.23. b. to be directed towards
a thing: adore thy rictw ipav ... eivae eis Gedv, 1 Pet.
i. 215 to tend to anything: Ro. xi. 36 [W. § 50, 6]. ce.
to be fori. e. conduce or inure to, serve for, [B. 150 (131)
sq.; W. § 29, 3.a.]:1 Co. xiv. 22; Col. ii. 22; Jas. v. 3; pot
eis €Xdxeordv €or, it results for me in, i. e. I account it,
a very small thing, 1 Co. iv. 3, (ets dpeAetav, Aesop. fab.
124, 2). d. In imitation of the Hebr. 777 foll. by 9,
elvat ets Twa or 7. stands where the Greeks use a nomi-
native [W. and B. u. s.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. eis, 3]:
Mt. xix. 5 and Mk. x. 8 and 1 Co. vi. 16 and Eph. v. 31
€covrat eis odpka piay (fr. Gen. ii. 24); 1 Jn. v. 8 eis 16 &y
elowv, unite, conspire, towards one and the same result,
agree in one; 2 Co. vi. 18 (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 1); Heb.
i. 5 (2 S. vii. 14) ; viii. 10. 3. x revos, a. tobeof
i. e. apart of any thing, to belong to, etc. [W. 368 (345) ;
cf. B. 159 (139)]: 1 Co. xii. 15 sq.3 && Tuer, of the num-
ber of: Mt. xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv. 69sq.; Lk. xxii. 58; Jn.
i. 24; vi. 64,71 [RT]; vil. 50; x. 26; xvill.17, 25; Acts
RIES ee DN WiwG sl Ini: 192) Ney. .xvil,1,. (Xen.
mem. 3, 6,17); ék Tov apiOpov twwr, Lk. xxii. 3. b. to
be of i. e. to have originated, sprung, come, from [W. § 51,
1 d.; B. 327 (281 sq.) ]: Lk. xxiii. 7; Jn.i. 46 (47); iil. 31
(6 dv é&k ris yas) ; iv. 22; vii. 52; viii. 23 ; xviii. 36; Acts
iv. 6; xix. 25; xxiii. 34; Gal. iii. 21; 1Jn.iv. 7; és éorw
e& ipav, your fellow-countryman, Col.iv. 9. c. to be of
i. e. proceed from one as the author [W. 366 (344) sq.;
B. 327 (281)]: Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17; Acts v. 38 sq.;
2 Co. iv. 7; 1 Jn. ii. 16; Heb. ii. 11; etvas €& ovtpavod, &&
dvOprev, to be instituted by the authority of God, by
the authority of men, Mt. xxi. 25; Mk. xi. 30; Lk. xx. 4;
to be begotten of one, Mt.i. 20. d. to be of i. e. be con-
nected with one; to be related to, [cf. Win. § 51,1 d.; ef.
in éx, II. 1 a. and 7]: 6 vdpos otk éorw ex miorews, has no
connection with faith, Gal. ili. 12; é& épyav vdpov etvar
(Luth. mit Werken umgehen), Gal. iii. 10; esp. in John’s
usage, to depend on the power of one, to be prompted and
governed by one, and reflect his character: thus etvar éx
rod d:aBdXov, Jn. viii. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 8; &€k« Tod movnpov, 1
Jn. iii. 12; ék rod Kdopov, Jn. xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16; 1 Jn.
iv. 5; when this expression is used of wickedness, it is
equiv. to produced by the world and pertaining to it, 1
Jn. ii. 16 ; opp. to ék rod Oeod etvat, Jn. viii. 47; 1 Jn. iv.
1-3; this latter phrase is used esp. of true Christians, as
begotten anew by the Spirit of God (see yevvaw, 2 d.):
1 Jn. iv. 4,6; v.19; 3Jn. 11; ék ris ddnOeias eivas, either
to come from the love of truth as an effect, as 1 Jn. ii.
21, or, if used of a man, to be led and governed by
the love and pursuit of truth, as Jn. xviii. 37; 1 Jn. iii.
19; 6 dv ek ris yis ex TIS yas éoti, he who is from the
earth as respects origin bears the nature of this his earth-
179
elpob
ly origin, is earthly, Jn. iii. 31. e. to be of i.e. formed
JSrom: Rev. xxi. 21; 1 Co. xi. 8. 4. @vrivt, a. with
dat. of place, to be in i. e. be present, to stay, dwell; a.
prop.: Mt. xxiv. 26; Lk. ii. 49, ete.; on the surface of a
place (Germ. auf), as év r7 656, Mk. x. 32 and elsewhere;
ev T@ ayp@, Lk. xv. 25. at: év de£a Tod Oeod, Ro. viii.
34; to live, dwell, as in a city: Lk. xviii. 3; Acts ix. 10;
Phil. i. 1; 1 Co. i. 2, ete.; of God, év ovpavois, Eph. vi. 9;
of things which are found, met with, in a place: 2 Tim.
ii. 20, etc. B. things so pertaining to locality that one
can, in a proper sense, be in them or be surrounded by
them, are spoken of in the same way metaph. and
improp., as eiva ev t@ hori, €v TH oxoria: 1 Jn. ii. 9,
11; 1 Th. v. 45 év capki, Ro. vii. 5; viii. 8, (see odpé, 4).
b. to bein a state or condition [see B. 330 (284); cf.
W. § 29, 3b. and &, I. 5 e.]: év elpqyy, Lk. xi. 213 ep
€x9pG, Xxili. 12; ev xpipare, ibid. 40; év repsropy, év dkpo-
Bvoria, Ro. iv. 10; é&v dd&, 2 Co. iii. 8, ete.; hence
spoken of ills which one is afflicted with: év pice: aiyaros,
Mk. v. 25; Lk. viii. 43, (év 77 vdc@, Soph. Aj. 2713; in
morbo esse, Cic. Tusc. 3, 4, 9) ; of wickedness in which
one is, as it were, merged, év rats duapriats, 1 Co. xv. 17;
of holiness, in which one perseveres, év miaret, 2 Co. xiii.
5. ¢. tobein possession of, provided with a thing [W.386
(361)]: Phil. iv. 11; év é€ovoia, Lk. iv. 32; év Bape: (see
Bapos,fin.), 1 Th. ii. 7 (6). d. to be occupied in a thing
(Bnhdy. p. 210; [see ev, I.5 g.]): év rH €opri, in cele-
brating the feast, Jn. ii. 23; to be sedulously devoted to
[A. V. give one’s self wholly to] a thing, 1 Tim. iv. 15,
(Hor. epp. 1, 1, 11 omnis in hoc sum). _e. a person or
thing is said to be in one, i. e. in his soul: thus, God (by
his power and influence) in the prophets, 1 Co. xiv. 25;
Christ (i. e. his holy mind and power) in the souls of his
disciples or of Christians, Jn. xvii. 26; 2 Co. xiii. 5; 7d
mvevpa THs GAnOeias, Jn. xiv. 17; friends are said to be
év TH kapdia of one who loves them, 2 Co. vii. 3. vices,
virtues, and the like, are said to be inone: as dddos, Jn.
i.47 (48); ddvxia, Jn. vii. 18; @yvora, Eph. iv. 18 ; duapria,
1 Jn. iii. 5; adnOeca, Jn. viii. 44; 2 Co. xi. 10; Eph. iv.
21; 1Jn.i. 8; ii. 4, (aAnOeta Kal Kpiows, 1 Mace. vii. 18);
ayarn, Jn. xvii. 26; 1 Jn. it. 15; 6 Adyos avrod (7. Beod)
ovk ¢orw ev nuiv, God’s word has not left its impress on
our souls, 1 Jn. i. 10; 7d pas ovK Corw ev are, the effi-
cacy or influence of the light is not in his soul, [rather,
an obvious physical fact is used to suggest a spiritual
truth: the light is not in him, does not shine from within
outwards], Jn. xi. 10; oxoria, 1 Jn.i.5; oxavdadov, 1 Jn.
ii. 10 i. e. there is nothing within him to seduce him to
sin (cf. Diisterdieck and Huther ad loc.). Acts xiii. 15
(if ye have in mind any word of exhortation etc. [W.
218 (204 sq.)]). f. €v rd Oe@ eivac is said a. of
Christians, as being rooted, so to speak, in him, i.e. inti-
mately united to him, 1 Jn. ii.5; v.20; B. of all men,
because the ground of their creation and continued being
is to be found in him alone, Acts xvii. .28. g. witha
dat. of the pers. to be in, —[i. e. either] among the num-
ber of: Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40; Lk. ii. 44; Ro. i. 6;
—f[or, in the midst of: Acts ii. 29; vil. 44 Rec., etc. ]
a
ep
h. noteworthy, further, are the following: gore ru &v ret
there is something (to blame) in one, Acts xxv. 5; some-
thing is (founded [A. V. stand]) in a thing, 1 Co. ii. 5;
ovk €otw ev ovdevi GAXR@ 7 Gwrnpia salvation is (laid up,
embodied) in none other, can be expected from none,
Acts iv. 12; with dat. of the thing, 7s (contained, wrapped
up) in something: Eph. v. 18; Heb. x. 3; 1 Jn. iv. 18.
5. elut eri a. revds, to be on: emi tod daparos, Lk.
Xvil. 31; én ris xepadfs, Jn. xx. 7; to be (set) over a
thing, Acts viii. 27; to preside, rule, over, Ro. ix. 5. b.
revi, to be at [W. 392 (367)]: emi Ovpas, Mt. xxiv. 33;
Mk. xiii. 29. c. revd, tobe uponone: xapis jv emi twa,
was with him, assisted him, Lk. ii. 40; Actsiv. 33; mvedpa
jy emt twa, had come upon one, was impelling him, Lk. ii.
25, ef. Lk. iv. 18; Sept. Is. lxi. 1; add, Gal. vi. 16; etvas
ert 76 avrd, to be (assembled) together [cf. adrés, ILI. 1],
Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44; of cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5 (ace.
to the reading jre for Rec. cvvepyecée). 6. lpi
kata a. tevds, to be against one, to oppose him: Mt.
xii. 30; Lk. ix. 50; xi. 23; Gal. v. 23; Ro. viii. 31 (opp.
to wtmép twos, as in Mk. ix. 40). b. xatd te, according
to something : Kara odpka, kata mvedpa, to bear the char-
acter, have the nature, of the flesh or of the Spirit, Ro.
viii. 5; evar Kar’ dvOpemoy, Gal. i. 11; Kar’ ddnOevay, Ro. ii.
2 7. peta Tevos, a. to be with (i. e. to associate
with) one: Mt. xvii.17; Mk. iii. 14; v.18; Lk. vi. 3; Jn.
iii. 26 ; xii. 17; xvi. 32; Actsix. 39, and often in the Gos-
pels; Rev. xxi. 3; of ships accompanying one, Mk. iv. 36;
of what is present with one for his profit, 2Jn.2; Ro. xvi.
20; Hebraistically, to be with one i. e. as a help, (of God,
becoming the companion, as it were, of the righteous) :
LK. i. 66; Jn. iii. 2; viii. 29; xvi. 32; Acts vii. 9; x. 38; xi.
2 exvill L052 Co. xt. di). bhi ive 9-02 ne oacia ts
xxviii. 20, (Gen. xxi. 20; Judg. vi. 12, ete.). b. to be
(i. e. to codperate) with: Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (Xen.
an. 1, 3, 5 [al. iévac]). 8. ciul mapa a. Tevds, to
(have come and so) be from one: Christ is said eiva
mapa Tov Oeov, Jn. vi. 46; vii. 29; ix. 16, 33; tt mapd
twos, is from i. e. given by one, Jn. xvii. 7. b. revi, to
be with one: Mt. xxii. 25; ov« eivat mapa TO bed is used
to describe qualities alien to God, as mpoowmodnpwWia,
Ro. ii. 11; Eph. vi. 9; adicéa, Ro. ix.14. ©. revd (romov),
by, by the side of: Mk. v. 21; Acts x. 6. 9. mpos
teva (cf. W. 405 (378)], a. towards: mpds éorépay éori
it is towards evening, Lk. xxiv. 29. b. by (turned tow-
ards): Mk. iv. 1. c. with one: Mt. xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3;
ix.19; Lk. ix. 41; Jn.i.1 [cf. Mey. ad loc.]. 10. ctv
Tevt, a. to associate with one: Lk. xxii. 56; xxiv. 44;
Acts xiii. 7; Phil. i. 23; Col. ii. 5; 1Th.iv. 17. b. to be
the companion of one, to accompany him: Lk. vii. 12 [Re
T Tr br. WH]; viii. 38; Actsiv. 13; xxii. Se oMrete 1
18. ¢. to be an adherent of one, be on his side: Acts v.
17; xiv.4[A. V. to hold with], (Xen. Cyr. 5,4,37). 11.
cipi tbmép a. revds, to be for one, tu favor his side:
Mk. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50; Ro. viii. 31, (opp. to eiui xard
twos). b. revd, to be above one, to surpass, excel him:
Lk. vi. 40. 12. id teva [cf. B. 341 (293)], a. to
be under (i. e. subject to) one: Mt. viii. 9 RG T Tr; Ro.
180
3
E€LTTOV
iii. 9; vi.14sq.; Gal. iii. 10, 25; v.18; 1 Tim. vi. 1. b.
to be (locally) under a thing: e.g. under a tree, Jn. i. 48
(49); acloud, 1 Co.x.1. Further, see each preposition
in its own place.
VI. As in classical Greek, so also in the N. T. etué is
very often omitted (cf. Winer § 64, I. 2, who gives nu-
merous exx. [ef. 596 (555) ; 350 (328 sq.) ]; B. 136 (119)
sq.), éoriv most frequently of all the parts: Lk. iv. 18;
Ro. xi. 36; 1 Co. iv. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 16; Heb. v. 13, ete.;
in exclamations, Acts xix. 28, 34; in questions, Ro. ix.
14; 2 Co. vi. 14-16; ri ydp, Phil. i.18; Ro. iii. 3; r/ od»,
Ro. iii. 9; vi. 15; also e7, Rev. xv. 43 etpi, 2 Co. xi. 6;
éopev, €or, 1 Co. iv. 10; eiai, Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. xiii. 8, ete. ;
the impv. Zora, Ro. xii. 9; Heb. xiii. 4 sq.; €ore, Ro. xii.
9; 1 Pet. iii. 8; et in wishes, Mt. xvi. 22; Gal. vi. 16,
ete.; even the subjunc. 7 after iva, Ro. iv. 16; 2Co. viii.
11 [after drs], 13; often the ptep. dv, dvres, as (see B.
§ 144, 18) in Mk. vi. 20; Acts xxvii. 33; in the expres-
sions of ex mepitopns, 6 €k miaTews, of Und vopov, etc.
[Comp.: dr-, év-, (€E<ort,) map-, cvp-map-, ovv-erpe. |
ety, to go, approved of by some in Jn. vii. 34, 36, for
the ordinary efi, but cf. W. § 6,2; [B.50 (43). Comp.:
dr-, ela-, €&-, ém-, ovy-eupe. | *
elvexey, see evexa, eveKev.
el-rep, see ei, III. 13.
elroy, 2 aor. act. fr. an obsol. pres. EMQ [late Epic anu
in composition ; see Veitch] (cf. éros [Curtius § 620]),
Ton. EIMQ (like épwrde, eipwr.; Aico, eidioc.) ; sub-
junc. eir@, impv. ete, inf. eireiv, ptep. elm@v; 1 aor.
era (Jn. x. 84 WGU Tr WH, fre Ps. xxx (xxx)
6; Acts xxvi. 15 L T Tr WH; Heb. iii. 10 Lehm. fr.
Ps. xciv. (xev.) 10; add [Mk. ix. 18 T WH Tr tat.];
Job xxix, 13 <"xxxliogS,) ete...) SiGe XX1ve oleG29) mel
Mace. vi. 11, ete.; cf. Kithner i. 817, [esp. Veitch s. v.
pp. 232, 233]), 2 pers. etas (Mt. xxvi. 25, [64]; Mk. xii.
32 [not TWH; Jn. iv. 17 where T WH again -wes; Lk.
xx. 39]), 3 pers. plur. efrav (often in L T Tr WH [i. e.
out of the 127 instances in which the choice lies between
3 pers. plur. -zov of the Rec. and -ray, the latter ending
has been adopted by L in 56, by T in 82, by Tr in 74, by
WH in 104, cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123], e.g. Mt. xii. 25 xxvii.
6; Jn. xviii. 30, etc.) ; impv. eirdy (Mk. xiii. 4 L T Tr
WH; Lk. x. 40 TWHTrmrg.; Acts xxviii. 26 G LT
Tr WH, [also Mt. iv. 3 WH; xviii. 17 TWH; xxii. 17
T WH Tr mrg.; xxiv.3 WH; Lk. xx. 2T Tr WH; xxii.
(66)67 T Tr WH; Jn. x. 24 TWH], for the Attic etzov,
ef. W.§6, 1 k.; [Chandler § 775]; Fritzsche on Mk. p.
515 sqq.; [but Win. (p. 85 (81)) regards eimdy as impv.
of the 2nd aor.; ef., too, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 348; B. 57
(50); esp. Fritz. 1. c.]), in the remaining persons eitdrw
(Rev. xxii. 17), etrare (Mt. [x. 27; xxi. 5]; xxii. 43 xxvi.
18, etc.; Mk. [xi. 3]; xiv. 14; xvi. 7; [Lk. x. 10; xiii.
32; xx. 33 Col. iv. 17]), e’marwoay (Acts xxiv. 20) also
freq. in Attic, [Veitch s. v.; WH. App. p. 164; Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 219]; ptep., after the form chiefly Ion.,
einas ({Jn. xi. 28 Tr WH]; Acts vii. 37 L T Tr WH
[also xxii. 24; xxiv. 22; xxvii. 35]); the fut. €p@ is from the
Epic pres. eipw [cf. Lob. Technol. p. 137]; on the other
2
€l7T OV
hand, from PEQ come pf. eipyxa, 3 pers. plur. elpjxacw
(Acts xvii. 28), elpnxay (Rev. xix. 3; see yivouac), inf.
cipnxevat, Heb. x. 15 L'TTrWH; Pass., pf. 3 pers.
sing. etpnra, ptep. eipnuevov; plpf. etpnxew; 1 aor. eppeOnv
(Rev. vi. 11; ix.4 and RG T WH in Mt. v. 21 sqq:3
iT Tr WH in Ro. ix. 12, 26; Gal. iii. 16), [“ strict”
(cf. Veitch p. 575)] Attic eppnOnv (Mt. v. 21 sqq.LTr;
RG in Ro. ix. 12, 26; Gal. iii. 16; [ef. B.57 (50); WH.
App. p- 166 ]), ptep. pndeis, pndev; Sept. for 118 ; to speak,
say, whether orally or by letter;
1. with an accus. of the obj.; a. with acc. of the
thing: eieiy Adyov, Mt. viii. 8 Rec.; Jn. ii. 22 (Gah tie
WER) 3" val 3 65 -xvilin 9, 32% phya, Mk. xiv. 72 [Knapp
et al.]; eimeiv Adyor eis rwva, i. q. BAaodnpeiv, Lk. xii. 10;
also xara tivos, Mt. xii. 32; ws eros eimeiv, so to say (a
phrase freq. in class. Grk., cf. Weiske, De pleonasmis gr. p.
47; Matthiae § 545; Delitzsch on Heb. as below; [Kiih-
ner § 585, 3; Kriiger § 55, 1,2; Goodwin § 100; W. 449
(419); 317 (298)]), Heb. vii. 9, (opp. to dxpiBet Aya,
Plat. rep. 1, 341 b.); rv ddnOeav, Mk. v. 33; ddnOevav
€p@, 2 Co. xii. 6; rovro ddnOés eipnxas, Jn. iv. 18 [W. 464
(433) n.J; rleimw; what shall I say? (the expression of
one who is in doubt what to say), Jn. xii. 27; mas pet rd
aunv ..
what shall we say? i. e. what reply can we make? or, to
what does that bring us? only in the Ep. to the Ro.
[W. § 40, 6] viz. iii.5; vi.1; vii. 7; ix. 14, 30; with mpds
radra added, viii. 31; eimety ru mepi tivos, Jn. vii. 39; x.
41. Sayings from the O. T. which are quoted in the
New are usually introduced as follows: 16 fnOev ino rod
[LT Tr WH om. rod] xupiov d:a rod mpodnrov, Mt. i. 22 ;
11.155; tro rod Oeov, Mt. xxii. 31; bd tod mpoPpnrov Rec.
Mt. xxvii. 35, cf. ii. 17; 7d pyOev dia twos, Mt. ii. 17 LT
Prevod noo. lve aee vite 175 extol is xls) Sols exx1. 4s
XXVil. 9; 76 elpnuevoy dia Tov mpod. Acts li. 16; Td eipnye-
voy, Lk. ii. 24; Acts xiii. 40; Ro. iv. 18; éppéOn, Mt. v.
21, ete. ; xadws cipnxerv,Heb.iv. 3. b. with acc. of the
pers. to speak of, designate by words: ov etmov, Jn. i. 15
{(not WH txt.) ; B. 377 (323); cf. Ro. iv. 1 WH txt. (say
of )]; 6 pnOets, Mt. iii. 3. elmetv rea kadas, to speak well
of one, praise him, Lk. vi. 26, (€d etmetv teva, Hom. Od. 1,
302); xaxas, to speakill of one, Acts xxiii. 5 fr. Ex. xxii.
28; cf. Kihner § 409, 2; 411, 5; [W. § 32, 1b. 8.; B.
146 (128)]. cc. with an ellipsis of the acc. aird (see
airés, I. 3): Lk. xxii. 67; Jn. ix. 27; xvi. 4, ete. od
elas (sc. avrd), i. e. you have just expressed it in words;
that’s it; itis just as you say: Mt. xxvi. 25, 64, [a rabbin-
ical formula; for exx. cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein on vs.
25; al. seem to regard the answer as non-committal,
e.g. Origen on vs. 64 (opp. iii. 910 De la Rue); Wiinsche,
Erlaut. der Evang. aus Talmud usw. on vs. 25; but cf.
the éyd eZpe of Mk. xiv. 62; in Mt. xxvi. 64 WH mrg.
take it interrogatively ]. 2. the person, to whom a
thing is said, is indicated a. by a dat. : etmetv ri ru, Lk.
vii. 40, and very often; etov ipiv sc. adrd, I (have just)
told it you; this is what I mean; let this be the word: Mt.
xxviii. 7; cf. Bnhdy. p. 381; [Jelf § 403, 1; Goodwin
§ 19,5; esp. (for exx.) Herm. Vig. p. 746]. tui epi
.; 1 Co. xiv. 16; ri épodpev; or ri ody epodpev;
181
>
€LTTOV
twos [cf. W. § 47, 4], Mt. xvii. 13; Jn. xviii. 34. to say
anything to one by way of censure, Mt. xxi. 3; to cast
in one’s teeth, épetré poe tiv mapaBornv, Lk. iv. 23. to
tell what anything means, e. g. rd puornpiov, Rev. xvii. 7.
b. by the use of a prep.: mpds rwa [ef. B. 172 (150);
Kriiger § 48, 7,13], to say (a thing) to one, as Lk. iv.
23; v. 4; xii. 16, and many other places in Luke; to
say a thing in reference to one [W. 405 (378)], Mk.
xii, 12; Lk. xviii. 9; xx. 19. 3. elroy, to say, speak,
simply and without an acc. of the obj., i. e. merely to de-
clare in words, to use language; a. with the addition ef
an adverb or of some other adjunct: dnolws, Mt. xxvi. 35;
a@oavtas, Mt. xxi. 30; xaOms, Mt. xxviii. 6; Lk. xxiv. 24;
Ju. i. 233 vii. 385; efre dca mapaBorjs, making use of a
parable [see dud, A. IIT. 3] he spake, Lk. viii. 4; év napa-
Bodais, Mt. xxii. 1; with an instrumental dative: ede
Ady@, say in (using only) a (single) word, sc. that my ser-
vant shall be healed, Mt. viii. 8 (where Rec. Adyov) ; Lk.
vii. 7. b. with the words spoken added in direct dis-
course; so a hundred times in the historical books of the
N.T., as Mt. ix. 4sq.; viii. 32; [xv. 4 L Tr WH], etc.;
1 Co. xii. 15; [2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt. T Tr WH, (cf. 4 below) ];
Heb.1.0),.iliy LO spxe 4) lone Wi eS0lsixtin 2 len ass
ii. 83,11; Jude 9; Rev. vii. 14; méuwas eirev he said by
a messenger or messengers, Mt. xi. 2 sq. “The following
and other phrases are freq. in the Synoptic Gospels: 6 dé
drroxpwbeis etrev, as Mt. iv. 4; xv. 133 Kai amoxpibels eimev,
Mt. xxiv. 4; dmoxpiOetca 1) pnrnp eter, Lk. i. 60; dmoxpibeis
6 Sipov etrev, Lk. vii. 43, etc. ; droxpiOevres S€ etrroy [-rav
T Tr WH], Lk. xx. 24; but John usually writes dmexpiOn
kal eimev: Jn. 1.48 (49) 3 11.19; iii. 103 iv. 10, 18,17; vi.
26, 29; vii. 16, 20[ RG], 52; ix.11[RGLbr.], 30, 36 [L
Tr mrg. om. WH br.«. efm.]; xiii. 7; xiv. 23; xviii. 30;
—[elrav aite héyovres, Mk. viii. 28 T WH Tr mrg., cf.
xii. 26]. c. foll. by dre: Mt. xxviii. 7; Mk. xvi. 7; Jn.
vi. 86; vii. 42; vill. 55; xi. 40; xvi. 15; xviii. 8; 1 Jn.i.6,
8,10; 1Co.i. 15; xiv. 23; xv. 27 [L br. WH mrg. om.
éri]. a. foll. by ace. and inf.: ri ody épodpev ABpadp tov
rarépa hpav evpnxevac [WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. evpye. ;
cf. 1 b. above] xara oapxa; Ro. iv. 1. 4. eimeivy some-
times involves in it the idea of commanding [cf. B. 275
sq. (237)]: foll. by the inf., etre So6jvae abrh payeiv, Mk.
v.43; elmé 7G adeAPH pov pepivagGai per’ Epov THv KAnpo-
voniav, Lk. xii. 13; 60a dv etmwow ipiv (se. thpew [in-
serted in R G]), rnpeire, Mt. xxiii. 3, (Sap. ix. 8). foll.
by the ace. and inf., 6 eimav &« oxdrous pas Ada, 2 Co.
iv. 6[R GL mrg., ef. B. 273 sq. (235); but L txt. T Tr
WH read Adpwet, thus changing the construction fr. the
ace. with infin. to direct discourse, see 3b. above];
eirev ait@ (for €avrd, see atrov) pornOivat tors Sovrous
rovrous, he commanded to be called for him (i. e. to him)
these servants, Lk. xix. 15; cf. W. § 44, 3 b.; Kriiger
§ 55, 8, 13. foll. by va with the subjune.: Mt. iv. 3; xx.
21; Lk. iv. 3; to etmetv is added a dat. of the pers. bidden
to do something, Mk. iii. 9; Lk. x. 40 cf. iv. 3; Rev.
vi. 11; ix. 4. “Moreover, notice that va and édpa are
often used by the later poets after verbs of command-
ing;” Hermann ad Vig. p. 849: cf. W. § 44.8; [B. 237
el ws
(204) ]. 5. By a Hebraism eimeiv év éavr@ (like WR
i353, Deut. viii. 17; Ps. x. 6 (ix. 27) ; xiii. (xiv.) 1; Esth.
vi. 6) is equiv. to to think (because thinking is a silent
soliloquy) : Mt. ix. 3; Lk. vii. 39; xvi.3; xviil. 4 (else-
where also Aéyew év Ear) ; and elmetv ev rH Kapdia avrov
amounts to the same, Lk. xii. 45; Ro. x. 6; but in other
passages elroy, €Aeyor, év Eavrois isi. q. év dhAnAos: Mt.
xxi. 38; see Aéyo, II. 1d. 6. eireiv twva with a pred-
icate accus. to call, style, one: éxeivous etme Oeovs, Jn. xX.
35; tas elpnxa pidrovs, Jn. xv. 15; (Hom. Od. 19, 334;
Xen. apol. Socr. § 15; Leian. Tim. § 20). [Comp.: dvr-,
arr-, mpo- etrov. |
el-trws, see ei, III. 14.
elonvetw; (elpnyn) ; 1. to make peace: 1 Mace. vi.
60; Dio Cass. 77, 12, ete. 2. to cultivate or keep peace,
i. e. harmony ; to be at peace, live in peace: 2 Co. xiii. 11;
év ddAndots, Mk. ix. 50; év éavrots [T Tr avrois], 1 Th.
y. 13; pera twos, Ro. xii. 18; (Plat. Theaet. p. 180 b.;
Dio Cass. 42, 15, etc.; Sept.).*
elphvn, -ns, 7, (apparently fr. eZpw to join; [al. fr. eipo
i,q. Aéyw; Etym. Magn. 303, 41; Vanicek p. 892; Lob.
Path. Proleg. p. 194; Benfey, Wurzellex. ii. p. 7]), Sept.
chiefly for DYoW; [fr. Hom. down]; peace, i. e. loa
state of national tranquillity ; exemption from the rage and
havoc of war :*Rev. vi. 4; moAX7 eipnyn, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ;
7a [WH txt. om. rd] mpds efpnvnv, things that look tow-
ards peace, as an armistice, conditions for the restoration
of peace, Lk. xiv. 32; airetoOa cipnynv, Acts xii. 20;
exe elpnyny, of the church free from persecutions, Acts
ix; 315 2. peace between individuals, i. e. harmony,
concord: Mt. x. 34; Lk. xii. 51; Acts vii. 26; Ro. xiv.
17; 1 Co. vii. 15; Gal. v.22; Eph.ii.17; iv. 3; i.g. the
author of peace, Eph. ii. 14 [cf. B. 125 (109)]; &v eipnyn,
where harmony prevails, in a peaceful mind, Jas. iii. 18;
686s eipyyns, way leading to peace, a course of life pro-
moting harmony, Ro. iii. 17 (fr. Is. lix. 8) ; per’ eipnyns,
in a mild and friendly spirit, Heb. xi. 31; moveiy eipnyny,
to promote concord, Jas. iii. 18 ; to effect it, Eph. ii. 15;
(nretv, 1 Pet. iii. 115 Stcxecv, 2 Tim. ii. 22; with perd
mavrov added, Heb. xii. 14; ra rips eipnyns Sidkew, Ro.
xiv. 19 [ef. B. 95 (83); W. 109 (103 sq.)]. spec. good
order, opp. to dkatactaciu, 1 Co. xiv. 33. 3. after the
Hebr. pio, security, safety, prosperity, felicity, (because
peace and harmony make and keep things safe and pros-
perous): Lk. xix. 42; Heb. vii. 2; elpnun x. dogddeta,
opp. to ddreOpos, 1 Th. v. 35 ev elpyvy eoti ra Smdpxovra
«irov, his goods are secure from hostile attack, Lk. xi.
1; dmaye eis eipnyny, Mk. v. 34, and mopevou els ep. Lk.
vii. 50; viii. 48, a formula of wishing well, blessing, ad-
dressed by the Hebrews to departing friends (ayow4 EW)
1S. 1.17; xx. 42, ete.; properly, depart into a place or
state of peace; , cf. B. 184 (160)]) ; mopever Oat ev eipnvn,
Acts xvi. 36, and bmdyere év elpqup, Jas. ii. 16, go in peace
i. €. may happiness attend you; drtodvew twa per’ eiphns,
to dismiss one with good wishes, Acts xv. 33; év eipiyn,
with my wish fulfilled, and therefore happy, Lk. ii. 29
(see drodvo, 2 a.); mporéurew twa év eip. free from dan-
ger, safe, 1 Co. xvi. 11 [al. take it of inward peace or
182
elpnviKos
of harmony; cf. Mey. ad loc.]. The Hebrews in invok-
ing blessings on a man called out 77 vi7w (Judg. vi-
23; Dan. x. 19) ; from this is to be derived the explana-
tion of those expressions which refer apparently to the
Messianic blessings (see 4 below): eipyyn TO oiko
TovT@, let peace, blessedness, come to this household, Lk.
x. 53 vids elpnyns, worthy of peace [cf. W. § 34, 3 N. 2;
B. 161 sq. (141) ], Lk. x. 6; €AOérw 9 eipnyn em’ adror, let
the peace which ye wish it come upon it, i. e. be its lot,
Mt. x. 13; to the same purport émavaz. 7 cip. bp. én’ abror,
Lk. x. 6; 4 eip. tp. mpos tpas emorpapnre, let your peace
return to you, because it could not rest upon it, i. e. let
it be just as if ye had not uttered the wish, Mt. x. 13.
4. spec. the Messiah’s peace: Lk. ii. 14; 680s etpnyms, the
way that leads to peace (salvation), Lk. i. 79; eip. &v
ovpaya, peace, salvation, is prepared for us in heaven,
Lk. xix. 38; evayyehiCecOa eipnynv, Acts x. 36. 5. ace.
to a conception distinctly peculiar to Christianity, the
tranquil state of a soul assured of its salvation through
Christ, and so fearing nothing from God and content with
its earthly lot, of whatsoever sort that is: Ro. viii. 6; &
eipnvn sc. dvres is used of those who, assured of salvation,
tranquilly await the return of Christ and the transfor-
mation of all things which will accompany that event,
2 Pet. iii. 14; [mAnpody mdons . . . eipnyns év TH moTevew,
Ro. xv. 13 (where L mrg. ev. eipqvy)]; Exew €v Xpiore
eipnyny (opp. to ev ro Koopm Odie Exe), In. xvi. 33;
éxew eip. mpos tT. Gedv, with God, Ro. v. 1, (eip. mpos twa,
Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 b.; ef. Diod. 21, 12; [cf Mey. on Ro.
loc. ; W. 186 (175) ; 406 (379)]); evayyeAiler bat eipnyny,
Ro. x. 15[RG Tr mrg. in br.]; 76 evayyéAcov rijs eipqyns,
Eph. vi. 15 ; in the expression efpnynv apinut krA. Jn. xiv.
27, in which Christ, with allusion to the usual Jewish
formula at leave-taking (see 3 above), says that he not
merely wishes, but gives peace; 7 eipnyy tod Xpiorov,
which comes from Christ, Col. iii. 15 [Rec. Oeov]; rod
Geod, Phil. iv. 7, [cf.W.186 (175)]. Comprehensively of
every kind of peace (blessing), yet with a predominance
apparently of the notion of peace with God, eipnyn is used
—in the salutations of Christ after his resurrection, eipnyy
ipiv (095 didv), Lk. xxiv. 36 [T om. WH reject the
cl.]; Jn. xx. 19, 21, 26; in the phrases 6 kipios ris eipnyns,
the Lord who is the author and promoter of peace, 2
Th. iii. 16; 6 Oeds ris cip. Ro. xv. 83; xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii.
11; Phil. iv. 9; 1 Th. v. 23; Heb. xiii. 20; in the salu-
tations at the beginning and the close of the apostolic
EppassRo. i272 1 Comiys:; QiCosii2it) Gal43 avi. Ge
Bphais2'ssvis 23s, Phils oeyCols 1.2): ela thane iebowhs
i. 25 iil. 16; 1 Tim.i. 2; 2 Tim.i. 2; Tit.i.4; [Philem. 3];
1 Pet.i. 2; v.14; 2 Pet.i.2; 2Jn.3; 3 Jn. 15 (14); [Jude
2]; Rev. i. 4. Cf. Kling in Herzog iv. p. 596 sq. 8. v.
Friede mit Gott; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 83 b.;
[ Otto in the Jahrbb. fiir deutsch. Theol. for 1867, p. 678
sqq.; cf. W. 549 (511)]. 6. of the blessed state of
devout and upright men after death (Sap. iii. 8): Ro.
ii. 10.*
elpnvixds, -7,-dv, 1. relating to peace: émorjpat, the
arts of peace, Xen. oec. 1, 17; épya, ibid. 6,15; xpeia,
>
ElpnvoTroréw
Diod. 5, 31; often in 1 Macc. 2. peaceable, pacific,
loving peace: Jas. iii. 17; (Plat., Isoc., al. ; Sept.). 3.
bringing peace with it, peaceful, salutary, (see eiphyn, 3) :
Heb. xii. 11.*
elpnvo-movew, -@: [1 aor. elpyvoroinca]; (cipyvorows) ;
to make peace, establish harmony: Col. i. 20. (Prov. x.
10; in Mid., Hermes ap. Stob. eclog. ph. 1, 52 [984].)*
elpnvorrovds, -dv, masc. a peace-maker (Xen. Hell. 6, 3,
4; Dio Cass.) ; pacific, loving peace: Mt. v. 9; [others
(cf. A. V.) dispute this secondary meaning ; see Meyer
ad loc.].*
elpw, fut. épd, see efzov.
-els, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting
entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards,
for, among. It is used
A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going,
coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying,
throwing, sending, ete. ; 1. of a place entered, or
of entrance into a place, into; and a. it stands be-
fore nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or
one in which an object can be hidden: as eis (ryv) rdw,
Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; eés r.
otkov, Mt. ix. 7; cuvaywynv, Acts xvii. 10; mdotov, Mt. viii.
23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; @ddaccay, Mt. xvii. 27;
GBuvooov, Lk. viii. 31; ovpavdv, Lk. ii. 15; xédcpov, In. i.
9; iii. 19, etce.; ra idia, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6;
amoOnkny, Mt. iii. 12; ets ra Sra, Lk. i. 443 els ras Cdvas
or Cay, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; eis dépa, 1 Co. xiv.
9; eis wip, Mk. ix. 22, etc. ; eis adrdv, of a demon entering
the body of a man, Mk. ix. 25. with acc. of pers. (Germ.
zu jemand hinein), into the house of one (cf. Kiihner
§ 432,1,1a.; [Jelf § 625, 1a.]): ets rv Avdiav, Acts
xvi. 40 Rec., but here more correctly mpdés with GL T Tr
WH; cf. W. § 49, a, a. (els euaurdy, Sap. viii. 18). yivopat
eis with ace. of place, see yivoua, 5g. b. before names
of cities, villages, and countries, eis may be rendered
simply to, towards, (Germ. nach ; as if it indicated merely
motion towards a destination; [cf. W. § 49, a, a.]); as
eis ‘IepoodAupa, eis Aapackdér, eis Bepotap, etc. ; eis Sraviay,
Atyurroy, Tad.Aaiay, ete. ; but it is not to be so translated
in such phrases as ets tv Iovdaiav yny, etc., Jn. iii. 22 ;
Mt. ii. 12 cf. 20, 21; eis ra pépyn rhs Tadudalas, Mt. ii. 22,
etc. cc. elliptical expressions are —els ddov, sc. ddpuov,
Acts ii. 27 [Rec.], 31 [not T WH]; see Gdns, 2. emarodal
eis Aauackéy, to be carried to D., Acts ix. 25 7 diaxovia
pou 7 eis [L Trmrg. ev] ‘Iepove. (see in diaxovia, 3), Ro.
xv. 31; cf. Buhdy. p. 216. dd. eis means among (in
among) before nouns comprising a multitude; as, es
rovs Anards, Lk. x. 36; eis [L mrg. éni] ras &xdvOas, Mk.
iv. 7 (for which Lk. viii. 7 gives év péow trav dxavOav) ;
or before persons, Mk. viii. 19 sq.; Lk. xi. 49; Jn. xxi.
23; Acts xviii. 6; xx.'29; xxii. 21, 30; xxvi. 17; see
drooté\Adw, 1 b.; or before a collective noun in the
singular number, as eis rév Sjyov, Acts xvii. 5 ; xix 30's
sis rov Syov, Acts xiv. 14; eis rov Aadv, Actsiv.17. 2.
If the surface only of the place entered is touched or
occupied, eds, like the Lat. in, may [often] be rendered
on, upon, (Germ. auf), [sometimes by unto, — (idioms
183
7
ELS
| vary) ], to mark the limit reached, or where one sets foot.
Of this sort are eis ro mépav [A. V. unto], Mt. viii. 18;
xiv. 22; Mk. iv. 35; eis rv yqv, Lk. xii. 49 (L T Tr WH
emt); Acts xxvi. 14; Rev. viii. 5,7; ix. 35 xii. 4,9; els
THY Krivnv, Rev. ii. 22; eis dddv, Mt. x. 5; Mk. vi. 8; Lk.
i. 795; eis tHv 6ddv, Mk. xi. 8* [L mrg. év w. dat., 8° RG
L}; eis 7. dypév, Mt. xxii. 5; Mk. xiii. 16; ets rd Spos
[or eis dp.; here A. V.uses into], Mt. v. 1; xiv. 23; xv.
29; xvii.1; Mk. iii. 13; ix. 2; Lk. ix.28; Jn. vi.3, etc.;
els Ta Oe€id, Jn. xxi. 6 ; ometpew ets re (rip odpka), Gal. vi.
8 [here A. V. unto; cf. Ellic. ad loc.]; dvaminrew eis
tonov, Lk. xiv. 10; d€xopae ets ras dyxadas, Lk. ii. 28 ;'
TumTew eis THY Kearny, Mt. xxvii. 30, [els thy ovayédva,
Lk. vi. 29 Tdf.; pamigew eis r. cvaydva, Mt. v. 39 LT Tr
txt. WH, where RG ézi], and in other phrases. 3.
of motion (not into a place itself, but) into the vicinity
of a place; where it may be rendered to, near, towards,
(cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 81 sq. [for exx. only]): eds r.
Oadacoay, Mk. iii. 7G LT Trmrg.; ets réduv, Jn. iv. 5 cf.
28; els TO pynueior, Jn. xi. 31, 38; xx. 1, 3 sq. 8; eyyiCew
eis etc. Mt. xxi. 1; Mk. xi. 1; Lk. xviii. 85; xix. 29; es
tous Ppaypovs, Lk. xiv. 23; mimrew eis r. ré8as, at, Jn. xi. 32
[T Tr WH apds]; KAtvew 16 mpdcemor eis tr. yiv, Lk. xxiv.
5; els tnv xetpa, on, Lk. xv. 22. 4. of the limit to
which ; with acc. of place, as far as, even to: Ndumew
éx...ets, Lk. xvii. 24; with acc. plur. of pers. to, unto:
Acts xxiii. 15 (cis dyas, for R G pds) ; Ro. v. 12; xvi. 19;
2 Co. ix. 5 [L. Tr mpds]; x. 14. 5. of local direc-
tion; a. after verbs of seeing: émaipew rovs dpOah-
pos els Tt, twa, Lk. vi. 20; Bdérew, Lk. ix. 62; In. xiii.
22; Acts iii. 4; dvaBdémwew, Mk. vi. 41; Lk. ix. 16;
Acts xxii. 13; éuBdemew, Mt. vi. 26; drevitew, q.v. b.
after verbs of saying, teaching, announcing,
ete. (cf. Germ. die Rede richten an ete.; Lat. dicere ad
or coram; [Eng. direct one’s remarks to or towards];
exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Bnhdy. p. 217; Passow
i. p. 802°; [L. and S. s.v. I. b. 3]; Kriiger § 68, 21, 6):
Knpvooelv, aS fv Knpvoder eis Tas cuvaywyas aiTay eis
éAnv tHy Tadur. preaching to the synagogues throughout all
Galilee, Mk. i. 89 (Rec. év rais ovvay., as Lk. iv. 44
[where T WH Tr txt. now eis; cf. W. 416 (387) ; B. 333
(287); but in Mk. 1c. T Tr txt. WH now read 4\6ep
knpvooav Ktr.]); Td evayy. els Sdov T. Kdcpov, Mk. xiv. 9;
eis mavta Ta €Ovn, Mk. xiii. 10; Lk. xxiv. 47; els tyas, 1
Th. ii. 9; dmayyé drew [Ree. dvayy.] rv eis, Mk. v. 14; Lk.
Vili. 34; yropitew, Ro. xvi. 26; evayyedicerOa, 2 Co. x.
16; eds duas, 1 Pet. 1.25; Neves [ Rec. ; al. Aadeiv] eis rov
kéopov, Jn. viii. 263 [Aadeiv rov Aéyov eis rHy Tepyny, Acts
xiv. 25 T WH mrg.]; Stapapripec Oa and paprupeiv, Acts
xxiii. 11.
II. of Time; 1. it denotes entrance into a
period which is penetrated, as it were, i. e. duration
through a time, (Lat. in; Germ. hinein, hinaus) : eis rov
alava, and the like, see aidv, 1 a.3 ets rd dunvexés, Heb.
vii. 3; x. 1, 12, 14; els &rn moddad, Lk. xii. 195 7H eme-
pwoxovon (fhuépa) eis play caBBdrev, dawning into [A. V.
towards] the first day of the week, Mt. xxviii.1. Hence
2. of the time in which a thing is done; because he
els
who does or experiences a thing at any time is conceived
of as, so to speak, entering into that time: eis roy Katpov
avray, in their season, Lk. i. 20; efs 1d peédAov se. €ros,
the next year, [but s. v. péAAw, 1. Grimm seems to take
the phrase indefinitely, thenceforth (cf. Grk. txt.) ], Lk.
xiii. 95 efs 7d peraéd odBBaror, on the next sabbath, Acts
xiii. 42; els rd waduv, again (for the second, third, time),
2 Co. xiii. 2. 3. of the (temporal) limit for which
anything is or is done; Lat. an; our for, unto: Rev.
ix. 15; eis rv avpiov sc. nuépay, for the morrow, Mt. vi.
34; Actsiv.3; eis nuépay kpicews, 2 Pet. ii. 9; ili. 7; ets
npépay Xp.orov, Phil. i. 10; ii. 165 eis jpépav dmodutpo-
cews, Eph. iv. 30. 4. of the (temporal) limit to
which; unto i. e. even to, until: Acts xxv. 21; 1 Th. iv.
15; els éxetynv thy nuepav, 2 Tim. i. 12. On the phrase
els TeNos, See TEAosS, 1 a.
B. Used MeTAPHORICALLY, eis I. retains the force
of entering into anything, 1. where one thing is
said to be changed into another, or to be separated into
parts, or where several persons or things are said to be
collected or combined into one, etc.: droBaivew els TH,
Phil. i. 19; yiveoOat eis Tu, see yivopa, 5 d.; eivat els TL,
see eipi, V. 2 [a. fin.] ec. and d.; orpépew re eis Tt, Rev.
xi. 6; peraorpepew, Acts ii. 20; Jas. iv. 9; peradAdocew,
Ro. i. 26; peracynpari¢erOa, 2 Co. xi. 13 sq.3; cvvoixo-
Sopetobar, Eph. ii. 22; xri¢ew riva eis, Eph. ii. 15; Aap-
Baveww tu eis, Heb. xi. 8; AoyiCerOar eis Te, see NoyiCouat,
la. éoxiobn eis do, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38, (Polyb.
2, 16,11 oxiterac eis Sto pépn); Séew eis Seopds, Mt. xiii.
30 [G om. Tr WH br. eis]; ets év redervodcOa, Jn. xvii.
23 ; ouvayew eis &v, Jn. xi.52. 2. after verbs of going,
coming, leading, etc., eis is joined to nouns desig-
nating the condition or state into which one passes,
falls, etc. : eloépyeoOar eis rHv BaciX. Tey ovpay. OY Tod Geod,
see Buowrela, 3 p. 97°; els tT. Conv, Mt. xviii. 8; xix. 17;
xxv. 46; eis tr. yapav, Mt. xxv. 21, 23; eis kdNaow aidnor,
ib. 46; épxeoOae eis xpiow, In. v. 24; cioépev, eivépy.
eis metpacpov, Mt. vi. 13; xxvi.41; Mk. xiv. 38 [T WH
€AOnre] 5 EpxeaOar eis 7d xetpov, Mk. v. 26 ; eis dmedeypdy,
Acts xix. 27; eis mpoxomny, Phil. i. 12; peraBaiverv eis r.
Conv, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 145 mopeverOar ets Odvarov, Lk.
xxii. 335 bmdyew eis draddcav, Rev. xvii. 8,11; imdyew
or mopeverOat eis eipnyny, see elpnyn, 3; tmoarpépew eis
diapOopdy, Acts xiii. 34; cuvrpéxew eis dvdxyvow, 1 Pet.
iv. 4; BadAew eis Odixpw, Rev. ii. 22; meperpérew els
paviay, Acts xxvi. 24; peraorpépew and orpéedew eis Te,
Acts ii. 20; Rev. xi. 6; d8nyeiv eis r. dAnOetav [T ev 77 aA.],
Jn. xvi. 13; aiyparorifew eis bmaxonv, 2 Co. x. 5; Tapa-
idovar eis Odixrw, Mt. xxiv. 9; els Odvarov, 2 Co. iv. 11;
eis kpiza Oavarov, Lk. xxiv. 20; ovykAeiew eis ameiOecar,
Ro. xi. 325 euminrew eis kpipa, eis dvedcopor Kai mayida,
els metpacpuov, 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.3 vi. 9. 3. it is used of
the business which one enters into, i. e. of what he
undertakes : eicépyeoOat eis T. xdrov ris, to take up and
carry on a labor begun by another, Jn. iv. 38; rpéxeuw
eis modepov, Rev. ix. 9; epxopat eis droxadiwers, I come,
in my narrative, to revelations i. e. to the mention of
them, 2 Co. xii. 1.
184
>
Ely
II. eds after words indicating motion or direc-
tion or end; 1. it denotes motion to something,
after verbs of going, coming, leading, calling, etc., and
answers to the Lat. ad, to: xadeiv tia eis yapuov, yapous,
deimvoy, ete. to invite to, etc., Mt. xxii. 3; Lk. xiv. 8, 10;
Jn. ii. 23 xadeiv twa eis perdvo.ay, etc., Lk. v. 32; 2 Th.
ii. 14; dyew twa eis perdvoiav, Ro. ii. 4; emorpéedpen eis
70 pas, Acts xxvi. 18; éxrpémer@at eis paratodoyiay, 1
Tim. i. 6; perarideaOat eis €repov evayyer. Gal. i. 6; xopy-
ca els peravoray, 2 Pet. ii. 9, etc. 2. of ethical di-
rection or reference; a. univ. of acts in which the
mind is directed towards, or looks to, something : Bdérew
els mpdcwnov twos (see Brera, 2¢.); dmoBdérew eis T.-
pucbarrodociav, Heb. xi. 26; apopay eis... Inoody, ib.
xii. 2 (see A. I. 5 a. above); muotevew eis twa, and the
like, cf. under moreva, riots, €Amico, [Amis], ete. ; éme-
Ovpiav éyew eis m1, directed towards etc. Phil. i. 23;
Aéyew eis twa, to speak with reference to one, Acts ii. 25
(Diod. Sic. 11, 50); A€yew te eis m1, to say something
in reference to something, Eph. v. 32; Aadeiv tu els Te,
to speak something relating to something, Heb. vii. 14;
épvobew els tt, to swear with the mind directed towards,
Mt. v. 35; evOoxety ets teva, Mt. xii. 18 [RG]; 2 Pet. i.
17. b. forone’s advantage or disadvantage; a.
for, for the benefit of, to the advantage of: eis juas, Eph.
1.19; ets tas, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [but WH br.]; Eph. iii. 2;
Col. i. 25; mwdovureiv eis Oeov, to abound in riches made
to subserve God’s purposes and promote his glory, Lk.
xii. 21 [so too W. 397 (371); but cf. Mey. ed. Weiss ad
loc.]; Christ is said mAoureiy eis ravtas, to abound in
riches redounding to the salvation of all men, Ro. x. 12;
mAeovatew eis tt, Phil. iv. 17; éXenpoovyny motety eis TO
€Ovos, Acts xxiv. 17; eis tovs mrwyxovs, for the benefit
of the poor, Ro. xv. 26 ; es trovs dyious, 2 Co. viii. 4; ix.
1, cf.133; xomdy ets reva, Ro. xvi. 6; Gal. iv. 11; eis Xpeorov,
to the advantage and honor of Christ, Philem. 6; épya-
¢eoOai re eis twa, Mk. xiv. 6 Rec.; 3 Jn. 5; Necroupyds eis
ta €Ovn, Ro. xv. 16; yevoueva eis Kadapvaovp (for Rec.
ev Kamepvaovp [cf. W. 416 (388); B. 333 (286)]), Lk.
iv. 23. §. unto in a disadvantageous sense, (against) :
pndev aromoy eis adtov yevouevoyv, Acts xxviii. 6. c. of
the moodorinclination, affecting one towards any
person or thing; of one’s mode of action towards;
a. in a good sense: dydmy els twa, unto, towards, one,
Ro. v. 8; 2 Co. ii. 4,8; Col. i.4, 1 Th. iii. 12; rd adré es
GdAndovs poveiv, Ro. xii. 16; Puddaropyos, ib. 10; idd-
£evos, 1 Pet. iv. 9; xpnoros, Eph. iv. 32; amoxarad-
Adooev els aire [al. adr. see atrod], Col. i. 20 [cf. W.
397 (371)]. B. in a bad sense: dyapravew eis twa (see
dpaprava, b.); Adyor eimeiv and Bracgnpeiv cis twa, Lk.
xii. 10; Mk. iii. 29; BAaodnyos eis twa, Acts vi. 11;
Bracdhnpar A€yw eis twa, Lk. xxii. 65; émBovdA ets tia,
Acts xxiii. 30; Opa, Ro. viii. 7; dvtidoyia, Heb. xii.
3; Oappetv eis twa, 2 Co.x.1. a. of reference or
relation; with respect to, in reference to; as regards,
(cf. Kiithner ii. 408 c.; [Jelf § 625, 3 e.]): Lk. vii. 30;
Acts xxv. 20 [T Tr WH om. eis]; Ro. iv. 20; xv. 2; 2
Co. x. 16; xiii. 3; Gal. vi. 4; Eph. iii. 16; Phil. i. 5; ii.
>
els
22; 1 Th. v. 18; ets ri eSicracas; ‘ (looking) unto what
{i. e. wherefore) didst thou doubt? Mt. xiv. 31; cf. Her-
mann ad Oed. C. 528’ (Fritzsche). of the considera-
tion influencing one to do anything: peravoeiv els
xijpuypa twos, at the preaching of one, i.e. out of regard
to the substance of his preaching, Mt. xii. 41; déyeoOai
twa eis dvoud twos, Mt. x. 41 sq.; els duatayds dyyéAov
(see duarayn), Acts vii. 53. e. with ace. of the pers.
towards (Germ. nach einem hin), but in sense nearly
equiv. to the simple dat. to, unto, after verbs of ap prov-
ing, manifesting, showing one’s self: drodedevy-
pevos eis tpas, Acts ii. 22 ; évderEw evdeixvvcbat, 2 Co. viii.
24; havepadevres eis bpas, 2 Co. xi. 6 (LT Tr WH dave
pocartes SC. THY yvaow). 3. it denotes the end;
and a. the end to which a thing reaches or extends,
i.e.measure or degree: [éepev els tpidkovra, Mk. iv.
8T Tr txt. WH; cf. B. 30 (27); L. and S. s. v. A. III.
2]; eis ra dperpa, 2 Co. x. 13; eis mepioceiay, 2 Co. x. 15;
eis dmepBoAny (often in Grk. writ., as Eur. Hipp. 939;
Aeschin. f. leg. § 4), 2 Co.iv.17. of the limit: es rd ca-
poveiv, unto moderation, modesty, i. e. not beyond it, Ro.
xii. 3. b. the end which a thing isadaptedtoattain
(a use akin to that in B. II. 2 b.; [ef. W. 213 (200)]):
dpyos x. dxaprros eis tt, 2 Pet. i. 8; evOeros, Lk. ix. 62 RG;
xiv. 35 (84); evypnortos, 2 Tim. iv. 11; yphopos, 2 Tim.
ii. 14 RG, dvvapovpevos, Col. i. 11; OeodiSaxros, 1 Th. iv.
9; Bpadis, Jas. i. 19; coos, Ro. xvi. 19; pas eis droxd-
howuv, Lk. ii. 32; Svvapus eds etc. Ro. i. 16; Heb. xi. 11;
dvayevvay eis, 1 Pet. i. 3 sq.; dvaxavda, Col. iii. 10; co-
pitew tiva eis, 2 Tim. iii. 15; ioyvew eis, Mt. v.13. ce.
the end which one has in view, i.e. object, purpose;
a. associated with other prepositions [cf. W. § 50,5]: éx
miatews eis miotwv, to produce faith, Ro.i. 17, cf. Fritzsche,
Meyer, Van Hengel, ad loc. ; && avrod cai d? avrod kai es
avrov, answering to his purposes (the final cause), Ro. xi.
363 €€ of ra mavra kal npets els adtov, 1 Co. viii. 6; 80 adrod
kal els avrov (see dia, A. III. 2 b. sub fin.), Col. i. 16;
8¢ adrod eis airév, Col. i. 20. B. shorter phrases: eis
tovro, to this end, Mk. i. 38; [Lk. iv. 43 RG Tr mrg.];
eis adré rovro [R. V. for this very thing], 2 Co. v. 5; eis
rovro... wa etc. Jn. xvili. 37; 1 Jn. iii. 8; Ro. xiv. 9; 2
Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. iv. 6; eis airé tovTo... draws etc. Ro.
ix. 17; fva, Col. iv. 8; Eph. vi. 22; eis ri, to what purpose,
Mt. xxvi. 8; Mk. xiv. 4; eis 6, to which end, for which
cause, 2 Th. i. 11; Col. i. 29. y. univ. : Barriga ets twa,
wt (see Banri¢o, II. b. aa.); madaywyds eis rov Xpiordy,
Gal. iii. 24; cuyxexAevopeévor eis r. miotwv, that we might
the more readily embrace the faith when its time should
come, Gal. iii. 23; povpovpevor eis tiv owrnpiay, that
future salvation may be yours, 1 Pet. i. 5; dyopa¢ew eis
tr. éoprny, In. xiii. 29; eis SAeOpor aapxds, 1 Co. v. 5; els
tT. iperépay SiSackaXiav, Ro. xv. 4, and in many other exx.
esp. after verbs of appointing, choosing, preparing, do-
ing, coming, sending, etc.: xeiyat, Lk. ii. 34; Phil. i. 17
(16); 1 Th. iii. 3; rdoow, 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; rdooopat, Acts
xili. 48; aopito, Ro. i.1; Acts xiii. 2; mpoopiCa, Eph.
i.5; 1 Co. ii. 7; alpéopat, 2 Th. ii. 13; riOepae, 1 Tim. i.
12; 1 Pet. ii. 8; xarapritw, Ro. ix. 22 sg.; dmoaréAho.
185
’
els
Heb. i. 14; wéuzrw, 1 Th. iii. 2, 5; Col. iv. 8; Phil. iv. 16
[L br. eis]; 1 Pet. ii. 14; %pyouas, In. ix.39; woceiv re els,
1 Co. x. 81; xi. 24. Modelled after the Hebr. are the
phrases, éyetpew twa eis Baridéa, to be king, Acts xiii. 22;
avatpepec ai twa eis vidv, Acts vii. 21; réOeud oe eds
as ever, Acts xiii. 47 (fr. Is. xlix. 6 Alex.); ef. Gesenius,
Lehrgeb. p. 814; B. 150 (1381); [W.§ 32,4b.]. 8. eis 7,
indicating purpose, often depends not on any one pre-
ceding word with which it coalesces into a single phrase,
but has the force of a telic clause added to the already
complete preceding statement; thus, e’s Sé£av rod Geo,
Ro. xv. 7; Phil. i. 11; ii 11; eis pdBov, that ye should
fear, Ro. viii. 15; ets évdeEw, that he might show, Ro.
lil. 25; efs Cwnv ai@voy, to procure eternal life (sc. for
those mentioned), Jn. iv. 14; vi. 27, (in which passages
the phrase is by many interpp. [e. g. De Wette, Mey.,
Lange; cf. W. 397 (371) note] incorrectly joined with
Dreoba and pevew (cf. Thol., Luthardt, al.]); Ro. v.
21; 1 Tim. i. 16; Jude 21; add, Mt. viii. 4; xxvii. 7;
Mk. vi. 11; Acts xi. 18; Ro. x. 4; Phil. i.25; ii. 16; 2
Tim. ii. 25; Rev. xxii. 2, ete. . ets rd foll. by an inf.,
a favorite construction with Paul (cf. B. 264 (227) sq.;
Harmsen in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874,
pp: 345-360), is like the Lat. ad with the gerundive. It
is of two kinds; either aa. eis ro combines with the
verb on which it depends into a single sentence, as mapa-
dacovow airov... eis Td euraiEa, (Vulg. ad deludendum),
Mt. xx. 19; eis rd oravpwOnvar, Mt. xxvi. 2; ofkodopnOn-
cerat cis TO Ta ElOwAdbuTa eobiew, (Vule. aedificabitur ad
manducandum idolothyta), 1 Co. viii. 10; pi oikias otk
éyere els 70 eo bieww k. mivery, 1 Co. xi. 22; eis ro mpoopepew
Oa@pa te Kal Ovoias kabiorarat, (Vulg. ad offerenda munera
et hostias), Heb. viii. 3; add, Heb. ix. 28; 1 Th. ii. 16;
iv. 9; Phil. i. 23; or Bf. eés ro with the inf. has the
force of a separate telic clause (equiv. to tva with the
subjunc.), [Meyer (on Ro. i. 20) asserts that this is its
uniform force, at least in Ro. (cf. his note on 2 Co. viii.
6); on the other hand, Harmsen (u. s.) denies the telic
force of e’s r6 before an inf. Present; cf. also W. 329
(309); esp. B. as above and p. 265 note; Ellic. on 1
Thess. ii. 12; and see below, d. fin.]: Lk. xx. 20
RG; Acts iii. 19 [T WH zpos]; Ro. i. 11; iv. 16, 18;
Kin Let nOpexvelGplo wel Os ixe 1 Sexe Om Gralaitenliias
Eph. i. 12,18; 1 Th. ii. 12,16; fii.5; 2Th.i. 5; ii. 2,10;
Jas. i. 18; Heb. ii. 17 ; vii. 25; ix. 14, 28; xii. 105 xiii. 21;
eis ro pn, lest, 2 Co. iv. 4; 1 Pet. iii. 7. dd. the end by
which a thing is completed, i.e. the result or ef-
fect: Actsx.4; Ro. vi.19 (eis 7. dvopiay [but WH br.],
so that iniquity was the result); x. 10; xi. 14; 1 Co.
xi. 17; 2 Co. ii. 16; Eph. v. 2, etc.; e’s ro with inf. so
that [cf. BB. above]: Ro.i. 20; 2 Co. viii. 6.
C. CONSTRUCTIONS in some respects PECULIAR.
1. Various forms of pregnant and brachylogical
construction (W. § 66, 2; [less fully, B. 327 (282)];
Bnhdy. p. 348 sq.): cafew riva eis etc. to save by trans-
lating into etc. 2 Tim. iv. 18 [see caw, b. sub fin.]; dca-
cate, 1 Pet. iii. 20 (Sept. Gen. xix. 19, and often in
Grk. writ.) ; picbotvcOa epyaras eis tT. apmreAava, to go
els
into etc. Mt. xx. 1; éAevbepodv eis etc. Ro. viii. 215 dao-
SiSdvat teva els Alyumrov, Acts vii. 9; Evoxos els yéervar,
to depart into ete. [cf. B. 170 (148) note], Mt. v. 225 Krav
eis rwvas, to break and distribute among etc. Mk. viii. 19;
dodariferba eis rb EiAov, Acts xvi. 24; xracOar xpvooy
els r. Covas, Mt. x. 9; évrervAcypevoy eis Eva romor, rolled
up and laid away in etc. Jn. xx. 7. 2. Akin to this is
the very common use of eis after verbs signifying rest
or continuance in a place, because the idea of a pre-
vious motion into the place spoken of is involved (cf. W.
§ 50, 4b.; B. 332 (286) sq.; Kiihner ii. p. 317; [Jelf
§ 646, 1]; Bnhdy. p. 215; [yet cf. also exx. in Soph. Lex.
s. v. eis, 1]) : ebpebn eis "ACwror, sc. transferred or carried
off to, Acts viii. 40, cf. 39 mvedpa Kuplov ipmace tov Piden-
mov, (Esth. i. 5 trois €Oveou trois evpebeiow eis t. modw;
so haveioOar is foll. by ets in 2 Mace. 1.33; vii. 22). det
pe THY éoptHy motjoat eis ‘Iepoa. sc. by going, Acts xviii. 21
Ree. ; likewise éroiuws ¢yw amobaveiv eis ‘Iepoo. Acts xxi.
13 CHdaotiov eis ExBarava améOave, Ael. v. h. 7, 8);
ovveBarev juiv eis”"Aooov, Acts xx. 14; 7 peAdovca dd€a
eis Nas amoxadvPénva, which shall be revealed (and
conferred) on us, Ro. viii. 18. xarorkeiy eis modu, els yqr,
to come into a city and dwell there, Mt. ii. 23; iv. 13;
Acts vii. 4, [cf. Num. xxxv. 83; 2 Chr. xix.4etc.]; also
mapocxeiv, Heb. xi. 9 (évotxeiv, Xen. an. 1, 2, 24); orjvas,
éotnxevar (because it is nearly equiv. to to have placed
one’s self) eis rt, Lk. vi. 8; Jn. xx. 19, 26; 1 Pet. v. 12;
xanoGa, to have gone unto a place and to be sitting
there, Mk. xiii. 3; 2 Th. ii. 4, (on this use of these two
verbs in Grk. auth. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1344 sq.; [cf. W.
and B.u.s.]). vac eis with ace. of place see eiui, V. 2 a.;
ot cis T. oikdy pov sc. dvres, Lk. ix. 61; rois eis waxpdy sec.
ovat (Germ. ins Ferne hin befindlich), Acts ii. 39. cuvd-
yeoGa foll. by ets with acc. of place: to go toa place and
assemble there, Mt. xxvi.3 and Acts iv. 5 RT, (1 Esdr.
v. 46 (47); ix.3). Sometimesa word implying motion,
occurring in the same sentence, seems to have occasioned
the connection of a verb of rest with eis, as it were by
a kind of attraction [B. u.s.]: eEepyopevos niricero eis rd
épos, Lk. xxi. 37; dxovoas... dvra outia eis Atyurrov
[ Ree. otra ev Aly.] e£aréorerdev etc. Acts vii. 12 ; rapada-
covow ipas eis ovvedpia k. eis cuvaywyas Sapnoecbe, Mk.
xiii. 9 [W. 416 (387), B. 333 (287) ]; Umaye, vivvat [but
L br.] eis 7. KodupSnOpar, Jn. ix. 7, although virrecOa
eis te can also be used (as Nove Oa eis 76 Badaveiov, Alci-
phr. epp. 3, 43; eis Aovrpévas, Athen. 10 p. 438 e.; Nov-
ew Twa eis oxddny, Epict. diss. 3, 22, 71), since the water
with which one bathes flows down into the pool. Cf.
Beyer, De praepositt. es et évin N. T. permutatione.
Lips. 1824, 4to.
D. ApverBIAL Purases (cf. Matthiae § 578 d.):
eis TEos (See Tédos, 1 a.) ; eis 7d mdAW, See A. II. 2 above;
eis 76 mavrenés, perfectly, utterly, Lk. xiii. 11 [ef. W. § 51,
1 c.]} ets Kevdv (see xevds, 3); eis bravrnow and els dma
tnow, see each subst.
In composition eis is equiv. to the Lat. in and ad.
els, pia, ev, gen. évds, yids, évds, a cardinal numeral,
one. Used 1. univ. a. in opp. to many; and
186
els
a. added to nouns after the manner of an adjective:
Mt. xxv. 15 (opp. to révre, duo) ; Ro. v. 12 (opp. to ma»
res); Mt. xx. 13; xxvii. 15; Lk. xvii. 34 [but L WH br.];
Acts xxviii. 13; 1 Co. x. 8; Jas. iv. 13 [R G], and often ;
mapa play sc. mAnynv [W. 589 (548); B. 82 (72)], save
one [W. § 49, g.], 2 Co. xi. 24; with the article, 6 eis
dvOpwmos, the one man, of whom I have spoken, Ro. v.
15. §. substantively, with a partit. gen.,—to denote
one, whichever it may be: piav tev évToAdy, one command-
ment, whichever of the whole number it may be, Mt. v.
19; add, Mt. vi. 29; xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42; Lk. xii. 27;
xvii. 2, 22; or, that one is required to be singled out
from a certain number: Lk. xxiii. 39; Jn. xix. 34, etc.
foll. by é« with the gen. of a noun signifying a whole, to
denote that one of (out of ) a company did this or that:
Mt. xxii. 353; xxvi. 21; xxvii. 48; Mk. xiv. 18; Lk. xvii.
15; Jn. i. 40 (41); vi. 8, 70; xii. 2 (T WH Tr mrg. in
br.], 4 [Tr om. é]; xiii. 21, 23 [Rec. om. ék]; xviii. 26;
Rev. v. 5; vii. 13; ix.13; xiii. 8 [Rec. om. ex]. y. absol.:
Mt. xxiii. 8-10; Heb. ii. 11; xi. 12; and where it takes
the place of a predicate, Gal. iii. 20 [ef. W. 593 (551)],
28 (ye that adhere to Christ make one person, just as
the Lord himself); cvvayeuw eis &, to gather together into
one, Jn. xi. 523 movety ra auorepa &y, Eph. ii. 14; with
the article, 6 eis, the one, whom I have named, Ro. v. 15,
19. b. in opp. to a division into parts, and in ethi-
cal matters to dissensions: év o@pa, modAd ped, Ro.
xii. 4 sq.; 1 Co. xii. 12, 20; év eivas, to be united most
closely (in will, spirit), Jn. x. 30; xvii. 11, 21-23; ev &
mvevpati, pia Wuyx7, Phil. i. 27 cf. Acts iv. 32, (ef. Cie.
Lael. 25 (92) amicitiae vis est in eo, ut unus quasi ani-
mus fiat ex pluribus) ; awd pias (see amo, III. p. 59°),
Lk. xiv. 18. c. with a negative following joined to the
verb, eis... ov or pn, (one... not,i. e.) no one, (more
explicit and emphatic than ovdeis): év €& ad’raev ov rece
ta, Mt. x. 29; besides, Mt. v.18; Lk. xi. 46; xii. 6; this
usage is not only Hebraistic (as that language has no
particular word to express the notion of none), but also
Greek (Arstph. eccl. 153; thesm. 549; Xen. an. 5, 6, 12;
Dion. Hal. verb. comp. 18, ete.), ef. W. 172 (163) ; [B.
121 (106) ]. 2. emphatically, so that others are
excluded, and eis is the same as_ a. a single (Lat. unus
1. q. unicus) ; joined to nouns: Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. viii. 14
(ovk . . . €¢ pty €va Gprov); Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xii. 52; Jn. xi.
50; vii. 21; 1 Co. xii. 19; Eph. iv. 5, ete.; absol.: 1 Co.
ix. 24; 2 Co. v. 14 (15); 1 Tim. ii. 5; Jas. iv. 12, ete.;
ovde eis, not even one: Mt. xxvii. 14; Jn. i. 33 Acts iv.
32; Ro. iii. 10; 1 Co. vi. 5 [RG]; otk gorw ews évds [there
is not so much as one], Ro. iii. 12 fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3;
cf. Lat. omnes ad unum, alltoaman. Neut. &, one thing,
exclusive of the rest; one thing before all others: Mk. x.
21; Lk. xviii. 22; x. 42 [but WH only txt.]; Jn. ix. 25;
Phil. iii. 13 (14); Jas.ii. 10. b. alone: obdels . . . ef wi
eis 6 Oeds, Mk. ii. 7 (for which in Lk. v. 21 pdvos 6 beds) ;
Mk. x. 18; Lk. xviii. 19. @. one and the same (not at
variance with, in accord with one’s self): Ro. iii. 30;
Rev. xvii. 13, 17 [Lom.]; xviii. 8; 7d & gpoveiv, Phil.
ii. 2 [WH mrg. aird]; é eivac are one, i.e. are of the
els
same importance and esteem, 1 Co. iii. 8; eis rd év evar
(see eiui, V.2d.),1Jn.v. 8; more fully 76 év kai 7d adrd,
1 Co. xii. 11; & kal TO avté tim, 1 Co. xi. 5. 3. the
numerical force of eis is often so weakened that it hardly
differs from the indef. pron. ris, or from our indef. article
(W. 117 (111). [ef. 29 note 2; B. 85 (74)]): Mt. viii. 19
(eis ypapparevs) ; xix. 16; xxvi. 69; Jn. vi. 9 (mauddpiov
év, where T Tr WH om. ra Lbr. &); Rev. viii. 13; ix.
13, (Arstph. av. 1292; Xen. mem. 3, 3,12; Plat. de rep.
6 p. 494d.; legg. 9 p. 855 d., etc.; esp. later writ. ;
[Tob. i. 19; ii. 3; 8 Esdr. iv. 18; Gen. xxi. 15; 2S. ii.
iis Sp adith. xiv. 6]; so the Hebr. ms, Dan. viii. 3; Gen.
SSA GR I hak 7G WE KG sort: (xx.) 13; see Gesenius,
Lehrgeb. p- 655); ets tus (Lat. unus aliquis), a certain
one; one, I know not who; one who need not be named:
with a subst. Mk. xiv. 51 (L Tr WHom. ¢is); or foll.
by a gen. Mk. xiv. 47 where L Tr om. WH br. ris; foll.
by ek, €€, with gen.: Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xi. 49, (& 1 rev
pnvarev, Judith ii. 13, and often in Grk. writ.; cf. Wet-
stein on Mk. xiv. 51; Matthiae § 487). 4. it is used
distributively [W. § 26, 2; esp. B.102(90)]; a. eis...
kat eis, one... and one: Mt. xvii. 4; xx. 21; xxiv.40 LT
Tr WH, 41; xxvii. 38; Mk.iv.8[RGL WH mrg.], 20
[RG LTrmrg. WH mrg. in br.]; ix. 5; x. 37; xv. 27; Lk.
ix. 33; Jn. xx. 12; Gal. iv. 22; (in Grk. auth. eis pev... eis
6é, as Aristot. eth. 6, 1,5; Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 4); with the art.
prefixed, 6 eis the one, Lk. xxiv. 18RG; foll. by 6 eis, the
one... the other, Mt. xxiv. 40 RG; foll. by 6 érepos, Mt.
vi. 24: Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 13>; xvii. 34 R WH; xviii. 10
RGT WH mrg.; Acts xxiii. 6; efs (without the art.)
. 6 repos: Le Xvi. 133 xvi 34°C Li EP Tr; xviii.10
a Tr WH txt.; mévte... deis... 6 GAXos, Rev. xvii. 10.
b. eis €xaoros, every one: Actsii. 6 ; xx. 31; Eph. iv. 16;
Col. iv. 6; foll. by a partit. gen.: Lk. iv. 40; xvi. 5; Acts
Timo Eval 2 fa xxi eco lL Co, xil.13 3” Hphiiv.sslmbhs
ii. 11; cf. B. 102 (89) sq.; ava ets exaaros (see avd, 2),
Rev. xxi. 21. oc. a solecism, com. in later Grk. (cf.
Leian. soloec. [ Pseudosoph.] § 9; W.§ 37,3; B. 30 (26)
sq.; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 613 sq.; [Soph. Lex.s. v. kaOeis]),
is xa@’ eis, and in combination xaeis, (so that either cara
is used adverbially, or eis as indeclinable): 6 xa@ eis, i. q.
eis €xaoros, Ro. xii. 5 (where L T Tr WH 76 xa@ cis, as
respects each one, severally; cf. what is said against this
reading by Fritzsche, Com. iii. p. 44 sq., and in its favor
by Meyer); with a partit. gen. 3 Mace. v. 34; eis xa@?
[T WHTr mrg. xara] efs, every one, one by one, Mk. xiv.
19; Jn. viii. 9; Kad’ éva, ka &v, (as in Grk. writ.), of a
series, one by one, successively: xa év, all in succession,
Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; caf &va mdvres, 1 Co. xiv. 31
(Xen. venat. 6, 14); xa@’ év €xaorov, Acts xxi. 19 (Xen.
Cyr. 1, 6, 22 (27); Ages. 7, 1) ; tpets ot cal? éva €xaoTos,
ye severally, every one, Eph. v. 33. 5. like the Hebr.
Mk, cis is put for the ordinal mpéros, first [WELS Sipe;
B. 29 (26)]: pla caBBdrov the first day of the week, Mt.
xxviii. 1; Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xx. 1, 19; Acts
PRK 90 Co: xvi. 2[L T Tr WH pia caBBdrov]; (in Grk.
writ. so used only when joined with other ordinal num-
bers, as efs xa) rpunxoords, Hat. 5, 89; Diod. 16, 71. Cie.
187
‘Sir. iii. 6, ete.).
eloépyopar
de senect. 5 uno et octogesimo anno.
S. V.]).
elo-dyw: 2 aor. eionyayov; [pres. pass. elodyouat | ; [fr.
Hom. down]; Sept. chiefly for 37; 1. to lead in:
twa foll. by e’s with ace. of place, Lk. xxii. 54 [Tr mrg,
br.]; Acts ix. 8; xxi. 28, 29, 37; xxii. 24 (for Rec. aye~
aa); de, Lk. xiv. 21; the place into which not being
expressly noted: Jn. xviii. 16 (sc. ets rv adAqv); Heb. i,
6 dray .. . eiaaydyn, héyer, God, having in view the time
when he shall have again brought in the first-born into the
world (i. e. at the time of the mapovcia) says etc. Pk
to bring in, the place into which not being expressly
stated: Acts vii. 45 (sc. ets tiv yqv); Lk. ii. 27 (se. eis
TO tepdv). [Comp. :
elo-axovw : fut. eiraxovcopar; Pass., 1 aor. elankovadnv;
1 fut. etvaxovodij copa ; Sept. very often for pow, but
also for Jy to answer; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 8, 97
down ; to hearken unto, to give ear to; i. e. 1. to give
heed to, comply with, admonition; to obey (Lat. obedio
i. e. ob-audio) : twds, 1 Co. xiv. 21, (Deut. i. 43; ix. 23;
2. to listen to, assent to, a request;
pass. to be heard, to have one’s request granted; a. of
persons offering up prayers to God: Heb. v. 7 (on which
see amd, I. 3d. fin.); Mt. vi. 7. b. of the prayers offered
up: Lk. i. 13; Acts x. 31, (Ps-iv. 2; Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.)
29 (26), etc.).*
eio-Séxopar: fut. eiodéfopar; to receive kindly, i. e. con-
textually, to treat with favor: twa, 2 Co. vi. 17. [From
Pind. and Soph. down. Syn. cf. d€youar, fin. ]*
do-eupt, inf. efovevac; impf. elonjerv; (edu [ef. B. 50
(43)]); [fr. Hom. down]; to go into, enter: foll. by eés
with the name of the place (cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete.
Pt. ii. p11), Actsalis3;, xxi. 26); Heb: 1x-.6 [W..267
(251)]; mpés twa, Acts xxi. 18.*
elo-€pxopar; fut. eiceAcvoopar; 2 aor. eianAOov, 2 pers.
plur. eiondOare (LK. xi. 52, but Rec. -Oere), impv. elaeh Oare
(Mt. vii. 13 but R G-Oere, [3d pers. sing. -Oarw Mk. xiii.
15, RG -Oérw]); see amépyouat, init.; pf. e’reAnAvda, 3
pers. plur. eivehnAvdav (Jas. v. 4, for RG eiveAndidacw,
see yivoyat, init.); Sept. mostly for 83; to go or come
into or in; to enter ; 1. prop., of men and of animals:
foll. by eis with specification of the place (cf. Win. De
verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 12 sq.), as into a house,
into a city, Mt. viii. 5; x. 12; Mk. ii. 1; xi. 11; Acts
xxiii. 16, 33, and often. without specification of place,
—when mention of it has already been made, as Mt. ix.
25; [Mk. vii. 25 Tdf.J; Lk. vii. 45; xiv. 23; xv. 28 cf.
25; xxiv.3; Acts i. 13; v. 7,10; x. 25; 1 Co. xiv. 23 sq.;
or it can be easily supplied from the context, as Lk. xiii.
24; xvii. 7; ets is also added to signify among: Acts
xix. 80; xx. 29; eiaépy. Sed twos, to enter (a place)
through something: d:a rhs wvAns, to enter the king-
dom of God (compared to a palace) through the gate,
Mt. vii. 13; Lk. xiii. 24; dca ris Oupas eis r. adAnv, Jn.
x. 1 sq.; add, Mt. xix. 24 GT Tr txt. WH txt.; [Mk. x.
25 R* Lmrg. Trmrg ]; Lk. xviii. 25 RGT Trtxt. WH;
ciaépx. Ud THY oTEYNY, by entering to come under the
roof, i. e. enter my house, Mt. viii. 8; with adverbs:
[Cf. Soph. Lex.
map-e.rayo. | *
elo epyopar
Smov, Mk. xiv. 14; Heb. vi. 20; &de, Mt. xxii. 125 €o,
Mt. xxvi. 58; e/s with acc. of pers., into one’s house,
Acts xvi. 40, but on this pass. seeeis, A.I. 1a. eivépy. mpos
twa, to one, i.e. into his house, visit, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. i.
28; Acts x. 3; xi. 3; xvi. 40 GL TTrWH; xxviii. 8;
Rey. iii. 20; to an assembly of persons, Acts xvil. 2.
Moreover the following deserve notice: a. the phrase
eicépyerOa Kai e&épyecba, to go in and out, (the Hebr.
MANY) NIB, or reversed NjI} ANS, usually denotes one’s
whole mode of living and’acting, Deut. xxviii. 6; 1S.
xxix. 6, ete.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 184 sq.), is used
of familiar intercourse with one: €v mavti ypove @ cian Oe
x. e&nrbev ep’ juas 6 KUptos, equiv. to eianOe ep npas k.
eénrOc ap hu. Acts i. 21, (Hur. Phoen. 536 és olkous eianrbe
x. e€nr@ [W. 624 sq. (580); but cf. B. 390 (334)]); fig-
uratively, of moral pursuits unimpeded by difficulties,
Jn. x. 9. b. eioépy. eis is joined with nouns designat-
ing not a place, but what occurs in a place: eis rovs
ydapous, Mt. xxv. 10; e’s rv xapay rod Kupiov, 21, 23. c.
cioedOeiv ets twa is used of demons or of Satan taking
possession of the body of a person: Mk. ix. 25; Lk. viii.
30; xxii. 3; Jn. xiii. 27. d. of things: —as of food, that
enters into the eater’s mouth, Mt. xv. 11; Acts xi. 8;
figuratively, hope is called dykupa eirepxopevn eis TO €ow-
TEpov Tov KatareTacparos, i.e. we firmly rely on the hope
that we shall be received into heaven, [eb. vi. 19; cries
of complaint are said eicépy. eis ra Sra tevos, 1. e. to be
heard, Jas. v. 4; of forces and influences: mvedpa Cons
eionddev ev avtois (Tr om. WH br. ev; Rec. én airovs
[B. 338 (291) ]), a pregnant construction, the breath of life
entered into and remained in them, Rey. xi. 11 [W. § 50,
4; B. 329 (283) ]. 2. Metaph. used, a. of entrance
into any condition, state of things, society, employment :
eis r. Conv, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43, 45; eis
T. Baowd. TOv ovpavay Or Tod Heod (see Bacirela, 3 p. 97>):
tovs eigepyopuevous, that are trying to enter, or rather,
that have taken the road to enter, are (engaged in) en-
tering, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14); Lk. xi. 52; used absol. of
those who come into (i.e. become members of) the
Christian church, Ro. xi. 25, (hence in 1 Co. y. 12 sq: of
€oo and oi €€w are distinguished) ; eis r. xataravotv, Heb.
iii. 11, 18; iv. 1,3, 5 sq.10sq.; e’s rv doéav, Lk. xxiv. 26;
eis metpacpor, to come (i. e. fall) into temptation, Mt. xxvi.
41; Mk. xiv. 38 (T WH @\@nre]; Lk. xxii. 40, 46; eds
tov Korov twds (see eis, B. I. 3), Jn. iv. 38. cioepxeo.
eis T. koopor, to enter the world [cf. W. 18], is a. i. q.
to arise, come into existence, begin to be [i. e. among men]:
used thus of sin and death, Ro. v. 12; of death, Sap. ii.
24; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3, 4; of idols, Sap. xiv. 14. B.
of men, fo come into life: whether by birth, Antonin. 6,
56; or by divine creation, Philo, opif. mund. $25. y.
to come before the public: 2 Jn.7 [Rec.]; to come to men,
of Christ, Jn. xviii. 37; eicepyop. eis r. Koopov, when he
cometh into the world, i.e. when he was on the point of
entering it, viz. at his incarnation, Heb. x. 5. b. of
thoughts coming into the mind: eiafdOe Siadoyiopds ev
avrois, a pregnant construction, there came in and estab-
lished itself within [al. take év outwardly: among (cf.
188
s
elTa
dadoy. fin.) ] them, Lk. ix. 46 [cf. W. 413 (885)]. The
Grks. fr. Hom. down use eiaépyeoOai teva of thoughts and
feelings, as $éBos, pévos, 7dO0s, etc. [cf. W. 427 (398).
ComP. én-, map-, cvy- evrépxopat. |
elo-Kaddopat, -odpat, (mid. of eizkadéw): 1 aor. ptcp.
eiaxadeodpevos; to call in unto one’s self, to invite in to
one’s house: tid, Acts x. 23. [Polyb., al.]*
ela-o80s, -ov, 7, (600s), [fr. Hom. on], an entrance, i. e.
both the place or way leading into a place (as, a gate), and
the act of entering; only in the latter sense in the N. T.
With gen. of place, rav éyiwv, entrance into the holy place,
i. e. reception into heaven, Heb. x. 19 [but in 20 appar-
ently called 646s]; eis t. Baowdeiay tov xupiov, 2 Pet. i.
11; of the act of coming forward to administer an office,
Acts xiii. 24; with mpos rwa added, 1 Th. i. 9; ii. 1.*
elo-mSdo, -@: 1 aor. cicenndnoa; to spring in: eis Tov
dxAov, Acts xiv. 14 Rec. (see éxmnddw) ; to rush in impet-
uously, Acts xvi. 29. (Xen., Dem., al.; Sept. Am. v.19.) *
elo-ropevopar (pass. of eioopevw to lead into, Eur. El.
1285); impf. eicemopevdunv (Mk. vi. 56); to go into,
enter ; 1. prop. a. of persons: foll. by e’s with acc.
of place, Mk. i. 21; vi. 56; xi.2; Acts iii. 2; daov, Mk.
v. 40; ov, Lk. xxii. 10[R G, cf. B. 71 (62); W. § 54, 7];
without specification of place where that is evident from
the context, Lk. viii. 16 ; xi. 33; xix. 30; xara rovs otkous,
to enter house after house [A. V. every house, see card,
II. 3 a. a.], Acts viii. 3; mpds twa, to visit one at his
dwelling, Acts xxvili. 830; elomopeverOar x. éxopever Oat
peta Twos, to associate with one, Acts ix. 28 (evamidy Tivos,
Tob. v. 18; see eicépyoua, 1 a.). b. when used of
things it isi. q. to be carried into or put into: so of
food, which is put into the mouth, Mk. vii. 15, 18, [19];
Mt. xv. 17, (see eicépyoua, 1 d.). 2. metaph.: | es
thy Baowelav Tov Geov, Lk. xviii. 24 T Tr txt. WH; see
Baowreia, 3 p. 97>]; of affections entering the soul, Mk.
iv. 19; see eloepyoua, 2b. (Of the earlier Grk. writ.
Xen. alone uses this verb, Cyr. 2, 3, 21; Sept. often
for §)3.) *
elo-rpéxw: 2 aor. cicedpapov; to run in: Acts xii. 14.
[ Thue., Xen., al.] *
elo-pépw; 1 aor. eionveyxa; 2 aor. elonveyxov; [pres.
pass. elopéeponar; fr. Hom. down]; to bring into, in or to;
a. ri, foll. by eis with acc. of place, 1 Tim. vi. 7; pass.
Heb. xiii. 11; rivd sc. eis tr. oikiav, Lk. v. 18 sq.; [Twa
émt r. cuvaywyds ete. Lk. xii. 11 T Tr txt. WH]; ri eis
Tas dkods Twos, i.e. to tell one a thing, Acts xvii. 20
(pepe tt eis Ta Sta Twos, Soph. Aj. 149). b. to lead
into: rua eis metpacpoy, Mt. vi. 13; Lk. xi. 4. [Comp.:
map-elo pepe. | *
elra, adv. of time, then; next; after that: Mk. viii. 25;
Lk. viii. 12; Jn. xiii. 5; xix. 27; xx. 27; Jas.i. 15; with
the addition of a gen. absol. to define it more precisely
Mk. iv. 17; as in classic Grk., it stands in enumerations,
to mark a sequence depending either on temporal
succession, as Mk. iv. 28 (see efrev); 1 Co. xv. 5-7 (etra
(T éreira, so in mrg. Tr WH]... éweira.. . Zretra...
efra [T @recra, so in mrg. L Tr WH)]); 1 Co. xv. 24
(€me-a...eira); 1 Tim.ii. 13; or on the nature of the
LTE
things enumerated, 1 Co. xii. 28 (mpédrov .. . 8evrepov
++. Tpirov... mera... eira for which L T Tr WH
Sretra); {1 Tim. iii. 10]; in arguments it serves to add
a new reason, furthermore (Germ. sodann) : Heb. xii. 9.*
elre, see ei, III. 15.
elrev a very rare [Ionic] form for era (q. v.) : Mk. iv.
28 TWH. ([Cf. Kuenen et Cobet, Nov. Test. etc. praef.
p- xxxiil.; Lob. Phryn. p. 124, also Pathol. Gr. Element.
ii. 155 ; Steph. Thesaur. s. v. and s. v. éetrev.]*
elw8a, see 4m.
éx, before a vowel e€, a preposition governing the gen-
itive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as
separation from, something with which there has been
close connection ; opp. to the prepositions eis into and év
in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ef.
W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used
I. of PLacr, and 1. univ. of the place from
which; from a surrounding or enclosing place,
from the interior of: dpros, dyyedos, pas && ovpavod,
Jn. vi. 31 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG dd]; Gal. i. 8;
dvaroAn, Svvayus e& vous, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after
verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, free-
ing, removing, releasing, etc. : qKew ex tis Iovdaias
eis tr. TadsAalay, Jn. iv. 47; e&€pyecOar x twos out of the
body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here
L mrg. dad]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the
body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258) ; W. 346 (324) ; Mey.
ed. Weiss ad loc.]; e« rav pynuetwv, Mt. viii. 28; xxvii.
53; éxmopeverba, Mt. xv. 11, 18 sq.; xataBaivew ex
tov ovpavod, Mt. xxviii. 2; Jn. i. 32; iii. 13; vi. 33; e€-
ayew, Acts xii. 17 ; devyew, Acts xxvii. 30 ; Kadeiv, Mt. ii.
15; metaph. ék rod oxdrovs eis rd Pas, 1 Pet. ii. 9; exBar-
Aew TO Kapos ek Tov dpOadrpod, Mt. vii. [4 (R G are), 5;
Lk. vi. 42 (opp. to ev r@ dpOadp@) ; ri €x Tov Onaavpov, Mt.
xii. 35 [but see under II. 9 below] ; xiii. 52; 7d darronov
Zk tuvos, out of the body of one, Mk. vii. 26; dmokvAlew
rov Aidov éx [L Tr txt. awd; cf. W. 364 (342) note] rs
évpas, Mk. xvi.3; aipew, Jn. xx. 1 sq. 3 xiwvew, Rev. vi. 14;
cde ex yns Alyinrov, Jude 5; Siaca@ler ex ris Oadacons,
Acts xxviii. 4. Metaph., éx tijs yetpos tivos, out of the
power of one [cf. B. 182 (158)]: after e£épyeoOar, Jn. x.
39; after dmayew, Acts xxiv. 7 [Rec.]; after dpmagew, Jn.
x. 28 sq.; after é£apeioOa, Acts xii. 11; after prec Oat,
Lk. i. 74; after cwrnpia, Lk. i. 71. after mivew, of the
thing out of which one drinks [differently in I. 9 below]:
éx Tov mornpiov, Mt. xxvi. 27; Mk. xiv. 23; 1 Co. xi. 283 ék
metpas, 1 Co. x. 4; éx rou ppearos, Jn. iv. 12; after éaGieww,
of the place whence the food is derived, éx rov iepoi, 1 Co.
ix. 13 [but T Tr WH read ra éxxrd.]. of the place forth
from which one does something : d:dacxew €x Tov mAoiov,
Lk. v. 3 [here Tdf. éy etc.]. It is joined also to nouns
designating not a place, but what is done ina place:
eyeiper Oat éx rov Seimvov, Jn. xiil. 4; ava\vew €k TaV
yapor, Lk. xii. 36. 2. from the midst (of a group,
number, company, community) of many; a. after
verbs of going, leading, choosing, removing,
etc. a. before collective nouns, as éfodeOpevo €x rod
Rad. Acts iii. 23; mpoBiBatw or cvpBiBatw ex Tod dxAov,
189 ,
EK
Acts xix. 33; ékdéyew ex rod kéopov, Jn. xv. 19. ee
pécou tivay aopicey, Mt. xiii. 49 ; e€épyerOa, Acts xvii.
335 dpmafew, Acts xxiii. 10; éfaipew, 1 Co. v. 13; éx
maons pvadis Kk. yAooons dyopatew, Rev. v. 9; ék mavrds
yevous auvdyew, Mt. xiii. 47. B. before plurals : duerdvat
Twa €k two, Acts iii. 22; x vexpadv, Acts xvii. 31; avi-
ararai tts ex vexpov, Acts x. 41; xvii. 3; eyelpewv Twa éx
vexpav, Jn. xii. 1, 9,17; Acts iii. 15; iv. 10; xiii. 30;
Heb. xi. 19, ete. ; 4 dvdoracis éx vexpav, Lk. xx. 35 sal Pet.
i. 3; dvdyew twa ex vexpaov, Ro. x. 7; exréyew, Acts i. 24 ;
XV. 22; xadeiv, Ro. ix. 24; eyévero Cyrnats éx ray ete. Jn.
ili. 25 [but cf. I. 1b.; W. 368 (345)]. _b. before words
signifying quantity: after eis, as Mt. x. 29; xxvi. 21;
Lk. xvii. 15, and often; moddoi, Jn. xi. 19, 45, ete.; of
mXelous (meloves), 1 Co. xv. 6; oddeis, Jn. vii. 19; xvi.
5, and elsewhere; xuAcddes ex mdons puadjjs, Rev. vii. 4;
after the indef. ris, Lk. xi. 15; xii.13; Jn. vi. 64; vii.
48; ris yury éx Tod dyAov, Lk. xi. 27; with rwés to be
added mentally [ef. W. 203(191) ; B. 158 (138)]: Jn. ix.
40 [(?) better, vii. 40]; xvi. 17; Rev. xi. 9, (1 Esdr. v.
45 (44)); revas: Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. xi.49; xxi. 16; 2Jn.
4; Rev. ii. 10; cf. Fritzsche, Conjectanea in N. T. p. 36
note; after the interrog. ris, who? Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xi.
5, etc.; ris marnp, Lk. xi. 11 [L T Tr WH]; preceded
by a generic noun: dyOpwmos ex rév etc. Jn. iii. 1. ce.
elvat ék Twev, to be of the number, company, fellowship,
etc., of ; see eiui, V. 3 a. 3. from a local surface,
as sometimes the Lat. ex for de; down from: xaraBaivew
€x tov dpovs (Hom. Il. 13, 17; Xen. an. 7, 4, 12; Sept.
Ex. xix. 14; xxxii.1; Deut. ix. 15; x. 5; Josh. ii. 23),
Mt. xvii. 9 (for the more com. dé rod dp. of Rec. and the
parallel pass. Mk. ix. 9 [here L WH txt. Tr mre. éx];
Lk. ix.37; [cf. Mt. viii. 1]); Opié ex ris Kepadjs dmon-
Aurat (unless we prefer to regard éx as prompted here
by the conception of the hair as fixed in the skin),
Lk. xxi. 18; Acts xxvii. 84 [here L T Tr WH dmo; cf.
W. 364 (342) note]; éxmimrew ex ray xerpar, of the chains
with which the hands had been bound, Acts xii. 7;
kpeuaobat x twos, Acts xxviii. 4, (1 Macc. i. 61; 2 Mace.
vi. 10; so the Grks. fr. Hom. down); qayeiv éx rod
@votactnpiov, the things laid upon the altar, Heb. xiii.
10. Akin to this is é£eAOetv x rod Oeod, from an abode
with God (for the more usual azo r. Oeov), Jn. viii. 42.
4. of the direction whence; ék deiav, Lat. a dex-
tra, lit. from i.e. (Germ. zu) on the right, see SEs; so
éx Se€ias, €£ apiorepas, sc. ywopas [or yetpos which is
sometimes expressed ; W. 592 cf. 591; B. 82 (72)], (also
in Grk. writ., as Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 15); e& évavrias, over
against, Mk. xv. 39 (Hdt. 8, 6; Sir. xxxvii. 9; 1 Macc.
iv. 34; Sap. iv. 20); metaph. [W. § 51, 1d.] 6 é& éva»
rias [A. V. he that is of the contrary part], our opponent,
adversary, Tit. ii. 8; éx prov, from the roots, i. e. utterly,
Mk. xi. 20 (Job xxviii. 9; xxxi. 12). 5. of the con-
dition or state out of which one comes or is brought :
catew ex Oavarov, Hebmvaisn Jase vec); epxer Oar ék
[Lehm. do] Odiipews, Rev. vii. 14; peraBaivew éx tov
Oavarov «is t. Conv, Jn. v. 24; 1 dn. iii. 14; eyepOnvar e&
Umvov, Ro. xiii. 11 [ef. W. 366 (344) notel; Cavres ex
EK
vexpav, alive from being dead (i. e. who had been dead
and were alive again), Ro. yi. 13; (wi éx vexpdv i. e. of
those that had been vexpoi, Ro. xi. 15, (€hevOepos éx Sovdov
kal mArovows ék mr@xod yeyovws, Dem. p. 270 fin.; &«
mrovolov mévnra yeverbat kal éx Baciréws Odrny pavqvat,
Xen. an. 7, 7, 28; yiyvouar tupdds éx dedopxdros, Soph.
O.T. 454; fradov e& avdpds yevérOar, Palaeph. 3, 2;
add, Lys. adv. Ergocl. init.; Tac. ann. 1, 74 ex pauperi-
bus divites, ex contemtis metuendi). Also of the state
out of the midst of which one does something : é« moAAns
Orinpews ypapev, 2 Co. ii. 4. 6. of any kind of sep-
aration or dissolution of connection witha thing
or person [cf. B. 157 (138)]: dvamaveoOa éx (released
from) rév kénav, Rev. xiv. 13; dvavnpew ex (set free
from) ris rod duaBdAov mayidos, 2 Tim. ii. 26; peravody éx
etc. Rev. ii. 21 sq.; ix. 20 sq.; xvi. 11; émorpépew [LT
Tr WH éiroorp.] ex ([L dé], by severing their connec-
tion with) rijs évroAjjs, 2 Pet. ii. 21; rnpeiv teva éx etc. to
keep one at a distance from ete. [cf. B. 327 (281)], Jn.
xvii. 15; Rev. iii. 10; also duarnpeiv, Acts xv. 29; wav éx
twos, by conquest to free one’s self from the power of one
[ef. B. 147 (128); W. 367 (344)], Rev. xv. 2; tyrotaOa ex
ths ys, to be so lifted up as to dissolve present relations
to the earth [‘ taken out of the sphere of earthly action’
Westcott], Jn. xii. 32; ehevOepos ex mavrav (elsewhere
always do twos), 1 Co. ix. 19. 7. Hebraistically :
exdtxeiv TO aiud Twos ex xELpos TLVOS (w) D7 Opi, 2 K.
ix. 7), to avenge the blood (murder) of one at the hand
of (on) the slayer, Rev. xix. 2 [B. 182 (158)]; xpivew 76
Kpiwa twos &k twos, to judge one’s judgment on one,
vindicate by venzeance on (cf. B. u. s.], Rev. xviii. 20
(ef. Sept. Ps. exviii. (cxix.) 84).
II. of the Oriarn, Sourcr, CausE; 1. of gen-
eration, birth, race, lineage,nativity; a. after
verbs of begetting, being born, etc.: év yaorpi éxew
éx rivos, Mt. i. 18 cf. 20; Kolrny éyew &k r. Ro. ix. 10; yer
vay twa éx with gen. of the woman, Mt. i. 3, 5 sq. 16;
yivecOa x yuvatkds, to be born of a woman, Gal. iv. 4
cf. 22 sq.; yevvarOa e& aipdrav, éx Oednwaros capkds, Jn.
1.135 é« ris capkds, Jn. iii. 6; é« mopveias, Jn. viii. 41;
éyetpew tut téxva ex, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; (ris) éx kaprov
THs dodvos airov, Acts ii. 30 (Ps. cxxxi. (exxxii.) 11); 9
€x icews axpoBvoria, Ro. ii. 27. In a supernatural
sense: 7d mvetpa Td ek Oeov sc. dv, from the divine nature
[ef. W. 193 (182)], 1 Co. ii. 12 ef. Rev. ii. 11; men are
said yevvaoOar &« mvevparos, Jn. iii. 5 sq. 8; yeyevynuevor
elvat ex Oeod (see yerydw, 2 d.), and to the same purport
elvat éx Oeod, 1 Jn. iv. 4, 6; v. 19, (see eiul, V. 3 d. [and
cf. 7 below]). b. etvat, yeveo Oa, épxeoOat, etc., éx with
the name of the city, race, people, tribe, family, ete., to
spring or originate from, come from: ékx Na¢apér etva, Jn.
1.46 (47); ek modews, i. 44 (45) ; e& dv, se. matépawv [?], Ro.
ix. 53 é& otkov tuvds, Lk. i. MES Wis LSC yévovs, Phil. iii.
5; Acts iv. 6; “EGpaios éé ‘EBpaiav, Phil. iii. 5; ék puarjs,
Lk. ii. 86; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. xi.1; é& “Iovda, Heb. vii.
14; €k omépparos twos, Jn. vii. 42; Ro. i. 3; xi.1; with-
out a verb: é& éOvdv duapredoi, sinners of Gentile birth,
Gal. ii. 15; of the country to which any one belongs: eiva:
2 190
)
€x
ek THs e£ovalas ‘Hpddov, Lk. xxiii. 7; €& émapxias, Acts
xxiii. 34; 6 dv ek ths yis, Jn. ili. 31. 2. of any oth-
er kind of origin: kamvds é« ris ddEns tov Oeov, Rev.
xv. 8; ék Tov "lovdaiwy éoti, comes from the Jews, Jn.
iv. 22; elvas & twos, to proceed from any one as the au-
thor, Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17, 22; Ro. ii. 29; 2Co.iv. 7; 1
Jn. ii. 16, 21, ete.; with éoriv to be mentally supplied: Ro.
xi. 36; 1 Co. viii. 6, (see ets, B. Il. 3¢.a.); 1 Co. xi. 12;
2 Co. iii.5; v.18; Gal. v. 8; épya ex rod marpds pou, works
of which my father is the author, i. e. which I, endued
with my father’s power, have wrought, Jn. x. 32; oiko-
Sop x Oeotv, whose author is God, 2 Co. v.13; xdpiopa, 1
Co. vii. 7; Sedopevov ex rod marpéds, Jn. vi. 65; add, Jn.
xviii. 3; 1 Co. vii.7. 4 x Oeod Stxacocvyn, that comes
from God, i.e.is adjudged by him, Phil. iii. 9; 7 €€ duav
ev jpiv [WH txt. ip. év dp. ] ayarn, love proceeding from
you and taking up its abode in us, i. e. your love the in-
fluence of which we feel [W. 193 (181 sq.); B. 157
(137)], 2 Co. viii. 7; 6 €& bpav Gros, your zeal, 2 Co. ix.
2(RG; cf. W.u.s.note; B. u. s.]; Bracgdnpia éx tevos,
calumny from i. e. disseminated by, Rev. ii. 9 [not Rec.];
eivas €& ovpavod, e& dvOparer, see eivi, V. 3 c.; with the
suggested idea of a nature and disposition derived from
one’s origin: ovk éorw ex Tov Kécpov Tovrov, is not of
earthly origin nor of earthly nature, Jn. xviii. 36; é« rns
yas ear, is of an earthly nature, Jn. iii. 31; é« ths yqs
Aadeiv, to speak as an earthly origin prompts, ibid.; hu-
man virtues are said to be from God, as having their
prototype in God and being wrought in the soul by his
power, @yamn éx Tov Oeov éorwy,1Jn.iv.7. 3. of the
material out of which a thing is made, etc.: 9 yurn éx
tov avdpds, from “one of his ribs,” 1 Co. xi. 12; orépa-
vov e& axavOay, Mt. xxvii. 29; Jn. xix. 2; add, Jn. ii. 15;
ixt/6 5) Rowixs 2lised Cocxys4iis. Rev. xu 2s ck. oe
Akin is 4. its use to note the price, because the
money is, as it were, changed into that which is bought,
(the simple gen. of price is more common, cf. W. 206
(194); [B. § 132,13]): dyopagew ri éx rewos, Mt. xxvii. 7,
(Bar. vi. [i. e. ep. Jer.] 24); xra@oOat éx, Acts i. 18, (dvet-
aOa éx, Palaeph. 46, 3 sq.); cuppaveiv ex Snvapiov (be-
cause the agreement comes from the promised denary [cf.
W. 368 (345); B.u. s.]), Mt. xx. 2. Cognate to this is the
phrase zovetv €avte pidous €k Tov payova, Lk. xvi.9. 5.
esp. after neut. and pass. verbs, ek is used of the cause
(whether thing or person) by which the act expressed
by the accompanying verb is aided, sustained, ef-
fected: addercicbar &k twos, Mt. xv. 5; Mk. vii. 11;
(nusoda Oat, 2 Co. vii. 9 ; AvmetoGat, 2 Co. ii. 2; esp. in the
Apocalypse: dduceioOar, Rev. ii. 11; dmoOaveiv, viii. 11;
[amoxretveo Oar], ix. 18; pori¢erOa, xviii. 1; cKxoriterOat
[LT WH oxorotaGar],ix. 2; rupodoOar, iii. 18; yeniter Oat,
xv. 8 (cf. Is. vi. 4); Jn. vi. 135 yewerv, Mt. xxiii. 25
(where L om. Tr br. e€); wAnpododa, Jn. xii. 3 [Treg.
mare. éemdynon|; xopraterOa, Rev. xix. 21; mdovureiv,
xviii. 3,19; peOvoxerOar, pedvew, xvii. 2, 6 [not Treg.
marg.]; (jv ex, Ro. i. 17; 1 Co. ix. 143 Gal. iii. 11;
avEnow moveicOa, Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii. 19; rederodcdat,
Jas. li. 22; kexomiakws, Jn. iv. 6, (Ael. v. h. 3, 23 ek rod
?
ex
mérov exdbevdev). Also after active verbs: yeyi¢ew, Jn. vi.
13; Rev. viii. 5; morigew, Rev. xiv. 8; [on éx with the
gen. after verbs of fulness, cf. B. 163 (142 sq.); W. 201
(189) ]. 6. of that on which a thing depends, or
from which it results: od« gorw 9 Con é« rev brapysr-
tov, does not depend upon possessions, i. e. possessions
cannot secure life, Lk. xii. 15; edmopia jar éore ek tis
épyacias tavtns, Acts xix. 25; 7d e& duar, as far as de-
pends on you, Ro. xii. 18; in the Pauline phrases 8/catos,
Sixavocvmm, Stxaodv ex miareaws, e& épywv, see [the several
words, esp. ] p. 150; e€ (as the result of, in consequence of)
épyov AaBeiv 76 mvedpa, Gal. iii. 2,53; €& dvacrdcews AaSeiv
tovs vexpovs, Heb. xi. 85 ; eoravpmbn €€ doOeveias, 2 Co.
xill.4; add, Ro. xi. 6; Gal. iii, 18, 21 sq.; Eph. ii. 8 sq.
7. of the power on which any one depends, by which
he is prompted and governed, whose character he
reflects: éx cov (equiv. to Oedmvevarov) Aadeiv, 2 Co. ii. 17;
in the Johannean expressions, eivar ék Geod, Jn. viii. 47
(in a different sense above, I. 1 a.) ; ek rod diaBdAov, ex
TOV Tovnpod, ek TOU Kdapov, see eiul, V. 3 d.; ex THs dAnOetas
eivat, to be led by a desire to know the truth, be a lover
of the truth, Jn. xviii. 37; 1Jdn. iii.19; of é« vouov, the
subjects of the law, Ro. iv. 14; of é& épiOeias equiv. to
of épOevopevor [cf. éprOeia], Ro. ii. 8; 6 €x mictews equiv.
to 6 muorevor, Ro. iii. 26; iv. 16. etvar ék twos also means
to be bound to one, connected with him; to have relations
with him; see eiyi, V. 3d.; hence the periphrasis of éx
mepirouns, the circumcised: Acts xi. 2; Ro. iv. 12; Gal.
ii. 12; of dvres ex mepirouys, Col. iv. 113 of é« meperouns
muotoi, Jewish Christians, Acts x. 45. 8. of the
cause for which: ék« rod movov, for pain, Rev. xvi. 10;
of the reason for (because of) which: Rev. viii. 13; xvi.
11; éx rovrov, Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; cf. Meyer on these
pass. [who urges that é« rovrov used of time denotes
“the point of departure of a temporal series” (W. 367
(344)): from this time on, thenceforth. This argument
seems not to be decisive in the second example (Jn. xix.
12), for there the verb is in the imperfect. On the
use of the phrase in classic Grk. see L. and S.s. v. éx, II.
1; Kriiger §68,17, 7. Cf. our Eng. upon this, hereupon,
in which the temporal sense and the causal often seem
to blend. See below, IV. 1 fin.]. 9. of the supply
out of (from) which a thing is taken, given, received,
eaten, drunk, etc. [cf. W. § 30, 7 and 8; B. 159 (139)
sqq.]: AapBdavew éx, Jn. i. 16; xvi. 14 sq.; diddvae, diadi-
Sdva, Mt. xxv. 8; Jn. vi. 11; 1 Jn.iv. 13; éoOlew, 1 Co.
ix. 7; xi. 28; gayeiv, Jn. vi. 26, 50sq.; Rev. ii. 7; pereé-
xew, 1 Co. x. 17 (but see peréyw) ; mivew, Mt. xxvi. 29;
Mk. xiv. 25; Jn. iv. 13 sq.; Rev. xiv. 10; xviii. 3, (differ-
ently in I. 1 above) ; Aadeiv ex rdv iio, Jn. viii. 44; &x
Tov mepiccevpatos Tis kapdias, Mt. xii. 34; exBdddev, ib.
35 [this belongs here only in case @ncavpds is taken in the
sense of treasure not treasury (the contents as distin-
guished from the re pository); cf. I. 1 above, and s. v.
Onoavpds]; Badrew ex (a part), Mk. xii. 44; Lk. xxi. 4.
10. of that from which any thing is obtained: ova-
Réyew && axavOav, Tpvyav éx Badrov, Lk. vi. 44; Oepigew
éx, Gal. vi. 8. 11. of the whole of which anything
191 ee
is a part: 1 Co, xii. 15 sq. [cf. W. 368 (345)]. 12.
of the source; a. univ.: é& éuavrod ovk edAnoa, Jn.
xii. 49, (oddev ek cauris Aéyers, Soph. El. 344). b. of
the source of conduct, as to be found in the state of
the soul, its feelings, virtues, vices, etc.: ék kapdias,
Ro. vi. 17; ék wuyijs, Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 23, (1 Mace.
Vill. 27; €k THs Wuxns domdterOa, Xen. oec. 10, 4); ek
xa0apas xapdias, 1 Tim. i. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 22; 1 Pet. i. 22
(L T Tr WH om. xa6.]; €& drys tis Kapdias . . . uyas
+. Ocavoias xrrh. MK. xii. 30 sqq. (Sap. viii. 21; 4 Mace.
Vil. 18); ék miorews, Ro. xiv. 23; €& eiduxpweias, 2 Co. ii.
17; e& epiOeias, Phil. i. 16 (17) [yet see epibeia]. c. of
the source of knowledge: karnyeicOa: éx, Ro. ii. 18;
dove ex, Jn. xii. 34; ywoorev, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44;
1 Jn. iv. 6; émomrevew, 1 Pet. ii. 12. Secxvdva, Jas. ii.
18; dpigew, to declare, prove to be, Ro. i. 4 [ef. s. v.
épi¢w, 2 and Mey. ad loc. }. 13. of that from which a
rule of judging or acting is derived; after, accord-
ing to, [ef. W. 368 (345) ]: kpivew éx, Lk. xix. 22 Aas
out of thine own mouth, etc.]; Rev. xx. 12 (Xen. Cyr.
2, 2, 21 €k trav epywv kpivecOat); Sckarovv, caradid tev,
Mt. xii. 37; dvopdagew ex, Eph. iii. 15 (Hom. II. 10, 68;
Soph. O. T. 1036, ete.) ; é« rod Zyew, according to your
ability, 2 Co. viii. 11.
III. By ATTRACTION, common in classic Grk. (cf. W.
§ 66, 6; [B. 377 sq. (323)]), two prepositions coalesce
as it were into one, so that éx seems to be used for é»,
thus dpat ra ék tis oikias avrov concisely for ra év rh
oikia avrod é& avris, Mt. xxiv. 17; 6 marnp 6 e& oipavod
Sacer for 6 marnp 6 év oipave Sacer ex Tov ovpavor, Lk. xi.
13; rv ex Aaodikeias emoroAny for thy eis Aaodik. yeypap-
pevnv Kat éx Aaodcceias Kopuoréay, Col. iv. 16, (2 Mace.
iii. 18). [To this constr. some would refer émvyvots év
éavto thy €& adrovd duvapwv eEeAOovaav, Mk. v. 30, resolv-
ing thy év ait@ Svvapw e&edAdovoay e& aitovd; cf. Field,
Otium Norvicense, pars iii. ad loc. ]
IV. of Time [W. 367 (344)]; 1. of the (temporal)
point from which; Lat. ez, inde a; from, from ... on,
since: é« xpdvev ixavav, Lk. viii 27 [RG Tr mrg.]; éx
yevers, Jn. ix. 1 (Hom. II. 24, 535; Od. 18, 6); é&« ko
ias pntpos (see KovAia, 4); €x veornros, Mt. xix. 20 [RG];
Mk. x. 20; Lk. xviii. 21; Acts xxvi. 4 (Hom. Il. 14, 86);
ex Tov aldvos (see aiwv, 1 b.), Jn. ix. 32 (Ael. v. h. 6, 13;
12, 64 e& aldvos); e& dpxijs, Jn. vi. 64; xvi. 45 €« yeveav
dpyatov, Acts xv. 21 é& éray dxraw, Acts ix. 835 é« moA-
ev éerav, Acts xxiv. 10; é& aizis (sc. Spas), forthwith,
instantly (see é€auris) ; €& ixavod [(sc. xpovov); but LT
Tr WH here éé ixavaév xpover], of a long time, Lk. xxiii.
8, (€x modAov, Thue. 1, 68; 2, 88); with an adverb: ék«
madyo0ev, Mk. ix. 21 LT Tr WH, (é« mpwiOev, 1 Mace.
x. 80), cf. W. § 65, 2; [B. 70 (62)]. Many interpreters
translate é« rovrov, Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12, from this time,
but cf. II. 8 above. 2. of succession in time, a
temporal series: ék deurépov (as it were, proceeding
from, beginning from the second), a second time (see
Sevrepos) ; €x rpirov, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg. br. ex tpir.];
jwepav && hpépas (diem ex die, Cic. ad Att. 7, 26; Caes.
b. g. 1, 16, 4; diem de die, Liv. 5, 48) from day to day;
€xkaorTos 192
day after day, 2 Pet. ii. 8, (Gen. xxxix. 10; Num. xxx.
15; [2 Chr. xxiv. 11]; Sir. v. 7; Eur. Rhes. 437 (445)
etc.; tros é& Erous, Lev. xxv. 50; émaurdv e& emavrod,
Deut. xv. 20).
V. ApvVERBIAL Purasss (cf. W. § 51, 1 d.], in which
lies the idea 1. of direction whence: é& évay
tias, cf. I. 4 above. 2. of source: ék ovppavon, by
consent, by agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5; é& avdyns of neces-
sity, i.e. by compulsion, 2 Co. ix. 7; necessarily, Heb.
vii. 12. 3. of the measure or standard: ék peé-
povs, so that each is a part of the whole, proportion-
ately, [R. V.mrg. each in his part], 1 Co. xii. 27, ef.
Meyer ad loc.; in part, partly, 1 Co. xiii. 9 sqq.; €k
pérpov i. q. petpiws, by measure, moderately, sparingly,
Jn. iii. 34; e& ioornros, by equality, in equal proportion,
2 Co. viii. 13 (14) (€€ toov, Hdt. 7,135); é« meptocod,
beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51 [WH om. Tr. br. ].
VI. In ComposiTIon éx denotes __1. egress: éxBaiva,
éé€pyoua. 2. emission, removal, separation: éxBdAho,
exmeur@, eLarpew. 3. origin: ¢xyovos. 4. public-
ity: é&ayyéXo. 5. the unfolding, opening out, of
something tied together or rolled up: éxreivo, éxmeravvupt.
6. is i. q. utterly, entirely, mavredas, [cf. Eng. out and
out], denoting completion and perfection: éxmAnpde,
éxrehew. Cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 120 sq.
éxaeros, -n, -ov, Sept. for wx, [fr. Hom. down], each,
every ; a. joined to a substantive: éxacroy dévdpov,
Lk. vi. 44; é€xdot@ otpati@ryn, In. xix. 23; Kara pva
éxacrov, every month, Rev. xxii. 2 [not Rec.]; Kxa&
éxaotny nuepav, Heb. iii. 13; cf. W. 111 (106); B. § 127,
30. preceded by ets, Lat. unusquisque, every one: with
a substantive, Eph. iv. 16; Rev. xxii. 2 Rec. b. used
substantively : i vii. 53 [Rec.]; Acts iv. 85; Ro. ii.
6; Gal. vi. 4, ete.; once plur. ékaoror: Rev. vi. 11 Ree.
With a partitive genitive added: rpyov, Ro. xiv. 12;
tpov, Lk. xiii. 15; 1 Co. i. 12; Heb. vi. 11; atray, Jn.
vi. 7[RG]; rav omepparwv, 1 Co. xv. 38. eis exacros,
every one (see eis, 4 b.): without a partit. gen., Acts xx.
31; Col. iv.6; with a partit. gen., Lk. iv. 40; Acts ii. 3;
xvii. 27; 1 Co. xii. 18, ete. éxaoros, when it denotes
individually, every one of many, is often added apposi-
tively to nouns and pronouns and verbs in the plural
number, (Matthiae ii. p. 764 sq.; [W. 516 (481); B
131 (114)]): pets dxovoper exacros, Acts ii. 8; oKop-
muaOnre exaotos, Jn. xvi. 32; émopevovro mares... ,
éxaotos ..., Lk. ii. 3; add, Acts iii. 26; 1 Pet. iv. 10;
Rev. v. 8; xx. 13; likewise eis exaoros, Acts ii. 6; xxi.
26; vpeis of kal eva Exaoros THY EavTod yuvaika dyamdre,
you one by one, each one of youcer erally, Eph. v. 33.
In imitation of the Hebr., ékacros ro Ny avrov
C nN wv wx, Gen. xxvi. 31), Mt. xviii. 35; pera rod ™An-
alov avrov Gay -bx wr, Judg. vi. 29, aie: ), Eph. iv. 25,
cf. Heb. viii. 11 Ree.
éxdorote, adv., at every time, always: 2 Pet. i. 15.
(Hat., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.) *
éxaréy, of, ai, ra, [fr. Hom. down], a hundred: Mt.
xiii. 8 (sc. xkapmovs) ; xviii. 12; Jn. xix. 39, ete.
éxarovraerns JR GT], -es, and éxarovraerns [L Tr WH),
éxBadrro
-és, (fr. érardvand éros; on the want of uniformity in ac-
centuation among authors, copyists, and grammarians
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 406 sq.; W. §6,1b.; B. 29 (26);
[ Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v. dexérys ; esp.
Chandler §§ 703, 709; Gottling p. 323 sq.]), centenarian,
a hundred years old: Ro.iv.19. (Pind. Pyth. 4, 502.) *
éxatovratAactwy, -ov, a hundredfold, a hundred times
as much: Mt. xix. 29 [RG]; Mk. x. 30; Lk. viii. 8. (2
S. xxiv. 3; Xen. oec. 2, 3.) *
éxarovtapyng, -ov, 6, (€xarov and dpyw; on the termi-
nations dpyns and apyos see the full exposition in W.
61 (60); cf. B. 73 (64); Bornemann, Schol. ad Lue. p.
151 sq.; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156 sq.]),
a centurion: Mt. viii. [5 and 8 Tdf.],13 GLT Tr WH;
[xxvii 54 T]; Lk. vii. [2 (?)], 6 TWH; [xxiii 47 T
Tr WH]; Acts x. 1,22; xxi.32 L T Tr WH; [xxii. 26
LTWH)} xxiv.23 pxxvii1;6 L TiTr WHiVreLe
Tr WH, 31, 43 L T Tr WH;; gen. plur. T WH in Acts
Xxili. 17, 23. (Aeschyl. ap. Athen. 1 p. 11 d.; Hdt.
7, 81; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.). See the foll. word.*
éxarévrapxos, -ov, 6, i. . €xarovrapxns, q-v-: Mt. viii. 5,
8 [in 5, 8, Tdf. -apyns], 13 Rec.; xxvii. 54 [Tdf. -apyns];
Lk. vii. 2,6 [T WH -dpyns]; xxiii. 47 [T Tr WH -dp-
xns]; Acts xxi. 32 RG; xxii. 25, 26 [LT WH -dpyns];
xxvii. 6 [RG, 11 Rec., 43 RG], also xxviii. 16 Rec.;
gen. plur., Acts xxiii. 17 and 23 RGLTr. (Xen. Cyr.
5, 3,41; Plut., al.) [Cf. Meisterhans p. 53 sq.]*
éx-Baivw: 2 aor. e&€Bnv; [fr. Hom. down]; to go out:
Heb. xi. 15 LT Tr WH.*
éx-BGAAw; impf. 3 pers. plur. é&€BaddXov (Mk. vi. 13
[Tr mrg. aor.]); fut. éxBadro; plpf. exBeBAnxecy (without
augm., Mk. xvi. 9; cf. W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)); 2 aor.
e€éBadov; [Pass. and Mid. pres. é€k8dAXopar]; 1 aor.
pass. é&BAnOnv; fut. pass. éexBAnOnoopac; [fr. Hom.
down]; Sept. generally for w7, occasionally for s-yin,
win, Pow ; to cast out; to drive out; to send ait
at with the included notion of more or less vio-
lence; a. to drive out, (cast out): a person, Mt. xxi.
12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii. 15 (ek); Lk. xx. 12, ete.; pass.
Mt. viii. 12 [T WH (rejected) mrg. é&eAevoovrat]; darpd-
va, Mt. vii. 22; vili. 16,31; ix. 33; Mk.i. 34,39; Lk.
xi. 20; xiii. 32, etc.; &« tevos, Mk. vil. 26; dao, Mk. xvi.
9 [L WHTr txt. rapa]; & rim, by, through [W. 389
(364) ], Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24, 27 sq.; Mk. iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15,
19 sq.; TO dvopari twos, Mt. vii. 22; [Mk. ix. 38 R*G];
emt 7@ ov. tevos, Lk. ix.49[WH Trmrg. ev; ev ro dv. Mk.
ix. 38 R= L T Tr WH]; Acyo, Mt. viii. 16; twa fo
ths moAews, Lk. iv. 29; Acts vii. 58. b. to cast out:
twa foll. by éw, Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34 sq.; xii. 31 (sc. out
of the world, i. e. be deprived of the power and influ-
ence he exercises in the world); Lk. xiii. 28; ¢ with
gen., Mt. xxi. 39; Mk. xii. 8; Lk. xx.15. athing:
excrement from the belly into the sink, Mt. xv. 17;
mid. éxBadAdpevor (i. e. for themselves, that they might
the more easily save the ship and thereby their lives)
Tov otrov eis tr. Oadaooay, Acts xxvii. 38. c. to expel
a person from a society: to banish from a family, Gal.
iv. 30 (Gen. xxi. 10); éx [Tdf. om. éx] ris éxxAnoias, 3
w
oe ee
€xBacts
Jn.10. d. to compel one to depart: dé rév Gpier, Acts
xiii. 50; to bid one depart, in stern though not violent
language, Mt. ix. 25; Mk. v.40; Acts ix. 40; xvi. 37
(where Gisdngutched fr. ebéyew) to bid one go forth
to do some business, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x.2. e. so em-
ployed that the rapid motion of aie one going is trans-
ferred to the one sending forth; to command or cause
one to depart in haste: Mk. i. 43; Jas. ii. 25; ra mdvra
(sc. mpoBara), to let them out of the fold so that they
rush forth, [al. to thrust them forth by laying hold of
them], Jn. x. 4. f. to draw out with force, tear out:
ri, Mk. ix. 47. g. with the implication of force over-
coming opposing force; to cause a thing to move straight
on to its intended goal: ri kpicw eis vicos, Mt. xii. 20.
h. to reject with contempt; to cast off or away: rd dvoud
twos @s trovnpov, Lk. vi. 22, (Plat. Crito p. 46 b.; de rep.
2 p. 377 c.; Soph. O. C. 636, 646; of actors driven from
the stage, hissed and hooted off, Dem. p. 449, 19). 2.
without the notion of violence; _ a. to draw out,
extract, one thing inserted in another: 16 xdpdos 76 év
T@ dpOadpo, Lk. vi. 42; é€k rod dpOadpod, ibid. and Mt.
vil. 5; dx6 tod 66. 4 (where LT Tr WH ex). b. to
bring out of, to draw or bring forth: ti éx tod Onoavpod,
Mt. xii. 35; xiii. 52; money from a purse, Lk. x. 35.
c. to except, to leave out, i. e. not receive: ti, foll. by €o
Lor €£wev], Rev. xi. 2 (leave out from the things to be
measured, equiv. to py adrny perpnons). 4. foll. by eis
with acc. of place, to lead one forth or away somewhere
with a force which he cannot resist: Mk. i. 12. [On the
pleonastic phrase éxB. ¢&@ (or €Ewbev) cf. W. § 65, 2.]
&x-Pacis, -ews, 7, (€kBaiva) ; 1. an egress, way out,
(Hom., et al.) : applied fig. to the way of escape from
temptation into which one eicépyerat or eiopeperat (see
these words), 1 Co. x. 13. 2. in a sense foreign to
prof. auth., the issue [(cf. its objective sense e. g. Epict.
diss. 2, 7, 9)] i. q. end: used of the end of life, Sap. ii.
17; ékB. THs dvacrpodpys twev, in Heb. xiii. 7, is not
merely the end of their physical life, but the manner in
which they closed a well-spent life as exhibited by their
spirit in dying ; i cf. Delitzsch ad loc.*
éx-BoAh, -7s, 7, (€xBadrA@) ; a. a casting out. b.
spec. the throwing overboard of goods and lading whereby
sailors lighten a ship in a storm to keep her from sinking,
(Aeschyl. sept. 769; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 1, 5 [p. 1110,
9]; Leian. de merc. cond. 1): moveioOar éxBorny, Lat.
jacturam facere, to throw the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii.
18; with rév oxevav added, Sept. Jon. i. 5; rav optiav,
Poll. 1, 99 p. 70 ed. Hemsterh.*
éx-yapl{w; Pass., [pres. éxyapigopar]; impf. efeyapi-
Copnv; to give away (éx out of the house [cf. W. 102
(97)]) in marriage: a daughter, 1 Co. vii. 38° RG,
[ibid.” Rec.]; Mt. xxiv. 38 RGTrtxt. Pass. to marry,
to be given in marriage, Mt. xxii. 30 R G [cf. Tdf.’s note
ad loc.]; Lk. xvii. 27 RG@; see yapigw. Not found
elsewhere.*
éx-yaplonw, i. q. éxyapitw, g. v-: Pass. [pres. éxya-
pioxoua]; Lk. xx. 34 sq. RG; cf. yapioxo and Fritzsche
on Mk. p. 529 sqq. Not found elsewhere.*
198
~(Hab. i. 5); xv. 3.
éxduwee
Ex-yeves, -ov, (€xyivopar), sprung from one, born, begotten,
(Hom. and sqq.); commonly as a subst. 6, ) €xyovos, of
Exyovot, a son, daughter, offspring, children, descendants ;
in Sept. com. in neut. plur. éxyova and ra €xyova, for
18, Deut. vii. 13 [Alex.]; xxviii. 4, etc.; D'NYRY,
Is. atv. 19's) 1xi.2955 {2 Is. xlix. 15; also in Sir. xl. 15;
xliv. 11, ete. In ite N. T. once: 1 Tim. v. 4 réxva
éxyova, grandchildren, [(A. V. renders it by the obsol.
nephews; cf. Eastwood and Wright, Bible Word-Book,
or B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Nephew) ].*
éx-Samavaw: (fut. éxdaravnow}; 1 fut. pass. éxdarava-
Onoopa; to exhaust by expending, to spend wholly, use
up: tas mpovddous, Polyb. 25, 8, 4. Pass. reflexively, to
spend one’s self wholly: foll. by imép tivos, of one who con-
sumes strength and life in laboring for others’ salvation,
2 Co. xii. 15; cf. Kypke ad loc.; [Soph. Lex. s, v.].*
éx-Séxopar; impf. e£edexounv; (ex from some person
or quarter) ; 1. to receive, accept, ([Hom.], Aeschyl.,
Hat., sqq.). 2. to look for, expect, wait for, await: ri,
Jn. v.3 RL; Heb. xi. 10; Jas. v.7; red, Acts xvii.
16; 1 Co. xvi. 11; dAAnAovs éxdéyecGbe wait for one
another, sc. until each shall have received his food, 1 Co.
xi. 33, cf. 21; foll. by ews etc. Heb. x. 13; [absol. 1 Pet.
iii. 20 Rec., but see Tdf.’s note ad loc.]. Rarely with
this meaning in prof. auth., as Soph. Phil. 123; Apollod.
1,9,27§ 3; ws av yernrai 1, Dion. Hal. 6,67. [Comp.:
an-exdéxoua. Cf. déxopua, fin. ]*
éx-8nAos, -ov, (d7Aos), evident, clear, conspicuous: 2 Tim.
iii. 9. (Hom. Il. 5, 2; Dem. p. 24, 10; Polyb.) *
&Snpew, -@; 1 aor. inf. exdyunoar; (€xdnuos away from
home) ; 1. to go abroad (Hat., Soph., Plat., Joseph.,
al.); hence univ. to emigrate, depart: éx tov oaparos,
from the body as the earthly abode of the spirit, 2 Co.
v. 8. 2. to be or live abroad: 2 Co. v. 93 dm tov
kupiov, abode with whom is promised us, 2 Co. v. 6; in
these exx. opp. to évdnpa, q. v.*
&-SiSopr: Mid., fut. exddcouar; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing.
e£édoro, T WH e&ébero (see drodidwpmt) ; a com. word in
Grk. auth. fr. Hom. Il. 3, 459 on; to give out of one’s
house, power, hand, stores ; to give out, give up, give over;
hence also to let out for hire, to farm out, Hat. 1, 68;
yewpyiat dé éxdedopévar SovrAors, Plat. legg. 7 p. 806 d.;
al. In the N. T., Mid. to let out for one’s advantage:
Mt. xxi. 33, 41 [Rec. exddcera, cf. Tdf.’s note; B. 47
(41)]; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xx. 9.*
éx-Si-nyéopat, -ovar; dep. mid.; prop. to narrate in full
or wholly; univ. to relate, tell, declare: ri, Acts xiii. 41
({Aristot. rhet. Alex. 23 p. 1434?,
4]; Joseph., [Philo], Galen, [al.]; Sept.) *
exSixéw, -@; fut. éxdunow; 1 aor. e&ediknaa; (Exd:Kos,.
q: V-); Sept. for 0p3, 7p3, vow; a. twa, to vindicate
one’s right, do one justice, [A. V. avenge]: Lk. xviii. 5.
(1 Mace. vi. 22); twa amd twos, to protect, defend, one
person from another, Lk. xviii. 3; é€avrdy, to avenge one’s
self, Ro. xii. 19. b. ri, to avenge a thing (i. e. to pun-
ish a person for a thing): tv mapaxony, 2 Co. x. 6; 76
alud twos dzé or &k Tevos, to demand in punishment the
blood of one from another, i. e. to exact of the murderer
EKOLKN TLS
the penalty of his crime, [A. V. avenge one’s blood on
or at the hand of]: Rev. vi. 10; xix. 2; see ék, I. 7.
(In Grk. auth. fr. [Apollod.], Diod. down.) *
&-Biknors, -ews, 7, (exdicéw, q- v.), Sept. for 7p) and
DPI, WIP, Vawn (Ezek. xvi. 38; xxiii. 45) and DvAaY;
a revenging; vengeance, punishment: Ro, xii. 19 and
Heb. x. 30 fr. Deut. xxxii. 35; 2 Co. vii. 11; Lk. xxi.
22; moveiv tv éxdiknoiv Tivos, to vindicate one from
wrongs, accomplish the avenging of, Lk. xviii. 7 sq.;
tui, to avenge an injured person, Acts vii. 24 (Judg. xi.
36); éxdiknois twos, objec. gen., the punishment of one,
1 Pet. ii. 14; diddvae exdiknoiv tem, to inflict punishment
on, [render vengeance to] one, 2 Th. i. 8; ef. [Sir. xii.
6]; Ezek. xxv. 14. (Polyb. 3, 8, 10.) *
€kSiKkos, -ov, (diy right, justice, penalty) ; 1. with-
out law and justice (cf. Lat. exlex), unjust: Aeschyl.,
Soph., Eur., Ael.n. an. 16,5. 2. exacting penalty from
(é€x) one; an avenger, punisher: Ro. xiii. 4; mepi twos,
1 Th. iv. 6; (Sap. xii. 12; Sir. xxx. 6; 4 Mace. xv. 26
(29); [Plut. de garrul. § 14 p. 509 f.]; Hdian. 7, 4, 10
[5 ed. Bekk.; al.]).*
éx-SidKw: fut. exduaéo; 1 aor. é€ediwfa; 1. to drive
out, banish: twa, Lk. xi. 49 [here WH Trmrg. d@fovew ;
some refer this to 2]; (Thue. 1, 24; Leian. Tim. 10;
Sept. 1 Chr. viii. 13; Joel ii. 20, ete.). 2..t0 pursue
i. q. to persecute, oppress with calamities: twa, 1 Th. ii.
15 [some refer this to 1]; (Ps. exviii. (cxix.) 157; Sir.
xxx. 19; Dem. 883, 27).*
éx-Soros, -ov, (€xdidwpe), given over, delivered up, (to
enemies, or to the power, the will, of some one): AapBd-
vey tiva éxdorov, Acts ii. 23 (but AaBdvres is rejected by
GLTTr WH); ddovac or rocety teva éxd. Hdt. 3, 1;
Dem. 648, 25; Joseph. antt. 6, 13,9; Palaeph. 41, 2;
al.; Bel and the Dragon vs. 22; éavrév &xd. diddvar To
Oavare, Ignat. ad Smyrn. 4, 2.*
&-Boxh, -7s, 9, (exdéxopuat), the act or manner of receiv-
ing from; hence in prof. auth. 1. reception. 2.
succession. 3. {a taking in a certain sense, i. e.]
interpretation. 4. once in the sacred writings, expec-
tation, awaiting, (cf. éxdéyoua, 2]: Heb. x. 27.*
éx-8tw: 1 aor. e£édvoa; 1 aor. mid. é£educduny; (dvo) ;
to take off: twa, to strip one of his garments, Mt. xxvii.
28 ([L WH mrg. évdio.]; Lk. x. 30; rid re (as in Grk.
fr. Hom. down), [a thing from a person]: Mt. xxvii. 31;
Mk. xv. 20; Mid. to take off from one’s self, to put off
one’s raiment, (Xen. Ag. 1, 28; Hell. 3, 4, 19); fig. to
put off the body, the clothing of the soul, [A. V. be un-
clothed]: 2Co.v. 4; the reading éxdvcdpevor, adopted’
in vs. 3 by certain critics [e. g. Mill, Tdf. 7, Reiche, al.],
is due to a correction by the copyists; see yupvds, 1d.
[Comp.: dz-exdvouat. | *
éxet, adv. of place, there; a. properly: Mt. ii. 13,
15; v. 24, and freq. In Lk. xiii. 28 éxet is not used for
ev exeivy 7@ xatp@ foll. by Srav (at that time... when
etc.), but means in that place whither ye have been ban-
ished; cf. Meyer ad loc. of éxei, sc. dvres, standing
there, Mt. xxvi. 71 [Tr mrg. aio) éxei]. It answers to
a relative adv.: ov ro mvedua, exet €Xevdepia, 2 Co. iii. 17
194
€KELVOS
Rec.; Mt. vi. 21; xviii. 20; xxiv. 28; Mk. vi.10; Lk.
xii. 34; Hebraistically, where a preceding adv. or rel.
pron. has already attracted the verb, éxei is added to
this verb pleonastically: Rev. xii. 6 GT Tr WH (ézov
éxee €xei rérov), 14 (Grou tpéperar éxet); cf. Deut. iv. 5,
14, 26; 1 Macc. xiv. 34, and what was said p. 86%, 5
on the pron. avrés after a relative. b. by a negligent
use common also in the classics it stands after verbs of
motion for ékeice, thither: so after dmépyopa, Mt. il.
22; peraBalva, Mt. xvii. 20; tmdyo, Jn. xi. 8; epxopa,
Jn. xviii. 3; mpoméwmropa, Ro. xv. 24; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
pp. 43 sq. 128; Hermann on Soph. Antig. 515; Trachin.
1006; Bttm. on Philoct. 481; W. § 54,7; B. 71 (62)
and 378 (324).
éxeiBev, adv. of place, thence, from that place, [A. V.
sometimes from thence]: Mt. iv. 21; Mk. vi. 1; Lk. ix. 4;
Jn. iv. 43; Acts xiii.4; and often in the historical bks.
of the N. T. oi éxeiOev elliptically for of éxetOev SvaBjnvat
Oédovres, Lk. xvi. 26 (where L WH om. oi).
éxeivos, -n, -o, (fr. éxet, prop. the one there, cf. Germ.
dortig, der dort), demonst. pron., that man, woman, thing
(Lat. ille, illa, illud); properly of persons, things, times,
places somewhat remote fromthe speaker. 1. used ab-
solutely, a. in antithesis, referring to the more remote
subject: opp. to obros, Lk. xviii. 14; Jas. iv. 15; dpi
. exetvois, Mt. xiii. 11; Mk. iv. 11; éxeivor. . . nyeis,
Heb. xii. 25; GAANoe.. . Dror. . . exeivos, Jn. ix. 9; éxei-
vov... epé, Jn. iii. 30; of Iovdator. . . exeivos dé, In. ii.
20 sq.; 6 prev Kiptos "Incots [RGTom.’I1. WH Tr mrg.
br.].. . éxetvor dé, Mk. xvi. 19 sq., ete. b. of noted per-
sons (as in classic Grk.): in a bad sense, that notorious
man, Jn. vii. 11; ix. 28; in a good sense, — of the Lord
Jesus, 1 Jn. ii. 6; iii. 3, 5,7, 16; iv.17; of the Holy Spirit,
with an apposition added, éxetvos, rd mvedpua THs aAnOetas,
Jn. xvi. 13. c. referring to a noun immediately pre-
ceding, he, she, it, (Lat. is, ea, id, Germ. selbiger): Jn. vii.
45; v.46; Mk. xvi. 11; Acts iii. 13, ete.; cf. W. § 23, 1;
[B.104 (91). Here perhaps may be noticed its use to-
gether with airés of the same subject in the same sen-
tence: éCwypnuévor tm adtod (i. e. the devil) eis 7d éxeivov
OeAnua, 2 Tim. ii. 26; cf. Thuc. 1, 182,63; 4, 29,33 Xen.
Cyr. 4,5, 20; see Riddell, Apol. of Plato, App. § 49;
Kiihner § 467, 12; cf. (wypéw, 2]; equiv. to an emphatic
(Germ. er) he, etc., Mt. xvii. 27; Jn. i. 8; v.43; Tit. iii.
7; equiv. to the forcibly uttered Germ. der (that one
etc.), in which sense it serves to recall and lay stress upon
nouns just before used [cf. our resumptive the same; W.
§ 23,4]: Jn.i.18; v.39; xii. 48; xiv. 26; xv. 26; esp.
is it thus resumptive of a subject expressed participially
[B. 306 (262 sq.)]: Mk. vii. 15 [T WHom. Tr br. the
pron.], 20; Jn.i. 33; ix. 37 (éxeivds €orw, sc. 6 vids Tod
Geod, see eiui, I. 5); Jn. x. 1; xiv. 21; Ro. xiv. 14; 2
Co. x. 18; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 33 6 yap Adyynv dxovar, éxet-
vos Kal Thy Wuyxnv Te mapakova). a. foll. by dr, Mt.
xxiv. 43; foll. by és, Jn. xiii. 26; Ro. xiv. 15. 2
joined with nouns, and then the noun with the article
either precedes, or (somewhat more rarely) follows i%
(W. 162 (153)), [B. 119 (104) sq.]; a. in contrasts:
€Keloe
) TpoTn éxeimm, Heb. viii. 7. b. used to distinguish
accurately from others the things or the persons spoken
of, (Germ. selbig): Mt. vii. 25,27; x. 15; xviii. 32; Mk.
iii. 24 sq.; Lk. vi. 48 sq.; Jn. xviii. 15, and often; esp.
of Time,— and of time past: €v rais jpépas exeivats,
Diy O13, at that time which has been spoken of; said of
time which the writer either cannot or will not define
more precisely and yet wishes to be connected with the
time of the events just narrated: Mt. iii. 1; Mk. i. 9;
viii. 1; Lk. ii. 1, (Ex. 1.11; Judg. xviii. 1; 1S. xxviii.
1); cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 106 sq.; at the time under
consideration: Lk. iv. 2; ix. 36; the same phrase is used
‘of time future: Mt. xxiv. 19; Acts ii. 18 (fr. Joel ii. 29
(iii. 2)); Rev. ix. 6; likewise in the singular, év éxeivn
7H nuepa, Lk. xvii. 31; Jn. xvi. 23,26. But the solemn
phrase ékeivyn 7 7uépa, or 7) nuépa exeivn, simply sets future
time in opposition to the present, that fateful day, that
decisive day, when the Messiah will come to judge: Mt.
Wileoe seo vis 2350xe 1282 Th. 1910s 2 Dimas)
Rev. xvi. 14 (where L T Tr WH om. éxeivns); so in the
phrase é6.aidyv éexeivos, Lk. xx. 35. 3. exeivns (in Ree. dv
éxetyms), scil. 6800, adverbially, (by) that way: Lk. xix.
4; W. § 64,5; [B. 171 (149); see motos, fin.]. John’s
use of the pronoun ékeivos is discussed by Steztz in the
Stud. u. Krit. for 1859, p. 497 sqq.; 1861, p. 267 sqq.,
and by Alex. Buttmann, ibid. 1860, p. 505 sqq. and in
Hilgenfeld’s Zeitsch. fiir wissenschaftl. Theol. 1862, p.
204 sqq.; Buttmann clearly proves in opp. to Steitz
that John’s usage deviates in no respect from the
Greek; Steitz, however, resorts to psychological consid-
erations in the case of Jn. xix. 35, [regarding ék. there
as expressing the writer’s inward assurance. But Steitz
is now understood to have modified his published
views. |
éxeioe, adv. of place, thither, towards that place: Acts
xxi. 3, on which see W. 349 (328); used for exe? in the
pregn. constr. tovs éxetoe dvras, collected there, Acts
xxii. 5, (Acta Thomae § 8); cf. W. § 54, 7.*
ek-tnréw, -@; 1 aor. e&e(nrnoa; Pass., 1 aor. e&e(nrndny;
1 fut. éx¢nrn@noopar; (ex out from a secret place, from
all sides) ; Sept. very often for w71, also for wpa, etc. ;
a. to seek out, search for: properly, rwa, 1 Mace. ix. 26;
figuratively: tov kvptov, tov Oedv, to seek the favor of
God, worship him, Acts xv.17; Ro. iii.11 [Tr mrg. WH
mrg. (nrév]; Heb. xi. 6, (Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2; xxxiii.
(xxxiv.) 5; Ixviii. (Ixix.) 33; Amos v. 4, etc.). b. to
seek out i. e. investigate, scrutinize: ri, Sir. xxxix. 1, 3;
mepi Twos, to examine into anything, 1 Pet. i. 10, where
it is joined with e£epevvav [to seek out and search out],
as in 1 Mace. ix. 26. c. to seek out for one’s self, beq,
_ crave: Heb. xii. 17. da. to demand back, require: 6
aiya tev mpopntray amd ris yeveds taitns, to take ven-
geance on this generation for the slaughter of the proph-
ets (after the Hebr., cf. 2S.iv.11; Ezek. iii. 18; see ex,
I. 7): Lk. xi. 50, [51]. (In prof. auth. thus far only a
single passage has been noted in which this word ap-
pears, Arisiid. or. 8, i. p. 488 [i. e. orat. 38, i. p. 726 ed.
Dind.].) *
195
éxxAnola
ee-Latnors, (ex(nréw, q.v.),-ews, #3 1. an investigat-
ng. . 2. a subject of subtle inquiry and dispute, [R. V.
questioning]: 1 Tim. i. 4T Tr [WH; see Ellic. ad loc.
and cf. oixovoyia}. (Basil Caes., Didym. Al.) *
éx-OapBew, -6: Pass., [pres. éxOayBodpua]; 1 aor. e€e-
OapBnOnv; (exOapPos, q. v.) 3 1. trans. to throw into
amazement or terror; to alarm thoroughly, to terrify: Sir.
xxx. 9; [Job xxxiii.°7 Aq., Compl.]. 2. intrans. to
be struck with amazement; to be thoroughly amazed, as-
tounded; in Grk. writ. once, Orph. Arg. 1217. In the
N. T. only in the pass. and by Mark: to be amazed, for
joy at the unexpected coming of Christ, ix. 15; to be
struck with terror, xvi. 5 sq.; joined with ddxpoveir,
xiv. 33.*
€k-SapBos, -ov, (AduBos, cf. ExpoBos), quite astonished,
amazed: Acts iii. 11. (Polyb. 20, 10, 9. Keel. and
Byzant. writ.; terrifying, dreadful, Dan. vii. 7 Theod.) *
&Bovpdtw: [impf. é£eOavpatov]; to wonder or marvel
greatly (see éx, VI. 6): emi run, at one, Mk. xii. 17 T WH.
(Sir. xxvii. 23; xliii. 18; Dion. Hal., Longin., al.) *
€x-eros, -ov, (€xriOnur), cast out, exposed: muceiv exOera
(equiv. to éxridevar) ra Bpedn, Acts vii. 19. (Eur. Andr.
70; [Manetho, apoteles. 6, 52].)*
éx-kalalpw: 1 aor. e€exadapa [on the a cf. B. 41 (35)];
(éx either i. q. utterly or for &« twos); in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. Il. 2, 153 down; to cleanse out, clean thoroughly :
éwaurov a6 Tivos, to avoid defilement from one and so
keep one’s self pure, 2 Tim. ii. 21; with acc. of the thing
by the removal of which something is made clean, [A. V.
purge out],1Co.v.7. (For ¥ i. q. to cleanse, Judg. vii.
4 var.; for 173 i. q. to take away, Deut. xxvi. 13.) *
éx-kalw: 1 aor. pass. efexavOnv; 1. to burn out.
2. to set on fire. pass. to be kindled, to burn, (Hdt. and
sqq-; often in Sept.) : properly, of fire; metaph. of the
fire and glow of the passions (of anger, Job iii. 17; Sir.
xvi. 6, and often in Plut.); of lust, Ro. i. 27, (Alciphr. 3,
67 ovras eEexavOny eis Epwra).*
exxaxew, -@; [1 aor. eLexdxnoa]; (xaxds) ; to be utterly
spiritless, to be wearied out, exhausted; see éyxaxéw [cf.
W. 25].
ék-Kevtéw, -@: 1 aor. eEexevtnaa; 1. to put out, dig
out: ra Oppara, Aristot. h. a. 2, 17 [p. 508%, 6]; 6,
5. 2. to dig through, transfix, pierce: twd, Rev. i. 7;
dpovrat eis dy (i. €. eis Tovrov, dv [cf. W. 158 (150) ]) ege-
kévtnoav, Jn. xix. 87. (Polyb. 5, 56, 12; Polyaen. 5, 3,
8; for \p4, Judg. ix. 54; 1777 to kill, Num. xxii. 29. 2
Mace. xii. 6. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexice. ete. p.540 sq.)*
€x-kAdw: 1 aor. pass. eEexddoOnv; to break off; to cut
off: Ro. xi. 17, 19, 20 R GT WH (on this vs. see kAdw).
(Sept. Lev. i. 17; Plat. rep. 10 p. 611 d.; Plut., Alciphr.,
alyyi*
éx-kdelw: 1 aor. inf. éxxAeioat; 1 aor. pass. eEexeloOnv;
(fr. (Hdt.) Eur. down]; to shut out: Gal. iv. 17 (viz.
from intercourse with me and with teachers cooperating
with me) ; i. q. fo turn out of doors: to prevent the ap-
proach of one, pass. in Ro. ili. 27.*
éxxAnota, -as, 7, (fr. ékxAnros called out or forth, and
this fr. éxadéw) ; prop. a gathering of citizens called out
éxkAno la
from their homes into some public place; an assembly; so
used 1. among the Greeks from Thue. [cf. Hat. 3,
142] down, an assembly of the people convened at the
public place of council for the purpose of deliberating:
Acts xix. 39. 2. in the Sept. often equiv. to Tp, the
assembly of the Israelites, Judg. xxi. 8; 1 Chr. xxix. 1,
etc., esp. when gathered for sacred purposes, Deut. xxxi.
30 (xxxii. 1); Josh. viii. 35 (ix. 8), ete.; in the N. T.
thusin Acts vii. 38; Heb. ii. 12. 3. any gathering or
throng of men assembled by chance or tumultuously : Acts
KIKero cells 4. in the Christian sense, a. an assem-
bly of Christians gathered for worship : év éxxdnoig, in the
religious meeting, 1 Co. xiv. 19, 35; é€v rats éxxAnoias,
ib. 84; ovvépxerOat ev éxxAnaia, 1 Co. xi. 18; cf. W. § 50,
4a. b. acompany of Christians, or of those who, hoping
for eternal salvation through Jesus Christ, observe their
own religious rites, hold their own religious meetings,
and manage their own affairs according to regulations
prescribed for the body for order’s sake; aa. those
who anywhere, in city or village, constitute such a com-
pany and are united into one body: Acts v. 11; viii.
85 1 Co. iv. 175) vie-45) Phils ive 15 3:3n. 6 fief, W. 122
(116)]; with specification of place, Acts vill. 1; xi. 22;
Ro. xvi. 1; 1Co.iv.17; vi.4; Rev. ii. 1, 8, ete.; Gecoa-
ANovexewy, 1 Th. i. 1; 2 Th. i. 13 Aaodscéwv, Col. iv. 16;
with gen. of the possessor, tod Geov (equiv. to M17 bn P,
Num. xvi. 3; xx. 4), 1 Co. xi. 22; and mention of the
place, 1 Co. i. 2; 2Co.i.1. Plur. af éxxAnoiac: Acts xv.
41; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 19; Rev. i. 4; iii. 6, etc. ;
with rod @eod added, 1 Th. ii. 14; 2 Th.i.4; rod Xpiorod,
Ro. xvi. 16; with mention of the place, as rijs Acias,
Tadarias, etc.: 1 Co. xvi. 1,19; 2 Co. viii. 1; Gal. i. 2;
THs lovdalas tais év Xpiore, joined to Christ [see év, I. 6 b.],
i. e. Christian assemblies, in contrast with those of the
Jews, Gal. i. 22; exkAnoia trav éOvav, gathered from the
Gentiles, Ro. xvi. 4; tév dyiwy, composed of the saints,
1 Co. xiv. 33. 9 éxkAnoia Kar’ oikdy twos, the church in
one’s house, i. e. the company of Christians belonging to
a person’s family; others less aptly understand the
phrase of the Christians accustomed to meet for worship
in the house of some one (for as appears from 1 Co. xiv.
23, the whole Corinthian church was accustomed to
assemble in one and the same place; [but see Bp.
Lehtft. on Col. iv. 15]): Ro. xvi. 5; 1 Co. xvi. 19; Col. iv.
15; Philem. 2. The name 7 éxxAnoia is used even by
Christ while on earth of the company of his adherents
in any city or village: Mt.xviii.17. bb. the whole body
of Christians scattered throughout the earth; collectively,
all who worship and honor God and Christ in whatever
place they may be: Mt. xvi. 18 (where perhaps the Evan-
gelist employs ty» exxAnoiay although Christ may have
said thy Bactdeiay pov); #Co. xii. 28; Eph. i. 22; iii. 10;
v. 23 sqq. 27, 29, 32; Phil. iii. 6; Col. i. 18, 24; with
gen. of the possessor : rod kupiov, Acts xx. 28 [R Tr mrg.
WH r. 6eod]; rot beod, Gal. i.13; 1 Co.xv. 9; 1 Tim. iii. 15.
ec. the name is transferred to the assembly of faithful
Christians already dead and received into heaven: Heb.
xii. 23 (on this pass. see in droypdga, b. and mpwréroxos,
196
éxrey@
fin.). [In general, see Trench § 1, and B. D.’s. v. Church,
alse Am. ed.; and for patristic usage Soph. Lex. 8. v.]
in-ndAl(ve [Ro. xvi. 17 T Tr WH]; 1 aor. é&éxAwa; in
Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down; Sept. chiefly for 130 and 70);
intrans. to turn aside, deviate (from the right way and
course, Mal. ii. 8, [cf. Deut. v. 32]); metaph. and absol.
to turn (one’s self) away [B. 144 (126) sq.; W. 251
(236)], either from the path of rectitude, Ro. iii. 12
(Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3); or from evil (a malis declinare,
Cic. Tusc. 4, 6): dd kaxod, 1 Pet. iii. 11 (Ps. xxxiii.
(xxxiv.) 15; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 27; Prov. iii. 7); dao with
gen. of pers. to turn away from, keep aloof from, one’s
society ; to shun one: Ro. xvi. 17, (ots, Ignat. ad Eph.
7, 1).*
ék-koAupBaw, -G: 1 aor. ptep. éxcoAvpBnoas; to swim
out of: Acts xxvii. 42. (Eur. Hel. 1609; Diod., Dion.
Hal.) *
éx-kopitw: impf. pass. eEexouiCopuny ; to carry out; a dead
man for burial (Polyb. 35, 6, 2; Plut. Agis 21; Hdian.
2,1, 5 [2 ed. Bekk.], etc.; in Lat. efferre): Lk. vii. 12.*
éx-kotrh, -7s, 7, [Polyb., Plut., al.], see éyxomn.
éx-kértw : fut. éxxoyo ; 1 aor. impv. éxxowoy, subjunc.
exxoWe ; [ Pass., pres. éxxémropat]; 2 aor. e€exdrnv; 2 fut.
éxxomnoopat; to cut out, cut off; a. properly: of a tree,
Me 111-94.05 svi $1.9) ekeeiti29 xa 89 Celta 95m Sige
etc.) ; a hand, an eye: Mt. v. 30; xviii. 8, (rov dpOurpor,
Dem. p. 744, (13) 17); pass. & twos, a branch from a4
tree, Ro. xi. 22,24. b. figuratively: tiv adoppny, to cut
off occasion, 2 Co. xi. 12, (rj éAmida, Job xix. 10). In
1 Pet. iii. 7 read éeyxérrecOa; see éyxérra.*
éx-kpépapat (mid. of exxpeyavyupe, cf. Bitm. Aust. Spr.
li. 224 sq.; [Veitch s. v. kpeuauat]; B. 61 (58)) : [impf.
e€expeuaunv|; to hang from: ée&expéuato avtod dkovay,
hung upon his lips (Verg. Aen. 4, 79), Lk. xix. 48, where
T WH ¢é&expéepero, after codd. 8B, a form which T con-
jectures “a vulgari usu haud alienum fuisse;” [ef. B.u.s.;
WH. App. p. 168]. (Plat., Philo, Plut., al.) *
€x-Kpépopar, see the preceding word.
éx-Aadéw, -@: 1 aor. inf. ékAaAjou; to speak out, di-
vulge: tui, foll. by 6m, Acts xxiii. 22. (Judith xi. 9;
Demosth., Philo, Dio Cass., al.) *
€x-Adurw: fut. exrauyo; to shine forth: Mt. xiii. 43;
Dan. xii. 3 var. (Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
éx-AavOdve : to cause to forget; Mid. to forget; pf. éxré
Anopas, foll. by gen.: Heb. xii. 5. (Hom. et sqq.) *
éx-A€yw: pf. pass. ptep. éxAeAeypevos, once in Lk. ix.
35 Lmrg. T Tr WH; Mid., impf. é£eeyouny (Lk. xiv. 7).
1 aor. e€eAeEauny; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for
13; to pick out, choose; in the N. T. (exc. Lk. ix. 35,
where the reading is doubtful) always mid., exréyouat, to
pick or choose out for one’s self: ri, Lk. x. 42; xiv. 7;
twa, one from among many (of Jesus choosing his disci-
ples), Jn. vi. 70; xiii. 18; xv. 16; Actsi.2; did twp,
from a number of persons (Sir. xlv. 16), Lk. vi. 13; ék
Tov xdcpov, Jn. xv. 19; used of choosing one for an office,
Acts vi. 5; foll. by && rivwv, Acts i. 24; to discharge
some business, Acts xv. 22, 25; év jpiv (al. tyiv) égeré-
aro 6 Oeds, foll. by the acc. and inf. denoting the end,
€xA€lTTW
God made choice among us i. e. in our ranks, Acts xv. 7,
where formerly many, misled by the Hebr. 3 yn3 (1 S.
xvi. 9; 1 K. viii. 16, etc., and the Sept. of these pass.),
wrongly regarded éy nyiv as the object on which the mind
of the phoeset was as it were fixed; [W. § 32, 3 a.; B.
159 (138)]. Especially is God said éxdé£acOa those
whom he has judged fit to receive his favors and sepa-
rated from the rest of mankind to be peculiarly his own
and to be attended continually by his gracious oversight:
thus of the Israelites, Acts xiii. 17 (Deut. xiv. 2,
{cf. iv. 37]; 2 Mace. v.19); of Christians, as those
whom he has set apart from among the irreligious mul-
titude as dear unto himself, and whom he has rendered,
through faith in Christ, citizens in the Messianic king-
dom : “Mk. xiii. 20; 1 Co.i. 27 sq.; with two acc. one of
the object, the other of the predicate [W. § 32, 4 b.],
Jas. ii. 5; teva ev Xpior@, so that the ground of the choice
lies in Christ and his merits, foll. by acc. with inf. denot-
ing the end, Eph. i. 4. In Lk. ix. 35 Lmrg. T Tr WH
Jesus is called 6 vids rod Oeod 6 éxXedeypevos (R G L txt.
ayarnrés), as being dear to God beyond all others and
exalted by him to the preéminent dignity of Messiah ;
but see ékXexrds, 1 b.*
éx-elrw; fut. exreipw; 2 aor. eeAurov; 1. trans.
a. to leave out, omit, pass by. b. to leave, quit, (a place) :
70 (hv, Tov Biov, to die, 2 Macc. x. 13; 3 Mace. ii. 23;
Soph. Electr. 1131; Polyb. 2, 41, 2, al.; Dion. Hal. 1, 24;
Luc. Macrob. 12; Alciphr. 3, 28. 2. intrans. to fail;
i. e. to leave off, cease, stop: ra érn, Heb. i. 12 fr. Ps. ci.
(cii.) 28 (where for ODA); 9 iors, Lk. xxii. 32; riches,
ace. to the reading éxAimy (L txt. T Tr WH), Lk. xvi.
9 (often so in Grk. writ., and the Sept. as Jer. vii. 28;
xxviii. (li.) 30). as often in classic Grk. fr. Thue.
down, it is used of the failing or eclipse of the light of
the sun and the moon: rod Alou éxAurovros [WH eéxvei-
novtos], the sun having failed [or failing}, Lk. xxiii. 45
Tdf.; on this (without doubt the true) reading [see esp.
WH. App. ad loc., and] cf., besides Tdf.’s note, Keim
iii. 440 [Eng. trans. vi. 173] (Sir. xvii. 31 (26)). to
expire, die; so ace. to RG L mrg. éxdémnre in Lk. xvi. 9,
(Tob. xiv. 11; Sap. v. 13; Sept. for yy3, Gen. xxv. 8,
etc.; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 29; Lam.i.19; for n3n, Jer. xlix.
(xlii.) 17, 22. Plat. legg. 6, 759 e.; 9, 856 e.; Xen. Cyr.
8, 7, 26).*
éx-exrés, -7, -ov, (exreyw), picked out, chosen; rare in
Grk. writ., as Thuc. 6,100; Plat. legg. 11 p. 938 b.; 12,
948 a., etc.; Sept. for 7393 and 7°13; in the N. T. 1.
chosen by God, and a. to obtain salvation through
Christ (see ékdéeyw) ; hence Christians are called of
éxXexrot Tod Oeov, the chosen or elect of God, [cf. W. 35
(34); 234 (219)], (MIM 13, said of pious Israelites,
Is. Ixv. 9, 15, 23; Ps. civ. (cv.) 43, cf. Sap. iv. 15): Lk.
XViil. 7; We viii. 33; Col. iii. 12; Tit.i.1; without the
gen. Oeov, Mt. xxiv. 22, 24; Mk. xiii. 20, 22; Petri 1%;
with the addition of rod Xpicrod, as gen. of possessor,
Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27 [T Trom.gen.]; KAnrot kai
éxXexrol x. morot, Rev. xvii. 14; yévos éxdexrdv, 1 Pet. ii.
9 (fr. Is. xliii. 20, ef. Add. to Esth. viii. 40 [vi. 17, p. 64
197
é€xAvw
ed. Fritz.]); éAexroi, those who have become true par-
takers of the Christian salvation are contrasted with
kAnroi, those who have been invited but who have not
shown themselves fitted to obtain it, [al. regard the
‘called’ and the ‘chosen’ here as alike partakers of
salvation, but the latter as the ‘choice ones’ (see 2 be-
low), distinguished above the former; ef. Jas. Morison
or Meyer ad loc.], Mt. xx. 16 [here T WH om. Tr br. the
cl.]; xxii. 14; finally, those are called éxAexrof who are
destined for salvation but have not yet been brought to
it, 2 Tim. ii. 10 [but cf. Huther or Ellic. ad loc.]. b.
The Messiah is called preéminently 6 éxXexrds Tow beod,
as appointed by God to the most exalted office conceiv-
able: Lk. xxiii. 35, ef. ix. 35 Lmrg.T Tr WH; cf.
Dillmann, Das Buch Henoch [iibers. u. erklart; allgem.
Einl.], p. xxiii. c. Angels are called éxXexroi, as
those whom God has chosen out from other created
beings to be peculiarly associated with him, and his high-
est ministers in governing the universe: 1 Tim. v. 21;
see dytos, 1 b.; paprvpopa b€ eyo pev tpav ta aya Kai
tovs tepovs dyyéX ous Tov beod, Joseph. b. j. 2, 16, 4 sub
fin.; [yet al. explain by 2 Pet. ii.4; Jude 6; cf. Ellic. on
1 Tim. 1. c.]. 2. univ. choice, select, i. e. the best of
its kind or class, excellent, preéminent: applied to cer-
tain individual Christians, 2 Jn. 1, 13; with év xupio
added, eminent as a Christian (see év, I. 6 b.), Ro.
xvi. 13; of things: AdOos, 1 Pet. ii. 4, [6], (Is. xxviii. 16; 2
Esdr. v. 8; Enoch c. 8 Grk. txt., ed. Dillmann p. 82 sq.).*
éxdoyn, -75, 7, (exd€eya), election, choice ; a. the act
of picking out, choosing: oxedos exroyns (gen. of quality ;
ef. W. § 34, 3 b.; [B.161 (140 sq.) ]), i. q. exXexrov, sc. Tod
Geod, Acts ix. 15; spec. used of that act of God’s free
will by which before the foundation of the world he de-
creed his blessings to certain persons ;—7 kar’ éxAoyny
mpobeats, the decree made from choice [A. V. the purpose
ace. to election, cf. W. 193 (182)], Ro. ix. 11 (ef. Fritz-
sche ad loc. p. 298 sqq.) ;— particularly that by which
he determined to bless certain persons through Christ,
Ro. xi. 28; kar’ éxAoyiy xaptros, according to an election
which is due to grace, or a gracious election, Ro. xi. 5;
with gen. of the pers. elected, 1 Th.i.4; 2 Pet. i. 10.
b. the thing or person chosen: i. q. éxdexroi, Ro. xi. 7.
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Dion. Hal., al.)*
é&-Abw: [Pass., pres. éxdvouar]; pf. ptcep. exreAvpevoss
1 aor. e£eAvOnv; 1 fut. exAvdjnoopar; often in Grk. writ.
fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl. down ; 1. to loose, unloose (cf.
Germ. auslisen), to set free: twa tivos and €k twos. 2.
to dissolve; metaph. to weaken, relax, exhaust, (Sept. Josh.
x. 6; Jer. xlv. (xxxviii.) 4; Aristot. h. an. 9, 1 sub fin.
[p. 610%, 27]; Joseph. antt. 8, 11,3; 13, 8, 1). Com-
monly in the Pass. a. to have one’s strength relaxed, to
be enfeebled through exhaustion, to grow weak, grow weary,
be tired out, (often so in Grk. writ.): of the body, Mt.
ix. 36 Rec.; xv. 32; Mk. viii. 3; thus for };y, 1 S. xiv.
28; 2S. xvii. 29; for 159, 2S. iv. 1 ete.; of the mind,
Gal. vi. 9 (u7) éxAvdpevor if we faint not, sc. in well-do-
ing). Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 17. b. to despond,
become faint-hearted: Heb. xii. 5, (Deut. xx. 3; Prov.
éxudcow
iii. 11); with rats puyais added, Heb. xii. 3; rots ca-
pact, tais uxais, Polyb. 20,4, 7; 7H Wun, 29, 6, 14;
40, 12, 7; cf. Grimm on 1 Macc. ix. 8; 2 Mace. iii, 24.*
&-pdoow; impf. é&éuaccov; 1 aor. e&epaka; to wipe
off; to wipe away: with acc. of object and dat. of instru-
ment, Lk. vii. 38, 44; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3; xiii. 5. (Soph.,
Eur., Hippocr., Aristot., al. Sir. xii. 11; Bar. vi. (ep.
Jer.) 12, 23 (18, 24).)*
éx-puxrnpitw: impf. eéeuuernpicov; to deride by turning
up the nose, to sneer at, scoff at: twa, Lk. xvi. 14; xxiii.
35. (For ay, Ps. ii. 4; [xxxiv. (xxxv.) 16]; 2 K. xix.
21 [here the simple verb]; 1 Esdr. i. 49 Alex.; Ev.
Nicod. c. 10. Prof. writ. use the simple verb (fr. puxrnp
the nose) ; [cf. W. 25].) *
éx-vedw: 1 aor. e€evevoa; 1. to bend to one side (rH
xepady, Xen. ven. 10, 12). 2. to take one’s self away,
withdraw: Jn. v. 13, where Chrysostom says that é&€-
vevoe is equiv. to e&exdwe; but others derive the form
from éxvéw, gq. v. (Sept. for W310, Judg. iv. 18 Alex.; 739,
to turn one’s self, Judg. xviii. 26 Alex.; 2K. ii. 24; xxiii.
_ 16; [add 8 Mace. iii. 22; Joseph. antt. 7,4, 2]. In prof.
auth. also transitively, to avoid a thing; as ra Behn, Diod.
15, 87; mAnyny, ib. 17, 100.) *
ek-vew : 1. properly, to swim away, escape by swim-
ming, (Thue. 2, 90). 2. to escape, slip away secretly,
([Pind. Ol. 13, 163]; Eur. Hipp. 470, etc.) ; in this sense
many interpp. take eێvevce in Jn. vy. 13. But Jesus
withdrew not to avoid danger but the admiration of the
people; for the danger first arose after his withdrawal.*
éx-vyiw: 1 aor. e£évna; a. prop. lo return to one’s
self from drunkenness, become sober, (Gen. ix. 24; [18.
xxv. 37]; Joeli.5; (Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 2]; Lynceus ap.
Ath. 4, 5 p. 130 b.). b. metaph. to return to soberness
of mind (cf. dvavnpw): 1 Co. xv. 34, (Plut. Dem. 20).*
Exovoros, -ov, (€xwv ), voluntary: Kata éxovorov, of free
will, Philem. 14. (Num. xv. 3; xa’ éxovciay, Thue. 8,
27 —[“ The word understood in the one case appears to
be rpémov (Porphyr. de abst. 1, 9 xa6’ éxotvcvov tpdmov,
comp. Eur. Med. 751 éxovai@ rpdm@) ; in the other, yropnv
so éxovaig [doubtful, see L. and S.], && éxovcias, ete. 3”
ef. Lobeck, Phryn. p. 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. l.c.; ef.
W. 463 (432)].)*
éxovolus, adv., [fr. Eur. down], voluntarily, willingly,
of one’s own accord: Heb. x. 26 (éx. duapravew [A. V.
to sin wilfully] is tacitly opposed to sins committed
inconsiderately, and from ignorance or from weakness) ;
1 Retava2.*
éx-rahan, adv., (fr. é« and mdAa, formed like Zkrore [ef.
W. 24 (23); 422 (393); B. 321 (275)]), from of old; of
a long time: 2 Pet. ii. 3; iii. 5.” (A later Grk. word, fr.
Philo down; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 45 sqq.) *
ex-reipatw ; fut. exmeipdow ; [1 aor. é&ereipaca, 1 Co. x.
9 Lmrg. TWH mrg.]; a word wholly biblical [put by
Philo (de congr. erud. grat. § 30, Mang. i. 548) for Sept.
mewpa¢. in quoting Deut. viii. 2]; to prove, test, thoroughly
[A. V. tempt]: rid, his mind and judgment, Lk. x. 25;
Tov Gedy, to put to proof God’s character and power:
Mt. iv. 7; Lk. iv. 12, after Deut. vi. 16, where for 0);
198
EKTANTOO
rov Xptorév, by irreligion and immorality to test the
patience or the avenging power of Christ (exalted to
God’s right hand), 1 Co. x. 9* [(yet L T WH Tr txt.
kipvov), 9» Lmrg.T WH mrg. Cf. Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii-)
18].*
ék-méumw: 1 aor. &émeua; 1 aor. pass. ptep. éxmepe
pbeis; to send forth, send away: Acts xili. 4; xvii. 10.
[From Hom. down. ]*
éx-repiroas, adv., exceedingly, out of measure, the more:
used of intense earnestness, Mk. xiv. 31 LT TrWH
(for Rec. é« mepurood ); not found elsewhere. But see
UmepekTrEpLaa as.”
ex-rerévvupe: 1 aor. é&eréraca; to spread out, stretch
forth: ras xeipas mpéds twa, Ro. x. 21 fr. Is. xv. 2. (Eur.,
Polyb., Plut., Anthol., al.) *
&k-nSdo, -@: 1 aor. éfenndaca; to spring out, leap
forth: eis r. Bydov, Acts xiv. 14 GL T Tr WH. (eis rov
adv, Judith xiv. 17; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt.
down. Deut. xxxiii. 22.) *
éx-mirrw; pf. éxmémtoxa ; 2 aor. e&émecov; 1 aor. e€€-
meoa (Acts xii. 7 LT Tr WH; Gal. v.4; on this aor.
see [winrw and] dmépxoua); [fr. Hom. down]; to fall
out of, to fall down from; 1. prop.: ai dd\voets ex Tov
xetpav (see ex, I. 3 [ef. W. 427 (398) and De verb. comp.
etc. Pt. ii. p. 11]), Acts xii. 7 (ek tis Onxys, Is. vi. 13;
éx Tov ovpavod, Is. xiv. 12); absol.: Mk. xiii. 25 RG;
Acts xxvii. 32; Jas. i. 11; 1 Pet. i. 24; of navigators,
ex. eis (i. e. from a straight course) to fall off i. e. be
driven into (cf. Stallbaum on Plato’s Phileb. p. 106 sq.;
al. supply ‘from deep water,’ and render éxz. to be cast
away], Acts xxvii. 17, 25, 29, in this last vs. L T Tr WH
have adopted érm. card, (often in Grk. writ., as eis yp,
Eur. Hel. 409; els rov Aywéva, Thue. 2, 92). 2. met-
aph. a. rwés [W. 427 (398), and De verb. comp. ete.
u. s.], to fall from a thing, to lose it: ras xaperos, Gal. v.
4; rod idiov ornprypod, 2 Pet. iii. 17, (ris mpds tov Sjpor
evvoias, Plut. Tib. Gracch. 21; Baowdeias, Joseph. antt.
7,9, 2; also with prepositions, éx rav édvrwy, Hadt. 3, 14;
amd tav édridwv, Thue. 8, 81); mddev, Rev. ii. 5 Ree.
(€xetOev, Ael. v. h. 4, 7). b. absol. to perish; to fail,
(properly, to fall from a place which one cannot keep,
fall from its position) : 7 dydmn, 1 Co. xiii. 8 RG; to fall
powerless, fall to the ground, be without effect: of the
divine promise of salvation by Christ, Ro. ix. 6.*
éx-mhéw: [impf. e&érdeov]; 1 aor. e&émAevoa; to sail
from, sail away, depart by ship: amé with gen. of place,
Acts xx. 6; eis with ace. of place, Acts xv. 39; xviii. 18.
[Soph., Hdt., Thue., al.] *
éx-rdnpdw: pf. exmerdnpeoxa; to fill full, to fill up com-
pletely; metaph. rnv émayyediay, to fulfil i. e. make good:
Acts xiii. 33 (32), as in Polyb. 1,67, 1. [From Hdt.
down. |*
ex-TAfpwots, -ews, 7, @ completing, fulfilment: r. ywepav
tT. dyuopod, the time when the days of purification are
to end, Acts xxi. 26. [Dion. Hal., Strab., Philo, al.]*
ex-rAfjoow, -rr@: Pass., [pres. €xmAnooopat or -rropat
(so RG Mt. xiii. 54; Tr WH Acts xiii. 12)]; impf. e&
erAnoodunv; 2 aor. e£erAdynv; com. in Grk. fr. Hom.
€XTVEW
down; prop. to strike out, expel by a blow, drive out or
away; to cast off by a blow, to drive out; commonly, to
strike one out of self-possession, to strike with panic, shock,
astonish; Pass. to be struck with astonishment, astonished,
amazed ; absol.: Mt. xiii. 54; xix. 25; Mk. vi. 2; x. 26;
Lk. ii. 48; used of the glad amazement of the wonder-
ing people, Mk. vii. 37; émi 79 Siday7, Mt. vii. 28; xxii.
33; Mk. i. 22; xi. 18; Lk.iv.32; Acts xiii. 12; [émt rf peya-
Aecdrntt, Lk. ix. 43], (én r@ «ddAder, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 27;
ent 77 Oéq, Ael. v. h. 12,41; [W.§ 33, b.]; by the Greeks
also with simple dat. and with acc. of the thing, as Sap.
xiii. 4; 2 Mace. vii. 12). [Syn. see PoBéo, fin.]*
‘€k-rvéw: 1 aor. é&érvevoa; to breathe out, breathe out
one’s life, breathe one’s last, expire: Mk. xv. 37, 39; Lk.
xxiii. 46, and often in Grk. writ., both without an object
(fr. [Soph. Aj. 1026] Eur. down), and with Biov or Wuxny
added (fr. Aeschyl. down).*
€x-rropevouar; impf. eLeropevduny; fut. éxmopedoopat ;
(pass. [mid., cf. ropevw] of éxmopevo to make to go forth,
to lead owt, with fut. mid.) ; [fr. Xen. down]; Sept. for
RX; to go forth, go out, depart; 1. prop.; with men-
tion of the place whence: dd, Mt. xx. 29; Mk. x. 46;
€£@ (rs modews), Mk. xi. 19; éx, Mk. xiii. 1; éxetOev, Mk.
vi. 11; mapa twos, from one’s abode, one’s vicinity, Jn.
XV. 26, (dxovo@per Ta éxropevdueva mapa Kupiov, Ezek.
XXxill. 30); without mention of the place whence or
whither, which must be learned from the context: Lk.
iii. 7; Acts xxv. 4; with mention of the end to which:
émé tua, Rev. xvi. 14; mpds twa, Mt. iii. 5; Mk. i. 5; éx-
mopever Oat eis ddd, to go forth from some place into the
road [or on his way, cf. 6dds, 1 b.], Mk. x. 17; on Acts
ix. 28 see elomopevouat, 1 a. demons, when expelled, are
said to go out (sc. from the human body): Mt. xvii. 21
RGL; Acts xix.12GLTTr WH. [food (excrement) |
to go out i. e. be discharged, Mk. vii. 19. to come forth,
éx Tav pvnpeiov, of the dead who are restored to life and
leave the tomb, Jn. v. 29. 2. fig. to come forth, to issue,
to proceed: with the adjuncts ex rov dvOpwrov, éx Tis
kapdias, éx Tov ardyaros, of feelings, affections, deeds,
sayings, Mt. xv. 11,18; Mk. vii. 15 L T Tr WH, 20; Lk.
iv. 22; Eph. iv. 29; [éawOev ex rns xapdias, Mk. vii. 21;
with érw6ev alone, ibid. 23]; wav pnya éxmop. dia ordparos
Geov, every appointment whereby God bids a man to be
nourished and preserved, Mt. iv. 4, fr. Deut. viii. 3. to
break forth: of lightnings, flames, etc., &« twos, Rev. iv. 5 +
ix. 17 sq.; xi. 5. to flow forth: of a river (é 7.), Rev.
xxii. 1. to project, from the mouth of one: of a sword,
Rev. i. 16; xix. 15, 21 Rec. to spread abroad, of a ru-
mor : foll. by es, Lk. iv. 37. [Syn. cf. €pyopas, fin. ]*
éx-ropvevw: 1 aor. ptep. fem. éxmopvetoaca; (the prefix
éx seems to indicate a lust that gluts itself, satisfies itself
completely); Sept. often for 731; to go a whoring, ‘give
one’s self over to fornication’ A. V.: Jude 7. Not found
in prof. writ. [Test. xii. Patr. test. Dan § 5; Poll. 6, 30
(126).]*
ex-mrbw: 1 aor. é&émrvaa; to spit out (Hom. Od. 5, 322,
etc.) ; trop. to reject, spurn, loathe: ri, Gal. iv. 14, in
which sense the Greeks used karamrvev, mooonrvew,
199
eKTELVM
mrvew, and Philo rapamrvew; cf. Kypke and Loesner [or
Ellic.] on Gal. 1. c.; Lod. ad Phryn. p. 17.*
éx-pifdw, -@: 1 aor. e£epi{woa; Pass., 1 aor. éfepithOnv;
1 fut. expu(wOnromat; to root out, pluck up by the roots: rl,
Mt. xiii. 29; xv. 138; Lk. xvii. 6; Jude12. (Jer.i. 10;
Zeph. ii. 4; Sir. iii. 9; [Sap. iv.4]; 1 Mace. v. 51 [Alex.];
2 Mace. xii. 7; [Sibyll. frag. 2, 21; al.]; Geopon.) *
ex-oracts, -ews, 7, (eElornpt) ; 1. univ. in Grk. writ.
any casting down of a thing from its proper place or state ;
displacement, (Aristot., Plut.). 2. a throwing of the
mind out of its normal state, alienation of mind, whether
such as makes a lunatic (S:avoias, Deut. xxviii. 28; rev
Aoytoper, Plut. Sol. 8), or that of the man who by some
sudden emotion is transported as it were out of himself,
so that in this rapt condition, although he is awake, his
mind is so drawn off from all surrounding objects and
wholly fixed on things divine that he sees nothing but the
forms and images lying within, and thinks that he per-
ceives with his bodily eyes and ears realities shown him
by God, (Philo, quis rerum divin. heres § 53 [cf. 51; B.D.
s.v. Trance; Delitzsch, Psychol. v.5]): émémecev [Rec., al.
éyeveto| em adtov éxotaais, Acts x. 10; eidev ev exordacet
Gpaua, Acts xi. 5; yevéoOat év exotracer, Acts xxii. 17, cf.
2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 3. In the O. T. and the New amaze-
ment [cf. Longin. 1,4; Stob. flor. tit. 104, 7], the state of
one who, either owing to the importance or the novelty of
an event, is thrown into a state of blended fear and won-
der: efyev avtas tpdpos Kal éxotacis, Mk. xvi. 8; &€arn-
cay éxorace: peyddy, Mk. v.42 (Ezek. xxvi. 16); éxoraots
€daBev Gravras, Lk. v. 26; emAnoOnoav GapBous x. exota-
cews, Acts iii. 10; (for NIN, trembling, Gen. xxvii. 33 ;
1 S. xiv. 15, ete.; 33, fear, 2 Chr. xiv. 14, etc.).*
éx-oTpedpw: pf. pass. e&éorpappar ; 1. to turn or twist
out, tear up, (Hom. Il. 17, 58). 2. to turn inside out,
invert; trop. to change for the worse, pervert, corrupt,
(Arstph. nub. 554; Sept. Deut. xxxii. 20): Tit. iii. 11.*
[éx-cdfe: 1 aor. &écwoa; to save from, either to keep
or to rescue from danger (fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down) :
eis aiyiaddv exodoa 6 mAoioy to bring the ship safe to
shore, Acts xxvii. 39 WH txt.; al. aoa, see ewOéw, and
eur tacs.|
éx-rapdcrow ; post-classical ; to agitate, trouble, exceed-
ingly: r. rédw, Acts xvi. 20. (7. djpov, Plut. Coriol. 19,
and the like often in Dion Cass. Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5;
Sap. xvii. 3, etc.) *
éx-re(vw; fut. exrevd; 1 aor. é&érewa; [fr. Aeschyl.,
Soph., Hdt. down]; Sept. com. for 703, v9 and now;
to stretch out, stretch forth: rnv xeipa (often in Sept.),
Mt. viii. 3; xii. 18; xiv. 31; xxvi. 51; Mk. i. 413 iii.
5; Lk. v.13; vi. 10; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xxvi. 1; with
the addition of émi twa, over, towards, against one —
either to point out something, Mt. xii. 49, or to lay
hold of a person in order to do him violence, Lk. xxii.
53; éxr. 7. xeipa eis taow, spoken of God, Acts iv. 30;
dyxvpas, properly, to carry forward [R. V. lay out] the
cable to which the anchor is fastened, i. e. to cast anchor,
(“the idea of extending the cables runs into that of car:
rying out and dropping the anchors ” (Hackett) ; cf. B. D.
ExXTEAEW
Am. ed. p. 3009 last par.], Acts xxvii. 30, [Comr.: ér-,
Umep-exreiva. | *
éx-reddw, -@: 1 aor. inf. éxredéoat; to finish, complete :
Lk. xiv. 29 sq. (From Hom. down; i. q. m4, Deut.
xxxii. 45.) *
éx-révera, -as, 4, (exrevys), a later Grk. word, (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 311); a. prop. extension. b. intentness
(of mind), earnestness: év éxreveia, earnestly, Acts xxvi. 7.
(2 Mace. xiv. 38; Judith iv. 9. Cf. Grimm on 3 Mace.
vi. 41 [where he refers to Cic. ad Att. 10, 17, 1].)*
éxrevis, -és, (exreiv), prop. stretched out; fig. intent,
earnest, assiduous : mpocevxn, Acts xii. 5 RG (edxn, Ignat.
[interpol.] ad Eph. 10; dénats x. ixeoia, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
59,2); dydrn, 1 Pet. iv. 8. Neut. of the compar. éxre-
véarepov, as adv., more intently, more earnestly, Lk. xxii. 44
[L br. WH reject the pass.]. (éxrevns pidos, Aeschyl.
suppl. 983; Polyb. 22, 5,4; then very often fr. Philo
on; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 311.) *
éxrevds, adv., earnestly, fervently: Acts xii. 5L T Tr
WH; dyaray, 1 Pet. i. 22. (Jonah iii. 8; Joel i. 14; 3
Mace. v. 9. Polyb. ete. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 311; [W.
25; 463 (431)].)*
éx-r(@npe: 1 aor. pass. ptep. exredeis; Mid., impf. é&eri-
Oéunv; 2 aor. e&eOeunv; to place or set out, expose ; uy
prop.: an infant, Acts vii. 21; (Sap. xviii. 5; [Hdt. 1,
112]; Arstph. nub. 531; Ael. v. h. 2,7; Leian. de
sacrif. 5, and often). 2. Mid. metaph. to set forth, de-
clare, ecpound: Acts xi. 4; ri, Acts xviii. 26; xxviii. 23;
({Aristot. passim]; Diod. 12, 18; Joseph. antt. 1, 12, 2;
Athen. 7 p. 278 d.; al.).*
éx-tivacow: 1 aor. impv. exrivdare ; 1 aor. mid. ptcp.
éxtiva£apuevos ; to shake off, so that something adhering
shall fall: rov xyouv, Mk. vi. 11; rov xomoprdv, Mt. x. 14
(where the gen. rév rodév does not depend on the verb
but on the subst. [L T WH mrg., however, insert éx]) ;
by this symbolic act a person expresses extreme con-
tempt for another and refuses to have any further inter-
course with him [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Dust] ; Mid. to shake
off for (the cleansing of) one’s self: t.Kovoprov .. . émi
twa, against one, Acts xiii. 51; ra tudrea, dust from gar-
ments, Acts xviii. 6; [cf. B. D. u.s.; Neh. v.13]. (to knock
out, rovs dddvras, Hom. Il. 16, 348; Plut. Cat. maj. 14.)*
xros, -7, -ov, the sixth: Mt. xx. 5, etc. [From Hom.
down. |
éxrés, adv., (opp. to évros, q. v.), outside, beyond; a.
70 éxrds, the outside, exterior, with possess. gen., Mt. xxiii.
26 (cf. r6 €Ew@bev rod mornpiov, 25). On the pleonastic
phrase ékrds ef pn, see ci, I.8d. b. It has the force of
a prep. [cf. W. § 54, 6], and is foll. by the gen. [so even
in Hom.]; a. outside of: éxrds rod c@paros out of the
body, i. e. freed from it, 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. (in vs.3 LT Tr
WH read yopis for éxrds) ; elvar exros Tod cap. [A. V.
without the body i. e.], does not pertain to the body, 1
Co. vi. 18. 8. beyond, besides, except: Acts xxvi. 22
(where the constr. is ovdév Aéywv éxrds ToUT@v, dre of...
€dAnoay etc. [cf. B. 287 (246) ; W. 158 (149) sq.]); 1
Co. xv. 27. (Sept. for 52 foll. by 12, Judg. viii. 26;
aahn, 1K. x. 13; 2 Chr. ix. 12; xvii. 19.) *
200
expetya
éx-rpémw: Pass., [pres. exrpémopat]; 2 aor. éLerpanny;
2 fut. éxrpamnoopat; 1. to turn or twist out; pass. in
a medical sense, in a fig. of the limbs: fva py rd ywddv
éxrpary, lest it be wrenched out of (its proper) place,
dislocated, [R. V. mrg. put out of joint], (see exx. of this
use fr. med. writ. in Steph. Thesaur. iii. col. 607 d.), i. e.
lest he who is weak in a state of grace fall therefrom,
Heb. xii. 13 [but Liinem., Delitzsch, al., still adhere to
the meaning turn aside, go astray; cf. A. V., R. V. txt.].
2. to turn off or aside; pass. in a mid. sense [cf. B. 192
(166 sq.) ], to turn one’s self aside, to be turned aside; (in-
trans.) to turn aside; Hesych.: ée€erpdmnoav> é&€kduvay,
(rjs 6000, Leian. dial. deor. 25, 2; Ael. v. h. 14, 49 [48];
ééw rhs 6600, Arr. exp. Al. 3, 21, 7 [4]; absol. Xen. an.
4, 5,15; Arstph. Plut. 837; with mention of the place
to which, Hdt. 6, 34; Plat. Soph. p. 222 a.; al.); figu-
ratively : eis paravoAoyiav, 1 Tim. i. 6; emi rods pvdous, 2
Tim. iv. 4; dmice tivds, to turn away from one in order to
follow another, 1 Tim. v. 15, (eis ddixous mpaées, Joseph.
antt. 8, 10, 2). with acc. to turn away from, to shun a
thing, to avoid meeting or associating with one: tas Kevo-
gevias, 1 Tim. vi. 20, (rov €Xeyxov, Polyb. 35, 4, 14;
Taddous exrpemecOar kat ctvodov devyew tiv peT avTar,
Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 40).*
éx-tpépw; fr. Aeschyl. down; 1. to nourish up to
maturity; then univ. to nourish: thy €avrod cdpxa, Eph.
ven 9: 2. to nurture, bring up: ra réxva, Eph. vi. 4.*
[xrpopos, adj., (cf. éxpoBos), trembling exceedingly, ex-
ceedingly terrified: Heb. xii. 21 Tr mrg. WH mrg., after
codd. Sin. and Clarom. (al. évrpoyos, q. v.). Not found
elsewhere.* ]
Ex-Tpwpa, -ros, T6, (€xTitpHoKw to cause or to suffer abor-
tion; like &Spopa fr. éx8i8pacxw), an abortion, abortive
birth; an untimely birth: 1 Co. xv. 8, where Paul likens
himself to an éxrpeya, and in vs. 9 explains in what sense:
that he is as inferior to the rest of the apostles as an im-
mature birth comes short of a mature one, and is no more
worthy of the name of an apostle than an abortion is of
the name of a child. (Num. xii. 12; Eccl. vi. 3; Job
iii. 16; in Grk. first used by Aristot. de gen. an. 4, 5, 4
[p. 773, 18]; but, as Phrynichus shows, p. 208 sq. ed.
Lob., [288 sq. ed. Rutherford], duBropa and é&duBdopa
are preferable; [Huztable in “ Expositor” for Apr. 1882
p. 277 sqq. ; Bp. Lght/t. Ignat. ad Rom. 9 p. 230 sq.].) *
éx-épw ; fut. eLoicw; 1 aor. eénveyxa; 2 aor. éénveyxov ;
1. to carry out, to bear forth: twa, Acts v. 15; the dead
for burial, Acts v. 6, 9 sq. (often so in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. Il. 24, 786 down; see éxxopitw); ri, Lk. xv. 22; 1
Tim. vi. 7. 2. to (bring i. e.) lead out: red, Mk. viii.
23 T Tr txt. WH. 3. to bring forth i. e. produce : of
the earth bearing plants, Heb. vi. 8 [ef. W. § 45, 6 a.];
(Hat. 1,193; Xen. oec. 16, 5; Ael.v. h. 3, 18 and often ;
Sept., Gen. i. 12; Hag. i. 11; Cant. ii. 1S) ae
éx-hevyw : fut. expevéouar; pf. éxmépevya; 2 aor. &&
épvyov; [fr. Hom. down]; to flee out of, flee away; a.
to seek safety in flight; absol. Acts xvi. 27; ék rod otkov,
Acts xix. 16. b. to escape: 1 Th. v. 3; Heb. ii. 3; ri,
Lk. xxi. 36; Ro. ii. 3; ruvd, Heb. xii. 25 LT Tr WH;
expoBéw
[ras xeipds revos, 2 Co. xi. 33.
(128) sq. ].*
éx-oBew, -; to frighten away, to terrify ; to throw into
violent fright: twa, 2Co.x.9. (Deut. xxviii. 26; Zeph.
ili. 13, ete.; Thuc., Plat., al.) *
ExhoBos, -ov, stricken with fear or terror, exceedingly
frightened, terrified: Mk. ix. 6; Heb. xii. 21 fr. Deut. ix.
19. (Aristot. physiogn. 6 [p. 812°, 29]; Plut. Fab. 6.) *
éx-pvw; 2 aor. pass. Lepin» (W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60) ;
Kriiger § 40, s. v. pv; [Veitch ibid. ]) ; [fr. Hom. down];
to generate or produce from; to cause to grow out: drav 6
kiddos . . . ra PvAAG exdy (subj. pres.), when the branch
has become tender and puts forth leaves, R (not R*) GT
WH in Mt. xxiv. 32 and Mk. xiii. 28; [al., retaining the
same accentuation, regard it as 2 aor. act. subj. intrans.,
with ra vA. as subject; but against the change of sub-
ject see Meyer or Weiss]. But Fritzsche, Lchm., Treg.,
al. have with reason restored [after Erasmus] expug (2
aor. pass. subj.), which Grsb. had approved: when the
leaves have grown out,—so that ra pvAda is the subject.*
éx-xéw and (a form censured by the grammarians, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 726) éxxvvw (whence pres. pass. ptcp.
exxvvouevos and, in L T Tr WH after the Aeolic form,
éxxurvdpwevos [cf. B. 69 (61); W.§ 2,1 d.; Tdf. Proleg.
p- 79]: Mt. xxiii. 35; xxvi. 28; Mk. xiv. 24; Lk. xi. 50
[where Tr txt. WH txt. exxeyupevoy for exxyuvvdpevor];
xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]); impv. plur. éxyéere
(Rey. xvi. 1 L TWH; on which uncontr. form cf. Bitm.
Gram. p. 196 [p. 174 Robinson’s trans.]; B. 44 (38);
{some would make it a 2 aor., see WH. App. p. 165]) ;
fut. éxye@ (Acts ii. 17 sq.; Ex. xxix. 12), for which the
earlier Greek used éxyevow (W. 77 (74); [ef. 85 (82);
esp. B. 68 (60)]); 1 aor. e€éxea, 3 pers. sing. e&éyee
({whereas the 3 sing. of the impf. is contr. -€yee -éyeu,
cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 299 sq.]; cf. Bitm. Gram.
p- 196 note ** [Eng. trans. u. s. note f]), inf. éxyéae (Ro.
iii. 15; Is. lix. 7; Ezek. ix. 8); Pass., [pres. éxyetras,
Mk. ii. 22RGLTrmrg.br.; impf. 3 pers. sing. é£eyetro,
Acts xxii. 20 R G, éfeyvvvero L T Tr WH]; pf. exxeé-
xvpar; 1 aor. e€exvOnv; 1 fut. exxvOnoopa (see B. 69
(60) sq.); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 9W; to pour out;
a. prop.: gdAnv, by meton. of the container for the
contained, Rev. xvi. 1-4, 8, 10, 12, 17; of wine, which
when the vessel is burst runs out and is lost, Mt. ix. 17;
Mk. ii. 22 [RGLTrmrg. in br.]; Lk. v. 37; used of
other things usually guarded with care which are poured
forth or cast out: of money, Jn. ii. 15; e€exv6n ra omday-
xva, of the ruptured body of a man, Acts i. 18 (e£eyvOn
7 kotAia avrod eis T. yhv, of a man thrust through with a
sword, 2S. xx. 10). The phrase aiua éxyeiv or éxyv-
v(v)ew is freq. used of bloodshed: [Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi.
50; Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rey. xvi. 6* (where Tdf.
aipara)]; see aiua, 2 a. b. metaph. i. q. to bestow or
distribute largely (cf. Fritzsche on Tob. iv. 17 and Sir.
i. 8): rd mvedpa TO Gytov or dd Tov mvevparos, i. e. the
abundant bestowal of the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 33 fr.
Joel ii. 28, 29 (iii. 1, 2); emi teva, Acts ii. 17 sq.; x. 45;
Tit. iii. 6; 1) dydmn rod Oeod exxéyura ev rats xapdias
Cf. W. § 52, 4,4; B. 146
201
éNatwv
jpav dia mv. dyiov, the Holy Spirit gives our souls a rich
sense of the greatness of God’s love for us, Ro. v. 5;
(dpynv, Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 8, [cf. xvi. 11]). The pass.,
like the Lat. effundor, me effundo, is used of those who
give themselves up to a thing, rush headlong into it, (ye-
Awrt, Alciphr.; eis éraipas, Polyb. 32, 11,4): absol. 7
mhavy Tod Badadp piobod e£exvOnoar, led astray by the
hire of Balaam (i. e. by the same love of reward as Ba-
laam) they gave themselves up, sc. to wickedness, Jude
11, (so éxxvOjva in Arstph. vesp. 1469 is used absol. of
one giving himself up to joy. The passage in Jude is
generally explained thus: “for hire they gave themselves
up to [R. V. ran riotously in] the error of Balaam”’; cf.
W. 206 (194) [and De Wette (ed. Briickner) ad loc.]).*
ex-xtve, and (LT Tr WH) éxyvvvw, see exyéw.
[Comp.: dmep- exxvve. ]
éx-xwpéw, -@; [fr. Soph. and Hat. on]; to depart from;
to remove from in the sense of fleeing from: Lk. xxi. 21.
(For 73, Am. vii. 12.) *
ex-rpoxo: 1 aor. e€epvEa; to expire, to breathe out one’s
life (see éxmvéw): Acts v. 5,10; xii. 23. (Hippocr.,
Jambl.) *
éxdv, -ovca, -dv, unforced, voluntary, willing, of one’s
own will, of one’s own accord: Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 17.
[From Hom. down. ]*
data, -as, 7, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for m1; 1. an
olive tree: Ro. xi. 17, 24; plur. Rev. xi. 4. 1d dpos trav
éAaav (for IT WI, Zech. xiv. 4), the Mount of Olives,
so called from the multitude of olive-trees which grew
upon it, distant from Jerusalem (Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 6)
five stadia eastward (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Oelberg; Ar-
nold in Herzog x. p. 549 sqq.; Furrer in Schenkel iv.
354 sq.; [Grove and Porter in BB.DD.]): Mt. xxi. 1;
XXIV.-o XXVI OOS) Mk: xis xii 3 ) xiv26 9 ke xix:
87; xxi. 39; Jn. vil 1 Rec:; (on Lk. xix. 29; xxi. 37,
see €Aaav). 2. an olive, the fruit of the olive-tree:
Jas. iii. 12.*
éanov, -ov, 76, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for ;2y,
also for 17¥); olive-oil: used for feeding lamps, Mt. xxv.
3 sq. 8; for healing the sick, Mk. vi. 13; Lk. x. 34; Jas.
v.14; for anointing the head and body at feasts (Athen.
15, c. 11) [cf. s. v. pdpov], Lk. vii. 46; Heb. i. 9 (on
which pass. see dya\Xiaots) ; mentioned among articles
of commerce, Lk. xvi. 6; Rev. vi. 6; xviii. 13. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Oel; Furrer in Schenkel iv. 354; Schneder-
mann, Die bibl. Symbolik des Oelbaumes u. d. Oeles, in
the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1874, p. 4 sqq.; [B. D.
s. v. Oil, II. 4; and Mey. ed. Weiss on Mk. vi. 13].*
ehatdv, -Gvos, 6, (the ending oy in derivative nouns in-
dicating a place set with trees of the kind designated
by the primitive, as dapvav, irewv, Spupav, xedpwr, cf.
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 422 sqq.; Kuhneri. p. 711; (Jelf
§ 335 d.]); an olive-orchard, a place planted with olive
trees, i.e. the Mount of Olives [ A.V. Olivet] (see éAaia, 1):
Acts i. 12 (81a Tod €Xat@vos dpous, Joseph. antt. 7, 9, 2).
In Lk. xix. 29; xxi. 37 also we should write 1rd dpos ro
kadoupevoy edasav (so LT Tr, [but WH with RG -av)) ;
likewise in Joseph. antt. 20, 8,6 mpos dpos rd moocayo
Enapirns
pevdpevov edaidv; b. j. 2,13, 5 and 5, 2, 3 els (xara)
€Aaav Kadovpevov dpos; 6, 2, 8 kara Td Ehatov dpos; [but
in Joseph. ll. ec. Bekker edits -dv]. Cf. Fritzsche on
Mk. p. 794 sq.; B. 22 (19 sq.) ; W. 182 (171) n. 1; [but
see WH. App. p. 158°]. (The Sept. sometimes render
nn freely by av, as Ex. xxiii. 11; Deut. vi. 11; 1 S.
viii. 14, etc.; not found in Grk. writ.) *
*Edapirns (T WH ’EAapeirns, [see s. v. et, ¢]), -ov, 6, an
Elamite, i. e. an inhabitant of the province of Elymais,
a region stretching southwards to the Persian Gulf, but
the boundaries of which are variously given (cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Elam; Vaihinger in Herzog iii. p. 747 sqq.;
Dillmann in Schenkel ii. p. 91 sq.; Schrader in Riehm
p. 358 sq.; Grimm on 1 Mace. vi. 1; [BB.DD. s. vv.
Elam, Elamites]): Actsii.9. (Is. xxi. 2; in Grk. writ.
*Edvpaios, and so Judith i. 6.) *
€&doowyv [in Jn., Ro.] or -rrev [in Heb., 1 Tim.; cf. B.
7], -ov, (compar. of the Epic adj. éhaxvs equiv. to puxpds),
[fr. Hom. down], less, —either in age (younger), Ro. ix.
12; orin rank, Heb. vii. 7; or in excellence, worse (opp.
to xadds), Jn. ii. 10. Neuter €darrov, adverbially, Jess
[se. than ete., A. V. under; cf. W. 239 (225); 595 sq.
(654); B. 127 sq. (112)]: 1 Tim, v. 9.*
&arrovéew [B. 7], -@: 1 aor. nAatrévnca; (€Aarrov) ;
not found in prof. auth. [yet see Aristot. de plant. 2, 3
p- 825%, 23]; to be less, inferior, (in possessions): 2 Co.
viii. 15 fr. Ex. xvi. 18. (Prov. xi. 24; Sir. xix. (5) 6;
also transitively, to make less, diminish: Gen. viii. 3;
Prov. xiv. 34; 2 Mace. xiii. 19, ete.) *
é&tarrow [B. 7], -@: 1 aor. nAarrwca; Pass., [pres.
éNarrovpat|; pf. ptep. nAarr@pevos; (€Adttwv); to make
less or inferior: twa, in dignity, Heb. ii. 7; Pass. to be
made less or inferior: in dignity, Heb. ii. 9; to decrease
(opp. to avéavw), in authority and popularity, Jn. iii. 30.
(Many times in Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thue. on.) *
€\atve; pf. ptep. éAndaxws; Pass., [pres. €Aavvopac];
impf. jAavvounv; to drive: of the wind driving ships or
clouds, Jas. iii. 4; 2 Pet. ii. 17; of sailors propelling a
vessel by oars, to row, Mk. vi. 48; to be carried in a
ship, to sail, Jn. vi. 19, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; often also with vja or vaty added); of demons
driving to some place the men whom they possess, Lk.
viii. 29. [Come.: am-, cvv-ehavve.]*
&adpla, -as, 7, (€Aapds), lightness; used of levity and
fickleness of mind, 2 Co. i. 17; a later word, ef. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 343.*
Aahpds, -d, -dv, light in weight, quick, agile; a light
oprioy is used fig. concerning the commandments of
Jesus, easy to be kept, Mt. xi. 30; neut. 7d €Aagdpdr,
substantively, the lightness: rijs Odivews [A. V. our light
affliction], 2 Co. iv. 17, (From Hom. down.) *
&\dxtoros, -n, -ov, (superl. of the adj. pukpds, but com-
ing fr. €daxvs), [(Hom. h. Mere. 578), Hdt. down], small-
est, least, — whether in size: Jas. iii. 4; in amount: of
the management of affairs, muards év edaxiorm, Lk. xvi.
10 (opp. to ev mod); Xix. 17; ev eAayiat@ ddiKos, Lk.
xvi. 10; in importance: what is of the least moment,
1 Co. vi. 2; in authority: of commandments, Mt. v. 19;
202
eneyyX
in the estimation of men: of persons, Mt. xxv. 40, 455
in rank and excellence: of persons, Mt. v.19; 1 Co. xv.
9; of a town, Mt. ii. 6. ovd€ [RG otre}] éAaxiorov, not
even a very small thing, Lk. xii. 26; €mol eis éAdyiorov
éore (see eiul, V. 2 ¢.), 1 Co. iv. 3.*
éhaxerérepos, -a, -ov, (compar. formed fr. the superl.
é\dxworos; there is also a superl. €kaxyororaros; “it is
well known that this kind of double comparison is com-
mon in the poets; but in prose, it is regarded as faulty.”
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 136; cf. W. § 11, 2 b., [also 27 (26);
B. 28 (25)]), less than the least, lower than the lowest:
Eph. iii. 8.*
é\dw, see éAavvw.
"Ededfap, (17 pO whom God helps), 6, indecl., Eleazar,
one of the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 15.*
édedw, adopted for the more com. éeAeéw (q. v.) by LT Tr
WH in Ro. ix. 16 and Jude 23, [also by WH Trmrg. in
22]; (Prov. xxi. 26 cod. Vat.; 4 Macc. ix. 3 var.; Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 18, 2; Polye. ad Philip. 2, 2). Cf. W. 85
(82); B. 57 (50); [Mullach p. 252; WH. App. p. 166;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122].*
eheypés, -od, 6, (€X€yxw), correction, reproof, censure : 2
Tim. iii. 16 L T Tr WH for RG @deyyov. (Sir. xxi. 6;
XXxv. (xxxii.) 17, ete.; for MMDIN chastisement, punish-
ment, 2 K. xix. 3; Ps. exlix. 7; [Is. xxxvii. 3; etc.]. Not
found in prof. writ.)*
ereykts, -ews, 7, (éAeyxo, q. V-), refutation, rebuke;
(Vulg. correptio; Augustine, convictio): €deyEw éryer
idias mapavopuias, he was rebuked for his own transgres-
sion, 2 Pet. ii. 16. (Philostr. vit. Apoll. 2, 22 [p. 74 ed.
Olear.]; Sept., Job xxi. 4; xxiii. 2, for mv complaint;
[Protevangel. Jacob. 16, 1 1d ddwp ris édéyEews Kupior
(Sept. Num. v. 18 1d d8wp rod éAeypod) }.)*
edeyXos, -ov, 6, (€Aeyyo); 1. a proof, that by which
a thing is proved or tested, (rb mpaypa Tov €deyxov dacet,
Dem. 44, 15 [i. e. in Phil. 1, 15]; rijs evuyias, Eur. Here.
fur. 162; évOa8’ 6 €Xeyxos Tod mpdyparos, Epict. diss. 3, 10,
11; al.): réy [or rather, mpaypydrev] ov Breropéver,
that by which invisible things are proved (and we are
convinced of their reality), Heb. xi. 1 (Vulg. argumen-
tum non apparentium [Tdf. rerum arg. non parentum]) ;
[al. take the word here (in accordance with the preced-
ing imdcraais, q. v-) of the inward result of proving viz.
a@ conviction; see Liinem. ad loc.]. 2. conviction (Au-
gustine, convictio) : mpds €eyxov, for convicting one of
his sinfulness, 2 Tim. iii.16 RG. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al. ;
Sept. chiefly for nn2\n.) *
éheyxo ; fut. Aéyo; 1 aor. inf. édéya, impv. Zreyéov ;
[Pass., pres. €déyxouat; 1 aor. édéyx6nv] ; Sept. for main;
1. to convict, refute, confute, generally with a suggestion
of the shame of the person convicted, [* édéyyxeuv hat ei-
gentlich nicht die Bedeutung ‘ tadeln, schmiihen, zurecht-
weisen,’ welche ihm die Lexika zuschreiben, sondern
bedeutet nichts als tiberfithren” (Schmidt ch. iv. § 12)]:
twa, of crime, fault, or error; of sin, 1 Co. xiv. 246
eheyxopevot 7d TOU vduov as mapaBdrat, Jas. ii. 9; bmd
THs ouvvednoews, Jn. viii. 9 R G (Philo, Opp. li. p. 649
[ed. Mang., vi. 203 ed. Richter, frag. wept dvarrdcews kat
éNeEwvos
xpivews] TO ouverdds EXeyxos ddéxacros Kal mévrov drpev-
déoraros); foll. by wepé with gen. of thing, Jn. viii. 46;
xvi. 8, and L T Tr WH in Jude 15, (Arstph. Plut. 574) ;
contextually, by conviction to bring to light, to expose: ri,
In. ili. 20, cf. 21; Eph. v. 11, 13, (Arstph. eccl. 485;
Ta xpuntd, Artem. oneir. 1, 68; émordpevos, os el Kai
Adore 7 emiBovdrr x. pr eXeyxOein, Hdian. 3, 12, 11 [4 ed.
Bekk. ]; al.) ; used of the exposure and confutation of false
teachers of Christianity, Tit.i.9,13; radra €deyxe, utter
these things by way of refutation, Tit. ii. 15. esto
Jind fault with, correct; a. by word; to reprehend se-
verely, chide, admonish, reprove: Jude 22 LT Tr txt.;
1 Tim. v. 20; 2 Tim. iv. 2; rwa mept tuvos, Lk. iii. 19;
contextually, to call to account, show one his fault, de-
mand an explanation: teva, from some one, Mt. xviii. 15.
b. by deed; to chasten, punish, (ace. to the trans. of the
Hebr. msn, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 2, etc.; Sap. xii. 2):
Heb. xii. 5 (fr. Prov. iii. 11); Rev. iii. 19. [On this
word cf. J. C. Hare, The Mission of the Comforter,
note L; Trench § iv. Comp.: é&, dta-kKar-(-pac).]*
éXeervds, -7, -dv, (€Aeos), fr. Hom. down, to be pitied,
miserable: Rev. iii. 17, [where WH have adopted the
Attic form édewds, see their App. p. 145]; compar. 1
Conxyan 19S [CLAW..99 (94).])*
éhe€w, -@; fut. €Aenow; 1 aor. nAenoa; Pass., 1 aor.
nrenOnv ; 1 fut. AenOnoouar; pf. ptep. nAenpevos ; (€Aeos) ;
fr. Hom. down; Sept. most freq. for }3m to be gracious,
also for 0M to have mercy ; several times for San to
spare, and DM) to console; to have mercy on: twa [W.
§ 32, 1b. a.], to succor one afflicted or seeking aid, Mt.
ix. 27; xv. 22; xvii. 155 xviii. 33; xx. 30-sq.; Mk. v. 19
[here, by zeugma (W. § 66, 2 e.), the dca is brought
over with an adverbial force (W. 463 (431 sq.), how];
x. 478q.; Lk. xvi. 24; xvii. 13; xviii. 38 sq.; Phil. ii.
27; Jude 22 Rec.; absol. to succor the afflicted, to bring
help to the wretched, [A. V. to show mercy], Ro. xii. 8;
pass. to experience [A. V. obtain] mercy, Mt. v. 7. Spec.
of God granting even to the unworthy favor, benefits,
opportunities, and particularly salvation by Christ: Ro.
ix. 15,16 R G (see éAedw), 18; xi. 32; pass., Ro. xi. 30 sq. ;
MC onviin 2512 Co: iv. 151 dim: 1.43, 165.1) Reton. 10.%
[Syn. €deéw, oikrelpw: ea. to feel sympathy with the
misery of another, esp. such sympathy as manifests itself in
act, less freq. in word; whereas oikr. denotes the inward
feeling of compassion which abides in the heart. A criminal
begs ZAcos of his judge; but hopeless suffering is often
the object of olxripuds. Schmidt ch. 143. On the other
hand, Fritzsche (Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 315) makes oter.
and its derivatives the stronger terms: éA. the generic word
for the feeling excited by another’s misery ; oixr. the same,
esp. when it calls (or is suited to call) out exclamations
and tears. |
édenpocdvn, -ns, 9, (eAejpov), Sept. for TON and NPT¥
(see dixaootvn, 1 b.); 1. mercy, pity (Callim. in Del.
152; Is. xxxviii. 18; Sir. xvii. 22 (24), etc.), esp. as ex-
hibited in giving alms, charity: Mt. vi. 4; movety éXenuo-
avvnv, to practise the virtue of mercy or beneficence, to
show one’s compassion, [A. V. do alms], (cf. the similar
phrases Sicavoodyqy, ddndevay, etc. roeiv), Mt. vi. 1 Rec.,
203
éX€0s
2, 3, (Sir. vii. 10; Tob. iv. 7; xii. 8, ete.; for Ton ny,
Gen. xlvii. 29); €Xennootvas, acts of beneficence, bene.
factions [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 77 (67)], Acts x. 2; es
twa, Acts xxiv. 17. Hence 2. the benefaction itself,
a donation to the poor, alms, (the Germ. Almosen [and
the Eng. alms] being [alike] a corruption of the Grk.
word) : eAenpwoovny diddvae [(Diog. Laért. 5, 17)], Lk.
x1. 41; xii. 33 ; aireiy, Acts iii. 2; NapBdver, ib. 3; mpos THY
éAenpoo. for (the purpose of asking) alms, Acts iii. 10;
plur., Acts ix. 86; x. 4, 31.*
eXerpov, -ov, merciful: Mt. v. 7; Heb. ii. 17.
Hom. Od. 5, 191 on; Sept.]*
[éAeuvds, see Aceves. |
€deos, -ov, 6, mercy: that of God towards sinners, Tit.
ii. 5; Aeov AawBavew, to receive i. e. experience, Heb.
iv.16; that of men: readiness to help those in trouble,
Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7 (fr. Hos. vi. 6); Mt. xxiii. 23. But
in all these pass. L T Tr WH have adopted the neut.
form 76 €Aeos (q. v-), much more com. in Hellenistic
writ. than the masc. 6 €Aeos, which is the only form in
classic Grk. [Soph. (Lex. s. v.) notes ré &X. in Polyb. 1, 88,
2; and Pape in Diod. Sic. 3, 18 var.]. The Grk. Mss.
of the O. T. also freq. waver between the two forms.
Cf. [WH. App. p. 158]; W. 66 (64); B. 22 (20).*
éXeos, -ovs, ro, (a form more common in Hellenistic
Grk. than the classic 6 eos, q. v.), mercy; kindness or
good will towards the miserable and afflicted, joined with
a desire to relieve them; 1. of men towards men:
Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; xxiii. 23, (in these three pass. acc. to
LT Tr WH); Jas. ii. 13; iii. 17; movety €eos, to exer-
cise the virtue of mercy, show one’s self merciful, Jas.
ii. 13; with the addition of pera rivos (in imitation of the
very com. Hebr. phrase “3 DY ION wy, Gen. xxi. 23;
xxiv. 12; Judg.i. 24, ete.; ef. Thiersch, De Pentateuchi
vers. Alex. p. 147; [W. 33 (32); 376 (353) ]), to show,
afford, mercy to one, Lk. x. 37. 2. of God towards
men; a. univ.: Lk.i. 50; in benedictions: Gal. vi. 16;
1 Tim. i. 2; 2 Tim. i. 2; [(prob.) Tit. i. 4 RL]; 2 Jn.
3; Jude 2. éweyaduve kvptos To €Aeos avrod per’ advtis,
magnified his mercy towards her, i. e. showed distin-
guished mercy to her, (after the Hebr., see Gen. xix. 19),
Lk. i. 58. b. esp. the mercy and clemency of God in
providing and offering to men salvation by Christ: Lk.
i. 54; Ro. xv.9; Eph. ii. 4; [Tit. iii. 5 LT Tr WH; Heb.
iv. 16 LT Tr WH]; 1 Pet. i. 3; omddyyva édéovs (gen.
of quality [cf. W. 611 (568)]), wherein mercy dwells,
—as we should say, the heart of mercy, Lk. i. 78; movetv
Zeos perd tivos (see 1 above), Lk. i. 72; oxevn edeovs,
vessels (fitted for the reception) of mercy, i. e. men
whom God has made fit to obtain salvation through
Christ, Ro. ix. 23; 7@ tuerép@ edeet, by (in consequence
of, moved by) the mercy shown you in your conversion
to Christ, Ro. xi. 31 [ef. W. § 22, 7 (cf. § 61,3 a.); B. 157
(137) ]. 3. the mercy of Christ, whereby at his
return to judgment he will bless true Christians with
eternal life: Jude 21; [2 Tim. i. 16, 18, (on the repeti-
tion of kvpios in 18 cf. Gen. xix. 24; 1S. ili, 215 xv.
22; 2Chr. vii. 2; Gen. i. 27, etc. W. § 22, 2); but Prof.
[From
éXevOepia
Grimm understands x‘pios here as referring to God;
see xiptos, c.a.]. [Cf. Trench § xlvii.; and see éeéo
fin. ] *
eev¥epla, -as, 4, (eAevOepos), liberty, [fr. Pind., Hdt.
down]; in the N.T. a. liberty to do or to omit things
having no relation to salvation, 1 Co. x. 29; from the
yoke of the Mosaic law, Gal. ii. 4; v. 1,13; 1 Pet. ii. 16;
from Jewish errors so blinding the mental vision that it
does not discern the majesty of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 17; free-
dom from the dominion of corrupt desires, so that we do
by the free impulse of the soul what the will of God re-
quires : 6 vdpos tis €hevOepias, i. e. the Christian religion,
which furnishes that rule of right living by which the
liberty just mentioned is attained, Jas. i. 25; ii. 12; free-
dom from the restraints and miseries of earthly frailty:
so in the expression 7 éAevOepia ris ddéns (epexeget.
gen. [W. 531 (494) ]), manifested in the glorious condi-
tion of the future life, Ro. viii. 21. b. fancied liberty,
i. e. license, the liberty to do as one pleases, 2 Pet. ii. 19.
J.C. Erler, Commentatio exeg. de libertatis christianae
notione in N. T. libris obvia, 1830, (an essay I have never
had the good fortune to see).*
édeOepos, -epa, -epov, (EAEYOQ i. q. epxopuat [so Curtius,
p- 497, after Etym. Magn. 329, 43; Suid. col. 1202 a. ed.
Gaisf.; but al. al., cf. Vanidek p. 61]; hence, prop. one
who can go whither he pleases), [fr. Hom. down],
Sept. for *wan, free ; 1. freeborn; in a civil sense,
one who is not a slave: Jn. viii. 33; 1 Co. vii. 22; xii. 13%
Gal. iii. 28; Eph. vi. 8; Col. iii. 11; Rev. vi. 15; xiii. 16;
xix. 18; fem., Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30 sq. (opp. to 4 matdiokn) ;
of one who ceases to be a slave, freed, manumitted : yive-
cba €devbepov, 1 Co. vii. 21. 2. free, exempt, unre-
strained, not bound by an obligation: 1 Co. ix.1; ék
mavrop (see ék, I. 6 fin.), 1 Co. ix. 19; amd twos, free from
i. e. no longer under obligation to, so that one may
now do what was formerly forbidden by the person or
thing to which he was bound, Ro. vii. 3 [ef. W. 196 sq.
(185); B. 157 sq. (138), 269 (231)]; foll. by an inf. [W.
319 (299); B. 260 (224)], edevO€pa eorly. . . yaunOqvac
she is free to be married, has liberty to marry, 1 Co. vii.
39; exempt from paying tribute or tax, Mt. xvii. 26.
3. in an ethical sense: free from the yoke of the
Mosaic law, Gal. iv. 26; 1 Pet. ii.16; from the bondage
of sin, Jn. viii. 36; left to one’s own will and pleasure,
with dat. of respect, r7 Sixatoovvy, so far as relates to
righteousness, us respects righteousness, Ro. vi. 20 (W.
§ 31,1k.; B. § 133, 12).
evdepdw, -@: fut. eAevbepoow; 1 aor. Nrevbepwoa ;
Pass., 1 aor. nhevdep@bnv; 1 fut. —evOepwOnooua; (ed«v-
Gepos); [fr. Aeschyl. down]; to make free, set at liberty:
from the dominion of sin, Jn. viii. 32, 36; twa dad Twos,
one from another’s control [W. 196 sq. (185); B. 157
8q. (138)]: dad rod vdpou r. duaprias Kk. rod Oavdrov (see
vopos, 1), Ro. viii. 2; dé r. duaprias, from the dominion
of sin, Ro. vi. 18, 22; dad r. Sovdelas r. pOopas eis rt.
€Aevdepiay, to liberate from bondage (see Sovdeta) and to
bring (transfer) into etc. (see els, C. 1), Ro. viii. 21;
with a dat. commodi, rj éAevepia, that we might be pos-
204
EAKW
sessors of liberty, Gal. v.1; cf. B. § 133, 12 [and Bp.
Lehtft. ad loc. ].*
Zdevors, -ews, 9, (€pxopat), a coming, advent, (Dion.
Hal. 3,59): Acts vii. 52. (év rf édevoet avrod, i. e. of
Christ, cat émaveia 7 torepa, Act. Thom. 28; plur.
ai éhevoess, of the first and the second coming of Christ
to earth, Iren. 1, 10.) *
Aehdvrivos, -ivn, -wov, (€depas), of ivory: Rev. xviii.
12. [Alcae., Arstph., Polyb., al.]*
"Edtaxeip, (DPN whom God set up), Eliakim, one of
the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 13; Lk. iii. 30.*
[éAvypa, -aros, rd, (EAloow), a roll = Jie xix.39 WH txt;
where al. read piypa,q.v. (Athen., Anth. P., al.)*]
"Edeetep, (1198 my God is help), Eliezer, one of the
ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 29.*
"Edt, (fr. $x and 7n glory, CD) Eliud, one of the
ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 14 sq.*
"Edo dBer [WH ’Edeic., see WH. App. p. 155, and
s. v. et, ¢], (paur>s my God is my oath, i. e. a worshipper
of God), Elisabeth, wife of Zacharias the priest and
mother of John the Baptist: Lk. i. 5 sqq.*
*EXtocaios and (so L T) ‘Edioaios [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.
107; Tr WH ’Enoaios, cf. WH. App. p. 159], -ov, 6,
(yurds my God is salvation), Elisha, a distinguished
O. T. prophet, the disciple, companion, and successor of
Elijah (1 K. xix. 16 sq.; 2 K. i—xiii.): Lk. iv. 27.*
éXicow: fut. Aiéo [Rec%* éd.]; [pres. pass. Alooopat;
fr. Hom. down]; to roll up, fold together: Heb. i. 12
[where T Trmrg. ddAdéeas], and Rev. vi. 14 LT Tr
WH; see eiticow.*
€\xos, -eos (-ovs), [cf. Lat. ulcus, ulcerare; perh. akin
to €Axw (Etym. Magn. 331, 3; 641, 3), yet cf. Curtius
§ 23], 70; 1. a wound, esp. a suppurated wound; so
in Hom. and earlier writ. 2. fr. [Thuc.], Theophr.,
Polyb. on, a sore, an ulcer: Rev. xvi. 2; plur., Lk. xvi.
21; Rev. xvi.11. (for pnw, Ex. ix. 9; Job ii. 7, ete.) *
to make sore, cause to ulcerate (Hippocr.
and Med. writ.); Pass. to be ulcerated; pf. ptep. pass.
pAxapevos (LT Tr WH eidxop. [ WH. App. p. 161; W.
§ 12, 8; B. 34 (80)]), full of sores: Lk. xvi. 20, (Xen.
deme. equ 1742152) =
éAxtw, see €Ako.
&\xw (and in later writ. Axdw also [Veitch s. v.; W.
86 (82)]); impf. efAxov (Acts xxi. 30); fut. Axvow [erk.
Rec.¢# Jn. xii. 32]; 1 aor. etAxvoa ([inf. (Jn. xxi. 6)
Acvoat Reezelz L, T WH, -xdoa R*G Tr]; cf. Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. § 114, vol. ii. p. 171; Kriiger § 40 s. v.; [Lod.
Paralip. p. 35 sq.; Veitch s. v.]); fr. Hom. down; Sept.
for JW; to draw; 1. prop.: ro dixrvov, Jn. xxi. 6,
11; pdyatpay, i. e. unsheathe, Jn. xviii. 10 (Soph. Ant.
1208 (1233), ete.) ; twvd, a person forcibly and against
his will (our drag, drag off), €£w tod iepod, Acts xxi. 30;
els rhv ayopav, Acts xvi. 19; es xpernpta, Jas. ii. 6 (apds
rov djpov, Arstph. eqq. 710; and in Latin, as Caes. b. g.
1, 53 (54, 4) cum trinis catenis vinctus traheretur, Liv.
2, 27 cum a lictoribus jam traheretur). 2. metaph.
to draw by inward power, lead, impel: Jn. vi. 44 (so in
Grk. also; as ém@upias... Akovons émi Hdovds, Plat.
EXkdw, -O:
ip SOR
Phaedr. p. 238 a.; ind ris Adovis €Xkopevot, Ael. h. a. 6,
31; likewise 4 Macc. xiv. 13; xv. 8 Gy). trahit sua
powers voluptas, Vergil, ecl. 2, 65); mavrus EXkto mpos
épavtov, | by my moral, my spiritual, influence will win
over to myself the hearts of all, Jn. xii. 32. Cf. Mey.
on Jn. vi. 44; [Trench § xxi. Comp.: é&€dxo.]*
‘EAiGs, -ddos, 9, Greece i. e. Greece proper, as opp. to
Macedonia, i. q. Ayaia (q. v.) in the time of the Ro-
mans: Acts xx. 2 [cf. Wetstein ad loc.; Mey. on xviii.
12).*
“EXAny, -nvos, 6; 1. a Greek by nationality, whether
a native of the main land or of the Greek islands or
colonies: Acts xviii. 17 Rec.; "EdAnvés te Kal BapBapo.,
Ro. i. 14. 2. in a wider sense the name embraces
all nations not Jews that made the language, cus-
toms, and learning of the Greeks their own; so that
where "EAAnves are opp. to Jews, the primary reference
is to a difference of religion and worship: Jn. vii. 35 (cf.
Meyer ad loc.); Acts xi. 20 GLT Tr [cf. B.D. Am. ed.
p- 967]; Acts xvi. 1,3; [xxi. 28]; 1 Co. i. 22, 23 Rec.;
Gal. ii. 3, (Joseph. antt. 20, 11, 2); "Iovdaiol re kai "EAAr-
ves, and the like: Acts xiv.1; xvili.4; xix. 10,17; xx.
Pat eixone LOiwil oo: 10%) 11) Ox 12% I Cori. 24s 825
xii. 13; Gal. iii. 283; Col. iii. 11. The word is used in
the same wide sense by the Grk. church Fathers, cf.
Otto on Tatian p. 2; [Soph. Lex. s. v.]. The “EdAnves
spoken of in Jn. xii. 20 and Acts xvii. 4 are Jewish
proselytes from the Gentiles; see mpoonAvtos, 2. [Cf.
B. D. s. v. Greece etc. (esp. Am. ed.) ]*
“EdAnvexds, -7, -dv, Greek, Grecian: Lk. xxiii. 38 [T
WH Tr txt. om. L Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; Rev. ix. 11.
[From Aeschyl., Hdt. down.]*
‘BAAnvls, -id0s,7; 1. a Greek woman. 2. a Gen-
tile woman; not a Jewess (see "EAAny, 2): Mk. vii. 26;
Acts xvii. 12.*
“EdAAnvcrhs, -0d, 6, (fr. EAAnvite to copy the manners
and worship of the Greeks or to use the Greek language
[W. 94 (89 sq.), cf. 28]), a Hellenist, i. e. one who imi-
tates the manners and customs or the worship of the
Greeks, and uses the Greek tongue; employed in the
N. T. of Jews born in foreign lands and speaking Greek,
[Grecian Jews]: Acts xi. 20 R[WH;; see in”EXAny, 2];
ix. 29; the name adhered to them even after they had
embraced Christianity, Acts vi. 1, where it is opp. to
of “EBpaia, q. v- Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Hellenisten;
Reuss in Herzog v. p. 701 sqq.; [BB.DD. s. v. Hellen-
ist: Farrar, St. Paul, ch. vii.; Wetst. on Acts vi. 1].*
‘EdAnuiott, adv., (EArAnvitw), in Greek, i. e. in the
Greek language: Jn. xix. 20; Acts xxi. 37. [Xen. an.
(46..8i-) al.) *
dAoydw, i. q. EAAoyéew, q. V-
A&doyéw [see év, III. 3], -G; [Pass., 3 pers. sing. pres.
€\Aoyetrat RGitxteT Lr’: impf. é\X\oyaro L mrg. WH;
cf. WH. App. p. 166; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Mullach p.
252; B. 57 sq. (50); W. 85 (82)]; (Adyos a reckoning,
account); to reckon in, set to one’s account, lay to one’s
charge, impute: rodro épot eddAdyer (LT Tr WH €dddya
[see reff. above]), charge this to mv account. Philem.
205
énsris
18; sin the penalty of which is under consideration, Ro.
v. 13, where cf. Fritzsche p. 311. (Inser. ap. Boeckh
i. p. 850 [no. 1732 a.; Bp. Lehtft. adds Edict. Diocl. in
Corp. Inserr. Lat. iii. p. 836; see further his note on
Philem. 18; ef. B. 57 sq. (50)].) *
*Edpoddp, (Lchm. EApaday, T Tr WH ’Edpaddp [on the
breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 107]), 6, Elmodam
or ELlmadam, proper name of one of the ancestors of
Christ: Lk. iii. 28.*
Aritw; impf. #rAmfov; Attic fut. Ams (Mt. xii. 21,
and often in Sept. [(whence in Ro. xv. 12); ef. B. 37
(382); W.§ 13,1¢.]; the com. form éAriow does not.
occur in bibl. Grk.); 1 aor. #Amia; pf. #AmiKca; [pres.
pass. eAmi¢opar]; (Amis, q. v.); Sept. for MV to trust;
MoM to flee for refuge; 5m to wait, to hope; to hope
(in a religious sense, to wait for salvation with joy and
full of confidence) : ti, Ro. viii. 24 sq.; 1 Co. xiii. 7;
(ra) eAmi€opeva, things hoped for, Heb. xi. 1 [but WH
mrg. connect éAz. with the foll. spayp.]; once with dat.
of the os on which the hope rests, hopefully to trust
in: T@ dvdpate avrov (as in prof. auth. once 7H tvyn,
Thue. 3, 97, 2), Mt--xii. 21 GLTTr WH [cf. B. 176
(153) ]; xades, 2 Co. viii. 5. foll. by an inf. relating to
the subject of the verb éAmi¢w [cf. W. 331 (311); B.
259 (223)]: Lk. vi. 34; xxiii. 8; Acts xxvi.7; Ro. xv.
Hi Cosco S Jelvibate (IS) ae Tha biiiy ol IS Oa hay
12; 3Jn.14; foll. by a pf. inf. 2 Co. v. 11; foll. by dre
with a pres. Lk. xxiv. 21; 6re with a fut., Acts xxiv. 26;
2 Co. i. 13; xiii. 6; Philem. 22. Peculiar to bibl. Grk.
is the constr. of this verb with prepositions and a case
of noun or pron. (cf. B. 175 (152) sq. [ef. 337 (290);
W. § 33,d.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. iv. 10]): ets twa, to direct
hope unto one, Jn. v. 45 (pf. nAmixare, in whom you have
put your hope, and rely upon it [W. § 40, 4 a.]); 1
Pet. iii. 5 L TTrWH; with addition of 6re with fut.
2 Co. i. 10 [L txt. Tr WH br. 67, and so detach the foll.
clause]; émi tut, to build hope on one, as on a foundation,
(often in Sept.), Ro. xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10); 1 Tim. iv.
10; vi. 17; & tem, fo repose hope in one, 1 Co. xv. 19;
foll. by inf. Phil. ii. 19; emi with acc. to direct hope
towards something: émi 71, to hope to receive something,
1 Pet. i. 13; émt rov Gedv, of those who hope for some-
thing from God, 1 Pet. iii. 5 Gs 1 Wim. yas, (and
often in Sept.). [Comp.: dz-, mpo-edri¢o. | *
émls [sometimes written €\ris; so WH in Ro. viii.
20; Tdf.in Acts ii. 26; see (in 2 below, and) the reff.
s. v. apeibov], -i8os, 7, (€\r@ to make to hope), Sept. for
nog and nv3an, trust; mM that in which one confides
or to which he flees for refuge; 7 MmpA expectation, hope;
in the classics a vox media, i. e. expectation whether of
good or of ill; 1. rarely in a bad sense, expectation
of evil, fear; as, tev Kax@v édris, Leian. Tyramnic. c.
3; rov PdBov édmis, Thue. 7, 61; Kak1) eAmis, Plat. rep.
1 p. 330 e. [cf. legg. 1 p. 644 c. fin.]; aovnpd éAm. Is.
xxvill. 19 Sept. 2. much more freq. in the classics,
and always in the N. T., in a good sense: expectation of
good, hope; and in the Christian sense, joyful and con-
fident expectation of eternal salvation: Acts xxiii. 63
*Edvpas
xxvi. 7; Ro. v. 4sq.; xii. 12; xv. 13; 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1
Pet. i. 3; iii, 155; dyaby Amis (often in prof. auth., as
Plat. Phaedo67c.; plur. eAmides dyadai, legg. 1 p. 649 b.;
Xen. Ages. 1, 27), 2 Th. ii. 16; éAmls Bdremopérn. hope
whose object is seen, Ro. viii. 24; 6 Oeds rHs €dmidos,
God, the author of hope, Ro. xv. 13; 9 mAnpodopia ths
Amides, fulness i. e. certainty and strength of hope, Heb.
vi. 115 9 duodoyia Tis €A- the confession of those things
which we hope for, [eb. x. 23; rd katynua Ths Am. hope
wherein we glory, Heb. iii. 6; émevoaywyn Kpeitrovos €h-
nidos, the bringing in of a better hope, Heb. vii. 19;
édmis with gen. of the subj., Acts xxviii. 20; 2 Co. i. 7
(6); Phil. i. 20; with gen. of the obj., Acts xxvii. 20;
Ro. v. 23 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Th. v: 83 Tit. iii. 73) with gen.
of the thing on which the hope depends, 7 €Amls trys epya-
cias aitray, Acts xvi. 19; tis KAnoews, Eph. i. 18; iv. 4;
Tov evayyeAiov, Col. i. 23; with gen. of the pers. in whom
hope is reposed, 1 Th. i. 3 [ef. B. 155 (186) ]. ém [or ef’
—so Actsii. 26 LT; Ro. iv. 18 L; viii. 20 (21) T WH; cf.
Scrivener, Introd. ete. p. 565 ; (but see above, init.) | eAwidu,
relying on hope, having hope, in hope, (Eur. Here. fur.
804; Diod. Sic. 13, 21; ém édmid: dyab7, Xen. mem. 2,
1, 18) [W. 394 (368), cf. 425 (396); B. 337 (290)]:
Acts ii. 26 (of a return to life); Ro. iv. 18; with gen.
of the thing hoped for added: (wis aiwviov, Tit. i. 2;
Tov perexewv, 1 Co. ix. 10 [GL TTr WH]; in hope, foll.
by dri, Ro. viii. 20 (21) [but Tdf. reads ddr]; on ac-
count of the hope, for the hope [B. 165 (144) ], with gen.
of the thing on which the hope rests, Acts xxvi. 6. rap’
eArida, beyond, against, hope [W. 404 (377) ]: Ro. iv. 18
(i. e. where the laws of nature left no room for hope).
éxeuv edmida (often in Grk. writ.): Ro. xv. 4; 2 Co.
lii. 12; with an inf. belonging to the person hoping, 2
Co. x. 153; édmida €xew eis {Tdf. mpos] Gedy, foll. by ace.
with inf. Acts xxiv. 15, (els Xpuordv éyew tas éAmidas,
Acta Thomae § 28; [r. eAmida eis 7. “Incody ev r. mvev-
part €xovres, Barn. ep. 11, 11]) 3 émi with dat. of pers. 1
Jn. iii. 3; Amida pr éxovres, (of the heathen) having no
hope (of salvation), Eph. ii. 12; 1 Th. iv. 13; 9 édmis
€atw eis Gedy, directed unto God, 1 Pet. i. 21. By meton.
it denotes a. the author of hope, or he who is its foun-
dation, (often so in Grk. auth., as Aeschyl. choéph.
776; Thue. 3, 57; [ef. Ignat. ad Eph. 21, 2; ad Magn.
11 fin.; ad Philad. 11, 2; ad Trall. inser. and 2, 2, ete.]):
1 Tim. i. 1; 1 Th. ii. 19; with gen. of obj. added, rijs
d6éns, Col. i. 27. b. the thing hoped for: mpoode-
xeoOat THY paxapiay €Arida, Tit. ii. 13; Amida Sixacoovwns
drexdexeoOau, the thing hoped for, which is righteous-
ness [cf. Mey. ed. Sieffert ad 1.], Gal. v. 5, (apoo Soka
Tas t76 Beod édmidas, 2 Mace. vii. 14); did €Amida thy drro-
Kempevny ev Tois ovpavois, Col. i. 5; xparioat ths mpoKerpe-
mms €dmidos, Heb. vi. 18 (ef. Bleek ad loc.). — Zéckler,
De vi ac notione vocis emis in N. T. Gissae 1856.*
*Edipas, 6, [B. 20 (18)], Elymas, an appellative name
which Luke interprets as pdyos, — derived either, as is
commonly supposed, fr. the Arabic Nees (elymon),
co
1, e. wise; or, acc. to the more prebe“'e opinion of De-
206
euBateva
litzsch (Zeitschrift f. d. Luth. Theol. 1877, p. 7), fr. the
Aramaic 82°98 powerful: Acts xiii. 8. [BB.DD.s. v.]*
&wi (LT ‘Edo, [WH édai; see I, ¢]), Eloi, Syriac
form (aout, THT) for Hebr. 98 (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2):
Mk. xv. 34. [Cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 11.]*
epavrot, As, -ov, (fr. guod and avrod), reflexive pro-
noun of Ist pers., of myself, used only in gen., dat., and
ace. sing. [cf. B. 110 (96) sqq.]: am’ euavrod, see amd, II.
2d.aa.; tn’ évavrdv, under my control, Mt. viii. 9; Lk.
vii. 8; éuaurdv, myself, as opp. to Christ, the supposed
minister of sin (vs. 17), Gal. ii. 18; tacitly opp. to an
animal offered in sacrifice, Jn. xvii. 19; negligently for
avrds éué, 1 Co. iv. 3 [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]. As in Grk.
writers (Matthiae § 148 Anm. 2, i. p. 354; Passow s. v.
p- 883), its force is sometimes so weakened that 3t
scarcely differs from the simple pers. pron. of the first
person [yet denied by Meyer], as Jn. xii. 32; xiv. 21;
Philem. 13.
eu-Baivw [see ev, III. 3]; 2 aor. eveBnv, inf. euBiva..
ptep. éuBas; [fr. Hom. down]; to go into, step into: Jn.
v.4 RL; eis 7rd mAoiov, to embark, Mt. viii. 23, and
often.
eu-BadrAw [see ev, III. 3]: 2 aor. inf. euBareiv; to throw
in, cast into: eis, Lk. xii.5. [¥rom Hom. down. Comp.:
tap-eudrdo. | *
éu-Barre [see ev, III. 3]: 1 aor. ptep. euBawas; to dip
in: ri, Jn. xiii. 26* Lehm., 26° RGLtxt.; ry yxeipa ev
T@ TpvBrio, Mt. xxvi. 23; mid. 6 €uBamropevos per Epox
[Lchm. adds ray yxetpa] eis rd [Wil add éy in br.] tpx
BXiov, Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Xep., al.) *
éuBaredw [see ev, III. 3}; (€u8arns stepping in, going
in); to enter; 1. prop.: méAw, Eur. El. 595; sarpi-
dos, Soph. O. T. 825; eis rd dpos, Joseph. antt. 2, 12,1:
to frequent, haunt, often of gods frequenting favorite
spots, as yyoov, Aeschyl. Pers. 449; r@ xepio, Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 77; often to come into possession of a thing:
thus es vatv, Dem. p. 894, 7 [6 Dind.]; riv yay, Josh.
xix. 51 Sept.; to invade, make a hostile incursion into, eis
with acc. of place, 1 Mace. xii. 25, ete. 2. tropically,
(cf. Germ. eingehen); a. to go into details in narrating:
absol. 2 Mace. ii. 30. _b. to investigate, search into, scru-
tinize minutely: tats émuatnpats, Philo, plant. Noé § 19;
& pn éwpaxe éuBatevor, things which he has not seen, i. e.
things denied to the sight (ef. 1 Jn. iv. 20), Col. ii. 18, —
where, if with GL [in ed. min., but in ed. maj. rein-
serted, yet in br.] T Tr WH Huther, Meyer, we expunge
pn, we must render, “going into curious and subtile
speculation about things which he has seen in visions
granted him”; but cf. Baumg.-Crusius ad loc. and W-
§ 55, 3 e.; [also Reiche (Com. crit.), Bleek, Hofm., al.,
defend the pj. But see Tdf. and WH. ad loc., and Bp.
Lghtft.’s ‘detached note’; cf. B. 349 (300). Some in-
terpret “(conceitedly) taking his stand on the things
which” etc.; see under 1]; Phavor. éuSaredoat- émBAvat
ra evdov eepevvnjoat i) oxompoat; [similarly Hesych. 2293
vol. ii. p. 73 ed. Schmidt, ef. his note; further see reff.
in Suidas, col. 1213 d.].*
euBuBalw
ep-BiBato: 1 aor. eveB8i8aca; to put in or on, lead in,
cause to enter; as often in the Greek writ. twa eis 16d
mAotov: Acts xxvii. 6.*
ép-Brerrw [see ev, III. 3]; impf. évéBrerov; 1 aor. évé-
Prewa, ptcp. euBrewas; to turn one’s eyes on; look at;
1. prop.: with ace. Mk. viii. 25, (Anth. 11, 3; Sept.
Judg. xvi. 27 [Alex.]); rwi (Plat. rep. 10, 608 d.; Polyb.
15, 28, 3, and elsewhere), Mt. xix. 26; Mk. x. 21, 27;
xiv. 67; Lk. xx. 17; xxii. 61; Jn. i. 36, 42 (48), (in all
these pass. euSdéeWas adr@ or adrois héyer or etev, cf. Xen.
Cyr. 1, 3, 2 €uBderwy aire édeyev). eis T. odpavdr, Acts i.
11 RGL, (és r. ynv, Is. v. 303; vill. 22; eis bpOarpdv,
Plat. Alc. 1 p. 182 e.). Absol., od« €vé8Xerov I beheld
not, i. e. the power of looking upon (se. surrounding
objects) was taken away from me, Acts xxii. 11 [Tr mrg.
WH mrg. ¢@der.], (2 Chr. xx. 24 [Ald.]; Xen. mem. 3,
AIGMLOY: 2. fig. to look at with the mind, to consider:
Mt. vi. 26, (Is. li. 1 sq.; Sir. ii. 10; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 15;
with ace. only, Is. v.12; with dat., 2 Mace. xii. 45).*
éu-Bpipdopon [see ev, III. 3], -dua, depon. verb, pres.
ptep. é€uBpipepevos (Jn. xi. 38, where Tdf. euBpimod pe-
vos; See épwtaa, init.); impf. 3 pers. plur. eveBpiydvro
(Mk. xiv. 5, where Tdf. -wodvro, cf. épwrdw u. s.); 1
aor. éveBpiunoduny, and (Mt. ix. 30 LT Tr WH) éve-
Bpiunénv [B. 52 (46)]; (Bpypdopa, fr. Bpiun, to be
moved with anger) ; to snort in (of horses; Germ. darein
schnauben): Aeschyl. sept. 461; to be very angry, to be
moved with indignation: rwi (Liban.), Mk. xiv. 5 (see
above); absol., with addition of év €avr@, In. xi. 38;
with dat. of respect, ib. 33. In a sense unknown to
prof. auth. to charge with earnest admonition, sternly to
charge, threateningly to enjoin: Mt. ix. 30; Mk. i. 43.*
euéw, -6 [(cf. Skr. vam, Lat. vom-ere; Curtius § 452;
Vaniéek p. 886 sq.)]: 1 aor. inf. éuéoa; to vomit, vomit
forth, throw up, fr. Hom. down: twa ex rod ordparos, i. e.
to reject with extreme disgust, Rev. iii. 16.*
éu-patvopat [see ev, III. 3]; revi, to rage against [A. V.
to be exceedingly mad against] one: Acts xxvi. 11; be-
sides only in Joseph. antt. 17, 6, 5.*
"Eppavovfr, 6, Immanuel, (fr. 13 and 5x, God with
us), i. q. savior, a name given to Christ by Matthew, i.
23, after Is. vii. 14. Acc. to the orthodox interpreta-
tion the name denotes the same as OedvOpwros, and has
reference to the personal union of the human nature
and the divine in Christ. [See BB. DD.s. v.]*
*Eppaots (in Joseph. also’Aupaovs), 7, Lmmaus (Lat.
gen. -untis), a village 30 stadia from Jerusalem (acc.
to the true reading [so Dind. and Bekk.] in Joseph. b. j.
7, 6, 6; not, as is com. said, foll. the authority of Luke,
60 stadia), apparently represented by the modern /ulo-
nieh (cf. Ewald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel, 2te Ausg.
vi. p. 675 sq.; [Caspari, Chronolog. and Geograph.
Intr. to the Life of Christ § 191; Sepp, Jerus. u. d. heil.
Land, i. 52]): Lk. xxiv. 13. There was a town of the
same name in the level country of Judea, 175 stadia
from Jerusalem, noted for its hot springs and for the
slaughter of the Syrians routed by Judas Maccabaeus,
1 Mace. iii. 40, 57; afterwards fortified by Bacchides,
207
éutraivar
the Syrian leader, 1 Mace. ix. 50, and from the 3d cent.
on called Nicopolis [B. D.s.v. Emmaus or Nicopolis].
A third place of the same name was situated near Tibe-
rias, and was famous for its medicinal springs. Cf. Keim
iii. p. 555 sq. (Eng. trans. vi. 306 sq.) ; Wolff in Riehm p.
376 sq.; [esp. Hackett in B. D. Am. ed. p. 731].*
eppevo (Td. evxpévo, Acts xiv. 22; see év, III. 3]; 1
aor. evéwewa; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; (Augustine,
immaneo), to remain in, continue; a. prop.ina place: &
mut, Acts xxviii. 30 T Tr WH. b. to persevere in
anything, a state of mind, ete.; to hold fast, be true to,
abide by, keep: rh miorer, Acts xiv. 22 (vdpo, dpkots, etc.
in the Grk. writ.) ; é ri (more rarely so in the classics,
as €y tats orovbais, Thue. 4, 118; €v rH miores, Polyb. 3,
70, 4): ev [so RG only] rots yeypappevors, Gal. iii. 10 fr.
Deut. xxvii. 26; ev r7 SvaOjey, Heb. viii. 9 fr. Jer. xxxviii.
(€:9:6:00)) G5 [Cla NE Saya? Galle
eupéow, 1. q. ev peo@, (see pecos, 2): Rey. i. 13; ii. 1;
iv.6; v. 6; xxii. 2, in Tdf. ed. 7; [see his Proleg. p. xlviii.,
(but nowhere in ed. 8, see the Proleg. p. 76 sq.); cf.
WH. App. p. 150; B. 8].
"Eppop CEppop LT Tr, [but WH ‘Eupop, see their
Intr. § 408] ), 6, (WIpN i. e. ass), Emmor [or Hamor,
acc. to the Hebr.], proper name of a man: Acts vii. 16 ;
see concerning him, Gen. xxxiii. 19; xxxiv. 2 sq.*
euds, -7, -dv, (fr. éuod), possess. pron. of the first pers.,
mine; a. that which I have; what I possess: Jn. iv. 343;
xiii. 835; [xv. 11 7 xapa7 én (see pevo, I. 1b. a.)]; xviii.
36; Ro. x. 1; Philem. 12, and often; 77 éuy yerpi, with
my own hand [B. 117 (102) note], 1 Co. xvi. 21; Gal.
vi. 11; Col. iv. 18; as a predicate, Jn. vii. 16; xiv. 24;
xvi. 15; substantively, 7d éudy that which is mine, mine
own, esp. my money, Mt. xxv. 27; divine truth, in the
knowledge of which I excel, Jn. xvi. 15; univ. in plur.
Ta éua my goods, Mt. xx. 15; Lk. xv. 31. b. proceeding
from me: of époi Ady, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26 [here
Tr mrg. br. Ady.]; 6 Adyos 6 éuos, In. viii. 37; 9 €vTohy
7 épn, Jn. xv. 123 9 éuy Odaxn, Jn. vii. 16, and in other
exx. c¢. pertaining or relating to me; . appointed
for me: 6 Kaipos 6 épos, Jn. vii. 6. B. equiv. to a gen.
of the object: 4 éu) dvdpynots, Lk. xxii. 19; 1 Co. xi.
24; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given by W. § 22, 7; [Kih-
ner § 454, Anm. 11; Kriiger § 47, 7, 8]. y. éoruw épdv
it is mine, equiv. to, it rests with me: Mt. xx. 23; Mk.
x. 40. In connecting the article with this pron. the
N. T. writ. do not deviate fr. Attic usage; cf. B.
§ 124, 6.
éurrarypovy [see ev, IT. 3], -js, 7, (éumaifw), derision,
mockery: 2 Pet. iii. 3G LT Tr WH. Not found else-
where.*
ép-rarypds [see év, III. 3], -0d, 6, (€umaig{w), unknown
to prof. auth., a mocking, scoffing: Heb. xi. 36; Ezek.
xxii. 4; Sir. xxvii. 28; Sap. xii. 25 ; [Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.)
8]; torture inflicted in mockery, 2 Mace. vii. 7 [ete.].*
éu-rattw [see év, III. 3]; impf. évémarfov; fut. eumaigo
(Mk. x. 34 for the more com. -gotpae and -fouatr) ; 1 aor.
évéracéa (for the older éverraica) ; Pass., 1 aor. éverraixOnv
(Mt. ii. 16, for the older éveraicOnv) ; 1 fut. éumaryPjoopar;
EMTALKTNS
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 240 sq.; Kriiger § 40 s. v. maiga ;
[Veitch ibid.]; B. 64 (56) sq.); to play in, rwi, Ps.
ciii. (civ.) 26; Eur. Bacch. 867. to play with, trifle with,
(Lat. illudere) i.e. a. to mock: absol., Mt. xx. 19;
xxvii. 41; Mk. x. 34; xv. 31; Lk. xxiii. 11; roi (Hdt.
4, 134), Mt. xxvii. 29, [31]; Mk. xv. 20; Lk. xiv. 29;
xxil. 63 3 xxiii. 36; in pass. Lk. xviii. 32. b. to delude,
deceive, (Soph. Ant. 799); in pass. Mt. ii. 16, (Jer. x.
15).
éu-raikrys [see ev, III. 3], -ov, 6, (€umaifw), a mocker,
a scoffer: 2 Pet. iii. 3; Jude 18; playing like children,
Is. iii. 4. Not used by prof. auth.*
éu-rept-raréw [T WH er-, see ev, III. 3], -6: fut. éuare-
puratnow ; to go about in, walk in: & riot, among per-
sons, 2 Co. vi. 16 fr. Lev. xxvi. 12. (Jobi. 7; Sap. xix.
20; [Philo, Plut.], Leian., Achill. Tat., al.) *
éu-rtardnpe [not eurep mA. (see ev, ITI. 3); for eupho-
ny’s sake, Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95; Veitch p. 536] and
éumurdd (fr. which form comes the pres. ptep. eumutAar,
Acts xiv. 17 [W. § 14,1f.; B. 66 (58) ]); 1 aor. evérAnoa;
1 aor. pass. éverAnoOnv; pf. pass. ptcp. eumenAnopevos ;
Sept. for x00 and in pass. often for yay to be satiated;
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to fill up, fill full: rwa
twos, to bestow something bountifully on one, Lk. i. 53;
Acts xiv. 17, (Jer. xxxvili. (xxxi.) 14; Ps. evi. (evii.) 9;
Is. xxix. 19; Sir. iv. 12); to fill with food, i. e. satisfy,
satiate; pass., Lk. vi. 25; Jn. vi. 12, (Deut. vi. 11; viii.
10; Ruth ii. 14; Neh. ix. 25, etc.) ; to take one’s fill of,
glut one’s desire for: pass. with gen. of pers., one’s inter-
course and companionship, Ro. xv. 24; cf. Kypke ad
loc. ; rod KdAXous atts, gazing at her beauty, Sus. 32.*
éu-mumpa [see ev, IIT. 3], (for the more com. éumimpns,
fr. réympnust to burn ; on the dropping of the wef. eumimd 1,
init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; to burn, set on jire; pres. infin.
pass. eunimpao Gar to be (inflamed, and so) swollen (Hesych.
miympav... pvoav; Etym. Magn. 672, 23 muysmpacar pu-
coat; Joseph. antt. 3, 11, 6; etc.) ; of the human body
to swell up: from the bite of a viper, Acts xxviii. 6
Tdf., for RG etc. wiumpacba, q.v. [and Veitch s. vy.
mip pnpe |.”
éu-mlmre [see ev, III. 3]; fut. eumecoduar; 2 aor. év-
érecov; [fr. Hom. down]; to fall into: cis Bdéuvov, Mt.
xli. 11, and Ltxt. T Tr WH in Lk. vi. 39; eis peap,
Lk. xiv.5 [RG]; to fall among robbers, eis robs Anords,
Lk. x. 36, and in metaph. phrases, 1 Tim. iii. 6 sq.; vi.
9; eis xeipds Twos, into one’s power: tov Oeod, to incur
divine penalties, Heb. x. 31, as in 2 S. xxiv. 14; 1 Chr.
~Odh UES Tibet Tey
ep-trheKxw [see ev, III. 3]: Pass., [pres. éumdéxopar]; 2
aor. ptep. éumakeis; to inweave; trop. in pass., with dat.
of thing, to entangle, involve in: 2 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Pet. ii.
20. (From Aeschyl. down.) *
ép-trokh [see ev, IIT. 3], -Fs, 9, (eumdéxw), an inter-
weaving, braiding, a knot : rpiyov [Lehm. om. ], an elab-
orate gathering of the hair into knots, Vulg. capillatura,
[A. V. plaiting], 1 Pet. iii. 3 (kopis, Strab. 17 p: 828).*
ép-rvéw [Il WH ev-, see ev, II. 3]; 1. to breathe
in or on, [fr. Hom. down]. 2. to inhale, (Aeschyl.,
208
éutrpoo Oev
Plat., al.) ; with partitive gen., dmejs x. pdvov, threat-
ening and slaughter were so to speak the element from
which he drew his breath, Acts ix.1; see Meyer ad loc.,
cf. W. § 30, 9 c.; [B. 167 (146)]; eumveor Cans, Sept.
Josh. x. 40.*
ép-rropevopar [see év, III. 3]: depon. pass. with fut. mid.
éuropevoouar; (fr. Zumopos, q. V-) ; to go a trading, to travel
for business, to traffic, trade, (Thue. et sqq.; Sept.) : Jas.
iv. 13 [R* G here give the 1 aor. subj. -cape6a}; with
the ace. of a thing, to import for sale (as €Xaov eis Atyu-
nrov, Sept. Hos. xii. 1 ; moppupay aro Bowixns, Diog. Laert.
7, 2; yAatxas, Leian. Nigrin. init.) ; to deal in; tousea
thing or a person for gain, [A. V. make merchandise of },
(épav rod caparos, Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 8; ’Acmagia everro-
pevero mAnOn yuvaxav, Athen. 13 p.569 f.): 2 Pet. il. 3;
cf. W. 223 (209); [B. 147 (129)].*
éuropta [see ev, III. 3], -as, 7, (€umopos), trade, mer-
chandise: Mt. xxii. 5. (Hesiod, sqq.; Sept.) *
éumdprov [see ev, III. 3], -ov, 7d, (€umopos), a place
where trade is carried on, esp. a seaport; a mart, emporium;
(Plin. forum nundinarium): otkos éymropiov a market
house (epexeget. gen. [W. § 59, 8 a.; A. V. a house of
merchandise]}), Jn. ii. 16. (From Hdt. down; Sept.) *
€p-tropos [see ev, II. 3], -ov, 6, (adpos) ; Ly. 30
ém adXorplas vews mAéwv pao, 6 emyBdrns; so Hesych.,
with whom agree Phavorinus and the Schol. ad Arstph.
Plut. 521; and so the word is used by Homer. 2.
after Hom. one on a journey, whether by sea or by land,
esp. for traffic; hence 3. a merchant, (opp. to kamndos
a retailer, petty tradesman): Rev. xviii. 3, 11, 15, 23;
a Operos etropos (see avOpwros, 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 45 [WH
txt. om. dp.]. (Sept. for Md and 555.) *
ép-mrpy8w: 1 aor. everpnoa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
\w and Mx; to burn; destroy by fire: rhv wédw, Mt.
9 Ody 15
ép-mpoo ev (Tdf. in Rev. iv. 6 évmp. [see ev, III. 3; cf.
Bttm. 8]), adv. of place and of time, (fr. év and mpda6ev,
prop. in the fore part); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. chiefly
for 1199; before. In the N. T. used only of place;
1. adverbially, in front, before: Rev. iv. 6 (opp. to ém-
obev, as in Palaeph. 29, 2). before: mopeverbat, to pre-
cede, to go before, Lk. xix. 28; mpodpupav éumpocber, ib.
4 [T WH eis’ 16 €ump., cf. Hdt. 4, 61 (8, 89)], like Tpo-
mopever Oat €umpoobev, Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 23 [fig. Plato, Gorg.
p- 497 a. mpdiée eis 7d Eymp.]; Ta Eumporbey the things
which lie before one advancing, the goal set before one,
Phil. iii. 13 (14) (opp. to ra dic). 2. it serves as a
prep., with the gen. [B. 319 (274); W. § 54,6]; a. be-
fore, i. e. in that local region which is in front of a per-
son or a thing: Mt. v. 24; vii. 6; Lk. v.19; xiv. 2; to
prostrate one’s self gumpoobev rév modav tivos, Rev. xix.
10; xxii. 8; yovumerety gump. tevos, Mt. xxvii. 29; aoped-
ecOa eur. tevos, to go before one, Jn. x. 4; dmoaréA-
AevOar Eun. twos, to be sent before one, Jn. iii. 28;
cadnifew eum. riwvos, Mt. vi. 2; rhv d6ddv Karackevdcat,
where éump. twos is nearly equiv. to a dat. [ef. B. 172
(150)], Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2 Rec.; Lk. vii. 27. b. be
Sore, in the presence of, i. q. opposite to, over against
ELTTVO
ore: otjvat, Mt. xxvii. 11; dpodoyeiv and dpveto ba [B.
176 (153) ], Mt. x. 82 sq.; xxvi. 70; Lk. xii. 8, [9 Lehm.];
also Gal. ii. 14; 1 Th.i.3; ii. 19; iii. 9,135; before one,
i.e. at his tribunal: Mt. xxv. 32; xxvii. 11; Lk. xxi.
36; Acts xviii. 17; 2Co.v. 10; 1 Th. ii.19; [1 Jn. iii.
19]. Here belong the expressions eddokia, OéAnud éott
eumpoaber Geod, it is the good pleasure, the will of God, Mt.
xi. 26; xviii. 14; Lk. x. 21, formed after Chald. usage ;
for in 1 S. xii. 22 the words nim FNIN, God wills, Jona-
than the targumist renders * D3) xp ; cf. Fischer, De
vitiis lexx. N. T. ete. p. 329 sq-; [cf. B. 172 (150)]. c.
before i. e. in the sight of one: Mt. v. 16; vi. 1; xvii. 2;
xxill. 13 (14); Mk. ii. 12 T Trmrg. WH; ix. 2; Lk. xix.
27; Jn. xii. 57; Actsx.4 LTTrWH. 4d. before, de-
noting rank: yeyovevat eump. tuvos, to have obtained
greater dignity than another, Jn. i. 15, 30, also 27 R L
br.; (Gen. xlviii. 20 2Onxe tov "Edpaiy eumpoabey rod
Mavagon; (cf. Plat. legg. 1, 631d.; 5,743 e.; 7, 805 d.]).*
ép-rriw [see ev, III. 3]; impf. évérrvov; fut. durrice;
1 aor. évémrvoa; fut. pass. eumrvcdnooua; [fr. Hat.
down]; to spit upon: rwi, Mk. x. 384; xiv. 65; xv. 19;
eis TO Mpocwndy twos, Mt. xxvi. 67 (Num. xii. 14; Plut.
li. p. 189 a. [1. e. reg. et imper. apotheg. Phoc. 17]; xara
TO mpdcar. tur, Deut. xxv. 9); ets twa, Mt. xxvii. 30;
Pass. to be spit upon: Lk. xviii. 32. Muson. ap. Stob.
floril. 19,16. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. x. 17; [Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 66].*
éxdavis [see ev, III. 3], -és, (€udbaivw to show in, ex-
hibit), manifest: yivowat revi, in its literal sense, Acts
x. 40; fig., of God giving proofs of his saving grace and
thus manifesting himself, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. Ixv. 1. [From
Aeschyl. down. | *
épdhavitw [see ev, III. 3]; fut. eu@aviow [B. 37 (32)];
1 aor. évepavica; 1 aor. pass. évepavioOnv; fr. Xen. and
Plato down; (éudavns) ; 1. to manifest, exhibit to
view : €avtdv Tit, prop. to present one’s self to the sight of
another, manifest one’s self to (Ex. xxxiii. 13), Jn. xiv.
22; metaph. of Christ giving evidence by the action of
the Holy Spirit on the souls of the disciples that he is
alive in heaven, Jn. xiv. 21. Pass. to show one’s self,
come to view, appear, be manifest: rwi (of spectres, Sap.
Xvii. 4; adrois Geods eugbaviferOar Aéyovres, Diog. Laért.
prooem. 7; so of God, Joseph. antt. 1, 13,1), Mt. xxvii.
53; 7@ mpotame Tod Geod, of Christ appearing before God
in heaven, Heb. ix. 24; (of God imparting to souls the
knowledge of himself, Sap. i. 2; Theoph. Ant. ad Autol.
1,2, 4). 2. to indicate, disclose, declare, make known :
foll. by ért, Heb. xi. 14; with dat. of pers. Acts xxiii. 15;
Ti mpods twa, ib. 22; ri kara twos, to report or declare
a thing against a person, to inform against one, Acts
xxiv. 1; xxv. 2; mepi twos, about one, Acts xxv. 15.
[Sywn. see dAdo. | *
%u-hoBos [see év, III. 3], -ov, (PoBos), thrown into fear,
terrified, affrighted: Lk. xxiv. 5, [87]; Acts x.4; (xxil.
9 Rec.) ; xxiv. 25; Rev. xi. 13. Theophr. char. 25 (24),
1; [1 Mace. xiii. 2; in a good sense, Sir. xix. 24 (21)].
(Actively, inspiring fear, terrible, Soph. O. C. 39.) *
ep-prota, -o [see év, III. 3]: 1 aor. évepdonaa; to blow
209 ep
or breathe on: twa, Jn. xx. 22, where Jesus, after the
manner of the Hebrew prophets, expresses by the sym-
bolic act of breathing upon the apostles the communi-
cation of the Holy Spirit to them, — having in view the
primary meaning of the words 137 and mvedua [ef. e. g.
Ezek. xxxvii. 5]. (Sept.; Diose., Aret., Geop., al.; [vo
inflate, Aristot., al.].) *
€p-uros [see év, IIT. 3], -ov, (€udda to implant), in
prof. auth. [fr. Hdt. down] inborn, implanted by nature ;
cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdb. on Sap. [xii. 10] p. 224; am-
planted by others’ instruction: thus Jas. i. 21 rov gudburov
Acyov, the doctrine implanted by your teachers [al. by
God; cf. Briickner in De Wette, or Huther ad loc.],
dé£acde ev rpavrnrt, receive like mellow soil, as it were.*
év, a preposition taking the dative after it; Hebr. 3;
Lat. in with abl.; Eng. in, on, at, with, by, among. [W.
§ 48 a.; B. 328 (282) sq.] It is used
I. LocaLy; 1. of Place proper; a. in the in-
terior of some whole; within the limits of some space:
ev yaorpi, Mt. i. 18; é€v BnOdeeu, Mt. iit. 1; ev rH monet,
Lk. vii. 37; év rh “Iovdaia, év th epnue, év TO TAOlw, ev TO
ovpav@, and innumerable other exx. b. in (on) the
surface of a place, (Germ. auf): év r@ dpe, Jn. iv. 20
sq.; Heb. viii. 5; ev maki, 2 Co. iii. 3; év ri dyopa, Mt.
xx. 3; év 77 666, Mt. v. 25, ete. c. of proximity, at,
near, by: év rais yoviats trav mratedy, Mt. vi. 5; ev ro
Soap, at the fountain Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4; év 76 yalo-
gvdakio, Jn. viii. 20 [see B.D. Am.ed. s. v. Treasury ;
and on this pass. and the preceding ef. W. 385 (360) ];
kabicew ev TH Se&a Oeod etc., at the right hand: Heb. i.
8; viii. 1; Eph. i. 20. d. of the contents of a writ-
ing, book, ete.: év tH émuotodp, 1 Co. v. 9; év Kepadids
BiBriov ypapew, Heb. x. 7; €v 77 BiBAw, TO BiBNia, Rev.
xiii. 8; Gal. iii. 10; év 76 vouw, Lk. xxiv. 44; Jn. i. 45
(46); év rois mpopyras, in the book of the prophets,
Acts xiii. 40; év “HAia, in that portion of Scripture
which treats of Elijah, Ro. xi. 2, ef. Fritzsche ad loc. ;
[ Delitzsch, Brief a.d. Romer, p. 12; W. 385 (360) ; B. 331
(285)]; év Aavid, in the Psalms of David, Heb. iv. 7 [see
AaBisd, fin.]; év 76 ‘Qoné, in the prophecies of Hosea,
Ro. ix. 25. e. trop. applied to things not perceived
by the senses, as ev rh xapdia, €v tats kapdias, Mt. v. 28;
xiii. 19; 2 Co. iv. 6, and often; év rais cvverdnoect, 2 Co.
Ven idle 2. with dat. of a Person, in the person,
nature, soul, thought of any one: thus év 76 Oe@ xéxpumrat
Cor) bya, it lies hidden as it were in the bosom of
God until it shall come forth to view, Col. iii. 3, cf. Eph.
iii. 9; év abré, i. e. in the person of Christ, katocxel may
rd mAnpwpa etc., Col. i. 19; ii. 3 [(?), 9]. phrases in
which 4 dpapria is said to dwell in men, Ro. vii. 17 sq.;
or 6 Xpiorés (the mind, power, life of Christ) evar, [Jn.
xvii. 26]; Ro. viii. 10; 2 Co. xiii. 5; pévew, In. vi. 56;
[xv.4,5]; pv, Gal. ii. 20; poppodoOa, Gal. iv. 19; Aadeiv.
2 Co. xiii. 3; 6 Aoyos TOU Oeod eivat, 1 Jn. i. 103 pévery,
Jn. v. 38; évorxeiy Or oikeiv 6 NOyos TOD Xpucrod, Col. iii.
16; 7d mvedpa (of God, of Christ), Ro. viii. 9, 11; 1 Co.
iii. 16; 2 Tim. i. 14; ro & tux xapeopa, 1 Tim. iv. 14;
2 Tim. i. 6; évepyeiv &v run, Mt. xiv. 2; Eph. ii. 2; 1Co.
év 210 a
xii. 6, ete.; évepycicbat, Col. i. 29; karepydteoOat, Ro.
vii. 8. after verbs of revealing, manifesting: dmo-
cadviat év éuoi, in my soul, Gal. i. 16; pavepoy €otw é€v
adrois, Ro. i. 19. ev gaurd, év éavrois, within one’s self
i.e. in the soul, spirit, heart: after the verbs «id€vat,
Jn. vi. 61; eimeiv, Lk. vii. 39; xviiic 4; euBpipacda, Jn.
xi. 88; orevatew, Ro. viii. 23; 8radoyi¢erOa, Mk. ii. 8
(alternating there with ¢v rats xapdias, cf. vs. 6); Lk.
xii. 17; d.amopeiv, Acts x. 17; déyew, Mt. iii. 9; ix. 21;
‘Lk. vii. 49; also 2 Co. i. 9; for other exx. of divers
kinds, see efi, V. 4 e. 3. it answers to the Germ. an
{on; often freely to be rendered in the case of, with, ete.
W. § 48, a. 3 a.], when used a. of the person or
thing on whom or on which some power is oper-
ative: Wa ovrw yevnrat év euol, 1 Co. ix. 15; movety tu €v
tim, Mt. xvii. 12; Lk. xxiii. 31; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1341 ;
{W.u.s. and 218 (204 sq.); B. 149 (130)]. _b. of that
in which something is manifest [W.u.s.]: pavOdvew
&v rum, 1 Co. iv. 6; ywookew, Lk. xxiv. 35; Jn. xiii. 35;
1 Jn. iii. 19 (exx. fr. the classics are given by Passow
i. 2 p. 908°; [cf. L. andS.s. v. A. III.]); likewise of that
in which a thing is sought: ¢nreiv év rum, 1 Co. iv. 2.
ce. after verbs of stumbling, striking: mpookérrey,
Ro. xiv. 21; wraiew, Jas. ii. 10; ocxavdariverOat, q. v. in
its place. 4. with, among, in the presence of, with dat.
of pers. (also often in the classics; cf. Matthiae ii. p.
1340; W. 885 (360) and 217 sq. (204)): 1 Co. ii. 6; év
6POarpois hudv, Mt. xxi. 42; év euoi, in my judgment,
1 Co. xiv. 11; [perh. add Jude 1 LT Tr WH; but cf.
6 b. below]. To this head some refer ev ipiv, 1 Co. vi.
2, interpreting it in your assembly, cf. Meyer ad loc.;
but see 5 d. y. 5. used of that with which a person
is surrounded, equipped, furnished, assisted,
or acts, [W. § 48,a.1b.]; a. ini. q. among, with col-
lective nouns: év ré dyAo, Mk. v. 30 [W. 414 (386)];
éy tH yeved Tavtn, among the men of this age, Mk. viii.
38; €v ro yéver pou, in my nation i. e. among my country-
men, Gal.i. 14; esp. with dat. plur. of persons, as év
Huiv, ev byiv, among us, among you, évy dAAyAots, among
yourselves, one with another: Mt. ii. 6; xi.11; Mk. ix.
60; Lk.i.1; Jn.i. 14; xiii. 35; Acts ii. 29; 1 Co. iii. 18;
v.1,and often. b. of the garments with (in) which
one is clad: év évSvpace and the like, Mt. vii. 15; Mk.
xii. 88; Lk. xxiv.4; Jn. xx.12; Acts x. 30; Heb. xi.
37; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. iii. 4; nuptecpuevov ev imarious, Mt.
xi. 8 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. ivar.]; Lk. vii. 25; mepy8ddde-
aba ev iparios, Rev. iii. 53 iv. 4 [L WH txt.om. év]. ce.
of that which one either leads or brings with him, or
with which he is fur nished or equipped; esp. after
verbs of coming, (ev of accompaniment), where we
often say with: év déka xiktdow bmavrav, Lk. xiv. 31;
HArGev ev pvpidor, Jude 14; ef. Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 1%
eloepxecOa év aipart, Heb. ix. 25; év T@ vdatt kK. ev TO
aipart, 1 Jn. v. 6 (i. e. with the water of baptism and
the blood of atonement, by means of both which he has
procured the pardon of our sins, of which fact we are
assured by the testimony of the Holy Spirit); év 483e,
1 Co. iv. 21; €v mAnpopare evdoyias, Ro. xv. 29: bOdvew
év rh evayyedla, 2 Co. x. 14; ev mvedpare x. Suvdpet ‘Hnrov,
imbued or furnished with the spirit and power of Elijah,
Lk. 1.17; év rH Baovdela adrov, furnished with the regal
power of the Messiah, possessed of his kingly power,
[B. 330 (284)]: Mt. xvi. 28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [WH txt. L
mrg. Trmrg. es ryv B.J- Akin is its use . of the
instrument or means by or with which anything is
accomplished, owing to the influence of the Hebr. prep.
3 much more common in the sacred writ. than in prof.
auth. (cf. W. § 48, a. 3 d.; B. 181 (157) and 329 (283)
sq.), where we say with, by means of, by (through); a
in phrases in which the primitive force of the prep. is
discernible, as €v mupt kataxaiew, Rev. xvii. 16 (Tom.
WH br. év]; év Gare ddigew or aprvew, Mt. v.13; Mk.
ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 34; év 7@ aipate Aevkdverv, Rev. vii. 143
év aiyare kabapicew, Heb. ix. 22; ev vdare Barrifew, Mt.
iii. 11, etc. (see Bantig, II. b. bb.). 8. with the dat.,
where the simple dat. of the instrument might have beer
used, esp. in the Revelation: év payaipa, év poppaig
dmoxreivew, Rev. vi. 8; xiii. 10; mardooev, Lk. xxii. 49;
andd\dvoba, Mt. xxvi. 52; kxatamareiv év trois moaiv, Mt.
vil. 6; €v Bpaxtou adtod, Lk. i. 51; ev SaxrvAw Geod, Lk.
xi. 20, and in other exx.; of things relating to the soul,
as év dytaope@, 2 Th. ii. 13 [W. 417 (388) ]; 1 Pet. i. 2;
€v th mapakrnoet, 2 Co. vii. 7; €v mpooevyn, Mt. xvii. 21
[T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; etvAoyeitv ev evdAoyia, Eph.
i. 3; Stxacodoba év TO aiwart, Ro. v.9. -y. more rarely
with dat. of pers., meaning aided by one, by the interven-
tion or agency of some one, by (means of) one, [ef. W.
389 (364); B. 329 (283) sq.]: &€v 7@ dpxovre Tév Satpo-~
viev, Mt. ix. 343 év érepoyk@acots, 1 Co. xiv. 21; xpivew
T. olkoupevny ev avdpi, Acts xvii. 31; év tpiv kpivera 6
cdopos (preceded by oi ayo Tov Kocpoy Kpivovaw), 1 Co.
vi. 2; épyatecOa év ti, Sir. xiii. 4; xxx. 13,34. 8.
foll. by an inf. with the article, in that (Germ. dadurch
dass), or like the Lat. gerund [or Eng. participial noun;
ef. B. 264 (227)]: Acts iii. 26; iv. 30; Heb. ii. 8; viii.
13. e. of the state or condition in which anything
is done or any one exists, acts, suffers; out of a great
number of exx. (see also in yivoua, 5 f., and eiul, V.4
b.) it is sufficient to cite: év Bacdvors, Lk. xvi. 233 év
7 Oavar@, 1 Jn. iii. 14; ev Com, Ro. v.10; ev rots decpois,
Philem. 13; €v metpacpois, 1 Pet. i. 6; €v dpordpare
capkos, Ro. viii. 3; €v rokAG dydu, 1 Th. ii. 2; ev d6En,
Phil. iv. 19; 2 Co. iii. 7 sq.; ometperae év POopa krd. it
(sc. that which is sown) is sown in a state of corrup-
tion, sc. dv, 1 Co. xv. 42 sq.3 ev éroium yew, to be pre-
pared, in readiness, 2 Co. x. 6; év éxordoet, Acts xi. 5;
xxii. 17; very often so used of virtues and vices, as és
evoeBeia x. ceuvdrntt, 1 Tim. ii. 2; ev dyraopd, 1 Tim. ii,
15; €v xawornre Cons, Ro. vi. 4; év rH dvoyn Tod Oeod
Ro. iii. 26 (25); év xaxia kal pOdve, Tit. iii. 3; ev Tavoup
yia, 2 Co. iv. 2; also with an adverbial force: as é
duvduet, powerfully, with power [W. § 51,1 e.; B. 33¢
(284)], Mk. ix. 1; Ro.i.4; Col. i. 29; 2 Thi. 115 kpivew
€v Sixatoodvy, Acts xvii. 31; Rev. xix.11; év xap4, in joy,
joyful, Ro. xv. 823 év exreveia, Acts xxvi. 7; ép onovdi,
Ro. xii. 8; év xdpuru, Gal. i. 6; 2 Th. ii.16; ev réyeu. Lk.
2)
€V
xviii. 8; Ro. xvi. 20; Rev.i.1. [Here perh. may be
introduced the noteworthy adv. phrase éy aot rovrors,
with all this, Lk. xvi. 26 Lmrg. T Trmrg. WH for RG
emi m. t. (see emi, B. 2 d.); also év maou, in all things
[R. V. withal], Eph. vi. 16 Ltxt. T Tr WH.] A similar
use occurs in speaking f. of the form in which any-
thing ap pears or is exhibited, where év may be repre-
sented by the Germ. als [Eng. as]; twice so in the
N. T.: coiav dadeiv év pvornpio (as a mystery [here
A. V.in]), 1 Co. ii. 7; ev 7 adre brodetypare rinrew,
Heb. iv. 11 [(A. V. after); al. regard this as a preg-
nant constr., the év marking rest after motion (R. V.mrg.
into); ef. Kurtz or Liinem. ad loc.; B. 329 (283); and
7 below]; (d:ddvar rt ev Swpead, 2 Mace. iv. 30; Polyb. 23,
3,4; 26,7,5; év pepid:, Sir. xxvi. 3; AawBdvew re év
éprn, Polyb. 28,17, 9; exx. fr. Plato are given by Ast,
Lex. Plat. i. p. 702; Lat. in mandatis dare i.e. to be
considered as orders, Caes. b. g. 1,43). [Here perhaps
may be noticed the apparent use of év to denote “the
measure or standard” (W. § 48, a. 3 b.;_ Bnhdy.
p- 211): év pérp@, Eph. iv. 16 (see pérpov, 2); epepev ev
éEnxovra etc. Mk. iv. 8 WH txt. (note the eis, q. v. B. II.
3a.); Kapmopopovow ev tpidkovra ete. ibid. 20 T Tr txt.
WH txt.; but some would take ey here distributively,
cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 8.] g. of the things in (with)
which one is busied: 1 Tim. iv. 15; Col. iv. 2; év ois,
Acts xxvi. 12; ev ai’r@, in preaching the gospel, Eph.
vi. 20; ev rH €opry, in celebrating the feast, Jn. ii. 23
[L Tr br. ev]; & 77 d:day7, in giving instruction, while
teaching, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; see eiui, V.4d.; Passow
Bap.9 L025) [bes ands. Suva lly]: h. of that in which
anything is embodied or summed up: ev aire fat)
nv, i. e. that life of which created beings were made par-
takers was comprehended in him, Jn. i. 4; ev rovro ro
hoy avaxehadacodrat, Ro. xiii. 9, (on Eph. i. 10 see dva-
kepadaidw) ; macav T. ovyyeveray ev Woxais €Bdopunxovra
meévre, comprised in, consisting of, seventy-five souls, Acts
vii. 14 |W. 391 (366) ]. 6. of that in which any per-
son or thing is inherently fixed, implanted, or
with which it isintimately connected; a. of the
whole in which a part inheres: prop., pevew ev 77
durcdo, Jn. xv. 4; €v évi c@pare pédy woddd, Ro. xii. 4;
fic. kpeuacda év tim, Mt. xxii. 40. b. of a person to
whom another is wholly joined and to whose power
and influence he is subject, so that the former may be
likened to the place in which the latter lives and
moves. So used in the writings of Paul and of John
particularly of intimate relationship with God or with
Christ, and for the most part involving contextually the
idea of power and blessing resulting from that union;
thus, efvat or pévery ev ro warpi or év TH Oe, Of Christ,
Jn. x. 38; xiv. 10sq.; of Christians, 1 Jn. iii. 24; iv. 13,
15 sq.; edvat or pévew in Christ, of his disciples and wor-
shippers, Jn. xiv. 20; xv.4sq.; pevew év TO vid kK. ev TO
marpi, 1 Jn. ii. 24; év Oe@, i. e. amplified and strength-
ened in the fellowship of God and the consciousness of
that fellowship, épyd¢ecOaé rt, Jn. iii. 21; mappnordceo Oa,
1 Th. ii. 2. Of frequent use by Paul are the phrases
211 ;
€V
€v Xpiorg, év XpiorS "Inaod, év kupio, (cf. Fritzsche, Com.
on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 sqq.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 ¢.), ingrafted as it were in
Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord:
Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14;
Gal. ii. 4; iii, 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i.3 [Rec. om. év];
ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i. 14; -2 Tim. i. 1, 13; ii. 1; 1 Pet.
iil. 16; v.10; oryxev €v kupie, Phil. iv. 1; tva eipeOd ev
av7@, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most
intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; efvar év Xpiora
"Ino. 1 Co. i. 30; of év Xp. Ino. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v.14;
kowacbar ev XpioT@, Ovnckew €v kvpic, to fall asleep, to
die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in
it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rev. xiv. 13. Since such
union with Christ is the basis on which actions and
virtues rest, the expression is equivalent in meaning
to by virtue of spiritual fellowship or union with Christ;
in this sense it is joined to the following words and
phrases: mémevopat, Ro. xiv. 14 [W. u. s. and 390 note];
merrovdeva, Gal. v.10; Phil. i.14; 2 Th. iii. 4; mappnoiav
éxew, Philem. 8; éAmi¢ev, Phil. ii. 19; xatvynow éxeuv,
Ro. xv. 17; 1 Co. xv. 31; dvnxev, Col. iii. 18; 7d adrd
dpoveiv, Phil. iv. 2; tmaxovew, Eph. vi. 1 [Lom. Tr WH
br. ev k.]; pas, Eph. v. 8; avéet, ii. 21; Cwomoretc bar, 1
Co. xv. 22; 6 Kdmos otk ore kevds, ib. 58; dytos, Phil.
i. 13 yraopeves, 1 Co. i. 2; dadeiv, 2 Co. ii. 17; xii. 19;
adnOevav Aeyerv, Ro. ix. 1; Néyew k. paptuperOa, Eph. iv.
17. Hence it denotes the Christian aim, nature,
quality of any action or virtue; thus, eddperroy év
kupio, Col. iii. 20 GLT Tr WH; rpoodéxecOai twa, Ro.
xvi. 2; Phil. ii. 29; dowaeoOai twa, Ro. xvi. 8, 22; 1 Co.
Xvi. 19; xomav, Ro. xvi. 12 [W. 390 note; Lbr. the el.];
yapnOnva, 1 Co. vii. 39; yatpew, Phil. ili. 1; iv. 4, 10;
napakaneiv, 1 Th.iv.1; mpoicracOai twos, 1 Th. v. 12;—
or is equiv. to in things pertaining to Christ, in the cause
of Christ: vamos, 1 Co. iii. 1; dpovpos, 1 Co. iv. 10;
madaywyol, 15; 600i wov, 17; Ovpas poe avewypevns ev
kupio, in the kingdom of the Lord, 2 Co. ii. 12. dccae-
ovo da €v Xptore, by faith in Christ, Gal. ii.17. Finally,
it serves as a periphrasis for Christian (whether
person or thing): rods ek tav Napkiogov rods ovras €v
kupi@ (opp. to those of the family of Narcissus who were
not Christians), Ro. xvi. 11; dvOpwmos év Xp. a Chris-
tian, 2 Co. xii. 2; ai ékkAnoia ai ev Xp. Gal. i. 22; 1 Th.
ii. 143 of vexpol €v Xp. those of the dead who are Chris-
tians, 1 Th. iv. 16; ékAexrds év x. a Christian of mark,
Ro. xvi. 13; Sd«yos €v Xp. an approved Christian, Ro.
Xvi. 10; dSéopuos év kvp. 2 Christian prisoner (tacitly opp.
to prisoners of another sort [W. 388 (363) ]), Eph. iv.
1; mords didxovos év x. Eph. vi. 21; Col. iv. 7; dcaxovia,
17; &v Xp. yevvay riva, to be the author of one’s Christian
life or life devoted to Christ, 1 Co. iv. 15; decpol év Xp.
bonds occasioned by one’s fellowship with Christ, Phil.
i. 13 [al. connect év Xp. here with gavepovs]; it might
be freely rendered as Christians, as a Christian, in 1 Co.
ix. 1 sq.; Philem. 16. ev mvevpare (dyio) etvat, to be in
the power of, be actuated by, inspired by, the Holy Spirit:
Ro. viii. 9 (here in opp. to é€v capki) ; yiverOa, Rev. i
év
10; iv. 2; év mvevpare beod Aadeiv, 1 Co. xii. 35 &v mveEv-
part or év rv. 7 dyi or ev mv. Beod sc. dy, (being) ini. e.
under the power of the Spirit, moved by the Spirit [cf. B.
330 (283 sq.); W. 390 (364 sq.) ]: Mt. xxii. 43; Mk. xii.
36; Lk. ii. 27; 1 Co. xii. 3; Rev. xvii. 3; xxi. 10. dvépa-
mos év mvevpare dxabdpra, sc. dv, in the power of an un-
clean spirit, possessed by one, Mk. i. 23; ev r@ movnp@
xeirOat, to be held in the power of Satan, 1Jn.v.19. of
év vou, subject to the control of the law, Ro. ili. 19. év
7 Addp droOvycxewv, through connection with Adam, 1
Co. xyv./22. c. of that in which other things are con-
tained and upheld, as their cause and origin: ev
avré (i.e. in God) (@pev xrd. in God is found the cause
why we live, Acts xvii. 28; év atr@ (in Christ, as the
divine hypostatie Adyos) éxtic6n ra mavra, in him resides
the cause why all things were originally created, Col. i. 16
(the cause both instrumental and final as well, for
év airé is immediately afterwards resolved into 60’ avrov
x. els avrov [cf. W. § 50, 6 and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]); ra
mavta ev ate auvéeatnke, Col. i. 17; ev loadk xdnOnoerai
cot oréppa, Ro. ix. 7; Heb. xi. 18, fr. Gen. xxi. 12; dyed-
(ec Oa év with dat. of thing, Heb. x. 10, ef. 1 Co. vi. 11;
€v rot» morevouev, in this lies the reason why we be-
lieve, Jn. xvi. 30, cf. 1 Co. iv. 4; é€v d equiv. to ev rovra,
ért, [in that], since: Ro. viii. 3; Heb. il. 18; vi. 17, [see
8e. below]. Closely related is the use of ev d. of
that which gives opportunity, the occasion: épvyev
év 76 Ady@ TovT@ (on i. e. at this word; cf. W. § 48, a.
8 c.), Acts vii. 29. e. after certain verbs denoting an
affection, because the affection inheres or resides, as
it were, in that to which it relates, [cf. B. 185 (160 sq.) ;
W. 232 (217 sq.) ]; see evdoxéw, evdoxia, edppaivopat, kav-
xdopar, xaip, etc.; likewise sometimes after éeAmi¢w,
motevw, miotts, (which see in their prop. piaces), be-
cause faith and hope are placed in what is believed or
hoped for. 7. after verbs implying motion év w.
the dat. is so used as to seem, according to our laws of
speech, to be employed for ets with the ace.; but it in-
dicates the idea of rest and continuance succeeding the
motion; cf. W. § 50,4; B. 328 (282) sq.: thus after
dmoaté\o, Mt. x. 16; Lk. x. 3; eloépyeoOat, Lk. ix. 46;
Rev. xi. 11 [not RTr; WH br. ev]; e&€pyec@a, Lk. vii.
17; 1 Th.i. 8, (but not after épyeoOa in Lk. xxiii. 42,
on which pass. see 5 c. above); xaraBaivew, Jn. v.4 [RL;
cf. W.§ 50,4 a.]; emorpeyat arerOets ev Ppovncer Stkaiwr,
that they may abide in ete. LK. i. 17; xadetv ev eipnyn, év
dyraop@, ev ua €Amids, equiv. to eis rd elvac Has (duas)
ev ete.: 1 Co. vii. 15; 1 Th. iv. 7; Eph. iv. 4; esp. after
riévat and iordvat, which words see in their places. On
the same use of the prep., common in Homer, somewhat
rare in the classic auth., but recurring freq. in writ. of
a later age, see W.1.c.; Passow i. 2 p.909*; (ict. Loand
Sb bb we Jl Sib 8. Constructions somewhat pecul-
iar: a. ev Alyumrov sc. yf (by an ellipsis com. in Grk.
writ., cf. Passow i. 2 p. 908; [L. and S. s. v. I. 215 0W.
384 (359); [B. 171 (149)]): Heb. xi. 26 [Lchm.]; put
see Alyumros. b. expressions shaped by the Hebr.
idiom : dyopdfew ev with dat. of price (for the price is
21
De év
the means by which a thing is bought [cf. W. § 48, a.
3 e.]), Rev. v. 9, (€v dpyupi, 1 Chr. xxi. 24). aAAdo-
cew Te év Tin (see ddAdoow), to exchange one thing for
another (prop. to change something and have the ex-
change in [ef. W. 388 (363) note; 206 (194)]): Ro. i.
23, 25 [here perndAakay]. dpvupe ev rem (3 yaw), cf.
Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1855; [W. § 32, 1 b.; B.
147 (128)]), to swear by (i. e. the name of some one
being interposed), or as it were relying on, supported
by, some one [cf. W. 389 (364)]: Mt. v. 34-36; xxiii.
16, 18-22; Rev. x. 6. C. dpotoy® & ti after the
Syriac (= woh {not the Hebr., see Fritzsche on Mt.
p- 386; B.176 (153); W. § 32, 3b., yet cf. § 4, a.]),
prop. to confess in one’s case (or when one’s cause is at
stake [cf. W.1.¢.; Fritzsche 1. c.; Weiss, Das Matthius-
evang. p. 278 note! (and in Mey. on Mt. ed. 7)]), the
nature of the confession being evident from the context;
as, to confess one to be my master and lord, or to be my
worshipper: Mt. x. 32; Lk. xii. 8; [cf. Westcott, Canon,
p- 305 note +]. dd. on the very com. phrase éy dvdpari
Twos, See dvoua (esp. 2). [e. the phrase év 6 varies in
meaning acc. to the varying sense of ev. It maybe, a.
local, wherein (i. q. €v trovrm év ): Ro. ii. 1; xiv. 22;
2 Co. xi. 12. B. temporal, while (cf. II. below; W.
SA8%ar2): Mksi519; Lk v9 345 "ne ved ouke max
13 (Ree. €ws, q. v.). y- instrumental, whereby: Ro. xiv.
21. §S. causal, Eng. in that (see Mdtener, Eng. Gram.,
trans. by Grece, iii. 452, — concomitance passing over
into causal dependence, or the substratum of the ac-
tion being regarded as that on which its existence
depends; cf. ‘in those circumstances I did so and so’),
on the ground of this that, because: Ro. viii. 8, etc.; see
in 6c. above. Acc. to the last two uses, the phrase
may be resolved into év rovr@ drt or év rovra 6 (cf. W.
§ 23, 2 b. and b.); on its use see W. 387 (362) note; B.
331 (284 sq.); Bnhdy. p. 211; esp. Fritzsche on Rom.
vol. ii. p. 93 sq. ]
II. With the notion of Time évy marks a. periods
and portions of time in which anything occurs, in, on,
at, during: év Th jpépa, év TH vuxri, Jn. xi. 9 sq., ete. ;
év Tais mpepats éxetvars, Mt. ili. 1, etc. ; év caBBaro, Mt.
xii. 2, and in many other exx.; év r@ Sevrép@, at the sec-
ond time, Acts vii. 13; é€v r@ xabe€ijs, Lk. viii. 1; év T@
petagv, in the meantime [W. 592 sq. (551)], Jn. iv. 31;
[ev €oydrw xpdve, Jude 18 Ree. ]. b. before substan-
tives signifying an event, it is sometimes equiv. to at the
time of this or that event, (Germ. bei); thus év Th jaNvy-
yeveoia, Mt. xix. 28; €v 77 mapovoia aitod or pov, 1 Co.
xv. 23; 1 Th. ii. 19; iii. 13 [W.§ 50,5]; Phil. ii. 12; 1
Jn. ii. 28 ; €v rH dvaorace, Mt. xxii. 28; Mk. xii. 23; Lk.
xiv. 14; xx. 335 év rh éoxdrn odAmcyys, at (the sounding
of) the last trumpet, 1 Co. xv. 52; év ri dmoxadiwee of
Christ, 2 Th. i. 7; 1 Pet. i. 7, 13; iv. 13. c. before in-
finitives with the article [B. 263 (226) sq.; W. § 44, 6];
before the inf. present it signifies while, as: Mt. xiii. 4
(€v t@ oreipenv), 25 (ev r. kabevdew rods avOpamous); Mt.
xxvii. 12; Mk. vi.48; Lk. i. 21 [ef. B. lL ¢.]; xxiv. 51:
évaryKanrifopat
1 Co. xi. 21; Gal. iv. 18, etc.; before the inf. aorist,
when, after that: Lk. ix. 36; xix.15,ete. @. within, in
the course of: ev tprolv nuéepas, Mt. xxvii. 40; Mk. xv.
29 (L T Trom. WH br. ev]; Jn. ii. 19 [Tr WH br. év],
20; cf. W. $48, a. 2; [B. § 133, 26].
III. In Composition. Prefixed to Adjectives é
denotes lying or situated in some place or condition,
possessed of or noted for something; as in éevdduos, évdo-
fos, eudoBos. Prefixed to Verbs it signifies 1. re-
maining, staying, continuing in some place, state, or con-
dition; as, eve, eupéeva, evoikeo. 2. motion into
something, entering into, mingling in; as, ¢€uBaive, eu-
Barevo, éykakém (summon to court), éyypape, éeykpinre.
3. in eudvade, eumpnda, eumtio it answers to Germ. an
(on).
Before B, u, 7, $, p, ev changes to éu-, before y, x, &, x, to
éy-, before A to éa-, although this assimilation is neglected
also in the older codd. [in x “ not often changed,” Scrivener,
Collation ete. p. lvi.; “in some words assimilation is con-
stant acc. to all or at least all primary Mss. while in a com-
paratively small number of cases authority is divided. Speak-
ing generally, assimilation is the rule in compounds of éy, re-
tention of vin those of oty” (Prof. Hort). Following manu-
script authority T WH write evypdpw, évedderos, eveatvia,
eviaiwl(w, eveatokew, eveavxdouat, éveevtpiCw, eveplyw, évme-
pimaréw, evmvéew; T evedrtw; WH eéveorh, vxvos; but L T
Tr WH retain éyxadéw, éyxAnua, éyxouBdoua, eyxparesa,
eykpatevoual, eyxpaths, eyxpiw, eAdAoyéew (-dw), euBatvw, éu-
Bdddw, euBarrw, éuBaretw, éuBrA€rw, éuBpimdomat, eupaivoua,
eumarypovh, eumairyuds, eumai(w, eumalkrns, eumlraAnut, éeu-
mintw, eumrAéKw, euT@AoKh, eumopevouat, eumopia, éumdpiov, eu-
mopos, éumTvw, euparvis, eupavi(w, eupoBos, euputos; LT Tr
éyxvos; L Tr WH éupévw, tumpoodev; L Tr eyypdoo,
eyKdbetos, eykaivia, éyKawilw, eykakéw, eykaTadeinw, eyKat-
oikew, eykavxdoua, eyKkevTpi(w, eyKkoTh, eyKkdrtTw, éyxpive,
eumepimatew, eumvew; T eumimpdw; TWH are not uniform
in éykakéw, eyearadelrw; nor T in éupéevw, umpoodev; nor
WH in éykértw.— Add LT Tr WH GvéynaAntos, mapeu-
BdAdw, tapeuBoah. See Gregory in the Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8,
p. 76 sqq.; Hortin WH. App. p. 149; Bttm.in Stud. u. Krit.
for 1862, p. 179 sq.; esp. Meisterhans p. 46.]
év-aykoA(fopat: 1 aor. ptcp. évayxadutduevos; (mid.
i. q. eis tas ayxddas déxopat, Lk. ii. 28) ; to take into the
arms, embrace: tivd, Mk. ix. 36; x. 16. (Prov. vi. 10;
xxiv. 48 (33); Meleag. in Anth. 7, 476,10; Plut.; Al-
ciphr. epp. 2, 4; al.) *
éy-GAtos, -ov, or évadtos, -a, -ov, [cf. W. § 11, 1], (ars
the sea), that which is in the sea, marine ; plur. ra €vdA\va
marine animals, Jas. iii. 7. (Often in Grk. writ.; the
Epic form eivdAvos as old as Hom.) *
éy-ayri, adv., (€v and dyri, prop. in that part of space
which is opposite), before: as a prep. foll. by a gen. [B.
319 (273)]; évavre rod Oeov, MV D9, before God, i. e.
in the temple, Lk. i. 8 [Tr mrg. évavriov]; in the judg-
ment of God, Acts viii. 21 GL T Tr WH; [evar bapaa,
Acts vii. 10 Tdf.; cf. B. 180 (156)]. (Very often in
Sept., and in the Palestin. Apocr. of the O. T.; but no-
where in prof. auth.) *
évavrtos, -a, -ov, (avrios set against), [fr. Hom. down],
prop. that which is over against; opposite; used ale
218
évdexa
primarily of place; opposite, contrary: of the wind
(Xen. an. 4, 5, 3), Mt. xiv. 24; Mk. vi. 48; Acts xxvii.
4; €& évayrias [W. 591 (550) ; B. 82 (71) ], opposite, over
against (see éx, I. 4), with gen. Mk. xv. 39. 2. me-
taph. opposed as an adversary, hostile, antagonistic in feel-
ing or act: 1 Th. ii. 15 (on which pass. [for confirmatory
reff. to anc. auth.] cf. Grimm on 3 Mace. vii. 4 [on the
other hand, see Liinem. on 1 Thess. ]. ¢.]); 6 é& evartias,
an opponent [A. V. he that ts of the contrary part], Tit. ii.
8; €vavriov rovety ti tux, to do something against one,
Acts xxviii. 17; evavtia mpdtrew mpds 7d dvopd Tivos, Acts
xxvi. 9. Neutr. évavriov, adv., as a prep. is constr. with
the gen. [B. 319 (273) ], before, in the sight of, in the pres-
ence of, one (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. often
for 309 and >3°y3 also for yy): Mk. ii. 12 (T Tr mre.
WH éumpoodev); Lk. xx. 26; Acts vii. 10 (évayriop
@apaw, when he stood before Pharaoh [here Tdf. évav7e,
q. v-]); Acts viii. 32; Hebraistically, in the judgment,
estimation, of one, Lk. xxiv.19; [i. 6 T Tr WH], (Gen.
x. 9, ete.). [16 evavriov i. e. rodvvavrioy see in its place. ]*
év-Gpxopar: 1 aor. evnpEauny; to begin, make a begin-
ning: with dat. of the thing fr. which the beginning is
made, Gal. iii. 3; ri, Phil. i. 6; 2 Co. viii. 6 Lehm. ed.
min. (Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian.; generally with
gen. of the thing begun, as in Sir. xxxvi. 29 (26) ; xxxviil.
16; 1 Mace. ix.54. in Eur. with ace., of beginning sac-
rificial rites; at length, to govern, rule, with gen. Josh.
x. 24 Sept.) [Comp.: mpo-evapxopat. | *
évaros, see évvaros.
év-ypada, see ev, III. 2 and 3.
évSers, -és, (fr. évdém to lack, mid. to be in need of),
needy, destitute: Acts iv. 84. (From [Soph.], Hat.
down ; Sept.) *
év-Serypa, -ros, 7d, (evdeikvupt), token, evidence, proof,
[A. V. manifest token]: 2 Th. i. 5 [ef. B. 153 (134)].
(Plat. Critias p. 110 b.; Dem. 423, 13.) *
év-Seixvupe : to point out, (Lat. indicare; Germ. anzei-
gen), fr. Pind. down; in mid. first in Hom.; in the N. T.
only in Mid. : [pres. évdeixyupar]; 1 aor. évederEaunv; prop.
to show one’s self in something, show something in one’s
self (cf. B. 192 (166) ]; 1. to show, demonstrate, prove,
whether by arguments or by acts: ri, Ro. ix. 22 (joined
with yrwpica); Eph. ii. 7; Tit. ii. 10; iii. 2; Heb. vi.
11; with two acc., the one of the object, the other of
the predicate, Ro. ii. 15; ri & ru, dat. of the pers., Ro.
ix. 17 (fr. Ex. ix. 16 [ef. W. 254 (238)]); 1 Tim. i. 16; ri
eis TO Ovopa Twos, Heb. vi. 10; rhv evdecEw evdeixvvc Oat (as
in Plat. legg. 12 p. 966 b.; cf. W. 225 (211)); ets rea,
2 Co. viii. 24. 2. to manifest, display, put forth: rwi
(dat. of pers.) xaxd, 2 Tim. iv. 14; Gen. ]. 15, 17.*
éy-Setkis, -ews, 77, (evdeixvup), demonstration, proof: i.e.
manifestation, made in act, ris dixacoovens, Ro. iii. 25 sq. ;
ris ayanns, 2 Co. viii. 24; i. q. sign, evidence, [AS We
evident token], dmwAeias, Phil. i. 28. [Plat., al.]*
éy-Sexa, of, ai, rd, eleven: of évdexa, the eleven apostles
of Christ remaining after the death of Judas the traitor,
Mt. xxviii. 16; Mk. xvi. 14; Lk. xxiv. 9, 33; Acts i. 26;
ii. 14. [From Hom. down. | *
e /
évd€KaTOS
év-Sékaros, -drn, -arov, cleventh: Mt. xx. 6,9; Rev. xxi.
20. [From Hom. down. ]*
év-Séxopar; fo receive, approve of, admit, allow, (as rov
Adyov, Ldt. 1, 60). Impersonally, évdéxerar it can be
allowed, is possible, may be, (often thus in Grk. prose fr.
Thue. down): foll. by ace. w. inf. Lk. xiii. 33, cf. xvii. 1.
[Cf. déxouar, fin. ] *
év8npéw, -@; 1 aor. inf. evdnunoar; (€vdnuos one who is
among his own people or in his own land, one who does
not travel abroad; opp. to ékdnwos), prop. to be among
one’s own people, dwell in one’s own country, stay at home
(opp. to ékdyuéo, amodnuéw; see those words); i. q. to
have a fixed abode, be at home, év 7 oopart, of life on
earth, 2 Co. v. 6,9; mpos rv Kipsoy, of life in heaven, ib.
8. (Rare in the classics, as Lys. p. 114, 36.) *
éviSdcKxw (i. g. evdvo [cf. B. 56 (49)]); impf. mid.
évedidvokduny ; to put on, clothe: twa moppipay, Mk. xv.
17 L {Tr WH; mid. to put on one’s self, be clothed in
{w. ace. B. 191 (166); W. § 32,5]: iudriov, Lk. viii. 27
[RGLTr mrg.]; mop ipay, Biooov, Lk. xvi. 19; (2 8.
iy OPE oh eee O04) as) (Coody UDR A iehida ro. 108
Sir. lL. 115, Joseph. b.j. 7, 2).*
évBSukos, -ov, (Sikn), according to right, righteous, just :
Rosi 8 sHeb: 112.61 (Pind, Brac. vitlat.),*
év-Sdpnors (evSoueéw to build in), and éevdapnows T Tr WH
({see WH. App. p. 152] Sapdw to build), -ews, 4, that
which is built in, (Germ. Hinbau): rod reixous, the mate-
rial built into the wall, i. e. of which the wall was com-
posed, Rev. xxi. 18; elsewhere only in Joseph. antt. 15,
9, 6, of a mole built into the sea to form a breakwater,
and so construct a harbor.*
év-Bo0fdfo : 1 aor. pass. evedo&daOnv; to make évdokos, to
glorify, adorn uth glory, (Vulg. glorifico, clarifico) : in
pass. 2 Th. i. 12; evdofacdjvai év rots dyious, that his glory
may be seen in the saints, i. e. in the glory, blessedness,
conferred on them, 2 Th. i. 10. (Ex. xiv. 4; Ezek.
XXvViii. 22, ete.; Sir. xxxvili. 6. Not found in prof. auth.) *
évBokos, -ov, (dd€a), held in good or in great esteem, of
high repute; a. illustrious, honorable, esteemed, (Xen.,
Plat., sqq.) : 1 Co. iv. 10, (thus in Sept. for 73), 1 S. ix.
6; xxii. 14; Is. xxiii. 8, ete.; Sir. xi. 6;_xliv. 1, eke):
b. notable, glorious: 7a évdofa, wonderful deeds, [A. V.
glorious things], Lk. xiii. 17; (for N85), Ex. xxxiv. 10).
c. splendid: of clothing, [A. V. gorgeous], Lk. vii. 25;
figuratively i. q. free from sin, Eph. v. 27.*
eévdupa, -ros, 7d, (evdd@), garment, raiment, (Gell., Lact.
indumentum) : Mt. vi. 25, 28; Lk. xii. 23; spec. a cloak,
an outer garment: Mt. ili. 4; xxii. 11 sq. (&d. ydpou a
wedding garment) ; Mt. xxviii. 3; @8 mpoBdrev, sheep’s
clothing, i. e. the skins of sheep, Mt. vii. 15 [al. take
the phrase figuratively: ‘with a lamb-like exterior ’},
({Strab. 3, 3, 7]; Joseph. b. j. 5, 5, 7; [antt. 3, 7, 25
rlut. Sol. 8; Sept. for wi.) se
év-Suvapdw, -; 1 aor. éveduvduwoa; Pass., [pres. impv.
Z pers. sing. évduvdpov, 2 pers. plur. évSvvayodcbe]; impf. !
3 pers. sing. eveduvapotro; 1 aor. eveduvayadnv; (fr. év-
dvdvapos equiv. to 6 év duvdper dv); (0 make strong, endue
with strength, strengthen: twa, Phil. iv. 12; 1 Tim.i. 12; 2 |
214
evo@pnals
Tim. iv.17; passively, to receive strength, be strengthened,
increase in strength: Acts ix. 22; éy rw, in anything, 2
Tim. ii. 1; év evpie, in union with the Lord, Eph. vi. 10;
with dat. of respect, 77 miores, Ro. iv. 20; ano aabeveias,
to recover strength from weakness or disease, Heb. xi.
34 RG; (in a bad sense, be bold, headstrong, Ps. li. (lii.)
9; [Judg. vi. 34 Alex., Ald., Compl.; 1 Chr. xii. 18
Alex.; Gen. vii. 20 Aq.]; elsewhere only in eccl. writ.).*
év-Sive [2 Tim. iii. 6] and ev-ddo [Mk. xv. 17 RG];
1 aor. évedvoa; 1 aor. mid. evedvoduny; pf. ptep. mid. or
pass. évdedupevos ; Sept. for v7; as in the classics, aE
trans. (prop. to envelop in, to hide in), to put on: twa tt,
a. in a literal sense, to put on, clothe with a garment: Mt.
xxvii. 31; [with rid alone, ib. 23 L WH mrg.]; Mk. xv.
17RG, 20; Lk. xv. 22. Mid. to put on one’s self, be
clothed with : rt {[B.191 (166); cf. W. § 32,5], Mt. vi. 25;
LES xi. 225 [ivili27 4 Wi tr txta| 5 Mic vino; Acis
xii. 21; évdedupévos with ace. of a thing, Mk.i.6; Mt.
xxi. 11 [BS 148" (129) et We. $32,215 Reriat3 sxcv.
6; xix. 14; evduodpevos (opp. to yupvds) clothed with a
body, 2 Co. v. 3, on which pass.see ye, 3 c., (Aristot. de
anima 1, 3 fin. p. 407>, 23 Wuxnv...
b. in metaphorical phrases: of armor fig. so called,
evdvecOa ta Orra [L mrg. épya] rod hords, Ro. xiii. 12;
Ty mavoThiav Tov beod, Tov Owpaxa THs Sixatoovyns, Eph.
vi. 11, 14; @opaxa micrews, 1 Th. v. 8 (with double acc.,
of obj. and pred., @apaxa dixaocvrnv, Sap. v. 19 (18),
(ef. Is. lix. 17]; prop. émAa, Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 18; rév Oo-
paxa,an.1,8,3). tobe furnished withanything, adorned
with a virtue, as if clothed with a garment, évdvec@at
apOapciav, abavaciay, 1 Co. xv. 53 sq.; [omdayxva oiktip-
pov, Col. iii. 12]; dvvauuw, Lk. xxiv. 49, (ioyvy, Is. li. 9;
[lii. 1; dvvapev, evrrpemecav, Ps. xcii. (xcili.) 1; aicyduny,
Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 26; cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 18; 1 Mace. i.
29; dtxatoodynv, Job xxix. 14; Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 9;
cetnpiay, ibid. 16; ete.]; dvecy adxnv, Hom. Il. [9, 231];
19, 36; €vyvoOat and éemévyvycOa adrkny, Il. 20, 381; Od.
9, 214 ete.; many similar exx. in Hebr. and Arabie,
cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. 742; Lat. induere novum in-
genium, Liv. 3, 33); Tdv kawvdv dvOpwroy, i.e. a new pur-
pose and life, Eph. iv. 24; Col. iii. 10; "Incotv Xpuordy,
to become so possessed of the mind of Christ as in
thought, feeling, and action to recemble him and, as it
were, reproduce the life he lived, Ro. xiii. 14; Gal. iii.
27; (simarly the Greeks and Romans said [ef. W. 30],
Tov Tapxivov évdverGat, Dion. t.al. 11, 5, 5; pias tov
otpati@tny evedv tov codrotny, Liban. ep. 9683 prodi-
‘orem et hostem induere, Tac. ann. 16, 28; cf. Fritzsche
on Rom. iii. p. 143 sq-; Wieseler on Gal. p. 317 sqq.;
[Gataker, Advers. misc. 1, 9 p. 223 sqq.]). 2. in-
trans. to creep into, insinuate one’s self into; to enter: év-
dvvovres eis Tas oikias, 2 Tim. iii. 6. [Comp.: én-evdio.]*
€v-bucts, -ews, 7, (€vdvH), a putting on, (Germ. das An-
ziehen, der Anzug): rév ipatiwy, 1 Pet. iii. 3; (clothing,
Job xli. 4; Athen. 12 p. 550¢.; Dio Cass. 78,3; an
entering, Plat. Crat. p. 419 ¢.).*
év-S0w, see evdiva.
év-Sdpyors, see evddunors.
evdveoOar capa).
eveyKo
évéyKa, see épo.
év-eSpa, -as, 7, (fr. év and épa a seat), a lying in wait,
ambush: Acts xxiii. 16 [Rect ro évedpoy, q. v.]; évéSpav
moveiv, Acts xxv. 8. (Sept.; Thuc., sqq-) *
evedpetw; (€védpa); to lie in wait for, to lay wait for,
prepare a trap for: twa, a person, Lk. xi. 54 [G om. éved.
avt., T om. aitdév]; Acts xxiii. 21. (Thue., Xen., sqq.;
Sept.) *
EveBpov, -ov, 7d, i. q. evédpa, a lying in wait, an ambush :
Acts xxiii. 16 Rec. (Sept.; Sap. xiv. 21; Sir. xi. 29; 1
Mace. ix. 40, ete.; not found in prof. auth.) *
év-ehéw, -@: 1 aor. eveiAnoa; to roll in, wind in: twa
Tu, one in anything, Mk. xv. 46. (1S. xxi. 9; [ Aristot.
mund. 4 p. 396, 14; Philo], Plut., Artemid., Philostr.,
al.) *
év-et; (edu); [fr. Hom. down]; to be in: ra évdvra
what is within, i. e. the soul, Lk. xi. 41 (equiv. to 76
écobey tuay, vs. 39); this is to be regarded as an ironi-
cal exhortation (similar to that in Amos iv. 4) adjusted
to the Pharisees’ own views: ‘as respects your soul (ra
evivra acc. absol.), give alms (to the needy), and behold
all things are clean unto you (in your opinion)’; cf.
Bornemann ad loc. Most interpreters think ra évdvra
to be the things that are within the cup and the platter [ obj.
ace. after ddre, with édenu. as pred. ace. ], and to be spoken
of unjustly acquired riches to be expended in charity.
[Still others (following the same construction) take ra
évévra (sc. dovvat) in the sense of the things within your
power, (R. V.mrg. which ye can); ef. Steph. Thesaur.
s. v. col. 1055 a.; but see Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc.] More-
over, in the opinion of many éu, [1 Co. vi. 5 GLT Tr
WH; Jas. i. 17;] Gal. iii. 28; Col. iii. 11 etce., is con-
tracted from éverrt; but see below under éw.*
évexa (only before consonants [ Ree. three times (Grsb.
twice) out of twenty-five]), and évexev [R G 19 times, L
(out of 26) 21 times, Tr 20, WH 18, T 17], or in a form
at first Ionic eivecev (Lk. iv. 18 [Rec. év.; xviii. 29 T
WH,;. Acts xxviii. 20 TWH]; 2 Co. iii. 10 [RG Lmrg.
é.]; vii. 12 [RG], both the last forms alike before con-
sonants and vowels [cf. s. v. N,v; W. §$5,1d.1; B. 10
(9); Kriiger (dialects) § 68, 19,1; WH. App. p.173]),
a prep. foll. by the genitive, on account of, for the sake
of, for: Mt. v. 10 sq.; xvi. 25; xix. 29; Mk. viii. 35; Lk.
vi. 22; Acts xxviii. 20; Ro. viii. 36; 2 Co. iii. 10; evexev
rovrov, for this cause, therefore, Mt. xix. 5; rovrwy, Acts
xxvi. 21; rivos évexev, for what cause, wherefore, Acts
xix. 32; before rod with inf. expressing purpose [ W. 329
(309); B. 266 (228)], 2 Co. vii. 12; of eivexev, because,
Lk. iv. 18; cf. Meyer ad loc.
évevfKovTa, See evvernKorTa.
éveds, see evveds.
évépyera, -as, , (evepyns, q. V-), working, efficiency; in
the N. T. used only of superhuman power, whether of
God or of the devil; of God: Eph. iii. 7; Col. ii. 12;
i) evépyera évepyoupemm, Col. i. 29; with a relative inter-
vening, évepyeiv éevépyevav, Eph. i. 19 sq. ; Kar’ evepyevay
év pérpo évds éxdotou pépovs, ace. to the working which
agrees with the measure of (is commensurate with)
215
evevroryew
every single part, Eph. iv. 16; kara r. évépyecay rod
dvvacGa adrdy «rd. according to the efliciency by which
he is able to subject all things to himself, Phil. iii. 21.
évepy. TOU Satava, 2 Th. ii. 9; mdvns, the power with
which error works, vs. 11. (Sap. vii. 17, ete.; 2 Mace.
ili. 29; 7s mpovotas, 3 Mace. iv. 21; not found in Sept.;
in the classics first in Aristot.; [on evepyeta, evepyetv,
of diabolic influences, cf. Miiller on Barn. ep. 19, 6 ].)
[S¥N. see Svvayis, fin.]*
évepyéw, -@; 1 aor. evnpynoa; pf. évnpynxa (Eph. i. 20
LT WHtxt. Tr mrg.) ; (evepyds [see evepyns |) & aly
intrans. lo be operative, be at work, put forth power: foll.
by ev with dat. of pers., Mt. xiv. 2; Mk. vi. 14; Eph. ii.
2; foll. by the dat. of advantage (dat. com.; [ef. Bp.
Lghtft. on Gal. as below]), to work for one, aid one, ets rt,
unto (the accomplishing of) something [W. 397 (371)]:
eis amooroAny, unto the assumption [or discharge] of the
apostolic office; es ra €Om, i. q. eis atooroAny [cts
§ 66, 2d.; B. § 147, 8] rév eOvaev, Gal. ii. 8. 2. trans.
to effect: ri, 1 Co. xii. 11; [Eph. i. 11]; évepyeiv évép-
yevav, Eph. i. 19 sq.; ri ey run, dat. of pers., 1 Co. xii. 6
[BI24aC09)paGaltini ose Phileit. 13 3. Mid.,
pres. evepyovpar; [impf. éynpyovynv]; (not found in the
O. T. or in prof. auth., and in the N. T. used only by
Paul and James (cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as below]); it
is used only of things (cf. W. § 38, 6 fin.; [B. 193 (167)]),
to display one’s activity, show one’s self operative: [2 Th.
ii. 7 (see pvornprov, 2 fin.)]; foll. by ev with dat. of the
thing, where, Ro. vii. 5; év with dat. of the condition,
2Co.i.6; év with dat. of pers. in whose mind a thing
shows itself active, 2 Co. iv. 12; Eph. iii. 20; Col. i. 29;
1 Th. ii. 13; foll. by 6ca with gen. of thing, Gal. v. 6.
In Jas. v. 16 evepyouyévn does not have the force of an
adj., but gives the reason why the denors of a righteous
man has outward success, viz. as due to the fact that
it exhibits its activity [“ works” ] (inwardly), i. e. is
solemn and earnest. (The act. [and pass.] in Grk. writ.
fr. Aristot. down.) [Onthis word cf. (besides Bp. Lehtft.
on Gal. ii. 8; v. 6) Fritzsche and Vaughan on Ro. vii. 5;
Ellic. on Gal. ii. 8.]*
évépynpa, -ros, 7d, (€vepyew), thing wrought; effect, op-
eration: plur. [R. V. workings], 1 Co. xii. 6; with the ad-
dition of the epexeget. gen. duvapewy, ibid. 10. (Polyb.,
Diod., Antonin., [al. ].) *
évepytis, -és, (1. q. evepyds, equiv. to 6 dv év TO epyo
[Eng. at work]), active: Heb. iv. 12; by a somewhat in-
congruous fig., in 1 Co. xvi. 9 a Oupa evepyns is spoken
of, ‘an opportunity for the working of the gospel’;
évepy- yivopat év reve, in something, Philem. vs. 6. ([Aris-
tot.], Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) *
év-eotas, see evioTnut.
év-evhoyéw, -@: 1 fut. pass. evevAoynOnooua; (the prep.
seems to refer to the pers. on whom the blessing is
conferred ; cf. Germ. einsegnen); to confer benefits on,
to bless: pass. foll. by év with dat. of that in which lies
the ground of the blessing received or expected, Acts
iii. 25 (where the Ree. gives r@ omépy., dat. of the in-
strument; [WH read the simple edAoy.]); Gal. iii. 8,
evexo
where Rec.**#¢# has the simple eiAoy. (Gen. xii. 3;
xviii. 18; xxvi. 4 Alex.; [Ps. lxxi. (Ixxii.) 17 Ald.,
Compl.]; Sir. xliv. 21; not found in prof. auth.) *
év-éxw; impf. evetyov; [pres. pass. évéyouar]; to have
within, to hold in; a. pass. to be held, be entangled,
be held ensnared, with a dat. of the thing in which one
is held captive, — very often in Grk. writ., both lit. (as
tH mayn, Hat. 2, 121, 2) and fig. (as dyyedia, Pind. Pyth.
8, 69; idoripia, Eur. Iph. A. 527; xaxd, Epict. diss. 3,
22, 93): Cvy@ Sovdelas, Gal. v.15; [Odipeow, 2 Th. i. 4
WH ureg.], (aoeBetas, 3 Mace. vi. 10). b. evéxw Twi,
to be enraged with, set one’s self against, hold a grudge
against some one: Mk. vi. 19; Lk. xi. 53, (Gen. xlix. 23) ;
the expression is elliptical, and occurs in full (yéXov rwi
to have anger in one’s self against another) in Hdt. 1, 118;
8, 27; 6,119; see a similar ellipsis under mpocéyw. [In
this last case the ellipsis supplied is rév votv, W. 5938
(552); B. 144 (126); Meyer et al. would supply the
same after évéyew in Mk. and Lk. ll. ce. and render the
phrase to have (an eye) on, watch with hostility; but
De Wette, Bleek, al. agree with Grimm. Many take the
expression in Lk. l.c. outwardly, to press upon (R. V.
txt.); see Steph. Thes. s. v.; L. and 8. s. v.; Hesych.
évexeu pynotkakele Cy KELTat.|*
év0d-8e, adv., (fr. va and the enclitic dé; Kriiger § 9,
8, 1 and 2; [cf. W. 472 (440); B. 71 (62)]), [fr. Hom.
down]; a. here: Lk. xxiv. 41; Acts x.18; xvi. 28; xvii.
6; xxv. 24. b. hither: Jn.iv.15sq.; Acts xxv. 17.*
év0ev, adv., (fr. év and the syllable ev, indicating the
place whence), hence: Mt. xvii. 20 LTTrWH; Lk.
xvi. 26 GLUT TrWH. [From Hom. down.]*
évOupgopat, -odpat; a depon. pass.; 1 aor. ptep. évOv-
pnOeis; fr. Aeschyl. down, with the object now in the
gen. now in the ace.; cf. Matthiae § 349, ii. p. 823;
Kihner § 417 Anm. 9, ii. p. 310; [Jelf § 485]; Kriiger
§ 47,11, 1 and 2; (fr. ev and Oupds); to bring to mind,
revolve in mind, ponder: ri, Mt. i. 20; ix. 4; to think,
to deliberate: mepi twos, about anything, Acts x. 19
Rec. (So also Sap. vi. 16; Plat. rep. 10 p. 595 a.; Isoe.
ep. 9 p. 614, § 9 Bekk.) [Comp.: dc-evOvpéopat. | *
évObpyors, -ews, 7, 4 thinking, consideration: Acts xvii.
29 [A. V. device]; plur. thoughts: Mt. ix. 4; xii. 25;
Heb. iv. 12 [here Lmrg.sing.]. (Rare in the classics;
Hippocr., Eur., Thuc., Leian.) *
évt i. q. évi, the accent being thrown back, same as éy,
used adverbially [W. § 50, 7 N. 2] for éveors, is in, is
among, has place, is present, (Hom. Od. 21, 218; Thue.
2,40): Gal. iii. 28 (three times); Col. iii. 11; Jas. i. 17;
with addition of év dpiv, 1 Co. vi. 5 (where Rec. gorww);
in prof. auth. fr. Soph. and Thue. on very often, it can
be, is possible, ts lawful; [here some would place Jas. l. c.].
The opinion of many fe. g. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 642;
Meyer on Gal. 1. c.; cf. Ellic. ibid.] that é is a con-
tracted form for éveort is opposed by the like use of
mdpa, ava, which can hardly be supposed to be con-
tracted from mdpeort, adverts; cf. Kriiger § 9, 11,4; W.
80 (77); Géotiling, Lehre v. Accent ete. p. 380; [Chan-
dler § 917 sq.; B. 72 (64); Lob. Path. Element. ii. 315].*
216
EVVEVNKOVTAEVVED
taurds, -od, 6, a year: Jn. xi. 49, 51; xviii. 13; Acts
xi. 26; xviii. 11; Jas. v.17; Rev. ix. 15; plur., of the
Jewish years of Jubilee, Gal. iv. 10 [ef. Ellic. ad loc.];
rroveiv éviavrdv, to spend a year, Jas. iv. 13; dak tov em-
avrov, Heb. ix. 7 (like émrdxis tis nuepas, Lk. xvii. 4),
[ef. W. § 30, 8 N. 1; Kriiger § 47, 10, 4]; Kar ev.auToV,
yearly, Heb. ix. 25; x. 1,3, (Thue. 1, 93; Xen. oec. 4, 6;
an. 3, 2, 12); in a wider sense, for some fixed and defi-
nite period of time: Lk. iv. 19 (fr. Is. lxi. 2), on which
pass. see Sexrés. [From Hom. down.]*
[Syn. éviaurdés, ros: originally év. seems to have de-
noted (yet cf. Curtius § 210) a year viewed as a cycle or
period of time, @r. as a division or sectional portion of time. ]
éy-lornpt: pf. évéornxa, ptcp. eveatnxaws (Heb. ix. 9),
and by syncope éveotws; fut. mid. évarncopat; to place
in or among; to put in; in pf., plpf., 2 aor., and in mid.
(prop. as it were to stand in sight, stand near) to be upon,
impend, threaten: 2 Th. ii. 2; fut. mid. 2 Tim. iii. 1.
pf. ptep. close at hand, 1 Co. vii. 26; as often in Grk.
writ. (in the grammarians 6 éveotas sc. xpdvos is the
present tense [cf. Philo de plant. Noé § 27 rpipepns xpdvos,
ds els Tov mapeAndvOdra Kal éveotata Kal péAdovTa Tépye-
obat mehuxev]), present: 6 kaupds 6 evertas, Heb. ix. 9; ra
eveotata opp. to ra péAdovta, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22;
6 évestas aiwy rovnpés in tacit contrast with 7@ péAAovte
aidu, Gal. i. 4, (Basil. ep. 57 ad Melet. [iii. p. 151 ¢. ed.
Benedict. ] dperiwa Siddypara 7 epddia pds te Tov eveorata
aiéva kat Tov pédAovra). [Many (so R. V.) would adopt
the meaning present in 2 Th. ii. 2 and 1 Co. vii. 26 also;
but cf. Mey. on Gal. 1. ¢.] *
év-oxto; 1 aor. evicxvoa; [cf. B. 145 (127)]; 11.
intrans. to grow strong, to receive strength: Acts ix. 19
[here WH Tr mrg. éuoyv6n]; (Aristot., Theophr., Diod.,
Sept.). 2. transe to make strong, to strengthen, (2 S.
xxii. 40; Sir. 1.4; Hippoer. leg. p. 2, 26 6 ypdvos raira
mavra émoxver); to strengthen one in soul, fo inspirit:
Lk. xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass. ].*
évk-, see éyx- and s. v. év, III. 3.
[év-pévw, see eupevo and s. v. ev, III. 3.]
évvaros or évatos (which latter form, supported by the
authority alike of codd. and of inscrr., has been every-
where restored by LT Tr WH; cf. [s.v. N,v»; Taf.
Proleg. p. 80]; Kriiger § 24, 2,12; W.43; [found once
(Rev. xxi. 20) in Rec."]), -dry, -arov, [fr. Hom. down],
ninth: Rev. xxi. 20; the évdrn Spa, spoken of in Mt. xx.
5; xxvii. 45 sq.; Mk. xv. 33 sq.; Lk. xxiii. 44; Acts iii.
1; x. 3, 30, corresponds to our 3 o’clock in the after-
noon; for the sixth hour of the Jews coincides with the
twelfth of the day as divided by our method, and the
first hour of the day with them is the same as the sixth
with us. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Hour.]*
évvéa, of, ai, rd, [fr. Hom. down], nine: Lk. xvii. 17;
see the foll. word.*
évvevnkovra-evvea, more correctly évevyxovra évvéa (i. e.
written separately, and the first word with a single v, as
by LT Tr WH;; cf. [s. v. N,v; Tdf. Proleg. p. 80; WH.
App. p. 148]; W. 43 sq.; Bornemann, Scholia ad Lue.
p: 95), ninety-nine: Mt. xviii. 12sq.; Lk. xv. 4, 7.*
2 ,
€VVEOS
évveds, more correctly éveds (LT Tr WH [ef. the pre-
ceding word ]), -od, 6, (it seems to be identical with dvews
i. q. unused dvavos, dvaos, fr. do, ao to cry out, hence
without sound, mute), dumb, mute, destitute of the power
of speech, (Plat., Aristot.): Is. lvi. 10, ef. Prov. xvii. 28;
évedv un Suvduevoy hadjoat, of an idol, Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.)
40; unable to speak for terror, struck dumb, astounded :
80 eioTnKetcay éveot, stood speechless (Vulg. stabant stupe-
facti), Acts ix.7; Hesych. éu8povrndérres: éveot yevdpevor.
Cf. Alberti, Glossar. in N. T. p. 69. In the same sense
amnvewbn, Dan. iv. 16 Theodot., fr. dreveda.*
év-vebw: impf. évevevov; to nod to, signify or express by
a nod or sign: twi rt, Lk. i. 62. (Arstph. in Babyloniis
frag. 58 [i.e. 22 ed. Brunck, 16 p. 455 Didot]; Leian.
dial. meretr. 12,1; with dp@adyue added, Prov. vi. 13; x.
10.) *
€vvoua, -as, 7, (vous); 1. the act of thinking, consid-
eration, meditation; (Xen., Plat.,al.). 2. _a thought, no-
tion, conception; (Plat. Phaedo p. 73 c., ete.; esp. in phil-
osoph. writ., as Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; Acad. 2,7 and 10;
Kpict. diss. 2, 11, 2 sq., etc.; Plut. plac. philos. 4, 11, 1;
Diog. Laért. 3, 79). 3. mind, understanding, will ;
manner of thinking and feeling ; Germ. Gesinnung, (Eur.
Hel. 1026; Diod. 2, 30 var.; rovatrny évvorav eurosety ret,
Isoc. p. 112d.; rpnoov tiv eunv Bovdijy kai évvotav, Prov.
lii. 21; gudaooew evvoray dyabny, v. 2): so 1 Pet. iv. 1;
plur. with xapdias added (as in Prov. xxiii. 19), Heb.
iv. 12 [A. V. intents of the heart], cf. Sap. ii. 14.*
év-vopos, -ov, (vdpos) ; 1. bound to the law; bound
by the law: Xpwor@, or more correctly Xpuorod LT Tr
WH, 1 Co. ix. 21 [ef. B. § 132, 23]. 2. as in Grk. writ.
fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl. down, lawful, regular: Acts xix. 39
{on which see Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for
1878, p. 295; Wood, Ephesus etc., App. p. 38].*
évvuxos, -ov, (vv&), nightly, nocturnal, (Hom., Pind.,
Trage.). Neut. adverbially, by night: Mk. i. 35, where
LT Tr WH have neut. plur. évvvxa [cf. W. 463 (432) ;
B. § 128, 2].*
éy-oixéw, -@; fut. évorxnow; 1 aor. évaxnoa; Sept. for
aw; to dwell in; in the N. T. with é rum, dat. of pers.
in ‘one, everywhere metaphorically, to dwell in one and
influence him (for good) : v rem, in a person’s soul, of the
Holy Spirit, Ro. viii.11; 2 Tim. i. 14; of wioris, 2 Tim.
i. 5; [of sin, Ro. vii. 17 T WH (for simple olkeiv)]; &v
ipiv, in your assembly, of Christian truth, Col. iii. 16; ev
abdrois, in a Christian church, of God, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1
Co. iii. 16 ; [al. understand the phrase in Col. and Co.
ll. cc. internally, “in your hearts”; but see Meyer].*
évy-6vTa, Td, See ever.
év-opkitw; to adjure, put under oath, solemnly entreat,
with two acc., one of him who is adjured, one of him by
whom he is adjured [B. 147 (128)]: 1 Th.v.27LT Tr
WH, for RG épxi¢, [on the inf. foll. ef. B. 276 (237) ].
Elsewhere not found except once [twice] in mid. évop-
xiCopat in Boeckh, Inscrr. ii. p. 42, no. 1933 ; [and Joseph.
antt. 8, 15, 4 Dind., also Bekk.]; the subst. évopxiopds
occurs in Synes. [1413 b. Migne]; once also évopkew in
Schol. ad Leian. Catapl. c. 23 évopk@ oe xara Tov marpés ;
217
EvoxXOS
[to which Sop’. Lex. s. v. adds Porph. Adm. 208, 18
EVOPK® oe eis TOY Gedy iva amén Ons }.*
évdrns, -nros, 7, (fr. eis, évds, one), unity (Aristot.,
Plat.) ; i. q. unanimity, agreement : with gen., THs miaTeEws,
Eph. iv. 13; rod mvevpatos, ib. vs. 3.*
év-oxdéw, -@; [pres. pass. ptep. evoxovpevos ]; (6xA€w,
fr. dyhos a crowd, annoyance); in the classics fr. Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat. on; to excite disturbance, to trouble,
annoy, (€v, ina person) ; in Grk. writ. foll. by both rud
and rwi; pass. with dxé twos, Lk. vi. 18 T Tr WH;
absol. of the growth of a poisonous plant, fig. represent-
ing the man who corrupts the faith, piety, character, of
the Christian church: Heb. xii. 15 fr. Deut. xxix. 18
after cod. Alex. which gives évoydq for év yod#, which
agreeably to the Hebr. text is the reading of cod. Vat.
(Gen. xlviii. 1; 18. xix.14, ete.) [Comp.: map-evoydéo.]*
EvoXos, -ov, i. q. 6 évexduevos, one who is held in any-
thing, so that he cannot escape; bound, under obligation,
subject to, liable: with gen. of the thing by which one is
bound, dovdelas, Heb. ii. 15 ; used of one who is held by,
possessed with, love and zeal for anything; thus rap
BiBriewv, Sir. prolog. 9; with dat. rots épwrekois, Plut. ;
[on supposed distinctions in meaning betw. the constr.
w. the gen. and w. the dat. (e. g. ‘the constr. with the dat.
expresses liability, that with the gen. carries the mean-
ing further and implies either the actual or the right-
ful hold” Green) see Schdfer on Demosth. v. p. 323;
cf. W. § 28, 2; B. 170 (148)]. As in Grk. writ., chiefly
in a forensic sense, denoting the connection of a person
either with his crime, or with the penalty or trial, or with
that against whom or which he has offended; so a.
absol. guilty, worthy of punishment: Lev. xx. 9,11, 13, 16,
27; 1 Mace. xiv. 45. —_b. with gen. of the thing by the
violation of which guilt is contracted, guilty of anything:
Tov G@parTos kK. TOD aiparos Tov Kupiov, guilty of a crime
committed against the body and blood of the Lord, 1 Co.
xi. 27 [see Meyer; W. 202 (190 sq.)]; mdvrav, sc. evrah-
pdrov, Jas. ii. 10; of évoxoi cov, Is. liv.17. c. with gen.
of the crime: aioviov duaprnparos [an eternal sin], Mk. iii.
29 LT Tr txt. WH; (ray Bralor, Plat. leoo. 11, 914 e.;
krom7js, Philo de Jos. § 37; iepoovAias, 2 Mace. xiii. 6;
Aristot. oec. 2 [p. 1349*, 19], and in other exx.; but much
oftener in the classics with dat. of the crime; cf. Passow or
[L. and S.]s.v.). dd. with gen. of the penalty : @avdrov,
Mk. xiv. 64; Mt. xxvi. 66; Gen. xxvi. 11; aiwviov kpiceas,
Mk. iii. 29 Rec.; Seopod [al. dat.], Dem. p.1229,11._ e.
with dat. of the tribunal; liable to this or that tribunal i. e.
to punishment to be imposed by this or that tribunal :
Th kploet, T ovvedpio, Mt. v. 21 sq.; evoxos ypady, to be
indicted, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 64; ef. Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr.
ii. 1 p. 340 sq.; [W. 210 (198)]. _ f. by ause unknown
to Grk. writ. it is connected with e?s and the ace. of the
place where the punishment is to be suffered: eis r. yee
vay Tod Tupds, a pregn. constr. [W. 213 (200); 621 (577)]
(but ef. B. 170 (148) [who regards it as a vivid circumlo-
cution for the dat.; cf. Green, Crit. Notes (ad loc.) ‘liable
as far’ in respect of penal consequence ‘as the fiery.G.”])
viz. to go away or be cast into etc. Mt. v. 22."
évTahpa
évar- see éun- and s. v. ev, II. 3 fine print.
évradpa, -ros, 76, (évréAXopar [see evreAhw]), a precept:
plur., Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7; Col. ii. 22. (Is. xxix. 13
diSdoxovres évrddpara dvOphmev ; [Job xxiii. 11,12]. Not
found in prof. auth.; [W. 25].)*
évrapidtw ; 1 aor. inf. évrapudcat; to see to ra evrddua
(fr. év and rddos), i. e. to prepare a body for burial, by
the use of every requisite provision and funereal adorn-
ment, to wit, baths, vestments, flowers, wreaths, per-
fumes, libations, etc.; to lay out a corpse (Lat. pollin-
gere): Mt. xxvi. 12; Jn. xix.40. (Gen.1. 2 sq.; Anthol.
11, 125, 5; Plut. de esu carn. 1, 5, 7 mor. p. 995 c.) *
erapracpss, -ov, 6, (evradidt, q. v-), preparation of a
body for burial: Mk. xiv. 8; Jn. xii. 7. (Schol. ad Eur.
Phoen. 1654; [Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 1009].) *
év-ré\Xw: (reAA@ equiv. to reAdw) ; several times in
the poets (Pind. Olymp. 7, 73) and the later writers
(évréradke, Joseph. antt. 7,14, 5 [but Bekk. évrerdd Oar];
xaos évtéradrai cot, passively, Sir. vii. 31); generally,
and so always in the N. T., depon. mid. évreAAopat; fut.
évreAodpat; 1 aor. éverevAduny; pf. 3 pers. sing. evréradrat
(Acts xiii. 47) ; Sept. very often for ¥; to order, com-
mand to be done, enjoin: mepi twos, Heb. xi. 22; éveret-
Aaro Aéyor, Mt. xv.4 [RT]; rwi, Actsi. 2; [with Aéyor
added, Mt. xvii. 9]; with otrw added, Acts xiii. 47; xaas,
(Mk. xi. 6 RL mrg.]; Jn. xiv. 31 RGT; foll. by inf. Mt.
xix. 7; rwvi, foll. by inf. [B. § 141, 2; 275 (237)], Jn. viii.
5 Ree.; revi, iva [ef. B. 237 (204) ], Mk. xiii. 34 (Joseph.
antt. 7,14, 5; 8,14, 2); revé re, Mt. xxviii. 20; Mk. x. 3;
Jn. xv. 14,173 tivi mepi rwos, gen. of pers., Mt. iv. 6; Lk.
iv. 10, fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 11 sq. Sean évré\reo Oar mpds
twa, to command to be delivered to one, Heb. ix. 20; cf.
evereihato av’T@ mpos adv adrod, Sir. xlv. 3; the phrase
évréhAeo Gat (rivi) SeaOyxnv occurs also in Josh. xxiii. 16 ;
Judg. ii. 20; Jer. xi. 4; Ps. ex. (exi.) 9, but in another
sense, as appears from the full expression dcaOnxnv, Av
Zvereihatro tpiv moveiv, Deut. iv. 13. [Sy¥N. see xedevo,
fin. ] *
évredOev, adv. of place, from this place, hence, (as ékei-
dev thence): Mt. xvii. 20 RG; Lk. iv. 9; xiii. 31; xvi.
26 Rec.; Jn. ii. 16; [vii. 3]; xiv. 31; xviii. 36; évredbey
x. evredbev, on the one side and the other, on each side: Jn.
xix. 18; Rev. xxii. 2 Ree. [ef. Num. xxii. 24; Dan. xii.
5 Theodot.]; metaph. hence, i. e. from that cause or ori-
gin, from this source, i. q. éx rovrov [see éx, II. 8], Jas. iv.
1 [W. 161 (152); B. 400 (342)].*
ev-revits, -ews, 1), (€vrvyxdve, q. v.), a falling in with,
meeting with, (ai trois Anorais evredées, Plat. politic.
p- 298 d.) ; an interview, a coming together, to visit, con-
verse, or for any other cause; that for which an interview
is he:d, a conference or conversation (Polyb., Diod., al.), a
petition, supplication (Diod. 16, 55; Joseph. antt. 15, 3,
8; Plut. Tib. Gracch. 11); used of prayer to God: 1
Tim. iv. 5; plur. [A. V. intercessions], 1 Tim. ii. 1, (Plut.
Num. 14 rovetoOat ras mpds 7d Ociov évrevéers). [SYN. so°
Senors, fin. ] *
evripos, -ov, (rif), held in honor, prized; hence, pre-
hous: AiGos, 1 Pet. ii. 4, 6, (Is. xxviii. 16); honorable,
218
é€vTos
noble, Lk. xiv. 8; rut, dear to one, Lk. vii. 25 Evripov
gxew rid to hold one dear or in honor, to value highly,
Phil. ii. 29. [(Soph., Plat., al.) ]*
évrodh, -As, fy (evTeAAw@ or evréddAopat, q. V.), fr. Pind.
and Hdt. down; Sept. often for 71¥7, in the Pss. the
plur. évrodai also for D'Npa; an order, command, charge,
precept ; 1. univ. a charge, injunction: Lk. xv. 29;
évroAiy AapBavew mapa twos, Jn. x. 183 mpds Tuva, Acts
xvii. 15; AaBeiv évrodas wepi twos, Col. iv. 10; that which
is prescribed to one by reason of his office, évroAjy Exew
foll. by inf., Heb. vii. 5; évroAny diddvae tuvi, Jn. xiv. 31
LTr WH; with ri etry added, of Christ, whom God
commanded what to teach to men, Jn. xii. 49; 7 évroAn
avrod, of God, respecting the same thing, vs. 50. 2.
a commandment, i.e. a prescribed rule in accordance with
which a thing is done; a. univ. évroAn capkixn [-ivn G
LTTr WH], a precept relating to lineage, Heb. vil. 16 ;
of the Mosaic precept concerning the priesthood, Heb.
vii. 18; of a magistrate’s order or edict: évroAny diddvat,
iva, Jn. xi.57. b. ethically; a. used of the command-
ments of the Mosaic law: 7 évrody tov Geov, what God
prescribes in the law of Moses, Mt. xv. 3, (and RG in
vs.6); Mk. vii. 8sq.; esp. of particular precepts of this
law as distinguished from 6 vépos (the law) their body
or sum: Mt. xxii. 36,38; Mk. x. 5; xii. 28 sqq.; Ro. vii.
8-13; xiii. 9; Eph. vi. 2; Heb. ix. 19; xara 7. évtoAny,
according to the precept of the law, Lk. xxiii. 56; plur.,
Mt. [v. 19]; xxii. 40; Mk. x. 19; [Lk. xviii. 20]; rypeiv
tas evtodds, Mt. xix. 17; mopevecOar év r. évtodais, Lk. i.
6; dé vduos Tay é€vtodar, the law containing the precepts,
Eph. ii. 15 (see ddypa, 2). B. of the precepts of Jewish
tradition: évrodai avépamoy, Tit.i.14. sy. univ. of the
commandments of God, esp. as promulgated in the Chris-
tian religion: 1 Jn. iii. 23; iv.21; v. 3; évroAny dddvar,
1 Jn. iii. 23 ; evrodjy Exew, wa, 1 Jn. iv. 21; évrodny AaBeiv
mapa Tov tarps, 2 Jn. 4; typnaots évrod@v Geod, 1 Co. vii.
19; rypetv Tas evtodas adtod, 1 Jn. ii. 3 sq.; ili. 22, 24; v.
2 (here L T Tr WH sodpev], 3; or rod Geod, Rev. xii.
17; xiv. 12; movety rds évrodas adrov, Rey. xxii. 14 RG;
mepurateiy Kata Tas évTodds aitov, 2 Jn. 6; of those
things which God commanded to be done by Christ, Jn.
xv. 10°; of the precepts of Christ relative to the orderly
management of affairs in religious assemblies, 1 Co. xiv.
37 RGLTr WH; of the moral precepts of Christ and
his apostles: évroAny Siddvat, va, Jn. xiii. 34; évroAnp
ypapew, 1 Jn. ii. 7sq.; [2Jn. 5]; ras evrodds typeiv, In.
[xiv. 15]; xv. 10°; dyew ras evr. x. tnpeiv adrds, “habere
in memoria et servare in vita” (Augustine), Jn. xiv. 21;
avrn eotiv y evr. iva, Jn. xv. 12, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 23. 9 évrody,
collectively, of the whole body of the moral precepts of
Christianity: 1 Tim. vi. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 2, (thus
9 évTohi) Tod Oeod, Polye. ad Phil. 5).*
évtémvos, -ov, (rozos), a dweller in a place; a resident or
native of a place: Acts xxi.12. (Sopa. (), Plaw., al.) *
epeds, adv., ([fr. év], opp. to éxras). within, inside: with
gen. evrds tuar, within you, i. e. *n the midst of you, Lk.
Xvii. 21, (évrds a’rdv, Xen. an. 1, 10,3 [but see the
pass.]; €vréc rovroy, Hell. 2, 3, 19; al.) ; others, within
évtpéTra
you (i. e. in your souls), a meaning which the use of the
word permits (évrds pov, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 43 cviii.
(cix.) 22, etc.; [Hippol. ref. haer. 5, 7.8; Petrus Alex.
ep. can. 5]), but not the context; 16 évrés, the inside,
Mt. xxiii. 26.*
ev-rpérw; [Mid., pres. éevrpémopar ; impf. evetpemouny | ;
2 aor. pass. éverpdrny ; 2 fut. mid. [i. e. pass. with mid.
force, B. 52 (45)] évtpamnoopa; prop. to turn about, so
in pass. even in Hom. ; rw, prop. to turn one upon him-
self, i. e. to shame one, 1 Co. iv. 14 (Diog. Laért. 2, 29 ;
Ael. v. h. 3,17; Sept.); pass. to be ashamed: 2 Th. iii.
14; Tit. ii. 8. Mid., rwa, to reverence a person: Mt.
xxi. 87; Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xviii. 2,4; xx.13; Heb. xii. 9;
Ex. x. 3; Sap. ii. 10; Polyb. 9, 36,10; 30, 9, 2; Geods,
Diod. 19, 7; soin Grk. writ., esp. fr. Plut. on; the earlier
Greeks said évrperea@ai twos ; so also Polyb. 9, 31, 6; [cf.
W. § 32,1 b. a3 B. 192 (166)].*
év-tpéhw : [ pres. pass. ptcp. evtpepdpevos]; to nourish
im: twa tim, a person in a thing; metaph. to educate,
form the mind : rots Adyots THs mictews, 1 Tim. iv. 6; rois
véuots, Plat. lege. 7 p. 798 a.; Philo, vict. offer. § 10 sub
fin.; tots iepots ypappact, Phil. leg. ad Gai. § 29 sub fin.*
év-rpop.os, -ov, (rpduos, cf. guoBos), trembling, terrified :
Acts vii. 32 and xvi. 29 éyrp. yevouevos, becoming tremu-
lous, made to tremble; Heb. xii. 21 [Tr mrg. WH mre.
&xtpopos, q. v-]. (Sept.; 1 Mace. xiii. 2; Plut. Fab. 3.) *
év-rpot, -7s, 7, (evTpema, q. V.), shame: mpos évtpomiy
tyiv Aéyo [or Aak@], to arouse your shame, 1 Co. vi. 5;
Veo tom LiS XK RI Vee XKKV ELON IXVELL, (Ixix.)eS, 20)
respect, reverence, Soph., Polyb., Joseph., al.) *
év-tpvpde, -; (see tpupdw and rpudn) ; to live in lux-
ury, live delicately or luxuriously, to revel in: ev tais
anraras [L Tr txt. WH mrg. aydrats, see ayamn, 2] aitav,
(on the meaning see darn), 2 Pet. 1. 13 [cf. W. § 52, 4,
5]. (Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 30; Diod. 19, 71; also to take de-
light in: év ayaOois, Is. lv. 2; with dat. of thing, 4 Mace.
Viti. 7s) Wdian. 3,5, 4 {i2.ed. Bekk.].)*
év-tvyxavo; 2 aor. évérvyov; generally with a dat.
either of pers. or of thing; 1. to light upon a person
or a thing, fall in with, hit upon, a person or a thing; so
often in Attic. 2. to go to or meet a person, esp. for
the purpose of conversation, consultation, or supplication,
(Polyb., Plut., Aelian, al.) : with the addition epi rivos,
gen. of person, for the purpose of consulting about a per-
son, Acts xxv. 24 [R. V. made suit]; to make petition:
évérvxov 6 Kupio kai edenOny avrov, Sap. viii. 21; evérvyov
7T@ Baowel THy drdd\vow .. - airovpevot, 3 Mace. vi. 37;
hence, to pray, entreat: imép with gen. of pers. to make
intercession for any one (the dat. of the pers. approached
in prayer being omitted, as evident from the context),
Ro. viii. 27, 34; Heb. vii. 25, (foll. by wepi with gen. of
person, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 56, 1); rut kara twos, [to
plead with one against any one], to accuse one to any one,
Ro. xi. 2, ef. 1 Mace. viii. 32; x. 61, 63 sq.; xi. 25. (Not
found in Sept.) [Comp.: umep-evtuyxava. | *
év-rvAlocw: 1 aor. évervArEa; pf. pass. ptep. évrervAry-
pévos; toroll in, wrap in: twa owddu, Mt. xxvii. 59 (evo.
Tr, [év] o. WH); Lk. xxiii. 53; Ev. Nicod.c. 11 fin. to
219
é€v@TrLop
roll up, wrap togetner: pass. Jn. xx. 7.
692; nub. 987; Athen. 3 p. 106 sq.) *
év-tuTde, -@: pf. pass. ptcp. évrerut@pévos; to engrave,
imprint (a figure) : [foll. by dat. (Ree. with év)], 2 Co. iii.
7 [cf. W. 634 sq. (589) ]. (Aristot., Dio Cass., Plut., and
in earlier frag. in Athen.)*
ev-uBpilw: 1 aor. ptep. évuBpicas; to treat with con-
tumely: Heb. x. 29. (From Soph. on.) *
evuTrvidtw (€vimmor, q. v.): to dream (Aristot. h. an. 4,
10, ete.), and dep. évummagouar (Hippocr., Plut. Brut. e.
24); so always in the Bible, for p9n, with fut. pass.
evurmacOjcopat, and com. with aor. pass. évummdcbny,
more rarely mid. évummacayny (Gen. xxxvii. 9; Judg. vii.
13); evvrna evurvagecba (in Sept. for nipin DN),
to dream (divinely suggested) dreams: Acts ii. 17 fr.
Joel iii. 1 (ii. 28); but the reading évumviors (évummd-
(ec@a) was long ago restored, which reading also cod.
Alex. gives in Joel. Metaph. to be beguiled with sensual
images and carried away to an impious course of conduct:
Jude 8.*
évimrviov, -ov, Td, (ev and vmvos, what appears in sleep ;
fr. Aeschyl. down), a dream (Lat. insomnium), a vision
which presents itself to one in sleep: Acts ii. 17, on
which pass. see évurmatea. (Sept. for DION.) -
évomov, neut. of the adj. évamos, -ov, (i. q. 6 €v aml dv,
one who is in sight, Theocr. 22, 152; Sept. Ex. xxxiii.
11; dprot évamor, Ex. xxv. 29); used adverbially it gets
the force of a preposition [W. § 54,6; B. 319 (274)],
and is joined with the gen. (hardly to be found so in any
prof. auth.), before, in sight of any one ; time and again in
Sept. for *pya and D5, also for 1] and 33173 among
N. T. writ. used most freq. by Luke and the auth. of the
Rev., but never by Matthew and Mark. It is used
1. of occupied place: in that place which is before, or over
against, opposite, any one and towards which another turns
his eyes; a. prop.: elvau evar. twos, Rev. i. 43 vii. 15;
[xiv. 5 Rec.]; so that e‘vae must be mentally supplied
before évémior, Rev. iv. 5 sq.; viii. 8; ix. 13; after ornva,
Acts x. 30; éornkéva, Rev. vii. 9; vill. 2; xi. 45 xii. 4;
xx. 12; mapeotynxeva, Lk. i. 19; Acts iv. 10; iordvas,
Acts vi. 6; Kabno Oat, Rev. xi. 16; Ovpa dvewypevn ey.
rivos, i. q. a door opened for one (see Ovpa, c. y. [B. 173
(150)]), Rev. iii. 8; after verbs signifying motion to a
place: riOéva, Lk. v.18 ; avaBaivewv, Rey. viii. 4; BadXeuv,
Rev. iv. 10; mimrew or meceiv (of worshippers), Rev.
iv.10; v.83 [vii. 11]; mpooxuveiv, Lk. iv. 7; Rev. iii. 9;
xv. 4, [ef. B. u. s.; 147 (129); W. 214 (20:1) i] aabpein
metaphorical phrases after verbs signifying motion:
Baordtew 7d dvopa...evamiov eOvav (see Baoréfw, 3),
Acts ix. 15; oxdvdara Baddew evar. twos, to cast stum-
bling-blocks (incitements to sin) before one, Rev. ii. 14;
after mpocpyerOat, to go before one like a herald, Lk. i.
17; [after mpomopevecOa, Lk. i.76 WH]. in phrases in
which something is supposed to be done by one while
standing or appearing in the presence of another [cf.
B. 176 (153)]: atter dpyetoOa, Lk. xii. 9 (Lchm. eympo-
abev) ; [dmapveicba, ibid.]; dporoyeiv, Rev. iii. 5 [ Rec.
e€op.]; Katnyopety, Rev. xii. 10; [ddew, Rev. xiv. 3];
(Arstph. Plut.
-Evos
xavyac6a, to come before God and glory, 1 Co. i. 29;
Sixaovy éaurdv, Lk. xvi. 15. c. i.g.apud (with) ; in the
soul of any one: xapa yiverat evamiov tov dyyédav, Lk.
xv. 10 [al. understand this of God’s joy, by reverent
suggestion described as in the presence of the angels; cf.
€v ovp. V8.7]; cra: oor OdEa evar. Tov cvvavakeipevor, Lk.
xiv. 10 [al. take this outwardly; cf. 2 below]; after
verbs of remembering and forgetting: els pynpd-
auvov evar. (LU T Tr WH éurpooder) rod Geo, Acts x. 4;
porno Onvat ever. t. Oeod, Acts x. 31; Rev. xvi. 19; émtde-
Anopevov evar. tT. Oeod, Lk. xii. 6 [ef. B. § 134, 3]. a.
before one’s eyes; in one’s presence and sight or hearing ;
a. prop.: dayeiv evan. tivos, Lk. xxiv. 43; this same
phrase signifies a living together in Lk. xiii. 26 (2S.
xi. 138; 1 K. i. 25); onpeta rovetv, Jn. xx. 30; dvaxpivew,
LK. xxiii. 14; évom. roAAGv papripor, 1 Tim. vi. 12; add
Lk. [v. 25]; viii. 47; Acts xix. 9, 19; xxvii. 35; [1 Tim.
v. 20]; 3 Jn. 6; Rev. iii. 55 [xiii. 13; xiv. 10]. _b.
metaph.: miotw éxe évomov Tov Oeod, have faith, satisfied
with this that it is not hidden from the sight of God,
Ro. xiv. 22; duapravew ev. tivos (see duaptdv ad fin.),
Lk. xv. 18, 21; esp. in affirmations, oaths, adjurations:
€vamtov Tov Geov, Tov kupiov, etc., Gal. i. 20; 1 Tim. v. 21;
vi. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 14; iv.1. Hence those are said to do
something in the presence of one who have him present
to their thought, who set him before their mind’s eye:
mpowpauny [mpoop. L T Tr WH] rév kvpiov evar. pov,
Acts ii. 25; ramewvovaba év. rod xupiov, Jas. iv. 10, (Sir.
li. 17). c. at the instance of any one, by his power and
authority: Rev. xiii. 12, 14; xix.20. 4d. before the eyes
of one, i.e. if he turns his eyes thither: Heb. iv. 13 (where
otk adparns évam. adtod is explained by the following
yupva ... Tots opOarpois adtov; cf. Job xxvi. 6 yupvds 6
adns évamov adrod, before his look, to his view). e. be-
fore one i.e. he looking on and judging, in one’s judg-
ment [W. 32; B.172 (150); § 133, 14]: epavnoay evar.
avtav woel Anpos, Lk. xxiv. 11 (cf. Greek ‘Hpakdeidy
Anpos mavra Soxei evar); sO esp. évamtov tod Oeov, Tod
kupiov, after the foll. words: ra dpeotd, 1 Jn. iii. 22;
BdeAvypa, Lk. xvi. 15; Sicatos, Lk. i. 6 (T Tr WH évav-
tiov); Acts iv. 19; dtxavododa, Ro. iii. 20; eddpeoros,
Heb. xiii. 21; evOis, Acts viii. 21 Rec.; «caddy, a ddexrov,
1 Tim. ii.3; v.4; Ro. xii. 17; 2Co. viii. 21; péyas, Lk.
1.15; moduredés, 1 Pet. iii. 4; memAnpwpevos, Rev. iii. 2;
apeoxew, Acts vi. 5 (Deut. i. 23 [Alex.]; 25S. iii. 36;
LW. § 33, f.])5; an the sight of God i. e. God looking on
and approving: Lk.i.75; Acts x.33; 2 Co. iv. 23 vii. 12.
in the sight of God, or with God: edpioxew xapw Cn xyR
often in the O. T.), to be approved by God, please him,
Acts vii. 46.*
*Evés (38 [i. e. man, mortal]), Enos, son of Seth
(Gen. iv. 26): Lk. iii. 38.*
évor(fopar: in bibl. writ. depon. mid.; 1 aor. impv. 2
pers. plur. evoricacbe ; i. q. év drious déxouat (Hesych.),
to recewwe into the ear; give ear to: ri, Acts ii. 14; Sept.
for PIs; elsewhere only in eccl. and Byzant. writ.,
and in these also as depon. pass. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis
lexice. p. 693 sq.; (Sturz, Dial. Alex. p.166; W. 33].*
220
eEayu
’"Evéx [WH ‘Evdy, see their Intr. § 408], (“Avayos,
-ov, 6, Joseph. antt. 1, 3,4; Hebr. 3)37 initiated or initi-
ating, [ef. B. D. s.v.]), Enoch, father of Methuselah (Lk.
iii. 37); on account of his extraordinary piety taken up
alive by God to heaven (Gen. v. 18-24; Heb. Xino0 [ich
Sir. xliv. 16; Joseph. antt. 1, 3, 4]); in the opinion of
later Jews the most renowned antediluvian prophet; to
whom, towards the end of the second century before
Christ, was falsely attributed an apocalyptical book
which was afterwards combined with fragments of other
apocryphal books, and preserved by the Fathers in
Greek fragments and entire in an Ethiopic transla-
tion. This translation, having been found among the
Abyssinian Christians towards the close of the last cen-
tury, has been edited by Richard Laurence, archbishop of
Cashel (“ Libri Henoch versio aethiopica.” Oxon. 1838),
and by A. Dillmann (“ Liber Henoch, aethiopice.” Lips.
1851); it was translated into English by R. Laurence
(1st ed. 1821; 3d ed. 1838 [reprinted (Scribners, N. Y.)
1883; also (with notes) by G. H. Schodde (Andover,
1882) ], into German by A. G. Hoffman (Jen. 1833-38, 2
vols.) and by A. Dillmann (Lips. 1853) ; each of the last
two translators added acommentary. From this book is
taken the ‘ prophecy’ in Jude 14 sq.; [ef. B.D. (Am. ed.),
also Dict. of Chris. Biog., s. v. Enoch, The Book of].*
ef, see éx.
€€, of, al, rd, indecl. numeral, siz: Mt. xvii. 1; Lk.
Xili. 14, ete. »
é-ayyéAdw: 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. e€ayyeiAnre;
first in Hom. Il. 5, 390; properly, to tell out or forth
[see éx, VI. 4], to declare abroad, divulge, publish: [Mk.
xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; with He-
braistic emphasis, to make known by praising or proclaim-
ing, to celebrate, [A. V. show forth]: 1 Pet. ii. 9. (For
390, Ps. Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 28; Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 13, ef. Sir.
xliv. 15.) *
eEayopdtw: 1 aor. e€nydpaca; [pres. mid. eayopdto-
pac]; 1. to redeem i. e. by payment of a price to re-
cover from the power of another, to ransom, buy off, [cf.
ex, VI. 2]: prop. @eparawwida, Diod. 36,1 p.530; metaph.
of Christ freeing men from the dominion of the Mosaic
law at the price of his vicarious death (see dyopata,
2b.), rea, Gal. iv. 5; with addition of ék tis kardpas roo
vopov, Gal. ili. 13. 2. to buy up, Polyb. 3, 42, 2; Plut.
Crass. 2; Mid. ri, to buy up for one’s self, for one’s use
[W. § 38, 2b.; B. 192 (166 sq.)]: trop. in the obscure
phrase ¢fay. tov xatpdv, Eph. v. 16 and Col. iv. 5, where
the meaning seems to be to make a wise and sacred use
of every opportunity for doing good, so that zeal and
well-doing are as it were the purchase-money by which
we make the time our own; (act. é€ayopdgew xaupdy, to
seek [io gain time (A. V.) i. e.] delay, Dan. ii. 8; mid.
with ace. of thing, ‘by ransom to avert evil from one’s
self’, ‘to buy one’s self off or deliver one’s self from
evil’: dia peas dpas tiv aidmov kdhaow e€ayopatspevor, of
the martyrs, Mart. Polye. 2, 3).*
e-dyo; 2 aor. efjyayov; Sept. often for yin; to lead
out [cf. ek, VI. 1]: twd (the place whence being sup
eEatpéw
plied in thought), Mk. xv. 20 (of the city to punishment
[but Lehm. dyovow]); Acts xvi. 37, 39; v.19 and xvi.
39 (from prison) ; Acts vii. 36 (from Egypt); Jn. x. 3
(sheep from the fold); with ¢ added [in RG Lbr.],
Lk. xxiv. 50; & ris kopuns, Mk. viii. 23 RG LTrmrg.
[ef. W. 603 (561)]; with the addition of ék w. gen. of
place, Acts vii. 40; xii. 17; xiii. 17; Heb. viii. 9; foll.
by eis with ace. of place, Acts xxi. 38.*
eE-aipéw, -d: 2 aor. impv. é€ede; Mid., [pres. ptcp.
eEatpovpevos|; 2 aor. é&euAduny and in Alex. form (LT
Tr WH) efecAduny (Acts vii. 10 [so Grsb.]; xii. 11 [so
Grsb.]; xxiii. 27; see reff. in [aipéw and] dmépyopar),
inf. é£ehéoOar (Acts vii. 34); Sept. usually for 1x; to
take out (cf. éx, VI. 2]; 1. to pluck out, draw out, i. e.
to root out: tov opOadpov, Mt. v. 29; xviii. 9. 2. Mid.
a. to choose out (for one’s self), select, one person from
many: Acts xxvi. 17 (so for 13 in Is. xlix. 7 [but there
the Sept. has e&eeEdunv; perh. Is. xlviii. 10 is meant]
and sometimes-in Grk. writ.; first in Hom. Od. 14, 232)
[al. refer Acts l. c. to the next head; (see Hackett ad
loc.) ]. b. to rescue, deliver, (prop. to cause to be res-
cued, but the middle force is lost [ef. W. 253 (238)]):
twa, Acts vii. 34; xxiii. 27; tua &k tevos, Acts vil. 10;
xli. 11; Gal. i. 4; (Ex. iii. 8, ete.; Aeschyl. suppl. 924;
Hat. 3, 137; Dem. 256, 3; Polyb. 1, 11, 11).*
éE-alpw: fut. e€apo (1 Co. v.13 Rec.) ; 1 aor. impv. 2
pers. plur. é¢&dpare (ib. GL T Tr WH); 1 aor. pass. é&np-
Onv, to lift up or take away out of a place; to remove (cf.
ex, VI. 2]: twa éx, one from a company, 1 Co. v. 2 Rec.
[see atpw, 3 c.]; vs. 13 fr. Deut. [xix. 19 or] xxiv. 9.*
éE-attéw, -@: 1 aor. mid. éEnrnodunv; to ask from, de-
mand of, (cf. ex, VI. 2]. Mid. to ask from (or beg) for
one’s self: twa, to ask that one be given up to one from
the power of another, —in both senses, either for good,
to beg one from another, ask for the pardon, the safety, of
some one, (Xen. an. 1, 1,3; Dem. p. 546, 22; Plut. Per.
32; Palaeph. 41, 2); or in a bad sense, for torture, for
punishment, (Plut. mor. p. 417 d. de defect. orac. 14; in
prof. auth. often with this sense in the act.) ; so of Satan
asking the apostles out of the power and keeping of God
to be tried by afflictions (allusion being made to Job i.
1-12): Lk. xxii. 31 (Test. xii. Patr. p. 729 [test. Benj.
§ 3] édv ra mvevpara tod BeAlap eis macay rovnpiay OXi-
Weas eEarnowvrat tuas).*
eE-aidvyns [WH eEépyys (exc. in Acts xxii. 6), see
their App. p. 151], adv., (aiguns, apa, apres suddenly),
of a sudden, suddenly, unexpectedly: Mk. xiii. 36; Lk.
ii. 13; ix. 39; Actsix.3; xxii.6. (Hom. et al.; Sept.)*
eE-axodovdéw, -&: fut. é£axodkovOnow; 1 aor. ptep. é&a-
KodovOncas; to follow out or up, tread in one’s steps; a.
Ti 6d twos, metaph., to imitate one’s way of acting:
bets 15, cl. 1s) lv. 11: b. to follow one’s author-
ity: pido, 2 Pet.i.16; Joseph. antt. prooem. 4, (apyn-
yois, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14,1; Svat Bacwdedou, Test. xii.
Patr. p. 643 [test. Zeb. § 9]). c. to comply with, yield
to: doedyeias [Rec. dradeias], 2 Pet. ii. 2, (mvevpacr
mAdvns, Test. xii. Patr. p. 665 [test. Napht. § 3; rois
movnpois SiaBovAlos, xii. Patr. p. 628 test. Is. § 6]; cf.
221
eEatrooTéAXw
also Am. ii. 4; Job xxxi. 9; Sir. v. 2). Among prof.
auth. Polyb., Plut. occasionally use the word; [add Dion.
Hal. de comp. verb. § 24 p. 188, 7; Epictet. diss. 1, 22,
16].*
€axdoror, -at, -a, six hundred: Rev. [xiii. 18]; xiv. 20.*
e-areipw: fut. eEareiw; 1 aor. ptcp. é€areipas; 1
aor. pass. infin. efarePOjvac [(WH -dipOqvac; see their
App. p. 154, and s. v. I, e below) ]; 1. (€& denoting
completeness [cf. éx, VI. 6]), to anoint or wash in
every part, hence to besmear': i. q. cover with lime (to white-
wash or plaster), 76 retxos, Thuc. 3, 20; rods toiyous rot
iepod [here to overlay with gold ete.], 1 Chr. xxix. 4; rh
oixiav, Lev. xiv. 42 (for m3W). 2. (e& denoting re-
moval (cf. éx, VI. 2]), to wipe off, wipe away: Sdxpvov
ano [GLT Tr WH éx] trav dfpOarpav, Rev. vii. 17;
xxi. 4 [RG WHnrg., al. éx]; to obliterate, erase, wipe
out, blot out, (Aeschyl., Mdt., al.; Sept. for AMD) : ri, Col.
li. 14; 1d dvopa ex tis BiBdov, Rev. iii. 5 (Ps. Ixviii.
(Ixix.) 29, cf. Deut. ix. 14; xxv. 6); ras duaprtias, the
guilt of sins, Acts iii. 19, (Ps. eviii. (cix.) 13; 7d dvd-
Pnya, Tas dvopias, Is. xliii. 25; Ps. 1. (Ji.) 11; Sir. xlvi.
20; r. duaprias dmadeipew, 3 Mace. ii. 19).*
é&-dAopar; to leap up: Acts iii. 8. (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1,
27, et al.; Sept. Is. lv. 12.) *
e-avarracis, -ews, 7, (eEaviornut, q. V.), @ rising up
(Polyb. 3, 55,4); @ rising again, resurrection: rev vexpov
or (L T Tr WH) 9 ek rev vexpav, Phil. iii. 11.*
é&-ava-réA\Aw: 1 aor. e&averetda; 1. trans. to make
spring up, cause to shoot forth: Gen. ii. 9, ete. 2. in-
trans. to spring up: Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5. (Rare in
prof. auth. [ef. W. 102 (97)].) *
éf-av-tornpt: 1 aor. e€aveotnoa; 2 aor. eEavéorny; 1.
io make rise up, to raise up, to produce: omeppa, Mk. xii.
19; Lk. xx. 28, (Hebr. yur DPN, Gens xxxvili$). 2:
2 aor. act. to rise in an assembly to speak (as in Xen. an.
6, 1, 30): Acts xv. 5.*
éE-amatdw, -@; 1 aor. eEnmatnca; 1 aor. pass. ptcp.
fem. eEararnOeioa; (e& strengthens the simple verb [cf.
éx, VI. 6]), to deceive: Ro. vii. 11; xvi. 18; 1 Co. iii. 18;
2 Co. xi. 3; 2 Th. ii. 3; pass. 1 Tim. ii. 14 [L T Tr WH].
(From Hom. down ; twice in the O. T. viz. Ex. viii. 29;
Sus. vs. 56.)*
étamva, (a somewhat rare later Grk. form for eéamivns,
éEaipyns, q. v- [W. § 2, 1 d.]), adv., suddenly: Mk. ix. 8.
(Sept.; Jambl., Zonar., al.; Byzant.) *
é-aropéw and (so in the Bible) depon. pass. eamopéo-
pat, -otpat; 1 aor. eEqmopnOnv; to be utterly at a loss, be
utterly destitute of measures or resources, to renounce all
hope, be in despair, [cf. éx, VI. 6], (Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
al.): 2 Co. iv. 8 (where it is distinguished fr. the simple
drropéopat) ; twds of anything: rov Gv, 2 Co. i. 8, on this
gen. cf. Matthiae ii. p. 828 sq. (rod dpyupiov, to be utterly
in want of, Dion. Hal. 7,18; act. with dat. of respect,
Tois Noytopois, Polyb. 1, 62, 1; once in the O. T. absol.
Ps. Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 16).*
éf-amo-rréAhw; fut. eamooredd; 1 aor. efaréoretha;
[2 aor. pass. é€amecrddnv]; Sept. very often for now;
prop. to send away from one’s self (amo) out of the place
éEantivo
or out of doors (é« [q. v. VI. 2]); 1. to send forth:
rid, with commissions, Acts vii. 12; [xii. 11]; Gal. iv.
4; foll. by inf. of purpose, Acts xi. 22 (but L T Tr WH
om. the inf.) ; ets €vn, unto the Gentiles, Acts xxii. 21
[WH mrg. droor.]; used also of powers, influences,
things, (see dmooréAX@, 1 a.) : THY erayyediay, the prom-
ised blessing, Lk. xxiv.49 T Tr WH; 1d mvedua eis ras
xapdias, to send forth i.e. impart the Spirit to our hearts,
Gal. iv. 6; [rd .. . enpuypa Tis aiwviov cwrnpias, Mk. xvi.
WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; tpiv 6 doyos
. . €ameordAn, the message was sent forth, i. e. com-
manded to be announced, to you, Acts xiii. 26 LT Tr
WH. 2. to send away: twa eis ete. Acts ix. 30; foll.
by inf. of purpose, Acts xvii. 14; rua xevov, Lk. i. 53;
xx. 10,11. (Dem., Polyb., Diod.) *
éEapritw: 1 aor. inf. ¢€apricat; pf. pass. ptep. e€npri-
opévos; (see dprios, 2); rare in prof. auth.; to complete,
jinish; a. to furnish perfectly: twd, pass.,mpos tt, 2
Tim. iii. 17 (odepeiv .. . Trois Gmact Kadas eEnpricpévot,
Joseph. antt. 3, 2,2). b. ras nuépas, to finish, accomplish,
(as it were, to render the days complete) : Acts xxi. 5
(so dmapri¢ew thy dxtdunvov, Hipp. epid. ii. 180 [ef. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 447 sq.]).*
eE-artpamre. 1. prop. to send forth lightning, to
lighten. 2. to flash out like lightning, to shine, be ra-
diant: of garments, Lk. ix. 29; (of gleaming arms, Nah.
iii. 3; Ezek. i. 4, 7; 0B x. kaddci moAA@ Tryphiodor.
103; [cf. W. 102 (97) ]).*
é&-autijs and é& adrnc [so Rec. Mk. vi. 20], (Se. THe dpac
[W. 591 sq. (550); B. 82 (71)]), on the instant; forth-
with: Mk. vi. 25; Acts x. 88; xi. 11: xxi. 32: xxiii. 30
[RG WH]; Phil. ii. 23. (Cratin. in Bekk. anecd. i.
p- 94; Theogn., Arat., Polyb., Joseph., al.) *
éE-eyelpw [1 Co. vi. 14 Lehm. txt.]; fut. €€eyepo; 1 aor.
eéjyetpa; to arouse, raise up (from sleep; Soph., Eur.,
Xen., al.) ; from the dead (Aeschyl. cho. 495), 1 Co. vi.
14. to rouse up, stir up, incite: twa, to resistance, Ro. ix.
17 (rév Ovpoy tivos, 2 Mace. xiii. 4, ef. 2 Chr. xxxvi. 22),
where some explain the words e&nyeipa oe I have raised
thee up into life, caused thee to exist, or I have raised thee
toa public position, set thee up as king (Joseph. antt. 8,
11, 1 Baordeds yap e€eyeiperar im’ éuod); but the objec-
tion to these interpretations lies in the fact that Paul
draws from vs. 17 what he says in vs. 18, and therefore
e€eyeipey must be nearly synonymous with oxAnpiver,
[but see Meyer ].*
e€ect; impf. eéjecav; (etue); to go out, go forth: foll.
in Rec. by ex with gen. of place, Acts xiii. 42; without
mention of the place, that being known from the context,
Acts xvii. 15; xx. 7; émi rij» yay (from the water), to es-
cape to the land, Acts xxvii. 43.*
éEepr from eipi, see éeore.
é-ehéyxw: 1 aor. inf. é€edéyEa; (€é strengthens the
simple verb [cf. ék, VI. 6]); to prove to be in the wrong,
convict, (chiefly in Attic writ.) : by punishing, rwa mepi
twos, Jude 15 Rec. (see édéyyw, 1) of God as judge, as
in Is. ii. 4; Mic. iv. 3 for main.*
kw: [pres. pass. ptcep. é&eAxdpevos]; to draw out,
222
éEépyopar
(Hom., Pind., Attic writ.) ; metaph. i. q. to lure forth,
[A. V. draw away]: ind ris... émOupias é€edxopevos,
Jas. i. 14, where the metaphor is taken from hunting
and fishing: as game is lured from its covert, so man by
lust is allured from the safety of self-restraint to sin.
[The language of hunting seems to be transferred here
(so elsewhere, cf. Wetst. ad loc.) to the seductions of a
harlot, personated by émOupia; see rixra. | *
é&<dw, see e£aipew.
éépapa, -ros, ro, (fr. €Eepdw to eject, cast forth, vomit
forth; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 64), vomit; what is cast out
by vomiting: 2 Pet. ii. 22, ef. Prov. xxvi. 11. (Dioscor.
de venenis c. 19 (p. 29 ed. Spreng.) [an example of the
verb. Cf. Wetst. on Pet. 1. c., and esp. Gataker, Advers.
miscell. col. 853 sq. ].) *
[é€-epavvéw T Tr WH for e£epevrda, q. v.; see épavvda.]
e-epevvdw, -G: 1 aor. eEnpevvnoa; to search out, search
anxiously and diligently: wept twos, 1 Pet. i. 10 [where
T Tr WH égepavy. q. v-]- (1 Mace. iii. 48; ix. 26; Sept.;
Soph., Eur., Polyb., Plut., al.) *
e€<pxopar; impf. eEnpxounv; fut. e£eXevoouar; 2 aor.
ééjAOov, plur. 2 pers. ¢&ndAGere, 3 pers. €EndAOov, and in
L T Tr WH the Alex. forms (see drépxopat, init.) é&nr-
Gare (Mt. xi. 7, 8,9; xxvi.55; Mk. xiv. 48, etc.), €€jAGav
(1 Jn. ii. 19; 2Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -Oov; 3 Jn. 7, etc.]); pf.
e€eAndvOa; plpf. e&eAndrAvOew (LK. viii. 38, etc.) ; Sept. for
N¥? times without number ; to go or come out of; aL.
properly; a. with mention of the place out of which
one goes, or of the point from which he departs; a. of
those who leave a place of their own accord: with the
gen. alone, Mt. x.14 (L T Tr WH insert ¢&w) ; Acts xvi.
39RG.. foll. by ée: Mk. v. 2; vii. 31; Jn. iv. 30; viii.
59; Acts vii. 3 sq.; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviil. 4, ete. foll.
by ¢£@ with gen. — with addition of es and ace. of place,
Mt. xxi. 17; Mk. xiv. 68; or mapa with acc. of place,
Acts xvi. 13; or mpés tuva, acc. of pers., Heb. xiii. 13.
e&épy. ano with gen. of place, Mt. xiii. 1 RG; Mk. xi.
12; Lk. ix. 5; Phil. iv. 15; [Heb. xi. 15 RG]; ééépy.
éxetOev, Mt. xv. 21; Mk. vi. 1,10; Lk. ix. 4; [xi. 53 T Tr
txt. WH txt.]; Jn. iv. 43; dev €&7AGov, Mt. xii. 44; Lk.
xi. 24 [yet see B. below]. e&épy. ex etc. to come forth
from, out of, a place: Mt. viii. 28; Rev. xiv. 15, 17, 18
[Lom. WH br. é&d.]; xv. 6; e&eAOeiv amd, to come out
(towards one) from, Mt. xv. 22. In the Gospel of John
Christ, who by his incarnation left his place with God
in heaven, is said é£eA@eciv mapa Tod Geod: xvi. 27 and RG
Linrg. in vs. 28; dad rod Geov, xili. 3; xvi. 303 é« rod
Geov, from his place with God, from God’s abode, viii. 42
and L txt. T Tr WH in xvi. 28. 8. of those expelled or
cast out (esp. of demons driven forth from a body of
which they have held possession) : x twos, gen. of pers.:
Mk. i. 25 sq.3 v. 8 [Umrg. dé]; vii. 29; Lk. iv. 35 R Tr
mrg.; or dé tivos, Mt. xii. 43 ; xvii. 18; Lk.iv.35 LT Tr
txt. WH; viii. 29, 33, 35; xi. 24 [yet see a. above]; Acts
xvi. 18; [xix.12 Rec.]. y. of those who come forth, or
are let go, from confinement in which they have been
kept (e. g. from prison): Mt. v. 26; Acts xvi. 40. b.
without mention of the place from which one goes out;
eEépyouat
a. where the place from which one goes forth (as a house,
city, ship) has just been mentioned: Mt. [viii. 12 Tdf.];
ix. 31 sq. (from the house, vs. 28); x. 11 (sc. éxeiev, i. e.
€x THs Toews 7) KOuNS exeivns) ; xii. 14 (cf. 9) ; xviii. 28 (cf.
24); xiv.14; Mk.i. 45 (cf. 43 e&€Badev adrdv) ; Lk. i. 22
(from the temple) ; viii. 27; x. 35 [Rec.]; Jn. xiii. 30, 31
(30), ete.; so also when the verb é&pyeoOa: refers to the
departure of demons: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 13; vii. 30;
ix. 29; Acts viii. 7; xvi. 19 (where for the name of the
demon itself is substituted the descriptive clause 4 éAmls
T. €pyacias avta@v; see 2e. 6.). B. where one is said to
have gone forth to do something, and it is obvious that he
has gone forth from his home, or at least from the place
where he has been staying: foll. by an inf., Mt. xi. 8;
xiii. 3 [inf. w. rod]; xx.1; Mk. iii. 21; iv. 3 [R Ginf. w.
rov (Tr br. rod) ]; v. 14 Rec.; Lk. vii. 25 sq.; Acts xx. 1;
Rev. xx. 8; with the addition of éxi rwa (against), Mt.
xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52; es rovro, Mk. i. 38;
iva, Rev. vi. 2; also without any inf. or conjunction indi-
cating the purpose: Mk. vi. 12; viii. 11; xiv. 16; xvi. 20;
Lk y. 27; ix. 6; Jn. xxi. 3; Acts x. 23> xx: 11; 2 Co. viii:
17; foll. by e’s with ace. of place: Mt. xxii. 10; xxvi. 30,
ae eMike vit. 27 sx. dl eI Kovin dD extvn2 1, 235) Ineis43
(44); Acts xi. 25; xiv. 20; 2 Co. ii. 13; the place to
which one goes forth being evident either from what goes
before or from the context: Mt. xxiv. 26 (sc. eis rHv épn-
pov); xxvii. 32 (from the city to the place of crucifixion) ;
é£épy. alone is used of a people quitting the land which
they had previously inhabited, Acts vii. 7, cf. Heb. xi. 8;
of angels coming forth from heaven, Mt. xiii. 49. eé&épx.
eis amavrnoiv Twos, to meet one, Mt. xxv.1 [LT Tr WH
tmavr.|, 6; [eis amavt. or vravt.| twi, Jn. xii. 13; Acts
xxviii. 15 RG; eis ovvavtnolv tiem, Mt. viii. 34 [L T Tr
WH tnavr.]. Agreeably to the oriental redundancy of
style in description (see dvicrnt, II. 1 c.), the participle
€£eOav is often placed before another finite verb of de-
parture: Mt. viii. 32; xv. 21; xxiv. 1 (é£eAov [from the
temple, see xxi. 23] émopevero dé Tod tepov, he departed
from its vicinity); Mk. xvi. 8; Lk. xxii. 39; Acts xii. 9,
17; xvi. 36,40; xxi.5,8. 2. figuratively; a. &« rwov,
€k pécou Tivay, to go out from some assembly, i. e. to for-
sake it: 1 Jn. ii. 19 (opp. to pepevnxercav ped” jpav); 2
Co. vi.17. b. to come forth from physically, arise from,
to be born of: ex with gen. of the place from which one
comes by birth, Mt. ii. 6 (fr. Mic. v. 2); ék« tis daqvos
rwos, Hebr. D°S9TID N¥? (Gen. xxxv. 11; 1 K. viii. 19;
{ef. W. 33 (32)]), Heb. vii. 5. oc. ek xetpds twos, to go
forth from one’s power, escape from it in safety: Jn. x.
39. d. eis Tov Kdcpov, to come forth (from privacy) into
the world, before the public, (of those who by novelty of
opinion attract attention): 1Jn.iv.1. e. of things;
a. of report, rumors, messages, precepts, etc., 1. q. to be
uttered, to be heard: dbwun. Rev. xvi. 17; xix. 5; 1. q. to be
made known, declared : 6 \éyos rod Oeod foll. by aro twav,
from their city or church, 1 Co. xiv. 36; 1. q. to spread,
be diffused: 4 nun, Mt. ix. 26; Lk. iv. 14; 7 dxon, Mk.
4.25; | Mt. iv. 24 Trmrg.]; 6 POdyyos, ra pnuara, Ro. x.
18; 6 Adyos the word, saying, Jn. xxi. 23; Lk. vii. 17;
22
3 é&fs
7) miatis twvds, the report of one’s faith, 1 Th.i. 8; i. q:
to be proclaimed: 8Séypa, an imperial edict, apd twos, gen.
pers., Lk. ii. 1. B. to come forth i. q. be emitted, as from
the heart, the mouth, etc.: Mt. xv. 18 sq.; Jas. iii. 10;
[ef. poudaia ék tod ordparos, Rev. xix. 21G LT Tr
WI]; i. q. to flow forth from the body: Jn. xix. 34; i.q.
to emanate, issue: Lk. viii. 46; Rev. xiv. 20. y. é&épye-
aa (an’ dvatohGv), used of a sudden flash of lightning,
Mt. xxiv. 27. 8. that é&épyeo@ar in Acts xvi. 19 (on
which see 1 b. a. above) is used also of a thing’s vanish-
ing, viz. of a hope which has disappeared, arises from
the circumstance that the demon that had gone out had
been the hope of those who complain that their hope
has gone out. On the phrase eicépyeoOar x. e&épyerbat
[Compe.: d:-e&épyopuat. |
éE<or7, impers. verb, (fr. the unused ee), tt is law-
ful; a. foll. by the pres. inf.: Mt. xii. 2, 10 [Tdf. inf.
aor.], 12; xiv.4; Lk. vi. 2[>.RGT]; xiv.3 [LT Tr WH
inf. aor.]; with the aor. inf.: Mt. [xv. 26 L T]; xxii.
17; xxvii. 6; Mk. iii. 4; xii.14; Lk. vi. 9; Acts ii. 29
(e&6y eimety scil. €orw, allow me, [al. supply éori, B. 318
(273); W.§ 64, I. 2a., cf. § 2,1 d.]); with theinf. omitted
because readily suggested by the context, Mk. ii. 24 and
Ree. in Acts vill. 37. _b. foll. by dat. of pers. and a pres.
inf.: Mk. vi. 18; Acts xvi. 21; xxii. 25; and an aor. inf.:
Mt. xix.3 [LT WH om. dat.]; xx. 15; Mk. ii. 26[RG
L Tr txt.]; x.2; Lk.xx.22RGL; Jn. v.10; xviii. 31 ;
Acts xxi. 87; é&ov jv, Mt. xii. 4; a ov« e&dv, sc. éori, 2 Co.
xii. 4; with the inf. omitted, as being evident from the
context: mdvru (poe) €€earuy, sc. moveiv, 1 Co. vi. 123 x. 23.
c. foll. by the ace. and inf.: Lk. vi. 4; xx. 22T Tr WH;
so here and there even in classic writ. ; cf. Rost § 127
Anm. 2; Kiihner § 475 Anm. 2; [B. § 142, 2].*
é&-erdtw: 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. eferdoare, inf. é&e-
tdca; to search out; to examine strictly, inquire: mept
twos and with the adv. dxpiBas added, Mt. ii. 8; foll. by
an indir. quest. Mt. x. 11; reva inquire of some one, foll.
by a direct question, Jn. xxi.12. (Sept.; often in Grk.
writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *
[ekéhvns, see eLaidyns. ]
e&-nyéopat, -odpar; impf. €Enyovpny ; 1 aor. eEnynoauny ;
1. prop. to lead out, be leader, go before, (Hom. et al.).
2. metaph. (cf. Germ. ausfiihren) to draw out in narra-
tive, unfold in teaching; a. to recount, rehearse: [w. acc.
of the thing and dat. of pers., Acts x. 8]; w. acc. of thing,
Lk. xxiv. 35; Acts xxi. 19; without an acc., foll. by rel.
pron. or adv., 6aa éroinaer, Acts xv.12; xaOas, 14, (so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 190, Judg. vii. 13,
etc.). b. to unfold, declare: Jn. i. 18 (sc. the things re-
lating to God; also used in Grk. writ. of the interpreta-
tion of things sacred and divine, oracles, dreams, etc. ; cf.
Meyer ad loc.; Alberti, Observationes etc. p. 207 sq:).*
éEhxovra, of, ai, rd, sixty: Mt. xiii. 8, 23, etc.
éffs, adv., (fr. eyo, fut. gw; cf. exopai ruvos to cleave
to, come next to, a thing), successively, in order, (fr. Hom.
down); 6, 4, 7d é&js, the next following, the next in suc«
cession: so# €£ns npépa, Lk. ix. 37; elliptically év r7 eb,
sc. nuépa, Lk. vii. 11 (here WH txt. Tr txt. L mrg. ev
see in eia€pyopuat, 1 a.
éEnyéw
ra é€js sc. xpdvq, soon afterwards); TH EAs, Sc- nuepa,
Acts cx e weve vale L825
é&-nxéw, -3: to sound forth, emit sound, resound ; pass.
éényeirai re the sound of something is borne forth, is
propagated: dd’ tuar e&nynrat 6 hoyos Tot Kupiov, from
your city or from your church the word of the Lord
has sounded forth i. e. has been disseminated by report, 1
Th. i. 8, cf. De Wette ad loc. (Joel iii. 14 (iv. 19); Sir.
xJ.13; 3 Mace. iii. 2. Polyb. 30, 4, 7 [not Dind.]; Philo
‘n Flace. § 6; [quis rer. div. her. §4]; Byzant.) *
ets, -ews, 7, (€xa, fut. 2a), a habit, whether of body or
of mind (Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) ; a power acquired by
custom, practice, use, (“firma quaedam facilitas, quae apud
Graecos és nominatur,” Quint. 10, 1 init.); so Heb.
v. 14, (év rovrous ixaviy e&iv mepuromodyevos, Sir. prol. 7 ;
e&wv Exew ypauparixys, Polyb. 10,47, 7; év rots roXepexois,
21, 7, 3; év dorpodoyia peyiorny e&w exew, Diod. 2, 31;
Noyixiy Ev mepurrovovpevos, Philo, alleg. legg. 1, 4).*
e&(ornpe: likewise eEiordw and éfioravw (Acts viii. 9
ptep. e&iordv RG, e&ioravev LT Tr WH [see tornuc)) ;
1 aor. e€éornoa; 2 aor. e&€ornv; pi. inf. &earaxevar; Mid.,
[pres. inf. e&ioracOar]; impf. 3 pers. plur. e&icravro;
1. In pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act. to throw out of position,
to displace: twa tov dpoveiv, to throw one out of his
mind, drive one out of his senses, Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12;
pevav, Kur. Bacch. 850 ; hence simply to amaze, astonish,
throw into wonderment: twa, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts viii. 9.
2. In perf., pluperf., 2 aor. act. and also the mid., a. to
be amazed, astounded: Mt. xii. 23; Mk. ii. 12; Lk. viii.
56; Acts ii. 7, 12; villi. 13; ix. 21; x. 45; xii. 16, (Sept.
for 171, to tremble, Ex. xix. 18; Ruth iii. 8, etc.) ; &&é
otnoav éexotdoet peyddn, they were amazed with a great
amazement (see é¢koracis, 3), Mk. v. 42; év éavrois é&i-
orayro, Mk. vi.51; with dat. of the thing: payeias é&
eoraxevat, had been put beside themselves with magic
arts, carried away with wonder at them, Acts viii. 11
[but thes form of the perf. is transitive; cf. B. 48 (41);
Veitch 339]; e&iaravro emi with dat. of thing, Lk. ii. 47
(Ex. xix. 18; Sap.v. 2). b. to be out of one’s mind, be-
side one’s self, insane: 2 Co. v. 13 (opp. to cadpoveiv) ;
Mk. iii. 21 [ef. B.198 (171); W.§ 40,5 b.]; (Grk. writ.,
where they use the word in this sense, generally add
tov ppoveiv, rav ppevadv : Isoc., Eur., Polyb., al.).*
éf-.cxtw: 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. é&:axtonre, to
be eminently able, to have full strength, (cf. éx, VI. 6]:
foll. by an inf. Eph. iii. 18. (Sir. vii. 6; rare in Grk.
writ., as Dioscor., Strab., Plut.) *
€£-080s, -ov, 9, (66s), exit, i. e. departure: Heb. xi. 22;
metaph. 7 &0dds twos the close of one’s career, one’s
final fate, Lk. ix. 31; departure from life, decease: 2 Pet.
i. 15, as in Sap. iii. 2; vii. 6; [Philo de caritate § 4];
with addition of rod giv, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 2; [of rov
Biov, Just. dial. c, Tryph. § 105].*
éE-odo8petw and (acc. to the reading best attested by
the oldest Mss. of the Sept. and received by LT Tr WH
[see ddobpevw]) eEodrcOpeva: fut. pass. eLodoOpevOhoopar;
to destroy out of its place, destroy utterly, to extirpate: éx
my Aaod, Acts ili. 23. (Often in the Sept., and in the
224
eEoudevows
O. T. Apocr., and in Test. xii. Patr.; Joseph. antt. 8,
11, 1; 11, 6, 6; hardly in native Grk. writ.) *
éf-opodoyéw, -@: 1 aor. eEwpodrdynoa; Mid., [pres. &&
oporoyodpat]; fut. e€oporoynoopat; [1 aor. subj. 3 pers.
sing. -jonra, Phil. ii. 11 RG Ltxt. Tr txt.WH]; (€&
either forth from the heart, freely, or publicly, openly (cf.
W. 102 (97)]); act. and depon. mid. to confess, to pro-
Sess; 1. to confess: tas dpaprias, Mt. iii. 6; Mk. i. 5;
(Jas. v.16 L T Tr WH], (Joseph. antt. 8, 4, 6; [ef. b. j.
5,10, 5; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51, 3; Barn. ep. 19, 12]);
tas mpd&es, Acts xix. 18; ra mapanrwpata, Jas. v. 16
RG; (qrrav, Plut. Eum. c. 17; tyv adnOevav dvev Baoa-
vev, id. Anton. c. 59). 2. to profess i. e. to acknowl-
edge openly and joyfully: rd dvopa twos, Rev. iii. 5 Rec.;
foll. by érz, Phil. ii. 11; with dat. of pers. [cf. W. § 31,
1f.; B. 176 (153)] to one’s honor, i. e. to celebrate, give
praise to (so Sept. for 9 myn, Ps. xxix. (xxx.) 5; cv.
(evi.) 47; cxxi. (exxii.) 4, ete.; [W. 32]): Ro. xiv. 11;
xv. 9 fr. Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 50, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 3);
rwi (dat. of pers.) foll. by ore: Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21.
to profess that one will do something, to promise, agree,
engage: Lk. xxii. 6 [Lchm. om.]; (in this sense the
Greeks and Josephus use é6uodoyetv).*
e&-6v, see efeort.
é£-opkita ; 1. to exact an oath, to force to an oath,
(Dem., Polyb., Apollod., Diod., Plut., al.), for which the
earlier Grks. used e£opxow, [cf. W.102(97)]. 2. to ad-
jure: twa kara Tivos, one by a person [cf. xara, I. 2 a.],
foll. by iva [B. 237 (205) ], Mt. xxvi. 63; (Gen. xxiv. 3).*
eE-opkir ths, -0d, 6, (eEopxila) ; 1. he who exacts an
oath of another. 2. an exorcist, i. e. one who employs
a formula of conjuration for expelling demons: Acts
xix. 13. (Joseph. antt. 8, 2,5; Leian. epigr. in Anthol.
11, 427; often in the church Fathers.) *
eE-optoow: 1 aor. ptep. eEopv€avres; fr. Hdt. down;
1. to dig out: rovs dpOarpovts (prop. to pluck out the
eyes; so Judg. xvi. 21 [Alex.]; 1S. xi. 2; Hdt. 8, 116;
Joseph. antt. 6, 5, 1; Lceian. dial. deor. 1, 1; al.) kai
.ddvar rwi, metaph. to renounce the most precious things
for another’s advantage, Gal. iv. 15 (similar expressions
see in Ter. adelph. 4, 5,67; Hor. sat. 2, 5, 35; [Wet-
stein ad loc.]); in opposition to a very few interp. who,
assuming that Paul suffered from a weakness of the
eyes, understand the words literally, “Ye would have
plucked out your sound eyes and have put them into
me,” see Meyer ad loc.; [ef. reff. s. v. exddoy, fin.]. 2.
to dig through: tiv oréynv, Mk. ii. 4.*
é-ovdevew, -G: 1 aor. pass. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. ééou-
devn6n ; pf. pass. ptep. eEovdernuévos; to hold and treat
as of no account, utterly to despise: tov déyov, pass., 2 Co.
x. 10 Lehm. 0 set at nought, treat with contumely: a
person, pass., Mk. ix. 12 L Tr WH, (Ezek. xxi. 10). Cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182; [B. 28 (25); W.91 (87); Soph.
Lex. s. v.; WH. App. p. 166].*
éf-ovdevdw, -@: [1 aor. pass. subjunc. 3 pers. sing.
eLovdevaOy |; 1. q. €Eovdevew, q. v.: Mk. ix. 12 RG; often
in Sept., esp. for 713 and oN). [Cf. reff. in the preced
ing word. ]*
€£ouBevéw
ovdevew, -@; 1 aor. eLovbevyoa; Pass., pf. ptep. egov-
Gevnuévos; [1 aor. ptcp. eLovbernbeis]; (see oddeis); to
make of no account, to despise utterly: tewd, Lk. xviii. 9;
Ro. xiv. 3,10; 1 Co. xvi.11; ri, 1 Th. v. 20; Gal. iv. 14
(where it is coupled with éxmriw ); in pass. of ééovbern-
pévot, 1 Co. vi. 4; ra e€ovdevnpéva, 1 Co. i. 28 (see ayevns) ;
6 Adyos eEovOernpévos, 2 Co. x. 10 [here Lehm. é€ov8d.];
6 (Aidos 6) eEovdevnbeis id rev oixodopovvrav, set at
nought, i. e. rejected, cast aside, Acts iv. 11. To treat
with contempt (i. e. acc. to the context, with mockery) :
Lk. xxiii. 11; (for 133, Prov. i. 7; ma, Ezek. xxii. 8, etc.;
OND, 1S. viii. 7. Sap.iv.18; 2 Macc. i. 27; Barn. ep. 7,
9; and other eccl. writ.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182;
{and reff. s. v€£oudevée, fin. ].*
éEovbevow, i. q. Eovdevew, gq. v.: Mk. ix. 12 Tdf.*
éfoucla, -as, 7, (fr. é€eare, e€dv, q. v.), fr. Eur., Xen.,
Plato down; Sept. for 7vn) and Chald. TO 2W; power.
1. power of choice, liberty of doing as one pleases;
leave or permission: 1 Co. ix. 12, 18; éyew eEovciar,
2 Th. iii. 9; with an inf. added indicating the thing to
be done, Jn. x. 18; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq.; Heb. xiii. 10 [WH
br. e&.]; foll. by an inf. with rov, 1 Co. ix. 6 (LT Tr
WH om. rod); with a gen. of the thing or the pers. with
regard to which one has the power to decide: Ro.
ix. 21 (where an explanatory infin. is added [B. 260
(224) ]); 1 Co. ix. 12; én 76 EvXov tis Cwys, permission
to use the tree of life, Rev. xxii. 14 [see emi, C. I. 2 e.];
e£ovciav éxew mepi Tov idiov OeAjparos (opp. to avayxny
éxew [cf. W. § 30, 3 N.5]), 1 Co. vii. 37; ev rH idia
efovaia, [appointed, see riOnut, 1 a. sub fin.] according to
his own choice, Actsi. 7; évrn of eEovcia bmnpxey, i. e. at
thy free disposal, Acts v. 4; used of liberty under the
gospel, as opp. to the yoke of the Mosaic law, 1 Co. viii.
9. 2. physical and mental power; the ability or
strength with which one is endued, which he either possesses
or exercises: Mt. ix. 8; Acts viii. 19; Rev. ix. 3, 19;
xiii. 2,4; xviii. 1; foll. by an inf. of the thing to be
done, Mk. iii. 15; Lk. xii.5; Jn.i.12; Rev.ix. 10; xi.
6; xiii. 5; foll. by rod with the inf. Lk. x. 19; avrn eorw
9 e€ovala tod okdrovs, this is the power that darkness
exerts, Lk. xxii. 53; movety e£ouciay to exert power, give
exhibitions of power, Rev. xiii. 12; év e€ovoia etva, to be
possessed of power and influence, Lk. iv. 32; also efov-
ciav éyew (both expressions refer to the ability and
weight which Jesus exhibited in his teaching) Mt. vii.
29; [Mk. i. 22]; kar’ eovaiav powerfully, Mk. i. 27; also
év e€ovgia, Lk. iv. 36. 3. the power of authority
(influence) and of right: Mt. xxi. 23; Mk. xi. 28; Lk.
xx. 2; spoken of the authority of an apostle, 2 Corx.' 333
xiii. 10; of the divine-authority granted to Jesus as
Messiah, with the inf. of the thing to be done, Mt. ix. 6;
Mk. ii. 10; Lk. v. 24; Jn. v. 27; év roia eLovoia; clothed
in what authority (i. e. thine own or God’s?), Mt. xxi.
23, 24, 27; Mk. xi. 28, 29, 38; Lk. xx. 2, 8; delegated
authority (Germ. Vollmacht, authorization): mapa twos,
with gen. of the pers. by whom the authority is given, or
received, Acts ix. 14; xxvi.10,12[RG]. 4. the power
of rule or government (the power of him whose will
225
é£ovaratw
and commands must be submitted to by others and
obeyed, [generally translated authority]); a. univ.: Mt.
xxviii. 18; Jude 25; Rev. xii. 10; xvii 13; NapBdvew
e€ovoiay os Baothed’s, Rev. xvii. 12; eiyt brd e£ovaiar, I
am under authority, Mt. viii. 9; with racodpevos added,
(Mt. viii. 9 LWHbr.]; Lk. vii. 8; éfovoia rwds, gen.
of the object, authority (to be exercised) over, as ray
mvevpatav Tov axabaprov, Mk. vi. 7; with dore éxBdddew
aura added, Mt. x. 1; éfovaiav mdons capkés, authority
over all mankind, Jn. xvii. 2, (dons capkds kupeiav, Bel
and the Drag. vs. 5); [gen. of the subject, rod Sarava,
Acts xxvi. 18]; émi twa, power over one, so as to be able
to subdue, drive out, destroy, Rev. vi. 8; ém ra Sacudua,
Lk. ix. 1; or to hold submissive to one’s will, Rev. xiii.
7; emi ras mAnyds, the power to inflict plagues and to
put an end to them, Rev. xvi. 9; él rév édvay, over the
heathen nations, Rev. ii. 26; émi twos, to destroy one,
Rev. xx. 6; éyew eEovciav emt tod mupéds, to preside, have
control, over fire, to hold it subject to his will, Rev. xiv.
18; emt tay vdaTar, xi. 6; emavw Tivds eEovaolay éxetv, to
be ruler over a thing, Lk. xix.17. _b. specifically, a.
of the power of judicial decision; égovciay zyew
with an inf. of the thing decided: oravpéaai and dmonbt-
cai twa, Jn. xix. 10; foll. by xara twos, the power of
deciding against one, ibid. 11; mapadodvai twa... 77
eEovoia tov nyendvos, Lk. xx. 20. 8. of authority to
manage domestic affairs: Mk. xiii. 34. c. me-
tonymically, a. a thing subject to authority or rule: Lk.
iv. 6; jurisdiction: é« ths eEovotas “Hpwdov éoriv, Lk.
xxii. 7 (1 Mace. vi. 11 [cf. Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 2; Is. xxxix.
2]). 8. one who possesses authority; (cf. the Lat. use
of honestates, dignitates, auctoritates [so the Eng. authori-
ties, dignities, etc.] in reference to persons ) ; aa. a
ruler, human magistrate, (Dion. Hal. 8, 44; 11, 32):
Kor xin. 1=3) plans: icy x. Us) ow xiii sits.
1. BB. the leading and more powerful among created be-
ings superior to man, spiritual potentates; used in the
plur. of a certain class of angels (see dpyn, dvvaps, Opdvos,
kuptdrns) : Col. i. 165 1 Pet. iii. 22, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom.
vol. ii. p. 226 sq.; [Bp. Lehtft. on Col. 1. c.]) ; with ey
trois émovpaviows added, Eph. iii. 10; maca efovcia, 1 Co.
xv. 24; Eph. i. 21; Col. ii. 10; used also of demons:
in the plur., Eph. vi. 12; Col. 11.15; collectively (cf. Lob..
ad Phryn. p. 469], 7 e£ovota rod dépos (see ayp), Eph. ii.
2; rov oxérovs, Col. i. 13 [al. refer this to 4 a. (or ¢. a.)
above (cf. Lk. xxii. 53 in 2), and regard oxdros as per-.
sonified; see oxéros, b. ]. d. a sign of the husband’s
authority over his wife, i. e. the veil with which propriety
required a woman to cover herself, 1 Co. xi. 10 (as Ba--
owreia is used by Diodorus 1, 47 for the sign of regal
power, i.e. acrown). [SyN. see dévayss, fin. On the inf.
after é& and é€. éyew cf. B. 260 (223 sq.).]*
eGovordtw; 1 fut. pass. efovoracOnoopar; (€fovaia) 3
i. q. eovaiav €xa, to have power or authority, use power :
[ev mreloor €&. moAd@v povapxior, Aristot. eth. Eud. 1, 5
p- 1216%, 2]; év dripous, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 44; revds, to
be master of any one, exercise authority over one, Lk. xxii
25; rod odparos, to be master of the body, i. e. to have
é£oy7) 2
full and entire authority over the body, to hold the body
subject to one’s will, 1 Co. vii. 4. Pass. foll. by tad rivos,
to be brought under the power of any one, 1 Co. vi. 12.
(Sept. several times in Neh. and Eccl., chiefly for wr
and vow.) (Comp. : xar-e£ovord¢w. | *
efox), -As, 9, (fr. e&éy@ to stand out, be prominent; cf.
bmepoxn) ; 1. prop. in Grk. writ. any prominence or
projection, as the peak or summit of a mountain (em
\eEoyn mérpas, Job xxxix. 28 Sept.); in medical writ. a
protuberance, swelling, wart, etc. 2. metaph. eminence,
excellence, superiority, (Cic. ad Att. 4, 15, 7 eEoyn in
‘nullo est, pecunia omnium dignitatem exaequat); dy
Spes of kar eEoxny dvres tHs médews, the prominent men
of the city, Acts xxv. 23.*
éE-umvitw: 1 aor. subjunc. é€urvicw; (Umvos); to wake
up, awaken out of sleep: [trans. adrév], Jn. xi. 11.
((Judg. xvi. 14]; 1 K. iii. 15; Job xiv. 12; Antonin. 6,
31; Plut. [de solert. anim. 29,4]; Test. xii. Patr. [Levi
§ 8; Jud. § 25, ete.]; the better Grks. said ddumvifa,
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 224; [W. § 2, 1d.].)*
tE-vivos, -ov, (Urvos), roused out of sleep: Acts xvi. 27.
(1 Esdr. iii. 3; [Joseph. antt. 11, 3, 2].) *
éfw, adv., (fr. €&, as ow and eice fr. és and és) ; al
without, out of doors; a. adverbially: Mk. xi.4; joined
with verbs: éorava, Mt. xii. 46,47 [WH txt. om. the
vs.]; Mk. iii. 31; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; Jn. xviii. 16; xx.
11 [Lehm. om.]; kaéjcOa, Mt. xxvi. 69; or with some
other verb declaring that the person without is doing
something, Mk. iii. 31. Preceded by the art. 6 ¢éa,
absol. he who is without, prop. of place; metaph., in
plur., those who do not belong to the Christian church (cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; Mey. on Mk. as below]:
1 Co. v. 12, 18; Col. iv. 5; 1 Th.iv.12; those who are
not of the number of the apostles, Mk. iv. 11[ (cf. Meyer)
WH umrg. &wdev, q. v-]. With a noun added: ai go
monews, foreign, Acts xxvi.11; 6 €&@ avOpwros, the outer
man, i. e. the body (see dvépwmos, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv. 16. b.
it takes the place of a prep. and is joined with the gen.,
without i. e. out of, outside of, [W. § 54,6]: Lk. xiii. 33;
ACHSEXXIO se lebs sits Teen. 2. after the verbs of
going, sending, placing, leading, drawing, etc.,
which commonly take prepositions or adverbs signifying
rest in a place rather than those expressive of motion
toward a place, ¢£ has the force of the Lat. foras (Germ.
hinaus, heraus), forth out, out of; a. adverbially, after
the verbs e&épyouat, Mt. xxvi. 75; Mk. xiv. 68; Lk. xxii.
62; Jn. xix.4,5; Rev. iii. 12; dy, Jn. xix. 4,13; Tpoaya,
Acts xvi. 30; e€dyo, Lk. xxiv.50[RGLbr.]; BdAXow and
exBaddo, Mt. v. 13; xiii. 48; Lk. viii. 54 RG; xiii. 28;
xiv. 35 (34); Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34, 35; xii. 31; xv. 6; Acts
ix. 40; 1 Jn. iv. 18; Rev. xi. 2 RG; Sedpo to, In. xi.
43; €€w moveiv twa, Acts v.34. _b. as a prep. with the
gen.: after dmedOciv, Acts iv. 15; dmooréddew, Mk. v.
10; exBadAew, Mk. xii. 8; Lk. iv. 29; xx. 15; Acts vii.
58; eێpyecOa, Mt. xxi. 17; Acts xvi. 18; Heb. xiii. 13;
éxmopever Oat, Mk. xi. 19; e€ayew, Mk. viii. 23 [RGLTr
La s :
mrg.|; ovpew ted, Acts xiv. 19; &dxew red, Acts xxi. 30.
6 érrayyenia
dvobev, méppwbev), from without, outward, [cf. W. 472
(440)]; 1. adverbially: (outwardly), Mt. xxiii. 27 sq.;
Mk. vii. 18; 2 Co. vii. 5; 1d @&aOev, the outside, the exte-
rior, Mt. xxiii. 25; Lk. xi. 39 sq.; éxBaddew eEwber (for
RG éw), Rev. xi. 2? L T Tr WH; of caer for oi Ea,
those who do not belong to the Christian church, 1 Tim.
iii. 7; cf. Mk. iv. 11 WH mrg. and s. v. ¢w, 1 a.]; 6 bev
xoapos the outward adorning, 1 Pet.ili.3. 2. as a prep-
osition with the gen. [cf. W. § 54, 6]: Mk. vii. 15; Rev.
xi. 2* (Rees GLT Tr WH; xiv. 20 where Rec. é£o].*
e£-w0éw, -4: 1 aor. €woa [so accented by G Ted. 7 Tr,
but L WH e&6ca] and in Tdf. éééooa [ WH. App. p. 162]
(cf. W. p. 90 (86); [B. 69 (61); Steph. Thesaur. and
Veitch s. v. &6é]); to thrust out; expel from one’s abode:
Acts vii. 45, (Thue., Xen., al.). to propel, drive: ré
mAotov eis aiyaddv, Acts xxvii. 39 [WH txt. exodcac;
see éxowfo], (the same use in Thuc., Xen., al.).*
eEdrepos, -€pa, -epov, (a comparative fr. €£w, cf. €oarepos,
av@TEpos, KaTwTEpos), OUlEr: TO oKdTOS TO eEwTepov, the
darkness outside the limits of the lighted palace (to
which the Messiah’s kingdom is here likened), Mt. viii.
£2; xxiljl3 ; xxv 30.4 [i(Septs; Strabo, ala) =
Zouxa, see EIKQ.
€optatw; (€optn); to keep a feast-day, celebrate a fes-
tival: 1 Co. v. 8, on which pass. see d¢upos. (Sept. for
jan; Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plato, al.; dprd¢w, Hat.) *
€oprt, -7s, 7, Sept. for 1; Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down;
in Hadt. éprn; a feast-day, festival: Lk. ii. 42; Jn. v. 1;
vi. 4; vii. 2,37; Col. ii. 16; # €opry rod macya: LK. ii.
41 [W. 215 (202); B. 186 (161)]; Jn. xiii. 1; ig. 4
€optTn Tav atipov, Lk. xxii.1; év rH éoprn, during the
feast, Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2; Jn. iv. 45; vii. 11; xii.
20; elva ev Ti éoptn, to be engaged in celebrating the
feast, Jn. ii. 23, cf. Baumg.-Crusius and Meyer ad loc.;
eis THY éoprny, for the feast, Jn. xiii. 29; dvaBaivew (to
Jerusalem) es rv éoptyy, Jn. vii. 8, 10; épyeaOat eis thy
éoptny, Jn. iv. 45; xi. 56; xii. 12; rhs éoprns pecovons,
in the midst of the feast, Jn. vii. 14; xara €oprny, at
every feast [see card, II. 3a. 8.], Mt. xxvii. 15; Mk. xv.
6; Lk. xxiii. 17 [Rec.]; rhv éopryy roreiv to keep, cele-
brate, the feast, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; xara 7d &0s ris
éoptjs, after the custom of the feast, Lk. ii. 42.*
én-ayyeAla, -as, 7), (€mayyeAA@) ; 1L. announcement :
1 Jn. i. 5 (Ree., where dyyedia was long since restored) ;
kar’ éerayyeNay Cais tis év XptotS "Inood, to proclaim life
in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1 [W. 402 (376);
cf. xard, II. fin. But others give émayy. here as else-
where the sense of promise, cf. 2 below]. 2. promise;
a. the act of promising, a promise given or to be given:
mpoadéxerOat tiv amd Twos émayyeAiav (assent; the ref-
erence is to a promise to surrender Pau! to the power
and sentence of the Jews), Acts xxiii. 21; [add, emayye-
Nas 6 Aéyos obros, Ro. ix. 9]. It is used also of the
divine promises of blessing, esp. of the benefits of salva-
tion by Christ, [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 14]: Acts vii.
17; Ro. iv. 14, 16; [plur. Ro. ix. 4]; Gal. iii. 17 sq. 21;
iv. 23; Heb. xi. 17; 2 Pet. iii. 9 (on which see Bpadive. %) ;
€fwev, adv., (fr.€£w, opp. to grwber fr. Zow; cf. | Heb. viii. 6; xi. 9; foll. by the inf. Heb. iv. 1; yiverai
érrayyéArw
tun, Ro. iv. 13; mpds rwa, Acts xiii. 32; xxvi. 6; éppndn
twi, Gal. iii. 16; eori tun, belongs to one, Acts ii. 39;
emayyeANeo Oa thy em. 1 Jn. ii. 25; exew emayyeNias, to
have received, Heb. vii. 6; 2 Co. vii. 1, [cf. W. 177
(166) ]; to have linked to it, 1 Tim. iv. 8; eéva: év emayye-
hig, joined with a promise [al. al.; cf. W. 391 (366)],
Eph. vi. 2; » yi rhs émayyeXias, the promised land, Heb.
xl. 9; ra réxva ths émayyehias, born in accordance with
the promise, Ro. ix. 8; Gal. iv. 28; 7d mvedpa ris €mray-
yeXlas 76 dyov, the promised Spirit, Eph. i.13; ai ca67-
kat THS éemayyeXias, covenants to which was united the
promise (of salvation through the Messiah), Eph. ii. 12;
1), €rayyeXia Tov Oeov, given by God, Ro. iv. 20; in the
plur. 2 Co. i. 20; ai émayyeAlae trav marépwy, the promises
made to the fathers, Ro. xv. 8; with the gen. of the
object, tas ¢wjs, 1 Tim. iv. 8; trys mapovcias aitod, 2
Pet. ili. 4; kar éerayyediay according to promise, Acts
xili. 23; Gal. ili. 29; 80 emayyeXias, Gal. iii.18. b. by
meton. a@ promised good or blessing (cf. éAmis, sub fin.) :
Gal. iii. 22; Eph. iii. 6 [yet here cf. Mey. or Ellic.];
dmooreh\ew thy émayyeAiavy Tod matpos pov, the blessing
promised by my Father, Lk. xxiv. 49; mepiévev, Acts
1.4; kopigerOa tHv emayyediav, Heb. x. 36; xi. [13 T Tr
WH, mpocdexecOar Li], 39; AapBavew tas emayyedias,
Heb. xi. 13 [RG]; emrvyxavew émayyedtay, ib. vs. 33;
KAnpovopeiv tas érayyeNias, Heb. vi. 12; emirvyydvery ris
emayyeXias, ib. 15; cAnpovomor ths emayyeXlas, Vs. 17 — (to
reconcile Heb. vi. 12, 15, 17 with xi. 13, 39, which at
first sight seem to be in conflict, we must hold, in ac-
cordance with xii. 22-24, that the O. T. saints, after the
expiatory sacrifice offered at length to God by Christ,
were made partakers of the heavenly blessings before
Christ’s return from heaven; [al. explain the appar-
ent contradiction by the difference between the initial
and the consummate reception of the promise; see
the Comm. ad 1.]); with the epexeget. gen. AaBeiy thy
emayyeXiay Tod dyiov mvevparos, the promised blessing,
which is the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 33; Gal. iii. 14, [cf.
W. § 34, 3 a. fin.]; rv émayyeAiav THs aiwviov KAnpovo-
plas, Heb. ix. 15. ([Dem. 519,8; Aristot. eth. Nic. 10,
1 p. 1164*, 29]; Polyb. 1, 43, 6, and often; Diod. 1, 5;
Joseph. antt. 3, 5,1; 5, 8,11; 1 Mace. x. 15.) *
ér-ayyéAAw : [pres. mid. émayyéAAopar]; pf. pass. and
mid. émpyyeApar; 1 aor. mid. émnyyeAdunv; from Hom.
down ; 1. to announce. 2. to promise: pass. @
énjyyeAtat, to whom the promise hath been made, Gal.
iii. 19. Mid. to announce concerning one’s self; i. e.
1. to announce that one is about to do or to furnish some-
thing, i. e. to promise (of one’s own accord), to engage
(voluntarily) : 6 érayyetAduevos, Heb. x. 23 ; xi. 11; emny-
yeAra, he hath promised, foll. by \éyov, Heb. xii. 26;
rwi, to give a promise to one, Heb. vi. 13; ri, osivee2 lis
Tit. i. 2; rové rs, Jas.i. 12; ii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 19; emayyediay,
to give a promise, 1 Jn. ii. 25 (Esth. iv. 7; [cf. W. 225
(211); B. 148 (129)]); foll. by the inf. [cf. W. § 44, 7c¢.]:
Mk. xiv. 11; Acts vii. 5. 2. to profess ; Ti, e.g. an art,
to profess one’s self skilled in it (rjv dpernv, Xen. mem.
1, 2, 7; mh otparidy, Hell. 3, 4, 3; codiay, Diog. Laért.
227
eTralpw
prooem. 12; cwdppoctvny, Clem. Al. paedag. 3, 4 p. 299,
27 ed. Klotz; [cef. L. and S. s.v. 5]): OeocéBecav, 1 Tim.
li. 10; yudou, vi. 21. [Comp. mpo-erayyédro. ] *
ém-GyyeApa,, -ros, TO, (emayyéAAw), a promise: 2 Pet. i.
4; iii. 13. (Dem., Isoc., al.) *
ér-dyo, [pres. ptep. émayar]; 1 aor. ptcp. émdfas (W.
p- 82 (78); [Veitch s. v. @yw]); 2 aor. inf. érayayeiv; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for #917; to lead or bring upon:
Twi TL, to bring a thing on one, i. e. to cause something to
befall one, usually something evil, 2 Pet. ii. 1, 5, (wjpa,
Hesiod. opp. 240; drav, Soph. Ajax 1189; yipas vdcous
erdyet, Plat. Tim. 33 a.; éavrots SovAeiav, Dem. p. 424, 9;
dewd, Palaeph. 6, 7; kaxd, Bar. iv. 29; dpérpnrov vdap, 3
Mace. ii. 4, and in other exx.; in the Sept. emi rua Tu, as
kaka, Jer. Vi. 19; xi. 11, etc.; mAnynv, Ex. xi. 1; also in a
good sense, as dyad, Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 42; rwi edppo-
avy, Bar. iv. 29). émayew 76 aipa twos emi twa, to bring
the blood of one upon any one, i. e. lay upon one the guilt
of, make him answerable for, the violent death inflicted
on another: Acts v. 28, (like émayew duaprtiay éri twa,
Gen. xx. 9; Ex. xxxii. 21, 34; dyaprias rarépwv emi téxva,
gecesi ye
ér-ayovitopat; to contend: rwi, for a thing, Jude 3.
(r@ *Avvi8a, against Hannibal, Plut. Fab. 23, 2; rais
vikats, added a new contest to his victories, id. Cim. 13,
4; by others in diff. senses.) *
érr-a0pottw: [ pres. pass. ptcp. émabpor(ouevos |;"to gather
together (to others already present): pass. in Lk. xi. 29.
(Plut. Anton. 44, 1.) *
*Eratveros [so W. § 6, 11. (cf. Chandler § 325); ’Ema:-
veros Recs T; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Lipsius, Gram.
Unters. p. 80 sq.; Roehl, Inscrr. index iii.], (émawéo),
-ov, 6, Epenetus, the name of a Christian mentioned in
Ro. xvi. 5.*
émr-aivéw, -6; fut. emawvécw (1 Co. xi. 22, for the more
com. éraweoopat, cf. W. 86 (82); [B. 53 (46)]; L txt. Tr
mre. ema); 1 aor.ényvera; (€mravos) ; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for bbn and naw; to approve, to praise, (with the
éni cf. Germ. be- in beloben [Passow s. v. emi, IV. C. 3
cc.]): red, Ro. xv. 11; 1 Co. xi. 22; teva, foll. by dre [cf.
W. § 30, 9 b.], Lk. xvi. 8; 1 Co. xi. 2; absol., foll. by
Ort, 1 Co. xi. 17.*
éar-auvos, -ov, 6, (eri and aivos [as it were, a tale for an-
other; cf. Bitm. Lexil. § 83, 4; Schmidt ch. 155]) ; ap-
probation, commendation, praise: Phil. iv. 8; & twos,
bestowed by one, Ro. ii. 29; €mawvov €yew &x Twos, gen.
of pers., Ro. xiii. 3; 6 émawos yernoerar éExdor@ amd Tov
cov, 1 Co. iv. 5; with gen. of the pers. to whom the
praise is given, Ro. ii. 29; 2 Co. vill. 18; els &rawov, to
the obtaining of praise, 1 Pet.i. 7; ets émauvdy ruvos, that
a pers. or thing may be praised, Eph. i. 6,14; Phil. i.11;
[mépmecOar eis em. Twos, 1 Pet. ii. 14]; etvae eis émawwdv
twos to be a praise to a pers. or thing, Eph. i. 12.*
éx-alpw; 1 aor. émjpa, ptep. édpas, impv. 2 pers. plur.
émdpare, inf. émapat ; pf. émnpxa (Jn. xiii. 18 Tdf.); [Pass.
and Mid., pres. éraipopat]; 1 aor. pass. émnpOnv; (on the
om. of iota subscr. see alp@ init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept,
chiefly for Nw), also for DY}; to lift up, raise up, raise
id
éTraLa x UVO Mal
on high: rov dprépova, to hoist up, Acts xxvii. 40 (ra ioria,
Plut. mor. p. 870 [de Herod. malign. § 39]); ras xetpas,
in offering prayer, 1 Tim. ii. 8 (Neh. viii. 6; Ps. cxxxiii.
(exxxiv.) 2); in blessing, Lk. xxiv. 50 [cf. W. § 65, 4c.]
(Lev. ix. 22 [yet here éédpas]; Sir. 1. 20) ; ras kedbadds,
of the timid and sorrowful recovering spirit, Lk. xxi.
28 (so adyéva, Philo de prof. § 20); rods 6pOadpors, to
look up, Mt. xvii. 8; Lk. xvi. 23; Jn. iv. 35; vi. 5; eis
twa, Lk. vi. 20; eis rov odpavdv, Lk. xviii. 13; Jn. xvii.
1; 7Hv horny, Lk. xi. 27; Acts ii. 14; pai ING doa, 2p
(Dem. 449, 13; Sept. Judg. ii. 4; ix. 7; 2S. xili. 36);
riy mrépvav eri tia, to lift the heel against one (see
mrépva), Jn. xiii. 18. Pass. émnpOy, was taken up (of
Christ, taken up into heaven), Acts i. 9; reflex. and
metaph. to be lifted up with pride, to exalt one’s self: 2
Co. xi. 20 (Jer. xiii. 15; Ps. xlvi. (xlvii.) 10; Sir. xi. 4;
XXxxv. (xxxii.) 1; 1 Mace. i. 3; ii. 63; Arstph. nub. 810;
Thue. 4, 18; Aeschin. 87, 24; with dat. of the thing of
which one is proud, Prov. iii. 5; Zeph. i. 11; Hat. 9,
49; Thue. 1, 120; Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 24); —on 2 Co. x.
5 see UWonua.*
ér-arcxvvopat ; fut. émaryvvOnoopat; 1 aor. ernaxvvOny,
and with neglect of augm. énaicyvvnv (2 Tim.i.16 LT
Tr WH; cf.[ WH. App. p. 161]; B. 34 (380); [W. § 12
fin.]); fr. Aeschyl. down; to be ashamed (émi on account
of [cf. Is. i. 29 Alex. ; Ellic. on 2 Tim. i. 8]; see aioyivw) :
absol. 2 Tim. i. 12; twa [on the accus. cf. W. § 32, 1 b. a.;
B. 192 (166) ], of a person, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26 ; ri, of
a thing, Ro. i. 16; 2 Tim. i. 8,16; émi ru, dat. of a thing,
Ro. vi. 21; foll. by the inf. Heb. ii. 11; with the ace. of
a pers. and the inf. of a thing, Heb. xi. 16. (Twice in
the Sept.: Is. i. 29 [Alex. ]; Job xxxiv. 19.) *
émr-aiTew, -@; 1. to ask besides, ask for more: Hom.
Tl. 23, 593. 2. to ask again and again, importunately :
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1416; to beg, to ask alms: Lk. xvi. 3;
[xviii. 35 LT Tr WH]; (Ps. eviii. (cix.) 10; Sir. xl. 28;
Soph. Oed. Col. 1364).*
érr-axoovdéw, -; 1 aor. émnxoAovdnaa ; to follow (close)
upon, follow after; in the N. T. only metaph. rots tyveoi
twos, to tread in one’s footsteps, i. e. to imitate his ex-
ample, 1 Pet. ii. 21; with the dat. of a pers. 1 Tim. v.
24 (opp. to mpodya, to go before; the meaning is, ‘ the
sins of some men are manifest now, even before they are
called to account, but the misdeeds of others are exposed
when finally judgment is held’; cf. Huther [or Ellic.]
ad loc.) ; épy dyad6, to be devoted to good works, 1 Tim.
v. 10; used, with the dat. of the pers. to be mentally sup-
plied, of the miracles accompanying the preaching of
Christ’s ministers, Mk. xvi. 20. (Arstph., Thuc., Xen.,
Plato, sqq.; occasionally in Sept.) *
ér-akovw: 1 aor. empxovoa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. often
for MIy and pow ; 1. to give ear to, listen to; to per-
cewe by the ear. 2. to listen toi. e. hear with favor,
grant one’s prayer, (Aeschyl. choéph. 725; rév edydv,
Leian. Tim. 34): rwvds, to hearken to one, 2 Co. vi. 2 fr.
Ts. xlix. 8; often so in Sept.*
ér-akpodopat, -Guar: 3 pers. plur. impf. émnxpodvro ; to
listen to: with the gen. of a pers. Acts xvi. 25. (Plat.
228
SESE
ETTAV®
comic. in Bekk. anecd. p. 360; Lcian. Icarom. 1; Test.
xii. Patr. p. 710, test. Jos. § 8.) *
én-dy, conj. (fr. éeé and dy), after, when: with the sub-
june. pres. Lk. xi. 34; with the subjune. aor., answering
to the Lat. fut. exact. (fut. perf.), Mt. ii. 8; Lk. xi. 22.
Cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2, p. 547.*
érdvaykes, (dvdykn, [hence lit. on compulsion]), neces-
sarily: mAjv tev éravaykes Tovtov, besides these things
which are necessarily imposed, Acts xv. 28 [B. 27 (24)].
(Hdt., Andoe., Plato, Dem., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut.,
Aelian, Epict.) *
ér-av-d4yw; 2 aor. inf. éravayayeiv, impy. emavayaye,
[ptep. émavayayov, Mt. xxi. 18 TWHtxt.Trmrg.]; 1.
lit. to lead up upon, sc. rd motor, a ship upon the deep,
i.e. to put out, Lk. v. 3 (Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 28; 2 Mace.
xii. 4) ; with e/g 76 Babos added, into the deep, ibid. 4.
2. to lead back; intrans. to return [cf. B. 144 (126)]:
Mt. xxi. 18; (2 Mace. ix. 21; Xen. Cyr. 4, 1,3; Polyb.,
Diod., Joseph., Hdian., al.).*
érr-ava-pipvyoKw ; to recall to mind again: twa, remind-
ing one, Ro. xv. 15. (Rare; Plato, legg. 3 p. 688 a.;
Dem. 74, (7) 9; [Aristot.].) *
érr-ava-Trave : 1. to cause to rest upon anything:
Sept. in Judg. xvi. 26 ace. to cod. Alex.; Greg. Nyss.
2. Mid., [pres. emavaravopar]; fut. emavaravcopa, and
(Lk. x. 6 T WH after codd. 8B) éravarancopa (see
dvaravw) ; to rest upon anything: tui, metaph. 76 vdpa,
to lean upon, trust to, Ro. ii. 17 (Mie. iii. 11; 1 Mace. viii.
12). to settle upon, fix its abode upon ; émt twa, with the
included idea of antecedent motion towards (see eis, C. 2
p- 186°) : 4 eipnyn én’ adror i. e. shall rest, remain, upon
him or it, Lk. x. 6 (76 mvedpa emi twa, Num. xi. 25; 2 K.
ii. 15; emi run, Num. xi. 26 var.).*
ém-av-€pxopat; 2 aor. émavnAOov; to return, come back
again: Lk. x. 35; xix. 15. (Hadt.; freq. in Attic writ.)*
érr-av-iornpt: fut. mid. émavacrnoopat; to cause to rise
up against, to raise up against; Mid. to rise up against
(Hat., Arstph., Thue., Polyb., al.): émié riva, Mt. x. 21;
Mk. xiii. 12, as in Deut. xix. 11; xxii. 26; Mic. vii. 6.*
érr-av-dpbwors, -ews, 7, (€mavopOdw), restoration to an up-
right or a right state; correction, improvement, (in Grk.
writ. fr. Dem. down): of life and character, 2 Tim. iii.
16 [cf. tov Oedv .. . xpdvov ye mpds eravdpbwow (adrois)
mpoorfavey, Plut. de sera num. vind. 6]; with rod Biou
added, Polyb. 1, 35,1; Epict. diss. 3, 21,15; geavrod,
id. ench. 51,1; [Oc dé ra mpds dvOpomiver éravdpbwow
n0av, Philo de ebriet. § 22; ef. de confus. linge. § 36 fin.];
(cf. émavopOodv Kali eis perdvovav amdyewv, Joseph. antt. 4,
C10) *
ém-dvw, adv., (emi and dvw [cf. W. 102 (97); B. 319
(273)]), Hdt. et sqq.; often in the Sept.; above; ile
adverbially, a. of place: Lk. xi. 44; b. of number;
beyond, more than: mpaOjvat émava tprakociov Snvapiav,
sold for more than three hundred denaries, Mk. xiv. 5;
Spon erdvw mwevtaxogiots adedois, by more than five hun-
dred brethren, 1 Co. xv. 6; cf. W. § 37, 5; [B. 168
(146) ]. 2. as a preposition it is joined with the gen.
CW. § 54,6], a. of place: Mt. ii. 9; v.14; xxi. 7 RG;
émdpatos
xxiii. 18, 20, [22]; xxvii. 37; xxviii. 2; Lk. iv. 39; [x.
19]; Rev. vi. 8 [WH br. the gen.]; xx. 3, [11 Tr txt.].
b. of dignity and power: é£ovalay éyew édvo twds, Lk.
xix. 17, [19]; émdvo ravrev éori, Jn. iii. 31*, [31° (but
here GT WH mrg. om. the cl.)}.*
ér-tparos, -ov, (émapdoua: [to call down curses upon]),
accursed: Jn. vii. 49 LTTrWH. (Thuc., Plato, Aes-
chin., Dio Cass., al.) *
ér-apkéw, -3; 1 aor. [émjpxeoa], subjunc. énapxéco;
properly, to avail or be strong enough for . . . (see dpxéw) ;
hence a. to ward off or drive away, ri tm, a thing for
another’s advantage i. q. a thing from any one (Hom.),
to. defend. b. to aid, give assistance, relieve, (Hdt.,
Aeschyl, al.) : rwi, 1 Tim. v. 10; Mid. to give aid from
one’s own resources, 1 Tim. v.16 ace. to the reading
énapxeia6o (Ltxt.T Tr WH mrg.) for éxapxeiro (RG L
mrg. WH txt.); (xara Sivayw ddAnAos éemapkeiv, Xen.
mem. 2, 7, 1).*
érrapxeos, -ov, belonging to an émapxos or prefect; 7
éerapxews sc. €Lovcia, i. q. 4 émapyxia (see the foll. word),
a prefecture, province: Acts xxv.1TWHmrg. So 7
2xapxvos, Euseb. h. e. 2, 10, 3 (with the var. érapxetov) ;
2, 26, 2; 3, 33, 3; de mart. Pal. 8,1; 13, 117
érapxta [-yeia T WH (see et, c)], -as, 4, (fr. éxapyos
i.e. 6 és dpyq Sv the one in command, prefect, goy-
ernor), prefecture; i. e. 1. the office of &rapxos or
prefect. 2. the region subject to a prefect; a province
of the Roman empire, either a larger province, or an ap-
pendage to a larger province, as Palestine was to that
of Syria [cf. Schiirer, Zeitgesch. p. 144 sqq.]: Acts xxiii.
34; xxv. 1 [see the preced. word]; (Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Dio Cass.). Cf. Krebs, Observv. ete. p. 256 sqq.; Fischer,
De vitiis Lexx. N. T. p. 432 sqq.; [BB.DD. (esp. Kitto)
s. v. Province].*
éx-avhis, -ews, 7, (ext and addus tent, place to pass the
night in; hence a country-house, cottage, cabin, fold),
a farm; a dwelling, (A. V. habitation]: Acts i. 20 fr. Ps.
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 26. (Diod., Plut.,al.; also a camp, military
quarters, Plato, Polyb.) *
én-aiprov, adv. of time, i. q. éx’ atfpuov, on the morrow;
in the N. T. 79 éatpwy, sc. nuepa, the next day, on the
morrow: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk. xi. 12; Jn.i. 29; Acts x.
9, ete.; Sept. for N99.
éx-avtoddpe, see aitépupos, p- 87°.
*"Emadpas, -a [B. 20 (17 sq.) ], 6, Epaphras, a Christian
man mentioned in Col. i. 7; iv. 12; Philem. 23.
conjecture of some that the name is contracted from
"Emahpodiros (q. v. [cf. W. 103 (97)]) and hence that
these two names belong to one and the same man, is not
probable; [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epaphras; Bp. Lghtft.
Com. on Phil. p. 61 note *]. The name is com. in
inscriptions.*
éx-adbpite; to foam up (Mosch. 5,5); to cast out as
foam, foam out: ri, Jude 13 calls the godless and grace-
less set of whom he speaks xipata émappi{ovra tas éavtov
alcxivas, i. e. (dropping the figure) impelled by their
restless passions, they unblushingly exhibit, in word and
deed, their base and abandoned spirit; cf. Is. lvii. 20.*
229
The |
eTELTr ep
| "Enadpdéiros, -ov, 6, (fr. "Appodiry, prop. ‘charming 4}
| Epaphroditus, an associate with Paul in the ministry :
Phil. ii. 25; iv. 18. See ’Emadpis above.*
én-eyeipw: 1 aor. émnyetpa; to raise or excite against:
Tt emt twa, Acts xiii. 50 (diwypdv) ; xard twos, to stir up
against one: ras uyds ... cata tev ddedpar, Acts xiv. 2.*
émel, (fr. temporal émi and i, lit. thereupon when; Cur-
tius, Erlaut. ete. p. 182; cf. Etym. Magn. 356, 7], conjunc-
tion, (Lat. cum), when, since, [cf. W.§ 53,1]; used 1.
of time, after; so once in the N. T.: Lk. vii. 1 (where
LT Tr txt. WH txt. éresd7). 2. of cause, etc., since,
! seeing that, because: Mt. xviii. 32; [xxi. 46 T Tr WH];
xxvil. 6; Mk. xv. 42; Lk.i. 34; Jn. xiii. 29; xix. 31;
| 1 Co. xiv. 12; 2Co. xi. 18; xiii. 3; Heb. vy. 2,11; vi. 13;
| ix. 17; xi 11; éwel ody since then, Heb. ii. 14; iv. 6.
Agreeably to a very common abbreviation of speech,
we must often supply in thought between éei and the
proposition depending upon it some such phrase as if it
is (or were) otherwise; so that the particle, although
retaining the force of since, is yet to be rendered other-
wise, else, or for then, (Germ. sonst); so in Ro. xi. 6, 22;
Heb. ix. 26; émet dpa, 1 Co. v. 10; vii. 14, [cf. W. § 53,
| 8 a.]; émei alone before a question [cf. W. 480 (447);
| B. 233 (200)]: Ro. iii. 6; 1 Co. xiv. 16; xv. 29; Heb. x.
| 2; (4 Macc. i. 33; ii. 7,19; vi. 34 (35); vii. 21; viii. 8).
Cf. Matthiae § 618; [B. § 149, 5].*
| €ret-84, conjunction, (fr. éwei and 67), Lat. cum jam,
when now, since now, (cf. W. 434 (404), 448 (417); Ellic.
on Phil. ii. 26]; 1. of time; when now, after that;
so once in the N. T.: Lk. vii. 1 LT Trtxt. WH txt. es
of cause; since, seeing that, forasmuch as: Mt. xxi. 46
[RGL]; Lk. xi. 6; Acts xiii. 46; xiv. 12; xv. 24; 1Co.
| i. 21, 22; xiv. 16; xv. 21; [2 Co. v. 4 Rec.**]; Phil. ii. 26.*
érre-Of-mrep [érerdn wep Lchm.], conjunction, (fr. ézei,
én and wép), seeing that, forasmuch as; Itala and Vulg.
quoniam quidem, since now, [cf. W. 448 (417)]: Lk.i-1.
(Aristot. phys. 8, 5 [p. 256®, 25]; Dion. Hal. 2, 72; Philo
ad Gai. § 25, and Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *
én<iBov [Tdf. 7 épeidov]; impv. émde (Lchm. édide, cf.
W.§5,1d.14; B. 7; [reff. s. v. dpeiéov]; besides see
| eid, I.); to look upon, to regard: foll. by a telic inf.,
ereibev aedeiv 70 dverdds pou ([R. V. looked upon me to
take away etc.], Germ. hat hergeblickt), Lk. i. 25; émi 1,
to look upon (for the purpose of punishing, cf. Lat. ani-
madvertere), Acts iv. 29.*
em-cipr; (ri, and eis to go); to come upon, approach ;
| of time, to come on, be at hand; ptcp. émtwy, -ovea, -dv,
next, following: rH énwvton, sc. Népg, on the following
day, Acts xvi. 11; xx. 15; xxi. 18, (Polyb. 2, 25, 11;
| 5, 13, 10; Joseph. antt. 3, 1,6; [Prov. xxvii. 1]; etc.);
with #uépa added (as in the earlier writ. fr. Hdt. down),
Acts vii. 26; 1 émcoton vuxri, Acts xxiii. 11. Cf. Lob.
| ad Phryn. p. 464.7
| éel-arep, conjunction, (nei, mép), since indeed, since at
all events; [it introduces a “known and unquestioned
certainty ”]: Ro. iii. 30 RG (but L Tr ef rep, TWH
| eimep). Cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 784; [Baumlein p. 204;
| W. 448 (417). Fr. the Tragg. down. }*
erretaayoyn
ér-eio-aywyh, -As, 9, @ bringing in besides or in addition
to what is or has been brought in: Kpeitrovos €Aridos, Heb.
vii. 19. (Tn Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 2 used of the introduction
of a new wife in place of one repudiated; érépwy inrpar,
Hippocr. p. 27 [vol. i. p. 81 ed. Kithn]; mpoc@rar, of
characters in a play, Dion. Hal. scr. cens. 2, 10; in the
plur. of places for letting in the enemy, Thue. 8, 92.) *
émr-er-€pxopar: fut. emercedevoopat ; 1. to come in
besides or to those who are already within; to enter after-
wards, (Hdt., Thuce., Plato, al.). 2. to come in upon,
come upon by entering; to enter against: émi twa, ace. of
pers., Lk. xxi. 35 LT Tr txt. WH; with simple dat. of
pers. 1 Mace. xvi. 16.*
émevra, adv., (emi, etra), thereupon, thereafter, then,
afterwards; used a. of time: Mk. vii. 5 RG; Lk.
xvi. 7; Gal. i. 21; Jas. iv. 14; pera rovro is added re-
dundantly in Jn. xi. 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc.; W. § 65, 2;
[B. 397 (840) ]); a more definite specification of time is
added epexegetically, pera érn rpia, Gal. i. 18; dua de
xatecodpey érov, Gal. ii. 1. b. in enumerations it is
used a. of time and order: mpéorov... éxera, 1 Co.
xv. 46; 1 Th. iv. 17; apdrepov .. . €metra, Heb. vii. 27;
drapxy... érera, 1 Co. xv. 23; etra [but T Tr mrg. WH
mre. éretta] ... émerra, 1 Co. xv. 5, 63 émerra.. . erecta,
ib. 7 Lmrg. T Tr mrg. WH mrg. 8. of order alone:
mparov ... emetra, Heb. vil. 23 rpirov...
ta (RG eira), 1 Co. xii. 28.*
ém-€xeva, (i. q. em exeiva sc. pepn [cf. W. §6, 11. fin.]),
adv., beyond: with the gen., BaBvAa@vos, Acts vii. 43.
(Often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down both with and without
the gen.; in the Sept. Am. v. 27; Gen. xxxy. 16; Jer.
Xie gs)
én-ex-telvo: [pres. mid. ptep. émexrewduevos]; to
stretch out to or towards; Mid. to stretch (one’s self) for-
ward to: with dat. of thing indicating the direction [W.
§ 52,4, 7], Phil. iii. 13 (14), (see ¢umpoodev, 1 fin.).*
érevdurns, -ov, 6, (erevdvyw or emevdva, q. v., [ef. W. 25 ;
94 (90) ]), an upper garment, (Tertull. superindumentum) :
Jn. xxi. 7, where it seems to denote a kind of linen blouse
or frock which fishermen used to wear at their work.
(Soph. frag. 391 Dind. [(248 Ahrens) ; Poll. 7,45 p. 717];
Sept. twice [thrice] for yn, 1 S. xviii. 4 [Alex.]; 2S.
xiii. 18; [add Lev. viii. 7 Alex.].) *
éx-ev-S0w: 1 aor. mid. inf. émevducacbar; ‘0 put on over
[A.V. to be clothed upon}: 2 Co. v. 2,4. (Plut. Pelop.
11; actively, Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 12.) *
én-€pxopar; fut. emehevoouar; 2 aor. émfdOov (3 pers.
plur. ém7AGav, Acts xiv. 19 L T Tr WH); Sept. chiefly
for 83; 1. to come to, to arrive; a. univ., foll. by
dro with a gen. of place, Acts xiv. 19. b. of time; to
come on, be at hand, be future: év rots aidot tois émepxo-
pevots, Eph. ii. 7, (Is. xli. 4, 22, 23; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down); of that which time will bring, to impend: 1) Ta-
Aarrwpia 7H é€mepxopern, Jas. v.13; rwi, Lk. xxi. 26, (Is.
Ixiii. 4; also of things favorable, 4 eddoyia, Sir. iii. 8).
2. to come upon, overtake, one; so even in Hom., as of
steep, twa, Od. 4, 793; 10, 31; twi, 12, 311; of disease,
11, 200; emi tia, a. of calamities: Lk. xxi. 35 RG:
a x
E€7TELTA o « « ETTEL-
230
ETEPWTN LA
Acts viii. 24; xiii. 40 [L T Tr txt. WH om. Tr mrg. br.
ed’ b.], (Gen. xlii. 21; Mic. iii, 11; Zeph. ii. 2; 2 Ch. xx.
9; Jer. v. 12 [here #&er]). b. of the Holy Spirit, de
scending and operating in one: Lk. i. 35; Actsi. 8. c.
of an enemy attacking one: émehO@v wxnon adrév, Lk. xi.
22; (Hom. Il. 12, 186; 1 S. xxx. 23; w. dat. of pers.
Hdian. 1, 8, 12 [6 Bekk.]).*
ér-epwrdw, -@; impf. émnpwrar; fut. érepwtnow; 1 aor.
érnpotnoa; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. érepwrnbeis ; Sept. mostly
for ON, sometimes for ia 1. (0 accost one with an
inquiry, pul a question to, inquire of, ask, interrogate,
[émi directive, uniformly in the N.T.; Mey. on Mk.
xi. 29 (cf. ért, D. 2)]: revd, Mk. ix. 32; xii 34; Mt. xxii.
46; Lk. ii. 46; 1 Co. xiv. 35; Jn. xviii. 21 RG; rwa re,
ask one any thing, Mk. vii. 17 L T Tr WH; xi. 29; Lk.
xx. 403 teva wept twos, one about a thing, Mk. vii. 17 RG;
(Lk. ix. 45 Lehm.], (Hdt. 1, 832; Dem. 1072, 12): foll.
by Aéyor with the words used by the questioner, Mt. xii.
10; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11; xii. 18; Lk. iii.10, 14; xx. 27;
xxiii. 3 [R GL], and often in the Synoptic Gospels; foll.
by ei, whether, Mk. viii. 23; xv. 44; Lk. xxiii. 6; or some
other form of the indirect question, Acts xxiii. 34; emnpo-
tov déeyovres [LT Tr WH om. dey. ], ris etn, Lk. vill. 9;
émepawrav bedv to consult God (Num. xxili.3; Josh. ix. 20
(14); Judg.i. 1; xviii.5; Is. xix. 3, ete.; Thue. 1, 118,
[ete.]), hence to seek to know God’s purpose and to do his
will, Ro. x. 20 fr, Is. Ixy. 1. 2. by a usage foreign
to the Greeks, to address one with a request or demand ;
to ask of or demand of one: foll. by the inf. Mt. xvi. 1 (so
émep. twa Tt, Hebr. ONw, in Ps. exxxvi. (exxxvil.) 3; [this
sense is disputed by some; see Zezschwitz as referred to
at end of next word; cf. Weiss on Mt. l. c., and see
épetaw, 2]).
ér-epdotnpc, -tos, 76, (emepwrde) ; 1. an inquiry, a
question: Hdt. 6,67; Thue. 3, 53. 68. 2. a demand ;
so for the Chald. x7xw in Dan. iv. 14 Theod.; see érepo-
3. As the terms of inquiry and demand often
include the idea of desire, the word thus gets the signi-
fication of earnest seeking, i. e. a craving, an intense de-
sire (So émepwrar eis rt, to long for something, 2 S. xi. 7—
[but surely the phrase here (like 9 xv’) means simply
to ask in reference to, ask about]). If this use of the
word is conceded, it affords us the easiest and most con-
gruous explanation of that vexed passage 1 Pet. iii. 21:
Ta@, 2.
. “which (baptism) now saves us [you] not because in re-
ceiving it we [ye] have put away the filth of the flesh,
but because we [ye] have earnestly sought a conscience
reconciled to God ” (cuverdnoews dyabis gen. of the obj.,
as Opp. to capkés purov). It is doubtful, indeed, whether
eis Oedv is to be joined with émeparnua, and signifies a
craving directed unto God [W. 194 (182) — yet less fully
and decidedly than in ed. 5, p. 216 sq.], or with cuveiSnars,
and denotes the attitude of the conscience towards (in
relation to) God; the latter construction is favored by a
comparison of Acts xxiv. 16 drpécxomoy cuveidnow exew
mpos tov Oedv. The signification of érep. which is ap-
proved by others, viz. stipulation, agreement, is first met
with in the Byzantine writers on law; “moreover, the
ed
ETTEN@
formula kara ré émepwrnya tijs ceuvordrns BovAjjs, common
in inscriptions of the age of the Antonines and the follow-
ing Cesars, exhibits no new sense of the word éi-parnua;
for this formula does not mean ‘acc. to the decree of the
senate’ (ex senatus consulto, the Grk. for which is card
ra Od€avra rH Bovdy), but ‘after inquiry of or application
to the senate,’ i. e. ‘with government sanction.’”” Ze-
eschwitz, Petri ap. de Christi ad inferos descensu senten-
tia (Lips. 1857) p. 45; [Farrar, Early Days of Christi-
anity,i. 138n.; Kahler, Das Gewissen, i. 1 (Halle 1878)
pp- 831-338. Others would adhere to the (more ana-
logical) passive sense of émep. viz. ‘the thing asked
(the demand) of a good conscience towards God’ i. q.
the avowal of consecration unto him].*
ér-éxw; impf. éweiyov; 2 aor. eméaxov ; 1. to have
or hold upon, apply: sc. tov vodv, to observe, attend to, foll.
by an indir. quest., Lk. xiv. 7; ruvi, dat. of pers., to give
attention to one, Acts iii. 5; 1 Tim. iv. 16, (with dat. of a
thing, Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 2; 2 Mace. ix. 25; Polyb. 3, 43,
2, etce.; fully ép@adpdy tem, Leian. dial. mar. 1, 2). 2.
to hold towards, hold forth, present : Néyov Cais, asa light,
by which illumined ye are the lights of the world, Phil. ii.
16 [al. al., cf. Mey. or Ellic. ad loc.]. 3. to check ((cef.
Eng. hold up], Germ. anhalten): sc. éuavrdv, to delay,
stop, stay, Acts xix. 22, and in Grk. writ.fr. Hom. down;
[ef. W. § 38,1; B. 144 (126); Fritzsche on Sir. v. 1].*
énpedto ; (€mnpeca [spiteful abuse, cf. Aristot. rhet. 2,
2,4]); to insult; to treat abusively, use despitefully ; to re-
vile: rwa, Mt. v. 44 RG; Lk. vi. 28, (with dat. of pers.,
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 31; 3, 5,16); in a forensic sense, to
accuse falsely: with the ace. of a thing, 1 Pet. iii. 16.
(Xen., Isaeus, Dem., Philo, Plut., Leian., Hdian.; to
threaten, Hdt. 6, 9 [but cf. Cope on Aristot. u. s.].)*
ént, [before a rough breathing ed’ (occasionally in Mss.
ém ; see e. g. Ps. exlv. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some in-
stances before a smooth breathing (as ef’ éAmid:, Acts
ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); seeddeidov. It neglects
elision before proper names beginning with a vowel
(exe. Alyumroy Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s
txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq. ;
cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr.
local prefix dpi; Curtius § 335], joined to the gen., the
dat., and the acc.; its primary signification is upon (Lat.
super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note]).
A. with the GeniTIvE [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336
(289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on
which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with
the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abid-
ing, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.;
of doing anything: émi Kris, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii.
343 émt tov Sdparos, Mt. xxiv.17; Lk. xvii. 31; én’ épn-
pias (cf. on a desert), Mk. viii. 4; emi raév vepedar, Mt.
xxiv. 30; xxvi. 64; éal (rijs) ys, Mt. vi. 10; ix. 6; Xxlil.
9; xxviii. 18; Lk. xxi. 25; Acts ii. 19, and very often;
emt ris Oaddoons, on (the surface of) the sea, Mt. xiv. ,
25 RG; 26 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 48, [49]; Rev. v. 13,
and, ace. to the interp. of many, Jn. vi. 19; but cf. Baumg.-
Crusius ad loc. [per contra, cf. Liicke ad loc. ; Meyer on
i 231
’
€7Trb
Mt. 1. ¢.], (Job ix. 8; Badigew ed’ aros, Leian. philops.
135 émi rod meddyous diabéovres, V. h. 2,4; [ Artem. oneir.
3, 16]; on a different sense of the phrase én) ris 6addo-
ons see 2 a. below [W. 374 (351) ]) ; moveiv onueia emt ray
ao devoivrwy, to be seen upon the bodies of men, exter-
nally, (on the sick [cf. W.375 (351)]), Jn. vi. 2; éxdéioa
and xaOnpat [KabéCopar] emi, Mt. xix. 28; xxiii. 2; xxiv.
3; xxv. 31; xxvii. 19; Jn. xix.13; Acts xx.9; Rev. ix.
17, ete. ; €orny, €ornka emi, Lk. vi. 17; Acts xxi.40; Rev.
x. 5,8; where parts of the body are spoken of : én yeipav,
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11; én ris Keadis, In. xx. 7; 1 Co.
xi.10; Rev. x. 1 RG [al. ace.]; xii. 1; cuvddva emt yupvod,
Mk. xiv. 51; emi rod perdmov [or -rev], Rev. vii. 3; ix.
4; xiii. 16 [Rec., al. ace.]; xiv.9. _b. Like the prep. é»
(see the exposition s. v. év, I. 7 p. 212°), so also émt with
the gen. is used after verbs expressing motion to indi-
cate the rest following the motion; thus after Bade,
Mk. iv. 26; Mt. xxvi. 12; ome(pew, Mk. iv. 31; riOévas,
Jn. xix. 19; Acts v.15; [Lk. viii. 16 L T Tr WH];
éemiriOevat, Lk. viii. 16 [RG]; ca@cévar, Acts x. 11; mimrew,
Mk. ix. 20; xiv. 35; émvypdpew, Heb. x. 16 RG; érxveuw,
Jn. xxi. 11 RG; &xecOa, Heb. vi. 7; Rev. iii. 10; [dva-
rédrew, Lk. xii. 54 T Tr mrg. WH]; yevduevos ext rod
témov (cf. our having arrived on the spot), Lk. xxii. 40,
[ef. W. p. 376 (352) and see below, C. I. 1b. fin.]. xpewav
twa émi (Hebr. 9p mA, Gen. xl. 19; Deut. xxi. 22, etc.),
for which the Latin has suspendere ez, de, a, and alicui,
Acts v.30; x.39; Gal.iii.13. cc. fig. used of that upon
which any thing rests, (like our upon) [cf. W. 375
(351); B. 836 (289); Ellic. on 1 Tim. as below]: iva
crab emt ordpatos etc. Candy DIP? Deut. xix. 15), rest-
ing on the declaration, ete., Mt. xviii. 16 ; 2 Co. xiii. 1;
more simply émi papripev, 1 Tim. v. 19; in the adv. phrase
én’ ddnOeias (on the ground of truth), see ad7era, I. 1.
[c’. akin is its use (with a personal or a reflex. pron.) to
denote dependence, as in hoy:fé0Ow ef’ (al. ad’ q. Vv.
II. 2d. aa.) éavrod, 2 Co. x.7T Tr WH (for himself, i. e.
apart from and independently of others; R. V. with him-
self); cf. Kiibner ii. 432; L.andS.s.v.A.Lid.] d.
fig. used of things, affairs, persons, which one is
set over, over which he exercises power; Lat.
supra, our over [cf. below, B. 2 b. and C. I. 2 e.]: em
mdvrov, Ro. ix. 5; Eph. iv. 6 (where emi, did and év are
distinguished) ; kaOlornpi twa emi Tivos, Mt. xxiv. 45;
xxv. 21, 23; Lk. xii. 42; Acts vi. 8, (Gen. xxxix. 4, 5;
1 Mace. vi. 14; x. 37, etc.; Plat. rep. 5 p. 460 b., ete.) ;
didwpt run eEovolay eri Tivos, Rev. li. 26; eyo e€ovoiay
émi rwos, Rev. xx.6; Baowdeverv eri Twos, Mt. ii. 22 RG
Tr br.; Rey. v. 10; éxew ef’ éavrod Bacwhéa, Rev. ix. 11;
eyew Baorrelav emt Trav Baorhéwy, Rev. Xvil. 1 ds jy ent
Ths yatns, who was over the treasury, Acts vill. 27; 6 emt
rod kotrévos, he who presided over the bed-chamber, the
chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (Passow i. 2 p. 1035* gives
many exx. fr. Grk. auth. [ef. L. and. s. v. A. TIT. 1; Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 474; Soph. Lex. s. v.]; for exx. fr. the O. T.
Apoer. see Wahi, Clavis Apocr. p. 218*). e. of that to
which the mental act looks or refers: éyew én
rwos, to speak upon (of) a thing, Gal. iii. 16 (Plato,
gee}
€7Tl
Charm. p. 155 d.; legg. 2 p. 662 d.; Ael. v. h. 1, 30;
scribere super re, Cic. ad Att. 16, 6; disserere super, Tac.
ann. 6, 28; cf. W. 375 (351); [B. 336 (289)]). f. of
one on whom an obligation has been laid: edyny éxew
é” éavrod, have (taken) on themselves a vow, have
bound themselves by a vow, Acts xxi. 23 [WH txt. ad’
éavt. (see amo, II. 2 d. aa.) ]. 2. used of vicinity,
i.e. of the place at, near, hard by, which, (Germ. bei, an) ;
a. prop. KdAmos 6 én moowdniov, Hdt. 7, 115; em rav
bupay, [Acts v. 23 LT Tr WH] (1 Mace. i. 55; [Plut.
G. Gracch. 14, 3 p. 841 ¢.]); cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1366
§ 584; Passow s. v. p. 1034; [L. and S. s.v. I. 1 a. sub
fin.]. But the exx. of this signification adduced from
the N. T. [with the exception of Acts l. c.] (and most
of those fr. Grk. auth. also) are such as to allow the ren-
dering of émi by super also, over or above [so W. 374 sq.
(351)]: émi ris Oaddoons at the sea, upon the shore, or
above the sea, for the shore overhung the sea, Jn. vi. 19
(?[cf. 1 a. above]); xxi. 1, (Ex. xiv. 2; Deut. i. 40; 1
Mace. xiv. 84; xv. 11; Polyb. 1, 44, 4; cf. the French
Boulogne sur mer, Chalons: sur Marne, [Eng. Stratford
on Avon], ete.; émt rod motrayod, Ezek. i. 1; [Xen. an.
4, 8, 28]; emt rod “Iopddvov, 2 K. ii. 7); eoOlew enti rhs
tparé(ns twos (Germ. tiber Jemands Tische essen, (cf.
Eng. over one’s food, over one’s cups, etc.]), food and
drink placed upon the table, Lk. xxii. 30 cf. 215 cuxny
émt ths 6d0v, a fig-tree above (i. e. higher than) the way,
Mt. xxi.19. b. before, with gen. of a pers., in the pres-
ence of one as spectator, or auditor, [W. 375 (351); B.
836 (289)]: Mt. xxviii. 14 [L Tr WH mrg. imd]; Mk.
SoG WR INCI Roche IG ANF soa n coane YR II (Ookvas IC
6; 2 Co. vii. 14; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [some bring this under II.
below; see paptupew]; emi tod Bnuaros Kaicapos, Acts
xxv.10. c. én rod (Rec. trys) Barov at the bush, i.e. at
the place in the sacred volume where the bush is spoken
of, Mk. xii. 26 (see év, I. 1 d.). II. of Time when;
with gen. of a pers. in the time or age of a man, [“in the
days of” |; at the time when an office was held by one;
under the administration of, [ef. W. 375 (352); B. 336
(289)]: Mk. ii. 26; Lk. iii. 2; iv. 27; Acts xi. 28; (1
Mace. xiii. 42; xiv. 27, [for other exx. in which this
phrase is equiv. to “in or of the reign ete. of,” and is
preceded by a specification of the year etc., see B. D.
Am. ed. p. 651 note]; 2 Macc. vili. 19; xv. 22; for
numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow i. 2 p. 1035,
[less fully in L. and S.s.v. A. II.]). with the gen. of a
thing, at the time of any occurrence: émi rhs perotkecias
BaBvdGvos, at the time of the deportation to Babylon,
Mt. i. 11; [on Lk. xii. 54 T Tr mrg. WH see dvopn]; of
the time when any occupation is (or was) carried on: émi
Tov mpooevxav pov, Lat. in precibus meis, at my prayers,
when I am praying, Ro. i. 10 (9); Eph. i. 16; 1 Th. i.
2; Philem. 4. of time itself, én’ éoydrwy and (ace. to
another reading) éoydrov rév jpepav (lit. at the end of
the days): 2 Pet. iii. 3; Heb. i. 2 (1), (for the Hebr.
oD Wns, Gen. xlix.1; Num. xxiv. 14; Jer. xxxvii.
(xxx.) 24; Mic.iv. 1; Dan. x.14); én’ éoydrov Too xpdvov,
Jude 18 LT TrWH; [ray xpdvev, 1 Pet. i. 20 LT TrWH].
232
emi
B. with the Dative, used of Place [W. 392 (366)
sq.; B. 336 (289) sq.]; and 1. properly; a. of the
place where or in which (Lat. in with the abl.,
Germ. auf with the dat.) [Eng. on, etc.], where contin-
uance, position, situation, etc., are spoken of : ef’ 6 (L
txt. T Tr WH émov) xaréxecro, Mk. ii. 4; AlOos emi Aw
[-Oov T Tr WH], Mk. xiii. 2; émt mivaxt, Mt. xiv. 8,11;
Mk. vi. 25; émt tots kpaBBarows, Mk. vi. 55; dvaxdXivae
mavras emt t@ xopto, Mk. vi. 39; éméxecro ew aire, lay
upon it, Jn. xi. 38; ef’ immos, Rev. xix. 14. b. of the
place in which (Lat. in with the abl., Germ. au/
with the acc.), after verbs expressing motion towards
a place, to denote a remaining in the place after the
motion, [Eng. upon, at, etc.]: Baddew Aibor eri ten, dat. of
pers., Jn. viii. 7 Rec. ; ofkodopeiv, Mt. xvi. 18 ; éroccodopety,
Eph. ii. 20; émiBaddev, Mt. ix. 16 (Lk. v. 36 emiBaddew
emi Tt); emippamrew, Mk. ii. 21 (where L T Tr WH have
éni with acc.); émuminre, Acts viii. 16. c. of the
place above which (Lat. super, Germ. iiber, [Eng.
over]): ém avr, over his head, Lk. xxiii. 38 (for which
Mt. xxvii. 37 émavw tis Kepadjs adrov). d. of the
place at, or by, or near which: émi Ovpats and emi 7H
Ovpa, Mt. xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; Acts v. 9, (and often
in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1037*; [L. and S. s. v.
B. I. 1a.; cf. A. I. 2 a. above]); emt rm mpoBatixy, In.
v. 2; émt t@ morau@, Rev. ix. 14; ém rH orva, Acts iii.
11; ém [L T Tr WH map’] atrois éemipetvar, Acts xxviii.
14. 2. Metaph.; a. of that upon which any action,
effect, condition, rests as a basis or support; prop.
upon the ground of; and a. of that upon which any-
thing is sustained or upheld: (qv emi rm, to sus-
tain life on (by) a thing, Mt. iv. 4 (where L Tr, the sec-
ond time, év; [cf. W. 389 (364) note]); Lk. iv. 4, (Deut.
viii. 3 for by mn; Plat. Alcib. 1 p. 105 ¢.; Plut. de
cup. divit. 7 p. 526d.; Alciphr. epp. 3, 7, ete.) ; cumévat
€nt rots dptos, to understand by reasoning built upon
the loaves, Mk. vi. 52 [ef. W. 392 (367) ; B. 337 (290)].
B. of that upon which anything rests (our upon):
em’ éAmids [see in éAmis, 2], supported by hope, in hope,
[cf. W. § 51, 2f.], Acts ii. 26; Ro. iv. 18; 1 Co. ix. 10,
[differently in e. below]; to do any thing émi T@ dvopati
twos, relying upon the namei. e. the authority of any
one [cf. W. 393 (367)]: éAXedoovra emi tO dvdpari pov,
appropriating to themselves the name of Messiah, which
belongs to me, Mt. xxiv. 5; Mk. xiii. 6; Lk. xxi. 8, (in
which pass. Aéyovres, Ort éyd eit 6 Xpiords is added by
way of explanation) ; BanrigecOa émi [L Tr WH ev] TO
dv. Xpiorow, so as to repose your hope and confidence in his
Messianic authority, Acts ii. 38; dێxeoOail ria emt T@ ov.
pou, to receive one because he bears my name, is devoted
to my authority and instruction, Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37;
Lk. ix. 48. to do anything upon the name of Christ, his
name being introduced, appeal being made tohis authority
and command : as knpiocew, Siddoxew, etc., Lk. xxiv. 47;
Acts iv. 17, 18; v.28, 40; ddvapu movetv, Satpovia ex Bar
Aew, using his name as a formula of exorcism, [ef. W.
393 (367), Mk. ix.39; Lk.ix.49 [WH Tr mrg.ev]. .
of that unon which as a foundation any super
> ie
€7L
structure is reared: voyodereicOa, Heb. vii. 11 (er
avr, for which L T Tr WH have éw’ airis); viii. 6 ; after
verbs of trusting, believing, hoping, etc.: dpxet-
cba ert tr, 3 Jn. 10; mappno.agec Oa, Acts xiv. 33; mero
Géva, Mt. xxvii. 43 L txt. WH mrg.; Lk. xi. 22; xviii.
9; Mk. x. 24 [T WH om. Trmrg. br. the el-];_ 2 Co. i.
9; Heb. ii. 13; meorevew, Lk. xxiv. 25; Ro.ix. 33; x. 11,
etc. ; eAmicer (see €Ami¢w), (cf. C. I. 2¢.a. below]. 5. of
the reason or motive underlying words and deeds,
so that emi is equiv. to for, on account of, [W. 394 (368);
B. 337 (290)]: Mt. xix. 9 RG T Tr WH txt.; Lk. v. 5
(éml 76 pnyari cov, at thy word, Germ. auf’; [ef. W. § 48,
ce. d.; in reliance on]); Acts iii. 16 [WH om.]; iv. 9;
xi. 19 [L Tr mrg. have the gen.]; xxi. 24; 1 Co. viii. 11
(drod\Avo ba eri tin, Germ. zu Grunde gehen tiber ete.
(ef. W. 394 (368) note, but L T Tr WH read év]) ; Phil.
iii. 9; after aivety, Lk. ii. 20; do€aew, Actsiv. 21; 2Co.
ix. 13 [ef. W. 381 (3857)]; paprupeiv, Heb. xi. 4; edyape-
orev etc. to give thanks for,1 Co.i.4; 2 Co.ix.15; Phil.
1.5; 1 Th.iii 9. ep’ d (equiv. to emt rovre, dre for that,
on the ground of this, that) because that, because, Ro. v.
12 (on the various interpp. of this pass. see Dietzsch,
Adam und Christus. Bonn 1871, p. 50 sqq.) ; 2 Co. v. 4
[Rec* éwesdy]; Phil. iii. 12, (ep 6—6 caravas — ovk ioxvoe
Oavatraoa avtovs, Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 29 p. 138 ed. Otto ;
eg’ & Tevvddiov éypawev, for the reason that he had ac-
cused Gennadius, Synes. ep. 73; cf. Hermann ad Vig.
p- 710; the better Greeks commonly used é@’ ois in the
same sense, cf. W. 394 (368) ; [Fritzsche or Mey. on Ro.
l. c.; Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.]). Used esp. after verbs sig-
nifying a mental affection or emotion, where we
also often say over (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow i.
2, p. 1039°; Kriiger § 68, 41, 6; [cf. W. 393 (368) c.]):
as dyaddav, Lk. i. 47; yxalpew, Mt. xviii. 13; Lk. i. 14;
xiii. 17; Ro. xvi. 19, etc.; yapa éorat, Lk. xv. 73 xapay
(Ree. yapw) éxw, Philem. 7; mapaxadetv, rapaxadeicbat,
PaCoutes evil los) bib bwitt. 7s) Nate; Lkoxix. 41 iG:
xorrerov Tracey, Acts Vill. 2; xomrecOat, Rev. xviii. 9 [T Tr
WH txt. the acc.]; ddvvacOa, Acts xx. 38; ddrodv ew,
Jas. v. 1; orvyvatew, Mk. x. 22; ovddAureioOa, Mk. iii.
5; peravoetv ent, to grieve over, repent of, 2 Co. xii. 21;
omdayxvitecba, Mt. xiv. 14 GLT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 34
RG; Lk. vii. 18 [Tdf. the ace.]; paxpoOupety, Mt. xviii.
26 [Tr the ace.], 29 [L Tr the acc.]; Lk. xviii. 7 [see
paxpobupew, 2]; Jas. v.7; dpyitecOa, Rev. xii. 17 [Lchm.
om. émi]; éxmAnooe Oat, Mt. vii. 28; Mk. i. 22; Lk. iv. 32;
Acts xiii. 12; dsarapdocec bat, Lk. i. 29 ; eEioracOa, Lk. ii.
47; OauBeicOa, Mk. x. 24; OdpBos, Lk. v.9; Acts ili. 10;
Oavpatew, Mk. xii. 17; Lk. ii. 33 ; iv. 225 ix.43; xx. 26;
Acts iii. 12; kavyacOa, Ro. v. 2; émaryiverOat, Ro. vi. 21;
mapatndouv and rapopyitew twa emi tu, Ro. x. 19. «. of
the rule, orcondition [W. 394 (368) d.]: ém édmids, a
hope being held out or given, Ro. viii. 20; Tit. i. 2, (differ-
ently in 8. above); émi dvolv . . . udprvow, on condition
that two witnesses testify to the matter in question, [at
(the mouth of) two etc.; cf. W. 392 (367)], Heb. x. 28;
én vexpois, equiv. to dvrwv vexpav (in the case of the dead),
if any one has died, Heb. ix. 17. {. of the purpose
233
eri
and end [unto, for; W. 394 (368) e.]: én’ dvépare abrod,
to worship and profess his name, Acts xv. 14 Rec. ; cadei
twa emi tun, Lat. ad aliquid, Gal. v. 13; 1 Th. iv. 7, (ém
§evia, Xen. an. 7, 6,3; cf. W.u.s.); xriobévres emt Zpyors
dyaGois, Eph. ii. 10; dpoveiv emi tux to take thought for
a thing, Phil. iv. 10; ef’ 6 (bya later Grk. impropriety
for emi rin, cf. W. § 24,4; [B. §139, 59; but on the ex-
treme doubtfulness of this alleged use of és in direct
questions, see Pres. T. D. Woolsey in the Bibliotheca
Sacra for Apr. 1874, p.314 sqq.]) mdpec; for what pur-
pose art thou come? Vulg. ad quid [al. quod] venisti?
Mt. xxvi. 50 R [but GL T Tr WH 颒 4, see C.L 2¢.y.
aa. below] (Theoph. emi roie oxomd; cf. Hdt. 7, 146
mvOopevos, em otat #Oov; [but the view of many ancient
expositors which explains the passage by an aposiopesis :
“that for which thou hast come —do” is thoroughly es-
tablished by Dr. Woolsey u.s.]). of the issue or unde-
signed result: Aoyopayety em katactpopy tev dKovov-
tev, 2'Tim. ii. 14; (rots émi apedeia resrompévors emi BAGBN
xpno@a, Xen. mem. 2, 3,19). 4. of the pattern or
standard [A. V. after; W. 394 (368) f£.]: kadei twa
emt T@ dvopari Twos, to call one after the name of another,
Lk. i. 59 (Neh. vii. 63 [W. 410 (382) ]); ém TO Opor@part
twos after the likeness of a thing, Ro. v.14. b. of that
over which one is placed, for its care or adminis-
tration: em tois vmdpyoucl twa Kabioravat, Lk. xii. 44
(cf. A. I. 1 d. above, [also C. I. 2 e. below]; Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 474 sq.; Bnhdy. p. 249; [W. 393 (367) a.]).
c. used of a hostile aim, against (for exx. fr. Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down, see Passow i. 2 p. 1036*; [cf. L. andS. s. v.
B. 1.1 ¢.; W. 392 (367); B. 337 (290) ]): Lk. xii. 52 sq.;
Oris yevomern em Srepave [-vov, L Tr mrg.], Acts xi. 19
[A.V.about]. 4. of that to which anything is added
(so that it is, as it were, upon it) ; in addition to; over and
above, [W. 393 (367 sq.) b.]: 2 Co. vii. 13 (L T Tr WH
emt Se ty mapakAnoet tpav [but L T Tr WH jpdy] mepio-
corépws «td. but in addition to the comfort given (us) by
you, we rejoiced the more exceedingly etc. [A. V. in ete.
(of condition) ]); xepdaive re emi tun, Mt. xxv. 20, 22
RG; exew Avmny ent ory, Phil. ii. 27 Rec. (Eur. Iph. T.
197 ddvos ert Hove, Troad. 596 emt 8 adyeow adyea, Soph.
O. C. 544 emi vdcm vdcov; [cf. Mey. on Phil. l.c.; but
GLTTr WH give the ace., see C. I. 2 c. below ]) ; mpoo-
ribévat ert, Lk. iii. 20; él maa tovrots, besides all this,
Lk. xvi. 26 [L mrg. T Tr mrg. WH ev; see ev, I. 5e.
p- 211°]; Eph. vi. 16 [L txt. T Tr WH ev (and there is
no rovros) 3 see év, u. 8.]; Col. iii. 14, (Sir. xxxvii. 15; 1
Mace. x. 42; [classic exx. in Wetst. on Lk. 1. c.]); add also
Heb. viii. 1 [see Liinem. ad loc.]; ix. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 16.
e. of that which is connected as an adjunct (esp. of
time) with the principal matter under consideration, (in
Germ. generally bei, i. e. at, on, ete.) [W. 392 (367)]:
edyapioTa TO bed pov emi naon TH preia Yar, at every men-
tion of you, as often as I call you to mind, Phil. i. 3 [but
see Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft. ad l.,and s. v. nas, I. 2]; omen
Sopa ém rH Ovoia, while engaged in (busied over) the
sacrifice, Phil. ii. 17; émt ouvredcia Tév alavev, Heb. ix.
26; emt ra mpdtn SiaOyKy, ib. 15; omeipew and Oepifew
emt
én’ evAoyiats, so that blessings attend, i. e. bountifully,
freely, 2 Co. ix. 6; émi maon tp avaykn, 1 Th. iii. 7; emi 1
napopyton@ Spav while your anger lasts, Eph. iv. 26; emi
rout meanwhile, i.e. while this was going on [(?), upon
this], Jn.iv.27. f. of the object of an action,and a.
where the Germ. uses an, [ Eng. on (nearly i. q. to) ]: mpao-
cew re eri rem, Acts v. 35 (like Spay re emi re, Hdt. 3, 14;
Ael. n. an. 11, 11); cf. Bnhdy. p. 250 bot.; [but see B.
337 (290)]; 8 yéyovev én’ avn, Mk. v. 33 [T Tr WH om.
Lbr. éni]; dvamAnpotoda, Mt. xiii. 14 Ree. 8B. where
the Germ. says tiber, [Eng. upon, of, concerning], after
verbs of writing, speaking, thinking: yeypappeva
ém airé, Jn. xii. 16 (Hdt. 1, 66); mpopyreves, Rev. x. 11;
paprupeiy, xxii. 16 RG T Tr txt. WH txt. [see paprupew,
a.], (80a emi 7H edoeBeia, an opinion about, on, piety, 4
Mace. v. 17 (18)).
C. with the Accusative [W. § 49,1; B. 337 (290)
sq. ]; I. of Place; 1. properly; a. of the place
above, over, which, our up on, on to: after verbs
signifying motion and continuance, édéetv, mepera-
re éml ra Vdara, Mt. xiv. 28 sq.; ext tyv Oddaccar, ib.
25 LT Tr WH, 26 R G, (aheiv emi rovrov, Hom. Od. 1,
183); dvameceiv ent thy ynv, Mt. xv. 35; éml rd at7nOds
rwos, Jn. Xxi. 203 dvakAcOjvat emt Tovs xoprovs, Mt. xiv.
19 RG; xarovkeiv emt nav 76 tpoowmov (LT Tr WH zrar-
ros mpooawmov [cf. ras, I. 1 ¢.]) ras yps, Acts xvii. 26;
xabnoOa, Lk. xxi. 35; 7AOe Auods ef’ GAnv thy ynv, Acts
vil. 11; okoros éyevero ent macay thy ynv, Mt. xxvii. 45.
over i.e. along: eiornker emt Tov aiyiadov, Mt. xiii. 2 [W.
408 (380); differently in d. below]. b. of motion to
a place whose surface is occupied or touched (Germ.
auf with the acc.), upon, unto, etc.; after verbs of going,
coming, ascending, descending, falling, etc.:
mopeverOar emt rhv ddov, Acts vill. 26; ix. 1135 émt ras
dieEddovus, Mt. xxii. 9; mpogépyerGa, Acts xx. 13 [here Tr
WH mre. mpocépy.]; pevyew, Mt. xxiv.16 (where L Tr
WH txt. eis); eEepyer Oar, Lk. viii. 27; e€révar, Acts xxvii.
43; émiBaive, Mt. xxi.53 dvaBaivew, Lk. v.19; xix. 4;
Acts x. 9; Rev. xx. 9; xaraBaivew, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br.
WH reject the pass.]; Rev. xvi. 21; dmépyeoOa, Lk.
xxiii. 33 [L Tr WH épyeoOac]; mintew emi rovs odas,
Acts x. 25; ém mpocemor, to fall upon the face, Mt. xvii.
6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v.12; xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 25; Rev. vii. 11.
After verbs of placing, leading, bringing, build-
ing, laying, throwing, ete.: riAéva, Mt. v. 15; Lk.
xi. 33; émeriOevar, Mt. xxiii.4; Lk.xv.5; Actsxv. 10, etc.;
riOévar Ta yovata emi, Acts xxi. 5; otxodopetv, Mt. vii. 24,
26; Lk. vi. 49; Ro. xv. 203 éemorcodopetv, 1 Co. iii. 12;
Gepedtovv, Lk. vi. 48; Badrew, Jn. viii. 59; Rev. ii. 24;
xiv. 16; xviii. 19; émiBadrew, Lk. v. 36 (emf. eri run, Mt.
ix. 16); émBdddew ras yeipas emi twa, Mt. xxvi. 50, ete.
(see emBahrw, 1 a.) 3 emippimrev, Lk. xix. 35 and tropi-
cally 1 Pet. v. 7; pamigew, Mt. v. 39 [L T Tr txt. WH
eis]; TUmrew, Lk. vi. 29 [Tdf. eis]; avaBiBacew, Mt. xiii.
48 [not Lehm. txt.]; éemBiBdtew, Lk. x. 34; kardyew, Lk.
v. 11; cwpevery, Ro. xii. 20; Suddvar, Lk. vii. 44; xix. 23;
Rev. viii. 3; avadépeuw, 1 Pet. ii. 24; xpeuav, Mt. xviii. 6
“LT Tr WH zepi]; ypdpew, Rev. ii. 17; iii. 12; xix. 16;
234
Byars
€7l
émvypdpew, Heb. viii. 10. After verbs which include an-
other verb signifying motion, or transfer, or entrance
into, (where Germ. uses auf or tiber; our on, to, etc.):
dvaredrewv, Mt. v. 453; Bpéxewv, ibid. ; mvéew, Rev. vii. 1
(here we see the difference betw. émi with the gen. to
blow over a thing, Germ. tier, and émi with the acc. to
blow on a thing, to come blowing upon it, Germ. einen
anwehen, wehend auf einen kommen); [apparently nearly
the same view of the distinction betw. the cases is taken
by Thiersch § 274, 6; Hermann on Eur. Alcest. 845.
But Kriiger (§ 68, 40, 3), Kihner (ii. § 438, I. 1 b.), al.,
regard é. with the acc. as denoting merely movement
towards a place, while é. with the gen. involves the idea
of actual or intended arrival; cf. L. and S.s.v. A. I. 1.
Still others hold the two expressions to be substantially
synonymous: e.g. Bttm. Gram. § 147 (p. 417 Eng.
trans.); Matthiae § 584; Passow p. 1034*;—esp. in
the N. T., see W. 409 sq. (382) ; 408 (381) note; B. 338
(291). On the variations of case with this prep. in the
Rey. cf. Alford on iv. 2]; d:acwOnvar emi tiv ynv, Acts
xxvii. 44. cc. It is used of persons over whom anything
is done, that thereby some benefit may accrue to them,
(Germ. tiber with the dat.) [W. 408 (381) note]: dvopa-
(ew 76 dvopa Incov émi twa, to name the name of Jesus
(as a spell, a magic formula) over one, sc. that help
may come to him from that name, Acts xix. 13; mpoo-
evxecOar eri twa, Jas. v. 14. d. As eis (q. v. C. 2 p.
186*), so émi also stands after verbs of rest and con-
tinuance [B. 337 (290) sq.; W. § 49, 1.1]: xcaeddeuv
éxi tt, Mk. iv. 38; orjva, Rev. xi. 11; oraOjvae emi te,
Rey. xii. 18 (xiii. 1); €ornxevar, Jn. xxi. 4 (€mt rov aiytahov
LT Tr mrg. WH mrg.; otherwise where many are
spoken of; see a. fin. above); Rev. xiv. 1; xa6éj0Oa,
Jn. xii. 15; Rev. iv. 4; vi. 2 [Rec. dat.]; xi. 16; xiv.
14,16 [L T Tr WH txt. gen.]; xvii. 3; xix. 11; xexa-
Oixévat, kabioa, Mk. xi. 2; Lk. xix. 30; Jn. xii. 14;
Rev. xx. 4; xaOioec@at, Mt. xix. 28; oxnvodv, Rev. vii.
15; KeioOa, 2 Co. iii. 15; kataxeioOar, Lk. v. 25 T Tr
WH; ctva emi 1d aird, to be together, assembled, in
the same place: Lk. xvii. 35; Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44,—
to come together, of sexual intercourse, 1 Co. vii. 5 GL
T Tr WH; cuveddciv emi 7d ard have convened, come
together, to the same place, 1 Co. xiv. 23 [L txt. éddeiv];
simply eri 76 airé se. dvres, together, Acts iii. 1 [but LT
Tr WH (so R. V.) connect emir. a. here with ii. 47]; 28.
ii. 13 [ef. B. 338 (291)]. e. used of motion or arrival
into the vicinity of a place (not to the place itself) ;
near; to,as faras; (Germ.an, bei, zu, hin... zu): émird
pevnpetov [or prynpa], Mk. xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 12 (eUMiibraeh
om. WH reject the vs.], 22, 24; emt rods dvaBabpovs, Acts
xxi. 355 épyeoOat emi re Vdewp, Acts viii. 36; emi thy TvAnY;
Acts xii. 10; éemorivat émi rév tudGva, Acts x. 17; xara-
Baivery emi rv Oadaccar, Jn. vi. 16, etc., ete. 3 with the ace.
of a pers. to, near to one : Jn. xix. 33; Acts xxv. PARRA Te
ii. 1 ; Rev. xvi. 14; esp. to judges, kings, etc., i. q. to their
tribunal : Mt. x.18; Lk. xii. 58; xxi.12; xxiii. 1; Acts
ix. 21; xvi. 19. alsoin pregn. constr. after verbs of sit
ting, standing, etc.: kaOjoOa emi rd reAdmov, Mt. ix.
ef?
eT
9; Mk. ii. 14; Eornxévar emi, Rev. iii. 20; xv. 23 emorivat
emi, Acts x.17; xi. 11; emt ri deéidv on the right hand,
Rev.v.1. f. of mere direction towardsa terminus
(so that the terminus itself is not reached) : ropeveoOar emi
TO dmoAwdds, to recover it (where we say afier), Lk. xv.
4; exreivew tas xeipas emi, against one, to take him, Lk.
xxii. 53; towards one, in pointing him out, Mt. xii. 49;
e£épxerOar emi Anoryy, to take a robber, Mt. xxvi. 55;
Mk. xiv. 48; Lk. xxii. 52, cf. Lk. xiv. 31. 2. It is
used metaphorically, a. with the acc. of a pers. after
verbs of coming, falling, bringing, ete. a. of
evils befalling (falling ‘upon’) one, and of pertur-
bations coming upon the mind: 16 ainda twos (the
penalty for slaying him) jjxee or épyerat emi twa, Mt. xxiii.
35 sq.; xxvii. 25; émayew 76 aia twos emi tiva, Acts v.
285; €pxerOar and Kew emi twa, of other evils, Jn. xviii.
4; Eph. v. 6; Rev. iii. 3; after yiveoOa, Lk. i. 65; iv.
36; Acts v.5; érépxecOa [érevcépy. LT Tr WH], Lk.
xxi. 353 émemimrev, Lk. i. 12; Acts xiii. 11[LT Tr WH
minrew]; xix.17[L Tr wimrew]; Ro. xv. 3 (fr. Ps. Ixviii.
(Ixix.) 10); Rev. xi. 11 [Ree. winrew]; émorqva, Lk.
xxi. 34. 8. of blessings coming upon one: after épyecOat,
Mt. x. 133; émumimrew, of a trance, Acts x.10 [LT Tr
WH yiverOa}; emioxnvodv, 2 Co. xii. 9; épOacev and
iyycev ep tpas (upon you se. fr. heaven, [cf. W. 407
(880) note]) 7 BaowWeia tov Geov, Mt. xii. 28; Lk. x. 9;
xi. 20. the Holy Spirit is said at one time émi twa
exxeiaOa, Acts ii. 17 sq.; x. 45; Tit. iii. 6; at another,
amooréAeoOa [or e€aroareA. T Tr WH], Lk. xxiv. 49;
again, émépxeoOar, Acts i. 8; once more, xaraBaivew, Mk.
i. 10 [Ltxt.T Tr WH eis]; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. 1.33; emecev
6 K\npos éeni twa, Acts i. 26; after words of rest and
continuance : ydpis Av emi twa, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33;
éravaraverOa, Lk. x.6; the Holy Spirit issaid at one
time émi tia pévew, descending upon one to remain on
him, Jn. i. 32 sq. [B. 338 (291)]; and again dvaravecOat,
1 Pet. iv. 14. _b. of one upon whom anything is im-
posed, as a burden, office, duty, etc. : tiv pépisvay emip-
pinrew én bedv, 1 Pet. v. 7; cvvredetv diaOqknv emi twa, to
put a covenant upon one, to be kept by him, Heb. viii. 8,
(in Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 6 "9 Dy m3 N19 istomake a
covenant against one). c. of that to which anything is
added, [Eng. upon (nearly i. q. after) ]: Ady emi humny,
Phil 1527 GUT Tr WH (Ps. lxviii. xix.) 27; Ezek.
vii. 26; [esp. Is. xxviii. 10, 13; cf. Lat. super in Liv. 1,
50; 22, 54 ete.]; see above, B. 2d.); [so some take
oikos ém’ oikov, Lk. xi. 17, B. 338 (291) ; see otkos, 2]; emt
kadeiv dvopa emi Tiva (see emixadéw, 2 [and B. 338 (291)]),
to call (put) a name upon one, Acts xv. 17; Jas. ii. 7.
d. of the number or degree reached; Lat. usque ad
[W. § 49, 1. 3.a.]: émi cradiovs dwdexa, Rev. xxi. 16 [R*
T Tr WH txt. gen.] (Xen. mem. 1, 4, 17; an. 1,7, 15;
Polyb. 3, 54,7; Song of the Three 23); émi rpis, Vulg.
per ter, for three times, thrice: Acts x. 16; xi. 10 (so es
tpis, Hdt. 1, 86; Xen. an. 6, 4, 16. 19; Cyr. 7, 1, 4 ete.
[ef. W. 422 (394)]); él mdeiov more widely, to a greater
degree, further, the more, [differently below, II. 1]: Acts
iv. 17; [xx.9 WH mrg.]; 2 Tim. ii. 16; iii. 9; ed’
235
> 5
€7Tb
daov, forasmuch as, inasmuch as, [differently II. 1 be-
low]: Mt. xxv. 40, 45; Ro. xi. 13. e. of care, pow-
er, control over anything, (Germ. tiber with the acc.)
[W. § 49, 1. 3 b.], (cf. above, A.I. 1d. and B. 2 b.): Ba-
odevew emi twa (Hebr. by Sw), Lk. i. 33; xix. 14, 27;
Ro. v. 14; nyovpevov em Atyunroy, Acts vii. 10; kaiornpn,
Heb. ii. 7 R ((fr. Ps. viii. 7), L Tr WH br.}; émi rév otkor
avrov sc. éori, Heb. iii. 6 ; iepéa péyav emi rdv ofkov Tod beod
se. kafeotnkdéta, Heb. x. 213; xadsoravar dixacriy emi, Lk.
xil. 14 (dpyovra, Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 fin.); éfoueia, Lk. x. 19;
Rey. vi. 8; xvi. 9; xxii. 14; pudaooew dvaakas, Lk. ii. 8 ;
of usurped dignity : tmepaiper Oat mi mavra Neyouevor bedy,
2 Th. ii. 4 ef. Dan. xi. 36 sq. [al. refer the use in Th. l. c. to
g. y. BB. below]. Akin to this is the expression motos ént
tt (because fidelity is as it were spread over the things
intrusted toits care), Mt.xxv.21. f. of the end which
the mind reaches or to which it is led; Lat. ad, to,
unto: éemuatpepet, emotpeperbar emi twa, esp. to God,
EKSio bt; Acts ix.1355) xip 21; xive 15%)xxvi. 20; Gal-av-
9; 1 Pet.ii.25. g. of direction towards a person
orathing; a. after verbs of trusting and hoping,
(Germ. auf, upon; see above, B. 2 a. y.): after éAmicew,
1 Pet.i.13; iii. 5 RG; 1 Tim. v. 5, (and often in Sept.) ;
morevev, Acts ix.42; xi. 17; xvi.31; xxii. 19; Ro. iv.
24; mlaris, Heb. vi. 1; memouWéva, Mt. xxvii. 43 (where
L txt. WH mrg. emi with dat.). B. of the feelings,
affections, emotions, Germ. tiber, over: xémtopat,
Rev. i. 7; xviii. 9 [RG L WH mre. w. dat.]; «Aalw, Lk.
xxlil. 28; Rev. xviii. 9; edppaiverOa, Rev. xviii. 20[G L
T Tr WH w. dat.]. unto, towards, Lat. erga: omdayyvi-
Copa, Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2; ix. 22; [paxpodupéw, Mt.
xviii. 26 Tr, 29 L Tr]; ypnarés, Lk. vi. 35; xypnordrns, Ro.
xi. 22; Eph.ii.7. y. of the direction of the will and
action; aa. of purpose and end [W. § 49,1. 3d.]: ém
TO Banticpa avrod, to receive his baptism, Mt. iii. 7; emt
Oewpiav ravtnv, Lk. xxiii. 48 ; ef) 6 mdpet, Mt. xxvi. 50G L
T Tr WH (see above, B. 2 a. ¢.); where aim and result
coalesce: émt ro ovppépov, Heb. xii. 10. BB. of things
done with hostility; against: after dmoropia, Ro. xi.
22; dvaornvat, Mk. iii. 26; eyelperOa, Mt. xxiv. 7; Mk.
xiii. 8; Lk. xxi. 10; émeyetpery duwypdv, Acts xiii. 503 pepe
oOjva, Mt. xii. 26; Mk. iii. 24 sq.; émaipew re emi, Jn.
xiii. 18; paprup, 2 Co. i. 23; papriptov, Lk. ix. 5; doyn-
poveiv, 1 Co. vii. 36 (ets ra, Dion. Hal. 2, 26); pouxacba,
Mk. x. 11; rodpav, 2 Co. x. 2; Bpvyxew dddvras, Acts vii.
54. yy. of that to which one refers in writing or
speaking [cf. W. § 49, ]. 3 d.]: after Aéyew, Heb. vii.
13; 6 ody pakapiopos . . . dxpoBvoriay, sc. Aێyerar [W.
587 (546), cf. B. 394 (338) ], Ro. iv. 9; mpopnreia, 1 Tim.
i. 18; on Mk. ix. 12 sq. see ypado, 2c. 88. uponi. e.
in reference to; for: after Baddew KAqpoy, Mk. xv. 24;
Jn. xix. 24; ef. Fritzsche on Mark p. 686 [who com-
pares Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19, and remarks that an Attic
writ. would have said emi rive). il. of Time (W:
§ 49,12]; 1. of time during or for [‘for the space of ”]
which (Germ. auf, wihrend): émi érn rpia, Lk. iv. 25
[R GT WH mrg.]; én quepas meiovs, Acts xiii. 31 ; add
also xvi. 18; xvii. 2; xviii. 20; xix. 10; Heb. xi. 30, etc.,
eT iBaivo
and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v.
p- 1044, [L. and S. s. v. C. IL]; ep’ dc0v xpdvov for so
long time as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 39; Gal. iv. 1; and
simply é@’ écov as long as [differently in I. 2 d. above],
Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet.i.13; éd’ ixavov long enough, for a con-
siderable time, Acts xx. 11; éml mAeiov somewhat long,
too long [differently in I. 2d. above]: Acts xx. 9 [not
WH mrg., see u. s.]; xxiv. 4. 2. about, towards,
(Germ. gegen): ént rhv avpiov on the morrow, Lk. x. 35;
Acts iv. 5; émi rv Spay tis mpocevyns, Acts ili. 1; em
7) mpoi, Mk. xv. 1 [R G]; rarely so in Grk. writ., as
Arr. exp. Al. 3, 18, 11 (7) émi [al. id] rH Eo.
D. In ComposiITION emi denotes 1. continuance,
rest, influence upon or over any person or thing: emi-
yetos, eovpdvos, emidnuéew, emavarravopat, etc. 2. mo-
tion, approach, direction towards or to anything: éra-
Kova, emiBodw, emBdémw, emexTeiva, etc. 3. imposi-
tion: énuxabila, émiriOnps, emiBiBala, emiBapew, emtypapa,
€mippinte@, emitacow, etc. 4. accumulation, increase,
addition: éreaywyn, émisvvdya, émirwpedw, émixadéa
(by acognomen), etc. 5. repetition: émaitéw, emavapt-
punoka, ete. 6. up, upward: éraipa, éravaya, érappila,
ete. 7. against: émPBovdn, éemaviotnpt, éemiopkos, emt-
opkew, etc. 8. superintendence: émuordrns.
émt-Batvw ; 2 aor. emeBnv; pf. ptep. em BeBnkas; ate
to get upon, mount: emi tt, Mt. xxi. 5 (Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 1,
ete.; Gen. xxiv. 61); 7@ mdolw [to embark in], Acts
xxvii. 2 (Thue. 7, 70); els 76 wdotov, Acts xxi. 6 RG;
used without a case, of going aboard (a ship), Acts xxi.
2; to go up: eis ‘lepoodd. Acts xxi. 4 L T Tr WH, [yet
al. refer this to 2]. 2. to set foot in, enter: eis with
the ace. of place, Acts xx. 18; with the dat. of place
(as also in Grk. writ.), Acts xxv. 1.*
ém-BddAAw ; impf. eréBadAov; fut. émBartG; 2 aor. éeré-
BaXoyr, [3 pers. plur.-Aay, Acts xxi. 27 T Tr WH; Mk. xiv.
46 'T WH, (see drépxoua,init.)]; 1. Transitively, a.
to cast upon: rw Bpdxov, 1 Co. vii. 35 3 Twit ra iudtia, Mk.
xi. 7; [your em rds xed. Rev. xviii. 19 WH mre.]; to lay
upon, éri Tiva THY XEipa OY Tas xetpas, used of seizing one
to lead him off asa prisoner: Mt. xxvi. 50; Mk. xiv. 46
RGL; Lk. xx. 19; xxi.12; Jn. vii. 30 [L mrg. @Bader],
44 (L Tr WH the simple Bdaddcwv) ; Acts v. 18; xxi. 27,
(for the Hebr. “5 5x 7 novi, Gen. xxii. 12); also ras
xetpas run, Mk. xiv. 46 T Tr WH; Acts iv. 3, (Polyb. 3,
2,8; 5,5; Leian. Tim. 4); éemBaddew ras xetpas foll. by
the inf. indicating the purpose, Acts xii. 1; thy yxeipa
ex’ dporpov, to put the hand to the plough (to begin
work), Lk. ix. 62. b. to put (i.e. sew) on: ériBAnua
ént indrwov, Lk. vy. 36; émi iuario, Mt. ix. 16. 2. In-
trans. (asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, [cf. W. 251 (236);
B. 144 (126) sq.]) to throw one’s self upon, rush upon:
eis TO motor, of waves rushing into a ship, Mk. iv. 37; to
put one’s mind upon a thing, attend to, with the dat. of
the thing: rotr@ yap émBd\Xov for if you think thereon,
Antonin. 10, 30; pydevi yap émBdddXew pnderépay (i. e.
THY aicOnow Kai THY vénoLv) xwpis Tod mpoamimrovros €ida-
Aov, Plut. plac. phil. 4, 8; absol. émBadav, se. 76 pryyare
tod Ingov, when he had considered the utterance of
236
ET UY ELOS
Jesus, Mk. xiv. 72; cf. Kypke, [Wetst., McClellan] ad
loc.; B. 145 (127); [and for the diff. interpp. see Mey.
and esp. Morison ad loc. J. 3. Impersonally, émPddAee
por it belongs to me, falls to my share: r6 émBadnov (sc.
pol) peépos THs ovoias, Lk. xv. 12 (xrnpdrev rd émiBadror,
Hadt. 4, 115; ré émuBadXov avtois pépos, Diod. 14, 17, and
the like often in other writ. [see Meyer; cot emBaddet 7
kAnpovopia, Tob. vi. 12 (cf. iii. 17; 1 Mace. x. 30, etc.) ]).*
ém-Bapéw, -@; 1 aor. inf. émBapnoa; to put a burden
upon, to load, [cf. émi, D. 3]; trop. to be burdensome ; so in
the N. T.: red, 1 Th. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii. 8; absol. va py éme-
Bape ‘ that I press not too heavily ’ i. e. lest I give pain by
too severe language, 2 Co. ii.5. (Dion. Hal., Appian.) *
émt-BiBdtw: 1 aor. emeBiBaca; to cause to mount; to
place upon, [cf. émi, D. 3]: twa or ti éeni rt, Lk. x. 34;
xix. 35; Acts xxiii. 24. (Thuc., Plat., Diod., al.; Sept.
several times for 2.377.) *
ém-Brérw: 1 aor. éréPAeWa; in the Sept. often for
wan and 739, also for M81; to turn the eyes upon, to
look upon, gaze upon, (éni upon [cf. emi, D. 2]): emi twa,
contextually, to look upon one with a feeling of admira-
tion and respect, to look up to, regard, Jas. ii. 3; contextu-
ally, to look upon in pity for the sake of giving aid, i. q.
to have regard for, to regard, Lk. ix. 38 (where for émi-
Breov [RL] and ériBkewac [GT] write [with Tr WH]
emiBrewWat, 1 aor. act. inf.; ef. Bornemann, Schol. ad loc.,
and above in Sopa, 3 a., [also B. 273 (234) note]); em
THY tarelvwoiv twos, Lk. i. 48; often in the O. T. in the
same sense, as 1 S. i. 11; ix. 16; Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 16;
Ixviii. (Ixix.) 17; Tob. iii. 3, ete. (in Grk. writ. fr. Soph.
and Plato down, both lit. and fig.) *
émt-BAnpa, -ros, Td, (€mBarro), that which is thrown or
put upon a thing, or that which 1s added to it; an addition ;
spec. that which is sewed onto cover arent, a patch; Vulg.
assumentum [(also commissura)], (i. q. émippapa): Mt.
ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; Lk. v. 36. [Sept., Plut., Arr.]*
émt-Bodw, -@; to cry out to [ef. emi, D. 2], cry out: foll.
by ace. with inf. Acts xxv. 24 RG, [but LT Tr WH
Bode, q. v.2,and fin. From Hom., Hdt. down].*
ém-Bovdt, -7s, 7, @ plan formed against one [cf. éxi, D.
7], a@ plot: Acts ix. 243; yiverai tu émiBovdr td twos,
Acts xx. 3; eis twa, Acts xxiii. 30; plur. Acts xx. 19.
(From [Hadt.], Thue. down.) *
ért-yapBpevw : fut. emvyauBpevow; to be related to by
marriage, enter into affinity with; 1. Sept. for JANN, to
become any one’s father-in-law or son-in-law: twi, Gen.
xuxiv. 9 1S. xvill, 22isqqhs) 2/Chr- xvill.11 5.2 Bsdr. ix
14; 1 Mace. x. 54, 56. 2. twa, for 03°, to marry the
widow of a brother who has died childless: Gen. xxxviii.
8; Mt. xxii. 24, where allusion is made to the levirate
law recorded in Deut. xxv. 5-10; cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Leviratsehe; [BB. DD.s. v. Marriage]. (Not found in
native Grk. auth. [exc. schol. ad Eur. Or. 574 sqq.; ef.
W126i).
éri-yetos, -ov, (ent and yi), existing upon the earth,
earthly, terrestrial: oixia, the house we live in on earth,
spoken of the body with which we are clothed in this
world, 2 Co. v. 1; odpara émiyera, opp. to émovpdna, 1
err uy lvopute
Co. xv. 40; absolutely, of émtyewor (opp. to of emroupavioe
and oi katay@dv0r), those who are on earth, the inhabit-
ants of the earth, men, Phil. ii. 10; ra entyera, things
done on earth, spoken of the new birth wrought by the
Holy Spirit, Jn. iii. 12; cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg.
Pp. 212 sq.; ra emtyeca ppoveiv, to set the mind on the
pleasures and good things of earth, Phil. iii. 19; copia
emiyetos (opp. to 7 dvwbev Katepyouémm), the wisdom of
man, liable to error and misleading, Jas. iii. 15. (From
Plato down; nowhere in the O. T.) *
émi-yivopor: 2 aor. éemeyerduny ; 1. to become or
happen afterwards; to be born after. 2. to come to,
arrive: of time, tercapecxaidexdtn vvé éreyévero, Acts
xxvil. 27 L [ed. ster.], T [edd. 2, 7]; (€apos éemuyiyverat
pn, Hom. Il. 6, 148). 3. to arise, spring up, come on:
émvyevopevou vorov, a south wind having sprung up, Acts
xxviii. 13; (Thue. 3, 74; 4, 30).*
ém-ywookw; [impf. ereyivaokor]; fut. émryvdcopa; 2
aor. éréyvwv; pf. éméyvaxa; [Pass., pres. eTLYyLVa@oKOpAL ;
1 aor. émeyyvaoOnv]; (é€mi denotes mental direction tow-
ards, application to, that which is known) ; in the Sept.
chiefly for py? and 933, V3; 1. to become thorough-
ly acquainted with, to know thoroughly; to know accu-
rately, know well, [see reff. s. v. ériyvwots, init.]: 1 Co.
xill. 12 (where ywaoke ex pepovs and emcyw. i. e. to know
thoroughly, know well, divine things, are contrasted [ W.
§ 39, 3 N.2]); with an acc. of the thing, Lk. i. 4; 2 Co.i.
13 ; rHv xadpw Tov Beod, Col. i. 6 ; rv adnOerav, 1 Tim. iv. 3;
thy Oddy THs Sikaocvyns, 2 Pet. ii. 21 [cf. B. 305 (262)];
TO Stxaiwpa Tov Oeov, Ro. i. 32; ri foll. by dre (by the fa-
miliar attraction [W. 626 (581); B. 376 (322); some
bring this ex. under 2 a. in the sense of acknowledge]),
1 Co. xiv. 87; ruva, one’s character, will, deeds, deserts,
etc., 1 Co. xvi. 18; 2 Co.i. 14; [pass. opp. to dyvoovpevor,
2 Co. vi. 9]; teva amd twos (gen. of thing), Mt. vii. 16, 20
[Lchm. é«] (“a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cogno-
scere,”’ for the more common ez, Caes. b. g. 1, 22, 2 [ef. B.
324 (278sq.); W. 372 (348)]); by attraction rid, dre
etc. 2 Co. xiii. 5; émvywaoket tov vidv, rov marépa, Mt. xi.
27. 2. univ. to know; a. to recognize: tid, i. e. by
sight, hearing, or certain signs, to perceive who a person
is, Mt. xiv. 35; Mk. vi.54; Lk. xxiv. 16, 31; Mk. vi. 33
[R T, but G WH mrg. without the accus.]; by attrac-
tion, ted, drt, Acts ili. 10; iv. 13; twa, his rank and
authority, Mt. xvii. 12; with acc. of the thing, to recog-
nize a thing to be what it really is: tiv pwvny rod Teérpov,
Acts xii. 143 rav yqv, Acts xxvii. 39. _b. to know i. q.
to perceive: ri, Lk. v. 22; ev éavr@, foll. by acc. of the
thing with a ptcp. [B. 301 (258) ], Mk. v. 30; foll. by dru,
Lk. i. 22; 76 mvevdpare foll. by dre, Mk. ii. 8. ce. to know
i.e. to find out, ascertain: sc. avré, Acts ix. 30; foll. by
ért, Lk. vii. 37; xxiii. 7; Acts xix. 34; xxii. 29; xxiv. 11
LT Tr WH; xxviii. 1; ri, foll. by an indirect quest.,
Acts xxiii. 28 L T Tr WH; [80 fv airiay etc. Acts xxii.
24]; mapd twos (gen. of pers.) mepi twos (gen. of thing),
Acts xxiv. 8. 4d. to know i.e. to understand : Acts xxv.
10. [From Hom. down. ]*
éml-yvwors, -ews, 7), (ertywooxe, g.v. (cf. also Bp. Lghtft.
23T
* émrvdnuto
on Col. i. 9; Trench § Ixxv. ad fin.]), precise and cor-
rect knowledge; used in the N. T. of the knowledge of
things ethical and divine: absol., Phil. i.9; Col. iii. 10;
kat’ eriyvwow, Ro. x. 2; with gen. of the thing known,
Col. i. 9; ii 2; Philem. 6; rs ddnOeias, 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2
Tim. ii. 25; iii. 7; Tit. i. 1; Heb. x. 26; ris dpaprias,
Ro. iii. 20; with gen. of the person known ;— of God,
esp. the knowledge of his holy will and of the blessings
which he has bestowed and constantly bestows on men
through Christ: Eph. i. 17; Col. i. 10; 2 Pet. i. 2; of
Christ, i.e. the true knowledge of Christ’s nature, dig-
nity, benefits: Eph. iv. 13; 2 Pet. i. 8; ii. 20; of God
and Christ : 2 Pet. i. 2; Oedv yew év éemtyvaocer, i.e. to keep
the knowledge of the one true God which has illumined
the soul, Ro. i. 28. (Polyb., Plut., Hdian., [al.]; Sept.
occasionally for nyt; 2 Mace. ix. 11.) *
emt-ypady, -7s, 7, (emrypapw), an inscription, title: in
the N. T. of an inscription in black letters upon a
whitened tablet [B. D. s. v. Cross], Lk. xxiii. 38; with
the gen. ris airias, i. e. of the accusation, Mk. xv. 26,
(ypappara tv airiay ths Oavaracews aitod SnAovvra, Dio
Cass. 54, 3; cf. Sueton. Calig. 32; Domit. 10); of the
inscription on a coin: Mt. xxii. 20; Mk. xii. 16; Lk. xx.
24. (From Thue. down.) *
émypddhw: fut. eniypdyo; pf. pass. ptep. émyeypap-
pévos; plpf. 3 pers. sing. émeyéypanto; to write upon, in-
scribe: émypapnv, Mk. xv. 26 and L'Tr br. in Lk. xxiii.
38; dvduara, Rey. xxi. 12; é€v rum, Acts xvii. 23; fig. to
write upon the mind, i. e. to fix indelibly upon it, cause
to cleave to it and to be always vividly present to it:
vopous emt kapdias [-diav T WH mrg.], Heb. viii. 10; emt
tov Stavotav, Heb. x. 16 RG, emi thy Scavoray, ibid. L T
Tr WH, (rods Adyous emi rd mAdros ths Kapdias, Prov.
vii. 3). [From Hom. down. ]*
ém-Selxvupe; 1 aor. emederEa; [pres. mid. émdeixvupat] ;
to exhibit, show, [as though for ex position or exami-
nation (Schmidt ch. 127, 5); fr. Pind., Hdt. down.];
a. to bring forth to view: ri, Mt. xxii. 19; and Lk. xx. 24
Rec.; ri tu, Lk. xxiv. 40 RG; éaurdv rem, Lk. xvii. 14;
to show i. e. bid to look at, ri ru, Mt. xxiv. 1; to show
i. e. furnish to be looked at, produce what may be looked
at: onpeiov, Mt. xvi. 1; Mid. with acc. of the thing, to
display something belonging to one’s self: xir@vas, the
tunics as their own, Acts ix. 39 [see Meyer]. b. to prove,
demonstrate, set forth to be known and acknowledged:
Heb. vi. 17; foll. by the acc. and inf. Acts xviii. 28.*
ém-Séxopat; [fir. Hdt. down]; 1. to receive hospi-
tably: rid, 3 Jn. 10 (Polyb. 22, 1, 3). 2. to admit, i. e.
not to reject: rua, one’s authority, 3 Jn. 9 (rovs Adyous,
1 Mace. x. 46; macdeiay, Sir. li. 26). [Cf. Séxouar, fin. ] *
emiBnpew, -@; (€midnpos) ; 1. to be present among
one’s people, in one’s city or in one’s native land, (cf. éni,
D. 1], (Thuc., Plato, al.; opp. to drodnueiv, Xen. Cyr.
7,5, 69 ; émidnpei ev rHde TH Bi, Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 12
[p. 88 ed. Otto]). 2. to be a sojourner, a foreign resi-
dent, among any people, in any country: Acts ii. 10; of
émidnpoovres €€vor, Acts xvii. 21; (Xen., Plato, Theophr.,
Leian., Aelian, al.).*
> Pd e
eTLOLAaTAaTTOpat
ém-fia-rdccopar; to ordain besides, to add something to
what has been ordained, (cf. émi, D. 4]: Gal. iii. 15. Not
found elsewhere.*
ém-SiSwpi: 3 pers. sing. impf. émedidov ; fut. emdace ;
1 aor. éréOwxa; 2 aor. ptep. plur. emiddvres; 1 aor. pass.
éreddOnv; (fr. Hom. down]; to give over; 1. to hand,
give by handing: rwi 7, Mt. vii. 9 sq.; Lk. xi. 11 sq. ;
xxiv. 30, 42; Jn. xiii. 26[RGL]; Acts xv. 30; pass.
akesa valid 2. to give over, i.e. give up to the power or
will of one (Germ. preisgeben) : Acts xxvii. 15 (sc. éavrovs
or 7d moloy TO aveuw).™
ém-Bi-0p0dw (see Supbwars) : to set in order besides or
further (what still remains to be set in order, [cf. emi, D.
4]): Tit. i. 5, where, for the common reading émdtopbaan
(1 aor. mid. subjunc.), Lchm. has adopted emdcopAacns
(1 aor. act. subjunc.). Found also in inscriptions
(Boeckh ii. 409, 9), and in eccl. writ.*
ém-Sbw ; to go down, set (of the sun): Eph. iv. 26, on
which see eri, B.2 e. (Deut. xxiv.17 (15); Jer. xv. 9;
[Philo de spec. legg. 28]; and with tmesis, Hom. Il. 2,
413.) *
éme(xera [WH -xia, see I, ¢], -as, 7, (émverxns, q- V-),
mildness, gentleness, fairness, [‘sweet reasonableness’
(Matthew Arnold)]: Acts xxiv. 4; joined with mpadrns
[q. v-], 2 Co. x.1; Plut. Pericl. 39; with ¢iravOperia,
Polyb. 1, 14, 4; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 36; with ypyordrns,
Hdian. 5,1,12[6 ed. Bekk.]. Cf. Plato, defin. p. 412 b.;
Aristot. eth. Nic.5, 10. (Bar. ii. 27; Sap. ii. 19; xii. 18;
2 Mace. ii. 22; 3 Mace. iii. 15.) *
[Syn. émreixeta, tpadrtys: “mp. magis ad animum,
ém. vero magis ad exteriorem conversationem pertinet”
(Estius on 2Co. x. 1). “mp. virtus magis absoluta; ému.
magis refertur ad alios” (Bengel, ibid.). See at length
Trench § xliii.]
émueiktjs, -€s, (e’kds, what is reasonable) ; 1. seemly,
suitable, (fr. Hom. down). 2. equitable, fair, mild,
gentle: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. iii. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 18; Jas. iii. 17.
Neut. 76 éemvecxées (as often in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down)
tpav i. g. 7 emetkeca tov, Phil. iv. 5.
fin. ]*
ém-fytéw, -@; impf. éme(nrovy; 1 aor. eme(ntnaa; fr.
Hat. down ; Sept. for w7 and in 1S. xx.1; Ecel. vii. 29
(28) for WP3; to inquire for, seek for, search for, seek
diligently, (Germ. herbeisuchen [the ém- seems to be di-
rective rather than intensive]): tuvd, Lk. iv. 42 (for Rec.
e(nrovv) ; Acts xii. 19; i. q. to desire, wish for, crave : Ti,
Mt. vi. 32; Lk. xii. 30; Ro. xi. 7; Phil. iv. 17; Heb. xi.
14; xill. 14; mepi twos, Acts xix. 39 [RG T] (but if
your inquiry or desire has reference to other matters) ;
with the inf. Acts xiii. 7 (as in Polyb. 8, 57, 7; Diod. 19,
8); i. q. to demand, clamor for: onpeiov, Mt. xii. 39; xvi.
4; Mk. viii. 12 RG; Lk. xi. 29 (where T Tr WH yrei
[as L T Tr WH in Mk. 1. c.]).*
émBavaruos, -ov, (Aavaros), doomed to death: 1 Co. iv.
9. (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 35.) *
eml-Yeors, -ews, 9, (miriOnu), a laying on, imposition:
rév xetpor, Acts viii. 18; 1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim.i. 6; Heb.
vi. 2. The imposition of hands, ye:podecia, was a sacred
[See érveixeca,
238
emrvOupia
rite transmitted by the Jews to the Christians, and em-
ployed in praying for another, or in conferring upon him
divine blessings, especially bodily health, or the Holy
Spirit (at the administration of baptism and the inaugu-
ration to their office of the teachers and ministers of the
church): Gen. xviii. 14; Num. xxvii. 18, 23; Deut.
xxxiv. 9; 2K. v.11, ete.; Mt. xix.13; Mk. xvi. 18; Acts
vi. 6; xiii. 3; xix. 6, etc. [See B. D. s. v. Baptism (sup-
plement) ; McCl. and Strong and Dict. of Chris. Antiq.
s. v. Imposition of Hands. ]*
émiOupéw, -&; [impf. éreOvpour]; fut. emOvpnow; 1 aor.
érebipnoa; (Oupds); fr. Aeschyl. down; Sept. for 738
and 1M; prop. to keep the Ovpds turned upon a thing,
hence [cf. our éo set one’s heart upon] to have a desire for,
long for; absol. to desire [A. V. lust], Jas. iv. 2; to lust
after, covet, of those who seek things forbidden, Ro. vii.
7; xiii. 9 (fr. Ex. xx. 17); 1 Co. x. 6, (4 Mace. ii. 6);
xara tvos, to have desires opposed to [A.V. lust against] a
thing, Gal. v. 17 [B. 335 (288)]; twés, to long for, covet
a thing, Acts xx. 33; 1 Tim. iii. 1; of sexual desire,
yuvatkds, Mt. v. 28 Rec. [see below] (savdos 4 yuvatkés,
Xen. an. 4, 1, 14; with the gen. also in Ex. xxxiv. 24;
Prov. xxi. 26; xxiii. 3,6; Sap. vi.12; Sir. xxiv. 19 (18),
etc.) ; contrary to the usage of the better Grk. writ. with
the ace. of the object, Mt. v. 28 L Tr (WH br.), and with-
out an obj. Tdf. (Ex. xx. 17; Deut.v. 21; Mic. ii. 2; Sap.
xvi. 3; Sir. i. 26 (23), ete.; cf. W. § 30,10b.) 5 as often
in Grk. writ., foll. by the inf.: Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. xv. 16;
[xvi-21]}-xvii. 22; 1 Pet. i. 12; Rev. ix. 6; foll. by the
ace. with the inf. Heb. vi. 113; ém@upia émeOvpnoa I have
greatly desired, Lk. xxii. 15; cf. W. § 54, 3; B. § 133,
22 a.*
érvOupntys, -ov, 6, (émibupew), one who longs for, a
craver, lover, one eager for: kaxav, 1 Co. x. 6 (Num. xi.
4). In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.*
érOupta, -as, 7, (emOvpéw), [fr. Hdt. on], Sept. chiefly
for MINA, MAN, WIM; desire, craving, longing: Lk. xxii.
15 (on which see in émiOupé, fin.); Rev. xviii. 14; rv
emOupiay €xeww ets Tt, the desire directed towards, Phil. i.
23; é€v modAn émtOvpia witlt great desire, 1 Th. ii. 17;
plur. af wept ra Nowra emeOvupia, Mk. iv. 19 [W. § 30, 3 N.
5]; spec. desire for what is forbidden, lust, (Vulg. con-
cupiscentia) : Ro. vii. 7sq.; Jas. i. 14 sq.; 2 Pet.i.4; ma6os
émtOupias, 1 Th. iv. 5; émiOvpia xaxn, Col. iii. 5, (Prov. xxi.
26; [xii. 12]; Plat. lege. 9 p.854 a.; movnpa, Xen. mem.
1, 2, 64; dyabn, Sir. xiv. 14 where see Fritzsche, [who
cites also Prov. xi. 23; xiii. 12]); plur., Gal. v. 24; 1
Tim. vi. 93: 2 Tims 22ssive3 1 Retains iva with
a gen. of the object, émOupia pracpod, for unclean inter-
course, 2 Pet. ii. 10 [al. with W. § 34, 3 b. take puacp. as
gen. of quality]; with a gen. of the subject, ai émOupia
tev kapd.ov, Ro. i. 24; with a gen. of the thing by which
the desire is excited, ) ém@upia rod kédcpov, 1 In. ii.
17; rod gaparos, Ro. vi. 12; ris amatns (see dmdrn),
Eph. iv. 22; rjs capkés, trav dpOarpev, 1 In. ii. 16 (cf.
Huther ad loc.) ; 2 Pet. ii. 18; redeiv éemOvpiav capkés,
Gal. v.16; ai capxixal emOupiar, 1 Pet. ii. 11 (uyexai,
copartkat, 4 Macc. i. 32); ai xoopexal emOvpia, Tit. ii.
arixabifw
12; es émOvpias to arouse lusts, Ro. xiii. 14; moveiv ras
émisupdas, Jn. vill. 44; Srakovew tats emOupiats, Ro. vi.
12[LT Tr WH]; Sovrevew emiOvuias (see Sovdeva, 2
b.), Tit. iii. 3; dyerOa emtOupiacs, 2 Tim. iii. 6; Tropeve-
oa év émiOvpias, 1 Pet. iv. 3; mopever Oat Kata Tas émt-
Ovpias, Jude 16, 18; 2 Pet. iii. 3; avaotpepeaOat ev rats
émOupias tis capkds, Eph. ii. 3. [Syn. cf. wdOos, and
see Trench § Ixxxvii.] *
émt-Kad-(fo: 1 aor. émexddica ; 1. to cause to sit
upon, to set upon: Mt. xxi. 7 Rec.e2 2. intrans. to sit
upon: Matt. 1. c. [Rec.*] GL T Tr WH al.*
émt-Kah€w, -G: 1 aor. émexddeoa; [Pass. and Mid., pres.
emixahovpar|; pf. pass. émixékAnuat; plpf. 3 pers. sing.
émexekAnto, and with neglect of augm. [cf. W. § 12, 9; B.
33 (29)] émixéxAnro (Acts xxvi. 32 Lchm.); 1 aor. pass.
emexAnOnv ; fut. mid. émiadécouar; 1 aor. mid. émexaXde-
odunv; Sept. very often for 87) ; 1. to put a name
upon, to surname: twa (Xen., Plato, al.), Mt. x. 25 G
T Tr WH (Ree. éxddecav) ; pass. 6 émixadovpevos, he who
is surnamed, Lk. xxii. 3 RG L; Acts x.18; xi. 13; xii.
12; xv. 22 RG; also os emxadeira, Acts x. 5, 32; 6 ém-
KAnOeis, Mt. x. 3 [RG]; Acts iv. 36; xii. 25; iq. Os éme-
kA7nOn, Acts i. 23. Pass. with the force of a mid. [cf. W.
§ 38, 3], to permit one’s self to be surnamed: Heb. xi. 16;
Mid. w. twa: 1 Pet. i. 17 ef warépa éemixadeiabe Tov ete. i.e.
if ye call (for yourselves) on him as father, i. e. if ye sur-
name him your father. 2. émtkadeirat TO Ovopua Twos
éni twa, after the Hebr. “7p Sy 5 Dw NP), the name
of one is named upon some one, i. e. he is called by his
name or declared to be dedicated to him (cf. Gesenius,
Thesaur. iii. p. 1232"): Acts xv. 17 fr. Am. ix. 12 (the
name referred to is the people of God); Jas. ii. 7 (the
name oi tod Xptorod). 3. rwi with the ace. of the
object; prop. to call something to one [cf. Eng. to cry out
upon (or against) one]; to charge something to one as a
crime or reproach; to summon one on any charge, prose-
cute one for a crime; to blame one for, accuse one of,
(Arstph. pax 663; Thue. 2, 27; 3, 36; Plat. legg. 6,
761 e.3 7, 809 e.; Dio Cass. 36, 28; 40,41 and often in
the orators [cf. s. v. katnyopéw]) : €i TH oixodeardrn Beeh-
CeBoodd érexddecay (i. e. accused of commerce with Beel-
zebul, of receiving his help, cf. Mt. ix. 34; xii. 24; Mk.
iii. 22; Lk. xi. 15), woo@ paddov Trois oiktakots avrov, Mt.
x. 25 LWHmrg. after cod. Vat. (see 1 above), a read-
ing defended by Rettig in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1838,
p- 477 sqq. and by Alex. Bttm. in the same journal for
1860, p. 343, and also in his N. T. Gram. 151 (132);
[also by Weiss in Mey. ed. 7 ad loc.]. But this expres-
sion (Beelzebul for the help of Beelzebul) is too hard
not to be suggestive of the emendation of some ignorant
scribe, who took offence because (with the exception of
this passage) the enemies of Jesus are nowhere in the
Gospels said to have called him by the name of Beelze-
bul. 4. to call upon (like Germ. anrufen), to invoke ;
Mid. to call upon for one’s self, in one’s behalf: any one
as a helper, Acts vii. 59, where supply rév kiptov "Inoodv
(BonOév, Plat. Euthyd. p. 297 c.; Diod. 5, 79); Twa
udprupa, as my witness, 2 Co. i. 23 (Plat. legg. 2, 664 c.);
239
émrixoupia
as a judge, i.e. to appeal to one, make appeal unto: ‘at
gapa, Acts xxv. 11 sq. ; xxvi. 32: xxviii. 19; [rdv SeBa-
orov, Acts xxv. 25]; foll. by the inf. pass. Acts xxv. 21 (to
be reserved). 5. Hebraistically (like nim. owas Dale
to call upon by pronouncing the name of Jehovah, Gen.
iv. 26; xii. 8; 2 K. v. 11, etc.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p:
1231” [or Hebr. Lex. s. v. 8p]; an expression finding
its explanation in the fact that prayers addressed to God
ordinarily began with an invocation of the divine name:
Ps. iii. 2; vi. 2; vii. 2, etc.) émexadodpar Td dvopa rod kuplov,
I call upon (on my behalf) the name of the Lord, i.e. to
invoke, adore, worship, the Lord, i.e. Christ: Acts ii. 21
(fr. Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5)); ix. 14, 21; xxii. 16; Ro. x. 13
sq-; 1 Co. i. 2; rév xvptov, Ro. x. 12; 2 Tim. ii. 22;
(often in Grk. writ. émxadeiobat rovs Ocovs, as Xen. Cyr.
7,1, 35; Plat. Tim. p.27¢.; Polyb. 15, 1, 13).*
ém-KdAuppa, -Tos, 76, (emikadvmTw@), a covering, veil;
prop. in Sept.: Ex. xxvi. 14; xxxvi. 19 Compl. [cf.
xxxix. 21 Tdf.]; metaph. i. q. a pretext, cloak: ris kaklas,
1 Pet. ii. 16 (@Aodros Sé€ woAAGy emixddrAvpy’” earl Kaxav,
Menand. ap. Stob. flor. 91, 19 [iii. 191 ed. Gaisf.];
“quaerentes libidinibus suis patrocinium et velamen-
tum,” Seneca, vita beata 12).*
émi-Kahimrw : [1 aor. émexadkvpOnv]; to cover over: ai
dpaptiat émixadv’mrovrat, are covered over so as not to
come to view, i. e. are pardoned, Ro. iv. 7 fr. Ps. xxxi.
(xox) 1
émt-Kat-éparTos, -ov, (€mxarapdoya to imprecate curses
upon), only in bibl. and eccl. use, accursed, execrable, ex-
posed to divine vengeance, lying under God’s curse: Jn.
vil. 49 RG; Gal. iii. 10 (Deut. xxvii. 26) ; ibid. 13 (Deut.
xxi. 23); (Sap. iii. 12 (13); xiv. 8; 4 Mace. ii. 19; in
Sept. often for 1398).*
ér(-Keysar; impf. émexeiynyv; to lie upon or over, rest
upon, be laid or placed upon; a. prop.: émi rum, Jn. xi.
38; sc. on the burning coals, Jn. xxi.9. b. figuratively,
a. of things: of the pressure of a violent tempest, ye
pa@vos emterpevov, Acts xxvii. 20 (Plut. Timol. 28, 7) ;
dvaykn pot émixecrat, is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16 (Hom.
Tl. 6, 458) ; émukeipeva, of observances imposed on a man
by law, Heb. ix. 10 [ef. W. 635 (589)]. B. of men; &
press upon, to be urgent: with dat. of pers. Lk. v. 1;
érréxewrTo airovpevot, Lk. xxiii. 23 (@oAA@ paddov eréxerto
d&.v, Joseph. antt. 18, 6,6; padrov emێxewto Brdodn-
povrtes, 20, 5, 3)
ém-Keddw: [1 aor. eméxevka]; to run a ship ashore, to
bring to land; so fr. Hom. Od. 9, 148 down; ézéke:dav
(RG éraxecdav) thy vadv, Acts xxvii. 41 L TTr WH;
but in opposition see Meyer ad loc. [Cf. B.D. Am. ed.
p- 3009.]*
[émt-Kehddarov, -ov, 76, head-money, poll-taz, (Aristot. oec.
2 p. 13469, 4 and 1348, 32): Mk. xii. 14 WH (rejected)
mrg. for Kqvoov (al.).*]
’Emuxotperos [-psos IT WH; see I, ¢], -ov, 6, Epicurean,
belonging to the sect of Epicurus, the philosopher: Acts
xvii. 18.*
émuxovpla, -as, 7), (emexoupéw to aid), aid, succor: Acts
xxvi. 22. (Sap. xiii. 18; fr. Thuc. and Eur. down.) * ,
émicpww
ému-kpwww: 1 aor. eméxpwa; to adjudge, approve oy one’s
decision, decree, give sentence: fell. by the acc. with inf.,
Lk. xxiii. 24. (Plato, Dem., Plut., Hdian., al.) *
émt-AapBdvw; 2 aor. mid. émeAaBdpunv; to take in addi-
tion [cf. émi, D. 4], to take, lay hold of, take possession
of, overtake, attain to. In the Bible only in the mid. ;
Sept. for 1n8 and puny; a. prop. to lay hold of or to
seize upon anything with the hands (Germ. sich an etwas
anhalten) : rav apAdorwv nds, Hat. 6,114; hence, univ.
to take hold of, lay hold of: with gen. of pers., Mt. xiv.
31; Lk. ix.47 [Tr WH acc.]; (xxiii. 26 RG); Acts
xvii. 19; xxi. 30, 33; with ace. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 26 L
T Tr WH, but in opposition see Meyer; for where the
ptep. émAaBdpevos is in this sense joined with an acc.,
the acc., by the oxjpa dé kowod, depends also upon the
accompanying finite verb (cf. B. § 132, 9; [so W. (ed.
Liinem.) 202 (190)]): Actsix.27; xvi. 19; xviii. 17, cf.
Lk. xiv. 4. with the gen. of a thing: ris xetpds Tivos,
Mk. viii. 23; Acts xxiii. 19; of a leader, and thus met-
aph. of God, Heb. viii. 9 [cf. W. 571 (531); B. 316
(271)]; with gen. of a pers. and of a thing: émA. rivos
Adyou, pnuatos, to take any one in his speech, i. e. to lay
hold of something said by him which can be turned
against him, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr Adyov], 26 [WH Tr mrg. rot
for avrov]; émA. tis aiwviov [al. dvtws} (wns, to seize
upon, lay hold of, i. e. to struggle to obtain eternal life,
1 Tim. vi. 12, 19, [ef. W. 312 (293)]. b. by a metaph.
drawn from laying hold of another to rescue him from
peril, to help, to succor, (cf. Germ. sich eines annehmen) :
twos, Heb. ii. 16; in this sense used besides only in Sir.
iv. 11 and Schol. ad Aeschyl. Pers. 739. In Appian.bel.
civ. 4,96 the act. is thus used with the dat.: nyiv ro
Sarpovioy émdapBaver.*
émt-AavOdvopat; pf. pass. émuAcAnopat; 2 aor. mid. ére-
Aabdunv; Sept. often for NIwW; to forget: foll. by the inf.,
Mt. xvi. 5; Mk. viii. 14; foll. by an indir. quest. Jas.
i. 24; in the sense of neglecting, no longer caring for:
with the gen., Heb. vi. 10; xiii. 2,16; with the ace. (cf.
W. § 30, 10 c.; Matthiae § 347 Anm. 2, ii. p. 820 sq.),
Phil. iii. 13 (14); with a pass. signification (Is. xxiii. 16;
Sir. iii. 14; xxxii. (xxxv.) 9; Sap. ii. 4, ete. [cf. B. 52
(46) ]): éemAeAnopevos forgotten, given over to oblivion,
i.e. uncared for, évamov tov Oeod before God i. e. by
God (Sir. xxiii. 14), Lk. xii. 6. [(From Hom. on.)]*
émi-Aéyo: [ pres. pass. ptcp. émAeyduevos]; 1 aor. mid.
ptcp. emdreEduevos ; 1. to say besides (cf. émi, D. 4],
(Hat. et al.) ; to surname (Plato, lege. 3 p. 700 b.): in
pass. Jn. v. 2 [Tdf. rd Aey.], unless the meaning to name
(put a name upon) be preferred here; cf. érovopdta.
2. to choose for (Hat. et sqq. ; Sept.) ; mid. to choose for
one’s self: Acts xv. 40 (2S. x. 9; Hdt. 3,157; Thue.
7, 19; Diod. 3, 73 (74); 14,12; Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 4,
and others).*
émv-Aelrw: fut. emadreibo; to fail, not to suffice for (any
purpose, for the attainment of an end): rwd 6 xpovos,
time fails one, Heb. xi. 32 and many like exx. in Grk.
writ. fr. Dem. down; see Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2
p. 818*
240
CTL EVO
émi-helxwo: impf. éréAerxov ; to lick the surface of, lick
over ([cf. émi, D.1]; Germ. belecken): with the acc. ot a
thing, Lk. xvi. 21 L T Tr WH; (in Long. past. 1, 24
(11) a var. for émrpéx@).*
émudnopovh, -7s, 7), (€mAnopov forgetful [W. 93 (89) ]),
forgetfulness : dxpoatns emAnopovns, a forgetful hearer
[ef. W. § 34, 3b.; B. 161 (140)], Jas. i. 25. (Sir. xi. 27
(25).)*
ért-ouros, -ov, (Aowros), remaining besides, left over,
[ef. éwi, D. 4]: 1 Pet.iv.2. (Sept.; Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down.) *
émt-Avots, -ews, 7, (E7tAVa, g. V-), @ loosening, unloosing
(Germ. Auflisung); metaph. interpretation: 2 Pet. i.
20, on which pass. see yivoua, 5e.a. (Gen. xl. 8 Aq.;
Heliod. 1, 18; but not Philo, vitacontempl. § 10, where
emdeiEews was long ago restored.) *
ému-Atw: impf. éméAvov; 1 fut. pass. émiAvOnoopa; a.
properly, to unloose, untie (Germ. auflésen) anything
knotted or bound or sealed up; (Xen., Theocr., Hdian.).
b. to clear (a controversy), to decide, settle: Acts xix.
39; to explain (what is obscure and hard to understand) :
Mk. iv. 34 (as in Gen. xli. 12 var.; Philo, vita contempl.
§ 10; de agricult. § 3; Sext. Empir. 2, 246; ypidous,
Athen. 10 p. 449 e.; also in mid., Athen. 10 p. 450 f.;
Joseph. antt. 8, 6, 5, and often by the Scholiasts).*
émi-paptupéw, -@; to bear witness to, establish by testi-
mony: foll. by the acc. with inf., 1 Pet. v.12. (Plato,
Joseph., Plut., Leian., al.) [Come.: cvv-eripaprupéo. | *
émupeAeta, -as, 7), (emipedns careful), care, attention: Acts
XxvVii. 3. (Prov. iii. 8; 1 Macc. xvi. 14; 2 Macc. xi. 23;
very com. in Grk. prose writ., not used in the poets.)*
émi-ped€opar, -odpar, and empueAouar: fut. empeAnoopar ;
1 aor. émepeAnOnv; with gen. of the object, to take care of
a person or thing (éwi denoting direction of the mind
toward the object cared for [cf. émi, D. 2]): Lk. x. 34 sq. ;
1 Tim. iii. 5. (Gen. xliv. 21; 1 Mace. xi. 37; 1 Esdr.
vi. 26; used by Grk. writ. esp. of prose fr. Hdt. down.) *
emupedds, adv., diligently, carefully: Lk. xv. 8.*
ém-pevw ; [impf. eréwevov]; fut. emevO; 1 aor. émé-
pewa; to stay at or with; to tarry still; still to abide, to
continue, remain; a. prop. of tarrying in a place: év
"Edéo, 1 Co. xvi. 8; év rH capki, to live still longer on
earth, Phil. i. 24 (G T WH om. év) ; adrod, there, Acts xv.
34 [Rec.]; xxi. 4 [Lehm. avrois]; with dat. of thing: 17
capki, to abide as it were a captive to life on earth, Phil.
1.24 GTWH; éni rium, with one, Acts xxviii. 14 [LT
Tr WH sap’]; mpos twa, with one, 1 Co. xvi. 7; Gal. i.
18; with specification of time how long: Acts x. 48;
20.4 ANNE Seantey IO IZES Ih Olusank ibe trop. to per-
severe, continue; with dat. of the thing continued in
[cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p.10 sq.] : 7 dpapria,
Ro. vi. 1; 19 dmoria, Ro. xi. 23; 77 moter, Col. i. 23; in
the work of teaching, 1 Tim. iv. 16 (7 i) ddixeiv, Xen.
oec. 14, 7; rh pynoreia, Ael. vy. h. 10,15); with dat. of the
blessing for which one keeps himself fit: 79 ydpurt, Acts
xiii. 43 Ree.; 77 ypnorornrt, Ro. xi. 22; with a ptep.
denoting the action persisted in: Jn. viii. 7 Rec.; Acts
xii. 16; cf. B. 299 sq. (257); [W. § 54, 4].*
eT Leva
ém-vetw: 1 aor. émévevoa; fr. Hom. down; to nod to;
trop. (by anod) to express approval, to assent: Acts xviii.
20, as often in Grk. writ.*
érivowa, -as, 7), (€mwoew to think on, devise), thought,
purpose: Acts viii. 22. (Jer. xx. 10; Sap. vi. 17, ete.;
often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Thuc. down.) *
émiopxew, -@: fut. emopxnow, cf. Kriiger § 40 s. v., and
§ 39, 12,4; [Veitch s.v.; B.53 (46)]; (émiopkos, q.v.) ;
to swear falsely, forswear one’s self: Mt. v. 33. (Sap.
xiv. 28; 1 Esdr. i. 46; by Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
ért-opkos, -ov, (fr. emi [q. v. D. 7] against, and dpxos) ;
[masce. as subst.] a false swearer, a perjurer: 1 Tim.i.10.
(From Hom. down.) *
émiotora, see emeipt.
émvovcvos, -ov, a word found only in Mt. vi. 11 and Lk. xi.
a
3, in the eporake aptos émuovatos ([Pesh.] Syr. Los
Vo
olay? the bread of our necessity, i. e. necessary for
us [but the Curetonian (earlier) Syriac reads Lao}
continual ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below, I. 3 p. 214 sqq.; Tay-
lor, Sayings of the Jewish Fathers, p. 139 sq.]; Itala
[Old Lat.] panis quotidianus). Origen testifies [de orat.
27] that the word was not in use in ordinary speech, and
accordingly seems to have been coined by the Evange-
lists, themselves. Many commentators, as Beza, Kui-
noel, Tholuck, Ewald, Bleek, Keim, Cremer, following
Origen, Jerome (who in Mt. only translates by the bar-
barous phrase panis supersubstantialis), Theophylact,
Euthymius Zigabenus, explain the word by bread for
sustenance, which serves to sustain life, deriving the word
from ovata, after the analogy of e£ovcr0s, évovcros. But
ovoia very rarely, and only in philosophic language, is
equiv. to Umap&s, as in Plato, Theaet. p. 185 c. (opp. to
TO pL) etvac), Aristot. de part. anim. i. 1 (7 yap yéveots
€vexa Tis ovaias eaTiv, dAN ovyx 7 ovcia Evexa THs yeverews ;
for other exx. see Bonitz’s Index to Aristot. p. 544), and
generally denotes either essence, real nature, or sub-
stance, property, resources. On this account Leo Meyer
(in Kuhn, Zeitschr. f. vergleich. Sprachkunde, vii. pp.
401-430), Kamphausen (Gebet des Herrn, pp. 86-102),
with whom Keim (ii. 278 sq. [ Eng. trans. iii. 340]), Weiss
(Mt. 1. c.), Delitzsch (Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. 1876 p.
402), agree, prefer to derive the word from ézetva: (and
in particular fr. the ptcep. émav, émovavos for éruvrios, see
below) to be present, and to understand it bread which is
ready at hand or suffices, so that Christ is conjectured to
have said in Chald. 83pn3 Nom? (cf. pn on? my allow-
ance of bread, Prov. xxx. 8) or something of the sort.
But this opinion, like the preceding, encounters the great
objection (to mention no other) that, although the ¢ in emi
is retained before a vowel in certain words (as émopkos,
émuopkéw, emuoraopat, etc. [cf. Bp. Lghtft., as below, I.
§ 1]), yet in éeiva: and words derived from it, émoveia,
érovo.odns, it is always elided. Therefore much more cor-
rectly do Grotius, Scaliger, Wetstein, Fischer (De vitiis
lexx. ete. p. 306 sqq-), Valckenaer, Fritzsche (on Mt. p.
267 sqq.), Winer (97 (92)), Bretschneider, Wahl, Meyer,
[Bp. Lghtft. (Revision etc., App.) ] and others, compar-
241
émiTrobew
ing the words éxovatos, ébeXovawos, yepovoros, (fr. xa, €O€-
Aov, yépav, for Exovrios, €GedAdvTios, yepovtvos, cf. Kiihner i.
§ 63, 3 and § 334, 1 Anm. 2), conjecture that the adjec-
tive émovatos is formed from emdy, emovaa, with refer-
ence to the familiar ee 7) €mtovca (see érretut),
and apros emtovctos is equiv. to dpros tis emovons npépas,
food for (i. e. necessary or sufficient for) the morrow.
Thus émovovor and opepov admirably answer to each
other, and that state of mind is portrayed which, piously
contented with food sufficing from one day to the nect, in
praying to God for sustenance does not go beyond the
absolute necessity of the nearest future. This explana-
tion is also recommended by the fact that in the Gospel
according to the Hebrews, as Jerome testifies, the word
émovotos was represented by the Aramaic Im, “quod
dicitur crastinus”’; hence it would seem that Christ him-
self used the Chaldaic expression 409 at ARE Nor
is the prayer, so understood, at variance with the mind
of Christ as expressed in Mt. vi. 34, but on the contrary
harmonizes with it finely; for his hearers are bidden
to ask of God, in order that they may themselves be
relieved of anxiety for the morrow. [See Bp. Lehtft.,
as above, pp. 195-234; McClellan, The New Test. ete.
pp- 632-647; Tholuck, Bergpredigt, Mt. 1. c., for earlier
Pettey ie
émi-mrlarrw ; 2 aor. ememecoy, 3 pers. plur. émérevav, Ro.
xv. 3 L T Tr WH [cf. drépyopat init.]; pf. ptep. érure-
mrakos; [see mimra]; Sept. for 523; to fall upon; to
rush or press upon ; a. prop.: tii, upon one, Mk. iii.
10; to lie upon one, Acts xx. 10; émi rov tpaxnddv twos,
to fall into one’s embrace, Lk. xv. 20; Acts xx. 37, (Gen.
xlvi. 29; Tobit xi. 8, 12; 3 Mace. v. 49); to fall back
upon, émi to ands twos, Jn. xiii.25RGT. b. metaph.
emi twa, to fall upon one, i. e. to seize, take possession of
him: dBos, Lk.i. 12; Acts xix.17[L Tr érecev]; Rev.
xi. 11 LT Tr WH; éxoraois, Acts x. 10 Rec.; ayAvs,
Acts xiii, 11[RG]. used also of the Holy Spirit, in its
inspiration and impulse: emi rev, Acts viii, 16 ; emi riva,
x. 44 [Lchm. érece]; xi. 15, (Ezek. xi. 5); of reproaches
cast upon one: Ro. xv. 3 [Noteworthy is the absol.
use in Acts xxiii. 7 WH mrg. émemecey (al. eyévero) ora-
ois. (From Hdt. down.) ]*
émt-mAnoow: 1 aor. émemAnéa;
upon, beat upon: Hom. II. 10, 500. b. trop. to chas-
tise with words, to chide, upbraid, rebuke: 1 Tim. v. 1.
(Hom. Il. 12, 211; Xen., Plato, Polyb., al.) *
émi-ro0éw, -@; 1 aor. emendbnoa; prop. méOov exw emi
ru [i. e. emi is directive, not intensive ; cf. émi, D. 2]
(ef. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 30 sq-); to long for, de-
sire: foll. by the inf. 2 Co. v. 2; idety twa, Ro. i. 11; 1
Th. iii. 6; 2 Tim. i. 4; Phil. ii. 26 L br. WH txt. br.; ri,
1 Pet. ii. 2 (émi 71, Ps. xli. (xlii.) 2); twa, to be possessed
with a desire for, long for, [W. § 30. 10 b.], Phil. ii. 26
RGTTr WH nrg. ; to pursue with love, to long after:
2 Co. ix. 14; Phil. i. 8, (ras éevroAds Oeov, Ps. cxviii.
(exix.) 131) ; absol. to lust [i. e. harbor forbidden desire]:
Jas. iv. 5, on which pass. see POdvos. (Hadt., Plat., Diod.,
Plut., Leian.) *
a. prop. to strike
érurroOnats
ém-r60qors, -ews, 9, longing: 2 Co. vii. 7,11. (Ezek.
xxiii. 11 Aq.; Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 21, 131 p. 527 a.) *
ému-160n70s, -ov, longed for: Phil. iv.1. ([Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 65,1; Barn. ep. 1,3]; App. Hisp. 43; Eustath.;
[ef. W. § 34, 3].)*
émumodia [ WH -1d0era, see s. Vv. €t, ¢],-as, 9, longing: Ro.
xv. 23; dmaé Neydp. [On the passage cf. B. 294 (252). ]*
émi-mopevopar; ¢o go or journey to: mpds twa, Lk. viii.
4; (foll. by émi with the acc. Ep. Jer. 61 (62); Polyb. 4,
9, 2; freq. used by Polyb. with the simple acc. of place:
both to go to, traverse regions, cities (so riy yy, Ezek.
xxxix. 14 for V1y ; tas Suvdyers, 3 Mace. i. 4), and also
to make a hostile inroad, overrun, march over).*
ém-ppirro (T Tr WH émpamra, see P, p) ; (parrw to
sew); to sew upon, sew to: émi raw (RG; al. twa], Mk.
Livp2 lee
ém-ppirrw (LT Tr WH empintw, see P, p): 1 aor.
éreppia; (pint) ; to throw upon, place upon: ti emi 7,
Lk. xix. 35; (Vulg. projicere, to throw away, throw off) :
Tiv pépyvay emi Gedy, i. e. to cast upon, give up to, God,
1 Pet. v. 7, fr. Ps. liv. (lv.) 23. [Occasionally fr. Hom.
Od. 5, 310 down.] *
érionpos, -ov, (ojuaa sign, mark) ; 1. prop. having
a mark on it, marked, stamped, coined: dpyvpiov, xpucss,
(Hadt., Thue., Xen., Polyb., Joseph.). 2. trop. marked
(Lat. insignis). both in a good and bad sense ; in a good
sense, of note, illustrious: Ro. xvi. 7 (Hdt. et sqq.-) ;
in a bad sense, notorious, infamous: Mt. xxvii. 16 (Eur.
Or. 249; Joseph. antt. 5,7, 1; Plut. Fab. Max. 14; al.).*
émuoitiopos, -ov, 6, (emeotri¢ouat to provision one’s
self) ; 1. a foraging, providing food, (Xen., Plut.,
al.). 2. supplies, provisions, food [A. V. victuals]: Lk.
ix. 12 (Sept., Xen., Dem., Hdian., al.).*
ém-cxérropor; fut. 3 pers. sing. émurxéWerat, Lk. i. 78
Trmrg. WH; 1 aor. éreckeyaynv; fr. Hdt. down; Sept.
often for Tpd5 to look upon or after, to inspect, examine
with the eyes; a. tuvd, in order to see how he is, i. e. to
visit, go to see one: Acts vii. 23; xv. 36, (Judg. xv. 1);
the poor and afflicted, Jas. i. 27; the sick, Mt. xxv. 36,
43, (Sir. vii. 35; Xen. mem. 3, 11, 10 ; Plut. mor. p. 129 ¢.
(de sanitate praecept. 15 init.]; Leian. philops. 6, and in
med. writ.). b. Hebraistically, to look upon in order to
help or to benefit, i. q. to look after, have a care for, pro-
vide for, of God: twa, Lk. vii. 16; Heb. ii. 6, (Gen. xxi.
1; Ex. iv. 31; Ps. viii. 5; xxix. (Ixxx.) 15; Sir. xlvi.
14; Jud. viii. 33, ete.) ; foll. by a telic inf. Acts xv. 14;
absol. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 21) yet with a statement of
the effect and definite blessing added, Lk. i. 683 éze-
oxevaro [WH Tr mrg. émoxéverar] jas dvato\n €&
dyous a light from on high hath looked fal. shall look]
upon us (ef. our the sun looks down on us, ete.), i.e. sal-
vation from God has come to us, Lk. i. 78. (In the O. T.
used also in a bad sense of God as punishing, Ps.
Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 33; Jer. ix. 25; xi. 22, ete.) c. to
look (about) for, look out (one to choose, employ, etc.) :
Acts vi. 3.*
ém-oxevito: to furnish with things necessary; Mid. to
furnish one’s self or for one’s se2f: émtoxevardusvor, bav-
242
eTLOKOTH
ing gathered and made ready the things necessary for
the journey, Acts xxi. 15 L T Tr WH, for R G dmooxev-
acdpevot (which see in its place).*
émi-rKnvew, -6: 1 aor. éreckyvaca; to fix a tent or habi-
tation on: emt ras oikias, to take possession of and live
in the houses (of the citizens), Polyb. 4, 18, 8; rais
oixiais, 4, 72,1; trop. emt twa, of the power of Christ
descending upon one, working within him and giving
him help, [A. V. rest upon], 2 Co. xii. 9.*
ém-oxidtw; [impf. éweokiagoy, Lk. ix. 34 Lmrg.T Tr
txt. WH]; fut. émeoxidow; 1 aor. émecxiaca; to throw a
shadow upon, to envelop in shadow, to overshadow: twi,
Acts vy. 15. From a vaporous cloud that casts a
shadow the word is transferred to a shining cloud
surrounding and enveloping persons with brightness:
ruvd, Mt. xvii. 5; Lk. ix. 84; roi, Mk. ix. 7. Tropi-
cally, of the Holy Spirit exerting creative energy upon
the womb of the virgin Mary and impregnating it, (a
use of the word which seems to have been drawn from
the familiar O. T. idea of a cloud as symbolizing the
immediate presence and power of God): with the dat.
Lk. i. 35. (In prof. auth. generally w. an acc. of the
object and in the sense of obscuring: Hdt. 1,209; Soph.,
Aristot., Theophr., Philo, Leian., Hdian., Geop. Sept.
for 330 to cover, Ps. xe. (xci.) 4; exxxix. (cxl.) 83 for
jaw, Ex. xl. 29 (35) émeckiagey emt rv oxnyny 7) vepérn ;
[ef. W. § 52, 4, 7].) *
émi-okotréw, -@; to look upon, inspect, oversee, look after,
care for: spoken of the care of the church which rested
upon the presbyters, 1 Pet. v. 2 [T WH om.] (with ry
éxkAnoiay added, Ignat. ad Rom. 9,1); foll. by py [q. v.
Il. 1 a.] i. q. Lat. caveo, to look carefully, beware: Heb.
xii. 15. (Often by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
ém-ckomh, -7s, 7, (€mecxoméw), inspection, visitation,
(Germ. Besichtigung) ; a. prop.: eis émurk. Tov matdos
to visit the boy, Leian. dial. deor. 20, 6; with this ex-
ception no example of the word in prof. writ. has yet
been noted. b. In biblical Grk., after the Hebr.
77p2, that act by which God looks into and searches
out the ways, deeds, character, of men, in order to ad-
judge thein their lot accordingly, whether joyous or sad;
inspection, investigation, visitation, (Vulg. usually visita-
tio): so univ. év émucxom uyav, when he shall search
the souls of men, i. e. in the time of divine judgment,
Sap. iii. 13; also év Spa émoxonijs, Sir. xviii. 20 (19);
so perhaps év juépa émoxomis, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [see below];
in a good sense, of God’s gracious care: tov Katpov Tis
€mtokomns Tou, i. e. Tov Katpov év @ eneckéarto ce 6 beds,
in which God showed himself gracious toward thee and
offered thee salvation through Christ (see émicxémropat,
b.), Lk. xix. 44; év xaip@ émucxors, in the time of divine
reward, 1 Pet. v. 6 Lchm.; also, in the opinion of many
commentators, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [al. associate this pass. with
Lk. xix. 44 above; cf. De Wette (ed. Briickner) o1
Huther ad loc.J; fr. the O. T. cf. Gen. 1. 24 sq.; Job
xxxiv. 9; Sap. ii. 20; iii. 7, ete. with a bad reference.
of divine punishment: Ex. ili. 16; Is.x.3; Jer. x.15
Sap. xiv. 11; xix. 14 (15); [ete.; ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.}
érrlioKo7ros
c. after the analogy of the Hebr. m3pa (Num. iv. 16;
1 Chr. xxiv. 19 [here Sept. énioxeyrs} etc.), oversight
i. e. overseership, office, charge; Vulg. episcopatus: Acts
i. 20, fr. Ps. eviii. (cix.) 8; spec. the office of a bishop
(the overseer or presiding officer of a Christian
» ehurch): 1 Tim. iii. 1, and in eccl. writ.*
éml-oKomos, -ov, 6, (€murkemTopuar), an overseer, a man
charged with the duty of seeing that things to be done
by others are done rightly, any curator, guardian, or
superintendent; Sept. for TPds Judg. ix. 28; Neh. xi.
9,14, 22; 2 K. xi. 15, ete.; 1 Macc.i. 51. The word
has the same comprehensive sense in Grk. writ. fr.
Homer Odys. 8, 163; Il. 22, 255 down; hence in the
N. T. émiox. rév Wvyév guardian of souls, one who
watches over their welfare: 1 Pet. ii. 25 ([rév mavrds
mvevpatos Ktiotny kK. éricKkorov, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 3];
apxtepevs Kal mpoardarns tay Wuxdv Huav Incods Xp. ibid.
61, 3; [ef. Sir. i. 6]), cf. Heb. xiii. 17. spec. the super-
intendent, head or overseer of any Christian church; Vulg.
episcopus: Acts xx. 28; Phil. i. 1; 1 Tim. iii. 2; Tit. i.
7; see mpeoBurepos, 2 b.; [and for the later use of the
word, see Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Bishop].*
ém-omde, -@: fr. Aeschyl. down; to draw on: py éme-
ondobe, sc. dxpoBvoriay, let him not draw on his fore-
skin (Hesych. pi émuomdcOw* py édxvéro 7d Sépua) [A. V.
let him not become uncircumcised], 1 Co. vii. 18. From
the days of Antiochus Epiphanes [B. c. 175-164] down
(1 Mace. i. 15; Joseph. antt. 12, 5, 1), there had been
Jews who, in order to conceal from heathen persecutors
or scoffers the external sign of their nationality, sought
artificially to compel nature to reproduce the prepuce,
by extending or drawing forward with an iron instru-
ment the remnant of it still left, so as to cover the
glans. The Rabbins called such persons 0°33¥1, from
yn to draw out, see Buxtorf, Lex. Talm. p. 1274 [(ed.
Fischer ii. 645 sq.). Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Circumcision,
esp. McC. and S. ibid. II. 2.]*
ém-omelpw: 1 aor. énéomeipa; to sow above or besides:
Mt. xiii. 25 LT TrWH. (Hdt., Theophr., [al.].) *
ériorapat (seems to be the Ionic form of the Mid. of
éfiornu. Isocrates, Aristot., al., also use émorjoat Thy
Sidvo.av, Tov vody, éavrdv for to put one’s attention on, fiz
one’s thoughts on; indeed, the simple émuorjaa is used
in the same sense, by an ellipsis analogous to that of
tov voov with the verbs mpocéxew, eméxerv, and of riv dw
with mpooBdddew; see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 281 sq.
Hence émicrapa is prop. to turn one’s self or one’s mind
to, put one’s thought upon a thing); fr. Hom. down;
Sept. chiefly for yt}; (cf. Germ. sich worauf verstehen) ;
a. to be acquainted with: ri, Acts xviii. 25; Jas. iv. 14;
Jude 10; ruvd, Acts xix. 15; with reference to what is
said or is to be interpreted, to understand: Mk. xiv. 68;
1 Tim. vi. 4. b. to know: mepi twos, Acts xxvi. 26;
foll.-by an acc. with a ptep. Acts xxiv. 10 [W. 346 (324);
B. 301 (258)]; foll. by dre, Acts xv. 7; xix. 255 xxil.
19; foll. by as, Acts x. 28; by mas, Acts xx. 18; by mov,
Heb. xi. 8. [Syn. see ywooke. | *
éxloracis, -ews, 9, (ehiornum, ehiorapar), an advanc-
248
> /
emia Tpepa
ing, approach; incursion, onset, press: rijs xaxias (Vulg.
malorum incursio), 2 Mace. vi. 3, where cf. Grimm; used
of the pressure of a multitude asking help, counsel, etc.,
twi (on which dat. cf. W. § 31,3; [B.180(156)]; Kiihner
§ 424, 1) to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 LT Tr WH (but others
would have us translate it here by oversight, attention,
care, a com. meaning of the word in Polyb.); used of a
tumultuous gathering in Acts xxiv.12LTTr WH. Cf.
15} hk, Shy
emorarns, -ov, 6, (epiotnue), any sort of a superintend-
ent or overseer (often so in prof. writ., and several times
in Sept., as Ex. i. 11; v.14; 1 K. v.16; 2 K. xxv. 19;
Jer. xxxvi. (xxix.) 26; 2 Chr. ii. 2; xxxi. 12); @ master,
used in this sense for »3 by the disciples [cf. Lk. xvii.
13] when addressing Jesus, who called him thus “ not
from the fact that he was a teacher, but because of his
authority” (Bretschneider) ; found only in Luke: v. 5;
Vill. 24, 45 ;. ix. 833,49; xvii. 13.*
ém-orédhw: 1 aor. eméoredka; prop. to send to one a
message, command, (Hdt. et sqq.); émorodds, to send
by letter, write a letter, Plato, epp. p. 363 b., hence
simply to write a letter [ef. W. § 3, 1 b.]: revi, Heb. xiii.
22 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7, 1; 47, 8; 62,13 and often in
Grk. writ.) ; to enjoin by letter, to write instructions: Acts
xxi, 25 RGT Trmrg.WHmrg.; foll. by rod with an
inf. expressing purpose [cf. W. 326 (306); B. 270
(232) ]: Acts xv. 20.*
ETLTTHHOV, -ov, FEN. -ovos, (e€micrapa.), intelligent, ex-
perienced, (esp. one having the knowledge of an expert;
cf. Schmidt ch. 13 §§ 10,13]: Jas. iii. 138. (From Hom.
down; Sept.) *
émi-ornpltw; 1 aor. émeornpiéa; a later word; to estab-
lish besides, strengthen more; to render more firm, confirm:
tiva, one’s Christian faith, Acts xiv. 22; xv. 32, 41;
xviii. 23 R G.*
émt-oTOAN, -fs, 7, (emtoré \Nw), a letter, epistle: Acts xv.
30; Ro. xvi. 22; 1 Co.v. 9, ete.; plur., Acts ix. 2; 2Co.
x. 10, ete.; émeorodal ovotarixai, letters of commendation,
2 Co. iii. 1 [W. 176 (165). On the possible use of the
plur. of this word interchangeably with the sing. (cf.
Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 113, 8), see Bp. Lghtft. and
Meyer on Phil. iii. 1. (Eur., Thue., al.)]
émt-oropite ; (ordpa); prop. to bridle or stop up the
mouth; metaph. to stop the mouth, reduce to silence: Tit.
i. 11. (Plato, Gorg. p. 482 e.; Dem. 85, 4; often in
Plut. and Leian.) *
em-orpedpw ; fut. émorpéeyw; 1 aor. emeotpea; 2 aor.
pass. émeotpdpyv; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for J97, 330
and 307, 739, and times without number for 33w and
wn; 1. transitively, a. to turn to: émi rdv Oedv, to
the worship of the true God, Acts xxvi. 20. b. to cause
to return, to bring back; fig. rwa émi kiprov tov Gedy, to the
love and obedience of God, Lk. i. 16; émt réxva, to love
for the children, Lk. i. 17; év ppovnce: dixaiav, that they
may bein [R. V. to walk in] the wisdom of the righteous,
Lk. i. 17; teva emi twa, supply from the context émi rip
ddAndevav and émi rHv ddov, Jas. v. 19 sq. 2. intrans.
(W. § 38, 1 [cf. p. 26; B. 144 (126 sq.)]); a. to turn,
eis Tpopy
to turn one’s self: émt rov xvpuov and émi Tov Bedy, of Gen-
tiles passing over to the religion of Christ, Acts ix. 35;
xi. 21; xiv. 15; xv. 19; xxvi. 20, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 25; mpds
rt, Acts ix. 40; mpds rov Oedv, 1 Th. i. 9; 2 Co. iii. 16;
amo twos ets Tt, Acts xxvi. 18. b. to turn one’s self about,
turn back: absol. Acts xvi. 18; foll. by an inf. express-
ing purpose, Rev. i.12. cc. to return, turn back, come
back; a. properly: Lk. ii. 20 Rec.; viii. 55; Acts xv. 36;
with the addition of émic (as in Ael. v. h. 1, 6 [var.]),
foll. by an inf. of purpose, Mt. xxiv. 18 ; foll. by eis with
ace. of place, Mt. xii.44; [Lk. ii. 39 TWH Trmrg.]; eis
ra omiow, Mk. xiii. 16; Lk. xvii. 31; émé re, to, 2 Pet. ii.
22. B. metaph.: émi 71, Gal. iv. 9; émi rwa, Lk. xvii. 4
Rec., but G om. emi oe; mpds teva, ibid. LT Tr WH; &
ths évrodjs, to leave the commandment and turn back to
a worse mental and moral condition, 2 Pet. ii. 21 RG;
absol. to turn back morally, to reform: Mt. xiii. 15; Mk.
iv. 12; Lk. xxii. 32; Acts iii. 19; xxviii. 27. -In the mid.
and 2 aor. pass. a. fo turn one’s self about, to turn
around: absol., Mt. ix. 22 RG; Mk. v.30; viii. 33; Jn.
xxi. 20. b. to return: foll. by mpés [WH txt. eri] teva,
Mt. x. 13 (on which pass. see eipnvn, 3 fin.) ; émi Tov Bedv,
1 Pet. ii. 25 (see 2a. above); toreturn to a better mind,
repent, Jn. xii. 40 [R G].*
émi-orpoph, -fs, 7), (emurtpedw), conversion (of Gentiles
fr. idolatry to the true God [cf. W. 26]): Acts xv. 3.
(Cf. Sir. xlix. 2; xviii. 21 (20); in Grk. writ. in many
other senses.) *
ém-cuv-ayw ; fut. emucvvd€w; 1 aor. inf. émovvaéar; 2
aor. inf. émuovvayayeiv; Pass., pf. ptcep. émovynypevos ;
1 aor. ptep. émovvaxGeis ; [fut. émurvvayOjoouat, Lk. xvii.
37T Tr WH]; Sept. several times for 4ox, yp, IAP ;
1. to gather together besides, to bring together to others
already assembled, (Polyb.). 2. to gather together
against (Mic. iv. 11; Zech. xii. 3; 1 Macc. iii. 58, ete.).
3. to gather together in one place (émi to): Mt. xxiii. 37;
xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; Lk. xiii.34; Pass.: Mk. i.33; Lk.
xii. 1; xvii. 37 T Tr WH, (Ps. ci. (cii-) 23; ev. (evi.) 47;
2 Mace. i. 27, etc.; Aesop 142).*
émi-cvv-ayoyn, -js, 7, (emtovvayw, q. V.); a. @ gather-
ing together in one place, i. q. tb éemovvdyerOa (2 Macc.
ii. 7): émi rwva, to one, 2 Th. ii. 1. b. (the religious)
assembly (of Christians): Heb. x. 25. *
ém-ovv-tpéxw ; to run together besides (i. e. to others
already gathered): Mk. ix. 25. Not used by prof.
writ.*
ém-cicracis, -ews, 7, (€mecvvicrapat to collect togeth-
er, conspire against) a gathering together or combining
against or at. Hence 1. a hostile banding together or
concourse: mrovetv emiavoracw, to excite a riotous gather-
ing of the people, make a mob, Acts xxiv. 12 RG; 1
Esdr. v. 70 Alex.; Sext. Empir. adv. eth. p. 127 [p.571,
20 ed. Bekk.; cf. Philo in Flac. § 1]; rivés, against one,
Num. xxvi. 9; a conspiracy, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 20. 4,
a troublesome throng of persons seeking help, counsel,
comfort: rivés, thronging to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 R G (see
érioracts) ; Luther, dass ich werde angelaufen.*
émo partis, -€s, (opaddo to cause to fall), prone to fall:
244
émreTiOnys
mois, a dangerous voyage, Actsxxvii.9. (Plato, Polyb.
Plut., al.)*
ér-oxtw: [impf. émicyvoy]; 1. trans. to give addi-
tional strength; to make stronger, (Sir. xxix. 1; Xen. oec.
11, 13). 2. intrans. to receive greater strength, grow
stronger, (1 Mace. vi. 6; Theophr., Diod.): émioxvop
Aéyovres, they were the more urgent saying, i. e. they
alleged the more vehemently, Lk. xxiii. 5.*
ém-cwpetw: fut. emicwpevow; to heap up, accumulate
in piles: 8:8acxddovs, to choose for themselves and run
after a great number of teachers, 2 Tim. iv. 3. (Plut.
Athen., Artemid., al.) *
émv-rayh, -fs, 7, (€mtrdccw), an injunction, mandate,
command: Ro. xvi. 26; 1 Co. vii. 25; 1 Tim.i.1; Tit.i.3;
pera mdons émitayys, with every possible form of author.
ity, Tit. ii. 15; nar’ énuraynv, by way of command, 1 Co.
vii. 6; 2 Co. viii. 8. (Sap. xiv. 16, etc.; Polyb., Diod.)*
ém-racow; 1 aor. emerata; (tacow); to enjoin upon,
order, command, charge: absol. Lk. xiv. 22; revi, Mk. i.
27; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 36; viii. 25; rivi ro avjxov, Philem. 8;
rw foll. by the inf., Mk. vi. 39; Lk. viii. 31; Acts xxiii.
2; foll. by acc. and inf. Mk. vi. 27; foll. by direct dis-
course, Mk. ix. 25. (Several times in Sept. ; Grk. writ.
fr. Hdt. down.) [Sywn. see cedeva, fin.]*
ém-ted€w, -@; fut. émiteA€ow; 1 aor. émeredeca; [pres.
mid. and pass. émereAodpar] ; 1. to bring to an end,
accomplish, perfect, execute, complete: substantively, ré
émiredeoat, 2 Co. viii. 11; ri, Lk. xiii. 32[R G]; Ro. xv.
28; 2 Co. vii. 1; viii. 6, 11; Phil.i.6; Heb. viii. 5; ras
Aarpeias, to perform religious services, discharge relig-
ious rites, Heb. ix. 6 (similarly in prof. writ., as Opnoxeias,
Hdt. 2, 37; dpras, 4, 186; Ovciav, Gvoias, 2, 63; 4, 26;
Hdian. 1. 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]; Aecrovpyias, Philo de som.
i. § 37). Mid. (in Grk. writ. to take upon one’s self: ra
Tov ynpws, the burdens of old age, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 8;
Oavatov, Xen. apol. 33; with the force of the act.: ri,
Polyb. 1, 40,165; 2, 58, 10) to make an end for one’s self,
i. e. to leave off (cf. mavw) : ry capxi, so as to give your-
selves up to the flesh, stop with, rest in it, Gal. iii. 3 [oth-
ers take it passively here: are ye perfected in etc., cf.
Meyer]. 2. to appoint to, impose upon: twit maOnpara,
in pass. 1 Pet. v. 9 (ray dixny, Plat. legg. 10 fin.).*
émurhSeros, -ela, -evov, also -os, -ov, [cf. W. § 11, 1], (ene
tndés, adv., enough; and this acc. to Buttmann fr. ém
rade [? cf. Vaniéek p. 271]); 1. fit, suitable, conven-
tent, advantageous. 2. needful; plur. ra émrndeca esp.
the necessaries of life (Thue. et sqq.): with addition of
Tov c@paros, Jas. ii. 16.*
émt-rlOnpt, 3 pers. plur. émetiOéacr (Mt. xxiii. 4; ef. W.
§ 14,1 b.; B.44 (38); Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 505; Kiih-
ner i. p. 643; [Jelf § 274; and on this and foll. forms
see Veitch s. vv. riOnut, TtOéw]), impv. émerider (1 Tim.
v. 22; see Matthiae § 210, 2 and 6; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i.
p. 508; Kiihner § 209, 5; [Jelf § 274 obs. 4]); impf. 3
pers. plur. émerifovv (Acts viii. 17 RG), émeriOecay (ib.
LT Tr WH; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 509: B. 45 (39)) ;
fut. émOnow; 1 aor. éréOnxa; 2 aor. éréOny, impv. émibes
(Mt. ix. 18; Gen. xlviii. 18; Judg. xviii. 19); Mid.
ETT Law
[pres. émriBepat]; fut. émOnoopa; 2 aor. émebéunv; [1
aor. pass. émereOny (Mk. iv. 21 RG)]; in Sept. chiefly
for }02, Dv and DWH; 1. Active: a. to put or lay
upon: rt émi tt, Mt. xxiii.43 xxvii. 29R GL; Mk. iv. 21
RG; Lk. xv. 5; Jn. ix. [6 WH txt. Tr mrg.], 15; [xix. 2
Lmrg., see below]; Acts xv. 10 [cf. W. 318 (298); B.
261 (224)]; xxviii. 3; rt emi twos, gen. of thing, Mt.
xxvii. 29 T Tr WH; é with dat. of thing, Mt. xxvii. 29
LT Tr WH; ri» xeipa [or ras xeipas or xeipas] emi twa,
Mt. ix. 18; Mk. viii. 25 [(WH Tr txt. 2nxev)]; xvi. 18;
Acts viii. 17; [ix. 17]; Rev.i.17 Rec.; éni twa mdnyds,
calamities, Rev. xxii. 18 [but see b. below]; érdvw rivds,
Mt, xxi. 7 RG; xxvii. 37; émi rwos, Lk. viii. 16 RG; ri
tum, Lk. xxiii. 26; Jn. xix. 2 [not L mrg., see above];
Acts xv. 28; rivi dvoua, MK. iii. 16 sq.; rei rds yetpas, Mt.
xix. 13 [ef. B. 233 (201) ; W. 288 (270 sq.)], 15; Mk. v.
23; [viii. 23, here Tr mrg. avrov]; Lk.iv.40; xiii. 13;
Acts vi. 6; viii. 195 xiii. 3; xix. 6; xxviii. 8; 1 Tim. v.
225 [rwi ryv xeipa, Mk. vii. 32]; xeipa [RG, yelpas or
tas xetpas L T Tr WH], Acts ix. 12; revi mAnyds, to in-
flict blows, lay stripes on one, Lk. x. 30; Acts xvi.
23. b. toadd to: Rev. xxii. 18 (opp. to dgaipeiv vs. 19).
2. Middle; a. tohave put on, bid to be laid on; ri énits
(Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,4): ra mpos rv xpeiar, sc. tui, to provide
one with the things needed [al. put on board sc. the ship],
Acts xxviii. 10. b. to lay or throw one’s self upon; with
dat. of pers. to attack one, to make an assault on one:
Acts xviii. 10; Ex. xxi. 14; xviii. 11; 2 Chr. xxiii. 13,
and often in prof. writ.; cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; [W. 593
(552). Comp.: curemcridnu. | *
émi-rip.dw, -&; impf. 3 pers. sing. éreriva, 3 pers. plur.
éretipov; 1 aor. érerivnoa; Sept. for Va; in Grk.
writ. 1. to show honor to, to honor: twa, Hat. 6, 39.
2. to raise the price of: 6 ciros émerysnbn, Dem. 918, 22;
al. 3. to adjudge, award, (fr. rysn in the sense of
merited penalty) : rnv Sixnv, Hdt. 4, 43. 4. to tax with
fault, rate, chide, rebuke, reprove, censure severely, (so
Thuc., Xen., Plato, Dem., al.) : absol. 2 Tim. iv. 2; revi,
charge one with wrong, Lk. [ix. 55]; xvii. 3; xxiii. 40;
to rebuke —in order to curb one’s ferocity or violence
(hence many formerly gave the word the meaning to re-
strain; against whom cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 325), Mt.
Vili. 26; xvii. 18; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. iv. 39,41; viii. 24; ix.
42; Jude 9 [where Rec.” strangely émureunoae (1 aor.
act. inf.) for -unoa (opt. 3 pers. sing.)]; or to keep one
away from another, Mt. xix. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; Mk. x.
13; foll. by iva (with a verb expressing the opposite of
what is censured): Mt. xx. 31; Mk. x. 48; Lk. xviii.
39; with the addition of Aéywr [kal Aéyes, or the like]
and direct discourse: Mk. i. 25 [T om. WH br. Acyor];
Wili)33:) ix. 25; Lk. iv. 85; xxiii. 46, (cf. Ps. cv. (evi.) 95
xviii. (exix.) 21; Zech. iii. 2; and the use of 1y1 inNah.
i. 4; Mal. iii. 11). Elsewhere in a milder sense, to ad-
monish or charge sharply: tii, Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 30;
Lk. ix. 21 (émiripnoas adrois mapnyyetder, foll. by the inf.),
xix. 39; with tva added, Mt. xvi. 20 L WH txt.; Mk.
Vili. 30; fva py, Mt. xii. 16; Mk. iii. 12. [Cf. Trench
§ iv: Schmidt ch. 4, 11.]*
245
éemipavera
émutipla, -as, 7, (emiteudw), punishment (in Grk. writ. rd
emttiwsov) : 2 Co. ii. 6 [B. § 147, 29]. (Sap. iii. 10; [al.].)*
[ém-ro-avré, Rec. in Acts i. 15; ii. 1, etc.; see adrds,
II. 1, and ef. Lipsius, Gramm. Unters. p. 125 sq.]
émutpétw; 1 aor. érérpeya; Pass., [pres. émirpéropat];
2 aor. emerpamnv; pf. 3 pers. sing. émurérparra (1 Co.
xiv. 34 RG); fr. Hom. down; 1. to turn to, transfer,
commit, intrust. 2. to permit, allow, give leave: 1 Co.
xvi. 7; Heb. vi. 3; revi, Mk. v.13; Jn. xix. 38; with an
inf. added, Mt. viii. 21; xix. 8; Lk. viii. 32; ix. 59, 61;
Acts xxi. 39 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 12; and without the dat. Mk.
x. 4; foll. by ace. with inf. Acts xxvii. 3 (where L T Tr
WH ropevdévre) ; cf. Xen. an. 7, 7, 8; Plato, legg. 5 p.
730d. Pass. émirpémerat rum, with inf.; Acts xxvi. 1;
XXVili. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 34.*
[émurpometw; (fr. Hdt. down); to be émirpomos or proc-
urator: of Pontius Pilate in Lk. iii. 1 WH (rejected)
mrg.; see their App. ad loc.” ]
émi-Tpomn, -75, 1, (€muTpemw), permission, power, commis-
sion: Acts xxvi.12. (From Thuc. down.) *
émitpotros, -ov, 6, (emitpemw), Univ. one to whose care or
honor anything has been intrusted; a curator, guardian,
(Pind. Ol. 1, 171, et al.; Philo de mundo § 76 6eds xat
matnp Kat Texvitns Kal €mitpomos Tey év ovpav@ Te Kal ev
Kdop@). Spec. 1. a steward or manager of a house-
hold, or of lands ; an overseer: Mt. xx. 8; Lk. viii. 3;
Xen. oec. 12, 2; 21,9; (Aristot. oec. 1, 5 [p. 1344%, 26]
SovAay dé €idn Svo, €mitporos kal epydtys). 2. one who
has the care and tutelage of children, either where the
father is dead (a guardian of minors: 2 Mace. xi. 1;
xiii. 2; émirpomos éppdver, Plato, legg. 6 p. 766 c.; Plut.
Lyc. 8; Cam. 15), or where the father still lives (Ael.
v. h. 8, 26): Gal. iv. 2.*
émi-ruyxava: 2 aor. éméruxov; 1. to light or hit
upon any person or thing (Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plato).
2. to attain to, obtain: Jas. iv. 2; with gen. of thing,
Heb. vi. 15; xi. 83; with ace. of thing: rodro, Ro. xi. 7
(where Rec. rovrov). Cf. Matthiae § 328; [W. 200
(188) ].*
ém-halvw; 1 aor. inf. émepavar (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
24 sqq.; W.89 (85); B.41 (35); [Sept. Ps. xxx. (xxxi.)
17; exvii. (cxviii.) 27, cf. Lxvi. (Ixvii.) 2]); 2 aor. pass.
emeavny; fr. Hom. down ; 1. trans. to show to or
upon; to bring to light. 2. intrans. and in Pass. to
appear, become visible; a. prop.: of stars, Acts xxvii.
20 (Theocr. 2, 11); revi, to one, Lk. i. 79. b. fig. i. q.
to become clearly known, to show one’s self: Tit. iii. 4;
ruvi, Tit. li. 11.*
émipdvera, -as, 4, (emepavijs), an appearing, appearance,
(Tertull. apparentia) ; often used by the Greeks of a
glorious manifestation of the gods, and esp. of their ad-
vent to help; in 2 Macc. of signal deeds and events
betokening the presence and power of God as helper;
cf. Grimm on Mace. p. 60 sq. 75, [but esp. the thorough
exposition by Prof. Abbot (on Titus ii. 13 Note B) in
the Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and Exegesis, i. p. 16 sq.
(1882)]. In the N. T. the ‘advent’ of Christ, — not
only that which has already taken place and by which
émupayns
his presence and power appear in the saving light he
has shed upon mankind, 2 Tim. i. 10 (note the word
oricarros in this pass.) ; but also that illustrious return
from heaven to earth hereafter to occur: 1 Tim. vi. 14;
2 Tim. iv. 1, 8; Tit. ii. 13 [on which see esp. Prof. Abbot
u. s.]j} ) émupdvera (i. e. the breaking forth) rjs mapov-
cias avrov, 2 Th. ii. 8. [Cf. Trench § xciv.]*
émupavis, -és, (€mupaivw), conspicuous, manifest, illus-
trious: Acts ii. 20 [Tdf. om.] fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4) ; the
Sept. here and in Judg. xiii. 6 [Alex.]; Hab. i. 7; Mal.
i. 14 thus render the word NV) terrible, deriving it in-
correctly from 78) and so confounding it with 78."
ém-hatokw (i. q. the émpaooxo of Grk. writ., cf. W.
90 (85); B. 67 (59)): fut. emupaiow; to shine upon:
mi, Eph. v. 14, where the meaning is, Christ will pour
upon thee the light of divine truth as the sun gives light
to men aroused from sleep. (Job xxv. 5; xxxi. 26;
[xli. 9]; Acta Thomae § 34.) *
ém-hépw; [impf. éemépepov]; 2 aor. inf. emeveykeiv;
[pres. pass. émupepopat] ; 1. to bring upon, bring for-
ward : airiav, of accusers (as in Hdt. 1, 26, and in Attic
writ. fr. Thuc. down; Polyb. 5, 41, 3; 40, 5,2; Joseph.
antt. 2, 6, 7; 4, 8, 23; Hdian. 3, 8, 13 (6 ed. Bekk.)),
Acts xxy. 18 (where LT Tr WH éqepov) ; xpiow, Jude
ys 2. to lay upon, to inflict: rhv dpynv, Ro. iii. 5
(mAnynv, Joseph. antt. 2, 14, 2). 3. to bring upon i.e.
in addition, to add, increase: Odipw trois Secpois, Phil. i.
16 (17) Rec., but on this pass. see eyeipw, 4 ¢.; (wip
emipéperv rrupt, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 18; [cf. W. § 52,
4, 7)]). 4. to put upon, cast upon, impose, (pappaxovr,
Plat. ep. 8 p. 354 b.): ri emi rwa, in pass., Acts xix. 12,
where LT Tr WH dmodépec Oar, q. v.*
émt-pwvew, -@: [impf. emehavour]; to call out to, shout:
foll. by direct disc., Lk. xxiii. 21; Acts xii. 22; foll. by
the dat. of a pers., Acts xxii. 24; ri, Acts xxi. 34 L T
Tr WH. [(Soph. on.)]*
ém-pookw ; [impf. erépwoxor]; to grow light, to dawn
[ef. B. 68 (60)]: Lk. xxiii. 54; foll. by e’s, Mt. xxviii.
1, on which see e?s, A. II. 1.*
émxerpew, -@: impf. érexelpouv; 1 aor. émexelpnoa;
(xeip); 1. prop. to put the hand to (Hom. Od. 24,
386, 395). 2. often fr. Hdt. down, to take in hand,
undertake, attempt, (anything to be done), foll. by the
inf.: Lk.i.1; Acts ix. 29; xix. 13; (2 Mace. ii. 29; vii.
19). Grimm treats of this word more at length in the
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 36 sq.*
ém-xéo; fr. Hom. down; to pour upon: ri, Lk. x. 34
(se. emi ra tpavpara; Gen. xxviii. 18; Lev. v. 11).*
émt-xopnyew, -@; 1 aor. impv. emtxopnynoare; Pass.,
[pres. emtxopnyovp.at | ; 1 fut. émxopnynOnoopa; (see xopn-
yéo); lo supply, furnish, present, (Germ. darreichen) :
wi tt, 2 Co. ix. 10; Gal. iii. 5; i. q. to show or afford
by deeds: ry dperny, 2 Pet. i. 5; in pass., etrodos, fur-
nished, provided, 2 Pet. i. 11; Pass. to be supplied, min-
istered unto, assisted, (so the simple yopnyeicOa in Xen.
rep. Athen. 1,13; Polyb. 3, 75,3; 4, 77, 2; Did al
Sir. xliv. 6; 3 Mace. vi. 40): Col. ii. 19, where Vulg.
subministratum. (Rare in prof. writ. as Dion. Hai. 1,
246
wv
€7T OS
42; Phal. ep. 50; Diog. Laért. 5, 67; [Alex. Aphr.
probl. 1, 81].) *
émt-xopnyla, -as, 7, (€meyopnyéw, q. V-), (Vulg. submin-
istratio), a supplying, supply: Eph. iv. 16; Phil. i. 19.
(Eccl. writers.) *
émt-xplw: 1 aor. éxéypica; to spread on, anoint: ri emt
7, anything upon anything, Jn. ix. 6 [WH txt. Tr mrg.
énéOnxev]; ri, to anoint anything (sc. with anything),
ibid. 11. (Hom. Od. 21,179; Leian. hist. serib. 62.) *
én-oxoSopéw, -@; 1 aor. ém@xoddunoa, and without
augm. ésorcodduynoa (1 Co. iii. 14 T Tr WH; cf. Tdf.’s
note on Acts vii. 47, [see ofxodopéw]); Pass., pres. ero
codopodpar; 1 aor. ptep. émorxodopnbévres; in the N. T.
only in the fig. which likens a company of Christian
believers to an edifice or temple; to build upon, build up,
(Vulg. superaedifico); absol. [like our Eng. build up]
viz. ‘to finish the structure of which the foundation has
already been laid,’ i. e. in plain language, to give con-
stant increase in Christian knowledge and in a life con-
formed thereto: Acts xx. 32 (where L T Tr WH oikoéd.
[Vulg. aedifico]); 1 Co. iii. 10; (1 Pet. ii. 5 Tdf.); emi
tov Oepédtov, 1 Co. iii. 12; ri, ibid. 14; ev Xpror@, with
the pass., in fellowship with Christ to grow in spiritual
life, Col. ii. 7; émocxodound. emi Oepedio TOv droarodor,
on the foundation laid by the apostles, i. e. (dropping
the fig.) gathered together into a church by the apostles’
preaching of the gospel, Eph. ii. 20; émocxodopetv éavtov
Th mioret, Jude 20, where the sense is, ‘resting on your
most holy faith as a foundation, make progress, rise like
an edifice higher and higher.’ (Thuc., Xen., Plato, al.) *
ém-oxeMdw: 1 aor. ema@xevta; to drive upon, strike
against: thv vady [i. e. to run the ship ashore], Acts
xxvii. 41 RG; see émxéAdw. (Hdt. 6, 16; 7, 182;
Thue. 4, 26.) *
érr-ovopdtw: [pres. pass. érovoydtopat]; fr. Hdt. down;
Sept. for NTP; fo pul a name upon, name; Pass. to be
named: Ro. ii. 17; ef. Fritzsche ad loc.*
ér-orrevw [ptcp. 1 Pet. ii. 12 LT TrWH]; 1 aor.
ptep. émomrevoartes ; 1. to be an overseer (Homer,
Hesiod). 2. univ. to look upon, view attentively; to
watch (Aeschyl., Dem., al.): ri, 1 Pet. iii. 2; && rwos,
Sc. THY avaotpodpny, 1 Pet. ii. 12.*
éréarrns, -ov, 6, (fr. unused érémra) ; 1. an over-
seer, inspector, see éricxoros; (Aeschyl., Pind., al.; of
God, in 2 Mace. iii. 39; vii. 35; 3 Mace. ii. 21; Add.
to Esth. v.1; dvOperiver épyov, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59,
3). 2. a spectator, eye-witness of anything: so in 2
Pet. i. 16; inasmuch as those were called érémra: by
the Grks. who had attained to the third [i. e. the high-
est] grade of the Eleusinian mysteries (Plut. Alcib. 22,
and elsewh.), the word seems to be used here to desig-
nate those privileged to be present at the heavenly spec-
tacle of the transfiguration of Christ.*
Eros, -eos, (-ous), Td, @ word: ds mos eireiv (see efroy,
1 a. p. 181*), Heb. vii. 9.*
_ [S¥x. éos seems primarily to designate a word as an ar-
ticulate manifestation of a mental state, and so to differ from
pijua (q. v.),the mere vocable; for its relation t
aa) He n to Adyos see
eTroupavtos
ér-ovpdvios, -ov, (ovpavds), prop. existing in or above
heaven, heavenly ; 1. existing in heaven: 6 rarip émov-
pavos, i. e. God, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. (Oeot, beds, Hom. Od.
17, 484; Il. 6, 131, ete.; 3 Mace. vi. 28; vii. 6); of émou-
pdmot the heavenly beings, the inhabitants of heaven,
(Leian. dial. deor. 4, 3; of the gods, in Theoer. 25, 5):
of angels, in opp. to émiyevor and xarayOduot, Phil. ii. 10 ;
Ignat. ad Trall. 9, [ef. Polye. ad Philipp. 2]; odpara,
the bodies of the stars (which the apostle, acc. to the
universal ancient conception, seems to have regarded as
animate [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 376; Gfrérer, Philo
etc. 2te Aufl. p. 349 sq.; Siegfried, Philo von Alex. p.
306; yet cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad loc.], cf. Job xxxviii. 7;
Enoch xviii. 14 sqq.) and of the angels, 1 Co. xv. 40; 7
Baownela 7 éroup. (on which see p. 97), 2 Tim. iv. 18; sub-
stantially the same as marpls n émoup. Heb. xi. 16
and ‘Iepovoadnp emovp. xii. 22; KAjows, a calling made
(by God) in heaven, Heb. iii. 1 [al. would include a ref.
to its end as well as to its origin; cf. Liinem. ad loc.],
ef. Phil. iii. 14 [Bp. Lghtft. cites Philo, plant. Noé
§ 6]. The neut. ra éemovpdma denotes [cf. W. § 34, 2]
a. the things that take place in heaven, i. e. the purposes
of God to grant salvation to men through the death of
Christ: Jn. iii. 12 (see éaiyevos). b. the heavenly re-
gions, i. e. heaven itself, the abode of God and angels:
Eph. i. 8, 20 (where Lehm. txt. odpavois) ; ii. 6; iii. 10;
the lower heavens, or the heaven of the clouds, Eph. vi.
12 [cf. B. D. Am. ed.s.v. Air]. ¢. the heavenly temple
or sanctuary: Heb. viii. 5; ix. 23. 2. of heavenly
origin and nature: 1 Co. xv. 48 sq. (opp. to xoikds); 4
Owped 7 emoup. Heb. vi. 4.*
émrd, of, ai, rd, seven: Mt. xii. 45; xv. 34; Mk. viii. 5
sq-; Lk. ii. 36; Acts vi. 3,etc.; often in the Apocalypse;
of énrd, sc. didxovor, Acts xxi. 8. In Mt. xviii. 22 it is
joined (instead of émrdxs) to the numeral adv. éBdopn-
kovrd«es, in imitation of the Hebr. paw, Ps. exviii. (exix.)
164; Prov. xxiv. 16; [see €Bdounxovrdks, and cf. Keil,
Com. on Mt. 1. c.].
émrdxus, (émrd), seven times: Mt. xviii. 21 sq.; Lk. xvii.
4. ((Pind., Arstph., al.)]*
éaraxus-x (Atot,-at,-a, seven thousand: Ro.xi.4. [(Hdt.)]*
rw, see etzrov.
"Epacros, -ov, 6, Erastus, (€pacrés beloved, [ef. Chan-
dler § 325; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 30]), the name
of two Christians : 1. the companion of the’ apostle
Paul, Acts xix. 22; 2. the city treasurer of Corinth,
Ro. xvi. 23. Which of the two is meant in 2 Tim. iv.
20 cannot be determined.*
épavvdw, a later and esp. Alexandrian [ef. Sturz, Dial.
Maced. et Alex. p. 117] form for epevvdw, q.v. Cf. Tdf.
ed. 7 min. Proleg. p. xxxvii.; [ed. maj. p. xxxiv.; esp.
ed. 8 Proleg. p. 81 sq.]; B. 58 (50).
épydtopar; depon. mid.; impf. eipyagopny (npyatopny,
Acts xviii. 3 LT Tr WH; [so elsewh. at times; this
var. in augm. is found in the aor. also]; cf. W. § 12, 8;
B. 33 (29 sq.); Steph. Thesaur. iii. 1970 c.; [Curtius, Das
Verbum, i. 124; Cramer, Anecd. 4, 412; Veitch s. v.]);
1 aor. elpyacdpuny (npyac. Mt. xxv. 16; [xxvi. 10]; Mk.
247
epyacia
xiv. 6, in T WH, [add, 2 Jn. 8 WH and Hebr. xi. 33 T
Tr WH; cf. reff. as above]); pf. e(pyacpa, in a pass.
sense [cf. W. § 38, 7e.], Jn. iii. 21, as often in Grk.
writ. [cf. Veitch s. v.]; (&pyov); Sept. for bya, Ty,
sometimes for nwy ; 1. absol. a. to work, labor, do
work: it is opp. to inactivity or idleness, Lk. xiii. 14;
Jn. v.17; ix. 4; 2 Th. iii. 10; with addition of rais
xepoi, 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Th. iv. 11; with acc. of time:
vUKTa Kal nyepav, 2 Th. iii. 8 [but Ltxt. T Tr WH the
gen., as in 1 Th. ii. 9 (see quépa, 1 a.); cf. W. § 30, 11
and Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5]; with the predominant idea
ot working for pay, Mt. xxi. 28 (év 76 aurea); Acts
Xvili. 3; 1 Co. ix. 6; 2 Th. iii. 12; dec. to the concep-
tion characteristic of Paul, 6 épya¢ouevos he that does
works conformed to the law (Germ. der Werkthdtige) :
Ro. iv.4.sq. _b. to trade, to make gains by trading, (cf.
our “do business”): & rum, with a thing, Mt. xxv. 16
(often so by Dem.). 2. trans. a. (to work i.e.) to
do, work out: ri, Col. iii. 28; 2 In. 8 (with which [ace.
to reading of L T Tr txt.] cf. 1 Co. xv. 58 end); pndév,
2 Th. iii. 11; Zpyov, Acts xiii. 41 (yd Sys, Hab. i. 5);
épyov kadov eis twa, Mt. xxvi. 10; é run (dat. of pers.
[cf. W. 218 (205)]), Mk. xiv. 6 [Ree. eis eué]; epya,
wrought, pass., Jn. iii. 21; ra pya tod Oeod, what God
wishes to be done, Jn. vi. 28; ix. 4; rod kupiov, to give
one’s strength to the work which the Lord wishes to
have done, 1 Co. xvi. 10; 1d dyaOdv, [Ro. ii. 10]; Eph.
iv. 28; mpds twa, Gal. vi. 10; kakdv revi te, Ro. xiii. 10
(twa te is more com. in Grk. writ. [Kuhner § 411, 5]);
ti eis twa, 3 Ju. 5. with acc. of virtues or vices, (to work
i.e.) to exercise, perform, commit: Sixcatcoovynv, Acts x.
35; Heb. xi. 33, (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 2; Zeph. ii. 3); Hv dvo-
piav, Mt. vii. 23 (Ps. v. 6 and often in Sept.) ; duapriay,
Jas. ii. 9. onpeiov, bring to pass, effect, Jn. vi. 30; ra
iepd, to be busied with the holy things i. e. to administer
those things that pertain to worship, which was the busi-
ness of priests and among the Jews of the Levites also,
1 Co. ix. 13; rv Oddaccap lit. work the sea (mare exerceo,
Justin. hist. 43, 3) i. e. to be employed on [cf. “ do busi-
ness on,” Ps. evil. 23] and make one’s living from it, Rev.
xviii. 17 (so of sailors and fishermen also in native Grk.
writ., as Aristot. probl. 38, 2 [p. 966°, 26]; Dion. Hal.
antt. 3,46; App. Punic. 2; [Leian. de elect. 5; W. 223
(209)]). to cause to exist, produce: ri, so (for RG ka-
repyd¢erat) 2 Co. vii. 10 LT Tr WH; Jas. i. 20 LT Tr
WH. b. to work for, earn by working, to acquire, (cf.
Germ. erarbeiten) : rv Bpdow, In. vi. 27 (xpnyara, Hat.
1, 24; ra émirndeca, Xen. mem. 2, 8, 2; Dem. 1358, 12;
dpyvpuov, Plato, Hipp. maj. p. 282 d.; Biov, Andoc. myst.
[18, 42] 144 Bekk.; @cavpovs, Theodot. Prov. xxi. 6;
Bpapa, Palaeph. 21, 2; al.); ace. to many interpreters
also 2 Jn. 8; but see 2a. above. [Comp.: xar-, mept-,
mpoo-epyaopat. | *
épyacta, -as, 7, (épydouat) ; 1. i. gq. 76 epyaterOa,
a working, performing: dxaOapoias, Eph. iv. 19. 2.
work, business: Acts xix. 25 (Xen. oec. 6, 8 et al.).
3. gain got by work, profit: Acts xvi. 19; mapéxew épya-
ciav rwi, ib. 16; xix. 24 [yet al. refer this to 2 above];
épyatns
(Xen. mem. 3, 10,1; cyneg. 3,3; Polyb. 4, 50, 3). 4.
endeavor, pains, [A. V. diligence]: didwpe épyaciay, after
the Latinism operam do, Lk. xii. 58 (Hermog. de invent.
3, 5, 7).
épydrms, -ov, 6, (epyd¢opar); 1. as in Grk. writ. a
workman, alaborer: usually one who works for hire, Mt.
x. 10; Lk. x. 7; 1 Tim. v. 18; esp. an agricultural laborer,
Mt. ix. 37sq.; xx. 1sq.8; Lk. x. 2; Jas. v. 4, (Sap. xvii.
16) ; those whose labor artificers employ [i. e. workmen
in the restricted sense], Acts xix. 25 (opp. to rots rexvi-
ras [A. V. craftsmen], ib. 24), cf. Bengel ad loc.; those
who as teachers labor to propagate and promote Christi-
anity among men: 2 Co. xi. 13; Phil. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii.
15, cf. Mt. ix. 37 sq.; Lk. x. 2. 2. one who does, a
worker, perpetrator : ris aduxias, Lk. xiii. 27 (ris dvopias,
1 Mace. iii. 6 ; rév KaX@v Kai cepvGv, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 27).*
epyov, -ov, To, anciently Fepyov, (Germ.Werk, [Eng. wark;
cf. Vanitek p. 922]); Sept. for 5y5, M75), and count-
less times for TIN and ny; worki. e. 1. busi-
ness, employment, that with which any one is occupied :
Mk. xiii. 34 (8:d0var twit 1d epyov adtod); Acts xiv. 26
(rAnpodv); 1 Tim. iii. 1; thus of the work of salvation
committed by God to Christ: 8:ddvac and reAetodv, Jn.
xvii. 4; of the work to be done by the apostles and other
Christian teachers, as well as by the presiding officers of
the religious assemblies, Acts xiii. 2; xv. 38; 1 Th. v.
13; Phil. i. 22; rd €pyov twds, gen. of the subj., the work
which one does, service which one either performs or
ought to perform, 1 Th. v. 13; épyov moueiv tivos to do
the work of one (i. e. incumbent upon him), evayyedi-
orod, 2 Tim. iv.5; 7d €pyov ris i. e. assigned by one and
to be done for his sake: 16 épyov rod Geovd redevodv, used
of Christ, Jn. iv. 34; (rod) Xpiorod (WH txt. Tr mrg.
xuptov), Phil. ii. 30; rod kupiov, 1 Co. xv. 58; xvi. 10; with
gen. of thing, eis épyov d:axovias, Eph. iv. 12, which means
either to the work in which the ministry consists, the
work performed in undertaking the ministry, or to the
execution of the ministry. of that which one under-
takes to do, enterprise, undertaking: Acts v. 38 (Deut.
xv. 10; Sap. ii. 12). 2. any product whatever, any
thing accomplished by hand, art, industry, mind, (i. q. rot-
na, ktiopa): 1 Co. iii. 13-15; with the addition of rav
xetpGv, things formed by the hand of man, Acts vii. 41;
of the works of God visible in the created world, Heb.
i. 10, and often in Sept.; ra ev r7 yf &pya, the works of
nature and of art (Bengel), 2 Pet. iii. 10; of the arrange-
ments of God for men’s salvation: Acts xv. 18 Rec.; ré
€py: Tod Geod what God works in man, i. e. a life dedi-
cated to God and Christ, Ro. xiv. 20; to the same effect,
substantially, épyov dyaOdv, Phil. i. 6 (see dyaOés, 2); Ta
€pya rod diaBdAov, sins and all the misery that springs
from them, 1 Jn. iii. 8. 3. an act, deed, thing done:
the idea of working is emphasized in opp. to that which
is less than work, Jas. i. 25; Tit.i. 16; 7d €pyov is dis-
tinguished fr. 6 Adyos: Lk. xxiv. 19; Ro. xv. 18; 2 Co.
x. 11; Col. iii. 17; 2 Th. ii. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 18, (Sir. iii. 8);
plur. év Adyous Kai ev pyots, Acts vii. 22 (4 Mace. v. 38
(37); for the same or similar contrasts, com. in Grk. |
248
Epryov
writ., see Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 268 sq.; Bergler on
Alciphr. p. 54; Bornemann and Kiihner on Xen. mem.
2, 3,6; Passow s. v. p. 1159; [L.and S. s. v. I. 4; Lob.
Paralip. pp. 64 sq., 525 sq.]). épya is used of the acts
of God—both as creator, Heb. iv. 10; and as gov-
ernor, Jn. ix. 3; Acts xiii. 41; Rev. xv. 3; of sundry
signal acts of Christ, to rouse men to believe in him
and to accomplish their salvation: Mt. xi. 2 [cf. épya
ris copias ib. 19 T WH Tr txt.], and esp. in the Gosp. of
John, as v. 20, 36; vii. 3; x.38; xiv. 11sq.; xv. 24, (cf.
Grimm, Instit. theol. dogmat. p. 63, ed. 2); they are
called ra épya rod warpés, i.e. done at the bidding and
by the aid of the Father, Jn. x. 37; ix. 3sq., cf. x. 25, 32;
xiv. 10; cad, as beneficent, Jn. x. 32 sq.; and connected
with the verbs Setxvivat, roreiv, épydteoOat, rehetcovv. epya
is applied to the conduct of men, measured by the
standard of religion and righteousness, — whether bad,
Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. xi. 48; Jn. iii. 20; Rev. ii.6; xvi. 11,
etc.; or good, Jn. iii. 21; Jas. ii. 14, 17 sq. 20-22, 24-26 ;
iii. 13; Rev. ii. 5, 9 [Rec.], 19; iii. 8; vdpuos epywr, the
law which demands good works, Ro. iii. 27; with a
suggestion of toil, or struggle with hindrances, in the
phrase xataravew dard tav épywv avrod, Heb. iv. 10; to
recompense one kara 7a épya avtod, Ro. ii. 6; 2 Tim. iv.
14; Rev. ii. 23 (Ps. lxi. (Ixii.) 13), ef. 2Co. xi. 15; Rev.
xviii. 6; xx.12sq.; the sing. ro pyov is used collectively
of an aggregate of actions (Germ. das Handeln), Jas. i.
4; rwvds, gen. of pers. and subj., his whole way of feeling
and acting, his aims and endeavors: Gal. vi.4; 1 Pet. i.
17; Rev. xxii. 12; rd €pyov rod vopov, the course of action
demanded by the law, Ro. ii. 15. With epithets: dyaOov
épyov, i.e. either a benefaction, 2 Co. ix. 8; plur. Acts
ix. 36; or every good work springing from piety, Ro. ii.
@5 (Cole 15103 Qe0hiat. 17) atoiel 6: 2am oleae
17; Heb. xiii. 21 [T WHom. épy.]; plur. Eph. ii. 10;
or what harmonizes with the order of society, Ro. xiii.
3; Tit.iii.1; &pyov xaddv, a good deed, noble action, (see
kados, b. and c.): Mt. xxvi.10; Mk. xiv. 6; plur. (often
in Attic writ.), Mt. v. 16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25; vi.18; Tit.
ii. 7; ili. 8,14; Heb. x. 24; 1 Pet. i. 12; ra epya ra ev
Sixatoovry equiv. to ra Sixara, Tit. iii. 5; ra €pya tod Geos,
the works required and approved by God, Jn. vi. 28
(Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 10; 1 Esdr. vii. 9, 15), in the same
sense épya pov i. e. of Christ, Rev. ii. 26; e¢pyov micrews,
wrought by faith, the course of conduct which springs
from faith, 1 Th. i. 3; 2 Th.i.11; &pya déta rijs peravoias,
Acts xxvi. 20; €pya memA\npwpéva evamtov tov beod, Rev.
iii. 2; Epya movnpa, Col. i. 21; 2 Jn. 11, cf. Jn. ili. 19; vii.
7; 1 Jn. iii. 12; Epya vexpd, works devoid of that life
which has its source in God, works so to speak unwrought,
which at the last judgment will fail of the approval of
God and of all reward: Heb. vi. 1; ix. 14; dkapma, Eph.
v. 11 (@xpnora, Sap. iii. 11; the wicked man pera rap
épyav adrov cvvaronetra, Barn. ep. 21,1); dvopa, 2 Pet.
li. 8; epya doeBeias, Jude 15; rod cxdrovs, done in dark-
ness, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. v. 11; [opp. to épy. rod goréds,
Ro. xiii. 12 L mrg.]; in Paul’s writ. Zoya véuov, works
demanded by and agreeing with the law (cf. Wieseler,
€pcbiloo
Com. iib. d. Br. an d. Gal. p. 194 sqq.): Ro. iii. 20, 28;
ix. 32 Rec. ; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 2, 5,10; and simply épya:
Ro. iv. 2, 6; ix. 12 (11); ib.32GLT Tr Will *ixcriG)s
Eph. ii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 9, (see Sixaida, 3 b.). ra €pya tivds
moteiv, to do works the same as or like to those of anoth-
er, to follow in action another’s example: Abraham’s,
Jn. viii. 39; that of the devil, Jn. viii. 41.
€pcO(fw; 1 aor. npéOica; (€péOw to excite); to stir up,
excite, stimulate: twa, in a good sense, 2 Co. ix. 2; as
com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, in a bad sense, to pro-
voke: Col. iii. 21, where Lehm. mapopyicere.*
épelSw: to fix, prop firmly; intrans., 1 aor. ptep. épe-
caca (4 mp@pa), stuck [R. V. struck], Acts xxvii. 41.
(From Hom. down.) *
épevyopnor: fut. epevEouar; 1. to spit or spue out,
(Hom.). 2. to be emptied, discharge itself, used of
streams (App. Mithr. c. 103); with the acc. to empty,
discharge, cast forth, of rivers and waters: Lev. xi. 10
Sept. 3. by a usage foreign to classic Greek [W. 23
(22 sq.)], to pour forth words, to speak out, utter: Mt. xiii.
35 (Ps. lxxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2; cf. xviii. (xix.) 3; exliv. 7
[Alex.]). The word is more fully treated of by Lobeck
ad Phryn. p. 63; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 138].*
épevvaw, -@ ; 1 aor. impv. epevynoov; (7 épevva a search) ;
fr. Hom. down; to search, examine into: absol. Jn. vii.
52; ri, Jn. v. 39; Ro. vill. 27; 1 Co. ii. 10; Rev. ii. 23
with which passage cf. Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; xx. 12; foll.
by an indir. quest. 1-Pet. 1.11 (2S. x. 3; Prov. xx. 27).
The form e,avvdw (q. Vv. in its place) T Tr WH have
received everywhere into the text, but Lchm. only in
Rey. ii. 23. [Comp.: é& epevvdw.] *
épnpla, -as, 7, (€pnuos), a solitude, an uninhabited re-
gion, a waste: Mt. xv. 33; Mk. viii.4; Heb. xi. 38; opp.
to mds, 2 Co. xi. 26, as in Joseph. antt. 2, 3, 1.*
Epnpos, -ov, (in classic Grk. also-os, -n, -ov, cf. W. § 11,
1; [B. 25 (23); on its accent cf. Chandler §§ 393, 394;
W. 52 (51)]); 1. adj. solitary, lonely, desolate, unin-
habited : of places, Mt. xiv. 13, 15; Mk.i. 35; vi. 32; Lk.
iv. 42; ix.10 [RGL], 12; Acts i. 20,etc.; 7 68és, leading
through a desert, Acts viii. 26 (2 S. ii. 24 Sept.), see Taga,
sub fin. of persons: deserted by others; deprived of the aid
and protection of others, esp. of friends, acquaintances,
kindred; bereft; (so often by Grk. writ. of every age, as
Aeschyl. Ag. 862; Pers. 734; Arstph. pax 112; &pnpos
te kal imd mdvrov KaraderpOeis, Hdian. 2, 12, 12 [7 ed.
Bekk.]; of a flock deserted by the shepherd, Hom. IL. 5,
140) : yun, a woman neglected by her husband, from
whom the husband withholds himself, Gal. iv. 27, fr. Is.
liv. 1; of Jerusalem, bereft of Christ’s presence, in-
struction and aid, Mt. xxiii. 38 [L and WH txt. om.];
Lk. xiii. 35 Rec.; cf. Bleek, Erklar. d. drei ersten Evv.
ii. p. 206, (cf. Bar. iv.19; Add. to Esth. viii. 27 (vi. 13) ;
2 Mace. viii. 35). 2. subst. 4 pnpos, sc. xapa; Sept.
often for 37D ; a desert, wilderness, (Hdt. 3,102): Mt.
xxiv. 26; Rev. xii. 6,14; xvii. 3; af Zpnuou, desert places,
lonely regions: Lk. i. 80; v. 16; viii. 29. an unculti-
vated region fit for pasturage, Lk. xv. 4. used of the
desert of Judwa [ef. W. § 18, 1], Mt. iii. 1; Mk.i. 3 sq.;
249
on 2
oe €pidvov
Lk. i. 80; iii. 2,4; Jn. i. 23; of the desert of Arabia,
Acts vii. 30, 36, 38, 42, 44; 1 Co. x. 5; Heb. iii. 8, 17.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Wiiste; Furrer in Schenkel v. 680
sqq-; [B. D.s. vv. Desert and Wilderness (Am. ed.)].
épndw, -@: Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. (cf. B. 38 (33))
epypovrar]; pf. ptep. Apypepevos; 1 aor. hpnuddnv; (epy-
pos); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. usually for 33n, 2707, onws
to make desolate, lay waste; in the N.T. only inthe Pass. :
modu, Rev. xviii. 19; to ruin, bring to desolation: Ba-
ovhetav, Mt. xii. 25; Lk. xi. 17; to reduce to naught:
modrov, Rev. xviii. 17 (16); npnwoperny kab yupriy roceiy
twa, to despoil one, strip her of her treasures, Rev. xvii.
16%
Eptjpacts, -ews, 7, (epnudw), a making desolate, desola-
tion: Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 20; see Bde
Avypa,c. (Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 9, 13; Sept. several times
for NAH, vw, etc.) *
épifw: [fut. epicw, cf. B. 37 (32)]; (Epis); to wrangle,
engage in strife, (Lat. riz ari): Mt. xii. 19, where by the
phrase ovx ¢pice: the Evangelist seems to describe the
calm temper of Jesus in contrast with the vehemence of
the Jewish doctors wrangling together about tenets and
practices. [(From Hom. down.)]*
épidela (not epideva, cf. W. § 6, 1 g.; [Chandler § 99])
[-6ia WH; seeI,cand Tdf. Proleg. p. 88], -etas, ), (€pibevo
to spin wool, work in wool, Heliod. 1,5; Mid. in the same
sense, Tob. ii. 11; used of those who electioneer for office,
courting popular applause by trickery and low arts, Ar-
istot. polit. 5, 3; the verb is derived from €pi6os working
for hire, a hireling; fr. the Maced. age down, a spinner
or weaver, a worker in wool, Is. xxxviii. 12 Sept.; a
mean, sordid fellow), electioneering or intriguing for office,
Aristot. pol. 5, 2 and 3 [pp. 1302», 4 and 1303, 14]; hence,
apparently, in the N. T. a courting distinction, a desire
to put one’s self forward, a partisan and factious spirit
which does not disdain low arts; partisanship, factiousness:
Jas. ili. 14, 16; kar’ épibeiav, Phil. ii. 3; Ignat. ad Phila-
delph. § 8; of é& épiOeias (see ex, II. 7), Phil. i. 16 (17) [yet
see éx, II. 12 b.]; i. q. contending against God, Ro. ii. 8
[yet cf. Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]; in the plur. ai épeOeia
[W. § 27,3; B. § 123, 2]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20. See
the very full and learned discussion of the word by
Fritzsche in his Com. on Rom. i. p. 143 sq.; [of which a
summary is given by Ellic. on Gal. v. 20. See further
on its derivation, Lobeck, Path.. Proleg. p. 365; cf. W.
94 (89) ].*
%piov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of 7d pos or elpos), wool: Heb.
ix. 19; Rev. i. 14. [From Hom. down. ]*
Epis, -tS0s, 4, acc. épw (Phil. i. 15), pl. gpdes (1 Co. i.
11) and épes (2 Co. xii. 20 [RG Tr txt.; Gal. v.20 RG
WHnmrg.]; Tit. iii. 9 [R GL Tr]; see [WH. App. p.
157]; Lob.ad Phryn. p. 326; Matthiae § 80 note 8 ; Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. p. 191 sq.; [W. 65 (63); B. 24 (22)]); conten-
tion, strife, wrangling: Ro. i. 29; xiii. 13; 1 Co. i. 11;
ili. 3; 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20; Phil.i.15; 1 Tim. vi. 4;
Tit. iii. 9. [From Hom. down.]*
épidiov, -ov, td, and Epudas, -ov, 6, a kid, a young goat:
Mt. xxv. 32 sq.; Lk. xv. 29. [Ath. 14, p. 661 b.]*
Eppas .
‘Eppds, acc. ‘Epyar {cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, (Doric for
puis), Hermas, a certain Christian (whom Origen and
others thought to be the author of the book entitled
“ The Shepherd” [ef. Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biog.
s. v. Hermas 2]): Ro. xvi. 14.*
éppnvela [WH -via; see I, c], -as, 9, (Eppnveva), interpre
tation (of what has been spoken more or less obscurely
by others): 1 Co. xii. 10 [L txt. duepp. q. v-]; xiv. 26.
[From Plato down. ]*
Epunverrts, -00, 5, (Epunvedo, q. V-), an interpreter: 1
Co. xiv. 28 LTrWHmrg. (Plat. politic. p. 290 ¢.; for
72 in Gen. xlii. 23.) *
éppnvedw : [pres. pass. épynvetouar]; (fr. “Epuis, who
was held to be the god of speech, writing, eloquence,
learning) ; 1. to explain in words, expound: [Soph.,
Eur.], Xen., Plato, al. 2. to interpret, i. e. to trans-
late what has been spoken or written in a foreign tongue
into the vernacular (Xen. an. 5, 4,4): Jn.i. 38 (39) RG
T, 42 (43); ix. 7; Heb. vii.2. (2 Esdr. iv. 7 for 039.)
[Comp.: 8:-, peO-epunvevo. | *
‘Eppfis, acc. ‘Eppjv, 6, prop. name, Hermes; 1. a
Greek deity called by the Romans Mercurius (Mercury):
Acts xiv. 12. 2. a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14.*
‘Eppoyevys, [i. e. born of Hermes; Tdf.’Eppoy. ], -ovs, 6,
Hermogenes, a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 15.*
épmerdy, -ov, 7d, (fr. epmw to creep, crawl, [ Lat. serpo;
hence serpent, and fr. same root, reptile; Vanitek p.
1030 sq.]), a creeping thing, reptile; by prof. writ. used
chiefly of serpents; in Hom. Od. 4, 418; Xen. mem. 1,
4, 11 an animal of any sort; in bibl. Grk. opp. to quad-
rupeds and birds, Acts x. 12; xi. 6; Ro. i. 23; and to
marine animals also, Jas. iii. 7; on this last pass. cf. Gen.
ix. 3. (Sept. for wp) and yyy.) *
épuOpds, -d, -dv, red; fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. only
in the phrase 4 é¢pvépa @ddaoaa the Red Sea (fr. Hat.
down [cf. Rawlinson’s Herod. vol. i. p. 143]), i. e. the
Indian Ocean washing the shores of Arabia and Persia,
with its two gulfs, of which the one lying on the east is
called the Persian Gulf, the other on the opposite side
the Arabian. Inthe N. T. the phrase denotes the upper
part of the Arabian Gulf (the Herodpolite Gulf, so called
[i. e. Gulf of Suez]), through which the Israelites made
their passage out of Egypt to the shore of Arabia: Acts
vii. 36; Heb. xi. 29. (Sept. for 430-0», the sea of sedge or
sea-weed [cf. B. D. as below]. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Meer rothes; Pressel in Herzog ix. p. 239 sqq.3 Furrer
in Schenkel iv. 150 sqq.; [B. D.s. vv. Red Sea and Red
Sea, Passage of; Trumbull, Kadesh-Barnea, p. 352 sqq.].)*
€pxopar, impv. epyou, épyeade, (for the Attic 161, ire fr.
eiuc) ; impf. Apyouny (for #ecy and fa more com. in Attic) ;
fut. eAevoouar; — (on these forms cf. [esp. Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 103 sqq.; Veitch s. v.]; Matthiae § 234;
Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 182 sq.; Kriiger § 40 s. v.; Kiihner
§ 343; W.§ 15s. v.; [B. 58 (50)]); pf. édnjavda; plpf.
eAndvOew; 2 aor. 7Oov and (occasionally by LT Tr WH
[together or severally ]—as Mt. vi. 10; [vii. 25, 27; x.13;
xiv. 34; xxv. 86; Mk. i. 29; vi. 29; Lk. i. 59; ii. 163 v. 7;
Vi. 17; vili. 35; x1. 2; xxiii. 33; xxiv. 1,23]; Jn. [1.39 (40);
250
Epyopat
iii. 26]; iv. 27; [xii.9]; Acts xii. 10; [xiv. 24]; xxviii.
14 sq. etc.) in the Alexandrian form §A6a (see drépyopat
init. for reff.); Sept. for x13, rarely for MN and 42);
[fr. Hom. down] ; I. to come; 1. prop. a. of
persons; a. univ. to come from one place into another,
and used both of persons arriving,—as in Mt. viii. 9; xxii.
3; Lk. vii. 8; xiv. 17 [here WH mrg. read the inf., see
their Intr. § 404], 20; Jn. v. 7; Acts x. 29; Rev. xxii. 7,
and very often; of épxydpevot x. of tmdyovres, Mk. vi. 31;
—and of those returning, as in Jn. iv. 27; ix. 7; Ro. ix.
9. Constructions: foll. by dé w. gen. of place, Mk.
vii. 1; xv. 21; Acts xviii. 2; 2 Co. xi. 9; w. gen. of pers.,
Mk. v. 85; Jn. iii. 2; Gal. ii. 12, ete. ; foll. by ék w. gen. of
place, Lk. v.17 [Ltxt. cuvépy.]; Jn. iil. 31, ete.; foll. by
eis w. acc. of place, to come into: as eis 7. oikiay, Tov oikov,
Mt. ii. 11; viii. 14; Mk. i. 29; v. 38, etc. ; eis rv modu,
Mt. ix.1, and many other exx.; foll. by eis to, towards,
Ju. xx. 3sq.; els Td mépav, of persons going in a boat,
Mt. viii. 28; of persons departing ék... eds, Jn. iv. 54;
dua w. gen. of place foll. by ets (Rec. pds) to, MK. vii. 31;
eis T. €optny, to celebrate the feast, Jn. iv. 45; xi. 56; &v
w. dat. of the thing with which one is equipped, Ro. xv.
29; 1 Co. iv. 21; foll. by émi w. ace. of place, (Germ.
tiber, over), Mt. xiv. 28; (Germ. auf), Mk. vi. 53; (Germ.
an), Lk. xix. 5; [xxiii. 33 L Tr]; Acts xii. 10, 12; to
w. ace. of the thing, Mt. iii. 7; xxi. 19; Mk. xi. 13; xvi.
2; Lk. xxiv. 1; w. ace. of pers., Jn. xix. 33; to one’s
tribunal, Acts xxiv. 8 Rec.; against one, of a military
leader, Lk. xiv. 313 xara w. acc., Lk. x. 33; Acts xvi. 7;
mapa w. gen. of pers. Lk. viii. 49 [Lchm. dad]; w. acc.
of place, to [the side of], Mt. xv. 29; mpds to, w. acc. of
pers., Mt. iii. 14; vii. 15; [xiv. 25 LT Tr WH]; Mk. ix.
14; Lk.i.43; Jn. i. 29; 2 Co. xiii. 1, and very often, esp.
in the Gospels; dé ruvos (gen. of pers.) wpds tua, 1 Th.
ili. 6; with simple dat. of pers. (prop. dat. commodi or
incommodi [cf. W. § 22, 7 N. 2; B. 179 (155)]): Mt.
xxi. 5; Rev. ii. 5,16, (exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v.
p- 1184* bot.; [Land S. s. v. II. 4]). with adverbs
of place: moéev, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14; Rev. vii. 13; dvadev,
Jn. iii. 31; dmecdev, Mk. v. 27; &de, Mt. viii. 29; Acts
ix. 21; évOdde, Jn. iv. 15 [RG LTr], 16; ékei, In.
xviii. 3 [ef. W. 472 (44v)]; mov, Heb. xi. 8; Sas rivds,
Lk. iv. 42; dpe twds, Acts xi. 5. The purpose for
which one comes is indicated — either by an inf., Mk.
[v.14LT Tr WH]; xv. 36; Lk.i. 59; iii. 12; Jn. iv. 15
[T WH &épy.], and very often; or by a fut. ptep., Mt.
xxvii. 49; Acts viii. 27; or by a foll. iva, Jn. xii. 9; ede
tovro, iva, Acts ix. 21; or by did twa, Jn. xii. 9. As
one who is about to do something in a place must neces-
sarily come thither, in the popular narrative style the
phrases €pxerat kai, #AGe Kai, etc., are usually placed be-
fore verbs of action: Mt. xiii. 19, 25; Mk.ii.18; iv. 15;
v. 333 vi. 29; xli.9; xiv. 37; Lk. viii. 12,47; Jn. vi. 15;
xi. 485 xii. 22; xix. 38; xx. 19, 26; xxi. 13; 3 Jn. 3;
Rev. v. 7; xvii. 1; xxi.9; épyov x. Se (or Brére), In. i.
46 (47); xi. 34; (and Rec. in] Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, [also
Grsb. exc. in vs. 3]; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) ((T Tr WH
dere], see cido, I. 1e.);— or Addy is used, foll. by a
Epyopar
finite verb: Mt. ii. 8; viii. 7; ix. 10,18; xii. 44; xiv. 12,
33 [RG L); xviii. 31 ; xxvii. 64 ; xxviii. 13 ; Mk. vii. 25
[Tdf. eioedO.]; xii. 14,42; xiv. 45; xvi. 1; Acts xvi. 37,
39 ; — or épxopevos, foll. by a finite verb: Lk. xiii. 14; xvi.
21; xviii. 5. in other places é\éav must be rendered
when I (thou, he, etc.) am come: Jn. xvi. 8; 2 Co. xii. 20;
Phil. i. 27 (opp. to dav). B. to come i.e. to appear,
make one’s appearance, come before the public: so car
e£oxnv of the Messiah, Lk. iii. 16; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 27, 31;
Heb. x. 37, who is styled preeminently 6 épydpevos, i. e.
he that cometh (i. e. is about to come) acc. to prophetic
promise and universal expectation, the coming one [W.
341 (320); B. 204 (176 sq.)]: Mt. xi. 3; Lk. vii. 19 sq.;
with eis rov kéopov added, Jn. vi. 14; xi. 27; év TO dvopate
tov kuptov, he who is already coming clothed with divine
authority i. e. the Messiah, — the shout of the people joy-
fully welcoming Jesus as he was entering Jerusalem, —
taken fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.) 25 sq.: Mt. xxi. 9; xxiii. 39;
Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiii. 35; xix. 38 [Tdf. om. épy. (so WH
in their first mrg.)]; Jn. xii.13. épyecOa used of Elijah
who was to return fr. heaven as the forerunner of the
Messiah: Mt. xi. 14; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11-13; of John
the Baptist, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; Jn. i. 31; with els
paptupiay added, Jn. i. 7; of Antichrist, 1 Jn. ii. 18; of
“false Christs” and other deceivers, false teachers, etc. :
Mt. xxiv.5; Mk. xiii.6; Lk. xxi. 8, (in these pass. with
the addition emi r@ dvdpari pov, relying on my name, i. e.
arrogating to themselves and simulating my Messianic
dignity); Jn. x. 8; 2Co. xi. 4; 2 Pet. iii. 3; Rev. xvii.
10; with the addition év r@ dvopate ro isi in his own
authority and of his own free-will, Jn. v. 43. of the Holy
Spirit, who is represented as a person coming to be the
invisible helper of Christ’s disciples after his departure
from the world: Jn. xv. 26; xvi. 7sq. 13. of the ap-
pearance of Jesus among men, as a religious
teacher and the author of salvation: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii.
34; Jn. v.43; vii. 28; viii. 42; with the addition of eds
r. xoopor foll. by iva, Jn. xii. 46; xviii. 37: eds xpipa, iva,
Jn. ix. 39; foll. by a telicinf. 1 Tim. i. 15; épyecOa dricw
twos, after one, Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27, 30;
6 \bav OC Déaros Kai aipatos, a terse expression for, ‘he
that publicly appeared and approved himself (to be
God’s son and ambassador) by accomplishing expiation
through the ordinance of baptism and the bloody death
which he underwent ’[cf. p. 210* bot.], 1 Jn. v. 6; epxe-
o6a foll. by a telic inf., Mt. v. 17; x.34sq.; Lk. xix. 10;
foll. by iva, Jn. x. 10; eAnAvOévae and épxerOar ev capki
are used of the form in which Christ as the divine Logos
appeared among men: 1 Jn. iv. 2, 3[Rec.]; 2Jn. 7. of
the return of Jesus hereafter from heaven in
majesty: Mt. x. 23; Actsi.11; 1 Cosiv- 52.5 263 4
Th. v. 2; 2 Th. i. 10; with év rj 86, avrod added, Mt.
xvi. 27; xxv. 31; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26; emi ray vepedav
(borne on the clouds) pera Suvdpews x. d6&ns, Mt. xxiv.
380; ev veédaus, ev vepéry xrr., Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27;
év rh Baowrela airod (see év, L. 5c. p. 210° top), Mt. xvi.
28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [els ray B. L mrg. Tr mrg. WH txt.]
b. of time, like the Lat. venio: with nouns of time, as
251
&p yowas
€pxovrat Huepat, in a fut. sense, will come [cf. B. 204 (176
sq.); W. § 40, 2a.], Lk. xxiii. 29; Heb. viii. 8 fr. Jer.
XXXVill. (xxxi.) 31; &Aevoovra jyéepar, Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii.
20; Lk.v. 35; xvii. 22; xxi.6; #AOev 7 npépa, Lk. xxii.
7; Rev. vi. 17; &pyera: dpa, dre, Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25;
xvi. 25; foll. by iva, Jn. xvi. 2,32; AdOev, is come, i.e. is
present, Jn. xvi. 4, 21; Rev. xiv. 7,15; €dndube 4 Spa,
iva, Jn. xii. 23; xiii. 1 (LT Tr WH fdéev) ; xvi. 32; xvii.
1; €AndvOer 7 Spa avrod, had come (Lat. aderat), Jn. vii.
30; vill. 20; py. wé, Jn. ix. 43 4 yépa tod kupiov, 1 Th.
v. 2; kacpoi, Acts iii. 19. with names of events that oc-
cur at a definite time: 6 Oepiopos, Jn. iv. 35; 6 yapyos tod
dpviov, Rev. xix. 7; 7AGev 4 kpiows, Rev. xviii. 10. in imi-
tation of the Hebr. Nan, 6, 7, 7d epydpevos, -evn, -evov, is
i.q. to come, future [cf. B. and W.u.s.]: 6 aiav, Mk. x. 30;
Lk. xviii. 30; 9 éoprn, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; 4 dpyn, 1 Th.
1. 10; ra epxdpeva, things to come, Jn. xvi. 13 (o'x37 the
times to come, Is. xxvii. 6) ; in the periphrasis of the
“name of Jehovah, 6 év kai 6 qv Kai 6 épxdpevos, it is
equiv. to éodpevos, Rev. i.4; iv. 8. c. of things and
events (so very often in Grk. auth. also) ; of the advent
of natural events: zorapoi, Mt. vii. 25[RG]3; karakdv-
opos, Lk. xvii. 27; Aypds, Acts vii. 11; of the rain coming
down én tis yys, Heb. vi. 7; of alighting birds, Mt. xiii.
4, 32; Mk. iv. 4; of a voice that is heard (Hom. Il. 10,
139), foll. by é« with gen. of place, Mt. iii. 17 [?] ; Mk. ix.
7([T WH Trunrg. éyevero]; Jn. xii. 28; of things that are
brought: 6 dvyvos, Mk. iv. 21 (émorodn, Liban. ep.
458; other exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given in Kypke, Kui-
noel, al., on Mk.1.c.). 2. metaph. a. of Christ’s
invisible return from heaven, i. e. of the power
which through the Holy Spirit he will exert in the souls
of his disciples: Jn. xiv. 18, 23; of his invisible advent
in the death of believers, by which he takes them to
himself into heaven, Jn. xiv. 3. b. equiv. to to come
into being, arise, come forth, show itself, find place or in-
fluence : ta oxavéana, Mt. xviii. 7; Lk. xvii. 1; 7a ayaa,
Ro. iii. 8 (Jer. xvii. 6) ; 7d réAetov, 1 Co. xiii. 10; 9 miotis,
Gal. iii. 23, 25; 4 amocracia, 2 Th. ii. 3; 7 Baodeta tod
Geod, i. q. be established, Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20,
ete.; 9 évroAn, i. q. became known, Ro. vii. 9. ¢. with
Prepositions: ék« ras [Lchm. azd] Odipeos, suffered
tribulation, Rev. vii. 14. foll. by ets, to come (fall) into
or unto: eis rd xeipov, into a worse condition, Mk. v. 26;
eis mecpacpov, Mk. xiv. 38 T WH; eis dredeypov (see
drredeypos), Acts xix. 27; els ryv Spay ravrny, Jn. xii. 27;
els kpiow, to become liable to judgment, Jn. v. 24; «is
ériyvoow, to attain to knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Tim.
iii. 7; eis 7d avepov, to come to light, Mk. iv. 22; «is
mpoxoriy éAndvée, has turned out for the advancement,
Phil. i. 12; épy. eis tt, to come to a thing, is used of a
writer who after discussing other matters passes on to
a new topic, 2 Co. xii. 1; els éavroy, to come to one’s
senses, return to a healthy state of mind, Lk. xv. 17
(Epict. diss. 3,1, 15; Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. § 3, p.
702 ed. Fabric.). py. émi twa to come upon one: ina
bad sense, of calamities, Jn. xviii. 4; in a good sense, of
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16: Acts xix. 6: to devolve
5 Sr)
€p@
upon one, of the guilt and punishment of murder, Mt.
xxiii. 35. %py. mpds rdv "Incovv, to commit one’s self to
the instruction of Jesus and enter into fellowship with
him, Jn. v. 40; vi. 35, 37, 44, 45, 65; mpds Td pas, to sub-
mit one’s self to the power of the light, Jn. iii. 20 sq.
II. togo: émicw rivos (INN 707); to follow one, Mt. xvi.
24; [Mk. viii. 34 RL Tr mrg. WH]; kere 235 xiv
27, (Gen. xxiv. 5, 8; xxxvii. 17, and elsewhere); pos
riva, Lk. xv. 20; ovy run, to accompany one, Jn. xxi. 3
(ef. B. 210 (182)]; ddd» épxeoOa, Lk. ii. 44 [ef. W.
226 (212)]. [Comp.: av-, ém-av-, am-, Oc, eia-, em-eus-, Tap-
<to-, ourveto-, €&, di-e&-, em-, KaT-, Tap-, avti-map-, Tept-,
Tpo-, Tpoo-, Tvy-epyou.at. |
[Syn.: Epxecar, (Balvery,) tropeverOat, xwpeiv:
with the N.T. use of these verbs and their compounds it may be
interesting to compare the distinctions ordinarily recognized
in classic Grk., where épxecGa: denotes motion or progress
generally, and of any sort, hence to come and (esp. éAdety)
arrive at, as well as to go (Balvew). Batvew primarily signi- |
fies to walk, take steps, picturing the mode of motion; to go
away. mopeverGat expresses motion in general, — often con-
fined within certain limits, or giving prominence to the
bearing; hence the regular word for the march of an
army. xwpeiv always emphasizes the idea of separation,
change of place, and does not, like e. g. ropever@at, note the
external and perceptible motion, —(a man may be recog-
nized by his wopela). Cf. Schmidt ch. xxvii.]
ép@, see etzrov.
épwrdo, -6, [ (inf. ray L T Tr, -rav RG WH; seel, ¢)];
impf. 3 pers. plur. npdrey and (in Mt.xv. 23 LT Tr WH,
Mk. iv. 10 Tdf.) jpwrovuy, cf. B. 44 (38); [W. 85 (82) ;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Soph. Lex. p.41; WH. App. p. 166;
Mullach, Griech. Vulgarspr. p. 252]; fut. éparjce@; 1 aor.
npdtoa; Sept. for Nw; to ash, i. e. 1. as in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down to question: absol., Lk. xxii. 68; Jn.
vill. 7 [RJ; teva, Jn. ix. 21; xvi. 19, 30; [xviii. 21 where
Rec. émep.], etc.; with the addition of Xéyev and the
words of the questioner: Mt. xvi. 13; Lk. xix. 31 [om.
Aeyor; xxiii. 3 T Tr WH]; Jn.i. 19, 21; v.12; ix.19;
xvi. 5; revd re (cf. W. § 32, 4 a.], Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. iv. 10;
Lk. xx. 3; Jn. xvi. 23 [al. refer this to 2]; rwd mepé twos,
Lk. ix. 45 [Lehm. éep.]; Jn. xviii. 19. 2. to aski.e.
to request, entreat, beg, beseech, after the Hebr. xvi, in a
sense very rare in prof. auth. (Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 14 [but
here the text is uncertain; substitute antt. 7, 8, 1; ef.
Dr. Ezra Abbot in No. Am. Rev. for 1872, p. 173 note];
Babr. fab. (42, 3]; 97, 3; Apoll. synt. p. 289, 20; ef. W.
pp- 30 and 32): ria, Jn. xiv. 16; with the addition of
Aéeyov and the words of the asker, Mt. xv. 23; Jn. xii.
21; foll. by impv. alone [B. 272 sq. (234)], Lk. xiv. 18
sq-; Phil. iv. 3; foll. by ta [cf. W. § 44, 8 a.3 B. 237
(204)], Mk. vii. 26; Lk. vii. 86; xvi. 27; Jn. iv. 47;
xvii. 153; xix. 31,38; 2Jn.5; 1 Th.iv.1; by 62s, Lk.
vii. 3; xi. 37; Acts xxiii. 20; by the inf. [B. 258 (222) ;
cf. W. 335 (315)], Lk. v. 3; viii. 37; Jn. iv. 40; Acts
iil. 3; x. 48; xxiii. 183 1 Th.v.123 rd tept twos, Lk.
iv. 38; Jn. xvii. 9, 20; 1 Jn. v. 16; trép tivos [foll. by
eis w. inf.; cf. B. 265 (228)], 2 Th. ii. 1 Sq-; €pwray ra
[WH txt. om. ra] mpas eipnryny (see eipnyn, 1), Lk. xiv. 32.
[Syn. see airéo, fin. Comr.: &-, €TT-EDWT AG, | |
25
2 éo Blo
éoOis, -jros, 9, (fr. evvyps, ExOnv, hence it would be
more correctly written éc6js [so Rec.“ in Lk.], cf.
Kiihner i. p. 217, 3), formerly FeoOns (cf. Lat. vestis,
Germ. Weste, Eng. vest, etc.), clothing, raiment, apparel:
Lk. xxiii. 11; xxiv.4 LT Tr WH; Actsi.10 RG; x. 30;
xii. 21; Jas. ii. 2sq. [From Hom. down.]*
%rOnois [Rec. &06.], -ews, 9, (fr. éo6€, and this fr.
éaOns, q- v-), clothing, apparel: plur., Lk. xxiv. 4 R G;
Acts i. 10 LT Tr WH;; [cef. Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 18;
Euseb. h. e. 2, 6, 7and Heinichen’s note]. (Rare in prof.
writ. [Aristot. rhet. 2, 8, 14 var.]; cf. W. § 2, 1 ¢.) *
€xOlw and éc6a, q. v-, (lengthened forms of ¢So [cf.
Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. p. 429]); impf. #oOcov; 2 aor.
2payov (fr. 6ATQ); fut. ddyoua (2 pers. payeoa, Lk.
xvii. 8 [reff. s. v. karaxavxdopat, init.]), for the classic
édoua, see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 185; Kihner i. p. 824;
[W. 89 (85); B. 58 (51); but esp. Veitch s. v.]; Sept.
for 5283 [fr. Hom. down]; to eat; Vulg. manduco, [edo,
etc.]; (of animals, to devour); a. absol.: Mt. xiv. 20
sq.; xv. 87,38; xxvi. 26; Mk. vi. 31; viii. 8; Jn. iv. 31,
and often; év ré dayeiy, in eating (the supper), 1 Co.
xi. 21; S:ddvar Twi dayeiv, to give one (something) to
eat, Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35,42; Mk.v.43; vi.37; Lk. ix.
13, (and with addition of an ace. of the thing to be eaten,
Jn. vi. 31, 523; &k Twos, Rev. ii. 7; [ef. W. 198 (187) sq.]);
hépew tivi payeiv, to bring one (something) to eat, Jn.
iv. 33; spec. in opp. to abstinence from certain kinds of
food, Ro. xiv. 3, 20; écdiew x. rive (and dayety x. mew),
to use food and drink to satisfy one’s hunger and thirst,
1 Co. xi. 22; contextually, to be supported at the ex-
pense of others, 1 Co. ix. 4; not to shun choice food and
in a word to be rather a free-liver, opp. to the narrow
and scrupulous notions of those who abstain from the
use of wine and certain kinds of food, Mt. xi. 19; Lk.
vii. 84; opp. to fasting (rd vyorevew), Lk. v. 33; of
those who, careless about other and esp. graver matters,
lead an easy, merry life, Lk. xii. 19; xvii. 27 sq.; 1 Co.
xv. 82, (Is. xxii. 13); of the jovial use of a sacrificial
feast, 1 Co. x. 7 fr. Ex. xxxii. 6; preceded by a nega-
tive, to abstain from all nourishment, Acts xxiii. 12, 21;
to use a spare diet, spoken of an ascetic mode of life,
Mt. xi. 18; of fasting, Acts ix. 9; éoOiew (x. mivetv) peta
twos, to dine, feast, (in company) with one, Mt. ix. 11;
Mk. ii. 16; Lk. v. 30; with one (he providing the enter-
tainment), i.e. at his house, Lk. vii. 36; pera trav pebvdr
tov etc., of luxurious revelling, Mt. xxiv. 49; Lk. xii.
45; éml tparé{ns rod Xpiorod, the food and drink spread
out on Christ’s table, i. e. to enjoy the blessings of the
salvation procured by Christ (which is likened to a ban-
quet), Lk. xxii. 30; écOlev revi, to one’s honor, Ro. xiv.
6. b. construed w. an acc. of the thing, to eat (con-
sume) a thing [W. 198 (187) note]: Mt. vi. 25; Mk.i.
6; Jn. iv. 32; vi. 31; Ro. xiv. 2; 1 Co. vill. 133 x. 255
etc.; dprov, to take food, eat a meal, (after the Hebr.
on) box, Gen. xliii. 25; Ex. ii. 20; 1S. xx. 24; Prov.
xxiii. 7), Mt. xv.2; Mk. iii. 20; Lk. xiv.1, 15; rév éav-
tov aproy, obtained by his own labor, 2 Th. iii. 12; &prov
mapd twos (gen. of pers.) to be supported by one, 2 Th.
écbw
ii. 8; ra mapd twos, the things supplied by one, Lk. x.
7, 1. q. ra mapariOéyeva in vs. 8 [cf. W. 366 (343)]; 1 Co.
x. 27; pyre aprov éa6. pyre oivoy mivew, to live frugally,
LK. vii. 33; 7d xupiakdv Seimvor payetv, to celebrate the
Lord’s supper, 1 Co. xi. 20; 74 mdoxa, to eat the paschal
lamb, celebrate the paschal supper, Mt. xxvi.17; Mk.
mivetz, 145 Lk. xxii.-8, 11, 15,16 LD T Tr WH; Jn.
XVili. 28; tas @valas, to celebrate the sacrificial feasts,
said of Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; of animals, in Lk. xv. 16
(where dy stands by attraction for d, because écOiew
with a simple gen. of thing is nowhere found in the N.
T. [W. 198 (187) note]). by a usage hardly to be met
with in class. Grk. (W. § 28,1; [B. 159 (139)]), & twos,
to (take and) eat of a thing: Lk. xxii. 16 [RG]; Jn. vi.
26, 50 sq.; 1 Co. xi. 28; on the other hand, ék rod kapmod
(LT Tr WH rv xaprov), ex rod yddaxtos éoGiew, in 1 Co.
ix. 7, is to support one’s self by the sale of the fruit and
the milk [but cf. B. as above, and Meyer ad loc.]. ék
with gen. of place: ex rod iepov, draw their support from
the temple, i. e. from the sacrifices and offerings, 1 Co.
ix. 13 [but T Tr WH read ra ek r. i.]; also ee @vctacrn-
plov, i. e. from the things laid on the altar, Heb. xiii. 10
[W. 366 (344)]. by a Hebraism (1 938), dé twos (ef.
W. 199 (187)]: Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28. Metaph. to
devour, consume: twa, Heb. x. 27; ri, Rev. xvii. 16; of
rust, Jas. v. 3. [CompP.: kar-, cvv-ec Oia. |
€o0a, i. q. €oOiw, a poetic form in use fr. Hom. down,
very rare in prose writ.; from it are extant in the N. T.
the ptep. éc@av in Mk. i. 6 T Tr WH; [Lk. x.7 LT Tr
WH]; Lk. vii. 33 L Tr WH, [also 34 WH]; the pres.
subj. 2 pers. plur. éo@yre in Lk. xxii. 30 LT Tr WH;
(ef. xarecOiw]. It occurs several times in the Sept., as
Lev. xvii. 10; Judg. xiv. 9 [Alex.]; Is. ix. 20; Sir. xx.
16; éadere, Lev. xix. 26. Cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81]; B.
58 (51).
*Eokel (T Tr WH, [see WH. App. p. 155, ands. v.
et, +]) or Eodi, 6, Esli, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk.
ii. 25.*
éo-orrpov, -ov, 76, (OITQ), a mirror: 1 Co. xiii. 12;
Jas. i. 23. (Sap. vii. 26; Sir. xii. 11; Pind. Nem. 7, 20;
Anacr. 11, [7 (6)] 3; Plut.; al.) The mirrors of the
ancients were made, not of glass [cf. B.D. s. v. Glass,
fin.], but of steel; Plin. h. n. 33, (9) 45; 34, (17) 48
[but see the pass. just referred to, and B.D. s. v. mirror].*
éorépa, -as, 7, (€amepos of or at evening), evening, even-
tide: Acts iv. 3; xxviii. 23; mpos €or. éoriv, it is towards
evening, Lk. xxiv. 29. [From Pind. and Hdt. down.]*
[éomepwvds, -, -dv, belonging to the evening, evening:
gvdaxh, Lk. xii. 38 WH (rejected) mrg. (Sept.; Xen.,
Dio Cass., Athen., al.)*]
’Eopép [or Eopév in Lk. R Ltxt.Trmrg.; WH
‘Kop., see their Intr. § 408], 6, Esrom or Hezrom or Hes-
ron, one of Christ’s ancestors: Mt. i. 3; Lk. iii. 33.*
[’Eopéy or ‘Egp. see the preceding word. ]
oxaros, -n, -ov, (fr.éxo, €oxov adhering, clinging close ;
[ace. to al. (Curtius § 583 b.) superl. fr. €&, the outer-
most]), Sept. for }s8, MINN; [fr. Hom. down]; ez-
treme, last in time or in place; 1. joined to nouns:
253
éoyaros
téros, the last in a series of places [A. V. lowest], Lk
xiv. 9 sq.; in a temporal succession, the last: éryaros
€x9pés, that remains after the rest have been conquered,
1 Co. xv. 26; kodpdyrns, that remains when the rest
have one after another been spent, Mt. v. 26; so Aerrov,
Lk. xii. 59; 4 éoy. oddmeyé, the trumpet after which no
other will sound, 1 Co. xv. 52, ef. Meyer ad loc.; ai écy.
mAnyal, Rev. xv. 1; xxi. 9; 4 eoydtn hepa ths éoprijs,
Jn. vii. 37. When two are contrasted it is i. q. the
latter, opp. to 6 mparos the former (Deut. xxiv. 1-4):
thus ra &pya (opp. to rav mporwv), Rev. ii. 19; 4 mAdvn,
Mt. xxvii. 64 (where the meaning is, ‘lest the latter
deception, caused by the false story of his resurrection,
do more harm than the former, which was about to pro-
duce belief in a false Messiah’); 6 éoyaros ’Addu, the
latter Adam, i. e. the Messiah (see Addu, 1), 1 Co. xv.
45. 9 éox. nuépa, the last day (of all days), denotes
that with which the present age (M37 Di}, see aidy,
3) which precedes the times of the Messiah or the glori-
ous return of Christ from heaven will be closed: Jn. vi.
39 sq. 44, [54]; xi. 24; xii. 48. of the time nearest the
return of Christ from heaven and the consummation of
the divine kingdom, the foll. phrases are used: éoydry
dpa, 1 Jn. ii. 18; ev capo eax. 1 Pet. i. 5; év écx. Xpove.
Jude 18 Ree., én’ é€oxdrov xpévov ibid. Tr WH; év éaxa-
tats nuépacs, Acts ii. 17; Jas. v. 3; 2 Tim. iii. 1; for other
phrases of the sort see 2 a. below; ém écydtwr trav xpd-
vov, 1 Pet. i. 20 RG, see below. 2. 6, 7, To €cx. absol.
or with the genitive, a. of time: oi éryarot, who had
come to work last, Mt. xx. 8, 12, [14]; the meaning of
the saying évovrat mparot €axaror kai €oxaTou mproe is not
always the same: in LK. xiii. 30 it signifies, those who
were last invited to enter the divine kingdom will be
first to enter when the opportunity comes, i. e. they will
be admitted forthwith, while others, and those too who
were first among the invited, will be shut out then as
coming too late; in Mt. xix. 30; xx. 16 it means, the
same portion in the future kingdom of God will through
his goodness be assigned to those invited last as to
those invited first, although the latter may think they
deserve something better; cf. Mk. x. 31. 6 mpéros x. 6
éox. i. e. the eternal, Rev. i. 11 Rec., 17; ii. 8; xxii.
13. &eyxaros as a predicate joined to a verb,adverbially
(cf. W. 131 (124); § 54, 2]: Mk. xii. 6; eoydrn (RG;
but see below) mavrwy amebave, Mk. xii. 22. €ayarov,
éoxara, used substantively [cf. B. 94 (82) § 125, 6]
in phrases, of the time immediately preceding Christ’s
return from heaven and the consummation of the divine
kingdom: én’ éoxdrov or €oxdrov rév nyepov, Heb. i. 2
(1); 2 Pet. iii. 3, (Barn. ep. 16, 5); trav xpdvev, 1 Pet.
i. 20; ém écyarov rod xpdvov, Jude 18 LT (see 1 above, and
éni, A. II. fin.), cf. Riehm, Lehrbegr. d. Hebrierbriefes,
p. 205 sq. ra €cxara with gen. of pers. the last state of
one: Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet. ii. 20 [but without
gen. of pers.]. Neut. €ryarov, adv., lastly: [w. gen. of
pers., Mk. xii. 22 LT TrWH]; 1 Co. xv. 8. b. of
space: 1d €cxaroyv rns yns, the uttermost part, the end,
of the earth, Actsi. 8; xiii. 47. c. of rank, grade of
eoVaTws
worth, last i. e. lowest; Mk. ix. 35; Jn. viii. 9 Rec.; 1Co.
ivancon
éoydrws, adv., extremely, [Xen. an. 2, 6,1; Aristot.,
al.j; ecxdrws tyew (in extremis esse), to be in the last
gasp, at the point of death: Mk. v. 23. Diod. excrpt.
Vales. p. 242 [i. e. fr. 1. 10 § 2,4 Dind.]; Artem. oneir.
8,60. The phrase is censured by the Atticists; cf.
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. etc. p. 704 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p.
389; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 178 sq.; [Win. 26].*
rw, adv., (fr. és, for tow [fr. Hom. on] fr. es; cf. W.
52; [B. 72 (63); Rutherford, New Phryn. p.432]); 1.
to within, into: Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54; with gen.
Mk. xv. 16 [W. § 54, 6]. 2. within: Jn. xx. 26; Acts
v. 233 6 2c dvOpwros, the internal, inner man, i. e. the
soul, conscience, (see dvOpwzos, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv.16 LT Tr
WH; Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; of gow, those who belong
to the Christian brotherhood (opp. to of @ [q. v. in
ééa, 1 a.]), 1 Co. v..12.*
Zrwbev, (ow), adv. of place, fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; [1. adverbially ;] a. from within (Vulg. de
intus, ab intus, intrinsecus, [etc.]) : Mk. vii. 21, 23; Lk.
X10 ss3 AC Onn VilnOe b. within (cf. W. § 54, 7): Mt.
vii. 15; xxiii. 25, 27, 28; Rev. iv. 8; v.1 [cf. ypade, 3];
6 tcwbev dvOpwmos, 2 Co. iv. 16 RG (see &cw, 2); 7d
éoa6ev, that which is within, the inside, Lk. xi. 40; with
gen. of pers. i. q. your soul, ibid. 39. [2. as a prep. with
the gen. (W § 54,6): Rev. xi. 2 Rec." (see e£wdev, 2).]*
éodrepos, -€pa, -epov, (compar. of gow, [cf. B. 28 (24
sq.)]), inner: Acts xvi. 24; 1d €o@repov tov Katamerd-
cparos, the inner space which is behind the veil, i. e. the
shrine, the Holy of holies, said of heaven by a fig. drawn
from the earthly temple, Heb. vi. 19.*
éraipos, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. 1; @ comrade,
mate, partner, [A. VY. fellow]: Mt. xi. 16 (where T Tr
WH rots érépos [q. v. 1 b., and cf. WH. Intr. § 404]);
voc. in kindly address, friend (my good friend): Mt. xx.
1Shiscxdis 12s xxvilo0%
érepd-yAwooros, -ov, 6, (€repos and yéooa), one who
speaks [another i. e.] a foreign tongue (opp. to 6pdyhoo-
cos): Ps. exili. (exiv.) 1 Aq.; Polyb. 24, 9, 5; Strab.
8 p. 833; [Philo, confus. lingg. § 3; al.]; but different-
ly in 1 Co. xiv. 21, viz. one who speaks what is utterly
strange and unintelligible to others unless interpreted ;
see what is said about ‘speaking with tongues’ under
yAaaca, 2.*
érepodidackadéw, -@; (€repos and diddoxaXos, cf. KaKo-
Sidacxadeiv, Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 10, 5); to teach other or
different doctrine i. e. deviating from the truth: 1 Tim.
i. 3; vi. 3. (Ignat. ad Polye. 3, and al. eccl. writ.) *
érepo-tuyéw, -@; (€repd(vyos yoked with a different
yoke; used in Lev. xix. 19 of the union of beasts of
different kinds, e.g. an ox and an ass), to come under
an unequal or different yoke (Beza, impari jugo copulor),
to be unequally yoked : rwi (on the dat. see W. § 31, 10
N.4; B. § 133, 8), trop. to have JSellowship with one who is
not an equal: 2 Co. vi. 14, where the apostle is forbid-
ding Christians to have intercourse with idolaters.*
érepos, -€pa, -epov, the other; another, other; [fr. Hom.
254
my
eve
on]; Sept. chiefly for nx. Itrefers 1. tonumber,
as opp. to some former pers.or thing; a. without the
article, other: joined to a noun (which noun denotes some
number or class within which others are distinguished
from the one), Mt. xii. 45 and Lk. xi. 26, émra érepa
mvevpara, i. e. from the number of the mvedpara or demons
seven others, to be distinguished from the one already
mentioned; add, Mk. xvi. 12; Lk. vi. 6; ix. 56, etc.; Jn.
xix.37; Actsii. 40; iv. 12, etc.; Ro. vii. 3; viii. 39; xiii. 9;
érepat yeveal, other than the present, i. e. past generations,
Eph. iii. 5; as in class. Grk. dAXos, so sometimes also
érepos is elegantly joined toa noun that is in apposition:
twice so in Lk., viz. érepou dt0 kaxovpyor two others, who
were malefactors [Bttm. differently § 150, 3], Lk. xxiii.
325; érepous €Bdopunkovra equiv. to érépous paOnrds, otrwes
joa €B6. Lk. x. 1; reliqua privata aedificia for ‘the rest
of the buildings, which were private’ Caes. b. g. 1, 5; ef.
Bornemann, Scholia ad Lue. p. 147 sq.; W. 530 (493);
[Joseph. c. Ap.1,15,3 and Miiller’s note]. simply, with-
out a noun, i. q. @Ados tes another, Lk. ix. 593; xxii. 58;
Acts i. 20; Ro. vii. 4; érepou roddoi, Mt. xv. 30; Lk. viii.
3; Acts xv. 353 ovdeév érepov, Acts xvii. 21; érepa, other
matters, Acts xix.39 RGT; moda kat érepa, many
other things also [hardly “also,” see xai, I. 3; cf. remark
s. Vv. modus, d.a. fin.], Lk. iii. 18 ; érepos with gen. of pers.
Gal. i. 19; ra érépwy (opp. to ra €avrod), Phil. ii. 45 ér.
with ris added, Acts viii. 34; neut. 1 Tim. i. 10; [év
érép@, introducing a quotation, Heb. v. 6, cf. Win. 592
(551) —but in Acts xiii. 35 supply yaApo]. in partitive
formulas: dNo .. . €repor dé, Heb. xi. 36 cf. Acts ii. 13;
6 mparos ... erepos, Lk. xiv. 19 sq.; xvi. 7; 6 devrepos
++ €repos, Lk. xix. 20 (where L T Tr WH 6 €repos);
tives... €repor Sé, Lk. xi. 16; GO pev... Dro be...
éréep@ dé... GA dé, 1 Co. xii. 9 sq.; of wev... doe [L of]
dé... €repor Sé, Mt. xvi. 14. _b. with the article, the
other (of two): of érepot, the others, the other party, Mt.
xi. 16 T Tr WH (see éraipos). distinctively: efs or 6
els... 6 repos, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 415 xvi. 18; xvii.
34 sq.3 Xvill. 10; xxiii. 40; 7d €repov mdoiov, Lk. v. 7;
tH O€ érépa sc. nuépa, the next day, the day after, Acts
xx. 15; xxvii. 3, (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6,10, [al.]). 6 érepos, the
other, when the relation of conduct to others is under
consideration is cften put by way of example for any
other person whatever, and stands for ‘the other affected
by the action in question’ [and may be trans. thy neigh-
bor, thy fellow, ete.]: Ro. ii. 13 xiii.8; 1Co. vil; x. 24,
29; xiv. 17; Gal. vi. 4; [Jas. iv. 12 RG]; plur. of, ai,
Ta €repot, -at, -a, the others i.e. the rest, Lk. iv.43. It re-
fers 2. to quality; another i. e. one not of the same
nature, form, class, kind; different, (so in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down): Ro. vii. 23; 1 Co. xiv. 21; xv. 40; 2 Co.
xi. 4; Gal. i. 6; Heb. vii. 11, 18,15; Jas. ii. 25; Jude 7.
[Syn. see dAXos.]
érépws, adv., otherwise, differently: Phil. iii. 15. [From
Hom. (apparently) down.] *
ér, adv., as yet, yet, still; 1. of time; a. ofa
thing which went on formerly, whereas now a differ-
ent state of things exists or has begun to exist: added
Le /
éToluatw
to a ptep., Mt. xxvii. 63; Lk. xxiv. 6, 44; Acts ix. 1;
xviii. 18; 2 Th. ii. 5; with gen. absol.: @ru (S€) abrod
Aadodrros, Mt. xii. 46; xvii. 5; xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43;
Lk. viii. 49; xxii.47; add, Lk. ix.42; xxiv. 41; Jn. xx.
1; Acts x. 44; Ro. v. 8; Heb.ix. 8; with a finite verb,
Heb. vii. 10; transposed so as to stand at the beginning
of a sentence: éri yap Xpiords dvt@v jay dod... . amé-
Gave, Ro. v. 6; cf. W. § 61, 5 p. 553 (515); [B. 389
(333)]; with another notation of time, so that it may be
trans. even (cf. Lat. jam) : &re éx kowdias pnrpds, Lk. i. 15
(€re €x Bpépeos, Anthol. 9, 567,15; é&ru am apxns, Plut.
consol. ad Apoll. 6 p. 104 d.)._b. of a thing which
continues at present, even now: Mk. viii. 17 RG; Lk.
xiv. 22; Gal. i. 10; 1 Co. xv. 17; with viv added, 1 Co.
iii. 2 [L WH br. er]; further, longer, (where it is
thought strange that, when one thing has established
itself, another has not been altered or abolished, but is
still adhered to or continues): Ro. iii. 7; vi. 2; ix. 19;
Gal. v.11. c. with negatives: od... ert, otk ert, no
longer, no more, Lk. xvi. 2; xx. 86; xxi. 1,43 xxii. 3;
iva pn ére lest longer, that ...no more, Rev. xx. 33 od py
ért, Rev. ili. 12; xvili. 21-23; oddeis, undeis, -Sepia, -dév
ért, nobody, nothing more, Mt. v.13; Heb. x. 2, (see pnkért,
ovKeTL). 2. of degree and increase; with the
comparative, even, yet: Phil. i. 9; Heb. vii. 15, (W.
240 (225)). of what remains, [yet]: Jn. iv. 35; vii. 33;
MSDs Xi. 33 Mt. xix. 20; Mk. xi. 6; Lk! xviii. 22;
of what is added, besides, more, further: ért adma&, Heb.
xli. 26 sq. ; re eva 7) Svo, Mt. xviii. 16; add, Mt. xxvi. 65;
Heb. xi. 32; éru dé yea moreover, and further, (Lat. prae-
terea vero), Heb. xi. 36 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1; Diod. 1,
74; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 4); éru dé kai (but or) yea
moreover also (Lat. praeterea vero etiam), Lk. xiv. 26 R
GT Lumrg.; Acts ii. 26; ere re kai and moreover too (Lat.
insuperque adeo), Lk. xiv. 26 L txt. Tr WH; Acts xxi.
28, [cf. B. $149, 8; W. 578 (537) note].
éropdto ; fut. éroiudow; laor. jroiwaca; pf. nroiuaxa
(Mt. xxii. 4 LT Tr WH); Pass., pf. jrotuacpar; 1 aor.
nrowuacOny; (€romos) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often
for 1)2 and 727}; to make ready, prepare: absol. to
make the necessary preparations, get everything ready, Lk.
xii. 47; of preparing a feast, Lk. xxii. 9, 12, (Gen. xliii.
15; 1 Chr. xii. 39); w. dat. of pers., for one: of prepar-
ing a lodging, Lk. ix. 52 [W. 594 (552); B. § 130, 5];
a supper, Mk. xiv. 15; also w. a telic inf. added, Mt. xxvi.
17; foll. by ta [cf. B. 237 (205)], Mk. xiv. 12; w.
ace. of the thing: 4 nroipacas the things which thou hast
prepared (as a store), Lk. xii. 20; [ri Seurvnow, Lk. xvii.
8]; 76 dpiorov, Mt. xxii. 4; 7d macya, Mt. xxvi. 19; Mk.
xiv. 16; Lk. xxii. 8,13; dpwpara, Lk. xxiii. 56; xxiv. 1;
térov Twi, Jn. xiv. 2 sq.; Eeviav, Philem. 22; [ovpBovAor,
Mk. xv.1 TWH mrg., cf. cupB.]; rv 68dv Kupiov (by a
fi. drawn from the oriental custom of sending on before
kings on their journeys persons to level the roads and
make them passable), to prepare the minds of men to
give the Messiah a fit reception and secure his blessings:
Mt. iii. 3; Mk.i. 3; Lk. iii. 4, (fr. Is. xl. 3); i. 76; [iva €rot-
uacb7 7 68ds Tv Bacihéwy, Rev. xvi. 12]; w. acc. of pers.,
255
éT0s
otpariaras, Acts xxiii. 23; rwi rwa, one for one, Lk. i.
17; éavrdv, Rev. xix. 7; foll. by iva [cf. B. 237 (205) ],
Rev. viii. 6; yroacpevn ws vipdn, i. e. beautifully
adorned, Rev. xxi. 2; jromacp. eis 71, prepared i. e. fit
for accomplishing any thing, 2 Tim. ii. 21; Rev. ix. 7;
prepared i.e. kept in readiness, e’s ri dpav x. fépav
etc., for the hour and day sc. predetermined, Rev. ix. 15.
In a peculiar sense God is said éroudoas re for men, i. e.
to have caused good or ill to befall them, almost i. q. to
have ordained ; of blessings : ri, Lk. ii. 31; Rev. xii. 6;
ivi rt, Mt. xx. 23; xxv. 34; Mk. x. 40; [1 Co. ii. 9];
Heb. xi. 16; of punishment: rwi 7, Mt. xxv. 41.
[Comp.: mpo-erousdto. | *
éropacia, -as, 7, (€romdtw, cf. Oavpacia, <ikacia, €p-
yagia) ; 1. the act of preparing : ris tpopijs, Sap. xiii.
12; ré@v kdwapiov, Artem. oneir. 2, 57. 2. i. q. érot-
porns, the condition of a pers. or thing so far forth as pre-
pared, preparedness, readiness: Hipp. p. 24 [i. 74 ed.
Kiihn] ; Joseph. antt. 10, 1,2; readiness of mind (Germ.
Bereitwilligkeit), ths xapdias, Ps. ix. 38 (x. 17): év éror-
pacia Tov evayyediov, with the promptitude and alacrity
which the gospel produces, Eph. vi. 15.*
€rounos (on the accent cf. [Chandler § 394]; W. 52
(51)), -y (2 Co. ix. 5; 1 Pet. i. 5), -ov, and -os, -ov (Mt.
xxv. 10 [cf. WH. App. p. 157°; W. § 11,1; B. 25 (22)]);
fr. Hom. down; prepared, ready; a. of things: Mt.
xxii. 4, 8, [(Lk. xiv. 17)]; Mk. xiv. 15 [Lbr. ér.]; 2 Co.
ix. 5; ready to hand: ra €rowa, the things (made) ready
(in advance by others), i. e. the Christian churches al-
ready founded by them, 2 Co. x. 16; i. q. opportune,
seasonable, 6 kaipos, Jn. vil. 6; carnpia éroipn dmoxadv-
Ova, on the point of being revealed, 1 Pet.i.5. b. of
persons; ready, prepared: to do something, Acts xxiii.
21; to receive one coming, Mt. xxiv. 44; xxv. 10; Lk.
xii. 40; mpds 7, for (the doing of) a thing, Tit. iii. 1;
1 Pet. iii. 15; foll. by the inf. [cf. B. 260 (224)], Lk.
xxii. 833; by rod with inf., Acts xxiii. 15 [B. § 140, 15;
W. § 44,4a.]; ev éroip@ xa, to be in readiness, foll. by
the inf. (Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 34 sub fin.): 2 Co. x. 6
[cf. W. 332 (311)]. (For }123, Ex. xix. 11,15; Josh.
viii. 4, etc.) *
érolpas, adv., [fr. Thuc. on], readily; éroipws éx to
be ready: foll. by inf., Acts xxi. 13; 2 Co. xii. 14; 1
Pet. iv. 5 [(not WH)]. (Sept. Dan. iii. 15; Diod. 16,
28; Joseph. antt. 12, 4,2; 13, 1,1.) *
éros, -ous, [gen. plur. erav, cf. B. 14 (18)], ro, [fr.
Hom. down], Hebr. 73, @ year: Lk. iii. 1; Acts vii.
30; Heb. i. 12; 2 Pet. iii. 8; Rev. xx. 3, etc.; &y éxew,
to have passed years, Jn. viil. 57; with ev aaeveia
added, Jn. v. 5 [ef. W. § 32, 6]; etvat, yiveoOa, yeyove-
vat ray, e. g. dhdexa, to be twelve years old [cf. Eng. (a
boy) of twelve years]: Mk. v.42; Lk. ii. 42; ili. 23 [ef.
W. 349 (328)]; viii. 42; Actsiv. 22; yeyorvia éXatrov
érav é&nxovra, less than sixty years old, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W.
590 (549)]; dat. plur., of the space of time within which
a thing is done [W. § 31, 9a.; B. § 133, 26], Jn. ii. 20;
Acts xiii. 20; acc., in answer to the quest. how long?:
Mt. ix. 20; Mk. v. 25; Lk. ii. 36; xiii. 7 sq. 11,16; xv.
ed 256
29; Acts vii. 6, 36, 42; Heb. iii. 10 (9), 17; Rev. xx. 2,
: 4,6. preceded by a prep.: dé, from... on, since, Lk.
viii. 43; Ro. xv. 23; in the same sense ék, Acts ix. 33;
xxiv. 10[A. V. of many years]; dia with gen., .. . years
having intervened, i. e. after [see d1a, 1. 2]: Acts xxiv.
17; Gal. ii. 1; eds, for... years, Lk. xii. 19; emi with
ace. (see émi, C. II. 1 p. 235° bot.), for (the space of),
Acts xix. 10; jerd with acc., after, Gal. 1.18; iii. 17;
mpd with gen., before [Eng. ago; cf. mpé, b.], 2 Co. xii. 2;
xar éros, yearly, Lk. ii. 41. [SYN. ef. évaurds. ]
ed, adv., (prop. ev, the unused neut. of the adj. és in
Hom.), well: «3 mpdoow, not as many interp. take it,
contrary to ordinary Grk. usage, to do well i.e. act
rightly (which in Greek is expressed by ép0as or Kadas
mpdaow), but to be well off, fare well, prosper, Acts xv.
29 [R. V. it shall be well with you] (Xen. mem. 1, 6, 8;
2,4,6; 4, 2,26; oec. 11,8; Joseph. antt. 12,4, 1; dors
Kaas mpdrret, ovyi kal ed mparre; Plat. Alc. i. p. 116 b.;
el ed mparrovat adixodvres, Prot. p. 333 d.; et rus GAXos €d
pev eroinoey tuas ev mpdtrwv, Dem. 469, 14; and some
began their letters with «3 mpdrrew, cf. 2 Mace. ix. 19;
Diog. Laért. 3, 61 and Menagius (Ménage) in loc. In
one passage alone, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 14, the drift of the
discussion permits Socrates to deviate from common
usage by attaching to the phrase the notion of right con-
duct, acting well; [yet this sense occurs in eccles. Grk.,
see e. g. Justin M. apol. 1, 28 and Otto’s note; ef. L.
and S. s. v. mpdoow, IV.]); iva ed cou yévnra that it
may be well, things may turn out well, with thee, Eph.
vi. 8 (Gen. xii. 13; [Ex. xx. 12]; Deut. iv. 40; [v. 16];
Orat. Az. [i. e. Song of the Three Children] vs. 6);
motety teva, to do one good, Mk. xiv. 7 [here T om. the
ace.; L Tr WH read dat.], (Judith x. 16; Bar. vi. (i.e.
Ep. Jer.) 37 (38); Sir. xiv. 11; Xen. Cyr. 1, 6,30). In
commendations, ed (dodA€ dyade), well! well done! Mt.
xxy. 21, 23; Lk. xix.17 RG; Xen. venat. 6, 20; see
evye.*
Eva [WH Eva (see their Introd. § 408); Rec. Eda, so
G Tr in 1 Tim. ii. 13, where R* Ea], -as [B. 17 (15)],
7, (TN, explained Gen. iii. 20), Eve, the wife of Adam:
ZiWowxins a lelimyaied 3
evayyeAlLw: 1 aor. einyyedioa (Rev. x. 7; xiv. 6; 1S.
xxxi. 9; 2S. xviii. 19; W. 71 (69); [B. 35 (30)]); Pass.,
pres. evayyedifouar; pf. ptep. edtnyyedcopevor (Heb. iv.
2); Laor. ednyyedtcOnv; Mid., pres. evayyeNiCouat; impf.
evnyyedt(ounv (Acts viii. 25 LT Tr WH); 1 aor. ednyye-
Aodunv; (evdyyedos bringing good news); Sept. for
wa; to bring good news, to announce glad tidings; Vulg.
evangelizo [etc.]; used in the O. T. of any kind of good
news: 1S.xxxi. 9; 2S.i.20; 1 Chr. x.9; of the joyful
tidings of God’s kindnesses, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 10; 16 co-
thptov Beod, Ps. xev. (xevi.) 2; in particular, of the
Messianic blessings: Is. xl. 9; lii. 7; 1x. 6; xi. 1, etec.;
in the N. T. used esp. of the glad tidings of the coming
kingdom of God, and of the salvation to be obtained in
it through Christ, and of what relates to this salvation.
L Inthe Active (rarein Grk. auth. also, in fact found
only in later Grk., as Polyaen. 5, 7; etnyyeXixet avTa,
evayyerilo
Dio Cass. 61,13; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268; [W. 243):
w. dat. of the pers. to whom the news is brought, Rev.
x. 7 Rec.; w. acc. of the pers. to whom the announce-
ment is made, ibid. GL T Tr WH; Rev. xiv.6 RG; bya
construction not found elsewhere, émi teva (cf. Germ. die
Botschaft an einen bringen), ibid. G LT Tr WH. 10,
Passive [cf. W. 229 (215); B.188 (163)]; of persons,
glad tidings are brought to one, one has glad tidings pro-
claimed to him: Mt. xi. 5; Lk. vii. 22; Heb. iv. 2,6; of
things, to be proclaimed: evayyedi€erae 7 Bactreia Tod
cov, the glad tidings are published of the kingdom of
God close at hand, Lk. xvi. 16; 1d evayyéduov, the joyful
announcement of man’s salvation is delivered, Gal. i. 11
[B. 148 (129 sq.)]; 7d pyya ro evayyedioGer eis dyas, the
word of good tidings brought unto you (see eis, A. I. 5
b. [cf. W. 213 (200) ]), 1 Pet. i. 25; impers. ednyyedioOn
rwi, the good news of salvation was declared, 1 Pet. iv.
6. III. as deponent Middle (in Grk. writ. fr.
Arstph. eqq. 643 down), to proclaim glad tidings; spec.
to instruct (men) concerning the things that pertain to
Christian salvation: simply, Lk. ix. 6; xx. 1; Acts xiv.
7; Ro. xv. 20; 1Co.i. 17; ix.16,18; rim Ady@ ednyye-
Aicdpnv tpiv ef katéxere, if ye hold fast in your minds
with what word (i. e. with what interpretation; for he
contrasts his own view of Christian salvation with his
opponents’ doctrine of the resurrection) I preached to
you the glad tidings of salvation, 1 Co. xv. 2. w. dat.
of pers. (as com. in Grk. writ.), to any one: Lk. iv. 18
fr. Is. lxi. 1; spec. to bring to one the good tidings con-
cerning Jesus as the Messiah: Gal.i.8; iv. 13; Ro. i.
15; evayy. w. ace. of the thing: univ., ray miorw rds,
to bring good tidings of the faith in which one excels,
1 Th. iii. 6; of Messianic blessings: etpyynv, Acts x. 36;
Ro. x. 15 [RG Tr mrg. br.] (fr. Is. lii. 7) ; rjv Baowdrciav
t. beod, Lk. viii. 1; ra wept ris Bac. r. eod, Acts viii. 12
(where GLT Tr WH om. ra; cf. Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 2
6 pev ... TH yuvatkl mept TovT@y evnyyeAiCeTo) ; THY mioTL,
the necessity of having faith in Christ, Gal. i. 23. ri
rut [B. 150 (131)], Lk.i. 19; ii. 10; Acts xvii. 18[T Tr
WHom. dat.]; Eph. ii. 17; riwi tr. Bao. rod Oeod, Lk. iv.
43; evayy. "Incotv tov Xpiordv or (so L T Tr WH) rov
Xptordv Incody, to proclaim the glad news of Jesus the
Christ, Acts v. 42, and (which comes to the same thing)
Tov Kuptov "Inoovv, Acts xi. 20; rov vidv rod Oeod ev rois
€Oveot, among the Gentiles, Gal. i. 16; rév "Incodv rim,
Acts viii. 35; with xat ryv avdotacivy tux added, Acts
xvii. 18 (where T Tr WH om. airois) ; rév Adyor, to an-
nounce the glad tidings of the Messiah, or of the king-
dom of God, or of eternal salvation offered through
Christ, Acts viii. 4; rév Adyov rod kupiov, Acts xv. 35;
7d evayyeAtov, 1 Co. xv. 1; w. dat. of the pers. added to
whom it is preached, 2 Co. xi. 7; rév mAodrov [1d mAov-
tos] rod Xptorov €v trois €Oveot, among the Gentiles [but
LT Tr WHom. év], Eph. iii. 8. By a constr. unknown
to the earlier Grks. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 268), with
ace. of the pers. to whom the announcement is made
[W. 223 (209)]: Lk. iii. 18; Acts xvi. 10; Gal. i. 9
(where it is interchanged with evayy. rim vs. 8); 1 Pet.
evaryyéXLov
i. 12, (Justin M. apol. 1, 33); rid m, ace. of the thing
(Alciphr. epp. 3, 12; Heliod. 2, 10; Euseb. h. e. 3, 4;
[{cf. W. 227 (213); B. 150 (131)]}), foll. by ore ete. nets
xili. 32; teva foll. by inf. Acts xiv. 15;
modes, Acts viii. 25, 40; xiv. 21; [els Ta Umepexewwa,
2 Co. x. 16 (cf. W. 213 (200), and II. above). Comp.:
apo-evayyediCopat. | *
ebayyedvov, -ov, 76, (evdyyedos [cf. evayyeNi(w]), Hebr.
mwa and 773; 1. a reward for good tidings (cf.
ra diSacxddva, the fees given the d:ddcxados), Hom. Od.
14,152; Cic. ad Att. 2,3 and 12; 13,40; Plut. Demetr.
17; Ages. 33; Sept. 2S. iv. 10. 2. good tidings:
Leian. asin. 26; App. b. civ. 4,20; Plut.; al.; plur.
Sept. 2S. xviii. 22, 25, com. txt.; but in each place evay-
yeAia should apparently be restored, on account of vs. 20
avnp evayyedias. Inthe N. T. spec. a. the glad tidings
of the kingdom of God soon to be set up, and subsequently
also of Jesus, the Messiah, the founder of this kingdom:
MC 10155 vill. 353-x. 293 xiii. 10; xiv. 9; xvi. 15; Mt.
xxvi. 13; w.agen. of the obj. added: ts BaciAeias, Mt.
iv. 23; ix. 35; xxiv. 14; Mk.i.14 RLbr. After the
death of Christ the term 16 evayyéAcov comprises also
the preaching of (concerning) Jesus Christ as having
suffered death on the cross to procure eternal salvation
for men inthe kingdom of God, but as restored to life
and exalted to the right hand of God in heaven, thence
to return in majesty to consummate the kingdom of God;
so that it may be more briefly defined as the glad tidings
of salvation through Christ; the proclamation of the grace
of God manifested and pledged in Christ; the gospel
[A-S. god-spell (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.)]: Acts
vets vo. ds 16 Gly ir WE six: 16:5) xi-28's 1)(Co:. iv.
15; ix. 14,18[GLT Tr WH], 23; xv. 1; 2 Co. viii. 18;
Gal. ii. 2; Eph. iii. 6; vi. 19 [L WH br. evay.]; Phil. i. 5,
eal alia LG)) 5 [iit 22,, Che iets... 2idai|5 iv. 35 (15, cf.
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 2]; 1 Th. ii.4; 2 Tim. i. 8,10; w.
gen. of the obj., the gospel concerning etc.: tov Xprorov
[cf. W. 186 (175) sq.], Ro. i. 16 Rec.; xv. 19, 29 Rec. ;
1 Co. ix. 12,18 [Rec.]; 2 Co.ii. 12; ix. 13; x. 14; Gal.
i. 7; Phil. i. 27; 1 Th. ili. 2; rod kuplov nav Ino. Xp.
2 Th. i. 8 [T Tr WHom. Lbr. Xpiorod]; rov viod rod
6cov, Ro. i. 9 cf. Mk. i. 1;
ths eipnyns, Eph. vi. 15; rH xdperos rod Beot, Acts xx.
Tas K@pas, Tas
THs ToTnplas tay, Hph. i. 13;
24; rhs ddEns Tov paxapiov Geov, 1 Tim. i. 11; rhs dd&ns
rod Xpiatov, 2 Co. iv. 4. 4 adnOera Tov evayyediov, the
truth contained in the gospel [cf. W. 236 (221 sq.) ],
Gal. ii. 5, 14; Col. i. 5; 4 €Amis rod edayy. the hope which
the gospel awakens and strengthens, Col. i. 23; 4 miors
tod evayy. the faith given the gospel, Phil. i. 27; of
Secpol r. evayy. (see Seopds, fin.), Philem. 13;
evayy. of another sort, i. e. different from the true doc-
trine concerning Christian salvation, Gal. i. 6; 2 Co. xi.
4; aidnov evayy. the contents of which were decreed by
God from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. with gen. of the au-
thor; and that a. of the author of the subject-matter
or facts on which the glad tidings of man’s salvation
rest, and who wished these glad tidings to be conveyed
to men: 7d evayy. rod Ge0d, Ro. xv. 16; 2 Co. xi. 7; 1 Th.
id
€TEpov
257
evyevns
ii. 2, 8 sq.; 1 Pet. iv. 17; more fully rod deo Tept Tov
viovd adrov, Ro. i. 1-3. B. of the author of the partic-
ular mode in which the subject-matter of the gospel is
understood (conception of the gospel) and taught to
others; thus Paul calls his exposition of the gospel (and
that of the teachers who agree with ey in Opposition
to that of those teaching differently, 76 evayy. fdr :
2 Co. iv. 3, [cf. rd ed. oY evayyeAtobev im eyo, Gal. i.
11]; kara 76 evayy. pov, as I expound it, Ro. ii. 16; xvi.
25; 2 Tim. ii. 8. y- of him who preaches the gospel:
jpov, 1 Th.i.5; 2 Th. ii. 14. with gen. of those to
whom it is announced: ris meptrous (i. e. ray meplTeTpN-
peéver), to be preached to the circumcised or Jews; and
TO ev. THs akpoBvorias, to be carried to the Gentiles, Gal.
Tints b. As the Messianic rank of Jesus was proved
by his words, his deeds, and his death, the narrative of
the sayings, deeds, and death of Jesus Christ came to be
called edayyédtoy: so perhaps in Mk. i. 1; for the pas-
sage may also mean, ‘glad tidings concerning Jesus
Christ began to be prociaimed even as it is written,’ viz.
by John the Baptist; cf. De Wette ad loc. At length
the name was given to a written narrative of the glad
tidings; so in the titles of the Gospels, on which see
kata, II. 3c. a. [On the eccl. senses of the word, see
Soph. Lex. s. v.] *
ebayyedtr ris, -ov, 6, (evayyeAi(w), a bibl. and eccl. word,
a bringer of good tidings, an evangelist (Vulg. evangelis-
ta). This name is given in the N. T. to those heralds of
salvation through Christ who are not apostles: Acts xxi.
8; Eph. iv. 11; 2 Tim. iv.5. [B. D.s. v. Evangelist. ]*
ebapertéw, -@: 1 aor. inf. evaperrnoa; pf. inf. ednpe-
ornkevat, and without augm. evapeornk. Heb. xi. 5 L WH
[ef. WH. App. p. 162; B. 35 (30)]; to be well-pleasing :
r@ bed (Sept. for prbsn- -ny yoann, Gen. v. 22, 24;
vi. 9), Heb. xi. 5 eq: (Sir. xliv. 16; Philo de Abr. § 6;
de exsecr. § 9; revi, Diod. 14, 4). Pass. pres. evape-
orodpa; rwi[B. 188 (163); W. § 39,1 a.], to be well
pleased with a thing: Heb. xiii. 16 (Diod. 3, 55; 20,79;
Diog. Laért. 10, 137).*
et-dpertos, -ov, (fr. ed and dpeords), well-pleasing, ac-
ceptable: Ro. xii. 2; ruvi, to one, Ro. xii. 1; xiv. 18; 2 Co.
yv. 9; Eph.v. 10; Phil. iv. 18; & ru, in anything, Tit. ii.
9; év xupio (see év I. 6 b., p. 211” mid.), Col. iii. 20 (R om.
év); évdmov with gen. of pers., in one’s judgment: Heb.
xiii. 21. (Sap. iv. 10; ix. 10; Clem. Al. [strom. 2, 19 p.
481, 21 etc.; Just. M. apol. 1, 44 sub fin.; Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 49, 5].) See the foll. word.*
ei-apéotws, adv., in a manner well-pleasing to one, ac-
ceptably: 6 OeG, Heb. xii. 28. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5;
gladly, willingly, Epict. diss. 1, 12, 21; frag. 11.)*
EwPovdos, -ov, 6, [lit. of good counsel], Eubulus, a
Christian : 2 Tim. iv. 21.*
ed-ye, used in commendation, well done! Lk. xix.17LT
Tr WH. (Arstph., Plat., al.; Sept. fornxn.) Cf. ed, fin.”
edyevis, -és, (fr. ed and yévos) ; 1. well-born, of noble
race: Lk. xix. 12 (ofa prince) ; 1 Co.i. 26. 2. noble-
minded: compar. evyevéorepos, Acts xvii. 11. (Sept;
often in Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. andTragg. down.) *
Enola
e08ia, -as, 9, (fr. edSios, -ov, and this fr. ed and Zevs,
gen. Adds, Zeus, the ruler of the air and sky), @ serene
sky, fair weather: Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the
passage]. (Sir. iii. 15; Pind., Aeschyl., Hippocr., Xen.,
and sqq.) *
ed-Soxéw, - ; impf. 1 pers. plur. eddoxodpev (1 Th. ii. 8
{where WH after cod. Vat. nidox.; W.and B. as below ]);
1 aor. evSdx«noa and (in Heb. x. 6, 8, L T Tr; 1 Co. x. 5
LTr WH;; Ro. xv. 26, 27 and 1 Th. iii. 1 T Tr WH ; Mt.
xii 18 T Tr; Mt. iii. i7 T; Col.i. 19 L mre.) niddxyoa,
ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 456 and 140; W. 71 (69); [B.
34 (30); Tdf. Proleg. p. 120; WH. App. p. 162]; (fr.
ed and doxéw, cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 370, who treats
of the word fully and with his usual learning [cf. W.
101 (95)]); Sept. mostly for 7¥7; among Grk. writ.
used esp. by Polyb., Diod., and Dion. Hal.; 1. as in
prof. auth., foll. by an infin., it seems good to one, is one’s
good pleasure ; to think it good, choose, determine, decide :
Lk. xii. 832; 1Co. i. 21; Gal. i.15; once foll. by acc. w.
inf., Col. i. 19 [ef. Bp. Lehtft.; W. § 64, 3b.; B. § 129, 16];
with the included idea of kindness accompanying the de-
cision, Ro. xv. 26 sq.; to do willingly what is signified by
the inf., to be ready to, 1 Th. ii. 8; to prefer, choose rather,
[A. V. we thought it good], 1 Th. iii. 1; Sir. xxv. 16;
more fully padrdov eddoxa, 2 Co. v. 8. 2. by a usage
peculiar to bibl. writ., foll. by & rum, to be well pleased
with, take pleasure in, a pers. or thing [cf. W. 38, 232
C18) Bb aS55 G60) Re Mib pi, ext Sar vie
5; Mk.i.11; Lk. iii. 22, [on the tense in the preceding
pass. cf. W. 278 (261); B. 198 (171)]; 1 Co.x.5; 2 Co.
xii. 10; 2 Th. ii. 12 RGLbr.; Heb. x.38, (3 yon, 25.
xxii. 20; Mal. ii. 17; 3 7¥4, Ps. cxlix. 4). foll. by eis
twa (i.e. when directing the mind, turning the thoughts,
unto), to be favorably inclined towards one (ef. W. § 31,
5; B. § 133, 23]: Mt. xii. 18 RG; 2 Pet. i.17; w. sim-
ple acc. of pers. to be favorable to, take pleasure in [cf.
W. 222 (209)]: Mt. xii. 18 L TWH); with acc. of the
thing : Heb. x. 6, 8, (Ps. lL. (li.) 18, 21; Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 2;
Gen. xxxiii. 10; Lev. xxvi. 34, 41); as in Grk. writ.
also, w. the dat. of the pers. or thing with which one is
well pleased: 2 Th. ii. 12 T Tr WH (see above); 1
Mace. i. 43; 1 Esdr. iv. 39. [Comp.: cuv-evdoxéo. | *
evSoxla, -as, 7, (fr. eddSoxéw, as eddoyia fr. evoyeo),
unknown to prof. auth. [Boeckh, Inserr. 5960], found in
the O. T. in some of the Pss. (for })¥) and often in Sir.;
on it cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 371 sq.; [esp. Bp. Lghtft.
on Phil.i. 15]; prop. beneplacitum (Vulg. [ed. Clement. ]
Eph. i. 9); 1. will, choice: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21,
(on both pass. see gumpoodev, 2 b.); Sir. i. 27 (24);
xxxvi. 13, etc. ; in particular, good-will, kindly intent, be-
nevolence: Eph. i. 5,9; Phil. ii. 13, (Ps. 1. (li.) 20; Sir. ii.
16; xi. 17 (15) etc.); 80 eddoxiav, prompted by good will,
Belk ib iy 2. delight, pleasure, satisfaction: with
gen. of the thing that pleases, 2 Th.i. 11; év avOperrots
evdoxia, either among men pleasure produced by salva-
tion, or God’s pleasure in men, Lk. ii. 14 RG Tr mrg.
WH mrg.; av8pwro eddSoxias, men in whom God is well
p.eased [i.e. not a particular class of men (viz. believ-
258
ev0uves
ers), but the whole race, contemplated as blessed in
Christ’s birth], ibid. L T Tr txt. WH txt. [see WH.
App. ad loc.; Field, Otium Norv. iii. ad loc.], (Ps. exliv.
(exlv.) 16; Sir. ix. 12). 3. desire (for delight in any
absent thing easily begets a longing for it): Ro. x. 1;
ef. Philippi and Tholuck ad loc.*
evepyerta, -as, 7, (evepyerns); a good deed, benefit: 1
Tim. vi. 2 (on which see dyriAapBavw, 2); with gen.
of the pers. on whom the benefit is conferred [W. 185
(174)], Actsiv. 9. (2 Mace. vi. 13; ix. 26 ; Sap. xvi. 11,
24; in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down.) *
evepyetéw, -@; (evepyérns), to do good, bestow benefits :
Acts x. 38. (Sept.; often in Attic writ.) *
evepyérns, -ov, 6, a benefactor (fr. Pind. and Hdt.
down); it was also a title of honor, conferred on such
as had done their country service, and upon princes;
equiv. to Soter, Pater Patriae: Lk. xxii. 25. (Cf. Hdt.
83855 Thue.'1;°129'> Xen.) vect 3, 11s" Hell 65124
Plat. de virt. p. 379 b.; al.; cf. 2 Mace. iv. 2; joined
with owrnp, Joseph. b. j. 3, 9, 8; Addit. to Esth. vi. 12
[Tdf. viii. 1. 25]; Diod. 11, 26.)*
ev-Oeros, -ov, (fr. ed and Gerds), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
and Hippocr. down; prop. well-placed; a. fit: eis Te,
LK. ix. 62 RG; xiv. 35 (34), (Diod. 2, 57 et al.) ; with
dat. of the thing for which: Lk. ix. 62 L T Tr WH (ro
mpaypatt, Nicol. Stob. fl. 14, 7 [149,4]). b. useful :
ti, Heb. vi. 7 [some would make the dat. here depend
on the ptep.]; (of time, seasonable, Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 6;
Susan. 15).*
evOéus, adv., (fr. evs), straightway, immediately, forth-
with: Mt. iv. 20, 22; viii. 3, and often in the histor. bks.,
esp. Mark’s Gospel [where, however, T Tr WH have
substituted evvs in some 35 out of 41 cases]; elsewhere
only in Gal. i. 16 ; Jas.i. 24; Rev. iv. 2, Gor o&n3, Job
vy. 3). shortly, soon: 8 Jn. 14. [From Soph. down.]
eWOvdSpopew, -@: 1 aor. evOvdpdunoa [see evdoxéw]; (€d-
Ovdpdpos, i.e. evOds and Spdpos) ; to make a straight course,
run a straight course: foll. by eis w. acc. of place, Acts
Xvi. 11; edOvdpouneras AAOov eis, Acts xxi. 1. (Philo,
alleg. lege. iii. § 79; de agricult. § 40.) *
evOupew, -; (evOvuos) ; 1. trans. to put in good
spirits, gladden, make cheerful, (Aeschyl. in Plat. de rep.
2,383 b.). Mid. to be of good spirits, to be cheerful, (Xen.,
Plat.). 2. intrans. to be joyful, be of good cheer, of
good courage: Acts xxvii. 22, 25; Jas. v.13. (Eur.
Cycl. 530; Plut. de tranquill. anim. 2 and 9.) *
e¥-Oupos, -ov, (ed and Ovyds) ; 1. well-disnosed, kind,
(Hom. 0d.14,63). 2. of good cheer, of good courage: Acts
XXvii. 36; [compar. as adv. xxiv, 10 Ree. (see edOvpes)],
(Grk. writ. fr. Aeschy]. and Pind. down; 2 Mace. xi. 26).*
eWOdpas, adv., [Aeschyl., Xen., al.|, cheerfully: Acts
xxiv. 10 LT Tr WH, for Rec. edv@vpudrepov the more con-
Jidently.*
e80dvo; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. eddivare; (edbus) ;
a. to make straight, level, plain: ryv 6ddv, Jn. i. 23 (Sir.
ii. 6; xxxvii. 15). b. to lead or guide straight. to keep
straight, to direct, (often so in Grk. writ.) : 6 edOivew, the
steersman, helmsman of a ship, Jas. iii. 4. (Eur. Cyct
evOus
15; of a charioteer, Num. xxii. 23; Isocr. p. 9; al.)
[Comp. : xat-evOive. | *
eWOUs, -eta, -v, Sept. for Ww, [fr. Pind. down], straight;
a. prop. straight, level: of a way, [Mt. iii. 3]; Mk. i. 3;
Lk. iii. 4; Actsix.11; eis edOciav (L T Tr WH eis ed6eias),
sc. 6ddv (an ellipsis com. also in class. Grk. cf. W. § 64,
5), Lk. ili. 5; edOeia 686s the straight, the right way, is fig.
used of true religion as a rule of life leading to its goal
i. e. to salvation, 2 Pet. ii. 15; ai 680i xvpiov, the right
and saving purposes of God, Acts xiii. 10 (Song of the
Three vs. 3). b. trop. straightforward, upright, true,
sincere, (as often in prof. auth.): xapdia, Acts viii. 21
(ed0ets tH Kapdia often in the Pss., as vii. 11; xxxi.
Peet) 11; xxxv. (xxxvi.) 11).*
ev0%s, adv., [fr. Pind. down], i. q. e0éws, with which it
is often interchanged in the Mss. [see edOéws]; straight-
way, immediately, forthwith: Mt. ili. 163; xiii. 20; Jn.
xiii. 32, ete. (Cf. Phryn. ed. Lod. p. 145.]
evOuTns, -yTos, 7, (fr. the adj. eddvs), rectitude, upright-
ness: trop. paBdos evOitnros, an impartial and righteous
government, Heb. i. 8 fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7.*
edkatpéw, -G: impf. edxaipovy [so L T Tr WH in Mk.
vi. 31; RG in Acts xvii. 21] and nixaipowy [RG in
Mk. 1.c.; LT Tr WH in Acts l.c.], (betw. which the
Mss. vary, see evdoxéa, init.) ; 1 aor. subjunc. edcaipyce ;
(evkaipos); a later word, fr. Polyb. onwards (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p.125sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 205;
Soph. Lex. s. v.]); to have opportunity: 1 Co. xvi. 12; to
have leisure, foll. by an inf., to do something, Mk. vi. 31
[(Plut. ii. p. 223 d. Cleom. Anax. §9)]; to give one’s
time to a thing, ets rr, Acts xvii. 21.*
evkatpla, -as, 7, (evKarpos), seasonable time, opportunity:
(nretv evx., foll. by [iva B. 237 (205)], Mt. xxvi. 16;
[Lk. xxii. 6 Lchm. mrg.]; by rod with inf. Lk. xxii. 6.
(Sept.; in Grk. writ. first in Plat. Phaedr. p. 272 a.) *
ev-katpos, -ov, (ed and xapos), seasonable, timely, oppor-
tune: Bonbea, Heb. iv. 16; jpépa ev. a convenient day,
Mk. vi. 21. (2 Mace. xiv. 29; [Ps. ciii. (civ.) 27; Soph.
O. C. 32]; Theophr., Polyb., al.) *
eixalpws, adv., seasonably, opportunely; when the op-
portunity occurs: Mk. xiv. 113; opp. to dkaipws (q. V-),
2 Tim. iv. 2. (Xen. Ages. 8,3; Plat. and sqq.; Sir.
Xviii. 22.) *
€v-Korros, -ov, (ed and xomos), that can be done with
easy labor; easy: Polyb. et al.; Sir. xxii. 15; 1 Mace.
iii. 18; in the N. T. only in the phrase evcomarepov éart,
—foll. by inf., Mt. ix.5; Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23; by acc. w.
ite Wits xix. 246) Mk. x. 253) Lk. xvi. 173) xvill..25*
evAGBeva, -elas, 7, the character and conduct of one who
is evAaBns (q- V-)3 1. caution, circumspection, dis-
cretion: Soph., Eur., Plat., Dem., sqq.; Sept. Prov.
Xxviil. 14; joined w. mpovoia, Plut. Marcell. 9; used of
the prudent delay of Fabius Maximus, Polyb. 3, 105, 8;
9 €vA. cote mavra, Arstph. av. 377; i. q. avoidance, |
mAnyor, Plat. lege. 7 p. 815 a. et al. (in which sense Zeno
the Stoic contrasts n evAdB. caution, as a evAoyos exkhiors
a reasonable shunning, with 6 poBos, Diog. Laért. 7, 116,
cf. Cic. Tusc. 4, 6, 13). 2. reverence, veneration: 7
259
evrAoyéew
mpos ro Oeiov edd. Diod. 13,12; Plut. Camill. 21; de ser.
num. vind. c. 4, and elsewh.; mpds rods vopovs, Plut. Ages.
15; Geod, objec. gen., Philo, Cherub. § 9; simply reverence
towards God, godly fear, piety: Heb. xii. 28 and, in the
opinion of many, also v. 7 [ef. dad, II. 2 b.; see below].
3. fear, anxiety, dread: Sap. xvii. 8; for 7387, Josh.
xxii. 24; Joseph. antt.11, 6,9; Plut. Fab. 1 (the etBovdla
of Fabius seemed to be edAdSeua); so, most probably, in
Heb. v. 7 (see [above and] amo, I. 3 d.), for by using
this more select word the writer, skilled as he was-in the
Greek tongue, speaks more reverently of the Son of
God than if he had used dos. [SyN. see devdla, fin. ;
ef. Trench § xlviii.; Delitzsch on Heb. v. 7.]*
edhaBeopar, -oduae: 1 aor. ptep. edAaBnbels ; prop. to
show one’s self evtraBns, i. e. 1. to act cautiously, cir-
cumspectly, (Tragg., Xen., Plato, and sqq.). 2. to be-
ware, fear: as in 1 Mace. iii. 80; xii. 40 [Alex. ete.] and
often in prof. auth., foll. by yy lest [B. 241 sq. (208)],
Acts xxiii. 10 RG (Deut. ii. 4; 1 S. xviii. 29; Job xiii.
25; Jer. v. 22; Dan. iv. 2; 2 Mace. viii. 16; Sir. xli. 3).
3. to reverence, stand in awe of, (rov Oeov, Plat. lees. 9
p- 879 e.; Sept. Prov. ii. 8; xxiv. 28 (xxx. 5); Nah. i.
7): God’s declaration, Heb. xi. 7.*
evdaBys, -es, (ed and AaBeiv), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat.
down ; 1. taking hold well, i. e. carefully and surely ;
cautious. 2. reverencing God, pious, religious, [A. V.
devout]: Acts ii. 5; viii. 2, (Mic. vii. 2 [Alex. etc.]);
joined with Sixavos (as in Plat. polit. p. 311b.): Lk. ii.
25; edd. kara Tov vopov, Acts xxii. 12 LT Tr WH. [Cf.
reff. s. v. evAdBera, fin. ]*
eddoyéw,-@; fut. evAoynow; impf. edAdyouv and ndddyouy
(Mk. x. 16, where the Mss. fluctuate betw. the two forms
(ef. WH. App. p. 162]); 1 aor. evAdynoa (niAdynoa, Mt.
xiv. 19 LTr; Lk. xxiv. 30 L; Heb. xi. 20 and 21 L);
pf. evAdynka (nvAdynka, Heb. vii. 6 L; see eddoxéw init. [cf.
Veitch s.v.; Tdf. on Lk.1.¢.]); Pass., pf. ptep. eddAoyn-
pévos; 1 fut. evAoynOnoopar; (edAoyos); Sept. very often
for 13 and 773; Vulg. benedico; mostly w. acc. of the
obj., to bless one ; 1. as in Grk. writ., to praise, cele-
brate with praises: tov Oedv, Lk. i. 64; ii. 28; xxiv.
51, 53 [Tdf. om.]; Jas. iii. 9; absol. in the giving of
thanks: Mt. xiv. 19; xxvi. 26 [cf. 3 below]; Mk. vi. 41;
viii. 7 RGT[?]; xiv. 22 [cf. 3 below]; Lk. xxiv. 30;
1 Co. xiv. 16. (When used in this sense evAoyety differs
from edyapioreiv in referring rather to the form, evdy. to
the substance of the thanksgiving.) By a usage
purely bibl. and eccl. like the Hebr. 313, 2. fo in-
voke blessings : rwvd, upon one, Mt. v.44 Rec.; Lk. vi. 28;
Ro. xii. 14; absol., 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Pet. iii. 9; of one tak-
ing leave, Lk. xxiv. 50 sq.; of one at the point of death,
Heb. xi. 20 sq. (Gen. xlviii. 9); in congratulations, Heb.
vii. 1, 6 sq. (Gen. xiv. 19); Mk. x.16 RGL; Lk. ii. 34;
eddoynuévos (9313), praised, blessed, [ef. edAoynrds]: Mt.
xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; Mk. xi. 9sq.; Lk. xiii. 35; xix. 38; Jn.
xii. 13, (in all which pass. it is an acclamation borrowed
fr. Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 26). 3. with acc. of a thing, to
consecrate a thing with solemn prayers; to ask God’s bless-
ing on a thing, pray him o bless it to one’s use, pronounce
evAoynT OS
a consecratory blessing on: ty6id:a, Mk. viii. 7 L Tr WH;
rovs dprous, Lk. ix. 16; rd mornptov, 1 Co. x. 163 ry
Ovoiay, 1S. ix. 13; and perh. rov dprov, Mt. xxvi. 26;
Mk. xiv. 22, (but see above under 1); cf. Riickert, Das
Abendmahl, p. 220 sq. 4. of God, to cause to prosper,
to make happy, to bestow blessings on, [cf. W. 32]: rua,
Acts iii. 26; foll. by év with dat. of the blessing, év macy
edAoyia, with every kind of blessing, Eph. i. 3 (ev dyaGois,
Test. xii. Patr. [test. Jos. § 18] p. 722 [év evAoyiats yjs,
év mparoyernpact xapray, test. Isach. § 5 p. 626 sq.]);
eddoyav eddoynow ce (after the Hebr., Gen. xxii. 17; see
eda, I. 1 a. [for reff.]), I will bestow on thee the greatest
blessings, Heb. vi. 14; Gal. iii. 8 Rec.°"'™ (see évevdo-
yew), 9; evAoynpévos favored of God, blessed, Lk. i. 42°
(cf. Deut. xxviii. 4); ev yuvacgi, blessed among women,
i. e. before all other women, Lk. i. 28 RGLTr txt. br. ;
42%, (cf. W. 246 (231); [B. 83 (73)]); ebdoynpévoe rod
marpés (i. q- td Tod marpés, like edd. ind Geod, Is. 1xi. 9;
Ixv. 23; cf. W. 189 (178) and § 30,4; [cf. B. § 132, 23]),
appointed to eternal salvation by my father, Mt. xxv. 34.
[Comp.: év, xat-evdoyeo. | *
eddoynrtds, -dv, (evAoyéw), Sept. for 7393, a bibl. and
eccl. word; blessed, praised, Vulg. benedictus: applied
to God, Lk. i. 68; Ro. i. 25; ix. 5 [on its position here
ef. W. 551 (512 sq.); Ps. xviii. (ixvii.) 20; Gen. xxvii.
29; Pss. of Sol. 8,40. 41; also1 K. x. 9; 2 Chr. ix. 8; Job
i. 21; Ps. exii. (exiii.) 2; Ruthii.19; Dan. ii. 20, and esp.
the elaborate discussion of Ro. 1. c. by Professors Dwight
and Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. etc. i. pp. 22-55,
“$7154 (1882) ];"2°Covi. $5 xiv 815 Ephoi. 3371 Pets
3; cf. B. § 129, 22 Rem. [contra, W. 586 (545); Mey. on
Gal. i. 5]; absol. 6 evAoynrds, of God: Mk. xiv. 61. [The
distinction betw. evAoynrds and edAoynpevos is thus stated
by Philo (de migr. Abr. § 19, i. 453 Mang.) :
ov pdvov evAoynpevos: . «
evAoynrés,
.7O pev yap TO wepuKevat, TO dé
TO vopiCerOa éyerar pdvov . . . TH mecpuxévar evdoyias
ad&tov . . . dmep evdoyntov ev Trois xpnopois ddera. Cf.
Genw xiv 197 20291) S.) xxv. 32903 Gob. xi L6 ‘cod.
Sin.; contra, Jud. xiii. 18. EvdAoynrés is applied to
men in Gen. xxiv. 31; xxvi. 29; Deut. vii. 14; Judg.
xvii. 2; 1S. xv. 13; Ruthii. 20; Jud. and Tob. u. s. ete.
See Prof. Abbot’s careful exposition u. s. p. 152 sq.]*
edAoyla, -as, 7, (evAoyos) ; Sept. for 7373; Vulg. bene-
dictio; as in class. Grk. 1. praise, laudation, pane-
gyric: of God or Christ, Rev. v. 12, 133; vii. 12. 2:
fine discourse, polished language: Plat. rep. 3 p. 400 d.;
Luc. Lexiph. 1; in a bad sense, language artfully adapted
to captivate the hearer, fair speaking, fine speeches:
Ro. xvi. 18 (joined with ypyoroAoyia, the latter relating
to the substance, evAoyia to the expression); plur. in
Aesop, fab. 229 p. 150 ed. Cor. dv od eddoylas edropis,
éywy€ cov ov KnSouat, [but why not gen. sing.?]. Bya
usage unknown to native Grks. 3. an invocation of
blessings, benediction: Heb. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 10, (Gen.
xxvil. 35 sq. 38, al.; Sir. iii. 8; xxxvii. 24; Joseph. antt.
4, 8,44); see edAoyéw, 2. 4. consecration: rd mornpiov
THs evdoyias, the consecrated cup (for that this is the
meaning is evident from the explanatory adjunct 6 edAo-
260
€v0d0W
yodpev, see eddoyéw 3 [al. al.; cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad
loc.; W. 189 (178)]), 1 Co. x. 16. 5. a (concrete)
blessing, benefit, (Deut. xi. 26, ete.; Sir. vil. 32; Oooh
22, etc.); univ. 1 Pet. iii. 9; of the blessings of Chris-
tianity, Ro. xv. 29; Eph. i. 3; 9 evdoyia rod *"ABp. the
salvation (by the Messiah) promised to Abraham, Gal.
iii. 14; of the continual fertility of the soil granted by
God, Heb. vi. 7 (Lev. xxv. 21; terds eddoyias, Ezek.
xxxiv. 26; cf. edAoyeiv dypdv, Gen. xxvii. 27) ; of the bless-
ing of a collection sent from Christians to their brethren,
2 Co. ix. 5 (of the gifts of men, Gen. xxxiii. 11; Judg. i.
15; 1S. xxv. 27); ém evAoyias, that blessings may ac-
crue, bountifully (opp. to pedopevas), 2 Co. ix. 6 (see emi,
B. 2 e. p. 234* top).*
ev-petd-5otos, -ov, (ed and peradidwpe), ready or free to
impart; liberal: 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V. ready to distribute].
(Antonin. 1, 14; 6, 48.) *
Eivinn [R* -veikn (see ex, ¢); lit. conquering well], -ys,
n, Eunice, the mother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. 5.*
et-voew, -@; (evvoos); to wish (one) well; to be well-dis-
posed, of a peaceable spirit: twi, towards any one, Mt.
vy. 25. (3 Mace. vii. 11; Soph., Arstph., Xen., Polyb.,
Plut., Hdian.) *
evvowa, -as, 7, (evvoos), good-will, kindness: 1 Co. vii. 3
Rec.; per edvotas, Eph. vi. 7. [From Aeschyl. down.] *
evtvouxif{w: 1 aor. etvovyica; 1 aor. pass. edvvovyicbny ;
[on the augm. cf. B. 34 (30); WH. App. p. 162]; to cas-
trate, unman: pass. ind tivos, Mt. xix. 12*; metaph.
evvovx. éavtdy to make one’s self a eunuch, viz. by ab-
staining (like a eunuch) from marriage, Mt. xix. 12° (Jo
seph. antt. 10, 2, 2; Leian., Dio Cass., al.) we
ebvodxos, -ov, 6, (fr. edvn a bed, and ¢yw), Sept. D0;
fr. Hdt. down; prop. a bed-keeper, bed-qguard, superin-
tendent of the bedchamber, chamberlain, in the palace of
oriental monarchs who support numerous wives; the
superintendent of the women’s apartment or harem, an
office held by eunuchs; hence a. an emasculated
man, a eunuch: Mt. xix. 12%. But eunuchs in ori-
ental courts held other offices of greater or less impor-
tance, like the oversight of the treasury, held by the
Ethiopian eunuch mentioned in Acts viii. 27, 34, 36, 38
sq.; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 973; [B. D. s. v. Eunuch].
b. one naturally incapacitated — either for marriage, Mt.
xix. 12"; or for begetting children, Sap. iii. 14, cf. Grimm,
exgt. Hdb. ad loc. c. one who voluntarily abstains
from marriage: Mt. xix. 12%. Fischer, De vitiis lexx.
N. T. ete. p. 485 sqq. treats of the word more fully.*
Evosia [(lit. prosperous journey), -wdia R* (lit. fra-
grant) |, -as, 7, Huodia, a Christian woman [transformed
by A. V. into a man, Euodias]: Phil. iv. 2 [see Bp.
Lghtf. ad loc.].*
ev-0860, -@: [Pass., pres. edododuar; fut. evodwOncopat;
1 aor. subj. evodw97, 1 Co. xvi. 2 WH mrg. who regard
the evodéra: of the text here as perf. (either ind. or
subj.) see their App. p. 172]; (evodos) ; Sept. principally
for ny and ox; to grant a prosperous and expedi-
tious journey, to lead by a direct and easy way: Gen.
xxiv. 48; much more freq. tropically, to grant a success
evTrdapedpos
ful issue, to cause to prosper: ri, as thy d6ddv twos, Gen.
xxiv. 21,40; Is. lv. 11, ete.; ra &pya ruvds, Sap. xi. 1; in
the Pass. always trop. to prosper, be successful : of per-
sons, Josh. i. 8; Prov. xxviii. 13; 2 Chr. xiii. 12; xviii.
11, etc.; 3 Jn. 2; elas evodwOjcopa édbeiv if haply I
shall be so fortunate as to come, Ro. i. 10; of things: 2
Esdr. v. 8; Tob. iv. 19; 1 Mace. iii. 6, etc. ; 7G KXeo-
pevel evada6n Td mpjypa, Hdt. 6, 73; 6, re dv edoddra
[see above, init.] whatever (business) has prospered,
i. e. (contextually) its gains, 1 Co. xvi. 2.*
ei-map-Spos, -ov, (ed, and mdpedpos [sitting beside]),
sitting constantly by; assiduous: mpds Td ev’mdpedpoy to
xupio, that ye may be constantly devoted to the Lord
and his cause, 1 Co. vii. 35, for Rec. eirpdécedpov, which
does not differ in sense, [A.V- attend upon]. (Hesych.
evmapedpov- kad@s trapapevov.) *
ev-reOns, -€s, (ed, and reiOoza to comply with, obey),
easily obeying, compliant, [A. V. easy to be intreated]:
Jas. iii. 17. (Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) *
et-rept-oratos, -ov, (fr. ed and repiicrnu), skilfully
surrounding i. e. besetting, sc. to prevent or retard run-
ning: Heb. xii. 1 [some passively (cf. Isocr. 135 e.),
well or much admired (cf. R. V. mrg.)]. (Not found
elsewhere.) *
ev-rovia [-rovia WH (cf. I, 1, fin.) ], -as, 7, (edrods), a
doing good, beneficence: Heb. xiii. 16; Arr. exp. Alex.
7, 28,8; Alciphr. 1, 10; Leian. imag. 21; a benefit,
kindness, Joseph. antt. 2, 11, 2; (plur. ib. 19, 9, 1).*
et-ropéw, and (esp. in later Grk.) mid. evzopéopas,
-ovpat: impf. 3 pers. sing. nimopetro (RG) and evdzop. (L
T Tr WH;; for reff. see evdoxéw, init.) ; (ev’mopos well
off) ; to be well off, have means: Acts xi. 29 [A. V. ace.
to his ability]. (Lev. xxv. 26, 28, 49; often in the
classics.) *
et-tropla, -as, 7, (evmopos, see the preced. word), riches,
means, wealth: Acts xix. 25. (Xen., Plat., al.; in diff.
senses in diff. auth.) *
etv-mpereta, -as, 7, (evmpenns well-looking), goodly ap-
pearance, shapeliness, beauty, comeliness: tov mpocawmov,
Jas.i.11. (Thuc., Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Plut.; Sept.) *
eb-rpda-Sextos, -ov, (ed and mpoodéxopar), well-received,
accepted, acceptable: Ro. xv. 16; 2 Co. vi. 2; viii. 12;
rwi, Ro. xv. 31; 1 Pet. ii. 5. (Plut. praecept. rei publ.
ger. c. 4, 17 p. 801 c.; eccl. writ.)*
et-rpda-e5pos, -ov, (ev, and mpdcedpos [sitting near]),
see evmdpedpos.
eb-mpoc wee, -@: 1 aor. inf. edtpocwnncat; (edmpsowmos
fair of face, of good appearance) ; to make a fair show;
to please [a weak trans. (?); yet Vulg. placere]: &
capxi, in things pertaining to the flesh, Gal. vi. 12.
(Elsewh. only in Chrysost. hom. ad Eph. xxii. § 5, Opp.
xi. 173 c. ed. Montf. [var.] and several times in Byzant.
writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
eip-axtdwv, -wvos, 6, (fr. edpos and Lat. aquilo, like
evpdvoros, and euroauster [B. 16 (15)]), Vulg. ewroaquilo;
the Euraquilo, a N. E. wind: Acts xxvii. 14 LT Tr
WH, for Rec. edpoxdidov (Grsb. edpucd.) q- v- (Not
found elsewhere.) [B. D s. v. Euroclydon.] *
261
euploKw
eiptokw; impf. edpucxov (Mk. xiv. 55 [RG T]; Lk.
xix. 48 [RGT]; Acts vii. 11 [exe. Tr WH]) and more
rarely nipucxoy (cf. Kiihner § 343, i. 825 sq. [esp. Veitch
s. v. fin. ] and reff. under etdoxéw) ; fut. ebpiow; pf. evpnka;
1 aor. evpnoa (which aor., unknown to the earlier Grks.,
occurs in Aesop. f. 131 [f. 41 ed. Furia, p. 333 ed. Cor.];
Maneth. 5, 137 and in Byzant. writ.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 721; W. 86 (82); [cf. B. 36 (31)]), Rev. xviii. 14
Rec.; 2 aor. efpoy, 1 pers. plur. in Alex. form | WH. App.
p. 164; B. 39 (84); W. § 13,1 (see dmépyopac) ] edpaper,
Lk. xxiii. 2 T' Tr WH, 3 pers. plur. eSpav, Lk. viii. 35
Tr WH; Acts v. 10 Tr (in Sept. often epocav) ; Pass.,
pres. evpicxouat; impf. 3 pers. sing. eipicxero, Heb. xi.
5 RG, nipioxero LT Tr WH, (cf. Bleek and Delitzsch
ad loc. [Veitch u. s.]); 1 aor. eipeOnv; fut. ebpeOnoopar;
2 aor. mid. ebpéuny and later eipapny (Heb. ix. 12, [ef.
reff. above (on 2 aor. act.)]); Sept. numberless times for
8X1), sometimes for WN to attain to, and for Chald.
now; [fr. Hom. down]; to find; i. e.
1. prop. to come upon, hit upon, to meet with; a. after
searching, to find a thing sought: absol., opp. to ¢nreiv, Mt.
vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq. (pret kat etpnoers, Epict. diss. 4, 1,
51); rea, Mt. ii. 8; Mk. i. 37; Lk. ii. 45; Acts xi. 26
(25); xii) 22'572'Co, ii 13°12); 2) Tim: 1717; Rev. xx.
15, ete.; odx evpioxero, he had vanished, Heb. xi.5; witha
specification of place added: mépav w. gen. Jn. vi. 25; év
w. dat. Acts v. 22; etpéOn eis, Acts viii. 40 (see eis, C. 2);
w. ace. of the thing, Mt. vil. 14; xiii. 46; xviii. 13;
tke xxiv. oo dns x. 9s Acts vil. lis Roy viel Snhecs
etc.; foll. by indir. disc., Lk. v.19; ovy evpéOnoar, had
disappeared, Rev. xvi. 20, cf. xviii. 21; w. dat. of ad-
vantage, Rev. xx. 11; foll. by ev w. dat. of place, Mt.
xxi. 19; Rev. xii. 8. rea or tl (nrety x. ovx etpioxey:
Mt. xii. 43; xxvi.60; Mk. xiv. 55; Lk. xi. 24; xiii. 6 sq.;
Jn. vii. 834; Rev. ix. 6, (2 K.ii. 17; Neh. vii. 64; Ps. ix.
36 [x. 15]; Eccl. vii. 29; Ezek. xxii. 30; xxvi. 21 Ald.
Comp.; Hos. ii. 7); yj kal ra év airy épya etpeOnoera
shall be found sc. for destruction, i. e. will be unable to
hide themselves from the doom decreed them by God,
2 Pet. iii. 10 Tr WH, after the strange but improbable
reading of codd. 8B and other authorities; [see WH.
Intr. § 365 and App. ad loc.]. b. without previous
search, to find (by chance), to fall in with: twa, Mt.
xviii. 28 ; xxvii. 832; Jn.i. 41 (42), 45 (46) ; v.14; ix. 35;
Acts xiii. 6; xviii. 2; xix. 1; xxviii. 14; foll. by ey w.
dat. of place, Jn. ii. 14. ri, Mt. xiii. 44; xvii. 27; Lk.
iv. 17; Jn. xii. 14; Acts xvii. 23; foll. by év w. dat. of
place, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vil. 9.
with a pred. acc. is used of those who come or return to
a place, the predicate ptep. or adj. describing the state
or condition in which the pers. or thing met with is
found, or the action which one is found engaged in:
w. an adj., Acts v. 10; 2 Co. ix. 4; xii. 20; w. a
ptep. [cf. B. 301 (258)], Mt. xii. 44; xx. 6; xxi. 2;
xxiv. 46; xxvi. 40, 43; Mk. xi. 2; xiii. 36; xiv. 37, 40;
Lk. ii. 123; vii. 10; viii. 35; xi. 25; xii. 37, 43; xix. 30;
OM 2s XXIV Dy SOMpeACES Vay LO si Exon 2isteXe ty (ismexKT Nas
xxiv. 12, 18; xxvii. 6; foll. by caOos, Mk. xiv. 16; Lk.
C. evpiok@ tid OF TL
evpokAvowy
xix. 32; xxii.13; foll. by a pred. substantive to which
dvra must be supplied, Acts xxiv. 5 [cf. W. § 45, 6b.; B.
304 (261)]. 2. tropically, to find by inquiry, thought,
examination, scrutiny, observation, hearing; to find out
by practice and experience, i. e. to see, learn, discover, un-
derstand: katnyopiav, Lk. vi. 7 [T Tr txt. WH xarnyo-
peiv]; red foll. by ptep. in the predicate, Acts xxiii. 29 ;
by ért, Ro. vii. 21; after an examination (meipdfeww), twa
[ri] w. a pred. adj. [ptep.], Rev. ii. 2 ; of a judge: airiay
Gavdrov, Acts xiii. 28; airiay, kaxdv, adiknpa év tu, Jn.
xviii. 88; xix. 4,6; Acts xxiii. 9; xxiv. 20; after a com-
putation, w. an acc. of the price or measure, Acts xix.
19; xxvii. 28 ; after deliberation, 76 ri moenowar, Lk. xix.
48; ro ms KoAdowvrat adrovs, Acts iv. 21. Pass. ebpi-
oxona. to be found, i.e. to be seen, be present: Lk. ix. 36
(Gen. xviii. 31); often like the Hebr. x¥1} to be dis-
covered, recognized, detected, to show one’s self out, of
one’s character or state as found out by others (men,
God, or both), (cf. W. $65, 8): ebpéOn ev yaorpi €xovea,
Mt. 1.18; tva cipeOdor xabas k. jpets, 2 Co. xi. 12; €t-
péOn pot ) évrodn eis Oavaroy sc. odca, the commandment,
as I found by experience, brought death to me, Ro. vii.
10; add, Lk. xvii. 18 (none showed themselves as hay-
ing returned); Actsv. 39; 1Co. iv. 2; xv. 15; 2 Co.v.
8; Gal. ii. 17; 1 Pet..i. 7; Rev. v. 4; rwi, dat. of the
pers. taking cognizance and judging [W.§ 31, 10; B.
187 (162)], 2 Pet. iii. 14, [add 2 Co. xii. 20, yet cf. B.
l. c. and $133, 14; W.§31,4a.]; twa cipeOa ev aire i.e.
év Xpiord, sc. dv, Phil. ili. 9; oynparte evpebeis ws avOpa-
mos, Phil. ii. 7 (8), (Joseph. b. j. 3, 6, 1; so the Lat.
invenior, Cic. de amic. 19, 70; reperior, Tuscul. i. 39, 94).
evpioxev Oedv (opp. to fynreiv adrdv, see (nréw, 1 ¢. (ef.
éx(nréw, a.]), to get knowledge of, come to know, God, Acts
Xvil. 27; evpioxeraé (6 Geds) ti, discloses the knowledge
of himself to one, Sap. i. 2; ef. Grimm, exgt. Hdb. ad
loc. [who refers to Philo, monarch. i. § 5; Orig. c. Cels.
7,42]. On the other hand, in the O. T. eipioxerat 6
eds is used of God hearing prayer, granting aid im-
plored, (1 Chr. xxviii. 9; 2 Chr. xv. 2, 4, 15; Jer. xxxvi.
(xxix.) 13); hence etpéOnv [L and Tr in br. WH mrg.
add év] rots éue pr (nrodor, Ro. x. 20 fr. Is. xv. 1, means,
ace. to Paul’s conception, I granted the knowledge and
deliverance of the gospel. 3. Mid., as in Grk. writ.,
to find for one’s self, to acquire, get, obtain, procure :
hUtpwow, Heb. ix. 12; contrary to better Grk. usage,
the Act. is often used in the Scriptures in the same sense
[cf. B. 193 (167); W. 18; 33 (32) n.J: ray Wuyny, Mt. x.
39; xvi. 25; dvdmavow (Sir. xi. 19) rais Woyais tpar,
Mt. xi. 295; peravolas rémov, place for recalling the de-
cision, changing the mind, (of his father), Heb. xii. 17
[ef. W. 147 (139)]; oxfvepa T® Ged, Opportunity of
building a house for God, Acts vii. 46; ebp. ydpwv, grace,
favor, Heb. iv. 16; Xap mapa 76 Ged, Lk. i. 30; évédrtov
Tov Geod, Acts vii. 46; Zdeos mapa kvpiov, 2 Tim. i. 18;
C2YY3 IN RY, Gen. vi. 8; xviii. 3; xxx. 27; xxxii. 6;
Ex. xxxiii. 12; Deut. xxiv. 1, ete.; 1 Esdr. viii. 4).
[Comp.: dvevpicrea. ] ;
edpo-kAv8wv, -wvos, 6, (fr. edpos the S. E. wind, and
262
eva xnpmocuvn
krvdev a wave), a S. E. wind raising mighty waves: Acts
xxvii. 14 Ree. But respectable authorities read evpr-
kdvdov, preferred by Griesbach et al., from edpis broad,
and kAvdav, a wind causing broad waves (Germ. der
Breitspiilende, the Wide-washer); Etym. Magn. p. 772,
30 8. v. rupav+ “rupav ydp ear } Tod avépou apodpa mvon,
ds Kul edpuxdvowy Kadeirat.” Others edpaxidov, q. v.*
ebpt-xwpos, -ov, (evpts broad, and ywpa), spacious,
broad: Mt. vii. 138. (Sept.; Aristot. h. anim. 10, 5 [p.
637%, 32]; Diod. 19, 84; Joseph. antt. 1, 18, 2; [8, 5, 3;
c. Ap. 1, 18, 2]].)*
et-oéBeia, -as, 7, (evoeBns), reverence, respect; in the
Bible everywhere piety towards God, godliness: Acts iii.
VDisted! Winn tis Mivend< 8.3) Vien) 8q- oll ee elma Ti ore
Pet. i. 8, 6 sq.3 9 Kar’ evoeBesav Sidackadia, the doctrine
that promotes godliness, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [see card, I. 3 d.];
9 dAndea 7 Kar’ evoeBevay, the truth that leads to godli-
ness, Tit. i. 1; ro puornpiov ths edoeBetas, the mystery
which is held by godliness and nourishes it, 1 Tim. iii.
16; in plur., aims and acts of godliness, 2 Pet. iii. 11; cf.
Pfleiderer, Paulinism. p. 477 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. 209 sq. ].
(Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat., sqq.; often in Joseph. ;
Sept. Prov. i. 7; xiii. 11; Is. xi. 2; Sap.x.12; often in
4 Macc.; mpos rov bedv, Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 2; [mepi 7d
beiov] c. Ap. 1, 22, 2; eis Geovs kal yovéas, Plat. rep. 10
p- 615c¢.) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 181.]*
ev-eBew, -@; (evoeBns); to be etaeBns (pious), to act
piously or reverently (towards God, one’s country, magis-
trates, relations, and all to whom dutiful regard or rey-
erence is due) ; in prof. auth. foll. by eis, mepi, mpés tiva;
rarely also trans., as Aeschyl. Ag. 338 (rods Oeovs) and
in the Bible: rév {voy otkov, 1 Tim. v. 4; Oedv, to wor-
ship God, Acts xvii. 23; 4 Mace. v. 24 (23) var.; xi. 5;
[Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 11, 1].*
etoeBs, -és, (ev and o¢Bopar), pious, dutiful (towards
God [A.V. devout, godly]; etoeBéw): Acts x. 2,7; xxii.
12 RG; 2 Pet. ii. 9. ((Theogn.], Pind., Tragg., Ar-
stph., Plat., al.; thrice in Sept. for 24) noble, gener-
ous, Isa. xxxii. 8; for p-qy, Is. xxiv. 16; xxvi. 7; often
in Sir. and 4 Mace.) ([Cf. Trench § xlviii.] *
eboeBas, adv., piously, godly: hv, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit.
ii. 12. (Pind. [-8éas], Soph., Xen., Plat., al.; 4 Macc.
vii. 21 [Fritzsche om. ].)*
evonpos, -ov, (eo and ojpa a sign), well-marked, clear
and definite, distinct: Adyos, 1 Co. xiv. 9 [A. V. easy to
be understood]. (Aeschyl., [Soph.], Theophr., Polyb.,
Plut.) *
evomrAayXvos, -ov, (ed and omAdyxvov, q. V-), prop. hav-
ing strong bowels ; once so in Hippocr. p. 89 c. [ed. Foés.,
i. 197 ed. Kiihn]; in bibl. and eccl. lang. compassionate,
tender-hearted: Eph. iv. 32; 1 Pet. iii. 8; prec. Manass.
7 [(see Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. § 29); Test. xii. Patr. test.
Zab. § 9; cf. Harnack’s note on Herm. vis. 1, 2].*
eboxnpdvas, adv., (see evayjpev), in a seemly manner,
decently: 1 Co. xiv. 40; mepurareiv, Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Th
iv. 12. (Arstph. vesp. 1210; Xen. mem. 3, 12, 4; Cyr.
1, 3, &sq.5 al.)*
cboxnpootvn, -ns, 1, (edoxnur, q. V.), charm or elegance
EVO NLOV
of figure, external beauty, decorum, modesty, seemliness
(Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., Plut.); of external charm,
comeliness: 1 Co. xii. 23.*
eboX pov, -ov, (ed, and cxjua the figure, Lat. habitus) ;
nis of elegant figure, shapely, graceful, comely, bearing
one’s Se ese in Speech or behavior, (Kur., Arstph.,
Xen., Plat.) : ra edoyjpuova hdr, the ey parts of the
body that need no covering (opp. to 7a doyfpova har,
vs. 23), 1 Co. xii. 24; of one mpos TO eVaoynpov, to
promote decorum, 1 Co. vii. 35. 2. in later usage (cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 333), of good standing, honorable, in-
fluential, wealthy, respectable, [R. V. of honorable estate]:
MK. xv.43; Acts xiii. 50; xvii. 12. (Joseph. de vita
sua § 9; Plut. pee a. et Rom. ¢. 15 p. Boab )e
Se adv., (fr. cdrovos, and this fr. ed and relvyw to
stretch [cf. at full stretch, well strung, etc.]), vehemently,
forcibly: Lk. xxiii. 10; Acts xviii. 28. (Josh. vi. 8;
2 Mace. xii. 23; Xen. Hier. 9,6; Arstph. Plut. 1095;
Diod., al.) *
ebtparedla, -as, 9, (fr. edrpdredos, fr. ed, and rpérw to
turn: easily turning; nimble-witted, witty, sharp), pleas-
antry, humor, facetiousness, ({[Hippocr.], Plat. rep. 8 p.
563 a.; Diod. 15, 6; 20, 63; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 3;
Plut., al.) ; in a bad sense, seurrility, ribaldry, low jesting
(in which there is some acuteness) : Eph. v. 4; in a mild-
er sense, Arist. eth. 2, 7, 135; [1 edrpamedia meradeupévn
UBpes eoriv, rhet. 2, 12, 16 (cf. Cope in loc.) ; cf. Trench
§ xxxiv.; Matt. Arnold, Irish Essays etc. p. 187 sqq.
(Speech at Eton) 1882].*
EHvrvxos [i. e. fortunate; on accent cf. W. 51; Chan-
dler § 331 sq.], -ov, 6, Hutychus, a young man restored
to life by Paul: Acts xx. 9.*
edhnpla, -as, 7, (evpnpos, q. V-), prop. the utterance of
good or auspicious words; hence good report, praise:
2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to dvopnuia), as in Diod. 1, 2 [4 ed.
Dind.]; Ael. v. h. 3,47. (In diff. senses in other auth.
fr. Pind., Soph., and Plat. down.) *
evpypos, -ov, (ed and yun), sounding well; uttering
words of good omen, speaking auspiciously: neut. plur.
evgnua, things spoken in a kindly spirit, with good-will
to others, Phil. iv. 8[A. V. of good report, (R. V. mrg.
gracious) ]. (In very diverse senses com. in Grk. writ.
fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
eb-hopéw, -d: 1 aor. evpdpnaa (ies nupopyoa, see
reff. in eddoxew, init.) ; (evpopos [bearing well]); to be
fertile, bring forth plentifully: Lk. xii. 16. (Joseph. b. j.
2, 21, 2; Hippocr., Geop., al.) *
evppalvw; Pass., pres. edppaivoyar; impf. edpparvouny
(Acts vii. 41, where a few codd. nidp. [ef. WH. App.
p- 162]); 1 aor. edppavOny and L T Tr WH nip. (Acts
ii. 26; see reff. in eddSoxéw, init.) ; 1 fut. edppavOncopat ;
(ed and pny); in Sept. very often actively for npw to
make joyful, and pass. for nw to be joyful, sometimes
for }}) to sing; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to glad-
den, make joyful: teva, 2 Co. ii. 2 (opp. to Aumeiv). Pass.
to be glad, to be merry, to rejoice: absol., Lk. xv. 32;
Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9); Ro. xv. 10 (fr. Deut.
Xxxii. 43); Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); Rev. xi. 10; xii.
263
evyaploTéw
12; & rim, to rejoice in, be delighted with, a thing, Acts
vii. 41 (Xen. Hier. 1, 16); émé tun, Rev. xviii. 20 L T
Tr WH (for Ree. ém airjv) ; of the merriment of a feast,
Lk. xii. 19; xv. 23 sq. 29, (Deut. xiv. 25 (26); xxvii. 7);
with Naurpéds added, to live sumptuously: Lk. xvi. 19
(Hom. Od. 2, 311; Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 12).*
Eidparns, -ov, 6, Euphrates, a large and celebrated
river, which rises in the mountains of Armenia Major,
flows through Assyria, Syria, Mesopotamia and the
city of Babylon, and empties into the Persian Gulf,
(Hebr. n93 [i. e. (prob.) ‘the great stream’ (Gen. i.
18); cf. Fried. Delitzsch, Wo lag d. Par. p. 169]): Rey.
ixl4; xvi. 12. [B.D.s-y. and reff. there. | *
edhpocivn, -ns, 7, (evppev [well-minded, cheerful]), fr.
Hom. down; good cheer, joy, gladness: Acts ii. 28 (Ps.'
KV.-(xvi. id) sexi. 1 7*
ebxapirtéw, -d; 1 aor. edxapiornoa (Acts xxvii. 35)
and ntxapiornca (Ro. i. 21 GLT Tr WH; see reff. in
evOoxéw, init.) ; 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. edxapiornO7A
(2 Co. i. 11); (edyxaptoros, q. V-) 5 1. to be grateful,
feel thankful; so in the decree of the Byzantines in Dem.
pro cor. p. 257, 2. 2. to give thanks (so Posid. ap.
Athen. 5 p. 213 e.; Polyb., Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.,
Epictet., al.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 18 [W. 23 (22)]):
tivi, esp. T@ Oe, Lk. xvii. 16; Acts xxvii. 35; xxviii. 15;
Ro. xiv. 6; xvi. 4; 1 Co. xiv. 18 [see below]; Phil. i. 3;
Col. i. 8,12; Philem. 4; (w. the acc. [hence as nom.]
in the passive, va... imép trav dyadady 6 Obs edvyaptorn-
tat, Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 36). simply, so that ro
6eé must be added mentally: Ro. i. 21; [1 Co. xiv. 17];
1 Th. v. 18; esp. where the giving of thanks customary
at the beginning of a feast, or in general before eating,
is spoken of: Mt. xv. 36; xxvi. 27; Mk. viii. 6; xiv. 23;
Lk. xxii. 17,19; Jn. vi. 11, 23; 1 Co. xi. 24; edyapioreiv
7@ OeG Sia "Ino. Xporod, through Christ i. e. by Christ’s
help (because both the favors for which thanks are
given and the gratitude which prompts the thanks are
due to Christ [cf. W. 378 (354) note}): Ro.i. 8; vii. 25
R WH mrg.; Col. iii. 17; 1@ Oe@ ev dvopare Xpiorod
(see dvoua, 2e.), Eph. v. 20. Of that for or on account
of which thanks are given to God, we find—repi twos,
gen. of pers., concerning, with regard to one, [1 Th.
i. 2]; 2 Th. i. 3 [cf. Ellic. in loc.]; w. ér added epex-
egetically, Ro. i. 8 (where R G inép); 2 Th. ii. 13; w.
addition of émi and dat. of the thing for, on account
of, which, 1 Co. i. 4; dmép twos, gen. of pers., Eph. i.
16; imép w. gen. of the thing, for, on account of, 1 Co.
x. 80; Eph. v. 20; the matter or ground of the thanks-
eiving is expressed by a foll. ére: Lk. xviii. 11; Jn. xi.
41; 1Co.i.14; 1 Th.ii.13; Rev. xi.17; or is added
asyndetically without ér, 1 Co. xiv. 18 (Aah@ LTTr
WH, for which R G \aday, the ptep. declaring the cause
which prompts to thanksgiving [W. 345 sq. (324); B.
300 (258)]). Once edxap. 71, for a thing, in the pass.
2 Co. i. 11 [cf. B. 148 (180); W. 222 (209)]; in the
Fathers edxapioreiv te is to consecrate a thing by giving
thanks, to ‘bless’: 6 evxaptatnbeis dpros x. oivos, Justin
M. apol. 1, 65 fin.; evxapiornbeioa tpopn, ibid. c. 66;
evyapioTia
claw of edxapicrodor Wirdy Vowp, Clem. Al. strom. i. p.
317 ed. Sylb.; [ef. Suicer, Thesaur. i. 1269. “The
words evxdpicros, evxapioreiv, evyaptoria, occur in St.
Paul’s writings alone of the apostolic Epistles” (Bp.
Lghtft.; cf. Ellic. on Col. i. 12) ].*
evxaptoria, -as, 7, (evxdptoros, q. V-) 5 1. thankful-
ness: decree of the Byzantines in Dem. p. 256, 19;
Polyb. 8, 14, 8; Add. to Esth. vi. 4 ed. Fritz.; 2 Macc.
ii. 27; Sir. xxxvii. 11; mpds twa, Diod. 17, 59; Joseph.
antt. 3, 3. 2. the giving of thanks: Acts xxiv. 3; for
God’s blessings, 1 Co. xiv. 16; 2 Co. iv. 15; Eph. v. 4
(cf. 1 Th. v. 18); Phil. iv. 6; Col. ii. 7; iv. 2; 1 Th. ii.
9; 1 Tim. iv. 3sq.; Rev. iv.9; vii.12; w. dat. of the
pers. to whom thanks are given: 76 6ed (cf. W. § 31, 3;
[B. 180 (156)]; Kithner § 424, 1), 2 Co. ix. 11 (rod Oeod,
Sap. xvi. 28); in plur., 2 Co. ix. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 1.*
etx dpiotos, -ov, (ed and yxapifoua), mindful of favors,
grateful, thankful: to God, Col. ili. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3,
49; Plut.; al.); pleasing, agreeable {cf. Eng. grateful in
its secondary sense]: evxdpscroe Aoyot, pleasant conver-
sation, Xen. Cyr. 2, 2,13; acceptable to others, winning:
yun evxdpiotos eyeiper avdpt dd€av, Prov. xi. 16; liberal,
beneficent, Diod. 18, 28.*
edt, -75, 7, (evxouac), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. a pray-
er to God: Jas. v. 15. 2. a vow (often so in Sept. for
3) and 479}, also for 13} consecration, see dyvi€w) : edxynv
Ze, to have taken a vow, Acts xviii. 18; with 颒
éavrav added (see éri, A. I. 1 f. p. 232°), Acts xxi. 23.*
edxopor; impf. nvyouny (Ro. ix. 3) and edxydunv (Acts
xxvii. 29 T Tr, see evdoxéw init. [ef. Veitch s. v.; Tdf.
Proleg. p.121]); [1 aor. mid. evédunv Acts xxvi. 29 Tdf.,
where others read the opt. -aiuny; depon. verb, cf. W.
S ash, os 1. to pray to God (Sept. in this sense for
Soann and Ny): r@ Oe@ (as very often in class. Grk.
fr. Hom. down [cf. W. 212 (199); B. 177 (154)]), foll.
by acc. w. inf., Acts xxvi. 29; mpdos rov Oedy (Xen. mem.
1, 3, 2; symp. 4, 55; often in Sept.), foll. by acc. w. inf.
2 Co. xiii. 7; tmép w. gen. of pers., for one, Jas. v. 16
where L WH txt. Tr mrg. mpocev'yeoOe (Xen. mem. 2, 2,
10). [Syn. see airéo, fin. ] 2. to wish: ri, 2 Co. xiii.
9; foll. by acc. with inf. 3 Jn. 2, [al. adhere to the re-
ligious sense, to pray, pray for, in both the preceding
pass.]; Acts xxvii. 29; ndydunv (on this use of the impf.
cf. W. 283 (266); B. § 139,15; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philem.
13]) eivat, I could wish to be, Ro. ix. 3. [Comp.: mpoo-
evxopat. | *
et-xpnoros, -ov, (ed and xpdopuar), easy to make use of,
useful: w. dat. of pers. 2 Tim. ii. 21; opp. to &ypyoros,
Philem. 11; ets 7, for a thing, 2 Tim. iv. 11. (Diod. 5,
40; Sap. xiii. 13; mpdés m1, Xen. mem. 3, 8, 5.)*
etpuxéw, -4; (evvyos); to be of good courage, to be of
a cheerful spirit: Phil. ii. 19. (Joseph. antt. 11, 6, 9;
[Poll. 3, 28 § 135 fin.]; in epitaphs, edpoiye! i. q. Lat.
have pia anima !)*
eboSla, -as, 7, (fr. edodys; and this fr. ed and do, pf.
ddada); a. asweet smell, Jragrance, (Xen., Plat., Plut.,
Hdian., al.) ; metaph. Xprorod edwdia eopev 7h ed, i. e.
(dropping the fig.) our efficiency in which the power of
264
"Edecos
Christ himself is at work is well-pleasing to God, 2 Co.
ii. 15. b. a fragrant or sweet-smelling thing, incense:
Diod. 1, 84; 1 Esdr. i. 11, etc.; hence dopn evwdias, an
odor of something sweet-smelling, in Sept. often for
Hin3-m, an odor of acquiescence, satisfaction; a sweet
odor, spoken of the smell of sacrifices and oblations, Ex.
xxix. 18; Lev.i. 9, 13, 17, ete., agreeably to the ancient
[anthropopathic] notion that God smells and is pleased
with the odor of sacrifices, Gen. viii. 21; in the N. T.
by a metaphor borrowed from sacrifices, a thing well-
pleasing to God: Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18, [W. 605 (562)
cf. 237 (222)]*
[EvwSia, -as, Phil. iv. 2 Rec. for Evodia, q. v.]
evdvupos, -ov, (ed and dvopa) ; 1. of good name
(Hes., Pind.), and of good omen (Plat. polit. p. 302 d.;
lege. 6 p. 754e.); in the latter sense used in taking
auguries; but those omens were euphemistically called
evovupa which in fact were regarded as unlucky, i. e.
which came from the left, sinister omens (for which
a good name was desired); hence 2. left (so fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down): Acts xxi. 3; Rev. x. 2; e&
evovipoy [cf. W. § 27, 3; § 19s. v. de&ia; B. 89 (78)],
on the left hand (to the left): Mt. xx. 21, 23; xxv. 33,
41; xxvil. 38; Mk. x. 37 [RGL],40; xv. 27*
ép-GAAopar; 2 aor. ptcp. épardspevos LT Tr WH; (emi
and d\Aopuar, q. v-); fr. Hom. down; to leap upon, spring
upon: émi twa, Acts xix. 16 [here RG pres. ptep.];
(Gish G5 sab G8 que IE)E
ép-drat [Treg. in Heb. ef’ draé; cf. Lipsius, gram.
Unters. p. 127], adv., (fr. emi and dma& [cf. W. 422
(393); B. 321 (275)]), once; at once i. e. a. our all
at once: 1 Co. xv. 6. b. our once for all: Ro. vi. 10;
Heb. vii. 27; ix.12; x.10. (Lcian., Dio Cass., al.) *
édeidov, see emetdov.
*Edeoivos, -n, -ov, Ephesian: Rev. ii. 1 Rec.*
*Eidécros, -a, -ov, (an) Ephesian, i. e. a native or in-
habitant of Ephesus: Acts xix. 28, 34 sq.; xxi. 29.*
"Edeoos, -ov, 7, Ephesus, a maritime city of Asia Minor,
capital of Ionia and, under the Romans, of proconsular
Asia [see Agia], situated on the Icarian Sea between
Smyrna and Miletus. Its chief splendor and renown
came from the temple of Artemis, which was reckoned
one of the wonders of the world. It was burned down
B.C. 356 by Herostratus, rebuilt at the common expense
of Greece under the supervision of Deinocrates (Pausan.
7, 2,6sq.; Liv. 1,45; Plin. h.n. 5, 29 (81); 36,14 (21)),
and in the middle of the third century after Christ utterly
destroyed by the Goths. At Ephesus the apostle Paul
founded a very flourishing church, to which great praise
is awarded in Rev. ii. 1 sqq. The name of the city oc-
curs in Acts xviii. 19, 21, 24; xix. 1,17, 26; xx. 16 sq.;
1 Co. xv. 82; xvi.8; Eph. i. 1 (where év ’Edécw is omitted
by cod. Sin. and other ancient author., [bracketed by T
WH Trmrg.; see WH. App. ad loc.; B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Ephesians, The Ep. to the]); 1 Tim. i. 3; 2 Tim. i. 18;
iv. 12; Rev. i. 11, and (acc. toG LT Tr WH) ii. 1.
Cf. Zimmermann, Ephesus im 1. christl. Jahrh., Jena
1874; [ Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus (1877) ].*
épevpetys
e-evpertis, -0d, 6, (epevpicxe to find out), an inventor,
Contriver, (Anacr. 41 (36), 3; Schol. ad Arstph. ran.
1499): xaxav, Ro. i. 30 (kaxdy edperai, Philo in Flacc.
§ 4 mid.; 6 kawav ddicnudrov ebpers, ibid. § 10; maons
kaxias evperns, 2 Mace. vii. 31; Sejanus facinorum om-
nium repertor, Tacit. ann. 4, 11).*
ep-npepta, -as, 7, (€pnpepros, -ov, by day, lasting or act-
ing for a day, daily), a word not found in prof. auth. ;
Sept. in Chron. and Neh.; 1. a service limited to
a stated series of days (cf. Germ. Tagdienst, Wochen-
dienst); so used of the service of the priests and Levites:
Neh. xiii. 30; 1 Chr. xxv. 8; 2 Chr. xiii. 10, etc. 2.
the class or course itself of priests who for a week at a time
performed the duties of the priestly office (Germ. Wach-
nerzunft): 1 Chr. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 13, etc.; 1 Esdr. i. 2,
15; so twice in the N. T.: Lk. i. 5, 8. For David di-
vided the priests into twenty-four classes, each of which
in its turn discharged the duties of the office for an en-
tire week from sabbath to sabbath, 1 Chr. xxiv. 4; 2 Chr.
viii. 14; Neh. xii. 24; these classes Josephus calls rarpuai
and epnuepides, antt. 7, 14,7; de vita sua 1; Suidas, épy-
pepia> 9 marpid. A€yerar S€ Kal 4) THs Huepas Aevroupyia.
Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on 3 Esdr. p. 12. [BB.DD.s. v.
Priests; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, bk. ii. ch. iii.]*
éc-Fepos, -ov, (i. q. 6 emt nuepay dv) ; 1. lasting for
a day (Pind., Hippocr., Plut., Galen.; al.). 2. daily:
7 tpopy (Diod. 3, 32; Dion. Hal. 8,41; Aristid. ii. p.
398 [ed. Jebb; 537 ed. Dind.]), Jas. ii. 15.*
Epide, see emetdov.
éh-tkveopar, -ovuar; 2 aor. inf. edixeoOa; [fr. Hom.
down]; to come to: dyps w. gen. of pers. 2 Co. x. 13; to
reach: eis twa, ibid. 14.*
ép-lornpt: 2 aor. eméatny, ptep. émords, impv. émictn&;
pf. ptep. épearas; to place at, place upon, place over; in
the N. T. only in the mid. [pres. indic. 3 pers. sing.
entoratat (for édhior.), 1 Th. v. 3 T Tr WH; see reff.
s. v. adeiSov] and the intrans. tenses of the act., viz. pf.
and 2 aor. (see dviornpur); to stand by, be present: LK. ii.
38; Acts xxii. 20; émayvw w.gen.of pers. to stand over
one, place one’s self above, Lk. iv. 39; used esp. of per-
sons coming upon one suddenly: simply, Lk. x. 40; xx.
1; Acts vi. 12; xxii. 13; xxiii. 27; of an angel, Acts xii.
7; w. dat. of pers., Acts iv. 1; xxiii. 11; of the advent
of angels, Lk. ii. 9; xxiv. 4, (of Hephaestus, Lcian. dial.
deor. 17,1; freq. of dreams, as Hom. Il. 10, 496; 23,
106; Hdt. 1, 34; al.); w. dat. of place, Acts xvii. 5;
foll. by émi with acc. of place, Acts x. 17; xi. 11; of
evils coming upon one: w. dat. of pers., 1 Th. v. 3 [see
above]; émi twa, Lk. xxi. 34 (Sap. vi. 9; xix. 1; Soph.
O. R. 777; Thue. 3, 82). i. q. to be at hand i.e. be
ready: 2 Tim. iv. 2, cf. Leo ad loc. (Eur. Andr. 547;
Dem. p. 245, 11). to be at hand i.e. impend: of time, 2
Tim. iv. 6. to come on, of rain, Acts xxviii. 2. [Comp.:
kat-, ovv-ediotnpe. | *
[épviStos, see aipvidios. ]
"Edpaty or (so R Tr) ’Edpaip [cf. I, ¢, fin.], @® LH
‘Edpéu, Vulg. Ephrem, Efrem), Ephraim, prop. name of
a city situated acc. to Eusebius eight [but ed. Larsow
265
eyo
and Parthey, p. 196,18, twenty], acc. to Jerome twenty
miles from Jerusalem; acc. to Joseph. b. j. 4, 9, 9 not
far from Bethel; conjectured by Robinson (Palest. i.
444 sq. [cf. Bib. Sacr. for May 1845, p. 398 sq.]), Ewald
et al. dissenting, to be the same as the village now called
et-Taryibeh, a short day’s journey N. E. of Jerusalem:
Jn. xi. 54. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Keim iii. p: 7 sq.
[Eng. trans. v. 9; esp. Schiirer, Gesch. i. 183].’
éppald, ephphatha, Aram. nas (the ethpaal impv.
of the verb nna, Hebr. nna, to open), be thou opened
(i. e. receive the power of hearing; the ears of the deaf
and the eyes of the blind being considered as closed): Mk.
vii. 34. [See Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10.] *
€x8€s and (Rec., so Grsb. in Acts and Heb.) y6és (on
which forms cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 323 sq.; [esp. Ruth-
erford, New Phryn. p. 370 sq.]; Bleek, Br. an d. Hebr.
ii. 2p. 1000; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81; W. pp. 24, 45; B. 72
(63) ]), adv., yesterday: Jn. iv. 52; Acts vii. 28; of time
just past, Heb. xiii. 8. [From Soph. down.]*
€x@pa, -as, 7, (fr. the adj. éyOpds), enmity: Lk. xxiii.
12; Eph. ii. 14 (15), 16; plur. Gal. v. 20; @y@pa (Lchm.
€xOpa fem. adj. [Vulg. inimica]) Oeod, towards God, Jas.
iv. 4 (where Tdf. r@ Oe@) ; e's Oedv, Ro. viii. 7; by meton.
i. q. cause of enmity, Eph. ii. 14 (15) [but cf. Meyer.
(From Pind. down.) ]*
€xOpds, -a, -dv, (€xos hatred) ; Sept. numberless times
for 3°)X, also for \¥, several times for Njjw and NIwWN, a
hater ; 1. passively, hated, odious, hateful (in Hom.
only in this sense): Ro. xi. 28 (opp. to dyamnrés). 2
actively, hostile, hating and opposing another: 1 Co. xv.
25; 2 Th. iii. 15; w. gen. of the pers. hated or opposed,
Jas. iv. 4 Lchm.; Gal. iv. 16, cf. Meyer or Wieseler on
the latter pass. used of men as at enmity with God by
their sin: Ro. v. 10 (cf. Ro. viii. 7; Col. i. 21; Jas. iv. 4)
[but many take éy6p. here (as in xi. 28, see 1 above) pas-
sively; cf. Meyer]; 77 d:avoia, opposing (God) in the
mind, Col. i. 21; éypds avOp@ros, a man that is hostile,
a certain enemy, Mt. xiii. 28; 6 é¢yOpds, the hostile one
(well known to you), i. e. car’ é€oxnv the devil, the most
bitter enemy of the divine government: Lk. x. 19, cf.
Mt. xiii. 39 (and eccl. writ.). 6 éyOpds (and éyOpds) sub-
stantively, enemy [so the word, whether adj. or subst.,
is trans. in A. V., exc. twice (R. V. once) foe: €rxaros
é€xOpés, 1 Co. xv. 26]: w. gen. of the pers. to whom one
is hostile, Mt. v. 43 sq.; x. 36; xiii. 25; Lk.i.[71], 74;
vi. 27, 35; xix. 27,43; Ro. xii. 20; Rev. xi. 5, 12; in
the words of Ps. cix. (cx.) 1, quoted in Mt. xxii. 44; Mk.
xii. 36; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; 1 Co. xv. 25 [Lbr.; al.
om. gen. (see above)]; Heb. i. 13; x. 13. w. gen. of
the thing: Acts xiii. 10; rod aravpod rod Xpicrod, who
given up to their evil passions evade the obligations
imposed upon them by the death of Christ, Phil. iii. 18.*
éxv8va, -ns, 77, a viper: Acts xxviii. 3 (Hes., Hadt.,
Tragg., Arstph., Plat., al.) ; yevyqpara éxidvav offspring
of vipers (anguigenae, Ovid, metam. 3,531), addressed to
cunning, malignant, wicked men: Mt. iii. 7; xii. 34;
soothe, OG IDI she Way
%xw; fut. wo; impf. efyov, [1 pers. plur. etyapev, 2 Jn.
”
EX w
5 T Tr WH], 3 pers. plur. efyav (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH;
Rev. ix. 8 LT Tr WH;; but cf. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165}; B. 40 (35))
and etyooav (L T Tr WHin Jn. xv. 22, 24 ; but ef. Bttm.
in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his
N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Tdf
Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. doAcda]) ; pres.
mid. ptep. éydpevos; to have,—with 2 aor. act. €xxov;
pf. €oxnxa ;
I. Transitively. 1. to have i.q.to hold; a. to
have (hold) in the hand: ti év rh xeupi, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5;
x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6,
etc.; Heb. viii. 3. b. in the sense of wearing (Lat.
gestare); of garments, arms and the like: rd évdupa, Mt.
iii. 4; xxii. 12; kara xehadjs exer, sc. ri, having a cov-
ering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head
covered [B. § 130, 5; W. § 47, k. cf. 594 (552)], 1 Co.
xi. 4; O@apaxas, Rev. ix. 17; payarpav, Jn. xviii. 10; add,
Mt. xxvi. 7; Mk. xiv. 3; of a tree having (bearing)
leaves, Mk. xi. 13; ev yaorpt éxew, sc. €uBpvoy, to be
pregnant [cf. W. 594 (552); B. 144 (126)], (see yaarnp,
2).
paptupiay, 1 Jn. v.10; ev xapdia éxew tid, to have (carry)
one in one’s heart, to love one constantly, Phil.i.7. c.
trop. to have (hold) possession of the mind; said of alarm,
agitating emotions, etc.: efyev avras Tpopos K. éxoTacts,
Mk. xvi. 8 (Job xxi. 6; Is. xiii. 8, and often in prof.
auth.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1294 sq.; [L. and S.s. v. A. I.
8]). d. to hold fast, keep: % pva cov, fy etxyov azoxet-
pévny ev covdapio, Lk. xix. 20; trop. rov Oedv exew ev
émtyvacet, Ro. i. 28; to keep in mind, ras évroAds, Jn.
xiv. 21 (see évrodn, sub fin.) ; rv paprupiav, Rey. vi. 9;
See ~ eae ear : 3 \
Metaph. év éavr@ exe 1 amdxpipa, 2 Co. i. 95 rhv
xii. 17; xix.10 5; 70 puornptov ris miotews ev Kabapa cvvet-
djoe, 1 Tim. iii. 9; trorvmoow tyrawévrav oyov, 2 Tim.
1.13. e. to have (in itself or as a consequence), com-
prise, involve: épyov, Jas. i. 43; ii. 17; koXaowy, 1 In. iv.
18; pucOarodociav, Heb. x. 35 (Sap. viii. 16). See exx.
fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. p. 1296 sq.; [L. and S. s. v.
A.I.8 and 10]. f. by a Latinism i. q. aestimo, to re-
gard, consider, hold as, {but this sense is still denied by
Meyer, on Lk. as below; Mt. xiv. 5]: rid w. ace. of the
predicate, ye pe mapntnuevor, have me excused, Lk. xiv.
18; twa os rpopyrny, Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26, (€xew lavvay k.
"lap Spay ws Beovs, Ev. Nicod. 5) ; rwd évripov (see évtipos),
Phil. ii. 29; rv Woynv pov [G om. pov] ryslav epav7d, Acts
xx. 24 RG; rivd eis rpopyrnv (a Hebraism [see ets, B. IT.
3c. y. fin.]), for a prophet, Mt. xxi.46 L T Tr WH, cf. B.
§ 131, 7; revd, dre dvtws [T Tr WH apres, ore ete.] ™po-
gytns hv, Mk. xi. 32, cf. B. § 151, 1 a.; [W. $66, 5 a.].
2. to have i. q. to own, possess; a. external things
such as pertain to property, riches, furniture, utensils,
goods, food, ete.: as tov Blov, Lk. xxi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 17;
ktjparta, Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22; Oncavpdv, Mt. xix. 21; Mk.
x. 21; dyada, Lk. xii. 19; mpoBara, Lk. xv. 4; Jn. x. 16;
Spaypads, Lk. xv. 8; mAoia, Rev. xviii. 19; xAnpovopiar,
Eph. v. 5; [cf. Mt. xxi. 38 LT Tr WH, where R G kard-
oxopev|; pépos foll. by ev w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xx.
6; dvovacrnp.ov, Heb. xiii. 10; dca eyers, Mk. x. 21; xii.
266
”
EX @
44; Mt. xiii. 44, 46; xviii. 255; pndév, 2 Co. vi. 10; ri de
Zyets, 5 etc. 1 Co. iv. 7; with a pred. ace. added, efyor
dmavra kowd, Acts ii. 44; absol. éyew, to have property,
to be rich: ov« and py éyew [A. V. to have not], to be
destitute, be poor, Mt. xiii. 12; xxv. 29; Mk. iv. 25; Lk.
viii. 18; xix. 26; 1 Co. xi. 22; 2 Co. viii. 12, (Neh. viii.
10; 1 Esdr. ix. 51, 54; Sir. xiii. 5; exx. fr. Grk. auth.
in Passow s. v. p. 1295”; [L. and S.s.v. A. I. 1; ef. W.
594 (552)]); ék rov €xyewv, in proportion to your means
[see éx, I. 13 fin.], 2 Co. viii 11. b. Under the head
of possession belongs the phrase éyew twa as com-
monly used of those joined to any one by the bonds of
nature, blood, marriage, friendship, duty, law, compact,
and the like: marépa, Jn. viii. 41; ddeAdovs, Lk. xvi. 28;
dvépa (a husband), Jn. iv. 17 sq.; Gal. iv. 27; yuvaika, 1
Co. vii. 2,12 sq. 29; réxva, Mt. xxi. 28; xxii. 24; 1 Tim.
iii. 4; Tit.i.65; viovs, Gal. iv. 22; oméppa, offspring, Mt.
xxii. 25; ynpas, 1 Tim. v. 16; do@evodvras, Lk. iv. 40;
pirov, Lk. xi. 5; madaywyovs, 1 Co. iv. 15; éxew kvpror,
to have (be subject to) a master, Col. iv. 1; deomdrny, 1
Tim. vi. 2; Baovdéa, Jn. xix.15; with 颒 éavray added,
Rey. ix. 11; éyee tov xpivovra avrov, Jn. xii. 48; exe
oixovopov, Lk. xvi. 1; doddAov, Lk. xvii. 7; adpysepea, Heb.
iv. 14; viii. 1; mouseva, Mt. ix. 36; éyev bm euavtoy orpa-
tuwtas, Lk. vii. 8; €xew tov vidv x. tov marépa, to be in
living union with the Son (Christ) and the Father by
faith, knowledge, profession, 1 Jn. ii. 23; (v.12); 2Jn.9.
With two accusatives, one of which serves as a predicate:
matépa Tov ABpadu, Abraham for our father, Mt. iii. 9;
add, Acts xiii. 5; Phil. iii. 17; Heb. xii. 9; eyew teva
yuvaixa, to have (use) a woman (unlawfully) as a wife,
Mt. xiv. 4; Mk. vi.18; 1 Co. v. 1 [where see Meyer], (of
lawful marriage, Xen. Cyr. 1,5,4). c. of attend-
ance or companionship: éyew twa pe éavtod, Mt.
xye SOs xxvi. is Mkei) 19bexivie 7) dixie Sa mes
éxew re to have athing in readiness, have at hand, have in
store: ovK éxomev ei pty mevte Gprous, Mt. xiv. 17; add, xv.
34; Jn. ii. 3 [not Tdf.]; iv. 11; xii. 35; 1 Co. xi. 22; xiv.
26; od« €xo, 6 mapabnow atte, Lk. xi. 6; rod cuvdéo
Tovs Kaprrovs pov, Lk. xii. 17; ri (cf. B. $139, 58) ayo,
Mk. viii. 1 sq.; ¢yew ruvd, to have one at hand, be able to
make use of : Mwicéa x. t. mpopyras, Lk. xvi. 29; mapd-
kAnrov, 1 Jn. ii. 1; paprupas, Heb. xii.1; ovd€eva éyo ete.
Phil. ii. 20; @vOpemov, va etc. Jn. v. 7. e. a person or
thing is said ¢yew those things which are its parts or
are members of his body: as yetpas, médas, dpOadpors,
Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; Mk. ix. 48, 45,475 ods, Rev. ii. 7, 11,
ete.; @ra, Mt. xi. 15; Mk. vii. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the
vs.]; vill. 18; wéAy, Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12; udpea x.
dorea, Lk. xxiv. 39; dxpoBvoriav, Acts xi. 3; an animal
is said €yew head, horns, wings, etc.: Rev. iv. 7 sq. 3 v.
6; vill. 9; ix. 8sqq.; xii. 3, ete.; a house, city, or wall,
éxewv Oepnediouvs, Heb. xi. 10; Rev. xxi. 14; ordow, Heb.
ix. 8; [add emoroAiy exovoay (RG mepiéy.) tov TUmov
tovrov, Acts xxiii. 25]. f. one is said to have the dis-
eases or other ills with which he is affected or af-
flicted: pdorryas, Mk. iii. 10; doOeveias, Acts xxviii. 9;
wounds, Rev. xiii. 14; OAtpu, Jn. xvi. 33; 1 Co. vii. 28;
éX@
Rev. ii. 10. Here belong tke expressions daimduiov exe,
»to be possessed by a demon, Mt. xi. 18; Lk. vii. 33; viii.
27; In. vil. 20; viii. 48 sq. 52; x. 20; BeehCeBovd, Mk.
lil. 22; mvedpa dxdOaprov, Mk. iii. 30; vii. 25; Lk. iv. 33;
Acts viii. 7; mvedua mommpdy, Acts xix. 13; mvevpa a be-
veias, i. e. ademon causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. 11; mvedpa
@adov, Mk. ix. 17; Neyedva, Mk. v.15. g. one is said
to have intellectual or spiritual faculties, endow-
ments, virtues, sensations, desires, emotions,
affections, faults, defects, ete. : copiav, Rev. xvii.
9; yraouw, 1 Co. viii. 1, 10; yapiopara, Ro. xii. 6; Tpo-
pnreiav, 1 Co. xiii. 2; rior, Mt. xvii. 20; xxi. 21; Mk.
xi. 22; Lk. xvii. 6; Acts xiv. 9; Ro. xiv. 22; 1 Tim. i.
19; Philem. 5; memoiOnow, 2 Co. iii. 4; Phil. iii. 4; map-
pnoiay, Philem. 8; Heb. x. 19; 1 Jn. ii. 28 ; iii. 21; iv. 17;
v. 14; dyannyv, Jn.v. 42; xiii. 35; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iv. 16;
1 Co. xiii. 1 sqq.; 2 Co. ii.4; Phil. ii. 2; Philem. 5; 1
Pet. iv. 8; Amida (see Amis, 2 p. 206" mid.) ; CArov, zeal,
Ro. x. 2; envy, jealousy (év rj xapdia), Jas. iii. 14 5 ydpuy
rwi, to be thankful to one, Lk. xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; 2
Tim. i. 3; Oupov, Rev. xii. 12; topovnv, Rev. ii. 3;
PoBov, 1 Tim. v. 20; yapav, Philem. 7 [Rec.* ydpw]; 3
Jn. 4 [WH txt. ydpw]; Avmnv, In. xvi. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3;
Phil. ii. 27; émOvpiav, Phil. i. 23 ; ésuroGiav, Ro. xv. 23;
pveiav tivos, 1 Th. iii. 6. cuveidnorv xadjv, ayabny,
ampooxoroy: Acts xxiv. 16; 1 Tim. i. 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16;
Heb. xiii. 18; cuveidnow duapriav, Heb. x. 2; dyvaciav
Geot, 1 Co. xv. 34; aodéveray, Heb. vii. 28; duapriav, Jn.
ix. 41; xv. 22, ete. h. of age and time: j7Arkiav,
mature years (A. V. to be of age), Jn. ix. 21, 23; én, to
have (completed) years, be years old, Jn. viii. 57; with
év tu added : in a state or condition, Jn. v. 5 [W. 256
(240) note?; B. § 147, 11]; in a place, réooapas jpepas
ev TO pene, Jn. xi. 17; beginning or end, or both, Heb.
vii. 3; Mk. iii. 26; Lk. xxii. 37 [see rédos, 1 a. ].
re issaid of opportunities, bonefits, advantages,
conveniences, which one enjoys or can make use of:
Babos yrs, Mt. xiii. 55 ynv mohAnv, Mk. iv. 5; ikuada, Lk. viii.
6; xarfov, Gal. vi. 10; Heb. >i. 15; Rev. xii. 12; eovciay,
see é£ovaia, passim; elpyynv did twos, Ro. v. 1 (where we
must read éyouev, not vith TTrWHLmrg. (cf. WH.
Intr. § 404) ] éyoper) ; édevbepiay, Gal. ii.4 5 mvetdpa Ocod,
1 Co. vii. 40; veda Xpiorod, Ro. vill. 9; vodv Xpiorod,
1Co. ii. 16; Conv, Jn. v. 4%; x. 10; xx. 31; rHv Cony, 1
Jn. v. 12; Cwhv aidwov, Mt. xix. 16; Jn. iii. 15 sq. 36
[cf. W. 266 (249)]; v.24, 39; vi.49,47, 54; 1Jn.v. 13;
fmayyenias, 2 Co. vii. 1; Heb. vii. 6; poor, Mt. v. 46;
vi.1; 1 Co. ix. 17; ra airquara, the things which we have
asked, 1 Jn. v. 153; érawov, Ro. xiii. 9; ryqy, Jn. iv. 44;
Heb. iii. 3; Xéyov codias, a reputation for wisdom, Col.
ii. 23 [see Ndyos, I. 5 fin.]; kapmov, Ro. i. 13; vi. 21 sq. ;
xdpuv, benefit, 2 Co. i. 15 [where Tr mrg. WH txt. yapav];
xdpirua, 1 Co. vii. 7; mpocaywyn”, Eph. ii. 18; ili. 12;
avdrravow, Rev. iv. 83 xiv. 11; amodavaiv twos, Heb. xi.
25; mpdpaow, In. xv. 22; kavxnua, that of which one
may glory, Ro. iv. 2; Gal. vi. 4; kavxnow, Ro. xv. 17.
kk. Zyew rz is used of one on whom something has been
laid, on whom it is incumbent as something to be
i. €yew
267
eyo
borne, observed, performed, discharged : dvéyxny, 1 Co.
Vil. 37; dvdyxny foll. by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 [RL
br. Tr mrg. br.]; Heb. vii. 27; ypetav ruvds (see xpeta, 1);
evxny ef’ €avrdv, Acts xxi. 23; vopov, Jn. xix. 7; évrodqy,
2 Jn. 5; Heb. vii. 5; émerayny, 1 Co. vii. 25; 8caxoviay,
2 Co. iv. 1; mpagw, Ro. xii. 4; dyava, Phil. i. 30; Col. ii.
1; €ykAnua, Acts xxiii. 29; xpiua, 1 Tim. v. 12. 1.
€xew te is used of one to whom something has been in-
trusted: rag kdeis, Rev. i. 18; iii. 7; rd -yNwoodkopor,
Jn. xii. 6; xiii. 29. m. in reference to complaints
and disputes the foll. phrases are used: éyw re [or
without an acc., ef. B. 144 (126)] xara twos, to have
something to bring forward against one, to have some-
thing to complain of in one, Mt. v. 23; Mk. xi. 25; foll.
by ors, Rev. ii. 4; €y@ xara cod dXtya, dre etc. ib. 14 [here
L WH mrg. om. dri], 20 [here GL T Tr WH om. 8i.];
éx@ Te mpéds twa, to have some accusation to bring against
one, Acts xxiv. 19; cu¢yrnow ev éavtois, Acts xxviil. 29
[Ree.]; ¢ytnpara mpds twa, Acts xxv. 193 Adyov éyew
mpds twa, Acts xix. 38; mpayya mpds twa, 1 Co. vi. 1;
poppy mpds twa, Col. iii. 18; Kpiara pera tevos, 1 Co. vi.
7. on. phrases of various kinds: ¢yew twa xara rpdcw-
mov, to have one before him, in his presence, [ A. V. face to
Jace; see mpdcwmoy, 1 a.], Acts xxv. 16; Koirny &k twos,
to conceive by one, Ro. ix. 10; rovro éyeus, dre etc. thou
hast this (which is praiseworthy [cf. W. 595 (553) ]) that
etc. Rey. ii. 6 ; ev euol ovx exes ovdev, hath nothing in me
which is his of right, i. q. no power over me (Germ. e7
hat mir nichts an), Jn. xiv. 30; 6 éorw... caBBdrov éxov
606v, a sabbath-day’s journey distant (for the distance is
something which the distant place has, as it were), Acts
i. 12; ef. Kypke ad loc. oo. ¢y with an inf. [W. 333
(313); B. 251 (216)], a. like the Lat. habeo quod w. the
subjunc., i. q. to be able: exw amododrat, Mt. xviii. 25; Lk.
vii. 42; xiv. 14; ri woujoa, Lk. xii. 4; oddev elyov dvreureiv,
they had nothing to «ppose (could say nothing against
it), Acts iv. 14; kar’ ovdevds elye peifovos dudoar, Heb.
vi. 18; add, Jn. viii. 5 (Rec.); Acts xxv. 26 [cf. B. as
above]; Eph. iv. 28; Tit. ii. 8; 2 Pet.i. 15; the inf. is
om. and to be supplied fr. the context: 6
mownoa, Mk. xiv. 8; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow
s. v. p. 1297"; [L. and S.s. v. A. III. 1]. 8. is used of
what there is a certain necessity for doing: Bamriopa
éyo BanricOjvat, Lk. xii.50; éx@ coi re eimeiv, vii. 40;
dmayyeihar, Acts xxiii. 17,19; Aadjoat, 18 ; kaTnyopnoat,
Acts xxviii. 19; moda ypddew, 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13.
II. Intransitively. a. (Lat. me habeo) to hold one’s
self or find one’s self so and so, to be in such or such a
condition : érotuws éyw, to be ready, foll. by inf., Acts
xxi. 13; 2 Co. xii. 14; 1 Pet. iv.5 [not WH]; éoxdrws
(see €oydrws), Mk. v. 23; kaxas, to be sick, Mt. iv. 24:
viii. 16; ix. 12; [xvii. 15 L Trtxt. WH txt.], etc.; cards,
to be well, Mk. xvi. 18; xopspérepov, to be better, Jn. iv.
52; mas, Acts xv. 36; év éroiva, foll. by inf., 2 Co. x. 6.
b. impersonally : @Ados xe, it is otherwise, 1 Tim. v.
25; ovrws, Acts vii.1; xii. 15; xvii. 11; xxiv. 9; 1d vop
éyov, as things now are, for the present, Acts xxiv. 25
(Tob. vii. 11, and exx. fr. later prof. auth. in Kypke,
eayev, SC.
ews
Observv. ii. p. 124; cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 9; [cf. W. 463
(432) ]).
III. Mid. Zyouaé rwvos (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down),
prop. to hold one’s self to a thing, to lay hold of a thing,
to adhere or cling to; to be closely joined to a pers. or
thing [ef. W. 202 (190); B. 192 (166 sq.), 161 (140)]:
ra éxdpeva Ths carnpias, Vulg. viciniora saluti, connected
with salvation, or which lead to it, Heb. vi. 9, where cf.
Bleek; 6 éxdpuevos, near, adjoining, neighboring, border-
ing, next: of place, kwporddes, Mk. i. 38 (vqa0s, Isocr.
paneg. § 96; of éxduevot, neighbors, Hdt. 1, 134); of
time, 77 éxopevn sc. quépa, the following day, Lk. xiii. 33 ;
Acts xx. 15, (1 Mace. iv. 28; Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 13, 9);
with #yepa added, Acts xxi. 26; caBBarw, Acts xiii. 44
(where R T Tr WH txt. épxopév@) ; evavr@, 1 Mace. iv.
28 (with var. épyopeve ev.) ; Tod éxouevou érovs, Thue. 6,
3. [CoMP. : dy-, mpoo-av-, dvt-, dm-, €v-, €1-, KAT-, HET-, TAp-,
TEpt-, TPO-, Mpoo-, Tuv-, UmreEp-, UT-EXe. |
éws, a particle marking a limit, and
I. as a CONJUNCTION signifying 1. the tempo-
ral terminus ad quem, till, until, (Lat. donec, usque
dum); asin the best writ. a. with an indic. pret.,
where something is spoken of which continued up to a
certain time: Mt. ii. 9 (€ws.. . orn [é€oradn L T TrWH)) ;
xxiv. 39, (1 Macc. x. 50; Sap. x. 14, etc.). _b. with dv
and the aor. subjunc. (equiv. to the Lat. fut. perf.), where
it is left doubtful when that will take place till which it
is said a thing will continue [cf. W. § 42, 5]: to: eet,
€ws dy eirw oor, Mt. ii. 13; add, v. 18; x. 11; xxii. 44; Mk.
vi. 10; xii..363; Lk. xvii. 85 xx.43 3 Acts 11.35; Heb. 1
13; after a negative sentence: Mt. v. 18, 26; x. 23 [T
WH om. dv]; xii. 20; xvi. 28; xxiii. 39; xxiv. 34; Mk.
ix. 1; Lk. ix. 27; xxi. 32; 1 Co.iv.5; with the aor. subj.
without the addition of dv: Mk. vi. 45 RG; xiv. 32 [here
Tr mrg.fut.]; Lk.xv.4; [xii. 59 TTr WH; xxii. 34 LT
Tr WH]; 2 Th. ii. 7; Heb. x. 13; Rev. vi. 11 [Rec. gas
ov]; ovK ave(noav ews tedeo OR Ta yiua Ern, did not live
again till the thousand years had been finished (elapsi
Suerint), Rev. xx.5 Rec. Cf. W. § 41 b. 3. c. more
rarely used with the indic. pres. where the aor. subj. might
have been expected [ W. u. s.; B. 231 (199)]: so four times
€ws €pyopa, Lk. xix. 13 (where LT Tr WH eyo for éas,
but cf. Bleek ad loc.) ; Jn. xxi. 22 sq.; 1 Tim. iv. 13; fas
drodvet, Mk. vi. 45 LT Tr WH, for R G drodvon (the
indic. being due to a blending of dir. and indir. disc.; as
in Plut. Lycurg. 29, 3 deiv ody exeivous eupévew tois Kabe-
OTOot vopos...€ws emdveccw). 4. once with the indic.
fut., acc. to an improbable reading in Lk. xiii. 35: ws F£ec
Tdf., gs dv 7€ee Lehm., for RG gos dy #&; [but WH
(omitting dv én dre) read ws eimnre; Tr om. dy and br.
y. 6.; cf. B. 231 (199) sq.]. 2. as in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down, as long as, while, foll. by the indic. in all
tenses, —in the N. T. only in the pres. : &ws jyépa éeariv,
Jn. ix. 4 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. os]; gos (LT Tr WH ds)
To has exere, In. xii. 35 sq., (€ws Ere has ear, Plat.
Phaedo p. 89 c.) ; [ME. vi. 45 (cf. c. above)].
II. By a usage chiefly later it gets the force of an
ADVERB, Lat. usoue ad; and 1. used of a tempo-
268
y
EWS
ralterminus ad quem, until, (unto); a. like a prep-
osition, w. a gen. of time [W. § 54, 6; B. 319 (274) ]:,
Zws alsvos, Lk. i. 55 Grsb. (Ezek. xxv. 15 Alex.; 1 Chr.
xvii. 16; Sir. xvi. 26 Fritz.; xxiv. 9, etc.) ; ras muepas,
Mt. xxvi. 29; xxvii. 64; Lk. i. 80; Acts i. 22 [Tdf. dxpu];
Ro. xi. 8, etc.; Spas, Mt. xxvii. 45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk. xxiii.
44; ris mevtnxootijs, 1 Co. xvi. 8; TéAovs, 1 Co. i. 8; 2 Co.
i135; ris onpepov sc. jyepas, Mt. xxvii. 8; rod viv, Mt.
xxiv. 21; Mk. xiii. 19, (1 Mace. ii. 33); ynpa €ws érap
éySoqx. recodpwv a widow (who had attained) even unto
eighty-four years, Lk. ii. 37 LT Tr WH; before the
names of illustrious men by which a period of time
is marked: Mt.i.17; xi. 13; Lk. xvi.16 (where T Tr WH
péxpt); Acts xiii. 20; before the names of events:
Mt. i. 17 (ws perotxecias BaBvAdvos) ; ii. 15; xxiil. 35;
xxviii. 20; Lk. xi. 51; Jas. v.7; €ws tov eAdeiv, Acts viii.
40 [B. 266 (228); cf. W. § 44, 6; Judith i. 10; xi. 19,
etce.]. _b. with the gen. of the neut. rel. pron. of or érov
it gets the force of a conjunction, until, till (the time
when); a. ws od (first in Hdt. 2, 143; but after that
only in later auth., as Plut. et al. [W. 296 (278) note;
B. 230 sq. (199)]): foll. by the indic., Mt. i. 25 [WH
br. o6]; xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21; Acts xxi. 26 [B.1.¢.]; foll.
by the subj. aor., equiv. to Lat. fut. pf., Mt. xiv. 22; xxvi.
36 (where WH br. of and Lchm. has éws od dv); LK. xii.
50 [Rec.; xv. 8 Tr WH]; xxiv. 49; Acts xxv. 21; 2-Pet.
i. 19; after a negative sentence, Mt. xvii. 9; Lk. xii. 59
[RGL; xxii. 18 Tr WH]; Jn. xiii. 38; Acts xxiii. 12,
14,21. B. €ws drov, aa. until, till (the time when):
foll. by the indic., Jn. ix. 18; foll. by the subj. (without
av), Lk. xiii. 8; xv. 8[RGLT]; after a negation, Lk.
xxii. 16,18[RGLT]. BB. as long as, whilst (Cant. i.
12), foll. by the indic. pres., Mt. v. 25 (see dypu, 1 d. fin.).
ce. before adverbs of time (rarely so in the earlier and
more elegant writ., as €ws dé, Thuc. 3, 108; [cf. W. § 54,
6 fin.; B. 320 (275)]): €ws dprt, up to this time, until
now [Vig. ed. Herm. p. 388], Mt. xi. 12; Jn. ii. 10; v.
Wis xvi. 245)1 Ino. 98 1 Cos iv.4d3 sevill. dex ve Oreos
mére; how long? Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lkwix. 41;
Jn. x. 24; Rev. vi. 10, (Ps. xii. (xiii.) 2.sq.; 2S. ii. 26;
1 Mace. vi. 22) ;. €@s onuepor, 2 Co. iii. 15. 2. acc. to
a usage dating fr. Aristot. down, employed of the local
terminus ad quem, unto, as far as, even to; a. likea
prep., with a gen. of place [W. § 54, 6; B. 319 (274)]:
€ws adov, €ws Tod ovpavod, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x.15; add, Mt.
xxiv. 31; xxvi. 58; Mk. xiii. 27; Lk. ii. 15; iv. 29; Acts
1/83 xi, 19, 22% xvii. 155i xxii. 28> 2'Couxiin2 swith
gen. of pers., to the place where one is: Lk. iv. 42; Acts
ix. 38, (€ws ‘YrepBopéwr, Ael. v. h. 3,18). 1b. with ad-
verbs of place [W. and B. as in c. above]: €ws ave, Jn.
li. 7; €ws €ow, Mk. xiv. 54; fas xdrw, Mt. xxvii. 51;
MK. xv. 38; €ws &de, Lk. xxiii. 5 [ef. W. § 66, 1 c.].
c. with prepositions: éws ¢&@ ris médews, Acts xxi. 5;
éws eis, Lk. xxiv. 50 ([RGLmrg., but Ltxt.T Tr WH
€ws mpds as far as to (Polyb. 3, 82,6; 12,17,4; Gen.
xxxvili. 1)]; Polyb. 1, 11,14; Ael. v. h. 12, 22. 3.
of the limit (terminus) of quantity; with an adv. of
number: é€ws érrdxs, Mt. xviii. 21; with numerals: Mt.
Vad
xxii. 26 (€ws rdv Ema) ; ef. xx. 8; In. viii. 9 (Rec.);
Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii.11; od« Zorw fas évds, there is
not so much as one, Ro. iii. 12 fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 8.4.
of the limit of measurement: fas #uloous, Mk. vi. 23;
Esth. v. 3, 6 Alex. 5. of the end or limit in acting
[Z, t, on its substitution for o see 3, o, s.]
ZaBovroy, 6, indecl., (yar {but on the Hebr. form see
B. D.] habitation, dwelling, Gen. xxx. 20), Vulg. Zabu-
lon; Zebulun, the tenth son of Jacob; by meton. the
tribe of Zebulun: Mt. iv. 13, 15; Rev. vii. 8.*
Zaxxatos, -ov, 6, (2! pure, innocent; cf. 2 Esdr. ii. 9;
Neh. vii. 14), Zaccheus, a chief tax-collector: Lk. xix.
Ay Tips 0 yg DAE ol
Zapa, 6, (MN a rising (of light)), indecl., Zarah [better
Zerah}, one of the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 3; cf. Gen.
XXXVlli. 30.*
Zaxaplas, -ov, 6, (7D! and 377937 i. e. whom Jehovah
remembered), Zacharias or Zachariah or Zechariah;
1. a priest, the father of John the Baptist: Lk. i. 5,
12 sq. 18, 21, 40, 59, 67; iii. 2. 2. a prophet, the son
of Jehoiada the priest, who was stoned to death in the
mid. of the rx. cent. before Christ in the court of the
temple: 2 Chr. xxiv. 19 sqq.; Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51.
Yet this Zachariah is called in Mt. 1. c. the son not of
Jehoiada but of Barachiah. But most interpreters now
think (and correctly) that the Evangelist confounded
him with that more noted Zachariah the prophet who
lived a little after the exile, and was the son of Bara-
chiah (cf. Zech. i. 1), and whose prophecies have a place
in the canon. For Christ, to prove that the Israelites
throughout their sacred history had been stained with
the innocent blood of righteous men, adduced the first
and the last example of the murders committed on good
men; for the bks. of the Chron. stand last in the Hebrew
canon. But cpinions differ about this Zachariah. Yor
according to an ancient tradition, which the Greek
church follows (and which has been adopted by Chr. W.
Miiller in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1841, p. 673 sqq.,
and formerly by Hilgenfeld, krit. Untersuchungen ub. die
Evangg. Justins, ete., p. 155 and die Evangg. nach ihrer
Entstehung, p. 100), Zachariah the father of John the
Baptist is meant (cf. Protev. Jac. c. 23); others think
(so quite recently Keim, iii. 184 [Eng. trans. v. 218], cf.
Weiss, das Matthiiusevang. p. 499) a certain Zachariah
son of Baruch (acc. to another reading Bapickaiov), who
during the war between the Jews and the Romans was
slain by the zealots év péom ré iepd, as Joseph. b. j. 4,
5,4 relates. Those who hold this opinion believe, either
that Jesus divinely predicted this murder and in the
269
faa
and suffering: éws rovrov, Lk. xxii. 51 [see édw, 2];
€ws TOD Gepropod, Mt. xiii. 30 L Tr WH txt.; os Oavarov,
even to death, so that I almost die, Mk. xiv. 34; Mt.
xxvi. 38, (Sir. iv. 28; xxxi. (xxxiv.) 13; xxxvii. 2;
4 Mace. xiv. 19).
Z
prophetic style said épovevoare for govetcere [cf. B.
§137,4; W. 273 (256) n.; §40,5b.], or that the Evange-
list, writing after the destruction of Jerusalem, by an
anachronism put this murder into the discourse of Jesus.
These inventions are fully refuted by Fritzsche on Mt.
l. c., and Bleek, Erklir. der drei ersten Evangg. ii. p. 177
sqq-; cf. Hilgenfeld, Kinl. in d. N. T. p. 487 sq.; [and
Dr. James Morison, Com. on Mt., |. c.; B. D.s. v. Zech-
ariah 6 and s. v. Zacharias 11].*
{dw, -d, Cs, Cp, inf. ¢qv [so LT, but RG WH -}-, Tr
also (exe. 1 Co. ix. 14; 2 Co.i. 8); cf. W. §5,4¢.; WH.
Intr. § 410; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 5 sq.], ptep. av;
impf. é{@v (Ro. vii. 9, where cod. Vat. has the inferior
form &€{nv [found again Col. iii. 7 é¢qre]; cf. Fritzsche
on Rom. ii. p. 38; [ WH. App. p. 169; Veitch s. v.]); fut.
in the earlier form (now (Ro. vi. 2 [not Lmrg.]; Heb.
xii. 9; LT Tr WH also in Jn. [v. 25]; vi. [51 T WH],
57, 58 [not L; xiv. 19 T Tr WH]; 2 Co. xiii. 4; Jas. iv.
15), and much oftener [(?) five times, quotations ex-
cepted, viz. Mt. ix. 18; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xi. 25; Ro. viii.
13; x.5; cf. Moulton’s Winer p. 105] the later form,
first used by [Hippocr. 7, 536 (see Veitch s. v.)] Dem.,
¢joopat; 1 aor. (unused in Attic [Hippocr., Anth. Pal.
Plut., al. (see Veitch)]) e{noa (Acts xxvi. 5, etc.) ; cf.
Btim. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. 191 sq.; B. 58 (51); Kriiger i.
p- 172; Kiihner i. 829; W. 86 (83); [Veitch s. v.]; Hebr.
mn; [fr. (Hom.) Theogn., Aeschyl. down]; ¢o live;
I. prop. 1. to live, be among the living, be alive (not
lifeless, not dead): Acts xx. 12; Ro. vii. 1-3; 1 Co. vii.
39-121 Comi. Scaive Us 1 hs iv. 15,ah75 Reveexixe 2 Oyetcss
Wux7 (doa, 1 Co. xv. 45 and R Trmrg. Rev. xvi. 3; dia
mayros tov (qv, during all their life (on earth), Heb. ii.
15 (Staredeiv mdvra tov tov Cv xpdvov, Diod. 1, 74 [cf. B.
262 (225)]); éxe (av (ptep. impf. [ef. W. 341 (320)]),
while he was yet alive, before his death, Mt. xxvii. 63;
with év capki added, of the earthly life, Phil. i. 22; 6 de
viv (@ év capi, that life which I live in an earthly body,
Gal. ii. 20 [B. 149 (130); W. 227 (2138)]; év aire Caper,
in God is the cause why we live, Acts xvii. 28; (aca
réOmxe, 1 Tim. v. 6; eyot rd ¢nv Xpiords, my life is de-
voted to Christ, Christ is the aim, the goal, of my life,
Phil. i. 21; ¢avres are opp. to vexpoi, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk.
xii. 27; Lk. xx. 88; (advres kai vexpoi, Acts x. 42; Ro.
xiv. 9; 2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv. 5; in the sense of living
law
and thriving, 2 Co. vi. 9; 1 Th. iii. 8; y & épot
Xpuoros, Christ is living and operative in me, i. e. the
holy mind and energy of Christ pervades and moves me,
Gal. ii. 20; ék duvdpews Oeod Civ eis twa, through the
power of God to live and be strong toward one (se. in
correcting and judging), 2 Co. xiii. 4; in the absol. sense
God is said to be 6 (av: Mt. xvi. 16; xxvi. 63; Jn. Vis
57; vi. 69 Rec.; Acts xiv.15; Ro.ix. 26; 2 Co. iii. 3;
vi 16s 1 Th. i.9; 1 Tim. il. 155 iv. 105" va. 17 hiGs
Heb. iii. 12; ix. 14; x. 31; xii. 22; Rev. vii. 2, (Josh. iii.
10; 2K.xix.4,16; Is. xxxvii. 4,17; Hos.i.10; Dan.
vi. 20 Theod., 26, ete.); with the addition of es rovs
aidvas Tov aiwvwy, Rev. iv. 9; xv.7; (@ eyo CIX—N,
Num. xiv. 21; Is. xlix. 18, ete.) as I live, (by my life),
the formula by which God swears by himself, Ro. xiv.
11. i. q. to continue to live, to be kept alive, (6atus Civ
émOupet, metpdcOw viKav, Xen. an. 3, 2, 26 (39)):
kipios Oedjnon Kal (yowper [-copev LT Tr WH], Jas. iv.
15 [B. 210 (181); W. 286 (268 sqy.)]5 ¢qv em dorm (Mt.
iv.4,etc.) see emi, B. 2a.a. (Tob. v. 20); qv &k Tivos, to
get a living from a thing, 1 Co. ix. 14; also when used
of convalescents, Jn. iv. 50 sq.53; with ek ris appo-
otias added, 2 K.i. 2; viii. 8 sq. figuratively, fo live
and be strong: év trovrots (for Rec. év adrois) in these
vices, opp. to the ethical death by which Christians are
wholly severed from sin (see éroOynoxe, II. 2 b.), Col. iii.
7; cf. Meyer adloc. i. q. to be no longer dead, to recover
life, be restored to life: Mt. ix. 18; Actsix. 41; so of
Jesus risen from the dead, Mk. xvi.11; Lk. xxiv. 5, 23;
Acts i. 8; xxv. 19; Ro. vi. 10; 2 Co. xiii. 4; opp. to
vexpds, Rev. i. 18; ii. 8; @joev came to life, lived again,
Ro. xiv. 9 GL TTrWH (opp. to amé6ave); Rev. xiii.
14; xx.4,5 [Rec. dvé¢.], Cizek. xxxvil. 9 sq.; on the
aorist as marking entrance upon a state see BaciWevo,
fin.) ; Gjv ék vexpay, trop. out of moral death to enter
upon a new life, dedicated and acceptable to God, Ro. vi.
13; [similarly in Lk. xv.32T Tr WH]. i. q. not to be
mortal, Heb. vii. 8 (where avOpamro amobynckovtes dying
men i. e. whose lot it is to die, are opp. to 6 (6v). a
emphatically, and in the Messianic sense, to enjoy real
life, i.e. to have true life and worthy of the name,—active,
blessed, endless in the kingdom of God (or €a7 ai@vos; see
Con, 2b )e Ukex. 28 Jie Va 2D sexy 20s Onde Ld) avilits
13; xiv. 9[(?) see above]; Gal. iii. 12; Heb. xii. 9; with
the addition of ék ricrews, Heb. x. 38; of eis rév aidva, Jn.
vi. 51, 58; odv Xpior@, in Christ’s society, 1 Th. v. 10;
this life in its absolute fulness Christ enjoys, who owes it
to God; hence he says (@ dvd rv marépa, Jn. vi. 57; by
the gift and power of Christ it is shared in by th faith-
ful, who accordingly are said (yoew St adréy, In. Vi. 57;
6’ avrod, 1Jn.iv. 9. with a dat. denoting the respect,
mvevpart, 1 Pet. iv.6; dvoua éxers bre Chs Kal vexpos ef, thou
art said to have life (i.e. vigorous spiritual life bringing
forth good fruit) and (yet) thou art dead (ethically),
Rey. iii. 1. In the O. T. ¢jv denotes to live most happily
in the enjoyment of the theocratic blessings: Lev. xviii. 5;
IDewiiiné 8 Satie le Secs TG. 3. to live i. e. pass life,
of the manner of living and acting; of morals or char-
th)
>\ c
€av Oo
270
Sedryos
acter: pera dvdpds with acc. of time, of a married woman,
Lk. ii. 36; yepis vopov, without recognition of the law,
Ro. vii. 9; Bapicaios, Acts xxvi. 5; also ev kdope@, Col. ii.
20; with éy and a dat. indicating the act or state of the
soul: év miore, Gal. ii. 20; ev rH duapria, to devote life
to sin, Ro. vi. 2; with adverbs expressing the manner:
cevoeBas, 2 Tim. ili. 12; Tit. ii. 12; do@ras, Lk. xy. 13;
eOuixos, Gal. ii. 14; ddikws, Sap. xiv. 28; Gyv tun (dat.
of pers., a phrase com. in Grk. auth. also, in Lat. vivere
alicui; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 176 sqq.), to
devote, consecrate, life to one; so to live that life results
in benefit to some one or to his cause: rp Oe, Lk. xx.
38; Ro. vi. 10 sq.; Gal. ii. 19, (4 Mace. xvi. 25); ro
XpiorG, 2 Co. v. 15; that man is said éavro ¢jv who
makes his own will his law, is his own master, Ro. xiv.
7; 2Co.v.15; w. dat. of the thing to which life is de-
voted: 77 ducacoovvy, 1 Pet. ii. 24; mvevpari, to be actu-
ated by the Spirit, Gal. v. 25; xara odpxa, as the flesh
dictates, Ro. viii. 12 sq.
II. Metaph. of inanimate things ;
ov (Gen. xxvi. 14; Lev. xiv. 5; ete.), living water, i. c.
bubbling up, gushing forth, flowing, with the suggested
idea of refreshment and salubrity (opp. to the water of
cisterns and pools, [cf. our spring water ]), is figuratively
used of the spirit and truth of God as satisfying the
needs and desires of the soul: Jn. iv. 10 sq.; vii. 38:
emt (aoas myas vddrov, Rev. vii. 17 Ree. b. having
vital power in itself and exerting the same upon the soul :
edmis (doa, 1 Pet. i. 3; Adyos Geod, 1 Pet.i. 23; Heb. iv.
12; Noyea sc. rod Geod, Acts vil. 38, cf. Deut. xxxii. 47;
680s (éca, Heb. x. 20 (this phrase describing that char-
acteristic of divine grace, in granting the pardon of sin
and fellowship with God, which likens it to a way lead-
ing to the heavenly sanctuary). In the same manner the
predicate 6 ¢@y is applied to those things to which
persons are compared who possess real life (see I. 2
above), in the expressions AiGor Cdvres, 1 Pet. ii. 4; 6
apres 6 fav (see apros, fin.), Jn. vi. 51; Ovoia (dca
(tacitly opp. to slain victims), Ro. xii.1. [Comp.:
ov-Cao. |
CBevvupr, see oBevvupe and s. v. 3, a, ¢
ZePedaios, -ov, 6, Zebedee, (3t for “31 [i. e. my gift],
a form of the prop. name which occurs a few times in
the O. T., as 1 Chr. xxvii. 27 (Sept. Za88i), munificent,
[others for m2; gift of Jehovah]; fr. 121 to give), a
Jew, by occupation a fisherman, husband of Salome, fa-
ther of the apostles James and John: Mt. iv. 21; x. 2
(3); xx. 20; xxvi. 37; xxvii. 56; Mk.i. 19 sq.; iii. 17; xt
85; Lk. v. 10; Js Xk. 2a
feords, -n, -dv, (Céw), boiling hot, hot, [Strab., App.,
Diog. Laért., al.]; metaph. of fervor of mind and zeal:
Rev. iii. 15 sq.*
fedyos, -eos (-ous), TO, (Cevyryps to join, yoke),
draught-catile (horses or oxen or mules) yoked together,
a pair or yoke of beasts: Lk. xiv. 19 (9X, 1 Kings xix.
19, ete.; often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 18, 543 down).
2. univ. a pair: Lk. ii. 24 (Hdt. 3, 130; Aeschyl. Ag.
44; Xen. oec. 7, 18, and often in Grk. writ.).*
a. vOop Cav, D 1D
>
ava-,
CeveTnpla
fevxtnpia, -as, 4, (fr. the adj. Cevxrjpuos, fit for joining
or binding together), a band, fastening: Acts xxvii. 40.
_Found nowhere else.*
Zedbs, [but gen. Ards, (dat. Ari), ace. Ala (or Alav), (fr.
old nom. Ais), Zeus, corresponding to Lat. Jupiter (A.
V.): Acts xiv. 12 (see Ais); 6 iepeds Tod Atos Tod dvros
mpo Ths médeas, the priest of Zeus whose temple was be-
fore the city, ibid. 13 (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. See Ais.*
téw; to boil with heat, be hot; often in Grk. writ.; thus
of water, Hom. I. 18, 349; 21, 362 (365); metaph.
used of ‘boiling’ anger, love, zeal for what is good or
bad, ete. (Tragg., Plat., Plut., al.) ; ¢éov (on this uncon-
tracted form cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. for his School Gram.
(Robinson’s trans.)] § 105 N. 2, i. p. 481; Matthiae i.
p- 151; [Hadley § 371 b.]}) 76 mvedpars, fervent in spirit,
said of zeal for what is good, Acts xviii. 25; Ro. xii. 11;
ef. esp. Rickert and Fritzsche on Ro. 1. c.*
(mrbo; i. g. (pro, q. V-; 1. to envy, be jealous:
Simplicius in Epict. c. 26 p. 131 ed. Salmas. [c. 19, 2 p.
56, 34 Didot] oddels rév 7 ayabdy 76 avOpamwwov (nroivtav
Phbovet 7) Cyrever Tore. 2. in a good sense, to imitate
emulously, strive afier: €pya apetns, ov ddéyous, Democr.
ap. Stob. flor. app. 14, 7, iv. 384 ed. Gaisf.; intrans. to
be full of zeal for good, be zealous: Rev. iii.19 LT Tr
txt. WH, for Rec. (jrdwoor [cf. WH. App. p. 171].*
Laos, -ov, 6, and (in Phil. iii. 6 L T Tr WH; [2 Co.
ix. 2 T Tr WH ]) 76 Gros (Ignat. ad Trali. 4; da Gros,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 4, 8 [‘‘in Clem. Rom. §§ 3, 4, 5, 6 the
masc. and neut. seem to be interchanged without any
law ” (Lghtit.). For facts see esp. Clem. Rom. ed. 2
Hilgenfeld (1876) p.7; cf. WH. App. p. 158; W.§9, N.
2; B. 23 (20)]; (fr. ¢é@ [Curtius § 567; Vanicek p.
757]); Sept. for TSI 5 excitement of mind, ardor, fervor
of spirit ; 1. zeal, ardor in embracing, pursuing, de-
fending anything: 2 Co. vii. 11; 1x.2; kara (dos, as re-
spects zeal (in maintaining religion), Phil. iii. 6; with
gen. of the obj., zeal in behalf of, for a pers. or thing,
aneiteleirs ese Levit (xix) 10s) Rox. 2, Mace. ii.
58; Soph. O. C. 943); trép revos, gen. of pers., 2 Co.
vii. 7; Col. iv. 13 Rec. with subject. gen. (jr@ Geod,
with a jealousy such as God has, hence most pure and
solicitous for their salvation, 2 Co. xi. 2; the fierceness
of indignation, punitive zeal, mupds (of penal fire, which
is personified [see mip, fin.]), Heb. x. 27 (Is. xxvi. 11;
Sap. v. 18). 2. an envious and contentious rivalry,
jealousy: Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Co. iii. 3; Jas. iii. 14, 16; emAn-
abnoav (prov, Acts v. 17; xiii. 45; plur. (doe, now the
stirrings or motions of (jAos, now its outbursts and man-
ifestations: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20; but in both pass.
L T Tr (WH, yet in Gal. 1. c. WH only in txt.] have
adopted Cidos (CiAol re kai POdvor, Plat. lege. 3 p. 679 c.).
[On the distinction between (jA0s (which may be used
in a good sense) and $édvos (used only in a bad sense)
ef. Trench, Syn. § xxvi.; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 11,
1 (80d Kat emcecxés €or 6 (ndos Kai emekav, TO Se POoveiy
Padrov Kai pavdAwy). |*
{mdéo, -d; 1 aor. €(yhooa; pres. pass. inf. (nrodaba ;
(Gros, q. v-) ; Sept. for RIP; to burn with zeal; als
271
Enpia
absol. to be heated or to boil [A.V. to be moved] with envy,
hatred, anger : Acts vii. 9; xvii. 5 (where Grsb. om
(yddo.); 1 Co. xiii. 4; Jas. iv. 2; in a good sense, to be
zealous in the pursuit of good, Rev. iii. 19 RG Trmrg.
(the aor. ¢jAwoov marks the entrance into the mental
state, see Baowdevo, fin.; é(mroce, he was seized with
indignation, 1 Mace. ii. 24). 2. trans.; ri, to desire
earnestly, pursue: 1 Co. xii. 813; xiv. 1, 39, (Sir. li. 18;
Thue. 2, 37; Eur. Hec. 255; Dem. 500, 2; al.); yaddov
dé, sc. (doe, foll. by iva, 1 Co. xiv. 1 [B. 237 (205); ef.
W..577 (537)]. rwd, a. to desire one earnestly, to strive
after, busy one’s self about him : to exert one’s self for one
{that he may not be torn from me), 2Co. xi. 2; to seek
to draw over to one’s side, Gal. iv. 17 [ef. tva, IL. 1 d.J;
to court one’s good will and favor, Prov. xxiii. 17; xxiv.
1; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 1; so in the pass. to be the object
of the zeal of others, to be zealously sought after: Gal. iv.
18 [here Tr mrg. (prove, but cf. WH. Intr. § 404].
b. to envy one: Gen. xxvi. 14; xxx.1; xxxvii.11; Hes.
opp. 310; Hom. Cer. 168, 223; and in the same sense,
acc. to some interpp., in Acts vil. 9; but there is no
objection to considering (j\wcavtes here as used absol.
(see 1 above [so A.V. (not R.V.)]) and rov loon as
depending on the verb dmédovro alone. [Come.: mapa-
(6a. }*
{ndoris, -ov, 6, ((yAd@), one burning with zeal; a zealot;
1. absol., for the Hebr. Sap, used of God as jealous of
any rival and sternly vindicating his control: Ex. xx.
5; Deut. iv. 24, ete. From the time of the Maccabees
there existed among the Jews a class of men, called
Zealots, who rigorously adhered to the Mosaic law and
endeavored even by a resort to violence, after the ex.
ample of Phinehas (Num. xxv. 11, (ylerns buds 4 Mace.
xviii. 12), to prevent religion from being violated by
others; but in the latter days of the Jewish common:
wealth they used their holy zeal as a pretext for the basest
crimes, Joseph. b. j. 4,3,9; 4,5,1; 4,6,3; 7,8,1. To
this class perhaps Simon the apostle had belonged, and
hence got the surname 6 (jA@rns: Lk. vi. 15; Actsi. 13 ;
[cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch., Index s. v. Zeloten;
Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 237 sqq.]. 2. with”
gen. of the obj.: w. gen. of the thing, most eagerly desirous:
of, zealous for, athing; a. to acquire a thing, [zealous
of | (see (rAd, 2): 1 Co. xiv. 12; Tit. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iii.
13 L T Tr WH, (dperqs, Philo, praem. et poen. § 2; trys
evoeBelas, de monarch. |. i. § 3; evoeBelas x. Sukatocvrns,
de poenit. $1; rév modepxov epywv, Diod. 1, 73; epi
TeV dynKkdvray eis cwTnpiay, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45,1). b.
to defend and uphold a thing, vehemently contend-
ing for a thing, [zealous for]: véuov, Acts xxi. 20 (2
Mace. iv. 2); tov matpixov mapaddcewy, Gal. i. 14 (roy
alyuntiakév mhacpdrey, Philo, vit. Moys. ill. $19; rhs
dpxatas K. coppovos aywyjs, Diod. excerpt. p. 611 [fr. 1.
37, vol. ii. 564 Didot]) ; w. gen. of pers.: @eov, intent on
protecting the majesty and authority of God by contend-
ing for the Mosaic law, Acts xxii. 3. (In prof. auth.
also an emulator, admirer, imitator, follower of any one.)*
tnpla, -as, 7, damage, loss, [Soph., Hdt. down]: Act
Cn pow
xxvii. 10, 215 nyeioda (npiav (Xen. mem. 2, 4, 3 ; Twd,
ace. of pers., 2, 3, 2), ri, to regard a thing as a loss : Phil.
iii. 7 (opp. to xépdos), 8.*
tnpide, -@: (Cnuia), to affect with damage, do damage
to: twa ([Thue.], Xen., Plat.) ; in the N. T. only in
Pass., fut. CyuioOncopar ([ Xen. mem. 3, 9, 12, al. ; but “as
often”] in prof. auth. [fut. mid.] (npidcopae in pass.
sense; cf. Kriiger § 39, 11 Anm.; Kiuhner on Xen.
mem. u.s.; [L. and S.s.v.; Veitch s. v.]); 1 aor. e¢npiw-
nv; absol. to sustain damage, to receive injury, suffer loss :
1 Co. iii. 15; & rum & Twos, in a thing from one, 2 Co.
vii. 9; with acc. of the thing: (one from whom another
is taken away [as a penalty] by death, is said rhv yuxny
rivos Cnuovcbat, Hdt. 7, 39), trav Wuxyy adrod, to forfeit
his life, i.e. acc. to the context, eternal life, Mt. xvi. 26 ;
Mk. viii. 36, for which Luke, in ix. 25, €aurov i. e. him-
self, by being shut out from the everlasting kingdom of
God. sdvra étnuidbny, reflexive [yet see Meyer], I for-
feited, gave up all things, I decided to suffer the loss of
all these [(?)] things, Phil. iii. 8.*
Znvas (cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15; W.§ 16 N. 1], -av,
[B. 20 (18)], 6, Zenas, at first a teacher of the Jewish
law, afterwards a Christian: Tit. iii. 13. [B.D. s. v.]*
tnréw, -6; impf. 3 pers. sing. é{nret, plur. e¢jrovy; fut.
(nrncw; 1 aor. éfyrnca; Pass., pres. (nrovpac; impf. 3
pers. sing. é(nreiro (Heb. viii. 7); 1 fut. CyrnOnoopat
(Lk. xii. 48); [fr. Hom. on]; Sept. for w73, and much
oftener for wp3; to seek, i. e. 1. to seek in order to
find ; a. univ. and absol. : Mt. vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq.
(see etpiokw, 1a.); rid, Mk.i. 37; Lk. ii. [45 R Lmrg.], 48;
[iv. 42 Rec.]; Jn. vi. 24; xviii. 4,7; Acts x. 19, and
often; foll. by év w. dat. of place, Acts ix. 11; w. acc. of
the thing (wapyapiras), of buyers, Mt. xiii. 45; something
lost, Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. xix. 10; 71 év rim, as fruit on a
tree, Lk. xiii. 6 sq.; dvdmavow, a place of rest, Mt. xii.
43; Lk. xi. 24; after the Hebr. (“5 waj-ny wpa [cf.
W. 33 (32); 18]) uyny twos, to seek, plot against, the
life of one, Mt. ii. 20; Ro. xi. 3, (Ex. iv. 19, etc.); univ.
ri Cyreis; what dost thou seek? what dost thou wish?
Jn. i. 38 (39); [iv. 27]. b. to seek [i. e. in order to find
out] by thinking, meditating, reasoning; to inquire into:
mept Tivos (nreire per GAAnAwv; Jn. xvi. 19; foll. by indi-
rect disc., m@s, ti, riva: Mk. xi. 18; xiv. 1, 11; Lk. xii.
29; xxii. 2; 1 Pet.v.8; rdv Gedy, to follow up the traces
of divine majesty and power, Acts xvii. 27 (univ. to seek
the knowledge of God, Sap. i. 1; xiii. 6; [Philo,monarch.
1.§5]). oc. to seek after, seek for, aim at, strive after:
evxatpiav, Mt. xxvi. 16; Lk. xxii. 6; Yevdouaprupiav, Mt.
xxvi. 59; Mk. xiv. 55; rév Odvarov, an opportunity to die,
Rey. ix. 6; Avow, 1 Co. vii. 27; rv Baowd. rov Oeod, Mt.
vi. 33; Lk. xii. 313 ra dvo, Col. iii. 1; efpnynv, 1 Pet. iii.
11; dfpOapciay etc. Ro. ii. 7; dav ek ruvos, 1 Th. ii. 6; thy
Oofav rHv mapa twos, Jn. v. 44; rd twos, the property of
one, 2 Co. xii. 14; rv doéav Geod, to seek to promote the
glory of God, Jn. vii. 18; viii. 50; 7d OcAnud rwos, to at-
tempt to establish, Jn. v. 30; 7d adpuqdopov twos, to seek
to further the profit or advantage of one, 1 Co. x. 33, i. q.
(nteiv ra twos, ib. x. 24; xiii.5; Phil. ii. 21; tas, to seek
272
furyos
to win your souls, 2 Co. xii. 14; rév Oeov, to seek the favor
of God (see éx(nréw, a.), Ro. x. 20; iii. 11 Tr mrg. WH
mrg.]. foll. by inf. [B. 258 (222); W. § 44, 3] to seeki.e.
desire, endeavor: Mt. xii. 46, [47 (WH in mrg. only) ];
xxi.46; Mk. [vi.19 LTrmrg.]; xii. 12; Lk. v. 18; vi.19;
ix.9; Jn. v.18; vii. 4[B. § 142, 4], 19 sq.; Acts xiii. 8:
xvi. 10; Ro. x. 3; Gal. i. 10; ii. 17; foll. by iva [B. 237
(205) ], 1 Co. xiv. 12. 2. to seck i. e. require, demand:
[onuetov, Mk. viii. 12 L T Tr WH; Lk. xi. 29 T Tr WH];
copiav, 1 Co. i. 22; Soxuny, 2 Co. xiii. 3; rt mapa tevos,
to crave, demand something from some one, Mk. viii.
11; Lk. xi. 16; xii. 48; év run, dat. of pers., to seek in
one i. e. to require of him, foll. by ta, 1 Co. iv. 2.
[Comp.: dva-, ék-, émt-, ov-(nrew. |
{Arnp4, -rTos, 70, (€ntéw), a question, debate: Acts xv. 2;
Xxvi. 3; vouov, about the law, Acts xxiii. 29; mepi twos,
Acts xviii. 15; xxv. 19. [From Soph. down.] *
thTno1s, -ews, 7, ((yTéw); a. a seeking: [ Hdt.], Thue.
8,57; al. b. inquiry (Germ. die Frage): epi twos, Acts
xxv.20. c. @ questioning, debate: Acts xv. 2 (for Rec.
ovgntnots); 7T Trtxt. WH; mepi revos, Jn. iii. 25. de
a subject of questioning or debate, matter of controversy:
1, Tim: 144 1) Gaby siivi. 48 Oe Bin: 11023 em Rites 9
{iLdviov, -ov, ro, (doubtless a word of Semitic origin;
< oo
Arab. ws); Syr. Ly] [see Schaaf, Lex. s. v. p. 148],
Talmud ri or}; Suid. (ifawov- 4 €v 7@ cir aipa),
zizanium, [A. V. tares], a kind of darnel, bastard wheat
[but see reff. below], resembling wheat except that the
grains are black: Mt. xiii. 25-27, 29 sq. 36, 38, 40.
(Geop. [for reff. see B. D. Am. ed. p. 3177 note]). Cf.
Win. RWB. s. v. Lolch; Furrer in Schenkel B. L. iv. 57;
[B.D., and Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, s. v. Tares].*
Zpipva, so Tdf. in Rev. i. 11, etc., for Suvpva, q. v.
ZopoBaPer, in Joseph. ZopoBdBnros, -ov, 6, (093M, i e
either for 93217 dispersed in Babylonia, or for 533 py
begotten in Babylonia), Zerubbabel, Vulg. Zorobabel, a
descendant of David, the leader of the first colony of the
Jews on their return from the Babylonian exile: Mt. i.
L2sq.s ak. ii 27%
tddos, -ov, 6, (akin to yvddos, dvddos, védos, kvédas, see
Bitm. Lexil. ii. p. 266 [Fishlake’s trans. p. 378]; cf. Cur-
tius p. 706), darkness, blackness: Heb. xii. 18 L T Tr
WH; as in Hom. I]. 15,191; 21,56, etc., used of the dark-
ness of the nether world (cf. Grimm on Sap. xvii. 14),
2 Pet. ii. 4; Jude 6; (dos rod oxdrous (cf. NX wn,
Ex. x. 22), the blackness of (i.e. the densest) darkness,
2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. (Cf. Trench § c.]*
tvyés, -od, 6, for which in Grk. writ. before Polyb. 6
(vydv was more com., (fr. Cedyvupe) 3 1. a yoke; a,
prop. such as is put on draught-cattle. b. metaph.
used of any burden or bondage: as that of slavery, 1
Tim. vi. 1 (Lev. xxvi. 13), dovdefas, Gal. v. 1 (Soph. Aj.
944; dovdociwns, Dem. 322, 12); of troublesome laws
imposed on one, esp. of the Mosaic law, Acts xv. 103;
Gal. v. 1; hence the name is so transferred 0 the com:
mands of Christ as to contrast them with the commands
of the Pharisees which were a veritable ‘yoke’; yet
601)
even Christ’s commands must be submitted to, though
easier to be kept : Mt. xi. 29 sq. (less aptly in Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 16, 17 Christians are called of imd roy Cvydv ris
xaptros eAOdvres [cf. Harnack ad loc.]). 2. a balance,
pair of scales: Rev. vi. 5 (as in Is. xl. 12; Lev. xix. 36;
Plat. rep. 8, 550 e.; Ael. v. h. 10, 6; al.j.*
top, -ns, 7, (Cé [but cf. Curtius p. 626 sq.; Vanitek,
p- 760]), leaven: Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21, (Ex. xii. 15;
Lev. ii. 11; Deut. xvi. 3, ete.; Aristot. gen. an. 3, 4; Jo-
seph. antt. 3, 10, 6; Plut. mor. p. 289 sq. [quaest. Rom.
109]); rod dprov, Mt. xvi. 12; metaph. of inveterate
mental and moral corruption, 1 Co. v. [7], 8, (Ignat. ad
Magnes. 10); viewed in its tendency to infect others,
pn tdv Papicaioy: Mt. xvi. 6,11; Mk. viii. 15; Lk. xii.
1, which fig. Mt. xvi. 12 explains of the teaching
of the Phar., Lk. l.c. more correctly [definitely ?] of their
hypocrisy. It is applied to that which, though small
in quantity, yet by its influence thoroughly pervades a
thing: either in a good sense, as in the parable Mt. xiii.
33; Lk. xiii. 21, (see (uyow); or in a bad sense, of a per-
nicious influence, as in the proverb puxpa (vun ddov 7d
pvpapa (upoi a little leaven leaveneth the whole lump,
which is used variously, acc. to the various things to which
it is applied, viz. a single sin corrupts a whole church,
1 Co. v. 6; a slight inclination to error (respecting the
necessity of circumcision) easily perverts the whole con-
ception of faith, Gal. v. 9; but many interpp. explain
the passage ‘even a few false teachers lead the whole
church into error.’ *
{upde, -d; 1 aor. pass. eCupwdny; (Coun) ; to leaven (to
mix leaven with dough so as to make it ferment) : 1 Co.
v. 6; Gal. v. 9, (on which pass. see (iy); gos eCupabn
dAov, sc. Td devpov, words which refer to the saving
power of the gospel, which from a small beginning will
gradually pervade and transform the whole human race:
Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21. (Sept., Hipp., Athen., Plut.) *
{wypéw, -6; pf. pass. ptcp. ée{aypnyuevos; (Cwds alive,
and dypew [poet. form of dypeva, q. v-]) ; 1. to take
alive (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., Xen., al.; Sept.). 2. univ.
to take, catch, capture: éCwypnpévot tm avrod (i.e. Tov da-
Bodov) eis Td éxeivov OeAnpa, if they are held captive to
do his will, 2 Tim. ii. 26 [al. make e¢. in’ avr. paren-
thetic and refer éexeivov to God; see éxeivos, 1 c.; cf. Ellic.
in loc.]; avOpamous éon Cwypaev, thou shalt catch men,
i. e. by teaching thou shalt win their souls for the king-
dom of God, Lk. v. 10.*
tof, -7s, 7, (fr. (dw, (@), Sept. chiefly for on; life;
1. univ. life, i. e. the state of one who ts possessed of vital-
ity or is animate: 1 Pet. iii. 10 (on which see ayardo) ;
Heb. vii. 3,16; adrds (6 beds) Sidods wacw Cwny x. mvony,
Acts xvii. 25; mvetpa Cons ex rod Oeov, the vital spirit,
the breath of (i. e. imparting) life, Rev. xi. 11 (Ezek.
Xxxvil. 5); maca Woux7 Cons, gen. of possess., every living
soul, Rev. xvi. 3 GLT Tr txt. WH; spoken of earthly
life: 4 Con twos, Lk. xii. 15; Acts viii. 33 (see atpo, 3 h.);
Jas. iv. 14; év 77 Cw cov, whilst thou wast living on
earth, Lk. xvi. 25 (ev 77 (wi adrov, Sir. xxx. 5; 1.1); ev
th Can ravtyn, 1 Co. xv. 19; macat ai nucpac ras (wns Twos,
273
San
Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. iii. 14; Ps. exxvii. (exxviii.) 5; Sir.
xxli.12(10)). éemayyeAla (wis ris viv x. THs peAAovons, a
promise looking to the present and the future life, 1 Tim.
iv.8; {wy and @dvaros are contrasted in Ro. viii. 38;
1 Co. iii. 22; Phil. i. 20; of a life preserved in the midst
of perils, with a suggestion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 12 (the
life of Paul is meant here, which exerts a saving power
on the Corinthians by his discharge of his apostolic
duties) ; of the life of persons raised from the dead: éy
kawdrnre (wns, figuratively spoken of a new mode of life,
dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 4; of the life of Jesus after his
resurrection, Acts ii. 28; Ro. v.10; of the same, with
the added notion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 10 sq. 2. used
emphatically, a. of the absolute fulness of life, both
essential and ethical, which belongs to God, and through
him both to the hypostatic \ éyos and to Christ in whom the
Adyos put on human nature: dozep 6 marnp exer Cwny év
€avT@, ovtas Edaxev kai TO vid Cony exew ev EauTe, In. v.
26; ev avT@ (SC. TO Ady@) Con AY Kal 7) Cor hv TO Pos Tov
avOp@rev, in him life was (comprehended), and the life
(transfused from the Logos into created natures) was the
light (i. e. the intelligence) of men (because the life of
men is self-conscious, and thus a fountain of intelligence
springs up), Jn.i.4; 6 Adyos ris Cons, the Logos having
life in itself and communicating it to others, 1 Jn.i.1; 7
(or) eavepoOn, was manifested in Christ, clothed in flesh,
ibid. 2. From this divine fountain of life flows forth
that life which is next to be defined: viz. b. life real
and genuine, “ vita quae sola vita nominanda” (Cic. de
sen. 21, 77), a life active and vigorous, devoted to God,
blessed, the portion even in this world of those who put their
trust in Christ, but after the resurrection to be consummated
by new accessions (among them a more perfect body), and
to last forever (the writers of the O. T. have anticipated
the conception, in their way, by employing 0M to de-
note a happy life and every kind of blessing: Deut. xxx.
15,19; Mal. ii.5; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Prov. viii. 35;
xii. 28, etc.): Jn. vi. 51, 63; xiv. 6; Ro. vii. 10; viii. 6,
10; 2 Co. ii. 16; Phil. ii. 16; [Col. iii. 4]; 2 Pet. i. 3;
1 Jn. v. 11, 16, 20; with the addition of rod Geov, sup-
plied by God [W. 186 (175)], Eph. iv. 18; 9 év Xpiorg@,
to be obtained in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1;
peraBeBnxévar x Tov Oavdrov eis Cwnv, Jn. v. 24; 1 In. ili.
14; dweoOat tiv Conv, Jn. ili. 365 exe Conv, Jn. v. 40;
x. 10; 1Jn. v.12; with év éavr@ (or -rois) added, Jn. v.
26; [vi. 53]; Sddvar, In. vi. 33; yapes Cams, the grace of
God evident in the life obtained, 1 Pet. iii. 7; 7d mvevpa
ris Cons év XpiotS "Inaod, the Spirit, the repository and
imparter of life, and which is received by those united
to Christ, Ro. viii. 2; 6 dpros tis Cwas (see apros, fin.),
In. vi. 35,48; 7rd has ris ¢. the light illumined by which
one arrives at life, Jn. viii. 12. more fully (w7 alomos
and 4 (w1) 4 aldmos [ (cf. B. 90 (79)); see below]: Jn. iv.
36; [xii 50]; xvii. 3; 1 Jn. i. 25 ii. 255 [prpara Cais
aiwv. Jn. vi. 68]; eis Cony ai. unto the attainment of eter-
nal life [ef. eis, B. II. 3 c. 8. p. 185%], Jn. iv. 14; vi. 27;
Siddvar Cony ai., In. x. 28; xvii. 2; 1 Jn. v.11; eyew Conv
ai., Jn. iii. 15, [and 16], (opp. to amdéAAvaGar), 36; v. 24,
Seon
39; vi. 40, 47,54; xx.81Lbr.; 1Jn.v.13; ov« eye
Coty ai. év éavtd, 1 Jn. iii. 15; (in Enoch xv. 4, 6 the
wicked angels are said before their fall to have been
spiritual and partakers of eternal and immortal life). (aq
and 4 Con, without epithet, are used of the blessing of
real life after the resurrection, in Mt. vii. 14; Jn.
xi. 25; Acts iii. 15; v. 20; xi. 18; Ro. v.17, 18 (on
which see Sccaiwors, fin.); 2 Co. v.4; Col. iii. 3; 2 Tim.
i. 10; Tit. i. 2; iii. 7; Con éx vexpar, life breaking forth
from the abode of the dead, Ro. xi. 15; eiaedAOety eis
tr. Conv, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; xix. 17; Mk. ix. 43,45; ava-
oracs Cons i. q. els Conv (2 Mace. vii. 14), Jn. v. 29 (on
the gen. ef. W. 188 (177)); orépavos ris Cons ig. Can
és orépavos, Jas. i. 12; Rev. ii. 10; Evdov 771s Cons, the
tree whose fruit gives and maintains eternal life, Rev.
ii. 7; xxii. 2, 14,19 [G LT Tr WH], (cf. Gen. ii. 9;
Prov. iii. 18; S€vdpov Cwas, Prov. xi. 30; xiii. 12); cf.
Bleek, Vorless. iib. d. Apokalypse, p. 174 sq.; dap Cans,
water the use of which serves to maintain eternal life,
Rev. xxi. 6; xxii. 1,17; in the same sense (ays mnyai
bddrev, Rev. vii. 17 GLT Tr WH; 7 BiBdos and 76 Bi-
Brlov ras CwAs, the book in which the names of those are
recorded to whom eternal life has been decreed: Phil.
Ihe BS IRAG ih HS Seb 5 one IE sox, URIS som 27 e
[xxil. 19 Ree.; cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. 1.c.]. more fully
7 Ovtws [Ree. aioyv.| Con, 1 Tim. vi. 19; (a atomos [ef.
above] (Justin. de resurr. 1 p. 588 ¢. 6 Adyos . . . dudovs
pty ev €auT@ THY €K VEKP@Y avaoTagW Kal THY peTa TavTA
Conv aiovnov), Mt. xxv. 46 (opp. to kdédaats aiwy.); Acts
xili. 46, 48; Ro. ii. 7; vi. 22 sq.; Gal. vi. 8; 1 Tim. vi.
12; after ev ro aid TO epxopevo, Mk. x. 30; LK. xviii.
30; eyew Cony ai. Mt. xix. 16; xAnpovopety, Mt. xix. 29 ;
Mk. x.17; Lk. x. 25; xviii. 18; els Cwiv ai@uov, unto the
attainment of life eternal, Jn. xii. 25; Ro. v.21; 1 Tim.
1.16; Jude 21, (Dan. xii. 2; 4 Mace. xv. 2; deévvaos Can,
2 Mace. vii. 36; didvos Con, Ignat. ad Eph.19). Cf. Adst-
lin, Lehrbegriff des Ev. Johann. ete. pp. 234 sqq. 338
sqq-; fteuss, Johann. Theologie (in Beitraige zu d. theol.
Wissenschaften, vol. i.) p. 76 sqq. [ef. his Hist. de la
Théol. Chrét. bk. vii. ch. xiv.]; Lipsius, Paulin. Recht-
fertigungslehre, pp. 152 sqq. 185 sq.; Giiider in Herzog
vili. 254 (ed. 2, 509) sqq.; B. B. Briickner, De notione
vocis (on in N. T. Lips. 1858; Huther, d. Bedeut. d. Be-
griffe (a7 u. merrevew im N. T., in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. 1872, p.1sqq. [For the relations of the term to
heathen conceptions cf. G. Teichmiiller, Aristot. Forsch.
lil. p. 127 sqq.] Some, as Bretschneider, Wahl, Wilke,
esp. Kauffer (in his book De biblica (ws alwviou notione.
Dresd. 1838), maintain that (a) aiavos everywhere even
in John’s writings refers to life after the resurrection; but
in this way they are compelled not only to assume a
prophetic use of the perf. in the saying éx rod Oavdrov
petaBeBnkevar eis Tt. Cwnv (Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14), but
also to interpret the common phrase yer (wiv ai. as
meaning he has eternal life as his certain portion though
274
Swotrovéw
as yet only in hope, as well as to explain (ony ai. odk
éyew év éauvt@ pévovoay (1 Jn. iii. 15) of the hope of
eternal life. [SyN. see Bios, fin.]*
tavn, -ns, 7, (Covvupt), [fr. Hom. down], a girdle, belt,
serving not only to gird on flowing garments, Mt. iii. 4;
Mk.i.6; Acts xxi. 11; Rev.i.13; xv.6; but also, since
it was hollow, to carry money in [A. V. purse]: Mt. x.
9; Mk. vi. 8; Plut. mor. p. 665 b. quaest. conviv. iv. 2,
3, 2; “argentum in zonis habentes,” Liv. 33, 29. [B. D.
s. v. Girdle. |*
{ovvups and Cwvviw: impf. 2 pers. sing. éCavvves; fut.
(oow; 1 aor. mid. impv. (aoa; to gird: twa, Jn. xxi.
18; Mid. to gird one’s self: Acts xii. 8 LT Tr WH.
(Ex. xxix. 9; Hom. et al.) [Comp.: dva-, dca-, repe-,
umo-Covyupe. | *
twoyovew, -@; fut. (woyovyow; pres. inf. pass. Cwoyovet-
cba; (fr. fwoydvos viviparous, and this fr. ¢wds and
TENQ) ; 1. prop. to bring forth alive (Theophr.,
Diod., Leian., Plut., al.). 2. to give life (Theophr. de
caus. pl. 4,15,4; Ath. 7 p. 298 c¢.): ra mavra, of God, 1
Dime, 13) Lae WEG Sia.) 3. in the Bible
to preserve alive: tiv Woxnv, Lk. xvii. 33; pass. Acts vil.
19. (For my, Ex.i.17; Judg. viii. 19; [1 S. xxvii. 9,
11:1 K. xxi. (x) 311.) *
téov [or (gov (so L WH uniformly, Treg. in Heb. and
Rev.; see Etym. Magn. 413, 24, and reff. s. v. I, c)], -ov,
70, (Cwds alive) ; 1. a living being. 2. an animal,
brute, beast: Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 12; Jude 10; Rev.
iv. 6-9 [on vs. 8 cf. B. 130 (114) ], ete.
[Syn.: (@oy differs from @npiov (at least ety mologi-
cally; but cf. Schmidt as below) in giving prominence to
the vital element, while 67pfov emphasizes the bestial
element. Hence in Rev. as above ¢. is fitly rendered living
creature in contradistinction to the @npiov beast, cf. xi. 7; xiii.
1, etc. See Trench § lxxxi.; Schmidt ii. ch. 70.]
two-rovéw, -; fut. Cworojow; 1 aor. inf. Cwororqoar;
Pass., pres. Cworotodpar; 1 fut. fwomoimOjnocopar; 1 aor.
ptep. womombeis; (Cwomods making alive) ; 1. to
produce alive, beget or bear living young, (Aristot.,
Theophr.). 2. to cause to live, make alive, give life:
ta mavra, of God, 1 Tim. vi. 13 RG [ef. Neh. ix.6; 2K.
v. 7; Diogn. ep. 5 fin.]; by spiritual power to arouse and
invigorate, 2 Co. iii. 6; Gal. iii. 21; to give Coy aidmos
(in the Johannean sense), Jn. vi. 63; of the dead, to re-
animate, restore to life: 1 Co. xv. 453 tid, Jn. v. 21; Ro.
iv.17; vill. 11; pass. 1 Co. xv. 22; i. q. to give increase
of life: thus of physical life, rpaérov rd maidiov pédtre,
etra yadaktt Cworouetrat, Barn. ep. c. 6,173; of the spirit,
(worombels mvevpart, quickened as respects the spirit,
endued with new and greater powers-of life, 1 Pet. iii. 18,
on which ef. Lechler, Das apost. u. nachapost. Zeitalter,
p. 182 ed. 2; [Zezschwitz, De Christi ad inferos de-
scensu (Lips. 1857) p. 20]. metaph. (Geop. 9, 11, 7)
of seeds quickening into life, i. e. germinating, springing
up, growing: 1 Co, xv. 36. [Comp.: cu-Cworotéo.]*
275
H
>»
ey
4, a disjunctive conjunction [cf. W. § 53,6]. Used
1. to distinguish things or thoughts which either mu-
tually exclude each other, or one of which can take the
place of the other: or (Lat. aut, vel); a. to distin-
guish one thing from another in words of the same con-
struction: Mt. v. 17 (rdv vopoy 4 tovs mpodpyras), 36
(Aeukny 7) peAatvav); vi. 313 vil. 16; Mk. vi. 56; vii. 11
sq-; Lk. ii. 24; ix. 25; Ju. vii. 48; xiii. 29; Actsi.7;
14125 iv. 75 Rosii2hs itil +) 1.Co. iv. 830 v. 10'sqs3)x.
19; Gal. i. 10, ete. b. after an interrogative or a de-
clarative sentence, before a question designed to prove
the same thing in another way: Mt. vii. 4, 9; xii. 29;
Mavis, DO ERK VI WO Sva Vi Ks ye Os luke xa. Aexivesdl ¢ox Vs
8; Ro. ix. 21; xiv. 10; 1 Co. vi. 16. — c. before a sen-
tence contrary to the one just preceding, to indicate
that if one be denied or refuted the other must stand:
Mt. xx. 15 (i. e. or, if thou wilt not grant this, is thine eye
eles) He hosting Ome Ie Conbci6 x. 22.5 exi.014, [Reels oxiv.
36; 2 Co. xi. 7; # ayvoeire etc., Ro. vi. 33 vii. 1 (cf. vi.
14) ; 7) ov« oidare etc., Ro. xi. 23 1 Co. vi.9,16,19.
i... i, either... or, Mt. vi. 243 xii. 33; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts
Rady.) 20) sq.5e 1) Con xiv, 6. 2. in a disjunctive ques-
tion it corresponds to the Lat. an after utrum; a. pre-
ceded by wérepov, Jn. vii. 17; ef. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p.574
sq-; preceded by the interrog. pn, 1 Co. ix. 8; preceded
by pnt, 2 Co.i. 17. b. without an interrog. particle
in the first member of the interrogation: ri éore evxorra-
Tepov, eine... i) einetv, Mt. ix. 5; Mk. ii. 9; Lk. v. 23;
add, Mt. xxi. 25; xxiii. 17,19; xxvii. 17; Mk. iii.4; Lk.
Waly Ope Acts cVilieo4.. = Costpisl> «770 xg ke, xiii 135.
3. as a comparative conj., than; a. after compara-
tives; Mt. x. 15; xi. 22; Lk.ix.13; xvi. 17; Jn. iii. 19;
iv. 1 [Trmrg. om. WH br. 7]; Acts iv. 19; Ro. xiii. 11,
and often. # is wanting after m)eiovs foll. by a noun of
number: Mt. xxvi.53 T Tr WH; Actsiv. 22; xxiii. 13,
21; xxiv. 11 (where Ree. adds 7); cf. Matthiae § 455
nove 4; Kiihner ii. p. 847; [Jelf § 780 Obs. 1]; W. 595
(554) ; [B. 168 (146)]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 410 sq. b.
after érepov: Acts xvii.21. c. mpilv #, before that, before,
foll. by ace. with inf. [ef. B. § 139, 35; W. § 44, 6, also p.
297 (279)]: Mt.i.18; Mk. xiv. 30; Acts ii. 20 RGWH
mrg.; vii. 2; foll. by the aor. subjunc., k.cit-82 Ghar txt,
om. WH br. #; xxii. 34 RG [al. és]; foll. by pres. optat.
Acts xxv.16. d. after 6édq i. q. to prefer: 1 Co. xiv.
19 (foll. by #mep, 2 Mace. xiv. 42); exx. fr. Grk. auth. are
given in Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 589 sq. ; W...§ 35; 2ie.;;
(B. § 149, 7]; Kiihner ii. p. 841; [Jelf § 779 Obs. 3].
e. after od: Jn. xiii. 10 RG, where after od xpeiav exes
the sentence goes on as though the writer had said ov«
@Xov twos xpelav 2xet, [cf. W. 508 (473)]. f. after
HY eLov
positive notions, to which in this way a comparative
force is given: after kadov éore [it is good... rather
than] 1. q. it is better, Mt. xviii. 8 sq.; Mk. ix. 43, 45,47;
cf. Menander’s saying xaddv 76 ph Civ, i) Gv dOdias, and
Plaut. rud. 4, 4, 70 tacita mulier est bona semper, quam
loquens; similar exx. in the O. T. are Gen. xlix.12; Ps.
€xvii. (cxviii.) 8; Jon. iv. 3, 8; Tob. vi.13; xii. 8; Sir.
Xx. 25; xxil. 15; 4 Mace. ix. 1; also after Auocrendei [it
is gain... rather than] i. q. it is better (Tob. iii. 6), Lk.
xvii. 23 after xapa gorat | there will be joy... more than],
Lk. xv. 7; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bitm. Gram. § 149, 7;
[B. p. 360 (309)]; Winer, Kiihner, al., as above. 4,
with other particles; a. ad’ 7, see adda, I. 10 p. 28%.
b. 7) yap, see yap, I. fin. ec. 4 kal [cf. W. § 53, 6 note],
a. or even, or also, (Lat. aut etiam, vel etiam): [Mt. vii.
HO) ae ers WiE se ks xa (GD Seid 2i=sexcvani
11; Ro. ii. 15; 1 Co. xvi. 6; 2Co.i.13. 8B. or also (Lat.
an etiam), (in a disjunctive question): Lk. xii. 41; Ro.
iv. 9. d. Hep, than at all (Lat. quam forte; Germ.
als ctwa), after a compar. [cf. Jelf § 779 Obs. 5]: Jn. xii.
43 [L 7 wep, WH mrg. inep], (2 Mace. xiv. 42; Hom.,
Hes.). e. #rov... 7%, etther indeed [cf. Kithner § 540,
5]...or: Ro, vi. 16 (Sap. xi. 19; Hdt. and sqq.).
74 phy, assuredly, most certainly, full surely, (a particle
used in asseverations, promises, oaths [cf. W. $53, 7b.;
Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 38 sq.]): Heb. vi.14 R G; see «i,
Ill. 9. (Sept.; very often in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down.) *
yyepovedo; (jyeuov); [fr. Hom. down]; a. to be
leader, to lead theway. b. to rule, command: with gen.
of a province [cf. B. 169 (147) ], to be governor of a prov-
ince, said of a proconsul, Lk. ii. 2; of a procurator, Lk.
rola the
iyepovia, -as, 7, (jyewov), [Hdt., Thuc., Plat., al.],
chief command, rule, sovereignty: of the reign of a Ro-
man emperor, Lk. ili. 1; Joseph. antt. 18, 4, 2.*
ayeHov, -ovos, 6, (yyéouac), in class. Grk. a word of
very various signification: a leader of any kind, a guide,
ruler, prefect, president, chief, general, commander, sover-
eign; in the N. T. spec. 1. a ‘legatus Caesaris,’ an
officer administering a province in the name and with the
authority of the Roman emperor; the governor of a prov-
ince: Mt. x. 18; Mk. xiii. 9; Lk. xxi. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 14.
2. a procurator (Vulg. praeses; Luth. Landpfleger), an
officer who was attached to a proconsul or a propraetor
and had charge of the imperial revenues; in causes re-
lating to these revenues he administered justice, (called
énirpomos, Svotkntns, in prof. auth.). In the smaller
provinces also, which were so to speak appendages of
the greater, he discharged the functions of governor of
the province; and such was the relation of the procu-
Hryeopar
rator of Judea to the governor of Syria (cf. Krebs,
Observv. p. 61 sqq.; Fischer, De vitiis lexx. ete. p. 432
sqq-; Win. RWB. s. v. Procuratoren; Sieffert in Herzog
2s. v. Landpfleger; Krenkel in Schenkel iv. 7; [BB.
DD. s. v. Procurator]); so of Pilate, Felix, Festus: Mt.
xxvii. 2, 11, 14 sq. 21, 23 [R GL Trmrg.], 27; xxviii.
14; Lk. xx. 20; Acts xxiii. 24, 26, 33; xxiv. 1, 10; xxvi.
30; IAaros 6 ris “lovdaias yepav, Joseph. antt. 18, 3,1;
(Tacit. ann. 15, 44 Christus Tiberio imperitante per
procuratorem Pontium Pilatum supplicio adfectus
erat). 3. first, leading, chief: so of a principal town
as the capital of the region, Mt. ii. 6, where the meaning
is, ‘Thou art by no means least among the chief cities
of Judah;’ others less aptly (Bleek also [(where?) ;
in his (posthumous) Synopt. Erklarung etc. i. 119
he repudiates this interp. (ascribed by him to Hof
mann, Weiss. u. Erfiill. ii. 56)]), ‘Thou shalt by no
means be regarded as least among i. e. by the princes,
the nobles, of the state.’ The saying is taken fr. Mic. v.
2 (1), where the Hebr. ‘DON (which the Sept. give cor-
rectly, év yeAudor) seems to have been read “DON by the
Evangelist [ef. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 206].*
yéopar, -odpar; pf. ynwar; 1 aor. nynodyunv; (fr. dyo
[ef. Curtius p. 688]); dep. mid.; fr. Hom. down; a
to lead,i.e. a. to go before; b. to be a leader; to
rule, command; to have authority over: in the N. T.
so only in the pres. ptcp. 7yovpevos, a prince, of regal
power (Hzek. xliii. 7 for yn SPOine xvilel 7) Mb. 6s @
(royal) governor, viceroy, Acts vii. 10; chief, Lk. xxii.
26 (opp. to 6 diaxovay) ; leading as respects influence,
controlking in counsel, €v trot, among any, Acts xv. 22;
with gen. of the pers. over whom one rules, so of the
overseers or leaders of Christian churches: Heb. xiii.
7, 17, 24, (otkov, 2 Chr. xxxi. 13; 7év marpidy, 1 Esdr.
v. 65 (66), 67 (68); ris médews, Judge. ix. 51 Alex.; a
military leader, 1 Mace. ix. 30; 2 Macc. xiv. 16; used
also in Grk. writ. of any kind of a leader, chief, com-
mander, Soph. Phil. 386; often in Polyb.; Diod. 1, 4 and
72; Leian. Alex. 44; al.); with gen. of the thing, rod Adyou,
the leader in speech, chief speaker, spokesman: Acts
xiv. 12 of Mercury, who is called also rod Adyou Hyepav
in Jamblich. de myster., init. 2. (like the Lat. duco)
i. q. to consider, deem, account, think: with two acc., one
of the obj., the other of the pred., Acts xxvi. 2; Phil. ii.
3, 6 (on which see dpraypds, 2 [W. § 44, 3 ¢.]); iii. 7 [ef.
B. 59 (51); W. 274 (258)]; 1 Tim. i. 12; vi. 1; Heb.
x. 29; xi. 11, 26; 2 Pet. i. 13; ii. 13; iii. 9, 15. eva
és twa, 2 Th. iii. 15 [ef. W. § 65, 1 a.]5 Twa brepexmepio-
oas, to esteem one exceedingly, 1 Th. v.13 (arept modXov,
Hat. 2, 115; wept rdelorov, Thuc. 2, 89); w. ace. of the
thing foll. by drav, Jas. i. 2; dvayxaiov, foll. by an inf.,
2 Co. ix.5; Phil. ii. 25; Sicacov, foll. by an inf., 2 Pet. i.
13; foll. by an ace. w. inf., Phil. iii.8. [Comp.: d:-, éx-
dc-, ۤ-, mpo-nyeopau.*
Syn.: d0néw 1, fyéouae 2, voul(w 2, ofomac: fy.
and Yop. denote a belief resting not on one’s inner feeling or
sentiment, but on the due consideration of external grounds,
the weighing and comparing of facts; 50x. and o¥., on the
276
oe
KW
other hand, describe a subjective judgment growing out of
inclination or a view of facts in their relation to us. 7y.
denotes a more deliberate and careful judgment tlan voy.;
ot. a subjective judgment which has feeling rather than
thought (dox.) for its ground. Cf. Schmidt ch. 17.]
Seas, adv., (fr. 7dvs sweet, nleasant), with pleasure,
gladly: Mk. vi. 20; xii. 37; 2 Co. xi. 19. [From Soph.,
Plat. down. |* ;
78m, adv., [fr. Hom. down; on deriv. see Vaniéek p.
745; Peile p. 395], in the N. T. everywh. of time, now, al-
ready, (Lat. jam): Mt. iii. 10; v. 28; xiv.15; Mk. iv. 37;
xi. 11); Ck evi. 65 ex 9 59 fixxiva29 1p Wikiein txt layne
mrg. br.]; Jn. iv. 35 (36), 51; xix. 28 (that all things
were now finished and that nothing further remained
for him to do or to suffer); Acts xxvii. 9; Ro. xiii. 11
(that it is already time to wake up and indulge no
longer in sleep); 1 Co. iv. 8, and often; viv... #dn, now
already (Lat. jam nunc): 1 Jn. iv. 3; #8n wore, now at
last, at length now: with fut. Ro. i. 10; [with aor. Phil.
iv. 10. Syn. see dpi, fin. ]
7Stora (neut. plur. of the superl. #dvoros fr. 7dvs), adv.,
most gladly (cf. ndéws): 2 Co. xii. 9,15. (Soph., Xen.,
Plat., al.) *
Sov, -7s, 7, (fdopar), [Simon. 117, Hdt. down], pleas-
ure: 2 Pet. ii. 13; plur., Lk. viii. 14 (ai 7dovai r. Biov) ;
Tit. iii. 3; Jas. iv. 3; by meton. desires for pleasure
(Grotius, cupiditates rerum voluptariarum), Jas. iv. 1.*
15¥-ocpos, -ov, (7dvs and dcpn), sweet-smelling (Plin.
jucunde olens); neut. rd 75. as subst. garden-mint (i. q-
pivn, Strab. 8, 3,14 p. 344; Theophr. hist. plant. 7, 7;
cf. caus. plant. 6, 22 (20)), a kind of small odoriferous
herb, with which the Jews used to strew the floors of
their houses and synagogues; (it was called by them
AyD, see Buxtorf, Lex. talm. s. v. p. 1228 [p. 623 ed.
Fischer]) : Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi.42. [BB.DD.]*
400s, -eos (-ovs), 7d, (akin to 20s, prob. fr. EQ, whence
fa, eo, [cf. Vanitek p. 379]); 1. a customary
abode, dwelling-place, haunt, customary state, (Hom.,
Hes., Hadt., al.). 2. custom, usage, (cf. Germ. Sitzen,
Sitte); plur. ra #On morals, character, (Lat. mores): 1 Co.
xv. 33 fr. Menander; cf. Menand. fragm. ed. Meineke
p. 75. (Sir. xx. 26 (25); 4 Mace. i. 29; ii. 7, 21.) *
ko; impf. feov (Acts xxviii. 23, where LT Tr WH
HrOov); fut. Féo; 1 aor. HEa (LE. xiii. 35 RG; Rev. ii.
25; iii. 9 Rec.); pf. §xa (often in Sept., as Gen. xlii. 7,
9; xlv.16; [xlvii. 4]; Josh. ix. 12 (7); Job xvi. 22,
etc.; in the N. T. once, Mk. viii. 3 R* LT Tr txt., see
WH. App. p. 169; the older and more elegant writ.
{Aeschyl., Hdt., Thuce., al.] use only the pres. impf. and
fut.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 743 sq.; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii.
205; [Veitch s. v.]; W. 87 (83); [B. 59 (51)]); Sept.
for X)3; to have come, have arrived, be present, [W. 274
(258); B. 203 (176)]; hence impf. with force of plupf.
(cf. Matthiae ii. p. 11386; Kriiger § 53, 1, 4): absol. of
persons, Mt. xxiv. 50; Mk. viii.3; Lk. xii. 46; xv. 27;
Jn. viii. 42; Hebox: 7,9; 37; 1/Jniv. 20; Reve it 253
iii. 9; xv. 4; foll. by awd with gen. of place, Mt. viii. 11;
Lk. xiii. 29; by é« with gen. of place, Ro. xi. 26; with
nr
addition of eis w. acc. of place, Jn. iv.47; paxpddev, Mk.
viii. 3; mpds tua, Acts xxviii. 23 Rec.; metaph. to come
to one i. e. seek an intimacy with one, become his fol-
lower: Jn. vi. 37; emi twa, to come upon one (unexpect-
edly), Rev. iii. 3. of time and events: absol., Mt. xxiv.
14; Jn. ii. 4; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. xviii. 8; gas dv 7éy [L
T WH Tr in br. #£er; see above and B. 231 (199) ] (se.
6 xatpds), dre elmnre, Lk. xiii. 35; emt twa, metaph. to
come upon one, of things to be endured (as evils, calami-
tous times): Mt. xxiii. 36; Lk. xix.43. [Comp.: ar,
«ab-nko. | *
mart (L Ad, T pret [see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. «1,
t; on the breathing cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr.
§408; WH édoi]), a Hebr. word, "9s, my God: Mt.
xxvii. 46. [Cf. €Xwi, and the ref. there.] *
“AX (R* HAG [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf.
Proleg. p. 107], T Tr WH ‘Hei [see WH. App. p. 155,
and s. v. et, ¢]), indecl., Heli, the father of Joseph, the
husband of Mary: Lk. iii. 23.*
*HAias ([so RG; WH ’Helas cf. WH. App. p.
155; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 and see e, 4; but] L Tr “HXias,
Tdf. “HXeias, [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg.
p- 107; WH. Intr. § 408; current edd. are not uni-
form]), -ov [B. 17 (16), 8; but once (viz. Lk.i.17 T Tr
mrg. WH) -a], 6, (Giwls or WON i.e. either ‘strength of
Jehovah’ or ‘my God is Jehovah’), Elijah, a prophet
born at Thisbe [but see B. D.s. v., also s. v. Tishbite], the
unflinching champion of the theocracy in the reigns of
the idolatrous kings Ahab and Ahaziah. He was taken
up to heaven without dying, whence the Jews expected
he would return just before the advent of the Messiah,
whom he would prepare the minds of the Israelites to
receive (1 K. xvii—xix.; 2 K. ii. 6 sqq.; 2 Chr. xxi. 12;
Mal. iv. 4 (iii. 22); Sir. xlviii. 1, 4, 12 [ef. Edershewm,
Jesus the Messiah, App. viii.]): Mt. xi. 14; xvi. 14;
xvii. 3 sq. 10-12; xxvii. 47, 49; Mk. vi. 15; vili. 28; ix.
4 sq. 11-13; xv. 35 sq.; Lk. i. 17; iv. 25 sq.; ix. 8, 19, 30,
33, 54[RGL]; Jn. i. 21, 25; Jas. v.17; ev “HXéa, in the
narrative concerning Elijah, Ro. xi. 2 [see év, I. 1 d.].*
yatta, -as, 7, (WAcé mature, of full age, Hom. Od. 18,
373 [al. of the same age; ef. Mbeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.;
Pape, Lex. s. v.]); fr. Hom. down; 1. age, time of
life; a. univ.: Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xii. 25, [in these pass.
‘term or length of life’; but others refer them to 2
below; see Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. p. 4; Jas. Mori-
son, Com. on Mt. 1. c.] cf. wjxvs, and De Wette, Meyer,
Bleek on Mt. 1. ¢.; mapa xatpdv 7cxias, beyond the proper
stage of life [A. V. past age], Heb. xi. 11 (2 Mace. iv.
40; 4 Mace. v. 4). b. adult age, maturity: €xew rc
kiav [A. V. to be of age], Jn. ix. 21,23. ¢. suitable age
for anything; with gen. of the thing for which it is fit:
Tod ydpov, Dem.; rod 45n ppoveiv, Plat. Eryx. p. 396 b.;
metaph. of an attained state of mind fit for a thing:
Tov mAnpdparos rod Xpiorod, the age in which we are
fitted to receive the fulness (see mAnpepa, 1) of Christ,
Eph. iv. 13 [al. refer this to 2; cf. Ellic. in loc.]. 2:
stature (Dem., Plut., al.): rH jAcxia pexpds, Lk. xix. 3;
mpoxémrew HAckia, i. e. in height and comeliness of stature
277
ne pa
(Bengel, justam proceritatem nactus est et decoram), Lk.
ii. 52; cf. Meyer, Bleek, ad loc.*
TAlkos, -9, -ov, (HE, see HAukia), prop. as old as, as tall
as; univ. (Lat. guantus): how great, Col. ii. 1; Jas. iii.
5 \ cf. B. 258 (217)]; how small (Leian. Hermot. 5), dicow
ap, Jas. iii, 5 LT Tr WH [B. 1. c.].*
Atos, -ov, 6 [often anarthrous, W. 120 (114); B. 89
(78) ], (€Xn [root us to burn, cf. Curtius § 612]); Sept. for
wiw; the sun: Mt. v.45; xiii. 43; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk. iv.
40; xxi. 25; Acts xxvi. 13; 1 Co.xv.41; Rev.i. 16, ete.
i. q. the rays of the sun, Rev. vii. 16; i. q. the light of
day: py Bdérev rov Fdwov, of a blind man, Acts xiii. 11.
Hos, -ov, 6, a nail: Jn. xx. 25. [(From Hom. on.)]*
qpets, See eya.
Hepa, -as, 7, (fr. Apyepos, -ov, prop. juépa dpa the mild
time, cf. Lob. Paral. p. 359; [but cf. Curtius p. 594 sq.;
Vanitek p. 943]); Hebr. ny; day; used 1. of the
natural day, or the interval between sunrise and sun-
set, as distinguished fr. and contrasted with night; a.
prop. juépas, by day, in the daytime, [cf. colloq. Eng.
of a day; W.§ 30, 11; B. § 132, 26], Rev. xxi. 253 jpé-
pas k. vuxros, day and night [cf. W. 552 (513 sq.); Lob.
Paralip. p. 62 sq.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. v.5], Mk. v.5; Lk.
xviii. 7; Actsix.24; 1 Th.ii.9; iii.10; [2 Th. iii. 8 L
txt. T Tr WH]; 1 Tim. v.5; 2 Tim.i. 3; Rev. iv. 8; vii.
15; xii.10; xiv.11; xx.10; nueépas péeons, at midday,
Acts xxvi. 13; vixra kal nuépav [W. 230 (216); B.§ 131,
11], Mk. iv. 27; Acts xx.31; 2 Th.iii.8 RG; hyper-
bolically i. q. without intermission, datpevew, Lk. ii. 37;
Acts xxvi. 7; mpepas odds, a day’s journey, Lk. ii. 44
(Gen. xxxi. 23 [was ruépas odor, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 2, 9;
cf. W. 188 (177); B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Day’s Journey ]) ;
Tas n€pas, ace. of time [ W. and B. as above], during the
days, Lk. xxi. 37; éxeivny r. nuépav, Jn. i. 39 (40); macav
npepav, daily, Acts v.42; ex Snvapiov thy npépav, so some-
times we say, for a shilling the day, Mt. xx. 2; dadexa
elow Spat ths nuépas, Jn. xi. 9; to the number of days
are added as many nights, Mt. iv. 2; xii. 40; yiverae
npépa, day dawns, it grows light, Lk. iv. 42; vi. 13; xxii.
66; Acts xii.18; xvi. 35; xxili. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39,
(Xen. an. 2, 2,13; 7, 2, 34); mepumareiv ev r. npépa, Jn.
xi. 9; 1) nuépa haiver, Rev. viii. 12; 7 ypépa kdives, the day
declines, it is towards evening, Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29. b.
metaph. the ‘day’ is regarded as the time for abstaining
from indulgence, vice, crime, because acts of the sort are
perpetrated at night and in darkness: 1 Th. v. 5, 8;
hence 6 alay obros (see aldy, 3) is likened to the night,
aidv peddAwv to day, and Christians are admonished to
live decorously as though it were light, i. e. as if 6 aiay
6 péAXov were already come, Ro. xiii. 12sq. €ws npépa
éoriv while it is day, i. e. while life gives one an oppor-
tunity to work, Jn. ix. 4. of the light of knowledge,
2 Pet. i. 19. 2. of the civil day, or the space of
twenty-four hours (thus including the night): Mt. vi. 34;
Mk. vi. 21; Lk. xiii. 14, etc.; opp. to an hour, Mt. xxv.
13; to hours, months, years, Rev. ix. 15; Gal. iv. 10;
i) év hepa tpvpn, the revelling of a day, i. e. ephemeral,
very brief, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [al. refer this to 1 b. above];
Hwepa
éxrdkis THs ju. seven times in the (space of a) day, Lk.
xvii. 4; the dat. nuépa of the day on (in) which [ef. W.
§ 31,9; B. § 133 (26) ]: as rpirn nyépa, Mt. xvi. 21; Mk.
ix. 31 [Rec.]; Lk. xvii. 29 sq.; Acts ii. 41, ete. ; NEPA K-
juepa, day by day, every day, 2 Co. iv. 16 (after the
Hebr. py) py Esth. iii. 4, where Sept. Ka éxdotny pee
pay, and py oY Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 20, where Sept. nuépav
xa@’ iuépav; [cf. W. 463 (432) ]); nuépay €& juepas (see
éx, IV. 2), 2 Pet. ii. 8; as an ace. of time [W. 230 (215
sq.); B. § 131, 11]: 6Aqy r. juépav, Ro. vill. 36; x. 21;
piay nuepav, Acts xxi. 7; and in the-plur., Jn. ii. 12; iv.
40; xi. 6; Actsix. 19; x.48; xvi. 12; xx. 6; xxi. 4,10;
xxv. 6,14; xxviii. 7,12 [L dat.], 14; Gal.i.18; Rev. xi.
3,9. joined with Prepositions: dé with gen. from
... forth, from... on, Mt. xxii. 46; Jn. xi. 53; Acts x.
30; xx.18; Phil. i.5; dype w. gen. until, up to, Mt. xxiv.
BR Nikon Oe Sorbie Cha UNC) hs 73 |) ANON ahs 2) 8
xxiii. 1; xxvi. 22; dype wévre juepav, until five days had
passed, i. e. after five days, Acts xx. 6; péxpe w. gen. until,
Mt. xxviii. 15 [L Tr, WH in br.]; ews w. gen. until, Mt.
xxvii. 64; Acts i. 22 [T dype]; Ro. xi. 8; did w. gen., see
dud, A. IL.; po w. gen. before, Jn. xii. 1 (on which see wpé,
b.); év w. dat. sing., Mt. xxiv.50; Lk.i.59; Jn. v.9; 1 Co.
x.8[LT Tr WH txt. om. ev]; Heb. iv. 4, etc.; é» w. dat.
plur., Mt. xxvii.40; Mk. xv. 29 (LT Trom. WH br. ev];
Jn. ii. 19 [Tr Wi br. ev], 20, ete.; eis, unto, (against}, Jn.
xii. 7; Rev. ix. 15; émi w. acc. for, (Germ. auf... hin),
Acts xiii. 31 (for many days successively) ; xvi. 18; xxvii.
20; Heb. xi. 30; ka&? nuépav, daily [W. 401 (374 sq.) ],
Mita xxvi. 505) Mik. xive49ic ko xyi.19k xxii 53; Acts
WHA ER mire ocub UH one UR UCch > gia oily eOope.ae
28; Heb. vii. 27; x. 11; also rd xa® repay, Lk. xi. 3;
xix.47; Acts xvii. 11 [LT Tr txt.om.W UH br. 76], (Polyb.
4,18, 2; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 734; [Jelf § 456]; Bnhdy. p.
329; B. 96 (84)); xa éxaorny nucpav, every day, Heb.
iii. 13 (Xen. mem. 4, 2,12); also cara macav ny. Acts
xvil. 17; pera, after, Mt. xvii. 1; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 63; Mk.
VilinSl s ksi1624 0) Jn. 1¥043'4 cox 26. Acts 155 xVSO.
etc. ov melous eioly ewol nucpar ad) js, sc. nuépas, Acts
xxiv. 11. A specification of the number of days is
thrust into the discourse in the nominative, as it were
adverbially and without any grammatical connection,
(cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 310 sq.; W.516 (481) and § 62,
2; [B. 139 (122)]): #8n mépar (Rec. rjuépas, by correc-
tion) rpets, Mt.xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2; doet jyépar dud, Lk.
ix. 28. juepdv diayevopevov rwev, certain days having
intervened, Acts xxv. 13. 7juépa and rpépar are used w.
the gen. of a noun denoting a festival or some solemnity
usually celebrated on a fixed day: rév dtipor, Acts xii.
3; THs mwevtexooris, Acts ii. 1; xx. 16; Tov oaSBarou,
Lk. xiii. 14, 16; Jn. xix. 315 7f kupsakiy nuépa, the Lord’s
day, i. e. the day on which Christ returned to life, Sun-
day therefore, Rev. i. 10; the foll. phrases also have
reference to sacred or festival days: kpivew yuépav map’
7n2€pav, to exalt one day above another, and kKpivew macav
nuepav, to esteem every day sacred, Ro. xiv. 5; ppoveiv
TH juepay, to regard a particular day that is selected for
religious services, Ro. xiv. 6; ruépas mapatnpeicbat, to
278
mpepa
observe days, Gal. iv.10. After the Hebr. usage, which
in reference to a definite period of time now elapsed
speaks of a certain number of days as fulfilled or
completed (see Gesenius s. v. x10), we have the
phrases émAnoOnoav ai nuépas Ths ecroupyias, the days
spent in priestly service, Lk. i. 23 (when he had been
employed in sacred duties for the appointed time); rod
repireyew avtov, for him to be circumcised, Lk... 21g
rou Kabapiopod aitay, ib. 22; cuvteeabevoay npepav, Lk.
iv. 2; Te\ewwodvrwv tas jpépas, when they had spent
there the time appointed, Lk. ii. 48; év r@ cupmdAnpov-
cat Tas Ayu. THs GvadyWews ad’tov, when the number of
days was now being completed which the reception of
Jesus into heaven required, i. e. before which that re-
ception could not occur, Lk. ix. 51; 1 éxmAnpwous Tar
npepav Tov dymopod, the fulfilment of the days required
for the purification, Acts xxi. 26; cuvreAouvtat ai npepat,
ib. 27; é€v 7@ cupmAnpotabu Tr. nyépav THs MEvTeKoOTTS,
when the measure of time needed for the day of Pente-
cost was being completed, i. e. on the very day of Pen-
tecost, Acts ii. 1. As in some of the exx. just adduced
nwépa is joined to the gen. of a thing to be done or to
happen on a certain day, so also in ny. tod evradiacpod,
Jn. xii. 7; dvadei~ews, Lk. i. 80. with gen. of pers., ev
Th Hepa cov [but LT Tr WH om. cov] in the day favor-
able for thee, the day on which salvation is offered thee
and can be obtained, Lk. xix. 42 (Polyb. 18, 5, 8 py
mapns Tov Karpov... on vov €oTLv nuepa, ads 6 KaLpds;
“meus. dies est, tempore accepto utimur” Sen. Med.
1017). 3. of the last day of the present age (see
aiwy, 3), the day in which Christ will return from heaven,
raise the dead, hold the final judgment, and perfect his
kingdom, the foll. expressions are used: 7) 7juépa, simply,
Ro. xiii. 12; Heb. x. 25, ef. 1 Th. v.43; (7) myépa rod
xupiov, Xpotov, ‘Incod Xpeorodv, rod viod tov avOparov,
Pkexwii 24 RiGae ie W Etre. aC oma Semone:
19145) Philo. 6) 105 WSChev25 2 Phi?) 2s et. ied Ong,
nepa Kupiov 7 peyadn, Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31 (iil. 4));
Nucpa 7) 6 vids Tod dvOparov amoxadimrera, Lk. xvii. 30; n
nucpa T- Geod, 2 Pet. ili. 12; 1) jyepa exeivn 7) peydAn Too
mavtokpdropos, Rey. xvi. 14, (even in the prophecies of
the O.T. the day of Jehovah is spoken of, in which Jehovah
will execute terrible judgment upon his adversaries, as
JOC 1 LS Tiealsyl lewis erie exits Gy OmeAtinn veel oo Or
Jer. xxvi. 10 (xlvi. 10); Ezek. xiii. 5; xxx. 2 sqq.; Ob.
15; Zeph.i. 7 sqq-; Mal. iii. A) ne. exeivn and exeivn
7 je, Mt. vii. 22; Lk. vi. 23; x.12; xxi. 34; 2 Th.i. 10;
2 Tim. i. 12, 18; iv. 8; 9 eoyarn ny., In. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54;
xi. 24; xi. 485 ru. dtohutpocews, Eph. iv. 30; émurkomfs
(see éemuckonn, b.), 1 Pet. ii. 12; kploews, Mt. x. 15; xi.
22, 24; xii. 36; Mk. vi.11 RLbr.; 2 Pet. ii. 9; iii. 7, ef.
Acts xvii. 315 tijs kpioews, 1 In. iv. 17; dpyis «. dmoka-
Avews Sixaroxpicias tr. Oeod, Ro. ii. 5 (Dyi-DY, Ezek.
XXii. 24; MTA OF, Zeph. ii. 3 sq.; [AIIv-DP, Prov.
xi.4; Zeph. i. 15,18, etc.]); 9 my. 4 weyadn THs Opyis
avtov, Rev. vi. 17; nu. apayns, of slaughter (of the
wicked), Jas. v. 5 [(Jer. xii. 3, ete.)]. Paul, in allusion
to the phrase nyépa kupiov, uses the expression avOparivn
METEPOS
7pepa for a tribunal of assembled judges on the day of
trial [A. V. man’s ae (cf. the Germ. Landtag,
Reichstag), 1 Co. iv. 4. By a Hebraistic usage
(though one not ae unknown to Grk. writ. ; ef, |
Soph. Aj. 131, 623; Eur. Ion 720) it is used of time in
general, (as the an dies is sometimes): Jn. xiv. 20;
xvi. 23, 26; Heb. viii. 9 [ef. B. 316 CAG) Ae Weed 7a
(531) ]; ri euiy juépav, the time when I should appear
among men as Messiah, Jn. viii. 56; é€v 7} jy 1h movnpa,
in the time of troubles and assaults with which demons
try Christians, Eph. vi. 13; 1}. co@rnpias, the time when
any one is or can be saved, 2 Co. vi. 2; eis nyépav aidvos,
for all time, forever (see aia, 1 a.), 2 Pet. iii. 18; much
oftener in the plur.: myépae movnpai, Eph. v. 16° dd rye-
od dpxaiar, Acts xv. 7; ai mpdrepov ru. Heb. x. 32;
macas ras 7pépas, through all days, always, Mt. xxviii. 20
(B Dis 2a; Deut. iv. 40; v. 26 (29), and very often; iipare
Tayta, Hom. II. 8, 539; 12,133; 13, 826, etc.) ; ai gorya-
Tat nu. (see €oxaros, 1 sub fin.), ee ii SLR 92) Alben, sbi, ale
Jas. v. 3; af 1);1. adra, the present time, Acts iii. 24; the
time now spoken of, Lk. i. 39; vi. 12; Acts i. 15, ete.;
€v Tas nu. exetvars (see exeivos, 2b. p. 195"); mpd rovTwy
Tay npepov, Acts v. 36; xxi. 38; mpds odlyas jy. for a
short time, Heb. xii. 10; €Aevoovrar jy. orav ete., Mt. ix.
15; Mk. ii. 20; Lk. v. 35; dre ete. Lk. xvii. 22; f£ovow
ne. emt oé, kat foll. by a fut. Lk. xix. 43; EpXovTat Hu., Kal
foll. by fut. Heb. viii. 8; eAXevoovra: or epyovrat jy., ev ais |
etce., Lk. xxi. 6; xxiii. 29. with a gen. of the thing done
or to happen: rhs adroypadns, Acts v. 37; ths pavijs,
Rev. x. 7; rs capkos avrod, of his earthly life, Heb. v.
7. ai np. with the gen. of a pers., one’s time, one’s days,
i. e. in which he lived, or held office: Mt. ii. 1; xi. 12;
ReMi 0 sa XIVe OU sk. Ds Iv. 2b5 evil. 26,28; Acts
Wirtorexit. 41° 1 Pet.in.)20,\(Gen. xxvi. 151 S: xvilt
ORMQISe Riad Kex, 21) Histh.i. i; Sirexliv. 75 xlvit
7; Tob. i. 2; 1 Mace xiv. 36, ete.) ; ai nuepar rod viod
tov avOp. the time immediately preceding the return of
Jesus Christ from heaven, Lk. xvii. 26; pilav rdv jy. rod
vi. r. avOp a single day of that most blessed future time
when, all hostile powers subdued, the Messiah will reign,
Lk. xvii. 22. Finally, the Hebrews and the Hellenists
who imitate them measure the duration and length also
of human life by the number of days: maoas ras nyépas
[Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH dat.] ris Cons [G LT Tr WH om. ]
jpov, during all our life, Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. xlvii. 8 sq.;
Sudithexo: oben. 2)(8) > Sir. xxii. 12) xxx. 32 (24);
1 Mace. ix. 71); mpoBeBnxaos ev rais nuépats avrod, far
advanced in age, Lk. i. 7,18; ii. 36 (O°D72 83, [Sept.
mpoB. nuepoy or nuepas |, Gen. xviii. 11; xxiv. 1; Josh.
xiii. 1; [xxili. 1; 1 K.i. 1; see mpoBaiva, fin.]); apy
jpepav, beginning of life, Heb. vii. 8 (ai €oyarae nuépar
tuvds, one’s last days, his old age, Protev. Jac. c. 1);
jpepar ayabai, 1 Pet. iii. 10.
ayetepos, -pa, -epov, (jets), possess. pron. of the 1
pers. plur., [fr. Hom. down], ou: with a subst., Acts il.
11; xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi. 5; Ro. xv. 4; [1 Co. xv. 31
Rec. b]; 2 Tim. iv. 15; 1 Jn. i. 3; ii. 25 of nuerepos,
sudstantively, ‘owr people,’ (the brethren): Tit. iii. 14.
279
N)PE{LOS
[Neut. r6 jyér. substantively :
W. § 22, 7sqq.3
7 By, see 7.
nprBavis, -és, (fr. jue half, and @yjcxw, 2 aor. 2avor),
half dead: Lk. x. 30. ({Dion. Hal. 10, 7]; Diod. 12, 62;
Strab. 2 p. 98; Anthol. 11, 392, 4; [4 Mace. iv. i)
al.) *
Hprovs, -ea, -v; gen. nuicovs (Mk. vi. 23 [Sept. Ex.
xxv. 9; etc.], for the uncontr. form 7jjuiceos which is more
com. in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. [fr. Hat.
down]); neut. plur. jion, Lk. xix. 8 R G,a form in use
from Theophr. down, for the earlier jpicea adopted by
Lehm. (cf. Passow [also L. and S.] s. v.; W. § 9, 24.;
jpioeain T Tr [Hpica WI] seems due to a corruption of
Lk. xvi. 12° WH txt. C£
B.§ 12719 sqq.]*
, the copyists, see Steph. Thes. iv. p.170; Bttm. Ausf. Spr.
i. p. 248; Alex. Bttm.in Stud. u. Krit. for 1862, p: 194
Ses) ENE Grama (3) elias Proleg. p. 118}; but esp.
WH. App. p. 158]); Sept. for myn, much oftener
sn; half; it takes the gender and number of the
annexed substantive ue TO Huwov might have been
expected) :
writ. say 6 jurovs Tov Biov, of juices Tov imméwy, see
Passow s. v.; [L. and S. s. v. 1. 2; Kiihner § 405, eal
Tas tices Tov Suvdpewy, 1 Mace. iii. 34, 37); neut. 76
jutcv, substantively, the half; without the art. a haif:
€ws nulaous THs Baowrelas pov (Hsth. v. 3; vii. 2), Mk. vi.
235 jusov Karpod, Rev. xii. 14; as in class. Grk., kat
jpeov is added to cardinal numbers even where they are
connected with masc. and fem. substantives, as rpeis
nuepas Kai Hucov, three days and a half, Rev. xi. 9, 11,
(GWeveiv dvoiy Spaxpav kal nutoovs, Ath.6 p. 274 ¢.; dv0
or évos mxewv Kat nuioous, Ex. xxv. 16; xxvi. 16;
xxxviii. 1 [Alex.]); with cai omitted: Rev. xi. 9 Tdf.
ed. 7 (suptddav émrad nuicovs, Plut. Mar. 34).*
yprdprov and (L. T Tr WH) nyiopor (cf. Kiihner § 185,
6,2; [Jelf § 165, 6, 1a.]), -ov, 7d, (fr. Fe and dpa, cf. rd
LKOTUALOY, NfLLU LOL PLOY, LLLKOT LLOV, NpLLXOLviKLov, HuLw/3dALov,
ete.), half an hour. Rev. viii. 1. (Strab. 2 p. 133; Geop.;
al. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
yvixa, arel. adv. of time, [fr. Hom.
time; when: foll. by the indic. pres., of a thing that
actually takes place, 2 Co. iii. 15 RG; foll. by a with
subj. pres., whensoever: ibid. L T Tr WH; foll. by dv
and the aor. subj. with the force of the Lat. fut. pf., ad
length when (whensoever it shall have ete.) : 2 Co. iii. 165
Ex. i. 10; Deut. vii. 12; Judith xiv. 2. [On its constr.
see W. 296 (278) sq.; 308 (289); B. § 139, 33.]*
qmep, see 7, 4 d.
amos, -a, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (apparently
derived fr. ros, etzreiv, so that it prop. means affable [so
Etym. Magn. 434, 20; but cf. Vaniéek p. 32]); fr. Hom.
down; mild, gentle: 1 Th. ii. 7 (where L WH vnmuos, q. v.
fin.) ; mpds teva, 2 Tim. ii. 24.”
"Hp, Lehm. “Hp [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf.
Proleg. p. 107], (ay, watchful, fr. 137 to be awake), Er,
one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 28.*
aipepos, -ov, quiet, tranquil: Hpepov x. novxiov Biov, 1
Tim. ii. 2. (Leian. trag. 207; Eustath., Hesych.; com
Ta Hplon Tov imapxdvrov, Lk. xix. 8 (so Grk.
down], at which
‘“Hpwédns
parat. qpenéorepos, fr. an unused jpepns, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5,
63; more com. in the earlier Grk. writ. is the adv.
npewa. [Cf. W.§11 fin. ; B. 28 (24).])*
‘Hpdbns, -ov, 6, (equiv. to ‘Hpwidns, sprung from a hero ;
hence the Etym. Magn. pp. 165, 43; 437, 56 directs it to
be written ‘Hpadns [so WH], as it is found also in certain
inscriptions [cf. Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p.9; WH. Intr.
§ 410; Tdf. Proleg. 109; Pape, Kigennamen, s. v.]),
Herod, the name of a royal family that flourished among
the Jews in the time of Jesus andthe apostles. In the
N. T. are mentioned, 1. the one who gave the family
its name, Herod surnamed the Great, a son of Antipater
of Idumzxa. Appointed king of Judea B.c. 40 by the
Roman senate at the suggestion of Antony and with the
consent of Octavian, he at length overcame the great
opposition which the country made to him and took
possession of the kingdom B. c. 37; and, after the battle
of Actium, he was confirmed in it by Octavian, whose
favor he ever after enjoyed. He was brave and skilled
in war, learned and sagacious; but also extremely sus-
picious and cruel. Hence he destroyed the entire royal
family of the Hasmonzans, put to death many of the
Jews that opposed his government, and proceeded to
kill even his dearly beloved wife Mariamne of the Has-
monzan line and the two sons she had bornehim. By
these acts of bloodshed, and especially by his love and
imitation of Roman customs and institutions and by the
burdensome taxes imposed upon his subjects, he so
alienated the Jews that he was unable to regain their favor
by his splendid restoration of the temple and other acts
of munificence. He died in the 70th year of his age, the
37th of his reign, the 4th before the Dionysian era. Cf.
Joseph. antt. 14, 14,45 15,6, 75 7,43; 8,1; 16,5, 4;
11,6, ete. In his closing years John the Baptist and
Christ were born, Mt. ii.1; Lk. i. 5; Matthew narrates
in ch. ii. (cf. Macrob. sat. 2, 4) that he commanded the
male children in Bethlehem from two years old and under
to be slain. Cf. especially Keim in Schenkel iii. 27
sqq-; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 15, and the books
there mentioned. 2. Herod surnamed Antipas, son
of Herod the Great and Malthace, a Samaritan woman.
After the death of his father he was appointed by the
Romans tetrach of Galilee and Pera. His first wife
was a daughter of Aretas, king of Arabia; but he sub-
sequently repudiated her and took to himself Herodias,
the wife of his brother Herod (see $iAurmos, 1) ; and in
consequence Aretas, his father-in-law, made war against
him and conquered him. He cast John the Baptist into
prison because John had rebuked him for this unlaw-
ful connection; and afterwards, at the instigation of
Herodias, he ordered him to be beheaded. Induced by
her, too, he went to Rome to obtain from the emperor
the title of king. But in consequence of accusations
brought against him by Herod Agrippa I., Caligula
banished him (A.p. 39) to Lugdunum in Gaul, where he
seems to have died. [On the statement of Joseph. (b.
j- 2, 9, 6) that he died in Spain see the conjecture in
B. D. s. v. Herodias.] He was light-minded, sensual,
280
‘Hpwotas
vicious, (Joseph. antt. 17, 1,3; 8,1; 11,45; 18,5,1; 7,
1sq.; b.j. 2,9, 6). In the N. T. he is mentioned by
the simple name of Herod in Mt. xiv. 1, 3, 6; Mk. vi.
16=18, 20=22 yi. 155 Like iii 1195s vatis Sijeix-a jes
xiii. 31; xxiii. 7 sq. 11 sq.15; Actsiv. 27; xiil.1; once,
Mk. vi. 14, he is called Bagtrevs, either improperly, or
in the sense of royal lineage (see Baodevs). Cf.
Keim 1. c. p. 42 sqq.; Schiirer 1. c. p. 232 sqq. 3.
Herod Agrippa I. (who is called by Luke simply Herod,
by Josephus everywhere Agrippa), son of Aristobulus
and Berenice, and grandson of Herod the Great. After
various changes of fortune, he gained the favor of the
emperors Caligula and Claudius to such a degree that
he gradually obtained the government of all Palestine,
with the title of king. He died at Cesarea, A.D. 44,
at the age of 54, in the seventh [or 4th, reckoning from
the extension of his dominions by Claudius] year of his
reign (Joseph. antt. 17,1, 2; 18, 6; 19, 4,5; 6,1; 7,
3; b. j. 2, 11, 6), just after having ordered James the
apostle, son of Zebedee, to be slain, and Peter to be cast
into prison: Acts xii. 1, 6, 11, 19-21. Cf. Keim 1. ce. p.
49 sqq.; Schiirer l. c. p. 290 sqq.; [Farrar, St. Paul,
vol. ii. Excurs. vi. ]. 4. (Herod) Agrippa II., son of
the preceding. When his father died he was a youth of
seventeen. In a.b. 48 he received from Claudius Cesar
the government of Chalcis, with the right of appointing
the Jewish high-priests, together with the care and over:
sight of the temple at Jerusalem. Four years later
Claudius took from him Chalcis and gave him instead a
larger dominion, viz. Batanea, Trachonitis, and Gaul-
anitis, with the title of king. To these regions Nero, in
A.D. 53, added Tiberias and Tarichaeae and the Perzean
Julias, with fourteen neighboring villages. Cf. Joseph.
antt. 19,9, 1 sq.3 20, 1, 335; 25 7,15) 8, 45. bay. 2,02;
land 8. In the N.T. he is mentioned in Acts xxv. 13,
22-26; xxvi. 1 sq. (7), 19, 27 sq. 32. In the Jewish
war, although he strove in vain to restrain the fury of
the seditious and bellicose populace, he did not desert
the Roman side. After the fall of Jerusalem, he was
vested with praetorian rank and kept the kingdom en-
tire until his death, which took place in the third year
of the emperor Trajan, [the 73d of his life, and 52nd of
his reign]. He was the last representative of the He-
rodian dynasty. Cf. Keim l.c. p. 56 sqq.; Schiirer 1]. ec
p. 315 sqq. [Less complete accounts of the family may
be found in BB.DD.; Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 s. v.;
an extended narrative in Hausrath, Neutest. Zeitgesch.
vol. i. Abschn. v. Cf. also Edersheim, Jesus the Mes-
siah, bk. ii. ch. ii. and App. iv. ]
“HpwStavot [WH ‘Hpwsd., see “Hpadns and I, 4; cf. W.
$16, 2 y.], -dv, oi, Herodians, i. e. Herod’s partisans (oi
ta ‘Hpddov dpovoivres, Joseph. antt. 14, 15, 10): Mé.
xxii. 16; Mk. iii. 6; xii. 18. Cf. Keim, Jesu von Naz.
ili. 130 sqq. [Eng. trans. v. p. 156 sq.], and in Schenkel
iii. 65 sqq.; [ef. B. D. s. v.; Edersheim, Index s. Vout
“Hpwbitds [WH “Hpwdids, see ‘Hpddns and I, t], -aSos, 1),
Herodias, daughter of Aristobulus and granddaughter
of Herod the Great. She was first married to Herod
“Hpwdiav
[Philip (see @Aimros, 1)], son of Herod the Great, a
man in private life; but she afterwards formed an un-
lawful union with Herod Antipas, whom she induced
not only to slay John the Baptist but also to make the
journey to Rome which ruined him; at last she followed
him into exile in Gaul (see “Hpwéns, 2): Mt. xiv. 3, 6;
Mk. vi. 17, 19, 22 [here WH R mrg. atrod]; Lk. iii. 19.*
“Hpadiev [WH ‘Hpod., see ‘Hpddys and I, ¢], -wvos, 6,
Herodion, a certain Christian, [Paul’s “kinsman” (see
avyyerns) |}: Ro. xvi. 11.*
“Heatas (Lchm. ’Ho. [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 107; WH
*"Hoaias, see I, ¢]), -ov [B. 17 (16), 8], 6, (so Sept. for
wmyw, Jehovah's help, fr. yw and Ay), Isaiah (Vulg.
Isaias, in the Fathers also L’saias), a celebrated Hebrew
prophet, who prophesied in the reigns of Uzziah, Jo-
tham, Ahaz, and Hezekiah: Mt. iii. 3; iv. 14; viii. 17;
xii. 17; xiii. 14; (xiii. 35 acc. to the reading of cod.
Sin. and other authorities, rightly approved of by Bleek
[Hort (as below), al.], and received into the text by Tdf.
[noted in mrg. by WH, see their App. ad loc.; per con-
tra cf. Meyer or Ellicott (i. e. Plumpire in N. T. Com.) ad
loc)" xv. 75 Mkoviio 65° Lk: iii45 iv. 173 Jn. 1. 23);
xii. 38 sq. 41; Acts xxviii. 25; Ro. ix. 27, 29; x. 16, 20;
xv. 12; i. q. the book of the prophecies of Isaiah, Acts
Vili. 28, 30; év (7) ‘Hoaia, Mk. i. 2G Ltxt. T Tr WH*
*Hoad [‘Ho. Ro. ix. 13 R* Tr; Heb. xii. 16 R*; Heb.
xi. 20 R°], 6, (wy i.e. hairy (Gen. xxv. 25; Joseph.
antt. 1, 18, 1]), indecl., Esau, the firstborn son of Isaac:
Rosi. 13; Heb. x1--20; xii. 16*
Woodopat, see 7rrdw and s. Vv. 3, a, s.
[Yoowv, see jrrov. |
yovxdte; 1 aor. novyaca; (qovxos [i. gq. novxtos]) ;
as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, to keep quiet, i.e. a.
to rest, to cease from labor: Lk. xxiii. 56. b. to lead
a quiet life, said of those who are not running hither
and thither, but stay at home and mind their business:
dehy. 11. c. to be silent, i. e. to say nothing, hold
one’s peace: Lk. xiv. 4 (3); Acts xi. 18; xxi. 14, (Job
xxxii. 7; jovxacav Kai ovx eVpocar Adyor, Neh. v. 8).*
[Syn. fovxd ery, cryav, ow may: Ho. describes a quiet
condition in the general, inclusive of silence; avy. de-
scribes a mental condition and its manifestation, especially
in speechlessness (silence from fear, grief, awe, etc.) ; owm.,
the more external and physical term, denotes abstinence
from speech. esp. as antithetic to loquacity. Schmidt i.
zh. 9; iv. ch. 175.]
yjouxla, -as, 4, (fr the adj. jovxuos, q. v-; the fem. ex-
presses the genezal notion [W. 95 (90)], cf. airia, dpern,
281
AXOS
€x9pa, ete.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. quietness: descrip-
tive of the life of one who stays at home doing his own
work, and does not officiously meddle with the affairs of
others, 2 Th. iii. 12. 2. silence: Acts xxii. 2; 1 Tim.
rit, WLS p=
1obxL0s, -a, -ov, [(perh. akin to jar to sit, Lat. sedatus;
cf. Curtius § 568; Vaniéek p. 77)]; fr. Hom. down;
quiet, tranquil: 1 Pet. iii. 4; Bios, 1 Tim. ii. 2; Joseph.
antt. 13, 16, 1.*
WTOoL, see 7, 4 e.
WTTde: (irrwv); to make less, inferior, to overcome
(the Act. only in Polyb., Diod., Joseph. antt. 12, 7, 1
[other exx. in Veitch s. v.]); Pass. #rrdopuat, fr. [Soph.
and] Hdt. down; pf. jrrquac; 1 aor. yrrnOnv (joodbny,
2 Co. xii. 183 LT Tr WH; in opp. to which form cf.
Fritzsche, De conform. N. T. crit. quam Lchm. ed. p. 32
[yet see Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. ad fid. cod. Vat. p. xe.;
WH. App. p. 166; B. 59 (52); Veitch s.v.]); to be made
inferior; to be overcome, worsted: in war, tré twos,
2 Mace. x. 24; univ., rwi [cf. B. 168 (147); W. 219
(206)], to be conquered by one, forced to yield to one,
2 Pet. ii. 19; absol. ib. 20. ri dmép rwa, i. q. Arrov exw
tt, to hold a thing inferior, set below, [on the ace. (6) cf.
B. § 131, 10; and on the compar. use of tmép see irép,
TW 2'b.], 2 Corxii13*
yrmpa (cf. B. 7; WH. App. p. 166], -ros, rd, (qrrdo-
peat) ; 1. a diminution, decrease: i. e. defeat, Is. xxxi.
8; avrav, brought upon the Jewish people in that so few
of them had turned to Christ, Ro. xi. 12 [R. V. loss].
2. loss, sc. as respects salvation, 1 Co. vi. 7 [R. V. txt.
defect]. Cf. Meyer [but cf. his 6te Aufl.] on each pass.
(Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) *
ytrev or [so L T Tr WH, see &, o, s] jooar, -ov, infe-
rior; neut. adverbially [fr. Hom. down] less, 2 Co. xii.
15; eis tO Raaov, for the worse (that ye may be made
worse; opp. to eis rd kpeirrov), 1 Co. xi. 17.*
7x€@ (-@); (A7xos, q. v.); [fr. Hesiod down]; to sound:
1 Co. xiii. 1; used of the roaring of the sea, Lk. xxi. 25
Rec. [Comp.: e&, xat-nxéo. | *
nxos [cf. Lat. echo, vox, Germ. sprechen, etc.; Vaniéek
p- 858], -ov, 6, and (Lk. xxi. 25 GL. T Tr WH) 16 ios,
-ous (cf. W. 65 (64); [B. 23 (20)]; Delitzsch on Heb. xii.
19 p. 638; [or nyous may come fr. 7xa, -ovs, see esp. WH.
App. p- 158°; Mey. on Lk. as below]) ; 1. a sound,
noise: Acts ii. 2; Heb. xii. 19; spoken of the roar of
the sea’s waves, Lk. xxi. 25 GL T Tr WH. 2. rumor,
report: mepi twvos, Lk. iv. 37.*
282
0
Oaddatos
@aSSatos, -ov, 6, (IN, perh. large-hearted or coura-
geous, although it has not been shown that 74) equiv. to
the Hebr. 1w can mean pectus as well as mamma; [some
would connect the terms by the fact that the ‘child of
one’s heart’ may be also described as a ‘bosom-child’; but
see B.D. s. v. Jude]), Thaddeus, a surname of the
apostle Jude; he was also called Lebbwus and was the
brother of James the less: Mt.x.83 RG@GLTr WH; Mk.
iii. 18. [Cf. B. D.s. v.; Keil on Mt. l.¢.; WH. App.
p- 11°. The latter hold the name AeBBatos to be due to
an early attempt to bring Levi (Aeveis) the publican
(Lk. v. 27) within the Twelve. ]*
Odracoa [cf. B. 7], -ns, 7, (akin to ads [better, allied
to rapdoow ete., from its tossing; ef. Vanitek, p. 303];
Sept. for 0°), [fr. Hom. down], the sea; [on its distinc-
tion from médayos see the latter word]; a. univ.:
Mt. xxiit. 155) Mk- xi. 235 Lk. xvit2) 63 xxi. 25; Ro.1ix.
2 2iCouxia26n Hebiexiall2= Jas: 163 Jude 13; Kev-
vii. 1-3, ete.; epyalerOar tiv Odd. (see epydfopat, 2 a.),
Rey. xviii. 17; 1 wéAayos ths Gad. (see wédayos, a.), Mt.
xviii. 6; joined with yj and ovpavds it forms a periph-
rasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; Rey. v.
13S 3, (6 (MU NMlaBlone is mabye vy (laleystos ti yy Jets, @-dhie
(exlvi.) 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 3, 2; [e. Ap. 2, 10, 1]); among
the visions of the Apocalypse a glassy sea or sea of glass
is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this
is not quite clear: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2. b. spec. used
[even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115); B. § 124, 8b.]
of the Mediterranean Sea: Acts x. 6,32; xvii. 14; of
the Red Sea (see épvOpds), 1 epvdpa Odd., Acts vil. 36;
1 Co. x. 1 sq.; Heb. xi. 29. By a usage foreign to native
Grk. writ. [ef. Aristot. meteor. 1, 13 p. 351%, 8 4 td
tov Kavxacov iuyn iy Kadovow of ékei Oddatray, and
Hesych. defines Aiuv: 1 Oddagoa kai 6 dkeavds] em-
ployed like the Hebr. 0° [e. g. Num. xxxiv. 11], by Mt.
Mk. and Jn. (nowhere by Lk.) of the Lake of Pevyaa-
per (q.V.): 7 OaX. THs Tadtdaias, Mt. iv. 18; xv. 29; Mk.
1.163 vil. 31, (similarly Lake Constance, der Bodensee, is
called mare Suebicum, the Suabian Sea); rijs TiBepuddos,
Jn. xxi. 1; ris Taher. rhs TiBepsddos (on which twofold
gen. cf. W. § 30, 3 N. 3; [B. 400 (343)]), Jn. vi.1; more
frequently simply 7) @d\acoca: Mt.iv. 15,18; viii. 24, 26
sq. 32; xiii. 1, etc.; Mk. ii. 13; iii. 7; iv. 1, 39; v. 13,
etc.; Jn. vi. 16-19, 22, 25; xxi. 7. Of. Furrer in Schen-
kel ii. 322 sqq.; [see Tevynoaper |.
Barro ; 1. prop. to warm, keep warm, (Lat. foveo):
Hom. et sqq. 2. like the Lat. foveo, i. q. to cherish
with tender love, to foster with tender care: Eph. v. 29;
1 Th. ii. 7; ((Theocr. 14, 38]; Alciphr. 2,4; Antonin.
5, 1).*
Oavartos
Odpap [Treg. Capudp], 7, (19K [i. e. palm-tree]), Ta-
mar, prop. name of a woman, the daughter-in-law of
Judah, son of the patriarch Jacob (Gen. xxxviii. 6): Mt.
Loe’
SapBew, -6; Pass., impf. €GapBovpunv; 1 aor. dapBnOnv ;
(@apuBos, q. v-) 5 1. to be astonished: Acts ix. 6 Ree.
(Hom., Soph., Eur.) 2. to astonish, terrify: 2S. xxii.
5; pass. to be amazed: Mk. i. 27; x. 32; foll. by emi w.
dat. of the thing, Mk. x. 24; to be frightened, 1 Mace.
vi. 8; Sap. xvii. 3; Plut. Caes. 45; Brut. 20. [Comp.:
ex-Oap.Béw. | *
0480s [allied with tados amazement, fr. a Sanskrit
root signifying to render immovable; Curtius § 233;
Vanitek p. 1130], -ous, 76; fr. Hom. down; amazement:
Lk. iv. 86; vw. 9; ActsaH..10*
Oavdcinos, -ov, (Gaveiv, Gavatos), deadly: Mk. xvi. 18.
({Aeschyl.], Soph., Eur., Plat., sqq.) *
Oavatn-ddpos, -ov, (Gavaros and depw), death-bringing,
deadly: Jas. iii. 8. (Num. xviii. 22; Job xxxiii. 23;
4 Mace. viii. 17, 25; xv. 26; Aeschyl., Plat., Arist.,
Diod., Xen., Plut., al.)*
Odvaros, -ov, 6, (Gavetv); Sept. for AyD and In, also
for 135 pestilence [W. 29 note]; (one of the nouns often
anarthrous, cf. W. § 19, 1s. v.; [B. § 124, 8¢.]; Grimm,
Com. on Sap. p. 59); death; 1. prop. the death of
the body, i. e. that separation (whether natural or violent)
of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is
ended: Jn. xi. 4, [13]; Acts i. 24 [Trmre. adov] (on
this see @div); Phil. ii. 27,30; Heb. vii. 23; ix. 15 sy.;
Rev. ix. 6; xvili.8; opp. to (on, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii.
22; 2Co.i. 9; Phil. i. 20; with the implied idea of future
misery in the state beyond, 1 Co. xv. 21; 2 Tim. i. 10;
Heb. ii. 14 sq.; i. q. the power of death, 2 Co. iv. 12.
Since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was con-
ceived of as being very dark, yopa kai oxed Oavdrov
(AyD 93) is equiv. to the region of thickest darkness, i. e.
figuratively, a region enveloped in the darkness of igno-
rance and sin: Mt.iv.16; Lk.i. 79, (fr. Is. ix. 2); @dva-
ros is used of the punishment of Christ, Ro. v. 10; vi.
3-5; 1 Co. xi. 26; Phil. iii. 10; Col. i. 22; Heb. ii. [9],
14; ca ew Twa ex Oavdrov, to free from the fear of death,
to enable one to undergo death fearlessly, Heb. v. 7 [but
al. al.]; prerOar ék Gavarov, to deliver from the danger
of death, 2 Co. i. 10; plur. @dvaror, deaths (i. e. morte!
perils) of various kinds, 2 Co. xi. 23; TepiduTros ews
Gavdrov, even unto death, i. e. so that am almost dying of
sorrow, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34, (AeAdanuar €ws Oavd-
tov, Jonah iv. 9; Avan ews Oavarov, Sir. xxxvii. 2, ef.
Judg. xvi. 16); wéype Gavarov, so as not to refuse to un-
dergo even death, Phil. ii. 8; also dypc Oavdrov, Rev. ii.
@avatos
10; xil.11; éopaypévos cis bavarov, that has received
a deadly wound, Rev. xiii. 3; mAnyq @avarov, a deadly
wound {death-stroke, cf. W. § 34, 3 b.], Rev. xiii. 3, 12;
ide Gavaroy, to experience death, Lk. ii. 26; Heb. xi.
5; also yeveoGar Oavdrov [see yeto, 2], Mt. xvi. 28; Mk.
ix. 1; Lk. ix. 27; dcoKew twa dype Oavarov, even to de-
struction, Acts xxii. 4; xaraxpivew twa Gavar@, to con-
demn one to death (ad mortem damnare, Tacit.), Mt. xx.
18 [here Tdf. cis 6av.|; Mk. x. 33, (see KATAKPIV@, 2.) ;
mopever Oa eis Gay. to undergo death, Lk. xxii. 33; mapa-
6i86va zwa eis Gay. that he may be put to death, Mt.
x. 21; Mk. xiii. 12; pass. to be given over to the peril
of death, 2 Co. iv. 11; mapaé. cis xpipa Oavdrov, Lk. xxiv.
20; amoxreivai twa év Gavarw (a Hebraism [cf. B. 184
(159 sq-.)]), Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, ef. W. 29 note]; airia
Gavarov (see airia, 2), Acts xiii. 28; xxviii. 18; G£idv re
Oavarov, some crime worthy of the penalty of death,
Acts xxiii. 29; xxv. 11, 25; [xxvi. 31]; Lk. xxiii. 15, 22
[here atriov (q. v. 2b.) 6av.]; évoxos Gavarov, worthy of
punishment by death, Mt. xxvi. 66; Mk. xiv. 64; Oavaro
Tehevrat@, let him surely be put to death, Mt. xy. 4;
Mk. vii. 10, after Ex. xxi. 17 Sept. (Hebr. nov nD); ef.
W. § 44 fin. N. 3; [B. u. s.]; Oav. cravpod, Phil. ii. 8;
toia Gavarw, by what kind of death, Jn. xii. 33; xviii.
32; xxi. 19. The inevitable necessity of dying, shared
alike by all men, takes on in the popular imagination
the form of a person, a tyrant, subjugating men to
his power and confining them in his dark dominions:
Ro-vi 9; 1 Co. xv. [26], 54,56; Rev. xxi. 4; Hades
is associated with him as his partner: 1 Co. xv. 55 RG;
Rey. i. 18 (on which see kheis); vi. 8; xx. 13, [14*], (Ps.
XVil. (xvili.) 5; cxiv. (cxvi.) 3; Hos. xiii. 14; Sir. xiv.
12). 2. metaph. the loss of that life which alone is
worthy of the name, i. e. the misery of soul arising from
sin, which begins on earth but lasts and increases after the |
death of the body: 2 Co. iii. 7; Jas. i. 15, (Clem. Rom.
2 Cor. 1, 6 says of life before conversion to Christ, 6 Bios |
quay Gdros GAXo ovdev Fy ei wi Oavaros (cf. Philo, praem.
et poenis § 12, and reff. in 4 below]); opp. to 9 (wn, Ro.
vii. 10, 13; 2 Co. ii. 16; opp. to cwrnpia, 2 Co. vii. 10;
i. q. the cause of death, Ro. vii. 13; calew Woyny ex
Oavarov, Jas. v. 20; peraSeBnxévar ex tov Gavdrov eis TF.
Conv, Jn. v. 24; 1 In. iii. 14; pévew ev ro Bavaro, 1 Jn. |
lil. 14; Gewpetv Gavarov, Jn. viii. 51; yeverbar Gavarov, 52
(see 1 above); duapria and duapravew mpds Gavarov (see
283
vill. 36.
Gpapria, 2 b.), 1 Jn. v.16 sq. (in the rabbin. writers |
maa? xv — after Num. xviii. 22,
dpos — is a crimen capitale). 3. the miserable state
of the wicked dead in hell is called —now simply 6avaros,
Ro. i. 32 (Sap. i. 12 sq.; ii. 24; Tatian or. ad Graec. c.
13; the author of the ep. ad Diognet. c. 10, 7 distin-
guishes between 6 boxav évOdde Gavatos, the death of the
body, and 6 dvrws Oavatos, 6s puAdacerat Tois katakptOn-
gopévors eis TO TIP TO almvov); now 6 Sevtepos Bavaros
and 6 Oav. 6 devr. (as opp. to the former death, i. e. to
that by which life on earth is ended), Rev. ii. 11; xx. 6,
14°; xxi. 8, (as in the Targums on Deut. xxxiii. 6; Ps.
xviii. (xlix.) 11; Is. xxii. 14; Ixvi. 15; [for the Grk.
Sept. dyaptia Bavarn- |
| I am made of good courage by one, 2 Co. vii. 16.
|
|
|
|
Gatpa
use of the phrase cf. Plut. de facie in orbe lunae 27, 6
p- 942 £.]; @dvaros aimvos, Barn. ep. 20, 1 and in eccl.
writ. [6 didvos Oavaros, Philo, post. Cain. § 11 fin.; see
also Wetstein on Rev. ii. 11]). 4. In the widest
sense, death comprises all the miseries arising from sin,
as well physical death as the loss of a life consecrated to
God and blessed in him on earth (Philo, alleg. legg. i. § 33
6 Wuyis Oavaros dperis pev bOopd éart, kakias 8é avadns,
[de profug. § 21 Odvatos Wuyns 6 pera Kcaxlas ori Bios,
esp. §$ 10,11; quod det. pot. insid. §§ 14,15; de poster.
Cain. § 21, and de praem. et poen. as in 2 above]), to
be followed by wretchedness in the lower world (opp. to
(on aimvos): Oavaros seems to be so used in Ro. v. 12;
vi. 16, 21, [23; yet al. refer these last three exx. to 3
above]; vii. 24; viii. 2,6; death, in this sense, is per-
sonified in Ro. v. 14,17, 21; vii.5. Others, in all these
pass. as well as those cited under 2, understand physical
death; but see Philippi on Ro. v. 12; Messner, Lehre
der Apostel, p. 210 sqq.*
Bavarde, -&; fut. Gavaroow; 1 aor. inf. Gavardou, [3
pers. plur. subjunc. @avatoowor, Mt. xxvi. 59 RG];
Pass., [pres. @avatotpar]; 1 aor. éGavareOnv; (fr. Odva-
tos); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for n7, 37377,
ete. 1. prop. to put to death: twa, Mt. x. 21; xxvi.
596" xxvil. 15 Mike xiii: 125 xiveod ;) Lk. sax: 16; 2:00.
vi. 9; 1 Pet. ili. 18; pass., by rhetorical hyperbole, to
be in the state of one who is being put to death, Ro.
2. metaph. a. to make to die i. e. destroy,
render extinct (something vigorous), Vulg. mortifico [A.
V. mortify|: ri, Ro. viii. 13. b. Pass. with dat. of the
thing, by death to be liberated from the bond of anything
[lit. to be made dead in relation to; cf. W. 210 (197); B.
178 (155)]: Ro. vii. 4.*
Oarra: 1 aor. Gaya; 2 aor. pass. érapyv; fr. Hom.
down; Sept. for 2p; to bury, inter, [BB.DD. s. v. Bur-
ial; cf. Becker, Charicles, sc. ix. Excurs. p. 390 sq.]:
twa, Mt. viii. 21 sq.; xiv. 12; Lk. ix. 59sq.; xvi. 22; Acts
ii. 29; v.6, 9sq.; 1 Co. xv.4. [Comp.: cuvr-Oarre.]*
Odpa [WH Capa], 6, (MIA a journey, or a halt on a
journey [al. ‘loiterer’]), indecl. prop. name, Terah, the
father of Abraham: LK. iii. 34.*
@appéw (a form current fr. Plato on for the Ionic and
earlier Attic Oapoéw).-@; 1 aor. inf. Oappjoa ; [fr. Hom.
on]; to be of good courage, to be hopeful, confident: 2 Co.
y. 6, 8; Heb. xiii. 6; to be bold: rh meroOnoer, with the
confidence, 2 Co. x. 2; els twa, towards (against) one,
2 Co.x.1; év re, the grouna of my confidence is in one,
[Syn.
see ToApde. | *
Bapeéw, -; (see Gappéw) ; to be of good courage, be of
good cheer; in the N. T. only in the impv.: 6dpoe., Lk.
viii. 48 R G; Mt. ix. 2, 22; Mk. x. 49; Acts xxiii. 11,
(Sept. for xT AORN, Gen. xxxv. 17, ete.); @apaeire, Mt.
xiv. 27; Mk. vi. 50; Jn. xvi. 33, (Sept. for NVAUTRN,
Ex. xiv. 13; Joel ii. 22, etc.). [Syn. see roApdo.|*
Odpoos, -ovs, ro, courage, confidence: Acts xxvill. 15.*
@adpa, -ros, 70, (QAOMAI [to wonder at], to gaze at,
ef. Bitm. Gram. § 114 s.v.; Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 196 ; Curtius
davpala
§ 308); 1. a wonderful thing, a marvel: 2 Co. xi. 14
LT Tr WH. ~ 2. wonder: Oavydcew Gaipa péya (cf. W.
§ 32, 2; [B. § 131, 5]), to wonder [with great wonder
i. e.] exceedingly, Rev. xvii. 6. (In both senses in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. Job xvii. 8; xviii. 20.) *
Gavpdtw; impf. edavpagov; fut. davparoua (Rev. xvii.
8 RGT Tr, a form far more com. in the best Grk. writ.
also than Oavpdow; cf. Kriiger § 40 s.v.; Kiihner § 343
s.v.; [Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. e@avpaca ;1 aor. pass. Oav-
pdoOnv in a mid. sense (Rev. xiii. 3 R* L Tr txt.) ; also
1 fut. pass., in the sense of the mid., davyacOjaopat (Rev.
xvii. 8 L WH; but the very few exx. of the mid. use in
prof. auth. are doubtful; cf. Stephanus, Thesaur. iv. p.
259 sq.; [yet see Veitch s.v.]); to wonder, wonder at,
marvel: absol., Mt. viii. 10, 27; ix. 8 Rec., 33; xv. 31;
Xxi. 20; xxii. 22; xxvii. 14; Mk. vy. 20; vi.51([Ree.; L
br. Tr mrg. br.]; xv. 5; Lk. i. 21 [see below], 63; viii. 25;
505 UNS posh ly Obie ye AUR Vabls Weir, NOs es We oaye 187
xiii. 41; Rev. xvii. 7 sq.; with acc. of the pers. Lk, vii.
9; with acc. of the thing, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br.
WH reject the vs. (see mpés, I. 1 a. init.and 2b.)]; Jn. v.
28; Acts vii. 81; Oadpa péya (see Oadua, 2), Rev. xvii.
6; mpoowmov, to admire, pay regard to, one’s external
appearance, i. e. to be influenced by partiality, Jude 16
(Sept. for o39 81, Deut. x. 17; Job xiii. 10; Prov.
xviii. 5; Is. ix. 14, ete.); foll. by da 71, Mk. vi. 6 ; Jn. vii.
21 where 6:a rodro (omitted by Tdf.) is to be joined to vs.
21 [so G L Tr mrg.; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.; W.
§7, 3], (Isocr. p. 52 d.; Ael. v. h. 12, 6; 14, 36); [foll.
by év w. dat. of object, acc. to the constr. adopted by
some in Lk. i. 21 €Oavp. ev r xpoviferv adrdy, at his tarry-
ing; cf. W. § 33, b.; B. 264 (227); 185 (160 sq.); Sir.
xi. 19 (21); evang. Thom. 15, 2; but see above]; foll.
by éni w. dat. of pers. Mk. xii. 17[RGLTr]; by em w.
dat. of the thing, Lk. ii. 33; iv. 22; ix. 43; xx. 26; [Acts
iii. 12], (Xen., Plat., Thuc., al.; Sept.) ; mepi rwvos, Lk.
ii. 18; by a pregnant constr. [cf. B. 185 (161) ] édavpacev
1. yq bia Tov Onpiov, followed the beast in wonder, Rev.
xiii. 3 [cf. B. 59 (52)]; foll. by drt, to marvel that, etc.,
Lk. xi. 38; Jn. iii. 7; iv. 27; Gal. i.6; by ef (see ed, I. 4),
Mk. xv. 44; 1 Jn. iii. 13. Pass. to be wondered at, to be
had in admiration, (Sir. xxxviii. 3; Sap. viii. 11; 4 Mace.
xviii. 3), foll. by ev w. dat. of the pers. whose lot and
condition gives matter for wondering at another, 2 Th.
i. 10; év with dat. of the thing, Is. lxi. 6. [Comp.: ék-
Gavpdato. |*
Pavpdcros, -a, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (@adpua),
(fr. Hes., Hom. (h. Mere. 443) down], wonderful, mar-
vellous; neut. plur. Oavudova (Sept. often for nid),
also for x93), wonderful deeds, wonders: Mt. xxi. 15.
(Cf. Trench § xci.; better, Schmidt ch. 168, 6.] *
Savpacrds, -7, -dv, (Gavuatw), in Grk. writ. fr. [Hom.
(h. Cer. ete.) ], Hdt., Pind. down; [interchanged in Grk.
writ. with @avudacos, cf. Lob. Path. Elem. ii. 341]; won-
derful, marvellous; i.e. a. worthy of pious admiration,
admirable, excellent: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36,
2; for "8, Ps. vill. 2; xcii. (xciii.) 4, (5)). -b. passing
human comprehension: Mt. xxi. 42 and Mk. xii. 11, (fr.
284
Oeiov
Ps. cxvii. (exviii.) 22 sq., where for xD), as Job xlii. 3;
Mic. vii. 15, etc.). ¢. causing amazement joined with
terror: Rev. xv. 1, 3, (so for N13, Ex. xv. 11, etc.). d.
marvellous i. e. extraordinary, striking, surprising: 2 Co.
xi. 14 RG (see Oadua, 1); In. ix. 30.*
Ged, -as, 7, (fem. of Oeds), [fr. Hom. down], a goddess:
Acts xix. 27, and Ree. also in 35, 37.*
Oedopar, -dyar: 1 aor. eGeacdunv; pt. teOéapar; 1 aor.
pass. €@ed@ynv in pass. sense (Mt. vi. 1; xxiii.5; Mk
xvi. 11; Thue. 3, 38, 3; ef. Kriiger § 40 s.v.; [but
Kriiger himself now reads dpac6év in Thue. l.c.; see
Veitch s. v.; W. § 38,7 ¢.; B. 52 (46)]); depon. verb;
(fr. 6éa, GAOMAI, with which adpa is connected, q. v.) ;
to behold, look upon, view attentively, contemplate, in Grk.
writ. often used of public shows; cf. Oéa, Oéaya, Oéa-
tpov, GearpiCa, etc. [see below ]) : ri, Mt. xi. 7; Lk. vii. 24;
Jn. iv. 35; xi. 45; of august things and persons that are
looked on with admiration: ri, Jn.i. 14, 32; 1 Jn. i. 1;
Acts xxii. 9, (2 Mace. iii. 36); tid, with a ptep., Mk.
xvi. 14; Actsi.11; foll. by dru, 1 Jn. iv.14; OeaOnvar ind
twos, Mk. xvi. 11; mpos 76 Geabqvat adrois, in order to
make a show to them, Mt. vi. 1; xxili. 5; to view, take a
view of: ti, Lk. xxiii. 55; ruwd, Mt. xxii. 11; in the sense
of visiting, meeting with a person, Ro. xv. 24 (2 Chr.
xxll. 6; Joseph. antt. 16, 1,2); to learn by looking: foll.
by 6dr, Acts viii. 18 Rec.; to see with the eyes, 1 Jn. iv.
12; i.q. (Lat. conspicio) to perceive: rivd, Jn. viii. 10
RG; Acts xxi. 27; foll. by ace. with ptep., Lk. v. 27
[not Lmrg.]; Jn. i. 38; foll. by or, Jn. vi. 5.*
Cf. O. F’. Fritzsche, in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 295 sqq.
[Ace. to Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 11, @e&o@a: in its earlier classic
use denotes often a wondering regard, (cf. even in Strabo
14, 5, 7a éwrd Oeduatai.q. Oatyata). This specific shade of
meaning, however, gradually faded out, and left the more
general signification of such a looking as seeks merely the
satisfaction of the sense of sight. Cf. dewpéw.|
Gearpitw: (Aéarpov, q.v.) ; prop. to bring upon the stage ;
hence to set forth as a spectacle, expose to contempt; Pass.,
pres. ptcp. Gearpifsuevos [A. V. being made a gazing-
stock}, Heb. x. 83. (Several times also in eccl. and
Byzant. writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v.]; but in the same sense
exOearpi¢w in Polyb. 8, 91,10; al.; [ef. W. 25 (24) note;
also Tdf. ed. 7 Proleg. p. lix. sq.].) *
Ogarpov, -ov, Td, (Aeaopac) ; 1. a theatre, a place in
which games and dramatic spectacles are exhibited, and
public assemblies held (for the Greeks used the theatre
also as a forum): Acts xix. 29, 31. 2. i. q. O€a and
O€apa, a public show (Aeschin. dial. socr. 3, 20; Achil.
Tat. 1, 16 p. 55), and hence, metaph., a man who is ex-
habited to be gazed at and made sport of: 1 Co. iv. 9 [A.
V. a spectacle].*
Qetov, -ov, 7d, (apparently the neut. of the adj. éeios i. q.
divine incense, because burning brimstone was regarded
as having power to purify, and to ward off contagion
[but Curtius § 320 allies it w. dio; cf. Lat. fumus,
Eng. dust]), brimstone: Lk. xvii. 29; Rev. ix. 17 Sq.; Xiv.
10; xix. 20; [xx. 10]; xxi.8. (Gen. xix. 24; Ps. x. (xi.)
6; Ezek. xxxviii. 22; Hom. Il. 16, 228; Od. 22, 481,
Getos
493; (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 99 c.3; Ael. v. h. 13, 15[16];
Hdian. 8, 4, 26 [9 ed. Bekk.].) *
Getos, -eia, -ctov, (eds), [fr. Hom. down], divine : 4 beta
dvvayus, 2 Pet.i.3; vars (Diod. 5, 31), ibid. 4; neut. rd
Gciov, divinity, deity (Lat. numen divinum), not only
used by the Greeks to denote the divine nature, power,
providence, in the general, without reference to any
individual deity (as Hdt. 3,108; Thuc. 5, 70; Xen. Cyr.
4, 2,15; Hell. 7, 5,13; mem. 1,4, 18; Plat. Phaedr. p:
242 c.; Polyb. 32, 25, 7; Diod. 1, 6; 18, 3; 12; 16,60;
Leian. de sacrif. 1; pro imagg. 13, 17. 28), but also by
Philo (as in mundi opif. § 61; de agric. 17; leg. ad Gai.
1), and by Josephus (antt. 1,3,4; 11,1; 2,12, 4; 5, 2,
Milley Ong 5 125165, 00) (noel, 6,25 10,7 2) LAO N 5. 17,
2,45; 20,11, 2; b.j.3, 8, 3; 4, 3, 10), of the one, true
God; hence most appositely employed by Paul, out of
regard for Gentile usage, in Acts xvii. 29.*
Gedtns, -nTos, 7, divinity, divine nature: Ro. i. 20.
(Sap. xviii. 9; Philo in opif. § 61 fin.; Plut. symp. 665 a.;
Leian. calumn. c. 17.) [Syn. see Oedrns.]*
Veradns, -es, (fr. Geiov brimstone [q. v.]), of brimstone,
sulphurous: Rev. ix. 17; a later Grk. word; cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 228; [ Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
GéAnpa, -ros, Td, (Aw), a word purely bibl. and eccl.
{yet found in Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p. 815%, 21];
Sept. for ym and ix; will,i.e. a. what one wishes
or has determined shall be done, [i. e. objectively, thing
willed|: Lk. xii.47; Jn. v.30; 1 Co. vii. 37; 1 Th.v.
18; 2 Tim. ii. 26; Heb. x.10; Rev.iv.11; 6éAnua rov
6eov is used —of the purpose of God to bless mankind
through Christ, Acts xxii. 14; Eph.i. 9; Col. i. 9; of what
God wishes to be done by us, Ro. xii. 2; Col. iv. 12 [W.
111 (105)]; 1 Pet. iv. 2; and simply 76 OeAnpa, Ro. ii. 18
[W. 594 (553)] (Sir. xliii. 16 (17) [but here the better
txt. now adds avrod, see Fritzsche; in patrist. Grk., how-
ever, 6éAnua is so used even without the art.; cf. Ignat.
ad Rom. 1,1; ad Eph. 20,1, ete.]); rod kupiov, Eph. v.
17; plur. commands, precepts: [Mk. iii. 35 WH. mrg.];
Acts xiii. 22, (Ps. cii. (ciii.) 7; 2 Macc. i. 3); éori 76 6€-
Anya tivos, foll. by wa, In. vi. 39 sq.; 1 Co. xvi. 12, ef.
Mt. xviii. 14; foll. by inf., 1 Pet. ii. 15; by acc. with inf.,
1 Th. iv.3. [Cf. B. 237 (204); 240 (207); W.§ 44, 8.]
b. ig. 7d Oédeww, [i. e. the abstract act of willing, the
subjective] will, choice: 1 Pet. iii. 17 [ef. W. 604 (562)];
2 Pet. i. 21; srovety r. OX. rwvos (esp. of God), Mt. vii.
21; xii. 50; xxi. 31; Mk. iii. 35 [here WH mrg. the plur.,
see above]; Jn. iv. 34; vi. 38; vii. 17; ix.31; Eph. vi.
6; Heb. x. 7, 9,36; xiii. 21; 1Jn.ii.17; ro Oed. (LT Tr
WH BovAnua) tivos xarepydteoOat, 1 Pet. iv. 3; yiverat TO
6éd. twos. Mt. vi. 10; xxvi. 42; Lk. xi. 2 LR; xxii. 42;
Acts xxi. 14; 4 Bovdy rod OeAnuaros, Eph. i. 115; 7 eddo-
kia Tov Ged. ib. 5; ev Te OeX. Tov Geod, if God will, Ro. i.
10; dca OeAnparos beod, Ro. xv. 32; 1Co.i.1; 2Co.i.1;
viii. 5; Eph.i.1; Col. i. 1; 2 Tim. i. 1; xara 10 66.
rod 6eod, Gal. i.4; [i Pet. iv. 19]; 1Jn.v.14. iq.
pleasure: Lk. xxiii. 25; i. q. inclination, desire: capxés,
avdpds, Jn. i. 13; plur. Eph. ii. 3. [SyN. see brow,
fin.”
285
berw
BeAnors, -ews, 7, (BAW), i. q. Td Oerewv, a willing, will:
Heb. ii. 4. (Ezek. xviii. 23; 2 Chr. xv. 15; Prov. viii. 35;
Sap. xvi. 25; [Tob. xii. 18]; 2 Macc. xii. 16; 3 Mace. ii.
26 ; [plur. in] Melissa epist. ad Char. p. 62 Orell.; acc. to
Pollux [l. 5 ¢. 47] a vulgarism (iSiorikdv); [cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 353].) *
dw (only in this form in the N. T.; in Grk. auth. also
€6édo [Veitch s. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7; B. 57 (49)]);
impf. 70edov; [fut. 3 pers. sing. OeAnoe, Rev. xi. 5 WH
mrg.]; 1 aor. n6édnoa; (derived apparently fr. édeiv
with a fuller aspiration, so that it means prop. to seize
with the mind; but Curtius p. 726, ed. 5, regards its
root as uncertain [he inclines, however, to the view of
Pott, Fick, Vaniéek and others, which connects it with
a root meaning to hold to]); Sept. for mas and ydn; To
WILL, (have in mind,) intend; i. e. 1. to be resolved
or determined, to purpose: absol., 6 Oédwv, Ro. ix. 16;
Tov Geov GéXovros if God will, Acts xviii. 21; av 6 Kiptos
OeAjon (in Attic eddy Oeds Gedy, iy of Oeot €kwow [cf. Lob.
u. s.]), 1 Co. iv. 19; Jas. iv. 15; xadas 76éAnce, 1 Co. xii.
18; xv. 38; ri, Ro. vii. 15 sq. 19 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 36; Gal.
v.17; with the aorist inf., Mt. xx. 14; xxvi.15; Jn. vi.
21 (where the meaning is, they were willing to ‘receive
him into the ship, but that was unnecessary, because
unexpectedly the ship was nearing the land; cf. Liicke,
B-Crusius, Ewald, [Godet], al. ad loc.; W. § 54,4; [B.
375 (821)]); Jn. vii. 44; Acts xxv.9; Col.i.27; 1 Th.
ii. 18; Rev. xi. 5, ete.; with the present inf., Lk. x. 29
RG; Jn. vi. 67; vii. 17; viii. 44; Acts xxiv. 6 [Rece.];
Ro. vii. 21; Gal. iv. 9 [here T Tr txt. WH txt. 1 aor. inf.];
with an inf. suggested by the context, Jn. v. 21 (ods dedet,
sc. Cwonoijoat); Mt. viii. 2; Mk. iii. 13; vi. 22; Ro. ix.
18; Rev. xi. 6, etc. ov O€Aw to be unwilling: with the
BOVISHUNE WMT PLO) a Kaen D2 eXXTT not VU Ken Vie 2 Orme Kee
xv. 28; Jn. v.40; Acts vii. 39; 1 Co. xvi. 7; Rev. ii. 21
[not Ree.], ete.; with the present inf., Jn. vii.1; Acts
xiv. 13; xvii. 18; 2 Th. iii. 10, etc.; with the inf. om.
and to be gathered fr. the context, Mt. xviii. 30; xxi.
29; Lk. xviii. 4, etc.; O€Aw and ov 6éAo foll. by the acc.
with inf., Lk. i. 62; 1 Co. x. 20; on the Pauline phrase od
Oérw ipas dyvoeiv, see dyvoéw, a.; corresponding to 6é\w
ipas eidévar, 1 Co. xi. 3; Col. ii 1. Oédewv, used of a
purpose or resolution, is contrasted with the carry-
ing out of the purpose into act: opp. to moveiv, mpdo-
cew, Ro. vii. 15, 19; 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. (on which latter
pass. cf. De Wette and Meyer; W. § 61, 7b.); to evep-
yetv, Phil. ii. 13, cf. Mk. vi. 19; Jn. vii. 44. One is said
also 6éAew that which he is on the point of doing: Mk.
vi. 48; Jn.i. 43 (44); and it is used thus also of things
that tend or point to some conclusion [cf. W. § 42, 1 b.;
B. 254 (219)]: Acts il. 12; Xvil. 20. YavOdver avrovs
rovro GéXovras this (viz. what follows, dr etc.) escapes
them of their own will, i. e. they are purposely, wilfully,
ignorant, 2 Pet. iii. 5, where others interpret as follows:
this (viz. what has been said previously) desiring (i. e.
holding as their opinion [for exx. of this sense see Soph.
Lex. s. v. 4]), they are ignorant ete.; but cf. De Wette
ad loc. and W. § 54, 4 note; [B. § 150, 8 Rem.]. ras
bér\o
émiOupias Tod rarpos tpav Oedere moveiy it is your purpose
to fulfil the lusts of your father, i. e. ye are actuated by
him of your own free knowledge and choice, Jn. viii. 44
[W. u.s.; B. 375 (321)]. 2. i. q. to desire, to wish:
ri, Mt. xx. 21; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.];
Jn. xv. 7; 1 Co. iv. 21; 2Co. xi.12; foll. by the aorist
inf., Mt. v. 40; xii. 38; xvi. 25; xix. 17; Mk. x. 43 sq. ;
Lk. viii. 20; xxiii. 8; Jn. v. 6, 35 (ye were desirous of
rejoicing) ; xii. 21; Gal. iii. 2; Jas. ii. 20; 1 Pet. iii. 10;
foll. by the present inf., Jn. ix. 27; Gal. iv. 20 (7OeAov [
could wish, on which impf. see edyouat, 2); the inf. is
wanting and to be supplied fr. the neighboring verb,
Mt. xvii. 12; xxvii. 15; Mk.ix.13; Jn. xxi. 18; foll. by
the acc. and inf., Mk. vii. 24; Lk.i.62; Jn. xxi. 22 sq.;
Ro. xvi. 19; 1 Co. vii. 7, 32; xiv.5; Gal. vi. 13; ov Oédo
to be unwilling, (desire not): foll. by the aor. inf., Mt.
xxiil. 4; Lk. xix. 14, 27; 1 Co. x. 20; foll. by iva, Mt. vii.
1ORMMiksavis 25s ixs Olen Sonm lak visa lyme Meexvilena4
cf. W. § 44,8 b.; [B. § 139, 46]; foll. by the delib. subj.
(aor.): OéXevs ovAACE@pev adra (cf. the Germ. willst du,
sollen wir zusammenlesen? [Goodwin § 88]), Mt. xiii. 28 ;
add, Mt. xx. 32 [where L br. adds tva]; xxvi. 17; xxvii.
17, 21; Mk. x. 515 xiv. 112; xv. 9, 12) Tribr: @eA.]; Lk. ix.
54; xviii. 41; xxii. 9, (cf. W.§ 41 a.4b.5 B. § 139, 2);
foll. by ei, Lk. xii. 49 (see e?, I. 4); foll. by #, to prefer,
1 Co. xiv. 19 (see #, 3 d.). 3. i. q. to love; foll. by an
inf., to like to do a thing, be fond of doing: Mk. xii. 38;
Lk. xx. 46; cf. W. § 54, 4; [B. § 150, 8]. 4. in imi-
tation of the Hebr. yam, to take delight, have pleasure
[opp. by B. § 150, 8 Rem.; cf. W. § 33, a.; but see exx.
below]: & ru, in a thing, Col. ii. 18 (év cad, to delight
in goodness, Test. xii. Patr. p. 688 [test. Ash. 1; (cf. ets
Conv, p. 635, test. Zeb. 3); Ps. cxi. (cxii.) 1; cxlvi.
(exlvii.) 10]; &v rum, dat. of the pers., 1S. xviii. 22; 2S.
xv. 26; [1 K.x.9]; 2 Chr. ix. 8; for 3 A¥4, 1 Chr.
Xxvill. 4). twa, to love one: Mt. xxvii. 43 (Ps. xxi.
(xxii.) 9; [xvii. (xviii.) 20; xl. (xli.) 12]; Ezek. xviii.
32, cf. 23; Tob. xiii. 6; opp. to puceiv, Ignat. ad Rom.
8, 3; GeAnOjva is used of those who find favor, ibid. 8,
1). ri, Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, (fr. Hos. vi. 6); Heb. x. 5,
8, (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7). As respects the distinction
between BovAova and Gedo, the former seems to desig-
nate the will which follows deliberation, the latter
the will which proceeds from inclination. This ap-
pears not only from Mt. i. 19, but also from the fact that
the Sept. express the idea of pleasure, delight, by the
verb OéXew (see just above). The reverse of this dis-
tinction is laid down by Bitm. Lexil. i. p. 26 [Eng. trans.
p- 194]; Delitesch on Heb. vi.17. Acc. to Tittmann
(Syn. i. p. 124) OéXexv denotes mere volition, Botderbat
inclination; [ef. Whiston on Dem. 9,5; 124, 13].
[Philip Buttmann’s statement of the distinction between
the two words is quoted with approval by Schmidt (Syn. iii.
ch. 146), who adduces in confirmation (besides many exx.)
the assumed relationship between B. and Feamts, éamis; the
use of 6. in the sense of ‘resolve’ in such passages as Thuc.
5,9; of 0€Awy i. q..d€ws in the poets; of B. as parallel to
émiOupety in Dem. 29, 45, etc.; and pass. in which the two
words occur together and £. is apparently equiv. to ‘wish’
286
OewérLos
while 6. stands for ‘ will,’ as Xen. an. 4, 4,5; Eur. Alc. 281,
etc.,etc. At the same time it must be confessed that scholars
are far from harmonious on the subject. Many agree with
Prof. Grimm that 6. gives prominence to the emotive ele-
ment, B. to the rational and volitive; that 6. signifies the
choice, while B. marks the choice as deliberate and intelligent ;
yet they acknowledge that the words are sometimes used
indiscriminately, and esp. that @. as the less sharply defined
term is put where B. would be proper; see Ellendt, Lex.
Soph.; Pape, Handworterb.; Seiler, Worterb. d. Hom.,s. v.
Botroua; Suhle und Schnevdewin, Handworterb.; Crosby,
Lex. to Xen. an., s. v. €@€Aw; (Arnold’s) Pillon, Grk. Syn.
§ 129; Webster, Synt. and Syn. of the Grk. Test. p. 197;
Wilke, Clavis N. T., ed. 2, ii. 603; Schleusner, N. T. Lex.
s. Vv. Bota.; Munthe, Observv. phil. in N. T. ex Diod. Sic. ete.
p. 3; Valckenaer, Scholia etc. ii. 23; Westermann on Dem.
20,111; the commentators generally on Mt. as above; Bp.
Lghtft. on Philem. 13,14; Fiddle in Schaff’s Lange on Eph.
p- 42; this seems to be roughly intended by Ammonius
also: BotAccOa wey em) udvou Aexréov Tov AoyiKod: Td SE
6éAew Kal em) GAdyou (éov; (and Eustath. on Iliad 1, 112, p.
61, 2, says obx’ amAGs OéAw, GAAG BobAopat, brep exitacis TOD
déAew éoriv). On the other hand, LZ. and S. (s. v. €6éAw) ;
Passow ed. 5; Rost, Worterb. ed. 4: Schenkl, Schulworterb. ;
Donaldson, Crat. § 463 sq.; Wahl, Clav. Apocr., s. v. Bova. ;
Cremer s. vy. BotAouat and 6éAw; esp. Stallb. on Plato’s de
repub. 4, 13 p. 437 b., (cf. too Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 19,
19); Franke on Dem. 1, 1, substantially reverse the distinc-
tion, as does Eilicott on 1 Tim. v. 14; Wordsworth on 1 Th.
ii. 18. Although the latter opinion may seem to be favored
by that view of the derivation of the words which allies Bova.
with voluptas (Curtius § 659, cf. p. 726), and makes @éA. sig-
nify ‘to hold to something,’ ‘form a fixed resolve’ (see
above, ad init.), yet the predominant usage of the N. T.
will be evident to one who looks out the pass.*referred to
above (Fritzsche’s explanation of Mt. i. 19 is hardly natu-
ral) ; to which may be added such as Mt. ii. 18; ix. 13; xii.
38; xv. 28; xvil. 4 (xx. 21, 32); xxvi. 15, 39 (cf. Lk. xxii.
42); Mk. vi.19; vii. 24; 1x.30; x.35; xii. 38; xv. 9 (cf. Jn.
xviii. 39), 15 (where R. V. wishing is questionable; ef. Lk.
Xxi. 20) gduki x. 24 5 xv.0285) xvi 266 Inave Osuvie Wess xa
21; Acts x. 10; xviii. 15; Ro. vii. 19 (cf. 15, its opp. to pic,
and indeed the use of @¢Aw throughout this chapter) ; 1 Co. vii.
36, 39; xiv.35; Eph.i.11; 2 Th. iii. 10,ete. Such passages
as 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Pet. iii. 9 will be ranged now on one side,
now on the other; cf. 1 Co. xii. 11, 18. @éAw occurs in the
N. T. about five times as often as BovAoua: (on the relative
use of the words in classic writers see Tycho Mommsen in
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 415 sq.). The usage of the Sept.
(beyond the particular specified by Prof. Grimm) seems to
afford little light; see e. g. Gen. xxiv. 5,8; Deut. xxv. 7;
Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7, 9, etc. In modern Greek @éAw seems
to have nearly driven BotAoua out of use; on 6éAw as an
auxiliary cf. /ebd in Vincent and Dickson’s Handbook, App.
§§ 60,64. For exx. of the associated use of the words in
classic Grk., see Steph. Thesaur. s. v. BobAouas p. 366 d.; Bp.
Lghtft., Cremer, and esp. Schmidt, as above. |
Bepértos, -ov, (Oeya [i. e. thing laid down]), laid down
as a foundation, belonging to a foundation, (Diod. 5, 66;
Oepédtor iBor, Arstph. av. 1137); generally as a subst.,
6 Oepertos [se. AiBos] (1 Co. iii. 11 sq.; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Rev.
xxi. 19), and 76 Oepédsov (rarely so in Grk. writ., as [Ar
istot. phys. auscult. 2,9 p. 200%, 4]; Paus. 8, 32,2; [al.]),
the foundation (of a building, wall, city): prop., Lk. vi.
Oepwedtow
49; riOévar Oepédcov, Lk. vi. 48; xiv. 29; plur. of Oepercor
(chiefly so in Grk. writ.), Heb. xi. 10; Rev. xxi. 14, 19;
neut. ro Oeu. Acts xvi. 26 (and often in the Sept.);
metaph. the foundations, beginnings, first principles, of
an institution or system of truth: 1 Co. iii. 10, 12; the
rudiments, first principles, of Christian life and knowl-
edge, Heb. vi. 1 (ueravoias gen. of apposition [W. 531
(494)]); acourse of instruction begun by a teacher,
Ro. xv. 20; Christ is called Gewed. i. e. faith in him,
which is like a foundation laid in the soul on which is
built up the fuller and richer knowledge of saving truth,
1 Co. iii. 11; rév dmoordAwv (gen. of appos., on account
of what follows: évros . . . Xpuorod, [al. say gen. of origin,
see éroiKxodouéw; cf. W. § 30,1; Meyer or Ellicott ad
loc.]), of the apostles as preachers of salvation, upon
which foundation the Christian church has been built,
Kph. ii. 20; a solid and stable spiritual possession, on
which resting as on a foundation they may strive to lay
hold on eternal life, 1 Tim. vi.19; the church is appar-
ently called Oey. as the foundation of the ‘city of God,’
2 Tim. ii. 19, cf. 20 and 1 Tim. iii. 15. (Sept. several
times also for pS, a palace, Is. xxv. 2; Jer. vi. 5;
Amos i. 4, ete.) *
Ocpedidw: fut. eweAtwow; 1 aor. Cbeuedioca; Pass., pf.
ptcp. redewedtopévos; plupf. 3 pers. sing. tebeyediwro
(Mt. vii. 25; Lk. vi. 48 RG; without augm. cf. W. § 12,
9; [B. 33 (29); Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]); Sept. for 10°; [fr.
Xen. down]; to lay the foundation, to found: prop., thy
ynv, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 26; Prov. iii. 19; Is. xlviii. 13,
al.); ri emi mm, Mt. vii. 25; Lk. vi. 48. metaph. (Diod.
11, 68; 15, 1) to make stable, establish, [A. V. ground]:
of the soul, [1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing.] 1 Pet. v.10 [Ree.;
but T, Tr mrg. in br., the fut.]; pass., Eph. iii. 17 (18);
Coli i523"
Qe0-5iSaxros, -ov, (eds and didaxrés), taught of God: 1
Th. iv. 9. ([{Barn. ep. 21, 6 (cf. Harnack’s note) ];
eccles. writ. )*
Gc0-Adyos, -ov, 6, (eds and A€yw), in Grk. writ. [fr. Aris-
tot. on] one who speaks (treats) of the gods and divine
things, versed in sacred science ; (Grossmann, Quaestiones
Philoneae,i. p. 8, shows that the word is used also by Philo,
esp. of Moses [cf. de praem. et poen. § 9]). This title is
given to John in the inscription of the Apocalypse, acc.
to the Ree. text, apparently as the publisher and interpre-
ter of divine oracles, just as Lucian styles the same per-
son Oeodoyos in Alex. 19 that he calls mpogyrns in c. 22.
The common opinion is that John was called @eodAdyos in
the same sense in which the term was used of Gregory
of Nazianzus, viz. because he taught the Oedrns of the
Acyos. But then the wonder is, why the copyists did
not prefer to apply the epithet to him in the title of the
Gospel.*
Ocopaxdw, -&; (Peopdyos); to fight against God: Acts
xxiii. 9 Rec. (Eur., Xen., Diod., al.; 2 Mace. vii. 19.) *
eopaxos, -ov, 6, (beds and pdyopua.), fighting against
God, resisting God: Acts v. 39. (Symm.,Job xxvi. 5;
Prov. ix. 18; xxi. 16; Heracl. Pont. alleg. Homer. 1;
Leian. Jup. tr. 45.) *
287
Beds
Gedrrveverros, -ov, (eds anu mvéw), inspired by God:
ypagn, i. e. the contents of Scripture, 2 Tim. iii. 16 [see
mas, 1.1¢.]; coin, [pseudo-] Phocyl. 121 ; dverpor, Plut.
de plac. phil. 5, 2, 3 p. 904 f.; [Orac. Sibyll. 5, 406 (ef.
308); Nonn. paraphr. ev. Ioan. 1, 99]. (éumvevoros also
is used passively, but dmvevoros, evrvevoros, Tuplrvevatos,
[Svodimvevoros], actively, [and dvcavdrvevoros appar.
either act. or pass.; cf. W. 96 (92) note].)*
Qeds, -o0, 6 and 7, voc. Oe€, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii.
46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2
S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3
Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi.27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus.
h. e. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; cf. W.
§8, 2.c.; [B. 12 (11)]; ((on the eight or more proposed
derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after
Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root mean-
ing to supplicate, implore; hence the implored; per con-
tra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and S. s. v.
fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 5x, oN and mn,
a god, a goddess ; 1. a general appellation of deities
or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4;
once 7 Oeds, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; 6c0d dav} Kat
ovk avOparov, Acts xii. 22; avOpemos Sv moveis ceavroy
Gedv, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the Gentiles: Acts
xiv. 11; xix. 26; Aeydpevor Geol, 1 Co. viii. 58; of Pioes wy
dvres Oeoi, Gal. iv. 8; 70d Oeod ‘Pedav [q. v.], Acts vii. 43 ;
of angels: efot Oeot rodXoi, 1 Co. viii. 5° (on which cf.
Philo de somn. i. § 39 6 pév ddnOeia Oeds eis eoriv, of 8 ev
Kataypnoet Aeyduevor meiovs). [On the use of the sing.
Geds (and Lat. deus) as a generic term by (later) heathen
writ., see Norton, Genuinen. of the Gosp. 2d ed. iii. addit.
note D; cf. Dr. Ezra Abbot in Chris. Exam. for Nov.
1848, p. 389 sqq.; Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, ch. i.
§ii.; see Bib. Sacr. for July 1856, p.666 sq., and for addit.
exx. Négelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 129; also his Nachho-
merische Theol. p. 139 sq. ; Stephanus, Thes. s. v.; and
reff. (by Prof. Abbot) in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and
Exeg. i. p. 120 note. ] 2. Whether Christ is called
God must be determined from Jn. i.1; §x. 28; 1Jn.v.
20; Ro. ix. 5; Tit.ii.13; Heb. i. 8 sq., ete.; the matter
is still in dispute among theologians; cf. Grimm, Insti-
tutio theologiae dogmaticae, ed. 2, p. 228 sqq. [and the
discussion (on Ro. ix. 5) by Professors Dwight and Ab-
bot in Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. etc. u. s., esp. pp. 42 sqq.
113 sqq.]. 3. spoken of the only and true Gop: with
the article, Mt. iii. 9; Mk. xiii. 19; Lk. ii. 13; Acts
ii. 11, and very often; with prepositions: ék rov 6. Jn.
viii. 42, 47 and often in John’s writ.; imé rod 6. Lk. i.
26 [T Tr WH dé]; Acts xxvi. 6; mapa rod 8. In. viii.
40; ix. 16 [LT Tr WH here om. art.]; mapa 7@ 6. Ro.
ii. 13 [Tr txt. om. and L WH Tr mrg. br. the art.]; ix.
14; év 76 6. Col. iii. 3; erie 8. Lk. 1.47; els tov 6. Acts
xxiv. 15 [Tdf. mpds]; emt rov 0. Acts xv. 19; Xxvi. 18,
20; mpos tov 6. Jn. i. 2; Acts xxiv. [15 Tdf.], 16, and
many other exx. without the article: Mt. vi. 24; Lk.
iii. 2; xx. 88; Ro. viii. 8, 33; 2 Co. i. 21; v.19; vi. 7;
1 Th. ii. 5, ete.; with prepositions: amd Oeod, Jn. ill. 2;
xvi. 30; Ro. xiii. 1 [L T Tr WH io]; mapa Geod, PS powss Gis
Geos
éx Oeod, Acts v. 39; 2 Co. v. 1; Phil. iii. 9; mapa beg, 2
Th. i. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 4; xara Gedy, Ro. viii. 27; 2 Co. vil.
9sq.; cf. W.§ 19s. v. 6 Geds rwos (gen. of pers.), the
(guardian) God of any one, blessing and protecting him:
Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. xii. 26 sq. [29 WH mrg. (see below) ];
Lk. xx. 37; Jn. xx. 17; Acts iii. 13; xiii, 17; 2 Co. vi.
16; Heb. xi. 16; Rev. xxi. 3 [without 6; but GT Tr WH
txt.om. the phrase]; 6 beds pov, i. q. ot cil, d kal harpevw
(Acts xxvii. 23): Ro. i. 8; 1 Co. i. 4 [Tr mrg. br. the
gen.]; 2 Co. xii. 21; Phil. i. 3; iv. 19; Philem. 4 ; xvpsos 6
deds cov, Muar, bav, adrév (in imit. of Hebr. PrN mr,
ads , ppToe , OTIS): Mt. iv. 7; xxii. 37;
Mk. xii. 29 [see above]; Lk. iv. 8,12; x. 27; Acts ii.
39; cf. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test. p. 169; [and Bp.
Lghtft. as quoted s. v. kvptos, ¢. a. init.]; 6 eds x. marnp
rod kuptiou Hav Invod Xpurrov: Ro, xv. 6; 2 Co.i. 3; xi.
31 [LT Tr WH om. nu. and Xp.]; Eph. i. 3; Col.i. 3 (L
WH om. cai]; 1 Pet. i. 3; in which combination of words
the gen. depends on 6 6eés as well as on rarnp, cf. Fritz-
sche on Rom. iii. p. 232 sq.; [Oltramare on Ro. l.c.;
Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 4; but some would restrict it to
the latter; cf. e. g. Meyer on Ro. 1. ¢., Eph. l.c.; Ellic.
on Gal.l.c., Eph. 1. c.]; 6 Oeds tod kup. nu. Ino. Xp. Eph.
1.17; 6 Oeds x. matnp nav, Gal. i. 4; Phil. iv. 20; 1 Th.
i. 3; iii. 11, 13; eds 6 marnp, 1 Co. viii. 6; 6 Oeds K. maTnp,
1 Co. xv. 24; Eph. v. 20; Jas. i. 27; iii. 9 (Rec. ; al. cdpuos
x. 1]; amd Oeod marpos nuav, Ro. i. 7; 1 Co.i. 3; 2 Co.i.
2a plede 2s chili Zn Coletnccmon het oce lel inet.
2 [Rec., al. om. jy.]; Philem.3; [6 Oeds marnp, Col. iii.
17 LT Tr WH (cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.) ; elsewhere with-
out the art. as] Oeo0 marpés (in which phrase the two
words have blended as it were into one, equiv. to a prop.
name, Germ. Gottvater [A. V. God the Father]): Phil. ii.
11; 1 Pet. i. 25 dad Ocod marpés, Gal. i. 3; Eph. vi. 23;
2 Tim. i. 2; Tit. i. 45 mapa Oeod marpés, 2 Pet. i. 17; 2
Jn. 3; ef. Wieseler, Com. iib. d. Brief a. d. Galat. p. 10
sqq: 6 Oeds w. gen. of the thing of which God is the au-
thor [cf. W. § 30, 1]: rhs tropovns x. THs mapaxAnoews, Ro.
xv. 5; ris edmjdos, ib. 13; ris eypyyys, 33; 1 Th. v. 23;
tis mapakAnoews, 2 Co.i. 3. ta tod Oeod, the things of
God,i.e. a. hiscounsels,1Co.ii.11. B. his interests,
Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. vii. 33. sy. things due to God, Mt.
OCGA ANAS ise The IE Sy soe Oy, Ta mpos Tov Gedy,
things respecting, pertaining to, God, — contextually i.q.
the sacrificial business of the priest, Ro. xv. 17; Heb. ii.
17; v. 1; ef. Xen. rep. Lac. 138, 11; Fritzsche on Rom.
lil. p. 262sq. Nom. 6 Oeds for the voc.: Mk. xv. 34;
Lk. xviii. 11,13; Jn. xx. 28; Actsiv.24[RG; Heb. i. 82];
x. 7; cf. W.§ 29, 2; [B. 140 (123)]. 1@ 606, God being
judge (cf. W. § 31, 4 a.; 248 (232 sq.); B. § 133, 14]:
after duvards, 2 Co. x. 4; after doretos, Acts vii. 20, (after
dueprros, Sap. x. 5; after péyas, Jon. iii. 3; see aoteios, 2).
For the expressions dvOpewros Oe00, Sivapis Geod, vids bod,
etc., Jeds ris eAmidos etc., 6 Cav beds etc., see under dvOpw-
ros 6, Svvapuis a., vids rod Oeod, éAmis 2, Cdw I. ., ete.
4. Geds is used of whatever can in any respect be likened
to God, or resembles him in any way: Hebraistically i. q.
God’s representative or vicegerent, of magistrates and
288
Jeparredo
judges, Jn. x. 34 sq. after Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.) 6, (of the
wise man, Philo de mut. nom. § 22; quod omn. prob. lib.
§ 7; [6 copds A€éyerat Oeds Tod appovos . . . Oeds mpos Par
raciav x. Séxnow, quod det. pot. insid. § 44]; marnp kx.
pnp éupaveis ciot Geol, pipovpevoe Tov ayéevyntoy ev TO
(worhacreiv, de decal. § 23; avoudobn (i. e. Moses) 6dou
rou bvous beds x. Bactrevs, de vita Moys. i. § 28; [de migr.
Abr. § 15; de alleg. leg. i. §13]); of the devil, 6 Geds
Tod aidvos rovrou (see alay, 3), 2 Co. iv. 4; the pers. or
thing to which one is wholly devoted, for which alone
he lives, e. g. 7 kotAta, Phil. iii. 19.
GcoréBera, -as, 7, (GeoaeBys), reverence towards God,
godliness: 1 Tim. ii. 10. (Xen. an. 2, 6,26; Plat. epin.
p- 985 d.; Sept. Gen. xx. 11; Job xxviii. 28; Bar. v. 4;
Sir. i. 25 (22); 4 Mace. i. 9 (Fritz.); vii. 6, 22 (var.).) *
OcooeBis, -és, (Aeds and oéBowar), worshipping God,
pious: Jn. ix. 31. (Sept.; Soph., Eur., Arstph., Xen.,
Plat., al.; [ef. Trench § xlviii.].) *
Bcoorvyts, -és, (Beds and orvyéw ; cf. Oeousons, Oeopvons,
and the subst. @eoorvyia, omitted in the lexx., Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 35, 5), hateful to God, exceptionally impious
and wicked ; (Vulg. deo odibilis) : Ro.i. 30 (Eur. Troad.
1213 and Cyclop. 396, 602; joined with aé:xco. in Clem.
hom. 1, 12, where just before occurs oi Gedy pucodvres).
Cf. the full discussion of the word by Fritzsche, Com. on
Rom. i. p. 84 sqq.; [and see W. 53 sq. (53) ].*
Qedrys, -yTos, 7, (deitas, Tertull., Augustine [de civ.
Dei 7, 1]), deity i. e. the state of being God, Godhead:
Col. ii. 9. (Leian. Icar.9; Plut. de defect. orac. 10 p.
415 c¢.)*
[Syn. @ed77s, OerdtHs: Oedr. deity differs from @etdr.
divinity, as essence differs from quality or attribute; cf.
Trench § ii.; Bp. Lghtft. or Mey. on Col. l.c.; Fritzsche on
Ro. i. 20.]
Ocddrr0s, -ov, (eds and diros), Theophilus, a Christian
to whom Luke inscribed his Gospel and Acts of the
Apostles: Lk. i.3; Acts i.1. The conjectures concern-
ing his family, rank, nationality, are reviewed by (among
others) Win. RWB. s. v.; Bleek on Lk. i. 3; [B. D. s.v.];
see also under xpdrioros.*
Oeparreta, -as, 7, (Gepareva) ; 1. service, rendered by
any one to another. 2. spec. medical service, curing,
healing: Lk. ix. 11; Rev. xxii. 2, ((Hippocr.], Plat.,
Isocr., Polyb.). 3. by meton. household, i.e. body of
attendants, servants, domestics: Mt. xxiv. 45 RG; Lk.
xii. 42, (and often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
469; for O33), Gen. xlv. 16).*
Separevw ; impf. eeparevoy; fut. Oeparedow; 1 aor. ebe-
parevoa; Pass., pres. Oeparevonar; impf. ebepamevouny;
pf. ptcp. reBepamevpevos; 1 aor. eOepamevOny ; (Opayp, i. q.
Gepdrewv) ; fr. Hom. down; 1. to serve, do service:
twa, to one; pass. Oepar. Urd twos, Acts xvii. 25. 2
to heal, cure, restore to health: Mt. xii.10; Mk. vi.5; Lk.
vi. 7; ix. 6; xiii. 14; xiv. 3; revd, Mt. iv. 24; viii. 7, 16,
etc.; Mk. i. 34; iii. 10; Lk. iv. 23; x. 9; pass., Jn. v. 10;
Acts iv. 14; v.16, etc.; rua dio twos, to cure one of any
disease, Lk. vii. 21; pass., Lk. v.15; viii. 2; Oepurrevery
vogous, padakiav: Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1; Mk. iii. i5
Ocpatrov
289
Oewpew
[RGL, Tr mrg. in br.J; Lk. ix. 1; a wound, pass., Rev. | t0 warm one’s self: Mk. xiv. 54, 67; Jn. xviii. 18, 25;
xiii. 3, 12.
Geparrwy, -ovros, 6, [perh. fr. a root to hold, have about
one; ef. Eng. retainer; Vanitek p. 396; fr. Hom. down],
Sept. for ty, an guentads servant : of God, spoken of
Moses discharging the duties committed to him by God,
Heb. iii. 5 as in Nant xil. 7sq.; Josh. i. 2; viii. 31, 33
(ix. 4, 6); Sap. x. 16. [SyN. see didxovos.] *
Gepitw; fut. depiow [B. 37 (32), cf. WH. App. p. 163
sq-]; 1 aor. e0épica; 1 aor. pass. eBepicOnv; (épos) ;
Sept. for WP; [fr. Aeschyl., Hat. down]; to reap, har-
Wests al as pogs Mt. vi. 26; Lk. xii. 24; Jas.v. 4; [fig.
Jn. iv. 36 (bis)]. __b. in peeve expressions about
sowing and reaping: dAdos...6 Oepi¢wr, one does the
work, another gets the reward, Jn. iv. 37 sq. (where the
meaning is ‘ye hereafter, in winning over a far greater
number of the Samaritans to the kingdom of God, will
enjoy the fruits of the work which I have now com-
menced among them’ [al. do not restrict the reference
to converted Samaritans]); Gepifwy dmov odk gore
pas, unjustly appropriating to thyself the fruits of oth-
ers’ labor, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Lk. xix. 21 sq.; 6 dav...
Oepice:, as aman has acted (on earth) so (hereafter by
God) will he be requited, either with reward or pen-
alty, (his deeds will determine his doom), Gal. vi. 7
(a proverb: ut sementem feceris, ita metes, Cic. de orat.
2, 65; [od d€ radra aicypas perv Eometpas Kaxas dé €Oe-
ptoas, Aristot. rhet. 3, 3,4; cf. Plato, Phaedr. 260 d.; see
Meyer on Gal. |. c.]); ri, to receive a thing by way of
reward or punishment: ra capxixa, 1 Co. ix. 11; dOopay,
anv aionoyv, Gal. vi. 8, (omeipew mupovs, Bepitew axavOas,
Jer. xii. 13; 6 omeipwv daddAa Oepioe: kaka, Prov. xxii. 8;
€av omeipnte Kaka, Tacav tapaxiy Kai Odipw Oepicere,
Test. xii. Patr. p. 576 [i.e. test. Levi §13]); absol.: of
the reward of well-doing, Gal. vi. 9; 2Co.ix.6. oc. As
the crops are cut down with the sickle, depigew is fig.
used for to destroy, cut off: Rev. xiv. 15; with the addi-
tion of ryv yqv, to remove the wicked inhabitants of the
earth and deliver them up to destruction, ib. 16 [ry
’Aciay, Plut. reg. et. imper. apophthegm. (Antig. 1), p
182 a. ].*
Ocpro-pds, -00, 6, (Oepifw), harvest: i.q. theact of reap-
ing, Jn. iv. 35; fig. of the gathering of men into the
kingdom of God, ibid. i.q. the time of reaping, i. e.
fig. the time of final judgment, when the righteous are
gathered into the kingdom of God and the wicked are
delivered up to destruction, Mt. xiii. 30, 39; Mk. iv. 29.
i. q. the crop to be reaped, i. e. fig. a multitude of men to
be taught how to obtain salvation, Mt. ix. 37 sq. ; WW kssxepok
éénpdvbn 6 Oepicpos, the crops are ripe for the harvest,
i. e. the time is come to destroy the wicked, Rev. xiv.
15. (Sept. for V¥p; rare in Grk. writ., as Xen. oec.
18, 3; Polyb. 5, 95, 5.) *
Oepirris, -00, 6, (Gepi{w), a reaper: Mt. xiii. 30, 39.
(Bel and the Dragon 33; Xen., Dem., Aristot., Plut.,
al.)*
Geppatvw: Mid., pres. Oeppaivoyat; impf. éGepparvouny ;
(Gepyés): fr. Hom. down; to make warm, to heat; mid.
Jas. ii. 16.*
Géppy (and Oépua; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 331, [Ruther
Jord, New Phryn. p. 414]),-ys, 9, heat: Acts xxviii. 3.
(Keel. iv. 11; Job vi. 17; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 7; Thuc., Plat.,
Menand., al.) *
O€pos, -ovs, To, (pw to heat), summer: Mt. xxiv. 325
MK. xiii, 28; Lk. xxi. 30. (From Hom. down; Hebr.
YP Prov. vi. 8; Gen. viii. 22.) *
Fi a estar -éws, 6, @ Thessalonian: Acts xx. 4;
oa rag WANS, Teale LANGE 1G ale
Biceakevt an: -ns, 9, Thessalonica. (now Saloniki), a
celebrated and populous city, situated on the Thermaic
Gulf, the capital of the second [(there were four; ef. Liv.
xlv. 29)] division of Macedonia and the residence of a
Roman governor and quaestor. It was anciently called
Therme, but was rebuilt by Cassander, the son of Anti-
pater, and called by its new name [which first appears
in Polyb. 23, 11, 2] in honor of his wife Thessalonica,
the sister of Alexander the Great; ¢f. Strabo 7, 330.
Here Paul the apostle founded a Christian church: Acts
xvii. 1, 11, 13; Phil. iv. 16; 2 Tim. iv. 10. [BB. DD.
s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 225 sqq.]*
@evdds [prob. contr. fr. Aeddwpos, W. 103 (97); esp-
Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15; on its inflection ef. B. 20 (18) ],
6, Theudas, an impostor who instigated a rebellion which
came to a wretched end in the time of Augustus: Acts
v. 86. Josephus (antt. 20, 5, 1) makes mention of one
Theudas, a magician, who came into notice by pretend-
ing that he was a prophet and was destroyed when
Cuspius Fadus governed Judza in the time of Claudius.
Accordingly many interpreters hold that there were two
insurgents by the name of Theudas; while others, with
far greater probability, suppose that the mention of
Theudas is ascribed to Gamaliel by an anachronism on
the part of Luke. On the different opinions of others
cf. Meyer on Acts l.c.; Win. RWB. s.v.; Keim in
Schenkel v. 510 sq.; [esp. Hackett in B. D.s. v.].*
Oewpéw, -&; impf. Cewpovv; [fut. Oewpnow, Jn. vii. 3'T
Tr WH]; 1 aor. éeapnoa; (Gewpds a spectator, and this
fr. Oedopa, q. v. [ef. Vaniéek p. 407; L. and S. 8. v.;
Allen in the Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 131 sq.]); [fr.
Aeschyl. and Hat. down]; Sept. for 78) and Chald. 7in;
1. to be a spectator, look at, behold, Germ. schauen, (the
Gewpot were men who attended the games or the sacri-
fices as public deputies; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 19) ;
absol.: Mt. xxvii. 55; Mk. xv. 40; Lk. xxiii. 35; foll.
by indir. disc., Mk. xii. 41; xv. 47; used esp. of persons:
and things looked upon as in some respect noteworthy :
rwd, Jn. vi. 40; xvi. 10,16 sq.19; Acts ili. 16; xxv. 24;.
Rey. xi. 11 sq.; 6 Oewpav rov vidv Bewpet Tov rarépa,
the majesty of the Father resplendent in the Son, Jn.
xii. 45; twd with ptcp. [B. 301 (258): Mk. v. 15]; Lk..
x. 18; Jn. vi. 19; [x. 12]; xx. 12, 14; [1 Jn. iii. 17];
ri, Lk. xiv. 29; xxi.6; xxiii.48; Acts iv. 13; ra onpeia,.
Jn. ii. 23; vi. 2 L Tr WH; Acts viii. 13, (@avpacra répara,
Sap. xix. 8); 1a €pya rod Xpicrod, Jn. vii. 3; ri with
ptep., Jn. xx. 6; Acts vii. 56; x. 11; foll. by dn, Acts
dewplu
xix. 26; to view attentively, take a view of, survey: tl,
Mt. xxviii. 1; to view mentally, consider: foll. by orat.
obliq., Heb. vii. 4. 2. to see; i.e. a. to perceive
with the eyes : rvedpa, Lk. xxiv. 37; rwd with a ptep., ibid.
39; ruvd, Ort, Jn. ix. 8; 7d mpdowmdr twos (after the Hebr.;
see mpdowrop, 1 a.), i. gq. to enjoy the presence of one,
have intercourse with him, Acts xx. 38; odkért Oewpetv
twa, used of one from whose sight a person has been
withdrawn, Jn. xiv. 19; ov dewpet 6 kdopos TO mvedpua, 1. e.
so to speak, has no eyes with which it can see the Spirit;
the cannot render himself visible to it, cannot give it his
presence and power, Jn. xiv.17. —_b. to discern, descry:
ri, Mk. v. 38; rwd, Mk. iii. 11; Acts ix.7. ¢. to ascer-
tain, find out, by seeing : twa with a pred. acc., Acts xvii.
22; ré with ptcp., Acts xvii. 16; xxviii. 6; dre, Mk. xvi.
4; Jn. iv. 19; xii. 19; Acts xix. 26; xxvii. 10; foll. by
indir. disc., Acts xxi. 20; Hebraistically (see eidw, I. 5)
i. q. to get knowledge of: In. vi. 62 (7. vidv +. avOp@rov
avaBaivovra the Son of Man by death ascending; cf. Liicke,
Meyer [yet cf. Weiss in the 6te Aufl.], Baumg.-Crusius,
in loc.) ; tov Oavaroy i.e. to die, Jn. viii. 51; and on the oth-
er hand, rv dd£av tod Xpicrod, to be a partaker of the
glory, i.e. the blessed condition in heaven, which Christ
enjoys, Jn. xvii. 24, cf. 22. [Comp.: dva-, rapa-Oewpéw. |*
[Syn. O@ewpetv, Dedobat, Spav, ckoweEty: Bewp. is
used primarily not of an indifferent spectator, but of one
who looks at a thing with interest and for a purpose; @ewp.
would be used of a general officially reviewing or inspecting
an army, 0eao6. of a lay spectator looking at the parade.
Oewp. as denoting the careful observation of details can even
be contrasted with épay in so far as the latter denotes only
perception in the general; so used Oewpety quite coincides
with cxor. Schmidt i.ch. 11; see also Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on
Mt. vii. 3. Cf. s. vv. épdw, oxoréw.|
Oewpla, -as, 4, (Pewpds, on which see Oewpéw init.) ; fr.
[Aeschyl.], Hdt.down; 1. aviewing,beholding. 2.
that which is viewed; a spectacle, sight: Lk. xxiii. 48 (3
Mace. v. 24).*
O4Kn, -ns, n, (riOnuc); fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; that
tn which a thing is put or laid away, a receptacle, reposi-
tory, chest, box: used of the sheath of a sword, Jn. xviii.
11; Joseph. antt. 7, 11, 7; Poll. 10, (31) 144.*
@nrAdtw; 1 aor. eOnhaca; (AnAn a breast, [ef. Peile,
Etym. p. 124 sq.]) ; 1. trans. to give the breast, give
suck, to suckle: Mt. xxiv.19; Mk. xiii. 17; Lk. xxi. 23,
(Lys., Aristot., al.; Sept. for Dyn); pacrol €67dacav,
Lk. xxiii. 29 RG. 2. intrans. to suck: Mt. xxi. 16
(Aristot., Plat., Leian., al.; Sept. for p32); paorovs, Lk.
xi. 27; Job iii. 12; Cant. viii. 1; Joel ii. 16; Theoer.
Uti: Tie
Dads, -eva, -v, [cf. OprAdfw, init.], of the female sex; v)
Onreva, subst. a woman, a female: Ro. i. 26 sq-; also rd
Ondv, Mt. xix. 4; Mk. x. 6; Gal. iii. 28. (Gen. i. 27;
vii. 2; Ex. i. 16, ete.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Ohpa [Lat. fera; perh. fr. root to run, spring, prey,
Vaniéek p. 415; cf. Curtius § 314], -as, 4; fr. Hom.
down ; a hunting of wild beasts to destroy them; hence,
figuratively, of preparing destruction for men, [A. V.a
trup}, Ro. xi. 9, on which cf. Fritzsche.*
290
| 33sq.; Heb. xi. 26.
Oncavpos
@npedw: 1 aor. inf. Onpedoa; (fr. Onpa, as dypedw fr.
é&ypa [cf. Schmidt ch. 72, 3]); fr. Hom. down; to goa
hunting, to hunt, to catch in hunting; metaph. to lay wait
for, strive to ensnare; to catch artfully: tt ée oréparos
twos, Lk. xi. 54.*
Onpropaxéw, -@: 1 aor. €Onproudynoa; (Onpropdyos); to
fight with wild beasts (Diod. 3,43, 7; Artem. oneir. 2, 54;
5, 49); ed €Onproudynoa ev “Edéog, 1 Co. xv. 32 — these
words some take literally, supposing that Paul was con-
demned to fight with wild beasts; others explain them
tropically of a fierce contest with brutal and ferocious
men (so 6ypiopayxeiv in Ignat. ad Rom. 5, [ete.]; ofoes
Onpiows paydpeOa says Pompey, in App. bell. civ. 2, 61;
see @npiov). The former opinion encounters the objec-
tion that Paul would not have omitted this most terrible
of all perils from the catalogue in 2 Co. xi. 23 sqq.*
Onplov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of Oyp; hence a little beast, little
animal; Plat. Theaet. p. 171e.; of bees, Theoer. 19, 6;
but in usage it had almost always the force of its primi-
tive; the later dimin. is @npidiov [cf. Epictet. diss. 2, 9,
6]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 7°m and N73, an ani-
mal; a wild animal, wild beast, beast: prop., Mk. i. 13;
Acts x. 12 Rec.; xi. 6; xxviii. 4sq.; Heb. xii. 20; [Jas.
iii. 7]; Rev. vi. 8; in Rev. xi. 7 and chh. xiii—xx., under
the fig. of a ‘beast’ is depicted Antichrist, both his
person and his kingdom and power, (see avtixpiotos);
metaph. a brutal, bestial man, savage, ferocious, Tit. i.
12 [colloq. ‘ugly dogs’], (so in Arstph. eqq. 273; Plut.
439; nub. 184; [ef. Schmidt ch. 70,2; apparently never
with allusion to the stupidity of beasts]; still other
exx. are given by Kypke, Observy. ii. p. 379; Onpia
avOpwropuoppa, Ignat. Smyrn. 4, cf.ad Ephes. 7). [Syn.
see (Gov. |*
Onoavpitw; 1 aor. é6ncatipioca; pf. pass. ptep. reOnoar-
ptopevos; (O@nocavpds); fr. Hdt. down; to gather and lay
up, to heap up, store up: to accumulate riches, Jas. v. 3;
tui, Lk. xii. 21; 2 Co. xii. 14; ri, 1 Co. xvi. 2; Oncavpods
éavr@, Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; i. q. to keep in store, store up, reserve:
pass. 2 Pet. iii. 7; metaph. so to live from day to day as
to increase either the bitterness or the happiness of one’s
consequent lot: dpyjv éavtd, Ro. ii. 5; Kaka, Prov. i. 18;
Conv, Pss. of Sol. 9, 9, (etruxiay, App. Samn. 4, 8 [i. e.
vol. i. p. 23, 31 ed. Bekk.]; re@noavpicpévos xara twos
Odvos, Diod. 20, 86). [Comp.: dio- 6ncavpitw.]*
Onoavpds, -od, 6, (fr. OEQ [ri6nuc] with the paragog.
term.-avpos); Sept. often for Wis; Lat. thesaurus; i. e.
1. the place in which goods and precious things are col-
lected and laid up; a. a casket, coffer, or other recep-
tacle, in which valuables are kept: Mt.ii. 11. b. a
treasury (Hat., Eur., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Plut., Hdian. ;
1 Mace. iii. 29). ¢. storehouse, repository, magazine,
(Neh. xiii. 12; Deut. xxviii. 12, ete.; App. Pun. 88, 95):
Mt. xiii. 52 [cf. radauds, 1]; metaph. of the soul, as the
repository of thoughts, feelings, purposes, etc. : [Mt. xii.
35*G LT Tr WH, 35°]; with epex. gen. ris xapSias, ibid.
xii. 35 Rec. ; Lk. vi. 45. 2. the things laid up in a
treasury; collected treasures: Mt. vi. 19-21; Lk. x
Onoavpov exew év ovpava, to have
Orryyavw
treasure laid up for themselves in heaven, is used of those
to whom God has appointed eternal salvation: Mt. xix.
21; Mk. x. 21; Lk. xviii. 22; something precious, Mt.
xiii. 44; used thus of the light of the gospel, 2 Co. iv. 7;
with an epex. gen. rs codias (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 9; Plat.
Phil. p. 15 e.) x. yoooeas, i. q. raca } copia x. yraors ds
Onoavpoi, Col. ii. 3.*
®yyavw (prob. akin to retyos, fingo, fiction, etc.; Cur-
tius § 145]: 2 aor. €Oryov; to touch, handle: pndé Oiyns
touch not sc. impure things, Col. ii. 21 [cf. dare, 2 ¢.];
twos, Heb. xii. 20 ([Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Tragg., al.) ;
like the Hebr. 3733, to do violence to, injure: twés, Heb.
xi. .28 (Eur. Iph. Aul. 1351; &» ai BrAaBar adrac Ouyya-
vovat, Act. Thom. § 12). [SyYN. see dara, 2 c.]*
®\(Bw; Pass., pres. OAiBouar; pf. ptep. reOAuupevos ;
{allied with flagrum, affliction; fr. Hom. down]; to press
(as grapes), press hard upon: prop. twa [A. V. throng],
Mk. iii. 9; 656s reOAyspevn a compressed way, i. e. nar-
row, straitened, contracted, Mt. vii. 14; metaph. to trouble,
afflict, distress, (Vulg. tribulo): twa, 2'Th.i. 6; pass.
(Vulg. tribulor, [also angustior]; tribulationem patior) :
PACOMUG Rivas \evileo ss il Wheaties 2 hot. 7i]s1) Lam:
v. 10; Heb. xi. 37. (of @dAiBovres for O°¥ in Sept.)
[Comp. : dzo-, cvv-O\iBo. | *
Orbis, or Arius [so L Tr], (cf. W. § 6, 1 e.; Lipsius,
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35), -ews, 7, (OA(8a), prop. a
pressing, pressing together, pressure (Strab. p. 52; Ga-
len); in bibl. and eccles. Grk. metaph., oppression, afjlic-
tion, tribulation, distress, straits; Vulg. tribulatio, also
pressura (2 Co. i. 4°; Jn. xvi. [21], 33; [Phil. i. 16 (17);
and in Col. i. 24 passio]) ; (Sept. for 77x, also for ry,
yis>, ete.): Mt. xxiv. 9; Acts vil. 11; xi. 19; Ro. xii. 12;
PAC OMMEA Sani, Dueceaya, 4s tyilr4 3 yi. 2> 2) Th. 156)
Rey. i.9; ii. 9,22; vii. 14; joined with orevoywpia [cf.
Trench § lv.], Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35, (Deut. xxviii. 53 sq. ;
Is. [ viii. 22]; xxx. 6); with dvdyxn, 1 Th. iii.7; with
diwypds, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk.iv.17; 2 Th.i.4; of the afflic-
tions of those hard pressed by siege and the calamities
of war, Mt. xxiv. 21, 29; Mk. xiii. 19, 24; of the straits
of want, 2 Co. viii. 13; Phil. iv. 14 [here al. give the
word a wider reference]; Jas. i. 27; of the distress of
a woman in child-birth, Jn. xvi. 21. Oda eyo (i. q.
OriBoua), Jn. xvi. 33; 1 Co. vii. 28; Rev. ii. 10; Oriyrs
éni twa épxerat, Acts vil. 11; ev Oder, 1 Th. i. 6. plur.:
Acts vil. 10; xiv. 22; xx. 23; Ro. v. 3; Eph. iii. 13; 1
Th. iii. 3; Heb. x. 33; rod Xpiorod, the afflictions which
Christ had to undergo (and which, therefore, his fol-
lowers must not shrink from), Col. i. 24 (see avravarAn-
pow); Odrj{rpus ths Kapdias (K. cuvoxn), anxiety, burden of
heart, 2 Co. ii. 4; OdXipu enupépew (LT Tr WH eéyeipew,
see eyeipw, 4c.) rois Seapois rivos, to increase the misery
of my imprisonment by causing me anxiety, Phil. i. 16
(17).
Ovackw: pf. réOvnxa, inf. rebvdvae and LT TrWH
teOvnxévac (in Acts xiv. 19), ptep. teOvnxaos; plupf. 3
pers. sing. éreOvnxes (Jn. xi. 21 Rec.); [fr. Hom. down];
Sept. for ny; to die; pf. to be dead: Mt. ii. 20; Mk. xv.
44; Lk. vii. 12 [L br.]; viii. 49; Jn. xi. 21, Kee. in 39
291
Opivos
and 41, 44; xii.1[T WH om. LTr br.]; xix. 33; Acts
xiv. 19; xxv. 19; metaph., of the loss of spiritual life:
(aoa reOunke, i. e. kav Soxh (hv ravtny tHy aicOnthy Cony,
téOvxe kata mvedipa (Theoph.): 1 Tim. v. 6 (Philo de
prof. § 10 (avres évoe reOvnkact Kal teOvnkdres (aot).
(Comp. : dmo-, cvrv-arro-Ookw. | *
Ovntds, -n, -dv, (verbal adj. fr. @vyoxw), [fr. Hom.
down], liable to death, mortal: Ro. vi. 12; viii. 11; 1 Co.
xv. 53 sq.; 2Co.iv.11; v.4. [O@vyrds subject to death,
and so still living; vexpds actually dead.]*
BopuBdtw: (AdpuBos, q. v.); to trouble, disturb, (i. e.
tupBatw, q- V.); Pass. pres. 2 pers. sing. OopyBa¢y in Lk.
x.41 LT Tr WH after codd. x BCL etc. (Not found
elsewh. [Soph. Lex. s. v. quotes Euseb. of Alex. (Migne,
Patr. Graec. vol. Ixxxvi. 1) p. 444 ¢.].)*
BopuBéw, -6: impf. edopvBouv; pres. pass. OopvBoduar;
(6épuBos); fr. Hdt. down; 1. to make a noise or up-
roar, be turbulent. 2. trans. to disturb, throw into con-
fusion: thv rodu, to “set the city on an uproar,” Acts
xvii. 5; pass. to be troubled in mind, Acts xx. 10 [al. here
adhere to the outward sense]; to wail tumultuously,
Mit aix 23s Vi kcnver doe.
OdpuBos, -ov, 6, (akin to Opédos, tvpBn, rupBdtw, [but
TupBn etc. seem to come from another root; cf. Curtius
§ 250]), a noise, tumult, uproar: of persons wailing, Mk.
v. 38; of a clamorous and excited multitude, Mt. xxvii.
24; of riotous persons, Acts xx. 1; xxi. 34; a tumult,
as a breach of public order, Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2;
Acts xxiy. 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ;
several times in Sept.) *
Opatw: pf. pass. ptep. reOpavopeévos; fr. [Hdt.], Aes-
chyl. down, to break, break in pieces, shatter, smite through,
(Ex. xv. 6; Num. xxiv. 17, etc.; 2 Macc. xv. 16): re-
Opavopevor, broken by calamity [A. V. bruised], Lk. iv.
18 (19) fr. Is. lviii. 6 for oyyy}. [SYN. see pyyvupn.] *
Opéppa, -ros, 7d, (tpéhw), whatever is fed or nursed;
hence 1. a ward, nursling, child, (Soph., Eur., Plat.,
al.). 2. a flock, cattle, esp. sheep and goats: Jn. iv.
12. (Xen. oec. 20, 23; Plat., Diod., Joseph., Plut.,
Leian., Aelian, al.) *
Opnvéw, -&: impf. €Apnvovy; fut. Opnyncw; 1 aor. eOpn-
maa; (Ophqvos, q- v-); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Son;
2)P» ete. ; 1. to lament, to mourn: Jn. xvi. 20; of the
singers of dirges, [to wail], Mt. xi.17; Lk. vii.32. 2.
to bewail, deplore: twa, Lk. xxiii. 27.*
[On Opnvéw to lament, némropar to smite the breast in grief,
Aurréoua to be pained, saddened, mevOéw to mourn, cf. Trench
§ Ixy. and see kAafw fin.; yet note that in classic Grk. Au.
is the most comprehensive word, designating every species
of pain of body or soul; and that wevéw expresses a self-
contained grief, never violent in its manifestations; like our
Eng. word “mourn” it is associated by usage with the death
of kindred, and like it used pregnantly to suggest that event.
See Schmidt vol. ii. ch. 83.]
Opfivos, -ov, 6, (Opéopar to cry aloud, to lament; cf.
Germ. Thrdne [(?), rather drénen; Curtius § 317]), a
lamentation: Mt. ii. 18 Ree. (Sept. for TPs also ‘);
O. T. Apocr.; Hom., Pind., Tragg., Xen. Ages. 10, 3:
Plat., al.)*
OpnoKeia
Opnoxela Tdf. -ta [see I, ¢], (a later word; Ion. Opnoxin
in Hdt. [2, 18. 37]), -as, 9, (fr. Opnoxevo, and this fr.
Opjoxos, q. v-; hence apparently primarily fear of the
gods); religious worship, esp. external, that which consists
in ceremonies: hence in plur. Opyokias émiredeiv pupias,
Hat. 2, 37; xaOtords dyvetas te Kal Opnoxeias kai KaOap-
povs, Dion. Hal. 2, 63; univ. religious worship, Jas. i.
26 sq.; with gen. of the obj. [W. 187 (176) ] ray ayye-
Aor, Col. ii. 18 (Trav eiSdA@v, Sap. xiv. 27; rv daydver,
Euseb. h. e. 6, 41, 2; trav Gedy, ib. 9, 9,14; rod Geod,
Hdian. 4, 8, 17 [7 ed. Bekk.]; often in Josephus (cf.
Krebs, Observv. etc. p. 339 sq-]; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45,
7); religious discipline, religion: jperépa Opnokeia, of
Judaism, Acts xxvi. 5 (rv éunv Opynokeiay katadima@v, put
into the mouth of God by Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 1; with
gen. of the subj. ray "Iovdaiwv, 4 Mace. v. 6, 13 (12);
Joseph. antt. 12, 5,4; Op. xoopixn, i. e. worthy to be
embraced by all nations, a world-religion, b. j. 4, 5,
2; piety, wept tr. Oedv, antt. 1, 13,15 xara tHv eudvtov
Opnokelay tev BapBdpwrv mpos 7d Baowdtxdy dvoua, Charit.
7, 6 p. 165, 18 ed. Reiske; of the reverence of An-
tiochus the Pious for the Jewish religion, Joseph. antt.
13, 8, 2). Cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. v. 6; [esp. Trench
§ xlviii.].*
Opfickos (T WH Opnoxés, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 101];
W.§6,1¢e.; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 28), -ov, 6,
fearing or worshipping God; religious, (apparently fr.
tpéw to tremble; hence prop. trembling, fearful; cf. J. G.
Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 121; on the
different conjectures of others, see Passow s. v. [Cur-
tius § 316 connects with Opa; hence ‘to adhere to,’ ‘be
a votary of’; cf. Vanicek p. 395]): Jas. i. 26. ([Cf.
Trench § xlviii.]*
OprapBedw; 1 aor. ptep. OprayBevoas; (OpiayBos, a hymn
sung in festal processions in honor of Bacchus; among
the Romans, a triumphal procession [ Lat. triumphus, with
which word it is thought to be allied; cf. Vaniéek p.
317]); 1. to triumph, to celebrate a triumph, (Dion.
Hal., App., Plut., Hdian., al.) ; revd, over one (as Plut.
Thes. and Rom. comp. 4): Col. ii. 15 (where it signifies
the victory won by God over the demoniacal powers
through Christ’s death). 2. by a usage unknown to
prof. auth., with a Hiphil or causative force (cf. W. p. 23
and § 38, 1 [cf. B. 147 (129)]), with the ace. of a pers., to
cause one to triumph, i.e. metaph. to grant one complete
success, 2 Co. ii. 14 [but others reject the causative
sense; see Mey. ad loc.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.].*
Oplé, rpexds, dat. plur. OpEi, 4, [fr. Hom. down], the
hatr ; a. the hair of the head: Mt. v. 36; Lk. vii. 44;
xxi. 18; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 8; Acts xxvii. 34; 1 Pet. iii. 3
[Lehm.om.]; Rev. i. 14; with rijs cepadjs added (Hom.
Od. 13, 399. 431), Mt. x. 30; Lk. vii. 38; xii. 7. b.
the hair of animals: Rev. ix. 8; évdedup. rpixas kayndov,
with a garment made of camel’s hair, Mk. i. 6, cf. Mt.
ill. 4; €v... tptxdv kapndelov mréypaow meptendrnoar,
Clem. Alex. strom. 4 p. 221 ed. Sylb.*
pega, -&: (Apods clamor, tumult); in Grk. writ. to ery
aloud, make a noise by outcry; in the N. T. to trouble,
292
Buyarnp
frighten; Pass. pres. Opootpat; to be troubled in mind, to
be frightened, alarmed: Mt. xxiv. 6 [B. 248 (209)]; Mk.
xiii. 7; 2 Th. ii. 2; [1 aor. ptep. OponOévres, Lk. xxiv. 37
Trmrg. WH mrg.J. (Cant. v. 4.) *
OpdpBos, -ov, 6, [allied with rpépw in the sense to
thicken; Vaniéek p. 307], a large thick drop, esp. of
clotted blood (Aeschyl. Eum. 184); with atuaros added
(Aeschyl. choeph. 533, 546; Plat. Critias p. 120 a.),
Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass. (see WH. App.
ad loc.) ].*
Opdvos, -ov, 6, (OPAQ to sit; cf. Curtius § 316), [fr.
Hom. down], Sept. for 8D3, a throne, seat, i.e. a chair of
state having a footstool ; assigned in the N. T. to kings,
hence by meton. for kingly power, royalty: Lk. i. 32,52;
Actsii. 30. metaph. to God, the governor of the world:
Mt. v. 84; xxiii. 22; Acts vii. 49 (Is. lxvi.1); Rev.i.4;
iii. 21; iv. 2-6, 9, 10, ete.; Heb. iv. 16; viii. 1; xii. 2. to
the Messiah, the partner and assistant in the divine
administration: Mt. xix. 28; xxv. 31; Rev. iii. 21; xx.
11; xxii. 3; hence the divine power belonging to Christ,
Heb. i. 8. to judges, i. q. tribunal or bench (Plut. mor.
p- 807 b.): Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. xx. 4. to
elders: Rev.iv.4; xi.16. toSatan: Rev. ii. 13; cf.
Bleek ad loc. to the beast (concerning which see
Onpiov): Rev. xvi. 10. O@povos is used by meton. of one
who holds dominion or exercises authority ; thus in plur.
of angels: Col. i. 16 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].
Ovareipa, -wy, rd, (and once -as, 7, Rev. i. 11 Lehm.
Ovaretpay [cf. Tdf. ad loc.; WH.App. p. 156; B.18 (16) ]),
Thyatira, a city of Lydia, formerly Pelopia and Euhippia
(Plin. h. n. 5, 31), now Akhissar, a colony of Macedonian
Greeks, situated between Sardis and Pergamum on the
river Lycus; its inhabitants gained their living by
traffic and the art of dyeing in purple: Acts xvi. 14;
Rev. 15183 div 18,24.) [(B: Das.vel*
Gvyarnp, gen. Gvyarpés, dat. Ovyartpi, acc. Ovyarépa, voc.
Ovyarep, plur. Gvyarépes, acc. -épas, 7, (of the same root
as Gothic dauhtar, Eng. daughter, Germ. Tochter [Curtius
§ 318; Vaniéek p. 415]); Hebr. n3; [fr. Hom. down];
a daughter: prop., Mt. ix. 18; x. 35, 37; xv. 22; Acts
vii. 21,etc. improp. a. the vocative [or nom. as voc.
cf. W.§ 29,2; B. §129 a. 5; WH. App. p. 158] in kindly
address: Mt. ix. 22; Mk. v. 34 [L Tr WH 6vydrnp]; Lk.
vii. 48 [Tr WH 6vydrnp], (see vids 1a. fin., réxvov b. a.).
b. in phrases modelled after the Hebr.: a. a daughter
of God i. e. acceptable to God, rejoicing in God’s pecu-
liar care and protection: 2 Co. vi. 18 (Is. xliii. 6; Sap.
ix. 7; see vios r. Oeod 4, réxvov b. y.). B. withthe name
of a place, city, or region, it denotes collectively all its
inhabitants and citizens (very often so in the O. T., as
Is. xxxvii. 22; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 19; Zeph. iii. 14, etc.) ;
in the N.T. twice ) Ovy. SiH», i. e. inhabitants of Jeru-
salem: Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15, (Is.i. 8; x. 32; Zech. ix.
9, ete.; see Svoy, 2). sy. Ouyarépes ‘Iepovcadjp, women
of Jerusalem: Lk. xxiii. 28. 8. female descendant: ai
Ovyarépes "Aapdv, women of Aaron’s posterity, Lk. i. 5;
Ovydrnp ’ABpadp daughter of Abraham, i. e. a woman
tracing her descent from Abraham, Lk. xiii. 16, (4 Mare.
Ovyarp.ov
xv. 28 (25); Gen. xxviii. 8; xxxvi.2; Judg. xi. 40; Is.
Xvi. 2, etc.).
Bvyarpiov, -ov, 70, a little daughter: Mk. v. 23; vii. 25.
[Strattis Incert.5; Menand., Athen., Plut. reg. et imper.
Apophtheg. p. 179 e. (Alex. 6); al.]*
QveAAa, -ns, 7, (vw to boil, foam, rage, as deAXa fr. do,
ant), a sudden storm, tempest, whirlwind: Heb. xii. 18.
(Deut. iv. 11; v.22; Hom., Hes., Trage., al.) ([Cf.
Schmidt ch. 55, 11; Trench § lxxiii. fin.]*
Bvivos [WH om. the dier. (cf. I, «, fin.) ], -7, -ov, (fr. via
or 6va, the citrus, an odoriferous North-African tree
used as incense [and for inlaying; B.D. s.v. Thyine
wood; Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 401 sq.]),
thyine (Lat. citrinus): &ddov, Rev. xviii. 12 as in Diosc.
tet et. Elin: h.in- 13, 30 €16).*
Ovplapa, -ros, To, (uptdw), Sept. mostly for Dp, an.
aromatic substance burnt, incense: generally in plur.,
Rev. v. 8; viii. 3 sq.; xviii. 13; 7 dpa rod 6., when the
incense is burned, Lk.i. 10; Ovovacrnpiov rod Ovp. ib. 11.
(Soph., Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Diod., Joseph. ; Sept.) *
Oupiartproy, -ov, Td, (Gupidw), prop. a utensil for fumi-
gating or burning incense [cf. W. 96 (91) ]; hence iy
a censer: 2 Chr. xxvi. 19; Ezek. viii. 11; Hdt. 4, 162;
Thue. 6,46; Diod. 13,3; Joseph. antt. 4, 2,4; 8,3,8; Ael.
v. h. 12, 51. 2. the altar of incense: Philo, rer. div.
haer. § 46; vit. Moys. iii. § 7; Joseph. antt. 3, 6,8; 3, 8,
3; b.j.5,5,5; Clem. Alex.; Orig.; and so in Heb. ix.
4[(where Tr mrg. br.), also 2 Tr mrg. in br.], where see
Bleek, Liinemann, Delitzsch, Kurtz, in opp. to those
[(A. V. included)] who think it means censer; [yet cf.
Harnack in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1876, p. 572 sq. ].*
Oupidw, -@: 1 aor. inf. Guycacae [RG -doa}; (fr. Oopa,
and this fr. Ov, q. v.); in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Hdt.,
Plat. down; Sept. for rep and VOpA; burn incense:
Lk. i. 9.*
Ovpopaxéw, -6; (Avuds and payoua); to carry on war
with great animosity (Polyb., Diod., Dion. H., Plut.) ; to
be very angry, be exasperated [A.V. nighly displeased]:
twi, with one, Acts xii. 20. Cf. Kypke, Observv. ii.
p- 62 sq.*
Oupds, -od, 6, (fr. d¥o to rush along or on, be in a heat,
breathe violently; hence Plato correctly says, Cratyl.
p- 419 e., Ovpos amd ris Oicews k. Céerews THS Wuxns; ac-
cordingly it signifies both the spirit panting as it were
in the body, and the rage with which the man pants and
swells), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. often for 4% anger, and
2m excandescentia; also for 1171 aestus. In the N. T.
1. passion, angry heat, (excandescentia, Cic. Tuse. 4, 9,
21), anger forthwith boiling up and soon subsiding again,
(épyq, on the other hand, denotes indignation which has
arisen gradually and become more settled; (cf. (Plato)
deff. 415 e. Oupds- dp Biaos dvev oprpod vdcos rafews
Wuxiis ddoyicrov. dpyn: mapdxdynots rod OvptKod eis 7d
TippeicOa, Greg. Naz. carm. 34 Oupds pev eotw abpdos
Kaus dpevds, dpyh 5€ Ovpos eupevov, Herm. mand. 5, 2, 4
ex dé ris mixplas Oupds, ex d€ rod Oupod dpyn; cf. Aristot.
rhet. 2, 2, 1 and Cope’s note]; hence we read in Sir.
xlviii. 10 xomdoa dpyjv mpd Ovpod, before it glows and
293
Gvpa
bursts forth; [see further, on the distinction betw. the
two words, Trench § xxxvii., and esp. Schmidt vol. iii.
ch. 142]): Lk. iv. 28; Acts xix. 28; Eph. iv. 31; Col.
lil. 8; Heb. xi. 27; 6 6. rod Ge0d, Rev. xiv. 13; xv.1, 7;
xvi. 1; Exe Ovydy, to be in a passion, Rev. xii. 12 (Ael.
v. h.1, 14); épyi cat Oupds (as Sept. Mic. v. 15; Isoer.
p- 249 ¢.; Hdian. 8, 4,1; al.): Ro. ii. 8 (Ree. in the in-
verse order; so Deut. ix. 19; xxix. 23, 28, [cf. Trench
u. s.]); plur. 6vpoi impulses and outbursts of anger [W.
176 (166); B. 77 (67)]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20, (2
Mace. iv. 25, 38; ix. 7; x. 85; xiv. 45; 4 Mace. xviii.
20; Sap. x. 3; Soph. Aj. 718 [where see Lob.]; Plat. Pro-
tag. p. 323 e.; [Phileb. p. 40 e.; Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, 13];
Polyb. 3, 10,5; Diod. 13, 28; Joseph. b. J745105-2 5) elut.
Cor.1; al.). 2. glow, ardor: 6 oivos rod Ovpod [see
otvos, b.] the wine of passion, inflaming wine, Germ.
Glutwein (which either drives the drinker mad or kills
him with its deadly heat; cf. Is. li. 17, 22; Jer. xxxii. 1
(xxv. 15) sqq.): Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3; with rod Oeod
added, which God gives the drinker, Rev. xiv. 10; with
Ths 6pyns Tov Geod added [A. V. fierceness], Rev. xvi. 19;
xix. 15; cf. Ewald, Johann. Schriften, Bd. ii. p. 269
note.*
Ovpdw, -G: 1 aor. pass. COupwbnv; (Ovpds); to cause
one to become incensed, to provoke to anger; pass. (Sept.
often for WM) to be wroth: Mt. ii. 16. (In Grk. writ.
fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down.) *
Bipa, -as, 7, (fr. 6vw to rush in, prop. that through
which a rush is made; hence Germ. Thiir [Eng. door ;
Curtius § 319]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for no3 and
MN, sometimes also for 1yw; a (house) door ; [in plur.
iq. Lat. fores, folding doors; cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24
(21); cf. rvAn]; a. prop.: kdeleww ete. thy 6., Mt. vi.
6; Lk. xili. 25; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk. xi. 7; Jn. xx. 19,
26; Acts xxi. 30; dvotyew, Acts v.19; pass. Acts xvi.
26 sq.; kpovew, Acts xii. 13; d:a ras 6. Jn. x. 1 sq.; mpos
ty 6, Mk.i. 33; xi.4 [Tr WHom. zyv; cf. W. 123
(116)}; Acts iii. 2; 7a mpos rv 6. the vestibule [so B.
§ 125, 9; al. the space or parts at (near) the door], Mk.
ii. 2; mpos 7H O. Jn. xviii. 16; enmity 6. Acts v. 9; mpd
ris 6. Acts xii. 6; éxt trav Ovpay, Acts v. 23 [RG mpé].
b. Ovpa is used of any opening like a door, an entrance,
way or passage into: 7 6. Tod pynpetov, of the tomb, Mt.
xxvii. 60; xxviii. 2RG; Mk. xv. 46; xvi. 3, (Hom. Od.
OW DAS@ mon 256%-"als)e c. in parable and metaph. we
find a. 9 Opa t&v mpoBarer, the door through which
the sheep go out and in, the name of him who brings
salvation to those who follow his guidance, Jn. x. 7, 9;
ef. Christ. F'r. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 20
sqq-; (in Ignat. ad Philad. 9 Christ is called 9 6vpa rod
marpds, dv hs ela€pxovrar "ABpadp ... Kal of mpopjrar; ct.
Harnack on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,3sq.). 8. ‘anopen
door’ is used of the opportunity of doing something: rijs
miorews, of getting faith, Acts xiv. 27; open to a
teacher, i. e. the opportunity of teaching others, 2 Co.
ii. 12; Col. iv. 3; by a bold combination of metaph. and
literal language, the phrase dupa peyddy K. evepyns [A. Ve
a great door and effectual] is used of a large opportunity
Oupeos
of teaching a great multitude the way of salvation, and
one encouraging the hope of the most successful results:
1 Co. xvi. 9. -y. the door of the kingdom of heaven
(likened to a palace) denotes the conditions which
must be complied with in order to be received into the
kingdom of God: Lk. xiii. 24 (for Rec. mvAns); power
of entering, access into, God’s eternal kingdom, Rey. ii.
8 cf. 7, [but al. al.; add here Rev. iv. af 8. he whose
advent is just at hand is said em) Ovpais etvas, Mt. xxiv.
33; Mk. xiii. 29, and apo Oupav éornxevar, Jas. v. 9. Gs
éatnkas emi tiv Ovpav k. kpover is said of Christ seeking
entrance into souls, and they who comply with his en-
treaty are said dvotyew Tt. Ovpay, Rev. iii. 20.*
Oupeds, -08, 6, (fr. Opa, because shaped like a door [cf.
W. 23]), a shield (Lat. scutum); it was large, oblong,
and four-cornered : tov 6. tis micTews, i. q. THY TioTW ws
Ovpedv, Eph. vi. 16. It differs from domis (Lat. clipeus),
which was smaller and circular. [Polyb., Dion. Hal.,
Plut., al.]*
Oupis, -iSos, 7, (dimin. of Ovpa, prop. a little door; Plat.,
Dio Cass.), a window: Acts xx. 9; 2 Co. xi. 33. (Arstph.,
Theophr., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
Ovpwpéds, -00, 6, 7, (fr. Ppa, and dpa care; cf. dpxvapéds,
murwpds, tinwpds; cf. Curtius § 501, cf. p.101; [Vaniéek
p- 900; Adlen in Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p.129]), a door-
keeper, porter; male or female janitor: masc., Mk. xiii.
34; Jn.x.3; fem. Jn. xviii. 16 sq. ([Sappho], Aeschyl.,
Hadt., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Joseph., al.; Sept.) *
Ovoia, -as, 7, (vw), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. for
mm)? an offering, and N2i; @ sacrifice, victim; a.
prop. : Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, fr. Hos. vi. 6; Mk. ix. 49
([R GL Tr txt. br.], see dkifw); Eph. v. 2; Heb. x. 5,
263) plur., Miko xii.335 Ek. xi. 15) Hebs ix. 23:5) [x15 8
(here Rec. sing.) ]; dvayew O@voiay rwi, Acts vii. 41; dva-
epewv, Heb. vii. 27, (see avaya, and dvapepw 2); [Sodvar
6. Lk. ii. 24]; mpoodépew, Acts vii. 42; Heb. v. 1; viii.
3; x. [11], 12; [xi 4]; pass. Heb. ix. 9; dca rns Ovoias
avtov, by his sacrifice, i. e. by the sacrifice which he
offered (not, by offering up himself; that would have
been expressed by dia ts Ovoias THs éavrod, or Sia THs
éavrov Oucias), Heb. ix. 26; éoOiew ras Ovoias, to eat the
flesh left over from the victims sacrificed (viz. at the
sacrificial feasts; cf. [Lev. vii. 15 sqq.; Deut. xii. 7 sq.
17 sq., etc.] Win. RWB. s. v. Opfermahlzeiten), 1 Co. x.
18. b. in expressions involving a comparison: @vaia.
mvevpatikal (See mvevparikds, 3 a.), 1 Pet. 11.5; Ovala, a
free gift, which is likened to an offered sacrifice, Phil.
iv. 18; Heb. xiii. 16 (rovavras Ovoias, i. e. with such
things as substitutes for sacrifices God is well pleased) ;
Oucia (aoa (see do, II. b. fin.), Ro. xii. 1; dvapépew
Ovaiav aivécews, Heb. xiii. 15 (if this meant, as it can
mean, atveow ws Ovotay, the author would not have
294
Oapat
added, as he has, the explanation of the words; he
must therefore be supposed to have reproduced the
Hebr. phrase AWA, and then defined this more
exactly; Lev. vii. 3 (13) [cf. 2 (12)]; Ps. evi. (evii.) 22;
. THs TlaTews tpav (epex.
gen.), in the work of exciting, nourishing, increasing,
your faith, as if in providing a sacrifice to be offered to
God [ef. émi, p. 233° bot.], Phil. ii. 17.*
Ouoiacrhpiov, -ov, Td, (neut. of the adj. 6vovacrnpios
fef. W. 96 (91) ], and this fr. @vovd¢w to sacrifice), a word
found only in Philo [e. g. vita Moys. iii. § 10, cf. § 7;
Joseph. antt. 8, 4, 1] and the bibl. and eccl. writ.; Sept.
times without number for N31; prop. an altar for the
slaying and burning of victims; used of 1. the altar
of whole burnt-offerings which stood in the court of the
priests in the temple at Jerusalem [B. D. s. v. Altar]:
Mt. v. 23 sq.; xxiii. 18-20, 35; Lk. xi. 51; 1 Co. ix. 13;
x. 18; Heb. vii. 13; Rev.-xi. 1. 2. the altar of incense,
which stood in the sanctuary or Holy place [B. D. u. s.]:
TO Ovataot. Tod Guprdparos, Lk. i. 11 (Ex. xxx. 1); [sym-
bolically] in Heaven: Rey. vi. 9; viii. 3, 5; ix. 13; xiv.
IB Sanu 7 3. any other altar, Jas. ii. 21; plur. Ro.
xi. 3; metaph., the cross on which Christ suffered an
expiatory death: to eat of this altar i. e. to appropriate
to one’s self the fruits of Christ’s expiatory death, Heb.
Ri) LO:
Ov; impf. €6vov; 1 aor. @6uca; Pass., pres. inf. Ove-
c$a; pf. ptep. redupevos; 1 aor. érvOny (1 Co. v. 7, where
Rec.°*" é6vOnv, cf. W. § 5, 1d.12); [fr. Hom. down];
Sept. mostly for 21, also for unw, to slay ; 1. to sac-
rifices immolate: absol. Acts xiv. 13; rwi, dat. of pers.
(in honor of one), Acts xiv. 18; ri 7, 1 Co. x. 20. 23
to slay, kill: absol., Acts x. 13; xi. 7; ri, Lk. xv. 23, 27,
30; pass. Mt. xxii. 4; rd macya, the paschal lamb, Mk.
xiv. 12; pass., Lk. xxii. 7; 1 Co. v. 7, (Deut. xvi. 2, 6).
3. to slaughter: absol. Jn. x.10; twa, Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.)
24; 1 Mace. vii. 19.*
Owpds, -a, 6, (DINA [1. e. twin], see diSupos), Thomas,
one of Christ’s apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi.
15; Jn. xi. 16; xiv.5; xx. 24-29 [in 29 Rec. only]; xxi.
2ewACts 1. LS. U bola seven
Odpak, -axos, 6; 1. the breast, the part of the body
from the neck to the navel, where the ribs end, (Aristot.
hist. an. 1, 7 [cf. 8, p. 491%, 28]; Eur., Plat., al.): Rev.
ix. 9 [some refer this to the next head]. 2. a breast-
plate or corselet consisting of two parts and protecting
the body on both sides from the neck to the middle,
(Hom., Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.): Rev. ix. 9,17; évdverOat
tT. Oapaxa ths Stxavoovyns, i. e. Sixarocvyny os Owpaka,
Eph. vi. 14; Oépaka rictews, i. e. rigtiv &s Odpaxa, 1 Th.
v. 8, (evdverOar Stxacocivny os Oopaxa, Is. lix. 17; évd.
Oapaxa Sixavocvvny, Sap. v. 19 (18)).*
col ,
see aiveois); emt tH Ovoig . .
295
i,t
[I, «: on iota subscript in Mss. and edd. of the N. T. see
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 3 sqq.; Serivener, Introd. ete.
p- 42, and Index II. s.v.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. Vat.,
praef. p. xi. sq ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 109; WH. Intr. § 410; W.
§ 5,4; B. pp. 11, 44sq., 69; and s. vv. d@gos, (Gov, ‘Hpwdns
etc., mpapa, Tpwds, dv. ¢ is often substituted for e, esp. in
nouns ending in eva (sa; on their accent see Chandler § 95
$4q.), in proper names, etc.; cf. WH. App. p. 153; Intr.
§ 399; Tdf. Proleg. pp. 83, 86 sq.; Scrivener, Introd. ete. p.
10 sq.; Soph. Lex. s. v. El; Meisterhans p. 23 sq.; (on the
usage of the Mss. cf. Tdf. Conlatio critica cod. Sin. c. text.
Elz. etc. p. xviii. ; Scrivener, Full Collation of the cod. Sin.
etc. 2d ed. p. lii.). Examples of this spelling in recent edi-
tions are the following: ayvia WH, dAagovia T WH, avaidia T
WH, amerota WH (exc. Heb. iv. 6, 11), apecxia T WH, Sovaia
T, e0eA00pnokia T WH, eidwrAodAarpia WH, eidixpwia T WH,
émecia WH, éepidia WH, éEpunvia WH, Opnoria T, ieparia
WH, taxondia WH, raxoraéla WH, rodakia T WH, xvBia T
WU, payia T WH, weOodia T WH, 6P0aApod5ovaAla T WH,
mavoia 'T (everywhere; see his note on Heb. xii. 5), mpayuaria
TWH, zpatrabia T WH, pappaxia T WH (now in Gal. v, 20),
aperia WH, Artadia TWH, Kaocapia TWH, Aaodixia T
WH,Sapapia T WH (Sapapirns, Sauapiris,T), Sercvela TWH,
Piradedgia TWH; occasionally the same substitution occurs
in other words: e.g. a¥yios WH, “Apios (rdyos) T, davicw T
WH, daviov WH, danorns T WH, eidéAcov T WH, ekaarrp0jivat
WH, ’Emixovpios T WH, jyiowa WH (see fusous), eatareArp-
bévos WH, Aluua WH, Neddadiu WH in Rev. vii. 6, dpivds
WH, 7106s WH, crotrids WH, irdéaAuupa WH, potivds WH,
xpeopidérns (T?) WH; also in augm., as forhkey WH, tov
(see e%Sw I. init.); cf. WH. App. p. 1625. On ¢ as a dem-
onst. addition to adverbs etc., see vuvi ad init. On the use
and the omission of the mark of dizresis with ¢ in certain
words, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 108; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch.
p. 136 sqq.]
*Idevpos, -ov [cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, (18 [i. e. whom Jeho-
vah enlightens], Num. xxxii. 41), Jairus [pron. Ja-i-rus],
aruler of the synagogue, whose daughter Jesus restored
to life: Mk. v. 22; Lk. viii. 41. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed.s. v. ]*
*TaxoB, 6, (apy [i. e. heel-catcher, supplanter]), /a-
cob; 1. the second of Isaac’s sons: Mt. i. 2; viii. 11;
Jn. iv. 5 sq.; Acts vii. 8; Ro. ix. 13, ete. Hebraistically
i. q. the descendants of Jacob: Ro. xi. 26, (Num. xxiii. 7;
Is. xli. 8; Jer. [Hebr. txt.] xxxiii. 26; Sir. xxiii.12; 1
Mace. iii. 7, and often). 2. the father of Joseph,
the husband of Mary the mother of the Saviour: Mt. i.
15 sq.
"TdxwBos, -ov, 6, (see the preceding word [and cf. B. 6,
18 (16) ]), James; 1. son of Zebedee, an apostle, and
brother of the apostle John, (commonly called James the
greater or elder). He was slain with the sword by the
command of king Herod Agrippa I. (c. a. p. 44): Mt. iv.
2u; x. 2 (8); xvii. 1; Mk. i. 19, 29; iii. 17; v. 37; ix.
Tap pis
2; x. 35, 41; xiii. 3; xiv. 33; Lk.v.10; vi. 14; viii. 51:
DGS WAS UNCUT TIGIS Sat MD. 2. James (commonly
called the less), an apostle, son of Alpheus: Mt. x. 3;
Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15; Actsi.13; apparently identical
with "IdxwBos 6 puxpds James the little [A. V. the less], the
son of Mary, Mk. xv. 40 (Mt. xxvii. 56); xvi. 1, wife of
Cleophas [i. e. Clopas q. v.] or Alpheus, Jn. xix. 25; see
in ’AAdaios, and in Mapia, 3. 3. James, the brother
of our Lord (see ddeAdds, 1): Mt. xiii.55; Mk. vi. 3; Gal.
i. 19 (where eé yn is employed ace. to a usage illustrated
under ei, IIT. 8c. 8.); ii. 9,12; Acts xii. 17; xv. 13; xxi.
18; 1 Co. xv. 7 (?); Jas. i. 1, the leader of the Jewish
Christians, and by them surnamed 6 Sikacos the Just, the
overseer (or bishop) of the church at Jerusalem down to
the year 62 or 63 (or ace. to Hegesippus in Euseb. h. e. 2,
23 [trans. in B. D. p. 1206] down to 69, which is hardly
probable [see Heinichen’s note ad loc.]), in which year
he suffered martyrdom, Joseph. antt. 20, 9,1. In opposi-
tion to the orthodox opinion [defended in B. D.-s. v.
James], which identifies this James with James the son
of Alpheus, and understands 6 adeAdds Tov xupiov to mean
his cousin, ef. esp. Clemen in Winer’s Zeitschr. f. wis-
sensch. Theol. for 1829, p. 351 sqq.; Blom, Diss. de rots
ddeAg@ois ... Tov kupiov. Lugd. 1839; Wilib. Grimm in
Ersch u. Gruber’s Encycl., Sect. 2, vol. 23 p. 80 sqq.;
Schaff, Das Verhiltniss des Jacobus, Bruders des Herrn,
zu Jacobus Alphii. Berl. 1842 [also his Church Hist.
(1882) i. 272sq.]; Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief ete. p. 138
sqq:; Hausrath in Schenkel iii. p. 175 sqq.; [Sveffert in
Herzog ed. 2, vi. 464 sqq.; and reff. s. v. adeAdds, 1 (esp.
Bp. Lghtft.) ]. 4. Anunknown James, father of the
apostle Judas [or Jude]: Lk. vi. 16; Acts i. 13, ace. to
the opinion of those interpreters who think that not
ade\pédv but vidv must be supplied in the phrase “Iovdav
*laxkhBov; see Iovdas, 8.
apa, -ros, Td, (idopat) ; 1. a means of healing, rem-
edy, medicine; (Sap. xi. 4; xvi. 9; Hat. 3, 130; Thue.
2,51; Polyb. 7, 14, 2; Plut., Leian., al.). 2. a heal-
ing: plur., 1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; (Jer. xl. (xxxiii.) 6, ete. ;
Plat. lege. 7 p. 790 d.).*
TapBpfs, 6, and 6 “Iavvijs [cf. B. 20 (18)], Jambres
(for which the Vulg. seems to have read Mapfpjs, as in
the Babylonian Talmud tract. Menach. c. 9 in the Ge-
mara; cf. Buzxtorf, Lex. Talm. p. 945 sq. [p. 481 sq. ed.
Fischer]), and Jannes, two Egyptian magicians who in
the presence of Pharaoh imitated the miracles of Aaron
in order to destroy his influence with the king: 2 Tim.
iii. 8 (cf. Ex. vii. 11 sq.). The author of the Epistle de
rived their names from the tradition of the Talmudists
and the Rabbins, [cf. B.D. art. Jannes and Jambres].
"Tavva
These Magi are mentioned not only in the tract of the
Babyl. Talmud just referred to, but also in the Targ.
of Jonath. on Ex. vii. 11; the book Sohar on Num. xxii.
22; Numenius zep} rdya6od in Orig. c. Cels. 4, 51; Euseb.
praep. evang. 9, 8; Evang. Nicod. c. 5, and other writ.
enumerated by Thilo in his Cod. apocr. p. 552 sq. ; [and
Wetstein on 2 Tim.1.c.; Holtzmann ibid. p. 140 sq.].*
Tawa, (L T Tr WH “lawai); Jannai, Vulg. Janne
[Tdf. txt. (cod. Amiat.) Jannae}, indecl. prop. name of
one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 24.*
*Iavvijs, 6, see IauBpis.
idopat, -Gyar; [perh. fr. ios, Lob. Technol. p. 157 sq. ;
cf. Vaniéek p. 87]; a depon. verb, whose pres., impf.
iduny, fut. idcopa, and 1 aor. mid. iacdunv have an act.
signif., but whose pf. pass. tayar, 1 aor. pass. iaOnv, and
1 fut. pass. iaOnooua have a pass. signif. (cf. Kriiger § 40
s.v.; [Veitch s. v.; B. 52 (46); W. § 38, 7¢.]); [fr. Hom.
down]; Sept. for 851; to heal, cure: twa, Lk. iv. 18 R
L br.; v. 17; vi. 19; ix. 2 [here T WH om. Tr br. the
ace.], 11, 42; xiv. 43 xxii. 51; Jn. iv. 47; Acts ix. 34;
x. 38; xxviii. 8; pass., Mt. viii. 8,13; xv. 28; Lk. vii. 7;
viii. 47; xvii. 15; Jn. v.13 [Tdf. dodevay]; and Acts iii.
11 Rec.; twa aro twos, to cure (i. e. by curing to free)
one of [lit. from; cf. B. 322 (277)] a disease: pass., Mk.
yv. 29; Lk. vi. 18 (17). trop. to make whole i. e. to free
from errors and sins, to bring about (one’s) salvation:
Mt. xiii. 15; Jn. xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10);
pass., 1 Pet. ii. 24; Jas. v.16; in fig. discourse, in pass. :
Heb. xii. 13.*
"Taped (T WH "Idper, Lehm. "Idpe9; [on the accent in
codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]), 6, (Heb. 17 descent),
Jared, indecl. prop. name (‘Iapddys [lapédes, ed. Bekk.]
in Joseph. antt. 1, 2, 2), the father of Enoch (Gen. v.
15,18; 1 Chr.i. 2 [here A. V. Jered]): Lk. iii. 37.*
tacts, -ews, 7, a healing, cure: Lk. xiii.32; Actsiv. 22,
30. (Prov. iii. 8; iv. 22; [Archil.], Hippocr., Soph.,
Plat., Leian., al.) *
taoms, -cdos, 7, [fr. Plato down], jasper; a precious
stone of divers colors (for some are purple, others blue,
others green, and others of the color of brass; Plin. h. n.
37,37 (8)): Rev. iv. 3; xxi.11,18sq. [But many think
(questionably) the diamond to be meant here; others the
precious opal; see Riehm, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 8 and
10; B. D.s. v. Jasper; ef. ‘Bible Educator’ ii. 352.] *
*Idcwv, -ovos, 6, Jason, a Thessalonian, Paul’s host :
Acts xvii. 5-7, 9; whether he is the same who is men-
tioned in Ro. xvi. 21 as a kinsman of Paul is uncertain.*
larpds, -o0, 6, (tdouac), [fr. Hom. down], a physician:
Mt. ix. 12; Mk. ii. 17; v. 26; Lk. v. 31; viii. 43 [here
WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; Col. iv. 14; iarpé, Oepdmev-
gov ceavtov, a proverb, applied to Christ in this sense:
‘come forth from your lowly and mean condition and
create for yourself authority and influence by perform-
ing miracles among us also, that we may see that you
are what you profess to be,’ Lk. iv. 23.*
i8€ [so occasionally Grsb. and Rec.’ *; e, g. Gal. v.
2; Ro. xi. 22] and (later) iS (73€ drrids ds 1d eimé,
haBe, ebpé+ ide EAAnnedc, Moeris (p. 193 ed. Pierson]:
296
1OLos
ct. W. § 6,1a.; [B. 62 (54) ]), impv. fr. efdov, q. v.; [fr.
Hom. down]. In so far as it retains the force of an
imperative it is illustrated under etd, I. 1e. and 3.
But in most places in the N. T. it stands out of con-
struction like an interjection, even when many are ad-
dressed, [ef. B. 70 (61); and esp. 139 (121 sq.)]; Lat.
en, ecce; see! behold! lo! a. at the beginning of
sentences: as the utterance of one who wishes that
something should not be neglected by another, Mt. xxvi.
65; Mk. ii. 24; xi. 21; xiii.1; Jn. v.14; xviii. 21; Ro.
ii. 17 Rec.; equiv. to Germ. sieh’ doch [see, pray; yet
see], Jn. xi. 36; xvi. 29; xix. 4; Gal. v. 2; or of one
who brings forward something new and unexpected, Jn.
vii. 26; xi.3; xii. 19; or of one pointing out or show-
ing, Germ. hier ist, da ist, dieses ist: iS 6 rémos (French,
voici le liew), Mk. xvi. 6; add, Mk. iii. 34 (L Trmrg.
Sov); Jn. i. 29, 36,47 (48); xix.5[T Tr WH idov], 14,
26 sq. (where some iSov); where we [might] use simply
here, Mt. xxv. 25; with adverbs of place: ie [RGL
idod | Sde 6 Xprords, ide [R G idovd] exet, Mk. xiii. 21. ib.
inserted into the midst of a sentence, in such a way that
the words which precede it serve to render the more evi-
dent the strangeness of what follows: Mt. xxv. 20, 22;
Jn. iii. 26.
i8€a, -as, 4, (fr. efdov, ideiv), form, external appearance ;
aspect, look: Mt. xxviii. 3 (T Tr WH idea, q. v.), cf.
Alberti, Observy. ad loc.; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 81]. (Grk.
writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; 2 Mace. iii. 16; for nin
Gen. v. 3.) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 182, 3.]*
WB.os, -a, -ov, (in prof. auth. [esp. Attic] also of two
term.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. pertaining to one’s self,
one’s own; used a. univ. of what is one’s own as opp.
to belonging to another: ra iS:a mpdBara, Jn. x. 3 sq. 12;
Ta iuaria ta tOca, Mk. xv. 20 RG Tr (for which T ra 16.
ip. adrov, L WH ra ip. adrod); 7d idtov (for his own use)
xtnvos, Lk. x. 343; 8a rod idiov atyaros, Heb. ix. 12; xiii.
12, (i8t@ atari, 4 Mace. vii. 8); 1d idcoy picOwpa, which
he had hired for himself (opp. to 7 &evia [q. v.], 23), Acts
xxviii. 30; add, Jn. v.43; vii. 18; Acts iii. 12; xiii. 36;
Ro. xi. 24; xiv. 4 sq.3 1 Co. iii. 8 (Stow kdzrov) ; vi. 18;
vu. 4, 373 ix. ¢3 xi. 21s “Gal vi. 55 1 Dimein4 12 say,
4; 2 Tim.i.9; iv.3; mpaccew ra ida, to do one’s own
business (and not intermeddle with the affairs of others),
1 Th. iv. 115 ta émidvors, an interpretation which one
thinks out for himself, opp. to that which the Holy Spirit
teaches, 2 Pet. i. 20 [see yivouat, 5 e. a.]; THv idiav Stxato-
avvnv, which one imagines is his due, opp. to dicacooivy
eod, awarded by God, Ro. x. 3; iSia émOupia, opp. to di-
vine prompting, Jas. i. 14; kara ras iSias émbupias, opp.
to God’s requirements, 2 Tim. iv. 3; with the possess.
pron. airay added [B. 118 (103); cf. W. 154 (146)], 2
Pet. iii. 3; tScos adtay mpopyrns, Tit. i. 12; with atrod
added, Mk. xv. 20 Tdf. (see above) ; ra idva [cf. B. § 127,
24], those things in which one differs from others, his nat-
ure and personal character,— in the phrase éx rav iSiev
AaXeiv, Jn. vill. 44; [ef. the fig. ra {Sta rod copatos, 2 Co.
v.10 Lmrg. (ef. Trmrg.); see dud, A. I. 2]; twos, my
own: rais idiats yepoi (unassisted by others), 1 Co. iv.
éStaT Ns
12; thine own: év 6 idio dpOadys, Lk. vi. 41. b. of
what pertains to one’s property, family, dwelling, country,
etc.; of property, odde eis re tay inapydvrav avT@ édeyev
idtov eiva, Acts iv. 32; rd ida, res nostrae, our own things,
i. e. house, family, property, Lk. xviii. 28 LT Tr WH (cf.
B. § 127, 24; W. 592 (551)]; 7H idia yeved, in his own
generation, 1. e. in the age in which he lived, Acts xiii. 36 ;
7 idia wddus, the city of which one is a citizen or inhabi-
tant, Lk. ii. 3[RGTrmrg.]; Mt. ix. 1; 79 idiq duadéxro,
in their native tongue, Acts i. 19 [WH om. Tr br. ida];
li. 6,85 7 ida Secodacpovria, their own (national) religion,
Acts xxv. 19; of idvo1, one’s own people (Germ. die An-
gehorigen), one’s fellow-countrymen, associates, Jn. i. 11,
ef. 2 Mace. xii. 22; one’s household, persons belonging to
the house, family, or company, Jn. xiii. 1; Acts iv. 23;
xxiv. 23; 1 Tim. v. 8; eis ra ida (Germ. in die Heimat),
to one’s native land, home, Jn. i. 11 (meaning here, the
land of Israel) ; xvi. 32; xix. 27, (3 Mace. vi. 27; 1 Esdr.
v. 46 (47); for j73-x, Esth. v.10; vi.12); 6 iS:os dup,
a husband, 1 Co. vii. 2 [B. 117 (102) note; cf. W. 154
(146) ]; plur., Eph. v. 22; Tit. ii. 5; 1 Pet. iii. 1,5; Eph.
v. 24 RG; Col. iii. 18 R; of i8cor Seamdrat (of slaves), Tit.
li. 9. of a person who may be said to belong to one,
above all others: vids, Ro. viii. 32; marnp, Jn. v. 183 pa-
Onrai, Mk. iv. 34 T WH Tr mre. ce. harmonizing with,
or suitable or assigned to, one’s nature, character, aims,
acts; appropriate: rm idia eEovoia, Actsi. 7; Tov iSuov
pioOov, due reward, 1 Co. iii. 8; 7d tSvov capa, 1 Co. xv.
38; kara thy idiav dSivayw, Mt. xxv. 15; ev ro dio
Taypatt, 1 Co. xv. 233; 76 tdtov oixnrnpiov, Jude 6; eis Tov
térov Tov tdtoy, to the abode after death assigned by God
to one ace. to his deeds, Acts i. 25 (Ignat. ad Magnes. 5;
Baal Turim on Num. xxiv. 25 Balaam ivit in locum suum,
i.e. in Gehennam; see rézos, 1 a. fin.) ; Kaip@ idio, at a
time suitable to the matter in hand [A. V. in due season],
Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6; vi.15; Tit. i. 3. d. By
a usage foreign to the earlier Greeks, but found in the
church Fathers and the Byzant. writ. (see W. § 22, 7;
cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 208 sq.; [B. 117 sq. (103)]),
it takes the place of the poss. pron. adrod: Mt. xxii. 5;
xxv. 14; Jn. i. 41 (42), (Sap. x. 1). 2. private (in
class. Grk. opp. to dyudctos, xowds): tdia (cf. W. 591
(549) note] adv. severally, separately, 1 Co. xii. 11 (often
in Grk. writ.). xar’ iSiav (sc. yopav), a. apart: Mt.
xiv. 13; xvii. 19; xx. 17; xxiv. 3; Mk. vi. 31 sq.; vii.
$3; ix. 2, 28; xiii.3; Lk. ix. 10; x. 23; Acts xxiii. 19,
(Polyb. 4, 84,8); with pdvos added, Mk. ix. 2; B. in
private, privately: Mk. iv. 34; Gal. ii. 2, (Diod. 1, 21,
opp. to xow7, 2 Mace. iv. 5; Ignat. ad Smyrn. 7, 2).
The word is not found in Rev.
iSidrys, -ov, 6, (ido), very com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
down; prop. a private person, opp. to a magistrate, ruler,
king; but the noun has many other meanings also, each
one of which is understood from its antithesis, as e. g.
a common. soldier, as opp. to a military officer; a writer
of prose, as opp. to a poet. In the N. T. an unlearned,
illiterate, man, opp. to the learned, the educated: Acts
iv. 13; as often in class. Grk., unskilled in any art: in
297
"Idovpaia
eloquence (Isocr. p. 43 a.), with dat. of respect, 7G dé ye,
2 Co. xi. 6 [A. V. rude in speech]; a Christian who is
not a prophet, 1 Co. xiv. 24; destitute of the ‘gift of
tongues,’ ibid. 16, 23. [Cf. Trench § Ixxix.]*
(S08, a demonstrative particle, [in Grk. writ. fr. Soph.
down], found in the N. T. esp. in the Gospels of Matthew
and of Luke, used very often in imitation of the Hebr.
34, and giving a peculiar vivacity to the style by bid-
ding the reader or hearer to attend to what is said: be-
hold! see! lo! It is inserted in the discourse after a
gen. absol., Mt. i. 20; ii. 1, 13; ix. 18; xii. 46; xvii. 5;
XXv1.47; xxviii.11. «al iSov is used, when at the close
of a narrative something new is introduced, Mt. ii. 9;
iil. 16; iv.11; viii. 2, 24, 29,32, 34; ix. 2sq:20; xii. 10;
Ves 2713 >'aAlh Gy Sb. Aly Seq Gol xoqgib UIle xoqpily >
7; Lk. i. 20, 31, 36; ii. 9 [R GL Tr br.], 25; ix. 80, 38 sq.;
X. 25; xiv. 2; xxiv.13; Acts xii.7; xvi. 1; when a thing
is specified which is unexpected yet sure, 2 Co. vi. 9
(at iSod (Gpev, and nevertheless we live), cf. Mt. vii. 4;
when a thing is specified which seems impossible and
yet occurs, Lk. xi. 41; Acts xxvii. 24. The simple (Sov
is the exclamation of one pointing out something,
Mt. xii. 2, 47 [WH here in mrg. only]; xiii. 3; xxiv. 26;
Mk. iii. 32; Lk. ii.34; and calling attention, Mk. xv. 35
[Tr WH te]; Lk. xxii. 10 ;-Jn. iv. 35; 1 Co. xv. 51
2eComvarlisndasaveos Juder lay mRev.miaedsuix aloe
xi. 14; xvi. 15; xxii. 7 [Rec.]; in other places it is i. q.
observe or consider: Mt. x. 16; xi. 8; xix. 27; xx. 18;
Key 4 Mike KS, Oost XV 4 Lew luke 48s evil noo sueKyllTs
28, 31, etc.; also cat (Sov, Mt. xxviii. 20; Lk. xiii. 30;
idod ydp, Lk. i. 44, 48; ii. 10; vi. 23; xvii. 21; Acts ix.
11; 2 Co. vii. 11; Sod where examples are adduced:
Jas. iii. 4sq.; v. 4, 7,11; for the Hebr. 1337, so that it
includes the copula: Lk. i. 38; i. q. here I am: Acts
ix. 10; Heb. ii. 13. (Sov is inserted in the midst of a
speech, Mt. xxiii. 34 [here WH mrg. ’Idod (see the
Comm.)]; Lk. xiii. 16; Acts ii. 7; xiii. 11; xx. 22, 25.
The passages of the O. T. containing the particle which
are quoted in the New are these: Mt.i. 23; xi. 10; xii.
18; xxi. 5s Mk.i.2; Ik. vii. 27; Jn.xii.15; Ro.ix. 335
Heb. ii. 13; viii. 8; x. 7,9; 1 Pet.ii.6. Like the Hebr.
m7, Sov and cat (Sov stand before a nominative which
is not followed by a finite verb, in such a way as to in-
clude the copula or predicate [cf. B. 139 (121 sq.)]: e.g.
was heard, Mt. iii. 17; is, 7s or was here, exists, etc., Mt.
xii. 10 LT Tr WH, 41; Mk. xiii. 21 RGL; Lk. v.12,
18; vii. 37; xi. 31; xiii. 11 (RG add jv); xvii. 21; xix.
2, 20; xxii. 38, 47; xxiii. 50; Jn. xix. 26 [Rec., 27 RG];
Acts viii. 27, 36; 2 Co. vi. 2; Rev. vi. 2, 5, 8; vii. 9 [not
L]; xii. 3; xiv. 14; xix. 11; xxi. 3; 7s approaching, Mt.
xxv. 6 GLT Tr WH (Ree. adds épyeraz); but also in
such a way as to have simply a demonstrative. force:
Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34.
"ISovpata, -as, 7, Idumea, the name of a region be-
tween southern Palestine and Arabia Petrzea, inhabited
by Esau or Edom (Gen. xxxvi. 30) and his posterity
(the Edomites), (Josh. xv. 1, 21; xi. 17; xii. 7). The
Edomites were first subjugated by David; but after
idpws
his death they disputed Solomon’s authority and in the
reign of Joram recovered their liberty, which they main-
tained, transmitting from generation to generation their
hatred of Israel, until they were conquered again by
Hyrcanus and subjected to the government of the Jews:
Mk. iii. 8. [For details of boundary and history, see
Bertheau in Schenkel and Porter in B. D.s. v. Edom;
also the latter in Kitto’s Cycl. s. v. Idumeza. | *
iSpds, -@ros, 6, [allied w. Lat. sudor, Eng. sweat ; Cur-
tius § 283; fr. Hom. down], sweat: Lk. xxii. 44 [L br.
WH reject the pass.; (Tr accents idpés, yet cf. Chandler
§ 667)].*
Telapen ({so GT WH, L ‘te¢.; Tr -B&X ]; Ree. "Iega-
Bnd), 7 Care [‘perh. intact, chaste; cf. Agnes’ (Ge-
senius) |), Jezebel [mod. Isabel], wife of Ahab (iexEzc:
917-897; 1 K. xvi. 29), an impious and cruel queen,
who protected idolatry and persecuted the prophets (1
K. xvi. 31-2 K. ix. 30); in Rev. ii. 20 i. q. a second Jez-
ebel, the symbolic name of a woman who pretended to
be a prophetess, and who, addicted to antinomianism,
claimed for Christians the liberty of eating things sacri-
ficed to idols, Rev. ii. 20.*
‘Tepdrrodts [WH ‘Tepa Honus ; cf. B. 74; Lob. ad Phryn.
604 sq.], -ews, 7, Hierapolis, a city of Greater Phrygia,
near the river Maeander[or rather, near the Lycus a few
miles above its junction with the Maeander], not far
from Colosse and Laodicea, now Pambuck Kulasi, [for
reff. see Bp. Lehtft. on Col. p. 1 sq.; B.D. Am. ed. s. v.]:
Col. iv. 13.*
tepareta [WH -ria; cf.I, ¢], -as, 7, (teparevw), the priest-
hood, the office of priest: Lk. i. 9; Heb. vii. 5. (Sept. for
73732; Aristot. pol. 7,8; Dion. Hal.; Boeckh, Inserr. ii.
pp. 127, 23; 368, 27.) *
tepdrevpa,, -ros, 76, (ieparev’w), [priesthood i. e.] a.
the office of priest. b. the order or body of priests (see
adeAorns, alypadwata, Siaoropd, Oepareia) ; so Christians
are called, because they have access to God and offer
not external but ‘spiritual’ (mvevparixa) sacrifices: 1
Pet. ii. 5; also tepar. Bacidevov, ib. 9 (after Ex. xix. 6
Sept.), priests of kingly rank, i. e. exalted to a moral
rank and freedom which exempts them from the control
ot every one but God and Christ. ([ Ex. xxiii. 22, ete.;
2 Mace. ii. 17]; not found in prof. auth.) *
ieparedw; (fr. iepdopar and the verbal adj. iepards,
though this adj. does not occur) ; to be priest, discharge
the priest’s office, be busied in sacred duties: Lk. i. 8.
(Joseph. antt. 3, 8,1; Hdian. 5, 6, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.]; Pau-
san., Heliod., Tetons [see L. end S.]; Sept. for 173.) *
“Teperx, see Tepixe.
“Tepeplas [WH ’lep. (see their Intr. § 408); so Rec.*
in Mt. xxvii. 9], -ov [B. 17 (16), 8], 6, (MNT or wT;
i. gq. 7) 7NY ‘Jehovah casts forth’ (his enemies ?), or
‘Jehovah hurls’ (his thunderbolts?); ef. Bleek, Einl. in
das A. T. § 206 p. 469, [cf. B. D. s. v. Jeremiah]), Jere-
miah [ A. V. also jeienind Jeremy], a famous Hebrew
prophet, who prophesied from [c¢] B. c. 627 until the de-
struction of Jerusalem [B.c. 586]. He afterwards de-
parted into Egypt,where he appears to have died; [ef.
298
© ,
lepov
B. D.s. v. Jeremiah, I. 6]: Mt. ii.17; xvi. 14; xxvii. 9 (in
the last pass. his name is given by mistake, for the words
quoted are found in Zech. xi. 12 sq.; [cf. Prof. Brown in
Journ. of Soc. for Bibl. Lit. and Exeg. for Dec. 1882, p.
101 sqq.; Toy, Quot. in N. T. p. 68 sqq.; for a history
of attempted explanations, see Dr. Jas. Morison, Com.
on Mt. 1. c.]).*
iepeds, -€ws, 6, (iepds), [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. 3735, a
priest; one who offers sacrifices and in general is busied
with sacred rites ; a. prop., of the priests of the
Gentiles, Acts xiv. 13; of the priests of the Jews, Mt.
Vili. 4; xii. 4 sq.; Mk. i. 44; [ti. 26]; Dk. i. 55 v. 14;
Jn. i. 19; Heb. vii. [14 L T Tr WH], 20 (21); viii. 4,
etc.; of the high-priest, Acts v. 24 RG (Ex. xxxv. 18;
1 K.i. 8; 1 Mace. xv. 1; Joseph. antt. 6, 12,1); and
in the same sense Christ is called iepevs in Heb. v. 6 (fr.
Ps. cix. (ex.) 4); Heb. vii. 17; also tepeds péyas, Heb.
x. 21 (see dpyxtepevs, 3) [al. take the adj. here not as
blending with iep. into a technical or official appellation,
but as descriptive, great; cf. iv. 14]. b. metaph. of
Christians, because, purified by the blood of Christ and
brought into close intercourse with God, they devote
their life to him alone (and to Christ): Rev. 1.6; v.10;
RK. GF Ch 55 ave OF
‘Teptxe (Tdf. ‘Iepecyo [see his Proleg. p. 85; WH.
App. p. 155, ands. v. e,13; WH ’Ilep. see their Intr.
§ 408; on its accent in codd. cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]),
7, indecl. (on its declens. in other writ. cf. W. § 10, 2; in
Strabo ‘Iepixovs -otvros ; ‘leptyovs, -ovvros in Joseph., cf.
W.1.¢.; Hebr. imvy, fr. m7 to smell, so called from its
fertility in aromatics), Jericho, a noted city, abounding
in balsam [i. e. perh. the opobalsamum; cf. Tristram,
Nat. Hist. ete. p. 337; B. D. s. v. Balm], honey, cyprus
[prob. Arab. “el-henna”; cf. Tristram u. s., s. v. Cam-
phire ], myrobalanus [ Arab. “ zukkum”’], roses, and other
fragrant productions. It was situated not far from the
northern shore of the Dead Sea, in the tribe of Benjamin,
between the city of Jerusalem and the river Jordan, 150
stadia from the former and 60 from the latter. Joseph.
b. j. 4, 8, 3 calls its territory Geiov ywpiov. It is mentioned
in the Ni. ean Mt.xx. 29/33 Mike x46 ikeexes Obs xvaiie
35; xix. 1; Heb. xi. 30. As balsam was exported thence
to other countries, we read Lk. xix. 2 that reA@vac were
stationed there, with an dpx:red@uns, for the purpose of
collecting the revenues. Fora fuller account of the city
see Win. RWB. s. v.; Arnold in Herzog vi. p. 494 sq.;
Furrer in Schenkel iii. 209 sq.; Keim iii. 17 sq. [Eng.
trans. v. 21 sq.; BB.DD.s. v.; ef. also Robinson, Re-
searches etc. i. 547 sqq. ].*
iepdOuros, -ov, (fr. iepos and Ava, cf. eiSwAdburos), sac-
rificed, offered in sacrifice, to the gods; as in Plut. symp.
8, 8, 3 init., used of the flesh of animals offered in sac-
rifice: 1 Co. x. 28 Ltxt.T Tr WH. On the use of the
word in Grk. writ. ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 159.*
tepdv, -od, To, (neut. of the adj. iepds, -d, -dv; cf. rd
dyov), (fr. Hdt. on], a sacred place, temple: of the tem-
ple of Artemis at Ephesus, Acts xix. 27; of the temple
at Jerusalem twice in the Sept., Ezek. xlv. 19; 1 Chr.
lepoT pens
xxix. 4; more freq. in the O. T. Apocr.; in the N. T.
often in the Gospels and Acts; once elsewhere, viz. 1 Co.
ix.13. 1d iepdv and 6 vads differ,.in that the former
designates the whole compass of the sacred enclosure,
embracing the entire aggregate of buildings, balconies,
porticos, courts (viz. that of the men or Israelites,
that of the women, that of the priests), belonging to
the temple; the latter designates the sacred edifice prop-
erly so called, consisting of two parts, the ‘sanctuary’
or‘Holy place’ (which no one except the priests was
allowed to enter), and the‘ Holy of holies’ or ‘most
holy place’ (see dys, 1 a.) (which was entered only
on the great day of atonement by the high-priest alone) ;
[ef. Trench, Syn. § iii]. iepdv is employed in the N,
T. either explicitly of the whole temple, Mt. xii. 6;
Rocivenle- we MK ext. 3); UKoexxio sxx 52 Acts ive is
xxiv.6; xxv.8; 1 Co. ix. 18, etc.; or so that certain
definite parts of it must be thought of, as the courts,
esp. where Jesus or the apostles are said to have gone up,
or entered, ‘into the temple,’ to have taught or encoun-
tered adversaries, and the like, ‘in the temple,’ Mt. xxi.
moun O Ole Mika ex Var 4 Oe) kere Kiko 4 Tis) xX Si:
MMO; XXIV OSE IMs 14s vii 14, 285 vit. 20); xviii.
20; Acts ili. 2; v.20; xxi. 26, etc.; of the courts and
sanctuary, Mt. xii.5; of the court of the Gentiles,
out of which Jesus drove the buyers and sellers and
money-changers, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45;
Jn. ii. 14 sq.; of the court of the women, Lk. ii. 37;
of any portico or apartment, Lk. ii. 46, cf. Jn. x. 23.
On the phrase 76 mrepvy.ov rod iepod see mrepiyioy, 2.
ieporpemts, -és, (fr. iepds, and mpéme it is becoming),
befitting men, places, actions or things sacred to God; rev-
erent: Tit. ii.3. (4 Mace. ix. 25; xi.19; Plat., Philo,
Joseph., Leian.,al.) [Cf. Trench § xcii. sub fin.]*
iepds, -d, -dv, [its primary sense is thought to be mighty;
cf. Curtius § 614; Vanitek p. 88 ; yet see Schmidt u. i.; fr.
Hom. down], sacred, consecrated to the deity, pertaining to
God : iepa ypappara, sacred Scriptures, because inspired
by God, treating of divine things and therefore to be de-
voutly revered, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Joseph. antt. prooem. 3;
[10, 10, 4 fin.]; b.j. 6, 5,4; c. Ap.1,[10,3; 18,6]; 26,
1; iepai BiBro, antt. 2, 16,5; [e. Ap. 1,1; 238, 4], ete. ;
ovk éverpadns ovd€ evnaKnOns Trois iepots ypaupact, Philo,
leg. ad Gaium § 29, ed. Mang. ii. p. 574); [xjpuypa, Mk.
xvi. WH in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’}; neut. plur.
as subst. ra fepd, the holy things, those which pertain to
the worship of God in the temple, 1 Co. ix. 13, ef. épyd{o-
pat, 2a. [See reff. s. v. dytos, fin.; esp. Schmidt ch. 181.] *
‘Tepooddvpa [WH ’lep., see their Intr. § 408], -w, ra,
(the invariable form in Mk. and Jn., almost everywhere
in Mt. and Joseph. [c. Ap. 1, 22, 13, etc.; Philo, leg. ad
Gaium § 36; (cf. Polyb. 16, 39, 4); al.]), and ‘lepovoaAnp
[WH ’lep. (see ref. u. s.)], 9, indecl., (the invariable form
in the Sept. [Josh. x. 1, ete.; Philo de somn. ii. 39 init. ;
so Aristot. in Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 (where see Miiller) ];
in the N. T. where a certain sacred emphasis, so to speak,
resides in the very name, as Gal. iv. 25 sq. [see Bp.
Leghtft. ad loc.]; Heb. xii. 22; Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2, 10;
299
(?
lepoovrA ew
thus in direct address: Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 ; both
forms are used promiscuously [yet with a marked pref-
erence for the indeclinable form] in the O. T. Apocr.,
and in the writ. of Luke and of Paul; [ef. Taf. Proleg.
p- 119; WH. App. p. 160]. Whether there is also a
third and unusual form ‘Iepooddvpa, -ns, 7, in Mt. ii. 3;
ili. 5, is extremely doubtful; for in the phrase é£ero-
pevero ... ‘IepoodAupa, iii. 5, the noun can be taken as
a neut. plur. with a sing. verb, cf. W. § 58,3a.; and in
the former passage, ii. 3, the unusual coupling of the
fem. aca with the neut. plur. ‘TepoodAvpa is easily ex-
plained by the supposition that the appellative idea, 7
mAs, was in the writer’s mind; see Fritzsche and Bleek
ad loc.; cf. B. 18 (16); [yet see Pape, Eigennamen, s.
v.]. Hebr. o2wsy. and orQui, Chald. away, Syr.
~ =>
Seva5o}. Many suppose that the Hebr. name is com-
posed of w>> possession, and pow, so that it signifies tran-
quil possession, habitation of peace; but the matter is very
uncertain and conjectures vary; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii.
p- 628 sq.; [B. D.s. v.]; on the earlier name of the city
see below in SaAjp; Lat. Hierosolyma, -orum, also [Vulg.
e. g. codd. Amiat. and Fuld. Mt. xxiii. 37; but esp.] in
the ch. Fathers Hierusalem, but the form Hierosolyma,
-ae, is uncertain [yet see even Old Lat. codd. in Mt. ii. 1,
3]),—Jerusalem [A.V. Hierusalem and Ierusalem],
the capital of Palestine, situated nearly in the centre of
the country, on the confines of the tribes of Benjamin
and Judah, in a region so elevated that dvaBaivew,
my, to go up, fitly describes the approach to it from any
quarter. The name is used in the N. T. 1. to de-
note, either the city itself, Mt. ii. 1; Mk. iii. 8; Jn.i. 19,
etc.; or its inhabitants, Mt. ii. 3; iii. 5; xxiii. 37; Lk.
xiii. 34. 2. 7 viv ‘Tepova. [the Jerusalem that now
is], with its present religious institutions, i. e. the Mosaic
system, so designated from its primary external location,
Gal. iv. 25, with which is contrasted 7 ave ‘Iep. (after the
rabbin. phrase Moyn Sw aroun, Jerusalem that is above,
i. e. existing in heaven, according to the pattern of which
the earthly Jerusalem nun Sw o‘>wis was supposed to
be built [cf. Schéttgen, Horae Hebr. i. 1207 sqq.]), 1. e.
metaph. the City of God founded by Christ, now wearing
the form of the church, but after Christ’s return to put on
the form of the perfected Messianic kingdom, Gal. iv. 26;
‘Iepovo. érovpduos, the heavenly Jerusalem, i. e. the heavy-
enly abode of God, Christ, the angels, beatified men (as
well the saints of the O. T. as Christians), and as citizens
of which true Christians are to be regarded while still liv-
ing on earth, Heb. xii. 22; 7 xavvy ‘Iep. in the visions of
John ‘the Revelator,’ the new Jerusalem, a splendid visi-
ble city to be let down from heaven after the renovation
of the world, the future abode of the blessed: Rev. iii.
IDS soe Py Os
‘Ieporodvpirys [Tdf. -weirns, see et, +; WH “Iepocodv-
peirns, see their Intr. § 408 ], -ov, 6, a citizen or inhabitant
of Jerusalem: Mk.i.5; Jn. vii. 25. [Joseph. antt. 5, 1,
Wis Grito
iepo-ovAew, -&; (lepdavdos, q. V.); to commit sacrilege,
éepoovdos
co rob a temple: Ro. ii. 22, where the meaning is, ‘thou
who abhorrest idols and their contamination, dost yet
not hesitate to plunder their shrines’; ef. Fritzsche [and
Delitzsch] ad loc. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.) *
tepda-vios, -ov, (fr. iepdv and ovddw), guilty of sacrilege:
Acts xix. 37 [A. V. robbers of temples; cf. Bp. Lghtft. in
The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294 sq.]. (2 Mace. iv.
42; Arstph., Xen.,-Plat., Polyb., Diod., al.) *
tepoupyéw, -&; (fr. fepovpyds, and this fr. iepds and
EPLQ); to be busied with sacred things; to perform sacred
rites, (Philo, Hdian.); used esp. of persons sacrificing
(Joseph. antt. 7, 13, 4, etc.); trans. to minister in the man-
ner of a priest, minister in priestly service: tov vopov, of
those who defend the sanctity of the law by undergoing
a violent death, 4 Mace. vii. 8; 1d evayyediov, of the
preaching of the gospel, Ro. xv. 16 (where Fritzsche
treats of the word fully; [cf. W. 222 sq. (209) ]).*
‘Iepoveadfp, see ‘Iepooodvpa.
tepwotvyn [on the w see dyafwovrn, init.],-ns, 9, (fepds),
priesthood, the priestly office: Heb. vii. 11 sq. 14 RG, 24.
(Sir. xlv. 24; 1 Esdr. v. 38; 1 Mace. ii. 54; iii. 49; 4
Mace. v. 34; Hdt., Plat., Dem., Diod., Joseph., Plut.,
Hdian., al.) *
Teroat (Ieccaios in Joseph.), 6, Cw [cf. B. D. Am.
ed. s. v.]), Jesse, the father of David the king (1 S. xvi.
1, 10; xvii. 12 Alex.; xx.27): Mt.i.5 sq-; Lk. ii. 32;
Acts xiii. 225" Rozxv. 12
"TepOde ClepOis, -ov, in Joseph.), 6, ( NAD” [fut. 3 sing.
mase.], fr. MND to open), Jephthah, the son of Gilead
[cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gilead, 4], and a judge of Israel
(Judg. xi. sq.): Heb, xi. 32.*
Texovias, -ov, 6, (2 Jehoiakin, i.e. whom Jehovah
appointed; Sept. Iwayiv [(?) see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Jehoiachin]), Jechoniah, king of Judah, carried off into
exile by Nebuchadnezzar [c.] B. c. 600 after a reign of
three months, 2 K. xxiv. 8-17; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 9 sq.; Jer.
lii. 31. He is mentioned Mt. i. 11 sq. But he was not,
as is there stated, the son of Josiah, but of Jehoiakim;
nor had he ‘brethren,’ but his father had. Accordingly
in the Evangelist’s genealogy the names D’D'm) and
pa have been confounded; [cf. B. D. u. s., and reff.
there ].*
"Ingots, -ov, dat. -ov, acc. -odv, voc. -od, [W. § 10, 1],
6, Jesus (win: and ace. to a later form yiw?, Syr.
> m
Name, i. e. whose help is Jehovah; Germ. Gotthilf;
but later writ. gave the name the force of Myywi, see
Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 "Incods bs éyévero kata Td
Svopa avrov péyas emt cwrnpia ékrextav adrov, of
Joshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21
"Inoovs éppnveverac owtnpia kvpiov), & very com. prop.
name among the Israelites; cf. Delitesch, Der Jesusname,
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or
Talmud. Stud. xv.]. In the N. T. 1. Joshua [fully
Jehoshua], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses’
successor: Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son
of Eliezer, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 29 L T Tr
WH. 3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of
300
[~ ,
(KaVOwW
mankind: Mt. i. 21, 25; Lk. i. 31; ii. 21, and very often;
see kvpios and Xproros. 4. Jesus Barabbas; see
BapafBas. 5. Jesus, surnamed Justus, a Jewish
Christian, an associate with Paul in preaching the gos-
pel: Col. iv. 11.
ixavés, -7, -dv, (fr. ikaw, ixavw; prop. ‘reaching to’, ‘at-
taining to’; hence ‘adequate’); as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt.
and Thuc. down, sufficient; a. of number and
quantity; with nouns, many enough, or enough with a
gen.: dyAos ikavos, a great multitude [A. V. often much
people}, Mk. x. 46; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26; xix.
26; rads, Acts v. 837 RG; KAavOuds, Acts xx. 37; dpyv-
pia ixava, [A. V. large money, cf. the collog. ‘money
enough’], Mt. xxviii. 12; Aapmddes, Acts xx. 8; Adyor,
Lk. xxiii. 9; das ixavdv, a considerable light [A. V. a
great light], Acts xxii. 6. of time: ixav@ xpdve (cf.
W. § 31, 9; B. § 133, 26] for a long time, [Lk. viii. 27
T Trtxt. WH]; Acts viii. 11; also ixavov xpdvov, Acts
xiv. 8; and plur. Lk. xx. 9; é& ixavov, of a long time,
now for a long time, Lk. xxiii. 8 RG; also ék xypdvev
ixavdy, Lk. viii. 27 RG LTrmrg.; xxiii. 8 L T Tr WH;
[amd ixavav érav, these many years, Ro. xv. 23 WH Tr
txt.]; ikavod xpdv. diayev. much time having elapsed,
Acts xxvii. 9; ed ixavdv, for a long while, Acts xx. 11
(2 Mace. viii. 25; Diod. 13, 100; Palaeph. 28); jpepas
{cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 89 n.], Acts ix. 23,435; xviii.
18; xxvii. 7. absol. ixavot, many, a considerable num-
ber: Lk. vii. 11 [RG Lbr. T Trmrg. br.]; Acts xii. 12;
xiv. 213;—xix. 19; 1 Co. xi. 30, (1 Mace. xiii. 49, etc.).
ixavdv éotw, it is enough, i. q. enough has been said on
this subject, Lk. xxii. 38 (for Jesus, saddened at the
paltry ideas of the disciples, breaks off in this way the
conversation; the Jews, when a companion uttered any
thing absurd, were wont to use the phrase p39 39 [AAs
let it suffice thee, etc.], as in Deut. iii. 26, where Sept. ixa-
vovoOw) ; ixavdy TO TowiTe f émitTipia avTy, sc. éori, suffi-
cient ... is this punishment, 2 Co. ii. 6; after the Lat.
idiom satisfacere alicui, rd ix. movetv tun, to take away
from one every ground of complaint [A. V. to content],
MK. xv. 15 (Polyb. 32, 7, 13; App. Pun. p. 68 ed. Toll.
[§ 74, i. p. 402 ed. Schweig.]; Diog. Laért. 4, 50); rd
ix. NapBave (Lat. satis accipio), to take security (either
by accepting sponsors, or by a deposit of money until
the case had been decided), Acts xvii. 9. b. suffi-
cient in ability, i. e. meet, fit, (Germ. ttichtig [A. V.
worthy, able, etc.]): mpds tt, for something, 2 Co. ii. 16;
foll. by an inf. [B. 260 (223 sq.)], Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 7;
Lk. iii. 16; 1 Co. xv. 9; 2 Co. iii. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 2; foll.
by va with subjune. [B. 240 (207); cf. W. 335 (314)]:
Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6.*
ixavérys, -nTos, 7, sufficiency, ability or competency to
do a thing: 2 Co. iii. 5. (Plat. Lys. [p. 215 a.] ap. Poll.;
[al.}.)*
ixavdw, -@: 1 aor. ixdveca; (ixavds); to make suffi-
cient, render fit; with two acc., one of the obj. the other
of the predicate: to equip one with adequate power to
perform the duties of one, 2 Co. iii. 63 rea eis rt, Col. i
112. [Sept.; Dion. Hal., al.]*
ixeT7pLos
txerfptos, -a, -ov, (ixérns a suppliant), pertaining to a
suppliant, fit for a suppliant; % ixerypia, as subst., sc.
aia or pa8dos ; 1. an olive-branch; for suppliants
approached the one whose aid they would implore hold-
ing an olive-branch entwined with white wool and fillets,
to signify that they came as suppliants [ef. Trench § li.
sub fin.]: AauBavew ixernpiay, Hdt. 5, 51; ixernpiav riOé-
vat Or mpoBahrcoOa traps tin, etc. 2. i. q. ikeoia,
supplication (Isocr. p. 186 d. var.; Polyb.; 2 Mace. ix.
18): plur. joined with Sejoes (Polyb. 3, 112, 8; sing. Job
xl. 22 Sept.), Heb. v. 7.*
lxpds, -ddos, 7, moisture: Lk. viii. 6. (Sept. Jer. xvii.
8; Hom. Il. 17, 392; Joseph. antt. 3, 1, 3, and often in
other auth.) *
*Ikéviov, -ov, rd, Iconium, a celebrated city of Asia
Minor, which in the time of Xen. (an. 1, 2, 19) was ‘the
last city of Phrygia,’ afterwards the capital of Lycaonia
(Strab. 12 p. 568; Cic. ad divers. 15,4); now Konia
[or Konieh]: Acts xiii. 51; xiv. 1,19, 21; xvi. 2; 2 Tim.
iii, 11. Cf. Overbeck in Schenkel iii. 303 sq.; [B. D.
(esp. Am. ed.) s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 144 sqq.].*
iAapds, -d, -dv, (idaos propitious), cheerful, joyous,
prompt to do anything: 2 Co. ix. 7; Prov. xix. 123; xxii.
8; Sir. xiii. 26 (25); xxvi. 4; 3 Mace. vi. 35; Arstph.,
Xen., al.*
ikapérns, -nros, n, cheerfulness, readiness of mind: Ro.
xii. 8. (Prov. xviii. 22; [Diod., Philo (de plant. Noé
§ 40), Plut., al.]; Acta Thom. § 14.) *
iAdokopat; (see below); in class. Grk. the mid. of an
act. itkdoxw (to render propitious, appease) never met
with ; 1. to render propitious to one’s self, to ap-
pease, conciliate to one’s self (fr. tdaos gracious, gentle) ;
fr. Hom. down; mostly w. acc. of a pers., as Gedy, ’AOn-
nv, etc. (rov Gedy ihacacOa, Joseph. antt. 6, 6,5); very
rarely w. acc. of the thing, as rjy dpynv, Plut. Cat. min.
61 (with which cf. e&:AdoxecOar Ovpdv, Prov. xvi. 14
Sept.). In bibl. Grk. used passively, to become propitious,
be placated or appeased; in 1 aor. impv. iddoOntt, be pro-
pitious, be gracious, be merciful, (in prof. auth. t’n& and
Dor. tha&i, which the gramm. regard as the pres. of an
unused verb fAnp, to be propitious; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Sp.
li. p. 206; Kiihner § 343, i. p. 839; Passow for L. and
S., or Veitch] s. v. (Anuc), with dat. of the thing or the
pers.: Lk. xviii. 13 (rais dwaprias, Ps. Ixxviii. (1xxix.)
9; [Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 38]; 77 duapria, Ps. xxiv. (xxv.)
11; ihdoOn 6 Kvptos wept rHs Kaxias, Ex. xxxii. 14 Alex. ;
acOnoera Kip. TH SovAw cov, 2 K. v. 18). 2. by
an Alexandrian usage, to expiate, make propitiation for,
(as é&iAdoxeoOa in the O. T.): ras dpaprias, Heb. ii. 17
(jpav tas Wuxds, Philo, alleg. leg. 3,61). [Cf. Kurtz,
Com. on Heb.1.c.; W.227 (213); Westcott, Epp. of S. Jn.
p- 83 sq.]*
idacpds, -00, 6, (iAdoKopac) 5 1. an appeasing,
propitiating, Vulg. propitiatio, (Plut. de sera num. vind.
e.17; plur. joined with xaOappoi, Plut. Sol. 12; with
gen. of the obj. raév dev, Orph. Arg. 39; Plut. Fab. 18;
Oedv pay ikacpod Kat yaptornpiav Seopévny, vit. Camill.
7 fin.; moveto Oat ikacpdr, of a priest offering an expia-
301
*DXupixov
tory sacrifice, 2 Mace. iii. 33). 2. in Alex. usage the
means of appeasing, a propitiation: Philo, alleg. leg. iii.
§ 61; mpocoicovow ihacpov, for nson, Ezek. xliv. 27;
mept tov duapridy, of Christ, 1 Jn. ii. 2; iv. 10, (kpids
tov thacpov, Num. v. 8; [cf. jyépa r. itaopod, Lev. xxv.
9]; also for mmo, forgiveness, Ps. cxxix. (cxxx.) 4;
Dan. ix. 9 Theodot.). [Cf Trench § lxxvii.]*
tAawriptos, -a, -ov, (iAdoKopat, q. Vv.), relating to ap-
peasing or expiating, having placating or expiating force,
expiatory: pynya ikaornptov, 4 monument built to propi-
tiate God, Joseph. antt. 16, 7, 1; idaarnpsos Odvaros,
4 Mace. xvii. 22; yeipas ixernpious, ef Bother S€ iXaotn-
pious, ekxreivas be, Niceph. in act. SS. ed. Mai, vol. v.
p- 335,17. Neut. rd ihaornpiov, as subst., a means a7
appeasing or expiating, a propitiation, (Germ. Verséh-
nungs- oder Stihnmittel); cf. W. 96 (91); [592 (551)].
So used of 1. the well-known cover of the ark of
the covenant in the Holy of holies, which was sprinkled
with the blood of the expiatory victim on the annual
day of atonement (this rite signifying that the life of
the people, the loss of which they had merited by their
sins, was offered to God in the blood as the life of the
victim, and that God by this ceremony was appeased
and their sins were expiated); hence the lid of expia-
tion, the propitiatory, Vulg. propitiatorium; Luth. Gna-
denstuhl, [A. V. mercy-seat]: Heb. ix. 5 (Sept. Ex. xxv.
18 sqq.; Lev. xvi. 2, ete.; more fully itaornpioy erideva.
Bx. xxv. 17; xxxviii. (xxxvil.) 7 (6), for the Hebr.
nbd, fr. 1D5D to cover, sc. sins, i.e. to pardon). ‘Theod-
oret, Theophyl., Oecum., Luther, Grotius, Tholuck,
Wilke, Philippi, Umbreit, [Cremer (4te Aufl.)] and others
give this meaning to the word also in Ro. iii. 25, viz.
that Christ, besprinkled with his own blood, was truly
that which the cover or ‘mercy-seat’ had been ty pi-
cally, i.e. the sign and pledge of expiation; but in
opp. to this interpretation see Fritzsche, Meyer, Van
Hengel, [Godet, Oltramare] and others ad loc. 2
an expiatory sacrifice; a piacular victim (Vulg. propitia-
tio): Ro. iii. 25 (after the analogy of the words yape-
ornpia sacrifices expressive of gratitude, thank-offerings,
cwrnpia sacrifices for safety obtained. On the other
hand, in Dion Chrys. or. 11, 121, p. 355 ed. Reiske, the
reference is not to a sacrifice but toa monument,
as the preceding words show: Karanelew yap avtovs
avdOnpa KdddoTov Kal peyrorov TH “AOnvG Kai émvypa-
whew, Daorhpiov ’Ayxatot rH "TAiddr). [See the full discus-
sion of the word in Dr. Jas. Morison, Crit. Exposition of
the Third Chap. of the Ep. to the Rom. pp. 281-303.]*
rews, -ov, (Attic for Taos [cf. W. 22], fr. Hom.
down), propitious, merciful: €ropar in. rais adexiats, i. ee
I will pardon, Heb. viii. 12; Jer. XXXVill. (xxxi.) 34;
xliii. (xxxvi.) 3; also tats duaprias, 1 K. viii. 34; 2 Chr.
vi. 25, 27, etc.; eds cot, sc. €orw [or ein, B. § 129, 22]
5 Océs, i. €. God avert this from thee, Mt. xvi. 22; Sept.
for Mon foll. by 5, be it far from one, 2S. xx. 20;
xxiii, 17."
Trrverxsy, -08, 76, Illyricum, a region lying between
Italy, Germany, Macedonia and Thrace. having on one
‘pas
side the Adriatic Sea, and on the other the Danube: Ro.
xv. 19 [cf. B. D: Am. ed.].*
ipds, -avros, 6, (fr. ime to send; sc. a vessel, which was
tied to thongs of leather and let down into a well for the
purpose of drawing water; hence inde also, to draw
something made fast to a thong or rope [recent etymol.
connect it w. Skt. sito bind; cf. Curtius § 602; Vanitek
p- 1041]); fr. Hom. down; a thong of leather, a strap ;
in the N. T. of the thongs with which captives or crimi-
nals were either bound or beaten (see mporeivw), Acts
xxii. 25 (4 Mace. ix. 11; Sir. xxx. 35); of the thongs
or ties by which sandals were fastened to the feet, Mk.
i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; Jn. i. 27, (so also in Is. v. 27; Xen.
anab. 4, 5,14; Plut. symp. 4, 2, 3; Suid. iuds+ opaipo-
Tip cavdariov, Cavixtov, otov Td Ad@ptov Tov UmodjpaTos).”
iparite: pf. pass. ptep. iwaricpeévos; (ipdriov); to
clothe: Mk. v.15; Lk. viii. 35. (Found neither in Sept.
nor in prof. auth. [cf. W. 26 (25) ].) *
ipdriov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of tua i. q. efua, an article of
clothing, garment; and this fr. évyups to clothe, cf. Germ.
Hemd); [fr. Hdt. down]; Sept. mostly for 733, also
for maw, mow, etec.; 1. a garment (of any sort) :
Mt. ix. 16; xi. 8 [RGLbr., al. om.; ef. W. 591 (550);
B. 82 (72)]; Mk. ii. 21; xv. 20; Lk. v. 36; vii. 25; Heb.
i. 11; plur. garments, i. e. the cloak or mantle and the
tunic [cf. W.176 (166); B. 24 (23)]: Mt. xvii. 2; xxiv.
18 [Rec.]; xxvii. 31,35; Jn. xix. 23; Acts vii. 58; Jas.
vy. 2, etc.; to rend ra ip. (see diappyyvupe), Mt. xxvi. 65;
Acts xiv. 14; xxii. 23. 2. the upper garment, the
cloak or mantle (which was thrown over the tunic, 6
xtrav) [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 22]: Mt. ix. 20;
Pexiv. 18 Pr WH); Mk.v.27;, Lk. viire445) Jn. xix.
2; Rev. xix. 16; it is distinguished from the yiroy in
Mt. v.40; Lk. vi. 29; [cf. Jn. xix. 23]; Actsix.39. [Cf.
Trench $1.; BB. DD.s. v. Dress; Edersheim, Jewish So-
cial Life, ch. xiii.; esp. ‘Jesus the Messiah,’ i. 620 sqq. ]
ipaticpds, -ov, 6, (iuari¢w), clothing, apparel: univ.,
Lk. vii. 25; Acts xx. 33; 1 Tim. ii. 9; of the tunic, Mt.
xxvil. 35 Rec.; Jn. xix. 24; of the cloak or mantle, Lk.
ix. 29. (Sept.; Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Athen.)
[Cf. Trench § 1.]*
ipe(pw : mid. iuetpouat; (tpnepos desire, longing, [allied w.
idews; Vaniéek p. 88]; cf. olkreipw) ; to desire, long for,
esp. of the longing of love: dyer [W. § 30, 10 b.] i. e. your
souls, to win them to Christ, 1 Th. ii. 8 Rec.; see 6pL€(po-
pa. (Sept. Job iii. 21; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
iva, I. an adv. of Place, fr. Hom. down, esp. in
the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what
place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A.
Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum
Opusce. p. 186 sq.) thought he had found two examples
in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him.
The first viz. va pi) puowidcde, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain
thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have
learned from my example to think humbly of yourselves)
the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the
second, iva abrods (ndovre, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye
zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below.
302
oY
LVva
II. a final Conjunction (for from local direc-
tion, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy ta
mental direction or intention) denoting purpose and
end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; wa
pn, that not, lest; it is used
1. prop.of the purpose or end; a. foll. by the
Optative; only twice, and then preceded by the pres.
of a verb of praying or beseeching, where the wish
(optatio) expressed by the prayer gave occasion for the
use of the optat.: Eph. i. 17 but WH mrg. subj.; iii. 16
RG; cf. W. 290 (273); B. 2383 (201); and yet in both
instances the telic force of the particle is so weakened
that it denotes the substance rather than the end of
the prayer; see 2 below. b. foll. by the Subjunc-
tive, not only (according to the rule observed by the
best Grk. writ.) after the primary tenses (pres., pf., fut.)
or the imperative, but (in accordance with that well-
known negligence with which in later times and esp. by
Hellenistic writers the distinction between the subjunc.
and the optat. was disregarded) after preterites even
where the more elegant Grk. writ. were wont to use the
optat.; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 847 sqq.; Klotz ad Dev.
ii. 2 p. 616 sqq. ; W. 287 (270) sqq.; B. 233 (201). a.
aftera Present: Mk. iv. 21; vii. 9; Lk. vi. 34; viii. 12;
xvi. 28; Jn. ili. 15; v.34; vi.30; Acts il. 25; xvi. 30; Ro.
dU > Hie Os xd. 25 2 Co, vil29)5 tx. 12) Conia Gale
Vio 3i¢ JPhilait.-8 9 Heba vor spvigl 2.0 1x 2 eel euiuoes
Rey. iii. 18; xi. 6, and often. B. after a Perfect:
Wire 2 25 xd, 450). We 23.5) [io ele lr WELL Cheam
88e2 x11. 40, 465 x1v29 5 xvid, 4; xvi. 4° xx. 31 1 Co.
ix. 22; 1 Jn.v. 20 [here T Tr WH pres. indic.; see d.].
y. after an Imperative (either pres. or aor.) : Mt. vii.
Pix. 6s xiveld spcvil. 27s xxi. 26° Mik od. 9d -exinieg Se
Jn. iv. Los svol4s viiy3. [RG Iii); x 38is 1) Comvaia bs) xa
84; 1 Tim. iv. 15; Tit. iii. 13, ete.; also after a horta-
tive or deliberative subjunc.: Mk. i. 38; Lk. xx.
14 se Jina vid: Rees ra WV: EI Stool Or uel elo vamlion
ete. 8. aftera Future: Lk. xvi. 4; xviii. 5; Jn. v. 20
[here Tdf. indic. pres.; see d.]; xiv. 3, 13,16; 1 Co. xv.
28; Phil. i. 26. e. after Historic tenses: after the
impf., Mk. iii. 2 [here L Tr fut. indic.; see c.]; vi. 41;
viii. 6; Lk. vi. 7; xviii. 15, etc.; after the plupf., Jn. iv.
8; after the aor., Mt. xix. 13; Mk. iii. 14; xi. 28; xiv.
10 [B. § 139, 37]; Lk. xix. 4, 15; Jn. v. 36 [RGL; ef.
B.]; vii. 32; xii. 9; Acts xix.4[?]; Ro. vi.4; 2 Co. viii.
9; Heb. ii. 14; xi. 835; 1 Tim.i.16; 1 Jn. iii.5,8,ete. c.
As prof. auth. join the final particles éppa, py, and esp.
dros, also with the future Indicative (cf. Matthiae
§ 519, 8 ii. p. 1186 sqq.), as being in nature akin to the
subjunc., so the N. T. writ., ace. to a usage extremely
doubtful among the better Grk. writ. (cf. Klotz 1. e. p.
629 sq.), also join tva with the same [cf. WH. App. p.
171° sq.; Soph. Lex. s. v. va, 17]: tva 6noa, 1 Co. ix. 18;
LT Tr WH in the foll. instances: oravpdcovow, Mk.
xv. 20 [not WH (see u. s.) ], d@covow, Lk. xx. 103 Kevd-
cet, 1 Co. ix. 15 [not Lehm.], [xatadovAdcovoew, Gal. ii.
4 (but ef. Hort in WH u.s. p. 167*)]; KxepdnOnoovrat,
1 Pet. iii. 1; opdEovow, Rev. vi. 4; ddcet, Rev. viii. 3;
wa
spooxumnoovow, [Rev. ix. 20]; xiii. 12 [(ef. 2 a. fin. be-
low)]; [dvaranoovra, Rev. xiv. 13 (see dvarate) cf.4b.]; L
Tr in the foll. : karmyopjoovow, Mk. iii. 2, (cf. b. e. above) ;
mpockurmoovow, Jn. xii. 20; T Tr WH in [@ewpioovow,
Jn. vii. 3]; Evpnoovra, Acts xxi. 24; LT WH Tr mrg.
in ddunoovow, Rev. ix. 4 [(cf. 2 b. below)]; [add, épei,
Lk. xiv.10 TWH Tr txt.; eEopodoynoerat, Phil. ii. 11 T
Lmrg. Tr mrg.; cavéjoopa, 1 Co. xiii. 3 T; Sacer, In.
xvii. 2 WH Tr mrg.; dvanratvcovrat, Rev. vi. 11 WH;
deoe, Rev. xiii. 16 WH mrg.], (iva xatapynoe: tov Odva-
Tov kai THY ék vexpov avdotaow Sei€et, Barn. ep. 5, 6 [so cod.
®, but Hilgenf., Miiller, Gebh., al., adopt the subjunc. ;
yet see Cunningham’s note ad loc.]); so that the fut. al-
ternates with the subjunc.: tva gora.. . kai eicéAOwour,
Rev. xxii. 145 yévyrat kai éon (Vulg. sis), Eph. vi. 3; in
other pass. L T Tr WH have restored the indic., as tva
néovot kK. mpookvynoovow ...K. yvaow, Rev. iii. 9; wa
--.mlnte... kai xadioeobe or xabnoeobe [but WH txt.
ka@noOe| (Vulg. et sedeatis), Lk. xxii. 30; kd x. &o-
#oAoynoerat, Phil. ii. 11 [T Lmrg. Trmrg.]; cf. B. § 139,
38, W.§ 41b.1b. d. By a solecism freq. in the
eccles. and Byzant. writ. iva is joined with the indic.
Present: 1 Co. iv. 6 (duawiebe); Gal. iv. 17 (G
Aotre) ; (cf. Test. xii. Patr., test. Gad § 7; Barn. ep. 6,
5; 7,11; Ignat. ad Eph. 4, 2; ad Trall. 8, 2, and other
exx.in Win. and Bitm. as below; but see Hort in WH.
App. p. 167°, cf. pp. 169°, 171 sq.]; but the indic. is very
doubtful in the foll. passages: [Jn. iv. 15 Tr txt.]; v.
20 (Tdf. Oavpatere); xvii. 3 T Trtxt.; Gal. vi. 12 TL
mrg.; [1 Th.iv. 13 Lmrg.]; Tit. ii. 4 TTrLmrg.; 2 Pet.
i.101.; [1 Jn. v. 20 T Tr WH (cf. b. 8. above)]; Rev.
xii. 6 (T Tr rpépovow) ; [xiii.17 WH mrg.]; cf. W. § 41
b. 1 c.; B.§ 139,39; Meyer on 1 Co. iv. 6; Wieseler on
Gal. iv. 17; [Soph. u.s.]. (In the earlier Grk. writ. iva
is joined with the indic. of the past tenses alone, ‘to
denote something which would have been, if something
else had been done, but now has not come to pass’ Her-
mann ad Vig. p. 847, cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 630 sq.;
Kihner § 553, 7 ii. 903; [Jelf § 813; cf. Jebb in App. to
Vincent and Dickson’s Modern Greek, § 79].) e.
the final sentence is preceded by preparatory demon-
strative expressions [W. § 23, 5]: eis rodro, to this end,
Mueexvilies is 1odneii.S; sho. xiv. 95 02'Co. 1179; 1 Bet:
ii. 21; iii. 9; iv.6, (Barn. ep.5,1,11; [14,5]); els avr
tovro, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; 8a rovro, Jn. i. 31; 2 Co.
xiii. 10; Philem. 15; 1 Tim. i. 16; rovrov yap, Tit. 1. 5.
2. In later Grk., and esp. in Hellenistic writers, the
final force of the particle iva is more or less weakened,
so that it is frequently used where the earlier Greeks
employed the Infinitive, yet so that the leading and
the dependent sentence have each its own subject. The
first extant instance of this use occurs in the Amphic-
tyonic decree in [pseudo-] Dem. p. 279, 8 [i.e. de coron.
§ 155]: mpeoBedoa mpos Piurmov kai a€voby iva Bon8non,
[ef. Odyss. 3, 327 NicoerOa . . . iva vnueptés eviomn (cf.
3, 19)], but it increased greatly in subsequent times ; cf.
W.§ 44, 8; B. 237 (204) ; [Green 171 sq.; Goodwin § 45
N.5b.; Jebb in App. to Vincent and Dickson’s Modern
308
¢.
wa
Greek, § 55]. Accordingly iva stands with the subjunc.
in such a way that it denotes the purport (or object)
rather than the purpose of the action expressed by
the preceding verb. ‘This occurs a. after verbs of
caring for, deciding, desiring, striving: Bre
mew, 1 Co. xvi. 10; Col. iv. 17; 2 Jn. 8; ¢y7d, 1 Co. iv.
2; xiv. 12; pvdAdcoopar, iva pn, 2 Pet. iii. 17; pepmuvaa,
1 Co. vii. 834; (yAdw, 1 Co. xiv. 1; Bovdevonar, Jn. xi. 53
[RG Tr mrg. cupBov.]; xii. 10; dpinue, Mk. xi. 16; Jn.
xii. 7 LT Tr WH; Aqua éeors, Mt. xviii. 14; In. vi. 39
sq-; OeAw, Mt. vii. 12; Mk. vi. 25; ix. 30; x. 35; Lk. vi.
31; so that it alternates with the inf., 1 Co. xiv. 5; didept,
to grant, that, Mk. x. 87; Rev. ix. 5, etc.; mo, Rev. xiii.
12 [here L T Tr WH indice. fut. (cf. 1 ¢. above) ]. b.
after verbs of saying (commanding, asking, exhorting;
but by no means after xededvew [ef. B. 275 (236)]):
ciety, in the sense of to bid, Mt. iv. 3; Mk. iii. 9; Lk. iv.
3; also Xéeyew, Acts xix. 4; 1 Jn. v.16; éppy@n, Rev. vi. 11
[WH indice. fut.]; ix.4 [LT Trmrg. WH indic. fut. (see
1c. above) ]; Scapaprvpopa, 1 Tim. v. 21 (otherwise [viz.
telic] in Lk. xvi. 28); épw7a, to ask, beseech, Mk. vii. 26;
IPs Vas BIBS sails OS Ahie thee WS Saath ey ILS soo Bile
2 Jn. 5; wapaxado, Mt. xiv. 36; Mk. v. 10, 183 vii. 32;
vill. 22; Lk. viii. 32; 1 Co.i.10; ‘xvi. 12,15 sq.; 2 Co.
viii. 6; ix.5; xii.8; 1 Th.iv.1; 2 Th. iii. 12, (Joseph.
antt. 12, 3, 2); mpocevxyopuae [q. v.], Mt. xxiv. 20; Mk.
[xiii. 18]; xiv. 35; Séoua, Lk. ix. 40; xxii. 32, (Dion.
Hal. antt. 1, 83); émuryuo, Mt. xii. 16; [xvi. 20 L WH
txtalpexxols) Mike ii. 125 vit 305) x.485) eK sxvair.-39%
evre\Aopa:, Mk. xiii. 84; Jn. xv. 17; evrodijy didwpe or
apBdvo, Jn. xi.57; xiii. 384; xv.12; ypade, with the
involved idea of prescribing, Mk. ix. 12 [cf. W. 462
(480) and the txt. of LT]; xii. 19; Lk. xx. 28; d1a-
oTeAAopat, Mt. xvi. 20 [L WH txt. emitipd (see above) ];
Mk. v. 43; vii. 36; ix.9; mapayyéAXo, Mk. vi. 8 [cf. W.
578 (538) ]; ocvvtidenat, Jn. ix. 22; dyyapevo, Mt. xxvii-
32; Mk. xv. 21; xnpvoow, Mk. vi. 12; amayyédAdo, Mt.
XXVill. 10; e&opki¢w, Mt. xxvi. 63. [For exx. (of its use
with the above verbs and others) drawn from the later:
Grk. writ. see Sophocles, Glossary ete. § 88, 1.] c..
after words by which judgment is pronounced con-.
cerning that which some one is about to do (or which is
going to happen), as to whether it is ex pedient, be-
fitting, proper, or not; as cvpdéepe, Mt. xviii. 6; v.
29 sq.; Jn. xi. 50; xvi. 7; Avovredet, LE. xvii. 2; dpxerdy
éort, Mt. x. 25; also after d&os, Jn. i. 27; ixavos, Mt.
viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6; éAaxyuordv poi eat, tva, 1 Co. iv. 3;
nyaAXacaro, tva ibn, Jn. viii. 56; ypetav exo, Jn. ii. 25;
xvi. 30; 1 Jn. ii. 27; Se, Wa emi EvNov way, Barn.
ep. 5, 13. [For other exx. see Soph. as above § 88,
354.) d. after substantives, to which it adds a
more exact definition of the thing; after subst. of
time: ypdvor, iva peravonon, Rev. ii. 21; after dpa, Jn.
xii. 23; xiii. 1; xvi. 2,32, (elsewhere dre, Jn. iv. 23; v.
25); in these exx. the fina] force of the particle is still
apparent; we also can say “time that she should re-
pent ” [cf. W. 339 (318); B. 240 (207)]; but in other
expressions this force has almost disappeared, as in
va
gor ovrnbera ipiv, va... drodvow, Jn. xviii. 39; after
puoOds, 1 Co. ix. 18. e. it looks back to a de-
monstrative pronoun; cf. W. 338 (317); [B. § 139,
45]: mdOev uot Todt, iva €AOn krA. for 7d EXOety rHy ete.
Lk. i. 43; esp. in John, cf. vi. 29, 50; xv. 13; xvii. 3
{here T Tr txt. indic.; see 1d. above]; 1 Jn. iii. 11, 23;
‘v.3; 2Jn.6; Phil. i. 9; év rovr@, Jn. xv. 8; 1 Jn. iv.
17, (Oeod Sé 7d Svvardy ev TovT@ Seixvutat, iva... €& ovK
Svtwv rou Ta ywvdpeva, Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 13; after
réde, Epict. diss. 2, 1, 1; [other exx. in Soph. Lex.
s. v. 6]).
3. According to a very ancient tenet of the gramma-
rians, accepted by Kiihner, § 553, 2 Anm. 3; [7. S.
Green, N. T. Gram. p. 172 sq.], and not utterly rejected
by Alex. Btim. N. T. Gr. p. 238 sq. (206), iva is alleged to
be used not only reduxds, i. e. of design and end, but also
frequently éxBartds, i. e. of the result, signifying with
the issue, that; with the result, that; so tha: (equiv. to
éore). But C. F. A. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 836 sqq. and
Win. 338 (317) and 457 (426) sqq. have clearly shown,
that in all the passages adduced from the N. T. to prove
this usage the telic (or final) force prevails: thus in
iva pu) AvOA 6 vouos Maioéas, that the law of Moses may
not be broken (which directs a man to be circumcised
on the eighth and on noother day), Jn. vii. 23; ovx
eore ev OKOTEL, vay NEpa Ypas ... KaTaddBn, that the day
should overtake you (cf. the final force as brought out by
turning the sentence into the pass. form in Germ. wm
vom Tage erfasst zu werden), 1 Th. v. 4; mpooevxecb,
wa Steppnvedy, let him pray (intent on this, or with this
aim), that (subsequently) he may interpret, 1 Co. xiv.
13; likewise émevOncare, iva etc. 1 Co. v. 2, and perevdn-
cay, iva pn, Rev. ix. 20; perdbeow, ... va etc. that the
change may be to this end, that ete. Heb. xii. 27; iva pa
-.. more, that ye may not do, Gal. v.17 (where 9 cap&
and 7d mvedpa are personified antagenistic forces con-
tending for dominion over the will of the Christian; cf,
Wieseler ad loc.) ; the words iva... dpayf «rd. in Ro.
iii. 19 describe the end aimed at by the law. In many
passages where iva has seemed to interpreters to be used
€xBarikds, the sacred writers follow the dictate of piety,
which bids us trace all events back to God as their au-
thor and to refer them to God’s pur poses (Jo. Dama-
scen. orthod. fid. 4, 19 &os 1H ypahy, rid éxBarixds
éfeihovra héyerOat, aitohoyxas déyewv); so that, if we
are ever in doubt whether iva is used of design or of
result, we can easily settle the question when we can
interpret the passage ‘that, by God’s decree,’ or ‘that,
according to divine purpose’ ete.; passages of this
sort are the following: Mk. iv. 12; Lk. ix. 45; xi. 50;
xiv. 10; Jn. iv. 36; ix. 2; xii. 40; xix. 28; Ro. v. 20; vii.
13; vili.17; xi. 31sq.; 1 Co. vii. 29; 2Co.iv.7; vii. 9;
also the phrase iva mdnpw697, wont to be used in refer-
ence to the O. T. prophecies: Mt. i. 22; ii. 15; iv. 14;
xii. 17 LT Tr WH; xxi. 4; xxvi. 56; xxvii. 35 Rec.; Jn.
xili. 18; xvii. 12; xix. 24, 36; wa TAnpwO7 6 Adyos, In.
xii. 385 xv. 25, cf. xviii. 9,32. [Cf Win. 461 (429).
Prof. Sophocles although giving (Lex. s. v. va, 19) a co-
304
Wa
pious collection of exx. of the ecbatic use of the word,
defends its telic sense in the phrase éva mAnp., by calling
attention not merely to the substitution of é7@s aAnp.
in Mt. viii. 17; xiii. 35, (cf. ii. 23), but esp. to 1 Esdr. i.
54 (els dvamAnpwow prnparos Tov Kupiov ev oTdpart “lepe-
piov) ; ii. 1 (els ouvréAevay pyyaros kup. Krr.) 5 2 Esdr. i. 1
(rod redecOjvae Adyov Kupiov amd orduaros ‘Iepepiov) ; Jo-
seph. antt. 8, 8, 2 fin. radra 8 éempdrrero kata tiv Tov Geod
BovAnow tva AdBy Teds & mpoepytevoev *Axias; cf. Bib.
Sacr. 61 p. 729 sqq. ; Luthardt’s Zeitschr.’83 p. 632 sqq.]
4. The elliptical use of the particle; a. the
telic iva often depends on a verb not expressed, but to
be repeated or educed from the context (cf. Fritzsche
on Mt. p. 840 sq.; W. 316 (297); [B. § 139, 47]): dN
(sc. #AOev, cf. vs. 7) tva paptupnon, In. i. 8; dAX’ (se.
éyéveto amdxpuov) iva eis pavepov €AOy, Mk. iv. 22; adr’
(sc. Kparetré pe) wa ete. Mk. xiv. 49; add, Jn. xv. 25;
1 Jn. ii. 19. db. the weakened iva (see 2 above)
with the subjunce. (or indic. fut. [cf. 1 c.], Rev. xiv.
13 LT Tr WH) denotes something which one
wishes to be done by another, so that before the wa
a verb of commanding (exhorting, wishing) must
be mentally supplied, (or, as is commonly saia, 1%
forms a periphrasis for the imperative): wa
.. . entOns tas xeipas aita, Mk. v. 23; yur) va PdByrat
rov dvdpa, Eph. v. 33; Gal. ii. 10; add 2 Co. viii. 7 ; tva dva-
navowvrat [LT Tr WH -ranoorta (see dvarave init.) ],
Germ. sie sollen ruhen [A. V. that they may rest ete.],
Rev. xiv. 13; [perh. also Col. iv. 16, cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc.], (2 Macc. i. 9; Epict. ench. 23 (17); diss. 4,1, 41;
among the earlier Greeks once so, Soph. O. C. 155; in
Latin, Cic. ad divers. 14, 20 ‘ibi ut sint omnia parata’;
in Germ. stern commands: ‘dass du gehest!’ ‘dass du
nicht sdumest !’ cf. W. § 43,5 a.; [B. 241 (208)]). Cc.
iva without a verb following, — which the reader is left
to gather from the context; thus we must mentally sup-
ply evayyedrCapeba, evayyedifevrae in Gal. ii. 9, cf. W.
587 (546); [B. 394 (338)]; wa xara xdpuv, se. 7, that
the promise may ke a gift of grace, Ro. iv. 16 [W. 598
(556); B. 392 (336)]; ta Gros dveots sc. yévnrat, 2 Co.
viii. 13 [W. 586 (545); B. § 129, 22]; ta se. yevnrat, 1
Co. i. 31, unless preference be given there to an anaco-
luthon [W. 599 (557); B. 234 (201)]: twa... kavydobo
for xavyara. (wa as avOpemos, sc. épyatn, Epict. diss. 3,
28, 4.)
5. Generally iva stands first in the final sentence;
sometimes, however, it is preceded by those words in
which the main force of the sentence lies [W.550 (511);
B. §151, 18]: Acts xix. 4; Ro. xi. 31 (join 76 tperép@
edéer iva) ; 1 Co. ix. 15 fin. [RG]; 2 Co. ii. 4; xii. 7; Gal.
li. 103 7d ANowrdy iva krr. 1 Co. vii. 29 Rec.ex ez LT.
Among N. T. writ. John uses this particle oftener, Luke
more rarely, than the rest; [on Jn.’s use see W. 338
(317) sq.; 461 (430); B. 236 (203); 244 (210) note;
§ 140, 10 and 12; on Luke’s cf. B. 235 sq. (203)]. It
is not found in the Epistle of Jude. [For Schaeffer’s
reff. to Grk. usage (and edd.) see the Lond. (Valpy’s)
ed. of Stephanus s. v., col. 4488, ]
iva Ti
tva rt [so L WH uniformly, also Tr exc. (by mistake?)
in Mt. xxvii. 46], and written unitedly ivari [so Rec.*t bez
G T uniformly; see W. §5, 2]; Lat. ut quid ? i. e. for what
purpose? wherefore? why? an elliptical formula, due to
the fact that a questioner begins an answer to his own
question with the word wa, but not knowing how to com-
plete it reverts again to the question, as if to ask what
will complete the answer: that (what?) may or might
happen, (ut (quid?) fiat or fieret); see Herm. ad Vig. p.
847; Kiihner § 587, 5 ii. p. 1020; W. § 25,1 fin.; [B.
§ 149, 2]: Mt. ix.4; xxvii. 46; Lk. xiii. 7; Acts iv. 25;
vii. 26; 1 Co. x. 29. Add, from the Sept., Gen. iv. 6;
xxv. 32; xxvii.46; Num. xiv. 3; xxii. 32 [Ald.]; Judg.
vi. 13 [ Alex., Ald.,Compl.]; 18.1.8; 2S. iii. 24; xv. 19;
Job ili. 12; x.18; Jer. ii. 29; xiv. 19; xv. 18; Dan. x.
Z0eii cheodot.|; Psi. tise x. 1 (ix.22)s xxi, (xxii.) 2)
ete.; Sir, xiv. 3; 1 Macc. ii. 7. (Arstph., nub. 1192;
Plat. apol. c. 14 p. 26 c.; al.) *
*Iéarrryn (to which com. spelling the ancient lexicogra-
phers prefer “Idan, cf. Movers, Phonizier, ii. 2 p. 176
Anm.),-ns, 7, (Hebr. 15) i. e. beauty, fr. 79° to shine, be
beautiful; [al. make the name mean ‘an eminence’; al.
al.]), Joppa, a city of Palestine on the Mediterranean,
lying on the border of the tribes of Dan and Ephraim.
It was subject to the Jews from the time of the Macca-
bees. It had a celebrated but dangerous port and car-
ried on a flourishing trade; now Ydfa (not Jaffa) : Acts
ix. 36, 38, 42 sq.; x. 5,8, 23, 32; xi.5,13. Cf.Win. RWB.
s. v. Joppe; LRiietschi in Herzog vii. p. 4 sq.; Fritzsche
in Schenkel iii. 376 sq.; [BB.DD.]. *
*TopSavys, -ov [B. 17], 6 [cf. W. § 18,5 a.], (7792, fr. 7)
to descend; for other opinions about the origin of the
name see Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 626 [cf. Alex.’s Kitto s. v.
Jordan]), the Jordan, the largest and most celebrated
river of Palestine, which has its origin in numerous tor-
rents and small streams at the foot of Anti-Lebanon,
flows at first into Lake Samochonitis (Merom so-called;
[mod. ¢/-Hileh; see BB.DD. s. v. Merom (Waters of)]),
and issuing thence runs into the Lake of Tiberias (the
Sea of Galilee). After quitting this lake it is augmented
during its course by many smaller streams, and finally
empties into the Dead Sea: Mt. iii. 5 sq. 13; iv. 15, 25;
Rae mVike 10,95 1. Ss x. 1s Wk iitt3!? iv.dis dn. 129 3
iii. 26; x.40; ef. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.]s. v. Jordan;
Arnold in Herzog vii. p. 7 sqq.; Furrer in Schenkel iii.
p- 378 sqq.; [Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the Holy Land,
pp: 144-186 ].*
ids, -od, 6, (on its yery uncert. deriv. see Kreussler in
Passow s. v.; Curtius § 591; [Vaniéek p. 969]) ; 1.
poison (of animals): ids domidev td ra xen adray, the
poison of asps is under their lips, spoken of men given to
reviling and calumniating and thereby injuring others,
Ro. iii. 13 (fr. Ps. exxxix. (exl.) 3 (4)); by the same fig.
(yAdoaa) peor (od Gavarnpédpov, Jas. iii. 8 ; (in Grk. writ.
fr. Pind. down). 2. rust: Jas. v. 8; (Ezek. xxiv.
6,11 sg.; Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.] 11 (12), 23 (24); Theogn.,
Theocr., Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Leian., al.).*
*TovSa, (see Iovdas, init. and 1), indecl., Judah, a prop.
805
’Tovdaios
name; in Sept. 1. the fourth son of the patriarch
Jacob. 2. the tribe that sprang fromhim. —_3.,
the region which this tribe occupied (cf. W. 114 (108)); so
in the N. T. in Mt. ii. 6 (twice); médAus Iovda (Judg. xvii.
8), a city of the tribe of Judah, Lk. i. 39, where it is a
matter of dispute what city is meant; the most probable
conjecture seems to be that Hebron is referred to, —a
city assigned to the priests, situated ‘in the hill country’
(XeBpav ev 7 dpe Iovda, Josh. xxi. 11), the native place
of John the Baptist acc. to Jewish tradition. [Cf. B. D.
Am. ed. s. v. Juda, a City of.]*
“Tovdata, -as, 7 (cf. W. § 18, 5 a.], (se. yA, which is added
Jn. iii. 22, or yopa, Mk.i.5; fr. the adj. IovSaios, q. v.),
Judea (Hebr. 1737") ; in the O. T. a region of Palestine,
named after the tribe of Judah, which inhabited it;
Judg. xvii. 7-9; Ruth i. 1sq.; 2S. ii. 1, ete. Its bound-
aries are laid down in Josh. xv. 1sqq. After the time
of David, when the kingdom had been rent asunder, the
name was given to the kingdom of Judah, to which were
reckoned, besides the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, cer-
tain cities of the tribes of Dan and Simeon, together with
the metropolis of Jerusalem: 1 K. xiv. 21, 29; xv. 7, ete.
In the N.T. the name is given 1. in a narrower
sense, to the southern part of Palestine lying on this side
of the Jordan and the Dead Sea, to distinguish it from
Samaria, Galilee, Perzea, Idumeea (Mk. iii. 8): Mt. ii. 1,
Dy 225 ios Ive2os XxIVe LO; Mikeaiie gsoxaite 14 eo loksens
4; Jn. iv. 3,47, 54; Acts i.8; viii. 1, ete.; it stands for
its inhabitants in Mt. iii. 5; Mk. i. 5, (2 Chr. xxxii. 33;
XXxv. 24). 2. in a broader sense, to all Palestine:
Lk.i.5; [iv.44 WH Trmrg.]; vii. 17; xxiii. 5; Acts ii.
DxaS00; exile 20se(andgpernwe2) CO, il Onn Galad22))s
naoa 7) xepa Tis "lovdaias, Acts xxvi. 203 eis ta dpia ths
*Ioudaias mépay Tov “lopSdvov, into the borders af Judea (in
the broader sense) beyond the Jordan, i. e. into Perea,
Mt. xix. 1; on the contrary, in the parallel pass. Mk. x.
1 RG, els ra Gp. THs Iovd. dia Tod repay rod "Iops., Jesus is
said to have come into the borders of Judea (in the nar-
rower sense) through Perwa; but acc. to the reading of
LT Tr WH, viz. cai répav rod “Iopd. and (in particular
that part of Juda which lay) beyond the Jordan, Mark
agrees with Matthew; [others regard mépav Tov ‘lopé.
here as parall. with ris "Iovd. and like it dependent upon
6pta}.
Tovdattw; (fr. Iovdaios, cf. ‘EMAAquorys [W. 92 (87)]),
to adopt Jewish customs and rites, imitate the Jews, Juda-
ize: of one who observes the ritual law of the Jews, Gal.
ii. 14. (Esth. viii. 17; Tenat. ad Magnes. 10,3; Evang.
Nicod. c. 2; Plut. Cie. 7; to favor the Jews, Joseph. b. j.
2, 18, 2.) *
"Tov8aixés, -, -dv, Jewish: Tit.i.14. (2 Mace. viii. 11;
xiii. 21; Joseph. antt. 20, 11,1; Philo [in Flac. § 8].)*
TovSaixds, adv., Jewishly, after the manner of the Jews:
Gal. ii. 14. [(Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 3.)]*
"TovSatos, -ala, -aior, ("Iovda),[Aristot. (in Joseph. c. Ap.
1, 22, 7 where see Miiller), Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut.,
al.; Sept.; (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Jewish ; a. joined to
nouns, belonging to the Jewish race: dvnp, Acts x. 28; xxil
°Tovéaic pos
3, (1 Mace. ii. 23); dvOpwmos, Acis xxi. 39; \evdorpo-
gytns, Acts xiii. 6; dpxvepeds, Acts xix. 14; yum, Acts
xvi. 1; xxiv. 24; yf, Jn. ili. 22; xapa, Mk.i. 5. b.
without a noun, substantively, Jewish as respects birth,
race, religion; aJew: Jn. iv.9; Acts xviii. 2, 24; Ro. ii.
28 sq.; plur., Rev. il. 9; iii. 9; of Iovdaior (077377, be-
fore the exile citizens of the kingdom of Judah; after the
exile all the Israelites [cf. Wright in B.D. s. v. Jew]), the
Jews, the Jewish race: Mt. ii. 2; xxvii. 11, 29; Mk. vii.
3; xv. 2; In. ii. 6; iv. 22; v.13 xviii. 33, etc.; "Iovdatoi
re Kal “EAAnves, Acts xiv. 1; XVill. 4; xix.10; 1 Co. i. 24;
"JovSatol re Kal mpoondvror, Acts ll. 11 (10); €Ovn Te kat
‘ovdaior, Acts xiv. 5; sing., Ro. i. 163 ii. 9; of xara ra
vn "lovdaior, who live in foreign lands, among the Gen-
tiles, Acts xxi. 21; "Iovdaior is used of converts from
Judaism, Jewish Christians (see €Ovos, 5) in Gal. il. 13.
[Syn. ‘EBpatos, ’Iovdatos, ’IopanAitns: “restricting our-
selves to the employment of these three words in the N. T. we
may say that in the first is predominantly noted language;
in the second, nationality; in the third (the augustest title
of all), theocratic privileges and glorious vocation ”
(Trench § xxxix.); cf. B.D. s.vv. Hebrew, Israelite, Jew.]
The apostle John, inasmuch as agreeably to the state
of things in his day he looked upon the Jews as a body
of men hostile to Christianity, with whom he had come
to see that both he and all true Christians had nothing
in common as respects religious matters, even in his
record of the life of Jesus not only himself makes a dis-
tinction between the Jews and Jesus, but ascribes to
Jesus and his apostles language in which they distin-
guish themselves from the Jews, as though the latter
sprang from an alien race: Jn. xi. 8; xiii. 33. And
those who (not only at Jerusalem, but also in Galilee, cf.
vi. 41, 52) opposed his divine Master and his Master’s
cause, —esp. the rulers, priests, members of the Sanhe-
drin, Pharisees,—he does not hesitate to style of "Iov-
daior, since the hatred of these leaders exhibits the
hatred of the whole nation towards Jesus: i. 19; ii. 18,
20; v.10, 15 sq. 18; vi. 41,52; vii. 1,11, 18; ix. 18, 22; x.
24, 31, 33; xvilil. 14. [Cf. B.D. s. v. Jew; Franke, Stel-
lung d. Johannes z. Volke d. alt. Bundes. (Halle, 1882).]
Tovdaicpds, -ov, 6, (dovdaitw), the Jewish faith and wor-
ship, the religion of the Jews, Judaism: Gal. i. 13 sq:
(2 Mace. ii. 21, etc.; ef. Grimm, Com. on 2 Mace. p- 61.
[B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Judaism].) *
"Tov8as, -a, dat. -a, ace. -ap, [B. 20 (18)], 6, (a7, fr.
the Hoph. of 7, praised, celebrated; see Gen. xxix.
35), Judah or Judas (see below) ; 1. the fourth son
of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. i. 2 sq.; Lk. iii. 83; Rev. v.
5; vil. 5; by meton., the tribe of Judah, the descendants
of Judah: Heb. vii. 14; 6 otkos "IovSa, citizens of the
kingdom of Judah, Heb. viii. 8. 2. Judah (or Judas)
an unknown ancestor of Christ: Lk. iii. 26 RG L. 3.
another of Christ’s ancestors, equally unknown: Lk. iii.
30. 4. Judas surnamed the Galilean, a man who
at the time of the census under Quirinus [better Quiri-
nius], excited a revolt in Galilee: Acts v. 37 (Joseph.
antt. 18, 1, 1, where he is called 6 TavAavirns because he
306
*Toaak
came from the city Gamala, near the Lake of Galilee in
lower Gaulanitis; but he is called also 6 TadsAaios by
Joseph. antt. 18, 1,6; 20, 5, 2; b.j. 2, 8,1). 5. [Ju-
das] a certain Jew of Damascus: Acts ix. 11. 6.
Judas surnamed "Ioxaptarns (q- v-), of Carioth from the
city of Kerioth, Josh. xv. 25; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 41; Amos
ii. 2; [but see BB.DD. s. v. Kerioth]; some codd. in Jn.
vi. 71 (cf. Tdf.’s note in loc.J; xii. 4, read dé Kaptwrou
instead of "Ioxapidtns), the son of one Simon (who in
Jn. vi. 71 LT Tr WH; xiii. 26 T Tr WH, is himself sur-
named "Ioxapiotns), one of the apostles of Jesus, who
betrayed him: Mt. x.4; xxvi. 14, 25,47; xxvii.3; Mk.
iii. 19; xiv. 10,48; Lk. vi. 16; xxii. 3,47 sq.; Jn. vi. 71;
xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26,29; xviii. 2sq.5; Actsi. 16,25. Mat-
thew (xxvii. 5), Luke (Acts i. 18), and Papias [cf. Wendt
in Meyer’s Apostelgesch. 5te Aufl. p. 23 note] in a frag.
quoted by Oecum. on Acts i. 18 differ in the account of
his death, [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]; on his avarice cf.
Jn. xii. 6. 7. Judas, surnamed Barsabas [or Bar-
sabbas, see the word], a prophet of the church at Jeru-
salem: Acts xv. 22, 27, 32. 8. Judas, an apostle,
Jn. xiv. 22, who is called "Iovdas "IakoBov in Lk. vi. 16;
Acts i. 13 (see IdkwBos, 4), and, as it should seem, was
surnamed Lebbeus or Thaddeus (see Gaddatos). Ac-
cording to the opinion of the church he wrote the Epistle
of Jude. 9. Judas, the brother of our Lord: Mt.
xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3,and very probably Jude 1; see ‘Idkw-
Bos, 3.*
*TovAta, -as, 7, Julia, a Christian woman [cf. Bp. Lghtft.
on Philip. p. 177]: Ro. xvi. 15 [Lmrg. "Iovviav].*
*TovAtos, -ov, 6, Julius, a Roman centurion: Acts xxvii.
1, 3.*
*Tovvias [al. -vas, as contr. fr. Junianus; cf. W. 102 sq.
(97) ], -a [but cf. B. 17 sq. (16) ], 6, Junzas, a convert from
Judaism, Paiil’s kinsman and fellow-prisoner: Ro. xvi. 7
[(here A. V. Junia (a woman’s name) which is possi-
ble). The name occurs again as the name of a Christian
at Rome in Ro. xvi. 15 Lehm. mre. (where al. IovAtav). ]*
*Totcros, -ov, 6, Justus [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Col. iv. 11],
the surname 1. of Joseph, a convert from Judaism,
who was also surnamed Barsabas [better Barsabbas q.
v.]: Acts i. 23. 2. of Titus, a Corinthian [a Jew-
ish proselyte]: Acts xviii. 7. 3. of a certain Jesus,
[a Jewish Christian]: Col. iv. 11.*
twevs, -€ws, 6, (immos), a horseman: Acts xxiii. 23, 32.
[From Hom. down. ] *
immukés, -7, -dv, equestrian ; TO tm7muxdy, the horse (-men),
cavalry: Rev. ix. 16 (as Hdt. 7, 87; Xen., Plat., Polyb.,
al.; more fully 76 immexdv orpdrevpa, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 26;
so 76 meCixdy, the foot (-forces), infantry, Xen. Cyr. 5, 3,
38).*
Uwtos, -ov, 6, [Curtius § 624; Peile, Grk. and Lat-
Etymol., Index s. v.], a horse: Jas. iii. 3; Rev. vi. 2, 4 sq.
8; ix. 7, 9,17,[19 GLT Tr WH]; xiv. 20; xviii. 13; xix.
11-21. [From Hom. down. ]*
tpis, -vdos, 9, (Iris), a rainbow: Rev. iv.3; x.1. (Hom.,
Aristot., Theophr., al.) *
*Ioadx, 6. indecl. (PNx, fr. pny to laugh: Gen. xxi. 9;
loayyedos
xvii. 17; in Joseph. "Ioaxos, -ov), Isaac, the son of Abra-
ham by Sarah: Mt. i. 2; viii. 11; xxii. 32; Ro. ix. (AS
Gal. iv. 28; Heb. xi. 9,17 sq. 20; Jas. ii. 21, ete.
lodyyedos, -ov, (tcos and ayyedos, formed like iad6cos
{ef. ioddedgos (Eur. Or. 1015), iodorepos (4 Mace. xvii.
5), and other compounds in Koumanoudes, Svvaywyh xrd.
p- 166 sq.]), like the angels: Lk. xx. 36. (Eccl. writ. ;
(cf. toos dyyédots yeyoves, Philo de sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 2;
W. § 34, 3 cf. p. 100 (95)].) *
‘Ivacxép [Rec] and “Ioaxdp [R* GL] (loodyap
Tdf., Iocaydp Tr WH), 6, (iavw, fr. w there is, and
av a reward [(cf. Jer. xxxi. 16) yet cf. Miihlau u. Volck
s. v.]; Joseph. Iodoyapis PIodyapis]), [ssachar, the son
of the patriarch Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxx. 18): Rev.
wil. 7.*
tonpt, found only in the Doric form ican, to know;
from which some derive the forms tore and ioper, con-
tracted from icare and icayev; but these forms are more
correctly derived from cide, iopev i. q. tSuev, ete., (cf.
Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 548); on the phrase iore [R éore]
yveokovres, Eph. v. 5, see ywaoxe, I. 2 b.
*Iokapidrys, and (Lchm. in Mt. x.4; TWH in Mk.
xiv. 10; LT Tr WH in Mk. iii. 19; Lk. vi. 16) "Ioxapiad,
i. €. NPP WN; see Iovdas, 6 and Sipor, 5.
tos (not vos [yet often so R*** G Tr], which is Epic ;
cf. Bornemann, Scholia in Lue. p. 4; Géttling, Lehre
vom Accent p. 305; [Chandler § 406]; ZLipstus, Gram-
mat. Untersuch. p. 24; [L. and S.s. v. fin.; W.52)), -n,
-ov, equal, in quality or in quantity: 7 ton dwped, the same
gift, Acts xi. 17; toat paprupia, agreeing testimonies,
Mk. xiv. 56, 59; tcov rovety ruvd tu, to make one equal
to another, in the payment of wages, Mt. xx. 12; éavrov
7 Oe, to claim for one’s self the nature, rank, author-
ity, which belong to God, Jn. v. 18; ra toa drodaBeiv, Lk.
vi. 34. The neuters ‘cov and ica are often used adver-
bially fr. Hom. down (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1505*; [L. and
S.s. v.I1V.1]; W.§ 27, 3 fin.) : toa eivas (B. § 129, 11),
of measurement, Rev. xxi. 16; of state and condition, 7o
6c, Phil. ii. 6 (on which see in poppn).*
iodrns, -nTos, 7, (icos) 1. equality: é& iodrnros
[ef. ek, V. 3] by equality, 2 Co. viii. 13 (14), i. q. ras
yernrat iodtns, 14. 2. equity, fairness, what is equi-
table, joined with 7d Sicaov: Col. iv. 1. (Hur., Plat.,
Aristot., Polyb., al.; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢., yet per
contra Meyer ].) *
lrdtipos, -ov, (tcos and tim), equally precious ; equally
honored: twi, to be esteemed equal to, todripov piv
niorw [a like precious faith with us], concisely for miorw
Th ipa miore: iodriov [W. § 66, 2f.; B. § 133, 10]: 2
Pet. i. 1. (Philo, Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) *
tedipuxos, -ov, (toos and uy), equal in soul [A. V.
like-minded], (Vulg. unanimus): Phil. ii. 20. (BPs. liv.
(lv.) 14; Aeschyl. Ag. 1470.) *
*Iepahd (Joseph. Iapdndos, -ov), 6, indecl., Csrin, fr.
Sy and nw, wrestler with God, Gen. xxxii. 28; Hos. xii.
4, of. Gen. xxxv. 10), Israel, a name given to the pa-
triarch Jacob (and borne by him in addition to his former
name from Gen. xxxii. 28 on): 6 otkos Iapana, the family
307
ioTnpus
or descendants of Israel, the race of Israel [ A. V. the
house of Israel], Mt. x. 6; xv. 24; Acts vii. 42, (Ex. xvi.
31; 1%. vii. 2, and often) ; of vioi Iap. the [sons i. e. the
children, the] posterity of Israel, Lk. i.163 Acts v. 21;
vil. 23,37; Ro. ix. 27; ai @vdai rod "Iop., Mt. xix. 28;
Lk. xxii. 30; Rey. vii. 4. | By meton. for the posterity of
Israel i. e. the Israelites (a name of esp. honor because
it made reference to the promises of salvation through
the Messiah, which were given to Jacob in preference
to Esau, and to be fulfilled to his posterity [see "IovSaios,
b.J): Mt. ii. 6; viii. 10; ix. 33; Lk. i. 54, 68, 80; Acts
iv.8 [RG]; Eph. ii.12; Ro. xi. 2, 7, 26, etc. (Ex. v. 2;
xi. 7, and often); 6 Aads “Iop., Acts iv. 10, 27; y7 “lop.
i.e. Palestine [(1 S. xiii. 19, etc.)], Mt. ii. 20 sq.; Bact
devs “Iop., Mt. xxvii. 42; Jn. i. 49 (50); 4 eAmls rod "lap.
Acts xxviii. 20; 6 Iop. rod Geod (gen. of possession), i. e.
Christians, Gal. vi. 16; 6 Iop. xara odpxa, Israelites by
birth, i. e. Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; in an emphat. sense, od yap
mavres oi €€ “lop. xrd. for not all those that draw their
bodily descent from Israel are true Israelites, i. e. are
those whom God pronounces to be Israelites and has
chosen to salvation, Ro. ix. 6.
*Iopandirns (T WH lopandeirns, Tr only in Jn. i. 47
(48); [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 86, and cf. s. v. et, e]), -ov, 6,
(Iopanv, q. v.), an Israelite (Hebr. ial »; Sept. Ie€pan-
Nirns, 2S. xvii. 25), one of the race of Israel, a name
held in honor (see “Iopan\): Jn. i. 47 (48); Ro. ix. 4;
xi. 1; 2 Co. xi. 22; dvdpes Iopandira [W. § 65,5d.; B.
82 (72)], Acts ll. 22; iil. 12; v. 35; xiii. 16; [xxi. 28],
(4 Mace. xviii. 1; Joseph. antt.2,9,1). [Cf B.D. (Am.
ed.) s. v. Syn. see "Iovdaios, b. | *
(Iocdxap, Iocaydp, see loacyap. |
tornpt, more rarely iorde ({ (fr. Hdt. down; ef. Veitch
s. v.)] iordpev, Ro. iii. 31 RG) and iorave ([(late; cf.
Veitch s. v.)] iardvopev, Ro. iii. 31 LT Tr WH), [cf. B.
44 (38) sq.; W. § 14,1f.; 87(83); WH. App. p. 168;
Veitch p. 337 sq. |; fut. ornow; 1 aor. 2urnoa; 2 aor. gorny,
impy. o790, inf. orqvar, ptep. ords; pf. €orn«a [with pres.
force; W. 274 (257)], inf. éoravar [Re tbe G Tr -avae
in Acts xii. 14] (nowhere éornxévar), ptep. masc. €aTnKas
with neut. éoryxds, and in the shorter form éores, éoréca
(Jn. viii. 9), with neut. éorms and (LT Tr Wit in Mt.
xxiv. 15 [here R# also]; Rev. xiv. 1) éords, (cf. Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 208; [Rutherford, Babrius p. 39 sq.; W.
§ 14,1i.; B.48 (41)]); plupf. eiorjxew [(but WH uni-
formly ior.; see I, 4) with force of impf. W. 274 (257)],
3 pers. plur. elorjxecoav (Mt. xii. 46; Jn. xvill. 18; Acts
ix. 7 and L T Tr WH in Rev. vii. 11) and €orjkeoav
(Rev. vii. 11 R G [cf. W. § 14, 1 a.; yet B. 43 (388) ]);
Pass., 1 aor. €oradOnv; 1 fut. craOjcopa; 1 fut. mid. orjco-
pat (Rev. xviii. 15);
I. TRANSITIVELY in the Pres., Impf., Fut., and 1
Aor. act.; likewise in the tenses of the Pass. [cf. B.
47 (41) contra W. 252 (237)], (Sept. for Toyn, OPT,
2xn); [fr. Hom. down]; to cause or make to stand; to
place, put, set; 1. univ. a. prop. teva, to bid to
stand by, [set up]: Acts i. 23; vi. 13; in the presence of
others: év weow, in the midst, Jn. viii. 3, and ev 6 peca,
lornue
Acts iv. 7; évamdv twos, Acts vi. 6; before judges: eis
a’rovs, before the members of the Sanhedrin, Acts xxii.
30; ev r@ ovvedpio, Acts Vv. 27; émt with gen. of the judge,
pass. oradjnoecbe, Mk. xiii. 9; twa Gpopov Karevamidy
rwos, to [set one i. e.] cause one to make his appearance
faultless before etc. Jude 24; to place (i. e. designate
the place for one to occupy): év péo@ rwov, Mt. xviii. 2;
Mk. ix. 363 map’ éaur@, Lk. ix. 47; &k« defvav, Mt. xxv. 33;
émt rt (ace. of place), Mt. iv.5; Lk.iv.9. Mid. to place
one’s self, to stand (Germ. sich hinstellen, hintreten) : dio
paxpééev, Rev. xviii. 15; likewise in the passive: oraéeis,
Lk. xviii. 11,40; xix. 23 [éora@noav oxvOpwroi they stood
still, looking sad, Lk. xxiv. 17 T WH Tr txt. (cf. I. 1b.
B.)]; Acts ii14; xi. 13; with ev péog ruvds, twa, added,
Acts xvii. 22; xxvii. 21; oraévres, when they had ap-
peared (before the judge), Acts xxv. 18. B. trop. to
make firm, fix, establish: ri, twa, to cause a pers. or thing
to keep his or its place; pass. to stand, be kept intact (of
a family, a kingdom) : Mt. xii. 25 sq.; Lk. xi. 18; i. q. to
escape in safety, Rev. vi. 17; with €umpoodev rod viov tov
avOp. added, Lk. xxi. 36; otjoai twa, to cause one to pre-
serve a right state of mind, Ro. xiv. 4 [see Meyer];
pass. oradjoerat, shall be made to stand, i. e. shall be
kept from falling, ibid. ri, to establish a thing, cause it
to stand, i. e. to uphold or sustain the authority or force of
any thing: Heb. x. 9 (opp. to dvaipeiv) ; rhv mapddoow,
Mk. vii. 9; rv (diay Scxatoc. Ro. x. 3; Tov vdpov (opp. to
karapy®), Ro. iii. 31, (rév dpxov, Gen. xxvi. 33 hv diaO7-
knv, Ex. vi. 4; 1 Mace. ii. 27). i. q. to ratify, confirm:
arab, orabncera wav pyua, Mt. xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1.
to appoint, [cf. collog. Eng. set]: nuépav, Acts xvii. 31;
ef. Grimm on 1 Mace. iv. 59. 2. to set or place in
a balance; to weigh: money to one (because in very early
times, before the introduction of coinage, the metals used
to be weighed) i. e. to pay, Mt. xxvi. 15 (so in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1508"; [L. and S. s. v.
A. IV.]; Sept. for pw, Is. xlvi. 6; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.)
9 sq.; Zech. xi. 12; 2 Esdr. viii. 25 sq.; etc.); this fur-
nishes the explanation of the phrase py ornons adtots rhv
duapriay ravtny, do not reckon to them, call them to ac-
count for, this sin [A. V. lay not this sin to their charge],
Acts vii. 60 [(cf. Meyer ad loc.)].
II. INTRANSITIVELY in the Perf. and Plupf. (hav-
ing the sense of a pres. and an impf. [see above]), also
in 2 Aor. act., to stand; Sept. for 2¥), Wy, DIP; als
prop. a. foll. by prepositions or adverbs of place:
foll. by év w. dat. of place [cf. B. 329 (283)], Mt. vi. 5;
xx. 3; xxiv. 15; Lk. xxiv. 36; Jn. viii.9; xi.56; Acts
v. 25; vii. 33 (LT Tr WH emi w. dat.]; Rev. v.63; xix.
17; évamdv tivos, Acts x. 30; Rev. vii. 9; viii. 2; xi. 4;
xii. 4; mpds w. dat. of place, Jn. xviii. 16; émi w. gen.
of place (Germ. auf, upon), Lk. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 40;
Rev. x. 5, 8; w. gen. of the judge or tribunal, before [cf.
emi, A. I. 2.b.], Acts xxiv. 20; xxv. 10; mépay with gen.
of place, Jn. vi. 22; mpd, Acts v.23[RG; but LT Tr WH
émi rev Oupav (at, Germ. an; cf. above and see emi, A. I.
2a.)}; xii. 14; €umpoodev rivos, before one as judge, Mt.
xxvii. 11; «vKAw (rivds), around, Rev. vii. 11; pécos Spar,
308
€ L
to TOPE@
in the midst of you, living among you, Jn. i. 26; ék defcar
twos, Lk. i. 11; Acts vii. 55 sq.; év peo, JN. Vill. 9; mpds
w.ace.(GLT Tr WH w. dat. [see mpés, I.]) of place, Jn.
xx.11; émt w. ace. of place (see éni, C. 1.), Mt. xiii. 2;
Rev. iii. 20; vii. 1; xiv.1; xv. 2; émt rods mddas, to stand
upright, Acts xxvi.16; Rev. xi. 11; mapd w. acc., Lk. v.
2; vii. 38; e’s, Jn. xxi. 4 (LT Trmrg. WH mrg. ézi [see
émi, C.I.1d.]); éxet, Mt. xxvii. 47; Mk. xi. 5; Jas. ii. 3;
&de, Mt. xvi. 28; xx.6; Mk. ix.1; Lk. ix. 27[here T Tr
WEL airod, q.v-]; dmov, Mk. xiii. 14; e&w, Mt. xii. 46, 47
[here WH in mrg. only]; Mk. iii. 31; Lk. viii. 20; xiii.
25; paxpddev, Lk. xviii. 13; xxiii. 49 [RG Tr txt.]; dao
paxpdbev, Rey. xviii. 10, 17; [Lk. xxiii. 49 L TWH Tr
mrg. (but azé in br.) ]; wéppwdev, Lk. xvii. 12. b. ab-
solutely ; a. to stand by, stand near, (in a place al-
ready mentioned, so that the reader readily understands
where): Mt. xxvi. 73; Jn.i. 35; iii. 29; vii. 37; xii. 29;
XVill. 18, 25; xx.14; Actsxvi. 9; xxii. 25; with a ptcp.
or adj. (indicating the purpose or act or condition of
the one standing): Mt. xx. 6; Lk. xxiii.10; Actsi.11;
ix. 7; xxvi.6; opp. to xcaOiCew, Heb.x.11sq. 8. if what
is said to stand had been in motion (walking, flowing,
etc.), to stop, stand still: Mt. ii. 9 (Ree. gorn, LT Tr WH
éord6n [cf. I-1a.]); Mt.xx. 32; Mk. x. 49; Lk. viii. 44;
Acts viii. 38. -y. contextually, to stand immovable, stand
Jirm, of the foundation of a building: 2 Tim. ii. 19. 2.
metaph. a. to stand, i. e. continue safe and sound,
stand unharmed: Acts xxvi. 22. b. to stand ready or
prepared: with a ptep., Eph. vi. 14. c. to be of a
steadfast mind; so in the maxim in 1 Co. x. 12. d.
foll. by a ptep. of quality, Col. iv.12; 6s éornxev édpaios,
who does not hesitate, does not waver, 1 Co. vii. 37; in
a fig., of one who vanquishes his adversaries and holds
the ground, Eph. vi. 13; also of one who in the midst of
the fight holds his position mpéds twa, against the foe,
Eph. vi. 11, (cf. Ex. xiv.13; Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 13). to
persist, continue, persevere: tH miotet, dat. commodi (so
as not to fall from thy faith [al. take the dat. instru-
mentally, by thy faith; cf. W. § 31, 6¢.; B. § 133, 24]),
Ro. xi. 20; év rf ddnOeig, Jn. viii. 44 (where the meaning
is, his nature abhors, is utterly estranged from, the truth;
Vulg. incorrectly, in veritate non stetit; Luther, ist nicht
bestanden [A. V. abode not etc.]; but the Ziirich version
correctly, besteht nicht [WH read éorpxev, impf. of orjka,
q: V-]); €v TH xdpirt, Ro. v. 2; ev ro evayyeNl@, 1 Co. xv.
1; els hy (sc. xdpiv) éotxare, into which ye have entered,
that ye may stand fast in it, 1 Pet. v.12 [but LV Tr WH
read orjre (2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur.) enter and
stand fast; B. § 147, 16, cf. p. 329 (283)]. N.B. From
€ornka is formed the verb orjxw, which see in its place.
[Comp.: dv, én-avr-, e€-ar, av0-, ad-, di, év-, &&-, éx- (-pat),
ep-, xat-ep-, cur-ed-, xab-, avti-xa6-, dro-xab-, peO-, rap-,
TEpt-, Tpo-, Tuv-ioTn LL. |
toropéw: 1 aor. inf. isroppoa; (torwp [allied with ofda
(torw), videre (visus), etc.; Curtius § 282], -opos, one
that has inquired into, knowing, skilled in); fr. Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down; 1. to inquire into, examine, inves-
tigate. 2. to find out, learn, by inquiry. 3.
loxupées
gain knowledge of by visiting: something (worthy of
being seen), rv xopay, Plut. Thes. 30; Pomp. 40; zuvd,
some distinguished person, to become personally ac-
quainted with, know face to face: Gal. i. 18; so too in
Joseph. antt. 1,11, 4; b. j. 6,1, 8 and often in the Clem.
homilies; ef. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 122 note; [El-
licott on Gal. 1. ¢.].*
loxupds, -d, -dv, (icxdw), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept.
mostly for 8, 33, Pin, DIY, and Chald. yp; strong,
mighty; a. of living beings: strong either in body or in
mind, Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xi. 21 sq.; Rev. v. 2; x.
1; xviii. 21; év roAduo, mighty i.e. valiant, Heb. xi. 34, cf.
Rev.. xix. 18; of one who has strength of soul to sustain
the assaults of Satan, 1 Jn. ii. 14; univ. strong, and
therefore exhibiting many excellences, 1 Co. iv. 10 (opp.
to doGevns); compar., Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 7; Lk. iii. 16;
mighty, —of God, 1 Co. i. 25; Rev. xviii. 8, (Deut. x. 17;
2 Mace. i. 24, etc.) ; of Christ raised to the right hand of
Ged, 1 Co. x. 22; of those who wield great influence
among men by their rank, authority, riches, etc., ra ioyupd
i.q. rods isyvpovs (on the neut. cf. W. § 27,5), 1 Co. i. 27
(oi ixxupot ths yns, 2 K. xxiv. 15); joined with mAovoror,
Rev. vi. 15 (Rec. of duvarol). b. of inanimate things:
strong i. q. violent, dvepos, Mt. xiv. 30 [T WH om. icy.];
forcibly uttered, porn, Rev. xviii. 2 [Rec. peyadn] (Ex.
xix. 19); kpavyn, Heb. v. 7; Bpovrai, Rev. xix. 6; Apds,
great, Lk. xv. 14; émorodai (stern, [forcible]), 2 Co. x.
10; strong i. q. firm, sure, mapdkAnots, Heb. vi. 18; fitted
to withstand a forcible assault, wddus, well fortified, Rev.
xviii. 10 (reiyos, 1 Macc. i.33; Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 7; rupyos,
Judg. ix. 51). [Cf. dvvaus, fin.]*
toxts, -vos, 7, (tox [allied w. érxov; to hold in check),
[fr. Hes. down], Sept. esp. for M5, 7, TP, 7333; abil-
ity, force, strength, might: 2 Pet. ii. 11 (joined w. dvvapns) ;
Rey. v. 12; vii. 12; 7d xpdros tis icxvos, power (over ex-
ternal things) afforded by strength, Eph. i. 19; vi. 10,
(Is. xl. 26); 9 dd&a tips io. (see ddéa, III. 3 b. a. fin.),
2Th. i. 9; xpdgew ev icyver, with strength, mightily, Rev.
xviii. 2 Rec.; é& icyvos, of one’s strength, to the extent
of one’s ability, 1 Pet. iv. 11; with édns added, Mk. xii.
30, 33; Lk. x. 27 [here L txt. T Tr WH read év dan 777
icxvi]. [SyN. see dvvayts, fin.]*
ioxto; impf. icxvorv; fut. icxtow; 1 aor. ioxvca;
(ioxvs) ; Sept. for PIN, POS, OSD, etc.; to be strong, i.e.
1. to be strong in body, to be robust, to be in sound health:
of icxvovres, as subst., Mt. ix. 12; Mk. ii. 17, (Soph. Tr.
234; Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 24; joined with tyaivew, id. mem.
Dad Je 2. to have power, [fr. Aeschyl. down], i. e.
a. to have a power evinced in extraordinary deeds, i. e.
to exert, wield, power: so of the gospel, Acts xix. 20;
Hebraistically, to have strength to overcome: ovk iaxveay,
[A. V prevailed not i. e.] succumbed, were conquered,
(so 55: x4, Gen. xxxii. 26 (25)), Rev. xii. 8; xard twos,
against one, i.e. to use one’s strength against one, to
treat him with violence, Acts xix. 16. b. i. q. to be
of force, avail (Germ. gelten) : Heb. ix. 17; ri, Gal. v. 6,
and Rec. in vi. 15. c. to be serviceable: ets rs [A. V.
good for], Mt. v. 13. da. foll. by inf. to be able, can:
309
"Iwavuns
Mt. viii. 28; xxvi.40; Mk. v. 4; [ix. 18 (inf. to be sup-
plied)]; xiv. 37; Lk. vi. 48; viii. 43; [xiii. 24]; xiv. 6, 29
Sq-; xvi. 3; xx. 26; Jn. xxi.6; Acts vi. 10; xv.10; xxv.
7; xxvii. 16, (Plut. Pomp.58). with acc., ravra, Phil. iv.
13; modv, Jas. v.16. [Comp.: ér, &&, én-, kat-ua xv. | *
lows, (icos, q. v.), adv., [fr. Soph. down]; als
equally, in like manner. 2. agreeably to expecta-
tion, i. e. it may be, probably; freq. an urbane expression
of one’s reasonable hope (Germ. wohl, hoffentlich) : Lk.
xx. 13, and often in Attic writ.*
"TraAla, -as, 9, Italy: Acts xviii. 2; xxvii. 1, 6; Heb.
xia
‘Traduxés, -7, -dv, (Iradia), [fr. Plat. down], Italian:
onetpa ‘Iradtxn, the Italian cohort (composed of Itatian,
not provincial, soldiers), Acts x. 13 cf. Schiirer, in the
Zeitschrift f. wissensch. Theol. for 1875, p. 422 sqq.;
[ Hackett, in B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Italian Band].*
*Irovpata, -as, 7, [twrewa, a mountainous region, lying
northeast of Palestine and west of Damascus (Strabo
16 p. 756 §18; Plin.h.n. 5, (23) 19). Acc. to Luke (iii.
1) at the time when John the Baptist made his public
appearance it was subject to Philip the tetrarch, son of
Herod the Great, although it is not mentioned by Joseph.
(antt. 17, 8,1; 11,4, 18; 4,6 and b. j. 2, 6,3) among the
regions assigned to this prince after his father’s death;
(on this point ef. Schiirer in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch.
Theol. for 1877, p.577 sq.). It was brought under Jew-
ish control by king Aristobulus ¢. B.c. 100 (Joseph. antt.
18,11, 8). Its inhabitants had been noted for robbery
and the skilful use of the bow (Verg. geor. 2, 448; Cic.
Phil. 13, 8, 18; Strabo 16 p. 755 sq. ; Lucan, Phar. 7, 230,
514). Cf. Miinter, Progr. de rebus Ituraeorum, Hafn.
1824; Win. RWB.s. v. Ituraea; Kneucker in Schenkel
iii. p. 406 sq.; [B.D. Am. ed. s. v.].*
ix Ov8vov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. fr. iyOvs), a little fish: Mt. xv.
84; Mk. viii. 7. [From Arstph. on.]*
ix@ts, -vos, 6, [fr. Hom. down], a fish: Mt. vii. 10; Mk.
Vin Boece veo dn. xxi. dlsiete:s) liCowxvs 39:
ixvos, -eos (-ovs), 7d, (fr. ikw i. q. ixv€opat, to go), [fr.
Hom. down], a footprint, track, footstep: in the N. T.
metaph., of imitating the example of any one, we find
arotxeiv rois ixvect twos, Ro. iv. 12; mepurareiv trois ixv.
7. 2 Co. xii. 18; émaxodovdeiv r. tyv. tw. 1 Pet. ii. 21, (ev
iyveoi twos édv méda vépev, Pind. Nem. 6, 27); cf. Lat.
insistere vestigiis alicuius.*
"Tod dap, [-Odn WH], 6, (ony i. e. Jehovah is perfect),
indecl., Jotham [A. V. (1611) Joatham], king of Judah,
son of Uzziah, B.c. 758-7 to 741, or 759 to 743: Mt. i. 9.*
Todvva [Tr WII "Iwdva; ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 79; WH.
App. p. 159; s.v. N,v], -9s, 9, (see ’Iadvyns), Joanna, the
wife of Chuzas, Herod’s steward, and a follower of Jesus:
Wkavilia yexxivenl Os
*Twavvas, -a, and (ace. to L T Tr WH) "Iwavay, indecl.,
(see Iwavyns), 6, Joannas [or Joanan], one of the ances-
tors of Christ: Lk. iii. 27.*
*Iwdvvns and ([so WH uniformly, exc. in Acts iv. 6;
xiii. 5; Rev. xxii. 8] Trin the Gospels of Lk. and Jn., [in
the Acts, exc. iv. 6] and the Rev. [exce. xxii. 8]) "Iwary,
’"Twavyns
(ef. Tdf. Proleg. p.79; WH. App. p. 159; Scrivener, Intr.
p- 562 (cf. s. v. N,v)], gen. -ov, dat. -y and (in [Mt. xi.
4 WH; Rev. i.1 WH]; Lk. vii. 18 T Tr WH, [22 T Tr
WH] -ee [cf. WH. App. p. 158; B.17 (16), 7]), ace. -ny,
6, Gany and j2Mm, to whom Jehovah is gracious, [al.
whom Jehovah has graciously given], Germ. Gotthold ;
Sept. "Iwavyay ['Tdf. "Ioavay], 1 Chr. iii. 24; "Iwvd, 2 K.
Xxv. 23; "Iwdvns, 2 Chr. xxviii. 12, [ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Johanan]), John; in the N. T. the men of this name are,
1. John the Baptist, the son of Zacharias the priest and
Elisabeth, the forerunner of Christ. By order of Her-
od Antipas he was cast into prison and afterwards be-
headed: Mt. iii. 1; xiv. 3, and often in the histor. bks.
of the N. T.; Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 2, [B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Macherus]. 2. John the apostle, the writer of the
Fourth Gospel, son of Zebedee and Salome, brother of
James the elder: Mt. iv. 21; x.2(3); Mk.i.19; ix. 2,
38; Lk. v. 10; vi. 14; Acts i. 13, and often; Gal. ii. 9.
He is that disciple who (without mention by name) is
spoken of in the Fourth Gospel as esp. dear to Jesus (Jn.
xill. 23; xix. 26; xxi. 7, 20), and ace. to the traditional
opinion is the author of the Apocalypse, Rev. i. 1, 4, 9;
xxi. 2 Rec.; xxii. 8. In the latter part of his life he had
charge of the churches in Asia Minor, and died there at a
very advanced age. That he never came into Asia Minor,
but died in Palestine somewhat in years, the following
writers among others have attempted to prove, though by
considerations far from satisfactory: Liitzelberger, Die
kirchl. Tradition itib. d. Ap. Johannes u. s. Schriften.
Lpz. 1840; Keim, i. p. 161 sqq. [Eng. trans. i. 218 sqq.];
Holtzmann in Schenkel iii. p. 332 sqq.; Scholten, Der
Ap. Johannes in Kleinasien. Aus. d. Holland. deutsch v.
Spiegel. Berl. 1872. On the other side cef., besides oth-
ers, Grimm in Erschu. Gruber’s Encyklop. 2d sect. vol.
xxii. p. 6 sqq.; Steitz, Die Tradition tib. die Wirksam-
keit des Joh. in Ephesus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit.
for 1868, 3d Heft; Krenkel, Der Apost. Johannes. Berl.
1868; Hilgenfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1872, p. 372 sqq., and for 1877, p. 508 sqq.; [also Hinl. in
d.N. T. p. 394 sqq.]; Luthardt, Der johann. Ursprung
des 4ten Evang. (Lpz. 1874) p. 93 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 115
sqq.; Godet, Commentaire ete. 3d ed. vol. i. Intr. 1. i. § iv.
p- 57 sqq.; Bleek, inl. ind. N.'T. (ed. Mangold) p. 167
sqq.; Fisher, The Beginnings of Christianity, p. 327
sqq. ]- 3. the father of the apostle Peter: Tdf. in
Jn. i. 42 (43) and xxi. 15 sqq. (in both pass. R GIwva, L
Tr WH Iwavov) [see lavas, 2]. 4. a certain man
€k yévous dpxtepartxov, a member of the Sanhedrin [ef.
apxepevs, 2]: Acts iv. 6. 5. John surnamed Mark,
the companion of Barnabas and Paul: Acts xii. 12, 25;
xiii. 5, 13; xv. 37, [Tr everywh. with one v; so WH exe.
in xiil. 5]; see Mdpkos. 6. John, ace. to the testi-
mony of Papias in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39 [ef. Westcott, Canon,
5th ed. p. 79], a disciple of Christ and afterwards a Chris-
tian presbyter in Asia Minor, whom not a few at the
present day, following the opinion of Dionysius of Alex-
andria [in Euseb. h.e. 7, 25] regard as the author of the
Apocalypse, and accordingly esteem him as an eminent
310
*Iwonjs
prophet of the primitive Christians and as the person
referred to in Rev. i. 1,4, 9; xxi. 2 Rec.; xxii.8. Full
articles respecting him may be found—by Grimm in
Ersch u. Gruber’s Encyklop. 2d sect. vol. xxiv. p. 217
sq.; Gass in Herzog vi. p. 763 sqq.; Holtzmann in Schen-
kel iii. p. 352 sq.; [Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biog. iii.
398 sqq.; cf. C. L. Leimbach, Das Papiasfragment (Gotha,
1875), esp. p. 114 sqq.].
"148, 6, indecl., (2)8 i.e. harassed, afflicted [but ques-
tioned; see Gesenius, Lex. (8th ed., by Miihlau and Volck)
s. v.]), Job, the man commended in the didactic poem
which bears his name in the canon of the O. T. (cf. Ezek.
xiv. 14, 20) for his piety, and his constancy and fortitude
in the endurance of trials: Jas. v. 11.*
*TwB45, 6, indecl., Jobed: Mt. i. 5 and Lk. iii. 32 in L
T Tr (WH; (yet WH in Lk. 1. c. -87A)] for RG ’OB75,
qziv-n
[’IwBAA, see the preceding word. ]
*TwS4, 6, indecl., Joda: Lk. iii. 26 T Tr WH, for RG L
*Jovda, see "Iovdas, 2.*
*Iwfd, 6, indecl., COON whose God is Jehovah, i. q. a
worshipper of God, [al. ‘Jehovah is God’]), Joel, the
eminent prophet who ace. to the opinion of very many
recent writers prophesied in the reign of Uzziah [cf.
B. D. s. v. Joel, 3]: Acts ii. 16.*
*Iwvay and (so T Tr WH) “Ievdyp, 6. indecl., (see "lod
vns), Jonan [or Jonam], one of the ancestors of Christ:
Lk. iii. 30.*
"Tovas, -4 [B. 20 (17 sq.)], 6, (N3¥ a dove), Jonah (or
Jonas) ; 1. Jonah, the O. T. prophet, a native of
Gath-hepher in the tribe of Zebulun. He lived during
the reign of Jeroboam II., king of Israel (2 K. xiv. 25).
The narrative of his miraculous experiences, constructed
for a didactic purpose, is given in the book which bears
his name [on the historic character of which cf. B.D.
(esp. Am. ed.) or McC. and 8. s. v.; also Ladd, Doctr. of
Sacr. Script. i. 65 sqq.]: Mt. xii. 39-41; xvi. 4; Lk. xi.
29 sq. 32. 2. Jonah (or Jonas), a fisherman, father
of the apostle Peter: Mt. xvi. 17 [LT WH here Bapiova,
see Bapiwvas]; Jn. i. 42 (43) [RG@Lmre. Tr mrg., and
RG in] xxi. 15, (16, 17], (see "Iwdvyns, 3).*
"Twpdp, 6, indecl., (DWM i. e. whom Jehovah exalted),
Joram, the son and successor of Jehoshaphat on the
throne of Judah, fr. [c.] B. c. 891 to 884 (2 K. viii. 16
sqq.; 2 Chr. xxi. 2sqq.): Mt. i. 8.*
*Twpely, 6, indecl., Jorim, one of the ancestors of Christ:
kee
"Iooapar, 6, indecl., (Yaw, i.e. Jehovah judges),
Jehoshaphat, king of Judah fr. [c.] B.c. 914 to 889 (1 K.
Xxil. 41 sqq.; 2 Chr. xvii—xx.): Mt. i. 8.*
[Iwo4 (A. V. Jose, incorrectly), see "laos, init.]
‘Two fs, gen. ‘Toon [RG in Lk. iii. 29 "leon (which A.
V. incorrectly takes as nom. Jose)] and (LT Tr WH in
Mk. vi. 3; xv. 40,47) "Iwojros (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p.
199; B.19 (17) sq.; W. § 10,1; [WH. App. p. 159°),
6, Joses ; 1. one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii.
29 ([see above]; L T Tr WH’Inod, q. v. 2). 2. the
own brother of Jesus: Mk. vi. 3, and RG in Mt. xiii.
*Ioond
55 (where L T Tr WH ‘Iwond, q. v. 6); see "IdkwBos,
BY 3. the son of Mary, the sister of the mother of
Jesus [see Mapidp, 3]: Mt. xxvii. 56 (where T Tr mre.
WH txt. "loon Plecis and Iwonp seem to have been
diff. forms of one and the same name; cf. Renan in
the Journ. Asiat., 1864, ser. vi. T. iv. p. 536; Frankel,
Hodeget in Misch. p. 31 note; Béhl, Volksbibel u. s. w.
elol) ss Mko xv. 40," 47. 4. a Levite, surnamed
BapvaBas (q. v.): Acts iv. 36 (where LT Tr WH Io-
oi)?
‘loo, indecl., (in Joseph. [e. g.c. Ap. 1, 14, 16; 32,
3; 33, 5] loonros), 6, por, fr: 0? to add, Gen. xxx.
23 sq. [ef. B. D. s. v. Joseph]), Joseph; 1. the pa-
triarch, the eleventh son of Jacob: Jn. iv. 5; Acts vii.
9,13 sq. 18; Heb. xi. 21 sq.; hud "Iwan, i. e. the tribe
of Ephraim, Rev. vii. 8. 2. the son of Jonan [or
Jonam], one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 30. 3.
the son of Judah [or Judas; better Joda] another an-
cestor of Jesus: Lk. iii. 26 (where Lmrg. T Tr WH ’Io-
aX, q: V-)- 4. the son of Mattathias, another of the
same: LK. iii. 24. 5. the husband of Mary, the
811
Kabaipéw
mother of Jesus: Mt. i. 16, 18-20, 24; ii.13,19; Lk.i
27; i. 4, 16,33 RL,43 RGLmrg.; iii. 23; iv. 22; Jn.
1.45 (46); vi. 42. 6. an own brother of our Lord:
Mt. xiii. 55 LT Tr WH (for R GIwo%s [q. v. 2]). 7.
Joseph of Arimathea, a member of the Sanhedrin, who
favored Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 57,59; Mk. xv. 43, 45; Lk.
xxlll. 50; Jn. xix. 38. 8. Joseph, surnamed Bapvd-
Bas (q. v.): Acts iv. 36 LT Tr WH (for RG "Iwojs [q.
v. 4]). 9. Joseph called Barsabas [better Barsab-
bas; see the word], and surnamed Justus: Acts i. 23.
[See "Iwajs, 3.]
*Iwohx, Josech, see Iwan, 3.
‘Iwctas (LT Tr WH "lwoeias [see WH. App. p. 155;
8. V. et, ¢]), -ov, 6, (GPW i. e. whom ‘Jehovah heals’),
Josiah, king of Judah, who restored among the Jews the
worship of the true God, and after a reign of thirty-one
years was slain in battle c. B. c. 611 (2 K. xxii. sq.; 2
Chr. xxxiv. sq.): Mt. i. 10 sq.*
tara, 7d, iota [A. V. jot], the Hebr. letter °, the small-
est of them all; hence equiv. to the minutest part: Mt.
Ve 18.) [i@fa Tye *
K
Kayo [so the recent edd. usually, (in opp. to the kéya
ete. of Grsb. et al., cf. Herm. Vig. p. 526; W. § 5,4a.;
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 4; cf. 1, «)], (by crasis fr.
kal éy® [retained e. g. in Mt. xxvi.15 T; Lk. ii. 48 WH;
xvi. 9 TTr WH; Acts x. 26TTrWH; xxvi. 29 WH,
ete.; cf. B.10; W.§ 5,3; WH. App. p. 145; esp. Tdf.
Proleg. p. 96 sq.], for the first time in Hom. Ul. 21, 108
[var., cf. Od. 20, 296 var. (h. Mere. 17, 3); cf. Ebeling,
Lex. Hom. p. 619]), dat. kdyot [kai euoi Acts x. 28 RG],
acc. Kape 1. and I, the cai simply connecting: Jn.
x. 27, ete.; and I (together), Lk. ii. 48; distributively,
and I (inlike manner): Jn. vi. 56; xv. 43; xvii. 26; and
I (on the other hand), Jas. ii. 18 (kaya épya éyo); Lk.
xxii. 29; Acts xxii. 19; and J (indeed), Jn. vi. 57; Ro.
xi. 3. at the beginning of a period, Lat. et equidem, and
I (to speak of myself): Jn. i. 31, 38 sq.; xii. 32; 1 Co. ii.
1; with the cai used consecutively (see under kai, I. 2 d.),
ef. our and so: Mt. xi. 28; Jn. xx. 15; Acts xxii. 13; 2
Co. vi.17; kdyd... Kai, both...and: Kapé otSare, Kat
oldare mdOev eiui, both me (my person) and my origin,
Jn. vii. 28. 2. ITalso; I as well; I likewise; in like
manner I: so that one puts himself on a level with
others, Mt. ii. 8; x.32; Lk. xi. 9; xvi.9; Jn. xv. 9, [10
Tdf.]; xvii.18; Acts x. 26; 1Co. vii.40; 2Co. xi. 16,
18, 21 sq.; in the second member of a comparison, after
éroios, ds, cabs, Acts xxvi. 29; 1 Co. vii. 8; xi.1; Rev.
ii. 28 (27); see under kai, IT.1a. with a suppression of
the mention of those with whom the writer compares
himself: Eph. i. 15 (as well as others); 1 Th. iii. 5 (as
well as my companions at Athens; cf. Liinemann ad
loc.). kapoi: Lk.i. 3; Acts viii. 19; 1 Co. xv. 8; Kdué:
1 Co. xvi. 4. i. g. I in turn: Mt. xvi. 18; xxi. 24; Lk.
xx. 3; Gal. vi. 14. 3. even I, this selfsame I, the kai
pointing the statement: Ro. iii. 7; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p.
835.
Kaba, adv. for ka® 4, according as, just as: Mt. xxvii.
10. (Xen., Polyb., Diod., al.; O. T. Apocr.; Sept. for
wd, Gen. vii. 9, 16, etc., and for 3, Gen. xix. 8; Ex.
xii. 85, ete.) *
Kal-alpecis, -ews, 7, (Kabaipéw, q. V.), a pulling down,
destruction, demolition: éyvpopdreav, [A. V. of strong-
holds}, 2 Co. x. 4 (rév rexxov, Xen. Hell. 2, 2, 15; 5, 1,
35; Polyb. 23, 7,6; Diod. excerpt. leg. 13; destructio
murorum, Suet. Galba 12); eis oixod.... kaBaipeow tpar,
for building up (increasing) not for casting down (the
extinction of) the godly, upright, blessed life you lead in
fellowship with Christ (see otkodoun, 1): 2 Co. x. 8; xiii.
10. [From Thue. down. ]*
Ka0-orpéw, -@; fut. kabeAS (Lk. xii. 18 [see afaipéa,
init.]); 2 aor. xadeidov, (fr. obsol. €Xw); pres. pass. Ka-
Oapotpa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 117, to cause to
go down; DV, 7D), Y135 1. to take down: with-
xabaipw
out the notion of violence, rwd, to detach from the cross
one crucified, Mk. xv. 36, 46; Lk. xxiii. 53, (Polyb. 1, 86,
6; Philo in Flace. § 10); twa dd tov Evdov, Acts xiii.
29 (Sept. Josh. viii. 29; x. 27); with the use of force, to
throw down, cast down: twa ard Opdvov, Lk. i. 52. 2
to pull down, demolish: ras amoOnxas, opp. to oikodopeiy,
Lk. xii. 18; Aoywpors, the (subtle) reasonings (of op-
ponents) likened to fortresses, i. q. to refute, 2 Co. x. 4
(5); to destroy, 26m, Acts xiii. 19 (Jer. xxiv. 6; Thue. 1,
4; Ael.v. h. 2, 25); riv peyadeudrnrd twos, Acts xix. 27,
where if preference is given (with LT Tr WH) to the
reading ris peyadedryTos avrfs, it must be taken as a
partitive gen. somewhat of her magnificence; cf. B. 158
(138) note [so Meyer; cf. Xen. Hell. 4,4, 13. Al. trans-
late that she should even be deposed from her magnifi-
cence; cf. W. § 80, 6; B. § 132, 5].*
KaSalpw; pf. pass. ptcp. Kexadappevos; (Kabapds); to
cleanse, prop. from filth, impurity, etc.; trees and vines
(from useless shoots), to prune, Jn. xv. 2 (dévdpa . .
reuvdueva kabaipera, Philo de agric. § 2 [cf. de somniis
ii. § 9 mid.]); metaph. from guilt, to expiate: pass. Heb.
x. 2 RG [see xabapife, init.], (Jer. xiii. 27; and so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down). [Come.: d:a-, éx-xadaipo. |*
Kadarep, (kal? dep), according as, just as, even as, [ (“Ka-
6a marking the comparison, mép (akin to the prep. zrepi)
the latitude of the application”): Ro. ix.13 WH txt.; x.
15 WH txt.; also] xi. 8 and 1 Co. x.10in T Tr WH; 2 Co.
iii. 18, 18 [here WH mre. xadoorep]; 1 Th.ii.11; xa6a-
mep kal, Ro. iv. 6; 2 Co.i. 14; 1 Th. ili. 6,12; iv.5; Heb.
iv. 2, and RG in Heb. v.43; xaOdmep foll. by otra (or
ovrws), Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii. 11. ([From
Arstph. down]; Sept. for Ww, Ex. vii. 6, 10.)*
ka0-drrw: 1 aor. cada; —S-1.._ to fit or fasten to,
bind on. 2. to lay hold of, fasten on (hostilely) :
THs xeupos adtod, Acts xxviii. 3 [ef. W. 257 (241)]; rod
tpaynrou, Kpict. diss. 3, 20,10. [In Mid. fr. Hom. down,
(w. gen. fr. Hdt. on).]*
Kadapitw (Hellenistic for xadaipw, which classic writ.
use); Attic fut. (cf. B. 37 (32); W. § 13, 1¢.; WH. App.
p- 163] xaOapid (Heb. ix. 14); 1 aor. éxadapica [see be-
low]; pres. pass. kaOapifouar; 1 aor. pass. éxadapio@ny ;
pf. pass. ptep. kexafapiopevos (Heb. x. 2 T Tr WH; on
the forms éxaf¢ pic@n, T WH in Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42,
[exoOé poev, Tr in Acts x.15; xi. 9] and xexaO e propévos
Lchm. in Heb. x. 2, ef. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 82; WH. App.
p- 150]; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 118; Delitzsch on
Heb. x. 2; Kriiger Pt. ii. § 2, 2,6 p.4; [B. 29 (25sq.); W.
43]); (kaOapds) ; Sept. mostly for 770 ; 1. to make
clean, to cleanse; a. from physical stains and dirt:
e.g. utensils, Mt. xxiii. 25, [fig. 26]; Lk. xi. 39; food,
Mk. vii. 19; twd, a leper, to cleanse by curing, Mt. viii. 2
sq.; x-8; x15; Mk. i. 40-42; Lk. iv. 27; v.12sq.; vii. 22;
xvii. 14, 17, (Lev. xiv. 8) ; to remove by cleansing : 4 Xérpa
€xabapicOn, Mt. villi. 3 (kaaptets rd aipa 7d dvairiov é€
"Iopand, Deut. xix.13; éxadapite riv rept radra ovvnberav,
the custom of marrying heathen women, Joseph. antt. 11,
5,43 xadaipew aiva, Hom. Il. 16, 667; cf. exkabaipw). b.
ina moral sense; a. to free from the defilement of sin
. Umro-
312
Kabapos
and from faults; to purify from wickedness: €avroy ard
porvopod capkés, 2 Co. vii. 1; 7H miore: tas kapdias, Acts
xv. 9 (kapdiav dé dpaprias, Sir. xxviii. 10); ras xetpas,
to abstain in future from wrong-doing, Jas. iv. 8. 8. to
free from the guilt of sin, to purify: tia amd maons apap-
rias, 1 Jn.i. 7; [7. d.m. dduias, ibid. 9]; rhv cuveidnow amo
vexpav epywv, Heb. ix. 14; rhv éexxdnoiav T@ ovtp@ Tov
ddaros (instrumental dat.), Eph. v. 26; Aadv éavr@, Tit.
ii. 14. -y. to consecrate by cleansing or purifying: tri &
rum, dat. of instr. [W. 388 (363) ], Heb. ix. 22; i. q. to
consecrate, dedicate, ri run (dat. of instr.), ibid. 23. a
to pronounce clean in a levitical sense: Acts x.15; xi. 9,
(Lev. xiii. 13, 17, 23, 28). [Comp.: d:a-Kabapigw. | *
KaSapir pes, -0v, 6, (kabapifw), acleansing, purification ;
aritual purgation or washing, (Vulg. purgatio, purificatio,
emundatio): used with a gen. of the subj., rév Iovdalev,
of the washings of the Jews before and after their meals,
Jn. ii. 6; without a gen., of baptism (a symbol of
moral cleansing), Jn. iii. 25; with a gen. of the obj., and
that a person, — of the levitical purification of women
after childbirth, Lk. ii. 22; and of lepers, Mk.i. 44; Lk.
v.14; with agen. of the thing, duapriéy or duaprnua-
tov, a cleansing from the guilt of sins (see xaOapi¢a, 1 b.
B.): wrought now by baptism, 2 Pet. i. 9, now by the ex-
piatory sacrifice of Christ, Heb. i. 3 on which ef. Kurtz,
Com. p. 70; (Ex. xxx. 10; ris duaprias pov, Job vii. 21;
of an atonement, Leian. asin. 22).*
xaSapés, -d, -dv; [akin to Lat. castus, in-cestus, Eng.
chaste, chasten; Curtius § 26; Vanitek p. 177]; fr. Hom.
down; Sept. mostly for "i710 ; clean, pure, (free from the
admixture or adhesion of any thing that soils, adulter-
ates, corrupts) ; a. physically: Mt. xxiii. 26; xxvii.
59; Heb. x. 22 (23); Rev. xv. 6; xix. 8, 14,‘and Ree. in
xxii. 1; ypvoloy, purified by fire, Rev. xxi. 18, 21; ina
similitude, like a vine cleansed by pruning and so fitted
to bear fruit, Jn. xv.3; 6 AeAoup. . . . kabapds GAos (where
the idea which Christ expresses figuratively is as follows:
‘he whose inmost nature has been renovated does not
need radical renewal, but only to be cleansed from
every several fault into which he may fall through inter-
course with the unrenewed world’), Jn. xiii. 10. b.
in a levitical sense; clean, i. e. the use of which is not for-
bidden, imparts no uncleanness: mdvra kaOapd, Ro. xiv.
20s) Lite td. c. ethically; free from corrupt desire,
Jrom sin and guilt: Tit.i.15; tpets cabapoi, Jn. xiii. 10,
[11]; oi x. tH kapdia (as respects heart [W. § 31, 6 a.]),
Mt. v. 8 (kadapds xetpas, Hdt. 1, 35; cara 7d cpa Kk. Kata
THY Puxny, Plat. Crat. p.405 b.); free from every admiz-
ture of what is false, sincere, éx xaBapas xapdias, 1 Tim. i.
5; 2 Tim. ii. 22, and R Gin1 Pet. i. 22; é&p kaOapé ouvet-
dnoe, 1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 8; genuine (joined with dui-
avros) Opnoxeia, Jas. i. 27; blameless, innocent, Acts xviii.
6. Hebraistically with the addition of dxé twos, pure
from, i.e. unstained with the guilt of, any thing [W. § 30,
6 a.; B.157 (137) sq.]: dzé r. atuaros, Acts xx. 26; Sus.
46 Alex., cf. Gen. xxiv. 8; Tob. iii. 14; xaOapas fyew ras
Xétpas ard rod pévov, Joseph. antt. 4, 8,163; in class. Grk.
with a simple gen., as dévov, Plat. lege. 9 p. 864 e.; ef.
Kabaporns
Passow s. v. p. 1528"; [L.andS. s. v.3]; Kiihner § 421,
4 ii. p. 344. d. in a levitical and ethical sense: mdvra
caGapa dpiv, Lk. xi. 41, on which see éveyu. [SYN. see
eiAtkpns; cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. iii. 3.]*
KaSapdrns, -7Tos, 7), (kaOapds), cleanness, purity; in a
levitical sense, revds, Heb. ix. 18. (Xen. mem. 2, 1, 22;
Plato, al.) *
Ka0-€Spa, -as, 7, (kara and Spa), a chair, seat: Mt. xxi.
12; Mk. xi. 15, (Sir. xii. 12; Hdian. 2, 3, 17 [7 ed.
Bekk.]); of the exalted seat occupied by men of eminent
rank or influence, as teachers and judges: émt ris Mai-
céws kabedpas €xdicar, sit on the seat which Moses for-
merly occupied, i. e. bear themselves as Moses’ succes-
sors in explaining and defending his law, Mt. xxiii. 2.
(Sept. for win and naw. ([Xen., Aristot., al.]) *
xa8-cfopar; impf. exabeCdpunv; [fr. Hom. down]; to sit
down, seat one’s self, sit: Jn. xx. 12; foll. by év with dat.
of place, Mt. xxvi. 55; Lk. ii. 46; Jn. xi. 20; Acts vi. 15;
foll. by émi with gen., Acts xx. 9 L T Tr WH; by emi with
dat., Jn. iv. 6; éxei, Jn. vi. 3 Tdf.; [od where, Acts ii. 2
Lehm. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 336 sq.; B. 56
(49) ; 60 (52). Come.: mapa-cadéCopa. |*
xaQ-eis, more correctly xa@’ eis, see eis, 4 c. p. 187%
xa0-cEfjs, (kara and €&js, q. v.), adv., one afler another,
successively, in order: Lk. i. 3; Acts xi. 4; xviii. 23; of
xade&. those that follow after, Acts iii. 24 [cf. W. 633
(588) ]; €v7@ Kad. sc. xpdvm [R. V. soon afierwards], Lk.
viii. 1. (Ael. v. h. 8, 7; Plut. symp. 1, 1, 5; in earlier
Grk. ééjs and épeEns are more usual.) *
xa0-e0S ; impf. 3 pers. plur. éxdevdov ; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. mostly for 13 ; 1. to fall asieep, to drop off
to sleep: Mt. xxv. 5. 2. to sleep ; a. prop.: Mt.
viii. 24 ; ix. 24 [on this and its paral. cf. B. D. Am. ed. p.
1198*]; xiii. 25; xxvi. 40, 43,45; Mk. iv. 27, 385 v.39;
xiii. 36 ; xiv. 37, 40 sq.; Lk. viii. 52; xxii. 46; 1 Th. v.
ths b. euphemistically, to be dead: 1 Th. v.10; (Ps.
Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) 6; Dan. xii. 2). c. metaph. to
yield to sloth and sin, and be indifferent to one’s salvation :
Eph. v. 14; 1 Th. v. 6.*
Kadnynrhs, -00, 6, (kaOnyéopuat to go before, lead); a.
prop. a guide: Numen. ap. Ath. 7, p. 313 d. b. a
master, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 8RG,10. (Dion. H. jud. de
Thue. 3,4; several times in Plut. [cf. Wetst. on Mt. L.c.]) *
xa0-qkw; [fr. Aeschyl., Soph. down]; 1. to come
down. 2. to come to, reach to; impers. kaOnxet, it is
becoming, it is fit (cf. Germ. zukommen), Ezek. xxi. 27;
od Kabjjxev (Rec. xabjjxov), foll. by the ace. with inf., Acts
xxii. 22 [W. 282 (265); B. 217 (187)]; ra py xa@nxovta,
things not fitting, i. e. forbidden, shameful, Ro. i. 28; 2
Mace. vi. 4. Cf. dvjka.*
«d0-npat, 2 pers. sing. xd6y a later form for Kdénoat
(Acts xxiii. 3), impv. cdOov for xdOnao [yet cf. Kiihner
as below] (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 359; Kriiger § 38, 6 sq.
i. p. 147; Kiihner § 301 i. p. 671; W. § 14,4; [B. 49
(42)]), [subjunc. 2 pers. plur. caOj06e, Lk. xxii. 30 oir
mrg.; but WH txt. cabjo6e; see Veitch s. v.; Kriiger
$38, 6, 1 (cf. xadi¢w), inf. cadjo8at, ptep. kaOnnevos]; impf
éxaOnuny; and once the rare [cf. Veitch p. 347] fut. xaOj-
313
Kabifo
coua, Lk. xxii. 30 T Tr txt. WH mrg. [so WH in Mt. xix.
28 also; cf. kadi¢a, fin.]; (far); a verb of which only
the pres. and impf. are in use in class. Grk. [cf. B. 60
(52)]; Sept. for aw; 1. to sit down, seat one’s self:
foll. by év w. dat. of place [cf. W. § 52, 4, 9], Mk. iv. 1;
Lk. xxii. 55 [here T Tr WH pégos]; is, Mk. xiii. 3 [B.
§ 147, 16]; pera w. gen. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 58; xKdOov ée
deEidv pov, i. e. be a partner of my power, Mt. xxii. 44;
Mk. xii. 36 [Tr txt. WH mrg. xca@tcov]; Lk. xx. 42; Acts
ii. 34; Heb. i. 13 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 1); «dOov &de iad with
ace., Jas. ii. 3. wapd w. ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 1; émdve
w. gen. of place, Mt. xxviii. 2; with éxe?, Mt. xv. 29; Jn.
vi. 3 [Tdf. éxadé{ero]; the place to be supplied fr. the
context, Mt. xiii. 2. 2. to sit, be seated, of a place
occupied : foll. by év with dat. of place [W. as under 1],
Mt. xi. 16; xxvi.69; év r9 dSe&a +. Oeod, Col. iii. 15; év
tots SeEtois, Mk. xvi. 5; én rwos, Mt. xxiv..33 xxvii. 19;
[Acts xx.9 RG]; émi rod Opovov [but also, esp. in the
crit. edd., with the dat. and the acc. (see below); cf.
Alford on the foll. pass.], Rev. iv. 2 ete.; ris vepédns [Lor
w. the acc.], Rev. xiv. 15, and in other exx.; émi rim,
Acts iii. 10; émi re [cf. B. 338 (291)], Mt. ix. 9; Mk. ii.
14; Lk. v. 27; Jn. xii. 15; Rev. iv. 4; vi. 2 [R dat. (as
in foll.)] 4 sq.; xi. 16; xvil. 3; xix.11; mapa tiv ddd,
Mt. xx. 30; Mk. x.46; Lk. xviii. 35; mpds 76 das, Lk.
xxii. 56; émavw twos, Mt. xxiii. 22; Rev. vi. 8, wepi tiva,
Mk. iii. 32, 34; dmévavri tuvos, Mt. xxvii. 61; ex deédv
twos, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; Lk. xxii. 69; éxe?, Mk.
li. 6; of, where, Acts ii. 2 [L cabeCépevor]; Rev. xvii. 15;
without specification of place, Mk. v.15; Lk. v. 173 viii.
35; Jn. ii. 14; ix.8; 1 Co. xiv. 30. «dOnyat as descrip-
tive of a certain state or condition is used of those who
sit in discharging their office, as judges, ka6n kpivev, Acts
xxiii. 3; of a queen, i. q. to occupy the throne, to reign
[A. V. I sit a queen], Rev. xviii. 7; of money-changers,
Jn.ii.14; of mourners and penitents: év cdxxe, clothed
in sackcloth, év omodé, covered with ashes, Lk. x. 13;
of those who, enveloped in darkness, cannot walk about,
Mt. iv. 16; Lk.i. 79 (1s. xlii. 7); of a lame man, Acts xiv.
8. i.q.to have a fixed abode, to dwell: émi rpocwroy tis
ys, Lk. xxi. 35; Rev. xiv. 6 (where Rec. xarocxotvras) ;
ém Opdvov, Rev. xx. 11 GT [WH mrg.; but see above];
év ‘Iepovoadnp, Neh. xi. 6; [ev dpe Sapapeias, Sir. 1. 26.
Comp. : ovy-xdOnpat].
KaOnuepav, i. q. kad? tuepav, see nuepa, 2 p. 278%.
KaOnpepivds, -7, -ov, (fr. ka” quepav), daily: Acts vi. 1.
(Judith xii. 15; Theophr., Athen., Plut., Alciphr. epp.
i. 5; Joseph. antt. 3, 10, 1; [11, 7,1]; Polyaen. 4, 2,
10.) C£. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 53 [(yet see L. and S.); W.
25 (25 sq.) ].*
Ka0-(Lw; fut. cadiow [B. 37 (32)]; 1 aor. éxdOtca (impv.
2 sing. ndOicov once, Mk. xii. 36 Tr txt. WH mrg.); pf.
xexddixa (Mk. xi. 2 [not WH Trmrg.; Heb. xii. 2 LT
Tr WH; a late form, see Veitch s. v.]); 1 aor. mid.
subjune. 2 pers. plur. cafionaGe (LE. xxii. 30 Rec.) ; fut.
mid. xadicopat; fr. Hom. down; [cf. B. 60 (52)]; ak
trans. to make to sit down (xara; q. v. III. 1), to set, ap.
point; Sept. for PwIN: tid eri Opdvov [LT Tr WH op
Kab input
Opdvov], to confer the kingdom upon one, Acts ii. 30; rwa
év de£4 abrod, Eph. i. 20; rwd, to appoint one to act as
judge, 1 Co. vi. 4 (Stxaorny, Plat. lege. 9 p. 873 e.; Polyb.
40, 5, 3; ovvédpsov kpirav, Joseph. antt. 20, 9, 1). 2
intrans.; Sept. for 3Y; a. tosit down: univ., Mt.v.1;
xiii. 48; Mk. ix. 35; Lk. iv. 20; v.3; xiv. 28, 31; xvi. 6;
Jn. viii. 2; Acts xiii. 14; xvi. 13; witha telic inf. 1 Co. x.
7; with specification of the place or seat: ev defia ruvos,
Heb. i. 3; viii. 1; x. 12; xii. 2; émi ru, Mk. xi. 7 [ Rec. ];
els rov vady, 2 Th. ii. 4 [B. § 147,16; W.415 (386) ]; em
with ace. [cf. B. 338 (290) ], Rev. xx. 4; Jn. xii. 14; Mk.
xi. 2,[7 LT Tr WH]; Lk. xix. 30; [add Acts ii. 3, see
B. § 129, 17; W.516 (481)]; émi rod Bnyaros, of a judge,
Jn. xix. 13; Acts xii. 21; xxv. 6,17; xarévavri [or dmeé-
vavri Tr ete.] twos, Mk. xii. 41; with adverbs of place,
Mk. xiv. 32; Mt. xxvi. 36. b. to sit: [absol. (of a
dead man restored to life) éxd@icev sat, sat up, Lk. vii. 15
‘ Lmrg. Wil mrg.]; év ro Opdv@, Rev. iii. 21; émi w. gen.
of the seat, Mt. xxiii. 2; xxv.31; é« defiav x. €& evar,
Mt. xx. 21, 23; Mk. x. 37,40. i. q. to have fixed one’s
abode, i. e. to sojourn [cf. our settle, settle down], Acts
xviii. 11; foll. by év with dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 49 [here
A.V. tarry], (Ex. xvi. 29; Jer. xxx. 11 («lix. 33); [ Neh.
xi. 25]). Mid. [Pass.? ef. Rutherford, New Phryn. p.
336 sq.] to sit: emi Opdvev, Lk. xxii. 30 [RGL: see xd-
Onpar|; emt Opdvouvs, Mt. xix. 28 [WH xaéjcecbe; see
KaOnua. COMP.: dva-, em-, mapa-, Tept-, cvy-Kabi¢a. |
ka§-inpi: 1 aor. kaOjxa; [fr. Hom. on]; to send down,
let down: eis, Lk. v.19; dca w. gen. of place, ibid. and
Acts ix. 25; pres. pass. ptcp. xaOeuevos let down, emt ths
yns, Acts x. 115; é&k tov ovpavod, Acts xi. 5.*
Ka0-(ornpe (also xadiora@, whence the ptep. cadcorav-
res Acts xvii. 15 RG; and kaOiordvw, whence kadurrd-
vovres ibid. LT Tr WH; see torn, init.) ; fut. caracrnco ;
1 aor. xatéotnoa; Pass., pres. caOiorapar; 1 aor. kateord-
Onv; 1 fut. karagrabnoopa; Sept. for awa, OPA, TdT,
© ASIN, Vays, [025 (prop. to set down, put down), to set,
place, put: a. Twa ri Twos, to set one over a thing
(in charge of it), Mt. xxiv. 45; xxv. 21, 23; Lk. xii. 42;
Acts vi. 3; also emi run, Mt. xxiv. 47; Lk. xii. 44; emi ru,
Heb. ii. 7 Ree. fr. Ps. viii. 7. b. ruvd, to appoint one
to administer an office (cf. Germ. bestellen): mpeoBuré-
pous, Tit.i.5; rua eis rd with inf., to appoint to do
something, Heb. viii. 3; ra mpds r. Ody to conduct the
worship of God, Heb. v. 1; foll. by iva, ibid.; twa with
a pred. ace. indicating the office to be administered [to
make one so and so; cf. W. § 32,4b.; B.§ 131, 7], (so
very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), Lk. xii. 14; Acts
Vill Op 2ta Sond eb avila: c. to set down as, con-
stitute (Lat. sisto), i. q. to declare, show to be: pass. with
duaprodds, Sikaios, Ro. v. 19 [cf. Prof. T. Dwight in New
Englander for 1867, p. 590 sqq.; Dietzsch, Adam u.
Christus (Bonn, 1871) p. 188}. d. to constitute (Lat.
sisto) 1. q. to render, make, cause to be: rwd odk dpyov,
ov8€ dkaprov, i.e. (by litotes) laborious and fruitful, 2
Pet. i. 8. e. to conduct or bring to a certain place:
twa, Acts xvii. 15 (2 Chr. xxviii. 15 for 1399; Josh. vi.
23; 1S. v.3; Hom. Od. 13, 274; Xen. an. 4, 8, 8 and in
314
Kabws
other prof. auth.). f. Mid. to show or exhibit one’s
self; come forward as: with a pred. nom., Jas. iv. 43 9
yhaooa... 7 omthovaa, Jas. iii. 6. [COMP.: dytt-, dmo-
kabiornp. | * ;
xa0é (i. e. xaé’ 6), adv., [fr. Lys. and Plat. down], ac
cording to whdt, i. e. 1. as: Ro. viii. 26. Pa.
according as; in so far as, so far forth as: 1 Pet. iv. 13
(Rec.*% cabas) ; 2 Co. viii. 12 [W. 307 (288); cf. B. § 139,
30].*
KabodAtKds, -7), dv, (kabdAov, q. V.), general, universal (oc-
casionally in prof. auth. fr. [Aristot. and] Polyb. down,
as xaO. kal kown totopia, Polyb. 8, 4, 113; often in eccl.
writ.; the title 4 «a@odccy éxxAnoia first in Ignat. ad
Smyrn. c. 8 and often in Polyc. martyr. [see ed. (Gebh.
Harn.) Zahn, p. 133 note]; cf. cadodrKy avaoracts, [Justin
c. Tryph. 81 sub fin.]; Theoph. ad Autol. [l. i. § 13]
p- 40 ed. Otto) ; émorodai caOoXtxai, or simply caOoAtkai,
in the title of the Epp. of James, Peter, John, and Jude
(RGL; cf. ray érra Aeyopévav kabodixav Sc. émirroray,
Eus. h. e. 2, 23, 25), most prob. because they seemed to
be written not to any one church alone, but to all the
churches. [Cf. Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Catholic. ] *
xaQddov (i. e. ka” GAov [as it is written in auth. before
Aristot.” (L. and §S.)]), adv., wholly, entirely, at all:
Acts iv. 18. (Ex. xxii. 11]; Ezek. xiii. 3, 22; Am. iii.
3,4; Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot. and sqq.) *
kab-orrAifw: pf. pass. ptep. cabamdicpevos ; to arm [ fully
(cf. xard, IIL. 1 fin.)], furnish with arms: Lk. xi. 21.
(Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
Ka0-opda, -@: 1. to look down, see from above,
view from on high, (Hom., Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2.
to see thoroughly (cf. card, IIL. 1 fin.], perceive clearly, un-
derstand (Germ. erschauen): pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. xa-
Oopara, Ro. i. 20 (8 Mace. iii. 11, and often in class.
Grk.). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 61.*
KaQdrt (i. e. ka&’ 6 tt), according to what, i. e. als
so far as, according as: Acts ii. 45; iv. 35, (Polyb. 18,
19 (86), 5; for WED, Ex. i. 12, 17). 2. because
that, because, [ef. W. § 53, 8]: Lk. i. 7; xix. 9; Acts ii.
24, and LT Tr WH (for Ree. ésé71) in Acts xvii. 31,
(Tob. i. 12; xiii. 4; Polyb. 18, 21 (88), 6). 3. as,
just as: Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.) 1; Judith ii. 18,15; x. 9, and
often in Thue. et al.*
Kabds (i. e. kaP os), a particle found occasionally in
prof. auth. fr. Aristot. down for the Attic xa6a and kas,
but emphatically censured by Phryn. and the Atticists;
cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 74 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 425 sq.; [W. 26 (25) ]; 1. according as, just as,
even as: in the first member of a comparison, Lk. vi. 31;
1 Jn. ii. 27; foll. by ovrws in the second member [cf. W.
§ 53; 5), LK. xi. 303 xvii) 2635 Jn. ii. 145) 2 Co. six.
Col. iii. 138; 1 Jn. ii. 6; foll. by kai also, Jn. xv.9; xvii. 18;
xx. 21; 1 Jn. ii. 18; iv.17; 1Co.xv.49; itis annexed to
preceding words after the demonstrative ores, Lk. xxiv.
24; with ovrws unexpressed, Mt. xxi. 6; xxviii.6; Mk.
aVL 73 Lk. i. 2555,/703.xinds In. 1,23 5 rv 28 35 Acta
47 [here LT Tr WH as]; xv. 8; Ro.i.13; xv. 7; 1 Co.
vili. 2; x. 6; 2Co.i.14; ix. 3; xi. 12; Eph. iv. 17, and
Kabworep
often ; kaba@e diSacxw, agreeably to my method of teach-
ing, 1 Co. iv. 17; xaos yéypamra, Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. ix.
13; Acts vil 42; xv. 15; Ro. i. 17, and often in Paul;
the apodosis wanting, and to be gathered fr. the con-
text: xaOas grapexddeod oe... ev miaret, SC. oT@ Kal viv
mapakade, 1 ‘Tim. i. 3, ef. W.570 (530); [B. 386 (331)];
qp&aro aireivOar (SC. ovTw motety avrois), Kabds xrA. Mk.
xv. 8 [B. § 151, 23 b.; cf. W. 584 (543 sq.)];| in com-
parison by contrary we find the negligent use: dyan@pev
G@AAnAovs, ov Kabas Kdiv xkrd. 1 Jn. iii. 11 sq., ef. De
Wette ad loc. and W. 623 (579); obrdés éorw 6 apros
.. ov kaOws etc., not such as they ate etc., Jn. vi. 58.
with the verb eipi, equiv. to Lat. qualis, such as, 1 Jn.
iii. 2; in a parenthesis, 1 Th. ii. 13 (as it is in truth).
2. according as i.e. in proportion as, in the degree that:
Mk. iv. 33; Acts vii. 17 (cf. Meyer ad loc.); xi. 29; 1
Copxiivetd), 18);) 1) Pet. ive 10: 3. since, seeing that,
agreeably to the fact that, [cf. W. § 53, 8; 448 (417)]:
Jn. xvii. 2; Ro. i. 28 [yet here al. regard xa@. as cor-
responsive rather than causal or explanatory]; 1 Co.
iaopeve ds. Eph. i. 45. Phil: i. 7: 4. it is put for the
simple as, a. after verbs of speaking, in indir. disc.,
Acts xv. 14; it serves to add an epexegesis, 3 Jn. 3
(to gov TH adnOcia). b. of time, when, after that, (cf.
Lat. ut): 2 Macc.i. 31; [Neh. v.6]; here many bring in
Acts vii. 17; but see 2 above.
Kabadc-mep, [Tr xabas rep |, just as, exactly as: Heb. vy.
4T Tr WH [also 2 Co. iii. 18 WH mrg.]. (Himer., Psell.,
Bzetz.) *
kal, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the par-
ticles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B.
361 (310) sqq., and cf. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the
difference between it and ré see s. v. ré ad init. ]
I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. ef,
atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words
or terms: a. unlv., aS of Papicaior Kal Saddovkaios,
Mt. xvi. 1; 6 Oeds kat warnp, he who is God and Father
(see Oeds, 3); ev kapdiakady kal ayaOy, Lk. viii. 15; modv-
feep@s Kal moAutpéras, Heb. i. 1; it is repeated before
single terms, to each of which its own force and weight
is thus given: 7 viodecia kai 7 S6£a Kal ai dSiabjKat Kai 7
vouobecia Kal » AarTpeta kai ai emayyeAia, Ro. ix. 4; dyla
kat Sixaia kal dyaOn, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk.
Mive2iedn. xvi. o; Acts xv. 20,295 xxi.25: Heb.1x--10;
Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; cf. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it
connects numerals; and so that (contrary to the more
com. usage) the greater number precedes: d€xak. 6xro,
Lk. xiii. 4, 11, [but in both pass. L and Tr br. WH om.
kai; Tdf. dexaoxrw], 16; reocapdxovra kx. €&, Jn. i. 20;
adem.) v2.0 Gr ly Acts xii, 20:7 cf. W. § 37,45 [ Bp:
Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18; noteworthy also is its use in 2 Co.
xiii. 1 (cf. Deut. xix. 15 Sept.) emt ordpuaros dv0 papriper
kat tpr@v (in Mt. xviii. 16 7 rp. cf. W. 440 (410) note) at
the mouth of two witnesses and (should there be so many)
of three; a similar use of kal, to lend a certain indefinite-
ness to the expression, occurs occasionally with other
than numerical specifications, as Jas. iv. 13 onpepov kal
(R*G; but LT Tr WH 4) avpiov; cf. Kiihner § 521, 2;
315
Kat
Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 614*]. c. it joins to par-
titive words the general notion; so that it is equiv.
to and in general, and in a word, in short: 6 Tlérpos k. of
dnéarovn, Acts v. 29; of apxtepeis [kal of mpecBurepoe
Rec.] cal rd cvvédpiov Gdov, Mt. xxvi. 59; kal Oukat@pace
aapkés, Heb. ix. 10 Rec. Tr br. WH mrg.; kal emi tov
"IopaijA Tov Geod, Gal. vi. 16, and often in Grk. writ.; ef.
W. 437sq. (407); 520sq. (485); [B. 363 (311 sq.) ; 400
(343)]; with ré preceding, # re... adrod Stvaps kai
Gewdrns, Ro. i. 20 [see ré, 2.a.]; and, on the other hand,
it joins to a general idea something particular, which is
already comprised indeed in that general notion but by
this form of expression is brought out more emphatically
(which Strabo 8 (1) p. 340 calls cuvearadéyew 1d pepos
T@ OA); 80 that it is equiv. to and especially [cf.W. u.s.]:
Ta mavta kal Ta TOY SaiporCopevar, Mt. viii. 33; rots pa-
Onrats avrod K. TH Mérpm, Mk. xvi. 7; ai hwvai airay x.
Tav apxepewy, Lk. xxiii. 23 [RG]; ctv yuvacEi kal Mapidp,
Acts i. 14; ev “Iovéa x. “Iepovoadnu, 1 Mace. ii. 6; mas
*Iovda k. ‘IepovoaAnp, 2 Chr. xxxv. 24, cf. xxxii. 83; often
so in Grk. writ. also. 2. It connects clauses and
sentences; a. univ., as dvaxadapuet ry Gova adrod
k. guvaéer Tov otrov KTA. Mt. iii. 12; eionAOov... Kai edi-
Sackov, Acts v. 21; and in innumerable other exx. b.
In accordance with the simplicity of the ancient popular
speech, and esp. of the Hebr. tongue, it links statement
to statement, the logical relations of which the more cul-
tivated language expresses either by more exact parti-
cles, or by the use of the participial or the relative con-
struction (cf. W. § 60, 3; B. 288 (248) sqq.; 361 (310)
sq.): e. g. that very freq. formula éyévero ... kai (see
yivopat, 2b.); Kai eidor Kai (equiv. to drt) cecopos ey€vero,
Rey. vi. 12; ré&erae vidv k. Kadévets TO 6vopa avtod (equiv.
to ob dvoya karéoers), Mt. i. 21; caddy eotw jpas Ode etvat,
kat (equiv. to dev) mouno@pev oxnvas, Mk. ix.5; clauses
are thus connected together in clusters; as, Mt. vii. 25,
27 (an example of six clauses linked together by ka‘) ;
Mt. xiv. 9 sqq.; Mk. i. 12-14; Lk. xviii. 32-34; Jn. ii.
13-16; x.3; 1 Co. xii. 5-6; Rev. vi. 2, 8, 12-16; ix. 1-4
(where nine sentences are strung together by xa‘), ete.
after a designation of time xaé annexes what will be
or was done at that time: #yyKev 7 Spa kal mapadidorat
kth. Mt. xxvi. 453; fv S€ Spa tpirn kal eoravpwoay aitdv,
Mk. xv. 253 éyyis fv 16 mdoya.-. x. aveBy eis ‘lepoo. 6
"Inocois, Jn. ii. 13; npépar epxovrar kal ovyvtedcow, Heb.
viii. 8; add, Lk. xxiii. 44; Jn. iv. 35; v.1; xi. 55; Acts
y. 7; and not infreq. so in Grk. writ., as 75y S€ qv de kat
of KopivO.or eéarivns mptpvay expovorro, Thue. 1, 50; cf.
Matthiae § 620, 1 a. p.1481; W. 436 (405 sq.); [B. 361
(310) ]. c. it joins affirmative to negative sentences,
as pi) ovkopavTnaare Kai dpkeio be, Lk. ili. 14 ; ove dythnpa
Zeus kal TO ppeap €oTt Baov, Jn. iv. 11; ovre. . . emdexerat
kal... Kodvet, 3 Jn. 10, (rarely so in Grk. writ., as Eur.
Iph. Taur. 578; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 714); much
oftener it annexes a clause depending on the preceding
negative: pymoré ve mapad@..-- Kal 6 KpiTis oe mapade
... Kal els pudakyy BAnOnon, Mt. v. 25; add, Mt. vii. 6;
x. 38; xiii. 15; xxvii. 64; Lk. xii. 58; xxi. 34; Jn. vi
QL
58; xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27; 1 Th. iii. 5; 1 Tim. vi. 1;
Heb. xii. 15; Rev. xvi.15; [see B. 368 (315) d.; cf. W.
§56,2a.]. d. it annexes what follows from something
said before (kai consecutive), so as to be equiv. to and
so: Mt. v. 15 (kat Adwet) ; Mt. xxiii. 32 (kai mAnpooare) ;
2 Co. xi. 9 (kal ev mayti) ; Heb. iii. 19; 1 Jn. iii. 19 (kal
Zumpoobev); 2 Pet. i. 19 (kai €xopev); so in statements
after imperatives and words having the force of an im-
perative: Sedre driow pov, kal rouow tpas etc. Mt. iv.
193 elmé Abye, Kal iaOnoera 6 mais pov, Mt. viii. 8; Lk.
vii. 7; dvriornre tO SiaBdrAw Kai hevEerar ap’ vwav, Jas.
iv. 7; add, Mt. vii. 7; Mk. vi. 22; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xiv. 16;
Rev. iv. 1; ef. Fritzsche on Mt. pp. 187 (and 416), [cef.
Sir. ii. 65 iii. 17]. e. with a certain rhetorical em-
phasis, it annexes something apparently at variance with
what has been previously said; so that it is equiv. to
and yet (cf. Stallbaum on Plat. apol. p. 29 b.); so the
Lat. atque (cf. Beier on Cic. de off. 3,11, 48): Mt. iii. 14
(kal od épyn mpos pé); Mt. vi. 26; x. 29; Mk. xii. 12;
Jn. i. 5 (kal } oxotia krd.), 10 (kal 6 kdopos); Jn. iii. 11,
32; v.40 (kal ov Oédere); Jn. vi. 70; vil. 28; vill. 49, 55
(kal od« éyvoxate); Jn. ix. 30; 1 Co.v.2; 2 Co. vi. 9;
Heb. iii. 9; Rev. iii. 1 (. .. Gis, kat vexpds €@), ete. when
a vain attempt is spoken of: Mt. xii. 43 ((yret kal odx et-
ploxec); xiii. 17; xxvi. 60; Lk. xiii. 7; 1 Th. ii. 18. fi
like the Hebr. } (see G'esenius, Thes. i. p. 396%), it begins
an apodosis, which is thus connected with the protasis,
ef. the Germ. da [or Eng. then], (in class. Grk. some-
times 8¢; see dé, 8) [cf. B. 362 (311) d.; W. § 53, 3f.;
Ellic. on Phil. i. 22]: with ére or a temporal as preced-
ing m the protasis [as sometimes in Grk. prose (e. g.
Thue. 2, 93, where see Kriiger)], Lk. ii. 21; Acts xiii.
18 sq. [here WH txt. om. wai; see as, I. 7]; as... wat
idov, Lk. vii. 12; Actsi. 10; x.17[RGTrmrg. br.]; éav
.. Kat elaedevo. Rev. iii. 20 T WH mrg., although here
«ai may be rendered also (I also will come in, ete.), de-
claring that, if the first thing (expressed in the protasis)
be done, the second (expressed in the apodosis) will be
done also. g. as in class. Grk., it begins a question
thrown out with a certain impassioned abruptness and
containing an urgent rejoinder to another’s speech (cf.
W. § 53,3a.; Matthiae §620, 1d.; Kiihner § 521, 8 ii.
p- 791 sq.): kat ris dvvarar cwOqvar; Mk. x. 26; kat ris
éori ov mAnoiov; Lk. x. 29; kat ris éoruv krA. Jn. ix. 36
[GT Tr WH]; add, Jn. xiv. 22[GT]. Peculiar is 2 Co.
ii, 2: ef yap €yd AuTa bpas, kal tis... . evod (a swarm of
exx. of this form of speech occur in Clem. homil. 2, 43,
€. g. ef 6 Beds WevSerat, kat tis ddnOever;), where the
writer after the conditional protasis, interrupting him-
self as it were, utters the substance of the negative
apodosis in a new question, where we render who then is
he that ete., for then there is no one who ete. h. it
introduces parentheses [ef. W. § 62, 1]: Kat eeadrtOny
dxpt tov Seipo, Ro. i. 13 (Dem. Lept. p. 488, 9; so the
Lat. et, e. g. praeda — et aliquantum ejus fuit— militi
concessa, Liv. 27, 1); cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p.
35 sq. 3. It annexes epexegetically both words
and sentences (xai epexegetical or ‘ex plicative’), so
316
{5Qb
that it is equiv. to and indeed, namely, [W. § 53, 3.¢.; cf.
§ 66, 7 fin.]: xdpw Kai droaroAny, Ro. i. 5, where ct.
Fritzsche ; wepi éAmidos kai dvaocrdcews vexpav, Acts xxiii.
6; moAka...«. €repa, Lk. iii. 18; moAAad... Kal adda
onpeta, Jn. xx. 80; modAa kal Bapéa airtopata, Acts xxv.
7; moAXol k. dvuréraxra, Tit. i.10 [R G; on the preceding
use of kai cf. wodvs, d. a. fin.]; kai [L br. «.] érav amap6n,
and indeed [i. e. viz. ] when he shall be taken away etc. Lk.
v. 35 [others find here an aposiopesis; cf. Meyer ad loc.
(ed. Weiss)]; kai ydpw avti yapitos, Jn.i. 16; Kat mepro-
oov éxoow, Jn. x. 10, add 33 (where the words kal 6rt
xrA. Show what kind of blasphemy is meant); Acts v.
21 (on which see yepovaia) ; Ro. ii. 15 (where kal petragv
kr. adds an explanation respecting the testimony of
conscience); 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 38, ete.; cf. Bornemann,
Scholia, p. 38; Fritzsche, Quaest. Leian. p. 9 sqq-; so the
Lat. et in Cic. Tuse. 3, 20, 48 laudat, et saepe, virtutem ;
pro Mil. 25 te enim jam appello et ea voce ut me exau-
dire possis; cf. Ramshorn, Lat. Gram. ii. p. 809; [Har-
pers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. et, Il. A.]; i. q. and indeed, to
make a climax, for and besides: xai dxatdxptrov, Acts
Xxli. 253 kal Tovtoy éeoravpapevoy, 1 Co. ii. 2; Kal rovro,
Lat. idque (Cie. off. 1, 1,1 te... audientem Cratippum
idque Athenis), our and this, and that, and that too, i. q.
especially: Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 6, and LT Tr WH in
8, (4 Mace. xiv. 9); also cai radra (com. in Grk. writ.),
1 Co. vi. 8 Rec.; Heb. xi. 12; ef. Klotz, Devar. i. p. 108;
ii. 2 p. 652 sq.; [ef. W. 162 (153)]. 4. it connects
whole narratives and expositions, and thus forms a tran-
sition to new matters: Mt. iv. 23; viii. 14, 23, 28; ix. 1,
9, 27, 8533 xols Mkirwil, 213) vidi Gs vine gol: nai
19 (cf. 15); 1Jn.i. 4, ete.; esp. in the very com. eal éy¢-
vero, Mt. vii. 28; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 1, ete. (see yivopa,
2b.). - kai, a repetition which indicates
that of two things one takes place no less than the other:
both ... and,as well ... as, not only ... but also, [W. § 53,
4]: it serves to correlate — not only single terms, as kat
[L br. x.] Wuxi cal c@pa, Mt. x. 28; add, Mk.iv.41; Jn.
iv. 36 [here Tr WH om. first «.]; Ro. xi. 33; Phil. ii. 13 ;
iv. 12, etc.; Kal év ddiy@ kal €v moANG [LT Tr WH peyaro |
both with little effort and with great [but see péyas, 1 a.
y: fin.], Acts xxvi. 29; but also clauses and sentences, as
Mk. ix.13; Jn. vii. 28; ix.37; xii. 28; 1 Co. i. 22% and
even things that are contrasted [cf. W. u.s.; B.§ 149,
8b.]: Jn. xv. 24; Acts xxiii. 3; «ai... cai od, Lk. v.
36; Jn. vi. 36; now... now, Mk. ix. 22; cat ov... eal,
Jn. xvii. 25. 6. ré... kal, see ré, 2.
II. Tt marks something added to what has already
been said, or that of which something already said holds
good ; accordingly it takes on the nature of an adverb,
also (Lat. ettam, quoque, Germ. auch [cf. W. and B. as
ad init. In this use it generally throws an emphasis
upon the word which immediately follows it; ef. Klotz,
Devar. ii. 2 p. 638.]) ; 1. used simply, a. also,
likewise: Mt. v. 39 sq.; xii. 45; Mk. ii. 28; Lk. iii. 14;
Jn. viii. 19; Ko. viii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 29; xi. 6, ete.; very
freq. with pronouns: kal dpeis, Mt. xx. 4,7; Lk. xxi.
313 Jn. vil. 47, etc.; xdyd, cal éyd, see xdyd, 2; Kal
Ge ealtede
coc
waL
ards, see airdés, I.1 a. preceded by an adverb of com-
parison in the former part of the sentence: xaOds .
«ai, Lk. vi. 31 [WH txt.om., L Tr mrg. br., kai Sues:
Jn. vi. 57; xiii. 15,33; 1 Jn. ii. 18; iv.17; 1 Co. xv. 49%
Oomrep » +. ovT@ al, Re. xi. 30 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 22; Gal. iv.
29; xaOdmep ... otrw kai, 2 Co. viii.11; as... Kal, Mt.
vi.10; Lk. xi. 2 RLbr.; Acts vii. 51 [L xa8as; 2 Co.
xiii. 2 see s, I. 1 fin.]; Gal.i. 9; Phil. i. 20, (Thue. 8, 1;
domep ... kai, Xen. mem. [ 2, 2, 2 (and Kiihner ad loc.)];
3,1, 4; [4, 4, 7; ef. B. 362 (311) ¢.]); with e preceding,
Gal. iv. 7. sometimes cai stands in each member of the
comparison: 1 Th. ii. 14; Ro. i. 13; Col. iii. 13, (2 Mace.
ii. 10; vi. 14; also in Grk. writ., cf. Klotz ad Dev. ii. 2 p.
635; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1, 1, 6 [also in his Grx. Gram.
§ 524, 2 vol. ii. 799; cf. Ellic. on Eph. v. 23; W. § 53,
5]). b. i. q. even [A. V. sometimes yea], (Lat. vel,
adeo; Germ. sogar, selbst): Mt. v. 46 sq.; x. 30; Mk.
Bees Lk x17; 1-Co, 11-10; Galaii.'17; Ephiw 19,
ete. c. before a comparative it augments the gra-
dation, even, still, (Germ. noch): Mt. xi. 9; [Jn. xiv. 12];
Heb. viii. 6 [B. 363 (311) g.; al. regard the «ai in this
pass. as corresponsive (also) rather than ascensive,
and connect it with dc@]. d. with a ptep. i. q. al-
though (cf. Kriiger § 56, 13, 2]: Lk. xviii. 7 RG [see
paxpobupew, 2]. 2. joined with pronouns and par-
ticles, also; a. with comparative adverbs: as kai,
Acts xi. 17; 1 Co. vii. 7; ix. 5, ete.; Kaas kai, Ro. xv. 7;
1 Co. xiii. 12; 2 Co.i. 14; Eph. iv. 17, 32; v. 2, ete.; odrw
«at, Ro. v.15 [WH br. kai], 18 sq.; vi.11; 1 Co. xi. 12,
etc.; dpotws cai, Jn. vi. 11; ocavitws kai, Lk. xxii. 20 [R
GLTrmrg., T Trtxt. WH «x. oo. (but WH reject the
pass.) ]; 1 Co. xi. 25; xaOadmep kai (see xaOarep). b.
added to words designating the cause, it marks some-
thing which follows of necessity from what has been
previously said: 616 cai, Lk. i. 35; Acts x. 29; Ro. i. 24
Rec.; Heb. xiii. 12; [1 Pet. ii. 6 RJ]; dca rodro Kai, Lk. xi.
49; Jn. xii. 18 [here Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. xa/]. Cy
after the interrog. ri, cai (which belongs not to ri, but
to the following word [to the whole sentence, rather;
ef. Baéumlein, Partikeln, p. 152]) points the significance
of the question, and may be rendered besides, moreover,
(Germ. noch) [cf. W. § 53, 3 a. fin.; esp. Kriiger § 69,
32,16]: ri cat Barrifovra; [A. V. why then ete.], 1 Co.
xv. 29; ri kal €Ami¢ec; (prop. why doth he also or yet
hope for, and not rest in the sight ?), Ro. viii. 24(RGT];
wa ti kai, Lk. xiii. 7. d. adda kat, but also: Lk.
Xxive 223 dn. v.18 Ro.1. 82) v. 35,113 vui. 23); ix910)5
Dio, vil: 0 5) Ville 10, 19) 21's) ix./ 12%) Laney 2hete. si q:
Lat. at etiam (in an apodosis after e?): Ro. vi. 5 [W. 442
(412)]. e. d€ cai, and S€... Kai, but also, and also:
Mt. iii. 10 [R G]; xviii. 17; xxvii. 44; Mk. xiv. 31 [WH
br. 8¢]; Lk. ii. 4; ix. 61; xiv. 12, 26 [L txt. Tr WH én
re kai, see ért, 2 fin.]; xvili. 1 [RG], 9[Lbr. cai]; Jn. ii.
2; iii. 23; xviii. 2,5; Acts v.16; 1Co.i. 16; iv. 7; xiv.
15; xv.15; 2Co.iv.3,etce. kai... yap, eav kal, et Kal,
4 kai, kaye, kai. . . d€¢, see ydp II. 10, edv I. 3, ef IIL. 6 sq.,
F4c., ye 3e., 529. The examples of crasis with kai in
the N. T., viz. kayo (kdpol, kde), Kdxel, KdxeiBev, KaKeivos,
317
KALVOS
kav, are noticed each in its place; for references see
especially xdya, init.
Kaiddas [WH Kacacpas (cf. 1,1 fin.) ; Lehm. in Lk. iii. 2
Kaidas], -a [B. 20 (18) ; W. § 8, 1], 6, (supposed by many
to be the same as &9°D, a stone, a rock; others more cor
rectly i. q. ND°3, depression, Targ. on Prov. xvi. 26 [ace.
to Delitzsch (Brief and. Rom. ins fier etc. i 28) ND? PD»
Cataphas ; acc. to Josspm an 18,42582)) ieeystns
kai Kaiahas (leonrov, tov Kat Kaiddav émtixadovpevor,
antt. 18, 4, 3), high-priest of the Jews. He was ap-
pointed to that office by Valerius Gratus, governor of
Juda, after the removal of Simon, son of Camith, a.p.
18 [cf. Schiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 23 iv.], and was re-
moved A.D. 36 by Vitellius, governor of Syria, who ap-
pointed Jonathan, son of the high-priest Ananus [i. e.
Annas, father-in-law of Caiaphas, Jn. xviii. 13], his suc-
cessor (Joseph. antt. 18, 4,3): Mt. xxvi. 3,57; Lk. iii. 2;
Jn. xi. 49; xviii. 13 sq. 24, 28; Actsiv.6. Cf. Hausrath
in Schenkel iii. 463 sq.*
katye, see yé, 3 e.
Kéiv [WH Kai (cf.1, « fin.) ],-6, indecl., (in Joseph.with
a Grk. ending, Kdis, -vos ; Hebr. PP i.e. a spear, although
the author of Genesis, iv. 1, derives it fr. 3p to produce,
beget, acquire, so that it isi. q. Pap» Ps. civ. 24 [cf. B.D.
hs ed. s. v.]), Cain, the fratricide, the first-born son of
Adam: Heb. xi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 12; Jude 11.*
Kaivéy [so RG if both 1 and 2; Tr Kaivay in 1 and
Tr txt. in 2, but Tr mrg. Kawdp in 2, WH Kawdp 1 and
2; T Kaivay both 1 and 2), 6, (Hebr. Dp 2 lance-maker
[al. ‘ possessor ’ or ‘ possession ”]), Cainan ; 1. son
of Enos (Gen. v. 9 sq.): Lk. iii. 37. 2. son of Ar-
phaxad, ace. to the Sept. of Gen. x. 24; xi. 12; [1 Chr.
i. 18 Alex.j, which Luke follows in iii. 36. [See B. D.
SoaVailie
katvés, -7, -ov; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; Sept.
for WIN; new, i.e. a. as respects form; recently
made, fresh, recent, unused, unworn (opp. to madards old,
antiquated): as doxds, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22 [Tom. Tr
WH br. the cl.]; Lk. v. 38; iudreov, Lk. v. 36; mAnpopa,
Mk. ii. 21; pvnuetov, Mt. xxvii. 60; with év 6 oddémw ovddels
éréOn added, Jn. xix. 41; kaw x. madad, Mt. xiii. 52;
new, which as recently made is superior to what it suc-
ceeds: d:a6qen, Mt. xxvi. 28 (T WH om. kaw.) ; Mk. xiv.
24 RL; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25;
2Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8,13; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxviil. (xxxi.)
31); Kawol ovpavol, kaw yn, 2 Pet. ili. 13; Reve xxi. 2,
(Is. xv. 17 ; lxvi. 22) ; ‘Iepovoadnp (see ‘IepoodAvpa, fin.),
Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2; dvOpwmos (see the word, 1 f.), Eph.
ii. 15; iv. 24, (xapdia, rvedpa, Ezek. xviii. 31; xxxvi. 26) ;
xawa mdvra Troe, 1 bring all things into a new and better
condition, Rev. xxi. 5; yévynpa ris dumé Nov, Mt. xxvi. 29 ;
Mk. xiv. 25. b. as respects substance ; of anew kind ;
unprecedented, novel, uncommon, unheard of, (érepa kai
kava Sada, Xen. mem. 1, 1,1): ddayy, Mk. i. 27; Acts
xvii. 19; évroAn, given now for the first time, Jn. xiii. 34 ;
1 Jn. ii. 7sq.; 2 Jn. 5; dvoya, with the added explana-
tion 6 ovdels older (€yvw Rec.), Rev. ii. 17 (Is. Ixii. 2; Ixv.
15); &dn, Rev. v. 9; xiv. 3, (Ps. exliii. (cxliv.) 9; Uuves,
KQLVOTNS
Is. xlii. 10; dopa, Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 3; xxxix. (xl) 4,
etc.) ; Aéyew re kal [ LT Tr WH] akovew kaivdrepor,
Acts xvii. 21 (newer sc. than that which is already ; [cf.
W. 244 (228 sq.)]); xriovs, Gal. vi. 15; kawa ta marta,
all things are new, previously non-existent, begin to be
far different from what they were before, 2 Co. v.17[L
T Tr WU om. ra rdvra]; pyxére ovons THs avopias, Kawav
d€ yeyovdrwv ndvrev bmd kupiov, Barn. ep. 15, 7. yA@ooat
(see yAéooa, 2): Mk. xvi. 17 [Tr txt. WH txt. om. Tr
mre. br. caw. | *
|Syn. atvdés,véos: v. denotes the new primarily in refer-
ence to time, the young, recent; «. denotes the new prima-
rily in reference to quality, the fresh, unworn; ‘véos ad
tempus refertur, kaivds ad rem;’ see Trench § lx. ; Tittmann
i. p. 59 sq.; Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on Mt. ix. 17 (where the
words occur together). The same distinction, in the main,
holds in classic usage; cf. Schmidt ii. ch. 47.]
Ka.vorns, -nTos, 7, (Kawds), newness: év Kawdrnte TveEv-
patos, in the new state (of life) in which the Holy Spirit
places us, Ro. vii. 6; ev cawérnre Cans in a new condition
or state of (moral) life, Ro. vi. 4 (ets cawdrnra didiou Cans,
so as to produce a new state which is eternal life,
Tonat. ad Eph. 19; among prof. writ. it is used by Thue.
3, 38; Isocr., Athen., al.; often by Plut., [applied to the
‘novelties’ of fashion (French nouveauté) |).*
katwep [ Tree. cai wep in Heb.; fr. Hom. Od. 7, 224
down], conjunce., [originally even very much, cf. Donald-
son § 621; Baumlein p. 200sq.; Kriiger § 56, 13, 2; B.
§ 144, 23; W. § 45, 2 fin.], although; it is joined to a ptep.
(in Grk. writ. sometimes also to an adj., so that dv must
be supplied) : Phil. iii. 4; Heb. v. 8; vii. 5; xii. 17; 2 Pet.
i. 12; contrary to ordinary usage [yet so occasionally in
Grk. writ.] with a finite verb, caimrep eoriv, Rev. xvii. 8
Rec.; but since Grsb. kal mdapeora [correctly mapéora
(see in wdpexpr) | has been restored after the best codd.*
katpds, -ov, 6, (derived by some fr. xdpa or xapn, 7d, the
head, summit, [al. al.; cf. Vaniéek p. 118]); Sept. for ny
and 3p); in Grk. writ. [fr. Hes. down] 1. due
measure ; nowhere so in the bibl. writ. 2. a measure
of time; a larger or smaller portion of time; hence a.
univ. a fixed and definite time: Ro. xiii. 11; 2 Co. vi. 2;
Vorepot karpol, 1 Tim. iv. 1; dype xaipod, up to a certain
time, for a season, Lk. iv. 13 [but in dypi, 1 b. referred
apparently to b, below; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 309 sq.];
Acts xiii. 11; mpds xaupdv, for a certain time only, for a
season, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; mpos Karpov Spas, for the
season of an hour, i. e. for a short season, 1 Th. ii. 17;
kara xatpov, at certain seasons, (from time to time), Jn. v.
4[RGL]; at the (divinely) appoinied time, Ro. v. 6 fal.
bring this under b.j; before the time appointed, Mt. viii.
29; 1Co. iv. 5; dora: xatpéds, dre etc. 2 Tim. iv. 3; dXtyov
Karpov €xet, & short time (in which to exercise his power)
has been granted him, Rev. xii. 12; év exelv@ TO Kaip@,
Mt. xi. 25; xil. 1; xiv. 1; Eph. ii. 12; kar’ ékeivov r. x.,
Acts xii. 15 xix. 23; xara r. x. rodrov, Ro. ix. 93 év aiTo To
x. LK. xiii. 1; evd x. Acts vii. 20; ev T@ vov k-, Ro. iii. 26 ;
xi. 5; 2 Co. viii. 14 (13); év mavri x. always, at every
season, [ Aristot. top. 3, 2,4 p. 117*, 35], Lk. xxi. 36; Eph. |
vi. 18; els riva kaupdy, 1 Pet. i. 11. with the gen. of a
318
KaLpos
thing, the time of ete. i. e. at which it will occur: rHs
éujs avadvoews, 2 Tim. iv. 6; ths émeoxonys, 1 Pet. v. 6
Lehm.; Lk. xix. 44; metpacpou, Lk. viii. 13; rov dpEacOa
To kpipa, for judgment to begin, 1 Pet. iv. 17; xacpot rev
Adywv, of the time when they shall be proved by the event,
Lk. i. 20; — or when a thing usually comes to pass: tov
bepicpov, Mt. xiii. 30; tv kaprov, when the fruits ripen,
Mt. xxi. 34, 41; oveov, Mk. xi. 18. with the gen. of a
pers.: kaipot edvav, the time granted to the Gentiles,
until God shall take vengeance on them, Lk. xxi. 24;
6 éavrod (T Tr WH avrod) x. the time when antichrist
shall show himself openly, 2 Th. ii. 6; 6 xa:pos pou, the
time appointed for my death, Mt. xxvi. 18; rév vexpav
kpiOjvat, the time appointed for the dead to be recalled
to life and judged, Rev. xi. 18 [B. 260 (224)]; 6 eyos, 6
buérepos, the time for appearing in public, appointed
(by God) for me, for you, Jn. vii. 6, 8; Katp@ dio, the
time suited to the thing under consideration, at its
proper time, Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6; vi. 15; Tit.
1.8. 6 Karpds alone, the time when things are brought to a
crisis, the decisive epoch waited for: so of the time when
the Messiah will visibly return from heaven, Mk. xiii.
333 6 Kaipos Hyyexev, Lk. xxi. 8; eyyis éeorw, Rev. 1. 3;
xa 10! b. opportune or seasonable time: with verbs
suggestive of the idea of advantage, karpoy peradap-
Bavew, Acts xxiv. 25; éxew, Gal. vi. 10 (Plut. Lue. 16) ;
eEayopaterOa, Eph. v. 16; Col. iv. 5, see eEayopato, 2;
foll. by an inf., opportunity to do something, Heb. xi. 15;
mapa katpov Atkias, past the opportunity of life [A. V.
past age}, Heb. xi. 11 (simply rapa xarpov, Pind. Ol. 8, 32;
several times in Plato, cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 126). Cc.
the right time: év xatp@ (often in class. Grk.), in due sea-
son, Mt. xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 42; xx. 10 RG L [(ed. ster-
eotyp. only)]; 1 Pet. v.6; also capo, Lk. xx.10L T
Tr WH; 1@ capo, Mk. xii. 2. d. a (limited) period
of time: [1 Co. vii. 29]; plur. the periods prescribed by
God to the nations, and bounded by their rise and fall,
Acts xvii. 26; xarpot kapropépot, the seasons of the year
in which the fruits grow and ripen, Acts xiv. 17 [ef.
Gen. i. 14 Sept.]; karpov kat Karpovs kal jutov Katpod, a
year and two years and six months [A. V. a time, and
times, and half a time; cf. W. § 27, 4], Rev. xii. 14 (cf. 6;
fr. Dan. vii. 25; xii. 7); stated seasons of the year sol-
emnly kept by the Jews, and comprising several days, as
the passover, pentecost, feast of tabernacles, Gal. iv. 10
[2 Chr. viii. 13; cf. Bar. i. 14]. in the divine arrange-
ment of time adjusted to the economy of salvation: 6
katpos (menAnpwrac), the preappointed period which ace.
to the purpose of God must elapse before the divine
kingdom could be founded by Christ, Mk. i. 15; plur.,
the several parts of this period, Eph. i. 10; 6 xaipds 6
eveoros, the present period, i. q. 6 ai@y obros (see alan,
3), Heb. ix. 9, opp. to karpos SuopAdcews, the time when
the whole order of things will be reformed (i. q. aidy péd-
Awv), ib. 10; 6 Karpds obros, i. q. 6 aldv odros (see aidy,
3), Mk. x. 30; Lk. xviii. 30; 5 viv xaup. Ro. viii. 18; ep
Kaip@ €rxare, the last period of the present age, the time
just before the return of Christ from heaven (see féryaros,
Koitcao
1 sub fin., ete.), 1 Pet. 1.5; kaipot dvaiéews ard mpood-
tov 700 Kupiov, denotes the time from the return of Christ
on, the times of the consummated divine kingdom, Acts
iii. 20 (19). e. as often in Grk. writ., and like the
Lat. tempus, katpds is equiv. to what time brings, the state
of the times, the things and events of time: Lk. xii. 56; Sov-
Aevew 7H Kaip@, Lat. tempori servire (see Sovdeva, 2 a.),
Ro. xii. 11 Rec.*; ra onyeia rév Karpdy, i. q. & of karpot
onpaivovor, Mt. xvi. 3 [here T br. WH reject the pass.];
katpol xaderoi, 2 Tim. iii. 1; ypdvou Katpol (times or
seasons, Germ. Zeitumstdnde), Acts i. 7; of xpév. kat of
xaip. 1 Th. v.1; and in the opp. order, Dan. ii. 21 Sept.;
Sap. viii. 8.*
[Sxn. katpds, xpdvos: xp. time, in general; kaip. a defi-
nitely limited portion of time, with the added notion of suit-
ableness. Yet while, on the one hand, its meaning may be
so sharply marked as to permit such a combination as xpévou
katpés “the nick of time,’ on the other, its distinctive sense
may so far recede as to allow it to be used as nearly equiv.
to xpévos; cf. Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschi p. 206, 15 sqq. (after
Ammonius s. v.); p.-215, 10 sqq. kaipds ob pdvov em) xpdvov
GmrGs Tier at, GAAG Kal em) TOD Gpuodiov Kal mpémovTos, KTA.;
Schmidt ch. 44; Trench § lvii.; Tittmann i. 41 sqq.; Cope
on Aristot. rhet. 1, 7, 32. “In modern Grk. rarpds means
weather, xpdvos year. In both words the kernel of meaning
has remained unaltered ; this in the case of xap. is change-
ableness, of xp. duration.” Curtius, Etym. p. 110sq.]
Kaioap, -apos [Bttm. 16 (15)], 6, Cesar (prop. the sur-
name of Julius Caesar, which being adopted by Octavia-
nus Augustus and his successors afterwards became an
appellative, and was appropriated by the Roman empe-
rors as a part of their title [cef. Dict. of Biogr. and
Mythol. s. v. Caesar]): Mt. xxii. 17, 21; Mk. xii. 14,
TGise ese liks iin eit. 15 x22; xxii. 2; Ini xix.12; Acts
xi. 28 [Rec.]; xvii. 7, etc.;. Phil. iv. 22.*
Karrdpea [-ia Tdf. (cf. his note on Acts ix. 30), WH;
see I, c], -as, 7, Cesarea; there were two cities of this
name in Palestine: 1. Cwsarea Philippi (Kaca-
peta 7) PiAimov), situated at the foot of Lebanon near
the sources of the Jordan in Gaulanitis, and formerly
called Paneas (jv Maveada Poinkes mpocayopevovaw, Kus.
h.e. 7,17); but after being rebuilt by Philip the te-
trarch, it was called by him Cesarea in honor of Tibe-
rius Caesar (Joseph. antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.) ; subsequently it
was called Neronias by Agrippa IL., in honor of Nero
(Joseph. antt. 20, 9,4); now Banids, a village of about
150 [(?) “ about 50” (Bddeker), “some forty” (Mur-
ray)] houses: Mt. xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 27. 2. Cesa-
rea (more fully Cesarea of Palestine [mod. Kaisartyeh]),
built near the Mediterranean by Herod the Great on
-the site of Strato’s Tower, between Joppa and Dora.
It was provided with a magnificent harbor and had con-
ferred upon it the name of Cesarea, in honor of Augus-
tus. It was the residence of the Roman procurators,
and the majority of its inhabitants were Greeks (Joseph.
antt..13, 11, 25.15, 9363 19,8, 23 b. j.2,/9; 1): | Acts viii.
AOQwix. 30) x. 1,243 xiall; xii, 19% xvill/ 223 xxi. 8, 16;
Xxili 23, 33; xxv. 1,4,6,13. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.
DD s. v. Cesarea; Arnold in Herzog ii. p. 486 sqq.;
319
MaKELVOS
Overbeck in Schenkel i. p. 499 sq. ; [Schiirer § 23, i. 9;
and for other reff. cf. Me. and S. s. v.].*
kalrou, (fr. kai and roi), conjunction, with a ptep. [bus
in class. Grk. with a finite verb also (as in Acts below);
Kriiger § 56, 13, 2; cf. reff. s. v. kaimep], and yet, al-
though: Heb. iv. 3 (although the work of creation had
been finished long ago, so that the rest spoken of cannot
be understood to be that of God himself resting from
that work [cf. Kurtz in loc.]); [Acts xiv.17 LT Tr WH
(but Tr kai ror) ].*
kalrovye, see ye, 3 f.
[Katas, see Kaiadas. ]
kaiw [Vanivek p. 98]; Pass., pres. cacopat; pf. ptcp. ce
kavpévos; 1 fut. cavdjoopuat (1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf., where R
GLTr give the solecistic fut. subjunc. cavOjo@pat, on
which cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; W. § 13, 1e.; B.
35 sq. (31)); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p.40; WH. App. p. 172;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 122. WH txt. Lehm. ed. ster. read xav-
Xnoopa (with A B etc.) ; on this reading see WH. App.
ad loc.; A. W. Tyler in Bib. Sacr. for July 1873, p. 502
sq.; cf. Scrivener, Introd. etc. p. 629 sq.; Tregelles,
Printed Text etc. p. 191 sq.; Tdf. ad loc.]; Sept. for
Ta, \1W ete. ; [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to set fire to,
light: ddxvov, Mt. v.15; pass. ptep. xaidpevos, burning,
Lk. xii. 35; Rev. iv. 5; viii. 10; xix. 20; with mvpi added,
Heb. xii. 18; Rev. viii. 8; xxi. 8; in fig. disc. Avyvos Katd-
pevos, a light showing the right way, Jn. v. 35 (a com-
parison pointed at the Jews, to whom John the Bap-
tist had been as a torch lighted for a merry-making) ;
metaph. 7 kapdia jv Katopevn was glowing, burning, i. e.
was greatly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32 [W. § 45, 5; B. § 144,
28]. 2. to burn, consume with fire: pass., Jn. xv. 6;
1 Co. xiii. 3 [see above]; with mupi added (ef. igni cre-
mare, Caes. b. g. 1, 4), Mt. xiii. 40 G Tr for RLT WH
karaxatera. [COMP.: ék-, kuta-Kala. ]*
Kaxet [Grsb. kaxet; cf. kdyo and reff.], (by erasis fr. kat
and éxet [cf. W. § 5,3; B.p. 10; esp. Tdf. Proleg. p.
96]); 1. and there: Mt. v.23 [Trmrg. kal éxet];
x. 11; xxviii. 10 [Tdf. cai éxet]; Mk. i. 35 (Lehm. kat
éxei); Jn. xi. 54; Acts xiv. 7; xxii. 10; xxv. 20; xxvii.
6. 2. there also: Mk.i. 88 (G WH kat éxet) ; Acts
xvii. 13.*
Kaxeidev [Grsb. kdk-; see kayo and reff.], (by crasis fr.
cal and éxeiOev [cf. W. § 5, 3; B. 10; esp. Tdf Proleg.
96 sq.]); Lat. et inde ; a. of place, and from thence,
and thence: Mk. ix. 30(RG kai éxetOev); x. 1 (LT Tr
WH kat éx.; Lk. xi. 53 T Trtxt. WH]; Acts vii. 4; xiv.
26; xvi. 12 [exeiOév re RG]; xx.15; xxi.1; xxvii. 4,12
[LT Tr WH éxeider] ; xxvili. 15. b. of time, and
thereafter, and afterward (cf. Bornem. Scholia in Lue. p.
90 sq.]: Acts xiii. 21.*
kdxetvos [Grsb. kdk-; see kayo and reff. ], -eivn, -eivo,
(by crasis fr. kai and ékeivos [ef. W. § 5, 3; esp. Td/-
Proleg. p. 97]); 1. ékeivos referring to the more
remote subject; a. and he (Lat. et tlle): Lk. xi. 7;
xxii. 12; Acts xviii. 19; radra.. . xdxeiva [A. V. the
other], Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42. b. he also: Acts xv.
11; Ro. xi. 23 [Rec.* kai éx.J; 1 Co. x. 6. 2.
éKELYOS
Kaka
referring to the nearer subject [cf. éxeivos, 1 ¢.]; a.
and he (Lat. et is, Germ. und selbiger): Mt. xv. 18; Jn.
vii. 29; xix. 35 [L Tr WH kal éx.]. b. he also (Germ.
auch selbiger): Mt. xx.4[T WH kat ék.]; Mk. xii. 4 sq.;
xvi. 11,13; Lk. xxii. 12; Jn. xiv. 12; xvii. 24.
Kax(a, -as, 4, (kaxés), (fr. Theognis down], Sept. chiefly
for yr, and ny; 1. malignity, malice, ill-will, de-
sire to injure: Ro. i. 29; Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Tit. iii.
3; Jas.i.21; 1 Pet.ti<1. 2. wickedness, depravity:
1 Co. v. 8 [ef. W. 120 (114)]; xiv. 20; Acts viii. 22 (cf.
21); wickedness that is not ashamed to break the laws,
1 Pet. ii. 16. 3. Hellenistically, evil, trouble: Mt.
vi. 34 (as Amos ili. 6; [1 S. vi. 9]; Eccl. vii. 15 (14); xii.
1; Sir. xix.6; 1 Macc. vii. 23, etc.).*
[Syn. eaxla, rovnpia: associated Ro. i. 29; 1 Co. v. 8.
Acc. to Trench, Syn. § xi., endorsed by Ellic. (on Eph. iv. 31)
and Bp. Lghtft. (on Col. iii. 8), xaxta denotes rather the vi-
cious disposition, rovnpla the active exercise of the same; cf.
Xen. mem. 1, 2, 28 ei wey adrds (i.e. Swxpdrns) ewoler re padAov,
cixdrws by eddKer wovnpds elvare ef 3 abtds cwhpovav dieréret,
tas by Sikalws THs ovK evovaons ad’T@ Kaxtas aitlay €xo.; But
Fritzsche, Meyer (on Ro. 1. c.; yet cf. Weiss in ed. 6), al. dis-
sent, —seeming nearly to reverse this distinction; cf. Suidas
8. v. kakla: Zor } TOD Kak@oa Toy TéAas GmoVvdH, Tapa TH
amooTdAw; see tovnpds, 2 b.|
kaxon Pera [-Oia WH; see I, t],-as, 7, (fr. kaxonOns, and
this fr. xaxds and 460s), bad character, depravity of heart
and life, Xen., Plat., Isocr., al.; 4 Mace. i. 4, where cf.
Grimm p. 299; spec. used of malignant subtlety, malicious
craftiness: Ro. i. 29 (3 Mace. iii. 22; Add. to Esth. viii.
1, 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35,5; Joseph. antt. 1,1, 4; 16,
8,1; [c. Ap. 1, 24,4]; Polyb. 5, 50, 5, etce.). On the
other hand, Aristot. rhet. 2,13, [3 p. 81] defines it rd émt
TO xelpov UrodapBavery mavra, [taking all things in the evil
part, Genevan N. T. Cf. Trench § xi.].*
Kakodoyéw, -@; 1 aor. inf. Kaxohoynoar; (Kaxoddyos) ;
i. q. kax@s Aéyw (which the old grammarians prefer, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 200) ; 1. to speak ill of, revile,
abuse, one; to calumniate, traduce: twd, Mk. ix. 39; ri,
Acts xix. 9; (2 Mace. iv.1; Lys., Plut., al.). 2.
Hellenistically, to imprecate evil on, curse: rivd, Mt. xv.
4; Mk. vii. 10, (so for 7p, Prov. xx. 20; Ezek. xxii. 7;
Ex. xxii. 28).*
kaxomd0ea [-Oia WH; see I, ¢], -as, 4, (kaxorabns suffer-
ing evil, afflicted), prop. the suffering of evil, i. e. trouble,
distress, affliction: Jas. v.10 (Mal. i. 13; 2 Mace. ii. 26
sq.; [Antipho]; Thue. 7, 77; Isocr., Polyb., Diod., al.).*
kaxorrabew, -@; 1 aor. impv. 2 sing. caxordOncor; (ka-
xonabns); to suffer (endure) evils (hardship, troubles); to
be afflicted: 2 Tim. ii. 9; Jas. v.13 [W. § 41 a. 3 fin.; ef.
§ 60,4c.; B. § 139, 28], (Sept. Jon. iv. 10; Xen., Plut.,
al.); used freq. of the hardships of military service
(Thue. 4, 9; Polyb. 3, 72,5; Joseph. antt. 10, 11,1; b. 1p
1, 7,4); hence elegantly xaxordOnoov (LT Tr WH avy
[T WH ovr- (q. v. fin.) ] kaxordOnoov) cs Kadds oTpaTLarns,
2 Tim. ii. 3; ib. iv.5. [Comp.: ovy-kaxorrabéw. | *
kaxo-rovew, -& ; 1 aor. inf. kaxomounoat; (kaxorowds); 1.
to ao harm: Mk. iii. 4; Lk. vi. 9. 2. to do evil, do
320
KaKOW
wrong: 1 Pet.iii.17; 3Jn.11. ([Aeschyl., Arstph. {,
Xen., Polyb., Antonin., Plut.; Sept.) *
Kakotroids, -ov, (kaxov and movéw), doing evil; subst. an
evil-doer, malefactor: Jn. xviii. 30 [but Lmrg. T Tr WH
xakov mov]; 1 Pet. ii. 12, 14; iii. 16 [T Tr mrg. WH om.
the cl.]; iv. 15. (Prov. xii. 4; Pind., Aristot., Polyb.,
Plut.) *
kaxés, -7, -ov, Sept. for 4, [fr. Hom. down], bad, [A.V.
(almost uniformly) evil] ; 1. univ. of a bad nature;
not such as it ought to be. 2. [morally, i. e.] of a
mode of thinking, feeling, acting; base, wrong, wicked:
of persons, Mt. xxi. 41 [cf. W. 637 (592); also B. 143
(126)]; xxiv. 48; Phil. iii. 2; Rev.ii.2. dcadoyeopoi, Mk.
vii. 213 dura, 1 Co. xv. 33; emOupia, Col. iii. 5 (Prov.
xii. 12); &pya [better &pyov], Ro. xiii. 3. neut. caxdv, To
xaxov, evil i. e. what is contrary to law, either divine or
human, wrong, crime: [Jn. xviii. 23]; Acts xxiii. 9; Ro.
vii. 21; xiv. 20; xvi. 19; 1 Co. xiii.5; Heb. v.14; 1 Pet.
iii. 10 sq.; 3 Jn. 11; plur. [evil things]: Ro.i. 30; 1Co.
x. 6; 1 Tim. vi. 10 [maura ra xaxa all kinds of evil]; Jas.
i. 13 [W. § 30, 4; B. § 132, 24]; xaxov rrosetv, to do, com-
mit evil: Mt. xxvii. 23; Mk. xv. 14; Lk. xxiii. 22; 2 Co.
xiii. 7; 1 Pet. iii. 12; 7d xaxov, Ro. xiii. 43 ra Kaka, ili. 8;
kakov, TO Kaxov mpaooev, Ro. vii. 19; ix. 11. [Rec.]; xiii.
4; [2Co.v.10 RGLTr mrg.]; 1d xaxov xarepyatecOut,
Ro. ii. 9. spec. of wrongs inflicted: Ro. xii. 213; kaxov
épyaCopat tin [to work ill to one], Ro. xiii. 10; évdeixvupe,
2 Tim. iv. 14; wow, Acts ix.13; dmodidwpe xaxov ati Ka-
Kov, KO=Xn.-£ 45 1 Th. v. 1551 Pet: ii. 9: 3. trouble-
some, injurious, pernicious, destructive, baneful: neut.
kakoy, an evil, that which injures, Jas. iii. 8 [W. § 59, 8b.;
B. 79 (69)]; with the suggestion of wildness and ferocity,
Onpia, Tit. i. 12; substantially i. q. bad, i. e. distressing,
whether to mind or to body : €Axos xakév x. wovnpov [ A.V.
a noisome and grievous sore], Rev. xvi. 2; kaxov mpdoow
enauTo, Lat. vim mihi infero, to do harm to one’s self, Acts
Xvi. 28; Kaxov tt racyxe, to suffer some harm, Acts xxviii.
5; 7a xaxd, evil things, the discomforts which plague one,
Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to ré dyad, the good things, from which
pleasure is derived). [Syn. cf. caxia.] *
kaxotpyos, -ov, (contr. from xaxdepyos, fr. kaxov and
EPYQ; cf. mavodpyos, and on the accent of both see
Gottling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 321; [Chandler § 445]), as
subst. a malefactor: 2 Tim. ii. 9; of a robber, Lk. xxiii.
32 sq. [ef. W. 530 (493); B.§ 150, 3], 39. (Prov. xxi. 15;
in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down.) *
kakovxéw, -@: (fr. obsol. caxodyxos, fr. kaxov and éyw) ;
to treat il, oppress, plague: twa; pres. pass. ptcp. Kaxou-
xovpevot, maltreated, tormented, Heb. xi. 37; xiii. 3. (1
K. ii. 26; xi. 39 Alex.; Diod. 3, 23; 19,11; Dio C.35-
(36), 9 (11); Plut. mor. p. 114e.) [Comp.: ovy-kaxou-
xeo. | *
Kakde, -@: fut. kaxbow; 1 aor. éxdkwoa; (Kaxds) } ule
to oppress, afflict, harm, maltreat: twa, Acts vii. 6,19 ; xii.
1; xviii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 13, (Ex. v. 22; xxiii.9 Alex.; in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2. by a usage foreign
to the classics, to embitter (Vulg. ad iracundiam concuo);
render evil affected, (Ps. ev. (evi.) 32; Joseph. antt. 16,
KAKOS
1, 2; 7,35 8, 6): thy puyny twos cata Twos, against one,
Acts xiv. 2.*
Kaxés, (xaxds), adv., [fr. Hom. down], badly, ill,i.e. a.
[in a physical sense] miserably: yew, to be ill, sick [see
éxo, If. a.], Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16; ix. 12; xiv. 35; [xvii. 15
LTrtxt. WH txt.]; Mk. [i. 32, 34]; ii. 17; [vi. 55];
Lk. v. 31; vii. 2, etc. ; macxew, Mt. xvii. 15 [RGT Tr
mrg. WH mrg.]; dapoviterOa, Mt. xv. 22; Kaxods Kakds
a@rokéoe, Mt. xxi. 41, on this combination of words with
verbs of destroying, perishing, etc., which is freq. in Grk.
writ. also, cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; W. § 68, 1. b. [mor-
ally] improperly, wrongly: In. xviii. 23 ; Kaxds elmeiv Twa,
to speak ill of, revile, one, Acts xxiii. 5; with bad in-
tent, aireio dat, Jas. iv. 3.*
kKdkwots, -ews, 7, (kaxdw), ill-treatment, ill-usage, (Vulg.
afflictio): Acts vii. 34. (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 19; Ex. iii. 7,
17; Job xxxi. 29 [Symm.]; Thuc., Xen., Plut., al.) *
koAdpn, -ns, 9, a stalk of grain or of a reed, the stalk
(left after the ears are cut off), stubble: 1 Co. iii. 12.
(Ex. v. 12; xv. 7; Is. xvii. 6; Hom. et sqq.)*
kddapos, -ov, 6, fr. Pind. down, Lat. calamusi. e. a.a
reed: Mt. xi. 7; xii. 20 (fr. Is. xlii. 3) ; Lk. vii. 24. De
a staff made of a reed, a reed-staff, (as in 2 K. xviii. 21):
Mt. xxvii. 29 sq. 48; Mk. xv. 19, 36. c. a measuring
reed or rod: Rev. xi. 1; xxi. 15 sq., (Ezek. xl. 3-6; xlii.
16-19). d. a writer’s reed, a pen: 3 Jn. 13; [see
Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 71 sq. ].*
Kaew, -6; impf. éxddouv; fut. kakeow (W. § 13, 3¢.);
1 aor. éexddeca; pf. xexAnxa; Pass., pres. cadovpa; pf.
3 pers. sing. xexAnrat (1 Co. vii. 18 LT Tr WH; [Rev.
xix. 13 LT Tr WH)), ptep. cexAnpevos; 1 aor. éxAnOnv;
1 fut. KAnOnoopa; [fr. Hom. down]; Hebr. Np; Lat.
voco; i. e. 1. to call (Germ. rufen [cf. Bodo,
fin.]) ; a. to call aloud, utter in a loud voice: dypis 06
TO onpepov Kadeirat, as long as the word ‘to-day’ is called
out or proclaimed, Heb. iii. 13; ria, to call one to ap-
proach or stand before one, Mt. xx. 8; xxii. 3 (where
els rods yapous seems to belong to rods KexAnuevovs); Mt.
xxv. 14; [Mk. iii. 31 LT Tr WH]; Lk. xix. 13; ra ica
mpéBata Kar’ dvoua, his own sheep each by its name, Jn.
x. 3 (where LT Tr WH dore?); used of Christ, calling
certain persons to be his disciples and constant compan-
ions, Mt. iv. 21 (note what precedes in 19: Setre dricw
pov); Mk.i. 20; to order one to be summoned, Mt. ii. 15
[see just below]; before the judges, Acts iv. 18; xxiv.
2; foll. by ék with gen. of place, i. q. to call out, call forth
from: Mt. ii. 15, ef. Heb. xi. 8. metaph. to cause to pass
from one state into another: twa éx oKdrous eis Td Pas,
1 Pet. ii. 9. b. like the Lat. voco i. q. to invite; a.
prop.: eis rods yduous, Mt. xxii. 3,9; Lk. xiv. 8 sq.; Jn.
ii, 2; to a feast, Lk: xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 27 [cf. W. 593
(552)]; Rev. xix. 9; 6 xadéoas, Lk. vii. 39; xiv. 9; 6
kexAnkas tiva, ibid. 10,123 of kexAnuévor, Mt. xxii. 8; Lk.
xiv. 7,17, 24; (2 Sam. xiii. 23; Esth. v.12; and often
so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Od. 4, 532; 11,187down). f.
metaph.: to invite one, eis 71, to something i. e. to par-
ticipate in it, enjoy it; used thus in the Epp. of Paul
and Peter of God as inviting men by the preaching of
821
KANE®
the gospel (da tod edayyeAlov, 2 Th. ii. 14) to the bless-
ings of the heavenly kingdom: eis tiv facueiav Tov Geod,
1 Th. ii. 12; eis CwHv aidmov, 1 Tim. vi. 12; els dd€av
aiwmov, 1 Pet. v.10; eis riv Kowwviay rod viod adrod, 1 Co.
i.9; so kadetv twa used alone: Ro. viii. 30; ix. 24 sq.;
1 Co. vii. 17 sq. 20-22, 24; read kadeiv kAnoet, 2 Tim. i. 9;
€v © éxdnOnuev, in whom lies the reason why we were
called, who is the ground of our having been invited,
Eph. i. 11 Lehm.; détos ris kAnoews, fis (by attraction
for 7 [or perh. yw; cf. W. § 24,1; B. 287 (247); Elli-
cott in loc.]) ékAjOnte, Eph. iv. 1; God is styled 6 cada
twa (he that calleth one, the caller, cf. W. § 45, 7), Gal.
v.8; 1 Th. v. 24; and 6 xcadécas twa, Gal.i.6, Col. i. 12
Lehm.; 1 Pet. i. 15; 2 Pet.i.3. of xexAnpeévor, Heb. ix.
15; xadety and xadeioGa are used with a specification of
the mediate end (for the highest or final end of the call-
ing is eternal salvation): ém’ édevdepia, Gal. v. 133 ovk
ém dkaOapaia ad év dytaopa, 1 Th. iv. 7; év etpnyn, 1 Co.
vii. 15; ev évi éedmids, that ye might come into one hope,
Eph. iv. 4 (see ev, I. 7 [yet cf. W. 417 (389); B. 329
(283); esp. Ellicott in loc.], and émi, B. 2a. ¢.); eis eipn-
vnv Tov Xptorov ev évi copatt, that ye may be in one
body i. e. be members of one and the same body, Col. iii-
15; eis rodro (which refers to what precedes) foll. by
iva, 1 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 9; (but everywhere in the N. T.
Epp. only those are spoken of as called by God who have
listened to his voice addressed to them in the gospel,
hence those who have enlisted in the service of Christ —
see Ro. viii. 30 and Riickert’s Com. in loc. p. 464, ef. 1
Co. i. 24; those who have slighted the invitation are not
reckoned among the called); Christ also is said cadeiy
twa, sc. to embrace the offer of salvation by the Messiah,
in Mt. ix.13 and Mk. ii. 17 (in both which pass. Rec.
adds eis perdvocav). God is said to call those who are
not yet born, viz. by promises of salvation which have
respect to them, so that cadet is for substance equiv. to
to appoint one to salvation, Ro. ix. 12 (11); Kadovvros ra
py bvra ws dvra, Ro. iv. 17, where cf. Fritzsche, [al. al.,
cf. Meyer (esp. ed. Weiss) ad loc.]}. to call (i. q. to select)
to assume some office, twa, of God appointing or commit-
ting an office to one, (Germ. berufen): Gal.i.15; Heb.
v. 4, (Is. xlii. 6; xlix.1; li. 2). to invite i. q. to, rouse,
summon: to do something, eis peravoay, Lk. v. 32, added
in Ree. also in Mt. ix. 13 and Mk. ii. 17. 2. to call
i. e. to name, call by name ; a. to give a name to; with
two ace., one of the object the other of the name as a
predicate [to call one (by) a name: Mt. x. 25 Rec.; cf.
W. § 32, 4b.; B. 151 (132) note]; pass. w. the nom. of
the name, to receive the name of, receive as a name: Mt.
ii. 23; xxvii. 8; Lk. i. 32, 60, 62; ii.4, ete.; KaXouyptevos,
called, whose name or surname is, Deke wails ix. 1:0) x:
39; Acts vii. 58; xxvii. 8,165 6 kaAovpevos [on its posi-
tion cf. B. § 144, 19]: Lk. vi. 155 viii. 2; [xxii. 3 T Tr
WH]; xxiii. 33; Acts i. 285 x.13 xili.1; [xv.22 L.T
Tr WH]; xxvii. 14; Rev. xii. 9; xvi. 16; with dvduare
added, Lk. xix. 2; xadcioOar dvdpari run, to be called
by a name, Lk. i. 61; kadeiy twa emi TO dvduari Tivos,
Lk. i. 59 (see éxi, B. 2 a. n. p. 233°); after the Hebr. 8p
aA\ 1€XaLos
TOWN, Karey 16 8voyud Tivos, with the name in the acc.,
Met. 1, 215823; 25%
to give some name to one, call his name:
Gen. xvii.
Lk. i. 18, 31; pass., Lk. ii. 21; Rev. xix. 13;
19; 1S. i. 20, ete. (similarly pmietimnes in Grk. writ., cf.
Fritzsche on Mt. p. 45 [B. 151 (132)]). b. Pass.
kadodpat with predicate nom. to be called i. e. to bear a
name or title (among men) [cf. W. § 65, 8]: Lk. i. 35;
xxii. 25; Acts viii. 10 [Rec. om. cad.]; 1 Co. xv. 9; to be
said to be (i. q. to be acknowledged, pass as, the nomina-
tive expressing the judgment passed on one): Mt. v. 9,
9: Lk. i. $2, 35, 76; ii. 23; xv.19; Ro. ix. 26; Jas. il.
23; opp. to eva, 1 Jn. iii. 1 LT Tr WH; Hebraistically
(Gen. xxi. 12) év’Ioadk kdyOnoerai cot oréppa, through
[better in, ef. év, I. 6 c. and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad Ro. 1.
c.] Isaac shall a seed be called for thee, i. e. Isaac (not
Ishmael) is the one whose posterity shall obtain the name
and honor of thy descendants, Ro. ix. 7 and Heb. xi.
18. Cc. kad tiva, with an ace. of the predicate or a
title of honor, fo salute one by a name: Mt. xxiii. 9;
Pass., ib. 7 sq. 10; Rev. xix. 11 [but Tr mrg. WH br. x.];
to give a name to one and mention him at the same time,
Mt. xxii. 43, 45; Lk. xx. 44. [Come.:
(-pat), €rt-, pera-, Tapa-, Tv-Trapa-, Tp0-, Mpoo-, Tvy-Kahéw. |
KaAdAt-éAauos, -ov, 7, (fr. kadAos and é€daia), the garden
olive, [A. V. good olive tree], (opp. to dyprehatos the wild
olive): Ro. xi. 24. Aristot. de plant. 1, 6 p. 820°, 40.*
Kad\lwy, see Kados, fin.
Kado-SiSdokados, -ov, 6, 7, (duddoKados and xaddv, cf.
iepodiddoKados, vowodiddokados, xopodidacKkaXos), teaching
that which is good, a teacher of goodness: Tit.ii.3. No-
where else.*
kadol Aueves (kadrds and Ayn), Fair Havens (Germ.
Schinhafen; Luth. Gutfurt), a bay of Crete, near the
city Lasza; so called because offering good anchorage;
now Limenes kali [BB.DD.]: Acts xxvii. 8.*
KaAo-Trovéw, -@; (i. GQ. KaA@s OL, Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
199 sq. [W. 25]); to do well, act uprightly: 2 Th. iii. 13.
(Etym. Magn. 189, 24; [Lev. v. 4 Ald. (as quoted in)
Philo de somn. l. ii. § 44].) *
Kadés, -7, -dv, [ prob. primarily ‘sound,’ ‘ hale,’ ‘ whole ;’
ef. Vaniéek p. 140 sq.; Curtius § 31], Sept. for 79° beau-
tiful, but much oftener for 3j0 good; beautiful, applied
by the Greeks to everything so distinguished in form, ex-
cellence, goodness, usefulness, as to be pleasing; hence
(ace. to the context) i. q. beautiful, handsome, excellent,
eminent, choice, surpassing, precious, useful, suitable, com-
mendable, admirable ; a. beautiful to look at, shapely,
magnificent: AiBots kadois Kexdopnrat [ A. V. goodly], Lk.
5S:0b Be b. good, excellent in its nature and character-
istics, and therefore well-adapted to its ends: joined to the
names of material objects, univ. 1 Tim. iv. 4 (i. q. pure);
esp. of things so constituted as to answer the purpose for
which that class of things was created; good of its kind:
ta kadd, of fish, opp. to such as are thrown away (ra
carpa), Mt. xiii. 48; omépua, Mt. xiii. 24, 27, 37 3q.3
«aprés, Mt. iii. 10; vii. 17-19; xii. 33; Lk. iii. 9 [L WH
br. kad.]; vi. 43; S€vdpov, opp. to campov, Mt. xii. 33;
Lk. vi. 43; yy, Mt. xiii. 8,23; Mk. iv. 8, 20; Lk. viii. 15;
> > >
avTi-, €V-, Ela-
822
|
KAAV [hbo
kadov 7) ddas (is an excellent thing), Mk. ix. 50; Lk. xiv.
34; so too 6 vdpuos, good in its substance and nature, and
fitted to beget good, Ro. vii. 16; 1 Tim.i. 8; d:dacxadéa,
true and approved teaching, 1 Tim. iv. 6; «apdia Kady x
ayaOn, Lk. viii. 15; mapa@yxn [q- v-] (containing [rather,
consisting of] cada), 2 Tim. i. 14; pérpov, ample meas-
ure (rabbin. 7210 N90; Eng. good measure), Lk. vi. 38;
BaOuds (firm [but see Babuds}), 1 Tim. iii. 13; also depé
Neos, 1 Tim. vi. 195 i. q. genuine, approved, mavra Sopa
(ere, TO Kaddv Katéxere, 1 Th. v. 21; i. q. precious [A.V.
goodly], papyapira, Mt. xiii. 45; i. q. superior to other
kinds, ofvos, Jn. ii. 10; joined to names of men desig-
nated by their office, competent, able, such as one ought to
be: mousnv, Jn. x. 11,14; diaxovos, 1 Tim. iv. 6; oixevdpos,
1 Pet. iv. 10; orparmrns, 2 Tim. ii. 3; joined to nouns
denoting an effect estimated by the power it involves,
or by its constaney, or by the end aimed at by its author,
i. q. praiseworthy, noble: orpareia, 1 Tim. i. 18; dyad, 1
Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7; é6podoyia, 1 Tim. vi. 12 sq.;
épyov, Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Jn. x. 33; 1 Tim. iii. 1;
plur. Jn. x. 32. kaddy éorev, it is expedient, profitable,
wholesome: foll. by an inf. as subject, 1 Co. vii. 1; w. rei
added [so in 1 Co. ].¢. also], Mt. xviii. 8 sq. [ef. W. 241
(226); B. § 149, 7]; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, RG [also L Tr
mrg. in 47]; 1 Co. vii. 26; ix. 15; x. éorey foll. by the ace.
and inf., Mk. ix. 43, 45,47, L (but see above) T Tr (but
not mrg., see above) WH; Heb. xiii. 9; foll. by ed [cf.
B. 217-187 sq.); W. 282 (265) ], Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. ix.
42; xiv. 21; foll. by éay [B. and W. u. s.], 1 Co. vii. 8;
it is pleasant, delightful, foll. by ace. with inf.: Mt.
xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; LK. ix. 33. c. beautiful by rea-
son of purity of heart and life, and hence praiseworthy;
morally good, noble, (Lat. honestus; [cf. Aristot. rd xa”
avTo Kadov]): Suaxpiors Kadod te Kal Kaxod, Heb. v. 14;
épya, Mt.v.16; 1 Tim. v. 10,25; vi.18; Tit. ii. 7,14; ili.
8,14; Heb. x. 24; 1 Pet. ii. 12, and Lchm. in 2 Pet. i. 10;
dvaotpopn, Jas. iii. 13; 1 Pet. ii. 12; cady cuveidnots, con-
sciousness of good deeds, [A.V. a good conscience], Heb.
xill. 18; xaAd, kahov eva@mdy Tivos, in one’s judgment, Ro.
xii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 21; 1 Tim. ii. 3 and Ree. in v. 4; ¢pdoo-
aba ev kar, Gal. iv. 18; rd Kaddv KatepyaterOa, Ro. vii.
18 ; wotety, ib. 21; 2 Co. xiii. 7; Gal. vi. 9; Jas.iv.17; caddv
éotiy, it is right, proper, becoming, foll. by an inf.: Mt. xv.
26 (LT é€eorw) ; [Mk. vii. 27]; Gal. iv. 18 [here Tr mrg.
impv.]; Ro. xiv. 21. d. honorable, conferring honor:
paprupia, 1 Tim. iii. 7; dvopa, Jas. ii. 7; od Kaddv 7d Kav-
xnwa vpav, 1 Co. v. 6. e. affecting the mind agreeably,
comforting and confirming : Geov pipa (Sept. for 210 135,
which is spoken of the divine promises, Josh. xxi. 45;
Zech. i. 13), the gospel and its promises full of consola-
tion, Heb. vi. 5. Compar. kahAlev, -ov, better: neut.
adverbially, od kaddtov exvywackets, i. e. better than by
thy question thou seemest to know, Acts xxv. 10 [W. 242
(227)]. The word is not found in the Apocalypse. [Cf.
Trench § evi. fin.; Zezschwitz, Profangricitat u. s. w. p:
60 sq. (cf. dyads, fin.) ; Westcott on Jn. x. 11.]*
KaAUpp.A, -Tos, TO, (KAAUTT@), a veil, a covering: 2 Co. iil.
13 (Ex. xxxiv. 33); [xdAvpua, or its equiv., is suggested
KAAUTT® 3
to the reader by the context in 1 Co. xi. 4 xara keadis
€xov; see €yo, I. 1 b.]; metaph., 2 Co. iii. 14-16, of that
which prevents a thing from being understood. (Hom.,
Tragg., Arstph., al.; Sept.)*
kadimro ; fut. cadrvyo; 1 aor. ékddua; Pass., pres. inf.
catimrecOat; pf. ptep. cexaduppevos ; [allied with KpUTT@ }
Vanitek p. 1091; Curtius, Das Verbum, i. 242;] Sept.
for 7D}; often in Hom., Tragg. and other poets, more
rarely in prose; fo cover, cover up; prop.: twd, Lk. xxiii.
305 rt rum, a thing with anything, Lk. viii. 16; pass. Mt.
vill. 24; trop. to hide, veil, i. e. to hinder the knowledge
of a thing: pf. pass., Mt. x. 26; 2Co.iv. 3; mdjOos dyap-
tTL@y, not to regard or impute them, i. e. to pardon them,
1 Pet. iv. 8; to procure pardon of them from God, Jas.
v. 20; cf. Ps. Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 3 (2); xxxi. (xxxii.)1 sq.
(Comp.: dva-, arro-, émt-, kata-, Tapa-, Tept-, Tvy-KadiTTo@. | *
Kadds, (kadés), adv., [fr. Hom. down], beautifully, fine-
dy, excellently, well: (univ. dia 7d Kadds oikodopncba
(Tr -petoba, q. v.), Lk. vi. 48 T Tr WH]; spec. a.
rightly, so that there shall be no room for blame: joined to
verbs of speaking (dmoxpiveoOa, \adeiv, Eye, mpopn-
revewy, etc.), well, truly, Mt. xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. xx. 39;
Jn.iv.17; vill. 48; xiii. 13; [xviil. 23]; Acts xxviii. 25;
filly, i. e. agreeably to the facts and words of the case,
Mk. xii. 28; xadas right! well! an expression of approv-
al: Mk. xii. 32; Ro. xi. 20; of deeds: k. roveiv, to do
well, act uprightly, Jas. ii. 19; 1 Co. vii. 37 sq. (where the
teaching is, that one can do xad@s, but another xpeiaaor) ;
KaAGs rovetv with ptep. to do well that, etc. [B. § 144, 15 a.;
W845 (323), Acts x. 33; Phil-iv.14; 2 Pet.i. 195-3
Jn. 6, (1 Mace. xii. 18, 22; -2 Mace. ii. 16, etc.); with
verbs denoting a duty or office which one fulfils weil:
1 Tim. iii. 4, 12 sq.; v. 17; spec. honestly, uprightly:
Gal. iv. 17; dvaorpépeoOa, Heb. xiii. 18; movety, Jas. ii.
8. b. excellently, nobly, commendably: 1 Co. xiv. 17;
Gal. v. 7; xadés mdvra remoinke, Mk. vii. 37; with bitter
irony, Mk. vii. 9 (where cf. Fritzsche p. 271 sq.); 2 Co.
Xin 4. ce. honorably, in honor: Jas. ii. 3 [al. give it
here an outward reference, i. q. in a good place, comfort-
ably). d. xadés eireiy rwa, to speak well of one, Lk.
vi. 26; x. movety twa, to do good to, benefit one, Mt. v. 44
Rec.; rei [W. § 32,1 8.; B. 146 (128)], Lk. vi. 27; karas
aroveiv, simply, to do good: Mt. xii. 12. e. Kahas eyewy,
to be well (of those recovering health): Mk. xvi. 18.*
[kdpé, see Kayo. |
Kdpndos, -ov, 6, 7, Hebr. O23, (fr. Hdt. down], a camel
[BB.DD. s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 58 sqq.]:
Mt. iii. 4; Mk.i. 6; in proverbs, Mt. xix. 24; Mk. x. 25;
Lk. xviii. 25, (meaning, ‘something almost or altogether
impossible’ {cf. Farrar in The Expositor for 1876 i. p.
369 sqq.; esp. Wetzstein in the Sitzungsberichte d. Akad.
a. Wissensch. zu Miinchen, 1873, pp. 581-596]); Mt.
xxiii. 24 (of one who is careful not to sin in trivial mat-
ters, but pays no heed to the more important matters).*
Kdpudos, -ov, 6, a cable; the reading of certain Mss. in
Mt. xix. 24 and Lk. xviii. 25, [see Tdf.’s notes]. The
word is found only in Suidas [1967 c.] and the Schol. on
Arstph. vesp. [1030]: “xdidos rd maxd cxoviov dia rod
3
BA
Kap
i.” Cf. Passow [or L. and S.]s.v.; [WH. App. p.
151»).*
kdpsLVvos, -ov, 6, 9, [Hom. ep. 14, 2 etc., Hdt. on], a furnace
(either for smelting, Xen. vectig. 4, 49, or for burning
earthen ware, or baking bread, Gen. xix. 28)Web casts
18; Jer. xi.4; Dan. iii.6): Mt. xiii. 42,50; Rev. i. ip
ID Oe!
kappve, a form which passed over from the Epic (cf.
Nom. batrach. 191) and com. language [Apoll. Dyse.
synt. 323, 22; 326, 9] into the Alexandrian and decaying
Greek; condemned by Phryn. [as below]; derived by
syncope and assimilation from xarapi (which the earlier
and more elegant Greeks use), (cf. capper, kapport), Kap-
popos, fr. kara pév, Katapnovn, katduopos, cf. Bitm. Gram.
§ 117, 2 Anm. 2; Ausf. Gram. ii. p. 373; Fischer, De
vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 678 sq.; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete.
p- 173 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 339 sq.; Schdfer ad Lamb.
Bos p. 368; [cf. B. 62 (55); W.24,46]): 1 aor. éxdp-
puoa; to shut the eyes, close the eyes: often w. rods dpOar-
povs added; so Mt. xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Sept.
Is. vi. 10, for pwn, i.e. to besmear), in both which pass.
the phrase designates the inflexible pertinacity and ob-
stinacy of the Jews in their opposition to the gospel.
(Is. xxix. 10; Lam. iii. 43; capptew 7d tis Puxis supa,
Philo de somn. i. § 26.) *
Kapve; 2 aor. ekayov; pf. Kéxunka; 1. to grow
weary, be weary, (so fr. Hom. down): Rev. ii. 3 Rec.;
Heb. xii. 3. 2. to be sick: Jas. v. 15 (Soph., [Hadt. ],
Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Leian. al.).*
[Kdpot, see Kayo. |
Kaparo; fut. kdpyo; 1 aor. gxapwa; a. to bend,
bow: 76 ydvu (and ra yovvara), the knee (the knees), used
by Hom. of those taking a seat or sitting down to rest
(il. 7, 118; 19, 72); in bibl. Grk. with dat. of pers. to
one i.e. in honor of one, in religious veneration; used
of worshippers: Ro. xi. 4 and 1 K. xix. 18 (where for
pra foll. by 5); mpds twa, towards (unto) one, Eph. iii.
14. b. reflexively, to bow one’s self: kdprper nav
yévu pol, shall bow to me (in honor), i. e. every one shall
worship me, Ro. xiv. 11 (fr. Is. xlv. 23); év r@ dvdpare
"Incod, in devout recognition of the name (of kvpsos)
which Jesus received from God, Phil. ii. 10 [ef. W. 390
(365); Bp. Lghtft., Meyer, in lov.; also dvoua, esp. sub
fin. Comp.: dva-, ovy-Kapnto }.*
kav [Grsb. kav; see kaye, init.], by crasis for kai édy
[ef. W. § 5, 3; B. p. 10; Tdf Proleg. p.97; WH. App.
p- 145°]; hence joined with the subjunctive ; 1.
and if: Mt. x. 23 GL; Mk. xvi. 18; [Lk. xii. 38 (bis)
T Tr txt. WH; Jn. viii. 55 L T Tr WH; 1 Co. xiii. 2+
L WH, 2 Tr txt. WH, 3° L Tr WH, 3° L WH); Jas.
v.15; by aposiopesis with the suppression of the apodo-
sis, kav pév moujon Kaprdy, sc. ed éxer it ts well (or some
such phrase), Lk. xiii. 9; ef. W. 600 (558); [B. § 151,
26]. 2. also or even if; a. if only, at least, in
abridged discourse: kdv rév ipatioy adrod, sc. dyopat,
Mk. v. 28; also iva (sc. Govrat adrod) kav rod Kpaorédou
.. dorrat, Mk. vi. 56; tva éepxopevov Ilerpov (se. ri
adrod émokidon adrav) Kav 7 oxida etc. Acts v. 15; Kady os
Kava
dppova sc. degnoG€ pe, 2 Co. xi. 16; (Sap. xiv. 4; xv. 2).
Cf. B. § 149, 6; [W. 584 (543); Green, Gram. of the
N. T. p. 230; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 139 sq.; L. and S.
s.v.3 Soph. Lex. s. v.]- b. even if: Mt. xxi. 21; xxvi.
353 Jn. viii. 14; x. 38; [xi. 25]; Heb. xii. 20.*
Kava [-vd WH; cf. Tf. Proleg. p. 103; W. § 6,1m.],
[B. 21 (19)], Cana, indecl. [W. 61 (60); but dat. -va
Rec. in Jn. ii. 1,11], prop. name of a village of Galilee
about three hours distant from Nazareth towards the
northwest, surviving at present in a place (partly unin-
habited and partly ruinous) called Kana el-Jelil; cf.
Robinson, Bibl. Researches, ii. 346 sq.; also his Later
Bibl. Researches, p. 108; cf. Ewald, Gesch. Christus
u. s.w. p. 147 (ed.1); Riietschi in Herzog vii. 234; [Por-
ter in Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Several recent writers are in-
clined to reopen the question of the identification of
Cana; see e.g. B.D. Am. ed. s. v.; Zeller, in Quart.
Statem. of Palest. Expl. Fund, No. iii. p. 71 sq.; Arnaud,
Palestine p. 412 sq.; Conder, Tent Work etc. i. 150 sq.]:
Jnedls elie 46s, xk 2.
Kavavaios [, 1 Tr WH in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 18 (for
RG Kavavirns, q. v-); ace. to the interp. of Bleek (Erklir.
d. drei ersten Evv. i. p. 417) et al. a native of Cana (see
Kava); but then it ought to be written Kavaios. The
reading Kavavaios seems to be a clerical error occasioned
by the preceding Oaddaios [or AeBBaios]; cf. Fritzsche
on Mt.x.4. [But -aios is a common ending of the Gre-
cized form of names of sects (cf. "Acowdaios, Bapicaios,
Saddovkaios, Eaoaios). Hence the word is prob. derived
fr. the Aramaic }%}) (see next word) and corresponds
to (yrwrns, q. v. (ef. Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13). See Bp.
Lghtft. Fresh Revision ete. p. 138 sq.]*
Kavavirns, -ov, 6, (fr. Chald. 1832p Hebr. $39), i. q. 6
(prwrns (acc. to the interpr. of Luke in vi. 15; Acis i.
13), q. v-, the Zealot, a surname of the apostle Simon :
RG (the latter with small «) in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 13.*
Kav6daxn, -7s, 7, Can‘dace, a name common to the queens
of a region of Ethiopia whose capital was Napata; just
as the proper name Ptolemy was common to the Egyp-
tian kings, and Henry to the Reuss princes (Strabo 17,
1, 54 p. 820; Plin. h. n. 6, 35; Dio Cass. 54,5): Acts viii.
27; ef. Laurent, Die Konigin Kandake, in the Zeitschr.
f. d. luth. Theol. for 1862, p. 632 sqq. [reprinted in his
N. T. Studien p. 140 sq.; ef. esp. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.].*
Kavev, -dvos, 6, (kavva, Hebr. 73P a cane, reed; Arab.
glis a reed, and a spear, and a straight stick or staff
[ef. Vanitek, Fremdworter ete. p. 21]), prop. a rod or
straight piece of rounded wood to which any thing is
fastened to keep it straight; used for various purposes
(see Passow [or L. and S.]s. v.); a measuring rod, rule;
a carpenter’s line or measuring tape, Schol. on Eur.
Hippol. 468; hence i. q. 7d pérpov rod mndiqpyaros (Pol-
lux, Onom. 3, 30, 151), the measure of a leap, as in the
Olympic games; accordingly in the N. T. l. a
definitely bounded or fixed space within the limits of which
one’s power or influence is confined ; the province assigned
one; one’s sphere of activity: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. 2
824
tf
KaTrnNevaes
Metaph. any rule or standard, a principle or law of in-
vestigating, judging, living, acting, (often so in class.
Grk., as rod kadov, Eur. Hec. 602; épor tév dyaday x-
xavéves, Dem. pro cor. p. 324, 27): Gal. vi. 16; Phil. iii.
16 Ree. Cf. Credner, Zur Gesch. des Kanons (Hal.
1847), p. 6 sqq.; [esp. Westcott, The Canon of the N. T.,
App. A; briefly in B.D. s. v. Canon of Scripture; for
exx, of later usage see Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
Kamepvaotp or more correctly (with LT Tr WH (cf.
WH. App. p. 160; Scrivener, Introd. p. 561]) Kadap-
vaovp, (19) a village, and DIM} consolation; hence ‘the
village of consolation,’ [al. ‘village of Nachum’ (a
prop. name)]; Kamapvaovp, Ptol. 5, 16,4), 7, Capernaum
or Capharnaum, a flourishing city of Galilee (Mt. xi. 23 ;
Lk. x. 15), situated on the western shore of the Sea of
Galilee or Lake of Gennesaret (Jn. vi. 17, 24; hence 7
mapabudaccia, Mt. iv. 13), near the place where the Jor-
dan flows into the lake. Being nowhere mentioned in
the O. T. it seems to have been built after the exile [cf.
also B. D.s. v. Caphar]. Josephus mentions (b. j. 3, 10,
8) a fountain in Galilee called by the neighboring
residents Kapapvavovp, and (vita 72) ‘kapny Kepapyopny’,
and it is quite probable that he meant the town- we are
speaking of. It is mentioned in the N. T. (besides the
pass. already cited) in Mt. viii. 5; xvii. 24; Mk. i. 21; ii.
Tix. 33K. 1v92353 leevilel +7 neti lorarys 464 evi oos
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Vaihinger in Herzog vii. 369;
Furrer in Schenkel iii. 493 sq.; [the last named writ.
gives at length (see also Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Palaest.-
Vereins for 1879, p. 63 sqq.) his reasons for preferring
(contra Robinson, Sepp, ete.) to identify C. with Tell
Hum; so (after earlier writ.; cf. Arnaud p. 414), Winer
u. s.. Dr. Wilson, Lynch, Ritter, Delitzsch, Tristram
(Land of Israel, ed. 3, p. 428 sqq.) and more recently
Capt. Wilson (‘Our Work in Palestine’ p. 186 sq. and
‘Recovery of Jerusalem’ p. 266 sq. (292 sqq.)). But Con-
der (Tent Work in Palestine ii. 182 sqq.) argues fr.
Jewish author. in favor of Khan Minyeh; see B. D. Am.
eds cava
kamndevw ; (kdrndos, i.e. a. an inn-keeper, esp. a vint-
ner; b. a petty retailer, a huckster, pedler; cf. Sir.
XXvi. 29 od StxarwOnoerat Kamnhos amd duaprias) ; a.
to be a retailer, to peddle ; b. with acc. of the thing,
to make money by selling anything; to get sordid gain by
dealing in anything, to do a thing for base gain (oi ra pa-
Onpata treputyovres Kata médets Kal TwAOdVTES K. KATNAEL-
ovres, Plat. Prot. p. 313.d.; pdynv, Aeschyl. Sept. 551
(545); Lat. cauponari bellum, i. e. to fight for gain, trade
in war, Enn. ap. Cic. offic. 1, 12, 38; éraipay ré rijs Spas
avOos karndevovoar, Philo de caritat. § 14, ef. leg. ad
Gaium § 30, and many other exx. in other auth.). Hence
some suppose that camndevew Tr. Adyov rod God in 2 Co. ii.
17 is equiv. to to trade in the word of God, i. e. to try to
get base gain by teaching divine truth. But as ped-
lers were in the habit of adulterating their commodities
for the sake of gain (of kdmnXol cov picyovot Tov oivor
dart, Is. i. 22 Sept.; xdmndor, of Tov oivov Kepavvoiyres,
Pollux, onomast. 7, 193; of grdcoodor dmodiSovrat ra pee
KATTVOS
Onpara, domep of Kdmndot, Kepacduevot ye of moAXol Kai
doAdaarres kal kakoperpowvres, Lucian. Hermot. 59), kan
Aevew Te was also used as synonymous with to corrupt, to
adulterate (Themist. or. 21 p. 247 ed. Hard. says that
the false philosophers 76 Oewsrarov trav avOpwmriver ayabav
KiBdnrevew Te Kal aicxiveww x. Karnrevew); and most in-
terp. rightly decide in favor of this meaning (on account
of the context) in 2 Co. ii. 17, cf. Scdodv rdv Adyov Tod
Geod, ib. iv. 2. (Cf. Trench § Ixii.]*
katrvds, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], smoke: Rev. viii. 4; ix.
2sq.17,18; xiv.11; xv.8; xviii. 9,18; xix. 3; drpls
xarvod, A. V. vapor of smoke, Acts ii. 19 after Joel ii. 30
(iii--3).*
Karrafoxia, -as,7, Cappadocia, a region of Asia Minor,
bounded under the Roman empire on the N. by Pontus,
on the E. by Armenia Minor, on the S. by Cilicia and
Commagene, on the W. by Lycaonia and Galatia [BB.
DDFs -ivelleeAtetstii.19% 1 Ret. 35 1+
kapdia, -as, 7, poetic xkpadia and kapdin (in the latter
form almost always in Hom. [only at the beginning of a
line in three places; everywhere else by metathesis xpa-
din; Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.]), [fr. a root signifying
to quiver or palpitate; cf. Curtius § 39; Vaniéek p.
1097 (Etym. Magn. 491, 56 mapa rd kpadaiva, 75 celw-
detkimmtos yap 9 Kapdia); allied with Lat. cor; Eng.
heart}; Sept. for 39 and 139; the heart; 1. prop.
that organ in the animal body which is the centre of the
circulation of the blood, and hence was regarded as the
seat of physical life: 2S. xviii. 14; 2 K. ix. 24; Tob.
vi. 5 (4), 7 (6) sq.,17(16). Hence 2. univ. capdia
denotes the seat and centre of all physical and spiritual
life; and a. the vigor and sense of physical life (Ps.
ci. (cii.) 5; ornpicov tiv Kapdiav cov rope dprov, Judg.
xix. 5; to which add Ps. ciii. (civ.) 15): tpépew ras kap-
dias, Jas. v.53; éumimdGv ras xapdias tpodpis, Acts xiv. 17;
Bapeiv r. kapSias KpaimdaAn Kal peOn, Lk. xxi. 34; [but see
b. 6. below] ; b. the centre and seat of spiritual life,
the soul or mind, as it is the fountain and seat of the
thoughts, passions, desires, appetites, affections, purposes,
endeavors [so in Eng. heart, inner man, etc.]; a.
LIMVee WV ibeve Shenva. Otic Mic evai. 19% suki obese 11.0113
Vili. 12,15; Actsv.3; Ro. x. 9sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 25; 2 Co.
vi.11; Eph. vi.5; Col. iii. 22; 1 Pet. iii. 4,ete.; Plur.:
Mt. ix.4; Mk. ii.6,8; iv.15[RL txt. Tr mrg.]; Lk.i.
17; ii. 35; v. 22; [xxiv. 38 RGLmrg.; Acts vii. 51 LT
Tr WH txt.]; Ro. ii. 15; xvi.18; 2Co. iii. 2; Gal. iv. 6;
Phil. iv. 7; Eph. v.19 Lehm.; Heb. viii. 10 [T WH mrg.
sing.]; x. 16, etc. % xapdia is distinguished fr. 7d ordya or
fr. rd xeihea: Mt. xv. 8,18 sq.; Mk. vii. 6; 2 Co. vi. 11;
Ro. x. 8 sq.; fr. 7d mpdowmov: 2 Co. v. 12; 1 Th. ii. 17;
meptroui Kapdias, Ro. ii. 29; dmrepirynrot rH Kapdia, Acts
vii. 51 [LT Tr WH txt. -diars, WH mrg. gen. -dias, cf. B.
170 (148)]. of things done from the hearti.e. cordially or
sincerely, truly (without simulation or pretence) the foll.
phrases are used : é« xapdias (Arstph. nub. 86), Ro. vi. 17;
and L T Tr WH in 1 Pet. i. 22, where RG ex xaOapas xap-
Silas, asin 1 Tim.i. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 22° dé rév xapdidv, Mt.
xviii. 35 (dd xapdias edydpioros trois Oeois, Antonin. 2,
325
Kapdla
3)3 év ddn‘t. x. and €& dAns 7. x., Mt. xxii. 37; Mk. xii.
30, 33; Lk. x. 27, and Ree. in Acts viii. 37, (Deut. vi. 5;
xxvi. 165 Ps. exviii. (exix.) 34); per’ ddnOwis xapdias,
Heb. x. 22. epevvav ras xapSias, Ro. viii. 27; Rev. ii. 235
Soxipdgew, 1 Th. ii. 4; ywaoxew, Lk. xvi. 15, (erate, Jer.
xvil. 10; Ps. vii. 10); Suavotyery tHy x. (see diavoiye, 2),
Acts xvi. 14; jv 9 kapdia x. ) ux? pia, there was perfect
unanimity, agreement of heart and soul, Acts iv. 32;
TiOévar TL ev TH K. (293 and 35 5y piv, 1S. xxi. 12; Mal.’
ii. 2; Dan.i.8; reOévar év ornbecow, ev dpecir, ete., in
Hom.), to lay a thing up in the heart to be considered
more carefully and pondered, Lk. i. 66; to fiz in the heart
i. e. to purpose, plan, to do something, Acts v. 4 [A. V.
conceived in thy heart]; also eis r. xapStav [LT Tr WH
ev t. k.] foll. by the inf., Lk. xxi. 14; Bdddew eds thy k.
tus, foll. by tva, to put into one’s mind the design of
doing a thing, Jn. xiii. 2; also d8:ddvac foll. by an inf,
Rev. xvii. 17; dvaBaiver émt riv x. ris, foll. by an inf.,
the purpose to do a thing comes into the mind, Acts vii.
23; év rp xapdia joined to verbs of thinking, reflect-
ing upon, doubting, ete.: evOupetcOa, diadroyicerOa,
Mt. ix.4; Mk. ii.6,8; Lk. iii. 15; v. 22; déyew, eimeiv
(i393 78), to think, consider with one’s self, Mt. xxiv.
48; Lk. xii.45; Ro. x.6; Rev. xviii. 7, (Deut. viii. 17;
ix. 4); oupBadrrew, to revolve in mind, Lk. ii. 19; dca-
kpiver@a, to doubt, Mk. xi. 23; diadoyopot avaBaivovor,
of persons in doubt, Lk. xxiv. 88 [RGLmrg. plur.];
avaBaiver tt emt Kapdiav, the thought of a thing enters the
mind, 1 Co. ii. 9. B. spec. of the understanding, the
faculty and seat of intelligence (often so in Hom. also [ef.
Nédgelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 319 sq.; Zezschwitz, Pro-
fangriicitit u.s.w. pp. 25 sq. 50]; “cor domicilium sapi-
eniiae,” Lact. de opif. dei c. 10, cf. Cic. Tuse. 1, 9; HDs
1 K. x. 2; Job xii. 8; xvii. 4, ete.; [cf. Meyer on Eph.
i. 18 and reff.]): Ro. i. 21; 2 Co. iv. 6; Eph. i. 18 [Rece.
dtavolas]; 2 Pet. i. 19; cumevar tH kapdia, Mt. xiii. 15;
Acts xxviii. 27; voeiv 77 x. Jn. xii. 40. of the dulness
of a mind incapable of perceiving and understanding
divine things the foll. expressions oceur: érayivOn 7 kK.
Mt. xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10); mapovv rh
capdiav, Jn. xii. 40; merwpopervn xapdia, MK. vi. 52; viii.
17; 4 wopwots tas x. Mk. iii. 5; Eph. iv. 18; Bpadds 7 k.
slow of heart, Lk. xxiv. 25; «kadAuvppa emt tiv K. Keirat, 2
Co. iii. 15. -y. of the will and character: dyvitew kxap-
Stas, Jas. iv. 8; xaOapifew ras x. Acts xv. 9 peppartt-
opevor tas K. Heb. x. 22; capdia edOeia [cf. W. 32], Acts
viii. 21; wovnpd, Heb. iii. 12 [ef. B. § 132, 24; W. 194
(183)]; dperavdnros, Ro. ii. 5; yeyupvacpévn meove€ias,
2 Pet. ii. 14; ornpi¢ew ras x. 1 Th. iii. 13; BeBacody, in
pass., Heb. xiii. 9; oxAnpovew, Heb. iii. 8; 9 éxivoia ris
x. Acts viii. 22; af Bova révx. 1 Co. iv. 5; mpoatpeta Oat
TH x. 2 Co. ix. 7; xpivewy (to determine) and €Spaios ev rH
x. 1 Co. vii. 37. 8. of the soul so far forth as it 1s affected
and stirred in a bad way or good, or of the soul as the seat
of the sensibilities, affections, emotions, desires, appetites,
passions: ) kapdia Katopern jy, of the soul as greatly and
peculiarly moved, Lk. xxiv. 32; ai ému@upia rav Kapdiar,
Ro. i. 24 ; ornpitew ras x. of the cultivation of constancy
KapdloyvOorTns
and endurance, Jas. v. 8. in ref. to good-will and love:
eyew tua év TH k. to have one in one’s heart, of constant re-
membrance and steadfast affection, Phil. i. 7 (‘fe tamen
in toto pectore semper habet ’ Ovid. trist. 5, 4, 24); elvae
év ty «. Twés, to be cherished in one’s heart, to be loved
by one perpetually and unalterably, 2 Co. vii. 3; etddoxia
ths x. Ro. x. 1. in ref. to joy and pleasure: nippavén 7
x. Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9); xapnoera 1k. Jn. XV.
22; dp kata THy K. TOU Geod, i. €. in whom God delights,
Acts xiii. 22; of the pleasure given by food, Acts xiv. 17
({W. 156 (148) note] see 2 a. above). in ref. to grief,
pain, anguish, etc.: 7 Avan memAnpwxe THY K. Jn. Xvi. 6;
6dv0vn 7h Kapdia pou, Ro. ix. 2; 9 x. rapdooerar, Jn. xiv. 1,
27; ovvoxy xapdias, 2 Co. ii.4; Bapetv r. kapdias pepipvais
Biorekais, LI. xxi. 34 (cf. 2a. above]; duampiopat 7H x. Acts
vii. 543 cuvrerpyspevos tiv x. Lk. iv. 18 R Lbr.; karevoyy-
cay rh x. Acts ii. 37 [LT Tr WII ry «.]; cvvOpimreny rip
x. Actsxxi.13. €. of a soul conscious of good or bad deeds
(our conscience): 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq. (Mecl. vii. 22; so no.
Job xxvii. 6; 9 kapdia mardooce twd, 1S. xxiv. 6; 25S.
xxiv. 10). 3. used of the middle or central or inmost
part of any thing, even though inanimate: ths yas (which
some understand of Hades, others of the sepulchre), Mt.
xii. 40 (ris Oaddoons, Jon. ii. 4 for 29; and for the same
ev péo@ Oaddoons, Ex. xv. 8,19; add Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer. ]
193; rhs KAeWvdpas, Aristot. probl. 16, 8 [al. cwdia]). CE.
Beck, Bibl. Seelenlehre, ch. iii. § 20 sqq. p. 64 sqq.; De-
litzsch, Bibl. Psychologie (Leipz. 1861) iv. § 12 p. 248 sqq.
[also in Herzog 2, vi. 57 sqq.J; Oehler in Herzog vi. p.
15 sqq- [also in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) § 71]; Wit-
tichen in Schenkel iii. 71 sq.
Kapd.o-yvaorys, -ov, 6, (Kapdia, yyaorns), knower of
hearts: Actsi. 24; xv. 8. (Heel. writ. [W. 100 (94)].)*
Kédpros [cf. W. p. 51], -ov, 6, Carpus, the name of an
unknown man: 2 Tim. iv. 13.*
kapirés, -ov, 6, [cf. Lat. carpo; A-S. hearf-est (harvest
i.e. the. ingathering of crops); Curtius § 42]; Hebr.
79; fr. Hom. down; fruit; 1. prop.: the fruit of
trees, Mt. xii. 335 xxi. 19; Mk.xi.14; Lk. vi. 44; xiii.
6sq.; of vines, Mt. xxi. 34; Mk. xii. 2; Lk.xx.10; 1 Co.
ix. 7; of the fields, Lk. xii. 17; Mk. iv.29; 2 Pim. ii. 6;
[Jas. v. 7]; Pdraordvew, Jas. v. 18; rocetv, to bear fruit
(after the Hebr. 95 nvy [see moréw, I. 1 e.]), Mt. iii.
10; vil. 17-19 ; xiii. 26; Lk. ili. 9; vi. 435 viii. 83 xiii. 9;
Rev. xxii. 2; d:ddvar, Mt. xiii. 8; Mk. iv. 7 sq.; fépew,
Mt. vii. 18 T WH; Jn. xii. 24; xv. 2,4 sq.; (trop. xv. 8,
16); dmodiddvar, to yield fruit, Rev. xxii. 2; to render
(pay) the fruit, Mt. xxi.41; by a Hebraism, 6 xaprés ris
kowXlas, i. e. the unborn child, Lk. i. 42 (joa 5, Deut.
xxvill. 4, where Sept. ra exyova rs KowAlas); Tis dadvos
the fruit of one’s loins, i. e. his progeny, his posterity,
Acts ii. 30 (Gen. xxx. 2; Ps. exxvi. (exxvii.) 3; cxxxi.
(cxxxil.) 11; Mic. vi. 7); ef. W. 33 (82).
taph. that which originates or comes from something ; an
effect, result ; a. 1. q. &pyov, work, act, deed: with gen.
of the author, tod mvevparos, Gal. v.22; rod gotés, Eph.
v. 9 (Ree. r. mvetparos) ; ris Sikavoovwns, Phil. i. 11 [ef.
b. below]; of Christian charity, i. e. benefit, Ro. xv. 28;
326
2. Me-.
KaTa
kaprov rodvv déepew, to accomplish much (for the propa-
gation of Christianity and its furtherance in the souls of
men), Jn. xv. 8, 16; used of men’s deeds as exponents
of their hearts [cf. W. 372 (348) ], Mt. vii. 16, 20; dya-
Ool, Jas. iii. 17; kaprot tis Bac. rod Geod, deeds required
for the attainment of salvation in the kingdom of God,
Mt. xxi. 43; ovetv xaprovs agious THs petavoias, to exhibit
deeds agreeing with a change of heart, Mt. iii. 8; Lk. iii.
8, (cf. d&a THs peravolas épya mpdooew, Acts xxvi. 20).
b. advantage, profit, utility: Phil. i. 22; iv. 17; €yew Kap-
nov, to get fruit, Ro. i. 13; vi. 21 sq.; trys dikacocvyns,
benefit arising from righteousness [al. make it gen. of
apposition, W. § 59, 8 a.], Heb. xii. 11; which consists in
righteousness (gen. of appos.), Jas. iii. 18 [ef. Phil. i. 11
in a. above, and Meyer ad loc.; Prov. xi. 30; Amos vi.
12): c. by a Hebraism of xaprot tay xetdéwy, praises,
which are presented to God as a thank-offering: Heb.
xiii. 15 (Hos. xiv. 2; Prov. xii. 14; xxix. 49 (xxxi. 31)).
Cf. W. 33 (32) note 1. a. cuvayew xaprov eis Conv
ai@moy, to gather fruit (i. e. a reaped harvest) into life
eternal (as into a granary), is used in fig. discourse of
those who by their labors have fitted souls to obtain eter-
nal life, Jn. iv. 36.*
Kaptro-opew, -@; 1 aor. exapmopdpynoa; pres. pass. ptep.
Kaprropopovpevos ; (kaprodépos, q.v-); tobear fruit; (Vulg.
Sructifico; Colum., Tertull.) ; a. prop. ([-Xen., Aris-
tot. ], Theophr. de hist. plant. 3, 3, 7; Diod. 2,49): xép-
tov, Mk. iv. 28 (pura, Sap. x. 7). b. metaph. to bear,
bring forth, deeds: thus of men who show their knowl-
edge of religion by their conduct, Mt. xiii. 23; Mk. iv.
20; Lk. viii. 15; ev Gor RG LTr mrg. WH mrg. & [cf.
B.103 (90), see ets, 4 a.]) rpidkovra ete. sc. kaprois, Mk.
iv. 20 T Tr txt. WH txt. [see ev, 1.5 f.]; ev mavri épyo
ayade, Col. i. 10; revi (dat. commodi).to one who reaps
the fruit, i.e. fruit acceptable to him, 76 6e@, Ro. vii. 4 ;
T@ Oavare, i.e. (without the fig.) to produce works re-
warded with death, Ro. vii. 5; in mid. to bear fruit of
one’s self, Col. i. 6 [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
kaptro-pdpos, -ov, (kaprds and depw), fruit-bearing,
Jruitful, productive: Acts xiv. 17. (Pind., Xen., Theo-
phr., Diod., Sept.) *
Kaptepéw, -@: 1 aor. exaprépnoa; (kaprepds [fr. kdpros
i.e. kpdros, ‘strong’ ]) ; to be steadfast: Heb. xi. 27 [A.V.
endured}. (Job ii. 9; Sir. ii. 2; xii. 15; often in Grk.
writ. fr. Soph. and Thuc. down.) [Comp.: mpoo-xap-
Tepea. | *
kapdos, -eos (-ous), 7d, (fr. dpe to contract, dry up,
wither), a dry stalk or twig, a straw; chaff, [A.V. mote]:
Mt. vii. 3-5; Lk. vi. 41 sq., where it figuratively denotes
a smaller fault. (Gen. viii. 11; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down.) *
kar, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tdf.
Proleg. p. 95; cf. W.§ 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 146°],
a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction
from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined
with the gen. and the acc.
I. With the GeniTIvE (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B.
§ 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: kara
KATA 3
Tov kpyuvod, Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; KaTéxeev
kata THs Keadns (so that it flowed down from his head
[ef. W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to
omit kara with LT Tr WH; see katrayew), Mk. xiv. 3;
hence xara kefahjjs (a veil hanging down from his head)
exov, 1 Co. xi. 4 (LA. V. having his head covered] cf. ka-
taréracpa [or rather kdduppa (q. v.), but see éxo I.1b.}).
b. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W.
381 (357) note; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Crete]; trop. 4
kuta Badous mrwxeia reaching down into the depth, i.e.
deep or extreme poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2 (cf. Strabo 9, 5
p- 419 e€ori 7d pavtetoy dvtpov Kothov kata BdOovs). Cc.
used of motion or extension through a space from top to
bottom ; hence: through, throughout: in the N. T. [and in
Luke’s writ.; B. § 147, 20] everywh. with the adj. &os,
as ka Gdns Ths meptxopov Ths "lovdaias, ris "Idmmnys, Lk.
iv. 14; xxiii. 5; Actsix. 31; x. 37, (Sveomdpyoav card TAs
vncou, Polyb. 3,19, 7; éaxedacpévor kara Ths Xopas, 1, 17,
10; 3, 76,10; jy mapaBaiveww tas dpparotpoyias, dA
kar’ avtay teva, Ael. v. h. 2, 27). 2. metaph. a.
after verbs of swearing, adjuring, (the hand being,
as it were, placed down upon the thing sworn by [cf.
Bnhdy. p. 238; Kiihner § 433 fin.]), by: Mt. xxvi. 63;
Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Is. xlv. 23; 2 Chr. xxxvi.13; Judith i.
2 Demso53, 7; 554, 23). b. against (prop. down
upon [W. 382 (358)]; Hebr.5y): opp. to trép, Mk. ix.
40; 2Co. xiii. 8; Ro. viii. 31; opp. to pera, Mt. xii. 30;
Lk. xi. 23; after émiOupeiv, Gal. v. 173 eimeiv movnpov
(pjpa), Mt.v. 11; Aareiv, Acts vi. 13; Jude 15; paprupia,
Mk. xiv. 55; Mt. xxvi. 59; paprupeiv, 1 Co. xv. 15 [here
many take kx. i. q. with regard to, of; cf. De Wette ad loc. ;
Lob.ad Phryn. p. 272]; Wevdouaprupeiv, MK. xiv. 56 sq. ;
yoyyutew, Mt. xx.11 (Ex. xv. 24 Alex.) ; d:ddoxew, Acts
xxi. 28; pevderOa, Jas. iii. 14 (Xen. apol. 13) ; cvpBovdAcov
AaBetv or rocetv, Mt. xxvii. 1; Mk. ili. 6; alretoOai 71, Acts
xxv. 3,15; after verbs of accusing, etc.: éyew 71, Mt.
v. 23; Mk. xi. 25; Rev. ii. 4, 14, 20; carnyopety, Lk. xxiii.
14; xarnyopia, Jn. xviii. 29 [Tdf. om. kara]; éyxadeiv, Ro.
Vili. 33; évruyydvew twi, Ro. xi. 2; add, Acts xxiv. 1;
xxv. 2; Jas. v.93 76 yetpdypador, Col. ii. 14; kpior rovetv,
Jude 15; after verbs of rebelling, fighting, pre-
vailing: Mt. x. 35; xii. 25; Acts xiv. 2; 1 Co. iv. 6;
2Co. x. 53; 1 Pet. ii. 11; [Rev. xii. 7 Rec.]; ioxvew, Acts
xix. 16; efovoiav éyew, Jn. xix. 11.
II. With the Accusative; cf. W. § 49d.; Buhdy. p.
239 sqq. 1b, Ot IPNEWGRE a. of the place through
which anything is done or is extended (prop. down
through; opp. to dvd, up through): Ka? odny thy modu
ayjouroewv, Lk. viii. 39; expépew kata ras mareias, Acts
v.i5[RG]; add, Lk. ix. 6; xiii. 22; xv. 14; Acts viil.
1; xi. 1; xv. 23; xxi. 21; xxiv. 5,12; xxvii. 2; rovs cara
ra 26 (throughout Gentile lands) mdvras "Iovdaious, Acts
xxi. 21, cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. i. 1; Kara THY OOov, along
the way i. e. on the journey [W. 400 (374) note 1], Lk.
x. 4; Acts viii. 36; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; along (Lat. secun-
dum or praeter [R. V. off']), méAayos 76 kara thy Kurtxiay,
Acts xxvii. 5. b. of the place to which one is brought
(down): yevopevos [Tr WH om. y.] xara tov romov [ea-
7 KaTa
dav ete.], Lk. x. 32 [ef. Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad
loc.]; €A@ovres kara tiv Muciay, Acts xvi. 7; kara rip
Kvidov, Acts xxvii. 7; kar avtov, (came) to him, i. e. to
the place where he was lying, Lk. x. 33. c. of direc-
tion; towards: AiBin kata Kuprny, that Libya which
lay towards Cyrene, i. e. Libya of Cyrene (i. e. the chief
city of which was Cyrene), Acts ii. 10; Bdérewv, to look, lie
towards (see Brérw, 3), Acts xxvii. 12; mopevecOat card
HeonpuBpiay, Acts vill. 26; cata oxomdv, towards the goal,
my eye on the goal, Phil. iii. 14. against (Lat. adversus
w. the ace.) ; over against, opposite: kata mpdowror, to
the face, Gal. ii. 11 (see mpdc@mov, 1 a.); i. q. present,
Acts xxv. 16 [A. V. face to face]; 2Co.x.1; w. gen. of
pers. added, before the face of, in the presence of, one:
Lk. ii. 31; Acts iii. 13; ra xara mpoocwmoy, the things
that are open to view, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7; xar’
épOarpovs, before the eyes, Gal. iii. 1; here, too, ace. to
some [cf. W. 400 (3874) note 2] belongs xara Gedv, Ro.
vill. 27, but it is more correctly referred te 3 ¢. a. be-
low. d. of the place where: ka7’ oixov (upp. to
€v T@ lepd), at home, privately [W. 400 (374) note 4],
Acts ii. 463; v. 42. e. of that which so joins itself
to one thing as to separate itself from another; our for,
by: kar idtay, apart, see tdios, 2; Kab’ éavrdy, alone (by
himself), Acts xxviii. 16; Jas. ii. 17 [R. V. an itself], (2
Mace. xiii. 13; of ca@’ avrovs “EXAnves, Thue. 1, 138; of
Botwtol Ka avrov's, Diod. 13, 72; other exx. are given
by Alberti, Observy. ete. p. 293; Loesner, Observv. e
Philone p. 460 sq.); yew te ka@’ éavrdy, to have a thing
by and to one’s self, i. e. to keep it hidden in one’s mind,
Ro. xiv. 22 (Joseph. antt. 2, 11, 1; Heliod. 7,16; [cf. W.
401 (375) note1]); hence, of that which belongs to
some pers. or thing: xara riv obcav éxkAnotav, belonging
to [A. V. in] the church that was there, Acts xill. 1; 9
exkAnola Kar’ oikdv Tivos, belonging to one’s household
(see éxkAnaia, 4 b.aa.); hence it forms a periphrasis —
now for the gen., as ra kata Iovdalous €6n (i. q. Tv “iov-
daiwv), Acts xxvi. 3; now for the possessive pron., of
ka@’ ipas womrat, your own poets, Acts xvii. 28 [here
WHure. caf jas, see their Intr. § 404]; vépou rov
xaé’ ipas, [a law of your own], Acts xviii. 15; 76 kar’ ewe
mpdOvuov, my inclination, Ro. i. 15 [see mpd@upos]; 4) Kal?
ipas riots, Eph. i. 15, (4) kata Tov Tipavvov wpdtns TE Kat
dvvapes, Diod. 14, 12; péxpe trav kal’ nuas xpovev, Dion.
Hal. antt. 2,1; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 21 p. 88; a
throng of exx. fr. Polyb. may be seen in Schweighaeuser,
Lex. Polyb. p. 323 sq.; [ef. W. 154 (146); 400 (374)
note 2; esp. B. § 132, 2]). 2. of Time [cf. W. 401
(374) ]; during, about; Lat. tempore : Kar €kelvov OF ToOU-
rov Tov kapdv, Acts xii. 1; xix. 23; Ro. ix. 9; Heb. ix. 9
[RG]; «ara 7d adrd, at the same time, together, Acts
xiv. 1 (see avrds, TIL. 1); xara 76 pecovixriov, Acts xvi.
25; Kara pécov ths vuxtds, Acts xxvii. 27; [possibly also
kara peonuBpiay, al noon, Acts vill. 26 (see peonpuBpia, b.) }-
KaTa Kalpdov, Se KaLpos, 2 a. 5 kar dpyds (Hat. 3, 153), in
the beginning (of things), Heb. 1.10; xara riy jpepav Tow
metpacpod, Heb. iii. 8 [as the Sept. in this pass. have ren-
dered the prep. 3 in the context by as (€v 7 mapamixpa
«ata
ope, Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8), some would take it and xara here
i.q. like asin the day etc.; Vulg. secundum]; kata nav oaf-
Baroy, Acts xiii. 27; xv. 21; xviii. 4; xa’ Exaornv juepar,
Heb. iii. 13; xara pijva (€va) éxaorov, Rev. xxii. 2; kar’
évap, during a dream, see dvap. 3. it denotes re f-
erence, relation, proportion, of various sorts; a.
distributively, indicating a succession of things fol-
lowing one another [W. 401 (374); B.§ 147,20]; a.
in ref. to place: kata modu, in every city, (city by city,
from city to city), Lk. viii. 1,4; Acts xv. 21; xx. 23; Tit.
i.5, (Thue. 1,122); «a7’ éxxAnoiay, in every church, Acts
xiv. 23; w. the plur., cara wodews, Lk. xiii. 22; kara ras
kdpas, Lk. ix. 6 (Hdt. 1, 96); xara rérovus, Mt. xxiv. 7;
Mk. xiii. 8; Lk. xxi.11; xara tas cuvaywyds, in every
synagogue, Acts xxii. 19; [cf. card Tr. oixous elomopevdpe-
vos, Acts Viii. 3 ]. B. inref. totime: kar éros, yearly,
year by year, Lk. ii. 41; also car’ emaurdy (see émaurds) ;
Ka@ nsépav etc., see nucpa, 2 p. 278°; Kara play caBBdrov
[R G -rwv], on the first day of every week, 1 Co. xvi. 2;
kata €oprny, at any and every feast, Mt. xxvii. 15; Mk.
xv. 6; Lk. xxiii. 17 [Rec.; ef. B. § 133, 26. Others un-
derstand the phrase in these pass. (contextually) at or
during (see 2 above) the feast, viz. the Passover; cf. W.
401 (374)]. sy. univ.: ka@ &va ravres, all one by one,
successively, 1 Co. xiv. 31, see more fully in eis, 4 ¢.;
kara 6vo, by two, 1 Co. xiv. 27; kara éxarov k. Kata TevTH-
xovra, by hundreds and by fifties, Mk. vi. 40 LT Tr WH;
kata pepos, severally, singly, part by part, Heb. ix. 5
(Hdt. 9, 25; Xen. anab. 3, 4,22); kar’ dvoua, by name
i. e. each by its own name (Vulg. nominatim [or per
nomen]): Jn. x.3; 3Jn.15 (14); cf. Herm. ad Vig. p.
858 sq. b. equiv. to the Lat. ratione habita alicuius
rei vel personae; as respects; with regard to; in reference
to; so far as relates to; as concerning; [W. 401 (375)]:
kaTad oapka or kata TH a., as to the flesh (see odpé [esp.
2pball) Oe 3s BXn3 5.0.5 lu Oont. 26 saxeul 9 suo) Oost Sis
oi Kipioe Kara o. (Luther well, die leiblichen Herren), in
earthly relations, acc. to the arrangements of society,
Eph. vi. 5; xara ro evayy., kata TH exdoynv, Ro. xi. 28;
add Ro. i. 4; vii. 22; Phil. iii. 5 sq.; Heb. ix.9; ra ard
Twa, one’s affairs, one’s case, Acts xxiv. 22; xxv. 14;
Eph. vi. 21; Phil. i. 12; Col. iv. 7, (and very often in
class. Grk.) ; kara mdvra tpdrop, in every way, in every re-
spect, Ro. iii. 2; the opp. cara pndéva rpdrov, in no wise,
2 Th. ii. 3; kara mara, in all respects, in all things, Acts
xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20, 22; Heb. ii.17; iv. 15, (Thue. 4,
81). c. according to, agreeably to; in reference to
agreement or conformity to a standard, in various ways
[W. 401 (375)]; a. according to anything as a stand-
ard, agreeably to: mepuraretv xara tt, Mk. vii. 5; Ro. viii. 1
[Rec.], 4; xiv. 15; 2 Th. iii. 6; Eph. ii. 2; ¢jv card, Acts
xxvi. 5; Ro. viii. 12 sq.; mopeteoOat, 2 Pet. iii. 3; dmodt-
Govat revi, Mt. xvi. 27, etc. (see drodiSam, [esp. 4]);
AapBavew, 1 Co. iii. 8; so with many other verbs a thing
is said to be done or to occur ard, as in Lk. ii. 27, 29;
Jn. vii. 245 Col. ii. 8; iii. 10; 1 Tim. i.18; Heb. vii. 15;
viii. 5,9; 1 Jn. v. 14, ete.; (on the phrase kar’ avOpwrov,
see dvOpwros, esp. 1 c.; [ef. e. below; W. 402 (376)]) ;
328
KATA
kara Thy ypapny, tas ypads, Jas. ii. 8; 1 Co. xv. 3 8q.;
Kata TO ‘yeypappevov, 2 Co. iv. 138; card 76 eipnuévov, Ro.
iv. 18; xara tov vopov, Lk. ii. 39; Jn. xviii. 31; xix. 7;
Heb. ix. 22; xara 76 evayy. prov, Ro. ii. 16; xvi. 255 2 Tim.
ii. 8, cf. 1 Tim. i. 11; kara 7d @puopévov, Lk. xxii. 22;
cal? dpoiwow Oeo0, Jas. ili. 9; xara Adyoy rightly, justly,
[A. V. reason would ete.], Acts xviii. 14; xara twa, agree-
ably to the will of any one, as pleases him, [W. 401 sq.
(375)]: so xara Oeov, Ro. viii. 27 [ef. 1 ec above]; 2 Co.
vii. 9, 11; kara Xpiorov Incodv, Ro. xv. 5; kara xvptov,
2 Co. xi. 17; xara tov xaOapiopor, after the manner of
purifying, as the rite of purification prescribed, Jn. ii.
6; of xara odpka bvtes, who bear, reflect, the nature of
the flesh, i. q. of capxixol, and of xara mvetpa dvtes i. q. of
mvevpartkot, Ro. viii. 5; cata ti yyaoopuar; in accordance
with what criterion i. e. by what sign shall I know? Lk.
i. 18. Here belongs the use of the preposition in the
titles of the records of the life of Christ: evayy. (which
word codd. Sin. and Vat. omit) xara Mar@atoy, Mdpkxoy,
etc., as Matthew ete. composed or wrote (it). This use
of the prep. was not primarily a mere periphrasis for
the gen. (MarOaiov, etc., see II. 1 e. above), but indicated
that the same subject had been otherwise handled by
others, cf. 4 mada Siabnen kata Tovs EBSopnkovta
(in tacit contrast not only to the Hebrew text, but also
to the Greek translations made by others); of topyy-
pariopol of Kata Neepiav, 2 Mace. ii. 13 [see Grimm ad
loc.].. Subsequently xara with an acc. of the writer came
to take the place of the gen., as 7 kata Mwtcéa revrdrev-
xos in Epiphanius [haer. 8,4. Cf. W. 402 (375); B.
3; 157 (187); and see, further, Soph. Lex. s. v. evayyeAtov,
Jas. Morison, Com. on Mt., Intr. § 4]. B. in proportion
to, according to the measure of: xapiopata kata THY yap
tiv Sobeicay jpiv dvapopa, Ro. xii. 6; xara 7rd pérpov, 2
Co: x. 13; Eph. iv. 7; «ara tiv oxAnpdrnra cov, Ro. ii. 5;
kara Tov xpovov, Mt. ii. 16; éxaor@ xara thy idiay ddvapu,
Mt. xxv.15; without the art. cara Svvapuv, 2 Co. viii. 3
(opp. to trép Svvayw, as Hom. Il. 3, 59 car’ aicav, ovd
imép aicav); xa@ dcov, by so much as, inasmuch as, Heb.
lil. 3; vii. 20; ix. 27; xara rocodro, by so much, Heb. vii.
22. y. used of the cause; through, on account of,
Jirom, owing to, (in accordance with i. e. in consequence
of, by virtue of ) [W. 402 (376) ]: xara macav airiay, [ for
every cause], Mt. xix. 3; kara rHv yap Tov Beod, 1 Co.
ili. 10; 2 Th. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 9, (kara tiv tod Beod mpo-
vorav, Joseph. antt. 20, 8,6); Kara xdpuv, Ro. iv. 16; also
opp. to cara dpeiAnua [R. V. as of... as of], Ro. iv. 4;
of kata vow kAddou, the natural branches, Ro. xi. 21 [cf.
B. 162 (141)]; 9 xara hiow aypiédaws, the natural wild
olive tree, ib. 24; 9 xara miotw dixatocvrn, righteousness
proceeding from faith, Heb. xi. 7; add, Ro. viii. 28; ix.
11; xi. 5; xvi. 25.sq.; 1 Co. xii. 3; 2.Co. xiii. 10; Gal.
PAR MOUEWL)S 1D)a}ae re GH Vey Sh Ny NE ibe 7G Til. NG. ODE Oral ne
1152973) Rhian 20 seats 21 iv. A Ooi neatcml 2m One
2 Tim. i. 8 sq.; Heb. ii. 4; vii. 16; Tit.i.3; 1 Pet.i.3; 2
Pet. iii. 15. adverbial phrases [W. § 51, 2g.]: kar’ éfou-
clay [with authority], Mk.i. 27; kar dvaykny, kata éxov-
avy (q. v), [of necessity, of free will], Philem. 14; xara
KATA
yreouw, 1 Pet. ili. 7; kar eriyvoo, Ro. x. 2 [ef. W. 403
(376)]; xara &yvoay, [in ignorance], Acts iii. 17. 8.
of likeness; us, like as: ovvredéca... Stadnkny Kawny,
ov kara thy dcaOnKny krd. Heb. viii. 8 sq. (1 K. xi. 10); so
with the acc. of a pers. [cf. under a. above], Gal. iv. 28;
1 Pet. i. 15; xara Oeov, after the image of God, Eph. iv.
24; xpiveo@ai kata avOpwrous, (iv Kata Oedv, to be judged
as it is fit men should be judged, to live as God lives, 1
Pet. iv. 6. Hence it is used e. of the mode in
which a thing is done; of the quality: ddpes of kar’
€foxnv ths modews, the principal men of the city, Acts
XXxv. 23; ka trroperny epyov ayabod, i. q. dropevovres év
€py@ adya6é, [by constancy in well-doing], Ro. ii. 7; esp.
in adverbial phrases: xara radra in [or after] the same
{or this] manner, Lk. vi. 23 (Ltxt.T Tr WH x. 7a aira,
L.mrg. x. raira), [26 (edd. as before)]; Lk. xvii. 30 (T
Tr WH x. ra aird, GLk. raita); Kal irepBodny, Ro. vii.
13; 1 Co. xii. 31, ete., [ef. W. 466 (434); B. 96 (84)];
cata tiotw i. q. meotevovres [A. V. in faith; ef. W. 403
(376)], Heb. xi. 13; xara cvyyvepny, od car’ émirayny, by
way of concession, not by way of commandment, 1 Co.
vii. 6, cf. 2 Co. viii. 8; xara xparos, Acts xix. 20; ka
opowornta, Heb. iv. 15; on the phrase xara dvépwrov see
@& perros, 1 c. [ef. a. above]. d. of the end aimed
at; the goal to which anything tends; (Lat. ad
[W. 402 sq. (376)]): kar énayyeXiay Cofs, to proclaim
life, 2 Tim. i. 1 [but see émayyedia, 1]; kar’ edoéBetar,
tending to godliness, [1 Tim. vi. 3; Tit. i. 1] (see etoé-
Gea; [yet al. refer these exx., and that which follows, to
the use set forth above, in c.]); xara rior, to awaken,
produce faith, Tit. i. 1, (exx. of this use of xara fr. Hom.,
Hdt., Thuc., Xen., may be seen in Passow s. v. II. 3 p.
1598°; [L. and 8S. s. v. B. III. 1]; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p.
632; Kihner ii. p. 412); many refer to this head also
kar’ driuiay (to my dishonor [W. 402 sq. (376)]) A€ya,
2 Co. xi. 21 (kara thy tinny Tov Geod TovTo moray, to the
honor of God, Joseph. antt. 3, 11, 4); but see dripia.
III. In Composition xara denotes, 1. from,
down from, from a higher to a lower place: with special
ref. to the terminus from which, as caraBaive, caraSiBalo,
ete. [cf. W. 431 (401 sq.)]; with more prominent ref. to
the lower terminus (down), as ckaraBa\)o, katararéw, etc.
[ef. W.u.s.]; also of the situation or local position,
as katdkerpat, KabevOw, KataTiOnpt, KabiC@, etc. from top
to bottom, metaph. of things done with care, thoroughly,
as katapavOayw, kabopdw, etc. 2. in succession, in
course: xaOe&ns; one part after another, xaruprifw, xatev-
Oivw, etc. 3. under, underneath: xaraxOovos; the
idea of putting under resides in verbs denoting victory,
rule, ete., over others, as karaduvagrev@, KaTakupleva, Ka-
tefovouitw, katadovAdw; likewise in-verbs naming that
with which anything is covered, concealed, overwhelmed,
etc., as xaraxadimr@, xatadiOitw, xatacdpayito, Kara-
oxid(@, kararxvvw, (where the Germ. uses the prefix tiber
[Eng. over], as tiberschatten, tiberdecken, or the syllable
be, as beschatten, besiegeln); also in adjj. denoting an
abundance of that with which a thing is filled up or as
it were covered up; see below in xareidwdos. 4.
829
eaTaBarr\w
like the Germ. ver-, zer-, it denotes separation, dissolu-
tion, in verbs of wasting, dissolving, ete., as xara-
KOMT@, KATAYVU"L, KATAKAi@, KATaKAdw, KaTAAV@, KaTAKifa,
5. i. q. after, behind:
6. used
of proportion and distribution, as katakAnpodoréw,
7. of hostility, against ete.:
katabikal@, Katakpive, Katadaréa, kataywooke, ete. Cf.
Herm. ad Vig. p. 637 sqq. [On the constr. of verbs com-
pounded w. kara, see W. u.s.; ef. B. 165 (143 sq.).]
kata-Baive; impf. 3 pers. plur. caréBavov; fut. karaBy-
copa; 2 aor. katéBnv, impv. cardByGe (Mt. xxvii. 40; Lk.
xix. 5; Jn.iv.49; Acts x. 20) and xardBa (Mk. xv. 30
[RG (where LT Tr WH ptep. xaraBds) ], see dvaBaivw) ;
pf. xaraBéBn«a; [fr. Hom. on]; Sept. for 117; to go down,
come down, descend ; 1. of persons; a. prop.:
absol., the place from which one has come down being
evident from the context, caraBas éorn, Lk. vi. 17 (cf.
12) ; xvii. 31 [foll. here by inf., so Mt. xxiv. 17]; Lk. xix.
5 sq.; Jn. v. 7; Acts xx.10; Eph. iv. 10; foll. by dé w.
gen. of the place, Mt. viii. 1; xiv. 29; xvii. 9 Rec.; xxvii.
40,42; Mk. ix.9[LTrmrg. WH txt. ék]; xv. 30, 32; by
ex w. gen. of place, Mt. xvii. 9 GL T Tr WH [see ék, I.
3]; by eis w. ace. of place, Mk. xiii. 15 [RGLbr. Tr;
al. om. eis etc. ]; Acts vill. 38; [Ro.x.7]; Eph.iv.9. b.
to come down, as fr. the temple at Jerusalem, fr. the city
of Jerusalem; also of celestial beings coming down to
earth: absol., Mt. iii. 16; Lk. ii.51; x. 31; Jn. iv. 47,
49,51; Acts [vii. 34]; viii. 15; x. 20; [xxiii 10]; xxiv.
1, 22; foll. by a6 w. gen. of the place, Mk. iii. 22; Lk.
x. 80; Acts xxv. 7; 1 Th. iv. 16; é&« rod ovpavod, Mt.
Xxvill. 2; Jn. 1.32; iii. 13; vi. 33, 38[RG; al. awd], 41
sq. 50 sq. 58, [on these pass. cf. B. 297 (255)]; Rev. x.
1; xviii. 1; xx. 1. foll. by e@s w. ace. of place, Lk. x. 30;
Xvilil. 14; Jn. ii. 12; Acts vii. 155 xiv. 25; xvi. 85; xviii.
22; xxv.63; by émi w. ace. of place, Jn. vi. 16; w. acc.
of the pers., Mk. i. 10 [RGLmrg.]; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. i.
33, 51 (52); by ev w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 4 [R L] (see
év, I. 7); by mpés w. ace. of pers., Acts x. 21; xiv. 11;
contextually i. q. to be cast down, of the devil, Rev. xii.
12: 2. of things, to come (i. e. be sent) down: Acts
x. 11 (Ree. adds én’ airdy); xi. 5; foll. by a6 w. a gen.
of pers., Jas. i. 17; ék Tov ovpavod amd Tov Geov, Rev. iii.
12; xxi. 2,10; to come (i.e. fall) down: fr. the upper
regions of the air; as Bpoyn, Mt. vii. 25, 27; hatha, Lk.
viii. 23; mdp dxd [Lchm. ex] rod odp. Uk. ix. 54; ek rod
odp. eis tr. ynv, Rev. xiii. 13; ék rod ovp. dm tr. Beod, Rev.
xx.9[RGTr]; xddala ek rod ovp. éni twa, Rev. xvi. 21;
OpdpBoe emt thy iV, Lk. xxii. 44 [Lbr. WH reject the
pass.]; of a way leading downwards, Acts viii. 26. 3.
figuratively, xaraB. éws ddov, to (go i. e.) be cast down
to the lowest state of wretchedness and shame: Mt. xi.
23 LTr WH; [Lk. x.15 WH txt. Tr mrg. Comp.: ovy-
cataBaivo. |*
kata-Béd\dw: Pass. and Mid. pres. ptep. caraBaddd-
pevos; 1 aor. pass. kateBANOny 5 [fr. Hom. down]; Sept.
for an; 1. to cast down: twa, pass., Rev. xii. 10
Rec. ; to throw to the ground, prostrate: pass., 2 Co. iv. 9
katavaNiokw, katapbeipa, etc.
5 : 2
katad.@k@, kataheinw, KaTakoAovbew, etc.
katakAnpovopew, etc.
KaTaBapew
(where the metaph. is taken from an athlete or combat-
ant). 2. to put in a lower place: in the phrase 6c-
pédtov karaBdddopat, to lay (down) a foundation (Joseph.
antt. 11, 4, 4; 15,11,3; Dion. H. antt. 3, 69; al.), Heb.
Vale
kata-Bapéw, -@: 1 aor. cateBapnoa; prop. to press down
by an imposed weight; to weigh down; metaph. to bur-
den: twa, any one, 2 Co. xii. 16. (Polyb., Diod., App.,
Leian.) *
kata-Bapive : i. g. kataBapew (q. V.); pres. pass. ptcp.
xatraBapuvopevos, Mk. xiv. 40 LT Tr WH; see Bapéw.
(Sept.; Theophr. et al.) *
KaTd-Bacts, -ews, 7, (karaBaivw), [fr. Hdt. down], de-
scent ; a. the act of descending. b. the place
of descent: tod dpovs, i.e. that part of the mountain
where the descent is made, Lk. xix. 37; so Josh. x. 11
Sept.; Diod. 4, 21; opp. to dvdBaors, the place of ascent,
way up, 1 Mace. iii. 16, 24; Xen. Cyr. 7,2, 38. So Lat.
descensus; cf. Herzog on Sall. Cat. 57, 3.*
Kara-BiBdtw: 1 fut. pass. karaBiBacOnoopa; to cause
to go down (Hat. 1,87; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5,18; Sept. several
times for T)N3; to bring down, Bar. ili. 29); to cast
down, thrust down: pass., és adov (see adns, 2), Mt. xi.
23 RGT; Lk. x. 15 [Trmrg. WH txt. xaraByon (q, v.
8)]; eis dSov, Ezek. xxxi. 16.*
kata-Bodn, -7s, 7, (KkataBadro, q. V-) ; 1. a throw-
ing or laying down: tod oméppatos (sc. eis THY pyTpar),
the injection or depositing of the virile semen in the
womb, Leian. amor. 19; Galen, aphorism. iv. § 1; of the
seed of animals and plants, Philo de opif. mund. §§ 22,
45; oméppata ta eis ynv i) pntpav KataBaddopeva, Anto-
nin. 4, 36; accordingly many interpret the words Sdppa
Suvapw eis kataBodny omeppatos €daBe in Heb. xi. 11, she
received power to conceive seed. But since it belongs
to the male xaraBaddew 75 oréppa, not to the female,
this interpretation cannot stand [ (acc. to the reading of
WH mrg. airy Sdppa, Abr. remains the subj. of €\aBev;
but see 2 below)]; cf. Bleek [and, on the other side,
Kurtz] ad loc. 2. a founding (laying down a foun-
dation) : eis kata8. orépparos, to found a posterity, Heb.
xi. 11 [but cf. above] (rupavvidos, Polyb. 13, 6, 2; dpa Tn
Tpoty KaTaBorn Tov avOparer, Plat. aquae et ignis comp.
c.2). dd xataBodjs Kéopov, from the foundation of the
world: Mt. xiii. 35 [LT Tr WH om. xécpov]; xxv. 34;
Lk. xi. 50; Heb. iv. 3; ix. 26; Rev. xiii. 8; xvii. 8; mpd
xataBoAns Koopou, Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i.4; 1 Pet. i. 20.*
kata-BpaBevw, impv. 3 pers. sing. karaBpaBeverw; (prop.
BpaBevo to be an umpire in a contest, card sc. Twés,
against one); to decide as umpire against one, to declare
him unworthy of the prize; to defraud of the prize of vic-
tory: twa, metaph., to deprive of salvation, Col. ii. 18,
where cf. Meyer, [Bp. Lehtft.. esp. Field, Otium Norv.
Pars iii.]. (Eustath. ad I. 1, 93, 33 (vss. 402 sq.) kara-
BpaBever aitov, ds haow of madaoi; but in the earlier
Grk. writ. that have come down to us, it is found only
in [pseudo-] Dem. adv. Mid. p. 544 end, where it is used
of one who by bribing the judges causes another to be
condemned. ) *
330
Kkataywr tCopat
Karayyedevs, -€ws, 6, (kaTayyeAho, q. V.), announcer
(Vulg. annuntiator), proclaimer: with gen. of the obj.
Acts xvii. 18. (ccles. writ.) *
kat-ayyéAAw; impf. xaryyyeAdov; 1 aor. KarnyyeAa;
Pass., pres. katayyéAdouar; 2 aor. karnyyeAnv; to an-
nounce, declare, promulgate, make known; to proclaim
publicly, publish: tov Néyor Tov Geod, Acts xiii. 5; xv. 36;
pass. Acts xvii. 13; &, Acts xvi. 21; 7d evayyéAov, 1 Co.
ix. 14; ryv dvdoracw THy ek vexpav, Acts iv. 2; tas nuépas
ravras, Acts iil. 24 GLT Tr WH; 6eov [al. 6], Acts xvii.
233; "Inaodv, ib. 3; Christ, Phil. i.16 (17), 18; Col. i. 28;
ri tt, Acts xiii. 38; xvi. 17; 1 Co. ii. 1; with the in-
cluded idea of celebrating, commending, openly praising
(Lat. praedicare) : ri, Ro. i. 8 [A.V. is spoken of]; 1 Co.
xi. 26. (Occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 5, 38
where it means to denounce, report, betray; twice in the
O. T. viz. 2 Mace. viii. 36; ix. 17. [Cf. Westcott on
1Jn.i.5.]) [Come.: mpo-carayyéddo. |*
kata-yeAdw, -@: impf. 3 pers. plur. kareyéA@v; to de
ride, [A. V. laugh to scorn]: twos, any one [cf. B. § 132,
15], Mt. ix. 24; Mk. v.40; Lk. viii. 53. (From [Aeschyl.
and] Hdt. down; Sept.) *
kata-ywookw; pf. pass. ptcp. careyyaopevos; to find
fault with, blame: cateyveopévos jv, he had incurred the
censure of the Gentile Christians; Luther rightly, es war
Klage iiber ihn kommen [i.e. a charge had been laid against
him; but al. he stood condemned, see Meyer or Ellic.
in loc.; cf. Bttm. § 134, 4. 8], Gal. ii. 11; to accuse, con-
demn: twos, any one, 1 Jn. iii. 20 sq., with which ef. Sir.
xiv. 2 paxdptos, ov ov Katéyv@ 7 uy avrov. (In these
and other signif. in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt.
down; [see Ellicott u. s.].) *
kat-dyvupe: fut. cared&o; 1 aor. karéaéa (impv. kata€ov,
Deut. xxxiii. 11); Pass., 2 aor. kareaynv, whence subjunc.
3 pers. plur. xareay@ow; 1 aor. catedyOnv in Sept. Jer.
xxxi. (xlviii.) 25; (on the syllabic augment of these forms
cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 97 sq., ef. i. p. 323 sq.; Matthiae
i. p. 520sq.; W.§ 12, 2; [ Curtius, Das Verbum, i. p. 118;
Veitch s.v.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T., Praef. p. lxxix.]) ;
fr. Hom. down; to break: ri, Mt. xii. 20; Jn. xix. 31-33.
[Syn. see Schmidt ch. 115, 5 and ef. pyyvupe.]*
kata-ypadw: impf. 3 pers. sing. xaréypahev; to draw
(forms or figures), to delineate: Jn. viii. 6 cod. D ete.
which T Tr WH (txt.) would substitute for RG éypadev.
(Pausan. 1, 28, 2. Differently in other Grk. writ.)
[Perh. it may be taken in Jn. 1. c. in a more general sense:
to mark (cf. Pollux 9, 7, 104, ete.).]*
kat-dyw: 2 aor. carnyayov; 1 aor. pass. karnyOnv; Sept.
for 17)n, to make to descend; to lead down, bring down:
twa, Acts xxii. 30; Ro. x.6; wa foll. by eds w. ace. of
place, Acts ix. 30; xxiii. [15 LT Tr WH], 20, 28; ruvd
foll. by mpés w. ace. of pers., Acts xxiii. 15 [R G]; 76 mAoto
ent Hv ynv lo bring the vessel (down from deep water) to
the land, Lk. v.11; katdyeoOa, to be brought (down) in
a ship, to land, touch at: foll. by eis w. ace. of place, Acts
xxl. 3 [LT Tr WH xarndOopev]; xxvii. 3; xxviii. 12;
often so in Grk. writ.*
kar-ayovlfopar: deponent mid.; 1 aor. xarnyoucd
KATAOEW
ENV; 1. to struggle against (Polyb. 2, 42, 3, etc.). Pe,
to overcome (cf. Germ. niederkdmpfen): Heb. xi. 33.
(Polyb., Joseph., Leian., Plut., Aelian.) *
kata-Sw, -@: 1 aor. katédnoa; fr. Hom. down; to bind
up: ta rpavpara, Lk. x. 34. (Sir. xxvii. 21 ace. to the true
reading tpavpa.) *
katé-8ndos, -ov, (70s), thoroughly clear, plain, evident :
Heb. vii. 15. ({Soph.], Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.) [Cf. dpdos,
fin. ]*
kata-Suxdtw ; 1 aor. xaredikaca; 1 aor. pass. xaredicd-
anv; 1 fut. pass. caradicucOnoopa; to give judgment
against (one), to pronounce guilty; to condemn; in class.
Grk. [where it differs fr. kpivew in giving prominence
. to the formal and official as distinguished from the
inward and logical judging (cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 18,
6)] it is foll. by the gen. of the pers., in the N. T. by the
ace. [B. $132, 16]: Mt. xii. 7; Lk. vi. 37 [here Tr mrg.
the simple verb]; Jas. v.6; pass., Mt. xii. 37; [Lk.vi. 37°
(not Trmrg.)]. (Sept. Lam. iii. 35; Joseph. antt. 7, 11,
3.)*
Kara-Slkn, -ns, 7); 1. damnatory sentence, condem-
nation: Acts xxv.15 LT Tr WH; ({Epicharm. in Ath.
2, 3 p. 36 d.], Polyb., Plut., Iren. 1, 16, 3). 2. pen-
alty, esp. a fine; (Thue., Dem., Leian.).*
kata-Bidkw: 1 aor. karediwfa; Sept. often for 437; to
follow afier, follow up, (esp. of enemies [ Thue. et al.]);
in a good sense, of those in search of any one: rivd, Mk.
i. 35. (76 €deds Gov katadim€erai pe, Ps. xxii. (xxili.) 6;
ov KaTediw€ay pe nuav, 1 8. xxx. 223 driaw ris, to fol-
low after one in order to gain his favor, Sir. xxvii. 17.) *
kata-Sovddw, -@; fut. karadovAoow; 1 aor. mid. Kcare-
Sovlwoduny; (kara under [see xara, ILI. 3]); [fr. Hat.
down]; to bring into botihage, enslave: rwa, Gal. ii. 4 L T
Tr WII; 2 Co. xi. 20 [ef. W. 255 sq. (240)]; mid. to en-
slave to one’s self, bring into bondage to one’s self: Gal.
ii. 4 RG*
kara-Suvactevw; pres. pass. ptep. caraduvacrevopevos ;
Sept. for 7317, pwy, etc.; with gen. of pers. [W. 206
(193); B. 169 (147)], to exercise harsh control over one,
to use one’s power against one: Jas. ii. 6 [not Tdf. (see
below) ] (Diod. 13, 73); teva, to oppress one (Xen. conv.
5, 8; often in Sept.): Jas. ii. 6 Tdf.; pass. Acts x. 38.*
KaTd-Oepa, -ros, 70, 1. q. karavdbepa (q. v.), of which it
seems to be a vulgar corruption by syncope [ef. Kou-
manoudes, Svvaywyn NeEewv aOnoatp. KTX. 8. Vv. kards]; a
curse; by meton. worthy of execration, an accursed thing:
Rev. xxii. 3 [Rec. caravabena; cf. Just. M. quaest. et resp.
121 fin.; ‘Teaching’ 16, 5]. Not found in prof. auth.*
KaraOeparife; (kardbepna, q.v-); to call down direst evils
on, to curse vehemently: Mt. xxvi. 74 (tec. xatravaOepari-
¢ew). (Iren. adv. haer. 1, 13, 4 and 16, 3.)*
kat-airxtve; Pass., impf. caryoxvvounv; 1 aor. Kary-
cxtvonv; fut. caracxvOjcopar; Sept. chiefly for wy
and v3; asin Grk. writ. fr. Lom. down; 1. to dis-
honor, disgrace: thv kepadny, 1 Co. xi. 4 sq. (or0dd Thy
xeparny, Joseph. antt. 20, 4, 2). 2. to put to shame,
make ashamed : twd,1 Co.i.273; xi. 22; pass. to beashamed,
blush with shame: Lk. xiii. 17; 2 Co. vil. 14; ix. 43 1 Pct.
331
KaTaxd\npobotéw
iii. 16; by a Hebr. usage one is said to be put to shame
who suffers a repulse, or whom some hope has deceived ;
hence eAmls od karaucyvver, does not disappoint: Ro. v.5
(cf. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6; xxiv. (xxv.) 2sq.3 exviii. (cxix.)
116); pass., Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 6; Cs. xxviii.
IGS isis rele
kata-Katw: impf. 3 pers. plur. ckaréxawov; fut. karaxaiow}
1 aor. inf. karakadca; Pass., pres. karaxaiouar; 2 aor.
katexany; 2 fut. karaxanooua [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123;
WH. App.p.170*]; 1 fut. caraxavOqoouar (Kiihner i. 841;
[Veitch s.v. kalo; B. 60 (53); W. 87 (83)]); Sept.
chiefly for }77; fr. Hom. down; to burn up [see xara,
III. 4], consume by fire: ri, Mt. xiii. 30; Acts xix. 19;
pass., 1 Co. iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 11; 2 Pet. iii. 10 [Tr WH
eipeOnoera., see ebpioke, 1 a. fin.]; Rev. viii. 7; with rupi
added, Mt. iii. 12; xiii. 40 R LT WH, but G Tr xaiw; Lk.
il. 17, (Ex. xxix. 14; xxxii. 20 Alex., etc.; see xaiw)
ev mupi (often so in Sept.), Rev. xvii. 16 ; xviii. 8.
and karakaiw are distinguished in Ex. iii. 2.) *
kata-Kahv@rw : Sept. for 703; fr. Hom. down; to cover
up [see xara, III. 3]; Mid. pres. caraxadvrropat, to veil
or cover one’s self: 1 Co. xi. 6; thy Kepadny, one’s head,
Hee Wee
KaTa-Kavx dopat, -opat, 2 pers. sing. karaxavyacat (contr.
fr. karaxavydecat) for the Attic caraxavya (Ro. xi. 18; cf.
W.§ 13, 2b.; [B. 42 (37); Soph. Lex., Introd. p. 40 sq.;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 123 sq.]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 360), impv. 2
pers. sing. karaxavx@ (Ro. xi. 18); (xara against [ef. xara,
II. 7]); prop. to glory against, to exult over, to boast one’s
self to the injury of (a person or a thing): tds, Ro. xi.
18; Tdf. in Jas. iii. 14; card twos, ibid. RG L Tr WH
[B.185 (160); W. § 30, 9 b. (ef. 432 (402))]; Avs G. q.
6 €\eav) Karakavyata Kpicews, mercy boasts itself supe-
rior to judgment, i. e. full of glad confidence has no fear
of judgment, Jas. ii. 13. (Zech. x. 12; Jer. xxvii. (1.)
10, 88; not found in prof. auth.) *
kaTd-Keysor; impf. 3 pers. sing. karéxetto; (Ketpat, to
lie [see xara, III. 1]); to have lain down i. e. to lie pros-
trale ; a. of the sick [cf. colloq. ‘down sick”] (Hat. 7,
229; Leian. Icarom. 31; [Plut. vit. Cic. 43, 3]): Mk. i.
30; Jn.v.6; Acts xxviii. 8; foll. by emi w. dat. of the
couch or pallet, Mk. ii. 4. RG Lmrg.; [Acts ix. 83 RG];
Lk. v.25 RL; él rwos, Acts ix. 833 [LT Tr WH]; eéxi
wt, Lk. v. 25 T Tr WH [B. § 147, 24 note; W. 408 (381)
note]; év w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 3. b. of those at
meals, to recline (Athen. 1, 42 p. 23 ¢.; Xen. an. 6, 1, 4;
cony. 1, 14; Plat. conv. p. 177 d.; rep. ii. p. 372 d., etc. ;
Diog. Laért. 7, 1, 19; see dvaxerpar): absol., Mk. xiv. 3;
Lk. v. 29; foll. by év w. dat. of place, Mk. ii. 15; 1 Co.
smote NOB Ike, wank aie Jeane YAO Ce
kata-KAdéo, -6: 1 aor. caréxdaca; fr. Lom. down; to
break: in pieces (cf. Germ. zerbrechen [see card, III. 4]):
Tovs aprous, WO ye CONG Wiebe, IGE
kara-krelw: 1 aor. caréxdevoa; fr. [IIdt.], Thue. and
Xen. down; to shut up, confine: rwa év rh pvdaky, Lk.
iii. 20; év (which Ree. om.) pudaxais, Acts xxvi. 10 (Jer.
STK (Coesb)) Bs?
Kara-krnpoSotéa, -& (see card, ITT. 6): 1 aor. karexAnpo-
(kaia
KATAKANPOVOpew
8drgca; to distribute by lot; to distribute as an inheritance :
riwvi tt, Acts xiii. 19 Rec.; see the foll. word. (Deut. i.
38; xxi. 16; Josh. xix. 5) Ald.,Compl.; 1 Mace. iii. 36,
—in all with the var. caraxAnpovopeiv. Not found in
prof. auth.) *
kata-KAnpovopew, -@ [see xard, III.6]: 1 aor. karexAnpo-
vounoa; to distribute by lot, to distribute as an inheritance:
twi tt, Acts xiii. 19 GL T Tr WH. (Num. xxxiv. 18;
Deut. ili. 28; Josh. xiv.1; Judg.-xi. 24 Alex.; 15. ii. 8;
1 Esr. viii. 82. Also often intrans. to receive, obtain, ac-
quire as an inheritance; as, Deut. i. 8 var., 38; ii. 21.
Not found in prof. auth.) *
Kara-KAlvo: 1 aor. karéxhuva; 1 aor. pass. katrexAlOny ;
fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. in ref. to eating, to make
to recline: tid, Lk. ix. 14, [also 15 T Tr WH], (emi 76
Seimvov, Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 21); mid., with 1 aor. pass., to
recline (at table): Lk. vii. 36 LT Tr WH; xxiv. 30; eis
thy mparokhiciay, Lk. xiv. 8, (eis 76 éoOiew, Judith xii. 15;
eis ro Setxvov, Joseph. antt. 6, 8, 1 [var.]).*
kata-kdv{o: 1 aor. pass. ptcp. karaxAvoeis; fr. [Pind.,
Hadt.], Aeschyl. down; to overwhelm with water, to sub-
merge, deluge, (cf. card, III. 4]: 2 Pet. iii. 6. (Sept. sev-
eral times for Ow.) *
kata-Kuop6s, -ov, 6, (kataxdv¢w), inundation, deluge: of
Noah’s deluge, Mt. xxiv. 38 sq.; Lk. xvii. 27; 2 Pet. ii.
5. (Sept. for 7339; Plato, Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.) *
Kat-akodovdéw, -@; 1 aor. ptep. karaxodovbnaas; to fol-
low after [see xard, III. 5]: Lk. xxiii. 555 revi, Acts xvi.
17. [Sept., Polyb., Plut., Joseph., al.]*
KATO-KOTTO ; 1. to cut up, cut to pieces, [see xara,
III. 4]; to slay: Is. xxvii. 9; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 7, ete.; Hadt.
et sqq. 2. to beat, bruise: éavrov AiOous, Mk. v.
5; [al. retain here the primary meaning, to cut, gash,
mangle ].* 4
kata-Kpnpvitw: 1 aor. inf. caraxpnpvioas; to cast down
a precipice; to throw down headlong: Lk. iv. 29. (2 Chr.
xxv. 12; 2 Mace. xiv. 43; 4 Macc. iv. 25; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4,
7; 8, 3,41; Dem. 446,11; Diod. 4, 31; [Philo de agric.
Noé § 15]; Joseph. antt. 6, 6, 2; 9, 9, 1.)*
Katdé-Kpisa, -ros, To, (kaTaxpivw), damnatory sentence,
condemnation: Ro. v. 16 (on which see xpiua, 2), ib. 18;
vill. 1. (kataxpimarov apeoers, Dion. Hal. 6, 61.) *
kata-Kpivw; fut. xaraxpw@; 1 aor. karéxpwa; Pass., pf.
katakexpiyat; 1 aor. xarexpiOnv; 1 fut. karaxpiOnooua; to
give judgment against (one [see xard, III. 7]), to judge
worthy of punishment, to condemn; a. prop.: Ro.
vill. 84; ruvd, Jn. viii. 10 sq.; Ro. ii. 1, where it is dis-
ting. fr. kpivew, as in 1 Co. xi. 32; pass., Mt. xxvii. 3;
Ro. xiv. 233 twa Gavarw, to adjudge one to death, con-
demn to death, Mt. xx. 18 [Tdf. eis Odvarov]; Mk. x. 33,
(Kexpippevor Javar@, to eternal death, Barn. ep. 10, 5);
7 Katactpop7, 2 Pet. ii. 6 [WHom. Tr mrg. br. xara-
arpop7 |, (the Greeks say karaxp. twa Oavdrov or bdva-
tov; cf. W. 210 (197 sq.); B. § 132,16; Grimm on Sap.
ii. 20); w. the ace. and inf., twa évoyov etvat Gavdrov, Mk.
xiv. 64; simply, of God condemning one to eternal mis-
ery: pass., Mk. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xi. 32; Jas. v. 9 Rec. b.
improp. i. e. by one’s good example to render another’s
332
KaTadapBave
wickedness the more evident and censurable: Mt. xii. 41
sq.; Lk. xi. 31 sq.; Heb. xi. 7. In a peculiar use of the
word, occasioned by the employment of the term xard-
pia (in vs. 1), Paul says, Ro. viii. 3, 6 Oeds karéxpive Thy
dpapriav év Th capi, i. e. through his Son, who partook
of human nature but was without sin, God deprived sin
(which is the ground of the xaraxpiya) of its power in
human nature (looked at in the general), broke its
deadly sway, (just as the condemnation and punishment
of wicked men puts an end io their power to injure or
do harm). [(From Pind. and Hdt. down.)]*
Kard-Kpicts, -ews, 7, (KaTakplvw), condemnation: 2 Co.
iii. 9 (see duaxovia, 2 a.); mpos Karaxpiow, in order to con-
demn, 2 Co. vii. 83. (Not found in prof. auth.) *
Kata-Kupievw; 1 aor. ptcp. kataxuptevoas; (Kard [q. Vv.
III. 3] under) ; a. to bring under one’s power, to sub-
ject to one’s self, to subdue, master: twés, Acts xix. 16
(Diod. 14, 64; for wid Gen. i. 28; Sir. xvii. 4). b.
to hold in subjection, to be master of, exercise lordship over:
tivds, Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x. 42; 1 Pet. v. 3; (of the benign
government of God, Jer. iii. 14).*
Kata-Aadéw, -; to speak against one, to criminate, tra-
duce: twés (in class. Grk. mostly w. the acc.; in the
Sept. chiefly foll. by xara twos), Jas. iv. 11; 1 Rets 12:
iii. 16 [here T Trmrg. WH ev 6 xaradadciode, wherein ye
are spoken against }.*
KaTa-Aadud, -as, 7, (katdAados, q. v.), defamation, evil-
speaking: 2 Co. xii. 20; 1 Pet. ii. 1, [on the plur. cf. W.
176 (166); B. 77 (67)]. (Sap.i.11; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
30,13; 85, 5, and eccl. writ.; not found in class. Grk.) *
Katd-Aados, -ov, 6, a defamer, evil speaker, [A. V. back-
biters]: Ro. i. 30. (Found nowhere else [ Herm. sim. 6,
5, 5; also as adj. 8, 7, 2; 9, 26;¥].)*
Kata-hapBave: 2 aor. karéhaBov; pf. inf. carevAnpevar;
Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. xareiAnmrat (Jn. viii. 4 as given
in LT Tr WE txt.), pf. ptep. carechnupévos; 1 aor. ka-
recnpony (Jn. viii. 4 R* Pee" G) [on the augm. ef. W.
§ 12, 6], and xareAnPOnv (Phil. iii. 12 RG), and xare-
Anupony (ibid. LT Tr WH; on the p see s. v. M, p);
Mid., pres. kataXapSavopat; 2 aor. katedaBdopunv; cf.
Kiihner i. p. 856; [Veitch, s. v. AapBdave}; Sept. for
wn, a7) also for x¥1, etc.; [fr. Hom. down]; to lay
hold of; i. e. 1. to lay hold of so as to make one’s
own, to obtain, attain to: w. the acc. of the thing; the
prize of victory, 1 Co. ix. 24; Phil. iii. 12 sq.; ray Scxaco-
auvnv, Ro. ix. 30; i.g. to make one’s own, to take into
one’s self, appropriate: 1 oxoria avré (i. €. 7d Pos) ov Ka-
rédaBev, Jn. i. 5. 2. to seize upon, take possession of,
(Lat. occupare); a. of evils overtaking one (so in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down): rid, oxoria, Jn. xii. 35; [so physi-
cally, Jn. vi. 17 Tdf.]; of the last day overtaking the
wicked with destruction, 1 Th. v. 4; of a demon about
to torment one, Mk. ix. 18. b. in a good sense, of
Christ by his holy power and influence laying hold of
the human mind and will, in order to prompt and govern
ny degen sare, 192: 3. to detect, catch: twa €v rim, in
pass. Jn. viii. 3 [WH emi r.]; with a ptep. indicating
the crime, ib. 4. 4. to lay hold of with the mind;
KaTaréyo
to understand, perceive, learn, comprehend, (Plat. Phaedr.
p- 250d.; Axioch. p. 370a.; Polyb. 8, 4, 63; Philo, vita
contempl. § 10; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46); Mid. (Dion.
Hal. antt. 2, 66; [cf. W. 253 (238)]), foll. by ér, Acts
iv. 13; x. 343 foll. by the acc. w. inf., Acts xxv. 25; foll.
by indir. disc., Eph. iii. 18.*
kata-héyw : pres. pass. impv. caradeyéoOo; 1. prop.
to lay down ; mid. to lie down (Hom.). 2. to narrate
at length, recount, set forth, [fr. Hom. on]. 3. to set
down in a list or register, to enroll, (esp. soldiers; see
Passow s. v.5; [L. and S.s. v. IL. 2 (yet the latter connect
this use with the signif. to choose)]): of those widows
who held a prominent place in the church and exercised
a certain superintendence over the rest of the women,
and had charge of the widows and orphans supported at
public expense, 1 Tim. v. 9 [ W. 590 (549) ]; cf. De Wette
{or Ellicott] ad loc.*
KaTd-Aeipa, -ros, TO, (kaTadeimw), @ remnant, remains :
Xo. ix. 27 RG, where it is equiv. to a few, a small part;
see UmdAeyupa. (Sept., Galen.) *
kata-helrrw; fut. karadelw; 1 aor. caréAetWa (in later
auth.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 713 sqq.; [Veitch s. v. Netra;
WH. App. p. 169 sq.]); 2 aor. karédurov; Pass., pres. xa-
TaNelmopa; pf. ptep. caradeAetppevos [ WH -Atppevos, see
(their App. p. 154°, and) s. v.I, ¢]; 1 aor. careXerPOnv; (see
card, II. 5); Sept. for nin, VNw, ay; [fr. Hom.
down ]; to leave behind; with acc. of place or pers. ; a.
i q. to depart from, leave, a pers. or thing: Mt. iv. 13;
xvi. 4; xxi. 17; Heb. xi. 27; metaph. eddeiav dddy, to for-
sake true religion, 2 Pet. ii. 15. pass. to be left: Jn. viii.
9; i.g. to remain, foll. by év with dat. of place, 1 Th. iii.
1. b. i. q. to bid (one) to remain: twain a place, Acts
xviii. 19; Tit. i.5 [R G; al. drodcira J. c. to forsake,
leave to one’s self a pers. or thing, by ceasing to care for
it, to abandon, leave in the lurch: tov warépa k. THY pNTépa,
Mt. xix.5; Mk. x.7; Eph. v. 31, fr. Gen. ii. 24; pass. to
be abandoned, forsaken: eis adov [or ddnv (q. v. 2) ], Acts
ii. 31 Rec. (see éyxaraXeira, 1); w.ace. of the thing, Mk.
xiv. 52; Lk. [v. 28]; xv. 4; rov Adyor, to neglect the
office of instruction, Acts vi. 2. d. to cause to be left
over, to reserve, to leave remaining: éwavr@, Ro. xi. 4 (1
K. xix. 18); xatadeimerat, there still remains, émayyeXia, a
promise (to be made good by the event), Heb. iv. 1 (uayxn,
Xen. Cyr. 2, 3,11; owrnpias éris, Joseph. b. j. 4, 5, 4);
twa with inf. (to leave any business to be done by one
alone), Lk. x. 40. e. like our leave behind, it is used
of one who on being called away cannot take another
with him: Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 14; spec. of the dying (¢o
leave behind), Mk. xii.19, [21 Lmrg.T Tr WH]; Lk.
xx. 31, (Deut. xxviii. 54; Prov. xx. 7; and often in Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. Il. 24, 726; Od. 21,330n). f. like our
leave i. q. leave alone, disregard: of those who sail past a
place without stopping, Acts xxi. 3. [Comp.: éy-cara-
Netra. |*
xara-Au0dto: fut. caradibdow; (see xara, II. 3 [cf. W.
102 (97)]); to overwhelm with stones, to stone: Lk. xx. 6.
(Eccles. writ.) *
Kar-addXayh, -fs, 9, (karaddAdooe, q-. V-) 5; is
e€X-
333
KaTahupa
change; of the business of money-changers, exchang:
ing equiv. values [(Aristot., al.)]. Hence 2. ad-
justment of a difference, reconciliation, restoration to favor,
[fr. Aeschyl. on]; in the N. T., of the restoration of the
favor of God to sinners that repent and put their trust
in the expiatory death of Christ: 2 Co. v.18 sq.;_ w. the
gen. of the one received into favor, rod kécpou (opp. to
droBoAn), Ro. xi. 15; xaradAayhy €daBopuer, we received
the blessing of the recovered favor of God, Ro. v.11; w.
the gen. of him whose favor is recovered, 2 Mace. v. 20.
[ Cf. Trench § lxxvii.]*
kat-ahAdoow; 1 aor. ptep. caradAdkas; 2 aor. pass.
katn\Aaynv; prop. to change, exchange, as coins for others
of equal value; hence to reconcile (those who are at vari-
ance): Tivas, aS Tovs OnBatovs Kat rods TAaracéas, Hat. 6,
108; karndAakav odeas of Mapior, 5, 29; Aristot. oecon.
2, 15, 9 [p. 1348°, 9] xarnd\dAakev adrads mpds add7Aovs ;
pass. tui, to return into favor with, be reconciled to, one,
Eur. Iph. Aul. 1157; Plat. rep. 8 p. 566 e.; mpos addAndous,
Thue. 4, 59; but the Pass. is used also where only one
ceases to be angry with another and receives him into
favor; thus xaradAayeis, received by Cyrus into favor,
Xen. an. 1, 6,1; xaradAdrrerae mpods adrny, regained her
favor, Joseph. antt. 5, 2, 8; and, on the other hand, God
is said xara\dayhvai tu, with whom he ceases to be of-
fended, to whom he grants his favor anew, whose sins he
pardons, 2 Mace. i. 5; vii. 33; viii. 29; Joseph. antt. 6,
7,4 cf. 7, 8, 4, (so emixaradXatrecGai tux, Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 48, 1). In the N. T. God is said xara\d\dooew
éauT@ tiva, to receive one into his favor, (A. V. reconcile
one to himself |, 2 Co. v. 18 sq. (where in the added ptcps.
two arguments are adduced which prove that God has
done this: first, that he does not impute to men their
trespasses; second, that he has deposited the doctrine
of reconciliation in the souls of the preachers of the
gospel) ; xara\Aaynvar TO Oe@, to be restored to the favor
of God, to recover God’s favor, Ro. v. 10 [but see éyOpos,
2]; xaradaynte TO Geo, allow yourselves to be recon-
ciled to God; do not oppose your return into his favor,
but lay hold of that favor now offered you, 2 Co. v. 20.
of a woman: xata\daynro to avdpi, let her return into
harmony with [A. V. be reconciled to} her husband, 1 Co.
vii. 11. Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 276 sqq. [who
shows (in opp. to Tittmann, N. 'T. Syn. i. 102, et al.) that
xata\Adoow and diaAXdoow are used promiscuously ; the
prepp. merely intensify (in slightly different modes) the
meaning of the simple verb, and there is no evidence
that one compound is stronger than the other; dcadd.
and its derivatives are more common in Attic, caraAX.
and its derivatives in later writers. COMp.: amo-Karah-
Adaco. | *
Katd-Aouros, -or, (Aouros), left remaining: [oi xatddot
mot tT. avOporov A. V. the residue of men], Acts xv. 17.
(Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sept.) *
Kard-Avpa, -ros, TO, (fr. kaTaAV@, C 3 g.Vv.), an inn, lodg-
ing-place : Lk. ii. 7 (for 11922, Ex. iv. 24); an eating-room,
dining-room, [A.V. guest-chamber]: Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii
11; in the same sense for 739, 1S. ix. 22. (Polyb. 2
KATAAVM
36, 1 [plur.]; 32,19, 2; Diod. 14, 93,5; [al.; cf. W. 25,
93 (89)].) *
Kata-Avw; fut.caradvdow; 1 aor. caréAvoa; 1 aor. pass.
kareAvOnv ; 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. karadvOnoeras; to dis-
solve, disunite, [see xara, III. 4]; a. (what has been
joined together) i. y. fo destroy, demolish: AiBovs [A. V.
throw down], Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk. xiii. 2; Lk. xxi. 6; rov
vaov, Mt. xxvi. 61; xxvii. 40; Mk. xiv. 58; xv. 29; Acts
vi. 145 oikiav, 2 Co. v.13 univ. opp. to olkodopetv, Gal. il.
18 (2 Esdr. v.12; Hom. Il. 9, 24 sq.; 2,117; revyn, Eur.
Tro. 819; yépupay, Hdian. 8, 4, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]). 1d
metaph. to overthrow i. e. render vain, deprive of success,
bring to naught: tiv Bovdryy } ro epyov, Acts v. 38 (rds
dmewdds, 4 Mace. iv. 16); teva, to render fruitless one’s
desires, endeavors, ete. ibid. 39 GL T Tr WH (Plat.
lego. 4 p. 714 c.); to subvert, overthrow: ro &pyov Tov Oeov
(see dyaOés, 2), Ro. xiv. 20. As in class. Grk. fr. Hdt.
down, of institutions, forms of government, laws, etc., to
deprive of force, annul, abrogate, discard: rov vopov, Mt.
v. 17 (2 Mace. ii. 22; Xen. mem. 4, 4, 14; Isocr. paneg.
§55; Philost. v. Apoll. 4, 40). c. of travellers, to halt
on a journey, to put up, lodge, (the fig. expression origi-
nating in the circumstance that, to put up for the night,
the straps and packs of the beasts of burden are unbound
and taken off; or, perh. more correctly, fr. the fact that
the traveller’s garments, tied up when he is on the jour-
ney, are unloosed at its end; cf. dvadvo, 2): Lk. ix. 12;
xix. 7; so in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc., Xen., Plat. down;
Sept. for 13, Gen. xix. 2; xxiv. 23, 25, etc.; Sir. xiv. 25,
275 xxxvi. 31; [cf B. 145 (127)]*
Kata-pavOdve: 2 aor. xaréwadov; met with fr. Hat.
down; esp. freq. in Xen. and Plat.; to learn thoroughly
{see xara, II]. 1], examine carefully; to consider well: ti
foll. by mas, Mt. vi. 28. (Gen. xxiv. 21; Job xxxv. 5,
ete.; mapOévov, Sir. ix. 5; KadXos dddOrpuor, ibid. 8.) *
kata-paptupéw, -6; to bear witness against: ti Tivos,
testify a thing against one [B. 165 (144), ef. 178 (154)],
Mt. xxvi. 62; xxvii.13; Mk. xiv. 60,.and RG in xv. 4.
(1 K. xx. (xxi.) 10,13; Job xv. 6; among Grk. writ. esp.
by the Attic orators.) *
kata-péve; to remain permanently, to abide: Acts i. 13.
(Num. xxii. 8; Judith xvi. 20; Arstph., Xen., Philo de
gigant. § 5.) *
katapévas, and (as it is now usually written [so LT
TrWH)) separately, cara pdvas (sc. xdpas), apart, alone:
Mk. iv. 10; Lk. ix.18. (Thue. 1, 32.37; Xen. mem. 3,
7,4; Joseph. antt. 18, 3,4; Sept. for 173 and 1a) Pst
iv. 9; Jer. xv. 17, etc.) *
kat-avd-Geua, -ros, 7d, once in Rev. xxii. 3 Rec.; see
dvd8eya and kardbena. Not found in prof. auth.*
kat-ava-Oenarifo ; (karavdbena, q. V-); i. q. katabepa-
tif (q.v.): Mt. xxvi. 74 Rec. (Just. M. dial. c. Tr. ¢.
47, and other eccl. writ.) *
Kat-av-adiokw; (see dyndickw, and kard, IID. 4); to
consume: of fire, Heb. xii. 29 after Deut. iv. 24; ix. 8.
(In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down; Sept. several
times for 52x.) "
KaTa-vapkde, -@: fut. katavapkno@; 1 aor. karevapknoa;
334
KaTavuco®w
(vapxao to become numb, torpid; in Sept. trans. te
affect with numbness, make torpid, Gen. xxxil. 25, 32;
Job xxxili. 19; fr. vapxyn torpor); prop. to cause to grow
numb or torpid; intrans. to be torpid, inactive, to the det-
riment of one; to weigh heavily upon, be burdensome to:
rivos (gen. of pers.), 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); xii. 13 sq. (Hesych.
karevapknoa: kateBapyoa [al. ¢Bdpyva]); Jerome, ad Al-
gas. 10 [(iv. 204 ed. Benedict.) ], discovers a Cilicism in
this use of the word [cf. W. 27]. Among prof. auth.
used by Hippocr. alone, and in a pass. sense, to be quite
numb or stiff*
kara-vebm: 1 aor. karévevoa; fr. Hom. down; to nod
to, make a sign to: twi, foll. by rod w. aor. inf., to indi-
cate to another by a nod or sign what one wishes him to
do [A. V. beckoned to . . . that they should come, etc.], Lk.
Vel ba
kata-voéw, -6; impf. karevdouv; 1 aor. katevonoa; fr.
Hdt. down; Sept. here and there for }3/3nn, 0°37,
MINI; 1. to perceive, remark, observe, understand : ti,
Mt. vii. 3; Lk. vi. 413 xx. 233 Actsxxvil. 393 2. to
consider attentively, fiz one’s eyes or mind upon: ri, Lk.
xii. 24, 27; Acts xi.6; Ro.iv.19; w. the acc. of the thing
omitted, as being understood fr. the context, Acts vii. 31
sq-; ted, Heb. iii. 1; x. 24; Jas. i. 23 sq.*
Kat-avTde, -G: 1 aor. KarnyTnoa; pf. Katnvtnka (1 Co.
x.11 LT Tr WH); to come to, arrive at; a. prop.:
foll. by eis w. ace. of place, Acts xvi. 1; xviii. 19, 24;
xxi. 7; xxv.13; xxvii. 12; xxviii. 13, (2 Macc. iv. 44);
dvtixpv Tivos, to a place over against, opposite another,
Acts xx. 153 ets twa Ta TéEAN TOV aiavey KaTHyTHKEY, i. e.
whose lifetime occurs at the ends of the ages, 1 Co. x.
11. b. metaph. ets 7, like the Lat. ad aliquid per-
venio, i. e. to attain to a thing: Acts xxvi. 7; Eph. iv. 13;
Phil. iii. 11; xatavrG ti ets tua, to one, that he may be-
come partaker of it, 1 Co. xiv. 36. (Polyb., Diod.;
eccl. writ.) *
Katd-vuéts, -eas, 7, (kaTaviaoa, q. V-);
ing, piercing, (Vulg. compunctio). 2. severe sorrow,
extreme grief. 3. imsensibility or torpor of mind,
such as extreme grief easily produces; hence mvedpa
katavuéews, a spirit of stupor, which renders their souls
torpid, i. e. so insensible that they are not affected at
all by the offer made them of salvation through the Mes-
siah, Ro. xi. 8 fr. Is. xxix. 10 Sept. (where the Hebr.
MOI MI, a spirit of deep sleep, is somewhat loosely so
rendered; otvos xataviews for ToOyAA 1, wine which
produces dizziness, reeling, Germ. Taumelwein, Ps. lix.
(Ix.) 5). Notfound in prof. auth. Cf. Fritzsche’s full
discussion of the word in his Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 558
sqq.; [ef. W. 94 (90); Bp. Lghtft. ‘Fresh Revision’ ete.
p- 139 note].*
Kata-vicow: 2
1. a prick-
aor. pass. kareviynv [B. 63 (55)]; to
prick, pierce; metaph. to pain the mind sharply, agitate it
vehemently: used esp. of the emotion of sorrow; katevi-yy
aay TH kapdia (tiv Kapdiay LT Tr WH), they were smit-
ten in heart with poignant sorrow [A. V. lit. pricked],
Acts li. 37 (karavevvypévoy 7H kapdia, Ps. eviii. (cix.) 16;
addy Gen. xxxiv. 7; Sir. xii. 12; xiv. 1, etc.; of lust, Sus.
Katakiow
10; of violent pity, Joann. Malal. chronogr. 1, 18, pd.
Bonn. p- 460). C#. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 558 sqq.*
‘Kat-a£idew,-@: 1 aor. pass. karnévdOnv; to account worthy,
judye worthy : twd twos, one of a thing, 2 Th. i. 5 (Polyb.
1, 23, 3, ete.; Diod. 2, 60; Joseph. antt. 15, 8, 8); foll.
by an inf., Lk. xx. 35; xxi. 36 [T Tr txt. WH xarixv-
ante}; Acts v.41, (Dem. 1383, 11 [cf. Plat. Tim. 30 ¢.]).*
kara-ratéw, -6; fut. karamatnow (Mt. vii. 6 LT Tr
WH); 1 aor. xaremdrnoa; Pass., pres. xatraratotjpat ;
1 aor. karemarnOny; to tread down [see xara, III. 1], tram-
ple under foot: zi and twa, Mt. v.133 vii. 6; Lk. viii. 5;
xii. 1, (Hdt. et sqq.; Sept.); metaph., like the Lat. con-
culco, to trample on i. q. to treat with rudeness and insult,
2 Mace. viii. 2, etc.; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 61 [where
its use to denote desecration is illustrated]; to spurn,
treat with insulting neglect: dv vidv Tod bed, Heb. x. 29;
Gpxca, Hom. Il. 4,157; rods vdpovs, Plat. lege. 4, 714.3 ra
ypedppara, Gorg. p. 484 a.; rods déyous, Epict. 1, 8, 10;
Ta pnpard pov, Job vi. 3 Aq.*
katd-ravots, -ews, 9, (kaTamavea, q. V-); 1. actively,
a putting to rest: t@v mvevpatev, a calming of the winds,
Theophr. de ventis 18; rvpavywy, removal from office,
Hat. 5, 38. 2. In the Grk. Scriptures (Sept. sev-
eral times for mma) intrans. a resting, rest: npepa THs
xatar. the day of rest, the sabbath, 2 Mace. xv. 1; rédzos
THs Katam. ov, where I may rest, Acts vii. 49. Metaph.
1) Katam. tov Geod, the heavenly blessedness in which God
dwells, and of which he has promised to make persever-
ing believers in Christ partakers after the toils and trials
of life on earth are ended: Heb. iii. 11, 18; iv. 1, 3, 5,
10 sq., (after Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11, where the expression
denotes the fixed and tranquil abode promised to the
Israelites in the land of Palestine).*
kata-ratw: 1 aor. xatémavoa; (xara, like the Germ.
nieder, down) ; 1. trans. (Sept. for 0, maw)
to make quiet, to cause to be at rest, to grant rest; i. e. a.
to lead to a quiet abode: twa, Heb. iv. 8 (Ex. xxxiii. 14;
Deut. iii. 20; v.33; xii. 10; Josh. i. 13,15; 2 Chr. xiv.
ee xX KA, Ci Us X Kivi Lt). b. to still, restrain, to
cause (one striving to do something) to desist: foll. by
tov py and an inf., Acts xiv. 18 [cf. B. § 140, 16 B.;
W. 325 (805) ]. 2. intrans. to rest, take rest (Hebr.
M4), Nav’): dad revos, Heb. iv. 4, 10, (Gen. ii.2). In the
same and other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.*
Kata-méraca, -ros, 76, (katameravyupe to spread out
over, to cover), an Alex. Grk. word for maparéracpa,
which the other Greeks use fr. Hdt. down; a veil spread
out, a curtain, —the name given in the Grk. Scriptures,
as well as in the writings of Philo and Josephus, to the
two curtains in the temple at Jerusalem (74 xararerda-
opuara, 1 Mace. iv. 51; [yet cf. Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, ii. 611]): one of them (Hebr. 01) at the
entrance of the temple separated the Holy place from
the outer court (Ex. xxvi. 37; xxxviii. 18; Num. iii. 26;
Joseph. b. j. 5, 5, 4; it is called also rd «kdAvypa by the
Sept. and Philo, Ex. xxvii. 16; Num. iii. 25; Philo, vit.
Moys. iii. §§ 5 and 9), the other veiled the Holy of holies
svom the Holy place (in Hebr. the N319; €vddrepov ka-
385
KaTapa
ranéracpa, Joseph. antt. 8, 3,3; 1b éodraroy xatanéracpa
Philo de gig. § 12; by the Sept. and Philo this is called
pre-eminently 74 xataméracpa, Ex. xxvi. 31 sqq.; Lev.
xxl. 23; xxiv.3; Philo, vit. Moys. u.s.). This latter
kataréracya is the only one mentioned in the N. T.: rd
Mk. xv. 38; Lk.
Xxlil. 45; 76 Sevrepov katanéracpa, Heb. ix. 3; 16 éoare
pov Tov katareracparos (cf. Lev. xvi. 2,12,15; Ex. xxvi,
33) the space more inward than the veil, equiv. to ‘the
space within the veil,’ i.e. the Holy of holies, figura-
tively used of heaven, as the true abode of God, Heb. vi.
19; in a similar figurative way the body of Christ is
called xaraméracpa, in (Heb.) x. 20, because, as the veil
had to be removed in order that the high-priest might
enter the most holy part of the earthly temple, so the
body of Christ had to be removed by his death on the
cross, that an entrance might be opened into the fellow-
ship of God in heaven.*
katra-mivea ; 2 aor. katémiov; 1 aor. pass. karen dOnv; [fr-
Hes. and Hdt. down]; prop. to drink down, swallow
down: Mt. xxiii. 24; Rev. xii. 16; to devour, 1 Pet. v. 8
[here Tr -riew by mistake; (see zriva, init.)]; to swallow
up, destroy, pass., 1 Co. xv. 54; 2 Co. v.4; Heb. xi. 29;
trop. Avy KatamoOjva, to be consumed with grief, 2 Co.
ide der
katro-rinra; 2 aor. karémecor; [fr. Hom. down]; to fall
down: Acts xxviii. 6; eis tiv ynv, Acts xxvi. 14; emt ray
meérpay, Lk. viii. 6 T Tr WH.*
kata-tAéw: 1 aor. carémhevoa ; [fr. Hom. on]; fo sail
down from the deep sea to land; to put in:
Lk. viii. 26.*
Kata-Trovew, -G: pres. pass. ptep. katamovovpevos; prop.
to tire down with toil, exhaust with labor; hence to afflict
or oppress with evils; to make trouble for; to treat roughly:
twa, in pass., Acts vii. 24; 2 Pet. ii. 7 [R. V. sore dis-
tressed]. (8 Mace. ii. 2,13; Hippocr., Theophr., Polyb.,
Diod., Joseph., Aelian., al.) *
kara-rovtitw: Pass., pres. karamovri¢opar; 1 aor. kare
movriaOnv; to plunge or sink in the sea; Pass. in the in-
trans. sense, to sink, to go down: Mt. xiv. 30; a grievous
offender for the purpose of killing him, to drown: pass.
Mt. xviii. 6. (Lys., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Joseph.
antt. 10, 7,5; 14,15, 10; c. Apion. 2, 34, 3], al.; Sept. ;
[ef. W. 24; Lob. Phryn. p. 361 note].) *
xat-épa, -as, 7, (kara and apd, ef. Germ. Ver fluchung,
Verwiinschung, [cf. card, III. 4]); Sept. chiefly for
mop; an execration, Cape ecation, curse: opp. to evAoyia
(q. v.); Jas. iii. 10; yn kardpas éyyvs, near to being cursed
by God i.e. to being given up to barrenness (the allu-
sion is to Gen. iii. 17 sq.), Heb. vi. 8; tm6 xardpay eivat,
to be under a curse i.e. liable to the ercointes penalty
of being cursed, Gal. iii. 10; eayopdgew tua ek tijs x. $0
redeem one exposed to the threatened penalty of a curse,
ib. 13; réxva kardpas, men worthy of execration, 2 Pet.
ii. 14; abstract for the concrete, one in whom the curse
is exhibited, i. e. undergoing the appointed penalty of
cursing, Gal. iii. 13; éyd xardpa éyernOny, Protey. Jac.
c. 8. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.) *
katametagpa Tod vaod, Mt. xxvii. 51;
els THY X@pAY,
KaTapaopas
kat-apdopat, -Suar; (dep. mid. fr. cardpa) ; 1 aor. 2 pers.
sing. xarnpdo; [pf. pass. ptep. karnpapyévos (see below) ];
fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for 72) and 77%; to curse,
doom, imprecate evil on: (opp. to edAoyeiv) absol. Ro. xii.
14; w. dat. of the obj. (as in the earlier Grk. writ.), Lk.
vi. 28 Rec. (Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer. 65] 66; [Joseph. c. Ap.
1, 22, 16]); w. acc. of the obj. (as often in the later Grk.
writ., as Plut. Cat. min. 32,1 var. [B. § 133, 9; W. 222
(208)]), Mt. v. 44 Rec.; Lk. vi. 28 GLtxt. T Tr WH;
Jas. iii. 9; a tree, i.e. to wither it by cursing, Mk. xi. 21
(see Heb. vi. 8 in xardpa). pf. pass. ptcp. karnpayevos
in a pass. sense, accursed (Sap. xii. 11; [2 K. ix. 34];
Plut. Luc. 18; and xexarnpap. Deut. xxi. 23; [Sir iil.
16]): Mt. xxv. 41 (also occasionally xexardpavrar, Num.
xxii. 6; xxiv. 9; [but Tdf. etc. -ryp-; see Veitch s. v.
dpdopat |).*
kat-apyéa, -@; fut. karapynow; 1 aor. carnpynoa; pf. Ka-
Thpynka; Pass., pres. katapyovpar; pf. karnpynwat; 1 aor.
karnpynonv; 1 fut. carapynOncopa; causative of the verb
dpyéw, equiv. to dpydy (i. e. depyov [on the accent cf.
Chandler § 444]) wow; freq. with Paul, who uses it 25
times [elsewhere in N. T. only twice (Lk., Heb.), in Sept.
4 times (2 Esdr., see below) ]; 1. to render idle, un-
employed, inactive, inoperative : rv yqv, to deprive of its
strength, make barren [A. V. cumber], Lk. xiii. 7; to
cause a pers. or a thing to have no further efficiency ; to
deprive of force, influence, power, [ A. V. dring to nought,
make of none effect]: ri, Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. i. 28; twa, 1 Co.
ii. 6 [but in pass.]; diabolic powers, 1 Co. xv. 24 (Justin,
apol. 2, 6); Antichrist, 2 Th. ii. 8; rov Advarov, 2 Tim. i.
10 (Barnab. ep. 5, 6); rév-dia8odov, Heb. ii. 14; pass. 1
Co. xv. 26; to make void, ray éemayyedav, Gal. iii. 17;
pass. Ro. iv. 14. 2. to cause to cease, put an end to,
do away with, annul, abolish: ri, 1 Co. vi. 13; xiii. 11;
tov vopov, Ro. iii. 31; Eph. ii. 15; rév xarpov tod dvdpov,
Barnab. ep. 15, 5; pass. méAewos karapyetrar émoupavioy
kal emcyeiwv, Ignat. ad Eph. 13, 2; iva catapyn67 ro cSpa
ths dpaprias, that the body of sin might be done away,
i.e. not the material of the body, but the body so far
forth as it is an instrument of sin; accordingly, that the
body may cease to be an instrument of sin, Ro. vi. 6.
Pass. to cease, pass away, be done away: of things, Gal.
v.11; 1 Co. xiii. 8, 10; 2 Co. iii. 7, 11, 18 sq.; of persons,
foll. by dé twos, to be severed from, separated from, dis-
charged from, loosed from, any one; to terminate all in-
tercourse with one [a pregn. constr., cf. W. 621 (577);
B. 322 (277)]: dé tov Xpiorod, Gal. v. 4 [on the aor. cf.
W.§ 40,5 b.J; dé rot vdpou, Ro. vii. [2 (R™ om. r. v.)], 6.
The word is rarely met with in prof. auth., as Eur. Phoen.
753 karapy. xepa, to make idle, i. e. to leave the hand
unemployed; Polyb. ap. Suid. [s. v. carypynkévat] rods
kacpovs, in the sense of to let slip, leave unused ; in Sept.
four times for Chald. 5x3, to make to cease, i. e. restrain,
check, hinder, 2 Esdr. iv. 21, 23; v. 53 vi. 8.*
Kat-apOuew, -@: to number with: pf. pass. ptep. carn-
ptOunpevos ev (for Rec. ody) nuiv, was numbered among
us, Actsi.17; ef. 2 Chr. xxxi.19; [Plat. politicus 266 a.
ete. |.*
336
KaTacKevales
kat-apritw; fut. carapricw (1 Pet. v. 10 LT Tr WH
[B. 37 (82); but Rec. xaraprica, 1 aor. optat. 3 pers.
sing.]); 1 aor. inf. karapricat; Pass., pres. xarapri¢opat;
pf. karnpticpar; 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. karnpticw; prop.
to render dpruos i. e. fit, sound, complete, [see card, III. 2];
hence a. to mend (what has been broken or rent),
to repair: ra Sixrva, Mt. iv. 21; Mk. i. 19, [al. ref. these
exx. to next head]; i. q. to complete, ta borepnpara, 1 Th.
iii. 10. b. to fit out, equip, put in order, arrange, ad-
just: rovs aiavas, the worlds, pass. Heb. xi. 3 (so, for
P27, Prov, Ps. Ixxiii. (Lxxiv.) 16; cedjymy, Ixxxviii.
(Ixxxix.) 38); *oxevn katynpricpevn eis amwdevay, of men
whose souls God has so constituted that they cannot es-
cape destruction [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) in loc.], Ro.
ix. 22 (qdvia, Polyb. 5, 46, 10, and the like); of the
mind: xatnpticpeévos ws etc. so instructed, equipped, as
ete. [ef. B. 311 (267); but al. take xarnpr. as a circum-
stantial ptep. when perfected shall be as (not ‘ above’)
his master (see Mey. in loc.) ; on this view the passage
may be referred to the next head], Lk. vi. 40; mid. to
fit or frame for one’s self, prepare: atvov, Mt. xxi. 16 (fr.
Ps. viii. 3; Sept. for 10%); odpua, Heb. x. 5. c. ethi-
cally, to strengthen, perfect, complete, make one what he
ought to be: rwa, [1 Pet. v. 10 (see above) ]; Gal. vi. 1
(of one who by correction may be brought back into the
right way); pass., 2 Co. xili. 11; twa év ravri épym [(T
WH om.) ] dyaé@, Heb. xiii: 21; xarnpriopévor ev T@ aiT@
voi xtA. of those who have been restored to harmony
(so mavta eis rwvro, Hdt. 5, 106; ta xaraptic On 9) oTacwd-
(ovea wonis, Dion. Hal. antt. 3,10), 1 Co.i.10. [Comp.:
mpo-kataptiCa. | *
kat-Gpticts, -ews, 7, (katapTi¢@, q. v-), a strengthening,
perfecting, of the soul, (Vulg. consummatio): 2 Co. xiii.
9. (a training, disciplining, instructing, Plut. Them. 2,
7, fivar.]) 7 Alexie, 1g)
Katapticpds, -ov, 6, l. q. KaTdpricts, q. V-: Tivds els TL,
Eph. iv. 12. [(Galen, al.)]*
Kata-celw: 1 aor. katéceica; 1. to shake down,
throw down, (cf. xara, III]. 1; (fr. Thue. on)]. 2.
to shake: thv xeipa, to make a sign by shaking (i. e. rap-
idly waving) the hand (Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 28; ras
x«ipas, ib. de Josepho § 36); of one about to speak who
signals for silence, Acts xix. 33; hence simply xaraceiewv
twit, to make a sign, to signal with the hand to one, Xen.
Cyr. 5, 4, 4; Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 2; then, with a disre-
gard of the origin of the phrase, the instrument. dat. r7
xerpt was added, Polyb. 1, 78, 3; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 48;
so of one about to make an address: Acts xii. 17; xiii.
16; xxi. 40; Joseph. antt. 8, 11, 2.*
katc-cKkamTw: 1 aor. karéoxaya; pf. pass. ptep. kare-
oxappévos; to dig under, dig down, demolish, destroy: ri,
Ro. xi. 3, fr. 1 K. xix.10; pass. Acts xv. 16[RG LI, fr.
Amos ix. 11 [(but see xataorpépw)]. (Tragg., Thuc.,
Xen., sqq.).*
kata-ckevatw: fut. karacxevdow; 1 aor. karecKevaca ;
Pass., pres. karackevafouar; pf. ptep. xarecxevacpevos }
1 aor. xateoxevacOnv; to furnish, equip, prepare, make
ready ; a. of one who makes any thing ready for
/,
KaTacKnVOw
pers. or thing: ryy ddov, Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii.
27; pf. pass. ptep. prepared in spirit, Lk. i. 17 (Xen.
Cyr. 5, 5, 10). b. of builders, to construc‘, erect,
with the included idea of adorning and equipping with
all things necessary, (often so in Grk. auth.; ef. Bleek,
Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 398 sq.): otkov, Heb. iii. 3 sq. ;
kiBordv, Heb. xi. 7; 1 Pet. iii. 20; oxnvqv, Heb. ix. 2, 6;
Sept. for x3, Is. xl. 28; xliii. 7.*
kata-ocKnvow, -o, inf. -oxynvoiv (Mt. xiii. 32 L T Tr WH,
Mk. iv. 32 WH, see drodexarow; [but also -cxnvodv, Mt.
Le. RG; Mk.l.c. RGLTTr; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 123]);
fut. karacknveow; 1 aor. Kateckjveca; prop. to pitch
one’s tent, to fix one’s abode, to dwell: éf’ édmids, Acts ii.
26 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9; foll. by év w. dat. of place, Mt.
xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19; tad w. acc. of place, Mk. iv. 32.
(Xen., Polyb., Diod., al.; kareoxjvacer 6 beds TH vag
tour, Joseph. antt. 3, 8,5; add, Sir. xxiv. 4, 8; Sept.
mostly for }3w.) *
KaTa-cK}Vwrs, -ews, 7, (KaTacknyd@, q. V.), prop. the
pitching of tents, encamping; place of tarrying, encamp-
ment, abode: of the haunts of birds, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix.
58; (for ;2u, Ezek. xxxvii. 27; cf. Sap. ix. 8; Tob. i.
4; Polyb. 11, 26,5; Diod. 17, 95).*
kata-cKid{w; to overshadow, cover with shade, [see ard,
II. 3]: ri, Heb. ix.5. (Hes., Eur., Plato, al.; carackida,
Hom. Od. 12, 436.)*
Kata-ocKotréw, -@: 1 aor. inf. karacxomnoa; to inspect,
view closely, in order to spy out and plot against: ri, Gal.
ii. 4; (of a reconnoitre or treacherous examination, 2S.
x. 3; Josh. ii. 2 sq.; 1 Chr. xix.3; Eur. Hel. 1607 (1623);
so used, esp. in mid., in the other Grk. writ. fr. Xen.
down).*
KarTd-ckomTr0s, -ov, 6, (karackéenTopat [1. q. KatacKoréw |),
an inspector, a spy: Heb. xi. 31. (Gen. xlii. 9,11; 1S.
xxvi. 4; 1 Mace. xii. 26; in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down.) *
Kata-cobifopat: 1 aor. ptcp. xaracodicdpevos; (co-
difw); dep. mid., in prof. auth. sometimes also pass.; to
circumvent by artifice or fraud, conquer by subtle devices ;
to outwit, overreach; to deal craftily with: twa, Acts vii.
19 fr. Ex.i.10. (Judith v. 11; x. 19; Diod., Philo,
Joseph., Leian., al.) *
Kata-cté\Aw: 1 aor. ptep. karacreidas; pf. pass. ptep.
KATETTAAPEVOS 5 a. prop. to send or put down, to
lower. b. to put or keep down one who is roused or
incensed, to repress, restrain, appease, quiet: tuvd, Acts
xix. 35 sq.; 3 Macc. vi. 1; Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 7; b. j.
4,4, 4; Plut. mor. p. 207 e.*
Karé-oTnpa, -ros, 70, (kabiornpt), (Lat. status, habitus),
[demeanor, deportment, bearing]: Tit. ii. 3. (3 Mace. v.
45; Joseph. b. j. 1,1, 4 [of a city; cf. drpepaiw To Kara-
ornpart mpos T. Oavarov amyet, Joseph. antt. 15, 7,5; Plut.
Marcell. 23,6; cf. Tib. Gracch. 2,2. See Wetst. on
Tit. 1. c.; ef. Ignat. ad Trall. 3, 2 (and Jacobson or
Zahn in loc.) }.) *
Kara-croAt, -7js, 7, (kararréAha, q. V-) 5 1. prop.
a lowering, letting down; hence 2. iv bibl. Grk.
twice, a garment let down, dress, attire: 1 Tim. ib OS
Vulg. habitus, which the translator, acc. to later Lat.
337
KaTat One
usage, seems to understand of clothing (cf. the French
Vhabit) ; [cf. Joseph. b. j. 2, 8,4]; for nuyn, Is. lxi. 3,
with which in mind Hesych. says karaoro\iy + meptBoAnv
(cf. W. 23, but esp. Ellicott on i Tim. 1. ¢.].*
kata-crpédw : 1 aor. karéorpea; pf. pass. ptep. xare-
orpappevos (Acts xv. 16 TL WH, but Tr -orpeupévos; cf.
WH. App. p. 170 sq.]); 1. to turn over, turn un-
der: the soil with a plow, Xen. oec. 17, 10. 210
overturn, overthrow, throw down: ri, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi.
15; [rd xareorp. ruins], Acts xv. 16 T Tr WH [(cf. xara-
oxantw)]|; so Hag. ii. 22; Job ix. 5; Joseph. antt. 8, 7,
6; Anthol. 11, 163,6; Diog. L. 5, 82.*
kara-oTpyvidw: 1 aor. subjunc. ckaracrpnyidow [ (fut. 1
Tim. v.11 Lchm. mrg.)]; (see orpnvidw) ; to feel the im-
pulses of sexual destre, [A. V. to grow wanton]; (Vulg.
luxurior) : twos, to one’s loss [A. V. against], 1 Tim. v.
11; Ignat. ad Antioch. c. 11.*
Kara-ctpopt, -7s, 7, (karaotpepw), (Vulg. subversio,
[eversio]), overthrow, destruction: of cities, 2 Pet. ii. 6
[WH om. Tr mrg. br. xaraorp.] (Gen. xix. 29); metaph.
of the extinction of a spirit of consecration to Christ,
[A. V. the subverting]: 2 Tim. ii. 14. (Aeschyl. Eum.
490.) *
KaTa-cTpovvupr: 1 aor. pass. katrectpwOny; to strew over
(the ground) ; to prostrate, slay, [cf. our to lay low]: 1 Co.
x. 5[A. V. overthrown]. (Num. xiv. 16; Judith vii. 14;
xiv.4; 2 Mace. v. 26, ete.; Hdt. 8,53; 9, 76; Xen. Cyr.
3, 3, 64.)*
kara-ctpw; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. prop. to draw
down, pull down, [see cara, III. 1]. 2. to draw along,
drag forcibly, (rwa dia eons ayopas, Philo in Flace. § 20;
lee. ad Gaium § 19): twa mpds tov xpernv, Lk. xii. 58.
(Cie. pro Mil. e. 14, 38 quom in judicium detrahi non
posset.) *
katra-chotw [or -oparrw]: 1 aor. xaréogaga; to kill off
[ef. xara, III. 1], to slaughter: Lk. xix. 27. (Sept.;
Hat., Tragg., Xen., Joseph. antt. 6, 6,4; Ael. v. h. 13,
2; Hdian. 5, 5, 16 [8 ed. Bekk.].) *
Kara-cppayltw: pf. pass. ptep. carergpayiopevos; (0
cover with a seal [see xara, III. 3], to seal up, close with
a seal: BuBrtov ofpayiow, Rev. v. 1. (Job ix. 7; Sap.
ii. 5; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Plut., Leian., al.) *
Katd-oxerts, -ews, 7, (karéxo), Sept. often for AMR,
possession ; 1. a holding back, hindering: anonym.
in Walz, Rhetor. i. p. 616, 20. 2. a holding fast,
possession: yi Soiva eis xaracy. to give in possession
the land, Acts vii. 5, as in Gen. xvii. 8; Deut. xxxii. 49
Alex.; Ezek. xxxiii. 24; xxxvi. 2 sq. 5; Joseph. antt.
9,1, 2; [Test. xii. Patr., test. Benj. § 10]; w. gen. of the
subj. ray éOvav, of the territory possessed by [the pos-
session of | the nations, Acts vii. 45; (a portion given to
keep, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 40 [cf. Ps. ii. 8]).*
kata-r(Onpr: 1 aor. karéOnxa; 2 aor. mid. inf. caradeé-
c6a; [fr. Hom. down]; to lay down [see xard, III. 1],
deposit, lay up: act. prop. twa év pynpeio, Mk. xv. 46
{L Tr WH 26nxev]; mid. to lay by or lay up for one’s
self, for future use: rwi, with any one; xdpw [better -ra;
see xdprs, init.] and xdpiras xarar. rim, to lay up favor
KATATOMLN
for one’s self with any one, to gain favor with (to do some-
thing for one which may win favor), Acts xxiv. 27; xxv.
9; so Hdt. 6,41; Thuc. 1,33; Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 26; Dem.
193, 22 (20); qudiav rwi, 1 Mace. x. 235 evepyeoia rivi,
Joseph. antt. 11, 6,5; [cf. Dem. u.s.]. [Comp.: ovy-
xarariOnjs. | *
kata-rouh, -js, 4, (fr. kararéuve [cf. card, III. 4] to cut
up, mutilate), mutilation (Lat. concisio): Phil. iii. 2,
where Paul sarcastically alludes to the word reperouy
which follows in vs. 3; as though he would say, Keep
your eye on that boasted circumcision, or to call it by its
true name ‘concision’ or ‘mutilation.’ Cf. the similar
passage, Gal. v. 12; see dmokérra.™
kara-rofevo: 1 fut. pass. xatarofevOnoopuar; to shoot
down or thrust through with an arrow: twa Boris, Heb.
xii. 20 Ree. fr. Ex. xix.138. (Num. xxiv. 8; Ps. x. (xi.)
2; Hdt., Thuc., Xen., al.) *
Kara-Tpéx@: 2 aor. karédpapov; to run down, hasten
down : émt twas, to quell a tumult, Acts xxi. 32. [Hdt. on.] *
[kat-avydfo: 1 aor. inf. xaravyaca; to beam down
upon; to shine forth, shine brightly: 2 Co. iv. 4 Lmrg.
Tr mrg., where al. avyaca q. v.; cf. poriouds, b.; (trans.
Sap. xvii. 5, etc.; intrans. 1 Mace. vi. 39; Heliod. 5, 31).*]
katapdye, see xatecbio.
kata-hépw; 1 aor. karnveyxa; Pass., pres. karapéepopat ;
1 aor. xatnvéxOnv; [fr. Hom. down]; to bear down, bring
down, cast down: wijpov, prop. to cast.a pebble or calcu-
lus se. into the urn, i. e. to give one’s vote, to approve,
Acts xxvi. 10; airtopara xara twos (see xara, I. 2 b. [but
the crit. edd. reject cara xrd.]), Acts xxv. 7 LT Tr WH.
Pass. to be borne down, to sink, (from the window to the
pavement), dio Tov Umvov, from sleep (from the effect of
his deep sleep [cf. B. 322 (277); W. 371 (848)]), Acts
xx. 9°; metaph. lo be weighed down by, overcome, carried
away, katrapepspevos Umrv@ Babei, sunk in a deep sleep,
Acts xx. 9°; of a different sort [contra W. 431 (401)] is
the expression in prof. auth. carapépopar cis tmvov, to
sink into sleep, drop asleep, Joseph. antt. 2, 5,5; Hdian.
2,1, 3 [2]; 9,6 [5]; rotow vmvorow, Hipp. p. 1137.
[(Kuhn iii. p. 539)], and in the same sense simply xara-
hepopar; cf. [Land S. s.v. I. 2d.]; Steph. Thes. iv. col.
1286 [where the pass. fr. Acts is fully discussed ].*
kata-hevym: 2 aor. xarehvyov; [fr. Hadt. down]; to
flee away, flee for refuge: foll. by eis w. ace. of place,
Acts xiv. 6; of karadvydvres, we who [cf. B. § 144, 9 ¢.]
have fled from sc. the irreligious mass of mankind, foll.
by an infin. of purpose, Heb. vi. 18; cf. Delitzsch ad loc.*
kara-p0elpw: pf. pass. ptep. carebOappévos; 2 fut. pass.
xarapapnoopa ; [see xara, III. 4]; 1. to corrupt,
deprave; katepOappévot tov vody, corrupted in mind, 2
Tim. iii. 8. 2. to destroy; pass. to be destroyed, to
perish: foll. by ev w. dat. indicating the state, 2 Pet. ii.
12 RG. [From Aeschyl. down.]*
kata-pirew, -@; impf. carepidovv; 1 aor. karepirnoa; to
kiss much, kiss again and again, kiss tenderly, (Lat. d e-
osculor, ete.): twa, Mt. xxvi. 49; Mk. xiv. 45; Lk. vii.
38,45; xv.20; Acts xx.37. (Tob. vii.6; 3 Mace. v. 49;
Xen. Cyr.6,4,10; 7,5,32; Polyb. 15,1, 7; Joseph. antt.
338
KATEVAVTE
7,11, 7; Ael. v.h. 13,4; Plut. Brut. 16; Lceian. dial.
deor. 4,5; 5,3; dudcivand xcaragude are distinguished
in Xen. mem. 2, 6,33; Plut. Alex.c.67. Sept. for pw,
prop. to join mouth to mouth.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p.
780; Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 18, note 74.*
kara-hpovéw, -@; fut. karappovnow ; laor. carepdvnca;
[fr. Hdt. down]; to contemn, despise, disdain, think little
or nothing of: w. gen. of the obj. [B. § 132, 15], Mt. vi.
24; xviii. 10; Lk. xvi. 13; Ro. ii.4; 1 Co. xi. 22; 1 Tim.
Ve D2 view’. 2ekeetaai-) OnE bypxa. 2.7
katadpovytis, -ov, 6, (katappovew), adespiser: Acts. xill.
41. (Hab.i.5; ii.5; Zeph. iii.4; Philo, leg. ad Gaium
§ 41; Joseph. antt. 6,14, 4; b. j. 2, 8,3; Plut. Brut. 12,
and in eccl. writ.) *
kata-xéw: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. karéxeev (see exxéw); to
pour down upon; pour over, pour upon: énitiy kepadny
(LT Tr WH enirijs cehadjs), Mt. xxvi. 7; xara rns kepa-
Ajs (Plat. rep. 3 p. 398 a.; Epict. diss. 2, 20, 29), Mk.
xiv. 3 (where L T Tr WH om. kara [cf. W. 381 (357) sq.;
Hdt. 4, 62; Plat. lege. 7 p. 814b.; Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 36,
2. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 66 sq.]).*
kata-x@dvios, -ov, (kara [see xara, III. 3], yar [the
earth ]), subterranean, Vulg. infernus: plur., of those who
dwell in the world below, i.e. departed souls [ef. W. § 34,
2; but al. make the adj. a neut. used indefinitely; see
Bp. Lehtft. in loc.], Phil. ii. 10. (Hom., Dion. H., An-
thol., etc., Inserr.) *
KaTa-xpdopat, -Guat; 1 aor. mid. inf. caraypnoacba;
in class. Grk. 1. to use much or excessively or ill. 2
to use up, consume by use, (Germ. v erbrauchen). 3.
to use fully, the card intensifying the force of the simple
verb (Germ. g ¢brauchen), (Plato, Dem., Diod., Joseph.,
al.): 1 Co. vii. 31 [ef. B. § 133,18; W. 209 sq. (197)];
Twi, ib. ix. 18.*
Kataxpixo: 1 aor. kareyrvEa; to cool off, (make) cool:
Lk. xvi. 24. (Gen. xviii. 4; Hippocr., Aristot., Theophr.,
Blut.gal.) *
katelSwdos, -ov, (card and eiSwAov; after the analogy of
katapreos, KaTdyopnos, KaTaxpvaos, Katadevdpos, etc., [see
card, ITI. 3, and ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 638]), full of idols:
Acts xvii. 16. (Not found in prof. auth. [cf. W. § 34,
3%
kat-€vavtt, adv.; not found in prof. auth. [W. 102
(97)]; in Sept. mostly for 7), 339; »99, (see évayre and
drévavtt) ; prop. over against, opposite, before: foll. by the
gen. [B. 319 (273); cf. W. § 54, 6], Mk. xi. 2; xii. 41
[Tr txt. WH mrg. drévavre]; xiii. 3, and LT Tr WH in
Mt. xxi. 2; L Tr WH txt. also in xxvii. 24; 9 xarévayre
xopn, the village opposite, Lk. xix. 30. Metaph., w. gen.
of pers., before one i. e. he being judge (see évaimcoy [esp.
2e.and 1 ¢.]): rod Oeov, Ro. iv. 17 (which, by a kind of
attraction somewhat rare, is to be resolved xarévavrt cod,
@ émiorevoe, who is the father of us all acc. to the judg-
ment and appointment of God, whom he believed, —
the words xaOas ... réOeuxa forming a parenthesis; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc.; [B. 287 (247); but al. resolve it,
karévavtt T. Oeod Karév. ob eniat., cf. Meyer (per contra
ed. Weiss) ad loc.; W. 164 (155)]); or, he being witness
KATEVOTLOV
{in the sight of ]: rod beov, L T Tr WH in 2 Co. ii. 17 and
9
kat-evdmiov, ady., not met with in prof. auth. ((W. 102
(97) ] see evamov), over against, opposite, before the face of,
before the presence of, in the sight of, before: foll. by the gen.
[B. 319 (273 sq.); cf. W. § 54,6]; a. prop. of place,
Jude 24 (Lev. iv.17; Josh. i. 5; iii. 7; xxiii. 9). b.
metaph. having one as it were before the eyes, before one
as witness: rod Oeod, Rec. in 2 Co. ii. 17; xii. 19, (see
karévavrt) ; before God as judge, Eph. i. 4; Col. i. 22 [ef.
Bp. Lghtft. in loc.; also B. 173, 180, 188].*
kat-efovord{; not found in prof. auth.; to exercise au-
thority, wield power, [see xard, III. 3]: rwds, over one,
Mitr xx. 25 5) Mikex 49"
kat-epydfopat; pf. inf. careipydoda (1 Pet. iv. 3 LT
Tr WH); 1 aor. mid. xaretpyacduny, and Katnpyacdjnv
(Ro. vii. 8 T Tr.; [2 Co. vii. 11 T]); 1 aor. pass. karep-
yaoOny, and katnpyaoOnv (2 Co. xii. 12 Tdf.); see épyd-
Comat, init.; adepon. mid. verb; [acc. to Fritzsche, Rom.
i. p. 107 the «ard is either intensive (Lat. per ficere) or
descensive (Lat. per petrare) |; a. to perform, ac-
complish, achieve, [R. V. often work]: Ro. vii. 15, 17 sq.
20; ri dia rivos (gen. of pers.), Ro. xv. 183 dmavra ka-
tepyacduevoe having gone through every struggle of the
fight, Eph. vi. 13 [ef. Meyer in loc.]; onpeia, pass. 2 Co.
xii. 12; of disgraceful actions, i. q. to perpetrate, Ro. i.
sm wos OO: Ose l Peta.) Ss b. to work out
(Lat. efficere), i. e. to do that from which something results ;
of man: tv cwrnpiav, make every effort to obtain salva-
tion, Phil. ii. 12; of things: bring about, result in, Ro. iv.
lore vei Ss) Vilas 2c. vil-§ 10) (where LT Ir WH
épya¢.) ; Jas. i. 3, and RG in 20; ri run, Ro. vii. 13; 2
Won ivenl 5) avaleokl etx. 1, C. Katepy- Twva eis TL, to
fashion, i. e. render one fit for a thing: 2Co.v.5. (Often
in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Hdt. down; several times in
Sept.)*
Kat-€pxouar; 2 aor. xar7AOov, 1 pers. plur. carnAOapev
(Acts xxvii.5 T Tr WH; on which form see drépyopat,
init.) ; (fr. Hom. down]; to come down, go down; prop. of
one who goes from a higher to a lower locality: foll. by
eis w. acc. of place, Lk. iv. 31; Acts viii. 5; xiii. 4; [xix.
1 T Tr mrg.]; and LT Tr WH in xv. 30; foll. by and
w. gen. of place, Lk. ix. 837; Acts xv. 1; xvili. 5; xxi.
10; foll. by dé and eis, Acts xi. 27; xii. 19; of those ,
who come to a place by ship [Eustath. (ad Hom.) 1408,
29 (Od. 1, 183) catedOeiv, od pdvov 7d dmdas KaTw mov
edOeiv, GANG Kal Td €s Ayweva EAOciv, Sorep Kai karaBnvat k.
karatrhedoat k. Katay Onvat k. KaTapat, TO eAAipevioat Aeyerar;
also 1956, 35 (Od. 24, 115) karAAOov i) dvi rod evehipevi-
anv, &s modaxod éppébn, i} avti rod dmhads AOov; cf.
Ebeling, Lex. Homer. s. v.]: foll. by es, Acts xviii. 22;
xxi. 8 LT Tr WH; xxvii. 5; ampds teva, Acts ix. 32.
Metaph. of things sent down from heaven by God: Jas.
Hite tb s*
xat-<oOtw, ptep. plur. caréaOovres (Mk. xii. 40 Tr WH;
see écOlw and 206; cf. Fritzsche, Hdbch. z. d. Apokry-
phen, i. p. 150 [who says, ‘The shorter form occurs freq.
in the Sept.. Lev. xix. 26: Sir. xx. 15, (16), elsewh. almost
389
Katey
exclusively poetic; see Bitm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. p- 185’
(cf. Veitch s. v. éo6i@)]); fut. carapdyopai (Jn. ii. 17 GL
TTr WH; see éc6iw); 2 aor. karépayov; Sept. for
528; 1. prop. to consume by eating, to eat up, de-
vour: ti, of birds, Mt. xiii. 4; Mk.iv.4; Lk. viii. 5; of
a dragon, Rev. xii. 4; of a man, eating up the little book,
i.e. eagerly taking its entire contents into his inmost soul,
and, as we say, digesting it (borrowed fr. the fig. in Ezek.
ii. 10; ili. 1-3, ef. Jer. xv. 16): Rev. x. 9 Sq. 4,
Metaph. in various uses; a. to devour i. e. squander,
waste, substance: Lk. xv. 30 (often so in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. Od. 8, 315; 15, 12 down; devorare patrimonium,
Catull. 29, 23). b. to devour i. e. forcibly appro-
priate: ras oixias tév ynpdv, widows’ property, Mt. xxiii.
14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40 [cf. B. 79 (69); W. § 29,
2) Pielke 47 c. with an ace. of the pers. a.
to strip one of his goods: 2 Co. xi. 20. B. lo ruin (by
the infliction of injuries): Gal. v. 15. d. of fire, to
devour i. e. ulterly consume, destroy: twa, Rev. xi. 5; xx.
9. e. of the consumption of the strength of body
and mind by strong emotions: teva, Jn. ii. 17 (Ps. lxviii.
(Ixix.) 10; Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 1).*
kat-ev0dvw: 1 aor. inf. karevddvac; 3 pers. sing. opt.
karevOuvat; (see card, III. 2); Sept. mostly for Ww» and
j3, PDI; to make straight, guide, direct: rods wédas «is
6ddv eip. Lk. i. 79; rHv 6ddv mpos twa, of the removal of
the hindrances to coming to one, 1 Th. ili. 11; rds xap-
dias (1 Chr. xxix. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 3) eis thy dyamny rot
Geov, 2 Th. iii. 5. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.) *
kat-evdoyew: impf. 3 pers. sing. karevddyer (T WH)
and xarnudoyee (Tr), [cf. eddoxéw, init.]; to call down
blessings on: twa, Mk.x.16 TTrWH. (Tob. [x. 13];
xi. 16; Plut. amator. 4.) *
kat-eb-lornit: io set up against; [2 aor. act. 3 pers.
plur.] careréurnoav ro Tava, they rose up against Paul,
i. e. with hostile intent, Acts xviii. 12. Found nowhere
else.*
kat-€xo; impf. xaretyov; 2 aor. subjunc. xaracye;
impf. pass. carecxdpnv ; 1. to hold back, detain, re-
tain ; a. rivd, from going away, foll. by rod py w. inf.,
Lk. iv. 42 [B. § 140, 16 B.; cf. W. 604 (561)]; teva mpds
éuautdv, Philem. 13. Pass. (as often in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1677"; [L. and 8. s. v.
TI. 6]), of some troublesome condition or circumstance
by which one is held as it were bound: voonpart, Jn. v.
4[GT Tr WHom. the passage] ; év ru, Ro. vii. 6. b.
to restrain, hinder (the course or progress of): tr. ad7-
Gevav év adrxia, Ro. i. 18; absol. rd xaréxov, that which
hinders, sc. Antichrist from making his appearance (see
dyriyporos); the power of the Roman empire is meant;
6 xaréxov he that hinders, checks, sc. the advent of Anti-
christ, denotes the one in whom that power is lodged, the
Roman emperor: 2 Th. ii. 6 sq. (ef., besides De Wette
and Liinemann ad loc., [Bp. Lghtft. in B.D. s. v. Thess.
Second Ep. to the], esp. Schneckenburger in the Jahr-
biicher f. deutsche Theol. for 1859 p. 421 sq.).
(se. thy vadv) eis THY aly:addv, to check the ship’s head
way [better (cf. the preceding context) to hold or head
KaTéex@
KATNYOPEW
the ship, cf. Hdt. 7,59. 188 ete.; Bos, Ellips. (ed. Schaefer)
p- 818; see, too, Od. 11, 455 sq. (cf. Eustath. 1629, 18;
Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 310, 7 sqq.); but Passow (as
below) et al. take the verb as intrans. in such a connec-
tion, viz. to make for; cf. Kypke, Observv. ii. 144] in
order to land, Acts xxvii. 40 (Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 29 xara-
oxov em tiv ABepyida; many other exx. are given in
Passow s. v. II. 3; [L. and S. s. v. B. 2]). c. to hold
fast, keep secure, keep firm possession of: with acc. of the
thing, rév Adyov, Lk. viii. 15; foll. by the orat. obliq., 1 Co.
xv. 2 [B. §§ 139, 58; 150, 20; W. 561 (522)]; ras mapa-
Sdoeis, 1 Co. xi. 2; 16 kaddv, 1 Th. v. 21; rHv wappynoiav
[r. dpxny ete.] pexpe TéAovs BeBaiav xaracxeiv, Heb. iii. 6,
143 riv dpodoyiay ths eAmidos axhw7, Heb. x. 23. 2.
equiv. to Lat. obtinere, i. e. a. to get possession of,
take: Mt. xxi. 38 RG; Lk. xiv. 9. b. to possess: 1
Co. vii.130; 2 Co. vi. 10.*
KaTnyopéw, -@; impf. carnydpouy; fut. xarnyopnow; 1
aor. katnydpnoa}; pres. pass. karnyopodpat ; (kara and dyo-
peva, prop. to speak against [cf. card, III. 7] in court, in
the assembly of the people), to accuse ; a. before a
judge: absol. [to make accusation], Acts xxiv. 2, 19;
twvds, to accuse one, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 2; Lk. vi. 7 T
Raitt VIEL Peo 40h ri bro: sxx 1 Os tehtaenvallenGrs
Acts xxv. 5; xxviii. 19; with the addition of a gen. of
the thing of which 9ne is accused (as Dem. 515 fin.):
Acts xxiv. 8; xxv. 11, (unless it be thought preferable
to regard the relative in these instances as in the gen.
by attraction [so B. § 132, 16 fin.], since the com. constr.
in Grk. authors is karmy. ti twos, cf. Matthiae § 370
Anm. 2 p. 849 sq., and § 378 p. 859; cf. W. § 30, 9 a.);
twos tepi twos, Acts xxiv. 13 (Thuc. 8, 85; Xen. Hell. 1,
7, 2); w. gen. of pers. and acc. of the thing, Mk. xv. 3
(unless zoA\a should be taken adverbially : much, vehe-
mently) ; méoa, ib. 4 LT Tr WH (Eur. Or. 28); foll.
by xara w. gen. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 14 (Xen. Hell. 1, 7,
9 [cf. W. § 28,1; p. 431 (402); B. § 132, 16]); pass.
to be accused (as 2 Macc. x. 13; Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 25; cf.
B. § 134, 4): t26 riwos, Mt. xxvii. 12; Acts xxii. 30 LT
Tr WH for Ree. mapa (16 ri krd. why [A. V. wherefore]
he was accused; unless it is to be explained, what accu-
sation was brought forward etc.) ; 6 xatnyopotpevos, Acts
xxv. 16. b. of an extra-judicial accusation (Xen.
mem. 1, 3, 4): absol. Ro. ii. 15; rtuwds, Jn. v. 45 [cf. B.
295 (254)]; Rev. xii. 10 RG@Tr; solecistically rwd, Rev.
xii. 10 L. 1 WH (ef. B. § 132, 16].*
[SYN. airrGo@ar, diaBdrAdAEry, eyKarery, emixarecy,
kaTnyopeiv. airiao0a to accuse with primary reference to
the ground of accusation (airfa), the crime; Katnyopety to
accuse formally and before a tribunal, bring a charge against
(kard suggestive of animosity) publicly; éyxadeiv to accuse
with publicity («aAeiy), but not necessarily formally or before
a tribunal; émixadciy ‘to ery out upon’, suggestive of public-
ity and hostility ; d:a8déAAew prop. to make a verbal assault
which reaches its goal (Sid); in distinction from the words
which allude to authorship (air:douat), to judicial procedure -
(karnyopéw), or to open averment (éykardéw, emixadrdw), dia-
BdddAw expresses the giving currency to a damaging insinua-
tion. d:dBodAos a secret and calumnious, in distinction from
kathyopos an open and formal, accuser. Schmidt ch. 5.]
340
KaTLOV UW
Karnyopla, -as, 7, (karnyopos), [fr. Hdt. down], aceusa-
tion, charge: w. gen. of the pers. accused, Lk. vi. 7 R G
LTrmrg.; [Jn. xviii. 29 T WH]; xara tivos, Jn. xviii.
29 [RGLTr]; 1 Tim. v.19; w. gen. of the crime, Tit.
re (554
KaThyopos, -ov, 6, (karnyopew [q. v. ad fin.]), an acs
cuser: Jn. viii. 10; Acts xxiii. 30, 35; xxiv. 8 [R]; xxv.
16, 18; Rev. xii. 10R Tr. [(Fr. Soph. and Hdt. down.)]*
Kathywp, 6, an accuser: Rev. xii. 10 GLTWH. It
is a form unknown to Grk. writ., a literal transcription
of the Hebr. 1, 0p, a name given to the devil by the
Rabbins; cf. Buxtorf, Lex. Chald. talm. et rabb. p. 2009
(p. 997 ed. Fischer); [Schéttgen, Horae Hebr. i. p. 1121
sq.; cf. B. 25 (22) ]*
Kath ea, -as, 7, (fr. karnpns, of a downcast look; and
this fr. card, and ra dan the eyes; Etym. Magn. [496, 53]
katipeva* amd Tov Kat 7a pan Baddew Tods dvetdiCopevovs
i Avrovpévovs; because, as Plut. de dysopia [al. de vitioso
pudore (528 e.)] ¢. 1 says, it is Adan Kdtw Bdérew trou
ovca), prop. a downcast look expressive of sorrow; hence
shame, dejection, gloom, [A. V. heaviness]: Jas. iv. 9.
(Hom. Il.'3, 51; 16, 498 ete.; Thuc. 7, 75; Joseph.
antt. 138,16, 1; Plut. Cor. 20; [Pelop. 33, 3, and often;
Dion. Hal., Char., ete.]; often in Philo.) *
Kat-nXxé, -d: 1 aor. karnxnoa; Pass., pres. catrnxovpar;
pf.xatnynuat; 1 aor. katny7Onv; nowhere met with in the
O. T.; very rare in prof. auth. ; 1. prop. to sound
towards, sound down upon, resound: dppovia katnxet THs
Oadarrys, Philostr. p. 791 [icon. 1,19]; to charm with re-
sounding sound, to fascinate, twa pvdos, Leian. Jup.
trag. 39. 2. to teach orally, to instruct: Leian. asin.
§ 48; Philopatr.17. In the N. T. only used by Luke
and Paul: twa, 1 Co. xiv. 19; pass. ek tod vdpuov, by
hearing the law, wont to be publicly read in the syna-
gogues, Ro. ii. 18; w. ace. of the thing, aitdés ce moANG Ka-
TXNTw TOY «yvoovpevayv, Joseph. de vita sua § 65 fin.; w.
ace. of a thing and of a pers., rod adnOovs Adyou Bpayéa
katnxnoas pe, Clem. hom. 1, 13; pass. w. acc. of the
thing: rv 6ddv rod Kupiov, Acts xviii. 25; tov Adyov, Gal.
vi. 6; hence some [(see Meyer in loc.)] resolve Lk. i. 4
thus: mept trav Adyav, ods katnxnOns (see below). 3.
to inform by word of mouth; pass. to be orally informed :
foll. by drt, Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 30; repé revos (gen.
of pers.), foll. by érz, Acts xxi. 21; w. acc. of the thing, dy
KaThxnvrat rept cov i. &. ToUT@y, a kTh. ibid. 24 (xarnyndets
Tept TaV TULBEBnKSrwv, [pseudo-] Plut. de fluviis [7, 2];
8,1; 7,1). To this construction the majority refer Lk.
i. 4, construing it thus: rv doddd. trav Adyov, rept Sv
xatnx7/Ons [W. 165 (156); B.§ 143, 7; (see above)]. Cf.
Gilbert, Dissertatio de christianae catecheseos historia
(Lips. 1836) Pt. i. p. 1 sqq.; Zezschwitz, System der christl.
Katechetik (Leipz. 1863) i. p. 17 sqq.; [and for eccl.
usage, Suicer, Thes. ii. 69 sqq.; Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
kat’ iSfav, see idcos, 2.
kat-tdw, -@: pf. pass. katiopar; (see ids, 2); to rust over
[cf. kard, III. 3], cover with rust: Jas. v. 3. (Epictet.
diss. 4, 6, 14; [Sir. xii. 11].)*
kat-cxto: impf. Karicxvoy; fut. caticxiow; 1 aor
KATOLKEW
subjunc. 2 pers. plur. xaturyvonre (Lk. xxi. 36 T Tr txt.
WH); Sept. mostly for pin; among Grk. writ. esp. by
Polyb., Diod., Dion. H.; prop. to be strong to another’s
detriment, to prevail against; to be superior in strength ;
to overpower: foll. by an inf., Lk. xxi. 36 T Tr txt. WH
[prevail (i. e. have full strength) to escape ete.]; to over-
come, twos (Jer. xv. 18), Mt. xvi. 18 (meaning, ‘not even
the gates of Hades —than which nothing was supposed
to be stronger— shall surpass the church in strength’);
absol. to prevail (i. e. succeed, accomplish one’s desire) :
Lk. xxiii. 23.*
KaT-o.Kéw,-@; 1 aor. KaT@Knoa (fr. Soph. and Hdt.
. down]; Sept. times uncounted for 2w, more rarely for
{ov ; 1. intrans. to dwell, settle; © a. prop.: foll. by
ev w. dat. of place, Lk. xiii. 4 [Tr WHom. év]; Acts i. 20;
5 [T WHurre. eis (see below) ]; vii. 2,4, 483; ix. 22; xi.
29; xiii. 27; xvii. 24; Heb. xi. 9; Rev. xiii. 12; foll. by
eis (a pregnant construction; see eis, C. 2 p. 186*), Mt. ii.
235 iv.13; Acts vil. 4; émt ris ys, Rev. iii. 10; vi. 10;
Vili. 13; xi. 10; xiii. 8,14; xiv.6 Rec.; xvii. 8, (Num.
Xl. 33; xiv. 14; xxxv. 32, 34); én wav 76 mpdcwmov
[mavros mpocarov L.T Tr WH (cf. emi, C. 1. 1a.)] ris yijs,
Acts xvii. 26; dzov, Rev. ii. 13; so that écet must be added
mentally, Acts xxii. 12; demons taking possession of the
bodies of men are said xarovkety éxet, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi.
26. b. metaph., divine powers, influences, etc., are
said xarotkeiv év tu (dat. of pers.), or ev TH kapdia Tiv6s,
to dwell in his soul, to pervade, prompt, govern it: 6
eds ev nuiv, Barn. ep. 16,8; 6 Xptords, Eph. iii. 17; the
Iloly Spirit, Jas. iv.5 RG (Herm. past., mand. 5, 2; [sim.
5, 5etc.; cf. Harnack’s reff. on mand. 3,1]); td mAnpopa
ths Oedrnros in Christ, Col. ii. 9, cf. 1.19; 97 codia ev oa-
part, Sap. i. 4; Sukasoovvn is said to dwell where right-
eousness prevails, is practised, 2 Pet. ili. 13. 2.
trans. to dwell in, inhabit: with acc. of place, Acts i. 19;
1199, 14°) tv, 165 ix. 32,355) xix. 10,17, Rey.xii. 12 Ree: ;
xvii. 2; God is said to dwell in the temple, i. e. to be always
present for worshippers: Mt. xxiii. 21. [Comp.: ey-
karotxew. | *
[Syn. karockezy, in the Sept. the ordinary rendering of aw
to settle, dwell, differs from m apo. ety, the common represen-
tative of V1) fo sojourn, as the permanent differs from the
transitory; e.g. Gen. xxxvii. 1 Kar@Ker dé “laxaB ev rH yn
08 mapexnoev 6 marhp avtod, év yf Xavady; Philo de sacrif. Ab.
et Cain. § 10 5 yap tots eyxunAtos pdvors ewavexwy Tmapoined
copia, od karoe?. Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 19 and on Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 1.]
Kat-olkyots, -ews, 7, (Katorxéw), dwelling, abode: Mk. v.
8. (Gen. x. 30; Num. xv. 2, ete.; Thuce., Plat., Plut.) *
Kar-ouknthptov, -ov, Td, (Karouxéw), an abode, a habita-
tion: Eph. ii. 22; Rev. xviii. 2. (Sept.; Barn. ep. (6,
15]; 16, 7. 8, and other eccl. writ.) *
Kat-orxla, -as, 9, (karoixew), dwelling, habitation: Acts
xvii. 26. (Sept.; Polyb. 2, 32, 4; Strab., Plut., al.) *
kar-ouxltw; 1 aor. car@«ica; fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. for
Twin; to cause to dwell, to send or bring into an abode ;
to give a dwelling to: metaph. 7d mvevua, 3 kar@xurev €v
i.e. the Spirit which he placed within us, to pervade
Jas. iv. 5 LT Tr WH.*
ni, ; }
and prompt us (see carotkew, 1 Da)5
341
Kavos
Karomrpitw: (katomrpoy a mirror), to show in a mirror,
to make to reflect, to mirror: katomrpitwv 6 fds Thy ip.
Plut. mor. p. 894 f. [i. e. de plac. philos. 3, 5, 11]. Mid.
pres. karomrpi¢ouat; to look at one’s self in a mirror (Ar-
tem. oneir. 2,7; Athen. 15 p. 687 ¢.; Diog. Laért. 2, 33;
[7, 17]); to behold for one’s self as in a mirror [W. 254
(238); B.193 sq. (167)]: rhv dav rod Kupiov, the glory
of Christ (which we behold in the gospel as in a mirror
from which it is reflected), 2 Co. iii. 18. Plainly so in
Philo, alleg. leg. iii. § 33 nde karonTpioaipny ev addA@ Twi
Ti ony id€ay i) ev col TH OeG.*
karép0wpa, -ros, 76, (katophdw to make upright, erect),
aright action, a successful achievement: plur. of whole-
some public measures or institutions, Acts xxiv. 2 (3)
[RG; see diépOona]; (3 Mace. iii. 23; Polyb., Diod.,
Strab., Joseph., Plut., Leian.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
US MBE OSE
karo (fr. card), adv., [fr. Hom. down], compar. xato-
répw; [cf. W. 472 (440)]; 1. down, downwards :
Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9; Jn. viii. 6, 8; Acts xx. 9. PA.
below, beneath, [cf. W. u. s.]; a. of place: Mk. xiv.
66; Acts ii.19; dws carw [A. V. to the bottom], Mt. xxvii.
51; Mk. xv. 38, (Ezek. i. 27; viii. 2); ra kdro, the parts
or regions that lie beneath (opp. to ra dv, heaven), i. e.
the earth, Jn. viii. 23. b. of temporal succession: amd
dterovs kal katwrépe, from a child of two years and those
that were of a lower age [cf. W. 370 (347) ], Mt. ii. 16;
amo €ikogaeTovs Kal Kat@, 1 Chr. xxvii. 23.*
KaTarepos, -€pa, -epov, (compar. of kdrw, see dvwrepos),
[Hippoer., Theophr., Athen., al.], lower: (6 Xpiords) xa-
TéBn els Ta KaTM@TEpa pepyn THS yns, Eph. iv. 9, which many
understand of Christ’s descent into Hades (rév rérov rov
Kdtw kadovpevov, Plat. Phaedop.112 c.), taking ris ys as a
partit. gen. (see ads, 2). But the mention of this fact
is at variance with the connection. Paul is endeavoring
to show that the passage he has just before quoted, Ps.
Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19, must be understood of Christ, not of
God, because ‘ an ascent into heaven’ necessarily presup-
poses a descent to earth (which was made by Christ in
the incarnation), whereas God does not leave his abode
in heaven. Accordingly ra xarwr. rhs yns denotes the
lower parts of the universe, which the earth constitutes, —
rhs ys being a gen. of apposition; cf. W. § 59, 8a.;
Grimm, Institutio theol. dogmat. ed. 2, p. 355 sqq.*
KaTwrépw, see kara, esp. 2 b.
KaiSa, see KAavdn.
Kadpa, -ros, 7d, (kaiw), heat: of painful and burning
heat, Rev. vii. 16; xvi.9. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down.) *
kavparitw: 1 aor. inf. cavparioar; 1 aor. pass. ékavpa-
riaOnv; (kadpa); to burn with heat, to scorch: twa, with
ev mupi added, Rev. xvi. 8; pass., Mt. xiii. 6; Mk. iv. 6;
w. addition of kadpa péya (see dyamrdw sub fin. for exx.
and reff.), to be tortured with intense heat, Rev. xvi. 9.
(Antonin. 7, 64; Epict. diss. 1, 6, 26; 3, 22, 52; of the
heat of fever, Plut. mor. p. 100 d. [de virt. et vit. 1],
691 e. [quaest. conviv. vi. 2, 6].)*
Kadorts, -ews, 7, (kalo), burning, burning up: hs rd rédos
KQaVO OW
eis kavow, the fate of which land (appointed it by God)
is, to be burned up (by fire and brimstone from heaven ;
ef. Deut. xxix. 23), Heb. vi. 8; cf. Bleek ad loc. (Hdt.,
Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
Kavede, -@: (Kadaos); to burn up, set fire to; pres. ptep.
pass. kavoovpevos, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12, [A. V. with fervent
heat}. (Elsewhere only [chiefly ; see Soph. Lex. s. v. | in
Diose. and Galen: to suffer from feverish burning, be
parched with fever.) *
Kavornpidtw: pf. pass. ptep. kexavornpracpevos, to burn
in with a branding iron (ras tous Nvkov, a figure of a wolf,
Strab. 5, 1,9 p. 215): 1 Tim. iv. 2 Led. ster. TTr WH,
on which pass. see kavtnpidg¢w. (Not found elsewhere.) *
KavCwV, -wvos, 0} 1. burning heat of the sun: Mt.
xx. 12; Lk. xii.55; Jas.i. 11, [al. refer all these pass. to
the next head]; (Is. xlix. 10; [Gen. xxxi. 40 Alex.; ef.
Judith viii. 3]; Sir. xviii. 16; Athen. 3 p. 73 b.). 2:
Eurus, a very dry, hot, east wind, scorching and drying
up everything; for op, Job Mexvit21,* GEloOss exits
dvepos Kavoor, Jer. xviii. 17; Ezek. xvii. 10; Hos. xiii.
15; mvedpa xavooy, Jon. iv. 8, [cf. Hos. xii. 1]; (on this
wind cf. Schleusner, Thes. ad Sept. iii. p. 297; Win.
RWB. [also BB. DD.] s. v. Wind). Many suppose it
to be referred to in Jas. i. 11; yet the evils there men-
tioned are ascribed not to the ckavowy, but to the 7Auos.*
kavTnpidte: (Kavtnptov [ (cf. kaiw) |] a branding-iron) ;
to mark by branding, to brand: (pf. pass. ptep.] Kexavrn-
Qltacpevor THY idiav ouvelonow, 1 e. KekaUTN plac pevny exovres
ty id. cuv. [cf. W. 230 (216) | (cf. carapbeipw), [branded
in their own conscience i. e.| whose souls are branded with
the marks of sin, i. e. who carry about with them the per-
petual consciousness of sin, 1 Tim. iv. 2 R G Led. maj.,
see xavornpidtw; [some (cf. R. V. mrg.) would give it
here the sense of seared, cf. Eph. iv. 19]. (In Hippocr.
in a medical sense, to cauterize, remove by cautery.) *
KaVvXGopat, -@pyat, 2 pers. sing. cavxaoa (Ro. ii. 17, 23;
1 Co. iv. 7; see xaraxavydopar) ; fut. kavyjoopuar; 1 aor.
éxavynodunyv; pf. cexavynuar; (kavyna boast); [fr. Pind.
and Hdt. down]; Septe mostly for 95a; in the N. T.
often used by Paul [some 35 times; by Jas. twice]; to
glory (whether with reason or without): absol., 1 Co. i.
31°; iv. 7; xiii. 3 L [ed. ster. WH (see xaiw)]; 2 Co.
Koy LL Sipe 2 SAPs CUS ecg, (6.ylielnec. «aH phe 95
Jas. iv. 16; ri (ace. of the thing [ef. W. 222 (209)]), to
glory (on account) of a thing: 2 Co. ix. 2 (hv Kavydpar
trep tpav Makeddsowv, which I boast of on your behalf
unto the Macedonians [B. § 133, 1]; cf. vii. 14, [and see
below]); 2 Co. xi. 30, (Prov. xxvii. 1; Leian. ocyp. 120);
foll. by év w. dat. of the obj. [W. § 33 d.; B. § 133, 23],
to glory ina thing, (by a usage foreign to class. Grk.; but
the Lat. says glorior in aliquo) : Ro. ii. 23; v. 3; 1 Co.
lil, 21; 2 Co. v.12; x.15; xi.12 [cf. B.105 (92)]; xii.
5, 9; Gal. vi. 13 sq.; 2 Th.i.4 RG; Jas. i. 9, Jer. ix.
23 sq.; 1 Chr. xvi. 35); év Oc6, év 7 Gew, in God, i. e.
the knowledge of God, intimacy with him, his favors, ete.
Ro. ii. 17; v.11, (€v rots Ocois, Theoph. ad Autol. 1,1, 1);
€v kupto, 1 Co. i. 31°; 2 Co. x.17°; éy XptoT@® “Incod,
Phil. iii. 3; foll. by emi w. dat. of the obj. [ef. W. § 33 d.;
342
Kedpav
B. § 133, 23], Ro. v. 2 (Prov. xxv. 14; Sir. xxx. 2:
Diod. xvi. 70); epi twos, 2 Co. x. 8; ets ru, in regard
of, in reference to, 2 Co. x. 16 (Aristot. pol. 5, 10 p. 1311,
4). tép w. gen. of pers., to one’s advantage, to the praise
of one, [on one’s behalf}: 2 Co. vii. 14; xii. 5.
Tov Geod, as though standing in his presence, 1 Co. i. 29
[cf. B. 173 (150). Comp.: ev, xata-Kavxdopat. | *
Kavx na, TOS, 0, (xavxdopat), very rare in prof. auth. ;
Sept. for noAA praise, and 82H ornament, beauty ;
several times in Sir. 1. that of which one glories or
can glory, matter or ground of glorying: Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co.
ix. 15 sq.; 2 Co. i. 14; Phil. ii. 16; ro xavynua exew eis
éavtov povoy, his glorying confined to himself [R. V. in
regard of himself alone], Gal. vi. 4; TO x. rhs eAmidos, the
matter for glorying which hope gives, i. e. the hope, of
which we glory, Heb. iii. 6.
Oédnwa, taua, knpvypa (2 Tim. iv. 17), cdadpa, mAnpopa,
ppovnua, ete., are used for yéewnors, diwéis, OeAnois, KA.
(cf. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 6], so also (which H. A. W. Meyer
persists in denying [as respects the New Testament
(see his note on Ro. iv. 2); so Ellicott and Bp. Lghtft.
on Gal. vi. 4; Liinem. on Heb. u. s.]) is cavynua used
for kavxynovs (Pind. Isthm. 5, 65 [cf. Meyer on Phil. i. 26
note; on the apparent use of nouns in wa in an active
sense see Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 257 sq.]), a glorying,
boasting: 1 Co.v.6; Phil. i. 26; tmép rivos (see kavydopat,
sub fin.), 2 Co. v. 12; ix. 3.*
KadX NCIS, -ews, 7, (Kavyaopuat), the act of glorying: Ro.
lit Tes 2=Conix. 4) Ree: 342 \Cosxi. LO aii Jasniv. Leys
orépavos kavynoews, crown of which we can boast, 1 Th.
i. 19; Ezek. xvi. 12; Prov. xvi. 31; imép twos, (on be-
half) of one [cf. kavxdouat, sub fin.], 2 Co. vii. 4; viii. 24;
enti tuvos, before one, 2 Co. vii. 14; ¢yw [yy crit. edd.]
Kavynow év Xpior@ “Inood, the glorying which I have I
ascribe to Christ, or I owe it to Christ that I am per-
mitted to glory (see év, I. 6 b. p. 211"), Ro. xv. 17; 1Co.
xv. 31; that of which one glories, cause of glorying, 2 Co.
1.12. (Sept. several times for NI"9N; [Diog. Laért. 10,
7 fin.]; Philod. in Vol. Hercul. Oxfort. i. p. 16.) *
Kadapvaotp, see Karepvaovz.
Keyxpeat [T WH Kevyp. (cf. WH. App. p. 150)], -a»,
ai, Cenchreew or Kenchree, a port of Corinth, about 60
[70; Strabo (as below)] stadia from the city, on the
eastern side of the isthmus, the emporium of its trade
with Asia (Strabo 8 p. 380): Acts xviii. 18; Ro. xvi. 1.
[It still retains the ancient name; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.;
Lewin, St. Paul, i. 299 sq.]*
ké8pos, -ov, 7, [fr. Hom. down], a cedar, a well-known
tree, the wood of which is fragrant: yelyappos tay Ké-
dpov, Jn. xviii. 1 R Tr txt. WH (so also 2S. xv. 23; 1K.
xv. 13, [ef. ii. 37]); rod (sic!) xéSpov, ibid. Tdf.; but see
the foll. word.*
KeSpav, 6 [B. 21 (19)], indecl. (in Joseph. Kedpar,
-évos [see below]), Cedron [or Kidron], (Hebr. rp
i. e. dark, turbid), the name of a [winter-] torrent, rising
near Jerusalem and flowing down through a valley of
the same name (having the Mt. of Olives on the E.) into
the Dead Sea: yeipappos rod Kedpay, Jn. xviii. 1 GL Tr
évearov
2. As yévnpa, Sloypa,
KeluLae 843 Kevopavla
mrg., acc. to the more correct reading [but see WH.
App. ad loe.]; (xeipappos Kedpavos, Joseph. antt. 8, 1,
5; ddpay€ Kedpdvos, ib. 9, 7,3; b. j- 5, 6,1; hapayye
Babeia ... i) Kedpov dvdpuacrat, ib. 5, 2, 35. se WE esa
Kidron, ef. Cedron, 2; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. of the
Holy Land, p. 96 sq.]*
ketpor; impf. 3 pers. sing. éxerro; to lie; 1. prop.:
of an infant, foll. by ev w. dat. of place, Lk. ii. 12 [Tdf.
om. xeiu.], 16; of one buried: dzov or of, Mt. xxviii. 6;
Lk. xxiii. 53; Jn:-xi. 41 Rec.; xx. 12; of things that
quietly cover some spot, Lk. xxiv. 12 [RG Lbr.]; Jn.
xx. 5-7; xxi. 9; with emi re added, 2 Co. iii. 15; éemdva
twés (of a city situated on a hill), Mt. v. 14; also of
' things put or set in any place, in ref. to which we often
use to stand: thus of vessels, Jn. ii. 6; xix. 29, (yirpas
xeusevas, Xen. oec. 8, 19); of a throne, Rev. iv. 2 (Jer.
xxiv. 1; Hom. Il. 2,777; Od. 17, 331); keioOae mpds te,
to be brought near to a thing [see mpdés, I. 2 a.], Mt. iii.
10; Lk. iii. 9; absol., of the site of a city, TEeTpay@vos
xetrat, Rev. xxi. 16; of grain and other things laid up;
gathered together, Lk. xii. 19; of a foundation, 1 Co.
iii. 11. 2. metaph. a. to be (by God’s intent)
set, 1. e. destined, appointed: foll. by eis w. acc. indicating
the purpose, Lk. ii. 34; Phil. i.17 (16); 1 Th. iii. 3. b.
as very often in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. p. 1694”;
[L. and S. s. v. IV. 2]), of laws, to be made, laid down:
twi, 1 Tim.i. 9. C. 6 Kéapos dos ev TH TONPS keira,
lies in the power of the evil one, i. e. is held in subjec-
tion by the devil, 1 Jn. v.19. [Comp.: avd-, ovv-avd-,
dyti-, an6-, emi-, kaTd-, Tapd-, mepi-, mpd-KeLpat. | *
Keipia, -as, 7, @ band, either for a bed-girth (Schol. ad
Arstph. av. 817 xetpia: eiSos Cavns ek cyowwiwy, mapeot-
Kos iwavte, 7 Seopodor tas KAivas, cf. Prov. vii. 16; [Plut.
Alcib. 16, 1]), or for tying up a corpse after it has been
swathed in linen: in the latter sense in Jn. xi. 44; [al.
take it here of the swathings themselves ].*
kelpw; [1 aor. éxerpa (Acts viii. 832 T WH mrg.)]; 1 aor.
mid. exespaunv; fr. Hom. down; fo shear: a sheep, Acts
viii. 32 ([cf. above] fr. Is. iii. 7). Mid. to get or let be shorn
[W. § 38, 2b.; B.§ 135, 4]: thy kepadny, Acts xviii. 18;
absol. of shearing or cutting short the hair of the head,
1 Co. xi. 6 [ef. W. § 43, 1].*
Kets, see Kis.
KéXevorpa, -ros, 76, (keAevw), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down, an order, command, spec. a stimulating cry, either
that by which animals are roused and urged on by man,
as horses by charioteers, hounds by hunters, etc., or that
by which a signal is given to men, e.g. to rowers by the
master of a ship (Lcian. tyr. or catapl. c. 19), to sol-
diers by a commander (Thue. 2, 92; Prov. xxiv. 62
(xxx. 27)): év keAevopart, with a loud summons, a trum-
pet-call, 1 Th. iv. 16.*
kedevw; impf. éxéAevov; 1 aor. exéAevoa; to command,
order: twva, foll. by an aor. inf., Mt. xiv. 19, 28; Acts iv.
15; by the acc. with aor. inf., Mt. xviii. 25; xxvii. 58
[R GL], 64; Lk. xviii. 40; Acts v. 34; vill. 38; xxii. 30;
xxiii. 10; xxv. 6, 17; the acc. is wanting because evident
fr. the context, Mt. viii. 18; xiv. 9; [xxvii. 58 TWH
(Trin br.)]; Acts xii. 19; xxi. 33; foll. by ace. with
pres. inf., Acts xxi. 34; xxii. 24; xxiii. 3,35; xxiv. 8
RG; xxv. 21; xxvii. 43; the ace. is wanting because
easily discernible fr. the context, Acts xvi. 22 [cf. B. 201
(174); W.§ 40, 3d.]; by a use not infreq. in Hom., but
somewhat rare in prose writ., with the dat. of a pers.
(Plat. rep. 3 p. 396 a.; Thue. 1, 44; Diod. 19,17; Jo-
seph. antt. 20, 6, 2; Tob. viii. 18; cf. Poppo on Xen.
Cyr. 1, 3, 9 var.), foll. by an inf., Mt. xv. 35 RG; cf. B.
275 (236). xKeevoavtos twos, at one’s command, Acts
xxv. 23. [On the constr. of xed., esp. with the pass. inf.
and acce., see B. § 141, 5 ef. p. 237 (204) note; also W.
336 (315), 332 (311).]*
[SYN.: keAcdery, TapayyéArdety, vt édAco al, Tdo-
oecty (and its comp.): eA. to command, designates verbal
orders, emanating (usually) from a superior; mapayyéAAw
to charge, etc., is used esp. of the order of a military com-
mander which is passed along the line by his subordinates,
(Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 2); évréArAceoOar to enjoin, is employed
esp. of those whose office or position invests them with
claims, and points rather to the contents of the command,
ef. our “instructions”; rdcow lit. assign a post to, with a
suggestion of duties as connected therewith; often used of a
military appointment (cf. raéis) ; its compounds émrdooew
and mpoordocey differ from évr- in denoting fixed and abid-
ing obligations rather than specific or occasional instruc-
tions, duties arising from the office rather than emanating
from the personal will of a superior. Schmidt ch. 8.]
Kevodokla, -as, 4, (kevddo£os, q. v-), vain-glory, groundless
self-esteem, empty pride: Phil. ii. 3. (4 Mace. ii. 155 viii.
18; Polyb., Plut., Leian.; [Philo de mut. nom. § 15; leg.
ad Gaium § 16; ete.]; eccl. writ.; univ. a vain opinion,
error, Sap. xiv. 14.) *
kevddokos, -ov, (kevds, d£a), glorying without reason, con-
ceited, vain-glorious, eager for empty glory: Gal. v. 26.
(Polyb., Diod.; Antonin. 5,1; [cef. Philo de trib. virt.
§ 2 fin.]; eccl. writ.) *
kevés, -7, -6v, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for np), pare
etc., empty ; 1. prop. of places, vessels, ete., which
contain nothing (Judg. vii. 16; Gen. xxxvii.24); met-
aph. empty, vain; devoid of truth: Néyo, Eph. v. 6 (Ex. v.
9); darn, Col. ii. 8; xnpuypa, riotes, 1 Co. xv. 14. 2.
of men, empty-handed; without a gift: dmoorehNew and
e€amooréArew Twa Kkevdy (Gen. xxxi. 42; Deut. xv. 13;
xvi. 16), Mk. xii. 3; Lk. 1.53; xx.10sq.; metaph. deste
tute of spiritual wealth, of one who boasts of his faith as
a transcendent possession, yet is without the fruits of
faith, Jas. ii. 20. 3. metaph. of endeavors, labors,
acts, which result in nothing, vain, fruitless, without effect:
7 xapes, 1 Co. xv. 10; kézos, ib. 58; 7 eicodos, 1 Th. ii. 1;
neut. plur. xevd, things that will not succeed, Acts iv. 25
(fr. Ps. ii. 1); ets Kevdv, in vain, to no purpose, [ef. W.
592 (551)]: 2 Co. vi.1; Gal. ii. 2; Phil. ii. 16; 1 Th.
iii. 5, (Is. Ixv. 23; Jer. vi. 29, ete.; Diod. 19, 9; Heliod.
10, 30). [Cf Trench, Syn. § xlix.]*
kevowvta, -as, 7, (kevdpeovos uttering emptiness), (va-
niloquium, Vulg. [ed. Clem. (in 2 Tim. ii. 16)]), empty
discussion, discussion of vain and useless matters, (A. V.
babbling]: 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. ii. 16. ((Dioscor. 1
prooem. p. 3, 1]; eccles. writ.) *
KEVOW
kevdw, -@: [fut. cevoow, 1 Co. ix. 15 Ltxt. T Tr WH];
1 aor. éxévwoa; Pass., pf. xexévapar; 1 aor. exevwOny ;
(kevds) 5 1. to empty, make empty: éavrov éxevace,
Sc. Tod elvat ica bee or THs pophis Tov Oeod, i. e. he laid
aside equality with or the form of God (said of Christ),
Phil. ii. 7 (see a fuller exposition of this passage in
pop). 2. to make void i. e. deprive of force, ren-
der vain, useless, of no effect: pass., Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. i.
dive 3. to make void i. e. cause a thing to be seen to
be empty, hollow, false: 76 kavynpa, 1 Co. ix. 15; pass.
2 Co. ix. 8. (Twice in Sept. viz. Jer. xiv. 2; xv. 9;
often in Attic writ.) *
KévTpov, -ov, Td, (kevTew to prick) ; 1. a sting, as
that of bees (4 Mace. xiv. 19), scorpions, locusts, Rev. ix.
10. Since animals wound by their sting and even cause
death, Paul in 1 Co. xv. 55 (after Hos. xiii. 14 Sept.)
attributes to death, personified, a xévrpor, i. e. a deadly
weapon, and that xévrpoy is said to be 7 dyapria [56], be-
cause sin is death’s cause and punishment [?] (Ro. v.
12). 2. as in the Grk. writ. an iron goad, for urg-
ing on oxen, horses and other beasts of burden; hence
the proverb mpdos kévtpa daktifew, to kick against the
goad, i. e. to offer vain and perilous or ruinous resist-
ance: Acts ix.5 Rec.; xxvi. 14; cf. Pind..Pyth. 2,173;
Aeschyl. [Ag. 1624, cf.] Prom. 323; Eurip. Bacch. 795 ;
Terent. Phorm. 1, 2, 28; Ammian. 18, 5.*
Kevtupioyv, -wvos, 6, a Lat. word, a centurion: Mk. xv.
39, 44 sq. [Polyb. 6, 24, 5.]*
[Kevxpeal, see Keyxpeat. |
Kevds, adv., vainly, in vain, [W. 463 (431); Aristot.
on]: Jas. iv. 5.*
kepata [WH xepéa (see their App. p. 151)], -as, 7,
(képas), a little horn ; extremity, apex, point; used by the
Grk. grammarians of the accents and diacritical points.
In Mt. v. 18 [(where see Wetstein; cf. also Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 537 sq.)]; Lk. xvi. 17 of the little
lines, or projections, by which the Hebr. letters in other
respects similar differ from each other, as mh and 7, Jand4,
3 and 5,[A.V. tittle]; the meaning is, ‘not even the mi-
nutest part of the law shall perish.’ [(Aeschyl.,Thuc.,al.)]*
Kepapeds, -€ws, 6, (kepdvyupt), a potter: Mt. xxvii. 7,10;
Ro. ix. 21. (Hom., Hes., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.
several times for 7y¥j.) * é
kKepopiKds, -7, -dv, (Képapos) ; 1. in class. Grk. of
or belonging to a potter: hence k. yj, such as a potter
uses, Hippocr.; réxvn, Plat. polit. p. 288 a. 2; in
the Bible made of clay, earthen: Rev. ii. 27 (Dan. ii. 41),
for which the Greeks use kepapeois, -G, -odv, and Kepdyios
[al. -pevos], cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 147; [W. 99 (94)].*
kepdptov, -ov, Td, (neut. of the adj. xepdysos, see the
preceding word [al. make it a dimin. fr. xépayos]), an
earthen vessel, a pot, jar; a jug or pitcher: with dSaros
added, a water-pitcher, Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. xxii.10. (The
ophr. caus. plant. 3, 4, 3; otvov, Jer. xlii. (xxxv.) 5;
Xen. anab. 6, 1,15; Dem. p. 934, 26; Polyb. 4, 56, 3;
éAaiov, Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 2.) *
KEpa.os, -ov, 6, (Kepavvupc) ; 1. clay, potter’s earth.
2. anything made of clay, earthen ware. 3. spec. a
344
KEpaTLov
(roofing) tile (Thuc., Athen., Hdian., al.) ; the roof itself
(Arstph. fr. 129 d.): so dua rév kepdpor, through the roof,
i. e. through the door in the roof to which a ladder or
stairway led up from the street (accordingly the Rabbins
distinguish two ways of entering a house, ‘the way
through the door’ and ‘the way through the roof’ [Lghift.
Horae Hebr. p. 601]; cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Dach; Keim
ii. p. 176 sq. [Eng. trans. iii. 215; Hdersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, i. 501 sq.; Jewish Social Life, p. 93 sqq.]), Lk.
v.19. Mark (ii. 4) describes the occurrence differently
(see drooreydtw), evidently led into error by misappre-
hending the words of Luke. [But, to say nothing of the
improbability of assuming Mark’s narrative to be de-
pendent on Luke’s, the alleged discrepance disappears
if Luke’s language is taken literally, “through the
tiles” (see dia, A. I. 1); he says nothing of “the door
in the roof.’ On the various views that have been taken
of the details of the occurrence, see B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)
s. v. House; Dr. Jas. Morison, Com. on Mk. 1. ¢.]*
Kepdvvupt (kepavvdw): 1 aor. éxépaca; pf. pass. Kexépa-
opat (for the more com. kéxpapat, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
582; Bttm. Ausf. Sprehl. ii. p. 214; Kriiger § 40s. v.
i. p. 175; [Veitch s. v.]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to
mix, mingle. 2. to miz wine and water. 3. to
pour out for drinking: twits, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V. mingle];
pass., Rev. xiv. 10; (so Bel and the Dragon 11; Anthol.
11, 137, 12). [Comp.: ovy-kepavyupe. ]*
[SyN. kepdvyupt, utyvuue: in strict usage kep. denotes sucha
mixing as combines the ingredients into a new compound,
chemical mixture; ply. such a mixing as merely blends
or intermingles them promiscuously, mechanical mixture.]
képas, -aros, plur. xépara, gen. -drav (W. 65 (63); B.
15 (18)), 76, [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. 1p @ horn; a.
prop.: of animals, Rev. v.65; xil. 3; xiii.1,11; xvii. 3, 7,
12916. b. Since animals (esp. bulls) defend them-
selves with their horns, the horn with the Hebrews (and
other nations) is a symbol of strength and courage, and
is used as such ina variety of phrases (Ps. Ixxxviii.
(ixxxix.) 18; cxxxi. (cxxxil.) 17; exlvij14; 19S.u.-
10; Sir. xlvii. 5, 7, 11; 1 Macc. ii. 48, ete.; cf. Gesenius,
Thes. iii. p. 1238; [B. D. s. v. Horn]); hence xépas
owrtnpias (of God, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 3; 2S. xxii. 3), i. q.
a mighty and valiant helper, the author of deliverance, of
the Messiah, Lk. i. 69. c. trop. a projecting extremity
in shape like a horn, a point, apex: as, of an altar, Rev.
ix. 13; (Ex. xxix. 12; Lev. iv. 7,18; xvi. 18; Am. iii.
14; Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 27).*
kepatiov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of Képas); “1. a little
horn. 2. the name of the fruit of the xeparéa or
kepareta [or -ria], the Ceratonia siligua (Linn.) or carob-
tree (called also St. John’s Bread, [from the notion that
its pods, which resemble those of the ‘locust’, constituted
the food of the Baptist]). This fruit is shaped like a
horn and has a sweet taste; it was [and is] used not
only in fattening swine, but as an article of food by the
lower classes: Lk. xv.16 [A. V. husks]; cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Johannisbrodbaum; [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v.
Husks].*
Kepdaiva
Kepdaivw: [fut. xepdjow, Jas. iv. 13 Rec LT Tr
WH; see also below]; 1 aor. éxépdyca (an Ionic form fr.
xepdaw, which later writ. use for the earlier éxépSava, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 740; Bttm. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p. 215;
W. 87 (83); [Veitch s. v.]), once 1 aor. subj. cepSdvo (1
Co. ix. 21 L T Tr [but WH (cf. also Grsb. note) read the
fut. kepdavd, cf. B. 60 (53); § 139, 38]); 1 fut. pass.
kepdnOnoopat (the subjunc. keponOnowvra, 1 Pet. iii. 1
R G is aclerical error [cf. reff. s. v. kale, init.], for which
LT Tr WU have restored xepSnOncovra [cf. B.'§ 139,
38]); [fr. Hes. down]; (fr. xépdos); to gain, acquire ;
(Vulg. passim lucrifacio [also lucro, etc. ]) ; a. prop.:
tov kdopov, Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 36; Lk. ix. 25; money,
- Mt. xxv. 16 [LT WH], 17, 20, 22; absol. to get gain,
Jas. iv. 18. b. metaph. a. with nouns signify-
ing loss, damage, injury, it is used of the gain arising
from shunning or escaping from the evil (where
we say to spare one’s self, be spared) : rnv UBpw tavtny
x. Cyuiav, Acts xxvii. 21; dé ye pravOjvai tas xeipas Kepdai-
vewv, to avoid the crime of fratricide, Joseph. antt. 2, 3,
2; ¢npiav, to escape a loss, Eur. Cycl. 312; other exx. in
Kypke, Observvy. ii. p. 139 sq. B. twa, to gain any one
i. e. to win him over to the kingdom of God, which none
but the placable enter, Mt. xviii. 15; to gain one to faith
in Christ, 1 Pet. iii. 1; 1 Co. ix. 19-22; Xpuordv, to gain
Christ’s favor and fellowship, Phil. iii. 8. Not found in
the O. T.*
ké€pSos, -eos (-ovs), To, gain, advantage: Phil. i. 21 (with
which cf. Ael. v. h. 4, 7 rots kaxois od€ 7d drroOaveiv Kép-
Oos); Tit. i.11; plur. Phil. iii. 7. [From Hom. down.]*
[Kep€a, see Kepaia. |
kKépp.a, -ros, TO, (ke(pw to cut into bits), small pieces of
money, small coin, change; generally and collectively, 76
Képpa money: Jn. ii. 15, where Lmrg. Tr WH ra xéppara;
(Arstph., Dem., Joseph., al.). Cf. the full exhibition of
the use of the word given by Fischer, De vitiis lexicorum
N. T. etc. p. 264 sqq.*
Keppatirris, -ov, 6, (keppati¢w [to cut into small pieces,
to make small change ]), a money-changer, money-broker :
Jn. ii. 14. In the court of the Gentiles [(see fepdv, and
Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 244 sq.) ] in the temple
at Jerusalem were the seats of those who sold such ani-
mals for sacrifice as had been selected, examined, and
approved, together with incense, oil, and other things
needed in making offerings and in worship; and the
magnitude of this traffic had introduced the banker’s or
broker’s business; [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Money-changers ;
esp.-Edersheim u. s. p. 367 sqq.]. (Nicet. annal. 7, 2 p.
266 ed. Bekk.; Max. Tyr. diss. 2 p. 15 ed. Markland.) *
Kebddanoy, -ov, 7d, (neut. of the adj. cepadavos, belong-
ing to the head) ; 1. the chief or main point, the
principal thing, (Vulg. capitulum): Heb. viii. 1 [ef. B.
154 (134)]; (freq. so in Grk. writ. fr. Pind., Thue. and
Plat. down). 2. the pecuniary sum total of a reck-
oning, amount, (Plut. Fab. 4); the principal, capital, as
distinguished fr. the interest (Plat. legg. 5, 742 c.); univ.
a sum of money, sum, (Vulg. summa): Acts xxii. 28; so
Lev. vi. 5; Num. v. 7; xxxi. 26; Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 3;
345
KVTOS
Artem. oneir. 1, 17; see other exx. in Kypke, Observv.
ii. p. 116; [L. and S.s. v. 5 b.].*
keporaisa, -G: 1 aor. éxeparaiwoa [TWH éexepariwea
(see below) ]; (kepddavov) ; 1. to bring under heads,
to sum up, to summarize, (Thue., Aristot., al.). 2. in
an unusual sense, to smite or wound in the head: Mk. xii.
4. It is of no use to appeal to the analogy of the verb
yvaldo, which means cis yvabous rimrw to smite on the
cheek, since cefddacov is nowhere used of the head of the
body. Tdf. [WH] (after codd. % BL) have adopted
exepadiwoar (fr. kepadzov, i. q. keparis, q. V.). But nei-
ther xepadidw nor kepadri¢@ has yet been noted in any
Greek author. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95. [Comp.:
ava-kepadatdw. | *
kepadn, -js, 7, Sept. for wx; the head, both of men:
Mt. v. 36; Mk. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 38, 44 [Rec.], 46; Jn. xiii.
9; Acts xviii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 4; Rev. i. 14; iv. 4, and often;
and of animals: Rev. ix. 7, 17, 19, etc.; on the phrases
KAive THY K., eTaipew THY k., SC Kiva, 1 and émaipw; on
the saying in Ro. xii. 20, see under avpa&. Since the
loss of the head destroys the life, cepady is used in
phrases relating to capital and extreme punishments:
so in 6 aia byay em rhv K. buav (see aia, 2 a. p. 15°),
Acts xviii. 6, and similar phrases in class. Grk.; see
Passow s. v. p. 1717°; Pape s. v. 3; [L. and S.s. v. I.
3 and 4]. Metaph. anything supreme, chief, prominent;
of persons, master, lord: ruvds, of a husband in relation
to his wife, 1 Co. xi. 3; Eph. v. 23; of Christ, the lord
of the husband, 1 Co. xi. 3 [cf. B. 124 sq. (109)]; of the
church, Eph. iv. 15; v. 23; Col. ii. 19 [ef. B. § 143, 4 c.];
ToD Gapuaros THs ekkKA. Col. i. 18; maons apyijs Kat eEoucias,
Col. ii. 10; so Judg. xi. 11; 2S. xxii. 44, and in Byzant.
of things: xed. ywvias, the corner-stone, see yo-
via, a. [(From Hom. down.) ]*
kehodioo: Mk. xii. 4 T WH (approved also by Weiss,
Volkmar, al.), for kepadavda, q. V-
xehadls, -iSos, 7, (dimin. of xepadn, formed after the
analogy of duagis, muvakis, etc.; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii.
p-443; Kiihner § 330 Anm. 5, i. p. 708); 1. alittle
head (Lat. capitellum, capitulum). 2. the highest part,
extremity or end of anything ; as the capital of a column,
1 K. vii. 9, 31 etc.; Geop. 14, 6, 6; hence the tips or
knobs (the wmbilici of the Romans [or rather the cornua;
see Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 52sq.; Rich, Dict.
s. v. umbilicus]) of the wooden rod around whieh parch-
ments were rolled seem to have been called cepadides, be-
cause they resembled little heads; so that 3. the
Alexand. writ. transferred the name kedaXis to the roll
or volume itself: év ceadids BBdlov, Heb. x. 7 (fr. Sept.
of Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 8 for y90-nb33, as in Ezek. ii. 9,
and without Ai@Xiov, iii. 1-3; 2 Esdr. vi. 2 [ef. Birt, An-
tikes Buchwesen, (Berl. 1882), p. 116]), Itala: in volu-
mine libri, in the roll of the book [cf. W. 23 (22)]. The
different opinions are noticed by Bleek ad loc.*
knpdw, -@: fut. knpoow; (Knpds a muzzle) ; to stop the
mouth by a muzzle, to muzzle: Bovv, 1 Co. ix. 9 T Tr
WHurg. (Xen. r. eq. 5, 3); see hipda.*
Kfivoros, -ov, 6, the Lat. word census (among the Ro
writ.
KNTOS
mans, denoting a register and valuation of property in
accordance with which taxes were paid), in the N. T. (as
in Cod. Just. 4, 47) the tax or tribute levied on individuals
and to be paid yearly (Hesych. kivoos: €tdos vopicparos,
émuxepddaov, our capitation or poll lax): Mt. xvii. 25;
xxii. 17; Mk. xii. 14; 76 vdpuopa tod Kyvoov, the coin
with which the tax is paid, tribute money, Mt. xxii. 19.*
Kiros, -ov, 6, [thought to be allied with oxdrre, Lat.
campus, ete.], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 33, 73a, }1; 4
garden: Lk. xiii. 19; Jn. xviii. 1, 26; xix. 41. [BB. DD.
s. v. Garden. | *
Knrr-oupds, -ov, 6, (Kimos and ovdpos), a keeper of a gar-
den, a gardener: Jn. xx. 15 [BB.DD. s. v. Garden].
(Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Epictet., al.) *
Knpiov, -ov, 76, (knpds wax), fr. Hes. and Hdt. down,
honeycomb : xnpiov pediacvoy, a honeycomb (still contain-
ing the honey), Lk. xxiv. 42 RG Trbr. (1 S. xiv. 27;
Prov. xvi. 245 xxiv. 13).*
Khpvypa, -ros, 7d, (knpvoow), in Grk. writ. esp. Attic, that
which is promulgated by a herald or public crier, a procla-
mation by herald; in the N. T. the message or proclama-
tion by the heralds of God or Christ: thus the proc-
lamation of the necessity of repentance and reformation
made by the prophet Jonah [A.V. preaching], ré knpuypa
‘Tova, Mt. xii.41; Lk. xi. 32, (Jon. iii. 4); the announce-
ment of salvation procured by Christ and to be had
through him: absol., 1 Co. i. 21; Tit. i.3; w. gen. of
the subj., made by one, 1 Co. ii. 4; xv. 14; w. gen. of the
obj. "Incod Xpiotod, concerning Jesus Christ, Ro. xvi. 25,
ef. Philippi ad loc.; [17s alwviov cwrnpias, Mk. xvi. WH
in (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]; the act of publish-
ing, absol. 2 Tim. iv. 17 [but R. V. that the message might
be fully proclaimed ; see mrnpodopée, a. |.*
kypvé, less correctly [yet so L WH] kjpvé (on the ac-
cent see W. § 6,1 ¢.; [B. 13 (12)]; Lepsius, Gramm.
Untersuch. p. 36 ; [Chandler § 622; Gottling p. 254 sq.;
Lob. Paralip. p. 411; W. Dindorf in Steph. Thes. s. v.;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]), -vkos, 6, (akin to yjpus a voice, a
sound, yypve to utter a sound, tospeak; [yet cf. Vanitek
p- 140]); com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; a herald, a
messenger vested with public authority, who conveyed the
official messages of kings, magistrates, priuces, military
commanders, or who gave a public summons or demand,
and performed various other duties. In the O. T., Gen.
xli. 43; Dan. iii.4; Sir. xx.15. Inthe N. T. God’s am-
bassador, and the herald or proclaimer of the divine word :
Stxavoovvns, one who summoned to righteousness, of Noah,
2 Pet. ii.5; used of the apostles, as the divine messen-
gers of the salvation procured by Christ and to be em-
braced through him, 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11.*
Knptocw; impf. exypyccov; fut. mpi; 1 aor. ékr-
pv&a, [inf. cmpvgac RG Tr WH, k«nptéa LT; cf. Lipsius,
Gramm. Untersuch. p. 32 sqq.; Taf. Proleg. p.101; W.
§ 6, 1 f. (see reff. s. v. ejpvé)]; Pass., pres. knpiocouar;
1 aor. éxnpdxOnv; 1 fut. knpuxOroopar; (xnpv€, q. v.); fr.
Hom. down; Sept. for NPs to be a herald ; to officiate as
herald; to proclaim after the manner of a herald; always
with a suggestion of formality, gravity, and an authority
346
KLB@TOS
which must be listened to and obeyed; a. univ.
to publish, proclaim openly: something which has been
done, Mk. vii. 36; rov Adyov, Mk. i. 45 (here joined with
dvadnpitew) ; foll. by indir. disc., Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 39 ;
something which ought to be done, foll. by the inf. (cf.
W. 322 (302); [B. § 141,.2]), Ro. ii. 21; Motoqy, the
authority and precepts of Moses, Acts xv. 21; TepiTouny,
the necessity of circumcision, Gal. v. 11. b. spec.
used of the public proclamation of the gospel and mat-
ters pertaining to it, made by John the Baptist, by Jesus,
by the apostles and other Christian teachers: absol., Mt.
xi. 1; Mk. i. 38; iii. 14; xvi. 20; Ro. x. 15; w. dat. of
the pers. to whom the proclamation is made, 1 Co. ix. 27;
1 Pet. iii. 19; ets [R ev w. dat.] ras cvvaywyas (see eis,
A.I.5b.; cf. W. 213 (200)), Mk. 1. 39; [Lk.iv. 44 TTr
txt. WH]; (6) enptooawy, Ro. x. 14; xnpiocety w. acc. of
the thing, Mt. x. 27; Lk. [iv. 19]; xii. 3; rwi7t, Lk. iv.
18 (19); 76 evayyéAtov Tis Baoww., Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; Mk.
i. 14 (where G Lbr. T Tr WH 76 ev. tov Oeod) ; 7d evayy.
simply, Mk. xvi. 15; Gal. ii. 2; 70 evayy. rod Oeod eis
twas (see above), 1 Th. ii. 9; pass., Mt. xxiv. 14; xxvi.
13; Col. i. 23; with eis mavra ra €6vn or eis Sov T. KOT POV
added, Mk. xiii. 10; xiv. 9; rév Aoyov, 2 Tim. iv. 2; rd
pia ths miotews, Ro. x. 8; ryv Baoid. tod Oeod, Lk. viii.
1; ix.2; Acts xx. 25 [here GLT Tr WH om. rod Oeov];
xxviii. 31; Bamriopa, the necessity of baptism, Mk. i.4;
Lk. iii. 3; Acts x. 37; perdvovay kai apeow dpaptiav, by
public proclamation to exhort to repentance and promise
the pardon of sins, Lk. xxiv. 47; ta peravooow [RG
petavonowat] (see iva, II. 2b.; [B. 237 (204) ]), Mk. vi. 12.
twa ttt, to proclaim to persons one whom they are to
become acquainted with in order to learn what they ought
to do: Xproroy, or rév Incovy, Acts vill. 5; xix. 13; Phil.
i. 15; 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. iv. 5 (where it is opp. to éavrév
knp- to proclaim one’s own excellence and authority); 2
Co. xi. 45 pass., 6 knpvyOeis, 1 Tim. iii. 16; with &4 and
gen. of pers. added, 2 Co. i.19; with the epexegetic addi-
tion, ér obrds eoruv 6 vids Tr. Beov, Acts ix. 20; dru éx vexpav
eynyeptat, 1 Co. xv.125 revi foll. by dru, Acts x. 425 xp.
foll. by Xéyewr with direct disc., Mt. [iii.1 L TWH]; x. 7;
Mk.i.7; xnpdocew x. A\éyew foll. by direct disc., Mt. iii.
1[RGTrbr.]; iv. 17; «yp. ev (omitted in Rec.) dorF
peyady, foll. by direct disc. (of an angel as God’s herald),
Rev. v. 2; «np. with ovrws added, 1 Co. xv. 11. On this
word see Zezschwitz, Petri apost. de Christi ad inferos
descensu sententia. (Lips. 1857) p. 31 sqq.; [Campbell,
Dissert. on the Gospels, diss. vi. pt. v. Comp.: mpo-
knpvooa. | * ,
KfjTos, -eos (-ovs), Td, @ sea-monster, whale, huge fish,
(Hom., Aristot., al.): Mt. xii. 40, fr. Jon. ii. 1 where Sept.
Kyte peydde for oyna 1.*
Knoés, -a [B. 20 (18) ], 6, (Chald. x5°3 a rock), Cephas
(i. q. Hérpos [ef. B.D. (Am. ed.) p. 2459]), the surname
of Simon the apostle: Jn. i. 42 (43); 1 Co. i. 12; iii. 22;
ix. 5; xv. 5; Gal. ii. 9; and LT Tr WH also in Gal. i.
18; ii 11, 14.*
KiBwrds, -od, 7, (KiBos [cf. Suidas 2094 ¢.]), a wooden
chest, box, ((Hecatae. 368 (Miiller’s Frag. i. p. 30), Si-
«apa
mon.], Arstph., Lysias, Athen., Ael., al.): in the N. an
the ark of the covenant, in the temple at Jerusalem,
Heb. ix. 4 (Philo, Joseph.; Sept. very often for jis) 5 in
the heavenly temple, Rev. xi. 19; of Noah’s vessel, built
in the form of an ark, Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. xvii.27; Heb. xi.
7; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (4 Mace. xv. 31; Sept. for man).*
KOdpa, -as, 7, a harp [cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch.
iv.; B.D. s. v. Harp]: 1 Co. xiv. 7; Rev. v. 8; xiv. 2;
tov Geod, to which the praises of God are sung in heaven,
Rev. xv. 2; cf. W. § 36,3 b. [From Hom. h. Merc.,
Hat. on.]*
KOapifw; pres. pass. ptep. xOapitduevos; to play upon
the harp [(see the preceding word) ]: with év rats «Odpats
added, [A.V. harping with their harps], Rev. xiv. 2; 76
xOapt(dpevov, what is harped, 1 Co. xiv. 7. (Is. xxiii. 16;
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 18, 570 down.) *
KBap-wSds, -0d, 6, (KeOdpa [q. v.], and dds, contr. fr.
aods, a singer), a harper, one who plays on the harp and
accompanies it with his voice: Rev. xiv. 2; xviii. 22.
({Hat., Plat., al.], Diphil. in Athen. 6 p. 247d.; Plut.
mor. 166 a.; Ael.v. h. 4, 2; superl. (extended form)
xOapaordéraros, Arstph. vesp. 1278. Varro der. r. 2, 1,
3 “non omnes, qui habent citharam, sunt citharoedi.”) *
Kuduxla, -as, 7, Cilicia, a province of Asia Minor, bound-
ed on the N. by Cappadocia, Lycaonia and Isauria, on
the S. by the Mediterranean, on the E. by Syria, and on
the W. by Pamphylia. Its capital, Tarsus, was the birth-
place of Paul; Acts vi.9; xv..23, 415°xxi. 391) xxii. 3;
xxiii. 84; xxvil.5; Gal.i. 21. [Cf. Conybeare and How-
son, St. Paul, i. 19 sqq.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq.]*
kivépeopuov, more correctly [so L T Tr WH] kuwvapapor,
-ov, 76, Hebr. jin3p, [(see L. and S. s. v.)], cinnamon:
Rev. xviii. 13. (I{dt., Theophr., Strab., Diod., Joseph.,
al.; Sept.) Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Zimmt; [B.D. s. v. Cin-
namon; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Kinnamon].*
kivduveto ; impf. exivddvevoy; (Kivduvos) ; to be in jeop-.
ardy, to be in danger, to be put in peril: Lk. viii. 233; 1
Co. xv. 30; rovro Td pépos Kwdvvever eis amedeypov edOeir,
this trade is in danger of coming into disrepute, Acts xix.
27; Kuvd. eykadeioOa, we are in danger of being accused,
ib. 40. (From [Pind.] and Hdt. down; Sept.) *
kivBuvos, -ov, 6, danger, peril: Ro. viii. 35; &« rwos,
prepared by one, [ from one], 2 Co. xi. 26; ibid. with a
gen. of the source from which the peril comes, [o/, cf.
W. § 30,2 a.]; so rHs Oadaoons, Plat. Kuthyd. p. 279 e.;
de rep. i. p. 332 e.; Oakaccar, Heliod. 2, 4, 65.*
Kwvéw, -&; fut. kevqo@; 1 aor. inf. kvAoar; Pass., pres.
kwovuar; 1 aor. exwwnOnv; (fr. kiw, poetic for IQ, etpt,
Curtius § 57; hence) 1. prop. to cause to go, i. e.
to move, set in motion, [fr. Hom. down]; a. prop. in
pass. [ef. W. 252 (237) ] to be moved, move: of that motion
whichis evidence of life, Acts xvii. 28 (Gen. vii. 21); kuwety
Saxrdrw popria, to move burdens with a finger, Mt. xxiii.
4; thy keadny, to move to and fro[A.V. wag], (expres-
sive of derision), Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xv. 29, (Sept. for
WNT pun, Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 8; Job xvi. 4; Sir. xii. 18,
e€te:)); b. to move froma place, to remove: ti ék Tod
témov, Rev. ii. 53 ex ray rémayv, pass., Rev. vi. 14. a:
347
Knravdy
Metaph. to move i. e. excite: ordow, a riot, disturbance,
Acts xxiv. 5 ([see ordous, 2]; tapaxnv, Joseph. b. j. 2, 9,
4); tv rdw, to throw into commotion, pass., Acts xxi. 30.
(Come. : pera-, ovy-Kiwew. | *
klvqots, -ews, 7, (kevéw), [fr. Plato on], a moving, agita-
tion: rod vdaros, Jn. v. 3 [R L].*
Kis (LT Tr WH Kets [cf. WH. App. p. 155; Taf.
Proleg. p. 84; B. 6 note}, and see e1, t]), 6, indecl., (wp
[perh. ‘a bow’ (Gesen.) ] fr. wip to lay snares), Kish, the
father of Saul, the first king of Israel: Acts xiii. 21.*
kixpnpt: 1 aor. act.impv. xyppoov; to lend: twl 7, Lk.
xi. 5. (From Hdt. down.) [Syn. see Savet(a, fin.] *
K\GBos, -ov, 6, (KAdw) 5 a. prop. a young, tender
shoot, broken off for grafting. b. univ. @ branch:
Mt. xiii. 32; xxi.8; xxiv. 382; Mk. iv. 32; xiii. 28; Lk.
xill. 19; as the Jewish patriarchs are likened to a root,
so their posterity are likened to branches, Ro. xi. 16-19,
21; cf. Sir. xxiii. 25; xl.15; Menand. frag. ed. Meineke
p- 247 [frag. 182, vol. iv. 274 (Ber. 1841)]. (Tragg.,
Arstph., Theophr., Geop., al.) *
KAalw; impf. ékAaov; fut. cAavo@ (Lk. vi. 25; Jn. xvi.
20; and Tr WHtzxt. in Rev. xviii. 9, for kAavoopar, more
com. in Grk. writ., esp. the earlier, and found in Lev. x.
6; Joel ii. 17, and acc. to most edd. in Rev. xviii. 9; cf.
Kriiger § 40 s. v., i. p. 175 sq.; Kihner § 343 s. v.,i. p.
847; [Veitch s. v.]; B. 60 (53); [W. 87 (83) ]); 1 aor.
éxAavoa; Sept. freq. for 133; [from Hom. down]; to
mourn, weep, lament ; a. intrans.: Mk. xiv. 72; xvi.
NOP Iie Vath IGRI Bhee sob Gil Bie vee IE Teh albyo Aeris)
Axa SOM eXXIlS se ueVer [iver Ol see X VIL lO LOMerroNAa, tor
which L T Tr WH modu, Rev. v. 4; mxpos, Mt. xxvi. 75;
Lk. xxii. 62; weeping as the sign of pain and grief for
the thing signified (i. e. for pain and grief), Lk. vi. 21,
25, (opp. to yedav); Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. xii. 15, (opp. to
xaipew); Phil. iii. 18; 1 Co. vii. 30; Jas.iv.9; v.1; of
those who mourn the dead: Mk. v. 38 sq.; Lk. vii. 32;
viii. 52; emt re, over any one, Lk. xix. 41 RG (Sir. xxii.
11); also joined with revOeiv, Rev. xviii. 11 RGL; kn.
emi twa, Lk. xix.41 LT Tr WH; xxiii. 28; joined with
kérrec bar foll. by émt twa, Rev. xviii. 9 T Tr WH. b.
trans. red, to weep for, mourn for, bewail, one [ef. B. § 131,
4; W. 32, 1y.]: Mt. ii. 18, and Ree. in Rev. xviii. 9.*
(Syn. Baxpto, eralw, ddbpopuat, Opnvéw, GAaAA Cw
(dAoAvGw), orevdtw: strictly, 5. denotes to shed tears,
weep silently ; «A. to weep audibly, to cry as achild; 03. to give
verbal expression to grief, to lament; Op. to give formal
expression to grief, to sing a dirge; &A. to wail in oriental
style, to howl in a consecrated, semi-liturgical fashion; orev.
to express grief by inarticulate or semi-articulate sounds, to
groan. Cf. Schmidt chh. 26, 126.]
Kddiots, -ews, 9, (KAd@, q. V-), @ breaking: rot dprov, Lk.
xxiv. 35; Acts ii. 42. (Plat., Theophr., al.) *
K\dopa, -ros, Td, (KAdw), a fragment, broken piece:
plur., of remnants of food, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi.
43; viii. 8,19 sq.; Lk.ix.17; Jn.vi.12sq. (Xen. cyn.
10,5; Diod. 17,13; Plut. Tib. Gr.19; Anthol.; Sept.)*
KAav8y (L. Tr WH Katda [see WH. App. p. 160],
T K\aida), -ns, 7, Clauda or Cauda the name of a small
island lying near Crete on the south, called by Ptolem.
Knravila
3, 17, 11 KAaddos, by Pomp. Mela 2, 7 and Plin. h. n. 4,
20 (12), 61 Gaudos, [ (now Gaudo-nesi or Clauda-nesa) |:
Acts xxvii. 16.*
Knavila, -as, 4, Claudia, a Christian woman: 2 Tim.
iv.21. [Cf B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v., also reff. s. v.
Tlovdns. | *
Knratdvos, -ov, 6, Claudius. 1. Tiberius Claudius
Drusus Nero Germanicus, the Roman emperor, who
came into power A.D. 41, and was poisoned by his wife
Agrippina in the year 54: Acts xi. 28; xviii. 2. 2.
Claudius Lysias, a Roman military tribune: Acts xxiii.
26 [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Lysias].*
KAav0pds, -00, 6, (kAaiw); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for °33;
weeping, lamentation: Mt. ii. 18; [viii. 12]; xiii. 42, 50;
xxii. 13; xxivedl 5 xxv. 305 Lk. xi. 283 Acts xx. 37*
Kddéo; 1 aor. ékAaca; Pass., [ pres. ptep. kAopevos, 1 Co.
xi. 24 RG (see below)]; 1 aor. ékAdoOny (Ro. xi. 20 L
Tr); [fr. Hom. down]; to break: used in the N. T. of the
breaking of bread (see doros, 1), Mt. xiv. 19; xv. 36;
xxvi. 26; Mk. viii. 6; xiv. 22; Lk. xxii. 19; [xxiv. 30];
INGHS We Ne core (5 INR somth Bas IOs ae 1S ak, WEE
with eis twas added, a pregnant constr., equiv. to ‘to
break and distribute among’ ete. (see eis, C. 1), Mk. viii.
19; metaph. r6 capa, shattered, as it were, by a violent
death, 1 Co. xi. 24 RG. [Comp.: ék-, kata-K\do. | *
KAels, -Ods, acc. khetda and kde (Lk. xi. 52; Rev. iii.
7), ace. plur. KAeidas and kdets (Mt. xvi. 19; Rey. i.
18; cf. Kiihner § 130, i. p. 357; W.65 (63), cf. B. 24
(22); [WH. App. p. 157]), 7, [fr. Hom. down]; a key.
Since the keeper of the keys has the power to open and
to shut, the word «Aeis is fig. used in the N. T. to denote
power and authority of various kinds [cf. B. D. s. v. Key],
viz. tov ppearos, to open or unlock the pit, Rev. ix. 1,
cf. 2; rms aBvocov, to shut, Rev. xx. 1, cf. 8; rod Oavd-
Tov kal Tov ddov, the power to bring back into life from
Hades and to leave there, Rev. i. 18; rijs yoaoews, the
ability and opportunity to obtain knowledge, Lk. xi. 52;
THs BaciNelas TOY ovipavay (see Bacrrela, 3 e. p. 97° sub
fin.), Mt. xvi. 19; rod Aavid, the power of David (who
is a type of the Messiah, the second David), i. e. of re-
ceiving into the Messiah’s kingdom and of excluding
from it, Rev. iil. 7 (apparently after Is. xxii. 22, where
7) KX. otkov Aavid is given to the steward of the royal
palace).*
Krelw; fut. Kreiow, Rev. iii. 7 LT Tr WH; 1 aor.
éxderoa ; Pass., pf. néxdevoprar, ptcp. KexAetopeévos 3 1 aor.
exdeic nv; Hebr. 130; [fr. Hom. down]; to shut, shut
up; prop.: tv Odpav, Mt. vi. 6; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk.
xi. 7; plur., Jn. xx. 19, 26; Acts xxi. 30; a prison, pass.
Acts v. 23; mud@vas, pass. Rev. xxi. 25; rhv &8uacop,
Rev. xx.3 GLTTrWH. metaph.: rdv odpardy, i.e. to
cause the heavens to withhold rain, Lk. iv. 25; Rey. xi.
6; ta onddyxva aitod ané twos, to shut up compassion
so that it is like a thing inaccessible to one, to be devoid
of pity towards one [W. § 66, 2 d., cf. B. 322 (277)], 1 Jn.
ili. 17; rhv Bac. trav otpavay, to obstruct the entrance
into the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xxiii. 13 (14); so used
that tiv Bac. rod Geod must be understood, Rev. iii. 7; r.
348
KAnpovopéw
Gipay, sc. tis Bac. tr. deov, ibid. 8; cf.- Bleek ad loc.
[CompP.: dro-, €k-, kaTa-, ovy-kheio. | *
KA€ppa, -ros, Td, (kAeTTa@) ; a. thing stolen [ Aris-
tot. ]. b. i. q. «dom theft, i. e. the act committed [Eur.,
Arstph., al.]: plur. Rev. ix. 21.*
Kyédras [on the decl. cf. B. 20 (18) ], (apparently contr.
fr. KNedmarpos, see ’Avrimas [cf. Letronne in the Revue
Archéologique, 1844-45, i. p. 485 sqq.]), 6, Cleopas, one
of Christ’s disciples: Lk. xxiv. 18. [Cf. Bp. Lght/t.
Com. on Gal. p. 267; B. D.s. v.]*
Kéos, -ovs, Td, (KAéw equiv. to Kahéw) 5 1. rumor,
report. 2. glory, praise: 1 Pet. ii. 20. (In both
senses com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; for pnw, Job
XXvili. 22.) *
kAéarys, -ov, 6, (kAémro), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 333,
a thief: Mt. vi.19 sq.; xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 33, 39; Jn. x.
1,10; 1Co.vi.10; 1 Pet. iv.15; an embezzler, pilferer,
Jn. xii. 6; fpyecOat or iKew ws KA. €v vukti, i. g. to come
unexpectedly, 1 Th. v. 2,4; 2 Pet. ili. 10; Rev. iii. 3;
xvi. 15; the name is transferred to false teachers, who do
not care to instruct men, but abuse their confidence for
their own gain, Jn. x. 8. [SyN. see Anorns, fin.] *
kAértwo; fut. cAéyo (Sept. also in Ex. xx.14; Lev. xix.
11; Deut. v. 19, for cAéyvouae more com. [(?) cf. Veitch
s. v.; Kiihner § 348 s. v., i. 848] in prof. auth.) 5 1 aor.
ékdkewa; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 232; a. to
steal; absol. to commit a theft: Mt. vi. 19 sq.3 xix. 18;
Mikcex. 1:9:) Dko xviii. 20); Inox: 103 Ro. i 2) exis oe
Eph. iv. 28. b. trans. fo steal i. e. take away by
stealth: twa, the dead body of one, Mt. xxvii. 64; xxviii.
13.*
KAfipa, -aros, 7d, (fr. KAdw, q- V-), i. q. KAdSos, a@ tender
and flexible branch; spec. the shoot or branch of a vine, a
vine-sprout: Jn. xv. 2-6 (so Arstph. eccles. 1031; Aes-
chin. in Ctes. p. 77, 27; Theophr. h. pl. 4, 13,53 dymaédov
kAjpa, Plat. rep. i. p. 353 a.; Sept., Ezek. xv. 23 xvii.
6 sq.; Joel i. 7).*
KAjpns (cf. B. 16 sq. (15)], -evros, 6, Clement, a com-
panion of Paul and apparently a member of theschurch
at Philippi: Phil. iv. 3. Ace. to the rather improbable
tradition of the catholic church, he is identical with that
Clement who was bishop of Rome towards the close of the
first century; [but see Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. 1. ec
‘Detached Note’; Salmon in Dict. of Chris. Biogr. i.
555 sq. ].*
kAnpovopew, -@; fut. cAnpovounow; 1 aor. ékAnpovdpnoa;
pf. xexnpovdunka ; (kAnpovdpos, q. V.; cf. oikovduos) ; Sept.
for 53 and much oftener for wy; 1. to receive a
lot, receive by lot; esp. to receive a part of an inheritance,
receive as an inheritance, obtain by right of inheritance; so,
particularly in the Attic orators, w. a gen. of the thing;
in later writ. not infreq. w. an ace. of the thing (ef. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 129; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 140; W
200 (188); [B. § 132,8]); absol. to be an heir, to inherit
Gal. iv. 30 fr. Gen. xxi. 10. 2. univ. to receive the
portion assigned to one, receive an allotted portion, receive
as one’s own or as a possession; to become partaker of, to
obtain [cf. Eng. “inherit”], (as @jynv, Polyb. 18, 38
«npovopia
(55), 8; ry em’ eboeBeia Sday, 15, 22, 3); in bibl. Grk.
everywh. w. the acc. of the thing; so very freq. in the
O. T. in the phrase KAnp. yjv and riy yay, of the occupa-
tion of the land of Canaan by the Israelites, as Lev. xx.
24; Deut. iv. 22, 26; vi. 1, ete. But as the Israelites
after taking possession of the land were harassed almost
perpetually by their hostile neighbors, and even driven
out of the country for a considerable period, it came to
pass that the phrase was transferred to denote the tran-
quil and stable possession of the holy land crowned with
all divine blessings, an experience which pious Israel-
ites were to expect under the Messiah: Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 13; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 9, 11, 22, 29, 34 Alex.; Is.
Ix. 21; Tob. iv. 12; &k Seurépas KAnpovouyjcover ti yay,
Is. lxi. 7; hence it became a formula denoting to partake
of eternal salvation in the Messiah’s kingdom: Mt. v. 5
(4) (fr. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 11), where see Bleek. ony
aio@vov, Mt. xix. 29; Mk. x.17; Lk. x. 25; xviii. 18; rip
Bacwelay, Mt. xxv. 34; Bacwreiav Ge0d, 1 Co. vi. 9 sq.3 xv.
50; Gal. v. 213; owrnpiav, Heb. i. 14; ras errayyeXias,
Heb. vi. 12; dp@apciay, 1 Co. xv. 50; tradra [Rece. mévra],
Rey. xxi. 7; dvoua, Heb. i. 4; rv eddoyiav, Heb. xii. 17;
1 Pet. iii. 9. [Comp.: xara-KAnpovopéo. | *
KAnpovowia, -as, 7, (kAnpovduos), Sept. time and again
for 12m3, several times for NW}, NwrIN, ete. ; 1
an inheritance, property received (or to be received) by
inheritance, (Isocr., Dem., Aristot.): Mt. xxi. 38; Mk.
Shin 18 Mie sie Be Se Galle 2. what is given to
one as @ possession ({cf. Eng. “inheritance”]; see xAn-
povowew, 2): Siddvat Ti Tun KAnpovopiay, Acts vii. 5; Nap-
Bavew te eis KAnp. Heb. xi. 8 [(cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 14
p- 1153°, 33) ]. Agreeably to the O. T. usage, which em-
ploys mona now of the portion of the holy land allotted
to each of the several tribes (Josh. xiii. 23, 28, etc.), now
of the whole territory given to Israel for a possession
(Deut. iv. 38; xv. 4, ete. —and nothing appeared to the
Israelites more desirable than the quiet, prosperous, per-
manent possession of this land, see xAnpovopéw, 2), the
noun KAnpovouia, lifted to a loftier sense in the N. T., is
used to denote a. the eternal blessedness in the con-
summated kingdom of God which is to be expected after the
visible return of Christ: Gal. iii. 18; Col. iii. 24 (79s KAnp.
gen. of appos. [W. § 59, 8 a.]); Heb. ix. 15; 1 Pet.i.4;
Hav, destined for us, Eph. i. 14; rod deov, given by God,
18. b. the share which an individual will have in that
eternal blessedness: Acts xx. 82; Eph. v. 5.*
KAnpo-v6.0s, -ov, 6, (KAjpos, and véwopat to possess), prop.
one who receives by lot; hence 1. an heir (in Grk.
writ. fr. Plat. down) ; a. prop.: Mt. xxi. 38; Mk.
iain ke x xe dew Galaiv. ds b. in Messianic usage,
one who receives his allotted possession by right of sonship :
so of Christ, as kAnpovduos mavrwr, all things being sub-
jected to his sway, Heb. i. 2; of Christians, as exalted
by faith to the dignity of sons of Abraham and so of
sons of God, and hence to receive the blessings of God’s
kingdom promised to Abraham: absol., Ro. viii. 17; Gal.
iii. 29; with rod Oeod added, i. e. of God’s possessions,
equiv. to ras SdEns (see ddێa, III. 4 b.), Ro. viii. 17; Geov
349
KARo Ls
dia Xpuorod, by the favor of Christ (inasmuch as through
him we have obtained 7 vioOecia), Gal. iv. 7 Rec., for which
LT Tr WH read 8:4 deod [see did, A. IIT. 1] (cf. C.F. A.
Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 148 [who advocates
the Ree. as that reading in which the others prob. origi-
nated (but cf. Meyer in loc.; WH in loc.)]); rod xé-
opov, of government over the world, Ro. iv. 13 sq.; Cas
aiwviov, Tit. iii. 7; THs Baotdelas, Jas. ii. 5. 2. the
idea of inheritance having disappeared, one who has ac-
quired or obtained the portion allotted him: w. gen. of the
thing, Heb. vi. 17; xi. 7; rod oxérovs, used of the devil,
Ev. Nicod.c. 20 [or Descens. Chr. ad Inferos 4,1]. (Sept.
four times for wo\: Judg. xviii. 7; 2S. xiv. 7; Jer. viii.
HORM Clon)
KAfjpos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for ora
and mn; alot; i.e. 1. an object used in casting
or drawing lots, which was either a pebble, or a potsherd,
or a bit of wood, (hence kAjpos is to be derived fr. cdo
icf. Ellicott on Col. i. 12]): Acts i. 26 (see below); Bad-
Aew KAnp., Mt. xxvii. 35; Mk. xv. 24; Lk. xxiii. 34; Jn.
xix. 24, (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19; Jon.i. 7, etc.); the lots of the
several persons concerned, inscribed with their names,
were thrown together into a vase, which was then shaken,
and he whose lot first fell out upon the ground was the
one chosen (Hom. Il. 3, 316, 325; 7, 175, etc.; Liv. 23,
3 [but cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Lot]); hence 6 kAjpos mire
emi twa, Acts i. 26 (Ezek. xxiv. 6; Jon. i. 7). er
what is obtained by lot, allotted portion: dayxavew and
AapBave tov KAjpov THs Stakovias, a portion in the min-
istry common to the apostles, Acts i. 17, 25 RG; éore
pot KAjpos év tim, dat. of the thing, Acts viii. 21; like
kAnpovopia (q. Vv.) it is used of the part which one will
have in eternal salvation, AaBeiv Tov KX. év Tots nyracpevas,
among the sanctified, Acts xxvi. 18 (Sap. v. 5); of eter-
nal salvation itself, cAnpos tov dyiov, i. e. the eternal sal-
vation which God has assigned to the saints, Col. i. 12
[where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]. of persons, of xAjpot, those
whose care and oversight has been assigned to one [al-
lotted charge], used of Christian churches, the adminis-
tration of which falls to the lot of the presbyters: 1 Pet.
v. 3, cf. Acts xvii. 4; [for patristic usage see Soph. Lex.
s. v., cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. p. 246 sq.].*
KAnpdw, -@: 1 aor. pass. ekAnpw@Ony; (KAjpos) ; in class.
Grk. 1. to cast lots, determine by lot. 2. to
choose by lot: twa [Hadt. 1, 94; al.]. 3. to allot, as-
sign by lot: twa tw, one to another as a possession, Pind.
OL. 8, 19. 4. once in the N. T., to make a kdjpos i.
e. a heritage, private possession: twd, pass. ev @ ekdnpa-
Onpev [but Lchm. éxd7Onpyev] in whom lies the reason why
we were made the «Ajpos Tov Oeov (a designation trans-
ferred from the Jews in the O. T. to Christians, cf. Add.
to Esth. iii. 10 [iv. line 12 sq. (Tdf.)] and Fritzsche in
loc.; [ef. Deut. iv. 20; ix. 29]), the heritage of God
Eph. i. 11 [see Ellicott in loc.]. (In eccles. writ. it sig-
nifies to become a clergyman [see reff. s. v. kAjpos, fin.].)
[Comp.: mpoo-KAnpow. |*
KAfots, -ews, 7], (KaAE@) 5 1. a calling, calling to,
[(Xen., Plat., al.) ]. 2. a call, invitation: to a feast
KANTOS
(3 Mace. v. 14; Xen. symp. 1, 7); in the N. T. every-
where in a technical sense, the divine invitation to embrace
salvation in the kingdom of God, which is made esp. through
the preaching of the gospel: with gen. of the author, rod
cod, Eph. i. 18; dyerapér.... 7 KA. Tod Geod, God does
not repent of the invitation to salvation, which he de-
cided of old to give to the people of Israel, and which
he promised their fathers (i. e. the patriarchs), Ro. xi.
29; 4 dvw [q. v- (a.)] KAjow Tod Beod ev Xptorg, which
was made in heaven by God on the ground of Christ,
Phil. iii. 14; also 7 émoupamos krjots, Heb. iii. 1; kadetv
riva kAnoe, 2 Tim. i. 9; pass. Eph. iv. 1; dfsodv twa
“Anoews is used of one whom God declares worthy of the
ealling which he has commanded to be given him, and
therefore fit to obtain the blessings promised in the call,
2 Th. i. 11; w. gen. of the obj., ipav, which ye have
shared in, Eph. iv. 4; 2 Pet. i. 10; what its character-
istics have been in your case, as having no regard to
learning, riches, station, etc. 1 Co. i. 26; used somewhat
peculiarly, of the condition in which the calling finds
one, whether circumcised or uncircumcised, slave or
freeman, 1 Co. vii. 20.*
KAnTés, -, -dv, (kadéw), [fr. Hom. down], called, invited,
(to a banquet, [1 K. i. 41,49]; 3 Mace. v.14; Aeschin.
50,1); inthe N. T. a. invited (by God in the proc-
lamation of the gospel) to obtain eternal salvation in the
kingdom of God through Christ (see xadéw, 1 b. B. [cf.
W. 35 (34)]): Ro. viii. 28; 1 Co. i. 24; Jude 1; «Anrot
k. ékXextol K. mooi, Rev. xvii. 14; kAnrot and ékdexrol
are distinguished (see ékXexrés, 1 a.) in Mt. xx. 16 [T
W Hom. Tr br. the cl.]; xxii. 14, a distinction which does
not agree with Paul’s view (see xadéo, u. s.; [ Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. § 88; Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. iii. 12]) ; kAntol’Inood
Xptorod, gen. of possessor [W. 195 (183); B. § 132, 23],
devoted to Christ and united to him, Ro.i. 6; «Anrot &yto1,
holy (or ‘ saints") by the calling of God, Ro. i. 7; 1 Co.
ib 2 b. called to (the discharge of) some office:
kAnTOs dmdatodos, i. e. divinely selected and appointed
(see kadéw, u. s.), Ro. i. 1; 1 Co. i. 1 [L br. «A.J; ef.
Gal. i. 15.*
k\(Bavos, -ov, 6, (for kpiBavos, more com. in earlier [yet
cAi8. in Hdt. 2, 92 (cf. Athen. 3 p. 110 ¢.)] and Attic
Grk.; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 179; Passow s. v. xpiBavos ;
PW 22) 1. a clibanus, an earthen vessel for
baking bread (Hebr. 1330, Ex. viii. 3 (vii. 29 Hebr.) ;
Lev. ii.4; xxvi. 26; Hos. vii. 4). It was broader at the
bottom than above at the orifice, and when sufficiently
heated by a fire kindled within, the dough was baked by
being spread upon the outside [but acc. to others, the
dough was placed inside and the fire or coals outside, the
vessel being often perforated with small holes that the
heat might the better penetrate; ef. Rich, Dict. of Grk.
and Rom. Antiq. s. v. clibanus; see Schol. on Arstph.
Acharn. 86 (iv. 2 p. 339, 20 sq. Dind.)]. 7533 Os
inves, a furnace, an oven: so Mt. vi. 80; Lk. xii. 28.*
Aliya or kAipa (on the accent cf. reff. s. v. kpiua), -ros,
70, (kKAivw) § 1. an inclination, slope, declivity: rév
épay, Polyb. 2,16, 3; [al.]. spec. 2. the [supposed ]
350
_ KAvowviGopas
sloping of the earth fr. the equator towards the poles, a
zone: Aristot., Dion. H., Plut., al.; Joseph. b. j. 5, 12,
25 3. a tract of land, a region: Ro. xv. 23; 2 Co.
xi. 10; Gal. i. 21; (Polyb. 5, 44,6; 7,6, 1; Hdian. 2,
11, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.]; al.).*
KAwwaptov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of kdivn ; see yuvatkaptoy), a
small bed, a couch: Acts v.15 LT TrWH. (Arstph.
frag. 83.d.; Epict. diss. 3, 5,13; Artem. oneir. 2, 57;
[cf. kAevidvov, and Pollux as there referred to].)*
kAlvn, -78, 9, (kAivw) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for nun,
also for way; a bed: univ., Mk. vii. 30; Lk. xvii. 34;
a couch to recline on at meals, Mk. iv. 21; vii. 4 au
WHom.]; Lk. viii. 16; a couch on which a sick man
is carried, Mt. ix. 2,6; Lk.v. 18; plur. Acts v.15 RG;
BddXetv eis KAiny, to cast into a bed, i. e. to afflict with
disease, Rev. ii. 22.*
KAwvi8tov, -ov, Td, (KAivn), a small bed, a couch: Lk. v.
19, 24. (Dion. H. antt. 7, 68; Artem. oneir. 1, 2; An-
tonin. 10, 28; several times in Plut.; [cf. Pollux 10, 7].) *
kdlvw; 1 aor. ékAwa; pf. Kéxdexa; 1. trans. a:
to incline, bow: tiv kepadny, of one dying, Jn. xix. 30;
16 mpdcwror eis t. yqv, of the terrified, Lk. xxiv.5. —_b.
i. q. to cause to fall back: mapepBodas, Lat. inclinare acies,
i. e. to turn to flight, Heb. xi. 34 (udaynv, Hom. Il. 14,
510; Tpaas, 5, 37; ’Axatovs, Od. 9, 59). c. to recline:
riv kepadny, in a place for repose [A. V. lay one’s head],
Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58. 2. intrans. to incline one’s
self [ef. B. 145 (127); W. § 38,1]: of the declining day
[A. V. wear away, be far spent], Lk. ix. 12; xxiv. 29;
Jer. vi. 4; dua T@ kXivat 7d Tpitov pépos THs vuKTos, Polyb.
3, 93, 7; eykAivaytos Tov HAlov és Eorépay, Arr. anab. 3,
4,2. [Comp.: dva-, éx-, kara-; mpoo-kXiva. | *
kducta, -as, 7, (kAivw); fr. Hom. down; prop. a place
for lying down or reclining; hence 1. a hut, erect-
ed to pass the night in. 2. a tent. 3. any
thing to recline on; a chair in which to lean back the
head, reclining-chair. 4. a company reclining; a
row or party of persons reclining at meal: so in plur., Lk.
ix. 14, on which cf. W. 229 (214) ; likewise in Joseph.
antiah2, 2.912 s blube Serta soe
KAoTh, -7s, 9, (kAertw), theft: plur. [cf. B. 77 (67);
W.176 (166) ], Mt.xv.19; Mk. vii. 21 (22). [From Aes-
chyl. down. ] *
KAUS@v, -wvos, 6, (kAvC@, to wash against); fr. Hom.
down ; a dashing or surging wave, a surge, a violent agi-
tation of the sea: rod dSaros, Lk. viii. 24; rHs Gadavons,
Jas. i. 6 (Jon. i. 4, 12; Sap. xiv. 5).*
[Syn. KAvdwv, kdua: Kdua a wave, suggesting uninter-
rupted succession; KAvdwr a billow, surge, suggesting size
andextension. So too in the fig. application of the words.
Schmidt ch. 56.]
kAvdevitopnar, ptep. kvdarCouevos 3 (kAVd@r); to be tossed
by the waves; metaph. to be agitated (like the waves)
mentally [A. V. tossed to and fro]: with dat. of instrum.
mavti avéw@ ths SiSackadias, Eph. iv. 14 (cf. Jas. i. 63 of
@ixot KrvdorcOncovra Kai dvaravcacbat od Suvicovrat,
Is. lvii. 20; 6 Sjpos tapacodpevos kal krvd8outopevos
oixnoerar hevyor, Joseph. antt. 9,11, 3; Kdrvdevretspevos
Kitonds
&k tod mov, Aristaenet. epp. 1, 26, p. 121 ed. Boisson-
ade [ep. 27, 14 ed. Abresch]).*
Ktords, -4 [B 20 (18); W.§ 8, 1], 6, (adn; appar.
identical with Alphzus, see ’A\daivs, 2 [cf. Heinichen’s
note on Euseb. h. e. 3, 11, 2]), Clopas (Vulg. [ Cleopas
and] Cleophas), the father of the apostle James the less,
and husband of Mary the sister of the mother of Jesus:
Jn. xix. 25 (rod KAwma se. yun [cf. W. 131 (125) note])*
kvf9: pres. pass. KynOoua; (fr. kvdo, inf. kvav and
Attic kvqv); to scratch, tickle, make to itch; pass. to itch:
yn Odpevor thy dxony (on the ace. ef. W. § 32,5), i. e. de-
sirous of hearing something pleasant (Hesych. xv7j@. 7.
dxonv: Cyrodvrés te dxotcar xa Adovnv), 2 Tim. iv. 3.
» (Mid. rév dvov kvnbeoOat eis ras dxdvOas Ta &dxn, its sores,
Aristot. h. a. 9, 1 p. 609%, 325 xvi Arrixol, kOe “ENAN-
ves, Moeris p. 234; [ef. Veitch s. v. xvdw].)*
Kvidos, -ov, 9, Cnidus or Gnidus, a peninsula [now Cape
Crio]and a city of the same name, on the coast of Caria:
Acts xxvii. 7 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B.D.s. v. Cnidus;
Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 190.] *
kodpavrns, -ov [B. 17 (16)], 6; a Lat. word, quadrans
(i. e. the fourth part of an as); in the N. T.a coin equal
to one half the Attic chalcus or to two Nerd (see Nerdy) :
Mk. xii. 42; Mt. v.26. The word is fully discussed by
Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 447 sqq. [A. V. far-
thing; see BB. DD. s. v.]*
kowAla, -as, 7}, (kotAos hollow); Sept. for 03 the belly,
D’yn the bowels, 24) the interior, the midst of a thing,
om the womb; the belly: and 1. the whole belly,
the entire cavity; hence 7 advo and 7 kato KovNla, the upper
[i. e. the stomach] and the lower belly are distinguished ;
very often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. 2. the
lower belly, the alvine region, the receptacle of the ex-
crement (Plut. symp. 7, 1, 3 sub fin. etmep eis kovAlav
éxaper Oia oToudyou may TO muvdpevov): Mt. xv. 17; Mk.
vii. 19. 3. the gullet (Lat. stomachus): Mt. xii. 40;
Lk. xv. 16 [WH Trmrg. yopracOjva éx etc.]; 1 Co. vi.
13; Rev. x. 9 sq.; SovAevew 7H kovdia, to be given up to
the pleasures of the palate, to gluttony, (see Sovdevo, 2
b.), Ro. xvi. 18; also dv 6 Oeds 7 Kovdia, Phil. ili. 19;
Kowlas épekts, Sir. Xxili. 6. 4. the womb, the place
where the feetus is conceived and nourished till birth:
Lk. i. 41 sq. 44; ii. 21; xi. 275 xxiii. 29; Jn. ili. 4,
(very often so in Sept.; very rarely in prof. auth. ;
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74; of the uterus of animals, ibid. 2,
16,43); éx (beginning from [see ék, IV. 1]) xowdias pnrpds,
Mt. xix. 12; Lk. i. 15; Acts iii. 2; xiv. 8; Gal. i. 15,
(for Dx j0312, Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 115 Ixx. (Ixxi.) 6; Jobi.
21; Is. xlix. 1; Judg. xvi. 17 [Vat. dro x. .3 cf. W. 33
(32))). ‘5. in imitation of the Hebr. 103, tropi-
cally, the innermost part of a man, the soul, heart, as the
seat of thought, feeling, choice, (Job xv. 35; xxxii. 18
[Sept. yaornp]; Prov. xviii. 8 [Sept. yuxn]; xx. 27, 30;
xxvi. 22 [Sept. owddyxva]; Hab. iii. 16; Sir. xix. 12; li,
21): Jn. vii. 38.* :
Kowdw, -@: Pass., pres. Kowdopat, Koyapar; pi. Ke-
koiunpae (cf. W. 274 (257)]; 1 aor. éxownény; 1 fut.
KowunOnooua; (akin to keiwar; Curtius § 45); to cause
351
KOLW@? ¢ &
to sleep, put to sleep, (Hom. et al.) ; metaph. to still, calm,
quiet, (Hom., Aeschyl., Plat.) ; Pass. to sleep, fall asleep .
prop., Mt. xxviii. 13; Lk. xxii. 45; Jn. xi.12; Acts
xii. 6; Sept. for 23¥. metaph. and euphemistically i. q:
to die [cf. Eng. to fall asleep]: Jn. xi. 11; Acts vii. 63;
xili. 36; 1 Co. vii. 39; xi. 30; xv. 6, 51 fief. Wis 555
(517); B. 121 (106) note]; 2 Pet. iii. 4; of KOlUL@peves;
Kekousnpevot, Kowunbévres, i. q. the dead: Mt. xxvii. 52; 1
Co. xv. 20; 1 Th. iv. 13-15 ; with év Xptor@ added (see
ev, I. 6 b. p. 211”), 1 Co. xv. 18; in the same sense Is.
xiv. 8; xliii.17; 1 K. xi. 43; 2 Mace. xii. 45; Hom. Hi.
11, 241; Soph. Electr. 509.*
Kolunorts, -ews, 7, a reposing, taking rest: Jn. xi. 13 [cf.
W. § 59, 8 a.]; of death, Sir. xlvi. 19; xlviii. 13; @
lying, reclining, Plat. conv. p. 183 a.*
Kowds, -7, -dv, (fr. Evv, ovv, with; hence esp. in Epic
Euvds for cowds, whence the Lat. cena [(?); see Vanitek
p- 1065]) ; 1. asin Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod. (opp. 721)
down (opp. to id:0s) common (i. e. belonging to several,
Lat. communis): Acts ii. 44; iv. 32; kown mores, Tit. i.
4; cornpia, Jude 3. 2. by a usage foreign to class.
Grk., common i.e. ordinary, belonging to the generality
(Lat. vulgaris); by the Jews opp. to dios, yracpevos,
kaOapés; hence unhallowed, Lat. profanus, levitically
unclean, (in class. Grk. BéBndos, q. v. 2): Mk. vii. 2, 5
(where RImrg. dvinros); Ro. xiv. 14; Heb. x. 29;
Rey. xxi. 27 [Rec. xowvovv], (1 Mace. i. 47; ayeiv coud,
ib. 62; Kowol dvOpwmor, common people, profanum vulgus,
Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 14; of rév Kowvdy Biov mponpnpevor, 1.
e. a life repugnant to the holy law, ibid. 138, 1,15; ov yap
@s kowdy aptov ovdé as Kowvov wopa tavra (i. e. the bread
and wine of the sacred supper) AapBavopev, Justin Mart.
apol. 1, 66; (of Xpioriavol) tpdmelay Kowny maparidevrat,
GAN’ od Kowny, a table communis but not profanus, Ep. ad
Diogn. 5, on which ef. Otto’s note); kxowdr cai [RG 7]
dxdOaprov, Acts x. 14; Kou. 7) akad., ib. x. 28; xi. 8, (Kowa
4} dxdOapra ovk éoOiopev, Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 20).
[Cf. Trench § ci.]*
Kowde, -@; 1 aor. inf. Kowdca [cf. W. 91 (86)]; pf.
kexolveoka; pf. pass. ptep. kexowwpevos ; (kowvds) ; i
in class. Grk. to make common. 2. in bibl. use (see
kowos, 2), a. to make (levitically) unclean, render un-
hallowed, defile, profane (which the Grks. express by BeBy-
dow, cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 24 note 33
[where he calls attention to Luke’s accuracy in putting
xowoov into the mouth of Jews speaking to Jews (Acts
xxi. 28) and Be8ndodv when they address Felix (xxiv.
6)]): Rev. xxi. 27 Rec.; Mt. xv. 11,18, 20; Mk. vii. 15,
18, 20, 23; pass. Heb. ix. 13; ri, Acts xxi. 28; yaorépa
puapopayia, 4 Mace. vii. 6. b. to declare or count un-
clean: Acts x. 15 (cf. 28); xi. 9; see dixatdw, 3.*
Kowwvew, -@; 1 aor. ékowarvnaa; pf. Kexowwdrnka; (Kotvo-
vos) 3 a. to come into communion or fellowship, to
become a sharer, be made a partner: as in Grk. writ. w.
gen. of the thing, Heb. ii. 14 [(so Prov. i. 11; 2 Mace.
xiv. 25)]; w. dat. of the thing (rarely so in Grk. writ.).
Ro. xv. 27; [1 Pet. iv. 13]. b. to enter into fellow
ship, join one’s self as an associate, make one’s self a sharer
OLWWMVIA
or partner: as in Grk. writ., w. dat. of the thing, 1 Tim.
v. 22; 2Jn.11; rats ypetas rwos, so to make another’s
necessities one’s own as to relieve them [A. V. communi-
cating to the necessities etc.], Ro. xii- 13; w. dat. of pers.
foll. by eis rs (as in Plat. rep. 5 p. 453 a.), Phil. iv. 15;
foll. by év w. dat. of the thing which one shares with
another, Gal. vi. 6 (kowarnoes ev mace TO TAnolov cov
kal ovx épeis tSva etvat, Barnab. ep. 19, 8); cf. W. § 30,
8a.; [B. § 132, 8; Bp. Lghtft. or Ellicott on Gal. 1. ¢.
Comp. : avy-xowavéa. | *
kowevia, -as, 9, (kowaves), fellowship, association, com-
munity, communion, joint participation, intercourse; in
the N. T. as in class. Grk. 1. the share which one
has in anything, participation; w. gen. of the thing in
which he shares: mvedparos, Phil. ii. 1; tod dyiov mvevpa-
ros, 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14) ; r&v rabnudre@v tov Xpiorod, Phil.
iii. 10; rhs wiorews, Philem. 6 [ef. Bp. Lghtft.]; rod
aiuaros Tov Xpicrod, i. e. in the benefits of Christ’s death,
1 Co. x. 16 [ef. Meyer ad loc.]; rod o@paros rod Xp. in the
(mystical) body of Christ or the church, ibid.; ris dca-
kovias, 2 Co. viii. 4; tod pvotnpiov, Eph. iii. 9 Rec. eis
koweviay Tod viod rod Geov, to obtain fellowship in the
dignity and blessings of the Son of God, 1 Co. i. 9, where
cf. Meyer. 2. intercourse, fellowship, intimacy:
deéa Kowwvias, the right hand as the sign and pledge
of fellowship (in fulfilling the apostolic office), Gal. ii. 9
[where see Bp. Lghtft.]; tis xow. poti mpos cxdros; what
in common has light with darkness? 2 Co. vi. 14 (ris odv
kowavia mpos "AmdANwva TH pndev oiketov emireTndevKOTt,
Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 14 fin.; ef d€ tus Erte Kowwvia pds
Geods jpiv, Stob. serm. 28 [i. p. 87 ed. Gaisf.]); used of
the intimate bond of fellowship which unites Christians:
absol. Acts ii. 42; with eis rd evayyédtov added, Phil. i.
53 Kowaviay éxew pe nuav, per aGdAnrov, 1 In. i. 3, 7;
of the fellowship of Christians with God and Christ, werd
Tov marpos kK. “eT TOU viod avTod, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6, (which fel-
lowship, acc. to John’s teaching, consists in the fact that
Christians are partakers in common of the same mind as
God and Christ, and of the blessings arising therefrom).
By a use unknown to prof. auth. cowevia in the N. T.
denotes 3. a benefaction jointly contributed, a col-
lection, a contribution, as exhibiting an embodiment and
proof of fellowship (cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Wisd.
viii. 18, p. 176): 2 Co. viii. 4; e¢s rua, for the benefit of
one, 2 Co. ix. 13; movetodar cow. (to make a contribu-
tion) ets rwva, Ro. xv. 26 ; joined with edoia, Heb. xiii.
16. [Cf B. § 182, 8.]*
Kowwvikds, -7, -dv, (Kowvavia) ; 1. social, sociable,
ready and apt to form and maintain communion and fel-
lowship: Plat. deff.p.411e.; Aristot. pol. 3, 13 [p. 12839,
38; eth. Eudem. 8, 10 p. 1242%, 26 xowavixdy avOpwros
(gov]; Polyb. 2,44,1; Antonin. 7,52. 55; often in Plut.;
mpdgets kowv. actions having reference to human society,
FAntonineT4 1333/90, 1 2. inclined to make others
sharers in one’s possessions, inclined to impart, free in giv-
ing, liberal, (Aristot. rhet. 2, 24, 2 [where, however, see
Cope]; Lcian. Tim. 56): 1 Tim. vi. 18.*
852
xodalo
commonly as subst. |; a. a partner, associate, com
rade, companion: 2 Co. viii. 23; Exew Twa xowovdr,
Philem. 17; edt cowwvds tun, to be one’s partner, Lk. v.
10; rus (gen. of pers.), to be the partner of one doing
something, Heb. x. 33; twos év tO aivart, to be one’s
partner in shedding the blood ete. Mt. xxiii. 30. b.
a partaker, sharer, in any thing; w. gen. of the thing:
rav rabjparav, 2 Co.i. 7; THs Sdfys, 1 Pet. v.15 detas
picews, 2 Pet. i. 43; Tov 6vo.acrnpiov, of the altar (at
Jerusalem) on which sacrifices are offered, i. e. sharing
in the worship of the Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; tav Satpovior,
partakers of (or with) demons, i. e. brought into fellow.
ship with them, because they are the authors of the
heathen worship, ibid. 20; (é€v r@ apOdpr@ kowevoi...
év trois POaprois, joint partakers in that which is imper-
ishable ...in the blessings which perish, Barnab. ep.
19, 8; see xotvwvew, fin.).*
Kotrn, -ns, 7, (KEQ, KEIQ, xeipar, akin to xotpd@) ; fr.
Hom. Od. 19, 341 down; Sept. chiefly for 3D¥/n, also
for 733¥ ete. ; a. a place for lying down, resting,
sleeping in; a bed, couch: ets rhv xoirny (see eipi, V. 2a.)
eigiv, Lk. xi. 7. b. spec. the marriage-bed, as in the
Tragg.: r. koirny puaive, of adultery (Joseph. antt. 2,
4,5; Plut. de fluv. 8, 3), Heb. xiii. 4. c. cohabita-
tion, whether lawful or unlawful (Lev. xv. 4sq. 21-25,
ete.; Sap. iii. 13, 16; Eur. Med. 152; Ale. 249): plur.
sexual intercourse (see mepuraréa, b. a.), Ro. xiii. 13 [A.V.
chambering]; by meton. of the cause for the effect we
have the peculiar expression koitny €xew €k Tivos, to have
conceived by a man, Ro. ix. 10; xoitn oréppatos, Lev. xv.
16; xxii. 4; xviii. 20, 23 [here x. els omeppaticpoy]; on
these phrases cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 291 sq.*
Koitav, -dvos, 6, (fr. koirn; cf. vungar etc.), a sleeping-
room, bed-chamber: 6 éri tov xour. the officer who is over
the bed-chamber, the chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (2 S. iv. 7;
Ex. viii. 3; 1 Esdr. iii.3; the Atticists censure the word,
for which Attic writ. generally used Swpdriov; cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 252 sq.).*
kéxktvos, -7, -ov, (fr. kéxxos a kernel, the grain or berry
of the lex coccifera; these berries are the clusters of
eggs of a female insect, the kermes [(cf. Eng. carmine,
crimson) ], and when collected and pulverized produce a
red which was used in dyeing, Plin. h. n. 9,41, 65; 16,
8, 12; 24, 4), crimson, scarlet-colored: Mt. xxvii. 28;
Heb. ix. 19; Rev. xvii. 8. neut. as a subst. i. q- scarlet
cloth or clothing: Rev. xvii.4; xviii. 12,16, (Gen. xxxviii.
28; Ex. xxv.4; Lev. xiv. 4, 6; Josh. ii. 18; 2S. i. 24;
2 Chr. ii. 7,14; Plut. Fab. 15; qopeiv xéxxwa, scarlet
robes, Epict. diss. 4, 11,34; év xoxxivots meptratety, 3, 22,
10). Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.Carmesin; Roskoffin Schenkel
i. p. 501 sq.; Kamphausen in Riehm p. 220; [B.D. s. v.
Colors, II. 3].*
KéKkos, -ov, 6, [cf. Vanitek, Fremdworter etc. p- 26],
a grain: Mt. xiii. 31; xvii. 20; Mk. iv. 31; Lk. xiii.
19; xvii. 6; Jn. xii. 24; 1 Co. xv. 37. [Hom. h. Cer.,
Hat., down. ]*
koAd{w: pres. pass. ptcp. kodatéuevos; 1 aor. mid. sub
kowvovds, -7, -dv, (kowds), [as adj. Eur. Iph. Taur. 1173; | june 8 pers. plur. coddowvrat ; (xddos lopped); in Grk
nuAaKela
writ. 1. prop. to lop, prune, as trees, wings. 2.
to check, curb, restrain. 3. to chastise, correct, pun-
ish: so in the N. T.; pass. 2 Pet. ii. 9, and Lehm. in 4;
mid. to cause to be punished (3 Mace. vii.3): Acts iv. 21.*
kodaxela (TWH -xia [see I, ¢]), -as, 9, (kodakevo),
flattery : Xbyos kodakelas, flattering discourse, 1 Th. ii. 5.
(Plat., Dem., Theophr., Joseph., Hdian., al.) *
Kohacts, -ews, 7, (koAd{w), correction, punishment, pen-
alty: Mt. xxv. 46; xédaow éxet, brings with it or has con-
nected with it the thought of punishment, 1 Jn. iv. 18.
(Ezek. xiv. 3 sq., etc.; 2 Mace. iv. 88; 4 Mace. viii. 8;
Sap. xi. 14; xvi. 24, ete.; Plat., Aristot., Diod. 1, 77,
(9); 4, 44, (3); Ael. v. h. 7, 1535 al.) *
[Syn. «déAacrs, tiuwpla: thenoted definition of Aristotle
which distinguishes «éAaors from tiuwpta as that which (is
disciplinary and) has reference to him who suffers, while the
latter (is penal and) has reference to the satisfaction of him
who inflicts, may be found in his rhet. 1, 10,17; cf. Cope,
Intr. to Arist. Rhet. p.232. To much the same effect, Plato,
Protag. 324 a. sq., also deff. 416. But, as in other cases,
usage (esp. the later) does not always recognize the distinc-
tion; see e. g. Philo de legat. ad Gaium § 1 fin.; frag. ex
Euseb. prep. evang. 8,13 (Mang. ii. 641); de vita Moys. i. 16
fin.; Plut. de sera num. vind. §§ 9, 11, etc. Plutarch (ibid.
§ 25 sub fin.) uses xoAdoua: of those undergoing the penalties
of the other world (cf. Just. Mart. 1 apol. 8; Clem. Rom.
2 Cor. 6,7; Just. Mart. 1 apol. 43; 2 apol.8; Test. xii. Patr.,
test. Reub. 5; test. Levi 4, etc.; Mart. Polyc. 2,3; 11, 2;
Ign. ad Rom. 5,3; Mart. Ign. vat.5 etc.). See Trench, Syn.
§ vii.; McClellan, New Test. vol. i. marg. reff. on Mt. u. s.;
Bartlett, Life and Death Eternal. Note G.; C. F’. Hudson,
Debt and Grace, p. 188sqq.; Schmidt ch. 167, 2 sq.]
Kodaccacts, see KoAooaaevs.
Kodaooat, see Kodoocal.
kodadif{w; 1 aor. cxohaduca; pres. pass. kodapifopar ;
(kohagos a fist, and this fr. ko\dmrw to peck, strike); to
strike with the fist, give one a blow with the fist (Terence,
colaphum infringo, Quintil. col. duco), [A. V. to buffet]:
twa, Mt. xxvi. 67; Mk. xiv. 65; as a specific term for
a general, i. q. to maltreat, treat with violence and con-
tumely, 2 Co. xii. 7; pres. pass., 1 Co. iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii.
20. (Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) The word is fully
discussed by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. ete. p. 67
sqq:; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 175 sq.*
KodAdw, -&: Pass., pres. koAA@pat; 1 aor. exodAnOny ;
1 fut. KoAAnOncopa (Mt. xix. 5 LT Tr WH); (xodda
gluten, glue); prop. to glue, glue to, glue together, cement,
fasten together; hence univ. to join or fasten firmly to-
gether; in the N. T. only the pass. is found, with reflex-
ive force, to join one’s self to, cleave to; Sept. for p27:
6 komopros 6 KoAAnOels jutv, Lk. x. 11; éxoAAnOnoav aris
ai dpapriat dypt Tod ovpavod, her sins were sucha heap as
to reach even unto heaven (that is, came to the knowl-
edge of heaven), Rev. xviii. 5 GLT Tr WH (ékoAa. 4
uxt pov éricw cov, Ps. Ixii. (Ixiii.) 9, ai dyvorae jay
imephveykav as Tod ovpavod, 1 Esdr. vill. 72 (74); UBpts
re Bin te ovpavov txet, Hom. Od. 15, 329; 17, 565). of
persons, w. dat. of the thing, xohAnOyrt TO dppare join
thyself to etc. Acts viii. 29; w. dat. of pers., to form an
intimate connection with, enter into the closest relations
303
KOTOR
with, unite one’s self to, (so Barn. ep. ¢. 10, 3 sq. 5. 83
also with pera and gen. of pers., ibid. 10, 11; 19, 2. 6;
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15,1; 30,3; 46, 2 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.’s
note], 4): 77 yuvacki, Mt. xix.5 LT Tr WH; +9 wépyn,
1 Co. vi. 16 (Sir. xix. 2); 7@ xvpig, 1 Co. vi. 17 (2 K.
Xviil. 6; Sir. ii. 3); to join one’s self to one as an asso-
ciate, keep company with, Acts v.13; ix. 26; x. 28; to
follow one, be on his side, Acts xvii. 34 (2 S. xx. 2; 1
Mace. iii. 2; vi. 21); to join or attach one’s self to a
master or patron, Lk. xv. 15; w. dat. of the thing, to
give one’s self steadfastly to, labor for, [A.V. cleave to]:
T@ ayaa, Ro. xii. 9, dyad, kpioet Stxaia, Barn. ep. 20, 2;
Th evdoyia, so cleave to as to share, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
31, 1. (Aeschyl. Ag. 1566; Plat., Diod., Plut., al.)
[Comp.: mpoo-KoAddo. | *
Koddovproy (IT Tr xoAdtvpiov, the more common form
in prof. auth. [cf. Lob. Pathol. proleg. p.461; WH. App.
p- 152]), -ov, 76, (dimin. of xoAAvpa, coarse bread of a
cylindrical shape, like that known in Westphalia as
Pumpernickel), Lat. collyrium (A.V. eye-salve], a prepa-
ration shaped like a xoAAvpa, composed of various mate-
rials and used as a remedy for tender eyelids (Hor.
sat. 1, 5, 30; Epict. diss. 2,21, 20; 3, 21, 21; Cels. 6, 6,
7): Rev. iii. 18.*
KoAAuBirrhs, -0d, 6, (fr. koAAvBos 1.q. a. a small coin,
cf. kodoBos clipped; b. rate of exchange, premium), @
money-changer, banker: Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii.
15. Menand., Lys. in Poll. 7, 33, 170; 6 pév KodAdAvBos
Sdxipov, Td S€ KoAdAvSiorIs addxypoy, Phryn. ed. Lod. p.
440. Cf. what was said under kepyariorns.*
KoAAUpLov, See KoAAOUvpLOV.
KoAoBda, -@: 1 aor. exoAdB@oa; Pass., 1 aor. ¢xodo-
BoOnv; 1 fut. codoBwbnoopuar; (fr. kodkoBds lopped, mu-
tilated); to cut off (rds xetpas, 2S. iv. 12; rods modas,
Aristot. h. a. 1, 1 [p. 487, 24]; ryv piva, Diod. 1, 78) ;
to mutilate (Polyb. 1, 80,13); hence in the N. T. of time,
(Vulg. brevio) to shorten, abridge, curtail: Mt. xxiv. 22;
Mk. xiii. 20.*
Kodoocaets, and (so L Tr WH) Kodaccaets (see the
foll. word; in Strabo and in Inscrr. Kodooanvds), -€ws, 6,
Vulg. Colossensis, Pliny Colossinus; Colossian, a Colos-
sian; in the heading [and the subscription (R Tr)] of
the Ep. to the Col.*
Kodoooal (R T WH, the classical form), and KoAacaat
(R* L Tr, apparently the later popular form; [see WH.
Intr. § 423, and esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. p.16 sq.]; ef.
W. p.44; and on the plur. W. § 27, 3), -é», ai, Colosse,
anciently a large and flourishing city, but in Strabo’s time
a méAucpa [i. e. “ small town” (Bp. Lghtft.)] of Phrygia
Major situated on the Lycus, not far from its junction
with the Meander, and in the neighborhood of Laodicea
and Hierapolis (Hat. 7, 30; Xen. an. 1, 2,6; Strab. 12,
8,18 p.576; Plin. h. n. 5,41), together with which cities
it was destroyed by an earthquake [about] a. p. 66
({Euseb. chron. Ol. 210]; Oros. 7, 7 [see esp. Bp. Lghtft.
u. s. p. 38]): Col. i. 2. [See the full description, with
copious reff., by Bp. Lghtft. u. s. pp. 1-72.]*
KéArros, -ov, 6, (apparently akin to xoidos hollow, [yet
Kou Bao
ef. Vanitek p. 179; L. and S.s. v.]), Hebr. ps the
bosom (Lat. sinus), i.e. as in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down 1. the front of the body between the arms:
hence dvaxeicOae év TH KOAm@ Tw, Of the one who so re-
clines at table that his head covers the bosom as it were,
ahe chest, of the one next him [cf. B. D. s. v. Meals], Jn.
xiii. 23. Hence the figurative expressions, év rots KoAmrots
(on the plur., which occurs as early as Hom. Hl. 9, 570,
ef. W.§ 27, 3; [B. 24 (21)]) rod "ABpadp etvat, to obtain
the seat next to Abraham, i. e. to be partaker of the same
blessedness as Abraham in paradise, Lk. xvi. 23 ; dmroe-
pecOa cis Tov k.’ABp. to be borne away to the enjoyment
of the same felicity with Abraham, ibid. 22 (ovr yap
maOovras — acc. to another reading davovras —’ABpadp
kal “Ioadk kal Laka trodéEovrat eis Teds KOATOUS avTar, 4
Mace. xiii. 16; [see B. D. s. v. Abraham’s bosom, and]
on the rabbin. phrase om aN Ow iN, in Abraham’s
bosom, to designate bliss in paradise, cf. Lightfoot, Hor.
Hebr. et Talmud. p. 851 sqq.); 6 dv els Tov k. Tov marpos,
lying (turned) unto the bosom of his father (God), i. e.
in the closest and most intimate relation to the Father,
Jn. i. 18 [W. 415 (387)]; cf. Cic. ad div. 14, 4 iste vero
sit in sinu semper et complexu meo. 2. the bosom
of a garment, i. e. the hollow formed by the upper fore-
part of a rather loose garment bound by a girdle, used
for keeping and carrying things [the fold or pocket ; cf.
B. D. s. v. Dress], (Ex. iv. 6 sq.; Prov. vi. 27); so, figu-
ratively, perpov addy diddvat els T. x. TWvds, to repay one
liberally, Lk. vi. 38 (dodidovae eis r. x. Is. Ixv. 6; Jer.
XXxXix. (xxxii.) 18). 3. a bay of the sea (cf. Ital.
golfo [Eng. gulf, —which may be only the mod. repre-
sentatives of the Grk. word]): Acts xxvii. 39.*
KohupBaw, -O; to dive, to swim: Acts xxvii.43. (Plat.
Prot. p. 350 a.; Lach. p. 193 ¢., and in later writ.)
[Comp. : éx-KodupBde. | *
KodvpB Opa, -as, 7, (cohuuBde), a place for diving, a swim-
ming-pool [A. V. simply pool]: Jn. ix. 7, and Ree. in 11;
a reservoir or pool used for bathing, Jn. v. 2, 4 [(acc. to
txt.of RL), 7]. (Plat. rep. 5 p. 453 d.; Diod., Joseph.,
al.; Sept., 2 K. xviii. 17; Neh. ii. 14; Nah. ii. 8.)*
Kokdvia (RG Tr), cohovia (L TWH KC [ef. Chandler
§ 95]), [Tdf. edd. 2, 7 -vera; see his note on Acts as be-
low, and cf. eu, +], -as, 7, (a Lat. word), a colony: in Acts
xvi. 12 the city of Philippi is so called, where Octavianus
had planted a Roman colony (cf. Dio Cass. 51,4; Digest.
50, tit. 15, 8). The exegetical difficulties of this pass.
are best removed, as Meyer shows, by connecting xod@via
closely with mparn modus, the chief city, a [Roman] colony
(a colonial city); [but cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip.
p: 50/sq: ].*
Kondo, -; («dun) ; to let the hair grow, have long hair,
(ef. xopn fin.]: 1 Co. xi.14sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down.) *
kéym, -ns, 9, [fr. Hom. down], hair, head of hair: 1 Co.
x1. 15. [Ace. to Schmidt (21, 2) it differs fr. Opi (the
anatomical or physical term) by designating the hair as
an ornament (the notion of length being only sec-
ondary and suggested). Cf. B.D. s. v. Hair.]*
354
KOVLAO>
koultw: 1 aor. ptcp. fem. kopicava; Mid., pres. ptep.
kopiCouevos; 1 fut. xouicopat (Eph. vi. 8 LT Tr WH;
Col. iii. 25 Ltxt. WH) and Attic copsodpat (Col. iii. 25 R
GLmrg.T Tr; [Eph. vi.8 RG]; 1 Pet.v.4; ef. (WH.
App. p. 163 sq.]; B. 37 (33); [W. § 13,1 ¢.; Veitch
s. v.]), ptcp. Koprovpevos (2 Pet. ii.13 [here WH Trmrg.
Gdicotpevor; see adicéw, 2 b.]); 1 aor. exopicdpny [B.
§ 135, 1]; rare in Sept., but in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down
freq. in various senses ; 1. to care for, take care of,
provide for. 2. to take up or carry away in order
to care for and preserve. 3. univ. to carry away,
bear off 4. to carry, bear, bring to: once so in the
N. T., viz. dddBaorpov, Lk. vii. 37. Mid. (as often in
prof. auth.) to carry away for one’s self; to carry off what
is one’s own, to bring back; i. e. a. to receive, obtain:
Thy erayyeXiav, the promised blessing, Heb. x. 36; xi. 39
[ras erayy. L; soT Tr WH in xi. 13]; ocwrnpiav Wuyar,
1 Pet.i.93; ris d0&ns crepavoy, 1 Pet. v.45 proOdv adixias,
2 Pet. ii. 13 [see above], (rov G£vov rns ducceBeias pro Gov,
2 Mace. viii. 33; ddav éoOdny [al. capmi¢erat], Eur. Hipp.
432; ryvagiav napa bear, Plat. legg. 4 p. 718 a., and other
exx. elsewh.). b. to receive what was previously one’s
own, to get back, receive back, recover: ré éuov atv ToK@,
Mt. xxv. 27; his son (of Abraham after he had con-
sented to sacrifice Isaac), Heb. xi. 19 (2 Mace. vii. 29;
rov ddedhov awvBpiorov, Philo de Josepho § 35; of d€ map’
édmidas éavrods Kexopiopevor, having received each other
back, been restored to each other, contrary to their expecta-
tions, of Abraham and Isaac after the sacrifice of the
latter had been prevented by God, Joseph. antt. 1, 13,
4; riv adeApny, Eur. Iph. T. 1362; used of the recovery
of hostages, captives, etc., Thuc. 1, 113; Polyb. 1, 83, 8;
8, 51, 12; 8,40, 10; the city and temple, 2 Mace. x. 1;
a citadel, a city, often in Polyb.; trav Bacideiav, Arstph.
av. 549; rhv mwatpeay dpyxiy, Joseph. antt. 13, 4, 1).
Since in the rewards and punishments of deeds, the
deeds themselves are as it were requited and so given
back to their authors, the meaning is obvious when one
is said koui¢erOat that which he has done, i. e. either the
reward or the punishment of the deed [W. 620 sq.
(576)]: 2Co. v.10; Col. iii. 25; with mapa kupiov added,
Eph. vi. 8; ([duapriav, Lev. xx. 17]; éxaoros, Kadas
eroinge, kopteirat, Barn. ep. 4, 12). [Comp.: ék-, cvy-
kopuica. | *
kopyérepov, neut. compar. of the adj. kouypds (fr. Kopew
to take care of, tend) neat, elegant, nice, fine; used ad-
verbially, more finely, better: xourpdr. éxw to be better, of
a convalescent, Jn. iv. 52 (Grav 6 larpés ely: Kduros
éxeus, Epict. diss. 3, 10,13; so in Latin belle habere, Cic.
epp. ad div. 16, 15; [cf. Eng. ‘he’s doing nicely,’ ‘he’s
getting on finely’; and] Germ. er befindet sich hiibsch;
es geht hitbsch mit ihm). The gloss. of Hesych. refers
to this pass.: kopiporepov+ BeAti@repov, EXadpdrepov.*
Kovidw, -: pf. pass. ptcp. Kexovtauévos; (fr. Kovia,
which signifies not only ‘dust’ but also ‘lime’); to cover
with lime, plaster over, whitewash: racot xexovrapéves (the
Jews were accustomed to whitewash the entrances to
their sepulchres, as a warning against defilement by
KOVLOPTOS
touching them [B. D. s.v. Burial, 1 fin.; ef. Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sqq-]), Mt. xxiii. 27; roiyos
xexov. is applied to a hypocrite who conceals his malice
under an outward assumption of piety, Acts xxiii. 3.
(Dem., Aristot., Plut., al.; for Tw, Deut. xxvii. 2, 4.) *
Kovioptos, -od, 6, (fr. kovia, and épyupe to stir up) ; Ths
prop. raised dust, flying dust, (Hadt., Plat., Polyb.,
al.). 2. univ. dust: Mt. x.14; Lk. ix. 5; x. 11;
Acts xiii. 51; xxii. 23. (For p>; xcs, 9 Nati. i833
for \Dy, Deut. ix. 21.)*
komd{w: 1 aor. ékémaca; (kémos); prop. to grow weary
or tired; hence to cease from violence, cease raging: 6
dvepos (Hat. 7, 191), Mt. xiv. 32; Mk. iv. 89; vi. 51.
(Gen. viii. 1; Jon.i. 11 sq.; [cf. esp. Philo, somn. ii. 35].)*
komerés, -ov, 6, (fr. Kémropat, see Kdrre), Sept. for
120; Lat. planctus, i. e. lamentation with beating of the
breast as a sign of grief: xomerov movetoOa eri tum, Acts
vill. 2; emt rwa, Zech. xii. 10. (Eupolis in Bekker’s an-
nott. ad Etym. Magn. p. 776; Dion. H. antt. 11, 31;
Plut. Fab. aeis)*
Kom, -7s, 7, (KdmT@) 5 1. prop. several times in
Grk. writ. the act of cutting, a cut. 2. in bibl. Grk.
a cutting in pieces, slaughter: Heb. vii.1; Gen. xiv. 17;
Deut. xxviii. 25; Josh: x. 20; Judith xv. 7.*
komidw, -®, [3 pers. plur. xomtodow (for -dow), Mt. vi.
28 Tr; cf. épwrde, init.]; 1 aor. ékomiaca; pf. kexomiaxa
(2 pers. sing. kexomiaxes, Rev. ii. 3 L T Tr WH, cf. [W.
§ 13, 2c.]; B. 43 (88) [and his trans. of Apollon. Dysk. p.
54n.; Tdf. Proleg. p.123; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex.
p- 39])3 (kémos, q. v-) 5 1. as in Arstph., Joseph.,
Plut., al., to grow weary, tired, exhausted, (with toil or
burdens or grief): Mt. xi. 28; Rev. ii. 3; kexomvakas ek
ris ddouropias, Jn. iv. 6 (id THs 6douropias, Joseph. antt.
2,15, 3; Spapodvrat kai ov Komidcovor, Is. xl. 31). 2.
in bibl. Grk. alone, to labor with wearisome effort, to toil
(Sept. for px»); of bodily labor: absol., Mt. vi. 28;
Lk. v. 5; xii. 27 [not Tdf.]; Jn. iv. 38; Acts xx. 35;
1 Co. iv.12; Eph. iv. 28; 2 Tim. ii. 6 [ef. W.556 (517) ;
B. 390 (334)]; ré, upon a thing, Jn. iv. 38. of the toil-
some efforts of teachers in proclaiming and promot-
ing the kingdom of God and Christ: 1 Co. xv. 10; xvi.
16, (cf. Jn. iv. 38); foll. by ev w. dat. of the thing in
which one labors, év Moyo x. d:dackadia, 1 Tim. v.17; &y
ipiv, among you, 1 Th. v.18; év kupip (see ev, I. 6 b. p.
211» mid. [Lbr. the cl.]), Ro. xvi. 12; ets rwa, for one,
for his benefit, Ro. xvi. 6; Gal. iv. 11 [ef. B. 242 (209);
W. 503 (469)]; «is otro, looking to this (viz. that piety
has the promise of life), 1 Tim. iv. 10; eis 6, to which end,
Col. i. 29; ets kevdv, in vain, Phil. ii. 16 (kevds exomiaca,
of the frustrated labor of the prophets, Is. xlix. 4).*
k61r0s, -0v, 6, (KdTT@) ; 1. i. gq. rd Korey, a beat-
ing. 2. i. q. orerds, a beating of the breast in grief,
sorrow, (Jer. li. 33 (xlv. 3)). 3. labor (so Sept. often
for Spy), ie. a. trouble (Aeschyl., Soph.) :_xéous
mapéxewv rwi, to cause one trouble, make work for na,
Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; Gal. vi. 17; xémrov
mapéx. Twi, Lk. xviii. 5. b. intense labor united with
trouble, toil, (Eur., Arstph., al.) : univ., plur., 2 Co. vi. 5;
805
KopBav
xi. 23; of manual labor, joined with pdy6os [(see below) ],
1 Th. ii. 9; ev xém@ k. dxOe, [toil and travail], 2 Co. xi.
27 (where L T Tr WH om. ev); 2 Th. iii. 8; of the la-
borious exurts of Christian virtue, 1 Co. xv. 58; Rey. il.
2; plur. Rev. xiv. 13; 6 xémos ris dyamns, the labor to
which love prompts, and which voluntarily assumes and
endures trouble and pains for the salvation of others, 1
Th. i. 3; Heb. vi. 10 Ree.; of toil in teaching, Jn. iv.
38 (on which see e’s, B. I. 3); 1 Th. iii. 5; of that which
such toil in teaching accomplishes, 1 Co. iii. 8; plur. 2
Co. x. 15 (cf. Sir. xiv. 15).*
[Syn. eémos, wdx0os, révos: primarily and in general
classic usage, mévos gives prominence to the effort (work as
requiring force), «é7os to the fatigue, udx0os (chiefly poetic)
to the hardship. But in the N. T. révos has passed over
(in three instances out of four) to the rmneaning pain (hence
it has no place in the ‘new Jerusalem’, Rev. xxi. 4); cf. the
deterioration in the case of the allied rovnpds, révns, Schmidt,
ch. 85; cf. Trench § cii. (who would trans. 7. ‘toil’, «. ‘wea-
riness ’, w. ‘labor’).]
kompia [Chandler § 96], -as, 9, i. q. 9 Kémpos, dung: Lk.
xill. 8 Rec.*; xiv. 35 (34). (Jobii.8; 18.ii.8; Neh.
ii. 13; 1 Mace. ii..62; [Strab., Poll., al.].) * 2
Kémptov, -ov, 76, i. q. 9 KOmpos, dung, manure: plur. Lk.
xill. 8 [Rec.* xompiay]. (Heraclit. in Plut. mor. p. 669
{quaest. conviv. lib. iv. quaest. iv. § 38,6]; Strab. 16,
§ 26 p. 784; Epict. diss. 2,4,5; Plut. Pomp. c. 48; [Is.
v. 25; Jer. xxxii. 19 (xxv. 33); Sir. xxii. 2], and other
later writ.) *
kérrw: impf. 3 pers. plur. ékorrov; 1 aor. ptep. kéwas
(Mk. xi. 8 T Tr txt. WH); Mid., impf. exorréunv; fut.
Koyropar; 1 aor. éxowdyny; [fr. Hom. down]; to cut,
strike, smite, (Sept. for N37, ND, etc.): ri amd or &«
twos, to cut from, cut off, Mt. xxi. 8; Mk. xi. 8. Mid.
to beat one’s breast for grief, Lat. plango [R. V. mourn]:
Mt. xi. 17; xxiv. 30, (Aeschyl. Pers. 683; Plat., al. ;
Sept. often so for 15D); revd, to mourn or bewail one
[ef. W. § 32,1 y.]: Lk. viii. 52; xxiii. 27, (Gen. xxiii. 2;
1S. xxv. 1, ete.; Arstph. Lys. 396; Anthol. 11, 135, 1);
ént twa, Rev.i. 7; [xviii.9 T Tr WH], (2S. xi. 26); éené
7, Rev. xviii. 9 [R GL], ef. Zech. xii. 10. [Comp.: ava-,
drro-, ék-, €-, Kata, mpo-, mpookénta. SYN. cf. Opyvéw.]*
képaé, -axos, 6,a raven: Lk, xii. 24. [ Fr. Hom. down. ] *
Koptictov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of «képy), prop. a collogq. word
used disparagingly (like the Germ. Mddel), a little girl
(in the epigr. attributed to Plato in Diog. Laert. 3, 33;
Leian. as. 6); used by later writ. without disparagement
[W. 24 (23)],a girl, damsel, maiden: Mt. ix. 24 sq. ; xiv.
11; Mk. v. 41 sq.; vi. 22, 28; (occasionally, as in Epic-
tet. diss. 2, 1, 28; 3, 2,8; 4, 10, 33; Sept. for Moy);
twice also for m7, Joel iii. 3 (iv. 3); Zech. viii. 5; [Tob.
vi. 12; Judith xvi. 12; Esth.ii.2]). The form and use
of the word are fully discussed in Lobeck ad Phryn. p.
73 sq., cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 42 sq.*
kopBav [-Bdv WH; but sec Tdf. Proleg. p. 102], in-
decl., and xopBavas, ace. -av [B. 20 (18) ], 6, (Hebr. 7239p
i.e. an offering, Sept. everywh. dépov, a term which com-
prehends all kinds of sacrifices, the bloody as well as the
bloodless) ; 1. xopBay, a gift offered (or to be of-
Kope
fered) to God: Mk. vii. 11 (Joseph. antt. 4, 4, 4, of the
Nazirites, of kopBav abrods dvopdaavtes TH Oew@, S@pov Se
TodTo onuaiver Kata ‘EXAjvev yhorrav; cf. contr. Apion.
1, 22,4; [BB.DD. s. v. Corban; Ginsburg in the Bible
Edueator, i. 155]). 2. xopBavas, -a [see B. u. s.],
the sacred treasury: Mt. xxvii. 6 [L mrg. Tr mrg. kopBav]
(rdv fepdv Onaavpdy, kadeirat Sé KopBavas, Joseph. b. j. 2,
9, 4).*
Kopé (in Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 2 sqq. with the Grk. ter-
minations -éov, 7-, -v), 6, (Hebr. np i. e. ice, hail), Ko-
rah(Vulg. Core), a man who, with others, rebelled against
Moses (Num. xvi.) : Jude 11.*
Kopevvupe; (Kdpos satiety); to satiate, sate, satisfy: 1
aor. pass. ptcp. copeoOevres, as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down, w. gen. of the thing with which one is filled [B.
§ 132, 19], rpopis, Acts xxvii. 38; trop. (pf.) Kexopecpe-
vo. éore, every wish is satisfied in the enjoyment of the
consummate Messianic blessedness, 1 Co. iv. 8.*
Kopiv6.os, -ov, 6, a Corinthian, an inhabitant of Corinth:
Acts xviii. 8; 2 Co. vi. 11. [(Hdt., Xen., al.) ]*
Képw00s, -ov, 7, Corinth, the metropolis of Achaia
proper, situated on the isthmus of the Peloponnesus be-
tween the AZgean and Ionian Seas (hence called bimaris,
Hor. car. 1, 7, 2; Ovid. metam. 5, 407), and having two
harbors, one of which called Cenchrew (see Keyypeat)
was the roadstead for ships from Asia, the other, called
Lechzon or Lechzum, for ships from Italy. It was utterly
destroyed by L. Mummius, the Roman consul, in the
Achean war, B.C. 146; but after the lapse of a century
it was rebuilt by Julius Caesar [B. c. 44]. It was emi-
nent in commerce and wealth, in literature and the arts,
especially the study of rhetoric and philosophy; but it
was notorious also for luxury and moral corruption,
particularly the foul worship of Venus. Paul came to
the city in his second missionary journey, [c.] A. D. 53
or 54, and founded there a Christian church: Acts xviii.
1} xix. 15.1 Co. 1,'2; 2 Co.i.1, 235 2 Tim. iv.20. [BB
DD. s. v.; Dict. of Geogr. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 269
sqq-] *
KopvjAtos, -ov, 6, a Lat. name, Cornelius, a Roman
centurion living at Caesarea, converted to Christianity
by Eeters Acts x. 1 sqq.*
k6pos, -ov, 6, (Hebr. 15), @ corus or cor [ef. Ezek. xlv.
14], the largest Hebrew dry measure (i. e. for wheat,
meal, etc.); acc. to Josephus (antt. 15, 9, 2) equal to
ten Attic medimni, [but cf. B.D. s. v. Weights and Meas-
ures sub fin.; F. R. Conder in the Bible Educator, iii.
10 sq.]: Lk. xvi. 7 (A.V. measure]. (Sept. [Lev. xxvii.
16; Num. xi. 32]; 1 K. iv. 22; v.11; 2 Chr. ii. 10;
[esxvalee oils)
koopéw, -O; 3 pers. plur. impf. éxdcpouv; 1 aor. éké-
oyna 5 pf. pass. kexdopnuar; (Kdcpos) 1. to put
in order, arrange, make ready, prepare: tas Naumddas, put
in order [A. V. trim], Mt. xxv. 7 (Séprov, Hom. Od. 7,
13; tpamefav, Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,6; 6,11; Sept. ey Xxiii.
41 for yw, Sir. xxix. 26; heer Sir. 1. 14, and
other exx. elsewhere). 2. to ornament, aie (so
in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down; Sept. several times for
356
KOC {405
71:'); prop.: ofkoy, in pass., Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 25; ra
pvnpeia, to decorate [ A.V. garnish], Mt. xxiii. 29 (ragous,
Xen. mem. 2, 2,13); 1d tepov Aidors kal dvaOepacr, in
pass. Lk. xxi. 5; rods Oepediovs tov telxyous Ai@ Tyla,
Rev. xxi. 19; twa (with garments), vyudny, pass. Rev.
xxi. 2; éauras év re, 1 Tim. ii. 9 (on this pass. see kara-
aroAn, 2). metaph. i. q. to embellish with honor, gain honor,
(Pind. nem. 6, 78; Thuc. 2, 42; kexoop. 77 dperj, Xen.
Cyr. 8, 1, 21): éaurds, foll. by a ptep. designating the act
by which the honor is gained, 1 Pet. iii. 5; ry dvda-
okaXiav év rac, in all things, Tit. ii. 10.*
Koo pukés, -7, -0v, (koopos), of or belonging to the world
(Vulg. saecularis) ; i.e. 1. relating to the universe:
Tovpavod Tovde kal THY Koo pLKaY mavTwy, Aristot. phys. 2,
4 p.196*, 25; opp. to dv@pamuvos, Leian. paras. 11; xoopexn
didrakis, Plut. consol. ad Apoll. ¢. 34 p. 119 e. 2:
earthly: 1d &ycov koopuxoy, [its] earthly sanctuary [R.V.
of this world], Heb. ix. 1. 3. worldly, i. e. having
the character of this (present) corrupt age: ai Kooptkai
émOupia, Tit. ii. 12; (so also in eccles. writ.).*
Kécptos, -ov, of three term. in class. Grk., ef. WH.
App. p. 157; W.§ 11, 1; [B. 25 (22 sq.)], (xdopos),
well-arranged, seemly, modest: 1 Tim. ii. 9[WH mrg.
spies]; of a man living with decorum, a well-ordered
life, 1 Tim. iii. 2. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Lys.,
al.) [Cf. Trench § xcii.]*
[Kooptws, adv. (decently), fr. koopeos, q. V-: 1 Tim. ii.
9 Wii mrg. (Arstph., Isocr., al.)*]
kocpoKpatwp, -opos, 6, (kédcpos and xparew), lord of the
world, prince of this age: the devil and demons are called
in plur. of koopoxpatopes Tod GkoTOUS Tov aiovos [but crit.
edd. om. r. aiav.] rovrov [R. V. the world-rulers of this
darkness}, Eph. vi. 12; cf. 11; Jn. xii. 831; 2 Co. iv. 4;
see dpyov. (The word occurs in Orph. 8,11; 11, 11;
in ecel. writ. of Satan; in rabbin. writ. Ww pinrp is eee
both of human rulers and of the angel of death; ef. Bux-
torf, Lex. talm. et rabb. p. 2006 [p. 996 ed. Fischer ].)*
K6o[L0S, -ov, 6} 1. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down,
an apt and harmonious arrangement or constitution, or-
der. 2. asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, ornament,
decoration, adornment : eos inatiov, 1 Pet. iii. 3
(Sir. vi. 30; xxi. 21; 2 Mace. ii. 2: Sept. for nay of
the arrangement of the stars, ‘the heavenly hosts,’ as
the ornament of the heavens, Gen. ii. 1; Deut. iv. 19;
xvii. 3; Is. xxiv. 21; xl. 26; besides oveasionally for
ys frie. for NIDA, Prov. xx. 29; Is. iii. 19). 3.
the world, i. e. the universe (quem xoopov Graeci nom-
ine ornamenti appellarunt, eum nos a perfecta absolu-
taque elegantia mundum, Plin. h. n. 2, 3; in which
sense Pythagoras is said to have been the first to use the
word, Plut. de plac. philos. 2, 1, 1 p. 886 ¢.; but ace. to
other accounts he used it of the heavens, Diog. L. 8, 48,
of which it is used several times also by other Grk. writ.
[see Menag. on Diog. Laért.1.¢.; Bentley, Epp. of Phalar.
vol. i. 391 (Lond. 1836); M. Anton. 4, 27 and Gataker’s
notes; cf. L.andS.s.v.IV.]): Acts xvii. 24; Ro. iv. 13
(where cf. Meyer, Tholuck, Philippi); 1 Co. iii. 22; viii.
4; Phil. ii. 15; with a predominant notion of space, in
KOo {LoS
hyperbole, Jn. xxi. 25 (Sap. vii. 17; ix. 3; 2 Mace. viii.
18; xrigew tT. Koopor, Sap. xi. 18; 6 Tod Kdopov Kriorns,
2 Mace. vii. 23; 4 Mace. v. 25 (24) ; a sense in which
it does not occur in the other O. T. books, although there
is something akin to it in Prov. xvii. 6, on which see 8
below) ; in the phrases mpé rod tov Koopov eivat, Jn. xvii.
53 dé kataBodijs koopov [Mt. xiii. 35 RG; xxv.34; Lk.
xi. 50; Heb. iv. 3; ix. 26; Rev. xiii. 8; xvii. 8] and mp
kat. koopou [Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i. 4; 1 Pet. i. 20], (on
which see karaBoAn, 2); dad kticews Koopov, Ro. i. 20;
an’ dpxns x. Mt. xxiv. 21; (on the om. of the art. cf. W.
p- 123 (1417); B. § 124, 8 b.; [ef. Ellicott on Gal. vi.
_14)). 4. the circle of the earth, the earth, (very rarely
so in Grk. writ. until after the age of the Ptolemies; so
in Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. i. pp. 413 and 648, nos. 334 and
1306): Mk. xvi. 15; [Jn. xii. 25]; 1 Tim. vi. 7; Baovrela
Tov Koopov, Rev. xi. 15; Baowdeta (plur.) r. kdcpov, Mt. iv.
8 (for which Lk. iv. 5 ris oikoupevns) ; 7d Pas Tod Koopov
rovtov, of the sun, Jn. xi.9; év 6\@ 76 k., properly, Mt.
xxvi. 13; hyperbolically, i. q. far and wide, in widely sep-
arated places, Ro. i. 8; [so ev mavri tO koopa, Col. i. 6];
6 Tore Kocpos, 2 Pet. iii. 6; the earth with its inhabitants:
Gyv ev késpo, opp. to the dead, Col. ii. 20 (Ageris jv cat
khémtyns €v TO Kdope, i. e. among those living on earth,
Ev. Nicod. 26). By a usage foreign to prof. auth. 5.
the inhabitants of the world: O€arpov éyernOnpev TO Koop@
kal dyyédous k. dvOpamors, 1 Co. iv. 9 [W. 127 (121)]; par-
ticularly the inhabitants of the earth, men, the human race
(first so in Sap. [e.g. x. 1]): Mt. xiii. 38; xviii. 7; Mk.
xiv. 9; Jn.i. 10, 29, [36 Lin br.]; iii. 16 sq.; vi. 33, 51;
ViliOOEeKIAgs XA Ds) xive ols Xvi. 28; Xvi, 6, 215.235
Ro. iii. 6, 19; 1 Co. i. 27 sq. [ef. W. 189 (178) ]; iv. 13; v.
10; xiv. 10; 2:Co.v. 19; Jas. ii. 5 [icf- W-u. s.]; 1 Jn. ii. 2
[ef. W. 577 (536) ]; dpxaios koopos, of the antediluvians,
2 Pet. ii. 55 yervacOa cis tr. x. Jn. xvi. 21; EpyeoOar eis Tov
xéopov (Jn. ix. 39) and eis r. x. Todrov, to make its appear-
ance or come into existence among men, spoken of the
light which in Christ shone upon men, Jn. i. 9; iii. 19, cf.
xii. 46 ; of the Messiah, Jn. vi. 14; xi. 27; of Jesus as the
Messiah, Jn. ix. 39; xvi. 28; xviii. 37; 1 Tim.i.15; also
cicépxerOat eis r. x. Heb. x. 5; of false teachers, 2 Jn.
7 (yet here L T Tr WH é&épy. ets r. x.; [so all texts in
1 Jn. iv. 1]); to invade, of evils coming into existence
among men and beginning to exert their power: of sin
‘and death, Ro. v. 12 (of death, Sap. ii. 24; Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 3,4; of idolatry, Sap. xiv. 14). dmooré\Aew twa
eis r. k., Jn. iii. 173 x. 36; xvii. 18; 1Jn.iv.9; @osrt.k.,
Mt. v. 14; Jn. viii. 12; ix. 5; corip r. «., In. iv. 42; 1
Jn. iv. 14, (owrnpia rod x. Sap. vi. 26 (25); €Amis 7. k
Sap. xiv. 6; mpwrémdacros marhp Tod K., of Adam, Sap.
x. 1); orovxeia Tod x. (see grorxetov, 3 and 4); evr KOT PO,
among men, Jn. xvi. 383 xvii. 13; Eph. ii. 12; év coopo
(see W. 123 (117)), 1 Tim. iii. 16; civar ev 76 x., to dwell
among men, Jn. i. 10; ix. 5; xvii. 11,12 RG; 1 Jn.
iv. 3; eiva ev dope, to be present, Ro. v. 13; &&ehOciv
ék Tod Kécpyou, to withdraw from human society and seek
an abode outside of it, 1 Co. v. 10; dvaorpéeper Oa ev TO
x., to behave one’s self, 2 Co. i. 12; likewise etva: év TO
357
KOO pos
x. Toure, i Jn. iv. 17. used spec. of the Gentiles collec-
tively, Ro. xi. 12 (where it alternates with ré vn), 15;
[the two in combination: ra @v9 Tod kécpov, Lk. xii.
30]. hyperbolically or loosely i. q. the majority of men
in a place, the multitude or mass (as we say the public) :
Jn. vii. 4; xii. 19 [here Tr mrg. adds 8Xos in br.]; xiv.
19, 22; xvili. 20. i. q. the entire number, doeBar, 2 Pet.
ii. 5. 6. the ungodly multitude; the whole mass of
men alienated from God, and therefore hostile to the cause .
of Christ [cf. W. 26]: Jn. vii. 7; xiv. [17], 27; xv. 18
Sq. Xvi. 8, 20, 33; xvii. 9,14 sq. 25; 1 Co.i. 21; vi. 2;
xi. 32; 2 Co. vii. 10; Jas. i. 27; 1 Pet. v. 9; 2 Pet. i. 4;
ii. 20; 1 Jn. iii, 1, 13; iv. 5; v.19; of the aggregate of
ungodly and wicked men in O. T. times, Heb. xi. 88; in
Noah’s time, ibid. 7; with ofros added, Eph. ii. 2 (on
which see aiav, 3); etvar ek rod x. and ék Tov kK. ToUTOU
(see eiui, V. 3d.), Jn. viii. 23; xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16;
1 Jn. iv.5; Aadeiv ex rod kdcpov, to speak in accordance
with the world’s character and mode of thinking, 1 Jn.
iv. 5; 6 dpxwv rod k. rovrov, i. e. the devil, Jn. xii. 31;
xiv. 30; xvi. 11; 6 év ro x. he that is operative in the
world (also of the devil), 1 Jn. iv. 43 76 mvedpa rod k.
1 Co. ii. 12; 9 copia rod x. rovrov, ibid. i. 20 [here
GLTTr WH om. rovr.]; iii 19. [1a ororxeia Tod Ké-
opov, Gal. iv. 3; Col. ii. 8, 20, (see 5 above, and oro-
xelov, 3 and 4). | 7. worldly affairs ; the aggregate
of things earthly; the whole circle of earthly goods, endow-
ments, riches, advantages, pleasures, etc., which, although
hollow and frail and ficeting, stir desire, seduce from God
and are obstacles to the cause of Christ: Gal. vi. 14; 1
Jn. ii. 16 sq.; iii. 17; efvar ek tod x., to be of earthly
origin and nature, Jn. xviii. 36; somewhat differently
in 1 Jn. ii. 16 (on which see eiui, V.3d.); Kepdaiver rov
k. Odov, Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 36; Lk. ix. 25; of ypopevos
T@ kK. ToUT@ [crit. txt. Tov Kdopov; see xpdopat, 2], 1 Co.
vii. 319; prepipvay ra Tod K. 33 sq.; pidos and dedia Tod «.
Jas. iv. 4; dyamav rov x. 1 Jn. 1.15; rxay rov k., the in-
centives to sin proceeding from the world, 1 Jn. v. 4 sq. ;
the obstacles to God’s cause, Jn. xvi. 33; [ ef. Ader yapus
k. mapedOéra 6 Kdopos odtos, Teaching of the Twelve
Apostles, ¢. 10]. 8. any aggregate or general col-
lection of particulars of any sort [cf. Eng. “a world of
curses ” (Shakspere), etc.]: 6 kédcpos THs adixias, the sum
of all iniquities, Jas. iii. 6 ; rod morod Gros 6 Kdopos Trav
xpnpdrov, rod b€ amiorou ovdé dBodrds (a statement due
to the Alex. translator), Prov. xvii. 6. Among the N. T.
writers no one uses kécpos oftener than John; it occurs
in Mark three times, in Luke’s writings four times, and
in the Apocalypse three times. Cf. Kreiss, Sur le sens
du mot kécpos dans le N. T. (Strasb. 1837); Diisterdieck
on 1 Jn. ii. 15, pp. 247-259; Zezschwitz, Profangricitit
u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 21 sqq.; Dvestel in Herzog xvii.
p- 676 sqq.; [Zrench, Syn. § lix.]; on John’s use of the
word cf. Reuss, Histoire de la théologie chrétienne au
siecle apostolique, ii. p. 463 sqq. [i.e. livre vii. ch. viii. };
cf. his Johanneische Theologie, in the Beitriige zu den
theol. Wissenschaften, Fasc. i. p. 29 sqq.; [Westcott on
Jn. i. 10, ‘ Additional Note”].*
Kovaprtos
Kotapros, -ov, 6, (a Lat. name), Quartus, an unknown
Christian: Ro. xvi. 23.*
kodpu, Tr txt. kocu, I WH kovp, (the Hebr. "3p [impv.
fem.; the other (masc.) form must be regarded as hav-
ing become an interjection]), arise: Mk. v. 41.*
Koverwdia, -as [B. 17 (16) ], 9, (a Lat. word), guard:
used of the Roman soldiers guarding the sepulchre of
Christ, Mt. xxvii. 65 sq.; xxviii. 11. (Ev. Nic. ec. 13.) *
kovditw: impf. 3 pers. plur. exovpifov ; (kovdos light) ;
1. intrans. to be light (Hes., Eur., Dio C.). Qairs
Hippocr. down generally trans. to lighten: a ship, by
throwing the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii. 38. (Sept.
Jonah i. 5, and often in Polyb.) *
Kédwvos, -ov, 6, a basket, wicker basket, [cf. B. D. s. v.
Basket]: Mt. xiv. 20; [xvi. 9]; Mk. vi. 43; [viii 19];
Lk. ix.17; Jn. vi. 13. (Judg. vi. 19; Ps. Ixxx. (1xxxi.)
7; Arstph. av. 1310; Xen. mem. 3, 8, 6; al.) *
xp&BBaros (LT Tr WH xpdB8arros; cod. Sin. kpaBaxros
[exe. in Acts v.15; ef. KC. Nov. Test. ad fid. cod. Vat.
praef. p. lxxxi.sq.; Tdf Proleg. p. 80]), -ov, 6, (Lat.
grabatus), a pallet, camp bed, (a rather mean bed, hold-
ing only one person, called by the Greeks oxiyous,
oxipmddtov): Mk. ii. 4, 9, 11 sq.; vi. 55; Jn. v. 8-12 [in
12 RW Hom Pribrstheyel.|\s\ Acts va tosixass4. Cf:
Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 175sq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 62; Volkmar, Marcus u. d. Synopse us.w. p. 131;
[McClellan, New Testament ete. p. 106; W. 25].*
kpdtw (with a long; hence ptcp. xpagov, Gal. iv. 6 L T
Tr WH [(where RG xpdgov); cf. B.61 (53)]) ; impf. épa-
doy; fut. cexpaéopa (Lk. xix. 40 RGLTr mrg.), and
kpa&o (ibid. [T WH Trtxt.), the former being more com.
in Grk. writ. and used by the Sept. (cf. Mic. iii. 4; Job
Xxxv. 12, ete. [but ava-cpafopuar, Joel iii. 16 Alex.; cf. W.
279 (262); esp. B. as below]); 1 aor. éxpaéa (once viz.
Acts xxiv. 21 T Tr WH éxéxpaéa, a reduplicated form
freq. in Sept. [e. g. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6; Judg. iii. 15; 1
Mace. xi. 49, ete.; see Veitch s. v.]; more com. in native
Grk. writ. is 2 aor. ékpayor [“ the simple &kpayov seems
not to occur in good Attic” (Veitch s. v.)]); pf. Kéxpaya,
with pres. force [W. 274 (258)] (Jn. i. 15); ef. Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 223; B.61 (53); Kiihner i. p. 851; [esp.
Veitch s. v.]; Sept. for p31, PLY, NIP, yw; [fr. Aes-
chyl. down]; 1. prop. [onomatopoetic] to croak
(Germ. kréichzen), of the ery of the raven (Theophr.) ;
hence univ. to cry out, cry aloud, vociferate : particularly
of inarticulate cries, Mk. v. 5; ix. 26; xv. 39 [here T
WH om. Tr br. «p.]; Lk. ix. 39; Rev. xii. 2; dad rod
ddBov, Mt. xiv. 26; with govn peyadn added, Mt. xxvii.
50; Mk. i. 26 [here TTr WH davicay]; Acts vii. 57;
Rev. x. 33 dmiobév twos, to ery after one, follow him up
with outcries, Mt. xv. 23; like Dy and pry (Gen. iv.
10; xviii. 20), i. q. to cry or pray for vengeance, Jas. v.
4. 2. tocry i.e. call out aloud, speak with a loud voice,
[Germ. laut rufen]: ri, Acts xix. 32; xxiv. 21; foll. by
direct discourse, Mk. x. 48; xv.14; Lk. xviii. 39; Jn.
xii. 13 RG; Acts xix. 34; xxi. 28, 36; xxiii. 6; with
the addition gav7 peyddy foll. by direct dise., Mk. v. 7;
Acts vii. 60; év mova pey. Rev. xiv. 15; kpdfw éywr, to
358
KpaTalow
cry out saying, ete., Mt. viii. 29; xiv. 30; [xv. 22 (where
RG éxpavyacev)]; xx. 30 sq.; xxi. 9; xxvii. 23; Mk. iii.
11; xi. 9 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. déy.]; Jn. xix. 12 [here
LT Tr WH ékpavy.]; Acts xvi. 17; xix. 28; Rev. xviii.
18; kpdto povi peyddy Néyov, Rev. vi. 10; vii. 10; xix.
17 [here T WH br. add ev]; xpdfas €deye, Mk. ix. 24;
kpacew K. eye, Mitaik.27 scxie lee Mile A Uk av.
41 RGTrtxt. WH; Acts xiv. 14; of those who utter or
teach a thing publicly and solemnly, Ro. ix. 27; xéxpaye
and éxpage héyor, foll. by direct disc., Jn. i. 155 vii. 37;
expake SiSdoxeov x. Aéyov, In. vii. 28; expake x. etmev, In.
xii. 44; of those who offer earnest, importunate, prayers
to God, foll. by direct disc., Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6, (often
so in O. T., as Job xxxv. 12; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 7;
commonly with mpds kiptov, mpds tov Gedy added, Judg.
x. 12 [Alex.]; Ps. iii. 5; evi. (evii-) 13, etc.). revi, to
ery or call to: Rev. vii. 2; xiv. 15, (cf. Ps. exviii. (cxix.)
145; repos mpos €repoy, Is. vi. 3). [COMP.: dva-xpdfo.
Syn. see Boda, fin. | *
kpaurédn [ WH xperadn, see their App. p. 151], -ns, n,
(fr. KPAS the head, and mdé\A@ to toss about; so ex-
plained by Galen and Clem. Alex. Paedag. 2, 2, 26 and
Phryn. in Bekker, Anecd. p. 45, 13 [cf. Vaniéek p. 148]),
Lat. crapula (i. e. the giddiness and headache caused by
drinking wine to excess): Lk. xxi. 34 [A. V. surfeiting ;
cf. Trench § lxi.J. (Arstph. Acharn. 277; Alciphr. 3,
24; Plut. mor. p. 127 f. [de sanitate 11]; Leian., Hdian.
2, 5, 1.)*
kpavioyv, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of the noun xpavov [i. e. kdpa;
Curtius § 38]), @ skull (Vulg. calvaria): Mt. xxvii. 33;
Mk. xv. 22; Lk. xxiii. 33; Jn. xix. 17; see ToAyo6a.
(Judg. ix. 53; 2 K. ix. 35; Hom. Il. 8, 84; Pind., Eur.,
Plat., Leian., Hdian.) *
KpdomeSov, -ov, 7d, in class. Grk. the extremity or promi-
nent part of a thing, edge, skirt, margin; the fringe of a
garment; in the N. T. for Hebr. myry, i. e. a litile ap-
pendage hanging down from the edge of the mantle or
cloak, made of twisted wool; a tassel, tuft: Mt. ix. 20;
xiv. 86; xxiii. 5; Mk. vi. 56; Lk. viii. 44. The Jews
had such appendages attached to their mantles to remind
them of the law, acc. to Num. xv. 37 sq. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Saum; [B.D.s. v. Hem of Garment; Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 624; esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto
s. v. Fringes ].*
Kpataids, -d, -dv, (kparos), Sept. mostly for PIN, mighty :
7) Kp- xelp Tod Oeod, i. e. the power of God, 1 Pet. v. 6;
rov kupiov, Bar. ii. 11; 1 Esdr. viii. 46 (47), 60 (61), and
often in Sept. (In earlier Grk. only poetic [Hom., al.]
for the more com. kparepés; but later, used in prose also
[elut: ales) *
kpatatde, -: Pass., pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. kparatotcbe
impf. 3 pers. sing. éxparaodro; 1 aor. inf. kpataroOjvat ;
(xpdros); only bibl. and eccles., for the classic xparive ;
Sept. mostly for pim; in pass. several times for YON; to
strengthen, make strong, (Vulg. conforto [and in Eph.
ill. 16 conroboro}); Pass. to be made strong, to increase
in strength, to grow strong: pass. with dat. of respect,
TVEUPGTL, Lk. i. 80; ii. 40 {here GLT Tr WH om. arei-
KpaTéw
pati]; Suvduer, Eph. iii. 16, (cf. icytew rots cdpacr, Xen.
mem. 2, 7, 7); avdpiferOe, kparaioiade, i. e. show your-
selves brave [A. V. be strong], 1 Co. xvi. 13 (dvdpicerdbe
«. Kkparaovabw 4 Kapdia ipar, Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 25; kpa-
Tavovate k. yiveode eis dvdpas, 1 S. iv.9; dvdpitov kK. xpa-
rawba@pev, 2S. x. 12).*
kparéw; impf. 2 pers. plur. éxpareire, Mk. xiv. 49 Tr
mrg. WH mrg.; fut. KpaTnoo ; 1 aor. expatnoa ; pf. inf.
kexparnxévat; Pass., pres. «parodpar; impf. EkpaTOUBNY ;
pf. 3 pers. plur. kexpdrnyras; (kpdros [q. v.-]); Sept.
chiefly for pins also for ims (to seize), ete.; fr. Hom.
down ; 1. to have power, be powerful; to be chief,
. be master of, to rule: absol. for 37, Esth. i. 1; 1 Esdr.
iv. 38; 6 kparay, Sap. xiv. 19; of kpatodvres, 2 Mace. iv.
50; revds, to be ruler of one, Prov. xvi. 32; xvii. 2, (for
win) 5 Sap. iii. 8; never so in the N. T. 2. to get
possession of; i. e. a. to become master of, to obtain:
Ths mpobecews, Acts xxvii. 13 [(Diod. Sic. 16, 20; al.) cf.
B. 161 (140); on the tense, W. 334 (318) ]. b. to take
hold of: ths xeupds twos [ ef. W. § 30,8d.; B.u.s.], Mt.
Be 2Ocme NV KetxSdismnVaeb 8 2X. 20 low br Wikbs Wik. vail.
54; twa tis xeupds, to take one by the hand, Mk. ix. 27
RG, ef. Matthiae § 331; sev, to hold one fast in order
not to be sent away, Acts ili. 11, cf. Meyer ad loc.; rovs
7r68as Tivds, to embrace one’s knees, Mt. xxviii. 9; trop.
Tov Néyor, to lay hold of mentally [cf. our ‘catch at’; but
al. refer this ex. to 3 b. below], Mk. ix. 10 (join pds
éavtovs with ou(nrovvtes). c. to lay hold of, take,
seize: twvd, to lay hands on one in order to get him into
one’s power, Mt. xiv. 3; xviii. 28; xxi. 46; xxii. 6; xxvi.
AAS, 50,05, 50; Mk. ii. 20> vi. 175 xii. 12; *xiv. 1, 44,
AGGAg=() lsmACKSEXXIV. 163) ev. Xx. 2; (2\S.vi- 63. .Ps.
CXXXVi. (Cxxxvii.) 9); ri, Mt. xii. 11. 3. to hold;
iene, a. to hold in the hand: ti év rh de&G, Rev. ii. 1
(tH dpiorepa tov dprov, Plut. mor. p. 99 d.). b. to
hold fast, i. e. trop. not to discard or let go; to keep care-
fully and faithfully: 6 éxere, éxers, Rev. ii. 25; iii. 115 76
dvoud pov, Rev. ii. 13; one’s authority, riv kepadny, i. e.
éexeivov bs eotw 4 Kepadn, Christ, Col. ii. 19; tH» mapd-
doow, Mk. vii. 3 sq. 8; tas mapaddces, 2 Th. ii. 15; ray
didaynv, Rev. ii. 14 sq.; also with a gen. of the thing, of
blessings in which different individuals are participants:
Tijs dporoyias, Heb. iv. 14; rHs édmidos, Heb. vi. 18 [al.
refer this ex. to 2 above], (cf. 2S. iii. 6). c. to con-
tinue to hold, to retain: of death continuing to hold one,
pass. Acts ii. 24; ras duaprias (opp. to dinut), to re-
tain sins, i. e. not to remit, Jn. xx. 23; to hold in check,
restrain: foll. by iva pr, Rev. vii. 1; by rod pn [W. 325
(305); B. § 140, 16 8.], Lk. xxiv. 16. On the constr.
of this verb with gen. and ace. cf. Matthiae § 359 sq.;
W. § 30, 8d.; B. 161 (140).*
kpdrirros, -7, -ov, superl. of the adj. xpards, (kparos),
[fr. (Hom.) Pind. down], mightiest, strongest, noblest, most
illustrious, best, most excellent: voc. kpdterre used in ad-
dressing men of conspicuous rank or office, Acts xxiii.
26; xxiv.3; xxvi. 25, (Otto, De ep. ad Diognetum ete.
Jena 1845, p. 79 sqq., and in his Epist. ad Diognet.
Leips. ed. p. 53 sq., has brought together exx. fr. later
359
Kpe“avvups
writ.). Perhaps also it served simply to express friend-
ship in Lk. i. 3 (as in Theophr. char. 5; Dion. Hal. de
oratt. 1; Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 8), because in Acts i. 1 it is
omitted in addressing the same person. Cf. Grimm in
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 50 sq.*
KpGros, -eos (-ovs), [fr. a root meaning ‘to perfect,
complete’ (Curtius § 72); fr. Hom. down], ré, Hebr.
15 1. force, strength. 2. power, might: rd
Kpatos ths icxvos avrod, the might of his strength, Eph.
1.19; vi. 10; ris Sd&ys adrod, Col. i. 11; Kara kpdros,
mightily, with great power, nv&ave, Acts xix. 20; meton.
a mighty deed, a work of power: qoetv xp. (cf. woteiy Suvd-
pecs), Lk. i. 51. 3. dominion: in the doxologies,
1 Tim. vi. 16; 1 Pet.iy.11; v.11; Jude 25; Reyv.i.6:
v.13; rus (gen. of obj-), Heb. ii. 14 (7d Mepoéwv xparos
exovra, Hdt. 3, 69). [Sy¥N. see Suvapis, fin. ]*
kpavydéto; impf. 3 pers. plur. éxpavyagov; fut. kpav-
yaow; 1 aor. expavyaca; (kpavyn); to cry out, cry aloud,
(i. q- kpdgw [see Bodw, fin., and below]): Mt. xii. 19;
Acts xxii. 23; to shout, foll. by direct disc., Jn. xix. 15
and LT Tr WH in xii. 13; with Aeyv added, to cry out
in these words, foll. by direct disc.: Jn. xviii. 40; xix. 6
(where Tom. Aéyovres), and L T Tr WH also in 12;
kpavydtew x. déyew, Lk. iv. 41 LT Trmrg.; xpavyd¢.
peovn peyarn, foll. by direct dise., Jn. xi. 43. revi, to cry
out to, call to, one (see kpaga, 2 and fin.), foll. by direct disc.
Mt. xv. 22 RG. The word is rare in Grk. writ.: Dem.
p- 1258, 26; of the shouts in the theatres, Epict. diss. 3,
4,4; of araven, ib. 3, 1,37; Galen, al.; first in a poetic
fragm. in Plat. rep. 10 p. 607 b.; once in the O. T. viz.
2 Esdr. iii. 13. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 337.*
Kpavyy, -7s, 7, [cf. cepd¢w; on its class. use see Schmidt,
Syn. i. ch. 8 § 4; fr. Eur. down], Sept. for API, MPVS,
AW, MpIIN, ete.; a crying, outcry, clamor: Mt. xxv.
6; Lk.i.42 TWH Trtxt.; Acts xxiii. 9; Eph. iv. 31,
and RG in Rev. xiv. 18; of the wailing of those in dis-
tress, Heb. v. 7; Rev. xxi. 4.*
xpéas, 76, [cf. Lat. caro, cruor; Curtius § 74], plur. xpéa
(cf. W. 65 (63); [B. 15 (43)]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept.
very often for Wa; (the) flesh (of a sacrificed animal) :
Ro. xiv. 21; 1 Co. viii. 13.*
kpe(rrwv and (1 Co. vii. 38; Phil. i. 23; in other places
the reading varies between the two forms, esp. in 1 Co,
vii. 9 [here T Tr WH Ltxt. -rr-]; xi. 17; Heb. vi. 9
[here and in the preced. pass. LT Tr WH -oo-; see
WH. App. p. 148 sq.; cf. 3, 0, s]) Kpeioowyr, -ovos, neut.
-ov, (compar. of kparvs, see kpdrioros, cf. Kiihner i. p. 436;
[B. 27 (24)]), [fr. Hom. down], better; i. e. a. more
useful, more serviceable: 1 Co. xi. 17; xii. 31 RG; Heb.
xi. 40; xii. 24; with woAA@ paddop added, Phil. i. 23 [cf.
paddov, 1 b.]; Kpetooor (adv.) motety, 1 Co. vii. 38; xpezr-
Tov eat, it is more advantageous, foll. by an inf., 1 Co. vii.
9; 2 Pet. ii. 21, [cf. B. 217 (188); W. § 41 a. 2a]. b.
more excellent: Heb. i. 4; vi. 93 vii. 7, 19, 22; viii. 6;
ix. 23; x. 34; xi. 16,35; xp. éore, foll. by an inf., 1 Pet.
Lineage
Kpépapar, see the foll. word.
kpepdvvupt, also kpepavvde [scarcely classic” (Veitch
KpeTTUAN
s. v.)], pepdw -& [“ still later” (ibid.)], and (Sept. Job
xxvi. 7 and Byzant. writ.) xpeudto, (in the N. T. the
pres. does not occur): 1 aor. éxpéyaca; 1 aor. pass. éxpe-
padoOnv; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for mA; to hang up,
suspend: ti émt rt (Rec.), wept re (LT Tr WH), [ets re,
Tdf. edd. 2, 7], Mt. xviii. 6; twa emt EvdAov, Acts v. 30;
x. 89, (Gen. xl. 19, 22; Deut. xxi. 22; Esth. vi. 4, ete.) ;
simply kpepaceis, of one crucified, Lk. xxiii. 39. Mid.
kpépapat (for kpepavyvpat, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 224);
intrans. to be suspended, to hang: foll. by é« with gen. of
the thing, Acts xxviii. 4 (see éx, I. 3); emt EvAou, of one
hanging on a cross, Gal. iii. 13; trop. @ ru, Mt. xxii.
40, where the meaning is, all tue Law and the Prophets
(i. e. the teaching of the O. T. on morality) is summed
up in these two precepts. [Comp.: ék-xpéyapar. | *
[kperadn, see kpauraAn. |
Kpn}Lvds, -ov, 6, (fr. kpeudvvupe), a steep (place), a preci-
pice: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v.13; Lk. viii. 33. (2 Chr. xxv.
12; Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Kpijs, 5, plur. Kpyres, a Cretan, an inhabitant of the
island of Crete: Acts ii. 11; Tit. i. 12 [cf. Farrar, St.
Paul, ii. 534].*
Kptoxnys [cf. B. 17 (15)], 6, Lat. Crescens, an un-
known man: 2 Tim. iv. 10.*
Kpjrn, -ns, 7, Crete, the largest and most fertile island
of the Mediterranean archipelago or Adgean Sea, now
called Candia: Acts xxvii. 7, 12 sq. 21; Tit.i.5. [Dict.
of Geog. or McC. and S. s. v.]*
pry, -7s, 7, (in Grk. writ. [fr. Hom. down] only in
plur. ai xpai), Sept. for TY, barley: Rev. vi. 6 «pds
RG, xpidav LT Tr WH
KplO.vos, -7, -ov, (pin), of barley, made of barley: dprot
(2K. iv. 42, ef. Judg. vii. 13), Jn. vi. 9,13. [(Hippon., al.)]*
xptya [GT WH] or xpiva [L Tr (more commonly)]}
(on the accent cf. W. p. 50; Lipsius, Grammat. Unter-
such. p. 40 sq. [who gives the preference to kpiza, as do
Bttm. 73 (64); Cobet (N. T. ad fid. ete. p. 49 sq.);
Fritzsche (Rom. vol. i. 96,107); al.; “videtur ¢ antiquitati
Graecae, ¢ Alexandrinae aetati placuisse,” Tdf. Proleg.
to Sept.ed. 4 p. xxx.; on the accent in extant codd. see
Tdf. Proleg. p.101; cf. esp. Lobeck, Paralip. p. 418)),-ros,
76, (fr. kpiva, q. V.3 as kiya fr. kdivo), [ Aeschyl. down],
Sept. very often for vawn ; 1. a decree: plur., rod
Geod, Ro. xi. 33 [al. here (with A. V.) judgments; cf.
Weiss in Meyer ad loc.] (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 75). 2:
judgment; i. e. condemnation of wrong, the decision
(whether severe or mild) which one passes on the faults
of others: xpivari rut «pivew, Mt. vii. 2. In a forensic
sense, the sentence of a judge: with a gen. of the pun-
ishment to which one is sentenced, Oavdrov, Lk. xxiv.
20; esp. the sentence of God as judge: 16 «pia... els
kardkpipza, the judgment (in which God declared sin to
be punishable with death) issued in condemnation, i. e.
was condemnation to all who sinned and therefore paid
the penalty of death Ro. v. 16; esp. where the justice
of God in punishing is to be shown, xpia denotes
condemnatory sentence, penal judgment, sentence, 2 Pet.
ii. 3; Jude 4; with gen. of the one who pronounces
360
y
Kpwa@
judgment, rot Ged, Ro. ii. 2 sq.; AapBaveoOat kpipa, Mt.
xxiii. 13 (14) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; Ro. xiii.
2; Jas. iii.1; the one on whom God passes judgment is
said Zyew xpiva, 1 Tim. v.12; Baordfew ro xpipa, to bear
the force of the condemnatory judgment in suffering
punishment (see Baordfw, 2), Gal. v. 10; xpiva écbiew
éavr@, so to eat as to incur the judgment or punishment
of God, 1 Co. xi. 293 els piva ovvépyeoOa, to incur the
condemnation of God, 34; etvas év r@ adT@ kpivart, to lie
under the same condemnation, pay the same penalty,
Lk. xxiii. 40; with gen. of the one on whom condemna-
tion is passed, Ro. iii. 8; 1 Tim. iii. 6; Rev. xvii.1. the
judgment which is formed or passed: by God, through
what Christ accomplished on earth, es xpiya éy® eis Tt.
xo pov Tovrov 7A Gov, where by way of explanation is added
iva xrX. to this end, that etc. Jn. ix. 39; 76 kpiwa dpyerat,
the execution of judgment as displayed in the infliction
of punishment, 1 Pet. iv. 17; the last or final judgment
is called 76 Kp. 7d péAXov, Acts xxiv. 25; Kp. aianoy, eter-
nally in force, Heb. vi. 2; the vindication of one’s right,
kpivew 70 Kpipa Twos &k Twos, to vindicate one’s right by
taking vengeance or inflicting punishment on another,
Rey. xviii. 20 ([R. V. God hath judged your judgment on
her], see &k, I. 7); i. q. the power and business of judging:
kp- Siddva tivi, Rev. xx. 4. 3. a matter to be judi-
cially decided, a lawsuit, a@ case in court: xpipara éyer
pera twos, 1 Co. vi. 7.*
Kplvov, -ov, 7d, a lily: Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 27.
Hdt. down. ]*
kplvw; fut. cpio; 1 aor. éxpwa; pf. Kéxpixa; 3 pers.
sing. plupf., without augm. (W. § 12, 9; [B. 33 (29)]), we-
kpixet (Acts xx. 16 GLTTrWH); Pass., pres. xpivowar;
impf. éxpwdunv; pf. Kéxpipat; 1 aor. éxpiOny [cf. B. 52
(45)]; 1 fut. xpeOnooua; Sept. for vdw, and also for
j77 and 3”; Lat. cerno, i. e. 1. to separate, put
asunder; to pick out, select, choose, (Hom., Hdt., Aeschyl.,
Soph., Xen., Plat., al.; pera veavioxwy dpictav Kexpievow
[chosen, picked], 2 Macc. xiii. 15; xexpipévor dpxovres,
Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 10); hence 2. to approve, ese
teem: tuepav map’ nuepav, one day above another, i.e.
to prefer [see mapa, III. 2 b.], Ro. xiv. 5 (so ri mpd twos,
Plat. Phil. p. 57 €.; révAzdAX@ 7pd Mapovov, rep. 3 p.
399 e.); macav ny. to esteem every day, i. e. hold it
sacred, ibid. 3. to be of opinion, deem, think: ép0as
éxpwas, thou hast decided (judged) correctly, Lk. vii. 43;
foll. by an inf. Acts xv. 19; foll. by a direct quest. 1
Co. xi. 13; rodro, dre ete. to be of opinion ete. 2 Co. v.
14; foll. by the ace. with inf. Acts xvi. 153 revd or rf
foll. by a predicate acc., xpivew twa afd twos, to judge
one (to be) worthy of a thing, Acts xiii. 463 dmorop
xpiverat, Acts xxvi. 8. 4. to determine, resolve, de-
cree: tl, 1 Co. vii. 37 (kpival re Kat mpodécba, Polyb. 3,
6, 73 rd xptOév, which one has determined on, one’s re-
solve, 5, 52, 6; 9, 13,73 rots xpibeioe éupévew Sei, Epict.
diss. 2, 15, 7 sqq.); Sdéyuara, pass. [the decrees that had
been ordained (cf. A. V.)], Acts xvi. 43 rodro xpivare,
foll. by an inf. preceded by the art. ré, Ro. xiv. 13; also
with €uaurg added, for myself i. e. for my own benefit
[From
«KpLvw
(lest I should prepare grief for myself by being com-
pelled to grieve you), 2 Co. ii. 1; foll. by an inf., Acts xx.
16; xxv. 25; 1 Co. ii. 2 GLTTr WH [(see below) ];
v. 3; Tit. iii. 12, (1 Mace. xi. 33; 3 Mace. i. 6; vi. 30;
Judith xi. 13; Sap. viii. 9; Diod. 17, 95; Joseph. antt.
7, 1,5; 12,10, 4; 13,6, 1); with 70d prefixed, 1 Co. ii.
2 Ree. [(see above) ]; foll. by the acc. with inf. Acts xxi.
25 (2 Mace. xi. 36); with rod prefixed, Acts xxvii. 1 [ef.
B. § 140, 16.8.]; (kpiverai rim, it is one’s pleasure, it seems
good to one, 1 Esdr. vi. 20 (21) sq.; viii. 90 (92)). sy
to judge ; a. to pronounce an opinion concerning right
and wrong; a. in a forensic sense [ (differing from
duca¢ecv, the official term, in giving prominence to the
‘intellectual process, the sifting and weighing of evi-
dence) ], of a human judge: tiva, to give a decision re-
specting one, Jn. vii. 51; cara tov vdpov, Jn. xviii. 31;
Acts xxiii. 8; xxiv. 6 Rec.; the substance of the de-
cision is added in an inf., Acts iii. 13; pass. to be judged,
i. e. summoned to trial that one’s case may be examined
and judgment passed upon it, Acts xxv. 10; xxvi. 6;
Ro. iii. 4 (fr. Ps. 1. (li.) 6 (4)); mepi w. gen. of the thing,
Acts xxiii. 6; xxiv. 21; [xxv. 20]; with addition of éxi
and the gen. of the judge, before one, Acts xxv. 9. Where
the context requires, used of a condemnatory judgment,
i.q.tocondemn: simply, Acts xiii. 27. B. of the judg-
ment of God or of Jesus the Messiah, deciding between the
righteousness and the unrighteousness of men: absol., Jn.
v. 30; viii. 50; drxalws, 1 Pet. ii. 23; ev Ocxacoovvy, Rev.
xix. 11; twa, 1Co.v.13; pass. Jas. ii. 12; (dvras x. vexpovs,
2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv.55; vexpovs, pass., Rev. xi. 18 [B.
260 (224) ]; tHv oixouperny, the inhabitants of the world,
Acts xvii. 31 [cf. W. 389 (364) ]; rdv kédopor, Ro. iii. 6 ;
Ta kpuTTa Tov avOpamrey, Ro. ii. 16 5 Kpiveww 7d Kpipa Tivos
é« twos (see kpiva, 2 sub fin.), Rev. xviii. 20, ef. vi. 10;
Kpivewy Kata TO éxdorov epyov, 1 Pet. i. 17; rods vexpovs
€k TOY yeypappevary ev Tois BiBAiots KaTa Ta Epya avTGr,
pass., Rev. xx. 12 sq.; with acc. of the substance of the
judgment, thou didst pronounce this judgment, radra
éxpwas, Rev. xvi. 5; contextually, used specifically of
the act of condemning and decreeing (or inflicting) pen-
alty on one: twa, Jn. iii. 18; v. 22; xii. 47 sq.; Acts
van On Telecel Conxno lesq., 02) Uh, lel 2seEHeb.
x. 80; xiii. 4; 1 Pet. iv. 6 [cf. W. 630 (585)]; Jas. v.
9 (where Rec. xaraxp.) ; Rev. xviii. 8; xix. 2, (Sap. xii.
10, 22); Tov kdopov, opp. to ow ew, Jn. iii. 17; xii. 47;
of the devil it is said’6 dpywv rod Kécpov TovTou KéKpirat,
because the victorious cause of Christ has rendered the
supreme wickedness of Satan evident to all, and put
an end to his power to dominate and destroy, Jn. xvi.
11. y. of Christians as hereafter to sit with Christ
at the judgment: rédv xéopov, 1 Co. vi. 2; dyyédous, ib.
3 [cf. dyyedos, 2 sub fin.; yet see Meyer ed. Heinrici ad
Il. ec. ]. b. to pronounce judgment; to subject to cen-
sure; of those who act the part of judges or arbiters in
the matters of common life, or pass judgment on the
deeds and words of others: univ. and without case, Jn.
viii. 16, 26; xard rt, Jn. vili. 15; kar’ dpu, In. vii. 24;
év kpiwart tun xpivew, Mt. vii. 2; red, pass. [with nom.
361
Kpiaws
of pers.], Rom. iii. 7; é« rod orduarés cov Kpw® ce, Out
of thine own mouth (i. e. from what thou hast just said)
will I take the judgment that must be passed on thee,
Lk. xix. 22; ri, 1 Co.x.15; pass. ib. 29; 16 Sikavov, Lk.
xil. 57; foll. by e?, whether, Acts iv. 19; with ace. of the
substance of the judgment: ri i. e. kpiow tid, 1 Co. iv.
5; kpltow kpivew (Plat. rep. 2 p. 360 d.) dicalay [ef. B.
§ 131, 5], Jn. vii. 24 (dAnOwav x. Sixaiav, Tob. iii. 2;
Kpicets adikous, Sus. 53); of the disciplinary judgment
to which Christians subject the conduct of their fellows,
passing censure upon them as the facts require, 1 Co. v.
12; of those who judge severely (unfairly), finding fault
with this or that in others, Mt. vii. 1; Lk. vi. 37; Ro.
li. 1; rua, Ro. ii. 1, 3; xiv. 3 sq. 10,13; foll. by év with
dat. of the thing, Col. ii. 16; Ro. xiv. 22; hence i. q. to
condemn: Ro. ii. 27; Jas. iv. 11 sq. 6. Hebraisti-
cally i. q. to rule, govern; to preside over with the power of
giving judicial decisions, because it was the prerogative
of kings and rulers to pass judgment: Mt. xix. 28; Lk.
xxii. 30, (rov Aadv, 2 K. xv. 5; 1 Mace. ix. 73; Joseph.
antt. 5, 3,3; oi kpivovtes rt. ynv, Ps. it. 10; Sap. i. 1;
cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 14638 sq.). 7. Pass. and
mid. to contend together, of warriors and combatants
(Hom., Diod., al.); to dispute (Hdt. 3,120; Arstph. nub.
66); in a forensic sense, to go to law, have a suit at law:
with dat. of the pers. with whom [W. § 31,1 ¢.], Mt. v.
40 (Job ix. 3; xiii. 19; Eur. Med. 609); foll. by pera
with gen. of the pers. with whom one goes to law, and
ent with gen. of the judge, 1 Co. vi. (1), 6. [Comp.:
ava-, Gmro-, avt-arro- (-jzat), Ota-, ev-, €mt-, KaTa-, cuv-, UTo0-
(-pat), ouv- vrro-(-pat). | *
kpiots, -ews, 7, Sept. for p41, 3 (a suit), but chiefly
for baw); in Grk. writ. [(fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down) ] 1. @ separating, sundering, separation; a
trial, contest. 2. selection. 3. judgment; i. e.
opinion or decision given concerning anything, esp. con-
cerning justice and injustice, right and wrong; a.
univ.: Jn. vill. 16; 1 Tim. v. 24 (on which see émaxo)ov-
Géw); Jude 9; 2 Pet. ii. 11; xpiow kpivew (see kpivw, 5 b.),
Jn. vii. 24. b. in a forensic sense, of the judgment
of God or of Jesus the Messiah: uniy., Jas. ii. 13;
Dehn aeblebsexee2tsmnp Lunmevsexyilend sexixe: 2) mmOL
the last judgment: Heb. ix. 27; 7 jpépa kpioews [ Mt. x.
15; xi. 22, 24; xii.86; Mk. vi.11 RL in br.; 2 Pet. ii.
9; iii. 7] or ris Kpicews [1 Jn. iv. 17], the day appointed
for the judgment, see juépa, 3; eis kpiow peyadns nuepas,
Jude 6; 7 Spa tis Kpivews avrod, i.e. Tod Geod, Rev. xiv.
7; é€v rh Kpioet, at the time of the judgment, when the
judgment shall take place, Mt. xii. 41 sq.; Lk. x. 14;
xi. 31 sq.; xplow rovetv kara TavTov, to execute judgment
against (i. e. to the destruction of) all, Jude 15. spec.
sentence of condemnation, damnatory judgment, condem-
nation and punishment: Heb. x. 27; 2 Pet. ii. 4; with
gen. of the pers. condemned and punished, Rev. xviii.
10; % Kpiaws avrod Hp6n, the punishment appointed him
was taken away, i. e. was ended, Acts viii. 33 fr. Is. jiii.
8 Sept.; mimrew eis xpiow [R* eis iroxprow], to become
liable to condemnation, Jas. v. 12; ai@mos kpiows, eternal
Kpiomos
damnation, Mk. iii. 29 [Rec.]; 4 xpiows ris yeévyns, the
judgment condemning one to Gehenna, the penalty of
Gehenna, i. e. to be suffered in hell, Mt. xxiii. 33. In
John’s usage xpicts denotes a. that judgment
which Christ occasioned, in that wicked men rejected
the salvation he offered, and so of their own accord
brought upon themselves misery and punishment: airy
éorlv 4 kpicts, dre etc. judgment takes place by the en-
trance of the light into the world and the hatred which
men have for this light, iii. 19; kptow movetv, to execute
judgment, v. 27; épyec@ae eis xp. to come into the state
of one condemned, ib. 24; xp. Tod Kdopou rovtov, the
condemnatory sentence passed upon this world, in that
it is convicted of wickedness and its power broken, xii.
31; mepi kpicews, of judgment passed (see kpiva, 5 a. B.
fin.), xvi. 8, 11. 8. the last judgment, the damna-
tion of the wicked: dvacravis kpicews, followed by con-
demnation, v. 29 [cf. W. § 30, 2 B.]. y. both the
preceding notions are combined in v. 30; 7 kpiots maca,
the whole business of judging [cf. W. 548 (510) ], ib. 22.
Cf. Groos, Der Begriff der xpiovs bei Johannes (in the
Stud. u. Krit. for 1868, pp. 244-273). 4. Like the
Chald. 3° (Dan. vii. 10, 26; cf. Germ. Gericht) i. q.
the college of judges (a tribunal of seven men in the sev-
eral cities of Palestine; as distinguished from the San-
hedrin, which had its seat at Jerusalem [cf. Schiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23, ii.; Hdersheim, Jesus the Mes-
siah, ii. 287]): Mt. v. 21 sq. (cf. Deut. xvi. 18; 2 Chr.
xix. 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,14; b. j. 2, 20, 5). 5.
Like the Hebr. vawn (cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1464”
[also Sept. in Gen. xviii. 19, 25; Is. v. 7; lvi. 1; lix. 8;
Jer. xvii. 11; 1 Mace. vii. 18; and other pass. referred
to in Gesenius l. c.]), right, justice: Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi.
42; what shall have the force of right, dmayyehdew Twi,
Mt. xii. 18; a just cause, Mt. xii. 20 (on which see ék-
Bddrw, 1 g.).*
Koleos, -ov, 6, Crispus, the ruler of a synagogue at
Corinth, Acts xviii. 8; baptized by Paul, 1 Co. i. 14.*
KpiTyptov, -ov, To, (fr. Kpurnp, i. q. Kperns) ; ale
prop. the instrument or means of trying or judging
anything; the rule by which one judges, (Plat., Plut.,
al.). 2. the place where judgment is given; the tri-
bunal of a judge; a bench of judges: plur., 1 Co. vi. 2;
Jas. ii. 6, (Sept.; Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.). 3. in
an exceptional usage, the matter judged, thing to be de-
cided, suit, case: plur. 1 Co. vi. 4 [this sense is denied by
many; cf. e. g. Meyer on vs. 2].*
KpiThs, -ov, 6, (kpivw), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down],
Sept. chiefly for va’; a judge; 1. univ. one who
passes, or arrogates to himself, judgment on anything:
w. gen. of the object, Jas. iv. 11; w. gen. of quality (see
dtadoyicpuds, 1), Jas. ii. 4; in a forensic sense, of the one
who tries and decides a case [cf. Sieaorns, fin.]: Mt. v.
25; Lk. xii. 14 LT Tr WH, 58; [xviii. 2]; w. gen. of
quality [cf. B. § 132, 10; W. § 34, 3b.], ris aduxias, Lk.
xvill. 6; w. gen. of the object (a thing), an arbiter, Acts
xvili. 15; of a Roman procurator administering justice,
Acts xxiv. 10; of God passing judgment on the charac-
362
KpuTT@
ter ana deeds of men, and rewarding accordingly, Heb.
xii. 23; Jas. iv. 12; also of Christ returning to sit in judg-
ment, Acts x. 42; 2 Tim. iv. 8; Jas. v. 9; in a peculiar
sense, of a person whose conduct is made the standard
for judging another and convicting him of wrong: w.
gen. of the object (a pers.), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi. 19. 2.
like the Hebr. wdw, of the leaders or rulers of the Israel-
ites: Acts xiii. 20 (Judg. ii. 16,18 sq.; Ruthi.1; Sir.
x. 1 sq. 24, ete.).* ;
Kpitikés, -7, -dv, (kpiva), relating to judging, fit for judg-
ing, skilled in judging, (Plat., Plut., Leian., al.): with
gen. of the obj., évOupnoewy x. évvody xapdias, tracing
out and passing judgment on the thoughts of the mind,
Heb. iv. 12.*
Kpovw; 1 aor. ptcp. kpovoas; lo knock: rhv Oipay, to
knock at the door, Lk. xiii. 25; Acts xii. 13, (Arstph.
eccles. 317, 990; Xen. symp. 1,11; Plat. Prot. p. 310 a.;
314 d.; symp. 212¢.; but ckomrecv tiv Ovpar is better,
ace. to Phryn. with whom Lobeck agrees, p. 177 [cf.
Schmidt (ch. 113, 9), who makes xémrew to knock with
a heavy blow, kpovew to knock with the knuckles]) ;
without ray Ovpay [cf. W. 593 (552)], Mt. vii. 7 sq.;
Lk. xi. 9, 10; xii. 836; Acts xii. 16; Rev. iii. 20 (on which
see Oupa, Cc. €.).*
kputrt [so R°?G L T Tr KC], (but some prefer to write
it kpvarn [so WH, Meyer, Bleek, etc., Chandler § 183; cf.
Tdf. on Lk. as below)), -7s, 7, a crypt, covered way, vault,
cellar: eis kpumtny, Lk. xi. 33 (Athen. 5 (4), 205 a. equiv.
to kpumrds mepiratos p. 206; [Joseph. b. j. 5, 7, 4 fin. ;
Strab. 17, 1, 37]; Sueton. Calig. 58; Juvenal 5, 106;
Vitruv. 6,8 (5); al.). Cf. Meyer adl.c.; W. 238 (223).*
Kputrés, -7), -dv, (kpitra), [fr. Hom. down], hidden, con-
cealed, secret: Mt. x. 26; Mk. iv. 22; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2
[ef. W. 441 (410)]; 6 kpumrds tis Kapdias GvOpwros, the
inner part of man, the soul, 1 Pet. iii. 4; neut., év ro
kpumT@, in secret, Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 Rec.; ev xpumre, pri-
vately, in secret, Jn. vii. 4, 10; xviii. 20; 6 ev xpumre
*Iovdaios, he who is a Jew inwardly, in soul and not in
circumcision alone, Ro. ii. 29; ta xpumra tod oxédrovs,
[the hidden things of darkness i. e.| things covered by
darkness, 1 Co. iv.5; ra xp. ray avOp. the things which
men conceal, Ro. il. 16; ta xp. ris kapdias, his secret
thoughts, feelings, desires, 1 Co. xiv. 25; ra xp. rijs
aicxvyns (see aicyvyn, 1), 2 Co. iv. 2; eis xpumroy into
a secret place, Lk. xi. 33 in some edd. of Rec., but see
Kpumrn.* :
Kptrrw: 1 aor. éxpuya; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. céxpumtai,
ptep. kexpuppevos; 2 aor. éxpvBnv (soalso in Sept., for the
earlier expidny, cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 377; Fritzsche
on Mt. p. 212; [Veitch s. v.]); [ef. kakvarw; fr. Hom.
down]; Sept. for 3m, ADT, 7D, jD¥, TWI2, 703;
to hide, conceal; a. prop.: ri, Mt. xiii. 44 and LT Tr
WH in xxv.18; pass., Heb. xi. 23; Rev. ii. 17; xpuBjvae
i. q. to be hid, escape notice, Mt. v.14; 1 Tim. v. 25;
éxptBn (quietly withdrew [cf. W. § 38, 2a.]) x. é&AdOev,
i. e. departed secretly, Jn. viii. 59 [cf. W. 469 (437)];
kpvmrw te ev with dat. of place, Mt. xxv. 253 pass. xiii.
44; kexp. ev T@ OeG, is kept laid up with God in heaven,
epvoTarr Sw
Col. iii. 35 riets 7, Lk. xiii. 21 [RG Leévéxpuwpev]; éavrdv
eis with acc. of place, Rev. vi. 15; twa dad Tpoo wou
twos to cover (and remove [cf. W. § 30, 6 b.; 66, 2 d.])
from the view of any one, i. e. to take away, rescue, from
the sight, Rev. vi. 16; éxpv8y dm airév, withdrew from
them, Jn. xii. 36 (in Grk. auth. generally xp. twa ru; cf.
droxpvimra, b.). b. metaph. to conceal (that it may
not become known): xexpuppévos, clandestine, Jn. xix.
38; ri amd rivos (gen. of pers.), Mt. xi. 25 LT Tr WH;
[LK. xviii. 34]; xexpuppeva things hidden i. e. unknown,
used of God’s saving counsels, Mt. xiii. 35; dm dpOadpav
tivos, Lk. xix. 42 (cf. B. § 146, 1 fin. Comp.: dro-, ev,
mept-KpvTro. | *
" Kpuoraddlte; (Kpvoraddos, q- v.); to be of crystalline
brightness and transparency; to shine like crystal: Rev.
xxi. 11. (Not found elsewhere.) *
Kptorahdos, -ov, 6, (fr. kpvos ice; hence prop. anything
congealed (cf. Lat. crusta) and transparent), [fr. Hom.
down], crystal: a kind of precious stone, Rev. iv. 6; xxii. 1;
{cf. B. D.s.v. Crystal. On its gend. cf. L. and S.s. v. II.]*
Kpudatos, -aia, -aiov, (pupa), hidden, secret: twice in
Mt.vi.18 LTTr WH. (Jer. xxiii. 24; Sap. xvii. 3; in
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) *
kpvpt [LL WH-7; cf. eixij, init. ], adv., (kptara), secret-
ly, in secret: Eph. v.12. (Pind., Soph., Xen.; Sept.) *
Krdopar, -Guar; fut. kricopa (Lk. xxi. 19 L Tr WH);
1 aor. exrnoduny; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 73); to
Gequire, get or procure a thing for one’s self [cf. W. 260
(244)]; (pf. kexrnuat, to possess [ef. W. 274 (257) note];
not found in the N.T.): ri, Mt.x. 9; Acts viii. 20; dca
xr@pat, all my income, Lk. xviii. 12; with gen. of price
added [W. 206 (194) ], woAAov, Acts xxii. 28; with ék
and gen. of price (see ex, II. 4), Acts i. 18; 76 éavrov
oKevos €v Gytacpue@ K. Tyw, to procure for himself his own
vessel (i. e. for the satisfaction or the sexual passion ;
see oxevos, 1) in sanctification and honor, i. e. to marry a
wife (opp. to the use of a harlot; the words év dy. x. ruysj
are added to express completely the idea of marrying
in contrast with the baseness of procuring a harlot as
his ‘vessel’; cf. xrao6a: yuvaixa, of marrying a wife,
Ruth iv. 10; Sir. xxxvi. 29 (xxxiii. 26); Xen. symp. 2,
10),1 Th.iv.4; ras puyds tyar, the true life of your souls,
your true lives, i. e. eternal life (cf. the opp. ¢yurotobat
ry w. adrod under (nutdw), Lk. xxi. 19; cf. Meyer ad
loc. and W. p. 274 (257).*
Kripa, -ros, 76, (fr. krdopat, as ypnua fr. ypdopar), a
possession : as in Grk. writers, of property, lands, estates,
BiCeeNIteextxe 22M ke xe O25 Acts iL 4oue viol
KTfjvos, -ovs, 7d, (fr. krdouar; hence prop. a possession,
property, esp. in cattle); a beast, esp. a beast of burden:
Lk. x. 34; plur., Acts xxiii. 24; Rev. xviii. 13; it seems
to be used for guadrupeds as opp. to fishes and birds in
1 Co. xv. 39; so for M73, Gen. i. 25 sq.; ii. 20. (CE.
Hom. hymn. 30, 10; of swine in Polyb. 12, 4, 14.]*
KTHTwp, -opos, 6, (KTdopas), a possessor: Acts iv. 34.
(Diod. exept. p. 599, 17; Clem. Alex.; Byzant. writ.) *
xrifo: 1 aor. erica; pf. pass. éxrucpar; 1 aor. pass.
extiaOnv; Sept. chiefly for 813; prop. to make habitable,
363,
KTiO Ma
to people, a place, region, island, (Hom., Hdt., Thuc.,
Diod., al.); hence to found, a city, colony, state, ete.
(Pind. et sqq.; 1 Esdr. iv. 53). In the Bible, to create:
of God creating the world, man, etc., Mk. xiii. 19; 1 Co.
xi. 9; Col. i. 16 [ef. W. 272 (255)]; iii. 10; Eph. iii. 9;
1 Tim. iv. 3; Rev. iv. 11; x. 6, (Deut. iv. 32; Eccl. xii.
1; often in O. T. Apocr., as Judith xiii. 18; Sap. ii. 23;
xi. 18 (17); 3 Mace. ii. 9; [Joseph. antt.1, 1,1; Philo
de decal. § 20]); absol. 6 xricas, the creator, Ro. i. 25;
[Mt. xix. 4 Tr WH]; i. q. to form, shape, i. e. (for sub-
stance) completely to change, to transform (of the moral
or new creation of the soul, as it is called), kricévres
€v XpioT@ “Inood ent epyots ayabois, in intimate fellow-
ship with Christ constituted to do good works [see émi,
B. 2 a. ¢.], Eph. ii. 10; rods dvo eis va kawédv dvOpwrov,
ibid. 15; rov kricO€vra Kara Gedy, formed after God’s like-
ness [see kard, I. 3 c. 6.], Eph. iv. 24, (kapdiav xabapav
«ticov ev epol, Ps. 1. (li.) 12).*
ktlots, -ews, , (kTiCw), in Grk. writ. the act of founding,
establishing, building, etc.; in the N. T. (Vulg. everywhere
creatura [yet Heb. ix. 11 creatio]) 1. the act of cre-
ating, creation: rod cécpov, Ro. i. 20. 2. i. q. Kriopa,
creation i. e. thing created, (cf. W. 32]; used a. of in-
dividual things and beings, @ creature, a creation: Ro. i.
25; Heb. iv.13; any created thing, Ro. viii. 39; after a
rabbin. usage (by which a man converted from idolatry
to Judaism was called HW 1193 [cf. Schéttgen, Horae
Hebr. i. 328, 704 sq.]), kav) kriows is used of a man regen-
erated through Christ, Gal. vi.15; 2Co. v.17. b. col-
lectively, the sum or aggregate of created things: Rev. iii.
14 (on which see dpyn, 3; [4 kricts r. dvOpomev, Teach-
ing of the Twelve etc. c.16]); 6An 9 xrious, Sap. xix. 6;
nraca 4 Kriows, Judith xvi. 14; and without the art. (cf.
Grimm on 3 Macc. [ii. 2] p. 235; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as
below]), maa kriots, Col. i. 15; 3 Mace. ii. 2; Judith ix.
12; carhp mdons xticews, Acta Thomae p. 19 ed. Thilo
[$10 p. 198 ed. Tdf.], (see mas, I. 1 ¢.); dw dpyijs xrivews,
Mk. x. 6; xiii. 19; 2 Pet. iii. 4; od ravrns rns Kricews, not
of this order of created things, Heb. ix. 11; acc. to the
demands of the context, of some particular kind or class
of created things or beings: thus of the human race, radon
rh xt. Mk. xvi. 15; év mdon (Rec. adds 19) xrioe 7h bmd
rov ovp., among men of every race, Col. i. 23; the aggre-
gate of irrational creatures, both animate and inanimate,
(what we call nature), Ro. viii. 19-21 (Sap. v. 17 (18);
Xvi. 24); maca 7 xt. ibid. 22; where cf. Reiche, Philippi,
Meyer, Riickert, al., [Arnold in Bapt. Quart. for Apr.
1867, pp. 143-153]. 3. an institution, ordinance:
1 Pet. ii. 13; ef. Huther ad loc. [(Pind., al.)]*
Krlopa., -ros, Td, (KTiC@) 5 thing founded; created thing;
(Vulg. creatura) [A. V. creature]: 1 Tim. iv. 4; Rev.
v.13; viii. 9, (Sap. ix. 2; xili. 5); contextually and met-
aph. xr. Oeod, transformed by divine power to a moral
newness of soul, spoken of true Christians as created
anew by regeneration [al. take it here unrestrictedly ],
Jas. i. 18 (see dmapxn, metaph. a.; also kri¢w sub fin.,
kricts, 2 a.) 3 Ta ev apyh xriopara Geo, of the Israelites,
Sir. xxxvi. 20 (15). [(Strab., Dion. H.)]*
KTIOTNS
xrlrrys (on the accent cf. W. § 6, 1h. [ef. 94 (89); esp.
Chandler §§ 35, 36]), -ov, 6, (kri¢@), a founder; a creator
[Aristot., Plut., al.]: of God, 1 Pet. iv. 19 [ef. W. 122
(116)]; (Judith ix. 12; Sir. xxiv. 8; 2 Mace. i. 24, etc.).*
«vBela [-Bla T WH; see I, ¢],-as, 9, (fr. kvBevo, and this
fr. kuBos a cube, adie), dice-playing (Xen., Plat., Aristot.,
ai.); trop. 7 «. rdv avOp. the deception [A. V. sleight] of
men, Eph. iv. 14, because dice-players sometimes cheated
and defrauded their fellow-players.*
KuBépvycts, -ews, 7, (kuBepvaw [Lat. gubernare, to gov-
ern]), @ governing, government: 1 Co. xii. 28 [al. would
take it tropically here, and render it wise counsels (R.
V. mrg.); so Hesych.: kvBepynoess: mpovontixal émirti-
par kai ppovnoes ; cf. Schleusner, Thesaur. in Sept. s. v.,
and to the reff. below add Prov. xi. 14; Job xxxvii. 12
Symm.]; (Prov. i. 5; xxiv. 6; Pind., Plat., Plut., al.).*
KvBepviqns, -ov, 6, (kuBepyae [‘to steer’; see the pre-
ceding word]); fr. Hom. down; steersman, helmsman,
sailing-master; [A. V. master, ship-master]: Acts xxvii.
11; Rev. xviii.17. (Ezek. xxvii. 8, 27 sq.) *
kukdedw: 1 aor. exvxAdevoa; to go round (Strabo and
other later writ.) ; lo encircle, encompass, surround : rnp
mapepBornv, Rev. xx. 9 (where R G Tr éxtkdwoar); [rd,
Jn. x. 24 Trmre. WH mrg.; (see WH. App. p. 171) ].*
KvKAdBeV, (KvKAOs [see KUKA@]), adv. round about, from
all sides all round: Rev. iv. 8; kuknX. tuvds, Rev. iv. 3 sq.,
and Ree. in v. 11. (Lys. p..110, 40 [olea sacr. 28];
Qu. Smyrn. 5,16; Nonn. Dion. 36, 325; Sept. often for
2309, 23D 239, and simply 7.30; many exx. fr. the
Apoer. are given in Wahl, Clavis Apocryphorum etc.
Sova)
KvKAd@, -@: 1 aor. éxvkhwooa; Pass., pres. ptcp. kukdov-
wevos; 1 aor. ptcp. KukdoOeis; (Kdxdos); Sept. chiefly
for 2393 1. to go round, lead round, (Pind., Eur.,
Polyb., al.). 2. to surround, encircle, encompass: of
persons standing round, revd, Jn. x. 24 [Trmrg.WH mre.
exvkdevoay (q.v.)]; Acts xiv. 20; of besiegers (often so
in prof. auth. and in Sept.), Lk. xxi. 20; Heb. xi. 30,
and RG Trin Rev. xx.9. [Comp.: mepikukddo. } *
KvKdw (dat. of the subst. cixdos, a ring, circle [ef. Eng.
eycle]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. times without number
for 3°30, also for 2301) and 23D 3°30; inacircle, around,
round about, on all sides: Mk. iii. 34; vi. 6; of kiKA@dypoi,
the cireumjacent country [see dypos, c.], Mk. vi. 36 [here
WH (rejected) mrg. gives éyywora}; Lk. ix. 12; dd
‘Tepove. kai kvkA@, and in the region around, Ro. xv. 19;
twos, around anything (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,5; Polyb. 4, 21,
9, al.; Gen. xxxv. 5; Ex. vii. 24, etc.) : Rev. iv. 6; v.
11 [here Rxvedobev]; vii. 11.*
Ktdirpa, -ros, To, (KuAlw, q. v.), thing rolled: with
epexeget. gen. BopBdpov, rolled (wallowed) mud or mire,
2 Pet. ii. 22 (RGLTrmrg.]. The great majority take
the word to mean ‘wallowing-place’, as if it were the
same as kvdiorpa, (Vulg. in volutabro luti). But just as
To e€€paua signifies the vomit, thing vomited, and not the
place of vomiting; so 7d kiAucpa denotes nothing else
than the thing rolled or wallowed. But see [the foll.
word, and] BépBopos.*
364
Kupyvn
KvALopés, -0d, 6, iq. KvALoLS, a rolling, wallowing, (Hip-
piatr. p. 204, 4; [cf. Prov. ii. 18 Theod.]): es kvdtop.
BopBépov, to a rolling of itself in mud, [to wallowing in
the mire], 2 Pet. ii. 22 T Trtxt. WH. See the preceding
word.*
kvAtw: (for cvdivd more com. in earlier writ.), to roll;
Pass. impf. 3 pers. sing. éxuAlero; to be rolled, to wallow:
Mk. ix. 20. ((Aristot. h. a. 5,19, 18, etc.; Dion. Hal. ;
Sept.]; Polyb. 26,10, 16; Ael. n. a. 7,33; Epict. diss.
4,11, 29.) [Comp.: dva-, dro-, tpookvAtw. |*
KvAAbs, -7, -dv, [akin to kvKos, kvAiw, Lat. circus, cur-
vus, etc.; Curtius § 81]; 1. crooked; of the mem-
bers of the body (Hippocr., Arstph. av. 1379): as dis-
tinguished fr. ywdAds, it seems to be injured or disabled
in the hands [but doubted by many], Mt. xv. 30, 31
[but here Tr mrg. br. «vA. and WH read it in mrg.
only ]. 2. maimed, mutilated, (ods, Hippocr. p. 805
[ili. p. 186 ed. Kiihn]): Mt. xviii. 8; Mk. ix. 43.*
kipa, -ros, 76, [fr. cvéw toswell; Curtius § 79; fr. Hom.
down J, a wave [cf. Eng. swell], esp. of the sea or of a lake:
Mt. viii. 24; xiv. 24; Mk. iv. 837; Acts xxvii. 41 [RG
Trtxt.br.]; xvmara dypra, prop., Sap. xiv. 1; with @adde-
ons added, of impulsive and restless men, tossed to and
fro by their raging passions, Jude 13. [Syn. cf. chvdav. ]*
kipBadoy, -ov, 7d, (fr. xv Bos, 6, a hollow [cf. cup, cupola,
etc.; Vaniéek p. 164]), a cymbal, i. e. a hollow basin of
brass, producing (when two are struck together) a musi-
cal sound [see B. D. s. v. Cymbal; Stainer, Music of the
Bible; chix, 1.Co. xin t. (GC hr-sait 83) xv.16; 195
28; Ps. cl. 5. Pind., Xen., Diod., Joseph., al.) *
KUpLoV, -ov, Td, cumin (or cummin), Germ. Kiimmel,
(for #13, Is. xxviii. 25, 27): Mt. xxiii. 23. (Theophr.,
Diose., Plut., al.) [Tvristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 443.]*
Kuvdptov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of Kiar, i. q. Kkuvidvoy, which
Phryn. prefers; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 180; cf. yuvatka-
pov), a little dog: Mt. xv. 26 sq.; Mk. vii. 27sq. (Xen.,
Plat., Theophr., Plut., al.) *
Kiurpwos, -ov, 6, a Cyprian or Cypriote, i.e. a native or
an inhabitant of Cyprus: Acts iv. 36; xi. 203; xxi. 16,
(2 Mace. iv. 29). [(Hadt., al.) ]*
Kinpos, -ov, 7, Cyprus, a very fertile and delightful
island of the Mediterranean, lying between Cilicia and
Symial:y Atctsiext. 19); Soci Ail S 9): exes Oe mexoxyiien ae
(1 Mace. xv. 23; 2 Mace. x.13). [BB.DD.s.v.; Lewin,
St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.]*
kimrw: 1 aor. ptep. xvas; (fr. kvBn the head [ef.
Vaniéek p. 164; esp. Curtius, index s. v.]); fr. Hom.
down; Sept. chiefly for TIP; to bow the head, bend for-
ward, stoop down: Mk. i. 7; with xarw added (Arstph.
vesp. 279), Jn. viii. 6, 8. [Comp.: dva-, mapa-, ovy
Kutta. | *
Kvpnvatos, -ov, 6, (Kupnyn, q. v.), a Cyrenwan [A. V.
(R. V. Acts vi. 9) Cyrenian], a native of Cyrene: Mt.
xxvil. 82; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26; Acts vi. 93; xi. 20;
Xiliyd)) [i @aidt.; al.) i*
Kvpjvn, -ns, 7, Cyrene, a large and very flourishing city
of Libya Cyrenaica or Pentapolitana, about 11 Roman
miles from the sea. Among its inhabitants were great
Kupyvios
aumbers of Jews, whom Ptolemy I. had brought thither,
and invested with the rights of citizens: Acts ii. 10.
(BB.DD.\s. y.])*
Kvpqvios (Lehm. Kupivos [-peivos Tr mrg. WH mrg.
(see et, «)]), -ov, 6, Quirin[-i-Jus (in full, Publius Sulpicius
Quirinus [correctly Quirinius; see Woolsey in Bib. Sacr.
for 1878, pp. 499-513]), a Roman consul a. v. c. 742;
afterwards (not before the year 759) governor of Syria
(where perhaps he may previously have been in com-
mand, 751-752). While filling that office after Arche-
laus had been banished and Judza had been reduced to
a province of Syria, he made the enrolment mentioned
in Acts v. 37 (cf. Joseph. antt. 18, 1,1). Therefore Luke
in his Gospel ii. 2 has made a mistake [yet see added
reff. below] in defining the time of this enrolment. For
in the last years of Herod the Great, not Quirinius but
Sentius Saturninus was governor of Syria. His suc-
cessor, A. U. C. 750, was Quintilius Varus; and Quiri-
nius (who died in the year 774) succeeded Varus. Cf.
Win. RWB. s. vv. Quirinius and Schatzung; Strauss,
Die Halben u. die Ganzen (Berl. 1865) p. 70 sqq.; Hil-
genfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theologie for 1865,
v. 480 sqq.; Keim i. 399 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. 115]; Schiier,
Neutest. Zeitgeschichte, p. 161 sq.; Weizsicker in Schen-
kel v. p. 23 sqq.; [Kei/, Com. iib. Mark. u. Luk. p. 213
sqq-5 McCiellan, New Testament etc., i. p. 392 sqq.; and
Woolsey in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Cyrenius, and at length
in Bib. Sacr. for Apr. 1870, p. 291 sqq. ].*
Kupta, -as, 7, Cyria, a Christian woman to whom the
second Ep. of John is addressed: 2 Jn. 1,5, [GL TKC
(and WHmrg. in vs.1)]. This prop. name is not un-
common in other writers also; cf. Liicke, Comm. iib. die
Brr. des Joh. 3d ed. p. 444. [But R Tr al. xupia, regard-
ing the word as an appellative, lady; (ai yuvatkes edvOvs
dno Tecoapeckaidcka eTOv Ur Tov avdpOv Kuplat Kahovr-
rat, Epictet. enchir. 40). Cf. Westcott on 2 Jn. u. s.]*
kuptakés, -7, -dv, a bibl. and eccles. word [cf. W. § 34,
3 and Soph. Lex. s. v.], of or belonging to the Lord; 1.
i. q. the gen. of the author rod xupiov, thus xuptaxdv Setrvov,
the supper instituted by the Lord, 1 Co. xi. 20; Adysa
kuptakd, the Lord’s sayings, Papias ap. Eus. h. e. 3, 39,
1's 2. relating to the Lord, 7 xuptakn jpépa, the day
devoted to the Lord, sacred to the memory of Christ’s
resurrection, Rey. i. 10 [cf. ‘ kupsaxy kupiov’, Teaching
14, 1 (where see Harnack) ; ef. B. D.s.v. Lord’s Day;
Bp. Lghtft. Ign. ad Magn. p. 129; Miiller on Barn. ep. 15,
9]; ypadai kup. the writings concerning the Lord, i.e.
the Gospels, Clem. Alex., al. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]*
Kuptedw ; fut. kupevow; 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing.
kupievon; (Kuptos); to be lord of, to rule over, have do-
minion over: with gen. of the obj. [cf. B. 169 (147)], Lk.
xxii. 25; Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. i. 24; absol. of xupsevorres,
supreme rulers, kings, 1 Tim. vi. 15; of things and forces
i. q. to exercise influence upon, to have power over: with
gen. of the obj., 6 @dvaros, Ro. vi. 9; 7) Gpaptia, 14; 6 vdpos,
Ro. vii. 1. (Xen., Aristot., Polyb., sqq.; Sept. for wi
fete.].) [Come.: xara-xupievo. ] *
Kipios, -ov, 6, (prop. an adj. Kuptos, -a, -», also of two
365 ;
KUPLOS
term.; prop. i. q. 6 éyw kipos, having power or author-
ity), [fr. Pind. down], he to whom a person or thing be-
longs, about which he has the power of deciding; master,
lord; used a. univ. of the possessor and disposer of
a thing, the owner, (Sept. for 1/18, 5y3): with gen. of
the thing, as rod dumehdvos, Mt. xx. 8; xxi. 40; Mk. xii.
9; Lk. xx.15; rod Oepicpod, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; THs
oikias, the master, Mk. xiii. 35 (Judg. xix. 12); rod modov,
Lk. xix. 33; rod caB8PSdrov, possessed of the power to
determine what is suitable to the sabbath, and of releas-
ing himself and others from its obligations, Mt. xii. 8;
Mk. ii. 28; Lk. vi.5. with gen. of a pers., one who has
control of the person, the master [A. V. lord]; in the
household: SovAov, mardiokns, oikovdpov, Mt. x. 24; Lk.
xii. 46 sq.; xiv. 21; xvi. 3, 5; Acts xvi. 16, 19, etc.; ab-
sol., opp. to of 800Xo, Eph. vi. 5,9; Col. iv. 1, ete.; in
the state, the sovereign, prince, chief: the Roman em-
peror [(on this use of kxvpios see at length Woolsey in
Bib. Sacer. for July 1861, pp. 595-608)], Acts xxv. 26;
once angels are called xvpiot, as those to whom, in the
administration of the universe, departments are in-
trusted by God (see dyyedos, 2): 1 Co. viii. 5. b.
xuptos is a title of honor, expressive of respect and rev-
erence, with which servants salute their master, Mt. xiii.
27; xxv. 20, 22; Lk. xiii. 8; xiv. 22, etc.; the disciples
salute Jesus their teacher and master, Mt. viii. 25; xvi.
22 Pe Kiceo 4a xca lit Osexde le XXII Ooo Oe) Nextel oe
xiii. 6, 9, 13; xxi. 15-17, 20 sq., etc., cf. xx. 13; Lk. xxiv.
34; his followers salute Jesus as the Messiah, whose
authority they acknowledge (by its repetition showing
their earnestness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a.]), kdpte, kvpre, Mt. vii.
21; and RG in Lk. xiii. 25; employed, too, by a son in
addressing his father, Mt. xxi. 30; by citizens towards
magistrates, Mt. xxvii. 63; by any one who wishes to
honor a man of distinction, Mt. viii. 2, 6,8; xv. 27; Mk.
Vile 2Opmkavel2smexliezo sen. tls don 1ORe vendcxils
DI XX 5 BA CHSIX 20S EeSVING OG EXKIE Os c. this
title is given a. to Gop, the ruler of the universe
(so the Sept. for *3'Tx, aN, OTN, mm and Ar; [the
term xvptos is used of the gods from Pind. and Soph.
down, but “the address kvpse, used in prayer to God,
though freq. in Epict. does not occur (so far as [ am
aware) in any heathen writing before the apostolic
times; sometimes we find kupre 6 Geos, and once (2, 7, 12)
he writes «vpie €Aénoov” (Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 314
note ®) }),—both with the art., 6 kupios: Mt. i. 22( RG];
v. 33; Mk.v.19; Lk.i. 6, 9, 28,46; Acts vil. 335 viii.
24; xi. 21; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18, [but see eos, 3]; Heb. viii.
2; Jas.iv.15; v.15; Jude 5[RG], etc.; and without
the art. (cf. W. 124 (118); B. 88 (77) sq.): Mt. xxi. 9:
xxvii. 10; Mk. xiii. 20; Lk. i. 17, 38, 58, 66; 11.9, 23, 26,
39; Acts vii. 49; Heb. vii. 21; xii. 6; 1 Pet.i. 25; 2 Pet.
ii. 9; Jude [5 T Tr txt. WH txt.], 9; kdpsos tov ovpavod
kx. ths yns, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; Acts xvii. 24; «upuos
Tév kuptevovrav, 1 Tim. vi. 15; kdpsos 6 Oeds, see eds, 3
p- 288" [and below]; kvptos 6 Oeds 6 mavroxpdrwp, Rev.
iv. 83 kdpios caBawd, Ro. ix. 29; dyyehos and 6 dyyehos
kupiov, Mt. i. 20; ii. 13,19; xxviii. 2; Lk.i.11; ii. 9;
KUPLOS
Acts v. 193 viii. 26; xii. 7; mvedpa xupiov, Lk. iv. 18;
Acts viii. 39; with prepositions: iad (RG add the art.)
kupiov, Mt. i. 22; ii. 15; mapa xupiov, Mt. xxi. 42 and
Mk. xii. 11, fr. Ps. exvii. (cxviii.) 23 ; mapa kupig, 2 Pet.
iii. 8. B. to the Mrssi1an; and that aa. to
the Messiah regarded univ.: Lk. i. 43; ii. 11; Mt. xxi.
8; xxii. 45; Mk. xi. 3; xii. 36; Lk. xix. 34; xx.44. BB.
to Jesus as the Messiah, since by his death he acquired
a special ownership in mankind, and after his resurrec-
tion was exalted to a partnership in the divine adminis-
tration (this force of the word when applied to Jesus
appears esp. in Acts x. 36; Ro. xiv. 8; 1 Co. vil. 22; viii.
6; Phil. ii. 9-11): Eph. iv. 5; with the art. 6 «p., Mk.
xvi. 19 sq; Acts ix.1; Ro. xiv. 8; 1 Co. iv. 5; vi. 13 sq. ;
vii. 10, 12, 34 sq.; ix. 5,14; x. 22; xi. 26; [xvi. 22GL
T Tr WH); Phil. iv. 5; [2 Tim. iv. 22 TTrWH]; Heb.
ii. 3 (cf. 7 sqq.); Jas.v.7,etc. after his resurrection
Jesus is addressed by the title 6 xvpids pou Kal 6 Oeds pov,
Jn. xx. 28. dard rov kup., 1 Co. xi. 23; 2 Co. v. 6; mpos
rov k. 2 Co. v. 8; 6 Kdptos "Incovs, Acts i. 21; iv. 33; xvi.
BIG SoG GIG MCh PH8 Ipenoee IN Ime shies 2 Co. i
14; [2 Tim. iv. 22 Lchm.]; Rev. xxii. 20; 6 kvp. “Ino.
Xproros, 1 Co. xvi. 22[R; 23 RGL]; 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14)
[WH br. Xp.]; Eph. i. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 22-[R G], ete.; 6
KUptos Nav, 1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. i. 8; Heb. vii. 14; 2 Pet.
iii. 15; Rev. xi. 15, ete.; with Incots added, [L T Tr
WH in 1 Th. iii. 11 and 13]; Heb. xiii. 20; Rev. xxii. 21
[LT Tr (yet without jp.)]; so with Xpiords, Ro. xvi. 18
[GLT Tr WH]; and ’Incovs Xpiords, 1 Th. i. 3 [cf. B.
155)(136)]]5 iii. 11 [R Gi), 13: PRee:];) v.23); 20h. a1,
14, 16; iii. 6 [(jpar)]; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co.i. 3; Gal. vi. 18
[WH br. jpov]; Eph. i. 3; vi. 24; Ro. xvi. 24 [RG];
1 Tim. vi. 3,14; Philem. 25[T WHom. jay]; Phil. iv.
23 [(GLT Tr WH om. nz], ete.; "Incots Xpuotés 6 Kvptos
quar, Ro.i.4; and Xp. Ino. 6 kup. (jpav), Col. ii. 6; Eph.
iii. 11; 1 Tim.i.2; 2 Tim.i. 2; 6 kip. cat 6 cwrnp, 2 Pet.
iii. 2 (ef. B. 155 (136)]; with Incods Xpioros added, 2 Pet.
iii. 18; without the art., simply kvpios: 1 Co. vii. 22, 25;
PS ING Soins LOR Coy se 7 Sats WS) OU it, DELS Ieee Ve
11; 2 Pet. iii. 10; kdpros kupiwy i.e. Supreme Lord (cf. W.
§ 36, 2; [B. § 123, 12]): Rev. xix. 16 (cf. in a. above;
of God, Deut. x.17); with prepositions: dé kupiov, Col.
iii. 24; kara xvptov, 2 Co. xi. 17; ampos Kvprov, 2 Co. iii. 163
ovv kup. 1 Th. iv. 17; b6 xvp. 2 Th. ii. 13; on the phrase
év kupig, freq. in Paul, and except in his writings found
only in Rev. xiv. 13, see év, I. 6 b. p. 211". The appel-
lation 6 xvpios, applied to Christ, passed over in Luke
and John even into historic narrative, where the words
and works of Jesus prior to his resurrection are related:
Lk. vii. 13; x.1; xi.39; xii42; xiii. 15; xvii. 5 sq.;
xxii. 31 [RGLTrbr.]; Jn. iv. 1 [here T Trmrg. "Iy-
gous]; Vi. 23; xi. 2. There is nothing strange in the
appearance of the term in the narrative of occurrences
after his resurrection: Lk. xxiv. 34; Jn. xx. 2, 18, 20,
DO p32 Uy WF, d. There are some who hold that
Paul (except in his quotations from the O. T. viz. Ro.
iv. 8; ix. 28 sq.; xi. 34; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 16; iii. 20; x. 26;
2 Co. vi. 17 sq.; X17; 2 Tim. ii. 19) uses the title «pros
366
K@AVO®
everywhere not of God, but of Christ. But, to omit
instances where the interpretation is doubtful, as 1 Co.
vii. 25; 2 Co. viii. 21; 1 Th.iv.6; 2 Th. iii. 16 (6 xdpuos
ris eipnyns, ch. 6 Beds THs elpnyns, 1 Th. v. 23; but most
of the blessings of Christianity are derived alike from
God and from Christ), it is better at least in the words
éxdoto as 6 kipios Cdaxev, 1 Co. iii. 5, to understand God
as referred to on account of what follows, esp. on ac-
count of the words xara tnv xdpw Tod Oe0d thy Sobetaar
po in vs. 10. On the other hand, Kptvouevot Urd TOU KUp-
in 1 Co. xi. 32 must certainly, I think, be taken of
Christ, on account of x. 22, cf. 21. Cf. Gabler, Klev
nere theol. Schriften, Bd. i. p. 186 sqq.; Winer, De sensu
vocum kvpuos et 6 kvpuos in actis et epistolis apostolorum.
Erlang. 1828; Wesselus Scheffer, diss. theol. exhibens
disquisitionem de vocis xupios absolute positae in N. T.
usu. Lugd. 1846 (a monograph I have not seen) ; [Stuart
in the Bib. Repos. for Oct. 1831 pp. 733-776; cf. Weiss,
Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 76; Cremer, Bibl.-theol. Lex. s. v.;
Abbot in the Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. and Exeg. for June
and Dec. 1881 p. 126 sqq., June and Dec. 1883 p. 101 sq:
On the use of a capital initial, see WH. Intr. § 414}.
The word does not occur in the [Ep. to Tit. (crit. edd.),
the] 1 Ep. of John, [nor in the Second or the Third; for
in 2 Jn. 3 kupiov is dropped by the critical editors. Syn.
see deoztorns, fin. ].
KupLorns, -nTos, 7, (6 KUptos), dominion, power, lordship ;
in the N. T. one who possesses dominion (see é€ovaia, 4 c-
B.; cf. Germ. Herrschaft, [or Milton’s “ dominations’’];
in Tac. ann. 13, 1 dominationes is equiv. to dominantes),
so used of angels (xvpior, 1 Co. viii. 5; see xvpios, a. fin.) :
Eph. i. 21; 2 Pet. ii.10; Jude 8; plur. Col.i.16. (Eccles.
[e. g. ‘Teaching’ c. 4] and Byzant. writ.) *
kupdw, -@: 1 aor. inf. cupdcar; pf. pass. ptcp. Kkexupo-
pevos; (kipos the head, that which is supreme, power,
influence, authority); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to
make valid; to confirm publicly or solemnly, to ratify:
diaOjxny, pass. Gal. iii. 15; dyamnv eis twa, to make a
public decision that love be shown to a transgressor by
granting him pardon, 2 Co. ii. 8. [Comp. : mpo-cupd.]*
kiwv, kvvds; in prof. auth. of the com. gend., in the
N. T. mase.; Hebr. 3933 adog; prop.: Lk. xvi. 21;
2 Pet. ii. 22; metaph. (in various [but always copra
ful] senses; often so even in Hom.) a man of impure
mind, an impudent man, [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. I. s.]:
Mt. vii. 6; Phil. iii. 2: Rev. xxii. 15, in which last pass.
others ies probably understand anionittes (like 0399 i in
Deut. xxiii. 18 (19)) [cf. B. D. s. v. Dog].*
K@Xov, -ov, 7d; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; a mem-
ber of the body, particularly the more external and promi-
nent members, esp. the feet; in Sept. (Lev. xxvi. 30;
Num. xiv. 29, 32 sq.; 1 S. xvii. 46; Is. xvi. 24) for 133
and 0°919, a dead body, carcase, aan as the mem-
bers of a corpse are loose and fall apart: so the plur. in
Heb. iii. 17 fr. Num. xiv. 29, 32, [A. V. carcases].*
koto; impf. 1 pers. plur. ana (MK. ix. 38 T Tr
txt. WH); 1 aor. ekodvoa; Pass., pres. coAvouat; 1 aor.
€xohvOnv; (fr. xddos, lopped, clipped; prop. to cut off, cut
Kaun
short, hence) to hinaer, prevent, forbid ; [fr. Pind. down];
Sept. for x99, twice (viz. 1 S. xxv. 26; 2 S. xiii. 13) for
ya): twa foll. by an inf. [W. § 65,28.; cf. B. § 148, 13],
Mt. xix. 14; Lk. xxiii. 2; Acts xvi. 6; xxiv. 23; 1 Th.
11.16; Heb. vil. 23; ri kodver pe BamricOqvar; what doth
hinder me from being (to be) baptized? Acts viii. 36;
the inf. is omitted, as being evident from what has gone
before, Mk. ix. 38 sq.; x. 14; Lk. ix.49; xi. 52; xviii.
16; Acts xi.17; Ro. i. 13; 3 Jn. 10; adréy is wanting,
because it has preceded, Lk. ix. 50; the acc. is wanting,
because easily supplied from the context, 1 Tim. iv. 3;
as often in Grk. writ., constr. w. rivd twos, to keep one
from a thing, Acts xxvii. 43; with acc. of the thing, rjpy
’ qapadpoviay, to restrain, check, 2 Pet. ii. 16; 1d Aadey
yAoooats, 1 Co. xiv. 393; ri, foil. by rod pn, can any one
hinder the water (which offers itself), that these should
not be baptized? Acts x.47; in imitation of the Hebr.
x99 foll. by {2 of the pers. and the acc. of the thing, to
withhold a thing from any one, i. e. to deny or refuse one
a thing: Lk. vi. 29 [B. § 132, 5] (76 pumpeiov amo aod,
Gen. xxiii. 6). [Comp.: dcaxwdvw.]*
Koen, -7s, 9, (akin to ketywar, kouudw, prop. the common
sleeping-place to which laborers in the fields return;
Curtius § 45 [related is Eng. home]), [fr. Hes., Hdt.
down], a village: Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Mk. xi. 2; Lk. v.
17; ix. 52 [here Tdf. méAw], and often in the Synopt.
Gospels; Jn. xi. 1, 30; with the name of the city near
which the villages lie and to whose municipality they
belong: Ka:capeias, Mk. viii. 27 (often so in Sept. for
nij3 with the name of acity; cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p.
220° [B. D. s. v. Daughter, 7]; also for *\¥n and NyWwN
with the name of acity); by meton. the inhabitants of
villages, Acts viil. 25; used also of a small town, as Beth-
saida, Mk. viii. 23, 26, cf. 22; Jn. i. 45; of Bethlehem,
Jn. vii. 42; for Wy, Josh. x. 39; xv. 9 [Compl.]; Is. xlii.
11. [B. D.s. v. Villages. ]
K@pd-T0Ats, -ews, 4, a village approximating in size and
number of inhabitants to a city, a village-city, a town
(Germ. Marktflecken): Mk. i. 38. (Strabo; [Josh.
xviii. 28 Aq., Theod. (Field)]; often in the Byzant. writ.
of the middle ages.) *
367
Aabpa
KGpos, -ov, 6, (fr. xetpar; accordingly i. q. Germ. Ge-
lag; ef. Curtius § 45); fr. [Hom. h. Merc., Theogn.]
Hat. down; a revel, carousal, i. e. in the Grk. writ. prop.
a nocturnal and riotous procession of half-drunken and
frolicsome fellows who after supper parade through the
streets with torches and music in honor of Bacchus or
some other deity, and sing and play before the houses
of their male and female friends; hence used generally,
of feasts and drinking-parties that are protracted till late
at night and indulge in revelry; plur. [revellings]: Ro.
xiii. 13; Gal. v.21; 1 Pet.iv. 3. (Sap. xiv. 23; 2 Macc.
vi. 4.) [Trench § lxi.]*
kdvorp, -wmos, 6, a gnat ([Aeschyl.], Hdt., Hippocr.,
al.) ; of the wine-gnat or midge that is bred in (ferment-
ing and) evaporating wine (Aristot. h. an. 5, 19 [p. 552°,
5; cf. Bochart, Hierozoicon, iii. 444; Buzxtorf, Lex. talm.
etc. 927 (474° ed. Fischer) ]): Mt. xxiii. 24.*
Kas, gen. Ka, 7, Cos [A. V. Coos] (now Stanco or
Stanchio [which has arisen from a slurred pronuncia-
tion of és ray Ko (mod. Grk.) like Stambul fr. és ray
moAw. (Hackett) ]), a small island of the Augean Sea,
over against the cities of Cnidus and Halicarnassus,
celebrated for its fertility and esp. for its abundance of
wine and corn: Acts xxi. 1, where for the Rec. Kav
Grsb. [foll. by subsequent editors] has restored K@, as
in 1 Mace. xv. 23; see Matthiae § 70 note 3; W. § 8,
2a.; [B. 21 (19); WH. App. p. 157]. Cf. Kuester,
De Co insula, Hal. 1833; [but the best description is
in Ross, Reisen nach Kos u.s.w. (Halle 1852)” (How-
son); cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 96].*
Koodp, 6, (fr. DOP to divine, [but cf. B. D.]), Cosam,
one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 28.*
Kwdds, -7, -dv, (kédrtw to beat, pound), blunted, dull;
prop: BeAos, Hom. Il. 11, 390; hence a. blunted
(or lamed) in tongue; dumb: Mt. ix. 32 sq.3 xii. 22;
xv. 30sq.; Lk. i. 22; xi. 14, (Hdt. et sqq.; Sept. for pow
Hab. ii. 18). b. blunted, dull,in hearing; deaf:
Mt. xi. 5; Mk. vii. 32, 37; ix. 25; Lk. vii. 22, (Hom.
h. Mere. 92; Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. for
wan, Ex. iv. 11; Is. xliii. 8; Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 14,
etc.).*
A
Aayxave: 2 aor. CAayov; 1. to obtain by lot (fr.
Hom. down): with gen. of the thing, Lk. i. 9 [cf. B. 269
(231); W. 319 (299)]; to receive by divine allotment,
obtain: ri, Acts i. 17; 2 Pet. i.1; on the constr. of this
verb w. gen. and ace. of the thing, see Matthiae § 328;
W. 200 (188); [cf. B. § 132, 8]. 2. to cast lots,
determine by lot, (Isocr. p. 144 b.; Diod. 4, 63, [cf. ps.-
Dem. in Mid. p. 510, 26]): epi tiv0s, Jn. xix. 24.*
Adtapos, -ov, 6, (rabb. 119, apparently the same as
sry5s, whom God helps [cf. Philo, quis haeres § 12];
acc. to others, i. q. Wy x5 without help), Lazarus; 1.
an inhabitant of Bethany, beloved by Christ and raised
from the dead by him: Jn. xi. 1 sqq. 435; xii. 1 sq. 9 sq.
tive 2. an imaginary person, extremely poor and
wretched: Lk. xvi. 20, 23-25.*
d40pa [so RG T Tr] (in Hom. ddépy, fr. AavOave,
aida
habeiv), and L [WH KC (see the latter’s Praef. p. xii. and
s. v. etx) ] AdOpa (fr. AdOpos, -a, -ov, cf. Passow [esp. L.
and S.] s. v.; W. 47; B. 69 (61)), adv. secretly: Mt.
i 19; ii. 7; Jn. xi. 28; Acts xvi. 37. (From Hom.
down; Sept.) *
Aaikayp ((L T Tr WH] not Aaiday [Grsb.], cf. W. § 6,
1e.; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37 sq.; [Chandler
$620; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]), -amos, 7 [masc. in x* Mk. iv.
37; cf. Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 226, 4], a whirlwind,
tempestuous wind: 2 Pet. ii. 17; Naiday avépov (cf. Germ.
Sturmwind ; dvepos aviv aidan woAAH, Hom. Il. 17, 57),
a violent attack of wind [A. V. a storm of wind], a squall
[(see below)], Mk. iv.37; Lk. viii. 23. (Sept. Job xxi.
18; xxxvili. 1; Sap. v. 15, 24; Sir. xlviii. 9.) [Ace. to
Schmidt (ch. 55 § 13), A. is never a single gust, nor a
steadily blowing wind, however violent; but a storm
breaking forth from black thunder-clouds in furious gusts,
with floods of rain, and throwing everything topsy-turvy ;
acc. to Aristot. de mund. 4 p. 395°, 7 it is ‘a whirlwind
revolving from below upwards.’ | *
AAKO, and dakew, see AdoKo.
Aakritw; (fr. adv. Ad&, with the heel); [fr. Hom. down];
to kick, strike with the heel: Acts xxvi. 14, and Rec. in
ix. 5; see xévtpoy, 2.”
Aad€w, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. éAddet, plur. éAddovy;
fut. AaAjnow; 1 aor. eAdAnoa; pf. heAdAnka; Pass., pres.
Aadodpar; pf. AeAdAnwat; 1 aor. eAadnOnv; 1 fut. AadnOn-
gona; [fr. Soph. down]; found in bibl. Grk. much more
freq. than in prof. auth., in Sept. times without number for
139 or 135, more rarely for W183 prop. to utter a sound
(cf. [onomatop. la-la, ete.] Germ. lallen), to emit a voice,
make one’s self heard ; hence to utter or form words with
the mouth, to speak, having reference to the sound
and pronunciation of the words and in general the
form of what is uttered, while Aéyw refers to the
meaning and substance of what is spoken; hence
Aadeiv is employed not only of men, esp. when chatting
and prattling, but also of animals (of birds, Mosch. 3, 47;
of locusts, Theocr. 5, 34; Aadodor pev, ov ppdgovor é, of
dogs and apes, Plut. mor. ii. p. 909 a.), and so of inani-
mate things (as trees, Theocr. 27, 56 (57); of an echo,
Dio C. 74, 21,14). Accordingly, everything Neyduevor
is also Nadovpevor, but not everything Aadovpevov is also
Neyopevov (Kupolis in Plut. Alc. 18 Nadeiy dp.otos, advva-
tatatos Aeyew); [the difference between the words is
evident where they occur in proximity, e. g. Ro. iii. 19
doa 6 vopos héyet, Tois €v TS vOuw Aadei, and the very com.
- Aeywr, Mt. xiii. 3, ete.]. Moreover, the
primary meaning of )aAeiv, to utter one’s self, enables us
easily to understand its very frequent use in the sacred
writers to denote the utterances by which God indicates
or gives proof of his mind and will, whether immediately
or through the instrumentality of his messengers and
heralds. [Perhaps this use may account in part for the
fact that, though in classic Grk. Aad. is the term for
light and familiar speech, and so assumes readily a dis-
paraging notion, in bibl. Grk. it is nearly if not quite free
from any such suggestion.] Cf. Dav. Schulz die Geis-
edddnoev . «
368
haréw
tesgaben der ersten Christen, p. 94 sqq.; Tittmann de
Synonymis N. T. p. 79 sq.; Trench, Syn. § Ixxvi.; [and
on class. usage Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1]. But let us look
at the N. T. usage in detail:
1. to uller a voice, emit a sound: of things inanimate,
as Bpovral, Rev. x.4; with ras éavrév gavds added, each
thunder uttered its particular voice (the force and mean-
ing of which the prophet understood, cf. Jn. xii. 28 sq.),
ib. 3; odAmuyyos Aadovons per’ €u0d, héyor (Rec. A€yovea)
foll. by direct disc. Rev. iv.1; of the expiatory blood of
Christ, metaph. to crave the pardon of sins, Heb. xii. 245
of the murdered Abel, long since dead, i. q. to call for
vengeance (see Gen. iv. 10, and cf. xpd¢@, 1 fin.), Heb.
xi. 4 acc. to the true reading Aaket [G LT Tr WH; the
Rec. Aadetrac must be taken as pass., in the exceptional
sense to be talked of, lauded; see below, 5 fin. (rpaypa
kat’ ayopay Nadovpevov, Arstph. Thesm. 578, cf. mdvres
airiv Aadovow, Alciphro frag. 5, ii. p. 222, 10 ed. Wag-
ner) |- 2. to speak, i. e. to use the tongue or the faculty
of speech; to utter articulate sounds: absol. 1 Co. xiv. 113
of the dumb, receiving the power of speech, Mt. ix. 33;
xii. 22; xv. 31; Lk. xi. 14; Rev. xiii. 15; (rods [T Tr WH
om. ]) dAddous Aadetv, Mk. vii. 37; €Aader dpOds, ib. 35; of a
dumb man, pu) Suvdpevos Aakynoa, Lk. i. 20 (of idols, crowa
éxovot k. ov AaAnoovat, Ps. exill. 13 (exv. 5); exxxiv. 16;
cf. 3 Mace. iv. 16); to speak, i. e. not to be silent, opp. to
holding one’s peace, Adder k. pu) oLomjons, Acts xviii.
9; opp. to hearing, Jas. i. 19; opp. to the soul’s inner
experiences, 2 Co. iv. 13 fr. Ps. exv. 1 (exvi. 10); opp. to
motetv (aS Adyos to epyov q. Vv. 3), Jas. ii. 12. 3. to
talk; of the sound and outward form of speech: r7 idig
diadéxro, Acts li. 6; érépais kawais yAoooats, ib. 4; Mk.
xvi. 17 [here Tr txt. WH txt. om. caw. ], from which the
simple yAoooats Aadeiv, and the like, are to be distin-
guished, see yAéoca, 2. 4. to utter, tell: with acc.
of the thing, 2 Co. xii. 4. 5. to use words in order
to declare one’s mind and disclose one’s thoughts; to speak:
absol., ért adtod Aadovvtos, Mt. xii. 46; xvii. 53; xxvi. 47;
Mk. v. 85; xiv. 43; Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47, 60; with the
advs. kaxds, kadG@s, JN. xviii. 23; as vamos éAddovr, 1 Co.
xiii. 11; ds Spdkov, Rev. xiii. 11; ordua mpos ordpa, face
to face (Germ. miindlich), 2 Jn. 12 (after the Hebr. of
Num. xii. 8); eis dépa Nadeiv, 1 Co. xiv. 9; &k rod mepio-
oevpatos THs Kapdias TO oTCpa dade, Out of the abundance
of the heart the mouth speaketh, sc. so that it expresses
the soul’s thoughts, Mt. xii. 34; Lk. vi. 45; é« trav iSiov
Aadeiv, to utter words in accordance with one’s inner
character, Jn. viii. 44. with acc. of thething: ri AaAjoo,
AaAdnonre, etc., what I shall utter in speech, etc., Jn. xii.
50; Mt. x. 19; Mk. ix. 6 [here T Tr WH dzmoxp.69];
xiii. 11; ri, anything, Mk. xi. 283 LT Trtxt. WH; Ro.
xv. 18; 1 Th. i. 8; ov« otSauev ti Aadet, what he says,
i.e. what the words uttered by him mean [WH br. ri
Aad.], Jn. xvi. 18; radra, these words, Lk. xxiv. 36; Jn.
viii. 30; xvii. 1, 13; 1 Co. ix. 8; 7d AaAovpevor, 1 Co.
xiv. 9; plur. Acts xvi. 14 (of the words of a teacher) ;
Tov Adyov Aadovpevov, Mk. v. 36 [see B. 302 (259) note];
Aoyous, 1 Co. xiv. 19; pyyara, In. viii. 20; Acts x. 44;
Narێw S
mapaBoAnv, Mt. xiii. 33; Braocdnpias, Mk. ii. 7 [LT Tr
WH Braogdnpet]; Lk. v. 21; pyyara Brdodnua eis twa,
Acts vi. 11; pnuara (Rec. adds B\dodnpa) xara Tivos,
Acts vi. 13; oxAnpa card twos, Jude 15; bmépoyxa, ib. 16
(Dan. [Theodot.] xi. 36) ; ra yu) déovra, 1 Tim. v. 13 (4
pry O€ucs, 2 Mace. xii. 14; ets twa ra py xaOjxovra, 3
Mace. iv. 16; [cf. W. 480 (448)]); dueotpaypeva, Acts
xx. 30; 1d Weddos, Jn. viii. 44; dddov, 1 Pet. iii. 10 fr.
Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14; dya6d, Mt. xii. 34; codiay, 1 Co.
Hin O°SQ> pvornpta, ib. xiv. 2; foll. by ore (equiv. to mept
TovTou, dre etc. to speak of this, viz. that they knew him
[see dru, I. 2 sub fin.]), Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv. 41; contrary
to classic usage, foll. by direct disc., Mk. xiv. 31 Ltxt.
T Tr WH; Heb.v.5; xi. 18, (but in these last two pass.
of the utterances of God); more correctly elsewhere
éAdAnoe Aéyor (in imitation of Hebr. x2 raT [ef.
above (init.) ]), foll. by direct disc.: Mt. xiv. 27; xxiii.
1; xxviii. 18; Jn. viii. 12; Acts vili. 26; xxvi. 31;
xxviii. 25; Rev. xvii. 1; xxi. 9; Nadodca x. Aéyovaa,
Rev. x. 8. Aah with dat. of pers. to speak to one, ad-
dress him (esp. of teachers): Mt. xii. 46; xxiii. 1; Lk.
XXIV. 63 Jn. ix..295 xv.)225. Aets vil 38; 44; ix. 27%
XVAoe SH XK XLT OM NOMV i.) Les ll (Oovgiin lisa xivs
21, 28; 1 Th. ii. 16; Heb. i. 2 (1); of one commanding,
Mt. xxviii. 18; Mk. xvi. 19; to speak to, i. e. converse
with, one [cf. B. § 133, 1]: Mt. xii. 46, [47 but WH mrg.
only]; Lk. i. 22; xxiv. 32; Jn. iv. 26; xii. 29; ێavrois
(dat. of pers.) Wadpois x. duvors (dat. of instrument),
Eph. v. 19; od Aadety tux is used of one who does not
answer, Jn. xix. 10; to accost one, Mt. xiv. 27; ade ri
tu, to speak anything to any one, to speak to one about
a thing (of teaching): Mt. ix.18; Jn. viii. 25 (on which
see dpyn, 1 b.); x. 6; xiv. 25; xv. 11; xviii. 20 sq.; 2
Co. vii. 14; pnyara, Jn. vi. 63; xiv.10; Acts xiii. 42;
oixodopny x. mapaxAnow, things which tend to edify and
comfort the soul, 1 Co. xiv. 3; of one promulgating a
thing to one, rov vouov, pass. Heb. ix. 19; ad& mpds tiva,
to speak unto one: Lk. i. 19; [ii 15 Lmrg. TWH];
Acts iv. 1; viii. 26; ix. 29; xxi. 39; xxvi. 14 [RG],
26, 31; Heb. v. 5, (ON 1359, Gen. xxvii. 6; Ex. xxx. 11,
17, 22); Adyous mpos iva, Lk. xxiv. 44; éddAnoay mpds
avrovs evayyedi(opevor..."Incody, Acts xi. 20; 80a dy
Aadjon mpos bywas, Acts ill. 22; codiay €v tis, wisdom
among etc. 1 Co. ii. 6; Aad. werd rivos, to speak, converse,
with one [cf. B. § 133, 3]: Mk. vi. 50; Jn. iv. 27; ix.37;
xiv. 30; Rev. i. 12; x. 8; xvii. 1; xxi. 9,155; Dadeiy
dAnOevay pera etc. to show one’s self a lover of truth in
conversation with others, Eph. iv. 25 [ef. Ellicott];
Nareiv rept tivos, concerning a person or thing: Lk. ii. 33 ;
ix. 11; Jn. vii. 13; viii. 26; xii. 41; Acts ii. 31; Heb.
ii. 5; iv. 8; with revi, dat. of pers., added, Lk. ii. 38;
Acts xxii. 10; ri mepi twos, Acts xxviii. 21; Lk. ii. 17;
cis rwa epi twos (gen. of the thing), to speak something
as respects a person concerning a thing, Heb. vii. 14
RG; eis twa mepi w. gen. of pers., ibid. LT Tr WH.
Many of the exx. already cited show that Aadeiy is freq.
used inthe N. T. of teachers, — of Jesus, the apostles,
and others. To those pass. may be added, Lk. v. 4; Jn.
69
Nada
i. 37; vii. 46; viii. 30,38; xii. 50; Acts vi. 10; xi. 15;
xiv. 1, 9; xvi. 14; 1 Co. xiv. 34 sq.; 2 Co. ii. 17; Col.
iv. 3; 1 Th. ii. 4; 1 Pet. iv. 11; with mappnoia added,
Jn. vii. 26; xvi. 29; émi dvdpareInood, Acts v. 40, cf.
iv. 17, see émi, B. 2 a. B.; 7@ dvdpare Kupiov [where L T
Tr WH prefix ¢v], of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 (see dvopa,
2 f.); twit (to one) év mapaBoraiss Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13, 34;
ev mapotpias, Jn. xvi. 25; && euavrod, to speak from my-
self (i. e. utter what I myself have thought out), Jn. xii.
49; am’ éuavrod (see dro, II. 2 d. aa. p. 59*), In. vii. 17
8q-; xiv.10; xvi. 13; é&« rys yas (see éx, II. 2 sub fin.),
Jn. iii. 31; &k rod Kdopov, 1 Jn. iv. 5 (see kdcpos, 6); ek
Geov, prompted by divine influence, 2 Co. ii. 17; adeiv
tov Aoyor, to announce or preach the word of God or the
doctrine of salvation: Mk. viii. 32; Acts xiv. 25 [here
in T WHurg. foll. by ets rv Tépynv; see eis, A. 1. 5 b.]5
xvi. 6; Phil. i. 14, etc.; rév Ady. rod Geov, Acts iv. 29,
315 twi r. Adyov, Mk. ii. 2; Acts xi. 19; with mapaBodais
added, Mk. iv. 33; rut rov Ady. rod Kvpiov [WH txt.
Geot ], Acts xvi. 32 (Barn. ep. 19, 9); tut 7. Noy. rod
Geovd, Acts xiii. 46; Heb. xiii. 7; ra pnpara Tov Oeod, Jn.
iii. 34; ra pny. THs Cans, Acts v. 20; mpds twa Td evayy.
tov Oeot, 1 Th. ii. 2; Aadeiv k. Siddoxew 7a rept Tov “Incod
[RG kvpiov], Acts xviii. 25; 1d pvaornpiov rod Xpiorod,
Col. iv. 3. Aadeiy is used of the O. T. prophets utter-
ing their predictions: Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts iii. 24;
xxvi. 22 [cf. B. § 144, 20, and p. 301 (258)]; 2 Pet.i.
21; Jas. v.10; of the declarations and prophetic an-
nouncements of God: Lk.i.45,55; Jn.ix. 29; Acts vii.
6; esp.in the Ep. to the Heb.: i. 1, 2 (1); iii. 5; iv. 8;
xi. 18; xii. 25; God, the Holy Spirit, Christ, are
said Aadeiy &v ru: Heb. i. 1, 2 (1); Mt. x. 20; 2 Co.
xiii. 3; Osa ordpuards twos, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21; ded
‘Haaiov, Acts xxviii. 25; of the sayings of angels: Lk.
Wolly PD Scdhel, sols PHS INGIEG IE se-dihl Uo s6q0h 25)e
the Holy Spirit is said AaAnoe what it will teach the
apostles, Jn. xvi. 133 6 vduos as amanifestation of
God is said XNakeiv rue what it commands, Ro. iii. 19;
finally, even voices are said ade, Acts xxvi. 14
[RG]; Rev.i. 12; x. 8. i. q. to make known by speak-
ing, to speak of, relate, with the implied idea of extolling:
Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. xxiv. 36; Acts iv. 20;
(ef. Heb. xi. 4 Rec. (see 1 fin. above) ]. 6. Since
Aadei strictly denotes the act of one who utters words
with the living voice, when writers speak of them-
selves or are spoken of by others as Aadodvres, they are
conceived of as present and addressing their readers
with the living voice, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. ix. 8; 2 Co. xi.
17,23; xii. 19; Heb. ii. 5; vi. 9; 2 Pet. ili. 16, or Nadeip
is used in the sense of commanding, Heb. vii. 14. The
verb Aadew is not found in the Epp. to Gal. and 2 Thess.
[Comp.: dca-, €k-, kara-, mpoo-, ovd-Aavéw; cf. the cat-
alogue of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 60.]
Rada, -Gs, 9, (Addos, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Sprchl. § 119
Anm. 21), in prof. auth. [fr. Arstph. down] loquacity,
talkativeness, talk (Germ. Gerede) [see dadéo, init.]; in
a good sense conversation ; in the N. T. 1. speech,
i.g-story: Jn. iv. 42. 2. dialect, mode of speech, pro-
Napa
nunciation, [W. 23]: Mk. xiv. 70 Rec.; Mt. xxvi. 73;
speech which discloses the speaker’s native country : hence
of the speech by which Christ may be recognized as hav-
ing come from heaven, Jn. viii. 43 [where cf. Meyer ].*
Aapdé [RG (on the accent see Td. Proleg. 102)] in
Mt. xxvii. 46 and Aaywpa [RG] Mk. xv. 34, (the Hebr.
word m9 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 1), why; in the former
pass. Lehm. reads And, in the latter Aewd, Tdf. Aewd in
both, Tr WH Aeyd in Mt. but Aad in Mk.; the form in
7 or e reproduces the Chald. x) or m7; on the re-
markable diversity of spelling in ‘the codd. cf. Taf. on
each pass., [WH on Mt. l. ¢.], and Fritzsche on Mk. p.
693.*
AapBdvw; impf. AduBavow; fut. Anyoua, (LT Tr WH
AnpWoua, an Alexandrian form; sees. v. M, »); 2 aor.
ZraBov (2 pers. plur. once [in Tdf. 7 after B*] eAdBare,
1 Jn. ii. 27; see reff. s. v. amépyopat, init.), impv. AdBe
(Rev. x. 8 sq.), not AaBé (W. § 6,1 a.; B. 62 (54));
pf. eidnpa, 2 pers. etAnpas [and etAndes (Rev. xi. 17
WH; see xomdw); on the use of the pf. interchangeably
with an aor. (Rev. v. 7; viii. 5, etc.) cf. B. 197 (170) ;
W. 272 (255); Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Mod.
Grk. 2d ed. App. §§ 67, 68], ptep. eiAndas; [Pass., pres.
ptcp. AauBavopevos; pf. 3 pers. sing. efAnmra, Jn. vill. 4
WHurg. (rejected section)]; Sept. hundreds of times
for npr very often for xw3, also for 329 and several
_ times te ms; (fr. ea down];
I. to take, i 1. . to take with the hand, lay hold
of, any pers. or thing in eioee to use it: absol., where
the context shows what is taken, Mt. xxvi. 26; Mk. xiv.
22; (rv) dprov, Mt. xxvi. 26; Acts xxvii. 35; ro BiBXiov,
Rev. y. 7-9, [see B. and W. u. s.]; pdyarpay (grasp,
lay hand to), Mt. xxvi. 52, and in many other exx.
After a circumstantial style of description (see a»
orn, I. 1c.) in use from Hom. down (cf. Passow s. v.
C.; [L. and S.s. v. 1.11]; Matthiae § 558, Anm. 2; [W.
§ 65,4 c¢.]), the ptcp. AaBwyv with acc. of the object is
placed before an act. verb where it does not always seem
to us necessary to mention the act of taking (as \aBav
kuce xeipa [cf. our ‘he took and kissed ’], Hom. Od. 24,
398): Mt. xiii. 31,33; xvii. 27; Mk. ix. 36; Lk. xiii. 19,
21; Jn. xii. 3; Acts ii. 23 Rec.; ix. 25; xvi. 33 AaBay rd
aiva... tov Aadv éppaytice (equiv. to TO aipart.. . Tov
h. épp.), Heb. ix. 19; or the verb AaBeiy in a finite form
foll. by caf precedes, as €haBe thy Inaodv kal euaoriywoer,
Jn. xix.1; add, ib. 40; xxi.13; Rev. viii.5; also AaBeiy
tov adprov... kat Badeiy etc., Mt. xv. 26; Mk. vii. 27;
€haBov ... Kal énoinaay, Jn. xix. 23. metaph., dpopyny
(see the word, 2), Ro. vii. 8, 11; brdderypa TLWOS (gen.
of the thing) ria, to take one as an example of a thing,
for imitation, Jas. v. 10; to take in order to wear, ra
indria, i. e. to put on: In. xiii. 12 (€oOjra, brodquara,
Hadt. 2, 37; 4, 78); poppiy Sovdov, Phil. ii. 7. to take
in the mouth: something to eat, Jn. xiii. 30; Acts ix. 19;
1 Tim. iv. 4, (cf. Lat. cibum capio, to take food); to take
anything to drink, i. e. drink, swallow, ddwp, Rev. xxii.
17; to drink, rd d£0s, Jn. xix. 30; od« €daBe, he did not
take it, i. e. refused to drink it, Mk. xv. 23. to take
370
AapBavo
up a thing to be carried; to take upon one’s self: rov
aravupov avrod, Mt. x. 38 [Lmrg. apn]; to take with one for
future use: Gprovs, Mt. xvi. 5,7; Napmadas, Mt. xxv. 15
€Xatov peO Eavroy, ibid. 3. 2. to take in order to carry
away: without the notion of violenge, ras doGeveias, i. €
to remove, take away, Mt. viii. 17; with the notion of
violence, to seize, take away forcibly: Mt. v.40; Rev. iii.
11; rv eipnyny ex [Rec. awd, (WH br. éx)] ris yas, Rev.
vi. 4. 3. to take what is one’s own, to take to one’s
self, to make one’s own ; a. to claim, procure, for one’s
self: ri, Jn. ili. 27 (opp. to what is given); éavr@ Bact
delay, Lk. xix.12; with ace. of the pers. to associate with
one’s self as companion, attendant, etc.: haBay tr. ometpav
épxera, taking with him the band of soldiers (whose aid
he might use) he comes, Jn. xviii. 3 (orparoy AaBov
épxerat, Soph. Trach. 259); Aap. yuvaixa, to take i. e.
marry a wife, Mk. xii. 19-22; Lk. xx. 28-31, (Gen. iv.
19, ete.; Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 16; Eur. Alc. 324; with éavr@
added, Gen. iv. 19; vi. 2, and often). b. of that
which when taken is not let go, like the Lat. capio, i. q.
to seize, lay hold of, apprehend: twa, Mt. xxi. 35, 39;
Mk. xii. 3, 8, and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; trop. ti, i. e. to get possession of, obtain, a thing,
Phil. iii. 12 [ef. W. 276 (259)]; metaph., of affections
or evils seizing on a man (Lat. capio, occupo): twa éda-
Bev éxoraots, Lk. v. 26; pdBos, Lk. vii. 16 (very often so
even in Hom., as tpduos €\AaBe yvia, Il. 3, 34; pe twepos
aipet, 3, 446; yddos, 4, 23; Sept. Ex. xv. 15; Sap. xi.
13 (12)); mvedpa (i. e. a demon), Lk. ix. 39; metpacpds,
1 Cosx. 13: c. to take by craft (our catch, used of
hunters, fishermen, etc.) : ovdév, Lk. v. 53; trop. ruvd, to
circumvent one by fraud, 2 Co. xi. 20; with 8ér@ added,
ib. xii. 16. d. to take to one’s self, lay hold upon, take
possession of, i. e. to appropriate to one’s self: éaut@ thy
tiunv, Heb. v. 4 e. Lat. capto, catch at, reach after,
strive to obtain: ti mapd twos (gen. of pers.), Jn. v. 34,
1; alternating with ¢yreiv, ib. 44. f. to take a thing
due acc. toagreement or law, éo collect, gather (tribute) :
ra didpaxpa, Mt. xvii. 24; réAn dad twos, ib. 25; Sexdras,
Heb. vii. 8 sq.; xaprovs, Mt. xxi. 34; mapa ray yeopyav
amo Tov Kaprov, Mk. xii. 2. 4. to take i.e. to admit,
receive: twa pariopaow, Mk. xiv. 65 LT Tr WH [ef.
Lat. verberibus aliquem accipere]}, but see Baddow, 1; Twa
eis ra tSra, unto his own home [see i8os, 1 b.], Jn. xix. 27;
els oikiav, 2 Jn. 103; eis rd wAotov, Jn. Vi. 21. to receive’
what is offered; not to refuse or reject: tivd, one, in
order to obey him, Jn. i. 12; v. 43; xiii. 20; ri, prop.,
to receive, Mt. xxvii. 6; trop. : tév Adyoy, to admit or re-
ceive into the mind, Mt. xiii. 20; Mk. iv. 16, (for which
in Lk. viii. 13 8éyovrat) ; rv waprupiay, to believe the testi-
mony, Jn. ili. 11,32 sq.; ra pnuara twos, Jn. xii. 48; xvii. 8.
In imitation of the Hebr. 0°39 sw) (on the various senses
of which in the O. T. cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p- 915 sq.),
mpdcwrov AapBave, to receive a person, give him access
to one’s self, i. e. to regard any one’s power, rank, external
circumstances, and on that account to do some injustice
or neglect something: used of partiality [A. V. to ac
cept the person], Lk. xx. 21; with avOpomov added, Gal.
aapSave
ii. 6, (Lev. xix. 15; Mal. ii. 9, ete. ; Oavpacew 76 mpdcor.,
Deut. x. 17; Job xxxii. 22); [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1.
c.]- 5. to take, i. q. to choose, select: twa ek Twov,
pass. Heb. v. 1. 6. To the signification to take may
be referred that use, freq. in Grk. auth. also (cf. Passow
s. v. B. d. fin.; [L. and S. II. 3]), by which AapBdveww
joined to a subst. forms a periphrasis of the verb whose
idea is expressed by the subst.: AawB. dpyny to take be-
ginning, i. q. dpxopat to begin, Heb. ii. 3 (Polyb. 1, 12, 9,
and often; Ael. v. h. 2, 28; 12, 53, and in other auth.) ;
AnOnv tw6s, to forget, 2 Pet. i. 9 (Joseph. antt. 2, 6, 10;
9,1; 4, 8,44; Ael. v. h. 3,18 sub fin.; h. anim. 4, 35);
tropynaiv twos, to be reminded of a thing, 2 Tim. i. 5;
|" meipdy twos, to prove anything, i. e. either to make trial of:
js sc. Oakdoons, which they attempted to pass through,
Heb. xi. 29; or to have trial of, to experience: also with
gen. of the thing, ib. 36, (in both senses often also in
class. Grk.; see reipa, and Bleek, Br. a.d. Heb. ii. 2 p.
811); cupBovdrrov AapB. to take counsel, i. gq. cupBovdev-
ec6az, to deliberate (a combination in imitation apparently
of the Lat. phrase consilium capere, although that sig-
nifies to form a plan, to resolve): Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15;
Xxvil. 1,7; xxviil. 12; @dpaos, to take, receive, courage,
Acts xxviii. 15; 17d xdpaypd twos, i. q. yapdooopuai tt, to
receive the mark of, i.e. let one’s self be marked or
stamped with: Rev. xiv. 9,11; xix. 20; xx. 4.
II. to receive (what is given) ; to gain, get, obtain:
absol., opp. to aireiy, Mt. vii. 8; Lk. xi. 10; Jn. xvi. 24;
opp. to duddva, Acts xx. 35; Mt. x. 8; with acc. of the
thing, Mt. xx. 9sq.; Mk. x. 30; [Lk. xviii. 30 L txt.
WHtxt. Trmrg.]; Jn. vii. 39; Acts ii. 38; x. 43; Ro.
Pe aav gl 1 mel OO Lone ixr24isq.) 21 Conxin4 | Gal:
iii. 14; Heb. ix. 15; [xi. 13 RG, see éemayyeNia, 2 b.;
cf. W. 237 (222)];: Jas. i. 12; v.7; 1 Pet. iv. 10; Rev.
iv. 11; v.12, and many other exx.; proddv, Mt. x. 41;
Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. iii. 8,145; eAenuoodiuny, Acts iii. 3; €Xeos,
Heb. iv. 16; rémov dmodoyias, Acts xxv. 16; thy émoko-
nv, Acts i. 20; diuddoxov, Acts xxiv. 27 (successorem ac-
cipio, Plin. ep. 9, 13); 16 ixavov mapa twos (gen. of pers.),
Acts xvii. 9 (see ixavés, a. fin.) ; of punishments: xpiua,
Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40 [cf. W. 183 (172)];
Lk. xx.47; Jas. iii. 1; with dat. incommodi added, éaura,
Ro. xiii. 2 (8(«nv, Hdt.1, 115; Eur. Bacch. 1312; mods,
Eur. Tro. 360). oixodopuny, to receive edifying, i. q. otko-
Sopovpar, 1 Co. xiv. 5; mepirouny, i. q. meprrépvopar, Jn. Vii.
28; ri & rivoc [2], Jn. i. 16; & dvacrdacewe rove vexpode,
substantially i. q. to receive, get back, Heb. xi. 35 [see ex,
II. 6]; é«,a part of a thing [see ek, II. 9], Rev. xviii. 4;
ri mapa twos (gen. of pers.), [Lk. vi. 34 T Tr txt. WH];
ne or ACS lie So cil. Doe xx.) 245) xxvin LORE Jase 1.
7; 1 Jn. iii. 22 RG; 2 Jn. 4; Rev. ii. 28 (27); amd revos
(gen. of pers.), 1 Jn. ii. 27; [iii. 22 LT Tr WH]; on
the difference betw. mapa and dio tivos dapuB. cf. W.
370 (347) note; [B. § 147, 5; yet see Bp. Lghtft. on
Gal. i.12]; dad twos, 2 Co. xi. 24; mas eidnpas, how thou
hast received by instruction in the gospel, i.e. hast learned,
Rey. iii. 3. The verb AapBdvw does not occur in the
Epp. to the Thess., Philem., Titus, nor in the Ep. of Jude.
371
Aaosixeia
(Comp.: dvay dvri-, cuv-avti- (-par), drro-, émt-, kaTa-, [LeTOr,
Tapa-, Cvy-Tapa-, TP0-, TPOT-, Tuy Tuv-TeEpt-, Uo-AapBavo.
Syn. see d¢youat, fin.]
Adpex, 6, (Hebr. 399), Lamech, the father of Noah
(Gen. v. 25 sqq.): Lk. iii. 36.*
Aappd, see Aapd.
Aapmds, -ddos, 7, (Adume, cf. our lamp), [fr. Aeschyl.
and Thue. down], Sept. for 795; 1. atorch: Rev.
iv. 5 [where A. V. lamps]; viii. 10. 2. a lamp, the
flame of which is fed with oil: Mt. xxv. 1, 3 sq. 7 sq.; Jn.
xvil. 3; Actsxx.8. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlvi.; Eders-
heim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 455 sqq.; Becker, Charicles,
Sc. ix. (Eng. trans. p. 153).]*
Aapampds, -d, -dv, (Adumra) ; a. shining; brilliant:
aornp, Rev. xxii. 16 (Hom. I. 4, 77, ete.) ; clear, transpar-
ent, Rev. xxii. 1. b. splendid, magnificent, [A. V.
gorgeous, bright (see below) ]: éoO@ns, Lk. xxiii. 11; Acts
x. 80; Jas. ii. 2 sq.; Aivov [L Tr WH Aibov], Rev. xv.
6; Bvoowos, xix. 8; neut. plur. splendid [(R. V. sumpt-
uous) | things, i. e. elegancies or luxuries in dress and
style, Rev. xviii.14. The word is sometimes used of
brilliant and glistening whiteness (hence Aapmpa TnBevva,
toga candida, Polyb. 10, 4,8; 10,5, 1); accordingly the
Vulg. in Acts x. 30; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. xv. 6 renders it by
candidus; and some interpreters, following the Vulg.
(“indutum veste alba”), understand ‘white apparel’ to
be spoken of in Lk. xxiii. 11 [A. V. gorgeous; (see
above) ]; cf. Keim iii. p. 380 note [Eng. trans. vi. 104].*
Aapmpotys, -7Tos, 7, brightness, brilliancy: rod Hriov,
Acts xxvi. 13. [From Hdt. (metaph.) down.]*
Aaptpds, adv., splendidly, magnificently: of sumptuous
living, Lk. xvi. 19. [From Aeschyl. down. ]*
Adparw; fut. Aduyow (2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt.T Tr WH); 1
aor. éAapa; [fr. Hom. down]; to shine: Mt. v. 15 sq.;
xvil. 2; Lk. xvii. 24; Acts xii. 7; 2 Co.iv. 6. [Comp.:
€k-, mTept-Adptro. | *
AavOdvw (lengthened form of AnOw); 2 aor. €Aadov,
(whence Lat. laiere); Sept. several times for poy), etc.;
[fr. Hom. down]; to be hidden: Mk. vii. 24; Lk. viii. 47;
tid, to be hidden from one, Acts xxvi. 26; 2 Pet. iii. 5
(on which see O€d, 1 sub fin.), 8; acc. to the well-
known classic usage, joined in a finite form to a ptep.
i. q. secretly, unawares, without knowing, (cf. Matthiae
§ 552 B.; Passow s. v. ii. p. 18°; [L. and S.s. v. A. 2];
W. § 54,4; [B. § 144, 14]): edabov fevioavres, have un-
awares entertained, Heb. xiii. 2. [Comp.: ék-, ém-
(wat).]*
Aakeutés, -7, -dv, (fr. Na€evo, and this fr. Nas a stone,
and &€@ to polish, hew), cut out of stone: pvppa, Lk. xxiii.
53, and thence in Evang. Nicod. ¢. 11 fin.; (once in
Sept., Deut. iv. 49; Aquila in Num. xxi. 20; xxiii. 14;
Deut. xxxiv. 1; [Josh. xiii. 20]; nowhere in Grk. auth.).*
AaoStxela [-cia TWH (see I, +); RGLTr accent
-dixera, cf. Chandler § 104], -as, 7, Laodicea, a city of
Phrygia, situated on the river Lycus not far from Co-
loss. After having been successively called Diospolis
and Rhoas, it was named Laodicea in honor of Laodice,
the wife of Antiochus II. [B. c. 261-246]. It was de
Aaosdixets
stroyed by an earthquake, a. p. 66 [or earlier, see Bp.
Lghtft. Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 38 sq.], together
with Colosse and Hierapolis (see KoAogoai); and after-
wards rebuilt by Marcus Aurelius. It was the seat of a
Christian church: Col. ii. 1; iv. 18, 15 sq. [(on the ‘ Ep.
to (or ‘from’) the Laodiceans’ see Bp. Lghtft. Com.
u. 8. pp. 274-300)]; Rev. i. 11; iii. 14, and in the [Rec.]
subscription of the 1 Ep. to Tim. [See Bp. Lght/t. Com.
on Col. and Philem. Intr. § 1; Forbiger, Hndbch. d.
alten Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 347 sq.]*
Aaodixets, -éas, 6, a Laodicean, inhabitant of Laodicea:
Col. iv. 16, and Ree. in Rev. iii. 14.*
ads, -od, 6, [(cf. Curtius § 535)]; Sept. more than
fifteen hundred times for Dy; rarely for j1 and Dk;
[fr. Hom. down]; people; 1. a people, tribe, nation,
all those who are of the same stock and language: univ.
of any people; joined with yAécoa, puAn, Ovos, Rev. v.
9; vii. 9; x.11; xi.9; xiii. 7 [Rec. om.]; xiv. 6; xvii. 15,
(see yhéaca, 2); mdvres of daoi, Lk. ii. 31; Ro. xv. 11;
esp. of the people of Israel: Mt. iv. 23; xiii. 15; Mk. vii.
6; Lk. ii. 10; Jn. xi. 50 (where it alternates with ¢6vos) ;
xviii. 14; Acts iii. 28; Heb. ii. 17; vii. 11, etc.; with
*Iopand added, Acts iv. 10; distinguished fr. rots 6veow,
Acts xxvi. 17, 23; Ro. xv. 10; the plur. Aaoi Iopanv
[R. V. the peoples of Is.] seems to be used of the tribes
of the people (like pay, Gen. xlix. 10; Deut. xxxii. 8;
Is. iii. 13, etc.) in Acts iv. 27 (where the plur. was ap-
parently occasioned by Ps. ii. 1 in its reference to Christ,
cf. 25); of mpeoBvrepot Tod aod, Mt. xxi. 23; xxvi. 8,
47; xxvii. 1; of ypapparets Tod Naod, Mt. ii. 4; of mparou
tov Aaod, Lk. xix. 47; 7d mpeoBurépioy rod aod, Lk. xxii.
66; dpxovres Tov Aaov, Acts iv. 8. with a gen. of the
possessor, Tod Oeov, adrov, pod (i. e. Tod Oeod, Hebr.
mM dy, DONT Dy), the people whom God has chosen
for himself, selected as peculiarly his own: Heb. xi. 25;
Mt. ii. 6; Lk.i.68; vii. 16; without the art. Jude 5 (Sir.
xlvi. 7; Sap. xviii. 13); cf. W.§ 19, 1; the name is trans-
ferred to the community of Christians, as that which
by the blessing of Christ has come to take the place of
the theocratic people of Israel, Heb. iv. 9; Rev. xviii. 4;
particularly to a church of Christians gathered from
among the Gentiles, Acts xv. 14; Ro. ix. 25 sq.; 1 Pet.
ii. 10; with es mepuroinow added, 1 Pet. ii. 9; meprov-
ovos, Tit. ii. 14, ef. Acts xviii. 10; Lk.i.17. 6 Aads the
people (of Israel) is distinguished from its princes and
rulers [(1 Esdr. i. 10; v.45; Judith viii. 9,11; etc.)],
Mt. xxvi.5; Mk. xi. 32 [here WH Tr mrg. read dyNos] ;
xiv. 2; Lk. xx. 19; xxii. 2; xxili.5; Acts v. 26, etc.; from
the priests, Heb. v. 35 vii. 5, 27. 2. indefinitely,
of a great part of the population gathered together any-
where: Mt. xxvii. 25; Lk. i. 21; iii. 15; vii. 1, 293 viii.
47; ix.133 xviii. 43, ete.; 7d wAnO0s Tod aod, Lk. i. 10.
[The Gospels of Mk. and Jn. use the word but three
times each. Syn. see djyos, fin. |
Aadpuyé, -yyos, 6, the throat (Etym. Magn. [557, 16]:
Adpvy& pev SC ov Aadoipev... Hapuy& S€ SV ob ecbioper
x. mivopev): of the instrument or organ of speech (as
Ps. v.10; Prov. viii. 75 Sir. vi. 5 (4)), Ro. iii. 18, where
372
aT pevo
the meaning is, their speech threatens and imprecates
destruction to others. (Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Galen,
al.; Sept. several times for }}1}; oftener for jm, the
palate.) *
Aacata, -as, 7, (Lchm. “AX\acoa, Tr WH Aacéa [see
WH. App. p. 160], Vulg. Thalassa), Lasea, Acts xxvii.
8, acity of Crete not mentioned by any ancient geograph-
ical or other writer. But this need not excite surprise,
since probably it was one of the smaller and less impor-
tant among the ninety or a hundred cities of the island;
cf. Kuinoel ad loc. [Its site was discovered in 1856,
some five miles to the E. of Fair Havens and close to
Cape Leonda; see Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of St. Paul,
(3d ed. p. 259 sq.) 4th ed. p. 262 sq.; Alford, Grk. Test.
vol. ii. Proleg. p. 27 sq.]*
Adokw: 1 aor. éAdxnoa; (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p.
233; Kriiger ii. 1, p. 184; Kiihner § 343, i. p. 858;
[Veitch s. v.]; W. 88 (84)); 1. to crack, crackle,
crash: Hom., Hes., Tragg., Arstph. 2. to burst
asunder with a crack, crack open: Acts i. 183 6 dpdxov
dvonbeis (after having sucked up the poison) éAdkyce
kat améOave kai e&exv6n 6 ids aitovd Kal » xoAn, Act.
Thomae § 33, p. 219 ed. Tdf.*
Aaropéw, -@: 1 aor. eAardunoa; pf. pass. ptep. AeAaTo-
pnpévos; (fr. Aardwos a stone-cutter, and this fr. Aas a
stone, and réuvw) ; to cut stones, to hew out stones: Mt.
xxvii. 60; Mk. xv. 46. (Sept. several times for 33m;
once for 793, Ex. xxi. 33 sqq.; Diod., [Dion. H., Strab.,
al. (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Justin Mart.) *
Aatpeta, -as, 7, (Aatpeva, q. V-) ; 1. in Grk. auth.
service rendered for hire; then any service or ministra-
tion (Tragg., Plut., Leian.); the service of God: rod
Geod, Plat. apol. 23 b.; xaraghuyetv mpos Oea@v edyas Te Kat
Narpeias, ibid. Phaedr. p. 244 e. ; servitus religionis, quam
Aarpetav Graeci vocant, August. civ. dei 5, 15. 2
in the Grk. Bible, the service or worship of God acc. to
the requirements of the levitical law (Hebr. 1733), Ex. xii.
25 sq., etc.): Ro. ix. 4; Heb. ix. 1, (1 Mace. ii. 19, 22);
Narpeiav mpoopépew TO Gee [to offer service to God] i. q.
Ovciav mpoodepew eis Narpeiay [to offer a sacrifice in
service], Jn. xvi. 2; émiredetv Tas Aarpeias, to perform the
sacred services (see émteh€w, 1), spoken of the priests,
Heb. ix. 6; univ. of any worship of God, 4 Aoyxy r. Ro.
xii. 1 [ef. W. § 59, 9a.]; (of the worship of idols, 1 Mace.
i. 43).*
Aarpedw; fut. Narpedow; 1 aor. €Adrpevoa; (Adrpis a
hireling, Lat. /atro in Enn. and Plaut.; Aarpov hire) ;
in Grk. writ. a. to serve for hire; b. univ. to
serve, minister to, either gods or men, and used alike of
slaves and of freemen; in the N. T. to render religious
service or homage, to worship, (Hebr. 12), Deut. vi. 13;
x. 12; Josh. xxiv. 15); in a broad sense, Aarp. ed: Mt.
iv. 10 and Lk. iv. 8, (after Deut. vi. 13); Acts vii. 7;
xxiv. 14; xxvii. 23; Heb. ix.14; Rev. vii.15; xxii. 3;
of the worship of idols, Acts vii. 42; Ro. i. 25, (Ex. xx.
5; xxiii. 24; Ezek. xx. 32). Phrases relating to the
manner of worshipping are these: 6e@ [so R G] Aarpedvew
mvevpart (dat. of instr.), with the spirit or soul, Phil. iii. 3,
Aaxavoy
but LT Tr WH have correctly restored mvedpart O€ 08,
i. e. prompted by, filled with, the Spirit of God, so that
the dat. of the pers. (r@ Oc@) is suppressed; év r@ mvev-
pati pov ev TH evayy., in my spirit in delivering the glad
tidings, Ro. 1.9; r@ Oe@ ev xabapa cuverdjoe, 2 Tim. i. 3;
wera aidovs kal edAaBeias or [so LT Tr WH] per’ eddaB.
x. Ocous, Heb. xii. 28; év daudrnte x. Sixavcocivy, Lk. i. 74;
(without the dat. 66) vyoreias x. Senoeot, Lk. ii. 37;
Aarpeveww, absol., to worship God [cf. W. 593 (552)], Acts
xxvi. 7. in the strict sense; to perform sacred services,
to offer gifts, to worship God in the observance of the rites
instituted for his worship: absol., Heb. ix. 9; x. 23 spec.
_of the priests, to officiate, to discharge the sacred office:
with a dat. of the sacred thing to which the service is
rendered, Heb. viii. 5; xiii. 10. [(Hur., al.)]*
AadXavov, -ov, 7d, (fr. Nayaiyw to dig; hence herbs grown
on land cultivated by digging; garden-herbs, as opp. to
wild plants); any potherb, vegetables: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk.
iv. 32; Lk. xi.42; Ro. xiv.2. (1 K. xx. («xi.) 2; Gen.
ix. 3; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 2, etc.; Arstph., Plat., Plut.,
als).*
AcBBaios, see GadSaios.
Aeyeov and (so T, Tr [but not in Mt. xxvi. 53], WH
[see fin.], also Lchm. in Mk. v. 9, 15) Aeyiwy (ef. Tdf. ed.
7 Proleg. p. 1.3 [esp. ed. 8 p. 83; B. 16 (15)]; so, too,
in inserr. in Boeckh; [Diod., Plut., al.]), -@vos, 4, (a Lat.
word), a legion (a body of soldiers whose number differed
at different times, and in the time of Augustus seems to
have consisted of 6826 men [i. e. 6100 foot, and 726
horse]): Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. v. 9, 15; Lk. viii. 30 [here
WHI (ex errore) \eyiwy (cf. Chandler § 598) ].*
Aéyw (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and
pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. éAeyay, Jn. xi.
56 Tadf. [cf. ye, init.]): I. in its earliest use in
Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; cf. J. G. Miil-
ler in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius
§ 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect,
gather; to pick out. 2. to lay with, count with; to enu-
merate, recount, narrate, describe; [cf. Eng. tale, Germ.
zthlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join
words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. Aadetv, see
under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in Il. 2, 222
[yet cf. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48,2; L. and S.
s. v. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com.
use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for
DN; often also for DN} (saying, dictum); very rarely for
25; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to speak:
Acts xiii. 15; xxiv. 10; to say, foll. by direct disc., Mt. ix.
34; xii. 44; xvi. 2 [here T br. WH reject the pass.]; Mk.
iii. 30; Lk. v. 39 [WH br. the cl.]; Jn. i. 29, 38; [1 Co.
xii. 3 LT Tr WH]; Jas. iv. 13, and very often; the di-
rect discourse is preceded by 671 recitative, Mt. ix. 18 [T
om. 60]; Mk. i. 15 [Tom. WH br. héy.]; ii. 12 [L and
WH br. Aéy.]; iii. 21 sq.; v. 28 ; vi. 14 sq. 35; vii. 20; Lk.
i. 24; iv. 41; xvii. 10; Jn. vi. 14; vii. 125 vill. 33; ix. 9,
41; xvi. 17; Acts ii. 13; xi. 3; Heb. x. 8; Rev. iii. 17,
ete.; foll. by ace. with inf., Lk. xi. 18; xxiv. 23; Jn. xii.
29; Acts iv. 32; xxviii. 6, ete.; foll. by dre, Lk. xxii. 70;
3873
Myo
Jn. viii. 48; xviii. 37; 1 Tim. iv. 1, (for other exx. see
2 a. below); foll. by an indir. question, Mt. xxi. 27;
Mk. xi. 33; Lk. xx. 8. b. The N. T. writers, par-
ticularly the historical, are accustomed to add the verb
Acyew foll. by direct disc. to another verb which already
contains the idea of speaking, or which states an opin-
ion concerning some person or thing; as rd pnOév...
mpopyrov Aéyovros, Mt. ii. 173; viii. 173 xii. 17; xiii. 35;
knptoooy x. [LT WHom. Tr br. cai] Xéyor, Mt. iii. 2;
kpa¢ew kat Neyew, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x. 47; Lk.
iv.41 (here L T Tr mrg. cpavyd¢ew]; Acts xiv. 15; mpoo-
pavey x. héyew, Mt. xi. 17; Lk. vii. 32; darexpién kat
héyer, Mk. vii. 2853 aiveiv 7. Ocdv x. déyew, Lk. ii. 13;
yoyyvcev k. Aeyew, Jn. vi. 42. to verbs of speaking,
judging, etc., and those which denote in general the
nature or the substance of the discourse reported,
the ptcp. A€ywy is added (often so in Sept. for xd
[W. 535 sq. (499), cf. 602 (560) ]) foll. by direct disc. :
amexpiOn Aéywv, Mt. xxv. 9, 44 sq.; Mk. ix. 38 [T WH
om. Aéyor]; Acts xv. 13; Rev. vii. 13, etc. (see doxpi-
vopat, 1 ©.) ; etme X., Mk. [viii. 28 T WH Tr mrg.]; xii.
26; Lk. xx. 2, (in Grk. writ. py Aeywr) ; eAdAnoe Aéyov
(see Aad, 5); euapripyce, Jn. i. 325 Kéxpaye X. ib. 15;
edidacke A. Mt. v. 2; [€Bdnoe or] aveBonoe d., Mt. xxvii.
46; Lk. ix. 38; dvexpa&e X.. Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34 [T
WH om. Tr br. Aéy.]; also after dew, Rev. v. 9; xv. 3;
atpew {or éraip.] povnv, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts xiv. 11; Oav-
patew, Mt. viii. 27; ix. 33; xxi. 20; after mpodnrever,
Mt. xv. 7; yoyyi¢ew, Mt. xx. 12; elmev ev mapaBodais,
Mt. xxii. 1; mapéOnxe mapaBornv, Mt. xiii. 24; Stepapro-
paro, Heb. ii. 6; émnyyeAra, Heb. xii. 26, and a great
many other exx. It is likewise added to verbs of every
kind which denote an act conjoined with speech; as
epavn, paiverar Aéyov, Mt. i. 20; 11.13; mpocexiver déyor,
Mt. vill. 2's 1x. 18 xiv. 33; xv. 2553 add, Mt. vill. 3 ; 1x.
990. ive Tose Miketvs S53 luke 1. 66s) vi Se vill.dSe= xl 7
KV) QSeXville Sy SIX 1S 5 eACtS Vill LO, tors xtls 15
Xxvil. 23 sq.; 1 Co. xi. 25,etc. On the other hand, the
verb Aéye in its finite forms is added to the participles
of other verbs: Mt. xxvii. 41; Mk. viii. 12; xiv. 45, 63,
Gis xVv.sos Wky vig 2) se nalnG65 Excl eACts ado
Heb. viii. 8; doxpiOets Aéyet, Mk. viii. 29; ix. 5,19; x
24,51; xi. 22, 33[L Trmrg. br. T Tr WH om. dz.]; LE.
iii. 11; xi.45; xiii. 8, (nowhere so in Acts, nor in Mt.
nor in Jn.); «Kpd&as Aéyet, Mk. v. 7 [Rec. etre]; ix. 24.
éypae eyo (Gleny app, 2 K. x. 6; 258. xi. 15, ete.),
he wrote in these words, or he wrote these words [A. V.
retains the idiom, he wrote saying (cf. e. below) ]: Lk.
i. 633 1 Mace. vill. 81; xi. 57; Joseph. antt. 11, 2,
2; 13,4,1; exx. fr. the Syriac are given by Gesenius in
Rosenmiiller’s Repertor. i. p. 185. émeppe or dmréoresde
eyo, i. e. he ordered it to be said by a messenger: Mt.
xxii. 16; xxvii. 19; Lk. vii. 19sq.; xix. 14; Jn. xi. 3;
Acts xiii. 15; xvi. 35, (see in eéov, 3 b.); otherwise in
Mt. xxi. 37; Mk. xii. 6. c. 1) pavn Aéyovoa: Mt. iii.
17; xvii. 5; Lk. iii. 22 [G LT Tr WH om. déy.] ; Rev.
vi. 6; x. 4,8; xii. 10; xiv. 13, etc. A€yew havg ueydry,
Rev. v. 12; viii. 13; ev Porgy p., ib. xiv. 7, 9. d. In
héyo
accordance with the Hebr. conception which regards
thought as internal speech (see etzrov, 5), we find Aéyew
év aura, to say within one’s self, i. e. to think with one’s
self: Mt. iii. 9; ix. 21; Lk. iii. 8; €v ry xapdia avrod,
Rev. xviii. 7. e. One is said to speak, déyew, not only
when he uses language orally, but also when he ex-
presses himself in writing [(cf. b. sub fin.) ]: 2 Co. vii.
3; vill. 8; ix. 38,4; xi. 16, 21; Phil. iv.11, and often in
Paul; so of the writers of the O. T.: Ro. x. 16, 20; xi.9;
xv.12; Aéyer 4 ypay, Ro. iv. 3; x.11; xi. 2; Jas. ll. 23,
etc.; and simply Aeyet, sc. 7 A€youea, i. e. 7 ypadn (our tis
said): Ro. xv. 10, [11 L Trmrg.]; Gal. iii. 16; Eph. iv.
8; v. 14; cf. W. 522 (486 sq.) and 588 (547); B. § 129,
16; Aéyet, sc. 6 beds, 2 Co. vis2s deyer Aavid év Wahpo,
Acts xiii. 35; Aéyer 6 Oeds, Heb. v. 6; €v ro ‘Qane, Ro.
ix. 25; év ‘Hdia, Ro. xi. 2; év Aavid, Heb. iv. 7; deve
ro mvedpa Td ayvov, Heb. iii. 7; 6 vdpos Aéyet, 1 Co. xiv.
84; si, 1 Co. ix..8; Ro. iii. 19. f. Acyew is used of
every variety of speaking: as of inquiry, Mt. ix.
14; xv.1; xvii. 25; xviii. 1; Mk. ii. 18; v. 30 sq.; Lk.
ive22eavine 20 sm. vileel tho ax Os exixed! Os RO. x15
sq-; xi. 1, 11, ete.; foll. by e¢ interrog. [see ei, II. 2], Acts
xxi. 37; Neyer Tis, i. q. one bids the question be asked,
Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii. 11; of reply, Mt. xvii. 25; xx.
7; Mk. viii. 24 [Lmrg. eiwev]; Jn. i. 21: xviii. 17; of
acclaim, Rev. iv. 8, 10; of exclamation, Rey. xviii.
10,16, of entreaty, Mt. xxv. 11; Lk. xiii. 25; i. q.
to set forth in language, make plain, Heb. vy. 11. g.
Aeyo w. ace. of the thing. to say a thing: 8, Lk. ix. 33 (i.
e. not knowing whether what he said was appropriate
or not); Lk. xxii. 60; to express in words, Philem. 21;
rovro, Jn. Vili. 6; xii 33; rovadra, Heb. xi. 14; radra,
Wigs Vane IR eh WG Hien Satie Ws dine Vig GY oY ANAS SehiZ
18; 1 Co. ix. 8; rade (.eferring to what follows), Acts
xxi. 11; Rey, ii. 1,8, 12, 18; iii. 1, 7,14; vi, what? Ro.
x. 8; xi. 4; Gal. iv. 30; 1 Co. xiv. 16; soAAd, Jn. xvi.
12; ta Neyopeva, Lk. xviii. 34; Acts xxviii. 24; Heb. viii.
1; dé tevos, Acts viii. 6; xiii. 45 [LT Tr WH 2dadov-
pevois]; xxvii. 11; A€yw addAnOerav, Jn. viii. 45 sq.; Ro.
ix. 1; 1 Tim. ii. 7; dAnO7, Jn. xix. 35; dvOpadmvov, Ro.
vi. 19; ov Aé€yets, sc. adrd, prop. thou sayest, i. e. thou
grantest what thou askest, equiv. to it is just as thou sayest ;
to be sure, certainly, [see etrov, 1 c.]: Mt. xxvii. 11; Mk.
xv. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3, cf. xxii. 70; Jn. xviii. 37, [(all these
pass. WH mrg. punctuate interrogatively)]; mapaBodjpv,
to put forth, Lk. xiv. 7; ré adrd, to profess one and the
same thing, 1 Co. i. 10 cf. 12. h. with dat. of the
pers. to whom anything is said: foll. by direct discourse,
Mt. viii. 20; xiv. 4; xviii. 32; xix.10; Mk. ii. 17, 27;
vii. 9; vill. 1; Jn. i. 43 (44); ii. 10, and scores of other
€xx. ; A€yeww Twi- Kvpte, Kdpte, to salute any one as lord,
Mt. vii. 21; impv. Aéye por, Acts xxii. 27 (generally
etre pot, nuiv) ; plur. Lk. x.9; apujy Neyo bpiv, I solemnly
declare to you, (in the Gospels of Mt. Mk. and Lk.); for
which the Greek said én’ ddnOeias Aéyo tpiv, Lk. iv. 25,
and Ady ipiv ddyOds, ib. ix. 27; in Jn. everywhere
[twenty-five times, and always uttered by Christ] duty
ayuny A€yo oor (viv), I most solemnly declare to thee
374
Aéy@
(you), i. 51 (52); fii. 11, etc.; with the force of an
asseveration Aéyw ti, without dunv: Mt. xi. 22;
xii. 36; xxiii. 39; Lk. vii. 9, 28; x. 12; xii 8; xvii. 34;
xviii. 8,145 vat A€yo ipiv, Mt. xi.9; Lk. vii. 26; xi. 51;
xii. 5; Aێyw oot, Lk. xii. 59. with a dat. of the thing,
in the sense of commanding (see 2 c. below), Mt.
xxi. 19; Lk. xvii. 6; inthe sense of asking, implor-
ing, Lk. xxiii. 30; Rev. vi.16. Aéyw rwi tu, to tell a thing
toone: Mt. x. 27; 2 Th. ii. 5; rv ddnOevav, Jn. xvi. 7;
pvornptov, 1 Co. xv. 51; mapaBodnjy, Lk. xviii. 15 of a
promise, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6; i. q. to unfold, ea-
plain, Mk. x. 32; foll. by indirect disc., Mt. xxi. 27; Mk.
xi. 833; Lk. xx. 8; rwi teva, to speak to one about one,
Jn. viii. 27; Phil. iii. 18. i. Aéyw foll. by preposi-
tions: mpés tia, which denotes — either to one (equiv. to
the dat.) : foll. by direct disc., Mk. iv. 41; x. 26; Lk.
Vill. 25% Ix. 235) xvie tis dah 1125) 4 ev LO va os
viii. 31; Acts ii. 7 [RG], 12; xxviii. 4, 17; foll. by 6re
recitative, Lk. iv. 21; mpos Twa Tt, Lk. xi. 583 RG L Tr
mrg.; xxiv 10;—oras respects one, in reference to one (cf.
B. § 133,38; W. § 31,5; 405 (878); Kriger § 48, 7, 13;
Bleek on Heb. i. 7: Meyer on Ro. x. 21]: Lk. xii. 41;
Heb. i. 7, [al. add 8, 13; vii. 21]; pera twos, to speak
with one, Jn. xi. 56; mepi tevos, of, concerning, one [cef.
W. § 47, 4), Mt. xxi. 45; Jn. 1.47 (48); ii. 215 xi. 135
xiii. 18, 22; Heb. ix. 5; mepi rivos, drt, Lk. xxi. 5; tt
mept twos, Jn. i. 22; ix.17; Acts vili. 34; Tit. ii.8; rit
mepi tivos, Mt. xi. 7; Mk. i. 30; viii. 30 [Lchm. eiraow] ;
mpos twa trepi twos, Lk. vii. 24; tép twos, to speak for,
on behalf of, one, to defend one, Acts xxvi. 1 [L7'Tr
WHnurg. wepi]; éi twa, to speak in reference to, of
[see emi, C. ]. 2g. yy.; B. § 147, 23], one, Heb. vii. 13;
eis tia (Ti BAaodnuoy), against one, Lk. xxii. 65; in
speaking to have reference to one, speak with respect to
one, Acts ii. 25 [ef. W. 397 (371)]; in speaking to refer
(athing) to one, with regard to, Eph. v. 32; eis rév eécpov,
to the world (see eis, A. I. 5 b.), Jn. viii. 26 [L T Tr WH
dara]. k. with adverbs, or with phrases having ad-
verbial force: xadés, rightly, Jn. viii.48; xiii.13; &cat-
tas, Mk. xiv. 31; ri xara cvyyvopny, émitayny, by way of
advice [concession (see cvyyvepn)], by way of command,
1 Co. vii. 6; 2 Co. viii. 8; xara dvOpwror [see dvOpwros,
1c.], Ro. iii.5; Gal. iii. 15; 1 Co.ix. 8; Aveaomeri, Acts
xiv. 11. In conformity with the several contexts where
it is used, A€yea, like the Lat. dico, is 2. specifi-
cally a. 1. q. to asseverate, affirm, aver, maintain:
foll. by an acc. with inf., Mt. xxii. 23; Mk. xii.18; Lk.
xx. 415 xxill. 2; xxiv. 23; Acts v. 36; viii. 9; xvii. 7;
xxviii. 6; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 18; Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9;
with the included idea of insisting on, mepiréuveo Oat (that
you must be (cf. W. § 44, 3 b.; B. § 141, 2]), Acts xv.
24 Rec.; with the simple inf. without a subject-ace., Lk.
xxiv. 23; Jas. ii. 14; 1Jn.ii. 6,9; foll. by ére (where
the ace. with inf. might have been used), Mt. xvii. 10;
Mk. ix.11; xii. 35; Lk. ix. 7; Jn. iv. 20; xii. 84; 1 Co.
Xv. 12; A€yw revi dre etc. to declare to one that ete. [ef. B.
§141,1]: Mt.iii.9; v. 20,22; xii. 363 xiii.17; xvii. 12;
xxi. 43 [WH mrg. om. 674]; xxvi. 21; Mk. ix. 13; xiv. 18
Aci Lua
25, 30; Lk. iii. 8; x.12; xiii. 35 [Tr WH om. Lbr. dre];
xiv. 24; xviii. 8; xix. 26, 40 [WH txt. om. Tr br. ott];
xxi. 3; xxii. 16, 37, ete.; In. iii. 11; v.24sq.; vili. 34;
x. 7 (Tr WHom. L br. dr]; xvi. 20; Gal. v. 2; héyo
twa, ort, by familiar attraction [ef. W. § 66, 5a.; B.
§ 151, 1] for Aéye, dre tus: In. viii. 54; ix.19; x. 36
(where for dpeis A€yere, Ste dros, dv... améoret\e, BAa-
odnpet; the indirect discourse passes into the direct, and
Braodnpeis is put for Braodnyei [B. § 141, 1]). b.
i. q- to teach: with dat. of pers. foll. by direct disc., 1 Co.
vil. 8,12; ri rem, Jn. xvi. 12; Acts i. 3; todro foll. by
Ort, 1 Th. iv. 15. c. to exhort, advise; to command,
direct: with an ace. of the thing, Lk. vi. 46; Aéyover (se.
‘avra) K. ov movovow, Mt. xxili. 3; ré tum, Mk. xiii. Sues
Jn. ii. 5; rei foll. by an imperative, Mt. v. 44; Mk. ii.
11; Lk. vii. 14; xi. 9; xii4; xvi.9; Jn. ii. 8; xiii. 29;
1 Co. vii. 12; Aéyw with an inf. of the thing to be done
or to be avoided [cf. W. § 44,3 b.; B. § 141, 2]: Mt.
v. 34, 39; Acts xxi. 4, 21; Ro. ii. 22; xii. 3; foll. by
iva, Acts xix. 4; mepi twos (gen. of the thing) foll. by
iva, 1 Jn. v. 16, (see tva, II. 2 b.); foll. by yx with subjune.
2 Co. xi. 16. in the sense of asking, seeking, entreating :
with dat. of pers. foll. by an impv., 1 Co. x. 15; 2 Co.
vi. 13; foll. by an inf. [W. 316 (296 sq.); B.u.s.], Rev.
x. 9 [Rec. impv.]. xaipew rivi heya, to give one a greet-
ing, bid him welcome, salute him, 2 Jn. 10 sq. (see yaipa,
fin.). d. to point out with words, intend, mean, mean
to say, (often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 308;
[L. and S.s. v. C. 10]): revd, Mk. xiv. 71; Jn. vi. 71;
ri, 1 Co. x. 29; rodro foll. by direct disc., Gal. iii. 17;
tovro foll. by dre, 1 Co.i. 12. e. to call by a name, to
call, name; i. q. kad& teva with ace. of pred.: ri pe Aéyers
dyadév; Mk. x.18; Lk. xviii.19; add, MK. xii. 37; Jn.v.
18; xv.15; Acts x. 28; [1 Co. xii. 3 RG]; Rev. ii. 20;
pass. with predicate nom.: Mt. xiii. 55; 1 Co. viii. 5;
Eph. ii. 11; 2 Th. ii. 4; Heb. xi. 245 6 Aeydpevos, with
pred. nom. he that is surnamed, Mt. i. 16 (so xxvii. 17) ;
x. 2; Jn. xx. 24; Col. iv. 11; he that is named: Mt. ix.
9; xxvi. 3, 14; xxvii. 16; Mk. xv. 7; Lk. xxii. 47; Jn.
ix. 11; ef. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 31 sq.; of things, places,
Cities, etc.: rd dvopa Aéyera, Rev. viii. 11; ptep. called,
Mt. ii. 23; xxvi. 36; xxvii. 33; Jn. iv. 5; xi. 54; xix.
13; Acts iii. 2; vi. 9; Heb. ix.3; with €8paicri added,
Jn. xix. 13,17; [cf.v. 2 Tdf.]; applied to foreign words
translated into Greek, in the sense that is: Mt. xxvii.
33; Jn. iv. 25; xi. 16; xxi. 2; also é Aéyeras, Jn. xx. 16;
3 Aéyerat Eppnvevopevoy [L TrWH pefepy.], Jn. i. 38 (39);
Scepunv. Aéyerat, Acts ix. 36. f. to speak out, speak
of, mention: ri, Eph. v. 12 (with which cf. dxvd kai héyew,
Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 c.); [Mk. vii. 36 T Trtxt.WH. On
the apparent ellipsis of Néyw in 2 Co. ix. 6, cf. W. 596
sq. (555) ; B. 394 (338). Comp. : avtt-, dia- (-par), ék-,
émt-, kata-, mapa- (-pat), mpo-, gvd-A€éyw; cf. the catalogue
of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1, 60.]
Actppa [WH Aippa, see their App. p. 154 and cf. I, ¢],
-tos, 76, (ei), a remnant: Ro. xi. 5. (Hat. 1, 119;
Plut. de profect. in virtut. c. 5; for MSW, 2 Kerxis 4)
tos, -e/a, -eiov, [(cf. Lat. levis)], smooth, level: opp.
3875
* Neroupyla
to rpaxus, of ways, Lk. iii. 5. (Is. xl. 4 Alex.; Prov. ii.
20; 1S. xvii. 40; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) *
Aelww; [2 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. Airy, Tit. iii. 13 TWH
mrg.; pres. pass. Aelropa; fr. Hom. down]; ah,
trans. to leave, leave behind, forsake; pass. to be left be-
hind (prop. by one’s rival in a race, hence), a. to
lag, be inferior: év pydevi, Jas. i. 4 (Hat. 7, 8,1); [al.
associate this ex. with the two under b.]. b. to be
destitute of, to lack: with gen. of the thing, Jas. i. 5; ii.
15, (Soph., Plat., al.). 2. intrans. to be wanting o1
absent, to fail: detwer ti ron, Lk. xviii. 22; Tit. iii. 13,
(Polyb. 10, 18, 8; al.); 7d Aetrovra, the things that re-
main [so Justin Mart. apol. 1, 52, cf. 32; but al. are
wanting], Tit.i.5. [Comp.: dao-, dia-, ék-, émt-, Karta-,
€v-Kata-, Tept-, Vro-Aelmra. | *
AeToupyéw, ptcp. Aecroupyav; 1 aor. inf. Necrovpyjoa;
(fr. Necroupyds, q. V-) ; 1. in Attic, esp. the orators,
to serve the state at one’s own cost; to assume an office
which must be administered at one’s own expense; to dis-
charge a public office at one’s own cost; to render public
service to the state, (cf. Melanchthon in Apol. Confes.
August. p. 270 sq. [Corpus Reformat. ed. Bindseil (post
Bretschn.) vol. xxvii. p. 623, and I’. Francke, Conf. Luth.,
Pt. i. p. 271 note (Lips. 1846)]; Wolf, Dem. Lept. p.
Ixxxv. sqq.; Béckh, Athen. Staatshaush. i. p. 480 sqq.;
Liibker, Reallex. des class. Alterth. [or Smith, Dict. of
Grk. and Rom. Antiq.] s. v. Aetroupyia). 2. univ.
to do a service, perform a work; Vulg. ministro, [A. V.
to minister ] ; a. of the priests and Levites who were
busied with the sacred rites in the tabernacle or the
temple (so Sept. often for NW; as Num. xviii. 2; Ex.
XXviil. 31, 39; xxix. 30; Joeli. 9, etc.; several times for
jay, Num. iv. 37, 39; xvi. 9; xviii. 6 sq.; add, Sir. iv. 14
[xlv. 15; 1.14; Judith iv. 14]; 1 Mace. x. 42g [Philo,
vit. Moys. iii. 18; cf. dpiv Aecroupyodat Kk. adrot tHv det-
roupylay tav mpopyntav x. didackddwy (of bishops and
deacons), Teaching of the Twelve A post. c. 15 (cf. Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2 etc.) ]): Heb. x. 11. b. A. TO kupia,
of Christians serving Christ, whether by prayer, or by
instructing others concerning the way of salvation, or in
some other way: Acts xiii. 2; cf. De Wette adloc. cc.
of those who aid others with their resources, and re-
lieve their poverty: twit & rum, Ro. xv. 27, cf. Sir. x. 25.”
Aeroupyla, -as, 7, (fr. Necroupyéa, q. V-) ; 1. prop.
a public office which a citizen undertakes to administer at
his own expense: Plat. legg.12 p. 949 c.; Lys. p. 163, 225
Isocr. p. 391 d.; Theophr. Char. 20 (23), 5; 23 (29), 4,
and others. 2. univ. any service: of military ser-
vice, Polyb.; Diod. 1, 63. 73; of the service of work-
men, c. 21; of that done to nature in the cohabitation
of man and wife, Aristot. oec. 1, 3 p. 1343°, 20. 3. in
biblical Greek a. the service or ministry of the priests
relative to the prayers and sacrifices offered to God: Lk. i.
23; Heb. viii. 6; ix. 21, (for May, Num. viii. 22; xvi. 9;
xviii. 4; 2 Chr. xxxi. 2; Diod. 1, 21; Joseph.; [Philo de
caritat. § 1 sub fin.; al.; see Soph. Lex. s. v.]); hence
the phrase in Phil. ii. 17, explained s. v. 6ucia, b. fin.
[(cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44)]. b. a
4
NELvTOUPYLKOS
gift or benefaction, for the relief of the needy (see det
roupy€w, 2.¢.): 2 Co. ix. 12; Phil. ii. 30.*
Aevroupyukés, -7, -dv, (Aevroupyia), relating to the perform-
ance of service, employed in ministering: oxetn, Num. iv.
[12], 26, ete.; orodai, Ex. xxxi. 10, ete.; mvedpara, of
angels executing God’s behests, Heb. i. 143; also ai deur.
Tov Geod duvduers, Ignat. ad Philad. 9 (longer recension) ;
10 nav TAROos Tov dyyéAwy adTod, Tas TE OeAnuare avrov
Aetroupyovot mapectares, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34, 5, cf.
Dan. (Theodot.) vii. 10. (Not found in prof. auth.) *
Aeroupyds, -ov, 6, (fr. EPTOQ i. e. épyagouat, and unused
Aelros i. q. Aniros equiv. to Snpdcwos public, belonging to
the state (Hesych.), and this from Aews Attic for Aads),
Sept. for Nywr (Piel ptep. of NW) ; 1. a public
minister; a servant of the state: ris médews, Inserr.; of
the lictors, Plut. Rom. 26; (it has not yet been found in
its primary and proper sense, of one who at Athens as-
sumes a public office to be administered at his own ex-
pense [cf. L. and 8. s. v. I.]; see erroupyew). 2.
univ. @ minister, servant: so of military laborers, often
in Polyb.; of the servants of a king, 1 K.x.5; Sir. x. 2;
[of Joshua, Josh. i. 1 Alex.; univ. 2S. xiii. 18 (cf. 17) ];
of the servants of the priests, joined with tanpérat, Dion.
Hal. antt. 2, 73; rév dyiwv, of the temple, i. e. one busied
with holy things, of a priest, Heb. viii. 2, cf. [ Philo, alleg.
leg. iii. § 46]; Neh. x. 39; Sir. vii. 30; trav Gedy, of
heathen priests, Dion. H. 2, 22 cf. 73; Plut. mor. p.417a.;
*Inood Xptorod, of Paul likening himself to a priest, Ro.
xv. 16; plur. rev Geov, those by whom God administers
his affairs and executes his decrees: so of magistrates,
Ro. xiii. 6; of angels, Heb. i. 7 fr. Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4 [cef.
Philo de caritat. § 3]; tis xdpitos Tod Oeod, those whose
ministry the grace of God made use of for proclaiming
to men éhe necessity of repentance, as Noah, Jonah:
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 1 cf. ¢. 7; rév dméaroAov Kal dew-
Toupyov tuev THs xpelas pov, by whom ye have sent to
me those things which may minister to my needs, Phil.
ii25*
[Aepa, see Aaya. |
Aevtiov, -ov, 7d, (a Lat. word, linteum), a linen cloth,
towel (Arr. peripl. mar. rubr. 4): of the towel or apron,
which servants put on when about to work (Suet. Calig.
26), Jn. xiii. 4 sq.; with which it was supposed the
nakedness of persons undergoing crucifixion was coy-
ered, Ev. Nicod. c. 10; ef. Thilo, Cod. Apoer. p. 582 sq.*
Aerls, -id0s, 7, (Aéw@ to strip off the rind or husk, to
peel, to scale), a scale: Acts ix.18. (Sept.; Aristot. al.
[Reis LEG hi ce GH
Aempa, -as, 9, (fr. the adj. Aempés, q. v-), Hebr. ny,
leprosy [lit. morbid scaliness], a most offensive, annoy-
ing, dangerous, cutaneous disease, the virus of which
generally pervades the whole body; common in Egypt
and the Kast (Lev. xiii. sq.): Mt. viii. 3; Mk.i.42; Lk.
v. 12 sq. (Hdt., Theophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) [Cf. Oreili
in Herzog 2s. v. Aussatz; Greenhill in Bible Educator
iv. 76 sq. 174 sq.; Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto s. v.; Eders-
heim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 492 sqq.; McCl. and §. s. Well?
Aerpds, -ov, 6, (as if for Aemepds, fr. Aemis, Néros -€os,
s
376
NevKos
té, a scale, husk, bark); 1. in Grk. writ. scaly,
rough. 2. specifically, leprous, affected with leprosy,
(Sept. several times for pi¥n and yi x; [Theophr.
Cs p. 2, 6, 4] see Aémpa): Mt. viii. 2; x. 8; xi. 5; Mk. i.
40; Lk. iv. 27; vii. 22; xvii. 12; of one [(Simon)] who
had formerly been a leper, Mt. xxvi. 6; Mk. xiv. 3.*
herds, -7, -dv, (Aéww to strip off the bark, to peel),
thin; small; ro Xerrdv, a very small brass coin, equiv. to
the eighth part of an as, [A. V.a mite; cf. Alex.’s Kitto
and B.D.s. v.; ef. F. R. Conder in the Bible Educator,
iii. 179]: Mk. xii. 42; Lk. xii. 59; xxi. 2; (Alciphr. epp.
1, 9 adds xéppa; Pollux, onom. 9, 6, sect. 92, supplies
vopiopa).* -
Acvt and Aevis (T Tr (yet see below) WH Aeveis [but
Lchm. -is; see e,¢]), gen. Aevt (T Tr WH Aevei), acc.
Aeviv (T WH Aeveiv, so Tr exc. in Mk. ii. 14), [B. 21
(19); W. § 10, 1], 6, (Hebr. 4 a joining, fr. m, cf.
Gen. xxix. 34), Levi; 1. the third son of the patri-
arch Jacob by his wife Leah, the founder of the tribe of
Israelites which bears his name: Heb. vii. 5,9; [Rev. vii.
7]. 2. the son of Melchi, one of Christ’s ancestors :
LK. iii. 24. 3. the son of Simeon, also an ancestor
of Christ: Lk. iii. 29. 4. the son of Alpheus, a col-
lector of customs [(A. V. publican)]: Mk. ii. 14 [here
WH (rejected) mrg. "IdxkwBov (see their note ad loc., cf.
Weiss in Mey. on Mt. 7te Aufl. p. 2)]; Lk. v. 27, 29;
acc. to com. opinion he is the same as Matthew the
apostle (Mt. ix. 9); but cf. Grimm in the Theol. Stud.
u. Krit. for 1870 p. 727 sqq.; [their identity is denied
also by Nicholson on Matt. ix.9; yet see Patritius, De
Evangeliis, ]. i.e. i. quaest. 1; Venables in Alex.’s Kitto,
s. v. Matthew; Meyer, Com. on Matt., Intr. § 1].*
Aevirns (T WH Aeveirns [so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36; see
et,t]),-ov, 6,a@ Levite; a. oneof Levi’s posterity. _b.
in a narrower sense those were called Levites (Hebr.
ob Spo 01) who, not being of the race of Aaron, for
whom alone the priesthood was reserved, served as as-
sistants of the priests. It was their duty to keep the
sacred utensils and the temple clean, to provide the
sacred loaves, to open and shut the gates of the temple,
to sing sacred hymns in the temple, and do many other
things; so Lk. x. 32; Jn.i.19; Acts iv. 36; [(Plut. quaest.
conv. l. iv. quaest. 6,5; Philo de vit. Moys. i. § 58). See
BB.DD. s. v. Levites; Edersheim, The Temple, 2d ed.
p- 63 sqq.]*
Acvirinds [T WH Aeverr.; see et, ¢], -7, -dv, Levitical,
pertaining to the Levites: Heb. vii. 11. [Philo de vit.
Moys. iii. § 20.]*
Aevkalvw: 1 aor. édedcava [cf. W. § 18, 1 d.3 B. 41
(35)]; (aeuxés); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for P23 to
whiten, make white: ri, Mk. ix. 3; Rev. vii. 14.*
[AevkoBtoowov: Rev. xix. 14 WH mrg., al. Biaowwor
Aevx. see in Bicowos. |
Aevkéds, -7, -dv, (Aevoow to see, behold, look at; akin te
Lat. /uceo, Germ. leuchten; cf. Curtius p. 113 and § 87;
[Vaniéek p. 817]), Sept. for 5308 1. light, bright,
brilliant: ra iudria . .. NevKa os 7d Has, Mt. xvii. 2; esp.
bright or brilliant from whiteness, (dazzling) white:
Néwy
spoken of the garments of angels, and of those exalted
to the splendor of the heavenly state, Mk. xvi.5; Lk.
ix. 29; Actsi.10; Rev. iii.5; iv.4; vill; vii. 9,13;
xix. 14, (shining or white garments were worn on festive
and. state occasions, Eccles. ix. 8; cf. Heindorf on Hor.
sat. 2, 2,61); with ocei or as 6 yudv added: Mk. ix. 3
RL; Mt. xxviii. 3, (drioe Aeukdrepor xedvos, Hom. Il. 10,
437); €v Aevkois sc. iwariots (added in Rev. iii. 5; iv. 4),
Jn. xx. 12; Rev. iii. 4; cf. W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)];
used of white garments as the sign of innocence and purity
of soul, Rev. iii. 18; of the heavenly throne, Rev. xx.
ie 2. (dead) white: Mt. v. 36 (opp. to péAas) ;
Rev. i. 14; ii.17; iv.4; vi. 2; xiv. 14; xix.11; spoken
‘of the whitening color of ripening grain, Jn. iv. 35.*
Awy, -ovros, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for *9s, MN,
D2 (ayoung lion), ete.; alion; a. prop.: Heb. xi.
33; 1 Pet. v.8; Rev. iv. 7; ix. 8,17; x. 33; xiii. 2. b.
metaph. éppvcOnv ex ordpatos déovros, I was rescued out
of the most imminent peril of death, 2 Tim. iv. 17 (the
fig. does not lie in the word lion alone, but in the whole
phrase); equiv. to a brave and mighty hero: Rev. v. 5,
where there is allusion to Gen. xlix. 9; cf. Nah. ii. 13.*
AnOn, -ns, 7, (Andw to escape notice, AnPopa to forget),
[fr. Hom. down], forgetfulness: AnOnv twos AaBeiv (see
AapBave, I. 6), 2 Pet. i. 9.*
[Anpd, see Aaud. |
Anvés, -od, 7, (also 6, Gen. xxx. 38, 41 [cf. below]),
[Theoer., Diod., al.]; 1. a tub- or trough-shaped
receptacle, vat, in which grapes are trodden [A. V. wine-
press| (Hebr. ni): Rev. xiv. 20; xix. 15; ray Anvov...
Tov péyay (for R Tr mrg. trav peyddnv), Rev. xiv. 19 —a
variation in gender which (though not rare in Hebrew,
see Gi'csenius, Lehrgeb. p. 717) can hardly be matched in
Grk. writ.; cf. W. 526 (490) and his Exeget. Studd. i. p.
1153\sq.5 B:.81.(71): 2. i. q. broAnuoyv (Is. xvi. 10;
Mk. xii. 1) or mpoAnmoy (Is. v. 2), Hebr. Ip» the lower
vat, dug in the ground, into which the must or new wine
flowed from the press: Mt. xxi. 33. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Kelter; Poskoff in Schenkel iii. 513; [BB.DD. s. v.
Wine-press ].*
Nipos, -ov, 6, idle talk, nonsense: Lk. xxiv.11. (4 Mace.
v.10; Xen. an. 7,7,41; Arstph., al.; plur. joined with
mato.ai, Plat. Protag. p. 347 d.; with @dAvapiat, ib. Hipp.
maj. p. 304 b.) *
Anoris, -00, 6, (for Ajiorns fr. Ani¢opa, to plunder, and
this fr. Ion. and Epic Anis, for which the Attics use deia,
booty), [fr. Soph. and Hdt. down], @ robber; a plun-
derer, freebooter, brigand: Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48;
Lk. xxii. 52; Jn. x. 1; xviii. 40; plur., Mt. xxi. 13; xxvii.
88,44; Mk. xi.17; xv. 27; Lk. x. 30, 36; xix. 46; Jn.
x. 8; 2Co. xi. 26. [Not to be confounded with kdérrns
thief, one who takes property by stealth, (although the
distinction is obscured in A. V.); cf. Trench § xliv.]*
Aes (LT Tr WH Ajpyis, see M, 2), ews, 9, (AapBdve,
AnWouar), [fr. Soph. and Thue. down], a receiving: Phil.
iv. 15, on which pass. see ddars, 1.*
May (in Hom. and Ion. inv), [for A-Aav, Ado to desire ;
ef. Curtius § 532], adv., greatly, exceedingly: Mt. ii. 16;
3717
MOakw
iv. 8; viii. 28; xxvii.14; Mk.i. 35; ix.3; xvi.2; Lk.
xxiii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 15; 2Jn.4; 3Jn.3; (2 Mace. xi. 1;
4 Mace. viii. 16; Tob. ix. 4, ete.; for tik, Gen. i. 31; iv.
53 158. xi. 15); Alav ek mepioood, exceedingly beyond
measure, Mk. vi. 51 [WH om. Tr br. éxmepic.]. See iep-
diav.*
AiBavos, -ov, 6, (more rarely 4 [cf. Lob. u. i.]); 1.
the frankincense-tree (Pind., Hdt., Soph., Eur., Theophr.,
al.). 2. frankincense (Hebr. 1339; Lev. ii. 1 sq.;
16; Is. lx. 6, ete.): Mt. ii. 11; Rev. xviii. 13; (Soph.,
Theophr., al.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 187; [Vanitek,
Fremdworter, s. v. On frankincense see esp. Birdwood
in the Bible Educator, i. 328 sqq. 374 sqq.]*
ABavwrds, -0d, 6, (A(Bavos) ; 1. in prof. auth.
Srankincense, the gum exuding ék tod AuBdvov, (1 Chr. ix.
29; Hdt., Menand., Eur., Plat., Diod., Hdian., al.). 2.
a censer (which in prof. auth. is 4 AiBavwris [or rather
-tpis, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 255]): Rev. viii. 3, 5.*
ALBeptivos, -ov, 6, a Lat. word, libertinus, i.e. either one
who has been liberated from slavery, a freedman, or the son
of a freedman (as distinguished fr. ingenuus, i. e. the son
of a free man): 9 ouvayaryy Aeyouern (or Tov Aeyomevav
Tdf.) ABeprivav, Acts vi. 9. Some suppose these liber-
tini [A.V. Libertines] to have been manumitted Roman
slaves, who having embraced Judaism had their synar
gogue at Jerusalem ; and they gather as much from Tac.
Ann. 2, 85, where it is related that four thousand libertini,
infected with the Jewish superstition, were sent into Sar-
dinia. Others, owing to the names Kvupnvatwy kal ’AXe-
£avdpéov that follow, think that a geographical mean-
ing is demanded for AiBepr., and suppose that Jews are
spoken of, the dwellers in Libertum, a city or region
of proconsular Africa. But the existence of a city or
region called Libertum is a conjecture which has
nothing to rest on but the mention of a bishop with the
prefix “libertinensis” at the synod of Carthage A. p.
411. Others with far greater probability appeal to Philo,
leg. ad Gaium § 23, and understand the word as denot-
ing Jews who had been made captives by the Romans
under Pompey but were afterwards set free; and who,
although they had fixed their abode at Rome, had built
at their own expense a synagogue at Jerusalem which
they frequented when in that city. The name Libertines
adhered to them to distinguish them from the free-born
Jews who had subsequently taken up their residence at
Rome. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Libertiner; Hausrath in
Schenkel iv. 38 sq.; [B. D. s. v. Libertines. Evidence
seems to have been discovered of the existence of a
“ synagogue of the libertines” at Pompeii; cf. De Rossi,
Bullet. di Arch. Christ. for 1864, pp. 70, 92 sq.]*
A.Bin, -ns, 4, Libya, a large region of northern Africa,
bordering on Egypt. In that portion of it which had
Cyrene for its capital and was thence called Libya Cy-
renaica (1 mpos Kupnyny AiBvy, Joseph. antt. 16, 6, 15 7
A. 9 kara Kupnyny [q- v.], Acts ii. 10) dwelt many Jews
(Joseph. antt. 14, 7,2; 16, 6,15; b.j. 7,11; ¢ Apion.
2, 4 [where cf. Miiller’s notes]): Acts ii. 10.*
AOdLwo; 1 aor. éAidaca; 1 aor. pass. <ABaoOnv; (AiBos);
rALOwos
to stone; i. e. a. to overwhelm or bury with stones,
(lapidibus cooperio, Cic.): twd, of stoning, which was a
Jewish mode of punishment, (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Steini-
gung; [B. D.s. v. Punishment, HI. a.1]): Jn. x. 31-
33 (where AddCere and AcOdfopuev are used of the act of
beginning ; [cf. W.§ 40,2a.; B. 205 (178)]); In. xi. 8;
Heb. xi. 37. b. to pelt one with stones, in order either
to wound or to kill him: Acts xiv. 19; pass., Acts v. 26
[ef. W.505 (471); B.242(208)]; 2Co.xi. 25. (Aristot.,
Polyb., Strab.; Acdagew év AiGous, 2 S. xvi. 6.) [Comp. :
cata-Aba¢o. | *
AlOivos, -y, -ov, (Aldos) ; fr. Pind. down; of stone: Jn.
iO) 2) COs lions mivevenx Oe
AvG0-Borgw, -6; impf. 3 pers. plur. eAvdoBddovy; 1 aor.
€\boBdAnoa; Pass., pres. AvOoBorodpar; 1 fut. AcGoBory-
Onoopa; (AGoBdXos, and this fr. Atos and BdadAw [cf. W.
102 (96); 25, 26]); Sept. for po and DI; ig. Addfo
(q: V.), to stone; i.e. a. to kill by stoning, to stone
(of a species of punishment, see AcGdfw): ruva, Mt. xxi.
35; xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; Acts vii. 58 sq.; pass., Jn.
vill. 5; Heb. xii. 20. b. to pelt with stones: twa,
Mk. xii. 4 [Rec.]; Acts xiv. 5. ((Diod. 17, 41,8]; Plut.
mor. p. 1011 e.) *
Al8os, -ov, 6, Sept. for 128; [fr. Hom. down]; a stone:
of small stones, Mt. iv. 6; vii. 9; Lk. iii. 8; iv. [3], 11;
xi. 115 xxii. 41; Jn. viii. 7; plur., Mt. iii. 9; iv.3; Mk.
v. 5; Lk. iii. 8; xix. 40; Jn. viii. 59; x. 31; of a large
stone, Mt. xxvii. 60,66; xxviii. 2; Mk.xv.46; xvi. 3 sq.;
Lk. xxiv. 2; Jn. xi. 38 sq. 41; xx.1} of building stones,
Mt. xxi. 42,44 [T om. LWH Tr mre. br. the vs.]; xxiv.
25° Mike x10 5 rai. faq. 5) Lk xix. 445 xx 7 eqs xx:
5sq.; Acts iv. 11; 1 Pet. ii.7; metaph. of Christ: AéOos
dxpoyeuaios (q. v.), éxAextos (cf. 2 Esdr. v. 8), €vreos, 1
Pet. ii. 6 (Is. xxviii. 16); ¢@v (see (dw, II.b.), 1 Pet. ii. 4;
Aidos mpookdpuparos, one whose words, acts, end, men (so
stumble at) take such offence at, that they reject him
and thus bring upon themselves ruin, ibid. 8 (7); Ro.
ix. 33; of Christians: idor (ayres, living stones (see
(do, u. s.), of which the temple of God is built, 1 Pet. ii.
5; of the truths with which, as with building materials,
a teacher builds Christians up in wisdom, AiOou ripuor,
costly stones, 1 Co. iii. 12. AiOos pudcxds, Mk. ix. 42 RG;
Lk. xvii. 2 LT Tr WH, cf. Rev. xviii. 21. of precious
stones, gems: AiO. ripwos, Rev. xvii. 43 xviii. 12,16; xxi.
11,19, (2S. xii. 30; 1 K. x. 2,11); taoms, Rev. iv. 535
evdedupévor Aidov (for RG T Aivov) cabapdv, Rev. xv. 6
LTrtxt.WH (Ezek. xxviii. 13 mavra [or nav] didov
xpnoror evdedera; [see WH. Intr. ad]. c.]); but (against
the reading ior) [cf. Scrivener, Plain Introduction ete.
p- 658]. spec. stones cut in a certain form: stone tab-
lets (engraved with letters), 2 Co. iii. 7; statues of idols,
Acts xvii. 29 (Deut. iv. 28; Ezek. xx. 32).*
\u86-r-rpwros, -ov, (fr. AiGos and the verbal adj. orpwrds
fr. orpwvvupt), spread (paved) with stones (vupdeiov, Soph.
Antig. 1204-5); rd Acd., substantively, a mosaic or tes-
sellated pavement: so of a place near the praetorium or
palace at Jerusalem, Jn. xix. 13 (see TaBBaba); of places
in the outer courts of the temple, 2 Chr. vii. 3; Joseph.
878
inp
b. j. 6, 1, 8 and 3, 2; of an apartment whose pavement
consists of tessellated work, Epict. diss. 4, 7, 37, cf. Esth.
i. 6; Suet. Jul. Caes. 46; Plin. h. n. 36, 60 cf. 64.*
Aikpdo, -G: fut. Accpnow; (Ackuds a winnowing-van) ;
1. to winnow, cleanse away the chaff from grain by win-
nowing, (Hom., Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.). 2. in a
sense unknown to prof. auth., to scatter (opp. to cvvaye,
Jer. xxxi. (or xxxviii.) 10; add, Is. xvii. 13; Am. ix.
Ne 3. to crush to pieces, grind to powder: tiva, Mt.
xxi. 44 [RGL br. WH br.]; Lk. xx. 18; cf. Dan. ii. 44
[Theodot.]; Sap. xi.19(18). [But in Dan.1.c. it repre-
sents the Aphel of 410 jinem facere, and on Sap. l. c. see
Grimm. Many decline to follow the rendering of the
Vulg. (conterere, comminuere), but refer the exx. under
this head to the preceding. ] *
Amd, so Tdf. ed. 7, for Aaya, q. v-
Awpty, -évos, 6, [allied with Aiwom, q. v.; fr. Hom. down],
a harbor, haven: Acts xxvii. 8,12; see xadot Atpeéves, p.
322%"
Alpvn, -7s, 9, (fr. AeiBw to pour, pour out [ef. Curtius
§ 541]), [fr. Hom. down], a lake: X. Tewnoaper [q. v-],
Lk. v. 1; absol., of the same, Lk. v. 2; viii. 22 sq. 33;
tov mupés, Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10, 14 sq.; xavopévp rupi,
Rev. xxi. 8.*
Aupés, -od, 6, (and # in Doric and later writ.; so L T
Tr WH in Lk. xv. 14; Acts xi. 28; so, too, in Is. viii.
21; 1 K. xviii. 2; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 188; [L. and S.
s. v. init.; WH. App. p. 157°}; B.12 (11); W. 63 (62)
(cf. 36], and 526 (490)); Sept. very often for 19; hun-
ger: Lk. xv. 17; Ro. viii. 35; €v Auw@ x. Siver, 2 Co. xi.
27; Xen. mem.1, 4,13; i. q. scarcity of harvest, famine:
Lk. iv. 25; xv.14; Acts vii. 11; xi. 28 [ef. B. 81 (71)];
Rev. vi. 8; xviii. 8; Aol, famines in divers lands, Mk.
xiii. 8; Acuot x. Aooi, Mt. xxiv. 7 [L T Tr txt. WH om.
k. Aows.]3 Lk. xxi. 11; Theoph. ad Autol. 2,9; the two
are joined in the sing. in Hes. opp. 226; Hdt. 7, 171;
Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19; Plut. de Is. et Osir. 47.*
Aivov (Treg. Aivov [so R Gin Mt. as below], incorrect-
ly, for ¢ is short; [ef. Lipseus, Gramm. Untersuch. p.
42]),-ov, rd, Sept. several times for NAWS, in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down, flax: Ex. ix. 31; linen, as clothing, Rev.
xv.6 RG TTrmrg.; the wick of a lamp, Mt. xii. 20, after
Issxlii3.*
Alvos (not Aivos [with RG Tr]; see Passow for L.
and 8.]s.v.; ef. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 42), -ov,
6, Linus, one of Paul’s Christian associates ; ace. to eccl.
tradition bishop of the church at Rome (cf. Hase, Po-
lemik, ed. 3 p. 131; Lipstws, Chronologie d. rom. Bischofe,
p- 146; (Dict. of Chris. Biog. s. v.]): 2 Tim. iv. 21.*
Aurrapés, -d, -dv, (Aiwa [or rather, Aimos grease, akin to
ddeipo)]); fr. Hom. down; fat: ra Aurapd (joined with
Ta Aapumpd, q. V-) things which pertain to a sumptuous
and delicate style of living [A. V. dainty], Rev. xviii.
14.*
Alrpa, -as, 7, a pound, a weight of twelve ounces: Jn.
xii. 3; xix. 39. [Polyb. 22, 26,19; Diod. 14, 116, 7; Plut.
Tib. et G. Grac. 2, 3; Joseph. antt. 14, 7,1; al.]*
Ap, ABds, 6, (fr. AeiB@ [to pour forth], because it
Noyla 3
brings moisture) ; 1. the SW. wind: Hat. 2, 25;
Polyb. 10, 10, 3; al. 2. the quarter of the heavens
whence the SW. wind blows: Acts xxvii. 12 [on which
see Brew, 3 and xara, II. 1 ¢.] (Gen. xiii. 14; xx. 1;
Num. ii. 10; Deut. xxxiii. 23).*
Aoyla, -as, 7, (fr. Néyew to collect), (Vulg. collecta), a col-
lection: of money gathered for the relief of the poor, 1
Co. xvi. 1 sq. (Not found in prof. auth. [ef. W. 25].)*
Aoy(Lopar; impf. AoyeCouqv; 1 aor. €Aoyeodunv; adepon.
verb with 1 aor. pass. éhoyioOnv and 1 fut. pass. Aoyer On-
vouat; in bibl. Grk. also the pres. is used passively (in
prof. auth. the pres. ptep. is once used so, in Hdt. 3, 95;
(ef. Veitch s. v.; W. 259 (243); B.52 (46)]); (Adyos) ;
Sept. for 1m; [a favorite word with the apostle Paul,
being used (exclusive of quotations) some 27 times in his
Epp., and only four times in the rest of the N. T.]; 1.
(rationes conferre) to reckon, count, compute, calculate,
count over ; hence a. to take into account, to make ac-
count of: ri tun, Ro. iv. 3, [4]; metaph. to pass to one’s
account, to impute, [A. V. reckon]: ri, 1 Co. xiii. 5; revi
rt, 2 Tim. iv. 16 [A. V. lay to one’s charge]; twit Sixao-
cuvny, dpaptiav, Ro. iv. 6, [8 (yet here Lmrg. T Tr WH
txt. read od) |; ra mapamrwpara, 2 Co. v. 193; in imitation
of the Hebr. 5 IWMI, Aoyi¢erai re (or tis) eis Te (equiv.
to eis 76 or ore etvai re), a thing is reckoned as or to be
something, i. e. as availing for or equivalent to something,
as having the like force and weight, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom.
voloi. p-137; [ef. W. § 29,3 Note a; 228 (214); B.
§ 131, 7 Rem.]): Ro. ii. 26; ix. 8; ets ovdév, Acts xix.
27; Is.xl.17; Dan. [(Theodot. os) ] iv. 32; Sap. iii. 17;
ix. 6; 9 miotis eis dixatocvyny, Ro. iv. 3, 5, 9-11, 22 sq.
24; Gal. iii.6; Jas. ii. 23; Gen. xv.6; Ps. cv. (evi.) 31;
1 Mace. ii. 52. b. i. q. to number among, reckon with:
Twa pera twov, Mk. xv. 28 [yet GT WH om. Tr br. the
vs.] and Lk. xxii. 37, after Is. liii. 12, where Sept. ev
Tols avopous. ce. to reckon or account, and treat accord-
ingly : red Ss re, Ro. viii. 36 fr. Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23; ef.
B. 151 (182); [W. 602 (560)]; [Ro. vi. 11 foll. by
ace. w. inf., but GLom. Trbr. the inf.; cf. W. 321
(302) ]. 2. (in animo rationes conferre) to reckon
inwardly, count up or weigh the reasons, to deliberate, [A.
V. reason]: mpds éavtovs, one addressing himself to an-
other, Mk. xi. 31 R G (pos evavrov, with myself, in my
mind, Plat. apol. p. 21 d.). 3. by reckoning up all the
reasons to gather or infer; i.e. a. to consider, take ac-
count, weigh, meditate on: ri, a thing, with a view to obtain-
ing it, Phil. iv. 8; foll. by dru, Heb. xi. 19; [Jn. xi. 50
(Rec. Scadoy.)]; todro foll. by dre, 2 Coxniit b. to
suppose, deem, judge: absol. 1 Co. xiii. 11; as Aoylfopat,
1 Pet. v.12; ri, anything relative to the promotion of the
gospel, 2 Co. iii. 5; ri els twa (as respects one) vmép
(rodro) & etc. to think better of one than agrees with
what ete. [‘ account of one above that which’ etc.], 2 Co.
xii. 6; foll. by drt, Ro. viii. 18; rodro foll. by or, Ro. ii.
3; 2 Co. x. 7; foll. by an inf. belonging to the subject,
2 Co. xi. 5; fofl. by an acc. with inf., Ro. iii. 28; xiv.
14; Phil. iii. 13 [cf. W. 321 (302)]; twa ds twa, to hold
[A. V. ‘count’] one as, 2 Co. x. 2 [cf. W. 602 (560)];
—
9 oytos
with a preparatory ovrws preceding, 1 Co. iv. 1. Cc.
to determine, purpose, decide, [cf. American ‘ calculate "],
foll. by an inf. (Eur. Or. 555): 2 Co. x. 2. [Comp.:
ava-, d:a-, mapa-, avd-AoyiCopat. | *
Aoytkds, -7, -dv, (fr. Adyos reason), [Tim. Locr., Den.,
al.], rational (Vulg. rationabilis); agreeable to reason,
Sollowing reason, reasonable: Xatpeia Aoy:xy, the worship
which is rendered by the reason or soul, [‘ spiritual ’],
Ro. xii. 1 (Aoyexy Kai dvaipaxros mpooopa, of the offer-
ing which angels present to God, Test. xii. Patr. [test.
Levi § 3] p. 547 ed. Fabric.; [cf. Athenag. suppl. pro
Christ. § 13 fin.]); ré Aoy:xdv yada, the milk which nour-
ishes the soul (see ydAa), 1 Pet. ii. 2 (Aoyex?) tpopy, Eus.
h. e. 4, 23 fin.).*
Adytov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of Adyos [so Bleek (on Heb. v.
12) et al.; al. neut. of Adyos (Mey. on Ro. iii. 2)]), prop.
a little word (so Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 969 (973)), a brief
utterance, in prof. auth. a divine oracle (doubtless because
oracles were generally brief); Hdt., Thuc., Arstph.,
Eur.; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; 8, 30,6; Diod. 2,14; Ael. v.h.
2,41; of the Sibylline oracles, Diod. p. 602 [fr. 1. 34];
Plut. Fab. 4; in Sept. for ,wn the breast-plate ot the high
priest, which he wore when he consulted Jehovah, Ex.
XXvill. 15; xxix. 5, etc.; [once for pk, of the words of
a man, Ps. xviii. (xix.) 15]; but chiefly for 7px of
any utterance of God, whether precept or promise; [cef.
Philo de congr. erud. grat. § 24; de profug. § 11 sub
fin.]; of the prophecies of God in the O. T., Joseph.
b. j. 6, 5, 43; vopous cat Adyia Oeomiabevra Sia mpopytav
kal Upvous, Philo vit. contempl. § 3; 1d Adyiov Tod mpo-
gpyrov (Moses), vit. Moys. iii. 35, ef. [23, and] de praem,
et poen. § 1 init.; ra deca Adya, the ten commandments
of God or the decalogue, in Philo, who wrote a special
treatise concerning them (Opp. ed. Mang. ii. p. 180
sqq- [ed. Richter iv. p. 246 sqq.]); [Constit. Apost. 2,
36 (p. 63, 7 ed. Lagarde) ]; Euseb. h. e. 2,18. In the
N. T. spoken of the words or utterances of God: of the
contents of the Mosaic law, Acts vii. 38; with rov Geod
or 6eod added, of his commands in the Mosaic law and
his Messianic promises, Ro. iii. 2, cf. Philippi and Um-
breit ad loc.; of the substance of the Christian religion,
Heb. v. 12; of the utterances of God through Christian
teachers, 1 Pet. iv. 11. (In eccel. writ. Xdya rod Kupiov
is used of Christ’s precepts, by Polye. ad Philipp. 7, 1;
kupiaka Adyta Of the sayings and discourses of Christ
which are recorded in the Gospels, by Papias in Euseb.
h. e. 3, 39; Phot. c. 228 p. 248 [18 ed. Bekk.]; [ra Adyta
t. Ocod] of the words and admonitions of God in the
sacred Scriptures, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 1 [where par-
allel with ai fepat ypapat], cf. 62,3; [and ra Aéy. simply,
like ai ypadat, of the New T. in the interpol. ep. of Ign.
ad Smyrn. 3]. Cf. Schwegler [(also Heinichen)], Index
iv. ad Euseb. h. e. s. v. Adyrov; [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. and
Lghtft. in the Contemp. Rev. for Aug. 1875, p. 399 sqq.
On the general use of the word cf. Bleek, Br. a. d. Hebr.
iii. pp. 114-117].) *
Aédytos, -ov, (Adyos), in class. Grk. 1. learned, a man
of letters, skilled in literature and the arts; esp. versed
Norylo [40S
in history and antiquities. 2. skilled in speech, elo-
quent: so Acts xviii. 24 [which, however, al. refer to 1
(finding its explanation in the foll. Suvards xrh.)]. The
use of the word is fully exhibited by Lobeck ad Phryn.
p- 198. [(Hdt., Eur., al.)]*
Aoytorpss, -ov, 6, (AoyiCopar) ; 1. a reckoning, com-
putation. 2. a reasoning: such as is hostile to the
Christian faith, 2 Co. x. 4 (5)[A. V. imaginations }. 3.
a judgment, decision: such as conscience passes, Ro. ii.
15 [A. V. thoughts]. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., al. ;
Sept. for NawNn, as Prov. vi. 18; Jer. xi. 19; Ps. xxxii.
(xxxiii.) 10.)*
Aoyopaxéw, -&; (fr. Aoyoudyxos, and this fr. Adyos and
payoua); to contend about words; contextually, to wrangle
about empty and trifling matters: 2'Tim. ii. 14. (Not
found in prof. auth.) *
Aoyopax ta, -as, 7, (Aoyouayéw), dispute about words, war
of words, or about trivial and empty things: plur. 1 Tim.
vi. 4. (Not found in prof. auth.) *
Adyos, -ov, 6, (Aéyw), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for
727, also for 178 and 91; prop. a collecting, collection,
(see Aéyw), — and that, as well of those things which
are put together in thought, as of those which, having
been thought i. e. gathered together in the mind, are
expressed in words. Accordingly, a twofold use of
the term is to be distinguished: one which relates to
speaking, and one which relates to thinking.
I. As respects SPEECH: 1. a word, yet not in
the grammatical sense (i. q. vocabulum, the mere name
of an object), but language, voz, i. e. a word which, ut-
tered by the living voice, embodies a conception or
idea; (hence it differs from pjya and émos [q. v.; cf.
also Aadé@, ad init.]): Heb. xii. 19; daroxpiOjvar Aédyov,
Mt. xxii. 46; etmety Adym, Mt. viii. 8 [Rec. Adyov (ef.
eizov, 3a. fin.)]; Lk. vii. 7; Aadjoae wévTe, pupiovs, do-
yous, 1 Co. xiv. 19; diSdvar Adyor eVonpov, to utter a dis-
tinct word, intelligible speech, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eimeiv Aéyor
kara twos, to speak a word against, to the injury of, one,
Mt. xii. 32; also ets ruva, Lk. xii. 10; to drive out de-
mons Adyw, Mt. viii. 16; emepwray twa ev Adyors ikavois:
Lk. xxiii. 9; of the words of a conversation, dvriBaddew
Adyous, Lk. xxiv. 17. 2. what some one has said;
a saying ; a. univ.: Mt. xix. 22 [Tom.]; Mk. v. 36
[ef. B. 302 (259) note]; vii. 29; Lk.i. 29; xx. 20; xxii.
61 [Trmrg. WH pyyaros]; Jn. ii. 22; iv. 39, 50; vi. 60;
vil. 36; xv. 20; xvili.9; xix.8; Acts vii. 29; 6 Aoyos
ovros, this (twofold) saying (of the people), Lk. vii. 17,
cf. 16; rdv adrov Aéyov cimov, Mt. xxvi. 44; [Mk. xiv.
39]; mayWevew tid ev Ady, in a word or saying which
they might elicit from him and turn into an accusation,
Mt. xxii. 15; dypevew twa oyg, i. e. by propounding a
question, Mk. xii. 13; plur., Lk. i. 20; Acts v. 5, 24;
with gen. of the contents: 6 X. émayyeAlas, Ro. ix. 9;
6X. THs dpkopacias, Heb. vii. 28; X. mapakhijoeas, Acts
xiii. 155 6X. ris paprupias, Rev. xii. 11; of X. ms Tpo-
fyreias, Rev. i. 3 [Tdf. rov d.]; xxii. 6 sq. 10, 18; 6 mpo-
pyrtixds Adyos, the prophetic promise, Golleuvely of the
sum of the O. T. prophecies, particularly the Messianic,
380
Aoryos
2 Pet. i. 19; of the sayings and statements of teachers:
of Adyot obrot, the sayings previously related, Mt. vii. 24
[here L Tr WH br. rodr.], 26; Lk. ix. 28; of Adyor rwos,
the words, commands, counsels, promises, etc., of any
teacher, Mt. x. 14; xxiv. 35; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 44;
Jn. xiv. 24; Acts xx. 35; Adyou ddnOwoi, Rev. xix. 9; xxi.
5; motot, Rev. xxii. 6; kevoi, Eph. v. 6: mdacroi, 2 Pet.
ii. 3 [ef. W. 217 (204)]; b. of the sayings of
God; a. i. gq. decree, mandate, order: Ro. ix. 28;
with rod Geod added, 2 Pet. iii. 5, 7 [R* G Tr txt.J; 62.
tod Geod éyévero mpos twa (a phrase freq. in the O. T.),
Jn. x. 35. B. of the moral precepts given by God in
the O. T.: Mk. vii. 18; [Mt. xv. 6 L Tr WH txt.]; Ro.
xiii. 9; Gal. v. 14, (cf. of déka Ad-yot, [Ex. xxxiv. 28 ; Deut.
x. 4 (cf. pyyara, iv. 13); Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 35;
de decalog. § 9]; Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 5 [cf. 5, 5]). y:
i. gq. promise: 6X. Tis axons (equiv. to 6 dxovaGeis), Heb.
iv. 2; 6X. tod Oeod, Ro. ix. 6; plur. Ro. iii. 4; univ. a
divine declaration recorded in the O. T., Jn. xii. 88; xv.
25; 1 Co. xv. 54. 8. dia Adyouv Geod ete. through
prayer in which the language of the O. T. is employed:
1 Tim. iv. 5; cf. De Wette and Huther ad loc. €.
6 Aoyos Tod Geov, as NM? 1371 often in the O. T. prophets,
an oracle or utterance by which God discloses, to the proph-
ets or through the prophets, future events: used collec-
tively of the sum of such utterances, Rev. i. 2,9; cf.
Diisterdieck and Bleek ad Il. ce. c. what is de-
clared, a thought, declaration, aphorism, (Lat. sententia) :
Tov Aoyov Tovroy (reference is made to what follows, so
that ydp in vs. 12 is explicative), Mt. xix. 11; a@ dictum,
sera or weighty saying: 1 Tim. i.15; iii. 1; 2 Tim. ii.
; Tit. iil. 8; i. q. proverb, Jn. iv. 37 (as sometimes in
tee Grk., e. g. [Aeschyl. Sept. adv. Theb. 218]; 6 za-
Aatds Adyos, Plat. Phaedr. p. 240c¢.; conviv. p. 195 b.;
lege. 6 p. 757 a.; Gorg. p. 499 ¢c.; verum est Savhiina
quod memoratur, ubi amici, ibi opes, Plaut. True. 4, 4, 32;
add, Ter. Andr. 2, 5, 15; al.). 3. discourse (Lat. ora-
tio); a. the act of speaking, speech: Acts xiv.123; 2
Co. x. 10; Jas. iii. 2; dua Adyou, by word of mouth, Acts
XV. 27; opp. to dv’ émuarodGy, 2 Th. ii. 15; 81a Adyou moA-
od, Acts xv. 32; Ady@ woAAG, Acts xx. 2; epi ob mods
juiv 6 Adyos, of whom we have many things to say, Heb.
v.11}; 6 Adyos tpaev, Mt. v. 37; Col. iv. 6; X. xodakelas, 1
Th. ii. 5. Adyos is distinguished from codia in 1 Co. ii.
1; fr. dvaorpopy, 1 Tim. iv. 12; fr. Sdvapes, 1 Co. iv. 19
sq.3)d The i255 dr. epyor, Rosxve 1852) Con, 1s iCol;
ili. 17; fr. gpyov x. ddnOeca, 1 Jn. iii. 18 (see epyov, 3
p- 248° bot.) ; ovSevds Adyou riviov, not worth mentioning
(Adyou a&ov, Hdt. 4, 28; cf. Germ. der Rede werth), i.e.
a thing of no value, Acts xx. 24 T Tr WH (see II. 2
below). b. i. q. the faculty of speech: Eph. vi. 19;
skill and practice in speaking: iStatns TG Aéy@ arn od
Th yrooes, 2 Co. xi. 6; duvards ev épyw x. Adye, Lk. xxiv.
19 (dvdpas Adym Suvarovs, Diod. 13, 101); Adyos codias
or yyooews, the art of speaking to the purpose about
things pertaining to wisdom or knowledge, 1 Co. xii.
8. c. a kind (or style) of speaking: év mavti A\éye,
1 Co. i. 5 [A. V. utterance]. d. continuous speak
Aoyos
ing, discourse, such as in the N. T. is characteristic of
teachers: Lk. iv. 32, 36; Jn. iv. 41; Acts iv. 4 (cf.
lil, 12-26); xx. 7; 1 Co. i. 17; ii.1; plur., Mt. vii. 28; xix.
1; xxvi. 1; Lk. ix. 26; Actsii.40; duvards év Adyots kK.
epyos adtod, Acts vii. 22. Hence, the thought of the
subject being uppermost, e. instruction: Col. iv.
3; Tit. ii.8; 1 Pet. iii. 1; joined with 8Sackadia, 1 Tim.
v.17; with a gen. of the teacher, Jn. v. 24; viii. 52; xv.
20; xvii. 20; Acts ii.41; 1 Co. ii4; 2Co.i.18 (ef. 19);
6 Adyos 6 euds, In. viii. 31, 37, 43, 51; xiv. 23; rin Adyo,
with what instruction, 1 Co. xv. 2 (where construe, ei
karéxete, tim Adyw etc.; cf. B. §§ 139, 58; 151, 20);
i. q. xnpuyua, preaching, with gen. of the obj.: X. ddn-
' Ocias, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i. 18; 6 A. ris dAnOetas, Col. i. 5;
Eph, i.13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; rijs karaddayjs, 2 Co. v.19; 6
A. Tis TwTnpias TavTns, Concerning this salvation (i. e. the
saivation obtained through Christ) [cf. W. 237 (223); B.
162 (141)], Acts xiii. 26; 6 Adyos tis BaciNelas (rod Geov),
Mt. xiii. 19; rod cravpod, 1 Co. i. 18; 6 ris dpyas Tod
Xpicrod Aédyos, the first instruction concerning Christ [ef.
B. 155 (136); W.188 (177) ], Heb. vi.1. Hence 4.
in an objective sense, what is communicated by instruc-
tion, doctrine: univ. Acts xviii. 15; 6 Ady. airav, 2 Tim.
ii. 17; plur. quérepor Abyor, 2 Tim. iv. 153 dSyaivovres
Adyo, 2 Tim. i.13; with a gen. of obj. added, rod xupiov,
1 Tim. vi. 3; rhs ricrews, the doctrines of faith [see
miorts, 1c. 8.],1 Tim. iv. 6. specifically, the doctrine con-
cerning the attainment through Christ of salvation in the
kingdom of God: simply, Mt. xiii. 20-23; Mk. iv. 14-20;
vili. 32; xvi. 20; Lk.i. 2; viii. 12; Acts viii.4; x.44;
il OP EVs 20 se x<Vildel sieGral-pvinOsieleilene 1 4eeeteo hea,
6; 2 Tim. iv. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 8; rov Adyor, dv dméoreure Trois
ete. the doctrine which he commanded to be delivered
to ete. Acts x. 36 [but L WH txt. om. Tr br. 6v; cf. W.
§ 62, 3fin.; B. § 131, 13]; rov Adyov dxovew, Lk. viii. 15;
Jn. xiv. 24; Actsiv.4; 1 Jn. ii. 7; Aadeiv, Jn. xv. 3 (see
other exx. s. v. Nadéw, 5 sub fin.) ; daewBeiv rH X., 1 Pet.
ii. 8; iii. 1; dvdayy microd Adyov, Tit. i. 9; with gen. of
the teacher: 6 A. airay, Acts ii. 41; with gen. of the
author: rov Oeov, Lk. v.13; viii. 11, 21; xi. 28; Jn. xvii.
6,14; 1 Co. xiv. 36; 2 Co. iv. 2; Col.i. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 9;
Ritsin Shells Opebleb.xdiing +) a dnsi.10% 155, 4eeKev.
vi. 9; xx. 4; very often in the Acts: iv. 29, 31; vi. 2, 7;
Vill. 14; xi. 1,19; xii. 24; xiii. 5, 7, 44,46; xvii. 13; xviii.
11; opp. to X. dvOporwr [B. § 151, 14], 1 Th. ii. 13; Adyos
(av Oeod, 1 Pet. i. 23; 6 A. rod Kupiov, Acts vill. 253 xiii.
48 [(WH txt. Tr mrg. cod) ] sq.; xv. 35 sq.3 xix. 10, 20;
1 Th.i. 8; 2 Th. iii. 1; rod Xpiorod, Col. iii. 16; Rev. iii.
8; with gen. of apposition, rod evayyedlov, Acts xv. 7;
with gen. of the obj., r7s xdpitos Tod Oeod, Acts xiv. 3;
xx. 32; Suxavocdyns (see Sixatocvyn, 1 a.), Heb. v. 13;
with gen. of quality, 77s (7s, containing in itself the
true life and imparting it to men, Phil. ii. 16. 5.
anything reported in speech; a narration, narrative: of
a written narrative, a continuous account of things
done, Acts i. 1 (often soin Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down [cf.
L. and S.s. v. A. IV.]); @ fictitious narrative, a story,
Mt. xxviii. 15, cf. 13. report (in a good sense): 6 Ady.
381
oyos
the news concerning the success of the Christian cause,
Acts xi. 22; mepi twos, Lk. v.15; rumor, i.e. current
story, Jn. xxi. 23; Adyov yew twds, to have the (unmer-
ited) reputation of any excellence, Col. ii. 23 (so Xéyos
exe tes foll. by an inf., Hdt. 5,66; Plat. epin. p. 987 b.;
[see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. (ef. L. and S. s. v. A.
III. 3))). 6. matter under discussion, thing spoken
of, affair: Mt. xxi. 24; Mk. xi. 29; Lk. xx. 3; Acts viii.
21; xv.6,and often in Grk. writ. [L. and S.s. v. A.
VIII.]; @ matter in dispute, case, suit at law, (as 737 in
Exod. xviii. 16; xxii. 8): €yew Adyov mpos twa, to have
a ground of action against any one, Acts xix. 38, cf.
Kypke ad loc.; mapexrds Adyou mopveias ([cf. II. 6 below]
mt 123 [-9y. 3 or] 129, Delitzsch), Mt. v. 32; [xix.
9LWHurg.]. 7. thing spoken of or talked about;
event; deed, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down): 8ta-
pnpiCew rov Aoyor, to blaze abroad the occurrence, Mk.
i. 45; plur. Lk.i.4 (as often in the O. T.; pera rods
Adyous rovrovs, 1 Mace. vii. 33).
II. Its use as respects the minD alone, Lat. ratio; i.
G 1. reason, the mental faculty of thinking, medi-
tating, reasoning, calculating, etc.: once so in the phrase
6 Ndyos Tov Geod, of the divine mind, pervading and nat-
ing all things by its proper force, Heb. iv. 12. 2.
account, i. e. regard, consideration : hdyov moteia bai twos,
to have regard for, make account of a thing, care for
a thing, Acts xx. 24 RG (Job xxii. 4; Hdt. 1, 4. 13
etc.; Aeschyl. Prom. 231; Theocr. 3, 33; Dem., Joseph.,
Dion. H., Plut., al. [ef. L. and S. s. v. B. II. 1]); also Ao-
you éxew twos, Acts l. c. Lehm. (Tob. vi. 16 (15)) [ef. I. 3
a. above |. 3. account, i.e. reckoning, score: Sdaews
k. Anwews (see Sdas, 1), Phil. iv. 15 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.];
eis Adyov budy, to your account, i. e. trop. to your advan-
tage, ib. 17; ovvaipev Adyov (an expression not found in
Grk. auth.), to make a reckoning, settle accounts, Mt.
KVili 23 5 XX. Ld: 4. account, i. e. answer or ex-
planation in reference to judgment: Adyov diddvac (as
often in Grk. auth.), to give or render an account, Ro.
xiv.12R GT WHLnmrg. Tr mrg.; also drod:déva, Heb.
xiii. 17; 1 Pet. iv.5; with gen. of the thing, Lk. xvi. 2;
Acts xix. 40 [RG]; zepi twos, Mt. xii. 36; [Acts xix. 40
LT Tr WH); rut wepi éavrod, Ro. xiv. 12 Ltxt. br. Tr
txt.; alreiv riva Adyov mepi Twos, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (Plat. polit.
p- 285 e.). 5. relation: mpds oy nuiv 6 Adyos, with
whom as judge we stand in relation [A. V. have to do],
Heb. iv. 13; xara déyov, as is right, justly, Acts xviii.
14 [A. V. reason would (cf. Polyb. 1, 62, 4.5; 5, 110,
10)], (mapa Aéyov, unjustly, 2 Mace. iv. 836; 3 Mace. vii.
8). 6. reason, cause, ground: tin Adyw, for what
reason? why? Acts x. 29 (é« rivos Adyou; Aeschyl.
Choeph. 515; é& odSevds Adyou, Soph. Phil. 730; rin
Sixalo Ady «TA. ; Plat. Gorg. p. 512 C.) 3 mapexros Adyou
ropveias (Vulg. excepta fornicationis caus@) is generally
referred to this head, Mt. v. 32; [xix. 9 L WHmrg.];
but since where Aédyos is used in this sense the gen. is not
added, it has seemed best to include this passage among
those mentioned in I. 6 above. :
III. Inseveral passages in the writings of John 6 Acyos
AOYXKN
denotes the essential Worp of God, i. e. the personal
(hypostatic) wisdom and power in union with God, his
minister in the creation and government of the universe,
the cause of all the world’s life both physical and ethical,
which for the procurement of man’s salvation put on hu-
man nature in the person of Jesus the Messiah and shone
forth conspicuously from his words and deeds: Jn. i. 1,
14; (1 Jn. v. 7 Rec.); with ris (wns added (see (wn, 2
a.), 1 Jn.i. 1; rod Oeod, Rev. xix. 13 (although the in-
terpretation which refers this passage to the hypostatic
Adyos is disputed by some, as by Baur, Neutest. Theolo-
gie p. 216 sq.). Respecting the combined Hebrew and
Greek elements out of which this conception originated
among the Alexandrian Jews, see esp. Liicke, Com. ub.
d. Evang. des Johan. ed. 3, i. pp. 249-294 ; [cf. esp. B. D.
Am. ed.s. v. Word (and for works which have appeared
subsequently, see Weiss in Meyer on Jn. ed. 6; Schiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 34 I.) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 15 p.
143 sq. ; and for reff. to the use of the term in heathen,
Jewish, and Christian writ., see Soph. Lex. s. v.10].
AOyxN, -7S, 773 1. the iron point or head of a
spear: Hdt. 1,52; Xen. an.4, 7, 16, etc. 2. alance,
spear, (shaft armed with iron): Jn. xix. 34. (Sept.;
Pind., Tragg., sqq.) *
AovSopew, -6; 1 aor. éAowddpnoa; pres. pass. ptcp. Aodo-
povpevos; (Aoidopos); to reproach, rail at, revile, heap
abuse upon: tid, Jn. ix. 28; Acts xxiii. 4; pass., 1 Co.
iv. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 23. (From Pind. and Aeschyl. down ;
Sept. several times for 3°.) [Comp.: dyri-Aodopéw. | *
AorSopia, -as, 7, (AowWopéw), railing, reviling: 1 Tim. vy.
14; 1 Pet. iii. 9. (Sept.; Arstph., Thuc., Xen., sqq.) *
AoiSopos, -ov, 6, a railer, reviler: 1 Co. v.11; vi. 10.
(Prov. xxv. 24; Sir. xxiii. 8; Eur. [as adj.], Plut., al.) *
Aoupds, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], pestilence; plur. a
pestilence in divers regions (see Ausds), Mt. xxiv. 7 [RG
Tr mrg. br.]; Lk. xxi. 11; metaph., like the Lat. pestis
(Ter. Adelph. 2, 1, 35; Cic. Cat. 2, 1), a pestilent fellow,
pest, plague: Acts xxiv. 5 (so Dem. p. 794, 5; Ael. v. h.
14 ebroverxxi- 24m plu, esl. te leMaccexy ot:
avdpes Aowpoi, 1 Mace. x. 61, cf. 1S. x.27; xxv. 17, etc.).*
Rous, -7, -dv, (Aeim@, AéAoura), [fr. Pind. and Hat.
down], Sept. for 1, Wii, Ww, left; plur. the remain-
ing, the rest: with substantives, as of Aourol amdéaroXot,
Actsiizesiis f CosixpoepaddMiaxxvalile) Rosana sce 2
Comxilsck Gal Gigl3cm chil sivmoumonberaiial Ome
vill. 13; absol. the rest of any number or class under con-
sideration: simply, Mt. xxii. 6; xxvii. 49; Mk. xvi. 13;
Lk. xxiv. 10; Acts xvii. 9; xxvii. 44; with a descrip-
tion added: of Aourot of etc., Acts xxviii. 9; 1 Th. iv.
13; Rey. ii. 24; of Nowrol mdvres, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Phil. i.
13; mace rots X. Lk. xxiv. 93 with a gen.: of Aourol tov
avOporev, Rev. ix. 20; rod omépparos, ib. xii. 17; Trav
vexpov, ib. xx. 5; with a certain distinction and contrast,
the rest, who are not of the specified class or number: Lk.
vili. 10; xviii. 9; Acts v.13; Ro. xi. 7; 1 Co. vii. 12;
1 Th.v.6; 1 Tim. v. 20; Rev. xi. 13; xix. 213 rd Aourd,
the rest, the things that remain: Mk. iv. 19; Lk. xii. 26;
1 Co. xi. 34; Rev. iii. 2. Neut. sing. adverbially, ré
382
Aotvw
Aourdy what remains (Lat. quod superest), i. e. a.
hereafter, for the future, henceforth, (often so in Grk. writ.
fr. Pind. down): Mk. xiv. 41 R T WH (but 70 in br.);
Mt. xxvi. 45 [WH om. Tr br. 76]; 1 Co. vii. 29; Heb. x.
13; and without the article, Mk. xiv. 41 GL Tr [WH
(but see above)]; 2 Tim. iv. 8; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p.
706. rod Aourod, henceforth, in the future, Eph. vi. 10
LT Tr WH; Gal. vi. 17; Hdt. 2, 109; Arstph. pax
1084; Xen. Cyr. 4,4, 10; oec. 10, 9; al; cf. Herm. ad
Vig. p. 706; often also in full rod A. xypdvov. [Strictly, ro
x. is ‘for the fut.’ rod A. ‘in (the) fut.’; 7d A. may be used
for rod A., but not rov A. for 7dA.; cf. Meyer and Ellicott
on Gal. u. s.; B. §§ 128, 2; 132, 26; W.463 (482).] ib.
at last; already: Acts xxvii. 20 (so in later usage, see
Passow or L. and §. s. v.). Cc. TO Aourov, dropping the
notion of time, signifies for the rest, besides, moreover,
[A. V. often finally], forming a transition to other things,
to which the attention of the hearer or reader is directed:
Eph.vi.. 10. 2G; sPhil> ie; vives; lth sive tehees;
2 Th. iii. 1; 6 d€ Aourdy has the same force in 1 Co. iv. 2
RG; Aourdy in 1 Co. i. 16;,iv. 2LTTr WH; 1 Th. iv.
1h Gala ee Wate
Aovkds, -d, 6, (contr. fr. Aovxaves; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Col. iv. 14], W. 103 (97) [cf. B. 20 (18); on the diverse
origin of contr. or abbrev. prop. names in as cf. Lobeck,
Patholog. Proleg. p. 506; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15]),
Luke, a Christian of Gentile origin, the companion of the
apostle Paul in preaching the gospel and on many of his
journeys (Acts xvi. 10-17; xx. 5-153; xxi. 1-18; xxviii.
10-16); he was a physician, and ace. to the tradition of
the church from Irenezus [8, 14, 1 sq.] down, which has
been recently assailed with little success, the author of the
third canonical Gospel and of the Acts of the Apostles:
Col. iv. 14; 2 Tim. iv. 11; Philem. 24.*
Aovkvos, -ov, 6, (a Lat. name), Lucius, of Cyrene, a
prophet and teacher of the church at Antioch: Acts
xiii. 1; perhaps the same Lucius that is mentioned in
RO: xvi. 20"
Aoutpdv, -ov, rd, (Aovw), fr. Hom. down (who uses
oerpév fr. the uncontr. form dow), a bathing, bath, i. e.
as well the act of bathing [a sense disputed by some
(cf. Ellicott on Eph. v. 26)], as the place; used in the
N. T. and in eccles. writ. of baptism [for exx. see Soph.
Lex. s.v.]: with rod tdaros added, Eph. v. 26; rijs wadey-
yeveoias, Tit. iii. 5.*
Aotvw: 1 aor. €hovea; pf. pass. ptcp. AeAoupévos and (in
Heb. x. 23 T WH) AeAovopévos, a later Greek form (cf.
Lobeck on Soph. Aj. p. 324; Steph. Thesaur. v. 397 ¢.;
ef. Kiihner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v., who cites Cant. v.
12 Vat.]); 1 aor. mid. ptcp. Noveduevos; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 7115 to bathe, wash: prop. rwd, a dead person,
Acts ix. 37; twa amd rév mAnyav, by washing to cleanse
from the blood of the wounds, Acts xvi. 33 [W. 372 (348),
cf. § 30, 6a.; B. 322 (277)]; 6 AeAoupévos, absol., he that
has bathed, Jn. xiii. 10 (on the meaning of the passage
see kaOapds, a. [and cf. Syn. below]); AeA. 7d cHpa,
with dat. of the instr., datz, Heb. x. 22 (23); mid. to
wash one’s self (cf. W. § 38, 2 a.]: 2 Pet. ii. 22; trop.
' Avdda
Uhrist is described as 6 XNovcas quads amd tov dpaptiay
par, i. e. who by suffering the bloody death of a vicari-
vus sacrifice cleansed us from the guilt of our sins, Rev.
i. 5 RG [al. Avoas (q. v. 2 fin.). Comp.: dro-Aotva.]*
[Syn. Aodw, virrw, rAdvw: mA. is used of things,
esp. garments; A. and v. of persons,—v. of a part of the
body (hands, feet, face, eyes), A. of the whole. All three
words occur in Lev. xv.11. Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlv.]
At8$a, -ns [Acts ix. 38 RGL, but -asT Tr WH; see
WH. App. p.156], 9, and Avda, -ov, rd ((LT Tr WH
in] Acts ix. 32, 35; ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 116; B.18 (16) sq.
[cf. W. 61 (60)]); Hebr. 45 (1 Chr. viii. 12; Ezra ii. 33;
' Neh. xi. 35); Lydda, a large Benjamite [cf. 1 Chr.1.c¢.]
town (Avdda kapun, médews Tod peyeOous ovk dmodéovca,
Joseph. antt. 20, 6, 2), called also Diospolis under the
Roman empire, about nine [‘eleven’ (Ordnance Survey p.
21)] miles distant from the Mediterranean; now Ludd:
Acts ix. 32, 35, 38. Cf. Robinson, Palestine ii. pp.
244-248; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 627 sq.; [BB. DD.
Os Vale
Av8ia, -as, 7, Lydia, a woman of Thyatira, a seller of
purple, converted by Paul to the Christian faith: Acts
xvi. 14,40. The name was borne by other women also,
Horatacarm 1, Ss, 3,,9.*
Avaovia, -as, 7, Lycaonia, a region of Asia Minor,
situated between Pisidia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, Galatia
and Phrygia, whose chief cities were Lystra, Derbe and
Iconium (cf. reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1]. Its in-
habitants spoke a peculiar and strange tongue the char-
acter of which cannot be determined: Acts xiv. 6. Cf.
Win. RWB.s.v.; Lassen, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl.
Gesellsch. x. (56) p. 378; [ Wright, Hittites (’84) p. 56].*
Avxaovioti, (Avcaovitw, to use the language of Lyca-
onia), adv., in the speech of Lycaonia: Acts xiv. 11 (see
Avkaovia).*
Avkta, -as, 7, Lycia, a mountainous region of Asia
Minor, bounded by Pamphylia, Phrygia, Caria and the
Mediterranean: Acts xxvii. 5 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B. D.
s. v.; Dict. of Geogr. s. v.; reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col.
jes. Tells
AvKos, -ov, 6, Hebr. 3x1, a wolf: Mt. x. 16; Lk. x. 3;
Jn. x. 12; applied figuratively to cruel, greedy, rapa-
cious, destructive men: Mt. vii. 15; Acts xx.29; (used
trop. even in Hom. I. 4, 471; 16, 156; in the O. T.,
Ezek. xxii. 27; Zeph. iii. 3; Jer. v. 6).*
Avpatvopar: impf. eAvwauvduny; dep. mid.; (Avuninjury,
ruin, contumely); fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. som 1.
to affix a stigma to, to dishonor, spot, defile, (Ezek. xvi. 25;
Prov. xxiii. 8; 4 Mace. xviii. 8). 2. to treat shame-
fully or with injury, to ravage, devastate, ruin: €Xvpaivero
ry éxxAnaiar, said of Saul as the cruel and violent per-
secutor, [A. V. made havock of], Acts viii. 3.*
Autéw, -; 1 aor. éAinnoa; pf. NeAvTnKa; Pass., pres.
Avroduar; 1 aor. eAumnOnv; fut. AvTnOnoopar; (Adm);
[fr. Hes. down]; to make sorrowful; to affect with sad-
ness, cause grief; to throw into sorrow: twa, 2 Co. ii. 2,
6; vii. 8; pass., Mt. xiv. 9; xvii. 23; xviii. 31; xix. 22;
Xvi 22; Mk. x. 22; xiv.19; Jn. xvi. 20; xxi. 17; 2Co.
883
Avcavias
ii. 4; 1 Th. iv.13; 1 Pet. i. 6; joined with d&nuoveiy,
Mt. xxvi. 37; opp. to xalpew, 2 Co. vi. 10; xar& Oedv, in
a manner acceptable to God [cf. W. 402 (375)], 2 Co.
vil. 9,11; in a wider sense, to grieve, offend: rd mveipa
TO d&yov, Eph. iv. 30 (see mveipa, 4 a. fin.) ; to make one
uneasy, cause him a scruple, Ro. xiv.15. [Comp.: ovA-
Auméw. Syn. see pnvéa, fin.]*
tan, -ns, 7, [fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down], sorrow, pain,
grief: of persons mourning, Jn. xvi. 6 ; 2Co. ii.7; opp.
to xapd, Jn. xvi. 20; Heb. xii. 11; Admnv éxw (see éya,
I. 2 g. p. 267*), Jn. xvi. 21 sq.; Phil. ii. 27; with addition
of dwé and gen. of pers., 2 Co. ii. 3; A. poi éort, Ro. ix.
2; €v Adm EpxecOat, of one who on coming both saddens
and is made sad, 2 Co. ii. 1 (cf. Auwd ipas, vs. 2; and
AUmnv Exw, VS. 3); amd THs AUmns, for sorrow, Lk. xxii.
455 &« Auvmns, with a sour, reluctant mind [A. V. grudg-
ingly], (opp. to thapés), 2 Co. ix. 7; 7 Kara Oedv Avmn,
sorrow acceptable to God, 2 Co. vii. 10 (see Auméw), and
4] TOD Kdcpov Avmn, the usual sorrow of men at the loss of
their earthly possessions, ibid.; objectively, annoyance,
affliction, (Hdt. 7, 152): Admwas tmodepew [R. V. griefs ],
iP etsiieo.*
Avoavias, -ov, 6, Lysanias ; 1. the son of Ptolemy,
who from B.c. 40 on was governor of Chalcis at the foot
of Mount Lebanon, and was put to death B.c. 34 at the
instance of Cleopatra: Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 4 and 13, 3;
1S 2S Los edly WBh Wolo; Ip Uy Sh 2. a tetrarch
of Abilene (see ’ABiAnv7), in the days of John the Bap-
tist and Jesus: Lk. iii. 1. Among the regions assigned
by the emperors Caligula and Claudius to Herod Agrippa
I.and Herod Agrippa II., Josephus mentions 7 Avaaviov
tetpapxia (antt. 18, 6, 10, cf. 20, 7,1), BaowWeia 9 Tod
Avoaviov kaAdovpevn (b. j- 2, 11, 5), "ABiAa 7 Avoaviov
(antt. 19, 5, 1); accordingly, some have supposed that
in these passages Lysanias the son of Ptolemy must be
meant, and that the region which he governed continued
to bear his name even after his death. Others (as Cred-
ner, Strauss, Gfrorer, Weisse), denying that there ever
was a second Lysanias, contend that Luke was led into
error by that designation of Abilene (derived from Ly-
sanias and retained for a long time afterwards), so that
he imagined that Lysanias was tetrarch in the time of
Christ. This opinion, however, is directly opposed by
the fact that Josephus, in antt. 20, 7, 1 and b. j. 2, 12, 8,
expressly distinguishes Chalcis from the tetrarchy of
Lysanias; nor is it probable that the region which Ly-
sanias the son of Ptolemy governed for only six years
took its name from him ever after. Therefore it is more
correct to conclude that in the passages of Josephus where
the tetrarchy of Lysanias is mentioned a second Ly-
sanias, perhaps the grandson of the former, must be
meant; and that he is identical with the one spoken of
by Luke. Cf. Winer, RWB. s.v. Abilene; Wiéeseler in
Herzog i. p. 64 sqq., [esp. in Beitrage zur richtig. Wiirdi-
gung d. Evang. u.s.w. pp. 196-204]; Bleek, Synopt. Er
klar. u.s. w.i. p. 154 sq.; Aneucker in Schenkel i. p. 26 sy.3
Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19 Anh. 1 p. 313 [also in
Riehm s. v.; Robinson in Bib. Sacra for 1848, pp. 79 saq.g
Avoiar
Renan, La Dynastie des Lysanias d’Abiléne (in the Mé-
moires de l Acad. des inscrip. et belles-lettres for 1870,
Tom. xxvi. P. 2, pp. 49-84); BB.DD. s. v.].*
Avelas, -ov, 6, (Claudius) Lysias, a Roman
[A. V. ‘chief captain’]: Acts xxiii. 26; xxiv.
22. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]*
Airs, -ews, 7, (Avo), [fr. Hom. down], a loosing of any
bond, as that of marriage; hence once in the N. T. of
divorce, 1 Co. vii. 27.*
Avorehéw, -G; (fr. AvovreAjs, and this fr. Avw to pay,
and ra réAn [cf. réAos, 2]); [fr. Hdt. down]; prop. to
pay the taxes; to return expenses, hence to be useful, ad-
vantageous ; impers. Avowredet, it projits; foll. by # (see
#, 3 £.), it is better: revi foll. by ei, Lk. xvii. 2.*
Atorpa, -as, 7, and [in Acts xiv. 8; xvi.2; 2 Tim. iii.
11] -wy, rd, (see Avdda), Lystra, a city of Lycaonia: Acts
xive6, 8y 21s) xvi. 1'sq-5. 2) Tim. iii 11>) [Cf reff/-in
Bp. Lehtft. on Col. p. 1.] *
orpov, -ov, 74, (AVw), Sept. passim for 995, ThN3, 119,
ete.; the price for redeeming, ransom (paid for slaves,
Lev. xix. 20; for captives, Is. xlv. 13; for the ransom
of a life, Ex. xxi. 30; Num. xxxv. 31 sq.): dvti modo»,
to liberate many from the misery and penalty of their
sins, Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45. (Pind., Aeschyl., Xen.,
Plat., al.) *
Autpdw, -d: Pass., 1 aor. eAutpeOnv; Mid., pres. inf.
AurpovoGar; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. AuTp@anrar; (AVTpor,
q. v-); Sept. often for Osa and 113 ; 1. to release
on receipt of ransom: Plat. Theaet. p. 165 e.; Diod. 19,
73; Sept., Num. xviii. 15, 17. 2. to redeem, liberate
by payment of ransom, [(Dem., al.)], generally expressed
by the mid.; univ. to liberate: twa dpyvpie, and likewise
éx with the gen. of the thing; pass. é« rjs paralas dva-
otpodis, 1 Pet.i.18; Mid. to cause to be released to one’s
self [cf. W. 254 (238) ] by payment of the ransom, i. e. to
redeem; univ. to deliver: in the Jewish theocratic sense,
tov “Iopan\, viz. from evils of every kind, external and
internal, Lk. xxiv. 21; dd mdons dvopias, Tit. ii. 14 [ef.
W. § 30, 6 a.]; twa ex, spoken of God, Deut. xiii. 5;
2S. vii. 23; Hos. xiii. 14.*
' Abitpwors, -ews, 7, (AUTPdw), a ransoming, redemption:
prop. aixypadorer, Plut. Arat. 11; for mea, Lev. xxv.
[29], 48; univ. deliverance, redemption, in the theocratic
sense (see Aurpdw, 2 [cf. Graec. Ven. Lev. xxv. 10, ete. ;
Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9]): Lk. i. 68; ii. 38; specifically, re-
demption from the penalty of sin: Heb. ix. 12. [(Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 12, 7; ‘Teaching’ 4, 6; etc.)]*
Autpwris, -0d, 6, (Autpdw), redeemer; deliverer, liber-
ator: Acts vii. 35; [Sept. Lev. xxv. 31, 82; Philo de
sacrif. Ab. et Cain. § 37 sub fin.]; for 583, of God, Ps.
xviii. (xix.) 15; Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 35. Not found in prof.
auth.*
Auxvia, -as, 9, a later Grk. word for the earlier Avyviov,
see Lob.ad Phryn. p. 313 sq.; [Wetst.on Mt.v.15; W.
24]; Sept. for 17/39; a@ (candlestick) lampstand, cande-
labrum: Mt. v.15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33]; Heb.
ix. 2; the two eminent prophets who will precede Christ’s
return from heaven in glory are likened to ‘ candlesticks,’
chiliarch
7 (Rec. ],
384
Avo °
Rev. xi. 4 [B. 81 (70); W. 536 (499)]; to the seven
‘candlesticks’ (Ex. xxv. 37 [A. V. lamps ; cf. B. D. (esp.
Am. ed.) s. v. Candlestick]) also the seven more con
spicuous churches of Asia are compared in Rev. i. 12 sq.
20; ii.1; kevety ryv Avyviay Tuvds (€xkAnoias) ék TOD TdmoOU
adrjs, to move a church out of the place which it has
hitherto held among the churches; to take it out of the
number of churches, remove it altogether, Rev. ii. 5.*
AbXVvos, -ov, 6, Sept. for 43, [fr. Hom. down]; a lamp,
candle [?], that is placed on a stand or candlestick (Lat.
candelabrum), (cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlvi.; Becker,
Charicles, Sc. ix. (Eng. trans. p. 156 n.5)]: Mt. v. 15;
Mk. iv. 21; [Lk. xi. 36]; xii. 35; Rev. xxii. 5; pas
Adyvou, Rev. xviii. 23; opp. to Pas jdlov, xxii. 5 LT Tr
WH; darew dvxvov ([Lk. viii. 16; xi. 33; xv. 8], see
dnto, 1). Toa“lamp” are likened — the eye, 6 Adxvos
Tov gaparos, i. e. which shows the body which way to
move and turn, Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34; the prophecies of
the O. T., inasmuch as they afforded at least some knowl-
edge relative to the glorious return of Jesus from heaven
down even to the time when by the Holy Spirit that same
light, like the day and the day-star, shone upon the hearts
of men, the light by which the prophets themselves had
been enlightened and which was necessary to the full per-
ception of the true meaning of their prophecies, 2 Pet.
i. 19; to the brightness of a lamp that cheers the be-
holders a teacher is compared, whom even those rejoiced
in who were unwilling to comply with his demands, Jn.
v. 35; Christ, who will hereafter illumine his follow-
ers, the citizens of the heavenly kingdom, with his own
glory, Rev. xxi. 23.*
Avw; impf. €Avov; 1 aor. €Avca; Pass., pres. Avopat;
impf. éAvdpunv ; pf. 2 pers. sing. AKeAveat, ptep. AeAvpevos; 1
aor. €dvOnv; 1 fut. AvOjooua; fr. Hom. down; Sept. sev-
eral times for MND to open, WA and Chald. yyw (Dan.
iii. 25; v.12); to loose; i.e. 1. to loose any person
(or thing) tied or fastened: prop. the bandages of the
feet, the shoes, Mk. i. 7; Lk. iii. 16; Jn. i. 27; Acts
[ xiii. 25]; vii. 33, (so for ow to take off, Ex. iii.5; Josh.
v.15); m@dov (dedenévov), Mt. xxi. 2; Mk. xi. 2, [3 L
mrg.], 4 sq.; Lk. xix. 30 sq. 33; bad angels, Rev. ix.
14 sq.; tov Body and tis paryns, Lk. xiii. 15; trop. of
husband and wife joined together by the bond of matri-
mony, AéeAvoar amd yuvatkds (opp. to dedecar yuvarki),
spoken of a single man, whether he has already had a
wife or has not yet married, 1 Co. vii. 27. 2. to loose
one bound, i. e. to unbind, release from bonds, set free:
one bound up (swathed in bandages), Jn. xi. 44; bound
with chains (a prisoner), Acts xxii. 30 (where Rec. adds
ard tév Seopov) ; hence i. q. to discharge from prison,
let go, Acts xxiv. 26 Rec. (so as far back as Hom.); in
Apocalyptic vision of the devil (kexeropévov), Rev. xx.
3; €x THs pudakis adrod, 7; metaph. to free (dd Seopod)
from the bondage of disease (one held by Satan) by
restoration to health, Lk. xiii. 16 ; to release one bound
by the chains of sin, ée rév duapridy, Rev. i. 5 LT Tr
WH (see Aovw fin. [ef. W. § 30, 6 a.]). 3. to loosen,
undo, dissolve, anything bound, tied, or compacted to-
AJw
gether: the seal of a book, Rev. v. 2, [5 Rec.]; trop.,
tov deopov tis yAooons Twds, to remove an impediment
of speech, restore speech to a dumb man, Mk. vii. 35
(Justin, hist. 13, 7, 1 cui nomen Battos propter linguae
obligationem fuit; 6 linguae nodis solutis loqui primum
coepit); an assembly, i. e. to dismiss, break up: rip
ouvaywyny, pass., Acts xiii. 43 (dyopny, Hom. Il. 1, 305;
Od. 2, 257, etc.; Apoll. Rh. 1, 708; THY oTpatidv, Xen.
Cyr. 6,1, 2); of the bonds of death, Avew ras dSivas rod
Gavarov, Acts ii. 24 (see ddiv). Laws, as having bind-
ing force, are likened to bonds; hence dveuw is i. q. to
annul, subvert; to do away with; to deprive of authority,
_whether by precept or by act: évrodjy, Mt. v. 193 rov
yopov, Jn. vii. 23; 7d cdBBarov, the commandment con-
cerning the sabbath, Jn. v.18; riv ypadny, Jn. x. 35; cf.
Kuinoel on Mt. v. 17; [on the singular reading Aver rév
*Inoodv, 1 Jn. iv. 8 WH mrg. see Westcott, Com. ad loc.];
by a Chald. and Talmud. usage (equiv. to rAX, NW [ef.
885
Maryos
W. 32]), opp. to dé (q. v. 2 ¢.), to declare lawful: Mt.
Xvi. 19; xviii. 18, [but cf. Weiss in Meyer 7te Aufl. ad
ll. ce.]. to loose what is compacted or built together,
to break up, demolish, destroy: prop. in pass. édveto }
mptpva, was breaking to pieces, Acts xxvii. 41; rév vadv,
In. li. 19; 7d perdroryov rod ppaypod, Eph. ii. 14 (rd retyn,
1 Esdr.i. 52; yépupay, Xen. an. 2, 4, 17 sq.); to dissolve
something coherent into parts, to destroy: pass., [rovrey
mavrav Avopever, 2 Pet. iii. 11]; ra ororyeia (kavoovpera),
2 Pet. iii. 10; odpavoi (mupodvpevor), ib. 12; metaph. to
overthrow, do away with: ra épya tod SiaBdrov, 1 In. iii.
8. [Comp.: dva-, dro-, Sia-, éx-, émt-, kata-, mapa-hvw. | *
Aats [WH Aois], -iSos, 4, Lois, a Christian matron, the
grandmother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. 5.*
Adr, 6, (i> a covering, veil), [indecl.; ef. B.D.], Lot,
the son of Haran the brother of Abraham (Gen. xi. 27,
313 xii. 4 sqq.; xiii. 1 sqq.; xiv. 12 sqq.; xix. 1 sqq.):
LK. xvii. 28 sq. 32; 2 Pet. ii. 7."
M
[M, p: on its (Alexandrian, cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et
Alex. p. 130 sq.) retention in such forms as Ajupoua, dave-
Ahuhon, TpocwmoaAhurrTns, avddnuiis, and the like, see (the
several words in their places, and) W. 48; B. 62 (54); esp.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 72; Kuenen and Cobvet, Praef. p. lxx.; Seriv-
ener, Collation ete. p. lv. sq., and Introd. p. 14; Fritzsche, Rom.
vol. i. p. 110; on -u- or -wu- in pf. pass. pteps. (e. g. Seeorpape
pévos, Teptpepaypévos, etc., see each word in its place, and)
ef. WH. App. p. 170sq.; on the dropping of w in éumtrAnm,
éumimpdw, see the words. |
Madé, 6, (UY to be small), Maath, one of Christ’s
ancestors: Lk. iii. 26.*
Mayasdy, see the foll. word.
May6ad4é, a place on the western shore of the Lake of
Galilee, about three miles distant from Tiberias towards
the north; according to the not improbable conjecture
of Gesenius (Thesaur. i. p. 267) identical with Ss-539
(i. e. tower of God), a fortified city of the tribe of
Naphtali (Josh. xix. 38); in the Jerus. Talmud 513
(Magdal or Migdal); now Medschel or Medjdel, a
wretched Mohammedan village with the ruins of an an-
cient tower (see Win. RWB. s. v.; Robinson, Palest. ii.
p. 396 sq.; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 661; Aneucker in
Schenkel iv. p. 84; [Hackett in B.D. s. v.; Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 571 sq.]): Mt. xv. 39 RG, with
the var. reading (adopted by L T Tr WH [cf. WH. App.
>» V4
p- 160]) MayaSdv, Vulg. Magedan, (Syr. Ope) if
either of these forms was the one used by the Evangelist
it could very easily have been changed by the copyists
into the more familiar name Mayda\a.*
MaySarnvh, -7s, 9, (Maydadd, q. v.), Magdalene, a
woman of Magdala: Mt. xxvii. 56, 61; xxviii. 1; Mk.
xv.40,47; xvi.1,9; Lk. viii. 2; xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25;
XX oe
[Mayedév (Rev. xvi. 16 WH), see ‘Appayedav.]
payela (T WH payia, see I, ¢), -as, 7, (udyos, q. V.),
magic; plur. magic arts, sorceries: Acts viii.11. (The-
ophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
payed; (udyos); tobe a magician; to practise magical
arts: Acts viii. 9, (Eur. Iph. 1338; Plut. Artax. 3, 6,
and in other auth.) *
payla, see payeia.
payos, -ov, 6, (Hebr. 3, plur. 0°39; a word of Indo-
Germanic origin; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 766; J. G.
Miiller in Herzog viii. p. 678; [ Vaniéek, Fremdworter,
s. v.; but the word is now regarded by many as of Baby-
lonian origin; see Schrader, Keilinschriften u.s.w. 2te
Aufl. p. 417 sqy.]); fr. Soph. and Hdt. down; Sept.
Dan. ii. 2 and several times in Theodot. ad Dan. for
wN; a magus; the name given by the Babylonians
(Chaldzans), Medes, Persians, and others, to the wise
men, teachers, priests, physicians, astrologers, seers, in-
terpreters of dreams, augurs, soothsayers, sorcerers etc. ;
cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; J. G. Miiller in Herzog 1. c. pp.
675-685; Holtzmann in Schenkel iv. p. 84 sq.; [BB.DD.«
s. v. Magi]. In the N. T. the name is given 1.
to the oriental wise men (astrologers) who, having dis-
covered by the rising of a remarkable star [see dornp,
and cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 209 sqq.] that
the Messiah had just been born, came to Jerusalem to:
Mayoy
worship him: Mt. ii. 1, 7, 16. 2. to false prophets
and sorcerers: Acts xili. 6, 8, cf. viii. 9, 11.*
Mayday, 6, see Tay.
Moafdiép, 7, (Hebr. q19 [i. e. ‘strife’]), Midian [in
A. V. (ed. 1611) N. T. Madian], prop. name of the ter-
ritory of the Midianites in Arabia; it took its name
from Midian, son of Abraham and Keturah (Gen. xxv.
1 sq.): Acts vil. 29.*
pats, -ov, 6, the breast: of a man, Rev. i. 13 Lehm.
[(see paordés). From Hom. down.]*
paOnredw: 1 aor. euadnrevoa; 1 aor. pass. euabnrevOnv;
(padnrns) 5 1. intrans. rivi, to be the disciple of
one; to follow his precepts and instruction: Mt. xxvii. 57
RG WHnoreg., cf. Jn. xix. 38 (so Plut. mor. pp. 832 b.
(vit. Antiph. 1), 837 ce. (vit. Isocr. 10) ; Jamblichus, vit.
Pythag. c. 23). 2. trans. (cf. W. p. 23 and § 38,
1; [B. § 131, 4]) to make a disciple; to teach, instruct:
rwad, Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts xiv. 21; pass. with a dat. of
the pers. whose disciple one is made, Mt. xxvii. 57 L T
Tr WH txt. ; padnrevdeis eis tiv Bacidelay tay ovp. (see
ypapparevs, 3), Mt. xiii. 52 Rec., where long since the
more correct reading r7 Bac. Tay ovp. was adopted, but
without changing the sense; [yet Lchm. inserts éev].*
palyths, -00, 6, (uavOavw), a learner, pupil, disciple:
univ., opp. to dudacKados, Mt. x. 24; Lk. vi. 40; rivds,
one who follows one’s teaching: "Iwdvvov, Mt. ix. 14;
Lk. vii. 18 (19); Jn. iii. 25; trav bapic., Mt. xxii. 16 ;
Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v.33; Moitcéas, Jn. ix. 28; of Jesus,—
in a wide sense, in the Gospels, those among the Jews
who favored him, joined his party, became his adher-
ents: Jn. vi. 66; vii. 3; xix. 38; 6yAos pabnrav adrod,
Lk. vi. 17; of p. avrod ixavoi, Lk. vii. 11; dav rd mAnO0s
tov pad. Lk. xix. 37; but especially the twelve apostles :
Wie oe 1G Se, 1S sete ale NN spike Mike vari 9 Apis si
2; ili. 22, and very often; also simply of paGyrai, Mt.
xili. 10; xiv. 19; Mk. x. 24; Lk. ix. 16; Jn. vi. 11 [ Rec. ],
etc.; in the Acts of paOnrai are all those who confess
Jesus as the Messiah, Christians: Acts vi.1 sq. 7; ix. 19;
xi. 26, and often; with rod cupiov added, Actsix.1. The
word is not found in the O. T., nor in the Epp. of the
N. T., nor in the Apocalypse; in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt.],
Arstph., Xen., Plato, down.
padarpra, -as, 7, (a fem. form of padnrns; cf. adrns,
wWadrpra, etc.,in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 425), a female dis-
ciple; i.q. a Christian woman: Acts ix. 36. (Diod. 2,
52; Diog. Laért. 4, 2; 8, 42.)*
[Mal@a8ias, see Marrafias. |
Ma6@aios, MaO@av, see Mataios, MarOav.
Maoéar, see Marédr.
Mafovrdda, TWH Madovoada [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p.
103], 6, (novanp man of a dart, fr. 3n, construct form
of the unused nn a man, and nbw a dart [cf. B. D. s.
v.]), Methuselah, the son of Enoch and grandfather of
Noah (Gen. v. 21): Lk. iii. 37.*
Maivay (T Tr WH Mevyd), indecl., (Lchm. Meévvas,
gen. Mevva), 6, Menna or Menan, [A. V. (1611) Menam],
the name of one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 31 [Lchm.
br. rod M.].*
386
paxpap
patvopar; [fr. Hom. down]; to be mad, to rave: said of
one who so speaks that he seems not to be in his right
mind, Acts xii. 15; xxvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 23; opp. to
coppootyns pnyata dropbeyyecOa, Acts xxvi. 25; joined
with dayzdnov éxev, Jn. x. 20. [Comp.: éu-paivopat. }*
paxapitw; Attic fut. paxapro [cf. B. 37 (32)]; (pwaxd-
pwos); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for WwW; to pronounce
blessed : tuwvd, Lk. i. 48; Jas. v. 11 (here Vulg. beatifico).*
paKxdpuos, -a, -ov, (poetic pdxap), [fr. Pind., Plat. down],
blessed, happy: joined to names of God, 1 Tim. i. 11;
vi. 15 (cf. pdkapes Oeot in Hom. and Hes.); éAmis, Tit.
ii. 13; as a predicate, Acts xx. 35; 1 Pet. iii. 1435 iv.
14; #yodpal twa pax. Acts xxvi. 2; pakdp. év rim, Jas. i.
25. In congratulations, the reason why one is to be
pronounced blessed is expressed by a noun or by a ptcp.
taking the place of the subject, paxdpios 6 etc. (Hebr.
79 1108, Ps. i.1; Deut. xxxiii. 29, etc.) blessed the man,
who ete. [W. 551 (512 sq.)]: Mt. v. 3-11; Lk. vi. 20- .
TRAD o.oo vii IN eih Besant slg x0b-¢ Gy 564, (85 sSaib
14; by the addition to the noun of a ptep. which takes
the place of a predicate, Lk. i. 45; x. 23; xi. 27 sq.;
Rev. xiv. 13; foll. by és with a finite verb, Mt. xi. 6;
Lk. vii. 23; xiv. 15; Ro. iv. 7 sq.; the subject noun in-
tervening, Lk. xii. 37,43; xxiii. 29; Jas.i.12; pak....
én, Mt. xiii. 16; xvi. 17; Lk. xiv. 14; foll. by éay, Jn.
xiii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 40. [See Schmidt ch. 187, 7.]
pakapirpds, -0v, 6, (uaxapifw), declaration of blessed-
ness: Ro.iv.9; Gal. iv. 15; Néyew rév pak. twos, to utter
a declaration of blessedness upon. one, a fuller way of say-
ing paxapiCew tivd, to pronounce one blessed, Ro. iv. 6.
(Plat. rep. 9 p. 591 d.; [Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 34]; Plut.
mor. p. 471 ¢.; eccles. writ.) *
MaxeSovla, -as, 7 [on use of art. with cf. W. § 18, 5 a.
c.], Macedonia, a country bounded on the S. by Thessaly
and Epirus, on the E. by Thrace and the Mgean Sea,
on the W. by Illyria, and on the N. by Dardania and
Moesia [cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)]: Acts xvi. 9 sq. 12;
XVill. 5; xix. 21 sq.; xx. 1,3; Ro. xv. 26; 1 Co. xvi. 5;
2 Co. i. 16; il. 13; vii. 55 vill. 1; xi. 9; Phil. iv. 15-~1
WUIBTE Hee ps te MOS il Shin. Wee
MaxeSdv, -dvos, 6, a Macedonian: Acts xvi. 9 [cf. B.
§ 123, 8 Rem.]; xix. 29; xxvii. 2; 2 Co. ix. 2, 4.*
paxeddoy, -ov, Td, a Lat. word, macellum [prob. akin to
pax-n; Vaniéek p. 687 (cf. Plut. as below) ], a place where
meat and other articles of food are sold, meat-market, pro-
viston-market, [A. V. shambles]: 1Co. x. 25. (Dio Cass.
61, 18 ry dyopdy raév dyer, 7d pdxeAXov; [Plut. ii. p. 277 d.
(quaest. Rom. 54)].) *
paxpdv (prop. fem. acc. of the adj. paxpéds, sc. 68dv, a
long way [W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12]), adv., Sept.
for pim, [fr. Aeschyl. down]; far, a.great way: absol.,
daréxew, Lk. xv. 20; of the terminus to which, far hence,
eEarootenS oe, Acts xxii. 21; with dé twos added, Mt.
viii. 30; Lk. vii. 6 [T om. dé]; Jn. xxi. 8; rov Oedv...
ov paxpav dnd évds éexdotov nav indpxorra, i. e. who is
near every one of us by his power and influence (so that
we have no need to seek the knowledge of him from with-
out), Acts xvii. 27; of eis paxpdv [cf. W. 415 (387)]
paxpobev
those that are afar off, the inhabitants of remote regions,
i. e. the Gentiles, Acts ii. 39, cf. Is. ii. 2 sqq.; Zech. vi.
15. metaph. od paxpay ef dd ris Bac. Tov Geod, but little
is wanting for thy reception into the kingdom of God,
or thou art almost fit to be a citizen in the divine king-
dom, Mk. xii. 34; of moré dvres jraxpdv (opp. to of éyyis),
of heathen (on the sense, see éyyis, 1 b.), Eph. ii. 13;
also of paxpay, ib. 17.*
paxpdbev, (uaxpds), adv., esp. of later Grk. [Polyb.,
al.; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 93]; Sept. for PIN, pin,
ete.; from afar, afar: Mk. viii. 3; xi. 13; Lk. xviii. 13;
xxii, 54; xxiii. 49; with the prep. dzé prefixed (cf. W.
422 (393); § 65, 2; B. 70 (62)): Mt. xxvi. 58 [here
Tom. WH br. amo]; xxvii. 55; Mk. v. 6; xiv. 54; xv.
40; Lk. xvi. 23; Rev. xviii. 10, 15,17; also LT TrWH
in Mk. xi. 13; LT Trmrg. WH in Lk. xxiii. 49; T Tr
WH in Mk. viii. 3, (Ps. exxxvii. (cxxxviii.) 6; 2K. xix.
25 cod. Alex. ; 2 Esdr. iii. 13).*
paxpobupéw, -G; 1 aor., impv. paxpoOvpnoov, ptcp. paxpo-
Oupnoas; (fr. paxpddvpos, and this fr. paxpds and Ovpos) ;
to be of a long spirit, not to lose heart; hence ETO
persevere patiently and bravely (i. q. kaprep&, so Plut. de
gen. Socr. c. 24 p. 593 f.; Artem. oneir. 4, 11) in endur-
ing misfortunes and troubles: absol., Heb. vi. 15; Jas.
v. 8; with the addition of éws and a gen. of the desired
event, ib. 7; with emi and a dat. of the thing hoped for,
ibid.; add, Sir. ii. 4. 2. to be patient in bearing the
offences and injuries of others; to be mild and slow in
avenging; to be long-suffering, slow to anger, slow to pun-
ish, (for 4} TNT, to defer anger, Prov. xix. 11): absol.
1 Co. xiii. 45 mpds twa, 1 Th. v.14; éé with dat. of pers.
(see émi, B. 2 a. 8.), Mt. xviii. 26, 29 [here L Tr with the
ace., so Tr in 26; see émi, C. I. 2g. @.]; Sir. xviii. 11;
xxix. 8; hence spoken of God deferring the punishment
of sin: ets ruva, towards one, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [here LT Tr
mrg. did (q. v. B. II. 2 b. sub fin.)]; émé with dat. of
pers., Lk. xviii. 7; in this difficult passage we shall nei-
ther preserve the constant usage of paxpoOupetv (see just
before) nor get a reasonable sense, unless we regard the
wordsém avrois as negligently (see adrés, II. 6) referring
to the enemies of the éxAexrav, and translate cal paxpoOu-
pav én’ abrois even though he is long-suffering, indulgent,
to them; —this negligence being occasioned by the cir-
cumstance that Luke seems to represent Jesus as speak-
ing with Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22 (18) in mind, where én’
avrois must be referred to dveXenuovev. The reading [of
LT Tr WH] kai paxpobupei én’ avrois; by which 76 paxpo-
dupeiv is denied to God [cf. W. § 55, 7] cannot be ac-
cepted, because the preceding parable certainly demands
the notion of slowness on God’s part in avenging the right;
cf. De Wette ad loc.; [but to this it is replied, that the
denial of actual delay is not inconsistent with the as-
sumption of apparent delay; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss)
ad loc. ].* :
paxpobupia, -as, 7), (paxpobupos [cf. paxpobupéw]), (Vulg.
longanimitas, etc.), 1. €. 1. patience, endurance, con-
stancy, steadfastness, perseverance; esp. as shown in bear-
ing troubles and ills, (Plut. Luc. 32 sq. ; GOpwros dv
387
bao
pndémore Thy ddumiay airod mapa Gedy, GAN pakpobupiay,
Menand. frag. 19, p. 203 ed. Meineke [vol. iv. p. 238
Frag. comic. Graec. (Berl. 1841)]): Col. i. 11; 2 Tim.
iii. 10; Heb. vi. 12; Jas. v. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 645
Barn. ep. 2, 2; [Is. lvii. 15; Joseph. b. Ip Gh Uae Cin.il
Mace. viii. 4]. 2. patience, forbearance, long-suffer-
ing, slowness in avenging wrongs, (for DDN JIS, Jer. xv.
15): Ro. ii. 4; ix. 22; 2Co. vi.6; Gal. v. 22; Eph. iv.
2; Col. iii. 12; 1 Tim. i. 16 [ef. B. 120 (105)]; 2 Tim.
iv. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. iii. 15; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
13, 1; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1).*
[SYN. paxpobuula, 'rouor% (occur together or in the
same context in Col.i.11; 2 Cor. vi. 4,6; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Jas. v.
10,11; cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1): Bp.
Lghtft. remarks (on Col. 1. ¢.), “The difference of meaning
is best seen in their opposites. While bo. is the temper
which does not easily succumb under suffering, wax. is the
self-restraint which does not hastily retaliate a wrong. The
one is opposed to cowardice or despondency, the other to
wrath or revenge (Prov. xv. 18; xvi. 32)... This distince-
tion, though it applies generally, is not true without excep-
tion”. ..; cf. also his note on Col. iii. 12, and see (more at
length) Trench, N. T. Syn. § liii.]
pakpobipws, adv., with longanimity (Vulg. longanimiter,
Heb. vi. 15), i. e. patiently: Acts xxvi. 3.*
pakpéds, -d, -dv, [fr. Hom. down], long; of place, remote,
distant, far off: xopa, Lk. xv.13; xix.12. of time, long,
lasting long: paxpa mpocevxopuat, to pray long, make long
prayers, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx.
47.*
paKpo-x pdytos, -ov, (axpds and ypdvos), lit. ‘long-timed’
(Lat. longaevus), long-lived: Eph. vi. 3. (Ex. xx. 123
Deut. v. 163 very rare in prof. auth.) *
podakta, -as, 7, (4adakds) 3 1. prop. softness [fr.
Hdt. down]. 2. in the N. T. (like doOévewa, dppw-
otia) infirmity, debility, bodily weakness, sickness, (Sept.
for on, disease, Deut. vii. 15; xxviii. 61; Is. xxxviii. 9,
ete.) 5 joined with vdcos, Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1.*
pahakds, -7, -dv, soft; soft to the touch: ivaria, Mt. xi.
8 RGLbr.; Lk. vii. 25, (iuariwy moduteAay k. padakar,
Artem. oneir. 1,78; éo6ns, Hom. Od. 23, 290; Artem.
oneir. 2,3; yurov, Hom. Il. 2,42); and simply ra padaka,
soft raiment (see Aeveds, 1): Mt. xi. 8 TTrWH. Like
the Lat. mollis, metaph. and in a bad sense: effeminate, of
a catamite, a male who submits his body to unnatural
lewdness, 1 Co. vi. 9 (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 2 sub fin.;
[Diog. Laért. 7, 173 fin.]).*
Madcdehd (MeAedena, Tdf.), 6, N70 praising God,
fr. Sonn and 5x), Mahalaleel [A. V. Maleleel], son of
Cainan: Lk. iii. 37.*
pdAvora (superlative of the adv. dda), [fr. Hom. down],
adv., especially, chiefly, most of all, above all: Acts xx.
38; xxv. 26; Gal. vi. 10; Phil. iv. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 10;
v. 8,17; 2 Tim. iv. 13; Tit. i. 10; Philem. 16; 2 Pet.
ii. 10; pddtora yroorns, especially expert, thoroughly
well-informed, Acts xxvi. 3.*
padAov (compar. of pada, very, very much), [fr. Hom.
down], adv., more, to a greater degree; rather; 1.
added to verbs and adjectives, it denotes increase, a
panddov
greater quantity, a larger measure, a higher degree,
more, more fully, (Germ. in héherem Grade, Maasse); a.
words defining the measure or size are joined to it in the
ablative (dat.): modAG much, by far, Mk. x. 48; Lk.
xviii. 39; Ro. v. 15, 17, (in both these verses the under-
lying thought is, the measure of salvation for which we
are indebted to Christ is far greater than that of the
ruin which came from Adam; for the difference between
the consequences traceable to Adam and to Christ is not
only one of quality, but of quantity also; cf. Rickert, Com.
on Rom. vol. i. 281 sq. [al. (fr. Chrys. to Meyer and Godet)
content themselves here with a logical increase, far
more certainly]); 2 Co. iii. 9,11; Phil. ii. 12; méo@ how
much, Lk. xii. 24; Ro. xi. 12; Philem. 16; Heb. ix. 14;
rocoto by so much, dam by as much, (sc. paddov), Heb.
x. 25. b. in comparison it often so stands that than
before must be mentally added, [A. V. the more, so much
the more], as Mt. xxvii. 24 (uadAov OdpuBos yiverat [but al.
refer this to 2 b. a. below]); Lk. v. 15 (dinpxero paddor) ;
Jn. v. 18 (uaddov efnrovv); xix. 8; Acts v. 14; ix. 22;
ROU e eed OOnVile ie Le nssi vied | LO ouhet. 1p l Octrent
padXov Kat paddov, Phil. i. 9; or the person or thing with
which the comparison is made is evident from what pre-
cedes, as Phil. iii. 4; it is added to comparatives, Mk.
vii. 36; 2 Co. vii. 13; moAA@ padXov xpeiocor, Phil. i. 23 ;
see [ Wetstein on Phil. l. ¢.]; W. § 35, 1 cf. 608 (561);
[B. § 123, 11]; to verbs that have a comparative force,
padXov S.adéper Tivos, to be of much more value than one,
Mt. vi. 26. paddov 7, more than, Mt. xviii. 13; paddAov
with gen., mavrwv tar, 1 Co. xiv. 18 (Xen. mem. 3, 12,
1). joined to positive terms it forms a periphrasis for a
comparative [cf. W. § 35, 2 a.], foll. by 7, as waxdpiov p.
for paxaptwtepov, Acts xx. 35; add, 1 Co. ix.15; Gal. iv.
273 moAA@ paddov avayxaia, 1 Co. xii. 22; sometimes pad-
Aov seems to be omitted before 7; see under #, 3 f. Cc.
paddor 8€, what moreover is of greater moment, [A. V. yea
rather]: Ro. viii. 34 (2 Mace. vi. 23). 2. it marks
the preference of one thing above another, and is to be
rendered rather, sooner, (Germ. eher, vielmehr, lieber); a.
it denotes that which occurs more easily than something
else, and may be rendered sooner, (Germ. eher): thus
TOAAS paddXor in arguing from the less to the greater, Mt.
vi. 30; Ro.v. 9sq.; Heb. xii. 9 [here LT Tr WH mond p.J;
also odd [RG roAAG] padXov se. od« expevEdueda, i. e.
much more shall we not escape (cf. W. p. 633 (588) note
LB. § 148, 3b.]), or even évdixov pro Oarrodociav AnWouea
(Heb. ii. 2), or something similar (cf. Matthiae § 634, 3),
Heb. xii. 25. mda@ paddov, Mt. vii. 113 x. 25; Lk. xii.
28; Ro. xi.12, 24; Philem.16. in a question, od pad ov;
(Lat. nonne potius?) [do not... more],1 Co. ix. 12. b.
it is opposed to something else and does away with
it; accordingly it may be rendered the rather (Germ.
vielmehr) ; a. after a preceding negative or prohibi-
tive sentence: Mt. x. 6, 28; xxv.9; Mk. v.26; Ro. xiv.
13; 1 Tim. vi. 2; Heb. xii. 13; paddov 8é, Eph. iv. 28; v.
11. od xi pa@ddov; (nonne potius ?) not rather ete.? 1 Co.
V.25 Vint B. so that paGdAov belongs to the thing
which is preferred, consequently to a noun, not toa
388
pavOdave
verb: Jn. iii. 19 (Fydmnoav paddov Td oxédros fj Td Pas,
i. e. when they ought to have loved the light they (hated
it, and) loved the darkness, vs. 20); xii. 48; Acts iv.
19; v.29; 2 Tim. iii. 4. that which it opposes and sets
ande must be learned from the context [cf. W. § 35, 4]:
Mk. xv. 11 (se. 4 rév Ingodv) ; Phil. i. 12 (where the mean-
ing is, ‘so far is the gospel from suffering any loss or dis-
advantage from my imprisonment, that the number of
disciples is increased in consequence of it’). y. by
way of correction, paddov b€, nay rather; to speak more
correctly: Gal. iv. 9 (Joseph. antt. 15, 11, 3; Ael. v. h.
2, 13 and often in prof. auth.; cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch.
on Sap. p. 176 sq.). c. it does not do away with that
with which it is in opposition, but marks what has the
preference: more willingly, more readily, sooner
(Germ. lieber), O€\w paddov and €tSox6 paddor, to prefer,
1 Co. xiv. 5; 2 Co. v. 8, (BovAouat paddov, Xen. Cyr. 1,
1, 1); ¢ndovv, 1 Co. xiv. 1 (uadAoyv sc. {povre) ; XpSpat,
1 Co. vii. 21.
Méaxos (371) Grecized; ef. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr.
£ uth. Thee 1876, p. 605), -ov, 6 6, Malchus, a servant
of the high-priest : Jn. xviii. 10. [Cf. Hackett in B. D.
Sorvall
pauun, -ns, 7, 1. in the earlier Grk. writ. mother
(the name infants use in addressing their mother). 2.
in the later writ. ([Philo], Joseph., Plut., App., Hdian.,
Artem.) i. q. 774n, grandmother (see Lob. ad Phryn. pp.
133-135 [cf. W. 25]): 2 Tim. i. 5; 4 Mace. xvi. 9.*
popovas (GLT Tr WH), incorrectly pappovas (Rec.
{in Mt.]),-@ [B. 20 (18); W. § 8, 1], 6, mammon (Chald.
siiDND, to be derived, apparently, fr. jx; hence what is
trusted in [cf. Buxtorf, Lex. chald. talmud. et rabbin. col.
1217 sq. (esp- ed. Fischer p. 613 sq.); acc. to Gesenius
(Thesaur. i. 552) contr. fr. 1}10019 treasure (Gen. xliii. 28) ;
cf. B. D. s. v.; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 2691),
riches: Mt. vi. 24 and Lk. xvi. 13, (where it is personi-
fied and opposed to God; ef. Phil. iii. 19); Lk. xvi. 9,
11. (“lucrwm punice mammon dicitur,” Augustine [de
serm. Dom. in monte, ]. ii. ¢. xiv. (§ 47)]; the Sept.
trans. the Hebr. 93398 in Is. xxxiii. 6 @gcavpol, and in
Ps. xxxvi, (xxxvii.) 3 modros.) *
Mavayy, 6, (0131) consoler), Manaen, a certain prophet
in the church at Antioch: Acts xiii. 1. [See Hackett
Ine Bea aecvalls
Mavaccfis [Treg. Mavv. in Rev.], gen. and ace. -4
[B. 19 (17); W. § 10,1; but see WH. App. p. 159°],
6, (NWI) causing to forget, fr. Nw to forget), Manas.
seh; 1. the firstborn son of Joseph (Gen. xli. 51):
Rev. vii. 6. 2. the son of Hezekiah, king of Judah
(2 K. xxi, 1-18): Mt. i. 10.*
pavOdve; 2 aor. guabov; pf. ptep. peuadnxas; Sept.
for 1373 (fr. Hom. down]; to learn, be apprised; a.
univ. Cabal to increase one’s knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 11;
2 Tim. iii. 7; to be increased in knowledge, 1 Co. xiv.
313; ri, Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. xiv. 353 Phil. iv. 9; 2 Tim.
iii, 145 Rey. xiv. 3; in Jn. vii. 15 supply aird; foll. by
an indir. quest., Mt. ix. 133; Xpsrrdy, to be imbued with
the knowledge of Christ, Eph. iv. 20; ri foll. by daé w.
pavia
gen. of the thing furnishing the instruction, Mt. xxiv. 32;
MK. xiii. 28; dzé w. gen. of the pers. teaching, Mt. xi.
29; Col. i. 7; as in class. Grk. (cf. Kriiger § 68, 34, 1;
B. § 147, 5 [cf. 167 (146) and dao, I. 1 d.]); fol. oe
mapa W. gen. of pers. teaching, 2 Tim. iii. 14 cf. Jn. vi. 45;
foll. by €v w. dat. of pers., in one i. e. by his example [see
ev, I. 3 b.], 1 Co. iv. 6 [ef. W. 590 (548 sq-); B. 394 sq.
(338) ]. b. i. q. to hear, be informed: foll. by drt, Acts
Xxlii. 275 ri dad ruvos (gen. of pers.), Gal. iii. 2 [see dao,
W6SEAE c. to learn by use and practice; [in the Pret.]
to be in the habit of, accustomed to: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim.
v. 4; Tit. iii. 14; Phil. iv. 11, (Aeschyl. Prom. 1068; Xen.
an. 8, 2, 25); euadev ad’ ev mabe tiv irakonv, Heb. v. 8
{ef. W. § 68, 1 and dé, u. s.]. In the difficult passage
1 Tim. v. 13, neither dpyai depends upon the verb pav6d-
vovot (which would mean “ they learn to be idle”, or
“learn idleness”; so Bretschneider [Lex. s. v. 2 b.], and
W. 347 (325 sq.); [cf. Stallbaum’s note and reff. on
Plato’s Euthydemus p. 276 b.]), nor mepuepydspuevor (“ they
learn to go about from house to house,” —so the majority
of interpreters; for, acc. to uniform Grk. usage, a ptcp.
joined to the verb pavOdvew and belonging to the subject
denotes what sort of a person one learns or perceives him-
self to be, as euabev eyxvos ovca, “she perceived herself
to be with child,” Hdt. 1,5); but pavOavew must be taken
absolutely (see a. above) and emphatically, of what they
learn by going about from house to house and what it is
unseemly for them to know; cf. Bengel ad loc., and B.
§ 144, 17; [so Wordsworth in loc.]. [Come.:
pavOave. | *
pavia, -as, 7, (ualvouar), madness, frenzy: Acts xxvi.
24. [From Theognis, Hdt., down. ] *
pavva, 7d, indecl.; [also] 7 pavva in Joseph. (antt. 3,
13,1 [ete. ; 7 pavyn, Orac. Sibyll. 7,149]); Sept. rd wav [also
76 pavva, Num. xi. 7] for Hebr. }1) (fr. the unused 12,
kKaTa-
G -
Arab. ee to be kind, beneficent, to bestow liberally ;
whence the subst. oy prop. a gift [al. prefer the deriv.
given Ex. xvi. 15,31; Joseph. antt. 3, 1,6. The word
mannu is said to be ad also in the old Hey pian Libers,
Durch Gosen u.s.w. p. 226; cf. “Speaker’s Commentary”
Exod. xvi. note]}); manna (Vulg. in N. T. manna indecl. ;
in O. T. man; yet manna, gen. -ae, is used by Pliny [12,
14, 32, etc.] and Vegetius [Vet. 2, 39] of the grains of
certain plants) ; according to the accounts of travellers
a very sweet dew-like juice, which in Arabia and other
oriental countries exudes from the leaves [acc. to others
only from the twigs and branches; cf. Robinson, Pal.
i. 115] of certain trees and shrubs, particularly in the
summer of rainy years. It hardens into little white
pellucid grains, and is collected before sunrise by the in-
habitants of those countries and used as an article of food,
very sweet like honey. The Israelites in their journey
through the wilderness met with a great quantity of food
of ane kind; and tradition, which the biblical writers
follow, rode it as bread sent down in profusion from
heaven, and in various ways gave the occurrence the dig-
389
Mapiap
nity of an illustrious miracle (Ex. xvi. 12 sqq.; Ps.
Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 24; civ. (ev.) 40; Sap. xvi. 20); ef.
Win. RWB.» v. Manna; Knobel on Exod. p. 171 sqq.;
Furrer in Schenkel iv. 109 sq-; [Robinson as above,
and p.590; Tischendorf, Aus dem heil. Lande, p. 54 sqq.
(where on p. vi. an analysis of diff. species of natural
manna is given after Berthelot (Comptes rendus heb-
dom. d. séances de l’acad. des sciences. Paris 1861, 2de
sémestre (30 Sept.) p. 583 sqq.); esp. Ritter, Erdkunde
Pt. xiv. pp. 665-695 (Gage’s trans. vol. i. pp. 271-292,
where a full list of reff. is given); esp. E. Renaud and
E. Lacour, De la manne du désert ete. (1881). Against
the identification of the natural manna with the miracu-
lous, see BB.DD. s. v.; esp. Riehm in his HWB.; Car-
ruthers in the Bible Educator ii. 174 sqq.]. In the N. T.
mention is made of a. that manna with which the
Israelites of old were nourished: Jn. vi. 31, 49, and R
L in 58; b. that which was kept in the ark of the
covenant: Heb. ix. 4 (Ex. xvi. 33); c. that which
in the symbolic language of Rev. ii. 17 is spoken of as
kept in the heavenly temple for the food of angels and
the blessed; [see didau, B. I’. p. 146°].*
pavrevopar; (pdvris [a seer; allied to pavia, patvopat;
ef. Curtius § 429]); fr. Hom. down; to act as seer; de-
liver an oracle, prophesy, divine: Acts xvi. 16 wavtevopern,
of a false prophetess [A. V. by soothsaying]. Sept. for
DOP, to practise divination; said of false prophets. [On
the heathen character of the suggestions and associa-
tions of the word, as distinguished fr. mpopnrevo, see
Trench, N. T. Syn. § vi.]*
1 fut. pass. pwapavOncona; fr. Hom. I. 9,
212; 23, 228 on; lo extinguish (a flame, fire, light, etc.) ;
to render arid, make to waste away, cause to wither; pass.
to wither, wilt, dry up (Sap. ii. 8 of roses; Job xv. 30).
Trop. to waste away, consume away, perish, (védc@, Kur.
Ale. 203; r@ Awe, Joseph. b. j. 6, 5, 1); i. q. to have a
miserable end: Jas. i. 11, where the writer uses a fig.
suggested by what he had HE said (10) ; [B. 52 (46)].*
papavadd [so Lchm., but pPapay ada RG T Tr WH], the
Chald. words TNX 87D, i. e. our Lord cometh or will
come: 1 Co. xvi. 22. [BB. DD.; cf. Klostermann, Pro-
bleme etc. (1883) p. 220 sqq.; Kautzsch, Gr. pp. 12, 174;
Nestle in Theol. Stud. aus Wiirtem. 1884 p. 186 sqq.]*
papyaptrys, -ov, 6, a pearl: Mt. xiii. 45 sq.; 1 Tim. ii.
9; Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. [12], 16; xxi. 21 [hereL TWH
accent -ptra, RG Tr -pira (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 101)];
tovs papyapitas BddXew eurpoobev xoipwr, a proverb, i. e.
to thrust the most sacred and precious teachings of the
gospel upon the most wicked and abandoned men (in-
competent as they are, through their hostility to the
gospel, to receive them), and thus to profane them, Mt.
vii. 6 (cf. Prov. iii. 15 sq.; Job xxviii. 28 sq.).*
Mép0a, -as (Jn. xi. 1 [ef. B. 17 (15); WH. App. p. 156]),
9, (Chald. xn mistress, Lat. domina), Martha, the sis-
ter of Lazarus of Bethany: Lk. x. 38, 40 sq.; Jn. xi. 1,
6, 19-39; xii. 2. [On the accent cf. Kautzsch p. 8.]*
Mop indecl., and Mapia, -as, 9, (0°) ‘obstinacy,’
‘rebelliousness ’; the well-known prop. name of the sister
papatve :
Maoxos
of Moses; in the Targums 0°91; ef. Delitzsch, Zeitschr.
f. luth. Theol. for 1877 p. 2 [Maria is a good Latin name
also}), Mary. The women of this name mentioned in
the N. T. are the foll. 1. the mother of Jesus Christ,
the wife of Joseph; her name is written Mapia [in an
oblique case] in Mt.i. 16,18; ii. 11; Mk. vi. 3; ksi.
41; Actsi.14[RGL]; Mapidp in Mt. xiii. 55; Lk. i. 27,
30-56 [(in 88 Lmrg. Mapia)]; ii. 5, 16,34; [Acts i. 14
T Tr WH]; the reading varies between the two forms
in Mt. i. 20 [WH txt. -piav}; Lk. ii. 19 [LT Tr WH txt.
-pia}; so where the other women of this name are men-
tioned, [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 116, where it appears that
in his text the gen. is always (seven times) -pias; the
nom. in Mk. always (seven times) -pia; that in Jn. -pidy
occurs eleven times, -p/a (or -av) only three times, ete. ;
for the facts respecting the Mss., see (Tdf. u. s. and)
WH. App. p. 156]; ef. B. 17 (15). 2. Mary Mag-
dalene (a native of Magdala): Mt. xxvii. 56,615; xxviii.
Lee Milky 40047 = xvie dl, Os Wik. villa? eexivecl Omen.
tb, OE SOR TT ANS Miek 3. the mother of James
the less and Joses, the wife of Clopas (or Alpheus) and
sister of the mother of Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 56, 61; xxviii.
We Wis, See OS soy I We Son, WOR” din, sin Vs
(see "IdckwBos, 2). There are some, indeed, who, think-
ing it improbable that there were two living sisters of
the name of Mary (the common opinion), suppose that
not three but four women are enumerated in Jn. xix. 25,
and that these are distributed into two pairs so that 4
adeAp) THs pntpos Incod designates Salome, the wife of
Zebedee; so esp. Wieseler inthe Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for
1840, p. 648 sqq., [ef. Bp. Lghtft. com. on Gal., Dissert.
li. esp. pp. 255 sq. 264] with whom Liicke, Meyer, Ewald
and others agree; in opp. to them cf. Grimm in Ersch
and Gruber’s Encykl. sect. 2 vol. xxii. p.1 sq. In fact,
instances are not wanting among the Jews of two living
brothers of the same name, e. g. Onias, in Joseph. antt.
12, 5,1; Herod, sons of Herod the Great, one by Mari-
amne, the other by Cleopatra of Jerusalem, Joseph. antt.
17,1, 3; b. j.1, 28, 4; [ef. B. D.s. v. Mary of Cleophas ;
Bp. Lghtft. u. s. p. 264]. 4. the sister of Lazarus
and Martha: Lk. x. 39,42; Jn. xi. 1-45; xii. 3. 5:
the mother of John Mark: Acts xii. 12. 6. a cer-
tain Christian woman mentioned in Ro. xvi. 6.*
Méapkos, -ov, 6, Mark; acc. to the tradition of the church
the author of the second canonical Gospel and identical
with the John Mark mentioned in the Acts (see Iwdvyns,
5). He was the son of a certain Mary who dwelt at Je-
rusalem, was perhaps converted to Christianity by Peter
(Acts xii. 11 sq.), and for this reason called (1 Pet. v. 13)
Peter’s son. He was the cousin of Barnabas and the
companion of Paul in some of his apostolic travels; and
lastly was the associate of Peter also: Acts xii. 12, 25;
xv. 37, 39; Col. iv.10; 2 Tim. iv. 11; Philem. 24 (23);
1 Pet v. 13, cf. Euseb. h. e. 2, 15 sq:; 3,39. Some, as
Grotius, [ Tillemont, Hist. Eccl. ii. 89 sq. 503 sq.; Patri-
tius, De Evangeliis 1. 1, c. 2, quaest. 1 (cf. Cotelerius, Patr.
Apost. i. 262 sq.)], Kienlen (in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843,
p. 423), contend that there were two Marks, one the
390
papTupes
disciple and companion of Paul mentioned in the Acts
and Pauline Epp., the other the associate of Peter and
mentioned in 1 Pet. v. 13; [ef. Jas. Morison, Com. on
Mk. Introd. § 4; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 10].*
pdppapos, -ov, 6, 7, (wappaipa to sparkle, glisten); 1.
a stone, rock, (Hom., Eur.). 2. marble ({cf. Ep. Jer.
71], Theophr., Strabo, al.): Rev. xviii. 12.*
pdptup, -vpos, 6, See paprus.
paptupéw, -; impf. 3 pers. plur. ¢uapripovy; fut. pap-
tupnow; 1 aor. éuaptipyoa; pf. pewapripnxa; Pass., pres.
paprupodpar; impf. euaprupodpny; pf. pepaptvpnpar; 1 aor.
évaptupnonv; fr. [Simon., Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down ;
to be a witness, to bear witness, testify, i. e. to affirm that
one has seen or heard or experienced something, or that
(so in the N. T.) he knows it because taught by divine
revelation or inspiration, (sometimes in the N. T. the
apostles are said paprupeiv, as those who had been eye-
and ear- witnesses of the extraordinary sayings, deeds
and sufferings of Jesus, which proved his Messiahship ;
so too Paul, as one to whom the risen Christ had visibly
appeared; cf. Jn. xv. 27; xix. 35; xxi. 24; Acts xxiil.
11; 1 Co.xv. 15; 1Jn.1i. 2, (cf. Acts. 22'sq.; ii. 325 iii.
Gheptin. Venn Sach tin Stik IG Soqehilhs [or
Westcott, (“Speaker’s”) Com. on Jn., Introd. p. xlv.
sq-]) 3 a. in general; absol. to give (not to keep
back) testimony: Jn. xv. 27; Acts xxvi. 5; foll. by ére
recitative and the orat. direct., Jn. iv. 39; also preceded
by A€yor, Jn. i. 32; paprupety eis with an ace. of the place
into (unto) which the testimony (concerning Christ) is
borne, Acts xxiii. 11 [see e’s, A. I. 5b.]; paprupa, in-
serted parenthetically (W. § 62, 2), 2 Co. viii. 3; i. q.
to prove or confirm by testimony, 1 Jn. y. 6 sq.; used of
Jesus, predicting what actually befell him, Jn. xiii. 21;
of God, who himself testifies in the Scriptures that a
thing is so (viz. as the author declares), foll. by the reci-
tative érz, Heb. vii. 17 R. apr. foll. by mepi w. gen. of
a pers., to bear witness concerning one: Jn.i. 7 sq.3 wept
tov avOpamov, concerning man, i. e. to tell what one has
himself learned about the nature, character, conduct, of
men, Jn. ii. 25 [see avOpwros, 1 a.]; mepi twos, foll. by
direct disc., Jn. i. 15; the Scriptures are said to testify
mept Inco, i. e. to declare things which make it evi-
dent that he was truly sent by God, Jn. v. 39; God is said
to do the same, — through the Scriptures, ib. 37 cf. viii.
18; through the expiation wrought by the baptism and
death of Christ, and the Holy Spirit giving souls assur-
ance of this expiation, 1 Jn. v. 6-9; so John the Baptist,
as being a ‘ prophet’, Jn. v. 32; so the works which he
himself did, ib. 36 (there foll. by 6rv); x. 25; so the
Holy Spirit, Jn. xv. 26; the apostles, 27; so Christ him-
self rept €avrod, Jn. v. 31; viii. 13 sq. 18. epi w. gen.
of the thing, Jn. xxi. 24; mepi rod xaxod, to bring for-
ward evidence to prove 16 xaxdv, Jn. xviii. 23. with the
ace. of a cognate noun, paprupiav paprupeiy mepi W. agen.
of the pers., Jn. v. 32; 1 Jn. v. 9 Rec.; 10, (riv abriy
Haptupiay paptupety, Plat. Eryx. p. 399 b.; my paprupiay
avrov fv tH dperp paprupei, Epict. diss. 4, 8, 32 (cf. W.
225 (211); B. 148 (129)]); w. an ace. of the thing, #
wapTupéw
testify a thing, bear witness to (of) anything: In. iii. 11,
32; supply airé in Jn. xix. 35; rwi rr, 1 In. i. 2; db
€uapripyce . . . Xpiorovd, who has borne witness of (viz.
in this book, i. e. the Apocalypse) what God has spoken
and Jesus Christ testified (sc. concerning future events;
see Adyos, I. 2b. €.), Rev. i. 2; 6 paprupadv radra he that
testifieth these things i. e. has caused them to be testified
by the prophet, his messenger, Rev. xxii. 20; parupqoa
buiv ratra emt [L Trmrg. WH mrg. ev] rais éxxAnoias, to
cause these things to be testified to you in the churches
or for, on account of, the churches, Rev. xxii. 16,—
unless émé be dropped from the text and the passage
translated, to you, viz. the (seven) churches (of Asia
‘Minor), the prophet reverting again to i. 4; cf. De
Wette, Bleek, Diisterdieck, ad loc.; [al., retaining ézi,
render it over, concerning, cf. x. 11; W. 393 (368) c.; see
éri, B. 2 f. 8. fin.]. of testimony borne not in word but
by deed, in the phrase used of Christ paprupetv tiv cadjv
6podoyiav, to witness the good confession, to attest the
truth of the (Christian) profession by his sufferings and
death, 1 Tim. vi. 18, where cf. Hofmann. Pass.: Ro.
iii. 21 (a righteousness such as the Scriptures testify
that God ascribes to believers, cf. iv. 3). apr. foll. by
ore that, Jn. i. 34 [ef. W. 273 (256)]; [iv. 44]; xii. 17
[here R* Tr txt. WH dre]; 1 Jn. iv. 14; wepi w. gen. of
a pers. foll. by drt, Jn. v. 363; vii. 7; kata rwvos, against
[so W. 382 (357), Mey., al.; yet see xara, I. 2 b.] one,
foll. by 671, 1 Co. xv. 15. w. a dat. of the thing ie.
for the benefit of, in the interests of, a thing [cf. B.
§ 133, 11]: rH dAnOeia, In. v. 33; xviii. 37; cod TH ady-
Geia (see adnGera, II.), to bear witness unto thy truth,
how great it is, 3 Jn. 3, 6; used of the testimony which
is given in deeds to promote some object: 76 Adya,
Acts xiv. 3 [T prefixes émi]; with a dat. (of a thing)
incommodi: paprupeire (T Tr WH padprupés eore) rots
épyos Tav matépwv, by what ye are doing ye add to the
deeds of your fathers a testimony which proves that
those things were done by them, Lk. xi. 48. w. a dat.
of the person: to declare to one by testimony (by sug-
gestion, instruction), Heb. x. 15; foll. by direct dis-
course, Rev. xxii. 18 GLT Tr WH; ¢o testify to one
what he wishes one to testify concerning him: Acts xxii. 5;
foll. by ér, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. iii. 28; Ro. x. 2; Gal. iv.
15; Col. iv. 13; foll. by an acc. w. inf. Acts x.43; to
give testimony in one’s favor, to commend [W. § 31, 4 b.;
B. as above]: Jn. iii. 26; Acts xiii. 22; xv. 83 pass.
paptupodpat witness is borne to me, it is witnessed of me
(W. § 39, 1; B.§ 134, 4): foll. by dr, Heb. vii. 8; foll.
by ére recitative and direct disc., Heb. vii. 17 LT Tr
WH; foll. by an inf. belonging to the subject, Heb. xi.
4 sq. b. emphatically; to utter honorable testimony,
give a good report: w.a dat. of the pers., Lk. iv. 22; émt
rum, on account of, for a thing, Heb. xi. 4 [here L Tr read
pap. emi xrd. ré ep (but see the Comm.) }; pepaptupyrai.
run ind twos, 3 Jn. 12; pass. paprupovpat to be borne
(good) witness to, to be well reported of, to have (good)
testimony borne to one, accredited, attested, of good report,
approved: Acts vi. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17, 1 sq.; 18,
391
bapTupLop
1; 19,1; 47,4); foll. by & w. a dat. of the thing in
which the commended excellence appears, 1 Tim. v. 10;
Heb. xi. 2, (nt rum, for a thing, Athen. 1 p. 25 f.; [yet
cf. W. 387 (362) note]); 8d twos, to have (honorable)
testimony borne to one through (by) a thing, Heb. xi.
39; bad w. gen. of the pers. giving honorable testimony,
Acts x. 22; xvi. 2; xxii. 12, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 38, 2;
44, 3; Ignat. ad Philad. c. 5, 2 cf. 11,1 and ad Eph. 12,
2; Antonin. 7, 62); w. dat. of the pers. testifying (i. q.
tmé twos), Acts xxvi. 22 RG. c. Mid., acc. to a
false reading, to conjure, implore: 1 Th. ii. 12 (11), where
T Tr WH have rightly restored paprupépevo. [Comp.:
€ml-, TUr-eTt-, KATA-, TUE-LapTupEw. | *
paptupia,, -as, 9, (uaprupea, q. V.), (fr. Hom.down]; 1.
a testifying : the office committed to the prophets of tes
tifying concerning future events, Rev. xi. 7. 2.
what one testifies, testimony: univ. Jn. v. 34; in a legal
sense, of testimony before a judge: Lk. xxii. 71; Mk.
xiv. 565 w. gen. of the subj., Mk. xiv. 59; Jn. viii. 17;
1 Jn. v. 9; xard twos, against one, Mk. xiv. 55; in an
historical sense, of the testimony of an historian: Jn.
xix. 35; xxi. 24; in an ethical sense, of testimony con-
cerning one’s character: 3 Jn. 12; 1 Tim. iii. 7; Tit. i.
13; in a predominantly dogmatic sense respecting mat-
ters relating to the truth of Christianity: of the testi-
mony establishing the Messiahship and the divinity of
Jesus (see paprupéw, a.), given by —John the Bap-
tist: Jn.i. 7; v. 32; 4 papr. rod “Iwdvvov, i. 19; Jesus
himself, w. a gen. of the subj., Jn. v. 31; viii. 13 sq. ;
God, in the prophecies of Scripture concerning Jesus
the Messiah, in the endowments conferred upon him,
in the works done by him, Jn. v. 36; through the Holy
Spirit, in the Christian’s blessed consciousness of eternal
life and of reconciliation with God, obtained by baptism
[(cf. reff. s. v. Barricpa, 3)] and the expiatory death
of Christ, w. a subject. gen. rod Ocod, 1 Jn. v. 9-11, cf. 6-8;
the apostles, cov thy papt. wept éuov, Acts xxii. 18
[W. 137 (130)]; the other followers of Christ: Rev.
vi. 9; w.a gen. of the subj. atrayv, Rev. xii. 11; w. a
gen. of the obj. "Incod, ib. 17; xix. 10; xx. 4 (€yew this
paprt. is to hold the testimony, to persevere steadfastly in
bearing it, Rev. vi. 9; xii. 17; xix. 10, [see ¢yo, I. 1d.];
others, however, explain it to have the duty of testifying
laid upon one’s self); elsewhere the “testimony” of
Christ is that which he gives concerning divine things,
of which he alone has thorough knowledge, Jn. iii. 11,
32 sq.3 9 papr. "Inoov, that testimony which he gave
concerning future events relating to the consummation
of the kingdom of God, Rev. i. 2 (cf. xxii. 16, 20); d.a
Thy p. "Inood Xptorod, to receive this testimony, ib. 9.*
Hapripioy, -ov, 7d, (udprup [cf pdprus]), [fr. Pind.,
Hat. down], Sept. for ty, 77)!, oftener for nity (an or-
dinance, precept); most freq. for ty! (an assembly),
as though that came fr. 11 to testify, whereas it is fr.
yr to appoint; testimony ; a. w. a gen. of the
subj.: ris cuverdjoews, 2 Co. i. 12; w. gen. of obj.: dzo-
bSdvat 7d pe. THS avaotdacews "Inoov, Acts iv. 33. b.
rod Xptorov, concerning Christ the Saviour [cf. W. § 30,
papTvpopas
1 a.]: the proclamation of salvation by the apostles
is so called (for reasons given under paprupéa, init-),
1 Co. i. 6; also rod kvpiov jar, 2 Tim. i. 8; rod Oeod,
concerning God [W. u. s.], i. e. concerning what God
has done through Christ for the salvation of men, 1 Co.
ii. 1 [here WH txt. puornpsor]; w. the subject. gen. jpav,
given by us, 2 Th. i. 10. ets wapr. r&v AaAnOnvopévar,
to give testimony concerning those things which were
to be spoken (in the Messiah’s time) i. e. concerning the
Christian revelation, Heb. iii. 5; cf. Delitzsch ad loc.
[al. refer it to the Mosaic law (Num. xii. 7, esp. 8) ;
cf. Riehm, Lehrbegriff d. Heb. i. 312]. c. eis pup-
tipiov avrois for a testimony unto them, that they may
have testimony, i. e. evidence, in proof of this or that:
e. g. that a leper has been cured, Mt. viii. 4; Mk. i. 44;
Lk. vy. 14; that persons may get knowledge of something
the knowledge of which will be for their benefit, Mt. x.
18; xxiv. 14; Mk. xiii. 9; that they may have evidence
of their impurity, Mk. vi. 11; in the same case we find
eis papt. €m avtovs, for a testimony against them [cf. eri,
C. I. 2g. y. BB.], Lk. ix. 55 dmoBncerat iui eis papr. it
will turn out to you as an opportunity of bearing testi-
mony concerning me and my cause, Lk. xxi. 13; eis p.
tpiv éoras, it will serve as a proof of your wickedness,
Jas. v. 3; by apposition to the whole preceding clause
(W. § 59, 9 a.), 7d papr. katpois idiots, that which (to wit,
that Christ gave himself as a ransom) would be (the sub-
stance of) the testimony i. q. was to be testified (by the
apostles and the preachers of the gospel) in the times
fitted for it, 1 Tim. ii. 6 [where Lchm. om. 76 papr.]; cf.
the full exposition of this pass. in Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom.
iii. p. 12 sqq. 1) oxy) Tov paprupiov, Acts vii. 44; Rev.
xv. 5; in Sept. very often for 1yjn-bnk (see above),
and occasionally for niyn Sms, as Ex. xxxviii. 26;
Lev. xxiv. 8, etc.* or
Hapripopat (fr. wdptup [cf. wdprus]); 1. to cite a
witness, bring forward a witness, call to witness, (Trage.,
Thuce., Plato, sqq.); to affirm by appeal to God, to declare
solemnly, protest: tatra, Plat. Phil. p.47¢.; 6re, Acts xx.
26; Gal. v. 3. 2. to conjure, beseech as in God’s
name, exhort solemnly: twi, Acts xxvi. 22 LT Tr WH;
foll. by the ace. w. inf., Eph. iv. 17; es ré foll. by acc.
w. inf. [cf. B. § 140, 10, 3], 1 Th. ii. 12 (141) T Tr WH.
[Comp.: d:a-, po-paprvpopat. | *
paprus (Aeolic pdprup, a form not found in the N. T.;.
[etymologically one who is mindful, heeds; prob. allied
with Lat. memor, cf. Vaniéek p. 1201; Curtius § 466]),
~upos, acc. -vpa, 6; plur. wdprupes, dat. plur. pdprvor; Sept.
for 13; [Hes., Simon., Theogn., al.]; @ witness (one who
avers, or can aver, what he himself has seen or heard or
knows by any other means) ; a. ina legal sense:
Mt. xviii. 16; xxvi. 65; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts vi. 13; vii.
58; 2 Co. xiii. 1; 1 Tim. v. 19; Heb. x. 28. b. in
an historical sense: Acts x. 41; 1 Tim. vi. 12; [2 Tim.
ii. 2]; one who is a spectator of anything, e. g. of a con-
test, Heb. xii. 1; w. a gen. of the obj., Lk. xxiv. 48;
Acts i. 22; ii. 32; iii. 15; v.32 G@LT Tr WH; x. 39;
xxvi. 16; 1 Pet. v.13; w.a gen. of the possessor ‘ one
392
PaTALOS
who testifies for one’, Actsi.8 LT Tr WH; xiii. 31; w
a gen. of the possessor and of the obj., Acts v. 32 Rec. ;
pdprupa eivai ti, to be a witness for one, serve him by
testimony, Acts i. 8 RG; xxii. 15; [Lk. xi. 48 T Tr
WH]. He is said to be a witness, to whose attestation
appeal is made; hence the formulas pdprus pov éorw 6
6eds, Ro. i. 9; Phil. i. 8; Oeds paprvs, 1 Th. ii. 5; paprupa
rov Oedv émtxadodpat, 2 Co. i. 23; bpeis pdprupes k. 6 Beds,
1 Th. ii. 10; the faithful interpreters of God’s counsels
are called God’s witnesses: Rev. xi. 3; Christ is reck-
oned among them, Rev. i. 5; iil. 14. c. in an ethi-
cal sense those are called pdprupes "Incov, who after his
example have proved the strength and genuineness of
their faith in Christ by undergoing a violent death [cf
B. D. Am. ed. and Dict. of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Martyr]:
Acts xxii. 20; Rev. ii. 13; xvii. 6.*
pads, Doric for pagrds (q.v-): Rev. i. 13 Tdf. [“ this
form seems to be Western” (Hort, App. p. 149)].
parcdopat (RG) more correctly pacdopa (LT Tr
WH): impf. 3 pers. plur. €uacdvto; (MAQ, pdooa, to
knead) ; to chew, consume, eat, devour, (kpeas, Arstph.
Plut. 321; ra d€ppara trav Ouvpeav, Joseph. b. j. 6, 3, 35
pitas Etdov, Sept. Job xxx. 4, and other exx. in other
auth.) : €uaca@vto tas yAwooas a’tav, they gnawed their
tongues (for pain), Rev. xvi. 10.*
partiyse, -@, 3 pers. sing. paotvyot; fut. paotryace ;
1 aor. €uaotiywoa; (udor€); fr. Hdt.down; Sept. chiefly
for N37; to scourge; prop.: twd, Mt. x. 17; xx.19; xxiii.
34; Mk. x.34; Lk. xviii. 33; Jn. xix.1; [cf. B. D. s.v.
Scourging; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. excurs. xi.]. metaph.
of God as a father chastising and training men as chil-
dren by afflictions: Heb. xii. 6; cf. Jer. v. 3; Prov. iii.
12; Judith viii. 27.*
partite; i. q. pactiyda, q. v.; Twa, Acts xxii. 25.
(Num. xxii. 25; Sap. v. 11, and often in Hom.) *
paorré, -vyos, 7, @ whip, scourge, (for viv, 1 K. xii. 11,
14; Prov. xxvi. 3): Acts xxii. 24; Heb. xi.36; metaph.
a scourge, plague, i.e. a calamity, misfortune, esp. as sent
by God to discipline or punish (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.)
33; with Avs added, Hom. Il. 12, 37; 13, 812; Geo,
Aeschyl. sept. 607): of distressing bodily diseases, Mk.
iit. 1056 v.929, Sain Dikevils iss oi Maccaixe 1
pacrds, -ov, 6, (udcow to knead [more prob. akin to
paddo, Lat. madidus, ete.; cf. Vaniéek p. 693; Curtius
§ 456]), fr. Soph., Hdt. down; the breast (for Ww’, Job iii.
12; Cant. i. 13, ete.); plur., the breasts (nipples) of a man,
Rey. i. 13 RG Tr WH [here Tdf. pao@ois (cf. WH. App.
p- 149*), Lehm. pagois]; breasts of a woman, Lk. xi. 27;
XXIie2 9"
[Maradlas, see Marrafias. |
paratodoyla, -as, 7, (uatavoddyos), vain talking, empty
talk, (Vulg. vaniloquium) : 1 Tim.i.6. (Plut. mor. p. 6 f.;
Porphyr. de abstin. 4, 16.) *
Baravoddyos, -ov, 6, (udravos and Aéyw), an idle talker,
one who utters empty, senseless things: Tit. i. 10.*
paratos, -aia (1 Co. xv. 17; [1 Pet. i. 18]), -aov, also
-os, -ov, (Jas.i. 26; Tit. iii. 9), [ef. WH. App. p.157; W.
§ 11, 1], (fr. parny), Sept. for 5277, Niw, 373 (a lie), ete.;
uaTaLoTns
as in prof. auth. (Lat. vanus) devoid of force, truth, suc-
cess, result, (A.V. uniformly vain]: univ.: 9 Opnoxeta, Jas.
i. 26; useless, to no purpose, miotis, 1 Co. xv. 17; fool-
ish, dvadoyiopol, 1 Co. iii. 20; Cyrfoets, Tit. iii. 9; given
to vain things and leading away from salvation, dva-
orpopy, 1 Pet. i. 18. ra pdraa, vain things, vanities, of
heathen deities and their worship Coan, Jeri. 5; x.3;
5ann palais) y7; mopeverbar oricw ray par. 2 K. xvii.
15; 09373, pdraa, Jer. viii. 19; eSoAa, Deut. xxxii. 21;
Jer. xiv. 22): Acts xiv. 15. [Cf Trench, Syn. § xlix.]*
Paratdrns, -nTos, 7, (uatatos, q- V.), a purely bibl. and
eccles. word [(Pollux I. 6 ¢. 32 § 134)]; Sept. for ban
(often in Eccles.), also for NW, ete.; vanity; a. what
ts devoid of truth and appropriateness: imépoyxa parav-
tyTos (gen. of quality), 2 Pet. ii. 18.
ness, depravation: rod vods, Eph. iv. 17.
want of vigor: Ro. viii. 20.*
parade: (pdraos); 1 aor. pass. éuatadOnv; to make
empty, vain, foolish: evaram@noay év trois diadoyurpois
avrav, were brought to folly in their thoughts, i. e. fell
into error, Ro. i. 21. (2 K. xvii. 15; Jer. ii. 5; 1 Chr.
xxi. 8; [etc.]; nowhere in Grk. auth.) *
parny (accus. [cf. W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12] of pdrn,
i. q. paria, a futile attempt, folly, fault), adv., fr. Pind.,
Aeschyl. down, in vain, fruitlessly: Mt. xv. 9 and Mk.
vii. 7, after Isa. xxix. 13 Sept.*
Mar€aios (L T Tr WH Maééaios, cf. B. 8 (7); [WH.
App. 159°; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. § 5 p. 562]), -ov
[B. 18 (16)], 6, (commonly regarded as Hebr. m9 gift
of God, fr. }m and A); but Arp is in Greek Marias,
and the analogy of the names *3n (fr. 1M a festival) in
Greek ’Ayyaios, ‘31 Zaxyaios, and others, as well as the
b. perverse-
c. frailty,
Vv
Syriac form of the name before us wd.So, [and its form
in the Talmud, viz. »n> or "NN; Sanhedrin 43°; Meu-
schen, N. T. ex Talm. illustr. p. 8] certainly lead us to
adopt the Aramaic form ‘A, and to derive that from
the unused sing. nD, a man, plur. O°; hence i. q.
manly, cf. Grimm in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1870, p. 723
sqq-), Matthew, at first a collector of imposts, afterwards
an apostle of Jesus: Mt. ix. 9 sqq. (cf. Mk. ii. 14; Lk. v.
27 sqq.; see Aevi, 4); Mt.x.3; Mk.iii.18; Lk. vi.15; Acts
i.13. Acc. to Papias (in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39) he wrote down
EBpaidi diad€xrw ra (Kupiaxd) Adyta, i. e. the sayings of our
Lord ; this collection of discourses, perhaps already re-
touched by some one else and translated into Greek, the
author of our first canonical Gospel combined with ac-
counts of the acts and sufferings of Christ, and so it came
to pass that this Gospel was ascribed by the church to
Matthew asits author. [But this theory seems to be ren-
dered unnecessary by the fact that Adya had already
come to denote “sacred oracles” i. q. iepa ypdppara,
Joseph. b. j. 6, 5, 4, or fepat ypapai, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
53,1; see the added reff. s. v. Adyov. Cf. Fisher, Super-
nat. Origin of Christianity, pp. 160-167; and reff. in
Schaff, Hist. of the Christ. Church, i. 622 sq.; Bleek,
Einl. ins N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 115 sq.]*
Mar0dy (LT Tr WH Madédv [see reff. s. v. MarOaios]),
393
paxatpa
6, (jAD a gift), Matthan, one of Christ’s ancestors: Mt.
ellos
Marédr (Tdf. Ma6d6, [see reff. s. v. Mar6aios |), 4,
(nin, fr. }3), Matthat; 1. one of Christ’s ances-
tors, the son of Levi: Lk. iii. 24. 2. one of the
ancestors of the man just spoken of: Lk. iii. 29 [here
Tr WH Mad6dr (see as above) }.*
MarOias (T Tr WH Maé6ius [see reff. s. v. MarOaios]),
-a [yet cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, (see MarOaios), Matthias, the
apostle who took the place of Judas Iscariot: Acts i.
23, 26.*
Marra0a, 6, (see the preceding names), Mattatha, the
son of Nathan and grandson of David: Lk. iii. 31.*
Marraias,-ov [B. 18 (16)], 6, Wattathias ; 1. one of
Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 25 [here Treg. Ma66a6iov (cf.
reff. s. v. Mar@aios, init.) ]. 2. one of the ancestors
of the man just mentioned: Lk. iii. 26 [Trmrg. Mara6iov].*
pdxopa, gen. -as [so (with RG) Lehm. in Lk. xxi. 24]
and -ns, dat. -a [so (with R G) Lehm. in Lk. xxii. 49; Acts
xii. 2] and -y (betw. which forms the codd. vary, cf. [ Scriv-
ener, Collation, ete. p. lvi.; Tdf. Proleg. p.117; WH.
App. p. 156°]; W. 62 (61); B.11; Delitzsch on Heb. xi.
34 p. 584 note), 7, (akin to payn and Lat. mactare); ak
a large knife, used for killing animals and cutting up flesh:
Hom., Pind., Hdt., al.; hence Gen. xxii. 6,10; Judg. xix.
29 Alex.,for NOIND. 2. asmall sword, distinguished
fr. the large sword, the foudata (Joseph. antt. 6, 9, 5 dro-
Tépver THY Kearny TH poypala tH éxeivov (Goliath’s), pad-
xatpav ovk éxwv adtos), and curved, for a cutting stroke;
distinct also fr. Eidos, a straight sword, for thrusting, Xen.
r. eq. 12, 11, cf. Hell. 3, 3, 7; but the words are freq.
used interchangeably. Inthe N. T. univ. a sword (Sept.
often for 1>m) : as a weapon for making or repelling an
attack, Mt. xxvi. 47, 51, 52, [55]; Mk. xiv. 43, 47 sq.;
Lk. xxii. 36, 38, 49, 52; Jn. xviii. 10sq.; Acts xvi. 27;
Heb. xi. 37; Rev. vi. 43 xiii. 10, [14]; by a Hebraism,
ordua payaipas, the edge of the sword (1}1) °9, Gen. xxxiv.
26; Josh. viii. 24; 18. xiii. 22; Judg. iii. 16, etc. [but in
the Sept. the rendering or. Eipous or or. poucpaias is more
com.]): Lk. xxi. 24; Heb. xi. 34; pdyarpa dicropos (see
Sicropos), Heb. iv. 12. of the sword as the instrument
of a magistrate or judge: death by the sword, Ro. viii.
35; dvaipetv twa paxaipa, Acts xii. 2; ryv p. opeiv, to
bear the sword, is used of him to whom the sword has been
committed, viz. to use when a malefactor is to be pun-
ished; hence i. q. to have the power of life and death, Ro.
xiii. 4 (so Eidos, Eidn Zyew, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 7, 16 ;
vit. sophist. 1, 25, 2 (3), ef. Dion Cass. 42, 27; and in
the Talmud the king who bears the sword, of the Hebrew
king). Metaph. pdy., a weapon of war, is used for war,
or for quarrels and dissensions that destroy peace; so in
the phrase Badeiv paxatpav éni Thy yay, to send war on
earth, Mt. x. 34 (for which Lk. xii. 51 says d:apepeopdy) 5
) pax. Tod mvevparos, the sword with which the Spirit
subdues the impulses to sin and proves its own power and
efficacy (which sword is said to be pyya Gcod [cf. B. 128
(112)]), Eph. vi. 17 [on the gen. in this pass. cf. Ellicott
or Meyer].*
pax
paxn, -ns, 9, [wdxouar; fr. Hom. down], Sept. several
times for 2°, })1D, etc.; a fight, combat ; 1. of
those in arms, a battle. 2. of persons at variance,
disputants, etc., strife, contention; a quarrel: 2 Co. vii.
5; 2 Tim. ii. 23; Jas. iv. 1; pdyat voutxai, contentions
about the law, Tit. iii. 9.*
péxopar; impf. 3 pers. plur. éudyorro ; [allied with pa-
xapa; Curtius § 459; Vaniéek p. 687; fr. Hom. down];
to fight: prop. of armed combatants, or those who engage
in a hand-to-hand struggle, Acts vii. 26; trop. of those
who engage in a war of words, to quarrel, wrangle, dis-
pute: 2 Tim. ii. 24; mpos addndous, In. vi. 52 [ef. W.
§ 81,5; B.§ 133, 8]; of those who contend at law
for property and privileges, Jas. iv. 2. [Comp.: 8ua-
paxoua. SYN. see modepos, b.] *
peyad-auxéw, -@ ; (ueydAavyos, and this fr. peydAa and
aixéw); to be grandiloquent; to boast great things, to bear
one’s self loftily in speech or action: n yA@ooa peyadavyxet
(LT Tr WH peyada avxet), Jas. ili. 5, where it seems
to denote any kind of haughty language which wounds
and provokes others, and stirs up strife. (Aeschyl. Ag.
15285 Roly bs 12) 135° 10378; 23) 11)" Diod. 15,816,eal4s
mid. yuvaika mpos Oeovs épi{ovaay kat peyadavxouperqy,
Plat. rep. 3 p. 395 d.; for 723, to exalt one’s self, carry
one’s self haughtily, Ezek. xvi. 50; Zeph. iii. 11; add, 2
Mace. xv. 32; Sir. xlviii. 18.) *
peyadetos, free -ciov, (uéyas), magnificent, excellent, splen-
did, wonderful, (Xen., Joseph., Artem., al.); absol. pe-
yaXeia (roreiv ru) to do great things for one (show him
conspicuous favors), Lk. i.49 RG; ra peyadeia rod Geod
(Vulg. magnalia dei [A. V. the mighty works of God]),
i. e. the glorious perfections of God and his marvellous
doings (ni7‘3, Ps. Lxx. (Lxxi.) 19; Sir. xxxiii, (xxxvi.)
10; xlii. 21), Acts ii. 11.*
peyadedrns, -nTos, 7, (fr. the preceding word), great-
ness, magnificence, (Athen. 4, 6 p. 130 fin.; for NNDN,
Jer. xl. (xxxiii.) 9); the majesty of God, Lk. ix. 43; rijs
"Apréutdos, Acts xix. 27; of the visible splendor of the
divine majesty as it appeared in the transfiguration of
Christ, 2 Pet. i. 16.*
Heyadorpents, -és, gen. -ovs, (peyas, and mpérer it is be-
coming [see mpérw]), befitting a great man, magnificent,
splendid; full of majesty, majestic: 2 Pet.i.17. (2 Mace.
vill. 15; xv. 13; 3 Mace. ii. 9; Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.) *
peyahive; impf. €ueyddvvov; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing.
€peyahvvero]; 1 aor. inf. peyadvyOjvat ; 1 fut. peyadvvO7-
gopar; (péyas); fr. [Aeschyl. and] Thuc. down; Sept.
mostly for 1277; : 1. to make great, magnify, (Vulg.
magnifico): twa or ti, prop. of dimension, Mt. xxiii. 5
[here A.V. enlarge]; pass. to increase: of bodily stature,
epeyadvvOn To madaprov, 1 S. ii. 21; so ina figure, 2 Co.
x. 15, of Paul, that his apostolic efficiency among the
Corinthians may increase more and more and have more
abundant results [al. refer this to 2; see Meyer (ed.
Heinrici) in loc.]. metaph. to make conspicuous: Lk. i.
58 (on which see €Xeos, 2 a.). 2. to deem or declare
great, i. e. to esteem highly, to extol, laud, celebrate: Lk. i.
46; Acts v.13; x.46; xix. 17, (often so in class. Grk.
394
péeyas
also); pass. i. q. to get glory and praise: @ ru, in a
thing, Phil. i. 20.*
peyddws, adv., greatly: Phil. iv. 10. [Fr. Hom. down.]*
peyadwootvn, -7s, 7, only in bibl. and eccl. writ. [cf.
W. 26,95 (90); B. 73, and see ayabwotrn j, (uéyas), Sept.
for bai and 19371; majesty: of the majesty of God, Heb.
i. 3; viii. 1; Jude 25, (so 2 S. vii. 23; Ps. exliv. (cxlv.)
3; 6; ; Sap. xviii. 24; Sir. ii. 18, and often): ~
péyas, peyadn, péya, [ (related to Lat. magnus, magister,
Goth. maist (cf. rd meiorov), etc.; Vanivek p. 682; Cur
tius § 462) ], ace. péyav, peydAny, péya; plur. peyddor, -at,
-a; comp. peiCwv, -ov, (acc. masc. and fem. peiCova, once
contr. peifo, Jn. v. 36 [RGT WH, but L Tr peter (cf.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 119)]; neut. plur. peifova, once contr.
peiCo, Jn. i. 50 (51)) and pecCdrepos, 3 Jn. 4 (fr. the com-
par. peifov), a poet. compar., on which see the remark
quoted under éhaxvororepos, cf. Matthiae § 136; superl.
péeyoros (found only in 2 Pet. i. 4); [fr. Hom. down];
Sept. for 513; also for 24; great; 1. predi-
cated a. of the external form or sensible appearance
of things (or of persons); in particular, of space and its
dimensions, — as respects a. mass and weight:
ridos, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; dpos,
Rey. viii. 8; dornp, ibid. 10; dpaxwv Rev. xii. 3,9; deros,
ibid. 14; Sévdpov, Lk. xiii. 19 [T WH om. L Tr br. peéy.];
krador, Mk. iv. 32; tydves, Jn. xxi. 11; B. compass
and extent; large, spacious: oxnvyn (petCwv), Heb. ix.
11; dvayatov [R dvewyeor, q. v.], Mk. xiv. 15; amo6nxn, Lk.
xii. 18; xdpuvos, Rev. ix. 2; modes, Rev. xi. 8; xvi. 19;
XVii. 18; xviii. 2, 16,18, 19; morapos, Rev. ix. 14; xvi. 12;
Ovpa, 1 Co. xvi. 9; Anvos, Rev. xiv. 19; d0ovn, Acts x. 11;
xi. 5; xdopa, Lk. xvi. 26 (2 S. xviii. 17). y. meas-
ure and height: otxodopai, MK. xiii. 2; Apdvos, Rev. xx.
11; long, paxatpa, Rev. vi.4; as respects stature and age,
puxpot kat peyado, small and great, young and old, Acts
viii. 10; xxvi. 22; Heb. viii. 11; Rev. xi. 18; xiii. 16; xix.
5,18; xx. 12, (Gen. xix.11; 2K. xxiii. 2; 2 Chr. xxxiv.
30). [meut. sing. used adverbially: év peydAw, Acts xxvi.
29 LT Tr WH (for R G év rodnd@, q. v. in odds, d.) in
great sc.degree. The apostle plays upon Agrippa’s words
év dAly@ (q. v.) in a Little (time) thou wouldst fain ete... . I
would to God that both in little and in great i.e. in all re-
spects ete.; cf. the use of éAtyov x. wéya or opixpdy Kk. péeya
(yet in negative sentences) to express totality; e. g.
Plat. Phileb. 21 e.; Apol. 19 ¢.; 21b.; 26b.; but seed.
below. | b. of number and quantity, iq. nw
merous, large: dyédn, Mk. v. 11; abundant, ropicpds, 1
Tim. vi. 6; purOarodocia, Heb. x. 35. c. of age: 6
peiCov, the elder, Ro. ix. 12 after Gen. xxv. 23, (Skuriov 6
peyas, Polyb. 18, 18 (35), 9; 32,12, 1): d. used of in-
tensity and its degrees: Svvayis, Acts iv. 33; viii. 10;
neut. ev peydA@, with great effort, Acts xxvi. 29 LT Tr
WH [but see y. above]; of the affections and emotions of
the mind: yapa, Mt. ii. 10; xxviii. 8; Lk. ii. 10; xxiv. 52;
Acts xv. 3; pdB8os, Mk. iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9; viii. 37; Acts v.
5,11; Rev. xi. 11; Oupds, Rev. xii. 12; Avan, Ro. ix. De
exotaots, Mk. v. 42 (Gen. xxvii. 33); mioris, Mt. xv. 28;
xapis, Acts iv. 33; ayamn, Jn.xv.13. of natural events
wéeyas
powerfully affecting the senses, i. q. violent, mighty, strong:
Gvepos, Jn. vi. 18; Rev. vi.13; Bpovrn, Rev. xiv. 2; yaAafa,
Rev. xi. 19; xvi. 21; cecouds, Mt. viii. 24; xxviii.2; Lk.
xxi.11; Acts xvi. 26; Rev. vi.12; xi.13; xvi. 18; daira,
Mk. iv.37; mréocs, Mt. vii. 27. of other external things,
such as are perceived by hearing: xpavyn, Acts xxiii. 9;
Rev. xiv. 18 [RG]; peifov kpdgev, to cry out the louder,
Mt. xx. 31; govy, Mt. xxiv. 31 [Tom. ¢., WH only in
mrg.]; xxvii. 46,50; Lk. xxiii. 23; Jn. xi. 43; Acts viii.
7; Rev.i. 10; v. 2,12; vi. 10; vii. 2,10; viii. 13; x. 3;
xi. 12,15; [xiv.18 LT Tr WH; xviii. 2 Rec.], and else-
where ; yadnvy, Mt. viii. 26; Mk. iv. 39. of objects of
sight which excite admiration and wonder: das, Mt.
iv. 16; onpetov, Mt. xxiv. 24; Lk. xxi. 11; Acts vi. 8;
Vit. 13.3) Neves 13) épya, Rev. xv. 3; petCw, petCova
Tovtwy, greater things than these, i.e. more extraordinary,
more wonderful, Jn. i.50 (51); v.20; xiv.12. of things
that are felt: xadpa, Rev. xvi. 9; auperés, Lk. iv. 38;
of other things that distress: dvayxn, Lk. xxi. 23; Odin,
Mt. xxiv. 21; Acts vii. 11; Rev. ii. 22; vii. 14; dswoypds,
Acts viii. 1; Asuds, Lk. iv. 25; Acts xi. 28; mdnyn, Rev.
xvi. 21. 2. predicated of rank, as belonging to a.
persons, eminent for ability, virtue, authority, power;
as God, and sacred personages: eds, Tit. ii. 13 [(on which
see Prof. Abbot, Note C. in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. ete.
i. p. 19, and cf. éemipavera)]; *Aprepis, Acts xix. 27 sq.
34 sq.; dpxsepevs, Heb. iv. 14; mony, Heb. xiii. 20;
mpogpntns, Lk. vii. 16 ; absol. of peyadou, great men, lead-
ers, rulers, Mt. xx. 25; Mk. x. 42; univ. eminent, dis-
tinguished: Mt. v. 19; xx. 26; Lk. i. 15, 32; Acts viii.
9. pei{wy is used of those who surpass others — either
in nature and power, as God: Jn. x. 29 [here T Tr
WH txt. give the neut. (see below)]; xiv. 28; Heb. vi.
13; 1 Jn. iv. 4; add, Jn. iv.12; viii. 53; or in excel-
lence, worth, authority, etc.: Mt. xi. 11; xviii. 1;
xxiii. 11; Mk. ix. 34; Lk. vii. 28; ix. 46; xxii. 26 sq.;
Jn. xiii. 16 ; xv.20; 1 Co. xiv.5; duvdpec pettoves, 2 Pet.
ii. 11; neut. petCov, something higher, more exalted, more
majestic than the temple, to wit the august person of
Jesus the Messiah and his preéminent influence, Mt. xii.
6 LT Tr WH; (cf. Jn. x. 29 above]; contextually i. q.
strict in condemning, of God, 1 Jn. iii. 20. b. things
to be esteemed highly for their importance, i. q. Lat.
gravis; of great moment, of great weight, important: émay-
yeApara, 2 Pet. i. 43 évroAn, Mt. xxii. 36, 38; pvornpior,
Eph. v. 32; 1 Tim. iii. 16; dwapria, Jn. xix. 11; peifov
paprupia, of greater proving power, Jn. v. 36 [see above
ad init.]; 1 Jn. v. 9, (uaprupiay peitw x. capeorépay, Isocr.
Archid. § 32). péyas i. q. solemn, sacred, of festival days
[ef. Is. i. 13 Sept.]: quepa, In. vii. 37; xix. 31; notable,
august, yuépa, of the day of the final judgment, Acts ii.
20; Jude 6; Rev. vi. 17; xvi. 14. neut. wéya, a great
matter, thing of great moment: 1 Co. ix. 11 (Gen. xlv.
28; Is. xlix. 6); ov péya, 2 Co. xi. 15. c. athing
to be highly esteemed for its excellence, i. q. excel-
lent. 1 Co. xiii. 13 [cf. W. § 35,1; B. § 123, 13]; ra
xapiopara ra peitova (RG xpeirrova), 1 Co. xii. 31 LT
Tr WH. 3. splendid, prepared on a grand scale,
395
peOodela
stately: 8oyn, Lk. v. 29 (Gen. xxi. 8) ; deimvov, Lk. xiv. 16;
Rev. xix. 17 [GL T Tr WH], (Dan. v. 1 [Theodot.]) ;
oikia, 2 Tim. ii. 20 (Jer. lii. 13; [otkos], 2 Chr. ii. 5,
Oe 4. neut. plur. peydda, great things: of God’s
preéminent blessings, Lk. i. 49 LT Tr WH (see peya-
Xeios); of things which overstep the province of a
created being, proud (presumptuous) things, full of
arrogance, derogatory to the majesty of God: Aadeiv pey.
joined with Brxacdnpias, Rev. xiii. 5; Dan. vii. 8,11, 20;
like péya etreiv, Hom. Od. 3, 227; 16, 243; 22, 288.
péyeBos, -ous, Td, (ueyas), [fr. Hom. down], greatness:
Eph. i. 19.*
peyioray, -dvos, 6, (fr. wéeysoros, as vedy fr. véos, Evvdy
fr. uvés), a later Grk. word (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 196),
once in sing. Sir. iv. 7; commonly in plur. of peysoraves,
the grandees, magnates, nobles, chief men of a city or a
people, the associates or courtiers of a king, (Vulg.
principes) : Rev. vi. 15; tis ys, xviii. 23; rod ‘Hpwdov,
Mk. vi. 21. (Sept. for oN, Jer. xiv. 3; Nah. ii. 6;
Zech. xi. 2; ooin3, Jon. iii. 7; Nah. iii. 10; 792939, Dan.
Theodot. iv. 33, ete.; O°, Is. xxxiv. 12; Jer. xxiv. 8,
etc.; 1 Mace. ix. 37; often in Sir. Manetho 4, 41; Jo-
seph., Artem. In Lat. megistanes, Tac. ann. 15, 27; Suet.
Calig. 5.) *
péyirros, see p¢yas, init.
peO-eppnvedw: Pass., 3 pers. sing. pedepunveverar, ptcp.
peOeppnvevoperor ; to translate into the language of one with
whom I wish to communicate, to interpret: Mt.i. 23; Mk.
v. 41; xv. 22, 34; Jn. i. 38 (39) LTr WH, 41 (42);
Acts iv. 36; xiii. 8. (Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Sir. prol. 1.
NOS Alb |pyy'
pen, -ns, 7, (akin to nev, wine; perh. any intoxicating
drink, Lat. temetum; cf. Germ. Meth [mead)}), intoxication ;
drunkenness: Lk. xxi. 34; plur., Ro. xiii. 13; Gal. v. 21.
(Hebr. 43, intoxicating drink, Prov. xx. 1; Is. xxviii,
a7 and Dw, intoxication, Ezek. xxiii. 32; xxxix. 19;
[Antipho], Xen., Plat., al.) [Cf. Trench § lxi.] *
peb-tornpt and (in 1 Co. xiii. 2 RG WH [cef. tornue])
peOiordvw; 1 aor. petéeotnoa; 1 aor. pass. subj. pera-
otada; fr. Hom. down; prop. to transpose, transfer,
remove from one place to another: prop. of change of
situation or place, dpy, 1 Co. xiii. 2 (Isa. liv. 10); rua
eis rt, Col. i.13; rwa [T Tr WH add ex, so L in br.] ras
oikovopias, to remove from the office of steward, pass. Lk.
xvi. 4 (ris xpetas, 1 Macc. xi. 63) ; rwa ék rov yy, to re-
move from life, Diod. 2, 57, 5; 4, 55, 1; with ék rou (hv
omitted, Acts xiii. 22 (in Grk. writ. also in the mid. and
in the intrans. tenses of the act. to depart from life, to
die, Eur. Alc. 21; Polyb. 32, 21,3; Heliod. 4,14). met-
aph. riva, without adjunct (cf. Germ. verrticken, [Eng.
pervert]), i.e. to lead aside [A. V.turn away] to other ten-
ets: Acts xix. 26 (riv kapdiay Tov Aaov, Josh. xiv. 8).*
p0-o8ela (T WH peodia, see I, t,), -as, 9, (fr. peOodeva,
i.e. 1. to follow up or investigate by method and set-
tled plan; 2. to follow craftily, frame devices, deceive:
Diod. 7, 16; 2S. xix. 27; [Ex. xxi. 13 Aq.; (mid.) Charit.
7, 6 p. 166, 21 ed. Reiske (1783); Polyb. 38, 4, 10]), a
noun occurring neither in the O. T. nor in prof. auth,
peOopiov
cunning arts, deceit, craft, trickery: i pe9. ths mdvns,
which 7 wAdvy uses, Eph. iv. 14; rod d.aB8dAov, plur. ib. vi.
11 [A.V. wiles. Cf. Bp. Lghtfi. Polye. ad Phil. 7 p. 918.]*
peO-dprov, -ov, 7d, (neut. of adj. peOdpios, -a, -ov; fr.
yerd with, and dpos a boundary), a border, frontier: ra
peOoptd rivos, the confines (of any land or city), i. e. the
places adjacent to any region, the vicinity, Mk. vii. 24
RG. (Thuce., Xen., Plat., al.) *
peOtoxw: Pass., pres. peOvoxopar; 1 aor. euedvaOnr;
(fr. pév, see péOn); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 73, 7175,
(Kal 11), and 13¥, to intoxicate, make drunk; pass.
[ef. W. 252 (237)] to get drunk, become intoxicated: Lk.
xii. 45; Jn. ii. 10; 1 Th. v. 7 [B. 62 (54)]; otvm [W.
217 (203) ], Eph. v. 18; ék rod oivov, Rev. xvii. 2 (see ék,
IL. 5); rod véxrapos, Plat. symp. p. 203 b.; Leian. dial.
deor. 6, 33 dzé ruvos, Sir. i. 16; xxxv. 13.*
peOucos, -von, -vcov, in later Grk. also of two termi-
nations, (uéOv, see pebn), drunken, intoxicated: 1 Co.
v.11; vi. 10. (Phryn.: peOucos avnp, ov« épeis, dAAG pe-
Ovotikds* yuvaixa Se épets weOvoov kal peOvony | Arstph. ] ;
but Menand., Plut., Leian., Sext. Empir., al., [Sept. Prov.
Xxiii. 21, ete.; Sir. xix. 1, etc.] use it also of men; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 151.) *
peOdw (fr. webv, see peOn) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
mM and 13W; to be drunken: Mt. xxiv. 49; Actsii. 15;
1 Co. xi. 21; 1 Th. v. 7 [ef. B. 62 (54)]; ék rod atparos
{see éx, II. 5; Trmrg. 7 aiyarc], of one who has shed
blood profusely, Rev. xvii. 6 (Plin. h. n. 14, 28 (22)
ebrius jam sanguine civium et tanto magis eum sitiens).*
perlorepos, -a, -ov, see peyas, init.
pelLav, see péyas, init.
péAav, -avos, 7d, see the foll. word.
pédas, -avva, -av, gen. -avos, -aivys, -avos, [fr. Hom. down],
Sept. several times for 7nw, black: Rev. vi. 5, 12; opp.
to Aevkos, Mt. v. 36. Neut. 7d peday, subst. black ink (Plat.
Phaedr. p. 276 c.; Dem. p. 313,11; Plut. mor. p. 841 e.;
al.): 2 Co. ili. 3; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13; [ef. Gardthausen,
Palaeographie, Buch i. Kap. 4; Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, ii. 270 sq.; B. D. s. v. Writing, sub fin.]*
Mededs, gen. -@ [B. 20 (17) sq.], (IT Tr WH Mened,
indecl., [on the accent in codd. ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]),
6, (ANI) abundance), Melea, one of king David’s descend-
ants: Lk. iii. 31.*
pede, 3 pers. sing. pres. of péAo used impers.; impf.
€wedev; itis acare: tii, to one; as in Grk. writ. with
nom. of the thing, ovdév rovrwy, Acts xviii. 17; with gen.
of the thing (as often in Attic), pi) rév Body pete ra
Ges ; 1 Co. ix. 9 [B. § 132, 15; cf. W. 595 (554)]; the
thing which is a care to one, or about which he is solicit-
ous, is evident from the context, 1 Co. vii. 21; mept rivos,
gen. of obj., to care about, have regard for, a pers. or a
thing: Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. x.13; xii. 6; 1
Pet. v. 7, (Hdt. 6, 101; Xen. mem. 3, 6, 10; Cyr. 4, 5,
17; Hier. 9,10; 1 Macc. xiv.43; Sap. xii. 13; Barnab.
ep. 1,5; cf. W. § 30,10d.); foll. by dr, Mk. iv. 38;
Lkex40%
[Medcdefd: Lk. iii. 37 Tdf., see Mad.]
pederaw, -3; 1 aor. euehernoa; (fr. pedérn Care, prac-
396
peAr®
tice); esp. freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. and Thuc. down;
Sept. chiefly for 139; to care for, attend to carefully,
practise: ri, 1 Tim. iv. 15 [R. V. be diligent in]; to medt-
tate i. q. to devise, contrive: Acts iv. 25 fr. Ps. ii. 1; used
by the Greeks of the meditative pondering and the prac-
tice of orators and rhetoricians, as p. ryv dmohoylay brép
éavrév, Dem. p. 1129, 9 (cf. Passow s. v. d. [L. and S.
s. v. II. 2 and III. 4 b.]), which usage seems to have
been in the writer’s mind in Mk. xiii.11[RLbr. Comp.:
mpo-pedeTao |.*
pert, -ros, 76, Sept. for w24, [fr. Hom. down], honey:
Rev. x. 9 sq.; dyptov (q. v.), Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6.*
pedlootos, -a, -ov, (fr. péAvooa a bee, as Gaddoous fr.
Oddacca; péducoa is fr. pérc), of bees, made by bees: Lk.
xxiv. 42 [RG Trin br.]. (Not found elsewh. [cf. W.
24]; pedooatos, -a, -ov is found in Nic. th. 611, in Eust.
pediocetos.) *
MaXirn, -ns, 4, Melita, the name of an island in the
Mediterranean, lying between Africa and Sicily, now
called Malta; (this Sicula Melita must not be confounded
with Melita Illyrica in the Adriatic, now called Meleda
[see B. D. s. v. Melita; Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of
St. Paul, Diss. ii.]): Acts xxviii. 1 [where WH Mederqyn;
see their App. p. 160].*
[Medtrfvn, see the preceding word. ]
pedro; fut. peAAjow (Mt. xxiv. 6; and LT Tr WH
in 2 Pet. i. 12); impf. @weAAoyv [so all edd. in Lk. ix. 31
(exc. T WH); Jn. vi. 6, 71 (exc. RG) ; vii. 39 (exe. T);
xi- 51 (exe. L Tr); Acts xxi. 27; Rev. iii. 2 Gwhere R
pres.); x.4 (exe. L Tr)] and yedAoy [so all edd. in Lk.
vii. 2; x.1 (exc. RG); xix.4; Jn.iv.47; xii. 33; xviii.
82; Acts xii. 6 (exc. RGL); xvi. 27 (exc. RG); xxvii.
83: (exe) RG T); :Heb.ixi +S (excu.) 5 ef. refi. 18. vi
BovAopat, init. and Rutherford’s note on Babrius 7, 15],
to be about to do anything; so 1. the ptcp., 6 pér-
Nov, absol.: 7a péAXovra and ra éveorra are contrasted,
Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; eis rd péAAov, for the future,
hereafter, Lk. xiii. 9 [but see e’s, A. II. 2 (where Grimm
supplies éros) ]; 1 Tim. vi. 19; 7a péAXovra, things future,
things to come, i. e., ace. to the context, the more perfect
state of things which will exist in the atéy péAXor, Col.
ii. 17; with nouns, 6 aidy 6 peAAwy, Mt. xii. 32; Eph. i.
213 4 peAXd. Con, 1 Tim. iv. 8; 7 olkovpévn 7 peAd. Heb.
ii. 55 1) pw. dpyn, Mt. iii. 7; 1d Kpipa 7d weAXov, Acts xxiv.
253; modus, Heb. xiii. 14; ra péAdovra adyaba, Heb. ix. 11
[but L Tr mrg. WH txt. yevouevor]; x. 1; rod péddovros
se. Addy, i. e. the Messiah, Ro. v. 14. 2. joined to an
infin. [cf. W. 333 sq. (313): B.§ 140, 2], a. to bé onthe
point of doing or suffering something: w. inf. present,
HuedXev Eavtov avarpeiv, Acts xvi. 273 TeXevrav, Lk. vii. 2;
arobyjoxeww, Jn. iv.47; add, Lk.xxi.7; Actsiii. 3; xviii.
14; xx. 3; xxii. 26; xxiii. 27; w.inf. passive, Acts xxi.
QT xxvala S38 y ete b. to intend, have in mind, think
to: w.inf. present, Mt. ii.13; Lk.x.1; xix.4; Jn. vi. 6,
15; vii. 35; xii. 4;° xiv. 22; Acts v. 835; xvii. 81; xx.
7,13; xxii. 26; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 30; Heb. viii.5; [2 Pet.
i.12LT Tr WH]; Rev.x.4; w.inf. aorist (a constr. cen-
sured by Phryn. p. 336, but authenticated more recently
“péXos
by many exx. fr. the best writ. fr. Hom. down; cf. W.
333 (313) sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 745 sqq.; [but see
Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 420 sqq.]): Acts xii. 6 LT
WH; Rev. ii. 10 (Badeiv RG); iii. 16; xii. 4; w. fut.
inf. érecOar, Acts xxiii. 30 RG. c. as in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down, of those things which will come to pass
(or which one will do or suffer) by fixed necessity or
divine appointment (Germ. sollen [are to be, des-
tined to be, etc.]) ; w. pres. inf. active: Mt. xvi. 27; xvii.
12; xx. 22; Lk.ix.31; Jn. vi. 71; vii. 39; xi.51; xii. 33;
Xvill. 32; Acts xx. 38; xxvi. 22, 23; Heb. i. 14; xi. 8;
Rev. ii. 10°; iii. 10; viii. 13, ete. ; "HAias 6 péddwv epye-
oa, Mt. xi. 14; 6 pedArwy AutpovcOa, Lk. xxiv. 21; kpi-
_ ve, 2'Tim. iv. 1 [WH mre. kpivac]; w. pres. inf. passive:
Mt. xvii. 22; Mk. xiii. 4; Lk. ix. 44; xix.11; xxi. 36;
Acts xxvi. 22; Ro.iv. 24; 1 Th. iii.4; Jas. ii. 12; Rev.
1.19 [Tdf. yevéoOa]; vi. 11; ris peddovans dmoxadimre-
oOa dSofns, 1 Pet.v. 1; w.aor. inf.: rv péddoveay dd£av
droxahupOjvat, Ro. vill. 18; riv péddXovoay riot dro-
kadupOjva, Gal. iii. 23 ; used also of those things which
we infer from certain preceding events will of necessity
follow: w. inf. pres., Acts xxviii. 6; Ro. viii. 13; w. inf.
fut., Acts xxvii. 10. d. in general, of what is sure to
happen: w. inf. pres., Mt. xxiv.6; Jn. vi. 71; 1 Tim.i.
16; Rev. xii.5; xvii. 8; w. inf. fut. 2érecOar, Acts xi. 28 ;
xxiv. 15, e. to be always on the point of doing with-
out ever doing, i. e. to delay: ri pédAXers; Acts xxii, 16
(Aeschyl. Prom. 36; ri weAAere; Eur. Hec. 1094; Leian.
dial. mort. 10, 13, and often in prof. auth.; 4 Mace. vi.
7x} Waibe 11)
HéAos, -ovs, 76, [fr. Hom. down], a member, limb: prop.
a member of the human body, Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12,
14, 18-20, 25 sq.; Jas. iii. 5; ta p. 100 caparos, 1 Co.
xii. 12, 22; pod, cod, nudv, tyav, Mt. v. 29 sq.; Ro. vi.
13,19; vii. 5, 23; Col. iii. 5; Jas. iii. 6; iv. 1; adpms
#€An is said of bodies given up to criminal intercourse,
because they are as it were members belonging to the
harlot’s body, 1 Co. vi. 15. Since Christians are closely
united by the bond of one and the same spirit both among
themselves and with Christ as the head, their fellowship
is likened to the body, and individual Christians are
metaph. styled ~é\7—now one of another, ddAjAov:
Ro. xii. 5; Eph. iv. 25; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 7, (cf.
Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. iii. p. 45), — now of the mys-
tical body, i.e. the church: 1 Co. xii. 27; Eph. v. 30, [ef.
iv. 16 WH mrg.]; ta capara of Christians are called
péAn of Christ, because the body is the abode of the spirit
of Christ and is consecrated to Christ’s service, 1 Co.
vi. 15.*
Madxt (T Tr WH Medyel; see et, 1), 6, (290 my king),
Melchi; 1. oneof Christ’s ancestors: Lk.iii.24. 2.
another of the same: ib. iii. 28.*
Maxtcedék (in Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 2 Medyuoedéxns,
-0v); 0, (pI¥-2IN king of righteousness), Melchizedek,
king of Salem (see under Sadjp) and priest of the most
high God, who lived in the days of Abraham: Heb. v. 6,
10; vi. 20; vii. 1, 10 sq. 15,17, 21 [RGL]; cf. Gen.
xiv. 18 sqq.: Ps. cix. (cx.) 4. [Cf. B. D.s. v.]*
397
pep
pepBpdva [ Soph. Lex. -ava; cf. Chandler § 136], -ag
[B.17 (15)], 9, Lat. membrana, i. e. parchment, first made
of dressed skins at Pergamum, whence its name: 2 Tim.
iv. 13 [Act. Barn. 6 fin. Cf. Birt, Antikes Buchwesen,
ch. ii.; Gardthausen, Palaeographie, p. 39 sq.].*
péepdopar; 2 aor. eueurydaunv; in class. Grk. fr. Hesiod
(opp. 184) down; to blame, find fault: absol. Ro. ix. 19;
the thing found fault with being evident from what pre-
cefes, Mk. vii. 2 Rec.; adrovs, Heb. viii. 8 LT Tr mrg.
WH txt., where RG Tr txt. WH mre. adrois, which many
join with peuddopueros (for the person or thing blamed is
added by Grk. writ. now in the dat., now in the acc.;
see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v., ef. Kriiger § 46, 7, 3);
but it is more correct to supply adrjy, i. e. SuaOnxny,
which the writer wishes to prove was not “faultless”
(cf. 7), and to join adrois with Aéyer; [B. § 133, 9].*
peprbloupos, -ov, (ueupopat, and poipa fate, lot), com-
plaining of one’s lot, querulous, discontented: Jude 16.
(CIsoer. p. 234 c¢. [p. 887 ed. Lange]; Aristot. h. a. 9, 1
[p- 608", 10]; Theophr. char. 17, 1; Leian. dial. deor.
20,4; Plut. de ira cohib. c. 13.) *
péev, a weakened form of pv, and hence properly a
particle of affirmation: truly, certainly, surely, in-
deed, —its affirmative force being weakened, yet re-
tained most in Ionic, Epic, and Herodotus, and not
wholly lost in Attic and Hellenistic writers (uév ‘con-
firmative’; ef. 4 Macc. xviii. 18). Owing to this its
original meaning it adds a certain force to the terms
and phrases with which it is connected, and thus con-
trasts them with or distinguishes ther from others.
Accordingly it takes on the character of a concessive
and very often of a merely distinctive particle, which
stands related to a following 8¢ or other adversative con-
junction, either expressed or understood, and in a sen-
tence composed of several members is so placed as to
point out the first member, to which a second, marked by
an adversative particle, is added or opposed. It corre-
sponds to the Lat. quidem, indeed, Germ. zwar (i.e. prop.
zu Wahre, i.e. in Wahrheit [in truth]) ; but often its force
cannot be reproduced. Its use in classic Greek is exhib-
ited by Devarius i. p. 122 sqq., and Klotz on the same ii.
2 p. 656 sqq.; Viger i. p. 531 sqq., and Hermann on the
same p. 824 sq.; al.; Matthiae § 622; Kiihner ii, p. 806
sqq- §§ 527 sqq.3 p- 691 sqq.; § 503; [Jelf § 729, 1, 2;
§§ 764 sqq.]; Passow, and Pape, [and L. and S.] s. v.
I. Examples in which the particle pév is followed in
another member by an adversative particle expressed.
Of these examples there are two kinds: 1. those
in which pév has a concessive force, and 6€ (or dAdd) in-
troduces a restriction, correction, or amplification of
what has been said in the former member, indeed...
but, yet, on the other hand. Persons or things, or predi-
cations about either, are thus correlated: Mt. iii. 11, cf.
Mk. i. 8 (where T Tr WHom.Lbr. pév); Lk. iii. 16
(where the meaning is, ‘I indeed baptize as well as he
who is to come after me, but his baptism is of greater
efficacy’; cf. Acts i. 5); Mt. ix. 37 and Lk. x. 2 (al-
though the harvest is great, yet the laborers are few);
(ev
Mt. xvii. 11 sq. (rightly indeed is it said that Elijah will
come and work the droxardoraats, but he has already
come to bring about this very thing); Mt. xx. 23; xxii.
8; xxiii. 28; Jn. xvi. 22; xix. 32sq.; Acts xxi. 39 (al-
though I am a Jew, and not that Egyptian, yet etc.) ;
Acts xxii. 3 [R]; Ro. ii. 25; vi.11; 1Co.i. 183 ix. 24;
xi. 14 sq.; xii. 20 [RG Lbr. Trbr. WH mrg.]; xv.51[R
GLbr.]; 2Co.x.10; Heb. iii.5sq.; 1 Pet. i. 20, and
often. pév and 8¢ are added to articles and pronoufls:
oi pev...oi d€, the one indeed ... but the other (al-
though the latter, yet the former), Phil. i. 16 sq. [ace. to
crit. txt.]; 6s pév... ds dé, the one indeed, but (yet)
the other etc. Jude 22 sq.; tues per... tes Se kai, Phil.
“i. 15; with conjunctions: ¢? ev ody, if indeed then, if
therefore... ef dé, but if, Acts xviii, 14 sq. RG; xix.
38 sq.3 xxv. 11 LT Tr WH [e@ pev ody... veri de, Heb.
viii. 4 sq. (here RG ef péev ydp)]; ef pev... viv é, if
indeed (conceding or supposing this or that to be the
case)... but now, Heb. xi. 15; kav pev. . ef d€ nye,
Lk. xiii. 9; pev yap... dé, 1 Co. xi. 7; Ro. ii. 25; peév
ovv... O€, Lk. iii. 185 eis prev... ets dé, Heb. 1x. 6 sq. ;
pev.«. adda, indeed ... but, although... yet, Ro. xiv.
20; 1Co. xiv. 173 pév... mdjv, Lk. xxii. 22. [Cf. W.
443 (413); B. § 149, 12 a.] 2. those in which pév
loses its concessive force and serves only to distin-
guish, but 6€ retains its adversative power: Lk. xi. 48;
Acts xiii. 36 sq.; xxiii. 8 [here WH txt. om. Tr br. pev];
1 Co. i. 12, 23, Phil. iii. i; Heb. vii. 8; dé pev. . . emi
dé, 2 Tim. iv. 45 6 pev ovv (Germ. er nun [he, then,]) -..
at dé, Acts xxviii. 5 sq.; Os wéev-.. Og Oé, and one... and
another, 1 Co. xi. 21; of pev...6 dé (he, on the con-
trary), Heb. vii. 20 sq. 23 sq.3 éxeivoe pev ody... Hueis
dé, 1 Co. ix. 25; ef pev ody... ef d¢, Acts xviii. 14 sq.
[RG]; xix. 38; xxv.11 [LT Tr WH]; and this hap-
pens chiefly when what has already been included in the
words immediately preceding is separated into parts, so
that the adversative particle contrasts that which the
writer especially desires to contrast: ékdot@... Tots péev
(nrovow... tots d€ €& epideias etc. Ro. ii. 6-8; mas...
€xeivoe pev..-mueis O€ etc. 1 Co. ix. 25; add, Mt. xxv.
14 sq. 83; Ro. v. 16; xi. 22. 3. pev... d¢ serve only
to distribute a sentence into clauses: both...and; not
only ««. but also; as well...as: Jn. xvi. 9-11; Ro. viii.
17; Jude 8; mparov pev... evra dé, Heb. vii. 2; 8 pev
-.6 d€...6 d¢, some... some... some, Mt. xiii. 8;
[€xaoros...6 pev...6 8é, each... one ... another,
1 Co. vii. 7 LT Tr WH]; és pew... ds 8é, one... an-
other, Mt. xxi. 35; Acts xvii. 32; 1 Co. vii. 77 RG]; of
pev «+ Gddot [L of] de... repos dé, Mt. xvi. 14; 6 pdv
yap «+. Gddg be... érépw dé [here T Tr WH om. Lbr. 8¢],
1 Co. xii. 8-10; & pen... foll. by dda 8 three times,
Mt. xiii. 4 sq. 7 sq.; GAAos pv, dddos dé, 1 Co. xv. 393
TOUTO Ev «+» TOUTO dé, on the one hand... on the other;
partly ... partly, Heb. x. 33, also found in prof. auth.
cf, W. 142 (135). pév is followed by another particle:
érera, Jn. xi. 6; 1 Co. xii. 28; Jas. iii. 17; Kai viv, Acts
xxvi. 4, 6; ra viv, Acts xvii. 30; modd [RG moAd]
uaddov, Heb. xii. 9.
398
ev
II. Examples in which péy is followed neither by 3¢
nor by any other adversative particle (yey ‘solitarium ’) ;
cf. W. 575 (534) sq.; B. 365 (818) sq. These exx. are
of various kinds; either 1. the antithesis is evi-
dent from the context; as, Col. ii. 23 (‘have indeed a
show of wisdom’, but are folly [cf. Bp. Lghtft. in loc.]) 5
1) pev «+» coTnpiay, sc. but they themselves prevent their
own salvation, Ro. x.13; ra pev... duvapeowy, sc. but ye
do not hold to my apostolic authority, 2 Co. xii. 12;
dvOpwmo pev [LT Tr WH om. per] . . . duvvovaw, sc. 6 6é
Oebs Kal? Eavrovd duvet, Heb. vi. 16. Or 2. the
antithetic idea is brought out by a different turn of the
sentence: Acts xix. 4 [ Rec. ], where the expected second
member, "Incovs 6€ eat 6 épyopevos, is wrapped up in
tour éotw eis TOV Incovv; Ro. xi. 13 ed” dcov peév Kth.s
where the antithesis wapa(jAd de xrA. is contained in
eimws trapatnhoow; Ro. vii. 12 6 pév vopos xtA., where
the thought of the second member, ‘ but sin misuses the
law,’ is expressed in another form in 13 sqq. by an
anacoluthon, consisting of a change from the disjunctive
to a conjunctive construction (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 839),
we find péev... ré, Acts xxvii. 21; pév... «at, 1 Th. ii.
18; in distributions or partitions, Mk. iv. 4-8 [here RG
pev...O€.--Kal...xkai]; Lk. viii. 5-8; or, finally, that
member in which 6€ would regularly follow immediately
precedes (Herm. ad Vig. p. 839), Acts xxviii. 22 [yet
see Meyer ad loc.; cf. B.§ 149, 12d.]. Or 3. the
writer, in using pev, perhaps had in mind a second mem-
ber to be introduced by de, but was drawn away from
his intention by explanatory additions relating to the
first member: thus Acts iii. 13 (dv tpeis pev— Rec. om.
this pev — etc., where 6 Oeds dé Pyetpev ex vexpav, cf. 15,
should have followed); esp. (as occasionally in class.
Grk. also) after mpdrov péev: Ro. i. 8; iii. 2; 1 Co. xi.
18; Tov pév mpa@rov Noyov xr. where the antithesis tov
dé dedtepov Adyov xrA. ought to have followed, Acts i.
Me 4. pev odv [in Lk. xi. 28 T Tr WH pevodv], Lat.
quidem igitur, [Eng. so then, now therefore, verily, etc.],
(where péy is confirmatory of the matter in hand, and
ovv marks an inference or transition, cf. Klotz ad Devar.
ii. 2 p. 662 sq.; [Herm. Vig. pp. 540 sq. 842; B. § 149,
16]): Actsi. 18; v.41; xili. 45 xvii. 30; xxiii. 22; xxvi.
9; 1 Co. vi. 4, 7 [here Tom. Tr br. odv]; ddd per odr,
Phil. iii. 8 GL Tr; e? pv odv, Heb. vii. 11. 5. pep
solitarium has a concessive and restrictive force, indeed,
verily, (Germ. freilich), [ef. Klotz, Devar. ii. 2 p.522; Har-
tung, Partikeln, ii. 404]: ef wév, 2 Co. xi. 4; pév odv now
then, (Germ. nun freilich), Heb. ix. 1 [ef. B.u.s. On the
use of pv odv in the classics ef. Cope’s note on Aristot.
rhet. 2, 9, 11.] 6. pevodvye, q. V. in its place.
III. As respects the Position of the particle: it
never stands at the beginning of a sentence, but yet as
near the beginning as possible; generally in the second
or third place, by preference between the article and
noun, [exx. in which it occupies the fourth place are
Acts iii. 21; 2 Co. x.13 Col. ii. 23; Acts xiv. 12 Rec.:
the fifth place, Eph. iv. 11; Ro. xvi.19 RWHbr.; 1 Co.
i. 15 RG; (Jn. xvi. 22, see below)]; moreover, in the
Mevva
midst of a clause also it attaches itself to a word the
torce of which is to be strengthened, as kal ipeis ody dvmny
nev vov éxere [but LT Tr WH... odv viv pev dda], Jn.
xvi. 22; cf. W. § 61, 6. The word is not found in the
Rey. or in the Epp. of John.
Mewvé or Meévvas, see Maivdy.
pev-odv i. q. prev ovv, see nev, IT. 4 sq.
pev-ody-ye [pevouv ye L Tr], (ev, ody, ye), nay surely,
nay rather; three times in answers by which what was
previously said is corrected (and standing at the begin-
ning of the clause, contrary to Attic usage where pév
ovv is never so placed; cf. Sturz, De dial. Mac. et Alex.
p- 203 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342; [B. 370 sq. (318); W.
.§ 61, 6]): Lk. xi. 28 [where T Tr WH pevoiv]; Ro. ix.
20; x.18; also Phil. iii. 8 [where LG Tr pév od», WH
pev ovv ye], and Nicet. ann. 21, 11. 415 [p. 851 ed.
Bekk.].*
pév-rot, (yer, roi), [Tr pev roe in 2 Tim. ii. 19], a par-
ticle of affirmation, and hence also often of opposition
(on its various use in class. Grk. cf. Devar. p. 124 sq. and
Klotz’s comments, vol. ii. 2 pp. 60 and 663 sqq.; Herm.
ad Vig. p. 840 sq.), but yet, nevertheless, howbeit: Jn. iv.
27; vil. 13; xx. 5; xxi.4; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Jude 8 (the
connection of which vs. with what precedes is as follows:
‘although these examples were set forth as warnings,
nevertheless’ etc.) ; dpas pévror, yet nevertheless, Jn. xii.
42; wevros, i. q. rather, Jas. ii. 8 Gif ye do not have re-
spect ot persons, but rather observe the law of love,
with which rpocwmodnwia is incompatible; [if however,
howbeit if ]).*
péevo; impf. euevov; fut. werd; 1 aor. uewa; plupf.
pepevnxery without augm. (1 Jn. ii. 19; cf. ékBadro, [and
see Tdf. Proleg. p. 120 sq.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept.
chiefly for ty and pp, also for FIM, IW, ete.; to re-
main, abide ; I. intransitively ; in reference 1.
to PLACE; a. prop. i. q. Lat. commoror, to sojourn,
tarry: év w. dat. of place, Lk. viii. 27; x. 7; Jn. vii. 9;
xi. 6; Acts xx. 15; xxvii. 31; xxviii. 30 [RGL]; 2
Tim. iv. 20; with adverbs of place: éxet, Mt. x.113; Jn.
ii. 12; x. 40; [xi. 54 WH Trtxt.]; &dc, Mt. xxvi. 38;
Mk. xiv. 34; apd rim, with one, Jn. i. 39 (40); xiv. 25;
Acts xviii. 20 [RG]; xxi. 7; ody tum, Lk. i. 56; kal?
éavrov, dwell at his own house, Acts xxviii. 16, cf. 30.
i. q. tarry as a guest, lodge: mov, Jn. i. 38 (39); ev w. dat.
of place, Lk. xix.5; Acts ix.43; mapd rim, in one’s house,
Acts ix. 43; xviii. 3; xxi. 8; of tarrying for a night,
pera twos, ctv tu, Lk. xxiv. 29. i. q. to be kept, to remain:
dead bodies én) rod oravpod, Jn. xix. 31; 1d Khijua ev rH
duréd@, Jn. xv. 4. b. tropically ; a. i. q. not to
depart, not to leave, to continue to be present: perd twos
(gen. of pers.), to maintain unbroken fellowship with
one, adhere to his party, 1 Jn. ii. 19; to be constantly
present to help one, of the Holy Spirit, Jn. xiv.16 RG;
also mapd w. dat. of pers., Jn. xiv. 17; émi tiva, to put
forth constant influence upon one, of the Holy Spirit,
Jn. i. 32 sq.; also of the wrath of God, ib. iii. 36; 76
cddvppa emi rH avayvoces, of that which continually pre-
vents the right understanding of what is read, 2 Co. iii.
399
pepive
14. Inthe mystic phraseology of John, God is said pévecy
in Christ, i. e. to dwell as it were within him, to be con-
tinually operative in him by his divine influence and en-
ergy, Jn. xiv. 10; Christians are said pévew ev rd eG, to
be rooted as it were in him, knit to him by the spirit they
have received from him, 1 Jn. ii. 6, 24, 27; iii.6; hence
one is said pévew in Christ or in God, and conversely
Christ or God is said pévew in one: Jn. vi. 56; xv. 4 sq.;
1 Jn. ili. 24; iv. 13,16; 6 Ocds pever ev aiT@ k. adros ev
T® Ged, 1 Jn. iv. 15; cf. Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 268 sq.
uévet Te ev enol, something has established itself permar.
nently within my soul, and always exerts its power in
me: 7a pyyard pov, Jn. xv. 7; 6 Néyos Tod Geod, 1 In. ii.
14; 7 xapa 7 €4n (not joy in me i. e. of which I am the
object, but the joy with which I am filled), Jn. xv. 11
Ree. ; 6 nxovcare, 1 Jn. ii. 24; the Holy Spirit, Jn. ii. 17;
iii. 9; 7 adjGea, 2 Jn. 2; love towards God, 1 Jn. iii. 17;
in the same sense one is said €xyew ru pévoy év éavta, as
Tov Aoyov Tov Geod, Jn. Vv. 38; wry aimmov, 1 In. iii. 15.
i. q. lo persevere; év tu, of him who cleaves, holds fast,
toathing: ev r@ Ady, Jn. viii. 31; ev rH aydry, 1 In. iv.
16; év miorer, 1 Tim. ii. 15; év ois (ev rovrous, d) éuabes,
2 Tim. iii. 14; év rp didayq, 2 Jn. 9, (ev r@ “lovdaiopd, 2
Mace. viii. 1); differently ev r7 aydmn twvés, i. e. to keep
one’s self always worthy of his love, Jn. xv. 9 sq. B.
to be held, or kept, continually: €v r@ Cavare, in the state
of death, 1 Jn. ili. 14; ev rH ckorig, Jn. xii. 46; ev ro
hori, 1 Jn. ii. 10. 2. to TIME; to continue to be, i. e.
not to perish, to last, to endure: of persons, to survive, live,
(exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in Kypke, Observv. i. p. 415
sq.): Phil. i. 25 [so eupéevew, Sir. xxxix. 11]; with eis rov
aidva added, Jn. xii. 34; Heb. vii. 24; also of him who
becomes partaker of the true and everlasting life, opp.
to mapdyeo Oa, 1 Jn. ii. 17; €ws apre, opp. to of koupnOevtes,
1 Co. xv. 6; dAtyov, Rev. xvii. 10; ews epxyopuat, Jn. xxi.
22 sq.; of things, not to perish, to last, stand: of cities,
Mt. xi. 23; Heb. xiii. 14; of works, opp. to caraxalec Oat,
1 Co. iii. 14; of purposes, moral excellences, Ro. ix. 11 ;
1 Co. xiii. 18; Heb. xiii. 1; Adyos Geovd, 1 Pet. i. 23;
(where Ree. adds e?s r. ai@va) ; of institutions, Heb. xii.
27. d xapmds, Jn. xv. 16; vrapéis, Heb. x. 34; duapria,
Jn. ix. 41; Bpdors, opp. to 7 drodAvpevn, Jn. vi. 27; one’s
Scxatoovvn with eis tov ai@va added, 2 Co. ix. 9; 76 pnya
kupiov, 1 Pet.i.25. things which one does not part with
are said pévew to him, i. e. to remain to hin, be still in
(his) possession: Acts v. 4 (1 Mace. xv. 7). 3. to
STATE or CONDITION; to remain as one is, not to become
another or different: with a predicate nom. pdvos, Jn.
xii. 24; doddevros, Acts xxvii. 41; dyapos, 1 Co. vii. 11;
muotés, 2 Tim. ii. 13; iepeds, Heb. vii. 3; with adverbs,
ovtws, 1 Co. vii. 40; as kaye, ibid. 8; év w. dat. of the
state, ibid. 20, 24. II. transitively ; tua, to wait
for, await one [cf. B. § 131, 4]: Acts xx. 23; with ev and
dat. of place added, ibid. 5. [Comp.: dva-, dia-, év-, emt,
KaTa-, Tapa-, Tvy-Tapa-, TEpt-, Tpoo-, Urro-péevea. |
pepttw: 1 aor. euepioa; pf. pepepexa (1 Co. vii. 17 ab
Tr txt. WH txt.); Pass., pf. peuepropac; 1 aor. epepé
cOnv; Mid., 1 aor. inf. pepicacOa; (fr. pépos, a8 pedivo
peplva
fr. wédos); fr. Xen. down; Sept. for pms to divide;
i.e. a. to separate into parts, cut into pieces: pass.
pepéptorar 6 Xpiords; i. e. has Christ himself, whom ye
claim as yours, been like yourselves divided into parts,
so that one has one part and another another part? 1
Co. i. 13 [L WH txt. punctuate so as to take it as an ex-
clamatory declaration; see Meyer in loc.]; trop. pepe-
ptora. # yu) Kal y mapOévos, differ in their aims, follow
different interests, [A. V. there is a difference between,
but L Tr WH connect peu. with what precedes], 1 Co.
vii. 33 (34); to divide into parties, i. e. be split into fac-
tions (Polyb. 8, 23,9): xa@’ euavrod to be at variance with
one’s self, to rebel [A. V. divided] against one’s self, Mt.
xii. 25; also ém euwavroy, ib. 26; Mk. iii. 24-26. b.
to distribute : ri rect, a thing among persons, Mk. vi. 41;
to bestow, impart: rwwi, 1 Co. vii. 17; ri tu, Ro. xii. 3; 2
Co. x. 138; Heb. vii. 2, (Sir. xlv. 20; Polyb. 11, 28, 9) ;
mid. pepifouai te pera twos, to divide (for one’s self) a
thing with one, Lk. xii. 13 (Dem. p. 913, 1). [Comp. :
Sta-, cvp-pepica. | *
pepipva, -as, 7, (fr. pepitw, pepiCouat, to be drawn in
different directions, cf. [Eng. ‘ distraction’ and ‘curae
quae meum animum divorse trahunt’] Ter. Andr. 1, 5, 25;
Verge. Aen. 4, 285 sq.; [but ace. to al. derived fr. a root
meaning to be thoughtful, and akin to paprus, memor,
etc.; cf. Vanicek p.1201; Curtius § 466; Fick iv. 283;
see pdprus]), care, anxiety: 1 Pet. v. 7 (fr. Ps. liv. (v.)
23); Lk. viii. 14; xxi. 34; w. gen. of the obj., care to
be taken of, care for a thing, 2 Co. xi. 28; rov aidvos
(rovrov), anxiety about things pertaining to this earthly
life, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19. [(Hom. h. Merc.), Hes.,
Pind cal: i*
peptpvdw, -; fut. wepyuynow; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur.
peptysynonre ; (wEptuva) ; a. to be anxious; to be
troubled with cares: absol., Mt. vi. 27, 81; Lk. xii. 25;
pndev pep. be anxious about nothing, Phil. iv. 6; with
-dat. of the thing for the interests of which one is solicit-
ous [cf. W. § 31, 1 b.]: 797 Wux7, about sustaining life,
Tt oopart, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22; mepi twos, about a
thing, Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 26; es tyv atvpuov, for the
morrow, i.e. about what may be on the morrow. Mt. vi.
34; foll. by an indir. quest. mas 7 ri, Mt. x.19; Lk. xii.
11 [here Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. WH br. 4 ri]; joined with
tupBatec Oar (OopuBag.) foll. by mepi moda, Lk. x. 41 [WH
mr¢. om. | b. tocare for, look out for, (a thing) ; to
seck to promote one’s interests: ta éavtns, Mt. vi. 34 Ree. ;
Ta Tov Kupiov, 1 Co. vii. 32-34; Ta Tod Kdopov, 1 Co. vii. 34;
éaurns, Mt. vi. 34 L T Tr WH (a usage unknown to Grk.
writ.. although they put a gen. after other verbs of caring
or providing for, as émyseheicOa, ppovriCew, apovoeiy, cf.
Kriiger § 47, 11; W. 205 (193); B. § 133, 25); ra wept
twos, Phil. ii. 20; tva 6 adré imép GAANAov pepipvdoe Td
pédn, that the members may have the same care one for
another, 1 Co. xii. 25. (Sept. for 384, to be anxious, Ps,
XXXVil. (Xxxviil.) 19; 1]. to be disturbed, annoyed in
spirit, 2 S. vii. 10; 1 Chr. xvii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen.
and Soph. down.) [Comp.: mpo-pepipvde.] *
peols, -i80s, n, (see pepos), Sept. chiefly for pln, AIM,
400
wépos
7139; [fr. Antipho and Thue. down]; @ part, i. q. i.
a part as distinct from the whole: (rjs) Maxedovias, Acts
xvi. 12 [on which see Hort in WH. App. ad loc.]. 2.
an assigned part, a portion, share: Lk. x. 42 (see ayaOds;
2); €ore poe pepis pera twos, I have a portion, i. e. fellow- —
ship, with one, 2 Co. vi. 15. ov« gore por pepis } KAjpos
év rum, I have neither part nor lot, take no share, ina
thing, Acts viii. 21; ixavovy twa els thy pepida tis, to
make one fit to obtain a share in a thing [i. e. partit. gen.3
al. gen. of apposition], Col. i. 12.*
pepiopds, -00, 6, (uepi{w), a division, partition, (Plat.,
Polyb., Strab., [al.]) ; 1. a distribution; plur. dis-
tributions of various kinds: mvevparos dyiov, gen. of the
obj., Heb. ii. 4. 2. a separation: aypt peptopov
Wuxis k- mvevparos, Which many take actively: ‘up to the
dividing’ i. e. so far as to cleave asunder or separate};
but it is not easy to understand what the dividing of the
‘soul’ is. Hence it is more correct, I think, and more
in accordance with the context, to take the word pas-
sively (just as other verbal subst. ending in pés are used,
e. g. dyracpds, Tetpacpds), and translate even to the divi
sion, etc., i. e. to that most hidden spot, the dividing line
between soul and spirit, where the one passes into the
‘other, Heb. iv. 12; [ef. Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w.
p- 325 sq. ].*
peptorhs, -ov, 6, (wepitw), a divider: of an inheritance,
Lk. xii. 14. (Pollux [4, 176].) *
p€pos, -ovs, 70, (ecpopat to share, receive one’s due por-
tion), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down], a part; i.e. T°
a part due or assigned to one, (Germ. Antheil): apapetw
Td pepos Twos (gen. of pers.) amd or &k twos (gen. of the
thing), Rev. xxii.19; ¢yew pépos év with dat. of the thing,
Rev. xx. 6; pepos exe pera twos, (participation in the
same thing, i. e.) to have part (fellowship) with one, Jn.
xiii. 8; hence, as sometimes in class. Grk. (Eur. Ale. 477
[474]), lot, destiny, assigned to one, Rev. xxi. 8; redevar
TO pépos Twos peta TwWar, to appoint one his lot with cer-
tain persons, Mt. xxiv. 51; Lk. xii. 46. 2. one of
the constituent parts of a whole; a. univ.: ina con-
text where the whole and its parts are distincuished, Lk.
xi. 36; Jn. xix. 23; Rev. xvi. 19; w.agen. of the whole,
Lk. xv. 12; xxiv. 42; where it is evident from the con-
text of what whole it is a part, Acts v. 2; Eph. iv. 16;
TO év Epos, SC. TOD auvedpiov, Acts xxiii. 6; rod pépous
Tay Sapicaiwy, of that part of the Sanhedrin which con-
sisted of Pharisees, Acts xxiii. 9 [not Lcehm.]; 7a pépn,
w. gen. of a province or country, the divisions or regions
which make up the land or province, Mt. ii. 22; Acts ii
10; w. gen. of a city, the region belonging to a city,
country around it, Mt. xv. 21; xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 10;
Ta dvwrepika pépy, the upper districts (in tacit contrast
with ra xarorepa, and with them forming one whole),
Acts xix. 1; ra pépn éxeiva, those regions (which are
parts of the country just mentioned, i. e. Macedonia), Acts
XX. 2; rd kaT@Tepa peépy w. gen. of apposition, rijs vis,
Eph. iv. 9 (on which see xar@repos); eis ra Se&ta pépn rod
moiov, i. e. into the parts (i. e. spots sc. of the lake) on
the right side of the ship, Jn. xxi. 6. Adverbial phrases
peonpBpla
ava pepos (see dvd, 1), 1 Co. xiv. 27; Kara pépos, sever-
aily, part by part, in detail, Heb. ix. 5 [see xara, II. 3
a. y-]; pépos re (ace. absol.) in part, partly, 1 Co. xi. 18
(Thue. 2, 64; 4, 30; Isocr. p. 426 d.); dad pépous, in
part, i. e. somewhat, 2 Co. i. 14; in a measure, to some de-
gree, ib. ii. 5; [Ro. xv. 24]; as respects a part, Ro. xi. 25;
here and there, Ro. xv. 15; ék pépovs as respects indi-
vidual persons and things, severally, individually, 1 Co.
xii. 27; in part, partially, i. e. imperfectly, 1 Co. xiii. 9,
12; 70 &« wépous (opp. to rd Tédevov) [A. V. that which
as in part] imperfect (Luth. well, das Sttickwerk), ibid. 10.
[Green (Crit. Note on 2 Co. i. 14) says “dé p. differs in
-Paul’s usage from ék yp. in that the latter is a contrasted
term in express opposition to the idea of a complete whole,
the other being used simply without such aim”; cf.
Bnhdy. Syntax, p. 230; Meyer on 1 Co. xii. 27.] b.
any particular, Germ. Sttick, (where the writer means to
intimate that there are other matters, to be separated
from that which he has specified): ev 7G pépet rovre,
in this particular i.e. in regard to this, in this respect,
1 Pet. iv. 16 R; 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 3; w. a gen. of the thing,
Col. ii. 16 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]; rodro rd pépos, se.
Ts épyacias nueyv (branch of business), Acts xix. 27,
ef. 25%
peonpBpia, -as, 7, (uecos and jpepa), fr. Hdt. down, mid-
day [on the omission of the art. cf. W. 121 (115)]; a.
(as respects time) noon: Acts xxii. 6. b. (as re-
spects locality) the south: Acts viii 26 [al. refer this also
to a.; see xard, II. 2].*
peciredm: 1 aor. éuecirevoa; (pecitys [cf. W. p. 25
e.]); 1. to act as mediator, between litigating or
covenanting parties; trans. to accomplish something by
interposing between two parties, to mediate, (with acc. of
the result): riv diddvow, Polyb. 11, 34, 3; ras ovvO7kas,
Diod. 19, 71; Dion. Hal. 9, 59; [cf. Philo de plant. Noé,
i) fin: 2. as a pecirns is a sponsor or surety (Jo-
seph. antt. 4, 6, 7 radra dpvivres €deyor kal rov Gedy peoi-
tv &v bmirxvoivto motovpevor [cf. Philo de spec. legg. iii.
7 dopdr@ S€ mpdypartt mavras adpatos peactever Beds etc. ]),
so peoirevo comes to signify to pledge one’s self, give
surety: dpxe, Heb. vi. 17.*
peoitns, -ov, 0, (uécos), one who intervenes between
two, either in order to make or restore peace and friend-
ship, or to form a compact, or for ratifying a covenant ;
a medium of communication, arbitrator, (Vulg. [and A. V.]
mediator): 6 pecirns [generic art. cf. W. § 18, 1 sub fin.],
i.e. every mediator, whoever acts as mediator, €vds ovK
Zort, does not belong to one party but to two or more,
Gal. iii. 20. Used of Moses, as one who brought the
commands of God to the people of Israel and acted as
mediator with God on behalf of the people, ib. 19 (cf.
Deut. v. 5; hence he is called peairns xai Staddaxrys by
Philo also, vit. Moys. iii. § 19). Christ is called peo.
cod x. dvOpemav, since he interposed by his death and
restored the harmony between God and man which
human sin had broken, 1 Tim. ii. 5; also peo. Stadnkns,
Heb. viii. 6; ix. 15; xii. 24. (Polyb. 28, 15, 8; Diod. 4,
401
eros
de Is. et Os. 46; once in Sept., Job ix. 33.) Cf. Fischer,
De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 351 sqq.*
pero-vixriov, -ov, rd, (neut. of the adj. peoow’«rios in
Pind. et al., fr. pévos and wig, vuerds), midnight: peco-
vuctiov, at midnight [W. § 30,11; B. § 132, 26], Mk.
xiii. 35 [here T Tr WH ace.; cf. W. 230 (215 sq.); B.
§ 131, 11]; Lk. xi. 5; xara 7d p. about midnight, Acts
xvi. 25; péxpe p. until midnight, Acts xx. 7. (Sept.;
Hippocr., Aristot., Diod., Strabo, Leian., Plut.; ef. Lod.
ad Phryn. p. 53, [W. p. 23 ¢.].) *
Mecororapta, -as, 7, (fem. of pwecororduios, -a, -ov, Sc.
x%pa; fr. pesos and morayds), Mesopotamia, the name,
not so much political as geographical (scarcely in use
before the time of Alexander the Great), of a region in
Asia, lying between the rivers Euphrates and Tigris
(whence it took its name; cf. Arrian. anab. Alex. 7, 7;
Tac. ann. 6, 37; 0°97) DIN, Aram of the two rivers, Gen.
xxiv. 10), bounded on the N. by the range of Taurus
and on the S. by the Persian Gulf; many Jews had
settled in it (Joseph. antt. 12, 3, 4): Acts ii. 9; vii. 2.
(Cf. Socin in Encyel. Brit. ed. 9 s. v.3| Rawlinson, He-
rodotus, vol. i. Essay ix.]*
péoos, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], middle, (Lat. medius,
-d, -um) ; 1. as an adjective: péons vuxros, at mid-
night, Mt. xxv. 6; peons jpépas, Acts xxvi. 13 (acc. to
Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 53, 54, 465, the better writ. said pé-
Gov jpépas, pecodoa ijpépa, peonpBpia); w.gen.: [éxd-
Onro 6 Térpos pécos adrav, Lk. xxii. 55 (RG Lev péow)];
péoos tyav eornxe [al. orjxer], stands in the midst of
you, Jn. i. 26, (Plat. de rep. 1 p. 330b.; polit. p. 303 a.) ;
éoxicOn pécov, (the veil) was rent in the midst, Lk. xxiii.
45 [W. 131 (124) note]; éAdkyoe péoos, Acts i. 18;
(é€oravpwcay) pécoy Tov “Incovy, Jn. xix. 18. 2. the
neut. 7d peor or (without the art. in adverb. phrases,
as did pecou, ev peow, cf. W. 123 (117); [ef. B. § 125, 6])
pécoy is used as a substantive; Sept. for 3)A (constr.
state J1M), and 37p3 the midst: dvd pécoy (see avd, 1
[and added note below]); da pécov (Twos), through the
midst (Am.v.17; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii.) 4): airéy, through
the midst of them, Lk. iv. 30; Jn. viii. 59 [Rec.]; Sapa-
pelas, Lk. xvii. 11 [RG, but L T Tr WH 6&4 peoor (see
did, B. I.); others take the phrase here in the sense of
between (Xen. an. 1, 4,4; Aristot. de anim. 2, 11 vol.
i. p. 423%, 12; see L. and S.s. v. II.1d.); cf. Meyer
ed. Weiss in loc. and added note below]; eis 7d pecov,
into the midst, i. e., acc. to the context, either the mid-
dle of a room or the midst of those assembled in it:
Mk. iii. 3; xiv. 60 Rec.; Lk. iv. 35; v. 195 vi. 8; Jn.
xx. 19, 26; els péoor (cf. Germ. mittenhin), Mk. xiv. 60
GLT Tr WH; ev ré péoe, in the middle of the apart-
ment or before the guests, Mt. xiv. 6; é péo@, in the
midst of the place spoken of, -In. viii. 3,9; in the middle
of the room, before all, Acts iv. 7; w. gen. of place,
Rev. ii. 7 Rec.; Lk. xxi. 21; (i. q. Germ. mittenauf) ris
mAatevas, Rev. xxii. 2 [but see below]; add, Lk. xxii. 55°;
Acts xvii. 223 ts Oaddoons, in the midst (of the surface
of) the sea, Mk. vi. 47; w. gen. plur. in the midst of,
54; Philo de somn. i. § 22; Joseph. antt. 16, 2,2; Plut. | amongst: w. gen. of things, Mt. x.16; Lk. viii. 7; x. 37
fueo OTOLVOV
Rev. i. 13; ii.1; w. gen. of pers., Mt. xviii. 2; Mk. ix.
36; Lk. ii. 46; xxii. 55° [here T Tr WH péoos; see 1
above]; xxiv. 36; Acts i. 15; ii. 22; xxvii. 21; Rev. v.
6 [°? (see below); vi. 6]; trop. év péo@ adray ejus, I am
present with them by my divine power, Mt. xviii. 20;
w. gen. of a collective noun, Phil. ii. 15 R [see 3 below];
Heb. ii. 12; where association or intercourse is the topic,
equiv. to among, in intercourse with: Lk. xxii. 27; 1 Th.
ii. 7. in the midst of, i. e. in the space within, rod Opdvov
(which must be conceived of as having a semicircular
shape): Rey. iv. 6; v. 6 [*?] where cf. De Wette and
Bleek; [but De Wette’s note on v. 6 runs “ And I saw
between the throne and the four living creatures and the
elders (i. e. in the vacant space between the throne and
the living creatures [on one side] and elders [on the
other side], accordingly nearest the throne” etc.) ; ava
pécor in vii. 17 also he interprets in the same way; fur-
ther see xxii. 2; cf. Kliefoth, Com. vol. ii. p.40. For év
péow in this sense see Xen. an. 2, 2,3; 2, 4, 17. 21;
5, 2, 27, etc.; Hab. ili. 2; dva pécov Polyb. 5, 55, 7; often
in Aristot. (see Bonitz’s index s. v. pécos); Num. xvi.
48; Deut. v. 5; Josh. xxii. 25; Judg. xv.4; 1K. v.12;
Ezek. xlvii. 18; xlviii. 22; cf. Gen. i. 4; see Meyer on
1 Co. vi. 5; cf. dvd, 1]. «ata pécov tis vuKros, about
midnight, Acts xxvii. 27 [see xara, II. 2]. ek rot pécov,
like the Lat. ¢ medio, i.e. out of the way, out of sight:
aipw tt, to take out of the way, to abolish, Col. ii. 14
[ Plut. de curiositate 9; Is. lvii. 2]; yivouar ex pécov, to
be taken out of the way, to disappear, 2 Th. ii. 7; w.
gen. of pers., ex pecov twar, from the society or company
of, out from among: Mt. xiii. 49; Acts xvii. 33; xxiii. 10;
IC ostvi02) 3) 2 C 0. evi iin (lx, xocxde 145 Nom) aye A
Alex.). 3. the neut. peor is used adverbially with
a gen., in the midst of anything: jv péecor ris addons,
Mt. xiv. 24 [otherwise Tr txt. WH txt.; yet cf. W. § 54,
6] ({so Exod. xiv. 27]; Téwy yap pécov elva tis Iwvins,
Hat. 7,170); yeveds oxodsas, Phil. ii. 15 LT Tr WH (rijs
nuepas, the middle of the day, Sus. 7 Theodot.); cf. B.
123 (107 sq.), [ef. 319 (274); W. as above]. *
perdtouxov, -ov, Td, (Ecos, and rotyos the wall of a
house), a partilion-wall: 76 y. rov ppaypod (i. &. rév ppay-
ov tov peodrorxov dvra [A. V. the middle wall of parti-
tion; W. § 59, 8 a.]), Eph. ii. 14. (Only once besides,
and that too in the masc.: rév ras ndovijs K. aperns peod-
rotxov, Eratosth. ap. Athen. 7 p. 281 d.) *
peroupavnua, -ros, Td, (fr. pecoupavéw; the sun is said
feecoupavetv to be in mid-heaven, when it has reached the
meridian), mid-heaven, the highest point in the heavens,
which the sun occupies at noon, where what is done can be
seen and heard by all: Rev. viii. 13 (cf. Diisterdieck ad
loc.) ; xiv. 6; xix.17. (Manetho, Plut., Sext. Emp.) *
perso; (pneoos); to be in the middle, be midway: rijs
€opris pecovons [where a few codd. peoatovons (vuxrds
peoat. Sap. xviii. 14)], when it was the midst of the
feast, the feast half-spent, Jn. vii. 14 (uecovons ris
vurtos, Ex. xii. 29; Judith xii. 5; ris juepas, Neh. viii. 3
[Ald., Compl.}; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hadt.
down; O€povs pevovvros, Thuc. 6, 30).*
402
peTa.
Meoctas, -ov [cf. B. 18 (16)], 6, Messiah; Chald.
xrwn, Hebr. mv, i. g. Grk. xpiords, q. v-: In. i. 41
(42); iv. 25. Cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth.
Theol., 1876, p. 603; [Lagarde, Psalt. vers. Memphit.,
1875, p. vii. On the general subject see esp. Abbot’s
supplement to art. Messiah in B. D. Am. ed. and reff.
added by Orelli (cf. Schaff-Herzog) in Herzog 2 s. v. to
Oehler’s art. | *
pects, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. [i. e. Epigr.] down, Sept. for
xD, full; w. gen. of the thing: prop., Jn. xix. 29; xxi.
11; Jas. iii. 8; trop. in reference to persons, whose
minds are as it were filled with thoughts and emotions,
either good or bad, Mt. xxiii. 28; Ro. i. 29; xv. 14;
2 Pet. ii. 14; Jas. ili. 17, (Prov. vi. 34).*
perrow, -@; (ueortds); to fill, fill full: yedxous peperta-
pévos, Acts ii. 13. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., al.; 3 Mace.
Voi be LOe)e™
peré, [on its nevlect of elision before proper names be-
ginning with a vowel, and before sundry other words (at
least in Tdf.’s text) see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95; ef. WH. Intr.
p- 146°; W. § 5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition, akin to
pecos (as Germ. mit to Mitte, mitten) and hence prop. in
the midst of, amid, denoting association, union, accom-
paniment; [but some recent etymologists doubt its kinship
to pécos ; some connect it rather with dua, Germ. sammt,
cf. Curtius § 212; Vanitek p. 972]. Ittakes the gen. and
acc. (in the Grk. poets also the dat.). [On the distinc-
tion between pera and ovy, see cv, init. ]
I. with the GENITIVE (Sept. for nx, DY, IM, etc.),
among, with, [cef. W. 376 (352) sq.J; 1. amid,
among ; a. prop.: peta Tov vexp@v, among the dead,
Lk. xxiv. 5 (werd vexpav xeicopat, Kur. Hee. 209; Oaeré
pe pera TOY TaTepwv pov, Gen. xlix. 29 Sept.; pera Covrav
eivat, to be among the living, Soph. Phil. 1312); doyi-
(ecOar peta avduov, to be reckoned, numbered, among
transgressors, Mk. xv. 28 [GT WH om. Tr br. the vs.]
and Lk. xxii. 37, fr. Is. ii. 12 (where Sept. év dvdyors) ;
pera Tov Onpiwy etvar, Mk. i. 13; yoyydCew per’ dddproyv,
Jn. vi. 433; oxnv7) tod Geo pera Tr. avOpwnev, Rev. xxi. 3;
add, Mt. xxiv. 51; xxvi.58; Mk. xiv.54; Lk. xii.46; Jn.
xviii. 5,18; Acts i. 26, ete. b. trop.: pera Stoypar,
amid persecutions, Mk. x. 30 (uerd xwdvvev, amid perils,
Thue. 1, 18); 9 a@yarn pe judr, love among us, mutual
love, 1 Jn. iv. 17 [al. understand pe@ judy here of the
sphere or abode, and connect it with the verb; cf. De
Wette, or Huther, or Westcott, inloc.]. Henceused 2.
of association and companionship, with (Lat.
cum; Germ. mit, often also be?) ; a. after verbs of
going, coming, departing, remaining, ete, w.
the gen. of the associate or companion: Mt. xx. 20;
xxvi- 365) Mk019295 aii. 73) sxie 1 Ns) xiv. 17s) uke vi Lae
xiv. 31; Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54; Gal. ii. 1; Jesus the Mes.
siah it is said will come hereafter pera rév dyyédov, Mt.
xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38; 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Th. i. 7; on the
other hand, w. the gen. of the pers. to whom one joins
himself as a companion: Mt. v.41; Mk. v. 24; Lk. ii.
51; Rev. xxil. 12; d@yyeAo per’ adrod, Mt. xxv. 31; perd
Tivos, contextually i. q. with one as leader, Mt. xxv. 10;
peta
xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43; Acts vii. 45. mepumareiv perd
twos, to associate with one as his follower and adherent,
Jn. vi. 66; yivoua: . twos, to come into fellowship and
intercourse with, become associated with, one: Mk. xvi.
10; Acts vii. 38; ix.19; xx. 18. mapadapBavew rid
pe® €avrod, to take with or to one’s self as an attend-
ant or companion: Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv. 33;
dyey, 2 Tim. iv. 11; yew pe éavrovd, to have with one’s
self: ted, Mt. xv. 30; xxvi. 11; Mk. ii. 19; xiv. 7;
Jn. xii. 8; ri, Mk. viii. 143 AapBdvew, Mt. xxv. 33; dxo-
NovOeiv pera Twos, see dxodovbéw, 1 and 2, [cf. W. 233
sq. (219)]. b. elvat peta twos is used in various
_ senses, a. prop. of those who associate with one and
accompany him wherever he goes: in which sense the
disciples of Jesus are said to be (or to have been) with
him, Mk. iii. 14; Mt. xxvi.69, 71; Lk. xxii. 59, cf. Mk.
v.18; with dm’ dpyjs added, Jn. xv. 27; of those who at
a particular time associate with one or accompany him
anywhere, Mt. v. 25; Jn. iii. 26; ix.40; xii. 17; xx.
24, 26; 2 Tim.iv.11; sometimes the ptcp. dv, dvra, etc.,
must be added mentally: Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. ix. 8; Jn.
XViil. 26; of (6vres) pera twos, his attendants or com-
panions, Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 25; Lk. vi. 3; Acts xx. 34;
sc. dvres, Tit. iii. 15. Jesus says that he is or has been
with his disciples, Jn. xiii. 33; xiv. 9; and that, to ad-
vise and help them, Jn. xvi. 4; Mt. xvii. 17, (Mk. ix.
19 and Lik ix. 41 mpds tpas), even as one whom they could
be said to have with them, Mt. ix. 15; Lk. v. 34; just
as he in turn desires that his disciples may hereafter be
with himself, Jn. xvii. 24. ships also are said to be with
one who is travelling by vessel, i. e. to attend him, Mk.
iv. 36. B. trop. the phrase [to be with, see b.] is used
of God, if he is present to guide and help one: Jn. iii. 2;
viii. 29; xvi. 32; Acts vii.9; x.38; 2Co.xiii.11; Phil.
iv. 9; with elva omitted, Mt. i. 23; Lk. i. 28; Ro. xv.
33; here belongs dea émoinger 6 Beds per adtav se. dv, by
being present with them by his divine assistance [cf. W.
376 (353); Green p. 218], Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4, [cf. h.
below]; and conversely, mAnpadcers pe edppootyys pera
Tov mpocarov gov sc. dvra, i.e. being in thy presence [yet
cf. W. 376 (352) note], Acts ii. 28 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11;
xelp kuptov is used as a substitute for God himself (by
a Hebraism [see xefp, sub fin.]) in Lk. i. 66; Acts xi. 21;
of Christ, who is to be present with his followers by his
divine power and aid: Mt. xxviii. 20; Acts Xvili. 10, (pré-
vew pera is used of the Holy Spirit as a perpetual helper,
Jn. xiv. 16 RG); at the close of the Epistles, the writers
pray that there may be with the readers (i. e. always
present to help them) —6 6eds, 2 Co. xiii. 11; —6 vptos,
2 Th. iii. 16; 2 Tim. iv. 22;—# xdpes Tod x. "Inood Xp.
(where er must be supplied [cf. W. § 64, 2b.; B. § 129,
22}), Ro. xvi. 20, 24 [RG]; 1Co. xvi. 23; 2 Co. xiii. 13
(14); Gal. vi. 18; Phil. iv. 23; 1 Th. v. 28; 2 Th. iii. 18;
Philem. 25; Rev. xxii. 21;—# xdpes simply, Eph. vi. 24;
Col. iv. 18; 1 Tim. vi. 21 (22); Tit. iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 25;
2 Jn. 3;—# dydrn pov, 1 Co. xvi. 24; the same phrase
is used also of truth, compared to a guide, 2 Jn. 2. y-
: : sd seep tae
opp. to eivat ard Twos, to be with one i. e. on ones side:
403
peta
Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (and often in class. Grk.); simi-
larly pévew perd revos, to side with one steadfastly, 1 Jn.
ii. 19. c. with the gen. of the person who is another’s
associate either in acting or in his experiences; so after
verbs of eating, drinking, supping, etc.: Mt. viii. 11; ix.
11; xxiv. 49; xxvi. 18, 23, 29; Mk. xiv. 18, 20; Lk. v.
303 vili365 xxii./11, 15; xxiv30; Jn. xiii. 18; Gal. il,
12; Rev. iii. 20, etc. ; ypnyopeiv, Mt. xxvi. 38, 40; xaipew,
kiaiew, Ro. xii. 15; edppaiverOa, Ro. xv. 10; TapoLKety,
Heb. xi. 9; Sovdeverw, Gal. iv. 25; Bacidevew, Rev. xx. 4,
6; ¢nv, Lk. ii. 36; amroOvnokew, In. xi. 16; BadrcoOa eis
thy ynv, Rev. xii. 9; KAnpovopeiv, Gal. iv. 30 ; ouvayewv, Mt.
xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, and other exx. d. with a gen. of the
pers. with whom one (of two) does anything mutually
or by turns: so after ovvaipéw Adyov, to make a reckon-
ing, settle accounts, Mt. xviii. 23; xxv. 19; ovvayer Oat,
Mt. xxviii.12; Jn. xviii. 2; cupPovdAcov roceiv, Mk. iii. 6;
Aadety (see Aahéw, 5); gvAdadeiv, Mt. xvii. 3; Acts xxv.
12; potyevew, Rev. ii. 22; podrvverOau, Rev. xiv. 4; Top-
vevew, Rev. xvii. 2; xviii. 3,9; pepi¢oua, Lk. xii. 13;
after verbs of disputing, waging war, contend-
ing at law: modepeiv, Rev. ii. 16; xii. 7 (where Rec.
katd); xili.4; xvii. 14, (so for” oy on), 1S. xvii. 33;
1 K. xii. 24, a usage foreign to the native Greeks, who
say rroAepetv tet, also mpds twa, emi twa, to wage war
against one; but modepeiy pera twos, to wage war with one
as an ally, in conjunction with, Thue. 1,18; Xen. Hell.
7,1, 27; [ef. B. § 183, 8; W. § 28,1; 214 (201); 406
(379) note]); médepnov moteiv, Rev. xi. 7; xii. 173. xiii.
7; xix. 19, (soin Lat. bellare cum ete. Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 33;
bellum gerere, Cic. de divinat. 1, 46); ¢nrnows éyévero, Jn.
iii. 25; ynreiv, Jn. xvi. 19; xpiverOa, xpipara éxew, 1 Co.
vi. 6 sq.; after verbs and phrases which indicate mutual
inclinations and pursuits, the entering into agreement
or relations with, etc.; as eipnvevetv, etpnyny Stoxewv, Ro.
xli. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 22; Heb. xii. 14; idos, Lk. xxxiii.
12; cupdoveiv, Mt. xx. 2; pepis pera tivos, 2 Co. vi. 15;
éxew pépos, Jn. xiii. 8; ouvyxarabeots, 2 Co. vi. 163; Kowa
viav éyewv, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6 sq.; airia (see the word, 3), Mt.
xix. 10; e. of divers other associations of persons
or things;— where the action or condition expressed
by the verb refers to persons or things besides those
specified by the dat. or acc. (somewhat rare in Grk. auth.,
as loyuv Te Kal KaAAOS pera vyteias AapBavewy, Plat. rep. 9,
p- 591 b. [cf. W. § 47, h.]): edSov (Ree. edpov) 16 madiov
pera Mapias, Mt. ii. 11; avramvdotva... tpiv... pel?
nav, 2 Th.i.6 sq.; after éxdéyerOa, 1 Co. xvi. 11; after
verbs of sending, Mt. xxii. 16; 2 Co. vili. 18. dydmy pera
niotrews, Eph. vi. 23; év miorer... peta cwppoorrys, 1
Tim. ii. 15; 9 evoéBera pera adrapkeias, 1 Tim. vi. 6; in
this way the term which follows is associated as sec-
ondary with its predecessor as primary; but when kai
stands between them they are co-ordinated. Col. i.
11; 1 Tim.i.14. of mingling one thing with another,
piyvupi te perd twos (in class. auth. ri ran [ef. B. § 133,
8]): Lk. xiii. 1; pass. Mt. xxvii. 34. f. with the gen.
of mental feelings desires and emotions, of bodily move-
ments, and of other acts which are so to speak the at-
I,
peTa
tendants of what is done or occurs; so that in this way
the characteristic of the action or occurrence is de-
scribed, — which in most cases can be expressed by a
cognate adverb or participle [cf. W. u.s.]: pera aidovs,
1 Tim. ii. 9; Heb. xii. 28 [Rec.]; alcxtyns, Lk. xiv. 9;
novyias, 2 Th. iii. 12; xapas, Mer xine 2 OG eM kemive 16) 5
Lk. viii. 18; x. 17; xxiv. 52; Phil. ii. 29; 1 Th. i. 6;
Heb. x. 34; mpoOvuias, Acts xvii. 11; PdBov x. Tpdpov, 2
Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi.5; Phil. ii. 12; péBov x. xapas, Mt.
XXvili. 8; mpadrytos k. PdBov, 1 Pet. iii. 16 (15); mappnoias,
Acts ii. 29; iv. 29, 81; xxviii. 31; Heb. iv. 16; edxapi-
orias, Acts xxiv. 3; Phil. iv. 6; 1 Tim. iv. 3 sq.; a@An-
Owis kapdias, Heb. x. 22; ramewvoppoovvns xrX., Eph. iv.
2; Acts xx.19; dpyjs, Mk. iii. 5; edvoias, Eph. vi. 7;
Bias, Acts v.26; xxiv. 7 Rec.; pera Saxpvav, with tears,
Mk. ix. 24[RG WH (rejected) mrg.]; Heb.v. 7; xii. 17,
(Plat. apol. p. 34 ¢.); efpnyns, Acts xv. 33; Heb. xi. 31;
embécews Tov xetpov, 1 Tim. iv. 14 [W.u.s.]; povis peyd-
Ans, Lk. xvii. 15; vnorecv, Acts xiv. 23; dpxou or épkapo-
cias, Mt. xiv. 7; xxvi. 72; Heb. vii. 21; OoptBov, Acts
xxiv. 18; mapakdnoews, 2 Co. viii. 4; maparnpnoews, Lk.
XVii. 20; omovdys, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 39; UBpews x. Cyulas,
Acts xxvii. 10; @avracias, xxv. 23; dppov, Lk. ix. 39; to
this head may be referred pera xovorwdias, posting the
guard, Mt. xxvii. 66 [so W. (1. c.) et al. (cf. Meyer ad loc.);
others ‘in company with the guard’; cf. Jas. Morison ad
loc.; Green p. 218]. g. after verbs of coming, depart-
ing, sending, with gen. of the thing with which one is fur-
nished or equipped: pera dd€ns x. duvdpews, Mt. xxiv. 30;
Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27; ée£ovoias x. émitpomns, Acts
xxvi. 12; payatpov x. EvAwv, Mt. xxvi. 47,55; Mk. xiv.
43,48; Lk. xxii. 52; havéy x. drd@y, In. xviii. 3; pera
oddmeyyos, Mt. xxiv. 31 [cf. B. § 132,10]. where an in-
strumental dat. might have been used [cf. W. § 31, 8 d.],
pera Bpaxtovos bYnrov eEdyewv twa, Acts xiii. 17. h.
in imitation of the Hebr.: @deos qoteiv pera twos, to show
mercy toward one, and peyadtvew €X. p. 7. to magnify,
show great, mercy toward one; see 76 éAeos, 1. To this
head many refer éca émoincev 6 Oeds per’ adrav, Acts xiv.
27; xv. 4, but see above, 2 b. 8.
II. with the AccusaTIVE[W. § 49, f.]; 1. prop.
into the middle of, into the midst of, among, after verbs of
coming, bringing, moving; so esp. in Hom. 2. it
denotes (following accompaniment), sequence, i. e. the
order in which one thing follows another ; a. in order
of Place; after, behind, (so fr. Hom. down); once in
the N. T. [W. u. s.]: Heb. ix. 3 (Judith ii. 4). b. in
order of Time; after (Sept. for 18, “INN, yp? ete.):
pel 7 npépas e&, after six mele (had passed), va Xvil. 1;
Mk. ix. 2; add, Mt. xxvi. 2; Mk. xiv. 1; Lk. i. 243 ii.
46, etc., cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Mt. p. 22 a3 pe?’ ov Trod-
Aas juépas, Lk. xv. 13; perd rwas jp., Acts xv. 36; xxiv.
24; ov peta moddds Tavras juépas, not long after these
days [A. V. not many days hence}, Acts i. 5, ef. De Wette
ad loc. and W. 161 (152); [B. § 127, 4]; p. tpeis pivas,
Acts xxviii. 11; yw. &n rpia, Gal. i. 18, ete.; jp. ypdvov
movv, Mt. xxv. 19; p. rocoitoy xp. Heb. iv. 7. added to
the names of events or achievements, and of festivals: ys
404
petabdioaps
Thy perotxeciay BaB. Mt. i. 12; p. rv Odj&puv, Mt. xxiv.
29; Mk. xiii. 24; add, Mt. xxvii. 53; Acts x. 37; xx. 29;
2 Pet. i. 15; p. ray dvayywow, Acts xiii. 15; p. piav Kk
Seurépav vovOeciay, Tit. iii. 10; p. 7d mdoxa, Acts xii. 4
cf. xx. 6; with the names of persons or things having the
notion of time associated with them: pera rovrov, adtév,
etc., Acts v. 37; vil. 5; xiii. 25; xix.4; p. rdv vdpor,
Heb. vii. 28; pera 7d opiov, after the morsel was taken,
Jn. xiii. 27 [cf. B. § 147, 26]; foll. by the neut. demonstr.
pron. [cf. W. 540 (503)]: pera rovro, Jn. ii. 125 xi. 7, 11;
xix. 28; Heb. ix. 27; [Rev. vii. 1 LTTrWH]; pera
ravra (cf. W.162 (153) ], Mk. xvi.12; Lk.v.27; x.1; xii.
4[W. u.s.]; xvii. 8; xviii.4; Acts vii. 7; xili. 20; xv.
165° xviii, Us) Sit. ail; Q2tvak, Wat vaca sfevil. Wo exaleade
xix. 88; xxi. 1; Heb.iv.8; 1 Pet.i.11; Rev.i.193; iv.
1; vii.'1 [Ree:], 9; ix. 125*xvi 5; xvii 15 xixs 1;
8, and very often in Grk. writ. . it stands before the neut.
of adjectives of quantity, measure, and time: per’ ov rod,
not long after [R. V. after no long time], Acts xxvii. 14;
pera puxpdv, shortly after [A. V. after a little while], Mt.
xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv. 70; pera Bpaxv, Lk. xxii. 58; also be-
fore infinitives with the neut. art. (Lat. postqguam with a
finite verb, [cf. B. § 140,11; W. § 44, 6]);—the aorist
inf.: Mt. xxvi. 32; Mk.i.14; xiv. 28; xvi.19; Lk. xii.
5; xxii. 20 [WH reject the pass.]; Acts i.3; vii.4; x.
Als oxy, Day xxeel suelo. xi 2b SLLebaex.n26.
III. In comMposiTION, pera denotes 1. associa-
tion, fellowship, participation, with: as in peradiddvat,
peradap Paver, peTexelv, eTOXN. 2. exchange, trans-
fer, transmutation; (Lat. trans, Germ. wm): peradX\aooo,
perapeAopat[ Prof. Grimm prob. means here petavoew; see
3 and in perapeAopnar |, perouxi€a, petrapoppda, etc. 3.
after: perapéAoua. Cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 639.
peta-Balyw; fut. peraBnoopat; 2 aor. pereBnv, impv.
peraBn& and (in Mt. xvii. 20 L T Tr WH) peraBa (see
avaBaive, init.); pf. weraBe8nxa; fr. Hom. down; to pass
over from one place to another, to remove, depart: foll. by
aré w. agen. of the place, Mt. viii. 34; && oixias els oixiay
[ef. W.§ 52, 4. 10], Lk. x. 7; &k rod Kdopou mpds Tov ma-
tépa, Jn. xiii. 1; évredOev, Jn. vii. 3; éxetOev, Mt. xi. 1;
xii. 9; xv. 29; Acts xviii. 7; évreddev[L T Tr WH e6er]
exe? (for éxeice [cf. W. § 54, 7; B. 71 (62))]), of a thing,
i. q. to be removed, Mt. xvii. 20; metaph. é« rod Gavarov
eis rnv Conv, Jn. v. 24; 1 Jn. iii. 14.*
peta-BadAw: prop. to turn round; to turn about; pass.
and mid. to turn one’s self about, change or transform one’s
self; trop. to change one’s opinion; [Mid., pres. ptcp.]
peraBarddpevor [ (2 aor. ptep. Baddpnevoe Tr WH)] &reyor,
they changed their minds and said, Acts xxviii. 6 (uera-
Badépevos héyers, having changed your mind you say, Plat.
Gorg. 481 e.; in the same sense, Thuc., Xen., Dem.).*
peT-Gyo ; pres. pass. petayoua; to transfer, lead over,
(Polyb., Diod., al.) ; hence univ. to direct [A. V. to turn
about]: Jas. iii. 3 sq.*
peta-SiSwpr; 2 aor. subj. peradé, impv. 3 pers. sing.
peraddra, inf. peradotvac; [fr. Theogn., Hdt. down]; to
share a thing with any one [see perd, III. 1], to impart:
absol. 6 peradidovs, he that imparteth of his substance, Ro.
XX.
ueTtabects
xii. 8, cf. Fritzsche ad loc.; rit, Eph. iv. 283 roi re (a
constr. somewhat rare in Grk. auth. [Hdt. 9, 34 ete.],
with whom perad. tui twos is more common; ef. Mat-
thiae ii. p. 798; [W. § 30,7 b.; B. § 132, 8]), Ro.i. 11;
1 Th. ii. 8; the ace. evident from the preceding context,
Lk. iii. 11.*
pera-Beors, -ews, 9, (uerariOnps) ; 1. a transfer: from
one place to another (Diod. 1, 23); tuvds (gen. of obj.),
the translation of a person to heaven, Heb. xi. 5. ZY,
change (of things instituted or established, as fepwotyns,
vonov): Heb. vii. 12; trav cadevopevav, Heb, xii. 27.
(Thue. 5, 29; Aristot., Plut.) *
_ pet-alpw: 1 aor. peripa ; 1. trans. to lift up and
remove from one place to another, to transfer, (Eur.,
Theophr., al.). 2. in the N. T. intrans. (cf. W.§ 38,
1; [B. § 130, 4}) to go away, depart, (Germ. aufbrechen) :
éxcidev, Mt. xiii. 53 (Gen. xii. 9 Aq.) ; foll. by-dé w. gen.
of place, Mt. xix. 1.*
peta-Kahew, -@: Mid., 1 aor. perexadeodunv; 1 fut. pera-
kahéooua; to call from one place to another, to summon,
(Hos. xi. 1 sq.; Plat. Ax. fin.) ; mid. to call to one’s self,
tosend for: ted, Acts vii. 14; x. 82; xx.17; xxiv. 25.*
peta-Kivew, -@: to move from a place, to move away:
Deut. xxxii. 30; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; Pass. pres.
ptep. peraxcvovpevos; trop. aré ris €Aridos, from the hope
which one holds, on which one rests, Col. i. 23.*
pera-AapBdavw; impf. pereAduBavoy; 2 aor. inf. pera-
AaBeiv, ptep. peradaBav; [see pera, III. 1; fr. Pind. and
Hat. down]; fo be or to be made a partaker: gen. of the
thing, 2 Tim. ii. 6; Heb. vi. 7; xii. 10; rpodis, to par-
take of, take [some] food, Acts ii. 46; xxvii. 33 sq. [in
34 Ree. mpoodaBeiv] ; w. ace. of the thing, to get, find (a
whole) : xaipdv, Acts xxiv. 25; on the constr. w. gen. and
acc. see Kriiger § 47, 15; cf. W. § 30, 8.*
pera-Anyus (LT Tr WH -Anpyis [see M, p]), -ews, 77,
(peradtapBdava), a taking, participation, (Plat., Plut., al.) :
of the use of food, eis perad. to be taken or received, 1
Tim. iv. 3.*
pet-ahddoow: 1 aor. werndrAaéa; fr. Hdt. down; [not
in Sept., yet nine times in 2 Macc.; also 1 Esdr. i. 31];
to exchange, change, (cf. perd, III. 2]: ri &v ru, one thing
with (for) another (on this constr. see dAAdocw), Ro. i.
25; ri ets re, one thing into another, Ro. i. 26.*
pera-péAopat; impf. pereweAdunv; Pass., 1 aor. perepe-
AjOnv; 1 fut. perapednOnoopar; (fr. weAowas, mid. of pero);
fr. Thuc. down; Sept. for 0M); a depon. pass.; prop. i
is a care to one afterwards [see perd, III. 2], i. e. tt repents
one; to repent one’s self [in R. V. uniformly with this
reflexive rendering (exc. 2 Co. vii. 8, where regret) ]:
Mt. xxi. 29, 32; xxvii. 3; 2 Co. vii. 8; Heb. vii. 21 fr.
Ps. cix. (cx.) 4.*
[Syn. werauéAromar, petavoéw: The distinctions so
often laid down between these words, to the effect that the
former expresses a merely emotional change the latter a
change of choice, the former has reference to particu-
lars the latter to the entire life, the former signifies
nothing but regret even though amounting to remorse,
the latter that reversal of moral purpose known as repent-
ance—seem hardly to be sustained by usage. But that
405
pETAVOLA
Meravoew is the fuller and nobler term, expressive of moral
action and issues, is indicated not only by its derivation, but
by the greater frequency of its use, by the fact that it is often
employed in the impy. (werauéAouar never), and by its con-
struction with dad, ék, (cf. 4 ets Gedy merdvowa, Acts xx. 21).
Cf. Trench, N.T. Syn. § lxix.; esp. Gataker, Adv. Post. 5505 ||
peta-pophde, -@: Pass., pres. perayoppoduar; 1 aor.
perepoppaOn 3 to change into another form [cf. perd, III.
2], to transfigure, transform: perepoppobn, of Christ, his
appearance was changed [A. V. he was transfigured], i. e.
was resplendent with a divine brightness, Mt. xvii. 2; Mk.
ix. 2 (for which Lk. ix. 29 gives éyévero rd efSos rod mpoo-
@mov avrod erepov); of Christians: ray airiy eikdva pera-
pophovpea, we are transformed into the same image (of
consummate excellence that shines in Christ), reproduce
the same image, 2 Co. iii. 18; on the simple acc. after
verbs of motion, change, division, cf. Bos, Ellips. (ed.
Schaefer), p. 679 sqq.; Matthiae § 409; [Jelf § 636 obs.
2; cf. B. 190 (164); 396 (339); W. § 82,5]; used of
the change of moral character for the better, Ro. xii. 2;
with which compare Sen. epp. 6 init., intellizo non emen-
dari me tantum, sed transfigurari. ({Diod.4, 81; Plut.
de adulat. et amic. 7; al.]; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 10 sub
fin. ; leg. ad Gaium § 13; Athen. 8 p. 334¢.; Ael. v. h.
1,1; Leian. as. 11.) [Syn. cf. peracynparigo. | *
peta-voew, -; fut. peravonow; 1 aor. petevdnoa; fr.
[Antipho], Xen. down; Sept. several times for ON}; to
change one’s mind, i. e. to repent (to feel sorry that one
has done this or that, Jon. iii. 9), of having offended
some one, Lk. xvii. 3 sq.; with éi tu added (dat. of
the wrong, Hebr. by, Am. vii. 3; Joel ii. 13; Jon. iii.
10; iv. 2), of (on account of ) something (so Lat. me
paenitet alicuius rei), 2 Co. xii. 21; used esp. of those
who, conscious of their sins and with manifest tokens
of sorrow, are intent on obtaining God’s pardon; to
repent (Lat. paenitentiam agere): petavo® év odxk@
kai o7ode, clothed in sackcloth and besprinkled with
ashes, Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 13. to change one’s mind for
the better, heartily to amend with abhorrence of one’s past
sins: Mt. iii. 2; iv. 17; Mk. i. 15, (cf. Mt. iii. 6 eEopo-
Noyovpevot Tas dwaprias airy; ib. 8 and Lk. ili. 8 kaprovs
aéious tas peravolas, i. e. conduct worthy of a heart
changed and abhorring sin); [Mt. xi. 20; Mk. vi. 12];
Lk. xiii. 8,5; xv. 7,10; xvi. 30; Acts ii. 38; iii. 19;
xvii. 80; Rev. ii. 5, 16; iii. 8, 19; on the phrase peravoeiy
els 7d khpuypd twos, Mt. xii. 41 and Lk. xi. 32, see eis, B.
Il. 2.d.; [W. 397 (871)]. Since 76 peravoeiy expresses
mental direction, the termini from which and to which
may be specified: d@md ris kaxias, to withdraw or turn
one’s soul from, ete. [ef. W. 622 (577); esp. B. 322
(277)], Acts viii. 22; & rwvos, Rev. ii. 21 sq.; ix. 20 sq.;
xvi. 11 (see ék, I. 6; [cf. B. 827 (281), and W. u. s.]);
peravoeiy x. emiatpepew eri tov Oedv, Acts xxvi. 20; foll.
by an inf, indicating purpose [W. 318 (298)], Rev. xvi.
9. [SyYN. see perapedopat. | * ; ;
perdvora, -olas, i, (ueravoéw), a change of mind: as it
appears in one who repents of a purpose he has formed
or of something he has done, Heb. xii. 17 on which see
etpicxe, 3 ([Thue. 3, 36, 3]; Polyb. 4, 66, 75 Plut. Peric.
petaty
c. 10; mor. p. 26a.3 ras ddeApoxrovias perivora, Joseph.
antt. 13, 11, 3); esp. the change of mind of those who
have begun to abhor their errors and misdeeds, and
have determined to enter upon a better course of life,
so that it embraces both a recognition of sin and sorrow
for it and hearty amendment, the tokens and effects of
which are good deeds (Lact. 6, 24, 6 would have it ren-
dered in Lat. by resipiscentia), [A. V. repentance]: Mt.
iii. 8, 11; Lk. iii. 8, [16 Lehm.]; xv. 7; xxiv. 47; Acts
xxvi. 20; Bunriopa peravolas, a baptism binding its sub-
jects to repentance [W. § 30, 28.], Mk.i.4; Lk. iii.
8; Acts xiii. 24; xix.4; [1% els (rov) Oedv per. Acts xx.
21, see peravoéw, fin.]; diddvar revi peravoray, to give one
the ability to repent, or to cause him to repent, Acts v.
31; xi. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 25; rua eis perdvovay xadeiv, Lk. v.
32, and Ree. in Mt. ix. 13; Mk. ii. 17; dyew, Ro. ii. 4
(Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 10 fin.); dvaxawifew, Heb. vi. 6; xo-
pioat eis perdv. to come to the point of repenting, or be
brought to repentance, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [but see xwpéw, 1 fin.];
per. awd vexpav épywv, that change of mind by which we
turn from, desist from, etc. Heb. vi. 1 [B. 322 (277) ];
used merely of the im proved spiritual state re-
sulting from deep sorrow for sin, 2 Co. vii. 9 sq. (Sir.
xliv. 16; Sap. xi. 24 (23); xii. 10,19; Or. Man. 7 sq. [(cf.
Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. p. Ixii. sq.)]; Philo, quod det. pot.
insid. § 26 init.; Antonin. 8, 10; [Cebes, tab. 10 fin. ].) *
petafd, (fr. wera and Evy, i. q. ov), adv. ; 1. be-
tween (in the midst, Hom. Il. 1,156; Sap. xviii. 23), a.
adverbially of time, év r@ pera&v, meanwhile, in the mean
time, cf. év r@ kabeEns (see xabeqs): Jn. iv. 31 (Xen.
symp. 1,14; with ypdv@m added, Plat. rep. 5 p. 450 c.;
Joseph. antt. 2, 7,1; 6 pera&d xpdvos, Hdian. 3, 8, 20
[10 ed. Bekk.; ef. W. 592 sq. (551) ]). b. like a prep.
w. a gen. [cf. W. 54, 6]: of place [fr. Hdt. 1, 6 down],
Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 51; xvi. 26; Acts xii. 63 of par-
ties, Mt. xviii. 15; Acts xv. 9; Ro. ii. 15. 2. acc.
to a somewhat rare usage of later Grk. (Joseph. e. Ap.
1, 21, 2 [(yet see Miiller ad loc.)]; b. j. 5, 4, 2; Plut.
inst. Lac. 42; de discr. amici et adul. c. 22; Theoph.
ad Autol. 1,8 and Otto in loc.; [Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2.
3; Barn. ep. 13, 5]), after, afterwards: 16 peraéd od BB.
the next (following) sabbath, Acts xiii. 42 [(where see
Meyer) ].*
peto-réwarw: 1 aor. pass. ptep. perameudbeis; Mid.,
pres. ptcp. werameprdpuevos; 1 aor. weterenrapny ; 1.
to send one after another [see pera, III.3; cf. Herm.
ad Vig. p. 639]. 2. like our to send after i. q. to
send for: petamenpbeis, sent for, Acts x. 29% Mid. to
send after for one’s self, cause to be sent for: Acts x. 5,
29°; xi. 13; [xx.1TTrWH]; xxiv. 24, 26; foll. by eds,
w. an ace. of place, Acts x. 22; xxv. 3. (Gen. xxvii. 45;
Num. xxiii. 7; 2 Mace. xv. 31; 4 Mace. xii. 3, 6; in prof.
auth. fr. Hdt. down.) *
peta-orpépw: 1 aor. inf. peracrpéyrar; Pass., 2 aor.
impv. 3 pers. sing. peraotpapyre; 2 fut. petactpadnoo-
pat; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for J27; to turn about, turn
around, (cf. werd, II. 2]: ri ets re [to turn one thing
into another], pass., Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31); Jas.
406
PETEXD
iv. 9 [ef. B. 52 (46); (WH txt. peratpéra, q. V-)] 5 i. qe
to pervert, corrupt, ri (Sir. xi. 31; Aristot. rhet. 1, 15,
24 [cf. 30 and 3, 11, 6]): Gal. i. 7.*
pera-oxnpartto: fut. peracynpaticw [cf. B. 37 (32)]};
1 aor. peresynuatica; Mid. pres. peraoynparifopat; to
change the figure of, to transform, [see pera, III. 2]: ri,
Phil. iii. 21 [see below]; mid. foll. by ets teva, to trans:
form one’s self into some one, to assume one’s appearance,
2 Co. xi. 13 sq.; foll. by és rus, so as to have the appear-
ance of some one, 2 Co. xi. 15; peracxynpari¢a ti eis Teva,
to shape one’s discourse so as to transfer to one’s self
what holds true of the whole class to which one belongs,
i. e. so as to illustrate by what one says of himself what
holds true of all: 1 Co. iv. 6, where the meaning is, ‘by
what I have said of myself and Apollos, I have shown
what holds true of all Christian teachers.’ (4 Mace.
ix. 22; Plat. lege. 10 p. 903 e.; [Aristot. de caelo 3, 1
p- 298°, 31, etc.]; Joseph. antt. 7, 10,5; 8,11,1; Plut.
Ages. 14; def. orac.c. 30; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 11];
Sext. Empir. 10, p. 688 ed. Fabric. [p. 542, 23 ed.
Bekk. ].)*
[Syn. petamophdo, petacxnpuarl(w: (cf. Phil. iii. 21)
“weracxnu. would here refer to the transient condition from
which, netanop¢d. to the permanent state to which, the change
takes place. Abp. Trench [N. T. Syn. § lxx.], however, sup-
poses that weracxnu. is here preferred to petapopd. as ex-
pressing ‘transition but no absolute solution of continuity’,
the spiritual body being developed from the natural, as the
butterfly from the caterpillar” (Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ‘ De-
tached Note’ p. 131). See uop¢%, fin.]
pera-riOypr; 1 aor. pereOnxa; pres. mid. peratidepat ; 1
aor. pass. peteréOny ; to transpose (two things, one of which
is put in place of the other, [see pera, II. 2]); i.e. Ls
to transfer: tua foll. by eis w. ace. of place, pass., Acts
vii. 16; without mention of the place, it being well
known to the readers, Heb. xi. 5 (Gen. v. 24; Sir.
xliv. 16, cf. Sap. iv. 10). 2. to change (Hat. 5, 68);
pass. of an office the mode of conferring which is
changed, Heb. vii. 12; ri ets ru, to turn one thing into
another (ria ets mrnvyv vow, Anth. 11, 367, 2); figura-
tively, rv... xdpuv eis doédyerav, to pervert the grace
of God to license, i. e. to seek from the grace of God
an argument in defence of licentiousness, Jude 4 [cf.
Huther in loc. ]. 3. pass. or [more commonly ] mid.,
to transfer one’s self or suffer one’s self to be transferred,
i. e. 10 go or puss over: amd twos eis tt, to fall away or
desert from one person or thing to another, Gal. i. 6 (cf.
2 Mace. vii. 24; Polyb. 5, 111, 8; 26, 2,6; Diod. 11,
4; [6 perabéuevos, turncoat, Diog. Laért. 7, 166 cf. 373
Athen. 7, 281 d.]).*
[wera-rpémw: 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. perarpa-
myte@; to turn about, fig. to transmute: Jas. iv. 9 WH txt.
From Hom. down; but “seems not to have been used
in Attic” (L. and S.).*]
pet-ereara, adv., fr. Hom. down, afterwards, after thats
Heb. xii. 17. (Judith ix. 5; 3 Mace. iii. 24.) *
pet-€xw; 2 aor. perécyov; pf. peréoynxa; to be or
become partaker; to partake: ris édidos adrod, of the
thing hoped for, 1 Co. ix. 10 Ree., but GL.T Tr WH
weTewpila
have rightly restored én’ éAmid. rod peréxew, in hope of
partaking (of the harvest); with a gen. of the thing
added, 1 Co. ix. 12; x. 21; Heb. ii. 14; vans érépas, to
belong to another tribe, be of another tribe, Heb. vii.
13; sc. ris tpopjs, to partake of, eat, 1 Co. x. 30; yd-
Aaxros, to partake of, feed on, milk, Heb. v. 13; ék rod
évds Gprov se. ré or tuvds (see éx, I. 2b.), 1 Co. x. 173 cf.
B. § 132, 8; [W. §§ 28, 1; 30, 8 a.].*
pet-ewpitw: [pres. impv. pass. 2 pers. plur. perewpl-
(ecbe; (see below)]; (fr. peréwpos in mid-air, high;
raised on high; metaph. a. elated with hope, Diod. 13,
46; lofty, proud, Polyb. 3, 82, 2; 16, 21, 2; Sept. Is. v.
15. b. wavering in mind, unsteady, doubtful, in sus-
pense: Polyb. 24, 10, 11; Joseph. antt. 8, 8,2; b. j. 4, 2,
5; Cie. ad Att. 5,11, 5; 15, 14; hence perewpitw) ; a
prop. to raise on high (as vaiv eis rd réAayos, to put a
ship [out to sea] up upon the deep, Lat. propellere in
altum, Philostr. v. Ap. 6, 12, 3 (cf. Thue. 8, 16, 2]; 76
épupa, to raise fortifications, Thue. 4, 90): éaurdv, of
birds, Ael. h. a. 11, 33; pass. pereapiCecOar 4) Kamvov }
kovoptov, Xen. Cyr. 6, 3,5; of the wind, dvenos Enpds
_ perewpioGeis, Arstph. nub. 404; and many other exx.
also in prof. auth.; in Sept. ef. Mic. iv. 1; Ezek. x. 16;
Obad. 4. 2. metaph. a. to lift up one’s soul,
raise his spirits; to buoy up with hope; to inflate with
pride: Polyb. 26, 5,4; 24, 3,6 etc.; joined with ducay,
Dem. p. 169, 23; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 35; [quis rer. div.
her. §§ 14,54; cong. erud. grat. § 23]; pass. to be elated;
to take on airs, be puffed up with pride: Arstph. av. 1447;
often in Polyb.; Diod. 11, 32,41; 16, 18 etc.; Ps. exxx.
(cxxxi.) 1; 2 Mace. vii. 34; with the addition of ryp
dudvorav, v.17. Hence ju) perewpiCecOe, Lk. xii. 29, some
(following the Vulg. nolite in sublime tolli) think should
be interpreted, do not exalt yourselves, do not seek great
things, (Luth. fahret nicht hoch her) ; but this explanation
does not suit the preceding context. b. by a meta-
phor taken from ships that are tossed about on the deep
by winds and waves, to cause one to waver or fluctuate
in mind, Polyb. 5, 70,10; to agitate or harass with cares;
to render anxious: Philo de monarch. § 6; Schol. ad
Soph. Oed. Tyr. 914; ad Eur. Or. 1537; hence Lk. xii.
29 agreeably to its connection is best explained, neither
be ye anxious, or and waver not between hope and fear
[A. V. neither be ye of doubtful mind (with mrg. Or, live
not in careful suspense) ]. Kuinoel on Lk. |. c. discusses
the word at length; and numerous exx. from Philo are
given in Loesner, Observv. p. 115 sqq.*
peroukeria, -as, 7, (for the better form peroixnars, fr.
perouéw [cf. W. 24 (23)]), a removal from one abode to
another, esp. a forced removal: with the addition Ba-
Buddvos (on this gen. cf. W. § 30, 2 a.) said of the Baby-
lonian exile, Mt. i. 11 sq. 17. (Sept. for ma i. e. mi-
gration, esp. into captivity; of the Babylonian exile, 2
K. xxiv. 16; 1 Chr. v. 22; Ezek. xii.11; for naa, Obad.
20; Nah. iii. 10. Elsewh. only in Anthol. 7, 731, 6.) *
per-orxito: fut. (Attic) perouea [ef. B. 37 (32); W.
§ 13,1¢.]; 1 aor. per@xica ; to transfer settlers; to cause
to remove into another land [see perd, ILI. 2]: tua foll. by
°
407
ETpios
eis w. ace. of place, Acts vii. 4; éréxewa w. gen. of place
(Amos v. 27), Acts vii.43. (Thuc. 1,12; Arstph., Aris
tot., Philo, [Joseph. ec. Ap. 1, 19, 3], Plut., Ael.; Sept.
several times for 7737.) *
HETOX, -Hs, 7, (ueréx@), (Vulg. participatio) ; a sharing,
communion, fellowship: 2Co. vi. 14. (Ps. exxi. (cxxii.)
3; Hdt., Anthol., Plut., al.) *
pEéTOXOS, -ov, (weTEyw) 5 1. sharing in, partaking
of, w. gen. of the thing [W. § 30, 8 a.]: Heb. iii. 1; vi. 4;
xil. 85 rod Xpuorod, of his mind, and of the salvation pro-
cured by him, Heb. iii. 14; cf. Bleek ad loc. 24 ©
pariner (in a work, office, dignity): Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps.
xliv. (xlv.) 8); Lk.v. 7. (Hadt., Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) *
peTpéw, -@; 1 aor.éuerpnoa; 1 fut. pass. werpnOnoopar;
(uérpov) ; fr. Hom. Od. 3,179 down; Sept. several times
for 1119; to measure; i. e. 1. to measure out or
off, a. prop. any space or distance with a measurer’s
reed orrule: roy vady, tv adAny, etc., Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 15,
17; with r@ caddum added, Rev. xxi. 16; év air, i. e.
T@ kaddpo, Rev. xi. 1. b. metaph. to judge according
io any rule or standard, to estimate: év @ pétp@ petpeire,
by what standard ye measure (others) [but the instru-
mental év seems to point to a measure of capacity; cf.
W. 388 (363) ; B. § 133, 19. On the proverb see fur-
ther below], Mt. vii. 2; Mk. iv. 24; pass. to be judged,
estimated, ibid.; perpety éavrov ev éauT@, to measure one’s
self by one’s self, to derive from one’s self the standard
by which one estimates one’s self, 2 Co. x. 12 [cf. W. § 31,
8 fin. ]. 2. to measure to, mete out to, i. e. to give
by measure: in the proverb 7@ ait@ péetp@ @ perTpeite
for (so LT Tr WH) 6 pérpo perp.], i. e., dropping the
fig., ‘in proportion to your own beneficence,’ Lk. vi. 38.
[Compe. : dvti-peT pea. | =
petpytys [on the accent see Chandler § 51 sq.], -od, 6,
(wetpéw), prop. a measurer, the name of a utensil known
as an amphora, which is a species of measure used for
liquids and containing 72 sextarii or ێorou [i. e. some-
what less than nine Eng. gallons; see B. D.s. v. Weights
and Measures, sub fin. (p. 3507 Am. ed.)] (Hebr. n3, 2
Chr. iv. 5): Jn. ii. 6. (Polyb. 2, 15,1; Dem. p. 1045,
7; Aristot. h. a. 8, 9.) *
perpromrabéw, -@; ([cf. W. 101 (95)]; fr. werpromaéns,
adhering to the true measure in one’s passions or emo-
tions; épn (viz. Aristotle) rév cody pi eivat fev amaby,
perpioraby S€, Diog. Laért. 5, 31; petpromaGeca, modera-
tion in passions or emotions, esp. anger and grief, is opp.
to the dmdéera of the Stoics; fr. pérpos and maGos) ; i. q.
perplos Or Kata TO péTpov Taxa, to be affected moderately
or in due measure ; to preserve moderation in the passions,
esp. in anger or grief, (Philo de Abrah. § 44; de Josepho
§ 5; [Joseph. antt. 12, 3, 2; al.]); hence of one who is
not unduly disturbed by the errors, faults, sins, of others,
but bears with them gently; like other verbs of emotion
(cf. Kriiger § 48, 8), with a dat. of the pers. toward whom
the feeling is exercised: Heb. v. 2; cf. the full discus-
sion by Bleek ad loc.*
perplos, (uérpios), adv., [fr. Hdt. down]; a. in
due measure. b. moderately: od perpias, [A. V-
peer pov
not « little], exceedingly, (Plut. Flam. 9, et al.), Acts
Bor 5
pérpov, -ov, +6, Sept. chiefly for 7719, [ef. parnp], meas-
ure; 1. an instrument for measuring; a. a vessel for
receiving and determining the quantity of things, whether
dry or liquid: in proverb. disc., perpeiv pérpo, of the
measure of the benefits which one confers on others, Lk. vi.
38; pérpov memtecpévoy kat cecahevpevor, fig. equiv. to most
abundant requital, ibid. ; mnpody 76 pérpov rev marépor,
to add what is wanting in order to fill up their ancestors’
prescribed number of crimes, Mt. xxiii. 32 [see mAnpdo,
2a.]; ék pérpov [A. V. by measure; see éx, V. 3) i.e.
sparingly, Jn. iii. 34 (also év pérpw, Ezek. iv.11). _ b.
a graduated staff for measuring, measuring-rod: Rev. xxi.
15; with dvOpdmov added [man’s measure], such as men
use, Rev. xxi. 17; hence in proverb. disc. the rule or stand-
ard of judgment: Mt. vii. 2; Mk. iv. 24. 2. deter-
mined extent, portion measured off, measure or limit: with
a gen. of the thing received, Ro. xii. 3; 2 Co. x. 13;
[Eph. iv. 7]; é» pérpe, in proportion to the measure [cf.
W. § 48, a. 3 b. and see évépyera; al. in due measure],
Eph. iv. 16; the required measure, the due, fit, measure :
tis #Aukias, the proper i. e. ripe, full age [see 7AcKia, 1 c.]
(of a man), Eph. iv. 13 (78ns, Hom. Il. 11, 225; Od. 11,
817; Solon 5,52 [Poet. Min. Gr. (ed. Gaisford) iii. 135]).*
pétwtov, -ov, 76, (uerd, ap eye’), fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for nxn, [lit. the space between the eyes] the fore-
head: Rey. vii. 35 1x.4 5 xili- 163 xiv. 1) 93Sxvil- 5; xx.
Ae As
péexpr and péxpes (the latter never stands in the N. T.
before a consonant, but péype stands also before a vowel
in Lk. xvi. 16 T Tr WH; see dypu, init.; and on the dis-
tinction betw. dyps and péxps see dypr, fin.), a particle
indicating the terminus ad quem: as far as, unto,
until ; 1. it has the force of a preposition with
the gen. [(soeven in Hom.) W.§ 54,6],andis used _a.
of time: Mt. xiii. 30 RG TWH mrg.; Lk. xvi. 16 T Tr
WH; Acts xx. 7; 1 Tim. vi. 14; Heb. ix. 10; p. Oavd-
tov, Phil. ii. 30; péxpe tis onpepov sc. Nuepas, Mt. xi. 23;
XXvill. 155 péype réAous, Heb. iii. 6 [here WH Trmrg.
br. the clause], 143 dé... wéypr, Acts x. 30; Ro.v.14;
péxpts ov (see dypt, 1 d.; [B. 230 (198) sq.3 W. 296
(278 sq.)]) foll. by an aor. subjunc. having the force of a
fut. pf. in Lat.; Mk. xiii. 30; Gal.iv.19TTrWH. b.
of place: dd... péypt, Ro. xv. 19. c. of measure
and degree: péxpt @avdrov, so that he did not shrink even
from death, Phil. ii. 8 (2 Mace. xiii. 14; Plat. de rep. p.
361 ¢. fin.; p. pdvov, Clem. hom. 1, 11); kaxomabeiv pe
deoparv, 2 Tim. ii. 9; péxpis atwaros avrixaréotnre, Heb.
xii. 4. 2. with the force of aconjunction: till,
foll. by the subj., Eph. iv. 13.*
ph, Sept. for ON, P8, PS, a particle of negation, which
differs from od (which is always an adverb) in that od
denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies
simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively),
but pi denies the thought of the thing, or the thing
according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, pref-
erence, of some one (hence, as we say technically, in-
408
Bn
directly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction
holds also of the compounds oddeis, pndeis, odkert, pnKért,
etc. But pais either an adverb of negation, not (Lat.
non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat.
ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e.
(generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether
not (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267
p- 802 sqq.; Matthiae § 608; Bttm. Gram. § 148 (cf.
Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii.
§§ 512 sq. p. 739 sqq.; [Jelf §§ 738 sqq.]; Rost § 135;
Win. §§ 55,56; F. Franke, De particulis negantibus.
(two Comm.) Rintel. 1832 sq.; G. I. Gayler, Particu-
larum Graeci sermonis negativarum accurata disputatio,
etc. Tub. 1836; E. Priifer, De py et ov particulis epi-
tome. Vratisl. 1836; [Gildersleeve in Am. Jour. of Philol.
vol. i. no. i. p. 45 sqq.; Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s
Hdbk. to Mod. Grk. ed. 2, App. §§ 82 sqq.].
I. As a negative ADVERB; 1. univ.: 6 pa wa-
peore tavra, where py is used because reference is made
merely to the thought that there are those who lack these
things, 2 Pet. i. 9; & yy éopaxey, which (in my opinion)
he hath not seen (because they are not visible), Col. ii.18 -
[but here GT Tr WH om. Lbr. yy; ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc.; W.480sq. (448) ]; 789 Kexperat, Ore pr) memiorevker, be-
cause he hath not believed, represented by the writer as the
thought rod xpivartos, Jn. iii. 18 (differently in 1 Jn. v. 10,
where the faith denied is considered as something positive
and actual); 4 yz det, in the judgment of the writer, Tit.
va es 2. in deliberative questions with the
subjunctive: dépev 7} py Sdpev, MK. xii. 14 (wérepov
Biav popev h py Popev eivaz, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 45); pH
Tomnowpev Ta kaxd (for so it would have run had there
been no anacoluthon; but Paul by the statement which
he interposes is drawn away from the construction with
which he began, and proceeds 6rt rouno@per xrA., so that
these words depend on Aéyecv in the intervening statement
[ W. 628 (583); B.§141,3]), Ro. iii. 8. 3. in con-
ditional and final sentences (ef. W. § 55, 2; [B. 344
(296) sqq.]): éay wn, unless, if not, see exx. in éay, I. 3 c.
éay etc. kat pn, Mk. xii. 19; edy ete. d€ yn, Jas. ii. 14; dy
tes tn. «+ wy mpos Oavarov, 1 Jn. v. 163 ef pn, ei S€ un,
ei b€ pnye, etc., see ef, III. p. 171 sq. To this head be-
long the formulae that have dy or éav as a modifier (W.
§ 55, 3 e.; [B. § 148, 4]), ds, darts, dco. dy or éay py: Mt.
x.145 xi.6; Mk. vi.11; x.15; Lk. vii. 233 ix. 5; xviii.
17; Rev. xiii. 15; ds dy ete. cat py, Mk. xi. 23 ; Lk. x. 10;
bs dv... put) emt wopveia, Mt. xix. 9 GT Tr WH txt.; of
the same sort is wav rvedpua, 6 py Sporoyei, 1 Jn. iv. 3. ta
pn, Mt. vii.15 xvii. 27; Mk. iii. 9; Ro. xi. 25; Gal. v.17;
vi. 12, etc.; ya... kal pn, Mt. v. 29 sq.; Mk. iv.12; Jn.
vi. 50; xi. 50; 2Co. iv. 7, etc.; Wa... wy, 2 Co. xiii. 10;
tva 6... pun, In. xii. 46; va (weakened ; see fa, IT. 2)
py: after d:acré\Nopat [here L WH txt. émitipdo], Mt
xvi. 20; 1d OAnua €or, iva ph, In. vi. 39; ovras etc. tva
6+. un, In. iii. 16; mapaxadé, iva... Kab pq, 1 Co. i. 103
dros wy, Mt. vi. 18; Actsxx.16; 1Co.i.29; Srasol...
pn, Lk. xvi. 26. 4. joined with the Infinitive (W.
§55,4f.; [B.§§ 140,16; 148,63; cf. Prof. Gildersleeve
)
u.8.p.48sq.]); a. after verbsof saying, d eclaring,
denying, commanding, etc.: dmoxpiOjvat, Lk. xx. 7;
iy ait Kexpnuaticpévor pn iSeiv, that he should not see, Lk.
li. 26; xpnuatiodertes pn dvaxdpryar, Mt. ii. 12; @poce (av-
Tois) pn eioedevoecOa, Heb. iii. 18; after héyo, Mt. v. 34,
39; xxii. 23; Mk xii.18; Actsxxi.4; xxiii. 8; Ro. ii. 22;
Xl. 3; knptooe, Ro. ii. 21; ypddpa, 1 Co. v. 9, 11; Tapay-
yédro, Actsi.4; iv.18; v. 28,40; 1 Co. vii. 10 sq.; 1 Tim.
1.3; vi. 17; mapakada, Actsix.38 RG; xix. 31; 2Co.vi.
1; airotpa, Eph. iii. 13; Suawapripopa, 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; exo-
pat, 2 Co. xiii. 7; maparrodpat, Heb. xii. 19fhere WH txt.
om. yy; cf. W.and B.as below]; aéa, Acts xv. 38; ém-
Boa(L.T Tr WH Boa], Acts xxv. 24; avribéya (cf. W.§65,
26.; [B. § 148, 13]), Lk. xx. 27 [Tr WH Lrg. déyo];
arrapvodpa (q. v-), Lk. xxii. 34; also after verbs of decid-
ing: Lk. xxi. 14; xpivw, Acts xv. 19; xpive todro, rd pn,
Ro. xiv. 13; 2 Co. ii. 1; 6€\o, Ro. xiii. 3; after verbs of
hindering, avoiding, etc.: éyxémrw (Rec. avaxérrw)
riva pn, Gal. v. 7 (cf. W. [and B. u.s.; also § 140, 16]);
tov pn, that... not, (Lat. ne), after caréyo, Lk. iv. 42;
kpatovpat, Lk. xxiv. 16; kwAvw, Acts x. 47; xararave,
Acts xiv. 18; avo, 1 Pet. iii.10; droareAXopar, Acts xx.
20, 27; mpocéxo pn, Mt. vi. 1; but rod py is added also
to other expressions in the sense of Lat. ut ne, that... not:
Ro. vii. 3; dPOadpol rod py Bree, Sra Tov pi) axovew,
Ro. xi. 8,10. After clauses denoting necessity, ad-
vantage, power, fitness, py is used with an inf.
specifying the thing [B. § 148, 6], caddy éore py, 1 Co. vii.
1; Gal.iv. 18; foll. by 7d py, Ro. xiv. 21; ddoyov pn, Acts
XXxv. 27; kpeirrov jv, 2 Pet. ii. 21; e€ovoia rob [LT Tr
WH om. 100] py epyaterOau, a right to forbear working,
1 Co. ix. 6; det, Acts xxvii. 21; od dtvauar pn, I cannot
but, Acts iv. 20; dvévdexrév éote rod py, Lk. xvii. 1 [ef.
davévdexros |. b. yy with an inf. which has the article
follows a preposition, to indicate the purpose or end : as,
mpos 76 pn, that... not, 2 Co. iii. 13; 1 Th.ii.9; 2 Th. iii.
8; eis rd pn (Lat. in id .. ne), to the end (or intent) that
... not, Acts vii.19; 1 Co. x.6; 2 Co.iv. 4; foll. by an
ace. and inf., 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 7; dca rd py, because
... not, Mt. xiii. 5 sq.; Mk. iv. 5 sq.; Lk. viii. 6; Jas.
iv. 2[cf. W. 482 (449) ], (2 Mace. iv. 19). c. in other
expressions where an infin. with the art. is used substan-
tively: 7 pn (dat. of the cause or reason [cf. W. § 44,
5; B. 264 (227)]), 2 Co. ii. 13 (12); in the accus., 7d yn:
Ro. xiv. 13; 1 Co.iv.6[RG]; 2Co.ii.1; x.2; 1 Th. iv.
Gch. oe d. in sentences expressing consequence
or result: dare pn, so that... not, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. iii.
DOen Con wit ue 2) Conn 7 3701) Dhs 1-78. 5. py is
joined with a Participle (W. § 55, 5g.; [B. § 148, 7;
see C. J. Vauchan’s Com. on Ro. ii. 14]), a. in sen-
tences expressing a command, exhortation, purpose, ete. :
Lk. iii. 11; Jn. ix. 39; Acts xv. 38; xx. 29; Ro. viii. 4 ; xiv.
3; 2Co. xii. 21; Eph. v.27; Phil. i. 28; ii. 4 [here Rec.
impv.]; 1 Th.iv.5; 2 Th.i. 8; 1 Pet. ii.16; Heb. vi. 1;
xiii. 17, ete. b. in general sentences, in which no defi-
nite person is meant but it is merely assumed that there
is some one of the character denoted by the participle: as
6 ph dv per’ eyor, he that is not on my side, whoever he is,
409
HN
or if there is any such person, Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23;
6 8€ i murrevov, whoever believeth not, Jn. iii. 18; of [)
opohoyodvres Ingody Xp. if any do not confess, or belong
to the class that do not confess, 2 Jn.7; add, Mt. x. 28;
Lk. vi.49; xii. 21, 47sq.; xxii. 36; Jn. v. 23 Rood (a -a
48; xiv.24; Ro.iv.5; v.14; x.20; 1Co. vii. 38; xi. 22;
2 Th. i. 8; Jas. ii.13; 1 Jn. ii. 4, ete.; mas 6 pn, Mt. vii.
26; (may dévdpov py, Mt. iii. 10; vii.19); 1 Jn. iii. 10; 2
Jn. 9; 2 Th. ii. 12 [here Lmrg. T Tr WH mrg. dravres
of yn etc.]; paxdpios 6 pn, Jn. xx. 29; Ro. xiv. 22. C:
where, indeed, a definite person or thing is referred to, but
in such a way that his (its) quality or action (indicated by
the participle) is denied in the thought or judgment either
of the writer or of some other person [ef. esp. W. 484
(451) ]: ra pi dvra, that are deemed as nothing, 1 Co. i. 28;
as pn A\aBov, as if thou hadst not received, 1 Co. iv.7; &s
#7) €pxouevou pov, as though I were not coming, 1 Co. iv.
18; as py epixvovpevor eis buds, 2 Co. x. 14; add, 1 Co.
vil. 29. der... Tives eiotv of pw meoredvovres (acc. to the
opinion of 6 eidas), Jn. vi. 64; the same holds true of
Acts xx. 29; rd pi Bdemdpueva (in the opinion of of uh
oxorrovvres), 2 Co. iv. 18 (on the other hand, in Heb. xi.
1, od Brerdp. actually invisible) ; rév pn yvdvra dpapriay
bmep nav duaptiay eroincey (un yvovra is said agreeably
to the judgment of 6 romoas), 2 Co. v. 21 (rdv ov yrdvra
would be equiv. to dyvoodyra). in predictions, where it
expresses the opinion of those who predict: éon ctwmav
kal py Suvdpevos Aadjoa, Lk. i. 20; gon ruprAds py BArErrav,
Acts xiii.11. where the writer or speaker does not re-
gard the thing itself so much as the thought of the thing,
which he wishes to remove from the mind of the reader
or hearer (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 666), — to be rendered
without ete. (Germ. ohne zu with inf.) [cf. B. § 148, 7 b.]:
e&ndOe put emiorapevos, mod epxerat, Heb. xi. 8; add, Mt.
xxii. 12; Lk. xiii. 11 [(but cf. B. § 148, 7¢.)]; Acts v.
7; xx.22; Heb.ix.9. where the participles have a con-
ditional, causal, or concessive force, and may be
resolved into clauses introduced by if, on condition that,
etc. : Oepicoper py exrvopevor, Gal. vi. 9; pn dvros vdpov,
Ro. v. 13; although: vopov pn exovtes, Ro. ii. 14; py dv
adros ind vopov, 1 Co. ix. 20 [Rec. om.]; we have both
the negative particles in dv ovk eiddres [or (with LT Tr
WH) iddvres]. . . py dp@vres, whom being ignorant of
(in person) [or (ace. to crit. txt.) not having seen]...
although now not seeing, 1 Pet. i. 8; also with the article:
ra pay vépov exovra (Germ. die doch nicht haben, they that
have not, etc.), Ro. ii. 14; 6 Sé pi) yeveadoyovpevos, but he,
although not etc. Heb. vii. 6 ;—or since, because, inasmuch
as: ph acbevnoas TH Tioter ov [but GLTTrWH om. ov;
cf. B. § 148, 14] karevdnoe 76 EavTod Gapa vevexpwp. (ovK
dabernoas would be equiv. to duvards, strong), Ro. iv. 19;
mas obros ypdupata olde pr pepabyKas ; since he has not
learned (W. 483 (450)], Jn. vii. 15; add, Mt. xviii. 25;
xxii. 25, 29; Lk. ii. 45; vil. 30; xi. 24; xii. 47; Xxiv.
23; Actsix.26; xvil.6; xxi. 34; xxvii. 7; 2 Co. iii. 14;
v.19; also with the article: 6 pp ywdoker Tov vdpor, since
it knoweth not the law, Jn. vii. 49; add, Jude 5. d.
where (with the ptep.) it can be resolved by (being) such
pn
(a person) as not, of sucha sort as not: pn (nrdv 76 euavTod
avppopor, 1 Co. x. 33; add, Acts ix. 9; Gal. iv.8. neut.
plur. as subst.: ra py dvra, Ro. iv. 17; ra py oadevdpeva,
Heb. xii. 27; 7a py S€ovra, 1 Tim. v. 13; 7a yor) ka@jKovta,
Ro. i. 28; 2 Mace. vi. 4, (on the other hand, in ra ovk
dynxovra, Eph. v. 4 [where LT Tr WH 4 ovk dvjjxev], the
ov« coalesces with ayjxovra and forms a single idea, un-
seemly, unlawful). 6. in independent sentences of
forbidding, dehorting, admonishing, desiring, etc., pn is
Prohibitive (cf. W. § 56,1), Lat. ne, not ; a. with
the 1 pers. plur. of the subjune. present: py ywopeba
cevddoéou, Gal. v. 26; add, Gal. vi. 9; 1 Th. v.6; 1 Jn.
iii. 18; aorist: Jn. xix. 24; before the word depending
on the exhortation, 1 Co. v. 8. b. with a present im-
perative, generally where one is bidden to cease from
something already begun, or repeated, or continued: Mt.
Vi. 16) TORMVAe ds xix 6s Miky ix. 39) xii Temkin 30%
VilN Oploee vill. 49s 2h Ket O Pee dled Overton don
Vie4Ss evils CA exivel 2 to XIXxe: QIe mA Cts x. 1 5isex1a9is xox.
1O}"Ros viel 2 sexi 18; 20); xii. 2 [here ly Trimres WH
mrg. give the inf.],14; 1 Co. vi.9; vii. 5; 2Co. vi.14,17;
Gal. v.1; vi. 7; Eph. iv. 30; Col. iii. 9,19, 21; 1 Th. v.
LO GSO ie See eave 4s vetiGw tO eEbeb.extit ot
Kil. 25 Jas.i. 7,16; 1 Pet. iv. 12,15 sq:3;-1Jn. 1.155 iil.
13; Rey. v. 5, and very often. c. with the third per-
son (nowhere in the N. T. with the second) of the aorist
impv. where the prohibition relates to something not to
be begun, and where things about to be done are forbid-
den: pi) emiorpevare, Mt. xxiv. 18; Lk. xvii. 315 py Ka-
taBaro, Mk. xiii. 15, and LT Tr WH in Mt. xxiv. 17
(where RG badly xaraBawér@); py yroro, Mt. vi. 3;
yevérOo [but T Tr WH ywwéoOo)}, Lk. xxii. 42; cf. Xen.
Cyr. 7, 5, 73; Aeschyl. Sept. c. Theb. 1036. d. as in
the more elegant Grk. writ. where future things are for-
bidden (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 807), with the 2 pers. of the
aorist subjunctive: px dd&nre, Mt. iii. 9; v.17; py do-
BnOqjs, Mt.i. 20; x. 26, 31 [here L T Tr WH pres. impv.
poBeiobe}, (alternating with the impv. pres. PoBeicbe in
Mt. x. 28(GLTTr]); pi awn, Col. ii. 21 ; p41) arroaTpa-
gis, Mt. v. 42; pr xrijonode, Mt. x. 9; add, Mt. vi. 2, 7,
PSO TemMiksey 7 sex); Li kenvie2 9G Vill 2OeMexdveS seein:
ili. 7; Acts vii.60; Ro. x.6; 1Co.xvi.11; 2 Co. xi. 16;
2 Th. ii. 3, —[in the last three exx. with the third pers.,
contrary to W. 502 (467)]; 1 Tim. v.1; 2 Tim.i.8; Rev.
vi. 6; x. 4(un ypawys, for guehov ypadew precedes ; but
in Jn. xix. 21 pr ypdde is used, because Pilate had already
written); Rev. xi. 2; xxii. 10,and very often. We have
the impv. pres. and the aor. subj. together in Lk.x.4; Acts
xviii. 9. e. with the 2 pers. of the present subjunc. :
Bn okAnpvynte, Heb. iii. 8, 15, (a rare constr. though not
wholly unknown to Grk. writ. [“ more than doubtful” (L.
and S. s. v. A. 1.2)]; see Delitzsch on the latter passage,
and Schaefer ad Greg. Corinth. p. 1005 sq.; [\Soph. Lex.
s.v.pq. Others regard the above exx. as subjunc. aorist;
ef. 2 K. ii. 10; Is. lxiii.17; Jer. xvii. 23; xix. 15,ete.]). f.
with the optative, in wishes: in that freq. formula pi}
yévouro, far be it! see yivopat, 2 a.; ui) adbrois AcywrOein, 2
Tim. iv. 16 (Job xxvii. 5).
410 #
tr. As a ConsuncTion, Lat. ne with the subjunc-
tive ; 1. our that, that not or lest, (cf. W. § 56, 2;
[B. § 189, 48 sq.; Goodwin § 46]); after verbs of fear-
ing, caution, ete. a. with the subjunc. present,
where one fears lest something now exists and at the
same time indicates that he is ignorant whether it is so
or not (Hermann on Soph. Aj. 272): énckorodvres, wy
... evoyAn, Heb. xii. 15. b. with the subjune. aorist,
of things which may occur immediately or very soon: pre-
ceded by an aor., evAaByGeis (LT Tr WH doBnéeis) py dva-
orac6y, Acts xxiii. 10; by a pres.: poBovpar, Acts xxvii.
17; Brew, Mt. xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii.5; Lk. xxi. 8; Acts
xiii. 40; 1 Co. x. 12; Gal. v.15; Heb. xii. 25; oxoréw
éuaurév, Gal. vi. 1 [B. 243 (209) would refer this to 2 b.
below; cf. Goodwin p. 66]; dpa, Mt. xviii. 10; 1 Th. v.
15; elliptically, dpa pn (se. rovro mounons [cf. W. § 64, 7 a.;
B. 395 (838)]): Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. c. with the
indicative fut. (as being akin to the subjune. (cf. gram.
reff. at the beginning }): @oBovpat, py tarewacer pe 6 Oeds
pov, 2 Co. xii. 20 sq. [L txt. T Tr]; add, Col. ii. 8. 2s
in order that not (Lat. eo consilio ne) ; a. with the op-
tative: trav orpatiwrav BovAr éyévero, va trols Secporas
drokteivwot, pn tis. . - Suapvyor, Acts xxvii. 42 Rec. (the
more elegant Greek to express the thought and purpose
of the soldiers; but the best codd. read dtapvyyn, which
GLT Tr WH have adopted). b. with the subjunc-
tive aor.: preceded by the pres., Mk. xiii. 36; 2 Co. viii.
20 [cf. Goodwin § 43 Rem.]; xii. 6; Col. ii. 4 (where
LT Tr WH iva pydeis for R G ph tes [—an oversight ;
in R Gas well as in the recent crit. edd. the purpose is
expressed by an inserted iva]).
III. As an INTERROGATIVE particle it is used when
a negative answer is expected, Lat. num; (W. § 57, 3b.;
[B. 248 (213) ]); 1. ina direct question: Mt. vii.
Osqej mixed Seika Ore krexcvit. 9c meinen iia 4s; ehvonll2,
33; vi. 67; vil. 35, 51 sq.; Acts vii. 28; Ro. iii. 3; ix.
20; 1Co.i.18;5 ix. 8 sq.; x. 22; Jas. ii.[1 WH], 14; iii. 12,
ete. ; pa yap (see ydp, I.), Jn. vii. 41; py od« (where ovk be-
longs to the verb, and py is interrogative), Ro. x. 18sq.3
1 Co. ix. 4 sq.3 py yap . . . ov, 1 Co. xi. 22. 2. inan
indirect question with the indicative (Germ. ob etwa,
ob wohl, whether possibly, whether perchance), where in ad-
monishing another we intimate that possibly the case is
as we fear (cf. B. § 139,57; W.§ 41 b.4a.]: Lk. xi,
35, ef. B. 243 (209); Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 334.sq.; [Rid-
dell, Plato’s Apol. Digest of Idioms §§ 137, 138].
IV. The particles 0d »7 in combination augment the
force of the negation, and signify not at all, in no wise,
by no means; (this formula arose from the fuller ex-
pressions od Seuwdv or d€os or PdBos, wn, which are still
found sometimes in Grk. auth., cf. Kihner ii. § 516, 9
p- 773 sq.; but so far was this origin of the phrase lost
sight of that od un is used even of things not at all to be
feared, but rather to be desired; so in the N. T. in Mt.
v. 18, 26; xviii. 3; Lk. xviii. 17; xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 48; xx.
25; 1 Th.v.3); cf. Matthiae § 517; Kiihner ii. p. 775;
Bnhdy. p. 402 sqq.; [Gildersleeve in the Amer. Jour. of
Philol. for 1882, p. 202 sq.; Goodwin § 89]; W. § 56, 3;
wrye
{B. 211 (183) sq.]. 1. with the fut. indicative: od
(47) €orat got TovTO, this shall never be unto thee, Mt. xvi.
22; add, Mt. xxvi.35; Lk. xxii. 34 RG@L; x. 19 (where
R*G WH arg. a8icjon) ; In. vi. 35 [here L Tr mrg. ree
vacer, and LT Tr WH dupnoer]; xiii. 38 RG; Mk. xiii.
31 T Tr WH; Heb. x.17 LT Tr WH; in many pas-
sages enumerated by W. 506 (472); [cef. B. 212 (183)],
the manuscripts vary between the indic. fut. and the
subjunc. aor. Ina question, od yi moujoer thy exdixnow ;
Lk. xviii. 7 RG. 2. with the aor. subjunctive (the
use of which in the N. T. scarcely differs from that of
the fut.; cf. W. § 56, 3; [B. § 139, 7]), in confident as-
sertions : — subjunc. of the 1 aor., Mt. xxiv. 2; Mk.
xii. 2; Lk. vi. 37; Jn. xiii. 8; Heb. viii. 12; 1 Pet. ii. 6;
Rev. ii. 11; vii. 16; xviii. 21, 22, 23; xxi. 27,ete.; 1 aor.
mid. subj., Jn. viii. 52 (where Rec. yesoerar); thus these
N. T. exx. prove that Dawes made a great mistake in
denying (in his Miscellanea Critica, p. 221 sqq. [ed. (Th.
Kidd) 2, p. 408 sq.]) that the first aor. subjunc. is used
after ob un; [ef. Goodwin in Transactions of Am. Philol.
Assoc. for 1869-70, pp. 46-55; L. and S. s. v. od pn, I.
1b.; B. § 139, 8]; —subjune. of 2 aor., Mt. v. 18, 20,
26rUMike xml Seulukeied Si xt Os Jivex. 28.5 xd. 260 1aCos
viii. 13; Heb. xiii. 5; Rev. iii. 3] RG L Trmrg. WH txt. ],
and often. in questions: with 1 aor., Lk. xviii. 7 LT
Tr WH; Rev. xv. 4 (in L T Tr WH with the subj. aor.
and the fut.) ; with 2 aor., Jn. xviii. 11. in declarations
introduced by ére: with 1 aor., 1 Th. iv. 15; with 2 aor.,
Mt. xxiv. 34 [here RG T om. ére];_ xxvi. 29 [LT TrWH
om. 674]; Lk. xiii. 35 [T WHom. Lbr. 6m]; xxii. 16;
Jn. xi. 56; in relative clauses: with 1 aor., Mt. xvi. 28;
Mk. ix.1; Acts xiii.41; Ro.iv.8; with 2 aor., Lk. xviii. _
30. 3. with the present subjunc. (as sometimes in
Grk. auth., cf. W. 507 (473)): ove od pn ce eyxataheira,
Heb. xiii. 5 Tdf. (for eyxaradimw Rec. et al.), (ef. B. 213
(184)].
piye, «i d€ pnye, see yé, 3 d.
pnSapds, (adv. fr. undapuds, and this fr. poe, and duds
some one [perh. allied w. dua, q. v.]), [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt.
down], by no means, not at all: sc. rodto yévo.ro, in re-
plies after an impv. [A. V. Not so], Acts x. 14; xi. 8
(Sept. for 19°91.) *
pndé, (wu, q- v-, and 6¢), [fr. Hom. down], a negative
disjunctive conjunction; [ef. W. § 55, 6; B. § 149,
13]; 1. used in continuing a negation or prohibi-
tion, but not, and not, neither; preceded by pn, — either
so that the two negatives have one verb in common:
preceded by y7 with a participle, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii.
24; by un w. apres. subjunc., 1 Co. v. 8 [here Lmrg.
pres. indic.]; 1 Jn. iii. 18; by wy w. impv., Mt. vi. 25;
Lk. x. 4; xii. 22; xiv.12; 1Jn.ii.15; by wy w. an aor.
subj. 2 pers. plur., Mt. x. 9 sq.; by eis rd wy, 2 Th. ii. 2
LT Tr WH;—or so that pyd¢ has its own verb: pre-
ceded by és édy (av) wy, Mt. x. 14; Mk. vi. 11; by wa
pn, In. iv.15; by das py, Lk. xvi. 26; w. a ptep. after
un w.a ptep., Lk. xii.47; 2 Co. iv. 2; w. an impv. after
pn w. impv., Jn. xiv. 27; Ro. vi. 12 sq.; Heb. xii. 5;
pydert emrides, foll. by pydé w. impy. 1 Tim. v. 22; w.
411
pnbets
2 pers. of the aor. subj. after yn w. 2 pers. of the aor.
subj., Mt. vii. 6; xxiii. 9 sq.; Lk. xvii. 23; Col. ii. 21;
1 Pet. iii. 14; after uydé w. an aor. subj. Mk. viii. 26 [T
reads py for the first pndé, TWH Tr mrg. om. the sec-
ond clause]; after pydéva w. an aor. subj. Lk. iii. 14
[Tdf. repeats wndeva]; pndé... nde w. 1 pers. plur. pres.
subj. 1 Co. x. 8 sq. [see below]; mapayyeAXo foll. by pz}
w. inf... . pnde w. inf., Acts iv.18; 1 Tim.i.4; vi. 17;
kadov 76 pty. . . wnd€ with inf. Ro. xiv. 21; w. gen. absol.
after pnmw w. gen. absol. Ro. ix. 11; w. impv. after es
TO pn, 1 Co. x. 7; nde is repeated several times in a neg-
ative exhortation after eis 7d yy in 1 Co. x. 7-10. 2.
not even (Lat. ne... quidem): w. an inf. after @ypawa,
1 Co. v. 11; after ore, Mk. ii. 2; iii. 20 (where RG T
badly pare [cf. W. 489 sq. (456); B. pp. 367, 369]); w.
a pres. impv., Eph. v. 3; 2 Th. iii. 10.
pdels, pndepia, pndev (and pnOév, Acts xxvii. 33 LT
Tr WH, —a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as
early as B.C. 378, cf. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p.
73]; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181sq.; W. § 5, 1d. 11; [B. 28
(25)]; Kiihner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. yndé and és),
[fr. Hom. down]; it is used either in connection with a
noun, no, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man,
neut. nothing, and in the same constructions as pn; ac-
cordingly a. with an imperative: pndeis being
the person to whom something is forbidden, 1 Co. iii.
18, 21; x. 24; Gal. vi.17; Eph. v.6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim.
iv. 12; Tit. ii,15; Jas.i.13; 1 Jn.iii.7; neut. undév,
se. ێorw [A. V. have thou nothing to do with etc.], Mt.
xxvii. 19; pndeis in the dat. or the acc. depending on
the impv., Ro. xiii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 22; pnd (accusative),
Lk. iii. 13; ix.3; jy. o8od, Rev. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH
txt. pn]. b. pndeis with the optative: once in
the N. T., Mk. xi. 14 (where Rec. ovdeis) [cf. W. 476
(443) ]. c. with the 2 pers. of the aor. subjunc.,
the yydeis depending on the verb;*as, undevi etrns, Mt.
viii. 4; xvii. 9; accus., Lk. ii. 14; x. 4; pndev (ace.), Acts
XVi. 28; xara pndéva tpdrop, 2 Th. ii. 3. d. with the
particles iva and dmes (see wy, I. 3): with a, Mt. xvi.
20; Mk. v.43; vi. 8; vii. 36; ix.9; Tit. ii.13; Rev. iii.
11; with dns, Acts viil. 24. e. with an infini-
tive ; a. with one that depends on another verb: —
as on mapayyeAdo, Lk. viii. 56; ix. 21; Acts xxiii. 22;
deixvuss, Acts x. 28; Svatrdocoua, Acts xxiv. 23; dyva-
Oeuarifo evavrdy, Acts xxiii. 14; kpivw (ace. w. inf.),
Acts xxi. 25 Rec.; e¥yopuat, 2 Co. xiii. 7; BovAowat (ace.
w. inf.), 1 Tim. v. 14; tropupynoke riva, Tit. iii. 2, etc. ;
mapaxa\e twa foll. by ro py w. ace. and inf., 1 Th. iii.
3 L (ed. ster.) T Tr WH. 8. with an inf. depend-
ing on da rd: Acts xxviii. 18; Heb. x. 2. f. with
a participle (see py, I. 5); in dat., Acts xi. 19; Ro. xii.
17; accus. pndeva, Jn. viii. 10; Acts ix. 7; pndev, Acts iv.
21; xxvii. 33; 1 Co. x. 25,27; 2Co. vi. 10; 2 Th. iii. 11;
aI Tim. Vi. 4; Units li. 8; Jas. re 6 ; 3 Jn. 7 5 pndepiav 7 po-
oxonny, 2 Co. vi. 3; pndeulav mrdnowy, 1 Pet. iii. 6; pnde-
pilav airiay, Acts xxviil. 18; dvaBoAny pnd. xxv. 17. g.
noteworthy are — pndets with a gen., Acts iv. 17; xxiv.
23; pnd€ev sc. rovrav, Rev. ii. 10 [RGT WH mrg.]; e
pndétrore 412 PTOTE
pndevi, in nothing, 1 Co. i. 7 [but yapiopare is expressed
here]; 2 Co. [vi. 3 (see h. below)]; vii 9; Phil. i. 28;
Jas. i. 4. pndév efvat, to be nothing i. e. of no account,
opp. to eivaé m, Gal. vi. 3 (Soph. Aj. 754; other exx. fr.
Grk. auth. see in Passow ii. p. 231°; [. and S.s. v. IL;
cf. B. § 129, 5]); pndev (ace.), nothing i. e. not at all, in
no respect: Acts x. 20; xi. 12, (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 4;
Tim. 43); as accus. of the obj. after verbs of harm, loss,
damage, advantage, care, [cf. W. 227 (213); B. § 131,
10]: as, BAdmrew, Lk. iv. 35 [cf. W. 483 (450)]; ade-
AeioOar, Mk. v. 26; dorepeiv, 2 Co. xi. 5; pepysvay, Phil.
iv. 6. h. examples of adouble negation, by which
the denial is strengthened, where in Lat. quisguam fol-
lows a negation (cf. W. § 55, 9 b.): pykére pndeis, Mk.
xi. 14; Acts iv. 17; pydevi pndev, Mk. i. 44 (Lom. Tr
br. pndév]; Ro. xiii. 8; pndepiav ev pndevi, 2 Co. vi. 3;
pry... ev pndevi, Phil. i. 28; pay... pndev, 2 Co. xill. 73
py... pndepiav, 1 Pet. iii. 6; pn tus... kara pndeva Tpd-
mov, 2 Th. ii. 3.
pySérore, (unde and woré), adv., never: 2 Tim. iii. 7.*
pydere, (undé and mo), adv., not yet: Heb. xi. 7.*
MifjSos, -ov, 6, a Mede, a native or an inhabitant of
Media, a well-known region of Asia whose chief city was
Ecbatana [see B. D. s.v.]: Acts ii. 9. (Cf. B. D. and
Schaff-Herzog s. v. Media. ]*
pyev, see pndeis.
pykétt, (fr. wn and ére), adv., employed in the same
constructions as wn; no longer; no more; not here-
after: a. with 3 pers. sing. 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19
RGTrtxt. with 2 pers. sing. Mk. ix. 25. b. with
1 pers. plur. pres. subj. Ro. xiv. 13. c. with a pres.
imperative: [Lk. viii. 49 LT Trtxt. WH]; Jn. v. 14;
viii. 11; Eph. iv. 28; 1 Tim. v. 23. d. with the opta-
tive: Mk. xi. 14. e. iva unkere: 2Co. v.15; Eph. iv.
14, f. with an infin. depending —on another verb:
on Bod (ém806), Acts xxv. 24; on deiAd, Acts iv. 17;
on Aéyw k. paprvpouat, Eph. iv. 17; on eis 7d, 1 Pet. iv.
2; on dare, Mk. i. 45; ii. 2; rod pnkére SovAeverv, Ro. vi.
6. g. witha ptcp.: Acts xiii. 34 [ef. W. § 65, 10];
Rovexya.2328 U0bs aie dd. h. od pnxere (see py, LV.
2): with 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 LT Tr mre. WH.*
HAjKos, -eos (-ous), 7d, fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often
for 18; length: Rev. xxi. 16; rd mAdros Kal phKos Kal
BdOos kai vos, language used in shadowing forth the
greatness, extent, and number of the blessings received
from Christ, Eph. iii. 18.*
pykive: (ujKxos); fr. Hdt. and Pind. down; to make
long, to lengthen; in the Bible twice of plants, i. q. to cause
to grow, increase: 6 épirevoe Kvpios Kal verds éunkvvev
Qan), Is. xliv. 14; hence Pass. [al. Mid.] pres. Lnkvvo-
par; to grow up: Mk. iv. 27 [unkvynrar (Tr mre. -erac) }.”
pndrorh, -js, 7, (fr. wdov a sheep, also a goat; as kapn-
Awrn [‘camlet’] fr. kéyndos [cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 332]),
a sheepskin: Heb. xi. 37, and thence in Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 17,1. For 738 an outer robe, mantle, Sept. in
1 K. xix. 13, 19; 2 K. ii. 8, 13 sq., doubtless because
these mantles were made of skins; hence more closely
yi ny, a mantle of hair, Zech. xiii. 4 (where Sept.
Séppis rptxivn). In the Byzant. writ. | Apoll. Dysk. 191,
9] pnAwrn denotes a monk’s garment.*
piv, [(fr. Hom. down)], a particle of affirmation,
verily, certainly, truly, (Sap. vi. 25); 7 phy, see under
7 fin.
pty, gen. unvds, 6, (w. Alex. ace. wnvav, Rev. xxii. 2
Lchm.; on which form see reff. under dpony, fin.); [fr.
Hom. down]; 1. a month: Lk. i. 24, 26, 36,56; iv. 25;
Acts vii. 20; xvili.11; xix. 8; xx. 3; xxviii.11; Jas. v.
Use Revaix 5, LO go sist 2s exit Oy xaos 2. the
time of new moon, new moon, (barbarous Lat. novilunium ;
after the use of the Hebr. wn, which denotes both a
‘month’ and a ‘new moon, asin Num. xxviii. 11; xxix
1): Gal. iv. 10 [Bp. Lghtft. compares Is. lxvi. 23] (the
first day of each month, when the new moon appeared.
was a festival among the Hebrews; cf. Lev. xxiii. 24
Num. xxviii. 11; Ps. Ixxx. (Ixxxi.) 4); [al. refer the
passage to 1 (see Mey. ad loc.) ].*
pyviw [cf. Curtius § 429]: 1 aor. éunyvca; 1 aor. pass.
ptep. fem. unvvOeioa; as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. and Pind.
down ; 1. to disclose or make known something
secret; in a forensic sense, to inform, report: foll. by mod
éoriv, Jn. xi. 57; Twi m1, pass., Acts xxiii. 30. 2.
univ. to declare, tell, make known: 1 Co. x. 28. 3.
to indicate, intimate: of a teacher; foll. by érz, Lk. xx.
37. (A. V. uniformly show.]*
pa otk, see 7, III. 1.
piore, (fr. un and more), [un wore (separately) L WH
(exe. Mt. xxv. 9, see below) Tr (exc. 2 Tim. ii. 25)], dif-
fering from ovzore as pn does from ov; [fr. Hom. down].
Accordingly it is 1. aparticle of Negation; not
ever, never: émet pnrote toxvet, since it is never of force,
because the writer thinks that the very idea of its hav-
ing force is to be denied, Heb. ix. 17 [where WH txt. ua
tére ], on which see W. 480 (447), ef. B. 353 (304); but
others refer this passage to 8 a. below. 2. a pro-
hibitory Conjunction; lest ever, lest at any time, lest
haply, (also written separately yn more [(see init.), esp.
when the component parts retain each its distinctive
force; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 129 sq.; Ellendt,
Lex.Soph.ii.107. Inthe N. T. use of this particle the no-
tion of time usual to woré seems to recede before that of
contingency, lest perchance]), so that it refers to the pre-
ceding verb and indicates the purpose of the designated
action [W. § 56, 2]: w. a subj. pres. Lk. xii. 58; w.a
subj. aor., Mt. iv. 6 and Lk. iv. 11, fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 12
(where Sept. for }5); Mt. v. 25 [(cf. below)]; vii. 6 [R
G]; xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27 (both from Is. vi. 10,
where Sept. for 9); Mt. xiii. 29 (od se. eka); xv. 32;
xxvil.64; Mk.iv.12; Lk. xiv.12; with {va prefixed, ibid.
29; w.a fut. indic. [see B. § 139, 7, ef. also p. 368 (315)
d.J: [Mt. vii. 6 L T Tr WH; (cf. v. 25)]; Mk. xiv. 2;
(Lk. xii. 58 LT Tr WH]. after verbs of fearing,
taking care, [W.u.s.; B.§ 139, 48]: w. subj. aor., —
so after mpocéxw, to take heed, lest ete., Lk. xxi. 34; Heb.
ii. 1, (Sir. xi. 33); so that an antecedent PoBovdpevor or
mpooéxovres must be mentally supplied, Acts v.39; pnrore
ovK dpkéon, lest perchance there be not enough (so that ob«
{6 7rOVv
dpxéon forms one idea, and oBovpeba must be supplied
before unmore), Mt. xxv.9R TWH mrg.; but LTr WH
txt., together with Meyer et al., have correctly restored
pinrore (SC. TovTo yeverOw [W. § 64, 7 a.])+ o& pi) dpxéon,
i.e. not so! there will in no wise be enough (see py, IV. 2);
cf. Bornemann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 143 sq. 7
[but all the editors above named remove the punctua-
tion mark after pjmore; in which case it may be connect-
ed directly with the words which follow it and translated
(with R. V.) ‘peradventure there will not be enough’;
ct. B. § 148, 10, esp. p. 354 (304) note. For additional
exx. of pnmore in this sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 10,
10 p. 1179%, 24; with indic., ibid. pp. 1172°, 33; 1173
22, etc.), see Soph. Lex. s. v.; Bttm. in his trans. of Apoll.
Dysk., index s. v.; (cf. L. and S.s.v. wn, B.9)]. after
poBotpa, w. pres. subjunc. Heb. iv. 1; so that poBor-
pevos must be supplied before it, Lk. xiv. 8. after Bdémew
w. a fut. indic. [cf. W. § 56, 2b. a.; B. 243 (209) ], Heb.
iii. 12. 3. a particle of Interrogation accom-
panied with doubt (see py, III.), whether ever, whether at
any time; whether perchance, whether haply, (Germ. doch
nicht etwa; ob nicht etwa) ; a. in a direct question in-
troduced by eérei, for, else, (see émet, 2 sub fin.) : so ace. to
the not improbable interpretation of some [e. g. L WH
mrg., Delitzsch] in Heb. ix.17, see inlabove. In the re-
maining N. T. passages so used that the inquirer, though
he doubts and expects a negative answer, yet is inclined
to believe what he doubtfully asks about; thus, ina direct
question, in Jn. vii. 26. b. inindirect questions; a.
w. the optative (where the words are regarded as the
thought of some one [W. § 41 b.4¢.; B. § 139, 60]): Lk.
iii. 15. [See B.] B. w. the subjunctive: 2 Tim. ii. 25
[RGL (cf. B. 46 (40)); but TTr WH txt. give the
optative], where pnrore xrd. depend on the suppressed
idea SuadoyrCopevos [cf. B. § 139, 62 fin.; W. u. s.].*
phrov [T Tr] or py mov [WH], that nowhere, lest any-
where, [lest haply]: Acts xxvii. 29T TrWH. (Hom. et
ale).
pate [or BN TQ, L Tr in Ro. ix. i (nn and To). [fr.
Hom. down], adv.; 1. not yet: in construction
with the acc. and inf., Heb. ix. 8; w. a ptep., pyre yap
yevrnbévrar, though they were not yet born, Ro. ix. 11,
where cf. Fritzsche. 2. lest in any way [?]: Acts
xxvii. 29 Lehm.*
paras [G T, or py ros L Tr WH], (un and was), [fr.
Hom. down}; 1. a conjunction, lest in any way, lest
perchance ; a. in final sentences, w. an aor. subj., pre-
ceded by a pres. 1 Co. ix. 27; preceded by an aor., 2
Co. 117 s)ix.de b. after verbs of fearing, taking
heed: w.an aor. subj.,—after Bdéreww, 1 Co. viii. 9;
after hoBeicba, Acts xxvii. 29 R; 2 Co. xi. 3; xii. 20;
w. a perf. indic., to indicate that what is feared has actu-
ally taken place [W. § 56, 2b. a.; B. 242 (209)], Gal.
iv. 11; w. an aor. subj., the idea of fearing being sup-
pressed, Ro. xi. 21 Rec. [B. § 148, 10; cf. W. 474
(442)]. 2. an interrogative particle, whether in
any way, whether by any means : in an indirect question,
with an indic. present (of a thing still continuing) and
413
ware
aorist (of a thing already done), Gal. ii. 2 (I laid before
them the gospel etc., se. inquiring, whether haply ete.; Paul
expects a negative answer, by which he wished his teach-
ing concerning Christ to be approved by the apostles at
Jerusalem, yet by no means because he himself had any
doubt about its soundness, but that his adversaries might
not misuse the authority of those apostles in assailing this
teaching, and thereby frustrate his past and present en-
deavors ; cf. Hofmann ad loc. [B. 353 (303). Others,
however, take rpéyo as a subjunctive, and render lest
haply I should be running ete. ; see W. 504 sq. (470), ef.
Ellicott ad loc.]). w. the indicative (of a thing perhaps
already done, but which the writer wishes had not been
done) and the aor. subjunctive (of a thing future and
uncertain, which he desires God to avert) in one and the
same sentence, | Th. iii. 5 (where pjws depends on yravar;
ef. Schott, Liinemann, [Ellicott], ad loc. ; [B. 353 (304) ;
W. 505 (470)]).*
pnpds, -o0, 6, the thigh: Rev. xix. 16. (From Hom. down;
Sept. for 37:.)*
pare, (un and the enclitic ré), [fr. Hom. down], a cop-
ulative conjunction of negation, neither, nor, (differing
fr. ore as yn does fr. ov. It differs fr. unde in that pndé
separates different things, but unre those which are of the
same kind or which are parts of one whole; cf. W. § 55,
6; [B.§ 149,13b.]): pare... pre, neither... nor, Lk.
vii. 33 [T py... pnd]; ix. 3 (five times); Acts xxiii.
12, 21; xxvii. 20; Heb. vii. 3; (but in Eph. iv. 27 for
py... pyre we must with LT Tr WH substitute pp...
pndé). pay... pate... pyre, Mt. v. 34-36 (four times);
1 Tim.i. 7; Jas. v. 12; Rev. vii. 3; a py... pyre...
pyre, Rev. vii. 1; pnde... pyre... pyre, 2 Th.ii. 2 LT
Tr WH; py etvar dvdotaow, pndé ayyedov (for that is
something other than dvydoracts), pnte mvedpa (because
angels belong to the genus mvevpara), Acts xxiii. 8 RG;
cf. W. 498 (459) ; [B. 367 (814) sq.].*
piTyp, gen. pytpds, dat. uyrpi, acc. pnrépa, H, [fr. Hom.
down; fr. Skr. ma ‘to measure’; but whether denoting
the ‘ moulder,’ or the ‘ manager ’ is debated; cf. Vaniéek
p- 657; Curtius § 472; (cf. pérpov)], Hebr. ON, a mother;
prop.: Mt. i. 18; ii. 11, and often; trop. of that which
is like a mother: Mt. xii. 49 sq.; Mk. iii. 35; Jn, xix.
27; Ro. xvi. 13, cf. 1 Tim. v. 2; a city is called ) pnrnp
tév mopvéy, that produces and harbors the harlots, Rev.
xvii. 5; of a city where races of men [i. e. Christians]
originated, Gal. iv. 26 [here GT Tr WH om. L br. ndvrew
(on the origin of which cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.)}.
pare [so GT WH R (commonly), but wy re L (exe. 1
Co. vi. 3) Tr (exc. Mt. xxvi. 22, 25; Mk. iv. 21)], (up
and ri), whether at all, whether perchance, an interroga-
tive expecting a negative answer; in a direct question
(Germ. doch nicht etwa? [in Eng. generally untranslated;
cf. W. § 57,3b.; B. 248 (213)]): Mt. vii. 16; xxvi. 22,
25; Mk. iv. 21; xiv. 19; Lk. vi. 39; Jn. vii. 31[RG];
viii. 22; xviii. 35; xxi. 5 [here all texts yn re (properly)];
Acts x. 47; 2 Co. xii. 18; Jas. iii. 113 pyre dpa, 2 Co. i.
17; used by one asking doubtfully yet inclining to believe
what he asks about (see unmore, 3 a.): Mt. xii. 23; Jn.
prruye
iv. 29. ef pyre, see ed, IIL. 10. pareye (or pire ye) see in
its place.*
paireye [so GT WH; but pyre ye RL, py re ye Tr],
(fr. pn, rl, yé), to say nothing of, not to mention, which
acc. to the context is either a. much less; or b.
much more, much rather ; so pace. in the N. T., 1 Co. vi.
3. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 801 sq.*
pris [so R G Jn. iv. 33], more correctly py res ; 1
prohibitive, let no one [ef. B. 31 (28)]: [w. 1 aor. subj.
1 Co. xvi. 11]; w. 2 aor. subj. 2 Th. ii. 3. 2. inter-
rogative, (Lat. num quis ?) hath any one ete. : In. vii. 48 ;
[2 Co. xii. 17, cf. B. § 151,7; W.574 (534); cious
would gladly believe what ne asks about doubtfully (see
pyre, sub fin.) : Jn. iv. 33.*
pAtpa, -as, 7, (untnp), the womb: Lk. ii. 23 (on which
see diavolyw, 1); Ro. iv.19. (Hdt., Plat., al.; Sept. for
=e
pytpadwas (also pyrpadoias), LT Tr WH [see WH.
App. p- 152] pytpoddas, -ov, 6, (ujrnp, and drodw to
thresh, smite), a matricide: 1 Tim.i. 9. (Aeschyl., Plat.,
Leian., al.)*
pntpo-roAts, -ews, 7, (untnp and méds), a metropolis,
chief city; in the spurious subscription 1 Tim. vi. (22)
fin.; [in this sense fr. Xen. down ].*
pla, see under eis.
pratve; Pass., 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. puavOdow; pf. 3
pers. sing. peplavra (unless it be better to take this form
asa plur.; cf. Kriiger § 33, 3 Anm. 9 ; Btim. Gram. § 101
Anm. 7; Ausf. Spr. § 101 Anm. 13; B. 41 (36); [W.
§ 58, 6 b. B.]), ptep. peusacpevos (Tit. i. 15 RG) and
peptappevos (ibid. LT Tr WH; also Sap. vii. 25; Tob.
ii. 9; Joseph. b. j. 4, 5, 2 ed. Bekk.; cf. Matthiae i. p.
415; Kriiger § 40s. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 35; Otto on
Theophil. ad Autol.1,1p.2sq.; [Veitchs.v.]); fr. Hom.
down ; 1. to dye with another color, to stain: édé-
gavra poi, Hom. Il. 4, 141. 2. to defile, pollute,
sully, contaminate, soil, (Sept. often for 8190): in a physi-
cal and a moral sense, oapxa (of licentiousness), Jude 8;
in a moral sense, rnv cuveidnow, Tov vodv, pass. Tit. i. 15;
absol. to defile with sin, pass. ibid. and in Heb. xii. 15; for
wun, Deut. xxiv. 6 (4); in aritual sense, of men, pass.
Jn. xviii. 28 (Lev. xxii. 5, 8; Num. xix. 13, 20; Tob.
U9) os
[Sxn. pealvw, woadyvw: acc. to Trench (N. T. Syn.
§ xxxi.) uialyw to stain differs from woAdyw to smear not only
in its primary and outward sense, but in the circumstance
that (like Eng. stain) it may be used in good part, while joa.
admits of no worthy reference. |
placpa, -ros, Td, (yaivw), that which defiles [cf. nav-
xnpa, 2]; defilement (Vulg. coinquinatio): trop. pudopara
Tov koopov, Vices the foulness of which contaminates one
in his intercourse with the ungodly mass of mankind,
2 Pet. ii. 20. (Tragg., Antiph., Dem., Polyb., Joseph.,
Plut.; Sept., Lev. vii. 8 (18); Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 34;
Judith ix. 2; 1 Mace. xiii. 50.) *
pracpds, -ov, 6, (taivw), the act of defiling, defilement,
pollution: ém6vpia pracpod, defiling lust [W. § 34, 3 b.],
2 Pet. ii. 10.
414
(Sap. xiv. 26; 1 Macc. iv 43; Plut. mor. |
polypeowat
p- 393 c.; Test. xii. Patr. [test. Lev. 17; test. Benj. 8;
Graec. Ven. (passim); Herm. Past. sim. 5, 7, 2].)*
piypa or (so LT) piypa, (on the accent ef. Lipsius,
Gramm. Untersuch. pp. 32 and 34, [cf. W. § 6, 1 e.;
kpipa, init.]), ros, Td, (ulyvupe), that which has been pro-
duced by mizing, a mixture: Jn. xix. 39 [WH txt. €Acypa,
q.v-]. (Sir. xxxviii. 8; Aristot., Plut-) als)\*
plyvups and ployw: 1 aor. guia; pf. pass. ptep. pepry-
pévos’ fr. Hom. down; to miz, mingle: ri rum, one thing
with another, Rev. viii. 7 Rec.; xv. 2; also ri &v run [cf.
B. § 133, 8], Rev. viii. 7 GL T Tr WH; perd rivos, with
a thing, Mt. xxvii. 34; Lk. xiii. 1 (on which see aiua,
2a.). [SYN. see xepavyups, fin. COMP.: cur-ava-piyvupe. |*
pixpds, -d, -ov, compar. puxpdrepos, -epa, -epov, [fr.
Hom. down], Sept. for } P» YP, O37, small, little;
used a. of size: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 31; hence
of stature, 77 nAckia, Lk. xix. 3; of length, Jas. ili.5. —b.
of space: neut. mpoeA6av [mpooed6. T Tr WH mrg. in
Mt., Tr WH mrg. in Mk. (see mpocépxopat, a.) | puKpov,
hevine gone forward a little, Mt. xxvi. 39; Mk. xiv. 35,
[cf. W. “§ 32, 6; B. § 131, 11 sq. ]. c. of age: less
by birth, younger, Mk. xv. 40 [al. take this of stat-
ure]; of yexpol, the little ones, young children, Mt. xviii.
6,10,14; Mk.ix.42; did pixpod éws peyddouv [A. V. from
the least to the greatest], Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11, (Jer.
vi. 13; xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34); puxpos re kai peéyas, [both
small and great] i. e. all, Acts xxvi. 22; plur., Rev. xi.
LS eextihGcextx Delores d. of time, short,
brief: neuter — nom., ére [or ért om.] puxpdy (se. €orar)
kal, (yet) a little while and etc. i. e. shortly (this shall come
to pass), Jn. xiv. 19; xvi. 16 sq. 19, [(cf. Ex. xvii. 4)];
ért puxpov daov dor (see daos, a); without kai, Heb. x.
37 (Is. xxvi. 20); 1d pexpdv [Tr WH om. 16], Jn. xvi. 18;
— pixpdv ace. (of duration), Jn. xiii. 33 (Job xxxvi. 2);
puxpov xpdvoy, Jn. vii. 33; xii. 835; Rev. vi. 11; xx. 3;
pera puxpov, after a little while, Mt. xxvi. 73; Mk. xiv.
70, (apo pexpod, Sap. xv. 8). e. of quantity, i. e.
number or amount: pixpa (dun, 1 Co. v. 6; Gal. v. 9;
of number, puxpdy oipmoy, Lk. xii. 32; of quantity,
puxpa Svvayus, Rev. iii. 8; neut. pixpdy (re), a little, 2 Co.
may tly f. of rank or influence: Mt. x. 42; Lk.
ix. 48; xvii. 23 6 pexpdrepos ev 1h Bacideia rv odp. he
that is inferior to the other citizens of the kingdom of
heaven in knowledge of the gospel [R. V. but little in
etes; ref. W244, (229)s% Be $)123; 18), Me. xis asia.
vii. 28.*
MAnros, -ov, 7, Miletus, a maritime city [now nearly
ten miles fr. the coast (cf. Acts xx. 38)] of Caria or
Ionia, near the mouths of the Meander and not far [e.
35 m.S.] from Ephesus. It was the mother of many
[some eighty] colonies, and the birth-place of Thales
Anaximander, and other celebrated men: Acts xx. 15,
17; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 90 sq.]*
pico, -ov, 7d, (a word of Lat. origin [cf. B. 18 (16)]),
a mile, among the Romans the distance of a thousand
paces or eight stadia, [somewhat less than our mile]:
Mt. v. 41. (Polyb., Strab., Plut.) *
Hteopar, -ovpar; (uipos fan actor, mimic]); to imitate:
MLLNTHS
twa, any one, 2 Th. iii. 7,9; ri, Heb. xiii. 7, $3 Jn. 11.
[Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., al.]*
PALNTHS, -0v, 6, an imitator: yivouat twos (gen. of pers.),
1 Co. iv. 16; xi.1; Eph. v.1; 1 Th.i. 6; ii. 14; Heb. vi.
12; w. gen. of the thing, 1 Pet. iii. 13 Rec. (where LT
Tr WH @rorai). [Plat., Isocr., al.]*
PYvAcKw: (MNAQ [allied w. pévea, pavOdvw; cf. Lat.
maneo, moneo, mentio, etc.; cf. Curtius § 429]); to remind:
Hom., Pind., Theogn., Eur., al.; Pass. and Mid., pres.
popvnokouar (Heb. ii. 6; xiii. 3; rare in Attic); 1 aor.
épynoOnv; pf. pépvnar; 1 fut. pass. in a mid. sense,
pryc@ngopa (Heb. x. 17 LT Tr WH); Sept. for 73;;
to be recalled or to return to one’s mind, to remind one’s
‘self of, to remember; éurnabnv, with a pass. signif. [cf.
B. 52 (46) ], to be recalled to mind, to be remembered, had
in remembrance: évamtdv twos, before i. e. in the mind of
one (see évamoy, 1 c.), Acts x. 31; Rev. xvi. 19, (pas-
sively also in Ezek. xviii. 22; [Sir. xvi. 17 Rec.]; and
dvapynaOnva, Num. x. 9; Ps. eviii. (cix.) 16) ;— with a
mid. signif., foll. by a gen. of the thing [W. § 30, 10 ¢.],
to remember a thing: Mt. xxvi. 75; Lk. xxiv. 8; Acts
xi. 16; 2 Pet. iii.2; Jude 17; prnoOqvar €d€ovs, to call
to remembrance former love, Lk. i. 54 (cf. Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 6); ris dtadjns, Lk. i. 72 (Gen. ix. 15; Ex. ii. 24;
1 Mace. iv. 10; 2 Macc. i. 2); py penoOqva trav duapriay
twos, [A. V. to remember no more] i. e. to forgive, Heb.
viii. 12; x. 17, (after the Hebr.; see Ps. xxiv. (xxy.) 7;
Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 8; Is. xliii. 25; and on the other hand,
to remember the sins of any one is said of one about to
punish them, Jer. xiv. 10; 1 Macc. v.4; vi. 12); w. gen.
of a pers., to remember for good, remember and care
for: Lk. xxiii. 42; foll. by 67, Mt. v. 23; xxvii. 63; Lk.
RVI ceed, 17,22 xi. 16; by os, Wk. xxiv..6. pf.
pépvnuar, in the sense of a present [cf. W. 274 (257)],
to be mindful of: w. gen. of the thing, 2 Tim. i. 4; mavra
pov pépynoe, in all things ye are mindful of me, 1 Co.
xi. 25 pres. pypvnoxopat, w. gen. of the pers., to remem-
ber one in order to care for him, Heb. ii. 2 (fr. Ps. viii.
5); xiii. 3.
picéw, -@; impf. epicovv; fut. pronow; 1 aor. evionoa;
pf. pepionxa; Pass., pres. ptep. proovpevos; pf. ptcp.
pepsonuevos (Rev. xviii. 2); Sept. for xjv; [fr. Hom.
down]; to hate, pursue with hatred, detest; pass. to be
hated, detested: twa, Mt. v. 43 and Rec. in 44; xxiv. 10;
Lk. i. 71; vi. 22,27; xix.14; Jn. vii. 7; xv. 18 sq. 23-
25; xvii. 14; Tit. iii. 3; 1 Jn. ii. 9, [11]; iii. 13,15; iv.
20; Rev. xvii. 16; pass., Mt. x. 22; xxiv.9; [Mk. xiii.
13]; Lk. xxi.17; ri: Jn. iii. 20; Ro. vii. 15; Eph. v. 29;
Heb. i. 9; Jude 23; Rev. ii. 6 and Rec. in 15; pass. ib.
xviii. 2. Not a few interpreters have attributed to
puceiy in Gen. xxix. 31 (cf. 30); Deut. xxi. 15 sq.; Mt.
vi. 24; Lk. xiv. 26; xvi. 13; [Jn. xii. 25]; Ro. ix. 13,
the signification to love less, to postpone in love or esteem,
to slight, through oversight of the circumstance that ‘the
Orientals, in accordance with their greater excitability,
are wont both to feel and to profess love and hate where
we Occidentals, with our cooler temperament, feel and
express nothing more than interest in, or disregard and
[Comp. : dva-, én-ava-, bro-pipryjcka. | *
415
Muyanr
indifference to a thing’; Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. px
304; cf. Rickert, Magazin f. Exegese u. Theologie des
N. T. p. 27 sqq.*
pioGarrodocia, -as, 7, (wicOds and drodidom; ef. the
pic Oodogia of the Grk. writ. [W. 24]), payment of wages
due, recompense: of reward, Heb. x. 35; xi. 26; of pun
ishment, Heb. ii. 2. (Several times in eccles. writ.) *
pic8-a7r0-56Tms, -ov, 6, (uicOds and dmodidap; cf. the
pucboddrns of the Grk. writ.), (Vulg. remunerator) ; one
who pays wages, arewarder: Heb. xi. 6. (Several times
in eccles. writ.) *
pic Pos, -a, -ov, also of two terminations [cf. W. § 13,
1], (waOds), employed for hire, hired: as subst. [A. V.
hired servant], Lk. xv. 17, 19, [21 WH in br.], (Sept
for 12w, Lev. xxv. 50; Job vii. 1. Tob. v.12; Sir.
vil. 20; xxxi. 27; xxxvii.11. Anth. 6, 283,3; Plut.).*
pie Bés, -od, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 124, also for
NniDwn, ete. ; 1. dues paid for work; wages, hire:
Ro. iv. 4 (kara deiAnua); in a prov., Lk. x. 7 and 1 Tim.
v. 18; Mt. xx. 8; Jas. v. 4; Jude 11 (on which see
éxxéw, fin.) ; prodds ddicias, wages obtained by iniquity,
Acts i, 18; 2 Pet. ii. 15, [cf. W. § 30, 1 a.]. 2. re
ward; used — of the fruit naturally resulting from toils
and endeavors, Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. ix. 18;—of divine
recompense : a. in both senses, rewards and pun-
ishments: Rev. xxii. 12. b. of the rewards which
God bestows, or will bestow, upon good deeds and en-
deavors (on the correct theory about which cf. Weiss,
Die Lehre Christi vom Lohn, in the Deutsche Zeitschr.
fiir christ]. Wissenschaft, 1853, p. 319 sqq.; Mehlhorn,
d. Lohnbegr. Jesu, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol.
1876, p. 721 sqq.; [cef. Beyer in Herzog xx. pp. 4-14]):
Mt. v.12; vi. 2,5,16; x.41sq.; Mk.ix.41; Lk. vi. 23,
35; 1 Co. iii. 8,14; 2Jn.8; Rev. xi. 18; Zyew prcddy, to
have a reward, is used of those for whom a reward is
reserved by God, whom a divine reward awaits, Mt. v.
46; 1 Co.ix.17; with mapa ro matpi tpar év t. ovp.
added, Mt. vi. 1. c. of punishments: pucds ddckias,
2 Pet. ii. 13; tis dSvoceBeias, 2 Mace. viii. 33.*
pir0da: (pucOds); 1 aor. mid. éuccbwoduny; to let out
for hire; to hire {cf. W. § 38, 3]: twa, Mt. xx. 1, 7.
(Hat., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. for 13¥, Deut.
xxii. 4; 2 Chr. xxiv. 12.) *
ploOwpa, -ros, 70, (utcO0w) ; 1. the price for which any
thing is either let or hired (Hadt., Isocr., Dem., Ael., al. 5
of a harlot’s hire, Hos. ii. 12; Deut. xxiii. 18; Mic. i. 7;
Proy. xix. 13; Ezek. xvi. 31-34, and in class. Grk. [cf.
Philo in Flac. § 16 fin.]). 2. that which is either let
or hired for a price, as a house, dwelling, lodging [(cf.
Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip. p. 9 note *)]: Acts xxviii.
30.*
picPwrds, -od, 6, (picOdw), one hired, a hireling: Mk.i.
20; Jn. x.12sq. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.; Sept. for
Vv.) *
MirvAtvn, -ns, 9, Mitylene, the chef maritime town
of the island of Lesbos in the Migean: Acts xx. 14.
(Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 84 sq.]*
Mixafr, 6, OND, i e. ‘who like God?’), Michael
Uva
the name of an archangel, who was supposed to be the
guardian angel of the Israelites (Dan. xii. 1; x. 13, 21):
Jude 9; Rev. xii. 7. [BB.DD. s. v.]*
pva, -Gs, 7, a word of Eastern origin (cf. Schrader, Keil-
Si Ore,
inschriften u. s. w. p. 143], Arab. So Syr. Lad&,
Hlebr. 939 (fr. 731) to appoint, mark out, count, etc.),
Lat. mina; 1. in the O. T. a weight, and an imaginary
coin or money of account, equal to one hundred shekels:
1K. x. 17, ef. 2 Chr. ix. 16; 2 Esdr. ii. 69, (otherwise in
Ezek. xlv. 12 [cf. Bible Educator, index s. v. Maneh ;
Schrader in Riehm s. v. Mine p. 1000 sq.]). 2. In
Attic a weight and a sum of money equal to one hun-
dred drachmae (see Spaypy [and B. D. s. v. Pound; esp.
Schrader in Riehm u. s.]) : Lk. xix. 13, 16, 18, 20, 24 sq.*
pvdopar, see puvnoKe.
Mvdcwv, -wvos, 6, (MNAQ), Mnason, a Christian of
Cyprus: Acts xxi. 16. (The name was com. also among
the Grks.; [cf. Benseler’s Pape’s Eigennamen, s. v.].) *
pveta, -as, 7), (ueynokw), remembrance, memory, mention :
émi rdon TH pveia Spov, asoften as I remember you [lit.
‘on all my remembrance’ etc. cf. W. § 18, 4], Phil. i. 3;
rrovetoOar pveiay twds, to make mention of one, Ro. i. 9;
Eph.i.16; 1Th.i.2; Philem.4, (Plat. Phaedr. p. 254a.;
Diog. Laért. 8, 2, 66; Sept. Ps. ex. (exi.) 4); py. exew
tuvds, to be mindful of one, 1 Th. iii. 6 (Soph., Arstph.,
Eur., al.) ; adddeurrov €xeuw thy wept twos pyeiav, 2 Tim.
aese”
vipa, -ros, 7d, (uvaopar, pf. pass. wéurnjeac) § 1.
a@ monument or memorial to perpetuate the memory of any
person or thing (Hom., Pind., Soph., al.). 2. a se-
pulchral monument (Hom., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.). 3.
a sepulchre or tomb (receptacle where a dead body is de-
posited [cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sq.]):
Mk.v.3GLT Tr WH; v.5; [xv.46 TWH]; LK. viii.
2 XXM Ooh XXIV | SACs Al. 29) * vil. 165 nev. xi. 9,
(Joseph. antt. 7, 1, 3; Sept. for 72p)-"
pvnpetov, -ov, Td; 1. any visible object for preserv-
ing or recalling the memory of any person or thing; a me-
morial, monument, (Aeschyl., Pind., Soph., sqq.); in bibl.
Grk.soin Sap. x. 7; specifically, a sepulchral monument :
oikodopety pynueta, Lk. xi. 47; Joseph. antt. 13, 6,5. 2.
in the Scriptures a sepulchre, tomb: Mt. xxiii. 29; xxvii.
52,60; xxviii. 8; Mk. v.2; vi.29; Lk. xi.44; Jn. v. 28;
xi. 17, 31, and often in the Gospels; Acts xiii. 29; Sept.
for 3p Gen. xxiii. 6, 9; 1.5; Is. xxii. 16, ete.
BvtEM, -NS, 7, (uvdowar); a. memory,remembrance; b.
mention: pynuny movetoOai rivos, to remember a thing, call
it to remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 15; the same expression oc-
curs in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, but in the sense of Lat.
mentionem facere, to make mention of a thing.*
pynpovedo ; impf. 3 pers. plur. euynudvevoy; 1 aor. éuvn-
povevoa; (yuvnuev mindful); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for
931; 1. to be mindful of, to remember, to call to
nind: absol. Mk. viii. 18; twds, Lk. xvii. 82; Jn. xv. 20;
xvi. 4,21; Actsxx. 35; 1Th.i.3; [Heb. xiii. 7] ; con-
textually i. q. to think of and feel for a person or thing:
w. gen. of the thing, Col. iv. 18; rév rraxav, Gal. ii. 10
416
povyanis
(see pruvnoka, fin.) ; w. an acc. of the obj. to hold in mem-
ory, keep in mind: rwd, 2 Tim. ii. 8; ri, Mt. xvi. 9; 1
Th. ii. 9; ra ddccquara, of God as punishing them, Rev.
Xviii. 5 (see pypynoxw). Cf. Matthiae § 347 Anm. 2; W.
p- 205 (193); [B. § 132, 14]. foll. by dr, Acts xx. 31;
Eph. ii. 11; 2 Th. ii. 5; foll. by an indir. question, Rev.
Hivos dil, 13: 2. to make mention of: twés, Heb. xi.
15 [but al. refer this to 1 above] (Plut. Them. 32; ri,
Plat. de rep. 4 p. 441 d.; legg. 4 p. 723 c.); mepi twos
(as pvacOa in classic Grk., see Matthiae § 347 Anm. 1),
Heb. xi. 22; so in Lat. memini de aliquo; cf. Ramshorn,
Lat. Gr. $111 note 1; [Harpers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. memini,
I. 3; cf. Eng. remember about, etc.]. *
pvnpdovvoy, -ov, Td, (uvpuov), a memorial (that by which
the memory of any person or thing 1s preserved), a remem-
brance: eis pynpdovver Tivos, to perpetuate one’s memory,
Mt. xxvi.13; Mk. xiv.9; ai mpocevyai cov... avéBnoav
eis pnp. evortov tr. Geov, (without the fig.) have become
known to God, so that he heeds and is about to help thee,
Acts x. 4. (Hdt., Arstph., Thuc., Plut., al.; Sept. for
Dt, 7731; also for 7318, i. e. that part of a sacrifice
which was burned on the altar together with the frank-
incense, that its fragrance might ascend to heaven and
commend the offerer to God’s remembrance, Lev. ii. 9,
16; v.12; Num. v. 26; hence evodia eis pynudovvor, Sir.
xlv. 16; and often in Siracid., 1 Macc., etc.) *
pvyotedw: Pass., pf. ptep. weuvnotevpevos (RG) and
éuvnoteupevos (LT Tr WH) [cf. W. § 12, 10; Veitch s.
v.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]; 1 aor. ptep. pynorevdeis; (uvp-
orés betrothed, espoused); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
WIN; Twa (yuvaixa), to woo her and ask her in marriage;
pass. to be promised in marriage, be betrothed: twi, Mt. i.
TSS EK. IL wit. Os
poyyt-Addos, (fr. udyyos (al. woyyds, cf. Chandler § 366}
one who has a hoarse, hollow voice, and daXos), speaking
with a harsh or thick voice: Mk. vii. 32 Tdf. ed. 2, Tr txt.;
but the common reading poy:Addos deserves the prefer-
ence; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. p. 302 sq. (Etym. Magn. [s.
v. Barrapigerv].) *
poyt-Addos [on its accent cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -ov,
(udyis and Addos), speaking with difficulty, [A. V. having
an impediment in his speech]: Mk. vii. 32 [not Tr txt.].
(Aét. 8. 38; Schol. ad Leian. Jov. trag. c. 27; Bekker,
Anecd. p. 100, 22; Sept. for DYN, dumb, Is. xxxv. 6.)*
poyts, (udyos toil), fr. Hom. down, hardly, with diffi-
culty: Lk.ix.39 [yet WH Trmrg. porus,q. v-]. (3 Mace.
vii. 6.) *
p68t0s, -ov, 6, the Lat. modius, a dry measure holding
16 sextarii (or one sixth of the Attic medimnus; Corn.
Nep. Att. 2 [i.e. about a peck, A. V. bushel; ef. BB. DD.
s.v. Weights and Measures]): Mt.v.15; Mk.iv.21; Lk.
xi, 33.*
pouxarts, -idos, 7, (ssoryds), a word unknown to the
earlier writ. but found in Plut., Heliod., al.; see Lod. ad
Phryn. p. 452; [W. 24]; Sept. for n9x3 (Ezek. xvi. 38;
xxiii. 45) and NO831) (Hos. iii. 1; Prov. xxiv. 55 (xxx
20)); an adulteress ; a. prop.: Ro. vii. 3; dpOarpot
HeoTot worxadidos, eyes always on the watch for an adul-
poryaw
teress, or from which adulterous desire beams forth, 2
Pet. ii. 14. _b. As the intimate alliance of God with
the people of Israel was likened to a marriage, those who
relapse into idolatry are said to commit adultery or play
the harlot (Ezek. xvi. 15 sqq.; xxiii. 43 sqq., etc.) ; hence
potxanis is fig. equiv. to faithless to God, unclean, apostate :
Jas. iv.4 [where cf. Alford]; as an adj. (cf. Matthiae
§ 429, 4), yeved pory.: Mt. xii. 39; xvi.4; Mk. viii. 38.
(Cf. Clem. Alex. strom. vi. c. 16 § 146 p. 292, 5 ed. Sylb.]*
pouxdw, -: to have unlawful intercourse with another’s
wife, to commit adultery with: twa. in bibl. Grk. mid.
porx@pat, to commit adultery: of the man, Mt. v. 32° [yet
WH br.]; xix. 9° [yet not WH mrg.], 9» [RGLTr
br. WH mrg.]; én’ ai’ryy, commits the sin of adultery
against her (i. e. that has been put away), Mk. x. 11; of
the woman, Mt. v. 32* (where LT Tr WH powyevdjvar
for porxaoa); Mk.x.12. (Sept. for 483, Jer. iii. 8; v.
7; ix. 2, ete.; in Grk. writ. fig. in the active, with ry
@adaccay, to usurp unlawful control over the sea, Xen.
Hell. 1, 6,15; 1d AexGev, to falsify, corrupt, Ael. n. a.
7, 39.) *
pouxela, -as, 7, (uotyevo), adultery: In. viii. 3; Gal. v.
19 Rec.; plur. [W. § 27, 3; B. § 123, 2]: Mt. xv. 19;
Mk. vii. 21. (Jer. xiii. 27; Hos. ii. 2; iv. 2; [Andoc.,
Lys.], Plat., Aeschin., Lcian., al.) *
porxedw; fut. poryevow; 1 aor. euoixevoa; Pass., pres.
ptep. porxevopevn; 1 aor. inf. porxevOnvar; (porxds) ; fr.
Arstph. and Xen. down; Sept. for 82; to commit adul-
tery; a. absol. (to be an adulterer): Mt. v. 27; xix.
18; Mk. x. 19; Lk. xvi. 18; xviii. 20; Ro. ii. 225 xiii.
Oras. 1111: b. tia (yuvaika), to commit adultery
with, have unlawful intercourse with another’s wife: Mt.
v. 28 (Deut. v. 18; Lev. xx. 10; Arstph. av.558; Plat.
rep. 2 p. 360 b.; Leian. dial. deor. 6,3; Aristaenet. epp.
1, 20; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 2, 14); pass. of the wife, to
suffer adultery, be debauched: Mt. v. 32* LT Tr WH;
{xix. 9 WH mrg.]; Jn. viii. 4. By a Hebraism (see
potxaris, b.) trop. pera revos (yuvarkds) potxevew is used
of those who at a woman’s solicitation are drawn away
to idolatry, i. e. to the eating of things sacrificed to idols,
Rev. ii. 22; cf. Jer. iii. 9, etc.*
porxds, -ov, 6, an adulierer: Lk. xviii. 11; 1 Co. vi. 9;
Heb. xiii. 4. Hebraistically (see posyadis, b.) and fig.
faithless toward God, ungodly: Jas. iv. 4 RG. (Soph.,
Arstph., Xen., Plut., sqq.; Sept.) * ;
ports, (~dXos toil); an adv. used by post-Hom. writ. in-
discriminately with poycs ; a. with difficulty, hardly,
(cf. Sap. ix. 16, where pera mévov corresponds to it in the
parallel member) : [Lk. ix. 39 Tr mrg. WH (al. poys, q.
v.)]; Acts xiv. 18; xxvii. 7sq.16; 1 Pet. iv. 18. b.
not easily, i. e. scarcely, very rarely: Ro. v. 7.* .
Modéx, 6, (Hebr. 79%, 035490, also D391; cf. Gesenius,
Thes. ii. p. 794 sq-), indecl., Moloch, name of the idol-
god of the Ammonites, to which human victims, particu-
larly young children, were offered in sacrifice. Ac-
cording to the description in the Jalkut ([Rashi (vulg.
Jarchi) ] on Jer. vii. [31 ]), its image was a hollow brazen
figure, with the head of an ox, and outstretched human
AAT
jLovoyevns
arms. It was heated red-hot by fire from within, and the
little ones placed in its arms to be slowly burned, while
to prevent their parents from hearing their dying cries
the sacrificing-priests beat drums (see yéevva): Acts vii.
43 fr. Am. v. 26 Sept., where Hebr. 03390, which ought
to have been translated Bacwhéws ipar, i. e. of your idol.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Moloch; J. G. Miiller in Herzog
ix. 714 sq.; Merz in Schenkel v. 194 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v.
Molech, Moloch; W. Robertson Smith in Encyc. Brit. ed.
9, s. v.; Baudissin, Jahve et Moloch etc. and esp. in
Herzog 2 vol. x. 168-178].*
podtve : 1 aor. act. gudAuva; Pass. pres. poddvvouar; 1
aor. eyoAvvOnv; fr. Arstph. down; to pollute, stain, con-
taminate, defile; in the N. T. used only in symbolic and
fig. discourse : odk éudAvvay rd ivdria abréy, of those who
have kept themselves pure from the defilement of sin,
Rev. iii. 4 (cf. Zech. iii. 3 Sq-) 5 pera yuvaikdy ovK épo-
AvvOnoay, who have not soiled themselves by fornication
and adultery, Rev. xiv. 4; 9 cuveidnots podvverat, of a
conscience reproached (defiled) by sin, 1 Co. viii. 7 (in-
explebili quodam laedendi proposito conscientiam pol-
luebat, Amm. Marcell. 15, 2; opp. to xaOapa cvveidnors,
1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 3; poddvew thy Woyny, Sir. xxi.
28; but see puaiva, 2). [SYN. see praiva, fin.]*
porvapds, -0d, 6, (uodivw), defilement (Vulg. inquina-
mentum); an action by which anything is defiled: with
gen. of the thing defiled, capkos kai mvevparos, 2 Co. vii.
1. (Jer. xxiii. 15; 1 Esdr. viii. 80; 2 Macc. v. 27; Plut.
mor. p. 779 c.; [Joseph.c. Ap. 1, 32, 2; 2, 24,5; ete.];
often in eccl. writ.) *
Honht, -js, 7, (uéppopuar), blame: exew poupny mpéds
twa, to have matter of complaint against any one, Col.
iii. 13. (Pind., Trage., al.) *
pov, -As, 7, (uévo), [fr. Hdt. down], a staying, abiding,
dwelling, abode: Jn. xiv. 2; pony moeiv (L T Tr WH
movetoOat, as in Thue. 1, 131; Joseph. antt. 8,13, 7; 13,
2,1), to make an (one’s) abode, mapa teu metaph. of God
and Christ by their power and spirit exerting a most
blessed influence on the souls of believers, Jn. xiv. 23;
see moto, 1 c.*
povoyevtjs, -€s, (udvos and yevos), (Cic. wnigena; Vulg.
[in Lk. wnicus, elsewh.] and in eccl. writ. unigenitus),
single of its kind, only, [A.V. only-begotten] ; used of only
sons or daughters (viewed in relation to their parents),
Hes. theog. 426, 448; Hat. 7, 221; Plat. Critias 113 d.;
Joseph. antt. 1, 138,1; 2, 7,4; povoyevés rexvov rarpi,
Aeschyl. Ag. 898. Soin the Scriptures: Heb. xi. 17;
povoyern eival ti (to be one’s only son or daughter), Judg.
xi. 84; Tob. iii. 15; Lk. vii. 12; viii. 42; ix. 38; [cf.
Westcott on Epp. of Jn. p. 162 sqq.]. Hence the ex-
pression 6 povoy. vids rod Geod and vids rod Oeod 6 povoy.,
Jn. iii. 16, 18; i. 18 [see below]; 1 Jn. iv. 9; povoyeras
mapa marpos, Jn. i. 14 [some take this generally, owing to
the omission of the art. (ef. Green p. 48 sq.)], used of
Christ, denotes the only son of God or one who in the sense
in which he himself is the son of God has no brethren.
He is so spoken of by John not because 6 Adyos which
was evoapkweis in him was eternally generated by God
wovos
the Father (the orthodox interpretation), or came forth
from the being of God just before the beginning of the
world (Subordinationism), but because by the incarna-
tion (évedpxwots) of the Adyos in him he is of nature
or essentially Son of God, and so in a very different
sense from that in which men are made by him réxva rov
cod (Jn. i. 13). For since in the writings of John the
title 6 vids rov Oeod is given only tothe historic Christ
so called, neither the Logos alone, nor Jesus alone,
but 6 Adyos 6 evoapxwGeis or Jesus through the Adyos
united with God, is 6 povoy. vids rov Geod. ‘The reading
povoyeyns eds (without the article before povoy.) in Jn.
i. 18, — which is supported by no inconsiderable weight
of ancient testimony, received into the text by Tregelles,
and Westcott and Hort, defended with much learning
by Dr. Hort (“On povoyeys Oeds in Scripture and Tra-
dition” in his “Two Dissertations’? Camb. and Lond.
1876), and seems not improbable to Harnack (in the
Theol. Lit.-Zeit. for 1876, p. 541 sqq.) [and Weiss (in
Meyer 6te Aufl. ad loc.) ], but is foreign to John’s mode
of thought and speech (iii. 16,18; 1 Jn. iv. 9), dissonant
and harsh, — appears to owe its origin to a dogmatic zeal
which broke out soon after the early days of the church ;
[see articles on the reading by Prof. Abbot in the Bib.
Sacer. for Oct. 1861 and in the Unitarian Rev. for June
1875, (in the latter copious reff. to other discussions of
the same passage are given); see also Prof. Drummond
in the Theol. Rev. for Oct. 1871]. Further, see Grimm,
Exet. Hdbch. on Sap. p. 152 sq.; [Westcott u. s.].*
p-6vos, -7,-ov, Sept. chiefly for 129, [fr.Hom.down]; 1.
an adjective, alone (without a companion); a. with
verbs: etvas, evpioxeoOat, katadeimeo Out, etc., Mt. xiv. 23 ;
Mk. vi. 47; Lk. ix. 36; Jn. viii. 9; 1 Th. iii. 1; added to
the pronouns é¢ya, avros, ov, etc.: Mt. xviii. 15; Mk. ix.
2; Lk. xxiv. 18; Ro. xi. 3; xvi. 4, ete. b. it is joined
with its noun to other verbs also, so that what is predi-
cated may be declared to apply to some one person alone
{cf. W. 131 (124) note]: Mt.iv. 10; Lk. iv. 8; xxiv.
12 [Tom. L Tr br. WH reject the vs.]; Jn. vi. 22; Heb.
ix. 7; 2 Tim.iv. 11; with a neg. foll. by dddd, Mt. iv. 4.
6 povos Geos, he who alone is God: Jn. v.44; xvii. 3; Ro.
xvi. 27; 6 povos Seamdrns, Jude 4. ovk ... ef pu) povos:
Mt. xii. 4; xvii. 8; xxiv. 36; Lk. vi. 4; ovdeis... ef py
povos, Phil. iv. 15. i. q. forsaken, destitute of help, Lk.
x. 40; Jn. viii. 16; xvi. 32, (Sap. x. 1). 2. Neut.
pdvov as adv., alone, only, merely : added to the obj., Mt.
v.47; x.42; Acts xviii. 25; Gal. iii. 2; to the gen. Ro.
ii. 29 [here WH mrg. pdver]; referring to an action ex-
pressed by a verb, Mt. ix. 21; xiv. 36; Mk. v. 36; Lk.
viii. 50; Acts viii. 16; 1 Co. xv.19; Gal. i. 23; ii. 10.
povov pn, Gal. v.13; ob (ur) pdvov, Gal. iv.18; Jas. i. 22;
ii. 24; foll. by adda, Acts xix. 26 [L dda kat; cf. W. 498
(464); B. 370 (317)]; by ddAd woAA@ paddoy, Phil. ii.
12; by dAdd kai, Mt. xxi. 21; Jn. v. 18; xi. 52; xii. 9;
xiii. 9; xvii. 20; Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. (see as above, esp.
B.)]; xxi. 13; xxvi. 29; xxvii.10; Ro. i. 32; iv. 12,16,
418
|
poppow
23; ix.10; 2 Co. vii. 7; viii. 19; Phil. ii. 27 [here od dé
povoy etc.]; 1 Tim. v.13; [2 Tim. iv. 8. «ard udvas (sc.
xepas), see karapudvas |.
pov-6b0adpos, -ov, (udvos, épOadpos), (Vulg. luscus, Mk.
ix. 47), deprived of one eye, having one eye: Mt. xviii. 9;
Mk. ix. 47. (Hdt., Apollod., Strab., Diog. Laért., al. ;
[Lob. ad Phryn. p. 136: Bekk. Anecd. i. 280; Ruther-
ford, New Phryn. p. 209; W. 24].) *
povew, -@: (udvos); fr. Hom. down; to make single or
solitary; to leave alone, forsake: pf. pass. ptep. xjpa
pepovapern, i. e. without children, 1 Tim. v. 5, cf. 4.*
popoht, -7s, 7, [fr. root signifying ‘to lay hold of’, ‘seize’
(ef. Germ. Fassung); Fick, Pt.i. p.174; Vanicek p. 719],
fr. Hom. down, the form by which a person or thing strikes
the vision ; the external appearance: children are said to
reflect uyijs te kal poppijs duotdrnra (of their parents),
4 Mace. xv. 3 (4); éhavepwOn év érépa poppy, Mk. xvi. 12;
ev poppy Geovd trdpywy, Phil. ii. 6; poppyv SovdAov AaBav,
ibid. 7; this whole passage (as I have shown more
fully in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 33
sqq-, with which compare the different view given by
Holsten in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 449
sqq-) is to be explained as follows: who, although (for-
merly when he was Adyos doapxos) he bore the form (in
which he appeared to the inhabitants of heaven) of God
(the sovereign, opp. to popd. Sovdov), yet did not think
that this equality with God was to be eagerly clung to or re-
tained (see dpmaypés, 2), but emptied himself of it (see
xevdw, 1) so as to assume the form of a servant, in that he
became like unto men (for angels also are SovAoe rov
Geov, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 8 sq.) and was found in fashion
as aman. (God pever det anAds ev TH avrov popd7, Plat.
de rep. 2 p. 381 c., and it is denied that God gavraerOat
Gore ev GAdats id€ais .. . kal GAAdTTovTa TO avdTod Eidos
eis ToAAds poppas... kal ths €avTod ideas ékBaiverv, p.
380 d.; jxuor’ dv moAdas pophas toyor 6 Oeds, p. 381 b.;
évds O@paros ovciav petacxnuaricew kal petaxapattery eis
modutpérovs uoppas, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 11; od yap
dorep TO voutoua mapdkoppua Kai Geov popdy yiveras, ibid.
§ 14 fin.; God epyots pev Kai yapiow evapyns Kat tavtds
ovtwocovr pavepawtepos, poppiy dé kal peyeOos july apave-
oraros, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 22, 2.)*
[Syx. nopoh, oxifima: acc. to Bp. Lghtft. (see the
thorough discussion in his ‘ Detached Note’ on Phil. ii.) and
Trench (N. T. Syn. § Ixx.), wopph form differs from oxjjpa
Sigure, shape, fashion, as that which is intrinsic and essential,
from that which is outward and accidental. So inthe main
Bengel, Philippi, al., on Ro. xii. 2; but the distinction is re-
jected by many; see Meyer and esp. Fritzsche in loc. Yet
the last-named commentator makes poppy} SovAov in Phil. |. c.
relate to the complete form, or nature, of a servant; and
oxijua to the external form, or human body.]
Hoppde, -@: 1 aor pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. poppod) ;
(cf. poppy, init.]; to form: in fig. discourse dypis [T Tr
WH péxpus, q. V. 1 a.] ob poppwby Xpiords ev dpi, i.e.
literally, until a mind and life in complete harmony with
the mind and life of Christ shall have been formed in
23; 2 Co. vii. 7, etc.; od pdvov dé, AAG Kai: Acts xix. 27; you, Gal.iv.19. (Arat. phaen. 375; Anth. 1, 33,1; Sept.
and often by Paul [ef. W. 583 (543)], Ro. v. 3,11; viii. | Is. xliv. 18.) [Comp.: pera-, ovp-pophée. | *
smopdwols
pophwors, -ews, 7, (uoppdw) ; 1. a forming, shap-
ag: tev Sevdpwv, Theophr. c. pl 3, 7, 4. 2. form;
i.e. a. the mere form, semblance: edtceBeias, 2 Tim.
Hi. 5. b. the form befitting the thing or truly express-
ing the fact, the very form: ris yrdceas x. Ths adnOeias,
Ro. ii. 20.*
HorXo-Tovew, -: 1 aor. euocyorotnca; (pdoxos and
mrovew, | cf. W. 26]) ; to make (an image of) acalf: Acts
vii. 41, for which Ex. xxxii. 4 énoinoe pooyov. (Eccles.
writ.) *
pooxos, -ov, 6, [cf. Schmidt ch. 76, 12; Curtius p.
593 |; 1. ateniler, juicy, shoot; a sprout, of a plant
or tree. 2. 6,7, pw. offspring ; a. of men [ (cf. fig.
Eng. scion) J, a boy, a girl, esp. if fresh and delicate. _b.
of animals, a young one. 3. acalf,a bullock, a heifer;
so everywhere in the Bible, and always masc.: Lk. xv.
23, 27, 30; Heb. ix. 12,19; Rev. iv. 7; (Sept. chiefly
for 15 a bull, esp. a young bull; then for 4p3 cattle; for
iv an ox or a cow; also for 53) a calf). [(Eur. on.)]*
povorkds, -7), -dv, (uovoa [music, eloquence, ete.]); freq.
in Grk. writ.; prop. devoted to and skilled in the arts
sacred to the muses; accomplished in the liberal arts;
specifically, skilled un music ; playing on musical instru-
ments; so Rev. xvili. 22 [R. V. minstrels ].*
p6x 80s, -ov, 6, hard and difficult labor, toil, travail;
hardship, distress: 2 Co. xi. 27; 1 Th. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii. 8;
see kémos, 3b. (Hes. scut. 306; Pind., Trage., Xen., al.;
Sept. chiefly for 7p.) [S¥N. see xdzos, fin.] *
pues, -ov, 6, (enclosed within, fr. pvw to close, shut),
marrow: Heb. iv. 12. (From Hom. down; Sept. Job
30,015 02) Yd
préw, -@: pf. pass. weydyuac, (fr. uv to close, shut
((cf. Lat. mutus); Curtius § 478]) ; a. to initiate
into the mysteries (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.; 3 Mace.
ii. 30). b. univ. to teach fully, instruct; to accustom
ene to a thing; to give one an intimate acquaintance with
a thing: év mavti x. év mace peuvnuwat, to every condition
and to all the several circumstances of life have I be-
come wonted; I have been so disciplined by experience
that whatsoever be my lot I can endure, Phil. iv. 12;
[but others, instead of connecting ¢v mari etc. here (as
object) with pep. (a constr. apparently without prece-
dent; yet cf. Liinemann in W. § 28, 1) and taking the
infinitives that follow as explanatory of the ev mavti
etc., regard the latter phrase as stating the sphere
(see ras, II. 2 a.) and the infinitives as epexegetic (W.
§ 44, 1): in everything and in all things have I learned
the secret both to be filled etc. ].*
p2.500s, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down; 1. a speech, word,
saying. 2. a narrative, story; a. a true narra-
tive. b. a fiction, a fable; univ. an invention, false-
hood: 2 Pet. i. 16; the fictions of the Jewish theoso-
phists and Gnostics, esp. concerning the emanations and
orders of the zons, are cailed uwido. [A. V. fables] in
1 Tim. i. 4; iv. 7; 2 Tim.iv.4; Tit.i.14. (Cf. Trench
§ xc., and reff. s. v. -yeveadoyia. | *
puxdopar, par; (fr. wu or pd, the sound which a cow
{Lat. mugio]), to low, hellow, prop. of horned
419
ppov
cattle (Hom., Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.); to roar, of a
lion, Rev. x. 3.*
puKTnpite: (wvernp the nose); pres. pass. 3 pers. sing.
puktnpiCerat; prop. to turn up the nose or sneer at; to
mock, deride: tid, pass. od purrnpi¢era, does not suffer
himself to be mocked, Gal. vi. 7. (For ay, Job xxii.
UB esp lkodbad(beoc) Ws dieos (6 V2, Prov.i.30; 713,
Prov. xv. 20; [cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 39, 1(and Harnack’s
note)]. 1 Mace. vii. 34; [1 Esdr. i. 49]; Sext. Emp.
ady. math. i. 217 [p. 648, 11 ed. Bekk.].) [Comp.: ék-
puxtnpico. | *
pudikds, -7, -dv, (ud a mill), belonging to a mill: Mk.
ix. 42 RG; Lk. xvii. 2 LT Tr WH.*
pidAwos, -7, -ov; 1. made of mill-stones: Boeckh,
Inserr. ii. p. 784, no. 3371, 4. 2. i. q. wudskds (see
the preceding word): Rev. xviii. 21 L WH.*
pos, -ov, 6, [(Lat. mola; Eng. mill, meal)]; 1.
a mill-stone [(Anthol. ete.)]: Rev. xviii. 21 [L WH yw
Awos, q. V-]3 pvdos dvexds, Mt. xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 LT
Tr WH; Lk. xvii. 2 Rec.; a large mill consisted of two
stones, an upper and an under one; the “nether” stone
was stationary, but the upper one was turned by an ass,
whence the name p. évtxés. 2. equiv. to wun, a mill
[(Diod., Strab., Plut.)]: Mt. xxiv.41 LT Tr WH: govq
pvdov, the noise made by a mill, Rev. xviii. 22.*
pudrav [not paroxytone; see Chandler § 596 cf. § 584],
-dvos, 6, place where a mill runs; mill-house: Mt. xxiv.
41 RG. (Kur., Thuc., Dem., Aristot., al.) *
Mipa (LT Tr WH Muppa (Tr -pp- see P, p) [ef. Tdf.
on Acts as below and WH. App. p. 160]), -wv, ra, Myra,
a city on the coast [or rather, some two miles and a half
(20 stadia) distant from it] of Lycia, a maritime region
of Asia Minor between Caria and Pamphylia [B. D.s. v.
Myra; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 186 sq.]: Acts xxvii. 5.*
pupids, -ados, n, (uupios), [fr. Hdt. down], Sept. for
7227 and {37; a. ten thousand: Acts xix. 19 (on
which pass. see dpyvptoy, 3 fin.). b. plur. with gen.
i. q. an mnumerable multitude, an unlimited number, ((like
our myriads], the Lat. sexcenti, Germ. Tausend): Lk.
xii. 1; Acts xxi. 20; Rev. v. 11 [not Rect ]; ix. 16 [here
LT dcopupiddes, q. v.]; used simply, of innumerable hosts
of angels: Heb. xii. 22 [here GL Tr put a comma after
pupiasw]; Jude 14; Deut. xxxiii. 2; Dan, vii. 10.*
nup(to: 1 aor. inf. pupicar; (pvpov); fr. Hdt. down;
to anoint: Mk. xiv. 8.*
puplos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down]; 1. imnumer-
able, countless, [A. V. ten thousand]: 1 Co. iv. 15; xiv.
19. 2. with the accent drawn back (cf. Brim. Ausf.
Sprechl. § 70 Anm. 15, vol. i. 278; Passow s. v. fin.; [L.
and S. s. v. III.]), wupror, -cat, -ca, ten thousand: Mt. xviii.
24.*
pepov, -ov, Td, (the grammarians derive it fr. pipw to
flow, accordingly a flowing juice, trickling sap; but prob.
more correct to regard it as an oriental word akin to
poppa, Hebr. 179, 19; [Fick (i. 836) connects it with r.
smar ‘to smear’, with which Vaniéek 1198 sq. associates
apupva, pupros, etc.; cf. Curtius p. 714]), ointment: Mt.
xxvi. 7, 9 Rec., 12; Mk. xiv. 3-5; Lk. vii. 37 sq.; xxiii.
Mucia
56; Jn. xi. 2; xii. 3,5; Rev. xviii. 13; distinguished fr.
Zdatov [q. v. and see T’rench, Syn. § xxxviii.], Lk. vii. 46.
({From Aeschyl., Hdt. down]; Sept. for ;pw fat, oil,
Prov. xxvii. 9; for 210 WY, Ps. cxxxil. (exxxiii.) 2.) *
Mvota, -as, 7, Mysia, a province of Asia Minor on the
shore of the Augean Sea, between Lydia and the Pro-
pontis; it had among its cities Pergamum, Troas, and
Assos: Acts xvi. 7 sq.*
puoTy pov, -0v, 70, (pvorns [one initiated ; fr. pew,
q: v-]), in class. Grk. a hidden thing, secret, mystery:
puaornpidy cov pi) kareirns TH Pidg, Menand.; plur. gen-
erally mysteries, religious secrets, confided only to the
initiated and not to be communicated by them to ordi-
nary mortals; [cf. K. F. Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter-
thiimer der Griechen, § 32]. In the Scriptures i
a hidden or secret thing, not obvious to the understanding :
1 Co. xiii. 2; xiv. 2; (of the secret rites of the Gentiles,
Sap. xiv. 15, 23). 2. a hidden purpose or counsel ;
secret will: of men, tod Baowdéws, Tob. xii. 7,113; rhs
Bovdjs avtod, Judith ii. 2; of God: puarnpra Geod, the
secret counsels which govern God in dealing with the
righteous, which are hidden from ungodly and wicked
men but plain to the godly, Sap. ii. 22. In the N. T.,
God’s plan of providing salvation for men through
Christ, which was once hidden but now is revealed:
Ro. xvi. 25; 1 Co. ii. 7 (on this see év, I. 5 f.); Eph. iii.
9; Col. i. 26 sq.; with rod GeAnuaros advrod added, Eph.
i. 9; rov Oeov, which God formed, Col. ii. 2; [1 Co. ii. 1
WH txt.]; rod Xpucrod, respecting Christ, Col. iv. 3; rod
evayyeAiov, which is contained and announced in the
gospel, Eph. vi. 19; éerehéoOn 1d port. Tod Geod, said of
the consummation of this purpose, to be looked for when
Christ returns, Rev. x. 7; ra p. tis Baoweias r&v ovp. or
tov Geov, the secret purposes relative to the kingdom of
God, Mt. xiii. 11; Mk. iv.11; Lk. viii. 10; used of cer-
tain single events decreed by God having reference to
his kingdom or the salvation of men, Ro. xi. 25; 1 Co.
xv. 51; of God’s purpose to bless the Gentiles also with
salvation through Christ [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 26],
Eph. iii. 3 cf. 5; with rod Xpecrod added, ibid. vs. 4; oiko-
vdpor pvotypiav Geod, the stewards of God’s mysteries,
i.e. those intrusted with the announcement of God’s
secret purposes to men, 1 Co. iv. 1; used generally, of
Christian truth as hidden from ungodly men: with the
addition of ris micrews, tis edceBelas, which faith and
godliness embrace and keep, 1 Tim. iii. 9, 16; 7d pur.
tis dvouias the mystery of lawlessness, the secret pur-
pose formed by lawlessness, seems to be a tacit antithesis
to God’s saving purpose, 2 Th. ii. 7. 3. Like 19
and 7jD in rabbinic writers, it denotes the mystic or
hidden sense: of an O. T. saying, Eph. v. 32; of a
name, Rev. xvii. 5; of an image or form seen in a vision,
Rev. i. 20; xvii. 5; of a dream, Dan. (Theodot.) ii. 18 sq.
27-30, where the Sept. so render t}. (The Vulg. trans-
lates the word sacramentum in Dan. ii. TSishive onLob,
xii. 7; Sap. ii. 22; Eph. i.9; iii. 3,9; v.32; 1 Tim. iii.
16; Rev.i. 20.) [On the distinctive N. T. use of the
word cf. Campbell, Dissertations on the Gospels. diss. ix.
420
Moons
pt. i.; Kendrick in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Mystery; Bp.
Lghtft. on Col. i. 26.]*
pr-wrdto; (www, and this fr. pew rovs Sas to shut
the eyes); to see dimly, see only what is near: 2 Pet. i. 9
[some (cf. R. V.mrg.) would make it mean here closing
the eyes; cf. our Eng. blink]. (Aristot. problem. 31,
16, 25.) *
por, -wros, 6, (Hesych. tpadpa kal 6 éx mAnyis
aiyaradns témos 4} Kai Ta eSepxdpeva Tv mAnyoy Udara),
a bruise, wale, wound that trickles with blood: 1 Pet. ii.
24 fr. Is. lili. 5 [where A. V. stripes]. (Gen. iv. 23; Ex.
xxi. 25; Is.i.6. Aristot., Plut., Anthol., al.) *
popdopar, -auar: 1 aor. mid. éuwpnodynv; 1 aor. pass.
éuopnOnv; (uGpos, q: v-); fr. Hom. down; to blame, find
fault with, mock at: 2 Co. vi. 3; viii. 20. (Prov. ix. 7;
Sap. x. 14.) *
papos, -ov, 6, [perh. akin to piw, Curtius § 478; cf.
Vanitek p. 732], blemish, blot, disgrace; 1. cen
sure. 2. insult: of men who are a disgrace to a
society, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [A. V. blemishes]. (From Hom.
down; Sept. for D1, of bodily defects and blemishes,
Lev. xxi. 16 sqq.; Deut. xv. 21; Cant. iv. 7; Dan. i. 4;
of a mental defect, fault, Sir. xx. 24 (23).) *
popatve: 1 aor. eua@pava; 1 aor. pass. éuopdvOnv;
(pepés) ; 1. in class. Grk. to be foolish, to act fool-
ishly. 2. in bibl. Grk. a. to make foolish: pass.
Ro. i. 22 (Is. xix. 11; Jer. x.14; 2S. xxiv. 10); i. q. to
prove a person or thing to be foolish: thv copiav rod
kéapov, 1 Co. i. 20 (tiv BovAnv adray, Is. xliv. 25). b.
to make flat and tasteless: pass. of salt that has lost its
strength and flavor, Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34.*
popla, -as, 7, (wwpes), first in Hdt. 1, 146 [Soph., al.],
foolishness: 1 Co. i. 18, 21, 23; ii. 14; iii. 19, (Sir. xx.
31).*
popodoyla, -as, 7, (uapodrdyos), (stultiloquium, Plaut.,
Vulg.), foolish talking: Eph.v.4. (Aristot. h. a. 1,11;
Plut. mor. p.504b.) [Cf Trench, N. T. Syn. § xxxiv.]*
pwpds, -d, -dv, [on the accent cf. W. 52 (51); Chandler
§§ 404, 405], foolish: with rupdos, Mt. xxiii. 17, 19 [here
T Tr WH txt. om. Lbr. pwp.]; 7d popdv rod Geod, an act
or appointment of God deemed foolish by men, 1 Co. i.
25; i. q. without learning or erudition, 1 Co. i. 27; iii.
18; iv. 10; imprudent, without forethought or wisdom,
Mt. vii. 26; xxiii. 17,19 [see above]; xxv. 2 sq. 8; iq.
empty, useless, (yrnoets, 2 Tim. ii. 23; Tit. iii. 9; in
imitation of the Hebr. 53) (cf. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 1; Job
ii. 10) i. q. impious, godless, (because such a man neglects
and despises what relates to salvation), Mt. v. 22; [some
take the word here as a Hebr. term (Mj rebel) ex-
pressive of condemnation; cf. Num. xx. 10; Ps. Ixviii.
8; but see the Syriac; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad
loc.; Levy, Neuhebriisch. u. Chald. Worterbuch s. v.
DID]. (Sept. for Pay Deut. xxxii. 6; Is. xxxii. 5 sq.;
for 9°03, Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 8. [Aeschyl., Soph., al.])*
Mocs (constantly so in the text. Rec. [in Strabo
(16, 2, 35 ed. Meineke); Dan. ix. 10, 11, Sept.], and in
Philo [cf. his “ Buch v. d. Weltschopf.” ed. Miiller p. 117
(but Richter in his ed. has adopted Moitojs)], after the
Moo7s
Hebr. form nwn, which in Ex. ii. 10 is derived fr. nw to
draw out), and Mwio 4s (soin the Sept. [see Tdf.’s
4th ed. Proleg. p. xlii.], Josephus [in Josephus the”
readings vary; in the Antiquities he still adheres to the
classic form (Meojjs), which moreover is the common
form in his writings,” Miiller’s note on Joseph. ¢. Ap. 1,
31,4. (Here, again, recent editors, as Bekker, adopt
Movo7s uniformly.) On the fluctuation of Mss. ef. Otto’s
note on Justin Mart. apol. i. § 32 init.], and in the N. T.
ed. Tdf.;— a word which signifies in Egyptian water-
saved, i. e. ‘saved from water’; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. vol.
il. p. 313; and esp. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 824; Knobel
on Ex. ii. 10; [but its etymol. is still in dispute; many
recent Egyptologists connect it with mesu i. e. child’;
on the various interpretations of the name cf. Miiller on
Joseph. c. Ap.|.c.; Stanley in B.D. s.v. Moses; Schenkel
in his BL. iv. 240 sq.]. From the remarks of Fritzsche,
Gesenius, etc., it is evident also that the word is a trisyl-
lable, and hence should not be written Mavojs as it is
by L Tr WH, for ov is a diphthong, as is plain from
€wutov, twvtd, Tonic for éavrod, tavrd; [cf. Lipsius,
[N, v: » (epeanvorixor), cf. W. §5,1b.; B.9 (8); Tdf.
Proleg. p. 97 sq.; WH. App. p. 146 sq.; Thiersch, De Pentat.
vers. Alex. p. 84 sq.; Scrivener, Plain Introd. ete. ch. viii.
§ 4; Collation of Cod. Sin. p. liv.; see s. vv. 540, efxoor, mas.
Its omission by the recent editors in the case of verbs (esp.
in 3 pers. sing.) is rare. In WH, for instance, (where “the
omissions are all deliberate and founded on evidence ”) it is
wanting in the case of éor: five times only (Mt. vi. 25; Jn.
vi. 55 bis; Acts xviii. 10; Gal. iv. 2,— apparently without
principle) ; in Tdf. never; see esp. Tdf.u.s. In the dat. plur.
of the 3d decl. the Mss. vary; see esp. Zdf. Proleg. p. 98 and
WH. App. p.146sq. On vy appended to accus. sing. in a or 7
(4) see pony. On the neglect of assimilation, particularly, in
compounds with ody and év, see those prepp. and T'df. Pro-
leg. p. 73 sq.; WH. App. p. 149; cf. B. 8; W.48. On the
interchange of vy and vv in such words as dworrévyw (daro-
nrévw), exxbyvw (exxbvw), 2varos (€vvaros), everhrovra (évve-
vhcovra), eveds (évveds), "lwdvyns (*Iwdyns), and the like, see
the several words. ]
Naaccdv, (jv) [1. e. diviner ’, ‘enchanter’]), 6, in-
decl., Naasson [or Naashon, or (best) Nahshon], a man
mentioned in (Ex. vi. 23; Num. i. 7; Ruth iv. 20) Mt.
i. 4 and Lk. iii. 32.*
Nayyat, (fr. 41) to shine), 6, indecl., (Vulg. [Naggae,
and (so A. V.)] Nagge), Naggai, one of Christ’s ances-
tors: Lk. iii. 25.*
Natapér [(so Rec. everywhere; Lchm. also in Mk.
i.9; Lk. ii. 39,51; iv.16; Jn.i.45 (46) sq.; Tdf. in Mk.
421
Nalapér
Gramm. Untersuch. p. 140]; add, W. p. 44; [B. 19
(17)]; Ewald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel ed. 3 jo Cu)
note), -€es, 6, Moses, (Itala and Vulg. Moyses), the
famous leader and legislator of the Israelites in their
migration from Egypt to Palestine. As respects its de-
clension, everywhere in the N. T. the gen. ends in -ées
(as if from the nominative Moiceds), in Sept. -j, as Num.
iv. 41, 45, 49, etc. dat. -7 (as in Sept., cf. Ex. v. 20;
xii. 28; xxiv. 1; Lev. viii. 21, etc.) and -et (for the
Mss. and accordingly the editors vary between the
two [but TWH - only in Acts vii. 44 (influenced by
the Sept. ?), Tr in Acts l. c. and Mk. ix. 4, 5,; L in Acts
lc. and Ro. ix. 15 txt.; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 119; WH.
App. p. 158]), Mt. xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 4; Jn. v. 46; ix.
29; Acts vii. 44; Ro. ix. 15; 2 Tim. iii. 8. ace. -fy (as
in Sept.), Acts vi. 11; vii. 35; 1 Co. x. 2; Heb. iii. 3;
once -éa, Lk. xvi. 29; cf. [Tdf. and WH. u.s.]; W.§ 10,
1; B.u.s.; [Etym. Magn. 597, 8]. By meton. i. q. the
books of Moses: Lk. xvi. 29; xxiv. 27; Acts xv. 213
2 Co. iii. 15.
N
1.9; Jn.i. 45 (46) sq.; Trtxt.in Lk. i. 263 ii. 4; iv.16,
Jn. i. 45 (46) sq.; Trmrg.in Mk. i. 9; Lk. ii. 39, 51;
and WH everywhere except in four pass. soon to be
mentioned), Natapé@ (so Rec.** ten times, Rec. six
times, T and Tr except in the pass. already given or about
to begiven; Lin Mt. ii. 23; xxi.11(so WH here); Lk.i.
26; Acts x. 38 (so WH here)), Nafapéé@ (L in Mt. iv.
13 and Lk. ii. 4, after cod. A but with “little other at-
testation” (Hort)), Natapé (Mt.iv.13 T Tr WH; Lk.
iv. 16 TWH)], 4, indecl., (and ra Nagapa, Orig. and Jul.
African. in Euseb. h. e. 1, 7,143 cf. Keim, Jesu von Naz.
i. p. 319 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. p. 16] and ii. p. 421 sq. [Eng.
trans. iv. p. 108], who thinks Nazara preferable to the
other forms [but see WH. App. p. 160°; Tdf. Proleg. p.
120; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. § 5; Alford, Greek Test.
vol. i. Proleg. p. 97]), Nazareth, a town of lower Galilee,
mentioned neither in the O. T., nor by Josephus, nor in
the Talmud (unlessit is to be recognized in the appellation
1¥2 13, given there to Jesus Christ). It was built upon
a hill, in a very lovely region (cf. Renan, Vie de Jésus,
14% 6d. p. 27 sq. [Wilbour’s trans. (N. Y. 1865) p. 69
sq-; see also Robinson, Researches, etc. ii. 336 sq.]), and
was distant from Jerusalem a three days’ journey, from
Tiberias eight hours [or less]; it was the home of J esus
(Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi. 1); its present name is en Naz
rah, a town of from five to six thousand inhabitants (cf.
Nafapnvos
Baedeker, Palestine and Syria, p. 359): Mt. 11,023): iv.
13; xxi. 11; Mk. i. 9; Lk. i. 26; ii. 4, 39, 51; iv. 16;
Jn. i, 45 (46) sq.; Acts x. 39. As respects the He
brew form of the name, it is disputed whether it was
7¥) ‘a sprout’, ‘shoot ’, (so, besides others, Hengstenberg,
Christol. des A. T. ii. 124 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. 106 sq.]; but
cf. Gieseler in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1831, p. 588 sq.), or
78) ‘ protectress’, ‘guard’, (cf. 2 K. xvii. 9; so Keim
u. s.) or NX) ‘sentinel’ (so Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. Es
Luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 401), or NS) ‘ watch-tower’
(so Ewald in the Gotting. gelehrt. Anzeigen for 1867,
p- 1602 sq.). For a further account of the town cf. Rob-
inson, as above, pp. 333-343; Tobler, Nazareth in Palas-
tina. Berl. 1868; [Hackett in B. D. s. v. Nazareth].*
Natapnves, -0d, 6, a Nazarene, of Nazareth, sprung from
Nazareth, a patrial name applied by the Jews to Jesus,
because he had lived at Nazareth with his parents from
his birth until he made his public appearance: Mk. i. 24;
xiv. 67; xvi. 6; Lk. iv. 34; [xxiv. 19 L mrg. T Tr txt.
WH]; and L T Tr WH in Mk. x. 47.*
Natwpaitos, -ov, 6, i. gq. Na¢apnvds, q. v.; Jesus is so
called in Mt. ii. 23 [cf. B. D. s. v. Nazarene; Bleek,
Synopt. Evang. ad loc.]; xxvi. 71; Mk. x. 47 RG; Lk.
xviii. 37; xxiv.19 RG Ltxt. Trmrg. ; Jn. xviii. 5, 7; xix.
19; Actsii. 22; iii. 6; iv.10; vi. 14; [ix.5.L br.]; xxii.
8; xxvi. 9. of Na¢wpaio [ A. V. the Nazarenes], followers
of Incois 6 Nafwpaios, was a name given to the Christians
by the Jews, Acts xxiv. 5.*
NaQdv or (so L mrg. T WH) Naédy, 6, ({1 [‘ given’ se.
of God]}), Nathan: a son of David the king (2 S. v. 14),
Lk. iii. 31.*
Nadavarr, 6, (98102 gift of God), Nathanael, an inti-
mate disciple of Jesus: Jn. i. 45-49 (46-50); xxi. 2.
He is commonly thought to be identical with Bartholo-
mew, because as in Jn. i. 45 (46) he is associated with
Philip, soin Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14 Bartholo-
mew is; Nathanael, on this supposition, was his personal
name, and Bartholomew a title derived from his father
(see BapOodopaios). But in Actsi. 13 Thomas is placed
between Philip and Bartholomew ; [see B D. s. v. Na-
thaniel]. Spdth in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theologie,
1868, pp. 168 sqq. 309 sqq. [again 1880, p. 78 sqq.]
acutely but vainly tries to prove that the name was formed
by the Fourth Evangelist symbolically to designate ‘ the
disciple whom Jesus loved (see "Iwdvyns, 2).*
vat, a particle of assertion or confirmation [akin to
vm; cf. Donaldson, Cratylus § 189], fr. Hom. down, yea,
verily, truly, assuredly, even so: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21;
Philem. 20; Rev. i. 7; xvi. 7; xxii. 20; val, A€yw byiv
xth., Mt. xi. 9; Lk. vii. 263 xi. 515 xii. 5; vai, Neyer TO
mvedpa, Rey. xiv. 13; it is responsive and confirmatory
of the substance of some question or statement: Mt. ix.
28; xiii. 51; xv. 27; xvii. 25; xxi. 16; Mk. vii. 28; Jn.
xi. 27; xxi. 15 sq.; Actes v. 8 (9); xxii. 27; Ro. iii. 29;
a repeated vai, most assuredly, [ A.V. yea, yea], expresses
emphatic assertion, Mt. v. 37; #rw Sudv 7d val vai, let your
vai be vai, i. e. let your allegation be true, Jas. v.12 [B.
163 (142); W. 59 (58)]; edvar or yiverOat vai kai ov, to
422
Naodp
be or show one’s self double-tongued, i. e. faithless, waver:
ing, false, 2 Co. i. 18 sq.; tva map’ épol 7d val val Kai 16 od
ov, that with me should be found both a solemn affirma-
tion and a most emphatic denial, i. e. that I so form my re-
solves as, at the dictate of pleasure or profit, not to carry
them out, ibid. 17[cf. W.460 (429)]; vat év aire yéeyover,
in him what was promised has come to pass, ibid. 19;
erayyeXiat €v a’T@ TO vai sc. yeyovaow, have been fulfilled,
have been confirmed by the event, ibid. 20 [cf. Meyer
ad loc.]. It is a particle of appeal or entreaty, like the
[Eng. yea] (Germ. ja) : with an imperative, vat... wvA-
Aapadvov adrais, Phil. iv. 3 (where Rec. has kai for vai);
vai épxov, Rev. xxii. 20 Rec.; so vai vai, Judith ix. 12.
[A classification of the uses of vai in the N. T. is given
by Ellicott on Phil. iv. 3; cf. Green, ‘Crit. Note’ on Mt.
SZ Oal ee
Nady, see Neepav.
Natv [WH Nai», (cf. I, +)], (8) a pasture; ef. Simonis,
Onomast. N. T. p. 115), 7, Nain, a town of Galilee, situ-
ated at the northern base of Little Hermon; modern
Nein, a petty village inhabited by a very few families,
and not to be confounded with a village of the same name
beyond the Jordan (Joseph. b. j. 4, 9,4): Lk. vii. 11.
[Cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 552 sq.]*
vads, -ov, 6, (vaiw to dwell), Sept. for bet ar used of the
temple at Jerusalem, but only of the sacred edifice
(or sanctuary) itself, consisting of the Holy place and
the Holy of holies (in class. Grk. used of the sanctuary or
cell of a temple, where the image of the go } was placed,
called also dopos, anxos, which is to be distinguished from
70 tepov, the whole temple, the entire consecrated en-
closure; this distinction is observed also in the Bible;
see lepoy, p. 299°): Mt. xxiii. 16 sq. 35; xxvii. 40; Mk.
xiv. 58; xv. 29; Jn. ii. 19sq.; Rev. xi. 2; nor need Mt.
xxvii. 5 be regarded as an exception, provided we sup-
pose that Judas in his desperation entered the Holy place,
which no one but the priests was allowed to enter [ (note
the eis (al. év) of TTrWH)]. with Geov, rod Geod,
added: Mt. xxvi. 61; 1 Co. iii. 17; 2 Co. vi. 16; 2-Th.
ii. 4; Rev. xi. 1; used specifically of the Holy place,
where the priests officiated: Lk. i. 9, 21 sq.; of the Holy
of holies (see katanéracua), Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38;
Lk. xxiii. 45. in the visions of the Revelation used of
the temple of the ‘ New Jerusalem’: Rev. iii. 12; vii. 15;
xi. 19; xiv. 15,17; xv. 5 sq. 8; xvi. 1,17; of any temple
whatever prepared for the true God, Acts vii. 48 Rec.;
xvii. 24. of miniature silver temples modelled after the
temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis (q. v.)] of Ephesus, Acts
xix. 24. 6 Oeds vads airs éotw, takes the place of a tem-
ple in it, Rev. xxi. 22. metaph. of a company of Chris-
tians, a Christian church, es dwelt in by the Spirit of
God: 1 Co. iii. 16; 2 Co. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21; for the same
reason, of the bodies of Christians, 1 Co. vi. 19. of the
body of Christ, 6 vads tod cmparos adrod (epexeget. gen.
[W. 531 (494)]), Jn. ii. 21, and ace. to the Evangelist’s
interpretation in 19 also. [(From Hom. on.)]*
Naovp, (DIN consolation), 6, Nahum, a certain Is
raelite, one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 25.*
vapoos
vapSos, -ov, 7, (a Sanskrit word [ef Fick as in Low
below}; Hebr. 373, Cant. i. 12; iv. 13 sq.); a.
nard, the head or spike of a ieee East Indian plant
belonging to the genus Valeriana, which yields a juice
of delicious odor which the ancients used (either pure
or mixed) in the preparation of a most precious oint-
ment; hence b. nard oil or ointment; so Mk. xiv.
3; Jn. xii. 3. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. Narde; Riictschi
in Herzog x. p. 203; Furrer in Schenkel p. 286 sq. ;
[Léw, Aramiische Pflanzennamen (Leip. 1881), § 316
p- 368 sq.; Royle in Alex.’s Kitto s.v. Nerd; Birdwood
in the ‘ Bible Educator’ ii. 152].*
_ Nadpxurcos, -ov, 6, Narcissus [i. e. ‘daffodil ’], a Roman
mentioned in Ro. xvi. 11, whom many interpreters with-
out good reason suppose to be the noted freedman of the
emperor Claudius (Suet. Claud. 28; Tac. ann. 11, 29 sq.;
12, 57 etc.) [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 175]; in op-
position to this opinion cf. Win. RWB. 8. v.; Riietschi
in Herzog x. 202 sq.; [B. D. s. v.].*
vavayéw, -@: 1 aor. évavaynoa; (fr. vavayds ship-
wrecked ; and this fr. vais, and @yvype to break); freq.
in Grk. writ. from Aeschyl. and Hat. down, to suffer ship-
wreck: prop. 2 Co. xi. 25; metaph. wept ryv miotw (as
respects [A. V. concerning, see mepi, II. b.] the faith),
peirast.a19*
vat-KAnpos, -ov, 6, (vais and xAnpos), fr. Hdt. [and Soph.]
down, a ship-owner, ship-master, i. e. one who hires out his
vessel, or a portion of it, for purposes of transportation:
Acts xxvii. 11.*
vais, acc. vavv, 7, (fr. vdw or véw, to flow, float, swim),
a ship, vessel of considerable size: Acts xxvii.41. (From
Hom. down; Sept. several times for *38 and 7738.) *
vaitns, -ov, 6, a sailor, seaman, mariner: Acts xxvii.
27, 30; Rev. xviii. 17. (From Hom. down.) *
Naxdép, 6,(71M) fr. 19H to burn; [Philo de cong. erud.
grat. § 9 N. épunveverar pords avdravors; al.al.; see B.D.
Am. ed. s. v.]), the indecl. prop. name, Nachor [or (more
com. but less accurately) Nahor] (Gen. xi. 22), of one of
the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 34.*
veavlas, -ov, 6, (fr. vedv, and this fr. véos; cf. peyeoray
[q- v-], €uvdv), fr. Hom. down; Hebr. \yj and 73n3; a
young man: Acts xx. 9; xxiii. 17, and RG in 18 [so here
WH txt.], 22; it is used as in Grk. writ., like the Lat. adu-
lescens and the Hebr. 1y3 (Gen. xli. 12), of men between
twenty-four and forty years of age [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
213; Diog. Laért. 8, 10; other reff. in Steph. Thesaur.
8. VV. veams, veavioxos]: Acts vil. 58.*
veavickos, -ov, 6, (fr. vedv, see veavias; on the ending
-icxos, -icxn, which has dimin. force, as dvOpwmickos,
BaciXicxos, mabickn, etc., cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 443),
fr. Hdt. down; Sept. chiefly for 133 and 1y3; @ young
man, youth: Mt. xix. 20, 22; Mk. xiv. 51°; KVL uk:
vii. 14; Acts ii. 173; [and LT Tr WH in xxiii. 18 (here
WH mrg. only), 22]; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; like ay3 (2S. ii.
14; Gen. xiv. 24, etce.; cf. Germ. Bursche, Knappei. q.
Knabe, [{cf. our colloquial “boys”, “lads”]) used of a
young attendant or servant: so the plur. in Mk. xiv. 51
Rec.: Acts v. 10.*
423
vexpos
NedroAts, -ews, 7, Neapolis, a maritime city of Mace-
donia, on the gulf of Strymon, having a port [ef. Lewin,
St. Paul, i. 203 n.]and colonized by Chaleidians {see B. D.
s.v. Neapolis; ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip., Introd. § iii.] :
Acts xvi. 11 [here Tdf. Néav rékuv, WH Néav Oddw, Tr
Neav rdhw ; cf. B. 74; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 604 sq.]. (Strab.
7 p. 830; Plin, 4, (11) 18.)*
Neeydy and (so L T Tr WH after the Sept. [see WH.
App. p. 159 sq.]) Nawpdy, 6 ({2¥3 pleasantness), Naaman
(so Vulg. [also Neman]), a commander of the Syrian
armies (2 K. v. 1): Lk. iv. 27.*
vexpos, -d, -dv, (akin to the Lat. neco, nex [fr. ar. sige
nifying ‘to disappear’ ete.; cf. Curtius § 93; Fick i. p.
123; Vanitek p. 422 sq.]), Sept. chiefly for nn; dead,
110) 1. prop. a. one that has breathed his last,
lifeless: Mt. xxviii. 4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. vii. 15; Acts v.
10; xx. 9; xxviii. 6; Heb. xi. 35; Rev.i. 17; émi vexpois,
if men are dead (where death has occurred [see ézi, B.
2a. €. p. 233° fin.]), Heb. ix. 17 ; éyelpew vexpovs, Mt. x. 8;
xi. 5; Lk. vii. 22; hyperbolically and proleptically i. q. as
Uf already dead, sure to die, destined inevitably to die: rd
capa, Ro. viii. 10 (76 cpa and rd c@pdriov picet vexpor,
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 15 and 3, 22, 41; in which sense Luther
called the human body, although alive, einen alten Maden-
sack [cf. Shakspere’s thow worms-meat !]); said of the
body of a dead man (so in Hom. often; for 7923, a corpse,
Deut. xxviii. 26; Is. xxvi. 19; Jer. vii. 83; ix. 22; xix.
7): pera rdv vexpdv, among the dead, i.e. the buried, Lk.
xxiv. 5; @aat tovs vexpovs, Mt. viii. 22; Lk. ix. 60;
daréa veKpav, Mt. xxiii. 27 ; of the corpse of a murdered
man, aiva as vexpod, Rev. xvi. 3 (for 3397, Ezek. xxxvii.
oeitor 55n, thrust through, slain, Ezek. ix. 7;xi.6). _ b.
deceased, departed, one whose soul is in ues, Rev. i. 18;
ii. 8; vexpos Av, was like one dead, as good as dead, Lk.
xv. 24, 32; plur.,1 Co. xv. 29; Rev. xiv. 13; év Xpior,
dead Christians (see év, I. 6 b. p. 211°), 1 Th. iv. 16; very
often of vexpoi and vexpoi (without the art. ; see W. p. 123
(117) and cf. B. 89 (78) note) are used of the assembly
of the dead (see dvdaraots, 2 and éyeipw, 2): 1 Pet. iv. 6;
Rey. xx. 5, 12 sq.3 tls amd tav vexaay, one (returning)
from the dead, the world of spirits, Lk. xvi. 30; ék vexpay,
from the dead, occurs times too many to count (see dva-
araots, aviornt, éyeipw) : avayew tiva éx v., Ro. x. 7; Heb.
xiii. 20; Con ék vexpay, life springing forth from death,
i. e. the return of the dead to life [see ék, I. 5], Ro. xi.
15; mpwrdrokos ex Trav vexp. who was the first that returned
to life from among the dead, Col. i. 18; also mpwror. rév
vexp. Rev.i. 5; Cworoteiv rods v. Ro. iv 17; éyeipew twa
dro tay v. to rouse one to quit (the assembly of) the dead,
Mt. xiv. 2; xxvii. 64; xxviii. 7; kpivew (dvras x. vexpous,
2 Tim. iv. 1; 1 Pet. iv. 5; xpurns (avray x. vexpov, Acts
x. 423 vexpaov K. Cavrav kupreverv, Ko. xiv. 9. c. desti«
tute of life, without life, inanimate (i. q. duxos): 76 copa
xwpis mveiparos vexpdv eat, Jas. il. 26; ov« €or (6) Beds
vexpav Gada (ovrwy, God is the guardian God not of the
dead but of the living, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx.
38. 2. trop. a. [spiritually dead i. e.} destitute of
a life that recognizes and is devoted to God, because given
vexpow
up to trespasses and sins; inactive as respects doing right:
Jn. v. 25; Ro. vi. 18; Eph. v. 14; Rev. iii. 1; with rois
rapanrdpaow (dat. of cause [cf. W. 412 (384 sq.)]) added,
Eph. ii. 1, 5; év [but T Tr WH om. ev] rots rapanr. Col.
ii.13; in the pointed saying apes rods vexpovs Oaypai rovs
éavrév vexpovs, leave those who are indifferent to the sal-
vation offered them in the gospel, to bury the bodies of
their own dead, Mt. viii. 22; Lk. ix. 60. b. univ. desti-
tute of force or power, inactive, inoperative: th dpapria,
unaffected by the desire to sin [cf. W. 210 (199); B.
§ 133, 12], Ro. vi. 11; of things: dpapria, Ro. vii. 8;
riotis, Jas. ii. 17,20 [RG], 26; &pya, powerless and fruit-
less (see épyov, 3 p. 248” bot.), Heb. vi. 1; ix.14. [Cf.
6vnrés, fin. |
vexpdw, -@: 1 aor. impv. vexpooare; pf. pass. ptep.
veverpwpevos; to make dead (Vulgate and Lat. Fathers
mortifico), to put to death, slay: twa, prop., Anthol. app.
313, 5; pass. vevexpwpevos, hyperbolically, worn out, of an
impotent old man, Heb. xi. 12; also o@ya vevexp. Ro. iv.
19; equiv. to to deprive of power, destroy the strength of:
Ta péAn, i. e. the evil desire lurking in the members (of
the body), Col. iii. 5. (ra Sdypara, Antonin. 7, 2; rH
é&w, Plut. de primo frig. 21; [av@pemos, of obduracy,
Epictet. diss. 1, 5, 7].) * :
veKpworts, -ews, 7), (veKpd@) ; 1. prop. a putting to
death (Vulg. mortificatio in 2 Co. iv. 10), killing. 2
i. q. 7d vexpodoOa, [the being put to death], with rod
‘Inood added, i. e. the (protracted) death [A. V. the
dying| which Jesus underwent in God’s service [on the
gen. cf. W. 189 (178) note], Paul so styles the marks of
perpetual trials, misfortunes, hardships attended with
peril of death, evident in his body [cf. Meyer], 2 Co.
iv. 10. 3. i. q. 7d vevexpwpeévov eiva, the dead state
[A. V. deadness], utter sluggishness, (of bodily members
and organs, Galen): Ro. iv. 19.*
veo-ynvia, see voupnvia.
véos, -a,-oy, [allied with Lat. novus, Germ. neu, Eng. new;
Curtius § 433], as in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down, ak
recently born, young, youthful: Tit. ii. 4 (for 1y3, Gen.
XXXVil. 25 Ex. xxxiii. 11); otvos véos, recently made, Mt.
ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37-39 [but 39 WH in br.],
(Sir. ix. 10). 2. new: 1Co.v. 7; Heb. xii. 24;
i. q. born again, dvOpwmos (q. v. 1 f.), Col. iii. 10. [Syn.
see xatvés, fin. ]*
veorods and (so TWH, see vooord) voocds, -0v, 6,
(véos), a young (creature), young bird: Lk. ii. 24. The
form vooods appears in the Vat. txt. of the Sept.; but
in cod. Alex. everywhere veooads; cf. Sturz, De dial.
Maced. p. 185 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 206 sq.; [ef. W.
24). (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. often for tz
of the young of animals, as Lev. xii. 6, 8; Job xxxviii.
41.)*
vedtns; -nT0s, 7), (véos), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly
for O13; youth, youthful age: 1 Tim. iv.123 ék« vedrn-
tés pov, from my boyhood, from my youth, Mt. xix. 20
[RG]; Mk. x. 20; Lk. xviii. 21; Acts xxvi. 4; Gen. viii.
21; Job xxxi. 18, etc.*
ved-utos, -ov, (véos and die), newly-planted (Job xiv.
424
vEewKOPOS
9; Is. v. 7, ete.); trop. a new convert, neophyte, [A. V.
novice, i. e.] (one who has recently become a Christian):
1 Tim. iii. 6. (Kccles. writ.) *
Népwv [by etymol. ‘brave’, ‘bold’], -wvos, 6, Nero, the
well-known Roman emperor: 2 Tim. iv. 23 Ree. [i. e. in
the subscription ].*
vedo; 1 aor. ptep. vevoas; to give a nod; to signify bya
nod, (A. V. to beckon]: rwi, foll. by an inf. of what one
wishes to be done, Jn. xiii. 24; Acts xxiv.10. (From
Hom. down; Sept. Prov. iv. 25.) [Comp.: d:a-, ék-, é,
émt-, KaTa-veva. | *
vehédn, -ns, 9, (vedhos), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for
122, but also for 1y and pnw; a cloud: [v. porewn, Mt.
xvii. 5]; Mt. xxiv. 30; xxvi.64; Mk.ix.7; xiii. 26; xiv.
62; Lk. ix. 34sq.; xii.54; xxi. 27; Actsi.9; 1 Th. iv.
17; 2 Pet. ii. 17 [Rec.]; Jude 12; Rev. i. 7; x. 13 xi.
12; xiv. 14 sqq.3 of that cloud in which Jehovah is said
(Ex. xiii. 21 sq., ete.) to have gone before the Israelites
on their march through the wilderness, and which Paul
represents as spread over them (ind rv vepédny joav,
cf. Ps. civ. (cv.) 39; Sap. x. 17): 1 Co. x. 1 sq. [Sy¥N.
see védos. ]*
NeOadrciy. [and (so T edd. 2, 7, WH in Rev. vii. 6)
NePOarin; see WH. App. p. 155, and s. v. I, ¢], 6, C5Ad3,
i.e. ‘my wrestling’ [cf. Gen. xxx. 8], or acc. to what
seems to be a.more correct interpretation ‘my crafti-
ness’ [cf. Joseph. antt. 1, 19, 8; Test. xii. Patr. test.
Neph. § 1], fr. ona unused in Kal; cf. Riietschi in Herzog
x. p- 200 sq.), Naphtali, the sixth son of the patriarch
Jacob, by Bilhah, Rachel’s maid: Rey. vii. 6; by meton.
his posterity, the tribe of Naphtali, Mt. iv. 13, 15.*
védos, -ovs, [allied with Lat. nubes, nebula, etc.], 76,
Sept. for 1 and 13y, a cloud; in the N. T. once trop.
a large, dense multitude, a throng: papripev, Heb. xii. 1,
often so in prof. auth., as vép. Tpdav, meldv, Yrapdv, Ko-
Aocdv, Hom. Il. 4, 274; 16,663 17, 755; 23, 133; avOpa-
rov, Hdt. 8,109; orpovéar, Arstph. av. 578; dxpidev,
Diod. 3, 29; peditum equitumque nubes, Liv. 35, 49.*
[Syn. védos, vepéan: vedos is general, vedéan specific;
the former denotes the great, shapeless collection of vapor
obscuring the heavens; the latter designates particular and’
definite masses of the same, suggesting form and limit. Cf.
Schmidt vol. i. ch. 36.|
vedbpds, -od, 6, a kidney (Plat., Arstph.); plur. the kid-
neys, the loins, as Sept. for nto, used of the inmost
thoughts, feelings, purposes, of the soul: with the addi-
tion of xapSias, Rev. ii. 23, with which cf. Ps. vii. 10;
Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; Sap. i. 6.*
vew-K6pos, -ov, 6, }, (veds or vads, and Kopéw to sweep;
{questioned by some; a hint of this deriv. is found in
Philo de sacerd. honor. § 6 (cf. vewxopia, de somniis 2,
42), and Hesych. s. v. defines the word 6 rév vadv koopav>
kopetv yap Td caipew €deyor (cf. s. v. onkoxdpos; so Etym.
Magn. 407, 27, cf. s. v. veoxdpos); yet Suidas s. v. Képq
p- 2157 ¢. says v. odx 6 capdv r. vy. GAN & émuseovdpevos
avrod (cf. s. vv. vewxdpos, onkoxdpos); hence some connect
the last half with root kop, kod, cf. Lat. curo,colo]); 1
prop. one who sweeps and cleans a temple. 2. one
vewTepLKds
who has charge of a temple, to keep and adorn it, a sac-
ristan: Xen. an. 5, 3, 6; Plat. legg. 6 p. 759 a. 3.
the worshipper Of a deity (obs i. e. the Israelites 6 eds
€auT@ vewxdpous Hyev through the wilderness, Joseph. b. j.
5, 9,4); as appears from coins still extant, it was an
Pees, title [lemple-keeper or temple-warden (cf. 2
above) ] of certain cities, esp. of Asia Minor, in which
the special worship of some deity or even of some deified
human ruler had been established (cf. Stephanus, Thes. v.
p- 1472 sq.; [cf. B. D. s. v. worshipper]); so v. rhs Apré
pudos, of Ephesus, Acts xix. 35; [see Bp. Lghtft. in Con-
temp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294 sq.; Wood, Discoveries at
Ephesus (Lond. 1877), App. passim].*
“vewrepiKds, -1, -dv, (vewrepos, q. V.), peculiar to the age
of youth, youthful : émOvpia, 2 Tim. ii. 22. (3 Mace. iv.
8; Polyb. 10, 24, 7; Joseph. antt. 16, 11, 8.) *
vedtepos, -a, -ov, (compar. of véos, q. v.), [fr. Hom.
down], younger; i. e. a. younger (than now), Jn.
xxi. 18. b. young, youthful, [A. V. younger (rela-
tively)]: 1 Tim. v. 11, 14; Tit. ii. 6; opp. to mpeoBure-
po, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq.; 1 Pet.v. 5. c. [strictly] younger
by birth: Lk. xv. 12 sq. (4 Mace. xii. 1). d. an
attendant, servant, (see veavickos, fin.): Acts v. 6; infe-
rior in rank, opp. to 6 petCov, Lk. xxii. 26.*
vq, a particle employed in affirmations and oaths,
(common in Attic), and joined to an ace. of the pers.
(for the most part, a divinity) or of the thing affirmed
or sworn by [B. § 149, 17]; by (Lat. per, Germ. bei):
1 Co. xv. 31 (Gen. xlii. 15 sq.).*
vie; to spin: Mt. vi. 28; Lk. xii. 27. (Plat. polit.
p- 289 ¢.; Anthol.; for mw, Ex. Xxxv. 25 sq.) *
vymudte [cf. W. 92 (87)}; (vnmos, q. v-); to be a babe
(infant): 1 Co. xiv. 20. (Hippoer.; eccles. writ.) *
vimios, -a, -ov, (fr. vn, an insep. neg. prefix [Lat. ne-
fas, ne-quam, ni-si, ete. cf. Curtius § 437], and éos); as
in Grk. writers fr. Hom. down, a. an infant, little
child: Mt. xxi. 16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3); 1 Co. xiii. 11; Sept.
esp. for Sip and Oty. b. a minor, not of age: Gal.
iv. 1 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. c. metaph. childish,
untaught, unsaid: (Sept. for »nd, Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8;
exvili. (cxix.) 130; Prov. i. 32): Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21;
Ro. ii. 20; Gal. iv. 3; Eph. iv. 14; opp. to rédevoz, the
more ecinheed in pideisindiie pad knowledge, Heb.
v. 13 sq. (Philo de agric. § 2); vam. ev Xpiors, in things
pertaining to Christ, 1 Co. iii. 1. In 1 Th. ii. 7 L WH
(ef. the latter’s note ad loc.] have hastily received vim
for the common reading #701.*
Nnpets [(cf. Wanidek p. 1158)], -€ws, 6, Nereus, a
Christian who lived at Rome: Ro. xvi. 15 [where Lmrg.
Nnpéav ].*
Nnpt and (so T Tr WH) Nypei [see et, ¢], 6, (fr. 13 a
lamp), Neri, the grandfather of Zerubbabel: Lk. iii. 27.*
vycov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of vaaos), a small island: Acts
xxvii. 16 [(Strabo) ].*
vijros, -ov, 9, (véw to swim, prop. ‘floating land’), an
island: Acts xiii. 6; xxvii. 26; xxviii. 1, 7, 9, 11; Rev.
i.9; vi.14; xvi. 20. (Sept. for ~; [fr. Hom. down].)*
vnorela, -as, 9, (vnorevo, q. v.), a fasting, fast, i. e. ab-
425
VIKA
stinence from food, and a. voluntary, as a religious
exercise: of private fasting, Mt. xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr
br. the vs.]; Mk. ix. 29 [T WHom. Trmrg.br.]; Lk. ii.
7; Acts xiv. 23; 1 Co. vii. 5 Rec. of the public fast
prescribed by the Mosaic Law (Lev. xvi. 29 sqq.; xxiii.
27 sqq. [BB.DD. s. v. Fasts, and for reff. to Strab., Philo,
Joseph., Plut., see Soph. Lex. s. v. 1}) and kept yearly
on the great day of atonement, the tenth of the month
Tisri: Acts xxvii. 9 (the month Tisri comprises a part
of our September and October [ef. B.D. s. v. month (at
end) ]; the fast, accordingly, occurred in the autumn, 4
Xeuueplos Gpa, when navigation was usually dangerous
on account of storms, as was the case with the voyage
referred to). b. a fasting to which one is driven bu
want: 2 Co. vi. 5; xi. 27; (Hippocr., Aristot., Philos ’
Joseph., Plut., Ael., Athen., al.; Sept. for pjy).*
vyorretw; fut. ryorevow; 1 aor. [inf. ynoredoat (LK. v.
34 T WH Tr txt.) ], ptcep. ynoredoas ; (fr. vnoris, g. V-)$
to fast (Vulg. and eccles. writ. jejwno), i. e. to abstain as
a religious exercise from food and drink: either entirely,
if the fast lasted but a single day, Mt. vi. 16-18; ix.
14 sq.; Mk. ii. 18-20; Lk. v. 33, [34, 35]; xviii. 12; Acts
x. 30 RG; xiii. 2,[3]; or from customary and choice
nourishment, if it continued several days, Mt. iv. 2, cf.
xi. 18; vnorever cuveyas Kal dprov éoOiet pdvoy peta Grae
ToS Kal TO moTOV avTov Vdwp, Acta Thom. § 20. (Arstph.,
Plut. mor. p. 626 sq.; Ael. v. h. 5, 20; [Joseph. c. Ap.
1, 34, 5 (where see Miiller)]; Sept. for ny.) *
vijrris, ace. plur. pores and (so Tdf. [cf. Proleg. p.
118]) vores (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326; Fritsche, Com.
on Mk. p. 796 sq.; ef. [ WH. App. p. 157°]; B. 26 (23)),
6, 7, (fr. mm and écOla, see vimios), fasting, not having
eaten: Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 3. (Hom., Aeschyl., Hip-
pocr., Arstph., al.) *
vnddrcos (so Rec. in 1 Tim. iii. 2, 11, [where Rec.
-hatos], after a later form) and vnpddeos [“ alone well
attested” (Hort)], -ov, (in Grk. auth. generally of three
term.; fr. ppw), sober, temperate; abstaining from wine,
either entirely (Joseph. antt. 3, 12, 2) or at least from its
immoderate use: 1 Tim. iii. 2,11; Tit.ii. 2. (In prof.
auth., esp. Aeschyl. and Plut., of things free from all
infusion or addition of wine, as vessels, offerings, etc.) *
vido; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. yyare; fr. Theogn.,
Soph., Xen. down; to be sober; in the N. T. everywh.
trop. to be calm and collected in spirit; to be temperate,
dispassionate, circumspect: 1 Th. v. 6, 8; 2 Tim. iv. 55
1 Pet. i. 13; v. 8; els ras mpocevxds, unto (the offering
of) prayer, 1 Pet. iv. 7. [Sy¥N. see dypumven ; and onthé
word see Ellic. on Tim.1.c. Comp.: dva-, éx-mpo.]*
Nlyep, 6, (a Lat. name [‘ black *]), Niger, surname at
the prophet ae ie Acts xiii. 1.*
Nuxdvop, [ (i. e. ‘conqueror’)], -opos, 6, Nicanor, of An-
tioch [?], one of the seven deacons of the church at Je-
rusalem: Acts vi. 5.*
vikdo, -@; pres. ptep. dat. wxkodvre, Rev. ii. 7 Lehm. 17
LT Tr, [yet all wx @vras in xv. 2] (cf. épwrde, init.) ;
fut. uxjow; 1 aor. éviknoa; pf. vevixnka; (vikn); [fr. Hom.
down]; to conquer [A. V. overcome] ; a. absol. te
viKn
carry off the victory, come off victorious: of Christ, vic-
torious over all his foes, Rev. iti. 21; vi. 2; éviknoev...
dvoiéat rd. hath so conquered that he now has the right
and power to open ete. Rev. v.5; of Christians, that hold
fast their faith even unto death against the power of their
foes, and their temptations and persecutions, Rev. ii. 7,
11, 17, 26; iii. 5, 12, 21; xxi. 7; w. é« rod Onpiov added,
to conquer and thereby free themselves from the power
of the beast [R. V. to come victorious from; cf. W. 367
(344 sq.); B. 147 (128)], Rev. xv. 2. when one is ar-
raigned or goes to law, to win the case, maintain one’s
cause, (so in the Attic orators; also wxav dixnv, Eur. El.
955): Ro. iii. 4 (from Sept. of Ps. 1. (li.) 6). b. with
ace. of the obj.: ria, by force, Lk. xi. 22; Rev. xi. 7;
xiii. 7 [Lom. WH Trmrg. br. the cl.]; of Christ the
conqueror of his foes, Rev. xvii.14; rév kocpor, to deprive
it of power to harm, to subvert its influence, Jn. xvi. 33 ;
vixav twa or 7 is used of one who by Christian constancy
and courage keeps himself unharmed and spotless from
his adversary’s devices, solicitations, assaults: the devil,
1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.; Rev. xii. 11; false teachers, 1 Jn. iv. 4; roy
Koopoy, ibid. v.4 sq. wKav TO movnpov ev TS ayad, by the
force which resides in goodness, i. e. in kindness, to cause
an enemy to repent of the wrong he has done one, Ro.
xii. 21; wexaoOat v0 Tov Kaxod, to be disturbed by an in-
jury and driven to avengeit, ibid. (Comp.: iep-vkxdw. |*
vicn, -ns, 7, [fr. Hom. down], victory: 1 Jn. v. 4 [cf.
vikos |. *
Nuxdinpos, (vicn and dnpos [i. e. ‘conqueror of the
people’ ]), -ov, 6, Nicodemus, (rabbin. j"Ip3), a member
of the Sanhedrin who took the part of Jesus: Jn. iii. 1,
HOG Sabo GOS Sab, Wet
Nuxodatrns, -ov, 6, a follower of Nicolaus, a Nicola/itan:
plur., Rev. ii. 6, 15, —a name which, it can scarcely be
doubted, refers symbolically to the same persons who in
vs. 14 are charged with holding rv ddaynv Badady, i. e.
after the example of Balaam, casting a stumbling-block
before the church of God (Num. xxiv. 1-3) by upholding
the liberty of eating things sacrificed unto idols as well
as of committing fornication; for the Grk. name Nixé-
Aaos coincides with the Hebr. pyoa acc. to the interpre-
tation of the latter which regards it as signifying destruc-
tion of the people. See in Badaan; [cf. BB. DD. s. vv.
Nicolaitans, Nicolas; also Comm. on Rev. Il. ce.].*
Nixédaos, -ov, 6, (vikn and Aads), Nicolaus [A. V. Nico-
las], a proselyte of Antioch and one of the seven deacons
of the church at Jerusalem: Acts vi. 5.*
Nuxdrrodts, -ews, 7, (city of victory), Nicopolis: Tit. iii.
12. There were many cities of this name — in Armenia,
Pontus, Cilicia, Epirus, Thrace — which were generally
built, or had their name changed, by some conqueror to
commemorate a victory. The one mentioned above seems
to be that which Augustus founded on the promontory
of Epirus, in grateful commemoration of the victory
he won at Actium over Antony. The author of the
spurious subscription of the Epistle seems to have had
in mind the Thracian Nicopolis, founded by Trajan [(?)
cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.] on the river Nestus (or
426
voew@
Nessus), since he calls it a city ‘of Macedonia.’ [B. D.
Soaveell i
vios, -ous, 7d, a later form i. q. vixn (cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 647; [B. 23 (20); W. 24]), victory: 1 Co. xv. 55, 57,
(2 Mace. x. 38; [1 Esdr. iii. 9]); ets vixos, until he have
gained the victory, Mt. xii. 20; xarewé6n 6 Oavaros eis
vicos, [A. V. death is swallowed up in victory] i. e. utterly
vanquished, 1 Co. xv. 54. (The Sept. sometimes trans-
late the Hebr. nyxi9 i. e. to everlasting, forever, by eis
vicos, 2 S.ii. 26; Jobxxxvi. 7; Lam. v.20; Am.i.11; viii.
7, because N¥) denotes also splendor, 1 Chr. xxix. 11, and
in Syriac victory.) *
Nuvevt, 7, Hebr. 7)3°) (supposed to be compounded of
ee and 7), the abode of Ninus; [ef. Fried. Delitzsch as
below; Schrader as below, pp. 102, 572]), in the Grk.
and Rom. writ. 7 Nivos [on the accent cf. Pape, Eigen-
namen, s. v.], Nineveh (Vulg. Ninive [so A. V. in Lk. as
below]), a great city, the capital of Assyria, built appar-
ently about B. c. 2000, on the eastern bank of the Tigris
opposite the modern city of Mosul. It was destroyed
[about] B.c. 606, and its ruins, containing invaluable
monuments of art and archaeology, began to be exca-
vated in recent times (from 1840 on), especially by the
labors of the Frenchman Botta and the Englishman Lay-
ard; cf. Layard, Nineveh and its Remains, Lond. 1849,
2 vols.; and his Discoveries in the Ruins of Nineveh
and Babylon, Lond. 1853; [also his art. in Smith’s Dict.
of the Bible]; H. J. C. Weissenborn, Ninive u. s. Gebiet
etc. 2 Pts. Erf. 1851-56; Tuch, De Nino urbe, Lips.
1844; Spiegel in Herzog x. pp. 361-381; [esp. Fried.
Delitzsch in Herzog 2 (cf. Schaff-Herzog) x. pp. 587-603 ;
Schrader, Keilinschriften u. s. w. index s. v.; and in Riehm
s. v.; W. Robertson Smith in Encye. Brit. s. v.]; Hitzig
in Schenkel iv. 334 sqq.; [Razlinson, Five Great Mon-
archies etc.; Geo. Smith, Assyrian Discoveries, (Lond.
1875)]. Inthe N. T. once, viz. Lk. xi. 32 R G.*
[Nuvevirns RG (so Tr in Lk. xi. 32), or] Nwevirns [L
(so Tr in Lk. xi. 30)] or Neveveitms T WH (so Tr in Mt.
xli. 41) [see et, and Tdf. Proleg. p. 86; WH. App. p.
154°], -ov, 6, (Nuvevi, q. V.), i. gq. Ninos in Hat. and Strabo;
a Ninevite, an inhabitant of Nineveh: Mt. xii. 41; Lk.
xi. 30, and LT Tr WH in 32.*
virTnp, -pos, 6, (virrw), a vessel for washing the hands
and feet, a basin: Jn. xiii. 5. (Eccles. writ.) *
virrw; (a later form for vito; cf. Lob.ad Phryn. p. 241
[Veitch s.v. vig; B.63 (55); W. 88 (84)]); 1 aor. éuwa;
Mid., pres. virrouar; 1 aor. euwaunv; Sept. for V1; to
wash: twd, Jn. xiii. 8; rods mdédas tivds, ibid. 5 sq. 8, 12,
14; 1 Tim. v. 10; mid. to wash one’s self [ef. B. § 135,
5; W. § 38, 2b.]: Jn. ix. 7, 11, 15; ras yeipas, to wash
one’s (own) hands, Mk. vii. 3; rods médas, Jn. xiii. 10
(T om. WH br. rods 7.]; viyrar 76 mpdcwmdv cov, Mt. vi.
175; vimrovrat tas xeipas ad’rey, Mt. xv. 2. [Comp.: dao-
vinto. SYN. see Aova, fin.]*
vo€w, -@; 1 aor. évdnoa; [pres. pass. ptcp. (neut. plur.)
vootpeva]; (voids); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for pan and
j23n7, and for Sawn; 1. to perceive with the mind,
to understand : absol., with the addition 79 xapdia, Jn. xii.
vonua
40 (Is. xliv. 18); w.an ace. of the thing, Eph. iii. 4, 20;
1 Tim. i. 7; pass.: Ro. i. 20; foll. by dre, Mt. xv. 17;
xvi. 11; Mk. vii. 18; foll. by ace. w. inf., Heb. xi. 3;
absol. i. q. to have understanding: Mt. xvi. 9; Mk. viii.
lie 2. to think upon, heed, ponder, consider: vocira,
sc. let him attend to the events that occur, which will show
the time to flee, Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; [similarly
voet 8 (RG @) eyo, 2 Tim. ii. 7]. [Comp.: e€-, xara-,
pera-, 1p0-, Umro-voew. | *
vonpa, -ros, 7d, fr. Hom. down; 1. a mental per-
ception, thought. 2. spec. (an evil) purpose: aiypa-
AoriCew mav vonua eis THY Umakonv Tod Xpicrov, to cause
whoever is devising evil against Christ to desist from his
purpose and submit himself to Christ (as Paul sets him
forth), 2Co.x.5; plur.: 2 Co. ii. 11 (rod d:aBorov, Ignat.
ad Eph. [interpol.] 14; ris xapdias ai’rey wompas, Bar.
ii. 8). 3. that which thinks, the mind: plur. (where
the minds of many are referred to), 2 Co. ili. 14; iv. 4,
and perh. [xi. 3]; Phil. iv. 7, for here the word may mean
thoughts and purposes; [others would so take it also in
all the exx. cited under this head (cf. cavxynya, 2) ].*
v680os, -n. -ov, illegitimate, bastard, i. e. born, not in law-
ful wedlock, but of a concubine or female slave: Heb.
xii. 8; cf. Bleek ad loc. (Sap. iv. 3; from Hom. down.) *
vonh, -7s, 7, (véepw to pasture), fr. Hom. [i. e. batrach. ]
down; 1. pasturage, fodder, food: in fig. discourse
eupnoet vouny, i. e. he shall not want the needful sup-
plies for the true life, Jn. x.9; (Sept. for Ay Ip, Myr,
3). 2. trop. growth, increase, (Germ. Umsichfressen,
Umsichgreifen): of evils spreading like a gangrene, 2
Tim. ii. 17 (of ulcers, vouny moteiras édxos, Polyb. 1, 81, 6;
of a conflagration, 76 mip AauBaver vouny, 11, 4 (5), 4 cf.
1, 48, 5; Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 9).*
vopl{e; impf. évouitov; 1 aor. évoyica; impf. pass. évo-
pCounv; (vopos); asin Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down ; 1. to hold by custom or usage, own as a cus-
tom or usage; to follow custom or usage; pass. vopi¢erat
it is the custom, it is the received usage: ob évopitero mpoo-
sux? €ivat, where acc. to custom was a place of prayer,
Acts xvi. 13 [but LT Tr WH read 0% evopitouer mpocev-
xy elv. where we supposed there was, etc.; cf. 2 below],
(2 Mace. xiv. 4). 2. to deem, think, suppose: foll.
by an inf., Acts viii. 20; 1 Co. vii. 36; foll. by an ace. w.
inf., Lk. ii. 44; Acts vii. 25; xiv. 19; xvi. [13 (see 1
above) ], 27; xvii. 29; 1 Co. vii. 26; 1 Tim. vi. 5; foll.
by ére, Mt. v.17; x.34 [W. § 56,1b.]; xx.10; Acts xxi.
29; as evopitero, as was wont to be supposed, Lk. iii. 23.
[Syn. see 7yéopat, finsi|*
vopukds, -7, -ov, (vouos), pertaining to (the) law (Plat.,
Aristot , al.) : pdayat, Tit. iii. 9; 6 vopexds, one learned in
the law, in the N. T. an interpreter and teacher of the
Mosaic law [A. V. a lawyer; cf. ypappareds, 2]: Mt.
xxii. 35; Lk. x. 25; Tit. iii. 13; plur., Lk. vii. 30; xi.
45 sq. 52; xiv. 3.*
vopluas, adv., (vouipos), lawfully, agreeably to the law,
properly: 1 Tim.i.8; 2 Tim.ii. 5. (Thuc., Xen., Plat.,
al.)
VOpLT L.A. -TOS, TO, (VoUIC@, q. V.)} 1. anything received
427
VOMLOS
and sanctioned by usage or law (Tragg., Arstph.). 2.
money, (current) coin, [cf. our lawful money]: Mt. xxii.
19 (and in Grk. writ. fr. Eur. and Arstph. down).*
vopno-8i8dckados, -ov, 6, (vopos and d.ddcxanos, cf. érepo-
didaoKaros, icpodiddoxados, xopodiOdoKados), a teacher and
interpreter of the law: among the Jews [cf. ypaupareds,
2}, Lk. v.17; Acts v. 34; of those who among Chris-
tians also went about as champions and interpreters of
the Mosaic law, 1 Tim.i. 7. (Not found elsewh. [exc.
in eccl. writ. ]) *
vopobecta, -as, 7, (vouos, riOnur), law-giving, legislation :
Ro. ix. 4. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Philo, al.) *
* vopoderéw, -@: Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. vevouobérnrar;
plupf. 3 pers. sing. vevouoernro (on the om. of the augm.
see W.72 (70); B.33(29)); (vopodérns); fr. [Lys.], Xen.
and Plat. down; Sept. several times for 77/7; Ls
to enact laws; pass. laws are enacted or prescribed for one,
fo be legislated for, furnished with laws (often so in Plato;
cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 391 [for exx.]); 6 Aads én adris
(R Gem abrh) vevopodérnrar (RG vevopobérnro) the people
received the Mosaic law established upon the foundation
of the priesthood, Heb. vii. 11 [W. § 39,1 b.; ef. B. 337
(290); many refer this ex. (with the gen.) to time (A. V.
under it); see emi, A. IL., cf. B. 2a. y.]. 2. to sanc-
tion by law, enact: ri, pass. Heb. viii. 6 [cf. W. and B.
U. S..].*
vopo-Bérns, -ov, 6, (voxos and riOnut), a lawgiver: Jas. iv.
12. ({Antipho, Thuc.], Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., al.;
Sept. Ps. ix. 21.) *
v6pL0s, -ov, 6, (veyw to divide, distribute, apportion), in
prof. auth. fr. Hes. down, anything established, anything
received by usage, a custom, usage, law; in Sept. very often
for 771M, also for Mpr, M7, ete. In the N. T. a command,
law; and 1. of any law whatsoever: da motov
vopov; Ro. iii. 27; vopos dixaroovyns, a law or rule pro-
ducing a state approved of God, i. e. by the observance
of which we are approved of God, Ro. ix. 31, ef. Meyer
[see ed. Weiss], Fritzsche, Philippi ad loc.; a precept or
injunction: kara vouov évrod\js capk. Heb. vii. 16; plur. of
the things prescribed by the divine will, Heb. viii. 10; x.
16; vopos rod voos, the rule of action prescribed by reason,
Ro. vii. 23; the mention of the divine law causes those
things even which in opposition to this law impel to
action, and therefore seem to have the force of a law,
to be designated by the term voyos, as érepos vopos €v Tots
pédeoi pov, a different law from that which God has given,
i. e. the impulse to sin inherent in human nature, or é
vopos Ths duaprias (gen. of author), Ro. vii. 23, 25; viii. 2,
also 6 v. rov Oavdrov, emanating from the power of death,
Ro. viii. 2; with which is contrasted 6 véjos tov mvevparos,
the impulse to (right) action emanating from the Spirit,
ibid. 2. of the Mosaic law, and referring, acc. to
the context, either to the volume of the law or to its
contents: w.thearticle, Mt.v.18; xii.5; xxii.36; Lk.
ii. 27; x.263 xvi.17; Jn.i.17,45 (46); vii. 51; vill. 17;
x. 84; xv.25; Acts vi. 13; vii. 53; xviii. 13, 15; xxi.
20; xxiii. 3; Ro. ii. 13 [(bis) here L T Tr WH om. art.
(also G in 13°)], 15, 18, 20, 23%, 26; iv. 15*; vii. 1°, 5, 14,
VOMOS
21 (on the right interpretation of this difficult passage
ef. Knapp, Scripta varii Argumenti, ii. p. 385 sqq. and
Fritzsche, Com. ad Rom. ii. p. 57; [others take du. here
generally, i. q. controlling principle; see 1 above sub
fin. and cf. W. 557 (578); B. § 151, 15]); Ro. viii. 3 sq. ;
1 Co. ix. 8; xv. 56; Gal. ili. 13, 24; Eph. ii. 15 (on
which pass. see déypa, 2); 1 Tim. i. 8; Heb. vii. 19,
28; x.1, etc.; with the addition of Matcéws, Lk. ii. 22;
Jn. vii. 23; viii.5; Acts xiii. 38 (39) [here L T Tr WH
om. art.]; xv.5; xxviii. 23; 1Co.ix.9; of xupiov, LK. ii.
393; of rod Geod, [Mt. xv.6 TWH mrg.]; Ro. vii. 22; viii.
7. xara Tov vdpov, acc. to the (standard or requirement
of the) law, Acts xxii. 12; Heb. vii. 5; ix. 22. vépos
without the art. (in the Epp. of Paul and James and
the Ep. to the Heb.; cf. W. p. 123 (117); B. 89 (78);
[some interpreters contend that voyos without the art.
denotes not the law of Moses but law viewed as ‘a prin-
ciple’, ‘abstract and universal’; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal.
ii. 19; also “Fresh Revision,” etc. p. 99; Vaughan on
Ro. ii. 23; esp. Van Hengel on Ro. ii. 12; Gifford in
the Speaker’s Com. on Rom. p. 41 sqq. (cf. Cremer s. v.).
This distinction is contrary to usage (as exhibited e. g.
in Sap. xviii. 4; Sir. xix. 17; xxi.11; xxxi. 8; xxxii. 1;
XXXV. (xxxii.) 15, 24; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 2, 3; 1 Mace. ii.
21; 4 Mace. vii. 7, and many other exx. in the Apocr.;
see Wahl, Clavis Apocrr. s. v. p. 343), and to the con-
text in such Pauline pass. as the foll.: Ro. ii. 17, 25, 27;
Vii. 1(7) 5 -xiit8)-105" Gals iii. 17, 18, 23,524, (ef. Ro. i.
12 and iii. 19; v.13 and 14); ete. It should be added,
perhaps, that neither the list of pass. with the art. nor
of those without it, as given by Prof. Grimm, claims to be
complete]): Ro. ii. 23°, 25; iii. 81; iv. 15°, v.13; vii. 1,
2 exaaoexiiiel OsmGaleii. tse v. Jo) tebimet. 9% “blebs
vil. 12, etc.; with the addition of xvpiov, Lk. ii. 23 [here
Lhas the art. ], 24 [LT Tr WH add the art.]; of deo, Ro.
vii. 25; of Mwiaéws, Heb. x. 28; esp. after prepositions,
as Oa vdpou, Ro. ii. 12; iii. 20; Gal. ii. 21; yapis vduov,
without the co-operation of the law, Ro. iii. 21; destitute
or ignorant of the law, Ro. vii. 9; where no law has been
promulged, Ro. vii. 8; of ék vduov, those who rule their
life by the law, Jews, Ro. iv. 14, 16 [here all edd. have
the art.]; of év vdu@, who are in the power of the law, i. e.
bound to it, Ro. iii. 19 [but all texts here ev ré v.]; ind
véuov, under dominion of the law, Ro. vi. 14 sq.; Gal. iii.
23; iv. 4, 21; v.18; of bd vdpor, 1 Co. ix. 20; Siearod-
cba ev vdpm, Gal. v.43; epya vdpov (see épyor, sub fin.) ;
év vop@ duaprdvew, under law i. e. with knowledge of the
law, Ro. ii. 12 (equiv. to éxovres vdpov, cf. vs. 14); they
to whom the Mosaic law has not been made known are
said vdpov pr Exe, ibid. 14; Eavrois eior vdpos, their natu-
ral knowledge of right takes the place of the Mosaic law,
ibid.; vdpos épywv, the law demanding works, Ro. iii. 27;
dia vopov véuw dréOavoy, by the law itself (when I became
convinced that by keeping it I could not attain to salva-
tion, cf. Ro. vii. 9-24) I became utterly estranged from
the law, Gal. ii. 19 [ef. W. 210 (197); B.§ 133,12]. kara
vouov, as respects the interpretation and observance of
the law. Phil. iii. 5. The observance of the law is
428
v60s5
designated by the foll. phrases: mAnpodv vdpov, Ro. xiii.
8; rovp. Gal. v. 14; mAnpodv 76 dixaiopa Tod vdpou, Ro.
vill. 4; puddooeww (Tov) v., Acts xxi. 24; Gal. vi. 13; ra
Sixatdp. Tod v. Ro. ii. 26; mpdooew vopov, Ro. ii. 25; rovety
rov v., Jn. vii. 19; Gal. v. 3; typeiv, Acts xv. 5, 24 [Rec.];
Jas. ii. 10; redeiv, Ro. ii. 27 (cf. Jas. ii. 8) ; [on the other
hand, dxupody TOV VOL. Mt.xv.6 TWH mrg. |. 6 vopos is
used of some particular ordinance of the Mosaic law in
Jn. xix. 7; Jas. ii. 8; with a gen. of the obj. added, row
dv8pés, the law enacted respecting the husband, i. e. bind-
ing the wife to her husband, Ro. vii. 2 where Rec.** om.
rod vop. (80 6 vépos tod macxa, Num. ix. 12; rod Aerpod,
Lev. xiv. 2; other exx. are given in Fritzsche, Ep.ad Rom.
ii. p. 9; cf. W. § 30,28.). Although the Jews did not
make a distinction as we do between the moral, the
ceremonial, the civil, precepts of the law, but thought
that all should be honored and kept with the same con-
scientious and pious regard, yet in the N. T. not infre-
quently the law is so referred to as to show that the
speaker or writer has his eye on the ethical part of it
alone, as of primary importance and among Christians
also of perpetual validity, but does not care for the cere-
monial and civil portions, as being written for Jews
alone: thus in Gal. v. 14; Ro. xiii. 8,10; ii. 26 sq.; vil.
21, 25; Mt. v. 18, and often; ra rov vopov, the precepts,
moral requirements, of the law, Ro. ii.14. In the Ep. of
James vdpuos (without the article) designates only the
ethical portion of the Mosaic law, confirmed by the au-
thority of the Christian religion: ii. 9-11; iv.11; in the
Ep. to the Heb., on the other hand, the ceremonial
part of the law is the prominent idea. 3. of the
Christian religion: vépos riotews, the law demanding
faith, Ro. iii. 27; rod Xpiorod, the moral instruction given
by Christ, esp. the precept concerning love, Gal. vi.2; rijs
eAevbepias (see éAevbepia, a.), Jas. i. 25; ii. 12; cf. 6 Kawods
vopos Tod Kupiov judy "Incod Xpiorod, dvev Cvyod dvdykns
év, Barn. ep. 2, 6 [see Harnack’s note in loc.]. 4.
by metonymy 6 voyos, the name of the more important
part (i. e. the Pentateuch), is put for the entire collection of
the sacred books of the O. T.: Jn. vii. 49; x. 34 (Ps. Ixxxi.
(ixxxii.) 6); Jn. xii. 34 (Ps. cix. (ex.) 4; Dan. (Theodot.)
ii, 44; vii. 14); Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19; Ixviii.
(Ixix.) 15); Ro. iii.19; 1 Co. xiv. 21 (Is. xxviii. 11 sq.; so
2 Mace. ii. 18, where cf. Grimm); 6 vouos Kat of mpopjrat,
Mt. xi. 13; Jn.i.46; Acts xiii.15; xxiv.14; xxviii. 23;
Ro. iii. 21, (2 Mace. xv. 9); i. q. the system of morals
taught in the O. T., Mt. v.17; vii. 12; xxii. 40; 6 vdp. (of)
mpop. kai wadpoi, the religious dispensation contained
in the O. T., Lk. xxiv. 44 (6 vopos, of mpod. x. ra GAXa
marpia BiBXia, prol. to Sir.). Paul’s doctrine concerning
6 vduos is exhibited by (besides others) Weiss, Bibl. Theol.
§§ 71, 72; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 69 sq. [Eng. trans. i.
p- 68 sq.; A. Zahn, Das Gesetz Gottes nach d. Lehre u.
Erfahrung d. Apostel Paulus, Halle 1876; R. Tiling, Die
Paulinische Lehre vom vépos nach d. vier Hauptbriefen,
u.s.w. Dorpat, 1878]. vouos does not occur in the foll. N,
T. bks.: Mk.,2 Co., Col.,Thess., 2 Tim., Pet.,Jude,Jn., Rev
vos, see vous. °
VOCEW
voréw, -3; (vdcos); fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; to be
sick; metaph. of any ailment of the mind (aunkéote@
movnpia voceiv "AOnvaiovs, Xen. mem. 3, 5, 18 and many
other exx. in Grk. auth.) : epi 71, to be taken with such
an interest in a thing as amounts to a disease, to have
a morbid fondness for, 1 Tim. vi. 4 (wept d6€ay, Plat. mor.
p. 546 d.).* :
véonpa, -ros, 7d, disease, sickness: Jn. v.4 Rec. Lehm.
(Tragg., Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plat., sqq.) *
voa0s, -ov, 4, disease, sickness: Mt. iv. 23 Scan iil dicts
ix. 35; x.1; Mk.i. 34; iii,15 [RGL]; Lk. iv. 40; vi.
18 (17); vii. 21; ix.1; Acts xix.12. (Deut. vii. 15;
xxviii. 59; Ex. xv. 26, etc. [Hom., Hdt., al.])*
| vorowd, -as, 7, (for veorord, the earlier and more com-
mon form [cf. WH. App. p. 145], fr. veooads, q. v.), Sept.
for {D3 1. a nest of birds. 2. a brood of birds:
LK. xiii. 34 [but L txt. voocia, see the foll. word]. (Deut.
Xxxil. 11 [Gen. vi. 14; Num. xxiv. 22; Prov. xvi. 16,
ete:]..) *
vooalov, -ov, Td, (see voooid), a brood of birds: Mt.
xxill. 37 and Lchm. txt. in Lk. xiii. 34 [where al. voooud,
see the preced. word]. (Arstph., Aristot., Ael.} for OM5D8
Ps. Ixxxiii. (Ixxxiv.) 4.) * F
vooods, See veodads.
vorpitw: Mid., pres. ptcp. vordifouevos; 1 aor. évo-
ofhicdpnv; (voodi afar, apart); to set apart, separate,
dwide; mid. to set apart or separate jor one’s self, i. e. to
purloin, embezzle, withdraw covertly and appropriate to
one’s own use: xpnuara, Xen. Cyr. 4, 2 42; Plut. Lucull.
37; Aristid. 4; pndev rdv ex rhs Stapmrayis, Polyb. 10,
16, 6; xpvo@para, 2 Mace. iv. 32; dddAdrpia, Joseph.
antt. 4, 8, 29; absol. Tit. ii. 10; (rt) dmo twos, Acts v.
2, 3 [here A. V. keep back]; Sept. Josh. vii..1; && ruvos,
Athen. 6 p. 234 a.*
vétos, -ov, 6, the south wind; a. prop.: Lk. xii.
Dos ACtS XXVil. los XXVIlI. 13. b. the South (cf.
Boppas): Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; xiii. 29; Rev. xxi. 13.
(From Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 233, the southern
quarter, the South; and for pj13, the ‘southern (both)
wind and quarter; }1)°h, the same; Dap, the eastern
(both) quarter and wind.) *
voverta, -as, 7, (vovberéw, q. V-); admonition, exhorta-
tion: Sap. xvi. 6; 1 Co. x. 11; Tit. iii. 10; kupiov, such
as belongs to the Lord (Christ) or proceeds from him,
Eph. vi. 4 [cf. W. 189 (178)]. (Arstph. ran. 1009;
Diod. 15, 7; besides in Philo, Joseph. and other recent
writ. for vovérnots and vovderia, forms more com. in the
earlier writ. cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 512; [W. 24].) (Cf.
Trench § xxxii.]*
vovderéw, -&; (vovérns, and this fr. vovs and ridnus;
hence prop. i. q. €v r@ v@ riOnpu, lit. ‘put in mind’, Germ.
‘an das Herz legen’); to admonish, warn, exhort: twa,
Acts xx. 81; Ro. xv. 14; 1 Co. iv. 14; Col. i. 28; iii. 16;
1 Th. v.12,14; 2 Th.iii.15. ((15. iii. 13]; Job iv. 3;
Sap. xi. 11; xii. 2; Tragg., Arstph., Xen., Plat., aJ.)*
voupnvia, and acc. to a rarer uncontr. form (cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 148 [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below; WH.
App. p. 145]) veounvia (so Ltxt. Tr WH), -as, 9, (véos,
429
vupeplos
phy a month), new-moon (Vulg. neomenia; barbarous
Lat. novilunium): of the Jewish festival of the new
moon [BB.DD. s. v. New Moon], Col. ii. 16. (Sept.
chiefly for wn; also for win Ws, Ex. xl. 2; and wy>
win, Num. x. 10; xxviii. 11; see pqv, 2. Pind., Arstph.,
Thue., Xen., al.) *
vouvexas, (vods and éyw [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 599),
adv. wisely, prudently, discreetly: Mk. xii. 34. ({Aristot.
rhet. Alex. 30 p. 1436, 33 vouveyds «. Sixaiws]; Polyb.
1, 83, 3 vouvexads x. ppoviuas; [2,13, 1]; 5, 88, 2 vouveyds
k. mpaypatik@s ; [al.].) *
vots (contr. fr. ydos), 6, gen. vods, dat. voi, (so in later
Grk. for the earlier forms vod, vd, contr. fr. véov, vd; cf.
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 453; W. § 8, 2b.; [B. 12 sq. (12)]),
ace. vod (contr. fr. ydov), Sept. for 39 and 339, [fr.
Hom. down]; mind (Germ. Sinn), i.e. 1. the mind,
comprising alike the faculties of perceiving and under-
standing and those of feeling, judging, determining ;
hence spec. a. the intellective faculty, the under-
standing: Lk. xxiv. 45 (on which see S:avoiyw, 2); Phil.
iv. 7; Rev. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; opp. to rd mvedua, the spirit
intensely roused and completely absorbed with divine
things, but destitute of clear ideas of them, 1 Co. xiv.
14 sq. 19; ¢yeuw Tov vodv kupiov [L txt., al. Xprorov], to be
furnished with the understanding of Christ, 1 Co. ii.
16°, b. reason (Germ. die Vernunft) in the nar-
rower sense, as the capacity for spiritual truth, the
higher powers of the soul, the faculty of perceiving divine
things, of recognizing goodness and of hating evil: Ro. i.
28; vii. 23; Eph. iv.17; 1 Tim. vi.5; 2 Tim. iii. 8 [cf.
W. 229 (215); B. § 134, 7]; Tit. i. 15; opp. to 9 odpé,
Ro. vii. 25; dvaveododa TH mvevpate Tov vods, to be so
changed that the spirit which governs the mind is re-
newed, Eph. iv. 23; [ef. 9 dvaxaivwars tod vods, Ro. xii.
2). c. the power of considering and judging soberly,
calmly and impartially: 2 Th. ii. 2. 2. a particular
mode of thinking and judging: Ro. xiv.5; 1 Co.i. 10;
i. q. thoughts, feelings, purposes: rod kupiov (fr. Is. xl.
13), Ro. xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. 16°; i. q. desires, tis aapkds,
Col. ii. 18 [cf. Meyer ad loc. ].*
Nupdds, -d, 6, [perh. contr. fr. Nuupddapos; cf. W.
102 sq. (97); on accent cf. Chandler § 32], Nymphas, a
Christian inhabitant of Laodicea: Col. iv. 15 [LJ WH Tr
mrg. read Niyday i. e. Nympha, the name of a woman;
see esp. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc., and p. 256 ].*
vipn, -7s, , (appar. allied w. Lat. nubo; Vanicek p.
429 sq.), Sept. for 1935 1. a betrothed woman, a
bride: Jn. iii. 29; Rev. xviii. 23; xxi. 2,9; xxii. 17. 2).
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a recently married
woman, young wife; a young woman; hence in bibl. and
eccl. Grk., like the Hebr. 723 (which signifies both a
bride and a daughter-in-law (cf. W. 32]), a daughter-in-
law: Mt.x.35; Lk. xii.53. (Mic. vii.6; Gen. xi. 31;
[xxxviii. 11]; Ruth i. 6, [ete.]; also Joseph. antt. 5,
Oras)
vuudtos, -ov, 6, (vippn), a bridegroom: Mt. ix. 15; xxv.
1,5 sq.10; Mk. ii. 19sq.; Lk. v. 34 sq.; In. ii. 9; lil. 29;
Rev. xviii. 23. (From Hom. down; Sept for ,nn.)*
vupper
vupddov, -Gvos, 6, (indy), the chamber containing the
bridal bed, the bride-chamber: oi vioi rod vuppdvos (see
vids, 2), of the friends of the bridegroom whose duty it
was to provide and care for whatever pertained to the
pridal chamber, i. e. whatever was needed for the due
celebration of the nuptials: Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk.
v. 34, ([W. 33 (32)]; Tob. vi. 13 (14), 16 (17); eccles.
writ.; Heliod. 7,8); the room in which the marriage cere-
monies are held: Mt. xxii. 10 TWH Tr mrg.*
viv, and yuri (which see in its place), adv. now, Lat.
nunc, (Sept. for Any ; [fr. Hom. down ]) ; 1. adv. of
Time, now, i.e. at the present time ; a. so used that
by the thing which is now said to be or to be done the
present time is opposed to past time: Jn.iv.18 ; ix. 21;
Actsmxcvis B14) XXL o) ukvOe xia dae Deiat 1G 2 Co;
Vil. 9 xiii. 2% -Philsi/305 it 125 ii. 18; Colt. 24, ete;
freq. it denotes a somewhat extended portion of present
time as opp. to a former state of things: Lk. xvi. 25 ;
Acts vii. 4; Gal. i. 23 iii. 3; spec. the time since certain
persons received the Christian religion, Ro. v. 9, 11; vi.
UD, Vile sath, The (CeG iy OE she, Pe Ie kere THEO, De Gre
the time since man has had the blessing of the gospel,
as opp. to past times, i.q. in our times, our age: Acts vii.
52; Ro. xvi. 26; 2 Co. vi. 2; Eph. iii. 5,10; 2 Tim. i.
10; 1 Pet.i.12; iii. 21, [ef. ep. ad Diogn. 1]. b. opp.
to future time: Jn. xii. 27; xiii. 36 (opp. to darepov) ;
xvi. 22; Ro. xi. 81; 1 Co. xvi. 12; vov x. eis mdvras rods
aidvas, Jude 25; used to distinguish this present age,
preceding Christ’s return, from the age which follows
that return: Lk. vi. 21,25; Eph.ii.2; Heb.ii.8; 2 Pet.
iii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 28; with év7@ xaypo tovr@ added, Mk.
x. 30. c. Sometimes vdv with the present is used of
what will occur forthwith or soon, Lk. ii. 29; Jn. xii. 31;
xvi. 53 xvii. 13; Acts xxvi. 17. with a preterite, of
what has just been done, Mt. xxvi. 65; Jn. xxi. 10; or
very lately (but now, just now, hyperbolically i. q. a short
time ago), viv é(ntouv ce \Odcar of Iovdaio, Jn. xi. 8; cf.
Kypke ad loc.; Vig. ed. Herm. p. 425 sq. with a future,
of those future things which are thought of as already
begun to be done, Jn. xii. 31; or of those which will be
done instantly, Acts xiii. 11 [here al. supply éori; W.§ 64,
2a.]; or soon, Acts xx. 22 [here zop. merely has inherent
fut. force; cf. B. § 137, 10a.]. d. with the imperative
it often marks the proper or fit time for doing a thing:
Mt. xxvii. 42 sq.; Mk. xv. 32; Jn. ii. 8. Hence it serves
to point an exhortation in dye viv, come now: Jas. iv. 13;
v. 1, (where it is more correctly written dye vuv, cf. Pas-
sow li. p. 372). e. with other particles, by which the
contrast in time is marked more precisely: kal vov, even
now (now also), Jn. xi. 22; Phil. i. 20; and now, Jn. xvii.
5; Acts vii. 34 [cf. 2 below]; x. 5 [W. § 43,3 a.]; xx.
25; xxii. 16; dAAd viv, Lk. xxii. 836; ddA Kat vov, but
even now, Jn. xi. 22 [T Tr txt. WH om. L Trmrg. br.
aAda]; ere viv, 1 Co. iii. 2 (3) [L WH br. ért]; viv dé
(see vuvi below) but now, Jn. xvi. 5; xvii. 13; Heb. ii. 8;
rote... vov d€, Gal. iv. 9; Ro. vi. 21 sq. [here vuvi dé];
Heb. xii. 26; moré . . . viv dé, Ro. xi. 30 [WH mrg. vvi];
Eph. v.8; 1 Pet. ii. 10; viv 43y, now already, 1 Jn. iv. 3.
430
vuvt
vov obv, now therefore, Acts x. 33; xv.10; xvi. 36; xxiii.
15, (Gen. xxvii. 8,43; xxxi. 13,30; xlv. 8; 1 Macc. x. 71).
TO viv éxov, see éxa, II. b. f. with the article ; a.
w. neut. acc. absol. of the article, ra viv, as respects the
present; at present, now (in which sense it is written also
raviv [so Grsb. always, Rec. twice; classic edd. often
raviy; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 111; Chandler, Accent, § 826 ]):
Acts iv. 29; xvii. 30; xx. 32; xxvil. 22,(2 Mace. xv. 8;
often in class. Grk.; also rd viv, 1 Mace. vii. 35; ix. 9;
cf. Kriiger § 50, 5, 13; Bnhdy. p. 328; Bttm. Gram.
§ 125, 8 Anm. 8 (5)); the things that now are, the present
things, Judith ix. 5; ace. absol. as respects the things now
taking place, equiv. to as respects the case in hand, Acts v.
38. B. 6,7, 70 vov, the present, joined to substantives :
as 6 voy aiov, 1 Tim. vi. 17; 2 Tim. iv. 10; Tit. ii. 12;
kaipés, Ro. iii. 26; viii. 18; xi.5; [2 Co. viii. 14 (13)]; 9
vov ‘lepovaadnp, Gal. iv. 25; of viv odpavoi, 2 Pet. iil. 7; od
THs mpos bpas vov (or yuri) amohoyias, Acts xxii. 1. Y:
7 vov with prepositions: dad tov viv (Sept. for NAY),
from this time onward, [A. V. from henceforth], Lk. i. 48:
v.10; xii. 52; xxii.69; Acts xviii.6; 2Co.v.16; dype
rov viv, RoMviii. 22; Phil. i.5; ws rod viv (Sept. for
Ay. yy), Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. xiii. 19. 2. Like our
now and the Lat. nunc, it stands in a conclusion or
sequence; as things now are, as the matter now stands ;
under these circumstances; in the present state of affairs ;
since these things are so; as itis: Lk. xi. 39 (vovi.e. since
ye are intent on observing the requirements of tradition ;
[but al. take vdv here of time —a covert allusion to a
former and better state of things]); Col. i. 24 [al. of
time; cf. Mey., Bp. Lghtft., Ellic. ad loc.]; xai viv, 1 Jn.
ii. 28; 2 Jn. 5; xal viv Sedpo, Acts vil. 34. viv d€ (and
yuvi dé see vuvi), but now; now however; but asit is; (often
in class. Grk.; ef. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 426; Matthiae ii. p.
1434 sq.; Kiihner § 498, 2 [or Jelf § 719, 2]): 1 Co.
vii. 14; Jas.iv. 16, and RG in Heb. ix. 26; esp. after a
conditional statement with «i and the indic. preterite,
Lk. xix. 42; Jn. viii. 40; ix. 41; xv. 22, 245 xviii. 36;
1 Co. xii. 20; [cf. B. § 151, 26]. In Rev. viv does not
occur. [Syn. see dpru. ]
vuvt (voy with iota demonstr. [Kriiger § 25, 6, 4 sq.;
Kihner § 180, e. (Jelf § 160, e.); Bitm. Gram. § 80, 2]),
in Attic now, at this very moment (precisely now, neither
before nor after; Lat. nunc ipsum), and only of Time,
almost always with the pres., very rarely with the fut.
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 19). Not found in the N. T.
exc. in the writ. of Paul and in a few places in Acts and
the Ep. to the Heb.; and it differs here in no respect
from the simple viv; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 182; [W.
235 1. of Time: with a pres. (Job xxx. 9), Acts
xxiv.13 LT Tr WH; Ro. xv. 23, 25; 1 Co. xiii. 13 (don
.. tore O€... vuvi S€); 2 Co. viii. 11, 22; Philem. 9, 11
(se. dvra); with a perf. indicating continuance, Ro. iii.
21 (al. refer this to 2]; with a preterite (Ps. xvi. (xvii.)
11), Ro. vi. 22 (opp. to rére); vii. 6; Eph. ii. 13 (opp.
to ev T@ KaLp@ exeiv@) se COle da 2272) {and iii. 8; also Ro.
xi. 30 WH mrg.], (opp. to tore); Col. i. 26[RGLmrg.;
cf. W. § 63 I. 2 b.: B. 382 (328)] (opp. to dé ray aidver);
vue
with a fut., Job vii. 21; Bar. vi. 4 (Ep. Jer. 3); 2 Mace.
x. 10; Hs mpos bwas vuri droXoylas, Acts xxii. 1. 2.
contrary to Grk. usage, in stating a conclusion (see
vov, 2), but since the case stands thus, [as it is]: 1 Co. [v.11
RGTLmrg.]; xiv. 6 RG (i.e. since 6 yAooon Nadav
without an interpretation cannot edify the church) ; but
now (Germ. so aber), Heb. ix. 26 LT Tr WH; after a
conditional statement with ei (see viv, fin.), Ro. vii. 17;
1 Co. xii. 18 [RGT WHnmrg.]; xv. 20; Heb. viii. 6
[here L Tr mrg. WH txt. viv], cf. 4; xi. 16 Rec., ef. 15;
[B. § 151, 26].*
w0§, gen. vuxros, 7, [fr. a root meaning ‘to disappear’;
ef. Lat. nox, Germ. nacht, Eng. night; Curtius § 94], (Sept.
for 9°5 and m0), [fr. Hom. down], night: Mk. vi. 48;
Acts xvi. 33; xxiii. 28; Jn. xiii. 30; Rev. xxi. 25; xxii.
5; wa 7 WE pH Hairy 76 Tpiroy airijs, i. e. that the night
should want a third part of the light which the moon and
the stars give it, Rev. viii. 12 [al. understand this of the
want of the light ete. for a third part of the night’s du-
ration]; gen. vukros, by night [W. § 30,11; B. § 1382,
26], Mt. ii. 14; xxviii. 13; Lk. ii. 8 [but note here the
article; some make ris vuxrds depend on gvaAakds];
Jn. iii. 2; Acts ix. 25; 1Th.v. 7; vuerds cai jpépas, Mk.
v.5; 1Th.ii.9; iii. 10; 1 Tim. v. 5, [where see Ellicott
on the order]; mpépas k. vuxros, Lk. xviii. 7; Acts ix.
24; Rev. iv. 8; vii. 15; xii. 10, etc.; péons vukros, at mid-
night, Mt. xxv. 6; in answer to the question when:
TavTn TH vukti, this night, Lk. xii. 20; xvii.34; Acts xxvii.
23; rh vuxti éxeivn, Acts xii. 6; TH émtovon v. Acts xxiii.
11; in answer to the question how long: vwvi«ra xal
jywepay, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xx. 831; xxvi. 7; differently in
Mk. iv. 27 (night and day, sc. applying himself to what
he is here said to be doing) ; ras vi«ras, during the nights,
every night, Lk. xxi. 37; vixras teooapdk. Mt. iv. 2;
tpeis, ib. xii. 40; dia ris vuKrds, see did, A. II. 1 b.; d0 Gdns
(tis) vuxrds, the whole night through, all night, Lk. v. 5;
év vuri, when he was asleep, Acts xviii. 9; (kdémrns) év
vuxti, 1 Th. v. 2, and Ree. in 2 Pet. iii. 10; &v rH vuxri,
in (the course of) the night, Jn. xi. 10; év r7 vukri ravry,
Mt. xxvi. 31,34; Mk. xiv. 30; év 77 vukti 9 KrA. 1 Co. xi.
23; kara pévov Tis vuxtos, about midnight, Acts xxvii. 27.
Metaph. the time when work ceases, i. e. the time of death,
Jn. ix. 4; the time for deeds of sin and shame, the time
of moral stupidity and darkness, Ro. xiii. 12; the time
[é, on its occasional substitution for o see 3, 0, s.]
tevia, -as, 9, (E€vios, -a, -ov, and this fr. Eévos), fr. Hom.
down, hospitality, hospitable reception; i.q. 4 lodging place,
lodgings: Acts xxviii. 23 (i. q.7o ploOe@pa in vs. 30 [but
this is doubtful; the more prob. opinion receives the
preference s. v. t81os, 1a.]); Philem. 22. [See esp. Bp.
Ughtft. on Phil. p. 9, and on Philem. 1. c.]*
431
Eevifes
when the weary and also the drunken give themselves up
to slumber, put for torpor and sluggishness, 1 Th. v. 5.
vicow (-rrw): 1 aor. évvéa; to strike [?], pierce; to
pierce through, transfix; often in Hom. of severe or even
deadly wounds given one; as, rov pev @yyxei oe’... orv-
yepos & dpa piv okoros eide, Il. 5, 45. 47; pédacas avrov
€xeivos virrer kdt@ber id Tov BouBdva dépare Kai mapaypnua
Svepya¢erat, Joseph. b. j- 3, 7, 85; so Hy mAevpav oyyxn,
Jn. xix. 34, cf. xx. 25,27. On the further use of the word
cf. Fritzsche, Rom. ii. p. 559. [Comp.: xara-vioow.]*
vuotd{e; 1 aor. evicra€a; (NYQ, cf. veto, vevoTal@) ;
Sept. for 033; 1. prop. to nod in sleep, to sleep,
(Hippocr., Arstph., Xen., Plato, al.); to be overcome or
oppressed with sleep; to fall asleep, drop off to sleep, [(cf.
Wiclif) to nap it]: Mt. xxv.5; Sept. for 0773, Ps. xxv.
(Ixxvi.) 7. 2. like the Lat. dormito [ef. our to be
napping], trop. i. q. to be negligent, careless, (Plat., Plut.,
al.): of a thing i. q. to linger, delay, 2 Pet. ii. 3.*
vuxOApEpov, -ov, 7d, (vVE and juepa), a night and a day,
the space of twenty-four hours: 2 Co. xi. 25. (Alex.
Aphr.; Geopon.) Cf. Sturz, De dial. Mac. etc. p. 186;
WSopieliexcismvasactanWies2oi =
NGe (Noeos, -ov, in Joseph. [antt. 1, 3, 1 sqq.]), 6, (m3
rest), Noah, the second father of the human race: Mt.
xxiv. 37 sq.; Lk. iii. 36; xvii. 26 sq.; Heb. xi. 7; 1 Pet.
iii. 20; 2 Pet. ii. 5.*
va0pds, -d, -dv, (i. q. vobns, fr. vn [cf. ynmos] and &béo
[to push; al. 6@ouaz to care about (cf. Vanicek p. 879) ],
cf. vaduvos, vevupos, fr. my and ddvvn, dvopa), slow, slug-
gish, indolent, dull, languid: Heb. vi. 12; with a dat. of
reference [W. § 31, 6a.; B. § 133, 21], rats dxoais, of one
who apprehends with difficulty, Heb. v.11; vo@pos kat
mapewpevos ev tois €pyous, Sir. iv. 29; vwOpds x. mapetpévos
€pyatns, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34,1. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.,
Dion. Hal., Anthol., al.) [SyN. see dpyos, fin.] *
v&tos, -ov, 6, [fr. root ‘to bend,’ ‘curve,’ akin to Lat.
natis; Ficki. 128; Vaniéek p. 420], the back: Ro. xi. 10
fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 24. (In Hom. 6 véros [“ the gend.
of the sing. is undetermined in Hom. and Hes.” (L. and
S.)], plur. ra véra; in Attic generally 76 vérov, very
rarely 6 vatos; plur. always ra véra; Sept. 6 varos, plur.
of vero; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 290; [Rutherford, New
Phryn. p. 351]; Passow [L. and S.] s. v.)*
ul
tevitw; 1 aor. eééwoa; Pass., pres. Eevi{ouat; 1 aor.
é€evicbnv; fr. Hom. down ; 1. to receive as a guest,
to entertain hospitably: twa, Acts x. 23; xxviii. 7; Heb.
xiii. 2; pass. to be received hospitably ; to stay as a guest,
to lodge (be lodged): évOdde, Acts x. 18; ev oikia twos,
Acts x. 32; mapatum, Acts x. 6; xxi.16 [cf. B. 284 (244);
W. 214 (201)], and sundry codd. in 1 Co. xvi. 19; (Diod..
Eevodoyéw
14, 30). 2. to surprise or astonish by the strangeness
and novelty of a thing (cf. Germ. befremden) : €evigovra
ria, Acts xvii. 20 (£evitovca mpdaowis kal karamAnkteKn,
Polyb. 3, 114,45; rdv bedv eee ro mpatrdpevor, Joseph.
antt. 1, 1,4; éevigovaa cvpdopai, 2 Mace. ix. 6); pass.
to be surprised, astonished at the novelty or strangeness of
athing; to think strange, be shocked: w. dat. of the thing
[W. § 31,1 f.], 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Polyb. 1, 23, 5; 3, 68, 9);
ev w. dat. of the thing [cf. B. § 133, 23], 1 Pet. iv. 4.*
tevoSoxéw (for the earlier form £evodoxéa in use fr. Hdt.
down; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307),-6: 1 aor. eEevoddynaa;
(Eevoddxos, i. e. E€vous Sexopevos) ; to receive and entertain
hospitably, to be hospitable: 1 Tim.v.10. (Dio Cass. 78,
3; [Graec. Ven. Gen. xxvi. 17; eccl. writ. ].) *
tévos, -n, -ov, fr. Hom. down, mase. a guest-friend (Lat.
hospes, [of parties bound by ties of hospitality]),i.e. 1.
a foreigner, stranger, (opp. to émywptos, Plat. Phaedoc. 2
p- 59 b.; Joseph. b. j. 5, 1, 3); a. prop.: Mt. xxv.
35, 38,43 sq. 3 XXvll. 7;
ras yns, Heb. xi. 13; of émdqwodvres E€vor, Acts xvii. 21 ;
opp. to ovpmodirns, Eph. ii. 19; (Sept. for NW & a travel-
ler, 2 S. xii. 4 cod. Alex.; for 4), Job xxxi. 32; sev-
eral times for 13)). [as adj. with] dayudma, Acts xvii.
18. b. trop. a. alien (from a person or thing) ;
without knowledge of, without a share in: with a gen. of
the thing, ray Svabnkav ris émayyeAtas, Eph. ii. 12[ef. W.
§ 30, 4, 6] (rov Adyov, Soph. O. T. 219). B. new, un-
heard of: dWaxai, Heb. xiii. 9; E€vov m1, a strange, won-
derful thing, 1 Pet. iv. 12 (Aeschyl. Prom. 688; Diod.
3, 15 and 52; al.). 2. one who receives and enter-
tains another hospitably; with whom he stays or lodges, a
host: 6 &€évos pov, Ro. xvi. 23, where kat ths éxkAnoias
dAns is added, i. e. either ‘who receives hospitably all
the members of the church who cross his threshold,’ or
‘who kindly permits the church to worship in his house’
(Fritzsche) .*
E€orys, -ov, 6, (a corruption of the Lat. sextarius) ; LS
a@ sextarius, i. e. a vessel for measuring liquids, holding
about a pint (Joseph. antt. 8, 2, 9— see Baros; Epict.
diss. 1, 9, 33; 2, 16, 22; [Dioscor.], Galen and med.
writ.). 2. a wooden pitcher or ewer (Vulg. urceus
[A. V.pot]) from which water or wine is poured, whether
holding a sextarius or not: Mk. vii. 4, 8 [here TWH
3 Jn. 5; E€vork. raperidnpor ert
om. Tr br. the cl. ].*
Enpatvw: 1 aor. eénpava (Jas. i. 11); Pass., pres. Enpai-
vouat; pf. 3 pers. sing. éénpavra: (Mk. xi. 21), ptep. é&y-
pappevos; 1 aor. e€npavOny; cf. B. 41 (86); (fr. Enpos, q
v.); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for wa. and vain; to
make dry, dry up, wither: act., rdv xoprov, Jas. i. 11; pass.
to become dry, to be dry, be withered [cf. B. 52 (45)] (Sept.
for w2)): of plants, Mt. xiii. 6; xxi. 19 sq.; Mk. iv. 6;
xi. 20 sq. 5 Lk. viii. 6; Jn. xv. 6; [1 Pet. i. ae] of the
Bape ans of crops, Bey. xiv.15; of fluids: 7 ™YM, Mk.
v.29; rd Udwp, Rev. xvi. 12, (Gen. vill. 7; Is. xix. 5); of
432
Evpaw
members of the body, to waste away, pine away: Mk. ix.
18; &&npappévy xeip, a withered hand, Mk. iii. 1, and RG
in 3.*
tnpés, -d, -dv, fr. Hdt. down, dry: 16 €ddov, Lk. xxiii.
31 (in a proverb. saying, ‘if a good man is treated vo,
what will be done to the wicked ?’ cf. Ps.i.3; Ezek. xx.
47. Is. lvi. 3; Ezek. xvii. 24) ; of members of the body
deprived of their natural juices, shrunk, wasted, withered :
as xeip, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii.3 L T Tr WH; Lk. vi. 6,8;
men are spoken of as &npoi, withered, Jn. v. 3. of the
land in distinction from water, 4 &npa sc. yn (Sept. for
nwa’, Gen. i. 9 sq.; Jon. i. 9; ii. 11, and often [W. 18:
592 (550) ]): sans xxlil. 15; mice xi. 29 where L T Tr
WH add yis.*
EbXwos, -ivn, -wov, (EvAov), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down,
wooden, made of wood: oxetn, 2 Tim. ii. 20; neut. plur.
cidwda, Rev. ix. 20 (Geol, Bar. vi. 30 [Ep. Jer. 29]).*
£bXov, -ov, Td, (fr. Ev to scrape, plane), fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 73); 1. wood: univ. 1 Co.iii.12; &. @vivoy,
Rev. xviii. 12; that which is made of wood, as a beam from
which any one is suspended, a gibbet, across, [A. V. tree,
q: v. in B.D. Am. ed.], Acts v. 30; x. 39; xiii. 29; Gal.
iii. 13; 1 Pet. ii. 24, (yy, Gen. xl. 19; Deut. xxi. 23;
Josh. x. 26; Esth. v.14), —a use not found in the classics
[ef. L. and S. s.v. II. 4]. A log or timber with holes in
which the feet, hands, neck, of prisoners were inserted
and fastened with thongs (Gr. xaAXov, Evdomédn, 7odoKdKn,
modootpaBn, Lat. nervus, by which the Lat. renders the
Hebr. 40, a fetter, or shackle for the feet, Job [xiii. 27];
xxxiil. 11; cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 458 sqq.;
[B. D. s. v. Stocks]): Acts xvi. 24 (Hdt. 6, 75; 9, 37;
Arstph. eq. 367, 394, 705); a cudgel, stick, staff: plur.,
Mt. xxvi. 47,55; Mk. xiv. 43, 48; Lk. xxii. 52, (Hdt.
2,63; 4,180; Dem. p. 645,15; Polyb. 6,37, 3; Joseph.
bea 2e9nes Hdianaded, 4). 2. a tree: Lk. xxiii.
31 (Gen. i. 29; ii. 9; iii. 1; Is. xiv. 8, ete.); & ris Cons,
see (on, 2 b. p. 274".
[Edv, older form of ody, retained occasionally in com-
pounds, as £upBuiva, 1 Pet. iv. 12 ed. Bezae ; see Meister-
hans § 49, 11; L. and S. @ v. ov», init.; and cf. 5, c, s.j
Evpdw (a later form, fr. Diod. [1, 84] down, for éupéw,
which the earlier writ. used fr. Hdt. down; [W. 24; B.
63 (55); esp. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 53]), -6: pf. pass.
ptep. éfupnuévos; Mid., pres. inf. EvpacGac [for which
some would read (1 Co. xi. 6) Evpac6at (1 aor. mid. inf.
fr. Evpo); see WH. App. p. 166]; 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers.
plur. Evpno@rrae [but T Tr WH read the fut. -covrac] ;
(fr. Evpoy a razor, and this fr. £6w); Sept. for m3; to
shear, shave: pass. 1 Co. xi. 5; mid. to get one’s self shaved,
ibid. vs. 6; 1 Co. xi. 6; with an ace. specifying the obj.
more precisely [cf. B. § 134, 7; W. § 32,5]: riv xepadny,
Acts xxi. 24 (Sept. Num. vi. 9, 19; Lev. xxi. 53 ras
dppvas, Hdt. 2, 66; rd cdpa, 2, 37).*
438
O
6, t, 76, originally rés, 7, 7d, (as is evident from the
forms roi, rai for oi, ai in Hom. and the Ionic writ.), cor-
responds to our definite article the (Germ. der, die, das),
which is properly a demonstrative pronoun, which we
see in its full force in Homer, and of which we find cer-
tain indubitable traces also in all kinds of Greek prose,
and hence also in the N. T.
I. As a DEMONSTRATIVE Pronoun; Lat. hic, haec,
hoc; Germ. der, die, das, emphatic; cf. W. § 17, 1; B.
101 (89) sq. ; 1. in the words of the poet Aratus, rod
yap kal yévos éopeév, quoted by Paul in Acts xvii. 28. 2
in prose, where it makes a partition or distributes into
parts: 6 pev...6 dé, that... this, the one... the other:
Mt. xiii. 23 R G Tr [here the division is threefold]; Gal.
iv. 23 [here L WH Tr mrg. br. wév]; of pév . . . of dé, Acts
XxXviil. 24; Phil. i. 16 sq.; of pev... 6 Oe, Heb. vii. 5 sq.
20 (21), 23 sq.; Tovs pev... rovs dé, Mk. xii. 5 RG;
Eph. iv. 11; of pev... Grou Sé (Lehm. of 6) . . . erepou
6é, Mt. xvi. 14 cf. Jn. vii. 12; reves foll. by ot dé, Acts
Xvii. 18; ds (see ds I.) pév foll. by 6 dé, Ro. xiv. 2; of dé
stands as though oi pev had preceded, Mt. xxvi.67; xxviii.
17. 3. in narration, when either two persons or
two parties are alternately placed in opposition to each
other and the discourse turns from one to the other; 6
bé, but he, and he, (Germ. er aber): Mt. ii. 143 iv.4; xxi.
29 sq.; Mk. i. 45; xii. 15; Lk. viii. 21, 30,48; xxii. 10,
34; Jn. ix. 38, and very often; plur., Mt. ii. 5,9; iv. 20;
Mk. xii. 14 [RGLmrg.], 16 [Lbr. of 5€]; Lk. vii. 4;
xx. 5,12; xxii. 9, 38, 71; Actsiv. 21; xii. 15, and often;
of pev ovv, in the Acts alone: i. 6; v.41; xv. 3, 30; 6
pev ovv, Xxill. 18; xxviii. 5.
II. As the Derrnite or PREepOsITIVE ARTICLE (to
be distinguished from the post positive article, —as
it is called when it has the force of a relative pro-
noun, like the Germ. der, die, das, exx. of which use are
not found in the N. T.), whose use in the N. T. is ex-
plained at length by W. §§ 18-20; B. 85 (74) sqq-;
[Green p. 5 sqq.]. As in all languages the article serves
to distinguish things, persons, notions, more exactly, it
is prefixed 1. to substantives that have no mod-
ifier; and a. those that designate a person or a
thing that is the only one of its kind; the art. thus dis-
tinguishes the same from all other persons or things, as
6 Hdu0s, 6 odpavds, 7 yn, } Oddaoaa, 6 eds, 6 Aoyos (Jn. i.
1 sq.), 6 d:dBoros, Td Pas, H oKoria, 7 (wn, 6 Bavaros,
ete. b. appellative names of persons and things defi-
nite enough in themselves, or made so by the context,
or sufficiently well-known from history; thus, to the
names of virtues and vices, as 4 Sukavoovvn, 7 copia, 7
Sivapyis, 7 GAnOera, etc. 6 eoxopevos, the well-known per-
€
o
sonage who is to come, i. e. the Messiah, Mt. xi. 3; Lk. vii.
19; 6 mpodyrns, the (promised and expected) prophet,
Jn. i. 21; vii. 40; 4 cernpia, the salvation which all
good men hope for, i. e. the Messianic salvation; 4
ypapn, ete.; 1 veédn, the cloud (well known from the
O. T.), 1 Co. x. 1 sq.; rods dyyédous, Jas. ii. 25; 76
extpapartt, 1 Co. xv. 8. to designations of eminent per-
Sonages: 6 vids Tov Oeod, 6 vids Tod advOpamov, (see vids) ;
6 duddoxados Tod "Iopana, Jn. iii. 10; cf. Fritzsche on Mk.
p- 613. The article is applied to the repeated name of
a person or thing already mentioned or indicated, and
to which the reader is referred, as rods ydyous, Mt. ii. 7
ef. 1; of doxot, Mt.ix.17; of daipoves, Mt. viii. 31 cf. 28;
tHv dvov Kat Tov meAov, Mt. xxi. 7 cf. 2, and countless
other exx. The article is used with names of things
not yet spoken of, in order to show that definite things
are referred to, to be distinguished from others of the
same kind and easily to be known from the context; as
ta Bpedy, the babes belonging to the people of that
place, Lk. xviii. 15; dé ray dévdpav, sc. which were
there, Mt. xxi. 8; 7 iepei, to the priest whose duty it
will be to examine thee, when thou comest, Mt. viii. 4;
Mk. i. 44; Lk. v.14; 76 mdoiov, the ship which stood
ready to carry them over, Mt. viii. 23 [RG‘T, cf. 18];
ix. 1 [RG]; xiii. 2[RG]; 76 dpos, the mountain near
the place in question (der an Ort u. Stelle befindliche
Berg) [but some commentators still regard ré épos as
used here generically or Hebraistically like 1 dpewy, the
mountain region or the highlands, in contrast with the
low country, (cf. Sept. Josh. xvii. 16; xx. 7; Gen.
xix. 17, 19, etc.); cf. Bp. Lghtft. ‘Fresh Revision’ ete.
p- 111 sq.; Weiss, Matthiusevangelium, p. 129 note; and
in Meyer’s Mt. 7te Aufl.], Mt. v.1; Mk. iii. 13; Lk.
ix. 28; Jn. vi. 3, 15, (1 Mace. ix. 38, 40); % oixia, the
house in which (Jesus) was wont to lodge, Mt. ix. 10,
28; xiii. 36; xvii. 25; tad rov podioy, sc. that is in the
house, Mt. v.15; also émt rv Avyviay, ibid.; év rH harvn,
in the manger of the stable of the house where they
were lodging, Lk. ii. 7 RG; 6 émawos, the praise of
which he is worthy, 1 Co. iv. 5; so everywhere in the
doxologies: 1 S0&a, rd kpdros, 1 Pet. iv. 11; Rev. v. 13,
ete. c. The article prefixed to the Plural often
either includes all and every one of those who by the
given name are distinguished from other things having
a different name, —as oi dorépes, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii.
253; ai ddarexes, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58, ete.; —or de-
fines the class alone, and thus indicates that the whole
class is represented by the individuals mentioned, how-
ever many and whosoever they may be; as in of api-
@aiot, of ypappareis, of TeA@vai, ol dvOperot, people, the
o 434 6
multitude, (Germ. die Leute); oi derot, Mt. xxiv. 28;
tas kvotv, Mt. vii. 6. d. The article prefixed to the
Singular sometimes so defines only the class, that all and
every one of those who bear the name are brought to
mind; thus, 6 dvOpwros, Mt. xv. 11; 6 eOvkos x. reAwvns,
Mt. xviii. 17; 6 épyarns, Lk. x. 7; 1 Tim. v.18; 6 pecirns,
Gal. iii. 20; 6 KAnpovopos, Gal. iv. 1; 6 Sikavos, Ro. i. 17;
Heb. x. 38; 7a onpeia rod dmoordAov, the signs required
of any one who claims to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12,
and other exx. e. The article is prefixed to the
nominative often put for the vocative in addresses [cf.
W. § 29, 2; B. § 129a.5]: xaipe 6 Baoweds trav "Iovd.
(prop. od 6 Bac., thou who art the king), Jn. xix. 3; vai, 6
ararnp, Mt. xi. 26; aye viv ot mAovotot, kavoare, Jas. Vv. 1;
ovpave kai of dytor, Rev. xviii. 20; add, Mk. v.41; x. 47;
Lk. xii. 82; xvili. 11,13; Jn. vill. 10; xx. 28; Acts xiii.
41; Ro. viii. 15; Eph. v. 14, 22, 25; vi.1,4sq.; Rev. xii.
12. f. The Greeks employ the article, where we
abstain from its use, before nouns denoting things that
pertain to him who is the subject of discourse: ete or
not peyadyn 77 porn, Acts xiv. 10 [RG]; xxvi. 24, (Prov.
XXVi. 25); yuyn mpocevxopevn ... dkatakahUnT@ TH Ke-
gadj, 1 Co. xi. 5; esp. in the expression éyew re, when
the object and its adjective, or what is equivalent to an
adjective, denotes a part of the body or something else
which naturally belongs to any one (as in French, i/ a
les epaules larges) ; so, éxewv THY xeipa Enpav, Mt. xii. 10
RG; Mk. iii. 1; 1d rpdc@mor ws avOpamov [ (Rec. dvOpa-
mos) ], Rev. iv. 7; ra aic@nrnpia yeyvpvacpeva, Heb. v.
14; amapaBarov thy iepwovyny, Heb. vii. 24; tH Katoiknow
«th. Mk. v. 3; thy els Eavtods ayamny éxrevy, 1 Pet. iv. 8.
Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 25. the gen. of a pers. pron.
avtov, vpor, is added to the substantive: Mt. iii.4; Mk.
Vili. 17; Rev. ii. 18; 1 Pet. ii. 12, cf. Eph. 1. 18; cf. W.
SUS eo aD eseleovolle g. Proper Names some-
times have the article and sometimes are anarthrous; cf.
W. § 18, 5 and 6; B. § 124, 3 and 4; [Green p. 28
sq: |; a. as respects names of Persons, the person
without the article is simply named, but with the article
is marked as either well known or as already mentioned;
thus we find "Incovs and 6 "Ins., HadAos and 6 THadi., ete.
Il.Aaros has the article everywhere in John’s Gospel and
also in Mark’s, if xv. 43 (in R GL) be excepted (but T
Tr WH insert the article there also); Tiros is every-
where anarthrous. Indeclinable names of persons
in the oblique cases almost always have the article,
unless the case is made evident by a preposition: TO
"Ioonp, Mk. xv. 45; rov lax kai rov’Hoad, Heb. xi. 20,
and many other exx., esp. in the genealogies, Mt. i. 1
sqq.; Lk. ili. 23; but where perspicuity does not require
the article, it is omitted also in the oblique cases, as ray
vidv "loon, Heb. xi. 21; rév vidv Eupop, Acts vii. 16;
6 Obs "Ioadk, Mt. xxii. 32; Acts vii. 32; drav ovrno be
*"ABpady x. "Ioadk ... kal mdvras rods mpopyras, Lk. xiii.
28. The article is commonly omitted with personal
proper names to which is added an apposition indicating
the race, country, office, rank, surname, or something
"ABpadp 6 marnp jpav, In. viii. 56; Ro. iv. 1; ‘IdcaBov
rov Tod ZeBedalov Kat "lwavyny rov ddeddov adrod, Mt. iv.
21; Mapia 7 Maydadnvy, Mt. xxvii. 56, etc.; “Iwdvyns 6
Barriorns, Mt. ili. 1; ‘Hpwdns 6 rerpapxns, Lk. ix. 73
"Inoots 6 Aeyopevos Xproros, Mt. i. 16; SavdAos dé 0 Kat
IladAos sc. kadovpevos, Acts xiii. 9; Sipavos tov Aempov,
Mk. xiv. 3; Bapripaos 6 tupdds, Mk. x. 46 [RG]; Zaya-
piov rov drodopevov, Lk. xi. 51. But there are excepe>
tions also to this usage: 6 d¢ ‘Hpadns 6 tetpdpxns, Lk. iit,
19; roy SaovA, vidv Kis, Acts xiii. 21; in the opening
of the Epistles: TatAos amoarodos, Ro. i. 1; 1 Co. i.
1, ete. B. Proper names of countries and re
gions have the article far more frequently than those
of cities and towns, for the reason that most names of
countries, being derived from adjectives, get the force of
substantives only by the addition of the article, as 9
’Ayaia (but cf. 2 Co. ix. 2), 7 Tadaria, 7 Tadvdaia, 7 “Ira-
ia, 7) Iovdala, 7 Maxedovia (but cf. Ro. xv. 26; 1 Co. xvi.
5), ete. Only Atyumros, if Acts vii. 11 L T Tr WH be
excepted, is everywhere anarthrous. The names of
cities, esp. when joined to prepositions, particularly ev,
eis and ék, are without the article; but we find amo (RG
ex) ths ‘Popns in Acts xviil. 2. y. Names of rivers
and streams have the article in Mt. iii. 13; Mk. 1. 5;
Lk. iv.1; xiii. 4; Jn. i. 28; rov Kédpoy, Jn. xviii. 1 GL
Tr mre. 2. The article is prefixed to substan-
tives expanded and more precisely defined by modi-
fiers; a. to nouns accompanied by a gen. of the
pronouns pov, cov, Nuav, Luar, avTod, €avTady, ad’rav: Mt.
1. 215.25 > v.45) VielO—1 255 xii. 49S Mika xo 7 elu kevte
27; x.7; xvi.6; Acts xix. 25 [L2 Ir WH gu]; Ro.
iv. 19; vi. 6, and in numberless other places; it is rarely
omitted, as in Mt. xix. 28; Lk. i. 72; ii. 832; 2 Co. viii.
23's Jas. v.520, CtC5 CL. Sl TET. b. The pos-
sessive pronouns éuds, ods, nuérepos, tuerepos, joined to
substantives (if Jn. iv. 34 be excepted) always take the
article, and J ohn generally puts them after the substan-
tive (7 kpiows 9 €un, Jn. v. 30; 6 Adyos 6 ads, XVii. 173 9
kowevia 7 nuetepa, 1 Jn. i. 3; 6 Katpos 6 byérepos, IN. Vil.
6), very rarely between the article and the substantive
(rots nots pnyaoww, Jn. v.47; 9 eun ddayy, vii. 16; rH
onv adidy, iv. 42), yet this is always done by the other
N. T. writ., Mt. xviii. 20; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 26; Acts
xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi. 5; Ro. iii. 7, ete. c. When
adjectives are added to substantives, either the ad-
jective is placed between the article and the substantive,
—as 16 ido hopriov, Gal. vi. 5; 6 dyabds dvOpwros, Mt.
xl. 355 tHv Steaiay xpiow, Jn. vii. 24; 9) dyaOy pepes, Lk.
X.42; 7d dyov mvedpa, Lk. xii. 10; Acts i. 8; 4 ai@mos
(an, Jn. xvii. 3, and many other exx.;—or the adjective
preceded by an article is placed after the substantive
with its article, as rd mvedua TO dytov, Mk. iii. 29; In.
xiv. 26; Actsi.16; Heb. iii. 7; ix.8; x.15; 9 (ay Ui]
ai@vos, 1 Jn.i.2; ii. 25; 6 wouny 6 kadds, Jn. x. 11; TH
muAny tiv odnpay, Acts xii. 10, and other exx.;— very
rarely the adjective stands before a substantive which
has the article, as in Acts [xiv. 10 RG]; xxvi. 24; 1 Co.
else, (cf. Matthiae § 274) ; let the foll. suffice as exx.: | xi. 5, [cf. B. § 125, 5; W. § 20,1¢.]. As to the adjex
re) 435 é
tives of quantity, ddos, mas, mods, see each in its own
place. d. What has been said concerning adjec-
tives holds true also of all other limitations added to
substantives, as 4 Kar’ éxdoyyy mpdbeows, Ro. ix. 11; 4
map épod diadnkn, Ro. xi. 27; 6 Néyos 6 TOV aravpod, 1 Co.
1.183 7 eis Xpiorov riots, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand,
7) Tlotis bua H mpods Tov Oedv, 1 Th. i. 8; rhs Scakovias rhs
eis Tos dyiovs, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each
usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e.
The noun has the article before it when a demonstra-
tive pronoun (otros, éxeivos) belonging to it either pre-
cedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, 6
GOpwros obros, Jn. ix. 24 [odros 6 dvOp. L Trmrge. WH];
‘Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; 6 Aads odros, Mt. xv. 83; 6 vids cov
otros, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless
other exx.; otros 6 avOpwmos, Lk. xiv. 30; odros 6 dads,
Mk. vii. 6 [o X. of. L WH mrg.|; odTos 0 vidos pov, Lk.
xv. 24; obros 6 rehovns, Lk. xviii. 11 [6 red. od7. Lmrg.];
ovros 6 Aodyos, Jn. vii. 36 [6 doy. odr. LT Tr WH], and
many other exx. on ékeivos, see éxeivos, 2; on airds 6
etc., see adros (I. 1 b. etc.); on 6 airéds ete., see adrés,
Il. 3. The neuter article prefixed to adjec-
tives changes them into substantives [cf. W. § 34, 2; B.
§ 128, 1]; as, ro dyaOov, rd Kkaddv (which see each in its
place); ro €Aarrov, Heb. vii. 7; with a gen. added, 76
yvecrtoy tov Geod, Ro. i. 19; 1rd advvarov tod vomov, Ro.
Vili. 3; To doOeves Tod Geov, 1 Co. i. 25; adrfs, Heb. vii.
18; ra ddépata r. Oeot, Ro. i. 20; ra xpumrra tis aicyvvns,
2 Co. iv. 2, ete. 4. The article with cardinal nu-
merals: eis one; 6 eis the one (of two), see eis, 4 a.;
but differently 6 eis in Ro. v. 15, 17, the (that) one. So
also of dvo (our the twain), Mt. xix. 5; of déka the (those)
ten, and oi évvea, Lk. xvii. 17; ékeivoe of Seka (kal) OxTa,
Lk. xiii. 4. 5. The article prefixed to partici-
ples a. gives them the force of substantives [W.
§§ 18,3; 45,7; B.§§ 129,1b.; 144,9]; as, 0 weupacay,
Mt. iv. 3; 1 Th. iii. 5; 6 Bamri¢wv, Mk. vi. 14 (for which
Mt. xiv. 2 6 Bamtiotns); 6 oreipwv, Mt. xiii. 3; Lk. viii.
5; 6 dAoOpevor, Heb. xi. 28; of Baordgovres, Lk. vii. 14;
of Bookovres, Mt. viii. 33; Mk. v.14; of eoOiovres, the
eaters (convivae), Mt. xiv. 21; ro ddesAopevov, Mt. xviii.
30, 34; ra vmdpxovra (see imrdpxa, 2). b. the ptcp.
with the article must be resolved into he who [and a fin.
verb; cf. B.§ 144, 9]: Mt. x. 40; Lk. vi. 29; xi. 23; Jn.
xv. 23; 2 Co. i. 21; Phil. ii. 13, and very often. mas 6
foll. by a ptep. [W. 111 (106) ], Mt. v. 22; vii. 26; Lk. vi.
30 (T WHom.L Trmrg. br. art.]; xi. 10; Ro. ii. 1; 1 Co.
xvi. 16; Gal. iii. 18, etc.; paxapios 6 w. a ptep., Mt. v. 4
(5), 6, 10, ete.; oval ipiv of w. a ptep., Lk. vi. 25; the
neut. ré with a ptcp. must be resolved into that which
[with a fin. verb], 7d yevydpevor, Lk. i. 35; 70 yeyevunpe-
vov, Jn. iii. 6. ce. the article with ptcp. is placed in
apposition: Mk. iii. 22; Acts xvii. 24; Eph. ili. 20; iv.
22,24; 2 Tim.i. 14; 1 Pet. i. 21, ete. 6. The neut.
76 before infinitives a. gives them the force of
substantives (cf. B. 261 (225) sqq. [ef. W. § 44, 2a.; 3 ¢.]);
as, rb xabioa, Mt. xx. 22; Mk. x. 40; ro dédew, Ro. vii.
18; 2Co. viii. 10; 7d moujoat, 7d emiredeoat, 2 Co. viii. 11,
and other exx.; rodro kpivare* 16 pi) reOévat ktd. Ro. xiv.
13. On the infin. w. the art. depending on a preposi-
tion (dyri rod, év 76, eis 76, etc.), see under each prep. in
its place. b. Much more frequent in the N. T. than
in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ., esp. in the
writings of Luke and Paul (nowhere in John’s Gospel
and Epistles), is the use of the gen. rod w. an inf. (and
in the Sept. far more freq. than in the N. T.), which is
treated of at length by Fritzsche in an excursus at the
end of his Com. on Mt. p. 843 sqq.; W. § 44,4; B. 266
(228) sqq. The examples fall under the foll. classes:
tov with an inf. is put a. after words which natu-
rally require a genitive (of a noun also) after them;
thus after d&vov, 1 Co. xvi. 4; @daxe, Lk. i. 9 (1 S. xiv. 47);
efarropovpat, 2 Co. i. 8. B. for the simple expletive
[i. e. ‘complementary ’] or (as it is commonly called)
epexegetical infin., which serves to fill out an incom-
plete idea expressed by a noun or a verb or a phrase,
(where in Germ. zu is commonly used) ; thus after mpo-
Oupia, 2 Co. viii. 11; Bpadeis, Lk. xxiv. 25; édmis, Acts
Xxvii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 10 [not Ree.]; éfnree edxarpiay, Lk.
xxii. 6 [not Lmrg.]; 6 karpds (se. eari) rod adp~acOa, to
begin, 1 Pet. iv. 17 (karpov ¢yew w. the simple inf. Heb.
xi. 15); d:d0vae rHv eEovotav, Lk. x. 19 (e€ovciav eyew
with simple inf., Jn. xix. 10; 1 Co. ix. 4); égerérae
éopev (equiv. to ddeiAouev), Ro. viii. 12 (with inf. alone,
Gal. v. 3); roto eivar, Acts xxiii. 15 (1 Mace. iii. 58;
v. 39; xiii. 37; with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 33); ypeiav
éyew, Heb. v.12; edwxev dpOadpovs rod pr Bdérew kal
dra Tod pu) dxovew, that they should not see . . . that they
should not hear [cf. B. 267 (230) ], Ro. xi. 8 (€yew ara
elsewh. always with a simple inf.; see ods, 2); émAjo0n
6 xpovos Tov Tekeiv avtny, at which she should be deliv-
ered [cf. B. 1. c.], Lk.i.57; emAnod. nuépar . . . row mepi-
repetv avrov, that they should circumcise him [cef. B. 1. ¢.],
Lk. ii. 21; after avévdexrov éorw, Lk. xvii. 1 [so B. § 140,
15; (W. 828 (308) otherwise) ]; quite unusually after
éyevero [cf. B. § 140, 16 8.; W.1.¢.], Acts x. 25 [Ree.
om. art. |. y. after verbs of deciding, entreat-
ing, exhorting, commanding, etce.: after kpivew
(see kpiva, 4); eyévero youn [-uns T Tr WH (see yivopa,
5e.a.)], Acts xx. 3; 16 mpoowmov éeornpiéev, Lk. ix. 51;
cuvridecOa, Acts xxiii. 20 (with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 5);
mpocevxerOat, Jas. v.17; mapaxadeiv, Acts xxi. 12; &»
réd\reo Oat, Lk. iv. 10; émuorédAdew, Acts xv. 20 (with inf.
alone, xxi. 25[R GT, but L Tr txt. WH here drooren. ; B.
270 (232)]); karavevew, Lk. v. 7. 8. after verbs of
hindering, restraining, removing, (which natu-
rally require the genitive), and according to the well-
known pleonasm with py before the inf. [see py, I. 4 a.;
B. § 148, 13; W. 325 (305)]; thus, after caréxo rid, Lk.
iv. 42; kparovpa, Lk. xxiv. 16; kodvo, Acts x. 47; dmo-
aréd\Nopa, Acts xx. 20, 27; mavw, 1 Pet. iii. 10; «ara-
mavw, Acts xiv. 18; without 7 before the inf. after
éyxorropat, Ro. xv. 22. ¢. rod with an inf. is added
as a somewhat loose epexegesis: Lk. xxi. 22; Acts ix.
15; xiii. 47; Phil. iii. 215 eis dxaOapciay rod aripdtec Oa
ra cmpara airay, to the uncleanness of their bodies’ be-
0 436 6
ing dishonored, Ro. i. 24 [cf. B. § 140, 14]; W. 325
(305) sq. {. it takes the place of an entire final
clause, in order that [W.§ 44,4 b.; B.§ 140,17]; esp.
after verbs implying motion: Mt. ii. 13; iii. 13; ill, oy
xxiv. 45; Mk. iv. 3 (where LT WHom. Trbr. rod) ; Lk.
i. 77, 79; ii. 24,27; v.1([RGLtxt. Trmrg.]; viii. 5;
xii. 42 (here Lom. Tr br. rod); xxii. 31; xxiv. 29; Acts
iii. 2; xx. 30; xxvi. 18; Ro. vi. 6; xi. 10; Gal. iii. 10;
PhilpniglOrehebsax. 719 sexino y. used of result,
so that: Acts vii. 19; Ro. vii. 3; after woud, to cause that,
make to, Acts iii. 12; [cf. W. 326 (306); B. § 140,
16 6.]. 7. The article with adverbs [B. § 125,
10 sq.; W. § 18, 3], a. gives them the force of sub-
stantives; as, ré mépay, the region beyond; ra dve, ra
Kdro, To vov, Ta éumpoobev, Ta dmicw, etc.; see these
words in their proper places. b. is used when they
stand adjectively, as 7 dvw ‘Iepovaadnp, 6 Tore KOopos, 6
érw dvOpwros, 6 vov aiay, etc., on which see these several
words. c. the neut. vo is used in the ace. absol., esp.
in specifications of time: both with adverbs of time, 7d
madw, 2 Co. xiii. 2; ra vov or raviv, and with neuter ad-
jectives used adverbially, as 7d Aowrov, 76 Tporepov (Jn.
vi. 62; Gal. iv. 13); 7d mpdrov (Jn. x. 40; xii. 16; xix.
39); 76 mdetorov (1 Co. xiv. 27); see these words them-
selves. 8. The article before prepositions with
their cases is very often so used that dv, dvres, dvra,
must be supplied in thought [ef. B. § 125, 9; W.§ 18, 3];
thus, of dmé “IraXias, dwé Oecoadovikns, Acts xvii. 13;
Heb. xiii. 24 [cf. W. § 66, 6]; 6 & run, Mt. vi. 9;. Ro.
viii. 1; neut. ra mpos, Mk. ii. 2; of 2k twos, Ro. ii. 8; iv.
14, 16; Phil. iv. 22 ete.; of mapa twos, Mk. iii. 21 (see
mapd, l.e.). ta mepi twos, Lk. xxiv. 19; Acts xxiv. 10;
Phil. i. 27; [add, ra (1 Tr WH 16) wepi epod, Lk. xxii.
37], etc. (see wepi, I. b. 8.) ; ra epi twa, Phil. ii. 23 [see
epi, I. b.]; of perd ruvos, those with one, his compan-
ions, Mt. xii. 3; of mepé teva, and many other exx. which
are given under the several prepositions. the neut. rd
in the acc. absol. in adverbial expressions [cf. W. 230
(216); B. §§ 125,12; 131, 9]: 1d KaO rpépav, daily, day
by day, Lk. xi. 3; xix. 47; Acts xvii. 11 [RG WH br.];
76 kaOodov, at all, Acts iv. 18 [LT WH om. 14];_ besides,
in To kara odpka, as respects human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [on
the force of the art. here see Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl.
Lit. etc. for 1883, p. 108]; ra kar’ éué, as respects what
relates to me, my state, my affairs, Col. iv. 7; Eph. vi.
21; 7d e& duay, as far as depends on you, Ro. xii. 18;
To ed’ ipiv, as far as respects you, if I regard you, Ro.
xvi. 19 RG; ra mpds (rov) Oedv, ace. absol., as respects
the things pertaining to God, i. e. in things pertaining
to God, Ro. xv. 17; Heb. ii. 17; v. 1, (iepet ra mpds rods
Geovs, arparny@ S82 ra mpds rods dvOpdmovs, Xen. resp.
Laced. 13, 11; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p- 262 sq.);
TO €k pépous sc. dv, that which has been granted us in
part, that which is imperfect, 1 Co. xiii. 10. 9.
The article, in all genders, when placed before the geni-
tive of substantives indicates kinship, affinity, or some
kind of connection, association or fellowship, or in gen-
eral that which in some way pertains to a person or thing
[cf. W. § 30, 3; B. § 125, 7]; a. the masc. and the
fem. article: "IdkwBos 6 tod ZeBedaiov, 6 Tod ’AApaiov,
the son, Mt. x. 2 (3), 3; Mapia 9 Tod “IaxwBov, the
mother, Mk. xvi. 1 [T om. Tr br. tov]; Lk. xxiv. 10 [L
T Tr WH]; ’Eppip rod Svxéu, of Hamor, the father of
Shechem, Acts vii. 16 RG; 7 rod Ovpiov, the wife, Mt.
i. 6; of XAdqs, either the kinsfolk, or friends, or domes-
tics, or work-people, or slaves, of Chloe, 1 Co.i.11; also
of ’ApiotoBovAov, of Napkiooov, Ro. xvi. 10 sq.3 of rod
Xptorod, the followers of Christ [A. V. they that are
Christ’s], 1 Co. xv. 23 GL T Tr WH; Gal. v. 24; of ray
fapicaiar, the disciples of the Pharisees, Mk. ii. 18* Rec.,
18° RGL; Kawapeia 7 SiXinrov, the city of Philip, Mk.
vili. 27. b. 76 and ra tivos: as ta Tov Geov, the cause
or interests, the purposes, of God, opp. to ra trav avOpa-
mov, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; in the same sense ra rou
kupiov, opp. to ra Tod Kéopov, 1 Co. vil. 32-34; ra rhs
capkés, Ta TOU mvevparos, Ro. viii. 5; ra buoy, your pos-
sessions, 2 Co. xii. 14; (yreiv ré or ra Twos, 1 Co. x. 24;
xiii. 5; Phil. ii. 21; 7a rs eipnuns, THs oikoSoujns, which
make for, Ro. xiv. 19; ra ris doOeveias pov, which per-
tain to my weakness, 2 Co. xi. 30; rad Kaicapos, Ta
Tov Geov, due to Cesar, due to God, Mt. xxii. 21; Mk.
xii. 17; Lk. xx. 25; ra rod vymiov, the things wont
to be thought, said, done, by a child, 1 Co. xiii. 11; ra
tivos, the house of one (ra AvKcwvos, Theocr. 2, 763; [eis
ra Tod adeAdod, Lysias c. Eratosth. § 12 p. 195]; cf. &v
rois marpxois, in her father’s house, Sir. xlii. 10; [Chry-
sost. hom. lii. (on Gen. xxvi. 16), vol. iv. pt. ii. col.
458 ed. Migne; Gen. xli. 51; Esth. vii. 9, (Hebr. m3) ;
Job xviii. 19 (Hebr. 13379)]); with the name of a deity,
the temple (ra tod Ads, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 18, 2; also 76
tov Acs, Lycurg. adv. Leocr. p. 231 [(orat. Att. p. 167,
15)]), Lk. ii. 49 (see other exx. in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 100).
Ta Tov vduov, the precepts of the (Mosaic) law, Ro. ii.
14; 16 ris mapounias, the (saying) of (that which is said
in) the proverb, 2 Pet. ii. 22; ra rev Sapo opever,
what the possessed had done and experienced, Mt. viii.
33; 7d THs ovKns, What has been done to the fig-tree, Mt.
0.05 Pil 10. The neuter 7d is put a. before
entire sentences, and sums them up into one conception
[B. § 125, 13; W. 109 (103 sq.)]: etrev aire 16 Ei dvva-
oa moredoat, said to him this: ‘If thou canst believe’,
Mk. ix. 23 [but L T Tr WH 16 Ei dvvy ‘If thou canst!’];
ef. Bleek ad loc.; [Riddell, The Apology etc. Digest of
Idioms §19 y.]. before the sayings and precepts of the
O. T. quoted in the New: 16 0d dovedoes, the precept,
‘Thou shalt not kill’, Mt. xix. 18; add, Lk. xxii. 37
(where Lehm. ér: for ro); Ro. xiii. 9; [1 Co. iv. 6 LT
Tr WH]; Gal.v.14. before indir. questions: 1é ris etc.,
TO ti etc., TO mas ete., Lk. i. 62; ix. 46; xix. 48; xxii. 2,
4, 23 sq.; Actsiv. 21; xxii. 30; Ro. vill. 26; 1 Th. iv.1;
cf. Matthiae § 280; Kriiger § 50, 6, 10; Passow ii.
p- 395°; [L. and S.s. v. B. I. 3 sq.]. b. before single
words which are explained as parts of some discourse
or statement [reff. as above]: ré”Ayap, the name ”Ayap,
Gal. iv. 25 [T Ltxt. WH mrg. om. Tr br. “Ayap]; 73
‘av€Bn’, this word dvéBn, Eph. iv. 9, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
by ,
oySonkovta
Gal. L c.]; 1d ‘ér dat’, Heb. xii. 27; cf. Matthiae ii.
p- 731 sq.
ovai (apparently because the interjection was to the
writer a substitute for the term 4 mAnyf or 4 Odie [W.
179 (169)]), misery, calamity, [A. V. the Woe], in Rev.
ix. 123 xi. 14.
TIT. Since it is the business, not of the lexicographer,
but of the grammarian, to exhibit the instances in which
the article is omitted in the N. T. where according to the
laws of our language it would have been expected, we
refer those interested in this matter to the Grammars of
Winer (§ 19) and Alex. Buttmann (§ 124, 8) [ef. also
Green ch. ii. § iii. ; Middleton, The Doctrine of the Greek
Article (ed. Rose) pp. 41 sqq., 94 sq.; and, particularly
with reference to Granville Sharp’s doctrine (Remarks
on the uses of the Def. Art. in the Grk. Text of the N. T.,
3d ed. 1803), a tract by C. Winstanley (A Vindication
ete.) republished at Cambr. 1819], and only add the foll.
remarks : 1. More or less frequently the art. is
wanting before appellatives of persons or things of which
only one of the kind exists, so that the art. is not needed
to distinguish the individual from others of the same
kind, as Atos, yj, Oeds, Xpuoros, mvedua dyov, Can aidvios,
@dvaros, vexpoi (of the whole assembly of the dead [see
vexpos, 1 b. p. 423°]); and also of those persons and
things which the connection of discourse clearly shows
to be well-defined, as vouos (the Mosaic law [see vouos,
2 p. 428°]), Kipsos, marjp, vids, dynp (husband), yuvq
(wife), ete. 2. Prepositions which with their cases
designate a state and condition, or a place, or a mode
of acting, usually have an anarthrous noun after them;
as, els dudakny, év pudaki, els dépa, ék miotews, Kara
odpka, em éAmidi, wap’ édmida, dm ayopas, am dypod, év
Gyp@, «is ddr, év quepats “Hpadov, eis ijuépav drodutpo-
oews, and numberless other examples.
dySohkovra, eighty: Lk. ii. 37; xvi. 7. [(Thue., al.)]*
Gy5o0s, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], the eighth: Lk. i. 59;
Acts vii. 8; Rev. xvii. 11; xxi. 203 one who has seven
other companions, who with others is the eighth, 2 Pet. ii.
5; so déxaros, with nine others, 2 Mace. v. 27; cf. Matthiae
§ 469,9; Viger. ed. Herm. p. 72 sq. and 720sq.; W. § 37,
2; [B. 30 (26)].*
8ykos, -ov, 6, (apparently fr. ETKQ, éveyxeiy, i. gq. popros,
see Buttmann, Lexil. i. 288 sqq. [Fishlake’s trans. p.
151 sq.], whatever is prominent, protuberance, buik, mass,
hence), a burden, weight, encumbrance: Heb. xii.1. (In
many other uses in Grk. writ. of all ages.) *
[Syn. dyKo0s,Bdpos, popriov: B. refers to weight, o. to
bulk, and either may be oppressive (contra Tittmann); 8B. a
load in so far asit is heavy, poprtov a burden in so far as it
is borne; hence the ¢opr. may be either ‘heavy’ (Mt. xxiii.
4; Sir. xxi. 16), or ‘light’ (Mt. xi. 30).]
68, 8c, 768e, (fr. the old demonstr. pron. 6, 4, 76, and
the enclit. 82), [fr. Hom. down], this one here, Lat. hicce,
haecce, hocce ; a. it refers to what precedes: Lk. x.
89 and Rec. in xvi. 25; rdde mdvra, 2 Co. xii. 19 Grsb.;
to what follows: neut. plur. rade, these (viz. the following)
things, as follows, thus, introducing words spoken, Acts
437
11. We find the unusual expression 4 | 18; iii. 1, 7, 14.
6865
xv. 23 RG; rdde Aéyet etc., Acts xxi. 11; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12,
b. els rnvde riv modu, [where we say
into this or that city] (the writer not knowing what par-
ticular city the speakers he introduces would name), Jas.
iv. 13 (cf. W. 162 (153), who adduces as similar ryvde
THY quepav, Plut. symp. 1,6, 1; [but see Liinemann’s ade
dition to Win. and esp. B. § 127, 2]).*
dSebw; (6dds); to travel, journey: Lk. x. 838. (Hom
Il. 11, 569; Xen. an. 7, 8,8; Joseph. antt. 19, 4, 2; b.j
3, 6,3; Hdian. 7, 3,9 [4 ed. Bekk.]; Plut., al.; Tob. vi
6.) [Comp.: &:-, cvrv-odeto.]*
dSnyéo, -G; fut. ddnyjow; 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing
ddnynon; (6dny6s, q.v.); Sept. chiefly for 7m), also for
yw, yin, ete. 5 a. prop. to be a guide, lead on
one’s way, to guide: twa, Mt.xv. 14; Lk. vi. 39; twa émi
tt, Rev. vii. 17; (Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Aleiphr., Babr.,
al.). b. trop. to be a guide or teacher; to give guid-
ance to: twa, Acts viii. 31 (Plut. mor. 954 b.); eis rhp
avndeav, Jn. xvi. 13 [RG L Tr WH txt. (see below) ]
(6dnynoov pe emt rv GdyGerav cov kai didakov pe, Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 5 [foll. by ets and mpos in “Teaching of the
Apostles” ch. 3) ; foll. by év w. dat. of the thing in which
one gives guidance, instruction or assistance to another,
év rh ddnbeia, Jn. xvi. 13 T WH mrg. [see above] (657-
ynoov pe ev 77 696 ov k. Topevoopat €v TH GAnGeia cov, Ps.
Ixxxv. (Ixxxvi.) 11; cf. Ps. exviii. (cxix.) 85; Sap. ix. 11;
Se Ib os
ddnys, -0d, 6, (6dds and Hyéouar; cf. yopnyds), a leader
of the way, a guide; a. prop.: Acts i. 16 (Polyb. 5,
5,15; Plut. Alex. 27; 1 Mace. iv. 2; 2 Mace.v.15). b.
in fig. and sententious discourse 66. rupAdy, i.e. like one
who is literally so called, namely a teacher of the ignorant
and inexperienced, Ro. ii. 19; plur. 68. rupAol rudy, i. e.
like blind guides in the-literal sense, in that, while them-
selves destitute of a knowledge of the truth, they offer
themselves to others as teachers, Mt. xv. 14; xxiii. 16, 24.*
dSoimopéw, -6; (ddourdpos a wayfarer, traveller); to
travel, journey: Acts x. 9. (Hdt., Soph., Xen., Ael. v.
esl OseAmdiamen(s.Onloeal.)
dSourropia, -as, 7, (6dourdpos), a journey, journeying: Jn.
iv.6; 2Co. xi. 26. (Sap. xiii. 18; xviii. 3; 1 Mace. vi. 41;
Hat., Xen., Diod. 5, 29; Hdian. al.) *
6S0-mexéw, -@; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down, to make a
road ; to level, make passable, smooth, open, a way; and
so also in the Sept.: aSomoince tpiBov tr dpy7 adrod, for
pba, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 50; for 750, to construct a level
way by casting up an embankment, Job xxx. 12; Ps. Ixvii.
(Ixviii.) 5; for 729, Ps. Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 10; for 717 739,
Is. Ixii. 10; and so, at least apparently, in Mk. ii. 23
LTrmrg. WH mrg. [see woréa, I. 1 a. and c.] (with oddy
added, Xen. anab. 4, 8, 8).*
686s, -00, #, [appar. fr. r. EA to go (Lat. adire, accedere),
allied w. Lat. solum; Curtius § 281]; Sept. numberless
times for 717, less frequently for Ns; [fr. Hom. down];
a way; "1. prop. a. a travelled way, road:
Mt. ii. 12; vii. 13 sq.; xiii. 4,19; Mk. iv. 4, 15; x. 465
Lk. viii. 5, 12; x. $15 xviii. 35; xix. 86; Acts viii. 26;
ix. 17; Jas. ii. 25, etc.3 kara Thy dddv (as ye pass along
the way [see card, II. 1 a.]) by the way, on the way, Lk.
x. 4; Acts viii. 36; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; caSBdrov odds,
[A. V. a sabbath-day’s journey] the distance that one is
allowed to travel on the sabbath, Acts i. 12 (see aa8Baror,
la.). 4 656s with a gen. of the object, the way leading
to a place (the Hebr. 377 also is construed with a gen.,
cf. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 676 [Gr. §112, 2; cf. W.§ 30,
2]): edvav, Mt. x.5; r@v dyiwy into the holy place, Heb.
ix. 8, ef. x. 20, where the grace of God is symbolized by
a way, cf. (ao, II. b., (rod &’Aov, Gen. iil. 24; Aiy’rrov
..’Aooupiov, Jer. ii. 18; ys Budsorveip, Lx. xiii. 17;
rov Suwa, Judith v.14; Lat. via mortis, Tibull. 1,10, 4; ef.
Kiihner ii. p. 286, 4). in imitation of the Hebr. } 7, the
ace. of which takes on almost the nature of a preposition,
in the way to, towards, (cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 352*), we
find 68dv 6addoons in Mt. iv. 15 fr. Is. viii. 23 (ix. 1), (so
6ddv [rhs Oaddoons, 1 K. xviii. 43]; yjs adray, 1 K. viii.
48; 2 Chr. vi. 38; 6ddv ducpav jriov, Deut. xi. 30; more-
over, once with the acc., 68ov Oadaccay épvOpay, Num.
xiv. 25; [Deut. ii. 1]; ef. Thiersch, De Alex. Pentateuchi
versione, p. 145 sq.; [B.§ 131,12]). with a gen. of the
subject, the way in which one walks: ev rais ddois abrar,
Xo. lil, 16 ; éroudtew rHv 6ddv Tov Bacihewy, Rev. xvi.
12; in metaph. phrases, catevOuvew thy 6dov twos, to re-
move the hindrances to the journey, 1 Th. iii. 11; ێro-
pdgew (and evdvvew, Jn. i. 23; Katackevace, Mt. xi. 10;
Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27) rypv 6d0v rod Kupiov, see éroundto.
b. atraveller’s way, journey, travelling: ev rh 6, on the
journey, on the road, Mt. v. 25; xv. 32; xx.17; Mk. viii.
Dl ibey BOI oe BY GG Iss b008 Glen Oda Gin Gls JNGIR I<
27; €& 6800, from a journey, Lk. xi. 6; aipew or cracbai
tu ets 6Odv, Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8, and els rv 6ddv, Lk. ix.
3; mopevopuat thy 6ddv, to make a journey (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2,
22), w. avrov added [A. V. to go on one’s way], to con-
tinue the journey undertaken, Acts viii. 39; 650s nuépas,
a journey requiring a (single) day for its completion,
used also, like our a day’s journey, as a measure of dis-
tance, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. xxx. 36; xxxi. 23; Ex. ili. 18;
Judith ii. 21; 1 Mace. v. 24; vil. 45; diréyew waprd\ov
nuepav oddv, Xen. Cyr. 1, 1, 3, cf. Hdt. 4, 101 [W. 188
(177)]); on the phrase dddv moteiv, Mk. ii. 23 see rrovéw,
I. 1 a. and c. 2. Metaph. a. according to the
familiar fig. of speech, esp. freq. in Hebr. [cf. W. 32] and
not unknown to the Greeks, by which an action is
spoken of as a proceeding (cf. the Germ. Wandel), 686s
denotes a course of conduct, a way (i. e. manner) of think-
ing, feeling, deciding: a person is said dddv Secxvdvat tivi,
who shows him how to obtain a thing, what helps he
must use, 1 Co. xii. 31; with a gen. of the obj., i. e. of
the thing to be obtained, eipnyns, Ro. iii. 17; was. Acts
li. 28; owrnpias, Acts xvi. 17; with a gen. of the subj., ris
ducatoovyns, the way which # dixacoc. points out and which
is wont to characterize 7 dcx., so in Mt. xxi. 32 (on which
see Sixatoovvn, 1 b. p. 149° bot.); used of the Christian
religion, 2 Pet. ii. 21; likewise ris dAnOetas, ibid. 2; with
gen. of the person deciding and acting, Jas. v. 20; rod
Kdiv, Jude 11; rov Bane 2 Pet. ii. 15; év mdoas rais
68ois avrov, in all his purposes and actions, Jas. i. 8; ras
438
bf
6d80bs pou év Xpior@, the methods which I as Christ’s min-
ister and apostle follow in the discharge of my office, 1 Co.
iv. 17; those are said ropeveaOat tais dbois adtay [to walk
in their own ways |who take the course which pleases them,
even though it be a perverse one, Acts xiv. 16 [on the dat.
see mopeva, sub fin. ]; ai 6dot rov Geod or kupiou, the purposes
and ordinances of God, his ways of dealing with men,
Acts xiii. 10; Ro. xi. 83; Rev. xv. 3, (Hos. xiv. 9; Ps.
xciv. (xev.) 10; exliv. (cxlv.) 17; Sir. xxxix. 24; Tob.
iii. 2, etc.). 9 680s rod cod, the course of thought, feel-
ing, action, prescribed and approved by God: Mt. xxii.
16; Mk. xii. 14; Lk. xx. 21; used of the Christian re-
ligion, Acts xviii. 26; also 9 6. rod Kupiov, ibid. 25; ddds
used generally of a method of knowing and worshipping
God, Acts xxii. 45 xxiv. 14; 4 686s simply, of the Chris-
tian religion [cf. B. 163 (142) ], Acts ix. 2; xix. 9, 23;
xxiv. 22. __b. in the saying of Christ, éyo eiys 9 686s 1
am the way by which one passes, i. e. with whom all who
seek approach to God must enter into closest fellowship,
Jn. xiv. 6. [On the omission of 66és in certain formulas
and phrases (Lk. v. 19; xix. 4), see W. 590 (549) sq.; B.
§ 123, 8; Bos, Ellipses etc. (ed. Schaefer) p. 331 sq.]
dSovs, [acc. to Etym. Magn. 615, 21 (Pollux 6, 38) fr.
fd, Lat. edere, ete., cf. Curtius § 289; al. fr. root da to
divide, cf. daiw, daxvw; (Lat. dens); Fick i. p. 100],
-6vros, 6, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for jw; @ tooth: Mt. v.
38; Mk. ix. 18; Acts vii. 54; plur. Rev. ix. 8: 6 Bpvypos
Tay dddvray, see Bpuypds.*
odvvdw, -6: pres. indic. pass. ddvvéuar; pres. ind. mid.
2 pers. sing. dduvacat (see kataxavydopat), ptep. ddvyape-
vos; (ddvvn) ; to cause intense pain; pass. to be in anguish,
be tormented: Lk. xvi. 24 sq.; mid. to torment or distress
one’s self, [A. V. to sorrow], Lk. ii. 48; émt tun, Acts xx.
38. (Arstph., Soph., Eur., Plat., al.; Sept.) *
o8%vn, [perh. allied w. ¢w; consuming grief; cf. Lat.
curae edaces ],-ns, 9, pain, sorrow: Ro. ix. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 10.
(From Hom. down; Sept.) *
dS5uppds, -od, 0, (ddvpouae to wail, lament, [see kAaio,
fin.]), a wailing, lamentation, mourning: Mt. ii. 18 (fr.
Jer. Xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15 for oA); 2 Co. vii. 7. (2
Mace. xi. 6; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Ael.
v.h. 14, 22.) *
*Otias (L T Tr WH ’O€eias [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 84;
WH. App. p. 155, and see et, ¢]), -ov [but cf. B. 18 (16)],
6, (Tuy and 34 strength of Jehovah, or my strength
is Jehovah), Ozias or Uzziah, son of Amaziah, king of
Judah, [c.] B.c. 811-759 (2 K. xv. 30 sqq.): Mt. i. 8 sq.,
where the Evangelist ought to have preserved this order:
*Iopap, "Oxoias, "Iwas, "Auatias, "O¢ias. He seems
therefore to have confounded ’Oyofias and ‘O¢ias; see
another example of [apparent] confusion under "Ieyovias.
[But Matthew has simply omitted three links; such
omissions were not uncommon, cf. e.g. 1 Chr. vi. 3 sqq.
and Ezra vii. 1 sqq. See the commentators.]*
otw; [fr. root 68, cf. Lat. and Eng. odor ete.; Curtius
§ 288]; fr. Hom. down; to give out an odor (either good
or bad), fo smell, emit a smell: of a decaying corpse, Jn.
xi. 39; cf. Ex. viii. 14.*
60ev
60cv, (fr. the rel. pron. 8 and the enclitic dev which de-
notes motion from a place), [fr. Hom. down], adv., from
which; whence; itisused _a. of the place from which:
Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 24; Acts xiv. 26; xxviii. 13; by at-
traction for éxetOev drrov etc., Mt. xxv. 24, 26; cf. B. § 143,
12; [W. 159 (150)]. b. of the source from which a
thing is known, from which, whereby: 1 In. ii. 18. Cs
of the cause from which, for which reason, wherefore, on
which account, [A.V. whereupon (in the first two in-
stances)]: Mt. xiv. 7; Acts xxvi. 19; Heb. ii. 17; iii.
1; vil. 25; viii. 3; ix. 18; xi. 19; often in the last three
books of Macc.*
606m, -ns, 7, [fr. Hom. down]; a. linen [i. e. fine
white linen for women’s clothing; ef. Vanitek, Fremd-
worter, s. v.]. b. linen cloth (sheet or sail); so Acts
36 JBL Se salah.
686v0¥, -ov, 76, (dimin. of d6dv, q. v.), a piece of linen,
small linen cloth: plur. strips of linen cloth for swathing
the dead, Lk. xxiv. 12 [Tom.L Tr br. WH reject the
vs.]; Jn. xix. 40; xx. 5-7. (In Grk. writ. of ships’ sails
made of linen, bandages for wounds, and other articles;
Sept. for }10, Judg. xiv. 13; for MWD or nwa, Hos. ii.
5 (7), 9 (11).)*
oiSa, see eida, II. p. 174.
olkevakds, -7, -dv, S€e olkiakds. :
oixetos, -a, -ov, (oikos), fr. Hes. down, belonging to a
house or family, domestic, intimate: belonging to one’s
household, related by blood, kindred, 1 Tim. v. 8; otkeiou
tov Oeov, belonging to God’s household, i. e. to the theoc-
racy, Eph. ii. 19; in a wider sense, with a gen. of the
thing, belonging to, devoted to, adherents of a thing, oi oikeiot
Ts mwiotews, professors of the (Christian) faith, Gal. vi.
10 [but al. associate this pass. with that fr. Eph. as above;
see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; so otk. @idocodias, Strab. 1 p.
13 b. [1, 17 ed. Sieben.]; yewypadias, p. 25 a. [1, 34 ed.
Sieben.]; dAvyapxias, Diod. 13, 91; tupavvidos, 19, 70.
(Sept. for 18w related by blood; 1/7, 1S. x. 14 sqq.;
MSW, consanguinity, Lev. xviii. 17; otk. rod oméepparos
for wa, Is. lviii. 7.) *
olxéreta [al. -e/a, cf. Chandler § 99 sqq.], -as, 4, (olkérns,
q: V-), household i. e. body of servants (Macrob., Appul.
famulitium, Germ. Dienerschaft): Mt. xxiv. 45 LT Tr
WH. (Strab., Leian., Inscrr.; plur. Joseph. antt. 12, 2,
oa)ie
ne -ov, 6, (oixéw), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down,
Lat. domesticus, i. e. one who lives in the same house with
another, spoken of all who are under the authority of
one and the same householder, Sir. iv. 30; vi. 11, esp.
a servant, domestic; so in Lk. xvi. 13; Acts x.7; Ro. xiv.
4; 1 Pet. ii. 18; Sept.for 72». See more fully on the
word, Meyer on Rom. 1. c. [where he remarks that oik.
is a more restricted term than SodAos, designating a
house-servant, one holding closer relations to the family
than other slaves; cf. Sudxovos fin., Schmidt ch. 162.] *
olkéw, -4; (otkos) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for aw, afew
times for }2¥; Lat. habito, [trans.] to dwell in: ri (Hdt.
and often in Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 16; [intrans. to dwell],
pera Tivos, with one (of the husband and wife), 1 Co. vii.
439
? ,
olKoooMEew
12 sq.; trop. év run, to be fixed and operative in one’s
soul: of sin, Ro. vii. 17 sq. 20; of the Holy Spirit, Ro.
ying PM Ware i Cloy, arr, UG
Tap-, TEpt-, Tvv-o1KEw. | *
olknpa, -ros, 7d, fr. [ Pind. and] Hdt. down, a dwelling-
place, habitation; euphemistically a prison, [R. V. cell],
Acts xii. 7, as in Thue. 4, 47 sq.; Dem., Leian. Tox. 29;
Plut. Agis 19; Ael. v. h. 6, 1.*
olkntiptoy, -ov, rd, (oixnrnp), a dwelling-place, habita-
tion: Jude 6; of the body as the dwelling-place of the
spirit, 2 Co. v.2 (2 Mace. xi. 2; 3 Mace. ii. 15; [Joseph.
c. Ap. 1, 20, 7]; Eur., Plut., Ceb. tab. 17).*
oixia, -as, 7, (otkos), Sept. for m3, [fr. Hdt. down], a
house; a. prop. an inhabited edifice, a dwelling: Mt.
ii. 11; vil. 24-27; Mk. i. 29; Lk. xv. 8; Jn. xii. 3; Acts
iv. 34; 1 Co. xi. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 20, and often; oi év 77 oikia
sc. dvres, Mt. v. 15; of ek ris oikias with gen. of pers.,
Phil. iv. 22; 1 otkia tod (marpds pov) Oeod, i. e. heaven,
Jn. xiv. 2; of the body as the habitation of the soul, 2
Co. v. 1. b. the inmates of a house, the family : Mt. xii.
25; 1 oikia twvds, the household, the family of any one,
Jn. iv. 53; 1 Co. xvi. 15 [cf. W. § 58, 4; B. § 129, 8a.];
univ. for persons dwelling in the house, Mt. x. 13. e:
property, wealth, goods, [cf. Lat. res familiaris]: twvds, Mt.
xxiii. 14 (13) Ree. [cf. Wetst. ad loc.]; Mk. xii. 40; Lk.
xx. 47; so otkos in Hom. (as Od. 2, 237 xaréSovct Braios
otkov ‘Odvacios, cf. 4, 318), in Hdt. 3, 53 and in Attic;
Hebr. n°3, Gen. xlv.18 (Sept. ra tmdpyovra) ; Esth. viii.
1 (Sept. dca imjpxev). Not found in Rev. [Syn. see
otkos, fin. ]
oixtaxds (in prof. auth. and in some N. T. codd. also
oixevakés [ cf. et, «| fr. ofkos), -od, 6, (oikia), one belonging to
the house (Lat. domesticus), one under the control of the
master of a house, whether a son, or a servant: Mt. x.
363 opp. to 6 oikodeomdrns, ib. 25. (Plut. Cic. 20.) *
olko-Sermotéw, -; (oixodeamdrns) ; tobe master (or head)
of a house; ta rule a household, manage family affairs: 1
Tim. v.14. (A later Grk. word; see Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 373.) *
oiko-Sermérys, -ov, 6, (olkos, Seamdrns), master of a house,
householder: Mt. x. 253; xiii. 27; xx. 115 xxiv. 43; Mk.
xiv. 14; Lk. xii. 39; xiii. 25; xiv. 21; dvOperos otkod. (see
dvOparos, 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 52; xx.1; xxi. 33; oixodeon. ris
olkias, Lk. xxii. 11, 0n this pleonasm cf. Bornemann, Schol.
ad loc.; W. § 65, 2. (Alexis, a comic poet of the IV. cent.
B. C. ap. Poll. 10, 4, 21; Joseph. c. Ap. 2,11, 3; Plut.
quaest. Rom. 30; Ignat. ad Eph. 6. Lob. ad Phryn. p.
373 shows that the earlier Greeks said otkou or oikias
[Comp.: é», kar-, évkar-,
deomdrns.) *
oikodopéw,-&; impf. dxoddpouv; fut. ofcodounow; 1 aor.
dkodsunoa [oix. Tr WH in Acts vii. 47; see Tdf. ad loc. ;
Proleg. p. 120; WH. App. p. 161; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153;
W. § 12, 4; B. 34 (30)]; Pass., [pres. ofkodopodmar (inf.
-peioba, Lk. vi. 48 Treg.) ; pf. inf. oicodoujoOat (Lk. vi.
48 T WH)]; plupf. 3 pers. sing. @xoddunro; 1 aor. @xodo-
pnOnv [oix. T WH in Jn. ii. 20]; 1 fut. oixo8opnOicopas ;
(oixoSépos, q. V-); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 133; to build
a house, erect a building ; a. prop. a. to build (up
oLKOooMN
from the foundation): absol., Lk. xi.48 GT WH Tr txt. ;
xiv. 30; xvii. 28; of oikoSopodvres, subst., the builders [cf.
W. § 45,7; B. § 144, 11], Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk.
xx.17; Actsiv. 11 Rec.; 1 Pet. ii. 7, fr. Ps. exvii. (exviii.)
22; ém dddérptoy Oewedsov, to build upon a foundation
laid by others, i. e. (without a fig.) to carry on instruction
begun by others, Ro. xv. 20; otkodopetv re, Gal. ii. 18;
mopyov, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xiv. 28; daoOnxas,
Lk. xii. 18; vadv, Mk. xiv. 58; pass. Jn. ii. 20 [on the aor.
cf. 2 Esdr. v. 16]; otkov, pass., 1 Pet. ii. 5 (here T ézrouk. ],
cf. W. 603 (561), and add oikoupyety ta kara Tov oikop,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 8); [oikiav, Lk. vi. 48 (cf. W.1.c.)];
cvvaywyny or oikdy tem, for the use of or in honor of one,
Lk. vii. 5; Acts vii. 47, 49, (Gen. viii. 20; Ezek. xvi. 24) ;
oixiay emi rt, Mt. vii. 24, 26; Lk. vi. 49; mddw ém dpovs,
Lk. iv. 29. 8. contextually i. q. to restore by building, to
rebuild, repair: ri, Mt. xxiii. 29; xxvi. 61; xxvii. 40; Mk.
xv. 29; Lk. xi. 47 and R [Lbr. Trmrg.] in 48. b.
metaph. a. i. q.to found: émi ravrn Th mérpa olkodopnow
pou THY ekkAnaiay, i. e. by reason of the strength of thy
faith thou shalt be my principal support in the establish-
ment of my church, Mt. xvi.18. 8. Since both a Chris-
tian church and individual Christians are likened
to a building or temple in which God or the Holy Spirit
dwells (1 Co. iii. 9,16 sqq.; 2 Co. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21), the
erection of which temple will not be completely finished till
the return of Christ from heaven, those who, by action,
instruction, exhortation, comfort, promote the Christian
wisdom of others and help them to live a correspondent
life are revarded as taking part in the erection of that
building, and hence are said o/kodopeiy, i. e. (dropping the
fix.) to promote growth in Christian wisdom, affection, grace,
virtue, holiness, blessedness: absol., Acts xx. 32 LTTr
WH; 1 Co. viii. 1; x. 23; rund, xiv.4; 1 Th. v.11; pass.
to grow in wisdom, piety, etc., Acts ix. 31; 1 Co. xiv. 17;
univ. to give one strength and courage, dispose to: eis rhv
miotw, Polyc. ad. Philip. 3, 2 [yet here to be built up into
(in) etc.]; even to do what is wrong [A. V. embolden],
eis TO Ta elOwASOUTA Eo Gie, 1 Co. viii. 10 [ef. W. § 39, 8
N. 3]. This metaphorical use of the verb Paul, in the
opinion of Fritzsche (Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 205 sq.), did not
derive from the fig. of building a temple, but from the
O. T., where “7733 and 0774 with an ace. of the pers. (to
build one up and to pull one down) denote to bless and to
ruin, to prosper and to injure, any one”; cf. Ps. xxvii.
(xxviii.) 5; Jer. xxiv. 6; xl. (xxxiii.) 7. [Comp.: dv,
€m-, cvv-orxodopéew. | *
olko-Sop%, -fjs, 9, (otkos, and déuw to build), a later Grk.
word, condemned by Phryn., yet used by Aristot.,
Theophr., [(but both these thought to be doubtful)],
Diod. (1, 46), Philo (vit. Moys. i. § 40; de monarch.
ii. § 2), Joseph., Plut., Sept., and many others, for oixo-
Sounpa and oixoddunois; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 487 sqq.
cf. p.421; [W. 24]; 1. (the act of) building, build-
ing up, i. q. Td oikodopetv; as, tov tetxewv, 1 Mace. xvi.
23; rod otkov rod Oeod, 1 Chr. xxvi. 27; in the N. T.
metaph., edifying, edification, i. e. the act of one who
promotes another's growth in Christian wisdom, piety,
440
OL KOVvoOpLos
holiness, happiness, (see oikoSouéw, b. B. [cf. W. 35 (34) |):
Ro. xiv. 19; xv. 2; [1 Co. xiv. 26]; 2 Co. x. 8 [see be-
low]; xiii. 10; Eph. iv. 29; with a gen. of the person
whose growth is furthered, dav, 2 Co. xii. 19, [cf. x. 8];
éavrod [ Tdf. adrov], Eph. iv. 16; rod caparos rot Xpiorod.
ibid. 12; ras exxAnoias, 1 Co. xiv. 12; i. q. 7d oikodopovy,
what contributes to edification, or augments wisdom, etc.
Aareiv, AaBeiv, oikodounv, 1 Co. xiv. 3, 5. 2ige
oikoddunua, a building (i. e. thing built, edifice): Mk. xiii.
1 sq.; Tod iepod, Mt. xxiv. 1; used of the heavenly body,
the abode of the soul after death, 2 Co. v. 1; trop. of
a body of Christians, a Christian church, (see oixodopéo,
b. B.), Eph. ii. 21 [cf. was, I. 1¢.]; with a gen. of the
owner or occupant, Geov, 1 Co. iii. 9.*
olkoSopla, -as, 7, (olkodopew), (the act of) building,
erection, (Thuc., Plat., Polyb., Plut., Leian., ete.; but
never in the Sept.); metaph. ofkodopuiay Oeod thy ev
nioret, the increase which God desires in faith (see
oikoSopn), 1 Tim. i. 4 Rec. * &"; but see ofkovopia. Not
infreq. ofkov. and oixod. are confounded in the Mss.; see
Grimm on 4 Mace. p. 365, cf. Hilgenfeld, Barn. epist.
p- 28; [D’Orville, Chariton 8, 1 p. 599].*
olko-86p10s, -ov, 6, (olkos, déu@ to build; cf. oixovdpuos),
a builder, an architect: Acts iv.11 LT Tr WH. (Hdt.,
Xen., Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
olkovopéw, -@; (olkovduos); to be a steward; to manage
the affairs of a household: absol. Lk. xvi. 2. (Univ. to
manage, dispense, order, regulate: Soph., Xen., Plat.,
Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.; 2 Mace. iii. 14.) *
oixovopia, -as, 7, (oikovoyéw), fr. Xen. and Plat. down,
the management of a household or of household affairs;
specifically, the management, oversight, administration, of
others’ property; the office of a manager or overseer, stew-
ardship: Lk. xvi. 2-4; hence the word is transferred
by Paul in a theocratic sense to the office (duty) in-
trusted to him by God (the lord and master) of proclaim-
ing to men the blessings of the gospel, 1 Co. ix. 17; 9
oikovouia Tod Oeod, the office of administrator (stewardship)
intrusted by God, Col. i. 25. univ. administration, dis-.
pensation, which in a theocratic sense is ascribed to
God himself as providing for man’s salvation: afrwes
. + +7) olkovopiay Oeod thy év mioret, which furnish matter
for disputes rather than the (knowledge of the) dispen-
sation of the things by which God has provided for and
prepared salvation, which salvation must be embraced
by faith, 1 Tim.i.4 LT Tr WH; pv mpodOero . . . xarpav,
which good-will he purposed to show with a view to
(that) dispensation (of his) by which the times (sc. of
infancy and immaturity cf. Gal. iv. 1-4) were to be ful-
filled, Eph. i. 9 sq.; 1 otk. rs xdpuros rod Beod THs Sobel-
ons pot, that dispensation (or arrangement) by which
the grace of God was granted me, Eph. iii. 2; # olk. rod
pvotnpiov, the dispensation by which he carried out his
secret purpose, Eph. iii. 9 GL T Tr WH.*
olkovépos, -ov, 6, (oikos, véuw [‘to dispense, manage’);
Hesych. 6 rév oftkoy veudsuevos), the manager of a house-
hold or of household affairs; esp. a steward, manager,
superintendent, (whether free-born, or, as was usually
OLKOS
the case, a freed-man or slave) to whom the head of
the house or proprietor has intrusted the management
of his affairs, the care of receipts and expenditures, and
the duty of dealing out the proper portion to every ser-
vant and even to the children not yet of age: Lk. xii.
42; 1 Co. iv. 2; Gal. iv. 2; the manager of a farm or
landed estate, an overseer, [A. V. steward]: Lk. xvi. 1,
3,8; 6 olk. tis médews, the superintendent of the city’s
finances, the treasurer of the city (Vulg. arcarius civitatis) :
Ro. xvi. 23 (of the treasurers or quaestors of kings,
Esth. viii. 9; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; Joseph. antt. 12, 4, 7; 11,
6,12, 8, 6,4). Metaph. the apostles and other Chris-
tian teachers (see ofkovouia) are called oik. pyornplav Tod
Gcot, as those to whom the counsels of God have been
committed to be made known to men: 1 Co. iv. 1; a
bishop (or overseer) is called oikovdpos Oc0d, of God as
the head and master of the Christian theocracy [see
oikos, 2], Tit. i. 7; and any and every Christian who
rightly uses the gifts intrusted to him by God for the
good of his brethren, belongs to the class called kadot
Oikovdpuot mokidns xdpttos Geod, 1 Pet. iv. 10. (Aeschyl.,
Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.; for n13->y Sept. 1 K. iv. 6; xvi.
De euc)))™
otkos, -ov, 0, [cf. Lat. views, Eng. ending -wich; Cur-
tius § 95], fr. Hom. down; Sept. in numberless places
for 3, also for = a palace, SI a tent, etc. ; ale
a house; a. strictly, an inhabited house [differing thus
fr. dduos the building]: Acts ii. 2; xix.16; twvds, Mt. ix.
6 sq.; Mk. ii. 11; v. 38; Lk. i. 23, 40, 563; viii. 39, 41,
etc.; épxecar cis ofkov, to come into a house (domum
venire), Mk. iii. 20 (19); eis rdv ofkoy, into the (i. e. his
or their) house, home, Lk. vii. 10; xv. 6; év 7 otke, in
the (her) house, Jn. xi. 20; ev otk, at home, 1 Co. xi.
34; xiv. 35; of eis Tov oixoy (see eis, C. 2), Lk. ix. 61;
kar’ oikov, opp. to év ré iepo, in a household assembly,
in private, [R. V. at home; see xara, II. 1 d.], Acts ii. 46;
v. 42; kar oikovs, opp. to Snuocia, in private houses,
[A. V. from house to house; see xard, I. 3 a.], Acts xx.
20; xara Tods oikous elomopevdpevos, entering house after
house, Acts viii. 3; 7 Kar’ oikdv Twos exkAnoia, See exKAn-
ala,4b.aa. _b. any building whatever: épmopiov, Jn.
ii. 16; mpocevyjs, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46;
Tov Bacidéws, Tod apxtepéws, the palace of etc., Mt. xi. 8;
Lk. xxii. 54 [here T Tr WH oikia]; tod Get, the house
where God was regarded as present, —of the tabernacle,
Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4; of the temple at Jerusa-
lem, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi. 17; Lk. xix. 46; Jn. ii. 16 sq.,
(Is. lvi. 5, 7); ef. Lk. xi. 51; Acts vii. 47, 49; of the heay-
enly sanctuary, Heb. x. 21 (oikos dytos cod, of heaven,
Deut. xxvi. 15; Bar. ii. 16); a body of Christians (a
chur¢h), as pervaded by the Spirit and power of God, is
called ofkos mvevparixéds, 1 Pet. ii. 5. c. any dwelling-
place: of the human body as the abode of demons that
possess it, Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 24; (used in Grk. auth. also
of tents and huts, and later, of the nests, stalls, lairs, of
animals). univ. the place where one has fixed his resi-
dence, one’s settled abode, domicile : otxos jpav, of the city
of Jerusalem, Mt. xxiii. 38; Lk. xiii. 35. 2. by me-
441
’
oLKoUmEeVN
ton. the inmates of a house, all the persons forming one
family, a household: Lk. x. 53 xi. 17 [al. refer this to 1,
and take émi either locally (see émi, C. I. 1), or of succes-
sion (see émi, C. I. 2¢.)]; xix.9; Acts vii. 10; x. 2; xi.
14; xvi. 31; xviii. 8; 1 Co.i.16; 1 Tim. iii. 4 Suse vertes
2 Tim. i. 16; iv.19; Heb. xi. 7; plur., 1 Tim. iii. 12;
Tit. i. 11, (so also Gen. vii. 1; xlvii. 12, and often in
Grk. auth.); metaph. and in a theocratic sense 6 oikos
tov Oeod, the family of God, of the Christian church,
1 Tim. iii. 15; 1 Pet.iv.17; of the church of the Old and
New Testament, Heb. iii. 2, 5 sq. (Num. xii. 7). 3.
stock, race, descendants of one, [A. V. house]: 6 otkos
Aavid, Lk. i. 27, 69; ii. 4, (1 K. xii. 16); otk. "Iopann,
Mt. x.6; xv. 24; Lk.i.33; Acts ii. 36; vii. 42; [(6 oik.
*IaxkoB), 46 LT Tr mrg.]; Heb. viii. 8,10, (Jer. xxxviii.
(xxxi.) 31; Ex. vi14; xii. 3; xix.3; 15S. ii. 30; [ef. 6
aeBaords oikos, Philo in Flac. § 4]). The word is not
found in the Apocalypse.
[Syn. ofos, ofxla: in Attic (and esp. legal) usage,
vixos denotes one’s household establishment, one’s entire prop-
erty, oixla, the dwelling itself; and in prose ofkos is not used
in the sense of oixta. In the sense of family ofkos and oikla
are alike employed; Schmidt vol. ii. ch. 80. In relation to
distinctions (real or supposed) betw. ofxos and oixta the foll.
pass. are of interest (cf. Valckenaer on Hat. 7, 224): Xen.
oecon. 1,5 ofkos d& 5h Th done? ji elvar; dpa brep oikla,
h wal doa tis téw rijs oiklas KéxtnTaL, mdyTa TOD olKoV
TavTdéd eoTw... mdvra Tod olkov elva boa Tis KéKTNTAL.
Aristot. polit. 1, 2 p. 1252”, 9 sqq. é« wév ody Tobrwy Trav Sto
kowwviey (viz. of aman with wife and servant) oikia mpérn,
kat 6p0@s “Hotodos cime morhoas “olkov wey mpéticta yuvaikd
Te Body 7’ apotiipa:” ... 7 ev ody cis macay hucpay cuverty-
Kuta Kowwvia kara pow oixds eorw. ibid. 3 p. 1253, 2 sqq.
maou woAus & olkiovobyKertat oixlas dé uépn, e& Gy avis oixla
ouvicrarat’ oikia Se rTéAeLos ex SovAwy k. éAevOdpwv.... mpaTa
dé Kad €AdxicTa mépn oikias Seaomdtns kK. SodAOs Kk. Téots kK.
téAoxos kK. Tarnp k. Texva etc. Plut. de audiend. poetis § 6 kat
yap Oikdy more ev Thy oikiay Kadovaw, “ oikoy és dbdpopov”*
mote 5¢ Thy ovolayv, “ eaOleral mot olkos”: (see oikia, Cc.)
Hesych. Lex. s. v. olka: ofkot. s.v.otkos: dAlyn oikta
... Kal wépos Tt THS oiklas... kal Ta ev TH oikig. In the
N. T., although the words appear at times to be used with
some discrimination (e. g. Lk. x. 5, 6,7; Acts xvi. 31, 32, 34;
cf. Jn. xiv. 2), yet other pass. seem to show that no distinc-
tion can be insisted upon: e.g. Mt. ix.23; Mk.v.38; Lk. vii.
B86) Oi, Acts! X11 7,)(22,02)e XVIo Kix. LO sexx Os xed,
L2NISE xvid 5a (INC ont. 216% xvi-15):]
olkoupévn, -7s, 7, (fem. of the pres. pass. ptcp. fr. ofkéa,
[sc. yp; cf. W. § 64,5; B. § 123, 8]); 1. the inhab-
ited earth; a. in Grk. writ. often the portion of the
earth inhabited by the Greeks, in distinction from the lands
of the barbarians, cf. Passow ii. p. 415°; [L. and S.s. v.
Tels b. in the Grk. auth. who wrote about Roman
affairs, (like the Lat. orbis terrarum) i. q. the Roman em-
pire: 80 maoa 1 Oik. contextually i. q. all the subjects of
this empire, Lk. ii. 1. c. the whole inhabited earth,
the world, (so in [Hyperid. Eux. 42 (“ probably” L. and
S.)] Sept. for ban and yx): Lk. iv. 5; xxi. 26; Acts
xxiv. 5; Ro. x. 18; Rev. xvi. 14; Heb. i. 6, (aca 7 oik.
Joseph. b. j. 7, 8, 3); An 7 olk., Mt. xxiv. 14; Acts xi.
28, (in the same sense Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 4 maca 7 otk.;
oikoupyos
ef. Bleek, Erklar. d. drei ersten Evv. i. p. 68); by meton.
the inhabitants of the earth, men: Acts xvii. 6, 31 (Ps. ix.
9); xix. 27; # oik. ddn, all mankind, Rev. iii. 10; xii.
9. 2. the universe, the world: Sap.i. 7 (alternating
there with ra mdvra); 7 oik. 7 méAdovea, that consum-
mate state of all things which will exist after Christ’s
return from heaven, Heb. ii. 5 (where the word alter-
nates with gdvra and ra raya, vs. 8, which there is taken
in an absolute sense).*
olkoupyds, -dv, (otkos, EPL [cf. épyov], cf. dpreAoupyds,
yewpyos, etc.), caring for the house, working at home: ‘Vit.
ii. 5 LT Tr WH;; see the foll. word. Not found else-
where.*
olk-ovpds, -0v, 0; 1 (otkos, and ovpos a keeper; see
dupwpds and xnyroupés) ; a. prop. the (watch or)
keeper of a house (Soph., Eur., Arstph., Paus., Plut.,
al.). b. trop. keeping at home and taking care of
household affairs, domestic: Tit. ii. 5 RG; cf. Fritzsche,
De conformatione N. T. critica etc. p. 29; [W. 100 sq.
(95)]; (Aeschyl. Ag. 1626; Eur. Hec. 1277; cappovas,
oikoupovs kai didavdpous, Philo de exsecr. § 4).*
olxte(pw; fut. (as if fr. oixreipéw, a form which does
not exist) as in the Sept. olkrewnow, for the earlier
oixreipa, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 741; [Veitch s. v.; W.
88 (84); B. 64 (56)]; (fr. otkros pity, and this fr. the
interjection oi, oh !); to pity, have compassion on: twa,
Ro. ix. 15 (fr. Ex. xxxiii. 19. Hom., Tragg., Arstph.,
Xen., Plat., Dem., Leian., Plut., Ael.; Sept. for jan) and
on). [Syn. see éde€o, fin. ] *
oiktippds, -ov, 6, (oikreipw), Sept. for om (the vis-
cera, which were thought to be the seat of compassion
[see omdayxvov, b.]), compassion, pity, mercy: omddyxva
oikripyod (Rec. oikrippev), bowels in which compassion
resides, a heart of compassion, Col. iii. 12; in the Script-
ures mostly plural (conformably to the Hebr. D9),
emotions, longings, manifestations of pity, [ Eng. compas-
sions} (cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 5 sqq.; [W. 176
(166); B. 77 (67)]), rod Ocod, Ro. xii. 1; Heb. x. 28;
6 maTip Tay oikr. (gen. of quality [ef. B. § 182,10; W.
237 (222) ]), the father of mercies i. e. most merciful,
2 Co. i. 3; joined with omAdyyva, Phil. ii. 1. (Pind.
Pyth. 1, 164.) [Syn. see édeéo, fin.]*
olxrippwv, -ov, gen. -ovos, (oikreipw), merciful: Lk. vi.
36; Jas.v.11. (Theocr. 15, 75; Anth. 7, 359, 1 [Epigr.
Anth. Pal. Append. 223, 5]; Sept. for omy.) [In
classic Grk. only a poetic term for the more common
édenuov.” Schmidt iii. p. 580.]*
olpar, see olopat.
oivo-rrérns, -ov, 6, (oivos, and morns a drinker), a wine-
bibber, given to wine: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34. (Prov.
xxiii. 20; Polyb. 20, 8,2; Anacr. frag. 98; Anthol. 7,
28, 2.) *
oivos, -ov, 6, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for tm also for
WINN (must, new wine), VM, etc.; wine; a. prop.:
Mt. ix. 17; [xxvii. 34 Ltxt.T Tr WH]; Mk. xv. 23;
Lk.i.15; Jn. ii.3; Ro. xiv. 21; Eph.v.18; 1 Tim. v.
23; Rev. xvii. 2, etc. ; olive mpocexew, 1 Tim. ili. 8; Sov-
Aevew, Tit. ii. 3. b. metaph.: olvos rot Guuad (see
442
OKTANLEPOS
Ovpés, 2), fiery wine, which God in his wrath is repre-
sented as mixing and giving to those whom he is about
to punish by their own folly and madness, Rev. xiv. 10;
xvi. 19; xix.15; with rs mopveias added [cf. W. § 30,
3 N.1; B. 155 (136) ], a love-potion as it were, wine excit-
ing to fornication, which he is said to give who entices
others to idolatry, Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3 [here Lom. Tr
WH br. o@v.], and he is said to be drunk with who suffers
himself to be enticed, Rev. xvii. 2. c. by meton.
i. q. a vine: Rev. vi. 6.
oivodrvyia, -as, 7, (olvopAvyew, and this fr. otvdddAv&,
which is compounded of otvos and Ave, to bubble up,
overflow), drunkenness, [A. V. wine-bibbing]: 1 Pet. iv.
3. (Xen. oec. 1, 22; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 5,15; Polyb.
2,19,4; Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 22 [for other exx. see
Siegfried, Philo etc. p. 102]; Ael. v. h. 38, 14.) (Cf.
Trench § lxi.]*
olopat, contr. ojuac; [fr. Hom. down]; fo suppose,
think: foll. by an acc. w. inf. Jn. xxi. 25 [T om. vs.];
by the inf. alone, where the subj. and the obj. are the
same, Phil. i. 16 (17); by én, Jas. i. 7. [SyNn. see
nyeopat, fin. |*
otos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], relat. pron. (correlative
to the demonstr. rotos and rotodros), what sort of, what
manner of, such as (Lat. qualis): otos . . . rovovros, 1 Co.
xv. 48; 2Co.x.11; rév adrov... oiov, Phil. i. 30; with
the pron. rosodros suppressed, Mt. xxiv. 21; Mk. ix. 3;
xiii. 19 [here however the antecedent demonstr. is merely
attracted into the relat. clause or perhaps repeated for
rhetorical emphasis, cf. B. § 143, 8; W. 148 (140); see
rovovtos, b.]; 2 Co. xii. 20; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Rev. xvi. 18;
oi@dnmorovy voojpart, of what kind of disease soever, Jn.
v. 4 Lehm. [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373 sq.]; in indir.
quest., Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.]; 1 Th. i. 5. ody ofov 8€ dre éx-
néntokev, concisely for ov rotoy éorwv otov dre éxa. but the
thing (state of the case) is not such as this, that the word
of God hath fallen to the ground, i. e. the word of God
hath by no means come to nought [A. V. but not as though
the word of God hath etc.], Ro. ix. 6; ef. W. § 641. 63
B. § 150, 1 Rem*
olor Snrorotv, Jn. v. 4 Lehm., see ofos.
oicw, see pepo.
dkvéw, -@: 1 aor. Skynoa; (dxvos [perh. allied w. the
frequent. cunc-tari (cf. Curtius p. 708)] delay); fr. Hom.
down; to feel loath, to be slow; to delay, hesitate: foll. by
an inf. Acts ix.38. (Num. xxii. 16; Judg. xviii. 9, etc.) *
dxvnpés, -a, -dv, (dxvew), sluggish, slothful, backward:
Mt. xxv. 26; with a dat. of respect [cf. W. § 31, 6 a.;
B. § 138, 21], Ro. xii. 115 ov« dxvnpov poi éort, foll. by
an inf., is not irksome to me, I am not reluctant, Phil. iii. 1
[ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Pind., Soph., Thuc., Dem.,
Theoer., ete.; Sept. for OXY) =
KTarpepos, -ov, (dxTo, Tuepa), eight days old; passing
the erghth day: meptroun Lcf. W. § 31,6 a.; B. § 188, 21;
but Ree. -wy] deranpepos, circumcised on the eighth day,
Phil. iii. 5; see rerapraios; [‘the word denotes prop.
not interval but duration’ (see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil
l.c.). Graec. Ven. Gen. xvii. 12; eccl. writ.].*
> 7
OKT@
oxrd, eight: Lk. ii. 21; Jn. xx. 26; Acts ix. 33, etc.
[(From Hom. on.) ]
oheBpeva (Lchm. in Heb. xi. 28), see dr06pevo.
oA<Bptos, -ov, (in prof. auth. also of three term., as in
Sap. xviii. 15), (@AeOpos), fr. [Hom.], Hdt. down, de-
structive, deadly: Sixnv, 2 Th. i. 9 Lehm. txt.*
SAcBpos, -ov, (dAAvue to destroy [perh. (ddvvpe) allied
to Lat. vulnus]), fr. Hom. down, ruin, destruction, death:
1 Th. v. 3; 1 Tim. vi. 9; eis dreOpov ris oapkos, for the
destruction of the flesh, said of the external ills and
troubles by which the lusts of the flesh are subdued and
destroyed, 1 Co. v. 5 [see mapadidapu, 2]; i. g. the loss
of a life of blessedness after death, future misery, alovios
(as 4 Mace. x. 15): 2 Th. i. 9 [where Ltxt. éd€Opiov,
q. v.], ef. Sap. i. 12.*
dAtyomurria, -as, 7, littleness of faith, little faith: Mt.
xvii. 20 LT Tr WH, for RG dmoria. (Several times
in eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
OAty6-LTToOs, -ov, 6, 7), (dAtyos and riotis), of little faith,
trusting too little: Mt. vi. 30; viii. 26; xiv. 31; xvi. 8;
Lk. xii. 28. (Not found in prof. auth.) *
oAtyos, -7, -ov, [on its occasional aspiration (6A.) see
WH. App. p. 148; Tdf. Proleg. pp. 91,1063; Scrivener,
Introd. p. 565, and reff. s. v. od init.], Sept. for vpn, [fr.
Hom. down], little, small, few, df number, multitude,
quantity, or size: joined to nouns [cf. W. § 20, 1 b. note;
eS 25 nOn Vitex. tse xVvero4 5) Mi kavic Sis vale’: ik.
x. 2; xii. 48 (dAlyas se. mAnyds [cf. B. § 184,6; W. § 32,
5, esp. § 64, 4], opp. to modal, 47); Acts xix. 24; 1 Tim.
Varo Heb. xii 10s east. 5 Gi, 1 Ret. 20 RiG;
Rev. iii. 4; of time, short: xpdvos, Acts xiv. 28; Katpds,
Rev. xii. 12; of degree or intensity, light, slight: rapaxos,
Acts xii. 18; xix. 23; ordows, xv. 2; yxeuuov, xxvii. 20.
plur. w. a partitive gen.: yuvarxdv, Acts xvii. 45 avdpdar,
ib. 12. dAvyou, absol.: Mt. vii. 14; xx.16; [TWH om.
Rib the cliy eat 14) Uke iii23 31 Pet. 20-00
Tr WH; neut. sing.: Lk. vii. 47; 76 dAcyov, 2 Co. viii.
15; mpos dArtyov apéertpos, profitable for little (Lat. parum
utilis); [cf. W. 213 (200); some, for a little (sc. time) ;
see below], 1 Tim. iv. 8; éy ddtya, in few words (cf.
Shakspere’s in a few], i. e. in brief, briefly (ypapewv),
Eph. iii. 3; easily, without much effort, Acts xxvi. 28 sq.
on other but incorrect interpretations of this phrase cf.
Meyer ad loc. [see péyas, 1 a. y.]; mpds ddcyor, for a little
time, Jas. iv. 14; simply édlyov, adverbially: of time, a
short time, a (little) while, Mk. vi. 31; 1 Pet. i. 6; v. 10;
Rev. xvii. 10; of space, a little (further), Mk.i.19; Lk.
v. 8. plur. éAcya, a few things: [Lk. x. 41 WH]; Rev.
ii. 14, 20 [Rec.]; én’ édcya ([see init. and] eri, C. I. 2e.),
Mt. xxv. 21, 23; 8” édyov, briefly, in few words, ypd-
ge, 1 Pet. v. 12 [see &ud, A. III. 3] (pnOnvat, Plat. Phil.
p- 31 d.; legg. 6 p. 778 c.).*
ddryduxos, -ov, (drLyos, Wuyn), faint-hearted: 1 Th. v.
14. (Prov. xiv. 29; xviii. 14; Is. lvii. 15, ete. ; Artem.
oneir. 3, 5.) * -
ddtywpew, -; (dAlywpos, and this fr. dAcyos and @pa
care); to care litile for, regard lightly, make small account
of: twos (see Matthiae § 348; [W. § 30, 10d.]), Heb.
443
6Xos
xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11. (Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., Aris.
tot., Philo, Joseph., al.) *
oAlyas, (dAiyos), adv., a little, scarcely, [R. V. just (es
caping)]: 2 Pet. ii. 18 GLT Tr WH [for Ree. dra].
(Anthol. 12, 205, 1; [Is. x. 7 Aq.].) *
ohopevriis [Rec. 6A.], -od, 6, (dAoOpeda, q. v.), a de-
stroyer ; found only in 1 Co. x. 10.*
ohoOpedw and, acc. to a preferable form, éd«Opevo
(Lehm.; see Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 2 p- 809; cf. Delitzsch,
Com. on Heb. as below; [Tdf. Proleg. p.81; WH. App.
p- 152]); (éde@pos); an Alex. word [W. 92 (88)]; to
destroy: twa, Heb. xi. 28. (Ex. xii. 23; Josh. iii. 10;
vii. 25; Jer. ii. 30; Hag. ii. 22, ete.; [Philo, alleg. ii.
9].) [Comp.: e&ododpeta.] *
oAoKatTwpLa, -ros, 70, (6AoKavtow to burn whole, Xen.
Cyr. 8, 3, 24; Joseph. antt. 1, 13, 1; and this fr. dros
and xavros, for kavotos, verbal adj. fr. caiw, cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 524; [W. 33]), a whole burnt offering (Lat.
holocaustum), i. e. a victim the whole (and not like other
victims only a part) of which is burned: Mk. xii. 33;
Heb. x. 6, 8. (Sept. esp. for ToD; also for NWN, Ex.
xxx. 20; Lev. v. 12; xxiii. 8, 25, 27; 1 Mace. i. 45;
2 Mace. ii. 10; not found in prof. auth. [exe. Philo de
sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 33]; Joseph. antt. 3, 9,1 and 9, 7,
4 says 6doKkavTwats.) *
dAoKAnpia, -as, 7, (OAdKAnpos, q. V-), Lat. integritas;
used of an unimpaired condition of body, in which all
its members are healthy and fit for use; Vulg. integra
sanitas [A. V. perfect soundness]: Acts iii. 16 (joined
with dyiera, Plut. mor. p. 1063 f.; with rod caparos
added, ibid. p. 1047 e.; cf. Diog. Laert. 7,107; corporis
integritas, i. q. health, in Cie. de fin. 5, 14, 40; Sept. for
phn, Is. i. 6).*
6A6-KAnpos, -ov, (Sos and KAjpos, prop. all that has
fallen by lot), complete in all its parts, in no part wanting
or unsound, complete, entire, whole: diOor, untouched by
a tool, Deut. xxvii. 6; Josh. ix. 4 (viii. 31); 1 Mace. iv.
47; of a body without blemish or defect, whether of
a priest or of a victim, Philo de vict. § 12; Joseph. antt.
3, 12, 2 [(cf. Havercamp’s Joseph. ii. p. 321)]. Ethi-
cally, free from sin, faultless, [R. V. entire]: 1 Th. v. 23;
plur., connected with réAecoe and with the addition of
év prdevi Neuropevot, Jas. i.4; complete in all respects, con-
summate, dicaocvvn, Sap. xv. 3; evoeBeva, 4 Mace. xv.
17. (Plat., Polyb., Leian., Epict., al.; Sept. for Dw,
Deut. xxvii. 6; oA, Lev. xxiii. 15; Ezek. xv. 53)*
[Syn. dAdKAnpos, TéAELOS (ef. Trench § xxii.): ‘in
the 6AdxAnpos no grace which ought to be in a Christian
man is deficient; in the réAesos no grace is merely in its
weak imperfect beginnings, but all have reached a certain
ripeness and maturity.’]
édoAt{o; an onomatopoetic verb (ef. the similar oipe-
Ceuv, aldCew, draddgew, mumifer, coxkuCew, tie. Com-
pare the Germ. term. -zen, as in grunzen, kréchzen, dch-
zen), to howl, wail, lament: Jas. v.1. (In Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down of a loud cry, whether of joy or of grief;
Sept. tor 917.) [Syn. cf. kAaie, fin. ] *
6dos, -7, -ov, Sept. for 53, [fr. Pind. (Hom.) down],
ONOTEANS
whole, (all): with an anarthrous subst. five [six] times
in the N. T., viz. ddov dvOpwrov, Jn. vii. 23; ewavrov
ddov, Acts xi. 26; 6An ‘IepovoaAnp, XXxi. 31; Sueriav 6AnY,
XXviii. 30; 6Xovs olkovs, Tit. i. 11; [to which add, dv
dds vuerds, Lk. v.5 LT Tr WH]. usually placed before
a substantive which has the article: 6n 7 TadcAaia, Mt.
iv. 23; 6An 4 Svpia, 24; Kab’ SAnv tiv modu, Lk. viii.
39; ddov 76 capa, Mt. v. 29 sq.; vi. 22. sq; Lk. xi. 34;
1 Co. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 2, ete.; [An 7 exkAnaia, Ro. xvi.
23 LT Tr WH]; éAnv r. quepay, Mt. xx. 6; Ro. viii. 36;
Odos 6 vopos, Mt. xxii. 40; Gal. v. 3; Jas. ii. 10; ev 6Ay
tH xapdia cov, Mt. xxii. 37; && Gdns r. Kapdias Gov, Mk.
xii. 30, and many other exx. it is placed after a sub-
stantive which has the article [W. 131 (124) note; B.
§ 125, 6]: 9 mddus 6An, Mk. i. 33; Acts xix. 29 [Rec.];
xxi. 80 —(the distinction which Kriiger § 50, 11, 7 makes,
viz. that 4 6An modus denotes the whole city as opp. to
its parts, but that 6Ay 4 wédus and 7 modus 7 6An denotes
the whole city in opp. to other ideas, as the country, the
fields, etc., does not hold good at least for the N. T.,
where even in 7 70Ats 6An the city is opposed only to its
parts); add the foll. exx.: Mt. xvi. 26; xxvi. 59; Lk.
1x. 25; xi. 36%; Jn-iv. 53; Ro. xvi. 23 RG]; 1 Jn. v.
19); Rev. i510. vin 12'G i TW Ei esit. Oe exvi- 142
It is subjoined to an adjective or a verb to show that
the idea expressed by the adj. or verb belongs to the
whole person or thing under consideration: Mt. xiii. 33;
LK. xi. 36°; xiii. 21; Jn. ix. 34; xiii. 10, CXen. mem. 2,
6, 28). Neut. rodro dé ddov, Mt. i. 22; xxi. 4 (where
GLTTrWHom. ddov); xxvi. 56; S¢ ddov, through-
out, Jn. xix. 23.
GdorTeAts, -€s, (OXos, Tédos), perfect, complete in all re-
spects: 1 Th. v. 23. (Plut. plac. philos. 5, 21; [Field,
Hexapla, Lev. vi. 23; Ps. 1. 21]; eccles. writ.) *
*Odvpads [perh. contr. fr. OAvpmiddapos, W. 103 (97) ;
ef. Fick, Gr. Personennamen, pp. 63 sq. 201], -a, [B. 20
(18) ], 6, Olympas, a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 15.*
ddvvO0s, -ov, 6, an unripe fig (Lat. grossus), which grows
during the winter, yet does not come to maturity but falls
off in the spring [cf. B. D. s.v. Fig]: Rev. vi.13. (Hes.
fr. 14; Hdt. 1, 193; Dioscorid. 1, 185; Theophr. caus.
plant. 5,9, 12; Sept. cant. ii. 13.) *
dros, (dros), adv., wholly, altogether, (Lat. omnino),
[with a neg. at all]: Mt. v.34 (with which compare Xen.
mem. 1, 2, 35); 1 Co. v. 1 [R. V. actually]; vi. 7; xv.
29. [(Plat., Isocr., al.)]*
SpBpos, -ov, 6, (Lat. imber) a shower, i. e. a violent rain,
accompanied by high wind with thunder and lightning:
Lk. xii. 54. (Deut. xxxii. 2; Sap. xvi. 16; in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down.) *
Opelpopar [or du., see below] i. q. iueipouar; to desire,
long for, yearn after, (A. V. to be affectionately desirous]:
tuvds, 1 Th. ii. 8 GL T Tr WH [but the last read Opn, cf.
their App. p. 144 and Lod. Pathol. Element. i. 72], on
the authority of all the uncial and many cursive Mss., for
Ree. iveipdpevor. The word is unknown to the Grk. writ.,
but the commentators ad loc. recognize it, as do Hesychius,
444
bd CA
Opvuw
is found in Ps. lxii. 2 Symm., and acc. to some Mss. in Joh
iii. 21. Ace. to the conjecture of Fritzsche, Com. on Mk.
p- 792, it is composed of duo and etpew, just as Photius
[p- 331, 8 ed. Porson] explains it ouod jpydaOa [so Theo-
phylact (cf. Tdf.’s note)]. But there is this objection,
that all the verbs compounded with ood govern the da-
tive, not the genitive. Since Nicander, ther. vs. 402,
uses peipouat for iweipopat, some suppose that the original
form is pepopat, to which, after the analogy of xeAdw and
éxéAX@, either { or o is for euphony prefixed in iveip. and
épeip. But as ipeipopat is derived from tuepos, we must
suppose that Nicander dropped the syllable i to suit the
metre. Accordingly dpueipecOa: seems not to differ at all
from iveipeoOa, and its form must be attributed to a vul-
gar pronunciation. Cf. [WH. App. p. 152]; W. 101
(95); [B. 64 (56); Ellic. on 1 Th. 1. c.; (Kuenen and
Cobet, N. T. Vat. p. ciii.)].*
Spidéw, -6; impf. opidrovy ; 1 aor. ptep. éurnoas ; (dpu-
os, q. v-); freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to be in
company with; to asssociate with; to stay with; hence to
converse with, talk with : rwi, with one (Dan. i. 19), Acts
xxiv. 263; sc. adrots, Acts xx. 11 [so A. V. talked], unless
one prefer to render it when he had stayed in their com-
pany; mpés twa, Lk. xxiv. 14 (Xen. mem. 4, 3,2; Joseph.
antt. 11, 6, 11; [ef. W. 212 sq. (200); B.§ 133, 8]); ev ro
Spureiv avrovs sc. ddAnAots, ibid.15. [ComP. : cvv-opshéw. ]*
Opirla, -as, 7, (Gpstos), companionship, intercourse, com-
munion: 1 Co. xv. 33, on which see 740s. (Tragg., Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) *
Spiros, -ov, 6, (duds, 6400, and ty a crowd, band, [Cur-
tius § 660; Vaniéek p. 897; but Fick iii. 723 fr. root mil
‘to be associated,’ ‘ to love’]), fr. Hom. down, a multitude
of men gathered together, a crowd, throng: Rev. xviii. 17
Rec.*
_ oplxdn, -ns, 7, Gin Hom. opiyAn, fr. dusxyéo to make
water), a mist, fog: 2 Pet. ii 17GLTTrWH. (Am.
iv. 18; Joel ii. 2; Sir. xxiv. 3; Sap. ii. 4.)*
Sppa, -ros, 76, (fr. drropar [see dpaw], pf. dupaz), fr. Hom.
down, an eye: plur., Mt. xx. 34 LT Tr WH; Mk. viii.
23. (Sept. for py, Prov. vi. 4; vii. 2; x. 26.) *
spvio (Mt. xxiii. 20sq.; xxvi.74; Heb. vi. 16; Jas. v.
12; [W. 24]) and dpyupe (duviva, Mk. xiv.71 GLT Tr
WH (cf. B. 45 (39) ]) form their tenses fr. OMOQ; hence
1 aor. dora; Sept. for paw); to swear; to affirm, prom-
ise, threaten, with an oath: absol., foll. by direct discourse,
Mt. xxvi. 74; Mk. xiv. 71; Heb. vii. 21; foll. by ei, Heb.
iil. 11; iv.3; seeei, I. 5. dv. dpxov (often so in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down [W. 226 (212)]) mpds twa, to one (Hom.
Od. 14, 331; 19, 288), Lk.i. 73; durvew with dat. of the
person to whom one promises or threatens something
with an oath: foll. by direct disc. Mk. vi. 23; by an inf.
[W. 331 (311) ], Heb. iii. 18; with épx@ added, Acts ii. 30
[W. 603 (561) ]; revi rr, Acts vii. 17 [Rec. i. e. gen. by at-
traction; cf. B.§ 143,8; W.§ 24,1]. that by which one
swears is indicated by an acc., riva or ri (so in class. Grk.
fr. Hom. down [cf. W. § 32, 1b. y.; B. 147 (128)]), in
swearing to call a person or thing as witness, to invoke,
Phavorinus, and Photius, and interpret it by émuOupetv. It‘ swear by, (Is. xv. 16; J oseph. antt. 5, 1,2; 7,14, 5); rép
ouobupadov 445
ovpavoy, THY yay, Jas. v.12; with prepositions [cf. B.u.s.]:
kard twos (see kard, I. 2 a.), Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Gen. xxii.
16; xxxi. 54; 1S. xxviii. 10[Comp.]; Is. xlv. 23; lxii. 8;
Am. iv. 2; Dem. p. 553, 17; 553, 26 [al. dmop.], etc. ;
kata mdvTwv duvve Oey, Long. past. 4, 16); in imitation
of the Hebr. yaw) foll. by 3, & tum is used [W. 389
(364); B.1.c.; see év, I. 8b.]: Mt. v. 34, 36; xxiii. 16, 18,
20-22; Rev. x. 6; eis 71, with the mind directed unto
[W. 397 (371); B. as above; see eds, B. II. 2 a.], Mt. v. 35.*
Spobupascy (fr. duddvuos, and this fr. duds and Ovuds ;
on advs. in -8év [chiefly derived fr. nouns, and designating
form or structure] as yrwpunddy, poutnddy, etc., ef. Bitm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 452), with one mind, of one accord, (Vulg.
unanimiter [ete.]): Ro. xv. 6; Acts i. 14; ii.46; iv. 24;
vil.57; viii. 6; xii. 20; xv. 25; xviii. 12; xix. 29, and RG
in ii. 1, (Arstph., Xen., Dem., Philo, Joseph., Hdian.,
Sept. Lam. ii.8; Job xvii. 16; Num. xxiv. 24, etc.) ; with
dravres [L.'T WH mavres] (Arstph. pax 484, and often in
class. Grk.), Acts v. 12 [ef. ii. 1 above].*
Opordtw; (duos, [cf. W. 25]); to be like: Mt. xxiii.
27 LTr txt. WH mrg.; Mk. xiv. 70 Rec. where see Fritz-
sche p. 658 sq. ; [on thedat. cf. W.§31,1h.]. Not found
elsewhere. [Comp.: map-opotd{o.]*
Opovotrabis, -€s, (cuotos, macya), suffering the like with
another, of like feelings or affections: twi, Acts xiv. 15;
Jas. v.17. (Plat. rep. 3, 409 b., Tim. 45 ¢c.; Theophr.
h. pl. 5, 8 (7, 2); Philo, conf. ling. §3; 4 Mace. xii. 13;
yi, i.e. trodden alike by all, Sap. vii. 3; see exx. fr. eccles.
writ. [viz. Ignat. (interpol.) ad Trall. 10; Euseb. h. e. 1,
2,1, (both of the incarnate Logos) ] in Grimm on 4 Mace.
p- 344.) *
Opovos (on the accent cf. [Chandler §§ 384, 385]; W.
52 (51); Bitm. Ausf. Spr. § 11 Anm. 9), -oia, -ovoy, also
of two term. (once in the N. T., Rev. iv.3 R*G LT Tr
WH; cf. W. § 11,1; [B. 26 (23)]), (fr. duds [akin to dua
(q: v.), Lat. similis, Eng. same, etc.]), [fr. Hom. down],
like, similar, resembling: a. likei.e. resembling: rui,
in form or look, Jn. ix. 9; Rev. i. 13, 15; ii. 18; iv.
6 sq.; ix. 7, 10 [but here Tr txt. WH mrg. dépoios], 19;
xi. 1; xiii. 2,11; xiv. 14 [but here T WH w. the accus.
(for dat.)]; xvi. 13 Rec.; dpdce:, in appearance, Rev.
iv.3; in nature, Acts xvii. 29; Gal. v.21; Rev. xxi.11, 18;
in nature and condition, 1 Jn. iii. 2; in mode of thinking,
feeling, acting, Mt. xi. 16; xiii. 52; Lk. vi. 47-49; vii.
31sq.; xii. 36, and L WH Tr txt. (see below) in Jn. viii.
55; i.q. may be compared to a thing, so in parables: Mt.
xiii. 31, 33, 44sq. 47; xx. 1; Lk. xiii. 18 sq. 21. b.
like i.e. corresponding or equiv. to, the same as: dpotov
rovrots rpérov, Jude 7; equal in strength, Rev. xiii. 4; in
power and attractions, Rev. xviii. 18; in authority, Mt.
xxii. 39; Mk. xii. 31 [here T WH om. Trmrg. br. op.];
in mind and character, rivds (cf. W. 195 (183), [cf. § 28,
2]; B.§ 132, 24), In. viii. 55 R G T Trmrg. (see above).*
Spodrys, -nros, fj, (Sporos), likeness: ka’ poidryra, in
like manner, Heb. iv. 15 [cf. W. 143 (136)]; xara rh
éuodrnra (MeAxioedéx), after the likeness, Heb. vii. 15.
(Gen. i. 11; 4 Macc. xv. 4 (3); Plat., Aristot., Isocr.,
Polyb., Philo, Plut.) *
Ouolwcts
Spode, -&: fut. duoc; Pass., 1 aor. dpodny, and
without augm. éuorOyy (once Ro. ix. 29 Lmrg. T edd.
2, 7, [but see WH. App. p. 161]; cf. B. 34 (30); Stura,
De dial. Maced. ete. p. 124; [cf.] Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153);
1 fut. 6uovoOjoopar; (Suo.os); fr. [Hom. and] Hat. down;
Sept. esp. for 75; a. to make like: twa tun; pass. to
be or to become like to one: Mt. vi. 8; Acts xiv.11; Heb.
ll. 17; aporwOy 7 Bactd. rv odp., was made like, took the
likeness of, (aor. of the time when the Messiah appeared),
Mt. xiii. 24; xviii. 23; xxii.2; dpowwOjoerat (fut. of the
time of the last judgment), Mt. xxv. 1; &s 7, to be made
like and thus to become as a thing [i. e. a blending of
two thoughts; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 31; B. § 133, 10;
W. § 65, 1 a.], Ro. ix. 29 (3 719) Ezek. xxxii. 2). b.
to liken, compare: twa tum, or ri ten, Mt. vii. 24 [RG
(see below)]; xi. 16; Mk. iv. 30 RLtxt.Trmrg.; Lk.
Vii. 31; xiii. 18, 20; pass. Mt. vii. [24 L T WH Tr txt.],
26; to illustrate by comparison, mas 6pomoopev tv Bao.
tov Geov, Mk. iv. 830 TWH Tr txt. Lmrg. [Comp.: a¢-
op0l6w.]*
Opolwpa, -ros, 7d, (cpoidw), Sept. for AINA, N41, DoY,
M32; prop. that which has been made after the likeness
of something, hence a. a figure, image, likeness,
representation: Ps. ev. (evi.) 20; 1 Mace. iii. 48; of the
image or shape of things seen in a vision, Rev. ix. 7 [cf.
W. 604 (562) ] (Ezek. i. 5, 26, 28, etc. Plato, in Parmen.
p- 132 d., calls finite things opovmpara, likenesses as it
were, in which r&@ mapadelypara, i.e. ai idéae or ra €tdn,
are expressed). b. likeness i. e. resemblance (inas-
much as that appears in an image or figure), freq. such
as amounts well-nigh to equality or identity: tuvds, Ro. vi.
53; viii. 3 (on which see oap&, 3 fin. [cf. Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. etc. §§ 69 c. note, 78 c. note]); Phil. ii. 7 (see
poppy); eikdvos, a likeness expressed by an image, i. e.
an image like, Ro. i. 23; emi r@ ouormpare ths mapaBacews
*Addp, in the same manner in which Adam transgressed
a command of God [see émi, B. 2 a. n.], Ro. v. 14. Cf.
the different views of this word set forth by Holsten,
Zum Evangel. des Paulus u. Petrus, p. 437 sqq. and [esp.
for exx.] in the Jahrbiich. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p.
451 sqq., and by Zeller, Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1870, p. 301 sqq. [Syn. cf. efkoy, fin.; Schmidt ch. 191.]*
Spolws, (Suolos), adv., [fr. Pind., Hdt. down], likewise,
equally, in the same way: Mk. iv. 16 (Trmrg. br. 6p.) ; Lk.
iii. 11; x. 37; xiii 3 LT TrWH; 5 RGLTr mrg.;
Xvi. 253 xvii. 31: Jn.v.19; xxi.13; 1 Pet. iii. 1, 7; v.5;
Heb. ix. 21; Rev. ii. 15 (for Rec. & prod); viii. 12;
potws kat, Mt. xxii. 265 xxvi. 35; Mk. xv. 81 [here Rec.
ou. 6é kai]; Lk. v. 33; xvii. 283RGL; xxii. 36; Jn. vi.
11; 1 Co. vii. 22 R G3 spots pévros kai, Jude 8; spolws
dé kai, Mt. xxvii. 41 RG (where T om. L br. 8€ kai, Tr
br. 3é, WH om. 8 and br. cai); Lk. v.10; x. 32; 1 Co.
vii. 3 (where Lbr. dé), 4; Jas. ii. 25; and correctly
restored by L Tr mrg. in Ro. i. 27, for R T Tr txt. WH
opotws re kai; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 77; [W. 571 (531);
B. § 149, 8]; dpotws preceded by xaOas, Lk. vi. 31.*
Spolwcts, -ews, 77, (opoide ) ; 1. a making like:
opp. to dAdoiwars, Plat. rep. 5, 454 ¢ 2. likeness,
Opororyew
(Plat., Aristot., Theophr.): a6’ dpolwow Oeoi, after the
likeness of God, Jas. iii. 9 fr. Gen. i. 26. [Cf Trench
§ xv.]*
Spodroyéw, -@; impf. opoddyour ; fut. Opodoynow ; 1 aor.
&poddynoa; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. opodoyetrar} (fr. dpo-
Adyos, and this fr. 6udv and Aeyw) ; fr. [Soph. and] Hat.
down ; 1. prop. to say the same thing as another,
i.e. to agree with, assent, both absol. and w. a dat. of the
pers.; often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down; hence ' 2.
univ. to concede; i.e. a. not to refuse, i. e. to promise :
rit thy émayyediav, Acts vii. 17 LT Tr WH [here R. V.
vouchsafe]; foll. by an object. inf., Mt. xiv. 7 (Plat., Dem.,
Plt. als) b. not to deny, i. e. to confess; declare:
joined w. ov dpveiaOar, foll. by direct disc. with recitative
drt, Jn. i. 20; foll. by dr, Heb. xi. 13; twi re, dre, Acts
xxiv. 143 to confess, i. e. to admit or declare one’s self
guilty of what one is accused of: ras duaprias, 1 Jn. i. 9
(Sir. iv. 26). 3. to profess (the diff. betw. the Lat.
profiteor [‘to declare openly and voluntarily’] and
confiteor [‘to declare fully,’ implying the yielding or
change of one’s conviction; cf. pro fessio fidei, con fes-
sio peccatorum] is exhibited in Cic. pro Sest. 51, 109),
i. e. to declare openly, speak out freely, [A. V. generally
confess; on its constr. see B. § 133, 7]: [foll. by an
inf., eidévae Oeov, Tit. i. 16]; revi [cf. B. u.s.; W. § 31, 1f.]
foll. by direct disc. with dre recitative, Mt. vii. 23; one
is said opodoyetv that of which he is convinced and which
he holds to be true (hence 6u. is disting. fr. morevew in
Jn. xii. 42; Ro. x. 9 sq.): pass. absol., with ordpare (dat.
of instrum.) added, Ro. x. 10; ri, Acts xxiii. 8; red with
a predicate acc. [B. u. s.], avrov Xpiordv, Jn. ix. 22; Kv-
prov (pred. acc.) "Incovr, Ro. x. 9 [here WH 76 pnya...
te kupwos etc., L mrg. Tr mrg. simply dr etc. ; again with
ére in 1 Jn. iv. 15]; "Incotdy Xp. ev capki éAnrvOdra [Tr
mrg. WH mrg. éAnAvOevar], 1 Jn. iv. 2 and Ree. also in
3 [see below]; €pxdpevoy ev capxi, 2 Jn. 7, [cf. B. u. s.3
W. 346 (324)]; ruvd, to profess one’s self the worshipper
of one, 1 Jn. iv. 3 [here WH mrg. Aver, cf. Westcott, Epp.
of Jn. p. 156 sqq.] and GL T Tr WH in ii. 23; év with
a dat. of the pers. (see év, I. 8c.), Mt. x. 32; Lk. xii. 8;
with cognate acc. giving the substance of the profession
(ef. B.§ 131, 5; W. § 32, 2], éuodoyiav, 1 Tim. vi. 12 (also
foll. by mepi revos, Philo de mut. nom. § 8) ; ré dvopd Twos,
to declare the name (written in the book of life) to be
the name of a follower of me, Rev. iii. 5GLT Tr
WH. 4. Acc. toa usage unknown to Grk. writ. to
praise, celebrate, (see e€opodoyéw, 2; [B. § 133, 7]): revi,
Heb. xiii. 15. [Comp.: dv6-(-ya), e€-opodoyew. | *
Opodoyla, -as, 7, (duodoyéw, q. v. [cf. W. 35 (34)]), in
the N. T. profession [R. V. uniformly con fession]; a.
subjectively: aoyuepéa tHe Omod. yuor, i. e. Whom we pro-
fess (to be ours), Heb. iii. 1 [but al. refer this to b.]. b.
objectively, profession [confession ] i.e. what one professes
{confesses|: Heb. iv.14; 1 Tim. vi. 12 (see éuodoyéa, 3) ;
13 (see paprupéa, a. p- 891°); rs eAmidos, the substance
of our profession, which we embrace with hope, Heb. x.
23; eis rd evayyéAtov Tod Xpicrod, relative to the gospel,
2 Co. ix. 13 (translate, for the obedience ye render to what
446
/
overdia wos
ye profess concerning the gospel; cf. 4 eis Tov TOU Beod
Xprorov dpodoyia, Justin M. dial. c. Tryph. c. 47, — a con-
str. occasioned perhaps by # eis rov Xpuorov miores, Col. il.
5; [ef. W. 381 (357)]). [(Hadt., Plat., al.)]*
Spodoyoupevas, (cporoyew), adv., by consent of all, con-
fessedly, without controversy: 1 Tim. iii. 16. (4 Mace.
vi. 31; vii. 16; xvi. 1; in prof. auth. fr. Thuc., Xen., Plat.
down; with id ravrav added, Isocr. paneg. § 33, where
see Baiter’s note.)*
Oporexvos, -ov, (duds and réxyn), practising the same
trade or craft, of the same trade: Acts xviii. 3. (Hdt. 2,
89; Plat., Dem., Joseph., Lcian., al.) *
6pod, (duds), [fr. Hom. down], adv., together: Jn. iv.
36; xx. 43; elvae duov, of persons assembled together,
Acts ii. 1 L T Tr WH; xx. 18 Lehm.; Jn. xxi. 2. [Syn.
see dya, fin. ]*
Gpdw, see duvio.
Spodpwv, -ov, (ouds, ppnv), of one mind, [A.V. like
minded], concordant: 1 Pet. iii. 8. (Hom., Hes., Pind.,
Arstph., Anthol., Plut., al.) *
Spws, (duds), fr. Hom. down, yet; it occurs twice in
the N. T. out of its usual position [cf. W. § 61, 5f.; B.
§ 144, 23], viz. in 1 Co. xiv. 7, where resolve thus: ra
ayuxa, xairep hori d.ddvra, 6pws, €av Stacrodny ... ras
«rA. instruments without life, although giving forth a
sound, yet, unless they give a distinction in the sounds,
how shall it be known etc., Fritzsche, Conject. spec. i.
p- 52; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [W. 344 (323)]; again, dps
avOpwmov ... ovdeis aberet for avOparov Kexvp. Stank,
kaimep avOpw@mov ovcay, duws ovdets xrA. a man’s estab-
lished covenant, though it be but a man’s, yet no one
ete. Gal. ili. 15; dpws pévro, but yet, nevertheless, [cf.
W. 444 (413)], In. xii. 42.*
évap, Td, (an indecl. noun, used only in the nom. and
acc. sing.; the other cases are taken from dvecpés), [fr.
Hom. down], a dream: xar’ dvap, in a dream, Mt. i. 20;
ii. 12 sq. 19, 22; xxvii. 19,—a later Greek phrase, for
which Attic writ. used évap without xara [q. v. II. 2];
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 422 sqq.; [Photius, Lex. p. 149,
25 sq. ].*
dvaptov, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of dvos; ef. [W. 24 and] y-
vatkdptoy), a little ass: Jn. xii. 14. (Machon ap. Athen.
13 p. 582c.; [Epictet. diss. 2, 24, 18].)*
oveditw ; impf. dveidiCov ; 1 aor. @veidioca; pres. pass.
dvewdiCopar; (dvedos, q. v.); fr. Hom. down; Sept. esp.
for \1M; to reproach, upbraid, revile; [on its constr. cf.
W. § 32,1b.8.; B.§ 133, 9]: of deserved reproach, rind,
foll. by dru, Mt. xi. 20; ré (the fault) twos, foll. by drt,
Mk. xvi. 14. of unjust reproach, to revile: rua, Mt. v. 11;
Mk. xv. 32; Lk. vi. 22; Ro. xv. 3 fr. Ps. lxviii. (Ixix.) 10;
pass. 1 Pet. iv. 14; foll. by ér, 1 Tim. iv. 10R G Tr mrg.
WH umrg.; 76 aird dveidifov adrév (Ree. avr@), Mt. xxvii.
44 (see aitds, 11.1). to upbraid, cast (favors received)
in one’s teeth: absol. Jas. i. 5; pera rd Sodvat pi dveidice,
Sir. xli. 22, ef. xx. 145 twit cwrnpiay, deliverance obtained
by us for one, Polyb. 9, 31, 4.*
dveSiopds, -0d, 6, (dvedi¢w), [ef. W. 24], a reproach.
Ro. xv. 3: 1 Tim. iii. 7; Heb. x. 33; 6 dvedirpos TOD Xpr
Ovevdos
grov i.e. such as Christ suffered (for the cause of God,
from its enemies), Heb. xi. 26; xiii. 13; cf. W. 189 (178).
447
dvopa
BAacdnpias i.g. BAadodpnua (-pov) [cf. W. § 34, 3 b.; B.
§ 132, 10], names by which God is blasphemed, his maj-
(Plut. Artax. 22; [Dion. Hal.]; Sept. chiefly for 97}.) * | esty assailed, Rev. xiii. 1; xvii. 3 [RG Tr, see yéuo]. so
dvetBos, -ous, Td, (fr. Svopat to blame, to revile), fr. Hom.
down, reproach ; i. q. shame: Lk. i. 25. (Sept. chiefly for
na; three times for np disgrace, Is. xxx. 3; Mich.
ii. 6; Prov. xviii. 13.) *
"Ovictpos, -ov, 6, (i. e. profitable, helpful; fr. dynous
profit), Onesimus, a Christian, the slave of Philemon:
Philem. 10; Col. iv. 9. [Cf. Bp. Lghift. Com. Intr. § 4;
Ilackett in B. D.]*
"Ovo topos, -ov, 6, [i. e. ‘ profit-bringer’], Onesiphorus,
the name of a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 16; iv. 19.*
_ dvuxds, -7, -dv, (Bvos), of or for an ass: pidos dvixés i. e.
turned by an ass (see pvdos, 1), Mk. ix. 42 LT Tr WH;
Lk. xvii. 2 Rec.; Mt. xviii. 6. Not found elsewhere.*
ovivnpt: fr. Hom. down; to be useful, to profit, help,
(Lat. juvo); Mid., pres. dvivaya; 2 aor. dvnyny (and later
avapuny, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 12sq.; Kiihner § 343 s. v.,
i. p. 880; [Veitch s. v.]), optat. dvaiunv; to receive profit
or advantage, be helped [or have joy, (Lat. juvor )]: twés,
of one, Philem. 20 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Elsewh.
in the Scriptures only in Sir. xxx. 2.) *
Gvopa, -ros, Td, (NOM [others TNO; see Vaniéek p.
1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name], with prefixed o [but
see Curtius § 446]), Sept. for ow, [fr. Hom. down], the
name by which a person or a thing is called, and dis-
tinguished from others; 1. univ.: of prop. names,
Mk. iii. 16; vi.14; Acts xiii. 8, etc.; trav dmoard\ov Ta
évépara, Mt. x. 2; Rev. xxi. 14; dvOpwros or dvip @ dvopa,
modus 9 Ov. , Sc. Hv, named, foll. by the name in the nom.
[ef. B. § 129, 20,3]: Lk. i. 26 sq.; ii. 25; viii. 41; xxiv.
13,18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11,1); ob [L 3] rd
dvopa, Mk. xiv. 32; kal 76 dv. adtod, adtas, ete., Lk. i. 5, 27;
Svopa aire sc. Hv or eoriv [B. u.s.],Jn.i.6; iii. 1; xviii. 10;
Rev. vi. 8; ovopare, foll. by the name [cf. B. § 129 a.
3; W. 182 (171)], Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. v. 22; Lk.i. 5; x.
38; xvi. 20; xxiii. 50; Acts v. 1, 34; viii. 9; ix. 10-12, 33,
36x. 15 xi. 285 x11. 133 xvic 1, 143 xvii. 34; xviii. 2,7,
DAE XEKE DEXA OP EX XT LORE K VAL Lis XXVAl0 d 5) Levert x.
11, (Xen. anab. 1, 4, 11); rovvopna (i. €. Td Svopa), ace.
absol. [B. § 131, 12; cf. W. 230 (216)], i.e. by name, Mt.
xxvii. 57; dvoud pou sc. éoriv, my name is, Mk. v. 9; Lk.
Vili. 30, (Odris Epoiy dvoua, Hom. Od. 9, 366); éxew dvopa,
foll. by the name in the nom., Rev. ix. 11; xadeiv rd dvoud
rivos, foll. by the acc. of the name, see kadéw, 2a.; Kadetv
riva évopari tim, Lk. i. 61; dvopatt kadovpevos, Lk. xix. 2;
carey tiva emi t@ ov. Lk. i. 59 (see emi, B. 2 a. n. p. 233°) ;
kar’ Svopa (see card, II. 3 a.y. p. 328°); ra dvopata tpay
eypahn [evyéypanrae T WH Tr] éy rots ovpavois, your
names have been enrolled by God in the register of the
citizens of the kingdom of heaven, Lk. x. 20; 76 évopa
tivos (€ypadn) ev BiB (rH BiBriw) Cons, Phil. iv. 3;
Rev. xiii. 8; éml rd BiBXlov rigs ¢. Rev. xvii. 8; exBadrAcqw
(q. v. 1h.) 1d Svopa Tivos ws movnpédr, since the wicked-
ness of the man is called to mind by his name, Lk. vi.
22; émixadeicbat Td Svoua Tov Kupiov, see emixadéw, 53 €mt-
kéxAnrat 7d Svopd Twos emi Twa, see erik. 2; dvdpara (Gvopa)
used that the name is opp. to the reality: dvouaéyes,
dre (hs, Kal vexpos ei, thou art said [A. V. hast a name] to
live, Rev. iii. 1 (dvoya etyev, os em’ AOnvas édavver, Hat.
7,138). ig. title: mepi dvouarav, about titles (as of the
Messiah), Acts xviii. 15; «Anpovopeiv dvopa, Heb. i. 4;
Xapi¢erOai rive dvopa tt, Phil. ii. 9 (here the title 6 xvpuos
is meant [but crit. txts. read 7d dvoa etc., which many
take either strictly or absolutely; cf. Meyer and Bp.
Lghtft. ad loc. (see below just before 3)]); spec. a title
of honor and authority, Eph. i. 21 [but see Meyer]; éy
T® dvouate Ingov, in devout recognition of the title con-
ferred on him by God (i.e. the title 6 kipsos), Phil. ii. 10
[but the interp. of dvoua here follows that of évoya in
vs. 9 above; see Meyer and Bp. Leghtft., and cf. W. 390
(365) ]. 2. By a usage chiefly Hebraistic the name
is used for everything which the name covers, everything
the thought or feeling of which is roused in the mind by
mentioning, hearing, remembering, the name, i. e. for
one’s rank, authority, interests, pleasure, command, excel-
lences, deeds, etc. ; thus, ets dvoya mpodnrov, out of regard
for [see eis, B. II. 2 d.] the name of prophet which he
bears, i. q. because he is a prophet, Mt. x. 415 Bamrifey
twa eis dvopna Tivos, by baptism to bind any one to recog-
nize and publicly acknowledge the dignity and authority
of one [cf. Bamrigw, II. b. (aa.)], Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts viii.
16; xix.5; 1Co.i.13,15. to doa thing évdvopati twos,
i. e. by one’s command and authority, acting on his behalf,
promoting his cause, [cf. W. 390 (365); B. § 147, 10]; as,
6 épyopevos ev dvopate kuptov (fr. Ps. cxvii. (exviii.) 26),
of the Messiah, Mt. xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; Mk. xi. 9; LK. xiii.
35; xix. 38; Jn. xii. 13; év 7 dvdpate Tod marpds pov, Jn.
v.43; x. 25; év r@ dvouate To idio, of his own free-will
and authority, Jn. v.43; todoa thing ev 76 ov. of Jesus,
Acts x. 48; 1Co. v. 4; 2 Th. iii. 6; and LT Tr WHin
Jas. v. 10 [but surely «. here denotes God; cf. 2 f. below].
Acc. to a very freq. usage in the O. T. (cf. 7177 Dw), the
name of God in the N.'T. is used for all those qualities
which to his worshippers are summed up in that name,
and by which God makes himself known to men; it is
therefore equiv. to his divinity, Lat. numen, (not his na-
ture or essence as it is in itself), the divine majesty and
perfections, so far forth as these are apprehended, named,
magnified, (cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 993; Oeh-
ler in Herzog x. p. 196 sqq.; Wittichen in Schenkel iv.
p- 282 sqq.); so in the phrases dytov 16 dvoua adrod sc.
éoriv, Lk. i.49; dyudifew 7d dv. rod Oeod, Mt. vi. 9; Lk. xi.
2; dpodroyeiy T@ dv. avrov, Heb. xiii. 15; Waddeuw, Ro. xv.
9; B0€dtev, Jn. xii. 28; [Rev. xv. 4]; pavepodv, yvwpi-
(ev, Jn. xvii. 6, 26; poBetaOar 76 dv. Tov Geos, Rey. xi. 18;
xv.4[(GLT Tr WH]; diayyedrew, Ro. ix. 17 ; amayyéa~
hew, Heb. ii. 12; Bracpnpeiv, Ro. ii. 24; 1 Tim. vi.1; Rev.
xiii. 6; xvi. 9; dydmny évdelKvvaOat Eis Td dv. TOD Geo, Heb.
vi. 10; rnpycov adrovs év TO Gvopati gov, ® (by attraction
for 6 [cf. B. § 143, 8 p. 286; W. § 24, 1; Ree. incorrectly
ods ]) dédexds uot, keep them consecrated and united to
Ovopa
thy name (character), which thou didst commit to me to
declare and manifest (cf. vs. 6), Jn. xvii. 11; [cf. dep rod
dylov évoparos cov, 08 karecknvacas év Tais Kapdiats jyar,
‘Teaching’ etc. ch. 10, 2]. After the analogy of the pre-
ceding expression, the name of Christ (Inaod, ‘Inoov Xpio-
Tov, Tod Kupiov "Ina-, Tod Kupiov Huey, etc.) is used in the
N.T. of all those things which, in hearing or recalling that
name, we are bidden to recognize in Jesus and to profess,
accordingly, of his Messianic dignity, divine authority,
memorable sufferings, in a word the peculiar services and
blessings conferred by him on men, so far forth as these
are believed, confessed, commemorated, [cf. Westcott on
the Epp. of Jn. p. 232]: hence the phrases edayyedife-
cba ra mepi Tod dv. I. Xp. Acts viii. 125 peyadvvew rd dv.
Acts xix.17; 7@ dvop. [Rec. év r. dv.] adrod édmigew, Mt.
xii. 21 [B. 176 (153)]; meorevew, 1 Jn. iii. 23; mor. eis
ro dp., Jn. 1. 12; ii. 23; iii. 18; 1 Jn. v. 13* [Rec., 13°];
miatis Tou dv. Acts iii. 16; 6 dvopatwy Td dvopa Kupiov, who-
ever nameth the name of the Lord sc. as his Lord (see
dvopdte, a.), 2 Tim. ii. 19; xpareiv, to hold fast i. e. per-
severe in professing, Rev. ii. 13; ov« dpveic Bat, Rev. iii.
8; 7d dv. "Inood évdvédCerar ev piv, 2'Th.i. 12; Baoragerv
7 bv. évorriov eOvav (see Baordw, 3), Acts ix.15; to do
or to suffer anything emi r@ dvopare Xp. see eri, B. 2 a. B.
p- 2325, The phrase éy r@ dvdpuart Xp. is used in various
senses : a. by the command and authority of Christ:
see exx. just above. b. in the use of the name of Christ
i.e. the power of his name being invoked for assistance,
Mk. ix. 38 Re* L T Tr WH (see f. below); Lk. x. 17;
Acts iii. 6; iv. 10; xvi. 18; Jas. v.14; univ. év role dvdpa-
tT émomoate tovTo; Acts iv. 7. c. through the power
of Christ’s name, pervading and governing their souls,
Mk. xvi. 17. d. in acknowledging, embracing, prafess-
ing, the name of Christ: cwOnvat, Acts iv. 12; StxavwOnvat,
1Co. vi. 11; fany éyew, Jn. xx. 315 in professing and pro-
claiming the name of Christ, mappnovateoOa, Acts ix. 27,
28) (29). e. relying or resting on the name of Christ,
rooted (so to speak) in his name, i. e. mindful of Christ:
moety Tt, Col. iii. 17; evyapuoreiv, Eph. v. 20; aireiv ru, i.e.
(for substance) to ask a thing, as prompted by the mind of
Christ and in reliance on the bond which unites us to him,
Jn. xiv. 13 sq.; xv. 16; xvi. 24, [26], and RG Lin 23;
cf. Ebrard, Gebet im Namen Jesu, in Herzog iv. 692 sqq.
God is said to do a thing év dv. Xp. regardful of the name
of Christ, i. e. moved by the name of Christ, for Christ’s
sake, S:ddvai the thing asked, Jn. xvi. 23 T Tr WH; zép-
Tew TO TvEvpa TO ay. Jn. xiv. 26. f. ev dvduati Xpicrod,
[A. V. for the name of Christ] (Germ. auf Grund Namens
Christi), i. e. because one calls himself or is called by the
name of Christ: dvewdi¢erOat, 1 Pet. iv. 14 (equiv. to ds
Xporcavés, 16). The simple dat. r@ dv. Xp. signifies by
the power of Christ’s name, pervading and prompting
souls, Mt. vii. 22; so also r@ dyduare rod Kupiov ee e. of
God) aneiv, of the prophets, Jas. v.10 RG; 76 dv. cov,
by uttering thy name as a spell, Mk. ix. 38 R* bez G (see
b. above). eis rd dvopa rod Xpiorod cuvayeOat is used of
those who come together to deliberate concerning any
matter relating to Christ’s cause, (Germ. auf den Na-
448
OVTOS
men), with the mind directed unto, having regard unto,
his name, Mt. xviii. 20. évexev tov dv. [A. V. for my
name’s sake}, i. e. on account of professing my name, Mt.
xix. 29; also 8a 76 Ov. pou, adrod, etc.: Mt. x. 22; xxiv.
9; Mk. xiii. 13; Lk. xxi. 17; Jn. xv. 21; 1 Jn. ii. 12; Rev.
ii. 3. 81d rod dv. Tod Kup. mapakadeiv twa, to beseech one
by employing Christ’s name as a motive or incentive [cf.
W. 381 (357)], 1 Co. i. 10; by embracing and avowing
his name, dpeow dpapriav AaPeiv, Acts x.43. trép rod ov.
avrov, i.q. for defending, spreading, strengthening, the au-
thority of Christ, Acts v. 41 (see below) ; ix. 16; xv. 26;
xxi. 13; Ro.i.5; 3Jn. 7; — [but ace. to the better txts.
in Acts v. 41; 3 Jn. 7, 76 dvoua is used absolutely, the
Name, sc. kupiov, of the Lord Jesus; so cod. Vat. Jas. v.
14; cf. Lev. xxiv. 11, 16; Bp. Lghtft. on Ignat. ad
Eph. 3,1; B. 163 (142) note; W. 594 (553). So Bp.
Lghtft. in Phil. ii. 9; (see 1 above)]. mpds rd dvopa Inaod
tov Naf. evavria mpaéa, Acts xxvi. 9. 3. In imita-
tion of the Hebr. nyow (Num. i. 2, 18, 20; iii. 40, 43;
xxvi. 53), the plur. dvdyuara is used i.q. persons reckoned
up by name: Actsi.15; Rev. iii.4; xi. 13. 4. Like
the Lat. nomen, i.q. the cause or reason named : év T@ dvd-
patt Tour, in this cause, i. e. on this account, sc. because
he suffers as a Christian, 1 Pet. iv. 16 LT Tr WH [al.
more simply take ov. here as referring to Xpuoriavds pre-
OF ey
ceding]; év dvdpart, dre (as in Syriac 9 (Seas) Xpicros
éore, in ‘this name, i. e. for this reason, because ye are
Christ’s (disciples), Mk. ix. 41.
svopatw; 1 aor. evduaca; Pass., pres. dvoudfopar; 1
aor. avoudcbnv; (dvoma); fr. Hom. down; to name [cf.
W. 615 (572)]; a. Td dvopa, to name i. e. to utter:
pass. Eph. i. 21; rod xupiov [Rec. Xpiorod], the name of
the Lord (Christ) sc. as his Lord, 2 Tim. ii. 19 (Sept.
for MYM DY VIN, to make mention of the name of Jeho=
vah in praise, said of his worshippers, Is. xxvi. 13; Am.
vi. 10); 7d dvopa "Incod emi tia, Acts xix. 13, see ézi,
C. I. 1c. p. 234° mid. b. twa, with a proper or an
appellative name as pred. ace., fo name, i. e. give name
to, one: Lk. vi. 13 sq.; pass. to be named, i. e. bear the
name of, 1 Co. v.11; ék w. gen. of the one from whom
the received name is derived, Eph. iii. 15 (Hom. II. 10,
68; Xen. mem. 4, 5, 12). c. teva or ri, to utter the
name of a person or thing: dmov dvoudcbn Xpuorés, of
the lands into which the knowledge of Christ has been
carried, Ro. xv. 20 (1 Mace. iii. 9); dvoudteoOa of things
which are called by their own name because they are
present or exist (as opp. to those which are unheard
of), 1 Co. v.1 Rec.; Eph. v.3. [Comp.: é-ovopdte.] *
dvos, -ov, 6, 7, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for Sinn and
ps, an ass: Lk. xiv.5 Rec.; Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. Lie
6, Joke xiii. 5 sep eit xxi 2s, 7
évtws (fr. dv; on advs. formed fr. pteps. cf. Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. § 115 a. Anm. 3; Kiihner § 335 Anm. 2), adv.,
truly, in reality, in point of fact, as opp. to what is pre
tended, fictitious, false, conjectural: Mk. xi. 32 [see
éyo, I. 1 f.]; Lk. xxiii 47; xxiv. 34; Jn. viii. 36; 1 Co.
xiv. 25; Gal. iii. 21 and Ree. in 2 Pet. ii. 18; 6, 9, Td
bl
OcoOS
érras foll. by a noun, that which és truly ete., that which
is indeed, (ra dvrws dyaba 7 xadd, Plat. Phaedr. p.
260 a.; tHv dvrws Kal ddnOds iriay, Plat. Clit. p. 409 e.;
oi dvrws Bacudeis, Joseph. antt. 15, 3,5): as 9 dvras (Rec.
aidvos) (on, 1 Tim. vi. 19; 9 dvrws xnpa, a widow that
is a widow indeed, not improperly called a widow (as
mapGévos 7 Neyouevn xnpa, i.e. a virgin that has taken
a vow of celibacy, in lgn. ad Smyrn. 13 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. in
loc.]; ef. Baur, Die sogen. Pastoralbriefe, p. 46 sqq.),
1 Tim. v. 3, 5,16. (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.;
Sept. for n298, Num. xxii. 37; for js, Jer. iii. 23; for
48, Jer. x. 19.) *
Eos, -eos (-ovs), Td, (d€ds), vinegar (Aeschyl., Hip-
pocr., Arstph., Xen., sqq.; for ypn, Ruth ii. 14; Num.
vi. 3, etc.); used in the N. T. for Lat. posca, i. e. the
mixture of sour wine or vinegar and water which the
Roman soldiers were accustomed to drink: Mt. xxvii.
34 RL mrg., 48; Mk. xv. 36; Lk. xxiii. 36; Jn. xix.
29 sq.*
€bs, -eia, -v, [allied w. Lat. acer, acus, etc.; cf. Curtius
S52]; 1. sharp (fr. Hom. down) : foydaia, dpéma-
Pov Reval Osmil, 125 Xiv. L450 07 squ3, xix. 1d, (Is. vy.
28; Ps. lvi. (Ivii.) 5). 2. swift, quick, (so fr. Hat.
5, 9 down; cf. dkis fleet): Ro. iii. 15 (Am. ii. 15; Prov.
Box. 29))e" 3
émh, -As, 7, (perh. fr. dy [root dm (see dpaw); ef. Cur-
tius § 627]), prop. through which one can see (Pollux | 2,
53 p. 179] dan, d¢ fs Zorw ideiv, cf. Germ. Luke, Loch
[?]), an opening, aperture, (used of a window, Cant. v.
4): of fissures in the earth, Jas. iii. 11 (Ex. xxxiii. 22);
of caves in rocks or mountains, Heb. xi. 38 [here h. V.
holes]; Obad. 8. (Of various other kinds of holes and
openings, in Arstph., Aristot., al.) *
dmuaGev, (see dricw), adv. of place, from behind, on the
back, behind, after: Mt. ix. 20; Mk. v. 27; Lk. viii. 44;
Rev. iv. 6; v. 1 (on which see ypddo, 3). As a prepo-
sition it is joined with the gen. (like éumpoodev, ewbev,
etc. [W. § 54, 6; B. § 146, 1]): Mt. xv. 23; Lk. xxiii.
26; [Rev. i.10 WH mrg.]. (From Hom. down; Sept.
for *]H8, sometimes for Mx.) *
orice, ([perh.] fr. 4 Sms; and this fr. éro, éropa, to
follow [but cf. Vaniéek p. 530]), adv. of place and time,
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 18, Wns and esp. for “Ins;
(at the) back, behind, after; 1. adverbially of
place: éorava, Lk. vii. 88; émorpéeyrar émiaw, back,
Mt. xxiv. 18 (tmoorpépew drica, Joseph. antt. 6, 1, 3);
7a orice, the things that are behind, Phil. iii. 13 (14);
eis ra dricw drépyecba, to go backward, Vulg. abire re-
trorsum, Jn. xviii. 6 ; to return home, of those who grow
recreant to Christ’s teaching and cease to follow him,
Jn. vi. 66; orpépecOa, to turn one’s self back, Jn. xx.
14; éemorpepey, to return back to places left, Mk. xiii.
16; Lk. xvii. 31; éroorpéya eis 7a drrica, trop., of those
who return to the manner of thinking and living already
abandoned, 2 Pet. ii. 21 Lechm.; Brémew (Vulg. [aspicere
or] respicere retro [A. V. to look back]), Lk. ix. 62. 2;
By a usage unknown to Grk. auth., as a prep. with the
gen. [W. § 54,6; B.§ 146, 1]; a. of place: Rev.
449
o7Trov
i. 10 [WH mrg. dmicbev]; xii. 15, (Num. xxv. 8; Cant.
ii. 9); in phrases resembling the Hebr. [cf. W. 30; B.
u.s. and 172 (150)]: émicw twos épyecba to follow any
one as a guide, to be his disciple or follower, Mt. xvi.
24; Lk. ix. 23; Mk. viii. 34 RL Trmrg. WH; [ef. Lk.
Xiv. 27]; also dxodovdeiv, Mk. viii. 34 GT Tr txt.; Mt.
x. 38, (see dkodovOéw, 2 fin.) ; mopeverOar, to join one’s
self to one as an attendant and follower, Lk. xxi. 8 (Sir.
xlvi. 10); to seek something one lusts after, 2 Pet. ii.
10 [cf. W. 594 (553); B. 184 (160)]; dmépyoua drica
twvds, to go off in order to follow one, to join one’s party,
Mk. i. 20; Jn. xii. 19; to run after a thing which one
lusts for [ef. B. u.s.], érépas capxds, Jude 7; Sedre drica
prov (see dedre, 1), Mt. iv. 19; Mk. 1.17; dmooréAXew
twa oniow twos, Lk. xix. 14; ddiordva, dmoomay twa
érigw avtov, to draw one away to (join) his party, Acts
v.37; xx. 30; exrpémec Oar, to turn out of the right path,
turn aside from rectitude, 1 Tim. v. 15; by a pregnant
construction, after Oavydtew, to wonder after i. e. to be
drawn away by admiration to follow one [B. 185 (160
sq.) ], Rev. xiii. 3 (mas 6 Aads eE€orn driaw adrod, 1 S.
xiii. 7); Umaye dricw pov, [A. V. get thee behind me], out
of my sight: Lk. iv.8 RLbr.; Mt. iv. 10 [GLbr.];
xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. b. of time, after: ¢pyecOa
éricw twds, to make his public appearance after (sub-
sequently to) one, Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27,
30, (6ric@ Tov caBBarov, Neh. xiii. 19).*
omAifm: [1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. émAicacde] ;
(omAov); fr. Hom. down; to arm, furnish with arms;
univ. to provide; mid. ti, to furnish one’s self with a thing
(as with arms); metaph. tiv airyy evvoiay érXicacbe,
[A. V. arm yourselves with i. e.] take on the same mind,
1 Pet. iv. 1 (@pacos, Soph. Electr. 995). [Comp.: xaé-
ola. | *
émAov [allied to éra, Lat. sequor, socius, etc.; Curtius
§ 621], -ov, rd, as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, any tool
or implement for preparing a thing, (like the Lat. arma) ;-
hence 1. plur. arms used in warfare, weapons:
Jn. xviii. 3; 2 Co. x.4; metaph. rys dtxacoovyns, which
#4 Sux. furnishes, 2 Co. vi. 7; rod dards, adapted to the
light, such as light demands, Ro. xiii. 12 [here Lmrg.
épya]. 2. an instrument: dma adcxias, for commit-
ting unrighteousness, opp. to dmAa dixatoovvys, for prac-
tising righteousness, Ro. vi. 13.*
Strotos, -oia, -otov, (motos w. the rel. 6), [fr. Hom. down],
of what sort or quality, what manner of: 1 Co. iii. 13;
Gal. ii. 6; 1 Th.i.9; Jas. i. 24; preceded by rowoidros,
[such as], Acts xxvi. 29.*
émére, (xére w. the rel. 6), [fr. Hom. down], when [cf.
B. § 139, 34; W. § 41 b. 3]: Lk. vi. 3 RGT (where L
Tr WH Gre).*
émov, (from od and the rel. 6), [from Hom. down],
where ; 1. ady. of place, a. in which place,
where ; a. in relative sentences with the Indica-
tive it is used to refer to a preceding noun of place;
as, emi ris yijs, drov etc. Mt. vi. 19; add, ib. 20; xiii. 5;
xxviii. 6; Mk. vi. 55; ix. 44, 46, [which verses T WH
om. Tr br.], 48; Lk. xii. 33; Jn. i. 28; iv. 20,46; vi. 23;
OnTUVO
Vil. 425x405 xie3 0h xit. 13 xvini. 1,20; xix. 18, 20541;
xx. 12; Acts xvii.1; Rev. xi.8; xx.10. it refers to
€xet or exeioe to be mentally supplied in what precedes
or follows: Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Mk. ii. 4; iv. 15; v. 40;
xiii. 14; Jn. iii. 8; vi. 62; vil. 34; xi. 32; xiv.3; xvii.
24; xx.19; Ro. xv. 20; Heb. ix. 16; x. 18; Rev. ii. 13.
it refers to éxec expressed in what follows: Mt. vi. 21;
Lk. xii. 834; xvii. 37; Jn. xii. 26; Jas. iii. 16. in imita-
tion of the Hebr. nv- ws (Gen. xiii. 3; Eccl. ix. 10,
etc.) : Omovu éxei, Rev. xii. 6 [G T Tr WH], 14, (see éxei,
a.); émov... ém avrav, Rev. xvii. 9. ézrov also refers
to men, so that it is equiv. to with (among) whom, in
whose house: Mt. xxvi. 57; [add, Rev. ii. 13; cf. W. § 54,
7 fin.]; in which state (viz. of the renewed man), Col. iii.
11. it is loosely connected with the thought to which
it refers, so that it is equiv. to wherein [A. V. whereas],
2 Pet. ii. 11 Gin the same sense in indir. quest., Xen.
mem. 3, 5,1). drov dy, wherever, — with impf. indic.
(see ay, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56 [Tdf. édv]; with aor. sub-
junc. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mk. ix. 18 (where L T Tr WH ozrov
éav); Mk. xiv. 9 [here too T WH 6r-. édv]; also dmov édv
(see éedv, II.), Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. vi. 10; xiv. 14%, (in
both which last pass. L Tr émov dv); with subj. pres.
Mt. xxiv. 28. B. in indir. questions [yet cf. W. § 57,
2 fin.], with subjunc. aor.: Mk. xiv. 14°; Lk. xxii.
iil b. joined to verbs signifying motion into a
place instead of ézou, into which place, whither, (see
exe, b.): foll. by the indic., Jn. viii. 21 sq.; xiii. 33, 36;
xiv.4; xxi. 18; [Jas. iii. 4 T Tr WH (see below) ]; darov
av, where(whither)soever, w. indic. pres., Rev. xiv. 4 L
Tr WH (cf. below], cf. B. § 189, 30; with subjunc. pres.,
Lk. ix.57 RG T WH [al. én. édv, see below]; Jas. iii. 4
[RGL]; Rev. xiv. 4 RGT (see above); émov éedy, w.
subjunc. pres., Mt. viii. 19, and L Tr in Lk. ix. 57. 2.
It gets the force of a conditional particle if (in case
that, inso far as, [A. V. whereas (cf. 2 Pet. ii. 11 above)]):
1 Co. iii. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 43, 1, and often in Grk.
writ.; cf. Grimm on 4 Macc. ii. 14; Meyer on 1 Co. iii.
3; [Miller on Barn. ep. 16, 6]).*
orrave (OLITQ): to look at, behold; mid. pres. ptep.
érravdpevos; to allow one’s self to be seen, to appear: tit,
Acts i. 3. (1 K. viii. 8; Tob. xii. 19; [Graec. Ven. Ex.
xxxiv. 24].) ~
érracia, -as, 7, (drraw) ; 1. the act of exhibiting
one’s self to view: dmraciat kupiov, 2 Co. xii. 1 [A. V.
visions; cf. Meyer ad loc. ] (ev nyépats drracias pov, Add.
to Esth. iv. 1. 44 (13); [cf. Mal. ili. 2]; #duos ev onrtacia,
coming into view, Sir. xliii. 2). 2. a sight, a vision,
an appearance presented to one whether asleep or
awake: otjpamos dmr. Acts xxvi. 19; éwpaxevat omtaciay,
Lk. i. 22; w. gen. of appos. dyyéAov, Lk. xxiv. 23. A
later form for dys [cf. W. 24], Anthol. 6, 210, 6; for
719, Dan. [Theodot.] ix. 23; x. 1, 7 sq.*
omrés, -n, -dv, (drrdw [to roast, cook]), cooked, broiled:
Lk. xxiv. 42. (Ex. xii. 8,9; in class. Grk. fr. Hom.
down.) *
S6wrw, See paw.
Gwdpa, -as, 7, (derived by some fr. gms [cf. érica],
450
ive
OTTWS
ropa, and Spa; hence, the time that follows the dpa
[Curtius § 522]; by others fr. dds [ef. our sap] juice,
and &pa, i.e. the time of juicy fruits, the time when
fruits become ripe), fr. Hom. down; 1. the season
which succeeds O€pos, from the rising of Sirius to that of
Arcturus, i. e. late summer, early autumn, our dog-days
(the year being divided into seven seasons as follows:
gap, O€pos, drapa, POwdrwpov, amopytds, xeysav, puTa-
hid). 2. ripe fruits (of trees): cod rhs emOupias
tis uxns for dv 4 Wuxn cov émOupet, Rev. xviii. 14,
(Jer. xlvii. (xl.) 10, and often in Grk. writ.) *
émas, (fr. Hs and the relat. 6), with the indicative, a
relat. adverb but, like the Lat. wt, assuming also the
nature of a conjunction [cf. W. 449 (418 sq.) ]. I.
As an Adverb; as, in what manner, how; once so in
the N. T. in an indir. question, with the indic.: ove
éyves, Onws kth. Lk. xxiv. 20, where cf. Bornemann,
Scholia ete. II. A Conjunction, Lat. ut, an-
swering to the Germ. dass, that; in class. Grk. with the
optat., and subjunc., and fut. indic.; cf. esp. Klotz ad
Devar. ii. 2 p. 681 sqq. But the distinction observed
between these constructions by the more elegant Grk.
writ. is quite neglected in the N. T., and if we except
Mt. xxvi. 59 LTTr (6r@s Oavataoovow), [1 Co. i. 29
Rec.*!2], only the subjunctive follows this particle (for
in Mk. v. 23, for émas ... Cyoera, L txt. T Tr WH have
correctly restored va... (jan); cf. W. 289 (271); B.
233 (201) sq.; [214 (185) ]. 1. It denotes the pur-
pose or end, zm order that; with the design or to the
end that; that; a. without dv,—after the present,
Mt. vi. 2,16; Philem. 6; Heb. ix. 15; after éoré to be
supplied, 1 Pet. ii. 9; after the perfect, Acts ix. 17;
Heb. ii. 9; émws pn, Lk. xvi. 26; after the imper-
fect, Mt. xxvi. 59 [RG (see above)]; Acts ix. 24;
after the aorist, Acts ix. 2,12; xxv. 26; Ro. ix. 17;
Gal. i. 4; das py, Acts xx. 16; 1 Co. i. 29; after the
pluperfect, Jn. xi. 57; after the future, Mt. xxiii.
35; and Rec. in Acts xxiv. 26; after an aor. sub-
junc. by which something is asked for, Mk. v. 23 Ree.;
after imperatives, Mt. ii. 8; v. 16, 45; vi. 4; Acts
xxiii. 15, 23; 2 Co. viii. 113 daas pn, Mt. vi. 18; after
clauses with tva and the aor. subjunc., Lk. xvi. 28; 2Co..
viii. 14; 2 Th. i.12. Noteworthy is the phrase ézas
mAnpoGy, i. e. that acc. to God’s purpose it might be
brought to pass or might be proved by the event, of O. T. :
prophecies and types (see iva, II. 3 fin.): Mt. ii. 23;
viii. 17; xii. 17 (where L T Tr WH fa); xiii. 35. b.
dros ay, that, if it be possible, Mt. vi. 5 RG; that, if what
I have just said shall come to pass, Lk. ii. 353; Acts iii.
20 (19) [R. V. that so]; xv.17; Ro. iii. 4 [B. 234 (201)];
exx. fr. the Sept. are given in W. § 42, 6. 2. As
in the Grk. writ. also (cf. W. 338 (317); [B. § 189, 41]),
das with the subjunctive is used after verbs of pray-
ing, entreating, asking, exhorting, to denote
what one wishes to be done: Mt. viii. 34 [here L fva];
ix. 38; Lk. vii.3; x.2; xi. 37; Acts viii. 15, 24; ix. 2;
Xxill. 20; xxv.3; Jas.v.16; after a verb of deliber
ating: Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15; Mk. iii. 6, (fr. which exx.
dpapa
it is easy to see how tne use noted in II. arises from
the original adverbial force of the particle; for cvpPova.
€AaBov, Orws arokeveow adrdv, they took counsel to de-
stroy him is equiv. to how they might destroy him, and
also to to this end that they might destroy him; cf. Kiihner
§ 552 Anm. 3, ii. p. 892).*
Spapa, -ros, 75, (dpdw), that which is seen, a sight, spec-
tacle: Acts vii. 31; Mt. xvii. 9; @ sight divinely granted
in an ecstasy or in sleep, a vision, Acts x. 17,19; 8¢ dpd-
patos, Acts xviii. 9; év dpdyars, Acts ix. 10, 12 [RG];
X. 33; dpauna Bréemew, Acts xii. 9; iSeiv, Acts xi. 5; xvi.
\L0. (Xen., Aristot., Plut., Ael. v. h. 2, 3 [al. edkay];
Sept. several times for S70, ji, Chald. xin ete.; see
émragia.)*
Opacis, -ews, 7, (dpdw) ; 1. the act of seeing: bp-
patwy xpiows eis dpacw, Sap. xv. 15; the sense of sight,
Aristot. de anima 3, 2; Diod. 1, 59; Plut. mor. p. 440 sq.;
plur. the eyes, éxxémrew tas dpdcets, Diod. 2, 6. 2.
appearance, visible form: Rev. iv. 3 (Num. xxiv. 4; Ezek.
i. 5, 26, 28; Sir. xli. 20, etc.). 3. a vision, i. e. an
appearance divinely granted in an ecstasy: Rev. ix. 17;
opdces Govra, Acts ii. 17 fr. Joel ii. 28. (Sept. chiefly
for N72 and jin.) *
dpards, -7, -dv, (dpaw), visible, open to view: neut. plur.
substantively, Col. i. 16. (Xen., Plat., Theocr., Philo;
Sept.) *
opdw, -©; impf. 3 pers. plur. édpev (Jn. vi. 2, where
L Tr WH é@eapouv) ; pf. €opaxa and (T WH in Col. ii. 1,
18; [1 Co. ix.1]; Tdf. ed. 7 also in Jn. ix. 37; xv. 24; xx.
25; 1 In. iii. 6; iv. 20; 3Jn. 11) édpaxa (on which form
cf. [WH. App. p. 161; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Steph. The-
saur. s. v. 2139 d.]; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 8325; [B. 64
(56); Veitch s.v.]), [2 pers. sing. -kes (Jn. viii. 57 Tr
mrg.) see comida, init.], 3 pers. plur. éwpdkacw (and -xay
in Col. ii. 1 L Tr WH; Lk. ix. 36 T Tr WH; see yivo-
pas, init.) ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. éwpaxes (Acts vii. 44) ; fut.
dyoua (fr. ONT), 2 pers. sing. dwee (cf. Bitm. Ausf.
Spr. i. p. 8347sq.; Kiihner § 211, 3, i. p.536), Mt. xxvii.
4; Jn.i.50 (51); xi.40; but L T Tr WH [G also in Jn.
i. 50 (51)] have restored dyn (cf. W. § 13, 2; B. 42 sq.
(37)), 2 pers. plur. deoe, Jn. i. 39 (40) T Tr WH, etc. ;
Pass., 1 aor. dhOnv; fut. opOncopar; 1 aor. mid. subjunc.
2 pers. plur. éyno6e (Lk. xiii. 23 [R G L WH txt. Tr
mrg.]) fr. a Byzant. form dyaunv (see Lob. ad Phryn. p.
734, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 258 sq. ; [Veitch s. v.]) ; Sept.
for 787 and 71H; [fr. Hom. down]; TO SEE, i.e. iL.
to see with the eyes: twa 6pav, éwpaxeva, Lk. xvi. 23; Jn.
viii. 573 xiv. 7, 9; xx. 18, 25, 29; 1 Co, ix. 1, ete.; fut.
dopa, Mt. xxviii. 7,10; Mk. xvi. 7; Rev. i. 7, ete. 5 TOV
6cdv, 1 In. iv. 20; dédpatov ws dpav, Heb. xi. 27; with a
ptep. added as a predicate [B. 301 (258); W. § 45, 4],
Mt. xxiv. 30; Mk. xiii. 26; xiv.62; Lk. xxi. 27; Jn.i.
51 (52) 3 éwpaxévat or dyerda 76 mpdowndy twos, Col. ii.
1; Acts xx. 25; 6 (which divine majesty, i. e. Tov Oeiov
Aébyou) éwpdxaper Tois épOadpois jpav (on this addition cf.
W. 607 (564); [B. 398 (341)]), 1 Jn. i. 1; dpeoOai Twa
i. e. come to see, visit, one, Heb. xiii. 23; éwpaxevar Christ,
ie. to have seen him exhibiting proofs of his divinity
451
ia
opaw
and Messiahship, Jn. vi. 36; ix. 37; xv. 24; dpav and
dyeoOa with an ace. of the thing, Lk. xxiii. 49; Jn.i. 50
(51); iv. 45; vi. 2[L Tr WH eOedpour]; xix. 35; Acts
li. 17; vil. 44; Rev. xviii. 18 [Rec.], ete.; [épy. x. dperde
(sc. rod pevw), Jn. i. 40 (39) T TrWH;; ef. B. 290 (250)];
dyn thy dd£av Tod cod, the glory of God displayed in a
miracle, Jn. xi.40. metaph. dyeoar rdv Gedy, rv KUptoV,
to be admitted into intimate and blessed fellowship with
God in his future kingdom, Mt. v. 8; Heb. xii. 14; also
TO mpdcwrov tod Geov, Rev. xxii. 4 —(a fig. borrowed
from those privileged to see and associate with kings;
see Brera, 1b. 8.) ; otk eidos beod éwpdxare, trop. i. q. his
divine majesty as he discloses it in the Scriptures ye
have not recognized, Jn. v. 37; cf. Meyer ad loc. 2.
to see with the mind, to perceive, know : absol. Ro. xv. 21;
twa foll. by a ptep. in the ace. [B. § 144, 15b.; W.§ 45, 4],
Acts viii. 23 ; ri, Col. ii. 18; with a ptep. added, Heb. ii.
8; foll. by dru, Jas. ii. 24; to look at or upon, observe, give
attention to: ets twa, Jn. xix. 37 (Soph. El. 925; Xen. Cyr.
4,1, 20; ets 7, Solon in Diog. Laért. 1, 52); éwpakévae
mapa T@ tarpi, to have learned from [see mapa, II. b.] the
father (a metaphorical expression borrowed fr. sons, who
learn what they see their fathers doing), Jn. viii. 38
(twice in Rec.; once in LT Tr WH); Christ is said to
deliver to men 4 éwpaxev, the things which he has seen,
i. e. which he learned in his heavenly state with God be-
fore the incarnation, i. e. things divine, the counsels of
God, Jn. iii. 11, 32; éwpaxevar Oedv, to know God’s will,
3 Jn.11; from the intercourse and influence of Christ
to have come to see (know) God’s majesty, saving pur-
poses, and will [cf. W. 273 (257)], Jn. xiv. 7, 9; in an
emphatic sense, of Christ, who has an immediate and
perfect knowledge of God without being taught by an-
other, Jn. i. 18; vi. 46; dyrecOar Gedy xabas ear, of the
knowledge of God that may be looked for in his future
kingdom, 1 Jn. ili. 2; dweo@ar Christ, is used in refer-
ence to the apostles, about to perceive his invisible pres-
ence among them by his influence upon their souls
through the Holy Spirit, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; Christ is
said 8yeoba the apostles, i. e. will have knowledge of
them, ibid. 22. 3. to see i. e. to become acquainted
with by experience, to experience: {wny, i. q. to become a
partaker of, Jn. iii. 36; nuépay, (cf. Germ. erleben; see
eid, I. 5), Lk. xvii. 22 (Soph. O. R. 831). 4. to see
to, look to; i. & a. i. q. to take heed, beware, [see esp.
B. § 139, 49; cf. W. 503 (469)]: dpa py, with aor. sub-
junc., see that... not, take heed lest, Mt. viil. 4 ; xviii. 10;
Mk. i.44; 1 Th. v. 15; supply rodro moujons in Rev. xix.
10; xxii. 9, [W. 601 (558) ; B. 395 (338)], (Xen. Cyr. 3,
1, 27, where see Poppo; Soph. Philoct. 30, 519; El.
1003) ; foll. by an impv., Mt. ix. 30; xxiv. 6; dpare kal
mpocexete amd, Mt. xvi. 6; opare, Brémere amd, Mk. viii.
15; dpare, kal pudacoeabe dnd, Lk. xii. 15; dpa, ri per-
ets rroceiv, ig. weigh well, Acts xxii. 26 Rec. (dpa ri motets,
Soph. Philoct. 589). b. i.q. to care for, pay heed to:
ov bn [RG dee (see above)], see thou to it, that will
be thy concern, [cf. W. § 40, 6], Mt. xxvii. 4; plur., 24;
Acts xviii. 15, (Epict. diss. 2, 5, 30; 4, 6, 11sq.; [Am
boy)
tonin. 5, 25 (and Gataker ad loc.)]). 5. Pass. 1
aor. SPEnv, I was seen, showed myself, appeared (cf. B. 52
(45)]: Lk. ix. 31; with dat. of pers. (cf. B. u. s., [also
§ 134, 2; cf. W. $31, 10]): of angels, Lk.i.11; xxii. 43
[L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 30, 35, (Ex. iii.
2); of God, Acts vii. 2 (Gen. xii. 7; xvii. 1); of the
dead, Mt. xvii. 3; Mk. ix. 4, cf. Lk. ix. 31; of Jesus after
his resurrection, Lk. xxiv. 34; Acts ix. 17; xiii. 31; xxvi.
16; 1 Co. xv. 5-8; 1 Tim. iii.16; of Jesus hereafter to
return, Heb. ix. 28; of visions during sleep or ecstasy,
Acts xvi. 9; Rev. xi. 193 xii. 1, 3; in the sense of com-
ing upon unexpectedly, Acts ii. 3; vii. 26. fut. pass. dv
6pOjoouai co, on account of which I will appear unto
thee, Acts xxvi. 16; on this pass. see W. § 39, 3 N.1;
cf. B. 287 (247). [Comp.: dd-, xa6-, mpo-opao. |
[Syn. 6pav, BAéwery, both denote the physical act: ép.
in general, BA. the single look; 6p. gives prominence to the
discerning mind, Aa. to the particular mood or point. When
the physical side recedes, 6p. denotes perception in general
(as resulting principally from vision), the prominence in the
word of the mental element being indicated by the constr. of
the ace. w. inf. (in contrast with that of the ptep. required
w. BAéreiv), and by the absol. dpas; BAe. on the other hand,
when its physical side recedes, gets a purely outward sense,
look (i. e. open, incline) towards, Lat. spectare, vergere.
Schmidt ch. xi. Cf. dewpéw, oxoréw, etdw, I. fin.]
épyt, -js, 7, (fr. dpydw to teem, denoting an internal
motion, esp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice
[Curtius § 152]; cf. Lat. turgere alicui for trasci alicut
in Plaut. Cas. 2, 5,17; Most. 3, 2,10; cf. Germ. arg,
Aerger), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down the natural dis-
position, temper, character; movement or agitation of soul,
impulse, desire, any violent emotion, but esp. (and chiefly
in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indigna-
tion, (on the distinction between it and Ovpds, see Oupds,
1): Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Jas. i. 19 sq.; per’ dpyijs, in-
dignant, [A. V. with anger], Mk. iii. 5; xepis dpyjs, 1
Tim. ii. 8; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for
the punishment itself (Dem. or. in Mid. § 48): of the
punishments inflicted by magistrates, Ro. xiii.4; da ryv
spynv, i. e. because disobedience is visited with punish-
ment, ib. 5. The dpyf attributed to God in the N. T. is
that in God which stands opposed to man’s disobedience,
obduracy (esp. in resisting the gospel) and sin, and man-
ifests itself in punishing the same: Jn. ili. 36; Ro. i. 18;
iv. 15; ix. 22*; Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3; Rev. xiv.10; xvi. 19;
xix. 15; absol. 9 dpyn, Ro. xii. 19 [ef. W. 594 (553)];
oxen opyns, vessels into which wrath will be poured (at
the last day), explained by the addition xcarnpricpéva eis
dmadevav, Ro. ix. 22°; 9 péAXovea dpyn, which at the
last day will be exhibited in penalties, Mt. iii. 7; Lk.
iii. 7, (al. understand in these two pass. the (national)
judgments immediately impending to be referred
to—at least primarily]; also 4 dpy) 9 épyouevn, 1 Th.
i. 10; muépa dpy7s, the day on which the wrath of God
will be made manifest in the punishment of the wicked
tef. W. § 30, 2a.], Ro. ii. 5; and Uy) népa 0 peydAn THs
épyjs ado (Rev. vi. 17; see jpepa, 3 ad fin.); épyeras
9 dpyn Tov Oeod émi twa, the wrath of God cometh upon
452
opGomrodew
one in the infliction of penalty [ef. W. § 40, 2 a.], Eph.
v. 6; Col. iii. 6 [T Tr WH om. L br. éni etc.]; epOace
[-xev L txt. WH mrg.] én’ adrovs 4 dpyn, 1 Th. ii. 16;
so } dpyf passes over into the notion of retribution and
punishment, Lk. xxi. 23; Ro. [ii. 8]; iii. 5; v. 9; Rev.
xi. 18; rékva opyjs, men exposed to divine punishment,
Eph. ii. 3; eis dpynv, unto wrath, i. e. to undergo pun-
ishment in misery, 1 Th. v. 9. opyy is attributed te
Christ also when he comes as Messianic judge, Rev. vi.
16. (Sept. for 773), wrath, outburst of anger, oyt, 7n,
iM, 4¥P, etc.; but chiefly for 4".) Cf. Ferd. Weber,
Vom Zorne Gottes. Erlang. 1862; Ritschl, Die christl.
Lehre v. d. Rechtfertigung u. Versohnung, ii. p. 118 sqq.*
dpyitw: Pass., pres. dpyifouar; 1 aor. apyicOnv; (dpyn) 3
fr. Soph., Eur., and Thuc. down; to provoke, arouse to
anger; pass. to be provoked to anger, be angry, be wroth,
(Sept. for 79N, 4¥p, also for 4% 77N ete.) : absol., Mt.
xviii. 34; xxii. 7; Lk. xiv. 21; xv. 28; Eph. iv. 26 [B.
290 (250); cf. W. §§ 43, 2; 55, 7]; Rev. xi. 18; revi,
Mt. v. 22; éni run, Rev. xii. 17 [Lom. émi] as in 1 K. xi.
9; [Andoe. 5, 10]; Isocr. p. 230c.; [cf. W. 232 (218)].
(Comp. : map-opyita.]*
dpyitos, -7, -ov, (6pyn), prone to anger, irascible, [A. V.
soon angry]: Tit. i. 7. (Prov. xxii. 24; xxix. 22; Xen.
de re equ. 9,7; Plat. [e.g. de rep. 411b.]; Aristot. [e.g.
eth. Nic..2; 7, 10]; al.) *
épyuid, -ds, 7, (dpéyw to stretch out), the distance
across the breast from the tip of one middle finger to
the tip of the other when the arms are outstretched;
five or six feet, a fathom: Acts xxvii. 28. (Hom., Hdt.,
Xen., al.) *
épéyo: (cf. Lat. rego, Germ. recken, strecken, reichen,
[Eng. reach; Curtius § 153]); fr. Hom. down; to stretch
forth, as xeipa, Hom. Il. 15, 371, etc.; pres. mid. [ef. W.
p- 252 (237) note], to stretch one’s self out in order to
touch or to grasp something, to reach after or desire some-
thing: with a gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. iii. 1; Heb. xi.
16; dtdapyupias, to give one’s self up to the love of
money (not quite accurately since guAapy. is itself the
dpeéis; [cf. Ellicott ad loc.}), 1 Tim. vi. 10.*
Spewvds, -7, -dv, (Spos), mountainous, hilly; 4% dpe [WH
épw, see I, ¢] sc. xopa [cf. W. 591 (550)] (which is
added in Hdt. 1, 110; Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 3), the mountain-
district, hill-country: Lk. i. 39, 65, (Aristot. h. a. 5, 28,
4; Sept. for 79, Gen. xiv. 10; Deut. xi. 11; Josh. ii.
1G, etc.)*
Spekis, -ews, 7, (dpéyouat, q. v-), desire, longing, eraving,
for; eager desire, lust, appetite: of lust, Ro. i. 27. It is
used both in a good and a bad sense, as well of natural
and lawful and even of proper cravings (of the appetite
for food, Sap. xvi. 2 sq.; Plut. mor. p. 635 ¢.; al.; ge
arnuns, Plat. de fin. p. 414 b.), as also of corrupt and
unlawful desires, Sir. xviii. 830; xxiii. 6; @oyot and do-
yeortxal dpefers are contrasted in Aristot. rhet. 1, 10, 7.
(Cf. Trench § Ixxxvii.]*
Sp0o-rodw, -5; (dpOdrovs with straight feet, going
straight; and this fr. dp8és and mots); to walk in a
straight course; metaph. to act uprightly, Gal. ii. 14 [cf.
6p00s |
pos, I. 3 f.].
(96) ].*
6p06s, -7, -dv, (OPQ, sprvyus [to stir up, set in motion;
ace. to al. fr. r. to lift up; cf. Fick iii. p. 775; Vanitek
p- 928; Curtius p. 348]), straight, erect; i.e. a.
upright: dvaorn&, Acts xiv. 10; so with orjva in 1 Esdr.
ix. 46, and in Grk. writ., esp. Hom. b. opp. to
oxodids, straight i. e. not crooked: rpoxeai, Heb. xii. 13
(for vw, Prov. xii. 15 etc.; [Pind., Theogn., al.]).*
OpPoropew, -@; (dpordpuos cutting straight, and this fr.
6pOss and répve) ; 1. to cut straight: ras d8ovs, to
cut straight ways, i.e. to proceed by straight paths,
_ hold a straight course, equiv. to to do right (for 1),
Prov. iii. 6; xi. 5, (viam secare, Verg. Aen. 6, 899). 2
dropping the idea of cutting, to make straight and smooth;
Vulg. recte tracto, to handle aright: tov déyov rhs adn-
Gcias, i.e. to teach the truth correctly and directly,
2 Tim. ii. 15; rov ddnOj Aéyov, Eustath. opusce. p. 115,
41. (Not found elsewhere [exc. in eccles. writ. (W. 26) ;
e. g. constt. apost. 7, 31 ev r. rod kupiov Sdéypacw; cf.
Suicer ii. 508 sq.]. Cf. xaworopéw, to cut new veins in
mining; dropping the notion of cutting, to make some-
thing new, introduce new things, make innovations or
changes, etc.) *
opOpitw: 3 pers. sing. impf. SpOpiev; (épGpos); not
found in prof. auth. ((cf. W. 26; 33; 91 (87)]; Moeris
[p- 272 ed. Pierson] dp@pever drrixds, dpOpi¢er AXnuKds) ;
Sept. often for DDwin; (cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. iv. 52
and on Sap. vi. 14); to rise early in the morning: mpéds
twa, to rise early in the morning in order to betake one’s
self to one, to resort to one early in the morning, (Vulg.
manico ad aliquem), Lk. xxi. 38, where see Meyer.*
épOpivds, -7, -dv, (fr. dpOpos; cf. nuepwds, éormepivds,
oraptivds, mpwivds), a poetic [Anth.] and later form for
bpOpios (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51; Siurz, De dial.
Maced. et Alex. p. 186; [W. 25]), early: Rev. xxii. 16
Rec.; Lk. xxiv.22 LT TrWH. (Hos. vi. 4; Sap. xi.
23 (22).)*
dpOptos, -a, -ov, (fr. dpOpos, q.v-3 cf. dYvos, mpwios), early ;
rising at the first dawn or very early in the morning: Lk.
xxiv. 22 RG (Job xxix. 7; 3 Macc. v. 10, 23). Cf. the
preced. word. [Hom. (h. Mere. 143), Theogn., al.] *
dp0pos, -ov, 6, (fr. OPQ, dpyvpr to stir up, rouse; cf.
Lat. orior, ortus), fr. Hes. down; Sept. for nw dawn,
and several times for 1p3; daybreak, dawn: épOpov Ba-
béos or Babéws (see Babéws and Babds [on the gen. cf. W.
§ 30,11; B. § 132, 26]), at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1;
épOpov, at daybreak, at dawn, early in the morning, Jn.
viii. 2 (Hes. opp.575; Sept. Jer. xxv. 45 xxxiil. (xxvi.)
5, etc.); id rov dpOpov, Acts v. 21 (Dio Cass. 76, 17).*
dps, (dpOds), adv., rightly: Mk. vii. 35 ; Lk. vii. 43;
x. 28; xx. 21. [Aeschyl. and Hdt. down. ]*
dpl{w; 1 aor. Spica; Pass., pf. ptep. apirpévos; 1 aor.
ptep. édpiaGeis; (fr. dpos a boundary, limit) ; fr. [Aeschyl.
and] Hdt. down; to define; i e. 1. to mark out the
boundaries or limits (of any place or thing): Hadt., Xen.,
Thuc., al.; Num. xxxiv. 6; Josh. xiii. 27. 2. to de-
Not found elsewhere; [ef. W. 26; 102
453
Oppnya
iv. 7; katpovs, Acts xvii. 26, (numerous exx. fr. Grk.
auth. are given in Bleek, Hebr.-Br. ii. 1 p. 538 sq-)}
pass. opiopevos, ‘determinate,’ settled, Acts ii. 23; rd
opiop. that which hath been determined, acc. to appointment,
decree, Lk. xxii. 22; with an acc. of pers. Acts xvii. 31
(@ by attraction for év [W. § 24,1; B. § 143, 8]); pass.
with a pred. nom. Ro. i. 4 (for although Christ was the
Son of God before his resurrection, yet he was openly
appointed [A.V. declared] such among men by this tran-
scendent and crowning event) ; dpi¢a, to ordain, determine,
appoint, Acts x. 42; foll. by an inf. Acts xi. 29 (Soph. fr.
19 d. [i. e. Aegeus (539), viii. p. 8 ed. Brunck]). [Comp.:
ap-, dmo-bt-, mpo-opi¢a. |*
[optvds, see dpeuvos. |
Spiov, -ov, 76, (fr. dpos [boundary]), [fr. Soph. down],
a bound, limit, in the N. T. always in plur. (like Lat.
Jines) boundaries, [R. V. borders], i. q. region, district, land,
territory: Mt. ii. 16; iv. 133 viii. 34; xv. 22,39; xix.1;
Mk. v.17; vii. 24 L T Tr WH, 31; x.1; Acts xiii. 50.
(Sept. very often for 5321; several times for 79322.) *
opkite; (dpkos) ; 1. to force to take an oath, to
administer an oath to: Xen. conviv. 4, 10; Dem., Polyb.;
cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 361. 2. to adjure, (solemnly
implore), with two ace. of pers., viz. of the one who is
adjured and of the one by whom he is adjured (cf. Mat-
thiae § 413, 10; [B. 147 (128) ]): 1 Th. v. 27 RG (see
evopkifa); Mk. v. 7; Acts xix. 13. (Sept. for jrawn,
rua foll. by cara w. gen., 1 K. ii. (dii.) 42; 2 Chr. xxxvi.
13; év, Neh. xiii. 25.) [Comp.: év-, é&opxito.]*
Spkos, -ov, 6, (fr. épyw, eipyw; i. q. €pxos an enclosure,
confinement; hence Lat. orcus), [fr. Hom. down], Sept.
for Hyyaw, an oath: Mt. xiv. 7,9; xxvi. 72; Mk. vi. 26;
Lk. i. 73 [W. 628 (583); B. § 144,13]; Acts ii. 30 [W.
226 (212); 603 (561)]; Heb. vi. 16 sq.; Jas. v. 12; by
meton. that which has been pledged or promised with an
oath; plur. vows, Mt. v. 33 [(cf. Wiinsche ad loc.) ].*
Spkapocta, -as, 7, (dpxoporéw [dpkos and durvjue]; cf.
drepocia, dvrapocia), affirmation made on oath, the take
ing of an oath, an oath: Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21, 28. (Ezek.
xvii. 18; 1 Esdr. viii. 90 (92); Joseph. antt. 16, 6,2. Cf.
Delitzsch, Com. on Heb. I. ¢.) *
Sppdw, -: 1 aor. dpunoa; (fr. dpun); 1. trans.
to set in rapid motion, stir up, incite, urge on; so fr. Hom.
down. 2. intrans. to start forward impetuously, to
rush, (so fr. Hom. down): ets rt, Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v. 18;
Lk. viii. 33; Acts xix. 29; émi rwa, Acts vil. 57.*
Spy, -js, 4, [fr.r. sar to go, flow; Fick i. p. 227; Cur-
tius § 502], fr. Hom. down, a violent motion, impulse : Jas.
iii. 4; @ hostile movement, onset, assault, Acts xiv. 5 [ef.
Trench § Ixxxvii.].*
Sppmpa, -ros, 75, (dppdw), a rush, impulse: Rev. xviii.
21 [here A. V. violence]. (For 131, outburst of wrath,
Am. i. 11; Hab. iii. 8, cf. Schleusner, Thesaur. iv. p. 123 ;
an enterprise, venture, Hom. II. 2, 356, 590, although in-
terpreters differ about its meaning there [ef. Ebeling,
Lex. Hom. or L. and S. s. v.]; that to which one is impelled
or hurried away by impulse, [rather, incitement, stimulus],
termine, appoint: with an acc. of the thing, nyépav, Heb. | Plut. mor. [de virt. mor. § 12] p. 452c.)*
6 pveov
dpveov, -ov, 76, a bird: Rev. xviii. 2; xix.17,21. (Sept.;
Hom., Thuc., Xen., Plat., Joseph. antt. 3, 1, 5.) *
dpe [so codd. 8 D], ig. 8pms (q-v-) : Lk. xiii. 34 Tdf.
The nom. is not found in prof. writ., but the trisyllabic
forms dpuxos, dprrxs for dprOos, etc., are used in Doric ;
[Photius (ed. Porson, p. 348, 22) “Iaves dpw€.. . kal
Aapteis dpué. Cf. Curtius p. 495 ].*
dpvis, -Oos, 6,7, (OPQ, Spvuju [see dpOpos]) ; 1. a
bird ; so fr. Hom. down. 2. spec. a cock, a hen: Mt.
xxiii. 87; Lk. xiii. 34 [Tdf. gpmé, q. v-]; (so Aeschyl.
Eum. 866; Xen. an. 4,5, 25; Theocr., Polyb. 12, 26,1;
[al.]).*
Spodecta, -as, 7, (fr. 6pobérns ; and this fr. dpos [a boun-
lary; see dpiov], and ri@npe) ; a. prop. a setting of
boundaries, laying down limits. b. a definite limit;
plur. bounds, Acts xvii. 26. (Eccl. writ.; [W. 25].) *
Spos, -ous, rd, (OPQ, dpvyu [i. e. a rising; see dppos]),
[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 1D, @ mountain: Mt. v. 14;
Lk. iii. 5; Rev. vi. 14, and often; rd épos, the moun-
tain nearest the place spoken of, the mountain near by
[but see 6, II. 1 b.], Mt. v.1; Mk. iii. 13 ; Lk. ix. 28; Jn.
vi. 3,15; plur. épn, Mt. xviii. 12; xxiv. 16; Mk. v.5; Rev.
vi. 16, etc.; gen. plur. dpéwy (on this uncontracted form,
used also in Attic, cf. Bitm. Gram. § 49 note 3; W. § 9,
2c.; [B. 14 (13); Dindorf in Fleckeisen’s Jahrb. for
1869 p. 83]), Rev. vi. 153; dpn weOcordvew a proverb. phrase,
used also by rabbin. writ., to remove mountains, i. e. to
accomplish most difficult, stupendous, ineredible things: 1
Conair Qn cha Mite xvile2 0bexcki12 bem Mikcexte 2.
éptocw: 1 aor. dpvéa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 15m,
773, ete. ; to dig: to make ri by digging, Mk. xii. 1; ri
év rm, Mt. xxi. 83; i.q. to make a pit, ev rm yn, Mt. xxv.
18 [here T Tr WH op. yjv]. [Comp.: d:-, eEoptccw. ]*
sphavés, -7, -dv, (OPOS, Lat. orbus; [Curtius § 404]),
fr. Hom. Od. 20, 68 down, Sept. for nin; bereft (of a
father, of parents), Jas. i. 27 [A. V. fatherless]; of those
bereft of a teacher, guide, guardian, Jn. xiv. 18 (Lam.
Vii) on
dpXeopar, -odpar: 1 aor. spxnoauny; (fr. yopds, by trans-
position dpyds; cf. dpma, dpratw, and Lat. rapio, poppy
and Lat. forma; [but these supposed transpositions are
extremely doubtful, cf. Curtius § 189; Fick iv. 207, 167.
Some connect épyéopa with r. argh ‘to put in rapid mo-
tion’; cf. Vanitek p. 59]); todance: Mt. xi. 17; xiv. 6;
MK. vi. 22; Lk. vii. 32. (From Hom. down; Sept. for
3p1, 1 Chr. xv. 29; Kcclus. iii. 4; 2S. vi. 21.)*
és, 7, 6, the postpositive article, which has the force of
I. a demonstrative pronoun, this, that, (Lat. hic,
haec, hoc; Germ. emphat. der, die, das) ; in the N. T. only
in the foll. instances: ds d¢, but he (Germ. er aber), Jn. v.
11 L Tr WH; (Mk. xv. 23 T Trtxt. WH; cf. B. § 126, 2];
in distributions and distinctions: ds pév... ds dé, this
... that, one ... another, the one... the other, Mt. xxi. 35;
xxii. 5 LT Tr WH; xxv. 15; Lk. xxiii. 33; Acts xxvii.
44; Ro. xiv. 5; 1 Co. vii. 7R G; xi. 21; 2Co. ii. 16; Jude
22; d per... 6 d¢, the one... the other, Ro. ix. 21; [8 pev
...00€... 06 8€, some... some... some, Mt. xiii. 23 L
TWH]; 6 d€...6 d€... 6 d€, some... some... some,
454
[4
OS
Mt. xiii. 8; 5 (masc.) pev . . . dAA@ (6) . . . Erépw d¢ [but
LT Tr WHom. this 8€] «rd. 1 Co. xii. 8-10; 5 prev... dAdo
dé [Ltxt. T Tr WH cai dAdo], Mk. iv. 4; with a variation
of the construction also in the foll. pass.: 6 pév... Kat
érepov, Lk. viii. 5; obs peév with the omission of ods dé by
anacoluthon, 1 Co. xii. 28; 6s pev...6 d€ dobevar etc.
one man... but he that is weak etc. Ro. xiv. 2. On this
use of the pronoun, chiefly by later writers from De-
mosth. down, cf. Matthiae § 289 Anm. 7; Kiihner § 518,
4 b. ii. p. 780; [Jelf § 816, 3 b.]; Bitm. Gram. § 126, 3;
B. 101 (89); W. 105 (100); Fritzsche on Mk. p. 507.
II. arelative pronoun who, which, what; 1.
in the common constr., acc. to which the relative
agrees as respects its gender with the noun or pron.
which is its antecedent, but as respects case is governed
by its own verb, or by a substantive, or by a preposition :
6 darnp bv eidov, Mt. ii. 9; 6. . Lovdatos, ob 6 emawos krh.
Ro. ii. 29; ovros mepi ob éya dxovw toravra, Lk. ix. 9 ; amd
THS Nepas, ap js, Acts xx. 18; Beds dv ov, €€ ov, 1 Co. viii.
6, and numberless other exx. it refers to a more remote
noun in 1 Co. i. 8, where the antecedent of és is not the
nearest noun "Incod Xprorod, but rG be in 4; yet cf. W.
157 (149); as in this passage, so very often elsewhere
the relative is the subject of its own clause: dvjp és etc.
Jas. i. 12; mas 6s, Lk. xiv. 333 oddels 6s, Mk. x. 29; Lk.
xviii. 29, and many other exx. 2. in constructions
peculiar in some respect ; a. the gender of the rel-
ative is sometimes made to conform to that of the follow-
ing noun: THs avdjs, 6 eore mpattapiov, Mk. xv. 16; ape
mades, &eiot (L €or) ta mvevpara, Rev. iv.5 [LT WH];
oméppatt, Os eore Xptoros, Gal. iii. 16; add, Eph. i. 14 [L
WH txt. Tr mrg. 6]; vi. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 15; Rev. v.8 [T
WH mrg. 4]; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 708; Matthiae § 440
p- 989 sq.; W. § 24, 3; B. § 143, 3. b. in construc-
tions ad sensum (cf. B. § 143, 4]; a. the plural of
the relative is used after collective nouns in the sing. [cf.
WisSi2153); Buss: ie miBos ov, ot 7AGov, Lk. vi. 17;
mav TO mpeaBureptoy, map’ év, Acts xxii. 5; 3 yeveds, €v ois,
Phileas: 8. xara macav rod, év ais, Acts xv. 36; =
tavtny Sevrépav vuiv ypapw emioroAny, év ais (because the
preceding context conveys the idea of two Epistles),
2Pet.iii.1. sy. the gender of the relative is conformed
not to the grammatical but to the natural gender of
its antecedent (cf. W. § 21,2; B.u.s.]: macSdpiov bs, Jn.
vi. 9 LT Tr WH; Onpiov ds, of Nero, as antichrist, Rev.
xiii. 14 LT Tr WH; xegadz ds, of Christ, Col. ii. 19; [add
pvotnptoy ds ete. 1 Tim. iii. 16 GL T Tr WH; cf. B.u.s.;
W. 588 sq. (547)]3 oxedy (of men) ous, Ro. ix. 24; z6m
ot, Acts xv.17; xxvi. 17; réxva, rexvia of, Jn.i. 13; Gal. iv.
19; 2Jn.1, (Eur. suppl. 12); réxvov és, Philem.10. —e.
In attractions [B. § 143, 8; W. §§ 24,1; 66, 4sqq-];
a. the accusative of the rel. pron. depescaae on a trans.
verb is changed by attraction into the oblique case of its
antecedent : xrigews js €xrucev 6 beds, Mk. xiii. 19 [RG];
Tov pnuatos ob etrev, Mk. xiv. 72 [Rec.]; add, Jn. iv. 14;
vii. 31, 39 [but Tr mrg. WH mrg. 8]; xv. 20; xxi. 10;
Acts iii. 21, 25; vii. 17,45; ix. 365 x. 39; exit! 10; Ro.
xv. 18; 1Co.vi. 19; 2Co.i. 6; x. ’s, 13; Eph. i. 8; Tit.
Ba
oS
iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 53 1 Jn. iii.
24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; év &pa 7 ov -ywwa-
oxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; 79 rapaddoet 7 mapeddxare, Mk. vii. 13;
add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 43; xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5;
Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 2153/2) Th.i. 4; Rev.
xviii. 6; cf. W. § 24, 1; [B. as above]. Rarely attrac-
tion occurs where the verb governs the dative [but see
below]: thus, carévavre 03 éemiorevce Geod for xarévarte
cod, & émiorevoe (see karévayre), Ro. iv. 17; paris, is
éxpaga (for 7 [al. qv, cf. W. 164 (154 sq.) B. 287 (247)]),
Acts xxiv. 21, cf. Is. vi. 4; (#yero 5€ kal rev éavrod te
TLaT@v, ois HOeTo Kai Sv Hrioret moAdovs, for Kai moAXods
TOUTwY, ois mioTer, Xen. Cyr. 5, 4,393 &v ey evretvxnka
ovdeis, for oddets TovTwy, ois évrer. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 a.;
Protag. p. 361e.; de rep. 7 p.531e.; map’ Sv Bondeis, od-
Seniay AnWee ydpw, for mapa rovTar, ois krA. Aeschin. f.
leg. p. 43 (117) ; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 237;
[B. § 143, 11; W. 163 (154) sq.; but others refuse to
recognize this rare species of attraction in the N. T.; ef.
Meyer on Eph. i. 8]). The foll. expressions, however,
can hardly be brought under this construction: ris ydpe-
Tos fs €xapiracey (as if for 7), Eph. i. 6 LT Tr WH; ris
kKAnoews, fs ekdnOnre, Eph. iv. 1; did ris mapaxAnoews fs
mapakadovpeGa, 2 Co. i. 4, but must be explained agree-
ably to such phrases as ydpw yapirody, kAjow Kader, etc.,
[(i. e. accus. of kindred abstract subst.; cf. W. § 32, 2; B.
§ 131, 5)]; cf. W.[and B.u.s.]. |B. The noun to which
the relative refers is soconformed to the case of the rela-
tive clause that either aa. it is itself incorporated
into the relative construction, but without the article [B.
§143,7; W. § 24, 2b.]: dv eya drexepadica "Ilwdvyny, odtos
nyepon, for lwdvyns, dv krr. Mk. vi. 16; add, Lk. xxiv. 1;
Philem. 10; Ro. vi. 17; ets iy oikiay, exet, ig. ev TA otkia, ets
qv, Lk. ix. 45 or BB. it is placed before the rela-
tive clause, either with or without the article [ W. § 24,
2a.; B.§ 144, 13]: rov dprov dy Kaper, odxi Kowvwvia Tod
oaparos, 1 Co. x. 16; AiOov dv dmedoxipacay oi oixodopodv-
res, odros eyevnOn (for 6 AiOos, 6s KrA.), Mt. xxi. 42; Mk.
Soi Or mb ka xx glided et iteydc y. Attraction in the
phrases dypu fjs jyepas for dxpe tis nuépas, 7 [W. § 24, 1
fin.]: Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2; df’
fis quépas for do THs jpyepas, 9, Col. i. 6, 9; dy tpdrov, as,
just as, for rodrov roy rporroy dv or &, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii.
34; Acts vii. 28; [preceded or] foll. by obras, Acts i. 11;
2 Tim. iii. 8. §. A noun common to both the principal
clause and the relative is placed in the relative clause
after the relative pron. [W. 165 (156)]: év @ xpiyare
e ,
kpivere, kptOnoece, for pid. €v T@ Kpipart, ev @ Kpivere,
Mt. vii. 2; xxiv. 44; Mk. iv. 24; Lk. xii. 40, ete. 3.
The Neuter é a. refers to nouns of the masculine
and the feminine gender, and to plurals, when that which
is denoted by these nouns is regarded as a thing [cf.
B. § 129, 6]: Aemra dv0, 6 éore Kodparrns, Mk. xii. 42;
os é
dydmny, 6 €or cbvdeopos, Col. iii. 14 JG AWA se yaa te dprovs,
é etc. Mt. xii. 4 L txt. T Tr WH. b. is used in the
phrases [B. u.s.]— 8 éorw, which (term) signifies: Boa-
vepyés & eotuy viol Bp. Mk. iii. 17; add, v. 41; vii. 11, 34;
455
o
OS
i. 23; Mk. xv. 34; Jn. i, 38 (39), 41 (42) sq.; ix. 7; xx.
16. ce. refers to a whole sentence [B. u.s.]: rodrov
avéatnoey 6 Oeds, ov . . . eopev paprupes, Acts ii. 32; iii.
15; mept ov... 6 Adyos, Heb. v. 11; 6 cat emoinoay (and
the like), Acts xi. 30; Gal. ii. 10; Col. i. 29; 6 (which
thing viz. that I write a new commandment [ef. B. §143,
3]) é€orw adndés, 1 Jn. ii. 8; 6 (sc. to have one’s lot as-
signed in the lake of fire) éorw 6 Odvaros 6 Sedrepos, Rev.
xxi. 8. 4. By an idiom to be met with from Hom.
down, in the second of two codrdinate clauses a pro-
noun of the third person takes the place of the relative
(cf. Passow ii. p. 552°; [L. and S.s. v. B. [V.1]; B.§ 143,
6; [W. 149 (141)]): ds gorau emt rod Séparos Kat Ta oKEvN
avrov ev TH oikia pu) KaraBarw, Lk. xvii. 31; && ob ra mdvta
kal nets eis avtdv, 1 Co. viii. 6. 5. Sometimes, by a
usage esp. Hebraistic, an oblique case of the pronoun
ards is introduced into the relative clause redundantly ;
as, 7s TO Ovyarpuov aitns, Mk. vii. 25; see airés, IT. 5. 6.
The relative pron. very often so includes the demonstra-
tive otros or ékeivos that for the sake of perspicuity a
demons. pron. must be in thought supplied, either in
the clause preceding the relative clause or in that which
follows it [W. § 23, 2; B. §127, 5]. The foll. examples
may suffice: a. a demons. pron. must be added in
thought in the preceding clause: ois jroipacrat, for
tovros SoOncerat, ois yr. Mt. xx. 23; Sei~a (sc. radra),
a Sei yeveoOar, Rev. i.1; xxii. 6; 6 for ekxeivos , Lk. vii.
43,47; ov for rovtw ov, Ro. x. 14; with the attraction of
év for tovrov a, Lk. ix. 36; Ro. xv.183; &v for radra dp,
Mt. vi. 8; with a prep. intervening, éuadev af’ av (for
ano rovtwv a) émabev, Heb. v. 8. —_b. a demons. pron.
must be supplied in the subsequent clause: Mt. x. 38;
Mikoix. 406) kn ivaGsa1x..5 03) dit. xix022)* Ronil.t,and
often. 7. Sometimes the pur pose and end is ex-
pressed in the form of a relative clause (cf. the Lat. qui
for ut is): dmooréAX\w ayyedor, os (for which Lehm. in Mt.
has kai) karackevacer, who shall ete. i. q. that he may etc.,
Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; [1 Co. ii. 16]; so also in
Grk. auth., cf. Passow s. v. VIII. vol. ii. p. 553; [L. and
S.s. v. B. IV. 4]; Matthiae § 481, d.; [Kiihner § 563, 3 b.;
Jelf § 836, 4; B. § 139, 32];—or the cause: 6y mapa-
déxera, because he acknowledges him as his own, Heb.
xii. 6; — or the relative stands where éore might be used
(cf. Matthiae § 479 a.; Kriiger § 51, 13, 10; [Kiihner
§ 563, 3e.]; Passow s. v. VIII. 2, ii. p. 553%; [L. and S.
u.s.]): Lk. v. 21; vii. 49. 8. For the interrog. ris,
ri, in indirect questions (cf. Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. 372;
[cf. B. § 139, 58]): ov« fyw o rapabjow, Lk. xi. 6; by a
later Grk. usage, in a direct quest. (cf. W. § 24, 4; B.
§ 139, 59): éf’ 8 (or Rec. ef’ S) mdper, Mt. xxvi. 50 (on
which [and the more than doubtful use of és in direct
quest.] see emi, B. 2 a. ¢. p. 233° and C. I. 2 g. y. aa. p.
235°). 9. Joined to a preposition it forms a
periphrasis for a conjunction [B. 105 (92)]: dv6 dv, for
dvr rovrewy drt, — because, Lk. i. 20; xix. 44; Acts xii. 23;
2 Th. ii. 10; for which reason, wherefore, Lk. xii. 3 (see
dvri, 2.d.); ef’ @, for that, since (see emi, B. 2a. 8. p. 233%);
Heb. vii. 2; 3 dort peOepynvevduevov, and the like: Mt. | dq’ ov, (from the time that), when, since, Lk. xiii. 25
Cee
OOaKLsS
xxiv. 21, [see dad, I. 4 b. p. 58°]; dxpus 0d, see dypt, 1d. 5
é& ob, whence, Phil. iii. 20 cf. W. § 21,3; [B.§ 143, 4 a];
fos 08, until (see éas, II. 1 b. a. p. 268°); also pexprs ov,
Mk. xiii. 30; év d, while, Mk. ii. 19; Lk. v.34; Jn. v.7;
év ois, meanwhile, Lk. xii. 1; [ef. év, I. 8 e.]. 10.
With particles: és dy and os éay, whosoever, if any one
ever, see dv, II. 2 and éay, II. p. 163°; ob éav, whereso-
ever (whithersoever) with subjunc., 1 Co. xvi. 6 [ef. B. 105
(92)]. 8s ye, see yé, 2. ds Kat, who also, he who, (cf.
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 636): Mk. iii. 19; Lk. vi. 13 sq. ;
x. 39 [here WH br. 7]; Jn. xxi. 20; Acts i.115 vii. 45;
x. 89 [Rece. om. kai]; xii. 4; xiii. 225 xxiv. 6; ROmvs 25e1
Co. xi. 23; 2Co. iii. 6; Gal. ii. 10; Heb. i. 2, ete.; ds kat
airés, who also himself, who as well as others: Mt. xxvii.
57. s Snmore, whosoever, Jn. v. 4 Rec.; damep [or ds wep
LTr txt.], who especially, the very one who (cf. Klotz ad
Devar. ii. 2 p. 724): Mk. xv. 6 [but here T WH Tr mrg.
now read 6v rapyrovrTo, q. V-]. 11. The genitive o%,
used absolutely [cf. W. 590 (549) note; Jelf § 522, Obs. 1],
becomes an adverb (first so in Attic writ., cf. Passow II.
p- 546"; [Meisterhans § 50, 1); a. where (Lat.
ubi): Mt. ii. 9; xviii. 20; Lk. iv. 16 sq.; xxiii. 53; Acts
i. 133 xii. 12; xvi.13; xx.6[T Trmrg. dmov]; xxv. 10;
XXvili. 14; Ro. iv. 153 ix. 263 2 Co. iii. 17; Col. iii. 15
Heb. iii. 9; Rev. xvii. 15; after verbs denoting motion
(see éxei, b.3 dou, 1b.) it ean be rendered whither (cf.
W. §54, 7; B. 71 (62)], Mt. xxviii. 16; Lk. x.15 xxiv.
28; 1 Co. xvi. 6. b. when (like Lat. wbi i.g. e0
tempore quo, quom): Ro. v. 20 (Eur. Iph. Taur. 320),
[but al. take od in Ro. l.c. locally].
dodkis, (dcos), relative adv., as often as; with the ad-
dition of dy, as often soever as, 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. [RG; cf.
W. § 42, 5a.3 B. § 139, 34]; also of édv, [LT Tr WH
in 1 Co. l.¢.]; Rev. xi. 6. [(Lys., Plat., al.)]*
orye, for ds ye, see ye, 2.
dovos, -a, -ov, and once (i Tim. ii. 8) of two termina-
tions (as in Plato, lege. 8 p. 831 d.; Dion. Hal. antt. 5,
71 fin.; cf. W. § 11,1; B. 26 (23); the fem. occurs in
the N. T. only in the passage cited); fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down; Sept. chiefly for von (cf. Grimm, Exet.
Hdbch. on Sap. p. 81 [and reff. s. v. dy.os, fin.]); un-
defiled by sin, free from wickedness, religiously observing
every moral obligation, pure, holy, pious, (Plato, Gorg.
p. 507 b. wept pév dvOpamovs ta mpounkovra mpdtrwy
dikau’ dv mparrot, wept dé Oeods baea. The distinction
between Sikavos and dows is given in the same way by
Polyb. 23, 10, 8; Schol. ad Eurip. Hee. 788; Charit. 1,
10; [for other exx. see Trench § Ixxxviii.; Wetstein on
Eph. iv. 24; but on its applicability to N. T. usage see
Trench u. s.; indeed Plato elsewh. (Euthyphro p. 12 e.)
makes dixaws the generic and ows the specific
term]); of men: Tit. i. 8; Heb. vii. 26; of Soot rod Geod,
the pious towards God, God’s pious worshippers, (Sap.
iv. 15 and often in the Psalms); so in a peculiar and
pre-eminent sense of the Messiah [A. V. thy Holy One]:
Acts ii. 27; xili. 35, after Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10; yeipes (Aes-
chyl. cho. 378; Soph. O. C. 470), 1 Tim. ii. 8. of God,
holy: Rev. xv. 4; xvi. 5, (also in prof. auth. occasion-
456
bcos
ally of the gods; Orph. Arg. 27; hymn. 77, 2; of God
in Deut. xxxii. 4 for Ww; Ps. exliv. (exlv.) 17 for TON,
ef. Sap. v.19); ra dora Aavid, the holy things (of God)
promised to David, i. e. the Messianic blessings, Acts
xiii. 34 fr. Is. lv. 3.*
OoLoTNS, -nTOS, 1) (datos), prety towards God, fidelity in
observing the obligations of piety, holiness: joined with
Sixatoatvn (see Sovos [and Stxatooivy, 1b.]): Lk. i. 75;
Eph. iv. 24; Sap. ix. 3; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,4. (Xen.,
Plat., Isocr., al.; Sept. for Ww, Deut. ix. 5; for ofA, 1 K. ix.
4.) [Meinke in St. u. Krit.’84 p. 743; Schmidt ch. 181.] *
doiws, (dov0s), [fr. Eur. down], adv., piously, holily:
joined with d:xaiws, 1 Th. ii. 10 (dyv@s Kai dois kK. de
xalws, Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7).*
ooph, -7s, 7, (6¢@ [q. v-]), a smell, odor: In. xii. 3;
2 Co. ii. 143 Oavdrov (LT Tr WH éx Oav.), such an odor
as is emitted by death (i.e. by a deadly, pestiferous
thing, a dead body), and itself causes death, 2 Co. ii.
16; ¢wis (or ek (ws) such as is diffused (or emitted) by
life, and itself imparts life, ibid. [A. V. both times
savor]; dcp evodias, Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18; see eva-
dia, b. (Tragg., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.; in Hom. 68u7;
Sept. for m4.) *
éeos, -7, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], a relative adj. corre-
sponding to the demon. rogovros either expressed or un-
derstood, Lat. quantus, -a, -um; used a. of space
[as great as|: Td piKos a’rns (Rec. adds rocotrdy éoriv)
daov kai [GT Tr WH om. kai] rd mAdros, Rev. xxi. 163
of time [as long as]: éf dcov xpdvov, for so long time
as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 39; Gal. iv. 1; also
without a prep., dcov xpévov, Mk. ii. 19; neut. éf’ daor,
as long as, Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet.i.13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 25);
ért puxpov daov daor, yet a litile how very, how very, (Vulg.
modicum [ali |quantulum), i. e. yet a very little while, Heb.
x. 37 (Is. xxvi. 20; of a very little thing, Arstph. vesp.
213; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 726 no. 93; W. 247 (281)
note; B. § 150, 2). b. of abundance and mul-
titude; how many, as many as; how much, as much as:
neut. daon, Jn. vi. 11; plur. dco, as many (men) as, ail
who, Mt. xiv. 36; Mk. iii. 10; Acts iv. 6, 34; xiii. 48;
Ro. it) 1250 vi. 3's}Gals iia 0). 27.4. Phil iia 5) aimee
1; Rev. ii. 24; doae émayyedXia, 2 Co. i. 20; dca indria,
Acts ix. 39; neut. plur., absol. [A. V. often whatsoever],
Mt. xvii. 12; Mk. x. 21; Lk. xi. 8; xii. 3; Ro. ili. 19; xv.
4; Jude 10; Rev.i.2. mdvres dco, [all as many as],
Mt. xxii. 10 [here T WH zo. ots]; Lk. iv. 40; Jn. x. 8;
Acts v. 36 sq.; neut. ravra dea [all things whatsoever, all
that], Mt. xiii. 46 ; xviii. 25; xxviii. 20; Mk. xii. 44; Lk.
xviii. 22; Jn. iv. 29[T WH Trmrg. x. d], 39 [T WH Tr
txt. m. &]; moda doa, Jn. xxi. 25 R G, (Hom. Il. 22, 380;
Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 3). dco... odrot, Ro. viii. 14; éca
...Tadra, Phil. iv. 8; dca... év rovrors, Jude 10; 8a0e
- +. adroi, Jn.i.12; Gal. vi. 16. dot dy or dv, how many
soever, as many soever as [cf. W. § 42, 3]; foll. by an
indic. pret. (see dy, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56; by an indic. pres.
Rev. iii. 19; by a subjune. aor., Mt. xxii. 9; Mk. iii. 28;
vi. 11; Lk. ix. 5 [Ree.]; Acts ii. 39 [here Lchm. ods dv];
Rey. xiii. 154 é¢a dv, Mt. xviii. 18; Jn. xi. 225 xvi. 13
bo7rep
[RG]; mdvra dca ay, all things whatsoever : foll. by sub-
junc. pres. Mt. vii. 12; by subjunc. aor., Mt. xxi. 22;
xxiii. 3; Acts iii. 22. é0a in indirect disc.; how many
things: Lk. ix.10; Acts ix.16;xv.12; 2'Tim.i. 18. Cc.
of importance: dca, how great things, i. e. how ex-
traordinary, in indir. disc., Mk. iii. 8 [Lmrg. a]; v.
19 sq.; Lk. viii. 39; Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4, [al. take it of
num ber in these last two exx. how many; cf. b. above];
how great (i. e. bitter), kaxd, Acts ix. 13. a. of
measure and degree, in comparative sentences, acc.
neut. dgoy... waddov mepioosrepov, the more... so much
the more a great deal (A. V.), Mk. vii. 36; xaé’ dcov
with a compar., by so much as with the compar. Heb. iii.
3; Ka@ dcov ... Kata tocovrov [rocotvro LT Tr WH,
Heb. vii. 20, 22; xa® dcov (inasmuch) as foll. by otras,
Heb. ix. 27; rocovr@ with a compar. foll. by é0@ with
a compar., by so much...as, Heb. i. 4 (Xen. mem. 1,
4,40; Cyr. 7, 5, 5 sq.); without tocovt@, Heb. viii. 6
[A. V. by how much]; tocotit@ paddov, dom (without
paddov), Heb. x. 25; 60a... rocovroy, how much... so
much, Rev. xviii. 7; ef’ édcov, for as much as, in so far
as, without ént rogovro, Mt. xxv. 40, 45; Ro. xi. 13.
Somep, Hep, Omep, See Os, 4, 6, 10.
éortéov, contr. dcrovv, gen. -ov, 7d, [akin to Lat. os,
ossis; Curtius § 213, cf. p. 41], a bone: Jn. xix. 36; plur.
doréa, Lk. xxiv. 39; gen. éoréwy, (on these uncontr.
forms cf. [WH. App. p. 157]; W. § 8, 2d.; [B. p. 13
(12) ]), Mt. xxiii. 27; Eph. v. 30 [RG Tr mre. br.]; Heb.
xi. 22. (From Hom. down; Sept. very often for D¥yt.) *
boris, fris, 6,re (separated by a hypodiastole [comma],
to distinguish it from 671; but L T Tr write 6 7, without
a hypodiastole [cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 111], leaving a little
space between 6 and 71; [WH 67]; cf. W. 46 (45 sq.);
[Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 118 sq.; WH. Intr.
§ 411]), gen. ovriwos (but of the oblique cases only the
acc. neut. 6,7. and the gen. drov, in the phrase gas érov,
are found in the N. T.), [fr. Hom. down], comp. of és
and ris, hence prop. any one who; i.e. 1. whoever,
every one who: éo7s simply, in the sing. chiefly at the
beginning of a sentence in general propositions, esp. in
Matt.; w. an indic. pres., Mt. xiii. 12 (twice); Mk. viii.
34 (where L Tr WH ei rus); Lk. xiv. 27; neut. Mt. xviii.
28 Rec.; w. a fut., Mt. v. 39 [RG Trmrg.], 41; xxiii.
12, etc.; Jas. ii. 10 RG; plur. oirwes, whosoever (all those
who): w. indic. pres., Mk. iv. 20; Lk. viii. 15; Gal. v. 4;
w. indic. aor., Rev. i. 7; ii. 24; xx. 4; was dott, w. indic.
pres. Mt. vii. 24; w. fut. Mt. x. 32; doris w. subjunc.
(where dy is wanting very rarely [cf. W. § 42, 3 (esp.
fin.); B. § 139, 31]) aor. (having the force of the fut.
pf. in Lat.), Mt. xviii. 4 Rec.; Jas. ii. 10 L T Tr WH.
dors dy w. subjunce. aor. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mt. x. 33 [RG
T]; xii. 50; w. subjune. pres. Gal. v. 10 [édy T Tr WH];
neut. w. subjunc. aor., Lk. x. 35; Jn. xiv. 13 [Trmrg.
WH mrg. pres. subjunc.]; xv. 16 [Trmrg. WH mrg.
pres. subjunc.]; with subjune. pres., Jn. ii. 5; 1 Co. xvi.
2[Tr WH édvy; WH mrg. aor. subjunc.]; 6 éav 7 for 6,70
a w. subjune. aor. Eph. vi. 8 [RG]; nav 4,70 dy or édv
w. subjune. pres., Col. iii. 17, 23 [Rec. ; ef. B. § 139, 19;
457
oopus
W. § 42, 3]. 2. it refers to a single person or thing,
but so that regard is had to a general notion or
class to which this individual person or thing belongs,
and thus it indicates quality: one who, such a one as,
of such a nature that, (cf. Kiihner § 554 Anm. 1, ii. p.
905; [Jelf § 816, 5]; Liicke on 1 Jn. i. 2, p. 210 sq.):
Tyovpevos, Gatis motpavet, Mt. ii. 6; add, Mt. vii. 26; xiii.
O2Fe XVI. 285, XX xxv. dike xvend 3) Uke! fi. Os) vil.
37; vill. 3; Jn. viii. 25; xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. the vs.]; Acts
S129) KV 2 exxivcll RO. Kad lOO. nv 1s uvaledS
[Tdf. et rus]; Gal. iv. 24, 26; v.19; Phil. ii. 20; Col. ii.
23; 2 Tim.i.5; Heb. ii 3; viii. 5;-x. 11; xii. 5; Jas. iv.
14; 1Jn.i. 2; Rev.i. 12; ix. 4; xvii. 12; 6 vads Tov Oeod
dywés aru, oirivés eotre tpeis (where oirwes makes refer-
ence to d&yos) and such are ye, 1 Co. iii. 17 [some refer it
to vads ]. 3. Akin to the last usage is that whereby
it serves to give a reason, such as equiv. to seeing
that he, inasmuch as he: Ro. xvi. 12 [here Lchm. br. the
cl.]; Eph. iii. 13 ; (Col. iii. 5]; Heb. viii. 6; plur., Mt. vii.
LON) ACtSexer4 (60x Vile: ION L2O, O2hElioeL oO svag ee Ie
4; xvi. 7; 2 Co. viii. 10; [Phil. iv. 3 (where see Bp.
Lghttts i]; him: i AetDite1.1s) 1Petait I. 4.
Ace. to a later Greek usage it is put for the interroga-
tive ris in direct questions (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 57;
Lachmann, larger ed., vol. i. p. xliii; B. 253 (218); cf.
W. 167 (158)); thus in the N. T. the neut. 6, 7 stands
for ri i. q. Oud ri in Mk. ii. 16 T Tr WH [cf. 7 WH mre. ];
ix. 11, 28, (Jer. ii. 36; 1 Chr. xvii. 6 —for which in the
parallel, 2S. vii. 7, wa ri appears; Barnab. ep. 7, 9
[(where see Miller); ef. Tdf Proleg. p. 125; Evang.
Nicod. pars i. A. xiv. 3 p. 245 and note; cf. also Soph.
Lex. s. v. 4]); many interpreters bring in Jn. viii. 25
here; but respecting it see dpyn, 1 b. 5. It differs
scarcely at all from the simple relative és (cf. Matthiae
p- 1073; B. § 127,18; [Kriiger § 51, 8; Ellicott on Gal.
iv. 24; cf. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Hdbk. to
Modern Greek, App. § 24]; but cf. C.F. A. Fritzsche
in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 182 sq., who stoutly denies
it): Lk. ii 4; ix. 30; Acts xvii. 10; xxiii. 14; xxviii.
18; Eph. i. 23. 6. gas drov, on which see és, II.
1 b. B. p. 268° mid.
dotpakivos, -n, -ov, (dorpaxoy baked clay), made of
clay, earthen: oxein dotpdxwa, 2 Tim. ii. 20; with the
added suggestion of frailty, 2Co. iv. 7. (Jer. xix. 1, 11;
xxxix. (xxxii.) 14; Is. xxx. 14, ete.; Hippocr., Anthol.,
[al.].) *
oodpyors, -EWS, 1 (doppaivopat [to smell]), the sense of
smell, smelling: 1 Co. xii. 17. (Plat. Phaedo p. 111 b.
[(yet ef. Stallbaum ad loc.)]; Aristot., Theophr.)*
ous [or -pis, so R Trin Eph. vi. 14; Gin Mt. iii. 4;
ef. Chandler §§ 658, 659; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -vos, 4, fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. the hip (loin), as that
part of the body where the ¢ov was worn (Sept. fon
pun): Mt. iii.4; Mk. i. 6; hence mepitmvyvcOar ras
dogvas, to gird, gird about, the loins, Lk. xii. 35; Eph.
vi. 14; and dvaféw. ras do. [to gird up the loins], 1 Pet.
i. 13; on the meaning of these metaph. phrases see ava-
Covvupe. 2. a loin, Sept. several times for oyon,
¢
OTAV
the (two) loins, where the Hebrews thought the genera
tive power (semen) resided [?]; hence xapmds tis oogios,
fruit of the loins, offspring, Acts ii. 30 (see kaprdés,
1 fin.); e&€pyecOai x tis dapuos Tivds, to come forth out
of one’s loins i. e. derive one’s origin or descent from
one, Heb. vii. 5 (see é&€pxopar, 2b.); ere ev rH dori
twvds, to be yet in the loins of some one (an ancestor),
Heb. vii. 10.*
érayv, a particle of time, comp. of dre and dy, at the time
that, whenever, (Germ. dann wann; wann irgend) ; used
of things which one assumes will really occur, but
the time of whose occurrence he does not definitely fix
(in prof. auth. often also of things which one assumes
can occur, but whether they really will or not he does
not know; hence like our in case that, as in Plato, Prot.
p- 360 b.; Phaedr. p. 256 e.; Phaedo p. 68d.); [cf. W.
§ 42,5; B. § 139, 33]; a. with the subjunctive
present: Mt. vi. 2,5; x. 23; Mk. xiii. 11 [here Ree.
aor.|; xiv. 7; Lk. xi. 36; xii. 11; xiv. 12 sq.; xxi. 7;
Jn. vii. 27; xvi. 21; Acts xxiii. 35; 1 Co. iii. 4; 2 Co.
xiii. 9; 1 Jn. v. 2; Rev. x. 7; xviii. 9; preceded by a
specification of time: gas tis nuepas éxetvns, Srav etc.,
Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; foll. by rére, 1 Th. v. 3; 1 Co.
xv. 28; i. q. as often as, of customary action, Mt. xv. 2;
Jn. viii. 44; Ro. ii. 143 at the time when i. q. as long as,
Lk. xi. 34; Jn. ix. 5. b. with the subjunctive
aorist: i. q. the Lat. quando acciderit, ut w. subjunc.
pres., Mt. v.11; xii. 43; xiii. 32; xxiii. 15; xxiv. 32;
Mk. iv. 15 sq. 29 [RG], 31 sq.; xiii. 28; Lk. vi. 22, 26;
wiii. 13; xi. 24; xii. 54.sq.; xxi. 30; Jn. ii. 10; x. 43 xvi.
21; 1 Tim. v. 11 [here Limrg. fut.]; Rev. ix. 5. i. q.
quando w. fut. pf., Mt. xix. 28; xxi. 40; Mk. viii. 38;
ix. 9; xii. 23 [G Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.], 25; Lk. ix.
PASS SAPOE EOS scat KDR dhreinig Aare Vail Gls, son YE she
ZOREXV as LOM eXVIA Sao li sexX IS 5 PACES XXI11O 0 se Xd Ve
22; Ro. xi. 27; 1 Co. xv..24 [here LT Tr WH pres. ], 27
(where the meaning is, ‘when he shall have said that
the tmdéraés predicted in the Psalm is now accom-
plished’; ef. Meyer ad loc.); xvi. 2 sq. 5, 12; 2Co.x.
6; Col. iv. 16; 1Jn. ii. 283(LT Tr WH édv]; 2 Th. i. 10;
Heb. i. 6 (on which see ciodyw, 1); Rev. xi. 7; xii. 4;
xvii. 10; xx. 7. foll. by rore, Mt. ix. 15; xxiv. 15; xxv.
31; Mk. ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. v. 35; xxi. 20; Jn. viii. 28;
1 Co. xiii. 10 [G L T Tr WH om. rére]; xv. 28, 54; Col.
iii. 4. ec. Acc. to the usage of later authors, a
usage, however, not altogether unknown to the more
elegant writers (W. 309 (289 sq.); B. 222 (192) sq.;
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 124 sq.; WH. App. p. 171; for exx.
additional to these given by W. and B. u. s. see Soph.
Lex. s. v.; cf. Jebb in Vincent and Dickson’s Hdbk. to
Mod. Grk., App. § 78]), with the indicative; a.
future: when,[Mt. v.11 Tdf.]; Lk. xiii. 28 T Tr txt. WH
mrg.; [1 Tim. v. 11 L mrg.]; as often as, Rev. iv. 9 (cf.
Bleek ad loc.). B. present: Mk. xi. 25 LT Tr
WH; xiii. 7\Trtxt.; [Lk. xi. 2 Trmrg.]. y- very
rarely indeed, with the imperfect: as often as, [when-
soever], drav eOempovv, Mk. iii. 11 (Gen. xxxviii. 9; Ex.
xvii. 11; 1S. xvii. 34; see dy, II. 1). 8. As in Byz-
458
oe
OTL
antine auth. i. q. dre, when, with the indic. aorist: drav
#voéev, Rev. viii. 1 LT Tr WH; [add bray de eyévero,
Mk. xi. 19 T Tr txt. WH, cf. B. 223 (193); but al. take
this of customary action, whenever evening came (i. e-
every evening, R. V.)]. drav does not occur in the Epp.
of Peter and Jude.
ére, a particle of time, [fr. Hom. down], when; ue
with the Indicative [W. 296 (278) sq.]; indic. pres-
ent (of something certain and customary, see Herm. ad
Vig. p. 913 sq.), while: Jn. ix. 4; Heb. ix.17; w. an his-
torical pres. Mk. xi.1. w. the imperfect (of a thing
done on occasion or customary): Mk. xiv. 12; xv. 41;
Mk. vi. 21 RG; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xii. 6; xxii. 20; Ro. vi.
20stvil- oi Conxium te wGalavacin Col litags mln is
4; 2 Th. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 20. w. anindic. aorist, Lat.
quom w. plupf. (W. § 40, 5; [B. § 137, 6]): Mt. ix. 25;
xiii. 26,48; xvii. 25 [RG]; xxi. 34; Mk. i. 32; iv. 10;
viii. 19; xv. 20; Lk. ii. 21 sq. 42; iv. 25; vi. [3 LT WH],
13; xxii. 14; xxiii. 33; Jn. i. 19; ii. 22; iv. 45 [where
Tdf. as], etc.; Acts i. 13; vill. 12,39; xi. 2; xxi. 5, 35;
xxvii. 39; xxviii. 16; Ro. xiii. 11 (“than when we gave
in our allegiance to Christ;” Lat. gquom Christo nomen
dedissemus, [R. V. than when we first believed]); Gal. i.
15:5 1. 11,12, 14-siv.4 5 Philjiv.153 Hebsviil105ehev.
Ls VvissSy Ds (gn9y L2ee vill; Lnetesceso-alsomvitexiiaois
Mk. ii. 25; (Jn. xii. 41 R Tr mrg. dre eidev, when it had
presented itself to his sight [but best texts dre: because
he saw etc.]). éyévero, ore €réXecev, a common phrase
in Mt., viz. vii. 28; xi. 1; xiii. 58; xix.1; xxvi.1. dre
... 7ére, Mt. xxi.1; Jn. xii. 16. w. the indic. perfect,
since [R. V. now that I am become], 1 Co. xiii. 11; w.
the indic. future: Lk. xvii. 22; Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25;
xvi. 25; Ro. ii. 16 [RG T Tr txt. WH mre.] (where
Lehm. 7 [al. al.J); 2 Tim. iv. 3. 2. with the aor.
Subjunctive: éws dv 7, ore eimnte (where dray
might have been expected), until the time have come,
when ye have said, Lk. xiii. 35 [RG (cf. Tr br.)]; cf.
Matthiae ii. p. 1196 sq.; Bornemann, Scholia in Lucae
evang. p. 92; W.298 (279); [Bnhdy. p. 400; cf. B. 231
sq. (199) ].
6, Te, 7], TE, TO, Te, See TE 2 a.
ért [properly neut. of doris], a conjunction [fr. Hom.
down], (Lat. quod [cf. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149,
3]), marking
I. the substance or contents (of a statement),
that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring
(where the acc. and infin. is used in Lat.): dvayyéAXew,
Acts xiv. 27; dinyetoOa, Acts ix. 27; eimeiv, Mt. xvi. 20;
Xxvill. 7, 13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; déyew, Mt.
iii. 9; vili.11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv. 7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv.
9 (T Tr WH om. L br. drv]; ix. 2, and very often; Tpo-
evpnxevat, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the gr in Acts xiv. 22 sup-
ply Aéyovres, contained in the preceding mapaxadodvres
[ef. B. §151, 11]; dre after ypapew, 1 Co. ix.10; 1Jn. ii.
12-14; paprupeiv, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44;
dporoyetv, Heb. xi. 13; Secxvderv, Mt. xvi. 21; Onrodv, 1
Co. i. 11; SiSdoxew, 1Co. xi. 14. after eupavitew, Heb.
xi. 14; d7Aov (eoriv), 1 Co. xv. 27; Gal. iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi
OTe
7 (where LT Tr WH om. 8)Xo» [and then dr simply
introduces the reason, because (B. 358 (308) to the con-
trary) ]); pavepodpar (for pavepdy yiverat mrepl euod), 2 Co.
iil. 3; 1 Jn.ii.19. It is added—to verbs of swearing,
and to forms of oath and affirmation: guru, Rev.
X.63 €@ ey (see (dw, I. 1 p. 2708), Ro. xiv. 11; paptupa
Tov Oedv erixadodpat, 2 Co. i. 23; muords 6 beds, 2 Co. i. 18;
€or adnOeva Xpiorod év eyoi, 2 Co. xi. 10; Sod evdmov
tov Geo, Gal. i. 20; cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 242
sq-; [W. §53, 9; B. 394 (338)];— to verbs of perceiv-
ing, knowing, remembering, etc.: dxovew, Jn. xiv.
28; Brérew, 2 Co. vii. 8; Heb. iii. 19; Jas. ii. 22; dcac bat,
Jn. vi. 5; ywookew, Mt. xxi. 45; Lk.x.11; Jn.iv.53; 2
Co. xiii. 6; 1 Jn. ii. 5, ete.; after rodro, Ro. vi.6; eidévat,
Mt. vi. 32; xxii. 16; Mk. ii. 10; Lk. ii. 49; Jn. iv. 42; ix.
20, 24 sq.; Ro. ii. 2; vi. 9; Phil. iv. 15 sq., and very often;
yrwortdy eat, Acts xxviii. 28; emvywaokev, Mk. ii. 8;
Lk. i. 22; Actsiv.13; éemiorac6a, Acts xv. 73; vociv, Mt.
xv. 17; dpav, Jas. il. 24; xaradapBavew, Acts iv. 13; x.
34; cumeva, Mt. xvi. 12; dyvoeiv, Ro. i.13; ii. 4; vi. 3,
etc.; dvaywackew, Mt. xii. 5; xix. 43 pynpovever, Jn. xvi.
4; prnoOnva, Mt. v. 23; Jn. ii. 22; taoppynokew, Jude
5;—to verbs of thinking, believing, judging,
hoping: AoyifecOa, Jn. xi.50 LT Tr WH; after reiro,
Ro. ii. 3; 2Co. x. 11; vopiCew, Mt. v. 17; otuac, Jas. i. 7;
memecopat, Ro. viii. 38; xiv. 14; xv. 14; 2‘Tim.i.5, 12;
merrovbeva, Lk. xviii. 9; 2 Co. ii. 3; Phil. ii. 24; Gal. v.10;
2 Th. iii. 4; Heb. xiii. 18; mecrevew, Mt. ix. 28; Mk. xi.
23; Ro. x. 9; taoAapBavew, Lk. vii.43; Soxeiv, Mt. vi. 7;
xxvi. 53; Jn. xx. 153 éAmi¢ew, Lk. xxiv. 21; 2 Co. xili.6;
<pivew rovto ott, 2 Co. v. 14 (15) ; —to verbs of emotion
(where in Lat. now the acc. and inf. is used, now quod):
Oavpatew, Lk. xi. 38; yatpew, Jn. xiv. 28; 2 Co. vii. 9, 16;
Phil. iv. 10; 2Jn.4; év rovre, drt, Lk. x. 20; ovyxaipen,
Lk. xv. 6,9; pedee pot (cot, ato), Mk. iv. 38; Lk. x. 40;
—to verbs of praising, thanking, blaming, (where
the Lat. uses quod): émaweiv, Lk. xvi. 8; 1 Co. xi. 2,17;
e€oporoyeiaGa, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; edxapioreiv, Lk.
xviii. 11; ydpis TO Oed, Ro. vi. 17; xdpw Exo revi, 1 Tim.
i. 12; éyw card twos, dre etc. Rev. ii. 4; €xw rovro ort, I
have this (which is praiseworthy) that, Rev. ii.6; add,
Jn. vii. 23 [but here 67 is causal; cf. W. § 53, 8 b.J;
1 Co. vi. 7;— to the verb efva:, when that precedes with
a demons. pron., in order to define more exactly what a
thing is or wherein it may be seen: adry éoriv dru (Lat.
quod), Jn. iii. 19; ev rovr@ dre, 1 Jn. iii. 16; iv. 9 sq. 13,
etc. ; mepi rovrou drt, Jn. xvi. 19; ovx otov O€ drt (see otos),
Ro. ix. 6;—to the verbs yiveoOa and efva: with an in-
terrog. pron., as Ti yéyovev dre etc., what has come to pass
that? our how comes it that? Jn. xiv. 22; ré [Lmrg. ris]
éoTw avOperos, ért, Heb. ii. 6 fr. Ps. vill. 5. is 6 Adyos
ovros (sc. éoriv), drt, Lk. iv. 36; moramds €oTLv ovTOS, OTL,
Mt. viii. 27; ris 7 didax7 atry, dre, Mk. i. 27 Rec.; add
Mk. iv. 41. 2. in elliptical formulas (B. 358
(307); [W. 585 (544) note]): ri dru ete., iq. Tl €or OTL,
[A. V. how is it that], wherefore? Mk. ii. 16 R GL [al. om.
ti; cf. 5 below, and see doris, 4]; Lk. ii. 49; Acts v. 4,
9. ody dre for od A€yo rt, Our not that, not as though, ef.
459
a
OTL
B. § 150, 1; [W.597 (555)]; thus, Jn. vi. 46; vii. 22; 2
Co. i. 24; iii. 5; Phil. iii. 12; iv. 11. dre is used for els
€xeivo ore (in reference to the fact that [Eng. seeing that, in
that]) : thus in Jn. ii. 18; [Meyer (see his note on 1 Co.
i. 26) would add many other exx., among them Jn. ix. 17
(see below) ]; for év rovr@ drt, Ro. v. 8; for wept rovrov
rt, concerning this, that: so after Aadeiv, Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv.
41 [al. take dr in these exx. and those after duadoy. which
follow in a causal sense; cf. W. as below (Ellicott on
2 Thess. iii. 7)]; after A€yew, Jn. ix. 17 [see above]; after
StadoyicerOar, Mt. xvi. 8; Mk. viii. 17, (after dooréAXew
emoto\ds, 1 Mace. xii. 7). See exx. fr. classic authors in
Fritzsche on Mt. p. 248 sq.; [Meyer, u.s.; cf. W. § 53,
8b. ]. 3. Noteworthy is the attraction, not un-
common, by which the noun that would naturally be the
subject of the subjoined clause, is attracted by the verb
of the principal clause and becomes its object [cf. W.
§ 66,5; B§151, 1 a.]; as, oiSare rip olxiay Srepava, dre
éoriy amapy7, for otdare, Ott 7 oikia Sr. KTA., 1 Co. xvi. 15;
also after eidéva: and iSeiv, Mk. xii. 34; 1 Th. ii. 15 so
after other verbs of knowing, declaring, ete.: Mt.
ERV24 eM. 1XE Gs) ACtsulteL Os) ix. 2001 (Con at20'- 2) Nhe
li. 4; Rev. xvii. 8, etc.; dv tyets Aéyere dtu beds tyav
éort, for mept ob (cf. Lk. xxi. 5) tyes Néyere dr, In. viii.
54. 4. As respects construction, dr is joined
in the N. T. a. to the indicative even where the
opinion of another is introduced, and therefore accord-
ing to class. usage the optative should have been used;
as, OveoteiAaro... wa pndevi elmwowy, Ott ad’tés éeoTw 6
Xptords, Mt. xvi. 20; add, 21; iv.12; xx. 30, ete. b.
to that subjunctive after od yn which differs scarcely
at all from the future (see py, LV. 2 p. 411°; [cf. W. 508
(473)]): Mt. v. 20; xxvi. 29 [RG; al. om. ére]; Mk. xiv.
25; Lk. xxi. 32; Jn. xi. 56 (where before dri supply do-
xeire, borrowed from the preceding Soxe?); but in Ro. iii.
8 dre before rrounowpev (hortatory subjunc. [cf. W. § 41 a.
4a.; B. 245 (211)]) is recitative [see 5 below], depend-
ing on Aeyovor [W. 628 (583); B. § 141, 3]. c. to
the infinitive, by a mingling of two constructions,
common even in classic Grk., according to which the
writer beginning the construction with érz falls into the
construction of the acc. with inf.: Acts xxvii. 10; cf.
W. 339 (318) N. 2; [§ 63, 2¢.; B. 383 (328)]. On the
anacoluthon found in 1 Co. xii. 2, ace. to the reading ére
ére (which appears in cod. Sin. also [and is adopted by
Lbr. T Tr WH (yet cf. their note)]), ef. B. 383 (328)
sq: 5. dre is placed before direct discourse (‘re-
citative’ érc) [B. $139, 51; W.§ 65, 3c.; § 60,9 (and
Moulton’s note) ]: Mt. ii. 23 [?]; vii. 23; xvi. 7; xxi. 16;
xxvi. 72, 74; xxvii. 43; Mk. [ii 16 T Tr WH (see 2
above); but see darts, 4]; vi. 23; xii. 19 Gis 18s Bei
(204)]; Lk. i. 61; ii. 23; iv.43; xv. 27; dh a DE he
17; xv. 25; xvi. 17; Acts xv. 1; Heb. xi. 18; 1 Jn. iv.
20; Rev. iii. 17, etc.; most frequently after Aéya, q. v.
II. 1 a., p. 373" bot. [Noteworthy is 2 Thess. iii. 10, ef.
B. § 139, 53.]
II. the reason why anything is said to be or to be
done, because, since, for that, for, (a causal conjunc. ; Lat.
,
OU
quod, quia, quom, nam); [on the diff. betw. it and yap
ef. Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 70]; a. it is added to
a speaker’s words to show what ground he gives for his
opinion; as, paxdpuos etc. br, Mt. v. 4-12; xiii. 16;
Lk. vi. 20 sq.; xiv. 14; after odai, Mt. xi. 21; xxiii. 13-
15, 23, 25, 27,29; Lk. vi. 24sq.; x. 13; xi. 42-44, 46,
52; Jude 11; ef. further, Mt. vii. 13; xvii. 15; xxv. 8;
Mk. v.9; ix. 38 [G Trmrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; Lk.
vii. 47; xxiii. 40; Jn. i. 30; v.27; ix. 16; xvi. 9-11, 14,
16[T Tr WH om. Lbr. cl.]; Actsi. 5, and often ;—or is
added by the narrator, to give the reason for his own
opinion: Mt. ii.18; ix.36; Mk. iii. 30; vi. 34; Jn. il.
25; Acts i. 17;—or, in general, by a teacher, and often
in such a way that it relates to his entire statement or
views: Mt. v.45; 1Jn.iv.18; 2 Jn. 7; Rev. iii. 10. b.
ért makes reference to some word or words that precede
or immediately follow it [cf. W. § 23, 5; § 53, 8 b.; B.
§ 127, 6]; as, Oud rodro, Jn. viili.47; x.17; xii. 39; 1 Jn.
iii. 1,ete. Oca ri; Ro. ix. 32; 2Co. xi. 11. ydpuv rivos ;
1 Jn. iii. 12. otras, Rev. iii. 16. ev rovr@, 1 Jn. iii. 20.
ére in the protasis, Jn. i. 50 (51); xx. 29. It is followed
by dua rodro, Jn. xv. 19. ody dre... ddN bre, not be-
cause... but because, Jn. vi. 26; xii. 6.
III. On the combination os drz see os, I. 3.
[dru interrog., i. e. 6, te or 6 tT, see darts, 4 (and ad
init.). ]
érov, see darts ad init.
od, see os, 4, 6, II. 11.
od before a consonant, oi« before a vowel with a
smooth breathing, and ovx before an aspirated vowel;
but sometimes in the best codd. odx occurs even before
a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WHmrg. have
adopted odx (Sov, Acts ii. 7; LT ody “Iovdaikés, Gall. ii.
14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L ody ddtyos, Acts xix. 28;
ovx jnydannoay, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise ov« before
an aspirate, as ovk éornxev, Jn. vill. 44 T; [ovw evexev,
2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (ot« edpov, Lk. xxiv. 3; [ove tmdpxet,
Acts iii. 6] in cod. 8 [also C*; cf. cod. Alex. in 1 Esdr.
iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviii: 11, 26]); cf. W.$5,1d.
14; B.7; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875,
pp. 54-58; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848,
p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg.
pp- xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation etc., 2d ed., p. lv.
no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (cf. p. xlii. no. 5);
Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. ete. p. Ixxxvii. sq.; Tdf. Proleg.
p- £0sq.; WH. Intr. §§ 405 sqq., and App. p. 143 sq.];
Sept. for x, PS, PN; a particle of negation, not (how
it differs fr. yn has been explained in pn, ad init.); it is
used 1. absol. and accented, ov, nay, no, [W. 476
(444)]: in answers, 6 d€ dnow: ov, Mt. xiii. 29; die-
kpi6n+ ov, Jn. i. 21; [xxi. 5], cf. vii. 12; repeated, od of,
it strengthens the negation, nay, nay, by no means, Mt.
v.37; ijr@ tuov 7d od ov, let your denial be truthful, Jas.
vy. 12; on 2 Co.i. 17-19, see vai. 2. It is joined to
other words, —to a finite verb, simply to deny that
what is declared in the verb applies to the subject of
the sentence: Mt. i. 25 (otk éeyivwoxer adrnv); Mk. iii.
25; Lk. vi. 43; Jn. x. 28; Acts vii. 5; Ro. i. 16, and
460 ov
times without number. It has the same force when
conjoined to participles: ds ov« dépa dépwv, 1 Co. ix.
26; ov« dvros ait Téxvov, at the time when he had no
child, Acts vii. 5 (uj dvros would be, although he had no
child); add, Ro. viii. 20; 1Co.iv.14; 2 Co.iv.8; Gal.
iv. 8,27; Col. ii.19; Phil. iii. 3; Heb. xi. 35; 1 Pet. i. 8;
6... 0vK dv rouunv, Jn. x. 12 (where ace. to class. usage
pn must have been employed, because such a person is
imagined as is not a shepherd; [cf. B. 351 (301) and
yn, 1. 5b.]). in relative sentences: eioly ... rwés ot ob
muotevovaw, Jn. vi. 64; add, Mt. x. 38; xii. 2; Lk. vi. 2;
Ro. xv. 21; Gal. iii. 10, ete.; od« €or ds and ovdev €orw
6 foll. by afut.: Mt. x. 26; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2; ris éorw,
és od foll. by a pres. indic.: Acts xix. 35; Heb. xii. 7; cf.
W. 481 (448); B. 855 (305); in statements introduced
by drt after verbs of understanding, perceiving, saying,
etc.: Jn. v.42; viii. 55, etc.; dre odK (where ovk is pleo-
nastic) after dpveicOa, 1 Jn. ii. 22; cf. B. § 148,13; [W.
§ 65, 2 8.]; to an infin., where yn might have been ex
pected: ris ere xpeta kata thy Taéiv Medyic. erepov ar
iorac Oa tepéa kat od Kara Thy Taéw Aapoy héyer Oa, Heb.
vii. 11 (where the difficulty is hardly removed by saying
[e. g. with W. 482 (449) ] that od belongs only to cara tiv
ta&wv ’Aap., not to the infin.). it serves to deny other
parts of statements: ov« év sofia Adyou, 1 Co. i. 17; ob
pean, ovk év mAaEL ArOivats, 2 Co. iii. 3, and many other
exx.;—to deny the object, €keos (RG @deov) OA, ob
duciav, Mt. ix. 13; xii. 7; od« ewe déyerar, Mk. ix. 37. It
blends with the term to which it is prefixed into a single
and that an affirmative idea [W. 476 (444); cf. B. 347
(298) ]5; as, od« édw, to prevent, hinder, Acts xvi. 7; xix.
30, (cf., on this phrase, Herm. ad Vig. p. 887 sq.); ovd«
éx@, to be poor, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv. 25, (see fya, I. 2 a.
p- 266°); rd ov dvqjxovra [or 4 ovk dvixev, LT Tr WH],
unseemly, dishonorable, Eph. v. 4 (see pn, I. 5 d. fin. p.
410°; [cef. B. § 148, 7a.; W. 486 (452)]); often so as to
form a litotes; as, otk ayvoew, to know well, 2 Co. ii. 11
(Sap. xii. 10) ; ovd« ddcyor, not a few, i. e. very many, Acts
xvii. 4,12; xix. 23 sq.; xv. 2; xiv. 28; xxvii. 20; od
modvat juépat, a few days, Lk. xv. 13; Jn. ii. 12; Actsi.
53 ob modv, Acts xxvii. 14; od petpiws, Acts xx. 12; od«
donpos, not undistinguished [A. V. no mean ete.], Acts
XX1. 395 ovK éx peérpov, Jn. ili. 34. it serves to limit the
term to which it is joined: od mavrws, not altogether, not
entirely (see mavtas, ¢.B.); od mas, not any and every one,
Mt. vii. 21; plur. od mdvres, not all, Mt. xix. 11; Ro. ix.
6; x. 16; od maca odpé, not every kind of flesh, 1 Co. xv.
39; od mavti TS Aad, not to all the people, Acts x. 41;
on the other hand, when od is joined to the verb, was
-+.ov must be rendered no one, no, (as in Hebrew, now
53 A SP now toes ee cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et
Chald. p. 513 sq.): Lk. i.37; Eph. v. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 21;
Rev. xxii. 3; maoa odp£...od w. a verb, no Jlesh, no
mortal, Mt. xxiv. 22; Mk. xiii. 20; Ro. iii. 20; Gal. if.
16; cf. W.§ 26,1; [B.121(106)]. Joined to a noun
it denies and annuls the idea of the noun; as, rdv od
Aady, a people that is not a people (Germ. ein Nichtvolk,
a no-people), Ro. ix. 25, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 10; em ode ZOvet,
2
ov
[R. V. with that which is no nation], Ro. x. 19 (so py x,
Sy xb, a no-god, Deut. xxxii. 21; yy x5, a not-wood, Is.
x. 15; otk dpyvepevs, 2 Mace. iv. 13; 4 od diddvors, Thue.
1, 137, 4; 7 od mepireixiors 3, 95, 2; 4 odk eEovoia 5, 50,
3; dv dreipooivay ... kok amddeEw, Eur. Hippol. 196,
and other exx. in Grk. writ.; non sutor, Hor. sat. 2, 3,
106; non corpus, Cic. acad. 1, 39 fin.); ef. W. 476 (444);
[B. § 148, 9]; 4 ov« nyannuém, Ro. ix. 25; of od« mden-
pévot, 1 Pet. ii. 10. 3. followed by another nega-
tive, a. it strengthens the negation: od kpive oddéva,
Jn. viii. 15; add, Mk. v. 37; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); 08 odk Fv
ovdéra ovdeis keievos, Lk. xxiii. 53 [see oddérw]; ovK.- -
ovdév, nothing at all, Lk. iv. 2; Jn. vi. 63; xi. 49; xii. 19;
Xv. 53 ov weet cou wept ovdevds, Mt. xxii. 16; odk... OdKETL,
Acts viii. 39 ; cf. Matthiae § 609, 3; Kiihner ii. § 516; W.
§ 55,9b.; [B.§ 148, 11]. b. as in Latin, it changes
a negation into an affirmation (cf. Matthiae § 609, 2;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 695 sq.; W.§ 55,9 a.; B.§ 148,
12); od mapa TovTo ovK oti ek TOD GeparTos, not on this
account is it not of the body, i. e. it belongs to the body,
does not cease to be of the body, 1 Co. xii. 15; od duvd-
peda a cidomev Kal jKovcaper pu7) Nadeiv, we are unable not
to speak [ A.V. we cannot but speak], Acts iv. 20. 4.
It is used in disjunctive statements where one
thing is denied that another may be established [W.
§ 55, 8; cf. B. 356 (306)]: ov«...ddda, Lk. viii. 52;
xxiv. 6 [WH reject the cl.]; Jn. i. 33; vii. 10, 12, 16;
vill. 49; Acts x. 413; Ro. viii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 10; 2 Co. iii.
3; viii. 5; Heb. ii. 16, etc.; see ddd, II. 1; ovy ta..
GW iva, Jn. iii. 17; ody va... GAAG, Jn. vi. 38; od pdvov
... GAAG kai, see adda, IT. 1 and podvos, 2; ovk... et pn,
see ei, III. 8c. p. 171°; od py w. subjune. aor. foll. by
ei pn, Rev. xxi. 27 [see ef as above, B.]. 5. It is
joined to other particles: ov pn, not at all, by no means,
surely not, in no wise, see wn, 1V.; od pnkere w. aor. sub-
junc. Mt. xxi. 19 LT Trmrg. WH. pi od, where py is
interrog. (Lat. num) and ov negative [cf. B. 248 (214),
354 (304); W. 511 (476)]: Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq.;
xi. 22. e? od, see ef, III. 11 p. 172%. ov ydp (see ydp, I.
p- 109°), Acts xvi. 37. 6. Asin Hebr. x5 w. impf.,
so in bibl. Grk. od w. 2 pers. fut. is used in emphatic
prohibition (in prof. auth. it is milder; cf. W. § 43,
5c.; also 501 sq. (467); [B. § 139, 64]; Fritzsche on Mt.
p- 259 sq. [ef. p. 252 sq.] thinks otherwise, but not cor-
rectly): Mt. vi. 5; and besides in the moral precepts
of the O. T., Mt. iv. 7; xix. 18; Lk.iv.12; Acts xxiii.
DeeRor vilo (se kill. 7. ov is used interroga-
tively — when an affirmative answer is expected (Lat.
nonne; [W. § 57, 3a.; B. 247 (213)]): Mt. vi. 26, 30;
xvii. 24; Mk. iv. 21; xii. 24; Lk. xi. 40; Jn. iv. 35; vii.
25; Acts ix. 21; Ro. ix. 21; 1Co.ix. 1,6 sq.12; Jas. ii.
4, and often; ov« oiSare krA.; and the like, see eid, IT.
1 p. 174%; dAN’ ov, Heb. iii. 16 (see dAdd, I. 10 p. 28%);
odk drroxpivy ovdév; answerest thou nothing at all? Mk.
xiv. 60; xv. 4;— where an exclamation of reproach or
wonder, which denies directly, may take the place of a
negative question: Mk. iv. 13, 38; Lk. xvii. 18; Acts
xiii. 10 [ef. B. § 189, 65]; xxi. 88 (on which see dpa, 1);
461
oveé
cf. W. u.s.; od ph mio aird; shall I not drink it? Jn.
xvii. 11; cf. W. p. 512 (477); [ef. B. § 139, 2].
ovd, Tdf. ova [see Proleg. p. 101; cf. Chandler § 892],
ah! ha! an interjection of wonder and amazement:
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 34; 3, 23,24; Dio Cass. 63, 20; called
out by the overthrow of a boastful adversary, Mk. xv. 29.*
ovat, an interjection of grief or of denunciation ; Sept.
chiefly for +77 and x; alas! woe! with a dat of pers.
added, Mt. xi. 21; xviii. 7; xxiii. 138-16, 23, 25, 27, 29;
xxiv. 19; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiii. 17; xiv. 21; Lk. vi. 24-26;
X. 133 xi. 42-44, 46 sq. 52; xxi. 23; xxii. 22; Jude 11;
Rev. xii. 12 R G Led. min. [see below], (Num. xxi. 29;
Is. iii. 9, and often in Sept.) ; thrice repeated, and foll.
by a dat., Rev. viii. 13 RG LWH mre. [see below]; the
dat. is omitted in Lk. xvii. 1; twice repeated and foll.
by a nom. in place of a voc., Rev. xviii. 10, 16, 19, (Is. i.
245; v. 8-22; Hab. ii. 6, 12, ete.) ; exceptionally, with an
acc. of the pers., in Rev. viii. 13 T Tr WH txt., and xii.
12 LT Tr WH; this accus., I think, must be regarded
either as an acc. of exclamation (cf. Matthiae § 410), or
as an imitation of the constr. of the acc. after verbs of
injuring, (B. § 131, 14 judges otherwise); with the ad-
dition of awd and a gen. of the evil the infliction of which
is deplored [cf. B. 322 (277); W. 371 (348)], Mt. xviii. 7;
also of éx, Rev. viii.13. Asa substantive, 7 ovai (the
writer seems to have been led to use the fem. by the
similarity of 7 OAies or 7 radatrwpia; cf. W.179 (169))
woe, calamity: Rev. ix. 12; xi. 14; dvo oval, Rev. ix. 12,
(oval emt oval gora, Ezek. vii. 26; oval yas AnwWerat,
Evang. Nicod. ec. 21 [Pars ii. v. 1 (ed. Tdf.)]); so also
in the phrase ovai pot éarw woe is unto me, i.e. divine
penalty threatens me, 1 Co. ix. 16, cf. Hos. ix. 12; [Jer. vi.
4]; Epict. diss. 3, 19, 1, (frequent in eccles. writ.).*
ovSapas (fr. ovdayds, not even one; and this fr. ovdé and
dpés [allied perh. w. dua; cf. Vaniéek p. 972; Curtius
§ 600]), adv., fr. Hdt. [and Aeschyl.] down, by no means,
in no wise: Mt. ii. 6.*
ov8¢, [fr. Hom. down], a neg. disjunctive conjunction,
compounded of ov and 8é, and therefore prop. i. q. but
not; generally, however, its oppositive force being lost,
it serves to continue a negation. [On the elision of e
when the next word begins with a vowel (observed by
Tdf. in eight instances, neglected in fifty-eight), see Tdft
Proleg. p. 96; cf. WH. App. p. 146; W.§5,1a.; B.p.
10 sq.] It signifies 1. and not, continuing a nega-
tion, yet differently from ovre; for the latter connects
parts or members of the same thing, since ré is adjunc-
tive like the Lat. que; but ovdé places side by side things
that are equal and mutually exclude each other [(?).
There appears to be some mistake here in what is said
about ‘mutual exclusion’ (cf. W. § 55, 6): ov6dé, like 8€¢,
always makes reference to something preceding; odre
to what follows also; the connection of clauses nega-
tived by ovre is close and internal, so that they are mu-
tually complementary and combine into a unity, whereas
clauses negatived by ovd¢ follow one another much more
loosely, often almost by accident as it were; see W. 1. ¢.,
and esp. the quotations there given from Benfey and
OvodELS
Klotz.] It differs from pndé as od does from pn [q. v. ad
init.]; after ov, where each has its own verb: Mt. v. ils
vi. 28; Mk, iv. 22; Lk.vi.44; Actsil. 27; ix. 9; xvii. 24
sq.; Gal. i. 17; iv. 14; ovk oi5a ovd€e emiorapat, Mk. xiv. 68
RG Lmrg. [al. ovre . . . odre] (Cic. pro Rose. Am. 43
“non novi neque scio”); cf. W. 490 (456) c.; [B. 367
(315) note]; od... ovde.. . odd€, not... nor... Nor, Mt.
Vi. 26; oddels... ode... ode... odd, Rev. v. 3[R G;
ef. B. 367 (315); W. 491 (457)]; od... ovde foll. by a
fut... . o8dé 7 foll. by subjunc. aor... . ovde, Rev. vii.
16. od... ovdé, the same verb being common to both:
Mt. x. 24; xxv. 13; Lk. vi. 43; viii. 17 [ef. W.300 (281);
B. 355 (305) cf. § 139, 7]; Jn. vi. 24; xiii. 16; Acts viii.
21; xvi. 21; xxiv. 18; Ro. ii. 28; ix. 16; Gal. i. 1; iil. 28;
1 Th. v. 5; 1 Tim. ii. 12; Rev. xxi. 23. preceded by
ovo, Mk. viii. 17; by ovdeis, Mt. ix. 17; — by iva pn;
which is foll. by ovS€é.. . oddé, where pide . . « pndé might
have been expected (cf. B. § 148, 8; [W. 474 (442)]):
Rey. ix. 4. ovd€ yap, for neither, Jn. viii. 42; Ro. viii.
a 2. also not [A. V. generally neither]: Mt. vi. 15;
xxi. 27; xxv. 45; Mk. xi. 26 [RL]; Lk. xvi. 31; Jn. xv.
4; Ro.iv. 15; xi. 21; 1 Co. xv. 13, 16; Gal. i. 12 (ovde
yap eye [cf. B. 367 (315) note; 492 (458) ]); Heb. viii. 4,
etc.; GAN ovdé, Lk. xxiii. 15; # ovdé, in a question, or
doth not even etc.? 1 Co. xi. 14 Rec.; the simple ovde,
num ne quidem (have ye not even etc.) in a question
where a negative answer is assumed (see ov, 7): Mk. xii.
10; Lk. vi.3; xxiii. 40; and GL T Tr WH in 1 Co. xi.
14. 3. not even [B. 369 (3816)]: Mt. vi. 29; viii.
10; Mk. vi. 31; Lk. vii. 9; xii. 27; Jn. xxi. 25 [Tdf. om.
the vs.]; 1Co. v. 1; xiv. 21; ovdé eis [W. 173 (163) ; B.
§ 127, 32], Acts iv. 32; Ro. iii. 10; 1 Co. vi.5 [L T Tr
WH ovdeis]; odde &, Jn. i. 33 GAN odd€, Acts xix. 2; 1
Co. iii. 2 (Rec. dAX ore) ; iv. 3; Gal. ii. 3. ina double
negative for the sake of emphasis, ov«... ovdé [B. 369
(316); W. 500 (465) ]: Mt. xxvii. 14; Lk. xviii. 13; Acts
vii. 5.
ov8els, ov Sepia (the fem. only in these pass.: Mk. vi.
5; Lk. iv. 26; Jn. xvi. 29; xviii. 38; xix.4; Acts xxv.
18; xxvii. 22; Phil. iv.15; 1 Jn.i. 5, and Rec. in Jas. iii.
12), od d€y (and, acc. to a pronunciation not infreq. fr.
Aristot. and Theophr. down, ov6eis, ovév: 1 Co. xiii. 2
IIE Ibe Wel ACIS ssbe IAM Wels D9 Ops sai, &:
@)EE ir WH; uk. xxi. 35, Tr WH s xxiii. 140 Tr
WH; Acts xv.9 TTrWHtxt.; Acts xxvi. 26 TWH
Tr br.; 1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf.; see pydefs init. and Gottling
on Aristot. pol. p. 278; [Metsterhans, Grammatik a. At-
tisch. Inschriften, § 20,5; see L. and S. s. v. od6e/s; ef.
Lob. Pathol. Elem. ii. 344]; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 70 Anm.
7), (fr. od8€ and eis), [fr. Hom. down], and not one, no
one, none, no; it differs from jndeis as od does from ph
[q. v. ad init.]; 1. with nouns: masc., Lk. iv. 24;
xvi. 13; 1 Co. viii. 45 oddels Gros, Jn. xv. 243 oddenia
in the passages given above; neut., Lk. xxiii. 4; Jn. x.
41; Acts xvii. 21; xxiii. 9; xxviii. 5; Ro. viii. 1; xiv. 14;
Gal. v. 10, ete. 2. absolutely : ovdets, Mt. vi. 24;
ix. 16; Mk. iii. 27; v. 4; vii. 24; Lk.i.613 v. 39 [WH
in br.]; vii. 28; Jn. i. 18; iv. 27; Acts xviii. Op sea Galle
462
add
OUKETEL
Ro. xiv. 7, and very often. with a partitive gen.: Lk.
iv. 26; xiv. 24; Jn. xiii. 28; Actsv.13; 1 Co.i.14; ii.
8; 1Tim.vi.16. oddeis ef pn, Mt. xix. 17 Rec.; xvii. 8;
Mk. x. 18; LK. xviii.19; Jn. iii. 13; 1 Co. xii. 3; Rev.
xix. 12, etc.; éav py, In. iii. 2; vi. 44,65. ovd«. .. oddets
(see ov, 3 a.), Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. v.37; vi. 5; xii. 14; Lk.
viii. 43 ; Jn. vill. 15; xviii. 9, 31; Acts iv. 12; 2 Co. xi.
9 (8); overt. . . ovdeis, Mk. ix. 8; ovdér@. . . oddeis, Lk.
xxiii. 53 [Tdf. oddeis. . . odém@; L. Tr WH ovdeis otra];
Jn. xix. 41; Acts viii. 16 [L T Tr WH]; ovdeis.. . ovkere,
Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11. neut. ovdev, nothing, Mt. x.
26 [cf. W. 300 (281); B. 355 (305)]; xvii. 20; xxvi. 62;
XXvil. 12, and very often; with a partitive gen., Lk. ix.
36; xvili. 34; Acts xviii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 15; xiv. 10 [RG];
ovdey ef py, Mt. v. 13; xxi. 19; Mk. ix. 29; xi. 135 pn
rivos; with the answer ovdevds, Lk. xxii. 35; oddev extds
w. gen., Acts xxvi. 22; ovdev por diadeper, Gal. ii. 6; it
follows another negative, thereby strengthening the ne-
gation (see ov, 3 a.): Mk. xv. 4sq.; xvi. 8; Lk. iv. 2; ix.
865 xx. 405 Inv all 27 seve 19nd Oeixe Soe ext 49) Mexia.
30; Acts xxvi. 26 [Lchm. om.]; 1 Co. viii. 2[R G]; ix.
15(GLT Tr WH]; ovdev od pa w. aor. subjunc. Lk. x.
19 [R*G WH mrg.; see pn, LV. 2]. ovdev, absol., noth-
ing whatever, not at all, in no wise, [ef. B. § 131, 10]: adi
keiv (see adsxéw, 2 b.), Acts xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12; ovdev
dcapepery tivds, Gal. iv. 1; torepeiv, 2 Co. xii. 11; dpereiv,
Jn. vi. 63; 1 Co. xiii. 3. odd€v eortuy, it is nothing, of no
importance, ete. [cf. B. §129,5]: Mt. xxiii. 16,18; Jn.
viii. 54; 1 Co. vii. 19; with a gen., none of these things
is true, Acts xxi. 24; xxv. 11; ovdév eds, I am nothing,
of noaccount: 1 Co. xiii. 2; 2 Co. xii. 11, (see exx. fr. Grk.
auth. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S.s.v. II. 2; Meyer on 1
Co. l.¢.]); ets odd€év AoyeaOjvat (see Aoyifouas, 1 a.), Acts
xix. 27; els ovdev yiverOa, to come to nought, Acts v. 36
LW. § 29, 3a.; ev oddevi, in no respect, in nothing, Phil.
». 20 (cf. pndeis, g.) J.
ov8érore, adv., denying absolutely and objectively, (fr.
ovde and oré, prop. not ever), [fr. Hom. down], never
Mt. vii. 23; ix. 33; xxvi. 33; Mk. ii. 12; [Lk. xv.29
(bis)]; Jn. vii. 46; Acts x. 14; xi.8; xiv. 8; 1 Co. xiii.
8; Heb. x.1, 11. interrogatively, did ye never, etc.:
Mieco: 16542 )iMikn di? 5."
ovdérw, adv., simply negative, (fr. oddé and the enclitic
mo), [fr. Aeschyl. down], not yet, not as yet: Jn. vii. 39
(where L Tr WH otrw); xx. 9. odd€mw oddSeis, never
any one [A. V. never man yet], Jn. xix. 41; [ovdéro...
én ovdevi, as yet... upon none, Acts viii. 16 LT Tr
WH]; otk... ovdére@ oddeis (see od, 3 a.), Lk. xxiii. 53 [L
Tr WH otk . . . oddels otrw; Tdf. dk... oddels ovderra |;
ovdera ovdev (L T Tr WH simply ota) not yet (any-
thing), 1 Co. viii. 2.*
ovOels, oddév, see ovdels, init.
ovxér [also written separately by Rect (generally),
Tr (nine times in Jn.), Tdf. (in Philem. 16)], (ovk, ére),
an adv. which denies simply, and thus differs from pnkére
(q- v-), no longer, no more, no further: Mt. xix. 6; Mk.
x. 8: Lk. xv.19, 21; Jn. iv. 42; vi.66; Acts xx. 25, 38;
Ro. vi. 9; xiv. 15; 2Co. v. 16; Gal. iii. 25; iv. 7; Eph.
OvKOUV
ii. 19; Philem. 16; Heb. x. 18, 26, etc.; odxére #XOov, I
came not again [R.V. J forebore to come], 2 Co. i. 23.
with another neg. particle in order to strengthen the ne-
gation: ovde . . . odkérs, Mt. xxii. 46 3 odk . . . odxéri, Acts
vill. 39; ovdels .. . ovxért, Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11;
. ovdev, Mk. vii. 12; xv. 5; Lk. xx. 403; ovkére
... ovdeva, Mk. ix. 8; odkére ov pn, Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xxii.
16 [WH om. L Tr br. ovcér]; Rev. xviii. 14 [Tr om.];
- ovxert ovdeis, Mk. v. 3 LT WHTrtxt. ovdkére
is used logically [cf. W. §65, 10]; as, odxére eye for it
cannot now be said éru éyw etc., Ro. vii. 17, 20; Gal. ii.
20; add, Ro. xi. 6; Gal. iii. 18. [(Hom., Hes., Hdt., al.)]
ovkody, (fr. ovk and odv), adv., not therefore; and since
a speaker often introduces in this way his own opinion
[see Kriiger as below], the particle is used affirmatively,
therefore, then, the force of the negative disappearing.
Hence the saying of Pilate otcodv Baoreds ef od must
be taken affirmatively : then (since thou speakest of thy
Baoureia) thou arta king! (Germ. also bist du doch ein
Konig !), Jn. xviii. 37 [cf. B. 249 (214)]; but it is better
to write ovkovy, so that Pilate, arguing from the words
of Christ, asks, not without irony, art thou not a king
then ? or in any case, thou art a king, art thou not? cf. W.
512 (477). The difference between ovxodv and ovkour is
differently stated by different writers; cf. Herm. ad Vig.
p: 792 sqq.; Kriiger § 69, 51, 1 and 2; Kiihner § 508, 5
li. p. 715 sqq., also the 3d excurs. appended to his ed. of
Xen. memor.; [Bdaumlein, Partikeln, pp. 191-198].*
ov pH, see pn, IV.
ovv a conj. indicating that something follows from an-
other necessarily ; [al. regard the primary force of the
particle as confirmatory or continuative, rather than
illative; cf. Passow, or L.andS.s. v.; Kiihner § 508, 1 ii.
p- 707 sqq.; Baumlein p. 173 sqq.; Kriiger § 69, 52; Don-
aldson p. 571; Rost in a program “ Ueber Ableitung”
u.s.w. p.2; Klotz p. 717; Hartung ii. 4]. Hence it is
used in drawing a conclusion and in connecting sen-
tences together logically, then, therefore, accordingly,
consequently, these things being so, [(Klotz, Rost, al., have
wished to derive the word fr. the neut. ptcp. dy (cf.
évrws) ; but see Baumlein or Kiihner u.s.); cf. W. § 53,
8]: Mt. iii. 10; x. 32 (since persecutions are not to be
dreaded, and consequently furnish no excuse for denying
me [cf. W. 455 (424) ]); Mt. xviii. 4; Lk.iii.9; xvi. 27;
Jn. viii. 38 (kai tpeis ody, and ye accordingly, i. e. ‘since,
asis plain from my case, sons follow the example of their
fathers’; Jesus says this in sorrowful irony [W. 455
(424)]); Acts i. 21 (since the office of the traitor Judas
must be conferred on another); Ro. v. 9; vi. 4; xiii. 10;
1 Co. iv. 16 (since I hold a father’s place among you) ; 2
Co. v. 20; Jas.iv. 17, and many other exx. As respects
details, notice that it stands a. in exhortations
(to show what ought now to be done by reason of what
has been said), i. q. wherefore, [our transitional there-
fore]: Mt. iii. 8; v. 48; ix. 38; Lk. xi. 35; xxi. 14, 36
[R G Lumrg. Trmrg.]; Acts iii.19; xiii.40; Ro. vi. 12;
xiv. 13; 1 Co. xvi. 11; 2 Co. viii. 24; Eph. v. 1; vi. 14;
an 7
OUKETL. »
ovde..
463
ovv
35; Jas. iv. 7; v. 7; 1 Pet.iv.7; v.6; Rev.i.19 [GL
T Tr WH]; iii. 3, 19, and often ; viv ody, now therefore,
Acts xvi. 36. b. in questions, then, therefore,
(Lat. igitur) ; a. when the question is, what follows
or seems to follow from what has been said: Mt. xxii.
28; xxvii. 22 [W. 455 (424)]; Mk. xv. 12; Lk. iii. 10;
xx. 15, 33; Jn. viii. 5; ri odv épodpev; Ro. vi. 1; vii. 7;
ix. 143 ri odv pypi; 1 Co. x.193 ri odv; what then? i.e.
how then does the matter stand? [cf. W. § 64, 2a.], Jn.
i. 21 [here WH mrg. punct. ri ody od ;] Ro. iii. 93 vi. 15;
xl. 7; also ri ody éoriv; [what is it then?] Acts xxi. 22;
IN@o-s xivi 15.26: B. when it is asked, whether
this or that follows from what has just been said: Mt.
xill. 28; Lk. xxii. 70; Jn. xviii. 39; Ro. iii. 31; Gall. iii.
217 y- when it is asked, how something which is true
or regarded as true, or what some one does, can be rec-
onciled with what has been previously said or done: Mt.
xii. 26; xiii. 27; xvii. 10 (where the thought is, ‘thou
commandest us to tell no one about this vision we have
had of Elijah; what relation then to this vision has thé
doctrine of the scribes concerning the coming of Elijah?
Is not this doctrine confirmed by the vision ?’) ; Mt. xix.
73; xxvi. 54; Lk. xx. 17; Jn. iv. 11 [Tdf. om. ody]; Acts
xv. 10 (viv odv, now therefore, i.e. at this time, therefore,
when God makes known his will so plainly); Acts xix.
3; Ro. iv. 1 (where the meaning is, ‘If everything de-
pends on faith, what shall we say that Abraham gained
by outward things, i.e. by works?’ [but note the crit.
textsi}))isels Cosnvisgloiss Galseittsnos 8. in general, it
serves simply to subjoin questions suggested by what
has just been said: Ro. iii. 27; iv. 9sq.; vi. 21; xi. 11;
1 Co. iii. 5, ete. c. inepanalepsis, i. e. it serves
to resume a thought or narrative interrupted by inter-
vening matter (Matthiae ii. p. 1497; [W. 444 (414)]),
like Lat. igitur, inquam, our as was said, say I, to pro-
ceed, etc.: Mk. iii. 31 [RG] (cf. 21); Lk. iii. 7 (cf. 3) ;
Jn. iv. 45 (cf. 48); vi. 24 (ef. 22); 1 Co. viii. 4; xi. 20
(cf. 18); add, Mk. xvi. 19 [Tr mrg. br. ody]; Acts viii.
DDRII SEX A EXO SOV XKMI Ol exXVeuleX VII LO
It is used also when one passes at length to a subject
about which he had previously intimated an intention to
speak: Acts xxvi. 4, 9. d. it serves to gather up
summarily what has already been said, or even what
cannot be narrated at length: Mt. i.17; vii. 24 (where
no reference is made to what has just before been said
[?], but all the moral precepts of the Serm. on the Mount
are summed up in a single rule common to all); Lk. iii.
18; Jn. xx. 30; Acts xxvi. 22. e. it serves to adapt
examples and comparisons to the case in hand: Jn. iii.
29; xvi. 22;—or to add examples to illustrate the sub-
ject under consideration: Ro. xii. 20 Ree. f. In
historical discourse it serves to make the transition
from one thing to another, and to connect the several
parts and portions of the narrative, since the new uccur-
rences spring from or are occasioned by what precedes
[cf. W. § 60, 3]: Lk. vi. 9 RG; numberless times so in
John, as i. 22 [Lchm. om.]; ii. 18; iv. 9 [Tdf. om.]; vi. 60,
Phil. ii. 29; Col. ii. 16; 2 Tim. i. 8; Heb. iv. 1, 11; x. | 67; vii. 6 [G T om.], 25, 28, 33, 35, 40; viii. 13,19, 22, 20,
‘ LA
‘OUT @
31,57; ix. 7sq. 10, 16; xi. 12, 16, 21, 32, 36; xii. 1-43 xiii.
12; xvi. 17, 22; xviii. 7,11 sq. 16, 27-29; xix. 20-24, 32, 38,
40; xxi. 5-7, ete. g. with other conjunctions: dpa
odv, so then, Lat. hinc igitur, in Paul; see dpa, 5. «td odv, if
then (where what has just been said and proved is carried
over to prove something else), see ei, III. 12; [ed pev ody,
see pév, II. 4 p. 398”). cire odv . . . etre, whether then...
or: 1 Co. x. 81; xv. 11. émel ody, since then: Heb. ii.
14; iv. 6; for which also a participle is put with ody, as
Acts ii. 30; xv. 2(T Tr WH 8€]; xvii. 29; xix. 36; xxv.
17; xxvi. 223 Ro. v. 1; xv. 28; 2 Co. iii. 12; v. 11; vii. 1;
Hebsiv. 14.5 x. 195) 1Petsiv. Us 2) Bete its 11) () Wet Ur
mrg. ovras]. av ody, if then ever, in case then, or rather,
therefore if, therefore in case, (for in this formula, ody, al-
though placed in the protasis, yet belongs more to the
apodosis, since it shows what will necessarily follow from
what precedes if the condition introduced by éav shall
ever take place): Mt. v. 23 [cf. W. 455 (424)]; vi. 22
[here Tdf. om. ody] ; xxiv. 26; Lk.iv. 7; Jn. vi. 62; viii.
6; Ro. ii. 26; 1 Co. xiv. 11, 23; 2 Tim. ii. 213; édy ody
un, Rev. iii. 3; so also érav ody, when therefore: Mt. vi. 2;
xxi. 40; xxiv. 15, and RG in Lk. xi. 34. ére odv, when
(or after) therefore, so when: Jn. xiii. 12, 31 [(30)
Reeshezclz) er Wik sexx, 305 xxi tog mi.qe nence i
came to pass that, when ete., Jn. ii. 22; xix.6,8. das ody,
when (or after) therefore: Jn. iv. 1, 40; xi. 6; xviii. 6;
xx. 11; xxi. 95; as ody, as therefore, Col. ii. 6. aorep ody,
Mt. xiii. 40. ev ody, foll. by d¢ [cf. B. § 149, 16], Mk.
xvi. 19 [Tr mrg. br. ody]; Jn. xix. 25; Actsi. 6; viii. 4,
25; 1 Co. ix. 25, etc.; without an adversative conjunc.
following, see pév, II. 4. viv ody, see above under a., and
b. y- h. As to position, it is never the first word
in the sentence, but generally the second, sometimes the
third, [sometimes even the fourth, W. § 61, 6]; as,
[rept tis Bpwceas ody etc. 1 Co. viii. 4]; of wev odv, Acts
ii. 41, and often; moAda pev ody, Jn. xx. 30. i. John
uses this particle in his Gospel far more frequently
[Q@more than two hundred times in all)] than the other
N. T. writers; in his Epistles only in the foll. passages :
1 Jn. ii. 24 (where GL T Tr WH have expunged it) ; iv.
19 Lchm.; 3 Jn. 8. [(From Hom. down.)]
ovaw, (fr. od and the enclitic wo), adv., [fr. Hom.
down], (differing fr. pyre, as od does fr. wy [q. v. ad
init.]), not yet; a. in a negation: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk.
xiii. 7; Jn. ii. 45 ili. 245; vi. 17 Ltxt.T Tr WH; vii. 6, 8°
RL WH txt., 8°, 30, 39; viii. 20,57; xi. 30; xx. 17; 1
Co. iii. 2; Heb. ii. 8; xii. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 2; Rev. xvii. 10,
12 (where Lehm. otk) ; ovdels ovrw, no one ever yet (see
ovdeis, 2, and cf. od, 3 a.), Mk. xi. 2 L T Tr WH; Lk.
xxiii. 53 L Tr WH; Acts viii. 16 Ree. b. in ques-
tions, nondumne? do ye not yet etc.: Mt. xv.17 RG;
xvi. 9; Mk. iv. 40 L Tr WH; viii. 17, [21 L txt. T Tr
WH).*
ovpt, -ds, 7, a tail: Rev. ix. 10, 19; xii. 4.
down; Sept. several times for 331.) *
ovpdvios, -ov, in class. Grk. generally of three term.
[W. §11, 1; B. 25 (23)], (odpavds), heavenly, i. e. a.
dwelling in heaven: 6 rari 6 ovp., Mt. vi. 14, 26, 32; xv.
(From Hom.
464
> a
oupavos
13; besides LT Tr WH inv. 48; xviii. 35; xxiii. 9;
orparia ovp. Lk. ii. 13 (where Tr txt. WH mrg. ovpa-
vov)- b. coming from heaven: émracia ovp. Acts
xxvi. 19. (Hom. in Cer. 55; Pind., Tragg., Arstph.,
al:))*
ovrpavddev, (odpavds), adv., from heaven: Acts xiv. 17;
xxvi. 13. (Hom., Hes., Orph., 4 Mace. iv.10.) Cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 93 sq.*
oipaves, -od, 6, [fr. a root meaning ‘ to cover,’ ‘encom-
pass’; cf. Vanidek p. 895; Curtius § 509], heaven; and,
in imitation of the Hebr. n:pw (i. e. prop. the heights
above, the upper regions), ovpavol, -@v, ot, the heavens [W.
§ 27, 3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the
art. cf. W. 121 (115)), 1. e. 1. the vaulted expanse
of the sky with all the things visible in it; a. gener-
ally: as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10,
12; 6 ovp. «4 yh, [heaven and earth] i. q. the universe, the
world, (acc. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking,
inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the
name of the universe, Gen. i. 1; xiv.19; Tob. vii. 17 (18);
1 Macc. ii. 37, etc.) : Mt. v.18; xi. 25; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii.
31; Lk. x. 21; xvi.17; xxi. 33; Actsiv. 24; xiv.153 xvii.
24; Rev.x.6; xiv.7; xx.11. The ancients conceived of
the expanded sky as an arch or vault the outmost edge of
which touched the extreme limits of the earth [see B. D.
s. v. Firmament, cf. Heaven]; hence such expressions as
am dkpwv ovpavav €ws axpov avrav, Mt. xxiv. 31; dw
adkpov ys €ws akpov ovpavodv, Mk. xiil. 27; bd tov odpavdy
(Dv NA, Eccl. i. 13; ii. 3, ete.), under heaven, i. e.
on earth, Acts ii. 5; iv.12; Col. i. 235; ék tis (se. xapas,
ef. W. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (71 sq.) ]) im’ [here LT Tr WH
bro tov ovp. | ovpavor eis THY br ovpavdry, out of the one part
under the heaven unto the other part under heaven i. e. from
one quarter of the earth to the other, Lk. xvii. 24 ; as by
this form of expression the greatest longitudinal distance
is described, so to one looking up from the earth heaven
stands as the extreme measure of altitude; hence, coA-
AacOar &ypt Tod ovpavod, Rev. xviii. 5 [L T Tr WH] (on
which see xoAAd@) ; bWeOjnvat €ws Tod ovpavod, metaph. of
a city that has reached the acme, zenith, of glory and
prosperity, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15, (kAéos ovpavdv iket, Hom.
Il. 8, 192; Od. 19,108; mpds otpavdy BiBagew twa, Soph.
O. C. 882 (881) ; exx. of similar expressions fr. other
writ. are given in Kypke, Observv. i. p. 62); xatvol odpavot
(kal yj kawn), better heavens which will take the place of
the present after the renovation of all things, 2 Pet. iii.
13; Rev. xxi. 1; of viv ovpavoi, the heavens which now
are, and which will one day be burnt up, 2 Pet. iii. 7; also
6 mp@tos ovpavés, Rev. xxi. 1, cf. Heb. xii. 26. But the
heavens are also likened in poetic speech to an expanded
curtain or canopy (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2; Is. xl. 22), and to
an unrolled scroll ; hence, €Aicwew [T Tr mrg. dAAdooev]
rods ovp. as mepiBdraov, Heb. i. 12 (fr. Sept. of Ps. ci.
(cii.) 26 cod. Alex.) ; kai 6 odp. dmexapicbn as BiBdiov
éduoodpevor [or eiAuoo. |, Rev. vi. 14. b. the aerial
heavens or sky, the region where the clouds and tempests
gather, and where thunder and lightning are produced:
6 ovp. muppaget, Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the pass.]¢
ovpavos
arvyvafov, ib. 3 [see last ref.]; derdv axe, Jas. v. 18;
add Lk. ix. 54; xvii. 29; Actsix. 3 -xxii. 6; Rev. xiii.13;
xvi. 21 ; xx. 9; onpetov ék or ard rou ovp., Mt. xvi. 1; Mk.
viii. 11; Lk. xi. 16; xxi. 11; Tépara év t@ ovp. Acts ii.
19; KAelew tov odpavdy, to keep the rain in the sky, hin-
der it from falling on the earth, Lk. iv. 25; Rev. xi. 6,
(cuvexew tov odp. for DWM IY, Deut. xi. 17; 2 Chr.
vi. 26; vil. 13; dvéxew rv odp. Sir. xlviii. 3); ai vepedat
Tov ovp., Mt. xxiv. 30; xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62; 76 Tpoca-
mov Tov ovp., Mt. xvi. 3['T br. WH reject the pass.]; Lk.
xii. 56; rd merewa T. ovp. (gen. of place), that fly in the
air (Gen. i. 26; Ps. viii. 9; Bar. iii. 17; Judith xi. 7),
Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 32; Lk. viii. 5; ix.
58; xiii. 19; Acts x.12. These heavens are opened by
being cleft asunder, and from the upper heavens, or
abode of heavenly beings, come down upon earth — now
the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16; Mk.i.10; Lk. iii. 21 sq.; Jn.
i. 32; now angels, Jn. i. 51 (52); and now in vision ap-
pear to human sight some of the things within the high-
est heaven, Acts vii. 55; x. 11, 16; through the aerial
heavens sound voices, which are uttered in the heavenly
abode: Mt. iii. 17; Mk.i.11; Lk. iii. 22; Jn. xii. 28; 2
Pet. i. 18. c. the sidereal or starry heavens:
Ta Gotpa tov ovp. Heb. xi. 12 (Deut. i. 10; x. 22; Eur.
Phoen. 1) ; of dorépes r. ovp., Mk. xiii. 25; Rev. vi. 13;
xii. 4, (Is. xiii. 10; xiv. 13); ai Svvayers trav ovp. the
heavenly forces (hosts), i. e. the stars [al. take Suv. in this
phrase in a general sense (see dvvapts, f.) of the powers
which uphold and regulate the heavens]: Mt. xxiv. 29;
Lk. xxi. 26; af év trois ovp. Mk. xiii. 25, (Hebr. xi¥
DWI, Deut. xvii. 3; Jer. xxiii. 22; Zeph. i. 5); so 7
orparia Tov ovpavod, Acts vil. 42. 2. the region above
the sidereal heavens, the seat of an order of things eternal
and consummately perfect, where God dwells and the other
heavenly beings: this heaven Paul, in 2 Co. xii. 2, seems
to designate by the name of 6 rpiros ovp., but certainly
not the third of the seven distinct heavens described by
the author of the Test. xii. Patr., Levi § 3, and by the
Rabbins [(cf. Wetstein ad loc.; Hahn, Theol. d. N. T.i.
247 sq.; Drummond, Jewish Messiah, ch. xv.)]; cf. De
Wette ad loc. Several distinct heavens are spoken of
also in Eph. iv. 10 (imepdva ravrwv trav op.) ; cf. Heb.
vii. 26, if it be not preferable here to understand the nu-
merous regions or parts of the one and the same heaven
where God dwells as referred to. The highest heaven
is the dwelling-place of God: Mt. v. 34; xxiii. 22; Acts
vii. 49; Rev. iv. 1 sqq., (Ps. x. (xi.) 43; exili. 24 (exv. 16
sq.)); hence 6eds rod ovp., Rev. xi.13; xvi. 11, (Gen.
xxiv. 3); 6 év (rois) ovp., Mt. v. 16, 45; Vinl39% vil 21%
x. 33; xii. 50; xvi. 17; xviii. 10 [here L WH mrg. ev r@
ovpave in br.], 14, 19; Mk. xi. 25 sq., etc. From this
heaven the mvedpa Gy. is sent down, 1 Pet. i. 12 and the
pass. already cited [cf. 1 b. sub fin.]; and Christ is said
to have come, Jn. iii. 13, 31; vi. 38, 41sq.; 1 Co. xv. 47;
it is the abode of the angels, Mt. xxiv. 36; xxii. 30; xviil.
10; xxviii. 2; Mk. xii. 25; xiii. 32; Lk. li. 153; xxii. 43
[Lbr. WH reject the pass.]; Gal. i. 8; 1 Co. viii. 5; Eph.
iii. 15; Heb. xii. 22; Rev. x.1; xii. 7; xviii. 1; xix. 14,
465
ous
(Gen. xxi. 17; xxii. 11); rd év rots odpavois Kal r& em THs
yis, the things and beings in the heavens (i. e. angels)
and on the earth, Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 16, 20; ylverar TO
OeAnpa tod Oeod év ovpay@, i.e. by the inhabitants of
heaven, Mt. vi. 10; yapa éora: €v r6 ovp., God and the
angels will rejoice, Lk. xv. 7. this heaven is the abode
to which Christ ascended after his resurrection, Mk.
xvi. 19; Lk. xxiv. 51 [T om. WH reject the cl.]; Actsi.
10sq.; ii. 34; iii. 21; Ro. x. 6; [Eph.i. 20 Lchm. txt.]; 1
Pet. iii. 22; Heb. i. 4 (€v d dois); viii. 1; ix. 24; Rev.
iv. 2, and from which he will hereafter return, 1 Th. i.
10; iv. 16; 2 Th. i. 7; into heaven have already been
received the souls (mvevpara) both of the O. T. saints
and of departed Christians, Heb. xii. 23 (see droypddpa,
b. fin.), and heaven is appointed as the future abode of
those who, raised from the dead and clothed with supe-
rior bodies, shall become partakers of the heavenly king-
dom, 2 Co. v. 1, and enjoy the reward of proved virtue,
Mt. v.12; Lk. vi. 23; hence eternal blessings are called
@noavpos év odpave, Mt. vi. 20; Lk. xii. 33, and those on
whom God has conferred eternal salvation are said éyew
6ncavpoy ev ovpava (-vois), Mt. xix. 21; Mk. x. 21; Lk.
xviii. 22, cf. Heb. x.34 [RG]; or the salvation awaiting
them is said to be laid up for them in heaven, Col. i. 5;
1 Pet. i.4; or their names are said to have been written
in heaven, Lk. x. 20; moreover, Christ, appointed by
God the leader and lord of the citizens of the divine
kingdom, is said to have all power in heaven and on
earth, Mt. xxviii. 18; finally, the seer of the Apocalypse
expects a new Jerusalem to come down out of heaven as
the metropolis of the perfectly established Messianic
kingdom, Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2,10. By meton. 6 ovpavds is
put for the inhabitants of heaven : eddpaivov ovpave, Rev.
xviii. 20, cf. xii. 12, (Ps. xev. (xcvi.) 11; Is. xliv. 23; Job
xv. 15); in particular for God (Dan. iv. 23, and often by
the Rabbins, influenced by an over-scrupulous reverence
for the names of God himself; cf. Schiirer in the Jahrbb.
f. protest. Theol., 1876, p. 178 sq.; [Keil, as below]):
dpaptdve eis Tov ovp., Lk. xv. 18, 21; ék rod ovp., i. gq. by
God, Jn. iii. 27; €& ovp., of divine authority, Mt. xxi. 25;
Mk. xi. 30; Lk. xx. 4; éravriov rod ovpavod, 1 Mace. iii.
18 (where the rod Geod before rod odp. seems question-
able) ; ék rod ovp. 7 ioxvs, ib. 19; 7 &€ odp. BonOea, xii.
15; xvi. 8, cf. iii. 50-53, 595; iv. 10, 24, 80, 40,55; v. 31;
vii. 37, 41; ix. 46; cf. Keil, Comm. iib. d. Biich. d. Mace.
p.20. On the phrase 7 Sacv\eia ray odp. and its meaning,
see BaotAeia, 3; [Cremer s. v. Bac.; Edersheim i. 265].
OipBavds, -od, 6, [a Lat. name; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Philip. p. 174], Urbanus, a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 9.*
Oipias, -ov [B. 17 sq. (16) no. 8], 6, (7738 light of Je-
hovah [or, my light is Jehovah]), Uriah, the husband of
Bathsheba the mother of Solomon by David: Mt. i. 6.*
ovs, gen. ards, plur. dra, dat. daaiv, rd, [cf. Lat. auris,
ausculto, audio, ete.; akin to diw, aicOdvopat; cf. Curtius
§ 619; Vanicek p. 67]; fr. Hom. down; Hebr. 1&8; the
ear; 1. prop.: Mt. xiii. 16; Mk. vii. 33; Lk. xxii.
50; 1Co.ii. 9; xii. 16; &ra twos eis dénouw, to hear sup-
plication, 1 Pet. iii. 12; 4 ypagy mAnpodtar ev rois aot
ovoia
twos, while present and hearing, Lk. iv. 21 (Bar. i. 3
sq-); those unwilling to hear a thing are said ovvexew
[q. v. 2a.] ra Sra, to stop their ears, Acts vii. 57 ; nxovo Oy
ru els Ta Ord Tivos, something was heard by, came to the
knowledge of [A. V. came to the ears of ] one, Acts xi. 22;
likewise eicépxeoOat, Jas. v.4; yiverOat, to come unto the
ears of one, Lk. i. 44; dkovew eis rd ods, to hear eve
in the ear i. e.] in familiar converse, privately, Mt. x. 27
(eis ods often so in class. Grk.; cf. Passow [L. and S.]
s. v. 1); also mpds Td ods Aadetv, Lk. xii. 3. 2. met-
aph. i. q. the faculty of perceiving with the mind, the fac-
ulty of understanding and knowing: Mt. xiii. 16 ; 6 xv
(or ef rus Zxe) Sra (or ods, in Rev.) [sometimes (esp. in
Mk. and Lk.) with axovew added ; cf. B. § 140, 3] GkOvET@,
whoever has the faculty of attending and understanding,
let him use it, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9,43; Mk. iv. 9, 23; vil.
16 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; Lk. viii. 8; xiv. 35 (34);
Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 138, 22; xiii. 9; rots dot Ba-
péws dxovew, to be slow to understand or obey [A. V.
their ears are dull of hearing], Mt. xiii. 15; Acts xxviii.
27, (fr. Is. vi. 10); @ra éyovres ovK dxovere, Mk. viii. 18;
dra tov pr axoverv, [ears that they should not hear; cf. B.
267 (230)], Ro. xi. 8; O¢a0e r. Adyous Tovrous eis Ta Sra,
[A. V. let these words sink into your ears i.e.] take them
into your memory and hold them there, Lk. ix. 44; dze-
pitpytos Tots woly (see amepitpnros), Acts vii. 51.*
oicia, -as, 4, (fr. dv, odca, dv, the ptep. of el), what
one has, i.e. property, possessions, estate, [A.V. substance]:
(Lk. xv. 12'sq. (Tob. xiv. 13; Hdt. 1, 92; Xen., Plat.,
Attic oratt., al.) *
ovre, (ov and re), an adjunctive negative conj., [fr.
Hom. down], (differing fr. pnre as ov does fr. py [q. v. ad
init.], and fr. ovdé as pyre does fr. pndé; see pyre and
ovd€), neither; and not. 1. Examples in which otre
stands singly : a. ov...oUre, Rev. xii. 8 Rec. (where
GLT Tr WH ovde); xx. 4 RG (where L T Tr WH
ovdé); ovdels dEvos evpeOn avoiéat rd BiBAlov ov're BAérev
avré, Rev. v. 4; cf. W.491 (457); B. 367 (315); ov...
ovde ... odre, 1 Th. ii. 3 RG (where L T Tr WH more
correctly ovdé) [W. 493 (459); B. 368 (315)]; ovde..
ovre (so that ore answers only to the ov in oddé), Gal. i.
I2RGT WH txt. [W. 492 (458) ; B. 366 (314)]. b.
otre ... kat, like Lat. neque ... et, neither. . .and: Jn. iv.
11; 3 Jn. 10, (Kur. Iph. T. 591; but the more common
Grk. usage was ov... ré, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p.
714; Passow s.v.B. 2; [L. and S. s. v. II. 4]; W. § 55,
7; [B.-§ 149, 18'¢.]). c. By a solecism odre is put
for ovdé, not... even: 1 Co. iii. 2 Rec. (where G LT Tr
WH o38¢) [W. 493 (459); B. 367 (315); § 149, 13 £.];
Mk. v.3 RG (where L T Tr WH have restored oddé
[W. 490 (456); B.u.s.]); Lk. xii. 26 RG (where LT
Tr WH ovdé [W. u. s. and 478 (445); B. 347 (298)));
ovre perevdnoay, Rev. ix. 20 RL Tr (where G WH txt.
ov, T ovd€ not... even; WH mrg. ore or ovde [cf. B. 367
(315)]); after the question py divara... cdxa; follows
ovre fduKov yAukd Totnoat Vdap, Jas. iii. 12 GLT Tr WH
(as though otre divarat . .. cdxa had previously been in
the writer’s mind [cf. W. 493 (459); B.u.s.]). 2:
466
ovuTOS
used twice or more, neither... nor, (Lat. nec... nec;
neque... neque): Mt. vi. 20; xxii. 30; Mk. xii. 25; [av.
68 L txt. T Tr WH]; Lk. xiv. 35 (34); Jn. iv. 21; v.
37; viii. 19; ix.3; Acts xv. 10; xix. 37; xxv. 8; xxviii.
21; Ro. viii. 38 sq. (where odre occurs ten times) ; 1 Co.
iii. 7; vi. 9sq. (odre eight times [yet T WH Tr mrg. the
eighth time ov]); xi. 11; Gal. v. 6; vi. 15; 1 Th. ii. 6;
Rev. iii. 15 sq.; ix. 20; xxi. 4; otre... odre.. . ovde
(Germ. auch nicht, also not), L Tr WH in Lk. xx. 35 sq.,
and L T Tr mrg. WH in Acts xxiv. 12 sq.; ef. W. 491
(457 sq.) ; B. 368 (315) note.
ovTos, avty, TovTo, demonstrative pron. [cf. Curtius p.
543], Hebr. 7}, NNi, this; used
I. absolutely. il a. this one, visibly present
here: Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk. ix. 7; Lk. vii. 44 sq.; ix.
355, 2 Peted.17. Mt.ix. 35, xxi. 383) Mk. xiv. 69>=LK:
ii. 84; xxili.2; Jn.i. 15,30; vil. 25; ix.8sq.19; xviii.
21, 30; xxi. 21; Actsii. 15; iv. 10; ix. 21; according to
the nature and character of the person or thing men-
tioned, it is used with a suggestion—either of con-
tempt, as Mt. xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 2 sq.; Lk. v. 21; vii.
39,49; Jn. vi. 42,52; vii. 15; or of admiration, Mt.
xxi.11; Actsix. 21; cf. Wahl, Clavis apocryphor. V. T.
p- 370%. b. it refers to a subject immediately pre-
ceding, the one just named: Lk. i. 32; ii. 37 [RGL];
Jn.i. 2; vi.71; 2 Tim. iii. 6, 8, ete.; at the beginning of
a narrative about one already mentioned, Mt. iii. 3; Lk.
Xvi. 1; Jn. i.41.(42)5 lil. 2; xii. 21; xxi. 215 Acts vii.
19; xxi. 24. this one just mentioned and no other: Jn.
ix. 9; Acts iv. 10 (év ror) ; ix. 20; 1Jn.v.6; such as
I have just described, 2 Tim. iii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 17. kat
otros, this one just mentioned also, i. e. as well as the
rest, Lk. xx. 30 R GL; Heb. viii. 3. xat rodrov, and
him too, and him indeed, 1 Co. ii. 2. c. it refers to
the leading subject of a sentence although in position
more remote (W. § 23,1; [B.§ 127, 3]): Actsiv. 11;
vii. 19; viii. 26 (on which see Taga sub fin.); 1 Jn. v. 20
(where odros is referred by [many] orthodox interpre-
ters incorrectly [(see Alford ad loc.; W. and B. Il. ce.)]
to the immediately preceding subject, Christ); 2 Jn.
te d. it refers to what follows; odros, atrn éari, in
this appears ... that etc.; on this depends... that etc.:
foll. by dri, as adrn éoriv 7 éemayyeXla, drt, 1 Jn. i. 53 add,
v. 11, 14; by ta, Jn. xv. 12; 1 Jn. iii. 11, 23; v.38; 2 Jn.
6; rodré é€ort Td Epyov, Td GeAnua Tod Oeod, iva, Jn. vi. 29,
39 sq. e. it serves to repeat the subject with em-
phasis: od mavres of €& Iopann, obrot “Iopand, Ro. ix. 6;
add, ib. 8; ii. 14 [Lmrg. of rovodroe]; vii. 10; Gal. iii. 7;
it refers, not without special force, to a description given
by a participle or by the relative 6s, darts; which de-
scription either follows, as Mk. iv. 16, 18; Lk. viii. 15,
21; ix. 9; Jn. xi. 37; foll. by a relative sentence, Jn. i.
15; 1 Pet. v. 12;—-or precedes: in the form of a parti-
ciple, Mt. x. 22; xiii. 20, 22 sq.; xxiv. 13; xxvi. 23; Mk.
xii. 40; Lk. ix. 48 (6... imdpywv, odros); Jn. vi. 463
vii. 18; xv.5; 2Jn.9; Acts xvii.7; (and RG in Rev.
ill. 5); or of the relative ds, Mt. v.19; Mk. iii. 35; Lk.
ix. 24, 26; Jn. i. 33 [here Lmrg. aids]; iii. 26; v. 38.
e
OUTOS
Ro. viii. 30; 1 Co. vii. 20; Heb. xiii. 11; 1 Jn. ii. 5; 2 Pet.
il. 19; in the neut., Jn. viii. 26; Ro. vii.16 1 Co. vii. 24;
Phil. iv. 9; 2 Tim. ii. 2; or of a preceding doris, Mt.
Xvill. 4; in the neut. Phil. iii. 7. cou. . . odrow, Ro. viii.
14; Gal. vi. 12; also preceded by ed tis, 1 Co. iii. 17
[here Lehm. atrés]; viii. 3; Jas. i. 233 iii. 2; by éay tus,
ences | saci Wie Shady f. with atvrés annexed,
this man himself, Acts xxv. 25; plur. these themselves,
Acts xxiv. 15, 20; on the neut. see below, 2a.b.etc. —g.
As the relat. and interrog. pron. so also the demonstra-
tive, when it is the subject, conforms in gender and
number to the noun in the predicate: odroi etow of viol
tas Bao. Mt. xiii. 38; add, Mk. iv. 15 sq. 18; atdrn éorly
1) peyaAn evroAn, Mt. xxii. 38; odrds éorw 5 mAdvos (Germ.
diese sind), 2 Jn. 7. 2. The neuter rtodro a.
refers to what precedes: Lk. v.6; Jn. vi. 61; Acts xix.
17; rovro eirwy and the like, Lk. xxiv. 40 [T om. Trbr.
WH reject the vs.]; Jn. iv. 18; vili.6; xii. 33; xviii.
38; dua Tovro, see dia, B. IL. 2a.; ets rodro, see eds, B. II.
3c. B.; adrd rovro, for this very cause, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm.
aitoi]; cf. Matthiae § 470,7; Passow s. v. C.1 a. fin. ;
[L. and S. s. v.C. TX. 1 fin.; W. § 21, 3 note 2; Kiihner
§ 410 Anm. 6]; pera rodro, see perd, Il. 2b. ek rovrov,
for this reason [see éx, II. 8], Jn. vi. 66; xix. 12; from
this, 1. e. hereby, by this note, 1 Jn. iv. 6 [cf. Westcott ad
loc. ].
16; hereby, by this token, 1 Jn. iii. 19. emt rovre, in the
meanwhile, while this was going on [but see émi, B. 2 e.
fin. p. 234*], Jn. iv. 27. rovrov yap, Eph. iii. 14. plur.
tavta, Jn. vii. 4 (these so great, so wonderful, things);
pera ravra, see peta, Il. 2b. xara raira, in this same
manner, Rec. in Lk. vi. 23, and xvii. 30, [al. ra atdra or
tavra]|. it refers to the substance of the preceding dis-
course: Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27; xxiv. 26; Jn. v.34; xv. 11; xxi.
24, and very often. kxados... tadra, Jn. viil. 28. b.
it prepares the reader or hearer and renders him atten-
tive to what follows, which thus gets special weight (W.
§ 23,5): 1Jn. iv. 2; adrd rodro drt, Phil. i. 6; rodro Aéyo
foll. by direct discourse, Gal. iii. 17 [see Aéyw, II. 2 d.].
it is prefixed to sentences introduced by the particles
ért, va, etc.: roito A€éyw or dnpi foll. by drs, 1 Co. i. 12
[(see Aéyw u.s.); 1 Co. vii. 29]; xv. 50; ywaoxers rovro
foll. by drt, Ro. vi. 6; 2 Tim. iii. 1; 2 Pet. i. 20; ii. 3;
Royi¢er Oar rovTo Gre, Ro. ii. 3 ; after dpoAdoyetv, Acts xxiv.
14; after eiSas, 1 Tim. i. 9; év rovr@ dru, 1 Jn. iil. 16, 24;
iv. 9 sq.; Todo, iva, Lk. i. 43; els rovro, tva, Acts ix. 21;
Ro. xiv. 9; 2 Co. ii. 9; 1 Pet. iii. 9; iv.6; 1Jn. iii. 8; d:a
rovro, wa, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1 Tim. i. 16; Philem. 15; rovrwvy
(on this neut. plur. referring to a single object see W.
162 (153); [cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 41]), iva, 3
Jn. 4; év rovrw, édv, 1 In. ii. 3; drav, 1 Jn. v. 2; rovro
airé, iva, on this very account, that (see a. above [but oth-
ers take it here as acc. of obj.; see Meyer ad loc. (for
instances of avré rodro see B. § 127, 12)]), 2 Co. ii. 3;
els airé rovro, va, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; émes, Ro. ix.
17. Inthe same manner rodro is put before an infin.
with ré for the sake of emphasis [W. § 23, 5; B. § 140,
7,9, ete.]: 2 Co. ii. 1; before a simple infin. 1 Co. vil. 37
467
ev tovT@, for this cause, Jn. xvi. 30; Acts xxiv..
K
OUTOS
[here R G prefix rod to the inf.]; before an acc. and inf.
Eph. iv. 17; before nouns, as rodro evyoua, thy Suav
karapriow, 2 Co. xiii. 9, cf. 1 Jn. iii. 24; v. 4. Cc. Kat
tovro, and this, and that too, and indeed, especially: Ro.
xill. 11; 1 Co. vi. 6, LT Tr WH also in 8; Eph. ii. 8;
kal ravra, and that too, 1 Co. vi. 8 Rec.; Heb. xi. 12; (so
kai radra also in class. Grk.; ef. Devar. ed. Klotz i. p. 108 ;
Viger.ed. Herm. p. 176 sq.; Matthiae § 470, 6). d.
tavta, of this sort, such, spoken contemptuously of men,
1 Co. vi. 11 (cf. Soph. O. R. 1329; Thuc. 6, 77; Liv. 30,
30; ef. Bnhdy. p. 281; [W. 162 (153)]). €. TovUTo
pev...rovto dé, partly... partly, Heb. x. 33 (for exx.
fr. Grk. auth. see W. 142 (135); Matthiae ii. § 288
Anm. 2; [Kithner § 527 Anm. 2]).
see efui, II. 3 p. 176°.
II. Joined to nouns it is used like an adjective ; a.
so that the article stands between the demonstrative and
the noun, otros 6, aitn 7, rodro 7d, [cf. W. § 23 fin.; B.
§ 127, 29]: Mt. xii. 32; xvi.18; xvii. 21[T WHom. Tr
br. the vs.]; xx. 12; xxvi. 29; Mk. ix. 29; Lk. vii. 44; x.
36; xiv. 30; xv. 24; Jn. iv. 15; vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr
br. the cl.]; vii. 20; x. 65 xi. 47; xii1.5; Actsi. 11; Ro.
xi. 24151 Dimi. 185) Heb. vit. 15) viii. 10; [i Jn: iv. 21);
Rev. xix. 9; xx. 14; xxi. 5; xxii. 6, etc.; rovro 76 matdlov,
such a little child as ye see here, Lk. ix. 48; ef. Borne-
mann ad loc. [who takes rodro thus as representing the
class, ‘this and the like;’ but cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad
loc. ]. b. so that the noun stands between the arti-
cle and the demonstrative [cf. W. 548 (510) ]; as, of AcOou
ovrot, the stones which ye see lying near, Mt. iii. 9; iv.
3; add, Mt.v.19; vii. 24 [L Tr WH br. rovrovus ], 26, 28;
ix. 26 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. avris]; x. 23, ete.; Mk. xii. 16;
aE OE Iie sebaul 3 o:cbblh C65 dhs mya alah PUES abe )G SaG Oe
qlee ODS INC ab USS sabe WRG lator care O38 Il COs ANS
IIH ORT XI Oe) COnlvanl nism vills Oe xd. lO exile LS phe
ili. 8; v. 832; 2 Tim. ii. 19; Rev. ii. 24, and very often —
(which constr. is far more freq. with Paul than the other
[see W. u.s.]); it is added to a noun which has another
adjective, 7 xnpa 4 mrexy airy, Lk. xxi. 3; mdvra ra
pnyara tadra, Lk. ii. 19, 51 ((Y WH Lumrg. om. Ltxt. Tr
mrg. br. tadra) ; amo ths yeveas THs TKOALas TavTns, Acts
ii. 40]. c. Passages in which the reading varies
between otros 6 and 6... ovros: Viz. ovros 6, Mk. xiv.
30 Ltxt. T Tr WH; Jn. iv.20R Lmrg.; Jn. vi. 60RG;
Jn. vii. 36 RG; Jn. ix. 24 L WH Tr mrg.; Jn. xxi. 23
LT Tr WH. 6... obdros, Mk. xiv. 30 RGLmrg.; Jn.
iv. 20G Ltxt. T Tr WH; Jn. vi.60 L T Tr WH; Jn. vii.
36LT Tr WH; Jn. ix. 24 GT Tr txt.; Jn. xxi. 23 RG;
ete. d. with anarthrous nouns, esp. numerical
specifications [W. § 37, 5 N. 1]: tpirov rovro, this third
time, 2 Co. xiii. 1; rovdro tpirov, Jn. xxi. 14, (Judg. xvi.
15; Sedrepov rovro, Gen. xxvii. 36; rovro déxarov, Num.
xiv. 22 ; réraprov rovro, Hdt. 5, 76). [The passages which
follow, although introduced here by Prof. Grimm, are
(with the exception of Acts i. 5) clearly instances of the
predicative use of otros; cf. W. 110 (105) note; B.
§ 127, 31; Rost § 98, 3 A.c.a.sq.]: rodro radu Sevrepov
onpeiov éroingev, Jn. iv. 54; rpirny ravtny nuepay ayer,
AD
f. rovr ¢gortw,
of
OUTwW
this is the third day that Israel is passing [but see aya,
3], Lk. xxiv. 21 (keipas tpeaxooriy Tavtny npepay, this is
now the thirtieth day that I lie (unburied), Lcian. dial.
mort. 13, 3); ov pera modAds tavras jpépas (see perd, II.
2b. [W. 161 (152); B. § 127, 4]), Acts i. 5; obros pay
éxros éoriv avry, this is the sixth month with her etc. Lk.
i. 86; arn droypady mporn éyévero, Lk. ii. 2 L (T) Tr
WH; ravrnv éroinaev apxjy tov onpetwy, Jn. ii. 11 LT
Tr WH.
otrw and obras (formerly in printed editions ovr
appeared before a consonant, ovrws before a vowel; but
[recent critical editors, following the best Mss. (“cod.
Sin. has -rw but fourteen times in the N. T.” Scrivener,
Collation ete. p. liv.; ef. his Introduction etc. p. 561),
have restored ovrws; viz. Treg. uniformly, 205 times;
Tdf. 203 times, 4 times -rw ; Lchm. 196 times, 7 times -rw
(all before a consonant); WH 196 times, 10 times -rw
(all before a consonant); cf. Td/. Proleg. p. 97; WH.
App. p. 146 sq.]; cf. W. § 5,1b.; B. 9; [Lobd. Pathol.
Elementa ii. 213 sqq.]; cf. Kriiger § 11, 12, 1; Kiihner
§ 72, 3 a.), adv., (fr. obros), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for
12, in this manner, thus, so ; 1. by virtue of its na-
tive demonstrative force it refers to what precedes; i
the manner spoken of; in the way described; in the way
it was done; in this manner; in such a manner; thus, so:
Mt. vi. 30; xi. 26; xvii.12; xix. 8; Mk. xiv.59; Lk.i.
25; 11.48; xii. 28; Ro. xi. 5; 1 Co. viii. 12; xv.11; Heb.
vi. 9; [2 Pet. iii. 11 WH Tr mrg.]; odx otrws éorat [L
Tr WH éoriv (so also Tin Mk.) ] ev tpiv, it will not be
so among you (I hope), Mt. xx. 26; Mk. x. 43; tpeis ody
ovrws sc. éoecbe, Lk. xxii. 26; eav apapev adrov otras se.
mo.ovvra, thus as he has done hitherto [see dpinus, 2 b.],
Jn. xi. 48; it refers to similitudes and comparisons, and
serves to adapt them to the case in hand, Mt. v. 16 (even
so, i. e. as the lamp on the lamp-stand) ; Mt. xii. 45; xiii. °
49; xviii. 14; xx. 16; Lk. xii. 21 [WH br. the vs.]; xv.
7,10; Jn. ili. 8; 1 Co. ix. 24; likewise otras kai, Mt. xvii.
12; xviii. 35; xxiv. 33; Mk. xiii. 29; Lk. xvii. 10. ovdras
éxetv, to be so (Lat. sic or ita se habere): Acts vii. 1; xii.
15; xvii. 11; xxiv. 9. it serves to resume participles
(Joseph. antt. 8, 11,1; b.j.2, 8,5; see exx. fr. Grk. auth.
in Passow s.v.1h.; [L.and S.s.v.I.7]): Acts xx. 11;
xxvii. 17; but Jn. iv. 6 must not [with W. § 65, 9 fin.; B.
§ 144, 21] be referred to this head, see Meyer [and 5 d.
below]; on Rev. iii. 5, see 5c. below. it takes the place
of an explanatory participial clause, i. q. matters being
thus arranged, under these circumstances, in such a con-
dition of things, [B. § 149,1; ef. W. § 60, 5]: Ro. v. 12
(this connection between sin and death being established
[but this explanation of the odrws appears to be too gen-
eral (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]); Heb. vi. 15 (i.e. since God
had pledged the promise by an oath) ; i. q. things having
been thus settled, this having been done, then: Mt. xi. 26;
Acts vil. 8; xxviii. 14; 1 Co. xiv. 25; 1 Th.iv.17; 2 Pet.
i. 11; cf. Fritzsche, Com. ad Rom. i. p. 298. Closely
related to this use is that of obras (like Lat. ita for itaque,
igitur) im the sense of consequently [cf. Eng. so at the
beginning of a sentence]: Mt. vii.17; Ro. i. 15; vi. 11;
468
¢
OUT@
Rev. iii. 16, ([cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 220]; Passow s. v.
2; [L. and S. s. v. II.]). 2. it prepares the way
for what follows : Mt. vi. 9; Lk. xix. 31; Jn. xxi. 1; ovras
fv, was arranged thus, was on this wise, [W. 465 (434) ;
B. § 129, 11], Mt. i. 18; odras éori rd OéAnpa rod Geod foll.
by an infin., so is the will of God, that, 1 Pet. ii.15. be-
fore language quoted from the O. T.: Mt. ii.5; Acts vii.
6; xiii. 34, 47; 1 Co. xv. 45; Heb. iv. 4. 3. with
adjectives, so [Lat. tam, marking degree of intensity]:
Heb. xii. 21; Rev. xvi. 18; postpositive, ri desAoi éore
ovrws; Mk. iv. 40 [L Tr WH om.]; in the same sense
with adverbs, Gal. i. 6; or with verbs, so greatly, 1 Jn.
iv. 11; odrws ... Sore, In. iii. 16. ovd€more épdry ovTas,
it was never seen in such fashion, i. e. such an extraor-
dinary sight, Mt. ix. 33 (épdym must be taken imperson-
ally; cf. Bleek, Synopt. Erklar. i. p. 406 [or Meyer ad
loc.]); ovdemore otras cidoper, we never saw it so, i. e.
with such astonishment, Mk. ii. 12. 4. ovrws or
ovrws kai in comparison stands antithetic to an adverb
or a relative pron. [W. § 53,5; cf. B. 362 (311) ¢.]: Ka-
Odrep . . .ovtws, Ro. xii. 4.sq.; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii.
11; xaOas ... ovrws, Lk. xi. 80; xvii. 26; Jn. iii. 14;
Kiln o0K XIV. ols xv. 402 Co, ieasex. 5 le tea eps
v. 3; ovtws ... Kaas, Lk. xxiv. 24; Ro. xi. 26; Phil. iii.
17; os... ovrws, Acts viii. 832; xxiii. 11; Ro.v. 15, 18;
1 Co. vii. 17; 2Co. vii. 14; 1 Th. ii. 8; v. 2; ovras... as,
Mk. iv. 26; Jn. vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr br. the cl.]; 1 Co.
iii. 15; iv. 1; ix. 26; Eph. v. 28; Jas. ii. 12; ovrws as...
py os, 2Co.ix.5 [GL T Tr WH]; é0mep .. . otras, Mt.
Xi. £0); xii. 405 xxv. 27,.30,.39 5 doko xvite24e er Imeiwe
21,:26);\ Ros v= 12,19. 20 savpeal xd. Sie 1 Comxigl O\icva
22; xvi. 1; 2Co.i. 7 RG; Gal. iv. 29; Eph.v. 24 RG;
after xa’ décor, Heb. ix. 27 sq.; otras .. . dy rpdrov, Acts
i. 11; xxvii. 25; Ov tpdmov .. . ovrws, 2 Tim. iii. 8 Cs. lii.
14); xara thy 6ddv fy A€yovow aipeciy ovTw KTA. after the
Way (i. e. as it requires [cf. 68ds, 2 a. fin.]) so etc. Acts
xxiv. 14. 5. Further, the foll. special uses deserve
notice : a. (€yer) ds [better 6] pév ottws ds [better
6] d€ ovrws, one after this manner, another after that, i. e.
different men in different ways, 1 Co. vii. 7 (sroré pév
oUTas kal Tore OUT@S hdyerat 7) waxatpa, 2 S. xi. 25). b.
ovtas, in the manner known to all, i.e. ace. to the context,
so shamefully, 1 Co. v. 38. ce. in that state in which
one finds one’s self, such as one is, [ef. W. 465 (484)]: ri
He erroingas ovtas, Ro. ix. 20; ovrws eivat, péverv, of those
who remain unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 26, 40; 6 wxadv ovras
mepiBareirat Viz. as (i. e. because he is) victor [al. in the
manner described in vs. 4], Rev. iii.5 L T Tr WH. d.
thus forthwith, i. e. without hesitation [cf. Eng. offhand,
without ceremony, and the colloquial right, just]: In. iv.
6; cf. Passow s.v.4; [L.and S. s. v. IV.; see 1 above;
add Jn. xiii. 25 TWH Tr br. (cf. Green, Crit. Notes
ad loc.) ] e. in questions (Lat. sicine?) [Eng. ex-
clamatory so then, what]: Mk. vii. 18 (Germ. sonach) [al.
take ovrws here as expressive of degree. In Mt. xxvi.
40, however, many give it the sense spoken of; cf. too 1
Co. vi. 5]; otras amoxpivy ; i. €. so impudently, Jn. xviii.
22; with an adjective, so (very), Gal. iii. 3. [But these
oby, 469
exx., although classed together by Fritzsche also (Com.
on Mark p. 150 sq.), seem to be capable of discrimination.
The passage from Gal., for instance, does not seem to
differ essentially from examples under 3 above. ] f.
In class. Grk. obras often, after a conditional, concessive,
or temporal protasis, introduces the apodosis (cf. Passow
s.v.1h.; [L.and 8.s.v. I. 7]). 1 Th. iv. 14 and Rev.
xi. 5 have been referred to this head; B. 357 (307); [cf.
W. § 60, 5 (esp. a.)]. But questionably; for in the first
passage ovras may also be taken as equiv. to under these
circumstances, i. e. if we believe what I have said [better
cf. W.u.s.]; in the second passage otrws denotes in the
manner spoken of, i. e. by fire proceeding out of their
mouth.
ovx, see ov.
ovx{, i. q. od, not, but stronger [cf. yuvi ad init.] ; a.
in simple negative sentences, by no means, not at all,
PAS V- not]: Inexitt-10 sq.; xiv<22; 1 Co.v. 2; vi.1;
foll. by ddAd, 1 Co. x. 29; 2 Co. x. 13 (LT Tr WH otk);
in denials or contradictions [A. V. nay; not so], Lk. i.
CORPO OU -eXIInGs Ose XVI OOS) IROsiile? Te b. ina
question, Lat. nonne ? (asking what no one denies to be
true): Mt. v. 46 sq.; x. 29; xiii. 27; xx. 13; Lk. vi. 39;
xvii. 17[L Tr WH ody]; xxiv. 26; Jn. xi. 9; Acts ii. 7
Tr WH txt.; Ro. ii. 26 (LT Tr WH ody); 1 Co. i. 20;
Heb. i. 14, ete.; (Sept. for 857, Gen. xl. 8; Judg. iv.
6); adX odvyi, will he not rather, Lk. xvii. 8.
operrerns, -ov, 6, (dpeiAw), one who owes another, a
debtor: prop. of one who owes another money (Plat.
lege. 5,736 d.; Plut.; al.); with a gen. of the sum due,
Mt. xviii. 24. Metaph. a. one held by some obliga-
tion, bound to some duty: dedérns eit, i. q. dpeira, foll.
by an inf., Gal. v. 3 (Soph. Aj. 590); ded. eiui rwvos,
to be one’s debtor i.e. under obligations of gratitude to
him for favors received, Ro. xv. 27; rwi (dat. commodi),
to be under obligation to do something for some one,
Romie 4 evil. 12. b. one who has not yet made
amends to one whom he has injured: Mt. vi. 12; in imi-
tation of the Chald. 3°, one who owes God penalty or
of whom God can demand punishment as something due,
i.e. a sinner, Lk. xiii. 4.*
oer, -7s, 7, (dheidw), that which is owed; prop. a
debt: Mt. xviii. 32; metaph. plur. dues: Ro. xiii. 7;
spec. of conjugal duty [R. V. her due], 1 Co. vii. 3 GL
TTrWH. Found neither in the Grk. O. T. nor in
prof. auth.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 90.*
dhetAnpa, -ros, 76, (6heiAw), that which is owed ; a.
prop. that which is justly or legally due, a debt; so for
mNwD, Deut. xxiv. 12 (10); advevar, 1 Mace. xv. 8; dzo-
rivew, Plat. legg. 4 p. 717b.; drodidva, Aristot. eth.
Nic. 9, 2, 5 [p.1165%, 3]. xara dethnpa, as of debt, Ro.
iv. 4. b. in imitation of the Chald. 3)n or N2in
(which denotes both debt and sin), metaph. offence, sin,
(see ddetdérns, b.); hence, aprevar Twit Ta oped. avdrod, te
remit the penalty of one’s sins, to forgive them, (Chald.
p2n paw), Mt. vi. 12. [Cf. W. 30, 32, 33.]*
odhetho; impf. Sevdov; pres. pass. ptcp. dpPerddpevos 5
fr. Hom. down; to owe; a. prop. to owe money, be
dpOarpobovrcla
in debt for: rwi m1, Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. xvi. 5; without a
dat., Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 7; Philem. 18; 76
ogeddpevoy, that which is due, the debt, Mt. xviii. 30;
avré (which L Tr WHom.), that due to him, ib. 34. b.
metaph.: ri, pass. tiv evvorav dpeidopevny, the good-will
due [A. (not R.) V. due benevolence], 1 Co. vii. 3 Rec. ;
pndevi pndev oeirere (here ddeidere, on account of what
precedes and what follows, must be taken in its broadest
sense, both literal and tropical), ef py rd dAAnAous aya-
mav, owe no one anything except to love one another, be-
cause we must never cease loving and the debt of love
can never be paid, Ro. xiii. 8. absol. to be a debtor, be
bound: Mt. xxiii. 16,18; foll. by an inf. to be under obli-
gation, bound by duty or necessity, to do something; it be-
hoves one; one ought; used thus of a necessity imposed
either by law and duty, or by reason, or by the times, or
by the nature of the matter under consideration [acc. to
Westcott (Epp. of Jn. p. 5), Cremer, al., denoting obli-
gation in its special and personal aspects]: Lk. xvii. 10;
Jn. xiii. 145 xix. 7 (dpeider drobaveiv, he ought to die) ;
Acts xvii. 29; Ro. xv. 1, 27; 1 Co.v. 10; [vii. 36 (A. V.
need so requireth) |; ix.10; xi. 7,10; 2Co. xii. 14; Eph.
Wa 2S eZ bel Srel el Sis ELebateliismvaoeel onl nail aor
iii. 16; iv. 11; 3Jn. 8; dSPechov cuvicracba, I ought to
have been commended, i. e. I can demand commenda-
tion, 2 Co. xii. 11. ce. after the Chaldee (see ddesde-
ts, b., dpetdnua, b.), opeidw tii, to have wronged one
and not yet made amends to him [A. V. indebted], Lk.
xi.4. [Come.: mpoc-ofetra. ]*
Sedov (for Spedov, without the augm., 2 aor. of dheida;
in earlier Grk. with an inf., as pedo Oaveiv, I ought to
have died, expressive of a wish, i. q. would that I were
dead; in later Grk. it assumes the nature of an inter-
jection, to be rendered) would that, where one wishes
that a thing had happened which has not happened, or
that a thing be done which probably will not be done
[cf. W. 301 sq. (283); B. § 150, 5]: with an optative
pres. Rey. iii. 15 Ree.; with an indicative impf., Rev.
ibid. GL T Tr WH; 2 Co. xi. 1, (Epict. diss. 2, 18, 15;
Ienat. ad Smyrn. c. 12); with an indic. aorist, 1 Co. iv.
8 (Ps. exviii. (cxix.) 5; dpedov dmeOavoper, Ex. xvi. 3;
Num. xiv. 2; xx. 3); with the future, Gal. v. 12 (Lcian.
soloec. [or Pseudosoph.] 1, where this construction is
classed as a solecism). Cf. Passow ii. p. 603°; [L. and
S. s. v. odeida, II. 3].*
SdheXos, -ovs, 7d, (6HEAXw to increase), advantage, profit:
1 Co. xv. 32; Jas. ii. 14,16. (From Hom. down; Sept.
Job xv. 3.) *
dh0adpo-Sovrcla [T WH -Aia; see I, ¢], -as, 7, (6pOar-
podovdos, Constit. apost. [4, 12, Coteler. Patr. Apost.] i.
p- 299%; and this fr. épOadyds and doddos), [A. V. eye-
service i. e.] service performed [only] under the master’s
eye (uy Kar’ dpOadpod., rovréote pi pdvov mapdvray Tay
deomoréy Kal épavrav, addAa Kal amdvror, Theophyl. on
Eph. vi 6; “for the master’s eye usually stimulates to
greater diligence; his absence, on the other hand, ren-
ders sluggish.” H. Stephanus): Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 22.
Not found elsewhere; [cf. W. 106 (9¢97*
opOarpos
dpOarpds, -o0, 6, [fr. r. dm to see; allied to dns, dpo-
pa, etc.; Curtius § 627], Sept. for jy, [fr. Hom. down],
the eye: Mt. v. 38; vi. 22; Mk.ix.47; Lk. xi. 34; Jn.
ix. 6; 1Co. xii. 16; Rev. vii.17; xxi.4, and often; pumy
opbarpod, 1 Co. xv. 52; of dpbarpoi pov eidov (see the
remark in yAéooa, 1), Lk. ii. 30; cf. iv. 20; x. 23; Mt.
xiii. 16; 1Co.ii.9; Rev.i.7; [dveBreyar ot bpOarpot
Mt. xx. 34 RG]; ideiv rots opO., Mt. xiii. 15; Jn. xii. 40;
Acts xxviii. 27; dpav rois oO. (see dpdw, 1), 1 Jn. i. 1;
4) embupia rev opé. desire excited by seeing, 1 Jn. ii. 16.
Since the eye is the index of the mind, the foll. phrases
have arisen: 6f0. cov movnpds eorw, i. e. thou art envious,
Mt. xx. 15; of8. movnpds, envy, Mk. vii. 22 (yy yr, an
envious man, Prov. xxiii. 6; xxviii. 22; cf. Sir. xxxiv.
13; JNX3 JPY. Ay, thine eye is evil toward thy
brother, i. e. thou enviest [grudgest] thy brother, Deut.
xv. 9; dO. movnpds POovepds én’ dpro, Sir. xiv. 10; py
pboverdrw cov 6 opG. Tob. iv. 7; the opposite, dyabds
opOarpds, is used of a willing mind, Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.)
10, 12); on the other hand, dfadpos rovnpéds in Mt. vi.
23 is a diseased, disordered eye, just as we say a bad eye,
a bad finger [see movnpos, 2 a. (where Lk. xi. 34)]. kpa-
rely Tovs OPO. Tod pn KTA. [A. V. to hold the eyes i. e.]
to prevent one from recognizing another, Lk. xxiv. 16;
UroAapBave Tia amd Tov 6PO. Twos, by receiving one to
withdraw him from another’s sight [A. V. received him
out of their sight], Acts i. 9. Metaph. of the eyes of the
mind, the faculty of knowing: éexpvBn dro trav oO. cov,
hid from thine eyes, i. e. concealed from thee [cf. B. 320
(274) ], Lk. xix. 42; diddvar tii opOadpods Tod pry Brérrevy,
to cause one to be slow to understand, Ro. xi. 8 [cf. B.
267 (230)]; rupdovy rovs opO. twos, Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn.
ii. 11; ckorigovrar of op. Ro. xi. 10; mehwricpevor opOar-
pot ths Siavoias [cf. B. § 145, 6], Eph. i. 18 Rec.; rijs
kapdias (as in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2), ibid. GL T Tr
WH; ev dpOadpois tivos (7D 12 y3 [cf. B. § 146, 1 fin.]),
in the judgment [cf. our view] of one, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk.
xii. 115 ov« €ore te arévavte tev OPO. twos, to neglect a
thing (cf. our leave, put, out of sight), Ro. iii. 18; yuuvdr
€oTi TL Tois op. Tivos (see yupvds, 2a.), Heb. iv. 13; of
opd. rod Kupiov émt Sukaiovs (sc. eme- [or dmo-] BAérovcw,
which is added in Ps. x. (xi.) 4), are (fixed) upon the
righteous, i. e. the Lord looks after, provides for them,
1 Pet. iii. 12. Other phrases in which é6¢6adpds occurs
may be found under dvoiyw p. 48°, dmdovs, Siavolyw 1,
eEopioow 1, emaipw p. 228°, cappto, potyaris a., mpoypd-
do 2.
Opis, -ews, 6, [perh. named fr. its sight; cf. Spdkey,
init., and see Curtius as s. v. dpOaApds]; fr. Hom. Il. 12,
208 down; Sept. mostly for wm3; @ snake, serpent: Mt.
vii. 10; Mk. xvi. 18; Lk. x. 19; xi. 113; Jn. iii. 14; 1 Co.
x. 9; Rey. ix.19; with the ancients the serpent was an
emblem of cunning and wisdom, 2 Co. xi. 3, cf. Gen. iii.
1; hence, dpcvpor ds oi dpers, Mt. x. 16 [here WH mrg.
6 dgus]; hence, crafty hypocrites are called ges, Mt.
xxiii. 33. The serpent narrated to have deceived Eve
(see Gen. u. s.) was regarded by the later Jews as the
devil (Sap. ii. 23 sq. cf. 4 Mace. xviii. 8); hence he is
470
oyAos
called 6 dqus 6 dpxatos, 6 dus: Rev. xii. 9, 14 sq.; xx.
2; see [Grimm on Sap. u.s.; Fr. Lenormant, Beginnings
of History etc. ch. ii. p. 109 sq., and] dpdkwv.*
opts, -vos, 7, 1. the eyebrow, so fr. Hom. down.
2. any prominence or projection; as [Eng. the brow] of
a mountain (so the Lat. supercilium, Verg. georg. 1,
108; Hirt. bell. afr.58; Liv. 27,18; 34,29): Lk. iv. 29
(Hom. Il. 20, 151; often in Polyb., Plut., al.).*
[6XeErTOs, -ov, 6, 1. a water-pipe, duct. 2. the
intestinal canal: Mk. vii. 19 WH (rejected) mrg. (al.
adpedpov).*]
oxA€w, -@ : pres. pass. ptcp. dyAovpevos; (dxAos) ; prop.
to excite a mob against one; [in Hom. (Il. 21, 261) to dis-
turb, roll away]; univ. to trouble, molest, (rwa, Hdt. 5, 41;
Aeschyl., al.); absol. to be in confusion, in an uproar, (3
Mace. v. 41); pass. to be vexed, molested, troubled: by
demons, Lk. vi. 18 R GL (where T Tr WH évoyaA., —the
like variation of text in Hdian. 6, 3,4); Acts v. 16;
Tob. vi. 8 (7); Acta Thomae §12. [Comp.: év-, rap-
€-0xéw. |*
6xAo-rroL€w, -@: 1 aor. ptcp. dxAomomncas ; (6xAos, mrotew) ;
to collect a crowd, gather the people together: Acts xvii. 5.
Not found elsewkere.*
éxAos, -ov, 6, in the N. T. only in the historical bks.
and five times in the Rev.; asin Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and
Aeschyl. down, a crowd, i.e. 1. a casual collec-
tion of people; a multitude of men who have flocked to-
gether in some place, a throng : Mt. ix. 23, 25; xv. 10, etc.;
Mk. ii. 4; iii. 9, and often; Lk. v. 1,19; vii. 9,etc.; Jn.
v. 13; vi. 22, 24; vii. 20, 32,49, etc.; Actsxiv. 14; xvii.
8; xxi. 34; rls ek rod dxAov, Lk. xi. 27; xii. 13; or amd
Tov dyAov, xix. 39; ix. 38; amd (for i.e. on account of
[ef. awd, Il. 2b.]) +. 6xAov, Lk. xix. 3; 7 Bia r. ydov,
Acts xxi. 35; moAvs dyAos and much oftener dyAos modus,
Mt. xiv. 14; xx. 29; xxvi.47; Mk. v.21, 24; vi. 34; ix.14;
xiv. 43 [here T Tr WHom. L Tr mrg. br. woA.]; Lk. vii.
11; viii. 4; ix.37; Jn. vi. 2,5; xii. 12 [but here Trmrg.
br. WH prefix 6; cf. B. 91 (80)]; Rev. xix. 1,6; with
the art. 6 moAvs dyX., the great multitude present, Mk. xii.
37; [6 dyAos odds (the noun forming with the adj. a sin-
gle composite term, like our) the common people, Jn. xii. 9
TWH Trmrg.; cf. B. u.s.; some would give the phrase
the same sense in Mk. 1.c.]; mdpaodus, Mk. viii. 1 [Rec.];
ixavés, Mk. x. 46; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26; xix. 26; 6
mAcioros OxX. [the most part of the multitude], Mt. xxi. 8;
mas 6 oxn., Mt. xiii. 2; Mk. ii. 13; iv. 15 vii. 14 [Rec.]; ix.
15; xi. 18; Lk. xiii. 17; Acts xxi. 27; dyX. rocodros, Mt.
Xv. 33; al pupiddes Tov dyA. Lk. xii. 1; od pera dyAov, not
having a crowd with me, Acts xxiv. 18; drep dyXov, in the
absence of the multitude [(see drep) ], Lk. xxii.6. plur.
oi dyAou, very often in Mt. and Lk., as Mt. v. 1; vii. 28;
ix. 8, 33, 36; xi. 7; xii. 465 xiii. 34, 36, ete.; Lk. iii. 7,
10; iv. 42; v.33 viii. 42, 45; ix. 11; xi. 14, ete.; Acts
viii. 6; xiii. 45 ; xiv.11,13, 18 sq.; xvii. 13; once in Jn.
vii. 12 [where Tdf. the sing.]; in Mk. only vi. 33 Rec.;
and without the art. Mk. x. 1; dyAoe moAdol, Mt. iv. 25;
Vili. 15 xii.15 [RG]; xiii. 2; xv.30; xix. 2; Lk. v.15;
xiv. 25; mdvres of dydor, Mt. xii. 23. 2. the multi
oxyvpapa
tude i.e. the common people, opp. to the rulers and lead-
ing men: Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26; Mk. xii.12; [Jn. vii. 12>
(provided the plur. is retained in the first part of the
vs.) ]; with contempt, the ignorant multitude, the populace,
Jn. vii. 49; emiovoracis dyXov, a riot, a mob, Acts xxiv.
12[L T Tr WH eémicracis (q. v.) dy.]. 3. univ. a
multitude : with a gen. of the class, as rekavav, Lk. v. 29;
pabntayv, Lk. vi. 17; dvoudrav (see dvopa, 3), Acts i. 15;
tay iepéwv, Acts vi. 7; the plur. dxAor, joined with Aaoi
and €6yn, in Rev. xvii. 15 seems to designate troops of
men assembled together without order. (Sept. chiefly
for jini.)
ox bpwpa, -ros, rd, (6xupdo [to make strong, to fortify]) ;
1. prop. a castle, stronghold, fortress, fastness, Sept. for
21D, etc.; very often in 1 and 2 Macc.; Xen. Hellen.
35 2503: 2. trop. anything on which one relies: ka-
Ocire rd dxvpwpa, ef’ @ émemoiBecay, Prov. xxi. 22; oxv-
popa dciov PdBos kvpiov, Prov. x. 29; in 2 Co. x. 4 of
the arguments and reasonings by which a disputant en-
deavors to fortify his opinion and defend it against his
opponent.*
Oaprov, -ov, rd, (dimin. fr. dyor [cf. Curtius § 630]
i. e. whatever is eaten with bread, esp. food boiled or
roasted ; hence specifically), fish: Jn. vi. 9, 11; xxi. 9 sq.
13. (Comic. ap. Athen. 9,c. 35 p. 385 e.; Leian.,Geop.
(ef. Wetstein on Jn. vi. 9]; see yuvatxdproy, fin. [W. 23
(22)].)*
dpe, (apparently fr. dis ; see dice, init.), adv. of time,
after a long time, long after, late ; a. esp. late in the
day (sc. ths jpépas, which is often added, as Thue. 4, 93 ;
Xen. Hellen. 2, 1, 23), i.e. at evening (Hom., Thuc.,
Elateeale for yemy scene xxiv. 11): eMikoexi. (jt 2
Tr mrg.WH txt. (cf. Plut. Alex. 16,1)],19; xiii.35. —b.
with a gen. [W. § 54, 6], oé caBBdra», the sabbath having
just passed, after the sabbath, i.e. at the early dawn of the
first day of the week — (an interpretation absolutely
demanded by the added specification r7 éemipwox. xri.),
Mt. xxviii. 1 cf. Mk. xvi. 1 (dé trav Bacthéws ypdver,
long after the times of the king, Plut. Num. 1; dpe
pvotnpiov, the mysteries being over, Philostr. vit. Apoll.
4,18); [but an examination of the instances just cited
(and others) will show that they fail to sustain the ren-
dering after (although it is recognized by Passow, Pape,
Schenkl, and other lexicographers) ; de foll. by a gen.
seems always to be partitive,denoting late in the peri-
od specified by the gen. (and consequently still belong-
ing to it), cf. B. § 132, 7 Rem.; Kihner § 414, 5¢. 8.
Hence in Mt. J. c. ‘late on the sabbath’]. Keim iii.
p. 552 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. 303 sq.] endeavors to relieve
the passage differently [by adopting the Vulg. vespere
471
; ovr@veov
sabbati, on the evening of the sabbath], but without sne-
cess. [(Cf. Keil, Com. iiber Matth. ad loc.)]*
dpipos, -ov, (de), late, latter, (Hom. Il. 2, 325; oWreper
Tatos omdpos, Xen. oec. 17, 4 sq.; ev rots dwipous rev Odd
tev, of the time of subsidence of the waters of the Nile,
Diod. 1, 10; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51 sq.]): oy. derds, the
latter or vernal rain, which falls chiefly in the months of
March and April just before the harvest (opp. to the
autumnal or mpwipos (cf. B. D.s. v. Rain]), Jas. v. 7 [but
LT Tr WH om. deréy, cod. Sin. and a few other authorie
ties substitute xapmdv]; Sept. for wAPID, Deut. xi. 14;
Jer. v. 24; Hos. vi. 3; Joel ii. 23; Zech. x. 1.*
Sos, -a, -ov, (dWe), late; 1. as an adjective
({Pind.,] Thuc., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.; [Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 51 sq.]): 9 épa, Mk. xi.11 [but T Tr mrg. WH
txt. de, q. v.] (dwia év veri, Pind. Isthm. 4, 59). 2.
contrary to the usage of prof. auth. 7 dyia as a subst.
(sc. dpa [cf. W. 591 sq. (550); B. 82 (71)]), evening:
i. e. either from our three to six o’clock p. m., Mt. viii.
16; xiv. 15; xxvii.57; Mk. iv. 35; or from our six o’clock
p. M. to the beginning of night, Mt. xiv. 23; xvi. 2
there T br. WH reject the pass.]; xx. 8; xxvi. 20; Mk.
1.32; vi.47; xiv.17; xv.42; Jn. vi. 16; xx. 19, (hence
D'3y 73, between the two evenings, Ex. xii. 6; xvi
12; xxix. 39 [cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p. 1064 sq. (and
addit. et emend. p. 106); B. D.s.v. Day]). Besides
only in Judith xiii. 1.*
dis, -ews, 7, (ONTO, syropar [cf. 6fOarpyds]), fr. Hom.
down; Sept. chiefly for 741 ; 1. seeing, sight 2.
face, countenance: Jn. xi. 44; Rev. i. 16. 3. the
outward appearance, look, [many lexicographers give
this neuter and objective sense precedence]: xpivew kar’
oye, Jn. vil. 24-*
ébaviov, -ov, 76, (fr. dyrov — on which see dyadpror, init.
—and dvéouat to buy), a later Grk. word (cf. Sturz, De
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187; Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 418),
prop. whatever is bought to be eaten with bread, as fish,
flesh, and the like (see dWapiov). And as corn, meat,
fruits, salt, were given to soldiers instead of pay (Caes.
b. g. 1, 23, 1; Polyb. 1, 66 sq.; 3, 13, 8), éyaomov began
to signify 1. univ. a soldier’s pay, allowance,
(Polyb. 6, 39,12; Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 36), more com-
monly in the plur. [W.176 (166); B. 24 (21)] opana,
prop. that part of a soldier’s support given in place of
pay [i. e. rations] and the money in which he is paid
(Polyb. 1, 67, 1; 6, 39, 15; 1 Mace. ili. 28; xiv. $2; 1
Esdr. iv. 56; Joseph. antt. 12, 2, 3): Lk. ili. 14; 1 Co.
ix. 7 [ef. W. § 31, 7 d.]. 2. metaph. wages: sing.
2 Co. xi. 8; ris duaprias, the hire that sin pays, Ro. vi
23.*
472
I
f
maryudevo
mayiSeso: 1 aor. subj. 3d pers. plur. maydeiowoww;
madapior
Christ is said to be wa6yrés and daOys in Ignat. ad Eph.
(mayis, q. Vv.) ; a word unknown to the Greeks; to en- | 7, 2; ad Polye. 3, 2).*
snare, entrap: birds, Eccl. ix. 12; metaph., ria év eye,
of the attempt to elicit from one some remark which can
be turned into an accusation against him, Mt. xxii. 15.
([rots Adyous, Prov. vi. 2 Graec. Venet.; cf. also Deut.
vii. 25; xii. 30 in the same]; 1S. xxviii. 9.) *
mayls, -i80s, 7, (fr. myyvupe to make fast, 2 aor. émayor ;
prop. that which holds fast [cf. Anth. Pal. 6, 5]), Sept.
for na, NY, wpin, ete.; a@ snare, trap, noose; a.
prop. of snares in which birds are entangled and
caught, Prov. vi. 5; vii. 23; Ps. xe. (xci.) 3; exxiii.
(exxiv.) 7; mayiSas iordva, Arstph. av. 527; hence as
mayls, aS a snare, i.e. unexpectedly, suddenly, because
birds and beasts are caught unawares, Lk. xxi. 35. b.
trop. a snare, i. e. whatever brings peril, loss, destruction:
of a sudden and unexpected deadly peril, Ro. xi. 9 fr.
Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 23; of the allurements and seductions
of sin, éumimreny els metpacpov k. mayida, 1 Tim. vi. 9 (éumi-
mret eis rayida duaptodds, Prov. xii. 13, cf. xxix. 6; joined
with oxdvSadov, Sap. xiv. 11); rod dScaBddov, the allure-
ments to sin by which the devil holds one bound, 2 Tim.
ii. 26; 1 Tim. iii. 7. (In Grk. writ. also of the snares
of love.) *
wd0npa, -ros, 76, (fr. mabciv, macxo, as pdOnua fr. pa-
deiv), fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down ; 1. that which one
suffers or has suffered; a. externally, a suffering,
misfortune, calamity, evil, affliction: plur., Ro. viii. 18;
2 Co. i. 6 sq.; Col. i. 24; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Heb. ii-10; x.
32; 1 Pet. v.95; 7a els Xprordv, that should subsequently
come unto Christ [W. 193 (182)], 1 Pet. i. 113 rod
Xptcrov, which Christ endured, 1 Pet. v. 1; also the
afflictions which Christians must undergo in behalf of
the same cause for which Christ patiently endured, are
called raOjpara rod Xpcrod [W. 189 (178) note], 2 Co.
i..5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 13. b. of an inward
state, an affection, passion: Gal. v. 24; rév duapridy,
that lead to sins, Ro. vii. 5. 2. iq. Td macyew (see
«adxnua, 2), an enduring, undergoing, suffering, (so the
plur. in Arstph. thesm. 199) : @avdrov, gen. of the obj.,
Heb. ii. 9. [Syn. cf. dos, init.] *
mands, -, -dv, (do xe, mabeir) ; 1. passible (Lat.
patibilis, Cic. de nat. deor. 3, 12, 29), endued with the
capacity of suffering, capable of feeling; often in Plut., as
maOntov capa. 2. subject to the necessity of suffer-
ing, destined to suffer, (Vulg. passibilis): Acts xxvi. 23
(with the thought here respecting Christ as maOnrds
compare the similar language of Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr.
cc. 36, 39, 52, 68, 76, 89); cf. W. 97 (92); [B. 42 (37)];
(so in eccl. writ. also, ef. Otto’s Justin, Grk. index s. v.;
ad8os, -ovs, Td, (nabeiv, tdoxw), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; i.q. méOnua (q- v.; [the latter differs fr. raOos (if
at all) only in being the more individualizing and con-
crete term; cf. Schmidt, Syn. ch. 24 § 11]); uF
whatever befalls one, whether it be sad or joyous; spec.
a calamity, mishap, evil, affliction. 2. a feeling which
the mind suffers, an affection of the mind, emotion, pas-
sion; passionate desire; used by the Greeks in either a
good or a bad sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 4 [cf. Cope,
Introd. to Aristotle’s Rhet. p. 183 sqq.; and his note on
rhet. 2, 22,16]). In the N. T. in a bad sense, depraved
passion: Col. iii. 5; wdOn dripias, vile passions, Ro. i. 26
(see dripia) ; év mdGec émOvpias, [in the passion of lust],
gen. of apposit. [W. § 59, 8 a.], 1 Th. iv. 5.*
[Syn. rd 00s, €rcOuula: x. presents the passive, éz. the
active side of a vice; é. is more comprehensive in meaning
than 7.; ém. is (evil) desire, r. ungovernable desire. Cf.
Trench § lxxxvii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 5.]
maiSaywyds, -od, 6, (fr. mais, and dywyds a leader, es-
cort), fr. Hdt. 8, 75 down; a tutor (Lat. paedagogus)
i. e. a guide and guardian of boys. Among the Greeks
and Romans the name was applied to trustworthy slaves
who were charged with the duty of supervising the life
and morals of boys belonging to the better class. The
boys were not allowed so much as to step out of the
house without them before arriving at the age of man-
hood; cf. Fischer s. v. in index i. to Aeschin. dial. Socr.;
Hermann, Griech. Privatalterthiimer, § 34, 15 sqq.;
[Smith, Dict. of Grk. and Rom. Antiq. s. v.; Becker,
Charicles (Eng. trans. 4th ed.), p. 226 sq.]. They are
distinguished from of d.8acxador: Xen. de rep. Lac. 3, 2;
Plat. Lys. p. 208 ¢c.; Diog. Laért. 3,92. The name car-
ries with it an idea of severity (as of a stern censor
and enforcer of morals) in 1 Co. iv. 15, where the
father is distinguished from the tutor as one whose
discipline is usually milder, and in Gal. iii. 24 sq. where
the Mosaic law is likened to a tutor because it arouses
the consciousness of sin, and is called matdayayds eis
Xpucréy, i. e. preparing the soul for Christ, because those
who have learned by experience with the law that they
are not and cannot be commended to God by their
works, welcome the more eagerly the hope of salvation
offered them through the death and resurrection of
Christ, the Son of God.*
Tasdpiov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of gais, see yuvatkdptov), a
little boy, a lad: Mt. xi.16 Rec.; Jn. vi. 9. (Arstph.,
Xen., Plat., sqa.; Sept. very often for 33/3, also for 39):
Ta.oéla
{matdapror of an adult youth, Tob. vi. 2, ete. (cf. 11 sq.)].)
[Syn. see mais, fin. ]*
model, (Tdf. -ia; [see I, «]), -as, 4, (raided), Sept.
for 7031 ; 1. the whole training and education of
children (which relates to the cultivation of mind and
morals, and employs for this purpose now commands
and admonitions, now reproof and punishment) : Eph.
vi. 4 [ef. W. 388 (363) note]; (in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl.
on, it includes also the care and training of the body.)
[See esp. Trench, Syn. § xxxii.; cf. Jowett’s Plato, in-
dex s. v. Education]. 2. whatever in adults also
cultivates the soul, esp. by correcting mistakes and curbing
the passions ; hence a. instruction which aims at the
increase of virtue: 2 Tim. iii. 16. b. ace. to bibl.
usage chastisement, chastening, (of the evils with which
God visits men for their amendment): Heb. xii. 5 (Prov.
iii. 11), 7 sq. [see tropeva, 2 b.], 11; (Prov. xv. 5, and
often in the O. T.; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch. on Sap.
p- 51; [ef. (Plat.) defin. madela+ Sivayus Oeparevtixh
vuxns])*
madevTHs, -00, 6, (madevo) ; 1. an instructor, pre-
ceptor, teacher: Ro. ii. 20 (Sir. xxxvii. 19; 4 Mace. v. 34;
Plat. legg. 7 p. 811 d., ete.; Plut. Lycurg. c. 12, ete.; Diog.
Laért. 7, 7). 2. a chastiser: Heb. xii. 9 (Hos. v. 2;
Psalt. Sal. 8, 35).*
madevw ; impf. eraidevov; 1 aor. ptcp. maidevoas; Pass.,
pres. maevouar; 1 aor. emawdevOnv; pf. ptep. memadev-
pévos; (mais); Sept for 70°; 1. as in class. Grk.
prop. to train children: twa with a dat. of the thing in
which one is instructed, in pass., copia [ W. 227 (213) n.],
Acts vii. 22 RGL WH {cf. B. § 134, 6] (ypappaovr,
Joseph. ce. Ap. 1, 4 fin.) ; év codia, ibid. T Tr; rua kara
axpiBecav, in pass., Acts xxii. 3. Pass. to be instructed or
taught, to learn: foll. by an inf., 1 Tim. i. 20; to cause
one to learn: foll. by iva, Tit. ii. 12. 2. to chas-
tise ; a. to chastise or castigate with words, to cor-
rect: of those who are moulding the character of others
by reproof and admonition, 2 Tim. ii. 25 (rid radedew
kai pudpite Ady, Ael. v. h. 1, 34). b. in bibl. and
eccl. use employed of God, to chasten by the infliction of
evils and calamities (cf. W. § 2,1b.J: 1 Co. xi. 32; 2 Co.
vi.9; Heb. xii. 6; Rev. iii. 19, (Prov. xix. 18; xxix. 17;
Sap. iii. 5; xi. 10 (9); 2 Mace. vi. 16; x. 4). c. to
chastise with blows, to scourge: of a father punishing a
son, Heb. xii. 7, [10]; of a judge ordering one to be
scourged, Lk. xxiii. 16, 22, [(Deut. xxii. 18)].*
mardid0ev, (radiov), adv., from childhood, from a child,
(a later word, for which the earlier writ. used é« maidds,
Xen. Cyr. 5, 1, 2; or ék wardiov, mem. 2, 2, 8; or €« mar-
diay, oec. 8, 10; [cf. W. 26 (25); 463 (431)]): Mk. ix.
21, where LT Tr WH ek raididdev [cf. Win. § 65,2].
(Synes. de provid. p. 91b.; Joann. Zonar. 4, 184 a.).*
mauSiov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of mais), [fr. Hdt. down], Sept.
for 0, Wd, f3, ete.; a young child, a little boy, a little
girl; plur. ra radia, infants; children; litile ones. In
sing.: univ., of an infant just born, Jn. xvi. 21; of a
(male) chi/d recently born, Mt. ii. 8 sq. 11, 13, 14, 20 sq.;
Lk. i. 59, 66, 76, 80; ii. 17, 21 [Rec.], 27, 40; Heb. xi. 23;
473
Tats
of a more advanced child, Mt. xviii. 2, 4 sq.; Mk. ix. 36
sq.; [x.15]; Lk. ix. 47sq.; [Lk. xviii. 17]; of a mature
child, Mk. ix. 24; rwds, the son of some one, Jn. iv. 49; of
a girl, Mk. v.39-41; [vii.30 Ltxt.T Tr WH]. In plur.
of (partly grown) children: Mt. xi.16GLT Tr WH;
Xiv. 21; xv. 38; xviii. 3; xix.13sq.; Mk. vii. 28; x. 13
sqq.; Lk. vii. 32; xviii. 16; [Heb. ii. 14]; rus, of some
one, Lk. xi. 7, cf. Heb. ii. 13. Metaph. radia rats ppeci,
children (i. e. like children) where the use of the mind is
required, 1 Co. xiv. 20; in affectionate address, i. q. Lat.
carissimi [A. V. children], Jn. xxi. 5; 1Jn.ii. 14 (18), 18;
[iii. 7 WH mrg. Syn. see mais, fin.]*
madicKn, -ns, 7, (fem. of madioxos, a young boy or
slave; a dimin. of mais, see veavicxos) ; 1. a young
girl, damsel, (Xen., Menand., Polyb., Plut., Leian.; Sept.
Ruth iv. 12). 2. a maid-servant, a young female
slave; cf. Germ. Mddchen [our maid] for a young fe-
male-servant (Hdt. 1, 93; Lys., Dem., al.) : Lk. xii. 45;
Acts xvi. 16; opp. to 9 édevdépa, Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30
sq.; spec. of the maid-servant who had charge of the
door: Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 66, 69; Lk. xxii. 56; Acts
xii. 135 9 m. 7 Ovpopés, Jn. xviii. 17; (also in the Sept.
of a female slave, often for HaX, MMdwW). Cf. Lod. ad
Phryn. p. 239. [Syn. see sais, fin.] *
waite; fr. Hom. down; prop. to play like a child;
then univ. to play, sport, jest; to give way to hilarity, esp.
by joking, singing, dancing; so in 1 Co. x. 7, after Ex.
xxxli. 6 where it stands for Dry, as in Gen. xxi. 9; xxvi.
8; Judg. xvi. 25; also in the Sept. for pny. [Comp. :
ép-rraiga. | *
mais, gen. maids, 6, 7, fr. Hom. down; in the N. T. only
in the Gospels and Acts; 1. a child, boy or girl;
Sept. for 1y3 and A yi (Gen. xxiv. 28; Deut. xxii. 15,
ete.) : émais, Mt. xvii. 18; Lk. ii. 43; ix. 42; Acts xx.
12; 7 mais, Lk. viii. 51, 54; plur. infants, children, Mt. ii.
16 ; xxi. 15; 6 wats Twos, the son of one, Jn. iv. 51. 2.
(Like the Lat. puer, i. q.) servant, slave, (Aeschyl. cho-
éph. 652; Arstph. nub. 18, 132; Xen. mem. 3, 13, 6;
symp. 1,11; 2, 23; Plat. Charm. p. 155 a.; Protag. p.
310c. and often; Diod. 17, 76; al.; so Sept. times with-
out number for 32 [cf. W. p. 30, no. 3]; ef. the similar
use of Germ. Bursch, [French gargon, Eng. boy]): Mt.
viii. 6, 8,13; Lk. vii. 7 cf. 10; xii.45; xv. 26. an attends
ant, servant, spec. a king’s attendant, minister: Mt. xiv.
2 (Diod. xvii. 36; hardly so in the earlier Grk. writ. ;
Gen. xli. 87 sq.; 1S. xvi. 15-17; xviii. 22, 26; Dan. ii.
7; 1 Mace. i. 6, 8; 1 Esdr. ii. 16; v. 33, 35); hence, in
imitation of the Hebr. 7", 12), mais rod Oeod is used of
a devout worshipper of God, one who fulfils God’s will,
(Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 18; exii. (exiii.) 1; Sap. ii. 13, ete.) ;
thus, the people of Israel, Lk. i. 54 (Is. xli. 8; xlii. 19;
xliv. 1 sq. 21, etc.) ; David, Lk. i. 69; Acts iv. 25, (Ps.
xvii. (xviii.) 1; xxxv. (xxxvi.) 1 [Ald., Compl.], ete.) ;
likewise any upright and godly man whose agency God
employs in executing his purposes; thus in the N.T. Jesus
the Messiah: Mt. xii. 18 (fr. Is. xlii. 1) ; Acts iii. 13, 26;
iv. 27, 30, [cf. Harnack on Barn. ep. 6,1 and Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2]; in the O. T. also Moses, Neh. i. 7 sq-;
Taiw
the prophets, 1 Esdr. viii. 79 (81); Bar. ii. 20, 24; and
others.*
[S¥yN. mats, rarddptov, mardioy, matdlaonn, TEKVOV:
The grammarian Aristophanes is quoted by Ammonius (s. v.
yépwr) as defining thus: wardlov, 7d tpepdmevoy bmd 717-
you: matddapiov d¢, Td Hdn mepimatooy Kal THS Aé~ews GvTeE-
xbpevov: matdiokos 3,6 ev 7h exouevn nAulas matisd 6
did. TeV eyKvKAlwv pabnudtwy Svvduwevos iévat. Philo (de mund.
opif. § 36) quotes the physician Hippocrates as follows: ev
avopdmov pice éwrd cio Gpat K.7.A.° maidloy wev eat &xpis
énrds erav, dddyTwv exBorts: Tats dt &xpi yovijs expioews, eis
re dis émrd: jeipdxioy dé Uixpt yevelou Aaxvadcews, és Ta Tpls
émrd. etc. According to Schmidt, ma:dfoy denotes exclusive-
ly a little child; ma:ddpoy a child up to its first school years ;
mais a child of any age; (madicxos and) madioxn, in which
reference to descent quite disappears, cover the years of late
childhood and early youth. But usage is untrammelled:
froma child isexpressed either by é« ma:5ds (most frequently),
or éx maidlov, or ek (ard) maidapiov. mats and réxvoy denote a
child alike as respects descent and age, reference to the latter
being more prominent in the former word, to descent in
réxvov; but the period wa?s covers is not sharply defined ;
and, in classic usage as in modern, youthful designations
cleave to the female sex longer than to the male. See
Schmidt ch. 69; Héhne in Luthardt’s Zeitschrift u. s. w. for
1882, p. 57 sqq.]
maiw: 1 aor. ématca; from Aeschyl. and Hdt. down;
Sept. mostly for 7371; to strike, smite: with the fists,
Mt. xxvi. 68 [cf. paige, 2]; Lk. xxii. 64; with a sword,
Mk. xiv. 47: Jn. xviii. 103; to sting (to strike or wound
with a sting), Rev. ix. 5.*
Tlaxarvavt, -7s, 7, Pacatiana (Phrygia). Inthe fourth
century after Christ, Phrygia was divided into Phrygia
Salutarisand Phrygia Pacatiana [later, Capatiana]; Lao-
dicea was the metropolis of the latter: 1 Tim. vi. 22 (in
the spurious subscription). [Cf. Forbiger, Hndbch. d.
alt. Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 338, 347 sq.; Bp. Lghtft. on
Col., Introd. (esp. pp. 19, 69 sq.).]*
adda, adv. of time, fr. Hom. down; 1. of old:
Heb. i. 1; (as adj.) former, 2 Pet.i.9. [mddar properly
designates the past not like mpiv and mpédrepov rela-
tively, i. e. with a reference, more or less explicit, to
some other time (whether past, pres., or fut.), but sim-
ply and absolutely.] 2. long ago: Mt. xi. 21;
Lk. x. 13; Jude 4; so also of time just past, Mk. xv. 44
[A. V. any while] (where L Tr txt. WH txt. #8n); 2 Co.
xu. 19 LT Tr WH [R. V. all this time], (so in Hom. Od.
20, 293; Joseph. antt. 14, 15, 4).*
Tahatds, -d, -dv, (mda, q. v.), fr. Hom. down ; 1.
old, ancient, (Sept. several times for jw and pny):
olvos mahaids (opp. to véos), Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.]
(Hom. Od. 2, 340; Sir. ix. 10); ScaOjan, 2 Co. iii, 14;
évroA (opp. to caw), given long since, 1 Jn. ii. 7; un
(opp. to véov pip.), 1 Co. v. 7sq.; neut. plur. wadaud (opp.
to xawd), old things, Mt. xiii. 52 (which seems to allude to
such articles of food as are fit for use only after having
been kept some time [al. consider clothing, jewels, etc.,
as referred to; cf. @ncavpés, 1 ¢.]; dropping the fig., old
and new commandments; cf. Sir. xxiv. 23; Heb. v. 12
8qq-); 6 madaids judv dvOpwros (opp. to 6 véos), our old
474
TanuyyEever ia
man, i. e. we, as we were before our mode of thought,
feeling, action, had been changed, Ro. vi. 6 ; Eph. iv. 22;
[Col. iii. 9]. 2. no longer new, worn by use, the
worse for wear, old, (for 7193, Josh. ix. 10 (4) sq-):
indrvov, doxds, Mt. ix. 16 sq.; Mk. ii. 21 sq.; Lk. v. 39
sq. [Sy¥N. see dpyaios, fin.]*
madaérns, -nTos, 4, (madaids), oldness: ypdpparos, the
old state of life controlled by ‘the letter’ of the law, Ro.
vii. 6; see kawvdrns, and ypdppa, 2c. ({Eur.], Plat., Aes-
chin., Dio Cass. 72, 8.) *
mahadw, -@: pf. memadaiwxa; Pass., pres. ptep. madat-
ovpevos ; fut. maravwOnoopuar; (madards) 5 a. to make
ancient or old, Sept. for 13; pass. to become old, to be
worn out, Sept. for 173, pay: of things worn out by
time and use, as Baddvriov, Lk. xii. 33 ; iudrvov, Heb. i. 11
(Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Deut. xxix.5; Josh. ix. 19 (13); Neh.
ix. 21; Is. 1. 9; li. 6; Sir. xiv. 17). pass. rd madatovpe-
voy, that which is becoming old, Heb. viii. 13 (Plat. symp.
p: 208 b.; Tim. p. 59c.). b. to declare a thing to be
old and so about to be abrogated: Heb. viii. 13 [see yy
paca, fin.].*
waAn, -ns, 9, (fr. maAXw to vibrate, shake), fr. Hom.
down, wrestling (a contest between two in which each
endeavors to throw the other, and which is decided when
the victor is able OAiBew xai xaréxew his prostrate antag-
onist, i. e. hold him down with his hand upon his neck ;
cf. Plat. legg. 7 p. 796; Aristot. rhet. 1, 5, 14 p. 1361°,
24; Heliod. aethiop. 10, 31; [ef. Krause, Gymn. u. Agon.
d. Griech. i. 1 p. 400 sqq.; Guhl and Koner p. 219 sq.;
Dict. of Antiq. s. v. lucta]); the term is transferred to
the struggle of Christians with the powers of evil: Eph.
Vien
madtyyeveria (T WH radivyev. [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 77
bot.]), -as, 7, (maw and yéveors), prop. new birth, repro-
duction, renewal, re-creation, (see Halm on Cic. pro Sest.
§ 140), Vulg. and Augustine regeneratio; hence, moral
renovation, regeneration, the production of a new life con-
secrated to God, a radical change of mind for the better,
(effected in baptism [cf. reff. s. v. Bartucpa, 3]): Tit.
iii. 5 [ef. the Comm. ad loc. (esp. Holtzmann, where see
p- 172 sq. for reff.); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. esp. §§ 84, 108;
cf. Suicer, Thes. s. v.]. Commonly, however, the word
denotes the restoration of a thing to its pristine state, its
renovation, as the renewal or restoration of life after
death, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 41; de cherub. § 32; [de
poster. Cain. § 36]; Long. past. 3, 4 (2) (maduyy. éx Oavd-
tov); Leian. encom. muscae 7; Schol. ad Soph. Elec. 62
(IIv6aydpas wept madvyyevecias éreparevero); Plut. mor.
p- 998 c. [i. e. de esu carn. ii. 4,4] (Gre xpSvrat xowwots ai
Pouxai capaow év rais maduyyevecias [cf. ibid. i. 7, 5;
also de Is. et Osir. 72; de Ei ap. Delph. 9; ete.]); the
renovation of the earth after the deluge, Philo de vita
Moys. ii. § 12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 4; the renewal of
the world to take place after its destruction by fire, as
the Stoics taught, Philo [de incorrupt. mundi §§ 3, 14,
17]; de mund. §15; Antonin. 11, 1 [(cf. Gataker ad
loc.) ; Zeller, Philos. d. Griech. iii. p. 138]; that signal
and glorious change of all things (in heaven and earth)
TaNwv
for the better, that restoration of the primal and perfect
condition of things which existed before the fall of our
first parents, which the Jews looked for in connection
with the advent of the Messiah, and which the primi-
tive Christians expected in connection with the visible
return of Jesus from heaven: Mt. xix. 28 (where the
o Ya ° o
Syriac correctly {2a [aSts, in the new age or
world) ; cf. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeorum, p. 214 Sq.3
Gfrorer, Jahrhundert des Heils, ii. p- 272 sqq.; [Schiirer,
Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29, 9; Weber, Altsynagog. Palist.
Theol. § 89]. (Further, the word is used of Cicero’s
restoration to rank and fortune on his recall from exile,
Cic. ad Att. 6,6; of the restoration of the Jewish nation
after the exile, wad. arpidos, Joseph. antt. 11, 3,9; of the
recovery of knowledge by recollection, radvyy. rijs yvd-
Gews €otiv 7 avauynots, Olympiodor. quoted by Cousin in
the Journal des Savans for 1834, p. 488.) [Cf Trench
§ xviii.; Cremer 3te Aufl. s. v.]*
awédwv, adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. anew, again, [but
the primary meaning seems to be back; cf. (among oth-
ers) Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v. ii. p. 485]; a. joined
to verbs of all sorts, it denotes renewal or repetition
of the action: Mt.iv.8; xx.5; xxi. 36; xxii.1,4; Mk.
TiS eilion? Ore eK Xd 2O|s1e) Ms IeSOS Vl seville: 2.8, 19>
Pe eiXcn Om dan Xe LOM ACES SV 2) XXVALs 29s GEO. xT, 23%
ju Comyinosn2,\ Co: xi. 165) Galli: 93118 > Iv. 195" 2 Pet.
ii. 20; Phil. ii. 28; iv. 4; Heb.i. 6 (where wadw is tacitly
opposed to the time when God first brought his Son into
the world, i. e. to the time of Jesus’ former life on earth) ;
Heb. v.12; vi. 1,6; Jas. v.18; Rev. x. 8, 113; madw puxpdv
se. ora, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; eis rd waduy, again (cf. Germ.
zum wiederholten Male; [see eis, A. II. 2 fin.]), 2 Co. xiii.
2; with verbs of going, coming, departing, returning,
where again combines with the notion of back ; thus with
dyopev, Jn. xi. 7; dvaxywpeiv, Jn. vi. 15 [where Tdf. hevyer
and Grsb. om. wddw], (cf. ib. 3) ; amépxerOat, Jn. iv. 3; x.
40; xx. 10; eioépyeoOa, Mk. ii. 1; iii.1; Jn. xviii. 33;
xix. 9; €&épyecOa, Mk. vii. 31; épyecOar, Jn. iv. 46; xiv.
8; 2Co.i. 16; xii. 21 [cf. W. 554 (515) n.; B.§ 145, 2a.];
tmdyew, Jn. xi. 8; dvaxdurrev, Acts xviii. 21; dcarepay,
Mk. v. 21; imoorpépew, Gal. i. 17; 7 eu) mapovoia madw
mpos wpas, my presence with you again, i.e. my return to
you, Phil. i. 26 [ef. B. $125, 2]; also with verbs of tak-
ing, Jn. x. 17sq.; Acts x. 16 Rec.; xi. 10. b. with
other parts of the sentence: maw eis pdBov, Ro. viii. 15;
mad év Av, 2 Co. ii. 1. c. mddw is explained by
the addition of more precise specifications of time [cf.
W. 604 (562)]: mddw &k tpirov, Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Trmrg.
br. é« tp.]; x Sevtépov, Mt. xxvi. 42; Acts x. 15; mddw
devrepov, Jn. iv. 54; xxi. 16; madw dvader, again, anew,
[R. V. back again (yet cf. Mey. ad loc.)], Gal. iv. 9 (Sap.
xix. 6; mddw é& dpyjs, Arstph. Plut. 866; Plat. Eut. p.
11 b.and 15c.; Isoc. areiop. 6 p. 338 [p. 220 ed. Lange];
Gio \WWotbEE 2. again, i.e. further, moreover, (where
the subject remains the same and a repetition of the action
or condition is indicated): Mt. v. 33 (#aAw jKxovcare) ;
xiii. 44 (where T Tr WH om. L br. radw), 45, 47; xix.
475
TAVOLKL
24; LK. xiii. 20; Jn. x. 7 [not Tdf.]; esp. where to O. T.
passages already quoted others are added: Mt. iv. 7;
Jn. xii. 39; xix. 37; Ro. xv. 10-12; 1 Co. iii. 20; Heb.
i, 5; ii. 13; iv. 5; x. 30; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 3 sq. and
often in Philo; cf. Bleek, Br. a.d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 108. 3.
in turn, on the other hand: Lk. vi.43 T WH L br. Tr br.;
1 Co. xii. 21; 2 Co. x.7; 1dn. ii. 8, (Sap. xiii. 8 ; xvi. 23;
2 Mace. xv. 39; see exx. fr. prof. auth. in Papes. v. 2;
Passow s.v. 3; [Ellendt u. s. (ad init.); L. and S. s. v.
II.; but many (e. g. Fritzsche and Meyer on Mt. iv. 7)
refuse to recognize this sense in the N. T.]). John uses
mddw in his Gospel far more freq. than the other N. T.
writ., in his Epp. but once; Luke two or three times;
the author of the Rev. twice.
madwyeverla, see madiyyevecia.
wopmdndel (I WH aavrad. [cf. WH. App. p. 150]),
adv., (fr. the adj. raprAnOns, which is fr. mas and Anos),
with the whole multitude, all together, one and all: Lk.
xxiil. 18 (Dio Cass. 75, 9,1). [Cf. W. § 16, 4 B. a.]*
mwépmodus, mapmoAdn, mdaumodv, (was and moAvs), very
great: Mk. viii. 1 Rec. [where LT Tr WH mddw roddod].
(Arstph., Plat., Plut., [al.].) *
Tlapevala, -as,7, Pamphylia, a province of Asia Minor,
bounded on the E. by Cilicia, on the W. by Lycia and
Phrygia Minor, on the N. by Galatia and Cappadocia,
and on the S. by the Mediterranean Sea (there called
the Sea [or Gulf] of Pamphylia [now of Adalia]): Acts
ii. 10; xill. 13; xiv. 24; xv. 38; xxvii. 5. [Conybeare
and Howson, St. Paul, ch. viii.; Lewin, St. Paul, index
s. v.; Dict. of Geogr. s. v.]*
mavSoxevs, see ravOoyxevs.
mav-SoKiov, see travOoyxelov.
arav-Soxetov (-Soxiov, Tdf. [cf. his note on Lk. x. 34, and
Hesych. s. v.]), -ov, 7d, (fr. mavdoyevs, q. V-), an inn, a
public house for the reception of strangers (modern
caravansary, khan, manzil): Lk. x. 34. (Polyb. 2, 15,
5; Plut. de sanit. tuenda c. 14; Epict. enchirid. ¢. 11;
but the Attic form mavdoxeiov is used by Arstph. ran.
550; Theophr. char. 11 (20), 2; Plut. Crass. 22; Pa-
laeph. fab. 46; Ael.v.h. 14, 14; Polyaen. 4, 2, 3; Epict.
diss. 2, 23, 36 sqq.; 4, 5,15; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 307.) *
mrav-Sox evs, -€ws, 6, (ras and d¢xopuat [hence lit. ‘one who
receives all comers ’]}), for the earlier and more elegant
mavdoxevs (so Tdf.; [ef. W. 25 note]), an inn-keeper, host:
Lk. x. 85. (Polyb. 2, 15,6; Plut. de sanit. tuenda
ec. 14.) *
TAVTHYyvpts, -€WS, nN (fr. mas and adyupts in dyetpo), fr.
Hat. and Pind. down ; a. a festal gathering of the
whole people to celebrate public games or other solemni-
ties. b. univ. a public festal assembly; so in Heb.
xii. 22 (23) where the word is to be connected with
dyyédov [so GL Tr (Tdf.); yet see the Comm.]. (Sept.
for tyin, Ezek. xlvi. 11; Hos. ii. 11 (13); ix.55 TI¥y,
Am. v. 21.) [Cf. Trench §i.]*
mavouxt [so RGL Tr] and mavorxei (T[WH; see WH.
App. p. 154 and cf. et, t}), on this difference in writing cf.
W. 43 sq.; B. 73 (64), (was and ofkos; a form rejected
by the Atticists for ravockia, mavorxecia, mavorxnota, [cf. W.
qavoTrAla
26 (25); Lob. ad Phryn. p. 514 sq.]), with all (his) house,
with (his) whole family: Acts xvi. 34. (Plat. Eryx. p.
392¢c.; Aeschin. dial. 2,1; Philo de Joseph. § 42; de
vita Moys. i. 2; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 42; 5,1,2; 3 Mace.
iii. 27 where Fritzsche -kia.) *
mavorAta, -as, 9, (fr. mavorhos wholly armed, in full
armor; and this fr. was and émdov), full armor, complete
armor, (i. e. a shield, sword, lance, helmet, greaves, and
breastplate, [cf. Polyb. 6, 23, 2 sqq.]): Lk. xi. 22; Aeov,
which God supplies [W. 189 (178)], Eph. vi. 11, 13,
where the spiritual helps needed for overcoming the
temptations of the devil are so called. (Hadt., Plat.,
Isocr., Polyb., Joseph., Sept. ; trop. of the various appli-
ances at God’s command for punishing, Sap. v. 18.) *
mavoupyla, -as, 7, (mavoipyos, q. V.), crafliness, cunning :
Lk. xx. 23; 2Co. iv. 2; xi. 3; Eph. iv. 14; contextually
i.g. @ specious or false wisdom, 1 Co. iii. 19. (Aeschyl.,
Soph., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Leian., Ael., al.; maod re éme-
arnun xopiCouern Sixacoovuys Kal Ths GAAns aperns mavoup-
yia ob copia paiverar, Plat. Menex. p. 247 a. for TD 1p
in a good sense, prudence, skill, in undertaking and carry-
ing on affairs, Prov. i. 4; viii. 5; Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv. 11)
10.) *
mavotpyos, -ov, (ras and EPTQ i. q. epydfouar; on the
accent, see kaxodpyos), Sept. for DINY; skilful, clever,
1.5, 1. in a good sense, fit to undertake and accom-
plish anything, dexterous ; wise, sagacious, skilful, (Aris-
tot., Polyb., Plut., al.; Sept. Prov. xiii. 1; xxviii. 2).
But far more freq. 2. in a bad sense, crafty, cun-
ning, knavish, treacherous, deceitful, (Tragg., Arstph.,
Plat., Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 32 (31) [but here in a good
sense]; xxi. 12, etc.): 2 Co. xii. 16.*
mwavrdnbel, see mapymAnbet.
mavraxf or ravray7 (L Tr WH; see eixi), adv., every-
where: Acts xxi. 28 L T Tr WH, for ravrayod, — a varia-
tion often met with also in the Mss. of prof. auth. [From
Hadt. down; ef. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 64.] *
from all sides, from every quarter :
Mk. i. 45 Rec. [Hdt., Thuc., Plat., al.]*
mavraxod, adv., everywhere: Mk. i. 28 T WH Tr br.;
xvi. 203 Lk. ix. 6; Acts xvii. 30; xxi. 28 Ree.; xxiv.
3; xxvili. 22; 1Co.iv.17. [Soph., Thuc., Plat., al.]*
mavteAns, -€s, (mas and rédos), all-complete, perfect,
(Aeschyl., Soph., Plat., Diod., Plut., al. ; 3 Mace. vii. 16) ;
eis TO mavtehés (prop. unto completeness [W. § 51,1 c¢.])
completely, perfectly, utterly: Lk. xiii. 11; Heb. vii. 25,
(Philo leg. ad Gaium 21; Joseph. antt. 1, 18,5; 3, 11,
3 andl 2 We WG pe ,98 si aplos 3 se AClocvn Didoe Oster a liv:
ON
mévrn (RG LTr WH rary, see reff. s. v. etxq), (ras),
adv., fr. Hom. down, everywhere; wholly, in all respects,
in every way: Acts xxiv. 3.*
mavrobev, (ras), adv., fr. Hom. down, from all sides,
from every quarter: Mk. i. 45 LT WH Tr [but the last
named here mavrdev; cf. Chandler § 842]; Lk. xix.
43; Jn. xviii. 20 Rec.bez¢lz; Heb. ix. 4.*
TAVTOKPATWP, -opos, 6, (nis and kparéw), he who holds
sway over all things; the ruler of all; almighty: of God,
mavTaxdbev, adv.,
476
Z
Tapa
2Co. vi. 18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 35); Rev.i. 8; iv.
8; xi. 17; xv. 3; xvi. 7,14; xix. 6,15; xxi. 22. (Sept.
for ninay in the ieee MINDY TM or ANDY “TON Je-
hovah or God of hosts; also for *w; Sap. vii. 25; Sir.
xlii. 17; 1. 14; often in Judith and 2 and 3 Mace. ; An-
thol. Gr. iv. p. 151 ed. Jacobs; Inscrr.; eccles. writ.
[e. g. Teaching etc. 10,3; cf. Harnack’s notes on Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. init. and the Symb. Rom. (Patr. apost. opp.
i. 2 p. 134)].)*
advrore, (7as), adv., (for which the Atticists tell us
that the better Grk. writ. used éxdorore; cf. Sturz, De
dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187 sq.; [W. 26 (25)]), at all
times, always, ever: Mt. xxvi. 11; Mk. xiv. 7; Lk. xv.
SU sexviliils In. vis $45evil, 65 “vill. 2959x442 yess)
XVviii. 20* [20° Rec.*]; Ro. i. 10 (9); 1Co.i.45 xv. 58;
2 Co. ii. 14; iv. 10; v. 63 [vii. 14 Lmrg.]; ix. 8; Gal.
iv. 18; Eph. v. 20; Phil. i. 4, 20; [iv.4]; Col. i. 3; iv.
6, [12]; 1 Th. 25 1/165 [HLIG)s av11 75 fv. 1006] 2
Th. i. 3, 11; ii. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 7; Philem. 4; Heb. vii.
25. (Sap. xi. 2221); xix.17 (18); Joseph., Dion. Hal.,
Plut., Hdian. 3, 9, 13 [(7 ed. Bekk.)]; Artem. oneir. 4,
20; Athen., Diog. Laért.) *
méyrws, (from mas), adv., altogether (Latin omnino),
i.e. a. in any and every way, by all means: 1 Co.
ix. 22 (so fr. Hdt. down). b. doubtless, surely, cer-
tainly: Lk. iv. 23; Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; xxi. 22; xxviii.
4; 1 Co. ix. 10, (Tob. xiv. 8; Ael.v. h.1, 32; by Plato
in answers [cf. our colloquial by all means]). G
with the negative ov, a. where ov is postpositive, in
no wise, not at all: 1 Co. xvi. 12 (often so as far back as
Hom.). B. when the negative precedes, the force of
the adverb is restricted : ov mavtws, not entirely, not al-
together, 1 Co. v. 10; not in all things, not in all respects,
Ro. iii. 9; (rarely i. q. mavras od, as in Ep. ad Diogn. 9
‘God od ravras enddpevos Tots duaptnpacw juav.’ Like-
wise ovdev mavrws in Hdt. 5,34. Butin Theogn. 305 ed.
Bekk. of kakoi od mdvrws kaxol ex yaorpds yeydvact KTR. is
best translated not wholly, not entirely. Cf. W. 554
(515) sq.; B. 389 (834) sq. [on whose interpretation of
Ro. l.c., although it is that now generally adopted, see
Weiss in Meyer 6te Aufl.]).*
mapa, [it neglects elision before prop. names begin.
ning with a vowel, and (at least in Tdf.’s text) before
some other words; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95, cf. W. § 5,1 .;
B. 10], a preposition indicating close proximity,
with various modifications corresponding to the various
cases with which it is joined; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p.
643 sqq.; Matthiae § 588; Bnhdy. p. 255 sqq.; Kiihner
$440; Kriiger § 68, 34-36. It is joined
I. with the GenrTIVE; and as in Grk. prose writ.
always with the gen. of a person, to denote that a
thing proceeds from the side or the vicinity of one, or
from one’s sphere of power, or from one’s wealth or
store, Lat. a, ab; Germ.von... her, von neben; French
de chez; [Eng. =e beside, ‘eck Sept. for “90, Tn,
Syxn (1 S. xvii. 30); cf. W. 364 (342) sq. a. prop-
erly, with a suggestion of union of place or of residence,
after verbs of. coming, departing, setting out,
Tapa
ete. (cf. French venir, partir de chez quelqwun) : Mk. xiv.
43; Lk. viii. 49 [here Lchm. dxé]; Jn. xv. 26; xvi. 27;
xvil. 8; [sap hs exBeBAnker Era Saysdvia, Mk. xvi. 9 L Tr
txt. WH]; eivar rapa Beod, of Christ, to be sent from God,
Jn. ix. 16, 33; to be sprung from God (by the nature of
the Adyos), vi. 46 ; vii. 29 (where for the sake of the con-
text kaxeivds we dréoredev [Tdf. dréoradker] is added) ;
Povoyevous mapa marpds 8c. dvros, Jn. i. 14; eori te mapa
Twos, is given by one, Jn. xvii. 7 [ef. d. below]. b.
joined to passive verbs, zapd makes one the author, the
giver, etc. [W. 365 (343); B. § 134, 1]; so after. dzo-
orehheoOa, Jn. i. 6 (the expression originates in the
fact that one who is sent is conceived of as having been
at the time with the sender, so that he could be selected
or commissioned from among a number and then sent
off) ; yiveoOa, Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 11 (mapa xupiov,
from the Lord, by divine agency or by the power at
God’s command) ; akin to which is ov« dduvarnoe: mapa
tov Oeod may pnya, Lk.i. 37 L mrg. T Tr WH [see ddvva-
tew, b.]; AadetoOa, Lk. i. 45 (not id, because God had
not spoken in person, but by an angel) ; xarnyopeic6at,
Acts xxii. 30 Rec. (not i76 [yet so L T Tr WH] because
Paul had not yet been formally accused by the Jews, but
the tribune inferred from the tumult that the Jews ac-
cused him of some crime). c. after verbs of seek-
ing, asking, taking, receiving, buying, [cf. W.
870 (347) n.; B. § 147,5; yet see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i.
12]; as, airé, airodya, Mt. xx. 20 (where L Tr txt. WH
txt. dw’ adrod) ; Jn. iv. 9; Acts iii.2; ix. 2; Jas.i.5; 1Jdn.
yv. 15 (where L T Tr WH dm atrov); (yr, Mk. viii. 11;
Lk. xi. 16; xii. 48; AapBavo, Mk. xii. 2; In. v. 34, 41,
AA eX SACS Oo zelila OP XVI: 95 XX. 24 > xxvii LOK
Jas. i. 7; 2 Pet.i.17; 1 Jn. iii. 22 (LT Tr WH dm airod);
2Jn.4; Rev. ii. 28 (27); mapadapBave, Gal. i.12; 1 Th.
ii. 13; iv. 1; dmroAapBavo, Lk. vi. 34 RGLTrmrg.;
kopiCoua, Eph. vi. 8; yiverai poi re, Mt. xviii. 19; dexo-
pa, Acts xxii. 5; Phil. iv. 18; yo, Actsix. 14; dvéopar,
Acts vii. 16; dyopdfopa, Rev. iii. 18; also after dprov
hayeiv (sc. d00évra), 2 Th. iil. 8; evpetv eAeos, 2 Tim. i.
18; gra xdpis, 2 Jn. 3. after verbs of hearing, as-
certaining, learning, making inquiry; as, dkovw
tt, In. i. 40 (41); vi. 45 sq. 3 vil. 515; vill. 26,40; xv. 15;
Acts x. 22; xxviii. 22; 2 Tim. i. 13; ii. 2; muv@dvopat,
Mt. ii. 4; Jn. iv. 52; dxpiBa, Mt. ii. 16; emeywaookw, Acts
xxiv. 8; pavOdve, 2 Tim. iii. 14. d. in phrases in
which things are said etva: or ef€pyecOa from one:
Lk. ii. 1; vi. 19; Jn. xvii. 7 [see a. above]. e. 6,
i, To mapa twos [see 6, II. 8; cf. B. § 125, 9; W. § 18,
Sil5 a. absol.: of map’ avrod, those of one’s family,
i. e. his kinsmen, relations, Mk. iii. 21 (Sus. 33; one’s de-
scendants [yet here Vulg. gui cum eo erant], 1 Mace. xiii.
52; [Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 5]); ef. Fritzsche ad loc. p.
101; [Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.]; 7a mapa twos,
what one has beside him, and so at his service, i. e. one’s
means, resources, Mk. v. 265 Ta Tapa TWeV, SC. dvTa, i. e.
dodévra, Lk. x. 7; Phil. iv. 18; [cf. W. 366 (343); Joseph.
antt. 8, 6,63; b.j. 2, 8,4; ete.]. B. where it refers
toa preceding noun : 7 é€ovaia 7 mapd Twos, sc. received,
ATT
Tapa
Acts xxvi. 12 [R G]; énuxoupias rijs mapa (LT Tr WH
amd) rod Oeod, Acts xxvi. 22 (} mapa twos evvoua, Xen.
mem. 2, 2,12); map’ euod diaOnen, of which I am the
author, Ro. xi. 27 [ef. W. 193 (182)].
II. with the Dative, rapa indicates that something is
or is done either in the immediate vicinity of some one,
or (metaph.) in his mind, near by, beside, in the power of,
in the presence of, with, Sept. for Sys (1 K. xx. (xxi.) 1;
Prov. viii. 30), 3 (Gen. xliv. 16 sq.; Num. xxxi. 49),
7Ya (see b. below) ; cf. W. § 48, d. p. 394 sq. (369); [B.
339 (291 sq.) ]. a. near, by: eiatnkevoay mapa TO
oravp, Jn. xix. 25 (this is the only pass. in the N. T.
where rapa is joined with a dat. of the thing, in all
others with a dat. of the person). aftera verb of mo-
tion, to indicate the rest which follows the motion [cf. B.
339 (292)], €ornoev adré rap éavr@, Lk. ix. 47. b.
with, i. e. in one’s house; in one’s town; in one’s society:
EevifecOa [q. v.], Acts x. 6; xxi. 163 pévew, of guests
or lodgers, Jn. i. 39 (40); iv. 40; xiv. 17, 25; Acts ix.
43; xviii. 3,20 [RG]; xxi. 7sq.; émpevew, Acts xxviii.
14 LT Tr WH; kxaradtvew, Lk. xix. 7 (Dem. de corona
§ 82 [cf. B. 339 (292)]); dpworav, Lk. xi. 37; drodeinew
tt, 2 Tim. iv. 13; mapa r@ Oe@, dwelling with God, Jn.
vill. 38; i.q.in heaven, Jn. xvii. 5; puoOdv éyewv, to have
a reward laid up with God in heaven, Mt. vi. 1; edpeiv
xapw (there where God is, i. e. God’s favor [cf. W. 365
(348)]), Lk. i. 30; a pers.is also said to have ydpus mapa
one with whom he is acceptable, Lk. ii. 52; rodro ydpus
mapa Ged, this is acceptable with God, pleasing to him,
1 Pet. ii. 20 (for *yy3, Ex. xxxiii. 12,16; Num. xi. 15);
mapa O¢6, in fellowship with God (of those who have
embraced the Christian religion and turned to God from
whom they had before been estranged), 1 Co. vii. 24;
mapa xupi@ (in heaven), before the Lord as judge, 2 Pet.
ii. 11 [@ Lom. and Tr WH br. the phrase]; map" ipiv,
in your city, in your church, Col. iv. 16; w. a dat. plur.
i. q. among, Mt. xxii. 25; xxviii. 15; Rev. ii. 13; map’
éavt@, at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2. ce. map’ (L Tr WH
txt. €v) éavr@, with one’s self i. e. in one’s own mind, dia-
Aoyifer Oa, Mt. xxi. 25. d. a thing is said to be or
not to be mapa tim, with one, a. which belongs to his
nature and character, or is in accordance with his prac-
tice or the reverse; as, pi adixia mapa te Oe@ 5 Ro. ix. 14;
add, Ro. ii. 11; 2Co.i.17; Eph. vi. 9; Jas. i. 17. B.
which is or is not within one’s power: Mt. xix. 26; Mk.
x. 27; Lk. xviii. 27, cf. 1.87 RG L txt. e. mapa Ti,
with one i. e. in his judgment, he being judge, (so in Hat.
and the Attic writ.; cf. Passow s. v. II. 2, vol. ii. p.667 ;
[L. and S.s. v. B. II. 3]): mapa 7@ Oe9, Ro. ii. 13 ; 1 Co.
iii. 19; Gal. iii. 11; 2 Th. 1.6; Jas. i. 27; 1 Pet. ii. 4; 2
Pet. iii. 8 [m. kupio]; ppdvipov etva map’ éaure, [A. V. in
one’s own conceit], Ro. xi. 25 (where Trtxt. WH txt. év) ;
xii. 16.
III. with an Accusative; Sept. for OxR, 1) oy,
Saya. (Josh. vii. 7; xxii. 7); cf. W. § 49 g. p. 403 (377)
sq.3 [B. 339 (292)]; 1. prop. of place, at, by, near,
by the side of, beside, along; so with verbs of motion:
mepurareiv mapa tiv Oddaccay (Plat. Gorg. p. 511 e.), Mt.
Tapa
iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 [here LT Tr WH zapayo]; sirew,
Mt. xiii. 4; Mk. iv. 4; Lk. viii. 5,41; xvii.16; Acts v.
10 (where L T Tr WH zpés); omapivar, Mt. xiii. 19;
pinrew, Mt. xv. 30; riBévar, Acts iv. 35, 37 [here Tdf.
mpds]; Vv. 23 amorieva, Acts vii. 58; épyecOar, eEepyeo Oat,
Mt. xv. 29; Mk. ii. 13 [here Tdf. eis]; Acts xvi. 13; oi
mapa TH ddd, SC. TETOrTES, Mk. iv. 15, cf. 4; Lk. viii. 12,
cf. 5. with verbs of rest: xaOjc0a, Mt. xiii. 1; xx. 30;
Lk. viii. 35; with efva, Mk. v. 21; Acts x. 6. with verbs
denoting the business in which one is engaged, as mavdev-
ev in pass., Acts xxii. 3 [so GL T Tr WH punctuate];
diddoxew, Mk. iv. 1. without a verb, in specifications of
place, Acts x. 32; Heb. xi. 12. 2. beside, beyond,
i. e. metaph. a. i.g. contrary to: mapa thy didaxnv, Ro.
xvi. 17; map’ éAmida, lit. beyond hope, i.e where the laws
and course of nature left no room for hope, hence i. q.
without [A. V. against] hope, Ro. iv. 18 (in prof. auth.,
of things which happen against hope, beyond one’s ex-
pectation, ef. Passow s. v. III. 3, vol. ii. p. 669°; Dion.
Hal. antt. 6, 25); mapa roy vopov, contrary to the law,
Acts xviii. 13 (rapa rods vopous, Opp. to kara Tovs vopous,
Xen. mem. 1, 1,18); map’ 6, contrary to that which, i. e.
at variance with that which, Gal. i. 8sq.; mapa vou,
Ro. i. 26; xi. 24, (Thuc. 6,17; Plat. rep. 5 p. 466 d.);
after dAdos, other than, different from, 1 Co. iii. 11 (see
exx. fr. prof. auth. in Passow s. v. III. 3 fin. vol. ii. p.
670°); mapa Tov xticavra, omitting or passing by the
Creator, Ro. i. 25, where others explain it before (above)
the Creator, rather than the Creator, agreeably indeed to
the use of the prep. in Grk. writ. (cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. iii.
p- 28 [ef. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, §165 8.; L. and S.
s. v. C. I. 5d.]), but not to the thought of the passage.
except, save, i. gq. if you subtract from a given sum, less:
Teocapakovra mapa piay, one (stripe) excepted, 2 Co. xi.
24 (recoapdkovta érdv mapa Tpidkovta nuepas, Joseph.
antt. 4, 8, 1; mapa mévre vais, five ships being deducted,
Thue. 8, 29; [map’ dAtyas Wnpovs, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 37,
3]; see other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bnhdy. p. 258; [W.
u. s.; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]). b. above, beyond:
mapa katpov nAtkias, Heb. xi. 11; map’ 3 det (Plut. mor.
p- 83 f. [de profect. in virt. §13]), Ro. xii. 3; i. q. more
than: duaprwdol rapa mavras, Lk. xiii. 2; éypuc€é oe €avov
mapa tovs per. more copiously than [A. V. above] thy
fellows, Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8; tiyodv riva mapa
twa, Sir. xv.5); xpivew juépav rap’ nuépay, to prefer one
day to another (see xpivw, 2), Ro. xiv. 5. Hence it is
joined to comparatives: mAéov mapd tr. Lk. iii. 133 d1a-
opwrepov map avrovs dvoua, Heb.i. 4; add, iii. 3; ix. 23;
xi. 4; xii. 24; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in W. § 35, 2 b. [and
as above]. éarrodv twa mapa t., to make one inferior
to another, Heb. ii. 7, 9. 3. on account of (cf. Lat.
propter i. q. ob): mapa rodro, for this reason, therefore,
1 Co. xii. 15 sq.; cf. W. § 49 ¢. ¢.
IV. In Composition apd denotes 1. situation
or motion either from the side of, or to the side of ; near,
beside, by, to: mapabaddoovos, mapddtos, mapotkéw, Tapako-
Aovdew, mapadrapBave, mapadéyouat, mapathéw, Tapaye ;
of what is done secretly or by stealth, as mapewrépyopat,
478
TapaBaols
rapedyw, mapecdvw; cf. [the several words and] Fritz.
sche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 346. by the side of i.e.
ready, present, at hand, (mapa tw): mapetpt, mapovota,
mapéxa, etc. 2. violation, neglect, aberration, [cf.
our beyond or aside i.q. amiss]: mapaBaive, mapaBarns,
Tapavonew, Tapakov@, Tapinut, mapeois, mapadoyiCopas,
mapadokos, mapadpovia, etc. 3. like the Germ. an
(in anreizen, antreiben, etc.) : mapatndéw, mapamixpaiva,
sapokive, mapopyitw [Cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 650 sq. ]
mapa-Batvw ; 2 aor. mapéBnv; prop. to go by the side of
(in Hom. twice rapBeBaws of one who stands by anoth-
er’s side in a war-chariot, I]. 11, 522; 13, 708 [but here
of men on foot]); to go past or to pass over without touch-
ing a thing; trop. to overstep, neglect, violate, transgress,
w. an acc. of the thing (often so in prof. auth. fr. Aes-
chyl. down [cf. mapa, IV. 1 and 2]): tyv mapadoow, Mt.
xv. 2; Thy évroAny Tov Oeod, ibid. 3; 6 mapaBaiver, he that
transgresseth, oversteppeth, i. e. who does not hold to
the true doctrine, opp. to pévew ev r7 didax7q, 2 Jn. 9 RG
[where L T Tr WH 6 zpodywv (q. v.) ] (so of mapaBaivor-
res, transgressors of the law, Sir. xl. 14 [ef. Joseph. c.
Ap. 2, 18, 2; 29,4; 30,1])3 (ray dcaOnxny, Josh. vii. 11,
15; Ezek. xvi. 59, and often; ro pyya xupiov, Num. xiv.
41; 1S. xv. 24, etc.; ras cuvOnxas, Polyb. 7,5, 1; Joseph.
antt. 4, 6,5; Ael. v. h. 10, 2; besides, rapaf. dSixny, rov
vopov, Tovs Spkous, niorww, etc., in Grk. writ.). in imita-
tion of the Hebr. 430 foll. by 12, we find wapaf. éx rivos
and dz twos, so to go past as to turn aside from, i.e. to
depart, leave, be turned from: éx tis 650d, Ex. xxxii. 8;
Deut. ix. 12; amo rév évroddv, Deut. xvii. 20; dad ray
Adywv, Deut. xxviii. 14 cod. Alex.; once so in the N. T.:
ex (LT Tr WH aad) rijs drocroAns, of one who abandons
his trust, [R. V. fell away], Acts i. 25. (In the Sept.
also for 12), V9) to break, NYY to deviate, turn aside.)
[SyYN.: mapaBaivery to overstep, maparopever ba to proceed
by the side of, mapépxer@at to go past. ]*
mapa-BéAXw: 2 aor. mapéBarov; 1. to throw be-
fore, cast to, [cef. mapa, IV. 1], (Hom., Plat., Polyb., Dio
Cass., al. ; as fodder to horses, Hom. Il. 8, 504). 2.
to put one thing by the side of another for the sake of
comparison, to compare, liken, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Polyb.,
Joseph., Hdian.): riv Bacwdelav tod beod év mapaBorn,
to portray the kingdom of God (in), by the use of, a
similitude, Mk. iv. 30 RG Lmrg. Tr mrg. [ef. B. § 133,
22]. 3. reflexively, to put one’s self, betake one’s
self, into a place or to a person (Plat., Polyb., Plut.,
Diog. Laért.); of seamen (Hdt. 7,179; Dem. p. 163, 4;
eis Iloriddous, Joseph. antt. 18, 6, 4), eis Sauov, Acts xx.
15 [put in at (R. V. touched at)]. For another use of
this verb in Grk. writ. see mapaBoXevopat.*
trapé-Bacts, -ews, 7, (mapaBaive, q. V.), prop. a going
over; metaph. a disregarding, violating ; Vulg. praevarica-
tio, and once (Gal. iii. 19) transgressio ; [A. V. transgres-
sion]: w.a gen. of the object, rév dpxav, 2 Macc. xv. 10;
Tav Stxaiwy, Plut. compar. Ages. and Pomp. 1; rod vdpov,
of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 23 (Joseph. antt. 18, 8, 2)5 ab-
solutely, the breach of a definite, promulgated, ratified
law: Ro. v. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 14, (but dyapria is wrong-do-
TapaBarns
ing which even a man ignorant of the law may be guilty
of (cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § lxvi.]); rév mapa. xapw. to
create transgressions, i.e. that sins might take on the
character of transgressions, and thereby the conscious-
ness of sin be intensified and the desire for redemption
be aroused, Gal. iii. 19 ; used of the transgression of the
Mosaic law, Ro. iv. 15; Heb. ii. 2; ix. 15; Ps.e. (ci.)
3; w. a gen. of the subj., ray ddicov, Sap. xiv. 31.*
tapa-Barns, -ov, 6, (mapaBaive [cf. W. 26]), a trans-
gressor (Vulg. praevaricator, transgressor) : yédpov, a law-
breaker (Plaut. legirupa), Ro. ii. 25, 27; Jas. ii. 11;
absol., Gal. ii. 18; Jas. ii. 9. [Aeschyl. (ap8drys) ;
Graec. Ven. Deut. xxi. 18, 20.]*
mwapa-Bidtopar: 1 aor. mapeBiacdunv; depon. verb, to
employ force contrary to nature and right (cf. mapa, IV. 2],
to compel by employing force (Polyb. 26, 1, 3): ruwd, to
constrain one by entreaties, Lk. xxiv. 29; Acts xvi. 15;
so Sept. in Gen. xix. 9; 1 S. xxviii. 23, ete.*
mwapaBohevopat: 1 aor. mid. ptep. mapaBorevoduevos
to be mapaBoos i. e. one who rashly exposes himself to dan-
gers, to be venturesome, reckless, (cf. W. 93 (88); Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 67); recklessly to expose one’s self to dan-
ger: with a dat. of respect, 77 ux, as respects life;
hence, to expose one’s life boldly, jeopard life, hazard life,
Phil. ii. 30 G L T Tr WH for the wapaBovdevodp. of Rec. ;
on the difference between these readings cf. Gabler,
Kleinere theol. Schriften, i. p. 176sqq. This verb is
not found in the Grk. writ., who say mapaBaddeo bar, now
absol. to expose one’s self to danger (see Passow s. v.
mapaBaddo, 2; L. and S. ib. II.), now with an acc. of the
thing [to risk, stake], as uynv, Hom. Il. 9, 322; capa
kat \ruxnv, 2 Macc. xiv. 38 (see other exx. in Passow
{and L. and 8.] 1. c.); now w. a dat. of reference, rais
Wuxais, Diod. 3, 35; 77 euavrod Kepady, dpyvpio, Phryn.
ed. Lob. p. 238; [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Philip. 1. c.].*
mapaBodh, -7s, 7, (mapaBddrw, q- v.), Sept. for 5win ;
1. a placing of one thing by the side of another, juxta-
position, as of ships in battle, Polyb. 15, 2, 13; Diod. 14,
60. 2. metaph. a comparing, comparison of one
thing with another, likeness, similitude, (Plat., Isocr.,
Polyb., Plut.): univ., Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; an
example by which a doctrine or precept is illustrated,
Mk. iii. 23; Lk. xiv. 7; a thing serving as a figure of
something else, Heb. ix. 9; this meaning also very many
interpreters give the word in Heb. xi. 19, but see 5 be-
low; spec. a narrative, fictitious but agreeable to the
laws and usages of human life, by which either the duties
of men or the things of God, particularly the nature and
history of God’s kingdom, are figuratively portrayed [cf.
B. D. s. vv. Fable, Parable, (and reff. there ; add Aristot.
rhet. 2, 20, 2 sqq. and Cope’s notes) ]: Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13,
24, 31, 33-35, 53; xxi. 33, 45; [xxii.1]; Mk. iv. 2, 10,
i1.43,.30, 33,8q:%: [vil. 17] ;)-xii. 1, [12]; LK. viii. 4,
9-11; xii. 16,41; xiii.6; xiv. 7; xv.3; xvili. 1,9; xix.
11; xx. 9,19; xxi.29; witha gen. of the pers. or thing
to which the contents of the parable refer [W. § 30,
1a.]: rod omeipovros, Mt. xiii. 18; rav Cigaviwy, ib. 36;
rh Bactrelay Tov Oeod ev mapaBorp TiOévat (lit. to set forth
479
Trapayivoyuat
the kingdom of God in a parable), to illustrate (the na-
ture and history of) the kingdom of God by the use of a
parable, Mk. iv.30 L txt. T Trtxt. WH. 3. a pithy
and instructive saying, involving some likeness or compar
ison and having preceptive or admonitory force; an
aphorism, a maxim: Lk. v.36; vi. 39; Mt. xv. 15, (Prov.
i.6; Eccl. i. 17; Sir. iii. 29 (27); xiii. 26 (25), ete.).
Since sayings of this kind often pass into proverbs,
mapaBoAn is 4. a proverb: Lk. iv. 23 (1 S. x. 12;
Ezek. xii. 22 sq.; xviii. 2 sq.). 5. an act by which
one exposes himself or his possessions to danger, a ven-
ture, risk, (in which sense the plur. seems to be used by
Plut. Arat. 22: dc moddA@v Atypav kat mapaBorav srepai-
vovtes mpos TO Teixos [cf. Diod. Sic. frag. lib. xxx. 9, 2;
also var. in Thue. 1, 131, 2 (and Poppo ad loc.)]); &
mapaBovj, in risking him, i.e. at the very moment when
he exposed his son to mortal peril (see mapaBodevouat),
Heb. xi. 19 (Hesych. ék mapaBodjs: éx mapaxivSuvevpa-
tos); others with less probability explain it, in a figure,
i.e. as a figure, either of the future general resurrection
of all men, or of Christ offered up to God and raised
again from the dead; others otherwise.*
mapa-Bovrevopar: 1 aor. ptcp. mapaBovAevodpevos; to
consult amiss [see mapa, IV. 2]: w. a dat. of the thing,
Phil. ii. 30 Rec. Not found in prof. auth. See mapa-
Bodevopau.*
map-ayyeAla, -as, 7, (mapayyeAAw), prop. announcement,
a proclaiming or giving a message to; hence a charge,
command: Acts xvi. 24; a prohibition, Acts v. 28; used
of the Christian doctrine relative to right living, 1 Tim.
i. 5; of particular directions relative to the same, 18;
plur.in1 Th.iv.2. (Ofamilitary orderin Xen., Polyb.;
of instruction, Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 2 p. 11048, 7; Diod.
exc. p. 512, 19 [i. e. frag. lib. xxvi. 1, 1].)*
map-ayyehAw ; impf. mapyyyeAAov ; 1 aor. mapyyyeAa;
(mapa and ayyéAda) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1.
prop. to transmit a message along from one to another
[(cf. mapa, IV. 1)], to declare, announce. 2. to com-
mand, order, charge: w. dat. of the pers. 1 Th. iv. 11 [ef.
Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion ’]; foll. by
Aéyov and direct disc. Mt. x. 5; foll. by an inf. aor.,
Mt. xv.35 LT Tr WH; Mk. viii. 6; Lk. viii. 29; Acts
x.42; xvi. 18; with py inserted, Lk. v. 14; viii. 56; Acts
xxiii. 22; 1 Co. vii. 10 [here Lchm. inf. pres.] ; foll. by an
inf. pres., Acts xvi. 23; xvii. 30 [here T Tr mrg. WH have
dmayy.]; 2 Th. iii. 6; with yy inserted, Lk. ix. 21 [G L
T Tr WH]; Acts i. 4; iv. 18; v.28 (mapayyedia mapay-
yédrew, to charge strictly, W. $54, 3; B.184 (159 sq.)),
40; 1 Tim.i. 3; vi. 173 ret 7, 2 Th. iii. 4 [but T Tr WH
om. L br. the dat.]; rodro foll. by ére, 2 Th. iti. 10; revt
foll. by acc. and inf., [Acts xxiii. 30 L T Trmrg.]; 2
Th. iii. 6; 1 Tim. vi. 13 [here Tdf. om. dat.]; foll. by an
inf. alone, Acts xv. 5; by iva (see iva, II. 2 b.), Mk. vi.
8; 2 Th.iii.12; with an ace. of the thing alone, 1 Co. xi.
17; 1 Tim. iv. 11; v. 7. [S¥N. see xeAeva, fin. ] *
wapa-ylvopat; impf. 3 pers. plur. wapeyivovro (Jn. iil.
23); 2 aor. mapeyevounv; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 813;
(prop. to become near, to place one’s self by the side of,
mupayo
hence) to be present, to come near, approach : absol., Mt.
iii. 1 [but in ed. 1 Prof. Grimm (more appropriately) asso-
ciates this with Heb. ix. 11; Lk. xii. 51 below]: Lk. [xiv.
21]; xix.16; Jn. iii. 23; Acts v. 21 sq. 25; ix, 89; x. 32
[RG Tr mrg. br.], 33; xi. 23; xiv. 27; xvii. 10; xviii. 27;
xxi. 18; xxiii. 16,35; xxiv.17, 24; xxv. 7; xxviii. 21; 1
Co. xvi.3; foll. by dé w. gen. of place and eis w. acc. of
place, Mt. ii. 1; Acts xiii. 14; by dwé with gen. of place
and émi w. ace. of place and mpds w. ace. of pers. Mt. iii.
13; by mapd w. gen. of pers. (i. e. sent by one[cf. W. 365
(342) ]), Mk. xiv. 43 ; by mpés twa, Lk. vii. 4, 20; viii. 19;
Acts xx. 18; mpés rua ék w. gen. of place, Lk. xi. 6; by
eis w. ace. of place, Jn. viii. 2; Acts ix. 26 (here Lchm.
év); xv.4; by émi twa (against, see éni, C. I. 2 g. y. BB.),
LK. xxii. 52 [Tdf. pds]. i. q. to come forth, make one’s
public appearance, of teachers: of the Messiah, absol.
Heb. ix. 11; foll. by an inf. denoting the purpose, Lk. xii.
51; [of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 1 (see above)]. i. q.
to be present with help [R. V. to take one’s part], w. a
dat. of the pers. 2 Tim. iv. 16 LT TrWH. ([Comp.:
cup-rapayivopat. | *
mwap-ayo ; impf. mapjyov (Jn. viii. 59 Rec.) ; pres. pass.
3 pers. sing. mapdayerat; fr. [Archil., Theogn.], Pind. and
Hdt. down; Sept. several times for 72» in Kal and
Hiphil ; 1. trans. [(cf. mapa, IV.)]; a. to lead
past, lead by. b. to lead aside, mislead; to lead
away. c. to. lead to; to lead forth, bring forward.
2. intrans. (see dye, 4) ; a. to pass by, go past: Mt.
xx. 30; Mk. ii. 14; xv. 21; [Lk. xviii. 39 L mrg.]; foll.
by mapa w. an acc. of place, Mk. i. 16 L T Tr WH (by
kata w. acc. of place, 3 Macc. vi. 16; Oewpodvres mapd-
youcav tiv Sivayww, Polyb. 5, 18, 4). b. to depart,
go away: Jn. vili. 59 Rec.; ix. 15 éxeiev, Mt. ix. 9, 27.
[Al. adhere to the meaning pass by in all these pass. ]
Metaph. to pass away, disappear: 1 Co. vii. 81 (Ps. exliii.
(exliv.) 5); in the passive in the same sense, 1 Jn. ii.
8, 17."
mapa-Seyparito; 1 aor. inf. mapaderypatioa; (sapd-
Secypa [(fr. Secxvype)] an example; also an example in
the sense of a warning [cf. Schmidt ch. 128]); to set
forth as an example, make an example of; in abad sense,
to hold up to infamy; to expose to public disgrace: twa,
Mt.i.19 RG; Heb. vi. 6 [A. V. put to open shame}.
(Num. xxv. 4; Jer. xiii. 22; Ezek. xxviii. 17; [Dan. ii. 5
Sept.]; Add. to Esth. iv. 8 [36]; Evang. Jac. c. 20; often
in Polyb.; Plut. de curios. 10; Euseb. quaest. ad Steph.
1, 3 (iv. 884 d. ed. Migne).) [Cf. Schmidt ch. 128.] *
tapaderos, -ov, 6, (thought by most to be of Persian
origin, by others of Armenian, cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii.
p- 1124; [B. D.s.v.; esp. Fried. Delitesch, Wo lag das
Paradies? Leipzig 1881, pp. 95-97; cf. Max Miiller,
Selected Essays, i. 129 sq.]), 1. among the Persians
a grand enclosure or preserve, hunting-ground, park,
shady and well-watered, in which wild animals were
kept for the hunt; it was enclosed by walls and furnished
with towers for the hunters: Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 14; ile
5]; 8, 1, 38; oec. 4, 13 and 14; anab. 1, 2, 7. 9; Theo-
phr. h. pl. 5, 8,1; Diod. 16, 41; 14, 80; Plut. Artax.
480
25, ef. Curt. 8, 1, 11.
Tapacioaps
2. univ. a garden, pleasure-
ground; grove, park: Leian. v.h. 2, 23; Ael. v.h. 1, 335
Joseph. antt. 7, 14,4; 8, 7,3; 9,10, 4; 10, 3,2 and 11,
1; b. j. 6, 1,1; [c. Apion. 1, 19, 9 (where cf. Miiller)];
Sus. 4, 7, 15, etc.; Sir. xxiv. 30; and so it passed into
the Hebr. language, 0379, Neh. ii.8; Eccl. ii. 5; Cant.
iv. 13; besides in Sept. mostly for 1; thus for that de-
lightful region, ‘the garden of Eden,’ in which our first
parents dwelt before the fall: Gen. ii. 8 sqq.; iii. 1
sqq: 3. that part of Hades which was thought by
the later Jews to be the abode of the souls of the pious
until the resurrection: Lk. xxiii. 43, ef. xvi. 23 sqq. But
some [e. g. Dillmann (as below p. 379)] understand that
passage of the heavenly paradise. 4. an upper
region in the heavens: 2 Co. xii. 4 (where some maintain,
others deny, that the term is equiv. to 6 rpiros otpavds
in vs. 2); with the addition of rod Oeod, gen. of possessor,
the abode of God and heavenly beings, to which true
Christians will be taken after death, Rev. ii. 7 (cf. Gen.
xiii. 10; Ezek. xxviii. 13; xxxi. 8). According to the
opinion of many of the church Fathers, the paradise in
which our first parents dwelt before the fall still exists,
neither on earth nor in the heavens, but above and be-
yond the world; ef. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test., on
Evang. Nicod. c. xxv. p. 748 sqq.; and Bleek thinks that
the word ought to be taken in this sense in Rev. ii. 7.
Cf. Dilimann s. v. Paradies in Schenkel iv. 377 sqq.;
also Hilgenfeld, Die Clement. Recogn. und Hom. p. 87
sq.; Klépper on 2 Co. xii. 2-4, p. 507 sqq. [(Gottingen,
1869). See also B.D.s.v.; McC. and S.s. v.; Hamburg-
er, Real-Encyclopidie, Abtheil. ii. s. v.]*
mwapa-Séxopnar; fut. 3 pers. plur. mapadé£ovra:; depon.
mid., but in bibl. and eccles. Grk. w. 1 aor. pass. mape-
d€xOnv (Acts xv. 4 LT Tr WH; 2 Mace. iv. 22; [cf. B.
51 (44)]); 1. in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, prop.
to receive, take up, take upon one’s self. Hence 2.
to admit i. e. not to reject, fo accept, receive: rov Aédyov,
Mk. iv. 20; &n, Acts xvi. 213 ryv paprupiav, Acts xxii.
18; karnyopiay, 1 Tim. v. 19, (rds Soxipous Spdxpas, Epict.
diss. 1, 7, 6); rua, of a son, to acknowledge as one’s own
[A. V. receiveth], Heb. xii. 6 (after Prov. iii. 12, where
for N¥1); of a delegate or messenger, to give due re-
ception to, Acts xv.4LTTr WH. (CE. déyoum, fin.]*
Tapa-Sia-TprBH, -7s, 7, useless occupation, empty business,
misemployment (see mapd, IV. 2): 1 Tim. vi. 5 Ree. [cf.
W. 102 (96)], see SiarraparpiBn. Not found elsewhere;
[ef. mapadiaruréw in Justinian (in Kouwmanoudes, Aé&eus
aOnoavp. s. v.) }.*
Trapa-SiSwut, subjunc. 3 pers. sing. mapadidé (1 Co. xv.
24 [Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH, cod. Sin., ete.]) and mapadido%
(ibid. L txt. T Trtxt.; cf. B.46 (40) [and 8Scpu, init.]) ;
impf. 3 pers. sing. rapedidov (Acts viii. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 23),
plur. mapedidouv (Acts xvi. 4 RG; xxvii. 1) and mape-
didocav (Acts xvi. 4 LT Tr WH; cf. W. § 14, 1¢.; B. 45
(39)); fut. apadéow ; 1 aor. rapéSwxa; 2 aor. Tapédov,
subjunc. 3 pers. sing. mapadé and several times mapadoi
(so L T Tr WH in Mk. iv. 29; xiv. 10, 11; Jn. xiii. 2;
see didwus, init.); pf. ptep. rapadedaxas (Acts xv. 26)2
Trapadid@ps
plupf. 3 pers. plur. without augm. mapadeddxetcay (Mk.
xv. 10; W. §12, 9; [B. 33 (29); Tdf. Proleg. p. 120
sq-]); Pass., pres. mapadiSopa ; impf. 3 pers. sing. mape-
didero (1 Co. xi. 23 L T Tr WH for RG mapedidoro, see
drodidwpt); pf. 3 pers. sing. mapadSorar (Lk. iv. 6),
ptep. mapadedouevos, Acts xiv. 26; 1 aor. mapedsOny;
1 fut. mapadojoopa; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; Sept.
mostly for {N}; to give over; 1. prop. to give
ito the hands (of another). 2. to give over into
(one’s) power or use: twi 71, to deliver to one something
to keep, use, take care of, manage, Mt. xi. 27; Lk. iv. 6
[ef. W. 271 (254)]; x. 22; ra tmdpxovta, radavra, Mt.
xxv. 14, 20, 22; ryv Baowdelav, 1 Co. xv. 24; 7d mvedpa
sc. T@ Ged, Jn. xix. 30; 7d capa, iva etc., to be burned,
1 Co. xiii. 3; rua, to deliver one up to custody, to be judged,
condemned, punished, scourged, tormented, put to death,
(often thus in prof. auth.): ria, absol., so that to be put
in prison must be supplied, Mt. iv.12; Mk.i. 14; tpov-
pevous, who are kept, 2 Pet. ii. 4[GTTr WH; but R
teTnpnwevous, Li kodaouevous typeiv]; to be put to death
(cf. Germ. dahingeben), Ro. iv. 25 ; with the addition of
imép twos, for one’s salvation, Ro. viii. 32; ruvd run, Mt.
V-295 Xvili234 3-xx. 185) xxvii. 2; Mk. xv. 13 Lk-\xii. 58;
xx. 20; Jn. xviii. 30, 35 sq.; xix. 11 ete.; Acts xxvii. 1;
xxviii. 16 Rec.; r@ OeAnpart adrady, to do their pleasure
with, Lk. xxiii. 25; twa tim, foll. by wa, Jn. xix. 16;
with an inf. of purpose, dudaccewy adrdv, to guard him,
Acts xii. 4; without the dat., Mt. x. 19; xxiv. 10; xxvii.
18; Mk. xiii. 11; xv. 10; Acts iii. 13; foll. by wa, Mt.
xxvii. 26; Mk. xv. 15; rua eis rd cravpoOnvat, Mt. xxvi. 2
(cravpod Oavarw, Ev. Nicod. ¢. 26) ; ets xeipas twos, i.e.
into one’s power, Mt. xvii. 22; xxvi. 45; Mk. ix. 31;
mye lke ex 4Aexxiv. (Acts xxi. 11's Kxville 17,
(Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 24; xxxix. (xxxii.) 4); els cvvedpra,
to councils [see ovvédpiov, 2 b.] (mapadiddévae involving
also the idea of conducting), Mt. x.17-; Mk. xiii. 9; ets
ovvaywyas, Lk. xxi. 12; eis Oripu, Mt. xxiv. 9; eis puda-
knv, Acts viii. 3; eis puAaxds, Acts xxii. 45 els Oavaroy,
Mt. x. 21; Mk. xiii. 12; 2 Co. iv. 11; els xpia Oavarov,
Lk. xxiv. 20; rv oapxa eis karapOopdy, of Christ under-
going death, Barn. ep. 5,15; mapadiddvar éavrdv trép twos,
to give one’s self up for, give one’s self to death for, to
undergo death for (the salvation of) one, Gal. ii. 20;
Eph. v. 25; with the addition of 76 6eG and a pred. acc.,
Eph. v. 2; ryv Wuxqy éavrod trép tod dvdparos *Inood
Xpucrod, to jeopard life to magnify and make known the
name of Jesus Christ, Acts xv. 26. Metaph. expres-
sions: twa ro Satava, to deliver one into the power of
Satan to be harassed and tormented with evils, 1 Tim.
i. 20; with the addition of es d\eOpov oapkds (see dde-
Opos), 1 Co. v. 5 (the phrase seems to have originated
from the Jewish formulas of excommunication [yet see
Meyer (ed. Heinrici) ad loc. (cf. B. D. s. vv. Hymeneus
IL, Excommunication II.)], because a person banished
from the theocratic assembly was regarded as deprived
of the protection of God and delivered up to the power
of the devil). id eis dxaOapciay, to cause one to be-
come unclean, Ro. i. 24; cf. Fritzsche, Riickert, and
481
/
Tapadoots
others ad loc. [in this ex. and several that follow A. V.
renders to give up]; «is ra6n driias, to make one a slave
of vile passions, ib. 26; eis dddéxov vodv, to cause one to
follow his own corrupt mind, —foll. by an inf. of purpose
[or epexegetic inf. (Meyer)], ib. 28; éaurdv rf doe yela,
to make one’s self the slave of lasciviousness, Eph. iv.
19; twa Aarpevew, to cause one to worship, Acts vii. 42.
to deliver up treacherously, i.e. by betrayal to cause
one to be taken : rwa rum, of Judas betraying Jesus, Mt.
xxvi. 15; Mk. xiv. 10; Lk. xxii. 4,6; without the dat.,
Mt. xxvi. 16, 21, 23, 25; Mk. xiv. 11, 18; Lk. xxii. Pils
48; Jn. vi. 64,71; xii.4; in the pass., Mk. xiv. 21; Lk.
xxii. 22; 1 Co. xi. 23; pres. ptep. 6 rapadiSovs adrédy, of
him as plotting the betrayal (cf. B. § 144, 11, 3): Mt.
XXvi. 25, 46,48; Mk. xiv. 42, 44; Jn. xiii 11; xviii. 2,
5. to deliver one to be taught, moulded, ete.: ets ru, in
pass., Ro. vi. 17 (to be resolved thus, dank. T@ TUT@ ete:
eis dv mrapeddOnre [W. § 24, 2 b.]). 3. i.q. to com-
mit, to commend : twa th xapite Tt. Oeod, in pass., Acts xiv.
26; xv. 40; mapedidov 7@ Kpivorte Stkaiws, sc. Tra éavrod,
his cause (B. 145 (127) note? [ef. W. 590 (549)]), 1 Pet.
ie 23s 4. to delwer verbally: commands, rites, Mk.
vii. 13; Acts vi. 14; 1 Co. xi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 21 (here in
pass.) ; miorev, the tenets [see miotis, 1 c. 8.], in pass.
Jude 3; dvdaccew ra Sdypara, the decrees to keep, Acts
xvi. 4; to deliver by narrating, to report, i. e. to perpetu-
ate the knowledge of events by narrating them, Lk. i. 2;
1 Co. xi. 23; xv. 3, (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow
for L. and S.] s. v. 4). 5. to permit, allow: absol.
érav mapad@ or rapasdot 6 kaprrés, when the fruit will allow,
i. e. when its ripeness permits, Mk. iv. 29 (so ras apas
mapadiWovens, Polyb. 22, 24, 9; for other exx. see Passow
s. v.3[L. andS. s. v. I.; others take the word in Mk. 1.c.
intransitively, in a quasi-reflexive sense, gives itself up,
presents itself, cf. W. 251 (236); B. 145 (127)]).
mapdSotos, -ov, (mapa contrary to [see mapa, IV. 2], and
dd&a opinion ; hence i. q. 6 mapa riy Sd€av dv), unex-
pected, uncommon, incredible, wonderful : neut. plur. Lk.
v. 26[A. V. strange things, cf. Trench § xci. fin.]. (Ju-
dith xiii. 13; Sap. v. 2, ete. ; Sir. xliii. 25; 2 Mace. ix. 24;
4 Mace. ii. 14; Xen., Plat., Polyb., Ael. v.h. 4, 25; Leian.
dial. deor. 20,7; 9,2; Joseph.c. Ap. 1,10, 2; Hdian. 1,
1, 5 [(4 Bekk.)].) *
mapt-Socts, -ews, 7, (rapadidam), a gwing over, giving
tip; 1. e: 1. the act of giving up, the surrender: of
cities, Polyb. 9, 25,5; Joseph. b. j. 1, 8, 6; xpnparay, Ar-
istot. pol. 5, 7,11 p. 1309%, 10. 2. a giving over
which is done by word of mouth or in writing, i. e. tradi-
tion by instruction, narrative, precept, etc. (see mapa-
dSiSwpe, 4); hence i. q. instruction, Epict. diss. 2, 23, 40;
joined with d:dackadia, Plat. lege. 7 p. 803 a. objec-
tively, what is delivered, the substance of the teaching: so
of Paul’s teaching, 2 Th. iii. 6; in plur. of the particular
injunctions of Paul’s instruction, 1 Co. xi. 2; 2 Th. ii.
15. used in the sing. of a written narrative, Joseph.
c. Ap. 1, 9,2; 10,2; again, of the body of precepts, esp.
ritual, which in the opinion of the later Jews were orally
delivered by Moses and orally transmitted in unbroken
Tapatnrow
succession to subsequent generations, which precepts,
both illustrating and expanding the written law, as they
did, were to be obeyed with equal reverence (Joseph.
antt. 13, 10, 6 distinguishes between ra ex mapaddoews
ray marépwoy and ra yeypappéva, i. €. Ta ev Trois’ Mwioews
vopors yeypappeva vopipa): Mt. xv. 2 sq. 6; Mk. vii. 3,
5,9, 13; with ray dvOpwrev added, as opp. to the
divine teachings, Mk. vii. 8; Col. ii. 8 [where see Bp.
Lghtft.]; marpixal mapaddces, precepts received from
the fathers, whether handed down in the O. T. books
or orally, Gal. i. 14 [(al. restrict the word here to the
extra-biblical traditions; cf. Meyer or Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc.). Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Tradition. ] *
mapa-{nrow, -; fut. rapatnddow ; 1 aor. mape{noca ;
to provoke to ¢ndos [see mapa, LV. 3]; a. lo pro-
voke to jealousy or rivalry: twa, Ro. xi. 11, 14, (1 K. xiv.
22; Sir. xxx. 3); émi run (see emi, B. 2 a. 6. fin.), Ro. x.
19 (Deut. xxxii. 21). b. to provoke to anger: 1 Co.
x. 22 [on this see Prof. Hort in WH. App. p. 167] (Ps.
XXXVi. (XXXVii.) 1, 7 sq.).*
mapa-Qadaootos, -a, -ov, (mapa and @ddacaa), beside
the sea, by the sea: Mt.iv. 13. (Sept.; Hdt., Xen.,
Thuc., Polyb., Diod., al.) *
mapa-Sewpéw, -@: impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. mapebew-
povvro; 1. (napa i. q. by the side of [see mapa, IV.
1]) to examine things placed beside each other, to com-
pare, (Xen., Plut., Leian.). 2. (mapai. q. over, be-
yond, [ Lat. praeter ; see rapa, IV. 2]) to overlook, neglect :
Acts vi. 1 (Dem. p. 1414, 22; Diod., Dion. Hal., al.).*
mapa-OyKkn, -7s, 7, (awapariOnut, gq. V.), @ deposit, a trust
or thing consigned to one’s faithful keeping, (Vulg. de-
positum) : used of the correct knowledge and pure doc-
trine of the gospel, to be held firmly and faithfully, and
to be conscientiously delivered unto others: 2 Tim. i. 12
(pov possess. gen. [the trust committed unto me; Rec.%* 168
reads here mapaxaraOnxn, q.v-]); G LT Tr WH in1 Tim.
vi. 20 and 2 Tim. i. 14, (Lev. vi. 2,4; 2 Macc. iii. 10, 15;
Hat. 9, 45; [al.]). Inthe Grk. writ. rapaxaraénkn (q. v-)
is more common; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 312; W. 102
(96).*
map-atvew, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. mapyver; to exhort,
admonish: with the addition of Aéyay foll. by direct dis-
course, Acts xxvii. 9; teva (in class. Grk. more com-
monly ri [W. 223 (209); B. §133, 9]), foll. by an inf.
Acts xxvii. 22 [B. §§ 140, 1; 141,2]. (From Hdt. and
Pind. down; 2 Mace. vii. 25 sq.; 3 Mace. v. 17.) *
Tap-arréopat, -ovpar, impv. pres. mapacrod; [impf. 3
pers. plur. rapyrodyro, Mk. xv. 6 TWH Tr mrg., where
al. évrep jrobvro (q. v.)]; 1 aor. mapnrnodpny; pf. pass.
ptcp. mapytpevos with a pass. signif.; fr. Aeschyl. and
Pind. down; 1. prop. to ask alongside (mapa[IV.1}),
beg to have near one; to obtain by entreaty ; to beg from, to
ask for, supplicate: [Mk. xv. 6 (see above) ]. 2. to
avert (mapa aside [see mapa, IV. 1]) by entreaty or seek
to avert, to deprecate ; a. prop. foll. by yn and acc.
w. inf. [to intreat that... not], Heb. xii. 19 (Thue. 5,
63) ; cf. W. 604 (561); [B. § 148, 13]. b. i.g. to re-
fuse, decline: 1d dro8aveiv, Acts xxv. 11 (Oavetv od mapat-
482
TAPAKANEW
roupa, Joseph. de vita sua 29). c. i.g. to shun,
avoid: ri, 1 Tim. iv. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 23; rua, 1 Tim. v. 11;
Tit. iii. 10; i.q. to refuse, reject, Heb. xii. 25. d. to
avert displeasure by entreaty, i.e. to beg pardon, crave in-
dulgence, to excuse: &xe pe mapntnpevoy (see €xa, I. 1 f.),
Lk. xiv. 18 sq. (of one excusing himself for not accept-
ing an invitation to a feast, Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 2).*
amrapa-kabéfopat: fo sit down beside [mapa, IV. 1], seat
one’s self, (Xen., Plat., al.); 1 aor. pass. ptep. mapakaGe-
aGeis (Joseph. antt.6, 11,9); mpds rt, Lk. x. 39 T Tr WH
{cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 269].*
mapa-kabifw: 1 aor. ptcp. fem. wapaxabicaca, to make
to sit down beside [(mapa, IV. 1)]; to set beside, place
near ; intrans. to sit down beside: mapa tt, Lk. x.39 RG
L [but L mrg. rpés] (Sept. Job ii. 13; Plut. Marius 17;
Cleom. 37; in this sense the mid. is more com. in the
Grk. writ.).*
mapa-kadéw, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. mapexadet, 1 and 3
pers. plur. zrapexddovy; 1 aor. mapexadeoa; Pass., pres.
mapakadodpat ; pf. rapakéxAnpat; 1 aor. mapexAnOny ; 1 fut.
mapakAnOnooua; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; If,
as in Grk. writ. to call to one’s side, call for, summon : twa,
w. an inf. indicating the purpose, Acts xxviii. 20 [al.
(less naturally) refer this to II. 2, making the acc. the
subj. of the inf.]. II. to address, speak to, (call to,
call on), which may be done in the way of exhortation,
entreaty, comfort, instruction, etc.; hence result a varie-
ty of senses, on which see Knapp, Scripta varii arg. ed. 2
p- 117 sqq.; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 32 sq. a
as in Grk. auth., to admonish, exhort: absol., Lk. iii. 18;
[Acts xx. 1 (RGom.)]; Ro. xii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 2; Heb.
x. 25; 1 Pet. v.12; foll. by direct disc. 2 Co. v. 20; foll.
by Aéyer w. direct disc. Acts ii. 40; foll. by an inf. where
in Lat. ut, 1 Tim. ii. 1; teva, Actsxv.32; xvi. 40; 2Co.
x. 1; 1 Th. ii.-12 (11); v. 11; 1 Tim. v: 1; Heb. iii. 13;
twa Ady 7oAAG, Acts xx. 2; teva foll. by direct disc., 1
Co. iv. 16; 1 Th.v. 14; Heb. xiii. 22 [here L WH mrg.
inf.]; 1 Pet. v.1sq.; teva foll. by an inf. where in Lat.
ut [cf. B. §§ 140, 1; 141, 2; W. 332 (311); 335 (315) n.]:
inf. pres.,, Acts xi.-23; xiy. 22; Philniv 2: 1¢Th.-dv.
10; Tit. ii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 11 (here Lehm. adds Spas to the
inf., and WH mrg. with codd. A C Lete. read dréxerOe) ;
Jude 3; inf. aor., Acts xxvii. 33 sq.; Ro. xii. 1; xv.
30; 2Co.ii.8; vi.1; Eph.iv. 1; 1 Tim. i. 3; Heb. xiii.
19; revd foll. by iva w. subjune. [cf. B. § 139, 42; W. 335
u.s.], 1 Co. i. 10; xvi. 15 sq.; 2 Co. viii. 6; 1 Th. iv. 1;
2 Th. iii. 12; to enjoin a thing by exhortation [ef. B.
§ 141, 2], 1 Tim. vi. 2; Tit. ii. 15. 2. to beg, entreat,
beseech, (Joseph. antt. 6, 7,4; [11, 8,5]; often in Epict.
cf. Schweighduser, Index graecit. Epict. p. 411; Plut.
apophth. regum, Mor. ii. p. 30 ed. Tauchn. [vi. 695 ed.
Reiske ; exx. fr. Polyb., Diod., Philo, al., in Soph. Lex.
s. v.]; not thus in the earlier Grk. auth. exc. where the
gods are called on for aid, in the expressions, mapaxaXeip
Geovs, so Oedv in Joseph. antt. 6, 2,2 and 7,4; [cf. W.
22]): [absol., Philem. 9 (yet see the Comm. ad loc.)];
tid, Mt. viii. 5 ; xviii. 32; xxvi. 53; Mk. i.40; Acts xvi.
9; 2 Co. xii. 18; moda, much, Mk. v. 23; red Tepl TLVOS,
TApAaKaNvTTH
Philem. 10; foll. by direct disc. Acts ix. 38 LT Tr WH;
with Aéywy added and direct disc., Mt. xviii. 29; Mk. v.
12; [Lk. vii. 4 (Tdf. npdrev)]; without the ace. Acts xvi.
15; td foll. by an inf. [W. and B.u.s.], Mk. v. 17; Lk.
vill. 41; Acts viii. 31; xix. 31; xxviii. 14, (1 Mace. ix.
35); twd foll. by éras, Mt. viii. 34 [here Lchm. tva (see
above) ]; Acts xxv. 2, (4 Mace. iv. 11; Plut. Demetr. c.
38); twa foll. by wa [W.$ 44, 8a.; B.§ 139, 42], Mt. xiv.
36; Mk. v. 18; vi. 56; vii. 32; viii.22; Lk. viii. 31 sq: 3
[2 Co. ix. 5]; rwa imép twos, tva, 2 Co. xii. 8; moddd
(much) twa, iva, Mk. v.10; 1 Co. xvi. 12; foll. by rod pf
w. inf. [B. § 140, 16 8.; W. 325 (305)], Acts xxi. 12; by
an inf. Acts ix. 38 RG; by an ace. w. inf., Acts xiii. 42 :
xxiv. 4; [Ro. xvi. 17]. to strive to appease by entreaty :
absol. 1 Co. iv. 13; rwa, Lk. xv. 28; Acts xvi. 39, (2
Mace. xill. 23). 3. to console, to encourage and
strengthen by consolation, to comfort, (Sept. for Dn}; very
rarely so in Grk. auth., as Plut. Oth. 16): absol. 2 Co. ii.
7; twa, 2 Co. i.6; vii. 6 sq.; év w. a dat. of the thing with
which one comforts another, 1 Th.iv.18; ria did Trapa-
KAnoews, 2 Co. i. 4; w.an acc. of the contents, dd ris
mapakX. fs (for hy, see ds, 7, 6, II. 2c. a.) mapaxadovpeba,
ibid.; in pass. to receive consolation, be comforted, Mt. ii.
18; 2 Co. xiii. 11; emi run over (in) a thing [see ént, B.
2 a. 8.], 2Co.i.4; of the consolation (comfort) given not
in words but by the experience of a happier lot or by a
happy issue, i.q. to refresh, cheer: pass., Mt. v. 4 (5);
Lk. xvi. 25; Acts xx.12; 2Co. vii. 13 (where a full stop
must be put after mapaxexAnp.) ; €v tev, by the help of a
thing, 2 Co. vii. 6 sq.; emt run, 1 Th. iii. 7; with (év) aapa-
kAnoet added, 2 Co. vii. 7. 4. toencourage, strength-
en, [i. e.in the language of A. V. comfort (see Wright,
Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v.)], (in faith, piety, hope):
tas xapdias, your hearts, Eph. vi. 22; Col. ii. 2; iv.
8; 2 Th. ii. 17, (also yetpas doOeveis, Job iv. 3 for pin;
yovara mapadeAupeva, Is. xxxv. 3 sq. [see the Hebr.] for
YDS). 5. it combines the ideas of exhorting and
comforting and encouraging in Ro. xii. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 31; 1
JUnit BE 6. to instruct, teach: év rh didackaXia,
Tit. i. 9. [Comp.: ovp-rapaxadéw. | *
mapa-Kadvmrw : 10 cover over, cover up, hide, conceal :
trop. #v mapakexaduppévov an’ aitav ([it was concealed
from them], a Hebraism, on which see in dmoxpvmra, b.),
Lk. ix. 45 (Ezek. xxii. 26; Plat., Plut., al.).*
mapa-Kata-OjKkn, -ns, 7, (mapaxaratiOnur), a deposit, a
trust: so Rec. in 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14; [Rec.°!” 1683 in
2 Tim.i.12also]. (Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Aristot. eth. Nic.
5, 8, 5 p. 1135," 4; Polyb., Diod. 15, 76; Joseph. antt,
4, 8, 88; Ael. v. h. 4, 1); see mapaOnxn above.*
mrapé-Ketpat; (sapd and xeipac); to lie beside [rapa, IV.
1], to be near (fr. Hom. down); to be present, at hand :
Ro. vii. 18 (where see Meyer), 21.*
mapd-KAnots, -ews, 7), (mapaxahéew, q. V-) 5 1. prop.
a calling near, summons, (esp. for help, Thue. 4, 61;
Dem. p. 275, 20). 2. imploration, supplication, en-
treaty: 2 Co. viii. 4 (Strab. 13 p. 581; Joseph. antt. 3,
1, 5; [c. Ap. 2, 23, 3 a. mpos tov Beov gota]; Adyot mapa-
kAnoews, words of appeal, containing entreaties, 1 Macc.
483
TAapakon
x. 24), 3. exhortation, admonition, encouragement:
Acts xv. 31 [al. refer this to 4]; 1 Co. xiv. 3; 2 Co.
vill. 17; Phil. ii. 1; 1 Tim. iv. 13; Heb. xii. 5; Adyos
THs mapaxhynoews, Heb. xiii. 22, (2 Mace. vii. 24; xv. 9
(11); Plat. def. 415 e.; Thuc. 8, 92; Aeschin., Polyb.,
al.). 4. consolation, comfort, solace: 2 Co. i. 4-7;
Heb. vi. 18; [add, Acts ix. 831; 2 Thess. ii. 16], (Jer.
xvi. 7; Hos. xiii. 14; [Job xxi. 2; Nah. iii. 7]; Phalar.
ep. 97 init.) ; rav ypapar, afforded by the contents of the
Scriptures, Ro. xv. 4 [W. 189 (178)]; Oeds ris mapakn.,
God the author and bestower of comfort, Ro. xv. 5; 2
Co. i. 3; solace or cheer which comes from a happy lot
or a prosperous state of things, Lk. vi. 24; 2 Co. vii. 4,
7,13 [ef. W. 393 (368)]; Philem. 7; by meton. that
which affords comfort or refreshment; thus of the Messi-
anic salvation, Lk. ii. 25 (so the Rabbins call the Mes-
siah the consoler, the comforter, cat é&oxnv, OMID [cf.
Wiinsche, Neue Beitriige u. s. w. ad loc.; Schéttgen,
Horae Hebr. ete. ii. 18]). 5. univ. persuasive dis-
course, stirring address, — instructive, admonitory, eonsol-
atory; powerful hortatory discourse: Ro. xii. 8; Adyos
mapaxAnoews [A. V. word of exhortation], Acts xiii. 15;
vidos map. [a son of exhortation], aman gifted in teaching,
admonishing, consoling, Acts iv. 36; used of the apostles’
instruction or preaching, 1 Th. ii. 3.*
arap&-KAnTOS, -ov, 6, (rapakahéw), prop. summoned, called
to one’s side, esp. called to one’s aid; hence 1. one
who pleads another’s cause before a judge, a pleader,
counsel for defence, legal assistant; an advocate: Dem. p.
341,11; Diog. Laért. 4, 50, cf. Dio Cass. 46, 20. PA,
univ. one who pleads another’s cause with one, an inter-
cessor: Philo, de mund. opif. §59; de Josepho § 40; in
Flaccum §§3 and 4; so of Christ, in his exaltation at God’s
right hand, pleading with God the Father for the pardon
of our sins, 1 Jn. ii. 1 (in the same sense, of the divine
Logos in Philo, vita Moys. ili. § 14). 3. in the widest
sense, a helper, succorer, aider, assistant; so of the Holy
Spirit destined to take the place of Christ with the apos-
tles (after his ascension to the Father), to lead them to
a deeper knowledge of gospel truth, and to give them the
divine strength needed to enable them to undergo trials
and persecutions on behalf of the divine kingdom: Jn.
xiv. 16, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 7, cf. Mt. x. 19sq.; Mk. xiii.
11; Lk. xii, 11 sq. (Philo de mund. opif. § 6 init. says
that God in creating the world had no need of a mapa-
kAnros, an adviser, counsellor, helper. The ‘Targums and
Talmud borrow the Greek words wvopS and NOPD
and use them of any intercessor, defender, or advocate;
cf. Busxtorf, Lex. Talm. p. 1843 [(ed. Fischer p. 916)];
so Targ. on Job xxxiii. 23 for v0 ax, i. e. an angel
that pleads man’s cause with God; [cf. mAovciay mapd-
kAnro. in ‘Teaching’ etc. 5 sub fin.; Barn. ep. 20, 2;
Constitt. apost. 7,18]). Cf. Knapp, Scripta varii Argu-
menti, p. 124 sqq.; Diisterdieck on 1 Jn. ii. 1, p. 147 sqq.;
[ Watkins, Excursus G, in Ellicott’s N. T. Com. for Eng.
Readers; Westcott in the “Speaker’s Com.” Additional
Note on Jn. xiv. 16; Schaff in Lange ibid. ].*
map-axon, -7s, 7, (mapa Lat. praeter [see mapa, IV.
mTapaKxoovbew
2]); 1. prop. a hearing amiss (Plat. epp. 7 p. 341
b.). 2. [unwillingness to hear i. e.] disobedience :
Ro. v. 19; 2Co.x.6; Heb. ii. 2. [Cf Trench § lxvi.]*
map-aKkodovdéw, -@: fut. mapaxodovOnc@; 1 aor. mapyKo-
Aovnoa (1 Tim. iv. 6L mrg. WH mrg.; 2 Tim. iii. 10 L
T Tr WH txt.); pf. mapnxodovnka ; 1. to follow
after; so to follow one as to be always at his side [see
napa, IV. 1]; to follow close, accompany, (so fr. Arstph.
and Xen. down). 2. metaph. a. to be always
present, to attend one wherever he goes: twi, Mk. xvi.
17 [where Tr WH txt. dxodov6., q. v.]. b. to follow
up a thing in mind so as to attain to the knowledge of it, i.e.
to understand, [ef. our follow a matter up, trace its course,
ete. |] ; to examine thoroughly, investigate : maou (i. e. mpay-
pacw), all things that have taken place, Lk. i. 3 (very
often so in Grk. auth., as Dem. pro cor. ec. 53 [p. 285,
23]). ce. to follow faithfully sc. a standard or rule, to
conform one’s self to: with a dat. of the thing, 1 Tim. iv.
6; 2 Tim. iii. 10, (2 Mace. ix..27). Cf. the full discus-
sion of this word by Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. for 1871, p. 46 sq.*
Tap-aKkovo: 1 aor. mapnKovoa; 1. to hear aside
i. e. casually or carelessly or amiss [see mapa, IV. 2]
(often so in class. Grk.; on the freq. use of this verb by
Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w. (1875) p.
106). 2. to be unwilling to hear, i. e. on hearing to
neglect, to pay no heed to, (w. a gen. of the pers., Polyb.
2,8, 3; 8, 15, 2); contrary to Grk. usage [but cf. Plut.
Philop. § 16, 1 kai mapideiv te K. mapaxodoa Tov dapra-
vopéevev, de curios. § 14 reip@ kal Tav iSiov éa mapaxodoat
moTe K. Taptoeiy |, W. an accus., Tov Adyov, Mk. v.36 TWH
Tr txt. [al. ‘overhearing the word as it was being
spoken’; cf. B. 302 (259)]; to refuse to hear, pay no re-
gard to, disobey: twés, what one says, Mt. xviii. 17 (Tob.
lll. 4; rd tnd rod Baowhéws Aeydpueva, Esth. iii. 3).*
twapa-KiTTa: 1laor. rapéxupa; to stoop to [cf. mapa, IV.
1] @ thing in order to look at it; to look at with head
bowed forwards ; to look into with the body bent; to stoop
and look into: Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. WH reject
the vs.]; Jn. xx. 53 eis 76 pyneiov, Jn. xx. 11; metaph.
to look carefully into, inspect curiously, ets t1, of one who
would become acquainted with something, Jas. i. 25; 1
Pet.i.12. (Arstph., Theocr., Philo, Dio Cass., Plut.,
al. ; Sept.) *
Trapa-apBave ; fut. mapadnyoua, in LT Tr WH -Ajpwo-
pat (Jn. xiv. 3; see M,); 2 aor. rapéAaBor, 8 pers. plur.
mapedaBocav (2 Th. iii.6 GT Lmrg. Tr mre. WH mrg.;
cf. Sodus [yet see WH. App. p. 165]); Pass., pres. mapa-
AapBavopat; 1 fut. mapadnpOjnoopua, in LT Tr WH -Anp-
POjooua (see M, pw; Lk. xvii. 34-36) fr. Hdt.down; Sept.
for np?; 1. to take to (cf. rapa, IV. 1], to take with
one’s self, to join to one’s self: rwd, an associate, a com-
panion, Mt. xvii. 1; xxvi.37; Mk. iv. 36; v.40; ix.2:
x.32; Lk. ix. 10, 28; xi. 26; xviii. 31; Acts xv. 39; in
pass., Mt. xxiv. 40, 41; Lk. xvii. 34-36; one to be led
off as a prisoner, Jn. xix. 16; Acts xxiii. 18; to take
with one in order to carry away, Mt. ii. 13 sq. 20 sq.;
Twa ped éavrov, Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. xiv. 33;
484
TAaparve
mapadapBdvew yuvaica, to take one’s betrothed to his
home, Mt. i. 20, 24; zwa foll. by eis w. an ace. of place,
to take [and bring, cf. W. § 66, 2d.] one with one into
a place, Mt. iv. 5, 8; xxvii. 27; twa car’ idiay, Mt. xx.
17; mid. with apos éyavrdy, to my companionship,
where I myself dwell, Jn. xiv. 3. The ptep. is prefixed
to other act. verbs to describe the action more in detail,
Acts xvi. 83; xxi. 24, 26, 32 [here L WH mrg. AaBor].
Metaph. i. q. to accept or acknowledge one to be such
as he professes to be; not to reject, not to withhold obedi-
ence: twa, Jn. i. 11. 2. to receive something trans-
mitted ; a. prop-: mapaX. dtaxoviay, an office to be dis-
charged, Col. iv. 17; Baowelav, Heb. xii. 28, (so for the
Chald. 3p in Dan. v. 81; vii. 18, Theodot.; Hdt. 2,
120; [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 20, 5 (where see Miller)]; ry
dpxnv, Plat., Polyb., Plut.). b. to receive with the
mind; by oral transmission: ri foll. by axé w. a gen.
of the author from whom the tradition proceeds, 1 Co.
xi. 23 (on which ef. Paret in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche
Theol. for 1858, Bd. iii. p. 48 sqq.; [see reff. in dnd, II. 2
d. aa.]); by the narration of others, by the instruction
of teachers (used of disciples) : [rov Xp. "I. rév Kvptov,
Col. ii. 6]; ri, 1 Co. xv. 1, 3; Gal.i.9; Phil.iv. 9; [ri
foll. by an infin., Mk. vii. 4]; rt mapa twos [see reff. s. v.
napa, I. c.], Gal. i. 12; 1 Th. ii. 13; 2 Th. iii. 6; mapa
Twos, Kabdas ... TO was Set ete. 1 Th. iv. 1, (copiav mapa
twos, Plat. Lach. p.197d.; Euthyd. p. 304¢.). [Comp.:
ovp-rapadapBava. | *
mapa-Aéyouat; [mapedeyouny]; (mapa beside, and déyw
to lay); Vulg.in Acts xxvii. 8 lego, i.e. to sail past, coast
along: tiv Kpnrnv, Acts xxvii. 8 [here some, referring
aitny to Sadporny, render work past, weather], 13, (rip
Iraxiav, Diod. 13, 3; yqv, 14, 55; [Strabo]; Lat. legere
oram).*
map-GAtos, -ov, also of three term. [cf. W. § 11, 1],
(mapa and dds), by the sea, maritime: 7 mapddos, sc.
x@pa, the sea-coast, Lk. vi. 17 (Polyb. 3, 39, 3; Diod. 3,
15, 41; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 12; Sept. Deut. xxxiii. 19;
and the fem. form 7 mapadia in Deut. i. 7; Josh. ix. 1;
Judith i. 7 ; iii. 6; v. 2, 23; vii. 8; 1 Mace. xi. 8; xv. 38);
Hadt. 7, 185; often in Polyb.; Joseph. antt. 12, 7, 1).*
mTap-addayh, -7s, 7, (mapadAdoow), variation, change:
Jas. i. 17. (Aeschyl., Plat., Polyb., al.)*
mapa-Aoyitopar; (see mapa, IV. 2) ; a. to reckon
wrong, miscount: Dem. p. 822, 25; 1037, 15. b. to
cheat by false reckoning (Aeschin., Aristot.) ; to deceive
by false reasoning (joined to e€ararav, Epict. diss. 2, 20,
7); hence c. univ. to deceive, delude, circumvent:
ria, Col. ii. 4; Jas. i. 22, (Sept. several times for 79).*
mapa-AutiKds, -7, -dv, (fr. mapadva, q. v.), paralytic, i. e.
suffering from the relaxing of the nerves of one side;
univ. disabled, weak of limb, [A. V. palsied, sick of the
palsy]: Mt. iv. 245 viii. 6; ix. 2,6; Mk. ii. 83-5, 9; and
L WH mrg. in Lk. v. 24. [Cf. Riehm, HWB.+5. v.
Krankheiten, 5; B.D. Am. ed. p. 1866.] *
mapa-Avw: [pf. pass. ptep. mapadeAuuévos]; prop. to
loose on one side or from the side (cf. mapa, IV. 1]; te
loose or part things placed side by side ; to loosen, dissolve,
TAPALEV®
hence, to weaken, enfeeble : mapadedupévos, suffering from
the relaxing of the nerves, unstrung, weak of limb, [ palsied],
Lk. v. 18, 24 ({not L WH mrg.] see mapadurixds) ; Acts
Vili. 7; ix. 33; mapadeX. yévara, i.e. tottering, weakened,
feeble knees, Heb. xii. 12; Is. xxxv. 3; Sir. xxv. 23;
xeipes mapaden. Ezek. vii. 27 ; Jer. vi. 24; [xxvii (1) 15,
43]; mapedvovro ai deécai, of combatants, Joseph. b. j. 3,
8, 6; mapehvOn k. od« édvvaro ért Nadja Aéyov, 1 Mace.
ix. 55, where cf. Grimm; oopatinn Svuvdawer mapadenr.
Polyb. 32, 23, 15; rots oadpaar kal rais Wuyais, id. 20, 10,
oe
Twapa-peve ; fut. tapaper@; 1 aor. ptep. mapapeivas; fr.
Hom. down; to remain beside, continue always near, lich:
mapd, 1V. 1]: Heb. vii. 23; opp. to dmeAndubévat, Jas. i.
25 (and continues to do so, not departing till all stains
are washed away, cf. vs. 24) ; with one, mpéds twa, 1 Co.
Xvi. 6; tui (as often in Grk. auth.), to survive, remain
alive (Hdt. 1, 30), Phil. i. 25 L T Tr WH [where Bp.
Lghtft.: “apapev@ is relative, while ped is absolute.”
Comp. : oup-mapapéva. |*
Tapa-pudeopar, -odpar; 1 aor. mapeuvOnoduny ; fr. Hom.
down; to speak to, address one, whether by way of ad-
monition and incentive, or to calm and console; hence i. q.
to encourage, console: twa, Jn. xi. 31; 1 Th.ii. 12 (11);
v. 14; ruvd epi twos, Jn. xi. 19.*
mapapv0la, -as, 7, (mapayvOdoua), in class. Grk. any
address, whether made for the purpose of persuading,
or of arousing and stimulating, or of calming and consol-
ing; once in the N. T., like the Lat. allocutio (Sen. ad
Mare.1; ad Helv. 1), i. q. consolation, comfort: 1 Co. xiv.
8. (So Plat. Ax. p. 365 a.; Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3;
Joseph. b. j. 3, 7,15; Leian. dial. mort. 15, 3; Ael. v. h.
12, 1 fin.) *
mapapvOov, -ov, Td, (mapapvOéouac), persuasive address:
Phil. ii. 1. (consolation, Sap. iii. 18 and often in Grk.
writ. [fr. Soph., Thuc., Plat. on ].) *
mapayvopew, -& ; to be a mapdvopos, to act contrary to law,
to break the law: Acts xxiii. 3. (Sept.; Thuc., Xen.,
Plat., sqq.) *
mapavopu.ia, -as, 7, (mapdvopos [fr. mapa (q. v. IV. 2) and
vépos]), breach of law, transgression, wickedness: 2 Pet.
ii. 16. (Thuc., Plat., Dem., al.; Sept.) *
mapa-mixpatve: 1 aor. mapemixpava; (see mapd, IV. 3);
Sept. chiefly for 77, 1777}, to be rebellious, contuma-
cious, refractory; also for 1D, D’yd7, etc.; to provoke,
exasperate; to rouse to indignation: absol. (yet so that
God is thought of as the one provoked), Heb. iii. 16,
~as in Ps. ev. (evi.) 7; lxv. (Ixvi.) 7; Ixvii. (Axviil.) 7;
Ezek. ii. 5-8; with rov bedy added, Jer. xxxix. (xxxil.) 29;
li. (xliv.) 8,8; Ps. v.11; Ezek. xx. 21, and often; in pass.,
Lam. i. 20; joined with épyi¢ecOa, Philo de alleg. legg.
iii. § 38; w. mAnpodoba dpyfs Sixaias, vita Moys. i. § 55
[al. rdvu mixp.]; mapamixpaivew x. mapopyitew, de somn.
li. § 26.*
mwapa-mikpacpss, -od, 6, (mapamixpaivw), provocation: év
1 mapamikpacpd, when they provoked (angered) me by
rebelliousness, Heb. iii. 8, 15, fr. Ps. xciv. (xev.) 8 (where
Sept. for N27); cf. Num. xvi.*
485
Tapap pew
Twapa-rimrw: 2 aor. ptep. mapamecav; prop. to fall be-
side a pers. or thing; to slip aside ; hence to deviate from
the right path, turn aside, wander : ris 6500, Polyb. 3, 54,
5; metaph. ris ddnOeias, Polyb. 12, 12 (7), 2 [(here ed.
Didot dvréynrat) ; tod KaOnkovros, 8, 13, 8]; i. q. to err,
Polyb. 18, 19,6; é ru, Xen. Hell. 1,6,4. In the Scrip-
tures, to fall away (from the true faith) : from the wor-
ship of Jehovah, Ezek. xiv. 13; xv. 8 (for yD); from
Christianity, Heb. vi. 6.*
wapa-Thew: 1 aor. inf. rapardedoa; to sail by, sail past,
[wapd, [V.1]: w. an ace. of place, Acts xx.16. (Thue.
2, 25; Xen. anab. 6, 2,1; Hell. 1,3,3; Plat. Phaedr. p.
259 a.) *
wapa-tAyjoiov, (neut. of the adj. mapamAjouos), adv.,
near to, almost to: nabevnoe mapamd. Oavdre [cf. W. § 54,
6], Phil. ii. 27, (Thue. 7, 19; in like manner, Polyb.) *
Tapa-tAnoiws, adv., (mapamAnoos, see mapamAnouov),
similarly, in like manner, in the same way: Heb. ii. 14
(where it is equiv. to xara ravra vs. 17, and hence is used
of a similarity which amounts to equality, as in the
phrase dywvifecOat mapamX. to fight with equal advan-
tage, aequo Marte, dt. 1, 77; so too the adj., od dé dvOpa-
tos dv rapamAjatos Trois dAXots, mAHY ye di} Ste TOAUTPaypLaV
kal atdo@ados xrd. the words in which an oriental sage
endeavors to tame the pride of Alexander the Great,
Arr. exp. Alex. 7, 1, 9 (6)).*
Twapa-ropevonat; impf. maperopevdpny ; fr. Aristot. and
Polyb. down; Sept. for 123%; to proceed at the side, go
past, pass by: Mt. xxvii. 39; Mk. xi. 20; xv. 293; dva rev
oropiuwy, to go along through the grain-fields so that he
had the grain on either side of him as he walked [see
movewo, I. 1 a. and c.], Mk. ii. 23 RGT WHurg.; da
rijs Tadcdalas, Vulg. praetergredi Galilaeam, i.e.“ obiter
proficiset per Galilaeam,” i. e. ‘they passed right along
through, intent on finishing the journey, and not stopping
to receive hospitality or to instruct the people’ (Fritz-
sche), Mk. ix. 30 [but L txt. Tr txt. WH txt. eopedvovro] ;
01a TGv 6piwv, Deut. ii. 4. [Syn. cf. mapaBaiva, fin.]*
Tapd-rrapa, -Tos, TO, (mapaminta, q.V-) ; 1. prop.
a fall beside or near something ; but nowhere found in
this sense. 2. trop. a lapse or deviation from truth
and uprightness; a sin, misdeed, [R. V. trespass, ‘ differ-
ing from dépdprnua (q. v.) in figure not in force’
(Fritzsche) ; cf. Trench § lxvi.]: Mt. vi. 14,[15*G T om.
WHbr.], 15°; xviii. 35 Rec.; Mk. xi. 25,26 RGL; Ro.
iv. 25; v. 15-18, 20; xi. 11sq.; 2Co.v.19; Gal. vi. 15
Eph. i. 7; ii. 1,5; Col. ii. 13; Jas. v. 16 (where LT Tr
WH dyaprias). (Polyb. 9, 10,6; Sap. iii. 13; x. 1;
Sept. several times for oyn, oy, pwa, etc.; of liter-
ary faults, Longin. 36, 2.) *
mapa-ppéw; (apd and pew); fr. Soph., Xen., and Plat.
down ; to flow past (mapappéor vdwp, Is. xliv. 4), to glide
by : pnmore mapappueper (2 aor. pass. subjunc.; cf. Bitm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 287; [Veitch s. v. éo; WH. App. p. 170];
but LT Tr WH apapvaper; see P, p), lest we be carried
past, pass by, [R. V. drift away from them] (missing the
thing), i.e. lest the salvation which the things heard
show us how to obtain slip away from us, Heb. ii.1. In
TAPAON (LOS
Grk. auth. mappapet poi m1, a thing escapes me, Soph.
Philoct. 653; trop. slips from my mind, Plat. legg. 6 p.
781 a.; in the sense of neglect, yi mappapugs, Thpyoov dé
€pny Bovdnv, Prov. iii. 21.*
mapdonpos, -ov, (mapa [q. v- IV. 2], and ojpa[amark)) ;
1. marked falsely, spurious, counterfeit ; as coin. 2.
marked beside or on the margin; so of noteworthy words,
which the reader of a book marks on the margin;
hence 3. univ. noted, marked, conspicuous, remark-
able, (of persons, in a bad sense, notorious); marked with
a sign: év rol mapaonpe Avooxovposs, in a ship marked
with the image or figure of the Dioscuri, Acts xxviii. 11
[cf. B. D. s. v. Castor and Pollux].*
mapa-ckevatw; pf. pass. maperxevacpar ; fut. mid. mapa-
oxevacopa ; fr. Hdt. down; to make ready, prepare: sc.
rd Seinvoy (added in Hdt. 9, 82; Athen. 4, 15 p. 138),
Acts x. 10 (cupmdotov, Hdt. 9,15; 2 Mace. ii. 27). Mid.
to make one’s self ready, to prepare one’s self, [cf. W. § 38,
2a.]: eis méAeuov, 1 Co. xiv. 8 (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 42; es
pdayny, eis vavpayiay, etc., in Xen.). Pf. pass. in mid.
sense, to have prepared one’s self, to be prepared or ready,
2 Co. ix. 2sq. (see Matthiae § 493).*
mapa-ckevt, -7s, 7, fr. Hdt. down;
ready, preparation, equipping. 2. that which is pre-
pared, equipment. 3. inthe N. T. in a Jewish sense,
the day of preparation, i.e. the day on which the Jews
made the necessary preparation to celebrate a sabbath
or afeast: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk.xv.42; Lk. xxiii. 54; Jn.
xix. 31, (Joseph. antt. 16,6, 2); with a gen. of the obj.,
tov macxa [acc. to W.189 (177 sq.) a possess. gen. ], Jn.
xix. 14 (ef. Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 31 sq.); Ww. a gen.
of the subj., rav “Iovdaiwy, ibid. 42. Cf. Bleek, Beitrage
zur Evangelienkritik, p. 114 sqq.; [on later usage cf.
‘Teaching’ 8, 1 (and Harnack’s note); Mart. Polye. 7,
1 (and Zahn’s note); Soph. Lex. s. v. 3].*
mapa-relvw: 1 aor. mapereva; fr. Hdt. down; to extend
beside, to stretch out lengthwise, to extend ; to prolong: tov
Aédyov, his discourse, Acts xx. 7 (Adyous, Aristot. poet. 17,
5 p. 1455°, 2; pidov, 9, 4 p. 1451°, 38).*
mapa-Tpéw, -@: impf. 3 pers. plur. rapernpovv; 1 aor.
mapetnpnoa; Mid., pres. maparnpodpat; impf. 3 pers. plur.
mapetnpovrro ; prop. to stand beside and watch [cf. mapa,
IV. 1]; to watch assiduously, observe carefully ; a.
to watch, attend to, with the eyes: 1a ék tov ovpavod yt-
yvopeva, of auguries, Dio Cass. 38, 13; rivd, one, to see
what he is going to do (Xen. mem. 3, 14, 4); contextu-
ally in a bad sense, to watch insidiously, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr
mrg. droxwpnoavres] (joined with évedpevew, Polyb. 17,
3, 2); rua (Polyb. 11, 9, 9; Sept. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 12;
Sus. 16) foll. by the interrog. et, Mk. iii. 2R GT WH Tr
txt.; Lk. vi. 7 Rec.; mid. to watch for one’s self: Mk. iii.
2 L Tr mrg.; Lk. vi. 7 LT Tr WH, [(in both pass. foll.
by interrog. e?)]; Lk. xiv.1; active w. an ace. of place
(Polyb. 1, 29, 4): rds midas [foll. by das, cf. B. 237
1. a making
(205)], Acts ix. 24RG, where L T Tr WH give mid. .
mapernpovrto. b. fo observe i. q. to keep scrupulously ;
to neglect nothing requisite to the religious observance of:
<Bdouddas, Joseph. antt. 3, 5,5; [riv ray caBB. MEpav,
486
mapappovia
id. 14, 10, 25]; mid. (for one’s self, i. e. for one’s salva-
tion), nuépas, unvas, katpovs, Gal. iv. 10 (60a mpoorarrov-
aw of vdpuot, Dio Cass. 53,10; [ra eis Bp@ow ov vevopit-
opéva, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 39, 2]).*
mapa-Thpycts, -ews, 7, (maparnpéw), observation ([Polyb.
16, 22, 8], Diod., Joseph., Antonin., Plut., al.) : wera mapa-.
tnpjoews, in such a manner that it can be watched with’
the eyes, i. e. in a visible manner, Lk. xvii. 20.*
mapa-rlOnp.; fut. mapadjow; 1 aor. mapéOnxa; 2 aor.
subjune. 3 pers. plur. mapa@aovy, infin. mapabeivar (MK.
viii. 7 R G) ; Pass., pres. ptcp. mapartOéuevos ; 1 aor. infin.
mapateOyva (Mk. viii. 7 Lchm.) ; Mid., pres. rapari@epat;
fut. mapadnoopat; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. mapéOevro, impv.
mapabov (2 Tim. ii. 2); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for
DI; 1. to place beside, place near [cf. mapa, LV. 1]
or set before: twi tt, as a. food: Mk. vi. 41; viii.
6sq.; Lk. ix. 16; xi.6; rpame(ay a table, i.e. food placed
on a table, Acts xvi. 34 (Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 7); ra mapa-
ribépeva ipiv, [A. V. such things as are set before you], of
food, Lk. x. 8 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1,30); sing.1Co.x.27. —b.
to set before (one) in teaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6,14; Sept.
Ex. xix. 7): twit mapaBoAnp, Mt. xiii. 24,31. Mid. to set
forth (from one’s self), to explain: foll. by ért, Acts xvii.
3: 2. Mid. to place down (from one’s self or for
one’s self) with any one, to deposit; to intrust, commit to
one’s charge, (Xen. respub. Athen. 2,16; Polyb. 33, 12,
3; Plut. Num. 9; Tob. iv. 1): ri rem, a thing to one to
be cared for, Lk. xii. 48; a thing to be religiously kept
and taught to others, 1 Tim. i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 2; reva
tut, to commend one to another for protection, safety,
etc., Acts xiv. 23; xx. 32, (Diod. 17, 23); ras yuyds to
God, 1 Pet. iv. 19; rd mvedua pov eis xetpas Geov, Lk.
xxl 463° Ps. xex, (xxxt)'6.*
mapa-tuyxdave; fr. Hom. (Il. 11, 74) down; to chance
to be by [cf. mapa, [V. 1], to happen to be present, to meet
by chance: Acts xvii. 17.*
map-aurixa [cf. B. § 146, 4], adv., for the moment: 2
Co. iv.17. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.) *
mapa-hépw: [1 aor. inf. mapevéyca (Lk. xxii. 42 Tdf,,
ef. Veitch p. 669)]; 2 aor. inf. mapeveyxeiy (Lk. xxii. 42
RG), impv. mapéveyxe [(ibid. L Tr WH); pres. pass.
mapapépopa; see reff. s. v. pepo]; 1. to bear to
[ef. mapa, IV. 1], bring to, put before: of food (Hadt.,
Xen., al.). 2. to lead aside [cf. mapa, IV. 2] from
the right course or path, to carry away: Jude 12 [R.V.
carried along] (where Rec. repedép.) ; from the truth,
Heb. xiii. 9 where Rec. repigép., (Plat. Phaedr. p.
265 b.; Plut. Timol. 6; Antonin. 4, 43; Hdian. 8, 4, 7
[4 ed. Bekk.]). 3. to carry past, lead past, i. e. to
cause to pass by, to remove: tt amd twos, Mk. xiv. 36;
Lk. xxii. 42.*
Tapa-ppovew, -4; (mapadpor [fr. mapa (q. v. IV. 2) and
fpny, ‘beside one’s wits’]) ; to be beside one’s self, out of
one’s senses, void of understanding, insane: 2 Co. xi. 23.
(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; once in Sept., Zech.
Wate) ee
wapa-ppovia, -as, 7, (mapappev [see the preceding
word]), madness, insanity: 2 Pet. ii. 16. The Grk. writ
Tapaxerpato
use not this word but mapappoctvy [cf. W. 24; 95
(90) ].*
Tapa-xepate: fut. mapayedow; 1 aor. inf. Tapaxet-
paca; pf. ptcp. mapaxexerpaxds; to winter, pass the wine
ter, with one or ata place: Acts xxvii. 12; 1 Co. xvi. 6;
ev th vnow, Acts xxviii. 11; éxei, Tit. iii. 12. (Dem. p.
909, 15; Polyb. 2, 64,1; Diod. 19, 34; Plut. Sertor. $9
Dio Cass. 40, 4.) *
‘Tapa-xeparia, -as, 7, (mapaxepdtw), a passing the
winter, wintering: Acts xxvii. 12. (Polyb. 3, 34, 6; [8,
35, 1]; Diod. 19, 68.) *
Tapa-xpfpa, (prop. i. q. rapa ro ypyjya; cf. our on the
spot), fr. Hdt. down; immediately, forthwith, instantly:
Mt. xxi. 19sq.; Lk.i. 64; iv. 39; v.25; viii. 44,47, 55;
xiii. 13; xviii. 43; xix. 11; xxii.60; Acts iii. 7; v. 10;
ix. 18 Rec.; xii. 23; xiii.11; xvi. 26 [WH br. mapaxp. |,
33. (Sap. xviii. 17; 2 Mace. iv. 34, 38, ete.; Sept. for
ORNS, Num. vi. 9; xii. 4; Is. xxix. 5; xxx. 13.) *
wapdadts, -ews, 7, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 193; a
pard, panther, leopard ; avery fierce Asiatic and African
animal, having a tawny skin marked with large black
spots [cf. Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 111 sqq.; BB. DD.
8. V. |/:| Rev. xiii. '2.*
wap-<Spevw ; (fr. map-edpos, sitting beside [cf. mapa,
IV. 1]); to sit beside, attend constantly, (Lat. assidere),
(Eur., Polyb., Diod., al.) : ré Ovovacrnpio, to perform
the duties pertaining to the offering of sacrifices and in-
cense, [to wait upon], 1 Co. ix. 18 LT Tr WH (for Rec.
™ po edp.).*
awdp-et ; impf. 3 pers. pl. rapnoav; fut. 3 pers. sing.
mapeorat (Rev. xvii. 8 L T[not (as GTr WH Alf., al.)
mapeora ; see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. §108, Anm. 20; Chandler
§803]); (mapa near, by, [see mapa, IV. 1 fin.] and etui) ;.
Sept. chiefly for 8/3; as in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down
a. to be by, be athand, to have arrived, to be present: of
persons, Lk. xiii. 1; Jn. xi. 28; Acts x. 21; Rev. xvii. 8;
mapav, present (opp. to dav), 1 Co. v. 3; 2 Co. x. 2, 11;
xiii. 2,10; ézi tevos, before one (a judge), Acts xxiv. 19;
émi tin, for (to do) something, Mt. xxvi. 50 Rec.; émi re,
ibid. GL T Tr WH (on which see emi, B. 2 a. ¢.); éva-
mov Geov, in the sight of God, Acts x. 33 [not Trmrg.];
évOade, ib. xvii. 6; mpds twa, with one, Acts xii. 20; 2 Co.
xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20. of time: 6 xatpos mdpeorw,
Jn. vii. 6; rd mapédv, the present, Heb. xii. 11 (3 Mace. v.
17; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. 2b.; [L. and
S.s.v. II.; Soph. Lex.s.v.b.]). of other things: rod eday-
yeriov rod mapévros eis juas, which is come unto (and so
is present among) you, Col. i. 6 (foll. by eis w. an acc. of
place, 1 Mace. xi. 63, and often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt.
down ; see eis, C. 2). b. to be ready, in store, at com-
mand: # mapodoa ddnOea, the truth which ye now hold,
so that there is no need of words to call it to your re-
membrance, 2 Pet. i. 12; (uy) mdpeoriv revi rt, ibid. 9
[A. V. lacketh], and Lehm. in 8 also [where al. tmap-
xovra], (Sap. xi. 22 (21), and often in class. Grk. fr. Hom.
down; cf. Passow u. s.; [L. and S. u. s.]); 7a mapdvra,
possessions, property, [A. V. such things as ye have (cf.
our ‘ what one has by him’)], Heb. xiii. 5 (ols ra mapdvra
487
Tmapeworn
apkel, Fxora rév dddorpiov dpéyovrat, Xen. symp. 4, 42).
[Comp.: cup-mdpeupe. ]*
Tap-eo-dyo: fut. rapecodgw; (see mapd, IV. 1); to ine
troduce or bring in secretly or craftily: aipécets dwXelas,
2 Pet. ii.1. In the same sense of heretics: gxacros idies
kai érépaws iSiav dééav rapeconyayooav, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb.
h.e. 4, 22,5; Soxovce mapetoayery Ta Gppyta avrov...
uvoripta, Orig. philos. [i. q. Hippol. refut. omn. haeres.]
5, 17 fin.; of Marcion, vouitwr cawédv te mapetoayety, ibid.
7, 29 init. ;— passages noted by Hilgenfeld, Zeitschr. f.
wissensch. Theol. 1860, p. 125 sq. (of mpodédrat robs orpa-
Tiras Tapercayaydrres evTds TOY TELyv Kupious THs TAE@S
eroinoay, Diod. 12, 41 [cf. Polyb. 1, 18, 3; 2, 7, 8]. In
other senses in other prof. auth.) *
trap-elo-akTos, -ov, (mapecoayw), secretly or surreptitiously’
brought in; [A. V. privily brought in]; one who has stolen
in (Vulg. subintroductus): Gal. ii.4; cf. C. F. A. Fritz-
sche in Fritzschiorum opusce. p. 181 sq.*
twap-e.o-Stw or mapecoduvw: 1 aor. mapecédvaa [acc. to
class. usage trans., cf. diyw; (see below)]; to enter se-
cretly, slip in stealthily; to steal in; [A. V. creep in un-
awares|: Jude 4 [here WH mapewoedinoay, 3 pers. plur.
2 aor. pass. (with mid. or intrans. force) ; see their App.
p- 170, and cf. B. 56 (49); Veitch s. v. dvo, fin.]; cf. the
expressions mapeiadvow mdavns rovetv, Barn. ep. 2, 10;
exe, ibid. 4,9. (Hippocr., Hdian. 1, 6,2; 7,9, 18[8 ed.
Bekk.; Philo de spec. legg. §15]; Plut., Galen, al.) *
Tap-e.o-épxopar: 2 aor. maperonAOov ; 1. to come
in secretly or by stealth [cf. mapa, IV. 1], to creep or steal
in, (Vulg. subintroeo): Gal. ii. 4 (Polyb. 1, 7,3; 1, 8, 4;
[esp.] 2, 55,3; Philo de opif. mund. § 52; de Abrah.
§ 19, ete.; Plut. Poplic. 17; Clem. homil. 2, 23). ie
to enter in addition, come in besides, (Vulg. subintro): Ro.
Vien zOmetenl 2ee
mwap-eo-pépw: 1 aor. maperonveyka ; a. to bring in
besides (Dem., al.). b. to contribute besides to some-
thing: oovdny, 2 Pet. i. 5 [R. V. adding on your part].*
aap-exros (for which the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down use
mapek, mape§) ; 1. prep. w. gen. [cf. W. § 54, 6], ex-
cept; with the exception of (a thing, expressed by the
gen.): Mt. v. 32; xix.9 LWH mrg.; Acts xxvi. 29,
(Deut. i. 36 Aq.; Test. xii. Patr. p. 631; [‘Teaching’ 6,
§ 1]; Geop. 13, 15, 7). 2. adv. besides : ra mapextos
sc. ywopeva, the things that occur besides or in addition,
2Co. xi. 28 [cf. our ‘extra matters’; al. the things that
I omit; but see Meyer ].*
arap-ep-PddAdw : fut. mrapeyBaro; fr. Arstph. and Dem.
down; 1. to cast in by the side of or besides (cf. mapa,
IV. 1], to insert, interpose ; to bring back into line. 2
from Polyb. on, in military usage, to assign to soldiers a
place, whether in camp or in line of battle, to draw up in
line, to encamp (often in 1 Macc., and in Sept. where for
myn) : rut xapaxa, to cast up a bank about a city, Lk. xix.
43 Lmrg. T WH txt.*
arap-ep-Bodt,, -7s, 7), (fr. mapepBadro, q. V-) 5 1. in-
terpolation, insertion (into a discourse of matters foreign
to the subject in hand, Aeschin.). 2. In the Maced.
dialect (cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 30; Lob.
TApEVvVOKNEW
ad Phryn. p. 377; [W. 22]) an encampment (Polyb.,
Diod., Joseph., Plut.) ; a. the camp of the Israel-
ites in the desert (an enclosure within which their tents
were pitched), Ex. xxix. 14; xix. 17; xxxii. 17; hence
in Heb. xiii. 11 used for the city of Jerusalem, inasmuch
as that was to the Israelites what formerly the encamp-
ment had been in the desert ; of the sacred congregation
or assembly of Israel, as that had been gathered formerly
in camps in the wilderness, ib. 13. b. the bar-
racks of the Roman soldiers, which at Jerusalem were in
the castle Antonia: Acts xxi. 34,37; xxii. 24; xxiii. 10,
16, 32. 3. an army in line of battle: Heb. xi. 34;
Rev. xx. 9 [here A. V. camp], (Ex. xiv. 19, 20; Judg. iv.
16; viii. 11; 1S. xiv.16; very often in Polyb.; Ael. v.h.
14,46). Often in Sept. for 73M, which signifies both
camp and army; freq. in both senses in 1 Macc.; cf.
Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 3.*
TAP-Ev-0XAEW, -@; (See evoyAew) ; to cause trouble in a
matter (mapa equiv. to mapa tux mpaypatt), to trouble,
annoy: twi, Acts xv. 19. (Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Epict., Leian., al.) *
trap-ert-Sny.os, -ov, (see emiOnuew), prop. one who comes
from a foreign country into a city or land to reside there
by the side of the natives; hence stranger; sojourning in a
strange place, a foreigner, (Polyb. 32, 22,4; Athen. 5
p-196a.); inthe N. T. metaph. in ref. to heaven as the
native country, one who sojourns on earth: so of Chris-
tians, 1 Pet. i.1; joined with maporxou, 1 Pet. ii. 11, cf.
i. 17, (Christians zrarpidas oixodow iSias, GAN’ ws mapotkot-
peTéexovor mavT@v ws moNirat, Kal wav dmopevovtw ws
Eévor- maa E€vn rarpis €orw aitay, kai maca tatpis Eévn,
Ep. ad Diogn.c.5); of the patriarchs, &évou x. taper (Sypot
én ths yns, Heb. xi. 13 (Gen. xxiii. 4; Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.)
13; mapemidyuia tis eotwv 6 Bios, Aeschin. dial. Socr. 3, 3,
where see Fischer).*
map-épxonar; fut. rapedevoouar ; pf. mapeAnAvOa; 2 aor.
tapndOoy, 3 pers. impy. mapeAOarw (Mt. xxvi. 39 L T Tr
WH; see drépxopat, init.) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly
for V1} ; 1. (wapa past [cf. mapa, IV. 1]) to go past,
pass by ; a. prop. a. of persons moving forward:
to pass by, absol. Lk. xviii. 37; twa, to go past one, Mk.
vi. 48; w.an acc. of place, Acts xvi. 8 (Hom. II. 8, 239;
Xen. an. 4, 2,12; Plat. Ale. 1 p. 123 b.); dua ras 6500
exeivns, Mt. viii. 28. B. of time: Mt. xiv. 15; 6 mape-
AnAvdas xpdvos [ A. V. the time past], 1 Pet. iv. 3, (Soph.,
Isocr., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.) ; of an act continuing for
a time [viz. the Fast], Acts xxvii. 9. (rd mapedOdvra
and ra émévra are distinguished in Ael. v.h.14,6.) __ b.
metaph. a. to pass away, perish: &s avOos, Jas. i. 10;
6 ovpavds, Mt. v.18; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. xvi. 17;
xxi, 33; 2 Pet. iii, 10; Rev. xxi. 1 Rec.; 4 yeved adrn,
Mt. xxiv. 34; Mk. xiii. 30 sq.; Lk. xxi. 32; of Adyou pov,
Mt. xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. xxi. 33; ra adpxata ma-
pirdev, 2 Co. v.17, (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 36; Dan. vii. 14
Theodot.; Sap. ii.4; v.9; Dem. p. 291,12; Theoer. 27,
8). Here belongs also Mt. v. 18 (‘not even the small-
est part shall pass away from the law,’ i.e. soas no longer
to belong to it). B. to pass by ( pass over), i. e. to neg-
488
mapnyopla
lect, omit, (transgress): w. an acc. of the thing, Lk. xi.
42; xv. 29, (Deut. xvii. 2; Jer. xli. (xxxiv.) 18; Judith
xi. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 22; Avs vdov, Hes. theog. 613; vdpor,
Lys. p. 107, 52; Dem. p. 977, 14). y: to be led by, to
be carried past, be averted: ané twos, from one i. e. so
as not to hit, not to appear to, (2 Chr. ix. 2); mapeA@arw
dr’ énov rd mornpiov, Mt. xxvi. 39; mwapedOeiv, 42 [here G
T Tr WH om. Lbr. dm’ éuod]; dw avrov 7 Spa, Mk. xiv.
35. 2. (mapa to [ef. mapa, IV. 1]) to come near,
come forward, arrive: Lk. xii. 37; xvii. 7; Acts xxiv.
7 Rec. (and in Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down).
[Syn. see mapaBaive, fin. Comp. dvri-rapépxopat. | *
mapecis, -ews, 7, (mapinut, q. V-), pretermission, passing
over, letting pass, neglecting, disregarding : da thy mapeow
. . dvoxf Tov Oeot, because God had patiently let pass
the sins committed previously (to the expiatory death of
Christ), i.e. had tolerated, had not punished (and so
man’s conception of his holiness was in danger of be-
coming dim, if not extinct), Ro. iii. 25, where cf. Fritz-
sche; [Trench § xxxiii. (Hippocr., Dion. Hal., al.)].*
map-exw; impf. wapetyov, 3 pers. plur. rapetyay (Acts
xxvii. 2L T Tr WH; see yo, init., and amépxopat, init.) 5;
fut. 3 pers. sing. mapefe (Lk. vii. 4 RG; see below); 2
aor. 3 pers. plur. rapéoyor, ptep. mapacxeav ; Mid., [pres.
mapéxoua]; impf. maperyduny; fut. 2 pers. sing. mapéEn
(LK. vii. 4 L T Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; Plautus’s prae-
hibeo i. e. praebeo (Lat. prae fr. the Grk. mapai [but see
Curtius §§ 346, 380 (cf. mapa, IV. 1 fin.)]); ie. a.
to reach forth, offer: ri tun, Lk. vi. 29. b. to show,
afford, supply: twi novxiav, Acts xxii. 2; didavOpwriar,
Acts xxvili. 2; mavra, 1 Tim. vi. 17. c. to be the
author of, or to cause one to have; to give, bring, cause,
one something — either unfavorable: xdézouvs, Mt. xxvi.
10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; xviii. 5; Gal. vi. 17 (aap.
mévor, Sir. xxix.4; dyava, Is. vii. 13; mpayyara, very often
fr. Hdt. down; also éxAov, see Passow s. v. dyAos, 3; [Li
and S. s. v. II.]) ;— or favorable : épyaciav, Acts xvi. 16,
and Lehm. in xix. 24; miorw, [A. V. to give assurance],
Acts xvii. 31, on which phrase cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexic.
N. T. pp. 37-39 ; i. g. to occasion (¢nrnjoets, see olkovopia),
1Tim.i. 4. Mid. 1. to offer, show, or present one’s
self: with éavrdv added (W. § 38, 6; [B. § 135, 6]), w.
an acc. of the predicate, rumor, a pattern, Tit. ii. 7; mapd-
devrypa ... todvde éavrdv mapeixero, Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 39;
[Joseph. c. Ap. 2,15, 4]; in the act., Plut. puer. educ. ec.
20 init. 2. to exhibit or offer on one’s own part: rd
Sixavov rois Sovdors, Col. iv. 1; to render or afford from
one’s own resources or by one’s own power: rwi rt, Lk.
vii. 4 (where if we read, with Rec., wapé&e:, it must be
taken as the 3d pers. sing. of the fut. act. [in opp. to W.
§ 13, 2a.], the elders being introduced as talking among
themselves; but undoubtedly the reading rapéén should
be restored [see above ad init.], and the elders are ad-
dressing Jesus; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [and on the construc-
tion, cf. B. § 139, 32]). On the mid. of this verb, ef.
Kriiger §52, 8,2; W.§38, 5 end; [Ellic. and Lghtft. on
Col. u. s.].*
wapnyopla, -as, 7}, (mapryopéw [to address]), prop. an
waplevia
addressing, address; i. e. a. exhortation (4 Mace.
v.11; vi. 1; Apoll. Rh. 2, 1281). b. comfort, solace,
relief, alleviation, consolation: Col. iv.11 [where see Bp.
Lghtft.]. (Aeschyl. Ag. 95; Philo, q. deus immort. § 14;
de somn. i. § 18; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 3; often in Plut.;
Hierocl.) *
mrapbevia, -as, 7), (mupOevos), virginity: Lk. ii. 36. (Jer.
iii. 4; Pind., Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., Plut., Hdian., al. [ef.
Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.].) *
map0evos, -ov, 7), 1. a virgin: Mt. i. 23 (fr. Is.
fviier (4) sMxcxve 5 7, alel cm luk. 1027s A cha xxieOin 1) Co.-vil.
25, 28, 33(34), (fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for mana,
several times for 77y3; twice for my i.e. either a
marriageable maiden, or a young (married) woman, Gen.
xxiv. 43; Is. vii. 14, on which (last) word cf., besides
Gesenius, Thes. p. 1037, Credner, Beitriige u.s.w. ii. p:
197 sqq.; mapGevos of a young bride, newly married wo-
man, Hom. Il. 2, 514); 9 mapé. revos, one’s marriageable
daughter, 1 Co. vii. 36 sqq.; map0. dyv, a pure virgin,
ZC 0. xi. 12: 2. a man who has abstained from all
uncleanness and whoredom attendant on idolatry, and so
has kept his chastity: Rev. xiv. 4, where see De Wette.
In ecel. writ. one who has never had commerce with women ;
so of Joseph, in Fabricius, Cod. pseudepier. Vet. Test. ii.
pp- 92, 98; of Abel and Melchizedek, in Suidas [10 a.
and 2450 b.]; esp. of the apostle John, as in Nonnus,
metaph. ey. Joann. 19, 140 (Jn. xix. 26), qvide mapOévov
via.*
TIdp80s, -ov, 6, a Parthian, an inhabitant of Parthia, a
district of Asia, bounded on the N. by Hyrcania, on the
i. by Ariana, on the 8. by Carmania Deserta, on the W.
by Media; plur. in Acts ii. 9 of the Jewish residents of
Parthia. [B.D.s. v. Parthians; Geo. Rawlinson, Sixth
Great Oriental Monarchy, etc. (Lond. 1873).]*
wap-inpe: 2 aor. inf. mapeivas (Lk. xi. 42 L T Tr WH);
pf. pass. ptep. mapeuevos; fr. Hom. down; 1. to let
pass; to pass by, neglect, (very often in Grk. writ. fr.
Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down), to disregard, omit: ri, Lk.
xi. 42 [RG aduévar] (duaprnpara, to pass over, let go un-
punished, Sir. xxiii. 2; [rywwpiav, Lycurg.148,41]). 2.
to relax, loosen, let go, [see mapa, IV. 2], (e. g. a bow);
pf. pass. ptep. wapemevos, relaxed, unstrung, weakened,
exhausted, (Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) : yetpes, Heb. xii.
12; Sir. ii. 13; xxv. 23, cf. Zeph. iii. 16; Jer. iv. 31;
Gpyol Kat rapewpévor emi épyov dyabdv, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
34, 4 cf. 1.
TAP-LeTAVH, SCC TapicTnL.
wap-(ornpt and (in later writ., and in the N. T. in Ro.
Vi. 13, 16) rapiordve; fut. rapactnocw; 1 aor. mapeornaa ;
2 aor. mapéotny; pf. mapéotnka, ptcp. mapeotnkws and
mapeoras; plupf. 3 pers. plur. rapecoryxeroav (Acts i. 10
[WH sapior.; see tornus, init.]); 1 fut. mid. rapaory-
gona; fr. Hom. down. 1. The pres., impf., fut.
and 1 aor. act. have a transitive sense (Sept. chiefly for
TOI), a. to place beside or near [mapd, IV. 1];
to set at hand; to present; to proffer; to provide: KTH,
Acts xxiii. 24 (odd, 2 Mace. xii. 3); td or ti Tim,
to place a person or thing at one’s disposal, Mt. xxvi.
Cf. mapadio.*
489
TapouKew
53; to present a person for another to see and question,
Acts xxiii. 33; to present or show, twa or ri with an acc.
of the quality which the person or thing exhibits: ofs
mapéotnoev éavtov (avra, Acts i. 3; add, Ro. vi. 13, 16,
19; 2 Co. xi.2; Eph. v.27; 2 Tim. ii. 15, (“te veretum
nobis in Graecia siste,” Cic. ad Att. 10, 16, 6) 5 twa with
a pred. ace. foll. by carevamidv twos, Col. i. 22; éaurdv ds
Looei] teva run, Ro. vi. 13; to bring, lead to, in the sense
of presenting, without a dat.: Acts ix. 41; Col. i. 28.
of sacrifices or of things consecrated to God: ra cdpara
ipov Ovoiav ... 7 Ge, Ro. xii. 1 (so also in prof. auth. :
Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Joseph. antt. 4, 6,4; Lceian. deor. concil.
13; Lat. admoveo, Verg. Aen. 12,171; sisto, Stat. Theb.
4, 445); twa (a first-born) r@ kupie, Lk. ii. 22; to bring
to, bring near, metaphorically, i.e. to bring into one’s fel-
lowship or intimacy: twa 7G Ged, 1 Co. viii. 8; sc. 7G Oe,
2 Co. iv. 14. b. to present (show) by argument, to
prove: ri, Acts xxiv. 13 (Kpict. diss. 2, 23, 47; foll. by
mas, id. 2, 26,4; tui tr, Xen. oec. 13,15 revi, dtr, Jo-
seph. antt. 4, 3, 2; de vita sua § 6). 2. Mid. and
pf., plupf., 2 aor. act., in an intransitive sense (Sept.
chiefly for 1 y, also for 1¥}), to stand beside, stand by
or near, to be at hand, be present; a. univ. to stand
by: ti, to stand beside one, Actsi. 10; ix. 39; xxiii. 2;
Xxvil. 23; 6 mapeotynkas, a by-stander, Mk. xiv. 47, 69
[here T Tr WH sapecréow]; xv. 35 [here Tdf. rape-
otatav, WH mrg. éornkérwr], 39; Jn. xviii. 22 [L mrg.
Tr mrg. rapecrotrer]; 6 mapeotos, Mk. xiv. 70; Jn. xix.
26 [here anarthrous]. b. to appear: w. a pred.
nom. foll. by évemidy twos, Acts iv. 10 [A. V. stand here];
before a judge, Kaioaps, Acts xxvii. 24; mid. ré Bnyarte
tod beov [RG Xpiorod], Ro. xiv. 10. c. to be at
hand, stand ready : of assailants, absol. Acts iv. 26 [A. V.
stood up] (fr. Ps. ii. 2); to be at hand for service, of ser-
vants in attendance on their master (Lat. apparco), rwi,
Esth. iv. 5; évamidv tivos, 1 K. x. 8; évamov rod Geou, of
a presence-angel [A.V. that stand in the presence of
God], Lk. i. 19, ef. Rev. viii. 2; absol. of mapecréres,
them that stood by, Lk. xix. 24; with a’r@ added (viz.
the high-priest), Acts xxiii. 2, 4. d. to stand by to
help, to succor, (Germ. beistehen) : rwi, Ro. xvi. 2; 2 Tim.
iv. 17, (Hom. II. 10, 290; Hes. th. 439 ; Arstph. vesp.
1388; Xen.; Dem. p. 366, 20; 1120, 26, and in other au-
thors). e. to be present; to have come: of time, Mk.
vemos
Tlappevas [prob. contr. fr. Mappevidns ‘steadfast’; cf. W.
103 (97)], ace. -av [cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Parmenas, one of
the seven “deacons” of the primitive church at Jerusa-
lem: Acts vi. 5.* ;
aréip-o80s, -ov, 7), (mapd, near by ; 656s), @ passing by or
passage: ev napddq, in passing, [A. V. by the way], 1 Co.
xvi. 7. (Thue. 1, 126; v. 4; Polyb. 5, 68, 8; Cic. ad
Att. 5, 20, 2; Lcian. dial. deor. 24, 2.) *
map-o1Kew, -@; 1 aor. mapexyoa ; 1. prop. to dwell
beside (one) or in one’s neighborhood [mapa, IV. 1]; to live
near; (Xen., Thuc., Isocr., al.). 2. in the Scrip-
tures to be or dwell in a place as a stranger, to sojourn,
(Sept. for 733, several times also for 1) and 13w) : foll.
mTapoiKia
by év w. a dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 18 RL (Gen. xx. 1;
xxi. 84; xxvi. 3; Ex. xii. 40 cod. Alex.; Lev. xviii.
3 [Ald.], ete.); w. an acc. of place, ibid. GT Tr WH
(Gen. xvii. 8; Ex. vi.4); e?s w. acc. of place (in pregn.
constr.; see eis, C. 2), Heb. xi. 9. (Metaph. and absol.
to dwell on the earth, Philo de cherub. § 34 (cf. Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 and Lghtft. and Harnack ad loc. ; Holtz
mann, Einl. ins N. T. p. 484sq. SyN. see xarockéw. ].) *
map-orxla, -as, }, (mapotkéw, q. V.), a bibl. and eccl. word,
a dwelling near or with one; hence a sojourning, dwelling
in a strange land: prop. Acts xiii. 17 (2 Esdr. viii. 35;
Ps. exix. (cxx.) 5; Sap. xix. 10; Prol. of Sir. 21; ef. Fritz-
sche on Judith v. 9). Metaph. the life of man here on
earth, likened to a sojourning: 1 Pet. i. 17 (Gen. xlvii.
9); see mapemidnpos [and reff. under mapotkew }.*
awép-ouKos, -ov, (mapa and oikos) ; 1. in class. Grk.
dwelling near, neighboring. 2. in the Scriptures a
stranger, foreigner, one who lives in a place without the
right of citizenship; [R. V. sojourner]; Sept. for 3 and
AWN (see mapotxéw 2, and rraporxia, [and cf. Schmidt, Syn.
43,5; L.and S8.s.v.]): foll. by év w. dat. of place, Acts
vii. 6, 29; metaph. without citizenship in God’s kingdom:
joined with £évos and opp. to cuprodirns, Eph. ii. 19
(pOvos KUptos 6 Oeds moXITHs eoTi, mapotkov Sé Kal émnAvrov
170 yevntov dmav, Philo de cherub. § 34 [cf. Mangey i. 161
note]); one who lives on earth as a stranger, a sojourner
on the earth: joined with mapemidnpos (q. v-), of Chris-
tians, whose fatherland is heaven, 1 Pet.ii.11. [Cf. Ep.
ad Diognet. § 5, 5.]*
mapotpia, -as, 7, (mapa by, aside from [cf. rapa, IV. 2],
and oinos way), prop. a saying out of the usual course or
deviating from the usual manner of speaking [cf. Suidas
654, 15; but Hesych. s. v. et al. ‘a saying heard by the
wayside’ (apd, IV. 1), i. e. a current or trite saying, prov-
erb; cf. Curtius §611; Steph. Thes. s. v.], hence 1.
a clever and sententious saying, a proverb, (Aeschyl. Ag.
264; Soph., Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.; exx. fr. Philo are
given by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien, p. 292 sq. [as de
ebriet. § 20; de Abr. § 40; de vit. Moys. i. § 28; ii. § 5;
de exsecrat. § 6]; for own in Prov. i. 1; xxv. 1 cod.
Alex.; Sir. vi. 35, etc.) : 7d THs mapowmias, what is in the
proverb (Lcian. dial. mort. 6, 2; 8,1), 2 Pet. ii. 22. a
any dark saying which shadows forth some didactic truth,
esp. a symbolic or figurative saying: mapouiay réyew, In.
XVi. 29; év mapoupias Aadeiv, ibid. 25; speech or discourse
in which a thing is illustrated by the use of similes and
comparisons ; an allegory, i.e. extended and elaborate
metaphor: Jn. x. 6.*
map-owos, -ov, a later Grk. word for the earlier zap-
oimos, (mapa [q. v. IV.1] and otvos, one who sits long at
his wine), given to wine, drunken: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. i.
7; [al. give it the secondary sense, ‘quarrelsome over
wine’; hence, brawling, abusive].*
map-olxopar: pf. ptep. mapwxnuevos; to go by, pass by:
as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 10, 252 down, of time, Acts
XLV 6s"
map-opordtw; (fr. mapdporos, and this fr. wapd [q. v. IV.
1 (?)] and Gpoos); to be like; to be not unlike: Mt. xxiii.
490
Tapova la
27 RGTTrmrg. WH txt. (Several times also in eccl.
writ.) *
map-dpovos, -ov, (also of three term. [see dpovos, init.]),
like: Mk. vii. 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the cl.], 13. (Hdt.,
Thuc., Xen., Dem., Polyb., Diod., al.) *
map-oftvw: prop. to make sharp, to sharpen, [mapd, IV.
3]: rv payatpay, Deut. xxxii. 41. Metaph. (so always
in prof. auth. fr. Eur., Thuc., Xen., down), a. to
stimulate, spur on, urge, (arpds Tt, émi tt). b. to irri-
tate, provoke, rouse to anger; Pass., pres. rapo€vvopat;
impf. mapwEvvdpunv: Acts xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiii. 5. Sept.
chiefly for 782 to scorn, despise; besides for D°y3 to
provoke, make angry, Deut. ix. 18; Ps. ev. (evi.) 29; Is.
lxv. 3; for yypn to exasperate, Deut. ix. 7, 22, etc.; pass.
for NN to burn with anger, Hos. viii. 5; Zech. x. 3, and
for other verbs.*
mapotuopds, -ov, 6, (mapokvve, q. V-) 5 1. an incit-
ing, incitement: eis map. ayamns [A. V. to provoke unto
love], Heb. x. 24. 2. irritation, [R. V. contention]:
Acts xv. 39; Sept. twice for SP» violent anger, passion,
Deut. xxix. 28; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 37; Dem. p. 1105,
24.*™
map-opy(tw; Attic fut. [cf. B.37 (32); WH. App. 163]
mapopyt@; to rouse to wrath, to provoke, exasperate, anger,
[cf. mapa, IV. 3]: Ro. x. 19; Eph. vi.4; and Lchm. in
Col. iii. 21. (Dem. p. 805, 19; Philo de somn. ii. § 26;
Sept. chiefly for 0°y373.) *
map-opytc pos, -ov, 6, (mapopyifw), indignation, exasper-
ation, wrath: Eph. iv. 26. (1K. xv. 30; 2K. xxiii. 26;
Neh. ix. 18; [Jer. xxi.5 Alex.]; not found in prof. auth.)
[Sywn. ef. Trench § xxxvii.]*
Twap-oTpive: 1 aor. mapotpuva; [drpvve to stir up (cf.
mapa, LV. 3) ]; toincite, stir up : twa, Acts xiii. 50. (Pind.
Ol. 3, 68; Joseph. antt. 7,6, 1; Leian. deor. concil. 4.) *
map-ovcla, -as, 7, (mapav, -ovca, -dv, fr. mapepe q. v.-),
in Grk. auth. fr. the Tragg., Thuc., Plat., down; not
found in Sept. ; 1. presence: 1 Co. xvi. 17; 2 Co.
x. 10; opp. to dovaia, Phil. ii. 12 (2 Mace. xv. 21; [Ar-
istot. phys. 2, 3 p. 195°, 14; metaphys. 4, 2 p. 1013», 14;
meteor. 4, 5 p. 382%, 33 etc.]). 2. the presence of
one coming, hence the coming, arrival, advent, ([Polyb.
3, 41,1. 8]; Judith x. 18; 2 Macc. viii. 12; [Herm. sim.
5, 5,3]): 2Co. vii. 6sq.; 2 Th. ii. 9 (ef. 8 droxadup6noe-
Tat); 7 -+. dA mpos twa, of areturn, Phil. i. 26. In
the N. T. esp. of the advent, i. e. the future, visible, return
from heaven of Jesus, the Messiah, to raise the dead,
hold the last judgment, and set up formally and glorious-
ly the kingdom of God: Mt. xxiv. 3; map. rod viod rod
avOpwrov, [27], 37, 39; rod Kupiov, 1 Th. iii. 13; iv. 15; v.
23; 2 Th.ii.1; Jas.v.7sq.; 2 Pet. iii. 4; Xpscrod, 2 Pet.
i. 163,ctrov, 1 Cosxv. 23: [1 Th. tees 2 baa 8c 2
Pet. iii. 4; [1 Jn. ii. 28]; tHe rod Ocod nuepas, 2 Pet. iii. 12.
It is called in eccles. writ. 4 Sevrépa mapovaia, Ev. Nicod.
ce. 22 fin.; Justin. apol. 1, 52 [where see Otto’s note];
dial. c. Tr. ee. 40, 110, 121; and is opp. to 7 mparn map.
which took place in the incarnation, birth, and earthly
career of Christ, Justin. dial. c. Tr. ec. 52, 121, ef. 14, 32,
49, ete.; (cf. Ignat.ad Phil. 9 (and Lghtft.)]; see Aevais.*
Trapoyris
map-opis, -idos, 7, (mapa [q. v. IV. 1], and dor, on
which see éyadpior) ; 1. a side-dish, a dish of dain-
ties or choice food suited not so much to satisfy as to gratify
the appetite; a side-accompaniment of the more solid food ;
hence i. q. mapéynua; so in Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4 and many
Attic writ. in Athen. 9 p.367 d. sq. 2. the dish itself
_ in which the delicacies are served up: Mt. xxiii. 25, 26 [here
Tom. WH br. wapoy.]; Artem. oneir. 1, 74; Alciphr. 3,
20; Plut. de vitand. aere alien. §2. This latter use of
the word is condemned by the Atticists; ef. Sturz, Lex.
Xen. iii. 463 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 176; [ Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 265 sq.]; Poppo on Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4.*
Twappyncia, -as, 7, (wav and pros; cf. dppyoia silence,
Katdppnots accusation, mpdppyots prediction) ; 1.
freedom in speaking, unreservedness in speech, (Eur.,
Plat., Dem., al.): 4) m. rwés, Acts iv. 13; ypjobae map-
pyaia, 2 Co. iii. 12; wappnoia adverbially,— freely: Nader,
Jn. vii. 13, 26; xviii. 20;— openly, frankly, i. e. without
concealment: Mk. viii. 32; Jn. xi. 14;— without ambi-
guity or circumlocution : eizé nuiv mappyoia (Philem. ed.
Meineke p. 405), Jn. x. 24;— without the use of figures
and comparisons, opp. to é€v mapotmias: Jn. xvi. 25, and
RG in 29 (where L T Tr WH ev rappnoia); év mappnaia,
Sreely, Eph. vi. 19; pera mappnoias, Acts xxviii. 31; eimeiy,
Acts ii. 29; dadeiv, Acts iv. 29, 31. 2. free and
fearless confidence, cheerful courage, boldness, assurance,
(1 Mace. iv. 18; Sap. v.1; Joseph. antt. 9, 10,4; 15, 2,
7; [cf. W. 23]): Phil. i. 20 (opp. to aloyiver Oat, cf. Wie-
singer ad loc.) ; év rioret, resting on, 1 Tim. iii. 13, ef.
Huther ad loc.; éyew mappnoiav ets 71, Heb. x. 19; modAy
pot (€ori) mapp. mpos bpas, 2 Co. vii. 4; of the confidence
impelling one to do something, éyew mapp. with an infin.
of the thing to be done, Philem. 8 [ Test. xii. Patr., test.
Rub. 4]; of the undoubting confidence of Christians rela-
tive to their fellowship with God, Eph. iii. 12; Heb. iii.
6; x. 853 pera mappnotas, Heb. iv. 16; éxew mappyoiar,
opp. to aicyiverOac to be covered with shame, 1 Jn. ii.
28; before the judge, 1 Jn. iv. 17; with mpds rv Oedv
added, 1 Jn. iii. 21; v. 14. 3. the deportment by
which one becomes conspicuous or secures publicity (Philo
de victim. offer. § 12) : év mappnoia, before the public, in
view of all, Jn. vii. 4 (opp. to é€v ro kpunt@) 5 xi. 54 [with-
out év]; Col. ii. 15 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.].*
mappyoidtopar; impf. émappnora¢ouny; 1 aor. émappy-
otacduny ; (mappnaia, q. v-) ; a depon. verb; Vulg. chiefly
jiducialiter ago; to bear one’s self boldly or confident-
ly; 1. to use freedom in speaking, be free-spoken; to
speak freely ([A. V. boldly]): Acts xviii. 26; xix. 8; év
7 dvduate Tod "Incod, relying on the name of Jesus, Acts
ix. 27, 28 (29) ; also éml rH xupi, Acts xiv. 3. 2. to
grow confident, have boldness, show assurance, assume a
bold bearing: eireiv, Acts xiii. 46 [R. V. spake out boldly];
Aareiv, Acts xxvi. 26; mappno. ev ru, in reliance on one
to take courage, foll. by an inf. of the thing to be done:
Aadjoat, Eph. vi. 20; 1 Th.ii. 2. (Xen., Dem., Aeschin.,
Polyb., Philo, Plut., al.; Sept.; Sir. vi. 11.)*
was, maa, Trav, gen. ravrds, maons, Tarts, [ dat. plur.
Lehm. raou ten times, -ow seventy-two times; Tdf. -o«
491
Tas
five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -ow seventy-seven times;
Treg. -ow eighty-two times; WH -ox fourteen times, -ow
sixty-eight times; see N, v (épeAxvorexdv) ], Hebr. 93, [fr.
Hom. down], all, every; it is used
I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous
nouns ; a. any, every one (sc. of the class denoted
by the noun annexed to was); with the Singular: as
may Sévdpor, Mt. iii. 10; maca Ovoia, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH
Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v.11; xv. 13;
Lk. iv. 37; Jn.ii.10; xv.2; Actsii. 43; v.42; Ro. xiv.
11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; raca
Wvx7 avOpwrov, Ro. ii. 9 (maca avOp. ux, Plat. Phaedr.
p: 249e.); maca cuveidnots avOparwy, 2 Co. iv. 2; mas
Aeydpevos Oeds, 2 Th. ii. 4; mas dytos év Xptor@, Phil. iv.
21sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are of the class
indicated by the noun: as mdvres dvOpwmot, Acts xxii. 15;
Ro. v. 12, 18; xii. 17 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 7; xv. 193 aavres
dyrot, Ro. xvi. 15; mavres dyyedou Oeov, Heb. i. 6; mavra
[L T Tr WH ra] &6yn, Rev. xiv. 8; on the phrase raga
adp&, see odp€, 3. b. any and every, of every kind,
[A. V. often all manner of]: maca vécos kat padakia, Mt.
iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1; evdoyia, blessings of every kind, Eph.
i.3; so esp. with nouns designating virtues or vices, emo-
tions, character, condition, to indicate every mode in
which such virtue, vice or emotion manifests itself, or
any object whatever to which the idea expressed by the
noun belongs: — thus, raca éAmis, Acts xxvii. 20; copia,
Acts vii. 22; Col. i. 28; yrdors, Ro. xv. 14; ddicia, doeBeta,
etc., Ro. i. 18, 29; 2Co.x.6; Eph. iv. 19, 31; v.3; onovdn,
2 Co. viii. 7; 2 Pet. 1.5; émOupia, Ro. vii. 8; yapd, Ro.
xv. 13; avrdpketa, 2 Co. ix. 8; ev marti Adyw kK. yrooet,
1 Co. i. 5; codia x. ppovnoe etc. Eph. i. 8; év mr. dyaba-
ovvn x. Suxatoovvn, k. adnOcia, Eph. v. 9; aicOnoet, Phil. i.
9; bmoporn, Ors, etc., 2 Co. i. 4; xii. 12; add, Col. i.
CE oni NGS Pad bails wes) stabi, Ie VAR Teh ls
2 Tim. iv. 2; Tit. ii. 15 (on which see émtrayn)}; iii. 2;
Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. ii. 1; v.10; waca dixatoovwn, i. e. 6 avg
Sixatov, Mt. iii. 15; mwav OéAnpa rod beovd, everything God
wills, Col. iv. 12; maca tmorayn, obedience in all things,
1 Tim. ii. 11; maon ovvetdnoer dyabp, consciousness of
rectitude in all things, Acts xxiii. 1;—or it signifies the
highest degree, the maximum, of the thing which the noun
denotes [ef. W. 110 (105 sq.); Ellicott on Eph. i. 8;
Meyer on Phil. i. 20; Kriger § 50, 11, 9 and 10]: as
pera mdons mappynotas, Acts iv. 29; xxviii. 31; pera mao.
rarewoppoovyns, Acts xx. 19; mpoOvpias, Acts xvii. 115
xapas, Phil. ii. 29, cf. Jas. i. 2; ev aon acareia, Acts
v.23; év mavri PdBo, 1 Pet. ii. 18; maca efovoia, Mt.
xxviii. 18, (wav kpdros, Soph. Phil. 142). c. the
whole (all, Lat. totus): so before proper names of coun-
tries, cities, nations; as, raca ‘IepoodAupa, Mt. ii. 3; mas
"Icpand, Ro. xi. 26; before collective terms, as mas olkos
"Ioparr, Acts ii. 36; maca xriows (see xriows, 2 b.); maca
ypahn (nearly equiv. to the dca mpoeypady in Ro. xv. 4),
2 Tim. iii. 16 (cf. Rothe, Zur Dogmatik, p. 181); naca
yepovata viav "Iopann, Ex. xii. 21; mas trmos Bapaw, Ex.
xiv. 23; av Sicaov €Ovos, Add. to Esth. i. 9; by a some-
what rare usage before other substantives also, as [map
Tas
mpdcomoy ths yis, Acts xvii. 26LTTr WH]; mace
oixodoun, Eph. ii. 21 GL T Tr WH, cf. Harless ad loc.
p- 262 [al. find no necessity here for resorting to this ex-
ceptional use, but render (with R. V.) each several build-
ing (cf. Meyer)]; may réuevos, 3 Mace. i. 13 (where see
Grimm) ; HavAov ... bs év don emuaToAR pynpovever ipar,
Ignat. ad Eph. 12 [(yet cf. Bp. Lghtft.)]; cf. Passow
s.v. mas, 2; [L.and S.s.v. A. II.]; W.§ 18,4; [B.§ 127,
29]; Kriiger § 50, 11,8 to 11; Kitihner ii. 545 sq. 2.
with nouns which have the article, all the, the whole, (see
c. just above): — with the Singular; as, maca 9 ayéAn,
the whole herd, Mt. viii. 32; mas 6 dyXos, Mt. xiii. 2; mas
6 xécpos, Ro. iii. 19; Col. i. 6; maca 4 dds (1. €. all its
inhabitants), Mt. viii. 34; xxi. 10, ete.; maca 7 ‘Iovdaia,
Mt. iii. 5; add, Mt. xxvii. 25; Mk. v.33; Lk.i. 10; Acts
Vitw ll: xee2 sexe 280 eKKT1 SOTO; hive lori xeeluns @1Li@O.
xiii. 2 (miotw kal yyoow in their whole compass and ex-
tent); Eph. iv. 16; Col.i.19; ii. 9,19; Phil.i.3; Heb.
ii. 15; Rev. v.6, etc.; the difference between raca 7 Odiis
[all] and maca Odiis [any] appears in 2 Co. i. 4. mas
6 Xabs od Tos, Lk. ix.13; nacay thy dperdjy exeivny, Mt.
Xvlil. 82; mas placed after the noun has the force of a
predicate: riv kpiow racay dédaxe, the judgment he hath
given wholly [cf. W. 548 (510)], Jn. v. 22; ryv eEovciay
... macav rrovet, Rev. xiii. 12; it is placed between the
article and noun [B. §127, 29; W. 549 (510)], as rév
mdvta xpdvor, i.e. always, Acts xx. 18; add, Gal. v. 14;
1 Tim. i.16 [here L T Tr WH das]; —with a Plural,
all (the totality of the persons or things designated by the
noun): mavras tovs dapxtepets, Mt. ii. 4; add, Mt. iv. 8;
xXi185 Mkhive 13%vil 3359 Lk. i) 6, 48)ssActsrx. 195 48°
Ro. i. 5; xv.11; 1 Co. xii. 26; xv. 25; 2 Co. viii. 18, and
very often; with a demonstr. pron. added, Mt. xxv. 7;
Lk. ii. 19, 51 [here T WH om. L Tr mrg. br. the pron.] ;
mavres is placed after the noun: ras rodews tacas, the cities
all (of them) [cf. W. u.s.], Mt. ix. 35; Acts viii. 40; add,
Mt. x. 30; Lk. vii. 35 [here L Tr WH txt. ravroy ray
etc.]; xii. 7; Acts viii. 40; xvi.26; Ro. xii.4; 1 Co. vii.
AEX MEXIA GX Vet evs 209ml COnxdlee a yelion(ig))is
Phil. i.13; 1 Th.v. 26; 2 Tim. iv. 21 [WH br. w.]; Rev.
viii. 3; of aavres foll. by a noun, Acts xix. 7; xxvii. 37;
rovs kata Ta €Oyn mavras “Iovdaiovs, Acts xxi. 21 [here L
om. Tr br. a. ].
II. without a substantive; 1. mase. and fem.
every one, any one: in the singular, without any addition,
Mk. ix. 49; Lk. xvi. 16; Heb. ii. 9; foll. by a rel. pron.,
mas doris, Mt. vii. 24; x. 32; mas ds, Mt. xix. 29 [LT Tr
WH doris]; Gal. iii. 10; mas ds av (edy Tr WH), whoso-
ever, Acts ii. 21; was e& tay os, Lk. xiv. 33; witha
ptcp. which has not the article [W. 111 (106)]: mavrds
dkovortos (if any one heareth, whoever he is), Mt. xiii. 19;
ravi ddpeidovre juiv, every one owing (if he owe) us any-
thing, unless éeidovre is to be taken substantively, every
debtor of ours, Lk. xi. 4; with a ptcep. which has the ar-
ticle and takes the place of a relative clause [W. u.s.]:
nas 6 dpyt(suevos, every one that is angry, Mt. v. 22; add,
Mt. vii. 8; Lk. vi.47; Jn. iii. 8, 20; vi.45; Acts x. 43 8q.}
xiii. 39; Ro. i. 16; ii. 10; xii. 8; 1 Co. ix. 25; xvi. 163
492
Tas
Gal. iii. 13; 1Jn. ii. 23; iii. 8sq. 6, ete. Plural wdvres,
without any addition, all men: Mt. x. 22; Mk. xiii. 135
Lk. xx. 38; xxi. 17; Jn.i. 7; iii. 31° [in 31°G T WH mrg.
om. the cl.]; v.23; vi.45; xii. 32; Acts xvii. 25; Ro. x.
12; 1 Co. ix. 19; 2 Co. v. 14 (15); Eph. iii. 9 [here T
WH txt.om. Lbr.a.]; of a certain definite whole: all
(the people), Mt. xxi. 26; all (we who hold more liberal
views), 1 Co. viii. 1; all (the members of the church),
ibid. 7; by hyperbole i.q. the great majority, the mul-
titude, Jn. iii. 26; all (just before mentioned), Mt. xiv.
20; xxii. 27 sq.; xxvii. 22; Mk. i. 27 [here TTrWH
dravres], 37; vi. 39,42; [xi. 32 Lchm.]; Lk.i. 63; iv. 15;
Jn. ii. 15, 24, and very often; [all (about to be men-
tioned), 8:4 mdvrey sc. rav éyiwy (as is shown by the foll.
kal «rd.), Acts ix. 32]. oi wavres, all taken together, all
collectively, [cf. W. 116 (110)]: of all men, Ro. xi. 32;
of a certain definite whole, Phil. ii. 21; with the 1 pers.
plur. of the verb, 1 Co. x.17; Eph. iv. 13; with a definite
number, in all [cf. B. $127, 29]: qoav 8€ of wavres avdpes
&oet Sexadvo (or Sddexa), Acts xix. 7; queOa ai wacae
Wouxai diaxdovar €Bdounkovra €&, Acts xxvii. 37, (én dvdpas
tovs ravras dvo, Judith iv. 7; éyévovro of mavres ws TeTpa-
xéovot, Joseph. antt. 6, 12, 3; rods mavras eis dioxtXiovs,
id. 4, 7,13 as eivat ras macas deka, Ael. v. h. 12,35; see
other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. was, 5 b.; [L. and
S.s.v. C.]; “relinquitur ergo, ut omnia tria genera sint
causarum,” Cic. de invent. 1,9); of wavres, all those I
have spoken of, 1 Co. ix. 22; 2 Co. v. 14 (15). aavres
dca, all as many as, Mt. xxii. 10; Lk. iv. 40 [here Tr mrg.
WH txt. dr.]; Jn. x.8; Acts v.36 sq.; waves of w. a ptep.,
all (they) that: Mt. iv. 24; Mk.i.32; Lk. ii. 18, 38; Acts
ii. 44; iv.16; Ro.i. 7; x.12; 1Co.i.2; 2Co.i.1; Eph.
vi: 243° PPh. 7; 2) Th: 19105 Hebsin: 1635/2 Ini 15 Revs
xiii. 8; xviii. 19, 24, and often. savres oi sc. dvres: Mt.
v.15; Lk. v.9; Jn. v. 28; Actsii. 39; v.17; xvi. 32; Ro.
ix. 6; 2 Tim. i. 15; 1 Pet. v. 14, ete. mavres with per-
sonal and demonst. pronouns [compare W. 548 (510) ]:
jets mavres, Jn. i. 16; Ro. viii. 32 ; 2 Co. iii. 18; Eph. ii.
35 mdvres nets, Acts li. 32; x. 33; xxvi. 14; xxviii. 2; Ro.
iv. 16; of mavres nueis, 2 Co. v.10; ipets ravres, Acts xx.
25; mavres tpeis, Mt. xxiii. 8; xxvi. 31; Lk. ix. 48; Acts
xxii. 3; Ro. xv. 33; 2 Co. vii. 15; [Gal. iii. 28 RG L
WH); Phil. i. 4, 7 sq. ; 1 Th. i.25 2 Th. iii. 16, 18 ; Tit.
iii. 15; Heb. xiii. 25, ete.; adrol ravres, 1 Co. xv. 103; mavres
avroi, Acts iv. 83; xix. 17; xx. 36; odroe mavres, Acts i.
14; xvil.7; Heb. xi. 13,39; mavres [LT Gz] obro, Acts
ii. 7; of O€ mavres, and they all, Mk. xiv. 64. 2.
Neuter ray, everything, (anything) whatsoever ; a.
in the Sing.: may 74, foll. by a ptep. [on the neut. in a con-
crete and collective sense cf. B. § 128, 1], 1 Co. x. 25, 27;
Eph. v. 13; 1Jn. v.43 way rd se. dv, 1 Jn. ii.163 wav 6,
Ro. xiv. 23; Jn. vi. 37, 39, [R. V. all that]; In. xvii. Po
may 6, te dy or éav, whatsoever, Col. iii. 17, and Rec. in 23.
Joined to prepositions it forms adverbial phrases: 81d
mavtés or duaravrés, always, perpetually, see 8d, A. IL. 1
a.; é€v ravti, either in every condition, or in every matter,
Phil. iv. 6; 1 Th. v. 18; in everything, in every way, on
every side, in every particular or relation, 2 Co. iv. 8; vii.
was
5, 11, 16; xi. 6,9; Eph. v. 24; mdourigerOa, 1 Co. i. 5;
[meptacevew], 2 Co. viii. 7; ev mavri cal ev raow (see
pew, b.), Phil. iv. 12. b. Plural mavra (without the
article [cf.W. 116 (110); Matthiae § 438]) all things; a.
of a certain definite totality or sum of things, the con-
text shewing what things are meant: Mk. iv. 34; vi. 30;
Lk.i.3; [v.28 LT Tr WH]; Jn. iv. 25 [here T Tr WH
Gr.]; Ro. viii. 28; 2 Co. vi.10; Gal. iv. 1; Phil. ii. 14;
1 Th. v. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Tit.i.15; 1Jn.ii. 27; mdvra
tyov, all ye do with one another, 1 Co. xvi. 14; aavra
yivecOa racw, [A. V. to become all things to all men], i.e.
to adapt one’s self in all ways to the needs of all, 1 Co.
ix. 22 L T Tr WH (Rec. ré wavra i.e. in all the ways pos-
sible or necessary); ef. Kypke, Obs. ii. p. 215 sq. B.
accusative mayra [adverbially], wholly, altogether, in all
ways, in all things, in all respects: Acts xx. 35; 1 Co. ix.
25; x. 33; xi. 2; cf. Matthiae § 425, 5; Passow ii. p. 764°;
[L. and S. s. v. D. II. 4]. Y: mavra, in an absolute
sense, all things that exist, all created things: Jn. i. 3;
1 Co. ii. 10; xv. 27; Heb. ii. 8 (and L T Tr WH in iii.
4); Eph. i. 22; Col.i.17; 1 Pet.iv.7; Rev. xxi. 5; (in
Ro. ix. 5 mavrey is more fitly taken as gen. mase. [but
see the Comm. ad loc.]). mola éoriv évrodn rpatn mavrov
(gen. neut.; Rec. racév), what commandment is first of
all (things), Mk. xii. 28 (€packe Aéywv kopvddv mavtapv
Tpatny opvOa yevea Oat, mporépay Tis yns, Arstph. av. 472;
Tas Toes . . . Ehevdepody kal Way TwY padiora” Avravdpor,
Thue. 4,52; cf. W. § 27,6; [B.§150,6; Green p. 109];
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 538). 8. with the article [cf. reff.
in b. above], ra mavra; aa. in an absolute sense, ail
things collectively, the totality of created things, the uni-
verse of things: Ro. xi. 36; 1 Co. viii. 6; Eph. ili.9; iv.
10; Phil. iii. 21; Col. i. 16 sq.; Heb.i.3; ii-10; Rev. iv.
11; 7a wdvra €v maot mAnpovoba, to fill the universe of
things in all places, Eph. i. 23 [Rec. om. ra; but al. take
év mw. here modally (see 6. below), al. instrumen-
tally (see Meyer ad loc.)]. BB. in a relative sense:
Mk. iv. 11 [Tdf. om. ra] (the whole substance of saving
teaching); Acts xvii. 25 [not Rec.*] (all the necessities
of life) ; Ro. viii. 32 (all the things that he can give for
our benefit) ; all intelligent beings [al. include things ma-
terial also], Eph. i. 10; Col. i. 20; it serves by its univer-
sality to designate every class of men, all mankind, [cf. W.
§ 27,5; B.§ 128, 1], Gal. iii. 22 (ef. Ro. xi. 32); 1 Tim.
vi. 13; etvac ra [T WH om. 1a] ravra, to avail for, be a
substitute for, to possess supreme authority, kal év racw
(i. e. either with all men or in the minds of all [al. take
raow as neut., cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.]), Col. iii. 11; ta
7 6 Geds ra [L. Tr WH om. 7a] mayra ev rao [neut. acc.
to Grimm (as below) ], i. e. that God may rule supreme by
his spiritual power working within all, ‘may be the im-
manent and controlling principle of life,’ 1 Co. xv. 28,
(so in prof. auth. mdvra or dravra without the article:
mavra nv ev Toiat BaBvAwviocs Zomupos, JB Gli, 83, WR Git
Herm. ad Vig. p. 727; other exx. fr. prof. auth. are given
in Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 230 sq.; Palairet, Observv. p.
407; ef. Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for
1873, p. 394 sqq.); acens. [adverbially, cf. 8. above] ra
493
TaoKxXe
wavra, in all the parts [in which we grow (Meyer)], in all
respects, Eph. iv. 15. The Article in ra mdyra refers—~
in 1 Co. xi. 12 to the things before mentioned (husband
and wife, and their mutual dependence) ; in 2 Co. iv. 15
to ‘all the things that befall me’; in 1 Co. xv. 27sq.;
Phil. iii. 8, to the preceding mavra; in Col. iii. 8 rd rdvra
serves to sum up what follows [W. 107 (102)]. é.
mavra 7a foll. by a ptep. (see mas, mavres, II. 1 above) :
Mt. xviii. 31; Lk. xii. 44; xvii. 10; xviii. 31; xxi. 22;
xxiv. 44; Jn. xviii. 4; Acts x. 33; xxiv.14; Gal. iii. 10;
Ta ravra w. ptep., Lk. ix. 7; Eph. v.13; mdvra ra sc. dvra
(see mas, [wav], mavres, II. 1 and 2 above), Mt. xxiii. 20;
Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 24; mdvra ra &de, se. Svra, Col.
iv. 9; ra kar’ eye, ibid. 7 [see card, II. 3 b.]. {. wavra
and ra mayra with pronouns: ra ua mdvra, Jn. xvii. 10;
mavra Ta éyd, Lk. xv. 31; radra mavta, these things all taken
together [W.548 (510); Fritzsche on Mt. xxiv. 33,34; ef.
Bornemann on Lk. xxi. 36; Lobeck, Paralip. p. 65]: Mt.
iv. 9; vi.33; xiii. 34,51; Lk. xii. 30; xvi. 14; xxi. 36 [a r.
Lurg.]; xxiv. 9 [Tdf. 7. r.]; Acts vii. 50; Ro. viii. 37;
2 Pet. iii. 11; maya radra, all these things [reff. as above]:
Mt. vi. 32; xxiv. 8,33 [T Tr txt. 7.2.], 34 [Trmrg. r. 2.];
Lk. vii. 18; Acts xxiv. 8; 1 Co. xii. 11; Col. iii. 14; 1 Th.
iv.6; the reading varies also between z. r. and r. 7. in Mt.
xix. 20; xxiii. 36; xxiv. 2; mavra ra cupBeBynkdra tadta,
Lk. xxiv. 14; mayra a, Jn.iv. [29 T WH Trmrg. (see next
head) ]; iv. 45 [here L Tr WH éca (see next head) ]; v.
20; Acts x. 39; xiii. 39. y. mavra doa: Mt. vii. 12;
xiii. 46; xvill. 25; xxviii. 20; Mk. xii. 44; Jn. iv. 29 [see ¢
above],45LTrWH; x.41; xvi.15; xvii. 7; Acts iii. 22;
m- oo ay (or éav), Mt. xxi. 22; xxiii. 3; Mk. xi. 24[GL
T Tr WH om. dy]; Acts iii. 22. 8. wavra with prepo-
sitions forms adverbial phrases: mpd mavtav, before or
above all things [see mpd, c.], Jas. v.12; 1 Pet.iv.8. (But
mept mavray, 3 Jn. 2, must not be referred to this head,
as though it signified above all things; it is rather as
respects all things, and depends on evyouna [apparently a
mistake for evododaGa; yet see epi, I. c. a.], cf. Liicke
ad loc., 2d ed. p. 370 [8d ed. p. 462 sq.; Westcott ad
loc.]; W. 373 (350)). [on dia mdvrev, Acts ix. 32, see
1 above.] év racw, in all things, in all ways, altogether :
1 Tim. iii. 11; iv. 15 [Rec.]; 2 Tim. ii. 7; iv. 5; Tit. ii.
9; Heb. xiii. 4,18; 1 Pet. iv. 11, [see also 2 a. fin. above];
én macw, see éri, B. 2 d. p. 233. xara mayvra, in all re-
spects: Acts xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20,22; Heb. ii. 17; iv. 15.
III. with negatives; 1. od mas, not every
one. 2. mas ov (where ov belongs to the verb), no
one, none, see ov, 2 p. 460°; mas py (so that wy must be
joined to the verb), no one, none, in final sentences, Jn.
iii. 15 sq.; vi. 89; xii. 46; 1Co.i. 29; w.animpv. Eph.
iv. 29 (1 Mace. v. 42); mas... od pn w. the aor. subjunc.
(see pn, IV. 2), Rev. xviii. 22.
aéoxa, 76, (Chald. smoa, Heb. moa, fr. 0d to pass
over, to pass over by sparing; the Sept. also constant-
ly use the Chald. form mdcxa, except in 2 Chron. [and
Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 8] where it is pacéx; Josephus has
fdoxa, antt. 5,1,4; 14, 2,1; 17,9, 3; b.j. 2, 1,3), aninde-
clinable noun [W. § 10, 2]; prop. a passing over ; 1.
TacKo
the paschal sacrifice (which was accustomed to be offered
for the people’s deliverance of old from Egypt), or 2:
the paschal lamb, i.e. the lamb which the Israelites were
accustomed to slay and eat on the fourteenth day of the
month Nisan (the first month of their year) in memory
of that day on which their fathers, preparing to depart
from Egypt, were bidden by God to slay and eat a lamb,
and to sprinkle their door-posts with its blood, that the
destroying angel, seeing the blood, might pass over their
dwellings (Ex. xii. sq.; Num.ix.; Deut. xvi.) : @vew 76 7.
(noan onw), Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii. 7, (Ex. xii. 21);
Christ crucified is likened to the slain paschal lamb, 1 Co.
v.73 hayew 76 m., Mt. xxvi. 17; Mk. xiv. 12, 14; Lk.
xxii. 11, 15; Jn. xviii. 28; ndan 52x, 2 Clivsexxxen ld
sq: 3. the paschal supper: éromatew 7d m., Mt.
xxvi. 19; Mk. xiv. 16; Lk. xxii. 8,13; sroceiy 76 z. to cel-
ebrate the paschal meal, Mt. xxvi. 18. 4. the pas-
chal festival, the feast of Passover, extending from the
fourteenth to the twentieth day of the month Nisan: Mt.
KK ey Mkcextvete mk dA lex xi Len nodal ool
Vis4d sexi De exile Xa de XVEM OO xix 4ie Actsrxits
4; wemoinke 76 1. he instituted the Passover (of Moses), Heb.
xi. 28 [cf. W. 272 (256); B. 197 (170)]; yivera 7d zr.
the Passover is celebrated [R. V. cometh], Mt. xxvi. 2.
[See BB.DD. s. v. Passover; Dillmann in Schenkel iv.
p- 892sqq.; andon the question of the relation of the
“Last Supper” to the Jewish Passover, see (in addition
to reff. in BB.DD. u.s.) Kirchner, die Jiidische Passah-
feier u. Jesu letztes Mahl. Gotha, 1870; Keil, Com. iiber
Matth. pp. 513-528; J. B. McClellan, The N. T. ete. i.
pp. 473-494 ; but esp. Schiirer, Ueber hayeiv 76 macxa,
akademische Festschrift (Giessen, 1883). ] *
macxo; 2 aor. émabov ; pf. rémovba (Lk. xiii. 2; Heb.
ii. 18); fr. Hom. down; to be affected or have been af-
fected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undergo; it
is a vox media— used in either a good or a bad sense;
as, 60a memdvOact Kal dca avrois éyévero, of perils and de-
liverance from them, Esth. ix. 26 (for 481); hence
kakas macxew, to suffer sadly, be in bad plight, of a sick
person, Mt. xvii. 15 where L Tr txt. WH txt. x. Zyew (on
the other hand, ed macxew, to be well off; in good case,
often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down). 1. in a bad
sense, of misfortunes, to suffer, to undergo evils, to be
afflicted, (so everywhere in Hom. and Hes.; also in the
other Grk. writ. where it is used absol.): absol., Lk.
xxii. 15; xxiv. 46; Acts i. 3; iii. 18; xvii. 8; 1 Co. xii.
26; Heb. ii. 18; ix. 26; 1 Pet. ii. 19 sq. 283 iii. 173 iv.
15,19; Heb. xiii. 12; odtyoy, a little while, 1 Pet. v. 10;
macxew rt, Mt. xxvii. 19; Mk. ix. 12; Lk. xiii. 2; [xxiv.
26]; Acts xxviii. 5; 2 Tim.i.12; [Heb. v.8 cf. W. 166
(156) a. B. § 143, 10]; Rev. ii. 10; ma6juara mdoyeuw,
2 Co. i. 6; ri dé w. gen. of pers., Mt. xvi. 21; Lk. ix. 22;
xvii. 25; macy. ind w. gen. of pers. Mt. xvii. 12; ri
iad twos, Mk. v. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14; wdoy. brép twos, in
behalf of a pers. or thing, Actsix. 16; Phil.i. 29; 2 Th.
i. 5; with the addition of a dat. of reference or respect
fof. W. § 81, 6], capxi, 1 Pet. iv. 1°; év capki, ibid.» [yet
GLT Tr WH om. év; cf. W. 412 (384) ]; macy. mepi w.
494
TaTnp
gen. of the thing and imép w. gen. of pers. 1 Pet. iii. 18
[RG WH mrg.; cf. W.373 (349) ; 383 (358) note] ; macx.
81a Scxatoovyny, 1 Pet. iii. 14. 2. in a good sense, of
pleasant experiences ; but nowhere so unless either the
adv. ed or an acc. of the thing be added (tmopyjca, doa
nabdvres €& airod (i. €. Oeov) kal mpAikwv evepyeridy peta-
haBdvres dyaparot mpds abtoy yévowro, Joseph. antt. 3, 15,
1; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passow s. v. II. 5;
[L. and S.s.v. II. 2]): Gal. iii. 4, on which see yé, 3 c.
[Come.: mpo-, cup-racxe. ]*
Ildrapa, -dpwv, ra, [cf. W.176 (166) ], Patara, a mar
time city of Lycia, celebrated for an oracle of Apollo:
Acts xxi. 1.[B. D.s. v. Patara; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 99 sq.]*
nataccw: fut. maraéo; 1 aor. éraruéa; Sept. times
without number for 737 (Hiphil of 733, unused in Kal),
also for *)13, etc.; (in Hom. intrans. to beat, of the heart;
fr. Arstph., Soph., Plat., al. on used transitively) ; 1.
to strike gently: ri (as a part or amember of the body),
Acts xii. 7. 2. to strike, smite: absol., év paxaipa,
with the sword, Lk. xxii. 49 ; rwwa, Mt. xxvi.51; Lk. xxii.
50. by a use solely biblical, to afflict; to visit with evils,
etc.: as with a deadly disease, rea, Acts xii. 23; ruva év
w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xi. 6 GL T Tr WH; xix. 15,
(Gen. viii. 21; Num. xiv. 12; Ex. xii. 23, etc.). 3.
by a use solely biblical, to smite down, cut down, to kill,
slay : rwa, Mt. xxvi. 31 and Mk. xiv. 27, (after Zech. xiii.
7); Acts vii. 24.*
mwatéw, -@; fut. sarnow; Pass., pres. ptep. marovpevos;
1 aor. émarnénv; fr. Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Plat. down;
Sept. for ]11, etc. ; to tread, i. e. a. to trample, crush
with the feet: rhv Anvov, Rev. xiv. 20; xix. 15, (Judg. ix.
27; Neh. xiii. 15; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 33; Lam.i.15). b.
to advance by setting foot upon, tread upon: érave dpewv
kal okopriay kal emt macay tiv Svvapw Tod éxOpod, to en-
counter successfully the greatest perils from the machina-
tions and persecutions with which Satan would fain thwart
the preaching of the gospel, Lk. x. 19 (cf. Ps. xe. (xci.)
13). c. to tread under foot, trample on, i. e. treat with
insult and contempt: to desecrate the holy city by devas-
tation and outrage, Lk. xxi. 24; Rev. xi. 2, (fr. Dan.
viii. 13); see karamaréw. [COMP.: kata-, mept-, €u-rept-
marew. | * ;
mwatnp [fr. r. pa; lit. nourisher, protector, upholder;
(Curtius § 348) ], warpds, -rpi, -répa, voc. marep [for which
the nom. 6 marnp is five times used, and (anarthrous)
marnp in Jn. xvii. 21 T Tr WH, 24 and 25LT Tr WH;
ef. B. § 129,5; W.§ 29,2; WH. App. p. 158], plur.
matépes, Tatépwv, tatpdat (Heb. i.1), marépas, 6, [fr. Hom.
down], Sept. for a8, a father; 1. prop., i. q. gener-
ator or male ancestor, and either a. the nearest
ancestor: Mt. ii. 22; iv. 21sq.5 vili. 21; Lk.i.17; Jn.
iv.53; Acts vii.143; 1 Co. v. 1, etc.; of marépes tis capkds,
fathers of the corporeal nature, natural fathers, (opp. te
6 ratnp Tév mvevpatov), Heb. xii. 9; plur. of both par
ents, Heb. xi. 23 (not infreq. in prof. auth., cf. Delitzsch
ad loc.); or _b. a more remote ancestor, the founder
of a race or tribe, progenitor of a people, forefather: so
Abraham is called, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. i. 73; xvi. 24; Jn. viii
TaTHp
39, 55; Acts vii. 2; Ro. iv. 1 Rec., 17 sq.,ete.; Isaac, Ro.
ix. 10; Jacob, Jn. iv. 12; David, Mk. xi. 10; Lk. i. 32;
plur. fathers i. e. ancestors, forefathers, Mt. xxiii. 30, 32;
Lk. vi. 23, 26; xi. 47 sq.; Jn. iv. 20; vi. 31; Acts iii. 13,
25; 1 Co. x. 1, ete., and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down; so too Njax, 1 K. viii. 21; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 5 ete.; in
the stricter sense of the founders of a race, Jn. vii. 22;
ROpixK. O19) x1. 28, c. i. q. one advanced in years, a
senior: 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. 2. metaph.; —a.._ the origi-
nator and transmitter of anything: marjp mepitouijs, Ro.
iv. 12; the author of a family or society of persons ani-
mated by the same spirit as himself: so mr. ravrav tov
muatevdvrwy, Ro. iv. 11, cf. 12, 16, (1 Mace. ii. 54); one
who has infused his own spirit into others, who actuates
and governs their minds, Jn. viii. 38,41 sq. 44; the phrase
€x matpds Twos eivat is used of one who shows himself as
like another in spirit and purpose as though he had in-
herited his nature from him, ibid. 44. b. one who
stands in a father’s place, and looks after another in a
paternal way: 1 Co. iv. 15. c. a title of honor [cf.
Sophocles, Lex. s. v.], applied to a. teachers, as those
to whom pupils trace back the knowledge and training
they have received: Mt. xxiii. 9 (of prophets, 2 K.
Rigas lc2)* Viewe ik). B. the members of the Sanhedrin,
whose prerogative it was, by virtue of the wisdom and
experience in which they excelled, to take charge of the
interests of others: Acts vii. 2; xxii. 1; cf. Gesenius,
Thesaur. i. p. 7°. 3. God is called the Father, a.
trav pore, [A. V. of lights i. e.] of the stars, the heaven-
ly luminaries, because he is their creator, upholder, ruler,
Jas. i. 17. b. of all rational and intelligent beings,
whether angels or men, because he is their creator, pre-
server, guardian and protector: Eph. iii. 14 sq. GL T
Tr WH; roav rvevpdrey, of spiritual beings, Heb. xii. 9;
and, for the same reason, of all men (aatip rod mavros
avOporev yévous, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 24): so in the Syn-
optic Gospels, esp. Matthew, Mt. vi. 4, 8, 15; xxiv. 36;
Wikevie Sosa Xin RISO, o2 NIM vs 21, 23) as, 11-9)
6 marnp 6 év (rots) ovpavois, the Father in heaven, Mt. v.
16945, 48m va. 1, 95) vals 11,21); xvii. 14; Micyxi. 25,26
RGL; Lk. xi. 13 [2& otpavod; cf. B. § 151, 2a.; W. § 66,
6]; 6 mar. 6 ovpavos, the heavenly Father, Mt. vi. 14, 26,
825 XV 13. c. of Christians, as those who through
Christ have been exalted to a specially close and inti-
mate relationship with God, and who no longer dread
him as the stern judge of sinners, but revere him as their
reconciled and loving Father. This conception, com-
mon in the N. T. Epistles, shines forth with especial
brightness in Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6; in John’s use of the
term it seems to include the additional idea of one who
by the power of his Spirit, operative in the gospel, has be-
gotten them anew to a life of holiness (see yervdw, 2 d.):
absol., 2 Co. vi. 18; Eph. ii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 1,14 (13), 16;
iii. 1; Oeds x. warnp mavray, of all Christians, Eph. iv. 6 ;
with the addition of a gen. of quality [W. § 34, 3b.; B.
§ 132, 10], 6 war. rap oixripyar, 2 Co. i. 3; rhs ddEqs, Eph.
}. 17; on the phrases 6 6eds x. marnp ipa, Oeds marnp,
etc., see Geds, 3 p. 288°. d. the Father of Jesus Christ,
49
5 TaTpta
as one whom God has united to himself in the closest
bond of love and intimacy, made acquainted with his
purposes, appointed to explain and carry out among men
the plan of salvation, and (as appears from the teaching
of John) made to share also in his own divine nature;
he is so called, a. by Jesus himself: simply 6 aarnp
(opp. to 6 vids), Mt. xi. 25-27; Lk. x. 21sq.; Jn. v. 20-
23, 26, 36 sq.; x. 15, 30, ete.; 6 marnp pov, Mt. xi. 27;
xxy. 84; xxvi. 53; Lk. x. 22; Jn.v. 17; vill. 19,49; x.
18, 32, and often in John’s Gospel; Rev. ii. 28 (27); iii.
5, 213 with 6 ev rots otpavois added, Mt. vii. 11, 21; x.
32 sq.; xii. 50; xvi17; xviii. 10,19; 6 otpanos, Mt. xv-
13; 6 emovpanos, Mt. xviii. 35 Ree. 8. by the apostles:
Ro. xv. 6; 2-Co.i.3; xi. 31; Eph. i. 33 iti. 14 Rec.; Col.
i.3; Heb.i.5; 1 Pet. i.3; Rev. i. 6. See [ Tholuck
(Bergrede Christi) on Mt. vi. 9; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d.
N. T., Index s. v. Vater; C. Wittichen, Die Idee Gottes
als d. Vaters, (Gottingen, 1865); Westcott, Epp. of St.
John, pp. 27-34, and] below in vids and rékvov.
Ilétpos, -ov, 7, Patmos, a small and rocky island in the
ZEgean Sea, reckoned as one of the Sporades (Thue. 3,
33; Strab. 10 p. 488; Plin. h. n. 4, 23); now called Patmo
or [chiefly “in the middle ages” (Howson) |] Palmosa and
having from four to five thousand Christian inhabitants
(cf. Schubert, Reise in das Morgenland, Th. iii. pp. 425—
443; Bleek, Vorless. tib. die A pokalypse, p. 157; Kneucker
in Schenkel iv. p. 403 sq.; [BB. DD.s.v.]). In it John,
the author of the Apocalypse, says the revelations were
made to him of the approaching consummation of God’s
kingdom: Rev. i. 9. It has been held by the church,
ever since the time of [Just. Mart. (dial. c. Tryph. § 81
p- 308 a. cf. Euseb. h. e. 4, 18, 8; see Charteris, Canon-
icity, ch. xxxiv. and note) and] Iren. adv. haer. 5, 30, that
this John is the Apostle; see Iwavns, 2 and 6.*
matpakwas (Attic marpadoias, Arstph., Plat., Dem. p.
732, 14; Aristot., Leian.), LT Tr WH sarpodgas (see
pnTpad@as), -ov, 6, & parricide: 1 Tim. i. 9.*
marpid, -as, 7, (fr. marnp) 5 1. lineage running back
to some progenitor, ancestry: Hdt. 2,143; 3, 75. 2.
a race or tribe, i.e. a group of families, all those who in a
given people lay claim to a common origin: cict aitéwp
(BaBvA@viov) marptat tpeis, Hdt. 1, 200. The Israelites
were distributed into (twelve) njun, dudai, tribes, de-
scended from the twelve sons of Jacob; these were
divided into njinawn, marprai, deriving their descent
from the several sons of Jacob’s sons; and these in turn
were divided into Nj3NT 3, otkot, houses (or families) ;
cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 193; iii. p. 1463; Win. RWB.
s. v. Stiimme; [Keil, Archaeol. § 140]; hence €& otkov
kat marpias Aavid, i. e. belonging not only to the same
‘house’ (sarpid) as David, but to the very ‘family’ of
David, descended from David himself, Lk. ii. 4 (atra: ai
marptat Tov viev Supewy, Ex. vi. 15 ; 6 avijp adris Mavacons
Ths PvAis avTis kal THs maTpias avris, Judith vill. 2; rap
pvdav xara marpids adrev, Num. i. 16; oikot matpiav, Ex.
xii. 3; Num. i. 2, and often; add, Joseph. antt. 6, 4, 1;
i, i oe aI, By 110). 3. family in a wider sense,
i. q. nation, people : Acts iii. 25 (1 Chr. xvi. 28: Ps. xxi
TATPLAPKNS
(xxii.) 28) ; maoa marpid ev ovpavois (i. e. every order of
angels) kal ért yjs, Eph. iii. 15.*
marpidpxys, -ov, 6, (marpid and dpy@ ; see Exatovrdpxns),
a Hellenistic word [W. 26], a patriarch, founder of a
tribe, progenitor: used of David, Acts ii. 29; of the
twelve sons of Jacob, founders of the several tribes of
Israel, Acts vii. 8sq.; of Abraham, Heb. vii. 4; of the
same and Isaac and Jacob, 4 Mace. vii. 19; xvi. 25;
used for njaxn ws, 1 Chr. xxiv. 31 [but the text here
is uncertain]; for DuIW WW, 1 Chr. xxvii. 22; for
Ninna Ww, 2 Chr. xxiii. 20.*
mrarpiKéds, -7, -6v, (rarnp), paternal, ancestral, i.q. handed
down by or received from one’s fathers: Gal. i. 14.
(Thue., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept.) [Sy¥N. see martp@os,
fin. |*
warpls, -idos, 7, (marnp), one’s native country ; a.
as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, one’s father-land, one’s
(own) country: Jn. iv. 44 [ef. yap, I. 1]; i. q. a fixed
abode (home [R. V. a country of their own], opp. to the
land where one mwapemdnuet), Heb. xi. 14. b. one’s
native (own) place i.e. city: Mt. xiii. 54,57; Mk. vi. 1,
4; Lk. iv. 23, [24]; so Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 36 (€ore b€
pot ‘IepoooAupa matpis) ; Joseph. antt.10, 7,3; 6,4, 6; é
marpis ) AxvAnia jv, Hdian. 8, 3, 2 (1 ed. Bekk.).*
TlarpéBas [al. -Bas, as contr. fr. marpoBis; cf. B. D.
s.v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 176 sq.; Chandler § 32],
ace. -av [ef. B. 19 (17) sq.; W. § 8, 1], Patrobas, a cer-
tain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14.*
matpohwas, See maTpad@as.
matpo-rapd-SoTos, -ov, (marnp and mapadidwp), handed
down from one’s fathers or ancestors: 1 Pet. i. 18 [B. 91
(79)]. (Diod. 4, 8; 15, 74; 17,4; Dion. Hal. antt. 5,
48; Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 34; Euseb. h. e. 4, 23, 10;
10, 4, 16.) *
matpoos (poetic and Ionic rarpaios), -a, -ov, (matnp),
fr. Hom. down, descending from father to son or from
ancestors to their posterity as it were by right of inherit-
ance; received from the fathers: vopos, Acts xxii. 3 (2
Mace. vi.1; Ael. v.h. 6,10); eos, Acts xxiv. 14 (4 Mace.
xii. 19; and often in Grk. writ. Oeot marp., Zeds. arp.
ete.); Ta @n ra mw. Acts xxviii. 17 (Justin dial. c. Tr.
c. 63; aarp. €Oos, Ael. v.h. 7,19 var.).*
[Syn. tratp@os, tatpikds: on the distinction of the
grammarians (see Photius, Suidas, Ammonius, etc. s. vv.)
ace. to which warp@os is used of property descending from
father to son, warpixés of persons in friendship or feud,
etc., see Filendt, Lex. Soph. ii. p. 530 sq.; L. and S.s. v.
matp@os; Schmidt ch. 154.]
Ilathos, -ov, 6, (a Lat. prop. name, Paulus), Paul.
Two persons of this name are mentioned in the N. T.,
viz. 1. Sergius Paulus, a Roman propraetor [pro-
consul; cf. Sépyios, and B. D. s. v. Sergius Paulus], con-
verted to Christ by the agency of the apostle Paul:
Acts xiii. 7. 2. the apostle Paul, whose Hebrew
name was Saul (see SaovA, Saddos). He was born at
Tarsus in Cilicia (Acts ix. 11; xxi. 39; xxii. 3) of Jew-
ish parents (Phil. iii. 5). His father was a Pharisee
(Acts xxiii. 6) and a Roman citizen; hence he himself
496
TAave
was a Roman citizen by birth (Acts xxii. 28; xvi. 37).
He was endowed with remarkable gifts, both moral and
intellectual. He learned the trade of a oxnvorroids (q- V-)-
Brought to Jerusalem in early youth, he was thoroughly
indoctrinated in the Jewish theology by the Pharisee
Gamaliel (Acts xxii. 3; v. 34). At first he attacked
and persecuted the Christians most fiercely; at length,
on his way to Damascus, he was suddenly converted to
Christ by a miracle, and became an indefatigable and
undaunted preacher of Christ and the founder of many
Christian churches. And not only by his unwearied la-
bors did he establish a claim to the undying esteem of
the friends of Christianity, but also by the fact, which
appears from his immortal Epistles, that he caught per-
fectly the mind of his heavenly Master and taught most
unequivocally that salvation was designed by God for all
men who repose a living faith in Jesus Christ, and
that bondage to the Mosaic law is wholly incompatible
with the spiritual liberty of which Christ is the author.
By his zeal and doctrine he drew upon himself the
deadly hatred of the Jews, who at Jerusalem in the year
57 [or 58 acc. to the more common opinion ; yet see the
chronological table in Meyer (or Lange) on Acts; Farrar,
St. Paul, ii. excurs. x.] brought about his imprisonment;
and as a captive he was carried first to Cesarea in Pal-
estine, and two years later to Rome, where he suffered
martyrdom (in the year 64). For the number of those
daily grows smaller who venture to defend the ecclesi-
astical tradition for which Eusebius is responsible (h. e
2, 22, 2) [but of which traces seem to be found in Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 7; can. Murator. (cf. Westcott, Canon,
5th ed. p. 521 sq.)], according to which Paul, released
from this imprisonment, is said to have preached in
Spain and Asia Minor; and subsequently, imprisoned a
second time, to have been at length put to death at Rome
in the year 67 or 68, while Nero was still emperor. [On
this point cf. Meyer on Ro., Introd. §1; Harnack on
Clem. Rom. |. c.; Lghtft. ibid. p.49sq.; Holtzmann, Die
Pastoralbriefe, Ein]. ch. iv. p. 37 sqq.; reff. in Heini-
chen’s note on Euseb. h. e. as above; v. Hofmann, Die
heilige Schrift Neuen Testaments. 5ter Theil p. 4 sqq.;
Farrar, St. Paul, vol. ii. excurs. viii.; Schaff, Hist. of
Apostolic Christ. (1882) p. 331sq.] Paul is mentioned
in the N. T. not only in the Acts and in the Epp. from his
pen, but also in 2 Pet. iii. 15. [For bibliog. reff. respect-
ing his life and its debatable points see the art. Paulus by
Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 vol. xi. pp. 356-
389.]
mavw: 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. mavodre (1 Pet. iii.
10); Mid., pres. ravoua; impf. émavounv; fut. ratcouat
(see dvaravw and éravarav [and on the forms rajvat ete.
ef. further Hilgenfeld, Hermae Pastor, ed. alt. proleg. p.
xviii. note, also his ed. of the ‘Teaching’ 4, 2 note (p. 97)]);
pf. réravpat; 1 aor. émavoduny; fr. Hom. down; to make
to cease or desist: rt or twa amd twos, to restrain [A. V.
refrain] a thing or a person from something, 1 Pet. iii. 10,
fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14; ef. W. § 30,6; [(cf. 326
(305)) ; B. § 132, 5]. Mid. Sept. for o3n, nya, nav,
ITdgos
‘ste, to cease, leave off, [ef. W. 253 (238)]: Lk. viii. 24;
Acts xx. 1; 1 Co. xiii. 8; the action or state desisted
from is indicated by the addition of a pres. ptcp. (cf.
Matthiae § 551 d.; Passows. v. I. 3; [L. and S. I. 4];
W. § 45,4; [B.§ 144, 15]): émavcaro AaAGy, Lk. v. 4 (Gen.
xviii. 33; Num. xvi.31; Deut. xx.9); add, Acts v. 42;
vi. 13; xiii. 10; xx. 31; xxi. 82; Eph. i. 16; Col. i. 9;
Heb. x. 2; the ptcp. is wanting, as being evident fr. the
context, Lk. xi.1. Pass. [ef. W. § 39, 3 and N. 3] wémav-
tat duaprias, hath got release [A. V. hath ceased] from sin,
i. e. is no longer stirred by its incitements and seduc-
tions, 1 Pet. iv. 1; cf. Kypke, Observv. ad loc., and W.
u,s.; [B. § 132,5; but WH txt. duapriats, dat., unto sins.
Comp. : dva-, én-ava-, cvv-ava- (-yar), Kara- Tava |.*
laos [perh. fr. r. meaning ‘to cozen’; ef. Pape, Ei-
gennamen, s. v.], -ov, 7, Paphos [now Bafa], a maritime
city on the island of Cyprus, with a harbor. It was the
residence of the Roman proconsul. “Old Paphos” [now
Kuklia], formerly noted for the worship and shrine of
Venus [Aphrodite], lay some 7 miles or more S. E. of it
(Mela 2, 7; Plin. h. n. 5, 31.35; Tac. hist. 2, 2): Acts
xiii. 6, 13. [Lewin, St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.]*
waxvve: 1 aor. pass. émayvyOnv; (fr. mayvs [thick,
stout]; cf. Bpadvva; taxtve) ; to make thick; to make fat,
fatten: ra oadpara, Plat. Gorg. p. 518 ¢.; Body, de rep. p.
343 b.; immov, Xen. oec. 12, 20. Metaph. to make stupid
(to render the soul dull or callous): ras Wuxas, Plut. mor. p.
995 d. [i. e. de esu carn. 1, 6,3]; vodv, Philostr. vit. Apoll.
1,8; mayeis ras Siavoias, Hdian. 2, 9, 15 [11 ed. Bekk.];
tip didvorav, Ael. v. h. 13, 15 (Lat. pingue ingenium) [cef.
W. 18]; éraytv6n 4 Kapdia (Vulg. incrassatum est cor
[A. V. their heart is waxed gross}): Mt. xiii. 15; Acts
xxviii. 27, after Is. vi. 10 (for 29 jw). *
aé8n, -ns, 7, (fr. wea the foot, instep), a fetter, shackle
for the feet: Mk. v.4; Lk. viii.29. (From Hom. down;
Sept.) *
aeBivds, -7, -dv, (mediov [a plain], rédov [the ground]),
level, plain: Lk. vi. 17. (Xen., Polyb., Plut., Dio Cass.,
al.; Sept.) *
meledw; (mweCds, q. V-); to travel on foot (not on horse-
back or in a carriage), or (if opp. to going by sea) by
land: Acts xx. 13. (Xen., Isocr., Polyb., Strab., al.) *
wety (dat. fem. fr. we(ds, q. v-; cf. Matthiae § 400), on
foot or (if opp. to going by sea) by land: Mt. xiv. 13
RG Tr Ltxt. WH txt.; Mk. vi. 33. (Hdt., Thuc., Xen.,
Dem., al.) *
mel6s, -7 -dv, [wéla; see rédn], fr. Hom. down; Alf
on foot (as opp. to riding). 2. by land (as opp. to
going by sea): jKodovdnoay mefol, Mt. xiv. 13 T Lmrg.
WH mrg. (so cod. Sin. also) for R G meg, [cf. W- § 54,
2; B. § 123, 9]. (Sept. for 09 and 4373.)*
meWapxéo, -2; 1 aor. ptcp. meOapynaas ; (meiOapyxos;
and this fr. re(Oopar and dpxn); to obey (a ruler or a
superior): Oe, Acts v. 29,32; magistrates, Tit. ili. 1
{al. take it here absol. to be obedient]; 1@ Ady THs
Sxavocivns, Polyc. ad Philipp. 9,1; [A. V- to hearken to]
one advising something, Acts xxvii. 21. (Soph., Xen.,
Polyb., Diod.. Joseph., Plut., al.; on the very freq. use
497
TeiOw
of the verb by Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s.
w. p. 43 [esp. p. 108].)*
meBos [WH més; see I, ¢], -7, -dv, (fr. meibw, like
pedds fr. PeiSouat [cf.W. 96 (91)]), persuasive : év merOois
Adyors, 1 Co. ii. 4 [ef. B. 73]. Not found elsewhere [W.
24). The Grks. say méavdés; as mOavol d4yor, Joseph.
antt. 8, 9, and often in Grk. auth. See Passow s. ve
mOavos, Le.; [L. and S. ibid. I. 2; WH. App. p. 153].*
Tle100, -ovs, 7, 1. Peitho, prop. name of a goddess,
lit. Persuasion; Lat. Suada or Suadela. 2. per-
suasive power, persuasion: 1 Co. ii. 4 év meOot— ace. to
certain inferior authorities. [On the word, see Miiller’s
note on Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 21, 3. (Hes., Hadt., al.)]*
me(Ow [ (fr. r. meaning ‘to bind’; allied w. aiorts, fides,
foedus, ete.; Curtius § 327; Vanitek p. 592)]; impf. gre
Gov; fut. meiow; 1 aor. éretoa; 2 pf. rémorba; plupf. éme-
moidew (Lk. xi. 22); Pass. [or Mid., pres. me(Oouat; impf.
eretOdunv]; pf. mémeropat; 1 aor. éreiobyv; 1 fut. rec O7-
copat (Lk. xvi. 31); fr. Hom. down; 1. Active; a.
to persuade, i. e. to induce one by words to believe:
absol. weioas peréotnoey ixavov dxdov, Acts xix. 26; ri, to
cause belief in a thing (which one sets forth), Acts xix.
8 RGT [cf. B. 150 (431) n.] (Soph. O. C. 1442); sept
w. gen. of the thing, ibid. L Tr WH; rua, one, Acts
XVilil. 4; tivd tt, one of a thing, Acts xxviii. 23 Rec.
(Hat. 1, 163; Plat. apol. p. 37 a., and elsewhere; [cf. B.
u.s.]); Twa wepi twos, concerning a thing, ibid. G LT
Tr WH. b. as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, w. an
ace. of a pers., to make friends of, win one’s favor, gain
one’s good-will, Acts xii. 20; or to seek to win one, strive
to please one, 2Co. v.11; Gal.i. 10; to conciliate by per-
suasion, Mt. xxviii. 14 [here T WH om. Tr br. airév];
Acts xiv. 19; i.q. to tranquillize [A. V. assure], ras kap-
Sias npav, 1 In. iii.19. c. to persuade unto i. e. move
or induce one by persuasion to do something : rua foll. by
an inf. [B. § 139, 46], Acts xiii. 43; xxvi. 28, (Xen. an.
1,3, 19; Polyb. 4, 64,2; Diod. 11, 15; 12, 39; Joseph.
antt. 8, 10, 3); rwd foll. by wa [ef. W. 338 (317); B.
§ 139, 46], Mt. xxvii. 20 [Plut. apoph. Alex. 21]. an
Passive and Middle [ef. W. 253 (238)]; a. to be
persuaded, to suffer one’s self to be persuaded; to be in-
duced to believe: absol., Lk. xvi. 31; Acts xvii. 4; to
have faith, Heb. xi. 13 Rec.; rwi, ina thing, Acts XXviil.
24; to believe, sc. drt, Heb. xiii. 18 LT Tr WH. rére-
opai re [on the neut. acc. cf. B. § 131, 10] mepi Twos
(gen. of pers.), to be persuaded (of) a thing concerning a
person, Heb. vi. 9 [A. V. we are persuaded better things
of you, etc.]; memetopevos cil, to have persuaded one’s
self, and meiOopat, to believe, [ef. Eng. to be persuaded],
foll. by ace. w. inf., Lk. xx. 6; Acts XXVi. 26; mémevopae
ért, Ro. viii. 38; 2 Tim. i. 5,125; with év cvpio added (see
év, 1.6 b.), Ro. xiv. 14; mept twos drt, Ro. xv. 14. b.
to listen to, obey, yield to, comply with: rwi, one, Acts v.
36 sq. 39 (40); xxiii. 21; xxvii. 11; Ro. ii. 8; Gal. iii. 1
Rec.; v. 7; Heb. xiii. 17; Jas. ili. 3. 3. 2 pf. we
ova (Sept. mostly for NV3, also for MON, {v7 Niphal
of the unused jv), intrans. to trust, have confidence, be
confident : foll. by ace. w. inf., Ro. ii. 19; by drt, Heb.
TletNa tos
xiii. 18 Rec.; by ére with a preparatory airé rovro [W.
§ 23, 5], Phil. i. 6; rodro memobas oida Ott, ibid. 25; meé-
moa w. a dat. of the pers. or the thing in which the confi-
dence reposes (so in class. Grk. [on its constr. in the N. Tr,
see B. § 133, 5; W. 214 (201); § 33, d.]): Phil. i. 14;
Philem. 21, (2 K. xviii. 20; Prov. xiv. 16; xxviii. 26; Is.
xxviii. 17; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 24; Sap. xiv. 29); €aur@
foll. by an inf. 2 Co. x. 7; & rem, to trust in, put confi-
dence in a pers. or thing [cf. B. u.s.], Phil. iii. 3,4; év
xupio foll. by dre, Phil. ii. 24; emi rem, Mt. xxvii. 43 L
txt. WH mrg.; Mk. x. 24 [where T WH om. Tr mrg. br.
the cl.]; Lk. xi. 22; xviii. 9; 2 Co. i. 9; Heb. ii. 13, (and
very often in Sept., as Deut. xxviii. 52; 2 Chr. xiv. 11;
Ps. ii. 13; Prov. iii. 5; Is. viii. 17; xxxi. 1); émi twa, Mt.
xxvii. 43 where L txt. WH mrg. émi w. dat. (Is. xxxvi.
5; Hab. ii. 18; 2 Chr. xvi. 7sq., etc.); ézi ruva foll. by
Sri, 2 Co. ii. 3; 2 Th. iii. 4; ets twa foll. by dr, Gal. v.
10. [Comp.: ava-neiOw.]*
TleAGros, see [cAdros [and cf. et, ¢].
mevaw, -, inf. rewav (Phil. iv. 12); fut. mewdow (Lk.
vi. 25; Rev. vii. 16); 1 aor. émeivaca, — for the earlier
forms rrewhv, rewnow, ereivnoa; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 61
and 204; W.§13, 3b.; [B. 37 (32) ; 44 (88) ]; see also
dupa; (fr. retva hunger; [see mévns]); fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 17; to hunger, be hungry; a. prop. :
Mihiva 2) exaijel, Sinxxd sl Se oxxv.S5, ois 4on44 ie Mikcents
25; xi. 12; Lk. iv. 2; vi. 3, 25; i. q. to suffer want, Ro.
xii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 21, 34; to be needy, Lk. i. 53; vi. 21;
Phil. iv. 12; in this same sense it is joined with dupay,
1 Co. iv. 11; in figurative disc. od mewav x. od Supay is
used to describe the condition of one who is in need of
nothing requisite for his real (spiritual) life and salva-
tion, Jn. vi. 35; Rev. vii. 16. b. metaph. to crave
ardently, to seek with eager desire: w. acc. of the thing,
thy Suxacoovyny, Mt. vy. 6 (in the better Grk. auth. w. a
gen., as ypnudrav, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 39; cuppdyor, 7, 5, 50;
éraivou, oec. 13,9; cf. W. § 30, 10, b. fin.; [B. $181, 4];
Kuinoel on Mt. y. 6, and see dupdo, 2).*
meipa, -as, 7, (metpdw), fr. Aeschyl. down, a trial, experi-
ment, attempt: metrav AapBdvew tiWds, i. q. to attempt a
thing, to make trial of a thing or a person, (a phrase com-
mon in prof. auth.; cf. Xen. mem. 1,4, 18; Cyr. 3, 3, 38;
see other exx. in Sturz, Lex. Xenoph. iii. p. 488; Plat.
Protag. p. 342a.; Gorg. p. 448 a.; Joseph. antt. 8, 6,5;
Ael. v. h. 12, 22; often in Polyb., cf. Schweighduser, Lex.
Polyb. p. 460; Sept. Deut. xxviii. 56; [other exx. in
Bleek on Heb. 1. ¢.; Field, Otium Norv. pars ili. p. 146]),
Oaddoons, to try whether the sea can be crossed dry-shod
like the land, Heb. xi. 29; to have trial of a thing, i. e.
to experience, learn to know by experience, paoriywv, Heb.
xi. 36 (often in Polyb.; ris mpovotas, Joseph. antt. 2,
5, 1).
metp{o (a form found several times in Hom. and Apoll.
Rhod. and later prose, for reipdw [which see in Veitch]
more com. in the other Grk. writ.) ; impf. émefpafov; 1
aor. eneipaca; Pass., pres. retpd¢ouar; 1 aor. erretpacOnv ;
pf. ptep. memetpacpévos (Heb. iv. 15; see metpaw, 1); 1
aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. éretpaow (Rev. ii. 2 Rec.); Sept.
‘
498
TELPAO {LOS
for 1D}; to try, i. e. 1. to try whether a thing can
be done; to attempt, endeavor: with an inf., Acts ix. 26
D2 ir Wiis xvi ds) xxive6. 2. to try, make trial
of, test: twd, for the purpose of ascertaining his quality,
or what he thinks, or how he will behave himself; a.
in a good sense: Mt. xxii. 35 [al. refer this to b.]; Jn.
vi.6; [2Co. xiii. 5]; Rev. ii. 2. b. ina bad sense:
to test one maliciously, craftily to put to the proof his
feelings or judgment, Mt. xvi. 1; xix. 3; xxii. 18,35; Mk.
viii. 11; x. 2; xii. 15; Lk. xi. 16; xx. 23 (where GT WH
Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the words ri pe metpagere) ; Jn.
viii. 6. c. to try or test one’s faith, virtue, charac-
ter, by enticement to sin; hence acc. to the context i. q.
to solicit to sin, to tempt: Jas. i. 13 sq.; Gal. vi. 1; Rev.
ii.10; of the temptations of the devil, Mt.iv. 1,3; Mk.
i. 13; Lk.iv.2; 1Co. vii.5; 1 Th.iii.5; hence, 6 mecpa-
Cov, subst., Vulg. tentator, etc., the tempter: Mt.iv.3; 1Th.
iii. 5. da. After the O. T. usage a. of God;
to inflict evils upon one in order to prove his character
and the steadfastness of his faith: 1 Co. x. 13; Heb. ii. 18;
iv. 15 [see meipdw]; xi. 17, 37 [where see WH. App.];
Rev. iii. 10, (Gen. xxii. 1; Ex. xx. 20; Deut. viii. 2; Sap.
iii. 5; xi. 10 (9); Judith viii. 25 sq.). B. Men are
said eipd¢ew tov Oedv,— by exhibitions of distrust, as
though they wished to try whether he is not justly dis-
trusted ; by impious or wicked conduct to test God’s
justice and patience, and to challenge him, as it were,
to give proof of his perfections: Acts xv. 10; Heb. iii. 9
RG, (Ex. xvii. 2,7; Num. xiv. 22; Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.)
41, 56; cv. (evi.) 14, ete.; ef. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb. on Sap.
p- 49); sc. roy Xproroy [L T Tr txt. WH rt. xipiov], 1 Co.
x. 9 [but Lmrg. TWH mrg. éfereipacay]; 1rd mveipa
kupiov, Acts v. 9; absol. meupdgecv ev Soxiwacia (see Soxipa-
aia), Heb. iii.9 L T Tr WH. [On meipato (as compared
with Soxiato), see Trench § lxxiv.; cf. Cremer s. v.
Comp.: éx-meipata. | *
Teipacr pds, -ov, 6, (metpate, q. V-), Sept. for D1, an ex-
periment, attempt, trial, proving; (Vulg. tentatio) ; a.
univ. trial, proving: Sir. xxvii. 5, 7; rév metpacpoy bpav
€v tH capki pov, the trial made of you by my bodily con-
dition, since this condition served to test the love of the
Galatians towards Paul, Gal. iv. 14 LT Tr WH [cef. b.
below, and Bp. Lehtft. ad loc. ]. b. spec. the trial
of man’s fidelity, integrity, virtue, constancy, etc.: 1 Pet.
iv. 12; also an enticement to sin, temptation, whether aris-
ing from the desires or from outward circumstances,
Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. x. 13; tropeévew mwetpacpdy, Jas. i. 12;
an internal temptation to sin, 1 Tim. vi. 9; \of the temp-
tation by which the devil sought to divert Jesus the
Messiah from his divine errand, Lk.iv.13; of a condi-
tion of things, or a mental state, by which we are enticed
to sin, or to a lapse from faith and holiness: in the
phrases eiodépery Tuva eis mretp., Mt. vi. 18; Lk. xi. 4; eio-
épxeoOa eis ., Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38 [here TWH
€px-]; Lk. xxii. 40,46; adversity, affliction, trouble, [cf.
our trial], sent by God and serving to test or prove one’s
faith, holiness, character: plur., Lk. xxii. 28; Acts xx.
19; Jas. i. 2; 1 Pet.i. 6; rdv meip. pou roy ev 7) capki pov,
TELpaw
my temptation arising from my bodily infirmity, Gal. iv.
14 Ree. [but see a. above]; dpa rod metpacpod, Rev. iii.
10; &k mw. pvecOa, 2 Pet. ii. 9, (Deut. vii. 19; xxix. 3;
Sir. ii. 1; vi. 7; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 1; 1 Mace. ii. 52). C:
‘temptation’ (i. e. trial) of God by men, i.e. rebellion
against God, by which his power and justice are, as it
were, put to the proof and challenged to show them-
selves: Heb. iii. 8 (Deut. vi. 16; ix. 22; Ps. xciv. (xev.)
8). Cf. F-ied. B. Koester, Vie bibl. Lehre von der Ver-
suchung. Gotha, 1859. (The word has not yet been
found in prof. auth. exc. Diose. praef. 1: rovs émt rabav
m. experiments made on diseases.) *
.wetpdw : impf. mid. 3 pers. (sing. and plur), émeiparo,
énetpavto ; pf. pass. ptep. wemerpapevos (see below); com.
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; to try; i.e. 1. to make
a trial, to attempt, [A. V. to assay], foll. by an infin. ;
often so fr. Hom. down; also so in the mid. in Acts ix. 26
RG; xxvi. 21, (Xen. symp. 4, 7; Cyr. 1, 4, 5, ete.; often
in Polyb.; Ael. v.h. 1,34; 2 Mace. ii. 23; 3 Macc.i. 25;
4 Mace. xii. 2, ete.); hence memetpapévos taught by trial, ex-
perenced, Heb. iv. 15 in certain codd. and edd. ([Rec."],
Tdf. formerly) [see below, and cf. retpa¢a, d. a.]. 2:
In post- Hom. usage with the ace. of a pers. fo test, make
trial of one, put him to the proof: his mind, sentiments,
temper, Plut. Brut. 10; in particular, to attempt to in-
duce one to commit some (esp. a carnal) crime; cf.
Passow s. v. 3a.; [L. and S. s.v. A. IV. 2]. Hence
merretpapevos in Heb. iv. 15 (see 1 above) is explained
by some [cf. W. § 15 Note ad fin.], tempted to sin; but
the Pass. in this sense is not found in Grk. writ.; see
Delitzsch ad loc.*
Teo povh, -75, 7, (meiOa, q.v.; like wAnopovn), persua-
sion: in an active sense [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as
below] and contextually, treacherous or deceptive persua-
sion, Gal. v. 8 [cf. W. § 68, 1 fin.]. (Found besides in
Ignat. ad Rom. 3, 3 longer recens.; Justin apol. 1, 53
init.; [Ireneus 4, 33, 7]; Epiph. 30, 21; Chrysost. on
1 Th. i. 3; Apollon. Dys. syntax p. 195, 10 [299, 17];
Eustath. on Hom. Il. a’. p. 21, 46 vs. 22; 99, 45 vs. 442;
uv. p. 637, 5 vs. 131; and Od. x’. p. 785, 22 vs. 285.) *
aéXayos, -ous, Td, [by some (e.g. Lob. Pathol. Proleg.
p- 805) connected with mddé, i. e. the ‘ flat” expanse (cf.
Lat. aequor); but by Curtius § 367 et al. (cf. Vani¢ek
p- 515) with mdjoco, i. e. the ‘beating’ waves (cf. our
‘plash’)], fr. Hom. down ; a. prop. the sea i.e. the
high sea, the deep, (where ships sail; accordingly but a
part of the sea, @adacca, Aristot. Probl. sect. 23 quaest.
3 [p. 931, 14 sq.] ev rH Aypem ddrLyn eotiv Oddacoa, ev
8€ 1G meAdyet Babeia. Hence) rd méAayos Ths Oadacons,
aequor maris, [A. V. the depth of the sea; cf. Trench
§ xiii.], Mt. xviii. 6 (so too Apollon. Rhod. 2, 608; meé-
Aayos atyaias ddds, Eur. Tro. 88; Hesych. méhayos*...
BvOés, wadros Oaddoons. Cf. W. 611 (568); [Trench
ie |). b. univ. the sea: 7d reX. TO Kata THY KiAckiav,
Acts xxvii. 5 (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. mé-
Aayos, 1; [L. and S. s. v. I.]).*
medexltw: pf. pass. ptcp. memedexcopevos; (méAexvs, an
axe or two-edged hatchet); to cut of with an axe, to
499
TWEVNS
behead: rwd, Rev. xx.4. (Polyb., Diod., Strab., Joseph.
antt. 20,5,4; Plut. Ant. 36; [ef. W. 26 (25)].)*
méparos, -n, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], fifth: Rev. vi. 9; ix.
Le EXvin 10g ext 20:
mépro ; fut. éuyro; 1 aor. éreua [on its epistolary
use (for the pres. or the pf.) see W. 278 (261); B. 198
(172): Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. (25), 28; Philem. 11];
Pass., pres. méymropat; 1 aor. emewpOnv (LE. vii. 10) ; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. for now; to send: twa, absol., one
to do something, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. vii. 19; xvi. 24; Jn.i.
22; vii. 18; xiii. 16, 20; xx. 21 [Treg. mrg. dmooréAX.] 3
2 Co. ix. 3; Phil. ii. 23, 28, ete.; rivd or twas is omitted
where the ptep. is joined to another finite verb, as wéuypas
amexepadice Tov "lodvynv, he sent (a deputy) and be-
headed John, Mt. xiv. 10; add, Acts xix. 31; xxiii. 30,
(for other exx. see dmooréhXo, 1 d.); in imitation of the
Hebr. “3 33 Mow (1S. xvi. 20; 2S. xi. 14; xii. 25; 1K.
li. 25) we find méuwas dia rv pabnrGv avrov, he sent by
his disciples (unless with Fritzsche, and Bornemann,
Schol. in Lue. p. lxv., one prefer to take méuWas absol.
and to connect a 7. pad. with the foll. etre [so Mey.,
but see (7te Aufl. ed. Weiss), Keil, De Wette, al.]), Mt.
xi. 2 LT Tr WH, (so amooreinas 81a tod ayyédov, Rev.
i.1). Teachers who come forward by God’s command
and with his authority are said to be (or to have been)
sent by God: as, John the Baptist, Jn. i. 33; Jesus, Jn.
iv. 34; v. 23 sq. 30, 37; vi. 38-40, 44; vii. 16, 28, etc.;
Ro. viii. 3; the Holy Spirit, rhetorically personified, Jn.
xiv. 26; xv. 26; xvi. 7. suvd, w. dat. of the pers. to whom
one is sent: 1 Co. iv. 17; Phil. ii.195 revd tu mapa tevos
(prop. to send one to one from one’s abode [see rapa, I.
a.]), Jn. xv. 26; apds twa, Lk. iv. 26; Jn. xvi. 7; Acts x.
SSERKVe2O XR S Os || xxv. 210k Gis Ephewie 22s) behile
ii. 25 ; Col. iv. 8; Tit. iii. 12; with the ptep. A\éyar added
(Hebr. 1x9 now, Gen. xxxvili. 25; 2S. xiv. 32, etc.),
said by messenger (Germ. liess sagen), Lk. vii. 6, 19;
Twa eis w. an ace. of place, Mt. ii. 8; Lk. xv. 15; xvi. 27;
Acts x. 5; the end, for which one is sent is indicated —
by the prep. e’s, Eph. vi. 22; Col. iv. 8; 1 Pet. ii. 14;
by an infin., Jn. i. 33; 1 Co. xvi. 3; Rev. xxii. 16. Of
things, ri rem, a. to bid a thing to be carried to
one: Rey. xi. 10; with e/g and an ace. of place added,
Rev. i. 11; e’s w.an ace. indicating the purpose, Acts xi.
29; Phil. iv.16 [here Lchm. br. eds; cf. B.329 (283)]. —b.
to send (thrust or insert) a thing into another: Rev. xiv.
15, 18, (Ael. hist. an. 12, 5); rwi re els rd w. an inf., 2 Th.
ii. 11. [Comp.: dva-, éx-, pera-, mpo-, Tup- Téeurro. |
[Syn.: wéumo, dmooréAAw: TéuTw is the general term
(differing from Ye in directing attention not to the exit
but to the advent); it may even imply accompaniment
(as when the sender is God). 4moaréAAw includes a refer
ence to equipment, and suggests official or authoritative send-
ing. Cf. Schmidt ch. 104; Westcott on Jn. xx. 21, ‘ Addi-
tional Note’; also ‘ Additional Note’ on 1 Jn. iii. 5.}
arévys, -7Tos, 6, (évopat to work for one’s living; the
Lat. penuria and Grk. mewvdw are akin to it [ef. Vanicek
p- 1164]; hence mévns i. q. €k mévov Kai evepyeias 7d Cp
éyov, Etym. Magn.), poor: 2 Co. ix.9. (From Soph. and
Hat. down; Sept. for 1738, 733, 95, wn, ete.) *
mevOepa
[Syn. révns, mrwxds: “révns occurs but once in the N.T.,
and then in a quotation fr. the Old, while mrwxés occurs
between thirty and forty times. . . . The révns may be so poor
that he earns his bread by daily labor; the rrwxés that he
only obtains his living by begging.” Trench § xxxvi.; cf.
Schmidt ch. 85, 4; ch. 186.]
arevOepts, -ds, 4, (fem. of revbepéds, q. v.), a mother-in-law,
a wife’s mother: Mt. viii. 14; x. 35; Mk. i. 30; Lk. iv.
38; xii. 53. (Dem., Plut., Leian., al. ; Sept. for ninn.) *
arevOepds, -od, 6, a father-in-law, a wife’s father: Jn. xviii.
13. (Hom., Soph., Eurip., Plut., al.; Sept. [for on,
pon].)*
mev0ew, - ; fut. revOnow; 1 aor. émevOnoa; (mévOos) ;
fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 53N ; to mourn; a.
intrans.: Mt. v. 4 (5); ix. 15; 1 Co. v.23; mevOeiv x. kAaiewy,
Mk. xvi. 10; Lk. vi. 25; Jas. iv.9; Rev. xviii. 15,19; émi
mum, over one, Rev. xviii. 11 R GL (is. Ixvi. 10), éné
twa, ibid. T Tr WH (2 S. xiii. 87; 2 Chr. xxxv. 24,
etc.). b. trans. to mourn for, lament, one: 2 Co. xii.
21 [cf. W. 635 sq. (590); B. §131,4. Syn. see Apnvéw,
fin. ]* .
arévOos, -ous, 76, (révOw [(?); akin, rather, to raos, mévo-
pat (cf. wévns) ; see Curtius p. 53; Vaniéek p. 1165]), fr.
Hom. down, Sept. for Sax, mourning: Jas. iv. 9; Rev.
Xvill. 7 sq.; xxi. 4.*
arevixpos, -a, -dv, (fr. mévopat, see mévns), needy, poor:
Lk. xxi. 2. (Occasionally in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. Od. 3,
348 down; for °)) in Ex. xxii. 25; for 53 in Prov. xxix.
Vid
oad adv., five times: 2 Co. xi. 24.
Aeschyl., down. | *
aevraxto-X(d101, -at, -a, five times a thousand, five thou-
sand: Mtexiv. 21; xvi. 9; Mk. vi. 44; viii. 19; Lk. ix.
14; Jn. vi. 10. [Hadt., Plat., al.]*
mevTaKdoot, -ar, -a, five hundred: Lk. vii. 41; 1 Co. xv.
6. [From Hom. (-ryx-) down.]*
mévte, ol, al, ra, five: Mt. xiv. 17, and often.
Hom. down. ]
mevTe-Kat-S€karos, -7, -ov, the fifteenth: Lk. iii.1. [Diod.,
Plut., al.]*
TevTHKovTG, oi, al, rd, fifty: Lk. vii. 41; xvi.6; Jn. viii.
57; xxi. 11 [RG mevrnxovrarpidy (as one word)]; Acts
Xill. 20; avd mevrnk. by fifties [see dvd, 2], Mk. vi. 40
[here L T Tr WH kara w.; see xard, II. 3 a. y-]; Lk. ix.
14. [From Hom. down.]*
TevTHKOTTH, -7s, 7, (SC. Nucpa; fem. of revrnkoords fifti-
eth), [fr. Plat. down.], Pentecost (prop. the fiftieth day
after the Passover, Tob. ii.1; 2 Mace. xii. 32; [Philo de
septen. § 21; de decal. § 30; cf. W. 26]), the second of
the three great Jewish festivals; celebrated at Jerusa-
lem yearly, the seventh week after the Passover, in
grateful recognition of the completed harvest (Ex.
xxiii. 16; Lev. xxiii. 15 sq.; Deut. xvi. 9): Acts ii. 1;
xx. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 8, (Joseph. antt. 3, 10, 6; f14, 138,
4; etc.]). [BB. DD. (esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto)
s. v. Pentecost; Hamburger, Real-Encycl. i. s. v. Wochen-
fest ; Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiii.] *
merrolOnors, -ews, 7, (meiOw, 2 pf. mémoba), trust, confi-
[From Pind.,
[From
500
IT épyapos
dence [R. V.], reliance : 2 Co. i. 15; iii. 4; x. 2; Eph. iii.
12; eis twa, 2 Co. viii. 22; & rum, Phil. iii. 4. (Philo de
nobilit. § 7; Joseph. antt.1, 3,15; 8, 2,2; 10,1,4; [11,
7,1; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 3]; Zosim., Sext. Emp., al.;
Sept. once for }1n¥3, 2 K. xviii. 19.) The word is con-
demned by the Atticists; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 295.*
mép, an enclitic particle, akin to the prep. epi [Herm.
de part. dv, p.6; Curtius § 359; cf. Lob. Pathol. Elemen-
ta, i. 290; al. (connect it directly with zépay, etc., and)
give ‘throughly’ as its fundamental meaning; cf.
Béumiein, Partikeln, p. 198], showing that the idea of
the word to which it is annexed must be taken in its
fullest extent ; it corresponds to the Lat. circiter, cunque,
Germ. noch so sehr, immerhin, wenigstens, ja; [Eng. how-
ever much, very much, altogether, indeed]; cf. Hermann
ad Vig. p. 791; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 722 sqq.; [Donald-
son, New Crat. § 178 fin.]. In the N. T. it is affixed to
the pron. és and to sundry particles, see dudmep, éavrrep,
eimep, émeimep, emerdnmep, imep, xabdmep, xairep, Sorep,
&Sonep. [(From Hom. down.)]
amepaitépw, (fr. mepairepos, compar. of mépa), adv., fr.
Aeschyl. down, further, beyond, besides: Acts xix. 39 L
Tr WH, for RG repi érépwv. With this compare ovddev
(ntnoere mepattepw, Plat. Phaedo c. 56 fin. p. 107 b.*
mwépav, Ionic and Epic zépyy, adv., fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 1239; beyond, on the other side; a. 70
mépav, the region beyond, the opposite shore: Mt. viii.
TOS xiv. 290) xvi. 53° MK: iv. 855° y. 215 “vi. 455 ‘Vill.
13. b. joined (like a prep.) with a gen. [W. § 54,
6]: mépav tis Gad. Jn. vi. 22, 25; mépav rod "Iopdavov, Mt.
iv. 15; xix.1; [Mk. x. Hiss Tr WH]; Jn-i.28 5" 11-26)
with verbs of going it marks direction towards a place
[over, beyond], Jn. vi.1,17; x.40; xviii.1; of the place
whence, [Mt. iv. 25]; Mk. iii.8. 16 wépay tis Oaddoons,
Mk. v.1; [rod IopSavov, Mk. x. 1 RG]; ris Atuyns, Lk.
viii. 22, (rod morapod, Xen. an. 3,5,2). [See Sophocles,
Lex. s.v.]*
arépas, -atos, Té, (mepa beyond), fr. Aeschyl. down, ez-
tremity, bound, end, [see réXos, 1 a. init.]; , a. of a
portion of space (boundary, frontier): mépata tis ys,
[the ends of the earth], i. q. the remotest lands, Mt. xii.
42; Lk. xi. 31, (Hom. Il. 8, 478 [wetpap]; Thue. 1, 69;
Xen. Ages. 9,4; Sept. for pqs ‘pax [W. 30]); also ris
oikoupems, Ro. x. 18 (Ps. Ixxi. (Ixxii.) 8). b. of a
thing extending through a period of time (termination) :
dvtidoyias, Heb. vi. 16 (rév xaxdv, Aeschyl. Pers. 632;
Joseph. b. j. 7, 5, 6, and other exx. in other writ.).*
Tlépyapos [perh. -nov, rd, (the gend. in the N. T. is in-
determinate ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 421 sq.; Pape, Eigen-
namen, s. vv. )], -ov, 7, Pergamus [or Pergamum, (cf.
Curtius §413)], a city of Mysia Major in Asia Minor,
the seat of the dynasties of Attalus and Eumenes, cele-
brated for the temple of Aesculapius, and the invention
[(?) ef. Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 39sq.; Birt,
Antikes Buchwesen, ch. ii.] and manufacture of parch-
ment. The river Selinus flowed through it and the
Cetius ran past it (Strab. 13 p. 623; Plin. 5, 30 (33); 18,
11 (21); Tac. ann. 3,63). It was the birthplace of the
IT epryn
physician Galen, and had a great royal library. Mod-
ern Berghama. There was a Christian church there:
Rev.-i. 11; ii. 12.*
Tlépyn, -ys, 9, (ef. the preceding word], Perge or Perga,
a town of Pamphylia, on the river Cestrus about seven
miles (sixty stadia) from the sea. Ona hill near the
town was the temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis] (Strab. 14
p- 667; Mel. 1, 14; Liv. 38, 37): Acts xiii. 13 sq.; xiv.
25. [BB. DD.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 134 sq.] *
wept, (akin to mépa, mépav; [Curtius § 359]), prep.,
joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class.
Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person
or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated
is as it were encompassed by this act or state; Lat. cir-
cum, circa; around, about.
I. with the GeniITIVE it denotes that around which
an act or state revolves; about, concerning, as touching,
etc., (Lat. de, quod attinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter)
[ef. W. 372 sq. (349)]. a. about, concerning, (Lat.
de; in later Lat. also circa): after verbs of speaking,
teaching, writing, etc., see under dvayyéAXo, dray-
yea, drodoyotpat, yoyyila, ypdpe, dndda, d:aB_Barod-
pat, Stayvopifo, diaréyouat, Siddoxw, dinyodpar (Heb. xi.
32), Supynots, etrov and mpocimov, érepwrdw and épardea,
KaTnXéw, AadEw, Aéywo, Abyor airéw, Méyor amodiSapu, Aé-yov
did@pt, paprupéw, pveia, prnpovetw, mpoxarayyé Aw, mpo-
ntevo, vropimrvyoko, xpyuaticopa, jyos, pnun, ete. ;
after verbs of hearing, knowing, ascertaining,
inquiring, see under dkovw, ywaooka, érictapat, €idov,
e€crala, (nréw, éexCntéw, emi(nréw, Cnrnpa, muvOdvopat, etc. ;
after verbs of thinking, deciding, supposing,
doubting, etc.; see under d:adoyifoua, évOvpéopat, me-
TELopal, TLaTEvVM, SiaTropew, EAéyxe, etc. b. as re-
spects [A. V. often (as) touching]; a. with verbs,
to indicate that what is expressed by the verb (or verbal
noun) holds so far forth as some person or thing is con-
cerned ; with regard to, in reference to: Acts xxviii. 21;
Heb. xi. 20; 9 wept cod pyeia, 2 Tim. i. 3; eEouciar éyew,
1 Co. vii. 37; émurayny exe, ibid. 25; see évréAXopat,
€vroAn, Tapakadéw, wapapvOcopar, mpdpacts, €kdiKos, Nay-
xave to cast lots. 8. with the neut. plur. [and sing. ]
of the article, ra mepi rivos the things concerning a person
or thing, i. e. what relates to, can be said about, etc.: ta
mepi tis Baoweias Tod Geod, Acts i. 3; viii. 12 [Rec.];
xix. 8 [here LTr WH om. ra]; ra rept trys 6500, Acts
xxiv. 22; with the gen. of a pers. one’s affairs, his con-
dition or state: Acts xxviii. 15; Eph. vi. 22; Phil. i. 27;
ii. 19 sq.; Col. iv. 8; in a forensic sense, one’s cause or
case, Acts xxiv. 10; rd epi Inood (or Tod Kupiov), [the
(rumors) about Jesus (as a worker of miracles), Mk. v.
27T Trmrg. br. WH); the things (necessary to be known
and believed) concerning Jesus, Acts xviii. 25; xxiii. 11;
Xxviii. 23 Rec., 31; the things that befell Jesus, his death,
Lk. xxiv. 19; the things in the O. T. relative to him, the
prophecies concerning him, ibid. 27; the career, death,
appointed him by God, Lk. xxii. 37 [here T Tr WH 18
ete. ]. y. epi rivos, absol., at the beginning of sen-
tences, concerning, as to: 1 Co. vii. 1; viii. 1; Viol ose
501
TrEpt
but in other places it is more properly taken with the
foll. verb, Mt. xxii. 31; xxiv. 36; Mk. xii. 26; 1 Co.
vii. 25; viii. 1,4; xii. 1; 1 Th. iv. 9; v.1; cf. W. 373
(350). c. on account of; a. of the subject.
matter, which at the same time occasions the action
expressed by the verb : so after verbs of accusing, see
€yKahéw, kaTnyopew, kpiva tivd epi Twos, etc.; after verbs
expressing emotion, see davydto, dyavakréw, kKavxdopat,
omhayxvifouat, evxapiotéw, evyapioria, alvéw, péder pot,
Hepiuvdw; also after evyoua, 3 Jn. 2, see was, II. 2 b.
6. B. of the cause for (on account of) which a
thing is done, or of that which gave occasion for the
action or occurrence: Mk. i. 44; Lk. v.14; Jn. x. 33,
(wept ris BLacdhnulas AdBere-airdv, Ev. Nic. c. 4, p. 546
ed. Thilo [p. 221 ed. Tdf.]); Acts xv. 2; xix. 23; xxv.
15, 18, 24; Col. ii. 1 [RG]. y- on account of, i. e.
for, for the benefit or advantage of: Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk.
xiv. 24 RG; Lk. iv. 388; Jn. xvi. 263; xvii. 9, 20; Heb.
v.33; xi. 40; wepi and trep alternate in Eph. vi. 18 sq. [cf.
W. 383 (358) n. also § 50,3; B.§ 147, 21. 22; Wieseler,
Meyer, Bp. Lghtft., Ellic. on Gal. i. 4]. 8. aepi is
used of the design or purpose for removing something
or taking it away: mepl duaprias, to destroy sin, Ro. viii.
3; duddvar Eavrov mepl tev dwapridy, to expiate, atone
for, sins, Gal. i. 4 (where R WH txt. tmép [see as in y.
above, and cf. imép, I. 6]); also to offer sacrifices, and
simply sacrifices, mepi duapriav, Heb. v. 3 [RG irép; see
u. s.]j x. 18, 263; mept duapriay émabe [améOavey], 1 Pet. iii.
18; mept duaprias sc. Ovoia, sacrifices for sin, expia-
tory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7; ef. Num.
Vili. 8; see duapria, 3; ra wept ths dy. Lev. vi. 25; 76
mepi tT. d. Lev. xiv. 19); thacpds mepl r. duapti@v, 1 Jn.
he Ie thie AKO
II. with the AccusaTIVE (W. 406 (379)) ; a.
of Place; about, around: as, about parts of the body,
Mt. iii. 4; [xviii. 6 LT Tr WH]; Mk.i.6; ix. 42; Lk.
xvii. 2; Rev. xv. 6. about places: Lk. xiii. 8; Acts xxii.
6; Jude 7; rd repi rév rérov éekeivoy, the neighborhood of
that place, Acts xxviii. 7; of mepf w. an acc. of place,
those dwelling about a place or in its vicinity, Mk. iii.
8 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. of}. of mepi ruva, those about one
i. e. with him, his companions, associates, friends, etc.,
Mk. iv. 10; Lk. xxii. 49 ; [add, Mk. xvi. WH (rejected)
“ Shorter Conclusion ”]; acc. to Grk. idiom of mept roy
Iladdov, Paul and his companions (Germ. die Paulusgee
sellschaft) [ef. W. 406 (379); B.§ 125, 8], Acts lise Sit
ace. to a later Grk. usage ai mept MdpOav denotes Martha
herself, Jn. xi. 19 (although others [e. g. Meyer, Weiss,
Keil, Godet, al.] understand by it Martha and her at-
tendants or domestics; but L Tr WH read mpés 77 v (for
ras mept) Mapéar) ; cf. Matthiae § 583, 2; Bnhdy. p. 263;
Kihner ii. p. 230 sq.; [W. and B.u.s.]. in phrases the
underlying notion of which is that of revolving
about something: of persons engaged in any occupa-
tion, of wept Ta rotadra épyarat [A. V. the workmen of like
occupation], Acts xix. 25; meprrmacOat, rupBdtecOat rept
rt, Lk. x. 40,41 [but here LT Tr WH txt. opuBd¢y q- v-
(and WH mrg. om. mepi roAAd)], (wept Thy yeopyiay ylve
TEepvayw
oa, 2 Mace. xii. 1). b. as to, in reference to, cone
cerning: so after dddkuyos, 2 Tim. iii. 8; doroxeiv, 1 Tim.
vi. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 18; vavayeiy, 1 Tim. i. 19; vooeiv, 1 Tim.
vi. 45 mept mavra éavrov mapéxeoOat roumov, Tit. ii. 7; Ta
mept eve, the state of my affairs, Phil. ii. 23; ai Tept Ta
Aowra emeOvplar, Mk. iv. 19 (ai wept rd odpa emOupia, Ar-
istot. rhet. 2, 12, 3; ra rept Wuyi x. copa ayaa, eth.
Nic. 1, 8); cf. W. § 30,3 N. 5; [B.§ 125, 9]. c. of
Time; in a somewhat indefinite specification of time,
about, near: wept tTpitny Spav, Mt. xx. 8; add, 5sq. 9;
xxvii.46; Mk. vi.48; Acts x.[8LT Tr WH], 9; xxii. 6.
III. in CompositIoNn repi in the N. T. signifies ib.
in a circuit, round about, all around, as repidye, tmept-
Badd, Tepraotpanrea, mepikerpat, meptorkew, Ctc., etc. Zs
beyond (because that which surrounds a thing does not
belong to the thing itself but is beyond it): meptepyos,
mepepydfouat, mepirelma, Teper, TEpLovaLos, TrepLaTds,
TEpLoOoEva. 3. through [(?) —intensive, rather
(cf. TeplanTa, 2)] : Tepireipw.
mept-ayo; impf. mepiyyov; fr. Hdt. down; ae
trans. a. to lead around [cf. wepi, UI. 1]. b.
ig. to lead about with one’s self: twa (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2,
28; rpeis maidas dxodovdous, Dem. p. 958, 16), 1 Co. ix.
5. 2. intrans. to go about, walk about, (Ceb. tab. c.
6): absol. Acts xiii. 11; with an ace. of place (depend-
ing on the prep. in compos., cf. Matthiae § 426 ; [B. 144,
(126); W. § 52, 2c.; 432 (402)]), Mt. iv. 23 [RG; (al.
read the dat. with or without év)]; ix. 35; xxiii. 15;
Mk. vi. 6.*
Tept-aipew, -@: 2 aor. inf. mepuedety, [ptcp. plur. epi
edovres; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. mepiarpetrar]; impf. 3
pers. sing. mepinpeiro; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for
Vd5 a. to take away that which surrounds or en-
velops a thing [cf. mept, III. 1]: 76 xdAvppa, pass., 2 Co.
ili. 16 (roppipay, 2 Macc. iv. 38; rov daxrvdcoy, Gen. xli.
42; Joseph. antt. 19, 2, 3); dyxvpas, the anchors from
both sides of the ship, [R. V. casting off], Acts xxvii.
40; [2 aor. ptep., absol., in a nautical sense, to cast loose,
Acts xxviii. 13 WH (al. wepueAOdvres) ]. b. metaph.
to take away altogether or entirely: tas dyaprias (with
which one is, as it were, enveloped), the guilt of sin, i. e.
to expiate perfectly, Heb. x. 11; riy éAmida, pass., Acts
XXvii. 20.*
wepi-amtw: 1 aor. ptcp. mepiayvas; [fr. Pind. down];
1. to bind or tie around, to put around, [mepi, III. 1];
to hang upon, attach to. 2. to kindle a fire around
[or thoroughly ; see meptxpint@, mepikadimT@, Tepikpatns,
mepiduros, etc. ] (Phalar. ep. 5, p. 28): Lk. xxii. 55 TWH
ye te
Tepi-artpamrw: 1 aor. repinotpaya [Re L repéorp.
(see B. 34 sq. (30) and Tdf.’s note)], to flash around,
shine about, (wept, III. 1]: red, Acts ix. 3; mepi twa, Acts
xxii. 6. ([4 Mace. iv. 10]; eccl. and Byzant. writ.) *
mept-BddXw : fut. mepyBare; 2 aor. mepteBadov ; pf. pass.
ptep. mepiBeBAnpuevos ; 2 aor. mid. mepteBaropnv ; 2 fut.
wid. mepiBadodpa ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for
D3 to cover, cover up; also for way to clothe, and 7yy
to veil; to throw around, to put round; het
502
TEpLeXw
xdpaxa, to surround a city with a bank (palisade), Lk.
xix. 43 ((RG Tr L txt. WH mrg.]; see mapeuBaddo,
2). b. of garments, rua, to clothe one: Mt. xxv. 36,
38,43; rua 1, to put a thing on one, to clothe one with a
thing [B. 149 (130); W. § 32,4 a.]: Lk. xxiii. 11 [here
T WH om. L Tr br. ace. of pers.]; Jn. xix. 2; pass., Mk.
xiv. 51; xvi. 5; Rev. vil. 9,135, x. 15 xi. 3; xii. 1; xvii.
4 (where Ree. has dat. of the thing; [so iv. 4 L WH
txt., but al. év w. dat. of thing]); xviii. 16; xix. 13;
Mid. to put on or clothe one’s self: absol. Rev. iii. 18; w.
ace. of the thing [cf. B. § 135, 2], Mt. vi. 31; Acts xii.
8; passively, —in 2 aor., Mt. vi. 29; Lk. xii. 27; in 2
aor. w. acc. of the thing, Rev. iii. 18; xix. 8; in 2 fut.
with é mu [B. u.s.; see ev, I. 5b. p. 210°], Rev. iii. 5.*
aept-BAérw: impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. wepreBAerero; 1
aor. ptcp. mepiBreyrauevos; tolookaround. In the N.T.
only in the mid. (to look round about one’s self): absol.,
Mk. ix. 8; x. 23; foll. by an inf. of purpose, Mk. v. 32;
tiva, to look round on one (i. e. to look for one’s self at
one near by), Mk. iii. 5, 34; Lk. vi. 10; ets revas, Ev.
Nic. c. 43 mdvra, Mk. xi.11. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.;
Sept.) *
mept-BédaLov, -ov, 7d, (mepi8ad\dw), prop. a covering
thrown around, a wrapper; in the N. T. 1. a man-
tle: Heb. i. 12 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Ezek. xvi. 13; xxvii. 7;
Is. lix. 17; mepi8. Baordixdy and rep. ex moppipas, Pa-
laeph. 52, 4). 2. aveil [A.V.a covering]: 1 Co. xi.
15. [(From Eur. down.) ]*
aept-8€w : plupf. pass. 3 pers. sing. meprede8ero; (fr. Hat.
down]; to bind around, tie over, [ef. wepi, III. 1]: rua
tin, Jn. xi. 44. (Sept. Job xii. 18; Plut. mor. p. 825 e.
[i. e. praecepta ger. reipub. 32, 21; Aristot. h. a. 9, 39
p. 6234, 14].) *
arepi-Speénw, S€e TrepiTpexo.
mrept-epydfopat; (see epi, III. 2); to bustle about use-
lessly, to busy one’s self about trifling, needless, useless mat-
ters, (Sir. iii, 23; Hdt. 3, 46; Plat. apol. p. 19 b.; al.):
used apparently of a person officiously inquisitive about
others’ affairs [A. V. to be a busybody], 2 Th. iii. 11, as in
Dem. p. 150, 24 [cf. p. 805, 4 etc. ].*
meplepyos, -ov, (epi and épyov; see epi, III. 2), busy
about trifles and neglectful of important matters, esp. busy
about other folks’ affairs, a busybody: 1 Tim. v.13 (often
so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. mem. 1, 3,1; mep. kal mohumpay-
pov, Epict. diss. 3, 1,21); of things: ra mepiepya, imper-
tinent and superfluous, of magic [A. V. curious] arts,
Acts xix. 19 (so mepiepyos practising magic, Aristaen.
epp. 2, 18, 2 [cf. Plut. Alex. 2, 5]); cf. Kypke, Observv.
and Kuinoel, Com. ad loc.*
Tept-€pxopar; 2 aor. mepindOov; fr. Hdt. down; to go
about: of strollers, Acts xix. 13; of wanderers, Heb. xi.
37; of navigators (making a circuit), Acts xxviii. 13
[here WH mrepreddvres, see mepiatpéw, a.]; Tas olkias, to
go about from house to house, 1 Tim. v. 13.*
mept-€xo; 2 aor. mepieaxyov; fr. Hom. down; in the
N. T. to surround, encompass; i. e. a. to contain:
of the subject-matter, contents, of a writing (9 BiBXos
a. mde | mepteyer tas mpoaEes, Diod. 2,1; [ Joseph. c. Ap. (1, 1);
Fe
Teplfwvvve
1, 8,25; 2,4,1; 2,38,1]), emeorodny meptexovcay roy TUmov
rovroy, a letter of which this is a sample, or a letter
written after this form (cf. rimos, 3], Acts xxiii. 25 [LT Tr
WH éxovcay (cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. as below)] (réy tpd-
mov tovtov, 1 Macc. xv. 2; 2 Mace. xi.16); intrans. [B.
§129,17n.; 144 (126) n.]: mepréver ev (7H) ypady, it is
contained in (holy) scripture, 1 Pet. ii.6 RGT Tr WH;
absol., meptéxee 4) ypadn (our runs), foll. by direct disc.,
ibid. Lehm. ; likewise 6 véuos tpay repiéxet, Ev. Nicod.
ce. 4; with adverbs: mepiexeu otras, 2 Mace. ix. 18; xi.
22; xaos mepiexer BiBros "Evax, Test. xii. Patr., test.
Levi 10; &s 4 mapddoors mepiéxet, Euseb. h.e. 3, 1; see
Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 29. b. i. q. to take possession
of, to seize: twa, Lk. v. 9 (2 Mace. iv. 16; Joseph. b. j. 4,
10, 1).*
wept-lovvie, or -Cavvvue: Mid., 1 fut. repitdcouar; 1
aor. impv. repi{woa, ptcep. mepiCwaduevos ; pf. pass. ptcp.
mepieCaopévos; to gird around [mepi, LI. 1]; to fasten
garments with a girdle: tiv daopiy, to fasten one’s cloth-
ing about the loins with a girdle (Jer. i. 17), pass., Lk.
xu. 35. Mid. to gird one’s self: absol., Lk. xii. 37; xvii.
8; Acts xii. 8 Rec. ; rv dagdv év adnOeia, with truth as
a girdle, figuratively i. q. to equip one’s self with knowl-
edge of the truth, Eph. vi. 14; with an acc. of the thing
with which one girds himself (often so in Sept., as odx-
kov, Jer. iv. 8; vi. 26; Lam. ii. 10; orodny dd€ns, Sir. xlv.
7; and in trop. expressions, dvvayiv, evppoortyny, 1 S.
li. 4; Ps. xvii. (xviii) 33; [B. § 135, 2]): mpos rots pa-
atots Cavnv, Rev. i. 13; Cavas mept ta otyOn, Rev. xv. 6.
(Arstph., Polyb., Paus., Plut., al.; Sept. for 73m and
Wik.) Cf. dvagavvvps.*
arept-Oeors, -ews, 7), (mepiriOnus), the act of putting around
[repi, III. 1], (Vulg. cireumdatio, [A.V. wearing]) : mepibe-
cews xpvoiwy kdopos, the adornment consisting of the gold-
en ornaments wont to be placed around the head or the
body, 1 Pet.iii.3. ([Arr.7, 22], Galen, Sext. Empir., al.) *
mept-iotnpt: 2 aor. mepieatny; pf. ptcp. mepreoras; pres.
mid. impv. 2 pers. sing. reptiatago (on which form see
W. § 14, 1e.; [B.47 (40), who both callit passive (but
see Veitch p. 340) ]) ; 1. in the pres., impf., fut.,
1 aor., active, fo place around (one). 2. in the perf.,
plupf., 2 aor. act., and the tenses of the mid., to stand
around: Jn. xi. 42; Acts xxv. 7 [in LT Tr WH w. an
ace.; cf. W.§52, 4,12]. Mid. to turn one’s self about sc.
for the purpose of avoiding something, hence to avoid, shun,
(Joseph. antt. 4, 6, 12; 10,10, 4; b.j. 2, 8, 6; Antonin.
3,4; Artem. oneir. 4, 59; Athen. 15 p. 675e.; Diog.
Laért. 9, 14; Jambl. vit. Pyth. 31 [p. 392 ed. Kiessl.];
Sext. Empir.; joined with hevyew, Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 4;
with ékrpémecOa, Leian. Hermot. § 86; Hesych. mepi-
isrago~ andhevye, avarpere; [cf. further, D’Orville’s
Chariton, ed. Reiske, p. 282]; this use of the verb is
censured by Leian. soloec. 5): in the N. T. so with an
ace. of the thing [cf. W. l.c.], 2 Tim. ii. 16; Tit. iii. 9.*
mepi-Kdbappa, -ros, 76, (mepixabaipw, to cleanse on all
sides [mepi, III. 1]), eff-scouring, refuse: plur. ra rept.
rod kdopou [A. V. the filth of the world], metaph. the most
abject and despicable men, 1 Co. iv. 13. (Epict. diss. 3,
503
TEPLLEVO
22, 78; purgamenta urbis, Curt. 8, 5, 8; 10, 2,7; [see
Wetstein on 1 Co. 1. c.]; Sept. once for 195, the price
of expiation or redemption, Prov. xxi. 18, because the
Grks. used to apply the term xa@dpyara to victims sacri-
ficed to make expiation for the people, and even to crim-
inals who were maintained at the public expense, that
on the outbreak of a pestilence or other calamity they
might be offered as sacrifices to make expiation for the
state.) *
mept-Kad-(fw: 1 aor. ptcp. mepixabicas ; 1. in class.
Grk. trans. to bid or make to sit around, to invest, besiege,
a city, a fortress. 2. intrans. to sit around, be seated
around; so in Lk. xxii. 55 Lehm. txt.*
mept-kadvTrw ; 1 aor. ptcp. mepixadvipas ; pf. pass. ptep.
mepikekaduppevos; fr. Hom. down; to cover all around
[wepi, LI. 1], to cover up, cover over: rs mpdcwmov, Mk.
xiv. 65; Lk. xxii. 64 [A. V. blindfold]; ti xpvoig, Heb.
ix. 4 (Ex. xxviii. 20).*
mept-Kepar; (epi and xetuac) ; fr. Hom. down; al,
to lie around (cf. mepi, III. 1]: mepi [ef. W. § 52, 4, 12]
mt, [A. V. were hanged, Mk. ix. 42]; Lk. xvii. 2; €yovtes
mepikelmevoy nutv vepos, [A.V. are compassed about with
a cloud ete.], Heb. xii. 1. 2. passively [cf. B. 50
(44)], to be compassed with, have round one, [with ace. ;
cf. W. § 32,5; B. §134, 7]: Gdvow, Acts xxviii. 20 (de-
opd, 4 Mace. xii. 3); aodéveray, infirmity cleaves to me,
Heb. v. 2 (UBpuv, Theocr. 23,14; dyavpwou, védos, Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6).*
arept-Keadaia, -as, 7, (mept and kepadn), a helmet: 1 Th.
v. 8; tov cwrnpiov (fr. Is. lix. 17), i.e. dropping the fig.,
the protection of soul which consists in (the hope of)
salvation, Eph. vi. 17. (Polyb.; Sept. for y2y5.) *
amept-Kparys, -€s, (Kparos), Twds, having full power over a
thing: [meptx. yeverOar ths oxadys, to secure], Acts xxvii.
16. (Sus. 39 cod. Alex.; eccl. writ.) *
mepi-Kpimrw : 2 aor. meptéxpuBov (on this form cf. Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. i. p. 400 sq. 3 ii. p. 226; [WH. App. p. 170;
al. make it (in Lk. as below) a late imperfect; cf. B.
40 (35); Soph. Lex. s. v. kptBw; Veitch s. v. epirrw]) ;
to conceal on all sides or entirely, to hide : éavrdév, to keep
one’s self at home, Lk. i. 24. (Leian., Diog. Laért.,
al.) *
aept-KvKAS@, -@: fut. mepixvKA@ow; to encircle, compass
about: of a city (besieged), Lk. xix. 43. (Arstph. av.
346; Xen. an. 6,1(3), 11; Aristot. h.a. 4, 8 [p. 533°, 11];
Leian., al.; Sept. for 220.) *
arept-AGprw: 1 aor. mepiedapwa; to shine around: twa,
Lk. ii. 9; Acts xxvi. 13. (Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
mept-Aelrrm : pres. pass. ptcp. meprdecmdpuevos (cf. mepi,
III. 2); to leave over; pass. to remain over, to survive:
1 Th. iv.15, 17. (Arstph., Plat., Eur., Polyb., Hdian. ;
2 Mace. i. 31.) *
arept-Avros, -ov, (aepi and Avmy, and so prop. ‘encom-
passed with grief’ (cf. wepi, III. 3]), very sad, exceedingly
sorrowful: Mt. xxvi. 38: Mk. vi. 26; xiv. 34; Lk. xviii.
23, 24 [where T WH om. Tr br. the cl.]. (Ps. xli. (xlii.)
6, 12; 1 Esdr. viii. 69; Isocr., Aristot., al.) *
arepi-péve ; (rept further [cf. mepi, HI. 2]); to wait for:
méplé
ri, Actsi.4. (Gen. xlix. 18; Sap. viii. 12; Arstph., Thuc.,
Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
mépé [on the formative or strengthening € cf. Lob.
Paralip. p. 131], adv., fr. Aeschyl. down, round about:
ai mépré wédeus, the cities round about, the circumjacent
cities, Acts v. 16.*
mept-orkéw, -; to dwell round about : twa (ef. W. § 52,
4, 12], to be one’s neighbor, Lk. i. 65. (Hat., Arstph.,
Xen., Lys., Plut.) *
amepl-ovxos, -ov, (mepi and oikos), dwelling around, a
neighbor: Lk.i.58. (Gen. xix. 29; Deut.i. 7; Jer. XXX.
(xlix.) 5; Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Isocr., al.) *
aepiovortos, -ov, (fr. repiay, meptovaa, ptcp. of the verb
mepieyu, to be over and above —see émovovos; hence
meptovoia, abundance, plenty ; riches, wealth, property),
that which is one’s own, belongs to one’s possessions: hads
meptovaros, a people selected by God from the other nations
for his own possession, Tit. ii. 14; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64;
in Sept. for 7430 oy, (Ex. xix. 5) ; Deut. vii. 6; xiv. 2;
xxvi. 18. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. ‘Fresh Revision’ etc. App.
iis) *
TEPLOXH, -7)S, 7), (meprex@, q- V-) 5 1. an encompass-
ing, compass, circuit, (Theophr., Diod., Plut., al.). Ze
that which is contained ; spec. the contents of any writing,
Acts viii. 32 (Cic. ad Attic. 13,25; Stob. eclog. ethic. p.
164 [ii. p. 541 ed. Gaisford]) [but A. V. place i.e, pas-
sage; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
mepi-TaTéw, -@; impf. 2 pers. sing. mepierarers, 3 pers.
mepieraret, plur. meprenarovy; fut. mepumatno® ; 1 aor. mept-
exatnoa; plupf. 3 pers. sing. mepvememarjxer (Acts xiv. 8
Rec.**), and without the auem. (cf. W. § 12,9; [B. 33
(29) ]) mepumrerarnxe (ibid. Rec. Grsb.) ; Sept. for J;
to walk; [walk about A. V. 1 Pet. v. 8]; a. prop.
(as in Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Joseph., Ael., al.) : ab-
sol., Mt. ix. 5; xi. 5; xv. 31; Mk. ii. 9 [Tdf. dmaye]; v.42;
Ville 243) xvi 125 Lk: v23s vil. 22) xxiv. 17s Ine. 865 Vv.
8sq. 11 sq.; xi. 9sq.; Acts iii. 6, 8sq.12; xiv. 8,10; 1
Pet. v. 8; Rev. ix. 20; i. q. to make one’s way, make prog-
ress, in fig. disc. equiv. to to make a due use of opportu-
nities, Jn. xii. 35°. with additions: mepur. yupvds, Rev.
xvi. 15; émave (rus), Lk. xi. 44; dud w. gen. of the thing,
Rey. xxi. 24 [(GLT Tr WH]; &» w. dat. of place, i.q.
to frequent, stay in, a place, Mk. xi. 27; Jn. vii. 13; x. 23;
Rev. ii. 1; & reat, among persons, Jn. xi. 543 [a. dou
#Oedes, Of personal liberty, Jn. xxi. 18]; metaph. év 77
oxoria, to be subject to error and sin, Jn. viii. 123 xii.
35°; 1Jn.i. 6 sq.; ii-11; é» with dat. of the garment
one is clothed in, Mk. xii. 38; Lk. xx. 46; Rev. iii. 4, (év
koxkivots, Epict. diss. 3, 22,10); éni ris Oaddoons, [Mt.
xiv. 25 RG; 26 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 48, 49], see emi,
A.J. 1a.and 2a.; én rhv OaX., emi ra dSara, [ Mt. xiv. 25
LT Tr WH, 26 RG, 29], see émi, C. I. 1 a.; [mapa riv
Oddacoay, Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 Ree., see mapa, II. 1];
pera tivos, to associate with one, to be one’s companion,
used of one’s followers and votaries, Jn. vi. 66; Rev. iii.
4, b. Hebraistically, to live [ef. W.32; com. in Paul
and John, but not found in James or in Peter (cf. dva-
otpepw 3 b., avaorpodn) |, i. e. a. to regulate one’s
504
mepiTroinats
life, to conduct one’s self (cf. 680s, 2 a., mopeva, b. y.) :
dios twvds, Eph.iv. 1; Col.i.10; 1 Th. ii. 12; evoynpoves,
Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Th. iv. 12; dxpyBas, Eph. v. 15; ardkros,
2 Th. iii. 6, 11; &s or kaOds Tus, Eph. iv. 17; v. 8, 15; otro
aw. xabas, Phil. iii. 17; [kaOas a. ovrw 7m. 1 In. ii. 6 (L Tr
txt. WH om. ovrw)]; was, cadws, 1 Th. iv. 1; ovras, os,
1 Co. vii. 17; so that a nom. of quality must be sought
from what follows, éy@pot rod aravpod rod Xpiorod, Phil.
iii. 18. witha dat. of the thing to which the life is given
or consecrated: kapors, eats, etc., Ro. xiii. 13, cf. Fritz-
sche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 140sq.; w.a dat. of the standard
acc. to which one governs his life [cf. Fritzsche u. s. p.
142; also B. § 133, 22 b.; W. 219 (205)]: Acts xxi. 21;
Gal. v. 16; 2 Co. xii. 18; foll. by év w. a dat. denoting
either the state in which one is living, or the virtue or
vice to which he is given [cf. év, I.5 e. p. 210» bot.]: Ro.
vi.4; 2 Co.iv. 2; Eph. ii. 2,10; iv.17; v. 2; Col. iii. 7;
iv.5; 2Jn.4,6; 3 Jn. 38q.; év Bpwpact, of those who
have fellowship in the sacrificial feasts, Heb. xiii. 9; év
Xpior@ [see ev, I. 6 b.], to live a life conformed to the
union entered into with Christ, Col.ii. 6; card w. an acc.
of the pers. or thing furnishing the standard of living,
(Mk. vii. 5]; 2Jn.6; xara avOpwmov, 1 Co. iii. 3; Kara
adpka, Ro. viii. 1 Rec., 4; xiv. 15; 2 Co. x. 2. B.
i. q. to pass (one’s) life: év capxi, in the body, 2 Co. x.
3; da rictews (see did, A. I. 2),2Co.v.7. [Comp.: ép-
mepitrareéw. | *
mept-reipw: 1 aor. meptémetpa; to pierce through [see
mepi, III. 3]: rwa Eiheor, Sdpatt, etc., Diod., Joseph.,
Plut., Leian., al.; metaph. éaurév .. . ddvvats, to torture
one’s soul with sorrows, 1 Tim. vi. 10 (dynxéorots Kakxois,
Philo in Flace. § 1).*
mepi-rinrw : 2 aor. meptemecov; fr. Hdt. down; so to
fall into as to be encompassed by [cf. mepi, III. 1]: Ag-
arais, among robbers, Lk. x. 30; rots metpacpois, Jas. i. 2,
(aixiats, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51, 2; Gavar@, Dan. ii. 9;
Diod. 1, 77; véc@, Joseph. antt. 15, 7, 7; cvpopa, ibid.
1,1, 43 rots dewois, Aesop 79 (110 ed. Halm); yevdéor
k. dveBeor Sdypacw, Orig. in Joann. t. ii. § 2; numerous
other exx. in Passows. v. 1. c. [L. and S. s. v. II. 3]; to
which add, 2 Mace. vi.13; x.4; Polyb. 1, 87,1 and 9);
eis Térov Tid, upon a certain place, Acts xxvii. 41.*
tepi-trovew, -@: Mid., pres. meperotodyar; 1 aor. mept-
eroinoduny ; (see epi, III. 2); fr. Hdt. down; to make
to remain over; to reserve, to leave or keep safe, lay by;
mid. to make to remain for one’s self, i.e. 1. to
preserve for one’s self (Sept. for 17) : tiv Wuyny, life,
Lk. xvii. 33 T Tr WH (ras Wuyds, Xen. Cyr. 4, 4, 10).
2. to get for one’s self, purchase: ri, Acts xx. 28 (Is.
xliii. 21; dvvayw, Thuc. 1, 9; Xen. mem. 2, 7, 3); rt
éxavr@, gain for myself (W. § 38, 6), 1 Tim. iii. 13 (1
Mace. vi. 44; Xen. an. 5, 6, 17).*
mept-trolnats, -ews, 7), (mrepirorew) ; 1. a preserving,
preservation: eis mepuroinow wuxijs, to the preserving of
the soul, sc. that it may be made partaker of eternal sal-
vation [A. V. unto the saving of the soul], Heb. x. 39
(Plat. deff. p. 415 .). 2. possession, one’s own prop-
erty: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Is. xliii. 20 sq.); Eph. i. 14 (on this
ep ippaive
pass. see drroAvtpaois, 2). 3. an obtaining: with a
gen. of the thing to be obtained, 1 Th. v. 9; 2 Th. ii. 14.*
tept-ppatve (‘Tdf. repip., with one p; see P, p) : pf. pass.
ptcp. meptpepappevos (cf. M, pn); (wepi and faive to sprin-
kle) ; to sprinkle around, besprinkle: iparvoy, pass., Rev.
xix. 13 Tdf. [al. BeBappevov (exc. WH pepavricpévor, see
pavri¢w, and their App. ad loc.)]. (Arstph., Menand.,
Philo, Plut., al.; Sept.)*
mept-ppyyvupt (LT Tr WH epip., with one p; see the
preceding word) : 1 aor. ptep. plur. mepuppyéavres; (epi
and pyyvup.); to break off on all sides, break off all
round, (cf. wepi, III. 1]: 16 iparwoy, to rend or tear off all
around, Acts xvi. 22. So of garments also in 2 Mace.
iv. 38 and often in prof. auth.; Aeschyl. sept. 329; Dem.
p- 403, 3; Polyb. 15, 33, 4; Diod. 17, 35.*
Tepi-omdw, -&: impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. repreonaro; fr.
Xen. down; to draw around [repi, III. 1], to draw away,
distract; pass. metaph., to be driven about mentally, to be
distracted: mepi tt, i.e. to be over-occupied, too busy,
about a thing, Lk. x. 40 [A. V. cumbered]; in the same
sense with 77 dcavoia added, Polyb. 3, 105, 1; 4, 10,
3; Diod. 1, 74; meptomav rov apyov Squov mepi ras eo
otpareias, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 43; pass. to be distracted
with cares, to be troubled, distressed, [cf. W. 23], for ny,
Ecel. i. 13; iii. 10.*
meptoceta, -as, 4, (mepisoev@, q- V-) 5 1. abun-
dance: ths xapiros, Ro. v.17; ris xapas, 2 Co. viii. 2; ets
mepiooeiav, adverbially, superabundantly, superfluously,
LA. V. out of measure], 2 Co. x. 15, (Boeckh, Corp. in-
serr. i. p. 668, no. 1378, 6; Byzant. writ.). 2. su-
periority ; preference, pre-eminence: 5’, Eccl. vi. 8; for
jiom, Eccl. ii. 13; x. 10. 3. gain, profit: for
ym, Eccl. i. 3; ii. 113 iii. 9, ete. 4. residue, re-
mains: kakias, the wickedness remaining over in the
Christian from his state prior to conversion, Jas. i. 21,
see repiaceupa, 2; [al. adhere in this pass. to the mean-
ing which the word bears elsewhere in the N. T. viz.
‘excess’, ‘superabundance,’ (A. V. superfluity) ].*
meplooevpa, -Tos, TO, (mEpiaceva) 5 1. abundance,
in which one delights; opp. to tarépnya, 2 Co. viii. 14
(13), 14; trop. of that which fills the heart, Mt. xii. 34 ;
Lk. vi. 45, (Eratosth., Plut.). 2. what is left over,
residue, remains: plur. Mk. viii. 8.*
mepiocetw; impf. emepiocevov (Acts xvi. 5); fut. inf.
nepooevoew (Phil. iv. 12 Rec.?); 1 aor. érepicaevoa ;
Pass., pres. mepiooevopat (Lk. xv. 17, see below); 1 fut.
3 pers. sing. meprowevOnoerat; (meptocds, q- V-) § a:
intrans. and prop. to exceed a fixed number or measure ;
Jo be over and above a certain number or measure: pupioi
claw dpiOpov... eis d€ meptocever, Hes. fr. 14, 4 [clxix.
(187), ed. Gottling]; hence a. to be over, to remain:
Jn. vi. 12; 7d mepiocetov Tdv Kraoparar, i. q. Ta TeEpto-
vevovra kddopara, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; mepuooever poi TH,
Jn. vi. 13 (Tob. iv. 16) ; 76 meprocedody tum, what remained
over to one, Lk. ix. 17. b. to exist or be at hand
in abundance: rwi, Lk. xii. 15; 7d meprooedéy Tem, one’s
abundance, wealth, [(R. V. superfluity) ; opp. to tore-
onots], Mk. xii. 44; opp. to torépnya, Lk. xxi. 4; to be
505
TEplaaos
great (abundant), 2 Co. i. 5°; ix.12; Phil.i. 26; Tepio-
aever Tt ets twa, a thing comes in abundance, or overflows,
unto one; something falls to the lot of one in large meas-
ure: Ro. v.15; 2 Co.i. 5°; mepiocetw ets rt, to redound
unto, turn out abundantly for, a thing, 2 Co. viii. 2; 4
G7 Oca Tod Oeod ev TH eyo evopare emepiogeucer eis Thy
dofav avrod, i. e. by my lie it came to pass that God’s
veracity became the more conspicuous, and becoming
thus more thoroughly known increased his glory, Ro.
iil. 7; to be increased, r@ dpiOpe, Acts xvi. 5. Cc. to
abound, overflow, i.e. a. to be abundantly furnished
with, to have in abundance, abound in (a thing): absol.
[A. V. to abound], to be in affluence, Phil. iv. 18; opp.
to torepeicOa, ib. 12; in spiritual gifts, 1 Co. xiv. 12;
with a gen. of the thing in which one abounds (W. § 30,
8b.; [ef. B. § 132, 12]): aprov, Lk. xv. 17 R GL T Tr
mrg. B. to be pre-eminent, to excel, [cf. B. § 132, 22]:
absol. 1 Co. viii. 8; foll. by év w. a dat. of the virtues or
the actions in which one excels [B. § 132, 12], Ro.
xv. 13; 1 Co. xv. 58; 2 Co. iii. 9 [here LT Tr WH om.
év]; viii. 7; Col. ii. 7; mepuoo. paddAov, to excel still more,
to increase in excellence, 1 Th. iv. 1, 10; paAXov x. paddov
meptoo. Phil. i.9; mepioo. wdeiov, to excel more than [A. V.
exceed; cf. B. § 132, 20 and 22], Mt. v. 20, (mepuoc. inep
twa, 1 Mace. iii. 30; ri émepiocevoer 6 dvOpwmos mapa Td
«tnvos; Eccl. iii. 19). 2. by later Greek usage
transitively [cf. W. p. 23; § 38,1], to make to abound,
i.e. a. to furnish one richly so that he has abun-
dance: pass., Mt. xiii. 12; xxv. 29; w. gen. of the thing
with which one is furnished, pass. Lk. xv. 17 WH Trtxt.;
ti els twa, to make a thing to abound unto one, to confer a
thing abundantly upon one, 2 Co. ix. 8; Eph. i. 8. b.
to make abundant or excellent: ri, 2 Co. iv. 15; to cause
one to excel: twd, w. a dat. of the thing, 1 Th. iii.12. (ras
&pas, to extend the hours beyond the prescribed time,
Athen. 2 p.42b.) [Comp.: tmep-repicceva. ]*
mepioods, -7, -dv, (fr. mepi, q. v. III. 2), fr. Hes. down,
Sept. for 1NV, 1}, ete.; exceeding some number or meas-
ure or rank or need ; 1. over and above, more than
is necessary, superadded: 16 1. totrwy, what is added to
[A. V. more than; cf. B. § 132, 21 Rem.] these, Mt. v. 37;
€x mepicoov, exceedingly, beyond measure, Mk. vi. 51
[WH om. Tr br. ek mw. ]; xiv. 31 Rec.; irép é« meprocod
(written as one word tmepexmepiocod [q. v.]), exceeding
abundantly, supremely, Eph. iii. 20 [ef. B. u.s.]; 1 Th.
iii. 10; v.13 [RG WH txt.]; mepucody poi eorw, it is
superfluous for me, 2 Co. ix. 1; mepioady eye, to have
abundance, Jn. x. 10 (of pev... meptooa exovow, ot Sé
ovdé ra dvayxaia Sivavra mopifer@a, Xen. oec. 20, 1);
neut. compar. meptaadrepdy re, something further, more,
Lk. xii. 4 (L Trmrg. reptoody); meptoodr. the more, ibid.
48; [mepioodrepov mavrav etc. much more than all ete.
Mk. xii. 33 T Tr txt. WH]; adverbially, somewhat more
[R. V. somewhat abundantly], 2 Co. x. 8; (Vulg. abun-
dantius [A.V. more abundantly]) i. e. more plainly, Heb.
vi. 17; paddov meptaadrepov, much more, Mk. vii. 36;
mepioodrepoy mavtwv, more [abundantly] than all, 1 Co.
xv. 10; with an adj. it forms a periphrasis for the com-
TEPLTTOTEPWS
par. mepioodrepoy karddnAoy, more [abundantly] evident,
Heb. vii. 15 [cf. W. § 35, 1]. 2. superior, extraor-
dinary, surpassing, uncommon: Mt. v. 47 [A. V. more
than others]; 1d mepioad», as subst., pre-eminence, supe-
riority, advantage, Ro. iii. 1; compar. mepiaodrepos, more
eminent, more remarkable, (ovx €oy meproadrepos, Gen.
xlix. 3 Symm.; mepirrérepos ppovnces, Plut. mor. p. 57 f.
de adulatore etc. 14): Mt. xi. 9; Lk. vii. 26, although
in each pass. mepisadrepov can also be taken as neut.
(something) more excellent (Vulg. plus [R. V. much more
than’ete.]); with substantives: mepuoodrepov kpipa, i. e.
a severer, heavier judgment, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.;
Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; run, greater honor, more [abun-
dant] honor, 1 Co. xii. 23", [24 ; evrynpoovvn, ibid. 23°];
Avan, 2 Co. i. 7.*
meptororépus, adv., (fr. mepurods, q. v-), (ef. W. § 11,
2c.; B.69 (61)]; 1. prop. more abundantly (so in
Diod. 13, 108; Athen. 5 p. 192f.); in the N. T. more,
in a greater degree; more earnestly, more exceedingly, [cf.
W. 243 (228)]: Mk. xv. 14 Rec.; 2 Co. vii. 15; xi. 23;
Galerd4y ee hilsis 14a aerial Le byt. his exit ple
opp: to #rrov, 2 Co. xii. 15; meprocorépws paddov, much
more, [R.V. the more exceedingly], 2 Co. vii. 13. 2
especially, above others, [A. V. more abundantly]: 2 Co.
Pl Delia
meptooas, (meptoads, q. V-), adv., beyond measure, ex-
traordinarily (Eur. ; i.q. magnificently, Polyb., Athen.) ;
i. q. greatly, exceedingly: éxmrnooecOa, Mk. x. 26; kpacery,
Mt. xxvii. 23 and GLT Tr WH in Mk. xv. 14; eupaive-
oGa, Acts xxvi. 11.*
meprrtepa., -as, 7, Hebr. 731°, a dove: Mt. iii.16; x. 16;
5oo6 AG Wilkes MOP sob ae IW te PHS thE eee din 9e Sime
ii. 14,16. [From Hat. down. ]*
mept-répvo (lon. mepitdpve) ; 2 aor. mepiereov; Pass.,
pres. mepirepvopar; pf. ptep. mepererpnpevos; 1 aor. mepi-
erunOnv; [fr. Hes. down]; Sept. chiefly for 53n ; to cut
around (cf. wepi, III. 1]: ruvd, to circumcise, cut off one’s
prepuce (used of that well-known rite by which not only
the male children of the Israelites, on the eighth day
after birth, but subsequently also ‘proselytes of right-
eousness’” were consecrated to Jehovah and introduced
into the number of his people; [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Cir-
cumcision; Oehler’s O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) §§ 87, 88;
Miiller, Barnabasbrief, p. 227 sq.]), Lk. i. 59; ii. 21; Jn.
vii. 22; Acts vii. 8; xv.53 xvi. 3; xxi. 21; of the same
rite, Diod. 1,28; pass. and mid. to get one’s self circwm-
cised, present one’s self to be circumcised, receive circum-
cision [cf. W. § 88, 3]: Acts xv. 1, 24 Rec.; 1 Co. vii. 18;
Gal. ii. 3; v. 2sq.; vi. 12sq.3; with ra aidSoia added, Hat.
2, 36 and 104; Joseph. antt. 1,10, 5; ¢. Ap. 1, 22. Since
by the rite of circumcision a man was separated from
the unclean world and dedicated to God, the verb is
transferred to denote the extinguishing of lusts and the
removal of sins, Col. ii. 11, cf. Jer.iv.4; Deut. x. 16, and
eccl. writ. [see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iii. 3].*
wrept-rlOnut, 3 pers. plur. meperiOéaow (Mk. xv. 173 see
reff. in émertOnpc) ; 1 aor. mepteOnxa; 2 aor. ptep. mepibeis,
mepiOevres; fr. Hom. down; a. prop. to place
506
Tepipepw
around, set about, [cf. mepi, III. 1]: revi rt, as Ppaypov TO
dumedou, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; to put a garment on
one, Mt. xxvii. 28; orépavov, put on (encircle one’s head
with) a crown, Mk. xv. 17 (Sir. vi. 31; Plat. Alcib. 2
p-151 a.) ; ri ru, to put or bind one thing around anoth-
er, Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Jn. xix. 29. b. trop.
rwi tT, to present, bestow, confer, a thing upon one (so in
class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down, as é€AevOepiay, Hdt. 3, 142;
ddéav, Dem. p. 1417, 3 ; see Passow ii. p. 881 sq.; [L. and
S. s. v. IL]; 76 dvopa, Sap. xiv. 21; Thue. 4, 87): rey,
EConxi1e2ps Hsthr202,
mept-roph, -7s, 7), (mepitéuvw), circumcision (on which
see mepiteuva) ; a. prop. a. the act or rite of
circumcision : Jn. vii. 22 sq.; Acts vii. 8; Ro. iv. 11; Gal.
v.11; Phil. iii. 5; of ék ris meper. (see ex, II. 7), the cir
cumcised, they of the circumcision, used of Jews, Ro.
iv. 12; of Christians gathered from among the Jews,
Acts xi. 2; Gal. ii.12; Tit. i. 10; of dvres éx mepir. Col.
rhe thle B. the state of circumcision, the being cir-
cumcised: Ro. ii. 25-28; iii. 1; 1 Co. vii. 19; Gal. v. 6;
vi. 15; Col. iii. 11; év mepiropy dv, circumcised, Ro. iv.
10. y. by meton. ‘the circumcision’ for of mepetun-
Gévres the circumcised, i.e. Jews: Ro. iii. 30; iv. 9, 12;
xv. 8; Gal. ii. 7-9; Eph. ii. 11; of &« mepitopjs meorol,
Christian converts from among the Jews, Jewish Chris-
tians, Acts x. 45. ‘b. metaph. a. of Chris-
tians: (npeis eopev) 7 meptroun, separated from the un-
clear. multitude and truly consecrated to God, Phil. iii.
3 [(where see Bp. Lghtft.)]. B. 7 meptropy axerpo-
mointos, the extinction of the passions and the removal
of spiritual impurity (see wepiréuve, fin.), Col. ii. 11*; 9
mepitouy Kapdias in Ro. ii. 29 denotes the same thing ;
mepit. Xptorod, of which Christ is the author, Col. ii. 11°.
(The noun zepiroun occurs three times in the O. T., viz.
Gen. xvii. 13; Jer. xi.16; for m9, Ex. iv. 26; besides
in Philo, whose tract mepi mepirouis is found in Mangey’s
ed. ii. pp. 210-212 [Richter’s ed. iv. pp. 282-284]; Jo
seph. antt. 1, 10,5; [13, 11 fin.; ¢. Ap. 2, 13, 1. 6]; plur.,
anit. 1, 12, 2.) *
mept-tpérw ; to turn about [mepi, III. 1], to turn; to
transfer or change by turning : rt or twa els TL, a pers. or
thing into some state; once so in the N. T. viz. cé eis
paviay mepitperet, is turning thee mad, Acts xxvi. 243
Tovs Trapévtas eis yapay mepreatpeWe, Joseph. antt. 9, 4.4;
TO Oeiov eis dpynv mepitpamev, 2, 14,1. In various other
uses in Grk. auth. [fr. Lys. and Plat. on].*
mept-Tpexo : 2 aor. [mrepreSpapov T Tr WH], ptep. zepe-
Spapdvres [RGL]; fr. [Hom.], Theogn., Xen., Plat.
down ; to run around, run round about: with an acc. of
place, Mk. vi. 55. (Sept. twice for yaw, Jer. v. 1; Am.
viii. 12.) *
mept-hépw ; pres. pass. mepupépouar; fr. Hdt. down; to
carry round: to bear about everywhere with one, ti,
2 Co. iv. 10; to carry hither and thither, robs xaxds
éxovras, Mk. vi. 55 (where the Evangelist wishes us to
conceive of the sick as brought to Jesus while he is
travelling about and visiting different places); pass. to
be driven [A. V. carried] about: navri dvép@ ths didacka-
crepuppovéw
Nias, i.e. in doubt and hesitation to be led away now to
this opinion, now to that, Eph. iv. 14. In Heb. xiii. 9
and Jude 12 for repupép. editors from Griesbach on have
restored mapadép.*
TEpt-povew, - ; 1. to consider or examine on all
sides [mepi, II. 1], i. e. carefully, thoroughly, (Arstph.
nub. 741). 2. (fr. wepi, beyond, III. 2), to set one’s
self in thought beyond (exalt one’s self in thought above) a
pers. or thing; to contemn, despise: rwds (cf. Kiihner
§ 419, 1b. vol. ii. p. 325), Tit. ii. 15 (4 Mace. vi. 9; vii.
16; xiv. 1; Plut., al. ; rod ¢qv, Plat. Ax. p.372; Aeschin.
dial. Socr. 3, 22).*
mepl-xwpos, -ov, (mepi and yapos), lying round about,
neighboring, (Plut., Aelian., Dio Cass.); in the Scrip-
tures 9 mepixepos, sc. yn, the region round about [q. v-in
B.D.]: Mt. xiv. 35; Mk.i. 28; vi.55(RGLtxt.]; Lk.
ill. 3; iv. 14,37; vii. 17; viii.37; Acts xiv. 6, (Gen. xix.
17; Deut. iii. 13, ete.; rHs yys tis meptywpov, Gen. xix.
28 cod. Alex.) ; 4 mepix. rod lopSdvov, Lk. iii. 3 (Gen. xiii.
10sq.; for JPN 133, the region of the Jordan [cf. B. D.
u. s.]); by meton. for its inhabitants: Mt. iii.5. (ro
mepix@poy and ra mepixywpa, Deut. iii. 4; 1 Chr. v. 16; 2
Chr. iv. 17, etc.) *
areptapnpa., -ros, 70, (fr. mepuydw ‘to wipe off all round’;
and this fr. wepi [q. v. III. 1], and do ‘to wipe,’ ‘rub’),
prop. what is wiped off; dirt rubbed off; offscouring,
scrapings: 1 Co. iv. 13, used in the same sense as mepi-
xa@appa, q.v. Suidas and other Greek lexicographers
s.v. relate that the Athenians, in order to avert public
calamities, yearly threw a criminal into the sea as an
offering to Poseidon; hence dpyvpioy . . . repivynua tov
rradiov jnuav yévorro, (as if to say) let it become an expi-
atory offering, a ransom, for our child, i. e. in comparison
with the saving of our son’s life let it be to us a despi-
cable and worthless thing, Tob. v. 18 (where see Fritz-
sche; [cf. also Miiller on Barn. ep. 4,9]). It is used
of a man who in behalf of religion undergoes dire
trials for the salvation of others, Ignat. ad Eph. 8, 1;
18,1; [see Bp. Lghtft.’s note on the former passage ].*
ameptrepevopat; (to be wéprepos, i. e. vain-glorious, brag-
gart, Polyb. 32, 6,5; 40, 6, 2; Epict. diss. 3, 2, 14); to
boast one’s self [A. V. vaunt one’s self]: 1 Co. xiii. 4 (An-
tonin. 5, 5; the compound éumeprepeterda is used of
self-display, employing rhetorical embellishments in ex-
tolling one’s self excessively, in Cic. ad Attic. 1, 14.
Hesych. mepmepeverar xuteraiperat); cf. Osiander [or
Wetstein] on 1 Co. |. c. [Gataker on Marc. Antonin. 5,
5 p. 143].*
Tlepots [lit. ‘a Persian woman’, 4, ace. ida, Persis, a
Christian woman: Ro. xvi. 12.*
mépvor, (fr. mépas), adv., last year; the year just past:
dré népvot, for a year past, a year ago, [W. 422 (393)],
2 Co. viii. 10; ix. 2. ({Simon.], Arstph., Plat., Plut.,
Leian.) *
merdopat, -@uat; a doubtful later Grk. form for the
earlier néropat (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 581; Bétm. Ausf.
Spr. ii. p. 271 8q.; ef. W. 88 (84); [B. 65 (58); Veitch
8. v.]); to fly: in the N. T. found only in pres. ptep. me-
507
ITétpos
t@pevos, Rec. in Rev. iv. 7; viii. 13; xiv. 6; xix. 17,
where since Griesbach merépevos has been restored.*
mereivos, -7), -dv, (Attic for mernvds, fr. méropac), flying,
winged; in the N. T. found only in neut. plur. merewd
and ra merewd, as subst., flying or winged animals, birds :
Mt. xiii. 4; Mk.iv.4 (GL T Tr WH]; Lk. xii. 24; Ro. i.
23; Jas. ili. 7; ra mer. tod odpavod (Sept. for Dw Ap;
see obpavés, 1 b.), the birds of heaven, i.e. flying in the
heavens (air), Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 4
[Rec.], 32; Lk. viii. 5; ix. 58; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12 [here
LT Tr WH om. ra]; xi. 6. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)]*
wéropat; [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for ay; to fly: Rev.
iv. 7; vill. 13; xii. 14; xiv. 6; xix. 17; see merdouac*
aétpa, -as, 7, fr. Hom. down; Sept. for p90 and 73y;
a rock, ledge, cliff; a. prop.: Mt. vii. 24 sq.; xxvii.
51,60; Mk. xv. 46; Lk. vi.48; 1Co.x.4 (on which see
mvevparikds, 3a.) ; a projecting rock, crag, Rev. vi. 15sq.;
rocky ground, Lk. viii. 6, 13. b. arock, large stone:
Ro. ix. 33; 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). c. metaph. a man like
a rock, by reason of his firmness and strength of soul:
Mt. xvi. 18 [séme interpp. regard the distinction (gen-
erally observed in classic Greek; see the Comm. and cf.
Schmidt, Syn. ch. 51, §§ 4-6) between wérpa, the massive
living rock, and zérpos, a detached but large fragment,
as important for the correct understanding of this pas-
sage; others explain the different genders here as due
first to the persona] then to the material reference.
Cf. Meyer, Keil, al.; Green, Crit. Note on Jn. i. 43].*
Tlérpos, -ov, 6, (an appellative prop. name, signifying
‘a stone,’ ‘arock,’ ‘a ledge’ or ‘cliff’; used metaph. of a
soul hard and unyielding, and so resembling a rock,
Soph. O. R. 334; Eur. Med. 28; Herc. fur. 1397; answer-
ing to the Chald. Kngas, q. v., Jn. i. 42 (43)), Peter, the
surname of the apostle Simon. He was a native of
Bethsaida, a town of Galilee, the son of a fisherman (see
*Iadvyns, 8, and "Iwvas, 2), and dwelt with his wife at
Capernaum, Mt. viii. 14; Mk.i.30; Lk. iv. 38, cf. 1 Co.
ix. 5. He had a brother Andrew, with whom he fol-
lowed the occupation of a fisherman, Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i.
16; Lk. v. 3. Both were received by Jesus as his com-
panions, Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i.17; Lk. v.10; Jn. i. 40-42
(41-43); and Simon, whose pre-eminent courage and
firmness he discerned and especially relied on for the fu-
ture establishment of the kingdom of God, he honored
with the name of Peter, Jn.i. 42 (43); Mt. xvi. 18; Mk.
iii. 16. Excelling in vigor of mind, eagerness to learn,
and love for Jesus, he enjoyed, together with James and
Jobn the sons of Zebedee, the special favor and intima-
cy of his divine Master. After having for some time
presided, in connection with John and James the brother
of our Lord [see "IdkwBos, 3], over the affairs of the
Christians at Jerusalem, he seems to have gone abroad
to preach the gospel especially to Jews (Gal. ii. 9; 1 Co.
ix.53 1 Pet. v.13; Papias in Euseb. 3, 39, 15; for Papias
states that Peter employed Mark as ‘interpreter ’ (épuy-
veutns), an aid of which he had no need except beyond
the borders of Palestine, especially among those whe
spoke Latin [but on the disputed meaning of the word
TeTpwOons
‘interpreter’ here, see Morison, Com. on Mk., ed. 2, In-
trod. p. xxix. sqq.]). But just as, on the night of the
betrayal, Peter proved so far faithless to himself as thrice
to deny that he was a follower of Jesus, so also some
time afterwards at Antioch he made greater conces-
sions to the rigorous Jewish Christians than Christian
liberty permitted; accordingly he was rebuked by Paul
for his weakness and ‘dissimulation’ (téxpiots), Gal.
ii. 11 sqq. Nevertheless, in the patristic age Jewish
Christians did not hesitate to claim the authority of
Peter and of James the brother of the Lord in defence
of their narrow views, and practices. This is not the
place to relate and refute the ecclesiastical traditions
concerning Peter’s being the founder of the church at
Rome and bishop of it for twenty-five years and more;
the discussion of them may be found in Hase, Protes-
tant. Polemik gegen die rém.-kathol. Kirche, ed. 4, p.
123 sqq-; [cf. Schaff, Church History, 1882, vol. i. §§ 25,
26; Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2, vol. xi. p. 524 sqq., and (for
reff.) p. 537 sq.]. This one thing seems to be evident
from Jn. xxi. 18 sqq., that Peter sufferededeath by cru-
cifixion [cf. Keil ad loc.; others doubt whether Christ’s
words contain anything more than a general prediction
of martyrdom]. If he was crucified at Rome, it must
have been several years after the death of Paul. [Cf.
BB. DD. and reff. u.s.] | He is called in the N. T., at
one time, simply Sipev (once Supewv, Acts. xv. 14), and
(and that, too, most frequently [see B. D. s. v. Peter, sub
fin. (p. 2459 Am. ed.)]), Iérpos and Kndas (q. v.), then
again Siuvev Ieérpos, Mt. xvi.16; Lk.v. 8; Jn.[i. 42 (43) ];
vi- [8], 685 xiii. 6, 9,24, [36]; xviii. 10, 15, 253; xx. 2,6;
XxL. 2 sq. 7, 11,15; once Supedv Ieérpos (2 Pet. i. 1 where
L WH txt. Siuvov) ; Siuav 6 Neyduevos Mérpos, Mt. iv. 18;
xX. 25; Sipev 6 émixadovpevos UHérpos, Acts x. 183; xi. 13;
Siwaov os emtxadeirat Iérpos, Acts x. 5, 32.
metpwdys, -es, (fr. mérpa and eidos; hence prop. ‘ rock-
like,’ ‘having the appearance of rock’), rocky, stony: rd
metpades and rd rerpodn, of ground full of rocks, Mt. xiii.
5, 20; Mk. iv. 5,16. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., Diod. 3, 45
(44), Plut., al.) *
tHyavov, -ov, 7d, [thought to be fr. myyvyse to make
solid, on account of its thick, fleshy leaves; cf. Vaniéek
p- 457], rue: Lk. xi. 42. (Theophr. hist. plant. 1, 3, 4;
Dioscorid. 3, 45 (52); Plut., al.) [B.D.s.v.; Tristram,
Nat. Hist. etc. p.478; Carruthers in the “ Bible Educa-
tor,” iii, 216 8q. Nad
w™Hyn, -7s, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for py, py,
Wprs @ fountain, spring: Jas. iii. 11, and Ree. in 12;
2 Pet. ii. 17; ddaros G\Nopevov, Jn. iv. 143 rap es
Rey. viii. 10; xiv. 7; xvi. 4; of a well fed by a spring,
Jn. iv. 6. Cais mnyat bddrov, Rev. vii. 17; 4 7. 7. Datos
Tis Cons, Rev. xxi. 6, (on both pass. see in (of, p. 274°) ;
1) 1. TOD aiparos, a flow of blood, Mk. v. 29.*
awiyvupt: 1 aor. érnfa; fr. Hom. down; to make fast,
to fix; to fasten together, to build by fastening together :
axnvnv, Heb. viii. 2 [A.V. pitched. Comp.: mpoo-mi-
yup. | *
mmSddvov, -ov, 7d, (fr. mn8dv the blade of an oar, an
508
TiKpaives
oar), fr. Hom. down, aship’s rudder: Acts xxvii. 40 [on
the plur. see Smith, Voy. and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 4th
ed., p. 183 sqq.; B. D.s.v. Ship (2); cf. Graser, Das
Seewesen des Alterthums, in the Philologus for 1865,
p: 266 sq.]; Jas. iii. 4.*
armAlxos, -n, -ov, (fr. HAcE [?]), interrog., how great, how
large: in a material reference (denoting geometrical
magnitude as disting. fr. arithmetical, réaos) (Plat. Meno
p. 82d.; p. 83e.; Ptol. 1, 3,3; Zech. ii. 2, [6]), Gal. vi.
11, where cf. Winer, Rickert, Hilgenfeld, [Hackett in
B. D. Am. ed.s. v. Epistle; but see Bp. Lghtft. or Meyer].
in an ethical reference, i. q. how distinguished, Heb. vii.
Ae *
ands, -ov, 6, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; ae
clay, which the potter uses (Is. xxix. 16; xli. 25; Nah.
iii, 14): Ro. ix. 21. b. i. gq. mud fore: day: Jn.
ix. 6, 11, 14sq.*
awhpa., -as, #, @ wallet (a leathern sack, in which travel-
lers and shepherds carried their provisions) [A. V. scrip
(q. v. in B.D.)]: Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk.ix.3; x. 4;
xxii. 85 sq. (Hom., Arstph., Joseph., Plut., Hdian.,
Leian., al.; with ray Bpopdrev added, Judith xiii. 10.) *
wixvs, gen. myxews (not found in the N. T.), gen. plur.
mnxav contr. fr. Ionic mnxéov (Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17;
1 K. vii. 3 (15), 39 (2) ; Esth. vii. 9; Ezek. xl. 5) acc. to
later usage, for the earlier and Attic myer, which is
common in the Sept. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 245sq.; [ WH.
App. p. 157]; W. §9, 2e.), 6, the fore-arm i.e. that part
of the arm between the hand and the elbow-joint (Hom.
Od. 17,38; Il. 21,166,etc.); hence a cubit, (ell, Lat. ulna),
a measure of length equal to the distance from the joint
of the elbow to the tip of the middle finger [i. e. about
one foot and a half, but its precise length varied and is
disputed; see B. D. s.v. Weights and Measures, II. 1]:
Mt. vi. 27; Lk. xii. 25, [on these pass. ef. AcKia, 1 a.]3
Jn. xxi.8; Rev. xxi. 17. (Sept. very often for 78.) *
mato (Doric for mcf, cf. B. 66 (58)): 1 aor. éxiaca;
1 aor. pass. émidoOny ; 1. to lay hold of: twa tips
xetpds, Acts iii. 7 [Theocr. 4, 35]. 2. to take, cap-
ture: fishes, Jn. xxi. 3,10; @npiov, pass., Rev. xix. 20,
(Cant. ii. 15). to take i.e. apprehend: a man, in order
to imprison him, Jn. vii. 30, 32, 44; viii. 20; x. 39; xi.
57; Acts xii. 4; 2 Co. xi. 32. [Comp.: imo-mato.|*
mf: pf. pass. ptep. memecpevos; fr. Hom. down; to
press, press together: Lk. vi. 38. Sept. once for 74, Mic.
Wis 5s8
mBavoroyla, -as, 7, (fr. muBavordyos; and this fr. mOavds,
on which see qetOds, and Adyos), speech adapted to per-
suade, discourse in which probable arguments are ad-
duced ; once so in class. Grk., viz. Plat. Theaet. p. 162 e.;
in a bad sense, persuasiveness of speech, specious dis-
course leading others into error: Col. ii. 4, and several
times in eccl. writers.*
[mOds, see rrecOds and cf. I, «.]
mpalve: fut. mexpavd; Pass., pres. mexpaivopyat; 1 aor.
emtxpavOnv; (amexpéds, q. V-) 3 1. prop. to make bitter:
Ta Udara, pass., Rey. viii. 11; THY Kotriav, to produce
a bitter taste in the stomach (Vulg. amarico), Rev. x
TUK pla
9 sq. 2. trop. to embitter, exasperate, i.e. render
angry, indignant ; pass. to be embittered, irritated, (Plat.,
Dem.,al.): apds twa, Col. iii. 19 (Athen. 6 p. 242¢.; én
tuva, Ex. xvi. 20; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii.) 15; 1 Esdr. iv. 31;
[év ru, Ruth i. 20]); contextually i. q. to visit with bitter-
ness, to grieve, (deal bitterly with), Job xxvii. 2; 1 Mace.
iii. 7. (Comp. : mapa-mpaive.]*
mukpia, -as, 7, (mixpds), bitterness: xod} muxpias, i. q.
XA?) mpd [W. 34, 3 b.; B. § 132, 10], bitter gall, i. q:
extreme wickedness, Acts viii. 23; pi¢a mxpias [reff. as
above], a bitter root, and so producing bitter fruit, Heb.
xi. 15 (fr. Deut. xxix. 18 cod. Alex.), cf. Bleek ad loc.;
metaph. bitterness, i.e. bitter hatred, Eph. iv. 31; of
speech, Ro. iii. 14 after Ps. ix. 28 (x.7). (In various
uses in Sept., [Dem., Aristot.], Theophr., Polyb., Plut.,
al
muxpds, -d, -dv, [fr. r. meaning ‘to cut,’ ‘prick’; Vanitek
534; Curtius §100; Fick i. 145], fr. Hom. down, Sept.
for 1); bitter: prop. Jas. iii. 11 (opp. to rd yuk);
metaph. harsh, virulent, Jas. iii. 14.*
muxpas, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], bitterly: metaph.
éxAavoe, i.e. with poignant grief, Mt. xxvi. 75; Lk. xxii.
62 [here WH br. the cl.]; cf. aixpov Saxpvov, Hom. Od.
4, 153.*
Tlwaros, [L] Tr better TAaros ({on the accent in
codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; cf. Chandler § 326; B.
p- 6n.]; W. § 6,1 m.), T WH incorrectly MeAGros [but
see Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 sq.; WH. App. p. 155; and cf. e,
e], (a Lat. name, i.q. ‘armed with a pilum or javelin,’ like
Torquaius i. q. ‘adorned with the collar or neck-chain’;
{so generally ; but some would contract it from pileatus
i. e. ‘ wearing the felt cap’ (pileus), the badge of a manu-
mitted slave; cf. Leyrer in Herzog as below; Plumptre
in B. D. s. v. Pilate (note) ]), -ov, 6 [on the use of the art.
with the name cf. W. 113 (107) n.], Pontius Pilate, the
fifth procurator of the Roman emperor in Judea and
Samaria (having had as predecessors Coponius, Marcus
Ambivius, Annius Rufus, and Valerius Gratus). [Some
writ. (e.g. BB. DD. s. v.) call Pilate the sixth procura-
tor, reckoning Sabinus as the first, he having had
charge for a time, during the absence of Archelaus at
Rome, shortly after the death of Herod; cf. Joseph.
antt. 17, 9, 3.] He was sent into Judea in the year
26 A. D., and remained in office ten years; (cf. Keim,
Jesus von Naz. iii. p. 485 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. 226 sq.]).
Although he saw that Jesus was innocent, yet, fearing
that the Jews would bring an accusation against him be-
fore Caesar for the wrongs he had done them, and dread-
ing the emperor’s displeasure, he delivered up Jesus to
their blood-thirsty demands and ordered him to be cru-
cified. At length, in consequence of his having ordered
the slaughter of the Samaritans. assembled at Mt. Geri-
zim, Vitellius, the governor of Syria and father of the Vi-
tellius who was afterwards emperor, removed him from
office and ordered him to go to Rome and answer their
accusations; but before his arrival Tiberius died. Cf.
Joseph. antt. 18, 2-4 and ch. 6,5; b.j. 2, 9,2 and 4; Philo,
leg. ad Gaium § 38; Tac. ann. 15,44. Eusebius (h.e. 2,
509
wivak
7, and Chron. ad ann. I. Gaii) reports that he died by his
own hand. Various stories about his death are related
in the Evangelia apocr. ed. Tischendorf p. 426 sqq.
[Eng. trans. p. 231 sqq.]. He is mentioned in the N.T.
in Mt. xxvii. 2 sqq.; Mk. xv. 1 sqq.; Lk. iii. 1; xiii. 15
Xxiil. 1 sqq.; Jn. xviii. 29 sqq.; xix.1sqq.; Acts iii. 13;
iv. 27; xiii. 28; 1 Tim. vi. 13. A full account of him is
given in Win. RWB. s. v. Pilatus; [BB. DD. ibid.];
Ewald, Geschichte Christus’ u. seiner Zeit, ed. 3 p. 82
sqq-; Leyrer in Herzog xi. p. 663 sqq. [ed. 2 p. 685 sqq.];
Renan, Vie de Jésus, 14me éd. p. 413 sqq. [Eng. trans.
(N. Y. 1865) p. 883 sqq.]; A/ldpper in Schenkel iv. p.
581 sq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. §17¢. p. 252 sqq.;
[| Warneck, Pont. Pilatus u.s.w. (pp. 210. Gotha, 1867) ].*
wiymrdypt (a lengthened form of the theme IAEQ,
whence méos, wAnpns [cf. Curtius § 366]): 1 aor. émAnoa;
Pass., 1 fut. tAyoOnoopa; 1 aor. émdAnoOnv; fr. Hom. on;
Sept. for 821, also for yrawi (to satiate) and pass. pay
(to be full); to fill: ri, Lk. v.73; ré rwvos [W. § 30, 8 b.],
a thing with something, Mt. xxvii. 48; [Jn. xix. 29
RG]; in pass., Mt. xxii. 10; Acts xix. 29; [ex rijs dopijs,
Jn. xii. 3 Tr mrg.; cf. W. u.s. note; B.§ 132,12]. what
wholly takes possession of the mind is said to fill it:
pass. PdBov, Lk. v. 26; AduBovs, Acts ili. 10; dvotas, Lk.
vi. 11; (pdov, Acts v.17; xiii. 45; Oupod, Lk. iv. 28; Acts
iii. 10; avevparos dyiov, Lk. i. 15, 41, 67; Acts ii. 43 iv.
8,31; ix.17; xili.9. prophecies are said rAnoOjva,
i. e. to come to pass, to be confirmed by the event, Lk. xxi.
22GLTTr WH (for Ree. tAnpodjva). time is said
mAncbjva, to be fulfilled or completed, i. e. finished,
elapsed, Lk. i. 23, 57 [W. 324 (304); B. 267 (280)]; ii.
6, 21sq.3 so N91), Job xv. 32; and xn to (ful-) fill the
time, i. e. to complete, fill up, Gen. xxix. 27; Job xxxix. 2.
[Come.: éu-mimhnpe. | *
wusmpaw (for the more common wipmpnys (ef. Curtius
§ 378, Vaniéek p. 510 sq.]): [pres. inf. pass. mempacOar 3
but RGL Tr WH ariprpacda: fr. the form mipmpnuc (Tdé.
éumimpacat, q.V-)]; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [(yet only the
aor. fr. rpjOw) ] down; to blow, to burn, [onthe connection
betw. these meanings cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s.v. mpndo] ;
in the Scriptures four times to cause to swell, to render
tumid, [ef. Soph. Lex. s.v.]: yaorépa, Num. v. 22; pass. to
swell, become swollen, of parts of the body, Num. v. 21, 27:
Acts xxviii. 6 (see above and in éurempdw). [COMP. ép-
m-mpaw. |*
amwaklStov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of maxis, -i8os), [Aristot.,
al.]; a. a small tablet. b. spec. a writing-tab-
let: Lk. i. 63 [Tr mrg. mwakida; see the foll. word];
Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74.*
[mwaxls, -i8os, 7, i. q- muvaxtOvov (q: v.)3 Lk. i. 63 Tr mrg.
(Epict., Plut., Artem., al.) *]
artvat, -axos, 6, (com. thought to be fr. HINOS a pine,
and so prop. ‘a pine-board’; ace. to the conjecture of
Buttmann, Ausf. Spr. i. 74 n., fr. mvdé for wAd€ [i.e
anything broad and flat (cf. Eng. plank)] with ¢ in-
serted, as in mwurds for mvurés [acc. to Fick i. 146 fr.
Skr. pinaka, a stick, staff]), fr. Hom. down; la
board, a tablet. 2. a dish, plate, platter: Mt. xiv. 8,
Tivw
11; Mk. vi. 25, [27 Lchm. br.], 28; Lk. xi. 39; Hom. Od.
Teli GSA eal
aive; impf. émwov; fut. miouat (cf. W. 90 sq. (86) ], 2
pers. sing. mieoa: (Lk. xvii. 8 [(see reff. in karaxavydo-
pac)}); pf. 8 pers. sing. (Rev. xviii. 3) merake RG, but
LT WH mrg. plur. -cay, for which L ed. ster. Ae isey
WH txt. read rémrawxav (see yivopat); 2 aor. émov, impv.
mie (Lk. xii. 19), inf. meety ([Mt. xx. 22; xxvii. 34 (not
Tdf.); Mk. x. 38]; Acts xxiii. 12 [not WEE 2 Ten soe
xiv. 21 [not WH], ete.), and in colloquial form wiv (Lchm.
in Jn. iv. 9; Rev. xvi. 6), and mety (T Tr WH in Jn. iv.
7,9sq.; T WH in 1 Co. ix. 4; x. 7; Rev. xvi. 6; Tin Mt.
xxvii. 34 (bis); WH in Acts xxiii. 12, 21; Ro. xiv. 21,
and often among the var. of the codd.) —on these forms
see [esp. WH. App. p. 170]; Fritzsche, De conformatione
N. T. critica etc. p. 27 sq.; B. 66 (58) sq.; [Curtius, Das
Verbum, ii. 103]; Sept. for Tnw; [fr. Hom. down]; to
drink: absol., Lk. xii. 19; Jn. iv. 7, 10; 1 Co. xi. 25;
ficuratively, to receive into the soul what serves to re-
fresh, strengthen, nourish it unto life eternal, Jn. vii. 37 ;
on the various uses of the phrase éoOleww x. mivew see in
éobio, a.; Tpwyew k. mivew, of those living in fancied
security, Mt. xxiv. 38; iv with an acc. of the thing, to
drink a thing [cf. W. 198 (187) n.], Mt. vi. 25 [G Tom.
WH br. the cl.], 31; xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; xvi. 18; Rev.
xvi. 6; to use a thing for drink, Lk. i. 15; xii. 29; Ro.
xiv. 21; 1Co. x. 4 [cf. W. § 40, 3b.]; 76 aiua of Christ,
see aivia, fin.; To mornptoy i. e. what isin the cup, 1 Co. x.
21; xi. 27, etc. (see mornptoy, a.). 1 yn is said mivew rdv
verdv, to suck in, absorb, imbibe, Heb. vi. 7 (Deut. xi. 11;
Hdt. 3,117; 4, 198; Verg. ecl. 3, 111 sat prata bibe-
runt). mivo ék w. agen. of the vessel out of which
one drinks, ¢« rod motnpiov, Mt. xxvi. 27; Mk. xiv. 23;
1 Co. x. 4 [cf. above]; xi. 28, (Arstph. eqq. 1289) ; ék w.
a gen. denoting the drink of which as a supply one
drinks, Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; ék rod U8aros, Jn. iv.
13 sq.; €k rod oivov (or Guuod), Rev. xiv. 10; xviii. 3 [L
om. Tr WH br. rod oivov]; and w. a gen. of the drink,
Lk. xxii. 18. [Cf. B. §132, 7; W. 199 (187). Comp.:
kata-, cup-tive. |
mts, -7TOS, 7), (miwy fat), fatness: Ro. xi. 17.
tot., Theophr., al.; Sept. for ;w.) *
murpackw : impf. emimpackoy; pf. rémpaxa; Pass., pres.
ptcep. murpackopevos ; pf. ptcp. mempapnevos ; 1 aor. émpd-
Onv ; (fr. mepdw to cross, to transport to a distant land) ;
fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for 13; to sell: ti,
Mt. xiii. 46 [on the use of the pf., cf. Soph. Glossary ete.
Introd. § 82,4]; Acts ii. 45; iv. 34; v.4; w. gen. of price,
Mt. xxvi. 9; Mk. xiv. 5; Jn. xii. 5, (Deut. xxi. 14); rua,
one into slavery, Mt. xviii. 25; hence metaph. mempape-
vos tro TH dpapriay, [A. V. sold under sin] i. e. entirely
under the control of the love of sinning, Ro. vii. 14
(€mpaOncav rod roujoat 75 wovnpdv, 2 K. xvii. 17; 1 Mace.
i. 15, cf. 1 K. xx. (xxi.) 25; w.a dat. of the master to
whom one is sold as a slave, Lev. xxv. 39; Deut. xv. 12;
xxvill. 68; Bar. iv. 6; Soph. Trach. 252; éaurdy run, of
one bribed to give himself up wholly to another’s will,
T@ Primm, Dem. p. 148, 8).*
(Aris-
510
TitTw
alerw; [impf. émurrov (Mk. xiv. 35 T Trmrg. WH)];
fut. mecodpat; 2 aor. éxecov and ace. to the Alex. form
(received everywhere by Lchm. [exe. Lk. xxiii. 30],
Tdf. [exc. Rev. vi. 16], Tr [exe. ibid.], WH; and also
used by R Gin Rev. i. 17; v. 143 vi.13; xi. 16; xvii. 10)
éreca (cf. [WH. App. p.164; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123]; Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 724sq.; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 277 sq., and
see drépxopuat init.) ; pf. rémrexa, 2 pers. sing. -xes (Rev:
ii. 5 T WH; see xomtdw), 3 pers. plur. -cav (Rev. xviik
3, Led. ster. Tr txt. WH txt.; see yivoua); (fr. METQ,
as rixro fr. TEKQ [cf. Curtius, Etymol. § 214; Ver-
bum, ii. p. 398]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 59) ;
to fall ; used 1. of descent from a higher place
to a lower; a. prop. to fall (either from or upon,
iq. Lat. incido, decido): éni w. acc. of place, Mt. x. 29;
xiii. 5, [7], 8; xxi. 44 [T om. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.] ;
Mk. iv. 5; Lk. viii. 6 [here T Tr WH xaraz.], 8 Rec.;
Rev. viii. 10; ts 7s (of the thing that is entered; into),
Mt. xv. 14; xvii. 15; Mk.iv. 7 [L mrg. érf]sq.; Lk. vi.
39RGLarg. (but Ltxt. T Tr WH epuainr.); viii.8 GL
T Tr WH, [14; xiv. 5LTTrWH]; Jn. xii. 24; eis
(upon) ri yay, Rev. vi. 13; ix. 1; év péo@, w. gen. of the
thing, Lk. viii. 7; mapa tiv 68dv, Mt. xiii. 4; Mk. iv. 4;
Lk. viii.53; to fall from or down: foll. by azo w. gen. of
place, Mt. xv. 27; xxiv. 29 [here Tdf. é«; Lk. xvi. 21];
Acts xx. 9; foll. by éx w. gen. of place, [Mk. xiii. 25 L T
Tr WH]; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 1; i. q. to be thrust down, Lk.
xls: b. metaph.: ov mimret emi twa 6 AAtLos, i. e.
the heat of the sun dees not strike upon them or in-
commode them, Rev. vii. 16; [ayAvds x. oxoros, Acts xiil.
11 LT Tr WH]; 6 kAnjpos mire: emi tiva, the lot falls
upon one, Acts i. 26; PoB8os minre: emi twa, falls upon or
seizes one, [Acts xix. 17 L Tr]; Rev. xi. 11 Rec.; [76
mvevpa To dyov, Acts x. 44 Lehm.]; mimrw imo kpicw, to
fall under judgment, come under condemnation, James v.
12 [where Rec." eis tmoxprow |. 2. of descent from
an erect to a prostrate position (Lat. labor, ruo; prolabor,
procido ; collabor, etc.) ; a. properly; a. to fall
down: émt idov, Lk. xx. 18; AlOos winret emt tia, Mt.
xxi. 44 [T om. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18;
1 dpos emt twa, Lk. xxiii. 30; Rev. vi. 16. B. to be
prostrated, fall prostrate; of those overcome by terror
or astonishment or grief: yapat, Jn. xviii. 6 ; eis 7d CSados,
Acts xxii. 7; émt ryv yqv, Acts ix. 4; [émi mpdcwrov,
Mt. xvii. 6]; or under the attack of an evil spirit: émt
Ts ys, Mk. ix. 20; or falling dead suddenly : mpos Tous
modas Tivds ws vexpos, Rev. i. 17; mecay eEepu&e, Acts v.
5; mint. mapa (LT Tr WH zpos) rods ro8as Tivos, ibid. 10;
absol. 1 Co. x. 8; orduart payaipas, Lk. xxi. 24; absol. of
the dismemberment of corpses by decay, Heb. iii.17 (Num.
Sh 8s Bi) y. to prostrate one’s self; used now of
suppliants, now of persons rendering homage or worship
to one: émi ris ys, Mk. xiv. 35; ptep. with mpookuvety, as
finite verb, Mt. il. 115 iv. 95 xviii. 26; mimrew k. mpoo-
kuveiv, Rev. v.14; xix. 45; éreoca mpooxuyncat, Rev. xxii. 8;
mint. €i¢ Tovs TOOas (av’Tod), Mt. xvili. 29 Rec.; els eat
WH pos] r. rodas tivds, Jn. xi. 32; mpds tr. mddas rivds,
Mk. v. 22; [mapa rods modas tivés, Lk. viii. 41] ; eumpooden
Micidua
t Gv moda tivos, Rev. xix. 10; €vadmidv twos, Rev. iv. 10;
v. 8; é€ml mpdcwmov, Mt. xxvi. 393 Lk. v.12; émt mpoo-
@rov Tapa Tovs mddas tw6s, Lk. xvii. 163 mecdv em rovs
md0as mpooexvvnoe, Acts x. 25; meodv émt mpdcamov mpov-
kuvnoet, 1 Co. xiv. 25; emt ra mpdowma kat Mpookvveiy,
Rev. vii. 11 [émt mpdowmov Rec.]; xi. 16. 8. to fall
oul, fall from: Opi€ ée ris xepadis mecetrat, i. q. shall
perish, be lost, Acts xxvii. 34 Rec. e. to fall down,
full in ruin: of buildings, walls, ete., Mt. vii. 25, [27];
Lk. vi. 49 (where T Tr WH ouvérece); Heb. xi. 30;
Oikos ém oikov mintet, Lk. xi. 17 [see emi, C. I. 2¢.]; wup-
yos emi tua, Lk. xiii. 43 oxnvy 7) mentoxvia, the tabernacle
that has fallen down, a fig. description of the family of
David and the theocracy as reduced to extreme decay
[ef. oxnyy, fin.], Acts xv. 16. of acity: émece, i. e. has
been overthrown, destroyed, Rev. xi. 13; xiv. 8; xvi. 19;
xvili. 2, (Jer. xxviii. (li.) 8). b. metaph. a.
to be cast down from a state of prosperity : ré0ev réntoxas,
from what a height of Christian knowledge and attain-
ment thou hast declined, Rev. ii. 5 GL T Tr WH (see
above ad init.). B. to fall from a state of upright-
uess, i.e. fo sin: opp. to éordva, 1 Co. x. 123 opp. to
ornxewv, w. a dat. of the pers. whose interests suffer by
the sinning [cf. W. § 31, 1 k.], Ro. xiv. 4; to fall into a
state of wickedness, Rev. xviii. 3 L ed. ster. Tr WH txt.
[see ziva]. y- to perish, i.e. to come to an end, dis-
appear, cease: of virtues, 1 Co. xiii. 8 L T Tr WH[R. V.
fail]; to lose authority, no longer have force, of sayings,
precepts, etc., Lk. xvi. 17 (Gore ov yapal meceirat 6 Tt dv
eixns, Plat. Euthyphr. § 17; irrita cadunt promissa, Liv.
2,31). i.q.to be removed from power by death, Rev. xvii.
10; to fail of participating in, miss a share in, the Mes-
sianic salvation, Ro. xi. 11, [22]; Heb. iv. 11 [(yet see
év, I. 5 f.). Comp.: Gm0-, €k-, €V-, €Tt-,
fapa-, mEpt-, mpoo-, Tup- minre: |*
Tlw8(a,-as, 7, Pisidia, a region of Asia Minor, bounded
by Pamphylia and the Pamphylian Sea, Phrygia, and
Lycaonia: Acts xiii. 14 RG; xiv. 24. [B. D.s.v. Pisi-
dia. ]*
Tlic (Sts, -a, -ov, iq. Ttordexds, belonging to Pisidia:
*Avrioxera 4 Tovdia, i.e. taking its name from Pisidia
(see ’Avridyeva, 2): Acts xiii. 14 LT Tr WH*
morevw; impf. éxiarevov; fut. morevow; 1 aor. emi-
arevoa; pf. memiorevea; plupf. (without augm., cf. W.
§ 12, 9; [B. 33 (29)]) memorevceww (Acts xiv. 23);
Pass., pf. remiorevpat; 1 aor. emiarevOnv; (muords); Sept.
for }877; in class. Grk. fr. Aeschyl., Soph., Eur., Thue.
down; to believe, i.e. 1. intrans. to think to be
true; to be persuaded of; to credit, place confidence
in; a. univ.: the thing believed being evident
from the preceding context, Mt. xxiv. 23, [26]; Mk. xiii.
21; 1 Co. xi. 18; w. an ace. of the thing, Acts xiii. 41
(LT Tr WH 6 for Rec. 6); to credit, have confidence,
foll. by drt, Acts ix. 26; uv, to believe one’s words, Mk.
xvi. 13sq.; 1Jn.iv. 1; revi dre, Jn. iv. # ; TO Wevde, 2 Th.
ii. 115 mepi rivos, drt, Jn. ix. 18. b. spec., in a moral
and religious reference, morevetv is used in the N. T. of
tke conviction and trust to which a man is impelled by a
ava-, avtt-, KarTa-,
511
WioTEvw
certain inner and higher prerogative and law of his soul;
thus it stands a. absol. to trust in Jesus or in God
as able to aid either in obtaining or in doing something:
Mt. viii. 13; xxi. 22; Mk. v. 36; ix. 23 sq. 5 LK. viii. 50;
Jn. xi. 40; foll. by 6 art, Mt. ix. 28; Mk. xi. 23; [Heb. xi.
6]; To Nive @ (Ov) eimev 6 bagads; Jn. iv. 50. B.
of the credence given to God’s messengers and their words,
w. a dat. of the person or thing: Meicei, Jn. v. 46. to
the prophets, Jn. xii. 38; Acts xxiv. 14; xxvi. 27; Ro.
x. 165 éxi maow ois €hddyoar oi rpopjrat, to place reli-
ance on etc. Lk. xxiv. 25. to an angel, Lk.i. 20; foll.
by én, ibid. 45. to John the Baptist, Mt. xxi. 25
(26), 32; Mk. xi. 31; Lk. xx.5. to Christ’s words,
Jn. iii. 12; v. 38, 46 sq.; vi. 30; viii. 45 sq.; x. [37], 38°;
rois €pyors of Christ, ibid. 38°. to the teachings of evan-
gelists and apostles, Acts viii. 12; 77 adnOeia, 2 Th.
li. 12; emecrevn 76 papruptoy, the testimony was believed,
2Th.1. 10 [cf W. § 39,1 a.; B. 175 (152) ]; 77 ypapn, Jn-
ii. 22. év r@ evayyeAig, to put faith in the gospel, Mx.
i. 15 [B. 174 (151 sq.) ; ef. W. 213 (200 sq.)] (Ignat. ad
Philad. 8, 2 [(but see Zahn’s note) ; cf. Jn. iii. 15 in y. be-
low]). y- used especially of the faith by which a
man embraces Jesus, i.e. a@ conviction, full of joyful
trust, that Jesus is the Messiah— the divinely appointed
author of eternal salvation in the kingdom of God, con-
Joined with obedience to Christ: mor. tov vidv rod beod
eivat "Inoodv Xprorov, Acts viii. 37 Rec.; émurrevOn (was
believed on [cf. W. § 39, 1 a.; B. 175 (152)]) év kdopa,
1 Tim. iii. 16. the phrase morevewy eis tov "Incovr, eis 7.
vidv Tov Geod, etc., is very common; prop. to have a faith
directed unto, believing or in faith to give one’s self up to,
Jesus, etc. (cf. W. 213 (200 sq.); [B. 174 (151)]): Mt.
xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 [RGL Tr txt.]; Jn. ii. 11; iii. 15
RG, 16, 18, 36; vi. 29, 35, 40, 47 [RGL]; vii. 5, [38],
39, 48; vill. 80; ix. 35 sq.; x. 42; xi. 25 sq. 45,483 xii.
11, 37, 42, 44, [46]; xiv. 1,12; xvi.9; xvii. 20; Acts x.
43; xix.4; Ro. x. 14; Gal.ii.16; Phil. i. 29; 1 Jn. v. 10;
1 Pet. i. 8; ets rd has, In. xii. 36; els 7d dvopa avrod, Jn.
i. 12; ii. 23; iii. 18; 1Jn. v.13; 1 dvdp. adrod, to com-
mit one’s self trustfully to the name (see évoya, 2 p. 448°),
1 Jn. iii. 23; em adrdv, emi Tov Kvptov, to have a faith di-
rected towards, etc. (see émi, C. I. 2g.a. p. 235° [cf. W.
and B. u.s., also B. § 147, 25]): Mt. xxvii. 42 T Tr txt.
WH; Jn. iii. 15 L txt.; Acts ix. 423 xi. 17; xvi. 31; xxii.
19, [(cf. Sap. xii. 2)]; én’ air@, to build one’s faith on,
to place one’s faith upon, [see émi, B. 2 a. y. p. 233°; B.
u.s.]: Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Tim. i. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 6; é
airé, to put faith in him, Jn. iii. 15 [Lmrg.; ef. T Tr
WH also (who prob. connect év air with the foll. éyy ;
cf. Westcott, Com. ad loc., Meyer, al.)] (ef. Jer. xii. 6;
Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 22, where mor. € reve means to put
confidence in one, to trust one; (ef. Mk. i. 15 above,
B. fin.]); €v rotr@ motevouev, On this rests our faith
[A. V. by this we believe], Jn. xvi. 30; with the simple
dative, r@ kupio, to (yield faith to) believe [cf. B. 173
(151)]: Mt. xxvii. 42 RGLTrmrg.; Acts v. 14; xviii.
8; supply rovre before of in Ro. x. ve to trust in Christ
[God], 2Tim.i.12; dca twos, sleroagh one’s agency to
7 LO TEU@
be brought to faith, Jn. i. 7; 1 Co. iii. 5; 8:4 “Inaod eis
9edv, 1 Pet. i. 21 RG Trmrg.; did rijs xdprros, Acts xviii.
27; Sia Tov Adyou adray eis eve, Jn. xvii. 20; dua rt, Jn.
iv. 39, [41], 42; xiv.11. miorevde foll. by dre with a sen-
tence in which either the nature and dignity of Christ
or his blessings are set forth: Jn. vi. 69; vill. 24; x. 38°
RG; xi. 27, [42]; xiii. 19; [xiv. 10]; xvi. 27, 30; xvii.
8, 21; 1 Jn.v.1, 5; Ro. vi. 8; 1 Th. iv. 14; pot dr, Jn.
xiv. 11; ri, Jn. xi. 26; muotedo oodjva, Acts xv. 11;
the simple morevew is used emphatically, of those who
acknowledge Jesus as the saviour and devote themselves
to him: Mk. xv. 32 [here L adds air4]; Lk. viii. 12 sq.;
xxii. 67; Jn. i.50 (51); iii. 18; iv. 42, 48,53; v. 44; vi.
86, 64; ix. 38; x. 25sq.; xii. 39, 47 Rec.; xvi. 30; xx.
81; Acts v. 14; [xili. 39]; xv. 5; xviii. 8; [xxi. 25]; Ro.
14165: 111.022) ive Dts x4 suxv, 184) 2,Convall3s) Epanis
13, [19]; 2 Th. i. 10; Heb. iv. 3; with é& ddns xapdias
added, Acts viii. 37 Rec.; w.a dat. of instr. capdia, Ro.
x. 10; ptep. pres. of murrevovres, as subst.: Acts il. 44;
Ro. iii. 22; 1 Co. i. 21; Gal. iii. 22; [Eph.i.19]; 1 Th.
id 31.) 10; 13-552, Thy igh. Recast 1Petaal-) 75 4..g-0ho
are on the point of believing, 1 Co. xiv. 22, cf. 24sq.; aor.
ériotevoa (marking entrance into a state; see Bacueva,
fin.), I became a believer, a Christian, [A. V. believed]:
Acts iv. 4s tvills 135) xiii 12, 48 3 xdv. 1 vad 3 xvala 2,
34; Ro. xiii. 11; 1 Co. iii.5; xv. 2,11; with the addi-
tion of émi tov Kuptoy (see above), Acts ix.42; ptep. m-
orevoas, Acts xi. 21; xix. 2; 6 morevoas, Mk. xvi. 16;
plur.,ibid.17; Actsiv.325; of memorevkdres, they that have
believed (have become believers): Acts xix. 18; xxi. 20;
[on (John’s use of) the tenses of murredw see Westcott on
1 Jn. iii. 23]. It must be borne in mind, that in Paul’s
conception of 7d morevew eis Xpirrdy, the prominent ele-
ment is the grace of God towards sinners as manifested
and pledged (and to be laid hold of by faith) in Jesus,
particularly in his death and resurrection, as ap-
pears esp. in Ro. iii. 25; iv. 24; x. 9; 1Th. iv. 14; but
in John’s conception, it is the metaphysical relationship
of Christ with God and close ethical intimacy with him,
as well as the true ‘life’ to be derived from Christ as
its source; cf. Rickert, Das Abendmahl, p. 251. More-
over, morevewy is used by John of various degrees of
faith, from its first beginnings, its incipient stirring with-
in the soul, up to the fullest assurance, Jn. ii. 23 (cf. 24) ;
viii. 31; of a faith which does not yet recognize Jesus
as the Messiah, but as a prophet very like the Messiah,
Jn. vii. 31; and to signify that one’s faith is preserved,
strengthened, increased, raised to the level which it
ought to reach, xi. 15; xiii. 19; xiv. 29; xix. 35; xx. 31;
1 Jn. v. 13° Rec.; [ef. reff. s.v. wioris, fin.]. morevew
is applied also to the faith by which one is persuaded
that Jesus was raised from the dead, inasmuch as by
that fact God declared him to be his Son and the Mes-
siah: Jn. xx. 8, 25,29; évri kapdia mor. ort 6 Oeds adrov
ipyetpev ex vexpv, Ro. x. 9 [ef. B. § 133,19]. Since ace.
to the conception of Christian faith Christ alone is the
author of salvation, 6 micrevav repudiates all the various
hings which aside from Christ are commended as means
512
TiO ts
of salvation (such e. g. as abstinence from flesh and
wine), and understands that all things are lawful to him
which do not lead him away from Christ; hence morevee
(ris) ayeiv mdvra, hath faith to eat all things or so that
he eats all things, Ro. xiv. 2; cf. Riickert ad loc.; [W.
§ 44, 3b.; per contra B. 273 sq. (235) J. 8. murrevew
used in ref. to God has various senses: aa. it de-
notes the mere acknowledgment of his existence: dre é
eds efs €or, Jas. ii. 19; acknowledgment joined to ap-
propriate trust, absol. Jude 5; eis Gedy, Jn. xii. 44; xiv. 1;
i.q. to believe and embrace what God has made known
either through Christ or concerning Christ: 76
6e@, In. v. 24; Acts xvi. 34; Tit. iii. 8; 1Jn.v. 10; emt
tov bedv, Ro. iv. 5; rhv dyamny, qv €xer 6 Oeds, 1 In. iv. 16;
eis THY paptupiav, HY KTA.,1 Jn. v. 10. BB. to trust:
7@ 6eG, God promising a thing, Ro. iv. 3,17 (on which
see xarévavrt); Gal. iii. 6; [Jas. ii. 23]; absol. Ro. iv.
18; foll. by érz, Acts xxvii. 25. €. mor. is used in
an ethical sense, of confidence in the goodness of men:
9 dyann motever mdvta, 1 Co. xiii. 7. rd meorrevery is
opp. to ideiv, Jn. xx. 29; to dpay, ibid. and 1 Pet. i. 8,
(Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7 fin.), cf. 2 Co.v. 7; to Sdcaxpive-
oa, Ro. iv. 19 sq.; xiv. 1, 23, cf. Jas.i.6; to dporoyeiy,
Reo. 95 2. transitively, rwi 71, to intrust a thing
to one, i.e. to his fidelity: Lk. xvi. 11; é€avrév rim, In. ii.
24; pass. morevopai Tt, to be intrusted with a thing: Ro.
1 235) 1 Cogixepl vise Gal. tie7s Tab bo54 edie yeldes
Tit. i. 83, (Ignat. ad Philad. 9; exx. fr. prof. auth. are
given in W.§39,1a.). Onthe grammat. constr. of the
word cf. B. § 133, 4 [and the summaries in Ellicott on
1 Tim. i.16; Vaughan on Ro. iv. 5; Cremer s.v.]. It
does not occur in the Rev., nor in Philem., 2 Pet., 2 and
3 Jn. [Cf. the reff. s.v. wioves, fin.]*
TurTiKds, ~7), -v, (muaTds), pertaining to belief; a.
having the power of persuading, skilful in producing be-
lief: Plat. Gorg. p. 455 a. b. trusty, faithful, that
can be relied on: yun mor. kal oikoupds Kat meOopevn TO
avSpi, Artem. oneir. 2, 32; often so in Cedrenus [also (of
persons) in Epiph., Jn. Mosch., Sophron.; cf. Soph. Lex.
s. v.]; of commodities i. q. Soxyos, genuine, pure, un-
adulterated: so vapSos muotexn [but A.V. spike- (i. e.
spiked) nard, after the nardi spicati of the Vulg. (in
Mk.)], Mk. xiv. 3; Jn. xii. 3, (for nard was often adul-
terated; see Plin. h. n. 12,26; Diosc. de mater. med. 1, 6
and 7); hence metaph. rd miorexdv tis Kawhs Scadnens
xpaya, Euseb. demonstr. evang. 9,8 [p.439d.]. Cf. the
full discussion of this word in Fritzsche on Mk. p. 596
sqq-; Liicke on Jn. xii. 3 p. 494 sqq.; W. 97 (92) sq.;
[esp. Dr. Jas. Morison on Mk. 1. ¢.].*
mloris, -ews, 1), (aeidw [q- v.]), fr. [Hes., Theogn., Pind.],
Aeschyl., Hdt. down; Sept. for 73398, several times for
Nx and 7)NN; faith; i.e. 1. conviction of the
truth of anything, belief, (Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut.;
Oavpdora kai pei(o rictews, Diod. 1, 86); in the N. T. of
a conviction or belief respecting man’s relationship to God
and divine things, generally with the included idea of
trust and holy fervor born of faith and conjoined with ic:
Heb. xi. 1 (where miotis is called ¢AmiCopévar indoracesy
miotis
mpaypdrwv éheyxos ov BAeropévar) ; opp. to eiSos, 2 Co.
v. 7; joined with dyamn and éAmis, 1 Co. xiii. 13. a.
when it relates to God, miatts is the conviction that God
exists and is the creator and ruler of all things, the pro-
vider and bestower of eternal salvation through Christ:
Heb. xi. 6; xii. 2; xiii. 7; miotis emi Oedv, Heb. vi. 1; 4
miotis buav 7 mpos Tov Oeov, by which ye turned to God,
1Th. i. 8; thy aw. tua x. Amida eis Oeov, directed unto
God, 1 Pet. i. 21; with a gen. of the object [faith in]
(ray beav, Eur. Med. 414; rod Geod, Joseph. c. Ap. 2, 16,
5; ef. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch. on Sap. vi. 17 sq. p. 132; [cf.
Meyer on Ro. iii. 22; also Mey., Ellic., Bp. Lghtft. on Col.
as below; W. 186 (175)]): 9 a. ts éevepyeias Tov Beod
Tov éyeipavros avrov (Christ) ek trav vexpav, Col. ii. 12;
Oia micteas, by the help of faith, Heb. xi. 33, 39; kara
miorw, i.g. murrevovres, Heb. xi. 13; ricret, dat. of means
or of mode by faith or by believing, prompted, actuated, by
faith, Heb. xi. 3 sq. 7-9, 17, 20-24, 27-29, 31; dat. of
cause, because of faith, Heb. xi. 5, 11, 30. b. in
reference to Christ, it denotes a strong and welcome
conviction or belief that Jesus is the Messiah, through whom
we obtain eternal salvation in the kingdom of Ged (on this
see more at length in moreva, 1 b. y.): a. univ.:
w. gen. of the object (see above, in a.), Incod Xpicrod,
Ro. iii. 22; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 22; Eph. iii. 12; "Ijcod, Rev.
xiv. 12; Xpiorov, Phil. iii. 9; rod viod rod Geod, Gal. ii.
20; rod Kupiov nudv "Invod Xprorod, Jas. ii. 1; pod (i. e.
in Christ), Rev. ii. 13, (certainly we must reject the in-
terpretation, faith in God of which Jesus Christ is the
author, advocated by Van Hengel, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 314
sqq:, and H. P. Berlage, Disquisitio de formulae Paulinae
miatis *Inood Xpicrod significatione. Lugd. Bat. 1856) ;
Tov evayyeAiov, Phil. i. 27; ddnOeias, 2 Th. ii. 13. with
Prepositions: eis (toward [cf. ets, B. I]. 2 a.]) rév kipsov
npav Inoovv, Acts xx. 21; e’s Xpuordv, Acts xxiv. 24;
xxvi. 18; 4 eis Xpiordv wiotis tpaov, Col. ii. 5; [rior
éxew ets cue, Mk. ix. 42 Tr mrg.]; mpds tov kip. Philem.
5 [L Tr WH eis] ([see mpds, I. 1¢.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc.]; unless here we prefer to render miorw fidelity [see
2, below]; cf. Meyer ad loc. and W. § 50, 2); 1.7 év Xp.
"Inood, reposed in Christ Jesus, 1 Tim. iii. 13; 2 Tim. iii.
15; 4 1. dpav ev Xp. Ina. Col. i. 4; 7 Kard twa (see xard,
II. 1 e.) wioris év 7 kupio, Eph.i. 15; ev 7 aiware adrod,
Ro. iii. 25 [yet cf. Meyer]. miatis [ef. W. 120 (114) ]
and 9 miorts simply: Lk. xviii. 8; Acts xiii. 8; xiv. 22,
27; xv. 9; xvii. 31; Ro. [iii 27 (on which see vopos,
3)], 81; iv. 14; v.2[L Tr WH br. 79 miores]; ix. 32; x.
8, 17; xii. 3, 6; 1 Co. [xii. 9 (here of a charism)];
xvi. 13; 2 Co. iv. 13; [viii. 7]; x. 15; Gal. iii. 14, 23, 25
sq-; v-5; vi-10; Eph. ii. 8; iii.17; iv. 5; View Oe ih:
i. 4; 1 Tim. i. 2,4 (on the latter pass. see olkovopia),
19; ii. 7 (on which see ddAjdea, I. 2 c.); iii. 9; iv. 1, 6;
v. 8; vi. 10,12, 21; 2 Tim.i. 5; ii. 18; iii. 8,10; iv. 75
Tit. i. 1, 4,13; ii 2; iii. 15; Jas. ii. 5; 1 Pet.i.5; 2 Pet.
i. 1,5. with agen. of the subject: Lk. xxii. 32; Ro. i.
8, 12; 1Co.ii. 5; xv.14,17; 2 Co. i. 24; Phil. i. 25; ii.
17; 1 Th. iii. 2, 5-7, 10; 2 Th.i. 3; iii. 2; Philem. 6;
Jas. i. 3; 1 Pet.i.7, 9 [here WH om. gen.]; 1 Jn. v. 4;
513
TlaTis
Rev. xiii. 10; wAnpns miotrews x. mvedparos, Acts vi. 5;
mvevparos k. twioteas, Acts xi. 24; miorews x. Suvdpews,
Acts vi. 8 Rec.; 19 miores €otyxévat, Ro. xi. 20; 2 Co. i.
24; év rH miores orykewv, 1 Co. xvi. 13; etvat, 2 Co. xiii. 5;
weve, 1 Tim. ii. 15; eupevew rH m. Acts xiv. 22; émipeé-
ve, Col. i. 23; orepeds 7H m. 1 Pet. v. 9; orepeotpat ry 7
Acts xvi. 5; BeBavodpa é€v [LT Tr WH om. éy] 79 7. Col.
iil. 7. Since faith is a power that seizes upon the soul,
one who yields himself to it is said iraxovew rH rioret,
Acts vi. 7; hence taxon tis mictews, obedience ren-
dered to faith [W. 186 (175)], Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26; 6 &k
miotews sc. dv, depending on faith, i.q.6 morevwv [see
ex, IL. 7], Ro. iii. 26; plur., Gal. iii. 7,9; 6 ek mlicteas
*ABpadp, he who has the same faith as Abraham, Ro. iv.
16; &« micrews eiva, to be related, akin to, faith [cf. ék,
u.s.], Gal. iii. 12. 8lxavos éx wicrews, Ro. i.17; Gal.
ill. 11; Sckacoodvn n ex lor. Ro. ix. 303; 4 ék mior. dur.
Ro. x. 6; Suxaioo. ék miorews eis miotw, springing from
faith (and availing) to (arouse) faith (in those who as
yet have it not), Ro. i. 17; Sicaootvn 4 dia rioTews
Xpiorod, ... 9 ek Geod Six. emt 7 wiores, Phil. iii. 9; pass.
StxatovcOar mioret, Ro. ili. 28; Suxacodv tiva Sia tictews
Xptorov, Gal. ii. 16; d1a tr. mictews, Ro. iii. 30; Sex. twa
ék miotews, ibid.; Gal. iii. 8; pass., Ro. v.1; Gal. iii. 24;
evayyeAlCopat tv miotw, to proclaim the glad tidings
of faith in Christ, Gal. i. 23; dxoy micrews, instruction
concerning the necessity of faith [see axon, 3 a.], Gal. iii.
2,5; 7% miors is joined with 4 ayaa: 1 Th. iii. 6; v.
Slim. deta. ii: 15 sated 2cvaod 1s 92 Wimsi422)* wath
a subj. gen. Rev. ii. 19; mioris 80 aydnns evepyoupern,
Gal. v. 6; dydamn pera miotews, Eph. vi. 23; aydmn ék mi-
orews avuroxkpirov, 1 Tim. i. 53 aioris kal dydan 7 ev Xpe-
or@ “Inood, 2 Tim.i.13; pideiy twa ev riores, Tit. iii. 15
(where see De Wette); épyov ticrews (cf. Epyov, 3 p.
248> near bot.), 1 Th./i.3; 2 Th. i. 11. B. in an
ethical sense, persuasion or conviction (which springs
from faith in Christ as the sole author of salvation; cf.
mateva, 1 b. y. fin.) concerning things lawful for a Chris
tian: Ro. xiv. 1, 23; more éyxeuw, ibid. 22. c. univ.
the religious belief of Christians ; a. subjectively ;
Eph. iv. 13, where cf. Meyer; in the sense of a mere
acknowledgment of divine things and of the claims of
Christianity, Jas. ii. 14, 17 sq. 20, 22, 24, 26. B. ob-
jectively, the substance of Christian faith or what is be-
lieved by Christians: 7 mapadoOcioa mr. Jude 3 ; 9 dywwrarn
iudv riots, ib. 20. There are some who think this
meaning of the word is to be recognized also in 1 Tim.
1.4, 19; ii. 7; iii. 9; iv. 1, 63 v.8; vi. 10, 21, (cf. Pflei-
derer, Paulinismus p. 468 [ Eng. trans. ii. p. 200]); but
Weiss (Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 107 a. note) correctly ob-
jects, “ wiors is rather the form in which the truth (as
the substance of right doctrine) is subjectively appro-
priated”; [cf. Meyer on Ro. i. 5 (and Prof. Dwight’s
additional note); Ellicott on Gal. i. 23; Bp. Lghtft. on
Gal. p. 157]. d. with the predominant idea of
trust (or confidence) whether in God orin Christ, spring-
ing from faith in the same: Mt. viii. 10; xv. 28; Lk. vii.
9, 50; xvii. 5; Heb. ix. 28 Lchm. ed. ster.; x. 22; Jas-
TiTTOS
i. €; with a gen. of the subject: Mt. ix. 2, 22, 29; xv.
28; Mk. ii. 5; v.34; x.52; [Lk. v. 20]; viii. 25,48; xvii.
19; xvili 42; w.a gen. of the object in which trust is
placed: rod dvdéuatos avrov, Acts iii. 16; miorw exer,
(Mt. xvii. 20]; xxi. 21; Mk. iv. 40; Lk. xvii. 6; macav
Thy more, (‘all the faith’ that can be thought of), 1 Co.
xiii. 25 yee miorww Geod, to trust in God, Mk. xi. 22; éyew
miorw rod c@Ojva, to be healed (see Fritzsche on Mt. p.
843 sq.; [cf. W.§ 44, 4a.; B. 268 (230)]), Acts xiv. 9;
9 O€ adrod 7., awakened through him, Acts iii. 16; edx7
Tis miorews, that proceeds from faith, Jas. v.15; of trust
in the promises of God, Ro. iv. 9, 16, 19sq.; Heb. iv. 2;
wi. 12; x. 38 sq.; w. agen. of the subject, Ro. iv. 5, 12;
gioris em Oedv, faith which relies on God who grants the
forgiveness of sins to the penitent [see éwi, C. I. 2 g. a.],
Heb. vi. 1; Stxcatcoovvn ths mioreas [cf. W. 186 (175)],
Ro. iv. 11, 133 4 xara miorw Sexatocvwn, Heb. xi. 7. 2
fidelity, faithfulness, i. e. the character of one who can be
relied on: Mt. xxiii. 23; Gal. v. 22; Philem. 5 (? see above
in b.a.); Tit. ii. 10. of one whokeeps his promises: 7
miatts Tov Oeov, subj. gen., Ro. iii. 3. objectively, plighted
faith (often so in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl. down): dOereiv
(see aderéw, a.) tiv miorw, 1 Tim. v. 12. Cf. especially
Koolhaas, Diss. philol. I. et II. de vario usu et construc-
tione vocum riors, morés et moreve in N. T. (Traj. ad
Rhen. 1733, 4to.); Dav. Schulz, Was heisst Glauben,
etc. (Leipz. 1830), p. 62 sqq.; Riickert, Com. iib. d. Rom.,
2d ed., i. p. 51 sqq.; Lutz, Bibl. Dogmatik, p. 312 sqq.;
Huther, Ueber (on u. micrevew im N. T., in the Jahrbb.
f. deutsch. Theol. for 1872, pp. 1-33; [Bp. Lghtft. Com.
on Gal. p. 154. sqq.]. On Paul’s conception of ziotis,
ef. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 94 sqq.;
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T., §82c. d. (cf. the index s. v.
Glaube) ; Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 162 sqq. [Eng. trans.
i. p.161sqq.; Schnedermann, De fidei notione ethica Pau-
lina. (Lips. 1880)]. On the idea of faith in the Ep. to
the Hebrews see Riehm, Lehrbegr. des Hebr.-Br. p.
700 sqq.; Weiss, as above §125b.c. On John’s con-
ception, see Reuss, die Johann. Theol. § 10 in the Bei-
trige zu d. theol. Wissensch. i. p. 56 sqq. [ef. his Histoire
de la Théol. Chrétienne, etc., 3me éd., ii. p. 508 sqq. (Eng.
trans. i. 455 sqq.)]; Weiss, as above § 149, and the
same author’s Johann. Lehrbegriff, p. 18 sqq.*
morés, -n, -dv, (metOw [q. v.]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept.
‘mostly for 1083; 1. trusty, faithful; of persons
who show themselves faithful in the transaction of busi-
ness, the execution of commands, or the discharge of
official duties: Soddos, Mt. xxiv. 45; xxv. 21, 233 oikovd-
pos, Lk. xii. 42; 1 Co. iv. 2; dcaxovos, Eph. vi. 21; Col.
i. 7; iv. 7; dpyxvepevds, Heb. ii. 17; iii. 2; of God, abid-
ing by his promises, 1 Co.i.9; x.13; 2Co.i. 18; 1 Th.
_v. 24; 2 Th. iii. 3; Heb. x. 23; xi. 11; 2 Tim. ii. 13;
1 Jn. i. 9; 1 Pet. iv. 19; add, 1 Co. iv. 17; Col. iv. 9;
1 Tim. i. 12; Heb. iii. 5; 1 Pet. v. 12; mords év TIL,
in a thing, Lk. xvi. 10-12; xix. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 11; émf
rt, Mt. xxv. 23; dype Oavdrov, Rev. ii. 10. one who kept
his plighted faith, Rev. ii. 13; worthy of trust; that can
de relied on: 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Tim. ii.2; Christ is called
5
14 TANAVY
paprus 6 mords, Rev. i. 53; with kai dAnOwés added,
Rev. iii. 14; [ef. xix.11]. of things, that can be relied
on: 6 Adyos, 1 Tim. iii. 1; 2 Tim. ii. 11; Tit. i. 9; [iii
8; obros of Adyot, Rev. xxi. 5; xxii.6]; with maons amo-
Soyjs d&os added, 1 Tim. i. 15; iv. 9; ra dova Aavid
ra mora (see dovos, fin.), Acts xili. 34. 2. easily
persuaded ; believing, confiding, trusting, (Theogn., Ae-
schyl., Soph., Plat., al.) ; in the N. T. one who trusts in
God’s promises, Gal. iii. 9; is convinced that Jesus has
been raised from the dead, opp. to Gmoros, Jn. xx. 27;
one who has become convinced that Jesus is the Messiah
and the author of salvation (opp. to d&moros, see muateva,
1b. y. and aiots, 1 b.), [a believer}: Acts xvi.1; 2 Co.
vi. 15; 1 Tim. v. 16; with the addition of r@ kupie, dat.
of the pers. in whom faith or trust is reposed, Acts xvi.
15; plur. in Col. i. 2 [where ef. Bp. Lghtft.]; 1 Tim. iv.
10; vi. 2; Tit.i.6; Rey. xvii. 143 of moroi, substantively
[see Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. p. 157], Acts x.45; 1 Tim. iv.
3,12; with év Xpiot@ “Inood added [ef. B. 174 (152)],
Eph. i. 1; es Oedv erA. 1 Pet. i. 21 LT Tr txt.WH; me
oro troteiv Tt, to do something harmonizing with (Chris-
tian) faith, [R. V. a faithful work], 3 Jn. 5.*
mortéw, -@: 1 aor. pass. émiaTaOny; (mards) ; at
to make faithful, render trustworthy: rd phya, 1 K. i. 36;
twa dpxots, Thuc. 4, 88; univ. to make firm, establish, 1
Chr. xvii. 14. 2. Pass. (Sept. in various senses for
iii. 14; Hesych. émucta6n- éemeioOn, emAnpopopnén. (In
various other senses in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) *
TwAavaw, -@; fut. rAavnow; 1 aor. émAdvnoa; Pass., pres.
mAavapua; pf. rerAdvnpac; 1 aor. érAavnOnv; (addy); fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for npn; to cause to
stray, to lead astray, lead aside from the right way ; a.
prop.; in pass., Sept. chiefly for NN, to go astray, wan-
der, roam about, (first so in Hom. Il. 23, 321): Mt. xviii.
12sq.; 1 Pet. ii. 25 (fr. Is. lili. 6, cf. Ex. xxiii..4 ; Ps.
exviili. (exix.) 176); Heb. xi. 38. b. metaph. to lead
away from the truth, to lead into error, to deceive: twa,
Mit. xxiv. 4, °5, 11,1246" Mike xiii5316): Ina vila mle ne
ii. 26; iii. 7; 2 Tim. iii. 13*; Rev. ii. 20GLTTrWH;
xii. 9; xiii. 14; xix. 20; xx. 3, 8,10; €avrdy, 1 Jn. i. 8;
pass. to be led into error, [R.V. be led astray]: Lk. xxi. 8;
Jn. vii. 47; Rev. ii. 20 Rec.; to err, Mt. xxii. 29; Mk. xii.
24, 273 pr wAavacbe, 1 Co. vi. 9; xv. 33; Gal. vi. 7; Jas.
i. 16; esp. through ignorance to be led aside from the
path of virtue, to go astray, sin: Tit. iii. 3; Heb. v.23 79
xapdta, Heb. iii. 10; dad ris ddnOeias, Jas. v.19; to wan-
der or fall away from the true faith, of heretics, 2 Tim. iii.
13°; 2 Pet. ii. 15; to be led away into error and sin, Rev.
xviii. 23. [Comp.: dao-\avdo. | *
TAdvn, -ns, 7, @ wandering, a straying about, whereby
one, led astray from the right way, roams hither and
thither (Aeschyl., [Hdt.], Eur., Plat., Dem.,al.). In the
N. T. metaph. mental straying, i.e. error, wrong opinion
relative to morals or religion: Eph. iv. 14; 1 Th. ii. 3;
2 Th. ii. 11; 2 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 17; 1 Jn. iv. 6; Jude 11
(on which [cf. W. 189 (177) and] see éxyxéw, b. fin.) ; er
TrAVNS
ror which shows itself in action, a wrong mode of acting:
Ro. i. 27; mAdvy 6800 twos, [R. V. error of one’s way
i. ¢.] the wrong manner of life which one follows, Jas. v.
20 (mAdvn (wns, Sap. i. 12); as sometimes the Lat. error,
i. q. that which leads into error, deceit, fraud: Mt. xxvii.
64.*
[mAdyns, -nros, 6, see wAavqrns. |
tAaviTNS, -ov, 6, (TAavdw), a wanderer: darépes mavij-
ra, wandering stars (Aristot., Plut., al.), Jude 13 [where
WH mrg. dor. miavyres (Xen. mem. 4, 7, 5)]; see doryp,
fin.*
tAdvos, -ov, wandering, roving; trans. and trop. mis-
leading, leading into error: mvevpara tava, 1 Tim. iv. 1
(mravoe GvOparan, Joseph. b. j. 2, 13, 4). 6 mAavos
substantively (Cic. al. planus), as we say, a vagabond,
‘tramp,’ impostor, (Diod., Athen., al.); hence univ. a
corrupter, decewer, (Vulg. seductor) : Mt. xxvii. 63 ; 2 Co.
vi. 8; 2Jn.7. (Cf. 6 xoopomddvos, ‘Teaching’ ete. 16,
Ane
mA4E, -axos, 7, [(akin to mAdros, etc. ; Fick iv. 161)], a
flat thing, broad tablet, plane, level surface (as of the sea),
(cf. our plate), (Pind., Tragg., al.; Sept. for m9): af
mrdkes ths StaOnkns (see diabqKy, 2 p. 136°), Heb. ix. 4;
ovk ev mrAak ALOivas (tables of stone, such as those on
which the law of Moses was written), aX’ év maki xap-
dias capkivats, 2 Co. iii. 3.* ;
tacpa, ros, TO, (TAdoow), what has been moulded or
formed, as from wax (Plat. Theaet. p. 197d. and p. 200b.);
the thing formed by a potter, earthen vessel, (Vulg. figmen-
tum): Ro. ix. 20 (with mndod added, Arstph. av. 686).*
mdcow: 1 aor. ptep. mdcas; 1 aor. pass. éxAdoOnv;
[(perh. akin to wAarvs; Curtius § 367 b)]; fr. Hes. down;
Sept. chiefly for 1¥°; to form, mould, (prop. something
from clay, wax, etc.): used of a potter, Ro. ix. 20; of
God as Creator (Gen. ii. 7 sq. 19 etc.), pass. 1 Tim. ii. 13.*
mracrtés, -1, -0v, (TAdoo@) ; 1. prop. moulded,
formed, as from clay, wax, stone, (Hes., Plat., Aristot.,
Plut., al.). 2. trop. feigned: 2 Pet. ii. 3 ([Hdt. 1,
68], Eur., Xen., Leian., al.).*
mwdareta, -as, 7, (fem. of the adj. mAarus, sc. ddds [cf.
W. 590 (549)]), a broad way, a street: Mt. vi. 5; xii.
19-eUkS x10 xiii. 265 xiv. 215 Acts'v. 15% Revs xi.
8; xxi. 21; xxii.2. (Kur., Plut.,al.; in Sept. chiefly for
a,).*
ad&ros, -ous, 70, [ (cf. wdaé), fr. Hdt. down], breadth:
Eph. iii. 18 (on which see paxos); Rev. xxi. 163 carry-
ing with it the suggestion of great extent, rhe yns, Opp.
to the ends or corners of the earth, Rev. xx. 9; (for
2m72, Hab. i. 6).*
mdative; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. memAdruvrar (see pe-
alive); 1 aor. émdarivOnv; (mdards); to make broad, to
enlarge: ti, Mt. xxiii. 5; 4 xap8ia jpav menddrvvrat, our
heart expands itself sc. to receive you into it, i.e. to
welcome and embrace you in love, 2 Co. vi. 11 (aAardvew
tiv kxapdiav for 29 3177, to open the heart sc. to in-
struction, Ps. exviii. (exix.) 32 [cf. W.30]); mAarivOnre
kal ipeis, be ye also enlarged in heart, viz. to receive me
therein, ibid. 13. (Xen., Plut., Anthol., al.) *
515
TAELOU
tarts, -eia, -v, [cf. Lat. planus, latus ; Curtius § 367 b;
Vaniéek p. 552], fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for
37, broad: Mt. vii. 13.*
TAEY HA, -Tos, TO, (TAEKw), What is woven, plaited, or twisted
together; a web, plait, braid: used thus of a net, Xen.
Cyr. 1, 6, 28; of a basket, Eur., Plat.; mréypa BuBAwor,
in which the infant Moses was laid, Joseph. antt. 2,9,4; .
by other writ. in other senses. braided hair (Vulg. crines
torti, ringlets, curls): 1 Tim. ii. 9 (cf. 1 Pet. iii. 3).*
tetoros, -7, -ov, (superl. of modvs), most: plur. Mt. xi.
20; [dxAos meioros, a very great multitude, Mk. iv. 1 T
Tr WH]; 6 mreioros dyXos, the most part of the multi-
tude, Mt. xxi. 8 (Thue. 7, 78; Plat. rep. 3 p. 397 d.;
Aads, Hom. II. 16, 377); rd mdciorov, adverbially, at the
most, 1 Co. xiv. 27.*
tAelwv, -ovos, 6, 7, neut. wAetov [eighteen times] and (in
Lk. iii.13; [Jn. xxi.15 LT Tr WH]; Acts xv. 28) wAéov
(cf. [WH. App. p. 151]; Matthiaei. p. 333; Kriiger § 23,
7,4; Kiihner § 156, 3; Passow s.v. modus, B.1; [L. and
S. s.v. B.]), plur. wAeloves and contr. mdeious, acc. mei=
ovas and contr. meiovs (which forms are used indiscrim-
inately in the N. T.), neut. rAeiova and (L T Tr WHin
Mt. xxvi. 53; LT in Lk. xxi. 3) contr. meio; (compar.
of roAvs) 3 more, i.e. 1. greater in quantity: the
object with which the comparison is made being added
in the genitive, as mAelovas Tay mpotwy, more in number
than the first, Mt. xxi. 36; mAefov (or mAciw) mavToy,
more than all, Mk. xii.43; Lk. xxi. 3; wAelova. . . rov’rar,
more than these, Jn. vii. 31 [here L T Tr WH om. the
gen. (see below)]; mAelova trav mporwy, more than the
first, Rev. ii. 19; rAetov rovrwy, more than these, Jn. xxi.
15; [mAeiova tisny exe Tov otkov, Heb. iii. 3° (cf. W. 190
(178), 240 (225))]; meprocevew mAetov, more than, foll. by
agen. [A. V. exceed], Mt. v. 20. mAeloves (adelous) 7,
Mt. xxvi. 58 R G[L mhelo (br. 7) ]; Jn. iv.1[Trmrg. om.
WH br. #] Aeiov #, more than, Lk. ix. 13; mdéov mAqv
w. agen. Acts xv. 28; mdéov mapa [rt or twa (see mapa,
TIJ. 2 b.)], Lk. iii, 13; [Heb. iii. 3°]; 7 is omitted before
numerals without change of construction: érav qv metd-
vey tercapdkovru 6 dvOpwros, Acts iv. 22; ov mdeious eiciy
por npépat Sexadvo, Acts xxiv. 11 (here Ree. inserts 7) ;
Hépas ov tAelous dxtT@ 7) Seka (Rec. mdeious 7 déxa), Acts
xxy. 6; add, Acts xxiii. 13, 21; as in Grk. writ. after
a neuter: mdetw [Lchm. 7 in br. ] iddexa Aeyedvas, Mt. xxvi.
53(T Tr WH (but T Aeyroveov) J, (mrciv — Attic for mretov
—é£axoatovs, Arstph. av. 1251 ; érn yeyovas mAciw éBdopun-
xovra, Plat. apol. Socr. p.17d.; see 7, 3a.; on the omis-
sion of quam in Latin after plus and amplius, ef. Rams-
horn, Lat. Gram. p. 491; [Roby, Lat. Gram. § 1273]).
the objects with which the comparison is made are not
added because easily supplied from the context: Jn.
iv. 41; [vii. 31 (see above)]; xv. 2; Heb. vii. 23; 1d
meiov, the more (viz. the greater debt mentioned), Lk.
vii. 43; mdetov, adverbially, more, i. e. more earnestly,
Lk. vii. 42; émt mdciov, more widely, further, SavenerOat,
Acts iv. 17; [cf. xx. 9 WH mrg. (see below) ]; mpoxdrrew,
2 Tim. iii. 9; et mAetov dceBetas, 2 Tim. ii. 163; émi mAetop,
longer (than proper), Acts xx. 9 [not WH mrg. (see
TAEK@
above)]; xxiv. 4; plural mhedova, more, i.e. a larger re-
ward, Mt. xx.10 [but L Tr WH mieiov]; without com-
parison, used of an indefinite number, with a subst.: Acts
ii. 40; xiii. 31; xviii. 20; xxi. 10; xxiv. 17; xxv. 14;
XXVii. 20; xxviii. 23; neut. epi mevdvov [A. V. of many
things], Lk. xi.53; with the article ot mdeloves (mheiovs),
the more part, very many: Acts xix. 32; xxvii. 12; 1 Co.
ix. 19; x. 5; xv. 6; 2 Co. ii. 6; iv. 15; ix. 2; Phil. i.
14, 2. greater in quality, superior, more excellent:
foll. by the gen. of comparison, Mt. vi. 25; xii. 41, 425
Mk. xii. 33 [here T WH Tr txt. mepioodrepov]; Lk. xi.
31, 32; xii. 23; [mAelova Ouciay . . . mapa Kdiv, Heb. xi.
4 (see apd, u.s.). From Hom. down.]*
mhéxw: 1 aor. ptep. mréEavres; [(ef. Curtius § 103;
Vaniéek p. 519)]; fr. Hom. down; to plait, braid, weave
together: mhéavres orépavov, Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv. 17;
Jn. xix.2. [Comp.: éu-mrexo. ]*
aAéoy, See mAELov.
mAcovdtw; 1 aor. émdedvaca; (mdéov); Sept. for 1p
and 731; 1. intrans.: used of one possessing, ¢o
superabound [ A. V. to have over], 2 Co. viii. 15. of things,
to exist in abundance [R. V. be multiplied], 2 Co. iv. 15;
to increase, be augmented, Ro. v. 20; vi. 1; 2 Th. i. 3;
Phil. iv.17; 2 Pet.i. 8. 2. trans. to make to increase:
tia Twt, one in a thing, 1 Th. iii. 12; for 375, Num.
xxvi. 54; Ps. Ixx. (Ixxi.) 21; add 1 Mace. iv. 35. By
prof. writ. [(fr. Hippocr. on)] in various other senses.
[Comp.: tmep-mdcovdga. | *
theovektéw, -3; 1 aor. émeovextnoa; 1 aor. pass. subj.
1 pers. plur. mAcovexrnOa@pev; (mdeovextys) 3 1. in-
trans. to have more, or a greater part or share: Thuc.,
Xen., Plut., al.; to be superior, excel, surpass, have an
advantage over, twos (gen. of pers.) rut (dat. of thing) :
Xen., Plat.; Isocr., Dem., al. 2. trans. to gain or
take advantage of another, to overreach: [Hdt. 8, 112],
Plat., Diod., Dion. Hal., Dio Cass., al.; and so in the N. T.
in 2 Co. vii. 2; xii. 17,18; 1 Th.iv.6 (see mpaypa, b.) ;
pass. [ef. B. §132, 22] ind twos, 2 Co. ii. 11 (10).*
THEOVEKTS, -Ov, 6, (mACovand ya); 1. one eager
to have more, esp. what belongs to others ({'Thue. 1, 40,
1 (cf. Hdt. 7, 158)]; Xen. mem. 1, 5, 3) ; 2. greedy
of gain, covetous: 1 Co. v. 10,11; vi.10; Eph. v. 5; Sir.
xive9.'
teovetla, -as, 4, (mAeovextns, q- V-), greedy desire to have
more, covetousness, avarice: Lk. xii. 15; Ro. i. 29; Eph.
iv. 19; v. 8; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. ii. 5; 2 Pet. ii. 3, [on the
om. of the art. in the last two pass. cf. W. 120 (114)], 14;
os [Rec. damep] theovekiay, [as a matter of covetousness],
i.e. a gift which betrays the giver’s covetousness, 2 Co.
ix. 5 [here R. V. txt. extortion]; plur. various modes in
which covetousness shows itself, covetings [ef. W. § 27,
3; B. 77 (67)], Mk. vii. 22. (In the same and various
other senses by prof. writ. fr. Hdt. and Thue. down.)
[ Trench, N. T. Syn. § xxiv., and (in partial correction)
Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col. iii. 5.]*
mAevpa, -as, 7, fr. Hom. (who always uses the plur.)
down; the side of the body: Jn. xix. 34; xx. 20, 25, 27;
Acts xii. 7.*
516
TAHKTNS
IIAEQ, see mipaAnpe.
ahéw; impf. 1 pers. plur. émAéoper; [allied w. rriva,
Lat. pluo, fluo, our float, flow, ete.; Curtius § 369]; fr.
Hom. down; to sail, navigate, travel by ship: LK. viii. 23;
Acts xxvii. 24; foll. by ets with an acc. of place, Acts
xxi. 33 xxvii.6; éni rérov, Rev. xviii. 17G LT Tr WH;
by a use common only to the poets (cf. Matthiae § 409,
4a.; Kiihner ii. $409, 6; [Jelf § 559; W. 224 (210)]), with
a simple ace. indicating the direction: Acts xxvii. 2 (Eur.
Med. vs. 7), where L T Tr WH addeis. [Comp.: dzo-,
dua-, €k-, KatTa-, mapa-, iTro-mhéw. | *
aAnyh,-fs, 4, (wAnoow), fr. Hom. down ; Sept. chiefly for
720, also for 731 ; 1. a blow, stripe: plur., Lk. x.
30; xii. 48; Acts xvi. 23,33; 2Co. vi.5; xi. 23; a wound:
) mAnyy Tod Oavdrov, deadly wound [R. V. death-stroke],
Rev. xiii. 3, 12; tis payaipas, wound made by a sword
[sword-stroke], Rev. xiii. 14. [On its idiomatic omis-
sion (Lk. xii. 47, etc.) cf. B. 82 (72) ; W. § 64, 4.] 2.
a public calamity, heavy affliction, (cf. Eng. plague], (now
tormenting now destroying the bodies of men, and sent
by God as a punishment) : Rev. ix. 18 [Rec. om.], 20; xi.
6; xv~l, 6,83) xvi. 9) (2) 5exvills 45°85, xxi9s) soai13-
[Cf. md. Aus, Soph. Aj. 137 (ef. 279); al.]*
aA*90s, -ous, Td, (IIAEQ), fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly
for 34, often for }jni1; @ multitude, i.e. a. a great
number, sc. of men or things: Acts xxi. 22 [not Tr WH];
Heb. xi. 12 [ef. W.120 (114) n.];_\ with wodd added, Mk.
iii. 7,8; wAqOos with a gen., Lk. ii.13; Jn. xxi. 6; Acts
v.14; xxviii. 3 [A. V. bundle (L T Tr WH add zi) ]; Jas.
v. 20; 1 Pet.iv.8; soAv mAnOos and wdqOos modd [cf.W.
§ 59, 2] with a gen., Lk. v.63 vi. 17; xxiii. 27; Jn.v. 3
[here L br. G T Tr WH om. wodd]; Acts xiv. 1; xvii.
4, b. with the article, the whole number, the whole
multitude ; the assemblage: Acts xv. 30; xxiii. 7; rod Aaod,
Acts xxi. 36; may rd mqOos, Acts xv. 12; with a gen.,
Lk.i.10; [viil. 37 (ris mepexdpov) ; xix. 37]; xxiii. 1;
Acts [iv. 32]; v. 16; [vi. 2, 5]; xxv. 243 the multitude
of people, Acts ii. 6; xix. 9; with rjs médews added,
Acts xiv. 4.*
TAnPive; fut. rAnOura; 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. mAnOvd=
vat (2 Co. ix. 10 Rec.) ; Pass., impf. éAnOvvdpny; 1 aor.
énAnOvvOnv; (fr. mAn@ds fulness); Aeschyl., Aristot.,
Hdian., Geop.; Sept. very often for 739, 735, 377;
sometimes for 239; 1. trans. to increase, to multi:
ply: 2 Co. ix. 10; Heb. vi. 14 (fr. Gen. xxii. 17); pass.
to be increased, (be multiplied) multiply: Mt. xxiv. 12;
Acts vi. 7; vii.17; ix. 31; xii. 24; rwi, [A. V.be multi-
plied to one i.e.] be richly allotted to, 1 Pet.i. 2; 2 Pet.
i. 2; Jude 2, (Dan. iii. 31 (98); Dan. vi. 25 Theodot.;
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1 inser. [also Mart. Polye. inser.,
Constt. Apost. inscr.]). 2. intrans. to be increased,
to multiply: Acts vi. 1.*
TANI, see mipmAnme.
TAHKTHS, -ov, 6, (wAnoow), (Vulgate percussor), [A.V.
striker], bruiser, ready with a blow; a pugnacious, con
tentious, quarrelsome person: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. i. 2
(Plut. Marcell. 1; Pyrrh. 30; Crass. 9; Fab. 19; Diog,
Laért. 6, 38; al.) *
TANLUpA
mAnppipa [so all edd.] (or wAnutpa [cf. Bitm. Ausf.
Spr. § 7 Anm.17note; Lob. Rhemat. p. 264]) [better ac-
cented as proparoxytone; Chandler $160], -as and (so
GT Tr WH) -s (see pdxarpa), j, (fr. rAnppn or wAjpn
i.e. rAnopn [fr. rhyGo, wipaAnp, q. V-]), @ flood, whether
of the sea or of a river: Lk. vi.48. (Job xl. 18; [Dion.
Hal. antt.1, 71]; Joseph. antt. 2, 10,2; Plut., Sext. Emp. ;
with morapay added, Philo de opif. mund. § 19; [cf. de
vita Moys. i. § 36 ; iii. § 24; de Abrah. § 19; de leg. alleg.
i. § 13].)*
wAhy, adv., (fr. rXéov ‘more’ [Curtius §375; Lob. Path.
Element. i. 143 ; ii. 93 (cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. iii. 16)];
hence prop. beyond, besides, nee ; it stands a:
adverbially, at the beginning of a sentence, serving
either to restrict, or to unfold and expand what has pre-
ceded: moreover, besides, so that, according to the re-
quirements of the context, it may also be rendered but,
nevertheless ; [howbeit; cf. B. § 146, 2]: Mt. xi. 22, 2435 xviii.
75 xxvi. 39, 64; Lk. vi. 24,35; x. 11, 14, 20; xi. 41; xii.
31; xili. 33; xvii. 1 L Tr txt. WH; xviii. 8; xix. 27; xxii.
21,22,42; xxiii. 28; 1 Co. xi.11; Eph. v. 33; Phil.i.18
[R G (see Ellicott) ]; iii. 16 ; iv. 14; Rev. ii. 25; aA dre,
except that, save that, (exx. fr. class. Grk. are given by
Passow s. v. II.1e.; [L. and S.s. v. B. II. 4]): Acts xx.
23 (CW. 508 (473); Phil.i.18 LT Tr WH (R.V. only
that) |. 2. as a preposition, with the gen. (first so
by Hom. Od. 8, 207; [ef. W. § 54, 6]), besides, except, but:
Mk. xii. 32; Jn. viii. 10; Acts vili.1; xv.28; xxvii. 22.
Cf. Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 724 sq.*
aps, -es, (IIAEQ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept.
chiefly for 89 ; a. full, i. e. filled up (as opp. to
empty): of hollow vessels, Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi.
43 [R G L]; with a gen. of the thing, Mk. viii. 19; of
a surface, covered in every part : émpas, Lk. v. 12; of
the soul, thoroughly permeated with: mvevparos dyiov, Lk.
iv. 1; Acts vi. 3; vii. 55; xi. 24; micrews, Acts vi.5 3; yapu-
tos, Acts vi. 8 [Rec. miotews]; yapiros kat ddnOeias, Jn.
i. 14; dodov, Acts xiii. 10 (Jer. v. 27); @vuod, Acts xix.
28; abounding in, épyav ayabay, Acts ix. 36. b.
full i. e. complete ; lacking nothing, perfect, (so the Sept.
sometimes for pow; oednyn mnpNS, Sir. ]. 6, cf. Hdt. 6,
106): proos, 2 2Jn. 8 (Ruth ii. 12); ciros, a full grain of
corn (one completely filling the follicle or hull contain-
ing it), Mk. iv. 28.*
adnpo-hopew, -&: [1 aor. impv. mAnpopdpyaor, inf. rAnpo-
gopioa (Ro. xv. 13 Lmrg.); Pass., pres. impv. Anpodo-
peicOw; pf. ptep. memrnpopopnpévos; 1 aor. ptep. mAnpo-
hopes]; (fr. the unused adj. rAnpopépos, and this fr.
mArnpns and hépa); to bear or bring full, tomake full; a.
to cause a thing to be shown to the full: rhv Siaxoviay, i.e. to
fulfil the ministry in every respect, 2 Tim. iv. 5 (cf. wAn-
powv tiv Scaxoviay, Acts xii. 25); also 76 knpvypa, ibid.
Wife b. to carry through to the end, accomplish: mpay-
para memAnpopopnpeva, things that have been accomplished,
(Itala and Vulg. completae), Lk.i.1 (cf. &s émAnpaby raira,
Acts xix. 21) [ef. Meyer ed. Weiss ad loc. ]. C. Tid,
to fill one with any thon ght, conviction, or inclination: [Ro.
xv. 13 L mrg. (foll. by é w. dat. of thing); al. mAnpow,
517
TANPOw
q. v.1]; hence to make one Cains, to persuade, convince,
one (arodXots ody Adyous kal Gpko.s mAnpopopyaavres Meya-
Bufov, extr. fr. Ctes. in Phot. p. 41, 29 [(ed. Bekk.) ; but
on this pass. see Bp. Lehtft. as Dlowiy: pass. to be per-
suaded, Ro. xiv. 5; mAnpopopneis, persuaded, fully con-
vinced or assured, Ro. iv. 21; also oe ans lpeaea Col.
iv.12 LT Tr WH; oidrécroda . - mnpopopydévres Ova
THs dvactdcews TOU Kupiov 'I. Xp. kat murr@Oevtes ev TO
Aoy Tov Geod, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 42, 3; freq. so in eccl.
writ.; 0 render inclined or bent on, erhapabopiOy kapdia
ate 0 moujoat TO movnpor, Eccl. viii. 11, [cf. Test. xii.
Patr., test. Gad 2]. The word is treated of fully by
Bleek, Brief an d. Heb. ii. 2 p. 233 sqq.; Grimm in the
Jahrbb. f. Deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 38.sqq.; [Bp.
Lghtft. Com. on Col. iv. 12. Cf. also Soph. Lex. s. v.]*
twAnpopopla, -as, 7, (wAnpopopéa, q. v.), fulness, abun-
dance: miorews, Heb. x. 22; rhs eAmidos, Heb. vi. 113 rs
auvécews, Col. ii. 2; full assurance, most certain confi-
dence, (see mAnpopopee, c. [al. give it the same meaning
in one or other of the preceding pass. also; ef. Bp. Lghtft.
on Col.].¢.]),1Th.i.5. (Not found elsewh. exc. in eccl.
writ. [ef. W. 25].) *
TAnpsw -6, (inf. -poty Lk. ix. 31, see WH. App. p. 166);
impf. 3 pers. sing. émAnpov; fut. sAnpdow; 1 aor. émAy-
paca; pf. memAnpwxa; Pass., pres. wAnpodpac; impf.
erAnpovpny ; pl. memAnpwpac; 1 aor. emAnpwOnv; 1 fut. wAy-
pobncona; fut. mid. mAnpwcomar (once, Rey. vi. 11 Rec.) ;
(fr. TAHPOS equiv. to wAnpns); fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; Sept. for xD ; 1. to make full, to jill, to fill
up: thy caynyny, pass. Mt. xiii. 48; i. q. to fill to the full,
macav xpeiav, Phil. iv. 19; to cause to abound, to furnish
or supply liberally: memAnpopa, I abound, I am liberally
supplied, sc. with what is necessary for subsistence, Phil.
iv. 18; Hebraistically, with the accus. of the thing in
which one abounds [cf. B. § 1384, 7; W. § 32, 5]: of spir-
itual possessions, Phil. i. 11 (where Ree. has xaprév) ;
Col. i. 9, (evémAnoa aitov mvetpa copias, Ex. xxxi. 3;
xxxv. 31); iq. to flood, 9 oikia émdnpoby [Tr mrg.
émdnobn] é« THs dopas, In. xii. 3 (see ex, IL. 5); Fyos
érAnpwce tov oikov, Acts ii. 2; with a gen. of the thing,
riv ‘lepovoadnp THs Sidaxns, Acts v. 28 (Liban. epp. 721
maoas — i. @. méNeus— everrAnoas Tav trép Hav Adyov;
Justin. hist. 11, 7 Phrygiamreligionibus implevit); rua,
i. q. to fill, diffuse throughout one’s soul: with agen. of the ,
thing, Lk. ii.40 RG L txt. T Tr mrg. (see below); Acts
ii. 28; pass., Acts xiii. 52; Ro. xv. 13 [where L mrg. mAy-
popopéw, q. v-inc.], 14; 2 Tim. i. 4; w. adat. of the thing
(cf. W. § 31, 7). pass., [Lk. ii. 40 L mrg. Tr txt. WH];
Ro. i. 29; 2Co. vii.4; foll. by ev w. a dat. of the instrue
ment: év mvedpart, Eph. v. 18; €v mavrl OcAnpate Geod,
with everything which God wills (used of those who
will nothing but what God wills), Col. iv. 12 RG [but
see mAnpoopéew, c.]; mAnpoty thv kapdiay Twos, to per-
vade, take possession of, one’s heart, Jn. xvi. 6; Acts v.
3; Christians are said mAnpodc6at, simply, as those who
are pervaded (i. e. richly furnished) with the power and
gifts of the Holy Spirit: év air, rooted as it were in
Christ, i. e. by virtue of the intimate relationship ew
TANpOw
tered into with him, Col. ii. 10 [cf. év, I. 6b.]; eds wav 76
mAnpwopua Tov beod (see Anpopa, 1), Eph. iii. 19 [not WH
mrg.]; Christ, exalted to share in the divine adminis-
tration, is said mAnpodv ra marta, to fill (pervade) the
universe with his presence, power, activity, Eph. iv. 10;
also mAnpotoba (mid. for himself, i. e. to execute his
counsels [cf. W. 258 (242); B. § 134, 7]) ra mavra év 1a-
ow, all things in all places, Eph. i. 23 (41 ovxi Tov ovpa-
vov Kal ri yy eyo mAnpO, ever kvuptos, Jer. xxiii. 24 ;
Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. i. 7 p. 55, cites exx. fr.
Philo and others; [(but év waow here is variously under-
stood ; see was, II. 2 b. 8. aa. and the Comm.) ]). 2:
to render full, i. e. to complete ; a. prop. to jill up
to the top: macav dapayya, Lk. iii. 5; so that nothing
shall be wanting to full measure, fill to the brim, ro
pérpov (q. v-1a.), Mt. xxiii. 32. b. to perfect, con-
summate ; a. a number: éws mAnpwbeor kal of co
SovAot, until the number of their comrades also shall have
been made complete, Rev. vi. 11 L WH txt., cf. Diister-
dieck ad loc. [see y. below]. by a Hebraism (see zip-
mAnu, fin.) time is said wAnpoda Gat, remAnpwpevos, either
when a period of time that was to elapse has passed, or
when a definite time is at hand: Mk.i.15; Lk. xxi. 24;
Jn. vii. 8; Acts vii. 23, 30; ix. 23; xxiv. 27, (Gen. xxv.
24; xxix. 21; Lev. viii. 33; xii.4; xxv. 30; Num. vi. 5;
Joseph. antt. 4,4, 6; 6,4,1; mAnpody rov recov enavror,
Plat. Tim. p. 39 d.; rods xpdvous, legg. 9 p. 866 a.). B.
to make complete in every particular; to render perfect:
macay evdokiav rr. 2 Th. i. 113; tHv xapay, Phil. ii. 2; pass.,
Asie hte, IF 4G ILS sank FS sean, 8)" id bro ie 245 Oday ye
ra épya, pass. Rev. iii. 2; rv bmaxonp, to cause all to obey,
pass. 2 Co. x. 6; 7d mdoxa, Lk. xxii. 16 (Jesus speaks
here allegorically: until perfect deliverance and blessed-
ness be celebrated in the heavenly state). y. to
carry through to the end, to accomplish, carry out, (some
undertaking) : mavra ra pnyata, Lk. vii. 1; tv diaxoviay,
Acts xii. 25; Col. iv. 17; 7d épyov, Acts xiv. 26; rév
Spopov, Acts xiii. 25; sc. rév Spdpov, Rev. vi. 11 ace. to
the reading mAnpoowor (GT Tr WH mrg.) or mAnpo-
covra (Rec.) [see a. above]; as emAnp@bn radra, when
these things were ended, Acts xix. 21. Here belongs
also mAnpody Td evayyedtoy, to cause to be everywhere
known, acknowledged, embraced, [A. V. I have fully
preached], Ro. xv. 19; in the same sense rév Adyov Tod
Oeov, Col. i. 25. c. to carry into effect, bring to reali-
zation, realize ; a. of matters of duty, to perform,
execute: tov vdpor, Ro. xiii. 8; Gal. v. 14; 7d dixalopa
Tov vouov, pass., év nuiv, among us, Ro. viii. 4; macav
dixatcoovyny, Mt. iii. 15 (edoeBevav, 4 Mace. xii. 15); THY
e£odov (as something appointed and prescribed by God),
eke xsl. B. of sayings, promises, prophecies, to
bring to pass, ratify, accomplish; so in the phrases iva or
dros mAnpwO7 1} ypahn, 7d pnb€v, etc. (cf. Knapp, Scripta
var. Arg. p. 533 sq.): Mt. i. 22; ii. 15,17, 23; iv.14;
viii. 17; xii. 17; xiii. 35; xxi. 4; xxvi. 54,56; xxvii. 9, 35
Rec.; Mk. xiv. 49; xv. 28 (whichvs.G T WH om. Trbr.);
Lk. i. 20; iv. 21; xxi. 22 Rec.; xxiv. 44; Jn. xii. 38; xiii.
18; xv. 25; xvii. 12; xviii. 9,32; xix. 24,36; Actsi. 16;
518
TANG lov
iii. 18; xiii. 27; Jas. ii. 23, (1 K. ii. 27; 2 Chr. xxxvi.
22). y. universally and absolutely, to fulfil, i.e. to
cause God’s will (as made known in the law) to be obeyed
as it should be, and God’s promises (given through the
prophets) to receive fuljilment: Mt. v. 175; cf. Weiss,
Das Matthiusevang. u.s.w. p. 146 sq. [Comp.: ava-,
avt-ava-, ™poo-ava-, €k-, oup-mAnpoo. | *
TAHpwpa, -ros, Td, (wAnpdw), Sept. for x03 a:
etymologically it has a passive sense, that which is (or
has been) filled; very rarely so in class. Grk.: a ship, in-
asmuch as it is filled (i. e. manned) with sailors, rowers,
and soldiers; dé vo mAnpopdtey éudxovro, Leian. ver.
hist. 2,37; mévre eiyov mAnpwpara, ibid. 38. Inthe N. T.
the body of believers, as that which is filled with the
presence, power, agency, riches of God and of Christ:
tov Xptorod, Eph. iv. 13 (see 7Ackia, 1 c. [cf. W. § 30, 3
N.1; B. 155 (136) ]); i. 23; eis wav rd wANpwpa Tod Geod,
that ye may become a body wholly filled and flooded by
God, Eph. iii. 19 [but WH mrg. reads tAnpw6n way 16
mA. ]. 2. that which fills or with which a thing is
filled: so very frequently in class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down;
esp. of those things with which ships are filled, freight
and merchandise, sailors, oarsmen, soldiers, [cf. our
‘complement’ (yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below p. 258 sq.) ],
(of the animals filling Noah’s ark, Philo de vit. Moys. ii.
§12); aAnpepa odeos, the inhabitants or population fill-
ing a city, Plat. de rep. 2 p. 371 e.; Aristot. polit. 3, 13
p. 1284, 5; 4,4 p.1291*,17; al. So inthe N.T. 9 yi cat
TO TAnpepa adtns, Whatever fills the earth or is contained
in it, 1 Co. x. 26, 28 Rec. (Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 1; xlix. (1.)
12; Jer. viii. 16; Ezek. xii. 19, etc.; 76 mAnpopa ris Oaddo-
ons, Ps. xev. (xevi.) 11; 1 Chr. xvi. 32); xopivwv zAnpd-
para, those things with which the baskets were filled,
[basketfuls], Mk. vi. 43 T Tr WH [on this pass. ef. Bp.
Lghtft. as below p. 260]; also orupidav mAnpopara, Mk.
vill. 20; the filling (Lat. complementum) by which a gap
is filled up, Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21; that by which a loss is
repaired, spoken of the reception of all the Jews into
the kingdom of God (see jjrrmpa, 1), Ro. xi. 12. Of
time (see rAnpda, 2 b. a.), that portion of time by which
a longer antecedent period is completed; hence complete-
ness, fulness, of time: tod xpdvov, Gal. iv. 4; rév Kaipav,
Eph. i. 10 (on which see oixovopia). 3. fulness,
abundance: Jn. i. 16; Col. i.19; ii.9; full number, Ro.
xi. 25. 4. ig. mAnpwots (see xavynpa, 2), i. e. a
fulfilling, keeping : rov vépou (see mAnpda, 2c. a.), Ro. xiii.
10. For a full discussion of this word see Fritzsche, Ep.
ad Rom. ii. p. 469 sqq.; [esp. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Col.
p- 257 sqq. ].*
TAnolov, (neut. of the adj. mAncios, -a, -ov), adv., fr.
Hom. down, near: with a gen. of place [cf. W. § 54, 6],
Jn. iv. 5; with the article, 6 wAnoiov sc. dv [ef. B. § 125,
10; W. 24] (Sept. very often for 1; sometimes for
MD), prop. Lat. proximus (so Vulg. in the N.T.), a
neighbor ; i. e. a. friend: Mt. v. 43. b. any
other person, and where two are concerned the other (thy
fellow-man, thy neighbor) i.e., acc. to the O. T. and
Jewish conception, a member of the Hebrew race and
TANT LOV?)
commonwealth: Acts vii. 27; and Rec. in Heb. viii. 11;
ace. to the teaching of Christ, any other man irrespec-
tive of race or religion with whom we live or whom we
chance to meet (which idea is clearly brought out in the
parable Lk. x. 25-37): Mt. xix. 19; xxii. 39; Mk. xii.
31, 33; Lk. x. 27; Ro. xiii. 9, 10; [xv. 2]; Gal. v. 14;
Eph. iv. 25; Jas. ii. 8 and L T Tr WH iniv. 12 ; rAqoiov
eivai Tivos, to be near one [one’s neighbor], i.e. in a pass.
sense, worthy to be regarded as a friend and companion,
Lk. x. 29; actively, to perform the offices of a friend
and companion, ibid. 36; [on the om. of the art. in the
last two exx. see B. § 129, 11; W.§19 fin.].*
TAHT LOVA, -7s, 7, (wipmAne [cf. W. 94 (89)]), reple-
tion, satiety, (Wulg. saturitas) : mpos mdnopoviy capkés, for
the satisfying of the flesh, to satiate the desires of the
flesh (see odp£, 4), Col. ii. 23, cf. Meyer ad loc.; [others
(including R. V.) render the phrase against (i. e. for the
remedy of) the indulgence of the flesh; see Bp. Lghtft.
ad loc., and mpds, I. 1 ¢.]. (Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plato,
Plut., al.; Sept.) *
TmAHoow (cf. rAnyn, (wéAayos), Lat. plango, plaga; Cur-
tius § 367]: 2 aor. pass. émAnynv; fr. Hom. down; Sept.
for 137} (see matrdooe, init.); to strike, to smite: pass.
(of the heavenly bodies smitten by God that they may
be deprived of light and shrouded in darkness), Rev.
villi. 12. [Comp.: ék-, exe mAnooo. | *
TAovdpiov, -ov, Td, (dimin. of mAoiov; see -yuvarkdpior,
fin.), a small vessel, a boat: Mk. iii. 9; iv. 36 Rec.; Lk.
v. 2 Lmrg.T Trmrg. WH mrg.; Jn. vi. [22%], 22" Rec.,
23 [where L Tr mrg. WH mAoia], 24LT Tr WH; xxi. 8.
[Cf. B. D.s. v. Ship (13).] (Arstph., Xen., Diod., al.) *
aotov, -ov, Td, (wA€w), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. chiefly for
TIN, a ship: Mt. iv. 21, 22; Mk.i. 19; Lk.v.2[RGL
txt. Tr txt. WH txt.]; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xx. 13, and often
in the historical bks. of the N. T.; Jas. iii. 4; Rev. viii.
9; xviii. 19. [BB. DD. s. v. Ship.]
a6os -ovs, gen. -dov -ov, and in later writ. rdods (Acts
xxvii. 9; Arr. peripl. erythr. p. 176 § 61; see vovs [and
ef. Lob. Paralip. p. 173 sq.]), (wAéw), fr. Hom. Od. 3,
169 down; voyage: Acts xxi. 7; xxvii. 9, 10, (Sap. xiv.
TD
tAove10s, -a,-ov, (rAovTOs), fr. Hes. opp. 22 down, Sept.
for VwWy, rich; a. prop. wealthy, abounding in ma-
terial resources: Mt. xxvii. 57; Lk. xii. 16; xiv. 12; xvi.
1,19; xviii. 23; xix. 2; 6 mdovavos, substantively, Lk.
Xvi. 21, 22; Jas. i.10, 113; of mAovovo, Lk. vi. 24; xxi. 1;
1 Tim. vi. 17; Jas. ii. 6; v.1; Rev. vi. 15; xiii.16; mdov-
cos, without the art., a rich man, Mt. xix. 23, 24; Mk. x.
25; xii. 41; Lk. xviii. 25. b. metaph. and univ.
abounding, abundantly supplied : foll. by év w. a dat. of
the thing in which one abounds (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note),
év édée, Eph. ii. 4; &v mioret, Jas. ii.5; absol. abounding
(rich) in Christian virtues and eternal possessions, Rev.
ii. 9; iii. 17, on which see Diisterdieck. émtayevoe mAov-
cos dv, of Christ, ‘although as the doapkos éyos he for-
merly abounded in the riches of a heavenly condition, by
assuming human nature he entered into a state of (earth-
ly) poverty,’ 2 Co. vill. 9.*
519
TAY
mrovoiws, adv., [fr. Hdt. down], abundantly, richly:
Col. iii. 16; 1 Tim. vi. 17; Tit. iii. 6; 2 Pet. i. 11.*
tAovtéw, -@; 1 aor. émhovrnaa; pf. wemovtnKa; (mAod-
tos) ; fr. Hes. down ; Sept. sometimes for wy; a.
to be rich, to have abundance : prop. of outward possessions,
absol., Lk. i. 53; 1 Tim. vi.9; 1 aor. I have been made
rich, have become rich, have gotten riches (on this use of
the aorist see BaciAeva, fin.), dé twos, Rev. xviii. 15
(Sir. xi. 18; [ef. dard, II. 2 a.]) ; also &e rwos (see éx, II. 5),
Rev. xviii. 3,19; &v run (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note; the Greeks
say mAouretv Twos, Or Tu, OY TL), 1 Tim. vi. 18. b.
metaph. to be richly supplied: mdovreiv eis mavras, is afflu-
ent in resources so that he can give the blessings of sal-
vation unto all, Ro. x. 12; mdoureiv eis bedv (see eds, B.
II. 2b. a.), Lk. xii. 21; aor. émdovrnaa, absolutely, I
became rich, i. e. obtained the eternal spiritual posses-
sions: 1 Co. iv. 8; 2 Co. viii. 9; Rev. iii. 18; memdov-
tyxa, I have gotten riches, Rev. iii. 17.*
wAoutifw; Pass., pres. ptep. mAoureCduevos; 1 aor. émov-
tiaOnv; (mAovtos); to make rich, to enrich: twa, pass.
2 Co. ix. 11; used of spiritual riches: ria, 2 Co. vi. 10;
ev with a dat. of the thing (see mAouréw,a.), pass., to be
richly furnished, 1 Co.i.5. (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plut. ;
Sept. for vwy7.) *
wAodTOS, -ov, 6, and (ace. to LT Tr WH in 2 Co. viii. 2;
iBjdob sh Cs wr, Ge ath ey NOE Temi NS Colby s the oy,
but only in the nom. and acc.; cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 118;
WH. App. p. 158]; W. 65 (64); B. 22 sq. (20)) 76 rAodros,
(apparently i. q. mAé¢oros, fr. wdéos full [ef. mivmAnpuc]),
fr. Hom. down, Sept. for wy, and also for {jo a mul-
titude, 5.n, 11715 riches, wealth ; a. prop. and absol.
abundance of external possessions: Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv.
19; Lk. viii. 14; 1 Tim. vi.17; Jas. v. 2; Rev. xviii. 17
(16). b. univ. fulness, abundance, plenitude: with
a gen. of the excellence in which one abounds, as ris
xpnordrnros, Ro. ii.4; ix. 23; 2 Co. viii. 2; Eph.i. 7, 18;
ii. 7; iii. 16; Col. i. 27; ii. 2. the wdodros of God is
extolled, i. e. the fulness of his perfections, — of which
two are mentioned, viz. copia and yvaars, Ro. xi. 33 (for
codias kai yyaoews here depend on fdéos, not on mdovrov
[ef. B. 155 (1385); W. § 30,3 N.1]); the fulness of all
things in store for God’s uses, Phil.iv.19; in the same
sense qrAovros is attributed to Christ, exalted at the
right hand of God, Rev. v. 12; in a more restricted sense,
m\odtos Tov Xpicrod is used of the fulness of the things
pertaining to salvation with which Christ is able to en-
rich others, Eph. iii. 8. c. univ. i. q. @ good [(to
point an antithesis)]: Heb. xi. 26; i. q. that with which
one is enriched, with a gen. of the person enriched, used
of Christian salvation, Ro. xi. 12.*
awhbve; impf. érAvvov; 1 aor. émAvva; [ (cf. rAéw) |; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. for 033 and yN7; fo wash: ra Sixrva,
Lk. v. 2 LT Tr WH[(T WH mrg.-av; see drorAvve) ];
used fr. Hom. down esp. in ref. to clothing (Gen. xlix.
11; Ex. xix. 10, 14; Lev. xiii. 6, 34, etc.) ; hence figura-
tively wAvvew Tas oTods avrav év TO aipare Tod dpviov is
used of those who by faith so appropriate the results of
Christ’s expiation as to be regarded by God as pure and
TVEU LA
sinless, Rev. vii. 14, andL T Tr WH in xxii. 14; cf.
Ps. 1. (li.) 4,9. [Comp.: dromdivo. SYN. see Aove,
fin. ]*
arvedpa, -ros, 76, (nvéw), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; Hebr. m1, Lat. spiritus; i. e.
1. a movement of air, (gentle) blast; a. of the
wind: dvéyov mvevpara, Hdt. 7,16, 1; Paus. 5, 25; hence
the wind itself, Jn. iii. 8; plur. Heb. i. 7, (1 K. xviii. 45;
xix. 11; Jobi. 19; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4, etc.; often in Grk.
writ.). b. breath of the nostrils or mouth, often in
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down: mvedpa tod ordparos, 2 Th.
ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 6, cf. Is. xi. 4); mv. (ais, the
breath of life, Rev. xi. 11 (Gen. vi. 17, cf. mvon Cais, ii.
7). [mvedpa and avon seem to have been in the main
coincident terms; but avon became the more poetical.
Both retain a suggestion of their evident etymology.
Even in class. Grk. wvetpa became as freq. and as wide
in its application as dyeyos. (Schmidt ch. 55, 7; Trench
§ Lxxiii.) ]
2. the spirit, i.e. the vital principle by which the body is
animated [(Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.; see below)]: Lk.
vill. 55; xxiii. 46; Jn. xix. 30; Acts vii.59; Rev. xiii. 15
[here R.V. breath]; aduévar ro mvedpa, to breathe out the
spirit, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 cf. Sir. xxxvili. 23; Sap.
xvi. 14 (Grk. writ. said aguévae ray uxny, as Gen. xxxv.
18, see dbinu, 1b. and Kypke, Observv. i. p. 140; but we
also find aduévar mvedpa Oavacipo opayn, Eur. Hee. 571);
capa xopis mvevparos vexpdv eotw, Jas. li. 263 Td avedtpa
€ott TO Cworo.ody, 7 oapE ovk wpedci ovdev, the spirit is
that which animates and gives life, the body is of no
profit (for the spirit imparts life to it, not the body in
turn to the spirit; ef. Chr. Frid. Fritzsche, Nova opusce.
p- 239), Jn. vi. 63. the rational spirit, the power by
which a human being feels, thinks, wills, decides; the soul:
TO mvebpa TOD avOpmmov 7d ev air@, 1 Co. ii. 11; opp. to
odp& (q. v. [esp. 2 a.]), Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; 1 Co.
v.5; 2 Co. vii.1; Col. ii.5; opp. to 76 cpa, Ro. viii. 10;
1 Co. vi. 17, 20 Ree. ; vii. 34; 1 Pet.iv.6. Although for
the most part the words rvedpya and Wuy7 are used indis-
criminately and so céua and Wux7 put in contrast (but
never by Paul; see wuyxn, esp. 2), there is also recognized
a threefold distinction, 76 mvedpa Kal 7 Wuyi Kal Td cdpa,
1 Th. v. 23, acc. to which 7d wvedya is the rational part
of man, the power of perceiving and grasping divine
and eternal things, and upon which the Spirit of God
exerts its influence; (avedpa, says Luther, “is the high-
est and noblest part of man, which qualifies him to
lay hold of incomprehensible, invisible, eternal things;
in short, it is the house where Faith and God’s word are
at home” [see reff. at end]): &ypu pepurnod Woxijs kat
mvevpatos (see peptopds, 2), Heb. iv. 12; év ét mvevpart,
pea Wuxi, Phil. i. 27 (where instead of wa Wox7 Paul
ace. to his mode of speaking elsewhere would have said
more appropriately ya capdia). 1d mvedpd twos, Mk. ii.
8; vill. 12; Lk. i.47; Acts xvii. 16; Ro. i. 9; viii. 16;
1Co.v.4; xvi.18; 2Co. ii. 13; vii.13; Gal. vi.18; [Phil.
iv. 23 LT Tr WH]; Philem. 25; 2 Tim. iv. 22; 6 eds
tév mvevparev (for which Rec. has dyiwv) rév mpopyrar,
520
TVEULE
| who incites and directs the souls of the prophets, Rev.
xxii. 6, where cf. Diisterdieck. the dative r@ mvevpare
is used to denote the seat (locality) where one does or
suffers something, like our in spirit: émvywaoxeww, Mk. ii.
8; dvacrevdtew, Mk. viii. 12; éuBpyaoOa, Jn. xi. 33;
rapdooecOau, Jn. xiii. 21; Céew, Acts xviii. 25; Ro. xii.
11; dyaddaoda, Lk. x. 21 (but L T Tr WH here add
dyim); dat. of respect: 1 Co. v. 3; Col. ii. 5; 1 Pet. iv.
6; kparaovaba, Lk. i. 80; ii. 40 Rec.; dycov etva, 1 Co.
vii. 34; Cworoinbeis, 1 Pet. iii. 18; (jv, 1 Pet. iv.6; mro-
xoi, Mt.v.3; dat. of instrument: dedepévos, Acts xx. 22;
ovvexerOa, xviii. 5 Rec.; be@ Aatpevew, Phil. iii. 3 RG;
dat. of advantage: dveow ro mvevpari pov, 2 Co. ii. 13
(12); év r@ mvetpars, is used of the instrument, 1 Co. vi.
20 Ree. [it is surely better to take év r. w. here locally,
of the ‘sphere’ (W. 386 (362), cf. vs.19)]; also év mvevpa-
rt, nearly i. q. rvevparixas [but see W. § 51, 1 e. note], Jn.
iv. 23; of the seat of an action, év ro mvevpari pov, Ro. i.
9; riOéva év to mv., to propose to one’s self, purpose in
spirit, foll. by the infin. Acts xix. 21. mvevpata mpopn-
ray, ace. to the context the souls (spirits) of the prophets
moved by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. xiv. 32; in a pecu-
liar sense mvedua is used of a soul thoroughly roused by
the Holy Spirit and wholly intent on divine things, yet
destitute of distinct self-consciousness and clear under-
standing; thus in the phrases 76 mvedud prov mpocevyerat,
opp. to 6 vods pov, 1 Co. xiv. 14; mvetpare Aadeiv pvotn-
pea, ibid. 2; mpocetxerOat, Wadrew, evAoyetv, TO Tv., as
opp. to r@ voi, ibid. 15, 16.
3. a spirit, i. e. a simple essence, devoid of all or at least
all grosser matter, and possessed of the power of knowing,
desiring, deciding, and acting; a. generically: Lk.
xxiv. 37; Acts xxiii. 8 (on which see pnre, fin.) ; ibid. 9;
mvedpua oapka Kal doréa ovk éxet, Lk. xxiv. 39; mvedpa
woro.ody, [a life-giving spirit], spoken of Christ as raised
from the dead, 1 Co. xv. 453; mvedpa 6 Oeds (God ts spirit
essentially), Jn. iv. 24; marjp tév mvevpatev, of God,
Heb. xii. 9, where the term comprises both the spirits of
men and of angels. b. a human soul that has left the
body [(Babr. 122, 8)]: plur. (Lat. manes), Heb. xii. 23;
1 Pet. iii. 19. c. a spirit higher than man but lower
than God, i.e. an angel: plur. Heb. i. 14; used of demons,
or evil spirits, who were conceived of as inhabiting the
bodies of men: [Mk. ix. 20]; Lk. ix. 39; Acts xvi. 18;
plur., Mt. viii. 16; xii. 45; Lk. x. 20; xi. 26; aveiua
mvdavos or mvOava, Acts xvi. 163; mvedpata Satpovior,
Rev. xvi. 14; mvedpua Sacpoviou axabaprov, Lk. iv. 33 (see
Satpdnor, 2) ; mvedua doGeveias, causing infirmity, Lk. xiii.
11; mvedua dxdOaprov, Mt. x. 1; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26,
27; ili. 11, 30; v. 2,8,13; vi. 7; vii. 253; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 36;
vi. 18; viii. 29; ix. 42; xi. 24, 26; Acts v.16; viii. 7; Rev.
Xvi. 13; xviii. 2; ddadov, kody (for the Jews held that
the same evils with which the men were afflicted affected
the demons also that had taken possession of them [ef.
Weistein, N. T. i. 279 sqq.; Edersheim, Jesus the Mes-
siah, App. xvi.; see Sacpovigoua etc. and reff.]), Mk. ix.
17, 25; movnpdy, Lk. vii. 21; viii. 2; Acts xix. 12, 13, 15,
16, [(cf. Judg. ix. 23; 1S. xvi.14; xix. 9, ete.)]. d.
TVEULA
the spiritual nature of Christ, higher than the highest an-
gels, close to God and most intimately united to him (in
doctrinal phraseology the divine nature of Christ): 1 Tim.
ili. 16; with the addition of éy:wovvns (on which see
dywovvn, 1 [yet cf. 4 a. below]), Ro. i. 4 [but see Meyer
ad loc., Ellicott on 1 Tim. l.c.]; it is called rvedpa aid-
mov, in tacit contrast with the perishable Wuxai of sacri-
ficial animals, in Heb. ix. 14, where ef. Delitzsch [and
esp. Kurtz].
4. The Scriptures also ascribe a mvedyua to Gon, i. e.
God’s power and agency, — distinguishable in thought (or
modalistice, as they say in technical speech) from God’s
essence in itself considered, — manifest in the course of
affairs, and by its influence upon souls productive in the
theocratic body (the church) of all the higher spiritual gifts
and blessings; [cf. the resemblances and differences in
Philo’s use of 76 Geiov mveipa, e. g. de gigant. $12 (cf. § 5
8q.); quis rer. div. §53; de mund. opif. § 46, etc. ]. a.
This mvedua is called in the O. T. Doe M99, TT A ;
in the N. T. rvedpa ayiov, rd dyvov mvedpa, To wvedpa TO
&yov (first so in Sap. i. 5; ix. 17; for wp m9, in Ps. 1.
(li.) 18, Is. Ixiii. 10, 11, the Sept. renders by mvedpa déyto-
avs), i.e. the Holy Spirit (august, full of majesty, adora-
ble, utterly opposed to all impurity): Mt. i. 18, 205 iii.
1 xi: B25; xxvii NOs IM ky 1.8); ait. 2900 xii: S64 axiii. 11:
Lk. i. 15, 35; ii. 25, 26; iii. 16, 22; iv.1; xi.13; xii. 10,
12; Jn.i. 33; vii. 39[(L T WH om. Tr br. dy.]; xiv. 26;
xx. 223 Actsi.275; 8,16 5/11: 33,883 :iv. 25, T Tr WH;
v. 3, 32; viii. 18 [LT WH om. Tr br. 7d Gy.], 19; ix. 31; x.
38, 44, 45,47; xi. 15, 16, 24; xiii. 2,4, 9,52; xv. 8, 28;
RVinOls KIXIGHE KK IS. WO. Ix 2 xiv. 17soxvelsy16n19
{L Tr WH in br.]; 1 Co. vi. 19; xii. 3; 2 Co. vi. 6; xiii.
13 (14); Eph.i.13; 1 Th.i.5,6; 2 Tim.i.14; Tit. iii.
5; Heb. ii. 4; vi.4; ix.8;1Jn.v. 7 Rec.; Jude 20; oth-
er exx. will be given below in the phrases; (on the use
and the omission of the art., see Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom.
ii. p. 105 [in opposition to Harless (on Eph. ii. 22) et al. ;
ef. also Meyer on Gal. v. 16; Ellicott on Gal. v.5; W.
122 (116); B. 89 (78)]); rd wv. rd Gytov Tod Oeod, Eph.
iv. 30; 1 Th. iv.8; mvedpua Geod, Ro. viii. 9, 14; 7d Tov
Geod mvedua, 1 Pet. iv. 14; (7d) mvedpa (Tov) Oeod, Mt. iii.
16; xii. 18, 28; 1 Co. ii. 14; iii. 16; Eph. iii. 16; 1 Jn.
iv. 2; rd mv. rod Oeod jpar, 1 Co. vi. 113; 76 mv. rod rarpés,
Mt. x. 20; mv. Geod (artos, 2 Co. iii. 3; 7d mv. Tod eyeipar-
tos "Inoodv, Ro. viii. 11; 7d mv. 7d ek Geod (emanating
from God and imparted unto men), 1 Co. ii. 12; mvedpa
and ré mv. Tov kupiov, i.e. of God, Lk. iv. 18; Acts v. 9
(cf. vs. 4); viii. 39; kupiov, ie. of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 17,
18 [cf. B. 343 (295)]; 7d mvedpa "Inood, since the same
Spirit in a peculiar manner dwelt in Jesus, Acts xvi.
7 (where Rec. om.’Inaod); Xpsorod, Ro. viii. 9; "Inood
Xpisrod, Phil. i. 19; rd év rw (in one’s soul [not WH
mrg.]) mvedua Xptorov, 1 Pet. i. 11; TO TV. TOU viov TOD
6eod, Gal. iv. 6; simply 7d wvedpa or mvedpa: Mt. iv. 1;
xii. 31, 32; xxii.43; Mk.i. 10,12; Lk. iv. 1, 14; Jn.i.
$2, 33; iii. 6, 8, 34; vii. 39; Acts ii. 4; vill. 29; x. 19;
xi. 12, 28; xxi. 4; Ro. viii. 6, 16, 23, 26, 27; xv. 30; 1 Co.
ii. 4, 10, 13 (where Ree. adds dyiov) ; xii. 4, 7, 8; 2 Co.
521
TVEU LG
i. 22; iii. 6,8; v.53 Gal. iii. 3,5, 14; iv. 29; v. 5,17, 22,
25; Eph. iv. 8; v. 9 Ree.; vi. 17; Phil. ii. 1 sg eDhepite
13; 1 Tim. iv. 1; Jas. iv. 5; 1 Pet. i. 22 Rec.; 1 Jn. iii.
24; v. 6,8; Rev. xxii. 17. Among the beneficent and
very varied operations and effects ascribed to this
Spirit in the N. T., the foll. are prominent: by it the
man Jesus was begotten in the womb of the virgin Mary
(Mt. i. 18, 20; Lk. i. 35), and at his baptism by John it
is said to have descended upon Jesus (Mt. iii. 16; Mk.i.
10; Lk. iii. 22), so that he was perpetually (pévov er
avrdy) filled with it (Jn. i. 32, 33, cf. iii. 34; Mt. xii. 28;
Acts x.38); hence to its prompting and aid the acts and
words of Christ are traced, Mt. iv. 1; xii. 28; Mk. i. 12;
Lk. iv. 1, 14. After Christ’s resurrection it was im-
parted also to the apostles, Jn. xx. 22; Acts ii. Sub-
sequently other followers of Christ are related to have
received it through faith (Gal. iii. 2), or by the instra-
mentality of baptism (Acts ii. 38 ; 1 Co. xii. 13) and the
laying on of hands (Acts xix. 5, 6), although its recep-
tion was in no wise connected with baptism by any mag-
ical bond, Acts viii. 12, 15; x. 44 sqq. To its agency
are referred all the blessings of the Christian religion,
such as regeneration wrought in baptism (Jn. iii. 5, 6, 8;
Tit. iii. 5, [but see the commentators on the passages, and
reff. s.v. Bamrucpa, 3]); all sanctification (1 Co. vi. 11;
hence dytacpds mvevparos, 2 Th. ii. 13; 1 Pet.i. 2); the
power of suppressing evil desires and practising holi-
ness (Ro. viii. 2sqq.; Gal. v. 16 sqq. 22; 1 Pet. i. 22[ Rec. ],
etc.) ; fortitude to undergo with patience all persecu-
tions, losses, trials, for Christ’s sake (Mt. x. 20; Lk. xii.
11,12; Ro. viii. 26) ; the knowledge of evangelical truth
(Jn. xiv. 17, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 12,13; 1 Co. ii. 6-16; Eph.
iii. 5), — hence it is called veda ris adnOeias (Sn. ll. cc. ;
1 Jn. iv. 6), mvedpa codias kai dmoxadvews (Eph. i. 17);
the sure and joyful hope of a future resurrection, and
of eternal blessedness (Ro. v. 5; viii. 11; 2 Co. i. 22; v.
5; Eph. i. 13 sq.); for the Holy Spirit is the seal and
pledge of citizenship in the kingdom of God, 2 Co. i. 22;
Eph.i.13. He is present toteach, guide, prompt, restrain,
those Christians whose agency Godemploys in carrying
out his counsels: Acts viii. 29,39; x. 193; xi. 12; xiii. 2,
4; xv. 28; xvi. 6, 7; xx. 28. He is the author of char-
isms or special “gifts” (1 Co. xii. 7 sqq.; see xapicua),
prominent among which is the power of prophesy-
ing: rd épydpeva dvayyedci, Jn. xvi. 13; hence 1d rvedpa
tis mpopnreias (Rev. xix. 10); and his efficiency in the
prophets is called ro mvedpa simply (1 Th. v. 19), and
their utterances are introduced with these formulas:
rdde déyer rd Tvedpa TO Eyov, Acts xxi. 11; ro wvedpa
héyet, 1 Tim. iv. 1; Rev. xiv. 13; with rais éxkAnoias
added, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii.6,13, 22. Since the Holy
Spirit by his inspiration was the author also of the O.T.
Scriptures (2 Pet. i. 21; 2 Tim. iii. 16), his utterances
are cited in the foll. terms: Aéyet or paprupet ro mvetpa
ro dyvov, Heb. iii. 7; x. 15; TO my. TO ay. €AdAnoe did
‘Hoaiov, Acts xxviii. 25, cf. i. 16. From among the
great number of other phrases referring to the Holy
Spirit the following seem to be noteworthy here: God
TVEVLA
is said diddvae rwi 1d mv. 7d dy., Lk. xi. 13; Acts xv. 8;
pass. Ro. v. 5; more precisely, ex rod mvevpatos avroi, i.e.
a portion from his Spirit’s fulness [B. § 132, 7; W. 366
(343)], 1 Jn. iv. 13; or éexxeiv dad Tod mvedparos adrod,
Acts ii. 17, 18, (for its entire fulness Christ alone re-
ceives, Jn. iii. 34); men are said, AapBavew mv. dy., Jn.
xx. 22; Acts viii. 15, 17, 19; xix. 2; or ro mv. 70 dy. Acts
x. 47; or 76 mp. To €k Geod, 1 Co. ii. 12; or 7d mvedpa, Gal.
iii. 2, cf. Ro. viii. 15; mv. Oeod exes, 1 Co. vii. 40; mvedpa
py €xew, Jude 19; mAnpodoGa mvevpartos ayiov, Acts xiii.
52; év mvedyart, Eph. v.18; mdnoOqvat, rhyoOjoec Oa,
mvevparos dyiov, Lk. i. 15,41, 67; Actsil.4; iv. 8, 31; ix.
17; xiii. 9; mvedparos ayiov mAnpns, Acts vi. 5; vil. 55;
xi. 245 mAjpers mvedpatos (Rec. adds dyiov) cai codias,
Acts vi. 3; mvedpare and mvedpatt Oeod dyeoOa, to be led
by the Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v.18; pépeoOas iro
nv. dy. 2 Pet. i. 21; the Spirit is said to dwell in the
minds of Christians, Ro. viii. 9, 11; 1 Co. iii. 16; vi. 19;
2 Tim. i. 14; Jas. iv. 5, (other expressions may be found
under Bamri¢e, II. b. bb.; yervaw, 1 fin. and 2 d.; éxxéwb.;
xpiw, a.) ; yiverOat ev mvevpart, to come to be in the Spirit,
under the power of the Spirit, i. e. in a state of inspira-
tion or ecstasy, Rev. i.10; iv. 2. Dative mvevpart, by the
power and aid of the Spirit, the Spirit prompting, Ro.
viii. 13; Gal. v. 5; 7@ mv. tO dyin, Lk. x. 21 L. Tr WH;
mvevparte ayio, 1 Pet. i. 12 (where RG Thave év mv. dy.) ;
mvevpare Geod, Phil. iii. 3 L T Tr WH; also ev mvevpart,
Eph. ii. 22; iii. 5 (where ev mvevpare must be joined to
amexadvp6n); €v mvevpart, in the power of the Spirit,
possessed and moved by the Spirit, Mt. xxii. 43; Rev.
xvii. 3; xxi. 10; also €v r@ mvevdpart, Lk. ii. 27; iv. 1;
ev T@ Tv. TO Gy. Lk. x. 21 Tdf.; ev rn Suvdper tov mv. Lk. iv.
14; ev r@ mvevpate Te ay. eimeiv, Mk. xii. 36; ev mvevpare
(dy.) mpocevxecOa, Eph. vi. 18; Jude 20; ev mv. Oeod
Aadeiv, 1 Co. xii. 35 aydrn ev mvevpartt, love which the
Spirit begets, Col. i. 8; meperoua ev mv., effected by the
Holy Spirit, opp. to ypdypart, the prescription of the
written law, Ro. ii. 29; tvmos yivov trav moray év mv., in
the way in which you are governed by the Spirit, 1 Tim.
iv. 12 Rec.; [ev évt mvevpart, Eph. ii. 18]; 4 évdrns rod
mvevparos, effected by the Spirit, Eph. iv. 3; Kawvdtns TOU
ny. Ro. vii. 6. 1d mvedpya is opp. to 7 cdpé i. e. human
nature left to itself and without the controlling influence
of God’s Spirit, subject to error and sin, Gal. v. 17, 19,
22; [vi. 8]; Ro. viii. 6; soin the phrases mepurareiv kara
mvedua (opp. to kara odpka), Ro. viii. 1 Rec., 43; of xara
mvedpa SC. dvres (Opp. to of kara odpka bvres), those who
bear the nature of the Spirit (i. e. of mvevparexoi), ib.
5; év mvevpare eivar (opp. to év capki), to be under the
power of the Spirit, to be guided by the Spirit, ib. 9;
mvevpate (dat. of ‘norm’; [ef. B. § 133, 22 b.; W. 219
(205) ]) mepurareiv (opp. to émOupiav capkds redeiv), Gal.
v.16. The Holy Spirit is a Sdvaprs, and is expressly
so called in Lk. xxiv. 49, and Sdvayus iwiorov, Lk. i. 35 ;
but we find also mvedya (or my. dy.) kal ddvapis, Acts x.
38; 1 Co. ii, 4; and 9 Svvayis rod mvedparos, Lk. iv. 14,
where mvedpa is regarded as the essence, and Svvauts its
efficacy; but in 1 Th. i. 5 év mvevpari dvi is epexegetical
522
T VELA
of év duvdpet. In some pass. the Holy Spirit is rhetori-
cally represented as a Person [(cf. reff. below)]: Mt.
Xxviii.19; Jn. xiv. 16 sq. 26; xv. 26; xvi. 13-15 (in which
pass. fr. Jn. the personification was suggested by the fact
that the Holy Spirit was about to assume with the apos-
tles the place of a person, namely of Christ) ; 7b m., cabas
Bovdera, 1 Co. xii. 11; what any one through the help
of the Holy Spirit has come to understand or decide upon
is said to have been s poken to him by the Holy Spirit:
eime TO mrvedpa Tim, Acts Vili. 29; x.19; xi. 12; xiii. 4; 76
mv. 70 Gy. Suapaprvperai po, Acts xx. 23. 1O mv. Td ay.
éOero émtokdrous, i. e. not only rendered them fit to dis-
charge the oflice of bishop, but also exercised such an in-
fluence in their election (xiv. 23) that none except fit per-
sons were chosen to the office, Acts xx. 28; ro mvetpa
bmepevtvyxavet oTevaypois adadnros in Ro. viii. 26 means,
as the whole context shows, nothing other than this: ‘al-
though we have no very definite conception of what we
desire (ri mpooevéapeba), and cannot state it in fit lan-
guage (xaGo Sez) in our prayer but only disclose it by in-
articulate groanings, yet God receives these groanings
as acceptable prayers inasmuch as they come from a soul
full of the Holy Spirit.’ Those who strive against the
sanctifying impulses of the Holy Spirit are said dvrimi-
nrew TO Tv. TO dy. Acts vii. 51; evuBpifew 7d mv. ths xapt-
tos, Heb. x. 29. aetpa¢ewv 7d mv. Tod Kupiov is applied to
those who by falsehood would discover whether»men full
of the Holy Spirit can be deceived, Acts v. 9; by anthro-
popathism those who disregard decency in their speech
are said Aumetv 16 mv. To ay., since by that they are taught
how they ought to talk, Eph. iv. 30 (mapoEuvvew 76 mv. Is.
Ixiii. 10; mapamtxpaiverv, Ps. cv. (evi.) 33). Cf. Grimm,
Institutio theologiae dogmaticae, § 131; [ Weiss, Bibl.
Theol. § 155 (and Index s. v. ‘ Geist Gottes,’ ‘Spirit of
God’); Kahnis, Lehre vom Heil. Geiste; Fritzsche, Nova
opusce. acad. p. 278 sqq.; B. D. s. v. Spirit the Holy;
Swete in Dict. of Christ. Biog. s.v. Holy Ghost]. b.
Ta énra mvevpata Tov Geovd, Rev. [iii. 1 (where Rec.* om.
émra)]; iv. 5; v.6 [here Lom. WH br. énra], which are
said to be évamov Tov Opdvov Tod Geod (i. 4) are not seven
angels, but one and the same divine Spirit manifesting
itself in seven energies or operations (which are rhetori-
cally personified, Zech. iii. 9; iv. 6,10); ef. Diisterdieck
on Rev. i.4; [Zrench, Epp. to the Seven Churches, ed. 3
p: 7sq.]- c. by meton. mvedpaisused of a. one
in whom a spirit (arvedpua) is manifest or embodied; hence
i. q. actuated by a spirit, whether divine or demoniacal ; one
who either is truly moved by God’s Spirit or falsely boasts
that he is: 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Jn. iv. 2,3; hence dsaxpicets
mvevpatey, 1 Co. xii. 10; py mavti rvedpare morevere, 1 Jn.
iv. 1; doxudatere ra mvevpata, ei éx Tov Geov éariv, ibid.;
mvevpata mrava joined with Sdacxaria Saioviov, 1 Tim.
iv. 1. But in the truest and highest sense it is said 6
KUptos TO mvedpa éotiv, he in whom the entire fulness of
the Spirit dwells, and from whom that fulness is diffused
through the body of Christian believers, 2 Co. iii.17.
the plur. rveduara denotes the various modes and gifts
by which the Holy Spirit shows itself operative in those
TVEUPLA 5
in whom it awells (such as 7d mvedpa rhs mpodnretas, ris
aofias, etc.), 1 Co. xiv. 12.
5. univ. the disposition or influence which fills and gov-
erns the soul of any one; the efficient source of any power,
affection, emotion, desire, etc.: 76 adtO mvetpare meprera-
thaapev, 2 Co. xii. 18; év mvetpare "Hdiov, in the same
spirit with which Elijah was filled of old, Lk. i. 17;
Ta pnpata... mvedud eat, exhale a spirit (and fill be-
lievers with it), Jn. vi. 63; otov mvetpards éore tpeis,
[what manner of spirit ye are of] viz. a divine spirit,
that I have imparted unto you, Lk. ix. 55 [Rec.; (cf.
B. § 132,11 L.; W. § 30, 5)]; TO mvevpatt, @ €AdAet,
Acts vi. 10, where see Meyer; mpav kal ovxov mvedpa,
1 Pet. iii. 4; avedpa mpadrnros, such as belongs to the
meek, 1 Co. iv. 21; Gal. vi.1; 7d mv. THs mpodpyretas, such
as characterizes prophecy and by which the prophets
are governed, Rev. xix. 10; ris dAnOeias, codias Kat dro-
Kavwews, see above p. 521° mid. (Is. xi. 2; Deut. xxxiv. 9;
Sap. vii. 7); ths micrews, 2 Co. iv.133; ris viobecias, such
as belongs to sons, Ro. viii. 15; ras Cons év Xpiora, of
the life which one gets in fellowship with Christ, ibid. 2;
duvdpews kat ayarns kai coppoucpod, 2 Tim.i. 7; év rvedua
evar with Christ, i.q. to be filled with the same spirit as
Christ and by the bond of that spirit to be intimately
united to Christ, 1 Co. vi. 17; év évi mvevpan, by the re-
ception of one Spirit’s efficiency, 1 Co. xii. 13; ets &
mvevpa, sO as to be united into one body filled with one
Spirit, ibid. RG; & mvetpa moriferba, [made to drink
of i.e.] imbued with one Spirit, ibid. LT Tr WH [see
moti(a|; é€v cGpa cat €év mvedpa, one (social) body filled
and animated by one spirit, Eph. iv. 4;—in all these
pass. although the language is general, yet it is clear
from the context that the writer means a spirit begotten
of the Holy Spirit or even identical with that Spirit [ (cf.
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46,6; Herm. sim. 9, 13. 18; Ignat. ad
Magn. 7) ]. In opposition to the divine Spirit stand,
Td mvetpa TO evepyouv ev Tois viois THs ameelas (a spirit
that comes from the devil), Eph. ii. 2; also rd avetdpa Tod
xéopov, the spirit that actuates the unholy multitude,
1 Co. ii. 12; d8ovAetas, such as characterizes and governs
slaves, Ro. viii. 15; xaravitews, Ro. xi. 8; dethlas, 2 Tim.
i. 7; ris Ads, 1 In. iv. 6 (wAavacews, Is. xix. 14; mop-
‘vetas, Hos. iv. 12; v.4); 7d Tov avttxypiorov SC. mvevpa,
1 Jn. iv. 3; érepov mvetpa AapBavery, i. e. different from
the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. xi.4; 16 mv. rod vods, the govern-
ing spirit of the mind, Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Ackermann,
Beitrige zur theol. Wiirdigung u. Abwagung der Begriffe
mveipa, vos, u. Geist, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for
1839, p. 873 sqq.; Biichsenschiitz, La doctrine de l’Esprit
de Dieu selon V’ancien et nouveau testament. Strasb.
1840; Chr. Fr. Fritzsche, De Spiritu Sancto commenta-
tio exegetica et dogmatica, 4 Pts. Hal. 1840 sq., included
in his Nova opuscula academica (Turici, 1846) p. 233 sqq.;
Koahnis, Die Lehre v. heil. Geist. Pt. i. (Halle, 1847) ; an
anonymous publication [by Prince Ludwig Solms Lich,
entitled] Die biblische Bedeutung des Wortes Geist.
(Giessen, 1862); H. H. Wendt, Die Begriffe Fleisch u.
Geist im bibl. Sprachgebrauch. (Gotha, 1878); [Cremer
23
TVEVLATLKOS
in Herzog ed. 2, s. v. Geist des Menschen; G. L. Hahn,
Theol. d. N. Test. i. § 149 sqq.; J. Laidlaw, The Bible
Doctrine of Man. (Cunningham Lects., 7th Series, 1880);
Dickson, St. Paul’s use of the terms Flesh and Spirit.
(Glasgow, 1883); and reff. in B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) and
Dict. of Christ. Biog., as above, 4 a. fina) =
mvevpariKds, ~7, -dv, (mvetpa), spiritual (Vule. spiritalis);
in the N. T. 1. relating to the human spirit, or
rational soul, as the part of man which is akin to God
and serves as his instrument or organ, opp. to 4 Woxn
(see mvevpa, 2): hence rd mvevpartixdv, that which pos-
sesses the nature of the rational soul, opp. to rd Wuxexdy,
1 Co. xv. 46 [cf. W. 592 (551)]; cpa mvevparixdy, the
body which is animated and controlled only by the ra-
tional soul and by means of which the rational life, or
life of the mvedpa, is lived; opp. to capa Wuytxdy, verse
44, 2. belonging to a spirit, or a being higher .
than man but inferior to God (see mveiua, 3c.) : Ta mvev-
parika (i. e. spiritual beings or powers, [R. V. spiritual
hosts], cf. W. 239 (224)) ris moumpias (gen. of quality),
i.e. wicked spirits, Eph. vi. 12. 3. belonging to the
Divine Spirit; a. in reference to things;
emanating from the Divine Spirit, or exhibiting its effects
and so tts character: xdpiopa, Ro. i. 11; edAoyia, Eph. i.
3; copia kat cvveats mvevpatixn (opp. to copia capkikn, 2
Co. i. 12; Wuyexn, Jas. iii. 15), Col. i. 9; ddai, divinely
inspired, and so redolent of the Holy Spirit, Col. iii. 16;
[Eph. v.19 Lcehm. br.]; 6 vdpos (opp. to a odpkxivos man),
Ro. vii. 14; @voiat, tropically, the acts of a life dedicated
to God and approved by him, due to the influence of the
Holy Spirit (tacitly opp. to the sacrifices of an external
worship), 1 Pet. ii. 5; i. q. produced by the sole power of
God himself without natural instrumentality, supernatural,
Bpapa, mépa, mérpa, 1 Co. x. 3, 4, [(cf. ‘Teaching’ etc. 10,
3)]; mvevparixa, thoughts, opinions, precepts, maxims,
ascribable to the Holy Spirit working in the soul, 1 Co.
ii. 13 (on which see ovyxpiva, 1) ; Ta mvevparixd, spiritual
gifts, —of the endowments called yapiopara (see xdpe-
cpa), 1 Co. xii. 1; xiv. 1; univ. the spiritual or heavenly
blessings of the gospel, opp. to ra wapxixd, Ro. xv. 27; [1
Co. ix. 11]. b. in reference to persons; one who
is filled with and governed by the Spirit of God: 1 Co. ii.
15 (cf. 10-13, 16); [iii 1]; xiv. 37; Gal. vi. 1; otkos
mvevpartxés, of a body of Christians (see oékos, 1 b. fin.),
1 Pet. ii. 5. (The word is not found in the O. T. [cf.
W. § 34, 3]. In prof. writ. fr. Aristot. down it means
pertaining to the wind or breath; windy, exposed to the
wind; blowing; [but Soph. Lex. s. v. cites rv. obaia, Cleo-
med. 1, 8p. 46; 10 mv. 7d mdvT@v ToUTe@Y atrvov, Strab. 1,
3, 5p. 78, 10ed. Kramer ; and we find it opp. to cmpartxdy
in Plut. mor. p. 129 c. (de sanitate praecepta 14) ; cf. An-
thol. Pal. 8, 76. 175 ].) *
arvevpatikas, adv., spiritually, (Vulg. spiritaliter) : i. e.
by the aid of the Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. [13 WH mrg.], 14;
in a sense apprehended only by the aid of the Divine
Spirit, i.e. in a hidden or mystical sense, Rev. xi. 8. Its
opposite capxixas in the sense of literally is used by Jus-
tin Mart. dial. c. Tryph. ec. 14 p. 231 4*
WTVEW
avéo; 1 aor, émvevoa; fr. Hom. down; to breathe, to
blow: of the wind, Mt. vii. 25, 27; Lk. xii. 55; Jn. iii.
8; vi. 18; Rev. vii. 1; rg mveovog sc. apg (cf. W. 591
(550); [B. 82 (72)]), Acts xxvii.40. [Comp.: ék-, ev,
Umo- mew. | *
aviyo: impf. érveyov; 1 aor. émua; impf. pass. 3 pers.
plur. émviyovro ; a. to choke, strangle : used of thorns
crowding down the seed sown in a field and hindering
its growth, Mt. xiii. 7 T WH mrg.; in the pass. of per-
ishing by drowning (Xen. anab. 5, 7, 25; cf. Joseph. antt.
10, 7,5), Mk. v. 18. b. to wring one’s neck, throttle,
TA. V. to take one by the throat]: Mt. xviii. 28. [Comp.:
dro-, mt, cup- mriye. | *
mvixtos, -7, -6v, (mviyw), suffocated, strangled: 16 mu-
xrdév, [what is strangled, i.e.] an animal deprived of life
without shedding its blood, Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25.
[(Several times in Athen. and other later writ., chiefly
of cookery; cf. our “ smothered” as a culinary term.) |*
mvoh, -js, i, (mvéw), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for n2wW3;
1. breath, the breath of life: Acts xvii. 25 (Gen. ii. 7;
Prov. xxiv. 12; Sir. xxx. 29 (21); 2 Mace. iii. 313 vii.
9). 2. wind: Acts ii. 2 (Job xxxvii. 9). [Cf.
mvevpa, 1 b.|*
mrodhpys, -es, acc. -pnv, Lchm. ed. ster. Tdf. ed. 7 in Rev.
i. 133; see dpony, (movs, and dpe ‘to join together,” ‘fas-
ten’), reaching to the feet (Aeschyl., Eur., Xen., Plut.,
al.): 6 modnpns (sc. xiv, Ex. xxv. 63 xxviii. 4; xxxv.
8; Ezek. ix.3) or 9 odnpns (se. éc Ons), a garment reaching
to the ankles, coming down to the feet, Rev.i. 13 (Sir. xxvii.
8; xlv. 8; yerdv wodnpys, Xen. Cyr. 6, 4,2; Paus. 5, 19,
6; broddrns mod. Ex. xxviii. 27; €vSuya mod. Sap. xviii.
24; [Joseph. b.j. 5,5, 7]). [Cf. Trench § 1. sub fin.]*
wé0ev, adv., [fr. Hom. down], whence ; a. of
place, from what place: Mt. xv. 33; Lk. xiii. 25, 27; Jn.
lil. 8; vi. 5; viii. 14; ix. 29, 30; xix. 9; Rev. vii. 13;
JSrom what condition, Rev. ii. 5. b. of origin or
source, i.q. from what author or giver: Mt. xiii. [27], 54,
56; xxi. 25; Mk. vi. 2; Lk.xx.7; Jn. ii. 9; Jas. iv. 1;
from what parentage, Jn. vii. 27 sq. (cf. vi. 42), see Meyer
ad loc. c. of cause, how is it that? how can it be that?
Mk. viii. 4; xii. 37; Lk. i. 43; Jn. i. 48 (49); iv. 11.*
ota, -as, 7, [ef. Curtius § 387], herbage, grass: acc. to
some interpreters found in Jas. iv. 14; but qoéa there is
more correctly taken as the fem. of the adj. roios (q. v.),
of what sort. (Jer. ii. 22; Mal. iii. 2; in Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down.) *
movéw, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. éolet, plur. 2 pers. émot-
eire, 3 pers. emolovv; fut. romow; 1 aor. éroinoa, 3 pers.
plur. optat. moujoetay (Lk. vi. 11 RG; ef. W. § 13, 2d.;
[B. 42 (37)]) and moujoaev (ibid. L T Tr WH [see WH.
App. p. 167]); pf. memotnxa; plpf. memouxe without
augm. (Mk. xv. 7; see W. $12, 9; B. 33 (29)); Mid,
pres. motodpar; impf. émorodpny; fut. mounoopat; 1 aor. érot-
noduny; pf. pass. ptep. memounuévos (Heb. xii. 27); fr.
Hom. down; Hebr. nvy; Lat. facio, i.e.
I. to make (Lat. efficio), Lek; a. with the
names of the things made, to produce, construct, form,
fashion, etc.: dvOpaxidv, Jn. xviii. 18; etedva, Rev. xiii.
524
TTOLES®
14; iudria, Acts ix. 39; vaovs, Acts xix. 24; oxyvas, Mt
xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; Lk. ix. 33; rdéous, Acts vii. 43; addy,
Jn. ix. 11, 143; wAdopa, Ro. ix. 20; acc. to some inter-
preters (also W. 256 n.1 (240 n.*)) 68dv wotety, to make a
path, Mk. ii. 23 RG T Tr txt. WH txt. (so that the mean-
ing is, that the disciples of Christ made a path for them-
selves through the standing grain by plucking the heads;
see ddomotéw, fin. If we adopt this interpretation, we
must take the ground that Mark does not give us the
true account of the matter, but has sadly corrupted the
narrative received from others; [those who do accept
it, however, not only lay stress on the almost unvarying
lexical usage, but call attention to the fact that the other
interpretation (see below) finds the leading idea ex-
pressed in the participle—an idiom apparently foreign
to the N. T. (see W. 353 (331)), and to the additional
circumstance that Mk. introduces the phrase after hav-
ing already expressed the idea of ‘going’, and ex-
pressed it by substantially the same word (mapamopeve-
6a) which Matthew (xii. 1) and Luke (vi. 1) employ
and regard as of itself sufficient. On the interpretation
of the pass., the alleged ‘sad corruption,’ etc., see Jas.
Morison, Com. on Mk. 2d ed. p. 57 sq.; on the other side,
Weiss, Marcusevangelium, p. 100]. But see just below,
under c.). to create, to produce: of God, as the author
of all things, ri or twa, Mt. xix.4; Mk. x. 6; Lk. xi. 40;
Heb. i. 2; Acts iv. 24; vii.50; xvii. 24; Rev. xiv. 7; pass.
Heb. xii. 27, (Sap. i. 13; ix. 9; 2 Mace. vii. 28, and often
in the O.T. Apocrypha; for Mwy in Gen. i. 7, 16, 25, ete.;
for 8132 in Gen. i. 21,27; v. 1, etc.; also in Grk. writ.:
yévos avOporav, Hes. op.109, ete.; absol. 6 wordy, the crea-
tor, Plat. Tim. p. 76 c.); here belongs also Heb. iii. 2, on
which see Bleek and Liinemann [(cf. below, 2 c. B.)].
In imitation of the Hebr. nivy (cf. Winer [’s Simonis (4th
ed. 1828)], Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 754; Gesenius, Thes.
ii. p. 1074 sq.) absol. of men, to labor, to do work, Mt. xx.
12 (Ruth ii. 19); i. q. to be operative, exercise activity,
Rey. xiii. 5 R»-telz L T Tr WH [ef. Dan. xi. 28; but al.
render zrotety in both these exx. spend, continue, in ref.
to time; see II. d. below]. b. joined to nouns de-
noting a state or condition, it signifies to be the au-
thor of, to cause: oxavdada, Ro. xvi. 17; eipyynv (to be the
author of harmony), Eph. ii. 15; Jas. iii. 18; émitoracw
(L T Tr WH enicracw], Acts xxiv.12; cvorpopny, Acts
xxiii. 123 mov revi re, to bring, afford, a thing to one, Lk.
i. 68; Acts xv. 3, (so also Grk. writ., as Xen: mem. 3,
10, 8 [cf. L. and S. s.v. A. I. 1a.]). ec. joined to
nouns involving the idea of action (or of something
which is accomplished by action), so as to form a peri-
phrasis for the verb cognate to the substantive, and thus
to express the idea of the verb more forcibly, —in which
species of periphrasis the Grks. more commonly use the
middle (see 3 below, and W. 256 (240); [B. § 135, 5]):
pony Toe mapa tim, Jn. xiv. 23 (whereL T Tr WH zroun-
odpeba; cf. Thuc. 1,131); 68d», to make one’s way, go,
Mk. ii. 23 (where render as follows: they began, as they
went, to pluck the ears; cf. moujoat dddv abrov, Judg. xvii.
8; the Greeks say 680v rroveto Oar, Hdt. 7, 42; see above,
3
TOLew
under a.); méAepnov, Rey. xiii. 5 Rec.*"; with the addi-
tion of perd ruvos (i. q. moAepeiv), Rev. xi. 7; xii. 173 xiii.
: (here Lem. WH Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; xix. 19, (see pera,
4. 2d. p. 403°) ; éxdixnow, Lk. xviii. 7, 8; twi, Acts vii.
24, (Mic. v. 15); évédpay, i. q. evedpedw, to make an am-
bush, lay wait, Acts xxv. 3; ovpBovrroy, i. q. cupBovdevo-
pat, to hold a consultation, deliberate, Mk. iii. 6 [RG
TTrmrg. WH mrg.]; xv. 1 [here TWH mrg. cup@.
€roisdcavtes |; cuvapociay, i. q. ovvdpvus, Acts xxiii. 13
(where L T Tr WH rroinoduevor for Ree. TeTroinkores ; see
in 3 below) ; xpicwv, to execute judgment, Jn. v. 27; Jude
15. To this head may be referred nouns by which the
mode or kind of action is more precisely defined; as
Suvdpers, Sivapuy, moreiv, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58; Mk. vi.5;
Acts xix. 11; tiv e€ovaiay tivds, Rev. xiii. 12; %pyov (a
notable work), épya, of Jesus, Jn. v. 36, vii. 3, 21; x. 25;
xiv. 10, 12; xv. 243; xpdros, Lk. i. 51; onyeta, répara kat
onueia, [Mk. xiii. 22 Tdf.]; Jn. ii. 23; iii.2; iv. 54; vi.
2, 14, 30; vii. 31; ix.16; x.41; xi.47; xii. 18,37; xx.
30; Acts ii. 22; vi. 8; vii. 36; vili.6; xv.12; Rev. xiii.
13,145 xvi. 14; xix. 20; @avydoua, Mt. xxi. 15; ca érolet,
émoinoay, etc., Mk. iii. 8; vi. 30; Lk. ix. 10; in other
phrases it is used of marvellous works, Mt. ix. 28; Lk.
iv. 23; Jn. iv. 45; vii.4; xi. 45,46; xxi. 25 [not Tdf.];
Acts x. 39; xiv. 11; xxi. 19; ete. d. i.y. to make
ready, to prepare: apiorov, Lk. xiv. 12; detmvov, Mk. vi.
21; Lk. xiv. 16; Jn. xii. 2, (Seimvov moveioOa, Xen. Cyr.
3, 3, 25) ; doxnv, Lk. v. 29; xiv. 13, (Gen. xxi. 8) ; ydpous,
Mt. xxii. 2 (ydpov, Tob. viii. 19). e. of things ef-
fected by generative force, to produce, bear, shoot forth:
of trees, vines, grass, etc., kAddous, Mk. iv. 32; xapzovs,
Mt. iii. 8, etc., see kapmros, 1 and 2 a. (Gen. i. 11,12; Aris-
tot. de plant. [1, 4 p. 819", 31]; 2, 10 [829*, 41]; Theophr.
de caus. plant. 4, 11 [(?)]) ; éAalas, Jas. iii. 12 (rév otvor,
of the vine, Joseph. antt. 11, 3, 5); of a fountain yield-
ing water, ibid. f. mod epavt@ tL, to acquire, to
provide a thing for one’s self (i. e. for one’s use) : Badavria,
Lk. xii. 33; idovs, Lk. xvi. 9; without a dative, to gain:
of tradesmen (like our collog. to make something), Mt.
xxv. 16[L Tr WH eképdnoev] ; Lk. xix. 18, (Polyb. 2, 62,
12; pecuniam maximam facere, Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 6). 2a
With additions to the accusative which define or limit
the idea of making: a. Tl ék twos (gen. of mate-
rial), to make a thing owt of something, Jn. ii. 15; ix.
6; Ro. ix. 21; xara mt, according to the pattern of a
thing [see card, II. 3 c.a.], Acts vii.44. with the addi-
tion, to the ace. of the thing, of an adjective with which
the verb so blends that, taken with the adj., it may be
changed into the verb cognate to the adj.: eddetas mor
civ (ras TpiBovs), i. q- edvOvvew, Mt. iii. 3; Mk. i. 3; Lk.
iii. 4; rpiya Neviyy } péAawwar, i. q. Aeveaiver, pedaivery,
Mt. v. 36; add, Acts vii. 19; Heb. xii. 13; Rev. xxi.
5s b. 76 ixavdy tun; see ixavds, a. C. moveiv
twa with an accus. of the predicate, a. to (make i.e.)
render one anything: ria icov tii, Mt. xx. 12; twa
djAov, Mt. xxvi. 73; add, Mt. xii. 16; xxviii. 14; Mk. iii.
12; Jn.v.11, 15: vii. 23; xvi. 2; Ro. ix. 28[RG, Tr mrg.
in br.]; Heb. i. 7; Rev. xii. 15; revas ddseis, to make
525
Trovew
them fit (qualify them) for fishing, Mt. iv. 19; [mody
TavTa yvwora an’ ai@vos, Acts xv. 17sq. GT Tr WH (see
yvwords, and cf. Il. a. below)]; ra duddrepa év, to make
the two different things one, Eph. ii. 14; to change one
thing into another, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi.17; Lk. xix. 46;
Jn. ii. 16; iv.46; 1 Co. vi. 15. B. to (make i.e.) consti-
tute or appoint one anything: twa kvptov, Acts ii. 36; Rev.
v. 10; to this sense some interpreters would refer Heb. iii.
2 also, where after 76 rounoavri adrdv they supply from the
preceding context rév amdaronov kal dpxtepea KtA.; but it
is more correct to take woveiv here in the sense of create
(see 1 a. above) ; tivd, tva with the subjune. to appoint or
ordain one that ete. Mk. iii. 14. y- to (make i. e.)
declare one anything: Jn. v. 18; viii. 53; x. 33; xix. 7,
12; 1 Jn.i.10; v.10; vi with an acc. of the pred. Mt.
xii. 33 (on which see Meyer). d. with adverbs:
kad@s mo tt, Mk. vii. 37 [A. V.do]; riva ¢&w, to put one
Sorth, to lead him out (Germ. hinausthun), Acts v. 34 (Xen.
Cyr. 4, 1, 3). €. mot tiva with an infin. to make one
do a thing, Mk. viii. 25[RGLTr mrg.]; Lk. v.34; Jn.
vi. 10; Acts xvii. 26; or become something, Mk. i. 17;
twa foll. by rod with an infin. to cause one to ete. Acts
iii. 12 [W. 326 (306); B. § 140, 16 6.]; also foll. by tva
[B. § 139, 43; W.§ 44, 8b. fin.], Jn. xi.37; Col. iv. 16;
Rev. xiii. 15 (here T om. WH br. iva); iii. 9; xiii. 12, 16;
[other exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v. 8]. 3. As the active
motetv (see 1 c. above), so also the middle zoreto ar, joined
to accusatives of abstract nouns forms a periphrasis for
the verb cognate to the substantive; and then, while
moveiv signifies to be the author of a thing (to cause, bring
about, as movetv mddepov, eipyynv), movetoOar denotes an
action which pertains in some way to the actor (for
one’s self, among themselves, etc., a8 omovdds, eipnyny tot
eic@ac), or which is done by one with his own resources
({the ‘dynamic’ or ‘subjective’ mid.], as mdAepov trotet-
ca [to make, carry on, war]; cf. Passow s. v. I. 2 a. ii.
p- 974 sq.; [L.and S.s. v. A. II. 4]; Kriiger § 52, 8, 1;
Blume ad Lycurg. p. 55; [W. § 38, 5n.; B. § 135, 5];
although this distinction is not always observed even by
the Greeks): movetcOat povnv, [make our abode], Jn. xiv.
23 LT Tr WH, (see 1 c. above) ; cvvapooiay (Hdian. 7,
4, 7[3ed. Bekk.]; Polyb. 1, 70,6; 6, 13, 4; in the second
instance Polyb. might more fitly have said roteiv), Acts
xxiii. 13 L T Tr WH, see 1 c. above ; Adyov, to compose
a narrative, Acts i. 1; to make account of, regard, (see
Adyos, II. 2 [and cf. I. 3 a.]), Acts xx. 24 [IT Tr WH,
Adyov]; avaBorny (see avaBorn), Acts xxv. 17; é«Bodnv
(see éxBodn, b.), Acts xxvii. 18; komerdv (i.q. kérrouat), Acts
viii. 2 [here L T Tr WH give the active, cf. B. §135,
5n.]3 mopetay (i. q. mopevouar), Lk. xiii. 22 (Xen. Cyr. 5,
2,31; anab. 5, 6, 11; Joseph. vit. §§ 11 and 52; Plut.
de solert. anim. p. 971 e.; 2 Mace. iii. 8; xii. 10); Kowo-
viav, to make a contribution among themselves and from
their own means, Ro. xv. 26; omovdyv, Jude 3 (Hat. 1,
4; 9,8; Plat. lege. 1 p.628e.; Polyb. 1, 46, 2 and often;
Diod. 1, 75; Plut. puer. educ. 7,13; al.); avénoc (i. q-
av&dvopat), to make increase, Eph. iv. 16 ; dénow, denoes,
i. q. déopar, to make supplication, Lk. v. 33; Phil. i. 45
TOLE®
1 Tim. ii. 1; prelav (q. v-) ; penny (q.v- inb.), 2 Pet.i. 15;
mpdvo.ay (i. q. mpovoovpat), to have regard for, care for,
make provision for, rivés, Ro. xiii. 14 (Isocr. paneg. §§ 2
and 136 [pp. 52 and 93 ed. Lange]; Dem. p. 1163, 19;
1429, 8; Polyb. 4, 6,11; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 46; Joseph.
b. j.4, 5, 25 antt. 5, 7,9; c. Ap. 1, 2,3; Ael. v. h. 12, 56;
al.; ef. Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 187) ; xaBapiopdr, Heb. i. 3
(Job vii. 21); BéBarov rroretcOai Tt, i. g. BeBacody, 2 Pet.
i. 10.
II. to do (Lat. ago), i. e. to follow some method in
expressing by deeds the feelings and thoughts of the
mind; a. univ., with adverbs describing the mode
of action: xadés, to act rightly, do well, Mt. xii. 12; 1 Co.
vii. 37, 38; Jas. ii. 19; xadds wovetv foll. by a participle
[ef. B. § 144,15 a.; W.§ 45, 4a.], Acts x. 33; Phil. iv.
14; 2 Pet. i. 19; 3 Jn. 6, (exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given
by Passow s. v. II. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 977°; [L. and S.s. v. B.
I. 3}) 5 xpeioaor, 1 Co. vii. 38; ppovipws, Lk. xvi. 8; otra
(odrws), Mt. v.47 [RG]; xxiv.46; Lk.ix.15; xii. 43;
Jn. xiv. 31; Acts xii. 8; 1 Co. xvi. 1; Jas. ii. 12; as,
xaos, Mt. i. 243 xxi. 6; xxvi.19; xxviii. 15; Lk. ix. 54
[Lf Tr txt. WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.];. 1 Th. v. 11;
dorep, Mt. vi. 2; dpotws, Lk. iii. 11; x.37; aoavtas, Mt.
xx. 5. xara vt, Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. ii. 27; mpds te, to do ac-
cording to a thing [see mpés, I. 3 f.], Lk. xii. 47. with
a ptcp. indicating the mode of acting, dyvoay éroinaa, I
acted [A. V. did it] ignorantly, 1 Tim. i. 13. with the
accus. of a thing, and that the accus. of a pronoun:
with ri indef. 1 Co. x. 31; with ri interrog., Mt. xii. 3;
Mk. ii. 25; xi. 3 [not Lchm. mrg.]; Lk. iii. 12, 14; vi. 2;
x: 25; xvi. 3,45 xviii. 183; Jn. vii. 51 ; xi. 47, etc.; with
a ptup. added, ri moretre Avovres ; i. q. Sia ti AVere; Mk.
xi. 53 rt moseire kAaiovres; Acts xxi. 13; but differently
ri mouoovet krd.; i.e. what must be thought of the con-
duct of those who receive baptism? Will they not seem
to act foolishly? 1 Co. xv. 29. ri mepiocdy, Mt. v. 47;
with the relative 6, Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. vi. 3;
Jn. xiii. 7; 2 Co. xi. 12, ete.; rovro, i. e. what has just
been said, Mt. xiii. 28; Mk. v. 32; Lk. v.63; xxii. 19
[(WH reject the pass.) ]; Ro. vii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; 1 Tim.
iv. 16; Heb. vi. 3; vil. 27, etc.; rodro to be supplied, Lk.
vi. 10; adro rodro, Gal. ii. 10; ratra, Mt. xxiii. 23; Gal.
v.17; 2 Pet. i. 10; [ratra foll. by a pred. adj. Acts xv.
17sq. GT Tr WH (ace. to one construction; cf. R. V.
mrg., see I. 2 c. a. above, and cf. yywards)]; adra, Ro. ii. 3;
Gal. iii. 10. With nouns which denote a command,
or some rule of action, moe signifies to carry out, to
execute; as, tov vdpoy, in class. Grk. to make a law, Lat.
legem ferre, of legislators; but in bibl. Grk. to do the
law, meet its demands, leg? satisfacere, Jn. vii. 19; Gal.
v. 8, (Josh. xxii. 5; 1 Chron. xxii. 12; TAI ny, 2
Chron. xiv. 3 (4)); ra rod vdpov, the things which the law
commands, Ro. ii. 14; ras évroAds, Mt. v.19; 1 Jn. v.2 L
T Tr WH; Rev. xxii. 14 RG; 76 Oédnua rod Geod, Mt. vii.
21; xii. 50; Mk. iii. 35; Jn. iv. 34; vi. 38; vii. 17; ix.31;
Eph. vi. 6; Heb. xiii. 21; ra OeAnpara tis capxds, Eph. ii.
3; ras émbupias tw6s, Jn. viii. 44; rHy yvouny tiw6s, Rev.
xvii. 17; pilav yvopunv, to follow one and the same mind
526
TTOLE®
(purpose) in acting, ibid. RG T TrWH,; rév Adyow row
od, Lk. viii. 21; rovs Adyous tivds, Mt. vii. 24, 26; Lk. vi.
47,49; dor 6 or 4, 71 etc. A€yee Tus, Mt. xxiii. 3; Lk. vi.
46; Jn.ii.5; Acts xxi. 23; 4 rapayyeAAer tes, 2 Th. iii. 45
tiv mpobeowv, Eph. iii. 11; ra diarax6évra, Lk. xvii. 10 (ro
mpoaraxGev, Soph. Phil. 1010) ; 6 airet ris, Jn. xiv. 13 sq.5
Eph. iii. 20; 6 évréAderai tus, Jn. xv. 14; ta €6n, Acts
xvi. 21. With nouns describing a plan or course of
action, to perform, accomplish : €pya, Tit. ili. 5; movewv
Ta épya rivos, to do the same works as another, Jn. viii.
39,41; ra mpara épya, Rev. ii. 5; ra épya tov Oeod, de-
livered by God to be performed, Jn. x. 37sq.; 1d Epyor,
work committed to me by God, Jn. xvii. 4; ro épyop
evayyedtorod, to perform what the relations and duties
of an evangelist demand, 2 Tim. iv. 5; ¢pyov tt, to com-
mit an evil deed, 1 Co. v. 2[T WH Trmrg. mpd£éas];
plur. 3 Jn. 10; dyaOdv, to do good, Mt. xix. 16; [Mk. iii.
4 Tdf.]; 1 Pet. iii. 11; 1d dyaOov, Ro. xiii. 3; 6 édv te
ayaOov, Eph. vi. 8; ra ayaOa, Jn. v. 29; 1d xadov, Ro. vii.
21; 2Co. xiii. 7; Gal. vi. 9; Jas. iv. 17; ra dpeora To Oe,
Jn. viii. 29; 1d dpeordv évamov tov Geov, Heb. xiii. 21;
1 Jn. iii. 22; ri mucrov, to perform something worthy of
a Christian [see mords, fin.], 3 Jn. 5; ryv dixatoovynp,
Mt. vi. 1 (for Rec. eAenuoodynv) ; 1 In. ii. 29; iii. 7, 10
{not Lehm.; Rey. xxii. 11 GLT Tr WH]; ry ddndecav
(to act uprightly ; see adjdera, I. 2 c.), Jn. iii. 21; 1 Jn.
i. 6; xpnotdérnra, Ro. iii. 12; €Aeos, to show one’s self
merciful, Jas. ii. 13; with pera twos added (see €Xeos,
-ovs, 1 and 2 b.), Lk. i. 72; x. 37; €AXenpoovyny, Mt. vi. 2
sq.; plur., Acts ix. 36; x. 2 (see €Aenuoovvn, 1 and 2). to
commit : tiv duapriay, Jn. viii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 4, 8; duap-
tiav, 2Co. xi.7; Jas. v.15; 1 Pet. ii. 22; 1 Jn. iii. 9; ray
avopiav, Mt. xiii. 41; auaprnua, 1 Co. vi. 18; Ta py Kabn-
xovta, Ro. i. 28 ; 6 ov« e€eorw, Mt. xii. 2; Mk. ii. 24; déa
mrnyov, Lk. xii. 48; BdeAvypa, Rev. xxi. 27; hdvov, Mk.
Xv. 7; Weddos, Rev. xxi. 27; xxii. 15; xaxdv, Mt. xxvii.
23; Mk. xv. 14; Lk. xxiii. 22; 2 Co. xiii. 7; 76 kaxéy, Ro.
xiii. 4; plur. caxd, 1 Pet. iii. 12 ; ra kaka, Ro. iii. 8. b.
movety Te With the case of a person added; a. w. an
accus. of the person: ti rouow Incotv; what shall I
do unto Jesus? Mt. xxvii. 22; Mk. xv. 12; cf. W. 222
(208); [B.§131,6; Kiihner § 411, 5]; Matthiae § 415,
la. .; also with an adverb, ed od teva, to do welli. e.
show one’s self good (kind) to one [see e@, sub fin.], Mk.
xiv. 7R G; also cadés rod, Mt. v. 44 Ree. B. w.
a dative of the person, to do (a thing) unto one (to his
advantage or disadvantage), rarely so in Grk. writ. [ef.
W. and B u.s.; Kiihner u.s. Anm. 6]: Mt. vii. 12; xviii.
35; xx. 32; xxi. 40; xxv. 40,45; Mk. v.19, 20; x. 51;
Lk. i. 49; vi. 11; viii. 39; xviii.41; xx.15; Jn.ix. 26;
xii. 16; xiii, 12; Acts iv. 16; also with an adverb:
xabas, Mk. xv. 8; Lk. vi. 31; Jn. xiii. 15; dpolws, Lk. vi.
315 ovrws, Lk. i. 25; ii. 48; dScadbrws, Mt. xxi. 36; kadds
movety tum, Lk. vi. 27; ed, Mk. xiv. 7 LL Tr WH; xaxa rem,
to do evil to one, Acts ix. 13; ri, what (sc. xaxév), Heb. xiii.
6 [ace. to punctuation of GL T Tr WH}; ratra ravra, all
these evils, Jn. xv. 21 RG Lmrg.; oteiy run xara Ta ad-
ta [L T Tr WH (Ree. radra)], in the same manner, Lk.
TOUMa
vi. 23, 26. Y- moveiy 7. with the more remote object
added by means of a preposition: & ru (Germ. an
einem), to do to one, Mt. xvii. 12; Lk. xxiii. 31 {here A. V.
‘in the green tree,’ etc.]; also ets twa, unto one, Jn. xv.
21 Ltxt.T Tr WH. c. God is said rouqoat tu perd
twos, when present with and aiding [see perd, I. 2 b. B.],
Acts xiv. 27; xv. 4. d. with designations of time
[B. § 131, 1], to pass, spend: xpdvov, Acts xv. 33; xviii.
23; wnvas rpeis, Acts xx. 3; vux Onpepor, 2 Co. xi. 253 évav-
Tov or émavrov éva, Jas. iv. 13, (Tob. x. 7; Joseph. antt. 6,
1,4 fin.; Stallbaum on Plato, Phileb. p. 50 ¢., gives exx.
fr. Grk. writ. [and reff. ; cf. also Soph. Lex. s. v. 9]; in the
same sense NWy in Keccl. vi. 12 (vii. 1); and the Lat.
facere: Cic. ad Att. 5,20 Apameae quinque dies morati,
---Iconii decem fecimus; Seneca, epp. 66 [I. 7, ep. 4, ed.
Haase], quamvis autem paucissimos una fecerimus dies) ;
some interpreters bring in here also Mt. xx. 12 and Rey.
xiii. 5 Rec.»te. LT Tr WH; but on these pass. see
I. 1 a. above. e. like the Lat. agoi. q. to celebrate,
keep, with the accus. of a noun designating a feast: ré
macxa, Mt. xxvi. 18 (Josh. v.10; but in Heb. xi. 28 the
language denotes to make ready, and so at the same time
to institute, the celebration of the passover; Germ. ver-
anstalten) ; thy éoptnv, Acts xviii. 21 Rec. feaiaxcs
(Lat. perficio) to perform: as opposed to déyew, Mt. xxiii.
3; to Oédew, 2 Co. viii. 10 sq.; to a promise, 1 Th. v. 24.
[Comp.: mept-, mpoo- rove. |
[Syn. wovety, tpdooecy: roughly speaking, +. may be
said to answer to the Lat. facere or the English do, zp. to
agere or Eng. practise ; . to designate performance, mp. in-
tended, earnest, habitual, performance; 7. to denote merely
productive action, wp. definitely directed action; 7. to point
to an actual result, rp. to the scope and character of the result.
“Tn Attic in certain connections the difference between them
is great, in others hardly perceptible” (Schmidt) ; see his
Syn. ch. 23, esp. §11; cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xevi.; Green,
“Crit. Note’ on Jn. v. 29; (cf. mpdoow, init. and 2). The
words are associated in Jn. ili. 20, 21; v. 29; Acts xxvi. 9,
10; Bo. i. 82; ii. 3; vii. 15 sqq.; xiii. 4, etc.]
woinpa, -ros, 76, (movew), that which has been made ;
awork: of the works of God as creator, Ro. i. 20; those
xricbevres by God emi epyos ayabois are spoken of as
moinua tod Obeod [A.V. his workmanship], Epb. ii. 10.
(Hadt., Plat., al.; Sept. chiefly for nyn.)*
motos, -ews, 7, (morew) ; 1. a making (Hat. 3,
22; Thuc. 3,2; Plat., Dem., al.; Sept. several times for
nwyn). 2. a doing or performing: év Th mouoe
avtod [in his doing, i. e.] in the obedience he renders to
the law, Jas. i. 25; add Sir. xix. 20 (18).*
TOUNTHS, -00, 6, (Trovew) ; 1. amaker, producer, au-
thor, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a doer, performer, (Vulg.
factor): rod vduov, one who obeys or fulfils the law,
Ro. ii. 13; Jas. iv. 11; 1 Mace. ii. 67, (see movéw, II. a.) ;
épyov, Jas. i. 25; Adyou, Jas. i. 22, 23. 3. a poet:
Acts xvii. 28 ([Hdt. 2, 53, etc.], Aristoph., Xen., Plat.,
Plut., al.).*
mouxthos, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, various i. e. a.
of divers colors, variegated : Sept. b. i. q. of divers
sorts: Mt. iv. 24; Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv. 40; 2 Tim. iii. 6; Tit.
52
Ld
t TONE LEW
iii. 3; Heb. ii. 4; xiii. 9; Jas.i.2; 1 Pet.i. 6; iv. 10,
[(A. V.in the last two exx. manifold) ].*
totpaivw ; fut. momave; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. mot-
pavare (1 Pet. v.2); (aoupnv, q. v.); fr. Hom. down; Sept.
for Mp7; to feed, to tend a flock, keep sheep ; a. prop.:
Lk. xvii. 7; motyyny, 1 Co. ix. 7. b. trop. a.
to rule, govern: of rulers, rwa, Mt. ii. 6; Rev. ii. 27; xii.
5; xix. 15,(2S.v.2; Mic. v. 6 (5); vii. 14, ete.; [cf. W.
17]), (see wouuny, b. fin.); of the overseers (pastors) of
the church, Jn. xxi. 16; Acts xx. 28; 1 Pet. v. 2. B.
to furnish pasturage or food ; to nourish: éavrév, to cher-
ish one’s body, to serve the body, Jude 12; to supply
the requisites for the soul’s needs [R. V. shall be their
shepherd}, Rev. vii. 17. [Syn. see Béoxo, fin.]*
Touty, -evos, 6, (akin to the noun zroia, q. v-; [or fr. r.
meaning ‘to protect’; cf. Curtius §372; Fick i. 132]),
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for ny, a herdsman, esp. a shep-
herd ; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 836; xxv. 32; xxvi. $1;
Mk. vi. 34; xiv. 27; Lk. ii. 8,15, 18, 20; Jn. x. 2,12; in
the parable, he to whose care and control others have
committed themselves, and whose precepts they follow,
Ail oe TANS TEL. b. metaph. the presiding officer, mana-
ger, director, of any assembly: so of Christ the Head of
the church, Jn. x. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 25; Heb. xiii. 20, (of the
Jewish Messiah, Ezek. xxxiv. 23); of the overseers of
the Christian assemblies [A. V. pastors], Eph.iv.11; cf.
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 350
sq.; [ Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, p.123 sq.]. (Of
kings and princes we find zouéves Kady in Hom. and
Hes.) *
trotuvn, -ns, 7, (contr. fr. rouyevn ; see rotunv), [fr. Hom.
(Od. 9, 122) on], a flock (esp.) of sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31;
Lk. ii. 8; 1 Co. ix. 7; trop. [of Christ’s flock i.e.] the body
of those who follow Jesus as their guide and keeper, Jn.
XoplOen
mrotuviov, -ov, 7d, (contr. fr. mousemoy, i. q. moipyn, see
motuny; {on the accent cf. W. 52; Chandler § 343 b.]),
a flock (esp.) of sheep: so of a group of Christ’s disci-
ples, Lk. xii. 32; of bodies of Christians (churches) pre-
sided over by elders [cf. reff. s. v. rouuny, b.], Acts xx.
28, 29; 1 Pet. v. 3; with a possessive gen. added, rob:
6cod, 1 Pet. v. 2, as in Jer. xiii. 17; rod Xpiorov, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 16, 1; 44, 3; 54,2; 57,2. (Hdt., Soph.,
Eur., Plat., Leian., al.; Sept. chiefly for 173) and jx¥.)*
motos, -a, -ov, (interrog. pron., corresponding to the rel.
otos and the demonstr. rotos), [fr. Hom. down], of what
sort or nature (Lat. qualis) : absol. neutr. plur. in a di-
rect question, Lk. xxiv. 19; with substantives, in direct.
questions: Mt. xix. 18; xxi. 23; xxii. 36; Mk. xi. 28;
Lk. vi. 32-34; Jn. x. 32; Actsiv. 7; vii. 49; Ro. iii. 27;
1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. iv. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 20; in indirect dis-
course: Mt. xxi. 24, 27; xxiv. 43; Mk. xi. 29, 33; Lk. xii.
39; Jn. xii. 33; xviii. 32; xxi.19; Acts xxiii. 34; Rev.
iii. 3; eds riva 4 rotoy Katpdv, 1 Pet. i. 11; motas (Rec. da
motas) sc. 6500, Lk. v.19; cf. W. § 30, 11; [(also § 64, 5);
B. §§ 123, 8; 132, 26; cf. Tob. x. 7].
modepew, -3; fut. rodkeunow; 1 aor. émodcunoa; (ode
nos); [fr. Soph. and Hdt. down]; Sept. chiefly for 01735
TONEMLOS
to war, carry on war; to fight: Rev. xix. 11; perd twos
(on which constr. see perd, I. 2 d. p. 403°), Rev. ii. 16;
xii. 7 (where Rec. card; [cf. on this vs. B. § 140, 14 and
s. v. perd as above]); xiii. 4; xvii. 14; i-q. to wrangle,
quarrel, Jas. iv. 2.*
aéAepos, -ov, 6, (fr. IIEAQ, modew, to turn, to range
about, whence Lat. pello, bellum; [but cf. Fick i. 671 ;
Vaniéek 513]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for mon aaa? |
prop. a. war: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 7; Lk. xiv.
31; xxi.9; Heb. xi. 34; in imitation of the Hebr. nvy
Mom foll. by nx or oy (Gen. xiv. 2; Deut. xx. 12, 20),
wor: mroveiv perd twos, Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii. 7 [here Lom.
WH Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; xix. 19, [cf. werd, I. 2d.]. b.
a fight, a battle, [more precisely payn; “in Hom. (where
Il. 7, 174 it is used even of single combat) and Hes. the
sense of battle prevails; in Attic that of war” (L. and S.
s.v.); ef. Trench $]xxxvi. and (in partial modification)
Schmidt ch. 138, 5 and 6]: 1 Co. xiv.8; Heb. xi. 34; Rev.
1X. (9 sexs XVIn ae XXen Oe 2. a dispute, strife,
quarrel: médepou cai paxa, Jas. iv. 1 (Soph. El. 219;
Plat. Phaedo p. 66 c.).*
mOAts, -ews, 7, (wéAopat, to dwell [or rather denoting
originally ‘fulness,’ ‘throng’; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs,
etc.; cf. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanitek p. 499; (oth-
erwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for
\y, besides for 71D, WW (gate), etc., a city; a.
univ.: Mt. ii. 23; Mk.i.45; Lk.iv. 29; Jn. xi.54; Acts
v. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T.;
kata tyv modu, through the city [A. V. in; see xard, II.
ta.], Acts xxiv. 12; xara modu, kara moXets, see xara, II.
3 a. a. p. 328°; opp. to kdpar, Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Lk. viii.
1; xiii. 22; to edpar Kat dypoi, Mk. vi. 56; 4 idia mds,
see tdtos, 1 b. p. 297*; médts with the gen. of a pers.
one’s native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; Jn. i.44 (45) 5 or the city in
which one lives, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. iv. 29; x. 11; Acts xvi.
20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of
the temple erected there, mdAts tod peyddov Bacidéos,
i. e. in which the great King of Israel, Jehovah, has his
abode, Mt. v. 35; Ps. xlvii. (xlviii.) 2, cf. Tob. xiii. 15;
also dyla médus (see dytos, 1 a. p. 7°) and 4 jyamnpévn, the
beloved of God, Rev. xx. 9. with the gen. of a gentile
noun: Aauacknydv, 2 Co. xi. 32; "Edeciav, Acts xix.
353 rav lovdaiwv, Lk. xxiii. 51; rod "Iopand, Mt. x. 23;
Sapaperrav, Mt. x. 5; with the gen. of a region: ris
YadtAatas, Lk. i. 26; iv. 31; “IovSa, of the tribe of Judah,
Lk. i. 39; Avuxaovias, Acts xiv. 6; Kudcxias, Acts xxi. 39;
THs Sapzapetas, Jn. iv. 5; Acts viii. 5. As in class. Grk.
the proper name of the city is added, —either in the
nom. case, as moAts "Ilommn, Acts xi. 53 or in the gen., as
mods Soddpav, Toudppas, 2 Pet. ii. 6; Ovareipwr, Acts
xvi. 14. b. used of the heavenly Jerusalem (see
IepoodAupa, 2), i. e. a. the abode of the blessed, in
heaven: Heb. xi. 10,16; with deod Cévros added, Heb.
xii. 22; ) weAANovoa wéds, Heb. xiii. 14. 8. in the
visions of the Apocalypse it is used of the visible capital
of the heavenly kingdom, to come down to earth after
the renovation of the world: Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 14 sqq.;
xxii. 145 9 modus 9 dyia, Rev. xxii. 19; with ‘Iepovoadihp
528
TWOATNS
kan added, Rev. xxi. 2. c. médts by meton. for
the inhabitants: Mt. viii. 34; Acts xiv. 21; maoa 7 76s,
Mt. xxi. 10; Acts xiii. 44; 9 modus 6An, Mk. i. 33; Acts
xxi. 30; mddus peptobeioa kad’ éaurns, Mt. xii. 25.
mo\Tapxns, -ov, 6, (i.e. 6 dpywy Tav TodiTay; See éxa-
rovrdpxns), a ruler of a city or citizens: Acts xvii. 6, 8.
(Boeckh, Corp. inserr. Graec. ii. p. 52 sq. no. 1967 [ef.
Boeckh’s note, and Tdf. Proleg. p. 86 note?]; in Grk.
writ. moAlapyos Was more common.) *
wodutela, -as, 7, (7rokuTeEV@) ; 1. the administration
of civil affairs (Xen. mem. 3, 9,15; Arstph., Aeschin.,
Dem., [al.]). 2. astate, commonwealth, (2 Mace. iv.
11; viii. 17; xiii. 14; Xen., Plat., Thuc., [al.]): with
a gen. of the possessor, rod "Iopand, spoken of the theo-
cratic or divine commonwealth, Eph. ii, 12. 3.
citizenship, the rights of a citizen, [some make this sense
the primary one]: Acts xxii. 28 (3 Macc. iii. 21,23; Hdt.
9,34; Xen. Hell. 1,1, 26; 1, 2,10; [4, 4,6, etc.]; Dem.,
Polyb., Diod., Joseph., al.).*
aroXlrevpa, -ros, Td, (rodcrev@), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat.
down; 1. the administration of civil affairs or of a
commonwealth [R. VY. txt. (Phil. as below) citizenship].
2. the constitution of a commonwealth, form of govern-
ment and the laws by which it is administered. 3. a
state, commonwealth [so R. V. mrg.]: jpadv, the common-
wealth whose citizens we are (see méArs, b.), Phil. iii. 20,
cf. Meyer and Wiesinger ad loc. ; of Christians it is said
émt ys SiatpiBovow, add ev otpav@ modirevovrat, Epist.
ad Diogn. c.5; (trav copay yuxat) marpida pév tov ovpa-
yoy xapov, ev @ modurevovrat, Eevov Sé Tov mepiyesov ev @
mapo@knoav vouifovaat, Philo de confus. ling. § 17; [yuvatkes
++ 7@ THs aperns eyyeypaypévat modirevpart, de agricult.
§17fin. Cf. esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. ¢.].*
modutevw: Mid. [cf. W. 260 (244)], pres. impv. 2 pers.
plur. modurevdeoOe; pf. memoAirevpat; (moAitns) 3 1.
to be a citizen (Thuc., Xen., Lys., Polyb., al.). 2.
to administer civil affairs, manage the state, (Thuc.,
Xen.). 3. to make or create a citizen (Diod. 11. 72) ;
Middle a. tobe a citizen; so in the passages fr.
Philo and the Ep. ad Diogn. cited in roXirevpa, 3. b.
to behave as a citizen; to avail one’s self of or recognize
the laws; so fr. Thuc. down; in Hellenist. writ. to con-
duct one’s self as pledged to some law of life: d&iws rod
evayyeXiov, Phil. i. 27 [R.V. txt. let your manner of life
be worthy of etc.]; a&. rod Xprorod, Polyc. ad Philip. 5, 2;
a&. rod Geov, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 13 dciws, ibid. 6, 1;
card 7d KaOjKov TS Xptors, ibid. 3,4; pera PdBov k. dyd-
ms, ibid. 51, 2; évvduos, Justin. dial. c. Tr. c. 67; npEdunv
modreverOa TH Papicaiwy aipecet kataxodovdav, Joseph.
vit. 2; other phrases are cited by Grimm on 2 Mace. vi.
1}; r@ Oe, to live in accordance with the laws of God,
Acts xxiii. 1 [A. V. I have lived ete.].*
moXlrns, -ov, 6, (rddes), fr. Hom. down, a citizen;
i.e. a. the inhabitant of any city or country: médews.
Acts xxi. 39; ris xapas éexeivms, Lk. xv. 15. b. the
associate of another in citizenship, i. e. a fellow-citizen,
fellow-countryman, (Plat. apol. p. 37 ¢.3 al.): with the
gen. of a person, Lk. xix. 14; Heb. viii. 11 (where Rec.
TONANaKLS
has rév mAngiov) fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34, where it is
used for yy, as in Prov. xi. 9, 12; xxiv. 43 (28).*
modddxts, (fr. modus, moAdd), adv., [fr. Hom. down],
often, frequently : Mt. xvii. 15; Mk. v.43 ix. 22; Jn. xviii.
2; Acts xxvi. 11; Ro.i.13; xv.22L Tr mrg.; 2 Co. viii.
22; xi. 23, 26sq.; Phil. iii. 18; 2 Tim. i.16; Heb. vi. 7;
ix. 25 sq.; x. 11.*
TohdatAaciwy, -ov, gen. -ovos, (wodvs), manifold, much
more: Mt. xix. 29 LT Tr WH; Lk. xviii. 30. (Polyb.,
Plut., al.; [cf. B. 30 (27)].)*
Tohv-etomhayXvos, -ov, (roAv and edondayyvos), very
tender-hearted, extremely full of pity: so a few minuse.
Mss. in Jas. v. 11, where al. modvomAayxvos,q.v. (Eccles.
and Byzant. writ.) *
todvdoyla, -as, 7, (moAvAdyos), much speaking, (Plaut.,
Vulg., multiloquium) : Mt. vi. 7. (Prov.x.19; Xen. Cyr.
1, 4,3; Plat. legg. 1 p. 641 e.; Aristot. polit. 4, 10 [p.
1295*, 2]; Plut. educ. puer. 8, 10.) *
ToAvpepas, (rodvpepys), by many portions : joined with
modutpérws, at many times (Vulg. multifariam [or -rie]),
and in many ways, Heb. i.1. (Joseph. antt. 8, 3, 9 [var. ;
Plut. mor. p. 537 d., i.e. de invid. et od. 5]; ob8€v det rijs
moAvpepovs TavTNs Kal ToduTpdmov povons TE Kat dppovias,
Max. Tyr. diss. 37 p. 363; [ef. W. 463 (481) ].) *
troAv-trolktdos, -ov, (7oAvs and zrotkiAos) 5 1. much-
variegated ; marked with a great variety of colors : of cloth
or a painting; ddpea, Eur. Iph. T. 1149; orépavov modv-
moikiov avOcov, Kubul. ap Athen. 15 p. 679 d. Zs
much varied, manifold: copia rod Geov, manifesting itself
in a great variety of forms, Eph. iii. 10; Theophil. ad
Autol. 1, 6; dpyn, Orac. Sibyll. 8, 120; Adyos, Orph. hymn.
61, 4, and by other writ. with other nouns.*
moAvs, moAAn (fr. an older form zoAdos, found in Hom.,
Hes., Pind.), woAv; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for
39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc.,
many, numerous, great: aptOyos, Acts xi. 21; Aads, Acts
XViii. 10; dyAos, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH];
Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.;
mAnOos, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; i. q.
abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], xapros, Jn. xii.
24; xv. 5,8; Oepiopds, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt.
ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; yq, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; xépros, Jn.
vi. 10; otvos, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. woAXot reA@var, Mt. ix.
10; Mk. ii. 15; aodAot mpopara, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24;
aooi, 1 Co. i. 26; marépes, 1 Co. iv. 15; duvdpers, Mt. vii.
22; xiii. 58, etc.; dyAot, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but
here L TWH om. Trbr. éy.J; Lk. v. 15, ete.; Sarda,
Mk.i. 34; and in many other exx.; with participles used
substantively, Mt. viii. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 9, etc.; with the
article prefixed: ai dyapriat aris ai woddal, her sins
which are many, Lk. vii. 47; ra woAAa ypappara, the great
learning with which I see that you are furnished, Acts
xxvi. 24; 6 modds 3xXos, the great multitude of common
people present, Mk. xii. 37 [cf. 6 dy. mods, In. xii. 9 T
Tr mrg. WH; see dxXos, 1]. Plur. masc. oAXoi, absol.
and without the art., many, a large part of mankind:
modXoi simply, Mt. vii. 13, 22; xx. 28; xxvi. 28; Mk. ii. 2;
iii. 10; x. 45; xiv. 24; Lk.i.1, 14; Heb. ix. 28, and very
529
ToOAUS
often; opp. to ddéyor, Mt. xx. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the
cl.]; €repot woddoi, Acts xv. 35; GXat moAAal, Mk. xv. 41;
€repat troAAai, Lk. viii. 3; moddoi foll. by a partit. gen.,
as tov Papcaiwr, Mt. iii. 7; add, Lk. i. 16; Jn. xii. 11;
Acts iv. 4; xiii. 43; 2 Co. xii. 21; Rev. viii. 11, etc.; foll.
by é« with a gen. of class, as moAXol ek rév pabnraev adrod,
Jn. vi. 60; add, vii. 31,40; x. 20; xi.19, 45; Acts xvii.
12; moddot &k ths modews, Jn. iv. 39. with the article
prefixed, of moddoi, the many [cf. W. 110 (105)]: those
contrasted with 6 eis (i. e. both with Adam and with
Christ), acc. to the context equiv. to the rest of man-
kind, Ro. v. 15,19, cf. 12, 18; we the (i.e. who are) many,
Ro. xii. 5; 1 Co. x.17; the many whom ye know, 2 Co.
ii. 17; the many i. e. the most part, the majority, Mt. xxiv.
1251 .Co..x. 33: b. with nouns denoting an action, an
emotion, a state, which can be said to have as it were
measure, weight, force, intensity, size, continuance, or
repetition, much i. q. great, strong, intense, large: ayann,
Eph. ii. 4; ddvvn,1 Tim. vi. 10; Opqvos, chavOpos, dduppos,
Mt. ii. 18; yapa[ Rec." yapis], Philem. 7; émOvpia, 1 Th. ii.
17; paxpoOvpia, Ro. ix. 22; €deos, 1 Pet. i.3; yoyyuopos,
Jn. vii. 12; rpdpos, 1 Co. ii. 3; mévos [Rec. CyAos], Col. iv.
13; dyov, 1 Th. ii. 2; aOAnots, Heb. x. 32 ; Oris, 2 Co. ii.
4;1 Th. i. 6; cavynous, 2 Co. vii. 4; memotOnats, 2 Co. viii.
22; mAnpopopia, 1 Th. i. 5; mappnoia, 2 Co. iii. 12; vii.
4; 1 Tim. iii. 13; Philem. 8; mapaxAnots, 2 Co. viii. 4 ;
ovtnrnots [T WH Tr txt. (nrqois], Acts xv. 7; xxviii. 29
[Rec.]; ordois, Acts xxiii. 10; dowria, Acts xxvii. 21;
Bia, Acts xxiv.7 [Rec.]; Ssaxovia, Lk. x. 40; ovyn, deep
silence, Acts xxi. 40 (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 25); pavracia, Acts
xxv. 23; Svvapis cai Sofa, Mt. xxiv. 30; Lk. xxi. 27; pu-
oOos, Mt. v.12; Lk. vi. 23, 35; eipnyn, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ;
mept ob mrodvs piv 6 Adyos, about which [but see Adyos, I. 3
a.] we have much (in readiness) to say, Heb. v. 11 (aroAdy
Adyov troveioOat rrepi twos, Plat. Phaedo p.115d.; cf. Ast,
Lex. Plat. iii. p.148). c. of time, much, long : mov
xpovov, Jn. v. 6; pera xpovoy modvy, Mt. xxv. 19; dpa
moAAy, much time (i. e. a large part of the day) is spent
[see Spa, 2], Mk. vi. 35; Spas moddjs yevoyerns [Tdf.
ywou.], of a late hour of the day, ibid. (so woAAns Spas,
Polyb. 5, 8,3; émt modAjv dpay, Joseph. antt. 8,4, 4; éud-
xovro ... Gxpt modAjs Spas, Dion. Hal. 2, 54); modAdois
xpsvois, for a long time, Lk. viii. 29 (ov modAdA@ xpdve,
Hdian. 1, 6, 24 [8 ed. Bekk.]; xpdvors woddois vorepov,
Plut. Thes. 6; [see ypdvos, sub fin.]) ; es ry moddd, Lk.
xii. 19; (é« or) dmd moAdGy eray, Acts xxiv. 10; Ro. xv.
23 [here WH Tr txt. dad ixavav ér.]; émt modu, (for) a
long time, Acts xxviii. 6; per’ od modv, not long after
[see perd, II. 2 b.], Acts xxvii. 14. d. Neut. sing.
moAv, much, substantively, i. q. many things: Lk. xii. 48;
much, adverbially, of the mode and degree of an action:
nydanoe, Lk. vii. 47; mravaode, Mk. xii. 27; sc. apehei,
Ro. iii. 2. awoA\ov as agen. of price (fr. Hom. down ; cf.
Passow s. v. IV. b. vol. ii. p. 1013°5; [ef. W. 206 (194)]):
mpabjva, for much, Mt. xxvi. 9. év modA@, in (adminis
tering) much (i. e. many things), Lk. xvi. 10; with great
labor, great effort, Acts xxvi. 29 (where LT Tr WH ep
peyddrw [see peéyas, 1 a. y.]). with a compar. [cf. W.
TodvaT AMY XVOS
§ 35, 1]: mod omovdadrepov, 2 Co. viii. 22 (in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down); 7oAA@ mAcious, many more, Jn. iv. 41;
moAAG [or roAd] paGddov, see wadAov, 1 a.sq. with the
article, rd mov, Germ. das Viele (opp. to rd édiyov), 2
Co. viii. 15 [cf. B. 395 (338); W. 589 (548)]. Plural
moAAa a. many things; as, didacKew, Aadeiv, Mt.
xiii. 3; Mk. iv. 2; vi. 34; Jn. viii. 26; xiv. 30; madeiv, Mt.
xvi. 21; Mk. v. 26; ix.12; Lk. ix. 22, etc., and often in
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. Ol. 13, 90 down; zroteiv, Mk. vi. 20
(T Tr mrg. WH dmopsiv]; mpafa, Acts xxvi. 9; add as
other exx., Mt. xxv. 21, 23; Mk. xii. 41; xv. 3; Jn. xvi.
12; 2Co. viii. 22; 2Jn.12; 3Jn.13; moAAa kai adda, Jn.
xx. 80. [On the Grk. (and Lat.) usage which treats the
notion of multitude not as something external to a thing
and consisting merely in a comparison of it with other
things, but as an attribute inhering in the thing itself,
and hence capable of being co-ordinated with another
attributive word by means of «ai (q. v. I. 3), see Kuhner
§ 523, 1 (or on Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24) ; Baumlein, Partikeln,
p- 146; Kriiger §69, 32,3; Lod. Paral. p.60; Herm. ad
Vig. p. 835; W.§ 59, 3 fin.; B. 362sq. (311). Cf. Passow
s: vol. 3.4.3) Loand S.s-v. IL 2.] B. adverbially
[cf. W. 463 (432); B.§ 128, 2], much: Mk. [vi. 20 T Tr
mrg. (?) WH (see dmopéw) |; ix. 26; Ro. xvi. 6, 12 [L br.
the cl.]; in many ways, Jas. iii. 2; with many words,
[R. V. much], with verbs of saying; as, knpvoceww, mapa-
kaneiv, etc., Mk. i. 45; iii. 12; v. 10, 23, 43; 1 Co. xvi.
12; many times, often, repeatedly: Mt. ix. 14 [RG Tr
WH mrg.] (and often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; cf.
Passow s. v. V. 1 a. vol. ii. p. 1013°; [L. and S. III. a.];
Stallbaum on Plat. Phaedo p. 61 c.); with the art. ra
mona, for the most part, [R. V. these many times] (Vule.
plurimum), Ro. xv. 22 [L. Tr mrg. wodAdkis | (exx. fr. Grk.
writ. are given by Passow l. c., [L. and S. 1. ¢.], and by
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 281).
ToAVETAAYX Vos, -ov, (ros, and omddyxvov q. V.), full of
pity, very kind: Jas. v.11; Hebr. OM 37, in the Sept.
(Theod. Stud. p. 615.) *
modvTeAts, -€s, (moAvs, and redos cost), [from Hat.
down], precious ; a. requiring great outlay, very
costly: Mk. xiv. 3; 1 Tim. ii. 9. (Thue. et sqq.; Sept.)
b. excellent, of surpassing value, [A. V. of great price]:
1 Pet. iii. 4. [(Plat., al.)] *
TOANUTULOS, -ov, (roAUs, Teun), Very valuable, of great price :
Mt. xiii. 46; xxvi. 7 LT Trmrg.; Jn. xii. 3; compar.
moAuTiporepoy, 1 Pet. i. 7, where Rec. rodd ripiorepov.
One Pomp. 5; Hdian. 1, 17,5[3 ed. Bekk.]; Anthol.,
al.) *
tokutpérws, (fr. roAvrporos, in use in various senses fr.
Hom. down), adv., in many manners: Heb. i. 1 [(Philo
de incor. mund. § 24)]; see oAupepas.*
mopo. (Attic mua; (cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 425]), -res, ré,
(rive, mémopa), drink: 1 Co. x. 4; Heb. ix. 10.*
tovnpia, -as, 7, (rovnpos), [fr. Soph. down], Sept. for
yA and Ny, depravity, iniquity, wickedness [(so A. V.
almost uniformly) ], malice: Mt. xxii. 18; Lk. xi. 39; Ro.
i. 29; 1 Co. v. 8; Eph. vi. 12; plur. af rovnpia [cf. W.
§ 27,3; B. § 123, 2; R. V. wickednesses], evil purposes
qroAvedeos.
530
Tovnpos
and desires, Mk. vii. 22; wicked ways [A. V. iniquities},
Acts iii. 26. [Sy¥N. see xaxia, fin.]*
arovnpés (on the accent cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 389;
Géttling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 304 sq.; [Chandler §§ 404,
405]; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 26), -d,-6v; com-
par. rovnpérepos (Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26); (crovew, movos)
fr. Hes., [Hom. (ep. 15, 20), Theog.] down ; Sept. often
for 1; L. full of labors, annoyances, hardships ;
a. pressed and harassed by labors ; thus Hercules is called
movnporatos kai dptotos, Hes. frag. 43, 5. b. bring-
ing toils, annoyances, perils: (katpds, Sir. li. 12); qpépa
mrovnpd, of a time full of peril to Christian faith and stead-
fastness, Eph. v. 16; vi. 13, (so in the plur. jpépae mov.
Barn. ep. 2, 1); causing pain and trouble [A. V. griev-
ous], €Akos, Rev. xvi. 2. 2. bad, of a bad nature or
condition ; a. in a physical sense: dpOadpos, dis-
eased or blind, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 34, (rovnpia 6pOadpor,
Plat. Hipp. min. p. 374d.; the Greeks use rovnpés Exew
or SwaxetoOat of the sick; éx yeverns movnpovs vytets mre-
momxévat, Justin apol. 1, 22 [(cf. Otto's note) ; al. take mov.
in Mt. and Lk.u.s. ethically; cf. b.and Meyer on Mt.));
xapros, Mt. vii. 17 sq. b. in an ethical sense, evil,
wicked, bad, ete. [this use of the word is due to its as-
sociation with the working (largely the servile) class;
not that contempt for labor is thereby expressed, for
such words as épydtns, Spacrnp, and the like, do not take
on this evil sense, which connected itself only with a
word expressive of unintermitted toil and carrying no
suggestion of results” (cf. Schmidt ch. 85, §1); see
xakia, fin.]; of persons: Mt. vii. 11; xii. 34 sq.; xviii. 32;
xxv. 26; Lk. vi. 45; xi. 13; xix. 22; Acts xvii.5; 2 Th. iii.
2; 2 Tim. iii. 13; yeved rov., Mt. xii. 39, 45; xvi.4; Lk. xi.
29; avedua movnpoy, an evil spirit (see mvedua, 3 c.), Mt.
xii, 455| LKs vill 215) vill..2) xis 265 Acts xixazisqul
sq-; substantively of movnpoi, the wicked, bad men,
opp. to of Sikasor, Mt. xiii. 49; movnpot Kai dyaboi, Mt. v.
45; xxii. 10; dyapioro: x. rovnpol, Lk. vi. 35 ; rév rovnpdy,
the wicked man, i. e. the evil-doer spoken of, 1 Co. v. 13;
T® movnp@, the evil man, who injures you, Mt. v. 39. 6
movnpos is used pre-eminently of the devil, the evil one:
Mt. v. 373 vi. 13; xiii. 19, 38; Lk. xi. 4 RL; Jn. xvii.
15; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq.3 iii. 12; v. 18 sq. (on which see ketpar,
2¢c.); Eph. vi.16. of things: aiwy, Gal.i.4; dvoua (q. Vv.
1 p. 447° bot.), Lk. vi. 22; padvovpynua, Acts xviii. 14;
the heart as a storehouse out of which a man brings forth
movnpa words is called @ncavpds movnpos, Mt. xii. 35; Lk.
vi. 45; cuveiSnows movnpa, a soul conscious of wickedness,
[conscious wickedness; see ovveidnats, b. sub fin. ], Heb. x.
22; KapSia movnpad amortias, an evil heart such as is re-
vealed in distrusting [cf. B. § 132, 24; W.§ 30, 4], Heb.
iii. 12; dpOadpos (q. v.), Mt. xx. 15; Mk. vii. 22; d&:a-
Aoyiopoi, Mt. xv. 19; Jas. ii 4; bmovorat, 1 Tim. vi. 4;
kavxnows, Jas. iv. 16; pyya, a reproach, Mt. v. 11 [RG;
al. om. p.]; Adyor, 3 Jn. 10; épya, Jn. iii. 19; vii. 7; 1 Jn.
iii. 12; 2Jn.11; Col.i. 21; €pyov, (ace. to the context)
wrong committed against me, 2 Tim. iv. 18; airia, charge
of crime, Actsxxv.18 LT Trmrge.WHmrg. The neuter
movnpov, and 72 wovnpdv, substantively, evil, that which zs
TOvoS
wicked : etSos mompod (see eiSos, 2; [al. take mov. here as
an adj., and bring the ex. under eédos, 1 (R. V. mrg. ap-
pearance of evil)]), 1 Th. v. 22; 2 Th. iii. 3 (where rod
aovnpod is held by many to be the gen. of the mase. 6 zo-
ypos, but cf. Liinemann ad loc.) ; [rt rovnpdv, Acts xxviii.
21]; opp. to rd dyaddv, Lk. vi. 45; Ro. xii. 9; plur. [W.
§ 34, 2], Mt. ix. 4; Lk. iii. 19; wicked deeds, Acts xxv.
18 Tr txt. WH txt.; radra ra movnpd, these evil things i.e.
the vices just enumerated, Mk. vii. 23.*
™Ovos, -ov, 6, (révomat [See révys }), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
for Spy, Yr, ete., labor, toil; 1. i.q. great trouble,
intense desire: tmép twos (gen. of pers.), Col. iv. 13
(where Ree. has ¢j\ov [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]). 2
pain: Rev. xvi. 10sq.; xxi.4. [SYN. see xdzos, fin.]*
Tlovrikés, -7, -dv, (IIdvros, q. v.), belonging to Pontus,
born in Pontus: Acts xviii. 2. [(Hdt., al.)]*
IIévrvos, -ov, 6, Pontius (a Roman name), the prae-
nomen of Pilate, procurator of Judea (see Hsdros) :
Mt. xxvii. 2 [R GL]; Lk. iii. 1; Acts iv. 27; 1 Tim. vi.
13%"
TIéyros, -ov, 6, Pontus, a region of eastern Asia Minor,
bounded by the Euxine Sea [fr. which circumstance it
took its name], Armenia, Cappadocia, Galatia, Paphla-
gonia, [BB. DD.s.v.; Ed. Meyer, Gesch. d. Konigreiches
Pontos (Leip. 1879)]: Acts ii. 9; 1 Pet. i. 1.*
TlérAuos, -ov, 6, Publius (a Roman name), the name of
a chief magistrate [(Grk. 6 mparos) but see Dr. Woolsey’s
addition to the art. ‘Publius’ in B. D. (Am. ed.)] of the
island of Melita; nothing more is known of him: Acts
EKVIU 705."
mopela, -as, 4, (mopevw), fr. Aeschyl. down; Sept. for
a9; a journey: Lk. xiii. 22 (see moréw, I. 3) ; Hebra-
istically (see 68ds, 2 a.), a going i.e. purpose, pursuit, un-
dertaking : Jas. i. 11.*
mopevw : to lead over, carry over, transfer, (Pind., Soph.,
Thuc., Plat., al.); Mid. (fr. Hdt. down), pres. ropevouar;
impf. éxopevdpny ; fut. ropevoouar; pf. ptep. memopeupévos ;
1 aor. subjunc. 1 pers. plur. wopevompeba (Jas. iv. 13
Rec. Grsb.) ; 1 aor. pass. émopevOnv; (adpos a ford, [cf.
Eng. pore i. e. passage through ; Curtius § 356; Vaniéek
p- 479]); Sept. often for 707, 72000, 32% prop. to lead
one’s self across; i. e. to take one’s way, betake one’s self,
set out, depart ; a. prop.: tiv 6ddv pov, to pursue
the journey on which one has entered, continue one’s
journey, [A. V. go on one’s way], Acts viii. 39; mop. foll.
by dré w. agen. of place, to depart from, Mt. xxiv. 1
[RG]; dxé w. a gen. of the pers., Mt. xxv. 41; Lk. iv.
42; éexeibev, Mt. xix. 15; évreddev, Lk. xiii. 31; foll. by
els w. an ace. of place, to go, depart, to some place: Mt.
ii. 20; xvii. 27; Mk. xvi. 12; Lk. i. 39; ii. 41; xxii. 39;
xxiv. 13; Jn. vii. 35; viii. 1; Actsi. 11,25; xx.1; Ro.
xv. 24sq.; Jas. iv. 13, etc.; w. an acc. denoting the
state: eis elpnynv, Lk. vii. 50; viii. 48, (also év elpqyy,
Acts xvi. 36; see eipnyn, 3); eis Aavarov, Lk. xxii. 33 ;
foll. by emt w. an ace. of place, Mt. xxii. 9; Acts Vili. 26 ;
ix. 11; émi w. the acc. of a pers. Acts xxv. 12; ws with
a gen. of place, Acts xxiii. 23; mod [q. v.] for zoi, Jn.
vii. 35; of [see ds, II. 11 a.] for dro, Lk. xxiv. 28; 1 Co.
531
Topvela
Xvi. 6; mpds w. the ace. of a pers., Mt. xxv. 9; xxvi. 143
Lk. xi. 5; xv. 18; xvi. 30; Jn. xiv. 12, 28; xvi. ZA} SOx
17; Acts xxvii. 3; xxviii. 26; xara rhv 6d6v, Acts viii.
36; dud w.a gen. of place, Mt. xii. 1; [Mk. ix. 30L txt
Tr txt. WH txt.]; the purpose of the journey is indi-
cated by an infinitive: Mt. xxviii. 8 (9) Rec.; Lk. ii. 3;
xiv. 19, 31; Jn. xiv. 2; by the prep. émi with an ace. [cf.
emi, C. 1.1 f.], Lk. xv. 4; foll. by iva, Jn. xi. 11; by ovp
w. a dat. of the attendance, Lk. vii.6; Acts x. 20; xxvi.
13; 1Co. xvi. 4; gumpoad€v twos, to go before one, Jn.
x. 4. absol. i. q. to depart, go one’s way: Mt. ii. 93 viii.
9; xi. 7; xxvili.11; Lk. vii. 8; xvii.19; Jn. iv. 50; viii.
11; xiv. 3; Acts v. 20; viii. 27; xxi. 5; xxii. 21, ete.;
i.q. to be on one’s way, to journey: [ Lk. viii. 42 L Trmrg.];
ix. 57; x. 38; xiii. 33; Actsix.3; xxii.6. to enter upon
a journey; to go to do something: 1 Co. x. 27; Lk. x. 37.
In accordance with the oriental fashion of describing
an action circumstantially, the ptcp. wopevdpevos or mo-
pevdeis is placed before a finite verb which designates
some other action (cf. dviornut, II. 1 ¢. and épyopa,
I. 1 a.a. p. 250 bot.): Mt. ii. 8; ix. 13 (on which ef. the
rabbin. phrase 7993 xx [cf. Schoettgen or Wetstein ad
loc.]) ; xi. 4; xxvii. 66; xxviii. 7; Lk. vii. 22; ix. 13, 52;
st BAS Soh, MOR oe We sail WIS xo-eth Ge al Tee tie
19. b. By a Hebraism, metaphorically, a. to
depart from life: Lk. xxii. 223; so 707, Gene xves2e ess
Xexex nA’, B. dzicw rivds, to follow one, i.e. become
his adherent [cf. B. 184 (160) ]: Lk. xxi. 8 (Judg. ii. 12;
1 K. xi. 10; Sir. xlvi. 10) ; to seek [cf. Eng. run after]
any thing, 2 Pet. ii. 10. y: to lead or order one’s life
(see mepurarew, b. a. and 660s, 2 a.); foll. by ev with a dat.
of the thing to which one’s life is given up : ev doeAyelats,
1 Pet. iv. 3; év rats évrodais rod Kupiov, Lk. i. 6 ; Kara ras
émtOupias, 2 Pet. iii. 3; Jude 16, 18 ; rats ddois pov, dat. of
place, [to walk in one’s own ways], to follow one’s moral
preferences, Acts xiv. 16; 77 650 Tivos, to imitate one,
to follow his ways, Jude 11; r@ PdB@ rod xvpiov, Acts
ix. 31; see W. § 31,9; B. § 133, 22 b.; td pepipvar, to
lead a life subject to cares, Lk. viii. 14, cf. Bornemann
ad loc.; [Meyer ed. Weiss ad loc.; yet see id, I. 2a.; W.
369 (346) note; B. § 147, 29; R. V.as they go on their way
they are choked with cares, etc. Comp.: d1a-, eto- (-pat),
de- (-pat), eo (pat), ene (spat), mapa- (-pat), poy mpor-
(-uat), ovv- (-par). SYN. see epyouat, fin.]
mop0éw : impf. érdpOouv; 1 aor. ptep. mopOncas ; (répOa,
méropba, to lay waste); fr. Hom. down; to destroy,
to overthrow, [R. V. uniformly to make havock]: twa,
Acts ix. 21; ryv éxkAnatay, Gal. i. 13; thv miotw, ibid.
23.*
mropirpss, -0v, 6, (mopit@ to cause a thing to get on well,
to carry forward, to convey, to acquire; mid. to bring
about or procure for one’s self, to gain; fr. mdpos [cf.
mopeve |) ; a. acquisition, gain, (Sap. xiii. 19; xiv.
2; Polyb., Joseph., Plut.). b. a source of gain: 1
Tim. vi. 5 8q. (Plut. Cat. Maj. 25; [Test. xii. Patr., test.
Is. §4]).*
TIépxuos, see bacros.
mopvela, -as, 7, (mopvedo), Sept. for NIA, NaI, 0333},
TOpvev@
fornication (Vulg. fornicatio [and (Rev. xix. 2) prostitu-
tio]); used a. prop. of illicit sexual intercourse in
general (Dem. 403, 27; 433, 25): Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi.
25, (that this meaning must be adopted in these passages
will surprise no one who has learned from 1 Co. vi. 12
sqq. how leniently converts from among the heathen re-
garded this vice and how lightly they indulged in it ; ac-
cordingly, all other interpretations of the term, such as
of marriages within the prohibited degrees and the like,
are to be rejected) ; Ro. i. 29 Rec.; 1 Co. v. 1; vi. 13, 18;
vii. 2; 2 Co. xii. 21; Eph. v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. iv. 3;
Rev. ix. 21; it is distinguished from porxeia in Mt. xv.
19; Mk. vii. 21; and Gal. v. 19 Rec.; used of adultery
[(cf. Hos. ii. 2 (4), etc.)], Mt. v.32; xix. 9. b. In
accordance with a form of speech common in the O. T.
and among the Jews which represents the close rela-
tionship existing between Jehovah and his people under
the figure of a marriage (cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 422°
Sq-), mopveia is used metaphorically of the worship of
idols: Rev. xiv. 8; xvii. 2,4; xviii. 3; xix. 2; nets ek
mopveias ov yeyevynpueba (we are not of a people given to
idolatry), éva marépa ¢xopev rov Oedy, Jn. viii. 41 (aOeos pév
6 dyovos, modvGeos Sé 6 ex mopyns, TuUpA@TT@V mepl Tov
anOn tarépa kal Sia rovTo MoAN ODS avd Evds yoveis aimr-
topevos, Philo de mig. Abr. § 12; rékva mopveias, of idol-
aters, Hos. i. 2; [but in Jn.1. c. others understand phy-
sical descent to be spoken of (cf. Meyer) ]); of the de-
filement of idolatry, as incurred by eating the sacrifices
offered to idols, Rev. ii. 21.*
mopvetw; 1 aor. erdpvevoa; (mépvos, mopyn q. Vv.) ; Sept.
for 731; in Grk. writ. ([Hdt.], Dem., Aeschin., Dio Cass.,
Leian., al.) 1. to prostitute one’s body to the lust of
another. In the Scriptures 2. to give one’s self to
unlawful sexual intercourse; to commit fornication (Vulg.
fornicor): 1 Co. vi. 18; x. 8; Rev. ii. 14, 20; [Mk. x. 19
WH (rejected) mrg. ]. 3. by a Hebraism (see zropveia,
b.) metaph. to be given to idolatry, to worship idols : 1 Chr.
v. 25; Ps. lxxii. (Ixxiii.) 27; Jer. iii. 6; Ezek. xxiii. 19;
Hos. ix. 1, ete.; perd revos, to permit one’s self to be
drawn away by another into idolatry, Rev. xvii. 23 xviii.
3,9. [Comp.: éx-ropvevo. | *
wépvn, -ns, 7, (fr. mepdw, réprynus, to sell; Curtius § 358),
properly a woman who sells her body for sexual uses [ef.
Xen. mem. 1, 6, 13], Sept. for 71; 1. prop. a pros-
titute, a harlot, one who yields herself to defilement for
the sake of gain, (Arstph., Dem., al.); in the N. T.
univ. any woman indulging in unlawful sexual intercourse,
whether for gain or for lust: Mt. xxi. 31 sq.; Lk. xv. 30;
1 Co. vi. 15 sq.; Heb. xi. 31; Jas. ii. 25. 2. Heb-
raistically (see mopveia, b. and ropvevda, 3), metaph. an
idolatress; so of ‘Babylon’ i. e. Rome, the chief seat
of idolatry: Rev. xvii. 1, 5, 15sq.; xix. 2.*
mépvos, -ov, 6, (for the etym. see mépvn), @ man who
prostitutes his body to another’s lust for hire, a male prose
titute, ([Arstph.], Xen., Dem., Aeschin., Leian.) ; univ.
aman who indulges in unloujul sexual eee a for-
nicator, (Vulg. fornicator, fornicarius, [Rev. xxii. 15 im-
pudicus]): 1 Co. v. 9-11; vi.9; Eph.v.53 1 Tim.i.10;
532
TOTATOS
Heb. xii. 16; xiii.4; Rev. xxi.8; xxii. 15.
16 sq.) *
aéppa, [(allied w. mpd, Curtius § 380) ], adv., [fr. Plat.,
Xen. down], far, at a distance, a great way off: Mt. xv.
8; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. xiv. 32 [ef. W. § 54, 2a.; B. §129, 11];
compar. roppwrépw, in L Tr WH mopparepov [(Polyb.,
al.) ], further: Lk. xxiv. 28.*
aréppwbev, (dppw), adv., [fr. Plat. on], from wa afar
off: Lk. xvii. 12; Heb. xi. 13; Sept. chiefly for piny2*
mophipa, -as, 7, Sept. for 1278; 1. the purple-
Jish, a species of shell-fish or mussel: [Aeschyl., Soph.],
Isocr., Aristot., al.; add 1 Mace. iv. 23, on which see
Genin [ef. B. D. s. v. Colors 1]. 2. a fabric col-
ored with the purple dye, a garment made from purple
cloth, (so fr. Aeschyl. down): Mk. xv. 17, 20; Lk. xvi.
19; Rev. xvii. 4 Rec.; xviii. 12.*
mropdupeos, -a, -ov, in Attic and in the N. T. contr. -ovs,
-a, -odv, (moppipa), fr. Hom. down, purple, dyed in pur-
ple, made of a purple fabric: Jn. xix. 2,5; mopdupoor se.
évdupa ([B. 82 (72)]; cf. W. p. 591 (550)), Rev. xvii. 4
[GLT Tr WH}; xviii. 16.*
mrophupdTwAts, -cdos, 7, (moppuipa and mwréw), a female
seller of purple or of fabrics dyed in purple (Vulg. pur-
puraria): Acts xvi. 14. (Phot., Suid., al.) *
moods, (rocos), adv., how often: Mt. xviii. 21; xxiii.
87; Lk. xiii. 34. [(Plat. ep., Aristot., al.)]*
mats, -ews, 7, (rivw), fr. Hom. down, a drinking, drink:
Jn. vi. 55; Ro. xiv. 17; Col. ii. 16, (see Bpdars).*
aécos, -7, -ov, [(cf. Curtius § 631), fr. Aeschyl. down,
Lat. quantus], how great: Mt. vi. 23; 2 Co. vii. 11; moos
xpovos, how great (a space) i. e. how long time, Mk. ix.
21; neut. how much, Lk. xvi. 5, 7; réa@, (by) how much,
Mt. xii. 12; méa@ padror, Mt. vii.11; x. 25; Lk. xi. 13;
xii. 24, 28; Ro. xi. 12, 24; Philem. 16; Heb. ix. 14; roc
xeipovos tywpias, Heb. x. 29; plur. how many: with
nouns, Mt. xv. 34; xvi. 9sq.; MK. vi. 38; viii. 4,19 sq. ;
Lk. xv.17; Acts xxi. 20; wdéca, how grave, Mt. xxvii. 13;
Mk. xv. 4.*
motapés, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 7) and 1",
a stream, a river: Mt. iii.6 LT Tr WH; Mk. i. 55 Avis
xvi. 18; 2 Co. xi. 26 [W. § 30, 2a.]; Hes: viii. 10; ix. 14;
xii. 15; xvi.4,12; xxii. 1sq.; i.q.a@ torrent, Mt. vii. 25,
27; Lk. vi. 48 sq.; Rev. xii. 15 sq.; _ plur. figuratively
i. q. the greatest abundance [cf. collog. Eng. “ streams,”
“floods ”’], Jn. vii. 38.*
wota.o-pdpnytos, -ov, 6, (rorauds and gopéw; like dve-
poddpnros [cf. W. 100 (94)]), carried away by a stream
(i. e. whelmed, drowned in the waters): Rev. xii. 15.
Besides only in Hesych. s. v. ardepae.*
moramés ({in Dion. Hal., Joseph., Philo, al.] for the
older modaréds [cf. Lob. Phryn. p. 56 sq.; Rutherford,
New Phryn. p. 129; W. 24; Curtius p. 537, 5th ed.];
ace. to the Grk. grammarians i. q. é« molov Samédou, from
what region; acc. to the conjecture of others i. q. wot amé
[(Buttmann, Lexil. i. 126, compares the Germ. wovon)],
the 8 being inserted for the sake of euphony, as in the
Lat. prodire, prodesse; cf. Fritzsche on Mark p. 554
sq. [still others regard -damés merely as an ending; ef.
(Sir. xxiii.
TOTE
Apollon. Dysk.,ed. Buttmann, index s. v.]),-4,-6v; 1.
from what country, race, or tribe? so fr. Aeschyl. down.
2. from Demosth. down also i. q. notes, of what sort or
quality ? (what manner of 7]: absol. of persons, Mt. viii.
27; 2 Pet. iii. 11; with a pers. noun, Lk. vii. 39 5 w. names
of things, Mk. xiii. 1; Lk. i. 29; 1 Jn. iii. 1.*
wére, (Curtius § 631], direct interrog. adv., fr. Hom.
down, when? at what time? Mt. xxv. 3 7-39, 44; Lk. xxi
7; Jn. vi. 25; loosely used (as sometimes even by Attic
writ.) for the relative édre in indirect questions (W.
510 (475)): Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk. xiii. 4, 33,35; Lk. xii. 36;
Xvi. 20. ws nére, how long? in direct questions [cf. W.
§ 54, 6 fin.; B.§ 146, 4]: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix.
41; Jn. x. 24; Rev. vi. 10.*
more, an enclitic particle, fr. Hom. down; 5
once, 1. e. at some time or other, formerly, aforetime; a.
of the Past: Jn. ix. 13; Ro. vii.9; xi. 30; Gal. i. 13, 23
[ef. W.§ 45, 7]; Eph. ii. 2sq. 11,13; v.8; Col i 21; iii.
7; 1 Th. ii. 5; Tit. iii. 3; Philem. 11; 1 Pet. ii. 10; iii.
5, 20; 48 more, now at length, Phil. iv. 10. b. of the
Pature: Lk. xxii. 32; 78y moré, now at length, Ro. i.
10. 2. ever: after a negative, ovdeis wore, Eph. v.
29 [B. 202 (175)]; od... oré, 2 Pet. i. 213 pq more
(see pamore); after ov yn with the aor. subjunc. 2 Pet.
i.10; ina question, ris more, 1 Co. ix. 7; Heb.i. 5,13;
érotot more, whatsoever, Gal. ii. 6 [but some would render
more here formerly, once; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
m6repos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], which of two; mére-
pov...4, utrum...an, whether... or, [W. § 57,1 b.;
B. 250 (215)]: Jn. vii. 17.*
sroThprov, -ov, 70, (dimin. of zornp), a cup, a drinking
vessel ; a. prop.: Mt. xxiii. 24sq.; xxvi. 27; Mk.
vil. 4, 8 [T WHom. Tr br. the vs.]; xiv. 23; Lk. xi. 39;
xxii. 17, 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; Rev. xvii. 4; mivew é« roi
nornpiov, 1 Co. xi. 28; 7d mornptov ths evdoyias (see €b-
hoya, 4),1 Co. x. 16; with a gen. of the thing with
which the cup is filled: yvxpov, Mt. x. 42; déaros, Mk.
ix. 41; by meton. of the container for the contained,
the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk,
Lk. xxii. 20° [(WH reject the pass.) cf. Win. 635 (589)
sq]; 1 Co. xi. 25 sq.; 1d mornpidv twos, gen. of the pers.
giving the entertainment (cf. Rickert, Abendmahl, p.
217 sq.): mivew, 1 Co. x. 21 [ef. W. 189 (178)]; xi. 27
{cf. W. 441 (410)]. b. By a figure common to
Hebrew, Arabic, Syriac, and not unknown to Latin
writers, one’s lot or experience, whether joyous or
adverse, divine appointments, whether favorable
or unfavorable, are likened to a cup which God presents
one to drink [cf. W. 32]: so of prosperity, Ps. xv. (xvi.)
5°; xxii. (xxiii.) 5; exv. (exvi.) 13; of adversity, Ps. x.
(xi.) 6; Lxxiv. (Ixxv.) 9; Is. li. 17, 22. In the N. T. of
the bitter lot (the sufferings) of Christ: Mt. xxvi. 39,
42 Rec.; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk. xxii. 42; Jn. xvill. 11; mivew
76 mor. pou or 6 eym rive, to undergo the same calamities
which I undergo, Mt. xx. 22, 23; Mk. x. 38, 39, (Plaut.
Cas. 5, 2, 53 (50) ut senex hoc eodem poculo quod ego
bibi biberet, i. e. that he might be treated as harshly as
I was); used of the divine penalties: Rev. xiv. 10; xvi.
53
3 IIovéns
19; xviii.6. ([Alcaeus, Sappho], Ildt., Ctes., Arstph.,
Leian., al.; Sept. for i>.) *
morit{w; impf. émérifov; 1 aor. émorica; pf. memérixa
(Rev. xiv. 8); 1 aor. pass. émoriaOqv; (moros) ; fr. [Hip-
pocr.], Xen., Plat. down; Sept. for PW ; to gwe to
drink, to furnish drink, (Vulg. in 1 Co. xii. 18 and Rev.
xiv. 8 poto [but in Rev. Lc. Tdf. gives potiono; A. V. to
make to drink): rwa, Mt. xxv. 35, 37, 42; xxvii. 48; Mk.
xv. 36; Lk. xiii. 15; Ro. xii. 20; rd vt, to offer one
anything to drink (W. § 32,4a.; [B. § 131, 6]): Mt. x.
42; Mk. ix. 41, and often in the Sept.; in fig. discourse
1. Twa yaa, to give one teaching easy to be apprehended,
1 Co. iii. 2 (where by zeugma od Bpapa is added; [ef.
W. § 66, 2¢.; B.§ 151,30; A. V. I have fed you with
milk, etc.]); twa ek tov owov, Rev. xiv. 8 (see oivos, b.
and 6upos, 2); i.q.to water, irrigate, (plants, fields, etc.) :
1 Co. iii. 6-8 (Xen. symp. 2, 25; Leian., Athen., Geop.,
[Strab., Philo]; Sept. [Gen. xiii. 10]; Ezek. xvii. 7);
metaph. to imbue, saturate, twd, one’s mind, w. the addi-
tion of an accus. of the thing, év veda, in pass., 1 Co.
xii. 13 LT Tr WH [W. § 32,5; B. § 134, 5]; els év rvedpa,
that we might be united into one body which is imbued
with one spirit, ibid. RG, (twa mvevpare xaraviéews, Is.
xxix. 10 [cf. Sir. xv. 3]).*
Tlorlodot, -wy, of, Puteoli, a city of Campania in Italy,
situated on the Bay of Naples, now called Pozzuoli:
Acts xxviii. 13. [C£. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 218sqq.; Smith,
Dict. of Geog. s.v.] *
arér0S, -ov, 6, (10 [cf. mivw]), a drinking, carousing :
1 Pet.iv.3. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., Ael., al.;
Sept. for NAwn.) *
wos, [cf. Curtius § 631], an interrog. adv., fr. Hom.
down, Sept. for 7°, 73%, °®, where? in what place? a.
in direct questions: Mt. ii.2; xxvi.17; Mk. xiv. 12, 14;
Lk. xvii. 17, 87; xxii. 9, 11; Jn.i. 38 (39) ; vii. 11; viii.
10,19; ix.12; xi.34; ov éorw [(é€or. sometimes unex-
pressed) ], in questions indicating that a person or thing
is gone, or cannot be found, is equiv. to it is nowhere,
does not exist: Lk. viii. 25; Ro. iii. 27; 1 Co. i. 205 xii.
17,19; xv. 55; Gal.iv.15 LT Tr WH; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; rod
haveira, (A.V. where shall . . . appear] i. q. there will be
no place for him, 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. in indirect ques-
tions, for the relative dou [cf. W. §57, 2 fin.]: foll. by
the indic., Mt. ii. 4; Mk. xv. 47; Jn. i. 39 (40); xi. 57;
xx. 2,13, 15; Rev. ii. 13 [cf. W. 612 (569)] ; foll. by the
subjunc., Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58; xii. 17. c. joined
to verbs of going or coming, for woz in direct quest. [ef.
our collog. where for whither; see W. § 54, 7; B. 71
(62)]: In. vii. 35 [cf. W. 300 (281); B. 358 (307)] ; xiii.
36 ; xvi. 5; in indir. question, foll. by the indic.: Jn. iii.
8; viii, 14; xii. 35; xiv. 5; Heb. xi. 8; 1. Jn. ii. f1:%
mot, an enclitic particle, fr. Hom. down; ay
somewhere: Heb. ii. 6; iv. 4. 2. it has a limiting
force, nearly; with numerals somewhere about, about,
(Hat. 1,119; 7,22; Paus. 8,11, 2; Hdian. 7, 5, 3 [2 ed.
Bekk.]; Ael. v. h. 13, 4; al.): Ro. iv. 19.*
TlotSns, [B. 17 (15)], Pudens, proper name of a Chris
tian mentioned in 2 Tim. iv. 21. Cf. Lipsius, Chronolo
TOUS
gie d. romisch. Bischofe (1869) p. 146; [B. D.s. v., also
(Am. ed.) s. v. Claudia; Bib. Sacr. for 1875, p. 174 sqq. ;
Plumptre in the ‘ Bible Educator’ iii. 245 and in Elli-
cott’s ‘New Test. Com.’ ii. p. 186 sq. ].*
mots (not ovs, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 765; Gétiling,
Accentl. p. 244; [Chandler, Grk. Accentuation, § 566];
W. §6,1d.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.48), zrodds, 6,
[allied w. rédov, ré(a, Lat. pes, etc.; Curtius § 291; Van-
itek p. 473], dat. plur. rooiy, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 527;
a foot, both of men and of beasts: Mt. iv. 6; vii. 6; xxii.
13; Mk. ix.45; Lk.i. 79; Jn. xi. 44; Acts vii.5; 1 Co.
xii. 15; Rev. x. 2, and often. From the oriental prac-
tice of placing the foot upon the vanquished (Josh. x.
24), come the foll. expressions: td tovs m0das ovytpiBev
(q. v-) twa, Ro. xvi. 20; tmordooew tid, 1 Co. xv. 27;
Eph. i. 22; Heb. ii. 8; ru@évat, 1 Co. xv. 253; riOévat twa
brokdtw trav rod@yv, Mt. xxii. 44 LT Tr WH; drromddiov
tov roédav, Mt. xxii. 44 RG; Mk. xii. 36 [here WH izo-
katwt. m.]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35; Heb. i. 13; x. 13; dis-
ciples listening to their teacher’s instruction are said mapa
(or mpos) tovs modas twos KaOnaOa or tapaxaGioa, Lk. x.
39; Acts xxii. 3, cf. Lk. viii. 35; to lay a thing zapa (or
mpos) Tovs mddas Twos is used of those who consign it to his
power and care, Mt. xv. 30; Acts iv. 35, 37; v. 2; vii. 58.
In saluting, paying homage, supplicating, ete., persons
are said mpds Tovs modas Twos tinrew OY mpoonintew: Mk.
v. 22; vii. 25; Lk. vill. 41; xvii. 16 mapa]; Rev. i. 17;
els Tovs 7. tTivds, Mt. xviii. 29 [ Ree. ]; Jn. xi. 32 [here T
Tr WH pos]; rimrew eurpoober r. rodév twos, Rev. xix.
10; mpockuvety Eurpoobey (or evamuov) Tav moddv Tivos,
Rev. iii. 9; xxii. 8; mir. emi tods mw. Acts x. 25. By a
poetic usage that member of the body which is the chief
organ or instrument in any given action is put for the
man himself (see yA@aaa, 1) ; thus of modes rivos is used
for the man in motion: Lk. i. 79 (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 101);
Acts v. 9; Ro. iii. 15; x. 15; Heb. xii. 13:
™paypa, -ros, 76, (rpdcow), fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hat.
down, Sept. chiefly for 935; a. that which has been
done, a deed, an accomplished fact: Lk.i.1; Acts v. 4;
2 Co. vii. 11; Heb. vi. 18. b. what is doing or being
accomplished: Jas. ili. 16; spec. business (commercial
transaction), 1 Th. iv. 6 [so W.115 (109); al. refer this
example to c. and render in the matter (spoken of, or con-
ventionally understood; ef. Green, Gram. p. 26 sq.)]._¢.
a matter (in question), affair: Mt. xviii. 19; Ro. xvi. 2;
spec. in a forensic sense, a matter at law, case, suit, (Xen.
mem. 2, 9,1; Dem. 1120, 26; Joseph. antt. 14,10, 17):
mpaypa éxew mpos twa, [A. V. having a matter against,
etc. 1 Cos vies da. that which is or exists, a
thing: Heb. x. 1; mpdypara od Bdemopeva, Heb. xi. 1 [see
eAtri¢a |.*,
mpaypareta ['T WH -ria; see I, c], -as, 9, (mpayparevo-
pat), prosecution of any affair; business, occupation:
plur. with the addition of rod Biov, pursuits and occupa-
tions pertaining to civil life, opp. to warfare [A. V. the
affairs of this life], 2 Tim. ii. 4. (In the same and other
senses in Grk. writ. fr. [Hippocr.], Xen., Plato down.) *
mpayparevouat: 1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. mpay-
534
Tp dos
paretcacbe; (mpaypa) ; in Grk. prose writ. fr. Hdt. down;
to be occupied in anything; to carry on a business; spec.
to carry on the business of a banker or trader (Plut. Sull.
17; Cat. min. 59): Lk. xix. 13 [here WH txt. reads the
infinitive (see their Intr. § 404) ; R. V. trade. Comp.:
dia- mpayparevopat. |*
ampa.tdpiov, -ov, 76, a Lat. word, praelorium (neut. of
the adj. praetorius used substantively); the word de-
notes 1. ‘head-quarters’ in a Roman camp, the
tent of the commander-in-chief. 2. the palace in
which the governor or procurator of a province resided,
to which use the Romans were accustomed to appropri-
ate the palaces already existing, and formerly dwelt in
by the kings or princes (at Syracuse “illa domus prae-
toria, quae regis Hieronis fuit,” Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 12, 30);
at Jerusalem it was that magnificent palace which Her-
od the Great had built for himself, and which the Ro-
man procurators seem to have occupied whenever they
came from Cesarea to Jerusalem to transact public
business: Mt. xxvii. 27; Mk. xv. 16; Jn. xvili. 28, 33;
xix. 9; cf. Philo, leg. ad Gaium, § 38; Joseph. b.j. 2,14,
8; also the one at Cesarea, Acts xxiii. 35. Cf. Keim
iii. p. 8359 sq. [Eng. trans. vi. p. 79; B.D. s. v. Praeto-
rium ]. 3. the camp of praetorian soldiers estab-
lished by Tiberius (Suet. 37): Phil. i. 13. Cf. Win.
RWB. s. v. Richthaus; [Bp. Lghtft. (Com. on Philip.
p- 99 sqq-) rejects, as destitute of evidence, the various
attempts to give a local sense to the word in Phil. 1.c.,
and vindicates the meaning praetorian guard (so R.V.)].*
ampaKtwp, -opos, 6, (mpdoc@) ; 1. one who does
anything, a doer, (Soph.). 2. one who does the work
of inflicting punishment or taking vengeance; esp. the
avenger of a murder (Aeschyl., Soph.) ; the exactor of a
pecuniary fine ([Antipho], Dem., al.) ; an officer of jus-
tice of the lower order whose business it is to inflict punish-
ment: Lk. xii. 58.*
mpakis, -ews, 7, (mpacow), fr. Hom. down; aa
doing, a mode of acting; a deed, act, transaction: univ.
mpakes Tov aroorédor (Grsb.; Rec. inserts éyiov, L Tr
WH om. ray, Tdf. has simply mpa€es), the doings of (i-e.
things done by) the apostles, in the inscription of the Acts;
sing. in an ethical sense: both good and bad, Mt. xvi.
27; in a bad sense, i.q. wicked deed, crime, Lk. xxiii.
51; plur. wicked doings (cf. our practices i. e. trickery;
often so by Polyb.): Acts xix. 18; Ro. viii. 13; Col. iii.
9; (with caxn added, as Ey. Nicod. 1 Inacots éOepdmrevoe
SaiorCopevous amd mpafewv Kakav). b. a thing to
be done, business, [A. V. office], (Xen. mem. 2,1, 6): Ro.
xii. 4.*
apgos (so R G in Mt. xi. 29; onthe iota subscr. cf. Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 403sq.; Bétm. Ausf. Spr. § 64, 2 i. p. 2553
[Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 7 sq.; cf. W. § 5, 4d. and
p- 45 (44)]) or mpaos, -a, -ov, and mpais (LT Tr WH, so
RG in Mt. xxi. 5 (4); [ef.Tdf. Proleg. p. 82]), -eta, -d, gen.
mpaews T’ Tr WH for the common form zpaéos (so Lehm. ;
mpacos RG), see Babéws [cf. B. 26 (23)], plur. mpaeis L
T Tr WH, zpacis R G; fr. Hom. down; gentle, mild, meek:
Mt. v. 5 (4); xi. 29; xxi. 5; 1 Pet. iii. 4: Sept. several
TpaoTns
times for 1} and *}y. [Cf. Schmidt ch. 98, 2; Trench
§ xlii.; Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 6, 36.]*
megotys (Rec. and Grsb. [exc. in Jas. i. 21; iii, 135 1
Pet. ili. 15]; see the preceding word), rpadrys (so Lchm.),
and acc. to a later form mpavrns (so R and G, but with «
subscr. under the a, in Jas. i. 21; iii, 13; 1 Pet. iii. 15;
Lchm. everywhere exc. in Gal. vi.1; Eph. iv.2; Treg.
everywhere [exc. in 2 Co. x.1; Gal. v. 23 (22); vi.1; Eph.
iv. 2], T WH everywhere; cf. B. 26 (23) sq.), -nros, 4, gen-
tleness, mildness, meekness : 1 Co. iv. 21; 2 Co. x. 1; Gal.
Vv. 23 (22) ; vi.1; Col. iii. 12; Eph. iv. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 11 R;
2 Tim. ii. 25; Tit. iii. 2; Jas.i. 21; iii.13; 1 Pet. iii. 16
(15). (Xen., Plato, Isoer., Aristot., Diod., Joseph., al. ;
for 713)’, Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 4.) [SyN. see émieixeca, fin.;
Trench (as there referred to, but esp.) § xlii.; Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. iii. 13.]*
Tpacid, -as, 7, a plot of ground, a garden-bed, Hom. Od.
7,127; 24, 247; Theophr. hist. plant. 4,4, 3; Nicand.,
Diose., al.; Sir. xxiv. 31; dvérecov mpactal mpactat (a
Hebraism), i.e. they reclined in ranks or divisions, so
that the several ranks formed, as it were, separate
plots, Mk. vi. 40; cf. Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 669; [Hebr.
Gram. § 106, 4; B. 30(27); W. 464 (432) also] § 37, 3;
(where add fr. the O. T. curyyayov aitods Onuavias 6npo-
vias, Ix. viii. 14).*
tmpdcocw and (once viz. Acts xvii. 7 RG) mpdrrw; fut.
mpagw ; 1 aor. émpaga; pf. rémpaxa; pf. pass. ptcp. rempay-
pevos; fr. Hom. down; Sept. several times for Nwy and
oya ; to do, practise, effect, Lat. agere, (but moteiv to make,
Lat. facere ; [see rovéa, fin.]); i.e. 1. to exercise,
practise, be busy with, carry on: ra mepiepya, Acts xix. 19;
Ta tia, to mind one’s own affairs, 1 Th. iv. 11 (ra €avrod,
[Soph. Electr. 678]; Xen. mem. 2,9,1; Plat. Phaedr. p.
247 a.; Dem. p. 150, 21; al.); used of performing the
duties of an office, 1 Co. ix.17. to undertake to do, pndev
mpomeres, Acts xix. 36. 2. to accomplish, to perform:
mempaypevoy eoriv, has been accomplished, has taken
place, Acts xxvi. 26; etre dya0dv, etre xaxdv, 2 Co. v. 10;
dyabov 4 paidor (kaxdv), Ro. ix. 11 (8ikaa 4} a8ixa, Plat.
apol. p. 28b.); d&a trys peravolas gpya, Acts xxvi. 20;
add, Ro. vii. 15,19; Phil. iv. 9; vduov, to do i.e. keep the
law, Ro. ii. 25; of unworthy acts, to commit, perpetrate,
(less freq. so in Grk. writ., as woAAd kai dvdova, Xen.
symp. 8, 22; with them zoveiy [(see Schmidt, Syn. ch. 23,
11, 3; L. and S. s. v. B.)] is more com. in reference to
bad conduct; hence rovs émuorapévous pev & det mpdarrew,
motoovras S€ ravavria, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 4), Acts xxvi. 9;
2 Co. xii. 21; 1d épyov rodro, this (criminal) deed, 1 Co.
v.2 TWH Trmrg.; add, Lk. xxii. 23; Acts ili. 17; v.
35; Ro. vii. 19; ra rovadra, such nameless iniquities, Ro.
i. 32 (where moveiv and mpdocew are used indiscriminately
[but cf. Meyer]); ii. 1-3; Gal. v. 21; adda, Jn. iil. 20;
v. 293; ri d&ov Oavarov, Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts xxv. 11, 25;
xxvi. 313; 7d xaxdv, Ro. vii. 19; xiii. 4; @romov, Lk. xxiii. 41;
ri ru kaxdy, to bring evil upon one, Acts xvi. 28. 3.
to manage public affairs, transact public business, (Xen.,
Dem., Plut.); fr. this use has come a sense met with fr.
Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt. down, viz. to exact tribute, revenue,
535
mT peo BUTEpOS
debts: Lk. iii. 13 [here R. V. extort]; rd dpyupiov, Lk.
xix. 23, (so agere in Lat., cf. the commentators on Suet.
Vesp. 1 ;\[ef. W. § 42,14. ]). 4. intrans. to act (see
ed p. 256°) : dmévavri twos, contrary to a thing, Acts xvii.
i 5. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down reflexively, me
habere: ti mpacow, how I do, the state of my affairs,
Eph. vi. 21; ed mpdgere (see ed), Acts xv. 29 [cf. B. 300
(258) ].
mpavmdbea (-6ia TWH; see I, ¢), -as, 9, (mpaiimadis
[(waoxw)]), mildness of disposition, gentleness of spirit,
meekness, (i. q. mpadrns): 1 Tim. vi.11 LT Tr WH. (Philo
de Abrah. §37; Ignat. ad Trall. 8, 1.) *
Tpavs, SCe mpaos.
mpaitns, See mpadrns.
wpérw ; impf. 3 pers. sing. émpere ; 1. to stand out,
to be conspicuous, to be eminent; so fr. Hom. Il. 12, 104
down. 2. to be becoming, seemly, fit, (fr. Pind.,
Aeschyl., Hdt. down) : mpémet rwi with a subject nom.
Heb. vii. 26 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 1); 8 or dmpémet, which
becometh, befitteth, 1 Tim. ii. 10; Tit. ii. 1; impers. xa-
Gas mpémer tii, Eph. v. 3; mpémov eoriv foll. by the inf.,
Mt. iii. 15; Heb. ii. 10; foll. by an ace. with the inf. 1 Co.
xi. 13. On its constr. cf. Bttm. § 142, 2.*
ape Bela, -as, 7, (mpecBeva) ¥ 1. age, dignity, right
of the first born: Aeschyl. Pers. 4; Plat. de rep. 6 p. 509
DigmicduseSa lard ouay Se 2. the business wont to
be intrusted to elders, spec. the office of an ambassador,
an embassy, (Arstph., Xen., Plat.) ; abstr. for the con-
crete, an ambassage i. e. ambassadors, Lk. xiv. 32; xix.
14.*
aperBevw; (mpéoSus an old man, an elder, [Curtius p.
479; Vanicek p. 186]); 1. to be older, prior by
birth or in age, ([Soph.], Hdt. and sqq.). 2. to be
an ambassador, act as an ambassador: 2 Co. v. 20; Eph.
vi. 20, ({Hdt. 5, 93 init.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.).*
arpeo Butéptoy, -ov, Td, (rpeaBurepos, q. v-), body of elders,
presbytery, senate, council: of the Jewish elders (see cu»
édptov, 2), Lk. xxii. 66; Acts xxii.5; [ef. Dan. Theod.
init. 50]; of the elders of any body (church) of Chris-
tians, 1 Tim. iv. 14 (eccl. writ. [cf. reff. s. v. mpeoBurepos,
Dial \)ea
arpeaPurepos, -a, -ov, (compar. of mpéoBus), [fr. Hom.
down ], elder ; used 1. of age; a. where two
persons are spoken of, the elder: 6 vids 6 mpeof. (Ael.
v. h. 9,42), Lk. xv. 25. b. univ. advanced in life,
an elder, a senior: opp. to veavioxo, Acts il. 17; opp. to
veorepos, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq., (Gen. xviii. 11 sq.; Sap. viii. 10;
Sir. vi. 34 (33); vii. 14; 2 Mace. viii. 30). of mpeoBv-
repot, [A.V. the elders], forefathers, Heb. xi. 2; mapadoots
(q. v.) r&v mpeoB., received from the fathers, Mt. xv. 2;
Mk. vii. 3, 5. 2. a term of rank or office; as such
borne by, a. among the Jews, a. members of
the great council or Sanhedrin (because in early times
the rulers of the people, judges, etc., were selected from
the elderly men): Mt. xvi. 21; xxvi. 47, 57, 59 Rec. ;
xxvii. 3,12, 20,41; xxviii. 12; Mk. viii. 31; xi. 27; xiv.
43, 53; xv.1; Lk. ix. 22; xx.1; xxii. 52; Jn. viii. 9; Acts
iv. 5,23; vi.12; xxiii. 14; xxiv. 1; with the addition of
mpeaBuTns
tod Iopanad, Acts iv. 8 RG; of ray lovdaiwy, Acts xxv.
15; of rod Aaod, Mt. xxi. 23; xxvi. 3; xxvii. 1. p.
those who in the separate cities managed public affairs
and administered justice: Lk. vii.3. (Cf. BB. DD.s. v.
Elder. ] b. among Christians, those who presided
over the assemblies (or churches): Acts xi. 30; xiv. 23; xv.
2,4, 6, 22 sq. ; xvi. 4; xxi. 18; 1 Tim. v.17, 19; Tit. i.5;
2Jn.1;3Jn.1; 1 Pet.v.1,5; with ris exxAnoias added,
Acts xx. 17; Jas. v.14. That they did not differ at all
from the (éricxoro:) bishops or overseers (as is
acknowledged also by Jerome on Tit. i. 5 [ef. Bp. Lght/t.
Com. on Phil. pp. 98 sq. 229 sq.]) is evident from the
fact that the two words are used indiscriminately, Acts
xx. 17, 28; Tit. i. 5, 7, and that the duty of presbyters
_is described by the terms émuickomeiv, 1 Pet. v. 1 sq., and
émoxorn, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44,1; accordingly only
two ecclesiastical officers, of émioxomot and oi duaxovor,
are distinguished in Phil. i.1; 1 Tim. iii. 1,8. The title
ériokoros denotes the function, mpeoBurepos the dig-
nity; the former was borrowed from Greek institutions,
the latter from the Jewish; cf. [Bp. Lghtft., as above,
pp- 95 sqq. 191 sqq.]; Ritschl, Die Entstehung der altka-
thol. Kirche, ed. 2 p. 350 sqq.; Hase, Protest. Polemik,
ed. 4 p. 98 sqq.; [ Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, Lect.
iii. and Harnack’s Analecten appended to the Germ.
trans. of the same (p. 229 sqq.); also Harnack’s note on
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3 (cf. reff. at 44 init.), and Hatch in
Dict. of Christ. Antiq.s. v. Priest. Cf. émickozos. ]. C.
the twenty-four members of the heavenly Sanhedrin or
court, seated on thrones around the throne of God: Rev.
iv./45)105/v25;.65.8, lids. 14 vil 11 A Scex 6: Kiveds Kixed,*
apex Birys, -ov, 6, (mpeaBus [see mpecBevw]), an old man,
anaged man: Lk.i. 18; Tit. ii. 2; Philem. 9 [here many
(cf. R. V. mrg.) regard the word as a substitute for
mpeoBevtns, ambassador; see Bp. Lghtft. Com. ad loc. ;
WH. App. ad loc.; and add to the exx. of the inter-
change mpeoBevrépos in Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus,
App., Inscr. fr. the Great Theatre p. 24 (col. 5, l. 72)].
(Aeschyl., Eur., Xen., Plat., al.; Sept. for pt.) *
tmpexBorts, -.5os, 7, (fem. of mpecBitns), an aged woman :
Tit. ii. 3. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., Hdian. 5,
3, 6 (3 ed. Bekk.).) *
ampnvijs, -és, [allied w. mpd; Vaniéek p. 484], Lat. pro-
nus, headlong: Actsi.18. (Sap. iv. 19; 8 Mace. v.43;
in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, but in Attic more com.
mpayns, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 431; [W. 22].) *
tplto (or mpiw, q.v.): 1 aor. pass. émpicOnv; to saw, to
cut in two witha saw: Heb. xi. 37. Tobe ‘sawn asunder’
was a kind of punishment among the Hebrews (2S. xii.
31; 1 Chr. xx. 3), which according to ancient tradition
was inflicted on the prophet Isaiah; cf. Win. RWB.s. v.
Sige; Roskoff in Schenkel v. 135; [B. D. s. v. Saw].
(Am. i. 3; Sus. 59; Plat. Theag. p. 124 b. and freq. in
later writ.) *
molv, [(acc. to Curtius §380 compar. mpo- tov, mpo -tv,
mpw) ], as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down 1. an adv.
previously, formerly, [ cf. madat, 1]: 3 Mace. v. 28; vi. 4, 31;
but never so in the N. T. 2. with the force of a
5386
Tpo
conjunction, before, before that: with an acc. and aor.
infin. of things past [cf. W. § 44, 6 fin.; B. § 142, 3]; mpi
’ABpadp yevéerOa, before Abraham existed, came into be-
ing, Jn. viii. 58; also mpiv 7 (cf. Meyer on Mt. i. 18), Mt.
i. 18; [Acts vii. 2]; with an aor. inf. having the force of
the Lat. fut. perf., of things future [cf. W. 332 (311)]:
mpw adextopa peovica., before the cock shall have crowed,
Mt. xxvi. 34, 75; Mk. xiv. 72; Lk. xxii.61; add, Jn. iv.
49; xiv. 29; also mpi 7, Mk. xiv.30; Acts ii. 20 (where
LT Tr WH txt. om. #); mpl #, preceded by a negative
sentence [B. § 139, 35], with the aor. subjunc. having
the force of a fut. pf. in Lat. [B. 231 (199)], Lk. ii. 26
{(RGLT Tr mrg., but WH br. #], and R Gin Lk. xxii.
34; mpi 7%, foll. by the optat. of a thing as entertained
in thought, Acts xxv. 16 [W. 297 (279) ; B. 230 (198)].
Cf. Matthiae § 522, 2 p.1201sq.; Bttm. Gram. § 139, 41;
Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 726 sqq.; W. [and B.] as above.*
IIploxa, 7, [acc. -av], Prisca (a Lat. name [lit. ‘an-
cient’]), a Christian woman, wife of Aquila (concern-
ing whom see ’AxvAas): Ro. xvi. 3 GLTTrWH; 1 Co.
xvi. 19 Led. ster. TTrWH; 2 Tim.iv.19. She is also
called by the dimin. name IpioxiAda [better (with all
edd.) IlpioxAAa, see Chandler § 122; Etymol. Magn.
19, 50 sq.] (ef. Livia, Livilla; Drusa, Drusilla; Quinta,
Quintilla; Secunda, Secundilla): Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26;
besides, Ro. xvi. 3 Rec.; 1 Co. xvi. 19 RGL.*
TIpioktAda, see the preceding word.
mplw, see mpifw. [COMP.: d:a- mpia.}
ap6, a prep. foll. by the Genitive, (Lat. pro), [fr. Hom.
down], Sept. chiefly for 95, before; used a. of
Place: mpd trav bupav, ris Ovpas, etc., Acts v. 23 RG;
xii. 6, 14; xiv. 13; Jas.v.9; by a Hebraism, mpd mpoow-
mov with the gen. of a pers. before (the face of) one (who
is following) [B. 319 (274)]: Mt. xi. 10; Mk.i. 2; Lk.i.
76 ; vii. 27; ix.52; x. 1, (Mal. iii. 1; Zech. xiv. 20; Deut.
iii. 18). b. of Time: mpd rotrar rév jyepav, Acts
v. 36; xxi. 38; [mpd rod macya, Jn. xi.55]; acc.toalater
Greek idiom, mpd é€ nuepav tod macyxa, prop. before six
days reckoning from the Passover, which is equiv. to é€
NMEpas mpd Tov macyxa, on the sixth day before the Pas-
sover, Jn. xii. 1 (wpd dio ery rod cecpod, Am.i.1; mpo
puds nuépas THs Mapdoxaixns nuepas, 2 Mace. xv. 36; exx.
fr. prof. writ. are cited by W. 557 (518) ; [cf. B. § 131,
11]; fr. eccles. writ. by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien etc.
pp- 298, 302; also his Paschastreit der alten Kirche, p. 221
sq.; [ef. Soph. Lex. s. v. mpd, 1 and 2}) ; [mpd ris éopris,
Jn. xiii. 1]; mpd xaipod, Mt. viii. 29; 1 Co. iv. 5; rap aia-
veov, 1 Co. ii. 7; mavrds Tod aiévos, Jude 25 L T Tr WH;
érav Sexarecc. [ fourteen years ago], 2 Co. xii. 2; add, 2
Tim. i. 9; iv. 21; Tit. i. 2; rod dpiorov, Lk. xi. 38; xara-
kdvopod, Mt. xxiv. 38; mpd rijs perabécews, Heb. xi. 5;
mpo xataBodjs kécpov, Jn. xvii. 24; Eph. i. 4; 1 Pet. i.
20; mpo mavrwv, prior to all created things, Col. i. 17;
[mpd tovtwv mavrev (Rec. dmdyr.), Lk. xxi. 12]; by a
Hebraism, po mpoowmov with the gen. of a thing is used
of time for the simple mpé (W. § 65, 4b.; [B.319 (274)]),
Acts xiii. 24 [(lit. before the face of his entering in)].
mpd with the gen. of a pers.: Jn. v. 7; x. 8 [not Tdf.];
™poayw
Ro. xvi. 7; of mpd rwos, those that existed before one,
Mt. v.12; with a pred. nom. added, Gal. i. 17. mpo with
the gen. of an infin. that has the art., Lat. ante quam
(before, before that) foll. by a fin. verb [B. §140, 11; W.
329 (309)]: Mt. vi.8; Lk. ii. 21; xxii.15; Jn.i. 48 (49) ;
xiii. 19; xvii. 5; Acts xxiii. 15; Gal. ii. 12; iii. 23. Cc.
of superiority or pre-eminence [W. 372 (349)]:
mpo mavrwv, above all things, Jas. v.12; 1 Pet. iv. 8. d.
In Composition, apé marks a. place: mpoav-
Avoy; motion forward (Lat. porro), mpoBaive, mpoBadrdro,
ete.; before another who follows, in advance, mpoayw, mpo-
Spouos, mporéuma, mporpéexa, etc.; in public view, openly,
mpddnros, mpdketpat. B. time: before this, previously,
mpoapaptavw; in reference to the time of an occurrence,
beforehand, in advance, mpoBdére, mpoywaokw, mpobé-
Tpu10s, mpoopita, etc. Y- superiority or preference:
[Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 658.] *
tpo-dy ; impf. mponyov ; fut. mpod&e ; 2 aor. mponyayov:
fr. Hdt. down; 1. trans. to lead forward, lead
forth: tid, one from a place in which he has lain hidden
from view,—as from prison, ¢#, Acts xvi. 30; [from
Jason’s house, Acts xvii.5 L T Tr WH]; _ in a forensic
sense, to bring one forth to trial, Acts xii. 6 [WH txt.
mpocayayeiv]; with addition of émi and the gen. of the
pers. about to examine into the case, before whom the
hearing is to be had, Acts xxv. 26 (els tiv Sikny, Joseph.
b. j. 1, 27, 25 eds exxAnoiav rods év airia yevouevovs, antt.
16, 11, 7). 2. intrans. (see dyw, 4 [and cf. mpd, d.
a.]), a. to go before: Lk. xviii. 39 [L mrg. mapay.] ;
opp. to dkodovbéw, Mt. xxi. 9 RG; Mk. xi. 9; foll. by eis
with an ace. of place, Mt. xiv. 22; Mk. vi. 45; ets xpiow,
1 Tim. y. 24 (on which pass. see émaxodovbéw) ; ptep.
mpodyev, preceding i. e. prior in point of time, previous,
1 Tim. i. 18 [see rpodnreia fin., and s. v. emi, C. I. 2 g. y.
yy: (but R. V. mrg. led the way to, etc.)]; Heb. vii. 18.
tua, to precede one, Mt. ii. 9; Mk. x. 32; and LT Tr
WH in Mt. xxi. 9, [cf. Joseph. b. j. 6, 1,6; B.§ 130, 4];
foll. by eis with an acc. of place, Mt. xxvi. 32; xxviii. 7;
Mk. xiv. 28; xvi. 7; tiva eis tiv Bactdelav Tod Geov, to
take precedence of one in entering into the kingdom of
God, Mt. xxi. 31 [cf. B. 204 (177)]. b. to proceed,
go forward: in a bad sense, to go further than is right or
proper, i.q. wy pevew ev 7H Sidaxf, to transgress the limits
of true doctrine [cf. our colloq. ‘ advanced’ (views, etc.)
in a disparaging sense], 2Jn. 9 L T Tr WH [but R. V.
mrg. taketh the lead].*
arpo-aipew, -& : by prose writ. fr. Hdt. [rather, fr. Thuc.
8, 90 fin. (in poetry, fr. Arstph. Thesm. 419)] down, to
bring forward, bring forth from one’s stores; Mid. to bring
forth for one’s self, to choose for one’s self before another
i.e. to prefer ; to purpose : xabds mpoarpetrar (L T Tr WH
the pf. mponpntac) rH xapdia, 2 Co. ix. 7.*
arpo-aitidopar, -Gyat: 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. mpoyttacdpeda ;
to bring a charge against previously (i. e. in what has pre-
viously been said): ria foll. by an infin. indicating the
charge, Ro. iii. 9; where the prefix mpo- makes refer-
ence to i. 18-31; ii. 1-5, 17-29. Not found elsewhere.*
apo-axovw: 1 aor. 2 pers. plur. mpoyjkovoare; to hear
TMpoarpéopat.
537
mpoSator
before: ryv édmida, the hoped for salvation, before its
realization, Col. i. 5 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]. (Hdt., Xen.,
Plat., Dem., al.) *
Tpo-apaprave: pf. ptep. mponuaprykas ; to sin before:
oi mponpaprykdres, of those who before receiving baptism
had been guilty of the vices especially common among
the Gentiles, 2 Co. xii. 21; xiii. 2; in this same sense also
in Justin Martyr, apol. i. c. 61; Clem. Al. strom. 4, 12;
ef. Liicke, Conjectanea Exeget. I. (Gétting. 1837) p. 14
sqq- [but on the ref. of the mpo- see Meyer on 2 Co. ll. ce.
(R. V. heretofore)]. (Hdian. 3, 14, 18 [14 ed. Bekk.];
eccl. writ.) *
Tpo-avdtov, -ov, Td, (mpd and avAn), fore-court, porch:
Mk. xiv. 68 [(ef. Pollux 1, 8, 77 and see addy, 2)].*
tpo-Batve: pf. ptcp. mpoBeBnxws; 2 aor. ptep. mpoBds ;
fr. Hom. down; to go forwards, go on, [cf. mpé, d. a.]:
prop. on foot, Mt. iv. 21; Mk.i.19; trop. ev rats juépats
mpoBeBnkos, advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 18; ii. 36, (see
nyeépa, fin.; tiv HAcKiav, 2 Macc. iv. 40; vi. 18; Hdian. 2,
7, 7 [5 ed. Bekk.]; 17 nduxia, Lys. p. 169, 37; [Diod. 12,
18]; rats ndrxias, Diod. 13, 89; [ef. L.andS.s. v. I. 2]).*
apo-BdAXw ; 2 aor. mpoeBadrov; fr. Hom. down; to throw
forward [cf. mpd, d. a.]; of trees, to shoot forth, put out,
se. leaves; to germinate, [cf. B. § 130, 4; W. 593 (552)]
(with xapmov added, Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 19; Epict. 1, 15,
7): Lk: xxi. 30; to push forward, thrust forward, put
forward: twa, Acts xix. 33.*
tmpoBatiKds, -7, -dv, (mpdBarov), pertaining to sheep: ¥
mpoBartkn, SC. wvAn (which is added in Neh. iii. 1,325 xii.
39, for {NX Iw), the sheep-gate, Jn. v. 2 [(W. 592
(551) ; B. §123, 8); but some (as Meyer, Weiss, Milligan
and Moulton, ef. Treg. mrg. and see Tdf.’s note ad loc.)
would connect mpof. with the immediately following
KoAupB7pa (pointed as a dat.) ; see Tdf.u.s.; WH. App.
ad loc. On the supposed locality see B. D.s. v. Sheep
Gate (Sheep-Market) ].*
mpoBdrvov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of the foll. word), a little
sheep: Jn. xxi. [16 T Trmrg. WH txt.], 17 T Tr WH
txt. (Hippoer., Arstph., Plat.) *
mp6-Baroy, -ov, rd, (fr. mpoBaive, prop. ‘that which walks
forward’), fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for }x¥, then for
nv, sometimes for w23 and 33 (a lamb), prop. any
four-footed, tame animal accustomed to graze, small cattle
(opp. to large cattle, horses, etc.), most com. a sheep or
a goat; but esp. a sheep, and so always in the N. T.: Mt.
vii. 15; x. 16; xii. 11 sq.; Mk. vi. 34; Lk. xv. 4,63 Jn. ii.
14 sq.; x. 1-4, 11 sq.; Acts viii. 32 (fr. Is. lili. 7); 1 Pet.
ii. 25; Rev. xviii. 13; mpdBara opayns, sheep destined
for the slaughter, Ro. viii. 36. metaph. mpd8ara, sheep,
is used of the followers of any master: Mt. xxvi. 31 and
Mk. xiv. 27, (fr. Zech. xiii. 7); of mankind, who as need-
ing salvation obey the injunctions of him who provides
it and leads them to it; so of the followers of Christ:
Jn. x. 7sq. 15 sq. 26 sq.; xxi. 16[RGLTrtxt. WH mrg.],
17 ([RGL WH mrg.]; Heb. xiii. 20; 1a mpéBara amo-
Awdrdra (see ddAAvpt, fin.), Mt. x. 6; xv. 24; rd mpdp.
in distinction from ra épigva, are good men as distin:
guished fr. bad, Mt. xxv. 33.
TpoBibatw
apo-BiBatw: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. mpocBiBacay; 1 aor.
pass. ptep. fem. mpoSiBacGeica ; 1. prop. to cause to
go forward, to lead forward, to bring forward, drag for-
ward: Acts xix. 33 RG[(fr. Soph. down) ]. Ze
metaph. i. q. mporpéma, to incite, instigate, urge forward,
set on; to induce by persuasion: Mt. xiv. 8 (eis 74, Xen.
mem. 1, 5,1; Plat. Prot. p. 328 b.; [in Deut. vi. 7 Sept.
with an accus. of the thing (and of the pers.) i. q. to
teach]).*
mpo-Brérw : to foresee (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 13; Dion.
Hal. antt. 11, 20); 1 aor. mid. ptcp. mpoPdreapevos; to
provide: ti mepi twos, Heb. xi. 40 LW. § 38,6; B. 194
(167) ]*
ampo-yivopar: pf. ptcp. mpoyeyovws ; to become or arise
before, happen before, (so fr. Hdt. down [in Hom. (Il. 18,
525) to come forward into view]): mpoyeyovdra épaptn-
para, sins previously committed, Ro. iii. 25.*
mpo-yiooKw; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. mpo¢yvw; pf. pass.
ptcp. mpoeyvwopevos; to have knowledge of beforehand ;
io foreknow: sc. raita, 2 Pet. iii. 17, cf. 14, 16; twa, Acts
xxvi. 55 ots mpo¢yvw, whom he (God) foreknew, sc. that
they would love him, or (with reference to what follows)
whom he foreknew to be fit to be conformed to the like-
ness of his Son, Ro. viii. 29 (ray ets adtov [Xpucrov ]
morevew mpoeyvoornevov, Justin M. dial. c. Tr. c. 42;
mpoywaoket [6 Beds] Tivas ek petavolas cwOnoecbat pér-
Aovras, id. apol. i. 28); 6» mpoeyva, whose character he
clearly saw beforehand, Ro. xi. [1 Lchm. in br.], 2,
(against those who in the preceding passages fr. Ro.
explain mpoywooke as meaning to predestinate, cf.
Meyer, Philippi, Van Hengel); mpoeyywopévov, sc. iad
tov Oeov (foreknown by God, although not yet ‘made
manifest’ to men), 1 Pet. i. 20. (Sap. vi. 14; viii. 8;
xviii. 6; Eur., Xen., Plat., Hdian., Philostr., al.) *
T™pd-yvwots, -ews, 7, (mpoywackw) ; 1. foreknowl-
edge: Judith ix. 6; xi. 19, (Plut., Leian., Hdian.). 2
forethought, pre-arrangement, (see mpoBdérw) : 1 Pet. i. 2;
Acts ii. 23, [but cf. spoytvaoKxe, and see Mey. on Acts l.c.].*
™p6-Yovos, -ov, 6, (mpoyivouat), born before, older: Hom.
Od. 9, 221; plur. ancestors, Lat. majores, (often so by
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down) : dad mpoydvev, in the spirit
and after the manner received from (my) forefathers
[ef. dd, II. 2 d. aa. p. 59* bot.], 2 Tim. i.3; used of a
mother, grandparents, and (if such survive) great-grand-
parents, 1 Tim. v. 4 [A. V. parents] (of surviving ances-
tors also in Plato, lege. 11 p. 932 init.).*
Tpo-ypaw : 1 aor. mpoéypaya; 2 aor. pass. mpoeypddny 3;
pf. pass. ptep. mpoyeypaupévos ; 1. to write before
(of time): Ro. xv. 4*R GL txt. T Tr WH, 4° Ree. ; Eph.
lil. 3; of mdAau mpoyeypapp. ets rodro Td Kpiva, of old set
forth or designated beforehand (in the Scriptures of the
O. T. and the prophecies of Enoch) unto this condemna-
tion, Jude 4, 2. to depict or portray openly [cf. mp6,
d.a.]: ois kar’ dpOadpods Incods Xpioros mpoeypadn év
tpiv [but ev dp. is dropped by GL T Tr WH] eoTavpape-
vos, before whose eyes was portrayed the picture of Jesus
Christ crucified (the attentive contemplation of which
picture ought to have been a preventive against that
538
Tr POEVAaPVOMA
bewitchment), i.e. who were taught most definitely and
plainly concerning the meritorious efficacy of the death
of Christ, Gal. iii. 1. Since the simple ypadpew is often
used of painters, and mpoypddew certainly signifies
also to write before the eyes of all who can read (Plut.
Demetr. 46 fin. mpoypapet Tis adrov mpd ths oKnvas THY
Tov Oidimodos apxnv), I see no reason why mpoypdapew
may not mean to depict (paint, portray) before the eyes;
[R. V. openly set forth]. Cf. Hofmann ad loc. [ Farrar,
St. Paul, ch. xxiv., vol. i. 470 note; al. adhere to the
meaning to placard, write up publicly, see Bp. Lghtft. ad
loc.; al. al.; see Meyer].*
arp6-8nAos, -ov, (pd [d. a. and] djAos), openly evident,
known to all, manifest: 1 Tim. v. 24 sq.; neut. foll. by dre,
Heb. vii. 14. [(From Soph. and Hdt. down.)]*
mpo-S(Swp: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. mpoedwxev; 1. to
give before, give first: Ro. xi. 35 (Xen., Polyb., Aris-
tot.). 2. to betray: Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Plat., al. ;
tv marpioa, 4 Mace. iv. 1.*
arpo-86r7, -ov, 6, (mpodidaps, 2), a betrayer, traitor: Lk.
vi. 16; Acts vii.52; 2 Tim. iii.4. (From[Aeschyl.], Hdt.
down; 2 Macc. v. 15; 3 Mace. iii. 24.) *
arp6-Spoj.os, -ov, 6, 7, (mporpexa, mpodpapeiv), a forerun-
ner (esp. one who is sent before to take observations or
act as spy, a scout, a light-armed soldier; Aeschyl., Hdt.,
Thuc., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.; cf. Sap. xii. 8); one who
comes in advance to a place whither the rest are to follow:
Heb. vi. 20.*
arpo-etSoy, [fr. Hom. down], 2 aor. of the verb mpoopde,
to foresee: Acts ii. 31 [(here WH zpodar without diaer-
esis; cf. I,¢ fin.)]; Gal. iii. 8.*
arpo-etrrov [2 aor. act. fr. an unused pres. (see eizoy,
init.) ], 1 pers. plur. mpoeiropev (1 Th. iv. 6 Grsb.), mpo-
einapev (ibid. RL TTrWH [see WH. App. p. 164]) ;
pf. mpoeipnxa; pf. pass. mpoeipnuat (see etzrov, p. 181* top) ;
fr. Hom. [(by tmesis) ; Hdt. and Plat.] down; to say be-
fore; i.e. a. to say in what precedes, to say above:
foll. by érx, 2 Co. vii. 3; foll. by direct dise., [Heb. iv. 7
Ee i Will txts exert’ 5) (evecays b. to say before
i.e. heretofore, formerly: foll. by drt, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal.
v. 21; foll. by direct disc., Gal. i. 9; [Heb. iv. 7 WH
mrg.]; Ka0es mpoeirapev tyiv, 1 Th. iv.6; [in the pas-
sages under this head (exc. Gal. i. 9) some would give
mpo- the sense of openly, plainly, (cf. R. V.mrg.)]. ec.
to say beforehand i.e. before the event; so used in ref. to
prophecies: ri, Acts i. 16; ra pnyara ra mpoetpnuéva bro
rivos, Jude 17; 2 Pet. iii. 2; mpoeipnea bpiv mdvra, Mk.
xili. 23; sc. atrd, Mt. xxiv. 25; foll. by direct discourse,
Riosxe2 958
apo-elpnka, SCe mpoeizov.
tpo-eAmito: pf. ptep. ace. plur. mponAmudras; to hope
before: év rum, to repose hope in a person or thing before
the event confirms it, Eph.i.12. (Posidipp. ap. Athen.
9 p. 377 ¢., Dexipp., Greg. Nyss.) *
mpo-ev-dpxopat: 1 aor. mpoernpEdunv; tomake a begin-
ning before: 2 Co. viii. 6; ri, ib. 10 [here al. render ‘to’
make a beginning before others,’ ‘to be the first to make a
beginnina, (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere.*
m poetraryryéddeo
Tpo-err-ayyéAhw : 1 aor. mid. mpoemnyyeAduny ; pf. ptep.
mpoemnyyeApevos ; to announce before (Dio Cass.); mid.
to promise before : ri, Ro. i. 2, and L T Tr WH in 2 Co. ix.
5, ([Arr. 6, 27, 1]; Dio Cass. 42, 32; 46, 40).*
T™po-€pxopor: impf. mponpyouny; fut. mpoedevoouat; 2
aor. mpond Gov; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to go forward, go
on: puxpov, a little, Mt. xxvi. 39 [here T Tr WH mrg.
mpooehOov (q. v-ina.)]; Mk.xiv. 35 [Tr WH mrg. mpoo-
€A6.]; w.an ace. of the way, Acts xii. 10 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4,
18; Plato, rep. 1 p. 328 e.; 10 p. 616 b.). 2. to go
before ; i.e. a. to go before, precede, (locally; Germ.
vorangehen): évamov twos, Lk. i. 17 [(€umpoobev twos,
Gen. xxxiii. 3), WH mre. mpocépx. q. v. in a.]; Tews, to
precede one, Lk. xxii. 47 Rec. [(Judith ii. 19)]; ruva,
ibid. G LT Tr WH (not soconstrued in prof. writ.; ef. B.
144 (126); Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 70; [W. § 52,
4, 13]; but in Lat. we find antecedere, anteire, praeire,
aliquem, and in Grk. writ. mpoOeiv twa; see mponyéopat) ;
to outgo, outstrip, (Lat. praecurrere, antevertere aliquem;
for which the Greeks say POdavew twa), Mk. vi. 33. b.
to go before, i.e. (set out) in advance of another (Germ.
vorausgehen): Acts xx. 5 [Tr WH txt. mpoced.]; eis
[L Tr pos] tpas, unto (as far as to) you, 2 Co. ix. 5; émt
To motor, to the ship, Acts xx. 13 [Tr WH mrg. mpoo-
eOovres }.*
mpo-erousdt: 1 aor. mpontoiuaca ; to prepare before, to
make ready beforehand : & mponroipacer eis do€ay, i. e. for
whom he appointed glory beforehand (i.e. from eter-
nity), and accordingly rendered them fit to receive it,
Ro. ix. 23; to prepare beforehand in mind and purpose,
i. e. to decree, Eph. ii. 10, where ois stands by attraction
for a [cf. W. 149 (141); B.§ 143, 8]. (1s. xxviii. 24;
Sap. ix. 8; Hdt., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Geop., al.) *
arpo-evaryyeA(fopar : 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. mpoeunyyeAlcato;
to announce or promise glad tidings beforehand (viz. be-
fore the event by which the promise is made good) : Gal.
iii. 8. (Philo de opif. mund. §9; mutat. nom. § 29; By-
zant. writ.) *
arpo-€x [(fr. Hom. down)]: pres. mid. 1 pers. plur. mpo-
exoueba; to have before or in advance of another, to have
pre-eminence over another, to excel, to surpass; often so
in prof. auth. fr. [Soph. and] Hdt. down; mid. to excel to
one’s advantage (cf. Kithner § 375, 1) ; to surpass in ezx-
cellences which can be passed to one’s credit: Ro. iii. 9;
it does not make against this force of the middle in the
present passage that the use is nowhere else met with,
nor is there any objection to an interpretation which has
commended itself to a great many and which the con-
text plainly demands. [But on this difficult word see
esp. Jas. Morison, Crit. Expos. of the Third Chap. of
Rom. p. 93 sqq-; Gifford in the ‘Speaker’s Com.’ p. 96;
W.§38, 6; § 39 fin. cf. p. 554 (516).]*
mpo-nyéopat, -ovuar; to go before and show the way, to
go before and lead, to go before as leader, (Hat. 2, 48;
often in Xen.; besides in Arstph., Polyb., Plut., Sept.,
al.): 79 Tip adAndovs mponyovpevor, one going before
another as an example of deference [ A. V. in honor pre-
ferring one another (on the dat. cf. W. § 31, 6 a.)], Ro.
539
Tpola TH pL
xii. 10. The Grk. writ. connect this verb now with the
dat. (Arstph. Plut. 1195; Polyb. 6, 53, 8; ete.), now with
the gen. (Diod. 1, 87); see mpoépxyoua, 2 a.*
mpo-Geots, -ews, 7, (apotiOnpe) 5 1. the setting forth
of a thing, placing of it in view, (Plat., Dem., Plut.); of
adprot ths mpobecews (Vulg. panes propositionis), the show-
bread, Sept. for 390 on (Ex. xxxv. 13; xxxix. 18
(xxxviii. 36); 1 K. vii. 48 (34)), and noaypn ond (1
Chr. ix. 32; xxiii. 29); twelve loaves of wheaten bread,
corresponding to the number of the tribes of Israel,
which loaves were offered to God every Sabbath, and,
separated into two rows, lay for seven days upon a
table placed in the sanctuary or anterior portion of
the tabernacle, and afterwards of the temple (cf. Winer,
RWB. s. v. Schaubrode; Roskoff in Schenkel v. p. 213
sq.; [Edersheim, The Temple, ch. ix. p. 152 sqq.; BB.
DD.]): Mt. xii.4; Mk. ii. 26; Lk. vi. 4, (of dpros rod mpoo-
@rov, sc. Geod, Neh. x. 33; dpror évwmtor, Ex. xxv. 29);
7 mpoGeots Tv aprav, (the rite of) the setting forth of
the loaves, Heb. ix. 2. 2. a purpose (2 Mace. iii. 8;
[Aristot.], Polyb., Diod., Plut.): Acts xxvii. 13; Ro. viii.
ASS be WIS 10s ro WEA ELS 2) Abn se Gs mate TE cer
mpoleoe. ths Kapdtas, with purpose of heart, Acts xi.
23.*
ampo-Séc tos, -a, -ov, (po [q.v.in d. B.] and Gecpos fixed,
appointed), set beforehand, appointed or determined be-
Sorehand, pre-arranged, (Leian. Nigr. 27); 4 mpoOecpia,
sc. nuépa, the day previously appointed; univ. the pre-ap-
pointed time: Gal. iv. 2. (Lys., Plat., Dem., Aeschin.,
Diod., Philo—cf. Siegfried, Philo p. 113, Joseph., Plut.,
al.; eccles. writ.; cf. Kypke and Hilgenfeld on Gal.
Ibe)"
apo0upia, -as, 7, (mpodupos), fr. Hom. down; 1.
zeal, spirit, eagerness ; 2. inclination ; readiness of
mind: so Acts xvii. 11; 2 Co. viii. 11 sq. 19; ix. 2.*
arpd0upos, -ov, (mpo and Oupds), fr. [Soph. and] Hat.
down, ready, willing: Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; neut. 7d
mpobupor, i. q. 9 mpobvpia: Ro. i. 15, as in Thue. 3, 82;
Plat. lege. 9 p. 859b.; Eur. Med. vs. 178; Joseph. antt.
4, 8,13; Hdian. 8, 3, 15 [6 ed. Bekk.] (on which cf.
Irmisch) ; 3 Mace. v. 26.*
mpo0tpws, adv., fr. Hdt. and Aeschyl. down, willingly,
with alacrity: 1 Pet. v. 2.*
apdipos, SC mpwipos.
apo-tornp.: 2 aor. inf. rpoorjvar; pf. ptcp. mpoeoras ;
pres. mid. mpoiorapat; fr. Hom. Il. 4, 156 down ; a
in the trans. tenses to set or place before; to set over. 2:
in the pf. plpf. and 2 aor. act. and in the pres. and impf.
mid. a. to be over, to superintend, preside over, [A.V.
rule], (so fr. Hdt. down): 1 Tim. v. 17; with a gen. of
the pers. or thing over which one presides, 1 Th. v. 12;
1 Tim. iii. 4 sq. 12. b. to be a protector or guar-
dian; to give aid, (Eur., Dem., Aeschin., Polyb.): Ro.
xii. 8 [(al. with A.V. to rule; cf. Fritzsche ad loc.; Stuart,
Com. excurs. xii.) ]. ce. to care for, give attention to.
w. a gen. of the thing, cadav épyar, Tit. iii. 8, 145 for
exx. fr. prof. writ. see Kypke and Lésner; [some (cf. R.V.
mrg.) would render these two exx. profess honest occu
mpokarew
pations (see épyov, 1); but cf. épyov, 3 p. 248° mid. and
Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad 1. c.].*
mpo-kahéw, -: pres. mid. ptep. mpoxadrovpevos; to call
forth (ef. mpd, d. a.]; Mid. to call forth to one’s self, esp.
to challenge to a combat or contest with one; often so fr.
Hom. down; hence to provoke, to irritate: Gal. v. 26 [(es
@pornta k. opynv, Hdian. 7, 1, 11, 4 ed. Bekk.) ].*
mpo-kat-ayyéhAw: 1 aor. mpoxarnyyea; pf. pass. ptcp.
mpoxarnyyedpevos ; to announce beforehand (that a thing
will be): of prophecies, — foll. by an acc. with inf. Acts
iii. 18; ri, Acts iii. 24 Rec.; mepi twos, Acts vii. 52. To
pre-announce in the sense of to promise: ri, pass. 2 Co. ix.
5 Rec. (Joseph. antt. 1, 12, 3; 2, 9, 4; eccles. writ.) *
awpo-Kat-apritw: 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. plur. mpoxarap-
ticwot; to prepare [A. V. make up] beforehand: ri, 2 Co.
ix. 5. (Hippocr.; eccles. writ.) *
arpé-Kear; (apd [q. v.d.a.] and xeipa); fr. Hom.
down; 1. prop. to lie or be placed before (a person
or thing), or in front (often so in Grk. writ.). 2.
to be set before, i. e. a. to be placed before the eyes,
to lie in sight ; to stand forth: with a pred. nom., detypa,
as an example, Jude 7 (kaddv imdderypa oor mpdxerrat, Jo-
seph. b. j. 6, 2, 1). b. i. q. to be appointed, destined :
mpoxetmevn eAmis, the hope open to us, offered, given, Heb.
vi. 18; used of those things which by any appointment
are destined to be done, borne, or attained by any one;
SO mpokeipevos ayov, Heb. xii. 13 mpoxeup. xapa, the des-
tined joy (see dvri, 2 b.), ibid. 2 (the phrase ra GO)a mpo-
keto@au occurs often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. down; cf.
Bleek, Br. an die Heb. ii. 2 p. 268 sqq.). c. to be
there, be present, be at hand, (so that it can become actual
or available) : 2 Co. viii. 12.*
Tpo-Knpvoocw: 1 aor. ptcp. mpoxnpvEas ; pf. pass. ptep.
TpOKEKNpUYHEVOS 3 1. to announce or proclaim by
herald beforehand (Xen. resp. Lac. 11, 2; Isae. p. 60, 2;
Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.). 2. univ. fo announce
beforehand (of the herald himself, Soph. El. 684): *In-
covv Xpioréy, i. e. his advent, works, and sufferings, pass.
Acts iii. 20 Rec.; ri, Acts xiii. 24 (lepepias ra péAXovra
Th mode Sewd mpoexnpvéer, Joseph. antt. 10, 5, 1).*
mpo-KoTh, -7s, 7, (mpoxdmT@, q. V-), progress, advance-
ment: Phil. i. 12, 25; 1 Tim.iv.15. (Polyb., Diod., Jo-
seph., Philo, al.; rejected by the Atticists, cf. Phrynich.
ed. Lob. p. 85; [Sir. li. 17; 2 Mace. viii. 8].) *
mpo-Korrw : impf. mpoéxorrov; fut. mpoxoyw; 1 aor.
mpoexowa; to beat forward ; 1. to lengthen out by
hammering (as a smith forges metals) ; metaph. to promote,
forward, further: Hdt., Eur., Thuc., Xen., al. 2.
fr. Polyb. on intransitively [cf. B. 145 (127); W. 251
(236) ], to go forward, advance, proceed; of time: 4 vvé
mpoexowey, the night is advanced [A. V. is far spent], (day
is at hand), Ro. xiii. 12 (Joseph. b.j. 4, 4, 6; [ampoko-
mrovons THs Spas] Charit. 2, 3,3 [p. 38,1 ed. Reiske; ra
THs vukrés, ib. 2, 3, 4]; 9 myepa mpokdmret, Just. Mart.
dial. c. Tryph. p. 277 d.; Lat. procedere is used in the
same way, Livy 28,15; Sallust. Jug. 21, 52,109). met-
aph. to increase, make progress: with a dat. of the thing
in which one grows, Lk. ii. 52 [not Tdf.] (Diod. 11, 87) ;
540
™poopaw
év with a dat. of the thing, ibid. Tdf.; Gal. i. 14, (Diod.
excerpt. de virt. et vitiis] p. 554, 69; Antonin. 1, 17);
émt mAeiov, further, 2 Tim. iii. 9 (Diod. 14, 98) ; émt mAetov
doeBeias, 2 Tim. ii. 16; émt 7d xeipov, will grow worse,
i. e. will make progress in wickedness, 2 Tim. iii. 13
(rév ‘Iepooohvpov maby mpovxonte Kad” nuepay ent Td
xeipov, Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 1).*
ap6-Kpia, -ros, TO, (mpd and kpipa), an opinion formed
before the facts are known, a pre-judgment, a prejudice,
(Vulg. praejudicium): 1 Tim. v. 21 (anonym. in Suidas
s.v.; [Athan. apol. c. Arian. 25 (i. 288 a. ed. Migne);
Justinian cod. 10, 11, 8, § €]).*
apo-Kupdw, -3: pf. pass. ptcp. mpoxexupopevos; to sanc-
tion, ratify, or establish beforehand: Gal. iii. 17. ([Euseb.
praep. evang. 10, 4 (ii. p. 70, 3 ed. Heinichen)]; Byzant.
writ.) *
arpo-AapBave; 2 aor. mpocAaBov; 1 aor. pass. subjunc.
3 pers. sing. mpodnpén [-Anupéy LT Tr WH; sees. v.
M, »]; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to take before: ri, 1 Co.
dig PNG 2. to anticipate, to forestall: mpoedaBe pupi-
oa, she has anticipated the anointing, [hath anointed
beforehand], Mk. xiv. 8; ef. Meyer ad loc.; W. § 54,
4, 3. to take one by forestalling (him i. e. before he
can flee or conceal his crime), i.e. surprise, detect, (Sap.
XVil. 16) : twa ev mapamrapart, pass. Gal. vi. 1; cf. Winer,
Ep. ad Gal. 1. c.*
arpo-héyw ; impf. mpoeAeyov; to say beforehand, to pre-
dict, (so fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down): 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal.
y. 21; 1 Th. iii. 4; [some (see R. V. mrg.) would give
mpo- the sense of plainly in all these exx.; cf. L. and S.
s.v. I. 2, and see mpd, d. a. fin.].* i
TPO-PAPTUPOL.AL ; 1. antetestor (in the old lexi-
cons). 2. to testify beforehand, i.e. to make known
by prediction: 1 Pet. i. 11; so also [Basil. Seleuc. 32 a.
(Migne vol. lxxxv.) and] by Theodorus Metochita (ce. 75,
misc. p. 504) — a writ. of the fourteenth century.*
mpo-pedeTaw, -@; to meditaie beforehand: Lk. xxi. 14
(Arstph., Xen., Plato).*
arpo-pepipvaw ; to be anxious beforehand: Mk. xiii. 11
(Clem. Alex. strom. 4, 9, 72; [Hippol. ref. haer. 6, 52
p. 330, 69; 8, 15 p. 482, 3]).*
Tpo-voew, -@; pres. mid. mpovootpa; fr. Hom. down;
1. to perceive before, foresee. 2. to provide, think
of beforehand: twds (see Matthiae § 348, vol. ii. p. 821
{but cf. §379 p. 862]; Kiihner § 419, 1 b. ii. p. 325; [Jelf
§ 496]; W. § 30, 10c.), to provide for one, 1 Tim. v. 8
(where T Tr txt. WH mrg. apovoeirat) ; mepi tevos, Sap.
vi. 8. Mid. with an ace. of the thing, i. a. to take thought
for, care for a thing: Ro. xii. 17; 2 Co. viii. 21 (where
LT Tr WH have adopted mpovoodpev).*
mpdvora, -as, 7), (mpdvoos), fr. [Aeschyl., Soph.], Hat.
down, forethought, provident care: Acts xxiv. 2(3) [A.V.
providence]; movovpat mpdvoidy twos, to make provision for
a thing (see motéw, I. 3 p. 526° top), Ro. xiii. 14.*
mpo-opdw, -@; pf. ptcp. mpoewpaxas; impf. mid. (Acts
li. 25) mpowpeunv, and without augm. (see dpode, init.)
mpoopopny LT Tr WH; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to see
before (whether as respects place or time): rend, Acts
am poopita
xxi. 29. 2. Mid. (rare use) to keep before one’s eyes:
metaph. rivd, with évamidv pou added, to be mindful of
one always, Acts ii. 25 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8.*
mpo-opl{w: 1 aor. mpodpica; 1 aor. pass. ptep. mpoopr-
obevres; to predetermine, decide beforehand, Vulg. [exc.
in Acts] praedestino, [R. V. to foreordain]: in the N. T.
of God decreeing from eternity, foll. by an acc. with the
inf. Acts iv. 28; ri, with the addition of mpo ray alévar,
1 Co. ii. 7; twa, with a pred. acc., to foreordain, appoint
beforehand, Ro. viii. 29 sq.; twa eis 4, one to obtain a
thing, Eph. i. 5; mpoopicOevres sc. kAnpwOnvat, Eph. i. 11.
(Heliod. and eccl. writ. [Ignat. ad Eph. tit.]) *
Tpo-raaoxXw: 2 aor. ptep. mpomabdvres ; to suffer before:
1 Th. ii. 2. (Hdt., Soph., Thuc., Plat., al.) *
Tpo-ratwp, -opos, 6, (matnp), a forefather, founder of a
family or nation: Ro. iv.1 L TTr WH. (Pind., Hdt.,
Soph., Eur., Plat., Dio Cass. 44, 37; Lceian., al.; Plut.
consol. ad Apoll. c. 10; Joseph. antt. 4, 2,4; b.j. 5, 9,4,
Ev. Nicod. 21. 24. 25 sq.; eccl. writ.) *
mpo-réparw ; impf. mpoemeumov; 1 aor. act. mpoémepwa ;
1 aor. pass. mpoeréppOnv; fr. Hom. down; 1. tosend
before. 2. to send forward, bring on the way, ac-
company or escort: ted, 1 Co. xvi. 6, 11, [al. associate
these exx. with the group at the close]; with ¢xet (for
exeioe) added, Ro. xv. 24; eis with an acc. of place, Acts
xx. 38; 2Co.i. 16 [here R. V. set forward (see below) ];
€ws ¢£w ths méAews, Acts xxi. 5. to set one forward, fit
him out with the requisites for his journey: Acts xv. 3
[al. associate this ex. with the preceding]; Tit. iii. 13;
3 Jn. 6; 1 Mace. xii. 4, cf. 1 Esdr. iv. 47.*
mpotrerts, -€s, (pd and reo i. e. Tinta) ; 1. fail-
ing forwards, headlong, sloping, precipitous: Pind. Nem.
6, 107; Xen. r. eq. 1, 8; al. 2. precipitate, rash,
reckless: Acts xix. 36; 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Prov. x. 143 xiii.
3; Sir. ix. 18; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1,1; and often in Grk.
writ.).*
apo-rropevw: 1 fut. mid. mpomopevcouar; to send before,
to make to precede, (Ael. nat. an. 10, 22 [var.]); mid. to
go before, to precede, [see mpd, d. a.]: twds (on which gen.
see W. § 52, 2¢.), to go before one, of a leader, Acts vii.
40; mpo mpocwmov tiwds (after the Hebr., Ex. xxxii. 34;
Deut. iii. 18; ix. 3), of a messenger or a herald, Lk. i. 76;
(of the van of an army, 1 Mace. ix. 11; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2,
23; Polyb.). [Cf. gpyopar, fin. ]*
mpés, a preposition, i.q. Epic mpori, from mpé and the
adverbial suffix 71, (cf. the German vor... hin [Curtius
§ 381]); it is joined
I. with the AccusATIVE, to, towards, Lat. ad, denot-
ing direction towards a thing, or position and state
looking towards a thing (W. § 49h. p. 404 (378)); it is
used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a
movement is directed: mpds twa or tT, a. prop.
after verbs of going, departing, running, com-
ing, etc.: dyw, Jn. xi. 15; dvaBaivw, Mk. vi. 51; Jn. Xx,
17; Acts xv. 2; dvaxdunrw, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xviii. 21;
dvépxopa, Gal. i. 17 [L. Tr mrg. drépy.]; drépxopa, Mt.
xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Mk. iii. 13, etc. ; mpds éavrdy, to his house,
Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the vs. ; Tr reads
541
™ pos
mp. avrdév; some connect the phrase w. Gavudtar (see 2 b.
below)]; Jn. xx. 10 (T Tr abrovs, WH air. (cf. s. v. abroa
sub fin.)]; yiveoOae mpds riva, to come to one, 1 Co. ii. 3;
Xvi. 10; dtamepaw, Lk. xvi. 26; éyyitw, Mk. xi. 1; Lk. xix.
29; eloepxowat, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 28; Acts x.3; [mpds r.
Avdiavy, into the house of L. Acts xvi. 40 (Rec. eis) ];
etc.; Rev. iii. 20; efamopevouat, Acts xxviii. 30; exmopev-
ona, Mt. iii. 5; Mk. i. 5; e€€pxouat, Jn. xviii. 29, 38; 2 Co.
vili. 17; Heb. xiii. 13; émorpépo, to turn (one’s self),
Acts ix. 40; 2 Co. iii. 16; 1Th.i. 9; emovvayerba, Mk.
i. 33; Epxouat, Mt. iii. 14; vii. 15, and often; fo, In. vi.
37; Acts xxviii. 23 [Rec.]; xaraBaivw, Acts x. 21; xiv.
11; Rev. xii. 12; peraBatva, Jn. xiii. 1; 6pOpitw, Lk. xxi.
38; mapayivona, Mt. iii. 13; Lk. vii. 4, 20; viii. 19; xi.
6; [xxii. 52 Tdf.]; wopevopa, Mt.x. 6; Lk. xi. 5; Jn. xiv.
12, etc.; cvvayerOa, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62; Mk. iv. 1; vi.
BIDE Apis Ite ovrtpexewv, Acts iii. 11; tmdyo, Mt. xxvi. 18;
Mk. v.19; Jn. vii. 33; xiii. 3; xvi. 5,10, 16 [T Tr WH
om. L br. the cl.], 17; xarevOuvew ryv 68d, 1 Th. iii. 11;
also after [kindred] nouns: etcodos, 1 Th. i. 9; ii. 1; mpoo-
aywyn, Eph. ii. 18. after verbs of moving, lead-
ing, sending, drawing, bringing, directing:
ayo, Mk. xi. 7[ RL]; Lk. xviii. 40; Jn. i. 42 (43); [xviii
13LT Tr WH]; Acts ix. 27, ete.; amayw, Mt. xxvi. 57
[R. V. to the house of C. (cf. Acts xvi. 40 above) ]; Mk.
xiv. 53; Jn. xviii. 13 [RG]; Acts xxiii. 17; 1 Co. xii.
2; [e&dyw éws mpds (see éws, II. 2c.), Lk. xxiv. 50 L txt.
T Tr WH]; xaracipw, Lk. xii. 58; dprato, Rev. xii. 5;
kvo, Jn. xii. 32; wapadapBave, Jn. xiv.3; pépw, Mk. i.
32; ix. 17,19, 20; [xi.7TTrWH]; euro, Lk. vii. 6
[not T WH], 19; Acts xxv. 21[L T Tr WH avarz-.], ete.
(see méumw) 3; dvaréumw, Lk. xxiii. 7,15; dmooréA\o, Mt.
xxili. 34, etc. (see dmoareddo, 1 b. and d.); orpehopa,
Lk. vii. 44; xxiii. 28. after verbs of falling: mimrew
mpos Tovs mddas twds, Mk. v. 22; vii. 25; [Acts v.10 LT
Tr WH]; Rev. i. 17. after other verbs and substan-
tives with which the idea of direction is connected: as
émioroA mpds twa, Acts ix. 2; xxii. 5; 2 Co. iii. 1; évroAn,
Acts xvii. 15; dvadeséis, Lk. i. 80; Kaumro Ta yovara, Eph.
iii. 145 éxmerdvyvpe ras xeipas, Ro. x. 21 (fr. Is. lxv. 2);
mpocwmoy mpos mpocwmor, face (turned) to face, i. e. in
immediate presence, 1 Co. xiii. 12 (after the Hebr., Gen.
xxxii. 80; Judges vi. 22); ordua mpds ordpa, mouth
(turned) to mouth, i. e. in each other’s presence, 2 Jn.
12; 3 Jn. 14, (see ordpa, 1) ; Aadeiv mpos 76 ods, the mouth
being put to the ear, Lk. xii. 3. after verbs of adding,
joining to: mpoorbévar twa mpos Tods marépas, to lay
one unto, i.e. bury him by the side of, his fathers, Acts
xiii. 36 (after the Hebr., 2 K. xxii. 20; Judg. ii. 10);
Garret tia mpds twa, Acts v.10. after verbs of saying
(because speech is directed towards some one), invok-
ing, swearing, testifying, making known: w.
an ace. of the pers., dvotyw rd ordpa, 2 Co. vi. 11; €trrov,
Lk. i. 13, and very often by Luke; Jn. iv. 48; vii. 3, etc. ;
Heb. i. 13; Aadew, Lk. i. 19, 55; ii. 18, ete.; 1 Th. ii. 2;
Heb. v. 5; xi. 18; Aéyw, Lk. v. 36, etc.; Jn. ii. 3; iv. 15,
ete. ; Heb. vii. 21; pnp, Lk. xxii. 70; Acts ii. 38 [R G];
x. 28, etc.; Siadéyopar, Acts xxiv. 12; dmoxpivopat, Lk
T™ pos
iv. 4; Acts iii. 12; déoua, Acts vill. 24; Bodo, Lk. xviii.
7([RGL]; aipew harnr, Acts iv. 24; etyoua, 2 Co. xiii.
7; Suvvps, Lk. i. 73; papris ejyi, Acts xiii. 31; xxii. 15;
Snunyopew, Acts xii. 21; Katyyopew, to accuse to, bring, as
it were, to the judge by accusation, Jn. v. 45; eppavica,
Acts xxiii. 22; ywpiterar, be made known unto, Phil. iv.
6. also after [kindred] substantives [and phrases]:
drodoyia, addressed unto one, Acts xxil. 1; Adyos, 2 Co.
i. 185; Adyos mapaxAnseas, Acts xiii. 15; 6 Adyos yiverat
mpés twa, Jn. x. 35 (Gen. xv. 1,4; Jer. i. 2, 115 xii. 8;
Ezek. vi. 1; Hos. i. 1); yiverat povn, Acts vii. 31 Rec.; x.
13, 15; yivera émayyedia, Acts xiii. 32 and Ree. in xxvi.
6 [where L T Tr WH eis]; mpocevyn, Ro. xv. 30; denaus,
Ro. x. 1; mpoodépewv Senoets, Heb. v. 7. mpds adAndovs
after dvriBdAAew Adyous, Lk. xxiv. 17; dadadeiy, LK. vi.
11; duadréyerOa, Mk. ix. 34; dcadoyiferda, Mk. viii. 16 ;
eireiv, Lk. ii. 15 [CL mrg. T WH Aadeiv)]; xxiv. 32; Jn.
xvi. 17; xix. 24; Aéyew, Mk. iv. 41; Lk. viii. 25; Jn. iv.
33; Acts xxviii. 43 dpwAetv, Lk. xxiv. 14; ocvAAadeiv, Lk.
iv. 36. mpds éavtovs i. q. mpds dAAnAovs: after outnreiv,
Mk. i. 27 [T WH txt. read simply adrovs (as subj.) ]; ix.
16; Lk. xxii. 23; etmeiv, Mk. xii. 7; Jn. xii. 19; Neyew, Mk.
Xvi. 35 dyavakreiv, [R. V. had indignation among them-
selves, saying], Mk. xiv. 4 T WH (cf. Tr); see 2 b. be-
low. b. of a time drawing towards a given time
[ef. f. below]: mpos éomépay éotiv, towards evening, Lk.
xxiv. 29 (Gen. viii.11; Zech. xiv. 7; Plato de rep. 1 p.
328 a.; Joseph. antt.5, 4, 3; mpds nuepav, Xen. anab. 4,
5, 21; Plato, conviv. p. 223 c.) ; [mpos oaBBarov, Mk. xv.
42 L Tr txt.]. c. metaph. of mental direction, with
words denoting desires and emotions of the mind, to,
towards: évOexview mpavtnta, Tit. iii. 2; paxpoOupetv, 1
Th. v. 14; fos, 2 Tim. ii. 24; ¢yOpa, Lk. xxiii. 12; meroi-
Onow é€xew, 2 Co. iii. 4; [eAmida ¢y. Acts xxiv. 15 Tdf.];
miotts, 1 Th.i. 8; mappnoia, 2 Co. vii. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 21; v.
14; with verbs signifying the mode of bearing one’s self
towards a pers., epyaCerOat 76 dyadov, Gal. vi. 10; movety
ta aura, Wiph. vi. 9 (Xen. mem. 1,1,6). of a hostile
direction, against; so after avraywvitecOa, Heb. xii. 4;
otnvat, Eph. vi. 113 Aakrifew, Acts ix. 5 Rec.; xxvi. 14,
(see xévrpov, 2) ; madn, Eph. vi. 12; pdyeoOa, Jn. vi. 52;
Staxpivoua, Acts xi. 2; yoyyvopéds, Acts vi. 1; BAaodnpia,
Rev. xiii. 6; muxpaiveoOa, Col. iii. 19; exew 71, Acts xxiv.
19; éyew Cnrnua, xxv. 19; poudny, Col. iii. 13; mpaypa,
1 Co. vi. 1; Adyov (see Aéyos, I. 6), Acts xix. 38; éxew
mpos twa, to have something to bring against one [R. V.
wherewith to answer], 2 Co. v.12; ra [which Tr txt. WH
om.] mpéds twa, the things to be said against one, Acts
xxiii. 30 [RG Tr WH; here may be added mpds mAn-
oporny capkés, against (i.e. to check) the indulgence of the
flesh, Col. ii. 23 (see rnoporn) ]. d. of the issue
or end to which anything tends or leads: # doOéveta od«
€ort mpos Gdvarov, Jn. xi. 4; dpaprdvew, duaptia mpos Odva-
toy, 1 Jn. v. 16 sq.3 & orpeBdovdor Tpos thy lav avtav
aronreav, 2 Pet. iii. 16; ra pds rip elpnynv sc. dvra, —
now, the things which tend to the restoration of peace
[A. V. conditions of peace], Lk. xiv. 32; now, which tend
to the attainment of safety [A.V. which belong unto
542
pos
peace], Lk. xix. 42; ra mpos Conv cal evoéBeay, [A. V.
that pertain unto], 2 Pet. i. 3; mpas ddéav rO Oe, 2 Co. i.
20; rov kupiov, 2 Co. viii. 19. e. of an intended
end or purpose: mpds vovOeciay tivds, 1 Co. x. 113
as other exx. add, Mt. xxvi.12; Ro. ili. 26; xv. 2; 1Co.
vi. 5; vii. 35; xii. 7; xiv. 12, 26; xv. 34; 2 Co. iv. 6; vii.
3; xi.8; Eph. iv. 12; 1 Tim.i.16; Heb. vi. 11; ix.
13; mpods ri, to what end, for what intent, Jn. xili. 28;
mpos tiv éenuoovynv, for the purpose of asking alms,
Acts iii. 10; mpds 76 with an inf. in order to, etc.: Mt.
Vel2Sivie UsextitacSOp) XI, Og exXxvien 2s eV Keexie 2 Zt
2 Co. iii. 18; Eph. vi. 11; 1 Th. ii.9; 2 Th. iii. 8, also
RG in Jas. iii. 3. f. of the time for whicha
thing has been, as it were, appointed, i.e. during
which it will last; where we use our for (Germ. /iir or
auf) [cf. b. above]: mpos xarpdv (Lat. ad tempus, Cic. de
off. 1,8, 27; de amicitia 15, 53; Liv. 21, 25, 14), i.e. for
a season, for a while, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; mpds
katpov dpas, [R. V. for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 173; mpos
épay, for a short time, for an hour, Jn. v. 35; 2 Co. vii. 8;
Gal. ii. 5; Philem. 15; mpds ddtyas npepas, Heb. xii. 10;
mpos to mapév, for the present, ibid. 11 (Thue. 2, 22;
Plato lege. 5 p. 736 a.; Joseph. antt. 6, 5,1; Hdian. 1,
3, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; Dio Cass. 41, 15); mpds dAtyov, for
a little time, Jas.iv 14 (Lcian. dial. deor.18,1; Aelian
v. h. 12, 63). 2. it is used of close proximity
—the idea of direction, though not entirely lost, being
more or less weakened ; a. answering to our at or by
(Germ. an); after verbs of fastening, adhering,
moving (to): SedécOat mpds tHv Ovpav, Mk. xi. 4; mpoc-
cod\Aacba, Mk.x.7 RG Tr (inmrg. br.); Eph.v. 31 RG
WH txt. ; rpooxdrrev, Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 115; xetoOat, i. g.
to be brought near to, Mt. iii. 10; Lk. iii. 9, [(cf. 2 Mace.
iv. 33)]; reOevar, Acts ili. 2; [iv.37 Tdf. (al. wapa)]; add,
BeBAnoba, Lk. xvi. 20; ra mpds thy Ovpay, the fore-court
[see Oipa, a.], Mk. ii. 2; etvae mpds tiv Oadaccay (prop-
towards the sea [A. V. by the sea]), Mk. iv. 1; Oeppai-
verOa mpos To Pas, turned to the light [R. V. in the light],
Mk. xiv. 54; xa@jo0Oa mpos ro pas, Lk. xxii. 56 5 eiorjxet
mpos TO pvnpetov, Jn. Xx. 11 Rec.; ef. Fritzsche on Mk.
p- 201 sq. b. i. q. (Lat. apud) with, with the ace. of a
person, after verbs of remaining, dwelling, tarry-
ing, etc. (which require one to be conceived of as always
turned towards one), cf. Fritzsche u.s.: after efva:, Mt.
xii. 56; Mk. vi. 3; ix. 19; xiv. 49; Lk. ix. 41; Jn.i.1sq.;
iA hierb Re al AMagscrRe Ns 7) Aine wk GSerne I) 3
xii. 20; 2Co. xi. 9 (8); Gal.iv.18, 20; sapovcia, Phil.
1.26; Scapevew, Gal. ii.5; mapapevew, 1 Co. xvi.6; ere
peve, ibid. 7; Gal.i.18; KxadéCeoOa, Mt. xxvi.55 [RG
LTr br.]; évdnueiv, 2Co.v.8; Kxaréxewv rivd mpds éaurdy,
Philem. 13. mpos €pavrov, etc., (apud animum meum),
with myself, etc., (2 Mace. xi. 13; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are
given in Passow s. v. I. 2 p. 1157*; [L. and S. s. v. C. I. 5]),
ovddoyifona, Lk. xx. 5; mpooedyouat, Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf.
om. mpés é., Grsb. connects it with oradeis]; dyavakreiv,
Mk. xiv. 4 [(cf. 1a. fin.) ; Aavpagew, Lk. xxiv. 12 (ace. to
some; see above, 1 a. ad init.) ]. Further, rovety rt mpds
twa, Mt. xxvi. 18; ¢yw xapw mpds tiva, Acts ii. 47; Kate
mapetva, Acts
T™pOS
xnua €x. mp. r. to have whereof to glory with one (prop.
turned ‘toward’ one), Ro. iv. 2; mapakAnrov mpds twa, 1
Jn. ii. 1. 3. of relation or reference to any
person or thing; thus a. of fitness: joined to
adjectives, dya@és, Eph.iv.29; €rotuos, Tit. iii. 1; 1 Pet.
lil. 153 ikavds,2Co.ii.16; Suvards, 2 Co. x. 4; éeénpti-
opevos, 2 Tim. iii. 17; péApos, 1 Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim.
lil. 16; dddxepos, Tit. i. 16; dvevderos, Acts xxvii. 12;
Aevkds, white and so ready for, Jn. iv. 35; ra mpds rH
Xpetay sc. avayxata, [R. V. such things as we needed], Acts
XXVviii. 10. b. of the relation or close connec-
tion entered (or to be entered) into by one person
with another: mepirareiv mpds (Germ. im Verkehr mit,
[tn intercourse with (A. V. toward)]; cf. Bnhdy. p. 265;
Passow s. v. I. 2 p. 1157*; [L. and S. s. v. C. 1.5]) teva,
Col. iv. 5; 1 Th. iv. 12; dvacrpéper Oa, 2 Co. i. 12; of
ethical relationship (where we use with), dovppwvos mpos
adAndovs, Acts xxviii. 25; kotvwvia, cupparnots mpds twa
or rt, 2 Co. vi. 15 sq.; elpnyny éxew [see eipnyn, 5], Ro. v.
15 cuveidnow Exew mpos tov Gedy, Acts xxiv. 16: dcaOnenv
évredXopat mpds twa, Heb. ix. 20 [see évrédAAa, fin.]; dca-
Onxnv SiariOnut, Acts iii. 25, (in Grk. writ. cvvOnxas, oor
8as, cuppaxiay moretcOat mpds twa, and similar expres-
sions ; cf. Passow [or L. and S.] u.s.); yy ramewoon ...
mpos tas, in my relation to you [R. V. before], 2 Co. xii.
21; mpos dv nuivy 6 Adyos (see Adyos, I. 5), Heb. iv. 13.
Here belongs also 2 Co. iv. 2 [A. V. to every man’s con-
science |. c. with regard to (any person or thing),
with respect to, as to; after verbs of saying: mpds twa,
Mikeexiiy 125 Wkeextin4 I s)xviil. 93-xix./9); xx. 19; Ro. x. 21;
Heb. i. 7sq.; mpos 16 detv mpooevxerOa, Lk. xviii. 1; éme-
tpémewv, ypahew te mpds Tt, Mt. xix. 8; Mk. x. 5; dmoxpt-
Ojvai te mpds Tt, Mt. xxvii. 14 ; dvramoxpOnva, Lk. xiv. 6;
ri €povpev mpods tavra, Ro. viii. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 12;
anab. 2, 1, 20). d. pertaining to: ta mpos tov Oedv
(see beds, 3y.), Ro. xv.17; Heb. ii. 17; v.15 ré mpos yas;
sc. eariv, what is that to us? i. e. it is none of our busi-
ness to care for that, Mt. xxvii. 4; also ri mpés o€; Jn.
xxi. 22, 23 [here Tdf. om. ]. e. in comparison (like
Lat. ad) i. q. in comparison with: so after d&tos (q. v-
in a.), Ro. viii. 18 (od AopoOjoerat Erepos mpds airéy,
Bar. iii. 36 (35) ; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666; [B. § 147,
28]). f. agreeably to, according to: mpés 4 (i. e. mpos
ravra &) émpake, 2 Co. v. 10; moveiv mpos TO Oé€Anua Tivos,
Lk. xii. 47; dpOomodeiv mpos tiv adnOetay, Gal. ii. 14.
Here belong Eph. iii. 4; iv. 14. g. akin to this is
the use of mpds joined to nouns denoting desires, emo-
tions, virtues, etc., to form a periphrasis of the adverbs
[cf. W. § 51, 2h.]: mpds pOdvor, enviously, Jas. iv. 5 (Lon
this pass. see POdvos]; mpos dpynv i. q. dpyidws, Soph. El.
369; mpos Biar i.q. Braios, Aeschyl. [Prom. 208, 353, ete. ]
Eum. 5; al.; pds 7Soviy cai mpds xapw, pleasantly and
graciously, Joseph. antt. 12, 10, 3; [other exx. in L. and
Ss, Ge aw (Oe WG 7/1)
I. with the Darrve, at, near, hard by, denoting close
local proximity (W. 395 (369 sq.)); so six times in the
N.T. (much more freq. in the Sept. and in the U. Au
Apoer.): Mk. v.11G LT Tr WH [R. V. on the moun-
543
Tpocaryw
tain side]; Lk. xix. 37; Jn. xviii. 16; xx. 11 (where Rec.
has mpds 76 py.), 12; Rev. i. 13.
III. with the GENITIVE, a. prop. used of that
from which something proceeds; b. (Lat. a parte
i.e.) on the side of; hence tropically mpés tivos efvat or
umapyxewv, to pertain to one, lie in one’s interests, be to one’s
advantage: so once in the N. T. retro mpds ris vperépas
gorTnpias Umapxet, conduces to [A. V. is for] your safety,
Acts xxvii. 34. (Kpoigos éAmicas mpds éwurod tov xpn-
opov eivat, Hdt. 1,75; od mpos r9s iperépas ddéns, it will
noteredound to your credit, Thuc. 3, 59; add, Plat. Gorg.
p- 459 c.; Leian. dial. deor. 20, 3; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 30;
Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 19, 6; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p- 659 sq.3
Matthiae p. 1385 sq.; [L. and S. s. vy. A. IV.]; W. 374
(350).)
IV. in ComposiTION rpés signifies 1. direction
or motion to a goal: mpocdyw, mpoceyyitw, mpooépxopat,
TpooTpexo. 2. addition, accession, besides: mpoc-
avariOnut, mpocarekéwa, mpocopeiAw. 3. vicinity:
mpocedpeva, mpoopevw. 4. our on, at, as in mpoo-
xémt@; and then of things which adhere éo or are fas
tened to others, as Tpoondw, poor yvupt 5. to or
for, of a thing adjusted to some standard: mpdéaxatpos.
Cf. Zeune ad Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666.
ampo-cGBBarov, -ov, 7d, the day befure the sabbath: Mk.
xv.42R GT WH([L Tr txt. pos caf. (cf. wpds, I. 1 b.)].
(Judith viii. 6 ; [Ps. xcii. (xciii.) heading; Nonn. paraph,
Toan. 19, 66; Euseb. de mart. Pal. 6, 1].)*
mpoo-ayopetw: 1 aor. pass. ptcp. mpocayopevbeis; to
speak to, to address, accost, salute, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Aris-
tph., Xen., Plat., al.); esp. to address or accost by some
name, call by name: twa with a pred. acc., and in the pass.
with a pred. nom. (1 Mace. xiv. 40; 2 Mace. xiv. 37), Heb.
v.10. (to give a name to publicly, to style, rwa or ri with
a pred. acc., Xen. mem. 3, 2, 1; dios "lovAos Kaioap 6 die
Tas mpakers mpocayopevdets Oeds, Diod. 1, 4; add [Sap.
xiv. 22]; 2 Macc. iv.7; x.9; xiv. 37; povpiov.. . Kat-
odpevav Um’ avrov mpocayopevbév, Joseph. antt. 15, 8, 5.)
Cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 97 sq.*
mpor-&yw; 2 aor. mpoonyayov; 1 aor. pass. mpoonxOny
(Mt. xviii. 24 L Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
DPT, wy, sometimes for 827; 1. transitively,
to lead to, bring, [see mpds, IV. 1]: tua &de, Lk. ix. 41;
twa tit, one to one [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14], Mt. xviii. 24
LTr WH; Acts xvi. 20; to open a way of access, twa
7@ Oca, for [A. V. to bring] one to God, i. e. to render
one acceptable to God and assured of his grace (a fig.
borrowed from those who secure for one the privilege of
an interview with the sovereign), 1 Pet. iii. 18 [note-
worthy is the use, without specification of the goal, in a
forensic sense, to summon (to trial or punishment), Acts
xii. 6 WH txt. (where al. rpodyw, q. v. 1)]. 2. in-
transitively (see dyw, 4), to draw near to, approach, (Josh.
iii. 9; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 3, ete.) : tui, Acts xxvii. 27 [ (not
WH mrg.)], where Luke speaks in nautical style phe-
nomenally, the land which the sailor is approaching
seeming to approach him; cf. Kuinoel [or Wetstein] ad
loc.; [see mpocavexw 2, and mpovaxew ].*
Tporaywyy
Tpoo-Aywyn, -7S, 173 1. the act of bringing to, a
moving to, (Thuc., Aristot., Polyb., al.). 2. access,
approach, (Hat. 2,58; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 45) [al., as Meyer
on Ro. as below (yet see Weiss in the 6th ed.), Ellic. on
Eph., insist on the transitive sense, introduction]: eis
ri xdpu, Ro. v. 2; to God, i.e. (dropping the figure) that
friendly relation with God whereby we are acceptable to
him and have assurance that he is favorably disposed
towards us, Eph. ii. 18; ii. 12.*
TPOT-ALTEW, -O ; 1. toask for in addition [ (see mpés,
IV. 2); Pind., Aeschyl., al.]. 2. to approach one
with supplications, (Germ. anbetteln [to importune; cf.
mpés, IV. 4]), to ask alms, ([Hdt.], Xen., Arstph., Eur.,
Plut., al.): Mk. x. 46 RGL; Lk. xviii. 35 (where LT
Tr WH have éenairav); Jn. ix. 8.*
mpocatrys, -ov, 6, a beggar: Mk. x. 46 T Tr WH; Jn.
ix. 8 (where for the Rec. rupdds). (Plut., Leian., Diog.
Laért. 6, 56.)*
tmpoo-ava-Batvw : 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. sing. mpocavaBnt ;
to go up farther: with avorepov added, Lk. xiv. 10 [A. V.
go up higher; al. regard the mpoo- as adding the sugges-
tion of ‘motion to’ the place where the host stands:
‘come up higher’ (cf. Prov. xxv. 7). Xen., Aristot., al.]*
mpoc-avadioxw: 1 aor. ptcp. fem. rpocavakoaoaca;
to expend besides [mpds, LV. 2]: tarpois (i. e. upon physi-
cians, B. § 133, 1; Ree. es larpovs [cf. W. 213 (200) ])
rov Biov, Lk. viii. 43 [WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]. (Xen.,
Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) *
Tpoo-ava-rAnpsw, -@; 1 aor. mpocaverjpwoa; to fill up
by adding to [cf. mpds, IV. 2]; to supply: ri, 2 Co. ix. 12;
xi. 9. (Sap. xix. 4; Aristot., Diod., Philo, al.) *
twpoo-ava-rTlOnur: 2 aor. mid. mpocavedeunv; 1.
to lay upon in addition (cf. mpés, IV. 2]. 2. Mid-
dle, a. to lay upon one’s self in addition: pédpror,
Poll. 1, 9, 99; to undertake besides: ri, Xen. mem. 2, 1,
8. b. with a dat. of the pers. to put one’s self upon
another by going to him (mpés), i. €. to commit or betake
one’s self to another sc. for the purpose of consulting him,
hence to consult, to take one into counsel, [A. V. confer
with], (Diod. 17,116 rots wavrect mpocavabépevos rept Tov
onueiov; Leian. Jup. trag. §1 €uot mpocavdbov, AdBe pe
cvpBovrov mévev), Gal.i.16. c. to add from one’s store
(this is the force of the middle), to communicate, impart:
rt tun, Gal. ii. 6.*
TPOT-AV-EXw ; 1. to hold up besides. 2. in-
trans. to rise up so as to approach, rise up towards: Acts
xxvii. 27 Lehm. ed. ster. (see rpoodyw 2, and mpocaxéw),
—a sense found nowhere else.*
Tpoo-amethew, -: 1 aor. mid. ptep. mpooamethnaauevos ;
to add threats, threaten further, [ef. mpés, IV. 2]: Acts
iv. 21. (Dem. p. 544, 26.) *
[mpoo-axéw, -6, Doric for tpoonxéa, to resound: Acts
xxvii. 27 WH mrg. (see their App. p. 151; al. ™poo-
dyetv, q. V.), of the roar of the surf as indicating nearness
to land to sailors at night.*]
mpoo-Samravdw, -: 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. sing. mpoc-
Saravyrys, to spend besides (cf. mpds, IV. 2], Vulg. super-
erogo: t1, Lk. x. 35. (Leian., Themist.) *
544
mpocepyalouar
arpoo-Séonat; depon. pass. to want besides, need in addi-
tion, (cf. mpds, IV. 2]: mpoodedpevds reves, “quom nullius
boni desideret accessionem” (Erasmus), [ A. V. as though
he needed anything], Acts xvii. 25. (Xen., Plat., sqq.;
Sept.; [in the sense to ask of, several times in Hadt.].)*
apoo-S¢xopat; depon. mid. ; impf. mpooedexdpnv; 1 aor.
mpocedekapny ; 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and
Hadt. down, to receive to one’s self, to admit, to give access
to one’s self: twa, to admit one, receive into intercourse
and companionship, rods dwaprwAovs, Lk. xv. 2; to re
ceive one (coming from some place), Ro. xvi. 2; Phil. ii.
29, (1 Chr. xii. 18); ri, to accept (not to reject) a thing
offered: ov mpood. to reject, Heb. xi. 35; mpoodéxovra
éArida, to admit (accept) hope, i. e. not to repudiate but
to entertain, embrace, its substance, Acts xxiv. 15 [al.
refer this to the next head (R. V. txt. look for)]; not to
shun, to bear, an impending evil [A. V. took the spoiling
etc.], Heb. x. 34. 2. as fr. Hom. down, to expect
[A. V. look for, wait for]: twa, Lk. xii. 36; ri, Mk. xv.
43; Lk. ii. 25, 38 ; xxili.51; [Acts xxiii. 21]; Tit. i. 13;
Jude 21; ras émayyeXias, the fulfilment of the promises,
Heb. xi. 13 Lchm. [Cf. d€yopat, fin. ] *
tmpocSokdw, -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. mpocedéxav (Acts
Xxvili. 6); (the simple verb is found only in the form
Soxevo; mpds [q. v- LV. 1] denotes mental direction); fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to expect (whether in thought,
in hope, or in fear); to look for, wait for: when the
preceding context shews who or what is expected, Mt.
xxiv. 50; Lk. iii.15; xii.46; Acts xxvii. 33; xxviii. 6;
Teva, one’s coming or return, Mt. xi. 3; Lk. i. 21; vii. 19
sq.; vill. 40; Acts x. 24; ri,2 Pet. iii. 12-14; foll. by
an acc. with infin. Acts xxviii. 6; foll. by an infin. be-
longing to the subject, Acts iii. 5.*
mpooSokla, -as, 7, (mpoodoxdw), fr. Thuc. and Xen.
down, expectation (whether of good or of evil): joined
to @dBos (Plut. Ant. 75; Demetr. 15) with a gen. of the
object added [W. § 50, 7 b.], Lk. xxi. 26; rod Aaod (gen.
of subject), the expectation of the people respecting
Peter’s execution, Acts xii. 11.*
TporSpénw, SCC mpooTpexa.
Tpoo-edw, -@; to permit one to approach or arrive: Acts
xxvii. 7 [R. V. txt. to suffer further; (cf. mpéds, IV. 23
Smith, Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 3d ed., p. 783
Hackett ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere.*
mpoo-eyyitw: 1 aor. inf. rpoceyyica; to approach unto
[mpéds, IV. 1]: with the dat. of a pers. [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14],
Mk. ii. 4 [where T Tr mrg. WH apocevéyxat]. (Sept.;
Polyb., Diod., Leian.) *
mpocedpevw; (mpdcedpos sitting near, [cf. mpds, IV.
3]); 1. prop. to sit near [(Eur., al.) ]. 2. to
attend assiduously : r@ Ovovactnpio (see mapedpeva), 1 Co.
ix. 13 Rec.; Protev. Jac. 23, 1 (where we also find the var.
mapedpev) ; Ti Oepareia tod beod, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 7,13
tais promovias, Aristot. pol. 8,4, 4 p. 1338°, 25; rots mpay-
pact, Dem. p. 14, 15 [i. e. Olynth. 1, 18]; with dat. of
pers. to be in attendance upon, not to quit one’s side, Jo-
seph. c. Ap. 1, 9, 1; [ef. Dem. 914, 28].*
mpoo-epydtopar: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. room etpvdcaro
Tpooépyouas
(RG Tr), spoon pyac. (LT WH; see epyaopat, init.) ;
1. to work besides (Eur., Plut.). 2. by working or
wading to make or gain. besides: Lk. xix. 16 (Xen. Hell.
3, 1, 28).*
Tpoo-épxonat; impf. 3 pers. plur. mpoojpxorro (Acts
Xxviii. 9) ; [fut. 3 pers. sing. mpoceAevoerat, Lk. i. 17 WH
mrg.]; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. mpooqdGov and [so L Tr WH
in Mt. ix. 28; xiii. 36; xiv. 15; T Tr WH in Mt. v. 1;
Lk. xiii. 31; WH in Mt. xix. 3; xxi. 23; Jn. xii. 21] in
the Alex. form rpoondGav (see drépxopat, and épyopat) ;
pf. mpocedndvéa (Heb. xii. 18, 22); fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; Sept. for 37? and W3; to come to, to approach,
[mpds, IV. 1]; a. prop. absol., Mt. iv. 11; Lk.
[i.17 WH mrg.]; ix.42; xxiii. 36; Acts viii. 29; xxviii.
9; mpoondOov déyovres, Lk. xiii. 31; with rhetorical ful-
ness of description (see dviornu, II. 1 ¢. [also Zpxopat, p.
250° bot.]) the ptcp. mpocedGwyr is joined to a finite verb
which denotes a different action: Mt. viii. 2LT Tr WH,
LOZ ORe TXT 2 One Rl On Ose KIV. 1 D> Ved 223i) xVie lls
Kviende [kv Ga) xix. 163 xxv. 20).22; 24-0 xxvii. 39-0 Tr
WH mrg. (acc. to a reading no doubt corrupt [ef. Secri-
vener, Introd. p. 16]), 50, 60, 73; xxviii. 2, 9,18; Mk. i.
31; x. 2; xii. 28; [xiv. 35 Tr WHmrg.]; Lk. vii. 14; viii.
24, 44; ix. 12,42; x. 34; xx. 27; xxiii. 36; Acts xxii. 26
Sq-; mpooépxopuat foll. by an infin. indicating the reason
why one has drawn near, Mt. xxiv. 1; Acts vii. 31; xii.
13 [here WH mrg. mpo7jde]; with a dat. of the place
(exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passow s. v. 1 a. p. 1190°;
[L. and S. s.v. I. 1]), Heb. xii. 18, 22; with the dat. of
a pers. (see Lexx. u.s.), Mt. v. 1; viii. 5; ix. 14, 28; xiii.
BO eXiVeel ois exe 1 SOse xvil.11 424s xvail. Ii; xix. 35) xx.
DOME xxi A OS XXII 2 Oise XXIV Oy XXVI. 175) 17,69 ens
xii. 21; Acts x. 28; xviii. 2; xxiv. 23 Rec.; [with émi and
the acc. Acts xx.13 Tr WHmrg.]. The ptcp. mpoo-
«day adr@ with a finite verb (see above) occurs in Mt.
iv. 3; xviii. 21; xxi. 28, 30; xxvi.49; xxvii.58; Mk. vi.
SexTV ett Oe Mee XN SPER KIS Oi UACES IX.) Ls ORTiT.
14. b. trop. a. mpocépy.T@ beg, to draw near to
God in order to seek his grace and favor, Heb. vii. 25 ;
xi. 6; 1@ Opdvm ts xadpiros, Heb. iv. 16; without ro
69, Heb. x. 1, 22, (in the O. T. mpocepy., simply, is used
of the priests about to offer sacrifices, Lev. xxi. 17, 21;
Deut. xxi. 53; with the addition of pds Oedv, of one about
to ask counsel of God, 1 S. xiv. 36; with rots Geois, of
suppliants about to implore the gods, Dio Cass. 56, 9);
mpos Xptordy, to attach one’s self to Christ, to come to a
participation in the benefits procured by him, 1 Pet. ii.
4 [cf. W. § 52, 3]. B. i. q. to assent to (cf. Germ.
beitreten [Lat.accedere; Eng. come (over) to, used fig.]) :
iyaivovor Adyous, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [Tdf. mpocéxerat, q. v. 3].
mpoo-evxh, -718, 9, (mporevyouar), Sept. for mbon, ing:
eby mpos tov Gedy [cf. apds, IV. 1]; 1. prayer ad-
dressed to God: Mt. xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs. ];
xxi. 22; Mk. ix. 29; Lk. xxii. 45; Acts iii.1; vi. 4; x.
31; Ro. xii. 12; 1 Co. vii. 5; Col. iv. 2; plur., Acts ii.
42; x. 4; Ro.i. 10(9); Eph.i.16; Col. iv.12; 1 Th.i.
2; Philem. 4, 22; 1 Pet. iii. 7; iv. 7; Rev.v. 8; viii. 3,4
(where rats mpocevyais is a dat. commodi, for, in aid of
545
TPOG EVV OMAaL
the prayers [W. § 31, 6c.; ef. Green p. 101 sq.]); otkos
mpooevxns, a house devoted to the offering of prayer to
God, Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi.17; Lk. xix. 46, (Is. lvi.7; 1
Mace. vii. 37); mpocevyy kal dénots, Acts i. 14 Ree.;
Eph. vi. 18; Phil. iv. 6, (1 K. viii. 38; 2 Chr. vi. 29; 1
Mace. vii. 37; on the distinction between the two words
see deynots); plur., 1 Tim: ii. 1; v.5; 9 ap. rod beov,
prayer to God, Lk. vi. 12 (edyapioria Oeod, Sap. xvi. 28;
cf. reff. in rioris, 1 a.); mpos rov Oedvimép [L T Tr WH
mepi} twos, Acts xii. 5; plur. Ro. xv. 30; mpocevy# mpoo=
evxerOa, a Hebraistic expression (cf. W. § 54, 3; [B.
§ 133, 22 a.]), to pray fervently, Jas. v. 17. 2. a
place set apart or suited for the offering of prayer; i.e. a.
a synagogue (see avvaywyn, 2b.) : 3 Mace. vii. 20 [ace. to
the reading mpocevynv; see Grimm, Com. in loc.]; Philo
in Flaccum § 6 [also § 14]; leg. ad Gaium §§ 20, 43, 46; Ju-
venal, sat. 1,3, 296 ; cuvayovrat mavres eis Thy mpowevyny,
Méycoroy otknpa Todty dydov émideEacba Suvdpevov, Jo-
seph. vita § 54. b. a place in the open air where the
Jews were wont to pray, outside of those cities where they
had no synagogue; such places were situated upon the
bank of a stream or the shore of the sea, where there
was a supply of water for washing the hands before
prayer: Acts xvi. 13, 16; Joseph. antt. 14, 10, 23, cf.
Epiph. haer. 80, 1. Tertullian in his ad nationes 1, 13
makes mention of the “orationes litorales” of the Jews,
and in his de jejuniis c. 16 says “Judaicum certe jeju-
nium nbique celebratur, cum omissis templis per omnes
litus quocunque in aperto aliquando jam preces ad caelum
mittunt.” [Josephus (e. Apion. 2, 2,2) quotes Apion as
representing Moses as offering af@pio: mpogevyat.] Cf.
De Wette, Archiologie, § 242; [Schiirer, Zeitgesch. § 27
vol. ii. p. 8369 sqq.]. Not used by prof. auth. except in
the passages cited above from Philo, Josephus, and Jue
venal [to which add Cleomedes 71, 16; ef. Boeckh, Corp.
inserr. ii. 1004 no. 2114 b. and 1005 no. 2114 bb. (a. D.
81), see Index s. v.].*
mpoc-evxopar; depon. mid.; impf. mpoonuydpunv; fut.
mpovevfopuat; 1 aor. mpoonv&duny; [on the augm.see WH.
App. p. 162; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]; fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down ; Sept. for Sbani; to offer prayers, to pray,
(everywhere of prayers to the gods, or to God [ef. déenars,
fin.]): absol., Mt. vi. 5-7, 9; xiv. 23; xxvi. 36, 39,44; Mk.
i. 35; vi.46; xi. 24 sq.; xiii. 33 [LT WH om. Tr br. the
cl.]; xiv. [32], 39; Lk. i. 10; iii. 215 v. 16; Vie L2seixels,
28 sq.; xi. 1sq.; xviii. 1, 10; xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject
the pass.]; Acts i. 24; vi.6; ix. 11, 40; x. OL EOE sig HP
xii. 12; xiii. 3; xiv. 23; xvi. 25; xx. 36; KX oxida Zs
xxviii. 8; 1 Co. xi. 4 sq.3 xiv.14; 1 Th.v.17; 1 Tim. ii.
8; Jas. v. 13,183 foll. by Aeyy and direct disc. con-
taining the words of the prayer, Mt. xxvi. 39, 42; Lk.
xxii.41; mpooed x. with a dat. indicating the manner or
instrument, 1 Co. xi.5 [W. § 31, 7d.]; xiv. 14 sq. [ef. W.
279 (262) sq.]; paxpd, to make long prayers, ms. xxiii.
14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx.47; év mvevpare (see
mvevpa, 4 a. p. 522° mid.), Eph. vi. 18; év mv. dyio, Jude
20; mpocevxy (see mpocevxn, 1 fin.), Jas. v.17; mpocevy:
with the acc. of a thing, Lk. xviii. 11; Ro. viii. 26 [cf. W.
Tpoceya
§41b.4b.; B.§139, 61¢.]; émi twa, over one, i.e. with
hands extended over him, Jas. v. 14 [cf. W. 408 (381)
n.]; sc. emt rwa, Mt. xix. 13. as commonly in Grk. writ.
with the dat. of the pers. to whom the prayers are offered
[ef. W. § 52, 4, 14]: Mt. vi. 6; 1 Co. xi. 13, (Is. xliv.
17); mepi with the gen. of a pers., Col. i. 3 [RG TWH
txt.]; 1 Th.v. 25; Heb. xiii. 18; tmép with the gen. of
‘a pers., Mt. v. 44; Lk. vi. 28 [where T WH Tr mrg. zrepi
(see mepi, I.c.y., also imép, I. 6); Col. i. 3 LL Tr WH mrg.
(see reff. as above), 9]; mpocevdy. foll. by ta, with the
design of, 1Co. xiv. 13, cf. Meyer in loc. [W. 460 (428) ];
the thing prayed for is indicated by a following iva (see
tva, II. 2b.): Mt. xxiv. 20; xxvi. 41; Mk. xiii. 18; xiv.
35, 38; Lk. xxii. 46, [but in Mt. xxvi. 41; MK. xiv. 38;
(Lk. xxii. 46 ?), iva is more com. regarded as giving the
aim of the twofold command preceding] ; rodro fva, Phil.
i. 9; mepi twos twa, Col. iv. 3; 2 Th. i. 11; iii. 1; tmép
rwos iva, Col. i. 9; imép tevos Oras, Jas. v. 16 L WH txt.
Tr mrg.; epi twos omws, Acts viii. 15, (dws [q. v. II. 2]
seems to indicate not so much the contents of the pray-
er as its end and aim); foll. by an inf. belonging to the
subject, Lk. xxii. 40; foll. by rod with the inf., Jas. v. 17.*
mpoo-€xo; impf. mpocetyov; pf. tpocecxnxa; [ pres. mid.
8 pers. sing. mpocexerat (1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf.)]; to turn to
[cf. mpos, IV. 1], i. e. 1. to bring to, bring near; thus
very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down with vady (quite
as often omitting the vadv) and a dat. of place, or foll. by
mpos with an ace. of place, to bring a ship to land, and
simply to touch at, put in. 2. a. Tov vovr, to turn
the mind to, attend to, be attentive: twi, to a person or
thing, Arstph. eqq. 503; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph.,
Lcian., Plut., al.; once so in the Bible, viz. Job vii. 17.
The simple rpocéyeww rwi (Sept. for wD, also for pis),
with rov vovv omitted, is often used in the same sense
from Xen. down; so in the N. T. [cf. W.593 (552); B.
144 (126)]: Acts viii. 6 ; xvi. 14; Heb.ii.1; 2 Pet. i. 19,
( Mace. vii. 11; 4 Mace. i.1; Sap. viii.12); in the sense
of caring for, providing for, Acts xx. 28. b. mpoo-
éx@ €uauta, to attend to one’s self, i. e. to give heed to one’s
self (Sept. for Ww}, to guard one’s self, i.e. to beware,
Gen. xxiv. 6; Ex. x. 28; Deut. iv. 9; vi. 12, etc.) : Lk.
xvii. 3; Acts v. 35 [ef. B. 337 (290); W.557 (518); yet
see eri, B.2 f.a.]; with the addition of dé twos, to be
on one’s guard against, beware of, a thing [cf. B. § 147,
'3 (and, 1.3 b.)]: Lk. xii. 1 (Tob. iv. 12; [ Test. xii. Patr.,
test. Dan 6]); also without the dat. mpocéy. aad twos:
Mt. vii. 15; x.17; xvi. 6,11 sq.; Lk. xx. 46, (Sir. vi. 13;
xi. 33; xvii. 14; xviii. 27; [‘ Teaching’ etc. 6,3; 12, 5]);
foll. by py with an inf., to take heed lest one doa thing,
Mt. vi. 1; €uavré, pnmore with the subjunc. Lk. xxi. 34;
absol. to give attention, take heed: Sir. xiii. 13; Barn.
ep.4, 9; 7,4.6.(9]; foll. by was, Barn. ep. 7, 7; by the
interrog. ri, ib. 15, 4; tva, ib. 16, 8; iva pnmore, Barn. ep.
4,13[var.; ta pn, 2 Chr. xxv. 16]; [znmore, Barn. ep. 4,
14]. 3. sc. éuaurdy, to apply one’s self to, attach one’s
self to, hold or cleave to a person ora thing, [R.V. mostly
give heed]: with the dat. of a pers. to one, Acts viii. 10 sq.
1 Tim. iv. 1; r6 EMLTKOT® Tp: Kal TO mpeoBurepio kat dta-
546
/
TpocKanrew
xévots, Ignat. ad Philad. 7,1; ad Polyc. 6, 1; with the dat.
of a thing, pvdous, 1 Tim. i.4; Tit. i. 14; [mid. tyaivover
Adyous, 1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf. (al. rpooépxerat, q.v.b.B.)]; to
be given or addicted to: oive, 1 Tim. iii. 8 (rpupj, Julian.
Caes. 22 [p. 326 ed. Spanh.]; rpup7 cal pé6y, Polyaen.
strateg. 8, 56); to devote thought and effort to: rh avayva-
oe xtA. 1 Tim. iv. 13; r@ Ovovaornpio, [A.V. give attend-
ance], Heb. vii. 13, (vavrixois, Thuc. 1,15; for other
exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 3 c.; [L. and S.s. v.
4b.]).*
mpooc-ndow, -@: 1 aor. ptcp. mpoondwaas; to fasten with
nails to, nail to, [cf. mpds, LV. 4]: ti r@ oravp@, Col. ii.
14. (3 Mace. iv. 9; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Philo,
Joseph., Plut., Lcian., al.) *
mpootAvtos, -ov, 6, (fr. mporepxopat, pf. mpocedndvéa,
ef. B. 74 (64); [W. 24. 26. 97 (92)]); 1. a new-
comer [Lat. advena; cf. mpds, [V. 1]; @ stranger, alien,
(Schol. ad Apoll. Rhod. 1, 834; Sept. often for 73 [cf.
Philo de monarch. 1, 7 ad init.]). 2. a proselyte,
i.e. one who has come over from a Gentile religion to
Judaism (Luther, Judengenosse): Mt. xxiii. 15; Acts
ii. 11 (10); vi.5; xii.43. The Rabbins distinguish two
classes of proselytes, viz. pis" proselytes of right-
eousness, who received circumcision and bound them-
selves to keep the whole Mosaic law and to comply with
all the requirements of Judaism, and 1pwr 3 prose-
lytes of the gate (aname derived apparently from Ex.
xx. 10; Deut. v. 14; [xiv. 21]; xxiv. 16 (14), 21 (19)),
who dwelt among the Jews, and although uncircumcised
observed certain specified laws, esp. the seven precepts
of Noah (as the Rabbins called them), i. e. against the
seven chief sins, idolatry, blasphemy against God, homi-
cide, unchastity, theft or plundering, rebellion against
rulers, and the use of “flesh with the blood thereof.”
[Many hold that this distinction of proselytes into classes
is purely theoretical, and was of no practical moment in
Christ’s day; cf. Lardner, Works, xi. 306-324; cf. vi.
522-533; Schiirer in Riehm as below.] Cf. Leyrer in
Herzog xii. p. 237 sqq. [rewritten in ed. 2 by Delitzsch
(xii. 293 sqq.)], Steiner in Schenkel iv. 629 sq.; [BB.
DD.]; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 644 [(whose views
are somewhat modified, esp. as respects classes of pros-
elytes, in his 2te Aufl. § 31 V. p. 567, and his art. ‘ Pros
elyten’ in Riehm p. 1240 sq.)] and the bks. he refers to.*
tmpda-Katpos, -ov, (i. q. 6 mpds katpov dv), for a season
(cf. xpds, LV. 5], enduring only for a while, temporary:
Mt. xiii. 21; Mk.iv.17; 2 Co. iv. 18; Heb. xi. 25. (4
Mace. xv. 2; Joseph. antt. 2,4,4; Dio Cass., Dion. Hal.
[Strabo 7, 3, 11], Plut., Hdian.; 6 mapdv xai mpdckatpos
«dapos, Clem. homil. 20, 2.)
mpoo-Kadێw, -@: Mid., pres. mpocxadoduat; 1 aor. mpoo-
exareoauny; pf. mpooxexAnuat; from [Antipho, Arstph.,
Thuc.], Xen., Plat. down; ¢o call to; in the N.T. found
only in the mid. [cf. B. § 135, 4], to call to one’s self; to
bid to come to one’s self: tia, a. prop.: Mt.x.1;
xv. 10,32; xviii. 2,32; xx. 25; Mk. iii. 13, 23; vi. 7; vii.
14; vill. 1,34; x. 42; xii.43; xv.44; Lk. vii.18 (19); xv.
26; xvi. 5; xviii. 16; Acts v.40; vi. 2; xiii. 7; xx.1[RG
TpocKapTepéw
L]; xxiii. 17, 18, 23; Jas. v. 14. b. metaph. God
is said mpockadeioba the Gentiles, aliens as they are from
him, by inviting and drawing them, through the preach-
ing of the gospel, unto fellowship with himself in the
Messiah’s kingdom, Acts ii. 39; the Holy Spirit and
Christ are said to call unto themselves [cf. W. § 39, 3]
those preachers of the gospel to whom they have decided
to intrust a service having reference to the extension of
the gospel: foll. by an inf. indicating the purpose, Acts
xvi. 10; foll. by ets rz, Acts xiii. 2 (where 6 is for eds 6,
ace. to that familiar Grk. usage by which a prep. pre-
fixed to the antecedent is not repeated before the rela-
tive; cf. W. 421 sq. (393); [B. 342 (294)]).*
Tpoo-Kaptepéw, -d; fut. mpooxaprepnow; (xaprepéw, fr.
kaprepos [‘strong,’ ‘ steadfast ’], of which the root is (7d)
kdptos for xpdros [‘ strength’; cf. Curtius § 72]) ; to per-
severe (‘continue steadfastly’] in any thing [cf. mpds, IV.
4]: of persons, with the dat. of a thing, to give constant
attention to a thing, Acts ii. 42 [here Lchm. adds év (once)
inbr.]; 77 mpocevyn, Acts i. 14; vi.4; Ro. xii. 12; Col.
iv. 2, (rais @npats, Diod. 3, 17; Th modtopkia, Polyb. 1,
55, 4; Diod. 14, 87; 14 xaOédpa, persist in the siege,
Joseph. antt. 5, 2,6); with the dat. of a person, to ad-
here to one, be his adherent; to be devoted or constant to
one: Acts viii. 13; x. 7, (Dem. p. 1386, 6; Polyb. 24, 5,
3; Diog. Laért. 8, 1,14); ets tt, to be steadfastly atten-
twe unto, to give unremitting care to a thing, Ro. xiii. 6 [cf.
Meyer ad loc.]; ¢» with a dat. of place, to continue all
the time in a place, Acts ii. 46 (Sus. 6); absol. to per-
severe, not to faint (in a thing), Xen. Hell. 7, 5,14; to
show one’s self courageous, for pinng, Num. xiii. 21 (20).
of a thing, with the dat. of a pers.,to be in constant read-
iness for one, wait on continually: Mk. iii. 9.*
Tpoo-KapTépycts, -ews, 7, (mpocKaprepew), perseverance :
Eph. vi. 18. Nowhere else; [Koumanoudes, Aé&. ano.
3. Ve."
ampoo-Kepadaroy, -ov, 7d, (fr. mpds [q. v- IV. 3] and the
adj. cepadaos [cf. kepadaioy]), a pillow, a cushion: Mk.
iv. 38. (Ezek. xiii. 18, 20; Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.) *
arpoo-kAnpdw, -@: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. mpocexAnpa-
O@noav; to add or assign to by lot, to allot: mpooexAnpo-
énoav 7G MavAw, were allotted by God to Paul, viz. as
disciples, followers, Acts xvii. 4 [W. § 39, 2 fin.; al. give
it a middle force, joined their lot to, attached them-
selves to, (A. V. consorted with); cf. leg. ad Gaium § 10
and other exx. fr. Philo as below]. (Plut. mor. p. 738d. ;
Lcian. am. 3; freq. in Philo, cf. Loesner, Observv. p. 209
sqq-) * -
ampéo-KAnoIs, -ews, 7), 1. a judicial summons:
Arstph., Plat., Dem. 2. an invitation: pydev roy
kara mpdokAnow, 1 Tim. vy. 21L Trmrg.; this reading,
unless (as can hardly be doubted) it be due to itacism,
must be translated by invitation, i. e. the invitation or
summons of those who seek to draw you over to their
side [see quotations in Tdf. ad loc. Cf. mpoaxAtots.] *
ampoo-KAlvw : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. mpooeKi6n 5 1.
trans. (to cause) to lean against [cf. mpds, IV, 4] (Hom.,
Pind.). 2. intrans. tii, to incline towards one, lean
547
TPOTKOTTM
to his side or party: Polyb. 4, 51, 5, etc.; 1 aor. pass.
mpooexAiOny with a mid. signif. to join one’s self to one:
Acts v. 36 LT Tr WH [(cf. W. § 52, 4, 14)]; 2 Mace.
Xiv. 24; rots Scxalors mpooexdin, Schol. ad Arstph. Plut.
1027; mpocexriOnre trois amoarodos, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
47, 4 and in other later writ.*
Tpoc-KALots, -ews, 7), an inclination or proclivity of mind,
a joining the party of one, (Polyb., [Diod.]) ; partiality:
kata mpooxduory, led by partiality (Vulg. in [aliam or]
alteram partem declinando), 1 Tim. v. 21 [RGT WH Tr
txt.]; xara mpockAices, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 7; dixa
mpook\icews avOpewrivns, ib. 50, 2, cf. 47,3 sq. (Cf. mpdc-
kAnots.) *
Tpoc-KohAdw, -G: 1 aor. pass. mpooexoAAnOnv; 1 fut.
pass. mpookodAnOncopar; Sept. for p27; to glue upon,
glue to, {cf. mpds, 1V. 4]; prop. Joseph. antt. 7, 12, 43
trop. in the pass. with a reflexive force, to join one’s sely
to closely, cleave to, stick to, (Plato): w. dat. of a pers.
(Sir. vi. 34; xiii. 16), Acts v. 36 Rec. (see mpockAiva,
2); tH yvvarki, Mt. xix. 5 Rec. [al. kokAnOnoerat, q. v.] 3
Mk. x. 7 Lehm.; Eph. v. 31 LT Tr WH mrg.; mpos ray
yuv. (fr. Gen. ii. 24), Mk. x. 7 RG Tr txt.; Eph. v. 31
RGWHtxt. [Cf. W. § 52, 4, 14.]*
T™pdo-Kop.0, -aTos, TO, (mpockdnTw), a stumbling-block,
i.e. an obstacle in the way which if one strike his foot
against he necessarily stumbles or falls; trop. that over
which the soul stumbles, i. e. by which it is impelled to
sin: 1 Co. viii. 9 (Sir. xvii. 25 (20); xxxi. (xxxiv.) 19
(16) ; xxxix. 24) ; reOevar mpock. rim, to put a stumbling-
block in one’s way, i. e. trop. to furnish one an occasion
for sinning, Ro. xiv. 13 [WH mrg. om.]; 6 61a mpooxop-
patos éobiwv, [A.V.] who eateth with offence (see dia, A. I.
2), by making no discrimination as to what he eats oc-
casions another to act against his conscience, ibid. 20;
Aidos mpookdpparos (fr. Is. viii. 14 for 43] 138), prop. a
stone against which the foot strikes [A. V. stone o7
stumbling], used figuratively of Christ Jesus, with regard
to whom it especially annoyed and offended the Jews
that his words, deeds, career, and particularly his igno-
minious death on the cross, quite failed to correspond to
their preconceptions respecting the Messiah ; hence they
despised and rejected him, and by that crime brought
upon themselves woe and punishment: Ro. ix. 32, 33;
1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). (In the Sept. for wpin, Ex. xxiii. 33 ;
xxxiv. 12; [cf. Judith viii. 22]. a sore or bruise caused
by striking the foot against any object, Athen. 3 p. 97f.;
a hindrance [?], Plut. mor. p. 1048 ¢. [i. e. de Stoic. re-
pugn. 30, 8 fin. ].) *
ampoo-KoTry, -7s, 9, (mpookémra), an occasion of stum-
bling [so R.V. (but A.V. offence) ]: d:8évat mpookorny (sc.
édXous), to do something which causes others to stumble,
i. e. leads them into error or sin, 2 Co. vi. 3 [cf. W. 484
(451)]. (Polyb.; [for iw fall, Prov. xvi. 18 Graecus
Ven. ].) *
mpoo-KérTw; 1 aor. mpocéxowa; to strike against [cf.
mpos, IV. 4]: absol. of those who strike against a stone
or other obstacle in the path, to stumble, Jn. xi. 9, 10;
mpos Aidov rov 7-68a, to strike the foot against a stone, i. e.
m™ pooKkurAl
(dropping the fig.) to meet with some harm, Mt. iv. 6; Lk.
iv. 11, (fr. Ps. xe. (xci.) 12) ; to rush upon, beat against, ot
dvepot 7H oixia, Mt. vii. 27 [L mrg. mpooéppygay, see mpoo-
phyvupe]. év ru, to be made to stumble by a thing, i. e.
metaph. to be induced to sin, Ro. xiv. 21 [cf. W. 583
(542); B.§ 151, 23 d.]. Since we are angry with an
obstacle in our path which we have struck and hurt our
foot against, one is trop. said mpookdmrety, to stumble at,
a person or thing which highly displeases him; thus the
Jews are said rpooxdat TO iO@ Tov mpook. i. e. to have
recoiled from Jesus as one who failed to meet their ideas
of the Messiah (see mpécxopupa), Ro. ix. 32; the enemies
of Christianity are said mp. 76 Ady, 1 Pet. ii. 8 [some (cf.
R. V. mrg.) take mp. here absolutely, and make 76 A.
depend on dmeiOéw, q. v- in a.]. (Exx. of this and other
fig. uses of the word by Polyb., Diod., M. Antonin. are
cited by Passow [L. and S.] s. v. and Fritzsche, Ep. ad
Rom. ii. p. 362 sq.) *
mpoc-kvdlw: 1 aor. mpocexvAtca; to roll to: ri tun, Mt.
xxvii. 60 [where Lchm. inserts émi]; ri emi 74, Mk. xv.
46. (Arstph. vesp. 202.) *
mpoo-Kuvew, -@; impf. mpocexvvovy ; fut. mpookurvnce ;
1 aor. mpocexvynoa; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept.
very often for MIMAWT (to prostrate one’s self) ; prop.
to kiss the hand to (towards) one, in token of reverence :
Hdt. 1, 134; [ef. kK. F. Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter-
thiimer d. Griech. § 21; esp. Hoelemann, Die bibl. Ge-
stalt. d. Anbetung in his ‘ Bibelstudien’ i. 106 sqq.]; hence
among the Orientals, esp. the Persians, to fall upon the
knees and touch the ground with the forehead as an expres-
sion of profound reverence, [to make a ‘salam’]; Lat.
veneror (Nep. Conon. 3, 3), adoro (Plin. h. n. 28, 5, 25;
Suet. Vitell. 2); hence in the N. T. by kneeling or pros-
tration to do homage (to one) or make obeisance, whether
in order to express respect or to make supplication. It
is used a. of homage shown to men of superior
rank: absol., Mt. xx. 20 (the Jewish high-priests are
spoken of in Joseph. b. j. 4,5, 2 as mpooxvvovmevot) 3 recov
emt tovs médas mpooexvynoer, Acts x. 25; tui (acc. to
the usage of later writ.; cf. W. 36, 210 (197) ; [B. $131,
4]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 463), Mt. ii. 2,8; viii. 2; ix. 18;
xiv. 33; xv. 25; [xviil. 26]; xxviii. 9,17 [RG]; Mk. v. 6
[here WH Tr mrg. have the ace.]; xv. 19; Jn. ix. 38;
with wecoy preceding, Mt. ii. 11; iv.9; évdmov trav
moda twos, Rev. iii. 9; [it may perh. be mentioned that
some would bring in here Heb. xi. 21 mpocertvycev ém rd
dkpov tis paBdov adrod, explaining it by the (Egyptian)
custom of bowing upon the magistrate’s staff of office in
taking an oath; ef. Chabas, Mélanges Egypt. III. i. p. 80
cf. p. 91 sq.; but see below]. b. of homage rendered
to God and the ascended Christ, to heavenly beings, and
to demons: absol. (our to worship) [cf. W. 593 (552)],
Jn. iv. 20; xii. 20; Acts viii. 27; xxiv. 11; Heb. xi. 21
[cf. above]; Rev. xi. 1; mimrew kal mpockuveiv, Rev. v.
14; revi, Jn. iv. 21, 23 ;, Acts vii.43; Heb.i.6; Rev. iv.
105 vii. 11; xi. 163 xiv. 7; xvi. 2; xix. 4, 20; xxii. 8 sq.;
Rev. xiii. 4 G L T Tr WH (twice [the 2d time WH txt.
only]); xiii. 15 GT Tr WHtxt.; xx. 4 Rec.; meodv emi
548
mpocoppivo
mpdcwnov mpooxuynrer TO Oe@, 1 Co. xiv. 25; mimrey ént
ra mpdowna kai mpookuvely TO Oe, Rev. xi. 16; preceded
by mimrew umpoobev trav modéy twos, Rev. xix.10. in
accordance with the usage of the older and better writ.
with rid or ri (cf. Matthiae § 412): Mt.iv. 10; Lk. iv.
8; Rev. ix. 20; xiii. 12; xiv. 9,11; also xiii. 4 (Rec.
twice; [WH mrg. once]), 8 [where Rec. dat.], 15 RL
WH mrg.; xx. 4* (where Ree. dat.), 4” (where R™ dat.) ;
Lk. xxiv. 52 RGLTr br. WH reject; (the Sept. also
connects the word far more freq. with the dat. than with
the acc. [cf. Hoelemann u. s. p. 116 sqq.]); évamedy twos,
Lk: iv. 7; Rev. xv. 4.*
mpoo-kuvnTts, -00, 6, (mpooxuvew), a worshipper: Jn. iv.
23. (Inserr.; [eccl. and] Byzant. writ.) *
mpoo-Aahéw, -@; 1 aor. inf. rpoo\adjoa; w. Twi, to
speak to: Acts xiii. 43; sc. tyiv [some say poi (see mapa-
kadéw, I.)], Acts xxviii. 20. (Sap. xiii. 17; Theophr.,
Plut., Leian.) *
mpoc-AapBavw: 2 aor. inf. rpocdaBeiv (Acts xxvii. 34
Rec. see below); Mid., pres. mpooAapBdavopa; 2 aor.
mpoceAaBduny; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to take to,
take in addition, [cf. mpés, IV. 2]; in the N. T. found
only in the Middle, to take to one’s self [cf. B. § 135,
4]: rwa[ef. B. 160sq. (140)]; a. to take as one’s
companion [A. V. take one unto one]: Acts xvii. 5; xviii.
26. b. to take by the hand in order to lead aside
[A. V. (simply) take]: Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 32. c
to take or [so A. V.] receive into one’s home, with the
collateral idea of kindness: Philem. 12 RG, 17; into
shelter, Acts xxviii. 2. d. to receive, i.e. grant one
access to one’s heart; to take into friendship and inter-
course: Ro. xiv. 1; xv. 7; God and Christ are said
mpoodaBeo but (to have received) those whom, formerly es-
tranged from them, they have reunited to themselves by
the blessings of the gospel, Ro. xiv. 3; xv. 7; Clem. Rom.
1 Cor. 49, 6, (cf. Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 10; lxiv. (Ixv.) 5;
Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 24). e. to take to one’s self, to take:
pydev, (A.V. having taken nothing] i. e.no food, Acts
XXVvil. 33; rpopjs, (a portion of [A.V. (not R.V.) ‘some’ ])
food, ef. B. 160 sq. (140), ibid. 36 (in vs. 34 GLTTr
WH have restored peradaBeiv [so R. V. (‘to take some
food ’)] for mpoodaBeiv).*
mpedo-Antus [LT Tr WH -Anpuyis, see M, p], -ews, 7,
(mpocdapBavw), Vulg. assumptio, a receiving: tiwds, into
the kingdom of God, Ro. xi. 15. [(Plat., al.)]*
mpoo-pévw; 1 aor. ptcp. mpoopeivas, inf. rpocpeivar; fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a. to remain with [see
mpés, IV. 3]: with a dat. of the pers. to continue with
one, Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 2 [here L WH mrg. om. Tr br.
the dat.]; r@ kupi@, to be steadfastly devoted to [A. V.
cleave unto] the Lord, Acts xi. 23 (Sap. iii. 9; Joseph.
antt. 14, 2, 1); 7H xdpure rod Oeod, to hold fast to [A. V.
continue in] the grace of God received in the gospel,
Acts xiii.48G LTTr WH; Senoect kK. Tpocevyxats, [A.V.
to continue in supplications and prayers],1 Tim.v.5. b.
to remain still (cf. mpds, IV. 2], stay, tarry: Acts xviii. 18;
foll. by év with a dat. of place, 1 Tim. i. 3.*
mpoo-opp(tw: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. tpogwppicOncay:
tmpocopei rw
(Spyos a roadstead, anchorage) ; to bring a ship to moor-
ings (Leian. am. 11); esp. so in the mid., prop. to take
one’s station near the shore; to moor, come to anchor,
(Hat., Dem., Plut., al.); the 1 aor. pass. is used in the
same sense (Arr. exp. Alex. 6, 4 and 20; Ael. v. h. 8,5;
Dio Cass. 41, 48; 64, 1), Mk. vi. 53.*
Tpoo-ofeihw ; tv owe besides [see mpds, IV. 2): ceavtdr,
i.e. besides what I have just asked of thee thou owest to
me even thine own self, since it was by my agency that
thou wast brought to faith in Christ, Philem. 19. (Thuc.,
Xen., Dem., Polyb., Plut.) *
tpoc-ox8ifw: 1 aor. mpocwybica; to be wroth or dis-
pleased with : rwi, Heb. iii. 10, 17, (fr. Ps. xciv. (xev.) 10);
not found besides exc. in the Sept. for 5ya, to loathe;
RIP; to spue out; VIP, to be disgusted with, ete. ; add, Sir.
vi. 25; xxv. 2; xxxviii. 4; [l. 25; Test. xii Patr., test. Jud.
§ 18; Orac. Sibyll.3, 272]. Profane writ. use 6y6éw, more
rarely 6xOi{@. mpds denotes direction towards that with
which we are displeased [mpés, IV. 1]. Cf. Bleek, Br.
an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 441 sq.*
mpoo-ralw (for the more com. mpoorraiw) : 1 aor. rpoo-
émaioa; to beat against, strike upon: intrans. mpooémaicav
th oixia, Mt. vii. 25 Lchm.; but cf. B. 40 (34) n. (Schol.
ad Aeschyl. Prom. 885 ; [Soph. frag. 310 var.]; Byzant.
writ.) *
mpdometvos, -ov, (reitva hunger [cf. rewdo]), very (lit.
besides, in accession, [cf. mpds, IV. 2; al. (cf. R. V.) do
not recognize any intensive force in mpds here]) hun-
gry: Acts x. 10. Not found elsewhere.*
Tpoo-rhyvupe: 1 aor. ptep. mpoomn£éas ; to fasten to [see
mpos, IV. 4]: Acts ii. 23 [here absol., of crucifixion].
(Dio Cass., al.) *
apoo-rirrw: impf. mpocemimrov; 2 aor., 3 pers. sing.
mpooerece, 3 pers. plur. (Mt. vii. 25) mpocérecov RG,
-cavy T Tr WH [see mimra, init.], ptep. fem. rpoorecov-
oa; fr. Hom. down; prop. to fall towards, fall upon,
[mpds, IV. 1] i.e. 1. to fall forward, to fall down,
prostrate one’s self before, in homage or supplication:
with the dat. of a pers., at one’s feet, Mk. iii. 11; v. 33;
Lk. viii. 28, 47; Acts xvi. 29, (Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 6; Polyb.,
Plut., al.) ; rots yévaci twos, Lk. v. 8 (Eur. Or. 1332;
Plut.) ; mpés tovs médas twés, Mk. vii. 25. 2. to
rush upon, beat against : rh otxia (of winds beating against
a house), Mt. vii. 25 [not Lehm.; cf. rpoomaia].*
mpoo-rovéw: Mid., pres. ptcp. mpoorotovpevos (see be-
low); impf. 3 pers. sing. mpocemoveito (Lk. xxiv. 28, for
which L txt. T Tr WH give the 1 aor. rpocemoujoaro) ;
in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; to add to [cf. Germ. hinzu-
machen]; mid. 1. to take or claim (a thing) to
one’s self. 2. to conform one’s self to a thing, or rather
to affect to one’s self; therefore to pretend, foll. by an inf.
[A. V. made as though he would ete.], Lk. xxiv. 28; xa-
réypahev els Thy viv pi) mpooroiovpevos, In. Vili. 6 ace. to
codd. E GH K ete. [cf. Matthaei (ed. 1803) ad loc.]. (So
in Thuc., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.; Diod. 15, 46; Philo in
Flace. § 6; [in § 12 foll. by ptep.; Joseph. e. Ap. 1, il
Ael.v. h. 8,5; Plut. Timol. 5; [Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos.
§ 3].)*
549
mpoaTiOnus
Tpoo-rropevopat; to draw near, approach: with a dat. of
the person approached, Mk. x. 35. (Sept.; Aristot.,
Polyb.) *
mpoo-phyvup., and in later writ. [W. 22] mpocpjoce;
1 aor. mpooeppynga KG L, rpocépnga T Tr WH (see P, p);
to break against, break by dashing against: maSia droXeis
Tpoopnyvos métpas, Joseph. antt. 9,4, 6; éovra mpoo-
pnéas th yf, 6, 9,3; intrans. (cf. W. § 38, 1; [B. § 130,
4]): 6 worapds rp oikia, Lk. vi. 48, [49 ; Mt. vii. 27 Lmrg.];
in pass. rH dkpa 7) Ta KUpata mpoopnacerat, Antonin. 4, 49.*
Tpoc-Tacaw: 1 aor. mpooéraga; pf. pass. ptcp. mpoore-
taypevos ; fr. [ Aeschyl. and] Hat. down; 1. to as-
sign or ascribe to, join to. 2. to enjoin, order, pre=
scribe, command : Sept. for 73¥ ; absol. cabs mpocérake,
Lk. v. 14; with the dat. of a pers., Mt.i. 24; xxi.6 RG
T; ri, Mt. viii. 4; Mk.i. 44; rivi re, pass. Acts x. 33; foll.
by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 48; to appoint, to define, pass.
mpooreTaypéevor katpot, Acts xvii. 26 G L (ed. ster. [larger
ed. mpds reray.]) T Tr WH, for the Rec. mporeraypévor.
[SyN.: see KeAevo, fin. ]*
mpooratis, -idos, 7, (fem. of the noun mpoordrns, fr.
Tpolornpt) 5 a. prop. a woman set over others. b.
a female guardian, protectress, patroness, caring for the
affairs of others and aiding them with her resources
[A. V. succourer]: Ro. xvi. 2; cf. Passow on the word
and under zpoorarns fin.; [Schiirer, Die Gemeindever-
fassung der Juden in Rom, u.s.w. (Leip. 1879) p. 31; Hein-
rict, Die Christengemeinde Korinths, in Hilgenfeld’s
Zeitschr. for 1876, p. 517 sq. }.*
mpoo-riOnp.: impf. 3 pers. sing. mpoceriOer (Acts ii. 47) ;
1 aor. mpooeOnxa; 2 aor. mpooednv, impv. mpdaGes (Lk.
xvii. 5), inf. rpooOeivar, ptep. mpoaGeis; Pass., impf. 3 pers.
plur. mpoceridevro; 1 aor. mpooeréOnv; 1 fut. mpooredy-
coua 2 aor. mid. mpooebeuny; fr. Hom. Od. 9, 305 down;
Sept. very often for *D:, also for Ox, etc. ; al
prop. to put to. 2. to add, i.e. join to, gather with
any company, the number of one’s followers or compan-
ions: twa TH exkAnoia, Acts ii.47 [RG]; 7 kupio, Acts
v. 14; xi. 24; sc. r@ kupi@, or rots morevovow, Acts ii.
41; Hebraistically, tpooeréOn mpos tovs marépas avdtov
(Judg. ii. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 69), he was gathered to his fa-
thers assembled in Sheol (which is 722 syin m3, the
house of assembly for all the living, Job xxx. 23), Acts
xiii. 36 (others explain it, he was added to the bodies of
his ancestors, buried with them in a common tomb; but cf.
Knobel on Gen. xxv. 8; [Béttcher, De inferis, p. 54 sqq.]);
i. q. to add viz. to what one already possesses: ri, Lk. xvii.
5 [A.V. here increase] ; pass., Mt. vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31; Mk.
iv. 24; Heb. xii. 19 [(u mpooreOjvat adrois Adyor, R. V.
that no word more should be spoken to them) ];—to what
already exists: (6 vopos) mpoceréOn, was added to (su-
pervened upon) sc. the émayyeAéa, Gal. iii. 19 RLTTr
WH; ri emi rum, some thing to (upon) a thing (which
has preceded [cf. émi, B. 2 d.]), Lk. iii. 20; ri emi re, to
a thing that it may thereby be increased, Mt. vi. 27; Lk.
Xie. In imitation of the Hebr. (7\0") the mid. (in
the Sept. the active also) foll. by an inf. signifies (to add
i.e.) to goon to do a thing, for to do further, do again, (as
TpooTpeXw
Gen. iv. 2; viii. 12; xviii. 29): mpocédero mépypat (*}0")
now), he continued to send (as he had already sent),
Lk. xx. i1, 12, (i. q. mad ameoretiev, Mk. xil. 4) ; mpoo-
ero ovAdaBeiv at Iérpov, he besides apprehended Peter
also [A.V. he proceeded etc.], Acts xii. 3; in the same
way also the ptcp. is used with a finite verb: mpoodeis
eimev, i.e. he further spake [A. V. he added and spake],
Lk. xix. 11 (wpooOeioa érexev, Gen. XXXviil. 5 ; mpoa benevos
éaBe yuvaika, Gen. xxv. 1) ; cf. W.§ 54,5; B.§ 144, 14.*
ampoo-tpexw ; 2 aor. act. ptcp. mpoodpapev; to run to:
Mk. ix. 15; x. 17; Acts viii. 30. (rom Arstph. and
Xen. down; for y37 in Gen. xviii. 2, ete.) *
mporpaytoy, -ov, 7d, (mpoopayetv [cf. pds, IV. 2]), iq.
3ov (on which see dyrapiov), any thing eaten with bread
(Moeris [ed. Piers. p. 274, 1]: dov drrixas, mpoopdyrov
€A\nuixas) : spoken of fish boiled or broiled, Jn. xxi. 5
(Schol., Lexx., [Moschion 55 p. 26; Foehl, Inserr. graec.
395 a.12]). Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. etc. p. 697 sq.;
Sturz, Dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 191.*
apoadaros, -ov, (fr. mpd and oddw or oddtw; cf. De-
litzsch, Com. on Hebr. [as below] p. 478; [cf. Lob. Tech-
nol. p. 106]) ; 1. prop. lately slaughtered, freshly
killed: Hom. Il. 24, 757. 2. univ. recently or very
lately made, new: 6Sés, Heb. x. 20 (so fr. Aeschyl. down ;
giros mpdoaros, Sir. ix. 10; ov« ore wav mpdoarov ims
tov nAtov, Keel. i. 9). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 374 sq.*
tmporparus, adv., (see the preceding word), lately: Acts
xviii. 2., (Deut. xxiv. 7 (5); Ezek. xi. 3; Judith iv. 3,
5; 2 Mace. xiv. 36; Polyb., Alciphr., al.) *
tpooc-pépw; impf. rporepepov; 1 aor. mpoojveyxa; 2 aor.
mpoonveyxov ; pf. mpooevnvoxa (Heb. xi. 17); Pass., pres.
mpoopepopat; 1 aor. mpoonvexOnv; [see reff. s. v. pepo] ;
fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., and Hdt. down; Sept. often for
27p77, also for $7373, wr}, etc., sometimes also for myn
where offering sacrifices is spoken of (as 1 K. xviii. 36
Compl.; 2 Chr. xxix. 7; Jer. xiv. 12); 1. to bring
to, lead to: twa tw, one to a person who can heal him
or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24;
vill. 16; ix. 2,323 xiv. 35; xvii. 16; Mk. ii. 4 (sc. revd)
T WHTr mrg.; x. 13; Lk. xviii.15; pass. in Mt. xii.
22 [where L WH txt. act.]; xviii. 24R GT; xix. 13; —
one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14;
Twa émt Tas ouvaywyds kal ras dpxds, Lk. xii. 11 [W. § 52,
3] (where T Tr txt. WH eichépwow). rpocdépe tt, to
bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20; rt rum, to reach or
hand a thing to one, Mt. xxii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 36 [here A.V.
offering]; ri r@ ordpari twos, to put to, Jn. xix. 29; a
thing to one that he may accept it, to offer: xphyara,
Acts viii. 18; Sépa, Mt. ii. 113; used, as often in the
Sept., of persons offering sacrifices, gifts, prayers to God
(cf. Kurtz, Brief a. d. Hebr. p. 154 sqq.): rd 66 opdyra
kai Ovaias, Acts vii. 42; Ovoiav, Heb. xi. 43 darpelay, Jn.
Xvi. 2; mpoopépew Sdpov or Sapa se. T@ Oe@, Mt. v. 23,
24; vili.4; Heb. viii. 3, 4; ix.9; Ovoiav, Heb. x.12; plur.,
Heb. x. 1,11; [pass. ibid. 2; Ovolas (RG -av) kal mpoo-
gopas (RG -pav) kat Aoxavtdpara Kat mept duaprias, ibid.
8]; 8dpd re Kat Ovoias imép dpapridy, to expiate [see
tnép, I. 4) sins. Heb. v. 1; aiua trép éavrod cat rav rood
550
T por wmToAnTTNs
aod dyvonudrav, Heb. ix. 7; rv mpoopopay tmp évds
éxdorov, pass. Acts xxi. 26; mpoopépew used absol. [cf.
W. 593 (552)]: epi twos, on account of [see zepi, I. c.
B.], Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14; wept rod Aaod mepi [RG inép
(see rrepi, I. c. 8.) ] duapriay, to offer expiatory sacrifices
for the people, Heb. v. 3; ruvd, sc. 7 Oe, to offer up, i.e.
immolate, one, Heb. xi.17; éavrdv, of Christ, Heb. vii. 27
T Trmrg. WH mrg.; ix. [14], 25; mpocevexGeis (the pas-
sive pointing to the fact that what he suffered was due to
God’s will) ibid. 28, (it is hardly to be found in native
Grk. writ. used of offering sacrifices ; but in Joseph. antt.
3, 9, 3, we have dpvaxai épipov); mpds twa (God) denoes
re Kat ixernpias, Heb. v. 7 (mpoopéepew Senow, Achill. Tat.
7,1; t@ Oe@ evynv, Joseph. b. j. 3,8, 3). 2. The
pass. with the dat. signifies to be borne towards one, to
attack, assail; then figuratively, to behave one’s self to-
wards one, deal with one: ws viois tyiv mpoodpéperat 6
Geés, Heb. xii. 7 (very often so in Attic writ. fr. Thuc.
and Xen. down; Philo de Josepho § 10; de ebrietate
§ 16; Joseph. b. j. 7, 8,1; Ael.v.h. 12,27; Hdian. 1, 13,
14 [7 ed. Bekk.]).*
mporptArs, -€s, (pds and didréw), acceptable, pleasing,
[A. V. lovely]: Phil. iv. 8. (From [Aeschyl. and] Hdt.
down; Sir. iv. 7; xx. 13.) *
mpoo-popa, -as, 7, (mporpepw), offering; i. e. ue
the act of offering, a bringing to, (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.).
2. that which is offered, a gift, a present, (Soph. O.C.
1270; Theophr. char. 30 sub fin.). In the N. T. a sac-
rifice [A.V. offering], whether bloody or not: Acts xxi.
265 xxiv. 17; Eph. v. 2; Heb. x. 5, 8, 14, (Sir. xiv. 113
XXxi. (xxxiv.) 21 (19); xxxii. (xxxv.) 1, 6 (8); once for
m3n, Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7); wept duaprias, offering for sin,
expiatory sacrifice, Heb. x. 18; with the gen. of the ob-
ject, rod cwpatos "Incov Xp. Heb. x. 10; ray eOvar, the
sacrifice which I offer in turning the Gentiles to God,
Ro. xv. 16.*
mpoc-povéw, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. mpocepaver; 1 aor.
Tpoceparnaa } 1. to call to; to address by calling:
absol., Lk. xiii. 12; xxiii. 20 (where L WH add airois) ;
Acts xxi. 40, (Hom. Od. 5, 159 etc.); with the dat. of
a pers. [cf. W.36], Mt. xi. 16; Lk. vii. 32; Acts xxii. 2,
(Diog. Laért. 7, 7). 2. to call to one’s self, summon:
twa (so the better Grk. writ.; see Matthiae § 402 b.; [W.
§ 52, 4, 14]), Lk. vi. 13.*
Tpdo0-Xvets, -ews, 7, (mporxéw to pour on), a pouring
or sprinkling upon, affusion: rov atparos, Heb. xi. 28.
(Eccles. writ. [e. g. Just. M. apol. 2, 12 p. 50 d.].) *
tmpoc-pavw, to touch: rwi (ef. W. § 52, 4, 14], a thing,
Lk. xi. 46. (Pind., Soph., Byzant. writ.)*
tpocorodnrrew (LT Tr WH -Anumreéw [see M, p]), -3
a Hellenistic verb (derived fr. the foll. word [cf. Win. 33,
101 (96)]), to respect the person (i. e. the external condi-
tion of a man), to have respect of persons: Jas. ii. 9.*
mporwro-Anrmns (LT Tr WH -Anymrns [see M, p]), -ov,
6, (a Hellenistic formation fr. mpécwmov and AapBava;
see AapBdvw, I. 4 p. 370° bot.), an accepter [A. V. re-
specter] of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptor): Acts Xe
34. Not found elsewhere [exc. in Chrvsost.].*
TpocwTrorkn ia 5
wporemodnpia (LT Tr WH -Anuyia [see M, ]), -as,
9, (a Hellenistic formation; [see mpoowmoAnntnys |), Te
spect of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptio), partiality,
the fault of one who when called on to requite or to give
judgment has respect to the outward circumstances of
men and not to their intrinsic merits, and so prefers, as
the more worthy, one who is rich, high-born, or power-
ful, to another who is destitute of such gifts: Ro. ii. 11;
Eph. vi. 9; Col. iii. 25; plur. (which relates to the vari-
ous occasions and instances in which this fault shows
itself [cf. W. 176 (166); B. § 123, 2, 2]), Jas. ii.1. (Ec-
cles. writ.)*
- T™pScwrov, -ov, Td, (fr. mpds and dy, cf. wérwzor), fr.
Hom. down; Sept. hundreds of times for 0°29, also for
DDN, etc.; ale a. the face, i.e. the anterior part
of the human head: Mt. vi. 16,17; xvii. 2; xxvi. 67;
Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. [ix. 29]; xxii. 64 [T Tr WH om. Lchm.
br. the cl.]; Acts vi. 15; 2 Co. iii. 7,13, 18; [xi. 20]; Rev.
iv. 7; ix. 7; x.13 1d mpdcwmov tis yeveoews, the face with
which one is born [A. V. his natural face], Jas. i. 23;
minrew emt moda. [cf. W. § 27, 1n.; 122 (116)]and emi rd
mpoa., Mt. xvii. 6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v. 12; xvii.16; 1 Co.
xiv. 25; [Rev. vii. 11 Rec.; mimr. ént ra mpdo., Rev. xi.
16; vii.11GLT Tr WH]; dyvoovpevds tun 16 mpocare,
unknown to one by face, i.e. personally unknown, Gal. i.
22; bereaved of one mpocare@, ov kapdia [A. V. in pmes-
ence, not in heart], 1 Th. ii. 17; xara mpdce@mov, in or
towards (i. e. so as to look into) the face, i. e. before, in
the presence of, [see xara, II.1 ¢.]: opp. to dmav, 2 Co. x.
1; with rwos added, before (the face of) one, LK. ii. 31;
Acts iii. 13; @yo twa cata mpdcwmor, i. e. to have one
present in person [A. V. face to face], Acts xxv. 16;
avréotny kata mpocwroy, I resisted him to the face (with
a suggestion of fearlessness), Gal. ii. 11, (kara mpdowmov
héeyewv Tovs Adyous, Polyb. 25, 5, 2; add Job xvi. 8; but
in Deut. vii. 24; ix. 2; Judg. ii. 14; 2 Chr. xiii. 7, dvri-
orivat Kata mpoc. twos simply denotes to stand against,
resist, withstand); ta kata mpoa. the things before the
face, i. e. open, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7. Expressions
modelled after the Hebrew: épav 1d mpdcwmdy twos, to
see one’s face, see him personally, Acts xx. 25; Col. ii. 1;
feiv, 1 Th. ii. 17; iii. 10; Oewpetv, Acts xx. 38 [cf. bewpéw,
2a.]; particularly, Bdérecy 7d mpoa. Tov Oeod (see Bréra,
1 b. B.), Mt. xviii. 10; épav r. mp. tr. Geod (see épaw, 1),
Rev. xxii. 4; éudancOjqvat 7G mpo. Tod Gov, to appear
before the face of God, spoken of Christ, the eternal
priest, who has entered into the heavenly sanctuary,
Heb. ix. 24; in imitation of the Hebr. m9-5x = )pE)
we have the phrase mpdcarov mpos mpdcwrov, face (turned
[see mpés, I. 1 a. p. 541°]) to face (iddv rwa, Gen. xxxii.
30; Judg. vi. 22): trop. Brera se. rév Bedv, see God face
to face, i.e. discern perfectly his nature, will, purposes,
1 Co. xiii. 12; a person is said to be sent or to go mpo
mpooamoy twos (//5 *959) [ef. W. § 65, 4 b. fin.; B. 319
(274)], i.e. before one, to announce his coming and re-
move the obstacles from his way, Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2;
Lk. i. 76; vii. 27, (Mal. iii. 1); ix. 52; x. 15 mpd mpoo.
rivds, (of time) before a thing, Acts xiii. 24 (so 159 in
51
1 POTWTTOv
Am. i. 1; Zech. viii. 10; where the Sept. simply mpé [cf.
mp6, b. p. 536" bot.]). mpds Poriopoy THs yooews ths do-
Eqs tod Ocod €v mpoowm® Inood Xpicrod, that we may
bring forth into the light the knowledge of the glory of
God as it shines in the face of Jesus Christ, 2 Co. iv. 6
(Paul really means, the majesty of God manifest in the
person of Christ; but the signification of mpécwmov
is ‘face,’ and Paul is led to use the word by what he had
said in iii. 13 of the brightness visible in the face of
Moses). b. countenance, look (Lat. vultus), i. e. the
face so far forth as it is the organ of sight, and (by its
various movements and changes) the index of the inward
thoughts and feelings: kAivew rd pda. eis Thy yg, to bow
the face to the earth (a characteristic of fear and anx-
iety), Lk. xxiv.5; Hebraistic phrases relating to the
direction of the countenance, the look: 14 mpéc@moy rod
kupiou émi twa, sc. éoriv, the face of the Lord is (turned)
upon one, i.e. he looks upon and watches him, 1 Pet. iii. 12
(fr. Ps. xxiii. (xxxiv.) 17); ornpitew rd xpéc. (Hebr. iv
or 0°}9 702; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 1109 on the same
form of expression in Syriac, Arabic, Persian, Turkish)
Tov mopeveo Oat eis with an acc. of the place [A.V. stead-
fastly to set one’s face to go etc. (see ornpitw, a.) ], Lk. ix.
515; moreover, even 1d mpoc. Tivos €ott mopevdpevon eis
with acc. of place, ib. 53 (rd mpocwmdy cov ropevduevov
év péom avtav, 28. xvii. 11); amd mpocamov twos pev-
yev, to flee in terror from the face (Germ. Anblick) of
one enraged, Rev. xx. 11; xptmrew twa etc. (see kpirra,
a.), Rev. vi. 16; avayvéis amd mpocwmov Geod, the re-
freshing which comes from the bright and smiling coun-
tenance of God to one seeking comfort, Acts iii. 20 (19);
on 2 Th. i. 9 see amd, p.59* mid.; pera rod mpoawrov cov,
sc. évra, in the presence of thy joyous countenance [see
pera, I. 2b. B.], Acts ii. 28 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11); es
mpocwrroyv Tav exkdnovay, turned unto [i. e. in (R.V.)] the
face of the churches as the witnesses of your zeal, 2 Co.
Vili. 24; iva ek moANov tpocamerv ... dia modAA@Y Evyapt-
o77O7, that from many faces (turned toward God and ex-
pressing the devout and grateful feelings of the soul)
thanks may be rendered by many (accordingly, both é«
moAX- mpoo. and dia modAddv belong to edyapiotnOy [cf
Meyer ad loc.; see below]), 2 Co. i. 11. dd mpoowmou
twos (9 *191), from the sight or presence of one, Acts v.
41; vii. 45 [here A.V. before the face; Rev. xii. 14]; ép
mpooamw Xpiorod, in the presence of Christ, i.e. Christ
looking on (and approving), 2 Co. ii. 10 (Prov. viii. 30) ;
[some would render mpoowmoy here and in i. 11 above
person (cf. R.V.):—here nearly i. q. on the part of (Vulg.
in persona Christi); there i. q. ‘an individual’ (Plut. de
garrul. 13 p. 509 b.; Epict. diss. 1, 2,7; Polyb. 8, 13, 5;
12, 27,10; 27,6,4; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1,1; 47,6; Phryn.
p- 379, and Lobeck’s note p. 380)]. c. Hebrais-
tically, the appearance one presents by his wealth or pov-
erty, his rank or low condition; outward circumstances,
external condition; so used in expressions which denote
to regard the person in one’s judgment and treatment ot
men: Arérew els mpdcwrov avOporar, Mt. xxii. 16; Mk.
xii. 14; Oavpatew mpdcona, Jude 16 ; NauBdvew mpdcwmos
TpoTaccw
(rus), Lk. xx. 21; Gal. ii. 6, (on which see Brére, 2 ¢.,
Gavpdto, AapBdve, I. 4). Kavyaca ev mpoodm@ kai ov
capdia, to glory in those things which they simulate
in look, viz. piety, love, righteousness, although their
heart is devoid of these virtues, 2 Co. v. 12, cf. 1 S. xvi.
7. 2. the outward appearance of inanimate things
[A. V. face (exe. in Jas. as below)]: rod dvOous, Jas. i.
11; rod odpavod, ris ys, Mt. xvi. 3 [here Tbr. WH reject
the pass.]; Lk. xii. 56 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 30) ; (so in Lat.,
naturae vultus, Ovid. metam. 1, 6; maris facies, Verg.
Aen. 5, 768; on this use of the noun facies see Gell. noc-
tes atticae 13, 29); surface: rns yns, Lk. xxi. 35; Acts
xvii. 26 [on the omitted art. here cf. was, I. 1 ¢.], (Gen.
TPO exis O)) ee
mpo-raccw: pf. pass. ptep. mporeraypevos ; 1. to
place before. 2. to appoint before, define beforehand :
xpévov, Soph. Trach. 164; xatpovs, pass. Acts xvii. 26
Ree. (see mpoordocw, 2); vdéuous, pass. 2 Mace. viii. 36.*
mpo-relyw: 1 aor. mpocrewa; [fr. Hdt.down]; to stretch
forth, stretch out: ws mpoerewar [ Rec. -vey] adrov rots ipa-
ow, when they had stretched him out for the thongs i.e.
to receive the blows of the thongs, (by tying him up to
a beam or a pillar; for it appears from vs. 29 that Paul
had already been bound), Acts xxii. 25 [W. § 31 init. ;
al. (cf. R. V. txt.) ‘with the thongs’ (cf. iuds) ].*
ampdrtepos, -a, -ov, (compar. of mpd), [fr. Hom. down], be-
fore, prior; of time, former: 7 mporépa avaotpopn, Eph.
iv. 22. Neut. adverbially, before (something else is or
was done): Jn. vii. 51 RG; 2 Co. i. 15; opp. to érecra,
Heb. vii. 27; before i.e. aforetime, in time past: Jn. vii.
50 [L Tr WH]; Heb. iv.6; and RGin 1 Tim. i. 13; also
TO mporepov (contrasting the past with the present [cf.
mdaXat, | fin.]), Jn. vi. 62; ix. 8, and L TTr WH in1 Tim.
1.13, (1 Mace. iii. 46; v.1; xi. 34, 39; Deut. ii. 12; Josh.
xi. 10; Hdt. 7, 75; Xen., Plat.) ; i.q. our the jirst time,
Gal. iv. 13 (on which cf. Meyer); it is placed between
the art. and the noun, as ai mpérepov juepa, the former
days, Heb. x. 32; ai mpér. émOupia, the lusts which you
formerly indulged, 1 Pet. i. 14.*
mpo-riOynpr: 2 aor. mid. mpocOéunv; [fr. Hom. down];
1. to place before, to set forth, (cf. mpd, d. a.]; spec. to
set forth to be looked at, expose to view: Ex. xl.4; 4 Mace.
viii. 11; Ael. v.h. 14, 8; and often in the mid. in this
sense: mornpia apyvped te kal xpvoea, his own cups, Hat.
3, 148; to expose to public view, in which sense it is the
technical term with profane authors in speaking of the
bodies of the dead, [to let lie in state], (cf. Passow s. v. I. 2;
[L. and S.s. v. II. 1]; Stallbaum on Plat. Phaedo p. 115 e.;
[Kriiger on Thue. 2, 34, 1]); the mid. points to the own-
er of the thing exposed: so with rwd and a pred. ace.
Ro. ili. 25 (the mid. seems to denote that it was his
own Son whom he thus “set forth”; ef. viii. 32). 22.
Mid. to set before one’s self, propose to one’s self; to
purpose, determine, (Plato, Polyb., al.) : foll. by the inf.
Ro. i. 13; with an ace. of the thing and év atte [ (sic) ;
see avrov] added, in himself (W. § 38, 6; [cf. p. 152
(144)]), Eph. i. 9; [al. (reading év airé with L T Tr
WH) render ‘in him,’ i. e. (probably) Christ].*
552
mpopnteva
apo-rpérw: 1 aor. mid. ptcp. mporpeydpevos; to urge
forwards, exhort, encourage, (often so by Attic writ.,
both in the act. and the mid.): Acts xviii. 27. (Sap.
xiv. 18; 2 Macc. xi. 7. [From Hom. down.]) *
apo-rpéxw: 2 aor. mpoédpapov; to run before, to outrun :
Jn. xx. 4; with &umpoodev added, i. e. ahead, in advance,
[R. V.‘to run on before’], cf. W. 603 (561); [B. § 151,
27], Lk. xix. 4; up. with the gen. of a pers. Tob. xi. 2.
(1 S. viii. 11; Xen., Isoer., Theophr., al.) *
mpo-vn-dpxw: impf. mpoimjpyov; fr. Thuc. and Plato
down; to be before, exist previously: with a ptcp. Acts
Vili. 9; mpotmnpxov dvres, Lk. xxiii. 12; ef. Bornemann,
Schol. ad h. 1.; W. 350 (328); [B. § 144, 14].* ;
mpo-pacis, -ews, 9, (mpopaiva, i.e. prop. ‘to cause to
shine before’ [or ‘forth’; but many derive mpodacts di-
rectly fr. mpo-pnuc]), fr. Hom. down; a. a pretext
(alleged reason, pretended cause): r7s mAeove§ias, such as
covetousness is wont to use, 1 Th. ii. 5 ([A. V. cloak of
covetousness ] the meaning being, that he had never mis-
used his apostolic office in order to disguise or to hide ava-
ricious designs) ; mpdpaow éxew (a phrase freq. in Grk.
auth., cf. Passow s. v. mp. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 1251; [L. and S.
s.v. 1.3 e.]) wept ris duaprias, Jn. xv. 22[A. V. mrg. R.V.
excuse |. b. show: mpopace as xtd. [A. V.] under
color as though they would etc. Acts xxvii. 30; mpodacet,
[As V. for a pretence], in pretence, ostensibly : Mt. xxiii.
14 (13) eee: Mike xii 40% Wkexx 47 ehilaio tS
tpo-hépw ; (fr. Hom. down]; to bring forth: ti &« twos,
Lk. vi. 45.*
mpopnyrela, -as, 7, (mpopnteva, q. v.), Hebr. 78323,
prophecy, i. e. discourse emanating from divine inspira-
tion and declaring the purposes of God, whether by re-
proving and admonishing the wicked, or comforting the
afflicted, or revealing things hidden; esp. by foretell-
ing future events. Used in the N. T.—of the utter-
ances of the O. T. propkets: Mt. xiii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 20, 21
(on this pass. see yivoua, 5 e.a.) ; — of the prediction of
events relating to Christ’s kingdom and its speedy tri-
umph, together with the consolations and admonitions
pertaining thereto: Rev. xi. 6; xxii.19; 16 mvedpa tis
mpopnreias, the spirit of prophecy, the divine mind, to
which the prophetic faculty is due, Rev. xix. 10; of Adyot
ths mpopnretas, Rev. i.3; xxii. 7, 10, 18;— of the endow-
ment and speech of the Christian teachers called mpo-
pyrat (see mpopyrns, II. 1f.): Ro. xii. 6; 1 Co. xii. 10;
xili. 2; xiv. 6, 22; plur. the gifts and utterances of
these prophets, 1 Co. xiii.8; 1 Th. v. 20;—spec. of the
prognostication of those achievements which one set
apart to teach the gospel will accomplish for the king-
dom of Christ, 1 Tim. iv. 14; plur. i. 18 [see mpodye, 2 a.
and cf. the Comm.]. ([Sept., Joseph.]; among native
Grk. writ. used only by Leian. Alex. 40, 60; [to which
add inserr. (see L. and S. s. v. I.)].)*
tpopytedo ; fut. rpopyrevow; impf. mpoepyrevoy (Acts
xix. 6 RG) and empopnrevov (ibid. LT Tr WH; {1 K.
xxii. 12]; Jer. [ii. 8]; xxiii. 21; xxv. 13); 1 aor. mpoepry-
tevoa (RG in Mt. vii. 22; xi.13; xv.7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. i.
67; (Jn. xi. 51; Jude 14]) and éxpopjrevoa (which form
mpopyrns
558
mpodiirns
cod. Sin. gives everywh., and T Tr WH have everywh. | xi. 32; Jas. v.10; appeal is made to their utteranves as
restored, and Lchm. also with the single exception of
Jude 14; add, Sir. xlviii. 13; 1 Esdr. vi. 1; Jer. xxxiii.
(Caan) Oh ahi Ns soeay (xxviii.) 8; xxxvi. (xxix.) 31;
the Alexandrian translators more com. use the forms
mpoepyrevov, mpoepnrevoa, pf. ptep. mpotrepytevkas, Kus.
h.e. 5, 17; pf. pass. inf. mpomepnredoda, Clem. Alex.
strom. p. 603; on the forms used by Justin M. see Otto’s
prolegs. to his works, I. i. p. Ixxv.ed. 3; ef. [WH. App.
p. 162; Veitch s. v.]; W. § 12, 5; [B. 35 (30sq.)]; ef.
Fritzsche on Mk. p. 268; [Soph. Lex. s. v.]); (apopyrys,
q. v-); Sept. for 83} and x33nT; Vulg. propheto [three
times prophetizo]; to prophesy, i.e. to be a prophet,
speak forth by divine inspiration; to predict (Hat., Pind.,
Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; a. univ.: Mt. vii. 22. b.
with the idea of foretelling future events pertaining esp. to
the kingdom of God: Mt. xi. 18; Acts ii. 17, 18; xxi. 9;
trept twos, Mt. xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 10; emi run, over
i. e. concerning one (see émi, B. 2 f. B. p. 234"), Rev. x. 11;
<is twa (i. e. Christ), Barn. ep. 5,6; mpog. foll. by Aéyov
with the words uttered by the prophet, Jude 14; foll. by
ort, Jn. xi. 51. c. to utter forth, declare, a thing
which can only be known by divine revelation : Mt. xxvi. 68;
Mk. xiv. 65; Lk. xxii. 64, cf. vii. 39; Jn. iv. 19. d.
to break forth under sudden impulse in lofty discourse or
in praise of the divine counsels: Lk. i. 67; Acts xix. 6, (1
S. x. 10, 11; xix. 20, 21, ete.) ;— or, under the like prompt-
ing, to teach, refute, reprove, admonish, comfort others (see
apognrns, II. 1 f.), 1 Co. xi. 4, 5; xiii. 9; xiv. 1, 3, 4, 5,
24, 31, 39. e. to act as a prophet, discharge the
prophetic office: Rev. xi. 3. [On the word see Trench,
N. T. Syn. § vi.]*
tpopitys, -ov, 6, (rpodpnut, to speak forth, speak out;
hence prop. ‘one who speaks forth’; see mpd, d. a.), Sept.
BL. .
for x72) (which comes fr. the same root as [,;, ‘to di-
vulge,’ ‘make known,’ ‘announce’ [cf. Fleischer in De-
litzsch, Com. u. d. Gen., 4te Aufl. p. 551 sq.], therefore
prop. i. q. interpreter, Ex. vii. 1, cf. iv. 16; hence an in-
terpreter or spokesman for God; one through whom God
speaks; cf. esp. Bleek, Einl. in d. A. T. 4te Aufl. p. 309
[B.D. s. v. Prophet and reff. there; esp. also Day’s
note on Oehler’s O. T. Theol. § 161, and W. Robertson
Smith, Prophets of Israel, p. 389 (note on Lect. ii.)]),
one who speaks forth by divine inspiration; I. In
Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., and Pind. down 1. an
interpreter of oracles (whether uttered by the gods or
the pdvrets), or of other hidden things. 2. a fore-
teller, soothsayer, seer. II. In the N. T. 1.
one who, moved by the Spirit of God and hence his organ
or spokesman, solemnly declares to men what he has re-
ceived by inspiration, esp. future events, and in particular
such as relate to the cause and kingdom of God and to hu-
man salvation. The title is applied to a. the 0. T.
prophets, —and with allusion to their age, life, death,
deeds: Mt. v.12; xii. 39; xiii.17; xxiii. 29-31; Mk. vi.
15; Lk. iv. 27; x. 24; xi.47; xiii. 28; Jn. viii. 52, 53;
Acts iii. 25; vii. 52; xiii. 20; Ro. xi. 3; 1 Th. ii. 15; Heb.
having foretold the kingdom, deeds, death, of Jesus the
Messiah: Mt. i. 22; ii. 5, 15,17, 23; iii. 3; iv. 145 viii.
17; xi.13; xii.17; xiii. 35; xxi. 4; xxiv. 153; xxvi. 56;
xxvil. 9; Mk. xiii. 14 Ree.; Lk. i. 70; iii. 43 iv. 17; xviii.
31; xxiv. 25; Jn. i. 23, 45 (46) ; xii. 38; Acts ii. 163 iii.
18, 21, 24; vii. 37,48; x.43; xiii. 27; xv. 15; xxvi. 22 sq.;
Ro. i. 2; Heb. i.1; 1 Pet. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 2; Rev. x. 7;
in the number of prophets David also is reckoned, as one
who predicted the resurrection of Christ, Acts ii. 30 sq.;
so too is Balaam, 2 Pet. ii. 16 (see Badadp). by meton.
mpopyrat is put for the books of the prophets: Lk. xxiv.
27,44; Acts viii. 28; xiii. 15; xxiv. 14; xxviii. 23; ép
Tots mpopntass, i. gq. ev BiBA® Tov mpod. (Acts Vii. 42), in
the volume of the prophets (which in Hebr. has the title
D’N'33), Jn. vi. 45; Acts xiii. 40;—or for the teaching
set forth in their books: Mt. v.17; vii. 12; xxii. 40;
Lk. xvi. 29, 31; Acts xxvi. 27. See vdpos, 4. b.
John the Baptist, the herald of Jesus the Messiah:
Mt. xxi. 26; Mk. vi. 15; xi. 32; Lk. i. 76; xx. 6, whom
Jesus declares to be greater than the O. T. prophets, be-
cause in him the hope of the Jews respecting Elijah as
the forerunner of the Messiah was fulfilled: Mt. xi. 9-
11, 14, (cf. xvii. 11,12; Mk. ix. 12 sq.); Lk. vii. 283[RG
AVM up oye ce. That illustrious prophet whom the
Jews (apparently on the ground of Deut. xviii. 15) ex-
pected to arise just before the Messiah’s advent: Jn. i.
21, 25; vii. 40. those two illustrious prophets, the one
Elijah, the other Enoch or Moses [but cf. the Comm. ;
e. g. Stuart, Com. vol. ii. p. 219 sq.], who according to
the writer of the Apocalypse will publicly appear shortly
before the visible return of Christ from heaven: Rev. xi.
10 (cf. 3). d. the Messiah: Acts iii. 22, 23; vii. 37,
after Deut. xviii. 15; Jesus the Messiah, inasmuch as he
is about to fulfil the expectation respecting this Messiah,
Mt. xxi. 11; Jn. vi. 14. e. univ. a man filled with
the Spirit of God, who by God’s authority and command in
words of weight pleads the cause of God and urges the sal-
vation of men: Mt. xxi. 46; Lk. xiii. 33; xxiv. 19; Jn.
vii. 52; in the proverb that a prophet is without honor in
his own country, Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi.4; Lk. iv. 24; Jn.
iv. 44. he may be known — now by his supernatural
knowledge of hidden things (even though past), Lk. vii.
39; Jn. iv. 19, (rpopnrns adnOelas eoriv 6 mavrote mavtTa
elds, Ta pev yeyovdra as eyévero, Ta SE ywOpeva os yiverat,
ra dé écdpeva @s €orat, Clem. hom. 2, 6),— now by his
power of working miracles, Lk. vii. 16; xxiv.19; Jn. ix.
17; such a prophet Jesus is shown to have been by the
passages cited, nor is it denied except by his enemies, Lk.
vii. 39; Jn. vii. 52. f. The prophets that appeared
in the apostolic age among the Christians: Mt. x. 41;
xxiii. 84; Acts xv. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 29,37; Rev. xxii. 6, 9;
they are associated with apostles in LE. xi. 49; 1 Co.
xii. 28, 29; Eph. ii. 20; iii. 5; iv.11; Rev. xviii. 20; they
discerned and did what was best for the Christian cause,
Acts xiii. 1sq.; foretold certain future events, Acts xi.
27 sq.; xxi. 10sqq.; and in the religious assemblies of
the Christians, being suddenly seized by the Spirit (whose
mpopnt Kos
promptings, however, do not impair their self-govern-
ment, 1 Co. xiv. 32), give utterance in glowing and ex-
alted but intelligible language to those things which the
Holy Spirit teaches them, and which have power to in-
struct, comfort, encourage, rebuke, convict, stimulate,
their hearers, 1 Co. xiv. 3,24. [Cf. Harnack, Lehre der
Zwolf Apostel, Proleg. § 5 i.2 p. 93 sqq. 119 sqq.; Bon-
wetsch in (Luthardt’s) Zeitschr. f. kirch]. Wissen. u. s. w.
1884, pp. 408 sqq. 460 sqq.] g. Prophets both of the
Old Test. and of the New are grouped together under
the name mpopjjrat in Rev. xi. 18; xvi. 6; xviil. 24. 2
a poet (because poets were believed to sing under divine
inspiration) ; so of Epimenides, Tit. i. 12.
mpopytixds, -H, -dv, (mpopytns), proceeding from a
prophet; prophetic: Ro. xvi. 26; 2 Pet.i.19. [Philo de
migr. Abr. § 15, etc.; Leian. Alex. 60; eccles. writ. ]*
mpopiiris, -.dos, , (mpopytns), Sept. for M82), a proph-
etess (Vulg., Tertull. prophetissa, prophetis), a woman to
whom future events or things hidden from others are at
times revealed, either by inspiration or by dreams and
visions: Lk. ii. 36; Rev. ii. 20. In Grk. usage, a female
who declares or interprets oracles (Eur., Plat., Plut.) : 7
mpopntis THs dAnOeias icropia, Diod. 1, 2.*
mpo-p0dvw : 1 aor. mpoepOaca; to Come before, to antici-
pate: avrov mpocpbace éyav, he spoke before him [R.V.
spake first to him], or anticipated his remark, Mt. xvii.
25. (Aeschyl., Eur., Arstph., Plut.; Sept.) *
mpo-xetpl{w (mpoxerpus at hand [cf. mpd, d.a.] or ready):
1 aor. mid. mpoexetpicduny; pf. pass. ptcp. mpoxexetpiope-
vos; to put into the hand, to deliver into the hands; far
more freq. in the mid. to take into one’s hands; trop. to
set before one’s self, to propose, to determine; with an acc.
of the pers. to choose, to appoint, (Isocr., Polyb., Dion.
Hal., Plut., al.; 2 Macc. iii. 7; vili.9; Ex. iv. 13): foll.
by an inf. of purpose, Acts xxii. 14; twa with a pred.
ace. Acts xxvi. 16; twa with a dat. of the pers. for one’s
use, Josh. ili. 12; for one’s salvation, pass. Acts iii. 20 for
Rec. mpoxexnpvypévor (cf. mpoxnptooa, 2).*
™po-Xetpo-Tovew, -@: pf. pass. ptcp. mpoxexerporovnpevos ;
(see xeporovew) ; to choose or designate beforehand: Acts
x. 41. (Plat. lege. 6 p. 765 b. ¢., [Aeschin., Dem.], Dio
Cass. 50, 4.) *
T1p6xopos, [-ov, 6, (lit. ‘leader of the dance’)], Proch’-
orus, one of the seven ‘deacons’ of the church at Jeru-
salem: Acts vi. 5.*
mpvpva, -ns, 7, (fem. of the adj. mpupvds, -7, -dv, last,
hindmost; used substantively with recessive accent; [ef.
W. 22)), fr. Hom. down, the stern or hinder part of a
ship: Mk. iv. 38; Acts xxvii. 29; opp. to mpdépa, ib. 41.*
awpot [WH mpai (cf. I, «, fin.)] (Attic mpo [ef. W. § 5,
4d.]), adv., (fr. mpd), fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for 1p3,
in the morning, early, (opp. to dwé): In. xviii. 28 GL T
Tr WH; Mt. xvi. 3 (opp. here to éyias yevouérys [but
T br. WH reject the pass.]); [xxi. 18 T Tr txt. WH];
Mk. i. 35; xi. 20; xvi. 9; [apwi, oxorias re ovens, JN. Xx.
1]; Atay mpwi, foll. [in RG] by a gen. of the day (cf.
Kiihner § 414, 5c. B. ii. p. 292), Mk. xvi. 2; dua Tpat,
Mt. xx. 13; éwt 7d mowi, Mk. xv. 1 [RG]; dws mpot os
554
TP@TOS
éonépas, Acts xxviii. 23. Used spec. of the fourth watch
of the night, i.e. the time fr. 3 o’clock in the morning
till 6, acc. to our reckoning [(cf. B. D. s. v. Watches of
the Night)], Mk. xiii. 35.*
mpwia, See mpwios.
arpdipos (for the more com. mpaios; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 52), T Tr WH mpdipos (so also cod. Sin.; [see WH.
App. p. 152]), -n, -ov, (pai), early: terds, the early rain
(Hebr. 771, Deut. xi. 14; Jer. v. 24), which fell fr.
October on [(cf. B.D. s. v. Rain)], Jas. v. 7 [LT Tr WH
om. ter.; cf. W. 592 (550); B. 82 (72)]. (Xen. oec.
17, 4; Geop., al.) *
mpwivds [WH mpaiwds (see their App. p. 152), Tdf.
ed. 7 mpoivés (cf. I, e) ], (for the older mpaios, see épOpivds ;
the same term. in the Lat. serotinus, diutinus), -7, -dv,
(mpwi), pertaining to the morning: 6 dornp 6 mp. Rev.
ii. 28 (on which see doryp); xxii. 16 (where Rec. ép-
Opiwés). [Sept.; Babr., Plut., Ath., al.]*
mpaios [WH mpauos], -a, -ov, (rpwi), early, pertaining
to the morning, (fr. Hom. down); asa subst. 7 mpwia
(in full 7 dpa mpwia, 3 Mace. v. 24; [Diod., Joseph.,
al.]; see dynos, 2), Sept. several times for p35, morning:
Mt. xxvii. 1; Jn. xviii. 28 Rec.; xxi. 4 [potas 48n yevo-
pevns (T WH Tr txt.), when day was now breaking (R.V.)];
mpwias, in the morning, Mt. xxi. 18 [R GL Trmrg.].*
papa [so RG, mpdpa Tr], more correctly mp@pa (see
Gottling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 142sq.; [Chandler §164;
Etym. Magn. p. 692, 34 sq.; cf. 318, 57 sq.; cf.I, ¢]),
-as (LT WH -ns, cf. padyarpa, init.), 4, [contr. fr. mpdepa
fr. pd; Lob. Pathol. Element. ii. 136, cf. Paralip. p. 215],
fr. Hom. down ; the prow or forward part of a ship [R.V.
Soreship]: Acts xxvii. 30; in vs. 41 distinguished fr. 9
mpupva.*
mpwtetw; (mparos); to be first, hold the first place,
[A. V. have the pre-eminence]: Col. i. 18. (From Xen.
and Plat. down.) *
mpwtokadeSpla, -as, 7, (mpadros and xabédpa q. v.), @ sit-
ting in the first seat, the first or chief seat: Mt. xxiii. 6;
Mk. xii. 39; Lk. xi. 43; xx. 46. (Eccles. writ.) *
mpwto-khiola, -as, 7, (mpa@ros and kdcoia), the first re-
clining-place, the chief place, at table [cf. Rich, Dict. of
Rom. and Grk. Antiq. s. v. lectus tricliniaris; the rela-
tive rank of the several places at table varied among
Persians, Greeks, and Romans; and what arrangement
was currently followed by the Jews in Christ’s day can
hardly, perhaps, be determined; (yet see Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, ii. pp. 207 sq. 494)]: Mt. xxiii. 6;
Mk. xii. 39; Lk. xi. 43 Lehm. in br.; xiv. 7, 8; xx. 46.
(Eccles. writ.).*
mp&ros, -7, -ov, (superl. of mpd, contr. fr. mpéaros, whence
the Doric mparos; the compar. mpédrepos see in its place),
[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for yi and often for TOS and
UNI, first; 1. either in time or place, in any
succession of things or of persons; a. absolutely
(i. e. without a noun) and substantively ; a. with the
article: 6 mp@ros Kal 6 éaxaros, i. e. the eternal One, Rev.
1,17; ii. 8; xxii. 135 6 mpdros, sc. rav kekAnwevov, Lk.
xiv. 18; the first of two (cf. W. § 35, 4.N.1; [B. 32
TP@TOS
(28)]), In. xix. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 30; plur. opp. to of érxa-
tot, Mt. xx. 16, on which see écyaros, 2a. Neut. 76
mparoy, Opp. to ro devrepov, Heb. x. 9; ra mpara, opp. to
ta €oyxara, one’s first state, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26 ; 2 Pet.
ii. 20; the first order of things, Rev. xxi. 4. B.
without the article: Mt. x. 2 (mpéros, sc. of the apostles
to be mentioned); plur., Mt. xix. 30; Mk. x. 31; Lk.
xiii. 30, (on the meaning of which three pass. see éoxa-
Tos, 2a.); neut. €v mporos, (A.V. first of all], among
the first things delivered to you by me, 1 Co. xv. 3. b.
where it agrees with some substantive; a. anar-
throus, and in place of an adjective: mpérn (sc. fyépa)
caBBarov, on the first day of the week, Mk. xvi. 9;
gvdakn, Opp. to devrépa, Acts xii. 10; as a pred. Lk. 1i. 2
(on which cf. W. § 35, 4 N. 1; [B. $127, 31]). where
it is added to the subject or the object of the verb (and
we often use an adv.; W. § 54, 2; [B. § 123, 9]): eipioxe
ovros mparos, Jn. i. 41 (42) (where L Tr WH mparov) ;
add, Jn. viii. 7; xx. 4, 8; Acts xxvii. 43; Ro. x. 19; 1
Tim. i. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 19; opp. to efra, 1 Tim. ii. 13; 6
mp@ros evBas, Jn. v. 4 (the art. belongs to éuBas [GT Tr
WH om. the pass.]); but Acts xxvi. 23 mparos é& dva-
oracews vekp@y is to be translated as the first. By a
later Grk. usage it is put where mpdérepos might have
been expected with the gen. (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 717;
Passow s. v. mparepos, B. I. 2 ¢. ii. p. 1243°; [L. and S.
ibid. B. I. 4e.]; Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. 420 sq.; W.
§ 35, 4 N.1; B. § 123, 14): mpdrds pov jy, Jn. i. 15, 30,
(oi mp@roi pov tavta amyvevoavres, Acl. nat. anim. 8,
12). B. with the article: 6 (7, 76,) mparos (-n, -ov,),
in a series which is so complete, either in fact or in
thought, that other members are conceived of as fol-
lowing the first in regular order; as, rov mp@rov Adyor,
Acts i. 1; add, Mk. xiv. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 16; Rev. iv. 1,
7; xiii. 12, ete.; (opp. to 6 écyaros), 4 mp. mAdvn, Mt.
xxvii. 64; add, Mt. xx. 8, 10,16; 1 Co. xv. 45, etc.; also
‘the first’ of two, where Lat. usage requires and the
Vulg. ordinarily employs prior (cf. W. [and B.] u. s.):
Mt. xxi. 28, 31 [L Tr WH vorepos]; dddovs SevdAovs tAeio-
vas Tov mpotov, Mt. xxi. 36; 7 mparn d:aOnxn, Heb. viii.
7,13; ix. 15, 18; 7 mporn, sc. diabqxn, Heb. ix. 1 GLT
Tr WH; oxnvn, Heb. ix. 1 Rec., 2, 6,8; 9 mp. yn, 6 mp.
ovpavds, Rev. xxi. 1; dvaoracts, Rev. xx. 5,6; dvOperos,
1 Co. xv.47; foll. by 6 devrepos, rpiros, etc.: Mt. xxii.
25; Mk. xii. 20; Lk. xix. 16; xx. 29; Rev. viii. 7; xvi.
2; xxi. 19; foll. by érepos, Lk. xvi. 5; 6 mparos, i. q. the
former, previous, pristine: tiv mparny miorw, the faith
which they formerly plighted, 1 Tim. v.12; 9 mpory
aydarn, Rev. ii. 4; ra mp. épya, ibid. 5. 2. first in
rank, influence, honor ; chief; principal : without the art.,
and absol., mparos chief, (opp. to SodAos), Mt. xx. 27;
Mk. x. 44; opp. to éryaros and didxovos, Mk. ix. 35;
added to a noun, principal, évroAn, Mt. xxii. 38; Mk.
xii. 30 [T WH om. Trmrg. br. the cl.]; Eph. vi. 2; with
a partitive gen., Mk. xii. 28, 29, [see mas, It. 2) bs 21/5
1 Tim. i. 15; with the art., Lk. xv. 22; Acts xvii. 4; of
mparot THs TadiAaias, the chief men of Galilee, Mk. vi.
21; rov Aaov, Lk. xix. 47; ts modes, Acts xi. 50;
509
/
TT P@TOTOKOS
Tav “lovdaiwy, Acts xxv. 2; xxviii. 17; THs Moov, Acts
xxvii. 7 [ef. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. p. 208 sq., but see Id-
Ttos }. 3. neut. mparov as adv., first, at the first; a.
in order of time: Lk. x. 5; Jn. xviii. 13; Acts xi. 26
[here T Tr WH paras, q. v-];_ foll. by etra, érecra, or
devrepov, Mk. iv. 28; 1 Co. xv. 46; 1 Th.iv. 16; 1 Tim.
ili. 10; foll. by wera radra, Mk. xvi. 9 ef. 12; the jirst
lime, opp. to év r@ Sevrépw (the second time), Acts vii.
12,13; ré mpérov xai, first and also (or afterwards),
i.e. as well as, Ro. i. 16 [but here L Tr mrg. WH br.
mp-]; ii. 9, 10; without ré, 2 Co. viii. 5; 2 Tim. i. 5.
Jirst i.e. before anything else is done; first of all: Mt.
vi. 33; Lk. xii. 1; Jn. vii. 51 LT Tr WH; Ro.i. 8; 1
Tim. v.4; 2 Pet. i. 20; iii. 3; mparov mavrwv, 1 Tim. ii.
1. jirsti.e. before something else: Mt. viii. 21; Mk.
Vile 2% 3 ix. 115125 Lk. xi. 385) xiv. 28iteRo. xv. 243) 2) he
ii. 3; 1 Pet. iv. 17, etc.; before other nations, Acts iii.
26; xiii. 46; before others [R. V. the first to partake
etc.], 2 Tim. ii.6; foll. by tore or kat tore, Mt. v. 24;
vii. 5; xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. vi.42; Jn. ii. 10 [TWH
om. L Tr br. rore]; ue moarov tyav [Tdf. om. ip.] me
before it hated you, Jn. xv. 18 (see 1 b. a.). TO Tp@Toy,
at the first i.e. at the time when one did a thing for the
first time: Jn. x. 40; xii. 16; xix. 39. b. in enumer-
ating several particulars; first, then, etc.: Ro. iii. 2; 1
Co. xi. 18; xii. 28; Heb. vii. 2; Jas. iii. 17.
TpwTorTarys, -ov, 6, (mparos and fornut), prop. one
who stands in the front rank, a front-rank man, (Thuc.,
Xen., Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al.; damep orparnyos
mpwtooratns, Job xv. 24); hence, a leader, chief, cham-
pion: trop. [A. V. a ringleader] rns aipéoews, Acts xxiv.
5.*
mpwroToKta, -wr, Td, (mpwrdroxos), in the Sept. also
mpororoxeia [al. -xeta (cf. Chandler § 99), -xia, cod. Venet.,
Aq. ], for W133, primogeniture, the right of the first-born,
(in class. Grk. 4 mpeoBela, and 75 mpeoBeiov): Heb. xii.
16. (Philo repeats the word after the Sept. in his alleg.
lege. 3, 69; sacrif. Abel. §5. Occasionally also in By-
zant. writ.) *
apwatdétoKos, -ov, (mparos, tikrw), Sept. for 133, jfirst-
born; a. prop.: tov vidv adras tov mpor. Mt. i. 25
(where rév mparér. is omitted by L T Tr WH but found
in cod. Sin. [see Tdf., WH., ad loc.]); Lk. ii. 7; 1é
mparéroxa ad’rav (gen. of the possessor [(?); adrav is
more naturally taken w. 6/yn (W. § 30, 8 c.), as by, Prof.
Grimm himself s. v. @yydvw]), the first-born whether of
man or of beast, Heb. xi. 28 (may mpwrdrokov.. .
avOparov ees krnvovs, Ex. xii. 29; Ps. civ. (ev.) 36; [Philo
de cherub. §16; Poll. 4, 208]). b. trop. Christ is
called mpwréroxos maons kricews (partit. gen. [see below],
as in ra mpwroroka tev mpoBdrwv, Gen. iv. 4; trav Boor,
Deut. xii. 17; ra@v vidv cov, Ex. xxii. 29), who came into
being through God prior to the entire universe of created
things [R. V. the firstborn of all creation] (see kriots, ?
b.), Col. i. 15; — this passage does not with certainty
prove that Paul reckoned the Adyos in the number of
created beings (as, among others, (/steri, Paulin. Lehr-
begriff, p. 315, and Baur, Das Christenthum der drei
ye \
avo
T PWTWS
ersten Jahrhh. 1st ed. p. 295, hold); since even Origen,
who is acknowledged to have maintained the eternal
generation of the Son by the Father, did not hesitate
to call him (cf. Gieseler, Kirch.- Gesch. i. p. 261 sq. ed.
3; [i. 216 Eng. trans. of ed. 4, edited by Smith ]) rov dyévn-
Tov kal maons yeveTns proews mpwtdorokov (Cc. Cels. 6, 17),
and even xricpa (a term which Clement of Alexandria
also uses of the Asyos); cf. Joan. Damascen. orthod. fid.
4, 8 kat adres ex Tod Oeod Kal 7 KTiots ek Tov Oeod; [al. would
make the gen. in Col. 1. c. depend upon the compar. force
in (the first half of) mpwrér. (cf. mpwrdrokos eyo f av, 2S.
xix.43); but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. (esp. for the patris-
tic interpretation) ]. In the same sense, apparently, he
is called simply 6 rpwrdrokos, Heb. i. 6 ; mp. €k Tav vexpar,
the first of the dead who was raised to life, Col. i. 18;
also rév vexpav (partit. gen.), Rev. i. 5 [Ree. inserts &k];
mpwrérokos év roAXois adeAois, who was the Son of God
long before those who by his agency and merits are ex-
alted to the nature and dignity of sons of God, with the
added suggestion of the supreme rank by which he ex-
cels these other sons (cf. Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 28; Ex.
iv. 22; Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 9), Ro. viii. 295; ékkAnota
mporordkwy, the congregation of the pious Christian dead
already exalted to the enjoyment of the blessedness of
heaven (tacitly opp. to those subsequently to follow them
thither), Heb. xii. 23; cf. De Wette ad loc. (Anthol. 8,
34; 9, 213.) *
mpdtas, adv., first: Acts xi.26TTrWH. Cf. Passow
s. v. mpérepos fin.; [L. and S. ib. B. IV.; Phryn. ed. Lob.
p- 3llsq.; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 366].*
araiw; fut. mraicw; 1 aor. émraica; (akin to TIETQ
and minrw [cf. Vaniéek p. 466]); fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl.,
and Hdt. down; 1. trans. rua, to cause one to stum-
ble or fall. 2. intrans. to stumble: dis mpds tov adrov
hiOov, Polyb. 31, 19,5. trop. [ef. Eng. trip, stumble] a.
to err, to make a mistake, (Plat. Theaet. c. 15 p. 160 d.) ;
to sin: absol. Ro. xi. 11 (itov avOpwmov direiv at rods
mraiovras, Antonin. 7, 22); moAdd, in many ways, Jas. iii.
2; év évi (sc. véum), to stumble in, i.e. sin against, one law,
Jas. ii. 10 [but see efs, 2 a. fin.]; év Ady (for the [more
com.] simple dat.), to sin in word or speech, Jas. iii.
2 b. to fall into misery, become wretched, (often
so in Grk. writ.) : of the loss of salvation, 2 Pet. i. 10.
[CE£. mpoo-raia. |*
wrépva, -ns, 9, the heel (of the foot) : éraipew riv mrépvay
én twa, to lift up the heel against one, i. e. dropping the
fig. (which is borrowed either from kicking, or from a
wrestler tripping up his antagonist), to injure one by
trickery, Jnv xiii. 18 after Ps. xl. (xli.) 10. (Often in
Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 3py-) .
Trepvytov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of mrépv§&, q.v.), Sept. for
335 1. a wing, little wing. 2. any pointed
extremity (of the fins of fishes, 93D, Lev. xi. 9-12;
Deut. xiv. 9, 10; Aristot., Theophr.; of a part of the
dress hanging down in the form of a wing, Ruth iii. 9;
1S. xxiv. 5; [Num. xv. 38]; Poll. 7, 14, 62): rd mrepv-
ytov Tov vaov and rod iepod, the top of the temple at Jeru-
salem, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb. h.e. 2, 23, 113 rod fepod, Mt.
506
TTUO
iv. 5; Lk. iv. 9; some understand this of the top or
apex of the sanctuary (rod vaod), others of the top of
Solomon’s porch, and others of the top of the Royal
Portico; this last Josephus (antt. 15, 11, 5) says was of
such great height as ef tis dm dkpou rod ravrns Téyous
dppo ovvribeis ra Baby Siomrevor cxorodimay, obk é€ixvov-
pévns THs direws eis duéerpyrov Tov Buddy; [cf. “ Recovery
of Jerusalem,” esp. ch. v. ].*
aréput, -vyos, 7, (trepdv a wing), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
often for 32; @ wing: of birds, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii.
34; Rev. xii. 14; of imaginary creatures, Rev. iv. 8; ix.
oe
arnvos, -7, -dv, (réropat, mrjvar), furnished with wings ;
winged, flying: ta mrnva, birds (often so in Grk. writ.
fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Co. xv. 39.*
wroéw, -@: 1 aor. pass. émtonOnv; (mroa terror); from
Hom. down; to terrify; pass. to be terrified (Sept. chiefly
for non): Lk. xxi. 9; xxiv. 37 [Trmrg. WH mrg. 6pon-
Gévres. SYN. see hoBea, fin. ]*
Tonos, -Ews, 7, (wroew), terror: poBetcOa mronow, i. q.
poBov doBeicOa, to be afraid with terror [al. take ar.
objectively: R. V. txt. to be put in fear by any terror],
1 Pet. iii. 6 (Prov. iii. 25); see PoBéw, 2; [W. § 32, 2;
B. § 131, 5. (1 Mace. iii. 25; Philo, quis rer. div. her.
§ 51)]*
TIrodepats, -idos, 7, Piolemais, a maritime city of Phoe-
nicia, which got its name, apparently, from Ptolemy
Lathyrus (who captured it B. c. 103, and rebuilt it more
beautifully [cf. Joseph. antt. 13, 12, 2 sq.]); it is called
in Judg. i. 31 and in the Talmud j5y, in the Sept.
Axxo, by the Greeks ”Axyn [on the varying accent cf.
Pape, Eigennam. s. v. HroAepais], and Romans Ace, and
by modern Europeans [Acre or] St. Jean d’Acre (from a
church erected there in the middle ages to St. John) ; it
is now under Turkish rule and contains about 8000 in-
habitants (cf. Baedeker, Pal. and Syria, Eng. ed. p. 356) :
Acts xxi. 7. (Often mentioned in the books of the Mac-
cabees and by Josephus under the name of Irodepais,
cf. esp. b. j. 2, 10, 2sq.; [see Reland, Palaest. p. 534 sqq.;
Ritter, Palestine, Eng. trans. iv. p. 361 sqq.].) *
mrvoy, -ov, Td, freq. in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, Attic
mreov W. 24, [(perh. fr. r. pu ‘to cleanse’; cf. Curtius p.
498 sq.)], a winnowing-shovel [A. V. fan; cf. B.D. s.v.
Agriculture, sub fin.; Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. vv. ventila-
brum, pala 2, vannus]: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17.*
wripw: [(cf. Curtius p. 706)]; to frighten, affright:
pres. pass. ptcp. mrupdpevos, Phil. i. 28. (Hippocr.,
Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) *
Trica, -ros, Td, (rrve, q. V.), spittle: In. ix. 6 ((Hip-
-pocr.], Polyb. 8, 14, 5; Or. Sibyll. 1, 365).*
mrvcow: 1 aor. ptep. mrvéas; in class. Grk. fr. Hom.
down; to fold together, roll up: rd BiBdiov, Lk. iv. 20
[A. V. closed]; see dvarticca, [and cf. Schlottmann in
Riehm s. v. Schrift ; Strack in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Schreib-
kunst, etc. Comp.: dva-rricco.]*
mrbo: [(Lat. spuo, our spue; Curtius § 382)]; 1 aor.
értvoa; fr. Hom. down; to spit: Mk. vii. 833 viii. 23;
Jn. ix. 6. [Comp.: ék-, du-rrio.]*
Tropa 557
°
wTrSLG, -Tos, 76, (rimrw, pt. memraxa) ; 1. in Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, a fall, downfall; metaph. a fail-
ure, defeat, calamity; an error, lapse, sin. 2. that
which is fallen; hence with the gen. of a pers. or with
vexpov added, the (fallen) body of one dead or slain, a
corpse, carcase; later also with vexpod omitted (Polyb.,
Sept., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Hdian.), cf. Thom. Mag. p.
765 [ed. Ritschl p. 290, 14]; Phryn. ed. Lod. p. 375;
[W. 23], and so in the N. T.: Mt. xiv. 12 LT Tr WH;
Mk. xv.45 LT Tr WH3 Mt. xxiv. 28; rivds, Mk. vi.
ZO ING Via Sk O.
RTGS, -ews, 9, (winte, pf. mémrwka), a falling, down-
fall: prop. rijs oikias, Mt. vii. 27 (@reoets ofkwv, Maneth.
4,617); trop. els mr@ow mohd@v (opp. to eis dvicracw),
that many may fall and bring upon tuemselves ruin, i. e.
the loss of salvation, utter misery, Lk. ii. 34, cf. Ro. xi.
11. (Sept. chiefly for 73n, plague, defeat.) *
tTroxela, -as, 7, (TT@xXev@) ; 1. beggary (Hat. 3,
14; Arstph. Plut. 549; Plat. lege. 11 p. 936 b.; Lysias
p. 898, 9; Aristot. poet. c. 23 p. 1459°, 6). 2. in the
N. T. poverty, the condition of one destitute of riches
and abundance: opp. to wAoureiv, 2 Co. viii. 9; opp. to
mAovotos, Rev. ii. 9; 9 kara Badous mroxeia (opp. to mAov-
tos), deep i. e. extreme poverty [see card, I. 1 b.], 2 Co.
viii. 2. (Sept. chiefly for +3), affliction, misery.) *
arwxevw: 1 aor. ésrdxevoa; (wroxds, q. V-)} prop. to
be a beggar, to beg; so in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down;
in the N. T. once, to be poor: 2 Co. viii. 9, on which see
mAovows, b. fin. (Tob. iv. 21; Sept. for 593 to be weak,
afflicted, Judg. vi. 6; Ps. lxxviii. (Ixxix.) 8; for w7i3 to
be reduced to want, Prov. xxiii. 21; wn to be needy,
Ps exxcxtl xxiv.) 11.) *
aT X6s, -7, -6v, (ntHocw, to be thoroughly frightened,
to cower down or hide one’s self for fear; hence rrwxos
prop. one who slinks and crouches), often involving the
idea of roving about in wretchedness [see zévns, fin.;
“but it always had a bad sense till it was ennobled
in the Gospels; see Mt. v. 3; Lk. vi. 20, cf. 2 Co. viii.
9” (L. and S. s. v. I.)]; hence 1. in class. Grk.
from Hom. down, reduced to beggary, begging, mendi-
cant, asking alms: Lk. xiv. 13, 21; xvi. 20, 22. 2.
poor, needy, (opp. to mrovaros): Mt. xix. 21; xxvi. 9, 11;
Mk. x. 21; xii. 42, 48; xiv. 5,7; Lk. xviii. 22; xix. 8;
xxi. 3; Jn. xii. 5, 6, 8; xiii. 29; Ro. xv. 26; 2 Co. vi. 10;
Gal. ii. 10; Jas. ii. 2,3,6; Rev. xiii. 16; in a broader
sense, destitute of wealth, influence, position, honors; lowly,
afflicted: Mt. xi. 5; Lk. iv. 18, (fr. Is. lxi. 1); vi. 203 vii.
22; of mrw@yot Tod KOopov (partit. gen.), the poor of the
human race, Jas. ii. 5; but the more correct reading is
that of LT Tr WH viz. 76 xoope [unto the world], i. e.
the ungodly world being judge, cf. WG S Biles Cheese. 18h
§ 133, 14; [R. V. as to the world (see next head, and cf.
Koo p08, 7)]- trop. destitute of the Christian virtues and
the eternal riches, Rev. iii. 17; like the Lat. inops, i. q.
helpless, powerless to accomplish an end: orotxeia, Gal. iy.
9 [‘bringing no rich endowment of spiritual treasure
(Bp. Lghtft.)]. 3. univ. lacking in anything, with
a dat. of the respect: 7@ mvevpart, as respects their
mudn
spirit, i. e. destitute of the wealth of learning and intel
lectual culture which the schools afford (men of this
class most readily gave themselves up to Christ’s teach-
ing and proved themselves fitted to lay hold of the heay-
enly treasure, Mt. xi. 25; Jn. ix. 39; 1 Co. i. 26, 27; {al.
make the idea more inward and ethical: ‘conscious
of their spiritual need’]), Mt. v. 3; compare with this
the Ep. of Barn. 19, 2: gay dmhods 79 kaodia kai rrovows
TO mvevpartt, abounding in Christian graces and the riches
of the divine kingdom. (Sept. for 5 eB WI, jVIR,
etc.) *
muy, -js, 4, (wvé, fr. TYKOQ, Lat. pungo, pupugi,
[pugnus; O. H. G. ‘fist’, Eng. ‘fist’; cf. Curtius § 384 ]),
fr. Hom. down, Sept. for i738 (Ex. xxi. 18; Is. lviii. 4),
ihe fist: muypn vinrecOa tas xeipas, to wash the hands
with the fist, i.e. so that one hand is rubbed with the
clenched fist of the other [R. V. mrg. (after Theoph.,
al.) up to the elbow; but cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Mes-
siah, ii. 11], Mk. vii. 3 (where Tdf. mu«vd, see muxvds).
(Cf. Jas. Morison, Com. ad loc.]*
TLi8wv, -wvos, 6, Python; 1. in Grk. mythology
the name of the Pythian serpent or dragon that dwelt in
the region of Pytho at the foot of Parnassus in Phocis,
and was said to have guarded the oracle of Delphi and
been slain by Apollo. 2. i. q. Saydvioy pavriKdp
(Hesych. s. v.), @ spirit of divination: mvedpa riOwvos or
more correctly (with LT Tr WH) aveipua ridava (on
the union of two substantives one of which has the force
of an adj. see Matthiae p. 962, 4; [Kiihner § 405, 1;
Lob. Paralip. 344 sq.]), Acts xvi. 16; some interpreters
think that the young woman here mentioned was a ven-
triloquist, appealing to Plutarch, who tells us (mor. p.
414 e. de def. orac. 9) that in his time ¢yyacrpiuvdo were
called midwves; [cf. Meyer].*
mukvos, -7, -dv, (IIYKQ, see muvyyn), fr. Hom. down,
thick, dense, compact; in ref. to time, frequent, often re-
curring, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Tim. v.
23; veut. plur. wuxvd, as adv. [W. 463 (432); B. § 128,
2], vigorously, diligently, (? [cf. Morison as in mvypn]),
Mk. vii. 3 Tdf.; often, Lk. v. 33; muxvdrepov, more fre-
quently, the oftener, Acts xxiv. 26.*
mwuKtedvo ; (aoxrys a pugilist [see rvypy, init.]); to be a
boxer, to box, [A. V. fight]: 1 Co. ix. 26. (Hur., Xen.,
Plat., Plut., al.) *
aidn, -ns, 7, [perh. fem. of dros (cf. Eng. pole i. e.
axis) fr. r. méA-w to turn (Curtius p. 715)], fr. Hom.
down; Sept. very often for 1pw¥, occasionally for ny,
sometimes for MND; a gate (of the larger sort, in the
wall either of a city or a palace; Thom. Mag. [p. 292, 4]
mvAat én retyous: Ovpat emi oixias): of a town, LK. vii.
12; Acts ix. 24; xvi. 13 LT Tr WH; Heb. xiii. 12; of
the temple, Acts iii. 10; in the wall of a prison, Acts
xii. 103 mvAat adov, the gates of Hades (likened to a
vast prison; hence the ‘keys’ of Hades, Rev. i. 18), Mt.
xvi. 18 (on which see xarurxd) ; Sap. xvi. 13; 3 Mace.
vy. 51, and often by prof. writ.; see Grimm on 3 Mace.
v. 51. in fig. disc. i. q. access or entrance into any
state: Mt. vii. 13°, 13° RG Tbr. Tr WH org., i4 RG
TUN@V
Lbr. T br. Tr WH; Lk. xiii. 24 R Lmrg.
omission see mpoBarekés. | *
mudov, -Gvos, 6, (rvAn), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept.
often for NN9, sometimes for pw; 1. alarge gate:
of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20; of a house, Acts x. 17; plur.
(of the gates of a city), Acts xiv. 13; Rev. xxi. 12, 13,
15,/21),.25';) xxit. 14. 2. the anterior part of a house,
into which one enters through the gate, porch: Mt. xxvi.
71 (cf. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence 4 @vpa rod mu-
vos, ib. 13.*
awuv0dvonar; impf. émuvOavdunv; 2 aor. emvOduny; [cf.
Curtius § 328]; a depon. verb; as in class. Grk. fr.
Hom. down 1. to inquire, ask: foll. by an indir.
quest. — w. the indic. Acts x. 18; with the opt., Jn. xiii.
24 RG; LK. xv. 26; xviii. 36; Acts xxi. 32; foll. by
a dir. quest., Acts iv. 7; x. 29; xxiii. 19; mapa rivds ze
[B. 167 (146) ], Jn. iv.52; mapa twos foll. by an indir.
quest. w. the indic. Mt. ii. 4; i mepi twos, Acts xxiii.
20. 2. to ascertain by inquiry: foll. by ér, Acts
xxiii. 34 [A. V. understood ].*
wip, gen. mupds, 76, [prob. fr. Skr. pu ‘to purify’ (cf.
Germ. feuer); Vaniéek p. 541; Curtius § 385], fr. Hom.
down; Hebr. ws; fire: Mt. iii. 10, 12; vii. 19; xvii. 15;
Mik Sieg 2s ak miles exe odie nxvl OMe ACLS Ie Loe
xxviii. 5; 1 Co. iii. 138; Heb. xi. 34; Jas. iii.5; v.3; Rev.
Vali By (oneal Ih eG G Sante TIS Soh TIE Saag WO) aah
8; xx. 9; drew wip, to kindle a fire, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr
txt. WH mwepiamr.|; ¢BpeEe wip kai Geiov, Lk. xvii. 29;
karaxaiew te ev ['T om. WH br. év] wupi, Rev. xvii. 16;
XVill. 8; kaiopar mupi, Mt. xiii. 40 [R LT WH xarak.];
Heb. xii. 18 [W. § 31, 7 d.]; Rev. viii. 8; xxi.8; proE
mupos, a fiery flame or flame of fire, Acts vii. 30; 2 Th.
IS txt lntxt eile sadeikevnl a4 ceit. Loreal 2
(Ex. iii. 2 cod. Alex.; Is. xxix. 6); mip dAoyds, a flam-
ing fire or fire of flame, 2 Th. i. 8 RGLmrg. T Trmrg.
WH (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Vat.; Sir. xlv. 19); Aaumddes mupds,
lamps of fire, Rev. iv. 5; orddox mupds, Rev. x. 1; dvOpa-
kes 1. Coals of fire, Ro. xii. 20 (see dvOpaé); yAdooat
@oel mupos, which had the shape of little flames, Acts ii.
3; Soxyyd¢erv did wupds, 1 Pet. i. 7; mupotoda (see mv-
pow, b.) ék w. Rev. iii. 18; as dua mupds, as one who in
a conflagration has escaped through the fire not unin-
jured, i. e. dropping the fig. not without damage, 1 Co.
iii, 15; was O¥p, Zech. iii. 2, cf. Am.iv.11. of the
fire of hell we find the foll. expressions, — which are
to be taken either tropically (of the extreme penal tor-
ments which the wicked are to undergo after their life
on earth; so in the discourses of Jesus), or literally (so
apparently in the Apocalypse): 7d mip, Mk. ix. 44, 46,
[T WH om. Tr br. both verses], 48; 1d mip 7d aidnov,
Mt. xviii. 8; xxv. 41, cf. 4 Mace. xii. 12; doBeorov, Mk. ix.
43,45(GT Tr WHom. Lbr. the cl.]; rupds atwviou Sicnv
bnéxew, Jude 7; ycevva tod mupds, Mt. v. 223 xviii. 9;
Mk. ix. 47 [RG Trbr.]; kdpivos r. wupos, Mt. xiii. 42,
50, (Dan. ili. 6); 1 Aiuvy rod mupos, Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10,
14,15; mupl rnpeicOa, 2 Pet. iii. 7; Bacancbqva év rupl,
Rev. xiv. 10 (cf. Lk. xvi. 24); Bamrigew rua mpi (see Ba-
rri¢w, II. b. bb.), Mt. iii. 11; Lk.iii.16. The tongue
[On its
558
muppata
is called mip, as though both itself on fire and setting
other things on fire, partly by reason of the fiery spirit
which governs it, partly by reason of the destructive
power it exercises, Jas. iii. 6; since fire disorganizes
and sunders things joined together and compact, it is
used to symbolize dissension, Lk. xii. 49. Metaphorical
expressions: é« updos dprd¢ew, to snatch from danger
of destruction, Jude 23; mupi ddiler Oa (see ddigw), Mk.
ix. 49; ¢jdos mupés, fiery, burning anger [see (jos, 1],
Heb. x. 27 (wip (ydov, Zeph. i. 18; iii. 8); God is called
mip katavadicxoy, as one who when angry visits the ob-
durate with penal destruction, Heb. xii. 29.*
mvp, -as, 7, (mop), fr. Hom. down, a fire, a pile of
burning fuel: Acts xxviii. 2 sq.*
aripyos, -ov, 6, (akin to Germ. Burg, anciently Purg;
[yet cf. Curtius § 413]), as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, @
tower; a fortified structure rising to a considerable height,
to repel a hostile attack or to enable a watchman to see
in every direction. The mipyos ev T@ SiAwdp [(q- V-)]
seems to designate a tower in the walls of Jerusalem
near the fountain of Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4; the tower occu-
pied by the keepers of a vineyard is spoken of in Mt.
xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1, (after Is. v. 2); a tower-shaped
building as a safe and convenient dwelling, Lk. xiv. 28.*
muptcow; (mip); (Vulg., Cels., Senec., al. febricito) ;
to be sick with a fever: Mt. viii. 14; Mk. i. 30. (Eur.,
Arstph., Plut., Leian., Galen, al.) *
trupetds, -0v; 6, (dp); 1. fiery heat (Hom. Il. 22,
31 [but interpreters now give it the sense of ‘fever’ in
this pass.; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.; Schmidt, Syn.
ch. 60 § 14]). 2. fever: Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31;
Lk. iv. 39; Jn. iv. 52; Acts xxviii. 8, (Hippocr., Arstph.,
Plat., sqq.; Deut. xxviii. 22); mup. péyas, Lk. iv. 38 (as
Galen de different. feb. 1, 1 says atvnes Tots iatpois dvo-
patew ... Tov peyav Te Kal pixpdv muperov; [cf. Wetstein
on Lk. 1. ¢.]).*
Tipwvos, -7, -ov, (mip), fiery: Odpakes wip. i.e. shining
like fire, Rev. ix. 17. (Ezek. xxviii. 14, 16; Aristot.,
Polyb., Plut., al.) *
mupéw: Pass., pres. rupoduatr; pf. ptep. memupapéevos }
(dp); fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down; to burn with /ire,
to set on fire, to kindle; in the N. T. it is used only in
the pass. a. to be on fire, to burn: prop. 2 Pet. iii.
12; trop. of the heat of the passions: of grief, 2 Co. xi.
29 (Eng. Versions burn (often understood of indig-
nation, but cf. Meyer); W. 153 (145)]; of anger,
with rois Ovpois added, i. q. to be incensed, indignant,
2 Mace. iv. 88; x. 35; xiv. 453; to be inflamed with se x-
ual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. b. pf. ptcep. memupwpe-
vos, made to glow [R. V. refined]: Rev. i. 15 [ (cf. B. 80.
(69) n.)]; full of fire; fiery, ignited: ra Bédyn ta mem.
darts filled with inflammable substances and set on fire,
Eph. vi. 16 (Apollod. bibl. 2, 5, 2 § 3); melted by fire
and purged of dross: xpuciov memup. éx mupos, [refined
by fire}, Rev. iii. 18 (so mupdo in the Sept. for VW 5 as
76 dpyopiov, Job xxii. 25; Zech. xiii. 9; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7;
Ixv. (Ixvi.) 10).*
mruppdto; i. q. uppds yivoua, to become glowing, grow
Tuppos
red, be red: Mt. xvi. 2 sq. [but Tbr. WH reject the pass. ]
(Byzant. writ.; svppi¢e in Sept. and Philo.) *
muppés, -d, -dv, (fr. rip), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
having the color of fire, red: Rev. vi. 4; xii. 3. Sept.
several times for D4%.*
Tluppos [(‘fiery-red’; Fick, Griech. Personcnnamen,
p. 75)], -ov, 6, Pyrrhus, the proper name of a man:
_Acts xx. 4 GLT Tr WH.*
Tipwsis, -ews, 7, (Tupdw), a burning: Rev. xviii. 9, 18;
the burning by which metals are roasted or reduced;
by a fig. drawn fr. the refiner’s fire (on which cf. Prov.
Xxvii. 21), calamities or trials that test character: 1 Pet.
iv. 12 (Tertullian adv. Gnost. 12 ne expavescatis ustio-
nem, quae agitur in vobis in tentationem), cf. i. 7 [(4
mvipwo.s THs Soxquagias, ‘Teaching’ etc. 16,5)]. (In the
same and other senses by Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) *
[w, an enclitic particle, see pyre etc.]
Twd€w, -@; impf. émadouy; 1 aor. émaAnoa; pres. pass.
Teodovpat; (médo, 7édopar, to turn, turn about, [Curtius
§ 633 p. 470], fr. which [through the noun wwAj; Lob.
in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 57 bot.] woAodua, Lat. versor,
foll. by e’s with acc. of place, to frequent a place; ef.
the Lat. venio and veneo); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for
39; prop. to barter, i. e. to sell: absol. (opp. to dyopa-
Cew), Lk. xvii. 28; Rev. xiii. 17; of m@dodvres (opp. to
oi dyopagovres, buyers), sellers, Mt. xxi. 12; xxv.9; Mk.
xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; with acc. of a thing, Mt. xiii. 44;
inet, sod. 125 Miex. 21; xi. 155 Lk. [xii 33]; xviii.
22; xxii. 36; Jn. ii. 14,16; Acts v.1; supply ado»,
Acts iv. 37; avrd, ib. 834; pass. 1 Co. x. 25; with a gen.
of price added, Mt. x. 29; Lk. xii. 6.*
mGdos, -ov, 6 (in class. Grk. 7 also), [Lat. pudllus,
O. H. G. folo, Eng. foal; perh. allied with mais; ef. Cur-
tius § 387]; 1. a colt, the young of the horse: so
very often fr. Hom. down. 2. univ. a young crea-
ture: Ael. v. h. 4, 9; spec. of the young of various ani-
mals; in the N. T. of a young ass, an ass’s colt: Mt. xxi.
2,5, 7; Mk. xi. 2, [3 Lmrg.], 4,5, 7; Lk. xix. 30, 33, 35;
Jn. xii. 15, (also in Geopon.); Sept. several times for
yy; for ny a female ibex, Prov. v. 19.* ,
aro-rore, adv., ever, at any time: Lk. xix. 30; Jn.i. 18;
v.37; vi. 35; viii. 33; 1Jn.iv.12. [(From Hom. down.)]*
mops, -d: 1 aor. érapwooa (Jn. xii. 40 T Tr WH);
pf. merdpoxa; pf. pass. ptep. memwpwpevos ; 1 aor. pass.
ér@poOnv; (mépos, hard skin, a hardening, induration) ;
to cover with a thick skin, to harden by covering with a
callus, [R. V. everywhere simply to harden]: metaph.,
xapdiay, to make the heart dull, Jn. xii. 40; Pass. to
grow hard or callous, become dull, lose the power of under-
standing: Ro. xi. 7; ra vonpata, 2 Co. ili. 14; Ff kapoia,
Mk. vi. 52; viii.17. Cf. Fritesche, Com. on Mk. p. 78 sq.;
on Rom. ii. p. 451 sq. [(Hippocr., Aristot., al.)]*
mopacts, -eos, 9, (rapda, q. V.), prop. the covering with
a callus; trop. obtuseness of mental discernment, dulled
perception: yéyové tin, the mind of one has been blunted
[R. V. a hardening hath befallen}, Ro. xi. 25; rhs kapdias
{hardening of heart], of stubbornness, obduracy, Mk. iii.
5; Eph. iv 18. ‘(Hipvocr.)|*
559
TOS
més, (fr. obsol. IOS, whence oi, moi, ete. [cf. Curtius
§ 631]), adv., [fr. Hom. down]; I. in interroga,
tion; how? in what way 2—in a direct question, foll.
by a. the indicative, it is the expression a. of
one seeking information and desiring to be taught: Lk.
i834; x. 26; Jn. iii. 9; ix. 26; 1 Co. xv. 35 [ef. W. 266
(250)]; més ody, Jn. ix. 10 Tdf. (but L WH br. ody), 19;
Ro. iv. 10. B. of one about to controvert another,
and emphatically deny that the thing inquired about has
happened or been done: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 23; Lk
x1.18; Jn. iii. 4,12; v.44,47; vi. 52; ix.16s ¥ Jn. iii.
17; iv. 20; Ro. iii. 65 vi. 2; 1 Co. xiv. 7,9,16; 1 Tim. iii.
5; Heb. ii. 3; kai mds, Mk. iv. 13; Jn. xiv. 5 [here Ltxt.
Tr WHom. kai]; més ody, Mt. xii. 26; Ro. x. 14 RG;
mos dé, Ro. x. 14* RGLmrg., 14° RGT, 15 RG, (on
this see in b. below). where something is asserted and
an affirmative answer is expected, mas ovx! is used: Ro.
viii. 32; 2 Co. iii. 8. y- of surprise, intimating that
what has been done or is said could not have been done
or said, or not rightly done or said, — being equiv. to how
is it, or how has it come to pass, that ete.: Gal. ii. 14 GLT
Tr WH; Mt. xxii. 12; Jn. iv. 9; vi. 52; vil. 15; aés
héyets, Aéyouot, krA., Mk. xii. 35; Lk. xx. 41; Jn. viii. 33;
kat mos, Lk. xx. 44; Acts ii. 8; kal mds od déyets, In. xii.
34; xiv. 9 [here L TWHom. Tr br. cai]; més ody, Jn. vi.
42 [here T WH Tr txt. mas viv]; Mt. xxii.43; més ov,
how is tt that... not, why not? Mt. xvi.11; Mk. viii. 21
RGLmrg.; iv. 40 [RGT]; Lk. xii. 56. b. the
delib. subjunctive (where the question is, how that
can be done which ought to be done): més rAnpebdow
ai ypadai, how are the Scriptures (which ought to be ful-
filled) to be fulfilled? Mt. xxvi.54; mas hdynre, how shall
ye (who wish to escape) escape etc. Mt. xxiii. 833; add,
mas ovv, Ro. x. 14 LT Tr WH; was dé, x. 14° Ltxt. T
Dy Wired 4 ie Wet oo i WHS (Sintodix sine)
ef. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 405 sq. c. foll. by dy
with the optative: mas yap dv duvaiuny; Acts viii. 31
(on which see ay, III. p. 34°). > II. By a somewhat
negligent use, occasionally met with even in Attic writ.
but more freq. in later authors, més is found in indi-
rect discourse, where regularly émws ought to have
stood; cf. W. § 57, 2 fin.; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]. a.
with the indicative —pres.: Mt. vi. 28; Mk. xii. 41;
Lk. xii. 27; Acts xv. 86; 1 Co. iii. 10; Eph. v.15; Col.
iv.6; 1 Tim. ili. 15; 76 més (on the art. see 6, II. 10 a.)3
with the impf. Lk. xiv. 7; with the perf. Rev. iii. 33.
with the aor., Mt. xii. 4; Mk. ii. 26 [here Tr WH br.
mas]; Lk. viii. 86; Acts ix. 27, etc.; after dvaywockew,
Mk. xii. 26 TTrWH; how it came to pass that, etc. Jn.
ix.15; with the fut.: pepisva, was apéoe (because the
direct quest. would be més dpéow;), 1 Co. vii. 32-34 [but
L TTr WH -on]; efnrovy mas atrév amodéecovow, how
they shall destroy him (so that they were in no uncer-
tainty respecting his destruction, but were only deliber-
ating about the way in which they will accomplish it),
Mk. xi. 18 RG (but the more correct reading here, acc.
to the best Mss., including cod. Sin., is dwodéowow ‘how
they should destroy him’ [cf. W. § 41b. 4b.; B. § 139,
P, p
61; see next head]). b. with the subjunctive,
of the aor. and in deliberation: Mk. xi. 18 LT Tr WH;
xiv. 1,11 [RG]; Mt. x. 19; Lk. xii. 11; 7é més, Lk.
XX 24 NCES LV ile III. in exclamation, how:
mas Svaxoddy eorw, Mk. x. 24; mas mapaypypua, Mt. xxi.
[P, p: the practice of doubling p (after a prep. or an augm.)
is sometimes disregarded by the Mss., and accordingly by the
critical editors ; so, too, in the middle of a word ; see avayripy-
Tos, atopirtw, apaBdy, %papos, diapyyvuus, emipdmtw, émupi-
mTTw, Tapapéw, paBdiCw, pavrTi¢w, paml(w, plrrw, piouat, etc. ;
ef. W. § 13, 1b.; B. 32 (28 sq.); WAH. App. p. 163; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 80. Recent editors, L T (cf. the Proleg. to his 7th
ed. p. celxxvi.), Kuenen and Cobet (cf. their Praef. p. xcvi.),
WH (but not Treg.), also follow the older Mss. in omitting
the breathings from pp in the middle of a word; cf. Lipszus,
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 18 sq.; Greg. Corinth. ed. Bast p.
732 sq.; in opposition see Donaldson, Greek Gram. p. 16;
W. 48 (47). On the smooth breathing over the initial p
when p begins two successive syllables, see Lipsius u. s. ;
WH. u. s. pp. 163, 170; Kiihner § 67 Anm. 4; Goettling, Ac-
cent, p. 205 note; and on the general subject of the breath-
ings cf. the Proleg. to Tdf. ed. 8 p. 105 sq. and reff. there.
On the usage of modern edd. of the classics cf. Veitch s. vv.
parrw, péCw, etc. |
‘PaaB (and “PayaB, Mt. i. 5; ‘Paya@n, -ns, in Joseph.
[antt. 5, 1, 2 ete.]), 9, (an ‘broad’, ‘ample’), Rakab,
a harlot of Jericho: Heb. xi. 31; Jas. ii. 25. [Cf. B.D.
s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. Clement of Rome, App. (Lond. 1877)
p- 413.]*
pai, T WH paBBei (cf. B. p.6; WH. App. p. 155;
see et, e], (Hebr. ‘35, fr. 22 much, great), prop. my
great one, my honorable sir; (others incorrectly regard
the + as the yodh paragogic); Rabbi, a title with which
the Jews were wont to address their teachers (and also
to honor them when not addressing them; cf. the French
monsicur, monseigneur): Mt. xxiii. 7; translated into
Greek by didaoxados, Mt. xxiii. 8 GLT Tr WH; John
the Baptist is addressed by this title, Jn. iii. 26; Jesus:
both by his disciples, Mt. xxvi. 25, 49; Mk.ix.53 xi.
21; Jn. i. 38 (89), 49 (50); iv. 31; ix.2; xi.8; and by
others, Jn. iii. 2; vi. 25; repeated to indicate earnest-
ness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a.] paBBi, paBBi, RG in Mt. xxiii. 7
and Mk. xiv. 45; (so a> ‘> for ‘38 *28 in the Targ. on
2K. ii. 12). Cf. Lohtft. Horae Hebr. et Talmud. on Mt.
xxill. 7; Pressel in Herzog ed. 1 xii. p. 471 sq.; [Gins-
burg in Alex.’s Kitto, s. v. Rabbi; Hamburger, Real-En-
cyclopidie, s. v. Rabban, vol. ii. p. 948 sq.].*
paBBovt (so Rec. in Mk. x. 51) and paBBouw [WH
vei, see reff. under fafBi, init.], (Chald. jia lord; 121 |
560
“Payao
20; nas dvoxddws, Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24; with a verb,
how (greatly): mwas ovvéxouat, Lk. xii. 50; was epiha
airov, Jn. xi. 36.
ars, an enclitic particle, on which see under eizas [1. &
ei, III. 14] and paras.
P
master, chief, prince; cf. Levy, Chald. WB. tib. d. Tar-
gumim, ii. p. 401), Rabboni, Rabbuni (apparently [yet
cf. reff. below] the Galilean pronunciation of 13/39), a
title of honor and reverence by which Jesus is ad-
dressed; as interpreted by John, equiv. to d:ddoxados:
Jn. xx.16; Mk. x. 51, (see pa8Bi). Cf. Keim iii. p. 560
[Eng. trans. vi. p. 311 sq.]; Delitzsch in the Zeitschr.
f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, pp. 409 and 606; also for
1878, p.7; [Ginsburg and Hamburger, as in the preced-
ing word; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl-Aram. p. 10].*
paBSito; 1 aor. pass. eppaBdicbny and (so L T Tr WH)
epaBdicOny (see P, p); (fades); to beat with rods: Acts
xvi. 22; 2 Co. xi. 25. (Judg. vi.11; Ruth ii. 17; Arstph.,
Diod., al.) *
P4B80s, -ov, 7, [prob. akin to famis, Lat. verber; cf.
Curtius § 513], in various senses fr. Hom. down; Sept.
for NUD, IW, IPM Niywn, ete., a staff, walzing-stick :
iq. @ twig, rod, branch, Heb. ix. 4 (Num. xvii. 2 sqq-
Hebr. text xvii. 16 sqq.); Rev. xi. 1; @ rod, with which
one is beaten, 1 Co. iv. 21 (Plato, ie 3 p. 700 ¢.; Plut.,
al.; mardocew tid év paBdo, Ex. xxi. 20; Is. x. 24); a
staff: as used on a journey, Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix.
3; or to lean upon, Heb. xi. 21 (after the Sept. of Gen.
xivil 31, where the translators read N40, for m1 a bed;
(cf. TpooKuvee, a.]); or by shepherds, Rev. ii. 27; xii.
5; xix. 15, in which passages as év 6483 moiaiver is
fe applied to a king, so pd8d@ oidnpa, with a rod of iron,
indicates the severest, most rigorous, rule, hence pd8Sos
is equiv. to a royal sceptre (like wav, Ps. ii. 9; xlv. 8;
for ww, Esth. iv. 11; v. 2): Heb. i. 8 (fr. Ps. xlv.
8).*
paPSotxos, -ov, 6, (Aa8dos and gy; cf. edvodxos), one
who carries the rods i.e. the fasces, a lictor (a public offi-
cer who bore the fasces or staff and other insignia of
office before the magistrates), [A.V. serjeants]: Acts
xvi. 35, 38. (Polyb.; Diod. 5, 40; Dion. Hal.; Hdian.
7,8, 10 [5 ed. Bekk.]; Sia ri Auxrdpets rods paBdodxous
évopatovot; Plut. quaest. Rom. c. 67.) *
‘Payat [so WH] or ‘Payad [RGLT Tr], (ay4 [i. e.
‘friend’], Gen. xi. 18), 6, Ragau [A.V. Reu; (once
Rehu)], one of the ancestors of Abraham: Lk, iii. 35.
[B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Reu.|*
pediovpynpa
pgdiovpynya, -ros, 7d, (fr. padvovpyéw, and this fr. past-
ovpyds, compounded of pddios and EPTQ. A fadioupyéds
is one who does a thing with little effort and adroitly ;
then, in a bad sense, a man who is facile and forward
in the perpetration of crime, a knave, a rogue), a piece
of knavery, rascality, villany: movnpdv, Acts xviii. 14.
(Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian. ; eccles. writ.) *
padioupyia, -as, 7, (see padvovpynya, cf. mavoupyia); 1.
prop. ease in doing, facility. 2. levity or easiness
in thinking and acting; love of a lazy and effeminate
life (Xen.). 3. unscrupulousness, cunning, mischief,
[A. V. villany]: Acts xiii. 10. (Polyb. 12, 10, 5; often
in Plut.)*
[patve; see pavrite. |
paxa (Tdf. payd; [the better accentuation seems to
be -a; cf. Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 8]), a
Chald. word RP [but ace. to Kautzsch (u.s. p. 10) not
the stat. emph. of p', but shortened fr. }p>>)] (Hebr.
Py)» empty, i. e. a senseless, empty-headed man, a term of
reproach used by the Jews in the time of Christ [B. D.
s.v. Raca; Wiinsche, Erlauterung u.s. w. p.47]: Mt. v.22.*
Pdkos, -ous, Td, (pyyvupt), a piece torn off; spec. a bit
of cloth; cloth: Mt. ix.16; Mk. ii. 21 [here L Tr mrg.
pakkos]. (Hom., Hdt., Arstph., Soph., Eur., Joseph.,
Sept., al.) *
‘Papa [T WH ‘Paya; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Ramah, 1
init.], (7107 i.e. a high place, height), 7, [indecl. Win.
61 (60)], Ramah, a town of the tribe of Benjamin, sit-
uated six Roman miles north of Jerusalem on the road
leading to Bethel; now the village of er Ram: Mt. ii.
18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.;
Graf in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 851 sqq. ;
Pressel in Herzog xii. p. 515 sq.; Furrer in Schenkel
By; p-37; (BB. DD:]*
pavrite; (fr. pavrés besprinkled, and this fr. paive) ;
1 aor. éppdvtica and (so L. T Tr WH) épdvrica (see P, p) ;
[1 aor. mid. subjunc. pavticwvra (sprinkle themselves),
Mk. vii. 4 WH txt. (so Volkmar, Weiss, al.) after codd.
8B]; pf. pass. ptep. éppavricpévos (Td. pepavr., L Tr
WH £epavr. with smooth breathing; see P, p); for paiva,
more com. in class. Grk.; to sprinkle: prop. tud, Heb.
ix. 13 (on the rite here referred to cf. Num. xix. 2-10;
Win. RWB. s. v. Sprengwasser; [B. D. s. v. Purifica-
tion]); ib. 19; ri ajwar, ib. 21; [Rev. xix. 13 WH (see
mepippaiva)]. to cleanse by sprinkling, hence trop. to
purify, cleanse: éppavricpévor tas kapdias (on this acc. see
B. § 134, 7) amd «rd. Heb. x. 22. (Athen. 12 p.521 a.;
for Hebr. xun, Ps. 1. (li.) 93 for 113, Lev. vi. 27; 2 K.
Peesoe))"
pavticpds, -0d, 6, (partite, q. v-), used only by bibl. and
eccl. writ., a sprinkling (purification): aipa pavrio pod,
blood of sprinkling, i. e. appointed for sprinkling (serving
to purify), Heb. xii. 24 (88ep pavrispod for 737 1;
Num. xix. 9, 13, 20 sq.)3 els pavtecpov aiparos “Inood Xp.
1. @. els rd pavriterOa (or Wa partigwvrat) aipatt “Ino.
Xp., that they may be purified (or cleansed from the
guilt of their sins) by the blood of Christ, 1 Pet. i. 2 [W.
§ 30, 2 a.].*
561
or
pe@
paritw; fut. pariow [cf. B. 37 (32 sq.) ]; 1 aor. éppdmoa
and (so LT Tr WH) épdma (see P, p); Cr. paris a
rod) ; 1. to smile with a rod or staff (Xenophanes
in Diog. Laért. 8, 36 ; Hdt., Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.). 2.
to smite in the face with the palm of the hand, to box the
ear: twa, Mt. xxvi. 67 (where it is distinguished fr.
kodadifw[A.V. buffet]; for Suidas Says pamioau mardocew
THY yrdbov andj 7H xeupt not with the fist; hence the
Vulg. renders it palmas in faciem ei dederunt; [A. V.
mrg. (R. V. mrg.) adopt sense 1 above]); rua ém poey
Tr txt. WH eis] rijv ovaydva, Mt. v. 39 (Hos. xi. AN) Ors
Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. ete. p. 61 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn.
p-175; [Schmidt, Syn. ch. 118,10; Field, Otium Norv.
pars iii. p. 71].*
pamirpa, -ros, 76, (pamite, q. v.)3 1. a blow with
a rod or a staff or a scourge, (Antiph. in Athen. 14 p:
623 b.; Anthol., Leian.). 2. a blow with the flat of
the hand, a slap in the face, box on the ear: BadXew twa
paricpacw (see Baddow, 1), Mk. xiv. 65; S:Odvae revi pare
opa, Jn. Xvili. 22; pariopara, Jn. xix. 8, [but in all three
exx. R.V.mrg. recognizes sense 1 (see reff. s. v. fa-
mig) |.*
pais, -idos, 7, (famtw to sew), a needle: Mt. xix. 243
Mk. x. 25; Lk. xviii. 25 Ree., [(cf. kdundos)]. Class.
Grk. more com. uses Beddvy (q. v-); see Lob. ad Phryn.
pav0g Wa 2oi%
[Paxd, see pakd. |
‘Paxaf, see “PadB.
‘Paxfd, (917 a ewe or sheep), 4, Rachel [cf. B. D.
s.v.], the wife of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. ii. 18 (fr.
Jer. Xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15).*
“PeBéxxa (pr; fr. p2) unused in Hebrew but in
Arabic ‘to bind,’ ‘fasten’; hence the subst. i. q. ‘en-
snarer,’ fascinating the men by her beauty), 9, Rebecca,
the wife of Isaac: Ro. ix. 10.*
péSn [al. peda; on the first vowel cf. Tdf.’s note on
Rey. as below; WH. App. p. 151*], (ace. to Quintil. 1,
5, 57 [ef. 68] a Gallic word [cf. Vanicek, Fremdworter,
s. v. reda]), -ns, 7, @ chariot, “a species of vehicle having
four wheels” (Isidor. Hispal. orig. 20, 12 (§ 511), [cf.
Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s.v. Rheda]): Rev. xviii. 13.*
‘Peuddv (RG), or ‘Pepav (L Tr), or ‘Poppav (T), [or
‘Poupa WH, see their App. on Acts as below], Remphan
[so A.V.], or Rephan [so R.V.], Romphan, [or Rompha],
a Coptic pr. name of Saturn: Acts vii. 43, fr. Amos
vy. 26 where the Sept. render by ‘Parpdv [or “Pefav] the
Hebr. 133, thought by many to be equiv. to the Syriac
S -Ue
ob, and the Arabic sl H ; designations of Saturn;
but by others regarded as an appellative, signifying
‘stand,’ ‘ pedestal’ (Germ. Geriist; so Hitzig), or ‘statue’
(so Gesens), formed from 133 after the analogy of
such forms as pian, bsp, ete. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Saturn; Gesenius, Thes. p. 669°; J. G. Miiller in Her-
zog xii. 736; Merz in Schenkel i. p. 516 sq.; Schrader
in Riehm p- 234; [Baudissin in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Sat-
urn, and reff. there given; B.D. s. v. Remphan].*
péw: fut. pevow (in Grk. writ. more com. peioopat, see
pé
W. 89 (85); [B.67 (59)]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 739);
[(Skr. sru; cf. Lat. fluo; Eng. stream; Curtius § 517)];
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 231; to flow: Jn. vii. 38.
[Comp.: mapappéa. ]*
‘PEQ, see edzrov.
‘Phyto, -ov, 76, Rhegium (now Reggio), a town and
promontory at the extremity of the Bruttian peninsula,
opposite Messana [Messina] in Sicily; (it seems to have
got its name from the Greek verb pryvups, because at that
point Sicily was believed to have been ‘rent away’ from
Italy; so Pliny observes, hist. nat. 3, 8, (14); [Diod. Sic.
4,85; Strabo 6, 258; Philo de incorrupt. mund. § 26; al.
See Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]): Acts xxviii. 13.*
Priyea, -ros, 75, (pyyvupe), what has been broken or rent
asunder ; a. a fracture, breach, cleft: Hippocr., Dem.,
[Aristot.], Polyb., al.; for wpa Am. vi. 11 Alex. b.
plur. for OyIp, rent clothes: 1 K. xi. 80 sq.; 2 K. ii.
py oc. fall, ruin: Lk. vi. 49.*
pfyvupe (Mt. ix. 17) and fjoow (Hom. Il. 18, 571;
1 K. xi. 31; Mk. ii. 22 RGLmrg.; ix. 18; [Lk. v. 37
Lmrg.; (see below)]); fut. sé; 1 aor. éppn&a; pres.
pass. 3 pers. plur. pyyvuvrat; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
yp3 and YIP; to rend, burst or break asunder, break up,
break through; a. univ.: rods doxovs, Mk. ii. 223
Lk. v. 37; pass. Mt. ix. 17; i. q. to tear in pieces [A.V.
rend |: twa, Mt. vii. 6. b. sc. edppootvny (previously
chained up, as it were), to break forth into joy: Gal. iv.
27, after Is. liv. 1 (the full phrase is found in Is. xlix.
13; lii. 9; [ef. B. § 130, 5]; in class. Grk. pyyvivat kdrav6-
LOv, oieyny, Sakpua, esp. Povny is used of infants or dumb
persons beginning to speak; cf. Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p.
1332°; [L. and S.s.v. I. 4 and 5)). c. i. q. oma-
pacow, to distort, convulse: of a demon causing convul-
sions in a man possessed, Mk. ix. 18; Lk. ix. 42; in both
pass. many [so R. V. txt.] explain it to dash down, hurl to
the ground, (a common occurrence in cases of epilepsy) ;
in this sense in Artem. oneir. 1, 60 a wrestler is said
pngac tov dytimadov. Hesych. gives pyéac+ xaraBadeiv.
Also pnfe- kareBade. Cf. Kuinoel or Fritzsche on Mk.
ix. 18. [Many hold that pjoow in this sense is quite a
different word from pjyyype (and its collat. or poet.
pyoow), and akin rather to (the onomatopoetic) dpdooa,
pdoow, to throw or dash down; ef. Lobeck in Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. § 114, s. v. pyyvuys; Curtius, Das Verbum,
pp- 162, 315; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 118, 7. See as exx.
Sap. iv. 19; Herm. mand. 11,3; Const. apost. 6, 9 p:
165,14. Cf. mpoopiyvupt.] (Comp.: dsa-, mept-, rpoo-
Biron.) *
[Syn.: phyvupt, eardyvups, Opaty: §. to rend, rend
asunder, makes pointed reference to the separation of the
parts; «. to break, denotes the destruction of a thing’s unity
or completeness ; 0. to shatter, is suggestive of many fragments
and minute dispersion. Cf. Schmidt ch. 115.]
pfu, -ros, rd, (fr. “PEQ, pf. pass. eipnuat), fr. Theogn.,
Hadt., Pind. down; Sept. chiefly for 131; also for Ink,
7919, 19, TION, ete.; 1. prop. that which is or has
been uttered by the living voice, thing spoken, word, [ef.
éros, also Adyos, I. 1]; i.e.
- 562
phua
by the voice and having a definite meaning: Mt. xxvii.
14; p. yAdcons, Sir. iv. 24; gov) pnudrav, a sound of
words, Heb. xii. 19; Syyara dppyra, [unspeakable words],
2 Co. xii. 4. b. Plur. ra prjpatra, speech, discourse,
(because it consists of words either few or many [cf.
Philo, leg. alleg. 3, 61 7d 8€ fia pepos Aoyov]): Lk. vii.
1; Acts ii. 14; words, sayings, Jn. viii. 20; x. 21; Acts
[x. 44]; xvi. 38; 16 6. twos, what one has said, Lk.
xxiv. 8, 11, or ‘aught, Ro. x. 18}; ra 6. pov, my teaching,
Jn. v.47; xii. 47sq.; xv. 7; 7a p. a ey@ Aad@, In. vi.
63; xiv. 10; [dAnOeias x. cwppocivns p. aropbéyyouat,
Acts xxvi. 25]; pnuata Coqs aiwviov gxes, thy teaching
begets eternal life, Jn. vi. 68; 7a 6. rod Geov, utterances
in which God through some one declares his mind, Jn.
viii. 47; Nadel Tus Ta p. Tod O. speaks what God bids him,
Jn. iii. 34; Nadeiv wdvra Ta Pnuata THs Cans Tadrns, to de-
liver the whole doctrine concerning this life, i.e. the
life eternal, Acts v. 20; ra p. d Sédwxds por, what thou
hast bidden me to speak, Jn. xvii. 8; pjyara Aadeiv mpos
twa, év ois etc. to teach one the things by which etc.
Acts xi. 14; ra pnara ra mpoepnueva 76 Twos, what one
has foretold, 2 Pet. iii. 2; Jude 17; Aadeiv pnuara Bda-
odnya cis tia, to speak abusively in reference to one
[see eds, B. II. 2 c. B.], Acts vi. 11; xara rivos, against
a thing, ib. 13 [GL T Tr WH om. Bddo@.]. Cad
series of words joined together into a sentence (a declara-
tion of one’s mind made in words) ; a. univ. an utter-
ance, declaration, (Germ. eine Aeusserung): Mt. xxvi.
To IMRA1x--82 5 xiv. (25) kil 50/5 91x) 455 [ savas 4s
xx. 26; Acts xi. 16; xxviii. 25; with adjectives, pjya
dpyov, Mt. xii. 36 ; etmreiv rovnpdv pjpya kata Twos, to assail
one with abuse, Mt. v. 11 [RG; al. om. 6.]. B. a
saying of any sort, as a message, a narrative: concerning
some occurrence, AaXeiv 7d p. mepi twos, Lk. ii. 17; pypa
ths wiotews, the word of faith, i. e. concerning the neces-
sity of putting faith in Christ, Ro. x. 8; a promise, Lk.
i. 38; ii. 29; Kaddv Geod pjya, God’s gracious, comforting
promise (of salvation), Heb. vi. 5 (see xadds, €.); xada-
picas ... €v pnpart, ace. to promise (prop. on the ground
of his word of promise, viz. the promise of the pardon
of sins; cf. Mk. xvi. 16), Eph. v. 26 [al. take 4. here as
i. q. ‘the gospel,’ cf. vi. 17, Ro. x. 8; (see Meyer ad
loc.)];_ the word by which some thing is commanded, di-
rected, enjoined: Mt. iv. 4 [cf. W. 389 (364) n.]; Lk. iv.
4 RGLTr in br.; Heb. xi. 3; a@ command, Lk. v. 5;
eyévero pnua Oeod émi tiva, Lk. iii. 2 (Jer. i. 1; mpds twa,
Gen. xv. 1; 1 K. xviii. 1); plur. pyyata rapa ood, words
Jrom thee, i. e. to be spoken by thee, Acts x. 22; paya
tis Suvdpews adrod, his omnipotent command, Heb. i.
3. doctrine, instruction, (cf. W. 123 (117)]: (7d) paya
(rod) Oeov, divine instruction by the preachers of the
gospel, Ro. x. 17 [RG; but LT TrWH 46. Xpicrod;
others give 6. here the sense of command, commission ;
(cf. Meyer)]; saving truth which has God for its au-
ther, Eph. vi. 17; also rod kupiov, 1 Pet. i. 25; words
of prophecy, prophetic announcement, ra f. rod eod,
Rev. xvii. 17 Ree. [al. of Adyor 7. 6.]. 2. In imi-
a. any sound produced , tetion of the Hebr. 135, the subject-matter of speech, thing
Poa
spoken of, thing; and that a. so far forth as it is
a matter of narration: Lk. ii. 15; Acts x. 37; plur,
Lk. i. 65; ii.19,51; Acts v. 32; xiii. 42. b. in so
far as it is matter of command: Lk. i. 37 [see ddwaréa,
b.] (Gen. xviii. 14; Deut. xvii. 8). c, a matter of
dispute, case at law: Mt. xviii. 16; 2Co. xiii. 1LA.V.
retains ‘word’ here and in the preceding pass.], (Deut.
xix. 15).*
“‘Pycd [Lehm. -c& (so Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], 6,
thesa, the son of Zerubbabel: Lk. iii. 27.*
Pirow, see pryvupe.
Pitep, -opos, 6, (‘PEQ), a speaker, an orator, (Soph.,
Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.): of a forensic orator or
advocate, Acts xxiv.1. [Cf. Thom. Mas. s.v. (p. 324,
15 ed. Ritschl); B. D. s. v. Orator, 2.]*
pnts, (pyTds), adv., expressly, in express words: Jytds
Aéyet, 1 Tim. iv. 1. (Polyb. 3, 23,5; Strabo 9 p: 426;
Plut. Brut. 29; [de Stoic. repugn. 15,10]; Diog. Laért. 8,
71; [al.; cf. Wetstein on 1 Tim. 1.¢.; W. 463 (481)].)*
plfa, -ys, 7, (akin to Germ. Reis [cf. Lat. radix; Eng.
root; see Curtius § 515; Fick, Pt. iii. 775]), fr. Hom.
down; Sept. for wry ; 1. @ root: prop., Mt. iii.
10; Lk. iii. 9; ek grfav, from the roots [cf. W. § 51, 1
d.J, Mk. xi. 20; pigav yew, to strike deep root, Mt. xiii.
6; Mk. iv. 6; trop. od pifav yew év éavrd, spoken of one
who has but a superficial experience of divine truth,
has not permitted it to make its way into the inmost
recesses of his soul, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk. iv. 17; Lk. viii.
13; in fig. disc. fifa mxpias (see mxpia) of a person dis-
posed to apostatize and induce others to commit the
same offence, Heb. xii. 15; the progenitors of a race
are called piga, their descendants cdddoz (see Kdddos, b.),
Ro. xi. 16-18. - Metaph. cause, origin, source: mdvreav
tay kaxav, 1 Tim. vi. 10; ris codias, Sir. i. 6 (5), 20 (18);
tis abavacias, Sap. xv. 3; ths duaprias, of the devil, Ev.
Nicod. 23; dpy7 kat pi{a ravros dyabod, Epicur. ap. Athen.
12, 67 p. 546 sq.; ayy) Kat pia Kadoxayabias 7d vopipou
ruxeiv matdeias, Plut. de puer.educ.c.7b. —s-2._ after
the use of the Hebr. ww, that which like a root springs
from a root, a sprout, shoot 3 metaph. offspring, progeny:
Ro. xv. 12; Rev. v. 5; xxii. 16, (Is. xi. 10).*
pitéw, -: pf. pass. ptep. éppitapevos [see P, p]; (pita);
fr. Hom. down; to cause to strike root, to strengthen with
roots; as often in class. writ. (see Passow s. v. 3; [L. and |
S. s.v. L.]), trop. to render firm, to fiz, establish, cause a
person or a thing to be thoroughly grounded: pass. éppita-
pévos (Vulg. radicatus) év dydmp, Eph. iii. 17 (18) [not
WH]; év Xpiorg, in communion with Christ, Col. ii. 7.
[Comp. éx-p.¢s. |*
purrh, -As, 9, (irrw), used by the Grk. poets fr. Hom.
down; a throw, stroke, beat: dpOadpod (Vulg. ictus oculi
[A. V. the twinkling of an eye]), a moment of time, 1 Co.
xv. 52 [Lmrg. porn, q. v-].* :
fimtto: pres. pass. ptep. prmetduevos; (fr. puris a bel-
lows or fan) ; hence 1. prop. to raise a breeze, put
air in motion, whether for the sake of kindling a fire or
of cooling one’s self; hence a. to blow up a fire:
rdya, nip, Anthol. 5, 122, 6; Plut. Flam. 21. b. to
563
_but that he could heal them, Mt. xv. 30.
powkndov
fan i.e. cool with a fan (Tertull. flabello): Plut. Anton.
26. 2. to toss to and fro, to agitate: of the wind,
mpos dvépov puriferar 76 Vdwp, Philo de incorrupt. mundi
§ 24; pumCopevy dyvn, Dio Cass. 70, 4; Onpos adoraroy,
kakov kat Gardoon mavO Spo.ov, im’ dvéuov puri¢erar, Dio
Chr. 32 p.368b.; hence joined w. dvepitecGar it is used
of a person whose mind wavers in uncertainty between
hope and fear, between doing and not doing a thing,
Jas. i. 6.*
pirTéw, see pirra.
plate and purréo (perrovvrav, Acts xxii. 23; on the
diff. views with regard to the difference in meaning
betw. these two forms see Passow s. v. pizza, fin.; [Veitch
8. V. pimre, fin. Hermann held that fumreiv differed fr.
pirrew as Lat. jactare fr. jacere, hence the former had a
frequent. force (cf. Lob. Soph. Aj. p.177; Cope, Aristot.
rhet. vol. i. p. 91 sq.); some of the old grammarians
associate with furrety a suggestion of earnestness or
effort, others of contempt]); 1 aor. gua GTr, pp.
RL, épupa TWH, [ptcp. (Lk. iv. 35) pipary RG Tr
WH, better (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Veitch p. 512)
pivay LT]; pf. pass. 8 pers. sing. eppurrac [G Tr; al.
épp.] (Lk. xvii. 2), ptep. epptppevos G, épiupévos T Tr WH,
pep. (with smooth breathing) Lchm. (Mt. ix. 36); on the
doubling of p and the use of the breathing see P, p; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for povin; to cast, throw;
i. q. to throw down: ri, Acts xxvii. 19; cl &« twos, ibid.
29; twa eis tiv Oddaccay, Lk. xvii. 2. i. q- to throw
off: ta ipdria (Plat. rep. 5 p. 474 a.), Acts xxii. 23 (they
cast off their garments that they might be the better
prepared to throw stones [but cf. Wendt in Mey. Ste
Aufl.]); ra dada, 1 Mace. v.43; vii. 44; xi. 51; Xen.
Cyr. 4, 2, 33, and often in other Grk. writ. i. q. to
cast forward or before; twa [or rt] ets re, [Mt. xxvii. 5
(but here RGL év7@ vad)]; Lk. iv. 35; twas wapa rods
médas *Inood, to set down (with the suggestion of haste
and want of care), of those who laid their sick at the feet
of Jesus, leaving them at his disposal without a doubt
i. q. to throw
to the ground, prostrate : épptypévot, prostrated by fatigue,
hunger, ete. [R. V. scattered], Mt. ix. 36 (katadaBav
éppipévovs kal peOvovras, the enemy prostrate on the
ground, Polyb. 5, 48, 2; of the slain, Jer. xiv. 16; éppip-
péva odpata, 1 Mace. xi. 4; for other exx. see Wahl,
Clavis Apocr. V.T. s.v.; rv vexpav épotspevar emi tips
dyopas, Plut.Galb. 28, 1). [Comp.: azo-, ém- pinta. | x
‘PoPodp, (DIN i. e. ‘enlarging the people’, equiv. to
Evptdqyos in Grk., fr. 291 and oy), 6, Roboam, Reho-
boam, the son and successor of king Solomon: Mt. i. 7.*
*Pé8n, -7s, 9, Rhoda [i. e. ‘rose’], the name of a certain
maidservant: Acts xii. 13.*
. *Pé80s, -ov, 4}, I2hodes, [(ef. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.) ],
a well-known island of the Cyclades opposite Caria and
Lycia, with a capital of the same name: Acts xxi. 1.
([From Hom. down]; 1 Mace. xv. 23.) * '
poutnddv, (Sorte to make a confused noise), adv., ‘with
aloud noise’: 2 Pet. iii.10. (Nicand. ther. 556; Geop.,
al.) *
‘Pouow
[‘Popdd, ‘Pouddy, see ‘Peudar. ]
pophata, -as, 4, a large sword; prop. a long Thracian
javelin [ef. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Rhompza]; also a
kind of long sword wont to be worn on the right shoul-
der, (Hesych. foudpaia: Opaxioy dpuvrnprov, payatpa, Eipos
i) dxdvrtov paxpdv; [Suidas 3223 c. (cf. péuBw to revolve,
vibrate)]; cf. Plut. Aemil. 18); [A. V. sword]: Rev. i.
16; ii. 12,16; vi. 8; xix. 15,21; cod dé adras rHyv oxy
dveAevoerat poudaia, a fig. for ‘extreme anguish shall fill
(pierce, as it were) thy soul’, Lk. ii. 35, where cf. Kuinoel.
(Joseph. antt. 6, 12,4; 7, 12,1; in Ev. Nicod. 26 the
archangel Michael, keeper of Paradise, is called 9 pdo-
yin poytpaia. Very often in Sept. for 21; often also
in the O. T. Apocr.) *
(port, -js, 7, (pémw), fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down, inclina-
tion downwards, as of the turning of the scale: év pom7
bpbarpod, 1 Co. xv. 52 L mrg. (cf. Tdf.’s note ad loc.) ;
see purn.*]
‘PovByyv (in Joseph. antt. 1, 19, 8 “PovBndros), 6, ({2387,
i. e. behold ye a son! Gen. xxix. 32 [cf. B.D. s. v.]),
teuben, Jacob’s firstborn son by Leah: Rev. vii. 5.*
*Pov@ (in Joseph. antt. 5, 9, 2 ‘PovOn, -ns), 9, (N39 for
mip , a female friend), Ruth, a Moabitish woman, one of
the ancestors of king David, whose history is related in
the canonical book bearing her name: Mt. i. 5. [B. D.
s. v. Ruth. ] *
“‘Potdos, -ov, 6, Rufus [i. e. ‘red’, ‘reddish’], a Lat.
proper name of a certain Christian: Mk. xv. 21; Ro.
xvi. 13. [B.D.s. v. Rufus. ]*
popn, -ns, 7, (fr. PYQ i. q. épvw ‘to draw’ [but Curtius
§ 517; Vaniéek p. 1210, al., connect it with péw ‘to
flow ”]) ; 1. in earlier Grk. the swing, rush, force,
trail, of a body in motion. 2. in later Grk. a tract
of way in a town shut in by buildings on both sides; a
street, lane: Mt. vi. 2; Lk. xiv. 21; Acts ix.11; xii. 10;
ef. Is. xv. 3; Sir. ix. 7; Tob. xiii. 18. Cf. Zod. ad Phryn.
p- 404; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 488; Wetstein on
Wiis Wh he Wis Bs BBE
piopar; fut. proouar; 1 aor. eppvodunv G (éppvo. R,
so Tin 2 Co.i.10; 2 Pet. ii. 7; L, everywh. exe. in 2
Tim. iii. 11 txt.) and epvodynv (so Tr WH everywh., T
in Col. i. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 11; Ltxt. in 2 Tim. iii. 11);
a depon. mid. verb, in later Grk. w. the 1 aor. pass.
eppvaOny G (-pp- R), and (so LT Tr WH in 2 Tim. iv. 17)
épvaOnv; (on the doubling of p, and the breathing, see in
P, p); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for xm; also for
ON, oda (to cause to escape, to deliver), yon (to draw
out), vbr, win, ete.; fr. PY to draw, hence prop. to
draw to one’s self, to rescue, to deliver: rtuvd, Mt. xxvii.
43; 2 Pet.ii.7; rid dad tivos [cf. W. § 30, 6 a.], Mt. vi.
13; Lk. xi.4 RL; 1 Th.i. 10 [here TTr WH ék; 2 Tim.
iv. 18]; 1 aor. pass., Ro. xv. 31; 2 Th. iii. 2; ruvd && rivos
[W.u.s.]: Ro. vii. 24 [cf. W. § 41a.5]; 2 Co. i. 10; Col.
i.13; 2 Tim. iii. 11; 2 Pet.ii.9; 1 aor. pass., Lk. i. 74;
2 Tim. iv.17; 6 pudpevos, the deliverer, Ro. xi. 26 (after
‘Is. lix. 20).*
puralvw: (pvmos,q. v.); to make filthy, befoul; to defile,
dishonor, (Xen., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.); 1 aor.
564
‘Popy
pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. putavOqra, let him be made filthy,
i.e. trop. let him continue to defile himself with sins, Rev.
xxii. 11 LT Tr WH txt.*
furapetopar: 1 aor. (pass.) impv. 3 pers. sing. puma-
pevdnra; (pumapés, gq. v.); to be dirty, grow filthy;
metaph. to be defiled with iniquity: Rev. xxii. 11 GLed.
ster. WHmrg. Found nowhere else; see pumaive and
pumow.*
pumapta, -as, 7, (pumapds), filthiness (Plut. praecept.
conjug. ¢. 28); metaph. of wickedness as moral defile-
ment: Jas.i.21. [Of sordidness, in Critias ap. Poll. 3,
116; Plut. de adulat. et amic. § 19; al.]*
purapés, -d, -dv, (fdmos, q. v.), filthy, dirty: prop. of
clothing [A. V. vile], Jas. ii. 2 (Sept. Zech. iii. 3 sq. ;
Joseph. antt. 7, 11,3; Plut. Phoc. 18; Dio Cass. 65, 20;
pumapa kal érdvta, Artem. oneir. 2, 3 fin.; xAapws, Ael.
v. h. 14, 10); metaph. defiled with iniquity, base, [A. V.
filthy]: Rev. xxii. 11 GLTTrWH. _ [(In the sense
of sordid, mean, Dion. Hal., al.)]*
pimos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, filth: 1 Pet. iii. 21 [B.
§ 151, 14; W. § 30, 3 N. 3].*
purée, -4; 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. putacdte; 1.
to make filthy, defile, soil: Hom. Od. 6, 59. 2. in-
trans. for funda, to be filthy: morally, Rev. xxii. 11 Rec.*
ptots, -ews, 7, (fr. an unused pres. pw, from which
several of the tenses of péw are borrowed), a flowing,
issue: tod atpatos, Mk. v. 25; Lk. viii. 43, [on the two
preced. pass. cf. B. § 147, 11; W. § 29, 3b.], 44, (Hip-
pocr., Aristot.).*
putis, -iSos, 7, (PYQ, to draw together, contract), a
wrinkle: Eph. v.27. (Arstph., Plat., Diod. 4,51; Plut.,
Leian., Anthol., al.) *
‘Papaixds, -7, -dv, Roman, Latin: Lk. xxiii. 38 RGL
br. Trmrg. br. [(Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al.)]*
‘Popatos, -ov, 6, a Roman: Jn. xi.48; Actsii.10[R. V.
here from Rome]; xvi. 21, 37 sq.; xxii. 25-27, 29; xxiii.
27; xxv. 16; xxviii. 17. ([Polyb., Joseph., al.]; often
in 1 and 2 Macc.) *
‘Popaiorrt, adv., in the Roman fashion or language,
in Latin: Jn. xix. 20. [Epictet. diss. 1, 17, 16; Plut.,
App., al.]*
‘Pépn, -ns, 7 [on the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 b.;
(on its derivation cf. Curtius §517; Vaniéek p. 1212;
Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], Rome, the renowned capital
of Italy and ancient head of the world: Acts xviii. 2;
Kine ZU eK 11 xx vane 14e 16) Omi wile oe hima
17. (1 Mace. i. 10; vii. 1; [Aristot., Polyb., al.].) [On
Rome in St. Paul’s time cf. BB.DD. s. v.; Conybeare and
Howson, Life and Epp. ete. ch. xxiv.; Farrar, Life and
Work ete. chh. xxxvii., xliv., xlv.; Lewin, St. Paul, vol.
ii. ch. vi.; Hausrath, Neutest. Zeitgesch. iii. 65 sqq.; on
the Jews and Christians there, see particularly Schiirer,
Die Gemeindeverfassung der Juden in Rom in d.
Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargest. (Leipz. 1879) ,
Seyerlen, Enstehung u.s.w. der Christengemeinde in
Rom (Tiibingen, 1874); Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome,
2d ed., N.Y. 1877; Schaff, Hist. of the Chris. Church
(1882) vol. i. § 36.]*
.
pwvvupe
565
odBBatov
povvun.: to make strong, to strengthen; pf. pass. éppe- | letter, Eppaco, farewell: Acts xxiii. 30 [RG]; eppoabe,
pat [see P, p], to be strong, to thrive, prosper; hence the
2 pers. (sing.) impv.
[3, , s: the practice (adopted by Griesbach, Knapp, al.,
after H. Stephanus et al.) of employing the character s in
the mid. of a comp. word has been abandoned by the recent
crit. editors; cf. W. § 5,1 ¢.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.
122; Matthiae§1Anm.5; Bttm. Ausf. Sprchl. §2 Anm. 3;
Kiihner §1 Anm.1. Tdf. ed. 8 writes o also even at the end
of a word, after the older Mss. On movable final s see
&xpt(s), wéxpe(s), o8rw(s). The (Ionic) combinations po for
pp, and oo for rr (cf. Fischer, Animadyvers. ad Veller. etc.
i. pp. 193 sq. 203; Kiihner § 31 pp. 124, 127), have become
predominant (cf. &ponv, Oapréw, Odpoos, amadhAdoow etc.,
yrAGooa, hoowy (q.V.), PdAacoa, Knpiocw, Tepicads, mpacow
(q. v.), Tdcow, Técoapes, Puddoow, etc.), except in a few
words, as xpe(trwy (q. v.), the derivatives of éddrtwy (of which
word both forms are used indiscriminately), #rrnua, ArTdw
(yet see 2 Co. xii. 13), etc.; cf. B. 7. Some prop. names are
spelled indifferently with one o or with two; as, EAto(c)atos.
¢is oceasionally substituted for o, esp. before u, see sBévyumn,
Suvpva (cudpva, cf. Soph. Gloss. § 58, 3, and Lex.s. v.; Tdf.
Proleg. p.80; WH. App. p. 148; B.5; Lttm. Ausf. Sprchl.
§3 Anm. 6; Bezae cod., ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii.; L. and S.
s.v. Z, I. 3, and 3, II. 14¢.); so also t, as fuuBalrw 1 Pet. iv.
12 Reez; cf. Kiihner § 325, 5; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. u.s. ; see Edv.]
cafax Gavi, -vei T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 155, and
s.v. et, ¢], -kOavi Lchm. [in Mt. only], Clap, fr. the
Chald. paw), thou hast forsaken me: Mt. xxvii. 46; Mk.
xv. 34 (fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2, for the Hebr. ny, which
is so rendered also by the Chaldee paraphrast). [See
Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. (Leipzig 1884) p.11.]*
oaBae0 (Hebr. nisay, plur. of 82s an army): Kvptos
ca8avd (MiNa¥ 7m), [A. V. Lord of Sabaoth], i.e. lord
of the armies sc. of Israel, as those who under the lead-
ership and protection of Jehovah maintain his cause in
war (cf. Schrader, Ueber d. urspriingl. Sinn des Got-
tesnamens Jahve Zebaoth, in the Jahrbb. f. protest.
Theol. for 1875, p. 316 sqq., and in Schenkel v. 702 sq. ;
ef. Herm. Schultz, Alttest. Theol. ii. p. 96 sqq.; [B.D.
s.v. Sabaoth, the Lord of. But for the other view, acc.
to which the heavenly “hosts” are referred to, see
Hackett in B. D., Am. ed., s.v. Tsebaoth Lord of, and
Delitzsch in the Luth. Zeitschr. for 1874, p. 217 sqq.; so
Riehm (HWB s. v. Zebaoth) as respects the use of the
phrase by the prophets]. On the diverse interpreta-
tions of the word cf. Ochler in Herzog xviii. p. 400 sqq.
[and in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) §§ 195 sq.; cf. T. K.
Cheyne, Isa., ed. 3, vol. i. 11 sq.]): Ro. ix. 29; Jas. v. 4."
Acts xv. 29 (2 Mace. xi. 21; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,33; Artem
is the usual formula in closing a | oneir. 3, 44, al.; ¢ppwos kai byiawe, Dio Cass. 61, 13).*
capBaricpss, -05, 6, (caBBaritw to keep the sabbath) ;
1. a keeping sabbath. 2. the blessed rest from toils
and troubles looked for in the age to come by the true
worshippers of God and true Christians [R. V. sabbath
rest]: Heb. iv. 9. (Plut. de superstit.c. 3; eccl. writ.) *
oc&BBarov, -ov, 7d, (Hebr. naw), found in the N.'T.
only in the historical bks. exc. twice in Paul’s Epp.;
sabbath; i. e. 1. the seventh day of each week,
which was a sacred festival on which the Israelites were
required to abstain from all work (Ex. xx. 10; xxxi. 13
sqq-; Deut. v.14); a. sing. aa8Barov and 76 odB-
Barov: Mk. vi. 2; [xv. 42 L Tr]; xvi. 1; Jn. v. 9 sq., etc. ;
i.q. the institution of the sabbath, the law for keeping holy
every seventh day of the week: Mt. xii. 8; Mk. ii. 27sq.;
Lk. vi. 5; Adew, Jn. v. 18; rypeiv, Jn. ix. 16; 4 mpépa
Tov caBBarov (Naw of, Ex. xx. 8 and often), the day
of the sabbath, sabbath-day, Lk. xiii. 16; xiv. 5; 680g
oaBBarov, a sabbath-day’s journey, the distance it is law-
ful to travel on the sabbath-day, i.e. ace. to the Talmud
two thousand cubits or paces, ace. to Epiphanius (haer.
66, 82) six stadia: Acts i. 12, cf. Mt. xxiv. 20, (the
regulation was derived fr. Ex. xvi. 29); cf. Win. RWB.
s.v. Sabbathsweg; Oehler in Herzog xiii. 203 sq. [ef.
Leyrer in Herzog ed. 2 vol. ix. 379]; Mangold in Schen-
kel v. 127 sq.; [Ginsburg in Alexander’s Kitto s. v. Sab-
bath Day’s Journey; Lumby on Acts i. 12 (in Cambr.
Bible for Schools) ]. as dat. of time [W. §31,9b.;
B. § 133, 26]: caBBaro, Mt. xxiv. 20 [G LT Tr WH];
Lk. xiv. 1; 7@ caBBdaro, Lk. vi. 9 Ltxt. T Tr WH;
xiii. 14 sq.; xiv. 3; Acts xiii. 44; év caBBare, Mt. xii.
2; Jn. v. 163 vii. 22 [here L WH br. ev], 23; é€v r@ caf-
Baro, Lk. vi. 7; Jn. xix. 31. accus. 76 od88. during
(on) the sabbath [ef. B. §131, 11; W. §32,6]: Lk. xxiii.
56; Kara nav o. every sabbath, Acts xiii. 27; xv. 21;
xviii. 4. plur. ra od8Bara, of several sabbaths, Acts
xvii. 2 [some refer this to 2]. b. plur. 7a cdBB.
(for the singular) of a sin gle sabbath, sabbath-day, (the
use of the plur. being occasioned either by the plur.
names of festivals, as ra ¢yxaima, a{upa, yevéora, or by
the Chaldaic form xnaw [W. 177 (167); B. 23 (21)]):
Mt. xxviii. 1; Col. ii. 16, (Ex. xx. 10; Lev. xxiii. 32 ete. 5
ri €Bdspnv caBBara kadodper, Joseph. antt. 3, 6, 6; add,
1,1,1; [14, 10, 25; Philo de Abrah. §5; de cherub.
§ 26; Plut. de superstitione 8]; rnv rév caBSatwv éoptny,
oaynvn
Plut. symp. 4, 6, 2; hodie tricesima sabbata, Hor. sat.
1, 9,69; nowhere so used by John exc. in the phrase
pia rv caBBdrwv, on which see 2 below); 7 jpuépa Tov
o., Lk. iv. 16; Acts xiii. 14; xvi.13 (Hix. xx. 8; xxxv.
3; Deut. v.12; Jer. xvii. 21 sq.); tots ca8Baow and év
rois od8Bacw (so constantly [exc. Lchm. in Mt. xii. 1,
12] by metaplasm for caBBdros, cf. W.63 (62); [B. 23
(21)]) on the sabbath-day: Mt. xii. 1 [see above], 5,
10-12 [see above]; Mk. i. 21; ii. 23; iii. 2,4; Lk. iv. 31;
vi. 9 (RG Lmrg.], (1 Mace. ii. 38; the Sept. uses the
form ca8Bdros, and Josephus both forms). On the
precepts of the Jews with regard to the observance of
the sabbath, which were for the most part extremely
punctilious and minute, cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Sabbath;
Oehler in Herzog xiii. 192 sqq. [revised by Orelli in ed.
2 vol. xiii. 156 sqq.]; Schiirer, Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. § 28
_I.; Mangold in Schenkel v. p. 123 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v.3
Geikie, Life and Words of Christ, ch. xxxviii. vol. ii.
p: 95 sqq.; Farrar, Life of Christ, ch. xxxi. vol. i. p.
432 sq.; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, vol. ii. p. 56 sqq.
and App. xvii. ]. 2. seven days, a week: mpatn caB-
Barov, Mk. xvi. 9; dis rod ca. twice in the week, Lk. xviii.
12. he plur. is used in the same sense in the phrase
9 pia Trav caBBadror, the first day of the week (see eis, 5)
[ Prof. Sophocles regards the gen. (dependent on npépa)
in such exx. as those that follow (cf. Mk. xvi. 9 above)
as equiv. to perd w. an ace., the first day after the sabbath;
see his Lex. p. 43 par. 6]: Mt. xxviii. 1; Mk. xvi. 2;
Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xx.1,19; Acts xx. 7; xara piavy caBBatev
(LT Tr WH -rov), on the first day of every week, 1 Co.
S102
cayhyn, -ns, 7, (cdooe to load, fill), a large fishing-net,
a drag-net (Vulg. sagena [cf. Eng. seine]), used in catch-
ing fish that swim in shoals [cf. B. D.s. v. Net ; Trench,
Syn. §lxiv.]: Mt. xiii. 47. (Sept.; Plut. solert. anim. p.
977 f.; Leian. pisc. 51; Tim. 22; Artem. oneir. 2, 14;
Ael. h. a. 11, 12; [8dadAdXew cay. Babr. fab. 4, 1; 9, 6].)*
ZasSovxaios, -ov, 6, a Sadducee, a member of the party
of the Sadducees, who, distinguished for birth, wealth,
and official position, and not averse to the favor of the
Herod family and of the Romans, hated the common
people, were the opponents of the Pharisees, and reject-
ing tradition (see mapddoots, 2) acknowledged the au-
thority of the O. T. alone in matters pertaining to faith
and morals (Joseph. antt. 13, 10, 6); they denied not
only the resurrection of the body (Mt. xxii. 23; Mk.
xii. 18; Lk. xx. 27; Acts xxiii. 8), but also the immor-
tality of the soul and future retribution (Wuyis re riy
Staupovny kai ras kal’ Gdov tiwwpias Kal TYuds dvatpodor,
Joseph. b. j. 2, 8, 14, cf. antt. 18, 1, 4), as well as the
existence of angels and spirits (Acts xxiii. 8). They
maintained man’s freedom in opposition to the doc-
trine of divine predestination (ace. to Joseph. b. j. 2,
8, 14). They are mentioned in the N. T. (in addition
to the pass. already referred to) in Mt. iii. 7; xvi. 1, 6, 11
sq-, (in which passages they are associated apparently
with the Pharisees contrary to the truth of history [(?)
ef. the Comm. ad ll. cc.]); Mt. xxii. 34; Acts iv.1; v.17;
566
aradinr
xxili.6sq. | The Sadducees derived their name appar-
ently not from the Hebr. pry, as though they boasted
of being pre-eminently ‘righteous’ or ‘upright’ (since it
cannot be shown that the vowel i ever passed over into
u), but, ace. to a more probable conjecture now ap-
proved by many, from the Zadok (pry, Sept. SaddovK),
who was high-priest in the time of David and exhibited
special fidelity to the king and his house (2 8. xv. 24sqq-;
1K.i.32sqq.); hence the posterity of this priest (prays BS).
Ezek. xl. 46; xliii. 19; xliv. 15; xlviii. 11) and all their
adherents seem to have been called Saédovuxaior (D"P173 )-
Cf., besides others, Win. RWB. s.v. Sadducier ; Reuss
in Herzog xiii. p. 289 sqq.; [Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 xiii.
pp: 210-244]; Geiger, Sadduc. u. Pharisier (Brsl. 1863) ;
Keim i. p. 273 sqq. [Eng. trans. i. (2d ed.) p. 353 sq.];
Hausrath in Schenkel iv. p. 518 sqq.; Schiirer, Ntl. Zeit-
gesch. 2te Aufl. § 26; Wellhausen, Pharis. u. Sadduciier
(Greifsw. 1874); Oort, De oorsprong van den naam Sad-
ducéen, in the Theolog. Tijdschrift for 1876, p. 605 sqq.;
[ Ginsburg, in Alexander’s Kitto s. v.; Edersheim, Jesus
the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. ii.; Geikie, Life of Christ, ch. xlv.
(cf. ch. v.); and B. D. Am. ed. s. v. for additional refer-
ences ].*
Zasox, (PiI¥, a pr. name occurring often in the O.T.),
6, Sadoc: Mt. i. 14.*
catyo: pres. inf. pass. caiverOa; (SAQ, cei) ; a
prop. to wag the tail: of dogs, Hom. Od. 16,6; Ael. v. h.
13,41; Aesop. fab. 229 ed. Halm [354 ed. Coray]; with
ovpy added, Od. 17, 302; Hes. theog. 771; odpay, Aesop
l.e.; al.; see Passow [or L. and S.]s.v. I. 2. metaph.
a. to flatter, fawn upon, (Aeschyl., Pind.,Soph., al.). _b.
to move (the mind of one), a. agreeably: pass. tm
edridos, Aeschyl., Oppian ; adnO7j caiver tiv Woxnv, Aris-
tot. metaph. 13, 3 p.1090%, 37. B. to agitate, disturb,
trouble : pass. 1 Th. iii. 3 [here A.V. move (B. 263 (226))]
(here Lehm. doaive, q.v-); of 8€ cawépevor trois Aeyo-
pevois eOaxpvov, Diog. Laért. 8, 41.*
caxkos (Attic odxos), -ov, 6, Hebr. py [ef. Vanitek,
Fremdworter, s.v.], @ sack (Lat. saccus) i. e. aa
receptacle made for holding or carrying various things,
as money, food, etc. (Gen. xlii. 25, 35 ; Lev. xi. 32). b.
a coarse cloth (Lat. cilicium), a dark coarse stuff made
especially of the hair of animals [A.V. sackcloth]: Rev.
vi. 12; a garment of the like material, and clinging to
the person like a sack, which was wont to be worn (or
drawn on over the tunic instead of the cloak or mantle)
by mourners, penitents, suppliants, Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x.
13, and also by those who, like the Hebrew prophets,
led an austere life, Rev. xi. 3 (cf. what is said of the
dress of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 4; of Elijah, 2 K. i.
8). More fully in Win. RWB. s.v. Sack; Roskoff in
Schenkel v. 134; [s.v. Sackcloth in B. D.; also in Me-
Clintock and Strong. (From Hat. down.)]*
Bard, (Nv a missile), 6, Sala [so A. V. (but in Gen.
Salah); properly Shelah (so R. V.)], prop. name of a
man mentioned in Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24); [T Tr mrg
WH read Sad also in Lk. iii. 82, for Sadpor, Geevellen
Darabuyr, (OM MON whom I asked of God), 5, Sala
Yarapis
thiel [Grk. for Shealtiel (so R.V.)], the father of Zerub-
babel: Mt. i. 12; [Lk. iii. 27]*
Beene; [on tie deriv. see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.],
~wos, , Salamis, the principal city of the island Cyprus:
Acts xiii. 5. [BB.DD.; Dict. of Geog. s. v.; Lewin,
St. Paul, i. 120 sq.]*
Zadetp, 7d, Salim, a town which ace. to Eusebius and
Jerome [Onomast. (ed. Larsow and Parthey) pp. 28, 11;
29, 14] was eight miles S. of Scythopolis: Jn. iii. 23; cf.
Pressel in Herzog xill. 326; [cf. Alvav]. See Sahu."
cadevo ; 1 aor. seeinas Pass., pres. ptep. cadevdpe-
vos; pl. ptep. cecadevpévos; 1 aor. éoadevdnv; 1 fut.
gahevOnoopat; (cddos, q.v.); fr. Aeschyl. and Arstph.
down; in Sept. pass. cadevoua for Yi and 3133; a.
prop. of the motion produced by winds, storms, waves,
ete.; to agitate or shake: xddayov, pass., Mt. xi. 7; Lk.
vii. 243 to cause to totter, ras Suvapers roy odp., pass., Mt.
xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25; Lk. xxi. 26; rip yav, Heb. xii.
26 (Is. xxiv. 20; Am. ix.5); an edifice, Lk. vi. 48; Acts
iv. 31; xvi. 26; rd pi cadevdpeva, the things which are
not shaken, i. e. the perfect state of things which will
exist after the return of Christ from heaven and will
undergo no change, opp. to ra cadevdpeva, the present
order of things subject to vicissitude and decay, Heb.
xii. 27. to shake thoroughly, of a measure filled by shak-
ing its contents together, Lk. vi. 38. b. to shake
down, overthrow, i. e. trop. to cast down from one’s (secure
and happy) state, Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); by a
trop. use foreign to prof. auth. to move or agitate the
mind, to disturb one: twa ad Tov vods, so as to throw
him out of his sober and natural mental state [B. 322
(277)], 2 Th. ii. 2; rods dyAous, to stir up, Acts xvii.
13%
Zodhp, 7, (Heb. pw), Salem: Heb. vii. 1sq.; cf. Gen.
xiv. 18, which some (as Gesenius, Winer, Hitzig, Knobel,
Delitzsch) think is the ancient name of the city of Jer-
usalem, appealing to the words of Ps. lxxvi. 3 07")
{30 Dowa, and Joseph. antt. 1, 10, 2 rav pevror Sddvpa
Sorepov éxddrecav ‘IepoodAvpua; cf. b. j. 6,10. But more
correctly [yet cf. B. D. s. v. Salem, and s. v. Melchizedek
sub fin.] others (as Rosenmiiller, Bleek, Tuch, Roediger
in Gesen. Thesaur. s. v. p. 1422, Dillmann), relying on
the testimony of Jerome ([Ep. ad Evangelum §7i.e.]
Ep. 73 in Vallarsi’s ed. of his Opp. i. p. 446), hold that
it is the same as Sadeiw (q.v-). For the ancient name
of Jerusalem was 033) (Judg. xix. 10; 1 Chr. xi. 4; (ef.
B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Jebus]), and the form of the name in
Ps. Ixxvi. 3 [where Sept. efpjvn] is to be regarded as
poetical, signifying ‘safe.’ *
Dodpov, (iow, Ruth iv. 21), 6, indecl., Salmon, the
name of a man: Mt. i. 4sq.; Lk. iii. 32 [here TWH
Tr mrg. Sada].*
Ladrpévn, -ns, 7, Salmone, Salmonium, [also Sammo-
nium], an eastern and partly northern promontory of
Crete opposite Cnidus and Rhodes [the identification of
which is somewhat uncertain; see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Salmone, and Dict. of Geogr. s. v. Samonium]: Acts
xxvii. 7.*
567
Sapapea
wddos, -ov, 6, the tossing or swell of the sea [R. V. dil
lows]: Lk. xxi. 25. (Soph., Eur., al.)*
cadmyé, -vyyos, 9, a trumpet: Mt. xxiv. 31 [cf. B. 164
(141) ; 343 (295)]; 1 Co. xiv. 8; Heb. xii. 19; Rev. i.
10; iv. 1; viii. 2,6, 13; ix. 14; év odAmvyye Oeod, a trum-
pet which sounds at God’s command (W. § 36, 3b.), 1
Th. iv. 16; &v rH éoxdry oddnvyy, the trumpet which
will sound at the last day, 1 Co. xv. 52, [4 (2) Esdr. vi.
23; see Comm. on 1 Th.u.s.]. (From Hom. down; Sept.
ea Taw and TIy3sn. d?
cadmite ; fut. cadrico (for the earlier cadiyéw, see
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 191; Sept. also cakma, as Num. x. [3],
5, 8, 10); 1 aor. rein oe (also in Sept.; Ael. v. h. 1,
26 and other later writ. [cf. Veitch s. v.], for the earlier
eoddnvy€a, Xen. anab. 1, 2,17) [cf. W. 89 (85); B. 37
(82); WH. App. p.170]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly
for ypA, also for \¥1; to sound a trumpet, [A.V. (most-
ly) sound]: Rev. viii. 6-10, 12 sq.; ix.1, 13; x. 7; xi. 15;
cadnice (strictly sc. 6 cadmorns or 7 odArvy€), like our
the trumpet will sound (cf. W. § 58, 9b. B.; [B. § 129,
16]), 1 Co. xv. 52; cadmi€ew eumpoobev éavrod, i.e. to
take care that what we do comes to everybody’s ears,
make a great noise about it, [ef. our do a thing ‘with a
flourish of trumpets’], Mt. vi. 2 (Cic. ad div. 16, 21
quod polliceris, te buccinatorem fore nostrae existima-
tionis; Achill. Tat. 8,10 adrn ody ind odArcyyt pdvov,
GAG Kal KNpUKL povyeverat).*
cadmuorths (a later form, used by Theophr. char. 25;
Polyb. 1, 45, 13; Dion. Hal. 4, 18, [al.], for the earlier
and better cadmtykrns, Thuc. 6, 69; Xen. an. 4, 3, 29;
Joseph. b. j. 3, 6, 2; and cadknexrns, Dem. p. 284, 26; App.
hisp. 6, 93; and in the best codd. of Xen., Diod., Plut.,
al.; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 279]; fr. cadmigo
[q- v.]), -ov, 6, a trumpeter: Rev. xviii. 22.*
Dadam, [Hebr. ‘peaceful ’], -ys, 7, Salome, the wife of
Zebedee, and the mother of the apostles James the
elder and John: Mk. xv. 40; xvi. 1.*
Darwpav, see Soropav.
Dapdpera [on the accent cf. Chandler §104; B.17 (15);
-ia T WH (see Tdf. Proleg. p. 87; cf. 1,1); on the forms
see Abbot in B.D. Am. ed. s. v.], -as [ef. B. u. s.], 9 [cf.
W. § 18, 5a.], (Hebr. })11¥, Chald. }}7:¥ pron. Scha-
me-ra-in, Assyr. Samirina), [on the deriv. see B. D. s. v.],
Samaria ; 1. the name of a city built by Omri
king of Israel (1 K. xvi. 24), on a mountain of the same
name (jn 47, Am. vi. 1), situated in the tribe of
Bshesins it was the capital of the whole region and
the residence of the kings of Israel. After having been
besieged three years by “Shalmaneser [IV.], king ‘of As-
syria, it was taken and doubtless devastated by Sargon,
his son and successor, B.C. 722, who deported the ten
tribes of Israel and supplied their place with other
settlers; 2 K. xvii. 5 sq. 24 sq.; xviii. 9 sqq. After its
restoration, it was utterly destroyed by John Hyrcanus
the Jewish prince and high-priest (see next word). Long
afterwards rebuilt once more, it was given by Augus-
tus to Herod [the Great], by whom it was named in
| honor of Augustus Sebaste, i.e. Augusta, (Strab. lib. 16,
Yapapeirns
p- 760; Joseph. antt. 15, 7,3; 8,5). It is now an ob-
scure village bearing the name of Sebustieh or Sebastiych
(cf. Badeker, Palistina, p. 354 sqq. [Eng. trans. p. 340
sqq.; Murray, Hndbk. Pt. ii. p. 329 sqq.]). It is men-
tioned, Acts viii. 5 LT WH, eis rv wéAw tis Sapapeias
gen. of apposition, cf. W. § 59, 8 a.; [B. § 123, 4]), but
ace. to the better reading eis méAw ths Sap. the gen. is
partitive, and does not denote the city but the Samar-
itan territory; cf. vs. 9. 2. the Samaritan terri-
tory, the region of Samaria, of which the city Samaria
was the capital: Lk. xvii. 11; Jn. iv. 4 sq. 7; Actsi. 8;
viii. 1, 5 (see above), 9; ix. 31; xv.3; by meton. for the
inhabitants of the region, Acts viii. 14. Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Samaria; Robinson, Palestine ii. 288 sqq.; Peler-
mann in Herzog xiii. 359 sqq.; [esp. Kautzsch in (Riehm
s. v. Samaritaner, and) Herzog ed. 2, xiii. 340 sqq., and
reff. there and in B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Samaria].*
Tapapelrns (-irns Tdf.; [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 87; WH.
App. p. 154; cf. I, ¢]), (Sapspere) -ov, 6, &@ Samaritan
(Samarites, Curt. 4,8, 9; Tac. ann. 12,54; Samaritanus,
Vulg. [(2 K. xvii. 29 ‘Samaritae’)] and eccl. writ.), i. e.
an inhabitant either of the city or of the province of Sa-
maria. The origin of the Samaritans was as follows:
After Shalmaneser [al. say Esarhaddon, cf. Ezr. iv. 2, 10;
but see Kautesch in Herzog ed. 2, as referred to under the
preceding word ], king of Assyria, had sent colonists from
Babylon, Cuthah, Ava, Hamath, and Sepharvaim into
the land of Samaria which he had devastated and de-
populated [see Sayudpeva, 1], those Israelites who had
remained in their desolated country [cf. 2 Ch. xxx. 6,
10; xxxiv. 9] associated and intermarried with these
heathen colonists and thus produced a mixed race.
When the Jews on their return from exile were pre-
paring to rebuild the temple of Jerusalem, the Samari-
tans asked to be allowed to bear their part in the com-
mon work. On being refused by the Jews, who were
unwilling to recognize them as brethren, they not only
sent letters to the king of Persia and caused the Jews
to be compelled to desist from their undertaking down
to the second year of Darius [Hystaspis] (B.c. 520),
but also built a temple for themselves on Mount Gerizim,
a place held sacred even from the days of Moses [ef.
Deut. xxvii. 12, ete.], and worshipped Jehovah there
according to the law of Moses, recognizing only the
Pentateuch as sacred. This temple was destroyed B. c.
129 by John Hyrcanus. Deprived of their temple, the
Samaritans have nevertheless continued to worship on
their sacred mountain quite down to the present time,
although their numbers are reduced to some forty or
fifty families. Hence it came to pass that the Samari-
tans and the Jews entertained inveterate and unap-
peasable enmity towards each other. Samaritans are
mentioned in the foll. N. T. pass.: Mt. x.5; Lk. ix. 52;
x. 335 xvil. 16; Jn. iv. 9 [here Tom. WH br. the el 39
sq.; vill. 48; Acts viii. 25. In Hebr. the Samaritans are
called now, 2 K. xvii. 29. Cf. Juynboll, Commentarii
in historiam gentis Samaritanae (Lugd. Bat. 1846); Win.
RWB. s. v. Samaritaner; Petermann in Herzog xiii. p.
568
caTrpos
363 sqq.; Schrader in Schenkel v. p. 150 sqq.; [esp.
Kautzsch in Herzog and Riehm u. s.].*
Lopapetris (-irre Tdf.; [see the preced. word]), -sdos,
4, (fem. of Sapapeirns), a Samaritan woman: Jn. iv. 9.
(The Samaritan territory, Joseph. b. j. [1, 21, 2, ete.];
3, 7, 32; Sapapeiris xapa, ib. 3, 3, 4.) *
Dapolpdxn [-Opd- R°*°* G (as here and there in prof.
auth.; see Pape, Eigennamen, s.v.); acc. to some ‘height
of Thrace’, acc. to others ‘Thracian Samos’ (cf. Sdyos) ;
other opinions see in Pape 1. c.], -ns, 7, Samothrace, an
island of the A2gean Sea, about 38 m. distant from the
coast of Thrace where the river Hebrus empties into
the sea (Plin. h. n. 4, 12, (23)), [now Samothraki]: Acts
Xvi. 112*
Zdpos, [(prob. ‘height’; cf. Pape, Eigennamen) ], -ov,
7, Samos, an island in that part of the gean which is
called the Icarian Sea, opposite Ionia and not far from
Ephesus; it was the birthplace of Pythagoras; [now
Grk. Samo, Turkish Susam Adassi]: Acts xx. 15.*
Zapovfa, (OM, for Oxy i.e. ‘heard of God’, fr.
pow and x; cf. 1S. i. 20, 27 [see B. D. s. v. Samuel]),
6, [indecl. ; Joseph. (antt. 5, 10, 3) Sapuovndos, -ov],
Samuel, the son of Elkanah by his wife Anna [or Han-
nah], the last of the nwdDY’ or judges, a distinguished
prophet, and the founder of the prophetic order. He
gave the Jews their first kings, Saul and David: Acts
iii. 24; xiii. 20; Heb. xi. 32. (1S. i—xxv., cf. xxviii.;
Sir. xlvi. 13 sqq.) *
Zappoy, (wow fr. wDw, ‘sun-like’, ef. Hebr. {vx
fr. ws), [B. 15 (14)], 6, Samson (Vulg. Samson), one
of the Israelite judges (0 ww), famous for his strength
and eae the Hebrew Hercules [cf. BB.DD.; McC.
and S. s. v. 2,4; esp. Orelli in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Sim-
son] (Judg. xiii. sqq.): Heb. xi. 32.*
cavdaduoy, -ov, 7d, (dimin. of cdvdadov [which is prob.
a Persian word; cf. Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v.]), @
sandal, a sole made of wood or leather, covering the bottom
of the foot and bound on with thongs: Mk. vi. 9; Acts xii.
8. (Hdt., Joseph., Diod., Ael., Hdian., al.; for 533 in
Is.xx.2; Judith x.4; xvi. 9. [In the Sept. and Joseph.
oavd. and imddnua are used indiscriminately ; cf. Is. xx.
2; Josh. v. 15; Joseph. b. j. 6,1, 8.]) Cf. Win. RWB.
s. v. Schuhe; Roskoff in Schenkel v. 255; [Kamphausen
in Riehm p. 1435 sqq.; B.D. s.v. Sandal; Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 621].*
cavis, -idos, 7, a board, a plank: Acts xxvii. 44.
Hom. down; Sept., Cant. viii. 9; Ezek. xxvii. 5.) *
Zaova, (WNW ‘asked for’), 6, indecl. (in Joseph. Sdov-
Nos), Saul; 1. the name of the first king of Israel:
Acts xiii. 21. 2. the Jewish name of the apostle
Paul, but occurring only in address [ef. B. 6]: Acts ix.
4,17; xxii. 7,13; xxvi. 14; in the other pass. of the
Acts the form Saddos (q. v.) with the Grk. term. is used.*
campés, -d, -dv, (one, 2 aor. pass. camhvat) ; 1.
rotten, putrid, ([Hipponax], Hipper., Arstph., al.). 2.
corrupted by age and no longer fit for use, worn out,
(Arstph., Dio Chr., al.);_ hence in general, of poor qual-
ity, bad, unfit for use, worthless, [A. V. corrupt], (wav, é
(Fr.
Satheipny
py THY iiay xpelav mAnpoi, campov déyopev, Chrys. hom.
4 on 1 Ep. to Tim.): d€vdpor, kaprds, “opp. to kadds, Mt.
vil. 17 sq.; xii. 33; Lk. vi. 43; fishes, Mt. xiii. 48 [here
A.V. bad]; trop. AMdéyos, Eph. iv. 29 (cf. Harless ad loc.);
Sdypa, Epict. 3, 22, 61. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 377 sq.*
Zamdeipyn, dat. -7 (RGTWH),-a (L Tr; cf. (WH.
App. p. 156]; B. 11; [W. 62 (61)]), 4, (either Aram.
° Y
NYO i. e. ‘beautiful’; Peshitto (jmoue ; or fr. camper
pos, q. v.), Sapphira, the name of a woman: Acts v. 1.*
admetpos, -ov, 7, Hebr. 1°90, sapphire, a precious
stone [perh. our lapis lazuli, cf. B.D. s.v. Sapphire;
Riehm, AWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 14]: Rev. xxi.19. (The-
‘ophr., Diosce., al.; Sept.) *
capyavy [ (prop. ‘ braided-work’, fr. r. tark; Fick, Pt.
iii. p. 598; Vanitek p. 297)], -ys, 4; 1. a braided
rope, a band, (Aeschyl]. suppl. 788). 2. a basket, a
basket made of ropes, a hamper [cf. B.D.s. v. Basket]:
2 Co. xi. 33; (Timocl. in Athen. 8 p. 339e.; 9 p.407e.;
[al.]).*
Zdpbes, dat. -eow, ai, [fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., down], Sar-
dis [or Sardes], the capital of Lydia, a luxurious city;
now an obscure village, Sart, with extensive ruins: Rev.
i, 11; iii. 1,4. (Cf. McC. and $. s. v.]*
Tapduwvos, -ov, 6, Rev. iv. 3 Rec., i. q. cdpduoy, q. v.*
capdtoy, -ov, Td, [neut. of adpdios, see below], sard, sar-
dius, a precious stone, of which there are two kinds,
concerning which Theophr. de lapid. 16, 5, § 30 ed.
Schneid. says, rod yap capSdiov 76 pév Suadhaves épvOpdsrepov
O€ Kadeirat OnAv, 7d dé dtahaves pév peddvrepov S€ Kat
apoev, the former of which is called carnelian (because
Jlesh-colored; Hebr. 018, Sept. cdpdvov, Ex. xxviii. 17;
XXXvVi. 17 (xxxix. 10); Ezek. xxviii. 13; aipatdevta odpo.a,
Orph. de lapid. 16, 5), the latter sard: Rev. iv. 3 (Rec.
aapdive); xxi. 20GLTTrWH. Hence the adj. cdp-
d.os, -a, -ov, [fr. Sdpdes, cf. Plin. h. n. 37, 7] sardine sc.
Aios (the full phrase occurs Ex. xxxv. 8 [var.]): Rev.
xxi. 20 Rec. [B.D. s. vv. Sardine, Sardius.]*
capdidvvb, i. q. capddvvE (q. v.): Rev. xxi. 20 Lchm.*
capSévué [ Lehm. capdidvvE ], -vxos, 6, (sapdi0v and dvvé),
sardonyx, a precious stone marked by the red colors of
the carnelian (sard) and the white of the onyx [B. D.
s.v.; Riehm, HWB. s.v. Edelsteine 12]: Rev. xxi. 20.
(Joseph., Plut., Ptol., al.; [Gen. ii. 12 Aq. (Montf.)].)*
Zdperra [Trmrg. Sdpepda; Tdf. in O. T. Saperral,
(nang fr. \7¥ to smelt; hence perh. ‘smelting-house’),
-ov [yet cf. B. 15 (14); but declined in Obad.], ra; Sarep-
ta {so A. V.; better with O. T. Zarephath] a Phenician
town between Tyre and Sidon, but nearer Sidon, [now
Surafend; cf. B. D.s.v. Zarephath], (1 K. xvii. 9; Obad.
20; in Joseph. antt. 8, 13, 2 SapepOa): rhs Sdwvias, in
the land of Sidon, Lk. iv. 26. Cf. Robinson, Palestine
ii. 474 sqq.; [B. D. u.s.].*
cwapkikés, -7), -dv, (aapE), fleshly, carnal (Vulg. carnalis) ;
1. having the nature of flesh, i. e. under the control of the
animal appetites (see oap€, 3), Ro. vii. 14 Rec. (see odp-
xivos, 3); governed by mere human nature (see capé, 4)
not by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. iii. 1, 3, also 4 RG; hav-
569
caps
ing its seat in the animal nature or roused by the animal
nature, ai capkikal emOupiar, 1 Pet. ii. 11; i. q: human:
with the included idea of weakness, oma, 2 Co. x. 4; with
the included idea of depravity, capk. cogia (i. e. mavoup-
yia, 2 Co. iv. 2), 2 Co. i. 12. [(Anthol. Pal. 1, 107; ef.
am€xov TOY GapKiKav k. TapaTiKav émOupLar, ‘ Teaching’
etc. 1,4). Cf. Trench, Syn. § 1xxi.] 2. pertaining
to the flesh, i.e. to the body (see cdp€, 2): relating to
birth, lineage, ete., évrodn, Heb. vii. 16 Rec.; ra oapkikd,
things needed for the sustenance of the body, Ro. xv.
27; 1 Co. ix. 11, (Aristot. h. anim. 10, 2 p: 635%, 11; Plut.
de placit. philos. 5, 3, 7; once in Sept., 2 Chr. xxxii. 8
Compl.).*
gadpkuvos, -n, -ov, (aap), [Arstph., Plat., Aristot., al.],
JSleshy, Lat. carneus, i. e. 1. consisting of flesh, com-
posed of flesh, (for proparoxytones ending in -wos gen-
erally denote the material of which a thing is made,
ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 46 sq.; [ Donaldson, New
Crat. § 258]); Vulg. carnalis: opp. to AiOwos, 2 Co. ili.
3 (cdpx. ixdvs, opp. to a fish of gold which has been
dreamed of, Theocr. id. 21, 66; the word is also found
in Plato, Aristot., Theophr., Plut.; Sept., al.). Ds
pertaining to the body (as earthly and perishable material,
opp. to ¢@7 dxaradutos): Heb. vii. 16 G LT Tr WH (see
oapkikds, 2). 3. it is used where capxixds might
have been expected: viz. by G LT Tr WH in Ro. vii. 14
and 1 Co. iii. 1; in these pass., unless we decide that Paul
used capxixéds and oapxwos indiscriminately, we must
suppose that odpxwos expresses the idea of capkuxds with
an emphasis: wholly given up to the flesh, rooted in the
flesh as it were. Cf. W.§16,3 y.; Fritzsche u. s.; Reiche,
Comment. crit. in N. T. i. p. 138 sqq.; Holsten, Zum
Evang. des Paulus u. Petrus p. 397 sqq. (Rostock, 1867) ;
[ Trench, Syn. § Ixxii.].*
capt, capkéds, 7, (Aeol. cip&; hence it seems to be de-
rived fr. cip, akin to caipo, ‘to draw,’ ‘to draw off,’
and to signify what can be stripped off fr. the bones [Etym.
Magn. 708, 34; “sed quis subsignabit” (Lob. Paralip.
p- 111)]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 1w3;
1. prop. flesh (the soft substance of the living body,
which covers the bones and is permeated with blood) of
both men and beasts: 1 Co. xv. 39; plur. — of the flesh
of many beings, Rev. xix. 18, 21; of the parts of the
flesh of one, Lk. xxiv. 39 Tdf.; Rev. xvii. 16; accord-
ingly it is distinguished both from blood, odpg kai aipa
(on which expression see below, 2 a.; 3 bis; 4 fin. [cf.
W.19]), and from bones, wvevpa oapka Kal doréa OUK Exel,
Lk. xxiv. 39 (od yap ért odpkas Te Kal daréa ives Exovoy,
Hom. Od. 11, 219). ayeiv Tas odpkas Tivds: prop.,
Rev. xvii. 16; xix. 18, (Lev. xxvi. 29; xareoOiew, 2 K.
ix. 36, and often in Sept.; in class. Grk. freq. Bi8packew
adpkas; capxav €da6n, Plut. septem sap. conviv. c. 16);
trop. to torture one with eternal penal torments, Jas. v. 3,
cf. Mic. iii. 3; Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 2; ayety and tpwyew
tiv capa TOD viod Tod avOpemon, in fig. disc. to appropri-
ate to one’s self the saving results of the violent death en-
dured by Christ, Jn. vi. 52-56; dmrépxeo Oat or tropever Gat
éricw capkés, to follow after the flesh, is used of those
oapé
who are on the search for persons with whom they can
gratify their lust [see dmiow, 2 a.], Jude 7; 2 Pet. ii.
10; 7d cpa rhs capkés, the body compacted of flesh
[ef. W. 188 (177)], Col. i. 22. Since the flesh is the vis-
ible part of the body, capé is
2. i. q. the body, not designating it, however, as a
skilful combination of related parts (‘an organism,’
which is denoted by the word oda), but signifying the
material or substance of the living body [cf. Ae-
schyl. Sept. 622 yépovra tov vouv aapka § nBdcav péepec];
a. univ.: Jn. vi. 63 (see mvedpa, 2 p. 520° mid.); Acts
ii. 26, 30 Rec.; 2 Co. xii. 7; Gal. iv. 14; Eph. v. 29; Heb.
ix. 10,13; [1 Pet. iii. 21]; Jude 8; pla oapé, one body,
‘of husband and wife, Mk. x. 8; so eis odpxa piav (fr. Gen.
ii. 24), Mt. xix.5; Mk. x. 8; 1 Co. vi. 16; Eph. v. 31;
opp. to wuyn, Acts ii. 31 (Saxe... Ino. Xp.... Tv odpka
tmép ths capkos Huey kal THY WuxnY UTep TAY WuxXady Nar,
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 49, 6 [ef. Iren. 5, 1,1; but GLTTr
WH drop 7 yuy7 adrod in Actsl.c.]); opp. to mvetpa (the
human), 1 Co. v.5; 2Co. vii.1; Col. ii. 5; 1 Pet. iii. 18;
iv. 6; oap& k. aipa, i. q. Wuxexdv odpua, 1 Co. xv. 50, ef.
44; 1) weptrouy év capki, Ro. ii. 28; Eph. ii. 11; 7d mpod-
oordv pov ev capki,[ A. V. my face in the flesh], my bodily
countenance, Col. ii. 1; doOévera capkds, of disease, Gal.
iv. 13; év rh Ovnth capkl jar, 2 Co. iv. 11 (cf. ev ro
Coparte nuov, vs. 10); év 77 capki avtod, by giving up his
body to death, Eph. ii. 14 (15) ; also 8:a rs capkds adrod,
Heb. x. 20, cf. Jn. vi. 51, (mpoopépew thy odpkxa pov, to
offer in sacrifice my flesh — Christ is speaking, Barn. ep.
7,53 rhv capka rapadodva cis KarapOopay, ibid. 5,1). life
on earth, which is passed in the body (flesh), is desig-
nated by the foll. phrases: év capki etvat, Ro. vii. 5 (where
Paul uses this expression with designed ambiguity in or-
der to involve-also the ethical sense, ‘to be in the power
of the flesh,’ to be prompted and governed by the flesh ;
see 4 below) ; (qv év capxi, Gal. ii. 20; Phil. 1.22; ém-
pévev év oapki, Phil. i. 24; 6 év capki ypdvos, 1 Pet. iv. 2;
ai uepat THs wapKds adrod, of Christ’s life on earth, Heb.
v.7. éyv oapki or év 77 capki, in things pertaining to the
flesh (body), such as circumcision, descent, etc.: Gal. vi.
12 sq.; memovOévat, Phil. iii. 3 sq. 3 ¢yewv wemoibnow, Phil.
iii. 4. b. used of natural or physical origin,
generation, relationship: oi ovyyeveis kara odpa,
Ro. ix. 3 [ef. W. § 20, 2 a.]; rékva ris capkés, children
by birth, natural posterity, ibid. 8; dSeA@sv év capi kai
ev kvpio, a natural brother (as it were) and a Christian
brother, Philem. 16; of ris capkds huar marépes, our nat-
ural fathers (opp. to God 6 marhp rav mvevpdrar, see
marnp, 1 a. and 3 b.), Heb. xii. 9; ra 2Ovn ev capi, Gen-
tiles by birth, Eph. ii. 11; *IopaiA Kata odpka, 1 Co. x.
18 (the opposite term *IopaiA rod Geod, of Christians, is
found in Gal. vi. 16); 7d xara odpxa, as respects the flesh
i.e. human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [(Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 32, 2;
Tren. haer. 4, 4, 1 and frag. 17 ed. Stieren p. 836) ]; yevd-
Hevos €k oméppatos Aaveld xara o. Ro. i. 3; 6 kata odpxa
yevnGeis, born by natural generation (opp. to 6 Katd
mvedpa yevy. i. e. by the supernatural power of God, oper-
ating in the promise), Gal. iv. 29, 23; 7d yeyevynuévov ek
570
odpé
rijs capkds odp& éorw, that which has been born of the
natural man is a fiatural man (opp. to one who has been
born again by the power of the Holy Spirit), Jn. iii. 6;
7) odpé pov, those with whom I share my natural origin,
my fellow-countrymen, Ro. xi. 14 (i800 do7@ cov kai
adpxes gov, 2S. v.1; add, xix. 13; Gen. xxxvii. 27; Judg.
ix. 2); elvas ex Ths capkos K. ek TV daTéwy Tivds, Which
in its proper use signifies to be ‘formed out of one’s flesh
and bones’ (Gen. ii. 23; to be related to one by birth,
Gen. xxix. 14), is transferred metaph. to the church,
which spiritually derives its origin from Christ and
is united to him, just as Eve drew her origin from her
husband Adam, Eph. v. 30 [RG Tr mrg. br. ]. cs
the sensuous nature of man, ‘the animal nature’:
without any suggestion of depravity, rd O€Anpa rhs cap-
kos, of sexual desire, Jn. i. 133 the animal nature with
cravings which incite to sin: Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38;
Ro. vii. 18 (for which ra péAn is used in 22 sq.); xiil.
14; Jade 23; opp. to 6 vois, Ro. vii. 25; 7 émbupia rhs
capkés, 1 Jn. ii. 16 (with its manifestation, 7 émOupia trav
épOarpaev; [al. regard this last as a new specification ;
cf. Westcott ad loc.]); plur. 2 Pet. ii. 18, (ra ts capKis
maOn, 4 Mace. vii. 18; 16 py SedovAGoOat Gapki kai Tos
mabect tavtns Stayewv, Up’ Sv kataora@pevos 6 vods Tis Ovy-
THs avaripmdarar pdvapias, evday.dv Te kal paxdptov, Plut.
consol. ad Apoll. c. 13; rs capkxds ndovn, opp. to Wuyxn,
Plut. de virt. et vit.c.3; add, Philo de gigant.§ 7; Diog.
Laért. 10, 145 ; animo cum hac carne grave certamen est,
Sen. consol. ad Mare. 24; animus liber habitat; nunquam
me caro ista compellet ad metum, Sen. epp. 65 [7, 3, 22];
/ non est summa felicitatis nostrae in carne ponenda, ibid.
74 [9, 3,16]). the physical nature of man as subject to
suffering: maOetv capki, 1 Pet. iv. 1; év TH capKi pov,
in that my flesh suffers afflictions, Col. i. 24 (where cf.
Meyer and De Wette [and Bp. Lghtft.]); Oripw eyew
TH wapki, 1 Co. vii. 28.
3. a living creature (because possessed of a body of
flesh), whether man or beast: maoa oap€ (in imitation
of the Hebr. nwa-59 [W. 33]), every living creature, 1
Pet. i. 24; with od preceding (qualifying the verb [W.
§ 26,1; B.121 (106) ]), no living creature, Mt. xxiv. 22;
Mk. xiii. 20; spec. a man (dvOpwmos for v3, Gen. vi.
13), generally with a suggestion of weakness, frailty,
mortality: Sir. xxviii. 5; év r@ Oe@ Ama, od HoBnbn-
copa ti rounoer pot odp&, Ps. lv. (Ivi.) 5; cf. Jer. xvii. 5; —
euvnodn, dre odpé eiow, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 39; cdpé x.
aiua, Eph. vi. 12; yevea capkés x. aiparos, i) pev TeAevTa,
érépa b€ yervarat, Sir. xiv. 18; 6 Adyos capé eyévero, en-
tered into participation in human nature, Jn. i. 14 (the
apostle used odp&, not avOpe7os, apparently in order to
indicate that he who possessed supreme majesty did not
shrink from union with extreme weakness); evpiokew Tt
kara odpka, to attain to anything after the manner of a
(weak) man, i. e. by the use of merely human powers,
Ro. iv. 1 (for substance equiv. to é& gpywy in vs. 2);
Hebraistically (see above), waca oap&, all men, Lk. iii.
6; Jn. xvii. 2 [W. § 30, 1a.]; Acts ii. 17; Sir. xlv. 4;
with od or un preceding (qualifying the verb [W. and
odpe
B. as referred to above]), no man, no mortal, Ro. iii. 20;
1 Co. i. 29; Gal. ii. 16. man as he appears, such as he
presents himself to view, man’s external appearance and
condition: xata odpka xpivew, Jn. viii. 15 [ef. W. 583
(542) ] (i. q. Kpivew kar’ dyer, vii. 24); ywaookew or eidé-
vat Tia kata odpka, 2 Co. v.16; of kara odpKa Kipuor (see
card, II. 3b.), Eph. vi. 5; Col. iii. 22. univ. human
nature, the soul included: év épovdpate capkos dpaprias, in
a visible form, like human nature which is subject to sin,
Ro. viii. 3 [ef. duolopa, b.J; €v capkt epyerda, to appear
clothed in human nature, 1 Jn. iv. 2and Rec. in 3; 2Jn.
7, (Barn. ep. 5, 10); gavepovoOa, 1 Tim. iii. 16 (Barn.
ep. 5, 6; 6, 7; 12,10); Kexowwrnxevar aiparos k. oapKés,
Heb. ii. 14.
4. capé, when either expressly or tacitly opp. to rd
mvevpa (tod cod), has an ethical sense and denotes
mere human nature, the earthly nature of man apart
Jrom divine influence, and therefore prone to sin and op-
posed to God; accordingly it includes whatever in the
soul is weak, low, debased, tending to ungodliness and
vice (“ Thou must not understand ‘flesh’, therefore, as
though that only were ‘flesh’ which is connected with un-
chastity, but St. Paul uses ‘flesh’ of the whole man, body
and soul, reason and all his faculties included, because all
that is in him longs and strives after the flesh” (Luther,
Pref. to the Ep. to the Rom.) ; “note that ‘flesh’ signifies
the entire nature of man, sense and reason, without the
Holy Spirit” (Melanchthon, Loci, ed. of 1535, in Corpus
Reform. xxi. p. 277). This definition is strikingly sup-
ported by these two utterances of Paul: oddepiav €oynkev
adveow 7 oapé jpyar, 2 Co. vil. 5; otK eoynka aveow TO
mvevparti pov, 2 Co. ii. 13): Ro. viii. 3; Gal. v. 13, 19;
opp. to 76 mvevpa (rod Geov), Ro. viii. 6 sq. 12 sq.; Gal.
v. 16 sq.; vi. 8; Col. ii. 13 (on which see dxpoSvaria, ¢.) ;
23 (see mAnopovn); émOvpia capkés, Gal. v.16; ai émuOv-
piace and ra OeAjpara trys oapkds, Eph. ii. 3; 6 vous ris
capxés, Col. ii. 18; cdpa ths capKds, a body given up to
the control of the flesh, i. e. a body whose members our
nature, estranged from God, used as its instruments (cf.
Ro. vi. 19), Col. ii. 11 GL T Tr WH; 1a rs capkés (opp.
to ra Tod mvevparos), the things which please the flesh,
which the flesh craves, Ro. viii. 5; capkt émurehovpat, to
make for one’s self an end [see émrehéw, 1 fin.] by de-
voting one’s self to the flesh, i. e. by gradually losing the
Holy Spirit and giving one’s self up to the control of
the flesh, Gal. iii. 3; oravpodv tiv odpKxa adrod (see orav-
péw, 3b.), Gal. v. 24; év wapki eiva (opp. to ev TVEL[LATL,
sc. Tod Geo), to be in the power of the flesh, under the
control of the flesh, Ro. viii. 8 sq., cf. vil. 5 (see 2 a.
above); of kard odpxa dvres, who exhibit the nature of
the flesh, i. q- of capxtxoi (opp. to of kara mvevpa évtes),
Ro. viii. 5; kara cdpxa mepurareiv, to live acc. to the
standard of the flesh, to comply in conduct with the im-
pars of the flesh, Ro. viii. 1 Rec.; 2 Co. x. 2; opp. to
xara mvevpa, Ro. vill. 4; BopretesDat; 2 Co. i. 173; Kav-
xac6a, 2 Co. xi. 18 where cf. Mayer; (opp. to xara
meric) Civ, Ro. viii. 12 sq. (év capkl rvyxdvovar, aX ov
xara cdpxa (Gow, of Christians, Ep. ad Diogn. 5, 8); ev
571
carap
oapkt mepurarouvtes ov Kata odpka otparevdpeba, although
the nature in which we live is earthly and therefore
weak, yet we do not carry on our warfare according to
its law, 2 Co. x. 3, (od Kara odpka ypddev, adda xara
yrouny God, Ignat. ad Rom. 8,3); with the suggestion
of weakness as respects knowledge: odpé x.
aipa, a man liable to err, fallible man: Mt. xvi. 17; Gal.
1.16; 7 acOevera ths capkés, Ro. vi. 19; cool kata oapxa,
1 Co. i. 26. Cf. Tholuck, Ueber eae als Quelle der
Siinde, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1855, p. 477 sqq. ;
C. Holsten, Die Bedeut. des Wortes odpé im Lehrbe-
griffe des Paulus, 4to, Rostock 1855 [reprinted in his
Zum Evang. des Paul. u. Petr. p. 365 sqq. (Rostock,
1867); see also (with esp. ref. to Holsten) Ltidemann,
Die Anthropologie des Apost. Paul. (Kiel, 1872)];
Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 66
sqq-; Baur in the Theol. Jahrbb. for 1857, p. 96 sqq.,
and in his Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 142 sqq., ete.;
Wieseler, Br. an die Galater, pp. 443 sqq. 448 sqq. [cf.
Riddle in Schaff’s Lange’s Com. on Rom. p. 235 sq.];
Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. (ed. 3) § 68 p. 243 sqq.,
§ 100 p. 414 sq.; Rich. Schmidt, Paulin. Christologie, p.
8 sqq.; Eklund, capé vocabulum quid ap. Paulum apost.
significet (Lund, 1872); Pflecderer, Paulinismus, p. 47
sqq- [Eng. trans. vol. i. p. 47 sqq.]; Wendt, Die Begriffe
Fleisch u. Geist im bibl. Sprachgebr. (Gotha, 1878);
[Cremer in Herzog ed. 2s. v. Fleisch, but esp. in his
Bibl.-theol. Worterbuch, 3te (or 4te) Aufl. s. v.; Laid-
law, The Bible Doctr. of Man (Edinb. 1879), pp. 74 sqq.
373 sq.; Philippi, Glaubensl. ed. 2, vol. iii. pp. 231-250;
esp. Dickson, St. Paul’s use of the terms Flesh and
Spirit (Glasgow, 1883)]; and the reff. in Meyer on Ro.
iv. 1 (6te Aufl.).*
Zapovx (Rec.), more correctly G LT Tr WH) Sepovx,
(aw ig. Ww, ‘vine-shoot”), o, Serug [so R. V.; but
A, V. in the N. T. Saruch], the name of a man (Gen:
xi. 20 sq. etc.): Lk. iii. 35.*
capde (for the earlier caipa, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 83
[W. 24, 91 (87)]),-6; pf. pass. ptcp. cecapwpévos ; (cdpor
a broom); to sweep, clean by sweeping: ri, Lk. xv. 8;
pass. Mt. xii. 44; Lk. xi. 25. (Artem. oneir. 2, 33;
[Apoll. Dysk. p. 253, 7]; Geop.) *
Zappa, -as, 7, (WW ‘princess’, Gen. xvii. 15), Sarah,
wife of Abraham: Ro. iv. 19; ix. 9; Heb. xi. 11; 1 Pet.
iii. 6.*
Ddpwv, -wvos [so Tdf.; but L WH ace. -ava, Tr -ova:
cf. B. 16 (14)], 0, Geb nw for jw fr. wh ‘to be
straight’; [in Hebr. always with the art. };1w7 ‘the
level’]), Sharon [so R. V.; but A. V. Saron], a level re-
gion extending from Caer of Palestine (Strato’s
Tower) as far as Joppa [about 30 miles]; it abounded
in pasturage and was famous for its fertility (Is. xxxiii.
9; Ixv. 10; 1 Chr. xxvii. 29): Acts ix. 35. [Cf. B.D.
s. v. Sharon; Robinson, Phys. Geogr. etc. p. 126.]*
carav indecl. (2 Co. xii. 7 RG [Tdf. in 1 K. xi. 14
accents -rdv (Lagarde leaves it unaccented)]), 6, and
6 caravas [i. e. with the art. (exc. in Mk. iii. 23; Lk.
xxii. 3)], -@ [cf. B. 20 (18); W. § 8, 1], ((Aram. 8300,
f
oatov 572 TELT LOS
stat. emph. of 10] Hebr. uw), adversary (one who op-
poses another in purpose or act); the appellation is
given to 1. the prince of evil spirits, the inveter-
ate adversary of God and of Christ (see duaBodos, and
in srovnpds, 2b.): Mk. iii. [23], 265 iv. 15; Lk. x. 18;
Kip Si el Conveo) 2) COonxie ance Dees ill Or mlm.
20; Rev. ii. 9, 13, 24; iii. 9; he incites to apostasy from
God and to sin, Mt. iv. 10; Mk.i.13; Lk. iv. 8 RL
in br.; xxii. 31; Acts v. 3; 1 Co. vii. 5; 2 Co. ii. 11 (10);
1 Tim. v.15; circumventing men by stratagems, 2 Co.
xi. 14; 2 Th.ii.9; the worshippers of idols are said to
be under his control, Acts xxvi. 18; Rev. xii. 9; he is
said both himself eicépyeoOat eis twa, in order to act
through him, Lk. xxii. 3; Jn. xiii. 27; and by his de-
mons to take possession of the bodies of men and to
afflict them with diseases, Lk. xiii. 16, cf. Mt. xii. 26;
2 Co. xii. 7; by God’s assistance he is overcome, Ro.
xvi. 20; on Christ’s return from heaven he will be
bound with chains for a thousand years, but when the
thousand years are finished he will walk the earth in
yet greater power, Rev. xx. 2, 7, but shortly after will
be given over to eternal punishment, ibid. 10. 2.
a Satan-like man: Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. [Cf. De-
litzsch in Riehm s.v.; Schenkel in his BL. s. v.; Ham-
burger, Real-Encycl. i. 897 sq.; Hdershewm, Jesus the
Messiah, App. xiii. § ii; and BB.DD. s. v.]*
° v7
odroy, (Hebr. AND, Chald. 8nNd, Syr. (2Ly), -0U, TO,
a kind of dry measure, a@ modius and a half [equiv. to
about a peck and a half (cf. pddios)], (Joseph. antt. 9, 4,
5 ioxver dé TO odrov pddioy Kal puto iradixdy; cf. Gen.
xviii. 6 [see Aq. and Symm.]; Judg. vi. 19): Mt. xiii. 33;
Lk. xiii. 21, [in both exx. A.V. ‘three measures of meal’
i.e. the common quantity for ‘a baking’ (cf. Gen. xviii.
6; Judg. vi. 19; 1S. i. 24) ].*
Daddos, -ov, 6, (see SaovaA, 2), Saul, the Jewish name
of the apostle Paul [cf. Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed.
2 xi. p. 8357 sq.; Conybeare and Howson, St. Paul, i. 150
sqq. (Am. ed.); Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xix. fin.; B.D. Am.
ed. s.v. Names]: Acts vii. 585; viii. 1, 3; ix.1,8,11, 19
Rec., 22, 24, 26 Rec.; xi. 25, 30; xii. 25; xiii. 1 sq. 7, 9.*
oBéevvupr (CBevvyju, 1 Th. v.19 Tdf. [ef. 3, o, ¢]) and
[in classics] oBevyvw; fut. cBéow; 1 aor. éoBeca; Pass.,
pres. oBévvypa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for M33 and
VA, to extinguish, quench ; a. prop.: ti, fire or
things on fire, Mt. xii. 20; Eph. vi. 16; Heb. xi. 34;
pass. (Sept. for 723) to be quenched, to go out: Mt.
xxv. 8; Mk. ix. 44, 46, [both which vss. T WH om. Tr
br.], 48. b. metaph. to quench i.e. to suppress,
stifle: 76 mvedpa, divine influence, 1 Th. v.19 (dydmny,
Cant. viii. 7; ra maOn, 4 Mace. xvi. 4; x6dov, Hom.
Tl. 9, 678; UBpuw, Plat. lege. 8, 835 d.; rdv Ovudy, ibid.
10, 888 a.).*
ceavtod, -is, -ov, reflex. pron. of the 2d pers., used only
in the gen., dat., and acc.; in the N. T. only in the
masc.; gen. (of) thyself, (of) thee: Jn. viii. 13; xviii.
34 L Tr WH; Acts xxvi.1; 2 Tim.iv.11; dat. ceavre,
(to) thyself, (to) thee: In. xvii. 5; Acts xvi. 28; Ro. ii.
5; 1 Tim. iv. 16; acc. ceavrdv, thyself, thee: Mt. iv. 6;
MK. xii. 31; Lk. iv. 23; Jn. viii. 53; Ro. xiv. 22; Gal.
Vinls 2 Dims ives) 2 Lim: tl orm asyil nO GmeClC me iOf.
B. § 127, 13.]
oeBdtopar: (c¢Bas reverence, awe) ; 1. to fear,
be afraid: Wom. Il. 6, 167. 417. 2. in later auth.
i. q. o€Bowar [W. § 2,1b.], to honor religiously, to wor-
ship : with 1 aor. pass. éoeSacOnv in an act. sense, Ro. i.
25 (Orph. Argon. 554; eccl. writ.).*
oéBarpa, -ros, Td, (ceSaCouar), whatever is religiously
honored, an object of worship: 2 Th. ii. 4 (Sap. xiv. 20);
used of temples, altars, statues, etc., Acts xvii. 23; of
idolatrous images, Bel and the Dragon 27; Sap. xv. 17,
(Dion. Hal. antt. 1, 30).*
oceBarrds, -7, -dv, (ceBa Copa) ; 1. reverend, vener-
able. 2. 6 aeBacrds, Lat. augustus, the title of the
Roman emperors: Acts xxv. 21, 25, (Strabo, Lcian.,
Hdian., Dio Cass., al.) ; adj. -ds, -n, -dv, Augustan i. e.
taking its name fr. the emperor; a title of honor which
used to be given to gertain legions, or cohorts, or battal-
ions, “for valor” (ala augusta ob virtutem appellata,
Corpus inserr. Lat. vii. n. 340, 341, 344): oeipa oe.
the Augustan cohort, Acts xxvii. 1 (Aeye@v oeBaarn, Ptol.
2,3, 30; 2,9,18; 4,3,30). The subject is fully treated
by Schiirer in the Zeitschr. fiir wissensch. Theol. for 1875,
p- 4138 sqq.*
oé€Bw, and (so everywh. in the Scriptures) cé8opac; fr.
Hom. down; to revere, to worship: twa (a deity), Mt. xv.
9; Mk. vii. 7; Acts xviii. 13; xix. 27, (Sap. xv. 18 etc.;
for NY, Josh. iv. 24; xxii. 25; Jon. i. 9). In the Acts,
“proselytes of the gate ” (see mpoonAuros, 2) are called
oeBdouevot tov Gedy, [men that worship God’], Acts xvi.
14; xviii. 7, (Joseph. antt. 14, 7, 2); and simply oi
oeBduevor, [A. V. the devout persons], Acts xvii. 17; ce-
Bdpevor mpoondvrot, [R. V. devout proselytes], Acts xiii.
43; oeBduevar yuvaixes, ib. 50; of oe8.”EXXAnves, [A. V.
the devout Greeks], Acts xvii. 4; in the Latin church,
metuentes, verecundi, religiosi, timorati; Vulg. [exc. Acts
xili. 50] colentes ; cf. Thilo in his Cod. apocr. Nov. Test.
p- 521.*
cepa, -as, 7, (etpw, to fasten, bind together, [akin to
Lat. sero, series, servus, ete.]; ef. Curtius § 518), fr.
Hom. down; a. a line, a rope. b. a chain:
cetpais Cépou, [A.V. to chains of darkness, i. e.] to dark-
ness as if to chains, 2 Pet. ii. 4 RG [but Tr WH have
aepots, L. T ctpois, which see in their place]; pia ddvoet
oxérous travres eO€Onoav, Sap. xvii. 17 (18).*
weipds, -ov, 6, l.q. wetpd, gq. V-: 2 Pet.ii.4 TrWH. But
oeipds, Lat. sirus, in prof. writ. is a pit, an underground
granary, [e. g. Dem. p. 100 fin. (where the Schol. 7. 6y-
gavpovs x. T. dpvyuara ev ois KateriOevro Ta oméppata
aipovs ekddovy of Opaxes x. of A(Bves); Diod. Sic. 19, 44;
cf. Suidas s. v. cecpot; Valesius on Harpocr. Lex. s. v.
MeAivn. See Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad loc. Ac-
cordingly R. V. txt. follows the crit. edd. (ef. oupds) and
renders “pits of darkness”’].*
ceopds, -od, 6, (cel), a shaking, a commotion: év TH
Oardoon, a tempest, Mt. viii. 24; as often in Grk. writ.
cElwW
fr. [Hdt. 4, 28], Soph., Arstph. down, pre-eminently an
earthquake: Mt. xxiv. 7; xxvii. 54; xxviii. 2; Mk. xiii.
8; Lk.xxi.11; Acts xvi. 26; Rev. vi. 12; viii.5; xi. 13,
19; xvi. 18; Sept. for wy .*
celw; fut. ceiow (Heb. xii. 26 LT Tr WH); Pass.,
pres. ptcp. cetdpevos; 1 aor. eoeioOnv; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. chiefly for wy; to shake, agitate, cause to tremble:
Rev. vi. 13; ri yqv, Heb. xii. 26 after Hag. ii. 6; ecetodn
nyt, Mt. xxvii. 51 (Judg. v. 4; 2S. xxii. 8); cewrOjvae
ard doBov, of men, to be thrown into a tremor, to quake
for fear, Mt. xxviii. 4; metaph. to agitate the mind:
eceicOn 7 mods, [R. V. was stirred] i. e. its inhabitants,
Mt. xxi. 10. [Comp.: dva-, d1a-, kara- ceio.]*
Zekotvbos, T WH Séxouvdos [Chandler §§ 233, 235], -ov,
6, (a Lat. word), Secundus, a certain man of Thessalo-
mica: Acts xx. 4.*
Zedcdnera [T WH -«ia (see I, +) ],-as, 9, Seleucia, a city
of Syria on the Mediterranean, about 5 m. (40 stadia,
Strabo 16 p. 750) N. of the mouth of the river Orontes,
about 15 m. (120 stadia) distant fr. Antioch, and oppo-
site Cyprus: Acts xiii. 4 (1 Mace. xi. 8). [Lewin, St.
Paul, i. 116 sqq.; Conyb. and Howson, ditto, i. 136 sq.]*
ceAqvn, -ns, 7, (fr. ceAas brightness), fr. Hom. down,
Hebr. 1), the moon: Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk.
xxi. 25; Acts ii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. vi. 1235 viii. 12;
a IES SoG VES
cweAnvidfopar; (ceAjyn); [lit. to be moon-struck (cf.
lunatic); see Wetstein on Mt. iv. 24; Suicer, Thesaur.
ii. 945 sq.; BB. DD. s. v. Lunatic]; to be epileptic (epi-
lepsy being supposed to return and increase with the
increase of the moon): Mt. iv. 24; xvii.15. (Manetho
carm. 4, 81 and 217; [Lcian., al.]; eccles. writ.) *
Sepet, L mre. Seuetv, T Tr WH Sepeciv [see WH. App.
p- 155; ef. e,¢], Cyow i.e. famous), Semein [so R. V.
but A. V. Semei], the name of a man: Lk. iii. 26.*
oweplSarts, ace. -iv, 7, the finest wheaten flour: Rev. xviii.
13. (Hippocr., Arstph., Joseph., al.; Sept. often for
inet ed
‘oepves, -7, -dv, (céBa), fr. [Hom. h. Cer., al.], Aeschyl.,
Pind. down, august, venerable, reverend; to be venerated
for character, honorable: of persons [A.V. grave], 1 Tim.
iii. 8,11; Tit. ii. 2; of deeds, Phil. iv. 8. [Cf. Trench
§ xcii.; Schmidt ch. 173, 5.]*
cepvorns, -ntos, 7, (cepnvos), that characteristic of a
pers. or a thing which entitles to reverence or respect,
dignity, gravity, majesty, sanctity: 9 Tod iepou oepvorns,
2 Mace. iii. 12; in an ethical sense, gravity [so R. V. uni-
formly (cf. Trench p. 347) ], honor, probity, purity: 1 Tim.
ii. 2; iii. 4; Tit. ii. 7. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) *
Lépywos, -ov, 6, Sergius, surnamed Paulus, proconsul of
Cyprus, converted to Christianity by the apostle Paul;
otherwise uaknown [ef. Zght/t. in Contemp. Rev. for
1878, p. 290; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. Excurs. xvi.; [ee
nan, Saint Paul, p. 14 sq.]: Acts xiii. 7.*
Depotx, see Tapovy. ;
E40, 6, (NW ‘put’ [A. V. ‘appointed ’], fr. naw to put
|i. e. in place of the murdered Abel; ef. B. D. s. v. Seth],
(sen. iv. 25), Seth, the third son of Adam: Lk. iii. 38.*
573
onpelov
2p (in Joseph. Squas), 6, (ow [‘name,’ ‘sign,’ ‘celeb-
rity’; but variously explained]), Shem, the eldest son
of Noah: Lk. iii. 36.*
onpaive; impf. eonwawor (Acts xi. 28 L WHtxt.); 1
aor. éonuava, for éonunva which is the more com. form in
the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. (see Matthiae
§ 185; Kithner § 343 s.v.; [Veitch s. v.]; Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 24sq.; W.§15s.v.; B.41 (35)); (fr. oqya a sign);
fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; to give a sign, to sig-
nify, indicate: rt, Acts xxv. 27; foll. by indir. disc., Jn.
xll. 33; xviii. 32; xxi. 19; ig. to make known: absol.
Rev. i. 1; foll. by acc. w. inf. Acts xi. 28.*
onpetov, -ov, 7d, (onuaivw [or ojua]), fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down, Hebr. nix, @ sign, mark, token; 1.
univ. that by which a pers. or a thing is distinguished
from others and known: Mt. xxvi. 48; Lk. ii.12; 2 Th.
ili. 17; onpetov mepiropys (explanatory gen. [cf. B. § 123,
4]), equiv. to onpeiov, 6 ore meptrouy, circumcision which
should be a sign of the covenant formed with God, Ro.
iv. 11; rd onpeia Tod dmoordXov, the tokens by which one
is proved to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12; a sion by which
anything future is pre-announced, Mk. xiii. 4; Lk. xxi.
73 TO on. THs Ons mapovcias, gen. of the obj., Mt. xxiv.
33 Tov viov Tod avOpwmov, the sign which indicates that
the Messiah will shortly, or forthwith, come from heaven
in visible manifestation, ibid. 30; with a gen. of the
subj. ta onpeta TOY Katpay, i.e. the indications of future
events which of xaipot furnish, what of kacpoi portend,
Mt. xvi. 3 [T br. WH reject the pass.]; a sign by which
one is warned, an admonition, 1 Co. xiv. 22. used of
noteworthy personages, by whom God forcibly
admonishes men and indicates to them what he would
have them do: thus onpetov dvrieydpevov is said of Jesus
Christ, Lk. ii. 34; “Iovas éeyévero onueiov trois Nevevirars
(Jon. iii. 4), Lk. xi. 30; hence, 76 onpetov “Iwva, ib. 29,
is i.q. 7d onpeiov like to that ds Av Ievas, i.e. to the sign
which was given by the mission and preaching of Jonah,
to prompt men te seek salvation [W. 189 (177)]; in the
same sense, 6 vids tov avOpwmov says that he will be a
onpeiov to the men of his generation, ib. 30; but in Mt.
xii. 89; xvi. 4 7d onpetov Iwva is the miraculous experi-
ence which befell Jonah himself, cf. xii. 40; that Luke
reproduces Christ’s words more correctly than Matthew
is shown by De Wette and Bleek on Mt. xii. 40, by
Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 265 sq. ed. 1 [Eng. trans. (3d
ed. N.Y. 1851) § 165 p. 245 sq.], and others; [but that
Luke’s report is less full than Matthew’s, rather than
at variance with it, is shown by Meyer, Weiss, Keil, and
others (on Mt. 1. c.)]. 2. a sign, prodigy, portent,
i.e. an unusual occurrence, transcending the common
course of nature ; a. of signs portending remark-
able events soon to happen: Lk. xxi. 11, 25; Acts ii.
19) Rev. xi. 1,33, scv. 1. b. of miracles and wonders
by which God authenticates the men sent by him, or
by which men prove that the cause they are pleading is
God’s: Mt. xii. 38 sq.; xvi. 1,4; Mk. viii. 11 sq.; xvi.
17, 20; Lk. xi. 16, 29; xxiii. 8; Jn. ii. 11, 18, 23; ili. 2;
iv. 54; vi. 2,14, 26, 30; vii. 31; ix.16; x.41; xi.47; xit
oNPELOW
18, 37; xx. 30; Acts ii. 22,43; vill.6; 1 Co. 1, 225)" but
the power idévar onpetia, by which men are deceived, is
ascribed also to false teachers, false prophets, and to
demons: Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Rev. xiii. 13 sq.; xvi.
IER Ss0b<, AOR 0) dbng rh ee onueia kK. Tépata (NINN
Dna) or (yet less freq.) répara k. onpeta (terms which
differ not in substantial meaning but only in origin; cf.
Fritzsche, Rom. vol. iii. p. 270 sq.; [Trench § xci.]) are
found conjoined: Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Jn. iv. 48;
Acts ii. 19, 43; iv.30; v.12; vi.8; vii. 36; xiv. 3; xv.
12; Ro. xv. 19; 2 Th. ii. 9, (Deut. xxviii. 46; xxxiv. 11;
Neh. ix. 10; Is. viii. 18; xx.3; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 20;
Sap. viii. 8; x. 16; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; Philo, vit. Moys. i.
16; Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 6; b. j. prooem. 11; Plut. Alex.
75; Ael. v.h.12,57); with xc. Suvayers added, 2 Co. xii.
12; Heb. ii. 4; onpeta x. Svvdpers, Acts vill. 13; Suvdpers k.
répara kK. onpeia, Acts ii. 22; diddvar onueia (see didaps,
B. II. 1 a.): Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk. xiii. 22 (here Tdf. rorety
on, See movew, 1. 1¢.); onpeia are said yiveoOat did ruvos
in Acts ii. 43; iv. [16], 30; v.12; xiv. 3; xv. 12 [here
roveiy onp-, see above]; Td onuetov TAS idoews, the mira-
cle, which was the healing, Acts iv. 22.*
onpcidw, -&: (onpeiov), to mark, note, distinguish by
marking; Mid. pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. onpevodobe ; to
mark or note for one’s self [W. § 38, 2b.; B. $135, 4]:
ria, 2 Th. iii. 14 [cf. B. 92 (80); W. 119 (113)]. (The-
ophr., Polyb., Philo, Dion. Hal., al.; [Ps. iv. 7 Sept.].)*
otpepov [ Attic rnuepov, i.e. nuépa with pronom. prefix
(Skr. sa); cf. Vaniéek p. 971], adv., fr. Hom. down,
Sept. for oY, to-day, this day: Mt. vi. 113; xvi. 3 ['T br.
WH reject the pass.]; Lk. iv. 21; xix.5; Actsiv. 9; xiii.
33, etc.; also where the speaker refers to the night just
passed, Mt. xxvii.19; equiv. to this night (now current),
Lk. ii. 11; ojpepov radty tH vuxri, Mk. xiv. 30; cas onpe-
pov, 2 Co. ili. 15; opp. to avpsov, Mt. vi. 30; Lk. xii. 28;
xiii. 32 sq.; Jas. iv. 13; yOés Kal onpepov kai eis tods
aiovas, a rhet. periphrasis for dei, Heb. xiii. 8; 9) onuepov
muépa, this (very) day, Acts xx. 26; ws tis o. tpépas,
Ro. xi. 8; pexpe tis onpepov sc. jpépas, Mt. xi. 23; xxviii.
15; éws ras o. Mt. xxvii. 8 ; axpe tis o. (where LT Tr
WH add juepas), 2 Co. iii. 145 1) onpepoy, i. q. what has
happened to-day [al. render concerning this day’s riot;
B. § 133, 9; but see Meyer ad loc.; W. § 30, 9a.], Acts
xix. 40; 1d onpepov, the word to-day, Heb. iii. 13; asa
subst.: dpi¢er nuépav, onpepov, “a to-day ” (meaning, ‘a
time for embracing the salvation graciously offered’ [ef.
R. V.mrg.]), Heb. iv. 7*.
ofno: fr. Hom. down; to make corrupt; in the Bible
also to destroy, Job xl. 7 (12); pass. to become corrupt
or rotten; 2 pf. act. wéonma, to (have become i. e. to) be
corrupted (cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 82): 6 mdodros oé-
onrev, has perished, Jas. v. 2.*
onpikds (Lchm. ed. maj. T WH owpixds [cf. WH. App.
p. 151]), -4, -dv, (Shp, Sipes, the Seres, a people of India
[prob. mod. China; yet on the name cf. Pape, Eigen-
namen, s.v.; Dict. of Geog. s. v. Serica]) ; 1. prop.
pertaining to the Seres. 2. silken: rd onptkdy, silk,
i. e. the fabric, silken garments, Rev. xviii.12. ({Strabo,
574
oLKapLos
Plut., Arr., Leian.]; ér6noeoe onptxais, Joseph. b. j. 7, 5,
4.)*
ee anrés, 6, (Hebr. 0d, Is. li. 8; wy, Job iv. 19; xili.
28), a moth, the clothes-moth, [B. D.s. v. Moth; Alex.’s
Kitto s. v. Ash]: Mt. vi. 19 sq.; Lk. xii. 33. (Pind., Ar-
stph., Aristot., Theophr., al.) *
onté-Bpwros, -ov, (fr. ojs a moth, and Bperds fr. Bi-
Bpwoke), moth-eaten: ipdriov, Jas. v. 2 (iudria, Job xiii.
28 ; of idol-images, Sibyll. orac. in Theoph. ad Autol. 2,
36).*
oevow, -&: (ab€vos [allied w. orjvat, hence prop. stead-
fastness ; Curtius p. 503 sq.] strength), to make strong,
to strengthen: twa, one’s soul, 1 Pet. v. 10, where for 1
aor. opt. act. 3 pers. sing. cbevaca, we must read the
fut. cOevoce, with GLTTrWH. (Pass. in Rhet. Gr.
ed. Waiz, vol. i. ec. 15.) *
ciayay, -dvos, 9, the jaw, the jaw-bone, [A. V. cheek]:
Mt. v. 39; Lk. vi. 29. (Soph., Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.;
Sept. for 1.) *
ovyéo, -&; 1 aor.éctynoa; pf. pass. ptep. cearynpéevos ;
(ovyn) ; fr. Hom. down ; to keep silence, hold one’s peace:
Levitz 365) xvi: (39) iD Er Wi xxe2 65 eActse sate
17; xv. 12 sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 28, 30, 34; pass. to be kept in
silence, be concealed, Ro. xvi. 25. [Syn. see navyago.]”
otyh, -7s, 7, (fr. cif [onomatopoetic, Etym. Magn. 712,
29] i.e. to command silence by making the sound s¢ or
sch; [yet ovyn prob. has no connection with cigw, but is
of European origin (cf. Germ. schweigen) ; cf. Fick, Pt.
iii. 843; Curtius § 572]), fr. Hom. down, silence: Acts
xxi. 40; Rev. viii. 1.*
oiShpeos, -éa, -eov, contr. -ovs, -G, -ovv, (aidnpos), fr.
Hom. down, made of iron: Acts xii. 10; Rev. ii. 27; ix.
SETI NER hoe
oiSnpos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, iron: Rev. xviii. 12.*
ZiBav, -Gvos [B. 16 (14)], 9, (TV¥ and j Wy, fr. Tw ‘to
hunt’, in Aram. also ‘to fish’; hence prop. taking its
name from its abundance of fish; cf. Justin 18, 3), Sidon,
a very ancient Pheenician city, formerly distinguished
for wealth and traffic, situated near the Mediterranean
on the borders of Judea; it had been assigned to the
tribe of Asher (Josh. xix. 28), but the Jews vainly en-
deavored to capture it [Judg. i. 31; iii. 3; x. 12]; now
Saida, containing about 10,000 [or 9,000, ace. to Porter
in Murray’s Handbook p. 376] inhabitants [Baedeker,
Palestine p. 433]: Mt. xi. 21 sq.; xv. 21; Mk. iii. 8; vii.
24 (where Tom. WH Tr mrg. br. the words kat 3:ddvos),
31; Lk. iv. 26 (where LT Tr WH Sidavias); vi. 17; x. 13
sq.; Acts xxvii. 8. [Cf. BB. DD. s.v.; Schultz in Herzog
ed. 2 vol. xiv. 192sqq.; Schlottmann in Riehm s. v.]*
Ubdvi0s, -a, -ov, (Sudav), belonging to Sidon, of Sidon:
Tis Zwevias sc. yopas, [R.V. in the land of Sidon], Lk.
iv. 26 LT Tr WH (Hom. Od. 13, 285 [but -Sov-]) 3 Se
davot, the inhabitants of Sidon, Acts xii. 20.*
oixdptos, -ov, 6, (a Latin word), an assassin, i. e. one
who carries a dagger or short sword [Lat. sica (cf. Jo-
seph. as below)] under his clothing, that he may kill
secretly and treacherously any one he wishes to (a cut-
throat): Acts xxi. 38. (Joseph. b. j. 2, 17, 6 otkapiovs
gixepa
exddovy Tovs Anotas Exovras td Tois KéAmoLs TA ign [cf.
2,13,3]; also antt. 20, 8, 10 otkdptor Anorai eior xpapevor
Eupidiors mapamAnaios pév 7d péyeOos Trois Tay Tlepo@y axi-
vdkats, €mikapmeor Sé Kal dpolos rais id ‘Papalov cixais
kadovpevais, ap’ Sv kal rv mpoonyopiay of Ayorevovtes €da-
Bov rodXovs dvaipodvres.) [SYN. see doveds.]*
olxepa, 7d, (Hebr. 13¥ [rather, ace. to Kautzsch (Gram.
p. 11) for 812 (prop. oikpa) the stat. emphat. of 72¥
(lit. ‘intoxicating’ drink)]), indecl. [W. 68 (66); B.
24 (21)], (yet Euseb. praep. evang. 6, 10, 8 has a gen.
aixepos [and Soph. in his Lex. quotes fr. Cyrill. Alex. 1,
1041 d. (ed. Migne) a gen. otéparos]), strong drink, an
intoxicating beverage, different from wine [exc. in Num.
xxviii. 7 (cf. Is. xxviii. 7)]; it was a factitious product,
made of a mixture of sweet ingredients, whether derived
from grain and vegetables, or from the juice of fruits
(dates), or a decoction of honey: Lk. i. 15 (Lev. x. 9;
Num. vi. 3; Deut. xiv. 25 (26); xxix. 6, etc.; the same
Hebr. word is rendered also by pé6voya, Judg. xiii. 4, 7,
14; Mic. ii. 11). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Wein, kiinst-
licher; [B. D. s.v. Drink, Strong].*
ZAas, [gen. not found (exc. Joseph. vita 17 -a)], dat.
-a, acc. -av, [B. 20 (18)], 6, Silas (contr. fr. Sidovavés,
q. v.-; W.103 (97)), a Roman citizen (Acts xvi. 37 sq.),
the companion of the apostle Paul in several of his jour-
neys, and his associate in preaching the gospel: Acts
xv. 22, 27, 32, 34 Rec., 40; xvi. 19, 25, 29; xvii. 4, 10,
14 sq.; xviii. 5. [B. D.s. v. Silas.]*
Xovayds, -od, 6, Silvanus, the same man who in Acts
is called Sihas (q.v-): 2Co. 1.19; 1 Th.i.1; 2Th.i.1;
1 Pet. v.12. [Not infreq. written in the Mss. S:ABavds,
Silbanus ; cf. Tdf. on ll. ec.] *
Drodp, (Hebr. Ww, Is. viii. 6, which in Jn. ix. 7 is
translated dmeoradpévos, but more correctly [see below]
‘a sending out,’ ‘gushing forth’ (of water); it is formed
after the analogy of 3)°& ‘had in hatred’, ‘ persecuted’,
fr. 8 ; 3? ‘born ’, fr. 303 ‘to bring forth’; [‘the pure-
ly passive explanation, dmreoradpévos, Jn. ix. 7, is not so
incorrect.” Ewald, Ausfiihrl. Lehrbuch d. Hebr. Spr.
§150, 2 a.; cf. Meyer on Jn. 1.c.]), 6 (in Joseph. 7 &., se.
myn, b. j- 5, 12, 2; 6, 8, 5; but also péypu rod &. b. j. 2,
16,2; 6, 7, 2; [B. 21 (19)]), [indecl. ; but in Joseph. b. j.
5, 6, 1 awd THs StAwas], Siloam, a fountain of sweet and
abundant water (Joseph. b.j. 5, 4, 1), flowing into a basin
or pool of the same name (Neh. iii. 15), both of which
seem to have been situated in the southern part of Jer-
usalem, although opinions vary on this point: Lk. xiii.
4; Jn. ix. 11, (Is. viii.6). Cf. [B. D.s. v. Siloam]; Win.
RWB.s. v. Siloah ; Rédiger in Gesen. Thesaur. p. 1416;
Leyrer in Herzog ed. 1, xiv. p. 371 sqq.; Robinson, Pal-
estine, i. 333 sqq.; Tobler, Die Siloaquelle u. der Oelberg
(St. Gallen, 1852); Kneucker, Siloah, Quelle Teich u.
Thal in Jerus. (Heidelb. 1873); Furrer in Schenkel v.
295 sq.; [Ritter, Palestine, etc., Eng. trans. i. 148 sq. ;
Wilson, Ordnance Survey, etc., 1865; esp. Guthe in the
Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Pal.-Vereins for 1882, pp. 205 sqq.
229 sqq.; Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Morgenl.-Gesellsch. for
1882 p. 725 sqq.].*
515
olvars
opiklvOov (or onusxivOrov), -ov, 76, (Lat. semicinctium
[ef. Rich, Dict. of Antigq. s. v.], fr. semi and cingo), a
narrow apron, or linen covering, which workmen and
servants were accustomed to wear: Acts xix. 12 [A. V.
aprons |.*
Zipov, -wvos [B. 16 (14)], 6, (jiypw, ‘a hearing’, fr.
yw ‘to hear’; [there was also a Grk. name Sivar (allied
W. oupds, i.e. ‘flat-nosed’; Fick, Gr. Personennamen, p.
210), but cf. B. D.s. v. Simon init.; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal.
p- 266 sq.]), Simon; 1. Peter, the apostle: Mt.
xvii. 25; Mk. i. 29sq. 36; Lk. iv. 38; v. 4sq. 10, ete.;
see Ilérpos. 2. the brother of Judas Lebbeus [cf.
s.v. Iovdas, 8], an apostle, who is called Kavavirns [so RG,
but L T Tr WH -vaios, g. v.], Mt. x. 4; Mk. iii. 18, and
(rors, Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. 3. a brother of
Jesus [cf. s. v. ddeAdds, 1]: Mt. xiii. 55; Mk. vi. 3. 4.
a certain Cyrenian, who carried the cross of Jesus:
Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26. 5. the
father of Judas Iscariot [and himself surnamed ’IcKape-
ots (see Iovdas, 6) |]: Jn. vi. 71; xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26. 6.
a certain Pharisee, Lk. vii. 40, 43.sq., who appears to
[some, e. g. Grotius, Schleiermacher, Holtzmann, Schen-
kel, Ewald, Keim, Hug, Bleek (see his Synopt. Erklir. on
Lk. 1. ¢.) to] be the same as Simon the leper, Mt. xxvi. 6 ;
Mk. xiv. 3; [but the occurrence recorded by Lk. 1. c. is
now commonly thought to be distinct fr. that narrated
by Mt. and Mk. Il. ce. ; ef. Godet or Keil on Lk.]. Te
a certain tanner, living at Joppa: Acts ix. 43; x. 6, 17,
32. 8. Simon (‘ Magus’), the Samaritan sorcerer :
Acts viii. 9, 18, 18, 24. The various eccles. stories about
him, as well as the opinions and conjectures of modern
theologians, are reviewed at length by Lipsius in Schen-
kel v. pp. 801-321; [cf. W. Mller in Herzog ed. 2, vol.
xiv. p. 246 sqq.; Schaff, Hist. of the Chris. Church, vol.
ii. (1883) § 121].
Zuwa [-v4 WH; cf. Chandler §§ 135, 138], rd (se. dpos,
cf. B. 21 sq. (19)), indecl., Joseph. 76 Suwaiov, antt. 3, 5,
1, and 7d Swaiov pos, antt. 2,12, 1; Hebr. ‘30 [perh.
‘jagged’; al. make it an adj. ‘belonging to (the desert
of) Sin], (Sina or) Sinai, a mountain or, rather, a moun-
tainous region in the peninsula of Arabia Petraa, made
famous by the giving of the Mosaic law. There are three
summits: one towards the west, which is called 379)n, a
second towards the east, Sinai prop. so called, the third
towards the south, now Mt. St. Catharine. But the dis-
tinction between Horeb and Sinai is given differently
by different writers; and some think that they were two
different names of one and the same mountain (cf. Sir.
xviii. 7); ef. [MeC. and S. Cycl.s. v. Sinai]; Win. RWB.
s. v. Sinai; Arnold in Herzog ed. 1 vol. xiv. p. 420 sq. ;
[Schultz in ed. 2 vol. xiv. p. 282 sqq.]; Furrer in Schen-
kel v. p. 326 sqq.; [Eng. Ordnance Survey, 1869; Palmer,
Desert of the Exodus, 1872; also his Sinai from the
Monuments, 1878; Murrer commends Holland’s “ Sketch
Map” ete. in the Journ. of the Royal Geog. Soc. vol.
xxxix. (Lond. 1869)]. The name occurs in Acts vii. 30,
38; Gal. iv. 24 sq.*
otvame (also civnm [but not in the N. T.], both later
owdwv
tor the Attic ydmv [so accented in late auth., better vamv],
see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 288), [thought to be of Egypt. ori-
gin; ef. Vanitek, Fremdworter, s. v. vamu], -ews [B. 14
(13)], 76, mustard, the name of a plant which in oriental
countries grows from a very small seed and attains to
the height of ‘a tree’— ten feet and more; hence a very
small quantity of a thing is likened to a xéxkos owdmews
[A. V. a grain of mustard seed}, Mt. xvii. 20; Lk. xvii.
6; and also a thing which grows to a remarkable size,
Mt. xiii. 31sq.; Mk. iv. 31; Lk. xiii 19. [Cf. B. D.s.v.
Mustard; ZLéw, Aram. Pflanzennamen, § 134; Carru-
thers in the ‘ Bible Educator’ vol. i. p.119sq.; Tristram,
Nat. Hist. of the Bible, p. 472 sq.; Thomson, The Land
and the Book, ii. 100 sq. ]*
owSdv, -dvos, 7, (of uncertain origin; Skr. sindhu
[Egypt. ‘schenti’ or ‘sent’; ef. Vanitek, Fremdworter,
s.v.]; Sept. for } 0, Judg. xiv. 12 sq.; Prov. xxix. 42
(xxxi. 24)), fine cloth (Lat. sindon), i.e. 1. linen
cloth, esp. that which was fine and costly, in which the
bodies of the dead were wrapped: Mt. xxvii. 59; Mk.
xv. 46; Lk. xxiii. 53, (cf. Hdt. 2, 86 who says of the
Egyptians, xarewWiocovot rav To cGpa owddvos Bvoaims
[see Wialkinson’s note in Rawlinson’s Herod. 3d ed.
b@al)))e 2. thing made of fine cloth: so of a light and
loose garment worn at night over the naked body, Mk.
xiv. 51 sq. [others suppose a sheet rather than a shirt to
be referred to; A. V. linen cloth; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v.
Sheets]. (Besides Hadt., the writers Soph., Thuc., Stra-
bo, Leian., al., use the word.) *
owrdte: 1 aor. infin. cunudcat; (owioy ‘a sieve,’ ‘win;
nowing-van’; an eccles. and Byzant. word [ef. Macar.
homil. 5 p. 73 sq. (496 a. ed. Migne)]) ; to sift, shake in
@ sieve: Twa ws TOY Giror, i. e., dropping the fig., by in-
ward agitation to try one’s faith to the verge of over-
throw, Lk. xxii. 31. (Eccles. writ. [ef. W. 92 (87), 26
(25), and see above ].) *
Tipikds, SCE oNpLKds.
oipds, -ov, 6, i.q. wetpds, q. V-: 2 Pet. ii. 4 L T.*
outeutés, -1, -dv, (orev, to feed with wheat, to fatten),
fattened, fatted: Lk. xv. 23, 27, 30. (Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.)
21; 1K. iv. 23, [etc.]; Xen., Polyb., Athen., [al.].) *
otrtoy, -ov, Td, (dimin. of giros) ; 1. corn, grain:
Acts vii. 12 LT Tr WH. In prof. writ. also 2.
food made from grain (Hat. 2, 36). 3. eatables,
victuals, provisions, ((Hat.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., Dem.,
al.).*
oitiards, -7, -dv, (aiti¢w, to feed with grain, to fatten),
fattened, [plur. ra our. as subst., A. V. fatlings], Mt. xxii.
4. (Joseph. antt. 8, 2,4; Athen. 14 p. 656 e.) *
orropéeTproy, -ov, 7d, (Attic writ. said roy otrov perpeiv;
out of which later writ. formed the compound otrope-
tpeiv, Gen. xlvii. 12, [14]; Polyb. 4, 63, 10; Diod. 19,
50; Joseph. c. Ap. TA ade: ovroperpia, Diod. 2, 41; [ee
Lob. ad Phryn. p.383; W. 25]), a measured ‘portion of?
grain or ‘ food’: Lk. xii. 42. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
ctros, -ov, 6, [of uncertain origin; cf. Vanicek, Fremd-
worter, s. v.], fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for 121, wheat,
corn: Mt. iii. 12; xiii. 25, 29 sq.; Mk. iv. 28; Lk. iii. 17:
576
TKaAVOaNIG@
(xii. 18 WH Tr txt.]; xvi. 7; xxii. 31; Jn. xii. 24; Acts
xxvii. 38; 1Co.xv.37; Rev.vi.6; xviii.13; plur. ra
aira (cf. W. 63 (62)), Acts vii. 12 Rec., and often in Sept.*
Luxdp, see Suxdp.
Xidyv, indecl., (its grammat. gend. in the N. T. does
not appear from the pass. in which it is mentioned; cf.
B. 21 sq. (19); in the Sept. when it denotes the city of
Jerusalem 7 Sidv occurs, as Ps. ci. (cii.) 14, 17; exxxi.
(cxxxii.) 13; exxxvi. (cxxxvii.) 1), Hebr. ji¥ [i e.
acc. to some, ‘ protected ’ or ‘ protecting’; acc. to others,
‘sunny’; al. al.J; Ston [so A. V., but properly (with
R. V.)] Zion; 1. the hill on which the higher and
more ancient part of Jerusalem was built (WI Wy city
of David, because David captured it); it was the south-
westernmost and highest of the hills on which the city
stood; [many now would identify it with the eastern
hill, some with the northern; cf. Furrer in Schenkel
iii. 216 sqq.; Miuhlau in Riehm s. v.; per contra Wolcott
in B. D. Am. ed.s. v.; Schultz in Herzog ed. 2 vi. p. 543
sq. |. 2. used very often for the entire city of Jeru-
salem itself: Ro. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 6, (after Is. xxviii.
16); Ro. xi. 26 (fr. Is. lix. 20); ) Ovydrnp Stay (see Ovyarnp,
bs B)); Mbxxi.155 "Ine xo. 3. Since Jerusalem,
because the temple stood there, was called the dwelling-
place of God (cf. Mt. v. 35; kKiptos tiv Sav npeticarto eis
katotkiay €avT@, Ps. exxxi. (cxxxil.) 13), the expression
TO Say dpos is transferred to heaven, as the true dwell-
ing-place of God and heavenly beings, the antitype of
the earthly Zion: Heb. xii. 22; Rev. xiv. 1.*
cwrdw,'-@; impf., 3 pers. sing. éora, 3 pers. plur.
eotorev; fut. cromjow (Lk. xix.40 LT Tr WH); 1 aor.
eotonnoa; (ovwn7 silence); fr. Hom. down; to be silent,
hold one’s peace: prop., Mt. xx. 31; xxvi. 63; Mk. iii. 4;
ix. 34; x.48; xiv. 61; Lk. xviii. 39 RG; xix.40; Acts
xviii. 9; used of one silent because dumb, Lk. i. 20;
4 Macc. x.18; like si/eoin the Lat. poets, used metaph.
of a calm, quiet sea [(in rhetorical command)]: Mk.
iv. 39. [Syn. see jovydga. | *
oxavdarifo; 1 aor. érxavddduca; Pass., pres. cxavdariCo-
par; impf. éoxarvdadrcCounv; 1 aor. éoxavdaricOnv [cf. B. 52
(45) ]; 1 fut. cxavdadicOjoopa; (oxdvdadov) ; Vulg. scan-
NZ
dalizo; Peshitto nm ; prop. to put a stumbling-block
or impediment in the way, upon which another may trip
and fall; to be a stumbling-block; in the N. T. always
metaph. [R. V. to cause or make to stumble; A.V. to
offend (cause to offend) ]; a. to entice to sin (Luth.
drgern, i. e. arg, b6s machen): tid, Mt. v. 29, [80]; xviii.
6, 8 sq.; Mk. ix. 42 sq. 45,47; Lk. xvii. 2; 1 Co. viii. 13;
pass. Lat. offendor, [A. V. to be offended], Vulg. scanda-
WA
lizor, Peshitto Wo: Ro. xiv. 21[RGLTrtxt.]; 2Co.
xi. 29 [R. V. is made to stumble; ef. W. 153 (145)]. b.
to cause a person to begin to distrust and desert one whom
he ought to trust and obey; to cause to fall away, and
in pass. to fall away [R. V. to stumble (cf. ¢ Teaching ’
ete. 16,5; Herm. vis. 4, 1, 3; mand. 8, 10)]: rwd, Jn.
| vi. 61: pass.. Mt. xiii. 21: xxiv.10: xxvi. 33; Mk. iv.
a KavdaXov
17; xiv. 29; (Jn. xvi. 1]; & rum [A. V.] to be offended
in, one, [ find occasion of stumbling in], i. e. to see in
another what I disapprove of and what hinders me from
acknowledging his authority: Mt. xi. 6; xili.57; xxvi.
31; Mk.vi.3; xiv. 27; Lk. vii. 23; to cause one to judge
unfavorably or unjustly of another, Mt. xvii. 27. Since
the man who stumbles or whose foot gets entangled
feels annoyed, oxavdadifo means c. to cause one
to feel displeasure at a thing; to make indignant: rwvd,
pass. to be displeased, indignant, [A. V. offended], Mt.
xv.12. The verb ocxavdadigo is found neither in prof.
auth. nor in the Sept., but only in the relics of Aquila’s
‘version of the O. T., Ps. Ixiii. (Ixiv.) 9; Is. viii. 15; [xl.
30]; Prov. iv. 12 fos IW; besides in Sir. ix. 5; xxiii.
S5 so00G (Geos) 1A [Psalt. Salers CLs Wis.)
oxdySadov, -ov, 7d, a purely bibl. [(occurring some
twenty-five times in the Grk. O. T., and fifteen, quotations
included, in the New) ] and eccles. word for oxavdadnOpor,
which occurs occasionally in native Grk. writ.; Sept. for
WDD (a noose, a snare) and Swan; a. prop. the
movable stick or tricker (‘trigger’) of a trap, trap-stick ;
a trap, snare; any impediment piaced in the way and caus-
ing one to stumble or fall, [a stumbling-block, occasion of
stumbling|: Lev. xix.14; mérpa oxavdddov [ A. V. a rock
of offence], i. e. a rock which is a cause of stumbling
(Lat. offendiculum),— fig. applied to Jesus Christ, whose
person and career were so contrary to the expectations
of the Jews concerning the Messiah, that they rejected
him and by their obstinacy made shipwreck of salvation
(see mpdokoupa), Ro. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7), (fr. Is. viii.
14). b. metaph. any person or thing by which one is
(‘entrapped’) drawn into error or sin [cf. W. 32]; a.
of persons [(Josh. xxiii. 13; 1 S. xviii. 21)]: Mt. xiii.
41; xvi. 23 (where oxavdadov “non ex effectu, sed ex
natura et condicione propria dicitur,” Calov.);
so Xpiords eoravp@pévos is called (because his ignomin-
ious death on the cross roused the opposition of the
Jews), 1 Co. i. 23. 8. of things: riOévar rwi oKav-
Sadov (literally, in Judith v. 1), to put a stumbling-block
in one’s way, i. e. to do that by which another is led to
sin, Ro. xiv. 13; the same idea is expressed by BdaAAewy
oxdvdadrov évdmidy twos [to cast a stumbling-block before
one], Rev. ii. 14; otk ore oxdvdadov év tit (see eipi, V.
4e.), 1 Jn. ii. 10; plur. oxdvdada, words or deeds which
entice to sin (Sap. xiv. 11), Mt. xviii. 7 [ef. B. 322 (277)n.;
W. 371 (348)]; Lk. xvii.1; oxdvdara rroveiv mapa thy
ddaxnv, to cause persons to be drawn away from the
true doctrine into error and sin [ef. mapa, ILI. 2 a.], Ro.
xvi. 17; 1d ocxdvd. tod cravpod, the offence which the
cross, i. e. Christ’s death on the cross, gives (cf. a. fin.
above), [R. V. the stumbling-block of the cross], Gal. v.
11; i.q. a cause of destruction, Ro. xi. 9, fr. Ps. lxviii.
(kes :) 23.*
oxdmrea; 1 aor. écxawa; [allied w. it are Eng. ‘ship’,
‘skiff’, etc.; Curtius § 109; Fick iv. 267; vii. 336]; to
dig: Lk. vi. 48 (on which see Ba@ivw) ; xiii. 8 [B. § 130,
5]; » xvi. 3. ({Hom. h. Mere.]; Arstph., Eurip. +» XeN.,
Plat., Aristot., Theophr., al.) [Comp.: xara-oxcdnro.]*
5TT
oKnV
ocKadn, -ns, 7, (oxamrw [q. v.]), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hat.
down, anything dug out, hollow vessel, trough, tray, tub;
spec. a boat: Acts xxvii. 16, 30, 32.*
oKéXos, -ous, 70, fr. Hom. down, the leg i. e. from the
hip to the toes inclusive: Jn. xix. 31 sq. 33.*
oKeTarpa, -ros, Td, (okerafo to cover), a covering,
spec. clothing (Aristot. pol. 7, 17 p. 1336*, 17; Joseph,
1h Tb PA toys 1 ira aay eh
Zkevds, -G [W. § 8, 15 B. 20 (18)], 6, Sceva, a certain
chief priest [cf. dpyvepevs, 2 fin.]: Acts xix. 14.*
oKevn, -7s, 7), [cf. cxedos], fr. [Pind., Soph.], Hdt. down,
any apparatus, equipment, or furniture; used of the uten-
sils [outfit, i.e. furniture (?— so R. V. mrg.), or tackling
(?—so A. V., R. V. txt.)] of a ship (Diod. 14, 79): Acts
xxvii. 19 (Sept. Jon. i. 5).*
oetos, -ovs, 7d, [prob. fr. r. sku ‘to cover’; cf. Lat.
scutum, cutis, obscurus; Curtius § 113; Vaniéek p. 1115],
fr. [Arstph.], Thuc. down; Sept. for *43; 1. aves-
sel: Mk. xi. 16; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. xix. 29; Acts x. AiG:
xi. 5; 2'Tim. ii. 20; Rev. ii. 27; xviii. 12; ra ox. rijs Nec-
toupyias, to be used in performing religious rites, Heb.
ix. 21; oxevos eis tiuynv, unto honor, i. e. for honorable
use, Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 21, (kadapav épyov SotAa oxevn,
Sap. xv. 7); els drusiay, unto dishonor, i. e. for a low use
(as, a urinal), Ro. ix. 21; oxevn dpyns, into which wrath
is emptied, i. e. men appointed by God unto woe, hence
the addition xatnpticpeva cis am@devav, Ro. ix. 22; oxevn
éXéous, fitted to receive mercy, —explained by the words
a mpontoipacer eis dd€av, ib. 23; Td oxevos is used of a
woman, as the vessel of her husband, 1 Th. iv. 4 (see
xtdouat; [al. take it here (as in 2 Co. iv. 7 below) of the
body]); the female sex, as being weaker than the male,
is likened to a oxevos doOeveorepoy, in order to com-
mend to husbands the obligations of kindness towards
their wives (for the weaker the vessels, the greater must
be the care lest they be broken), 1 Pet. iii. 7; darpdkiva
oxevn is applied to human bodies, as frail, 2 Co. iv.
i 2. an implement; plur. household utensils, do-
mestic gear: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xvii. 31, [in
these pass. R. V. goods]; as the plur. often in Grk.
writ. denotes the tackle and armament of vessels (Xen.
oec. 8, 12; Plat. Critias p. 117 d.; Lach. p. 183 e.; Polyb.
22, 26, 13), so the sing. rd oxedos seems to be fees spec.
and collectively of the sails and ropes (R. V. gear) in
Acts xxvii. 17. metaph. of a man: oxevos exdoyns (gen.
of quality), a chosen instrument [or (so A. V.) ‘vessel’],
Acts ix. 15; in a base sense, an assistant in accomplishing
evil deeds [cf. Eng. ‘tool’], cxedos tmnperexdv, Polyb. 13,
5, 7; 15, 25, 1.*
oKnvy, -js, 9, [fr. r. ska ‘to cover’ etc.; cf. cxid, oxd-
ros, etc.; Lat. casa, cassis, castrum; Eng. shade, ete. ;
Curtius §112; Vanitek p. 1054 sq.], ie [Aeschyl, ], Soph.
and Thue. down; Sept. chiefly for ok, often also for
jun, also for 1205 @ lent, tabernacle, (made of green
boughs, or skins, or other mateelas)e Mt. xvii. 4; Mk.
ix.5; Lk. ix. 33; Heb. xi. 9; ai aimmot oxnvai oe aicr
vLos, 3), Lk. xvi. 9 (et dabo is tabernacula aeterna quae
praeparaveram illis, 4 (5) Esdr. ii. 11); of that well
oKnvorny ta
known movable temple of God after the pattern of
which the temple at Jerusalem was subsequently built
{cf. B.D. s.v. Temple]: Heb. viii. 5; ix. 1 Rec, 21;
‘with rod paprupiov added (see paprupwor, c. fin.), Acts vii.
44; the temple is called oxnvq in Heb. xiii. 10; oxnyy 0
mparn, the front part of the tabernacle (and afterwards
of the temple), the Holy place, Heb. ix. 2, 6, 8; of the
Holy of holies, Heb. ix. 3; the name is transferred to
‘heaven, as the true dwelling-place of God and the pro-
totype of the earthly ‘tabernacle’ or sanctuary, Heb. ix.
11; Rev. xiii. 6; hence 4 o«yvi) 7 dAnOu7y, heaven, Heb.
viii. 2; with a reference to this use of the word, it is
declared that when the kingdom of God is perfectly es-
tablished % oxy) tod Geod will be pera trav avOpaTav
(after the analogy of oxnvotv pera Twos), Rev. xx1. 3% 6
vads THS TKNYAS TOD paptuplov (see papruptor, Cc. fin.), the
heavenly temple, in which was the tabernacle of the
covenant, i. e. the inmost sanctuary or adytum, Rev. xv.
5. 1 ox. Tod Moddy, the tabernacle i.e. portable shrine
of Moloch, Acts vii. 43 (for the Orientals on their jour-
neys and military expeditions used to carry with them
their deities, together with shrines for them ; hence 7 iepa
oxnyn of the Carthaginians in Diod. 20, 65, where see
Wesseling [but ef. 330 in Mihlau and Volck’s Gesen-
ius, or the recent Comm. on Am. v. 26]). 7 o«nv7 Aavid
(fr. Am. ix. 11 for 730), the hut (tabernacle) of David,
seems to be employed, in contempt, of his house, i. e.
family reduced to decay and obscurity, Acts xv. 16 (other-
wise 7) das in Is. xvi. 5).*
oKyvornyla, -as, 7, (oxnyn and myvup, cf. Heb. viii.
2); 1. the construction of a tabernacle or taberna-
cles: 7 THs xeduddvos oxnvornyia, the skill of the swallow
in building its nest, Aristot. h. a. 9, 7 [p. 612°, 22]. 2.
the feast of tabernacles: Jn. vii. 2. This festival was
observed by the Jews yearly for seven days, beginning
with the 15th of the month Tisri [i. e. approximately,
Oct.; cf. BB.DD. s. v. Month], partly to perpetuate the
memory of the time when their ancestors after leaving
Egypt dwelt in tents on their way through the Arabian
desert (Lev. xxiii. 43), partly as a season of festivity and
joy on the completion of the harvest and the vintage
(Deut. xvi. 13) [‘the feast of ingathe.ing’ (see below) ].
In celebrating the festival the Jews were accustomed to
construct booths of the leafy branches of trees, — either
on the roofs or in the courts of their dwellings, or in the
streets and squares (Neh. viii. 15, 16), and to adorn them
with flowers and fruits of all kinds (Lev. xxiii. 40), —
under which, throughout the period of the festival, they
feasted and gave themselves up to rejoicing. This feast
is called MDD AM (4) €oprh (rips) oxnvomnytas, Deut. xvi.
16; xxxi. 10; Zech. xiv. 16, 18 sq.; 1 Esdr. v. 50 (51);
1 Mace. x. 21; Joseph. antt. 4, 8,12; (4) éopri (rév)
-oxnvav, Ley. xxiii. 34; Deut. xvi. 13; [2 Chr. viii. 13;
Ezra iii. 4]; 2 Mace. x. 6; oxnvai, Philo de septenar. § 24;
9 oxnvornyla, 2 Mace. i. 9,18; once [twice] (Ex. xxiii.
16; [xxxiv. 22]) ONT In, i.e. ‘the feast of ingathering’
se. of fruits. [Cf BB.DD. (esp. Ginsburg in Alex.’s
Kitto); Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiv.]*
578
oKipTaw
oKnvorro.s, -o0, 6, (oxnvy and rroréw), a tent-maker, i. q.
oxnvoppaos (Ael. v. h. 2,1); one that made small port-
able tents, of leather or cloth of goats’ hair (Lat. cili-
cium) or linen, for the use of travellers: Acts xviii. 3
[cf. Meyer ad loc.; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2
vol. xi. p. 859 sq. ].*
okfvos, -ovs, 76, [Hippocr., Plat., al.], a@ tabernacle, a
tent, everywhere [exc. Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. vol. il. no.
3071] used metaph. of the human body, in which the soul
dwells as in a tent, and which is taken down at death:
2 Co. v.43; 4 éniyetos judy oikia Tod oKHvous, 1. eC. 6 Eat
ro oxnvos [W. § 59, 7d., 8 a.], which is the well-known
tent, ibid. 1 [R. V. the earthly house of our tabernacle].
Cf. Sap. ix. 15 and Grimm ad loc.; in the same sense
in (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 100 sqq. and often in other
philosophic writ.; cf. Fischer, Index to Aeschin. dial.
Socr.; Passow s. v.; [feld, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 113
(on 2 Co. v. 1)].*
oKnvow, -2; fut. cnnvdcw; 1 aor. éoxnvaca; to fix one’s
tabernacle, have one’s tabernacle, abide (or live) in a tab-
ernacle (or tent), tabernacle, (often in Xen. ; Dem. p. 1257,
6); God oxnvace ém adrovs, will spread his tabernacle
over them, so that they may dwell in safety and security
under its cover and protection, Rev. vii. 15; univ. i. q.
to dwell (Judg. v. 17): foll. by év with a dat. of place,
Rev. xii. 12; xiii. 6, (€v rats oikiais, Xen. an. 5,5, 11); ev
nei, among us, Jn. i. 14; pera tos, with one, Rev. xxi.
3; ovv ti, to be one’s tent-mate, Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 49.
[Comp. : émt-, kata- oxnvdw. | *
oKAvopa, -ros, Té, (oxnvow), a tent, tabernacle: of the
temple as God’s habitation, Acts vii. 46 (Ps. xiv. (xv.)
1; xxv. (xxvi.) 8; xlii. (xlili.) 3; xlv. Calvi.) 5; Pausan.
3, 17, 6; of the tabernacle of the covenant, 1 K. ii. 28);
metaph. of the human body as the dwelling of the soul
(see oxnvos): év TS oKnvopate etvar, of life on earth,
2 Pet. i.13; drd@eors (the author blending the concep-
tions of a tent and of a covering or garment, as Paul
does in 2 Co. v. 2), ibid. 14. (Hur., Xen., Plut., al.;
Sept. for Onis and }2w1.) *
oKid, -ds, 7, [(see oxnvy, init.)], fr. Hom. down, Sept.
for by; a. prop. shadow, i. e. shade caused by the
interception of the light: Mk. iv. 32 (ef. Ezek. xvii. 23) ;
Acts v.15; oxida Oavarov, shadow of death (like umbra
mortis, Ovid. metam. 5, 191, and wmbra Erebi, Verg. Aen.
4, 26; 6, 404), ‘the densest darkness’ (because from of
old Hades had been regarded as enveloped in thick
darkness), trop. the thick darkness of error [i. e. spirit-
ual death; see Odvaros,1]: Mt. iv. 16; Lk. i. 79, (fr. Is.
ix. 1, where mn). b. a shadow, i. e. an image
cast by an object and representing the form of that ob-
ject : opp. to cdua, the thing itself, Col. ii. 17 ; hence i. q.
a sketch, outline, adumbration, Heb. viii. 5; opp. to eixay,
the ‘express’ likeness, the very image, Heb. x. 1 (asin
Cie. de off. 3, 17, 69 nos veri juris solidam et expresssam
effigiem nullam tenemus, wmbra et imaginibus utimur).*
cKiptdw, -@: 1 aor. éoxiprnca; to leap: Lk. i. 41, 44;
vi. 23. (Gen. xxv. 22; Ps. exiii. (cxiv.) 4,6; Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down.) *
7KANpoKapbia
oKAnpo-Kapdia, -as, 7, (axAnpds and xapdia), a bibl. word,
the characteristic of one who is oxAnpos Thy kapdtav (Prov.
Xxvill. 14), or oxAnpoxdpdios (Prov. xvii. 20; Ezek. iii,
7); hardness of heart: Mt. xix. 8; Mk. x. 5; xvi. 14;
for hei) now, Deut. x. 16; Jer.iv.4; Sir. xvi. 10; kap-
Oia oxdnpd, Sir. iii. 26,27. [Cf W. 26, 99 (94).]*
oKdnpds, -d, -dv, (GKEAX@, oKAFvaL, [to dry up, be dry]),
fr. [Hes., Theogn.], Pind., Aeschyl. down; Sept. for nw,
hard, harsh, rough, stiff, (r4 oxdnpa x. ra padakd, Xen.
mem. 3,10, 1); of men, metaph., harsh, stern, hard:
“Mt. xxv. 24 (1S. xxv. 3; Is. xix. 4; xlviii. 4; many exx.
fr. prof. auth. are given by Passow s. v.2b.; [L.and S.
.8. v. Il. 2; esp. Trench §xiv.]); of things: depos, vio-
lent, rough, Jas. iii. 4; 6 Adyos, offensive and intolerable,
Jn. vi. 60, equiv. to 6s cxavdadifer, 61; cKAnpa Aareiv Kara
twos, to speak hard and bitter things against one, Jude
15 (okAnpa adreiv tux is also used of one who speaks
roughly, Gen. xlii. 7, 30; dmoxpiveoOa oxAnpd, to reply
with threats, 1 K. xii. 13); o«dnpdv éorr foll. by an inf.,
it is dangerous, turns out badly, [A. V. it is hard], Acts
ix. 5 Rec.; xxvi. 14.*
oKAnpotns, -nTos, 4, (ckAnpds), hardness; trop. obsti-
nacy, stubbornness: Ro. ii. 5. (Deut. ix. 27; [Antipho],
Plat., Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) *
oKdnpo-rpaxnros, -ov, (oxAnpds and tpayndos), prop.
stiff-necked; trop. stubborn, headstrong, obstinate: Acts vii.
51; Sept. for \_y nwp, Ex. xxxiii. 3,5; xxxiv. 9; [etc.];
Bar. ii. 30; Sir. xvi. 11; [cef. oxAnporpaxndia, Test. xii.
Patr., test. Sym. § 6]. Not found in prof. auth.; [cf. W.
26599) (94 ile
oKdnpive [cf. W. 92 (88)]; 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur.
oxAnpvynre ; Pass., impf. éoxAnpuvdunv; 1 aor. éoxAnpvr
Onv; (oxAnpéds, q. v-); Sept. for Nw and pin, to make
hard, to harden; prop. in Hippocr. and Galen; metaph.
to render obstinate, stubborn, [A.V. to harden]: twa, Ro.
ix. 18 (in opp. to those who interpret it fo treat harshly,
ef. Fritzsche vol. ii. p. 323 sq.; [cef., too, Meyer ad
loc.]); qv KapSiay tevos, Heb. iii. 8, 15 and iv. 7, (fr. Ps.
xciv. (xev.) 8; cf. Ex. vii. 3, 22; viii. 19; ix.12); pass.
(Sept. for nw and ptr) to be hardened, i. e. become obsti-
nate or stubborn: Acts xix. 9; Heb. iii. 13.*
oKodtds, -d, -dv, (opp. to 6pOds, dpOtos, evOus [cf. cxwmdn€)),
fr. Hom. down, crooked, curved: prop. of a way (Prov.
xxviii. 18), ra oxoded, Lk. iii. 5 (opp. to 4 edOeia sc. ddés,
fr. Is. xl.4); metaph. perverse, wicked: n yevea 9 oxoAta,
Acts ii. 40; with dveotpappevn added, Phil. ii. 15 (clearly
so Deut. xxxii. 5); unfair, surly, froward, (opp. to dya-
Obs x. émcecens), 1 Pet. ii. 18.*
oKddo, -oros, 6, fr. Hom. down, a pointed piece of
wood, a pale, a stake: €866n pot oxddow 7H capki, a sharp
stake [al. say splinter, A.V. thorn; cf. Num. xxxiii. 55 ;
Ezek. xxviii. 24; Hos. ii. 6 (8); Babr. fab. 122, 1. 10;
al. (Sir. xliii. 19)] to pierce my flesh, appears to indicate
some constant bodily ailment or infirmity, which, even
when Paul had been caught up in a trance to the third
heaven, sternly admonished him that he still dwelt in a
frail and mortal body, 2 Co. xii. 7 (cf. 1-4); [ef. W. §31,
10 N. 3; B. $133, 27. On Paul’s “thorn in the flesh”
579
OKOTELWOS
see Farrar, St. Paul, i. 652 sqq. (Excursus x.) ; Bp.
Lghift. Com. on Gal. p. 186 sqq.; Schaff in his * ropuiar
Commentary’ on Gal. p. 331 sq.]*
gkoTéw, -; (cKords, q. Vv.) ; fr. Hom. down; to look at,
observe, contemplate. to mark: absol., foll. by »q with
the indic. (see pn, III. 2), Lk. xi. 35; teva, to fix one’s
eyes upon, direct one’s attention to, any one: Ro. xvi.
17; Phil. iii. 17; ceavrdv, foll. by pA with the subjunc.
to look to, take heed to thyself, lest etc. Gal. vi. 1 [see ph,
Il. 1b.]; i, to look at, i.e. care for, have regard to, a
thing : 2 Co. iv.18; Phil. ii.4, (2 Mace. iv.5). [Come.:
eml-, KaTa-cKOTrew. | *
[SyN.: oxomeiy is more pointed than Bagrew; often i. q. to
scrutinize, observe. When the physical sense recedes, i. q. to fix
one’s (mind’s) eye on, direct one’s attention to,a thing in order to
get it, or owing to interest in it, ora duty towards it. Hence
often equiv. to avm at, care for, etc. Schmidt, Syn. ch. xi.
Cf. dewpéw, dpdw.|
oKonds, -ov, 6, [(fr. a r. denoting ‘to spy,’ ‘peer,’ ‘look
into the distance’; cf. also Lat. specio, speculum, species,
ete. ; Fick i. 251 sq.; iv. 279 ; Curtius §111)]; fr. Hom.
down ; 1. an observer, a watchman. 2. the
distant mark looked at, the goal or end one has in view:
kata oxomdy (on this phrase see xard, II. 1 c.), Phil.
iii. 14.*
cKoptitw; 1 aor. éoxdpmica; 1 aor. pass. éoxopmicOny ;
[(prob. fr. r. skarp ‘to cut asunder,’ ‘cut to pieces’;
akin is oxopmios; cf. Lat. scalpere, scrobs, etc.; Fick
i. 240; iii. 811, ete.)]; to scatter: 6 diKos oKxopmife Ta
mpoBara, Jn. X.12; 6 py ovvdyov per’ e400 cxopmi¢e, Mt.
xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (this proverb is taken from a flock,
—to which the body of Christ’s followers is likened f[al.
regard the proverb as borrowed fr. agriculture]; cuvdyee
Tovs éoxopmicpévous TO dpyavoy [i. e.a trumpet], Artem.
oneir. 1, 56 init.); vd, in pass., of those who, routed
or terror-stricken or driven by some other impulse,
fly in every direction: foll. by eis w. acc. of place, Jn.
xvi. 32 [cf. W. 516 (481)], (1 Mace. vi. 54; poBnOévres
éoxopricbnoav, Plut. Timol. 4; add, Joseph. antt. 6, 6,
3). i. q. to scatter abroad (what others may collect for
themselves), of one dispensing blessings liberally : 2 Co.
ix. 9 fr. Ps. exi. (cxii.) 9, [ef. W. 469 (437)]. (Acc. to
Phrynichus the word was used by Hecataeus; it was
also used —in addition to the writ. already cited — by
Strabo 4 p. 198; Lcian. asin. 32; Ael. v. h. 13, 45 [here
dueck. (ed. Hercher); Adyous (cf. Lat. spargere rumores),
Joseph. antt. 16, 1, 2]; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W.
22; 92 (87)]; Sept. for pram, 2 S. xxii. 15; Ps. xvii.
(xviii.) 15. Attic writers say oxeSavvypt.) [Comp : dua-
oxoprigopat. | *
aKoprios, -ov, 5, [(for deriv. see the preceding word) ;
from Aeschyl. down; on its accent, cf. Chandler § 246],
a scorpion, Sept. for 17) y, the name of a little animal,
somewhat resembling a lobster, which in warm regions
lurks esp. in stone walls; it has a poisoneus sting in its
tail [McC. and S. and BB. DD. s. v.J: Lk. x.19; xi. 12;
Revs 1X03, 95 LO
oorewds [WH oxorids; see I,¢], -9, -dv, (oxéros), full
oKoTla
of darkness, covered with darkness, [fr. Aeschyl. down]:
opp. to parewds, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (ra oKorTewva
k. Ta Potewd, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1; [ef. 4, 3, 4]).*
ckorta, -as, }, [on its deriv. cf. oxnyn], (Thom. Mag. 6
oxdros kK. TO GkOTOS* TO S€ TKOTia OvK év xpnoet Sc. in Attic
[ef. Moeris s. v.; L. and S. s. v. oxéros, fin.]), darkness :
prop. the darkness due to want of daylight, Jn. vi.
17; xx. 1; év tH okotia (Aadety 74), unseen, in secret,
(i. q. év kpun7g, Jn. xviii. 20), privily, in private, opp. to
év 7@ hori, Mt. x. 27; Lk. xii. 3; metaph. used of igno-
rance of divine things, and its associated wickedness, and
the resultant misery: Mt. iv. 16 LTrWH; Jn. i. 5;
vill. 12; xii. 85, 46; 1 Jn. i. 5; ii. 8 sq. 11. (Ap. Rh.
4, 1698; Anth. 8, 187. 190; for m0 Mic. iii. 6; for
bpk Job xxviii. 3.)*
‘okoritw: Pass., pf. ptep. écxoreopévos (Eph. iv. 18 RG);
1 aor. eoxoticOny; 1 fut. cxoticOjoopar; (oxdtos); to cov-
er with darkness, to darken; pass. to be covered with dark-
ness, be darkened: prop. of the heavenly bodies, as de-
prived of light [(Eccl. xii. 2)], Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24 ;
Lk. xxiii. 45[T WH ékdcimw(q.v. 2)]; Rev. viii. 12; ix. 2[L
T WH okorde, q.v.]; metaph. of the eyes, viz. of the un-
derstanding, Ro. xi. 10; 7 xapdia, the mind [see kapdia, 2
b. B.], Ro. i. 21; men 77 diavoia, Eph. iv. 18 RG. (Plut.
[adv. Col. 24, 4; Cleomed. 81, 28]; Tzetz. hist. 8, 929;
Sept. several times for Ww; {Polyb. 12, 15,10; 3 Mace.
iv. 10; Test. xii. Patr., test. Rub. § 3; test. Levi §14].) *
okétos, -ov, 6, (cf. cxoria, init.), fr. Hom. down, dark-
ness: Heb. xii. 18 Rec. [cf. WH. App. p. 158; W. 66
(64); B. 22 (20)].*
oKéros, -ous, To, fr. Pind. down, (see the preceding
word, and oxoria, init.), Sept. chiefly for wn, dark-
NESS 3 a. prop. : Mt. xxvii. 45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk.
xxiii. 44; Acts ii. 20; 2 Co. iv. 6; avrn ear 7 e€ovoia
tov oxérovs, this is the power of (night’s) darkness, i. e.
it has the power of rendering men bold to commit crimes,
Lk. xxii. 53; ra xpumra tod oxdrous (see kpumrds), 1 Co.
iv.5; of darkened eyesight or blindness: oxéros éme-
minret emi Twai. e. on one deprived of sight, Acts xiii. 11;
in fig. disc. ef ody. . ., rd oKdrTOs TédOY ; if the light that is
in thee is darkness, darkened (i. e. if the soul has lost its
perceptive power), how great is the darkness (how much
more deplorable than bodily blindness), Mt. vi. 23, ef.
Lk. xi. 35. by meton. put for a dark place: Mt. viii.
12; xxii. 135 xxv. 30, (see e£wrepos) ; Cédbos rod oxédrous
(see (dos), 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. b. metaph. of
ignorance respecting divine things and human duties,
and the accompanying ungodliness and immorality, to-
gether with their consequent misery (see oxoria): Jn.
iii. 19; Acts xxvi. 18; 2 Co. vi. 14; Eph. vi. 12; Col. i.
13; 1 Pet.ii.9; (abstract for the concrete) persons in
whom darkness becomes visible and holds sway, Eph. v.
8; Ta €pya Tov oxédrovs, deeds done in darkness, harmo-
nizirg with it, Ro. xiii. 12; Eph. v.11; oxdrovs eivas, to
be given up to the power of darkness [cf. W. § 30, 5 a.],
1 Th. v. 5; ev oxdret eivai, ib. 4; of év oxdrer, Lk. i. 79;
Ro. ii. 19; 6 Aads 6 KaOnpevos ev oxdrer, Mt. iv. 16 RGT;
€v okoret mepirareiv, 1 Jn. i. 6.*
580
oKwrn€
oKoréa, -@: Pass., pf. ptep. ésxormpevos; 1 aor. €oxo-
rwOnv; [cf. WH. App. p. 171]; (oxéros); to darken,
cover with darkness: Rev. ix.2 LUT WH; xvi.10; met-
aph. to darken or blind the mind: éoxorwpévor rH Oravoia,
Eph. iv.18 LT Tr WH. ({Soph.], Plat., Polyb., Plut.,
al.; Sept.) *
oKbBadoy, -ov, 76, (kuoiBadov Te dv, TO Tois KUT? BadAspe-
vov, Suid. [p. 3347¢.; to the same effect Etym. Magn.
p. 719, 53 ef. 125,44; al. connect it with oxap (cf. scoria,
Lat. stercus), al. with a r. meaning ‘to shiver’, ‘shred’;
Fick, Pt. i. p. 244]), any refuse, as the excrement of
animals, offscouring, rubbish, dregs, etc.: [A. V. dung]
i. e. worthless and detestable, Phil. iii. 8. (Sir. xxvii.
4, Philo; Joseph. b. j. 5,13, 7; Plut.; Strabo; often in
the Anthol.) [See on the word, Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.
l.c.; Gataker, Advers. Miscell. Posth., c. xliii. p. 868
sqq-]*
ZKvtOns, -ov, 6, a Scythian, an inhabitant of Scythia i.e.
modern Russia: Col. iii. 11. By the more civilized na-
tions of antiquity the Scythians were regarded as the
wildest of all barbarians; cf. Cic. in Verr. 2,5, 58 § 150;
in Pison. 8, 18; Joseph. c. Apion. 2, 37, 6; [Philo, leg.
ad Gaium § 2]; Leian. Tox. 5sq.; 2 Mace. iv. 47; 3
Mace. vii. 5. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Col. l.c.; Hackett in
B.D. s. v. Seythians; Rawlinson’s Herod., App. to bk. iv.,
Essays ii. and iii.; Vanicek, Fremdworter, s. v.]*
oKv0pwrds, -dv, also of three term.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 105 [W. § 11, 1], (axvOpds and dy), of a sad and
gloomy countenance (opp. to daidpds, Xen. mem. 3, 10,
4): Lk. xxiv. 17; of one who feigns or affects a sad
countenance, Mt. vi. 16. (Gen. xl. 7; Sir. xxv. 23; Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
oKvAdw; pf. pass. ptep. €oxvApévos; pres. mid. impv.
2 pers. sing. oxdAXov; (cKdAor, q- V-) ; a. to skin,
Slay, (Anthol.). b. to rend, mangle, (Aeschyl. Pers.
577); to vex, trouble, annoy, (Hdian. 7, 3, 9 [4]): zed,
Mk. v. 35; Lk. viii. 49; pass. €oxvdApévor, (Vulg. verati)
[R. V. distressed], Mt. ix. 36 GLTTrWH; mid. to give
one’s self trouble, trouble one’s self: pi oxvdAdov, Lk. vii.
6.*
oktrov [Ree GLT WH] also cxvarov ([so R*°* Tr] cf.
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 44), -ov, 7d, (fr. the obsol.
oxvw, ‘to pull off’, allied to ga, EvAov [but cf. Curtius
§ 113; Vanitek p. 1115]); a. a (beast’s) skin
stripped off, a pelt. b. the arms stripped off from an
enemy, spoils: plur. Lk. xi. 22. (Soph., Thuc., sqq. ;
Sept.) *
oTKoANKS-Bpwros, -ov, (cc@ANE and BiBpacke), eaten of
worms: Acts xii. 23, cf. 2 Macc. ix. 9. (of a tree, Theo-
phrvenply5; 951.) *
oKoAnE, -nkos, 6, [perh. akin to crodsds ], a worm (Hom.
Tl. 13, 654); spec. that kind which preys upon dead
bodies (Sir. x. 11; xix. 3; 2 Macc. ix. 9; Anthol. 7, 480,
3; 10, 78, 3): 6 ox@dn€& atit@v ov TedevTa, by a fig. bor-
rowed fr. Is. Ixvi. 24 (cf. Sir. vii. 17; Judith xvi. 17),
‘their punishment after death will never cease’ [ox.
symbolizing perh. the loathsomeness of the penalty},
Mk. ix. 44, 46, [T WH om. Tr br. these two verses], 48.*
opapaydivos
opapdywvos, -n, -ov, (cudpaydos, cf. dueOdorwvos, taxi
Aivos, etc.), of emerald, made of emerald, [see the foll.
word]: sc. Ai6os, Rev. iv. 3. [(Leian.)]*
opdpaydos, -ov, 6 [but apparently fem. in the earlier
writ., cf. Theophrast. lap. 4, 23; in Hdt. its gend. cannot
be determined; cf. Steph. Thesaur. s. v.], Lat. smarag-
dus, [ A. V. emerald], a transparent precious stone noted
esp. for its light green color: Rev. xxi.19. [From Hat.
down; Sept. On the deriv. of the word see Vaniéek,
Fremdworter, s. v. On its relation to our ‘emerald’
(disputed by King, Antique Gems, p. 27 sqq.), see Riehm
HWB. s. v. ‘ Edelsteine’, 17; Deane in the ‘Bible Edu-
cator’, vol. ii. p. 350 sq.]*
opipva, -7s, 9, Hebr. 9, Wd, myrrh, a bitter gum and
costly perfume which exudes from a certain tree or
shrub in Arabia and Ethiopia, or is obtained by incis-
ions made in the bark: Mt. ii. 11; as an antiseptic it
was used in embalming, Jn. xix. 39. Cf. Hdt. 2, 40, 86;
3, 107; Theophr. hist. pl. 9,3 sq.; Diod. 5,41; Plin. h.
n. 12, 33sq.; [BB.DD.; Birdwood in the ‘Bible Edu-
cator’, vol. ii. p. 151; Low, Aram. Pflanzennam. § 185].*
Zpipva, -ns, 7, Smyrna, an Ionian city, on the Mgean
Sea, about 40 miles N. of Ephesus; it had a harbor, and
flourished in trade, commerce, and the arts; now /smir
[BB.DD.]: Rev.i.11; ii.8. Tdf. after cod. 8 [(cf. cod.
Bezae, ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii.)] has adopted the form
Zpuvpv., found also occasionally on coins and in inscrr.;
cf. Kiihner i. p. 200 e.; [Tdf.’s note on Rev. i. 11; and see
3, ,s, sub fin.; Bp. Lghtft. Ignat. ii. 331 note].*
Zpupvaios, -ov, 6, 7, of or belonging to Smyrna, an in-
habitant of Smyrna: Rev. ii. 8 Ree. [(Pind., Hdt.)] *
cpupvite: (cpvpva, q. V-) ; 1. intrans. to be like
myrrh (Diose. 1, 79). 2. to mix and so flavor with
myrrh: otvos éopupyopevos (pf. pass. ptep.) wine [A. V.
mingled] with myrrh (Vulg. murratum vinum), i. e. flavored
or (Plin. h. n. 14, 15) made fragrant with myrrh: Mk. xv.
23. But since the ancients used to infuse myrrh into
wine in order to give it a more agreeable fragrance and
flavor, we must in this matter accept Matthew’s account
(xxvii. 34, viz. ‘mingled with gall’) as by far the more
probable; [but see yodn, 2].*
DdSopa, -wy, rad, (D010), Sodom, a city respecting tne
location and the destruction of which see Tépoppa [and
(in addition to reff. there given) McC. and S. s. v. Sodom;
Schaff-Herzog ib.]: Mt. x.15; xi. 23 sq.; Mk. vi. 11 (R
Lin br.); Lk. x.12; xvii. 29; Ro. ix. 29; 2 Pet. ii. 6;
Jude 7; Rev. xi. 8.*
Dodropdv (so [Rt bez elz G Lin Lk. xii. 27; RLTrWH
in Acts vii. 47 (cf. Tdf. on Mt. vi. 29)]) and Sodopey [so
RG Wil in Mite. 75) vas 29s Rev Tr WE in
Lk. xii. 27; Gin Acts vii.47; (Sadopov Tdf. in Acts vii.
47)], -Gvros (so Ree. uniformly; [LT WH in Acts iii. 11;
v.12; Lin Mt.i. 6 also]), and -dvos (so [GL T Tr WH
in Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; Jn. x. 23; GT Tr WH in Mt.
1.6; G Trin Acts iii. 11; v.12]; the forms », -dpos,
ure undoubtedly to be preferred, ef. [Tdf. Proleg. pp.
104,110; WH. App. p. 158]; W. 67 (65); B. 16 (14
Wq-)), 6, (dw, i. e. ‘pacific’, Jrenaeus, Germ. Fried-
581
copia
rich, Eng. Frederick), Solomon, the son of David by
Bathsheba the wife of Uriah; he succeeded his father,
becoming the third king of Israel (B. c. 1015-975 [ace.
to the commonly accepted chronology; but cf. the art.
‘Zeitrechnung’ in Riehm’s HWB. (esp. p. 1823 sq.)]),
built the temple at Jerusalem, and was distinguished for
his magnificence, splendor, and wisdom: Mt. i. 6 sq.; vi.
29; xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; xii. 27; Jn. x. 23; Acts iii. 11;
Vel 2ise vile ven
copes, -od, 7, an urn or receptacle for keeping the bones
of the dead (Hom. II. 23, 91); a coffin (Gen. 1. 26; Hat.
1, 68; 2,78; Arstph., Aeschin., Plut., al.) ; the funeral-
couch or bier on which the Jews carried their dead forth to
burial [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Coffin; Edersheim, Jesus
the Messiah, i. 555 sq.]: Lk. vii. 14.*
és, -7, -dv, possess. pron. of the 2d pers.; fr. Hom.
down; thy, thine: Mt. vii. 3, 22; xiii. 27; xxiv. 3; Mk.
ii. 18; Lk. xv. 31; xxii. 42; Jn. iv. 42 [here Tr mre. WH
mrg. read the personal gov]; xvii. 6, 9, 10,17; xviii. 35;
Acts v.4; xxiv. 2 (8), 4; 1 Co. viii. 11; xiv. 16; Philem.
14; 08 cot sc. pabnrai, Lk. v. 33; absol. of coi, thy kins-
folk, thy friends, Mk. v.19; 7é odv, what is thine, Mt.
xx. 14; xxv. 25; plur. ra oa [A. V. thy goods; cf. W.
592 (551)], Lk. vi. 30. [[@f. W. § 22, 7 sqq.; B. 115
(101) sqq.]*
covddptov, -ov, To, (a Lat. word, sudarium, fr. sudor,
sweat; cf. B. 18 (16)), a handkerchief, i.e. a cloth for
wiping the perspiration from the face and for cleaning
the nose: Lk. xix. 20; Acts xix. 12; also used in swath
ing the head of a corpse [A. V. napkin], Jn. xi. 44; xx.
7. [Cf BB.DD. s. v. Handkerchief. ] *
Yovodvva, -ns [cf. B. 17 (15)], 7, (TIWIw a lily), Su-
sanna, one of the women that attended Jesus on his
journeys: Lk. viii. 3.*
copia, -as, 1, (copds), Hebr. WIN, wisdom, broad and
full intelligence, (fr. Hom. down]; used of the knowl-
edge of very diverse matters, so that the shade of mean-
ing in which the word is taken must be discovered from
the context in every particular case. a. the wis-
dom which belongs tomen: univ., Lk. ii. 40,52; spec.
the varied knowledge of things human and divine, ac-
quired by acuteness and experience, and summed up in
maxims and proverbs, as was 7 copia rod Sodopavos, Mt.
xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31; the science and learning tév Aiyu-
nriov, Acts vii. 22 [ef. W. 227 (213) n.; B. § 134,6]; the
art of interpreting dreams and always giving the sagest
advice, Acts vii. 10; the intelligence evinced in discov-
ering the meaning of some mysterious number or vision,
Rev. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; skill in the management of af-
fairs, Acts vi. 3; a devout and proper prudence in in-
tercourse with men not disciples of Christ, Col. iv. 5;
skill and discretion in imparting Christian truth, Col. i.
28; iii. 16; [2 Pet. iii. 15]; the knowledge and prac-
tice of the requisites for godly and upright living, Jas.
i. 53 ili. 13, 17; with which codia dvabey xarepxopévn is
put in contrast the codia émiyeios, Wuxixn, Sarporradns,
such as is the craftiness of envious and quarrelsome
men, Jas. iii. 15, or capxex) copia (see capxixds, 1)
sopia
craftiness, 2 Co. i. 12 (for the context shows that it does
not differ essentially from the mwavoupyia of iv. 2; in
Grk. writ. also gopia is not infreq. used of shrewdness
and cunning; cf. Passow [or L. and 8.]s. v. 2); the
knowledge and skill in affairs requisite for the successful
defence of the Christian cause against hostile accusa-
tions, Lk. xxi. 15; an acquaintance with divine things
and human duties, joined to a power of discoursing con-
cerning them and of interpreting and applying sacred
Scripture, Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi.2; Acts vi.10; the wis-
dom or instruction with which John the Baptist and
Jesus taught men the way to obtain salvation, Mt. xi.
19; Lk. vii. 35, (on these pass. see dixatdw, 2). In Paul’s
Epp.: aknowledge of the divine plan, previously hidden,
of providing salvation for men by the expiatory death
of Christ, 1 Co. i. 30; ii. 6; Eph. i. 8 [W. 111 (105 sq.)];
hence all the treasures of wisdom are said to be hidden
in Christ, Col. ii. 3; w. the addition of deod (gen. of the
author), 1 Co. i. 24; ii. 7; mvevparexn, Col. i. 9; mvedpa
codias x. amoxadvews, Eph. i. 17; Adyos codias, the
ability to discourse eloquently of this wisdom, 1 Co. xii.
8; opposed to this wisdom is—the empty conceit of
wisdom which men make a parade of, a knowledge more
specious than real of lofty and hidden subjects: such as
the theosophy of certain Jewish Christians, Col. ii. 23;
the philosophy of the Greeks, 1 Co. i. 21 sq.; ii. 1; with
gov koopov added, 1 Co. i. 20; ili. 19; rod aldvos rodvrov,
4 Co. ii. 6; ray copay, 1 Co. i. 19; dvOpammav, 1 Co. ii. 5,
{in each of these last pass. the word includes also the
vhetorical art, such as is taught in the schools), cf.
Fritzsche, Rom. vol. i. p. 67 sq.; codia rod Adyou, the
wisdom which shows itself in speaking [R. V. wisdom of
words], the art of the rhetorician, 1 Co. i. 17; Adyoe
(dvOpwrivns [so R in vs. 4 (all txts. in 13)]) codias, dis-
course conformed to philosophy and the art of rhetoric,
1 Co. ii. 4, 13. b. supreme intelligence, such as be-
longs to God: Rev. vii. 12, also to Christ, exalted to
God’s right hand, Rev. v.12; the wisdom of God as
evinced in forming and executing his counsels, Ro. xi.
33; with the addition of rod deov, as manifested in the
formation and government of the world, and to the Jews,
moreover, in the Scriptures, 1 Co. i. 21; it is called
moAvroikidos from the great variety of ways and methods
by which he devised and achieved salvation through
Christ, Eph. iii. 10. In the noteworthy pass. Lk. xi. 49
(where Christ ascribes to ‘the wisdom of God’ what in
the parallel, Mt. xxiii. 34, he utters himself), the words
7) copia Tod Oeod etmev seem to denote the wisdom of God
which is operative and embodied as it were in Jesus, so
that the primitive Christians, when to comfort them-
selves under persecution they recalled the saying of
Christ, employed that formula of quotation [cf. 1 Co. i.
24, 30, etc.]; but Luke, in ignorance of this fact, took
the phrase for a part of Christ’s saying. So Eusebius
(h. e. 3, 32,8), perhaps in the words of Hegesippus, calls
those who had personally heard Christ of adrats dxoais
THs évOéov cehias eraxovoa KarnEwpéevor; cf. Grimm
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1853, p. 332 sqa. [For other
582
oT apyavow
explanations of the phenomenon see the Comm. on Lk,
le. Cf. Schiirer, Zeitgesch. § 33, V.1 and reff.]*
[Syw.: on the relation of copta to yvaous see yvGors, fin.
“While ood. is ‘mental excellence in its highest and fullest
sense’ (Aristot. eth. Nic. 6,7), cdveors and ppdynots are both
derivative and special, — applications of co¢ia to details: ow.
critical, apprehending the bearing of things, ¢pdév. prac-
tical, suggesting lines of action” (Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 9)
but cf. Meyer on Col. 1. c.; Schmidt, ch. 13 § 10; ch. 147 § 8.
See codds, fin.]
coditw: 1 aor. inf. copicar; (codds) 5 1. to make
wise, teach: twa, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8; erode
ods pe THY evToAny cov, Ps. Cxviil. (CX1x.) 983 ore TL vav-
TiAins cecod.opevos, ovTe Tt vn@v, Iles. opp. 647). 2s
Mid. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, mostly as depon. to
become wise, to have understanding, (é€codicato trép tav-
tas avOporous, 1 K. iv. 27 (81); add, Eccl. ii. 15, ete.;
freq. in Sir.) ; to invent, play the sophist; to devise cleverly
or cunningly: pf. pass. ptep. cecodicpévoe pidor, 2 Pet.
i. 16. [Comp.: cara-copigopat. | *
copes, -7, -dv, (akin to caps and to the Lat. sapio,
sapiens, sapor, ‘to have a taste’, ete.; Curtius § 628;
[Vanitek p. 991]}), Sept. for 03m; [fr. Theogn., Pind.,
Aeschyl. down]; wise, i. e. a. skilled, expert: ets tt,
Ro. xvi. 19; of artificers (cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch. on
Sap. [vii. 21] p. 151): dpyeréxror, 1 Co. iii. 10; Ts. iii.
3, (Snprovpyds, of God, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 7). b. wise,
i.e. skilled in letters, cultivated, learned: Ro. i. 14, 22;
of the Greek philosophers (and orators, see co¢ia, a.),
1 Co. i. 19 sq. 26 sq.; iii. 18 sq. [20]; of the Jewish
theologians, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; of Christian teach-
ers, Mt. xxiii. 34. c. wise in a practical sense, i. e.
one who in action is governed by piety and integrity: Eph.
vy. 15; Jas. ili.13; and accordingly is a suitable per-
son to settle private quarrels,1Co.vi.5. 4d.
wise in a philosophic sense, forming the best plans and us-
ing the best means for their execution: so of God, Ro. xvi.
27, and Ree. in 1 Tim. i. 17; Jude 25; copwrepoy, con-
tains more wisdom, is more sagaciously thought out,
Ui Conie 25.5
[Syn.: copds, cuvertss, dpdvimos: copds wise, see
above; ovverds intelligent, denotes one who can ‘ put things
together’ (cuvréva:), who has insight and comprehension;
gpdvimos prudent (A. V. uniformly, wise), denotes primarily
one who has quick and correct perceptions, hence ‘ discreet,”
‘ circumspect,’ ete. ; cf. Schmidt ch. 147. See copla, fin.]
Smavia, -as, 7, Spain, in the apostolic age the whole
peninsula S. of the Pyrenees: Ro. xv. 24, 28. ([W. 25];
the more com. Grk. form is ‘Iowavia, 1 Mace. viii. 3, [ap-
parently the Phoenician or Lat. name for “I8npia; cf.
Pape, Eigennamen, s. vv. ].) *
omapacow; 1 aor. eomdpaéa; to convulse [al. tear]:
tid, Mk.i. 26; ix. 20RG'Irtxt., 26; Lk. ix. 39; see
pyyvumt, c. (ras yradovs, Arstph. ran. 424; ras rpixas,
Diod. 19, 34; in various other senses in Grk. writ.)
[Comp.: cuv- orapdocw. | *
orapyavow, -: 1 aor. é€omapydvwca; pf. pass. ptep.
eorapyavepévos ; (ondapyavoy a swathing band) ; to wrap
+
oTaTa\aw
in swaaating-clothes: an infant just born, Lk. ii. 7, 12.
(Ezek. xvi. 4; [Eur., Aristot.], Hippocr., Plut., al.) *
omratahde, -4; 1 aor. éoxardAnca; (onardAn, riotous
living, luxury); to live lucuriously, lead a voluptuous life,
[give one’s self to pleasure]: 1Tim.v.6; Jas.v.5. (Prov.
xxix. 21; Am. vi. 4 [in both these pass. caraum.; Ezek.
xvi. 49]; Sir. xxi.15; Barnab. ep.10, 3; Polyb. excerpt.
Vat. p. 451 [i.e. 37, 4, 6 (ed. Didot)], and occasionally
in later and inferior writ.)*
odo, -G: 1 aor. mid. éomacduny; [cogn. w. domdCopat
(to draw to one’s self, embrace, etc.), Eng. spasm, ete.];
fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for IW; to draw: mid.
with pdxatpay [cf. B. § 135, 4], to draw one’s sword, Mk.
xiv. 47; Acts xvi. 27, (Num. xxii. 313 rv Joudatay, 23;
Judg. ix. 54, ete.). [Comp.: dva-, daro-, dta-, émt-, TEpt-
omda. |*
omeipa fon the accent cf. B.11; Chandler § 161; Tdf.
Proleg. p. 102], 7, gen. -ns (Acts x. 1; xxi. 31; xxvii. 1;
see [Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156; and] pd-
xarpa, init.), [cogn. w. orupis (q. v.)]; a. Lat. spira;
anything rolled into a circle or ball, anything wound,
rolled up, folded together. b. a military cohort
(Polyb. 11, 23, 1 rpets omeipas+ rodro 8€ Kadeirat Td cor-
Taypa Tay TeCdv mapa “Pwpaiots Kkodpris), i. e. the tenth
part of a legion [i. e. about 600 men (i. e. legionaries), or
if auxiliaries either 500 or 1000; cf. Marquardt, Romisch.
Alterth. ILI. ii. p. 371. But surely rodro 76 otivraypa in
the quotation comprehends the tpeis om.; hence Polyb.
here makes a on. equal to a maniple, cf. 2,3, 2; 6, 24,5;
ef. Zonaras, Lex. p. 1664, om.; civraypa diakociwv avdpav.
On the other hand, “the later Grk. writ. almost uniform-
ly employ oz. as the representative of cohors” (Smith,
Dict. of Antiq., ed. 2, s. v. exercitus, p. 500); and the
use of xwAiapxos (which was the equiv. of tribunus, the
commander of a cohort) in connection with it (Jn. xviii.
12; Acts xxi. 31), together with the uniform rendering
of the word by cohors in the Lat. versions, warrants the
marg. “cohort” uniformly added in R.V. to the render-
ing band]: Mt. xxvii. 27; Mk. xv. 16; Acts x.1; xxi.
31; xxvii. 1, and often in Josephus; a maniple, or the
thirtieth part of a legion, often so in Polyb. [(see above)];
any band, company, or detachment, of soldiers (2 Mace.
viii. 23; Jud. xiv. 11): Jn. xviii. 3, 12.*
onetpw; [impf. 2 pers. sing. Zoretpes, Mt. xiii. 27 Tr];
1 aor. Zoretpa; Pass., pres. oweipopar; pf. pass. ptep.
donappévos; 2 aor. €omdpny; [derived fr. the quick, jerky,
motion of the hand; cf. our spurn (of the foot); Cur-
tius § 389]; fr. Hesiod down; Sept. for pI; to sow,
scatter seed; a. prop.: absol., Mt. vi. 26; xiii. 3 sq.
18 sq.;. Mk. iv. 3 sq. 14; Lk. Vill, 5 ext 24% [Jn. Vv.
36 sq. (see in b.)]; 2 Co. ix. 10; with an ace. of the thing;
as oméppa, Otdna, xdxkor, [cf. B. § 131, 5]: Mt. xiii. 24
sq. [but in 25 LT Tr WH have emorz-. |, 27, 37, 39; Mk.
iv. 32; Lk. viii.5; 1 Co. xv. 36sq.; with specifications
of place: eis ras axdv@as, Mt. xiii. 22 ; Mk. iv. 18; erg
aype, Mt. xiii. 24, [31]; emt rhs yqs, Mk. iv. 813 émé wy
an ace. of place, Mt. xiii. 20, 23; Mk. iv. 16, 20; mapa
tiv dév, Mt. xiii. 19. b. in proverbial sayings:
583
oméppa
absol., Mt. xxv. 24, 26; Lk. xix. 21sq.; Jn. iv. 37; 2Co.
ix. 6; ri, Gal. vi. 7, (on these sayings see Oepitw, b.). in
comparisons: omeipew eis tiv odpka, els To mvedpa, (adpé
and mvedya are likened to fields to be sown), to do those
things which satisfy the nature and promptings of the
adp& or of the mvedua, Gal. vi. 8; rv Adyov, to scatter the
seeds of instruction, i. e. to impart instruction, Mk. iv.
14.sq.; 6 Adyos 6 eomappévos ev tais Kapdiats aitdv, the
ideas and precepts that have been implanted like seed
in their hearts, i. e. received in their hearts, ibid. 15
(where Tr txt. WH eis avrovs into their hearts, T Lmrg.
€v avtois) ; obrdés €otw 5 mapa tHy 6ddv omapeis, this one
experiences the fate of the seed sown by the wayside,
Mt. xiii. 19; add, 20-23; Mk. iv. 16, 18, 20. 70 TOua,
the body, which after death is committed like seed to the
earth, 1 Co. xv. 42-44; kxapmov Stkavocivns, i.e. that seed
which produces xaprév dicacooivns [see kaprés, 2 b.], Jas.
ili. 18; oveipew twi tu, to give, manifest, something to
one, from whom we may subsequently receive something
else akin to a harvest (Oepi{ouev), 1 Co. ix.11. [Comp.:
ta-, émt- orretpa. | *
omekovddtwp, -opos (RG -wpos [ef. Tdf. on Mk. as be-
low]), 6, (the Lat. word speculator), a looker-out, spy,
scout; under the emperors an attendant and member of
the body-guard, employed as messengers, watchers, and
executioners (Sen. de ira 1, 16 centurio supplicio prae-
positus condere gladium speculatorem jubet; also de
benef. 3, 25); the name is transferred to an attendant of
Herod Antipas that acted as executioner: Mk. vi. 27.
Cf. Keim ii. 512 [Eng. trans. iv. 219; J. W. Golling in
Thes. Nov. ete. ii. p. 405 sq.] *
omévSw: pres. pass. omevdopat; (cf. Germ. spenden
[perh. of the ‘ tossing away ’ of a liquid, Curtius § 296;
but ef. Vaniéek p. 1245 sq.]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
03; to pour out as a drink-offering, make a libation; in
the N. T. omevdecGar, to be offered as a libation, is figurae
tively used of one whose blood is poured out in a violent
death for the cause of God: Phil. ii. 17 (see @vaia, b.
fin.); 2 Tim. iv. 6.*
orépp.a, ~ros, 76, (omeipo, q. V-), fr. Hom. down, Hebr.
yu, the seed (fr. which anything springs) ; a.
from which a plant germinates; a. prop. the seed
i.e. the grain or kernel which contains within itself the
germ of the future plant: plur., Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv.
31; 1 Co. xv. 38, (Ex. xvi. 31; 158. viii.15); the sing.
is used collectively of the grains or kernels sown: Mt.
xiii. 24, 27, 37 sq.; 2 Co. ix. 10 [here L Tr ordpos]. B.
metaph. a seed i.e. a residue, or a few survivors reserved
as the germ of a new race (just as seed is kept from the
harvest for the sowing), Ro. ix. 29 after Is. i. 9, where
Sept. for TW, (so also Sap. xiv. 6; 1 Esdr. viii. 85 (87) ;
Joseph. antt.11, 5,3; 12, 7,3; Plat. Tim. p. 23c.). b.
the semen virile ; a. prop.: Lev. xv. 16-183 xviii.
20 sq., ete.; [prob. also Heb. xi. 11, cf. karaBodn 1, and
see below]; often in prof. writ. By meton. the pro-
duct of this semen, seed, children, offspring, progeny;
family, race, posterity, (so in Grk. chiefly in the tragic
poets, cf. Passow s. v. 2 b. ii..p. 1498 [L, and S. s. v. IL
CTEPLONO'YVOS
3]; and py very often in the O. T. [cf. W. 17, 30]); 80
in the sing., either of one, or collectively of many: Ro.
ix. 7 sq.; els kataZoAnv omépyatos (see [above, and ] cata-
Born, 2), Heb. xi. 11; dnordva and efanordvat oméppa
tui, Mt. xxii. 24; Mk. xii. 19; Lk. xx. 28, (Gen. xxxviii.
8); exew omepya, Mt. xxii.25; acvevar omeppa wi, Mk.
xii. 20-22; 1d om. rwds, Lk. i. 55; In. vii. 42; viii. 33,
37; Acts iii. 25; vii. 5 sq.; xiii. 23; Ro. i. 3; [iv. 13];
ix. 7; xi. 1; 2 Co. xi. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 8; Heb. ii. 16; xi.
18; in plur.: mais éx Baowixov oreppdror, of royal de-
scent, Joseph. antt. 8, 7,6; trav “ABpayiaiwy omeppdrav
dréyovot, 4 Mace. xviii. 1; i. q. tribes, races, dvOpwmoi te
kal avOpwrav onéppact vopobeTodpev Ta viv, Plat. lege. 9
p: 853¢. By a rabbinical method of interpreting, op-
posed to the usage of the Hebr. y11, which signifies the
offspring whether consisting of one person or many,
Paul lays such stress on the singular number in Gen. xiii.
15; xvii. 8 as to make it denote but one of Abraham’s
posterity, and that the Messiah: Gal. iii. 16, also 19;
and yet, that the way in which Paul presses the singu-
lar here is not utterly at variance with the genius of the
Jewish-Greek language is evident from ’ABpapwai@y orep-
parewy andyovot, 4 Macc. xviii. 1, where the plural is used
of many descendants [(ef. Delitesch, Br. a. d. Rom. p. 16
note 2; Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. 1. c.)]. 7d om. CABpadp) rd
é« Tov vépov, the seed which is such according to the de-
cision of the law, physical offspring [see vdpuos, 2
p- 428°], 7d ék miarews "ABp. those who are called Abra-
ham’s posterity on account of the faith by which they
are akin to him [see miotts, 1 b. a. p. 513” and éx, IL. 7],
Ro. iv. 16; add, 18; ix. 8; Gal. iii. 29; similarly Chris-
tians are called, in Rev. xii. 17, the omépua of the church
(which is likened to a mother, Gal. iv. 26). 8. whatever
possesses vital force or life-giving power: 7b oméppa Tov
Geod [ (but anarthrous) ], the Holy Spirit, the divine en-
ergy operating within the soul by which we are regener-
ated or made the réxva rod Oeod, 1 Jn. iii. 9.*
oreppoddsyos, -ov, (orépya, and A€yw to collect) ; a
picking up seeds: used of birds, Plut. Demet. 28; Athen.
9 p. 387£.; esp. of the crow or daw that picks up grain in
the fields (Germ. Saatkrdhe), Arstph. av. 232, 579; Aris-
tot. h. a. 8, 3 p. 592°, 28, and other writ. 2. of men:
lounging about the market-place and picking up a subsis-
tence by whatever may chance to fall from the loads of mer-
chandise (Eustath. on Hom. Od. 5, 490 omeppoddyou* of
mept ra €umdpia x. ayopds SvarpiBovres Sua Td avadéyeo bat
Ta ek TOY popriay amoppeovra kat Sua Cv ek ToUTw@Y); hence,
beggarly, abject, vile, (a parasite); getting a living by
flattery and buffoonery, Athen. 3 p. 85 f.; Plut. mor. p.
456 d.; subst. 6 on. an empty talker, babbler, (Dem. p. 269,
19; Athen. 8 p. 344¢.): Acts xvii. 18.*
omevdo; impf. gomevdov; 1 aor. gomevoa; (cogn. w.
Germ. sich sputen [cf. Eng. speed, Lat. studeo; Vanitek
p- 1163; Fick iv. 279]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for
nn, also for baa, ete. ; 1. intrans. [cf. W. § 38,
1; B. 130, 4], to hasten: as often in the Grk. writ., foll.
by an inf. Acts xx. 16; #\@ov ometcarres, they came with
haste, Lk. ii. 16; omevoas xaré8no [A.V. make haste
584
omdayxyvov
and come down], xaréBn, Lk. xix. 5,6; omedoov x. €€edAOe,
[A. V. make haste and get thee quickly out], Acts xxii
18. 2. to desire earnestly: ri, 2 Pet. iii. 12; (is.
xvi. 5; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given by Passow s. v. 2
vol. ii. p. 1501; [L. and S. s. v. II.]).*
omhAatov, -ov, 76, (omeos [cavern; cf. Curtius §111]),
a cave, [den]: Mt. xxi. 13; Mk. xi.17; Lk. xix. 46; Jn.
xi. 38; Heb. xi. 38; Rev. vi. 15. (Plat., Plut., Lcian.,
Ael., al.; Sept. for 17.) *
omtdds, -ados, 7, a rock in the sea, ledge or reef, (Hom.
Od. 8, 298; 5, 401, and in other poets; Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph. b. j. 3, 9, 3); plur. trop. of men who by their
conduct damage others morally, wreck them as it were,
i. q. oxdvdada, [R. V. txt. hidden rocks], Jude 12 [here
LT Tr WHread of (se. évres) ow. Some (so R.V. mrg.)
make the word equiv. to the following; see Rutherford
as there referred to. ]*
omidos [WH omidos (so Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 87;
L. and S. s. v.); but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 102; Lipsius,
Gram. Untersuch. p. 42], -ov, 6, (Phryn. rejects this word
in favor of the Attic cyAis; but oidos is used by Joseph.,
Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian., Liban., Artemidor.; see Lob.
ad Phryn. p. 28 [ef. W. 25]), a spot: trop. a fault, moral
blemish, Eph. v. 27; plur. of base and gluttonous men,
2 Pet. 1.13.
omddw, -@; pf. pass. ptep. €omiAwpevos; (amtdos); to
defile, spot: ri, Jas. iii. 6; Jude 23. (Dion. Hal., Leian.,
Heliod.; Sept.) *
omAdayxvitopar; 1 aor. eomdayyvicbny (cf. B. 52 (45) ];
(omddyxvov, q-V-) 5 prop. to,be moved as to one’s bowels,
hence to be moved with compassion, have compassion, (for
the bowels were thought to be the seat of love and pity):
absol., Lk. x. 33; xv. 20; omdayyvoeis with a finite
verb, Mt. xx. 834; Mk. i. 41; ruvds, to pity one (cf. W.
§ 30,10a.; [B.§132,15; but al. regard om. in the foll.
example as used absol. and the gen. as depending on
koptos]), Mt. xviii. 27; ei with dat. of the pers., Mt.
xiv. 14GLTTrWH; Mk. vi. 34 [RG]; Lk. vii. 13
(where Tdf. émi w. acc.) ; émi twa, Mt. xiv. 14 Ree.; xv.
32; Mk. [vi. 34 L T Tr WH]; viii. 2; ix. 22; cf. W. § 33,
c.; [B.u.s.]; mepi tevos drt, Mt. ix. 36. Besides, several
times in Test. xii. Patr. [e. g. test. Zab. §§ 4, 6, 7, etc.];
and in the N. T. Apocr.; in Deut. xiii. 8 Symm.; [Ex.
li. 6 cod. Venet.]; and in 1 S. xxiii. 21 incert.; [Clem.
Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 7; Herm. mand. 4, 3, 5]; éacomAayxvi-
Copat, Prov. xvii. 5; the act. omayyvitw is once used for
the Attic omAayyvevo, 2 Mace. vi.8. Cf. Bleek, Einl. ins
N. T. ed. 1, p. 75 [Eng. trans. ibid. ; ed.3 (by Mangold)
p. 90; W. 30, 33, 92 (87)].*
omAdyxvov, -ov, 7d, and (only so in the N. T.) plur.
omayxva, -wv, ra, Hebr. OM, bowels, intestines (the
heart, lungs, liver, etc.) ; a. prop.: Acts i. 18 (2
Mace. ix. 5 sq.; 4 Mace. v. 29, and in Grk. writ. fr. Hom.
down). b. in the Grk. poets fr. Aeschyl. down the
bowels were regarded as the seat of the more violent pas-
sions, such as anger and love; but by the Hebrews as the
seat of the tenderer affections, esp. kindness, benevo-
lence, compassion, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 8; W. 18];
oTroyyos
hence i. q. our heart, [tender mercies, affections, ete. (cf.
B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Bowels)]: 1 Jn. iii. 17 (on which see
kreiw); 2 Co. vi. 12; Phil. ii. 1 [here GLT Tr WH ef res
omayxva; B. 81 (71), cf. Green 109; Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.]};
omhdyxva eéous (gen. of quality [cf. W. 611 (568); so
Test. xii. Patr., test. Zab. §§ 7, 8]), a heart in which
mercy resides, [heart of mercy], Lk.i. 78; also om. oik-
reppov | Rec. -yav], Col. iii. 12; ra omddyyxva adrod TEpLo~
gorepas eis tpas éoriv, his heart is the more abundantly
devoted to you, 2 Co. vii.15; émmoOa tpas év omlayxvors
Xptorov “Ingod, in the heart [R. V. tender mercies} of
Christ, i. e. prompted by the same love as Christ Jesus,
Phil. i. 8; dvaravew ra od. tuvds, to refresh one’s soul or
heart, Philem. 7, 20; ra omddyyva jpav, my very heart,
i. e. whom I dearly love, Philem. 12 (so Darius calls his
mother and children his own bowels in Curt. 4, 14, 22.
meum corculum, Plaut. Cas. 4,4, 14; meum cor, id. Poen.
1, 2,154; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 1.c.]). The Hebr.
DM) is translated by the Sept. now oixrippoi, Ps. xxiv.
(xxv.) 6; xxxix. (xl.) 12, now @)eos, Is. xlvii. 6; once
omddyxva, Prov. xii. 10.*
omdéyyos, -ov, 6, [perh. akin is fungus ; Curtius § 575],
fr. Hom. down, sponge: Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36; Jn.
xe 29%
omodés, -ov, 7, fr. Hom. down, ashes: Heb. ix. 13; év
odkko k. o70d@ Kana, to sit clothed in sackcloth and
covered with ashes (exhibiting the tokens of grief, cf.
Jon. 11.6518. lvi. 5; lxi. 3; Jer. vi. 26; Esth.iv. 1,3;
1 Mace. iii. 47; cf. cdxxos, b.): Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x. 13.*
omopd., -as, 7, (omeipw, 2 pf. damupa), seed: 1 Pet. i. 23
[(i. q. a sowing, fig. origin, etc., fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down) ].*
omdpios, -ov, (omeipw, 2 pf. gomopa), jit for sowing,
sown, (Xen., Diod., al.) ; ra omdpipa, sown fields, growing
crops, [A.V. (exe. in Mt.) corn-fields], (Geop. 1, 12, 37):
Mita xi. 1; Mike 11-1238" Divi. 1.*
e1rdpos, -ov, 6, (ometpw, 2 pf. gamopa) ; 1. a sow-
ing (Hdt., Xen., Theophr., al.). 2. seed (used in
sowing): Mk. iv. 26 sq.; Lk. viii. 5,11; 2 Co. ix. 10° [L
Tr, 10°], (Deut. xi. 10; Theocr., Plut., al.).*
orovddte; fut. crovddow (a later form for the early
-doopa, cf. Kriiger § 40 s. v., vol. i. p. 190; B. 53 (46);
[W. 89 (85); Veitch s.v.]); 1 aor. éonovdaca; (omovdy,
q:v-); fr. Soph. and Arstph. down ; a. to hasten,
make haste: foll. by an inf. (cf. omevdo, 1), 2 Tim. iv. 9,
21; Tit. iii. 12, [al. refer these exx. to b.; but cf. Holtz-
mann, Com. on 2 Tim. ii. 15]. b. to exert one’s self,
endeavor, give diligence: foll. by an inf., Gal. ii. 10; Eph.
iv. 8; 1 Th. ii. 17; 2 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. iv. 11; 2 Pet. i.
10; iii. 14; foll. by acc. with inf. 2 Pet. i. 15.*
gmovdaios, -a, -ov, (arrovdn), fr. Hdt. down, active, dili-
gent, zealous, earnest: & tum, 2 Co. viii. 22; compar.
orrovdairepos, ibid. 17 [W. 242 sq. (227) ], 22 [W. § 35,
1]; neut. as adv. (Lat. studiosius), very diligently ficta B;
§123, 10], 2 Tim.i. 17 RG*
orovsales, adv. of the preceding; a. hastily, with
haste: compar. orovdaorépas [cf. B. 69 (61); W. § 11,
2c.], Phil. ii. 28 [W. 243 (228)]. b. diligently: 2
Tim. i.17 LT Ir WH;; Tit. iii. 13 ; earnestly, Lk. vii. 4.*
585
oTaols
onovd%, -7s, 7, (omevda, [q. v-]), fr. Hom. down; L
haste: peta orovdis, with haste, Mk. vi. 25; Lk. i. 39, (Sap.
xix. 2; Joseph. antt. 7,9, 7; Hdian. 3, 4,1; 6,4, 3). 2.
earnestness, diligence: univ. earnestness in accomplish:
ing, promoting, or striving after anything, Ro. xii. 11;
2 Co. vii. 11, 12; viii. 7sq.; &v omovd7, with diligence,
Ro. xii. 8; omovdjv évdeivucda, Heb. vi. 11; racav orov-
Ojy moveicOar (see trove, I. 3 p. 525” bot.), to give all dili-
gence, interest one’s self most earnestly, Jude 3; omovdjy
mapevaepew, 2 Pet. i. 5; on. tmép twos, earnest care
for one, 2 Co. viii. 16 (aepi twos, [Dem. 90, 10]; Diod.
1, 75).*
onupis [L WH opis, q. v-], -idos, 4, (allied to omeipa,
q-v.; hence, something wound, twisted, or folded togeth-
er), a reed basket, [i.e. a plaited basket, a lunch basket,
hamper; cf. B.D. s. v. Basket]: Mt. xv. 37; xvi.10; Mk.
vill. 8, 20; Acts ix. 25. (Hdt., Theophr., Apollod., Al-
ciphr. 3, ep. 56; al.). See apupis.*
erddtov, -ov, plur. ra orddva [Jn. vi. 19 Tdf.], and of
ardduoe (so [ Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.]; Lk. xxiv. 13;
Jn. vi.19 {not Tdf.]; Rev. xxi. 16 [Re= GL WHumrg.];
2 Mace. xi.5; xii. 10, 29; in the other pass. the gend. is
not apparent [see Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p.
157]; Kruger §19, 2, 1), (STAQ, tornut; hence prop.,
‘established,’ that which stands fast, a ‘ stated’ distance,
a ‘fixed standard’ of length), a stadium, i. e. l.a
measure of length comprising 600 Grk. feet, or 625 Ro-
man feet, or 125 Roman paces (Plin. h. n. 2, 23 (21), 85),
hence one eighth of a Roman mile [i. e. 606% Eng. feet
(about 15 m. less than one fifth of a kilom.)]; the space
or distance of that length [A.V.a furlong]: [Mt. xiv.
24 Tr txt. WH txt.|; Lk. xxiv. 13; Jn.vi.19; xi. 18;
Rey. xiv. 20; xxi. 16. 2. a race-course, i.e. place
in which contests in running were held; the one who
outstripped the rest, and reached the goal first, receiv-
ing the prize: 1 Co. ix. 24 [here A.V. race]. Courses
of this description were to be found in most of the larger
Grk. cities, and were, like that at Olympia, 600 Greek
feet in length. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Stadium; Grundt
in Schenkel s. v., vol. v. 375 sq.; [BB. DD.s.v. Games ].*
otduvos, -ou(d), 7 (fr. iornue [cf. Curtius § 216]), among
the Greeks an earthen jar, into which wine was drawn off
for keeping (a process called xaracrapvifew), but also
used for other purposes. The Sept. employ it in Ex.
xvi. 83 as the rendering of the Hebr. n3¥3¥, that little
jar [or “pot”] in which the manna was kept, laid up in
the ark of the covenant; hence in Heb. ix. 4, and Philo
de congr. erud. grat. § 18. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 400;
[W. 23].*
craciacths, -0v, 6, (craciatw), the author of or a
participant in an insurrection: Mk. xv. 7 LT TrWH
({Diod. fr. 10, 11,1 p.171, 6 Dind.; Dion. Hal. ii. 1199];
Joseph. antt. 14, 1, 3; Ptolem.). The earlier Greeks
used oractatns [Moeris s. v.].*
ordots, -ews, 7, (Larne) ; 1. a standing, station,
state: éxew ardow, to stand, exist, have stability, Lat. locum
habere, [R. V. is yet standing], Heb. ix. 8 (Polyb. 5, 5,
3). 2 fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, an insurrection
oTaThp
(cf. Germ. Aufstand): Mk. xv. 7; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts
xix. 40 [see ojpepov, sub fin.]; kweiv ordow [LT Tr
WH ordcets] rivi, [a mover of insurrections among i. e.]
against [cf. W. 208 (196)] one, Acts xxiv. 5. 3.
strife, dissension, (Aeschyl. Pers. 738; Diog. Laért. 3,
61): Acts xv. 2; xxiii. 7, 10.*
orartp, -npos, 6, (fr. trrnpt, to place in the scales, weigh
out [i. e. ‘the weigher’ (Vanicek p. 1126)]), a stater, a
coin; in the N. T. a silver stater equiv. to four Attic
or two Alexandrian drachmas, a Jewish shekel (see
diSpaxpoyv): Mt. xvii. 27.*
oravpés, -0d, 6, [fr. tornus (root sta); cf. Lat. stauro,
Eng. staff (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.); Curtius § 216;
Vanicek p. 1126]; 1. an upright stake, esp. a pointed
one, (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., Xen.). 2. a cross; a.
the well-known instrument of most cruel and ignomin-
ious punishment, borrowed by the Greeks and Romans
from the Pheenicians; to it were affixed among the
Romans, down to the time of Constantine the Great, the
guiltiest criminals, particularly the basest slaves, rob-
bers, the authors and abetters of insurrections, and oc-
casionally in the provinces, at the arbitrary pleasure of
the governors, upright and peaceable men also, and even
Roman citizens themselves; cf. Win. RWB.s. v. Kreuzi-
gung; Merz in Herzog ed. 1 [(cf. Schaff-Herzog) also
Schultze in Herzog ed. 2], s. v. Kreuz; Keim iii. p. 409
sqq. [Eng. trans. vi. 138; BB.DD. s. vv. Cross, Cru-
cifixion; O. Zéckler, Das Kreuz Christi (Giitersloh,
1875); Eng. trans. Lond. 1878; Fulda, Das Kreuz u. d.
Kreuzigung (Bresl. 1878); Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah,
ii. 582 sqq.]. This horrible punishment the innocent
Jesus also suffered: Mt. xxvii. 32, 40, 42; Mk. xv. 21, 30,
82; Lk. xxiii. 26; Jn. xix. 17, 19, 25, 31; Col. ii. 14; Heb.
xii. 2; @dvaros oravpod, Phil. ii. 8; 7d aiua rod orravpod,
blood shed on the cross, Col. i. 20. b. i. q. the cruci-
fizion which Christ underwent: Gal. v. 11 (on which see
oxavdaXoy, sub fin.) ; Eph. ii. 16 ; with the addition of rod
Xptcrod, 1 Co. i. 17; the saving power of his crucifixion,
Phil. iii. 18 (on which see ¢ypos, fin.) 5 Gal. vi. 14; ro
oTavp@ Tov Xpiorov dSiokeoOar, to encounter persecution
on account of one’s avowed belief in the saving efficacy
of Christ’s crucifixion, Gal. vi. 12; 6 Adyos 6 rod oraupod,
the doctrine concerning the saving power of the death
on the cross endured by Christ, 1 Co. i. 18. The judi-
cial usage which compelled those condemned to cruci-
fixion themselves to carry the cross to the place of
punishment (Plut. de sera numinis vindict. c. 9; Artem.
oneir. 2, 56, cf. Jn. xix. 17), gave rise to the proverbial
expression aipew or AapBavew or Baoratew rov oravpov
avrov, which was wont to be used of those who on behalf
of God’s cause do not hesitate cheerfully and manfully
to bear persecutions, troubles, distresses, — thus recall-
ing the fate of Christ and the spirit in which he encoun-
tered it (cf. Bleck, Synop. Erkl. der drei ersten Evangg.
i. p. 439 sq.): Mt. x. 38; xvi. 24; Mk. viii. 34; x. 21
TR Lin br.]; xv. 21; Lk. ix. 23; xiv. 27.*
oravpdw, -@; fut. cravpoow; 1 aor. éoravpwoa; Pass.,
pres. gravpoua; perfect eoratpopa; 1 aor. éoravpa-
586
oTEAAW
Onv; (araupés, q. V-); 1. to stake, drive down stakes:
Thue. 7, 25, 6 [here of Supaxoatot ¢oravpwoay, which the
Scholiast renders oravpovs xarénn€ar]. 2. to for-
tify with driven stakes, to palisade: a place, Thue. 6,
100; Diod. 3. to crucify (Vulg. crucifigo): twa, a-
prop.: Mt. xx.19; xxiii. 34; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 22, [23], 26,
31, 35,38; xxviii.5; Mk. xv. 13-15, 20, 24 sq. 27; xvi.
6; Lk. xxiii. 21, 23,33; xxiv. 7,20; Jn. xix. 6, 10, 15 sq.
18, 20, 23,41; Acts ii. 36; iv.10; 1 Co.i. 13, 23; ii. 2,
[8]; 2Co. xiii.4; Gal. iii. 1; Rev. xi. 8, (Add. to Esth.
viii. 13 [34]; for nA, to hang, Esth. vii. 9. Polyb. 1, 86,
4; Joseph. antt. 2, 5,4; 17,10,10; Artem. oneir. 2, 53
and 56; in native Grk. writ. dvacravpotvy is more com-
mon). b. metaph.: tiv odpxa, to crucify the flesh,
destroy its power utterly (the nature of the fig. implying
that the destruction is attended with intense pain [but
note the aor.]), Gal. v. 24; éoratpopai tu, and éorav-
poral poi 71, I have been crucified to something and it has
been crucified to me, so that we are dead to each other,
all fellowship and intercourse between us has ceased,
Gal. vi. 14. [Comp.: dva-, cv(v)- cravpda.]*
orapvan, -7s, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 13), grapes,
a bunch of grapes: Mt. vii. 16; Lk. vi. 44; Rev. xiv. 18
[ef. Sept. as referred to s. v. Bérpus ].*
ordxus, -vos [cf. B. 14], 6, [connected w. the r, sta,
tornue; Curtius p. 721], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for n73w,
an ear of corn (or growing grain): Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii.
3 Vive 2s el keva el.
Urdxvs, -vos, 6, [ef. the preceding word], Stachys, the
name of a man (cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 174]: Ro.
XVioj ose
oréyn, -ns, }, (aréyw to cover), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt.
down, a roof: of a house, Mk. ii. 4; eicépyeoOar ind roy
oteyny tivds [see eioépyouat, 1 p. 187° bot.], Mt. viii. 8;
Lk. vii. 6.*
oréyo; [allied w. Lat. tego, toga, Eng. deck, thatch,
ete.; Curtius § 155; Fick Pt. iii. 590]; to cover; 1.
to protect or keep by covering, to preserve: Soph., Plat.,
Plut., al. 2. to cover over with silence; to keep se-
cret; to hide, conceal: rapa érn, Eur. Electr. 273; ron
Adyov, Polyb. 8, 14, 5; for other exx. see Passow s. v. 1 b.
B.; [L. and S. s.v. Il. 2]; papds od durnoerar Mbyov oré-
a, Sir. viii. 17; hence 4 dydmyn mavra oréyet, 1 Co. xiii.
7, is explained by some, love covereth [so R. V. mrg.], i. e.
hides and excuses, the errors and faults of others; but it
is more appropriately rendered (with other interpreters)
beareth. For oréyo means 3. by covering to keep
off something which threatens, to bear up against, hold
out against, and so to endure, bear, forbear, (ras év8elas,
Philo in Flace. § 9; many exx. fr. Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl.
down are given by Passow s.v. 2; [L. and S.s.v. A.
esp. 3)))3) 1 Conixs125) xii 7574 Whoa oe
otetpos, -a, -ov, (i. q. oréppos, orepeds q. v-; whence
Germ. starr, Lat. sterilis), hard, stiff; of men and ani
mals, barren: of a woman who does not conceive, Lk,
i. 7,36; xxiii. 29; Gal. iv. 27. (Hom., Theocr., Orph.,
Anthol.; Sept. for Ty mpy.)*
oréhkw: (Germ. stellen; [cf. Grk. orndy, oradd, ete.;
oreupa
Lat. sélocus (locus) ; Eng. stall, ete.; Curtius § 218; Fick
Pt. i. 246; Pt. iv. 274]); fr. Hom. down; 1. to set,
place, set in order, arrange; to fit out, to prepare, equip ;
Mid. pres. oréAAopar, to prepare one’s self, to fit out for
one’s self; to fit out for one’s own use: oredddpevot TodTO
py ts etc. arranging, providing for, this ete. i. e. taking
care [A. V. avoiding], that no one etc. 2 Co. viii. 20 [ef.
W. § 45, 6a.; B. 292 (252)]. 2. to bring together,
contract, shorten: ta ioria, Hom. Od. 3, 11; 16, 353; also
in mid. Il. 1, 433; to diminish, check, cause to cease; pass.
to cease to exist: Bovowevn Thy AUmNY Tod avdpds aTadjvat,
Joseph. antt. 5,8, 3; 6 xeydv eorddn, ibid. 9, 10, 2; mid.
to remove one’s self, withdraw one’s self, to depart, foll. by
ar6é with gen. of the pers., to abstain from familiar inter-
course with one, 2 Th.iii. 6. [Come.: dzo-, ¢&-aro-, ovv-
arro-, S.a-, émt-, kata-, ov(v)-, dro-oTé Ao. | *
oréppa, -ros, Td, (orepa, pf. pass. €orewpat, to crown,
to bind round), a fillet, a garland, put upon victims:
Acts xiv. 13 [cf. W. 630 (585); B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gar-
lands]. (From Hom. down.) *
oTEvaypos, -0v, 6, (oTevafw), a groaning, a sigh: Acts
vii. 34; Ro. viii. 26; see dddAnros. ([Pind.], Trage.,
Plat., Joseph., Plut., al.; Sept. for 7NIs8, TPs, p83.) *
otevatw; 1 aor. éorévaka; (oréva, akin is Germ. stéhnen
[ef. sten-torian; Vaniéek p. 1141; Fick Pt. i. 249]); to
sigh, to groan: 2 Co. v. 2, 4, [cf. W. 353 (331)]; Heb. xiii.
17; év éavrois, within ourselves, i. e. in our souls, in-
wardly, Ro. viii. 23; to pray sighing, Mk. vii. 34; xara
tivos, Jas. v. 9 [here R.V. murmur]. (Sept.; Trage.,
Dem., Plut., al.) [Comep.: dva-, cu(v)- orevago. Syn.
ef. KNalo, fin. |*
orevés, -7, -dv, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. for
I, narrow, strait: widn, Mt. vii. 18, [14 (here L Tr br.
mvAn)]; Lk. xiii. 24.*
orevo-Xapew, -@: (crevdypos; and this fr. orevds, and
xGpos a space) ; 1. intrans. to be in a strait place
(Machon in Athen. 13 p. 582 b.); to be narrow (Is. xlix.
19). 2. trans. to straiten, compress, cramp, reduce
to straits, (Vulg. angustio), (Diod., Leian., Hdian., al.;
[Sept. Josh. xvii. 15; Judg.,xvi. 16; Is. xxviii. 20; 4
Mace. xi. 11]): pass. trop. of one sorely ‘straitened’ in
spirit, 2 Co. iv. 8; od orevoywpetode ev npiv, ye are not
straitened in us, ample space is granted you in our souls,
i. e. we enfold you with large affection, 2 Co. vi. 12; ore-
voxapeiabe ev Tois omAdyxvas bpar, ye are straitened in
your own affections, so that there is no room there for
us, i. e. you do not grant a place in your heart for love
toward me, ibid.*
orevoxwpia, -as, 7, (orevdyapos), narrowness of place,
a narrow space, (Is. viii. 22 [al. take this as metaph. ];
Thuc., Plat., al.); metaph. dire calamity, extreme afflic-
tion, [A. V. distress, anguish]: Ro. ii. 9; vill. 85; 2 Co.
vi. 4; xii 10. (Deut. xxviii. 53, 55, 57; Sir. x. 26; [Sap.
v. 3]; 1 Mace. ii. 53; xiii. 3; Polyb. 1, 67, 1; [ Artemid.
oneir. 8, 14]; Ael. v. h. 2, 41; [al.].) [Cf Trench § lv.]*
orepeds, -d, -dv, [Vaniéek p. 1131; Curtius § 222], fr.
Hom. down, firm, solid, compact, hard, rigid: ios, Hom.
Od. 19, 494; strong, firm, immovable, Oe~édtos, 2 Tim. ii.
587
Jjirm;
otepavd a)
19; tpopn, solid food, Heb. v. 12, 14; oTepewrepa tpodn,
Diod. 2, 4; Epictet. diss. 2, 16, 39; trop., in a bad
sense, cruel, stiff, stubborn, hard; often so in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down: kpadin crepewrépn Aidoto, Od. 23, 103; in
a good sense, firm, steadfast: rh mloret, as respects faith,
firm of faith [cf. W. § 31,6 a.], 1 Pet. v. 9 (see oTepeda,
fin.).*
orepedw, -@: 1 aor. €orepéwoa; impf. 3 pers. plur. éore-
peovvro; 1 aor. pass. éorepewOnv; (orepeds); to make
solid, make firm, strengthen, make strong: tid, the body
of any one, Acts iii. 16; ras Baces, pass. Acts iii. 7;
pass. 7H mires, as respects faith (see orepeds, fin.), Acts
xvi. 5. (Sept.; Xen., Diod.) *
oTEPEMpA, -Tos, Td, (oTEped@), that which has been made
a. (Vulg. jirmamentum) the firmament; so
Sept. for yp}, the arch of the sky, which in early times
was thought to be solid, Gen. i. 6-8; Ezek. i. 22-26;
Sir. xliii. 1, [ef. B.D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Firmament];
a fortified place, 1 Esdr. viii. 78 (80). b. that which
Jurnishes a foundation; on which a thing rests firmly, sup-
port: Aristot. partt. an. 2, 9, 12 p. 655%, 22; kvpuos orepé-
apa pov, Ps. xvii. (xviii) 3. c. firmness, stead fast
ness: ths miatews, Col. ii. 5 [some take it here metaph.
in a military sense, solid front; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.
(per contra Meyer) ].*
Zrepaves, -a [cf. B. 20 (18) ], 6, Stephanas, a Christian
of Corinth: 1 Co. i. 16; xvi. 15, 17.*
otépavos, -ov, 6, (credo [to put round; cf. Curtius
§ 224]), Sept. for Mwy, [fr. Hom. down], a crown (with
which the head is encircled) ; a. prop. as a mark
of royal or (in general) exalted rank [such pass. in the
Sept. as 2S. xii. 30; 1 Chr. xx. 2; Ps. xx. (xxi.) 4; Ezek.
xxi. 26; Zech. vi. 11, 14, (yet cf. 2 §.i.10 Compl, Lag.),
perhaps justify the doubt whether the distinction betw.
otepavos and diadnua (q.v-) was strictly observed in
Hellenistic Grk.]: Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv.17; Jn. xix. 2,
5; Rev. iv. 4, 10; vi. 2; ix. 7; xiv. 14; with a gen. of the
material, durépeov dadexa, Rev. xii.1; the wreath or gar-
land which was given as a prize to victors in the public
games [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Games]: 1 Co. ix. 25, cf. 2 Tim.
ii. 5. b. metaph. a. the eternal blessedness which
will be given asa prize to the genuine servants of God and
Christ: 6 ris Suxatvooivns orepavos, the crown (wreath)
which is the reward of righteousness, 2 Tim. iv.8; with
an epexeget. gen. in the phrases AapBaveo Oat, diddvae tov
arépavov tis Cons, equiv. to ry Conv ws Tov orepavoy,
Jas.i.12; Rev. ii. 103 kopi¢ecOat tov ths SdEns orepavor,
1 Pet. v. 4; AaBeiv r. répavdy Twos, to cause one to fail
of the promised and hoped for prize, Rev. iii. 11. B.
that which is an ornament and honor to one: so of per-
sons, Phil. iv. 1; orép. kavynoews (see kavynors), 1 Th.
ii. 19, (Prov. xii. 4; xvi. 31; xvii. 6, etc.).*
Lrédavos, -ov, 6, Stephen, one of the seven ‘ deacons’
of the church at Jerusalem who was stoned to death by
the Jews: Acts vi. 5, 8sq.; vii. 59; viii. 2; xi.19; xxii.
20.*
orehavea, -: 1 aor. eorepaveca; pf. pass. ptep. éore-
avepévos } (arépavos) ; fr. Hom. down ; a. to en:
atiQos
circle with a crawn, to crown: the victor in a contest, 2
Tim. ii. 5. b. univ. to adorn, to honor: twa dSd&y k.
rin, Leb. ii. 7, 9, fr. Ps. viii. 6.*
orf0os, -ous, td, (fr. tornus; that which stands out,
is prominent [Etym. Magn. 727,19 dere €ornkev doddev-
rov]), fr. Hom. down, the breast: Jn. xiii. 25; xxi. 20,
(cf. eédmos, 1); Rev. xv. 6. rimrew els 76 or 00s or TUNT.
ro or7Oos, of mourners (see kémrw), Lk. xvili. 13; xxiii.
48.*
orhxo; (an inferior Grk. word, derived fr. éornxa, pf.
of tornus; see B. 48 (41) ; LW. 24, 26 (25) ; WH. App.
p- 169; Veitch s.v. éornxw; Mullach s. v. oréxw (p.
299)]); to stand: Mk. [iii 31 T Tr WH]; xi. 25 [(cf.
érav c. B.)]; In. i. 26 Lmrg. T Trtxt. WH; [Rev. xii.
4 WH (but see below)]; with an emphasis, fo stand
Jjirm; trop. to persist, persevere, [A.V. stand fast]: absol.
to persevere in godliness and rectitude, 2 Th. ii. 15; &
xupie, in one’s fellowship with the Lord, Phil. iv. 1; 1
Th. iii. 8 [(cf. édv, I. 2 b.)]; ev tH wioret, 1 Co. xvi. 13 ;
év évi mvevpart, Phil. i. 27; to keep one’s standing (opp.
to (vyo évéxopuat), TH edevOepia, maintain your allegiance
to freedom [ef. W. § 31,1 k.; B. §133, 12; but L T Tr
WH take or. here absol.; cf. Bp. Lehtft. ad loc.], Gal.
v. 1; to stand erect, trop. not to sin (opp. to mimrew i. q.
to sin), r@ Kkupio, dat. commodi [W. u. s.], Ro. xiv. 4.
[In Jn. viii. 44 (ev 7H} dAnOeia od«(x) eotnxev) WH read
the impf. éornxev (where others adopt éornkev fr. iornpe),
owing to the preceding ovk (T WH after codd. 8 B* D
Letc.); see Westcott, Com. on Jn. l.c. ‘ Additional Note’;
WH. Introd. § 407. But such an impf. is nowhere else
found (yet cf. Rev. xii. 4 WH), and respecting confu-
sion in the ancient use of the breathings, and the inter-
change of ov« and ovx, see ov ad init. and reff. there, esp.
Tdf. Proleg. p. 90; moreover, the familiar pf. (pres.) of
fornpe thoroughly suits the context; see forms, I. 2 d.]
({Sept., Ex. xiv. 13 Alex., Compl.; 1 K. viii. 11]; Alex.
Aphr. probl. 1, 49 var.; eccles. writ.) *
ornprypos, -00, 6, (arnpitw), firm condition, steadfast-
ness: of mind, 2 Pet. iii. 17. (of a standing still, Diod.
Uns elite mire jop 7K5 Gl)
ormpite; fut. ornpiéw (as in the best Grk. writ.), and
ornpiow (in 2 Th. iii. 3 cod. Vat., as in Jer. xvii. 5; ornptd,
Jer. iii. 12; xxiv. 6; Ezek. xiv. 8; Sir. vi. 37 [see reff.
below]); 1 aor. éeornpiEa, and éeornpica (ornpicov, Lk.
xxii. 32 LT Tr WH; Rev. iii. 2G@LTTr WH, as in Judg.
xix. 5, 8; Ezek. vi. 2; Prov. xv. 25, ete.; ef. [ WH. App.
p- 170]; Bttm. Ausf. Sprehl.i. p.372; B. 36 (32); Kiihner
§ 343, i. p. 910; [Veitch s. v.]); Pass., pf. éorjpeypac; 1
aor.eornpixOnv; (ornpeyé a support ; akin to orepeds, q. V-,
oreppés, and Germ. stdérken; cf. Curtius § 222); fr. Hom.
down; a. to make stable, place firmly, set fast, fix:
eornptixrat (ydoua), is fixed, Lk. xvi. 26; ornpitw rd mpé-
coror, to set one’s face steadfastly, keep the face turned
(Ezek. vi. 2; xiii. 17; xv. 7; etc.) rod ropeverOat ets with
an ace. of place, a Hebr. expression (see mpécwmoy, 1 b.
[and cf. B. § 140, 16 8.; W. 33]), Lk. ix. 51. b. to
strengthen, make firm; trop. (not so in prof. auth.) to
render constant, confirm, one’s mind [A. V. establish] :
588
oTOLyEtov
twa, Lk. xxii. 32; [Acts xviii. 23 where R G émornp.];
Ro. i. 11; xvi. 25; 1 Th. iii 2; 2 Th. iii.35 1 -Pet.-v. 1€
[here Rec. has 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. ornpifa]; Rev.
iii. 2; ryv xapdiav twos, 1 Th. iii. 13; Jas. v. 8; revd €v
rim, 2'Th. ii. 17; 2 Pet. i. 12. [Comp.: ém-ornpico.]*
ottBds, -ddos, 7, (fr. ore(8@ ‘to tread on,’ 2 aor. éo7t-
Boy) ; a. a spread or layer of leaves, reeds, rushes,
soft leafy twigs, straw, ete., serving for a bed (Hesych.
aTiBds* amd paBdar } xAwpav xdprav otpaats k. PvAd@Y) 5
so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. b. that which is
used in making a bed of this sort. a branch full of leaves,
soft foliage: so Mk. xi. 8 LT Tr WH for orowBadas, an
orthographical error [see Tdf.’s note ad loc. ].*
ottypa, -ros, 7d, (fr. ori¢w to prick; [cf. Lat. stimulus,
etc.; Germ. stechen, Eng. stick, sting, ete.; Curtius §226)),
a mark pricked in or branded upon the body. Ace. to
ancient oriental usage, slaves and soldiers bore the name
or stamp of their master or commander branded or
pricked (cut) into their bodies to indicate what master
or general they belonged to, and there were even some
devotees who stamped themselves in this way with the
token of their gods (ef. Deyling, Observv. iii. p. 423 sqq.);
hence ra ortypara rod (kupiov so Rec.) "Inaod, the marks
of (the Lord) Jesus, which Paul in Gal. vi. 17 says he
bears branded on his body, are the traces left there by
the perils, hardships, imprisonments, scourgings, endured
by him for the cause of Christ, and which mark him
as Christ’s faithful and approved votary, servant, soldier,
[see Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. ¢.]. (Hdt. 7, 233; Ar-
istot., Ael., Plut., Leian., al.) *
oTLyph, -7s, 7, (oTi¢@; see oriypa, init.),a point: oreyph
xpovov, a point (i. e. a moment) of time (Cic. pro Flacco
c. 25; pro Sest. 24; Caes. b. c. 2,14; al.), Lk iv. 5.
(Antonin. 2,17; Plut. puer. educ. 17; Is. xxix. 5; 2
Mace. ix. 11.) *
otitBe ; f0 shine, glisten: of garments (as in Hom. Il.
3, 392; 18, 596; cf. Plat. Phaedo 59 p. 110 d.), Mk. ix.
3.*
ood, -Gs, 7, @ portico, a covered colonnade where peo-
ple can stand or walk protected from the weather and
the heat of the sun: Jn. v. 2; crod SoAopevos, a “porch”
or portico built by Solomon in the eastern part of the
temple (which in the temple’s destruction by the Baby-
lonians was left uninjured, and remained down to the
times of king Agrippa, to whom the care of the temple
was intrusted by the emperor Claudius, and who on
account of its antiquity did not dare to demolish and
build it anew; so Josephus relates, antt. 20, 9, 7; [but
on ‘Solomon’s Porch’ cf. B.D. s.v. Temple (Solomon’s
Temple, fin.)]): Jn. x. 23; Acts iii. 11; v. 12.*
oroBds, -ddos, 7, see ortBds, b.
[Zroikds, so Lchm. Tdf. for Srwikds, q. v.]
orotxetov, -ov, 75, (fr. oroiyos a row, rank, series;
hence prop. that which belongs to any oroixos, that of
which a oroiyos is composed; hence), any first thing,
Jrom which the others belonging to some series or composite
whole take their rise; an element, first principle. The
word denotes spec. 1. the letters of the alphabet as
-
TOY Ew
the elements of speech, not however the written
characters (which are called ypdypara), but the
spoken sounds: orotyciov paris paovi) dovvOeros, Plat.
defin. p. 414e.; 7b pa 7d crovxeiov, id. Crat. p. 426 d.;
aTotxetov €ort havi adiaiperos, ov maca dé, GAN €& Fs Té-
gue cuveri yiyverOa povy, Aristot. poet. 20, p. 1456,
22. 2. the elements from which all things have come,
the material causes of the universe (€ore Sé crotxeiov, e&
ob mporov yiverar Ta yuwdpeva kal eis 6 ZrxaTov dvadverat
-++70 rip, TO Vdwp, 6 anp, 7 yn, Diog. Laért. Zeno 69,
137) ; so very often fr. Plat. down, as in Tim. p. 48 b.;
in the Scriptures: Sap. vii. 17; xix. 17; 2 Pet. iii. 10,
12. 3. the heavenly bodies, either as parts of the
‘heavens, or (as others think) because in them the ele-
ments of man’s life and destiny were supposed to reside;
so in the earlier eccles. writ.: Ep. ad Diogn. 7, 2; Justin.
M. dial. c. Tryph. 23; ra ovpdma orotyeia, id. apol. 2, 5;
orotxeta Geov, created by God, Theoph. Ant. ad Autol.
1,4; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, pp. 66-77. Hence
some interpreters infelicitously understand Paul’s phrase
Ta oToLXela TOD KOcpov, Gal. iv. 3, 9; Col. ii. 8, 20, of the
heavenly bodies, because times and seasons, and so sa-
cred seasons, were regulated by the course of the sun
and moon; yet in unfolding the meaning of the passage
on the basis of this sense they differ widely. 4.
the elements, rudiments, primary and fundamental princi-
ples (cf. our ‘alphabet’ or ‘a bc’) of any art, science, or
discipline; e. g. of mathematics, as in the title of Euclid’s
well-known work; oro.yeia mpata Kai péytota xpnoris
motetas, Isocr. p. 18 a.; THs dpetns, Plut.de puer. educ.
16, 2; many exx. are given in Passow s. v. 4, ii. p. 1550";
[ef. L. and 8. s. v. II. 3 and 4]. In the N.T. we have
Ta OT. THS Gpxns TOV Noyiwy Tov Geod (see apyn, 1 b. p. 76”
bot.), Heb. v. 12, such as are taught to vnmcos, ib. 13; ra
oToLxela Tov Kocpov, the rudiments with which mankind
like vymoe were indoctrinated before the time of Christ,
i.e. the elements of religious training, or the ceremonial
precepts common alike to the worship of Jews and of
Gentiles, Gal. iv. 3, 9, (and since these requirements on
account of the difficulty of observing them are to be
regarded as a yoke —cf. Acts xv. 10; Gal. v. 1 — those
who rely upon them are said to be dedovkwpévor bmd Ta
or.); spec. the ceremonial requirements esp. of Jewish
tradition, minutely set forth by theosophists and false
teachers, and fortified by specious arguments, Col. ii. 8,
20. The phrase ra crowxyeta tod xocpou is fully dis-
cussed by Schneckenburger in the Theolog. Jahrbiicher
for 1848, Pt. iv. p. 445 sqq.; Neander in the Deutsche
Zeitschrift f. Christ]. Wissenschaft for 1850, p. 205
sqq.; Kienlen in Reuss u. Cunitz’s Beitrige zu d. theolog.
Wissenschaften, vol. ii. p. 133 sqq.; Z. Schaubach, Com-
ment. qua exponitur quid orotyeia rod Kéopov in N. T.
sibi velint. (Meining. 1862).*
oroixéw, -; fut. croryjow; (aroixos a row, series); a.
to proceed in a row, go in order: Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 345
metaph. to go on prosperously, to turn out well: of things,
Eccl. xi. 6 for Ww. b. to walk: with a local dat.
(W. § 31, 1a. cf. p. 219 (205); yet cf. B. § 133, 22 b.],
589
oTOLa
Tois ixveot Tivos, in the steps or one, i. e. follow his ex-
ample, Ro. iv. 12; to direct one’s life, to live, with a dat.
of the rule [B. u.s.], ef mvedpare .. . oro.x@pev, if the
Holy Spirit animates us [see (do, I. 3 sub fin.], let us
exhibit that control of the Spirit in our life, Gal. v. 25;
T® Kavou, acc. to the rule, Gal. vi. 16; 7 avt@ (where
Rec. adds xavdm), Phil. iii. 16 [W. $43, 5 d.; ef. B. § 140,
18 fin.], (76 mapadetypari twos, Clem. hom. 10, 15); with
a ptep. denoting the manner of acting, crotyets r. vopov
pvidooor, so walkest as to keep the law [A. V. walkest
orderly, keeping ete.], Acts xxi. 24. [On the word and
its constr. see Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 142. Comp.:
au(v)- arotyéa. | *
orodh, -is, 7), (orédXw [q. v.] to prepare, equip, 2 pf.
€aToAa) ; 1. an equipment (Aeschyl.). 2. an
equipment in clothes, clothing; spec. a loose outer garment
for men which extended to the feet [cf. Eng. stole (Dict. of
Chris. Antiq. s. v.)], worn by kings (Jon. iii. 6), priests,
and persons of rank: Mk. xii. 88; xvi.5; Lk. xv. 22;
xx. 46; Rev. vi.11; vii. 9, 13, [14*, 14° Ree; xxii. 14
LT Tr WH]. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. chiefly
forimjs:) » (Cf. Trench. §-l5)*
ordpa, -ros, 76, (apparently i. q. réua, with o prefixed,
fr. réuv, réroua, therefore prop. ‘cutting’ [or ‘cut’; so
Etym. Magn. 728, 18; al.‘ calling’, ete.; but doubtful,
ef. Curtius § 226 b.; Vanitek p. 1141 and reff.]); fr.
Hom. down; Hebr. 13; the mouth; 1. prop. the
mouth as a part of the body: of man, Jn. xix. 29; Acts
xi. 8; Rev. i.16; iii. 16,and often; of animals, —as of
a fish, Mt. xvii. 27; of a horse, Jas. iii. 3; Rev. ix. 17;
of a serpent, Rev. xii. 15 sq.; xiii.5; the jaws of a lion,
2 Tim. iv. 17; Heb. xi. 33; Rev. xiii. 2. Since the
thoughts of man’s soul find verbal utterance by his
mouth, xapdia (‘the heart’ or soul) and oroyua ‘the
mouth’ are distinguished: Mt. xii. 34; xv. 8 Ree. fr. Is.
xxix. 13; Ro. x.8,10; in phrases chiefly of a Hebra-
istic character, the mouth (as the organ of speech) is
mentioned in connection with words and speech, Mt. xxi.
16 (fr. Ps. viii. 3), and words are said to proceed ek rod
ordparos, Mt. iv. 4 (fr. Deut. viii. 3); Lk. iv. 22; Eph. iv.
29; Col. iii. 8; Jas. ii. 10; 7d oropa dade? rt, Jude 16;
on the Hebr. phrase dvolyewv TO OTOpa, See avolya, p. 48*
bot. 4 dvoukts rod or. Eph. vi. 19; ordua mpds o7opa
Aadjoa (MI-O¥ 7D 139, Num. xii. 8) lit. mouth (turned)
to mouth, fA. Vie face to face], 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 14, (76
ordéya mpos 7d oropua, of a kiss, Xen. mem. 2, 6, 32);
God or the Holy Spirit is said to speak dca rod ordpards
rwos [cf. B. 183 (159)], Lk. i. 70; Actsi.16; ii. 18, 21;
iv. 25; or a person is said to hear a thing da ordparés tr.
Acts xv. 7; or dé rod or. t. from his own mouth i. e. what
he has just said, Lk. xxii. 71; or ex t. or. Acts xxii. 14;
Onpevoat Te ek T. OT. T- Lk. xi. 545 10 mvedpa Tod ot. [the
breath of his mouth, see rvebpa, 1 b.], 2 Th. ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii.
(xxxiii.) 6, ef. Is. xi. 4); 1) popdaia rod or. a fig. por-
traying the destructive power of the words of Christ
the judge, Rev. ii. 16; dddos or weddos ev rG or., 1 Pet.
ii. 22 and Rev. xiv. 5, (fr. Is. lili. 9); ordwa is put for
‘statements’, declarations, in Mt. xviii. 16 and 2 Co. xiii,
TTOMAYOS
1, (Deut. xix. 15); Lk. xix. 22 (Ecel. viii. 2). deddvae
ri oréua, apt forms of speech (as distinguished from
the substance of speech, 4 copia), Lk. xxi. 15; oropa
for one who has begun (or is about) to speak, Ro. iii. 19
(Ps. evi. (cvii.) 42; ef. may yorv and raéoa yhoo, Phil.
ii. 10 sq. fr. Is. xlv. 23); metaph. the earth is said to
open its mouth and xaramivew 71, Rev. xii. 16. 2.
Like Lat. acies, oréua payaipas, the edge of the sword
(a3n-d, Gen. xxxiv. 26; [Josh. xix. 48; Jer. xxi. 7,
ete.]; Judg. xviii. 27, etc.; 2S. xv. 14 [but in the last
two pass. the Sept. render the Hebr. phrase by or.
poudaias, which (together with or. €ipovs) is the more
common translation; cf. W. 18, 30; B. 320 (274) n.]):
Lk. xxi. 24; Heb. xi. 34, (hence dicropos, q. Vv. 3 DDN of
a sword, 2S. ii. 26; xi. 25).
ordpaxos, -ov, 6, (oTOpa, q. V.); 1. the throat:
Hom., al. 2. an opening, orifice, esp. of the stomach,
Aristot. 3. in later writ. (as Plut., al.) the stomach:
1 Tim. v. 23.*
otparela, -as, , (orparevw), an expedition, campaign;
military service, warfare: Paul likens his contest with the
difficulties that oppose him in the discharge of his apo-
stolic duties to a warfare, 2 Co. x. 4 (where Tdf. orparias,
see his note); 1 Tim. i. 18. [(Hdt., Xen., ‘al.)]*
oTparevpa, -Tos, To, (otparevw), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; a. an army: Mt. xxii. 7; Rev. ix. 16; xix.
14 [cf. W. § 59, 4a.], 19. b. a band of soldiers [R.V.
soldiers]: Acts xxiii. 10, 27. ce. body-guard, guards-
men: plur. Lk. xxiii. 11 [R. V. soldiers ].*
otpatevw: Mid., pres. orparevouar; 1 aor. subjune. 2
pers. sing. orparevon (1 Tim. i. 18 T Tr txt. WH mrg.);
(orparos [related to otpavva, q. v.], an encampment, an
army); fr. Hdt. down; to make a military expedition, to
lead soldiers to war or to battle, (spoken of a commander);
to do military duty, be on active service, be a soldier; in
the N. T. only in the mid. (Grk. writ. use the act. and
the depon. mid. indiscriminately; cf. Passow s. v. 1 fin. ;
[L. and S. s.v. I. 2]): prop. of soldiers, Lk. iii. 14; 1 Co.
ix.7; 2Tim.ii.4; to fight, [A. V. war]: trop. of the
conflicts of the apostolic office, 2 Co. x. 3; with a kin-
dred ace. [W. § 32, 2; B.§ 131, 5], ray xadyv orpareiay,
1 Tim. i. 18 (iepav x. evyery orpareiay orparevoacda
mept THs evaeBetas, 4 Macc. ix. 23); of passions that dis-
quiet the soul, Jas. iv. 1; 1 Pet. ii. 11. [Comp.: dvm-
orparevopat. | *
otparnyds, -o0, 6, (orparés and dyw), fr. Hdt. down,
Sept. chiefly for }i9 [only plur. 0320]; 1. the
commander of an army. 2. in the N. T. a civic
commander, a governor, (the name of the duumviri or
highest magistrates in the municipia and colonies; they
had the power of administering justice in the less im-
portant cases; of tis oAews otpatnyot, Artem. oneir. 4,
49; of civil magistrates as early as Hdt. 5, 38; [see reff.
in Meyer on Acts xvi. 20; L. and S. s. v. II. 28q.; ef.
Farrar, St. Paul, i. excurs. xvi.]): plur. [R. V. magis-
trates (after A.V.), with mrg. Gr. pretors], Acts xvi. 20,
22, 35 sq. [38]. 3. orpar. rod iepov, ‘captain of the
vemple’ [A.V.], i. e. the commander of the Levites who
590
oTpépao
kept guard in and around the temple (Joseph. antt. 20,
6, 2; [B. D.s. v. Captain, 3; Hdersheim, The Temple ete.
ch. vii., 2ed. p. 119 sq.]) : Acts iv. 1; v. 24; plur. Lk. xxii.
52; simply (A. V. captain], Acts v. 26; Lk. xxii. 4.*
otparid, -as, 7, (atparos (cf. otparevw}), fr. Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down, Sept. for 82¥; 1. an army, band
of soldiers. 2. sometimes in the poets i. q. orpareia,
as Arstph. eqq. 587 (€v arparvats re Kai pdyats), 2 Cou-x:
4 Tdf. after the best codd. ([see his note; cf. L. and S.
s. v. II.]; Passow s. v. orpareia, fin.). 3. in the
N. T. 9 otpdmos orparid, or 9) otpar. trod ovpavod (Hebr.
D'NW NAY), the host of heaven (see dvvapts, f.), i. e. a.
troops of angels (1 K. xxii.19; Neh. ix. 6): Lk.ii.13. — b.
the heavenly bodies, stars of heaven, (so called on account
of their number and their order): Acts vii. 42 (2 Chr.
XXxili. 3,5; Jer. viii. 2, etc.).*
otparidrns, -ov, 6, (fr. orparios [(cf. orpareve) ], like
Horns, KAowTHS, Nretpwrns), fr. Hdt. down, a (common)
soldier: Mt. viii. 9; Mk. xv. 16; Lk. xxiii. 36; Jn. xix.
2; Acts x. 7; xii. 4, etc.; with the addition of *Ijaor
Xpiorod, metaph., a champion of the cause of Christ,
7) Mite. He oe
otpatoroyew, -@: to be a orparoAdyos (and this fr.
atparos and déyw), to gather (collect) an army, to enlist
soldiers: 6 orparodoynoas, [he that enrolled (him) as a
soldier], of the commander, 2 Tim. ii. 4. (Diod., Dion.
Hal., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
orTparoTeddpxys, -ov, 6, (otpardmedov and dpyw), [cf.
B. 73 (64) ]; a. the commander of a cump and army,
a military tribune: Dion. Hal. 10, 36; Leian. hist. conser.
22; [Joseph. b. j. 2, 19, 4]. b. Praetorian prefect,
commander of the praetorian cohorts, i. e. captain of the
Roman emperor’s body-guard: Acts xxviii. 16 [LT
Tr WH om. the cl., see Abbot in B.D., Am. ed., s. v.
Captain of the Guard]. There were two praetorian pre-
fects, to whose custody prisoners sent bound to the em-
peror were consigned: Joseph. antt. 18, 6,6; Plin. epp.
10, 65 (57). [See B. D. Am. ed. u.s.; Bp. Lehtft. on
Philsprtsqali*
[otparorés-apxos, -ov, 6; see the preceding word. The
dat. -y@ is the reading of some codd. (cf. WH rejected
mrg.) in Acts xxviii. 16; cf. €xarovrapyns, init." ]
otpaté-meSov, -ov, TO, (otparos, and wédov a plain), fr.
Hat. down ; a. a military camp. b. soldiers
in camp, an army: Lk. xxi. 20.*
otpeBdda, -3 ; (oTpeBdds [fr. orpépw | twisted, Lat. tor-
tuosus; hence orpéBdn, fem., an instrument of torture) ;
to twist, turn awry, (Hdt.) ; to torture, put to the rack,
(Arstph., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., 3 Mace. iv. 14);
metaph. to pervert, of one who wrests or tortures lan-
guage to a false sense, 2 Pet. iii. 16.*
otpépw: 1 aor. gorpea; Pass., pres. orpépoua 2
aor. eotpadny; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 357, also for
120, ete.; to turn, turn round: ri rw, to turn a thing to
one, Mt. v. 39,and T Tr WH in xxvii. 3 [for droorpéda,
to bring back ; see droorpepa, 2]; reflexively (W. § 38,
1; B. § 130, 4), ¢o turn one’s self (i.e. to turn the back
to one: used of one who no longer cares for another),
oTpHVLAw
Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 469 (437)]; rlels Tt, i. q. peraotpéde,
to turn one thing into another, Rev. xi. 6. Pass. reflex-
ively, to turn one’s self: orpadeis foll. by a finite verb,
having turned ete., Mt. vii.6; [ix. 22 LT Tr WH]; xvi.
23; Lk. vii. co; ix. 55; xiv. 25; xxii. 61; Jn. i. 38; xx.
16; orpadeis mpds twa, foll. by a fin. verb, [turning unto
etc., or furned unto and ete. ], Lk. vii. 44; x. 21 (22) [R* L
ADT PRIS sestitig Whe
self back, Jn. xx. 14; eis ra €6vy, Acts xiii. 46; éeorpagy-
oav (ev LT Tr WH) tais xapSias adrav eis Alyurrop,
[R.V.they turned back in their hearts unto Egypt] i.e. to
their condition there, Acts vii. 39; absol. and trop. to
turn one’s self sc. from one’s course of conduct, i.e. to
change one’s mind [cf. W.u.s.]: Mt. xviii. 3 and LT
Tr WH in Jn. xii. 40. [Comp.: dva-, dmo-, Ota-, ex-, emt-,
kata-, peTa-, ov(v)-, Uro- orpépa. | *
orpyvidw, -@: 1 aor €orpyviaca; (fr. orpivos, q.v.); a
word used in middle and later Comedy for rpuday
(cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 381; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p.
475 sq.; W.25]); to be wanton, to live luxuriously: Rev.
xviii. 7,9. [Comp.: xara-orpyvido. |*
otpfivos, -ous, 7d, [allied w. orepeds, gq. v.], excessive
strength which longs to break forth, over-strength ; luxury,
[R. V. wantonness (mrg. luxury)]: Rev. xviii. 3 (see
Svvauis, d.); for JINW, arrogance, 2 K. xix. 285 eager de-
stre, Lycophr. 438.*
orpov0lov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of orpovOds), a little bird, esp.
of the sparrow sort, a sparrow: Mt. x. 29, 31; Lk. xii.
6 sq. (Aristot. it. a. 5,2 p..539>, 33; 9, 7 p. 613%, 33;
Sept. for WB¥.) ([Cf. Tristram in B.D. s. v. Sparrow;
Survey of West. Palest., ‘Fauna and Flora’, p. 67 sq. ]*
otpwvviw, or orpavyupe: impf. 3 pers. plur. éotpwvyvoy
[ef. B. 45 (39)]; laor. gorpwca; pf. pass. ptep. eorpa-
pévos ; (by metathesis fr. ordpyups, oropevvups, and this
fr. STOPEQG; [cf. Lat. sterno, struo, etc.; Eng. strew,
straw, etc.]; see Curtius § 227) ; lo spread: ipndria év rn
600, Mt. xxi. 8; eis 7. 68dv, Mk. xi. 8, (edov medaouacr,
Aeschyl. Ag. 909; eipaor médpor, ib. 921). sc. Hv «Alyny
(which Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down often add, and also
A€xos, A€xrpov, ete. [ef. W. 594 (552); B. § 130, 5]) rwi,
Acts ix. 34 [A.V. make thy bed]; to spread with couches
or divans 76 dvayav, pass. [A. V. furnished], Mk. xiv.
15; Lk. xxii. 12. [Comp.: xara-, bro- orpavvups. | *
orvyntds, -dv, (aTrvyéw to hate), hated, Aeschyl. Prom.
592; detestable [A. V. hateful]: Tit. lil. 3; orvynrdv x.
Ocomonrov mpaypa, of adultery, Philo de decal. § 24 fin. ;
Epos, Heliod. 5, 29.*
orvyvétw; 1 aor. ptep. orvyvdcas; (ctvyvds sombre,
gloomy); to be sad, to be sorrowful: prop. emi tur [R.V.
his countenance fell at etc.], Mk. x. 22; metaph. of the
sky covered with clouds [A. V. to be iowering], Mt. xvi.
3(T br. WH reject the pass.]. (Schol. on Aeschyl.
Pers. 470; Sept. thrice for onw, to be amazed, aston-
ished, éwi rwa, Ezek. xxvii. 35; xxxii. 10; orvyvdrns, of
the gloominess of the sky, Polyb. 4, 21, 1
orvdhos [RG WH (Trin 1 Tim. iii. 15; Rev. x. 1)],
more correctly oriAos [so L T (Tr in Gal. ii. 9; Rev. iii.
12)]; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. fin. [cf. Chandler
591
otpepec Oat eis Ta drricw, to turn one’s.
ot
§§ 274, 275; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 43], -ov, 6, [fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], Sept. often for ny, a piliar,
column: ordre. mupds, pillars of fire, i.e. flames rising
like columns, Rev. x. 1; roujow aitdv oridov ev 76 vad
Tov Geov pov, i. e. (dropping the fig.) I will assign him a
firm and abiding place in the everlasting kingdom of
God, Rev. iii. 12; used of persons to whose eminence
and strength the stability and authority of any institu-
tion or organization are due, Gal. ii. 9 [where cf. Bp.
Lghtft.]; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 2 and the note in Geb-
hardt and Harnack, (orido oikwv cio maides dpceves,
Eur. Iph. T. 57; exx. fr. [Jewish writ. are given by
Schoettgen (on Gal. 1. c.) and fr.] eccles. writ. by Suicer,
Thes. ii. p. 1045 sq.; columen reipublicae, Cic. pro Sest.
8, 19, and often elsewh. in Lat. auth.); @ prop or sup-
port: ts adnOeias, 1 Tim. iii. 15.*
Zratkds [(WH Srackdés), L T Sroikds, see Tdf.’s note
on Acts as below; WH. App. p. 152], -n, -dv, Stoic, per-
taining to the Stoic philosophy, the author of which,
Zeno of Citium, taught at Athens in the portico called
moukiAn oTod: of Sraikol pirdcopa, Acts xvii. 18.
[(Diog. Laért. 7, 5; al.)]*
ov, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. rv, Boeot.
| rov), gen. god, dat. coi, acc. aé (which oblique cases are
enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet mpds ce is
written [uniformly in Rec. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb.
(exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi.18; Acts
xxiii. 30), in Lehm. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13;
xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18;
Eke 19. In xvilslielos dn. xxlec2s Acts s Xkilis 185
30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv.
39], see eyo, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq.
[W. § 6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. dpets, etc.; Lat. tu, etc.,
vos, ete.; thou, etc., ye, etc. The nominatives ov and ipeis
are expressed for emphasis —before a vocative, as od
BnOrcepn, Mt. ii. 6; ob macdiov (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1),
Lk. i, 763 add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11,
etc.; pets of bapsoaion, Lk. xi. 39; —or when the pron.
has a noun or a ptep. added to it in apposition in order te
define it more sharply, as od “loudatos wy (thou, being @
Jew), In. iv. 9, cf. Gal. ii. 145 dpets wovnpot dvres, Mt. vii.
11;— or when several are addressed who are at the
same time particularized, ov... ov, Jas. ii. 3; also in
antithesis, Mt. iii. 14; vi. 17; xi. 3; Mk. xiv. 36; Lk.
xvi. 7; Jn. ii. 10; iii. 2; Acts x. 15; 1 Co. iii. 23; Jas.
ii. 18, and very often; sometimes the antithetic term is
suppressed, but is easily understood from the context:
ei od ef, if it be thou, and not an apparition, Mt. xiv. 28 ;
add, Lk. xv. 31; xvii. 8, ete.; or when a particle is
added, as od odv (at the close of an argument, when the
discourse reverts to the person to be directly addressed),
Lk. iv. 7; Jn. viii. 5; Acts xxiii. 21; 2 Tim.ii.1,3; ov
dé (in contrasts), Lk. ix. 60; 2 Tim. ili. 10; Eitretleales
Heb. i. 11, etc.; dpets dé, Mt. xxi. 138; Jas. ii. 6; kat ov,
and thou, thou also, thou too, Mt. xi. 23; xxvi. 69, 733
Lk. x. 15; xix. 19, 42; xxii. 58; plur., Mt. xv. 3,16; Lk.
xvii. 10; before the 2d pers. of the verb where the per-
son is to be emphasized (like the Germ. du, ihr eben, dv
ouyyéevea
da, ‘it is thou,’ ‘thou art the very man,’ etc.), od et, Mt.
xxvii. 11; Mk. xv. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3; Jn.i.19; iii. 105 iv.
12; viii. 53; Acts xxiii. 3, etc.; plur. Lk. ix. 55 Rec.;
od héyets, etras, Mt. xxvi. 25; xxvii. 11; Mk. xv. 2; it
is used also without special emphasis ((ef. B. § 129, 12,
and] see éy, 1), Mk. xiv.68; Jn. viii. 13; Acts vii. 28, etc.
The genitives cod and tyéy, joined to substantives,
have the force of a possessive, and are placed— some-
times after the noun, as tov 1dd5a cov, Mt. iv. 6; rods
aerpors tay, Mt. v. 47, and very often; —sometimes
before the noun (see éya, 3 b.), as ood ai dwapriat, Lk. vil.
48; cov rhs vedtntos, 1 Tim. iv. 12; tev de Kai rpixes,
Mt. x. 30; add, Mk. x. 43 [here Rec. after]; Lk. xii.
30; Jn. xvi. 6; Ro. xiv. 16; 2 Co. i. 24 [here now be-
fore, now after];— sometimes between the article and
noun, as ryv bya éemimdOnow, 2 Co. vii. 7; add, 2 Co. viii.
14 (13), 14; xiii. 9; Phil. i. 19, 25; ii. 30; Col.i. 8. forat
gov mdvra (aoa), Lk. iv. 7 [ef. B. § 182, 11, La.J]. It
is added to the pronoun adrés: cod airs, Lk. il. 35.
On the phrase ri euol kai col, see éyo,4.[(Fr. Hom.on.)]
ovyyévera, -as, 7, (ovyyevns), fr. Eur. and Thue. down;
[Sept. ] ; a. kinship, relationship. b. kindred,
relations collectively, family: Lk.i.61; Acts vii. 3, 14.*
ovyyevijs, -és, [acc. sing. ovyyevn, and in Rom. xvi. 11
Treg. ovyyevnv; see dpony], dat. plur. cvyyevéow and
(in Mk. vi. 4 T Tr [WH, also in Lk. ii. 44 WH] ace. to
a barbarous declens., cf. [1 Macc. x. 89] B. 25 (22))
ovyyevedow, (ovv and yévos), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl. down ;
Sept.], of the same kin, akin to, related by blood, (Plin.
congener): Mk. vi. 4; Lk. ii. 44; xxi. 163 ruvds, Lk. [i.
58]; xiv. 12; Jn. xviii. 26; Acts x. 24; Ro. xvi. 7, 11, 21,
[see below]; 9 ovyy. Lk. i. 36 R G Tr (Lev. xviii. 14);
in a wider sense, of the same race, a fellow-countryman :
Ro. ix. 3 [(so some take the word in xvi. 7,11, 21, above;
ef. Bp, Lghtft. on Philippians p. 175) ].*
ovyyevis, -idos, 7, (see the preceding word), a later Grk.
word ([Plut. quaest. Rom. 6]; like edyevis, cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 451 sq.; cf. W. 69 (67) ; Kiihner i. p. 419 Anm.
8), a kinswoman: twés, Lk. i. 86 LT WH.*
ovy-yvoun [TWH ovry., cf. ctv, I. fin.], -ns, 4, (ovy-
yryvocke, to agree with, to pardon; see yvwpun), fr. [Soph.
and] Hdt. down, pardon, indulgence: kara cvyyvadpny, od
kar’ emttaynv, by way of concession or permission, not by
way of command, 1 Co. vii. 6.*
ovy-kddqpar [TWH ovr (cf. ody, II. fin.)]; fr. Hat.
down; [Sept.]; to sit together, to sit with another: pera
twos, Mk. xiv. 54; rwi, with one, Acts xxvi. 30.*
ovy-Ka8ito [TWH ovr- (cf. ctv, IL. fin.)]: 1 aor. cur
exabica; (see kabiCw) ; a. trans. to cause to sit down
together, place together: rwva, foll. by év with a dat. of the
place, Eph. ii. 6. b. intrans. fo sit down together:
Lk. xxii. 55 [where Lehm. txt. repixaé.]. (Xen., Aris-
tot., Plut., al.; Sept.) *
ovy-caxorabew [T WH ovy- (cf. cdy, II. fin.)],-6: 1 aor.
impv. ovyxaxord6noov; (see kaxorabéw) ; to suffer hard-
ships together with one: 2 Tim. ii. 3 LT Tr WH; with a
dat. com. added, r@ evayyeAie, for the benefit of the gos-
pel, to further it, 2 Tim. i. 8. (HKecles. writ.) *
592
OVYKEPAaVVUpLe
ovy-Kaxovxéw [TWH ovr (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -6 : pres.
pass. inf. -yeioOar; to treat ill with another ; pass. to be
ill-treated in company with, share persecutions or come
into a fellowship of ills: twi, with one, Heb. xi. 25. Not
found elsewhere.*
ovy-Karéw [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, I. fin.)], -@; 1 aor. ovy-
exddeca; Mid., pres. cvyxadotpar; 1 aor. cuvexaherduny }
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 87); to call together, assemble:
twas, Lk. xv. 6 [here Tr mrg. has pres. mid.]; tyv omet- |
pav, Mk. xv. 16; 7d cvvédprov, Acts v. 21; mid. to call to-
gether to one’s self [cf. B. § 135, 5]: revas, Lk. ix.1; xv.
(6 Trmrg.], 9 [RGLTr txt.]; xxiii. 13; Acts x. 24;
Seip d eles
ovy-kadtrre [ (cf. cvv, II. fin.)]: pf. pass. ptep. ovykeka-
Avuppévos; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 703; to cover on all
sides, to conceal entirely, to cover up completely: ti, pass.,
Tike Sati
ovy-Kaparre [T WH ovr (cf. ctv, II. fin.)]: 1 aor. impv.
ovyxaprpov ; to bend together, to bend completely : rov vardv
twos, [A. V. to bow down one’s back] i.e. metaph. to sub-
ject one to error and hardness of heart, a fig. taken from
the bowing of the back by captives compelled to pass
under the yoke, Ro. xi. 10, fr. Ps. Lxviii. (Ixix.) 24.
(Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) *
ovy-kata-Balve [TWH ovr- (cf. ody, I. fin.)]: 2 aor.
ptep. plur. cvyxaraBavres ; to godown with: of those who
descend together from a higher place to a lower, as from
Jerusalem to Cesarea, Acts xxv. 5. (Ps. xlviii. (xlix.)
18; Sap.x. 14; Aeschyl., Eur., Thuce., Polyb., Plut., al.;
ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 398; [ Rutherford, New Phryn. p.
485].)*
ovy-Kata-Seors [T WH ovr (cf. cv, II. fin.)], -ews, 9,
(avyxarariénut, q.Vv.), prop. a putting together or joint
deposit (of votes) ; hence approval, assent, agreement, [ Cic.
acad. 2, 12, 37 adsensio atque adprobatio|: 2 Co. vi. 16.
(Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) *
ovy-Kkara-riqm ['T WH ovr (cf. ody, II. fin.)]: Mid.,
pres. ptep. ovyxarari@épuevos or pt. ptep. ovyxararebetpéevos
(see below) ; to deposit together with another; Mid. prop.
to deposit one’s vote in the urn with another (Wipov rOévar),
hence to consent to, agree with, vote for: tH Bovdh x. TH
mpaget twés, Lk. xxiii. 51 [here Lmrg.T Trmre. WH
mrg. pres. ptcp., al. pf. ptep.]. (Ex. xxiii. 1, 32; Plat.
Gorg. p. 501 ¢., Isae., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
ovy-Kara-pnpite [T WH ovv- (cf. ody, I. fin.)]: 1 aor.
pass. ovyxareyynpicOny ; 1. by depositing (ard)
a ballot in the urn (i.e. by voting for) to assign one
a place among (cvv), to vote one a place among: twa
peta twev, Acts i. 26. 2. mid. to vote against with
others, i.e. to condemn with others: Plut. Them. 21. Not
found elsewhere.*
ovy-Kepdvvy, [TWH ovr (cf. ody, II. fin.)}: 1 aor.
ouvexepaca; pf. pass. ptep. cvyxexpauevos and in L T Tr
WH ovykexepacpévos [see xepdvvvps, init.]; fr. [Aeschyl.,
Soph.], Hdt. down ; to mix together, commingle; to unite:
ovvek. TO cGpa, caused the several parts to combine into
an organic structure, which is the body, [A.V. tempered
the body together], 1 Co. xii. 24; rt tum, to unite ona
CVYKLVEW
thing to another: ovk dpéAdnoev... pi ovykekpapevos
[so RGT WH mrg,, but LTr WH txt. -vous] . ». dxov-
caow, ‘the word heard did not profit them, because it
had not united itself by faith to [ef. W. $31, 10; B.
§ 133, 13] them that heard,’ i. e. because the hearers had
not by their faith let it find its way into their minds
and made it their own; [or, ace. to the text of L Tr WH
(R. V.), ‘because they had not been united by faith with
them that heard ’], Heb. iv. 2.*
ovy-Kivéw, -@: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. cvvexivnoay ; to move
together with others [Aristot.]; to throw into commotion,
excite, stir up: tov adv, Acts vi. 12. (Polyb., Plut.,
‘Longin., al.) *
ovy-Krelo (TWH ovr- (cf. ody, IL. fin.)]: 1 aor. ovr-
éxdeoa; Pass., pres. ptcp. cvy-(ouv-)Krecduevos, Gal. iii. 23
LT Tr WH; but RG ibid. pf. ptep. -cexreropévos; fr. Hdt.
down; Sept. chiefly for 74D and 1107, fo shut up, (Lat.
concludo), i. e. a. to shut up together, enclose, [so
s. v. ovy, II. 2; but others (e. g. Fritzsche as below;
Meyer on Gal. iii. 22) would make the ov» always
intensive, asin b.]: a shoal of fishes in a net, Lk. v.
6. b. to shut up on all sides, shut up completely ;
Twa els Twa or tt, so to deliver one up to the power
of a person or thing that he is completely shut in, as it
were, without means of escape: twa eis dmeiOecrav, Ro.
xi. 32 (els dydva, Polyb. 3, 68, 3; e’s tovavtnv dunxaviav
ovyk\evabels Avriyovos perepedero, Diod. 19,19; ov ouve-
eis Oavarov, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 50; cf. Fritzsche, Ep.
ad Rom. ii. p. 545 sq.); also ria vd rt, under the power
of anything, i. e. so that he is held completely subject
to it: tmd dpyapriay, Gal. iii. 22 (the Scripture has shut
up or subjected, i.e. declared them to be subject) ; sc.
ind vopov, with the addition of eis tiv pedAAovoay riotw
droxakvpOjva, ib. 23 (see above ad init.) ; on these
words see eis, B. II. 3 ¢. y. p. 185° bot.*
ovy-KAnpo-vopos [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, I. fin.) ], -ov, 6, 7,
a fellow-heir, a joint-heir, (dvewids kai cvy«Anpovdos, Philo,
leg. ad Gaium $10), (see kAnpovdpos 1b.) : Ro. viii. 17;
Eph. iii. 6; one who obtains something assigned to him-
self with others, a joint participant (see kAnpovdpos, 2) :
with the gen. of the thing, Heb. xi.9; 1 Pet. iii. 7. Not
found elsewhere.*
ovy-Kowevew [T WH ovr (cf. ctv, I. fin.) ],-6; 1 aor.
subj. 2 pers. plur. cvyxowarnonre, ptep. nom. plur. mase.
cvykowernoavtes; to become a partaker together with oth-
ers, or tohave fellowship with a thing: with a dat. of the
thing, Eph. v.11; Phil. iv. 14; Rev. xviii. 4. (witha
gen. of the thing, Dem. p. 1299, 20; revi twos, Dio Cass.
37,41; 77, 16.)*
ovy-Koweves [T WH ovr- (cf. avy, II. fin.) ], -6», partici-
pant with others in (anything), joint partner : with a gen.
of the thing [cf. W. § 30, 8 a.], Ro. xi. 17; 1 Co. ix. 23;
with the addition of the gen. of the pers. with whom one
is partaker of a thing, Phil.i.7; foll. by ev with a dat.
of the thing, Rev. i. 9.*
ovy-kop({a: 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. cuvexdutoar: 1.
te carry or bring together, to collect [see avy, 14. 2]; to
593
ovyxXew
house crops, gather into granaries: Hadt., Xen., Diod.,
Plut., al.; Job v. 26. 2. to carry with others, help in
carrying out, the dead to be burned or buried (Soph.
Aj. 1048; Plut. Sull. 38); to bury: Acts viii. 2.*
ovy-Kplve [TWH ov (cf. cvv, I. fin.)]; 1 aor. inf. cvy-
Kpivat; 1. to join together fitly, compound, combine,
(Epicharm. in Plut. mor. p.110a.; Plat., Aristot., al.):
mvevpatikots mvevjarikd, 1 Co. ii. 13 (for Paul, in deliver-
ing the things disclosed to him by the Holy Spirit in
speech derived not from rhetorical instruction but re-
ceived from the same divine Spirit, ‘combines spiritual
things with spiritual’, adapts the discourse to the
subject; other interpretations are refuted by Meyer
ad loc.; mvevparikois is neut.; [but others would take it
as masc. and give ovyk. the meaning to interpret (R. V.
marg. interpreting spiritual things to spiritual men); cf.
Sept. Gen. xl. 8, 16, 22; xli. 12,15; Judg. vii. 15; Dan.
v. 12, etc.; see Heinrici in Meyer 6te Aufi.]). 2. ace.
to a use foreign to the earlier Greeks (who used zapa-
Baddq), but freq. fr. the time of Aristotle on (cf. Passow
s.v.2; [L. and S.s.v.II.]; Zod. ad Phryn. p. 278 sq.;
[W. 23 (22)]), to compare: éavrovs éavtois, 2 Co. x. 12
(Sap. vii. 29; xv. 18).*
ovy-Kirro [T WII ovv- (cf. ctv, I. fin.)]; [fr. Hat.
down]; to bend compleiely forwards, to be bowed together,
[cf. ovv, II. 3]: by disease, Lk. xiii. 11. ({Job ix. 27];
Sie, seins WLS sabe, YL05))””
ovykupla, -as, 7, (cuykupetv, to happen, turn out), acci-
dent, chance: kata ovykupiav, by chance, accidentally,
Lk. x. 31. (Hippoer.; eccles. and Byzant. writ.; Grk.
writ. fr. Polyb. down more com. use ovykvpyots and ovy-
kupnua [| W. 24].) *
' ovy-xatpo [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, I. fin.)]; impf. cuvéyar
pov; 2 aor. cuvexdpny [ pass. as act., so Veitch (s. v. yaipo)
etc.; al. act., after the analogy of verbs in -ur]; to rejoice
with, take part in another’s joy, (Aeschyl., Arstph., Xen.,
al.): with a dat. of the pers. with whom one rejoices,
Lk. i. 58 (cf. 14); xv. 6,9; with a dat. of the thing, 1 Co.
xiii. 6; lo rejoice together, of many, 1 Co. xii. 26; to con-
gratulate (Aeschin., Polyb., [Plut.; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on
Phil. as below; 3 Macc. i. 8; Barn. ep. 1, 3 (and Miiller
ad loc.)]): with the dat. of the pers. Phil. ii. 17 sq.*
ovy-xéw, ovy-xivo, and ovy-xivve, [T WH ovr- (cf.
civ, II. fin.)] (see éexxéa, init.): impf., 3 pers. sing. ouve-
xuve (Acts ix. 22 RG L Tr, -yuvvev T WH), 3 pers. plur.
ouvéxeov (Acts xxi. 27 RG T Tr WH [but some would
make this a 2 aor., see reff. s. v. exxyéw, init.]); 1 aor.
3 pers. plur. cvvéxeav (Acts xxi. 27 L [see exyéa, init.]);
Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. cvy(T WH ov-)xvvverar (Acts
xxi. 81 LT Tr WH); pf. 3 pers. sing. ovyxéxura: (Acts
xxi. 31 RG), ptep. fem. cvy(T WH our )kexupévn (Acts
xix. 32 RGLT Tr WH); 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. cuvexvOy
(Acts ii. 6 RGLT Tr WH); fr. Hom. down; to pour
together, commingle: jv n ekkAnoia ovykexupern, Was irreg-
ularly assembled [al. ‘in confusion’], Acts xix. 32; to
disturb, rwd, the mind of one, to stir up to tumult or out-
break, Acts xxi. 27, 31; to confound or bewilder, Acts it
Giixe 22%
osvyXpaopuat
ovy-xpdopor [T WH ovr], -@par; to use with any one,
use jointly, (Polyb., Diod., [Philo]); with the dat. of a
pers., to associate with, to have dealings with: In. iv. 9
[ Tdf. om. WH br. the cl. ov yap.-- Dapap. |.*
ovy-xive and cuyxivva, see cvyxeo.
wiy-xvots, -ews, 7), (cvyxew), [fr. Eur., Thuc., Plat.
down], confusion, disturbance: of riotous persons, Acts
sab<;, 2) (il Exe
ov-téo [LT Tr WH ov (cf. ody, I. fin.)]; fut. ov-
Chow; to live together with one [ef. ovy, II. 1]: of physical
life on earth, opp. to cvvamodaveiv, 2 Co. vil. 3; T@ XproT@,
to live a new life in union with the risen Christ, i. e. a
life dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 8, cf. De Wette [or Meyer
ad loc.]; to live a blessed life with him after death,
2 Tim: ii. 11. (Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) *
ov-tebyvupe: 1 aor. cuvéCevéa; fr. Eur. and Xen. down;
prop. to fasten to one yoke, yoke together: tnmovus, Xen.
Cyr. 2, 2, 26; trop. to join together, unite: ri or twa, of the
marriage tie, Mt. xix.6; Mk. x. 9, (vduos cufevywis dvdpa
kal yuvaixa, Xen. oec. 7, 30, and often so in Grk. writ.).*
ov-tnréw [LT Tr WH ovr- (cf. ov, HU. fin.)],-6; impf.
3 pers. sing. cuve(nres; a. to seek or examine together
(Plat.). b. in the N. T. to discuss, dispute, [ques-
tion (A. V. often)]: absol., [Mk. xii. 28]; Lk. xxiv. 15;
ri, with one, Mk. vill. 11; ix. 14[RGL]; Acts vi. 9;
in the same sense mpés teva, Mk. ix. [14 T Tr WH], 16
(where read mpés avrovs, not with Rec.b**° G mpds at-
rovs [see avrov, p.87]); Actsix. 29; mpds éavrovs [L Tr
WH urg. or mp. atrovs Rez *! G] equiv. to mpds adAn-
Aous, Mk. i. 27 [where T WH txt. simply adrods as subj. ];
ampos éavrovs with the addition of an indirect quest. 76 ris
etc. with the optat. [cf. B. § 139, 60; W. § 41b.4c.],
Lk. xxii. 23; ri, with the indic., Mk. ix. 10.*
ov-Lyrnos [ovr L Trmrg. (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -ews, 7,
(cuvgntéw), mutual questioning, disputation, discussion :
Acts xv. 2 Rec., 7 RG LTrmrg.; xxviii. 29 yet GLT
Tr WH om. the vs. (Cic. ad fam. 16, 21,4; Philo, opif.
mund. § 17 fin. [(var. lect.) ; quod det. pot.§ 1]; legg.
alleg. 3, 45.) *
ovinmths [LT Tr WH ovr- (cf. vv, I. fin.) ], -od, 6,
(cu(nréw), a disputer, i.e. a learned disputant, sophist :
1 Co. i. 20. (Ignat. ad Eph. 18 [quotation ].) *
ob-tuyos [L T Tr WH ovp- (cf. ody, II. fin.) ], -ov, (cuged-
yvupt), yoked together; used by Grk. writ. [fr. Aeschyl.
down] of those united by the bond of marriage, rela-
tionship, office, labor, study, business, or the like; hence,
a yoke-fellow, consort, comrade, colleague, partner. Ac-
cordingly, in Phil. iv. 3 most interpreters hold that by
the words yujove cv¢vye Paul addresses some particular
associate in labor for the gospel. But as the word is
found in the midst of (three) proper names, other
expositors more correctly take it also as a proper name
((WH mrg. Suv(uye]; see Laurent, Ueber Synzygos in
the Zeitschr. f.d. Luther. Theol. u. Kirche for 1865, p.
1 sqq. [reprinted in his Neutest. Studien, p. 134 sq.]);
and Paul, alluding (as in Philem. 11) to the meaning of
the word as an appellative, speaks of him as ‘a genuine
Synzygus’, i. e. a colleague in fact as well as in name.
594
avAayoryeo
Cf. Meyer and Wiesinger ad loc.; [Hackett in B. D. Am.
ed. s. v. Yoke-fellow ].*
ocvtwo-rovew, -@: 1 aor. cuve(woroinaa; to make one
alive together with another (Vulg. convivifico): Chris-
tians, 76 Xpiore [L br. adds év, so WH mrg.], with Christ,
Eph. ii. 5; ovv r@ Xp. Col. ii. 13; in both these pass.
new moral life is referred to.*
ovKdpivos, -ov, 7, Hebr. NAPw (of which only the plur.
D’npw is found in the O. T., 1 K. x. 27; Is.ix.10; Am.
vii. 14; once Ninpw), a sycamine, a tree having the form
and foliage of the mulberry, but fruit resembling the fig
(i. q. cvxopopéa, q.v. [but Tristram, Nat. Hist. of the
Bible, 2d ed. p. 396 sq.; BB.DD., etc., regard the syca-
mine as the black-mulberry tree, and the sycomore as
the fig-mulberry]): Lk. xvii. 6. (Often in Theophr. ;
Strab. 17, p. 823; Diod. 1, 34; Dioscorid. 1, 22.) [Cf.
Vanicek, Fremdworter, p. 54; esp. Low, Aram. Pflan-
zennamen, § 332, cf. § 338; BB.DD. u.s.; ‘Bible Edu-
cator’ iv. 348; Pickering, Chron. Hist. of Plants, pp.
106, 258.]*
ovk4j, -7s, 7, (contr. fr. cveéa), fr. Hom. down, Hebr.
MINN, a fig-tree: Mt. xxi. 19-21; xxiv. 32; Mk. xi. 13,
20 sq. 3 xiii. 28; Lk. xiii. 6 sq.; xxi. 29; Jn.i. 48 (49),
50 (51); Jas. iii. 12; Rev. vi.13. [Cf. Low, Aram. Pflan-
zennamen, § 335. ]*
ovKo-popéa, (Lchm. cuxopwpéa, [ Rec. *>e* -uwpaia, cf.
Tdf.’s note on Lk. as below; WH. App. pp. 152 and
151]), -as, 7, (fr. cdxov and popea the mulberry tree),
i. q. ovKdpuvos [ but see the word, and reff.], a sycomore-
tree: Lk. xix. 4. (Geop. 10, 3, 7.) *
cixov, -ov, Td, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 73Nf, a fig, the
ripe fruit of 7 oven [q. v.]: Mt. vii. 16; Mk. xi. 13; Lk.
vi. 44; Jas. ili. 12.*
cvkopavtTéw, -; 1 aor. éouxopavrnca; (fr. cuxopavrns,
and this fr. cdxor ‘fig’, and @aive ‘to show’. At Athens
those were called ouxcopdvra: whose business it was to
inform against any one whom they might detect export-
ing figs out of Attica; and as sometimes they seem to
have extorted money from those loath to be exposed, the
name ovkoddvrns from the time of Aristophanes down
was a general term of opprobrium to designate a malig-
nant informer, a calumniator; a malignant and base ac-
cuser from love of gain, [but ef. L. and S. s. v.]; hence
the verb ovxoparTé signifies) 1. to accuse wrong-
fully, to calumniate, to attack by malicious devices, (Ar-
stph., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. to exact money wrong-
fully; to extort from, defraud: Lk. iii. 14 [here R. V.
marg. accuse wrongfully]; with a gen. of the pers. and
ace. of the thing, Lk. xix. 8 (rpudkovra pvas mapd twos,
Lys. p. 177, 32. Sept. for pwy, to oppress, defraud, Job
xxxv. 9; Eccl. iv. 1; Ps. exviii. (exix.) 122; évnra,
Prov. xiv. 31; xxii. 16; mrwyovs, Prov. xxviii. 3).*
cvdaywyéw, -@; (ctdn booty, spoil, [cf. cudrde, init. ],
and dyw); to carry off booty: twa, to carry one off as a
captive (and slave), Ovyarépa, Heliod. 10, 35; tap0évov,
Nicet. hist. 5 p. 96; to lead away from the truth and
subject to one’s sway [R. V. make spoil of], Col. ii. 8
(Tatian. or. ad Gr. c. 22, p. 98 ed. Otto).*
TUAdGw
_ ova, -&: 1 aor. éotAnoa; (Lakin to] avAn ‘spoil’
{allied with oxidroy (q. v., yet cf.) Curtius p- 696]); fr.
Hom. down; to rob, despoil: tiwd, 2 Co. xi. 8.*
ovh-Aarew, [T WH ovr- (cf. odv, I. fin.; Tdf. Proleg.
p- 76)], -@; impf. 3 pers. plur. cuveAddovv; 1 aor. cvve-
AdAnoa; to talk with: revi, with one, Mk. ix.4; Lk. ix.
30; xxii. 4, (Ex. xxxiv. 35; Is. vii. 6; Polyb. 4, 22, 8))is
peta twos, Mt. xvii.3; Acts xxv. 12; mpds ddAnAous [R.V.
spake together one with another], Lk. iv.36. [Cf. W. § 52,
4, 15.]*
ovd-apBave [sometimes our- (see below)]: fut. 2 pers.
sing. cvAAnn (L T Tr WH ovdAjpn [see M, »]), Lk. i.
. 315 pf. [3d pers. sing. cvveiAnper, Lk. i. 36 Tr txt. WH],
ptep. fem. cvverAndpvia (ib, RG LT]; 2 aor. cwvedaBov;
1 aor. pass. cvveAnpénv (LT Tr WH ovvednupénv; see
M, »); Mid., pres. impv. 2 pers. sing. ovAdapBdvov (T
Tr WH ovy-, cf. ovy, I. fin.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 76) Phil.
iv. 3; 2 aor. cvveAaBouny; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down;
Sept. for wdnm and 205 1. Active, a. to seize,
take: twa, one as a prisoner, Mt. xxvi. 55; Mk. xiv. 48;
Lk. xxii. 54; Jn. xviii. 12 [cf. W. 275 (259)]; Acts i. 16;
Xli. 3; xxiii. 27; d@ypav iyOvor, Lk. v. 9. b. to con-
ceive, of a woman (often so in Sept. for 777): absol.
Lk. i. 24 (Aristot. h. a. 7,1 p. 582%, 19; gen. an. 1,19 p.
727°, 8 sq.; [Plut. de vitand. aere alien. 4, 4; cf. W.598
(552); B. § 130, 5]); with ev yaorpi added, Lk. i. 31;
twa, a son, [ Lk. i. 36]; with ev r7 kowAla added, Lk. ii. 21;
metaph. of ‘lust,’ whose impulses a man indulges, Jas. i.
15. 2. Mid. a. to seize for one’s self; in a
hostile sense, to make (one a permanent) prisoner: twa,
Acts xxvi. 21. b. with the dat. of a pers. to take
hold together with one, to assist, help: Lk.v. 73; to succor,
Phil. iv. 3, (Soph. Phil. 282; Plat. Theag. p. 129e.;
Diod. 11, 40; in this sense in Grk. writ. more commonly
in the active).*
ovd-déyw [cf. avy, II. fin.; Tdf Proleg. p. 76]; fut.
ovd\déEo; 1 aor. ovvedeEa; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. ovA-
Néyerac; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for up); to gath-
er up [cf. ovv, IL. 2]: ra Cana (for removal fr. the
field), Mt. xiii. 28 sq. 30; pass. ib. 40; ri do with a gen.
of the thing, Mt. vii. 16 [cf. W. § 58, 9 b.a.]; ri é« with
a gen. of the place, to collect in order to carry off, Mt.
xiii. 41; in order to keep, Lk. vi. 44; ri eis re, into a
vessel, Mt. xiii. 48.*
ovd-oyitopar: (impf. cvveAoyiCouny Lehm.) 1 aor. ov
eAoytoauny ; a. to bring together accounts, reckon
up, compute, (Hadt. et sqq.). b. to reckon with one’s
self, to reason, (Plat., Dem., Polyb., al.) : Lk. xx. 5.*
ovA-AVUTEW : 1. to affect with grief together: Aris-
tot. eth. Nic. 9, 11, 4 p. 1171’, 7. 2. Pass., pres.
ptep. ovdAvmovpevos [T WH ovr- cf. ovy, HU. fin. (Td/-
Proleg. p. 76)]; to grieve with one’s self [see avy, II. 4
(so Fritz., De Wette, al.; but al. regard the ouv as ‘sym-
pathetic’; cf. Meyer, Weiss, Morison, on Mk. as be-
low) ], be inwardly grieved, (Hat., Plat., Polyb., Diod.) :
of the pain of indignation, émt run, Mk. iii. 5.*
ovp-Batvo [Evu- Rec. in 1 Pet. iv.12; see 3,0, fin. ];
impf. ovvéBawoy; 2 aor. cvvéBnv, ptep. oypBds; pf. ovp-
595
oupBiBalo
BeBnka ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 1. to walk with
the feet near together. 2. to come together, meet with
one; hence 3. of things which fall out at the same
time, to happen, turn out, come to pass, (so occasionally
in the Sept. for 17P and xP) ; as very often in Grk.
writ. (Sept. Gen. xlii. 4; xliv. 29), cupBaiver ri ren,
something befalls, happens to, one: Mk. x. 32; Acts xx.
19; 1 Co. x. 11; [1 Pet. iv. 12]; 2 Pet. ii. 22; +d Cup
BeByxds tun, Acts iii. 10 (Sus. 26); absol. ra oupBeBn-
kota, the things that had happened, Lk. xxiv. 14 (1
Mace. iv. 26; (Joseph. e. Ap. 1, 22, 17]); ovvéBy foll.
by an ace. with inf. it happened [A.V. so it was] that,
ete.: Acts xxi. 35 [ef. W. 323 (303)], exx. fr. prof. auth.
are given by Grimm on 2 Macc. iii. 2.*
ovp-BodAAw [ouv- WH (so Tdf. exc. Lk. xiv. 31); ef. ody,
II. fin.]; impf. cvvéBaddov; 2 aor. cvvéBadov; 2 aor. mid.
ouvveBadouny; fr. Hom. down; to throw together, to bring
together ; a. Adyous (Lat. sermones conferre), to con-
verse, Eur. Iphig. Aul. 830; with Adyous omitted [ef.
Eng. confer], Plut. mor. p. 222 c. (W. 593 (552); [B.
145 (127)]): rwi, to dispute with one, Acts xvii. 18
[where A. V. encountered (cf. c. below)]; mpés ddAndous,
to confer with one another, deliberate among them-
selves, Acts iv. 15. b. to bring together in one’s
mind, confer with one’s self [cf. atv, II. 4], to consider,
ponder: év tm kapdia, to revolve in the mind, Lk. ii. 19
(cupBarov ro Aoytop@ 76 dvap, Joseph. antt. 2,5, 3). c.
intrans. (W. § 38, 1; [B. § 130, 4]}), to come together, meet :
Twi, to meet one (on a journey), Acts xx. 14 (Hom. Od.
21, 15; Joseph. antt. 2,7, 5); to encounter in a hostile
sense: tui, to fight with one (1 Mace. iv. 34; 2 Mace.
Vili. 285 xiv. 17; Polyb. 1, 9, 7; 3,111, 1, and often),
with eis wé\epov added, Lk. xiv. 31 (els paynv, Polyb. 3,
56, 6; Joseph. antt. 12, 8,4; mpds paynv, Polyb. 10, 37,
4). Mid. to bring together of one’s property, to contribute,
aid, help: mov re, one, Acts xviii. 27; often so in Grk.
auth. also, esp. Polyb.; cf. Schweighduser, Lex. Polyb.
p-576; Passow s.v. 1b.a.; [L.and S.s.v.I.2]; Grimm,
Exeget. Hdbch. on Sap. v. 8.*
cvp-Bacretw [T cvv- so now WH (in exx. as below); cf.
avy, II. fin.) : fut. cupBaoredo; 1 aor. cvveBacirevoa ;
to reign together: rwi, with one; prop., Polyb. 30, 2, 4;
Leian. dial. deor. 16, 2; often in Plut. [also in Dion. Hal.,
Strabo]; metaph. to possess supreme honor, liberty,
blessedness, with one in the kingdom of God: 1 Co. iv. 8
[ef. W.41b.5 N. 2; B.§139, 10]; 2 Tim. ii. 12; see
Bactievo.*
oup-PiBdto [WH ovv- (so Tdf. in Eph. iv. 16; Col. ii.
19); ef. ody, U. fin.]; 1 aor. cvveBiBaca (Acts xix. 33
LT Tr WH, but see below) ; Pass., pres. ptep. cupBiBa-
(épevos; 1 aor. ptcp. cvpBiBacbeis; (BiBa{w to mount the
female, copulate with her; to leap, cover, of animals;
allow to be covered, admit to cover) ; 1. to cause to
coalesce, to join together, put together: rd cpa, pass., of
the parts of the body ‘knit together’ into one whole,
compacted together, Eph iv. 16; Col. ii. 19; to unite or
knit together in affection, pass., Col. ii. 2 [ef. W. § 63, 2
a.; B. § 144,13 a.] (to reconcile one to another, Hat. 1,
‘
oupBovrevw
74; Thue. 2,29). 2. to put together in one’s mind,
to compare; by comparison to gather, conclude, consider :
foll. by drt, Acts xvi. 10 (Plat. Hipp. min. p. 369 d.; de
rep. 6 p. 504 a.). 3. to cause a person to unite with
one in a conclusion or come to the same opinion, /o prove,
demonstrate: foll. by dre, Acts ix. 22 ([Aristot. top. 7, 5
p- 151%, 36]; foll. by os, [Aristot. rhet. Alex. 4 p. 1426,
37; etc.]; Jambl. vit. Pyth. c. 13 § 60; foll by the
acc. with inf., Ocell. Lucan. 3,3); by a usage purely
Biblical, w. the ace. of a pers., to teach, instruct, one:
1 Co. ii. 16; for p37, Is. xl. 14; for pon, Ex. xviii.
16; Deut. iv. 9; Is. xl. 13 Alex., Ald., ete.; for mn,
Ex. iv. 12,15; Lev. x. 11; mp3 Sawn, Theodot. Dan.
ix. 22. (The reading ovveBiBacav in Acts xix. 33, given
by codd. § A Bete. [and adopted by L T Tr WH] yields
no sense; [but it may be translated (with R. V. mrg.)
‘some of the multitude instructed Alexander’, etc.;
R. V. txt. translates it they brought Alexander out of the
multitude, ete. ].) *
cvp-Bovredw; 1 aor. avveBovAevoa; 1 aor. mid. cur
eBovdevodpny; fr. ['Theogn., Soph.], Hdt. down; Sept.
for yy? and yyii; 1. to give counsel: twi, Jn.
xviii. 14; foll. by an inf. Rev. iii. 18. 2. Mid. to
take counsel with others, take counsel together, to consult,
deliberate: foll. by tva (see tva, II. 2 a.), Mt. xxvi. 4;
Jn. xi. 53 [RG Tr mrg.]; foll. by a telic inf., Acts ix.
23.*
cvpBovrArov,-ov, 7d, (cv Bovdros) ; 1. counsel, which
is given, taken, entered upon, (Plut. Romul. 14) : Aap-
Bavw (on this phrase see AapBavo, I. 6), Mt. xii. 14 ; xxii.
15; xxvii. 1, 7; xxviii. 12; zrovd, to consult, deliberate,
MK. iii. 6 [Tr txt. WH txt. édiSow o.]; xv. 1 [TWH
mrg. érouudacavtes o.3 cf. Weiss ad _loc.]. 2
council, i. e. an assembly of counsellors or persons in con-
sultation (Plut. Luc. 26): Acts xxv. 12 (the governors
and procurators of provinces had a board of assessors
or advisers with whom they took counsel before render-
ing judgment; see Cic. ad fam. 8, 8; Verr. 2,13; Sueton.
vit. Tiber. 33; Lamprid. vit. Alex. Sever. c. 46; ef. Jo-
seph. b,j. 2, 16, 1).*
cbpBovdos, -ov, 6, (avy and Bovdn), an adviser, coun-
sellor: Ro. xi. 34 fr. Is. xl.13. (Tragg., [Hdt.], Arstph.,
Xen., Plat., al.) *
Zupedv, 6, [indecl., B. 16 (14)], (for deriv. see Sizer),
Simeon [so A. V. uniformly (on 2 Pet. i. 1 see 5 below) ];
1. the second son of Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxix. 33):
Rev. vii. 7. 2. [R. V. Symeon], one of Abraham’s
descendants: Lk. iii. 30. 3. that devout Simeon
who took the infant Jesus in his arms in the temple:
Lk. ii. 25 [here Rec.be Sipedv], 34. 4. Symeon [so
R. V.] surnamed Niger, one of the teachers of the
ehurch at Antioch: Acts xiii. 1. 5. Peter the apos-
tle: Acts xv. 14 [R. V. Symeon]; 2 Pet. i. 1 fhere L WH
txt. Sivov, and A.V. (R. V.) Simon]; respecting him
see Ziuor, 1 and Ilerpos, fin.*
ovp-padyrhs [T WH ovr (cf. oy, II. fin.)], -00, 6, a fel-
low-disciple: Jn. xi. 16 (Plat. Euthyd. p.272.¢.; Aesop.
fab. 48). (Phrynichus says that ovy is not prefixed to
596
oupTrapayivopmat
ronrirns, Snudrns, pudérns, and the like, but only to those
nouns which denote an association which is mpécKazpos
i.e. temporary, as ouvedyBos, ocvvO.acarns, ouprorns.
The Latin also observes the same distinction and says
commilito meus, but not concivis, but civis meus; see
Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 471; [ef. p. 172; Win. 25].)*
ovp-paprupéw, - [T WH ovr (cf. ody, I. fin.) ]; to bear
witness with, bear joint witness (with one): ovppapro-
povons tis ovvedyoews, their conscience also bearing
witness, Ro. ii. 15 (i.e. together with the deeds of the
Gentiles, which accord with the law of God and so bear
witness [cf. W. 580 (539)]) ; foll. by érz, Ro. ix. 1 (be-
sides the fact that the close fellowship I have with Christ
compels me to tell the truth); 76 mvevpare nuaoy, with
our spirit already giving its testimony, Ro. viii. 16.
Mid. pres. 1 pers. sing. ovppaprupodpat, I testify on my
own behalf besides (i.e. besides those things which I
have already testified in this book), Rev. xxii. 18 Rec.;
but the true reading here, paprupd, was restored by
Grsb. (Soph., Eur., Thuc., Plat., al.) *
ovp-pepito [WH ovv- (cf. ody, II. fin.)]: to divide at
the same time, divide together; to assign a portion; Mid.
pres. 3 pers. plur. cuppepiCovrar: twi, to divide together
with one (so that a part comes to me, a part to him), [R.V.
have their portion with], 1 Co. ix. 13. [Diod., Dion. Hal., ~
Diog. Laért.]*
cup-péroxos [T WH ovr- (cf. avy, I. fin.)], -ov, par
taking together with one, a joint-partaker : twos, of some-
thing, Eph. iii. 6; v. 7. (Joseph. b. j. 1, 24, 6; Just.
Mart. apol. 2, 13.) *
cup-pintyas [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -0d, 6, an
imitator with others: twos, of one, Phil. iii, 17. Not
found elsewhere.*
ovp-poppite [Tdf. cvv- (cf. ody, II. fin.)]: pres. pass.
ptep. cuppopdiCopevos ; (avppopdos) ; to bring to the same
form with some other pers. or thing, to render like,
(Vulg. configure) : twi [R.V. becoming conformed unto],
Phil. iii. 10 LT Tr WH. Not found elsewhere.*
ovp-popdos, -ov, (cvv and pop dn), having the same form
as another (cf. vv, II. 1], (Vulg. conformis, configuratus) ;
similar, conformed to, [Lceian. amor. 39]: tuwds (cf.
Matthiae § 379 p. 864; [W. 195 (184); B. § 132, 23]),
Ro. viii. 29 (see eixav, a.) ; tTevi (Nicand. th. 321), Phil.
iil. 21 [(here Tdf. ovvp.); cf. W. 624 (580) ].*
ovp-pophda, - : pres. pass. ptcp. cuppoppovpevos ; i. q.
ouppoppi¢e, q.v.: Phil. ili. 10 Rec. Nowhere else.*
oup-rabéo [T WH ovr (cf. ovv, IL. fin.)], -@: 1 aor.
ouverabnaa; (cupmabns) ; a. to be affected with the
same feeling as another, to sympathize with, (Aristot.,
Plut.)2 b. in reference to the wretched, to feel for,
have compassion on, (Vulg. compatior) : tui, Heb. iv. 15
[A. V. to be touched with the feeling of }; x. 84, (Isoer. p.
64b.; Dion. Hal., Plut.).*
ovuprabys, -és, (suv and macyw), suffering or feeling the
like with another, sympathetic: 1 Pet. iii. 8, cf. Ro. xii.
15. (Aristot., Theophr., al.) *
ovp-rapa-yivopat ['T WH ovr (cf. ovy, II. fin.)]: 2 aor.
mid. cupmapeyevouny ; a. to come together: émi tt,
oupTapakanéw
Lk. xxiii. 48 (Ps. Ixxxii. (Ixxxiii.) 9; Hdt., Thuc., Dem.,
Diod.). b. to come to one’s help: rwi, 2 Tim. iv. 16
RG [al. wapayiv., q. v. fin.] *
cup-trapa-Kadew [TWH ovr (ef. avy, II. fin.) ],-@: 1
aor. pass. inf. cupmapakAnOjvat ; 1. to call upon or
invite or exhort at the same time or together (Xen., Plat.,
Plut., al.). 2. to strengthen [A.V. comfort] with
others (souls; see mapaxadéo, II. 4): ovpmapakAnOnvar ev
tpiv, that I with you may be comforted among you, i.e. in
your assembly, with you, Ro. i. 12*
oup-rapa-AapBove |T WH ovv- (cf. ody, I. fin.)]; 2
aor. oupmapéedaBoy; to take along together with (Plat.,
Aristot., Plut., al.); in the N. T. to take with one asa
companion: twa, Acts xii. 25; xv. 37sq.; Gal. ii. 1.*
ovup-trapa-peve : fut. cupmapapevd ; 10 abide together with
(Hippocr., Thue., Dion. Hal., al.) ; to continue to live to-
gether: rwi, with one, Phil. i. 25 (Rec. ; al. rapapéve, q-v.]
(Rs scat (Ixia. )e5-).*
oup-wopepe [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, II. fin.)]; to be pres-
ent together: tui, with one, Acts xxv. 24. [(Hippocr.,
Xen., Dem., al.) ]*
ocup-rdcxe [T WH ovr- (ef. cv, I. fin.)]; to suffer or
feel pain together (in a medical sense, as in Hippocr. and
Galen): 1 Co. xii. 26; to suffer evils (troubles, persecu-
tions) in like manner with another: Ro. viii. 17.*
oup-réprew: 1 aor. cuverenwa; fr. Hdt. down; to send
together with: twa peta Tivos, 2 Co. viii. 183; revi, ibid. 22.
ECEW «$152,455 156]*
cup-rept-AapBave [TWH ovr- (cf. ovv, II. fin.) ]: 2 aor.
ptcp. cupmepiraBor; fr. Plat. and Dem. down; aly
to comprehend at once. 2. to embrace completely :
rwa, Acts xx. 10.*
ocup-mive: 2 aor. cuvémor; fr. [Hdt., Arstph.], Xen.
and Plat. down; to drink with: twi, one, Acts x. 41.*
oup-rirre: 2 aor. cuvérecov; fr. Hom. down; to fall
together, collapse, fall in: of a house, Lk. vi. 49 T Tr
WH
oup-rAnpdw [in Acts T WH ovr- (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -6:
Pass., pres. inf. cuzmAnpovoba; impf. cuverAnpovpny; fr.
Hat. down; 1. to jill completely: ovvemdnpodyro
[R. V. they were filling with water], of the navigators,
(as sometimes in Grk. writ. what holds of the ship is ap-
plied to those on board; cf. Kypke, Observv. i. p. 248),
Lk. viii. 23. 2. to complete antirely, be fulfilled: of
time (see mAnpdw, 2 b. a.), pass., Lk. ix. 51 [R. V. well
nigh come]; Acts il. 1.*
oup-rviyo [T WH ov- (cf. ov, U. fin.)]; impf. cvy-
émviyov; 1 aor. cuvémméa; pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. cvp-
mviyovra; to choke utterly: the seed of the divine word
sown in the mind, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7, 19, (dévdpa
aupnwydueva, Theophr. c. plant. 6,11, 6); ovprviyorrat,
they are choked, i.e. the seed of the divine word in their
minds is choked, Lk. viii. 14; twa, to press round or
throng one so as almost to suffocate him, Lk. viii. 42
fA. V. thronged ].*
ovp-rodtrns [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, I. fin.)], -ov, 6, (see
cuppabnrns and reff.), possessing the same citizenship
with others, a fellow-citizen: cvpmrodira rév dyl@v, spoken
597
TUUpUTOS
of Gentiles as received into the communion of the saints
i. e. of the people consecrated to God, opp. to Eévor x.
mapotkot, Eph. ii. 19. (Eur. Heracl. 826; Joseph. anit.
19, 2, 2; Ael. v. h. 3, 44.) *
ovp-ropevopar [TWH our (cf. odv, IL. fin.)]; impf.
TvvETTOpPEvOUNY 5 1. to go or journey together (Eur.,
Xen., Diod.): tui, with one, Lk. vii. 11; xiv. 25; xxiv.
15, (Lob. v. 8, 95; nav n Wux7 cupuropevbeica Oe, Plat.
Phaedr. p. 249 ¢.; era twos, very often in Sept.). 2
to come together, to assemble: mpds twa, Mk. x. 1 (Polyb.,
Plut.).*
cupTeciov, -ov, Td, (cupmivw), a drinking-party, enter-
tainment, (Lat. convivium); by meton. the party itself,
the guests, (Plut. mor. p. 157 a.; 704d.); plur. rows of
guests: ouprdéova cupmdo.a, Hebraistically for cara aup-
méowa, in parties, by companies, ([B. 30 (27); $129 a. 3;
W. 229 (214); 464 (432)]; see mpaout), Mk. vi. 39.*
cup-mperBitepos ['T WH ow- (cf. ovy, II. fin.) ], -ov, 6,
a fellow-elder, Vulg. consenior, (see mpecBurepos, 2 b.): 1
Pet. v. 1. (Kccles. writ.) *
cup-phdya, see cuvec blo.
ovu-hépw; 1 aor. ptep. cwvevéyxavres (Acts xix. 19);
fr. [Hom. (in mid.)], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; to bear or
bring together (Lat. confero), i. e. 1. with a refer-
ence to the object, to bring together: ri, Acts xix.
19. 2. with a reference to the subject, to bear to-
gether or at the same time ; io carry with others; to collect
or contribute in order to help, hence to help, be profitable,
be expedient; ovppépet, it is expedient, profitable, and
in the same sense with a neut. plur.: with the subject
mavra, 1 Co. vi. 12; x. 233 ri run, 2 Co. viii. 10; with
an inf. of the object (as in Grk. writ.), Mt. xix. 10; 2 Co.
xii. 1 (where L T Tr WH have cupudepov); with the
ace. and inf. Jn. xviii. 14; cupéper revi foll. by iva (see
iva, II. 2c. [B. § 139,45; W. 337 (316)]), Mt. v. 29 sq.;
xvili. 6; Jn. xi. 50; xvi. 7. 1d cupdépov, that which is
profitable (Soph., Eur., Xen., Dem., al.) : 1 Co. xii. 7;
plur. (Plat. de rep. 1 p. 341 e.), Acts xx. 20; advan-
tage, profit, Heb. xii. 10; 7d cup. rwds (often in Grk.
writ.) the advantage of one, one’s profit, 1 Co. vii. 35;
x. 33, (in both which pass. LT Tr WH read ovpdopor,
Ceavayen
obp-bnpt [T WH ovr- (cf. ody, I. fin.)]; to consent,
confess: twit foll. by drt, Ro. vii. 16. (Tragg., Xen.,
Plat.) *
otp-hopos, -ov, (cunpepa, q: V-), fil, suitable, useful ; fr.
[Hes., Theogn.], Hdt. down; 4 Macc. v.10; subst. ro
adupopor, advantage, profit: with a gen. of the pers.
profited, LT Tr WH in 1 Co. vii. 35; x. 33, [ef. B. § 127,
i9 n.], (plur. ra ovpdopa, often in prof. auth. [fr. Soph.
down ]}).*
ovp-budérys, -ov, 6, (avy and dun; see cuppabynrns).
one who is of the same people, a fellow-countryman,
(Vulg. contribulis): 1 Th. ii. 14. (Eccles. writ.) *
cip-dutos, -ov, (cunpio), planted together (Vulg. com-
plantatus) ; born together with, of joint origin, i. e. 1.
connate, congenital, innate, implanted by birth or nature,
(3 Mace. iii. 22; Pind., Plat., Aeschyl., Aeschin., Aristot.,
cuppvw
Philo de Abrah. § 31 init.; Joseph. [as, c. Ap. 1, 8,
5]). 2. grown together, united with, (Theophr. de
caus. plant. 5, 5, 2); kindred (Plat. Phaedr. p. 246 a.):
ei oupdutor yeydvapev TH Sporwpare Tov Oavarov avtod,
GdAa kal (sc. TG dporwpare [al. supply Xprorg, and take
the éporpare as a dat. of respect; for yet another constr.
of the second clause cf. B. § 132, 23]) ts avaordcews
éodpeba, if we have become united with the likeness of his
death (which likeness consists in the fact that in the
death of Christ our former corruption and wickedness
has been slain and been buried in Christ’s tomb), i. e.
if it is part and parcel of the very nature of a genuine
Christian to be utterly dead to sin, we shall be united also
with the likeness of his resurrection i. e. our intimate fel-
lowship with his return to life will show itself in a new
life consecrated to God, Ro. vi. 5.*
[ovup-pio (T WH ov cf. ody, II. fin.): 2 aor. pass.
ptep. nom. plur. fem. cuppvetcat ; 1. trans. to cause
to grow together (Plat., Aristot.). 2. pass. intrans.
to grow together, grow with: Lk. viii. 7.* ]
cup-hovéw, -6; fut. cuppovnow ([Mt. xviii. 19 T Tr;
Lk. v.36 LT Tr txt. WH]); 1 aor. cuvepornoa; 1 aor.
pass. cuvepovnOnv; fr. Plat. and Aristot. down; prop. to
sound together, be in accord; of sounds and of musical
instruments. In the N. T. trop. to be in accord, to har-
monize, i. e. a. to agree together: mepi (as respects)
tivos, Mt. xviii. 19 (Dion. Hal. 2, 47); rwi, with a thing,
Acts xv. 15 (often in Grk. auth.); to agree i. e. corre-
spond, of things congruous in nature, Lk. v. 36; pass.
ouvepavnOn dir, foll. by an inf., if was agreed between you
to etc. Acts v. 9. b. to agree with one in making a
bargain, to make an agreement, to bargain, (Polyb., Diod.) :
peta tvos ex Snvapiov (see éx, II. 4), Mt. xx. 2; w.a dat.
of the pers. and gen. of the price, ibid. 13, (cuvepavnoey
per avdtov tpiay AiTp@v donuwov apyvpiov, Act. Thom.
§ 2).
Tvp-havycis, -ews, 7, (cuupwvew), concord, agreement :
mpos twa, with one, 2 Co. vi. 15. (Eccl. writ.) *
cupdavia, -as, 7, (cvppovos), [fr. Plat. down], music:
Lk. xv. 25. (Polyb. 26, 10,5; [plur. of ‘the music of
the spheres,’ Aristot. de caelo 2, 9 p. 290°, 22; al.]) *
cbipdavos, -ov, (cvv and dey), fr. [Hom. h. Mere. 51;
Soph. ], Plat., Aristot. down, harmonious, accordant, agree-
ing; Td cvppevoy, thing agreed upon, compact, [Epict.
diss. 1,19, 27]: && oupdovov, by mutual consent, by
agreement, 1 Co. vii. 5 (ef. W. 303 (285); B.§ 139, 20]*
oup-pnpite: 1 aor. cuvengica; to compute, count up:
tas tiuds, Acts xix. 19. (Mid. rivi, to vote with one, Ar-
stph. Lys. 142.) *
cbp-poxos [T WH ovr (cf. avy, II. fin.) ], -ov, (avy and
vex), of one mind (Vulg. unanimis): of one accord,
Phil. ii. 2. (Ecel. writ.) *
ov [the older form évy is still found in some edd. in
composition (as £up-Baivw, 1 Pet. iv. 12 Recbe?; see L.
and S. s. v. init.; cf. 3, 0, s)], a preposition; it is never
used in the Apocalypse, rarely by Matthew [some four
times (texts vary) ], Mark [some five times, or John (three
times) ], (who prefer perd), more frequently by Luke
598
,
Oup
[(Gospel and Acts) about 79 times] and Paul [about 39
times; on the comparative frequency of these prepp. in
the classics, see L. and S.s. v. ad init.]. It takes the Da-
tive after it, and denotes accompaniment and fellowship,
whether of action, or of belief, or of condition and ex-
perience; (acc. to the grammarians [cf. Donaldson, New
Crat.§181; Kriiger § 68, 13,1; Kiihner ii. p.438]; W.
391 (366), a fellowship far closer and more intimate
than that expressed by perd, although in the N. T.
this distinction is much oftener neglected than observed).
Latin cum, Eng. with.
1 1. Passages in which the subject of an active
verb is said to be or to do something avy run; a.
phrases in which ovv is used of accompaniment: eipt
avy Ti i. e. — to be with one, to accompany one, Lk. vii. 12;
viii. 38 (Mk. v.18 per adrovd) ; xxii. 56 (Mt. xxvi. 69 and
Mk. xiv. 67 pera); Acts xxvii. 2; to associate with one,
Lk. xxiv. 44; Acts iv. 13; xiii.7; Phil. i. 23; Col. ii. 5;
2 Pet. 1.183; of ovv rim dvres, the attendants of one on a
journey, Mk. ii. 26 (Mt. xii. 4 and Lk. vi. 4 rots per’ avrod);
Acts xxii. 9; of ody tit sc. dvres, — either the compan-
ions of one, Lk. v. 9; ix.32; xxiv. 24, 33; with the noun
added, of ctv enol rdvtes ddeAoi, Gal. i. 2; Ro. xvi. 14;
or one’s colleagues, Acts v. 17, 21; of ody ait@ te-
xvirat, his fellow-craftsmen, Acts xix. 38; efyi ovy tim, to
be on one’s side, Acts xiv. 4 (Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 77); to assist
one, ) xapts TOU Oeov (Hn) adv epoi, 1 Co. xv. 10. b.
ovy ti joined to verbs of standing, sitting, going,
ete.: graOjva, Acts ii. 14; ornvar, Actsiv.143; émorjvat,
Lk. xx. 1; Acts xxiii. 27; xka@ioa, Acts viii. 31; péveuw,
Lk. i.56; xxiv. 29; Acts xxviii. 16; dvamimrew, Lk. xxii.
14; yiverOa, to be associated with, Lk. ii. 13; mapayive-
oOa, to arrive, Acts xxiv. 24; épyerOa, Jn. xxi.3; Acts
xi. 12; 2 Co.ix. 4; dmépyecOa, Acts v. 26; ciaepyerOat,
Acts lil. 8; xxv. 233; eiovévar, Acts xxi. 18; ouvépyeoOat,
Acts xxi. 16; e&pyeoOai, Jn. xviii. 1; Acts x. 23; xiv.
20; xvi.3; mopeverOa, Lk. vii. 6; Acts x. 20; xxiii. 32
[LT Tr WH azmépyeoOar]; xxvi. 13; 1 Co. xvi. 43 ds0-
deve, Lk. viii. 1 sq.; exe, Acts xviii. 18. with verbs
of living, dying, believing: (jv, 1 Th. v. 10; dzo-
Oynoxewv, Mt. xxvi.35; Ro. vi.8; meorevecv, Acts xviii. 8.
with other verbs: Acts v..1; xiv. 13; xx. 36; xxi. 5;
Philsiif 22.vdasarellr 2. Passages in which one is
said to be the recipient of some action ovv tim, or to be
associated with one to whom some action has reference:
— dative, rwi ovv tun: as bok trois atoatdéAos odbv GAN
TH exkAnoia, Acts xv. 22, where if Luke had said cat édq
7H €xkAnoia he would have claimed for the church the
same rank as for the apostles; but he wishes to give to
the apostles the more influential position; the same ap-
plies also to Acts xxiii. 15; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co.i. 1; Phil.
i. 1. Accusative, odv ruvi (which precedes) twa or re
(the pers. or thing added): Ro. viii. 32 (ody avrT@, i. e.
since he has given him to us); Mk. xv. 27; 1 Co. x. 13;
Twa or ti avy tem (the pers. or thing associated or
added): Mt. xxv. 27; Mk. viii. 34; 2 Co.i. 21; Col. ii.
13; iv. 9; rt ody Tum, a thing with its power or result,
Gal. v. 24; Col. iii. 9: ris or r} ody ru after passives, as
s
Ouy
Mt. xxvii. 38; Mk. ix. 4; Lk. xxiii. 32; 1 Co. xi. S25
Gal. iii. 9; Col. ili. 3 sq. ; 1 Th. iv, 17. 3. It stands
where xai might have been used (cf. B. 331 (285)) :
eyevero Spun « - Iovdaiwv ody rois dpyovow avrev (equiv.
to Kai Trav apx. adr. )» Acts xiv. 5; add, Lk. xxiii. 11;
Acts ili.4; x.2; xxiii. 15; Eph. iis. 4. Of that
which one has or carries with him, or with which he is
furnished or equipped (ody dppacw, 3 Mace. ii. 7; ody
omAous, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3,54; many other exx. fr. Grk. writ.
are given by Passow s. v. B. I. 2a.; [L. and S. I. 4]):
ovy TH XdpiTe Tavrn, carrying with him this gift or bounty,
2 Co. viii. 19 RG T cod. Sin. (L Tr WH év rf yap. 7. in
procuring [R. V.in the matter of] this benefit); adv r7
Suvaper Tod Kupiov nuay I. Xp. equipped with the power
of our Lord Jesus Christ, 1 Co. v. 4 (so ace. to many in-
terpreters [cf. W. 391 (366)]; but since the N.T. writ-
ers are wont to designate the powers and virtues with
which one is equipped by the preposition év, it is more
correct to connect ody r7 duv. with cvvaybévrwr, so that
7 Svvapis tT. kvpiov is personified and represented as the
third subject in the gathering; cf. Mt. xviii. 20 [see
Svvayts, a. sub fin.]). 5. civ Xptor@ (jv, to live
with Christ, i.e. united (in spiritual bonds) to him, and
to lead a strong life by virtue of this union, 2 Co. xiii. 4;
avy (Rec.) xepi dyyedov (see yelp), Acts vii. 35 LT Tr
WH. 6. Of the union which arises from the ad-
dition or accession of one thing to another: ody maou
tovtows, our ‘beside all this’ [W. 391 (866)], Lk. xxiv. 21
(Neh. v. 18; 3 Mace. i. 22; Joseph. antt. 17, 6,5). 7.
On the combination dua oiv,1 Th. iv. 17; v. 10, see
dpa, fin.
II. In composition avy denotes ab,
community, fellowship, participation :
associa-
tion, TUVOLKED,
cvvepl, cvyyerns, TUppoppos, avlqv, cupmdacyew, ovy-
xpacba, ete. 2. together, i. e. several persons or
things united or all in one; as, cvyxepavyum, cvykrelo,
auyKkaréa, gvAdAyo, gvykopifw, etc. 3. completely:
ovykunT@, cvyKkadumTa, etc. 4. with one’s self, i. e.
in one’s mind: ovAAvréopat [but see the word ], cvvo.da,
auveidnots, avvtnpéw; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 642 sq.
Once or twice in the N.T. after verbs compounded with
avy the preposition is repeated before the object [W.
§ 52, 4,15]: Mt. xxvii. 44 L T Tr WH; Col. ii. 13.
As to its Form, avy in composition before 8, p, m, >,
wy, passes into cup-, before d into avi-, before Vs & X into
avy-; before ¢[and o foll. by a consonant] it is elided,
hence ov(qv, cvtnréw, cvotavpdo, avoréhdo. But in the
older mantscripts assimilation and elision are often ne-
elected (cf. év, III. fin.). Following their authority, LT
Tr WH write ouvtae, ouvgyrea, ovutntntyns, svvcvyos,
cuvoraupso, ovvotpariarns, ctvowpos; ‘TI WH ovrBaor-
devo, ouvyrapn, ovved On pat, ovvkabicw, cvveakorrabew, ouy-
KakOVXE®, CTUVKAAE@, CUVKAPTTO, ouvkaraBaive, ovvearabe-
ots, ovvKatariOnps, ouvearaynpi iCw, ouvKepavirpt, ouvkielo,
auvednpovdpos, cuvKowavew, cuvKowaves, cvvKpive, (?Aguv-
Kptros), cuvkint@, TuvAAAew, TUVAUTEW, TUYpAONTNS, Desai
TUPE@, TUYPETOXOS, TUYPLENTHS, ovyrabew, ouvmapayivonat,
guvrapakadéo, ovyrapadapBdvo. ovvTapeysl, TvvTaTXe,
599
Guy ayo
ouvireptAauBuva, ourrulyw auvroNirns, cuvrropevouat, Our
mpeaButepos, ouvuTevdlw, ovvatoixew, oivpnit, cuvpria,
Tuvyaipw, guvxpdopat, ouvyéw, ovvvxos; L Tr mrg.
auvnrnois; LT avvpopdpite, cvvonuov; Tr cvvorarids ;
WH ovBdA@, cv BiBdlo, curpepita, cvvoexnparifo.
But L T Tr WH retain ovyyeveta, ovyyerns, ovykahinra,
cvykupia, avyxuats, cvAAEyo, TupBaiva, cupBovArcva, cup-
Bovdov, cipBovdos, cuprabys, cuuTdc.ov, cuppepo, ovp-
opos, ouuuderns, ovuutos, cuppavea, cuppovnats
cuppavia, cippavos (acvppavos), cvaTpepa, cvarpopy ;
LT Tr cuppepifo; LT WH ovyyevis, cvoratixnds; L
Tr WH ovppophito, cvupophos, cvconpov; L Tr ovy-
youn, cvyKaOnpat, cvyKabiCw, cvykakormabew, TuyKaKoUXEw,
ovykaew, cvyxdunt@, cvykataBaivo, cuyxatdbects, ovyKa-
tatlOnut, ovyxaraynpilw, ovykepdvyume, ovykdel@, ovyKAN-
povdpos, ovyKoWwwvew, ovykowavds, cUyKpivw, TUYKTTA,
avyxXaipw, Tvyxew, TvyXpdopat, TVANAAEwW, TUAAUTEwW, TUP-
Barro, cupBaothevo, oupBiBalo, cvppabntns, cuppaptr-
pe@, TUMpLETOXOS, TUMMLNTHS, TUpTAGew, TUETapayivou.at,
oupmapakaéw, cupmapadapBdvea, cupmrdpeut, cupmrdcya,
ouptrepiapBavo, cupTAnpdw, cupTviyw, oupToNitns, TUp-
mopevopmat, gvpmperBtepos, TYupnut, Tuunpve, Tuuxos,
avotevatw, ovotoxyew; LL cvddapBdve, cvoynpatico.
Tdf. is not uniform in ovAAapBava, cupBardro, cvpBiBalo,
oUppophos, cupmAnpdo, cvoxynuatiCw; nor l'r in ovAdap-
Bave, cvoynpati¢a; nor WH in ovAdAapBave, cvprAnpde.
These examples show that assimilation takes place
chiefly in those words in which the preposition has lost,
more or less, its original force and blends with the
word to which it is prefixed into a single new idea; as
avpBovrLov, cuppépet, ovpopos. Cf. [ Alex. Buttmann
in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1862, p. 180]; Philip Buttmann
(the son) ibid. p. 811 sq. [But see Dr. Gregory’s expo-
sition of the facts in the Proleg. to Tdf. p. 73 sq.; Dr.
Hort in WH. App. p. 149; Meisterhans, Gram. d. Att.
Inschr. § 24.]
ovv-dyo ; fut. cvva€o; 2 aor. cuynyayov; Pass., pres.
cuvayopar; pf. ptep. ovvnypevos; 1 aor. cumnxOnv; 1 fut.
ovvaxOjcopuat; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for ox, 2p
and yap}; a. to gather together, to gather: with an
ace. of the thing, Lk. xv. 13; Jn. vi. 12. sq.; xv. 6; har-
vests, dGev, Mt. xxv. 24, 26; with els re added, Mt. iii. 12;
vi. 26; xiii. 830; Lk. iii. 17; wov, Lk. xii. 17; éxet, Lk.
xii. 18; ouvdyew xapmov eis Conv aimvoy (see xapros, 2
d.), Jn. iv. 36; ocuvdye pera tevos, Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23;
to draw together, collect : fishes, —of a net in which they
are caucht, Mt. xiii. 47. b. to bring together, assem-
ble, collect: aiypadwoiay (i. e. aiypadorous), Rev. xiii. 10
RG; els aiypadrociay, i. €. Twds, ot Sow aiypddroror, Rev.
xiii. 10 Led. min.; to join together, join in one (those
previously separated): ra réxva tov Oeov ta duecxopme-
opéva eis év, Jn. xi. 52, (curakew eis Ev ra Cyn kal rornoew
guriav, Dion. Hal. 2, 45; das eis hidiav ovvdgovat ra
On, ibid.) ; to gather together by convoking: rwds, Mt.
ii. 4; xxii. 10; cuvedptov, Jn. xi. 47; rhv ékxAnoiay, Acts
xiv. 27; 7d wAjOos, Acts xv. 30; rwvds eis with an acc.
of place, Rev. xvi. 16; ets rév moAepoy, in order to en-
gage in war, Rev. xvi. 14: xx. 8: émi ria, unto one, Mt.
ovvayoy)
xxvii. 27. Pass. to be gathered i.e. come together, gather,
meet, [cf. B. 52 (45)]: absol., Mt. xxii. 415 xxvii. 17; Mk.
ii. 2; Lk. xxii. 66; Acts xiii. 44; xv.6; xx. 7; 1Co.v.
4; Rev. xix. 19; with the addition of eis and an ace. of
place, Mt. xxvi. 3; Acts iv. 5; eis Setmvov, Rev. xix. 17;
éumpoobev tivos, Mt. xxv. 32; emt twa, unto one, Mk. v.
21; émi rd adr [see adros, III. 1], Mt. xxii. 34; Acts iv.
26; éni twa, against one, Acts iv. 27; mpds twa, unto
one, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvil. 62; Mk. iv. 1; vi. 30; vil.1; ev
with dat. of the place, Acts iv. 31; €v rH éxcdnaia, Acts
xi. 26; werd twos, Mt. xxviii.12; with adverbs of place:
ob, Mt. xviii. 20; Acts xx. 8; dmov, Mt. xxvi. 57; Jn.
xx. 19 RG; eked, Jn. xviii. 2; Mt. xxiv. 28; Lk. xvii.
387 RGL. c. to lead with one’s self sc. unto one’s
home, i. e.to recewe hospitably, to entertain, [A.V. to take
in]: &évov, Mt. xxv. 35, 38, 43, (with the addition of eis
ri oikiay, eis Tov ockov, Deut. xxii. 2; Josh. 1.18; Judg.
xix. 18, ete.). [Comp.: ém-cuvayo.]*
ovv-ayoyh, -7s, 7, (avvayw), Sept. for 7p and very
often for A1y. In Grk. writ. a bringing together, gather-
ing (as of fruits), a contracting; an assembling together of
men. In the N. T. 1. an assembly of men: tov
Sarava, whom Satan governs, Rev. ii. 9; iil. 9. 2.
@ synagogue, i. e. a. an assembly of Jews formally
gathered together to offer prayer and listen to the reading
and exposition of the Holy Scriptures; assemblies of the
sort were held every sabbath and feast-day, afterwards
also on the second and fifth days of every week [see
reff. below]: Lk. xii. 11; Acts ix. 25; xiil.43; xxvi.11;
the name is transferred to an assembly of Christians
formally gathered for religious purposes, Jas. ii. 2(Epiph.
haer. 30, 18 says of the Jewish Christians cuvaywyny
ovrot KaNovat THY éavT@v exkAnolay Kai ovxt exxdAnoiav [cf.
Bp. Lghtft. on Philip. p. 192]); [ef. Zrench, Syn. § 1,
and esp. Harnack’s elaborate note on Herm. mand. 11,
9 Cless fully and accurately in Hilgenfeld’s Zeitschr. f.
wiss. Theol. for 1876, p. 102 sqq.) respecting the use of
the word by the church Fathers of the 2d, 3d, and 4th
centuries; cf. Hilgenfeld’s comments on the same in his
‘Hermae Pastor’, ed. alt. p. 183 sq. ]. b. the build-
ing where those solemn Jewish assemblies are held (Hebr.
D130 3, i. e. ‘the house of assembly’). Synagogues
seem to date their origin from the Babylonian exile. In
the time of Jesus and the apostles every town, not only
in Palestine but also among the Gentiles if it contained
a considerable number of Jewish inhabitants, had at least
one synagogue, the larger towns several or even many.
That the Jews held trials and even inflicted punishments
in them, is evident from such pass. as Mt. x. 17; xxiii. 34;
Mike xiii. 95 (ik. xii 1s) xxigt2s) Alctsiix: 2; xxii. 19)
xxvi. 11. They are further mentioned in Mt. iv. 23; vi.
2,55 1x. 85; xii. 95 xiii. 54; xxiii. 6; Mk. i. 21, 23, 29, 39.
ili. 15 vi. 2; xii. 39; Lk. iv. 15 sq. 20, 28, 33, 38, 44; vi. 6;
vil. 5; vill. 41; [xi. 43]; xiii. 10; xx. 46; Jn. vi. 59; xviii.
20 [here the anarthrous (so G LT Tr WH) sing. has an
indef. or generic force (R. V. txt. in synagogues) ]; Acts
Wig 93) 1x20 5 exit. O14, 42 Rec rexivesllexyveolemexval
1,10;17; xviii. 4, 7,19, 26; xix. 8; xxiv. 12; xxvi. 11;
600
cuvarrA\aoow
(Joseph. antt. 19, 6,3; b. j. 2, 14, 4. [5; 7, 3, 3; Philo,
quod omn. prob. lib. § 12]). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Syn-
agogen; Leyrer in Herzog ed. 1, xv. p. 299 sqq.; Schiirer,
N. T. Zeitgesch. § 27 (esp. ii.) ; Kneucker in Schenkel
v. p. 443 sq.; [Hamburger, Real-Encycl. ii. p. 1142 sqq.;
Ginsburg in Alex.’s Kitto, s. v. Synagogue; Hdersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. x. ].*
ovv-ayovitopat: 1 aor. mid. inf. cywvaywvicacda; fr.
Thuc. and Xen. down; to strive together with one, to help
one in striving: Twi év rais mpocevxais, in prayers, i. e. to
offer intense prayers with one, Ro. xv. 30; in what sense
intense prayer may be likened to a struggle, see Philippi
ad loc. [(cf. dyevi¢. in Col. iv. 12 and Bp. Lghtft.’s note) ].*
cvv-abdrdw, -3; 1 aor. auvnOAnoa; to strive at the same
time with another: with a dat. commodi[cef. W. § 31, 4],
for something, Phil. i. 27; rwi év run, together with one in
something, Phil. iv.3. (univ. to heip, assist, Diod. 3, 4.) *
ovv-a0poitw: 1 aor. ptep. cuvabpoicas; pf. pass. ptep.
sumOpocpevos; fr.[Eur., Arstph., al.], Isocr. down; Sept.
chiefly for y2P and Yap5 % gather together with others ;
to assemble: twas, Acts xix. 25; pass. to be gathered to-
gether i. e. come together, Lk. xxiv. 33 RG; Acts xii. 12.*
cvv-aipw; 1 aor. inf. cvvapar; 1. to take up to-
gether with another or others. 2. to bring together
with others: déyov, to cast up or settle accounts, to make a
reckoning with, (an expression not found in Grk. auth.),
Mt. xviii. 23 sq.; jera twos, Mt. xxv. 19.*
Tvv-arxpddaros, -ov, 6, a fellow-prisoner (Vulg. concap-
tivus): Ro. xvi. 7; Col. iv. 10; Philem. 23, (Leian. asin.
27). [Cf Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. ¢.; Fritzsche, Com. on
Rom. vol. i. p. xxi. note.]*
cvy-aKodovbew, -&; impf. cvynKodovbovyv; 1 aor. cuvnko-
AovOnoa; fr. Arstph., Thuc., Isocr. down; to follow to-
gether with others, to accompany: tivi, one, Mk. v. 37
{where Lehm. dxodov9.]; xiv.51 LT Tr WH; Lk. xxiii.
49.*
cvy-aritw: (cvy, and ddi¢w fr. dAns, crowded, in a mass;
[ef. rvors, init.]); to gather together, assemble; pass.
pres. ptep. cvvadi(duevos; to be assembled, meet with: rivi,
with one, Acts i. 4, where adrois is to be supplied. (Hadt.,
Xen., [Plut. de placit. phil. 902], Joseph., Leian., Jambl.)
[But Meyer defends the rendering given by some of the
ancient versions (cf. Tdf.’s note ad loc.) eating with (de-
riving the word from oivados), so A. V. and R. V. mrg.;
such passages as Manetho 5, 339; Clem. hom. 13, 4 (al-
though Dressel after cod. Ottob. reads here cuvavA.— yet
the recogn. 7, 29 renders cibum sumimus) ; Chrysost. iii.
88 c. (ed. Migne iii. i. 104 mid.); 89 a. (ibid. bottom) ;
91d. (ibid. 107 mid.), seem to give warrant for this in-
terpretation; cf. Valckenaer, Opusce. ii. p. 277 sq. But
see at length Woolsey in the Bib. Sacr. for Oct. 1882,
pp. 605-618.]*
ovv-alddcow: (see kara\Adcow) ; to reconcile (Thuc.,
Xen., Plat., Dio Cass.; in diff. senses by diff. prof. auth.) :
oumAXaoaev adtovs eis eiphynv, (Vulg. reconciliabat, i. e.
sought to reconcile), conative impf. [ef. B. 205 (178);
R. V. would have set them at one again], Acts vii. 26 L'T
Tr WH [see cuvedatve].*
,: /
ovvavaBaivw
ovv-ava-Baive: 2 aor. cuvaveBnv; to ascend at the same
time, come up together with to a higher place: tw, with
one, foll. by ets with the acc. of the place, Mk. xv. 41;
Acts xiii. 31. (Hdt., Xen., Dion. Hal., Strabo, al.; Sept.
several times for my Bie
ovv-avd-Kerar; 3 pers. plur. impf. cuvarékewro; to re-
cline together, feast together, [A. V. ‘sit down with’, ‘sit at
meat with’, (cf. dvdxeiar) |: Twi, with one, Mt. ix. 10;
Mk. ii. 15; Lk. xiv.10; Jn. xii. 2 Ree.; of ovvavakelevot,
[‘they that sat at meat with’], the guests, Mt. xiv. 9;
MK. vi. 22, 26 [RGL]; Lk. vii. 49; xiv. 15. ([8 Mace.
v. 39]; eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
ovv-ava-piyvup.: to mix up together; Pass., pres. impv.
2 pers. plur. -piyvvoe; inf. -wiyyvcOar; reflex. and met-
aph. rivi, to keep company with, be intimate with, one:
1 Co. v. 9, 11; 2 Th. iii. 14 [here R T -c6e, L Tr WH
-78a.]. (Plut. Philop. 21; [Sept. Hos. vii. 8 Alex.].) *
ovv-ava-travopar: 1 aor. subj. cvvavaratcopar; to take
rest together with: revi, with one, Is. xi. 6; to sleep together,
to lie with, of husband and wife (Dion. Hal., Plut.); met-
aph. ruvi, to rest or refresh one’s spirit with one (i. e. to give
and get refreshment by mutual intercourse), Ro. xv. 32
[Lehm. om. ].*
ovv-avtdw, -d: fut. cyvavTnow; 1 aor. cuvnyrnoa; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. for y39, wid, 77, OP, ete.; to meet
with: ri, Lk. ix. [18 WH mrg.], 37; xxii. 10; Acts x.
25; Heb. vii. 1 [ef. B. 293 (252)], 10; trop. of events,
to happen, to befall: Acts xx. 22 (Plut. Sulla 2; mid. ra
cuvayt@peva, Polyb. 22, 7,14; the Hebr. mp also is used
of events, Eccles. ii. 14; ix. 11; etc.).*
cvy-dyTycts, -ews, 7, a meeting with (Kurip. Ion 535;
Dion. Hal. antt. 4, 66): eis ovvdvrnciv rin, to meet one
[B. § 146, 3], Mt. viii. 34 RG (for DSP, Gen. xiv. 17;
See LO MUX dive 20) VILE).
ovv-avTi-AapBdvonar; 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing.
ovvavTirdBnra.; to lay hold along with, to strive to obtain
with others, help in obtaining, (rns éhevOepias, Diod. 14, 8);
to take hold with another (who is laboring), hence univ.
to help: wei, one, Lk. x. 40; Ro. viii. 26, (Ps. lxxxviii.
(Ixxxix.) 22; Ex. xviii. 22; Joseph. antt. 4, 8, 4).*
cvy-an-ayo: Pass., pres. ptep. wvvamayopeves; 1 aor.
suvannxOnv; to lead away with or together: trmov, Xen.
Cyr. 8, 3, 23; tpinpecs, Hell. 5,1, 28; rov Aadv ped Eavrod,
Sept. Ex. xiv. 6; pass. metaph. to be carried away with:
with dat. of the thing, i. e. by a thing, so as to experi-
ence with others the force of that which carries away
(Zosim. hist. 5, 6, 9 adry 7 Sraprn cuvamnyero Th Kowy THs
‘PAAddos dAdoet), to follow the impulse of a thing to
what harmonizes with it, Gal. ii. 13; 2 Pet. iii. 17; to
suffer one’s self to be carried away together with (some-
thing that carries away), rois rarewois (opp. to ra dyna
poveiv), i.e. to yield or submit one’s self to lowly things,
conditions, employments, —not to evade their power,
Ro. xii. 16.*
ovy-aro-SyicKw: 2 aor. cvvarébavoy; to die together;
with dat. of the pers. to die with one (Sir. xix. 10, and
often in Grk. auth. fr. Hdt. down): Mk. xiv. 31; sc.
Suds épuoi, that ye may die together with me, i.e. that my
601
ouvoéw
love to you may not leave me even were I appointed to
die, 2 Co. vii. 3; sc. 7 Xprore@ [cf. W. 143 (136) ], to meet
death as Christ did for the cause of God, 2 Tim. ii. 11.*
cvv-ar-d\Avpe: 2 aor. mid. cvvam@Aduny ; fr. Hdt. down;
to destroy together (Ps. xxv. (xxvi.) 9); mid. to perish
together (to be slain along with): twwi, with one, Heb. xi.
Silk
ovv-arro-orehAw: 1 aor. guvaréctetha; to send with:
tid, 2 Co. xii. 18. (Sept.; Thuc., Xen., Dem., Plut.,
al.) *
ovv-appodoyew, -@: pres. pass. ptep. cvvappodoyovpervos ;
(appoddyos binding, joining; fr. dpuds a joint, and Aéye);
o join closely together; to frame together: oixoSoun, the
parts of a building, Eph. ii. 21; cépa, the members of
the body, Eph. iv. 16. (Kccles. writ.; classic writ. use
cvvappdcoey and cuvappd ev.) * <
ocvv-apratw: 1 aor. cvyypraca; plupf. cvynpmdxew ; 1
aor. pass. cvvnpraacOny; to seize by force: twa, Acts vi.
12; xix. 29; to catch or lay hold of (one, so that he is
no longer his own master), Lk. viii. 29; to seize by force
and carry away, Acts xxvii.15, (Tragg., Arstph., Xen.,
al.) *
cvy-avtave : to cause to grow together; pres. inf. pass.
ovvavéaver Oa, to grow together: Mt xiii. 30. (Xen,
Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.) *
ovvB-, see ovpB- and ov», II. fin.
ovvy-, see cvyy- and ov», II. fin.
otv-Seo pos, -ov, 6, (cvvdé@) ; 1. that which binds to-
gether, a band, bond: of the ligaments by which the mem-
bers of the human body are united together (Eur. Hipp.
199; Tim. Locr. p. 100 b. [i.e. 3, 3, p. 386 ed. Bekk.] ;
Aristot. h. a. 10, 7, 3 p. 638°, 9; Galen), Col. ii. 19
[where see Bp. Lghtft.]; trop.: 76 cuvdéop@ rips eipyrys,
i. e. 7H eipnyn as cuvdéopo, Eph. iv. 3 (civdeopos edvoias
x. prdcas, Plut. Num. 6); iris éort ovvd. rhs redevsrnTos,
that in which all the virtues are so bound together that
perfection is the result, and not one of them is wanting
to that perfection, Col. iii. 14 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].
eis ovvdSerpov adicias 6p oe dvra, I see that you have
fallen into (cf. ejyi, V. 2 a. p. 179%, and see below) the
bond of iniquity, i.e. forged by iniquity to fetter souls,
Acts viii. 23 (the phrase ovv6. adixias occurs in another
sense in Is. lviii. 6). 2. that which is bound to-
gether, a bundle: prop. ovvd. émioroday, IIdian. 4, 12,
11 [6 ed. Bekk.]; hence some interpreters think that
by atvd. adixias, in Acts viii. 23 above, Simon is described
as “a bundle of iniquity”, compacted as it were of iniq-
uity, (just as Cic. in Pison. 9, 21 calls a certain man “ani-
mal ex omnium scelerum importunitate ...concretum”’);
but besides the circumstance that this interpretation is
extremely bold, no examples can be adduced of this
tropical use of the noun.*
cvv-8é0: in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down; 1. to tie
together, to bind together. 2. to bind or fasten on all
sides. 3. to bind just as (i. e. Jointly with) another :
pf. pass. ptcep. os cvvdedeuevor, as fellow-prisoners A.V.
as bound with them], Heb. xiii. 3 (cuvdedeuevos 7G ot
voxdw, Joseph. antt. 2, 5, Be
ovvdokato
ovv-Sofdtw: 1 aor. pass. cvvedo£doOnv; 1. to ap-
prove together, join in approving: vopor cvvdedogacpevor
ind navrov, Aristot. pol. 5, 7 (9), 20 p. 1310°, 15. Be,
to glorify together (Vulg. conglorifico) : sc. oly XpurT@, to
be exalted to the same glory to which Christ has been
raised, Ro. viii. 17.*
oby-Sovdos, -ov, 6, (avy and doidos), a fellow-servant ;
one who serves the same master with another; thus used
of a. the associate of a servant (or slave) in the
proper sense: Mt. xxiv. 49. b. one who with others
serves (ministers to) a king: Mt. xviii. 28, 29, 31,33. — c.
the colleague of one who is Christ’s servant in publishing
the gospel: Col. i. 7; iv. 7 [(where cf. Bp. Lghtft.)]. d.
one who with others acknowledges the same Lord, Jesus,
and obeys his commands: Rev. vi. 11. e. one who
with others is subject to the same divine authority in the
Messianic economy: so of angels as the fellow-servants
of Christians, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 9. (Moeris says, p.
273, duddovdos arrikds, avvdovdos eAAnuikds. But the
word is used by Arstph., Eur., Lysias.) *
cvvdpou.4, -7s, 7, (cuvrpexw), a running together, con-
course, esp. hostile or riotous: Acts xxi. 30. (Aristot.
rhetor. 3, 10 p. 14114, 29; Polyb., Diod., al.; 3 Mace.
DL, 3)
ovv-eyelpo: 1 aor. cuvyyetpa; 1 aor. pass. cumyepOny ;
to raise together, to cause torise together; Vule.conresuscilo
[also conresurgo, resurgo]; (ra memtwxdra, 4 Mace. ii. 14;
pass. to rise together from their seats, Is. xiv. 9; trop.
Avmas xai Opyvovs, Plut. mor. p. 117 c¢.); in the N. T.
trop. to raise up together from moral death (see Oava-
tos, 2) to a new and blessed life devoted to God: nuas
7 Xpior@ (risen from the dead, because the ground of
the new Christian life lies in Christ’s resurrection), Eph.
ii. 6; Col. iii. 1; é» Xpuor@, Col. ii. 12.*
ovvedpiov, -ov, Td, (cvv and édpa; hence prop. ‘a sitting
together’), in Grk. auth. fr. Hdt. down, any assembly
(esp. of magistrates, judges, ambassadors), whether con-
vened to deliberate or to pass judgment; Vulg. concilium ;
in the Scriptures 1. any session or assembly of per-
sons deliberating or adjudicating (Prov. xxii. 10; Ps. xxv.
(xxvi.) 45 Jer. xv. 17; 2 Mace. xiv. 5; 4 Mace. xvii.
17): cumyayor ovvédpror, [A. V. gathered a council], Jn.
xi. 47. 2. spec. a. the Sanhedrin, the great council
at Jerusalem (‘Talm. }°\77330), consisting of seventy-one
members, viz. scribes (see ypayparevs, 2), elders, prom-
inent members of the high-priestly families (hence called
dpxvepets; see apxtepevs, 2), and the high-priest, the pres-
ident of the body. The fullest periphrasis for Sanhe-
drin is found in Mt. xxvi. 3 RG; Mk. xiv. 43, 53, (viz.
oi apxtepeis Kat of ypaupareis Kal of mpecBvrepor). The
more important causes were brought before this tribunal,
inasmuch as the Roman rulers of Judea had left to it
the power of trying such cases, and also of pronouncing
sentence of death, with the limitation that a capital
sentence pronounced by the Sanhedrin way not valid
unless it were confirmed by the Roman procurator
(cf. Jn. xviii. 31; Joseph. antt. 20, 9,1). The Jews
trace the origin of the Sanhedrin to Num. xi. 16 sq. The
602
ouvelonels
Sanhedrin [A. V. council] is mentioned in Mt. v. 22;
xxvi. 59; Mk. xiv.55; xv.1; Lk. xxii.66; Acts iv. 15;
v. 21, 27, 84,41; vi. 12,15; xxii. 30; xxiii. 1, 6,15, 20,
28; xxiv. 20; used [(as in class. Grk.)] of the place
of meeting in Acts iv. 15. b. the smaller tribunal
or council (so A. V.) which every Jewish town had for
the decision of the less important cases (see xpiots, 4):
Mt. x. 17; Mk. xiii. 9. Cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Syne-
drium; Leyrer in Herzog ed.1s. v. Synedrium [Strack
in ed. 2]; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. § 23, IL.,
III. [and in Riehm p. 1595 sqq.]; Holtzmann in Schenkel
v. p. 446 sqq.; [BB. DD.s. v. Sanhedrim (esp. Ginsburg
in Alex.’s Kitto); Hamburger, Real-Encycl. ii. pp. 1147
-1155; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 553 sqq.; Far-
rar, Life of Christ, Excurs. xiii. ].*
ovv-elSnois, -ews, 7, (cuveidov), Lat. conscientia, [lit.
‘joint-knowledge’; see ovr, II. 4], i.e. a. the con-
sciousness of anything: with a gen of the obj., ray dpap-
t.av, a soul conscious of sins, Heb. x. 2 (rod pvaous, Diod.
4,65; ovveidnots ev-yevns, consciousness of nobility; a
soul mindful of its noble origin, Hdian. 7, 1, 8 [3 ed.
Bekk.]). b. the soul as distinguishing between what
is morally good and bad, prompting to do the former and
shun the latter, commending the one, condemning the other ;
conscience: with a gen. of the subj., 7 o. twos, Ro. ii.
15 (where the idea of 7 cuveidnots is further explained
. }} Kal amodoyoupevay [cf. W. 580 (539);
see droAoyéopa, 2, and cuppaptupéw]); Ro. ix. 1; 1 Co.
Vili [eh-W. § 30) 1a. 105 1229x529s 2 Con 2 mive
v.11; Heb. ix. 14 (9 rod havAov cuvetdnars, Philo, fragm.,
vol. ii. p. 659 ed. Mangey [vi. p. 217 sq. ed. Richter]);
7 idia cuveidnors, 1 Tim. iv. 2; adn ouveid. i. q. GAXov
twos uv. 1 Co. x. 29; dca tHv cuveidyow, for conscience’
sake, because conscience requires it (viz. the conduct
in question), Ro. xiii. 5; in order not to occasion
scruples of conscience (in another), 1 Co. x. 283; pndev
avakpivery did Thy ouveid. (anxiously) questioning nothing,
as though such questioning were demanded by con-
science, 1 Co. x. 25, 27; dca cuveiSnoww bod, because con-
science is impressed and governed by the idea of God
(and so understands that griefs are to be borne accord-
ing to God’s will), 1 Pet. ii. 19; ouvetd. rod e’SdXov, a
conscience impressed and controlled by an idea of the
idol (i.e. by a notion of the idol’s existence and power),
1 Co. viii. 7 Rec.; rehevOoai twa kata Thy cvvetdnow (sc.
airod), so to perfect one that his own conscience is sat-
isfied, i.e. that he can regard himself as free from guilt,
Heb. ix. 9; éhéyyeoOar dnd tis ovv. In. viii. 9 (id Tod
ovveddtos, Philo de Josepho § Ss} fin. ; ovvexeor Gat ™ Our-
eL6. Sap. xvii. 10); 9 cuveiSnors is said peaptupetv, Ro. ix.
1; cuppaprupeiv, Ro. ii. 15; 7d papripiov rH cuv. 2 Co.
Talis With epithets: dodems, not strong enough to
distinguish clearly between things lawful for a Christian
and things unlawful, 1 Co. viii. 7, cf.10; ouveid. ayabn,
a conscience reconciled to God, 1 Pet. iii. 21; free from
guilt, consciousness of rectitude, of right conduct, Acts
xxiii. 1; 1 Tim. i. 5, (Hdian. 6, 3, 9 [4 ed. Bekk.]}) ; éyew
ovveid. ayadny, 1, Tim. 1193 1 Petr ii. 16, (év dyaby our
by Kal peta&v oa
ouvetoov
1d. bmapyewv, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 41, 1); €xew ovy. Kadjy,
Heb. xiii. 18; ovv. xabapd, 1 Tim. iii. 9; 2 Tim. i. 3, (Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 7, cf. ayn?) ovr. ibid. 1, 3; kaOapos TH our-
ednoet, Ignat. ad Trall. 7,2); dmpdcKxoros, Acts xxiv.
16; sovnpa, a mind conscious of wrong-doing, Heb. x.
22 (Lév cuverdnoes rornpa, ‘ Teaching’ ete. 4, 14]; dmpe-
mms, Leian. amor. 49). — ) cuveidnors Kkabapi¢erar amd KT.
Heb. ix. 14; poduverat, kt Co. viii. 7; puaiverat, Tit. i. 15,
(undev Exovoiws WerdecOar pndێ pualver ri abrod cvvetdn-
ow, Dion. Hal. jud. Thue. 8. dmaow jyiv 4 ovveidnors
6eds, Menand. 597 p. 103 ed. Didot; Bporois dracw 7) ouy-
etOnots Beds, ibid. 654 p. 101 ed. Didot ; Epictet. fragm.
97 represents 7 cuveidnovs as filling the same office in
adults which a tutor [wadaywyds, q.v.] holds towards
boys; with Philo, Plutarch, and others, rd cuvedds is
more common. In Sept. once for yn, Eccl. x. 20; [i-q,
conscience, Sap. xvii. 11; cf. Delitzsch, Brief an d. Rom.
p-11]). Cf. esp. Jahnel, Diss. de conscientiae notione,
qualis fuerit apud veteres et apud Christianos usque ad
aevi medii exitum. Berol. 1862 [also the same, Ueber den
Begr. Gewissen in d. Griech. Philos. (Berlin, 1872) ];
Kahler, Das Gewissen. I. die Entwickelung seiner Na-
men u. seines Begriffes. i. Alterth. u. N. T. (Halle, 1878);
[also in Herzog ed. 2, s. v. Gewissen; Zezschwitz, Pro-
fangracitaét u.s.w. pp. 52-57; Schenkel, s. v. Gewissen
both in Herzog ed. 1, and in his BL.; P. Ewald, De
vocis ouv. ap. script. Novi Test. vi ac potestate (pp. 91;
1883); other reff. in Schaff-Herzog, s. v. Conscience ].*
cvv-cidov, ptcp. aumdav; pf. civoda, ptcp. fem. gen.
ovvedvias (Acts v.2 R G,-ys LT Tr WH; cf. B. 12 (11);
[Tdf. Proleg. p.117; WH. App. p.156]); (see cide) ; fr.
Hdt. down ; 1. to see (have seen) together with oth-
ers. 2. to see (have seen) in one’s mind, with one’s
self (cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. p. 120; on Mark
pp- 36 and 78; [see avy, II. 1 and 4]), i. e. to understand,
perceive, comprehend: ovmdav, when he had understood
it, Acts xii. 12 [[A.V. considered]; xiv. 6 [became aware],
(2 Mace. iv. 41; xiv. 26, 30; 3 Macc. v. 50; Polyb. 1, 4,
6; 3, 6,9; etc.; Joseph. antt. 7, 15,1; b.j. 4, 5,4; Plut.
Them. 7). Perfect cvvor8a [cf. ovy, u.s.] 1. to
know with another, be privyto [so A.V.]: Actsv. 2. 2.
to know in one’s mind or with one’s self; to be conscious of:
ri €uavtd, 1 Co. iv. 4 [R. V. know nothing against myself
(cf. Wright, Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v. ‘By’)] (rj
dduxiav, Joseph. antt. 1, 1,4; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given
by Passow s. v. ctvoida, a.; [L. and S. s. v. cvvoda, 2];
foll. by ért, [Dion. Hal. ii. 995, 9]; Barn. ep. 1, (4) 3).*
oviv-et, ptep. gen. plur. masc. cvvdvrwv; impf. 3 pers.
plur. curjcav; (ovr, and epi to be) ; fr. Hom. Od. 7, 270
down; to be with: rwvi,one, Lk. ix. 18 [WH mrg. cuvqyrn-
cay]; Acts xxii. 11.*
cbv-ept, ptcp. sumer; (avy, and eiut to go); fr. Hom.
down; to come together: Lk. viii. 4.*
ovv-eo-épxopat: 2 aor. cuverojAOov ; to enter together:
rit, with one, —foll. by an acc. of the place, Jn. vi. 22;
xviii. 15. (Eur., Thuc., Xen., al.; Sept.) *
ovv-€xSnpos, -ov, 6, 9, (avy, and dynos away from one’s
people), a fellow-traveller, companion in travel: Acts
603
ouvepyos
xix. 29; 2 Co. viii. 19. ([Diod. fr. lib. 37, 5,1 and 4 ed.
Dind.]; Joseph. vit.14; Plut. Oth. 5; Palaeph. fab. 46, 4.)*
ouv-ex-AekTds, -7, -dv, (see exdexrds), elected or chosen
(by God to eternal life) together with: 1 Pet. v. 13.*
ovv-chatve: 1 aor. cvvndaca; fr. Hom. down; to drive
together, to compel; trop. to constrain by exhortation,
urge: twa eis eipnyny, to be at peace again, Acts vii. 26
RG (eis rov rips aopias épwra, Ael. v. h. 4, 15).*
Twv-EeTL-papTupEW, -G, ptcp. gen. sing. masc. ovvermap-
Tupodrros ; to attest together with; to join in bearing wit-
ness, to unite in adding testimony: Heb. ii. 4. (Aristot.,
Polyb., [Plut.], Athen., Sext. Emp.; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
23, 5; 43, 1.) *
ouv-em-rlOnpt : 2 aor. mid. cuverebeuny; to place upon
(or near) together with, help in putting on; mid. to attack
Jointly, to assail together, set upon with, (see émuriOnu,
2b.): Acts xxiv.9 GLT Tr WH [RV. joined in the
charge) (so in Thuc. 6, 10; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2,3; Plat.
Phileb. p. 16 a.; Polyb. 5, 78, 4; Diod. 1, 21).*
ovv-eropar: impf. cuverrdunv; fr. Hom. down; to fol-
low with, to accompany: twi, one, Acts xx. 4.*
ovvepyéw, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. cvynpyer; (cuvepyds,
q: v-); fr. Eur., Xen., Dem. down; Vulg. coéperor [(in
2 Co. vi. 1 adjuvo)]; to work together, help in work, be a
partner in labor: 1 Co. xvi. 16; 2 Co. vi. 1; to put forth
power together with and thereby to assist, Mk. xvi. 20;
tivi, with one H mlotis cuvnpye Tois épyos, faith (was
not inactive, but by coworking) caused Abraham to pro-
duce works, Jas. ii. 22 [here Trtxt. cuvépyec (hardly
collat. form of cuveipyw to unite, but) a misprint for
~yei]; Twi els ru (in prof. writ. also mpds 1, see Passow
[or L. and S.] s. v.), to assist, help, (be serviceable to)
one for a thing, Ro. viii. 28 [A. V. ell things work together
for good); ti tw ets t1, a breviloquence equiv. to cuvep-
yay ropi{w ti tu, so that acc. to the reading rdvra our
epyet 6 Oeds the meaning is, ‘for them that love God,
God coworking provides all things for good or so that
it is well with them’ (Fritzsche), [R. V. mrg. God work-
eth ail things with them for good], Ro. viii. 28 Lchm. [WH
in br.; cf. B. 193 (167)], (€avrois ra oupdepovra, Xen.
mem. 8, 5,16). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. vol. ii. p.
193 sq.*
cuvepyés, -dy, (cvv and EPYQ), [fr. Pind.], Eurip.,
Thue. down, a companion in work, fellow-worker, (Vulg.
adjutor [Phil. ii. 25; 3 Jn. 8 codperator}): in the N. T.
with a gen. of the pers., one who labors with another in
furthering the cause of Christ, Ro. xvi. 3,9, 21; Phil. ii.
25; iv. 3; [1 Th. iii. 2 Rec.]; Philem. 1, 24; 6eov, one
whom God employs as an assistant, as it were (a fellow-
worker with God), 1 Th. iii. 2 (GL txt. WH mrg. but
with rod Ocod in br.; Ree. et al. Sudxovoy, q. v.1). plur.:
1 Co. iii. 9; with gen. of the thing (a joint-promoter [A. V.
helper]), ovv. écpev ths xapas, we labor with you to the
end that we may rejoice in your Christian state, 2 Co. i.
24. els Suds, (my) fellow-worker to you-ward, in refer-
ence to you, 2 Co. viii. 23; ets tiv Bac. tr. Geod, for the
advancement of the kingdom of God, Col. iv. 11; r9 aAn-
Geia, for (the benefit of) the truth, [al. render (so R. V.)
ovvepxXopat
‘with the truth’; see Westcott ad loc.], 3Jn.8. (2
Mace. viii. 7; xiv. 5.) *
ovv-épxopar; impf. ovmnpxdpny; 2 aor. ovv7idOov, once
(Acts x.45 T Tr WH) 3 pers. plur. cwvpdOav (see anép-
youat, init.) ; pf. ptep. cvvehnrvdes; plupf. 3 pers. plur.
cuvednrvbeoar; fr. Hom. down (Il. 10, 224 in tmesis) ;
1. to come together, i.e. a. to assemble: absol., Mik.
iii. 20; Actsi.6; ii.6; x.27; xvi. 13; xix. 32; xxi. 22;
[xxii. 30 GLTTr WH]; xxvill. 17; [1 Co. xiv. 20;
foll. by éx with gen. of place, Lk. v.17 Lchm. txt.]; foll.
by e’s with an ace. of the place, Acts v. 16; mpds tuva,
Mk. vi. 33 Rec.; él rd adrd [see emi, C. 1.1 d.], 1 Co. xi.
20; xiv. 23 [here Ltxt. 2\@y]; with a dat. of the pers.
with one, which so far as the sense is concerned is equiv.
to unto one (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 2; [L.
and S. s.v. II. 1 and 3; cf. W. 215 (202)]), MK. xiv. 53
(here T WH txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the dat.]; Jn. xi. 33;
with adverbs of place: évOade, Acts xxv. 173 dzov, Jn.
xviii. 20; [foll. by an infin. of purpose, Lk. v.15]; foll.
by eis, — indicating either the end, as eis rd hayeiy, 1 Co.
xi. 33; or the result, 1 Co. xi. 17, 34;
sacred assembly [R. V. mrg. in congregation], 1 Co. xi.
18 (W. § 50, 4a.). b. Like the Lat. convenzo i. q.
coco: of conjugal cohabitation, Mt. i. 18 [but cf. Weiss
ad loc. (and the opinions in Meyer)] (Xen. mem. 2, 2,
4; Diod. 3, 58; Philo de caritat. §14; de fortitud. § 7;
de speciall. lege. §4; Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 1 and 7, 9, 5;
Apollod. bibl. 1, 3, 3); with émi rd avrd added, 1 Co. vii.
5 Rec. 2. to go (depart) or come with one, to ac-
company one (see épxyopat, IL. p. 252"): revi, with one, Lk.
xxiii. 55 [Tr txt. br. the dat.]; Acts i. 21 [here A. V.
company with]; ix. 39; x. 23,453; xi.12; with els 7d
Zpyov added, Acts xv. 38; ovv rum, Acts xxi. 16.*
cvv-eobio; impf. cvryobiov; 2 aor. cvvéedayov; to eat
with, take food together with (ef. ovv, IL. 1]: rwi, with
one, Lk. xv. 2; Acts x. 415; xi. 3; 1 Co. v.11, (2S. xii.
17); pera tios, Gal. ii. 12; Gen. xliii. 31; Ex. xviii. 12,
[ef. W. § 52, 4,15]. (Plat., Plut., Leian.)*
civerts, -ews, 7, (cuvinpt, q. V-) 5 1. a running
together, a flowing together: of two rivers, Hom. Od. 10,
515. 72, a. fr. Pind. down, understanding: Lk.
ii. 47; 1Co. i. 19 (fr. Is. xxix. 14); Eph. iit. 4; Col. ii.
2; 2 Tim. ii. 7; avevparixn, Col. i. 9. b. the under-
standing, i. e. the mind so far forth as it understands: Mk.
xil. 33; Sap. iv. 11. (Sept. for 73, AIA, HyI, pay,
Sav, en also for 5°3i1D, a poem.) (Syn. see codia, fin. ;
ef. Bp. Lohttts on Col. i. 9; Schmidt ch. 147, 8.]*
oouverds, -7, -dv, (cvvinue), fr. Pind. down, See for DSN,
1131, ete., intelligent, having understanding, wise, learned:
Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21; Acts xiii. 7; 1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Is.
xxix. 14). [Syn. see codds, fin.]*
ovv-ev-Sokéw, -; (see evdoxéw, init.) ; a. to be
pleased together with, to approve together (with others) :
absol..(yet so that the thing giving pleasure is evident
from the context), Acts xxii. 20 GLT Tr WH; witha
dat. of the thing, Lk. xi. 48; Acts viii. 1; xxii. 20 Rec.
([Polyb. 24, 4,13]; 1 Mace. i. 57; 2 Mace. xi. 24). 1h
to be pleased at the same time with, consent, agree to,
év ékkAnoia, in
604
ovvndeva
([Polyb. 32, 22, 9]; 2 Mace. xi. 35) ; foll. by an inf. 1 Co.
vii. 12 sq. [R.V. here be content]; w. a dat. of a pers. to
applaud [R. V. consent with], Ro. i. 32. (Diod.; eccles.
writ.) *
ovv-evwxéw, -B: pres. pass. ptep. cvvevwxovpevos ; (eva-
xé, to feed abundantly, to entertain; fr. ed and €x) ;
to entertain together; pass. to feast sumptuously with:
Jude 12; rwvi, with one, 2 Pet. ii. 18. ([Aristot. eth.
Eud. 7, 12, 14 p. 1245», 5], Joseph., Leian., al.) *
cvv-ep-lornpr: to place over or appoint together; 2 aor.
cuveréatny; lo rise up together: kara Tivos, against one,
Acts xvi. 22. [(From Thue. down.) ]*
ovv-éxoa; fut. cuveEo; 2 aor. ovvecyov; Pass., pres.
ovvéexona; impf. cvveryouny; fr. Hom. down; 1.
to hold together ; any whole, lest it fall to pieces or some-
thing fall away from it: 7d cvvéxov ra mavra, the deity
as holding all things together, Sap. i. 7 (see Grimm ad
loe.). 2. to hold together with constraint, to com- _
press, i. e. a. to press together with the hand: ra
éra, to stop the ears, Acts vil. 57 (ro ordpa, Is. lii. 15;
Tov ovpavoy, to shut, that it may not rain, Deut. xi.17; 1
K. viii. 35). b. to press on every side: twd, Lk. viii.
45; with mavrofev added, of a besieged city, Lk. xix.
43. 3. to hold completely, i. e. a. to hold fast:
prop. a prisoner, Lk. xxii. 63 (ra atyyadora, Leian. Tox.
39); metaph. in pass. to be held by, closely occupied with,
any business (Sap. xvii. 19 (20); Hdian. 1, 17, 22, (9
ed. Bekk.); Ael. v. h. 14, 22): 76 Adyw, in teaching the
word, Acts xviii. 5 GLT Tr WH [here R.V. constrained
by]. B. to constrain, oppress, of ills laying hold of
one and distressing him; pass. to be holden with i.q.
afflicted with, suffering from: vécous, Mt. iv. 24; aupera,
Lk. iv. 38; dvcevrepio, Acts xxviii. 8 (many exx. fr. Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down are given in Passow
s. Vv. cuvexo, I.a.; [L. and S.s.v. 1. 4]); of affections
of the mind: $68, Lk. viii. 37 (ddupyé, Ael. v. h. 14,
22; adynddu, Plut. de fluv. 2,1; dOvpia, ib. 7,5; 19,1;
Avy, 17,3; for other exx. see Grimm on Sap. xvii.
10). y- to urge, impel: trop. the soul, 7 dydmn...
ouvexer Nas, 2 Co. v. 14 [ A.V. constraineth]; mds (how
greatly, how sorely) cuvéyoua, Lk. xii. 50 [A. V. strait-
ened|; TO mvevpart, Acts xviii. 5 Rec. ouvéxouae éx
rév dvo, 1 am hard pressed on both sides, my mind is
impelled or disturbed from each side [R. V. I am in a
strait betwixt the two], Phil. i. 23.*
ovvt-, see cu¢-, and avy, II. sub fin.
ovv-7Sopar ; 1. in Grk. writ. chiefly fr. Soph.,
Eur., Xen. down, to rejoice together with (another or
others [cf. dv, IL. 1]). 2. in the N. T. once to re-
Joice or delight with one’s self or inwardly (see ctv, II.
4): ruvi, in a thing, Ro. vii. 22, where cf. Fritzsche; [al.
refer this also to 1; cf. Meyer].*
cuvAGera, -as, 7), (auteie and this fr. ody and 760s), fr.
Isocr., Xen., Plat. down, Lat. consuetudo, i. e. L. in-
tercourse Got one), intimacy : 4 Mace. xiii. 21. a
custom: Jn. xviii. 39 [cf. B. §139, 45]; 1 Co. xi. 16. 3.
a being used to: with a gen. of the object to which one
is accustomed, 1 Co. viii. 7 L T Tr WH.*
OUYNALKLOTNS
605
CUVOLKEQ
cuv-nuKLarns, -ov, 6, (fr. cdv, and jAukia q- V-), one of | (253 sq.) ; “W. 109 (104)], the man of understanding,
the same age, an equal in age: Gal. i. 14. (Diod. 1, 53
fin.; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 49 init.; but in both pass. the
best codd. have #duKxudzns; [Corp. inserr. iii. p- 484 no.
4929]; Alciphr. 1,12). Cf. ouppabnrns.™
ow-Odarrw: 2 aor. pass. cuverddny ; fr. Aeschyl. and
Hdt. down; to bury together with: 7 Xpor@, together
with Christ, pass., dd rod Banricparos eis rov bdvaror se.
avrov, Ro. vi. 4; épv T@ Bantiopare, Col. ii. 12. For all
who in the rite of baptism are plunged under the water,
thereby declare that they put faith in the expiatory
death of Christ for the pardon of their past sins; there-
fore Paul likens baptism to a burial by which the former
sinfulness is buried, i.e. utterly taken away.*
ovv-Ordw, -6: 1 fut. pass. cuvOX\acOjoopat; to break to
pieces, shatter, (Vulg. confringo, conquasso): Mt. xxi.
44 [but Tom. L Trmrg. WH br. the vs.]; Lk. xx. 18.
(Sept.; [Manetho, Alex. ap. Athen., Eratosth., Aristot.
(v.1L)], Diod.Piat., al.) *
ovv-PiBw ; impf. cvvéOALBov; to press together, press on
all sides: twa, of a thronging multitude, Mk. v. 24, 31.
(Plat., Aristot., Strab., Joseph., Plut.) *
cvv-OpiTTw, ptcp. nom. plur. masc. cuvOpimrorres; to
break in pieces, to crush: metaph. rv Kapdiav, to break
one’s heart, i.e. to deprive of strength and courage,
dispirit, incapacitate for enduring trials, Acts xxi. 13.
Cin eccles. and Byzant. writ.) *
ovv-ew, See Guvinu.
ovv-inut, 2 pers. plur. cuviere, 3 pers. plur. cumodow
(Mt. xiii. 183 RGT; 2 Co. x. 12 Rec., fr. the unused
form ouméw), and cuvmacw (2 Co. x.12L T Tr WH), and
ovviovow (Mt. xiii. 13 L Tr WH fr. the unused curio),
subjune. 3 pers. plur. cvmdot (RG LT Tr in Mk. iv. 12
and Lk. viii. 10, fr. the unused gumeé or fr. cuvinus) and
ovyioot (WH in Mk. and Lk. ll. ce., fr. the unused curio),
impv. 2 pers. plur. ovviere, inf. cvmevat, ptep. cvav (Ro.
iii. 11 RG T fr. cuméw), and cvviwy (ibid. L Tr WH, and
often in Sept., fr. cuviw), and cumeis (Mt. xiii. 23 LT Tr
WH; Eph. v.17 RG; but quite erroneously cvmev, Grsb.
in Mt. ].c. (Alf. in Ro. iii. 11; cf. WH. App. p.167; Tdf-
Proleg. p. 122]; W.81(77 sq.); B.48 (42); Fritzsche on
Rom. vol. i. p. 174 sq.); fut. cvvjow (Ro. xv. 21); I aor.
ovvnxa; 2 aor. subjunc. ovvate, cvvdot, impy. 2 pers.
plur. ovvere (Mk. vii. 14 LT Tr WH); (ody, and ij to
send) ; 1. prop. to set or bring together, in a hostile
sense, of combatants, Hom. Il. 1, 8; 7, 210. 2. to
put (as it were) the perception with the thing per-
ceived; to set or join together in the mind, i.e. fo under-
stand, (so fr. Hom. down; Sept. for }\2 and S37) 3
with an ace. of the thing, Mt. xiii. 23, 51; Lk. ii. 50;
xviii. 34; xxiv. 45; foll. by ov, Mt. xvi. 12; xvii. 13;
foll. by an indirect quest., Eph. v. 175; emt rots aprots, ‘on
the loaves’ as the basis of their reasoning [see emi, B. 2
a. a.], Mk. vi. 52; where what is understood is evident
from the preceding context, Mt. xiii. 19; xv. 10; Mk.
yii.14; absol., Mt. xiii. 138-15; xv.10; Mk. iv. 12; viii.
17, 21; Lk. viii. 10; Acts vii. 25°; xxviii. 26 sq. ; Ro. xv.
21: 2 Co. x. 12; 6 cumwy or cuviwy as subst. [B. 295
Hebraistically i. gq. a good and upright man (as having
knowledge of those things which pertain to salvation ;
see pwpds): Ro. iii. 11 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 2). [Syn. see
yvooke, fin, |*
cuvictdéve and cuvorde, see the foll. word.
ovv-lornpe (Ro. iii, 5; v. 8; xvi. 1; 2 Co. x. 18; Gal.
ii. 18 Ree.; ptep. cunordvres, 2 Co. iv. 2L.T Tr; vi.4 L
T Tr), or cunordyw (2 Co. v. 12; Gal. ii. 18 GL T Tr
WH; inf. cunordvew, 2 Co. iii. 1 RG T WH; ptcp. cur
totavey, 2 Co. iv. 2 WH; vi.4 WH; x. 12,18 LT Tr
WH), or cunorde (inf. cumoray, 2 Co. iii. 1 L Tr; ptep.
ovuctay, 2 Co. iv. 2 RG; vi.4 RG; x. 18 Rec.; see
tornpt) ; 1 aor. ovvéctnca; pf. cvvéornka; 2 pf. ptep. ou
eoras [nom. plur. neut. -réra, 2 Pet. iii.5 WH mrg.]; pres.
pass. inf. cvvicracOat; fr. Hom. Il. 14, 96 down; ae
to place together, to set in the same place, to bring or band
together; in the 2 aor., pf. and plupf. intransitively, to
stand with (or near): ouveotas tim, Lk. ix. 32. 2.
to set one with another i.e. by way of presenting or
introducing him, i. e. to commend (Xen., Plat., Dem.,
Polyb., Joseph., Plut.) : teva, 2 Co. iii. 1; vi. 4; x. 12,
18; rua run, Ro. xvi. 1; 2 Co. v. 12 [ef. B. 393 (836) ];
Twa mpos auveidnoiv twos, 2 Co. iv. 2; pass. bd Tivos, 2
Co. xii. 11, (1 Mace. xii. 43; 2 Mace. iv. 24). 3.
to put together by way of composition or combination,
to teach by combining and comparing, hence to show,
prove, establish, exhibit, [W. 23 (22)]: ri, Ro. iii. 5; v. 8,
(evvorav, Polyb. 4, 5, 6); éavrovs ds tues, 2 Co. vi. 4;
with two acc. one of the object, the other of the predi-
cate, Gal. ii. 18 (Diod. 13,91; cuvicrnow airov mpopnrny,
Philo rer. div. haer. § 52); foll. by an ace. with inf. [cf.
B. 274 (236)], 2 Co. vii. 11 (Diod. 14, 45). 4. to
put together (i. e. unite parts into one whole), pf., plupf.
and 2 aor. to be composed of, consist: €& dSaros k. Sv Vda-
tos, 2 Pet. iii. 5 [ef. W. § 45,6 a.; (see above, init.)]; to
cohere, hold together: ta mavra cuveatnkev €v ado, Col. i.
17 (Plat. de rep. 7 p. 530 a.; Tim. p. 61 a.; [Bonitz’s
index to Aristotle (Berlin Acad. ed.) s. v. cumordvat], and
often in eccles. writ.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.]).*
[evv-kara-vedo: 1 aor. ptep. ouveatavevoas ; to consent
to, agree with : Acts xviii. 27 WH (rejected) mrg. (Polyb.
SD 2aGreale) a}
GVVK-, SCC OVYK-
cuva-, see TUAA-
OUVp-, See TULL
ovy-oSebu; to journey with, travel in company with : with
a dat. of the pers., Acts ix. 7. (Hdian. 4, 7, 11 [6 ed.
Bekk.], Leian., Plut., al.; Sap. vi. 25.) *
cvvoSte, -as, 7, (cvvodos), a journey in company; by
meton. a company of travellers, associates on a journey, a
caravan, [A. V. company]: Lk. ii. 44. (Strab., Plut.,
[Epict., Joseph.; évvodeia, Gen. xxxvii. 25 cod. Venet.
i. q. family, Neh. vii. 5, 64, Sept.], al.) *
ovv-o1xea, -6; 10 dwell together (Vulg. cohabito) : of the
domestic association and intercourse of husband and
wife, 1 Pet. iii. 7; for many exx. of this use, see Passow
s.v. 1; [L. and S. s.v. D2
cf. ovv, II. fin.
‘CUVOLKOSOpMEw
cvv-o1KoSopéw, -G: pres. pass. cvvorkodopodpa; (Vulg.
coaedifico) ; to build together i. e. a. lo build together
or with others [1 Esdr. v. 65 (66) J. b. to put togeth-
er or construct by building, out of several things to build
up one whole, (oixia ed cvv@xodopunpern Kal ovvnppoopEern,
of the human body, Philo de praem. et poen. § 20): Eph.
ii. 22. (Besides, in Thuc., Diod., Dio Cass., Plut.) *
ovv-opirea, -3; to talk with: tui, one, Acts x. 27. (to
hold intercourse with, [Ceb. tab. 13; Joseph. b. j. 5, 13,
1], Epiphan., Tzetz.) *
cvv-opopéw, -G; (cuvduopos, having joint boundaries,
bordering on, fr. cvv and dyopos, and this fr. pds joint,
and dpos a boundary); to border on, be contiguous to,
[A. V. join hard]: rwi, to a thing, Acts xviii. 7. (By-
zant. writ.) *
Tvv-0XN, -7s, 7}, (TUvexw, q- V-), @ holding together, nar-
rowing; narrows, the contracting part of a way, Hom. II.
23, 330. Metaph. straits, distress, anguish: Lk. xxi. 25;
with xapdias added, 2 Co. ii. 4, (contractio animi, Cic. Tuse.
1, 37, 90; opp. to effusio, 4, 31, 66; cuvoxny k. TadauTra-
piav, Job xxx. 3; [ef. Judg. ii. 3; plur. Ps. xxiv. (xxv.)
17 Aq.]).*
ouvir-, See oupm-
[ovvo-, see cuo- and auvac-] } cf. avy, II. fin.
cvvert-, See GvaT-
ovv-Tacow: 1 aor. cuvérafa; fr. Hdt. down; a.
to put in order with or together, to arrange ; b. to
(put together), constitute, i. e. to prescribe, appoint, (Aes-
chin., Dem.; physicians are said ovvtdccew pdppakor,
Ael. v. h. 9, 13; [Plut. an sen. sit gerend. resp. 4, 8]) :
movi, Mt. xxi. 6 LTr WH; xxvi. 19; xxvii. 10; Sept.
often for may."
cvvtedeva, -as, 7, (cuvreAns), completion, consummation,
end, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. on; Sept. chiefly for
123; for YP in Dan. xii. 4, 13; in other senses fr. Aes-
chyl. down): aidvos or tov aiavos, Mt. xiii. 39,40 LT Tr
WH, 49; xxiv. 3; xxviii. 20; rov aiévos rovrov, Mt. xiii.
40 RG; ray aimvev, Heb. ix. 26 (see aiav, 3 p. 19° bot.
[ef. Herm. sim. 9, 12, 3 and Hilgenfeld ad loc.]); katpod
and katpov, Dan. ix. 27; xii 4; rév nuepav, ibid. 13;
avOparrov, of his death, Sir. xi. 27 (25); cf. xxi. 9.*
ovy-Tehéw, -@ ; fut. cuvreAeow; 1 aor. cuveréAeca; Pass.,
pres. inf. ouvreheioOat ; 1 aor. ouverehécOnv (Jn. ii. 3 T
WH ‘rejected’ mrg.), ptep. cuvreAec Geis; fr. Thuc. and
Xen. down; Sept. often for 123; also sometimes for
DIA, MWY, ete. ; 1. to end together or at the same
time. 2. to end completely; bring to an end, finish,
complete: rovs Adyous, Mt. vii. 28 RG; rév mespacpdy,
Lk. iv. 13; npépas, pass., Lk. iv. 2; Acts xxi. 27, (Jobi.
Dawlobrxed)s 3. to accomplish, bring to fulfilment;
pass. to come to pass, Mk. xiii. 4; Adyov, a word, i. e. a
prophecy, Ro. ix. 28 (qua, Lam. ii. 17). 4. to
effect, make, [cf. our conclude]: SiaOqxny, Heb. viii. 8
Gerssdin xxiv.)) 85 15i)s 5. to finish, i.e. in a use
foreign to Grk. writ., to make an end of: ouverchéobn 6
oivos TOU ydapou, [was at an end with], Jn. ii. 3 Taf. after
cod. Sin. (Ezek. vii. 15 for D8; to bring to an end, de-
stroy, for mo3, Jer. xiv. 12; xvi. 4).*
606
cuvTpiBwo
cuv-répve; pf. pass. ptep. ouvrerunuevos; fr. Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down; 1. to cut to pieces, [cf. ovr, IL
3]. 2. to cut short; metaph. to despatch briefly, ex
ecute or finish quickly ; to hasten, (ovvréuvew sc. thy ddr,
to take a short cut, go the shortest way, Hdt. 7, 123; sc.
rov déyov, to speak briefly, Eur. Tro. 441; Tas amrokpicets,
to abridge, sum up, Plat. Prot. p.334d.; €v Bpayet moddovs
Adyous, Arstph. Thesm. 178): Adyor [q. v. I. 2 b. a.], to
bring a prophecy or decree speedily to accomplishment,
Ro. ix. 28; Adyos ouvretpnpévos, a short word, i. e. an eX-
pedited prophecy or decree, ibid. [RG Tr mrg. in br.]
(both instances fr. Sept. of Is. x. 23); ef. Fritzsche ad
loc. vol. ii. p. 350.*
cuv-rypéw,-&: impf.3 pers. sing. cvvernper; pres. pass.
3 pers. plur. ovvtnpovyrar; [fr. Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p.
816%, 8 down]; a. to preserve (a thing from perish-
ing or being lost) : ri, pass. (opp. to dréAAvo Oat), Mt. ix.
17; Lk. v. 38 [fT WH om. Tr br. the cl.]; rua, to guard
one, keep him sate, fr. a plot, Mk. vi. 20 (éavrdév avapdp-
tnrov, 2 Mace. xii. 42 [cf. Tob. i. 11; Sir. xiii. 12]). b.
to keep within one’s self, keep in mind (a thing, lest it be
forgotten [cf. ovv, Il. 4]): mavra ra pnyara, Lk. ii. 19 (70
pia év th xapdia pov, Dan. vii. 28 Theod.; ryv yrounr
map éavto, Polyb. 31, 6, 5; [absol. Sir. xxxix. 2]).*
cvv-riOnpr: Mid., 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. cuvedevro; plpf.
3 pers. plur. cuvereOewro; fr. Hom. down; to put with or
together, to place together; to join together; Mid. a.
to place in one’s mind, i. e. to resolve, determine; to
make an agreement, to engage, (often so in prof. writ. fr.
Hat. down; cf. Passow s. v.2b.; [L. and S.s. v. B. I.]):
ouveréGewro, they had agreed together [ W. § 38, 3], foll.
by wa, Jn. ix. 22 [W. § 44, 8b.]; cuvebevro, they agreed
together, foll. by vod with an inf. [B. 270 (232)], Acts
xxiii. 20; they covenanted, foll. by an inf. [B. u.s.], Lk.
xxii. 5. b. to assent to, to agree to: Acts xxiv. 9
Ree. [see ovvemiridnus | (revi, Lys. in Harpocr. [s. v. Kap-
kivos] p- 106, 9 Bekk.).*
ovy-Tépas, (cuvTéuvw), [fr. Aeschyl., Soph., Plat. down],
adv., concisely i. e. briefly, in few words: dxodoai tivos,
Acts xxiv. 4 (ypdayat, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 1; ddacxesy, ibid.
1, 6,2; [etmety, ibid. 2,14,13; e&ayyedrAew, Mk. xvi. WH
(rejected) ‘Shorter Conclusion’]); for exx. fr. Grk.
writ. see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. fin.*
ovv-tpéxw; 2 aor. ouvéedpapov; fr. [Hom.], Aeschyl.,
Hat. down; 1. to run together: of the gathering
of a multitude of people, éxe?, Mk. vi. 33; mpds twa, Acts
Hie 2. to run along with others; metaph. to rush
with i. e. cast one’s self, plunge, 1 Pet. iv. 4. [Comp.:
émt-ouvTpexw. | *
ovv-rpiBw, ptcp. neut. -rpiBov Lk. ix. 39 RG Tr, -rpi-
Bov LT WH (ef. Veitch s. v. rpiBe, fin.) ; fut. cvrtpivra;
1 aor. ovverpua; Pass., pres. cuvrpiBoua; pf. inf. oun
rerpipOac [RG Tr WH; but -rpi¢éa LT (cf. Veitch
u. s.)], ptep. cuvrerpippevos; 2 fut. ovvrpiSnoopar; fr.
Hat. ((?), Eurip.] down; Sept. very often for aw; to
break, to break in preces, shiver, [cf. civ, I. 3]: eddapor,
Mt. xii. 20; rds méSas, pass. Mk. v. 4; 1d dddBacrpoy (the
sealed orifice of the vase [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Alabaster]),
TUVT PLLA
MK. xiv. 3; dorody, pass. Jn. xix 36 (Ex. xii. 46; Ps.
XXxill. (xxxiv.) 21); rd oxetn, Rev. ii. 273; to tread
down: tov Zatavay ind rods médas (by a pregn. constr.
[W.§ 66, 2d.]), to put Satan under foot and (as a con-
queror) trample on him, Ro. xvi. 20; to break down,
crush : twa, to tear one’s body and shatter one’s strength,
Lk. ix. 39. Pass. to suffer extreme sorrow and be, as it
were, crushed : of cuvrerpipeévor tiv Kapdiav [ef. W. 229
(215)], i. q. of Zyovres tiv KapSiav ovvrerpypérnr, [A.V
the broken-hearted], Lk. iv. 18 Ree. fr. Is. lxi. 1 ([ef. Ps.
XXXL. (xxxiv.) 19; exlvi. (exlvii.) 3, ete.]; ovr Tpisnvar
7H Scavoig, Polyb. 21, 10, 2; 31, 8, 11; rois dpovnpact,
Diod. 11, 78; [rats €Ariow, 4,663 rats auyxais, 16, §1]).*
ovv-rpippa, -ros, Td, (cvyTpiBw), Sept. chiefly for 7aw ;
1. that which is broken or shattered, a fracture: Aristot.
de audibil. p. 802, 34; of a broken limb, Sept. Lev. xxi.
19. 2. trop. calamity, ruin, destruction: Ro. iii. 16,
fr. Is. lix. 7, where it stands for >i, a devastation, laying
waste, as in xxii. 4; Sap. ili. 3; 1 Mace. ii. 7; [ete.].*
oiv-tpodos, -ov, 6, (cvvtpéepe), [fr. Hdt. down], ‘nour-
ished with one (Vulg. collactaneus [Eng. foster-brother]) ;
brought up with one; univ. companion of one’s child-
hood and youth: twéds (of some prince or king), Acts
xii. 1.) (1 Mace: i. 6; 2 Mace. tx. 29; Polyb: 5; 9, 4;
Diod. 1, 53; Joseph. b. j. 1,10, 9;. Ael. v. h. 12, 26.) *
Luvrbyy and (so Tdf. edd. 7, 8; ef. Lipsius, Gramm.
Untersuch. p. 31; [Tdf. Proleg. p.103; Kiihner § 84 fin. ;
on the other hand, Chandler § 199]) Suvruxn, 7, [ace.
-yv], Syntyche, a woman belonging to the church at
Philippi: Phil. iv. 2. (The name occurs several times
in Grk. inserr. [see Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. 1. ¢.].)*
ouv-rvyxdve: 2 aor. inf. cuvrvxeiv; fr. [Soph.], Hat.
down; to meet with, come to [A. V. come at] one: with a
dat. of the pers., Lk. viii. 19.*
cvv-vio-Kplvopar: 1 aor. pass. ouvumexpiOnv, with the
force of the mid. [ef. B. 52 (45)]; to dissemble with:
twi, one, Gal. ii. 13. (Polyb. 3, 92, 5 and often; see
Schweighacuser, Lex. Polyb. p. 604; Plut. Marius, 14,
17.)*
cvv-vroupyéw, -&; (imoupyew to serve, fr. imoupyds, and
this fr. imé and EPTQ); to help together: twi, by any
thing, 2 Co. i. 11. (Leian. bis accusat. c. 17 cvwvayon-
Couerns THs Hdovis, Amep adr Ta mOAAa Evvuoupyet.) *
ovvo-, see cupd-
Tvvx-, See TvyX-
cuvyp-, see cuprp-
cvv-wdlvo ; a. prop. to feel the pains of trovail
with, be in travail together: oide ent Tov Cowv Tas adwas 6
civotxos Kal cuvediver ye TA TOANA Homep Kai adexrpvoves,
Porphyr. de abstin. 3,10; [cf. Aristot. eth. Eud. 7, 6
p- 12402, 36]. b. metaph. to undergo agony (like a
woman in childbirth) along with: Ro. viii. 22 (where
cvv refers to the several parts of which 7 «rics consists,
cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; kakois, Eur. Hel. 727.*
cvwvopocta, -as, 9, (cuvduvuje), fr. Arstph. and Thue.
down, a swearing together; a conspiracy : ovvepociay
move (see rrovea, I. 1 c. p. 525% top), Acts xxiii. 13 Rec. ;
mouicbat (see mow, I. 3), ibid. L T Tr WH.*
ef. ovv, U. fin.
607
,
ovp@
Zupdxoveas [so accented commonly (Chandler §§ 172,
175); but acc. to Pape, Eigennamen, s. v., -kodoar in
Ptol. 3, 4, 9; 8, 9,4], -Gv, ai, Syracuse, a large maritime
city of Sicily, having an excellent harbor and surrounded
by a wall 180 stadia in length [so Strabo 6 p. 270; “but
this statement exceeds the truth, the actual circuit being
about 14 Eng. miles or 122 stadia” (Leake p. 279); see
Dict. of Geogr. s. v. p. 1067°]; now Siragosa: Acts
KV el 2%
Zvpla, -as, 7, Syria; in the N. T. a region of Asia,
bounded on the N. by the Taurus and Amanus ranges,
on the E. by the Euphrates and Arabia, on the S. by
Palestine, and on the W. by Phenicia and the Mediter-
ranean, (cf. BB.DD. s. v. Syria; Ryssel in Herzog ed. 2,
s.v. Syrien; cf. also’Avridyeva, 1 and Aauackés]: Mt. iv.
24 UM 252 Acts xv. 23041 5 xvinnel es xx.3 sexxinge
Gal. i. 21. (On the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 a.]*
pos, -ov, 6, a Syrian, i. e. a native or an inhabitant
of Syria: Lk. iv. 27; fem. Svpa, a Syrian woman, Mk.'
vii. 26 Tr WH mre. [(Hdt., al.)]*
Zvpodoivcca (so Rec.; a form quite harmonizing
with the analogies of the language, for as KiAcé forms
the fem. KiAtooa, Opa the fem. Opacca, dvaé the fem.
advacca, so the fem. of Boiné is always, by the Greeks,
called oimaca), Suvpopowixiooa (so LT WH; hardly a
pure form, and one which must be derived fr. @owikn ;
ef. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 296 sq.; W. 95 (91)), Supagor
vicesoa (Grsb.; a form which conflicts with the law of
composition), -ns, 7, (Tr WH mrg. Svpa Powixicoa), a
Syrophenician woman, i. e. of Syrophoenice by race,
that is, from the Phoenice forming a part of Syria (Supo
being prefixed for distinction’s sake, for there were also
A.Budoines, i. e. the Carthaginians. The Greeks in-
cluded both Pheenicia and Palestine under the name
7 Supia; hence Svpia 7 Madkaorivn in Hat. 3, 91; 4, 39;
Just. Mart. apol. i.1; and 7 owvixn Supia, Diod. 19, 93 ;
Supopowikn, Just. Mart. dial. c. Tryph. ¢. 78, p. 305 a.) :
Mk. vii. 26 [cf. B. D. s. v. Syro-Pheenician]. (The mase.
Supopoimé is found in Leian. concil. deor. ¢. 4; [Syro-
phoenix in Juv. sat. 8, 159 (cf. 160) ].) *
Lipris[Lehm. oipris; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Chand-
ler § 650], -ews, acc. -wv, 7, (cdvpa, q. v. [al. fr. Arab. sert
i.e. ‘desert’; al. al., see Pape, Kizennamen, s. v.]), Syrtis,
the name of two places in the African or Libyan Sea
between Carthage and Cyrenaica, full of shallows and
sandbanks, and therefore destructive to ships; the west-
ern Syrtis, between the islands Cercina and Meninx [or
the promontories of Zeitha and Brachodes], was called
Syrtis minor, the eastern [extending from the promon-
tory of Cephalae on the W. to that of Boreum on the I.]
was called Syrtis major (sinus Psyllicus); this latter
must be the one referred to in Acts xxvii. 17, for upon
this the ship in which Paul was sailing might easily be
cast after leaving Crete. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Quicksands. ] *
otpw; impf. éovpov; fr. [Aeschyl. and Hadt. (in comp.),
Aristot.], Theocr. down; [Sept. 2S. xvii. 13]; to draw,
drag: ri, In. xxi. 8; Rev. xii. 4; twa, one (before the
judge, to prison, to punishment; éml ra Bacanornpia, cis
svoTapacoe
rd Seouarnproy, Epict. diss. 1, 29, 22; al.), Acts viii. 3;
é@ rijs roédews, Acts xiv. 19; emt rods mohurdpxas, Acts
[Comp.: xatraovpa. | *
ov-onrapicow: 1 aor. cuveaondpaga; to convulse com-
pletely (see pihyvups, c-): twa, Mk. ix. 20 LT Tr mrg.
WH; Lk. ix. 42. (Max. Tyr. diss. 13, 5.) *
ove-onpov [Tdf. ov (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -ov, 76, (ov
and ofa), a common sign or concerted signal, a sign given
acc. to agreement: Mk. xiv.44. (Diod., Strab., Plut,, ale
for 0), a standard, Is. v. 26; xlix. 22; Ixii. 10.) The
word is condemned by Phrynichus, ed. Lob. p. 418, who
remarks that Menander was the first to use it; cf. Sturz,
De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 196.*
cic-copos [LT Tr WH ovw (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -ov,
(ody and cdpa), belonging to the same body (i. e. metaph.
to the same church) [R. V. fellow-members of the body]:
Eph. iii. 6. (Eccles. writ.) *
ov-orariartys, -0v, 6, (see GracvagTns), a companion
in insurrection, fellow-rioter: Mk. xv. 7 RG (Joseph.
antt. 14, 2, 1).*
overariuds [Tr ovr (cf. ovv, I. fin.)], -7, -dv, (ovr
torn, q. V.), commendatory, introductory: émurtoXat ovat.
[A. V. epistles of commendation], 2 Co. iii. 1°, 1» RG,
and often in eccles. writ., many exx. of which have been
collected by Lydius, Agonistica sacra (Zutph. 1700), p.
123, 15; [Swicer, Thesaur. Kecles. ii. 1194 sq.]. (ypap-
para map avtod AaBeiv cvararixd, Hpict. diss. 2, 3, 1; (cf.
pints (Os
Diog. Laért. 8, 87]; 1d Ka\dos ravtés émctodiov cvata-
tixkotepov, Aristot. in Diog. Laért. 5, 18, and in Stob. flor.
65, 11, ii. 485 ed. Gaisf.) *
ov-cravpdo [LT Tr WH. ovr (cf. ody, II. fin.)], -a:
Pass., pf. cvverravpopar; 1 aor. cuvectavpadny ; to cru-
cify along with; twa tum, one with another; prop. :
Mt. xxvii. 44 (ody atro LT Tr WH); Mk. xv. 32 (odv
aire L TWH); Jn. xix. 32;
dvOpwmos cuvertaupobn Sc. TS Xptor, i. e. (dropping the
figure) the death of Christ upon the cross has wrought
the extinction of our former corruption, Ro. vi. 6; Xpiucra@
cuvectavpopat, by the death of Christ upon the cross I
have become utterly estranged from (dead to) my for-
mer habit of feeling and action, Gal. ii. 19 (20).*
ov-orTé\Aw: 1 aor. cuveorerda; pf. pass. ptep. cvveorad-
peévos; prop. to place together ; a. to draw together,
contract, (ra ioria, Arstph. ran. 999; rv yxeipa, Sir. iv.
31; eis éAtyov avoréAAw, Theophr. de caus. plant. 1, 15,
1); to diminish (rnv Siarav, Isocr. p. 280 d.; Dio Cass.
39, 37); to shorlen, abridge, pass. 6 katpds ovveotadpevos
eotiv, the time has been drawn together into a brief
compass, is shortened, 1 Co. vii. 29. b. to roll to-
gether, wrap up, wrap round with bandages, etc., to en-
shroud (rwa mémdots, Kur. Troad. 378): ted, i. e. his
corpse (for burial), Acts v. 6.*
ov-orrevato [TWH ovv- (cf. civ, II. fin.)]; to groan
together: Ro. viii. 22, where atv has the same force as
in guvedive, b. (rivi, with one, Eur. Ion 935; Test. xii.
Patr. (test. Isach. § 7) p. 629).*
ov-croxeo [TWH ovr (cf. ctv, I. fin.)], -&; (see orot-
xéo) ; to stand or march in the same row (file) with: so once
metaph. : 6 madawos nuav
608
oa UX ag
prop. of soldiers, Polyb. 10, 21,7; hence to stand ove*
against, be parallel with ; trop. to answer to, resemble : revi;
so once of a type in the O. T. which answers to the anti-
type in the New, Gal. iv. 25 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*
ov-orpariarys [T Tr WH ovy- (so Lehm. in Philem.;
cf. atv, II. fin.)], -ov, 6, a fellow-soldier, Xen., Plat., al. ;
trop. an associate in labors and conflicts for the cause of
Christ: Phil. ii. 25; Philem. 2.*
ov-otpépw: 1 aor. ptcp. cvotpeyas; pres. pass. ptcp.
avotpepduevos ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; ile
to twist together, roll together (into a bundle): @pvydvev
mAnOos, Acts Xxviil. 3. 2. to collect, combine, unite:
twas, pass. [reflexively (?)] of men, to [gather themselves
together,| assemble: Mt. xvii. 22 LT Trtxt. WH, see
dvaotpépa, 3 a.*
ov-etpoph, is, 7, (cvaTpepa) ; a. a twisting up
together, a binding together. b. a secret combination,
a coalition, conspiracy: Acts xxiii. 12 (Ps. Ixiii. (Ixiv.)
3; [2K.xv.15; Am. vii. 10]); a concourse of disorderly
persons, a riot (Polyb. 4, 34, 6), Acts xix. 40.*
ov-oxnpatite [WH cv- (so Tin Ro., Tr in 1 Pet.; cf-
ovy, II. fin.) |: pres. pass. cvaynparifopa; (oxnpati¢e, to
form) ; a later Grk. word; to conform [(Aristot. top. 6,
14 p. 151°, 8; Plut. de profect. in virt. 12 p. 83 b.)];
pass. reflexively, tui, to conform one’s self (i.e. one’s
mind and character) to another’s pattern, [ fashion one’s
self according to, (cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. p. 180
sq-)]: Ro. xii. 2; 1 Pet. 1. 14 [ef. W. 352 (330 sq.)].
(mpés tt, Plut. Num. 20 com. text.) *
Zuxdp (Rec.* Siydp), 7, Sychar, a town of Samaria,
near to the well of the patriarch Jacob, and not far from
Flavia Neapolis (Suyap mpd tis Néas méXews, Euseb. in
his Onomast. [p. 346, 5 ed. Larsow and Parthey]) tow-
ards the E., the representative of which is to be found
apparently in the mcdern hamlet al Askar (or ’Asker) :
Jn. iv. 5, where cf. Baumlein, Ewald, Brickner [in De
Wette (4th and foll. edd.)], Godet; add, Ewald, Jahrbb.
f. bibl. Wissensch. viii. p. 255 sq.; Bdadeker, Palestine,
pp- 328, 337; [Lieut. Conder in the Palest. Explor. Fund
for July 1877, p. 149sq. and in Survey of West. Pal.:
‘Special Papers’, p. 231; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah,
Appendix xy.]. The name does not seem to differ
from 3)0, a place mentioned by the Talmudists in
D310 py ‘the fountain Suear’ and 7510 TY Nypa ‘the
valley of the fountain Sucar’; cf. Delitzsch in the Zeit-
schr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1856, p. 240sqq. Most in-
terpreters, however, think that Svydp is the same as
Svyéu (q. v- 2), and explain the form as due to a soften-
ing of the harsh vulgar pronunciation (cf. Credner, Einl.
in d. N. T. vol. i. p. 264 sq.), or conjecture that it was
fabricated by way of reproach by those who wished to
suggest the noun pw, ‘falsehood’, and thereby brand
the city as given up to idolatry [cf. Hab. ii. 18], or the
word 15v, ‘drunken’ (on account of Is. xxviii. 1), and
thus call it the abode of papoi, see Sir. ]. 26, where
the Shechemites are called Aads pwpds; ef. Test. xii. Patr.
(test. Levi § 7) p. 564 Sixriu, Reyouéon modus dovvérov.
To these latter opinions there is this objection, among
Duyeye
others, that the place mentioned by the Evangelist was
very near Jacob’s well, from which Shechem, or Flavia
Neapolis, was distant about a mile and a half. [Cf. B.D.
s.v. Sychar; also Porter in Alex.’s Kitto, ibid.] *
Zuxén, Hebr. n2w [i.e. ‘shoulder,’ ‘ridge’], Shechem
[A. V. Sychem (see below)], prop. name of ue)
man of Canaan, son of Hamor (see ’Eppdp), prince in
the city of Shechem (Gen. xxxiii. 19; xxxiv. 2 sqq.) :
Acts vii. 16 RG. 2. a city of Samaria (in Sept.
sometimes Suxép, indecl., sometimes Sixiua, gen. -wv, as in
Joseph. and Euseb.; once ri Sixipa rv év Sper Edpaip,
1 K. xii. 25 [for still other var. see B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)
s.v. Shechem}), Vulg. Sichem [ed. Tdf. Sychem; ef. B.D.
u. s.], situated in a valley abounding in springs at the
foot of Mt. Gerizim (Joseph. antt. 5, 7, 2; 11, 8, 6); laid
waste by Abimelech (Judg. ix. 45), it was rebuilt by
Jeroboam and made the seat of government (1 K. xii.
25). From the time of Vespasian it was called by the
Romans Neapolis (on coins Flavia Neapolis); whence by
corruption comes its modern name, Nablus [or Nabu-
lus]; ace. to Prof. Socin (in Biideker’s Palestine p. 331)
it contains about 13,000 inhabitants (of whom 600 are
Christians, and 140 Samaritans) together with a few
[about 100”] Jews: Acts vii. 16.*
ohayth, -7s, 7, (opdgw), slaughter: Acts viii. 32 (after
Is. lili. 7) ; rpdé8ara ohayis, sheep destined for slaughter
(Zech. xi. 4; Ps. xliii. (xliv.) 23), Ro. viii. 36; mjuépa
opayns (Jer. xii. 3), ig. day of destruction, Jas. v. 5.
(Tragg., Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. for N20, 7195,
etc.) *
ohdyiov, -ov, 76, (apay7), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
that which is destined for slaughter, a victim [A.V. slain
beast]: Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 512 (477)] (Am. v. 25; Ezek.
Kexdl lO).
ochdte, Attic opdrra: fut. opaéw, Rev. vi. 4L T Tr
WH; 1 aor. éodaéa; Pass., pf. ptep. éopaypévos; 2 aor.
éopdynv; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often for omy, to
slay, slaughter, butcher: prop., dpviov, Rev. v. 6, 12;
xiii. 8; rwd, to put to death by violence (often so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down), 1 Jn. iii. 12; Rev. v. 9; vi. 4,
9; xviii. 24. kehadry éopaypévn «is Odvarov, mortally
wounded [R.V. smitten unto death], Rev. xiii. 3. [Comp.:
cata-o pada. | *
o68pa (properly neut. plur. of epodpds, vehement, vio-
lent), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down, exceedingly, greatly :
placed after adjectives, Mt. ii. 10; Mk. xvi. 4; Lk. xviii.
23; Rev. xvi. 21; with verbs, Mt. xvii. 6, 23; xviii.
31; xix. 25; xxvi. 22; xxvii. 54; Acts vi. 7.*
choSpas, adv., fr. Hom. Od. 12, 124 down, exceedingly:
Acts xxvii. 18.*
odppayttw (Rev. vii. 3 Rec.) ; 1 aor. €oppdyioa; 1 aor.
mid. ptep. oppayiodpevos ; Pass., pf. ptep. eappaysopevos ;
1 aor. éodipayicOnv; [in 2 Co. xi. 10 Rec.™ gives the form
ofpayicera “de coniectura vel errore” (Tdf.; see his
note ad loc.)]; (adpayis, q-v-); Sept. for DN; to set a
seal upon, mark with a seal, to seal; a. for secu
rity: ri, Mt. xxvii. 66; sc. rv GBvocor, to close it,
lest Satan after being cast into it should come out;
609
oyedor
hence the addition émdvw adrod, over him i.e. Satan, Rev.
Xx. 3, (€v 6 —i. e. Spare — Kepavvds eorw eoppay.opéevos,
Aeschyl. Eum. 828; mid. oppayitoua tiv bbpay, Bel and
the Dragon 14 Theodot.). b. Since things sealed up
are concealed (as, the contents of a letter), odpayito
means trop. to hide (Deut. xxxii. 34), keep in silence,
keep secret: ri, Rev. x. 4; xxii. 10, (ras duaprias, Dan.
ix. 24 Theodot.; ras dvoplas, Job xiv. 17; tods Adyous
avy, Stob. flor. 34, 9 p. 215; Oavpara wodda coy odpy-
yiooaro ovyn, Nonn. paraphr. evang. Ioan. 21,140). ce.
in order to mark a person or thing; hence to set a mark
upon by the impress of a seal, to stamp: angels are said
oppayitew twas ert Tov peroreyr, i.e. with the seal of
God (see opayis, c.) to stamp his servants on their
foreheads as destined for eternal salvation, and by
this means to confirm their hopes, Rev. vii. 3, cf. Ewald
ad loc.; [B.D.s. vv. Cuttings and Forehead]; hence oi
eoppaytopévot, fourteen times in Ree. vss. 4-8, four times
by GLT Tr WH, (dewotoe onudvtpocw éoppayiopévor,
Eur. Iph. Taur. 1372); metaph.: twa 76 mvedpare and
év T@ Trv., respecting God, who by the gift of the Holy
Spirit indicates who are his, pass., Eph. i. 13; iv. 30;
absol., mid. with rivd, 2 Co. i. 22. d. in order to
prove, confirm, or attest a thing; hence trop. to
confirm, authenticate, place beyond doubt, (a written
document 7@ daxrvdi@, Esth. viii. 8) : foll. by dz, In. iii.
33 teva, to prove by one’s testimony to a person that he
is what he professes to be, Jn. vi. 27. Somewhat unu-
sual is the expression odpay:oduevos adtois tov Kaprov
tovrov, when I shall have confirmed (sealed) to them
this fruit (of, love), meaning apparently, when I shall
have given authoritative assurance that this money was
collected for their use, Ro. xv. 28. [Comp.: kara-
oppayita. | *
opayis, -idos, 7, (akin, apparently, to the verb dpdccw
or ppdyvups), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for onin, @ seal; i.e.
a. the seal placed upon books (cf. B. D. s.v. Writing, sub
fin.; Gardthausen, Palaeogr. p. 27]: Rev. v.13 dAdoa
tas opp-, ib. 2, 5 [Rec.]; dvoiEa, ib. [5G LT Tr WH],
QE vinlaron Onda o elo) Villleedls b. @ signet-ring:
Rev. vii. 2. c. the inscription or impression made by
a seal: Rey. ix. 4 (the name of God and Christ stamped
upon their foreheads must be meant here, as is evident
from xiv. 1); 2 Tim. il. 19. d. that by which any-
thing is confirmed, proved, authenticated, as by a seal, (a
token or proof): Ro. iv. 11; 1Co.ix.2. [Cf. BB.DD.
s. v. Seal.]*
ovuSpdy, -ov, 7d, i. q. opupdy, q.v.: Acts iii. 7 TWH.
(Hesych. ofvdpa: 9 repupépera tov wodav.) *
oupts, i. q. omupis, q: V-, (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p- 113;
Curtius p. 503; [Steph. Thesaur. s. vv.]), Lehm. in Mt.
xvi. 10 and Mk. viii. 8; WH uniformly (see their App.
p- 148).*
odupéy, -od, 76, fr. Hom. down, the ankle [ A.V. ankle-
bone]: Acts iii. 7[T WH odvdpdr, q. v.].*
oxeddv, (xo, cxeiv), adv., fr. Hom. down; 1. near,
hard by. 2. fr. Soph. down [of degree, i.e.] well-nigh,
nearly, almost; so in the N. T. three times before was:
ox a
Acts xiii. 44; xix. 26; Heb. ix. 22 [but see W. 554 (515)
n.; (R. V. Z may almost say)]; (2 Mace. v. 2; 3 Macc.
v. 14).*
oXpa, -ros, 76, (2xw, oxetv), fr. Aeschyl. down, Lat.
habitus (ct. Eng. haviour (fr. have) ], A. V. fashion, Vulg.
figura [but in Phil. habitus], (tacitly opp. to the mate-
rial or substance): 70d xéopou rovrov, 1 Co. vii. 31; the
habitus, as comprising everything in a person which
strikes the senses, the figure, bearing, discourse, actions,
manner of life, etc., Phil. ii. 7 (8). [Syn. see poppy
fin., and Schmidt ch. 182, 5.]*
oxite [(Lk. v.36 RG Lmrg.)]; fut. cxiow (Lk. v. 36
L txt. T Tr txt. WH (cf. B. 37 (82 sq.)]); 1 aor. éoxt04 ;
Pass., pres. ptcp. cxefouevos; l aor. écxioOny; [allied w.
Lat. scindo, caedo, etc. (cf. Curtius § 295) ]; fr. [( Hom.
h. Merc.) ] Hesiod down ; Sept. several times for 03, Is.
xxxvii. 1 for D713 ; to cleave, cleave asunder, rend : ri, Lk.
vy. 36; pass. ai wérpac, Mt. xxvii. 51; of odpavol, Mk. i. 10;
7d karaméracua, Lk, xxiii. 45; with efs 600 added, into two
parts, in twain [(els dvo0 pépn, of a river, Polyb. 2, 16,
11)], Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38; 76 dlkrvoy, Jn. xxi. 11 ;
to divide by rending, rl, Jn. xix, 24. trop. in pass. to
be split into factions, be divided: Acts xiv. 4; xxill. 7,
(Xen. conv. 4, 59; rod mAHOous oxifouévou Kata alpeciy,
Diod. 12, 66).*
oxlopa, -ros, 76, (oxlfw), a cleft, rent ; a. prop.
arent: Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21, (Aristot.,Theophr.). __b.
metaph. @ division, dissension: Jn. Vii. 43; ix. 16; x.
19S AN Con ie lOl, xi 18s xii-25,, ((eecless writ) [iClem:
Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 6, etc. ; ‘Teaching’ 4, 3 ; etc.]). [Cf. reff.
8. V. alpeois, 5. ] *
oxotvloy, -ov, 76, (dimin. of the noun cxotvos, 6 and 7, a
rush), fr. Hdt. down, prop. a cord or rope made of rushes ;
univ. @ rope: Jn. ii. 15; Acts xxvii. 32.*
oxoAdf{w ; 1 aor. subjunc, cxod\dow, 1 Co. vii. 5G LT
RrBWeLLes (oso Cs vi)is 1. to cease from labor;
to loiter. 2. to be free from labor, to be at leisure,
to be idle ; ruvl, to have leisure for a thing, i.e. to give one’s
self to a thing: tva cxoddonTe (Rec. sxordfnre) TH mpoc-
evxn, 1 Co. vii. 5 (for exx. fr. prof. auth. see Passow
8. v.; [L. and S. s. v. III.]). 3. of things; e. g. of
places, to be unoccupied, empty: oikos cxorddfwv, Mt. xii.
44; (Lk. xi. 25 WH br. Tr mrg. br.], (rézos, Plut. Gai.
Grac. 12; of a centurion’s vacant office, Eus. h. e. 7, 15;
in eccl. writ. of vacant eccl. offices, [also of officers with-
out charge; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]).*
oXOAH, -7s, 7, (fr. cxetv; hence prop. Germ. das An-
halten; (cf. Eng. ‘to hold on,’ equiv. to either to stop or
to persist ]); 1. fr. Pind, down, freedom from labor,
leisure. 2. acc. to later Grk. usage, a place where
there is leisure for anything, a school [cf. L. and S. s. vy.
IIl.; W. 23]: Acts xix. 9 (Dion. Hal. de jud. Isocr. 1;
de vi Dem. 44; often in Plut.).*
cdtw (al. oggw (cf. WH. Intr. § 410; Meisterhans p.
87) ]; fut. cdow; 1 aor. owoa; pf. céowxa; Pass., pres.
odfouac; impf, éowfsuny ; pf. 3 pers. sing. (Acts iv. 9) céow-
aracand (acc. to Tdf.) céowra: (cf. Kiihner i, 912 ; [Photius
s.v.; Rutherford, New Phryn. p.99; Veitch s, v.]); l aor.
/
610
cola
éo bOnv ; 1 fut. cwOhoouar ; (o&s ‘safe and sound’ (cf. Lat.
sanus ; Curtius § 570; Vanitek p. 1038]); fr. Hom. down ;
Sept. very often for Y'Wi7, also for von, 5x), and our,
sometimes for WY; to save, to keep safe and sound, to
rescue from danger or destruction (opp. to améddrumt,
q. v.); Vulg. salvumfacio (or fio), salvo, [salvifico, libero,
etenl a. univ., ruvd, one (from injury or peril) ;
to save a suffering one (from perishing), e.g. one suffer-
ing from disease, to make well, heal, restore to health: Mt.
ix, 22; Mk. v. 34; x. 52; Lk. vii. 50 [al. understand this
as including spiritual healing (see b. below) ]; viii.
48 ; xvii. 19; xviii. 42; Jas. v.15; pass., Mt. ix. 21; Mk.
vy. 23, 28; vi. 56; Lk. viii. 36, 50; Jn. xi.12; Acts iv. 9
[cf. B. § 144, 25]; xiv. 9. to preserve one who is in
danger of destruction, to save (i.e. rescue): Mt. viii. 25;
xiv. 80; xxiv. 22; xxvii. 40, 42,49; Mk. xiii. 20; xv. 30
sq.; Lk. xxiii. 35, 37, 39; pass., Acts xxvii. 20, 31 ; 1 Pet.
iv. 18; riv Yuxnv, (physical) life, Mt. xvi. 25; Mk. iii.
4; viii. 35 ; Lk. vi. 9; ix. 24 and R G L in xvii. 33 ;
Twa éx with gen. of the place, to bring safe forth from,
Jude 5; ék ris pas ta’rns, from the peril of this hour,
Jn. xii. 27; with gen. of the state, é« Oavdrov, Heb. v.7 ;
ef. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 70 sq.; [W. § 30, 6a.;
see) ex, le 5): b. to save in the technical biblical
sense ; — negatively, to deliver from the penalties of the
Messianic judgment, Joel ii. 32 (iii. 5); to save from the
evils which obstruct the reception of the Messianic deliver-
ance: ard Toy auapri Gy, Mt. 1.21; ard Tis dpyijs Sc. TOU Geod,
from the punitive wrath of God at the judgment of the
last day, Ro. v.93; awd THs yeveds THs ckoNGs Ta’Tns, Acts
ii. 40; Puxnhy ex Oavdrou (see Odvaros, 2), Jas. v. 20; [éx
mupos apragorvres, Jude 23] ; positively, to make one a
partaker of the salvation by Christ (opp. to dréddups, q. V.):
hence owfecOac and eicépxecbar eis Thy Bac. Tod Geod are
interchanged, Mt. xix. 25, cf. 24; Mk. x. 26, cf. 25; Lk.
xviii. 26, cf. 25; so owfecba and (wiv aiwwov Exe, Jn.
iii. 17, cf. 16. Since salvation begins in this life (in deliv-
erance from error and corrupt notions, in moral purity,
in pardon of sin, and in the blessed peace of a soul recon-
ciled to God), but on the visible return of Christ from
heaven will be perfected in the consummate blessings of
daldy 6 wé\\wy, We can understand why 76d cwiecOa is
spoken of in some passages as a present possession, in
others as a good yet future : —as a blessing beginning
(or begun) on earth, Mt. xviii. 11 Rec.; Lk. viii. 12;
xix. 10; Jn.iv. $4 3-x.9); xii. 475) Ro. xt. 14° 1 Coin, 21:
Vil PGs 1x. 220x355) XVec sel hho len On 2 hose Ol:
2 Tim.i.9; Tit. ili.5; 1 Pet. iii. 21; 77 édmld: (dat. of the
instrument) écw@nuer (aor. of the time when they turned
to Christ), Ro. vili. 24; ydpirl éore cecwopévor did THs
miorews, Eph. ii. 5 (cf. B. § 144, 25], 8 ;— as a thing still
future, Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 18; [Mk. xiii. 13]; Ro. v. 10;
1 Co. iii. 15; 1 Tim. ii, 15; Jas. iv. 12; rhv uxt, Mk.
viii. 85; Lk. ix. 24; puxds, Lk. ix. 56 Rec.; 7d mvedua,
pass. 1 Co. v.5; by a pregnant construction (see eds, C.
1 p. 185° bot.), twa els Thy Bacidelay rod Kuplov aldnop,
to save and transport into etc. 2 Tim, iv. 18 (4 etcéBeva
7 cwsovea eis Thy Swhy alwwov, 4 Macc. xv. 2; many exx.
owvev
COMA
of this constr. are given in Passow vol. ii. p. 1802%; [cf.
L. and S. s. v. IIL. 2}). univ.: [Mk. xvi. 16]; Acts ii.
21; iv. 12; xi. 14; xiv. 9; xv. 1, [11]; xvi. 80 sq.; Ro.
Lp lee xe On Oh exd OG e) Mime it: 4; iv. 16; Heb. vii. 25;
Jas. ii. 14; duaprwdods, 1 Tim, i. 15; ras Wuxds, Jas. i.
21; of cwhduevnr, Rev. xxi. 24 Rec.; Lk. xiii. 23; Acts
li. 47 ; opp. to oi amodNvuevor, 1 Co. i. 18; 2 Co. ii. 15,
(see aré\Xume, la. B.). [Come.: dca-, éx- owt. | *
Opa, -ros, 76, (appar. fr. ods ‘entire’, [but cf. Curtius
§ 570; al. fr. r. ska, sko, ‘to cover’, cf. Vaniéek p. 1055 ;
Curtius p. 696]), Sept. for “w3, 3, ete.; aba (a
corpse), also for Chald. 8W3; a body; and 1. the
_ body both of men and of animals (on the distinction be-
tween it and cdpé see odpé, esp. 2 init.; [cf. Dickson, St.
Paul’s use of ‘ Flesh’ and ‘ Spirit’, p. 247 sqq.]); ae
as everywh. in Hom. (who calls the living body déuas)
and not infreq. in subseq. Grk. writ., a dead body or
corpse: univ. Lk. xvii. 37; of a man, Mt. xiv. 12 RG;
[Mk. xv. 45 RG]; Acts ix. 40; plur. Jn. xix. 31; 7d co.
Tivos, Mt. xxvii. 58 sq.; Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 52,55; Jn.
xix. 38, 40; xx. 12; Jude9; of the body of an animal
offered in sacrifice, plur. Heb. xiii. 11 (Ex. xxix. 14; Num.
xix. 3). b. asin Grk, writ. fr. Hesiod down, the living
body: —of animals, Jas. iii. 3;—of man: 7d cdpa, ab-
sol., Lk. xi. 34; xii. 23; 1 Co. vi. 13, etc.; év cdpuare
elvat, Of earthly life with its troubles, Heb. xiii. 3; dis-
tinguished fr. 7d atua, 1 Co. xi. 27; 76 cSua and 7a pédrn
of it, 1 Co. xii. 12, 14-20; Jas. iii.6; 7d cdua the tem-
ple of 7d &y:ov mvetya, 1 Co. vi. 19; the instrument of
the soul, 7a 61a Tod ow. SC. mpaxbévTa, 2 Co. v.10; itis
distinguished — fr. 76 mvedua, in Ro. viii. 10; 1 Co. v. 3;
vi. 20 Rec.; vii. 34; Jas. ii. 26, (4 Macc. xi. 11);—fr. 7
yuxH, in Mt. vi. 25; x. 28; Lk. xii. 22, (Sap. i. 4; viii. 19
sq.; 2 Macc. vii. 37; xiv. 38; 4 Macc. i. 28, etce.);—fr.
n YvxyH and 76 rvcdua together, in 1 Th. v. 23 (cf. Song of
the Three, 63); odpua puxixédy and o. rvevmarcxdy are dis-
tinguished, 1 Co, xv. 44 (see mvevmarixds, 1 and Wuxexéds,
a.); Too. TLvos, Mt. v. 29sq.; Lk. xi. 34; Ro. iv. 19; viii.
23 [cf. W. 187 (176) ], etc.; 6 vads rod cup. adrod, the
temple which was his body, Jn. ii. 21; plur., Ro. i. 24;
1 Co. vi. 15; Eph. v. 28; the gen. of the possessor is
omitted where it is easily learned from the context, as
1iComvecres CoOnly. 10): Vv. Si; Heb. x22, (23); ete. 70
coua THS Tamevwoews Nuav, the body of our humiliation
(subjective gen.), i.e. which we wear in this servile and
lowly human life, opp. to 7d o. rHs ddéys avrod (i. e. Tob
Xpiorot), the body which Christ has in his glorified state
with God in heaven, Phil. iii. 21; 6:4 rod owu. rod Xpi-
orod, through the death of Christ’s body, Ro. vii. 4; dca
Ths mporpopas TOU gdp. Inood Xpicrod, through the sacri-
ficial offering of the body of Jesus Christ, Heb. x. 10;
7d o. THs oapxds, the body consisting of flesh, i.e. the
physical body (tacitly opp. to Christ’s spiritual body,
the church, see 3 below), Col. i. 22 (differently in ii. 11
[see just below]); sGua rod Oavdrov, the body subject to
death, given over to it [cf. W. § 30, 2 8.], Ro. vii. 24;
the fact that the body includes 7 cdpé, and in the flesh
also the incentives to sin (see cdpé, 4), gives origin to
611
TOMATLK@S
the foll. phrases: ui Baoidevérw 4 duapria év 7 Ounrwe
tua oduart, Ro, vi. 12 [cf. W. 524 (488)]; af mpdtes
Tod owpuaros, Ro. vili. 13. Since the body is the instru-
ment of the soul (2 Co. v. 10), and its members the in-
struments either of righteousness or of iniquity (Ro. vi.
13, 19), the foll. expressions are easily intelligible: cdua
THS auapttas, the body subject to, the thrall of, sin [cf.
W. § 30, 2 B.], Ro. vi. 6; 7d ¢. THs capxés, subject to the
incitements of the flesh, Col. ii. 11 (where Rec. has 73 o.
TOV auaptiay THs capKés). SokdfeTe Toy Hedy ev THY chyare
judy, 1 Co. vi. 20; peyadivery tov Xpiorov év TO chart,
ere did Swihs, elite dtd Oavdrov, Phil. i. 20; mapacrfoa ra
cdpara Ouolav facav...7@ Ge@ (i.e. by bodily purity [cf.
Mey. ad loc. ]), Ro. xii. 1. c. Since acc. to ancient
law in the case of slaves the body was the chief thing
taken into account, it is a usage of later Grk. to call
slaves simply cwuara; once so in the N. T.: Rev. xviii.
138, where the Vulg. correctly translates by mancipia
[A. V. slaves], (c®uara rod ofkov, Gen. XxxVi.6; cwWuara
kal krhvn, Tob. X. 10; "Iovdatka cbpara, 2 Mace. viii. 11;
exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given by Zob. ad Phryn. p. 378 sq.
[add (fr. Soph. Lex. s.v.), Polyb. 1, 29,7; 4, 38, 4, also
3, 17, 10 bis]; the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ.
said cwuara dodda, olkerixd, etc.). 2. The name is
transferred to the bodies of plants, 1 Co. xy. 37 sq.,
and of stars [cf. our ‘heavenly bodies’], hence Paul
distinguishes between owyuara éroupdua, bodies celestial,
i.e. the bodies of the heavenly luminaries and of angels
(see érovpdmos, 1), and o. érlyea, bodies terrestrial (i. e.
bodies of men, animals, and plants), 1 Co. xv. 40 (drav
cdpa THS TOY dAwy HUcews .. . TO/CHua TOO Kdcuov, Diod.
ey TED 3. trop. c@ua is used of a (large or small)
number of men closely united into one society, or family as
it were; a social, ethical, mystical body; so in the N. T.
of the church: Ro. xii.5; 1 Co. x.17; xii. 18; Eph. ii. 16 ;
iv. 16; v. 23; Col. i. 18; ii. 19; ili. 15; with rod Xpiorod
added, 1 Co. x. 16; xii.27; Eph.i.23; iv.12; v.30; Col.
i. 24; of which spiritual body Christ is the head, Eph.
iv. 15 sq.; v. 23; Col. i. 18; ii. 19, who by the influence
of his Spirit works in the church as the soul does in the
body. év oGua Kk. &v wvedpa, Eph. iv. 4. 4. nH oKd
and 70 cua are distinguished as the shadow and the
thing itself which casts the shadow: Col. ii. 17; oxcay
airnodbuevos Baoidelas, Hs Hpracev €avT@ 7d g Gua, Joseph.
b. j. 2, 2,5; [(Philo de confus. ling. § 87; Leian. Her-
mot. 79) ].
copatikds, -%, -6v, (oSua), fr. Aristot. down, corporeal
(Vulg. corporalis), bodily ; a. having a bodily form
or nature: cwuatic@ elder, Lk. iii, 22 (opp. to adowuaros,
Philo de opif. mund. § 4). b. pertaining to the body :
h yuuvacta, 1 Tim. iv. 8 (és, Joseph. b. j. 6, 1, 6; ere
Ouular cwu. 4 Mace. i. 32; [éeOvulac cat 7doval, Aristot.
eth. Nic. 7, 7 p. 1149>, 26; al.; dméyou T&v capkixdy kat
gwpuatikGyv ériOujsudy, ‘Teaching’ etc. 1, 4]).*
copatiKds, adv., bodily, corporeally (Vulg. corporaliter),
i.g. év cwparixp elder, yet denoting his exalted and spir-
itual body, visible only to the inhabitants of heaven, Col.
ii, 9, where see Meyer [cf. Bp. Lghtft.].*
Sara rpos
Lérarpos, -ov, 6, [cf. W. 103 (97)], Sopater, a Chris-
tian, one of Paul’s companions: Acts xx.4. [See Zwoi-
matpos. |*
cwpeiw: fut. cwpevow; pf. pass. ptcp. cerwpevpevos;
(cwpés, a heap); [fr. Aristot. down]; to heap together,
to heap up: ti émi 1, Ro. xii. 20 (fr. Prov. xxv. 22; see
dvOpaé); twa rw, to overwhelm one with a heap of any-
thing: trop. déyapriats, to load one with the conscious-
ness of many sins, pass. 2 Tim. iii. 6. [Comp.: ém-
copeva. |*
SocV€vys, -ov, 6, Sosthenes ; 1. the ruler of the
Jewish synagogue at Corinth, and an opponent of Chris-
tianity: Acts xviil. 17. 2. a certain Christian, an
associate of the apostle Paul: 1 Co.i.1. The name
was a common one among the Greeks.*
Lwcimarpos, -ov, 6, Sosipater, a certain Christian, one
of Paul’s kinsmen, (perhaps the same man who in Acts
xx. 4 is called Swmarpos [q. v.; yet the latter was from
Bercea, Sosipater in Corinth]; cf. Sexpdrys and Seat-
Kpatns, Soxdeidns and Seotxdetdys, see Fritzsche, Ep. ad
Rom. vol. iii. p. 316; [cf. Pick, Gr. Personennamen, pp.
79, 80]): Ro. xvi. 21.*
carhp, -jpos, 6, (cow), fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down,
Sept. for pur, nyw, [yrwin], savior, deliverer; pre-
server; (Vulg. [exc. Lk. i. 47 (where salutaris)] salvator,
Luth. Heiland) [cf. B. D. s. v. Saviour, I.]; (Cic. in Verr.
ii. 2, 63 Hoc quantum est? ita magnum, ut Latine uno
verbo exprimi non possit. Is est nimirum ‘soter’, qui
salutem dedit. ‘The name was given by the ancients to
deities, esp. tutelary deities, to princes, kings, and in
general to men who had conferred signal benefits upon
their country, and in the more degenerate days by
way of fiattery to personages of influence; see Passow
{or L. and 8.] s. v.; Paulus, Exgt. Hdbch. ib. d. drei
erst. Evang. i. p. 103 sq.; [Wetstein on Lk. ii. 11; B. D.
u.s.]). In the N. T. the word is applied to God, —car.
pov, he who signally exalts me, Lk.i.47; 6 oor. judy, the
author of our salvation through Jesus Christ (on the
Christian conception of ‘to save’, see odfw, b. [and
on the use of cwrnp cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. iv. 14]), 1 Tim.
i.1; U.3; Tit.i.3; 1.105 iii. 4; with dc "Inood Xpeorod
added, Jude 25 [Rec. om. 8:4 "I. X.]; cartp mdvrav,
1 Tim. iv. 10 (cf. Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 5; xxvi. (xxvii.) 1;
Is. xii. 2; xvii. 10; xlv. 15, 21; Mic. vii. 7, ete.) ; — to
the Messiah, and Jesus as the Messiah, throuch
whom God gives salvation: Lk. ii.11; Acts v.31; xiii.
23; 6 owt. Tod Kéopov, Jn. iv. 42; 1 In. iv. 14; LOY,
2 Tim. i. 10; Tit. i. 45 ii 18; iii. 6; cartp Inoods Xpr-
ords, 2 Pet.i.[1 (where Rec.be*¢ inserts fyudy)], 11; ii.
205 ili. 18; 6 Kvptos Kat oornp, 2 Pet. iii. 2; TwTNp TOU
Teoparos, univ. (‘the savior’ i. e.) preserver of the body,
i. e. of the church, Eph. v. 23 (carp dvtas drdvtev éort
kai yevérwp, of God the preserver of the world, Aristot.
de mundo, ¢. 6 p. 397°, 20); oarnp is used of Christ
as the giver of future salvation, on his return from
heaven, Phil. iii. 20. [The title is confined (with the
exception of the writings of St Luke) to the later writ-
ings of the N. T” (Westcott u. g.)*
612
cwdpovéw
cwrnpla, -as, }, (s@rnp), deliverance, preservation, safety,
salvation: deliverance from the molestation of enemies,
Acts vii. 25; with é& éyOpav added, Lk. i. 71; preserva-
tion (of physical life), safety, Acts xxvii. 34; Heb. xi.
7. in an ethical sense, that which conduces to the soul’s
safety or salvation: cwrnpia twi éyévero, Lk. xix. 9; myet-
oOai rt cwrnpiay, 2 Pet. iii.15; in the technical biblical
sense, the Messianic salvation (see ca a, b.), a.
univ.: Jn. iv. 22; Actsiv. 12; xiii.47; Ro. xi. 11; 2 Th. ii.
13; 2Tim. iii.15; Heb. ii.3; vi.9; Jude3; opp. to dra-
Aewa, Phil. i. 28; aidmos cwrnpia, Heb. v. 9 (for nyawn
ony, Is. xlv. 17); [add, Mk. xvi. WH in the (rejected)
‘Shorter Conclusion ’]; 6 Adyos tis ow@rnpias Tavtys, in-
struction concerning that salvation which John the Bap-
tist foretold [ef. W. 237 (223)], Acts xiii. 26; 76 evayyé-
Asov THs Garnpias tyov, Eph. i. 13; 606 owrnpias, Acts
xvi. 17; képas owtnpias (see képas, b.), Lk. i. 69; mpépa
cetnpias, the time in which the offer of salvation is
made, 2 Co. vi. 2 (fr. Is. xlix. 8); carepyd¢ecOat riv éavtov
cartnpiav, Phil. ii. 12; kAnpovopety owrnpiav, Heb. i. 14;
[6 dpxnyos THs cwtnpias, Heb. ii. 10]; eis owrnpiav, unto
(the attainment of) salvation, Ro. [i. 16]; x. [1], 10;
1 Pet. ii. 2 [Rec. om. ]. b. salvation as the present
possession of all true Christians (see ofa, b.): 2Co.
i.63 vil. 10; Phil. i.19; carnpia ev dpécer dpapriar,
Lk. i. 77; cartnpias tuxeiv pera OdEns aiwviov, 2 Tim.
tie LO; c. future salvation, the sum of benefits
and blessings which Christians, redeemed from all
earthly ills, will enjoy after the visible return of Christ
from heaven in the consummated and eternal king-
dom of God? Ro: xi Mes Wh. v.95 Hebmixs 28
Pet. i. 5, 10; Rev. xii. 10; eAmls carnpias, 1 Th. v. 8;
kouilerOat carnpiay uyar, 1 Pet.i.9; 7 cwrnpia ro Bed
jpov (dat. of the possessor, sc. éoriv [cf. B. § 129, 22];
cf. nyawen nim), Ps. iii. 9), the salvation which is
bestowed on us belongs to God, Rev. vii. 10; 7 oarnpia
... Tov Geod (gen. of the possessor [cf. B. § 132, 11, i. a.],
for Rec. r@ Oe) npady se. eoriv, Rev. xix. 1. (Tragg.,
[Hat.], Thuc., Xen., Plat., al. Sept. for pur, Tyrw,
TIA, nos escape.) *
TeThptos, -ov, (ow7np), fr. Aeschyl., Eur., Thue. down,
saving, bringing salvation: 4 xdpis 4 ca@rnpwos, Tit. ii. 11
(Sap. i. 14; 3 Mace. vii. 18; 9 c@rjptos Siarra, Clem.
Alex. Paedag. p. 48 ed. Sylb.). Neut. 7d carnptov
(Sept. often for Myiwr, less freq. for YW), as often in
Grk. writ., substantively, safety, in the N. T. (the Mes-
sianic) salvation (see oof, b. and in gerypia): with
tov Geod added, decreed by God, Lk. iii. 6 (fr. Is. xl. 5);
Acts xxviii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35,12; he who em-
bodies this salvation, or through whom God is about to
achieve it: of the Messiah, Lk. ii. 30 (76 cor. judy “In-
govs Xp. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 1 [where see Harnack]) ;
simply, equiv. to the hope of (future) salvation, Eph. vi.
17. (In the Sept. 75 cor. often for odui, a thank-offer-
ing [or ‘ peace-offering’], and the plur. occurs in the same
sense in Xen., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Leian., Hdian.) *
cw-hpovéw, -@; 1 aor. impv. cwppovncare; (cdppwv,
q- v.); fr. Tragg., Xen., Plat. down; to be of sound
oodppovifa
mind, i. e. a. to be in one’s right mind: of one
who has ceased Satpovitecda, Mk. v.15; Lk. viii. 35;
opp. to éxorijvat, 2 Co. v. 13, (the gwppovev and paveis
are contrasted in Plat. de rep. i. p. 331 ¢.; cappovodca
and paveioat, Phaedr. p. 244b.; 6 peunvas.. . érappé-
ynce, Apollod. 3, 5, 1, 6). b. to exercise self-control;
i. e. a. to put a moderate estimate upon one’s self,
think of one’s self soberly: opp. to imepppoveiv, Ro. xii.
3 B. to curb one’s passions, Tit. ii. 6; joined with
wipe (as in Leian. Nigrin. 6), [R. V. be of sound mind
and be sober], 1 Pet. iv. 7.*
codppovite, 3 pers. plur. ind. -Covow, Tit. ii. 4 Lmrg. T
Tx, al. subjunc. -Cwou; to make one cdppar, restore one
to his senses; to moderate, control, curb, discipline; to hold
one to his duty; so fr. Eur. and Thue. down; to admon-
ish, to exhort earnestly, [R. V. train]: twa foll. by an inf.
aiteai. 4."
codpovicyds, -ov, 6, (sappovitw) 1. an admon-
ishing or calling to soundness of mind, to moderation and
self-control: Joseph. antt. 17, 9, 2; b. j. 2,1,3; App.
Pun. 8,65; Aesop. fab. 38; Plut.; [Philo, legg. alleg. 3,
69]. 2. self-control, moderation, (cwppomcpoi twes
# perdvora tev véwy, Plut. mor. p. 712 c¢. i. e. quaest.
conviv. 8, 3): mveipa cadpomcpov, 2 Tim. i. 7, where
see Huther; [but Huther, at least in his later edd., takes
the word transitively, i. q. correction (R. V. disci-
yline); see also Holtzmann ad loc. }.*
618
TaraiTrwpla
cadpdvas, (cappar), adv., fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down,
with sound mind, soberly, temperately, discreetly: Tit. ii.
12 (Sap. ix. 11).*
cappoctvy, -ys, 9, (cappov), fr. Hom. (where gaod¢po-
avvn) down; a. soundness of mind (opp. to pavia,
Xen. mem. 1, 1,16; Plat. Prot. p. 323 b.): pyyara cwppo-
aivns, words of sanity [A. V. soberness],. Acts xxvi.
205 b. self-control, sobriety, (ea virtus, cujus pro-
prium est, motus animi appetentes regere et sedare sem-
perque adversantem libidini moderatam is omni re ser-
vare constantiam, Cic. Tusc. 3, 8,17; 9 cadpoo. éort
kal Oovdv two Kat émOvpidv éykpdreva, Plat. rep. 4,
430e.; cf. Phaedo p. 68¢.; sympos. p. 196¢.; Dios.
Laért. 3, 91; 4 Macc. i. 31; gadpoovvn 8é dpe O0 hy
mpos Tas Hdovds ToD Gapatos OiTws Exovow os 6 vdpos
kehevet, dkodacia dé rovvavriov, Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 9):
1 Tim. iil. 15; joined with aides (as in Xen. Cyr. 8, 1,
30 sq.) ibid. 9; [cef. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xx., and see
aidas |.*
cadppeov, -ov, (fr. cdos, contr. cas [cf. oma, init.], and
piv, hence the poet. cad dpov; cf. appv, tarewdppor,
peyaddoppav), [fr. Hom. down]; a. of sound mind,
sane, in one’s senses, (see cappovéw, a. and awdppootrn,
a.)e b. curbing one’s desires and impulses, self-con-
trolled, temperate, [R.V. soberminded], ([émOvpet 6 ca-
pov dv Set kat ws Set kat dre, Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 15 fin.],
see cwppoovrn, b.): 1 Tim. iii. 2; Tit. i. 8; ii. 2, 5.*
T
|T, 7: on the receding of 77 in the vocabulary of the N. T.
before oa, see under 3, a, s.|
raBépvar, -dv, ai, (a Lat. word [cf. B. 17 (15)]), tav-
erns: Tpeis TaBépvae (gen. Tpidv TaBepvav), Three Tav-
erns, the name of an inn or halting-place on the Ap-
pian way between Rome and The Market of Appius
[see”Anmos]; it was ten Roman miles distant from the
latter place and thirty-three from Rome (Cie. ad Attic.
2, 10, (12)) [cf. B.D. s. v. Three Taverns]: Acts xxviii.
155
Top.0é [WH TaBebd, see their App. p. 155, and s. v.
«t,4; the better accent seems to be -6a (see Kautzsch as
below)], 9, (8020, a Chald. name in the ‘emphatic state’
!Kautzesch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. u. 8. w. p. 11, writes it
820, stat. emphat. of x20], Hebr. *3y¥, i. e. Sopkds,
q. v.); Tabitha, a Christian woman of Joppa, noted for
her works of benevolence: Acts ix. 86,40. [Cf. B. D.
8. v. Tabitha. ] *
réypa, -ros, 76, (Tdoow) ;
beex arranged, thing placed in order.
a. pron. that which has
b. spec. a body
of soldiers, a corps: 2 §. xxiii. 18; Xen. mem. 3, 1, 11;
often in Polyb.; Diod. 17, 80; Joseph. b. j. 1, 9,1; 3, 4,
2; [esp. for the Roman ‘legio’ (exx. in Soph. Lex. s. v.
8)]; hence univ. a band, troop, class: €xaatos év To iio
téypart (the same words occur in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 37,
3 and 41, 1), 1 Co. xv. 23, where Paul specifies several
distinct bands or classes of those raised from the dead
[A. V. order. Of the ‘order’ of the Essenes in Joseph.
b. j. 2, 8, 3. 8]
rats, -n, -dv, (rdcow), fr. Thue. (4, 65) down, or-
dered, arranged, fixed, stated: raxri Hpépa (Polyb. 3, 34,
9; Dion. Hal. 2, 74), Acts xii. 21 [A. V. set].*
raaurwpéw, -3: 1 aor. impv. tadaumapnoare; (radat-
mwpos, q- V-); fr. Eur. and Thuc. down; Sept. for
TW a. to toil heavily, to endure labors and hard-
ships; to be afflicted; to feel afflicted and miserable: Jas.
iv. 9. b. in Grk. writ. and Sept. also transitively
(cf. L. and S. s. v. II], to afflict: Ps. xvi. (xvii.) 95 Is.
oo.40 Ue!
radorwpla, -as, #, (raAatrwpos. a. V.), hardship, trouble,
TaralTrwpos
calamity, misery: Ro. iii. 16 (fr. Is. lix. 7); plur. [mis-
erties], Jas. v. 1. (Hdt., Thuc., Isocr., Polyb., Diod.,
Joseph., al.; Sept. chiefly for TW.) *
Tadalarwpos, -ov, (fr. TAAAQ, TAAQ, to bear, undergo,
and mépos a callus [al. rwpds, but cf. Suidas (ed. Gaisf. )
p. 8490 c. and note; al. connect the word with epdw,
mecpdw, cf. Curtius § 466]), enduring toils and troubles ;
afflicted, wretched: Ro. vii. 24; Rev. iii. 17. (1s. xxxiii.
ie tobaxiit. 10s Sapy ills 0)\eind a), braces,
Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Aesop., al.) *
Ttadavtiaios, -a, -ov, (rddavror, q. V.; like dpaxpwatos,
oriyp.atos, daxtuNatos, AuTpiatos, etc.; see Lob. ad Phryn.
p. 544), of the weight or worth of a talent: Rey. xvi. 21.
(Dem., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
tédavtov, -ov, 76, [TAAAQ, TAAQ [to bear]) ; 1.
the scale of a balance, a balance, a pair of scales (Hom.).
2. that which is weighed, a talent, i.e. a. a weight,
varying in different places and times. b. asum of
money weighing a talent and varying in different states
and acc. to the changes in the laws regulating the cur-
rency ; the Attic talent was equal to 60 Attic minae
or 6000 drachmae, and worth about 200 pounds sterling
or 1000 dollars (cf. L. and S.s.v. II. 2b.]. But in the
N. T. probably the Syrian talent is referred to, which
was equal to about 237 dollars [but see BB. DD. s. v.
Money]: Mt. xviii. 24; xxv. 15 sq. [18 Lchm.], 20, 22,
24 sq. 28. (Sept. for 135, Luth. Centner, the heaviest
Hebrew weight ; on which see Kneucker in Schenkel y.
p. 460 sq.; [BB. DD. s. v. Weighis].) *
Ttodv0a [WH radedd, see their App. p. 155, and s.v.
et, 4; more correctly accented -04 (see Kautzsch, as be-
low, p. 8; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 102)], a Chald. word xmoSy
[ace. to Kautzsch (Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 12) more cor-
rectly ND‘3V, fem. of xtoy ‘a youth’], a damsel, maiden:
Mk. vy. 41.*
tapetov [so T WH uniformly], more correctly taezoy
[R GL Tr in Mt. vi. 6], (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 493; W.
94 (90); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 88 sq.]), -ov, 76, (ramedw), fr.
Thuc. and Xen. down ; 1. a@ storechamber, store-
room: Lk. xii. 24 (Deut. xxviii. 8; Prov. iii. 10 [Philo,
quod omn. prob. lib. § 12]). 2. a chamber, esp. ‘an
inner chamber’; a secret room: Mt. vi. 6 ; xxiv. 26; Lk.
xii. 8, (Xen. Hell. 5,4, 5; Sir. xxix. 12; Tob. vii. 15, and
often in Sept. for 17).*
taviv, see viv, 1 f. a. p. 4805 top.
TéEs, -ews, , (rdoow), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down;
1. an arranging, arrangement. 2. order, i.e. a fixed
succession observing also a fixed time: Lk. i. 8. 3.
due or right order: kara rdév, in order, 1 Co. xiv. 40 ;
orderly condition, Col. ii. 5 [some give it here a military
sense, ‘ orderly array’, see crepéwua, C.]. 4. the post,
rank, or position which one holds in civil or other affairs ;
and since this position generally depends on one’s talents,
experience, resources, rdéis becomes equiy. to character,
fashion, quality, style, (2 Macc. ix. 18; i. 19; o8 yap
toroplas, dd Koupeakhs NahiGs euol Soxodcr rdéwv exer,
Polyb. 3, 20, 5): xara rhv rdw (for which in vii. 15 we
have kard tiv ouournra) Medxuoedéx, after the manner
614
TATELVOW
of the priesthood [A. V. order] of Melchizedek (acc.
to the Sept. of Ps. cix. (cx.) 5 smist-5v), Heb. v. 6,
10; vi. 20; vii. 11, 17, 21 (where T Tr WH om. the
phrase).*
rameivés, -7), -dv, fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down, Sept.
for “30, 1B, Saw, etc., low, i.e. a. prop. not rising
far from the ground: Ezek. xvii. 24. b. metaph.
a. as to condition, lowly, of low degree: with a subst.
Jas. i. 9; substantively of ramecvol, opp. to duvdora, Lk.
i. 52; i.g. brought low with grief, depressed, (Sir. xxv.
23), 2 Co. vil. 6. Neut. ra ramewd, Ro. xii. 16 (on
which see cuvardyw, fin.). 8. lowly in spirit, hum-
ble: opp. to trephpavos, Jas. iv. 6; 1 Pet. v. 6 (fr. Prov.
iii. 34) ; with 79 xapdig added, Mt. xi. 29 (7@ mvevparr, Ps.
xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 19); in a bad sense, deporting one’s self
abjectly, deferring servilely to others, (Xen. mem. 3, 10,
5; Plat. legg. 6 p. 774 c.; often in Isocr.), 2 Co. x. 1.
[Cf. reff. s. v. rarecvoppoctvn, fin. ]*
Tamervodpoctvy, -7s, 7, (Tarevdppwy ; Opp. to peyao-
ppostyn, tWnroppoctyn, [cf. W. 99 (94)]), the having a
humble opinion of one’s self ; a deep sense of one’s (moral)
littleness ; modesty, humility, lowliness of mind; (Vulg.
humilitas, Luth. Demuth): Acts xx. 19; Eph. iv. 2; Phil.
ii. 8; Col. iii. 12; 1 Pet. v. 5; used of an affected and
ostentatious humility in Col. ii. 18, 23. (The word occurs
neither in the O. T., nor in prof. auth. — [but in Joseph.
b. j. 4, 9, 2 in the sense of pusillanimity ; also Epictet.
diss. 3, 24, 56 in a bad sense. See Trench, N. T. Syn.
§ xlii.; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil.l.c.; Zezschwitz, Profangra-
citat, u.s.w., pp. 20, 62; W. 26].) *
Tarewddpay, -ov, (rarevds and gpijv), humble-minded,
i.e. having a modest opinion of one’s self: 1 Pet. iii. 8,
where Rec. ¢iddgpoves. (Prov. xxix. 23; in a bad sense,
pusillanimous, mean-spirited, urxpods 7 TUX Kal Tep.oecets
moved Kal tamevoppovas, Plut. de Alex. fort. 2, 4; [de
tranquill. animi 17. See W. § 34, 3 and reff. s. v. rame:-
voppocvyn, fin. ].) *
Tamevow, -@ ; fut. rarevdow ; 1 aor. érarelywoa; Pass.,
pres. rarecvotuac; 1 aor. éramrevdOny; 1 fut. rarevw674-
gopat; (Ttamewds); to make low, bring low, (Vulg. hu-
milio) ; a. prop.: 8pos, Bouvrdy, i.e. to level, reduce
to a plain, pass. Lk. iii. 5 fr. Is. xl. 4. b. metaph.
to bring into a humble condition, reduce to meaner circum-
stances ; i.e. a. to assign a lower rank or place to ; to
abase; tTivd, pass., to be ranked below others who are hon-
ored or rewarded [R. V. to humble]: Mt. xxiii. 12; Lk.
xiv. 11; xviii. 14. B. tame éuavrdy, to humble or
abase myself, by frugal living, 2 Co. xi. 7; in pass. of
one who submits to want, Phil. iv. 12; éavréy, of one
who stoops to the condition of a servant, Phil. ii. 8. Cy
to lower, depress, [Eng. humble]: rivd, one’s soul, bring
down one’s pride ; éuavréy, to have a modest opinion of
one’s self, to behave in an unassuming manner devoid
of all haughtiness, Mt. xviii. 4; xxiii. 12; Lk. xiv. 11;
xviii. 14; pass. ramevvotuar évdmiov kuplov (see évdbmrioy, 2
b. fin.) in a mid. sense [B. 52 (46)], to confess and de-
plore one’s spiritual littleness and unworthiness, Jas. iy.
10 (in the same sense tarevodv thy Wuxiv avrod, Sir. ii.
TaTrelvacis
17; vii. 17; Sept. for wp) 30, he afflicted his soul, of
persons ree Lev. xvi. 29, 31; XX Sie ozeM ise ville
3, 5, 10; rhv Puxqy ruv0s, to aunarh, cine the soul
of one, Protev. Jac. c. 2. 13. 15 Potion to humiliate ; see
the passages]); trd ry xelpa T. Geo, to submit one’s
self in a lowly spirit to the power and will of God, 1 Pet.
v. 6 (cf. Gen. xvi. 9); i,q. to put to the blush, 2 Co. xii.
21. ([Hippocr.], Xen., Plat., Diod., Plut.; Sept. for
mv, bY and Spyin, NBM, DID, Eley). (Gee ellis, ¥.
Tamevoppoctyy. | *
Tamelvaots, -ews, 7, (Tarecvow), lowness, low estate, [hu-
miliation]: Lk. i. 48; Acts viii. 33 (fr. Is. liii. 8); Phil.
iii. 21 (on which see cdya, 1 b. ) ; netaph. spiritual abase-
ment, leading one to perceive and lament his (moval)
littleness and guilt, Jas. i. 10, see Kern ad loc. (In va-
rious senses, by Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut.;
Sept. for 30.) [See reff. s. v. Tamevoppocvyy. | *
Tapacow ; impf. érdparcov; 1 aor. érdpata ; Pass., pres.
impv. 3 pers. sing. rapaccés@w; impf. érapacoduny ; pf.
laor. érapdx6yv ; fr. Hom. down; to agitate,
trouble (a thing, by the movement of its parts to and
fro) ; a. prop.: 7d vdwp, Jn. v. 4 [RL], 7, (Ezek.
XXX. 25 rdv wévrov, Hom. Od. 5, 291; 7d réAayos, Eur.
Tro. 88; rdy rorapsy, Aesop. fab. 87 (25)). b. trop.
to cause one inward commotion, take away his calmness of
mind, disturb his equanimity ; to disquiet, make restless,
(Sept. for OS, etc.; pass. rapdccouar for 131, to be
stirred up, irritated); a. to stir up: tov xdov, Acts
Xvii. 8; [rods dxyXous, Acts xvii. 18 LT Tr WH]. B.
to trouble: ruvd, to strike one’s spirit with fear or dread,
pass., Mt. ii. 3; xiv. 26; Mk. vi. 50; Lk. i. 12; [xxiv.
88]; 1 Pet. iii. 14; rapdoocera: 4 xapdia, Jn. xiv. 1, 27;
to affect with great pain or sorrow: éavrdéy (cf. our to
trouble one’s self), Jn. xi. 33 [A. V. was troubled (some
understand the word here of bodily agitation) ] (ceauvrdy
ph tdpacoe, Antonin. 4, 26); rerdpaxrac 7 Puxy, In. xii.
27 (Ps. vi. 4) ; érapdxOn TO rredparc, Jn. xiii. 21. Y-
to render anxious or distressed, to perplex the mind of
one by suggesting scruples or doubts, (Xen. mem. 2, 6,
17): Gal. i. 7; v. 10; revd Adyors, Acts xv. 24. [Come.:
d.a-, éx- Tapdoow. | *
rapaxh, -fs, 7, (rapdoow), fr. [Pind.], Hdt. down, dis-
turbance, commotion: prop. rod véaros, Ju. v. 4[RL];
metaph. a twmult, sedition: in plur. Mk. xiii. 8 RG.*
TApaxos, -ov, 6, (rapdccw), commotion, stir (of mind):
Acts xii. 18; tumult [A.V. stir], Acts xix. 23. (Sept.;
Xen., Plut., Leian.) *
Tapcets, -éws, 6, (Tapods, q.v.), belonging to Tarsus,
of Tarsus: Actsix.11; xxi. 39.*
Tapods, -o0, 7, [on its accent cf. Chandler §§ 317,
318], in prof. auth. also Tapsol, -dy, al, Tarsus, a mari-
time city, the capital of Cilicia during the Roman period
(Joseph. antt. 1, 6, 1), situated on the river Cydnus,
which divided it into two parts (hence the plural Tapsol).
It was not only large and populous, but also renowned
for its Greek learning and its numerous schools of phi-
losophers (Strab. 14 p. 673 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 303
sq.]). Moreover it was a free city (Plin. 5, 22), and
TETAPAY Mae ;
615
Say,
TAVUTA
exempt alike from the jurisdiction of a Roman governor,
and the maintenance of a Roman garrison ; although it
was not a Roman ‘colony’. It had received its free-
dom from Antony (App. b. civ. 5, 7) on the condition
that it might retain its own magistrates and laws, but
should acknowledge the Roman sovereignty and furnish
auxiliaries in time of war. It is now called Tarso or
Tersus, a mean city of some 6000 inhabitants [others
set the number very much higher]. It was the birth-
place of the apostle Paul: Acts ix. 30; xi. 25; xxii. 3.
[BB.DD.s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq. cf. 2.]*
taptapdw, -G: 1 aor. ptcp. raprapwoas ; (rdprapos, the
name of a subterranean region, doleful and dark, re-
garded by the ancient Greeks as the abode of the
wicked dead, where they suffer punishment for their evil
deeds ; it answers to the Gehenna of the Jews, see yé-
evva); to thrust down to Tartarus (sometimes in the Scho-
liasts) [cf. W. 25 (24) n.]; to hold captive in Tartarus :
Twa cepats [q. V.] fopov, 2 Pet. il. 4 [A. V. cast down to
hell (making the dat. depend on rrapédwxev) ].*
tacc0w: 1 aor. érata; pf. inf. reraxévar (Acts xviii. 2
T Tr mrg.); Pass., pres. ptcp. tacoduevos; pf. 3 pers.
sing. réraxra:, ptcp. Teraypévos ; 1 aor. mid. éraéduny; fr.
[Pind., Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; Sept. for BY, and occa-
sionally for [D2, TX, MW, etc.; to put in place; to sta-
tion 3 a. to place in a certain order (Xen. mem. 8,
1, 7 [9]), to arrange, to assign a place, to appoint: ruvd,
pass. al éfovclac wtrd Oeot rerayuévar eloly [A. V. or-
dained |, Ro. xiii. 1; [karpovs, Acts xvii. 26 Lchm.,]; éavrdy
els diaxovlay tivl, to consecrate [R. V. set] one’s self to
minister unto one, 1 Co. xvi. 15 (él riv diaxoviay, Plat.
de rep. 2 p. 371 ¢.; els rv SovAelay, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 11);
800. Foav TeTaypéevor eis wiv alwviv, aS Many as were
appointed [A. V. ordained] (by God) to obtain eternal
life, or to whom God had decreed eternal life, Acts xiii.
48; riva brd Tia, to put one under another’s control
[A. V. set under], pass., Mt. viii. 9 L WH in br., cod.
Sin.; Lk. vii. 8, (i716 ria, Polyb. 3, 16, 3; 5, 65, 7; Diod.
2, 26,8; 4,9, 5); rut rT, to assign (appoint) a@ thing to
one, pass. Acts xxii. 10 (Xen. de rep. Lac. 11, 6). b.
to appoint, ordain, order: foll. by the acc. with inf., Acts
xv. 2; [xviii. 2 T Tr mrg.]; (foll. by an inf., Xen. Hier.
10, 4; Cyr. 4, 5,11). Mid. (as often in Grk. writ.) prop.
to appoint on one’s own responsibility or authority : of
érdéaro abrots 6 “Ingods sc. mopeverOar, Mt. xxviii. 16 ;
to appoint mutually, i. e. agree upon: huépay (Polyb. 18,
19, 1, etc.), Acts xxviii. 23. [Comp.: dva-(-mac), dvri-,
dro-, Sia-, émt-Oia-(-war), émt-, Tpo-, Tpog-, TuY-, VTo- TdTTwW.
Syn. see xededw, fin.]*
radpos, -ov, 6, [fr. r. meaning ‘thick’, ‘stout’; allied
w. oraupés, q. v.; cf. Vaniéek p. 1127 ; Fick Pt. i. p. 246.
Cf. Eng. steer], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for "iW, a bull (ox):
Mt. xxii.4; Acts xiv. 13; Heb. ix. 13; x, 4.* f
ravra, by crasis for 74 aird: 1 Th. ii. 14 RL mrg., and
some manuscripts [(but see Tdf. on Lk. as below) ] and
edd. also in Lk. vi. 23 [L mrg.], 26 [L mrg.]; xvii. 30
GL. [See W.§ 5,3; B. 10; WH. App. p. 145; Meister-
hans § 18, 1: cf. adrés, III. ]*
Tapy
rabh, -As, 9, (dro), fr. Hdt. down; Sept. several
times for 7913p and 43), burial: Mt. xxvii. 7.*
Tacos, -ov, 6, (Garrw) ; 1. burial (so from Hom.
down). 2. a grave, sepulchre, (so fr. Hes. down) :
Mt. xxiii. 27, 29; xxvii. 61, 64, 66; xxviii. 1; in a com-
parison: tapos dvewypevos 6 Adpuyé adror, their speech
threatens destruction to others, it is death to some one
whenever they open their mouth, Ro. iii. 13. Sept. for
42p, and sometimes for )13p.*
‘Taxa, (raxvs), adv. ; 1. hastily, quickly, soon, (so
fr. Hom. down). 2. as often in Grk. writ. fr. [ Hes.,
Aeschyl.], Hdt. down, perhaps, peradventure : EVO Vs a5
Philem. 15.*
[réxerov, WH for raxcov, q. v.; and cf. s. v. e, «|
Taxéws, (raxvs), adv., [fr. Hom. down], quickly, shortly:
Lk. xiv.21; xvi.6; dn. x1 31; 1 C@o:iv. 195 Galli 6;
Phil. ii. 19, 24; 2 Tim. iv. 9; with the added suggestion
of inconsiderateness [hastily]: 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Tim. v. 22.*
taxwés, -7, -dv, fr. Theocr. down, swift, quick: of
events soon to come or just impending, 2 Pet. i. 14; ii.
15 Css lixe as Sapsexiin 25 joins xvii. 20).
téaxiov [WH rdyevov; see their App. p. 154 and cf.
et, c], (neut. of the compar. tayiwy), adv., for which the
more ancient writ. used Gacoov or Oarrov, see Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 76 sq.; W.§ 11, 2a.; [B. 27-(24)]; more
swiftly, more quickly: in comparison, Jn. xx. 4 [ef. W.
604 (562)]; with the suppression of the second mem-
ber of the comparison [W. 243 (228)]: Heb. xiii. 19
(sooner, sc. than would be the case without your prayers
for me), 23 (sc. than I depart) ; Jn. xiii. 27 (sc. than you
seem to have resolved to); 1 Tim. iii. 14 RG T (se. than
I anticipated) .* :
raxirra, (neut. plur. of the superl. rayucros, fr. raxvs),
adv., [fr. Hom. down], very quickly: @s tdaxtota, as
quickly as possible [A. V. with all speed], Acts xvii. 15.*
74x 0S, -ovs, Td, fr. Hom. down, quickness, speed: ev rayet
(often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down),
quickly, shortly, Acts xii. 7; xxii. 18; [xxv. 4]; Ro. xvi.
20; speedily, soon, (Germ. in Balde), Lk. xviii. 8; 1 Tim.
iii. 14 L Tr WH; Rev.i.1; xxii. 6.*
raxv, (neut. of the adj. rayus), adv., [fr. Pind. down],
quickly, speedily, (without delay): Mt. v. 25; xxviii. 7
sq.; Mk. xvi. 8 Rec.; Lk. xv. 22 L Trbr. WH; Jn. xi.
29; epyecda, Kev. ii. 5 Rec.b292 16.) ii 11s xi. 14;
xxii. 7,12, 20; forthwith, i.e. while in the use of my
name he is performing mighty works, Mk. ix. 39.*
tax vs, -cia, -v, fr. Hom. down, quick, fleet, speedy: opp.
to Bpadvs (as in Xen. mem. 4, 2, 25), es rd dxodaat, [ A. V.
swift to hear], Jas. i. 19.*
vé, (as S¢ comes fr. 87, wev fr. pny, so ré fr. the adv.
Th, prop. as; [al. ally it with «ai, cf. Curtius §§ 27, 647;
Vanicek p. 95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat.
§ 195]), a copulative enclitie particle (on the use of
which cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. II.
2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently
in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat
rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in
Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John’s Gospel three times;
616
TE
nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in
the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Rec. of
Rev., viz. i.2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from
the particle xaé in that the latter is conjunctive, ré
adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; acc. to Béumlein (Griech.
Partikeln, p. 145), cai introduces something new under
the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas ré
marks it as having an inner connection with what pre-
cedes; hence xai is the more general particle, ré the
more special and precise; «ac may often stand for ré,
but not ré for cai. (Cf. Ebeling, Lex. Homer., s. v. kai,
init.) ].
1. ré, standing alone (i. e. not followed by another ré,
or by kai, or other particle), joins a. parts of one
and the same sentence, as ovvayOévres ovpovALdv Te
AaBdvres, Mt. xxviii. 12; év ayarn mvevpari te mpadryros,
1 Co: iv. 203 "add SA cts 11°33; ex) 22s ex 26 oe ns
xxiii. 10 [WH txt. om.], 24; xxiv.5; xxvii. 20 sq.; xxviii.
25 ECDs day Virsa Xe Ws b. complete sentences:
Jim ive 42 savi. 13s PA Cisail ST Seivaso Val on oe toe vas
7,12sq.; viii. 3, 13, 25, 31; x. 28, 33, 48 [here TTr WH
dé (see 6 below)]; xi. 21; xii. 6,8[L Tr WH 6¢ (see 6
below) ], 12; xiii. 4; xv. 4,39; xvi. 13, 23 [WH txt. d€
(see 6 below)], 34; xvii.5 [RG], 19 [Trtxt. WH 6¢ (see 6
below) ], 26; xviii. 11 [RG], 26; xix. 11, 18, 29; xx. 3, 7;
mal. (18° Raf], 18°) 20 [not Lehm-|) 3 se xxii. 8 xxaiens
xxiv. 27; xxvii. 5, 8,17, 29 [Trmrg. d€ (see 6 below)],
43; Ro. ii.19; Heb. xii.2; introduces a sentence serv-
ing to illustrate the matter in hand, Acts i. 15; iv.
13. - kai, and ré kai, not only... but also,
as well ...as, both...and; things are thus connected
which are akin, or which are united to each other by
some inner bond, whether logical or real; [ace. to W.
439 (408); Baumlein u. s. p. 224 sq., these particles give
no intimation respecting the relative value of the two
members; but acc. to Rost, Griech. Gram. §134,4; Don-
aldson, Gr. Gram. § 551; Jelf § 758; Klotz ad Devar.
Il. 2, p. 740, the member with xai is the more em-
phatic]; a. parts of one and the same sentence
(which is completed by a single finite verb): éciew te
kal rive, Lk. xii. 45; poBntpa te Kat onpeta, Lk. xxi. 11;
dapxvepeis Te Kal ypappareis, Lk. xxii. 66; movnpots tre kal
dyabois, Mt. xxii. 10; “Hpwdns re cai Idvrios TudGaros,
Acts iv. 273 advdpes te kal yuvaixes, Acts viii. 12; ix. 2;
Xxil. 4; mdvtn te x. mavtaxov, Acts xxiv. 3; dodady re
kat BeBatav, Heb. vi. 19; add, Actsi.1; ii. 9sq.; ix. 29;
xiv. 1,5; xv.9; xvili.4; xix. 10,17; xx.21; xxi. 12;
xxvi. 22; Ro. i. 12, 14, 16; iii. 9; x.12; 1Co.i. 2[RG],
24, 30; Heb. iv. 12* Rec., 12°; v.1 [here Lom. Tr WH
br. ré], 7,145 viii. 3; ix.9,19; x. 83; xi. 32; Jas. iii. 7;
ré is annexed to the article, which is—either repeated
after the xat before the following noun, Lk. ii. 16; xxiii.
12; Jn. ii. 15; Acts v. 24; viii. 38; xvii. 10; xviii. 55
xxi. 25 [RG]; xxvi. 30;—or (less commonly) omitted,
Acts VG saith 18) Peal Os Ie Ne WH]; Ro.i. 20. ré
is annexed to a preposition, which after the following
kai is— either repeated, Acts i. 8 where Lom. Tr br. the
repeated ¢y, Phil. i. 7 [Rom.Lbr. the second év];—
2; Te =
TELXOS
or omitted, Acts x. 39 [Trtxt. WH]; xxv. 23; xxviii.
23. ré is annexed to a relative pronoun, althodah it
does not belong so much to the pronoun as to the sub-
stantive connected with it, Acts xxvi. 22. it is annexed
to an adverb, ére re kai, [and moreover], Acts xxi. 28.
When more than two members are jomed together, the
oe two are joined by ré xai or ré.. . kai, the rest by
> Lk. xii. 45; Acts i. 13; v. 24 [R Gale 2 yal Co.
i. i. 305 Heb. ii. 4, b. ré... «ai connect whole sen-
taucés (each of which has its own finite verb, or its own
subject): Acts ii.3sq. RG; xvi. 26 RG; ré... nal...
kai, Acts xxi. 80. 3. re... 0€ are so combined
that ré adds a sentence to what has been previously
said, and d¢€ introduces something opposed to this added
sentence [ W. 439 (409)]: Acts xix. 2 LT Tr WH; 3RG
LTrtxt. WH txt.; xxii. 28 RG. 4. Te... 7é pre-
sents as parallel (or coordinate) the ideas or sen-
tences which it connects, as...so (cf. Kiihner § 520; [Jelf
§ 754, 3; W. § 53,4]; on the Lat. que... que cf. Herzog
on Sallust, Cat. 9, 3): Acts ii. 46; xvi. 11 sq. RG;
xvil.4; xxvi.10 LT Tr WHtxt., 16; Heb. vi. 2 [Tr br.
WH txt. om. second ré], (Sap. vii. 13; xv. 7);
. re, Acts ix. 15 [LT Tr WH];
Acts xxvi. 20 [L T Tr WH].
15; éay Te..
Te kal
Kai,
elre .. . etre, see ei, III.
. €av Te, See €av,I1.3e. pyre... pyre...
té, neither ...nor...and, Acts xxvii. 20 (Xen. an. 4,
4, 6). 5. ré yap (which began to be frequent fr.
Aristot. down), Lat. namque, etenim, for also, for indeed,
[W. 448 (417)], are so used that the former particle
connects, the latter gives the reason: Ro. i. 26 (so that
in 27 we must read dpoiws dé cai [with L Tr mrg.], see
in 6 below) ; vii. 7 (4 Mace. v. 22); ré yap . . . kai, Heb.
ii. 11; édy re yap... eav re, for whether... or (whether),
Ro. xiv. 8; éav tre yap kai, for although (Lat. namque
etiamsi), 2 Co. x. 8 [RG]. 6. The reading often
varies in codd. and edd. between ré and d€; as, Mt. xxiii.
6; Acts iii. 10; iv. 145 viii. 1,6; ix. 24; xiii. 46; Jude
6, etc. [seein 1 b. above]. In Ro. i. 27, following Lehm.
[Tr mrg.], we ought certainly to read époiws dé kai; cf.
Fritzsche ad loc. p. 77; [B. 361 (309) n.]. 7. As
respects Position (cf. Kiihner § 520 Anm.5; W. 559
sq. (520)), ré is properly annexed to that word or idea
which is placed in parallelism with another (as "Iovdatoi
te kal EAAnves); but writers also take considerable lib-
erty in placing it, and readily subjoin it to an article or
a preposition; for examples see in 2 a. above.
reixos, -ovs, 76, [cf. Oryyave; allied with it are Eng.
‘dike’ and ‘ditch ’], fr. Hom. down, Sept. very freq. for
min ‘wall’; the wall round a city, town-wall: Acts ix.
25; 2 Co. xi. 33; Heb. xi. 30; Rev. xxi. 12, 14sq., 17-19.*
Texutptov, -ov, 76, (fr. texpaipw to show or prove by
sure signs; fr. réxwap a sign), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
that from which something is surely and plainly BL
an indubitable evidence, a proof, (Hesych. TeKBNpLoV *
anpeiov adnOés): Acts i. 3 (Sap. v.11; 3 Macc. iii. 24).*
wexviov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of réxvov, q. V- 5 [on the accent,
ef. W. 52; Chandler § 347]), a little child; in the N.T.
nsed as a term of kindly address by teachers to their
ENR ores
617
TEKVOD
disciples [always in the plur. little children: Mk. x. 24
Lehm.]; Jn. xiii. 33; Gal. iv. 19 (where L txt. T Tr WH
mrg. téxva); 1 Jn. ii. 1, 12, 28; iii, 7 [WH mrg. radia],
18; iv. 4; v. 21. (Anthol.)*
TeKvoyovew, -G; (rexvoydvos, and this fr. réxvoy and
TENQ) ; to beget or bear children: 1 Tim. v.14. (An-
thol. 9, 22, 4.) *
texvoyovia, -as, 9, child-bearing: 1 Tim. ii. 15. (Aris-
tot. h. a. 7, 1, 8 [p. 582, 28].)*
TéKvoV, -ov, T6, (rikrw, Texeiv), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
chiefly for }2, sometimes for 30, offspring; plur. chil-
dren; a. prop. a. ae ‘and without regard to
sex, child: Mk. xiii. 12; Lk. i. 7; Acts vii. 5; Rew xii.
Ae aplu VEG, vileml le xe Olle toavane GsmlVilce viieeode exits
19; Lk.i.17; xiv. 26; Acts xxi.5; 2Co. xii. 14; Eph.
vis 1; \Colsiiix20:sq: 0d "Ths iis 4) V5 Lim. a: 4) Bit,
i.6; 2Jn.1, 4, 13, and often; with emphasis: to be
regarded as true, genuine children, Ro. ix. 7; réxva
emayyeAtas, children begotten by virtue of the divine
promise, Ro. ix. 8; accounted as children begotten by
virtue of God’s promise, Gal. iv. 28; ra téxva tis capkds,
children by natural descent, Ro. ix. 8. in a broader
sense (like the Hebr. 0°33), posterity: Mt. ii. 18; iii. 9;
Lk. iii. 8; Acts ii. 39; xiii. 33 (82). with emphasis:
genuine posterity, true offspring, Jn. viii. 39; (of wo-
men) to be regarded as children, 1 Pet. iii. 6. p.
spec. a male child, a son: Mt. xxi. 28; Acts xxi. 21;
Rey. xii. 5; in the voc., in kindly address, Mt. xxi. 28 ;
Lk. ii. 48; xv. 31. b. metaph. the name is trans-
ferred to that intimate and reciprocal relationship formed
between men by the bonds of love, friendship, trust,
just as between parents and children; a. in affec-
tionate address, such as patrons, helpers, teachers, and
the like, employ; voc. child (son), my child, children,
(Lat. fili, mi fili, etc., for carissime, etc.): Mt. ix. 2; Mk.
ii. 5; x. 24 [here Lehm. rexvia, q. v.]. B. just as in
Hebrew, Syriac, Arabic, Persian, so in the N. T., pupils
or disciples are called children of their teachers, because
the latter by their instruction nourish the minds of their
pupils and mould their characters (see yevvdw, 2 b.):
Philem. 10; 2 Tim.i. 2; 3Jn.4; in affectionate ad-
dress, Gal. iv. 19 L txt. T Tr WH mrg.; 1 Tim. i.18; 2
Tim. ii. 1; with ey kup added, 1 Co. iv. 17; év micret,
1 Tim. i. 2; kara xowny riorw, Tit. i. 4, (D833 733, sons
i.e. disciples of the prophets, 1 K. xxi. (xx.) 85; 2K.
ii. 3, 5, 7; among the Persians, ‘sons of the Magi’ i. e.
their pupils). ys TeKva TOU eo’, children of God, —in
the O. T. of ‘the people of Israel’ as especially dear to
God: Is. xxx.1; Sap. xvi. 21;— inthe N.T., in Paul’s
writings, all who are animated by the Spirit of God (Ro.
viii. 14) and thus are closely related to God: Ro. viii.
16 sq. 21; Eph.v.1; Phil. ii. 15; those to whom, as dear-
ly beloved of God, he has appointed salvation by Christ.
Ro. ix. 8; in the writings of John, all who ék Oeod éyer
mmOnaav (have been begotten of God, see yevvde, 2d.) : Jn.
i. 12sq.; 1 Jn. iii. 1 sq. 10; v. 2; those whom God knows
to be qualified to obtain the nature and dignity of his
children, Jn. xi. 52. [Cf. Westcott on the Epp. of St.
/
TEKVOTpPOPew
John, pp. 94, 120; “In St. Paul the expressions ‘sons
of God’, ‘children of God’, mostly convey the idea of
liberty (see however Phil. ii. 15), in St. John of guile-
lessness and love; in accordance with this distinction
St. Paul uses vioi as well as réxva, St. John réxva only ”
(Bp. Lehtft.) ; cf. vids rod Geod, 4.] 8. rexva tov dua-
Bddov, those who in thought and action are prompted by the
devil, and so reflect his character: 1 Jn. iii. 10. Cc.
metaph. and Hebraistically, one is called réxvov of any-
thing who depends upon it, is possessed by a desire or
affection for it, is addicted to it; or who is liable to any
fate; thus in the N. T. we find a. children of a
city, i. e. its citizens, inhabitants, (Jer. ii. 30; Joel ii.
23; 1 Mace. i. 38; viot Svov, Ps. exlix. 2): Mt. xxiii.
BU Uke xis4) x1k. 44 eeGalwiye 20. B. réxva Hs
copias, the votaries of wisdom, those whose souls have,
as it were, been nurtured and moulded by wisdom: Mt.
xi. 19 (where T Tr txt. WH have hastily adopted gpyav
for réxvov; cf. Keim ii. p. 369 [Eng. trans. iv. p. 43 sq.;
per contra, see Tdf.’s note and WH. App. ad loc.]) ; Lk.
vii. 35; réxva dmaxons, those actuated by a desire to obey,
obedient, 1 Pet. i. 14; rod dwrds, both illumined by the
light and loving the light, Eph. yv. 8. Y. Katapas
réxva, exposed to cursing, 2 Pet. ii. 14; ris dpyijs, doomed
to God’s wrath or penalty, Eph. ii. 3; cf. Steiger on 1
Pet. i. 14; W. 238 (223); [B. 161 (141)]. In the same
way éxyovos is used sometimes in Grk. writ.; as, éy.
adixias, Sevdias, Plat. lege. 3 p. 691¢.; 10 p. 901e.
[Syn. téxvov, vids: r.and vi. while concurring in point-
ing to parentage, differ in that 7. gives prominence to the
physical and outward aspects, vi. to the inward, ethical, legal.
Cf. b. y. above; vids rod Gcod, fin.; mais, fin. and reff. (esp.
that to Héhne).]
rexvo-tpodpéw, -@: 1 aor. érexvorpdpnaa; (texvotpdpos,
and this from rékvov and tpépw) ; to bring up children:
1 Tim. v.10. (épet vdwp, drav rexvorpopA, sc. the bee,
Aristot. h. a. 9, 40 [27], 14 [p. 625, 20].) *
TEKTWV, -OVOS, 6, (Tekeiv, Tiktw; akin to réxvn, Tedyo,
hence prop. ‘ begetter’ [Curtius § 235]), fr. Hom. down,
Sept. for wn; @ worker in wood, a carpenter: Mt. xiii.
55; Mk. vi. 3 [see WH. App. on the latter pass.].*
TéXeLos, -a, -ov, (TéAos), in classic Grk. sometimes also
-os, -ov, (cf. W. § 11, 1), fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times
for DIY, DNA, ete.; prop. brought to its end, finished;
wanting nothing necessary to completeness ; perfect: &pyov,
Jas.i.4; ) dydrn, 1 Jn. iv. 18; 6 vdpos, Jas. i. 25; [Sapnua,
Jas.i.17]; redevorépa oxnvy, a more perfect (excellent)
tabernacle, Heb. ix. 11; 7d rédevov, substantively, that
which is perfect: consummate human integrity and vir-
tue. Ro. xii. 2 [al. take it here as an adj. belonging to
Oéhnpa]; the perfect state of all things, to be ushered in
by the return of Christ from heaven, 1 Co. xiii. 10; of
men, full-grown, adult; of full age, mature, (Aeschyl.
Ag. 1504; Plat. legg. 11 p.929¢.): Heb. v. 14; réA. avnp
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,4sq.; 8, 7,6; Philo de cherub. § 32; opp.
to maior vymov, Polyb. 5, 29,2; for other exx. fr. other
auth. see Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 133 sq.), wéxpe
. . eis Gvdpa TeAevov, until we rise to the same level of
618
,
TEAELOW
knowledge which we ascribe to a full-grown man, until
we can be likened toa full-grown man, Eph. iv. 13 (opp.
to viymior, 14); TéAevoe Tais ppeoi (opp. to madia and
vymudtovres rais ppeai), 1 Co. xiv. 20 [here A. V. men] ;
absol. of réAevot, the perfect, i.e. the more intelligent,
ready to apprehend divine things, 1 Co. ii. 6 [R.V. mrg.
full-grown] (opp. to vimiot ev XpiorG, iii. 1; in simple opp.
to vizwos, Philo de legg. alleg. i. § 30; for }.21, opp. to
pavOdver, 1 Chr. xxv. 8; [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 28;
Phil. iii. 15]); of mind and character, one who has
reached the proper height of virtue and integrity: Mt.
v. 48; xix. 21; Phil. iii. 15 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. u.s.]; Jas.
i.4; in an absol. sense, of God: Mt. v. 48; rédevos
dynp, Jas. iii. 2 (red. Sixavos, Sir. xliv. 17); as respects
understanding and goodness, Col. iv. 12; red. dvépwmos
év Xpiorg, Col. i. 28 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.u.s. Syn. see
6AdKAnpos, and Trench § xxii.].*
reherdtns, -qTOS, 9, (TéAeLos, q. V-), perfection ; a.
i. e. the state of the more intelligent : Heb. vi. 1 [here R.V.
mrg. full growth]. b. perfection: (ris adyanns, Clem.
Rom. 1 Cor. 50,1 [where see Harnack]); absol. moral
and spiritual perfection, Col. iii. 14 [A.V. perfectness], on
which pass. see avvdecpos,1. (Prov. xi. 3 Alex.; Judg.
ix. 16,19; Sap. vi. 16; xii.17; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 53, 5;
Plat. deff. p. 412 b. d.; [Aristot. phys. 3, 6 p. 207°, 21; 8,
7 p. 261°, 36]; Antonin. 5, 15.) (Cf. reff. s. v. réXetos,
and B. Hartung, Der Begriff der redezdrns im N. T.
(4to. Leipz. 1881).]*
tedetdw (in prof. auth. also reAedw, which Hdt. uses
everywhere [and which is “the prevailing form in Attic
prose” (L. and §.)]; other writ. use both forms indif-
ferently), -6: 1 aor. éreAelwoa; pf. rereXcioxa; Pass. (or
Mid.), pres. reAecodpar; pf. rereAeiwpar; 1 aor. éreAer@Onv;
(réXevos); fr. Hdt., Soph., Thuc., and Plat. down; equiv.
to réAevov Tore, to make perfect or complete ; 1. to
carry through completely; to accomplish, finish, bring to
an end: rv Spdpov, Acts xx. 24; 7d epyov, In. iv. 84; v.
36; xvii. 4, (Neh. vi. 16; rév ofkov, 2 Chr. viii. 16); ras
nwépas, Lk. ii. 43; mid. [pres. cf. B. 38 (33) ] reAecodpar,
I finish, complete, what was given me to do, Lk. xiii. 32
[some (so A. V.) take it here as pass., J am perfected
(understanding it of his death; cf. Hilicott, Life of our
Lord, Lect. vi. p. 242 n.1; Keim ii. 615 n.1)}. 2. to
complete (perfect), i.e. add what is yet wanting in order
to render a thing full: tv ayamny, pass.,1 Jn. ii. 5; iv.
12,17; Svvapis pou ev doOeveia trehevodTar, My power
shows itself most eflicacious in them that are weak, 2 Co.
xii. 9 RG; ek tov Epyov 7 Tiotis ereAecoOn, by works
faith was perfected, made such as it ought to be, Jas. ii.
22; reredelwral tis €v TH ayany, One has been made perfect
in love, his love lacks nothing, 1 Jn. iv. 18 (of reNevw-
Gévres ev aydmn, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 50, 3; [redevdoae THY
exk\ynoiav gov ev 77 dyamn oov, ‘Teaching’ ete. 10, 5]);
iva Got TeTeerc@pévor eis ev, that they may be perfected into
one, i.e. perfectly united, Jn. xvii. 23. twa, to bring
one’s character to perfection: #5n rereheiopat, I am already
made perfect, Phil. iii. 12 (Sap. iv. 13; & Wuyy... éray
7ehewwOs kai BpaBeiwv kai orepdvey a&iabijs, Philo de legg,
TENElws
.alleg. 3, 23; Woy)... rederwOeioa ev dpetav GOdots Kal
én Tov Spov ehikowérn Tod Kado, id. de: somn. 1, 21; i. q:
to be found perfect, Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 10). 3. to
bring to the end (goal) proposed: odSév, Heb. vii. 8)
tia, [to perfect or consummate] i.e. to raise to the state
befitting him: so of God exalting Jesus to the state of
heavenly majesty, Heb. ii. 10; in pass., Heb. v. 9; vii.
28; to raise to the state of heavenly blessedness those who
put their faith in the expiatory death of Christ, pass.,
Heb. xi. 40; xii. 23, ([Act. Petr. et Paul. § 88, ed. Taf.
p- 39; Act. Barnab. § 9, id. p. 68; ef. ‘Teaching’ ete.
16, 2]; with paprupio added, of the death of the apost.
Paul, Euseb. h. e. 2, 22, 2 [ef. Heinichen’s note on 7, 15,
5']); to make one meet for future entrance on this state
and give him a sure hope of it even here on earth, Heb.
x. 1,14; rivd kara ouveidnow, Heb. ix.9; cf. Bleek, Brief
an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 297 sqq.; C. R. Késtlin, Lehrbegriff
des Evang. u. der Briefe Johannis (Berl. 1843) p. 421
sqq-; Riehm, Lehrbegriff des Hebr.-Br., § 42, p. 340 sqq.;
Pfleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 344 sq. [Eng. trans. ii. p. 72
sqq- ]- 4. to accomplish, i.e. bring to a close or ful-
filment by event : rv ypadpjy, the prophecies of Scripture,
pass., Jn. xix. 28 [cf. W. 459 (428); B. § 151, 20].*
tedelws, (réAevos), adv., perfectly, completely: 1 Pet. i.
13. [Plat., Isocr., Aristot., etc.; cf. W. 463 (431).]*
TeXelwois, -ews, 7), (Tehewdw), & Completing, perfecting ;
a. fulfilment, accomplishment; the event which verifies
a promise (see redevdw, 4): Lk. i. 45 [Judith x. 9; Philo
de vit. Moys. iii. § 39]. b. consummation, perfection,
(see reAedw, 3): Heb. vii. 11. (In various senses in
Aristot., Theophr., Diod.) [Cf. reff. s. v. reAerdw, 3.] *
TEAELWTHS, -00, 6, (TeAELdw), (Vulg. consummator), a per-
fecter: tis miotews, one who has in his own person raised
faith to its perfection and so set before us the highest
example of faith, Heb. xii. 2. The word occurs no-
where else.*
TeMeropew, -G; (reAeaqdpos, fr. rédos and dépw); to
bring to (perfection or) maturity (sc. xaprots) : Lk. viii.
14. (Used alike of fruits, and of pregnant women and
animals bringing their young to maturity ; 4 Mace. xiii.
19; Theophr., Geop., Philo, Diod., Joseph., al.; [Ps. lxiv.
(Ixv.) 10 Symm.].) *
wehevtdw, -@; 1 aor. érehevtnoa; pf. ptcp. rereAeuTnKa@s
(Jn. xi. 39 LL T Tr WH); (redevtn); fr. Hom. down; 1.
trans. to finish; to bring to an end or close: rov Biov, to
finish life, to die, often fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down. 2)
intrans. [cf. B. §130, 4] to have an end or close, come to an
end; hence to die, very often so fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down (Sept. for ny), and always in the N. T.: Mt. ii.
19; ix. 18; xxii. 25; Mk. ix. 44, 46 [(these two vss. T
WH om. Tr br.)], 48; Lk. vii. 2; Jn. xi.39 L T Tr WH;
Acts ii. 29; vii. 15; Heb. xi. 22; Oavarw redevtdr@ (in
imitation of the Hebr. nny nin, Ex. xxi. 12, 15-17,
etc.), [A. V. let him die the death i. e.] let him surely die
[W. 339 (319); B. § 133, 22], Mt. xv. 4; Mk. vii. 10.*
redcuTh, -7s, 7}, (TeAgw), ent! [see réNos, 1 a. init.]; the
end of life, decease, death: Mt. ii. 15 (and often in Grk.
writ. fr. Pind. and Thuc. down; Sept. for nin; with
619
TENOS
Bisrovo added, Hom. Il. 7, 104; rod Biov, Hat. 1, 30, and
often in Attic writ.).*
tehéw, -; 1 aor. eréheoa [cf. W. § 13, 3 c.]; pf. reréAexa
(2 Tim. iv. 7); Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. reAetrae (2 Co.
xii. 9 L T Tr WH); pf. rereAecpar; 1 aor. ereheoOnp 5
1 fut. reNeoOnoopar; (rédos); fr. Hom. down; 1. to
bring to a close, to finish, to end : &rn, pass., passed, finished,
Rev. xx. 3, 5, 7, ([so fr. Hom. and Hes. down; Aristot.
h. a. 7, 1 init. p. 580%, 14 év rots great rois dts émra tere
Aeopevots]; Tpidv TeAovpevav uepaov, Leian. Alex. 38);
tov Spopov (Hom. Il. 23, 373, 768; Soph. Electr. 726),
2 Tim. iv. 7; rovs Adyous, Mt. vii. 28 LT Tr WH; xix.
1; xxvi.1; tds mapaBords, Mt. xiii. 53; [dype reheoOdow
ai mAnyat, Rev. xv. 8]; a rare use is reAetv Tas mOAELs, i.e.
your flight or journey through the cities [R. V. ye shall
not have gone through the cities, ete.], Mt. x. 23 (similar
are avvew Tovs Tomous, Polyb. 5, 8, 13 Ta €An, 3, 79, 53 con-
summare Italiam, Flor. 1, (13) 18, 1; explere urbes, Ti-
bull. 1, 4,69; conficere aequor immensum, Vere. Georg.
2, 541; also xii. siznorum orbem, Cic. nat. deor. 2, 20,
52); with the ptep. of a verb (like dpyouat, mavopat, cf.
W. § 45,4a.; B. § 144, 14), Mt. xi. 1. 2. to per-
form, execute, complete, fulfil, (so that the thing done
corresponds to what has been said, the order, command,
etc), 1. e: a. with special reference to the sub-
ject-matter, to carry out the contents of a command :
Tov vouov, Ro. ii. 27 [ef. W. 134 (127)]; Jas. ii. 8; rap
emOupiay (i. €. 7d emtOvjovpevor), Gal. v. 16. B. with
reference also to the form, to do just as commanded, and
generally involving a notion of time, to perform the last
act which completes a process, to accomplish, fulfil:
dmavra (mavra) ta kara vopov, Lk. ii. 39; thv paprupiay,
the duty of testifying, Rev. xi. 7; rd puvornpiov, pass.
Rev. x. 7 [cf. W. 277 (260)]; 76 Bdmriopa, pass. Lk. xii.
50; mdvra, pass. Jn. xix. 28 [the distinction betw. rehé
and reAewow may be seen in this vs.]; tovs Adyous (ra
pnuara) tod Oeov, pass. Rev. xvii. 17; davra (mdvra) ra
yeypappeva, Acts xiii. 29; pass., Lk. xviii. 31 [see ypddo,
2 ¢.]; with év euoi (in me) added, in my experience, Lk.
xxii. 37; év wAnyais, in the infliction of calamities, Rev.
xv. 1; reréXeora, [A. V. it is finished] everything has
been accomplished which by the appointment of the
Father as revealed in the Scriptures I must do and bear,
Jn. xix. 30. i.q. redetd@, 2, q. v. (made perfect): 2 Co.
xii. 9 LT Tr WH. 3. to pay: ta Sidpaypa, Mt.
xvii. 24; Pdpous, Ro. xiii. 6, (rdv pédpor, Plat. Ale. 1 p.’
123 a.; ra réAn, often in Attic writ.). [Comp.: dzo-,
Sua-, ek-, emt-, Tvv- TeAEw. | *
rédos, -ovs, 6, (cf. Curtius § 238], fr. Hom. down, Sept.
mostly for YP 1. end, i.e. a. termination, the
limit at which a thing ceases to be, (in the Grk. writ.
always of the end of some act or state, but not of the
end of a period of time, which they call redeurq; in the
Scriptures also of a temporal end; an end in space is
everywhere called zépas) : ris Baowdeias, Lk. i. 33; Cons,
Heb. vii. 3; rod xarapyoupévou, 2 Co. iii. 13 ; ra réAn TeV
aldvev, 1 Co. x. 11 (rédos rev nuepov, Neh. xiii. 6; rav
énta éray, 2K. viii. 3; dpxr Kat rédos Kal pecdrns xpover,
réXos
Sap. vii. 18); i. q. he who puts an end to: réAos vdéyou
Xptords, Christ has brought the law to an end (mac
eorw avOpamos tédos tod Biov Oavaros, Dem. 1306, 25),
Ro. x. 4; cf. Fritzsche ad loc., vol. ii. p. 377 sq. mavrav
ro tédos, the end of all things (i. e. of the present order
of things), 1 Pet. iv. 7; also in the phrases €ws rédous,
1 Co. i. 8; 2 Co. 4.13; péxpe rédous, Heb. iii. 6 [Tr mrg.
WH br. the cl.], 14; dype rédovs, Heb. vi. 14; Rev. ii.
26. What ‘end’ is intended the reader must deter-
mire by the context; thus, ro rédos denotes the end of
the Messianic pangs (dolores Messiae; see div) in Mt.
xxiv. 6, 14, (opp. to dpy} ddivav); Mk. xiii. 7 (ef. 9);
Lk. xxi. 9; 1d rédos in 1 Co. xv. 24 denotes either the
end of the eschatological events, or the end of the res-
urrection i.e. the last or third act of the resurrection (to
include those who had not belonged to the number of oi
Tov Xpuorod év TH mapovaia adrod), 1 Co. xv. 24 cf. 23;
see De Wette ad loc.; Wetzel in the Theol. Stud. u.
Krit. for 1836, p. 978; Grimm in the Zeitschr. f. wis-
sensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 388 sqq-; [yet cf. Heinrici in
Meyer (6te Aufl.) ad loc.]. eis réXos, — to the very end
appointed for these evils, Mt. x. 22; xxiv.13; Mk. xiii.
13; also at the end, at last, finally, Lk. xviii. 5 (Vulg. in
novissimo) [i. e. lest at last by her coming she wear me
out; but al. take it i. q. Hebr. nyi9 (cf. Job xiv. 20 ete.
see Trommius) and connect it with the ptep., lest by her
coming to the last i.e. continually; see trwmiage, sub fin. } ;
Jn. xiii. 1 [al. to the uttermost, completely (cf. our to the
very last); see Westcott, and Weiss (in Meyer 6te Aufl.)
ad loc.; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 29], ef. dyamda, sub fin.,
(Xen. oec. 17, 10; Hes. opp. 292; Hdt. 3, 40; 9, 37;
Soph. Phil. 409; Eur. Ion 1615; Ael. v.h. 10, 16); ¢o
the (procurement of their) end, i.e. to destruction [A. V.
to the uttermost (cf. reff. u. s.)], 1 Th. ii. 16 (for 1955,
2 Chr. xii. 12); rédos éxew, to have an end, be finished,
(often in Grk. writ.), Lk. xxii. 37 [al. give réAos here
the sense of fulfilment (cf. rehéw, 2) ]; i. q. to perish, Mk.
iii. 26. TO d€ Tedos, adverbially, finally (denique vero) :
1 Pet. iii. 8 (Plat. lege. 6 p. 768 b.; Kal rd ye réXos, ibid.
5 p. 740 e.; but generally in prof. auth. réAos in this
sense wants the article; cf. Passow ii. p. 18578; [L. and
8. s. v. I. 4 a.]). b. the end i.e. the last in any suc-
cession or series: (7) apxy Kal (rd) rédos, of God, who by
his perpetuity survives all things, i. e. efernal, Rev. i. 8
Reessexxl) Gee xxii 113: c. that by which a thing is
Jinished, its close, issue: Mt. xxvi. 58; jinal lot, fate, as
if a recompense: with a gen. of the thing, Ro. vi. 21
sq-; Heb. vi. 8; 1 Pet. i.9; with a gen. of the person
whom the destiny befalls, 2 Co. xi. 15; Phil. iii. 19; 1
Pet. iv. 17; rod kupiov (gen. of author), the closing ex-
perience which befell Job by God’s command, Jas. v. 11
(referring to Job xlii. [esp. 12]). d. the end to
which all things relate, the aim, purpose: 1 Tim. i. 5
(often so in philos. fr. Plat. de rep. 6 p. 494.a. down; cf.
Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 378). 2. toll, custom, [i.e.
an indirect tax on goods; see dédpos and kqvaos]: Mt.
xvii. 25; Ro. xiii. 7, (Xen., Plat., Polyb., Aeschin., Dem.,
alielMaccerx. slits x7 35).*
620
TEC TAPAKOVTATET TAPES
reddvns, -ov, 6, (fr. rédos [(q- V- 2)] tax, and dvéopat to
buy; cf. Sypoordyns, dyavns, Sexaroyns), fr. Arstph.,
Aeschin., Aristot., Polyb. down; 1. a renter or
farmer of taxés (Lat. publicanus); among the Romans
usually a man of equestrian rank. 2. a tax-gatherer,
collector of taxes or tolls, (Vulg. publicanus incorrectly ;
[so A. V. publican]), one employed by a publican or far-
mer-general in collecting the taxes. The tax-collectors
were, as aclass, detested not only by the Jews but by other
nations also, both on account of their employment and ot
the harshness, greed, and deception, with which they
prosecuted it; (hence they are classed by Artem. oneir.
1, 23; 4,57, with camndous kal Tots pera dvatdelas (aoe Kat
Anorais kal Cuyoxpovorats Kat mapadoytotais avOparots ;
Leian. necyom. c. 11 puts together potxoi, mopvoBockol
kal TeA@vat Kal KdAaKes Kat cuopavra [ Theophr. charact.
6 (mepi amovoias) tmavdoyetan, Kal mopvoBooKnoat, Kat
tehkovnca |): Mt. v. 46,47 Rec.; x.3; Lk. iii.12; v. 27,
29; vii. 29; xviii. 10, 11, 13; the plur. is joined with
dpaprodoi, Mt. ix. 10 sq.; [xi. 19]; Mk. ii. 15 sq.3; Lk.
v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1; with wépva, Mt. xxi. 31 sq.; 6 €Ou-
Kos kK. 6 TeA@vns, Mt. xviii. 17. Cf. Win. RWB.s. v. Zoll,
Zollner; [BB. DD. s.v. Publican; Wetstein on Mt. v.
46; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 515 sqq. ].*
TeASviOV, -ov, Td, (TeA@rs, Cf. SexaT@viov) ; [1. cus-
toms, toll: Strabo 16, 1, 27. 2.] toll-house, place of
toll, tax-office: the place in which the tax-collector sat
to collect the taxes [ Wiclif, tolbothe]: Mt. ix.9; Mk. ii.
14; Lk. v. 27.*
tépas, gen. reparos, pl. répara (cf. xépas, init.), 7d, (ap-
parently akin to the verb tnpéw; accordingly something
so strange as to cause it to be ‘ watched’ or ‘observed’ ;
[others connect it with dornp, aorpamn, etc., hence ‘asign
in the heavens’; Vanicek p. 1146; Curtius § 205]; see
Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 270), fr. Hom. down, Sept.
for NaiD, a prodigy, portent; miracle [A.V. wonder] per-
formed by any one; in the N.T. it is found only in the
plur. and joined with onyeia; for the passages see onpeiov,
p. 574%
Téprios, -ov, 6, Tertius, an amanuensis of the apostle
Paul: Ro, xvi. 22. [B. D.s. v.]*
Téptvddos, -ov, 6, Tertullus, a Roman orator: Acts
xxiv. 1 sq. [See éjrwp.]*
texcapdKxovra KG, but several times [i. e. betw. 8 and
14] in Lchm. and everywhere in TWH (and Tr, exc.
Rev. xxi. 17) reooepdxovra (a form originally Ionic [yet
cf. B. as below]; see Kiihner § 187, 5; B. 28 (25) sq.;
cf. W. 43; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 80; WH. App. p. 150]), of,
ai, rd, indecl. numeral, forty: Mt. iv. 2; M2. i. 133 Lk.
iv. 2; Jn. ii. 203 ete.
[TeroapaKovta-Svo, forty-two: Rev. xi. 2 Rec.be2;
Ree.»ez OES
terrapaxovraerys (T Tr WH reocep-, see rercapaxor-
ta; LT accent -érys, see éxarovraérns), -és, (reacapdxor-
ta, and éros), of forty years, forty years old: Acts vii.
23; xiii. 18. (Hes. opp. 441.) *
[TercapaKxovra-téccapes, -wy, forty-four: Rev. xxi. 17
Rec. bez elz,*]
xii. 5
TET Tapes
téroapes, -wn, oi, al, recoapa, rd, gen. recodpav, dat.
técoapow, ({Lchm. reads Téooepes 7 times to 33, Tdf. 6
to 35, Tr 6 to 33, WH 6 to 34; Lchm. sometimes has
téooepa, T' Tr WH always; LTr sometimes have réc-
oe pas (see WH. App. p. 150)]; but no editor adopts ¢ in
the gen. or dat. ; see Tegoapaxkovra and reff.), four: Mt.
xxiv. 31; Mk. ii. 3; Lk. ii. 37; Jn. xi. 17; Acts x. 11;
Rev. iv. 4, ete.
Teroapes-Kat-Sekaros, -1, -ov, the fourteenth: Acts xxvii.
Zils Bo"
[texoep- see reaaap- (cf. Meisterhans § 21, 4)]
TeTapTaios, -a, -ov, (rérapros), an ordinal numeral, used
in answer to the question on what day ? one who does or
suffers a thing till the fourth day or on the fourth day:
Teraptaids €or, 1. e. he has been four days in the tomb,
or it is the fourth day since he was buried, [A. V. he
hath been dead four days], Jn. xi. 39 (45n yap Roav mep-
mrato, already five days dead, Xen. an. 6, 4 (2), 9).*
TétapTos, -7, -ov, (fr. rérrapes), the fourth: Mt. xiv. 25;
Mk. vi. 48; Acts x. 30; Rev. iv. 7, ete. [From Hom.
down. |
tetpa-, in composition i. q. réropa, Aeolic [Doric
rather] for téocapa.
[Terpaapxéw, see rerpapyéa. ]
[Tetpadpxys, see rerpdpyns- |
TeTpaywvos, -oy, (fr. rérpa, q. v., and ydévos [i. e. yevia]),
quadrangular, square; [A. V. four-square] (Vulg. in
quadro positus): Rey. xxi.16. (Sept.; Hdt., Plat., Ar-
istot., Polyb., Plut., al.) *
TeTpabiov, -ov, Td, (rerpas, the number four), a quater-
nion (7rd ek Texodpov cuveotés, Suid.) : rdv orpatiarar,
a guard consisting of four soldiers (for among the Ro-
mans this was the usual number of the guard to which
the custody of captives and prisons was intrusted ; two
soldiers were confined with the prisoner and two kept
guard outside), Acts xii. 4, where the four quaternions
mentioned were on guard one at a time during each of
the four watches. (Philo in Flacc. § 13 i.e. ed. Mang.
vol. ii. p. 533, 25.) *
TeTpaxio-X (AtoL, -at, -a, (rerpakis and xidiot), four thou-
sand: Mt. xv. 38; xvi.10; Mk. viii. 9,20; Acts xxi. 38.
[Cidt., Arstph., Thuc., al.) ]*
Tetpakéctot, -ar -a, (fr. rerpaxis, and the term. -dotos
indicating one hundred; [ef. G. Meyer, Gr. Gram. § 16
f.]), four hundred: Acts v. 36; vii. 6; xiii. 20; Gal. iii.
17. {(idt., Thuc., Xen., al.) ]*
Tetpdunvos, -ov, (fr. rérpa, q- V-, and pny; cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 549), of four months, lasting four months: te-
tpdunvés €otw sc. xpdvos, Jn. iv. 35, where Rec. rerpa-
pnvdv éorw, as in Judg. xix. 2 Alex.; xx. 47. (Thuc.,
Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.) *
retpatdédos, (-ods), -dn (-9), -dov (-obv), (fr. rérpa, and
mAdos, to which corresponds the Lat. -plus in duplus,
triplus, fr. IAEQ [but ef. Vaniéek p. 501]), quadruple,
fourfold: Lk. xix.8. (Sept.; Xen., Joseph., Plut., al.) *
retpé-trovs, -ouv, gen. -odos, (fr. rérpa, q- V-, and Tous a
foot), fr. Hdt. and Thue. down, four-footed : neut. plur.
sc. beasts, Acts x. 12; xi. 6; Ro.i. 23. (Sept. for 09773.) *
621
TNNLKOUTOS
terpapxéo [T WH rerpaapx. (see WH. App. p. 145)],
-&; (terpdpxns, q. v-), to be governor of a tetrarchy, be
tetrarch: with a gen. of the region, Lk. iii.1. [(Joseph.
1S Ts By TO; ta)"
terpdpxys [‘l’ WH rerpadpyns; see the preceding word,
and cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 117], -ov, 6, (fr. rézpa, q. v., and
apy), a tetrarch; i.e. 1. a governor of the fourth
part of any region. Thus Strabo, 12 p. 567, states that
Galatia was formerly divided into three parts, each one
of which was distributed into four smaller subdivisions
each of which was governed by ‘a tetrarch’; again, in
lib. 9 p. 430, he relates that Thessaly, before the time
of Philip of Macedon, had been divided into four ‘tet-
rarchies’ each of which had its own ‘tetrarch’. Ze
the word lost its strict etymological force, and came to
denote the governor of a third part or half of a country,
or even the ruler of an entire country or district provided
at were of comparatively narrow limits; a petty prince
[ef. e. g. Plut. Anton. 56, 3, i. p. 942a.]. Thus Antony
made Herod (afterwards king) and Phasael, sons of
Antipater, tetrarchs of Palestine, Joseph. antt. 14, 13, 1.
After the death of Herod the Great, his sons, Archelaus
styled an ethnarch but Antipas and Philip with the title
of ‘tetrarchs’, divided and governed the kingdom left
by their father; Joseph. antt. 17, 11, 4. Cf. Mischer,
De vitiis etc. p. 428; Win. RWB. s. v. Tetrarch, and
esp. Keim in Schenkel v. p. 487 sqq. The tetrarch
Herod Antipas is mentioned in Mt. xiv.1; Lk. iii. 19;
Toe 8 ING ecm IG
TevXw, SCC TUYXaVO.
teppdw, -@: 1 aor. ptep. reppwoas; (réppa ashes) ; to
reduce to ashes: 2 Pet. ii. 6. (Aristot. [?], Theophr.,
Dio Cass., Philo, Antonin., al.) *
réxvn, -ns, 7, (fr. Texetv, see rexroy), fr. Hom. down,
art: univ. Rey. xviii. 22 [here A. V. craft]; of the plas-
tic art, Acts xvii. 29; of a trade (as often in Grk. writ.),
Acts xviii. 3.*
rexvirns, -ov, 6, (Texvy), fr. Soph. [(?), Plato], Xen.
down, Sept. several times for wan, an artificer, crafis-
man: Acts xix. 24, 38; Rev. xviii. 22; of God the framer
of the higher and eternal course of things, Heb. xi. 10
(of God the architect of the world, Sap. xii. 1, where
cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. p. 234 [ef. also Trench, Syn.
§ ev.; Piper, Monumentale Theol. § 26]).*
sho: fr. Hom. down; to make liquid; pass. to become
liquid, to melt; to perish or be destroyed by melting: 2 Pet.
iii. 12, where for the pres. 3 pers. sing. rnxerac Lehm.
gives the fut. raxjoerae [see WH on the pass. and in
their App. p. 171], cf. Is. xxxiv. 4 Taknoovrat maca ai
duvdpers rv oipavav. [Cf£. Veitch s. v.]*
Travyas, adv., (fr. the adj. rmAavyns, far-shining, fr.
ride afar, and avyy radiance), at a distance and clear-
ly: Mk. viii. 25 [where TWH mrg. dydavyds, q.- v-]-
(adj., Job xxxvii. 20; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 9; and esp. in
the Grk. poets fr. Pind. down; tpdavyéorepov dpav, Diod.
1, 50.)*
TyduK-obros, -avTn, -odro, (fr. rndikos and obros [but
then (it is urged) it should have been ryAiyotros; hence
622
TNPEW
better connected with airés: as ai. Cf. Bttm. Ausf.
Spr. § 79 A. 4; Kiihner $173, 6: Vanicek p. 268; L. and
S. s.v. odros, init.]),in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl.down; 1.
of such an age; used of any age, of so great an age, so
old; also so young. 2. of so great a size, in bulk:
mAota, Jas. iii. 4. 3. intensively, such and so great
(Lat. tantus talisque): 2 Co. i. 10; Heb. ii. 3; Rev. xvi.
18.*
rnpéo, -&; impf. érnpowv; fut. rmpjow; 1 aor. érnpyoa;
pf. rernpnka, 3 pers. plur. ternpykaow (Jn. xvii. 6 R G)
and rernpn«ay (ibid. LT Tr WH, [see yivopat, init. ]) ;
Pass., pres. tnpodpar; impf. érnpovunv; pf. rernpnyac;
1 aor. érnpyOnv; (tps, found only once, Aeschyl. suppl.
248, where it is doubtful whether it means ‘ guarding’ or
‘watching ’), fr. Pind., Soph., Thuc. down; Sept. several
times for v, I¥}, etc.; to attend to carefully, take
care of; i. e. a. prop. 4o guard: twa, a prisoner,
Mt. xxvii. 36, 54; Acts xvi. 23; pass., Acts xii. 5;
[xxiv. 23]; xxv. 4, 21[°]; ri, xii.6; of rnpodvres, [(R.V-)
the watchers] the guards, Mt. xxviii. 4 (Cant. ili.3). —_b.
metaph. to keep: rwd, one in that state in which he is,
Tv éavtod mapbevoy, his own virgin daughter, sc. as a
virgin i. e. unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 37; éavrdv, himself such
as he is, i. e. begotten of God, 1 Jn. v. 18 [but here T Tr
WH airév]; with a pred. accus. added: Gyvoy, 1 Tim.
v. 22; domdov amd tod Kéopov, Jas. i. 27; aBapn tun,
2 Co. xi. 9, (dmAodv, Antonin. 6, 30; rid dyewmrov ro
6e@, Sap. x. 5); ré with a pred. accus. 1 Tim. vi. 14
[but see in c. below]; pass. rypoduat, with an adv.,
dpeurros, 1 Th. v. 23; with a dat. of the pers., Xpicra,
devoted to Christ, [W. 421 (392)], Jude 1; rnpeiv twa
ev ti, to keep ini. e. cause one to persevere or stand
firm in a thing: év r@ dvdpare Geod (see p. 447° bot.), Jn.
xvii. 11 sq.; év dydwy Ocod, Jude 21; twa &k twos, by
guarding to cause one to escape in safety out of ete.: &k
Tov movnpov, out of the power and assaults of Satan, Jn.
xvii. 15 [ef. B. 327 (281); W. 410 (383)]; ée ris Spas
Tov metpagpov, Rey. iii. 10. to keep: i. e. not to leave,
Tv apxnv, Jude 6; not to throw away, 7a iudria, Rev.
xvi. 15. to hold firmly: rhv évdtnra tod mvevparos, Eph.
iv. 83; anything as a mental deposit, ryy micrw, 2 Tim.
iv. 7; Rev. xiv. 12 [ef. W. 536 (499); B. 78 (68)]. to
show one’s self to be actually holding a thing fast,
ie: c. to observe: sc. m@s xtd. Rev. ili. 3; ri, Mt.
xxiii. 3; Acts xxi. 25 [Rec.]; rjv wapddoow, Mk. vii. 9
[WH (rejected) mrg. ornonte] (ra ex mapadscews tov
sarépov, Joseph. antt. 13, 10, 6); rdov vduov, Acts xv. 5
and Ree. in 24; Jas. ii. 10; rd od8Barov, the command
respecting sabbath-keeping, Jn. ix. 16; ras évroAds (of
either God or Christ), Mt. xix.17; Jn. xiv. 15, 21; xv.
10; 1Jdn.ii.3sq.; iii. 22,24; v.2 (where LT Tr WH
mow@puev) ; V.3; Rev. xii. 17; xiv. 12 [see above, b. fin.];
thy evroAnv, 1 Tim. vi. 14 [see in b. above; mdvra baa
évererhaunv, Mt. xxviii. 20]; rdv Adyov, either of Christ
or of God, Jn. viii. 51 sq. 55; xiv. 23; xv. 20; xvii. 6;
1 Jn. ii.-5; Rev. iii. 8; rods Adyous, of Christ, Jn. xiv.
24; rov Adyov Tis Uropor7s pov (i.e. "Ingod), Rev. iii. 10;
ra €pya uov, the works that I command, Rev. ii. 26; rods
TiOnyut
Adyous THs mpopyretas, Rev. xxii. 7; tov BiBAiou rovrov,
Rey. xxii. 9; ra év tH mpopyteia yeypappéva, Rev. i. 3;
cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 194 sq. d.
to reserve: twa eis Tt, to undergo something, 2 Pet. ii. 4
[cf. W. 342 (321); eis rHv Tov SeBacrov didyvwow, Acts
xxv. 21*]; Jude 6; twa eis nuépay Kpicews, 2 Pet. ii. 9;
Tovs ovpavods mupi (to be burned with fire) eis jpépar
kpicews, 2 Pet. iii. 7; ri eis twa, a thing for one’s advan-
tage, 1 Pet. i. 4; ri els quépar twa, to be used some day
for some purpose, Jn. xii. 7; tl €ws apts, Jn. ii. 10; ri
with the dat. of the pers., for rewarding or punishing
one, pass., 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. [Comp.: d:a-, mapa-,
ovy-tnpew. |*
[Syn. Tn péo, puAdoow: tnp. to watch or keep, va. to
guard; tnp. expresses watchful care and is suggestive of
present possession, pA. indicates safe custody and often
implies assault from without; typ. may mark the result
of which ¢va. is the means (e.g. Jn. xvii. 12 where the
words occur together, cf. Wisd. x. 5). See Westcott on Jn.
viii. 51; Schmidt ch. 208, esp. § 4.]
THENSIs, -ews, 7, (THPE®) ; a. a watching: of pris-
oners (Thue. 7, 86); the place where prisoners are
kept, a prison, [R. V. ward]: Actsiv.3; v. 18. b.
a keeping, i. e. complying with, obeying: ray éevrodar,
1 Co. vii. 19; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 23; vépov, Sap. vi. 19.*-
TiPeprds, -ddos, 7, (fr. TyBépsos), a city of Galilee, near
the Lake of Gennesaret, which Herod Antipas, tetrarch
of Galilee, greatly enlarged [but see BB.DD. s. v. and
esp. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 234 note] and beau-
tified, and named Tiberias in honor of Tiberius Caesar
(Joseph. antt. 18, 2,3). It is now called Tubariyeh, a
poor and wretched town of about 3000 inhabitants,
swarming with fleas for which the place is notorious
throughout Syria: Jn. vi. 1, 23; xxi. 1. Cf. Robinson
ii. 380-394; Win. RWB.s. v.; Riietschi in Herzog ed. 1
xvi. 161; Weizsdicker in Schenkel v. 526 sq.; [MJithlau
in Riehm p. 1661 sq.]; Biideker pp. 367-369.*
TuBepios, -ov, 6, Tiberius, the Roman emperor (fr.
[Aug. 19] a. p. 14 to [March 16] a. p. 37) in whose
reign Christ was crucified: Lk. iii. 1.*
Tide, i. q. TLOnuL, q. V-
r(Onpt, 3 pers. plur. reOéacw (Mt. v.15; [W.§ 14,1 a.3
B. 44 (38)]); impf. (fr. r6é) 3 pers. sing. érider (2 Co.
iii. 13), 3 pers. plur. éri@ovy (Mk. vi. 56 [RG L]; Acts iii.
2; iv. 35) [and (IT Tr WH in Mk. l.c.) éridecav, cf. B. 45
(39); WH. App. p. 167]; fut. 670; 1 aor. 26a; 2 aor.
(€6nv) subj. 64, [impv. 2 pers. plur. Ore, Lk. xxi.14 LT Tr
WH (for RG 2 aor. mid. impv. 6éo6e) ], inf. Aeivas, ptep-
Geis; pf. réOetxa; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. riderar (Mk.
xv. 47 RG); pf. 3 pers. sing. réOecrae (Mk. xv. 47 LT
Tr WH); 1 aor. éréOnv; 2 aor. mid. ebéunv (2 pers. sing.
€Oov, Acts v. 4); (see émitiOnur); fr. Hom. down; Sept-
mostly for piv and Dw, }O], Mw and Mwn, WIN,
ete. ; 1. to set, put, place, i.e. causative of keto Oat;
hence a. to place or lay: ti, as Oewédcov, [LKk. vi.
48]; xiv. 29; 1 Co. iii. 10 sq. (OeweiAca, Hom. Il. 12, 29) 5
AiBov, Ro. ix. 83; 1 Pet. ii. 6; ri, opp. to atpew, Lk. xix.
21 sq. (cf. Xen. oec. 8, 2) ; rwi mpooxoppa [or (ace. to WH
mrg.) oxavdadov|, Ro. xiv. 13; rt eis rt, Lk. xi. 33 [W-
7 (One
238 (223)]; twa mod, brov, exei, [as], of the dead laid
to rest somewhere, Mk. xv. 47; xvi. 6; (Lk. xxiii. 55];
Jn. xi. 34; xix. 42; xx. 2,13, 15; év with dat. of the
place, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. vi. 29; [xv. 46 LTr WH]; Lk.
xxill. 53; Jn. xix.41; Acts vii. 16; ix. 37; eds pynpeioy,
Acts xiii. 29; Rev. xi. 9; (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down,
very often of the laying away or depositing anywhere
of the bones or ashes of the dead; like Lat. ponere i. q:
sepelire, cf. Klotz, Handworterb. d. Lat. Spr. ii. 822°;
[Harpers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. pono, I. B. 10)). Tl or Tuva
émé twos, [Lk. viii. 16> LT Tr WH]; Acts v. 15; Jn.
xix.19; [Rev.x.2G@LTTr WH]; émi 7, [Mk. iv. 21
LT Tr WH;; viii. 25 Tr txt. WH]; 2 Co. iii. 13; Rev.
x. 2[Rec.]; emi twa, to put upon one, ras xetpas, Mk.
x. 16; [rv deErav, Rev.i.17G@ LT Tr WH]; ri iso 7,
Mt. v.15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. xi. 33; daoxdrw tivds, Lk.
vill. 16; twa tnd rods wodas (see movs), 1 Co. xv. 25
[ef. W. 523 (487)]; ri mapa rods wddas Tr. to lay at one’s
feet, Acts iv. 35, 37 [here Tdf. mpds]; v.23 ruvd évdridy
t. Lk. v.18; metaph. emi twa rd mvedya, i. e. to imbue
one with, Mt. xii. 18. Mid. to have one put or placed:
twa eis cbvdakny, to order one to be put in prison, Acts
xii. 4; €v (rj) pudaky, Mt. xiv. 3 [here LT Tr WH dzo-
ri0.|; Acts v. 25, (Gen. xli. 10; xlii. 17, 30; [B. 329
(283) ; W. 414 (386) ]); ets rnpnow, Acts iv. 3; év rnpn-
get, Acts v.18. to place for one’s self: as BovAny, to lay
a plan [A. V. advised], Acts xxvii. 12 (Judg. xix. 30;
Bovdas ev WoyH pov, Ps. xii. (xiii.) 3); ra pédy, to set,
dispose, 1 Co. xii. 18; [kapods ev rH idia eEovoia, set
within his own authority, Acts i. 7 (so R. V. txt.; but
al. refer it to 2 below)]; ri eis ra Sra pov, to receive
[A. V. let sink] into the ears, i.e. to fix in the mind, Lk.
ix. 44; els tyv Kapdiav, to propose to one’s self, to pur-
pose, foll. by an inf. Lk. xxi. 14 [RG]; also ri ev 77
kapoia, to lay a thing up in one’s heart to be remembered
and pondered, Lk. i. 66; [xxi. 14 LT Tr WH], (1 S.
xxi. 12; [W.§2,1c., and B. as above]); to propose to
one’s self something [A. V. conceived this thing in thine
heart], Acts v.4; also évré mvedpare, foll. by an inf. (A.V.
to purpose in the spirit], Acts xix. 21; to place (or posit)
for the execution of one’s purpose, Bépevos év npiv Tov Aoyov
ths KaraAXayis, since he has placed (deposited) in our
minds the doctrine concerning reconciliation (sc. to be
made known to others), 2 Co. v. 19. b. to put down,
lay down; i.e. a. to bend downwards: ra yovara,
to bend or bow the knees, to kneel, Mk. xv. 19; Lk. xxii.
41; Acts vii. 60; ix.40; xx. 36; xxi. 5, (Lat. genua
pono, Ovid. fast. 2, 438; Curt. 8, 7, 13). 8. like Lat.
pono (cf. Klotz s. v.; [Harpers’ Dict. s. v. I. B. 9]), to lay
off or aside, to wear or carry no longer: ra iparia (Lat.
vestes pono), Jn. xiii. 4 (Plut. Ale. 8) ; rv Wux7y, to lay
down, give up, one’s life, Jn. x. 17 sq.; with dmép twos
added, Jn. x. 11, 15; xiii. 37sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16,
(Zonxe [or réOetxer] tiv odpxa adrod Kipios, Barn. ep. 6, 3
[irrelevant ; see the passage]; unlike the Lat. phrases
vitam ponere, Cic. ad fam. 9, 24, 4; Propert. eleg. 2, 10,
43: [animam ponere], Sil. Ital. 10, 303; spiritum ponere,
Val. Max. 7, 8, 8, since these phrases mean only to die;
623
7 iNAw
more like the expression prius animam quam odium de=
ponere, Nep. Hann. 1, 3). y. to lay by, lay aside
money: map é€aut@, 1 Co. xvi. 2. Cc. to set on (serve)
something to eat or drink: otvoy, Jn. ii. 10 (Xen. mem.
3,14, 1; soalso Lat. pono; cf. Klotz u.s. p. 822°; [Har-
pers’ Dict. s. v. I. B. 8]). d. to set forth, something
to be explained by discourse: tyv Bacidelav t. Oeod év
mapaBody, Mk. iv. 30 L txt. T Tr txt. WH (on this pass..
see mapaBodn, 2). 2. to make (Lat. constituo), twa
with a pred. acc.: twa bmomddiov, Mt. xxii. 44 [where
LT Tr WH émoxdro, put underneath]; Mk. xii. 36 [WH
troxato |; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 85; Heb. i. 18; x. 13,
(fr. Ps. cix. (ex.) 1); add, Ro. iv. 17 (fr. Gen. xvii. 5);
Hiebsin 25. pass. Dime iin; 2 Dims eldi mes withies,
pred. ace.: 1 Co. ix. 18 (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down,
often in the poets, rarely in prose writ., as Ael. y. h. 13,
6; Leian. dial. marin. 14, 2; in the O.T. cf. Gen. xvii.
53 ev. xxvi. 31; Is: v. 20; Sap. x..21; 2) Macc. v. 21);
3 Mace. v. 43). Mid. to make (or set) for one’s self or
Sor one’s use: twa with a pred. ace., Acts xx. 28; 1 Co.
xii. 28, (in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, even in prose, to
make one one’s own, as twa didov to make one a friend,,
see Passow p. 1893*; [L.andS.s. v. B.1.]). riévae river
els Tt, to appoint one to (destine one to be) anything, pass.,
1 Pet. ii. 8; w. ets re instead of the pred. acc. (Hebrais-
tically [ef. W. 228 (214); B. § 131, 7]), Acts xiii. 47
fr. Is. xlix. 6 (Jer. i. 5). Mid. to appoint for one’s use:
ria eis Svaxoviav, to appoint one to one’s service, 1 Tim.
i. 12 [W. § 45, 4 fin.]; to appoint with one’s self or in
one’s mind : ria eis épynv, to decree one to be subject
to wrath, 1 Th. v. 9 ; [to this use many refer Acts i. 7, see
e€ovcia 1, and év, I. 5d. B.; cf. 1 a. above].
tia wa, Jn. Xv. 16; reOévae Td pepos Tivds pera TLvos (see
pépos, 1), Mt. xxiv. 51; Lk. xii. 46. 3. to set, fix,
establish, (Lat. statuo) ; a. to set forth (Germ. auf-
stellen) : jwdderypa, 2 Pet. ii. 6. b. to establish, or-
dain, (Germ. festsetzen, anordnen) : vépov, to enact, Gal,
iii. 19 Grsb. (very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down,,
both in the act. and the mid.; cf. Passow s. v. III. 3 b.;
[L. and S. s.v. A. III. 5]). [Comp.: dva-, mpoo-ava-,
dmo-, Swa-, dvti-Ota-, €k-, €mt-, OvV-Ert-, KATa-, TUV-KATA-y,
peta-, Tapa-, TEpt-, Tpo-, Mpoo-, Tuv-, Umo- TiOnp. | *
rlkrw; fut. réfouar; 2 aor. érexov; 1 aor. pass. éréxOnv 3,
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 12°; to bring forth, bear, produce:
(fruit from the seed); prop., of women giving birth:
absol., Lk. i. 57 [B. 267 (230)]; ii. 6; Jn. xvi. 21; Gal.
iv. 27; Heb. xi. 11 Rec.; Rev. xii. 2, 4; vidv, Mt. i. 21,
23, 25; Lk. i. 81; ii. 7; Rev. xii.5, 13; pass., Mt. ti. 2;
Lk.ii.11; of the earth bringing forth its fruits: Boravqy,
Heb. vi. 7 (Eur. Cycl. 333; yatay, ) ra mdvra rixrerat,.
Aeschy]. Cho. 127; yijs tis mavra tuxtovons, Philo opif.
m. § 45, who draws out at length the comparison of the.
earth to a mother). metaph. to bear, dring forth:
dpapriay, in the simile where 7 ém@vpia is likened to a.
female, Jas. i. 15 (dperqv, Plat. conv. p. 212 a.).*
rXAo; impf. érvAdov; fr. Hom. down; to pluck, pluck
off: oraxvas, Mt. xii. 1; Mk. ii. 23 fon this cf. p. 524»
top]; Lk. vi. 1.*
TLOevat
Tipatos
Tipaios (NY fr. Chald. xpv, Hebr. 20, to be un-
clean), -ov, 6, Timovus, the name of a man: Mk.x. 46.*
tide, -6; fut. rysnow; 1 aor. ériunoa; pf. pass. ptep.
reriunuévos; 1 aor. mid. érypnodpyy; (ryn); fr. Hom.
down; 1. to estimate, to fix the value; mid. to fiz
the value of something belonging to one’s self (Vulg. ap-
pretio; cf. Hagen, Sprachl. Erérterungen zur Vulgata,
Freib. 1863, Pe a rid, [R. V. to price], Mt. xxvii. 9
(on which see dm, I. 2); Sept. for PryH, Lev. xxvii. 8,
42, 14. 2. tohonor [so uniformly A. V.], to have in
konor, to revere, venerate; Sept. for 133: God, Mt. xv. 8;
Mk. vii. 6; Jn. v. 23; viii, 49; Christ, Jn. v. 23; parents,
Mt. xv.4sq.; xix.19; Mk. vii.10; x.19; Lk. xviii. 20;
Eph. vi. 2; other men, 1 Tim. v. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 17; with
moAAais Tuysais added, to honor with many honors, Acts
xxviii. 10; of God, rewarding Christians with honor
and glory in his kingdom, Jn. xii. 26. [Compe.:
Tide. |*
Tit, -7s, 4, (fr. Tie, to estimate, honor, pf. pass. réri-
pat), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 712 (a valuing, rating),
23, 1p, Ws 1. a valuing by which the price is
fixed; hence the price itself: of the price paid or re-
‘ceived for a person or thing bought or sold, with a gen.
of the pers. Mt. xxvii. 9; aah agen. of the thing, Acts
v. 2 sq.5 ; plur., Acts iv. 34; xix. 195; tiuy aiparos, the
price paid for killing, [cef. ship edlenaonene ], Mt. xxvii. 6 ;
nyopacOnre tins, (not gratis, but) with a price, i. e. (con-
textually, with emphasis) at a great price [B. § 132, 13;
yet see W. 595 (553) ], 1 Co. vi. 20 [here Vulg. magno
pretio|; vii. 23; @veiadar tiuns dpyupiov, to buy for a
price reckoned in silver, i.e. for silver, Acts vii. 16; thing
prized [A.V. honor], Rev. xxi. 24 [Rec.], 26. 2:
honor which belongs or is shown to one: the honor of
one who outranks others, pre-eminence, dd&a x. Tiun,
Heb. ii. 7,9; 2 Pet.i. 17; in the doxologies: r@ Oe (se.
gor (cf. B.§ 129, 22 Rem.]) rey or 4 reysn, 1 Tim. i. 17;
vi. 16; Rev. v.13; vii. 12; xix. 1 Rec.; the honor which
one has by reason of the rank and state of the office which
he holds, Heb. v: 4 (and often in Grk. writ.; cf. Bleek
on Heb.1.c.); veneration: dddvat, AaBetv, tywnv, Rev. iv.
9,11; v.12; deference, reverence, Ro. xii. 10; xiii. 7;
1 Tim. v. 17; vi. 1; honor appearing in the rewards of
the future life, Ro. ii. 7,10; 1 Pet.i.7; praise of which
one is judged worthy, 1 Pet. ii. 7 [here R.V. txt. precious-
ness (cf. 1 above)]; mark of honor, wodXais tiwats Typav
twa, Acts xxviii. 10; univ. in phrases: év riu7, honor-
ably, 1 Th. iv. 4 (on this pass. see xrdouac); ovk év Tyuh
tut, not in any honor, i. e. worthy of no honor, Col. ii.
23 [al. value; see mAnopovn]; ets tiyunv, Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim.
i. 20 sq., (on these pass. see oxedos, 1); meperiOévar tii
repyv, 1 Co. xii. 23 (see mepuriOnus, b.) 3 tushy droveuew
revi, to show honor to one, 1 Pet. iii. 7; SSdvae ripqy,
1 Co. xii. 24; ¢yew ryuqv, to have honor, be honored,
Jn. iv. 44; Heb. iii. 3.*
t{tos, -a, -ov, (rou), fr. Hom. down; a. prop. held
as of great price, i.e. precious: \tOos, Rev. xvii. 4; xviii.
12, 36; xxi. 19; plur. 1 Co. iii. 12 [R. V. costly stones] ;
compar. tystorepos, 1 Pet. i. 7 Rec.; superl. riydraros,
>
€Tb-
‘
624
TL
Rev. xviii. 12; xxi. 11. b. metaph. held in honor,
esteemed, especially dear: Heb. xiii. 4; tuvi, to one, Acts
v. 34; xx. 24 [here with a gen. also, ace. to the text of
T Tr WH (otdevds Adyov ete. not worth a word; cf. Meyer
ad loc.)]; kapris ras ys, Jas. v.7; aia, 1 Pet. i. 19;
emayyeApata, 2 Pet. i. 4.*
TYULOTHS, -NTOS, 1], (ThuLos) ; a. prop. preciousness,
costliness; an abundance of scostly things: Rev. xviii.
19. b. metaph. worth, excellence: Aristot. de partt.
an. 1, 5 [p. 644%, 32]; eth. Nic. 10, 7 fin. [p. 11784, 1];
Scahépovar tesdryre ai uxal kai aripia ddAndor, de gen.
anim. 2, 3 [p. 736°, 31 ].*
TipdGeos, -ov, 6, voc. Tyndbee (1 Tim. vi. 20; cf. Kriiger
§16 Anm. 2; [W.§8,2c.; B.12]), Timothy, a resident of
Lystra, apparently, whose father was a Greek and moth-
er a Jewess, Acts xvi. 1 sqq. He was Paul’s companion
in travel, and fellow-laborer: Acts xvii. 14sq.; xviii. 5;
xix. 22; xx.4; Ro. xvi. 21; 1 Co.iv.17; xvi. 10; 2Co.
Lol, 19 e Phil io | ioe Cobsigh le L hatw anita sos
PUAN igre Thal Abia 1h V4 Ultsis Sak AU ve) Oars re 276 Philems
ie Heb. sah 23%
Tipov [on the accent cf. W. § 6, 1, 1.], -avos, 6, Timon,
one of the seven deacons of the church at Jerusalem:
Acts vi. 5.*
Tipwpew, -; 1 aor. pass. éerypwpnOnv; (fr. rywwpds, and
this fr. teun and odpos, see Oupwpds); fr. Soph. and
Hdt. down; prop. to be a guardian or avenger of honor;
hence 1. to succor, come to the help of: twvi, one,
Soph., Hdt., Thuce., al. 2. to avenge: revi, one,
Hat., Xen., al. 3. in the N.T. riypwpe riva, to take
vengeance on one, to punish: Acts xxii. 5; xxvi. 11,
(Soph. O. R. 107; in Grk. writ. the mid. is more com. in
this sense).*
Tipwpia, -as, 7, (Tywwpds, See TYLwpew) 5 1. arene
dering help; assistance, [(Hdt., Thuce., al.)]. Zs
vengeance, penalty, punishment: Heb. x. 29 (Prov. xix.
29; xxiv. 22; in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down). [SYN. see xédaors, fin.]*
tivo: fut. ricw; fr. Hom. down; to pay, to recompense :
Sixny, to pay penalty, suffer punishment, 2 Th. i. 9 (Plat.
Phaedo p. 81d.; Theaet. p.177a.; Ael. v.h. 13,2; Sixas,
id. 1, 24; @wnv, Hom. Od. 2, 193; wowds, Pind. Ol. 2, 106;
Cnpiav, Sept. Prov. xxvii. $2). [Comp.: dmo-rive.]*
tis, neut. ri, gen. rivos, interrogative pronoun, [fr.
Hom. down]; 1. who, which, what? Sept. ris for
‘1, rt for 795 a. used Adjectively, in a direct
question: ris Bacwrevs, Lk. xiv. 31; tis yun, Lk. xv. 83
ti mepioody, Mt. v. 47; ti onpetov, Jn. ii. 18, and many
other passages. in an indirect question, 1 Th. iv. 2, ete.;
tiva i) motov kapdv, 1 Pet.i.11; used instead of a pred.
in a direct quest., ris (sc. €orw) 4 airia, Acts x. 213 ris
kal totam 7) yuvn, Lk. vii. 39; add, Ro. ili. 1; 1 Co. ix.
18, etc.; neut., Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk.v.9; in an indir. quest.
with the optative, Lk. viii. 9; ris foll. by dv, Jn. xiii. 24
RG; Acts xxi. 33 [RG]; ri with the optative, Lk. xv.
26 [Tr WH add dy, so L br.]; xviii. 36 [L br. Tr or. WH
mrg. add ay]; with the indicative, Eph. i. 18; b.
used alone or Substantively: in a direct quest., ris
TE
bmederEev bpiv puyeiv; Mt. iii. 7; Lk. iii. 7; Rev. xviii.
18, etc. ; rivos, Mt. xxii. 20, 28; Mk xii. 163; rim, Lk.
xili. 18; riva, Jn. xviii. 4, 7; ri OeAeré por Sodvac ; Mt. xxvi.
15; é in an indirect quest., foll. by the indicative, Mt.
vi. 3; Jn. xiii. 12; 1 Co. xiv. 16; Rev. ii. 7, 11,17, and
very often; foll. by the aor. subjunc., Mt. vi. 25; Lk.
xii. 11, etc.; foll. by the optative w. dv, Lk. i. 62; vi. 11,
etc. Emphatic words get prominence by being placed
before the pronoun [B. §151, 16]: tpeis dé riva pe A€yere
eva, Mt. xvi. 15; Mk. viii. 29; Lk. ix. 20; kat qjpeis ri
moucopev (or rornowper), Lk. iii. 145 odros 8€ ri, Jn. xxi.
21 [cf. e. B.]; add, Jn.i.19; viii. 5; ix. 17; Acts xix.
15; Ro. ix. 19> [cf. W. 274 (257)], 20; xiv. 4,10; Eph.
iv. 9; Jas. iv. 12; exx. fr. Grk. writ. are given in Passow
p- 1908»; [L.and S.s. v. B.I.1b.]. A question is often
asked by ris as the leading word, when the answer ex-
pected is “no one”: Acts viii. 33; Ro. vii. 24; viii. 33
sq-; ix.19; x.16; xi. 348sq.; 1Co.ix.7; 2Co. xi. 29;
Heb.i.5,13. is ef un, who... save (or but), (i.e. no one
but), Mk. ii. 7; Lk. v. 21; Ro. xi. 15; 1Co.ii.11; Heb.
fii. 18; 1 Jn. ii. 22; v.5. c. two questions are
blended into one: tis ti apn, what each should take, Mk.
xv. 243 ris ti Sverpayparevoaro, Lk. xix. 15 [not Tr
WH]; eyo 8€ ris juny duvards Kkoddca tov Oedv; who
was I? was I able to withstand God? Acts xi. 17; ef. W.
§66, 5,3; Passow p. 19099; Ast, Lex. Platon. iii. p. 394;
Franz V. Fritzsche, Index ad Lcian. dial. deor. p. 164;
the same constr. occurs in Lat. writ.; ef. Ramshorn, Lat.
Gram. p. 567. tis is joined with conjunctions: kai ris,
Mk. x. 26; Lk. x. 29; xviii. 26; Rev. vi. 17, (see «ai, I.
2¢.); ris dpa, see dpa,1; tis odv, Lk. x. 36 [here T WH
om. L Tr br. ody]; 1 Co. ix. 18. is with a partitive gen.:
Mt. xxii. 28; Mk. xii. 23; Lk. x. 36; Acts vii. 52; Heb.
i.5,13; with ex and a gen. of the class, Mt. vi. 27; Lk.
xiv. 28; Jn. viii. 46; in an indir. quest. with the optat.,
Lk. xxii. 23 [cf. W. §41 b. 4.¢.]; with dy added, Lk. ix.
46. d. in indir. questions the neuter article is some-
times placed before the pronouns ris and ri; see 6, II.
10 a. e. Respecting the neuter ri the following
particulars may be noted:
tupovow; a condensed expression for ri rodrd éorw, 6
ootoi cov xarap.; Mt. xxvi. 62; Mk. xiv. 60, (B. 251
(216) explains this expression differently); also ri rovro
Gxovo mepi cov; [(R.V.)] what is this (that) I hear of thee?
(unless preference be given to the rendering, ‘why do I
hear this of thee’ [see under f. below]), Lk. xvi. 2; cf.
Bornemann ad loc.; [W. § 66, 5, 3]. B. Ti mpos nas ;
se. éoriv, what is that to us? [W. 586 (545); B. 138
(121) ], Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. xxi. 22; ri euolx. coi; see ey,
4; ri por ete. what have I to do with etc. 1 Co. v. 12;
ri cou or bpiv Soxet; [what thinkest thou etc.], Mt. xvii.
25; xxii. 17, 42; xxvi. 66; Jn. xi. 56 (here before dr
supply in thought doxe? dpiv, to introduce a second ques-
tion [R. V. What think ye? That he will not come ete.]).
ri Oédets ; and ri Oédere ; foll. by asubjunc., our what wilt
thou (that) I should ete.: Mt. xx. 32 [here Lchm. br. in-
serts iva]; Mk. x. 51; xv. 12 [WH om. Tr br. 6€A.]; Lk.
xviii. 41; 1 Co. iv. 21; i with the deliberative subj. :
a. Ti ovTOL Gov KaTapap-
625
tis
Mt. vi. 81; xxvii. 22; Mk. iv. 30 [here L mrg. T Ty
txt. WH was]; Lk. xii. 17; xiii. 18; Jn. xii.27; ri foll.
by a fut.: Acts iv. 16 (where Led. ster. T Tr WH qoun-
goper) ; 1 Co. xv. 29; ri (se. eoriv [B. 358 (307); W.
§ 64, 2 a.]) dre ete., how is it that etc. i.e. why ete,
Mk.ii.16 RGL; Lk. ii. 49; Acts v.4, 9; ri yéyover, Ore
etc. [R. V. what is come to pass that ete.], Jn. xiv. 22;
obros O€ ti (sc. €orat or yernoerar [W. 586 (546); B.394
(338)]), what will be his lot? Jn. xxi. 21 (cf. Acts xii.
18 ti dpa 6 Teérpos éyévero; Xen. Hell. 2, 3,17 ri Zcouro
i wodreia). tii.g. dari, why? wherefore? (Matthiae
§ 488, 8; Kriiger § 46,3 Anm. 4; [W. § 21, 3 N. 2]):
Mt. vi. 28; vii. 3; Mk. ii. 7sq.; xi. 3; Lk. ii. 48; vi. 41;
xii. 57; xxiv. 38; Jn. vii. 19; xviii. 23; Acts xiv. 15;
xxvi. 8; Ro. iii. 7; ix. 19sq.; 1 Co. iv. 7; x. 830; xv. 29
sq.; Gal. iii. 19; v.11; Col. ii. 20, and often. ta ri or
ivari, see s. v. p. 305%. dua ré [or dari (see did, B. I. 2 a.
p- 184°) ], why? wherefore? Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; Mk.
vii. 5; xi. 31; Lk. xix. 23, 31; Jn. vii. 45; xiii. 37; Acts
v.3; 1Co.vi.7; 2 Co. xi. 11; Rev. xvii. 7,and often. es
ti, to what? to what end? to what purpose? Mt. xiv. 31;
xxvi. 8; Mk. xiv. 4; xv. 34, (Sap. iv. 17; Sir. xxxix. 21).
tt ovp, ete. why then, etc. : Mt. xvii. 10; xix. 7; xxvii. 22;
Mk. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 15; Jn. i. 25; see also in ody, b. a.;
tl ody épovuer, see ibid. ri yap; see yap, II. 5. ye
Hebraistically for Mn, how, how greatly, how much, with
adjectives and verbs in exclamations [W. § 21 N. 8; ct.
B. 254 (218)]: Mt. vii. 14G LTr; Lk. xii. 49 [on this
see ei, I. 4 fin.], (Ps. iii. 2; 2S. vi. 20; Cant. i. 10; zé
mond To adyabdv cov; Symm. Ps. xxx. 19). 2. equiv.
to mdrepos, -a, -ov, whether of two, which of the two: Mt.
xxi. 31; xxiii.17 [here Li; see below]; xxvii. 17, 21;
Lk. xxii. 27; neut. ri, Mt. ix. 5; [xxiii. 17 Lehm., 19];
Mk. ti. 9; Lk. v. 23; Phil. i. 22; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. iii.
p- 894; Matthiae § 488, 4; W.169 (159). 3. equiv.
to rrotos, -a, -ov, of what sort, what (kind): Mk.i. 27; vi.
2; Lk. iv. 363 viii. 9; xxiv. 17; Jn. vii. 36; Acts xvii.
19; 1 Co. xv. 2; Eph. i.18sq. Cf. Hermann on Viger
p- 731. 4. By a somewhat inaccurate usage, yet one
not unknown to Grk. writ., it is put for the relatives és
and gars: thus, riva (LT Tr WH i) pe brrovoetre eivat,
ov cil éy (where one would expect év), Acts xiii. 25 ;
dodjoerat ipiv, ti NaAnoere [-onre T Tr WH; Lbr. thecl.],
Mt. x. 19; érolagoy, ri Seurvnow, Lk. xvii. 8; [otda rivas
eEeheEdunr, Jn. xiii. 18 T Tr txt. WH]; esp. after éyeuw
(as in the Grk. writ.) : ov« gyouct, ti payoow, Mt. xv.
$2; Mk. vi. 363 viii. 1 sq.; cf. W. § 25,1; B. 251 (216);
on the distinction betw. the Lat. habeo quid and habeo
quod cf. Ramshorn, Lat. Gram. p. 565 sq.
nis, neut. ri, gen. rwvds, indefinite (enclitic) pronoun
(bearing the same relation to the interrog. ris that mov,
mas, more do to the interrogatives wrod, ms, wre) ; 1.
@ certain, a certain one; used of persons and things con-
cerning which the writer either cannot or will not speak
more particularly ; a. joined to nouns substantive,
as well as to adjectives and to numerals used substan-
tively ; as, Sawapeirys tis, Lk. x. 33; tepeds, Lk. i. 5; x.
81; avnp, Lk. viii. 27; Acts iii. 2; viii. 9; xiv. 8, dvOpw-
TUS
ros, Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. x. 30; Acts ix. 33; plur. Jude 4;
rémos, Lk. xi. 1; Acts xxvii. 8; kopn, Lk. x. 38; xvii. 12,
and in many other pass.; with proper names (as tis
Sivov), Mk. xv. 21; Lk. xxiii. 26; Acts ix. 43; 2:95 UST
xxv. 19. dvo rwés with a partit. gen., Lk. vii. 18 (19);
Acts xxiii. 23; érepos, Acts viii. 34; plur. Acts xxvii. 1;
it indicates that the thing with which it is connected
belongs to a certain class and resembles it: amapynv
ra, a kind of firstfruits, Jas. i. 18, cf. W. § 25, 2a;
joined to adjectives of quality and quantity, it requires
us to conceive of their degree as the greatest possible;
as, PoBepd tis éxdoxy, a certain fearful expectation, Heb.
x. 27, where see Delitzsch [or Alford] (Sewn tis dvvapus,
Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; other exx. fr. the Grk. writ. are
given in W. § 25,2c.; [L. and S.s. v. A. IL. 8]; Mat-
thiae § 487, 4; [Bnhdy. p. 442]; incredibilis quidam
amor, Cic. pro Lig. c. 2,5); péyas tes, Acts viii. 9. b.
it stands alone, or substantively: univ. tis one, a certain
one, Mt. xii. 47 [but WH in mrg. only]; Lk. ix. 49, 57;
xili. 6, 23; Jn. xi.1; Acts v.25; xviii. 7; plur. rues, cer-
tain, some: Lk. xiii.1; Actsxv.1; Ro. iii.8; 1 Co. iv.
18; xv.34; 2:;Co.im. 15 Gal. 1.12; 20h. i. 11; 1 Vim.
1019s cive ls valor avael 05 2iRet lee waves ney wpiy,
some among you, 1 Co. xv. 12; a participle may be
added, — either with the article, tues of etc., Lk. xviii.
Oe 2) Copx. 2s, Galei.( orawithoutmt, Lelimenvyi. 21
tis and twés with a partit. gen.: Lk. xi. 1; xiv. 15; 2 Co.
x2: 2. a. joined to nouns and signifying
some: xpdvov tid, some time, a while, 1 Co. xvi. 7; nuépat
tives, some (or certain) days, Acts ix.19; x. 48; xv. 36;
xvi. 12; xxiv. 24; xxv. 13; ppos 71, Lk. xi. 36 [here WH
mrg. br. 71]; Acts v.2; 1 Co. xi.18; ri Bpwomov, Lk.
xxiv. 41; add, Mk. xvi.18; Jn. v.14; Acts xvii. 21; xxiii.
20; xxviii. 21; Heb. xi. 40; Bpayv 7, Acts v. 34 (where
LTTrWH om. 7); Heb. ii. 7; mepioodrepdv rt, 2 Co. x.
8; pexpdv rt, 2 Co. xi. 16; it serves modestly to qualify
or limit the measure of things, even though that is thought
to be ample or large [cf. 1 a. sub fin.]: kowwwvia tes, a cer-
tain contribution, Ro. xv. 26; xapmés, Ro. i. 13; ydpiopa,
ibid. 11. with a participle, dOernoas tus, if any one has
set at nought, Heb. x. 28 [but this ex. belongs rather
under the next head ]. b. standing alone, or used
substantively, and signifying some one, something; any
one, anything: univ., Mt. xii. 29; Mk. ix. 30; xi. 16; Lk.
vili. 46; Jn. ii. 25; vi.46; Acts xvii. 25; Ro. v.7; 1Co.
xv. 35; 2 Co. xi. 20sq.; Heb. iii. 4; Jas. ii. 18; 2 Pet. ii.
19, ete.; ris e€ duar, Jas. ii. 16; e& tuav rus, Heb. iii. 13;
with a partitive gen., Lk. vii. 36; xi.45; 1 Co. vi.1;
neut. ri with a partit. gen., Acts iv. 32; Ro. xv. 18; Eph.
v.27. eis tus, see eis, 8 p. 187". it answers not in-
frequently to the indefinite one (Germ. man, French on):
Mk. viii. 4; Jn.ii. 25; xvi.30; Ro. viii. 24; Heb. v.12
(where some [viz. RGT Tr (cf. W. 169 (160); R. V.
mrg. which be the rudiments ete.; cf. c. below) ] incor-
rectly read tiva [yet cf. B. 268 (230) note, cf. 260 (223)
note]), etc.; cf. Matthiae § 487, 2. ed mus, see ed, IIT. 16;
edy ts, Twos, etc.: Mt. xxi. 3; xxiv. 23; Mk. xii. 19; Lk.
xvi. 31; Jn. vi. 51; vii. 17; viii. 51 sq.; ix. 22, 81; x. 9;
; 626
Tis
xi. 9sq.57; xii. 26,47; Acts ix. 2 [here Tdf. dy]; x1ii.
41; 1Co.v.11; viii. 10; x. 28; Col. iii, 13; 1 Tim.1. 8;
2 Nim iinD, 21> Jas. tin As cyl meat loci. 20K) Ve
16; Rev. iii. 20; xxii. 18 sq.; dv twov, Jn. xx. 23 [here
Lehm. édv]; éav py tus, In. iii. 3,5; xv. 6; Acts viii. 31;
ov... Tus, not... any one, i.e. no one, Jn. x. 283; ovre
... Tis, Acts xxviii. 21; ovdé=~.. ris, Mt. xi. 27.5 xin. 195
otk... 076 Twos, 1 Co. vi. 12; py tes, lest any (man), Mt.
xxiv.4; Mk. xiii. 5; Acts xxvil.42; 1 Co.i.15; xvi. 11;
2 Co. viii. 20; xi. 16; xii. 6; Eph. ii. 9; 1 Th. v. 15; Heb.
iv. 11; xii. 15; hath any (one), Jn. iv. 33 [cf. pyres, 2]; pn
twa, 2 Co. xii. 17; mpos TO py)... twa, 1 Th.ii.9; dore
... pn twa, Mt. viii. 28; like the Lat. aliquis, it is used
with the verb etyac emphatically: to be somebody, i. e.
somebody of importance, some eminent personage, [W.
§ 25,2c¢.; B.§ 127, 16], Acts v. 36 (see exx. fr. the Grk.
writ. in Passow s. v. B. II. 2d.; [L. and S. ibid. A. IT. 5];
on the phrase ri eiva see e. B. below). Plur. ruvés,
some (of that number or class of men indicated by the
context): Mk. xiv. 4,65; Lk. xxi. 5; Jn. xiii. 29; revés
are distinguished from of mdvres, 1 Co. vill. 7; ix. 22.
twés with an anarthrous participle, Mk. xiv. 57; Lk.
xlil. 1; ratrd tives Are, such (of this sort) were some of
you, 1 Co. vi. 11 [ef. odros, I. 2.d.]; twés with a partitive
gen., Mt.1x. 34) xil. 385) Eexevill Movil wiuse. 5) xd.
135) (ukesvas25 xixa39 Acts. 155 exw S023, .and
often; foll. by ée« and a partit. gen., Lk. xi. 15; Jn. vi.
G4 Wil. 255 44 cise NG iext alg 46 eee Cis xd. Oe mexaye nde
etc.; Paul employs tivés by meiosis in reference to many,
when he would mention something censurable respecting
them in a mild way: Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. x. 7-10. C:
Sometimes the subject ris, reves, or the object tid, Twas,
is not added to the verb, but is left to be understood by
the reader (cf. B. § 132,6; [W. §§ 58,2; 64,4]): be-
fore the partit. gen. Acts xxi.16; before dd, Mt. xxvii.
9 (1 Mace. vii. 33); before éx, Mt. xxiii. 34; Lk. xxi.
16; [Jn. i. 24 T Tr WH (cf. R. V. mrg.);- vii. 40 LT
Tr WHC Re Vmre.) ils oxvice hd ;5 2) 3na4 ce Revers
10]. [Other exx. of its apparent omission are the fol-
lowing: as subject, —of a finite verb (W. § 58, 9b. B.;
B.§ 129,19): dyol, 2Co.x.10 RG T Tr txt. WHtxt. ;
drav hady Td Yeddos, Jn. viii. 44 (ace. to one interpreta-
tion; see R.V. marg.); of an infin.: od xpeiav ¢yere
ypapew tpiv, 1 Th.iv.9 RGT Trtxt. WH; xpelav eyere
Tov diddokew vpas, Tiva etc. Heb. v.12 RG T Tr (but see
2b.above). as object: dds poe meetv, Jn. iv. 7; cf. Mk.
v.43. See Kihner § 352¢.; Kriiger § 55, 3, 21.] d.
It stands in partitions: ris... repos dé, one... and
another, 1 Co. iii. 4; plur. revés (wév) . . . tees (dé), Lk.
ix. 7 sq.; Acts xvii. 18; Phil. i. 15; cf. Passow s. v. B.
Il. 2e.; [L. and S. ibid. A. II. 11. ¢.]. e. Besides
what has been already adduced, the foll. should be no-
ticed respecting the use of the neut. 71; a. univ.
anything, something: Mt. v. 23; Mk. viii. 23; Lk. xi. 54;
Acts xxv. 5,11; 1 Co. x. 31, and very often; oddé.. . ré.
neither... anything, 1 Tim. vi. 7. 8. like the Lat.
aliquid it is used emphatically, equiv. to something of
consequence, something extraordinary (cf. bh. above): in.
Titwos 6
the phrase eivai 71, 1 Co. iii. 7; Gal. ii. 6; vi. 35 cf. Pas-
sow s.v. B. II. 2d.; [L. and S. s. v. A. II. 5]; and on the
Lat. aliquid esse see Klotz, Handworterb. d. Lat. Spr. i.
298°; [Harpers’ Dict. s. v. aliquis, 1. C. 1] (on the
other hand, in 1 Co. x. 19 ri etvas means to be anything,
actually to exist); «idévae [LT Tr WH éyvaxévar] t1, i.e.
much, 1 Co. viii. 2. 3. As respects the Position
of the word, when used adjectively it stands— now be-
fore its noun (ris dynp, Acts iii.2; xiv. 8; ris padnrns,
Acts ix. 10; twas érépous, Acts xxvii. 1; ri dyaddy, Jn. i.
47); now, and indeed far more frequently, after it, as
fepevs tus, Lk. i. 5; x. 313 dvnp tes, Lk. viii. 27, etc., ete.
Tuvés, used substantively, is found at the beginning of a
' sentence in Mt. xxvii. 47; Lk. vi. 2; Jn. xiii. 29; 1 Tim.
v.24; Phil. i.15; cf. W. § 25, 2 Note, and 559 (520).
The particle 6¢ may stand betw. it and its substantive
(as Sapapeirns dé tis), as in Lk. x. 33, 38; Acts viii. 9;
Heb. x. 27.
Tiros, -ov, 6, the praenomen of a certain Corinthian,
a Jewish proselyte, also surnamed Justus: Acts xviii. 7
T Tr br. WH (see Tiros).* af
tithos, -ov, 6, a Lat. word, a title; an inscription, giv-
ine the accusation or crime for which a criminal suf-
fered: Jn. xix. 19, 20, and after #4 Hv. Nic. c. 10, 1 fin.
(Sueton. Calig. c. 32 praecedente titulo qui causam
poenae indicaret; again, Domit. c. 10 canibus objecit
cum hoe titulo: impie locutus parmularius.) *
Tiros [Rec.* in the subscription, Tiros; ef. Lipsius,
Gram. Unters. p. 42 sq.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Pape,
Eigennamen, s.v.; W.§6, 1 m.], -ov, 6, Titus, a Gentile
Christian, Paul’s companion in some of his journeys and
assistant in Christian work: 2 Co. ii. 13; vii. 6, 13 sq.;
viii. 6, 16, 23; xii.18; Gal. ii. 1,3; 2 Tim. iv.10; Tit.i.
4. Heis not mentioned in the Book of Acts. But since
Titus is the praenomen, perhaps he appears in the
Acts under his second, or, if he was a Roman, under
his third name; cf. Riickert on 2 Cor. p. 410. He is
by no means, however, to be identified (after Wieseler,
Com. i. d. Brief a. d. Galater, p. 573 sq. [also his Chron.
d. apost. Zeit. p. 204]) with the Titus of Acts xviii. 7,
even if the reading (of some authorities [see Tdf.’s note
ad loc.]) Titov [see Tircos above ] *lovcrov be the true
one.” :
rtw, a form from which some N. T. lexicons [e. g.
Wahl, Bretschneider, Robinson, Bloomfield, Schirlitz,
Harting, al.] incorrectly derive ricovow in 2 Th.i.9; see
TWO.
roryapody, (fr. the enclitic roi or r@, ydp, and ovv, Germ.
doch denn nun; ef. Delitzsch on Heb. xii. 1; [Ellicott on
1 Th. iv. 8]), a particle introducing a conclusion with
some special emphasis or formality, and generally occu-
pying the first place in the sentence, wherefore then, for
which reason, therefore, consequently: 1Th.iv.8; Heb.
xii. 1, (for 13-73, Job xxii. 10; xxiv.22; 4 Macc. i. 34;
vi. 28 var.; xiii.15; Soph., Xen., Plato, sqq.) ; cf. Klotz
ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 738.*
wolye in xairovye, see yé, 3 Ff.
sotvuv, (fr. the enclitic rof and viv). fr. Pind. [and
9
Co)
i TOApaxe
Hat.] down, therefore, then, accordingly; contrary to the
use of the more elegant Grk. writ., found at the begin-
ning of the sentence (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 342 sq.; [W.
559 (519 sq.); B. §150, 19]): Heb. xiii. 18 (Is. iif. 10;
v.13); as in the better writ., after the first word: Lk.
xx. 25 [yet T Tr WH put it first here also]; 1 Co. ix.
26 and Ree. in Jas. ii. 24, (Sap. i. 11; viii. 9; 4 Mace.
i. 13, 15 sqq.).*
todade, toudde, Towdvde, (roios and 6¢), fr. Hom. down,
such, generally with an implied suggestion of something
excellent or admirable: 2 Pet. i. 17.*
ToLotTos, ToOLavTH, ToLodTO and sovodrov (only this sec-
ond form of the neut. occurs in the N. T., and twice [but
in Mt. xviii. 5 T WH have -ro]), (£r. rotos and ofros [al.
say lengthened fr. roios or connected with airdés; cf.
tmAtxovros |), (fr. Hom. down], such as this, of this kind or
sort; a. joined to nouns: Mt. ix. 8; xviii. 5; Mk.
iv. 33; vi. 2; vii. 8 [here T WH om. Tr br. the cl.], 13;
ix. 37 [here Tdf. rovrwyv]; Jn. ix. 16; Acts xvi. 24; 1
Conve Us exit 1632) Con 1.4, 12)e xi. ord ebaviie6:
viii. 1; xii. 8; xifi, 16; Jas. iv. 16. b. fos...
totovros: Mk. xiii. 19; 1Co. xv. 48; 2Co. x. 11; Totod-
ros... 6moios, Acts xxvi. 29; rovodros dv os etc. Philem.
9 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]. c. used substantive-
ly, a. without an article : Jn. iv. 23; neut. yndev tor0d-
tov, Acts xxi. 25 Rec.; plur., Lk. ix. 9; xiii. 2 [here T
Tr txt. WH radra]. 8. with the article, 6 rotodros
one who is of such a character, such a one, [B. $124,5; W.
111 (106); Kriiger § 50, 4,6; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1,
5, 2; Ellicott on Gal. v. 21]: Acts xxii. 22; 1 Co. v. 5,
1S 2 (Cro; the GRCES =o JUNR oat OR ig (ERIL Sab the? Wii at
11; plur., Mt. xix.14; Mk.x.14; Lk. xviii. 16; Jn. viii.
5; Ro. fii. 14 Lmrg.]; xvi. 18; 1 Co. vii. 28; xvi. 16,18;
DACs 286 16S IAMIk Te Oe Oe idiy tink ie al Aeting wee &
Rec.; 3 Jn. 8; neut. plur., Acts xix. 25; Ro.i. 32; ii. 2
sq-; 1 Co. vii. 15; Gal. v. 21, 23; Eph. v. 27; Heb. xi. 14.*
TotXos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for Vp, @
wall fesp. of a house; cf. retyos]: Acts xxiii. 3.*
76K0S, -ov, 6, (fr. Tixrw, pf. TéroKa) ; LOUIS nels
the act of bringing forth. b. that which has been
brought forth, offspring; (in both senses from Homer
down). 2. interest of money, uswry, (because it
multiplies money, and as it were ‘breeds’ [cf. e.g. Mer-
chant of Venice i. 3]): Mt. xxv. 27; Lk. xix. 23, (so in
Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Arstph. down; Sept. for ]w3).*
ToApd, -; impf. 3 pers. sing. érdéApa, plur. érdApov;
fut. roAunow; 1 aor. érédAunoa; (TréAwa or TéApn [‘ dar-
ing’; Curtius § 236]); fr. Hom. down; to dare; as
not to dread or shun through fear: foll. by an inf., Mt.
xxii. 46; Mk. xii. 34; Lk. xx. 40; Jn. xxi. 12 [W. § 65,
7b.]; Acts v.13; vii. 32; Ro. xv. 18; 2Co.x.12; Phil.
1.14; Jude 9; roAunoas eiondOev, took courage and went
in, Mk. xv. 43 [Hdian. 8, 5, 22; Plut. vit. Cam. 22,
6]. b. to bear, endure; to bring one’s self to; [cf.
W. u.s.]: foll. by an inf., Ro. v. 7; 1 Co. vi. 1. Cc.
absol. to be bold; bear one’s self boldly, deal boldly : 2 Co.
xi. 21; éi twa, against one, 2 Co. x. 2. [Comp.: dmo
ToAuaw. | *
TOALN POTEPOV
[Syn. roAude, Oappéw: 0. denotes confidence in one’s
own strength or capacity, 7. boldness or daring in under-
taking; 6. has reference more to the character, 7. to its
manifestation. Cf. Schmidt ch. 24,4; ch. 141. The words
are found together in 2 Co. x. 2)|
rodpmpérepov, (neut. compar. from the adj. roApnpds),
[Thue., sqq.], more boldly: Ro. xv. 15 [L ed. ster. Tr
txt. WH -répos; W. 243 (228)].*
TOANNTHS, -00, 6, (ToAUdw), a daring man: 2 Pet. ii.
10. (Thue. 1, 70; Joseph. b. j. 3, 10, 25 Philo de Jo-
seph. § 38, Plut., Leian.) *
Topdrepos, -a, -ov, (compar. fr. rouds cutting, sharp, and
this fr. réuyw), sharper: Heb. iv. 12 ([Pseudo-] Phocylid.
vs. 116 [(Gnom. Poet. Graec. ed. Brunck p. 116) ] émhov
rot Adyos avdpi rouwrepdy eare odypov; add, Timon in
Athen. 10 p. 445e.; Leian. Tox. 11).*
+6fov, -ov, 76, fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for nwp, a
bow: Rev. vi. 2.*
roTdat.ov, -ov, Td, (neut. of the adj. rordtios, fr. romagos),
topaz, a greenish-yellow precious stone (our chrysolith
[see BB. DD., esp. Riehm s. v. Edelsteine 18]): Rev.
xxi. 20 (Diod., Strab.; Sept. for W3H9, Ex. xxviii. 17;
xxxvi. 17 (xxxix.10); Ezek. xxviii. 13. The Grk. writ.
more commonly use the form rézagos).*
témos, -ov, 6, in Attic fr. Aeschyl. and his contempo-
raries on; Sept. DIP); place; i.e. 1. prop. any
portion of space marked off, as it were, from surrounding
space; used of a. an inhabited place, as a city,
village, district: Lk. iv. 37; x. 1; Acts xii. 17; xvi. 3;
XXVil. 2,8; 1Co.i. 2; 2Co.ii.14; 1 Th.i. 8; Rev. xviii.
17[GLT Tr WH]; rov romov kai 76 eOvos, the place
which the nation inhabit, i.e. the holy land and the
Jewish people, Jn. xi. 48 (cf. 2 Mace. v. 19 sq.) ; rémos
dy.os, the temple (which the Sept. of Is. Ix. 13 calls 6
dyios Tonos tov Oeod), Mt. xxiv. 15. of a house, Acts
iv. 31. of uninhabited places, with adjectives: gpnpos,
Mt. xiv. 13,15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 31 sq.; Lk. iv. 42; ix.
10 RGL, 12; medwos, Lk. vi. 17; dvvdpos, plur., Mt. xii.
43; Lk. xi. 24. of any place whatever: xara rémovs,
[R.V. in divers places] i.e. the world over [but see xara,
I. 3 a.a.], Mt. xxiv. 7; Mk. xiii. 8; [év wavri rom@, 2 Th.
iii. 16 Lchm.]; of places in the sea, tpayeis rémot, Acts
xxvil. 29 [R.V. rocky ground]; rom. diOddacoos, [A. V.
place where two seas met], ibid. 41. of that ‘place’
where what is narrated occurred: Lk. x. 32; xix. ISD
xxii. 40; Jn.v.13; vi. 10; xviii. 2. of a place or spot
where one can settle, abide, dwell : érousacew rv Tomo,
Jn. xiv. 2 sq., ef. Rev. xii. 6; 2yew rémov, a place to dwell
in, Rev. l. c.; od« qv adrois rémos év T® katadipart, Lk.
. 4.7; d00var rwi rémov, to give one place, give way to
one, Lk. xiv. 92; tézos ovx ebpébn adrois, Rev. xx. 11;
of the seat which one gets in any gathering, as at a
feast, Lk. xiv. 10; rév €axarov romov Karéxew, ibid. 9»;
of the place or spot occupied by things placed in it, Jn.
xx. 7%, the particular place referred to is defined by
the words appended : — by a genitive, rém. ris Bacdvov,
Lk. xvi. 28; THs Katatavcews, Acts vil. 42: kpaviov, Mt.
XXvVil. 33; Mk. xv. 22; Jn. xix.17; [rév romov rev Frwy,
‘In. xx. 25> L T Tr mrg.] ; — by the addition of ob, érrov,
628
TOGOUTOS
ée? or év 6, foll. by finite verbs, Mt. xxviii. 6; Mk
xvi. 6; Jn. iv. 20; vi. 23; x.40; xi. 6, 30; xix.41; Acts
vii. 33; Ro. ix. 26 ;— by the addition of a proper name:
rémos Aeyopevos, Or Kadovpevos, Mt. xxvii. 33; Mk. xv.
22; Lk. xxiii. 33; Jn. xix. 13; Rev. xvi. 16; 6 rézos
twos, the place which a person or thing occupies or has
a right to: Rev. ii. 5; vi. 14; xii. 8; where a thing is
hidden, rs paxaipas i.e. its sheath, Mt. xxvi. 52. the
abode assigned by God to one after death wherein to re-
ceive his merited portion of bliss or of misery: (6 twos
rénos (rwés), univ. Ignat. ad Magnes. 5, 1 [cf. 6 atamos
rémos, Tob. iii. 6]); applied to Gehenna, Acts i. 25 (see
iScos, 1 c.); 6 dpetdouevos Tonos, of heaven, Polye. ad
Philip. 9, 2; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 4; also 6 &y.os rémos,
ibid. 5, 7; [6 &pucpévos r. Barn. ep. 19,1; Act. Paul et
Thecl. 28; see esp. Harnack’s note on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
5, 4]. b. a place (passage) in a book: Lk. iv. 17
(kai év dA tore hyoiv, Xen. mem. 2, 1, 20[ (but this
is doubtful; cf. L. and S.s.v. 1.4; yet cf. Kiihner ad
loc.); Philo de Joseph. § 26; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8,4]; in
the same sense yopa in Joseph. antt. 1, 8, 3). 2.
metaph. a. the condition or station held by one in
any company or assembly: avandnpovy Tov Torov Tov idia-
tov, [R. V. filleth the place of the unlearned], 1 Co. xiv.
163; rhs Staxovias tavtyns Kal dmoatoAns, [R.V. the place in
this ministry, etc.], Acts i. 25 LT Tr WH. b. op-
portunity, power, occasion for acting: torov NapBavew rhs
dmoNoyias, opportunity to make his defence, Acts xxv.
16 (€xew 7. aodoyias, Joseph. antt. 16, 8,5); romov d:60-
var TH Opy (sc. Tov Geov), Ro. xii. 19; 7@ dtaBorw, Eph.
iv. 27, (r@ iarp@, to his curative efforts in one’s case,
Sir. xxxvili. 12; vou viorou, ibid. xix. 17; rémov d:66-
vat tii, foll. by an inf., ibid. iv. 5); rém. peravoias etpi-
oxewv, Heb. xii. 17, on this pass. see etpioxa, 3 (diddvat,
Sap. xii. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 7, 5; Lat. locum relin-
quere paenitentiae, Liv. 44,10; 24, 26; [Plin. ep. ad Trai.
96 (97), 10 cf. 2]; yew rdmrov peravoias, Tat. or. ad
Graec. 15 fin. ; S:d 76 ju) KatadeimecOai odict Térov €d€ovs
pndé ovyyvepns, Polyb. 1, 88, 2); rérov exe sc. Tod evay-
yericer@a, Ro. xv. 23; 7. (nretv, with a gen. of the thing
for which influence is sought among men: 8:aOjxns, pass.
Heb. viii. 7 [(cf. weudopar) |.
[Syn. té70s 1, XHpa, xwptov: tén. place, indefinite ; a
portion of space viewed in reference to its occupancy, or as
appropriated to a thing; x#pa region, country, extensive;
space, yet bounded; xwpiov parcel of ground (Jn. iv. 5), cir-
cumscribed ; a definite portion of space viewed as enclosed
or complete in itself; ré7os and xwploy (plur., R. V. lands)
occur together in Acts xxviii. 7. Cf. Schmidt ch. 41.]
TocotTos, -avtn, -odro (Heb. vii. 22 LT Tr WH) and
-odtor, (fr. récos and odros; [al. say lengthened fr. ros;
cf. tnArKxovros, init.]), so great; with nouns: of quantity,
Too. mAovTos, Rev. xviii. 17 (16); of internal amount,
niotts, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 9; [60a eddéacev éavtiy, To-
covrov ddre Bacancpdr, Rev. xviii. 7]; of size, véqbos, Heb.
xli. 1; plur. so many: iyOves, Jn. xxi. 113 onpeia, Jn.
xii. 375 -yévn dover, 1 Co. xiv. 10; én, Lk. xv. 29 [(here
A.V. these many)], (in prof. writ., esp. the Attic, we
often find rogodros kai rowdros and the reverse; see Hein-
TOTE
dorf on Plat. Gorg. p. 34; Passow p. 1923°; [L. and S.
s.vv-]); foll. by &ore, so many as to be able, etc. [B. 244
(210)], Mt. xv. 33; of time: so long, xpdvos, [Jn. xiv. 9];
Heb. iv. 7; of length of space, 7d pjKos To~OUTOY éeaTuy
door etc. Rev. xxi. 16 Rec.; absol., plur. so many, Jn.
vi. 9; neut. plur. [so many things], Gal. iii. 4; tocodtrou,
Sor so much (of price), Acts v. 8 (9); dat. rocotre, pre-
ceded or followed by éo@ (as often in the Grk. writ. fr.
Hd..down (W. § 35, 4 N. 2]), by so much : roo. KpelTT@v,
by so much better, Heb. i. 4; roootr@ paddov dow ete.
Heb. x. 25; xa’ doov... xara rovodror, by how much...
by so much, Heb. vii. 22.*
Tote, demonstr. adv. of time, (fr. the neut. art. rd,
and the enclit. ré [q. v.]; answering to the relative
ore [Kiihner $506, 2 ¢.]), fr. Hom. down, then; at that
time ; a. then i.e. at the time when the things under
consideration were taking place, (of a concomitant
event): Mt. ii. 17 (rore éwAnpwOn) ; iii. D, 13; xii. 22, 38;
KV EK IX les seen 20 xxVvdIe OD) 16k Ro. vic 21's; folly by
a more precise specification of the time by means of an
added participle, Mt. ii. 16; Gal. iv. 8; opp. to vov, Gal.
iv. 29; Heb. xii. 26; 6 rore kocpos, the world that then
was, 2 Pet. iii. 6. b. then i. e. when the thing un-
der consideration had been said or done, thereupon; so
in the historical writers (esp. Matthew), by way of transi-
tion from one thing mentioned to another which could
not take place before it [W. 540 (503); B. § 151, 31
fnalevcrivenl ois exxvie 143 KKVvilo 3S RACLS I. 2s x48
xxl. 33; not infreq. of things which took place imme-
diately afterwards, so that it is equiv. to which having
been done or heard: Mt. ii. 7; ili. 15; iv.10sq.; viii. 26 ;
KG PAV CO s KVL 9s) KK VIN SO, 403) XXVIII 26 Sqa;
Lk. xi. 26; rore odv, Jn. xi. 14 [Lchm. br. ody]; xix. 1,
16; xx. 8; etvOéws rdre, Acts xvii. 14; Tore preceded
by a more definite specification of time, as pera 76d
Wopiov, Jn. xiii. 27; or by an aor. ptcp. Acts xxviii. 1.
Ore... Tore, etc., when... then: Mt. xiii. 26; xxi. 1; Jn.
xii. 16; ds... rore, etc., Jn. vii. 10; xi.6; preceded by
a gen. absol. which specifies time, Acts xxvii. 21. dmo
rore from that time on, see ad, I. 4 b. p. 58°. c. of
things future; then (at length) when the thing under
discussion takes place (or shall have taken place): rére
simply, Mt. xxiv. 23, 40; xxv. 1, 34, 37, 41,44 sq.; opp.
to dpre, 1 Co. xiii. 12; Kat rére, Mt. vii. 23; xvi. 27;
xxiv. 10, 14, 30; Mk. xiii. 21, 26 sq.; Lk. xxi. 27; 1 Co.
iv. 5; Gal. vi. 4; 2Th.ii.8; «al rore preceded by mpa-
rov, Mt. v. 24; vii. 5; Lk. vi.42. dray (with a subjune.
pres.)...7ére, etc. when... then, ete. LW. § 60, 5], 2 Co.
xii. 10; 1 Th. v.33 éray (with an aor. subj. i. q. Lat. fut.
pf.) ... tore, etc., Mt. ix. 15; xxiv. 16; xxv. 31; Mk.
ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. v. 35; xxi. 20 sq.; Jn.ii. 10 [TWH
om. L Tr br. rére]; viii. 28; 1 Co. xv. 28, 54; xvi. 2;
Col. iii. 4. Of the N. T. writ. Matthew uses rére most
frequently, ninety-one times [(so Holtzmann, Syn. Evang.
p- 293); rather, eighty-nine times acc. to RT, ninety
times acc. to G L Tr WH]; it is not found in [Eph., Phil.,
Philem., the Past. Epp., the Epp. of Jn., Jas., Jude], the
Rey.
629
tTpaxynrifo
totvavriov (by crasis for ré évavrioy[B. 10]), [(Arstph.,
Thue., al.) ], on the contrary, contrariwise, (Vulg. e con
trario), accus. used adverbially [W. 230 (216)]: 2 Co.
ie 13 (elk wk 75 il leery aii,
Tovvona (by crasis for rd dvona [B. 10; WH. App. p.
145]), [fr. Hom. I. 3, 235 down], the name; accus. absol.
[B. § 131, 12; W. 230 (216) cf. dvoua, 1] by name: Mt.
Xxvil. 57.*
touteott [cf. W. p. 45; B.11(10)] for rodr’ gor, and
this for rovré éart, see eiul, II. 3.
tpdyos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, a he-goat: plur., Heb.
106 MPS) IDE sxe
tpdmela, -ys, 9, (fr. rérpa, and mé¢a a foot), fr. Hom.
down, Sept. for mow, a table; al, a. a table
on which food is placed, an eating-table: Mt. xv. 27; Mk.
vil. 28; Lk. xvi. 21; xix. 23; xxii. 21, 30; the table in
the temple at Jerusalem on which the consecrated loaves
were placed (see mpoOects, 1), Heb. ix. 2. b. equiv.
to the food placed upon the table (cf. Fritzsche on Add.
to Esth. iv. 14): mapariOévar tpdmeCav, (like the Lat.
mensam apponere (ef. our ‘to set a good table’]), to set a
table, i.e. food, before one (Thue. 1, 130; Ael. v.h. 2,17),
Acts xvi. 345; dcaxoveiy rats tpaméfais (see Staxovéw, 3),
Acts vi. 2. c. a banquet, feast, (fr. Hdt. down): Ro.
xi. 9 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 23); peréyew tpamétns Satpo-
viev, to partake of a feast prepared by [(?) see below]
demons (the idea is this: the sacrifices of the Gentiles
inure to the service of demons who employ them in pre-
paring feasts for their worshippers; accordingly one who
participates in those feasts, enters into communion and
fellowship with the demons); xupiov, to partake of a feast
prepared by [(?) see below] the Lord (just as when he
first instituted the supper), 1 Co. x. 21 [but it seems
more natural to take the genitives da. and kup. simply
as possessive (cf. W. 189 (178); B. § 127, 27), and
to modify the above interpretation accordingly ]. Ze
the table or stand of a money-changer, where he sits, ex-
changing different kinds of money for a fee (agio), and
paying back with interest loans or deposits, (Lys., Isoer.,
Dem., Aristot., Joseph., Plut., al.): Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi.
15; Jn.ii.15; 76 dpyvpuov d:ddvac emi (rH) Tpdrefay, to put
the money into a (the) bank at interest, Lk. xix. 23.*
rpametirns [-Cetrns T WH; see WH. App. p. 154, and
cf. et, e], -ov, 6, (rpamega, q. V-), @ money-changer, broker,
banker, one who exchanges money for a fee, and pays
interest on deposits: Mt. xxv. 27. (Cebet. tab. 31;
[Lys.], Dem., Joseph., Plut., Artem., al.) *
tpatpa, -ros, 76, (TPAQ, TPQ, titpaoKw, to wound,
akin to Opatw), a wound: Lk. x. 34. (From Aeschyl.
and Hdt. down; Sept. several times for yd.) *
Ttpavpatife: 1 aor. ptep. Tpavuatioas; pf. pass. ptcp.
rerpavpariopévos ; (rpadpa) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
to wound: Lk. xx. 12; Acts xix. 16.*
Tpaxnrttw: (Tpdynros) ; 1. to seize and twist the
neck or throat; used of combatants who handle thus
their antagonists (Philo, Plut., Diog. Laért., al.). 2.
to bend back the neck of the victim to be slain, to lay
| bare or expose by bending back; hence trop. to lay bare,
Tpaynros
uncover, expose: pf. pass. ptep. rerpaynArtopevos ivi, laid
bare, laid open, made manifest to one, Heb. iv. 13.*
Tpaxnros, -ov, 6, [allied w. rpéxo; named from its mov-
ableness; cf. Vaniéek p. 304], fr. Eur. and Arstph. down,
Sept. chiefly for WWy¥, also for Vy, etc., the neck: Mt.
Xvili. 6; Mk. ix. 42; Lk. xv. 20; xvii. 2; Acts xv. 10;
xx. 37; rdv éavtod tpdyndov Urorievar (sc. bd Tov idy-
pov), [A.V. to lay down one’s own neck i. e.] to be ready
to incur the most imminent peril to life, Ro. xvi. 4.*
Tpaxvs, -cia, -v, fr. Hom. down, rough: odo, Lk. iii. 5 ;
térot, rocky places (in the sea), Acts xxvil. 29.*
Tpaxwviris, -dos, 7, Trachonitis, a rough [(Grk. rpa-
xvs)] region, tenanted by robbers, situated between An-
tilibanus [on the W.] and the mountains of Batanaea [on
the E.], and bounded on the N. by the territory of Da-
mascus: Lk. iii. 1 (Joseph. antt. 16, 9, 3 and often).
[See Porter in BB. DD.]*
tpels, of, ai, tpla, ra, three: Mt. xii. 40; Mk. viii. 2;
Lk. i. 56; Jn. ii. 19, and often. [From Hom. down.]
Tpels TaBepvar, see raBepvar.
tpépo; used only in the pres. and impf.; fr. Hom.
down; to tremble: Mk. v. 33; Lk. viii. 47; Acts ix. 6
Rec.; with a ptep. (cf. W. § 45,4 a.; [B. § 144, 15a.]),
to fear, be afraid, 2 Pet. ii. 10. [SyN. see oBéo, fin. ] *
tpépw; 1 aor. Opera; Pass., pres. rpepopar; pf. ptep.
teOpappevos ; fr. Hom. down; to nourish, support; to feed :
tua, Mt. vi. 26; xxv.37; Lk. xii. 24; Acts xii. 20; Rev.
xii. 6, 14; to give suck, Lk. xxiii. 29 LT Tr WH; to
fatten, Jas. v. 5 [here A. V. nourish]. to bring up,
nurture, Lk. iv. 16 [here T WH mre. dvarpépa] (1 Mace.
iii. 33; xi. 39, and often in prof. auth.). [Come.: aya-,
€k-, €v- Tpepa. | *
Tpéxo; impf. érpexov; 2 aor. éSpayov; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 7395 fo run; a. prop.: of persons in haste,
Mk. v. 6; Jn. xx. 2,4; with a telic inf. Mt. xxviii. 8;
Spazoy with a finite verb, Mt. xxvii. 48; Mk. xv. 36;
Lk. xv. 20; rpéx@ emi with an ace. of place, Lk. xxiv.
12 [T om. LTr br. WH reject the vs.]; ets TOAELOV,
Rev. ix. 9; of those who run in a race-course (év ctadio),
1 Co. ix. 24, 26. b. metaph.: of doctrine rapidly
propagated, 2 Th. iii. 1[R.V. run]; by a metaphor
taken from the runners in a race, to exert one’s self, strive
hard ; to spend one’s strength in performing or attaining
something: Ro. ix. 16; Gal. v. 75 eis evr, Gal. ii. 2 [W.
504 (470); B. § 148, 10]; Phil. ii. 16; rov dydva, Heb.
xil. 1 (see dyoy, 2); the same expression occurs in Grk.
writ., denoting to incur extreme peril, which it requires
the exertion of all one’s efforts to overcome, Hat. 8,
102; Eur. Or. 878; Ale. 489; Electr. 883; Iph. Aul.
1456; Dion. Hal. 7, 48, ete.; miserabile currunt certa-
men, Stat. Theb. 3,116. [Comp.: eic-, xara-, TEpt-, TpO-,
Tpoo-, Tvl, éTrt- Tuv-, UTo- Tpéya. |*
TPALA, -aTos, 76, (TiTpdw, Tirpnut, TPAQ, to bore through,
pierce), a perforation, hole: Beddvns, Lk. xviii. 25 L T Tr
WI; [padidos, Mt. xix. 24 WH txt.]. (Arstph., Plat.,
Aristot., Plut., al.) *
TpidKxovTa,, oi, ai, rd, (rpeis), thirty: Mt. xiii.8; Mk. iv.
8; Lk. ili. 23, ete. [From Hom. down.]
630
TpOpos
Tprakdcrot, -at, -a, three hundred: Mk. xiv. 5, Jn. xii.
5. [From Hom. down.]*
tplBoros, -ov, 6, (rpeis and Bddra, [(cf. Bédos), three-
pointed ]), a thistle, a prickly wild plant, hurtful to other
plants: Mt. vii. 16; Heb. vi. 8. (Arstph., al.; Sept. for
V7, Gen. iii. 18; Hos. x. 8; for oy3¥ thorns, Prov.
xxii. 5.) [Cf. B. D. s. v. Thorns and Thistles, 4; Low,
Aram. Pflanzennamen, § 302.]*
tptBos, -ov, 7, (rpi8o to rub), a worn way, a path: Mt.
iii. 3; Mk. i. 3; Lk. iii. 4, fr. Is. xl. 3. (Hom. hymn.
Mere. 448; Hadt., Eur., Xen., al.; Sept. for HN}, MIs,
1797, JY} ete.)*
Tpietia, -as, 7, (Tpeis and €ros), a space of three years:
Acts xx. 81. (Theophr., Plut., Artem. oneir. 4, 1; al.) *
tpltw; to squeak, make a shrill ery, (Hom., Hat., Aris-
tot., Plut., Leian., al.) : trans. rots dddvras, to grind or
gnash the teeth, Mk. ix. 18; xara twos, Ev. Nicod. ec. 5.*
tpipnvos, -ov, (rpeis and pny), of three months (Soph.,
Aristot., Theophr., al.) ; neut. used as subst. a space of
three months (Polyb., Plut., 2 K. xxiv. 8): Heb. xi. 23.*
tpls, (rpeis), adv., thrice: Mt. xxvi. 34, 75; Mk. xiv.
309722 Lic xxi! 34,615 on. xiii, 88:97 2) Coscci2b% ex.
8; ént rpis [see emi, C. I. 2 d. p. 235% bot.], Acts x. 16;
xi. 10. [From Hom. down.]*
tplrreyos, -ov, (rpeis and oréyn), having three roofs or
stories: Dion. Hal. 3, 68; [Joseph. b. j. 5, 5, 5]; ré.rpi-
areyov, the third story, Acts xx. 9 (Gen. vi. 16 Symm.) 3;
9 tTptoréyn, Artem. oneir. 4, 46.*
Tpio-xtAtot, -at, -a, (rpis and xiAuor), three thousand:
Acts ii. 41. [From Hom. down. ]*
tplros, -n, -ov, the third: with substantives, Mk. xv. 25;
Lkoxxtv. 215 Actsiij15 $32 Cosxiie2s Rey. ive vis avian:
viii. 10; xi. 14, ete.; 77 tpirn jyepa, Mt. xvi. 21; xvii. 235
xx. 19; Mk. ix. 31 [Rec.]; x. 34 Rec.; Lk. xxiv. 46; Acts
x.40; 1Co.xv.4; tH nuépa tH tpirn, Lk. xviii. 33; Jn.
ii. 1 [Lmrg. Tr WH mrg. rq rpirn nyépal; éws rhs Tpit.
nuepas, Mt. xxvii. 64; tpirov, acc. masc. substantively,
a third [(se. servant) ], Lk. xx.12; neut. rd rpirov with
a gen. of the thing, the third part of anything, Rev. viii.
7-12; ix.15,18; xii.4; neut. adverbially, 76 tpirov
the third time, Mk. xiv.41; Jn. xxi.17; also without
the article, rpirov a third time, Lk. xxiii. 22; rovro tpi-
tov, this is (now) the third time (see odros, Il. d.), Jn.
xxi. 14; 2 Co. xii. 14 [mot Rec.*]; xiii. 1; rpirov in
enumerations after mp@rov, devrepov, in the third place,
thirdly, 1 Co. xii. 28; ek rpirov, a third time [W. § 51,
d.], Mt. xxvi. 44 [L Tr mrg. br. ek rpirov].
tplxivos, -7, -ov, (Opié, q. v.), made of hair (Vulg. cili-
cinus): Rev. vi. 12 [see odxkos, b.]. (Xen., Plat., Sept.,
alain
TpLXGs, see Opié.
Tpdpos, -ov, 6, (rpézw), fr. Hom. down, a trembling,
quaking with fear: Mk. xvi. 8; pera @dBou k. Tpdpov,
with fear and trembling, used to describe the anxiety of
one who distrusts his ability completely to meet all re-
quirements, but religiously does his utmost to fulfil his
duty, 2 Co. vii.15; Eph. vi.5; Phil. ii.12; év @. «. év Tp.
(Is. xix. 16), 1 Co. ii. 3 (dBos and rpdyuas are joined in
TpoTH
Gen. ix. 2; Ex. xv. 16; Deut. [ii. 25]; xi. 25, ete.; év op.
++. erp. Ps.ii11). [Syn. ef. oBée, fin.]*
Tpomh, -js, 9, (fr. rpém@ to turn), a turning: of the
heavenly bodies, Jas. i. 17 (on this see émooxiacpa); often
so in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. and Hes. down [see L.
and S.s. v. 1]; cf. Job xxxviii. 33; Sap. vii. 18; Deut.
Xxxili. 14; [Soph. Lex. s. v.].*
Tpémos, -ov, 6, (fr. tpémw, see tpomy), fr. [Pind.], Ae-
schyl. and Hdt. down; 1. a manner, way, fashion:
dv tpdrov, as, even as, like as, [W. § 32,6; B. § 131, 12]:
Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; Actsi.11; vii.28; 2 Tim.
ili. 8, (Gen. xxvi. 29; Ex. xiv. 13; [Deut. xi. 25; Ps. xli.
(xlii.) 2]; Ezek. xlii. 7; xlv.6; Mal. iii. 17; Xen. mem.
1, 2,59; anab. 6, 1 (3), 1; Plat. rep. 5 p. 466 e.); rdv
Spovov Tovrots Tpdroy, [in like manner with these], Jude 7;
ka@ dv tpémov, as, Acts xv. 11; xxvil. 25; xara mdvra
tpémov, No. iii. 2; cata pndéva tpdrov, in no wise, 2 Th.
il. 3 (4 Mace. iv. 24; x.7; xara ovdéva rpdmov, 2 Mace.
xi. 31; 4 Mace. v.16); wapvri tpdr@, Phil. i. 18 (1 Mace.
xiv. 35, and very often in the Grk. writ.); also év mavri
tpér@, 2 Th. iii. 16 [here Lehm. év 7. rém@; cf. W. § 31,
8d. ]. 2. manner of life, character: Heb. xiii. 5
[R. V. mrg. ‘turn of mind’; (cf. rods rpdmovs kupiov eyetv,
caleachinose (1,56) |."
Tpotro-dopéw, -@: 1 aor. erpomopdpyoa; (fr. tpdzos, and
depo to bear); to bear one’s manners, endure one’s charac-
ter: twa, Acts xi. 18 K Tr txt. WH (see their App. ad
loc.), after codd. 8 B ete.; Vulg. mores corum sustinutt ;
(Cic. ad Attic. 13,29; Schol. on Arstph. ran. 1432;
Sept. Deut. i. 31 cod. Vat.; [Orig. in Jer. 248; Apost.
constt. 7, 36 (p. 219, 19 ed. Lagarde) ]); see rpopodopéw.*
Tpohh, -7s, 7, (Tpepo, 2 pf. rérpopa), food, nourish-
ments Mitel. 4> vi.25s.x. 10;\xxiv.45; Lk. xii. 235 Jn-
iv.8; Acts ii.46; ix. 19; xiv. 17; xxvii. 33 sq. 36, 38;
Jas. ii. 15; of the food of the mind, i.e. the substance
of instruction, Heb. v. 12,14. (Tragg., Xen., Plat.,
sqq.; Sept. for Dn, Dk, jit), ete.) *
Tpddipos [on its accent cf. W.§ 6, 11.], -ov, 6, Trophi-
mus,an Ephesian Christian, a friend of the apostle Paul:
Acts xx.43; xxi. 29; 2 Tim. iv. 20.*
tpodds, -ov, 4, (Tpépw; see tpopy), a nurse: 1 Th. ii.
7. (From Hom. down ; for NPV» Gen. xxxv. 8)3/2)K.
Sak, AR MB odibes BE) Yad
rpodo-hopéw, -: 1 aor. érpopopdpynaa; (rpopdss and
hépw); to bear like a nurse or mother, i. e. to take the most
anxious and tender care of: twa, Acts xiii. 18 GL T Tr
mrg. [R. V. mrg. bear as a nursing-father] (Deut. i. 31
cod. Alex. etc.; 2 Mace. vii.27; Macar. hom. 46, 3 and
other eccles. writ.) ; see rpomrodopéw.*
Tpoxud, -as, 9, (rpoyds, q- v-), a track of a wheel, a rut;
a track, a path: tpoxidas ép0as moujcate Tots Tool vpav,
i. e. follow the path of rectitude, do right, Heb. xii. 13
after Prov. iv. 26 (where for ayn, Nah bk, HEA she ls
v. 6, 21; in some of the later poets equiv. to rpoyés)."
TpoxX és, -ov, 6, (Tpéxw), fr. Hom. down, a wheel: Jas. iil.
6 (on this pass. see yéveors 3; [cf. W. 54 (53)]).”
TpiPdov [so T (cf. Proleg. p. 102) WH; -Briov RG L
Tr] (on the accent see Passow s. v.; [Chandler § 350;
631
TPwWYO
Géttling p. 408]), -ov, rd, a dish, a deep dish [cf. B.D.
s.v. Dish]: Mt. xxvi.23; Mk. xiv. 20. (Arstph., Plut.,
Leian., Ael. v.h. 9, 37; Sept. for TWP, for which also
in Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 10; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 14.) *
Tpvyde,-; 1 aor. erpvynoa; (fr. rpvyy (lit. ‘dryness ’]
fruit gathered ripe in autumn, harvest); fr. Hom. down;
Sept. several times for WW3, TIN, YSPi to gather in ripe
Jruits; to gather the harvest or vintage: as in the Grk.
writ., with acc. of the fruit gathered, Lk. vi. 44; Rev.
xiv. 18; or of the plant from which it is gathered, Rev.
Bl vemiig a
Tpvyayv, -dvos, 7, (tr. rpv¢@ to murmur, sigh, coo, of
doves; cf. yoyyi¢w), a turile-dove: Lk. ii. 24. (Arstph.,
Theocr., al.; Ael. v.h. 1,15; Sept. for 77.) *
Tpupadd, -ds, 7, (i. q. Toda, Or Tpvpn, fr. Tpv@ to wear
away, perforate), a hole, [eye of a needle]: Mk. x. 25,
and R Gin Lk. xviii. 25. (Judg. xv. 11; Jer. xiii. 4;
xvi. 16; Sotad.in Plut. mor. p. 11 a. [i. e. de educ. puer.
§ 14]; Geop.) *
TpvmNLGA, -ros, TO, (rpuTdw to bore), a hole, [eye of a
needle]: Mt. xix. 24 [here WH txt. rpijpa,q.v-J. (Ar-
stph., Plut., Geop., al.) *
Tpidawva, -ns, 7, (reupda, q.v-), Tryphena, a Chris-
tian woman: Ro. xvi. 12. [B.D.s.v.; Bp. Lghtft. on
Phil. p. 175 sq.]*
tpupdm, -@: 1 aor. erpipyoca; (rpupy, q.v-); to live
delicateiy, live luxuriously, be given to a soft and luxuri-
ous life: Jas. v.5. (Neh. ix. 25; Is. lxvi. 11; Isoer.,
Eur., Xen., Plat., sqq.) [Comp.: év-rpuddo. Syn. cf.
Trench § liv.]*
tpvpy, -7s, 7, (fr. Apvrr@ to break down, enervate;
pass. and mid. to live softly and delicately), softness,
effeminacy, luxurious living: Lk. vii. 25; 2 Pet. ii. 13.
(Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plato, sqq.; Sept.) *
Tpvddca, -ns, 7, (tpupdw, q.v-), Tryphosa, a Chris-
tian woman: Ro. xvi. 12. [See reff. under Tpvdaiva. | *
Tpwds, and (so LT WH [see I,¢ and reff. in Pape,
Eigenuamen, s. v.}) Tp@ds, -ados, 7, [on the art. with it
see W.§5, b.], Troas, a city near the Hellespont, for-
merly called ’Avriydvera Tp., but by Lysimachus ’Ade§dv-
Speva 7 Tp. in honor of Alexander the Great ; it flourished
under the Romans [and with its environs was raised by
Augustus to a colonia juris italici, ‘the Troad’; cf.
Strab. 18,1, 26; Plin. 5, 33]: Acts xvi. 8,115; xx.5sq.;
(Oon ik, 12 Oi Mir, thy, 8, [Bs IDE avail’
TpwytdArtov (so Ptolem. 5, 2, 8), or Tpwyidtov [(better
~yiruov; see WH. App. p. 159)] (so Strab. 14, p. 636),
-ov, 70, Trogyllium, the name of a town and promontory
of Ionia, not far from the island Samos, at the foot of
Mt. Mycale, between Ephesus and the mouth of the
river Maeander: Acts xx.15 RG. [Cf. B.D.s. v.] *
Tpoyw; to gnaw, craunch, chew raw vegetables or fruits
(as nuts, almonds, ete.): dypworw, of mules, Hom. Od.
6, 90, and often in other writers of animals feeding;
also of men fr. Hdt. down (as cixa, Hdt. 1, 71; Borpus,
Arstph. eqq. 1077; blackberries, Barn. ep. 7, 8 [where
see Harnack, Cunningham, Miller]; xpopvov pera dei-
mvov, Xen. cony. 4, 8); univ. to eat: absol. (dv0 tpdyonen
TUYKAVO
adedpol, we mess together, Polyb. 32, 9, 9) joined with
mivew, Mt. xxiv. 38 (so also Dem. p. 402, 21; Plut. symp.
1,1, 2; Ev. Nicod. c. 15, p. 640 ed. Thilo [p. 251 ed.
Tdf.]) ; roy dprov, Jn. xiii. 18 (see pros 2 and €oOia b.);
figuratively, Jn. vi. 58; rv odpea, the ‘flesh’ of Christ
(see odp&, 1), Jn. vi. 54, 56 sq.*
rvyxdve; 2 aor. érvyov; pf. (Heb. viii. 6) rérevya [so
cod. BJ, and (so L T Tr mrg. WH cod. 8) rérvxa a later
and rarer form (which not a few incorrectly think is
everywhere to be regarded as a clerical error; B. 67
(59); Kiihner $343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.; Phryn. ed. Lob.
p.595; WH. App. p.171]), in some texts also rerdynxa
(a form com. in the earlier writ. [ Rutherford, New Phryn.
p. 483 sq., and reff. as above]); a verb in freq. use fr.
Hom. down; “est Lat. attingere et contingere; Germ.
treffen, c. accus. i. q. etwas erlangen, neut. es trifft sich.”
Ast, Lex. Platon. s. v.; hence 1. trans. a.
prop. to hit the mark (opp. to dwapravew to miss the
mark), of one discharging a javelin or arrow, (Hom.,
Xen., Leian.). b. trop. to reach, attain, obtain, get,
become master of: with a gen. of the thing (W. 200
(188)), Lk. xx. 835 [W. 609 (566)]; Acts xxiv. 2 (3);
Sean PE seayiy BS 2 Sore ti, WOR Isle. \aul, (oo sab
35. 2. intrans. to happen, chance, fall out: et rixor
(if it so fall out), it may be, perhaps, (freq. in prof. auth.),
1 Co. xiv. 10, where see Meyer; or, considered in ref.
to the topic in hand, it may be i. q. to specify, to take a
case, as, for example, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Vulg. in each pass.
ut puta; [cf. Meyer u. s.]); ruxov, adverbially, perhaps,
it may be, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (cf. B. §145, 8; [W. § 45,8 N. 1];
see exx. fr. Grk. writ. in Passow s. v. II. 2 b.; [L. and S.
s. v. B. III. 2; Soph. Lex. s.v.]). to meet one; hence 6
tuyav, he who meets one or presents himself unsought, any
chance, ordinary, common person, (see Passow s. v. IT. 2;
[L.and§.s.v. A. II.1b.; Soph. Lex. s.v.]): od ruyar, not
common, i. e. eminent, exceptional, [A. V. special], Acts
xix. 11; xxvill. 2, (8 Mace. iii. 7); to chance to be:
hpwOavn tTvyxavovra, half dead as he happened to be, just
as he was, Lk. x. 30 RG.
mapa-, ovy- Tuyxava. | *
Tupravite: (ripmavov) 1. to beat the drum or
timbrel. 2. to torture with the tympanum, an in-
strument of punishment: érupmavicOncav (Vulg. distenti
sunt), Heb. xi. 835 [R. V. were tortured (with marg. Or,
beaten to death) | (Plut. mor. p. 60 a.; joined with dvacko-
AoriferOa, Leian. Jup. trag. 19); the tympanum seems
to have been a wheel-shaped instrument of torture, over
which criminals were stretched as though they were
skins, and then horribly beaten with clubs or thongs
[ef. our ‘to break upon the wheel’; see Eng. Dicts. s. v.
Wheel]; cf. [Bleek on Heb. u. s.]; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi.
19 sq.*
tumukds, (fr. the adj. rumos, and this fr. rimos), adv.,
by way of example (prefiguratively) : radra tums ouvé-
Bawvor ekeivors, these things happened unto them as a
warning to posterity [R. V. by way of example], 1 Co. x.
11 LT Tr WH. (Eccles. writ.) *
rbm0s, -ov, 6, (rUrrw), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down;
[CompP.: év-, vmep-ev-, émt-,
632
Tuptos
1. the mark of a stroke or blow; print: rv frov, In. xx.
25%, 25° [where LT Trmrg. romoy], (Athen. 13 p. 585 c.
tovs TUmous Tov Anya idodaa). 2. a figure formed
by a blow or impression; hence univ. a figure, image: of
the images of the gods, Acts vii. 43 (Amos v. 26; Jo-
seph. antt. 1,19, 11; 15, 9,5). [Cf. kipuor rimos Geod,
Barn. ep. 19, 7; ‘ Teaching’ 4, 11.] 3. form: dda-
xis, i. e. the teaching which embodies the sum and sub-
stance of religion and represents it to the mind, Ro. vi.
17; i. q. manner of writing, the contents and form) of a
letter, Acts xxiii. 25 (3 Mace. iii. 30). 4. an ex-
ample ; a. in the technical sense, viz. the pattern in
conformity to which a thing must be made: Acts vil. 44;
Heb. viii. 5, (Ex. xxv. 40). B. in an ethical sense,
a dissuasive example, pattern of warning: plur. of ruin-
ous events which serve as admonitions or warnings to
others, 1 Co. x.6, 11 RG; an example to be imitated: of
men worthy of imitation, Phil. iii.17; with a gen. of the
pers. to whom the example is offered, 1 Tim. iv. 12; 1
Pet. v. 3: rémov éavrov didovar rivi, 2 Th. ill. 9; yever Oar
toumov [t0movs RL mrg. WH mrg.; cf. W. § 27, 1 note]
twi, 1 Th. i. 7; mapéxerOar éavrdy rimoy Kadav épyav, to
show one’s self an example of good works, Tit.ii.7. —.
in a doctrinal sense, a type i.e. a person or thing prefigur-
ing a future (Messianic) person or thing: in this sense
Adam is called rimos rod pédAovros sc. “Addy, i. e. of
Jesus Christ, each of the two having exercised a pre-emi-
nent influence upon the human race (the former destruc-
tive, the latter saving), Ro. v. 14.*
timtw; impf. érumrov; pres. pass. inf. rimrecOar; fr.
Hom. down; Sept. for NaN; to strike, smite, beat (with
a staff, a whip, the fist, the hand, ete.) : rid, Mt. xxiv.
49; Lk. xii. 45; Acts xvili.17; xxi. 32; xxiii.3; 75 ordpa
tuvds, Acts Xxiil. 2; 7d mpdcwndy tivos, Lk. xxii. 64 [here
Lbr. T Tr WH om. the el.]; riva éxi [Tdf. ets] thy ova-
yova, Lk. vi. 29; eis r. keadry twos, Mt. xxvii. 30; [rip
kepadny twos, Mk. xv. 19]; €avrav 7a o7HOn (Lat. plan-
gere pectora), of mourners, to smite their breasts, Lk.
xxill. 48; also r. els ro orpO0s, Lk. xviii. 13 [but G LT
Tr WH om. eis]. God is said rimrew to smite one on
whom he inflicts punitive evil, Acts xxiii. 3 (Ex. viii. 2;
2S. xxiv. 17; Ezek. vii. 9; 2 Mace. iii. 39). to smite
metaph. i.e. to wound, disquiet : rhv cuvetSnaly twos, one’s
conscience, 1 Co. viii. 12 (ia ti rinre ce f Kapdia cov;
18.1. 8; rov d€ dyos 6&0 Kata ppéva tie Babeiav, Hom.
Tl. 19, 125; KayBicea éruwe 9 ddnOnin rev Adyer, Hadt. 3,
64).*
Tupavvos, -ov, 6, Tyrannus, an Ephesian in whose
school Paul taught the gospel, but of whom we have no
further knowledge [cf. B. D.s. v.]: Acts xix. 9.*
tupBdtw: pres. pass. tupBdgouar; (ropBn, Lat. turba,
confusion ; [ef. Curtius § 250]); [fr. Soph. down]; to
disturb, trouble: prop. rov mddv, Arstph. vesp. 257 ; trop.
in pass. to be troubled in mind, disquieted: mepi moddd,
Lk. x. 41 RG (with the same constr. in Arstph. pax
1007; px dyav tupBdgov, Nilus epist. 2, 258).*
Tptos, -ov, 6, 7, @ Tyrian, inhabitant of Tyre: Acts
xii. 20. (Hat. al.)]*
Tépos
Tupos, -ov, 7, (Hebr. 1j¥ or 7¥; fr. Aram. 330 a rock),
Tyre, a Phoenician city on the Mediterranean, very an-
cient, large, splendid, flourishing in commerce, and pow-
erful by land and sea. In the time of Christ and the
apostles it was subject to the Romans, but continued to
possess considerable wealth and prosperity down to
A.D. 1291. It is at present an obscure little place con-
taining some five thousand inhabitants, part Mohamme-
dans part Christians, with a few Jews (cf. Bideker’s
Palestine p. 425sq.; [Murray’s ditto p. 370 sq.]). It is
mentioned Acts xxi. 3, 7, and (in company with Sidon)
in Mt. xi. 21sq.; xv.21; Lk. vi. 17; x. 13sq.; Mk. iii. 8;
vii. 24 (where T om. Frmrg. WH br. kai 318Svos), 31.
[BB. DD.]*
Tuphds, -ov, 6, (ripw, to raise a smoke; hence prop.
‘darkened by smoke’), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 73,
blind ; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 27sq.; xi. 5; Mk. viii. 22
sq-; x. 46; Lk. vii. 21sq.; xiv.13,21; Jn. ix. 1 sq. 13;
x. 21, ete. b. as often in prof. auth. fr. Pind. down,
mentally dlind: Mt. xv. 14; xxiii. 17,19, 24, 26; Jn.
ix. 39-41; Ro. ii. 19; 2 Pet. i. 9; Rev. iii. 17.
tuphde, -: 1 aor. ervpdwaa; pf. reriproxa; fr. [Pind.
and] Hdt. down; to blind, make blind; in the N. T.
metaph. to blunt the mental discernment, darken the mind:
[‘r, v: on the use and the omission of the mark of diaeresis
with, see Tdf. Proleg. p.108; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.
136 sqq.; ef. Scrivener, Collation of Cod. Sin. ete. 2d ed. p.
Xxxviil. |
saktvOvos, -7, -ov, (vaxwOos), of hyacinth, of the color
of hyacinth, i.e. of a red color bordering on black
(Hesych. vaxivOwov: tropedavigov): Rev. ix. 17 (Hom.,
Theocr., Leian., al.; Sept.).*
tédx«uvos, -ov, 6, hyacinth, the name of a flower (Hom.
and other poets; Theophr.), also of a precious stone of
the same color, i. e. dark-blue verging towards black
[A. V. jacinth (so R. V. with mre. sapphire); ef. B. D.
s.v. Jacinth; Riehm s. v. Edelsteine 9] (Philo, Joseph.,
Galen, Heliod., al.; Plin. h. n.37, 9, 41): Rev. xxi. 20.*
ddALvos, -n, -ov, (Vados, q. V.), ina fragment of Corinna
and occasionally in the Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. down, of
glass or transparent like glass, glassy: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2.*
Paros, -ov, 6, [prob. allied w. det, veros (q.v-); hence
‘rain-drop’, Curtius § 604; Vaniéek p. 1046; but al.
make it of Egypt. origin (cf. L. and S.s. v.)], fr. Hdt. |
([8. 24] who writes vedos ; [cf. W. 22]) down; 1.
any stone transparent like glass. 2. glass: Rev. xxi.
rey lat
6383
UBpiaTns
Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn. ii. 113 rd vonpata, 2 Co. iv. 4, (ray
Wuxi tupr@beinv, Plat. Phaedo p. 99 e.).*
Tupdw, -@: Pass., pf. reripopar; 1 aor. ptep. rupadeis ;
(7vgos, smoke; pride); prop. to raise a smoke, to wrap
m a mist; used only metaph. 1. to make proud,
puff up with pride, render insolent; pass. to be puffed
up with haughtiness or pride, 1 Tim. iii. 6 (Strab., Jo-
seph., Diog. Laért., al.). 2. to blind with pride or
conceit, to render foolish or stupid: 1 Tim. vi. 4; pf.
ptep. beclouded, besotted, 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Dem., Aristot.,
Polyb., Plut., al.).*
tUudw: (topos, smoke); fr. Hdt. down; to cause or
emit smoke (Plaut. fumifico), raise a smoke; pass. (pres.
ptcp. tupdopevos) to smoke (Vule. fumigo): Mt. xii. 20.*
Tupevicds, -7, -ov, (rupayv [cf. Chandler ed. 1 § 659],
a whirlwind, hurricane, typhoon), like a whirlwind,
tempestuous : dvepos, Acts xxvii. 14.*
Toxukos [so WH; W. §6,11.] but RGLT Tr Toy-
kos (Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 30; [Zdf Proleg. p. 103;
Chandler § 266]), -ov, 6, Tychicus, an Asiatic Christian,
friend and companion of the apostle Paul: Acts xx. 4;
Eph. vi. 21; Col. iv. 7; 2 Tim.iv.12; Tit. iii.12. [See
Bp: Ughtit: on Col. lc.; B: D. s: v.\\*
TUXGV, See TUYXaVa, 2.
¥ :
bPpl{o; 1 aor. vBpuca; Pass., 1 aor. ptep. vBprcGeis ;
1 fut. tBpicOjoopa ; (vBpis); fr. Hom. down; at
intrans. io be insolent; to behave insolently, wantonly,
outrageously. 2. trans. to act insolently and shame-
fully towards one (so even Hom.), to treat shamefully,
[ef. W. § 32, 1b. 6.]: Mt. xxii. 6; Lk. xviii. 32; Acts
xiv. 5; [1 Th. ii. 2]; of one who injures another by
speaking evil of him, Lk. xi. 45. [Comp.: év-vBpigo.]*
BBprs, -eos, , (fr. dwép [(see Curtius p. 540); cf. Lat.
superbus, Eng. ‘uppishness ’]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
INI, TNA, [IT ete. ; a. ifsolence ; impudence, pride,
haughtiness. b. a wrong springing from insolence,
an injury, affront, insult [in Grk. usage the mental in-
jury and the wantonness of its infliction being prom-
inent; cf. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 12, 26; 2, 2,5; see
bBpiorhs]: prop., plur. 2 Co. xii. 10 (Hesych. UBpets*
rpatpara, dveidn); trop. injury inflicted by the violence of
a tempest: Acts xxvii. 10, 21, (nv amd Tov buBpev vUBpiy,
Joseph. antt. 3, 6,4; detoaca Gararrns tBpw, Anthol. 7,
291, 3; [cf. Pind. Pyth. 1, 140]).*
SBpoths, -o0, 6, (JBpi¢w), fr. Hom. down, an insolent
man, ‘one who, uplifted with pride, either heaps insulting
language upon others or does them some shameful act of
vytaivw
wrong’ (Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 86; [ef. Trench, Syn.
§ xxix.; Schmidt ch. 177; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, 5
(see vBpis)]): Ro. i. 30; 1 Tim. i. 13.*
dyatvo; (vyins); fr. Hdt. down; to be sound, to be
well, to be in good health: prop., Lk. v. 31; vii. 10; xv.
27; [3 Jn. 2]; metaph. the phrase tyaivew ev rp miorer
[B. § 133, 19 ]is used of one whose Christian opinions are
free from any admixture of error, Tit. 1.133; 79 wiores,
Th dydrn, Th iropovy, (cf. B. u. s.], of one who keeps these
graces sound and strong, Tit. ii. 2; 9 tbyratvovoa d.da-
oxadia, the sound i.e. true and incorrupt doctrine, 1
Tim. i. 10; 2 Tim. iv. 3; Tit.i.9; ii. 1; also Adyou tytai-
vovres (Philo de Abrah. § 38), 1 Tim. vi.3; 2 Tim. i. 13,
(iytaivovoa mepi Oedv SoEar Kai adnOeis, Plut. de aud.
poet. c. 4).™
dyihs, -€s, ace. vye (four times in the N. T., Jn. v. 11,
15; vii. 23; Tit. ii. 8; for which bya is more com. in
Attic [cf. Meisterhans p. 66]), fr. Hom. down, sound :
prop. [A. V. whole], of a man who is sound in body, Mt.
xv. 81 [WH only in mrg., but Tr br. in mrg.]; Acts iv.
10; yivoua, Jn. v.4 [RL], 6, 9,145 movety twa dyeq
(Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.), to make one whole i.e. restore
him to health, Jn. v.11,15; vii. 23; dyes amd ete. sound
and thus free from etc. (see amd, I. 3 d.), Mk. v. 34; of
the members of the body, Mt. xii. 13; Mk. iii. 5 Rec.;
Lk. vi. 10 Rec.; metaph. Adyos vy. [A. V. sound speech]
i. e. teaching which does not deviate from the truth (see
vytaivw), Tit. ii. 8 (in the Grk. writ., often equiv. to whole-
some, fit, wise: pdOos, Il. 8, 524; Adyos ov« bys, Hat. 1,
8; see other exx. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S.s. v. IL.
2 and 3]).*
dypds, -d, -dv, (Vo to moisten; [but al. fr. a different
r. meaning ‘to moisten’, fr. which also Lat. umor,
umidus; cf. Vanitek p. 867; Curtius § 158]), fr. Hom.
down, damp, moist, wet; opp. to Enpés (q. v.), full of sap,
green: Evdov, Lk. xxiii. 31 (for 207 sappy, in Job viii.
16).*
Upla, -as, 7, (Vdep), a vessel for holding water; a water-
jar, water-pot: Jn. ii. 6 sq.; iv. 28. (Arstph., Athen., al.;
Sept. for 13. (Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 23.]) *
UWpoToréw, -; (dpomrdrns); to drink water, [be a
drinker of water; W. 498 (464)]: 1 Tim. v. 23. (Hat.
1, 71; Xen., Plat., Leian., Athen., al.; Ael. v. h. 2, 38.)*
Upwmds, -7, -dv, (Vdpwy, the dropsy, i. e. internal
water), dropsical, suffering from dropsy: Lk. xiv. 2.
(Hipper., [Aristot.], Polyb. 13, 2, 2; [al.].) *
U8wp, (Vo [but cf. Curtius § 300]), gen. Bdaros, 74, fr.
Hom. down, Hebr. 0°, water: of the water in rivers,
Mt. iii.16; Rev. xvi. 12; in wells, Jn. iv. 7; in fountains,
Jas. iii. 12; Rev. viii. 10; xvi.4; in pools, Jn. v. 3 sq.
[RL], 7; of the water of the deluge, 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet.
iii. 6 [W. 604 sq. (562)]; of water in any of earth’s re-
positories, Rev. viii. 10 sq.; xi. 63 6 dyyedos trav bSdror,
Rev. xvi. 5; of water as a primary element, out of and
through which the world that was before the deluge
arose and was compacted, 2 Pet. iii. 5. plur. ra vdara,
of the waves of the Lake of Galilee, Mt. xiv. 28 sq.; (so
also the sing. rd ddwp in Lk. viii. 25); of the waves of
634
er
Vlog
the sea, Rev. i. 15; xiv. 2, (on both these pass. see dovi,
1); moda USara, many springs or fountains, Jn. ili. 23 ;
fig. used of many peoples, Rev. xvii. 1, as the seer him-
self explains it in vs. 15, cf. Nah. ii. 8; of a quantity of
water likened to a river, Rev. xii. 15; of a definite quan-
tity of water drawn for drinking, Jn. ii. 7; mornpiov vda-
tos, Mk. ix. 41; for washing, Mt. xxvii. 24; Lk. vii. 44;
Jn. xiii. 5; Heb. x. 22 (23); 1d Aovrpdy rod vdaros, of
baptism, Eph. v. 26 [cf. W. 138 (130)]; Kepdysov vdaros,
Mk. xiv. 18; Lk. xxii. 10. in opp. to other things,
whether elements or liquids: opp. to 76 mvevdparte kK. trupi
[cf. B. § 133,19; W. 217 (204), 412 (384)], Mt. iii. 11;
Lk. iii. 16; to mvevpare alone, Jn. i. 26, 31, 33; Actsi. 5,
(in all these pass. the water of baptism is intended); to
TQ Trupl alone, Mt. xvii. 15; Mk. ix. 22; toro ove, Jn. ii.
9; iv.46; to r@ aipars, Jn. xix. 34; Heb. ix. 19; 1 Jn.
vy. 6,8. Allegorically, that which refreshes and keeps
alive the soul is likened to water, viz. the Spirit and truth
of God, Jn. iv. 14 sq. (ddwp codias, Sir. xv. 3); on the
expressions vdap (av, 7d Vdap tT. Cans, (vat myyal bOa-
tov, see Caw, I. a. and (a7, 2 b. p. 274°.
terés, -00, 6, (Vo to rain), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
Dv and 1D, rain: Acts xiv. 17; xxviii. 2; Heb. vi. 7;
Jas. v. 7 (where L T Tr WH om. éerdv; on this pass. see
dyipos and mpwipos); ibid. 18; Rev. xi. 6.*
vioerta, -as, 7, (fr. vids and 6éors, cf. dpobecia, vopo-
Geoia; in prof. auth. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down we find
Gerds vids or berds mais, an adopted son), adoption, adop-
tion as sons (Vulg. adoptio filiorum): [Diod. 1. 31 § 27,5
(vol. x. 31,13 Dind.)]; Diog. Laért. 4,53; Inserr. In
the N. T. it is used to denote a. that relationship
which God was pleased to establish between himself and
the Israelites in preference to all other nations (see vids
tov Oeov, 4 init.): Ro. ix. 4. b. the nature and
condition of the true disciples of Christ, who by receiv-
ing the Spirit of God into their souls become the sons
of God (see vids tod Oeov, 4): Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 55
Eph. i. 5; it also includes the blessed state looked for
in the future life after the visible return of Christ from
heaven; hence dmexd¢xeaOar viobeciav, to wait for adop-
tion, i. e. the consummate condition of the sons of God,
which will render it evident that they are the sons of
God, Ro. viii. 23, cf. 19.*
vids, -od, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for jz and Chald. 43,
a son (male offspring) ; 1. prop. _a. rarely of
the young of animals: Mt. xxi. 5 (Ps. xxviii. (xxix.) 1;
Sir. xxxviii. 25); generally of the offspring of men, and
in the restricted sense, male issue (one begotten by a father
and born of a mother): Mt.x.37; Lk.i.13; [xiv.5 LT
Tr WH]; Acts vii. 29; Gal. iv. 22, ete.; 6 vids tevos, Mt.
vii. 9; Mk. ix. 17; Lk. iti. 2; Jn. i. 42 (43), and very
often. as in Grk. writ., vids is often to be supplied by
the reader [ W. § 30, 3 p. 593 (551)]: as rév rod ZeReSaiov,
Mt. iv. 21; Mk.i.19. plur. viol twos, Mt. xx. 20 sq.;
Lk. v.10; Jn. iv. 12; Acts ii.17; Heb. xi. 21, ete. with
the addition of an adj., as rpwrdroxos, Mt. i. 25,[R G];
Lk. ii. 7; povoyevns, Lk. vii. 12. of vioi, genuine sons,
are distinguished fr. oi vé6ou in Heb. xii. 8. i. q. réxvow
er
vlog
with dponv added, a man child [B. 80 (70)], Rev. xii. 5;
of one (actually or to be) regarded as a son, although
properly not one, Jn. xix. 26; Acts vii. 21; Heb. xi. 24;
in kindly address, Heb. xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11 (see réxvov,
a. B.). b. in a wider sense (like Ovydtnp, réxvov), a
descendant, one of the posterity of any one: twds, Mt. i.
20; 6 vids Aavid, of the Messiah, Mt. xxii. 42,45; Mk.
xii. 35, 37; Lk. xx. 41, 44; of Jesus the Messiah, Mt. ix.
27; xii. 23; xv. 22; xx. 30 sq.; xxi. 9,15; Mk. x. 47 Sq. 5
Lk. xviii. 38 sq. plur. vfot rwos, Mt. xxiii. 31; Heb. vii.
55; viot “Iopana, Israelites [the children of Israel], Mt.
SXvVil. 93) Actsixedd > x. 865 2 Co. ii 7, 13; Heb. xi.
21 sq.; Rev. ii. 14; vii. 4; xxi. 12, (see "Iopand); viol
*ABpaap, sons of Abraham, is trop. applied to those who
by their faith in Christ are akin to Abraham, Gal. iii.
7. 2. trop. and ace. to the Hebr. mode of speech
[W. 33 (32)], vids with the gen. of a person is used
of one who depends on another or is his follower: of viol
of teachers, i. q. pupils (see réxvov, b. 8. [cf. Iren. haer.
4, 41, 2 qui enim ab aliquo edoctus est, verbo filius do-
centis dicitur, et ille eius pater]), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi.
19; Tov rovnpod, who in thought and action are prompted
by the evil one and obey him, Mt. xiii. 38; vids d.aBdrov,
Acts xiii. 10; with the gen. of a thing, one who is
connected with or belongs to a thing by any kind of
close relationship [W. § 34, 3 N.2; B. § 182, 10]: viol
Tov vunpavos (see vupdov), Mt. ix.15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk.
vy. 34, (ts dxpas, the garrison of the citadel, 1 Mace. iv.
2; in Ossian ‘a son of the hill’ i. e. ‘a hunter’, ‘a son of
the sea’ i.e. ‘a sailor’; cf. Jen. Lit. Zeit. for 1836 No.
58 p. 462 sq.) ; Tov ai@vos Tovrov, those whose character
belongs to this age [is ‘ worldly ’], Lk. xvi. 8; xx. 34;
ths ameeias, i. e. aneeis, Eph. ii. 2; v. 6; Col. iii. 6
[here T Tr WH om. L br. the cl.], (dvopias, Ps. 1xxxviii.
(Ixxxix.) 23; ris taepnpavias, 1 Mace. ii. 47); Bpovris,
who resemble thunder, thundering, (see Boavepyes), Mk.
iii. 17; rod dards, instructed in evangelical truth and
devotedly obedient to it, Lk. xvi. 8; Jn. xii. 36; with
kal ths Hpépas added, 1 Th. v. 5; ths avacrdcews, sharers
in the resurrection, Lk. xx. 36; mapaxd\noews, Acts iv.
36; one to whom any thing belongs: as viol roy mpody-
rav x. tS SiaOjKns, those to whom the prophetic and
covenant promises belong, Acts iii. 25; for whom a thing
is destined, as viot tis Bactdelas, Mt. viii. 12; xiii. 38 ;
ris dmrodelas, Jn. xvii. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3; one who is worthy
of a thing, as yeévvns, Mt. xxiii. 15; elphyns, Lk..x. 6,
(Oavdrov, 1 8. xx. 31; 28. xii. 5; N30 43, Sept. d&tos
mrnyav, Deut. xxv. 2). [SYN. see réxvov. ]
vids tov dvOpadmov, Sept. for DIS 73, Chald. wax 3,
son of man; it is 1. prop. a periphrasis for ‘man’,
esp. com. in the poet. bks. of the O. T., and usually car-
rying with it a suggestion of weakness and mortality :
Num. xxiii. 19; Job xvi. 21; xxv. 6; Ps. viii. 5; Is. li.
12; Sir. xvii. 30 (25), etc.; often in Ezekiel, where God
addresses the prophet by this name, as ii. 1, 3; ili. 1 (ii.
10), ete.; plur. DIN 123 (because DTN wants the plur.),
vioi rav dvOpdrev, Gen. xi. 5; 1S. xxvi. 19; Ps. x. (xi-)
4: Prov. viii. 31, ete. Sointhe N. T.: Mk. iii. 28; Eph.
685
uo
ulos
ii. 5, (Sap. ix. 6); sing. guowos vie a-dp. [like unto a son
of man], of Christ in the apocalyptic vision, Rev. i. 13
[here vidv TWH txt.]; xiv. 14 [vidv T WH], (after Dan.
vii. 13). 2. In Dan. vii. 13 sq., cf. 18, 22, 27, the
appellation son of man (W}8 73) symbolically denotes
the fifth kingdom, universal and Messianic; and by
this term its humanity is indicated in contrast with the
barbarity and ferocity of the four preceding kingdoms
(the Babylonian, the Median, the Persian, the Macedo-
nian) typified under the form of beasts (vs. 2 sqq.).
But in the book of Enoch (written towards the close of
the 2d cent. before Christ [but cf. B.D. (esp. Am. ed.) ;
Lipsius in Dict. of Chris. Biog. s. v.; Dilimann in Her-
zog (ed. 2, vol. xii. p. 850 sq.) ; Schodde, Book of Enoch,
p- 20 sqq-]) the name ‘son of man’ is employed to desig-
nate the person of the Messiah: 46, 2sq.; 48, 2; 62, 7.
9.14; 63,11; 69, 26 sq.; 70,1; 71,17. (The chapters
in which the name occurs are the work, if not of the
first author of the book (as Ewald and Dillmann think
[but see B. D. Am. ed. p. 740°; and Herzog as above p.
351]), at least of a Jewish writer (cf. Schtirer, Neutest.
Zeitgesch. § 32 V. 2 p. 626), certainly not (as Hilgen-
feld, Volkmar, Keim, and others imagine) of a Chris-
tian interpolator.) In the language of the Jews in Jn.
xii. 34 the titles Xpuords and vids Tod dvOpdmov are used
as synonyms. 3. The title 6 vids rot dvOpadrov, the
Son of Man, is used by Jesus of himself (speaking in
the third person) in Mt. viii. 20; ix. 6; x. 23; xi. 19;
xii. 8, 32,40; xiii. 37,41; xvi. 13, 27sq.; xvii. 9, 12, 22;
LaQmlubaliLINXC.8 Sane; MOP oe ley WG Song, M7, SOs OM BY).
44; xxiv. 30 (twice); xxv. 13 Rec., 31; xxvi. 2, 24, 45,
G4 Mk MaelOs 28 cevilieed le Soch Ix. Jolousl a xese. 45.
Salis AGS. Sali, A I ION OVES Vial is, PRIS Ainbl, CHES ihe
22, 26, 44, 56 Rec., 58; xi. 30; xii. 8, 10, 40; xvii. 22,
YL, MOPS Soni GUS sie WOE 60k Wh BOS Seehl) LY.
AS, 69 xxive? >) Jn. 1.51 (52)5 ii. 13 sq-5) vie 2 7.035.623
Vili. 28; xii. 23, 843 xiii. 31, (once without the article,
Jn. v. 27), doubtless in order that (by recalling Dan. vii.
13 sq.— not, as some suppose, Ps. viii. 5) he might thus
intimate his Messiahship (as is plain from such pass. as
dWeobe tT. vi. T. avOp....€pxdpevov emi trav vehe-
Adv rod ovpavod, Mt. xxvi. 64; Mk. xiv. 62, cf. Dan.
vii. 13; rov vi. 7. dvOp. epxdpevov ev rT Bactdeia avrod,
Mt. xvi. 28; drav xadion 6 vi. r. avOp. él Opdvov SdéEns
avrod, Mt. xix. 28); and also (as appears to be the
case at least fr. Mk. ii. 28, where 6 vids Tod dvOparov
stands in emphatic antithesis to the repeated 6 avOparos
preceding), that he might designate himself as the head
of the human race, the man kar eéoxynv, the one who
both furnished the pattern of the perfect man and acted
on behalf of all mankind. Christ seems to have pre-
ferred this to the other Messianic titles, because by its
lowliness it was least suited to foster the expectation of
an earthly Messiah in royal splendor. There are no
traces of the application of the name to Jesus in the
apostolic age except in the speech of Stephen, Acts vii.
56, and that of James, the brother of Jesus, in a frag:
ment from Hegesippus given in Eus. h. e. 2, 23 (25), 13,
vids 636
each being a reminiscence of the words of Jesus in Mt.
xxvi.64,(to which may be added, fr. the apostolic fathers,
Ignat. ad Ephes. 20, 2 év Ingod Xpior@ rO Kata odpxa ek
yévous Aavid, TH vid avOparov kai vig Oeov). This dis-
use was owing no doubt to the fact that the term did not
seem to be quite congruous with the divine nature and
celestial majesty of Christ; hence in Barn. ep. 12, 10 we
read, "Incots odx vids dvOparov (i. e. like Joshua), aN
vids rod Geos (cf. Harnack’s note on the pass.]. On this
title, see esp. Holtzmann in Hilgenfeld’s Zeitschr. fir
wissenschaftl. Theol., 1865, p. 212 sqq.; Keim ii. p. 65
sqq. [(Eng. trans. vol. iii. p. 79 sqq.) 3 Lmmer, Theol. d.
N. T. p. 105 sqq.; Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 33 sq. ; and
other reff. in Meyer on Mt. viii. 20; B. D. Am. ed. s. v.
Son of Man ].*
vids tod Oeod, son of God; 1. ina physical
sense, in various applications: originating by direct
creation, not begotten by man,—as the first man
Adam, Lk. iii. 38; Jesus, begotten of the Holy Ghost
without the intervention of a human father, Lk. i. 35;
in a heathen sense, as uttered by the Roman centurion
of Jesus, a ‘demigod’ or ‘hero’, Mt. xxvii. 54; Mk. xv.
39. 2.ina metaphysica! sense, in various ap-
plications: plur., of men, who although the issue of hu-
man parents yet could not come into being without the
volition of God, the primary author of all things, Heb.
ii. 10, ef. vss. 11,133; of men as partaking of immortal life
after the resurrection, and thus becoming more closely
related to God, Lk. xx. 36; of angels, as beings superior
to men, and more closely akin to God, Deut. xxxii. 43 ;
for DON +33 in Sept. of Gen. vi. 2, 4; Ps. xxviii. (xxix.)
1; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 7 (a phrase which in Job i. 6; ii.
1; xxxviii. 7 is translated a@yyedou Geov) ; in the highest
sense Jesus Christ is called 6 vids rod Geod as of a nature
superhuman and closest to God: Ro. i. 4; viii. 3; Gal.
iv. 4; and esp. in the Ep. to the Heb., i. 2 (1), 5, 83 iii. 6;
iv. 14; v.5,8; vi. 6; vii.3, 28; x.29. [Cf. B.D.s.v.Son
of God, and reff. in Am. ed. | 3. ina theocratic
sense: of kings and magistrates, as vicegerents of God
the supreme ruler, 2 S. vii. 14; Ps. ii. 7; viol iWicrov,
Ps. Ixxxi. (Ixxxii.) 6; mpardroxos (se. rod Ged), of the
king of Israel, Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 28. In accordance
with Ps. ii. 7 and 2 S. vii. 14, the Jews called the Mes-
siah 6 vids rod Geod pre-eminently, as the supreme repre-
sentative of God, and equipped for his office with the
fulness of the Holy Spirit, i.e. endued with divine
power beyond any of the sons of men, Enoch 105, 2. In
the N. T. it is used of Jesus —in the utterances of the
devil, Mt. iv. 3,6; Lk. iv. 3,9; in passages where Jesus
is addressed by this title by others, Mt. viii. 29; xiv. 33;
xxvii. 40, 43; Mk. iii. 11; v. 7; Lk. iv. 41; viii. 28;
xxil. 70; Jn. xix. 7; Acts viii. 37 Rec.; ix. 20; xiii. 33;
vios Tod tWiorov, Lk. i. 32; in the language of Jesus
concerning himself, Mt. xxviii. 19; Jn. ix.35; x. 36, ef.
Mt. xxi. 37 sq.; Mk. xii. 6; besides, in Rev.ii.18; 6 vl.
t. 0., (6) Baorreds rot "Iopanr, Jn.i.49 (50); 6 Xpioros 6
vi. tr. 6., Mt. xxvi. 63; Jn. xi. 27; "Incots Xpuoros vi. Tr.
[L Tr WH marg. om. rod] 6. Mk. i. 1 [here T WH txt. om.
‘'T wévacos
(see WH. App. p. 23)]; 6 Xpuorés 6 vids rod eddoyyrod,
Mk. xiv. 61; with the added ethical idea of one who
enjoys intimate intercourse with God: 6 Xpiords 6 vi. tr.
Geod Cévros, Mt. xvi. 16, and Ree. in Jn. vi. 69. in the
solemn utterances of God concerning Jesus: 6 vids pov
6 ayarntos, Mt. iii. 17; xvii. 5 ; Mk. i. 11 REM 2 Lk. m1.
22; ix, 35.[R G Lo txt.]3) 2-Bet-1.17, cf; Mitre to: 4,
in an ethical sense with very various reference; those
whom God esteems as sons, whom he loves, protects and
benefits above others: so of the Jews, Deut. xiv. 1; Sap.
xii. 19 sqq.; Xviii. 4; viol kal Ovyarépes tov Geod, Is. xliii.
6; Sap. ix. 7; mpwrdroxos rod Oeod, Ex. iv. 22; in the
N. T. of Christians, Ro. ix. 26; Rev. xxi. 7; those whose
character God, as a loving father, shapes by chastisement,
Heb. xii. 5-8; those who revere God as their father, the
pious worshippers of God, Sap. ii. 13 [here ats xupiov],
18; those who in character and life resemble God (Six. iv.
10 vioi tWiorov; [ef. Epict. dissert. 1, 9, 6]): Mt. v. 9,
45; viol vw igrov, Lk. vi. 353; viol x. Ovyarépes, spoken of
Christians, 2 Co. vi. 18; those who are governed by the
Spirit of God, Ro. viii. 14 (6c0u rvevpare Ged Gyovrat, obrot
viol eict rod Oeod), repose the same calm and joyful trust
in God which children do in their parents, Ro. viii. 14
sqq-; Gal. iii. 26; iv. 6 sq., and hereafter in the blessed-
ness and glory of the life eternal will openly wear this dig-
nity of sons of God, Ro. viii. 19 (droxaduyis Tov vidv Tod
deod), cf. 1 Jn. iii. 2, (see réxvov, b. y. [and reff.]). pre-
eminently of Jesus, as enjoying the supreme love of God,
united to him in affectionate intimacy, privy to his saving
counsels, obedient to the Father’s will in all his acts: Mt.
xi. 27; Lk. x. 22; Jn. iii. 35 sq.; v.19 sq. In many
passages of the writings of John and of Paul, this ethi-
cal sense so blends with the metaphysical and the theo-
cratic, that it is often very difficult to decide which of
these elements is predominant in a particular case: Jn.
i. 345 1.17; v. 21-23, 25 sq.; vi. 403; vill. 35sq.; xi. 4;
Rive 133 evans) Wl Ine 1/3, dass i OP ae Seer ehy a Os
14 sq.; v. 5, 9-13, 20; 2 Jn. 3,9; Ro.i. 3, 9; -v. 10; viii.
3,299 32e eI Conis Us bx. 28h Oi Cont OenGaleneeltomits
20; Eph. iv. 13; 1 Th.i. 10; 6 vids tas adydmns adrot
(i. e. God’s), Col. 1.13; 6 Xpioros 6 vi. r. 6. Jn. xx. 313 6
povoyerns vi., Jn. i. 18 [here Tr WH povoy. 66s, L mrg.
6 p. @. (see povoy. and reff.)]; iil. 18; 6 vi. r. 6. 6 povoy.,
ili. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 9, (see povoyeyns). It can hardly be
doubted that a reverent regard for the transcendent
difference which separates Christ from all those who by
his grace are exalted to the dignity of sons of God led
John always to call Christians réxva rod Oeod, not as
Paul does vioi and réxva tod God indiscriminately ; the
like reverence moved Luther to translate the plur. viot
tr. 0. everywhere by Kinder Gottes ; [ef., however, réxvov,
b. y. and reff.]. This appellation is not found in 2
Th., Phil., Philem., the Pastoral Epp., nor in 1 Pet. or in
the Ep. of James.*
tAn, -ns, 7, a forest, a wood; felled wood, fuel: Jas. iii.
5. (From Hom. down; Sept.) *
Jpets, see ov.
“Ypévoros [on its accent cf. W. § 6,113; Chandler
De Epos
§ 283], -ov, 6, (Ypijy, -évos, 6, the god of marriage), Hy-
meneus, @ heretic, one of the opponents of the apostle
Paul: 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim. ii.17. [B.D. s. v.]*
Bp€rEpos, -a, -ov, (iets), possess. pron. of the 2d pers.
plur., your, yours ; a. possessed by you: with sub-
_ stantives, Jn. viii.17; 2Co. viii. 8 [Rec.°” fyer.]; Gal.
vi. 13; neut. rd dp. substantively, opp. to rs GAd6rpvop,
Lk. xvi. 12 [((WH txt. 7d jyér.) ; ef. W.§ 61, 3.a.]. b. al-
lotted to you: ip. cwrnpia, Acts xxvii. 34; 7d ip. Zreos,
Ro. ~i. 215 6 xaipos 6 iuér., the time appointed, oppor-
cune, for you, Jn. vii. 6; as a predicate, Suerépa early F
Bacwrela tod Geod, Lk. vi. 20. c. proceeding from you:
tov iper. sc. Adyor, Jn. xv. 20; [1 Co. xvi. 17 LT Tr WH
txt. ]. d. objectively (see euéds, c. B.; [W. § 22, 7; B.
§ 132, 3]): dperépa (Rec. quer.) xadynows, glorying in
you, 1 Co. xv. 31. [On the use of the word in the N. T.
cf. B. § 127, 21.]*
tpvéw, -@: impf. duvovy; fut. durvyow; 1 aor. ptep.
bpynoas; (Uyvos); fr. Hes. down; Sept. often for obi,
ny, Vw, Wat; 1. trans. to sing the praise of,
sing hymns to: twd, Acts xvi. 25; Heb. ii. 12. 2.
intrans. to sing a hymn, to sing: Mt. xxvi. 30; Mk. xiv.
26, (in both pass. of the singing of the paschal hymns;
these were Pss. exiii.-cxviii. and Ps. exxxvi., which the
Jews call the ‘great Hallel’, [but see Ginsburg in Kitto
s. v. Hallel; Edersheim, The Temple ete. p. 191 sq.;
Buxtorf (ed. Fischer) p. 314 sq.]); Ps. xiv. (Ixv.) 13
(14); 1 Mace. xiii. 47.*
dpvos, -ov, 6, in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a@ song in
praise of gods, heroes, conquerors, [cf. Trench as below,
p- 297], but in the Scriptures of God; a sacred song,
hymn: plur., Eph. v.19; Col. iii. 16. (1 Mace. iv. 33;
2 Mace. i. 30; x. 7; [Jud. xvi. 13], ete.; of the Psalms
of David, Joseph. antt. 7, 12, 3; for nbna, Ps. xxxix. (xl.)
4; Ixiv. (Ixv.) 2; for Vv, Is. xlii. 10.) *
({Sxn. Buvos, paapuds, GSH: B54 is the generic term ;
WaAp. and Suv. are specific, the former designating a song
which took its general character from the O. T. ‘ Psalms’? (al-
though not restricted tothem, see 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26), the latter
a song of praise. “While the leading idea of padu. is a
musical accompaniment, and that of Suv. praise to God,
#54 is the general word for a song, whether accompanied or
unaccompanied, whether of praise or on any other subject.
Thus it was quite possible for the same song to be at once
Waruds, Suvos and gdh” (Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 16). ) The
words occur together in Col. iii. 16 and Eph. v. 19. See
Trench, Syn. § Ixxviii.]
in-dyo; impf. dm7jyov; 1. trans. to lead under,
bring under, (Lat. subducere) ; so in various applications
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; once in the Scriptures,
imnyaye KUptos THY Oadaacar, for yin, he caused to re-
cede, drove back, the sea, Ex. xiv. 21. 2. in the
N. T. always intrans. (less freq. so in prof. auth. fr. Hat.
down), (Lat. se subducere) to withdraw one’s self, to go
away, depart, [cf. &yw, 4; and see B. 204 (177)]: absol.,
Mk. vi. 33; Lk. viii. 42 (where L Tr mrg. mopeveaOat) ;
xvii. 14; Jn. viii. 21; xiv. 5, 28, (Tob. xii. 5); of epyd-
pevor kal of tmdyortes, coming and going, Mk. vi. 315
imdyet x. modet, Mt. xiii. 44; tarjyov k. émlotevoy, Jn. Xii.
637
e ,
UTaKOH
11; [ta brdynte x. xapmdv épyre, In. xv. 16]; ddinui
Twa umdyewv, to permit one to depart freely wherever he
wishes, Jn. xi. 44; xviii.8; dmaye is used by one in
dismissing another: Mt. [iv. 10 RT Tr WH]; viii. 13;
xx. 14; Mk. fii. 9 Tdf.]; vii. 29; x.52; with eis elpnygr
added, Mk. v. 84; tadyere év elpnvn, Jas. ii. 16; or in
sending one somewhere to do something, Lk. x. 3; plur.
Mt. viii. 32; with oriental circumstantiality (see dvi-
ornut, II. 1 ©.) draye is prefixed to the imperatives of
other verbs: Mt. v. 24; viii. 4; [xviii. 15 GLT Tr WH);
X1x. 21; xxi. 28; xxvii. 65; xxviii. 10; Mk.i.44; x. 21;
xvi. 7; Jn. iv. 16; ix.7; Rev. x.8; with «ai inserted,
Mt. xviii. 15 Ree. ; Mk. vi. 38 [T Tr WH om. Tr br. kat];
Rev. xvi. 1. Particularly, dmdyo is used to denote the
final departure of one who ceases to be another’s com-
panion or attendant, Jn. vi. 67; euphemistically, of one
who departs from life, Mt. xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. with
designations of place: mod (for mot [W. § 54, 7; B. 71
(62)]), Jn. xii. 85; xiv.5; xvi.5; 1Jn.ii.11; opp. to
epxeoOa, to come, Jn. iii. 8; viii. 14; dou (for dmoe [W.
and B. u.s.]), Jn. viii. 21 sq.; xiii. 338, 36; xiv. 4; Rev.
xiv. 45 éxei, Jn. xi. 8; mpds tov méuwavrd pe, mpds Tov
matepa, mpos Tov Gedy, to depart (from earth) to the father
(in heaven) is used by Jesus of himself, Jn. vii. 33; xiii.
3; xvi. 5,10, 16 [T Tr WH om. Lbr. the el.], 17; foll.
by eis with an acc. of the place, Mt. ix. 6; xx.4,7; Mk.
be HLS Sob Seis HBS Ils veh OR dns va Wl [fer 18% B38)
(248) ]; vii. 3; ix. 11; xi. 315 els aiypadwoiay, Rev. xiii.
10; eis dm@decav, Rev. xvii. 8,11; foll. by ets w. an ace.
of the place and apés rva, Mt. xxvi. 18; Mk. v. 19;
trays éni twa, Lk. xii. 58; tmdyo with an inf. denoting
the purpose, Jn. xxi. 3; jerd twos with an ace. of the
way, Mt. v.41. On the phrase vmaye dic pov [ Mt. iv.
10 GLbr.; xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33; Lk. iv.8 RL in br.],
see émiow, 2a. fin.*
tmr-axoh, -7s, 7, (fr. traxove, q. v.), obedience, compli-
ance, submission, (opp. to mapaxon): absol. es tmaxonv,
unto obedience i. e. to obey, Ro. vi. 16 [ef. W. 612 (569);
B. § 151, 28d.]; obedience rendered to any one’s coun-
sels: with a subject. gen., 2 Co. vii. 15; x. 6; Philem.
21; with a gen. of the object, —of the thing to which
one submits himself, r7s micrews (see miorts, 1 b. a. p.
513°), Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26; rijs dAnOeias, 1 Pet. i. 22; of the
person, rod Xptorov, 2 Co. x.5; the obedience of one
who conforms his conduct to God’s commands, absol.
1 Pet. i. 2; opp. to duapria, Ro. vi. 16; réxva bmaxojs, i. e-
imfxoot, 1 Pet. i. 14; with a subjective gen. Ro. xv. 18;
an obedience shown in observing the requirements of
Christianity, im. dzav, i.e. contextually, the report con-
cerning your obedience, Ro. xvi. 19; the obedience with
which Christ followed out the saving purpose of God,
esp. by his sufferings and death: absol. Heb. v. 8; with
a gen. of the subject, Ro. v.19. (The word is not
found in prof. auth.; nor in the Sept., except in 2S.
xxii. 36 with the sense of favorable hearing; in 2S.
xxiii. 23 Aq. we find 6 emt émakony twos, Vulg. qui alicut
est a secretis, where it bears its primary and proper
signification of listening; see bmaxovw.) *
« ,
UTTAKOUW
§r-axovw; impf. ixyxovov; 1 aor. danxovoa; fr. Hom.
down; to listen, hearken ; 1. prop.: of one who on
a knock at the door comes to listen who it is, (the duty
of the porter), Acts xii. 13 [where A. V. hearken, R. V.
answer] (Xen. symp. 1,11; Plat. Crito p. 43 a.; Phaedo
p- 59 e.; Dem., Leian., Plut., al.). 2. to hearken to
a command, i.e. to obey, be obedient unto, submit to, (so in
Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down): absol. Phil. ii. 12 [ef. W. 594
(552)]; imjovoev e&edOeiv, [R. V. obeyed to go out i. e. |
went out obediently, Heb. xi. 8; with a dat. of the pers.
(in Grk. writ. also w. a gen.), Mt. viii. 27; Mk. i. 27;
iv. 41; Lk. viii. 25; xvii. 6; Ro. vi. 16; Eph. vi. 1,5;
Col. iii. 20, 22; Heb.v.9; 1 Pet. iii.6; with a dat. of
the thing, 77 miores (see miotis, 1 b. a. p. 513 near top),
Acts vi. 7; imncotcate eis dv rapeddOnre timov ddaxjps,
by attraction for 76 rim@ ris Sibaxns eis bv «rh. [W. § 24,
2b.; cf. rimos, 3], Ro. vi. 17; 7@ evayyedriw, Ro. x. 16;
2 Th.i.83 7G Adye, 2 Th. iii. 14; 77 dwapria (Rec.), rats
emtbupias (LT Tr WH), i. e. to allow one’s self to be
captivated by, governed by, ete., Ro. vi. 12.*
Samav8pos, -ov, (rd and avynp), under i. e. subject to a
man: yun, married, Ro. vii. 2. (Num. v. [20], 29; Sir.
ix. 9; [Prov. vi. 24]; xli. 21; Polyb. 10, 26, 3; [Diod. 32,
10, 4 vol. v. 50, 17 ed. Dind.]; Plut., Artem., Heliod.) *
in-avrdw, -@: 1 aor. dmnvrnca; to go to meet, to meet:
nuvi, Mt. viii. 28; Lk. viil. 27; Jn. xi. 20, 30; xii.18; also
LT Tr WH in Mk. v. 2; Jn. iv..51; and T Tr WH in
Mt. xxviii. 9; Acts xvi. 16; [and T in Lk. xvii. 12 (so
WH umrg. but without the dat.)]; ina military reference,
of a hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 LTTrWH. (Pind.,
Soph., Eur., Xen., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., al.) *
bm-dvTyoIs, -ews, 7, (UravTdw), a going to meet: Jn. xii.
13, and LT Tr WH in Mt. viii. 34 [B. § 146, 3] and xxv.
1 (cf. B. lc]. (Judg. xi. 34; Joseph. antt. 11, 8, 4;
App. b. ¢. 4, 6.) *
brapkts, -ews, 7, (imdpxe, q. v.), [fr. Aristot. down],
possessions, goods, wealth, property, (i. q. ta tmdpxovra) :
Acts ii. 45; Heb. x. 34, (for wid), 2 Chr. xxxv. 7; Dan.
xi. 24 Theodot.; for mp, Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 48; Jer.
ix. 10; for jin, Prov. xviii. 11; xix. 14; Polyb., Dion.
Hal., Diod., Plut., Artem.).*
tm-dpxo; impf. varjpyor; 1. prop. to begin below,
to make a beginning; univ. to begin; (Hom., Aeschyl.,
Hat., sqq.). 2. to come forth, hence to be there, be
ready, be at hand, (Aeschyl., Hadt., Pind., sqq.): univ.
and simply, Acts xix. 40 [ef. B. § 151, 29 note]; xxvii.
12, 21; ey rem, to be found in one, Acts xxviii. 18; with
a dat. of the pers. dmdpxet pot tt, something is mine, I
have something: Acts iii. 6; iv. 37; xxviii. 7; 2 Pet. i.
8 (where Lehm. sapévra; Sir. xx. 16; Prov. xvii. 17;
Job ii. 4, etc.) ; ra vmdpyxovrd Tu, one’s substance, one’s
property, Lk. viii. 3; xii. 15 Ltxt.T Tr WH; Acts iv.
32, (Gen. xxxi. 18; Tob. iv. 8; Dio C. 88,40); also ra
Um. twos, Mt. xix. 21; xxiv. 47; xxv. 14; Lk. xi. 21 :
xii. 15 RG Lmrg., 33, 44 [here L mrg. Tr mre. the
dat.]; xiv. 33; xvi. 1; xix. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 3; Heb. x. 34,
(often in Sept. for MIpN, wid, 0°03); Sir. xli.1; Tob.i.
20, ete.; rd idsa Undpyorra, Polyb. 4, 3,1). 3. to be,
638
UTEB
with a predicate nom. (as often in Attic) [cf. B. § 144,
14, 15 a., 18; W. 350 (828)]: as dpyov tis cuvaywyis
imjpxev, Lk. viii. 41; add, Lk. ix. 48; Acts vii. 55;
viii. 16; xvi. 33 xix. 36; xxi. 20; 1 Co. vii. 26; xii. 22;
Jas. ii. 15; 2 Pet. iii. 11; the ptep. with a predicate
nom., being i.e. who is ete., since or although he ete. is:
Lk. xvi. 14; xxiii. 50; Acts ii. 30; iii. 2; xiv. 8 Rec.;
xvii. 24; [xxii.3]; Ro.iv.19; 1 Co. xi. 7; 2 Co. viii. 17;
xii. 16; Gal. i. 14; ii.14; plur., Lk. xi.13; Acts xvi. 20,
875 xvii. 29); 2 Reta 19- vadpxew foll. by év w. a
dat. of the thing, to be contained in, Acts x. 12; to be in
a place, Phil. iii. 20; in some state, Lk. xvi. 23; év 7H
é€ovoia tivds, to be left in one’s power or disposal, Acts
v. 43 év inatiope évddEw kal tpupy, to be gorgeously ap-
parelled and to live delicately, Lk. vii. 25; &v poppy
Geod urdpyxe, to be in the form of God (see pop), Phil.
ii. 6 [here R.V. mrg. Gr. being originally (?; yet cf. 1 Co.
xi. 7)]; foll. by év with a dat. plur. of the pers., among,
Acts iv. 84 RG; 1 Co. xi. 18.
Xvil. 27; mpds THs Ga@rnpias, to be conducive to safety,
Acts xxvii. 34. [Comp.: apo- umdpye. | *
in-elkw; fr. Hom. down; to resist no longer, but to give
way, yield, (prop. of combatants); metaph. to yield to
authority and admonition, to submit: Heb. xiii. 17.*
tm-evavTlos, -a, -ov; a. opposite to; sel over against :
trmou drev. GAAHAots, Meeting one another, Hes. scut.
347. b. trop. (Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.), opposed
to, contrary to: twi, Col. ii. 14 [where see Bp. Lehtft.];
6 tev. as subst. (Xen., Polyb., Plut.), an adversary, Heb.
x. 27, cf. Sept. Is. xxvi. 11, (Sept. for 28, 1¥); often
in the O. T. Apocr.*
tnép, [cf. Eng. up, over, etc.], Lat. super, over, a prep-
osition, which stands before either the gen. or the acc.
according as it is used to express the idea of state and
rest or of motion over and beyond a place.
I. with the GeniTIVE; cf. W. 382 (358) sq. ue
prop. of place, i. e. of position, situation, extension :
over, above, beyond, across. In this sense it does not
occur in the N.T.; but there it always, though joined
to other classes of words, has a tropical signification de-
rived from its original meaning. 2. i.q. Lat. pro,
Jor, i.e. for one’s safety, for one’s advantage or benefit,
(one who does a thing for another, is conceived of as
standing or bending ‘over’ the one whom he would shield
or defend [ef. W. u.s.]) : mpocedyoua vmép tr. Mt. v.44;
Lk. vi. 28 [T Tr mrg. WH epi (see 6 below) ]; Col. i. 3
L Tr WH mrg. (see 6 below); [Jas. v.16 L Trmrg. WH
txt.], 9; edyoua, Jas. v. 16 [RGT Tr txt. WH mrg.];
after déoua, Acts viii. 24; and nouns denoting prayer, as
dénots, Ro. x. 1; 2 Co. i. 11; ix. 14; Phil. i. 4; Eph. vi.
19; mpocevxn, Acts xii. 5 (here L T Tr WH epi [see 6
below]); Ro. xv. 30; 1 Tim. ii. 1,2; efvac dep tr. (opp.
to xara twos), to be for one i. e. to be on one’s side, to
favor and further one’s cause, Mk. ix. 40; Lk. ix. 50;
Ro. viii. 31, cf. 2 Co. xiii. 8; 76 dmép +. that which is for
one’s advantage, Phil. iv. 10 [but see dva@d\Xw and
ppovéw, fin.]; evrvyxdve and vrepevtyyxdve, Ro. viii. 26
RG, 27, 34; Heb. vii. 25, cf. ix. 24; Aéyo, Acts xxvi. 1
vm. paxpay a6 twos, Acts
e
iméo
RB WH txt. [see 6 below]; pepepva, 1 Co. xii. 25; dyputva,
‘Heb. xiii. 17° dyovigoua: év rats mpocevxais, Col. iv. 12,
cf. Ro. xv. 30; mpeaBedw, Eph. vi. 20; 2Co.v.20; with
subst.: (Nos, 2 Co. vii. 7; [Col. iv. 18 Ree.]; xdvos, Col.
iv. 13 [GLT Tr WH]; ozovdy, 2 Co. vii. 12; viii. 16;
Stdxovos, Col. i. 7; to offer offerings for, Acts xxi. 26;
to enter the heavenly sanctuary for (used of Christ),
Heb. vi. 20; dpytepéa xadicracéa, Heb.v.1; after the
ideas of suffering, dying, giving up life, ete:
Ro. ix. 3; xvi. 4; 2Co. xii. 15; after thy Wuxqy ridévae
(srép twos), in order to avert ruin, death, etc., from
one, Jn. x. 11; xiii. 37sq.; of Christ dying to procure
salvation for his own, Jn. x. 15; xv. 133; 1 Jn. iii. 16;
‘Christ is said 76 aipa avrod éxyivew, pass., Mk. xiv. 24
LT Tr WH [see 6 below]; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject the
pass.]; drodéoOat, Jn. xviii. 14 Ree. ; droOvjoxewv, Jn. xi.
50 sqq.; [xvili. 14 LTTrWH]; Acts xxi. 13; Ro. v.7;
of Christ undergoing death for man’s salvation, Ro. v.
6, 8; xiv. 15; 1 Th.v. 10 [here T Tr WH txt. zepi (see
6 below); 1 Pet. iii. 18L T Tr WH txt.]; yeteo@ar davd-.
tov, Heb. ii. 9; oravpwOjva, 1 Co. i. 13 (here L txt. Tr
mrg. WH mrg. epi [see 6 below}); [of God giving up
his Son, Ro. viii. 32]; mapadiddvar twa Eavrtdv, Gal. ii. 20;
Eph. v. 2, 253; d:ddvae éavrdy, Tit. ii. 14; with a predi-
cate accus. added, dvriturpov, 1 Tim. ii. 6; 76 cdpa adtod
dcddvar, pass. Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass. ], cf. 1 Co.
xi. 24; rvOqvar (OvOjvat, see Ova, init.),1 Co. v. 7; madeiv,
1 Pet. ii. 21; iii. 187 RG WHmrg.; iv. 1 RG]; dyagew
éavrév, Jn. xvii. 19. Since what is done for one’s ad-
vantage frequently cannot be done without acting in
his stead (just as the apostles teach that the death
of Christ inures to our salvation because it has the force
of an expiatory sacrifice and was suffered in our stead),
we easily understand how wzép, like the Lat. pro and
our for, comes to signify 3. in the place of, instead
of, (which is more precisely expressed by dvri; hence
the two prepositions are interchanged by Irenaeus, adv.
haer. 5, 1, tO iSig aiyate AuTpwcapévov jpas rod Kupiov
kal Sdvros Thy Wuxyy bmep TAY HyeTrepwov uxdv Kai THY
odpxa Thy éavtod dvti rev jperépav oapkay): iva vmép
gov pot Siaxovj, Philem. 13; dép rav vexpov Barrier Oat
(see Barriga, fin.), 1 Co. xv. 29; [add, Col. i. 7 L txt. Tr
txt. WH txt.]; in expressions concerning the death of
Christ: efs tmép mdvtwy dréOavev (for the inference is
drawn dpa of mdvtes dméavoy, i.e. all are reckoned as
dead), 2 Co. v. 14 (15), 15; add, 21; Gal. iii, 13. [On
this debated sense of vmép, see Meyer and Van Hengel
on Ro. v. 6; Ellicott on Gal. and Philem. ll. ec.; Wieseler
on Gal. i. 4; Trench, Syn. § 1xxxii.; W. 383 (358) note.]
Since anything whether of an active or passive char-
acter which is undertaken on behalf of a person or
thing is undertaken ‘on account of’ that person or
thing, vmép is used 4. of the impelling or moving
eause; on account of, for the sake of, any person or thing:
trép THs ToD Kdopou Cais, to procure (true) life for man-
kind, Jn. vi. 51; (o do or suffer anything vmep tov dv6paros
Ge0d, "Incod, Tod Kupiov: Acts v. 41; ix. 16; XVs 26 5 xxi.
28; Ro. i. 53 3dn. 73 mdoxew vrep rov Xpiorov, Phil. i.
639
2 ,
vIrép
29; vmép tis Bacwdelas rod Geod, 2 Th. i. 5; oTevoxwpiat
bmép tod Xpiotod, 2 Co. xii. 10 [it is better to connect
tmép etc. here with edSoxd]; droOvjoKew Umép Oeod,
Ignat. ad Rom. 4. examples with a gen. of the thing
are, Jn. xi. 4; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Co. i. 6; xii. 19; imep rijs
evdoxias, to satisfy (his) good-pleasure, Phil. ii.13; with
agen. of the pers., 2 Co.i.6; Eph. iii.1,13; Coi. i. 245s
dofdtew, edyapioteiv tmp r. (gen. of the thing), Ro. xv.
9; 1 Co. x. 80; tmép mavrov, for all favors, Eph. v. 20;
evxapioreiv dxép with a gen. of the pers., Ro. i. 8 (here
LT Tr WH zepi [see 6 below]); 2 Co. i. 11; Eph.i. 16;
dyava éyew vrép with a gen. of the pers. Col. ii. 1 L T Tr
WH [see 6 below]; tmp (rdv) duapridy (or dyvonsdray),
to offer sacrifices, Heb. v. 1,3 (here LT Tr WH zrepi [see
6 below]); vii. 27; ix. 7; x. 123 dmoOaveiv, of Christ,
1 Co. xv. 8; éavrév Sodvat, Gal. i. 4 R WH txt. [see 6 be-
low]. 5. Like the Lat. super (ef. Klotz, HWB. d.
Lat. Spr. ii. p. 1497”; [Harpers’ Lat. Dict. s. v. IL. B.
2 b.]), it freq. refers to the object under consideration,
concerning, of, as respects, with regard to, ([ef. B. § 147,
21]; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in W. 383 (358 sq.));
so after kavxdoOa, kavxnua, kavynois, [R. V. on behalf
of]: 2Co.v. 125; vii. 4,14; viii. 24; ix. 2sq.; xii. 53
2 Th.i. 4[here LT Tr WH ey- (or &+) xavyaoOat]; pv-
awovaba, 1 Co. iv. 6 [al. refer this to 4 above; see Meyer
ed. Heinrici (cf. puowde, 2 fin.)]; éAmis, 2 Co. i. 7 (6);
dyvociv, 8 (here LT Tr WHumrg. zepi [see 6 below]);
gpoveiv, Phil. i. 7 (2 Mace. xiv. 8); épwrav, 2 Th. ii. 13
kpa¢euw, to proclaim concerning, Ro. ix. 27; [mapaxanelv,
1 Th. iii. 2G LT Tr WH (see 6 below)]; after cimeiv,
Jn. i. 30 LT Tr WH [see 6 below]; (so after verbs of
saying, writing, etc., 2S. xvili.5; 2 Chr. xxxi.9; Joel i.
3; Judith xv. 4; 1 Esdr. iv. 49; 2 Mace. xi. 85); etre
imép Tirov, whether inquiry be made about Titus, 2 Co.
Vili. 23; dmép rovrou, concerning this, 2 Co. xii. 8. 6.
In the N. T. Mss., as in those of prof. auth. also, the
prepositions dmép and mepi are confounded, [cf. W. 383
(858) note; § 50,3; B.§147, 21; Kiihner § 435, 1. 2e.;
Meisterhans § 49, 12; also Wieseler or Ellicott on Gal. as
below; Meyer on 1 Co. xv. 8, (see wepi I. c.8.)]; this oc-
curs in the foll. pass.: Mk. xiv. 24; [Lk. vi. 28]; Jn. b
30; Acts xii. 5; xxvi.1; Ro.i.8; 1Co.i.13; 2Co.i. 8;
Gal. i. 4; Col. i. 3; ii. 1; [1 Th. iii. 2; v.10]; Heb. v. 3.
[For tmép éx meptocod or imép éxmepiaood, See vrepexte-
pioo od. |
II. with the AccusATIVE (cf. W. § 49, e.); over, be-
yond, away over; more than; 1. prop. of the
place ‘over’ or ‘beyond’ which, as in the Grk. writ. fr.
Hom. down; not thus used in the N. T., where 1 is
always 2. metaph. of the measure or degree
exceeded [cf. B. § 147, 21]; a. uniy.: eivae imép
twa, to be above i. e. superior to one, Mt. x. 24; Lk. vi.
40; 7d dvopa Td Uméep Tay dvopa sc. dy, the name superior
to every (other) name, Phil. ii. 9; kepadjy imep mdvra
se. ovcay, the supreme head or lord [A.V. head over all
things], Eph. i. 22; dep doddo» dvra, more than a ser
vant, Philem. 16; more than [R.V. beyond], ibid. 21;
iméep mdvra, above (i.e. more and greater than) all, Eph ~
VITEpalpw
iii. 20°; vméo rv Aapmpdrnra Tou HALov, above (i. ¢@. sur-
passing) the brightness of the sun, Acts xxvi. 133; more
(to a greater degree) than, pudreiv twa vmép tua, Mt.
x. 87 (exx. fr. prof. auth. are given by Fritzsche ad
loc.) ; beyond, 1Co. iv. 6; 2 Co. xii. 6; tmép 6 divacde,
beyond what ye are able, beyond your strength, 1 Co.
x. 13 [ef. W. 590 (549)]; also daép Sdvapu, 2 Co. i. 8;
opp. to card Sévapw (as in Hom. IL. 3, 59 kar’ aicay, ob3
bmep aicay, cf. 6,487; 17, 321. 327), 2 Co. viii. 3 (where
LT Tr WH sapa dvvapey). b. with words imply-
ing comparison: mpoxéarew, Gal. i. 14; of the measure
beyond which one is reduced, #rrao dat, 2 Co. xii. 138 [W.
§ 49 e.], (rreovdgw, 1 Esdr. viii. 72; meperoevw, 1 Mace.
iii. 80; vmepBaddw, Sir. xxv. 11); after comparatives
i. q. than, Lk. xvi. 8 ; Heb. iv. 12, (Judg. xi. 25; 1 K. xix.
4; Sir. xxx. 17); cf. W. § 35, 2; [B.§ 147, 21]. c.
vrép is used adverbially; as, vép éya (L dmepeya (cf. W.
46 (45)), WH tmep eyw (cf. W. § 14, 2 Note) ], much more
(or ina much greater degree) I, 2 Co. xi. 23; cf. Kypke
ad loc.; W. 423 (394). [For dmép Aiav see wrepNiav. |
III. In ComrositTIon drép denotes 1. over, above,
beyond: dmepave, imepexewa, Umepexteivo. 2. excess
of measure, more than: Umepexmeptoood, tmrepukaw. 3.
aid, for; in defence of: tmepevrvyxdva. Cf. Viger. ed.
Hermann p. 668; Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 351; [Elli-
cott on Eph. iii. 20].*
tmep-alpw: pres. mid. vmepaipopa; (vrép and aipa) ;
to lift or raise up over some thing; mid. to lift one’s self
up, be exalted, be haughty: 2 Co. xii. 7[R.V. to be exalted
overmuch]; éni twa, above one, 2 Th. ii. 4; with a dat.
incom. tui, to carry one’s self haughtily to, behave inso-
lently towards one, 2 Mace. v. 23; (very variously in
prof. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Plato down).*
trépaxpos, -ov, (Vulg. superadultus) ; 1. beyond
the axun or bloom of life, past prime, (Plat. de rep. 5 p.
460 e. dp’ obv cou EvvdoKet pérpios xpdvos axis Ta etkoow
érn yuvatki, avdpt dé ra tpidxovra): Eustath. 2:
overripe, plump and ripe, (and so in greater danger of
defilement): of a virgin [R. V. pas. the flower of her
age], 1 Co. vii. 36.*
vmep-dve, (vmép and divw), adv., above: tivds [ef. W.$ 54,
6], above a thing,— of place, Eph. iv. 10; Heb. ix. 5;
of rank and power, Eph.i.21. (Sept.; [Aristot.], Polyb.,
Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., al., [W. § 50, 7 Note 1; B.
§ 146, 4].) *
dmep-avgdve ; to increase beyond measure; to grow ex-
ceedingly: 2 Th. i. 8. [Andoe., Galen, Dio Cass., al.]*
vmep-Balvw; fr. Hom. down; to step over, go beyond ;
metaph. to transgress: Sixny, vopovs, etc., often fr. Hat.
and Pind. down; absol. to overstep the proper limits i. e.
to transgress, trespass, do wrong, sin: joined with dpap-
tavew, Hom. Tl. 9,501; Plat. rep. 2 p. 366 a.3 spec. of
one who defrauds another in business, overreaches,
(Luth. zu weit greifen), with cat mdeovexrety added, 1 Th.
iv. 6 [but see mpayya, b.].*
drepBadrAdvrus, (fr. the ptep. of the verb bmepBdddo,
as dvr, fr. dv), above measure: 2 Co. xi. 23. (Job xv.
41; Xen., Plat., Polyb., al.) *
640
UTEpEX@
trep-BéAXw; fr. Hom. down; 1. trans. to surpass
in throwing; to throw over or beyond any thing. Z
intrans. to transcend, surpass, exceed, excel; ptep. tmep~
Bdddov, excelling, exceeding; Vulg. [in Eph. i. 19; iii.
19] supereminens; (Aeschyl., Hadt., Eur., Isocr., Xen.,
Plat., al.) : 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 14; Eph. i. 19; ii. 7; with
a gen. of the object surpassed (Aeschyl. Prom. 923;
Plat. Gorg. p. 475 b.; cf. Matthiae § 358, 2), 9 vmepBar-
Aovea Ths yrooews aydan Xprcrod, the love of Christ which
passeth knowledge, Eph. iii. 19 [ef. W. 346 (324) note].*
drep-Podt, -7s, Hy (WrepBddro, q. v.), fr. Hat. [8, 112, 4]
and Thue. down ; 1. prop. a throwing beyond. 2.
metaph. superiority, excellence, pre-eminence, [R. V. ex-
ceeding greatness]: with a gen. of the thing, 2 Co. iv. 7;
xii. 7; ka@’ vmepBorny, beyond measure, exceedingly, pre-
eminently: Ro. vii. 18; 1 Co. xii. 31 [ef. W. § 54,2b.; B.
§ 125, 11 fin.]; 2 Co. i. 8; Gal. i. 13, (4 Mace. iii. 18;
Soph. O. R. 1196; Isoer. p. 84 d. [i. e. mpos bir. 5]; Polyb.
3, 92,10; Diod. 2,163; 17,47); «a& um. eis tmepBorn»,
beyond all measure, [R. V. more and more exceedingly],
2) Comivarl den
dmep-eyo [Lehm.], i. q. drép €yw (see dzép, IL. 2 c.): 2
Co. xi. 28. Cf. W. 46 (45).*
imep-eiSov; (see eidw); fr. Hdt. and Thuc. down; to
overlook, take no notice of, not attend to: ri, Acts xvii.
30.*
dmep-exewva, (i. q. vrép éxeiva, like éméxecva, i. q. én’ éxeiva
[W. §6,11.]), beyond: ra dm. twos, the regions lying be-
yond the country of one’s residence, 2 Co. x. 16 [cf. W.
§ 54,6]. (Byzant. and eccles. writ.; éméxewa pnropes
Aéeyovot . . . Umepexewa S€ pdvov of cuppaxes, Thom. Mag.
p: 386 [W. 463 (431)].) *
dmep-ex-mepiroot, [Rec. dmép éxmep. and in Eph. vép
€x mep.; see meptoads, 1], adv., (Vulg. [in Eph. iii. 20]
superabundanter), superabundanily; beyond measure;
exceedingly: 1 Th. v.13 RG WH txt.; iii. 10; [exceed-
ing abundantly foll. by dmép i. q.] far more than, Eph. iii.
20 [B. § 132, 21]. Not found elsewhere [exe. in Dan.
iii. 22 Ald., Compl. Cf. B. § 146, 4].*
Jmep-ex-mepioa as, adv., beyond measure: 1 Th. v. 13
LT Tr WH mrg. [R. V. exceeding highly]; see ékmepic-
oas. (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 11.) *
taep-ex-telvw; to extend beyond the prescribed bounds,
stretch out beyond measure, stretch out overmuch: 2 Co. x.
14 [cf. W. 474 (442)]. (Anth. 9, 643, 6 ace. to the
emendation of Wm. Dind.; Greg. Naz., Eustath.) *
trrep-ex-xbvo (-bvvw, LT Tr WH; see éxyxée, init.) ; to
pour out beyond measure; pass. to overflow, run over,
(Vulg. supereffluo): Lk. vi. 38; Joel ii. 24 [Alex., ete.].
(Not found elsewhere.) *
trep-ev-ruyxdvw ; to intercede for one: bmép twos [W.
§ 52, 4,17], Ro. viii. 26; on this pass. see mvedpa p. 522°.
(Eccl. writ.) *
trep-éxw; fr. Hom. down; 1. trans. to have or
hold over one (as tv xetpa, of a protector, with a gen.
of the pers. protected; so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down;
Joseph. antt. 6, 2, 2). 2. intrans. to stand out, rise
above, overtop, (so prop. first in Hom. Il. 3, 210); met
utepnpavia 641 umnpéerns
aph. a. to be above, be superior in rank, authority,
power: Baatrel ws vaepéyovrs, [A. V. as supreme], 1 Pet.
1. 13; eoveiar dmepéyovcat, of magistrates (A. V. higher
powers), Ro. xiii, 1 (of daepéyovres, substantively, the
prominent men, rulers, Polyb. 28, 4,9; 80, 4, 8 OE
kings, Sap. vi. 6). b. to excel, to be superior: twvés,
better than [ef. B. § 182, 22], Phil. ii. 3 (Sir. xxxvi. 7;
Xen. venat. 1, 11; Plat. Menex. p. 237d.; Dem. p- 689,
10; Diod. 17, 77); to surpass: rwd or ri [ef. B. § 130,
4}, Phil. iv. 7; 7d dwepéxov, subst. the excellency, sur-
passing worth [ef. W. § 34, 2], Phil. iii. 8.*
drepnpavia, -as, 7, (vaepypavos, q. V.), pride, haughti-
‘ness, arrogance, the characteristic of one who, with a
swollen estimate of his own powers or merits, looks
down on others and even treats them with insolence
and contempt: Mk. vii. 22. (From Xen. and Plat. down;
Sept. for mys3 and 1183; often in the O. T. Apocr.) *
trephavos, -oy, (fr. imép and daivouat, with the con-
nective [or Epic extension (cf. Curtius § 392)]9; cf.
vmep n hepns, Susy Aeyns, Tavn Neyns, edn yevns), fr. Hes.
down; 1. showing one’s self above others, overtop-
ping, conspicuous above others, pre-eminent, (Plat., Plut.,
al.). 2. especially in a bad sense, with an over-
weening estimate of one’s means or merits, despising others
or even treating them with contempt, haughty, [cf. Westcott,
Epp. of St. John, p. 64°]: Ro. i. 30; 2 Tim. iii. 2; opp.
to ramewol, Jas. iv.6; 1 Pet. v. 5, (in these two pass.
after Prov. iii. 34); with dcavola xap8ias added, Lk. i. 51.
(Sept. for 11, D7, 783, ete.; often in the O. T. Apocr.)
[See Trench, Syn. § xxix.; Schmidt ch. 176, 8.]*
vmepAiay (formed like tsepayay, inépev), and written
separately dmép Aiav (so R Tr [cf. W. § 50, 7 Note; B.
§ 146, 4]), over much; pre-eminently: ot dwepdiav dxdoro-
Aor, the most eminent apostles, 2 Co. xi. 5; xii. 11.*
trep-vixdw, -@; (Cyprian supervinco); to be more than
a conqueror, to gain a surpassing victory: Ro. viii. 37.
(Leon. tactic. 14, 25 wka x. wy dmrepuxa; Socrat. h. e. 3,
21 may Kaddv, inepuxav dé éxipOovoy. Found in other
eccl. writ. Euseb. h. e. 8, 14, 15, uses dep ex viKay.) *
tnép-oykos, -ov, (Umép, and dyxos a swelling), vver-
swollen; metaph. immoderate, extravagant: hadeiv, Pbéy-
yer Oat, tmépoyxa, [A.V. great swelling words] expressive
of arrogance, Jude 16; 2 Pet. ii. 18; with émi rév Oedv
added, Dan. xi. 36 Theodot., ef. Sept. Ex. xviii. 22, 26.
(Xen., Plat., Joseph., Plut., Leian., Ael., Arr.) *
srepoxh, 7s, 7, (fr. drépoxos, and this fr. drepéxa, q.V-),
prop. elevation, pre-eminence, superiority, (prop. in Polyb.,
Plut., al.);_ metaph. excellence (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.,
Joseph., Plut., al.) : of év dmep. sc. dvres, [R. V. those that
are in high place], of magistrates, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (év vmep.
xeicGat, to have great honor and authority, 2 Mace. iii.
11); xa’ drepoxhy Aéyou }) copias, [A.V. with excellency
of speech or of wisdom i. e.] with distinguished elo-
quence or wisdom, 1 Co. ii. 1.*
Smep-repircedw: 1 aor. vmeperepiocevaa ; Pres. pass.
drepTEepiawevopar 5 (Vulg. superabundo); to abound be-
yond measure, abound exceedingly : Ro. v. 20; pass. (see
mepircevo, 2), to overflow, to enjoy abundantly: with a
dat. of the thing, 2 Co. vii. 4. (Moschion de pass. mulier.
p- 6, ed. Dewez; Byzant. writ.) *
vmep-trepirods, adv., beyond measure, exceedingly: Mk,
vii. 87. Scarcely found elsewhere.*
vrep-Acovdtw: 1 aor. imependedvaca; (Vulg. supers
abundo); to be exceedingly abundant: 1 Tim. i. 14 (rév
UmepmAeovatovra aépa, Heron. spirit. p. 165, 40; several
times also in eccl. writ. [vmepmdeovder absol. overflows,
Herm. mand. 5, 2,5]; to possess in excess, dav vmepm)eo-
vaon 6 avOpamos, é€apapraver, Ps. Sal. v. 19).*
vrep-uipdw, -G: 1 aor. drepywoa; (Ambros. super-
exalio); metaph. a. to exalt to the highest rank and
power, raise to supreme majesty: twa, Phil. ii. 9; pass.
Ps. xevi. (xevii.) 9. b. to extol most highly: Song of
the Three etc. 28 sqq. ; Dan. iii. (iv.) 34 Theodot. @
pass. to be lifted up with pride, exalted beyond measure; to
carry one’s self loftily: Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 35. (Eccl.
and Byzant. writ.) *
Umep-hpovew, -@; (vrépppwv); fr. Aeschyl. and Hadt.
down; to think more highly of one’s self than is proper :
omxdi) 3.
dmepgov, -ov, 74, (fr. Urepgos or Urepwios, ‘upper,’ and
this fr. vrép; like marpaios, marpdos, fr. marnp; [cf. W.
96 (91)]), in the Grk. writ. (often in Hom.) the highest
part of the house, the upper rooms or story where the wo-
men resided; in bibl. Grk. (Sept. for my), a room in
the upper part of a house, sometimes built upon the flat
roof of the house (2 K. xxiii. 12), whither Orientals
were wont to retire in order to sup, meditate, pray,
etc.; [R. V. upper chamber; cf. B. D.s. v. House; McC.
and S.s.v.]: Acts i.18; ix. 37, 39; xx. 8, (Joseph. vit.
30).*
wr-éxw; prop. to hold under, to put under, place under-
neath; as tiv xetpa, Hom. Il. 7,188; Dem., Plat., al.;
metaph. to sustain, undergo: Sixny, to suffer punishment,
Jude 7 (very often so in prof. auth. fr. Soph. down; also
Oikas, kpiow, Tipwpiav, etc.; Cypiav, Eurip. Ion 1308; 2
Mace. iv. 48).*
Umhkoos, -vv, (don; see vraxovw, 2), fr. Aeschyl. and
Hat. down, giving ear, obedient: Phil. ii. 8; with dat.
of the pers. Acts vii. 39; eis mavra, 2 Co. ii. 9.*
danpetéw, -@; 1 aor. vanpérnoa; fr. Hdt. down; to be
umnpetns (q- V-), prop. a. to act as rower, to row,
(Diod., Ael.). b. to minister, render service: tit,
Acts xiii. 36; xx. 84; xxiv. 23.*
danpérns, -ov, 6, (ir. dd, and éperns fr. épéoow to row),
fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; a. prop. an under
rower, subordinate rower. b. any one who serves with
his hands; a servant; in the N.T. of the officers and
attendants of magistrates as — of the officer who exe-
cutes penalties, Mt. v. 25; of the attendants of a king,
of dm. of euoi, my servants, retinue, the soldiers 1 should
have if I were a king, Jn. xviii. 36; of the servants or
officers of the Sanhedrin, Mt. xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54, 65;
Jn. vii. 32, 45 sq.; Xvili. 3, 12, 22; xix.6; Acts v. 22, 26;
joined with SodAos (Plat. polit. p. 289 c.), Jn. xvili. 18 ;
of the attendant of a synagogue, Lk. iv. 20; of any one
ministering or rendering service, Acts xiii. 5. Cc. any
of
UTTVOS
one who aids another in any work; an assistant: of a
preacher of the gospel [A. V. minister, q. v. in B. D.],
Acts xxvi. 16; dmnpérar Adyou, Lk. i. 2; Xpuorod, 1 Co.
iv. 1. [Sy¥N. see d:dkovos, fin. ] *
Savos, -ov, 6, [i e. avmvos, cf. Lat. sopnus, somnus;
Curtius § 391], fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 13¥, sleep: prop.,
Mt. i. 24; Lk. ix. 32; Jn. xi.13; Acts xx.9; metaph.
<& imvov éyepOivat (see éyeipw, 1), Ro. xiii. 11.*
jas (i.e. Lat. sub [Curtius § 393]), prep., under, in
prof. auth. used with the gen. dat. and acc., but in the
N. T. with the gen. and ace. only. [On the use and
the omission of elision with it before words beginning
with a vowel, see WH. App. p. 146°; Tdf. Proleg. p. iv.
(addenda et emendanda). ]
I. with the GmniriIve (cf. W. 364 (342), 368 sq. (346) ;
B. § 147, 29), it is used 1. prop. in a local sense, of
situation or position under something higher, as imd
xOovds, often fr. Hom. down; 6 éxi yijs kat dad yijs
xovods, Plat. legg. 5 p. 728 a.; hence 2. metaph.
of the efficient cause, as that under the power of
which an event is conceived of as being; here the Lat.
uses @ or ab, and the Eng. by; thus a. after pas-
sive verbs, — with the gen. of a person: Mt. i. 22; ii.
15sq.; Mk. i. 5; ii. 3; [viii. 31 LT Tr WH];. Lk. ii. 18;
[vi. 18 Rec.]; Jn.x. 14 RG; xiv. 21; Acts iv.11; xv.
4; [xxii 30 LT Tr WH]; Rom. xv. 15[RGL]; 1Co.
1.11; 2Co.i.4,16; Gal.i.11; Eph. ii.11; Phil. iii. 12;
1 Th.i.4; 2 Th.ii. 18; Heb. iii. 4, and in many other
pass.; hovis évexOcions ind ths peyadomperods Sédéns,
when a voice was brought by the majestic glory [cf. R. V.
mrg. |, i.e. came down to him from God, 2 Pet. i. 17; after
yivopat, to be done, effected, Lk.ix.?7 RLinbr.; xiii. 17;
xxiii. 8; Eph. v. 12; yiverai rux émBovdn, Acts xx. 3;
) emitiia 7 Ud TOV mAELOVOY, SC. EmiTiunOeiaa, 2 Co. ii. 6;
— with the gen. of a thing: Mt. vili. 24; xi. 7; xiv. 24;
Lk. vii. 24; viii. 14 [see ropedw, fin.]; Jn. viii. 9; Acts
xxvii. 41; Ro. iii. 21; xii. 21; 1 Co. x. 29; 2Co.v. 4; Eph.
Vols Colniin 1S 5nd ast.) 4911-19) etl 4 tod etenits.
17; Jude 12; Rev. vi. 13. b. with neuter verbs,
and with active verbs which carry a passive meaning:
amacxew vroe twos, Mt. xvii. 12; Mk. v. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14,
(Hom. Il. 11, 119; Thue. 1, 77; Xen. symp. 1, 9; Cyr.
6, 1,36; Hier. 7,8); drodéoOa, to perish, 1 Co. x. 9 sq.
(very often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. 8, 82 on); dmopévev
tt, Heb. xii. 3 (cf. dvrivdoyia, 2]; AapBdveww sc. mAnyas, to
be beaten, 2 Co. xi. 24; after a term purely active, of
a force by which something is bidden to be done: dzo-
«reivat év poucaia kal ind tOv Onpiwv ths yijs, by the wild
beasts, Rev. vi. 8 (ef. ix. 18 Rec.], (so ddkece Oupdv 5p”
“Exropos, Hom. Il. 17, 616; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1393;
[B. 341 (293)]).
II. with the AccusaTIVE (W. § 49,k.); al, OE
motion, in answer to the question ‘whither?’: to come
‘tnd THY oTéyny, Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6; emouvayev, Mt.
xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34; with verbs of putting or plac-
ing: Mt.v.15; Mk. iv. 21; Lk. xi.33; 1 Co. xv. 25; of
placing under or subjecting, Lk. vii.8; Ro. vii.
14; xvi. 20; 1 Co. xv. 27; Gal. iii. 22; iv.3; Eph. i. 22;
642
UTodEry Ua
1 Pet. v.63; yo tid tm’ euaurdv, Mt. viii. 9; Lk. vii. 8;
yivecOa, born under i.e. subject to, Gal. iv.4; of fall
ing, trop. Jas. v. 12 [where R* eis tmdkpiow]. 2.
of situation, position, tarrying: after xatacky-
voov, Mk. iv. 32; xdOnpar, Jas. ii. 3; with the verb eiva
(to and under) in a local or prop. sense, Jn. i. 48 (49);
Acts iv. 12; Ro. iii.13; 1Co.x.1; 7 tad (rév) otpavdy
se. yopa, Lk. xvii. 24; mdon xrice: ty tnd Tov odp. SC.
ovon, Col. i. 23; ra ind tov ovpavédy se. dvra, Acts ii. 5,
(ra id ceAnvyy, Philo de vit. Moys. ii. § 12); etvae tad
twa or 71, to be under, i. e. subject to the power of, any
person or thing: Ro. iii. 9; vi. 14,15; 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal.
iii. 10,25; iv. 2,21; v.18; 1 Tim. vi.1; td é£ovciav
se. dv, Mt. viii. 9 (where L WH br. read to e&. racco-
pevos [set under authority], so also cod. Sin.); of ind
vdpov sc. dvres, 1 Co. ix. 20; Gal. iv. 5, (iad exmAnéw civat,
Protev. Jac. 18). rypeiv twa, Jude 6; dpovpetabar, Gal.
ili. 23. 3. of time, like the Lat. sub (cf. sub vespe-
ram), i. q. about (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ. in Passow p.
2111°; [L. and S.s.v. C. III.]): id rév épOpov, about day-
break, Acts v. 21. This prep. occurs with the accus.
nowhere else in the N. T. The apostle John uses it only
twice with the gen. (xiv. 21; 3 Jn. 12—three times,
if x. 14 RG is counted [ef. viii. 9]), and once with the
accus. (i. 48 (49)).
III. in Composition iad denotes 1. locality,
under: tmokdtw, vmomdd.ov, tmamtalo, imodéw; of the
goal of motion, i. e. dad 71, as tmodéxouar (under one’s
roof); timodauBdvw (to receive by standing under); izo-
BddXq, trori@nu; trop. in expressions of subjection,
compliance, etc., as tmaxova, Umakon, iankoos, Umdd.Kos,
Uravdpos, tmdya, tmodeita, troywpeo. 2. small in
degree, slightly, as imonvew.
vro-Béddw: 2 aor. iréBadov; [fr. Hom. down]; ae
to throw or put under. 2. to suggest to the mind. 3.
to instruct privately, instigate, suborn: tud, Acts vi. 11
(émeBANOnoav Karhyopot, App. bell. civ. 1, 74; Mnvuris
tis tmoBAntds, Joseph. b. j. 5, 10, 4).*
droypappds, -ov, 6, (Uroypadw), prop. 1. a writ-
ing-copy, including all the letters of the alphabet, given
to beginners as an aid in learning to draw them: Clem.
Alex. strom. 5, 8, 50. Hence 2. an example set
before one: 1 Pet. ii. 21 (2 Mace. ii. 28; Clem. Rom. 1
Cor. 16, 17; 33,8; [Philo, fragm. vol. ii. 667 Mang. (vi.
229 Richter)], and often in eccl. writ.; 6 IadXos imo-
povis yevdpevos péytoros tmoypaupds, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
5, 7 [where see Bp. Lehtft.]).*
d76-Serypa, -ros, 75, (brodeikvupt, q. V.), a word rejected
by the Atticists, and for which the earlier writ. used
mapdderypa; see Lob. ad Phryn. p.12; [Rutherford, New
Phryn. p.62]. It is used by Xen. r. eq. 2, 2, and among
subsequent writ. by Polyb., Philo, Joseph., App., Plut.,
Hdian., al.; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p- 554; a.
a sign suggestive of anything, delineation of a thing, repre-
sentation, figure, copy: joined with o«d, Heb. viii. 5;
with a gen. of the thing represented, Heb. ix. 23. b.
an example: for imitation, diddvat rivi, Jn. xiii. 155 «ara-
AeAourrévar, 2 Mace. vi. 28; with a gen. of the thing to
€ t
UTOdELKV ULL
be imitated, Jas. v. 10 (Sir. xliv. 16; 2 Mace. vi. 31); for
warning: with a gen. of the thing to be shunned, rijs dzet-
Ocias, Heb. iv. 11; with a gen. of the pers. to be warned,
2 Pet. ii. 6 (rods ‘Popaious . . « els trddevypa tav Gov
eOvav karapreeww thy iepav modu, Joseph. b. j. 2, 16, 4).*
vmo-Scikvupt: fut. dwodeigw; 1 aor. inédeéa; fr. Hat.
and Thue. down; Sept. several times for 7°31 ; 1.
prop. to show by placing under (i.e. before) the eyes:
bnéderkev adtois tov mAodrov aitod, Esth. v. 113; add, Sir.
xlix. 8; [al. give id in this compound the force of
‘privily’; but ef. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 126]. 2. to
show by words and arguments, i. e. to teach (for MIN, 2
_ Chr. xv. 3) [A.V. freq. to warn]: rwi, foll. by an inf. of
the thing, Mt. iii. 7; Lk. iii. 7; to teach by the use of a
figure, revi, foll. by indir. disc., Lk. vi. 47; xii. 5; to show
or teach by one’s example, foll. by ért, Acts xx. 353 to
show i.e. make known (future things), foll. by indir.
disc. Acts ix. 16.*
vro-Béxopat (see dnd, III. 1): 1 aor. imedeéduny; pf.
brodébeypal fr. Hom. down; to receive as a guest: twd,
Lk. xix. 6; Acts xvii. 7; Jas. ii. 25; eds rdv otkov, Lk. x.
38. [Cf. ddxoua, fin.]*
tmo-bé: 1 aor. imédyoa; 1 aor. mid. dmredyoduny ; pf.
pass. or mid. ptcp. twodednpevos; fr. Hdt. down (in
Hom. with tmesis); to wnder-bind; mostly in the mid.
to bind under one’s self, bind on; [ptep. shod]; with an
acc. of the thing: gavdahia, Mk. vi. 9; Acts xii. 8, (imo-
Sjpara, Xen. mem. 1,6, 6; Plat. Gorg. p.490e.); with
an acc. of the member of the body: rods addas with év
érouzacia added, with readiness [see érocuacia, 2], Eph.
vi. 15 (wdda cavédddrq, cavdariors, Leian. quom. hist. sit
conscrib. 22; Ael. v.h. 1,18). [Cf. B. § 135, 2.]*
JardSqpa, -ros, 76, (ix0d€w), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
Sy, what is bound under, a sandal, a sole fastened to
the foot with thongs: Mt. iii. 11; x. 10; Mk. i. 7; Lk.
ili. 16; x.43 xv.22; xxii. 35; Jn.i.27; with trav rodav
added, Acts vii. 33; xiii. 25, (odds, Plat. Alc. 1 p. 128 a.).
[See oavddrrov. | *
JmdSiKos, -ov, i. G. dmb Sixny dv, under judgment, one who
has lost his suit; with a dat. of the pers. debtor to one,
owing satisfaction to: r@ Oe, i. e. liable to punishment
from God, Ro. iii. 19 [see Morison, Critical Exposition
of Romans Third, p. 147 sq.]. (Aeschyl., Plat., Andoc.,
Lys., Isae., Dem., al.) *
$ao-Loytos, -a, -ov, i. gq. i7d fuydv av, under the yoke;
neut. 7d im. as subst. a beast of burden (so fr. Theogn.
and Hdt. down); in bibl. Grk. (since the ass was the
common animal used by the Orientals on journeys and
for carrying burdens [cf. B. D. s. v. Ass, 1]) spec. an ass:
Mt. xxi. 5 (Zech. ix. 9); 2 Pet. ii. 16; Sept. for inn,
an ass.*
Sao-Ldvvupe; fr. Hdt. down; to under-gird: 16 mAoiov,
to bind a ship together laterally with tofopara (Plat.
de rep. 10 p. 616c¢.), i.e. with girths or cables, to enable
it to survive the force of waves and tempest, Acts xxvii.
17 (where see Overbeck [or Hackett ; esp. Smith, Voyage
and Shipwreck, etc., pp. 107 sq. 204 sqq- (cf. Bondeva) }).
(Polyb. 27, 3, 3.)*
643
UTONHVLOD
tmo-kdra, under, underneath: twds [W. § 54, 6; B.
§ 146, 1], Mt. xxii.44 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 11; vii. 28;
[xil. 36 WH]; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. i. 50 (51); Heb. ii. 8;
Rev. v. 3, 13 [Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; vi. 9; xii.1. (Sept.;
Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) [Cf. W. § 50,
7N.1; B. § 146, 4.]*
Urro-Kplyopan ; 1. to take up another’s statements
in reference to what one has decided for one’s self (mid.
kpivopat), i.e. to reply, answer, (Hom., Hat., al.). 25
to make answer (speak) on the stage, i. e. to personate
any one, play a part, (often so fr. Dem. down). Hence
3. to simulate, feign, pretend, (fr. Dem. and Polyb,
down): foll. by an acc. with the inf. Lk. xx. 20. (2
Mace. vi. 21, 24; 4 Mace, vi. 15; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 153
XXXVi. (xxxill.) 2.) [Comp.: ovv-vmoxpivoyat. |*
Umd-Kpiris, -e@s, H, (UmroKpivouat, q. V-); 1. an
answering ; an answer (Hadt.). 2. the acting of a
stage-player (Aristot., Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., Leian.,
Artem,, al.). 3. dissimulation, hypocrisy : Mt. xxiii.
28; Mk. xii. 15; Lk. xii. 1; Gal. ii. 18; 1 Tim. iv. 2;
[Jas. v.12 Rec.*]; 1 Pet. ii. 1 [ef. B. § 123, 2], (2 Mace.
vi. 25; Polyb. 35, 2, 13; Leian. am. 3; Aesop. fab. 106
(284); [Philo, quis rer. div. haeres § 8; de Josepho
§14})."
$1r0-KPLT Hs, -0d, 6, (SmoKpivopat, q. V-) 3 1. one who
answers, an interpreter, (Plat., Leian.). 2. an actor,
stage-player, (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Ael., Hdian.). 3.
in bibl. Grk. a dissembler, pretender, hypocrite: Mt. vi. 2,
5,163 vii.5; xv. 7; xvi. 3 Rec.; xxii. 18; xxiii. 13 Rec.,
14 (13 Tdf.), 15, 23, 25, 27, 29; xxiv. 51; Mk. vii. 6; Lk.
vi. 42; xi. 44 RLinbr.; xii.56; xiii.15. (Job xxxiv.
30; xxxvi. 13, for 3M profane, impious.) [Mention is
made of Heimsoeth, De voce iroxpirns comment. (Bonnae,
1874, 4to.).]*
Jro-AapBave; 2 aor. tmédaBov; 1. to take up
(lit. under [ef. iad, IIL. 1]) in order to raise, to bear on
high, (Hdt. 1, 24); to take up and carry away (o7ep via
dvepnoe trodaBdvres, Stob. serm. 6 p. 79, 17): twa, Acts i.
9 (see 6POadpcds, mid.). 2. to receive hospitably, wel-
come: twd,3Jn.8LT Tr WH (Xen. an. 1, 1, 7). 3.
to take up i. e. follow in speech, in order either to reply
to or controvert or supplement what another has said
(very often so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down): ixodaBav
eimev, Lk. x. 80 (for 73y, Job ii. 45 iv. 15 vi. 1; ix. 1;
xi..15 xii..1, ete.). 4. to take up in the mind, i.e.
to assume, suppose: Acts ii. 15; foll. by dre (sc. aAciov
dyannoet), Lk. vii. 48, (Job xxv. 3; Tob. vi. 18; Sap.
xvii. 2; 3 Mace. iii.8; 4 Mace. v. 17 (18) etc., and often
in prof. auth. fr. Xen. and Plat. down).*
dd-hetppo. [-Ayuypwa WH (see their App. p. 154; cf. I,
t)], ros, 76, @ remnant (see karddeypa): Ro.ix. 27 LT
TrWH. (Sept.; Aristot., Theophr., Plut., Galen.) *
dmo-Aelrw: 1 aor. pass. bredeiPOnv; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for VNwit and Win; to leave behind [see md,
III. 1]; pass. to be left behind, left remaining, Sept. for
xvi) and \nj3: used of a survivor, R». xi. 3.*
SroAhviov, -ov, 76, (i. e. 7d bard THY Anvdv, cf. rd bmo-
Giywor), @ vessel placed under a press (and in the Orient
€ zo
UTON LT AV@
usually sunk in the earth) to receive the expressed juice
of the grapes, a pit: [dpu&ev bmodjuor, R. V. he digged a
pit for the winepress], Mk. xii. 1; see Anvds [and B. D.
s. v. Winepress]. (Demiopr. ap. Poll. 10 (29), 130;
Geop.; Sept. for 3p, Is. xvi. 10; Joel iii. 13 (av. 18);
Hagg. ii. 16; Zech. xiv. 10 Alex.) *
Srro-Aipmdve; (Airave, less common form of the verb
heim) ; to leave, leave behind: 1 Pet. ii. 21. (Themist. ;
ecel. and Byzant. writ.; to fail, Dion. Hal. 1, 23.)*
Smo-pévo ; impf. dmépevov; fut. 2 pers. plur. imopeveire 5
1 aor. bréyewa; pf. ptep. dmopepernxos; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for Mp, 137), om; 1. to remain i.e. tarry
behind: foll. by év with a dat. of the place, Lk. ii. 43;
éxet, Acts xvii. 14. 2. to remain i.e. abide, not re-
cede or flee; trop. a. to persevere: absol. and em-
phat., under misfortunes and trials to hold fast to one’s
faith in Christ [R. V. commonly endure], Mt. x. 22;
Soave UBS WN, Sati 1S Aine, THe NY [iis vise Wis |). 116
Jas. v. 11; with 77 Odie. added, when trial assails
[A. V. in tribulation (i.e. dat. of circumstances or condi-
tion) ], (cf. Kiihner § 426, 3 [Jelf § 603, 1]), Ro. xii. 12
(quite different is Sropévew 76 kuplo, MM Yin, Lam.
iii. 21,24; Mic. vii.7; 2K. vi. 33; 135}, Ps. xxxil.
(xxxiii.) 20, to cleave faithfully to [A. V. wait for] the
Lord, where the dat. depends on the verb contrary to
Grk. usage [cf. W. § 52, 16]). b. to endure, bear
bravely and calmly: absol., ill-treatment, 1 Pet. ii. 20;
eis mratdeiay, i. e. eis TO madeveoOa, [ for or unto chasten-
ing], Heb. xii. 7 ace. to the reading of L T Tr WH which
is defended at length by Delitzsch ad loc. [and adopted
by Riehm (Lehrbegriff u. s. w. p. 758 note), Alford, Moul-
ton, al.], but successfully overthrown [?] by Fritzsche
(De conformatione N. Ti. critica quam Lehm. edidit,
p- 24sqq.) [and rejected by the majority of commenta-
tors (Bleek, Liinemann, Kurtz, al.)]. with an ace. of
the thing, i Co. xiii. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Heb. x. 32; xii.
ARO Uf IeslErB des, te WH
bro-pipvycKka; fut. vrouvnow; 1 aor. inf. tropricae; 1
aor. pass. tmepvnoOny; fr. Hom. down; [ef. our ‘sug-
gest’, see avdpvnats |; 1. actively, to cause one to
remember, bring to remembrance, recall to mind: tt (to
another), 2 Tim. ii. 14; tivd te, Jn. xiv. 26 (Thue. 7,
64; Xen. Hier. 1,3; Plat., Isocr., Dem.) ; with implied
censure, 3 Jn. 10; teva mepi tuvos, to put one in remem-
brance, admonish, of something: 2 Pet.i. 12 (Plat. Phaedr.
p- 275 d.); rwd, foll. by dr, Jude 5 (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 8;
Plat. de rep. 5 p. 452c.; Ael.v.h. 4,17); eva, foll. by
an inf. (indicating what must be done), Tit. iii. 1 (Xen.
hipparch. 8, 10). 2. passively, to be reminded, to
remember: twos, Lk. xxii. 61.*
Ud-pynoIs, -ews, 7, (Srourmvyoxw), fr. Eur., Thuc.,
Plat. down; a. transitively, (Vulg. commonitio),
a reminding (2 Mace. vi. 17): év imouynoe, by putting
you in remembrance, 2 Pet. i. 13; iii. 1 [W. § 61 3
b.]. b. intrans. remembrance: with a gen. of the
obj. 2 Tim. 1. 5 [(R. V. having been reminded of etc.) ;
al. adhere to the trans. sense (see Ellicott, Huther,
Holtzmann ad loc.). Syn. se2 dvdurnots, fin.] *
644
UTOTTACLS
J1ro-povh, -fs, 7), (Umopéva) 5 1. steadfastness, con-
stancy, endurance, (Vulg. in 1 Th. i. 3 sustinentia, in
Jas. v. 11 sufferentia); in the N. T. the characteristic
of a man who is unswerved from his deliberate pur-
pose and his loyalty to faith and piety by even the
greatest trials and sufferings: Lk. viii. 15; xxi. 19;
Ro. v. 3 sq.; xv. 48q.; 2 Co. vi. 4; xii. 12; Col. i. 11;
2h. as ims vied) 582 im 0) iti eel.
x. 86; Jas. i. 3sq.; v- 11; 2 Pet.i.6; Rev. ii. 2 sq. 19;
xill. 10; xiv. 12, (cf. 4 Mace. i. 11; ix. 8, 30; xv. 30 (27);
Xvil. 4, 12, 23); with agen. of the thing persevered
in [W. § 30, 1 fin.]: rod €pyou dyadod, Ro. ii. 7; rs eAmi-
dos, 1 Th. i. 3 [ef. B. 155 (136) ]; de imopovns, [with pa-
tience (cf. W. § 51, 1b.) i. e.] patiently and steadfastly,
Ro. viii. 25; Heb. xii. 1. 2. a patient, steadfast
waiting for; [al. question this sense in the New Test.,
and render the gen. by ‘characterizing’, ‘in respect to’,
etc.]: Xpicrod (gen. of the obj.), the return of Christ
from heaven, 2 Th. iii.5; Rev. i. 9 (where LT Tr WH
év Incov [which is in Jesus]); iii. 10, (cf@Ps. XKViii.
(xxxix.) 8; for Mp2» expectation, hope, 2 Esdr. x. 2;
Jer. xiv. 8; xvii. 13; for mpm, hope, Ps. [ix. 19]; lxi.
(xii.) 6; Ixx. xxi.) 5; [Job xiv.19]; for nonin, Prov.
x. 28 Symm.; tzopevew twa, Xen. an. 4, 1, 21; App. b.
civ. 5, 81). 3. a patient enduring, sustaining : tov
raOnpatoyv, 2 Co. i. 6 (Admns, Plat. defin. p.412¢.; Oava-
tov, Plut. Pelop. 1). [Syn. see paxpoOupia, fin. ] *
Uro-voew, -G; impf. iwevdovv; fr. Hdt. down; to sup-
pose, surmise: Acts xxv. 18; foll. by an ace. with the
inf., Acts xiii. 25 [ (ef. ris, 4)]; xxvii. 27.*
drévota, -as, 7), (vrovoew), fr. Thuc. down, a surmising :
PeLimavin
tro-midtw, a later form of dromeélw, to keep down, keep
in subjection: 1 Co. ix. 27 Tdf. ed. 7 after the faulty
reading of some Mss. for imamd{o, q.v. Cf. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 461; [Soph. Lex. s. v.; W.§ 5, 1d. 5; see
apdide }.*
vro-mhéw: 1 aor. twémdevoa; (Vulg. subnavigo); to
sail under, i. e. to sail close by, pass to the leeward of:
with the ace. of the place, Acts xxvii. 4,7. (Dio Cass.,
Dio Chr., al.) *
tro-mvéw: 1 aor. bréervevoa;
neath (Aristot.).
Acts xxvii. 13.*
vromddtov, -ov, Td, (dd and mods), a footstool (Lat.
suppedaneum): Mt. v. 35; Acts vii. 49 (fr. Is. Ixvi. 1);
Jas. ii. 3; tiOévar tivd vror. tSv Today Tivos, to make
one the footstool of one’s feet, i.e. to subject, reduce un-
der one’s power, (a metaph. taken from the practice
of conquerors who placed their feet on the necks of their
conquered enemies): Mt. xxii. 44 RG; Mk. xii. 36
{here WH troxdérw rév w.]; Lk. xx. 43; Acts ii. 35;
Heb. i. 18; x. 13, after Ps. cix. (ex.) 2. (Leian., Athen.,
al.; Sept. for 079; [cf. W 26].) *
imd-oracis, -ews, 7, (vpiornme), a word very com. in
Grk. auth., esp. fr. Aristot. on, in widely different
senses, of which only those will be noticed which serve
to illustrate N. T. usage; 1. @ setting or vlacing
a. to blow under-
b. to blow softly [see imé, III. 2]:
vTocTéAAw
Ixvili, (1xix.) 3; rod otkov, Ezek. xliii. 11; rod rdqov,
Diod. 1, 66.
hence, a. that which has actual existence; a sub-
stance, real being: trav ev dépt pavracpdtev Ta pév ore
kar’ €uaaw, Ta b€ Kad’ iadoracw, Aristot. de mundo, 4
19 p. 395°, 30; davraciav péev exew mrovrov, trooracw
dé pn, Artem. oneir. 3, 14; (9 ady)) imdoracw idiav ov
exet, yervarat dé x doyos, Philo de incorruptibil. mundi
§ 18; similarly in other writ. [ef. Soph. Lex. s.v. 5; L.
and S. s.v. III. 2]. b. the substantial quality, na-
ture, of any pers. or thing: rod deod [R. V. substance],
Heb. i. 3 (Sap. xvi. 21; iS ... rivos droardoews } rivos
eidous Tuyxdvovew ods épeire Kal vopitere Oeovs, Epist. ad
Diogn. 2,1; [ef. Suicer, Thesaur. s. v.]). c. steadi-
ness of mind, jirmness, courage, resolution, (of Sé ‘Pddi0t
Oewpoivres tiv Tov Buavrivev indaracw, Polyb. 4, 50,
10; ody ova rHy Sivapu, ds Thy Urdcracw adiTod Kal TOA-
play katamenAnypévav Tay évartiov, id. 6, 55, 2; add,
Diod. 16, 32 sq.; Joseph. antt. 18, 1,6); confidence, firm
trust, assurance: 2 Co. ix.4; xi. 17; Heb. iii. 14; xi. 1,
(for M)pA, Ruth i. 12; Ezek. xix. 5; for nInIA, PSs
XXxviii. (xxxix.) 8). Cf. Bleek, Br. and. Hebr. ii. 1 pp.
60 sqq. 462 sqq.; Schlatter, Glaube im N. T. p. 581.*
vro-orédAAw : impf. vreorehAov; 1 aor. mid. dreoretAd-
RNY ; 1. Act. to draw down, let down, lower : iariov,
Pind. Isthm. 2, 59; to withdraw, [draw back]: éuavrdv,
of a timid person, Gal. ii. 12 ({cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.];
often so in Polyb.). 2. Mid. to withdraw one’s self,
i. e. to be timid, to cower, shrink: of those who from timid-
ity hesitate to avow what they believe, Heb. x. 38 (fr.
Habak. ii. 4 [ef. W.523 (487) ]); to be unwilling to utter
from fear, to shrink from declaring, to conceal, dissemble :
foll. by rod with the inf. [W. 325 (3805); B. 270 (232)],
Acts xx. 27; ovdév, ibid. 20, (often so in Dem.; cf.
Reiske, Index graecit. Dem. p. 774 sq.; Joseph. vit. § 54;
bij<t 20,1).
tro-o Toh, -7s, 7, (VrocTEAAo, G.V.), prop. a withdraw-
ing (Vulg. subiractio), [in a good sense, Plut. anim. an
corp. aff. sint pej. § 3 sub fin.]; the timidity of one stealthi-
ly retreating: ovK éopev broorodns (see eipi, IV. 1 ¢.),
we have no part in shrinking back etc., we are free from
the cowardice of etc. [R.V. we are not of them that shrink
back ete.}], Heb. x. 39 (AdOpa ta woAAd kal peP drrooroAjs
éxaxovpynoey, Joseph. b. j. 2, 14, 2; troarodnv movodrrat,
antt. 16, 4, 3).*
tmo-otpépw ; impf. iméorpepov; fut. vroorpéewa; 1 aor.
tréorpewa; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for a1v; ty
trans. to turn back, to turn about: as trmovs, Hom. Il. 5,
581. 2. intrans. to turn back i.e. to return: absol.,
Mk. xiv. 40 [here L WH madw eAOav Tr €AOov] 5 Lk. ii.
20 (here Ree. émorpép.), 43; viii. 37,40; ix.10; x.17;
XVii. 153; xix. 12; xxiii. 48,56; Acts viii. 28; foll. by an
inf. of purpose, Lk. xvii. 18; foll. by d:¢ with a gen. of
place, Acts xx. 3; e/s with an ace. of place, Lk. i. 563; ii.
89 [here T Trmrg. WH émorpéd.], 45; iv. 14; vii. 10;
iii. 39; xi. 24; xxiv. 33, 52; Acts i. 125 viii. 25; xiii.
>
Vil.
18; xiv. 21; xxi. 6; xxii. 17; xxiii. 32; Gal. i. 17; eis
2. that which has foundation, is firm; |
645
under; thing put under, substructure, foundation: Ps. |
|
|
UTopéepw
diapGopdy, Acts xiii. 34; dd with a gen. of place, Lk.
iv. 1; xxiv. 9 [WH br. do etc.]; dxé with a gen. of the
business, Heb. vii. 1; ek with a gen. of place, Acts
| Xi. 25; &« ris dyias evroAjjs, of those who after embrac-
ing Christianity apostatize, 2 Pet. ii. 21 T Tr WH, but
Lchm. (against the authorities) eis ra daicw dad ris
etc.*
vTo-oTpdvvupt and vrooTpavviw (later forms, found in
Plut., Themist., Athen., al., for the earlier UroaTopévvups
and vooropyupe): impf. 3 pers. plur. dmeatparvvor; to
strew, spread under: ri, Lk. xix. 86 (Is. viii. 5).*
UTo-TAyH, -iS) 7), 1. the act of subjecting (Dion.
Hal.). 2. obedience, subjection: 2 Co. ix. 18 (on
which see duodoyia, b.) ; Gal. ii. 5; 1 Tim. ii. 11; iii. 4.*
vro-rdcow: 1 aor. dméraéa; Pass., pf. drorerayuar; 2
aor. Umerdyny ; 2 fut. daoraynoowa; pres. mid. vmordo-
copa ; to arrange under, to subordinate ; to subject, put in
subjection: twi te or twa, 1 Co. xv. 27°; Heb. ii.5; Phil.
lii. 21; pass., Ro. viii. 20 [see é.d, B. Il. 1 b.]; 1 Co.
xv. 27° sq.; 1 Pet. iii, 22; wa or tt vad trols wodas
twos, 1 Co. xv. 27°; Eph. i. 22; dmoxdrw rev rodév twos,
Heb. ii. 8; mid. to subject one’s self, to obey; to submit
to one’s control; to yield to one’s admonition or advice:
absol., Ro. xiii. 5; 1 Co. xiv. 34 [ef. B. § 151, 30]; rept,
Ihe ih, BS Se, leh, OAS Ivey, vai, “(8 Seiit 1s Tl Oo sen, Be
xvi. 16; Eph. v. 21 sq. [but in 22G T WH txt. om. Tr
mrg. br. vrordoo.], 24; Col. iii. 18; Tit. ii. 5, 9; iii. 1;
1 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 1,5; v.53; 2 aor. pass. with mid. force,
to obey [R. V. subject one’s self, B. 52 (46)], Ro. x. 3;
impv. obey, be subject: Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet.ii.13; v.5; 2
fut. pass. Heb. xii. 9. (Sept.; [Aristot.], Polyb., Plut.,
Arr., Hdian.) *
dro-rlOnpr: 1 aor. vréOnka; pres. mid. ptcp. droriepe-
vos; fr. Hom. down; to place under (cf. dad, III. 1): ti,
to. xvi. 4 (on which see rpaynAos). Mid. metaph. to
supply, suggest, (mid. from one’s own resources); with a
dat. of the pers. and ace. of the thing: radra, these in-
structions, 1 Tim. iv. 6. (Often so in prof. auth. fr.
Hom. down.) *
§ro-rpéx@: 2 aor. vrédpayov; fr. Hom. down; prop.
to run under; in N.T. once, viz. of navigators, to run
past a place on the shore, and therefore in a higher posi-
tion (see dmomhéw): motor, Acts xxvii. 16 [R. V. run-
ning under the ‘ce of; ef. Hackett ad loc.].*
$ro-ritacts, -ews, 9, (droruTow, to delineate, outline) ;
a. an outline, sketch, brief and summary exposition, (Sext.
Empir., Diog. Laért., al.). b. an example, pattern:
mpos Wror. Tov peAdOvTav MoTEvEW KTH. for an example
of those who should hereafter believe, i.e. to show by
the example of my conversion that the same grace which
I had obtained would not be wanting also to those who
should hereafter believe, 1 Tim. i. 16; the pattern
placed before one to be held fast and copied, model:
vytavivrov Néyor, DA Mrese WSs ,
So-hépw; 1 aor. dmjveyxa; 2 aor. inf. dmreveyxeiv; fr.
Hom. down; to bear by being under, bear up (a thing
placed on one’s shoulders) ; trop. to bear patiently, to ene
dure, (often so fr. Xen. and Plat. down): ri, 1 Co. x.
UToYopew
13; 2 Tim. iii. 11; 1 Pet. ii,19. (Prov. vi. 33; Ps. Lxviii.
(Ixix.) 8; Mic. vii. 9; Job ii. 10.) *
Sro-xwptw, -@; 1 aor. vmexopnca; fr. Hom. down; to
go back [see tnd, III. 1 fin.]; to withdraw: eis rémov €py-
pov, Lk. ix. 10; with ev and a dat. of the place (see éy,
I. 7), Lk. v. 16 [ef. W. § 50, 4 a.; B. 312 (268)].*
tromate; (fr. drdmov, compounded of ind and ay,
eos, which denotes a. that part of the face which
is under the eyes; b. a blow in that part of the face;
a black and blue spot, a bruise) ; prop. to beat black and
blue, to smite so.as to cause bruises and livid spots, (Aris-
tot. rhet. 3,11, 15 p. 1413*, 20; Plut. mor. p. 921 f.; Diog,
Laért. 6, 89): rd cpa, like a boxer I buffet my body,
handle it roughly, discipline it by hardships, 1 Co. ix. 27;
metaph. (wédeus tnwmacpévat, cities terribly scourged
and afflicted by war, bearing the marks of devastation,
Arstph. pax 541) to give one intolerable annoyance [‘ beat
one out’, ‘wear one out’], by entreaties [cf. redos, 1 a.],
Lk. xviii. 5 (cf. aliquem rogitando obtundat, Ter. Eun.
3, 5, 6).*
ts, ids, 6, 9, fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for
Vit}, @ swine: 2 Pet. ii. 22.*
toowros [on the breathing see WH. App. p. 144°;
Lehm. (in both his edd.) spells it with one o in Jn. ], -ov,
9, (Hebr. aii, Ex. xii. 22; Num. xix. 6, 18, etc.), hyssop,
a plant a bunch of which was used by the Hebrews in
their ritual sprinklings: Heb. ix. 19; vooadme, i. q.
Kaddu@ voodmov, Jn. xix. 29. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.
Ysop; Arnold in Herzog xviii. p. 337sq.; Furrer in
Schenkel v. 685 sq.; [Riehm p. 1771 sq.; Low, Aram.
Pflanzennamen, § 93; Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 455
sq.; Bb. Dis. y. (esp. Am-ed:)|-*
torepéw, -&; 1 aor. vorépnoa; pf. varépnka; Pass.,
pres. torepotdpar; 1 aor. ptcp. vorepydeis; (Yorepos); 1.
Act. to be darepos i. e. behind ; i.e. a. to come late
or too tardily (so in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down): Heb. iy.
1; to be left behind in the race and so fail to reach the
goal, to fall short of the end; with dé and the gen. in-
dicating the end, metaph. fail to become a partaker : amo
ths xdapiros, Heb. xii. 15 [al. render here fall back (i.e.
away) from; cf. W.§ 30,6 b.; B. 322 (276) sq. ef. § 132,
5] (Eccl. vi. 2). b. to be inferior, in power, influ-
ence, rank, 1 Co. xii. 24 (where LT Tr WH pass. tove-
pouuéve) ; in virtue, ri ére dorepS ; in what am I still de-
ficient [A.V. what lack I yet (cf. B. $131, 10)], Mt. xix.
20 (Sir. li. 245 iva yo@ ri borepd eyo, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.)
55 und ev are pndevi peper apetns borepovvras, Plat. de
rep. 6 p.484d.); pndév or oddév foll. by a gen. (depend-
ing on the idea of comparison contained in the verb [B.
§ 132, 22]) of the person, to be inferior to [A.V. to be be-
hind] another in nothing, 2 Co. xi. 5; xii. 11. Cc.
to fail, be wanting, (Diosc. 5, 86): In. ii. 3 [not Tdf.];
ev oo. [T WH Trimrg. oe (cf. B. u. s.)] dorepet, Mk. x.
21, a. to be in want of, lack: with a gen. of the
thing [W. § 30, 6], Lk. xxii. 35 (Joseph. antt.2,2,1). 2.
Pass. to suffer want [W. 260 (244)]: Lk. xv. 14; 2 Co.
xi. 9 (8); Heb. xi. 37, (Sir. xi. 11); opp. to mepuocedvery,
to abound, Phil. iv. 12; ruvds, to be devoid [R. V. fall
646
inpnrop povéw
short] of, Ro. iii. 23 (Diod. 18, 71; Joseph. antt. 15, 6,
7); & rm, to suffer want in any respect, 1 Co. i. 7, opp.
to mAouritecbat év tim, ibid. 5; to lack (be inferior) in
excellence, worth, opp. to mepioceveww, [ A. V. lo be the worse
... the better], 1 Co. viii. 8. [Comp.: ap-vorepéa. | *
torépnpa, -ros, 7d, (VaTEpEew) ; a. deficiency, that
which is lacking: plur. with a gen. of the thing whose
deficiency is to be filled up, Col. i. 24 (on which see
davruvarrAnpde, and Oris sub fin.) ; 1 Th. iii. 10; 76 tor.
with a gen. [or its equiv.] of the pers., the absence of one,
1 Co. xvi. 17 [vp. being taken objectively (W. § 22,
7; B. §132, 8); al. take dp. subjectively and render that
which was lacking on your part]; ro tpaev bor. ths mpds
pe Aecroupyias, your absence, owing to which something
was lacking in the service conferred on me (by you),
Phil. ii. 30. b. in reference to property and re-
sources, poverty, want, destitution: Lk. xxi. 4; 2 Co. viii.
14 (18); ix.12; xi. 9, (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 10; Judg.
Xvili. 10, ete.; eccl. writ.).*
jorépyots, -ews, 7, (VeTepew), want, poverty: Mk. xii.
44; xa varépnow, on account of want, Phil. iv. 11 [ef.
card, II. 3c. y. p. 828° bot.]. (Eccl. writ.) *
Sorrepos, -a, -ov, latter, later, coming afier: év vorépos
katpois, 1 Tim. iv. 1; 6 vor. i. q. the second, Mt. xxi. 31
LTr WH, but ef. Fritzsche’s and Meyer’s crit. notes
[esp. WH. App.] ad loc. Neut. vorepov, fr. Hom.
down, adverbially, afterward, after this, later, lastly, used
alike of a shorter and of a longer period: Mt. iv. 2; xxi.
DO 3 ORS igs aeaVien dus) Srey. (60), Mike xvid aaa oman?
, Rec.; [xx. 32 LT Tr WH]; Jn. xiii. 36; Heb. xii. 11;
with a gen. after one, Mt. xxii. 27; Lk. xx. 32 [RG].*
spatve ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 178; to weave: Lk.
xii. 27 T WH (rejected) mrg.*
tpavrds, -7, ov, (dpaive, q.v.), fr. Hom.down; woven:
Jn. xix..23, _.(Por ans, Gixsexxxwin 30) Goxxix, §22))
xxxvi. 35 (xxxix. 27); for 1Wn, Ex. xxvi. 31, etc.) *
dmAos, -7, -dv, (UWe on high, dos), [fr. Hom. down],
high; lofty ; a. prop. of place: dpos, Mt. iv. 8;
xvii.1; Mk. ix. 2; Lk. iv.5 RGLbr.; Rev. xxi. 10; retyos.
Rev. xxi. i2; neut. ra dnd (the heights of heaven;
Sept. for ny7, Ps. xeii. (xciii.) 4; exii. (exiii.) 5; Is.
xxxiii. 5; lvii. 15), heaven [A.V. on high; cf. B. § 124,
8d.], Heb.i.3; exalted onhigh: tnddrepos rev ovpavar,
[made higher than the heavens], of Christ raised to the
right hand of God, Heb. vii. 26 (cf. Eph. iv.10); pera
Bpaxtovos vndod, with a high (uplifted) arm, i. e. with
signal power, Acts xiii. 17 (Sept. often év Bpaxion inrd
for 7310) IVa, as in Ex. vi.6; Deut. v. 15). b.
metaph. eminent, exalted: in influence and honor, Lk.
Xvi. 15; vpnra poveiv, to set the mind on, to seek, high
things (as honors and riches), to be aspiring, Ro. xii.
16; also Ro. xi. 20 Lmrg.T Tr WH; 1 Tim. vi. 17 T
WH mrg.; (Leian. Icaromen. 11, Hermot. 5).*
vYndo-ppovew, -6; (VnAdppwv, and this fr. dndrds
and pny); to be high-minded, proud: Ro. xi. 20—-RGL
txt.]; 1 Tim. vi. 17 [RGL Tr WH txt.], (Schol. ad
Pind. Pyth. 2, 91). In Grk. writ. weyadodppovety is more
common.*
inpuotos
tiprros, -7, -ov, (superl.; fr. Sy on high), in Grk. writ.
mostly poetic, highest, most high ; a. of place: neut.
Ta vYuora (Sept. for D179), the highest regions, i. e.
heaven (see dWnds, a.), Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 103; Lk. ii.
14; xix. 38, (Job xvi. 19; Is. lvii. 15). b. of rank:
of God, 6 deds 6 vytoros, the most high God, Mk. v. 7;
Lk. viii. 28; Acts xvi. 17; Heb. vii. 1; [Gen. xiv. 18;
Philo de leg. ad Gaium § 23]; and simply 6 tyros, the
Most High, Acts vii. 48; and without the article (cf. B.
§ 124, 8 b. note; [ WH. Intr. § 416]), Lk. i. 32, 35, 76;
vi. 35, and very often in Sir.; (Hebr. roy, roy ON,
oy Dro, ry MM; Zeds dyworos, Pind. Nem. 1,
90; 11, 2; Aeschyl. Eum. 28).*
tipos, -ovs, rd, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Sept. for
DIN, Tp, 1, etc., height: prop. of measure, Eph. iii.
18; Rev. xxi. 16; of place, heaven [A.V. on high], Eph.
iv. 8 (fr. Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19); Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49;
metaph. rank, high station: Jas.i. 9 (Job v.11; 1 Mace.
1. 40; x. 24; dos dperjs, Plut. Popl. 6).*
tow, -6; fut. dpoow; 1 aor. dpwoa; Pass. 1 aor.
VWoOnv; 1 fut. ipodijcoua; (pos); [Batr. 81; Hip-
pocr., al.]; Sept. very often for 035, also for ADI, Xv),
ou, ete.; to lift up on high, to exalt, (Vulg. exalto) : twa
or ri, prop. of place, Jn. iii. 14°; used of the elevation
of Jesus on the cross, Jn. iii. 14°; viii. 28; xii. 34; with ék
tis yns added, to remove from (lit. out of) the earth by
crucifixion (toby tia foll_ by éx, Ps. ix. 14), Jn. xii. 32
(the Evangelist himself interprets the word of the lift-
ing up upon the cross, but a carefulcomparison of viii. 28
and xii. 32 renders it probable that Jesus spoke of the
heavenly exaltation which he was to attain by the cru-
cifixion (cf. xii. 23 sqq., xiii. 831 sqq., Lk. xxiv. 26), and
employed the Aramaic word 015, the ambiguity of which
allowed it to be understood of the crucifixion ; cf. Bleek,
64
od
‘ paive
Beitrige zur Evangelienkritik, p. 231 sq.; [the ‘lifting
up’ includes death and the victory over death; the pas-
sion itself is regarded as a glorification; cf. Westcott
ad loc.]); twa €ws rod odpavod (opp. to catapiBdger [or
xataBaivety] ws ddov), metaph. to raise to the very sum-
mit of opulence and prosperity, pass., Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x.
15, [al. understand exaltation in privilege as referred to
in these pass. (see vs. 21 in Mt.)]; simply rwd, to exalt,
to raise to dignity, honor, and happiness: Lk.i. 52 (where
opp. to tamews); Acts xiii. 17; to that state of mind
which ought to characterize a Christian, 2 Co. xi. 7; to
raise the spirits by the blessings of salvation, Jas. iv. 103
1 Pet. v. 6; €uavrdv, to exalt one’s self (with haughti-
ness and empty pride), (opp. to ramews), Mt. xxiii. 12;
Lk. xiv. 11; xviii. 14;— in these same pass. WpoOnoerat
occurs, he shall be raised to honor. By a union of the
literal and the tropical senses God is said éiyéoa: Christ
TH Se&a adrov, Acts v. 31; pass. Acts ii. 33; the dative
in this phrase, judged according to Greek usage, hardly
bears any other meaning chan with (by means of) his
right hand (his power) [R. V. txt.]; but the context
forbids it to denote anything except at (to) the right hand
of God [so R.V. mrg.]; hence the opinion of those
has great probability who regard Peter’s phrase as
formed on the model of the Aramaean PO: cf. Bleek,
Einl. in das N.T. ed. 1, p. 346 [but see W. 214 (201),
215 (202); Meyer ad loc. Comp.: dmep-dw. | *
thou, -ros, 76, (iid), thing elevated, height: prop.
of space, opp. to Bados, Ro. viii. 89 (rod depos, Philo de
praem. et poen. §1; dray vaya AdBy péyoror 6 FAL0s,
Plut. mor. p. 782 d.); spec. elevated structure i. e. dar-
rier, rampart, bulwark: 2 Co. x.5. [Sept. (in Jud. x. 8;
xiii. 4, actively) ; cod. Ven. for ‘heave-offering’ in Lev.
vii. 14, 32; Num. xviii. 24 sqq.]*
P
ddyos, -ov, 6, (Payw), @ voracious man, a glutton, (it
is a subst., and differs fr. d@ayds the adj.; cf. pvyds,
gevdds; see Fritzsche on Mark p. 790 sqq., but cf.
Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 28; W. § 16, 3c. a., [and
$6, 1i.; esp. Chandler § 230]): joined with olvomdrns,
Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34.*
ddyw, see eo Gio. ‘
arrdvys (so Rec.e™s steph) or hedduns (with most Mss.
including cod. Sin., Rec.be°% G LT Tr [WH (ef. their
Intr. § 404 and App. p. 151°; W. Dindorf in Steph.
Thes. s. v. PaivdAns, col. 583)]), by metath. for the more
com. pavvéAns (found in [Epict. 4, 8, 24]; Artem. oneir.
% 3; 5,29; Pollux 7, (13) 61; Athen. 3 p. 97), -ov, 6, Lat.
paenula, a travelling-cloak, used for protection against
stormy weather: 2 Tim. iv. 13, where others errone-
ously understand it to mean a case or receptacle for
°
books as even the Syriac renders it Loads Las."
otve; [1 aor. act. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. pdvy, LT WH
in Rev. viii. 12; xviii. 23, (see below and dvadaivw; W
§15 s. v.; B. 41 (35))]; Pass., pres. gaivoyar; 2 aor.
epdavny; 2 fut. pavycopa and (in 1 Pet. iv. 18) davovpas
(cf. Kiihner § 343s. v.; [Veitch s.v.]); (do); in’ Grk.
writ. fr. Hom. down; to bring forth into the light, cause
to shine; to show. In bibl. Grk. 1. Active intransi-
tively, to shine, shed light, (which the Grks. [commonly
ParéK
(cf. L. and S.s. v. A. IT.)] express by the passive), Sept.
for Nit: Td Pas daiver, In. i. 5; 1 In. ii. 8; 6 Adxvos,
Jn. v. 853 2 Pet. i. 19, (1 Mace. iv. 50; Gen. i. 17); 6
Twos, Rev. i. 16 ; 6 fA. kal ) oeAnun, Rev. xxi. 23; 9 yyépa,
Rev. viii, 12 Rec. 2. Passive, a. to shine, be
bright or resplendent: népa, Rev. viii. 12 Tr [(see
above) ; xviii. 23 R G Tr—but see Veitchs. v.; moreover,
the foll. exx. should be brought under the next head; see
Meyer on Phil. ii. 15]; &s poorhpes, Phil. ii. 15; 6 doryp,
Mt. ii. 7; 4 dorpamj, Mt. xxiv. 27. b. to become
evident, to be brought forth into light, come to view, appear: '
Mt. xxiv. 80; opp. to dpavigerOa, Jas. iv. 14; of the
appearance of angels: ruvi, Mt. i. 20; ii. 18, 19, (2 Mace.
iii. 33; x. 29; xi. 8; of God, Joseph. antt. 7, 7, 3; for
17p3 in ref. to the same, Num. xxiii. 3); of those re-
stored to life, Lk. ix. 8; rut, Mk. xvi. 9; of growing
vegetation, to come to light, Mt. xiii. 26; univ. to appear,
be seen: hawdpeva, Heb. xi. 3; impersonally, paiverar,
it is seen, exposed to view: ovdémore edn ovras ev TO
"Iopand, never was it seen in such (i. e. so remarkable)
a fashion — never was such a sight seen — in Israel, Mt.
ix. 33. c. to meet the eyes, strike the sight, become
clear or manifest, with a predicate nom. (be seen to be)
[ef. B. $144, 15 a., 18]: Mt. vi. 16, 18; xxiii. 27sq.; 2
Co. xiii. 7; iva (sc. ) duaptia) davy dpapria (equiv. to
duaptodds), Ro. vii. 13; with the dat. of the pers. added,
Mt. vi. 5 (sc. mpooevxdpevot praying); to be seen, appear:
6 dpaptwdds mod daveirat; i.e. he will nowhere be seen,
will perish, 1 Pet. iv. 18. d. io appear to the mind,
seem to one’s Judgment or opinion: ti tpiv paivera, [ A.V.
what think ye], Mk. xiv. 64 (1 Esdr. ii. 18 (21)) ; épavn-
gav évartoy a’tav woel Anpol, Lk. xxiv. 11 [W. § 33f.; B.
§ 133, 3. Syn. see doxéo, fin. |*
Pode [L txt. Tr WH @adex (but see Tdf. Proleg. p.
104); Lmrg. barey], 6, Peleg, (28 ‘division ’), son of
Eber (Gen. x. 25): Lk. iii. 35.*
havepds, -d, -dv, (paivouas), fr. [Pind.], Hdt. down, ap-
parent, manifest, evident, known, (opp. to Kpumrés and
ardxpudos): Gal. v.19; év maow, among all, 1 Tim. iv.
15 Rec.; év adrois, in their minds, Ro. i. 19; revi, dat. of
the pers., manifest to one, of a pers. or thing that has
become known, Acts iv. 16; vii. 13; [1 Tim. iv.15 GL
TTrWH]; qavepdv yiverbar: Mk. vi. 14; (Lk. viii.
17]; 1 Co. iii. 13; xiv. 25; év dpiv, among you, 1 Co.
xi. 19; év with a dat. of the place, Phil. i. 13 [see
mpata@piov, 3]; cavepdv moreiv tiva, [A. V. to make one
known, i. e.] disclose who and what he is, Mt. xii. 16;
Mk. iii. 12; eds avepdy édOeiv, to come to light, come to
open view, Mk. iv. 22; Lk. viii. 17; é 76 pavep@, in
public, openly (opp. to év 76 xpumrd), Mt. vi. 4 Rec., 6
RG, [18 Rec.]; Ro. ii. 28 [here A.V. outward, outward-
ly}. manifest i.e. to be plainly recognized or known:
foll. by @v with a dat. of the thing in (by) which, 1 Jn.
iii. 10. [Syw. see jos, fin.] *
pavepdo, -&; fut. havepdow; 1 aor. epavépwoa; Pass.,
pres. puvepovpat; pf. meavépopar; 1 aor. epavepdOnv; 1
fut. pavepwOhoopa; (pavepss); to make manifest or visi-
bie or known what has been hidden or unknown, to
648
pavepow
manifest, whether by words, or deeds, or in any other
way ; a. with an acc. of the thing: pass., Mk. iv.
22; Eph. v. 13; Rev. iii. 18; ra épya rwés, pass. Jn. iil.
21; with 4% ru added, Jn. ix. 8; rv dd£av adrod, of
Christ, Jn. ii. 115 sc. rv yoaow, 2 Co. xi.6 LT Tr WH;
tas Bovdas tev Kapdior, of God as judge, 1 Co. iv. 5; rH
Gopi tis yoooews adtov SC judy ev ravtt rom@, 2 Co. ii.
14; ri orovdny tpuav évomov tod beov, pass. 2 Co. vii.
12; ryv Conv tov “Incod ev Th oaHpatt, €v tH OynTH capki,
pass. 2 Co. iv. 10 sq.; ydpes tov Geod avepwbeiaa dia TIS
emupaveias Tod Xpiotov, 2 Tim. i. 10; pass. used of some-
thing hitherto non-existent but now made actual and
visible, realized, 1 Jn. iii. 2 (Germ. verwirklicht werden,
in die Erscheinung treten); 660s, Heb. ix. 8 (ef. iter
per Alpes patefieri volebat, Caes. bell. gall. 3,1); to
bring to light or make manifest, by the advent, life, death,
resurrection, of Jesus Christ: 7é pvotnpiov, pass. Ro.
xvi. 26; with rois dyios added, Col. i. 26; to make
known by teaching: 76 dvoua tod Oeov trois dvOpwrots,
Jn. xvii. 6; 7O puornptov Tov Xprorod, Col. iv.4; roy Aoyov
avrov, of God giving instruction through the preachers
of the gospel, Tit. i. 3; 7S yvoordy tod Oeod advrois, of
God teaching the Gentiles concerning himself by the
works of nature, Ro. i. 19; pass. duxacocvvn Oeov (made
known in the gospel [cf. d:cacocvvy, 1 c. p. 149» bot.]),
Ro. iii. 21; pass. to become manifest, be made known: eév
TouT@ sc. re etc. herein that, etc. [see otros, I. 2b.], 1 Jn.
iv. 9; rd dtxar@para Tov Geod, Rev. xv. 4. b. with an
ace. of the person, to expose to view, make manifest, show
one: €avrov T@ Koop, of Christ coming forth from his
retirement in Galilee and showing himself publicly at
Jerusalem, Jn. vii. 4; rots waOnrais, of the risen Christ,
Jn. xxi.1; pass. to be made manifest, to show one’s self,
appear: éumpoobev rod Bnparos Tov Xpiotov, 2 Co. v. 10;
of Christ risen from the dead, rots paOnrais avrov, Jn.
xxi. 14; Mk. xvi. 14; with év érépa poppy added, Mk.
xvi. 12 (absol. davepwOeis, Barn. ep. 15, 9); of Christ
previously hidden from view in heaven but after his incar-
nation made visible on earth as a man among men, Heb.
ix. 26 (opp. to Sevrepov dpOnoecOa, of his future return
from heaven, ibid. 28); 1 Pet. i. 20; 1 Jn. iii. 5,8; with
év oapxi added, 1 Tim. iii. 16, (Barn. ep. 5, 6; 6, 7. 9.
14 etc.); 7 Ca (the life embodied in Christ; the centre
and source of life) épavepobn, 1 Jn. i. 2; of Christ now
hidden from sight in heaven but hereafter to return
visibly, Col. iii. 4 (cf. 3); 1 Pet. v.4; 1 Jn. ii. 28; [cf.
Westcott on the Epp. of St. John p. 79 sq.]. of Chris-
tians, who after the Saviour’s return will be manifested
ev S0&n [see Soéa, HII. 4 b.], Coi. iii. 4. Pass. to be-
come known, to be plainly recognized, thoroughly under-
stood: who and what one is, revi, Jn. i. 313; what sort
of person one is, 7 be@, 2 Co. v.11; &v rais cuverdnoeow
vpav, ibid.; Pavepoduat foil. by Gre, 2 Co. iii. 3; 1 Jn. ii.
19; €v ravti havepwOevres ev maow eis Judas, in every way
made manifest (such as we are) among all men to you-
ward, 2 Co. xi. 6 [but L T Tr WAd give the act. pavepdx
cartes, we have made it manifest]. (Hdt., Dion. Hal.,
Dio Cass., Joseph.) [Syn. see droxadtmre, fin.]*
Pavepas
havepas, (see havepds), [fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down],
adv., manifesily ; i.e. a. plainly, clearly: iSeiv twa,
Acts x. 3. b. openly: Mk. i. 45; opp. to év kpurra,
Jn. vii. 10.*
avépwcis, -ews, ij, (pavepdw), manifestation: with a
gen. of the object, 1 Co. xii. 7; 2 Co. iv. 2. ([Aristot.
de plantis 2, 1 and 9; also for oN" (Sept. 84Aacxs)
Lev. viii. 8 cod. Ven.] Eccles. writ.; Hesych.) [Syn.
See doxavrra, fin. ]*
paves, -ov, 6, (paiva), a torch [A. V. lantern; Hesych.
“Arrixol dé AuxvovKov exddouv b hyeis viv paver; cf. Phryn.
p- 59 and Lob.’s note; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 1313
Athen. 15 p. 699 d. sqq. and Casaubon’s notes ch. xviii.
see Aaprds and reff.]: Jn. xviii. 3. (Arstph., Xen.,
Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) *
PavovrA, (98139 i. e. mpdcwmov Geod), indecl., Phanuel
the father of Anna the prophetess: Lk. ii. 36.*
gavratw: (paivw); pres. pass. ptcp. pavratdpevos; fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; to cause to appear, make visi-
ble, expose to view, show : rs pavtatdspevor, the appearance,
sight, Heb. xii. 21.*
gavtracta, -as, 4, show, showy appearance, display,
pomp: Acts xxv. 23. (Polyb. 15, 25, 5, ete.; [Diod.
12, 83]; al.)*
pdvtacpa, -ros, té, (havtrdfw), an appearance; spec.
an apparition, spectre: Mt. xiv. 26; Mk. vi. 49. (Aes-
ehyl., Eur., Plat., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.; Sap. xvii. 14
(15).)*
ddpayé, -ayyos, 7, a valley shut in by cliffs and preci-
pices; a ravine: Lk. iii. 5. (Alcm., Eur., Thuc., Dem.,
Polyb., al.; Sept.) *
Papad, (719; in Joseph. antt. 2,13 and 14 Sapawbns
[also bapady, -dvos, 8, 6, 2, etc.]), 6, [indecl. B. 15 (14)],
Pharaoh, the common title of the ancient kings of Egypt
(6 papawy kar Aiyumriovs Bactdéa onpaivet, Joseph. antt.
8, 6, 2 [acc. to Ebers (in Riehm s. v. Pharao) the name
is only the Hebr. form of the Egyptian per-aa denoting
(as even Horapollo 1, 62 testifies) great house, a current
title of kings akin to the Turkish “ sublime porte”; al.
al.; see BB. DD.s. v.]): Acts vii. 13, 21; Ro. ix. 17; Heb.
xi. 24; bapad with Bacweds Alyorrov added in apposi-
tion (as if dapaw were a proper name, as sometimes in
the O. T.: o-yn 49p my, 1 K. iii. 1; ix.16; 2 K.
xvii. 7; Is. xxxvi. 6, etc.; 1 Esdr. i. 23), Acts vii. 10.
Cf. Vathinger in Herzog xi. p. 490 sqq.; [Evers in Riehm
ih GbE
Papés [on its accent see Tdf. Proleg. p. 104], 4, (712
4 breach, Gen. xxxviii. 29), Perez [A. V. Phares], a son
of Judah by Tamar his daughter-in-law: Mt. i. 3; Lk.
fii. 33.*
Papicatos, -ov, 6, a Pharisee, a member of the sect or
party of the Pharisees (Syr. baw, rabbinic pwn3,
fr. 9 ‘to separate’, because deviating in their life from
the general usage; Suidas s.v. quotes Cedrenus as fol-
lows, bapicaior, of Epynvevdpevor dpwpropevoe* mapa To pEpt-
ew x. dhopilew éavtods rév Grr drrdvrav eis Te TO xaOa-
podrarov rod Biov kat axpiBéorarov, «at els Th TOD vo"OU
?
649
pappakevs
évrdAuara). The first and feeble beginnings of this sect
seem to be traceable to the age immediately succeeding
the return from exile. In addition to the books of the
O.T. the Pharisees recognized in oral tradition (see
mapadoars, 2) a standard of belief and life (Joseph. antt.
13,10,6; Mt.xv.1; Mk. vii. 3). They sought for dis-
tinction and praise by the observance of external rites
and by the outward forms of piety, such as ablutions,
fastings, prayers, and alms-giving; and, comparatively
negligent of genuine piety, they prided themselves on
their fancied good works. They held strenuously to a
belief in the existence of good and evil angels, and to
the expectation of a Messiah; and they cherished the
hope that the dead, after a preliminary experience
either of reward or of penalty in Hades, would be re-
called to life by him and be requited each according to
his individual deeds. In opposition to the usurped do-
minion of the Herods and the rule of the Romans, they
stoutly upheld the theocracy and their country’s cause,
and possessed great influence with the common people.
According to Josephus (antt. 17, 2, 4) they numbered
more than 6000. They were bitter enemies of Jesus
and his cause; and were in turn severely rebuked by
him for their avarice, ambition, hollow reliance on out-
ward works, and affectation of piety in order to gain
notoriety: Mt. iii. 7; v. 20; vii. 29 Lchm.; ix. 11, 14,
84; xii. 2, 14,24, 38 Lchm. om.; xv. 1, 12; xvi. 1,6, 11sq.3
xix. 3; xxi. 453 [xxii. 15,34, 41]; xxiii. 2, 13-15, 23, 25-
QOS XX Vil OZR we Mik. GahG.24 seiilOnn vite Ihuowo
Villy 15) D sapixe Liat! pret Duliemecs 2:sclle diem ly iconven lide
21, 30, 333 vi. 2, 7; vii. 30, 36 sq. 39; xi. 37-39, 42-44
[but in 44G TTr WH om. Lbr. the cl.J, 535 xii. 1;
SUhiL, BUS Seis BRS WG Sith UNS sani ADS soni) G6 pk
xix. 893 Jn. i. 245 iil. 13 iv. 1; vil. 32, 45, 47sq.3 viii.
8, 13; ix. [13], 15 sq. 40; xi. 46 sq. 575 xii. 19,425 xviii.
8; Acts v. 34; xv. 5; xxiii. 6-9; xxvi. 5; Phil. iii. 5.
Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Pharisder; Reuss in Herzog xi.
p- 496, and the works referred to above s. v. Zaddouxaios,
fin. [esp. Sieffert’s dissertation in Herzog ed. 2 (vol. xiii.
p. 210 sqq.) and the copious reff. at its close]. An ad-
mirable idea of the opinions and practices of the Phari-
sees may be gathered also from Paret, Ueber d. Phari-
siismus des Josephus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for
1856, No. 4, p. 809 sqq.*
dappoxela [WH xia, so T (exe. in Gal. v. 20; ef. the
Proleg. p. 88); see I, e],-as, 9, (pappaxevo) ; a. the
use or the administering of drugs (Xen. mem. 4, 2,
17). b. poisoning (Plat., Polyb., al.) : Rev. ix. 21
[here WH txt. Tr mrg. dappakov ; many interpp. refer
the pass. to next head ]. ce. sorcery, magical arts,
often found in connection with idolatry and fostered by
it: Gal. v. 20 [where see Bp. Lghtft.] (Sap. xii. 4;
xviii. 18; for D°DUWd, Is. xlvii. 95 for oy), Ex. vii. 22;
viii. 18; for Dum, Ex. vii. 11); trop. of the decep-
tions and seductions of idolatry, Rev. xviii. 23.*
happaxets, -éas, 6, (Pdppakov), one who prepares or
uses magical remedies; a sorcerer: Rev. xxi. 8 Rec.
(Soph., Plat., Joseph., Leian., Plats al)=
pdppaxop
[pdppaxoy, -ov, rd, fr. Hom. down, a drug; an enchant-
ment: Tr mrg. WH txt. in Rev. ix. 21 (R.V. sorceries),
for dappaketa, q. v. (in b.).*]
happakds, -7, -dv, (pappdcow [to use a pdppaxor]), [fr.
Arstph. down]; 1. pertaining to magical arts.
6 dappakés, subst., i. e. Pappakets, q.v.: Rev. xxi. 8 GL
T Tr WH; xxii. 15. (Sept. several times for W219.) *
dacs, -ews, 9, (fr. paiva) 5 1. in the Attic ora-
tors, the exposure of (informing against) those who have
embezzled the property of the state, or violated the laws
respecting the importation or exportation of merchandise,
or defrauded their wards. 2. univ. a disclosure of
secret crime (kowads Sé pdoets ekadodvro macat ai pnvoces
tav Aavbavdvrev adiknudroy, Pollux 8, 6,47): Susan. 55
Theod.; of information by report [A. V. tidings], Acts
xxi. 31.*
dcx; impf. épackov; (PAQ, Pops); fr. Hom. down;
io affirm, allege, to pretend or profess: foll. by the ace.
with the inf., Acts xxiv. 9; xxv. 19; with the inf. and
an ace. referring to the subject, Rev. ii. 2 Rec. ; foll. by
an inf. with a subject nom., Ro. i. 22.*
irvn, -ns, 9, [(waréouae to eat; Vanicek p. 445)], @
erib, mangers Lk. ii. 7, 12,16; xiii. 15. (From Hom.
down; Sept. for 0118, Job xxxix. 9; Prov. xiv. 4; Is.
i. 3; plur. for 0°59, Hab. iii. 17.) *
aiddos, -n, -ov, (akin to Germ. faul and flau), easy,
slight, ordinary, mean, worthless, of no account; ethically,
bad, wicked, base (Theogn. [?], Eur., Xen., Plat., Plut.) :
Jas. iii. 165 hadddv re éyewv mepi twos, Tit.ii. 8; haddva
mpacoew, [R.V. to do ill], Jn. ili. 20; ra h. mpaooew opp.
to ta dyaa moveiv, Jn. v. 29; paddov (opp. to dyabdv)
mpdooeyv, Ro. ix. 11 LT TrWH3; 2 Co. v. 10 T Tr txt.
WH. [See Trench, Syn. § lxxxiv.]*
d€yyos, -ovs, 76, (akin to daivew), fr. Aeschyl. and
Pind. down, light: of the moon, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii.
24; of a candle or lamp, Lk. xi. 33 R GT Trumrg. [ef.
Gorparh, ib. vs. 36]. (Joel ii. 10; iii. (iv.) 15 (20) ; Ezek.
1545013527 Eos uvat.!6s).*
[Syn.: aby, Péyyos, Pas: Pas light—the general
term, (of the light of a fire in Mk. xiv. 54; Lk. xxii. 56);
gpéyyes amore concrete and emphatic term (cf. Lk. xi. 33), the
bright sunshine, the beam of light, etc.; adyfa still stronger
term, suggesting the fiery nature of the light ; used of shoot-
ing, heating, rays. A Greek spoke of *Alov ods, péy-
yos, aiyh; or, pwrds Péyyos, adyh; Or, Péyyous aiyh; but
these formulas are not reversible. Schmidt ch. 33; cf.
Trench § xlvi.]
helSopar; fut. Petoouas; 1 aor. epecoduny; depon. mid.;
fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Ion, 01N, JWN (to keep back);
to spare: absol. 2 Co. xiii. 2; tuvds, to spare one [W.
§ 30, 10d.; B.§ 132, 15], Acts xx. 29; Ro. viii. 823 xi.
21; 1 Co. vii. 28; 2Co. i. 23; 2 Pet. ii. 4.sq.3 to absiain
[A. V. forbear], an inf. denoting the act abstained from
being supplied from the context : kavyaoOa, 2 Co. xii. 6
(un peidou— sce. didacxew — ei eyers SiSdoxewv, Xen. Cyr.
1, 6, 35; with the inf. added, Aéyewv kaxd, Eur. Or. 893;
dpacai m THv Tvpavrxar, Plat. de rep. 9 p. 574 b.).*
dhadopévas, (fr. the ptep. Pecdduevos), adv., sparingly :
2 Co. ix. 6 (mildly, Plut. Alex. 25).*
650
2..
pepo
dedovns, see pasrhdrys.
dépw; (allied to Germ. fihren, fah-en, [Eug. bear, ete.
Scotch bairn, etc. etc.; cf. Curtius §411]); impf. épe-
pov; Pass., pres. fépopar; impf. épepdyny; fut. act. oto
(Jn. xxi. 18; Rev. xxi. 26); 1 aor. qveyxa, ptep. évéyxas;
2 aor. inf. éveyxetv (Mt. vii. 18 T WH); 1 aor. pass.
nvexOnv (2 Pet. i. 17, 21); [ef. WH. App. p. 164; B. 68
(60); W.90 (85sq.); esp. Veitch p. 668 sq.]; fr. Hom.
down; Sept. for 837 and Xv}; to bear, ie. 1. to
carry; a. to carry some burden: tov cravpiv ome
aGev twos, Lk. xxiii. 26 ; to bear with one’s self (which the
Grk. writ. express by the mid.), [A. V. to bring]: ri, Lk.
xxiv. 1; Jn. xix. 39. b. to move by bearing; pass.
like the Lat. feror i.q. moveor, to be conveyed or borne,
with a suggestion of speed or force (often so in prof.
auth. fr. Hom. down): of persons borne in a ship over
the sea, [A. V. to be driven], Acts xxvii. 15,17; of a
gust of wind, to rush, Acts ii. 2 (cf. Jer. xviii. 14); havy
évexOeioa, was brought, came, 2 Pet. i. 17, 18 (see id, I.
2a.); of the mind, to be moved inwardly, prompted,
imd mvedpatos dyiov, 2 Pet. i. 21; hepopa emi re [R. V.
press on], Heb. vi. 1. c. ace. to a less freq. use to
bear up, i. e. uphold (keep from falling): dépav ra mdvra
7 phuatt Tis Suvdyews aitod, of God [the Son] the pre-
server of the universe, Heb. i. 3 (so in the Targums and
Rabbinical writ. 520 is often used, e. g. jodiy Sain, of
God ; od Surjaopat éya pdvos pépew Tov Aadv rodrav, Num.
xi. 14, ef. 11; add, Deut. i. 9, for N35 6 ra pH [per]
dvta hepav kai ta mavta yevvdy, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 7;
fr. native Grk. writ. we have dépew tiv mwodw, Plut.
Lucull. 6; ef. Bleek, Brief a.d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 70 sq.). 2.
to bear i. e. endure (exx. without number in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. B. I. 3; [L. and S.s. v.
A. III.]) : rév dvecduopdv, Heb. xiii. 13 ; ri, to endure the
rigor of a thing, Heb. xii. 20; riva, to bear patiently
one’s conduct, or to spare one (abstain from punishing
or destroying), Ro. ix. 22. 3. io bring, bring to,
bring forward 3 a. prop.: tiva, Acts v.16; ri, Mk.
{vi.27RGT TrWH]; xi. 2T Tr WH; xii. 16; Lk. xv.
23; Acts iv. 34, 37; v.23 2 Tim. iv. 13; rid mpds triva,
Mk. i. 32; ii. 3 [T Tr mrg. WH]; ix. 17 [W. 278 (262)],
19 sq.3 [revd emi twa, Lk. xii. 11 Tr mrg.]; rend rom, Mk.
Vii. 82; vill. 225 [revd emi tuvos, Lk. v. 18]; ré tom, Mk.
xii. 15; Jn. ii. 8; with de added, Mt. xiv. 18 [here Tr
mrg. br. 8]; xvii. 17; rt mpds twa, Mk. xi. 7[T Tr
WH]; ti e’s with an ace. of the place, Rev. xxi. 24, 26;
wi ént wivax, Mt. xiv. 11; Mk. vi. [27 Lehm.], 28; dad
twos (a part of [see dd, I. 2]), Jn. xxi. 10; dépo rut
dayeiv, Jn. iv. 33. b. to move to, apply: tov Sdxru-
Aov, THY xetpa, SBde, eis with an acc. of the place, [A. V.
reach], Jn. xx. 27. fig., @éperar vpiv m1, a thing is
offered (lit. ‘is being brought’) to you: 4 xdpus, 1 Pet.
is: c. to bring by announcing: didaynv, 2 In. 10
(Tui ayyeXinv, pdOov, A6yov, Giyny, ete., in Hom., Pind.,
al.) ; to announce (see Passow s. v. p- 2231"; [L. and S,
s.v. A. IV. 4]) : @dvarov, Heb. ix. 16.
bring forth, produce ;
a. to beari.e.
a. prop.: capmdv, | Mt. vii. 18*
| f WH, 18> TJ; Mk. iv. 8 [on év é€qxovra etc. WH txta
pevyw
see ev, 15 f.]; Jn. xii. 24; xv. 2,4 sq. 8, 16; (Hom.
Od. 4, 229; Hes. opp. 117; Xen. mem. 2, 1, 28; al.). 8.
to bring forward in speech : mpodnreta, 2 Pet. i. 21 (A.V.
came]; kpiow xara twos, 2 Pet. ii. 11; [karyyopiay Kata
twos, Jn. xviii. 29 RG L Tr (but here T WH om. kata) |;
aiztdpara Kara twos, Acts xxv. 7 RG [but G om. card mils
airiay, ibid. 18 L T Tr WH; (adeas airias, reasons, Dem.
Pp. 1328, 22; amodoyicpods, Polyb. 1, 32, 4). e. to
lead, conduct, [A. V. bring, carry, ete. (Germ. Sihren) |:
émi with an ace. of the place, Mk. xv. 22; Acts xiv. 13;
(éxet) drov, Jn. xxi. 18; metaph. a gate is said épewv
(Lat. ferre [Eng. lead]) eis tiv wdduv, Acts xii. 10 (680s
. ets indy, Hdt. 2, 122; dia ris dyopas és 6 mpos na, id.
2, 138 [ef. L.andS.s.v.A.VII.]). [Comp.: dva-, dmo-,
dta-, cio-, map-evo-, ék-, émt-, KaTa-, Tapa-, TEpt-, TPO0-, TPOG-,
our, iro-pépw. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.]*
hedyo ; fut. pevéouar; 2 aor. épuyov; fr. Hom. down;
Sept. for 03] and n73; to flee, i.e. a. to fice
away, seek safety by flight: absol., Mt. viii. 83; xxvi. 56;
Mk. v. 14; xiv. 50; Lk. viii. 34; Jn. x. 12, [13 (here GT
Tr txt. WH om. L Trmrg. br. the cl.)]; Acts vii. 29; foll.
by eés with an acc. of the place, Mt. ii.13; x. 23; [xxiv.
16, here RG TWH mrg. emi]; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 21;
[Jn. vi. 15 Tdf.]; Rev. xii. 6; foll. by émi with an acc.
of the place, Mt. xxiv. 16 [here L Tr WH txt. eis]; ék
Tov mAoiov, Acts xxvii. 30; foll. by amé with agen. of the
place, in a purely local sense, to leave by fleeing, as in
Grk. writ. (cf. W. 223 (210); [B. § 131, 1]), Mk. xvi. 8;
by dé with a gen. of the pers. inspiring fear or threat-
ening danger (after the Hebr.), Jn. x.5; Jas. iv. 7;
poetically, pevéerar dm’ airév 6 Gavaros, death shall flee
from them, opp. to ¢ytnaover Gavarov, Rev. ix. 6. b.
metaph. to flee (to shun or avoid by flight) something ab-
horrent, esp. vices: with an acc. of the thing, 1 Co. vi.
18 (Sap. i. 5; 4 Mace. viii. 18); opp. to diaxewv, 1 Tim. vi.
11; 2Tim. ii. 22; Hebraistically foll. by dmé with a gen.
of the thing, 1 Co. x. 14 (dmé dwaprias, Sir. xxi. 2). ec.
to be saved by flight, to escape safe out of danger: absol.
Heb. xii. 25 RG; with an acc. of the thing, Heb. xi. 34;
Hebraistically foll. by dé with a gen. — of the thing, Mt.
iii. 7; xxiii. 33; Lk. iii. 7; of the pers. Mk. xiv. 52 [T
Tr txt. WH om. L Trmrg. br. dw’ atrarv]. d. poeti-
cally, to flee away i. q. vanish: maca vicos epvye Kal dpn
obx ebpéOnoay, Rev. xvi. 20; with the Hebraistic addi-
tion dr mpoodmov twés (as in Deut. xxviii. 7; Josh. vii.
4; viii.5; 2 Chr. x. 2, etc.; see mpdcwmoy, 1 b. p. 551°
mid.), Rev. xx. 11. [Comp. and Syn. : drop. (empha-
sizes the inner endeavor or aversion), dia. (suggests
the space which the flight must traverse), ékp. (looks
rather to the physical possibility), xara. (points to the
place or the person where refuge is sought); Schmidt,
Syn. ch. 109.]*
Sade (Lehm. &7dé, [so Tr in Acts xxiv. 22 (by mis-
take ?)]; ef. Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37; B. 13
(12); [Tdf. Proleg. p. 104; and reff. s. v. knpr€]), [lit.
‘happy’, ‘fortunate ”], -txos, 6, (Claudius [but in Tacit.
hist. 5,9 called Antonius]) Feliz, the eleventh procura-
tor of Judea, (apparently between A.D. 52 and 60).
651
Piotos
He was a freedman of Claudius and his mother Antonia,
and the brother of Pallas, the powerful favorite of the
emperor. He first married Drusilla [(?) see Dict. of
Grk. and Rom. Biogr. s. v. 4], the granddaughter of
Cleopatra and Antony; and afterwards Drusilla, the
daughter of Herod Agrippa. Acc. to Tacitus “per
omnem saevitiam ac libidinem jus regium servili in-
genio exercuit”, and by his cruelty and injustice he
stimulated the rage of the turbulent Jews against the
Roman rule. When he had retired from the province
and come to Rome, the Jews of Cesarea accused him
before the emperor, but through the intercession of his
brother Pallas he was acquitted by Nero (cf. Tacit.
hist. 5, 9, 5 sq.; annal. 12, 54; Suet. vit. Claudii, 28;
Joseph. antt. 20,7, 1 sq. and 8, 5 sq.; 7, 9; b. ip ey USSR
Acts xxiii. 24, 26; xxiv. 3, 22, 24sq. 27; xxv. 14. Cf.
Win. RWB.s. v.; Paret in Herzog iv. 354; [V. Schmidt
in Herzog ed. 2, iv. 518 sq.]; Overbeck in Schenkel ii.
263 sq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 303 sq. §19, 4;
(Farrar, St. Paul, ch. xli.].*
dypn, -ns, 7, (hnut), fame, report: Mt. ix. 26; Lk. iv.
14. [(From Hom. down.) ]*
gnpi; impf. épyv; (fr. daw, to bring forth into the
light [ef. Curtius § 407]); hence [fr. Hom. down] prop.
to make known one’s thoughts, to declare; to say: &pn, he
said (once on a time), Mt. xxvi. 61; historical writers,
in quoting the words of any one, prefix dyciv, edn, (Lat.
ait, inquit): Lk. xxii. 58; Acts viii. 36, and often;
gyoiv and épy are used of a person replying, Mt. xiii.
29; Lk. vii. 40; Jn. i. 23; ix. 38; Acts vii. 2, ete.; of
one who asks a question, Mt. xxvii. 23; Acts xvi. 30;
xxi. 37; ey peyddn tH povg, Acts xxvi. 24; dmrokpiOels
épn, Mt. viii. 8; noir is interjected into the recorded
speech of another [cf. W. § 61, 6], Mt. xiv.8; Acts xxv.
5, 22; xxvi. 25; also hy, Acts xxiii. 35; dnaiy, like the
Lat. ait, inquit, is employed esp. in the later Grk. usage
with an indefinite subject (‘impersonally’) [ef. man sagt,
on dit, they say] (inserted in a sentence containing the
words of another [cf. W. u. s.]): 2 Co. x. 10 where L
Tr mrg. WH mrg. daciv (cf. Passow ii. p. 22388°; [L.
and S. s.v. 11.1]; B. § 129, 19; [W. § 58, 9b.8.; § 64,
3])- dnaivse. 5 Geds, 1 Co. vi. 16 [here Lehm. br. dnoiv];
Heb. viii. 5; [W. 522 (486 sq.)]. The constructions of
the verb are the foll.: %y adré, airois, he replied to
him, to them, Mt. iv. 7; xiii. 28; xxi. 27, etc.; Mk. [ix.
12 TTrtxt. WH]; xiv. 29; Lk. vii. 44; Acts xxvi. 32;
drroxpibeis adt& en, Lk. xxiii. 3; py mpos twa, Lk. xxii.
70; Acts x. 28; xvi. 37; xxvi. 1; with an ace. of the
thing, 1 Co. x. 15, 19; foll. by dre, 1 Co. x. 193 tovro ete.
ért, 1 Co. vii. 29 [Rec.be el ; al. om. dre]; xv. 50; foll.
by an ace. with inf., Ro. iii. 8. [On its alleged omission,
see W.§ 64, 7a. Comp.: ovtp-pnue- |
dnultw: 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. épyuic6y; esp. freq.
in the poets fr. Hesiod down; to spread a report, to
disseminate by report: Mt. xxviii. 15 T WH mrg. (after
codd. 8 A 33 etc.) for Scadnp. q. v-*
Aeros, -ov, 6, (Porcius) Festus, a procurator of Judza,
the successor of Felix [e. A.D. 60] (see 7d [and reff.,
pbave
esp. Schiirer p. 308 sq.]): Acts xxiv. 27; xxv. 1, 4, 9,
12-14, 22-24; xxvi. 24 sq. 32. (Joseph. antt. 20, 8, 9
PMNS 8 1 I 2a wes ta)
odvw: 1 aor. épdaca [W.§158.v.J; pf. épOaxa (1 Th.
ii. 16 Ltxt. WH mrg.); fr. Hom. down; 1. to come
before, precede, anticipate: fpeis ob py POdowper (see py,
IV. 2) rods kousnOévras, we shall not get the start of those
who have fallen asleep, i.e. we shall not attain to the
fellowship of Christ sooner than the dead, nor have pre-
cedence in blessedness, 1 Th. iv. 15; ¢pOucev ém airovs
4 épyn, (God’s penal) wrath came upon them unexpect-
edly, 1 Th. ii. 16; pOacev ef’ ipas y Bacweia rod Geod,
the kingdom of God has come upon you sooner than you
expected, Mt. xii. 28; Lk. xi. 20; [but all the preceding
exx. except the first are referred by the majority of re-
cent interpp. to the foll. head ;—a meaning esp. common
when the verb is construed with prepositions ]. 2.
in the Alex. [and other later] writ. the idea of pri-
ority disappears, to come to, arrive at: ets tt, Phil. iil.
163 to reach, attain to, a thing, Ro. ix. 31; dype ris,
2 Co. x. 14; (rvi, to a thing, Tob. v. 19; gas tod ovpa-
vov, Test. xii. Patr. p. 530 |i. e. test. Rub. 5 fin.]; 4 pe-
yaroovvn gov éueyadivOn Kai epOacev eis tov ovpavdr,
Dan. 4, 19 Theod. [cf. 17, 25; pO. éws tév ovpavar, 2 Chr.
Xxvili. 95 eOacev 6 pny 6 €Bdopos, 2 Esdr. iii. 1; Philo
de mund. opif. § 1; de legg. alleg. iii. 76 ; de confus. linge.
§ 29; Plut. apotheg. Lacon. § 28; de Alex. s. virt. s.
fort. orat. ii. 5. Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.;~Geldart, Mod.
Greek, p. 206; W.§2,1b.]). [Comp.: mpo-pOdve. ]*
apres, -7, -dv, (pbeipw), corruptible, perishable, (Vulg.
corruptibilis): 1 Co. ix. 25; 1 Pet. i. 23; advOpamos, i.e.
mortal, opp. to 6 dpOapros eds, Ro. i. 23; od POaprois
apyupio 7} xpvoie, not with corruptible things, with silver
or gold, 1 Pet. i. 18 [W. § 59, 5 fin.] (ypucds x. dpyupos,
ovola déaprai, Philo de cherub. § 14; ov« dpyupov ovde
xpvady Tiva, i) aAdo Tov ev UAas POaprais, de coner. eru-
dit. grat. § 20); neut. rd Péaprdv, that which is liable
to corruption, [76 POaprév rodro this corruptible (A.V.)],
1 Co. xv. 53 sq. (Diod. 1, 6; Philo de lege. allege. 2,1;
de cherub. § 2; [Aristot.], Plut., Sext. Emp., al.; 2 Mace.
vii. 16; Sap. ix. 15; xiv. 8.)*
0éyyopar; 1 aor. ptep. pbeyEduevos; (péyyos [but
ef. Vaniéek p. 1176], BAG); depon. mid.; fr. Hom.
down; 1. to give out a sound, noise, or cry; used
by the Grks. of any sort of sound or voice, whether of
man or animal or inanimate object —as of thunder, mu-
sical instruments, etc.; [pOéyy. denotes sound in its re-
lation to the hearer rather than to its cause; the
peya Naha is a braggart, the péeya Pbeyyduevos is a lofty
orator; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 538]. 2. to proclaim;
to speak, utter: Acts iv. 183 tmépoyka, 2 Pet. ii. 18 (aScxa,
Sap. i. 8); imotiyiov dpovov év avOporivn porn pbey&d-
peevov, 2 Pet. ii. 16. [Comp.: arro-pbeyyop.at. | *
H0elpm; fut. POepd; 1 aor. pOerpa; Pass., pres. Hbeipo-
pat; 2 aor. epOdpny; 2 fut. POapnoopa; (akin to Germ.
verderben); Sept. for naw; [fr. Hom. down]; to cor-
rupt, to destroy: prop. rov vaby rod Oeod (in the opinion
the Jews the temple was corrupted, or ‘destroyed ie
652
p0opa
when any one defiled or in the slightest degree damaged
anything in it, or if its guardians neglected their duties:
ef. Deyling, Observv. sacrae, vol. ii. p. 505 sqq.), drop-
ping the fig., to lead away a Christian church from that
state of knowledge and holiness in which it ought to
abide, 1 Co. iii. 17*; rwd, to punish with death, 1 Co.
iii. 17°; i. q. to bring to want or beggary (cf. our ruin
[A. V. corrupt]), 2 Co. vii. 2; pass. to be destroyed, to
perish: & tu, by a thing, Jude 10; ¢€y with a dat. denot-
ing the condition, év r7 Popa adrar, 2 Pet. ii. 12 LT Tr
WH. in an ethical sense, to corrupt, deprave: Oetpov-
aw On xpnora dpidiae Kaxai (a saying of Menander [see
700s, 2], which seems to have passed into a proverb [see
Wetstein ad loc.; Gataker, Advers. miscel. l.i.¢.1 p.
174 sq.]), 1 Co. xv. 33; the character of the inhabitants
of the earth, Rev. xix. 2; pass. POetpowat amd twos, to
be so corrupted as to fall away from a thing [see dz,
Dis dal, .21Co. x1, 3; POetpdpevor xara tas émOupias,
[R. V. waxeth corrupt ete.], Eph. iv. 22. ([Comp.: da-,
kata-pbeipa. | *
0.w-orrwpwvds, -7, -dv, (POwdrepov, late autumn; fr.
pbive to wane, waste away, and édx@pa autumn), au-
tumnal (Polyb. 4, 37, 2; Aristot. h. a. 5,11; [Strab.],
Plut.): S€vdpa Powor. autumn trees, i. e. trees such as
they are at the close of autumn, dry, leafless and with-
out fruit, hence dkapra is added; used of unfruitful,
worthless men, Jude 12 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. A Fresh Re-
vision ete. p. 134 sq. ].*
HOcyyos, -ov, 6, (Pbeyyouat, q. V.), @ musical sound,
whether vocal or instrumental (Sap. xix. 17): 1 Co.
xiv. 7; Ro. x. 18, in this latter pass. Paul transfers
what is said in Ps. xviii. (xix.) 5 to the voices of the
preachers of the gospel. (Hom., Tragg., Xen., Plat.,
ala)
Hbovéw, -6; (POdvos) ; fr. Hom. down; to envy: rwi,
one, Gal. v. 26 [here Ltxt. Tr mrg. WH mrg. read the
accus.; see B. § 132,15 Rem.; W. § 31, 1 b.].*
8ovos, -ov, 6, fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down, envy: Ro. i.
29; Gal. v.21; 1 Tim.vi.4; Tit. iii. 3; 1 Pet.ii.13; da
pbdvor, for envy, i. e. prompted by envy [see é&d, B. IL.
2b.], Mt. xxvii. 18; Mk. xv. 10; Phil. i. 15, (Dio Cass.
44,36); mpds POdvov emimobe? 7d mvedpa 6 Kardxnoev [but
see xatotxi¢w] év qyiv; doth the Spirit which took up its
abode within us (i. e. the Holy Spirit) long enviously?
(see mpos, I. 3 g.), Jas. iv. 5 [but 7 (WH in second mrg.)
drop the interrog.]; see on the pass. Grimm in the
Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 934sqq. [SyN. see
Gros, 2 fin.]*
0opd, -as, 7, (POeipw), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down,
1. corruption, destruction, perishing, (opp. to yeveats, ori
gin, often in Plat., Aristot., Plut.; opp. to cwrnpia, Plat.
Phileb. p. 35 e.; for nw, Ps. cil. (ciii.) 4; Jon. ii. 7):
Ro. viii. 21 (on which see dSovdeia) ; 2 Pet. ii. 12* [some
(cf. R. V. mrg.) take @ here actively: eds @Ocpav, to de-
stroy]; é€v pOop4, in a state of corruption or decomposi-
tion (of the body at burial\, 1 Co. xv. 42; by meton.
that which is subject to corruption, what is perishable, opp.
to ap@apcia, ibid. 50; in the Christian sense, the loss of
pidrn
salvation, eternal misery (which elsewhere is called dré-
Aewa), Col. ii. 22 (see drdyxpnots); opp. to fw) alwnos,
Gal. vi. 8, cf. Schott ad loc. 2. in the N. T. in an
ethical sense, corruption i. e. moral decay: 2 Pet. i. 4;
ii. 12° [some take the word here actively (R.V. txt. in
their destroying), al. refer it to 1 above], 19; with THs
(ans added, Sap. xiv. 12.*
giddy, -7s, 7, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for pw. @ broad,
shallow bowl, deep saucer [Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Patera;
B. D. Am, ed. s. v. Vial]: Rev. v. 8; xv. 7; xvi. 1-4, 8,
OWA aL iguexyal. ely xx 9s
pr-dyabos, -ov, (fr. pidos and dyabds), loving goodness :
Tit.i.8, (Sap. vii. 22; Plut. praec. conjug. c.17; also
comp. Thes. c. Rom. c. 2; [ptAdyabos od didavros, Aris-
tot. magn. mor. ii. 14 p. 121218; Polyb. 6, 53,9; Philo
de vit. Moys. ii. § 2].)*
PuradAdhaa [TWH -ia (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 87), see
I,¢], -as, 9, Phi.adelphia (now Alahshar, Allahschir, [or
Ala-Shehr i. e. “The White City ” (Sayce)]), a city of
Lydia in Asia Minor, situated near the eastern base
of Mount Tmolus, founded and named by the Per-
gamene king Attalus II. Philadelphus. After the death
of king Attalus III. Philometor, B. c. 133, it together
with his entire kingdom came by his will under the
jurisdiction of the Romans: Rey. i. 11; iii. 7.*
praberdia, -as, 7, (pirtadehgos), the love of brothers
(or sisters), brotherly love, (prop., 4 Mace. xiii. 22; xiv.
1; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 12]; Joseph. antt. 4, 2, 4;
Leian. dial. deor. 26,2; Plut. libell. repi piradeAgias;
[cf. Babrius 47, 15]); in the N. T. the love which Chris-
tians cherish for each other as ‘brethren’ (see addeddés,
4); [love of the brethren] (Vulg. caritas or amor fra-
ternitatis): Ro. xii. 10; 1 Th.iv.9; Heb. xiii. 1; 1 Pet.
22 -e2iPet. invp-cf.t Inve.
pid-dderoos, -ov, (piros and ddeAgés), loving brother or
sister (Soph., Plut., Anthol.) ; in a broader sense, loving
one like abrother, Xen. mem. 2, 3,17; loving one’s fellow-
countrymen, of an Israelite, 2 Mace. xv. 14; of a Chris-
tian loving Christians, 1 Pet. iii. 8 [R.V. loving as breth-
ren].*
Qavhpos, -ov, (pidos and dvnp), [fr. Aeschyl. down
(in other senses) ], loving her husband: Tit. ii. 4 (piav-
Spor kai cappoves yuvaixes, Plut. praec. conj. c. 28).*
diravOpwrla, -as, 7, (piddvOpwros), fr. Xen. and Plat.
down, love of mankind, benevolence, (Vulg. humanitas),
[R.V. kindness]: Acts xxviii. 2; Tit. iii.4. [Cf Field,
Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad ll. cc.] *
irtavOpadmas, adv., humanely, kindly: Acts xxvii. 3.
(Isocr., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.; 2 Mace. ix. 27.)*
prdrtapyupla, -as, 7, (@Adpyupos), love of money, avarice :
1 Tim. vi. 10. (Isocr., Polyb., Ceb. tab. c. 23; Diod. 5,
26; [Diog. Laért. 6, 50; Stob. flor. 10, 38; Philo de
mut. nom. § 40]; Plut., Leian., Hdian. 6, 9, 17 (8); 4
Mace. i. 26.) [Cf£. Trench, Syn. § xxiv.]*
ir-deyupos, -ov, (pidos and dpyupos), loving money,
avaricious: Lk. xvi. 14; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Soph., Xen.,
Plat.,:al.)*
Q-avros, -ov, (pidos and airéds), loving one’s self; too
653
piréw
intent on one’s own interests, selfish: 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Arise
tot. [(cf. @iddyafos) ; rhet. 1, 11, 26 (where cf. Cope)
avdykn mdvras pidavrous eivat i} padov } Frrov]; Philo,
lege. alleg. 1, 15; Plut., [Epict.], Leian., Sext. Emp.;
dua 7d Hioe wdvras eivat prdavrovs, Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 1.)
[Cf. Trench, Syn. § xciii.]*
prA<o, -d ; impf. 3 pers. sing. epider; 1 aor. &fidnoa;
pf. mepidnka; (pidros); fr. Hom. down; 1. to love;
to be friendly to one, (Sept. several times for 278): rwd,
Mt. x. 37; Jn. v. 20 [here L mrg. dyar@]; xi. 8, 36; xv.
19; xvi. 27; xx. 2; xxi. 15-17; 1 Co. xvi. 22; Rev. iii.
19; with év wicre. added, with a love founded in and
springing from faith, Tit. iii.15; ri, to love i. e. delight
in, long for, a thing: rv mpwroxdciav, Mt. xxiii. 6;
doracpovs, Lk. xx. 46; tay Wuyny, to be desirous of pre-
serving one’s life (opp. to puceiv, to hate it when it can-
not be kept without denying Christ), Jn. xii. 25; with
nouns denoting virtues or vices: 7d Weddos, Rev. xxii.
15 (codiar, Prov. xxix. 3; viii.17); foll. by an inf., like
the Lat. amo facere, to love to do, i.e. to do with pleasure:
Mt. vi. 5 (Is. lvi. 10; Pind. Nem. 1,15; Aeschyl. septem
619; Agam. 763; Suppl. 769; Eur. Iph. Taur. 1198;
Rhes. 394; Xen. hipparch. 7, 9; Ael. v. h. 14, 37). 2.
to kiss: twa, Mt. xxvi. 48; Mk. xiv. 44; Lk. xxii. 44,
(often in the Grk. writ.; Sept. for pw, Gen. xxvii. 26
sq-, and often). 3. As to the distinction between
dyaray and dArew: the former, by virtue of its connec-
tion with d@yapya, properly denotes a love founded in ad-
miration, veneration, esteem, like the Lat. diligere, to
be kindly disposed to one, wish one well; but dideiv de-
notes an inclination prompted by sense and emotion,
Lat. amare; 6 pn tov Sedpevos ovb€ Te dyarreén av+ 6 Sé py
dyangn [-raev (?)], od8 av didot, Plat. Lys. p. 215 b.;
epidnoare ad’rov (Julius Caesar) os rarépa kal nyannoare
as evepyétnv, Dio Cass. 44, 48; ut scires, eum a me
non diligi solum, verum etiam amari, Cic. ad fam. 13,
47; L. Clodius valde me diligit vel, ut éupatixorepov
dicam, valde me amat, id. ad Brut. 1. Hence men are
said ayanav God, not didreiv; and God is said dyampoa
rov kéapov (Jn. iii. 16), and dudeiv the discifles of Christ
(Jn. xvi. 27); Christ bids us dyamay (not qudeiv) rovs
€xOpovs (Mt. v. 44), because love as an emotion can-
not be commanded, but only love as a choice. Wis-
dom says, rods éue gidodvtas dyand, Prov. viii. 17. As
a further aid in judging of the difference between the
two words compare the foll. pass.: Jn. xi. 3, 5, 386; xxi.
15-17; [even in some cases where they might appear
to be used interchangeably (e.g. Jn. xiv. 23; xvi. 27)
the difference can still be traced]. From what has
been said, it is evident that dyamay is not, and cannot
be, used of sexual love [but it is so used occasionally by
the later writers; cf. Plut. Pericl. 24,12 p. 165e.; symp.
7 p. 180 b. 6 épapevos tov epactiy ayana; ef. Steph.
Thesaur. i. p. 209 a.; Soph. Lex. s. v. dyaraw,2; Wool-
sey in the Andover Rev. for Aug. 1885, p.170sq.]. Cf.
Tittmann, Syn. N. T. i. p. 50 sqq.: Cremer s.v. dyamae
[4te Aufl. p. 9 sq.]; Trench § xii.; [Schmidt ch. 136,
esp. § 6; Cope, Aristot. rhet. vol. i. App. A. (also given
Giry
in the Journ. of Philol. for 1868, p. 88 sqq.) ; also Héhne
in (Luthardt’s) Zeitschr. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. s. w.
for 1882, p. 6 sqq-; esp. Woolsey u.s.. | COMP.: kara-
puréw. | *
An, 7, see Pidos, 2.
ArSovos, -ov, (pidos and 7ASovq), loving pleasure: 2
Tim. iii. 4. (Polyb. 40, 6, 10; Plut., Leian., al.) *
Anya, -ros, rd, fr. Aeschyl. down, a kiss (see Ppiréw,
2): Lk. vii. 45; xxii. 48, (Prov. xxvii. 6; Cant. i. 2);
&yiov, the kiss with which, as a sign of fraternal affection,
Christians were accustomed to welcome or dismiss their
companions in the faith: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20; 2
Co. xiii. 12; 1 Th. v. 26; it is alsocalled PiAnya dyamns,
1 Pet. v. 14. Cf. Kahle, De osculo sancto (Regiom.
1867); [B. D.s. v. Kiss; also Dict. of Christ. Antiq.
s. v. Kiss ].*
Sidrpov, -ovos, 6, Philemon, of Colossx, converted to
Christianity by Paul (Philem. 19), and the recipient of
the lovely little letter which bears his name in the N. T.:
Philem. 1. [BB.DD.s. v.; esp. Bp. Lght/t. Com. on
Col. and Philem., Intr.]* *
}Anros ((Chandler § 325; but] RL T Tr Anos, see
Tuxexds [ Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]), -ov, 6, Philetus, a heretic:
2 Tim. ii. 17.*
piAla, -as, 7, (pidros), friendship: with a gen. of the
object, Jas. iv.'4. [(Theogn., Hadt., al.) ]*
@uurmyoros, -ov, 6, @ Philippian: Phil. iv. 15.*
@idumrot, -wy, of, [on the plur. cf. W. § 27, 3], Philippi,
a city of Macedonia Prima [see B.D s. v. Macedonia],
situated on [near] the northern coast of the Mgean
Sea, between the rivers Strymon and Nestus, and the
cities Neapolis and Amphipolis. It took its name from
Philip I. of Macedon, who built it up from a village called
Kpnvides, and adorned and fortified it: Acts xvi. 12 (on
this pass. see kodoma); xx. 6; Phil. i.1; 1 Th. ii. 2.
[See Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Philip., Intr. iii.]*
Pidurmos, -ov, 6, Philip ; 1. ason of Herod the
Great by his fifth wife, Cleopatra of Jerusalem (Joseph.
antt. 17, 1,3), and by far the best of his sons. He was
tetrarch of Gaulanitis, Trachonitis, Auranitis, Batanea,
and (ace. to the disputed statement of Lk. iii. 1) of Itu-
rea also[cf. Schiirer as below; but see B. D. Am. ed.
s. v. Iturea]; and the founder of the cities of Cesarea
Philippi (in the Decapolis) and Julias. After having
lived long in celibacy, he married Salome, the daughter
of Herod [Philip, the disinherited ; see below] his half-
brother (Joseph. antt. 18, 5,4). He ruled mildly, justly
and wisely thirty-seven years, and in A. D. 34 died with-
out issue, leaving a grateful memory of his reign in the
minds of his subjects (Joseph. antt. 18, 2,1 and 4, 6;
b. j. 2, 9,1): Mt. xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 27; Lk. iii. 15; ef.
Keim in Schenkel iii. p. 40 sqq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeit-
gesch. §17, a.; [BB. DD.]. In Mt. xiv. 3; Mk. vi. 17,
and LK. iii. 19 Rec. it is said that his wife was Herodias
(see “Hpwdtds) ; thus Herod, the son of Herod the Great
by Mariamne the daughter of the high-priest Simon
(Joseph. antt. 18, 5,1; b.j. 1, 28,4), who lived as a pri-
vate citizen in comparative obscurity and was the first
654
piros
husband of Herodias (Joseph. antt. 18, 5, 4), seems to
have been confounded with Philip, who as a ruler was
better known (cf. Volkmar, Ueber ein. histor. Irrthum
in den Evangg., in Zeller’s Theol. Jahrbb. for 1846, p. 363
sqq-). Many interpreters (see esp. Krebs, Observv. etc.
p- 37 sq.; [Deyling, Observv. sacr. vol. ii. (ed. 2) p. 342
sqq-]), in vindication of the Evangelists, make the some-
what improbable conjecture that the first husband of
Herodias had two names, one a family name Herod, the
other a proper name Philip; [yet so Winer, RWB. s. v.
Philippus, 5; BB. DD.; Gerlach in the Zeitschr. f. Luth.
Theol. for 1869, p. 32 sq.; Meyer on Mt.1.c.; Weiss on
Mk. 1. ¢.]. 2. Philip of Bethsaida [in Galilee], one
of the apostles: Mt.x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14; Jn. i.
43-48 (44-49); vi. 5, 7; xii. 21 sq.3 xiv. 8sq.; Acts i.
13. 3. Philip, one of the seven deacons of the
church at Jerusalem, and also an ‘evangelist’ (edayyedee
ans, q-v-): Acts vi. 5; viii. 5-40; xxi. 8.*
idd-0cos, -ov, (pidos and eds), loving [A.V. lovers of}
God: 2 Tim. iii. 4. ([Aristot. rhet. 2, 17, 6], Philo,
Leian., al.) *
Pidodoyos, -ov, 6, [lit. ‘fond of talk’], Philologus, a
certain Christian: Ro. xvi.15. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com.
on Philip., note on “ Czsar’s Household” § 10.] *
prdroverkla, -as, 7, (piddverkos, q. V.), love of strife, eager-
ness to contend, (Plat., Plut., Leian., al.; 4 Mace. i. 26);
contention: Lk. xxii. 24. (2 Mace. iv. 4; Thue. 8, 763
Joseph. antt. 7, 8, 4; Antonin. 3, 4; in a good sense,
emulation, Xen., Plat., Dem., Plut., al.) *
idd-verkos, -ov, (Pidos, and veikos strife), fond of strife,
contentious: 1 Co. xi. 16. (Pind., Plat., Polyb., Joseph.,
Plut., al.; in a good sense, emulous, Xen., Plat., Plut.,
ala)
prdr0-fevla, -as, 7, (piddkevos, q. v.), love to strangers,
hospitality: Ro. xii. 13; Heb. xiii. 2. (Plat., Polyb.,
al.) *
did0-fevos, -ov, (pitos and évos), fr. Hom. down, hos-
pitable, generous to guests, [given to hospitality]: 1 Tim.
iy? seiteiaSis 1 (Peteiva9.e
piio-rpwredw ; (iAdmpwros, fond of being first, strive
ing after the first place; fr. piAos and mpaéros: Artem.
oneir. 2, 32; Plut. [Alcib. 2, 2]; mor. p. 471e. [i.e. de
tranquil. an. 12; p. 793 e. i.e. an seni sit etc. 18, 8])3
to aspire after pre-eminence, to desire to be first: 3 Jn. 9.
(Several times in eccles. writ.) *
os, -n, -ov, fr. Hom. down, friendly (ef. L. and S.
s. v. I. and II.]: @idor eivai tun, to be friendly to one,
wish him well, Acts xix. 31; 1. 6 didos, Sept. for
YY, ATs, subst., a friend: Lk. vii. 6; xi. 5; xv. 63 xvi.
9; xxiii. 12; Acts xxvii.3; 3 Jn. 15 (14); joined with
ovyyeveis, Lk. xxi. 165 an associate, opp. to Soddos, Jn. xv.
15; idot dvayxaia, [ A. V. near friends] Lat. necessitate
conjuncti, Acts x. 24; ide, friend, in kindly address,
Lk. xiv. 10; with agen. of the subject, 6 @idos twds,
LK. xi. 6, [8]; xii. 4; xiv. 123 xv. 29; Jn. xi. 11; xv.
13 sq.; spec. he who associates familiarly with one, a com
panion, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34; 6 dp. rod vupdiov, the
rabbinical ;awiw [q.v. in Buxtorf or Levy] (i.e. ‘son of
dirocodia
gladness”), one of the bridegroom’s friends who on his
behalf asked the hand of the bride and rendered him
various services in closing the marriage and celebrating
the nuptials [B. D.s. v. Marriage, HI.; Edersheim, Jew-
ish Social Life, p. 152], Jn. iii. 29 ; pidos rod Kaicapos, on
Caesar’sside, loyal to his interests, Jn. xix. 12; Geo%, esp.
dear to God, peculiarly favored with his intimacy, Jas.
fi. 23 ([ef. Harnack and Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor.
10,1; Rénsch in the Zeitschr. f. wissenschaftl. Theol. for
1873, p.583 sq.]; also in prof. auth. ef. Grimm, Exeget.
Hdbch. on Sap. vii. 27 p. 164); with a gen. of the thing,
one who finds his pleasure in a thing, ides Tod wdcpov,
Jas. iv. 4. 2. Fem. didn, p, a (female) friend: Lk.
RVI
drro-copla, -as, 9, (fr. pekdcodos), prop. love (and pum
suit) of wisdom; used in the Grk. writ. of either zeal for
or skill in any art or science, any branch of knowledge,
see Passow s. v. [cf. L.and S. s.v.]. Once in the N. T.
of the theology, or rather theosophy, of certain Jewish-
Christian ascetics, which busied itself with refined and
speculative inquiries into the nature and classes of
angels, into the ritual of the Mosaic law and the regu-
lations of Jewish tradition respecting practical life: Col.
fi. 8; see Grimm on 4 Mace. i. 1 p. 298 sq.; [Bp. Lghtft.
on Col. l. c., and Prof. Westcott in B.D. s. v. Philoso-
phy].”
oiAd-copos, -ov, 6, (Pidos and codéds), a philosopher, one
given to the pursuit of wisdom or learning [Xen., Plat.,
al.]; in a narrower sense, one who investigates and dis-
cusses the causes of things and the highest good: Acts xvii.
18. [See reff. under the preceding word.]*
diddaropyos, -ov, (Pidos, and aropyy the mutual love of
parents and children; also of husbands and wives), Jov-
ing affection, prone to love, loving tenderly; used chiefly
of the reciprocal tenderness of parents and children:
7H prradergia (dat. of respect) els dAAndAovs, [R. V. in
love of the brethren tenderly affectioned one to another],
Ro. xii. 10. (Xen., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) Cf. Fritzsche,
Com. on Rom. vol. iii. p. 69.*
diddtexvos, -ov, (pidros and réxvov), loving one’s off
spring or children: joined with @iAav8pos (as in Plut.
mor. p. 769 ¢.), of women, Tit. ii.4. (4 Mace. xv. 3-5;
Hat. 2, 66; Arstph., Eur., Aristot., Plut., Leian., al.) *
rdoripdopar, -odpar; (Pirdreyos, and this fr. pidros
and ri); depon. pass. (with fut. mid.); freq. in Grk.
writ. fr. Andoc., Lysias, Xen., Plat. down; a. to be
fond of honor ; to be actuated by love of honor; froma
love of honor to strive to bring something to pass. b.
foll. by an inf., to be ambitious to ete., 1 Th. iv.11; Ro.
xv. 20; to strive earnestly, make it one’s aim, 2 Co. v. 9.”
drrodpdvas, (Pirdhpar, q. v.), adv., kindly, in a friendly
manner, [A.V. courteously}: Acts xxvii. 7. (2 Mace. iii.
9; 4 Mace. viii. 5; occasionally in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.
and] Hdt. down.)*
dirdhpay, -ov, (pidros and dp7y), fr. Pind. and Aeachyl.
down, friendly, kind: 1 Pet. iii. 8 Rec.*
dipse, -&, [inf. pesoi, 1 Pet. ii. 15 WH (see their App.
p- 166 and Intr. § 410; B. 44 (38); see drodexardw |} ;
655
dokéo
fut. qiyoow; 1 aor. épiuwoa: Pass., pf. impv. 2 pers.
sing. mepiuwoo; 1 aor. éptpaOnv; (diuds a muzzle) ; to
close the mouth with a muzzle, to muzzle: prop. Body, the
ox, 1 Co. ix. 9 RG L WH txt. (see «nudo); 1 Tim. v. 18,
fr. Deut. xxv. 4 where for DOM; (univ. to fasten, com-
press, t@ EvA@ tov adxéva tuds, Arstph. nub. 592);
metaph. fo stop the mouth, make speechless, reduce to si
lence: twvd, Mt. xxii. 34; 1 Pet. ii. 15; pass. to become
speechless, hold one’s peace, Mt. xxii. 12; Mk. i. 25; iv.
39; Lk. iv. 35, (Joseph. b. j. prooem. § 5; lib. 1, 22, 3;
Leian. de morte peregr. 15; univ. to be kept in check,
4 Mace. i. 35).*
Pr€yov [i. e. ‘ burning”), -ovros, 6, Phiegon, a Christian
at Rome: Ro. xvi. 14.*
proyito; (PASE, q. v.); to ignite, set on fire, (Sir. iii.
30; Ex. ix. 24; Ps. xevi. (xevii.) 8; to burn up, 1 Mace.
iii. 5; Soph. Philoct. 1199): in fig. dise. to operate de-
structively, have a most pernicious power, Jas. iii. 6; in
the pass. of that in which the destructive influences are
kindled, ibid. (see wip, p. 558° top).”
H6E, gen. proyds, }, (PrA€yw [to burn ; cf. Lat. ‘flagro’,
etc.]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 297 and 72799, @ flame:
Lk. xvi. 24; on the phrases pdd¢ aupds and wip paroyds
see mvp, p. 558%
drvapéw, -@; (PAvapos, gq. V.); to utter nonsense, talk
idly, prate, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Plut., al.) ; to bring
forward idle accusations, make empty charges, Xen. Hell.
6, 3,12; joined with Braadnpeiy, Isocr. 5, 33: teva Adyots
movnpois, to accuse one falsely with malicious words,
8 Jn. 10 [A. V. prating against ete.].*
dvapos, -ov, (PAve, ‘to boil up,’ * throw up bubbles’,
of water; and since bubbles are hollow and useless
things, ‘to indulge in empty and foolish talk’); of per
sons, udtering or doing silly things, garrulous, babbling,
[A. V. éattlers}: 1 Tim. v. 18 [Dion. Hal. de comp.
verb. 26, vol. v. 215, 3; al.]; of things, foolish, trifling,
vain: dirocopia, 4 Mace. v. 10. (Plat., Joseph. vit.
§ 81; often in Plut.; Aeschyl. dial. Socr. 8, 13 ; al.)*
hoPepds, -d, dv, (PoBéw), fr. Aeschyl. down, [fearful
i. e.] 1. (actively) inspiring fear, terrible, form
dable; Sept. for 871i). 2. (passively) affected with
fear, timid; in the N. T., only in the former (active)
sense: Heb. x. 27, 31; xii. 21.*
oRéw, -G: Pass., pres. PoBodpar; impf. épeBovpyys
1 aor. époByOnv; fut. poBnOncomat; (poBos); fr. Hom.
down; to terrify, frighten, Sap. xvii. 9; to put to flight by
terrifying (to scare away). Pass. 1. to be put to
flight, to flee, (Hom.). 2. to fear, be afraid; Sept.
very often for NY’; absol. to be struck with fear, to be
seized with alarm: of those who fear harm or injury, Mt.
x. 813 xiv. 30; xxv. 25; Mk. v. 88, 86; x. 82; xvi. 83
Lk. viii. 50; xii. 7,32; Jn. xii. 153 xix. 8; Acts xvi. 383
xxii. 29; [Ro. xiii.4]; Heb. xiii.6; 1 Jn.iv. 18; opp. to
tyndodpoveiv, Ro. xi. 20; of those startled by strange
sigkts or occurrences, Mt. xiv. 27; xvii. 7; xxviii. 5, 103
Mk. vi. 50; Lk. i. 18, 30; ii. 10; ix. 34; [xxiv. 36 L in
br.]; Jn. vi. 19, 20; Acts xviii.9; xxvii. 24, [but in the
last two pass. perh. the exhortation has a wider ref-}~
poByTpov
Rev. i.17; with ofddpa added, Mt. xvii. 6; xxvii. 54;
of those struck with amazement, [Mt.ix.8 LT Tr WH];
Mk. v. 15; Lk. v. 10; viii. 25, 35. with an acc. of
the contents [cognate acc.] (see dyamda, sub fin.) : Poor
péyay, lit. to ‘fear a great fear,’ fear exceedingly, Mk.
iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9, (1 Mace. x. 8); poor adrap, the fear
which they inspire [see @dRos, 1], 1 Pet. iii. 14 (Is. viii.
12; tov Tavrddov, to be filled with the same fear as Tan-
talus, Schol. ad Eur. Or. 6); with the synonymous mrén-
ow (q- V.), 1 Pet. iii. 6. twa, to fear one, be afraid of
one, lest he do harm, be displeased, ete.: Mt. x. 263; xiv.
5; xxi. 26,46; Mk. xi. 18, 32 (cf. B. $151, 11]; xii. 12;
Lk. xix. 21; xx.19; xxii.2; Jn. ix. 22; Acts v. 26[ef.
B. § 139, 48; W. 505 (471)]; ix. 26; Ro. xiii. 3; Gal. ii
12; rdv dedv, God, the judge and avenger, Mt. x. 28; Lk.
xii. 5; xxiii. 40, (Ex. i.17, 21; 1S. xii. 18) ; ri, to fear
danger from something, Heb. xi. 23, 27; to fear (dread
to undergo) some suffering, Rev. ii. 10. in imitation of
the Hebr. (j 8}:), foll. by dad twos (ef. B. § 147, 3):
- Mt. x. 28; Lk. xii. 4, (Jer. i. 8,17; x. 2; Lev. xxvi. 2;
1 Mace. ii. 62; viii. 12; Jud. v. 23). as in the Grk.
writ., @oBovpar pn, to fear lest, with the subjune. aor.:
Acts [xxiii. 10 LT Tr WH]; xxvii. 173 pnzos, lest per-
chance, Acts xxvii. 29 [here L paz (q. v. 2), al. pyaou
(q-v.)]; 2 Co. xi. 35 xii. 20; PoByddper (i. q. let us take
anxious care) pymoré tts Sox, lest any one may seem
[see doxéw, 2 fin.], Heb. iv. 1; PoBodpat ipas, pimros
wexoriaxa, Gal. iv. 11 (see pps, 1 b.)3 oBodpae with
an inf. to fear (i.e. hesitate) to do something (for fear
of harm), Mt. i. 20; ii. 22; Mk. ix. 823 Lk. ix. 45, (for
numerous exx. in the Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down see
Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 2315*; [L. and S.s. v. B. II.
4)). 3. to reverence, venerate, to treat with defer-
ence or reverential obedience: td, Mk. vi. 20; Eph. v.
83; rév Gedy, used of his devout worshippers, Lk. i. 50;
xviii. 2,4; Acts x. 2, 22, 35; [Col. iii. 22 Rec.]; 1 Pet.
ii. 17; Rev. xiv. 7; xix. 5; also rév xvpiov, Col. iii. 22
([GLTTr WH]; Rev. xv. 4; 1d dvoua tod Geod, Rev.
xi. 18, (Deut. iv. 10; v. 29; vi. 2, 18, 24; xili.4; xiv.
22 (23); Prov. iii. 7; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 10, and many
other pass.; very often in Sir., ef. Wahl, Clavis Apocr.
V. T.s. v. fin.); of PoBovpevor r. Gedy spec. of proselytes :
Acts xiii. 16, 26, (see c€8@). Comp.: éx- poBéw.*
[Syn.: éerAhooeodat to be astonished, prop. to be struck
with terror, of a sudden and startling alarm; but, like our
“astonish ” in popular use, often employed on comparative-
ly slight occasions, and even then with strengthening parti-
cles (as ofd5pa Mt. xix. 25, drepmepecods Mk. vii. 37) ; wr 0-
ety to terrify, to agitate with fear; 7 pépmeey to tremble, pre-
dominantly physical; ¢oBety to fear, the general term;
often used of a protracted state. Cf. Schmidt ch. 139.]
$oBntpov [or -Opov (so LTr WH; see WH. App.
p- 149)], -ov, ro, (poBéw), that which strikes terror, a
terror, (cause of) fright: Lk. xxi. 11. (Plat. Ax. p. 367a.;
Hippocr., Leian., al., [but always in plur.” (L. and S.)];
for 81H, Is. xix. 17.) *
O6Bos; -ov, 6, (PéBouas; like ddpos, Tpopw.os, mévos, fr.
Dipw, rp¢pw, wevopar), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for TPN, Ws,
656
point
TD's (terror), MAM Cid.) ; 1. fear, dread, terror;
in a subjective sense (odd dare PdBos el pi) mpo-
Socia trav dd Aoyiopot BonOnydrwv, Sap. xvii. 115 mpoo-
Soxiav Aéyw Kaxod TovTO, «ire poBov, etre Sos Kadetre,
Plat. Protag. p. 358 d.): univ., 1 Jn. iv. 18; pdBos émé
tiva mimret, [Acts xix. 17 L Tr]; Rev. xi. 11 Rec.; ére
minret, Lk. i. 12; Acts xix. 17[RGT WH; Rev. xi. la
LT Tr WH]; éyévero, Lk. i. 65; Acts v. 5,11; AapBaves
twd, Lk. vii. 16 (Hom. Il. 11, 402); yiverat re, Acts ii. 435
mrnobjva poBov, Lk. v. 26; avvéxecOa pdBe, Lk. viii.
37; Eyew poBor, 1 Tim. v. 20 (Hdt. 8, 12); karepydfeo dai
tive poBov, 2 Co. vii. 11; poBeicbat PoBov (see HoBéw, 2),
Mk. iv. 41; Lk. ii. 9; with a gen. of the object added,
1 Pet. iii. 14 [so W. § 82, 2; al. subject. gen.]; dad pdBou,
for fear, Lk. xxi. 26; awd rod dB. for the fear, with
which they were struck, Mt. xiv. 26; with a gen. of the
object added, Mt. xxviii. 4; eis PoBov, unto (that ye
may) fear, Ro. viii. 15; pera poBov, Mt. xxviii. 8; with
kal tpdpov added, 2 Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi. 5; Phil. ii. 12;
év hoBo x. ev Tpope (see rpdpos), 1 Co. ii. 33 twa év PoBo
oatew (Rec.), edeav (LT Tr WH), with anxious heed.
lest ye be defiled by the wickedness of those whom ye
are rescuing, Jude 23; plur. @dB8ot, feelings of fear,
fears, [W. 176 (166)], 2 Co. vii. 5; @cBos twds, gen. of
the obj. (our fear of one): tév Iov8aiwr, Jn. vii. 13; xix.
38; xx. 19; Bacanapod, Rev. xviii. 10, 15; @avdrov, Heb.
ii. 15 (Xen. mem. 1,4, 7). In an objective sense,
that which strikes terror: poBos ayabav epywv, or more
correctly (with L T Tr WH) 76 dya66 épy@, a terror to
(or for), Ro. xiii. 3. 2. reverence, respect, (for aus
thority, rank, dignity): Ro. xiii. 7; 1 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 16
(15); 9 év poBe avaorpopy, behavior coupled with [cf.
ev, I. 5 e.] reverence for one’s husband, 1 Pet. iii. 23
poBos with a gen. of the obj.: rod xupiov, Acts ix. 31;
2 Co. v.11; Xptcrod, Eph. v. 21 [not Ree.]; Oeod, Ro. iii.
18; 2 Co. vii. 1; [Eph. v. 21 Ree.]; 6eod is omitted as
suggested by the context, 1 Pet.i.173; (often in the O. T.
mim NY and oir ney). [S¥N. see dela, déos,
fin.; cf. doBew.]*
Soin, -ys, H, [lit. ‘bright’, ‘radiant’], Phebe or Phebe,
a deaconess of the church at Cenchrex, near Corinth:
Ro. xvi. 1 [(see didkovos, 2 fin.) ].*
Powl«n, -ns, }, Phenice or Phenicia, in the apostolic
age a tract of the province of Syria, situated on the
coast of the Mediterranean between the river Eleu-
therus and the promontory of Carmel, some thirty miles
long and two or three broad, [but see BB. DD.s. v.]:
AGUS NDR Sin BA Seal Che
Powlkucoa, see Svpopoincca.
hoivé (or, as some prefer to write it, pown£; cf. W. §6,
lc.; [and reff. s. v. ejpvé]), -txos, 63 I. as an ap-
pellative, a palm-tree (fr. Hom. down; Sept. for TDA): -
ra Baia rév gow. (see Baiov), the branches of the palm-
trees, Jn. xii. 13; but poimes itself [A. V. palms] is put
for the branches in Rev. vii. 9 (2 Mace. x. 7; xiv. 4;
{so Aristot. magn. mor. § 34 p. 1196, 36]). Iva
prop. name, Phenix, a city and haven of Crete [B. D.
(esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Phenice]: Acts xxvii. 12.*
hovers
ovets, -éas, 6, (pévos), fr. Hom. down, a murderer, a
homicide : Mt. xxii. 7; Acts vii. 52; xxviii. 4; 1 Pet.
iv. 15; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii.155 dvjp dovets [cf. dvpp, 3],
Acts iii. 14.*
[SyN.: Goveds any murderer,—the genus of which oudpios
the assassin is a species; while &vOpwroxrdvos (q. v.) has in
the N. T. a special emphasis. Trench § lxxxiii.]
dhovetw; fut. ovevow; 1 aor. épdvevoa; (poves); fr.
[Pind., Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; Sept. mostly for n¥>,
also for 397, nan, ete.; to kill, slay, murder; absol. to
commit murder [A.V. kill]: Mt. v. 21; Jas. iv. 2; od (q- v.
6) ovetioers, Mt. v. 21; xix. 18; Ro. xiii. 05 (ixsexx:
15) 5 py povevons, Mk. x. 19; Lk. xviii. 20; Jas. ii. 11.
tia: Mt. xxiii. 31, 35; Jas. v. 6.*
$6vos, -ov, 6, (SENQ; cf. PdBos, init.), fr. Hom. down,
murder, slaughter: Mk. xv.7; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25; Acts ix.
1; Ro.i. 29; év pdve payatpas, Heb. xi. 37 (Ex. xvii. 13;
Num. xxi. 24; Deut. xiii.15; xx.13); plur. ddvot, mur-
ders: Mt.xv.19; Mk. vii. 21; Gal. v. 21 [T WH om. L
Tr br. dov.]; Rev. ix. 21.*
popta, -; fut. popéow [1 Co. xv. 49 RG WH mrg.];
1 aor. épdpeca, (later forms for the earlier ¢opjow and
épépnoa, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 315; Kiihner [and esp.
Veitch]s. v.; W. §13,3¢.; [B. 37 (32)]); (frequent. of
pa, and differing from it by denoting not the simple
and transient act of bearing, but a continuous or ha-
bitual bearing; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 585sq.; Hermann
on Soph. Electr. 715; [Trench § lviii.; Schmidt, ch. 105,
6]; accordingly, dyyedinv pépew means ‘to carry a (sin-
gle) message’, Hdt. 3,53 and 122; dyyediny hopéew, ‘to
serve as (fill the office of) a messenger’, Hdt. 3, 34;
hence we are said qdopeiv those things which we carry
about with us or wear, as e. g. our clothing); fr. Hom.
down; to bear constantly, wear: of clothing, garments,
armor, etc., Mt. xi. 8; Jn. xix. 5; Ro. xiii. 4 (on this
pass. see pdyatpa, 2); 1 Co. xv. 49 [see above, and WH.
Intr. § 404]; Jas. ii. 3, (Sir. xi. 5; xl. 4).*
dédpov, -ov, 76, Lat. forum; see”Anmuos.
édpos, -ov, 6, (fr. pepw, hence prop. & dépera; cf.
dBos), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for 01) and (2 Esdr. iv. 20;
vi. 8; Neh. v. 4) for 71, tribute, esp. the annual tax
levied upon houses, lands, and persons [cf. Thom. Mag.
ed. Ritschl p. 387, 13; Grotius as quoted in Trench
§ cvii. 7; see rédos, 2]: Pdpov, pdpovs d:ddvat Kaicapr,
Lk. xx. 22; xxiii. 2, (1 Mace. viii. 4, 7); dmodiddva, Ro.
xiii. 7; redetv, Ro. xiii. 6.*
dopritw; pf. pass. ptep. meopricpévos; (Pdpros, q. V-) ;
to place a burden upon, to load: oprifew rid hopriov
(on the double acc. see B. 149 (130)), to load one with
a burden (of rites and unwarranted precepts), Lk. xi.
46 ; medopricpevos ‘heavy laden’ (with the burdensome
requirements of the Mosaic Jaw and of tradition, and
with the consciousness of sin), Mt. xi. 28. (Ezek. xvi.
$3; Hes. opp. 692; Lcian. navig. 45; Anthol. 10, 5, 5;
eccles. writ.) [Comp.: dzo-poprifopa. ]*
hoprlov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of ddpros, but dimin. only in
form not in signif.; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 440; [W.
§ 2,1. fin.)), fr. Hes. down, Sept. for vn, a burden,
657
ppevarrataw
load: of the freight or lading of a ship (often so in Grk.
writ. fr. Hes. opp. 645, 695 down), Acts xxvii. 10 GL
TTr WH. Metaph.: of burdensome rites, plur., [Mt.
xxiii.4]; Lk. xi.46; of the obligations Christ lays upon
his followers, and styles a ‘burden’ by way of contrast
to the precepts of the Pharisees the observance of which
was most oppressive, Mt. xi. 30 (airés pdvos Sivarat Ba-
ardoa Zivevos hoptioy, Diog. Laért. 7, 5, 4 (171); see
¢vyds, 1 b.); of faults, the consciousness of which op-
presses the soul, Gal. vi. 5 [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.
Syn. see dykos, fin.]*
$6pros, -ov, 6, (fr. pépw), fr. Hom. down, a load, bur-
den: Acts xxvii. 10 Rec. [of a ship’s lading].*
Poprovvaros (or Sovpr. R G), -ov, 6, [a Lat. name,
‘happy "J, Fortunatus, a Christian of Corinth [ef. Bp.
Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59 (65)]: 1 Co. xvi. 17.*
payédAvov, -ov, 746, (Lat. flagellum; B. 18 (16)), a
scourge: Jn. ii. 15.”
paycdrAdw, -@: 1 aor. ptcp. dpayehdooas; [Lat. fla
gello]; to scourge: twa, Mt. xxvii. 26; Mk. xv. 15.
(Eccles. writ.) *
dpaypss, -ov, 6, (ppdocw to fence round), a hedge,
a fence: Mt. xxi. 33; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xiv. 23; trop. that
which separates, prevents two from coming together,
Eph. ii. 14 [A. V. partition], see peadroyov. (Sept. Sir.
xxxvi. 30 (27); Hdt., Soph., Thuc., Plut., al.) *
dpato: 1 aor. impv. dpdaov; fr. Hom. down; to indi-
cate plainly, make known, declare, whether by gesture
(pavica pev ork eixe, TH Se xerpt &ppatev, Hdt. 4, 113),
or by writing or speaking, or in other ways; to explain:
Twi tiv mapaBoAny, the thought shadowed forth in the
parable, Mt. xiii. 36 [RG T Tr txt.]; xv. 15. (Twice
in Sept. for 27, Job vi. 24; 77in, xii. 8.) *
dpdcow: 1 aor. éppaga; Pass., 2 aor. subj. 3 pers.
sing. dpayy; 2 fut. 3 pers. sing. ppaynoerat (2 Co. xi. 10
Reezelz GL T Tr WH); [(allied w. Lat. farcio, Germ.
Berg, Eng. borough; ef. Vaniéek p. 614); fr. Hom.
down]; to fence in, block up, stop up, close up, (ra ara
Tod pi) dxovca, Prov. xxi. 13; thy 68dv ev oxddow, Hos.
ii. 6; myyqv, Prov. xxv. 26; ordpata Aedvrav, Heb. xi.
33): @ Kavxnows adr ov hpaynoera, this glorying shall
not be stopped, i. e. no one shall get from my conduct
an argument to prove that it is empty, 2 Co. xi. 10 [on
the reading of Rec." (oppayicera) see ofpayife, init. ];
trop. to put to silence, [A. V. stop]: rd oropua, Ro. iii. 19.*
pap, -aros, 76, fr. the Hom. hymn Cer. 99 and Hat. 6,
119 down; Sept. for 83 and (in 1S. xix. 22; 2S. iil. 26;
Jer. xlviii. (xli.) 7,9) W3 (a pit, cistern), a well: Lk.
xiv. 5; Jn.iv.11sq.; pp. ths d8vccon, the pit of the abyss
(because the nether world is thought to increase in size
the further it extends from the surface of the earth and
so to resemble a cistern, the orifice of which is narrow),
Rey. ix. 1 sq.* ;
pev-arardw, -@; (ppevandrns, q. V.)? tiva, to deceive
any one’s mind, Gal. vi. 3 [more is implied by this word
than by draray, for it brings out the idea of subjec-
tive fancies” (Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; ef. Green, Orit.
Notes ad loc.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)*
hpevaTarns
hpevarrdrns, -ov, 6, (pny and dary), a mind-deceiver ;
Vulg. seductor; [A. V. deceiver]: Tit.i.10. (Several
times in eccles. writ.) *
bpthv, ppevds, H, plur. ppéves, fr. Hom. down, Sept. sev-
eral times in Prov. for 3? ; 1. the midriff or dia-
phragm, the parts about the heart. 2. the mind;
the faculty of perceiving and judging: also in the plur.;
as, 1 Co. xiv. 20.*
dplocw; very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; to
be rough, Lat. horreo, horresco, i.e. 1. to bristle,
stiffen, stand up: éppi&dv pou tpixes, Job iv. 15 Sept. ;
with épai added, Hes. opp. 510; dpas... ppicve tpixas
(cogn. ace. of the part affected), Hes. scut. 391; with
cold, da 76 Yoxos, Plut. quaest. nat. 13, 2 p. 915 b. 2.
to shudder, to be struck with extreme fear, to be horrified :
absol., Jas. ii. 19; 4 Mace. xiv. 9; like the Lat. horreo,
horresco, constr. with an acc. of the object exciting
the fear, Hom. Il. 11, 383, and often.*
povéw, -; impf., 1 pers. sing. éppdvovy, 2 pers. plur.
éppovetre ; fut. 2 pers. plur. dpovncere; pres. pass. impv.
8 pers. sing. dpoveiobw, Phil. ii. 5 RG (see 3 below) ;
(ppnv); fr. Hom. down; 1. to have understanding,
be wise, (Hom., al.). 2. to feel, to think: absol. os
wymeos éppdvour, 1 Co. xiii. 113 to have an opinion of one’s
self, think of one’s self: ar tmepppovetv map’ & Set ppoveiv,
Ro. xii. 3 (peiCov dpoveiv 4} kar avdpa, Soph. Ant. 768) ;
dpoveiy eis th cwppoveir, [R. V. so to think as to think
soberly], to be modest, not to let one’s opinion (though
just) of himself exceed the bounds of modesty, ibid. ;
trép & yéypanrat, in one’s opinion of one’s self to go be-
yond the standard prescribed in Scripture, 1 Co. iv. 6
RG (ef. B. 394 sq. (338); W. § 64,4]. with an acc. of
the thing, to think, judge: & dpoveis, what your opinion
is, Acts xxviii. 22; ovdév dAdo, Gal. v.10; ti érépas,
Phil. iii. 15; several persons are said qpoveiv 76 airé,
to be of the same mind, i.e. to agree together, cherish
the same views, be harmonious: 2 Co. xiii. 11; Phil. ii.
2; iii. 16 Rec.; iv. 2; with év d\Andous added, Ro. xv. 5;
also t6 év dpovoivres, having that one mind, Phil. ii. 2
(the phrase 16 é having reference to rd aird; see Meyer
{but cf. Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc.) ; ri irép twos, to hold some
opinion, judge, think, concerning one, Phil. i. 7; 7d adrd
eis a\AnAovus, to be of the same mind towards one anoth-
er, Ro. xii. 16. 3. to direct one’s mind to a thing, to
seck or strive for; ta twos, to seek one’s interests or ad-
vantage; to be of one’s party, side with him, (in public
affairs, Add. to Esth. viii. 5; 1 Mace. x. 20; Dio Cass.
51,4; Hdian. 8, 6, 14 (6); for other exx. fr. Xen. [or
Hat. 1, 162 fin ] down see Passow s. v. II.; [L. and S.
Il. 2 ¢.); hence) ra rod Oeod and ra rev avOp., to be in-
tent on promoting what God wills (spec. his saving pur-
poses), and what pleases men, Mt. xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 335
td THs GapKds and ta Tod mveiparos (odpé [q.v.4] and
mvevpa[q. v. p. 522°] being personified), to pursue those
things which gratify the flesh,... the Holy Spirit, Ro.
viii. 5, cf. 6. ra émiyeca, Phil. iii. 19; ra dvw and ra emi
Ts yqs, Col. iii. 2, (dvOpdmwa, Ora, Aristot. eth. Nic.
10, 7 p. 1177, 32); todro ppovetre (pres. impy.) ev ipiv,
658
g@pudcoe
[R. V. have this mind in you}, be intent within yourselves
on this, Phil. ii. 5 LT Tr WH; pass. ppovetrai re &w rem,
some habit of thought (expressed by deeds) exists in
one, Phil. ii.5 RG [A. V. let this mind be in you}; iynra
(see dynAds, b.). hpoveiv nupay, to regard a day, observe
it as sacred, Ro. xiv. 6; dp. imép twos, to take thought,
have a care, for one, Phil. iv. 10 [see dvaOd\Aw, fin.
Comp.: xata-, mupa-, wept-, imep- Pppovew. | *
dpovnpa, -ros, 75, (Ppovew, q- V.), what one has in mind,
the thoughts and purposes, [A. V. mind]: Ro. viii. 6 sq.
27. (Hesych. dpdvyya: BovAnpa, Oédnpa. In various
other senses also fr. Aeschyl. down.) *
dpdvycis, -ews, 9, (ppovew), understanding : joined with
copia (as 1 K. iv. 25 (29); Dan. i. 17 Theod.; 9 copia
dvdpt rikret ppdvnow, Prov. x. 23), Eph. i. 8 [A. V. pru-
dence; see oodia, fin.]; spec. knowledge and holy love
of the will of God [ A. V. wisdom], Lk. i. 17 (Sap. iii. 15;
Sept. for 13, 133A, 73M; used variously by Grk.
writ. fr. Soph. and Eur. down).”
povipos, -ov, (Pppovew) 5 a. intelligent, wise [so
A.V. uniformly]: 1 Co. x. 15; opp. to pwpds, 1 Co. iv.
10; opp. to appar, 2 Co. xi. 19; hpdvipos map’ éavt@,
one who deems himself wise, [A. V. wise in one’s own
conceits], Ro. xi. 253 xii. 16, (Prov. iii. 7). b. pru-
dent, i.e. mindful of one’s interests: Mt. x.16; xxiv. 45;
Lk. xii. 42; opp. to popos, Mt. vii. 24 (cf. 26); xxv. 2, 4,
8sq. compar. @porpewrepos, Lk. xvi. 8. (From Soph.,
Xen., Plat. down; Sept. for {2}, DM, 722-) [Syv.
see goes, fin.]*
dpovipws, adv., prudently, wisely: Lk. xvi. 8.
Arstph. down.]*
dpovritw; (ppovris [‘ thought’, fr. ppovéw]); fr. Theogn.
and Hdt. down; to think, to be careful; to be thoughtful
or anxious: foll. by an inf. Tit. iii. 8.*
dpovpéw, -@: impf. eppotpovy; fut. @povpyaw; Pass.,
pres. ptcp. @povpotpevos; impf. éppovpovpyny; (hpovpds,
contr. fr. rpoopds fr. mpoopdw to see before, foresee) ; fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; 1. to guard, protect by a@
military guard, either in order to prevent hostile inva-
sion, or to keep the inhabitants of a besieged city from
flight; (often so fr. Thuc. down): tiv wédw, i.e. not he
surrounded the city with soldiers, but by posting sentries
he kept the gates quarded, 2 Co. xi. 32 [R.V. guarded], cf.
Acts ix. 24. 2. metaph.: tia, pass., bard vopov, under
the control of the Mosaic law, that we might not escape
from its power, with ovykexAeopévor [ovr(y)KAecdpevoe
LT Tr WH] added, Gal. iii. 23 [R. V. kept in ward; cf.
Plut. de defect. orac. § 29; Sap. xvii. 15]; to protect by
guarding (Soph. O. R. 1479), to keep: tas xapdias éy
Xpvor@, i. e. in close connection with Christ, Phil. iv. 7;
twa eis Tt, by watching and guarding to preserve one for
the attainment of something [R. V. guarded unto etc.],
pass. 1 Pet. i. 5.*
pvdcow: 1 aor. 8 pers. plur. éppia~av; (everywhere
in prof. auth. and also in Mace. as a depon. mid. ¢pudeao-
pat [W. 24]); to neigh, stamp the ground, prance, snort;
to be high-spirited: prop. of horses (Anthol. 5, 202 43
Callim. lav. Pallad. vs. 2); of men, to take on lofty airs,
[From
ppvyavov J
behave arrogantly, (2 Mace. vii. 34; 3 Mace. ii. 2; An-
thol., Diod., Plut., al.; [cf. Wetstein on Acts as below]);
active for wI), to be tumultuous, to rage, Acts iv. 25 fr.
Besdinl*
ppiyavoy, -ov, 74, (fr. Povyw or dpvoow, pirra, to dry,
parch; cf. Lat. frigo, frux, fructus), @ dry stick, dry
twig; generally in the plur. this word comprises all dry
sticks, brush-wood, fire-wood, or similar material used
as fuel: Acts xxviii. 3. (Hdt. 4,62; Arstph., Thuc.,
Xen., Philo, al.; Sept. for wp straw, stubble, Is. xl. 24;
xli. 25 xlvii. 14; for 5:91 bramble, Job xxx. 7.) *
@pvyla, -as, 4, Phrygia, a region of Asia Minor,
bounded by Bithynia, Galatia, Lycaonia, Pisidia, Lydia,
and Mysia. Those of its cities mentioned in the N. T.
are Laodicea, Hierapolis, and Colosse: Acts ii. 10; xvi.
6; xviii. 23. [B.D.s.v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col., Intr.,
diss. i. esp. pp. 17 sq. 23 sq.]*
Piyeddos and (L TTr WH [see WH. App. p. 159])
Piyedos, -ov, 6, Phygellus [better Phyg’-elus], a Christian,
who was with Paul at Rome and deserted him [see B.D.
s. v. and the Comm.]: 2 Tim. i. 15.*
vyt, -7s, 9, (pevye), fr. Hom. down, flight: Mt. xxiv.
20; Mk. xiii. 18 Rec.*
vray, -7s, 7, (pyddoow), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for
NNW, Ww, 71D (a prison), 85> (enclosure, con-
finement), guard, watch, i. e. a. in an act. sense,
a watching, keeping watch: puddocew dvdakds, to keep
watch, Lk. ii. 8 (often in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 6,
10, etc.; Plat. legg. 6 p. 758 d. down; [cf. hudakas exeu,
etc. fr. Hom. (Il. 9, 1 etc.) on]; often also in Sept. for
DYWw Ww). b. like the Lat. custodia and more
freq. the plur. custodiae (see Klotz, Hdwrbch. [or Har-
pers’ Lat. Dict.] s.v.),i.q. persons keeping watch, a
guard, sentinels: Acts xii. 10 [here A. V. ward] (and
very often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down). c. of the
place where captives are kept, a prison: Mt. xiv. 10;
xxv. 36, [39], 43.sq.; Mk. vi. 17, 27 (28); Lk. iii. 20;
xxi. 12; xxii.33; Acts v.19, 22; vili.3; xii. 5 sq. 17;
xvi. 27,40; xxii.4; xxvi. 10; 2 Co. vi. 5 [here, as in
Heb. xi. 36, A. V. imprisonment]; 2 Co. xi. 23; 1 Pet. iii.
19; Rev. xviii. 2 [twice; rendered in A. V. hold and
cage (R.V. hold)]; xx. 7, (Hdt. 3, 152; Thue. 3, 34;
Plut., al.; Sept. for 7 uD, 873 ma, and 8720 m2,
UD); Badrew or riHévae twa eds (r.) Hudakny or ev
(rh) pudracq: Mt. v. 25; xiv. 3 [RG, al. drébero] ; xviii.
80; Lk. xii. 58; xxiii. 19, 25; Jn. iii. 24; Acts v. 25;
viii. 3 [here mapadiddvar eis .]; xii. 45 xvi. 23 sq. 37;
Rey. ii. 10. d. of the time (of night) during which
guard was kept, a watch i.e. the period of time during
which a part of the guard were on duty, and at the end
of which others relieved them. As the earlier Greeks
divided the night commonly into three parts [see L. and
S. s. v. I. 4], so, previously to the exile, the Israelites
also had three watches in a night; subsequently, how-
ever, after they became subject to Rome, they adopted
the Roman custom of dividing the night into four
watches: Mt. xxiv. 43; év 79 Sevrépa, tpiry, Lk. xii.
88: rerdprn, Mt. xiv. 25; Mk. vi. 48. Cf. Win. RWB.
659°
pvrdoow
s.v. Nachtwache; [McC. and S.s.v. Night-watch; B.D.
s. v. Watches of Night].*
pvdakilo; (pudaxy [or pvaagt]); to cast into prison,
imprison: Acts xxii, 19. (Sap. xviii. 4; eccles. and
Byzant. writ.) *
vAakrryptov, -ov, 7d, (neut. of the adj. puAakrnpios, -a,
-ov, fr. pudaxrnp [‘ poetic for pira€’]) ; 1. a forti-
Jied place provided with a garrison, a station for a guard
or garrison. 2. a@ preservative or safeguard, an ame
ulet: Dem. p. 71, 24; Diosc. 5, 158 (159) sq., often in
Plut. The Jews gave the name of gvAaxripia (in the
Talm. phon prayer-filets, Germ. Gebetsriemen; [cf. O. T.
‘frontlets’]) to small strips of parchment on which were
written the foll. pass. from the law of Moses, Ex. xiii.
1-10, 11-16; Deut. vi. 4-9; xi. 18-21, and which, en-
closed in little cases, they were accustomed when en-
gaged in prayer to wear fastened by a leather strap to
the forehead and to the left arm over against the heart,
in order that they might thus be solemnly reminded of
the duty of keeping the commands of God in the head and
in the heart, acc. to the directions given in Ex. xiii. 16;
Deut. vi. 8; xi. 18; (cf. Joseph. antt. 4, 8,13). These
scrolls were thought to have power, like amulets, to
avert various evils and to drive away demons (Targ. on
Cant. viii. 3); hence their Greek name. [But see Giinse
burg in Alex.’s Kitto s. vv. Phylacteries (sub fin.) and
Mezuza.] The Pharisees were accustomed ra gdvda-
KTHpta avTav mrartvvew, to widen, make broad, their phylace
teries, that they might render them more conspicuous
and show themselves to be more eager than the majority
to be reminded of God’s law: Mt. xxiii. 5. Cf. Win.
RWB. s.v. Phylakterien; JZeyrer in Herzog xi. 639
sqq-; Kneucker in Schenkel i. 601 sq.; Delitzsch in Riehm
270 sq.; [Edersheim, Jewish Social Life etc., p. 220
sqq-; B. D.s.v. Frontlets; esp. Hamburger, Real-Encycl.
s. v. Tephillin, vol. ii. p. 1203 sq.; Ginsburg in Alex.’s
Kitto u. s.].*
ida, -axos, 6, (pvddcaw), a guard, keeper: Acts v.
23; xii. 6,19. (From Hom. down; Sept. for 1pw.) *
budidcow; fut. dudrdéw; 1 aor. épidaéa; Mid., pres.
pvrdocopa; 1 aor. épvdragdpnv; pres. pass. Puddogopat 5
fr. Hom. down; Sept. times too many to count for 4Dw,
occasionally for 7¥), [ete.]; 1. Act. to guard (Lat.
custodio); i.e. a. to watch, to keep watch: with
gudakny added, Lk. ii. 8 (see @vAakn, a.). b. to
guard or watch, have an eye upon: twd, one, lest he es-
cape, Acts xii. 4; xxviii. 16; pass., Acts xxiii. 35; Lk.
viii. 29; ri, any thing, lest it be carried off: ra indra,
Acts xxii. 20. c. to guard a person (or thing) that
he may remain safe, i.e. lest he suffer violence, be de-
spoiled, ete., i. q. to protect: rv addnv, Lk. xi. 215 amd
twos, to protect one from a pers. or thing, 2 Th. iii. 8
[see movnpés, p. 531°], (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4,7; Ps. exl. (exli.)
9; cf. B. § 147, 3; [W. 223 (209)])3 rHv mapabqkny (or
mapaxarabyknv), to keep from being snatched away, pre-
serve safe and unimpaired, 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14;
with the addition of ets twa jpépay, i.e. that it may be
forthcoming on that day, 2 Tim. i. 12; to guard from
pury
being lost or perishing, i. e. (with the predominant idea
of a happy issue), to preserve: twd, Jn. xvii. 12 (where
évAaéa is explained by the foll. ovdeis €€ airay am@\eTo
[cf. rnpéw, fin.]) ; 2 Pet. ii. 5; twa with a pred. accus.
Jude 24; guddéer (opp. to drorécer) t. puxny els Cony
aidv. i. e. will keep it with the result that he will have
life eternal, Jn. xii. 253; éavrév dnd t. to guard one’s self
from a thing, 1 Jn. v. 21 [where cf. Westcott]. d.
to guard, i.e. to care for, take care not to violate; to ob-
serve: tov vopov, Acts vii. 58; xxi. 24; Gal. vi. 13, (Lev.
xix. 37, etc.; Soph. Trach. 616; al.; vdyous, Xen. Hell.
1, 7, 30; Plat. de rep. 6 p. 484 b.; polit. p. 292 a.); sin-
gle precepts of the Mosaic law, Mt. xix. 20 LT Tr WH;
Mk. x. 20 Lehm.; Lk. xviii. 21 LT Tr txt. WH; [ra
Sixardpara Tod vdpov, Ro. ii. 26] ; rdv Adyov rod Geov, Lk.
xi. 28; rd pnuara of Jesus, Jn. xii. 47 LT Tr WH;
apostolic directions, Acts xvi. 4; 1 Tim. v. 21. ae
Mid. a. to observe for one’s self something to es-
cape, i. e. to avoid, shun, flee from: by ause com. in Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, with an acc. of the
obj., ri, Acts xxi. 25 [A. V. keep themselves from]; tid,
2 Tim. iv. 15 [A.V. be thou ware of]; amé twos, to keep
one’s self from a thing, Lk. xii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 8, 9;
[Hell. 7, 2, 10]); ta pa, 2 Pet. iii. 17 (Gras py, Xen.
mem. 1, 2, 37; other exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2360°; [L.
and S.s. v. C. II.]). b. by a usage foreign to Grk.
writ. but very freq. in the Sept. (cf. W. 253 (238)), to
guard for one’s self (i. e. for one’s safety’s sake) so as
not to violate, i.e. to keep, observe: traira mdvra (the pre-
cepts of the Mosaic law), Mt. xix. 20 RG; Mk. x. 20
RGTTr WH; LK. xviii. 21 RG Tr mrg., (Ex. xii. 17;
Lev. xviii. 4; xx. 8, 22; xxvi. 3, and many other pass.).
[Comp.: da-puddcow. SYN. see rnpéw, fin.] *
vat, -js, 4, (fr. pve), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ; a.
a tribe; in the N.T. all the persons descended from one
of the twelve sons of the patriarch Jacob (Sept. for NUD
and 03; also for MN2wWN, see marpd, 2): Heb. vii. 13
sq.; with the addition of the genitives "Aonp, Bertapiy,
ete., Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. xi. 13 Phil. iii. 5; Rev.
v. 5; vii. 5-8; SaHdexa P. rod "Iopand, Mt. xix. 28; Lk.
xxii. 80; Jas 1.1; Rev. xxi. 12; [waca var viov *Iopana,
Rev. vii. 4]. 2. a race, nation, people: Mt. xxiv.
80; Rev. [i. 7]3 v.95 vii. 9; [xi.9]3 xiii. 7; xiv. 6.*
idroyv, -ov, Td, (fiw), a leaf: Mt. xxi. 19; xxiv. 32;
Mk. xi. 13; xiii. 28; Rev. xxii. 2. [From Hom. down.]*
ipapa, -ros, 76, (hupdw to mix), any substance mixed
with water and kneaded ; a mass, lump: of dough (Num.
xv. 20 sq.; [plur., Ex. viii. 3; xii. 34]; Aristot. probl. 21,
18 p. 929%, 25; Plut. quaest. conv. 6, 7, 2, 15 p. 698 e.),
1 Co. v. 6 sq.; Gal. v. 9, (on the meaning of which pass.
see (vpn); Ro. xi.16; of clay (Plut. praec. ger. reip. 15,
4p. 811 c.), Ro. ix. 21 [ef. B. § 140, 8 Rem.].*
voids, -7, -dr, (piors), natural; i.e. a. pro-
duced by nature, inborn, (very often so fr. Xen. [mem.
8, 9,1] down). b. agreeable to nature, (Dion. Hal.,
Plut., al.): opp. to mapa giow, Ro. i. 26, [27]. Cc.
governed by (the instincts of) nature: faa yeyervnpéva
quod, 2 Pet. ii. 12 [R. V. Zorn mere animals].*
660
pices
dvoikds, adv., in a natural manner, by nature, under
the guidance of nature: by the aid of the bodily senses,
Jude 10. [(Aristot., Philo, al.)] *
dvorde, -&; Pass., pres. Puovodpat; pf. ptep. mepvorape
vos; 1 aor. epvatwOny ; 1. (fr. pvots), to make nate
ural, to cause a thing to pass into nature, (Clem. Alex.3
Simplic.). 2. i. g. puedo, prow (fr. ddoa a pair
of bellows), to inflate, blow up, blow out, to cause to swell
up; trop. to puff up, make proud: 1 Co. viii. 1; pass. to
be puffed up, to bear one’s self loftily, be proud: 1 Co. iv.
18 sq.3 V. 23 xiii. 4; bd Tod vods ris aapKds avtov, Col.
ii. 18; taép twos (see iép, I. 2 [and cf. 5]) card twos,
1 Co. iv. 6 [see ta, II. 1d.]. (Eccles. and Byzant. writ.)*
piors, -ews, 4, (fr. Pie, q. V., as Lat. natura fr. nascor,
ingenium fr. geno, gigno), fr. Hom. Od. 10, 303 down;
nature, i.e. a. the nature of things, the force, laws,
order, of nature; as opp. to what is monstrous, abnor-
mal, perverse: 6, 9, Td mapa iow, that which is con-
trary to nature’s laws, against nature, Ro. i. 26 (oi mapa
vow ty Adpodizn xpopevor, Athen. 13 p. 605; 6 matde-
paoris... 7» napa piow Adoviy dioxer, Philo de spec.
legg.i.§ 7); as opposed to what has been produced by the
art of man: oi xara diow kddébot, the natural branches,
i.e. branches by the operation of nature, Ro. xi. 21, 24
[W. 193 (182)], contrasted with of éyxevrpirévres mapa
gvow, contrary to the plan of nature, cf. 24; 9 Kara
vow dyprédatos, ibid.; as opposed to what is imagi-
nary or fictitious: of py pice dvres Geol, who are
gods not by nature, but acc. to the mistaken opinion of
the Gentiles (Aeyduevoe Oeoi, 1 Co. viii. 5), Gal. iv. 83
nature, i.e. natural sense, native conviction or knowledge,
as opp. to what is learned by instruction and accom-
plished by training or prescribed by law: 9 vats (i.e.
the native sense of propriety) 8iddcxe rt, 1 Co. xi. 143
hice roteiv ta Tod vépov, natur& magistra, guided by their
natural sense of what is right and proper, Ro. ii. 14. b.
birth, physical origin: nets hice "Iovdaioe, we so far as
our origin is considered, i. e. by birth, are Jews, Gal. ii.
15 (pice vedrepos, Soph. O. C. 1295; rd péev pices
narpis, Tov S€ vép@ rorirny éreroinrto, Isocr. Evagr. 213
pvoer BapBapoe dvres, vd pm 5é°EAAnves, Plat. Menex.
p- 245 d.; ef. Grimm on Sap. xiii. 1); 9 ék @icews dxpo-
Bvoria, who by birth is uncircumcised or a Gentile (opp.
to one who, although circumcised, has made himself a
Gentile by his iniquity and spiritual perversity), Ro. ii.
27, ce. a mode of feeling and acting which by long
habit has become nature: huey ioe: téxva épyjs, by (our
depraved) nature we were exposed to the wrath of God,
Eph. ii, 8 (this meaning is evident from the preceding
context, and stands in contrast with the change of
heart and life wrought through Christ by the blessing
of divine grace; ice mpds ras Koddoets emetkds Zxovow
of Sapicaior, Joseph. antt. 13, 10,6. [Others (see Meyer)
would lay more stress here upon the constitution in
which this ‘habitual course of evil’ has its origin, wheth-
er that constitution be regarded (with some) as already
developed at birth, or (better) as undeveloped; cf.
Aristot. pol. 1, 2 p. 1252°, 32 sq. olov exaordy éort THs
guciwois
yevéoeas teheoOcions, tavrny hapev thy iow elvar éxd-
oTov, Gorep avOpemrov, etc.; see the exx. in Bonitz’s index
s.v. Cf. W. § 31, 6a.]). d. the sum of innate prop-
erties and powers by which one person differs from oth-
ers, distinctive native peculiarities, natural character-
istics: vos Onpiwv (the natural strength, ferocity and
intractability of beasts [A. V. (every) kind of beasts]), 4
dios 4 dvOpwrivn (the ability, art, skill, of men, the
qualities which are proper to their nature and necessa-
rily emanate from it), Jas. iii. 7 [cf. W. § 31, 10]; Oeias
kowawvot dicews, (the holiness distinctive of the divine
nature is specially referred to), 2 Pet.i.4 CApevoder...
Geias Soxodvte perecxnkévae Gicews Kata te codiay kal
Bpdyvocw tov écopevoy, Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 26).*
dvolucis, -ews, 7, (pvoida, q-v-), (Vulg. inflatio), a
puffing up of soul, loftiness, pride: plur.[ A.V. swellings]
2 Co. xii. 20. (Kecles. writ.) *
gvrela, -as, 7, (puteva, q. V.)3 1. a planting
(Xen., Theophr., Plut., Ael., al.). 2. thing planted,
@ plant, (i. gq. pirevpa): Mt. xv. 13, [Athen. 5 p. 207 d.;
Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. No. 4521 vol. iii. p. 240].*
guretw; impf. épirevov; 1 aor. epvrevoa; pf. pass.
ptep. meputevpevos; 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. sing. du-
revdOnrt; (puréy) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 03, several
times for Snw; to plant: absol., Lk. xvii. 28; 1 Co. iii.
6-8; gureiav, Mt. xv. 13; dyred@va, Mt. xxi. 33; Mk.
xii. 1; Lk. xx. 9; 1 Co. ix. 7; ri év with a dat. of the
place, pass., Lk. xiii. 6; xvii. 6.*
iw; 2 aor. pass. (€pinv) ptcp. dvev (for which the
Attic writ. more com. use the 2 aor. act. py with the
ptcp. gus, dv, in a pass. or intrans. sense; cf. Bttm.
Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 821; Kriiger § 40 s.v.; Kiihner § 343
s.v.; [Veitch s. v.]; W. § 15s. v.; [B. 68 (60)]); [ef.
Lat. fui, fore, etc.; Curtius §417]; fr.Hom.down; i.
to beget, bring forth, produce; pass. to be born, to spring
up, to grow: Lk. viii. 6, 8 ; 2. intrans. to shoot forth,
spring up: Heb. xii. 15 [W. 252 (237). | Comp.: ék-,
oup-pio. | *
darcds, -od, 6, @ lurking-hole, burrow; a lair: of ani-
mals, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. ix. 58. (Aristot., Ael., Plut.,
Geop., al.) *
ovéw, -4; impf. 3 pers. sing. épavet; fut. povyow; 1
aor. ébadvqoa; 1 aor. inf. pass. pwr_djvat; (porn) ; ale
as fr. Hom. down, intrans. to sound, emit a sound, to
speak: of a cock, to crow, Mt. xxvi. 34, 74 sq. Mk. xiv.
30, 68 [L br. WH om. the cl. (see the latter’s App. ad
loc.)], 72; Lk. xxii. 34, 60 sq. ; Jn. xiii. 38; xvili. 27, (of
the cries of other animals, Is. xxxviii. 14; Jer. xvii. 11;
Zeph. ii. 14 ; rarely so in prof. auth. as [Aristot. (see L.
and S. s. v. I. 2)], Aesop. fab. 36 [225 ed. Halm]); of
men, to cry, cry out, cry aloud, speak with a loud voice :
foll. by the words uttered, Lk. viii. 8; with govj peyddy
added [(cf. W. § 32, 2 fin.), Mk. i. 26 T Tr WH]; Acts
xvi. 283 eparqce déyor, Lk. viii. 54; povqcas elev, Lk.
xvi. 24; havacas povy pey. etrev, Lk. xxiii. 46 ; épar.
cpavyy [L T Tr WH ¢ov7] pey- A€yor, Rev. xiv. 18;
\pavncavres éruvOavovro (WH txt. émiOovro), Acts x.
18]. 2. as fr. [Hom. Od. 24, 535] Soph. down,
661
povn
trans. a. to call, call to one’s self: rwd, —either
by one’s own voice, Mt. xx. 32; xxvii. 47; Mk. ix. 35;
x. 49 (of, B.§ 141, 5 fin.]; xv. 35; Jn. i. 48 (49); ii. 9;
iv. 16; x.3 LT Tr WH; xi. 28*; xviii. 33; Acts ix. 41 ;
x. 7;—or through another; to send for, summon: Mk.
iil. 31 RG; Lk. xvi. 2; Jn. ix. 18, 24; xi. 28° ; ele horn
Ojjvat adr rods kth. Lk. xix. 15; wv. teva éx, with a gen
of the place, to call out of (i.e. bid one to quit a place
and come to one), Jn. xii. 17. b. to invite : Lk. xiv
12. c. i. g. to address, accost, call by a name: twd,
foll. by a nom. of the title (see W. § 29,1; [B. §131, 8]),
Jn. xiii. 18. [Comp.: dva-, ém-, mpoo-, oup-pavew. | *
pov, -js, 7, (Pdw to shine, make clear, (ef. Curtius
§ 407; L. and 8S. s. v. déw]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr.
ip 5 1. a sound, tone: of inanimate things, as of
musical instruments, Mt. xxiv. 31 [T om. ¢., WH give it
only in mrg.; cf. B. § 132, 10]; 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq.; Rev.
xiv. 2; xviii. 22, (Is. xviii. 3; xxiv. 8; Sir. 1.16; 1 Mace.
v. 31; dépydvor, Plat. de rep. 3 p. 397 a.; cupiyywv, Eur.
Tro. 127; adrnpiov kat avdod, Plut. mor. p. 713 c.); of
wind, Jn. iii. 8; Acts ii. 6; of thunder, Rev. vi. 1; xiv.
2; xix. 6, cf. iv. 5; viii. 5; xi. 19; xvi. 183; noise, of a
millstone, Rev. xviii. 22; of a thronging multitude, Rev.
xix. 1, 6; of chariots, Rev. ix. 9; of wings, whir (Ezek.
i. 24), ibid.; of waters (Ezek. i. 24; 4 Esdr. vi. 17), Rev.
i. 15; xiv. 2; xix. 6; also with the gen. of a thing im-
plying speech, the sound [A.V. voice]: rot aomacpod,
Lk. i. 445 pnpdrwv, Heb. xii. 19; the ery (of men), dora
peydAn, a loud cry, Mk. xv. 37; the clamor of men mak-
ing a noisy demand, Lk. xxiii. 23, ef. Acts xix. 34;
absol. a cry i.e. wailing, lamentation, Mt. ii. 18 (fr. Jer.
XXXVilil. (xxxi.) 15). 2. a voice, i.e. the sound of
uttered words: dadeiv pavds, Rev. x. 3; those who begin
to ery out or call to any one are said tiv @arqy aipew,
Lk. xvii. 13; mpds twa, Acts iv. 24; doryy émaipev, Lk.
xi. 27; Acts ii. 14; xiv. 113 xxii. 22; [. xpagew (or ék-
kpa¢ew), Acts xxiv. 21 (cf. B.§143,11)]; pavy peyddg
added to verbs: to déyew, Rev. v.12: viii. 13; (€v dovg
pey. Rev. xiv. 7 [Lchm. om. év; xiv. 9]); to eimeiv, Lk.
viii. 28; Acts xiv.10; togdva, Acts xxvi. 24; to aiveiy rév
6edv, Lk. xix. 87; with verbs of crying out, shout-
ing: dvaBoay, Mt. xxvii. 46 [RGLtxt.T]; Boav, [Mt.
xxvii. 46 Lmrg. Tr WH]; Mk. xv.34; Actsviii.7; hoveiv,
[Mk. i. 26 T Tr WH]; Lk. xxiii. 46; Acts xvi. 28; [Rev.
xiv. 18 LT Tr WH]; avaghovetv, Lk.i. 42[RGLTr mrg.];
knpiooew (ev pov. pey-), Rev. v. 2 [Rec. om. ev]; xpavya-
ew, Jn. xi. 43; dvaxpatew, Lk. iv. 33; xpdCew, Mt. xxvii.
50; Mk.i. 26[RGL]; v. 7; Acts vii. 57, 60; Rev. vi. 10;
vii. 2,10; x. 3; [xviii. 2 Rec.]; xix. 17; xpd¢. év pov. pey.
Rev. xiv. 15; év icyupa ov, Rev. xviii. 2 [GL T Tr
WH]; peta Povns pey- do£dtew tov 6. Lk. xvii. 15; of
declarations from heaven, heard though no speaker is
seen: idod pwr éyouca, Mt. iti. 17; xvii. 5; epyerar
gown, Mk. ix. 7 [Rh GL Tr txt.J; Jn. xii. 28; eépyerar,
Rev. xvi. 17; xix. 5; yiverac povn, Mk. i. 11[Tom. WH
br. éyev.; ix. 7 T Tr mrg. WH]; Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35 sq.;
Jn. xii. 80; [Acts vii. 31 (where Rec. adds mpés airdv) };
mpos tiva, Acts x. 13, 15; [havis évexbeions aire, 2 Pet
pas
i. 17]; eyévovro ovat peydhat, Rev. xi. 15; [daexpiOn
go, Acts xi.9]; dxovew povyy (cf. B. §§132, 17; 144,
16 a.], Acts ix. 4; xxii. 9, [14]; xxvi. 14; 2 Pet. i. 18;
Rev. i. 10; iv.1[B. § 129, 8b.]; vi. 6 [here LT TrWH
insert és], 7 [here G om. Tr br. par.]; ix. 13 [B. u.s.] ;
x. 4, 8; xi. 12(RGL WH mrg.]; xii. 10; xiv. 2; xviii.
4; xix. 6; dkovew hovjs [B. § 132,17; W. § 30, 7 d.],
Acts ix. 7; xi. 7; xxii. 7; Rev. {xi. 12 T Tr WH txt.];
xiv. 13; xvi. 1; xxi.3; Brérew tiv hor. i.e. the one
who uttered the voice, Rev. i. 12. dav with a gen. of
the subject: Bodvros, Mt. iii. 3; Mk.i.3; Lk. iii. 4; Jn.
i. 23, all fr. Is. xl. 3; [dyyéAov drav péddn cadmifew, Rev.
x. 7]; 4. twos, the natural (familiar) sound of one’s
voice, Acts xii. 14; Rev. iii. 20, (Cant. v. 2); the man-
ner of speaking, as a shepherd’s (cry or call to his
sheep), Jn. x. 3-5; to such ‘voices’ Jesus likens his
precepts approved (‘heard’) by all the good, Jn. x. 16,
27, cf. xviii. 37; dvOpdmov, human utterance, 2 Pet. ii.
16; ¢. twos, the voice of a clamorous person, Mt. xii. 19
(Is. xlii. 2); of one exulting, jubilant, Jn. iii. 29; Rev.
XVili. 23; dyyéAov moAdGy, singing the praises of Christ,
Rev. v. 11 sq.; the sound of the words of Christ as he
shall recall the dead to life (the Resurrection-cry), Jn.
v. 25, 28; dpxayyédov, the awakening shout of the arch-
angel, the leader of the angelic host, 1 Th. iv.16; rod
6cov, of God,—teaching, admonishing, whether in the
O. T. Scriptures or in the gospel, Jn. v. 37; Heb. iii. 7,
15; iv. 7; shaking the earth, Heb. xii. 263; the speech,
discourse, Beod ovk avOp. Acts xii. 22; [ras davas trav
mpopntay, the predictions (‘read every sabbath’), Acts
xiii. 27] ; dAAagat rHu Pp. (see dAAdooe), Gal.iv. 20. 3.
speech, i.e. a language, tongue: 1 Co. xiv. 10 sq. (Joseph.
c. Ap. 1, 1; [1, 9, 25 1, 14, 1,ete.]; Ceb. tab. 33; Ael.
v. h. 12, 48; Diog. Laért. 8, 3; for other exx. fr. Grk.
writ. see Passow s. v. p. 2377; [L. and S. s. v. IL. 3];
Gen. xi. 1; Deut. xxviii. 49; 77 éBpaid: pov7, 4 Mace.
xii. 75 7H matpio por7, 2 Mace. vii. 8, 21, 27). [Syn.
ef. Schmidt ch. 1 §27; Trench § lxxxix.; and see Aadéa,
ad init. ]*
as, pords, 76, (contr. fr. pdos, fr. paw to shine), fr.
Hom. (who [as well as Pind.] uses the form ¢dos) down,
Hebr. x, light (opp. to rd oxdros, 9 oxoria); ak
prop. a. univ. : 6 Oeds 6 eirav ék oxdrous POs Adurpat,
2 Co. iv. 6 (Gen. i. 3); Nevkd Os 76 ds, Mt. xvii. 2;
veférn hords [Grsb. txt.] i.e. consisting of light, i. q.
gporewn in R LT Tr WH, Mt. xvii. 5; 73 hds rod Kdopov,
of the sun, Jn. xi. 93 7d hos od« Zorw ev airo, the light
(i.e. illumining power) is not in him, consequently he
does not see or distinguish the things about him, Jn. xi.
10; the light emitted by a lamp, Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33 L Tr
txt. WH]. a heavenly light, such as surrounds angels
when they appear on earth: hence éyyedos ards, 2 Co.
xi. 14, and illumines the place where they appear,
Acts xii. 7; a light of this kind shone around Paul when
he was converted to Christ, Acts xxii. 6, [91 pws
(348)]; with the addition of odpavdev, Acts xxvi. 13;
of dé [or ék] rod odpavod, Acts ix. 3. b. by meton.
anything emitting light: a heavenly luminary (or star),
662
pas
plur. Jas. i. 17 [see warnp, 3 a.]; fire, because it is light
and gives light: Lk. xxii. 56; Oeppaiver@a mpos 7d Pas,
Mk. xiv. 54, (1 Mace. xii. 29; Xen. Hell. 6, 2,29; Cyr.
7, 5,27); a lamp or torch: plur. ora, Acts xvi. 29 (pas
éyew, Xen. Hell. 5, 1, 8; in plur. often in Plut.). Cc.
light i.e. brightness (Lat. splendor), [see a. above]:
jAlov, Rev. xxii. 5; of a lamp, Jn. v. 35 (where it sym-
bolizes his rank, influence, worth, mighty deeds) ; with
the addition of Avyvou, Rev. xviii. 23 (Jer. xxv. 10); of
the divine Shechinah (see dd€a, III. 1), Rev. xxi. 24 (Ps.
Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 16; Is. lx. 1, 19 sq.). 2. das is
often used in poetic discourse, in metaphor, and in
parable ; a. The extremely delicate, subtile, pure,
brilliant quality of light has led to the use of pas as an
appellation of God, i. e. as by nature incorporeal, spot-
less, holy, [ef. Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 15 sqq.]:
1 Jn. i. 5 (Sap. vii. 26 where cf. Grimm); he is said etvat
év 76 Geri, in a state of supreme sanctity, 1 Jn. i. 7;
as oixav-ampoorroy, a fig. describing his nature as alike
of consummate majesty and inaccessible to human com-
prehension, 1 Tim. vi. 16 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2); used of
that heavenly state, consummate and free from every
imperfection, to which the true disciples of Christ will
be exalted, i. q. the kingdom of light, Col. i. 12. b.
By a fig. freq. in the N. T. [ef. in classic Grk. tis dAn-
Geias 76 as, Eur. I. T. 1046 ete.; see L. and S. s. v.
II. 2], dads is used to denote truth and its knowledge, to-
gether with the spiritual purity congruous with it, (opp. to
To oxoros b., 9 oKotia, G.V.): 7 Ca Hv Td pas td avOpa-
mov, had the nature of light in men, i. e. became the
source of human wisdom, Jn. i. 43 esp. the saving truth
embodied in Christ and by his love and effort imparted
to mankind, Mt. iv. 16; Jn. i. 5; iii. 19-21; Acts xxvi.
18, 23; 2 Co. vi. 14; Eph. v. 13% [ef. below]; 7d és rd
GAnOwdr, 1 Jn. ii. 8; 7d Oavpacrév rod Oeod pads, 1 Pet.
ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2 cf. 59, 2); 1d has ipdy,
the divine truth with which ye are imbued, Mt. v. 16;
éxew To . THs Cans, the light by which the true life is
gained, Jn. viii. 12; ra érAa[Lehm. mrg. épya] rod hords,
Ro. xiii. 12; xaprés tod pwrds, Eph. v.9 GL T Tr WH;
€v T@ hort mepurareiy, to live agreeably to saving wis-
dom, 1 Jn. i. 7; ev 76 hort eiva, to be imbued with
saving wisdom, pévecv, to continue devoted to it, to per-
severe in keeping it, 1 Jn. ii. 9 sq.; of viol tod dards
(see vids, 2 p. 635°), Lk. xvi. 8; Jn. xii. 36; 1 Th.v.5;
téxva Tov . (see réxvoy, c. B. p. 618"), Eph. v. 8. by
meton. dds is used of one in whom wisdom and spiritual
purity shine forth, and who imparts the same to others:
pos tdv év oxdrer, Ro. ii. 19; [pads ebvav, Acts xiii. 47]
in a pre-eminent sense is Jesus the Messiah called
pos and rd das: Lk. ii. 32; Jn. i. 7sq.3 xii. 85 sq. 463
Td Pas Tod kdopov, Jn. viii. 12; ix. 5, (rd Hds rod Kédcpov
7d Sov ev dpiv ets hotiopdy mavris avOpérov, Test. xii.
Patr. test. Levi § 14); 7d pas 7d aAnOwov, In. i. 93 by
the same name the disciples of Jesus are distinguished,
Mt. v. 14; Christians are called das év xupio, having
obtained saving wisdom in communion with Christ, Eph.
v. 8. wav rd havepotpevov pas ear, everything made
goorip
manifest by the aid of Christian truth has taken on the
nature of light, so that its true character and quality
are no longer hidden, Eph. v. 13° [al. take @as here in
an outward or physical sense, and regard the state-
ment as a general truth confirmatory of the assertion
made respecting spiritual ‘qerds’ just before (ef.
above) ]. c. By a fig. borrowed from daylight pas
is used of that which is exposed to the view of all: év r6
eri (opp. to év tH oxoria), openly, publicly, (év paet,
Pind. Nem. 4, 63), Mt. x. 27; Lk. xii. 3. d. reason,
mind; the power of understanding esp. moral and spir-
itual truth: 1rd gas 7d ev coi, Mt. vi. 23; Lk. xi. 35.
[SYN. see déyyos, fin.] *
dwctip, -jpos, 6, (pas, pack) § 1. that which
gives light, an illuminator, (Vulg. luminar): of the stars
(luminaries), Phil. ii. 15 (Sap. xiii. 25 Sir. xliii. 7; Gen.
i. 14, 16; Heliod. 2, 24; [Anthol. Pal. 15, 17; of sun and
moon, Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi 14]; eccles. writ.). 2.
light, brightness: Rev. xxi. 11 (Anthol. 11, 359) [al. refer
this to 1; cf. Trench § xlvi.].*
dac-hdpos, -ov, (pas and dépw), light-bringing, giving
light, (Arstph., Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; as subst. 6 p. (Lat.
Lucifer), the planet Venus, the morning-star, day-star,
(Plat. Tim. Locr. p. 96 e.; Plut., al.): 2 Pet.i.19, on
the meaning of this pass. see Avxvos.*
dateavds [WH gdarwds, see I, ¢], -7, -dv, (pas), light,
i. e. composed of light, of a bright character: vepédn, Mt.
xvii. 5 [not Grsb.]; of dpOadpoi xupiov pvptomdacias Alou
orewvorepor, Sir. xxiii. 19. full of light, well lighted,
opp. to oxorewwos, Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (7a oxorewd
kat ra woreda odpata, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1).*
otitw; fut. poricw (Rev. xxii.5 L WH; 1 Co. iv. 5),
Attic dorié (Rev. xxii. 5 GT Tr); 1 aor. éparica; pf.
pass. ptep. repariopeévos; 1 aor. pass. eporiaOny 5 1.
intrans. to give light, to shine, (Aristot., Theophr., Plut.,
al.; Sept. for ix, Num. viii. 2, ete.): éré twa, Rev. xxii.
5 [Rom. WH br. ézé]. 2. trans. =a. prop. to en-
lighten, light up, illumine: rwi, Lk. xi. 36; ray wéAuy,
668
xalpw
Rev. xxi. 23 (deriot tov kocpov, of the sun, Diod. 3, 48,
Sept. for 8); 9 yi) epwricdn cx ris ddEns adrod, [A.V.
was lightened | shone with his glory, Rev. xviii. 1. b.
to bring to light, render evident: ta kpumra tov oxérovs,
1 Co. iv. 5; [Eph. iii. 9 acc. to the reading of T L br.
WH txt. (but see c.)], (rv atpeciv trivos, the preference,
opinion, of one, Polyb. 23, 8,10; riv ddnéear, Epict.
diss. 1, 4, 31; mehoricpévov trav mpayparav bd THs adn-
Geias, Leian. cal. non tem. cred. 82); te cause something
to exist and thus to come to light and become clear to all:
(any k. apOapoiav Sid rod evayyediov, opp. to karapyjoa
tov @avaroy, 2 ‘Tim. i. 10. c. by a use only bibl. and
eccles. to enlighten spiritually, imbue with saving knowl-
edge: twa, Jn.i.9; with a saving knowledge of the
gospel: hence gwricbévres of those who have been
made Christians, Heb. vi. 4; x. 32; foll. by an indir.
quest. Eph. iii. 9 [see b. above], (Sir. xlv. 17; for 1x7,
Ps. exviil. (exix.) 130; for 77/n, to instruct, inform,
teach, Judg. xiii. 8 Alex.; 2 K. xii. 2; @ariotow adrods
Td Kpipa Tov Oeod ths ys, 2 K. xvii. 27 [ef. 28; al.]) 3 to
give understanding to: mepwricpéevor rovs dpOadrpods THs
xapdlas [ Rec. d:avoias], as respects the eyes of your soul,
Eph. i. 18 [B. § 145, 6]; [(ef. Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 20,
etc.) ].*
poticpds, -0d, 6, (partite) 5 a. the act of enlight-
ening, illumination: mpos poriopoy tis yvoceas, i. 4. mpds
TO haticew tiv yoo, that by teaching we may bring to
light ete. 2 Co. iv. 6 (on which pass. see mpécemor, 1 a.
sub fin. p. 551 top). b. brightness, bright light, (é&
naAiov, Sext. Emp. p. 522, 93 dmd cednvys, Plut. [de fac.
in orb. lun. § 16, 13] p. 929 d. [ib. § 18, 4 p. 981 a.]; Sept.
for WN, Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 1; xliii. («liv.) 453 Ixxvii.
(Ixxviii.) 14; Job iii. 9; for sn, Ps. lxxxix. (xe.) 8):
eis TO py avyaca [karavyaoa L mrg. Tr mrg.] tov d. rod
evayyeXlov, that the brightness of the gospel might not
shine forth [R. V. dawn (upon them)], i. e. (dropping
the fig.) that the enlightening truth of the gospel might
not be manifest or be apprehended, 2 Co. iv. 4.*
X
xatpo; impf. Zyarpov; fut. yapyoopar (LE. £. 14; Jn.
xvi. 20, 22; Phil. i. 18, for the earlier form yarpnoo, cf.
[W. 90 (86); B. 68 (60)]; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 322 sq. ;
Matthiae § 255 s.v.; Kihner § 343 s.v.; Kriiger § 40
s.v.3 [Veitch s. v.]), once yap& (Rev. xi. 10 Rec., a form
occurring nowhere else); 2 aor. [pass. as act. ] éyapny
ef. ovyxaipa, init.]; fr. Hom. down 5 Sept. for now,
Ee wav; to rejoice, be glad; a. in the prop: and
strict sense: [Mk. xiv. 11]; Lk. xv. 5, [32]; xix. 6, 37;
xxii. 5; xxiii. 8; Jn. iv. 36; viii. 56; xx. 20; Acts v. 41;
viii. 39 ; xi. 23; xiii. 48; 2 Co. [vi. 10] ; vii. 7; xiii. 9, 12
[some refer this to b. in the sense of farewell]; Phil. ii.
17, 28; Col. ii. 5; 1 Th. v. 163 1 Pet. iv. 13; 3 Jn. 3;
opp. to kdaiew, Ro. xii. 15; 1 Co. vii. 30; opp. to KRalew
x. Opyveiv, In. xvi. 20; opp. to Aimy Exew, ib. 22; joined
with dyad\aoOat, Mt. v. 125 Rey. xix. 7; with oxiprav,
Lk. vi. 23; yaipew év xupio (see év, I. 6 b. p. 211° mid. [cf.
B. 185 (161)]), Phil. iii. 1; iv. 4, 10; xaipew xapay
peydAny [cf. xapd, a.], to rejoice exceedingly, Mt. ii. 10;
also xap@ xaipew (W. § 54, 3; B. § 133, 22), Jn. iii. 29:
xanava
xapa 7 xalpopev, 1 Th. iii. 9; yalpec emi with a dat. of
the object, Mt. xviii. 13; Lk.i.14; xiii. 17; Acts xv. 31;
Ro. xvi. 19 L T Tr WH; 1 Co. xiii. 6; xvi. 17; 2 Co. vii.
13; Rev. xi. 10, (Xen. mem. 2, 6,35; Cyr. 8,4, 12; Plat.
lege. 5 p. 739d.; cf. Kiihner § 425 Anm. 6; [W. § 33 a.;
B. § 133, 23]; in the Grk. writ. generally with a simple
dat. of the obj. as Prov. xvii. 19); did 7, Jn. ili. 29;
Sid twa, Jn. xi. 15; 1 Th. iii. 9; év rovr@, Phil. i. 18;
[év r. waOnpaci pov, Col. i. 24]; with an acc. of the obj.,
76 avro, Phil. ii. 18 (ratra, Dem. p. 323,6; cf. Matthiae
§ 414 p. 923; Kriiger § 46, 5, 9); ro ep’ piv (see 6, I.
8 p. 436°), Ro. xvi. 19 RG; dé tuvos, i. q. xapav Exew,
to derive joy from one, 2 Co. ii. 3; xaip. foll. by dru,
JWAXIV. 295027 COnvils Selo, Zien. 4
x. 20; with a dat. of the cause: r7 eAmids xalporres, let
the hope of future blessedness give you joy, Ro. xii. 12
[yet cf. W. §31,1k., 7 d.]. b. in a broader sense,
to be well, to thrive; in salutations, the impv. xatpe, hail !
Lat. salve, (so fr. Hom. down): Mt. xxvi.49; xxvii. 29;
Mk. xv. 18; Lk. i. 28; Jn. xix. 3; plur. yalpere, [A. V.
all hail], Mt. xxviii. 9; at the beginning of letters the
inf. yalpew (sc. Aeyer or Kedever): Acts xv. 233 xxiii.
26; Jas. i. 1, (often in the bks. of Mace.; ef. Grimm on
1 Mace. x. 18; Otto in the Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. for
1867, p. 678 sqq.; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 99
sqq.; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,27; Ael.v.h.1, 25); fully, xaipew
Aéeya, to give one greeting, salute, 2Jn.10,[11]. [Comp. :
ovy-xaipe. | *
xGAala, -ns, 7, (yadaw, q. v. [so Etym. Magn. 805, 1;
but Curtius (§ 181) says “certainly has nothing to do
with it ”]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for 173, hail: Rev. viii.
(isa WEYS Sans Pleo
XaAdw, -@; fut. xaddow; 1 aor. éyddaca; 1 aor. pass.
éxaddaoOnv; fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down; a. to
loosen, slacken, relax. b. to let down from a higher
place to a lower: ri or tud, Mk. ii. 4; Lk. v.4sq.; Acts
xxvii. 17, 30, [in these two pass. in a nautical sense, to
lower]; teva év onvpidi, Acts ix. 25; pass. 2 Co. xi. 33.*
XaBaios, -ov, 6, a Chaldean; yn XadOaiwv the land of
the Chaldeans, Chaldea: Acts vii. 4, where a reference
to Gen. xi. 28, 31 and xv. 7 seems to show that southern
Armenia is referred to. The different opinions of oth-
er interpreters are reviewed by Dillmann on Genesis
(3te Aufl.) p. 223 sq.; [ef. Schrader in Riehm s.v.;
Sayce in Encycl. Brit. s. v. Babylonia ].*
xaremds, -7, -dv, (fr. yadémr@ to oppress, annoy, [(?)]),
fr. Hom. down, hard (Lat. difficilis) ; a. hard to do,
to take, to approach. b. hard to bear, troublesome,
dangerous: katpot xaXeroi, [R.V. grievous], 2 Tim. iii. 1;
harsh, fierce, savage: of men, Mt. viii. 28 (Is. xviii. 2
and often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down).*
XaAwaywyéw, -5; 1 aor. inf. yadwaywyjoar; (yadwds
and dyw); to lead by a bridle, to guide, (trmov, Walz,
Rhett. Graec. i. p. 425, 19); trop. to bridle, hold in check,
restrain: thy ykdocay, Jas. i. 263 rd copa, Jas. ili. 2; ras
trav over dpeEes, Leian. tyrann. 4. [(Poll.1§ 215.)]*
XAAwsGs, -od, 6, (xahae), a bridle: Jas. iii. 3; Rev. xiv.
20. (From Aeschyl. and Pind. down.) *
ev rovT@ ort, Lk.
664
yapa
xdAxeos, -éa, -eov, contr. -ovs, -7, -odv, (yaAxos), fr. Hom
down, brazen, [A. V. of brass]: Rev. ix. 20.*
XaAkeds, -ews, 6, (yadkds), fr. Hom. down, a worker in
copper or iron, a smith: 2 Tim. iv. 14 [A. V. copper-
smith ].*
xadknSav, -ovos, 6, chalcedony, a precious stone de-
scribed by Plin. h. n. 37,5 (18), 72 [see B. D. (esp. Am.
ed.) s. v.]: Rev. xxi. 19.*
XaAxlov, -ov, 7d, (yadkds), a (copper or) brazen vessel:
Mk. vii. 4. ([Arstph.], Xen. oec. 8, 19; [al.].) *
xaAko-AlBavov (so Suidas [but see ed. Gaisf. s. v.]), -ov,
76, more correctly yadkoAiBavos, -ov, 9, (acc. to the read-
ing as it ought to be restored [(but see the edd.)] in
Rey. i. 15 as év apivo rervpwpery ; cf. Diisterdieck’s crit.
note [see B. 80 (69) note]),a word of doubtful meaning,
found only in Rey. i. 15, and ii. 18, chalcolibanus, Vulg.
aurichalcum or orichaleum (so cod. Amiat., [al. aeric.] ;
Luther Messing, [R. V. burnished brass]); acc. to the
testimony of an ancient Greek [ Ansonius] in Salmasius
(Exercitt. ad Solin. p. 810 a.: 6 AiBavos exer tpia eidy
dévdpov, kat 6 pev appny dvouaterar xadkoriBavos, nAroerdys
kai muppds iyouv EavOos), a certain kind of (yellow)
Jrankincense; but both the sense of the passages in Rev.
and a comparison of Dan. x. 6 and Ezek. i. 7, which
seem to have been in the writer’s thought, compel us to
understand some metal, like gold if not more precious (cf.
Hebr. 9pwvn, a metal composed of gold and silver, Sept.
HArexrpov, Vulg. electrum, Ezek. i. 4,27; viii. 2); this in-
terpretation is confirmed by the gloss of Suidas: eido¢
NAEKTPOV TiLdTEpoV xpvToV, €aTe SE 70 HAEKTpov adAAdruTOY
xpvolov peptypévoy ved K. ALGeia. The word is com-
pounded, no doubt, of xadxos and AiBavos, not of yadkos
and 129 ‘white.’ Cf. Win. RWB. s.v. Metalle; Wetzel
in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1869, p. 92 sqq.; cf.
Ewald, Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 117 sq.; [Zee in the
‘Speaker’s Com.’ ad loc.].*
Xadkés, -od, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for nwn3, brass:
1 Co. xiii. 1; Rev. xviii. 12; (like the Lat. aes) what is
made of brass, money, coins of brass (also of silver and
of gold), Mt.x. 9; Mk.vi.8; xii. 41. [B.D. s.v. Brass;
Dict. of Antiq. s.v. aes.]*
xapat, adv. ; a. on the ground, on the earth. ‘b:
to the ground; in both senses fr. Hom. down; in the
latter sense Jn. ix. 6 [where, however, Eng. idiom re:
tains on]; xviii. 6.*
Xavadv, 7, Hebr. t}19 [lit. ‘lowland ’], Canaan, the
land of Canaan, indecl. prop. name: in the narrower
sense, of that part of Palestine lying west of the Jordan,
Acts vii. 11; in a wider sense, of all Palestine, Acts
Sabre
Xavavatos, -a, -ov, Hebr. *1733, Canaanite; the name
of the ancient inhabitants of Palestine before its con-
quest by the Israelites; in Christ’s time i. g. Pheenician
[R. V. Canaanitish]: Mt. xv. 22.*
Xap, -as, 7, (xalipw), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph. down,
Sept. for nN’ and jiww, joy, gladness ; aiken
14; xv. 7,10; Jn. xv. 113; xvi. 22, 24; xvii. 138; Acts viii.
8; 2 Co. vii. 13; viii. 2; Gal. v. 22; Col.i.11; Phil. ii
Xdpaypa
2; 1Jn.i.4; 2Jn.12; opp. to kaTnpeta, Jas. iv. 9; opp.
to Avan, Jn. xvi. 20; 2 Co. ii.3; Heb. xii. 11; bpay, i.e.
the joy received from you, 2 Co. i. 24 (opp. to the ‘sor-
row’ which Paul on returning to Corinth would both
experience and give, ii. 1-3); yapa ris wicrews, spring-
ing from faith, Phil. i. 25; yalpew xapav pey. Mt. ii. 10
PWietS 32,5250 Bo 2915]; dya\\aoba xapa, 1 Pet. i. 8;
xapav [Rec.* yapw] moddjv Exew ei with a dat. of the
thing, Philem. 7; mAnpody riwa xapas, Ro. xv. 133 aAy-
povoOa xapas, Acts xiii. 52; 2 Tim. i. 4; aoveiv ret xXapav
feydAnv, Acts xv. 3; dé ris xapas, for joy, Mt. xiii. 44;
Lk. xxiv. 41; Acts xii. 14; év xapa (€pyerOar), Ro. xv.
32; pera xapas, with joy, Mt. xiii. 20; xxviii. 8; Mk. iv.
16; Lk. viii. 13; x. 17; xxiv. 52; Acts xx. 24 Rec.; Phil.
i. 45 ii. 29; Heb. x. 34; xiii. 17, (Polyb. 11, 38, 7; 22,
17,12; Xen. Hiero 1, 25); with wvevparos dyiov added,
joy wrought by the Holy Spirit, 1 Th. i. 6; yapa ev
mvevpate dyi@, joyousness caused by [ef. év, I. 6 (p. 211°
bot.) and B. § 133, 23] the Holy Spirit, Ro. xiv. 17; yapa
emi tun, 2 Co. vii. 4; yaipew xapa dia tT, In. iii. 29 (ef.
xaipw, a.]; also did rue (a relative pron. intervening),
1 Th. iii. 9; 9 xapa ért, Jn. xvi. 21; yapa iva (see iva, II.
2d.), 3 Jn. 4. b. by meton. the cause or occasion
of joy: Lk. ii. 10; Jas.i. 2; [so 2 Co. i. 15 WH txt. Tr
mrg. (al. ydpis, q. v. 3 b.)]; of persons who are one’s
‘joy’: 1 Th. ii. 19sq.; Phil. iv. 1; of a joyful condition
or state: avtt... xapas, to attain to blessedness at the
right hand of God in heaven, Heb. xii. 2; the same
idea is expressed in the parable by the words, 7 xapa
tov kupiov, the blessedness which the Lord enjoys, Mt.
Xxve 215/23."
XGpaypa, -ros, 70, (yapdoow to engrave); a.a
stamp, an imprinted mark: of the mark stamped on the
forehead or the right hand as the badge of the followers
of Antichrist, Rev. xiii. 16 sq.; xiv. 9,11; xv. 2 Rec.;
Xvi. 2; xix. 20; xx. 4, (aupds, the mark branded upon
horses, Anacr. 26 [55], 2). b. thing carved, sculp-
ture, graven work: of idolatrous images, Acts xvii. 29.
(In various other senses in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down.) *
Xapaxrip, -7pos, 6, (xapacow to engrave, cut into), fr.
Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; 1. prop. the instrument
used in engraving or carving, (cf. Cwarnp, Aaymtnp, Aov-
tp, pvonrnp; cf. our ‘stamp’ or ‘die’). 2. the
mark (figure or letters) stamped upon that instrument or
wrought out on it; hence univ. a mark or figure burned
in (Lev. xiii. 28) or stamped on, an impression; the
exact expression (the image) of any person or thing,
marked likeness, precise reproduction in every respect (cf.
facsimile): x. tijs tmoaracews tod Oeod, of Christ, acc. to
his nature as 6 Oeios Néyos, Heb. i. 3; oppayids Geod, js
6 xXapakrnp €or 6 aldtos Noyos, Philo de plant. Noé § 55
x: Oeias Suvdpews, of the human mind, Philo, quod det.
potiori ins. § 23; God rév dvOpwrov &rdacev tis éavrov
eixévos yapaxrnpa, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 33, 4; of mioTot ev
dyamn xapakrhpa Ocod marpos bua. Inood Xprorod (Exovow),
Ignat. ad Magnes. 5,2. the peculiarity, by which things
are recognized and distinguished from each other, [cf.
Eng. characteristic]: 2 Macc. iv. 10.*
665
Xapls
X4pak, -axos, 6, (xapacow) ; 1. a pale or stake, a
palisade, [(Arstph., Dem., al.)]. 2. a palisade or
rampart (i. e. pales between which earth, stones, trees
and timbers are heaped and packed together): Lk. xix.
43 (Is. xxxvii. 33; Ezek. iv. 2; xxvi. 8; Polyb.; Joseph.
Vit435 Art, exp. Alex, 2,19; 9s Phut.-al:).*
Xaplfopar; depon. mid.; fut. yapicoua (Ro. viii. 32;
Leian. d. mar. 9, 1, for which Grk. writ. com. use the
Attic xapiodpa: [cf. WH. App. p. 163 sq.; B. 37 (32);
W.§15s.v.]); pf. xexapiopar; 1 aor. éyapiodunv; 1 aor.
pass. éyapioOny (Acts iii. 14; 1 Co.ii. 12; Phil. i. 29, [cf.
B. 52 (46)]) ; fut. pass. yapuoOnoopae with a pass. signif.
(Philem. 22); (xapis); often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ;
to do something pleasant or agreeable (to one), to doa
favor to, gratify ; a. univ. fo show one’s self gra-
cious, kind, benevolent: twi, Gal. iii. 18 [al. (supply +.
kAnpovouiay and) refer this to c. below]. b. to grant
Sorgiveness, to pardon: 2 Co. ii. 7; with a dat. of the
pers., Eph. iv. 32; Col. iii. 18; with an acc. of the thing,
2 Co. ii. 10 [ef. W. § 39,1 b. and 3 N. 3]; runt ray adcxiay,
2 Co. xii. 13; ra mapamre@para, Col. ii. 13. c. to give
graciously, give freely, bestow: twi tt, Lk. vii. 21; Ro.
viii. 32; Phil. ii. 9; pass., 1 Co. ii. 12; Phil. i. 29; where
a debt is referred to, to forgive [cf. b. above], Lk. vii.
42 sq.3 ret twa, graciously to restore one to another who
desires his safety (e. g. a captive [R.V. grant]), pass.,
Acts iii. 14; Philem. 22; or to preserve for one a person in
peril, Acts xxvii. 24; rwa tw, to give up to another one
whom he may punish or put to death, Acts xxv. 11 [(cef.
R. V. mrg.)]; with the addition of els dwNevay, ib. 16.*
x&puy, ace. of the subst. yapis used absol.; prop. in favor
of, for the pleasure of: xapw “Exropos, Hom. Il. 15, 744,
al.; 1 Mace. ix. 10; Judith viii. 19; like the Lat. abl.
gratia, it takes on completely the nature of a preposi-
tion, and is joined to the gen., for, on account of, for the
sake of: Gal. iii. 19 (on which see mapaBacrs) ; 1 Tim.
y. 14; Tit.i.11; Jude16; rodvrov xdpuy, on this account,
for this cause, Eph. iii. 1 (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54); rodrov x.
iva, Eph. iii. 14 [cf. W. 566 (526)]; Tit. i. 5; 08 xdpy,
for which cause, Lk. vii. 47; xapw rivos ; for what cause ?
wherefore? 1 Jn. iii. 12. Except in 1 Jn. iii. 12, yapw is
everywhere in the N. T. placed after the gen., as it gen-
erally is in prof. auth. (cf. Passow s. v. I. 3 a. p. 2416;
Herm. ad Vig. p. 701); in the O. T. Apocr. it is placed
sometimes before, sometimes after; cf. Wahl, Clavis
Apocr. s.v. 6 b.; Grimm on 1 Mace. iii. 29."
xdpts, -tros, ace. ydpw, and twice in LT Tr WH the
rarer form xdpera (Acts xxiv. 27; Jude 4) which is also
poetic (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. §44 Anm.1; [WH. App.
157; B. 13 (12)]), ace. plur. ydpuras (Acts xxiv. 27
RG), 4 (xalpo), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. [M, grace;
es 1. prop. that which affords joy, pleasure, de-
light, sweetness, charm, loveliness : grace of speech (Eccl.
x. 12; Sir. xxi. 163 xxxvii. 21; Hom. Od. 8,175; rap
Adywr, Dem. 51, 9; 1419, 16; xdpires popar, verbal
pleasantries which the foolish affect in order to ingra-
tiate themseives. Sir. xx. 13), Adyou xdpiros (gen. of
quality), Lk. iv. 22; xdpw 8:8dvai rois dxovovow, Eph. iv
xapes
29; é xdourt, with grace [the subst. dias being added ;
see Bp. Lghtft.], Col. iv. 6. 2. good-will, loving-
kindness, favor: in a broad sense, xdpis mapa tim, Lk.
ii. 52; @yew xdpw mpéds twa, to have favor with one, Acts
ii. 47; xdpis €vavriov twés, Acts vil. 10; [ydpw xara
tivos aireicOat Gras (q. v. IL. 2), Acts xxv. 3 (but al.
refer this to 3 b. below) ]; xdpts (of God) éoriv émi twa,
attends and assists one, Lk. ii. 40; Acts iv. 33; ydpw
(xdpira) xdpitas kararidecOai tun (see karariOnur), Acts
xxiv. 27; xxv. 9; favor (i.e. act of favoring [cf. W. § 66
fin.]), 2 Co. viii. 4. xdpis is used of the kindness of a
master towards his inferiors or servants, and soesp.
of God towards men: etpioxew xapw mapa ro 6. Lk. i.
30; évdmov rod Geod, Acts vii. 46; rodro xdpis sc. eoTiv,
this wins for us (God’s) favor [R.V. is acceptable], 1 Pet.
ii. 19; with mapa 6e@ added, ib. 20; mapadidocOa 77 x.
tod beod, to be committed or commended to the protect-
ing and helping favor of God, Acts xiv. 26; xv. 40. The
apostles and N. T. writers at the beginning and end of
their Epp. crave for their readers the favor (‘ grace’) of
God or of Christ, to which all blessings, esp. spiritual,
are due: Ro.i. 7; xvi. 20, 24[RG]; 1Co.1.3; xvi. 23;
2Co. i. 23 xiii. 13 (14); Gal. i. 3; vi. 18; Eph. i. 23 vi.
24+ Phil. i.23 iv. 233; Col. 1.23 iv. 183-1 Th.i.1; v.28;
2 Th. i. 2; iii.18; 1 Tim.i. 2; vi. 21(22); 2 Tim.i.2; iv. 22;
Tit. i. 43 iii. 15; Philem. 3, 25; Heb. xiii. 25; 1 Pet. i. 2;
2)Pet.1..2); ii. 18iief.3.a.));, 2 Jnad3 Rev. in4; xxii. 21 5.cf.
Otto, Ueber d. apostol. Segensgruss ydpis byiv etc., in the
Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1867, p.678sqq. | More-
over, the word yapts contains the idea of kindness which
bestows upon one what he has not deserved: Ro. xi. 6;
hence xara ydpw and xara ddeihnua are contrasted in
Ro. iv. 4, 16; xdpere and é& epywy in Ro. xi. 6; kar
exdoyjv xdptros, ip. 5; but the N. T. writers use xdpis
pre-eminently of that kindness by which God bestows
favors even upon the ill-deserving, and grants to
sinners the pardon of their offences, and bids them ac-
cept of eternal salvation through Christ: Ro. iii. 24;
v. 17, 20 sq.; [vi. 1]; 1Co.xv.10; Gal.i.15; ii. 21; Eph.
i. 6, [7]; ii. 5, 7sq.3 Phil.-i.7; Col.i.6; 2 Th. ii. 16;
1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. i. 9; Heb. ii. 9 [here Treg. mre.
xepis]; x. 29; xii.15; xiii. 9; 1 Pet.i.10; Jude 4; edpi-
oxewy xdpwv, Heb. iv. 16; 9 xdpts tod Geod » cwrnpios, Tit.
ii. 11; 6 Adyos rhs xdprros, the message of his grace, Acts
xiv. 3; xx. 32; 1d evayyédtov tis xdpitos Tod Geod, Acts
xX. 243 it is styled ‘the grace of Christ, in that through
pity for sinful men Christ left his state of blessedness
with God in heaven, and voluntarily underwent the
hardships and miseries of human life, and by his suffer-
ings and death procured salvation for mankind: [Acts
xv. 11]; 2 Co. viii. 9; Ro. v. 15; Gal. i.6; [Tit. iii. 7];
Jn. i. 14, 17. xapis is used of the merciful kindness
by which God, exerting his holy influence upon souls, turns
them to Christ, keeps, strengthens, increases them in Chris-
tian faith, knowledge, affection, and kindles them to the
exercise of the Christian virtues: 2 Co. iv. 15; vi. 1;
2 Th. i. 125 of memorevxdres dia tis xdperos, Acts xviii.
27; dnd xdpw eivat, to be subject to the power of grace,
666
xapes
opp. to brs védpov etvat, Ro. vi. 14 sq.; éxrimrew ths
xap. Gal. v. 4; mpoopevew 7H x. Acts xiii. 43 [GL TTr
WH]; émpévew, ibid. Rec.; &v 77 xdpure (RG WH txt.
om. the art.), prompted by grace, Col. iii. 16; the grace
of God promoting the progress and blessings of the
Christian religion, Acts xi. 23; [prompting its posses-
sors to benefactions, 2 Co. ix. 14]; sustaining and aiding
the efforts of the men who labor for the cause of
Christ, 1 Co. xv. 10; 2 Co. i. 12; the favor of Christ,
assisting and strengthening his followers and ministers
to bear their troubles, 2 Co. xii. 9. 3. what is
due to grace; a. the spiritual condition of one
governed by the power of divine grace, what the theolo-
gians call the ‘status gratiae’: éornkévat év tH x. Ro. v.
2; eis riv x. 1 Pet. v.12; avédvew ev xdpert, 2 Pet. iii.
18; évdvvapotaba ev th xapite TH ev Xptore, 2 Tim. ii.
ils b. a token or proof of grace, 2 Co. i. 15 [A. V.
benefit (WH txt. Tr mrg. xapay, q. v. under b.)]; a gift
of grace; benefaction, bounty: used of alms, 1 Co. xvi. 35
2 Co. viii. 6 sq. 19, (Sir. iii. 29 (31); xxix. 15; xxx. 6;
4 Mace. v. 8; Xen. Ages. 4, 3sq.; Hier. 8, 4) ; maca xapts,
all earthly blessings, wealth, ete., which are due to divine
goodness, 2 Co. ix. 8; 6 Oeds maons xaptros, the author
and giver of benefits of every kind,1 Pet. v.10. the aid
or succor of divine grace: Siddvat xapw tamewvois, 1 Pet.
v. 5; Jas. iv. 63 the salvation offered to Christians is
called ydpus, a gift of divine grace, 1 Pet.i.10,13; of the
various blessings of Christ experienced by souls: AaBetp
xXapwv avti xdpiros (see dvri, 2 e. p. 49° bot.), Jn. i. 163
xapis (ws, the gift of grace seen in the reception of life
[ef. Con, 2 b.], 1 Pet. iii. 7; capacity and ability due to the
grace of God (Germ. Gnadenausriistung), Eph. iv. 73
mdnpns xaprros, Acts vi. 8G LT Tr WH; sockidn xaprs,
the aggregate of the extremely diverse powers and gifts
granted to Christians, 1 Pet.iv.10; used of the power
to undertake and administer the apostolic office: AaBetv
xapw Kal drootohyy, i.e. xdpw tis dmocroAjs, Ro. i. 53 9
x: 7 Sobeioa por (Paul), Ro. xii. 3,6; xv.15; 1Co. iii. 10;
Gal. ii. 9; Eph. iii. 2,7; 506. ipiv, of the gifts of knowl-
edge and utterance conferred upon Christians, 1 Co. i.
4; €566y por H x- adn, foll. by an inf., Eph. iii. 8; of the
desire to give alms roused by the grace of God, 2 Co.
viii. 1. 4. thanks (for benefits, services, favors);
prop.: xdpurt, with thanksgiving, 1 Co. x. 30; yapuw eyew
rwi (Lat. gratiam habere alicui), to be thankful to one,
Lk. xvii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 3; Heb. xii. 28, (2
Mace. iii. 33, and countless times in prof. auth.; cf. Pas-
sow s. v. p. 2416* sub fin.; [L. and S.s. v. I. 2]; Ast, Lex.
Plat. ii. p. 539 sq.; Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 2, p. 975);
foll. by éwi with a dat. of the thing, Philem. 7 T edd. 2
and 7, Rec.*** (cf. p. 233* mid.) ; apis TO Oe@ 8c. Core,
Ro. vii. 25 LT Tr WH txt.; foll. by rc, Ro. vi. 17 (y. rots
Geois, dre etc. Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 72; 8, 7,3; an. 3, 3, 143 oec.
8, 16); with a ptep. added to the dat. (by apposition),
1 Co. xv. 573 2 Co. ii. 14; viii. 16; foll. by éxi with a dat.
of the thing [cf. éi, B. 2 a. 8.], 2 Co. ix. 15. i. q.
recompense, reward, Lk. vi. 32-34 (for which Mt. v. 46
uses poOds).*
Yapicpa
Xapirpa, -ros, rd, (xapifopar), a gift of grace; a favor
which one receives without any merit of his own; in the
N.'T. [where (exc. 1 Pet. iv. 10) used only by Paul] the
gftof divine grace (so also in Philo de alleg. legg. iii. § 24
fin. doped Kal evepyecia Kal xapicpa Geod ra mavra dca év
Kdou@ Kal ards 6 Kéopos eotiv) ; used of the natural gift
of continence, due to the grace of God as creator, 1 Co.
vil. 7; deliverance from great peril to life, rd eds fas x.
bestowed upon us, 2 Co. i. 11; the gift of faith, knowl-
edge, holiness, virtue, Ro. i. 113 the economy of divine
grace, by which the pardon of sin and eternal salvation
is appointed to sinners in consideration of the merits of
Christ laid hold of by faith, Ro. v. 15 sq. ; vi. 23; plur.
of the several blessings of the Christian salvation, Ro.
xi. 29; in the technical Pauline sense yapiopara [A. V.
gifts] denote extraordinary powers, distinguishing certain
Christians and enabling them to serve the church of Christ,
the reception of which is due to the power of divine grace
operating in their souls by the Holy Spirit [ef. Cremer in
Herzog ed. 2 vol. v. 10 sqq. s. v. Geisteszaben]: Ro. xii.
6; 1Co.i. 7; xii. 4,31; 1 Pet. iv. 10; yapiopara lapdrov,
1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30; spec. the sum of those powers requisite
for the discharge of the office of an evangelist: 1 Tim. iv.
14; 2 Tim.i. 6. ([{Of temporal blessings, ‘Teaching’
1, 5 (cf. S@pnua in Herm. mand. 2, 4)]; eccl. writ.) *
Xapit6e, -@: 1 aor. €yapitwoa; pf. pass. ptep. ceyapt-
Tapevos; (xapis) ; 1. to make graceful i. e. charm-
ing, lovely, agreeable: pass. Sir. xviii. 17; rats duadd£éous
orpopais xaptrovpevos odppvy, Liban. vol. iv. p. 1071,
14. 2. to pursue with grace, compass with favor; to
honor with blessings: twd, Eph. i. 6; pass. Lk. i. 28,
[some would take it in these two exx. subjectively
(R. V.mrg. endued with grace)}; Ps. xviii. 26 Symm. ;
[Herm. sim. 9, 24, 3; Test. xii. Patr. test. Joseph. 1];
eccles. and Byzant. writ.*
Kappdv, (Hebr. mn [i. e. (prob.) ‘parched’, ‘arid”],
Gen. xi. 31; xii. 5; xxvii. 43), Haran [so R. V.; A. V.
(after the Grk.) Charran], called Kappa: in Grk. writ.
and Carrae in Lat., a city of Mesopotamia, of great anti-
quity and made famous by the defeat of Crassus: Acts
vii. 2,4. Cf. Win. RWB. s.v.; Vaihinger in Herzog v.
539; [Schultz in Herzog ed. 2, s. v.]; Steiner in Schenkel
ii. 592; Schrader in Riehm p. 571.*
xaprns, -OU, 0, (xapacoo), paper: 2 Ine ers xlili.
(xxxvi.) 23. (Plat. Com. fragm. 10 p. 257 (Didot) ; ef.
inser. (B.C. 407) in Kirchhoff, Inscrr. Attic. i. No. 324];
Ceb. tab. 4; Diose. 1, 115.) [Cf. Birt, Antikes Buch-
wesen, index i. s.v.; | Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeo-
graphie, p. 23; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. p. 270
sq)" ;
xdopa, -ros, 76, (xaivo to yawn), a gaping opening, a
chasm, gulf: i.q. a great interval, Lk. xvi. 26. (Hes.
theog. 740: Eur., Plat., Plut., Leian., Ael., al.) *
Xedos, -ovs, 7d, gen. plur. in the uncontr. form yewWéov
(Heb. xili. 15; see dpos), (x€o i. q. XAQ, xaivo), fr. Hom.
down, Sept. for ND¥, a lip; a. in the N. T. of the
speaking mouth (cf. W. 32]: Mt. xv. 8; Mk. vii. 6; Ro.
iii. 13; 1 Co. xiv. 21; Heb. xiii. 15 (on which see xapzés,
667
xelp
2c.) 3 1 Pet. iii. 10. b. metaph.: yeiAos ris Oaddo-
ons, the sea-shore, Heb. xi. 12 (Gen. xxii. 17; Ex. vii.
15; xiv. 30, ete.; of the shore of a lake, Joseph. b. iL
3, 10, 7; of the banks of rivers, Hdt. 2, [70]. 94; [Ar-
istot. de mirab. aud. 46; 150; cf. hist. an. 6, 16 p- 570,
22]; Polyb. 8, 14, 6; [ef. W. pp. 18, 30]).*
Xetpdto : pres. pass. ptep. xeqaCduevos ; (xeipa stormy
weather, winter [cf. yeyuav]); to afflict with a tempest, to
toss about upon the waves: pass. Acts xxvii. 18 [R. V.
labored with the storm]. (Aeschyl., Thue., Plat., Diod.,
Plut., Leian., al.) [Comp.: mapa-xerudco. |*
xelpappos, (for the more com. xexpappoos [sc. rorapuds ],
Att. contr. xetuappous [q. v. in L. and S. fin.], ef. Lob. ad
Phryn. p. 234), -ov, 6, (yeiwa winter, and féa, dos), fr.
Hom. down, Sept. very often for 53, lit. flowing in
winter, a torrent: Jn. xviii. 1 [where A. V. brook].*
Xela, -dvos, 6, (xeiwa, and this fr. yé@ on account of
the ‘pouring’ rains; [al. connect it with Xl-a@v, Snow,
frost (cf. Lat. hiems, etc.); see Curtius §194; L. and S.
S. V. xtov, fin.]), winter ; a. stormy or rainy weather,
a tempest (so fr. Hom. down): Mt. xvi. 3 [Tdf. br. WH
reject the pass.]; Acts xxvii. 20. b. winter, the
winter season, (so fr. Thuc. and Arstph. down): Jn. x. 22;
2 Tim. iv. 21; yewdvos, in winter (-time), in the winter
(Plat. de rep. 3 p.415 e.; Xen. mem. 3, 8,9; al. [cf. W.
§ 30,11; B. § 132, 26]), Mt. xxiv. 20; Mk. xiii. 18.*
xelp, gen. xeupds, acc. xetpay (1 Pet. v. 6 Tdf.; see dpaony,
fin.), 7, [fr. r. meaning ‘to lay hold of’; cf. Lat. heres,
ete.; Curtius §189; Vanicek p. 249 sq.], fr. Hom. down,
Hebr. v7, the hand: Mt. iii. 12; Mk. iii. 1; Lk. vi. 6;
1 Tim. ii. 8; Heb. xii. 12, and often; the gen. with the
verbs drropat, émiAapBavona, Kpatéa, mud, etc., which
see in their places; the dat. with épyd¢opat, éoOia, ete. 3
6 doracpos TH éuy xetpt, 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col.iv.18; 2 Th.
iii. 17; the ace. with the verbs aipw, déw, éxmeravyupt,
éexteiva, euBamra, emitiOnut, Kabapifw, Kataceio, vinta,
ete. 7 émiOeots tay xeipav [see émideors and reff.],
1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim. 1.6; Heb.vi.2; év xe«pi rivos, in
imitation of the Hebr. 9 a [cf. B. §133, 20 cf. 319 sq.
(274); Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. iii. 19], by the help or agency,
of any one, by means of any one, Acts vii. 35 Rec.; Gal.
iii. 19; ody yxeupt dyyeAov, with the aid or service of the
angel [cf. B. u.s.], Acts vii. 35 LT Tr WH; those things
in the performance of which the hands take the princi-
pal part (as e. g. in working miracles), are said to be
done dia yeupds or xecpa@y or rev (cf. B. § 124, 8d.] xetpov
tiwos, Mk. vi. 2; Acts v. 12; xiv. 3; xix. 113 univ., Acts
ii. 233 vii. 25; xi. 30; xv. 233 émi yetpov, Mt. iv.6; Lk.
iv. 11; émt rqv y., Rev. xiv. 9; xx. 1 [here Treg. mrg.
év th x-], 43 ex, Acts xxviii. 4; Rev. viii. 4; efs ray x.
(on his hand), Lk. xv. 22; 7 xetp, as an acting subject
(see yhéooa, 1), Lk. xxii. 21; plur., Acts xvii. 25; xx.
84; 1 Jn.i.1; 7a épya ray x., Acts vii. 41; Rev. ix. 20;
éxOukeiv TO aipa Twos ék Twos (see exdukéa, b. and éx I. 7),
Rey. xix. 2. By meton. 7 yeip is put for power, activity,
(for exx. fr. prof. auth. fr. Hom. down see Passow s. v.
p- 2481°; [L.and S.s. v. p.1720°]): mapadiddvat eva eis
xeipas ttvey, into the hostile hands (Deut. i. 27; Job xvi.
NElpaywryew
11), Mt. xvii. 22; xxvi.45; Mk. ix. 31; Lk. ix. 445 xxiv.
7; Acts xxi.113 xxviii. 17; Ssddvae re ev rH xetpi Twos,
to commit to one’s protecting and upholding power, Jn.
iii. 35; also eis 7. yeipas twos, Jn. xiii. 3; Twa &k tov
xetp. or éx xeupds Tivos (fr. the hostile power of any one)
dndyew, Acts xxiv. 7 Rec.; é&ehéoOar, Acts xii. 11 (Gen.
xxxii. 113 Ex. xviii. 8 sq.); e&€pxerOa, Jn. x. 39; pu-
cOnva, Lk. i. 74; cwrnpia, ib. 71; expedyew tas xeipas
tivos, 2 Co. xi. 33. By a fig. use of language yelp
or xeipes are attributed to God, symbolizing his might,
activity, power; conspicuous a. in creating the
universe : épya trav xetpav adrov, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii-)
26). B. in upholding and preserving: Lk.
xxiii. 46; Jn. x. 29 (cf. 28); yelp kupiov earl pera Tivos,
God is present, protecting and aiding one, Lk. i. 66;
Acts xi. 21. y- in punishing: yelp kuplov emi o€¢,
Acts xiii. 11 (1 S. xii. 15) ; éumimrew eis x. Oeod (dvros,
Heb. x. 31. §. in determining and controlling
the destinies of men: Acts iv. 28; ramewodvcar tnd
THY Kparatay xeipa TOD Geod, 1 Pet. v. 6.
Xelpaywyew, -G; pres. pass. ptcp. yxerpaywyovpevos ;
(xetpaywyds, q.v.; cf. xadiwwaywyew) ; to lead by the hand:
twa, Acts ix. 8; xxii.11. (Anacr., Diod., Plut., Leian.,
Artem., al.) *
Xerp-aywyds, -dv, (xeip and dyw), leading one by the
hand: Acts xiii. 11. (Artem. oneir. 1, 48; Plut., al.) *
Xetpdypacoy, -ov, 7d, (xeip and ypdpw), a handwriting ;
what one has written with his own hand (Polyb. 30, 8, 4;
Dion. Hal. 5, 8; al.); spec. a note of hand, or writing
in which one acknowledges that money has either been
deposited with him or lent to him by another, to be re-
turned at an appointed time (Tob. v. 3; ix. 5; Plut.
mor. p. 829 a. de vitand. aere al. 4, 3; Artem. oneir. 3,
40); metaph. applied in Col. ii. 14 [(where R.V. bond) ]
to the Mosaic law, which shows men to be chargeable
with offences for which they must pay the penalty.*
Xetpo-rroinros, -ov, (yelp and moew), made by the hand
i.e. the skill of man (see dxetporoinros) : of temples, Mk.
xiv. 58; Acts vii. 48; xvii. 24; Heb. ix. 11, 24; of cir-
cumcision, Eph. ii.11. (In Sept. of idols; of other things,
occasionally in Hdt., Thuc., Xen., Polyb., Diod.) *
Xetpo-Tovew, -@: 1 aor. ptep. yxetporovnaas; 1 aor. pass.
ptep. yetporovndeis; (fr. xeipordvos extending the hand,
and this fr. yefp and reivw); fr. [Arstph.], Xen., Plat.,
Isocr. down ; a. prop. to vote by stretching out the
hand (cf. Xen. an. 3, 2, 33 drm Soxet radra, dvarewdaro
THY xElpa* averewway drartes). b. to create or appoint
by vote: twa, one to have charge of some office or duty,
pass. 2 Co. viii. 19, and in the spurious subscriptions in
QeMims ives se lta iio lp: c. with the loss of the
notion of extending the hand, to elect, appoint, create:
twa, Acts xiv. 23 (see exx. fr. the Grk. writ. in Passow
S. V. p. 2440"; yxetporoveioOar td Geod Bacwdéa, Philo de
praem. et poen. §9; [Baciéws vrapxos eyetporoveito, de
Joseph. §41]; Joseph. antt. 6, 4, 2; [7, 11,1; of the
choice of Jon. as high-priest, 13, 2,2; ef. Hatch in Dict.
of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Ordination, p. 1501; Harnack on
‘Teaching’ etc. 15, 1]). [Comp.: mpo-xeiporavew. | *
668
|
xirlapx os
xelpwv, -ov, (compar. of caxdés; derived fr. the obsol.
xépys, which has been preserved in the dat. xépni, acc.
xépna, plur. xépnes, xépna; cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 268
[cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. xépns]), [fr. Hom. down],
worse: Mt. ix. 16; xxvii. 64; Mk. ii. 21; yiverar ra
éoxara xeipova tay mpotoy, Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet.
ii. 20; eds rd yeipov epyerOa, [to grow worse], of one
whose illness increases, Mk. v. 26 ; iva pa xeipdv coi Te
yévnrat, lest some worse thing befall thee, Jn. v. 14;
mow xeipwy tinwpia, [A.V. how much sorer punishment],
Heb. x. 29; émt rd yetpov mpoxémrew ([A. V. wax worse
and worse]; see mpoxdénta, 2), 2 Tim. iii. 13; of the moral
character, drictov xeipwv, 1 Tim. v. 8.*
XepovBip (RG) and KepovPetv (LT Tr WH; in Mss.
also XepouBiv, XepovBeip; [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 84; WH.
App. p. 155*; and s. v. et, ¢]), rd (neut. gend. also in most
places in the Sept.; rarely, as Ex. xxv. 18, 19, of Xep.;
XepovBes in Ex. xxv. 18 [but this is a mistake; the
form in -ecs seems not to occur in the O. T.]; in Philo
ta XepovBip, in Joseph. of XepovBeis, antt. 3, 6,5; ai
XepovBeis, ibid. 8, 3,3; the use of the neut. gender
seemed most suitable, because they were (@a; XepouBeis
(Gd éort retewd, poppiy & ovdevi trav im avOparav éwpa-
péevav mapamAnora, Joseph. antt. 3, 6,5), Hebr. 092393
(hardly of Semitic origin, but cognate to the Grk. ypiy,
ypunés [for the various opinions cf. Gesenius’s Hebr.
Lex. ed. Miihlau and Volck s. v. 3393]), cherubim, two
golden figures of living creatures with two wings; they
were fastened to the lid of the ark of the covenant in
the Holy of holies (both of the sacred tabernacle and of
Solomon’s temple) in such a manner that their faces
were turned towards each other and down towards the
lid, which they overshadowed with their expanded
wings. Between these figures God was regarded as
having fixed his dwelling-place (see dééa, III. 1): Heb.
ix. 5. In Ezek. i. and x. another and far more elabor-
ate form is ascribed to them; but the author of the
Ep. to the Heb. has Ex. xxv. 18-20 in mind. Cf.
Win. RWB. s. v. Cherubim; Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 710
sq-; Dillmann in Schenkel i. 509 sqq.; Riehm, De Na-
tura et Notione Symbolica Cheruborum (Basil. 1864) ;
also his ‘ Die Cherubim in d. Stiftshiitte u. im Tempel’
in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1871 p. 399 sqq.; and in
his HWB. p. 227 sqq.3 [ef. Lenormant, Beginnings of
History, (N. Y. 1882), ch. iii.].*
X*pa, -as, 7, (fem. of the adj. yjpos, ‘bereft’; akin to
xépoos, sterile, barren, and the Lat. careo, [but cf. Cur-
tius § 192]), fr. Hom. Il. 6, 408 down, Sept. for TID DN,
a widow: Mt. xxiii. 14 (18) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40, 42 sq.;
Lk. ii. 37; iv. 25; vii. 12; xviii. 3,55 xx.47; xxi. 2sq.3
Acts vi. 1; ix. 89,41; 1Co. vii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 3-5, 9, 11,
16; Jas. i. 27; with yurn added (2 S. xiv. 5, and often
in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Il. 2, 289 down), Lk. iv. 26;
a city stripped of inhabitants and riches is represented
under the figure of a widow, Rev. xviii. 7.*
xs (Rec. ; also Grsb. in Acts and Heb.), i. q- €xbes
(q- v-), yesterday; Sept. for Sinn. [Hom. (h. Merc.), al.]
XtAlapxos, -ov, 6, (xiAcoe and dpyw; [on the form of
XlAvas
the word ct. reff. s. v. éxarovrdpyns, and L. and §. s. v.
x'Atdpxns]), the commander of a thousand soldiers, a
chiliarch; the commander of a Roman cohort (a military
tribune): Jn. xviii. 12; Acts xxi, 31-33, 373 xxii. 24,
26-29; xxiii, 10, 15, 17-19, 223 xxiv. 7 Rec., 22; xxv.
23, (Sept. for DDN wv and DDN WN). any military
commander [Rt. V. high or chief captain, captain]: Mk.
vi. 21; Rev. vi. 15; xix. 18. [(Aeschyl., Xen., al.)]*
xtArds, -ddos, 9, (xiduor), @ thousand, the number one
thousand: plur., Lk. xiv. 31; Acts iv.4; 1 Co. x. 8;
Rev. v. 11; vii. 4-83; xi. 18; xiv. 1-3; xxi. 16; Sept.
for 78, 0278, [Hadt. on.]*
xtAror, -at, -a,a@ thousand: 2 Pet.iii.8; Rev. xi. 3, etc.
Xlos, -ov, }, Chios, an island in the Aigean Sea, be-
tween Samos and Lesbos, not far from the shore of
Lydia: Acts xx. 15.*
xtTav, -Gvos, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for njyAD and
Nj)3, a tunic, an undergarment, usually worn next the
skin: Mt. x. 10; Mk.vi. 9; Lk. iii. 11; ix.3; Jude 23;
it is distinguished from 76 ipdrioy (q. V. 2) or ra ipdrie in
Mt. v. 40; Lk. vi. 29; Jn. xix. 23; Acts ix. 39; univ. a
garment, vestment (Aeschyl. suppl. 903), plur. (Plut. Tib.
Gracch. 19), Mk. xiv. 63. [Cf. Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v.
Tunica; and reff. s.v. iudrioy, u.s. | *
xvdv, -dvos, 9, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for i>v/, snow:
Mt. xxviii. 3; Mk. ix. 3 (where it is omitted by GT Tr
WH); Rev. i. 14.*
xAapus, -vdos, 7, (acc. to the testimony of Pollux 10,
38, 164, first used by Sappho), a chlamys, an outer gar-
ment usually worn over the yirwv [q. v-]; spec. the Lat.
paludamentum [q.v- in Rich, Dict. of Antiq. s. v. sub
fin.], a kind of short cloak worn by soldiers, military
officers, magistrates, kings, emperors, etc. (2 Mace. xii.
35; Joseph. antt. 5,1, 10; Hdian., Ael., al.; often in
Plut.): Mt. xxvii. 28, 31, [A.V. robe ; see Meyer ad loc.;
Trench, Syn. §1.; Rich (as above) s.v. Chlamys; and
other reff. s. v. iuartov].*
xAcvotw ; impf. éxAevafov; (xAevy, jesting, mockery) ;
to deride, mock, jeer: Actsii.13 Rec.; xvii. 32. (2 Mace.
vii. 27; Sap. xi. 15; Arstph., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut.,
Leian., al.) [Comp.: d:a-xAevdgo. | *
xAtapds, -d, -dv, (xAlw, to become warm, liquefy, melt),
tepid, lukewarm: metaph. of the condition of a soul
wretchedly fluctuating between a torpor and a fervor of
love, Rev. iii. 16. (Hdt., Pind., Diod., Plut., Athen.,
Geop.) *
XAcy [(i. e. ‘tender verdure’; an appellation of De-
meter, ‘the Verdant ’)], -ns, 7, Chloe, a Christian woman
of Corinth: 1 Co.i. 11. [Cf. B. D. s.v.]*
xAwpos, ~d, -dv, (contr. fr. yAoepds, fr. yAdn, tender
green grass or Corn) ; 1. green: xépros, Mk. vi. 39
(Gen. i. 30); Rev. viii. 7; mav xAwpdy, ix. 4. @.
yellowish, pale: trmos, Rev. vi. 8. (In both senses fr.
Hom. down.) *
xts’, siz hundred and sixty-six (x’=600; &—=60;
5’ =6),a mystical number the meaning of which is clear
when it is written in Hebr. letters, VDP 1173, i. e. Népay
Kaicap, ‘ Nero Caesar’, (sometimes the Jews write Op
669
Xopacup
for the more common o’p, the Syriac always ;mo,
ef. Ewald, Die Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 263 note;
[Schirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. ed. 1, § 25 IIT. p. 449 note];
I= 50, 1 = 200, 1=6, 1= 50, p= 100, = 60, =
200): Rev. xiii, 18 RGT Tr. [For a digest of opin.
ions respecting this much debated number see Lee in
the ¢‘Speaker’s Com.’ ad loc.]*
Xoikds, -7 -dv, (yous, q. V-), made of earth, earthy: 1 Co.
xv. 47-49, (yupvoi tovrous tov xoiKkod Bdpous, Anon. in
Walz, Rhett. i. p. 613, 45 [Iippol. haer. 10, 9 p. 314,
95].) *
xoiwé, -cxos, 9, fr. Hom. Od. 19, 28 down, a choeniz,
a dry measure, containing four cotylae or two sextarii
[i.e. less than our ‘quart’; cf. L. and S.s. v.] (or as
much as would support a man of moderate appetite for
a day; hence called in Athen. 3 § 20 p. 98 e. queporpopic
(cf. 9 xotmE juepnaotos rpopy, Diog. Laért. 8, 18]): Rev.
vi. 6 [where A.V. measure (see Am. appendix ad loc.) ].*
Xotpos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, a swine: plur., Mt. vii.
6; viii. 30, [31], 32; Mk. v. 11-18, 14 Ree., [16]; Lk.
viii. 32 sq.3 xv. 15sq. (Not found in the O. T.)*
XOAGW, -B; (oAN, q-V-) 3 1. to be atrabilious; to
be mad (Arstph. nub. 833). 2. to be angry, en-
raged, (for yoAodpat, more com. in the earlier Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. down) : rwi, Jn. vii. 23 (3 Mace. iii. 1; Artem.,
Nicand., Mosch., Diog. Laért., al.).*
XoAH, -7s, 9, (i: q. xddos, fr. yéo to pour out [now
thought to be connected with yAdn, xAwpés, etc. * yellow-
ish green’; cf. Curtius § 200; Vanicek p. 247]), firct
found in Archilochus (8th cent. B. c.), afterwards in
Aeschyl. et sqq- 1. bile, gall: Mt. xxvii. 34 (ef.
Sept. Ps. Lxviii. (Ixix.) 22) [ef. B. D.s.v. Gall]; Acts viii.
23 (on which see mexpia); for 171, Job xvi. 13. 2.
in the O. T. it is also used of other bitter things; for
m p>, wormwood, Prov. v. 4; Lam. iii. 15; hence some
understand the word in Mt. xxvii. 34 to mean myrrh, on
account of Mk. xv. 23; but see opuvpvige, 2; [B. D.u.s.].*
X0s, see xous.
Xopattv ([so GL, also Mt. xi. 21 Rec.; Lk. x.13 Rec.e!7] ;
Xopa¢eivy T Tr WH; [Xopativ, Lk. x. 13 Rec.*t>; see
et, «; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84; WH. App. p. 155*)), 9, indecl.
Chorazin, a town of Galilee, which is mentioned neither
in the O. T. nor by Josephus; acc. to Jerome (in his
Onomast. [cf. Euseb. onomast. ed. Larsow and Parthey
p. 374]) two miles distant from Capernaum; perhaps the
same place which in the talmud, Menach. f. 85, 1 is called
prs (ef. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 139], the re-
mains of which Robinson (Biblical Researches, iii. 347,
359 sq.) thinks must be sought for in the ruins of the
modern Tell Him; but Wilson (Recovery of Jerusalem
Am. ed. pp. 270, 292 sqq.; Our Work in Palestine,
p. 188), with whom [Thomson (Land and Book, ii. 8)],
Socin (in Baedeker’s Palestine and Syria, Eng. ed. p.
374), Wolff (in Riehm p. 235), [the Conders (Hdbk. to
the Bible, p. 324), and the majority of recent scholars]
agree, holds to the more probable opinion which tdenti-
fies it with Kerdzeh, a heap of ruins lying an hour’s
Kopnyew
journey to the N. E. of Tell Ham: Mt. xi. 21; Lk. x.
13. Cf. Win. RWB. s.v.; Keim i. p. 605 [Eng. trans.
ii. 367] and ii. 118 [Eng. trans. iii. 143].*
xopnyéw, -; fut. 3 pers. sing. xopnynoet (2 Co. ix. 10
GLTTr WH); 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. xopnyneat (ib.
Be (xopnyés, the leader of a chorus; fr. xopds and
dye [jy¢opae]) ; fr. [Simon. ], Xen., Plat. down; ale
to be a chorus-leader, lead a chorus. 2. to furnish
the chorus at one’s own expense; to procure and supply
all things necessary to fit out the chorus (so very often in
the Attic writ.). 3. in later writ. ({ Aristot.], Polyb.,
Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Ael., al.; 1K. iv. 7; 1 Mace.
xiv. 10; 2 Mace. iii. 3, etc.), to supply, furnish abundant-
ly: ri, 2 Co. ix. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 11. [Comp.: émt-xopn-
yeo.]*
Xopds, -o0, 6, (by metath. fr. dpyos, dpxéopar, [(?); prob.
related to xdpros (Lat. hortus), xpdvos, ete., denoting
primarily ‘an enclosure for dancing’; cf. Curtius § 189),
fr. Hom. down, a band (of dancers and singers), a cire
cular dance, a dance, dancing: Lk. xv. 25 (for ADIN,
Ex. xv. 20; Judg. xi. 34, etc.; for on, Lam. v. 15; Ps.
cl. 4).*
Xopratw: 1 aor. éydpraca; 1 aor. pass. éxopracOny ;
fut. pass. yopracOjncopa; (xépros, q. v.); first in Hesiod
(opp. 450) ; a. to feed with herbs, grass, hay, to fill
or satisfy with food, to fatten; animals (so uniformly
“in the earlier Grk. writ. [ef. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. iv. 12;
W. 23]): Zpvea ex tov capkay, pass. Rev. xix. 21 [here
A.V. were filled]. b. in later (cf. Sturz, Dial.
iuaced. and Alex. p. 200 sqq.) and Biblical Greek, to
fill or satisfu men (Sept. for pry and jrawn; with
some degree of BREEN in Plat. de rep. 9 p. 586 a.
kexvores els ynv kal eis tpame{as Bockovrat xopratopevoe
kal dxevovres). a. prop.: twd, Mt. xv. 333 pass.,
Mt. xiv. 20; xv. 37; Mk. vi. 42; vii. 27; viii. 8; Lk. ix.
17; Jn. vi. 26; Jas. ii. 16; opp. to meway, Phil. iv. 12;
tid twos (like miumAnpe (cf. W. § 30,8 b.]): dprav, with
bread, Mk. viii. 4 (Ps. exxxi. (exxxii.) 15); ria dé with
a gen. of the thing (ef. B. § 132, 12], pass. Lk. xvi. 21
(Ps. ciii. (civ.) 13); [riva ex w. gen. of the thing (B. u.s.),
pass. Lk. xv. 16 Trmrg. WH]. B. metaph.: ria,
to fulfil or satisfy the desire of any one, Mt. v. 6; Lk.
vi. 21, (Ps. evi. (cvii.) 9).*
X9ptacpa, -ros, 7d, (yopratw), feed, fodder, for animals
(Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; food, (vegetable) sus-
tenance, whether for men or flocks: plur. Acts vii. 11.*
XSpTOS, -ov, 6; 1. the place where grass grows
and animals graze: Hom. Il. 11, 774; 24, 640. 2:
fr. Hes. down, grass, herbage, hay, provender: of green
grass, Mt. vi. 30; xiv. 19; Lk. xii. 28; Jn. vi. 10; Jas.
i. 10sq.; 1 Pet. i. 24 (fr. es xs veda); Rev. ix. 4; ydpr.
xrapds, Mk. vi. 39; Rev. viii. 7; xdpros of growing crops,
Mt. xiii. 26; Mk. iv. 28; of hay, 1 Co. iii. 12. (Sept.
for ¥T) grass, and siyyy.) *
Xovtds, -4 [Tdf. Proleg. p.104; B. 20 (18)], 6, Chuzas
[A.V. (less correctly) Chusa], the steward of Herod
Antipas: Lk. viii. 3.*
Xots, -ods, acc. -odv, 6, (contr. for ydos, fr. xo, to pour),
670
“pela
fr. Hdt. down; 1. prop. earth dug out, an earth-heap
(Germ. Schutt): 6 yods 6 eEopuxGeis, Hdt. 2, 150. 2.
dust (Sept. for 15y): Mk. vi. 11; Rev. xviii. 19, ([Josh.
vii. 11; Sap. v. 15; Sir. xliv. 21, etce.]; Plut. mor
p- 1096 b. [i. e. non posse suaviter etc. 13, 7]).*
Xpdopar, ypauat; impf. 3 pers. plur. éypavro; 1 aor.
éxpnodunv; pf. xéxpquat (1 Co. ix. 15 GLT Tr WH);
fr. Hom. down; (mid. of xpdw [thought to be allied by
metath. with yep (cf. Curtius §189)], ‘to grant a loan’,
‘to lend’ [but cf. L. and S.s. v.; they regard the radica\
sense as ‘to furnish what is needful’]; hence) 1.
prop. to receive a loan; to borrow. 2. to take for
one’s use; to use: rwi [W. § 31, 1i.], to make use of a
thing, Acts xxvii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 12,15; 1 Tim. i. 8; v.
23; r@ «dope, the good things of this world, 1 Co. vii.
81 RG (see below) ; aAdov xpjoat, sc. the opportunity
of becoming free, ib. 21 (where others, less fitly, supply
7 KAnOjvat SodAov [see reff. s. v. ei, III. 6 a.]). contrary
to the regular usage of class. Grk. with an acc.: rév xé-
apov, 1 Co. vii. 31 L T Tr WH; see Meyer ad loc.; B.
§ 133, 18; W.u.s.; (also in Sap. vii. 14 ace. to some
codd.; [L. and S. give (Pseudo-)Aristot. oecon. 2, 22
p- 1350, 7]). with the dat. of a virtue or vice describing
the mode of thinking or acting: r7 éAadpia, [R. V. ‘shew
fickleness’], 2 Co. i. 17; moAAQ mappyoia, ib. iii. 12, (for
numerous exx. fr. Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down, see Passow
ii. p. 2497°; [L. and S. s.v. II. a.]). with adverbs (see
Passow ii. p. 2497; [L. and S. s.v. IV.]): drordpyas, to
deal sharply, use sharpness, 2 Co. xiii. 10. of the use of
persons: tui, to bear one’s self towards, to deal with,
treat, one (often so in Grk. writ.; see Passow ii. p. 2496;
[L. and S. s. v. III. 1 and 2]}), Acts xxvii. 3.*
Xpdw, see Kiypnpt.
xpela, -as, 9), (xp), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph.down; 1.
necessity, need: ra mpds thy xpetav [LT Tr WH ap. ras
xpeias (cf. below) ], such things as suited the exigency,
such things as we needed for sustenance and the jour-
ney, Acts xxviii. 10; eis ras dvayxaias xpetas, [A. V. for
necessary uses] i.e. to supply what is absolutely neces-
sary for life [(cf. Babr. fab. 136, 9) ; al. understand the
‘wants’ here as comprising those of charity or of wor-
ship], Tit. iii. 14; mpds oixoSopny ris xpeias, for the edi-
fication of souls, of which there is now special need,
Eph. iv. 29 (ef. R. V. and mrg.]; éore xpela, there is
need, foll. by an ace. with inf. Heb. vii. 11; éort xpeia
tuvds, there is need of something, Rey. xxii. 5 Grsb.; Lk.
x. 42 [(but not WH mrg.)]; ¢y@ xpeiav twos, to have
need of (be in want of) some thing (often in the Grk.
writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, cf. Passow s.v. 1; [L. and S.
s.v. II.1]), Mt. vi. 8; xxi.3> Mk. xi.3); LK. fix. 11 3 xv.
(ANB Sab & BUG GELS oath YAR dhigestte CH). OC h > chb Val, Oe
1 Th. iv. 12; Heb. x. 36; Rev. iii. 17 R G (see below) ;
xxi. 23; xxii. 5 (not Grsb.); rod with an inf. Heb. v.
12 [W.§ 44, 4 a.; cf. ris, 2 b. p. 626" bot.]; the gen. of
the thing is evident fr. the context, Acts ii. 45; iv. 35;
with the gen. of a pers. whose aid, testimony, etc., is
needed, Mt. ix. 12; xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 17; xiv. 63; Lk.
v.31; €xw xpeiay, foll. by an inf. (cf. B. § 140, 3), I ete.
xpewperrerns
have need to etc., Mt. iii.14; xiv.16; Jn. xiii. On edeelhy
i. 8; iv. 9 [with which cf. v.1 (see W. 339 Gis) cab:
§ 140, 3)]; foll. by ta (see tra, II. 2 ¢. [B. § 139, 46;
ef. Epictet. diss. 1, 17, 18]), Jn. ii. 25; xvi. 303; 1 Jn. ii.
27; xpetav exo, absol., to have need: Mk. in. 25; [Eph.
tv. 28]; 1 Jn.iii. 17; oddev ypeiav Exe, to have need as
to nothing [cf. B. § 131, 10], Rev. ii. 17 LT Tr WH.
% xpeia with a gen. of the subj. the condition of one de-
prived of those things which he is scarcely able to do with-
oul, want, need: Aeroupyds THs xpelas pou (See Aecroupyds,
2 fin.), Phil. ii. 25; TAnpody thy xpeiav tuvds (Thue. 1.
70), Phil. iv. 19; [add, eis (Lchm. br. eis) rHv xpevay poe
éméuypare, unto (i. e. to relieve, ef. eis, B. II. 3c. y. p. 185°
top) my need, Phil. iv. 16]; plur. one’s necessities :
innpereiv tais x. to provide for one’s necessities, Acts
XX. 34; kowwveiv tats x. (cf. p. 352° top}, Ro. xii. 13. 2.
duty, business, (so esp. fr. Polyb. down [ef. Jud. xii. 10;
1 Mace. xii. 45; xiii. 37; 2 Mace. vir. 24, ete.]): Acts
vi. 3.*
xpeaperhérms (LT Tr WH ypeod.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn.
p- 691; W.§5,1d.13; [WH. App. p. 152°; Tdf. Pro-
leg. p.89; T (?; seeu.s.) WH -purérys, cf. WH. App.
p- 154° (see I, ¢)]), -ov, 6, (xp¢os or ypéws, a loan, a debt,
and ddethérns, q. v.), @ debtor : Lk. vii. 41; xvi. 5. (Prov.
xxix. 13; Job xxxi. 37; Aesop. fab. 289 [ed. Coray, 12
ed. Halm]; several times in Plut.; [also in Diod., Dion.
Hal. ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *
xey; (fr. xpd, xpder contr. yp); impers. verb, it is
necessary; it behooves: foll. by an inf. Jas. iii. 10 [(B.
§§ 131, 3; 132, 12). From Hom.on. Syn. see dei, fin.]*
xeuto; (xp7); fr. Hom. down; to have need of, to be
in want of: with a gen. of the obi. [W. § 30, 8 a.], Mt.
vi. 32; Lk. xi. 8; xii. 30; Ro. xvi. 2 [here w. gen. of a
pers.]; 2Co. iii. 1.*
Xphpa, -ros, 7d, (xpdowat), in Grk. writ. whatever is
for use, whatever one uses, a thing, matter, affair, event,
business; spec. money (rarely so in the sing. in prof.
auth., as Hdt. 3, 38; Diod. 13, 106 [cf. L.and S.s.v. I.
sub fin.]): Actsiv. 37; plur. riches (often in Grk. writ.
fr. Hom. Od. 2, 78; 16, 315 etc. down), Mk. x. 24 [T
WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; of ra xpnyara éxorres, they
that ‘have riches, Mk. x. 23; Lk. xviii. 24; money, Acts
viii. 18, 20; xxiv. 26, (for 102, silver, Job xxvii. 17; for
DDD), riches, Josh. xxii. 8; 2 Chr. i. 11 sq.).*
Xenpartte; fut. xpqpariow (Ro. vii. 3 [ef. B. 37 (38)]}
in Grk. writ. everywh. the Attic 4, so too Jer. xxxii.
16 (xxv. 30); xxxiili. (xxvi.) 2); 1 aor. éypnudrica; pf.
pass. xexpnudriopar; 1 aor. pass. éxpnyarioOny ; (xpnpa
business); in prose writ. fr. Hdt. down; 1. to
transact business, esp. to manage public affairs ; to advise
or consult with one about public affairs; to make answer
to those who ask advice, present inquiries or requests, ete. 5
used of judges, magistrates, rulers, kings. Hence in
some later Grk. writ. 2. to give a response to those
consulting an oracle (Diod. 3, 6; 15, 10; Plut. mor.
p- 435 ¢. [i. e. de defect. orace. 46]; several times in
Leian.) ; hence used of God in Joseph. antt. 5, 1, 14;
10, 1. 3; 11, 8,43 univ. (dropping all ref. to a previous
671
NENT TOS
consultation), to gwe a divine command or admonition,
to teach from heaven, [(Jer. xxxii. 16 (xxv. 30))]: with
a dat. of the pers. Job xl. 3; pass. foll. by an inf. [A.V.
revealed etc.}, Lk. ii. 26 (xpnparigew Adyous mpds tiva,
Jer. xxxvii. (xxx.) 2); pass. to be divinely commanded,
admonished, instructed, [R.V. warned of God], Mt. ii.
12, 22; Acts x. 22; Heb. viii. 5; xi. 7, (this pass. use
is hardly found elsewh. exc. in Joseph. antt. 3, 8,8; [11,
8,4]; cf. B. §134,4; [W.§ 39, 1a.]); to be the mouth-
piece of divine revelations, to promulge the commands of
God, (rwi, Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 23 xxxvi. (xxix.) 23):
of Moses, Heb. xii. 25 [R. V. warned]. 3. to assume
or take to one’s self a name from one’s public business
(Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) ; univ. to receive a name or
title, be called: Acts xi. 26; Ro. vii. 3, (Joseph. antt. [8,
6, 2]; 13, 11, 3; b.j. 2, 18, 7; [e. Apion. 2, 3,1; Philo,
quod deus immut. § 25 fin.; leg. ad Gaium § 43]; ’Avrio-
xov Tov "Emepavn xpnyari¢ovra, Diod. in Miiller’s fragm.
vol. ii. p. xvii. no. xxi. 43 "IdkwBov rév xpnyaricavta
adehdov tov xvpiov, Acta Philippi init. p. 75 ed. Tdf.;
‘laxwBov ... Ov kal addedpov tov Xpiotov xpnparicar oi
Oeior Adyou meprexovow, Kus. h. e. 7, 19; [cf. Soph. Lex.
Se Vili) or
Xpnpaticpss, -ov, 6, (xpnuatiCw, q.v.), a divine response,
an oracle: Ro. xi. 4. (2 Mace. ii. 4; ef. Diod. 1,1; 14,
7; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17,5; [ef. Artem. oneir. 1, 2 p. 8;
Suicer, Thesaur. s. v. (vol. ii. col. 1532)]; in various
other senses in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat. down.) *
XpPotpos, -7, -ov, (xpdopat), first in Theogn. 406, jit for
use, useful: 2 Tim. ii. 14.*
XPficts, -ews, 7, (xpdopat), use: of the sexual use of a
woman, Ro. i. 26 sq. (aatdtxn, Leian. amor. 253; dpeées
mapa tas xpnoes, Plut. placit. philos. 5, 5; [cf. Isocr.
p- 886 c.; Plat. legg. 8 p. 841 a.; Aristot., al.]).*
Xpynoretounar; (xpnords, q.Vv-); to show one’s self mild,
to be kind, use kindness: 1 Co. xiii. 4. (Eccles. writ., as
Euseb h. e. 5, 1,463 rw, towards one,/Cleim. Rom. 1 Cor.
tp 916 3s
xpnorodroyla, -as, 7, (fr. xpnoroddyos, and this fr.
xpnaords, q. V., and dey; ef. Jul. Capitol. in the life of
Pertinax ec. 13 “Omnes, qui libere fabulas conferebant,
male Pertinaci loquebantur, ypyoroAéyov eum appel-
lantes, qui bene loqueretur et male faceret”), fair speak-
ing, the smooth and plausible address which simulates
goodness: Ro. xvi. 18. (Eustath. p. 1437, 27 [on Il. 23,
598]; eccles. writ.) *
xpnorés, -7, -6v, (xpdouat), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for
310; 1. prop. jit for use, useful; virtuous, good :
#6n xpnora, 1 Co. xv. 33 ([ Treg. xpjora (but cf. B. 11)],
see 700s, 2). 2. manageable, i. e. mild, pleasant, (opp.
to harsh, hard, sharp, bitter): of things, ypnordrepos otvos,
pleasanter, Lk. v. 39 [here T Tr txt. ypnorés; so WH
in br.] (of wine also in Plut. mor. p. 240d. [i.e. Lacaen.
apophtheg. (Gorg. 2); p. 1073 a. (i. e. de com. notit.
28)]; of food and drink, Plat. de rep. 4 p. 488 a.; ovxa,
Sept. Jer. xxiv. 3, 5); 6 Cvyds (opp. to burdensome),
Mt. xi. 30 [A. V. easy]; of persons, kind, benevolent: of
God, 1 Pet. ii. 8 [A. V. gracious] fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.)
XpnaTorns
3; 7b xpnordv Tod Geod i. q. H xpnoTdrns [W. § 34, 2], Ro.
ii. 4; of men, ets reva towards one, Eph. iv. 32; émi twa,
Lk. vi. 35 [here of God; in both pass. A. V. kind].*
XpnoroTys, -nTos, 9, (xpyaTos) ; 1. moral good-
ness, integrity: Ro. iii. 12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3) [A. V.
‘doeth good’. 2. benignity, kindness: Ro.ii.4; 2
Co. vi. 6; Gal. v. 223 Col. iii. 12; Tit. iii. 45 4 xp. rwds
- érétwa, Ro. xi. 22 (opp. to dmoropia [q. v-]); Eph. ii. 7.
(Sept.; Eur., Isae., Diod., Joseph., Ael., Hdian.; often
in Plut.) [See Trench, Syn. § Lxiii.] *
xptcpa (so RG Led. min. WH) and ypicpa (L ed.
maj. T Tr; on the accent see W. §6,1¢e.; Lipsius,
Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35; [7df- Proleg. p. 102]), -ros,
76, (xpla, q-V-), anything smeared on, unguent, ointment,
usually prepared by the Hebrews from oil and aromatic
herbs. Anointing was the inaugural ceremony for
priests (Ex. xxviii. 37; xl. 13 (15); Lev. vi. 22; Num.
xxxv. 25), kings (1S. ix. 16; x. 1; xv. 1; xvi. 3, 13),
and sometimes also prophets (1 K. xix. 16 ef. Is. Ixi. 1),
and by it they were regarded as endued with the Holy
Spirit and divine gifts (1S. xvi. 13; Is. lxi. 1; Jo
seph. antt. 6, 8, 2 mpds rév Aavidny—when anointed
by Samuel —peraBaiver 7d Oeiov Katadtréyv SdovAov: «al
6 pev mpodntevew ApEaro, rod Ociov mveiparos eis adtov
perotkwwapevov) ; [see BB. DD. s.vv. Ointment, Anoint-
ing]. Hence in 1 Jn. ii. 20 (where dé rod dytov is so
used as to imply that this ypicya renders them éyious
[cf. Westcott ad loc.]) and 27, 7d ypioua is used of the
oft of the Holy Spirit, as the efficient aid in getting a
knowledge of the truth; see xpiw. (Xen., Theophr.,
Diod., Philo, al.; for mw, Ex. xxix. 7; xxx. 25;
Xxxv. 14; xl. 7 (9).)*
Xproriaves [cf. Bp. Lehtft. on Philip. p. 16 note], -od,
6, (Xpiords), a Christian, a follower of Christ: Acts xi.
26; xxvi. 28; 1 Pet. iv. 16. The name was first given
to the worshippers of Jesus by the Gentiles, but from the
second century (Justin Mart. [e. g. apol. 1, 4 p. 55 a;
dial. ec. Tryph. § 35; cf. ‘Teaching’ etc. 12, 4]) onward
accepted by them as a title of honor. Cf. Lipsius,
Ueber Ursprung u. altesten Gebrauch des Christen-
namens. 4to pp. 20, Jen. 1873. [Cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 2;
Farrar in Alex.’s Kitto s. v.; on the ‘Titles of Believérs
in the N. T.’ see Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 125 sq.;
ef. Dict. of Chris. Antiqq. s. v. ‘ Faithful ’.] *
xpiortds, -7, -dv, (xpiw), Sept. for Mw, anointed: 6
fepeds 6 xptords, Lev. iv. 5; vi. 22; of ypioroi iepeis, 2
Mace. i. 10; the patriarchs are called, substantively, of
Xptorot Oeov, Ps. civ. (ev.) 15; the sing. 6 ypuords rod
kupiov (11) Mw) in the O. T. often of the king of
Israel (see xpiopa), as 1 S. ii. 10, 85; [xxiv. 11; xxvi.
9, 11, 23]; 28.414; Ps. ii. 2; xvii. (xviii) 51; Hab.
iii. 13; [2 Chr. xxii. 7]; also of a foreign king, Cyrus,
as sent of God, Is. xlv. 1; of the coming king whom the
Jews expected to be the saviour of their nation and the
author of their highest felicity: the name 6 xptords
(rw, Chald. smwi) is not found in the O. T. but is
first used of him in the Book of Enoch 48, 10 [cef.
Schodde’s note]; 52, 4 (for the arguments by which
672
YplaT os
some have attempted to prove that the section contain-
ing these passages is of Christian origin are not
convincing [cf. vids rod avOparov, 2 and reff.]), after Ps.
ii. 2 referred to the Messiah; [cf. Psalter of Sol. 17, 36;
18, 6. 8]. Cf. Keim ii. 549 [Eng. trans. iv. 263 sq.;
Westcott ¢‘ Additional Note’on1Jn.v.1. On the gen-
eral subject see Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29.] In
the N. T. it is used 1. of the Messiah, viewed in
his generic aspects [the word, that is to say, being used
as an appellative rather than a proper name], 6 xpiorés:
Mt. ii. 4; xvi.16; xxiii. 10; xxiv. 5, 23; xxvi. 63; Mk.
viii. 29; xii. 35; xiii. 21; xiv. 61; Lk. iii. 15; iv. 413; xx.
41; xxii. 67 (66); xxiii. 39; xxiv. 26, 46; Jn. i. 20, 25,
[41 (42) Rec.]; iii. 28; iv. 29; vi. 69 Rec.; vii. 26, 31,
Al; xi. 27; xii. 34; xx. 31; Acts ii. 30 Rec., 31; iii. 183
viii. 53 ix. 22; xvii. 3*; xviii. 5, 28; xxvi. 23; 1 Jn. ib
22; ve 1; 6 xptords kupiov or Tod Oeod, Lk. ii. 265 ix.
20; Actsiv. 26; without the article, Lk. ii. 115 xxiii. 2;
Jn. i. 41 (42) LT Tr WH; ix. 22; Acts ii. 363 6 xpe
atds, 6 Bacwrevs tod Iopand, Mk. xv. 32; 6 xpiords se
used as to refer to Jesus, Rev. xx. 4,6; with rod Ocov
added, Rev. xi. 15; xii. 10. 2. It is added, as an
appellative (‘ Messiah’, ‘anointed’), to the proper name
"Inoots; a. "Inaods 6 xptords, Jesus the Christ (‘Mes
siah’): Acts v.42 RG; ix. 34[RG]; 1 Co. iii. 11 Ree.;
1Ju.v. 6 [RGL]; "Ingois 6 Acydpevos xpiords, who they
say is the Messiah [(cf. b. below) ], Mt. xxvii. 22; withe
out the art. Incots xpiorés, Jesus as Christ or Messiah,
Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. iv. 2; 2 Jn. 7, [but in all three exx. it
seems better to take xp. as a prop. name (see b. below) ];
6 xptords "Ingods, the Christ (Messiah) who is Jesus, [Mt.
i. 18 WH rg. (see b. below)]; Acts v. 42 LT Tr WH
[R. V. Jesus as the Christ]; xix. 4 Ree. b. 6 Xpe-
ords is a proper name (cf. W.§ 18,9 N.1; [as respects
the use of a large or a small initial letter the critical edd.
vary: Tdf. seems to use the capital initial in all cases;
Treg. is inconsistent (using a small letter, for in-
stance, in all the exx. under 1 above, exc. Lk. xxii. 67
and Jn. iv. 29; in Mt.i. 1 a capital, in Mk. ila
small letter, etc.); WH have adopted the principle of
using a capital when the art. is absent and avoiding it
when the art. is present (1 Pet. being intentionally ex-
cepted; the small letter being retained also in such exx.
as Lk. ii. 11; xxiii. 2; Acts ii. 36, ete.) ; see WH. Intr.
§415]): Mt.i.17; xi. 2; Ro. i. 16 Ree.; vii. 4; ix. 5;
xiv. 18 [here L om. Tr br. the art.]; xv. 19; 1Co. i. 6,
ete. without the article, Mk. ix. 41; Ro. vi. 4; viii. 9,
17; 1Co.i. 12; Gal. ii. 16 sq. 19 (20), 21; iii. 27; Phil.
i. 10, 18, 19-21, 23; ii. 16; Col. ii. 5, 8; Heb. iii. 6, and
often. “Incods Xpuoros, Mt. i. 1, 18 [here Tr om. ’I., WH
txt. br. °I.; al 67I. Xp. which is unique; see WH. App.
ad loc.]; Mk.i.1; Jn. i. 17; Acts ii. 38; iii. 6; iv.10;
viii. 12 ; [ix.34 LT Tr WH]; x. 36; xi.17; xv. 26; xvi.
18, 31 [RG]; xx. 21 [here L WH txt. om. Tr br. Xp.];
xxviii. 31 [Tdf. om. Xp.]; Ro. i. 1 [RG WH txt. (see be-
low)], 6, 8; ii. 16 [RG Trtxt. WH mrg. (see below)];
1 Co. i. 7-9; iii. 11 [G T Tr WH (Ree. ’I. 6 Xp.)]; xv.
57, and very often in the Epp. of Paul and Peter; Heb.
Xp!
xii. 8,21; 1 Jn.i.3,7[RG]; ii1; [v.6GT Tr WH];
2 Jn. 7 [(see a. above) ]; Jude 4, 17,21; Rev.i. 1 sq. 5;
xxii. 21 [RG (WH br. al. om. Xp.)]. Xpuords Inaods,
Ro. [i. 1 T Tr WH mrg. (see above) ; ii. 16 T Tr mrg.
WH txt. (see above) ]; vi. 3[ WH br.’I.]; 1 Co.i. 2, 30;
[ili. 11 Lehm. (see above)]; Gal. iii. 14 [here Tr txt.
WH txt. 1. X.]; iv. 14; v. 6 [WH br. ’1.]; vi. 15; Phil. ii.
5; iil. 3,14; Col ii6; 1 Tim. i. 2; ii.5. "Incots 6 Neyo-
Hevos Xpioros, surnamed ‘ Christ’ [(cf. a. above) ], Mt. i.
16. on the phrases év Xpuor@, év Xptor@ "Incod, see év,
I. 6b. p. 211° (cf. W.§ 20, 2a.]. Xpuords and Inaois Xp.
év tow, preached among, 2 Co. i. 19; Col. i. 27 [al. (so
-R.V.) would take év here internally (asin the foll. exx.),
within; cf. év, I. 2]; Xpiords év teow is used of the per-
son of Christ, who by his holy power and Spirit lives in
the souls of his followers, and so moulds their characters
that they bear his likeness, Ro. viii. 10 (cf. 9); 2 Co.
xill. 5; Gal. ii. 20; Eph. iii. 17; a mind conformed to
the mind of Christ, Gal. iv. 19.
xplo: 1 aor. éxpioa; (akin to yeip [(?), see Curtius
§ 201], xpaivw ; prop. ‘to touch with the hand’, ‘to be-
smear’); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for Nw; to anoint (on
the persons who received anointing among the Hebrews,
see xpiopa); in the N. T. only trop. of God a. con-
secrating Jesus to the Messianic office, and furnishing
him with powers necessary for its administration (see
xpiopa): Lk. iv. 18 (after Is. lxi. 1); contrary to com-
mon usage with an ace. of the thing, ¢Aaoy (like verbs
of clothing, putting on, etc. [cef. W. § 32, 4a.; B.§ 131,
6]), Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8; in Theoph. ad Autol.
1, 12 we find ypieoOa €Aavov Geod and yp. pari kai mvev-
part almost in the same sentence); mvevpate dyio Kal
duvdpet, Acts x. 38; also xpiew used absol., Acts iv.
27. b. enduing Christians with the gifts of the
Holy Spirit [cf. Westcott on 1 Jn. ii. 20]: 2 Co. i. 21.
[Comp.: év-, ém- ypia. SYN. see ddeipa, fin.]*
xpovitw; fut. ypovicw (Heb. x. 37 T Tr txt. WH), Attic
xpos (ibid. RG L Tr mrg.); (xpévos) ; fr. Aeschyl. and
Hadt. down; Sept. for Ws; to linger, delay, tarry: Mt.
xxv. 5; Heb. x. 37; foll. by év with a dat. of the place,
Lk. i. 21; foll. by an inf., Mt. xxiv. 48 [LT Tr WH om.
inf.]; Lk. xii. 45.*
xpdvos, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for of, Ny, ete.
time : Heb. xi. 32; Rev. x. 6; 6 yp. Tov pawopévov darépos,
the time since the star began to shine [cf. daiva, 2 a.],
Mt. ii. 7; [6 yp. rod receiv adrny (Gen. xxv. 24), Lk. 1.57
(B. 267 (230); cf. W. § 44, 4 a.)]; rips emayyedias, Acts
vii. 17; Hs mapotkias, 1 Pet. i.17; xpovor droxaracrdcews,
Acts iii. 21; of yp. tis dyvoias, Acts xvii. 30; yxpovov
Siayevopevov, Acts xxvii. 9; mécos ypdvos eativ, as TovTO
yéyovev, Mk. ix. 21; 6 mapeAndvOas xp. 1 Pet. iv. 3 (where
Ree. adds rod Biov) ; recoapaxovraerns, Acts vii. 23 ; xiii.
18; oreypy xpdvov, Lk. iv. 5; wAjnpwpa rod xpdvov, Gal.
iv. 4; movetv ([q. v- I. d.] to spend) xpdvov, Acts xv. 33;
xviii. 23; Brdoar rdv émidouroy xpdvov. 1 Pet. iv. 2; biddvau
xpévov rwi (i.e. a space of time, respite), wa ete. Rev. ii,
21 [(Joseph. b. j. 4, 3, 10)];_ plur. joined with xatpoi,
Acts i. 7; 1 Th. v. 1, (see xatpos, 2 e. p. 319%) 5 en” eaxdrav
673
Xpuc tov
(LT Tr WH écxdrov) rav yp. (see Zrxaros, 1 fin.), 1 Pet.
i. 20; [add, ew éoxdrov rod (Tr WH om. Tov) xpovou,
Jude 18 LT Tr WH]. with prepositions: dyp., Acts
iil. 21; da roy xp., on account of the leneth of time,
Heb. v. 12 (Polyb. 2, 21,2; Alciphr. 1, 26,9); ék xpover
ixavéyv, for a long time, Lk. viii. 27 [RGL Tr mrg. (see
below) ]; &v xpov@, Acts i. 6, 215 ey eaxar@ xpove, Jude
18 Rec.; emi xpovov, [A. V. for a while], Lk. xviii. 4; ém
meiova xp. [ A. V. a longer time], Acts xviii. 20; ed daov
xp: for so long time as, so long as, Ro. vii. 1; 1 Co. vii.
39; Gal. iv. 1; kara rdv ypdvor, according to (the rela-
tions of) the time, Mt. ii. 16; werd moddy xpdvor, Mt. xxv.
19; pera tocovrov xp. Heb. iv. 7; mpd Xpovev aiwvior,
[R.V. before times eternal], 2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 2. the
dative is used to express the time during which some-
thing occurs (dat. of duration of time, cf. W. §31, 9;
[B. § 133, 26]): [xpdv@ ixav@, for a long time, Lk. viii.
27T Tr txt. WH]; ixav@ xpove, Acts viii. 11 ; [rocovr@
Xpovo, Jn. xiv. 9 LT Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; wodXois xpdvors
[R. V. mrg. ofa long time (A. V. oftentimes) ; cf. modids,
c.], Lk. viii. 29; ateviow, [R. V. through times eternal],
Ro. xvi. 25. the accus. is used in answer to the
question how long: ypovoy, for a while, Acts xix. 22;
Rev. vi. 11 (where in RLT Tr WH _ wuxpov is added) ;
also xp. td, [A.V. a while}, 1 Co. xvi. 7; dcov yp. [A.V.
while], Mk. ii. 19; xpdvous ixavots, for a long time, Lk.
xx. 95 puxpov xpovov, In. vii. 33; xii. 35; Rev. xx. 3;
modvy xp. Jn. v. 6; trocovroy xp. Jn. xiv. 9 [RG Tr txt.
WH txt.]; ixavdv, [A. V. long time], Acts xiv. 3; ovk
dAtyov, [R. V. no little time], Acts xiv. 28; rév mavra xp.
Acts xx. 18. [On the ellipsis of ypdvos in such phrases
as ad’ od, ev r@ €Ens (Lk. vii. 11 L mrg. Tr txt. WH txt.),
ev t@ kabeéns (Lk. viii. 1), e& ixavod, etc., see dard, I. 4 b.
p- 58° top, é&js, cabeEns, ek IV. 1, etc. SYN. see xatpos,
fin.; cf. aiwy, fin. | *
XpovorpBéw, -@: 1 aor. inf. ypovorpiBnaas; (xpovos
and tpi8w) ; to wear away time, spend time: Acts xx. 16.
(Aristot. rhet. 3, 3, 3 [p. 1406%, 37]; Plut., Heliod.,
Eustath., Byz. writ.) *
Xptoeos, -€a, -eov, contr. -ods, -7, -ovv, [but acc. sing.
fem. -oav, Rev.i.13LTTrWH; gen. plur. -céwy, Rev.
ii. 1 L Tr; (on its inflection cf. B. 26 (23); Phryn. ed.
Lob. p. 207; L. and S. s. v. init.)], (ypvods), fr. Hom.
down, golden; made of gold; also overlaid or covered
with gold: 2 Tim. ii. 20; Heb. ix. 4; Rev. i. 12 sq. 20;
ii. 1; iv.4; v. 8; viii. 3; ix. 7 Grsb., 13, 20; xiv.14; xv.
6 sq.; xvii. 4; xxi. 15.*
xpvolov, -ov, 7, (dimin. of ypucds, cf. poprior), fr. Hat.
down, Sept. for 271, gold, both that which lies imbedded
in the earth and is dug out of it (Plat. Euthyd. p. 288 e.;
Sept. Gen. ii. 11; hence peraddevOév, Leian. de sacr. 11):
Xp- memupwpevoy ex mupos, [R. V. refined by fire], Rev.
iii. 18; and that which has been smelted and wrought,
Heb. ix. 4; [1 Co. iii.12 T Tr WH]; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev.
xxi. 18,213 i. q. gold coin, ‘gold’: Acts iii. 6; xx. 33;
1 Pet. i. 18; golden ornaments, precious things made of
gold, 1 Tim. ii. 9 L WH txt.; 1 Pet. iii. 3; Rev. xvii. 4
GLWHtat.; xviii. 16 GL Trtxt. WH txt. (cf. ypuods).*
YputodaKTUXOosS
Xpuoo-Saxridwos, -ov, (xpvods and daxriAuos), gold-
ringed, adorned with gold rings: Jas. ii. 2. (Besides
only in Hesych. s. v. xpuaoxdAAnros; [W. 26]-) (Cf.
B. D.s. v. Ring. ]*
Xpv0-d-AvOos, -ov, 6, (ypuaos and AiGos), chrysolith, chryso-
lite, a precious stone of a golden color ; our topaz (cf. BB.
OD. s. v. Chrysolite ; esp. Riehm, H WB. s.v. Edelsteine
$ and 19]: Rev. xxi.20. (Diod. 2,52; Joseph. antt. 3,
7,5; Sept. for wwan, Ex. xxviii. 20; xxxvi. 20 (xxxix.
13), (Ezek. i. 16 Aq.].)*
Xpvad-mpacos [-ov Lchm.], -ov, 6, (fr. xpuads, and mpdcov
a leek), chrysoprase, a precious stone in color like a leek,
of a translucent golden-green [cf. BB. DD.s. v.; Riehm,
HWB. s. v. Edelsteine 6]: Rev. xxi. 20.*
Xpvods, -ov, 6, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 31, gold (6 €mt
vyijs kal 6 ino ys, Plat. lege. 5 p. 728 a.): univ., Mt. ii.
11; 1Co. ii. 12(RGL (al. xpuciov, q. v.)]; Rev. ix. 7;
i. q. precious things made of gold, golden ornaments, Mt.
xxiii. 16 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 9 [here L WH txt. ypvoior]; Jas.
v. 3; Rev. xvii. 4 (L WH txt. ypvotov); xviii. 12, 16 (L
Tr txt. WH txt. ypuoiov); an image made of gold, Acts
xvii. 29; stampod gold, gold coin, Mt. x. 9.*
Xpvoots, see ypuveos.
Xpvodw, -G: pf. pass. ptep. Kexpyo@pévos; to adorn with
gold, to gild: xexpvoauén xpvo@, [A.V. decked with gold],
Rev. xvii. 4; and ev [GL Trom. WH br. é&y] xpvoe,
XViii. 16, of a woman ornamented with gold so profusely
that she seems to be gilded; Sept. for 291 N9¥) in Ex.
xxvi. 32. (Hdt., Arstpn., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) *
Xpa%s, en. ypwrds, 6, (cf. xpoud, the skin [cf. Curtius
§ 201]), fr. Hom. down, (who [generally] uses the gen.
xpoos ete. [cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom., or L. and S. s. v.]), the
surface of the body, the skin: Acts xix. 12; Sept. for
7wa, twice for Wy, Ex. xxxiv. 29 sq. Alex.*
xodos, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for D3, Jame :
Acts ili. 2, 11 Rec.; xiv. 8; plur., Mt. xi.5; xv. 30sq.;
xxi. 14; LK. vii. 22; xiv. 13, 21; Jn.v.3; Acts viii. 7;
7a xwddv, Heb. xii. 13 (on which see éxrpémw, 1). de-
prived of a foot, maimed, [A. V. halt]: Mt. xviii. 8; Mk.
ix. 45.*
x4pa, -as, n, (XAQ [cf. Curtius $179], to lie open, be
ready to receive), fz. Hom. down, Sept. for p38, 42"
‘a province’; 1. prop. the space lying between two
places or limits. 2. a region or country; i.e. a tract
of land: 9 x. éyybs Ths épjpov, Jn. xi. 54; [in an ellipti-
eal phrase, ) dotpam) (9) dotpdmrovoa éx ris imd Tov
otpavon eis THY tn’ ovpavdy Adume, A.V. part... part, Lk.
xvii. 24 (cf. W. § 64, 5); on the ellipsis of yépa in other
phrases (¢& evavrias, év dea, etc.), see W. 1. c.; B. 82
(72)]; land as opp. to the sea, Acts xxvii. 27; land as
inhabited, a province or country, Mk. v. 10; [vi. 55 L
mrg. T Tr WH]; Lk. xv. 13-15; xix. 12; Acts xiii. 49;
with a gen. of the name of the region added: Tpayovi-
ridos, Lk. iii. 1; ris “lovdaias, Acts xxvi. 20; [(or an
equiv. adj.) ] Tadarixyn, Acts xvi. 6; xviii. 23; rar "Iov-
dalov, Acts x. 39; plur. rijs IovSatas Kal Sapapelas, [A. V.
regions}, Acts viii. 1; ev yopa x. oxva Oavdrov, in a re-
gion of densest darkness (see oxid, a), Mt. iv. 16; ruvds,
674
XoP lov
the country of one, Mt. ii. 12; x. for its inhabitants,
Mk. i. 5; Acts xii. 20; the (rural) region environing a
city or village, the country, Lk. il. 8; Tepyeonvev, Tepa-
anvav, Tadapnvaev, Mt. viii. 28; Mk. v. 1; Lk. viii. 26;
the region with towns and villages which surrounds the
metropolis, Jn. xi. 55. 3. land which is ploughed
or cultivated, ground. Lk. xii. 16; plur., Lk. xxi. 21
[R.V. country]; Jn. iv. 35 (A.V. fields]; Jas. v. 4 [A. V.
fields]. [Sy¥N. see rozos, fin.]*
[Xwpatly, see Xopaciv. |
xpéw, -; fut. inf. ywpnoew (Jn. xxi. 25 Tr WH);
1 aor. éxopynoa; (xpos, a place, space, and this fr. XAQ,
cf. x@pa) ; 1. prop. to leave a space (which may be
occupied or filled by another), to make room, give place,
yield, (Hom. Il. 12,406; 16, 592; al.); to retire, pass:
of a thing, els 71, Mt. xv. 17. metaph. to betake one’s
self, turn one’s self: eis perdvovay, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [A. V.
come ; cf. peravoia, p. 406*]. 2. to go forward, ad-
vance, proceed, (prop. wwé, Aeschyl. Pers. 384); to make
progress, gain ground, succeed, (Plat. Eryx. p. 398 b.;
lege. 3 p. 684 e.; [ywpet ro kaxov, Arstph. nub. 307, vesp.
1483; al.]; Polyb. 10, 35, 4; 28, 15,12; al.): 6 Adyos 6
éuos ov xapet ev tpiv, gaineth no ground among you or
within you [R. V. hath not free course (with mrg. hath
no place) in you], Jn. viii. 37 [cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars
iii. ad loc. ]. 3. to have space or room for receiving
or holding something (Germ. fassen) ; prop.: ri, a thing
to fill the vacant space, Jn. xxi. 25 [not Tdf.]; of a
space large enough to hold a certain number of people,
Mk. ii. 2 (Gen. xiii. 6 [cf. Plut. praec. ger. reipub. 8, 5
p- 804b.]); of measures, which hold a certain quantity,
Jn. ii.6; 1 K. vii. 24 (38); 2 Chr. iv. 5, and in Grk. writ.
fr. Hdt. down. metaph. to receive with the mind or
understanding, to understand, (16 Kdtwvos dpovnua, Plut.
Cat. min. 64; dcov aire 7 Wux7 xopei, Ael. v. h. 3, 9); to
be ready to receive, keep in mind, and practise: rév Aoyov
todrov, this saying, Mt. xix. 11 sq. [(ef. Plut. Lycurg.
13, 5)]; twa, to receive one into one’s heart, make room
for one in one’s heart, 2 Co. vii. 2. [Comp.: dva-, dro-,
éx-, umo- xapéw. SYN. cf. épxopat. ]*
xoptte; fut. yopiow [B. 37 (33)]; 1 aor. inf. yapioa;
pres. mid. ywpifouai; pf. pass. ptep. keywpiopevos; 1 aor.
pass. exwpicOnv; (xepis, q.v.); fr. Hdt. down; to separate,
dwide, part, pul asunder : ri, opp. to avgevyvups, Mt. xix.
6; Mk. x. 9; rwd dro tivos, Ro. viii. 35, 39, (Sap. i. 8);
pf. pass. ptcp. Heb. vii. 26. Mid. and 1 aor. pass.
with a reflex. signif. to separate one’s self from, to de-
part; a. to leave a husband or wife: of divorce, 1
Co. vii. 11, 15; did avdpds, ib. 10 (a woman kexwpiopern
did tod avdpds, Polyb. 32, 12, 6 [al.]). b. to depart,
go away: [absol. Philem. 15 (euphemism for épvye),
R. V. was parted from thee]; foll. by dé with a gen. of
the place, Acts i. 4; é« with a gen. of the place, Acts
xviii. 1'sq. ((W. § 36,6 a.]; eds with an ace. of the place,
2 Mace. v. 21; xii. 12; Polyb., Diod., al.). [Comp.:
dro-, Sta- xapito. | *
Xeplov, -ov, rd, (dimin. of yépos or xdépa), fr. Hat.
down ; 1. a space, a place; a region, district. 2
Kopes
a piece of ground, a fietd, land. (Thue., Xen., Plat., al.):
Mt. xxvi. 36; Mk. xiv. 32; Jn. iv. 5[A. V. parcel of
ground]; Acts i. 18 sq.; iv. 84 [plur. lands]; v. 3, 8; a
farm, estate: plur. Acts xxviii. 7. [SyN. see rézos, fin.]*
xopls, (XAQ, see xwpa [cf. Curtius § 192]), adv., fr.
Hom. down; 1. separately, apart: Jn. xx. 7. 2.
as a prep. with the gen. [W. § 54, 6]; a. without any
pers. or thing (making no use of, having no association
with, apart from, aloof from, ete.) : 1 Co. [iv. 8]; xi. 11;
Phil. ii. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 8; v. 21; Heb. [ii. 9 Treg. mrg.];
x1. 40; mapaBodjjs, without making use of a parable, Mt.
xiii. 34; Mk. iv. 34; dpxwpooias, Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21;
\X: aiparos, Heb. ix. 7, 18; aiparexyvoias, Heb. ix. 22;
without i. e. being absent or wanting: Ro. vii. 8sq. [R.V.
apart from]; Heb. xi. 6; xii. 8,14; Jas. ii. 18 (Ree. ék),
20, 26, [in these three exx. R. V. apart from]; without
connection and fellowship with one, Jn. xv. 5 [R.V.
67
5) apevoowas
apart from]; destitute of the fellowship and blessings
of one: xapls Xprorod [cf. W. § 54, 2a.; R. V. separate
Jrom Christ], Eph. ii, 12; without the intervention (pare
ticipation or co-operation) of one, Jn. i. 3; Ro. iii. 21,
[285 iv. 6; x. 14]; x. Oewedéov, without laying a foun-
dation, Lk. vi. 49 ; x. ts ofjs yuopns, without consulting
you, (cf. yvoun, fin. (Polyb. 3, 21, 1. 2. 7)1, Philem. 14;
‘without leaving room for’: x. dvridoytas, Heb. vii. 7;
olkrippav, X.28. x. rod omparos, freed from the body,
2 Co. xii. 3 LT Tr WH (Ree. éerés, q.v. b. a.)3 xopis
dpaptias, without association with sin, i. e. without yield.
ing to sin, without becoming stained with it, Heb. iv.
15; not to expiate sin, Heb. ix. 28. b. besides:
Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38; 2 Co. xi. 28. [Syn. ef. dvev.]*
XSpos, -ov, 6, the north-west wind (Lat. Corus or
Caurus): for the quarter of the heavens from which
this wind blows, Acts xxvii. 12 (on which see Ady, 2).*
p
Waddrw; fut. ware; (fr. do, to rub, wipe; to handle,
touch, [but cf. Curtius p. 730]) ; a. to pluck off,
pull out: ¢epay, the hair, Aeschy]. Pers. 1062. b.
to cause to vibrate by touching, to twang: téEav veupas
xetpi, Eur. Bacch. 784; spec. xdpdqy, to touch or strike
the chord, to twang the strings of a musical instrument so
that they gently vibrate (Aristot. probl. 19, 23 [p. 919»,
2}); and absol. to play on a stringed instrument, to play
the harp, etc.: Aristot., Plut., Arat., (in Plat. Lys. p. 209b.
with kat kpovew TO mANKTp@ added [but not as ex plan-
atory of it; the Schol. ad loc. says Wada, Td avev
mAnktpov TO SaxTiA@ Tas xopdas éemapacbar]}; it is distin-
guished from x:apiew in Hat. 1, 155) ; Sept. for t3] and
much oftener for 797; to sing to the music of the harp;
in the N. T. to sing a hymn, to celebrate the praises of God
in song, Jas. v. 13 [R.V. sing praise]; r@ kupio, Td dvdpare
avrov, (often so in Sept.), in honor of God, Eph. v. 19
[here A. V. making melody]; Ro. xv. 9; Ware 6 mvev-
part, Ware d€ kai 76 voi, ‘I will sing God’s praises indeed
.with my whole soul stirred and borne away by the Holy
Spirit, but I will also follow reason as my guide, so that
what I sing may be understood alike by myself and by
the listeners’, 1 Co. xiv. 15.*
Wadpos, -0d, 6, (Wddda), @ striking, twanging, [(Eur.,
al.)]; spec. a striking the chords of a musical instru-
ment [(Pind., Aeschyl., al.)]; hence a pious song, a
psalm, (Sept. chiefly for 71111), Eph. v.19; Col. iii. 16;
the phrase éyew Wadpdv is used of one who has it in his
heart to sing or recite a song of the sort, 1 Co. xiv. 26
[cf. Heinrici ad loc., and Bp. Lghtft. on Col. u. s.]; one
Wadpot, Acts xiii. 33; plur. the (book of) Psalms, Lk.
xxiv.44; BiBdos ahuov, Lk. xx. 42; Actsi.20. [Syn.
see vpvos, fin. ]*
wpevd-ddeAdos, -ov, 6, (Wevdns and ddeddds), a false
brother, i. e. oné who ostentatiously professes to be a
Christian, but is destitute of Christian knowledge and
piety: 2Co. xi. 26; Gal. ii. 4.*
evs-arroeTonos, -ov, 6, (yrevdns and dméarodos), a false
apostle, one who falsely claims to be an ambassador of
Christ: 2 Co. xi. 13.*
evdys, -és, (YrevSopuat), fr. Hom. II. 4, 235 down, lying,
deceitful, false: Rev. ii. 2; pdprupes, Acts vi. 13; sub-
stantively of wevdets, [A. V. liars], Rev. xxi. 8 [here
Lehm. evaris, q. v-].*
evdo-SiSdokahos, -ov, 6, (Wevdns and diddckados), a
false teacher: 2 Pet. ii. 1.*
hev5o-Adyos, -ov, (Wevdys and A€yw), speaking (teach-
ing) falsely, speaking lies: 1 Tim. iv. 2. (Arstph. ran.
1521; Polyb., Leian., Aesop, al.) *
WevSopar; 1 aor. eyevoduny; (depon. mid. of petido
[allied w. Wupite etc. (Vaniéek p. 1195)] ‘ to deceive’,
‘cheat’: hence prop. to show one’s self deceitful, to play
false); fr. Hom. down; to lie, to speak deliberate false-
hoods: Heb. vi. 18; 1 Jn.i.6; Rev. iii. 9; od Wevdopat,
Ro. ix. 1; 2Co. xi. 31; Gal.i. 20; 1 Tim. ii. 7;
deceive one by a lie, to lie to, (Kur., Arstph., Xen., Plut.,
al.): Actsv. 3; like verbs of saying, with a dat. of the
pers. (cf. W. § 31,5; B. §133,1; Green p. 100 sq.), Acts
v. 4 (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 45; xxvii. (Ixxviii.) 36; Ixxxviii.
(Ixxxix.) 36; Josh. xxiv. 27; [Jer. v. 12], ete.) ; ets teva,
twa, to
of the songs of the book of the O. T. which is entitled | Col. iii. 9; xara twos, against one, Mt. v. 11 [L Gom
Yevdouaptup
Tr mrg. br. yevd.; al. connect Kad’ dudy with etraot and
make Wevd. a simple adjunct of mode (A. V. falsely) ];
kata THs GAnOeias, Jas. iii. 14 [here Tdf. makes wevd.
absol.; cf. W. 470 (438) n.3]. (Sept. for wma and 373.)*
WevSo-pdprup, unless more correctly evdoudpr vs or
rather evdopaprus (as avropuaprup ; see Passow s. v.
Wevdoudprus [esp. Lob. Paralip. p. 217; ef. Etym. Magn.
506, 26]), -vpos, 6, (evdns and pdprup [q. v.]), a false
witness: Mt. xxvi. 60; rod Oeod, false witnesses of i. e.
concerning God [W. § 30, 1 a.], 1 Co. xv. 15. (Plat.
Gorg. p. 472 b.; Aristot. pol. 2, 9, 8 [p. 1274>, 6; but
the true reading here is Wevdouaprupta@v (see Bentley’s
Works ed. Dyce, vol. i. p. 408); a better ex. is Aristot.
rhet. ad Alex. 16 p. 1432*, 6; cf. Plut. praec. ger. reip.
29,1; Constt. apost. 5, 9; Pollux 6, 36, 153].) *
WevSo-paptupéw, -@: impf. eyrevdouapripouy; fut. yev-
Souaptupnow; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. sing. pevdopaprupyons 5
to utter falsehoods in giving testimony, to testify falsely,
to bear false witness, (Xen. mem. 4, 4,11; Plat. rep. 9,
p- 575 b.; lege. 11 p. 937 c.; Aristot. rhet. 1, 14, 6 p.
1375, 12; [rhet. ad Alex. 16 p. 1432*, 6]; Joseph.
antie310,20)) eMibs xix USi se Mike xen 9) ce tuk. xviii 20's
Ro. xiii. 9 Ree.; xara tuvos, Mk. xiv. 56 sq. (as Ex. xx.
16; Deut. v. 20).*
Wevdo-paprupia, -as,7, (Wevdouaprupéw), false testimony,
false witness: Mt. xv.19; xxvi. 59. (Plat., Plut.; often
in the Attic orators.) *
Wevdoucdprus, see yrevOouaprup.
Wevdo-mpopitys, -ov, 6, (Wevdns and mpopytns), one who,
acting the part of a divinely inspired prophet, utters false-
hoods under the name of divine prophecies, a false prophet:
Mt. vii. 15; xxiv. 11, 24; Mk. xiii. 22; Lk. vi.26; Acts
Kie1O 2 ets Werle; tae NVve Lom CVs X Vis Lone xix. 20
xx. 10. (Jer. vi. 13; xxxiii.’ (xxvi.) 8,11, 16; xxxiv.
(xxvil.) 7; xxxvi. (xxix.) 1, 8; Zech. xiii. 2; Joseph.
antt. 8, 13, 1; 10, 7,3; b. j. 6, 5, 2; [rdv rovodrov edOv-
Bdrm dvopare evdorpopyrny mpocayopedver, Ky8Snrevovra
Tv adryOn mpodnteiav x. Ta yynova vdbos edpnyace émt-
oxidfovra xtd. Philo de spec. lege. iii. § 8]; eccles. writ.
[‘ Teaching’ 11, 5 ete. (where see Harnack)]; Grk. writ.
use Wevddpartis.) *
wpedSos, -ovs, rd, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for pw, 3rd,
wm, @ lie; conscious and intentional falsehood : univ.
Rev. xiv. 5 (where Ree. d0A0s) ; opp. to 4 ddndera, Jn.
viii. 44; Eph. iv. 25; od« gore wpetdos, opp. to ddndés
€orw, is no lie, 1 Jn. ii. 27; répara ebdous, [A. V. lying
wonders] exhibited for the treacherous purpose of de-
ceiving men, 2 Th. ii. 9; in a broad sense, whatever is
not what it professes to be: so of perverse, impious, deceit-
ful precepts, 2 Th. ii. 11; 1 Jn. ii. 21; of idolatry, Ro.
i. 25; moveiv redSos, to act in accordance with the pre-
cepts and principles of idolatry, Rev. xxi. 27; xxii. 15,
icf. xxi. 8, and p. 526% mid.]. *
ev8o-xpirtos, -ov, 6, (Wevdjs and yxpicrés), a false
Christ (or Messiah), (one who falsely lays claim to the
name and office of the Messiah): Mt. xxiv. 24; Mk.
xiii. 22.*
Yevdavupos, -ov, (YeddSos [Yevdys, rather] and dvopa),
676
pvOupiatys
falsely named [A.V. falsely so called]: 1 Tim. vi. 20.
(Aeschyl., Philo, Plut., Sext. Emp.) *
Wedopa, -ros, 7d, (Wevda), a falsehood, a lie, (Plat. Meno
p- 71d.; Plut., Leian.; Sept.); spec. the perfidy by
which a man by sinning breaks faith with God, Ro. iii
en
Weborys, -ov, 6, (Wedd), fr. Hom. down, a liar: Jn.
vill. 44,55; 1Jn.i.10; ii. 4, 22° iv. 20; v.10; 1 Tim. i
10; Tit. i. 12; [Rev. xxi. 8 Lchm. (al. yevdqs, q. v-)]3
one who breaks faith, a false or fuithless man (see
Wedopa), Ro. iii. 4 cf. Prov. xix. 22.*
nradhde, -G: 1 aor. éyndradpyoa, optat. 3 pers. plur.
Wyrapnceav (Acts xvii. 27, the Holic form; see zoréw,
init.) ; pres. pass. ptep. Wyrapapevos; (fr. aw, to
touch) ; to handle, touch, feel: ri or ted, Lk. xxiv. 39;
Heb. xii. 18 [see R. V. txt. and mrg., cf. B. § 134, 8; W.
343 (322)]; 1Jn.i.1; metaph. mentally to seek after
tokens of a person or thing : Oedv, Acts xvii. 27 [A.V. feel
after]. (Hom., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Philo, Plut.;
often for w3, wn, Ww.) [SyYN.see dro, 2c.]*
init; 1 aor. epndica; (Wados, q.v-); to count with
pebbles, to compute, calculate, reckon: tiv Samdynv, Lk.
xiv. 28; rdv dptOudv, to explain by computing, Rev. xiii.
18. (Polyb., Plut., Palaeph., Anthol.; commonly and
indeed chiefly in the mid. in the Grk. writ. to give one’s
vote by casting a pebble into the urn; to decide by voting.)
[Comp.: ovy-kata-, cup- Wnhpito. ]*
Wiidos, -ov, 7, (fr. aw, see Wado), a small, worn,
smooth stone; pebble, (fr. Pind., Hdt., down; (in Hom.
Wis) |; 1. since in the ancient courts of justice
the accused were condemned by black pebbles and ac-
quitted by white (cf. Passow s. v. Widos, 2 ¢., vol. ii. p.
2574>; [L.and S. s. v.4 d.]; Ovid. met. 15, 41; [Plut.
Alcib. 22, 2]), and a man on his acquittal was spoken of
as vknoas (Theophr. char. 17 (19), 3) and the Wados
acquitting him called ywxyrnpios (Heliod. 3, 3 sub fin.),
Christ promises that to the one who has gained eternal
life by coming off conqueror over temptation (r@ vixodvTe
[ A. V. to him that overcometh]) he will give Wjdpov Aevkn»,
Rev. ii. 17; but the figure is explained differently by
different interpp.; cf. Diisterdieck [or Lee in the ‘Speak-
er’s Com.’] ad loc.; [B. D. s. v. Stones, 8]. Ewald (Die
Johann. Schriften, ii. p. 136; [cf. Lee u.s.; Plumptre in
B. D. s. v. Hospitality, fin.]) understands it to be the
tessera hospitalis [cf. Rich, Dict. of Antig. s. v. Tessera,
3; Becker, Charicles, sc.i. note 17], which on being shown
secures admission to the enjoyment of the heavenly
manna; the Greek name, however, for this tessera, is
not WHpos, but cvpBorov. 2. a vote (on account of
the use of pebbles in voting): xarapépw (q. v-), Acts
xxvi. 10.*
bupirpds, -0d, 6, (YOupi{@, to whisper, speak into
one’s ear), a@ whispering, i.e. secret slandering, (Vulg.
susurratio, Germ. Ohrenbldserei): joined w. katadaded
[ef. Ro. i. 29 (30)], 2 Co. xii. 20; Clem. Rom. 80, 3; 35, 5.
(Plut.; Sept. for wm), of the magical murmuring of a
charmer of snakes, Eccl. x. 11.) *
bupioris, -od, 6, (see the preced. word), a whisperer,
pox lov
secret slanderer, detractor, (Germ. Ohrenblaser): Ro. i.
29 (30). (At Athens an epithet of Hermes, Dem. p:
1358, 6; also of 6”Epws and Aphrodite, Suidas p. 3957
c.; [ef. W. 24].)*
rx lov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of Wig, yrxds, f, a morsel), a little
morsel, @ crumb (of bread or meat): Mt. xv. 27; Mk.
vii. 28; Lk. xvi. 21 [T WHom.LTr br. y.]. (Not
found in Grk. auth. [cf. W. 24; 96 (91)].)*
Wvx4, -is, }, (Wodxa, to breathe, blow), fr. Hom. down,
Sept. times too many to count for wa, occasionally also
for 39 and 5995 1. breath (Lat. anima), i.e. a.
the breath of life; the vital force which animates the body
and shows itself in breathing: Acts xx.10; of animals,
Rev. viii. 9, (Gen. ix. 4 sq.; xxxv. 18; émorpadpire #
Wux7 Tod madapiov, 1 K. xvii. 21); so also in those pass.
where, in accordance with the trichotomy or threefold
division of human nature by the Greeks, 9 Wuy7 is dis-
tinguished from 16 mvedpa (see mvedpa, 2 p. 520° [and
reff. s. v. mv. 5]), 1 Th. v. 23; Heb. iv. 12. b. life:
Hepysvav tH Woy, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 225; rhv Wuxny
ayarav, Rev. xii. 11; [puoetv, Lk. xiv. 26]; rebévar, Jn.
x. 11, 15, 17; xiii. 37 sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16; mapa-
diddvar, Acts xv. 26; Siddvae (Avrpov, q. v-), Mt. xx. 28 ;
Mk. x. 45; (nreiv rv woyny tivos (see Cyréw, 1 a.), Mt.
ii. 20; Ro. xi. 3; add, Mt. vi. 25; Mk. iii.43 Lk. vi. 9;
xii. 20, 23; Acts xx. 24; xxvii.10, 22; Ro. xvi. 4; 2 Co.
i. 23; Phil ii. 30; 1 Th.ii. 8; in the pointed aphorisms
of Christ, intended to fix themselves in the minds of his
hearers, the phrases evpioxew, ca ew, dmroddvvar TH
Wuxnv adrod, etc., designate as yvx7 in one of the anti-
thetic members the life which is lived on earth, in the
other, the (blessed) life in the eternal kingdom of God:
Mt. x. 39; xvi. 25 sq.; Mk. viii. 35-37; Lk. ix. 24, 56
Rec.; xvii. 33; Jn. xii. 25; the life destined to enjoy
the Messianic salvation is meant also in the foll. phrases
[(where R. V. soul)]: mepuroinows Wuxns, Heb. x. 39;
kracba tas Wuyxds, Lk. xxi. 19; imép raév Wuxar, [here
A.V. (not R.V.) for you; ef.c. below], 2 Co. xii. 15. ec.
that in which there is life; a living being: puxn (aoa, a
living soul, 1 Co. xv. 45; [Rev. xvi. 3 R Tr mrg.], (Gen.
ii. 7; plur. i. 20); maca Wuxy Cons, Rev. xvi. 3 [G LT
Tr txt. WH] (Lev. xi. 10); maca puxn, every soul, i. e.
every one, Acts ii. 43; iii. 23; Ro. xiii. 1, (so wa3-52,
Lev. vii. 17 (27); xvii. 12); with dvOpémov added, every
soul of man (DIS wd}, Num. xxxi. 40, 46, [ef. 1 Mace.
ii. 38]), Ro. ii. 9. uxai, souls (like the Lat. capita) i. e.
persons (in enumerations; cf. Germ. Seelenzahl): Acts
ii. 41; vii. 14; xxvii. 37; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xlvi. 15,
18, 22, 26, 27; Ex.i.5; xii. 4; Lev. ii. 1; Num. xix.
11, 13, 18; [Deut. x. 22]; the exx. fr. Grk. authors (cf.
Passow s. v- 2, vol. ii. p. 2590") are of a different sort
[yet cf. L. and S.s. v. II. 2]); yuxai dvOpamer of slaves
[A. V. souls of men (R.V. with mrg. ‘ Or lives’)}, Rev.
xviii. 13 (so [Num. xxxi. 35]; Ezek. xxvii. 13; see odpa,
1c. [ef. W. § 22, 7 N. 3]). 2. the soul (Lat. ani-
mus), a. the seat of the feelings, desires, affections,
aversions, (our soul, heart, ete. (R. V. almost uniformly
soul]; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii.
677
spuxiKes
p- 2589°; [L. and S. s. v. II. 3]; Hebr. winj, cf. Gesenius,
Thesaur. ii. p. 901 in 3): Lk.i. 46; ii. 35; Jn. x. 24 [ef
aipo,1b.]; Acts xiv. 2, 22; xv. 24; Heb. vi.19; 2 Pet.
li. 8,145 4 emOupia tis Wp. Rev. xviii. 145 dvdmavow rats
Wuxais ebpioxev, Mt. xi. 29; VYuxy, ... dvaratov, hdye,
nie [WH br. these three impvs. ], edppaivov (personifica-
tion and direct address), Lk. xii. 19, cf. 18 (4 uy} dva-
mavoerat, Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 28; evppaive tiv Wuyny, Ael.
v.h. 1,32); eddoxe? ) uxn pov (anthropopathically, of
God), Mt. xii. 18; Heb. x. 88; mepitumds eorw 4 Wuxn
pov, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34; 9 ux pov rerdpaxrat,
Jn. xii. 27; rats puyais tudy ékrvdpevor, [ fainting in your
souls (cf. ékAvw, 2 b.)], Heb. xii. 3; év dry rH Wuxy aor,
with all thy soul, Mt. xxii. 37; [Lk. x. 27 Ltxt. T Tr
WH]; && ddns ths Wuyxijs cov (Lat. ex toto animo), with
[lit. from (cf. éx, I. 12 b.)] all thy soul, Mk. xii. 30, 33
[here TWH om. L Tr mrg. br. the phrase]; Lk. x. 27
[R G], (Deut. vi. 5; [Epict. diss. 3, 22,18 (cf. Xen. anab.
7, 7,43)]; Antonin. 8,4; [esp. 4, 31; 12, 29]; 6An rH
Wuxn pportitey tuvds (rather, with xexyapicOa], Xen.
mem. 3, 11,10); pod Wuy7, with one soul [cf. mvedpa, 2
p- 520* bot.], Phil. i. 27; rod mAjOous .. . qv 9 Kapdia Kal
7) Yux? pia, Acts iv. 32 (éparndels ri éore idos, &pn* pia
Woxn dto capaow évoikodaa, Diog. Laért. 5, 20 [cf. Aristot.
eth. Nic. 9, 8, 2 p. 1168", 7; on the elliptical aad judas
(sc. Wuxijs?), see amd, IIT.]); ék puxis, from the heart,
heartily, [Eph. vi. 6 (Tr WH with vs. 7)]; Col. iii. 23,
(ex rhs Wuxns often in Xen.; 7d ex Wuyis révOos, Joseph.
antt. 17, 6, 5). b. the (human) soul in so far as it
is so constituted that by the right use of the aids offered it
by God it can attain its highest end and secure eternal
blessedness, the soul regarded as a moral being designed
for everlasting life: 3 In. 2; dypumvetv irép trav Woyxdr,
Heb. xiii. 17; émeOvpia, airwes orparevovrar kata tis
Woyijs, 1 Pet. ii. 115 émioxoros rv Wuxay, ib. 25; caHtew
ras Wuxds, Jas. i. 21; Wuxnv €« Oavdrov, from eternal
death, Jas. v. 20; owrnpia yuyav, 1 Pet. i. 95 dyvigew
Tas Woxas éavtav, ib. 22; [ras puxas mor@ xriotn mapa-
ridecOa, 1 Pet. iv. 19]. c. the soul as an essence
which differs from the body and is not dissolved by death
(distinguished fr. rd oGpa, as the other part of human
nature [so in Grk. writ. fr. Isocr. and Xen. down; cf.
exx. in Passow s. v. p. 2589* bot.; L. and S. s. v. I. 2]):
Mt. x. 28, cf. 4 Mace. xiii. 14 (it is called dOavaros, Hat.
2, 123; Plat. Phaedr. p. 245 c., 246 a., al.; apOapros, Jo-
seph. b. j. 2, 8,14; SiadvOjvae thy Woyxhy drd Tod ceparos.
Epict. diss. 3, 10, 14); the soul freed from the body, a
disembodied soul, Acts ii. 27, 31 Rec.; Rev. vi. 9; xx.
4, (Sap. iii. 1; [on the Homeric use of the word, see
Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. 3 and reff. sub fin., also Proud fit
in Bib. Sacr. for 1858, pp. 753-805 ]).*
Wuxurds, -7, -dv, (Wuxn), (Vulg. animalis, Germ. sinn-
lich), of or belonging to the Wuxi; a. having the
nature and characteristics of the :oyn i.e. of the prin-
ciple of animal life, which men have in common with the
brutes (see Wuy7, 1 a.), [A. V. natural]: copa Youxixdr,
1 Co. xv. 44; substantively, 7d Wuyixdy [W. 592 (551)],
ib. 46; since both these expressions do not differ in
apuyos
substance or conception from cap£ kai afua in vs. 50,
Paul might have also written capktxdy ; but prompted
by the phrase Wuyi (aoa in vs. 45 (borrowed fr. Gen. ii.
7), he wrote yuxexdv. b. governed by the Yoxn
i.e. the sensuous nature with its subjection to appetite
and passion (as though made up of nothing but Wexn) :
&vOpwmos (i. q. capkexds [or odpxwos, q. Vv. 3] in il. 15);
1 Co. ii. 14; Wuyexol, mvevpa py ExovTes, Jude 19 [A. V.
sensual (R. V. with mrg. ‘Or natural, Or animal’); so in
the foll. ex.]; copia, a wisdom in harmony with the
corrupt desires and affections, and springing from them
(see copia, a. p. 581 bot.), Jas. iii, 15. (In various
other senses in prof. auth. fr. Aristot. and Polyb. down. )*
Wixos (RG Tr WH), more correctly yodxos (LT; cf.
[Tdf. Proleg. p. 102]; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 44
sq-), -ovs, Td, (Yoyo, q. v), fr. Hom. down, cold: Jn.
xviii. 18; Acts xxviii. 2; 2 Co. xi. 27; for 1p, Gen.
viii. 22; for Mp, Ps. exlvii. 6 (17), Job xxxvii. 8.*
Wuxpds, -d, -dv, (oxo, q. v-), fr. Hom. down, cold,
cool: neut. of cold water, rornpioy yvxpov, Mt. x. 42
(Lyuxpd Aodvra, Hat. 2, 37]; wuypdv miver, Epict.
ench. 29, 2; mAvverOar Wuxpa, diss. 4, 11, 19; cf. W.
591 (550)); metaph. like the Lat. frigidus, cold i. e.
sluggish, inert, in mind (yp. ryv opynv, Leian. Tim. 2): of
678 aoe
one destitute of warm Christian faith and the desire for
holiness, Rev. iii. 15 sq.*
Woxo: 2 fut. pass. puynoopat [cf. Lod. ad Phryn.
p- 318; Moeris ed. Piers. p. 421 s. v.]; fr. Hom. down ; to
breathe, blow, cool by blowing ; pass. to be made or to grow
cool or cold: trop. of waning love, Mt. xxiv. 12.*
Yopllo; 1 aor. eapuca; (Yopds, a bit, a morsel; see
Wopiov) ; a. to feed by putting a bit or crumb (of
food) into the mouth (of infants, the young of animals,
etc.): twd tux (Arstph., Aristot., Plut., Geop., Artem.
oneir. 5, 62; Porphyr., Jambl.). b. univ. to feed,
nourish, (Sept. for 72873) [W. § 2, 1 b.]: red, Ro. xii.
20; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 55,2; with the ace. of the
thing, to give a thing to feed some one, feed out to, (Vulg.
distribuo in cibos pauperum [A. V. bestow... to feed the
poor)): 1Co. xiii. 3; inthe O. T. rwd n, Sir. xv. 3; Sap.
xvi. 20; Num. xi.4; Deut. xxxii.13; Ps. Ixxix. (Ixxx.)
6; Is. lviii. 14, etc.; cf. W. § 32, 4 a. note.*
Yoplov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of popuds), a fragment, bit,
morsel, [A. V. sop]: Jn. xiii. 26 sq. 30. (Ruth ii. 14;
Job xxxi. 17, [but in both papds]; Antonin. 7,3; Diog.
Laért. 6, 37.) * :
bdxo; (fr. obsol. aw for daw) ; to rub, rub to pieces:
ras ordxvas rais xepoiv, Lk. vi. 1. [(mid. in Nicand.)]*
Q
Q, »: omega, the last (24th) letter of the Grk. alpha-
bet: éyo eu 7d OQ [WH 7O, LS, To, i. q. 7d TEéAos, i. e.
the last (see A, a, Gkga [and B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v.
and art. ‘ Alpha’, also art. A and Q by Piper in Herzog
(cf. Schaff-Herzog), and by Tyrwhitt in Dict. of Chris.
Antiq.]), Rev. i. 8, 11 Rec.; xxi. 6; xxii. 13. [On the
interchange of » and o in Mss. see Scrivener, Plain In-
troduction ete. p. 627; ‘Six Lectures’ etc. p.176; WH.
Intr. § 404; cf. esp. Meisterhans, Gram. d. Att. Inschr.
p- 10.]*
&, an interjection, prefixed to vocatives (on its use in
the ‘N. T. cf. B. 140 (122); [W. § 29, 3]), O3 it is
used a. in address: & Oedpire, Acts i. 1; add,
Acts xviii. 14; xxvii. 21 [here Tdf. 3 (ex errore); on
the pass. which follow cf. B. u. s.]; Ro. ii. 1,3; ix. 20;
1 Tim. vi. 20; and, at the same time, reproof, Jas. ii.
20. b. in exclamation: and that of admiration,
Mt. xv. 28; Ro. xi. 33 [here Rec. Lehm. 8; cf. Chand-
ler $§ 902, (esp.) 904]; of reproof, Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts
xiii. 10; Gal. iii. 1; with the nom. (W. § 29, 2), Mt.
xvil. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk.ix.41. [(From Hom. down.) ]*
"OBS (RG; see “IwBnd), 6, (Hebr. T2iy [i. e. ‘ser-
vant’ sc. of Jehovah]), Obed, the grandfather of king
David: Mt.i.5; Lk. iii, 32, (Ruth iv. 17sq.; 1 Chr. ii.
22).*
de, adv., (fr. d8e); 1. so, in this manner, (very
often in Hom.). 2. adv. of place; a. hither,
to this place (Hom. Il. 18, 392; Od. 1, 182; 17, 545; ef.
B. 71 (62 sq.) [ef. W. § 54, 7; but its use in Hom. of
place is now generally denied; see Ebeling, Lex.
Hom. s. v. p. 484; L.andS. s. v.II.J): Mt. viii. 29; xiv.
18 [Tr mrg. br. Se]; xvii. 17; xxii. 12; Mk.xi.3; Lk.
ix. 41; xiv. 21; xix. 27; Jn. vi. 25; xx. 27; Actsix. 21;
Rev. iv.1; xi. 12, (Sept. for non, Ex. iii. 5; Judg. xviii.
3; Ruth ii. 14); €ws &de, [even unto this place], Lk.
xxiii. 5. b. here, in this place: Mt. xii. 6, 41 sq.;
xiv. 17; Mk. ix.1,5; xvi.6; Lk. ix.33; xxii.38; xxiv.
6 [WH reject the cl.]; Jn. vi. 9; xi. 21, 82, and often,
(Sept. for 75); 7a Sde, the things that are done here,
Col. iv. 9; &Se, in this city, Acts ix. 14; in this world,
Heb. xiii. 14; opp. to ékxet (here, i. e. according to the
Levitical law still in force; there, i.e. in the passage in
Genesis concerning Melchizedek), Heb. vii. 8; de
with some addition, Mt. xiv. 8; Mk. vi. 3; viii.4; Lk.
iv. 23; Sde 6 Xprords, i) Bde, here is Christ, or there, [so
A.V., but R. V. here is the Christ, or, Here (cf. &8¢ rai
Sde, hither and thither, Ex. ii. 12 ete.)], Mt. xxiv. 23;
de i... éxet, Mk. xiii. 21 [TWH om. 4; Tr mrg. reads
cai]; Lk. xvii. 21, 23 [here T Tr WH mre. éxei.. . S8¢
(WH txt. exet #... S3e)]; Jas.ii. 3 Phere Rec. cred §...
bde; G LT Tr WH om. de (WH txt. and marg. vary-
ing the place of éket)]. Metaph. in this thing, Rev. xiii.
10, 18; xiv. 12; xvii. 9, [the phrase &3é éorw in at
least two of these pass. (viz. xiii. 18; xiv. 12) seems to
be equiv. to ‘here there is opportunity for’, ‘need of’
ete. (so in Epict. diss. 3, 22, 105)]; in this state of things,
under these circumstances, 1 Co. iv. 2 L [who, however,
connects it with vs. 1] TTr WH;; ef. Meyer ad loe.
85x, -js, 9, (i. q. dowdy, fr. deidw i.e. dda, to sing), fr.
Soph. and Eur. down, Sept. for yw and YW, @ song,
lay, ode; in the Scriptures a song in praise of God or
Christ: Rev. v. 9; xiv. 3; Matoéws x. roo apviov, the
song which Moses and Christ taught them to sing, Rev.
xv. 3; plur. with the epithet mvevparicail, Eph. v. 19
[here L br. mv.]; Col. iii. 16. [Syn. see Suvos, fin.]*
atv (1 Th. v. 3; Is. xxxvii. 3) for dts (the earlier
form; cf. W. § 9,2 e. N. 1), -ivos, 4, fr. Hom. Il. 11, 271
down, the pain of childbirth, travail-pain, birth-pang:
1 Th. v. 35 plur. ddives ([ pangs, throes, R. V. travail);
Germ. Wehen), i.q. intolerable anguish, in reference to
the dire calamities which the Jews supposed would pre-
cede the advent of the Messiah, and which were called
mw 93m [see the Comm. (esp. Keil) on Mt. 1-c.],
Mt. xxiv. 8; Mk. xiii. 8 (9); dives Gavdrov {Tr mrg.
ddov], the pangs of death, Acts ii. 24, after the Sept.
who translated the words n) on by adbdives 0., deriv-
ing the word Yan not, as they ought, from an i. e.
cxowior ‘cord’, but from 53n, dois, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 5;
exiv. (cxvi.) 3; 2S. xxii. 6.*
&8tvw; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 5yn, thrice for ban;
to feel the pains of childbirth, to travail: Gal. iv. 27;
Rey. xii. 2; in fig. disc. Paul uses the phrase ods maAuw
diva, i. e. whose souls I am striving with intense effort
and anguish to conform to the mind of Christ, Gal. iv.
19. [Compe.: cvv-wdive.]*
cos, -ov, 6, (OID i. q. Pépw [(?); allied w. Lat. umerus,
cf. Vaniéek p. 38; Curtius § 487]), fr. Hom. down, the
shoulder: Mt. xxiii. 4; Lk. xv. 5.*
advéopat, -ovpar: 1 aor. dvnodpynv (which form, as well
as ewvnodpny, belongs to later Grk., for which the earlier
writ. used émpidpnv; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 137 sqq.;
(Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 210 sqq.; Veitch s. v.];
W. §12, 2; §16 s.v.); fr. Hdt. down; to buy: witha
gen. of the price, Acts vii. 16.*
adv [so RG Tr, but L T WH @év; see (Etym. Magn.
822, 40) I,¢], -0d, rd, fr. Hdt. down, an egg: Lk. xi. 12,
(for n¥°3, found only in the plur. D°¥73, Deut. xxii.
6 sq.; Is. x. 14, etc.).*
dpa, -as, 4, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for Ny and in Dan.
for Nyw; 1. a certain definite time or season fixed
by natural law and returning with the revolving year;
of the seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn,
winter, as &pa tov Odpous, mpwipos x. dYipos, xetpepia,
etc.; often in the Grk. writ. [cf. L. andS.s. v. A. I. 1 ¢.,
and on the inherent force of the word esp. Schmidt ch.
a4 §6 sq.]- 2. the daytime (bounded by the rising
and the setting of the sun), a day: épa mapyddev, Mt.
x:v.153 #8n Spas modAjs yevouevys (or yewouévns), [A. V-
679
4
apa
when the day was now far spent], Mk. vi. 35 (see moXtvs, c.
[but note that in the ex. fr. Polyb. there cited TOAARS
Spas means early]); dypias [de T Tr mrg. WH txt.] #5p
ovens tis dpas [WH mrg. br. rijs Spas], Mk. xi. 11
(Gwe ris Spas, Polyb. 8, 83, 7; ras dpas eyiyvero owe,
Dem. p. 541, 28). 3. @ twelfth part of the day-time,
an hour, (the twelve hours of the day are reckoned from
the rising to the setting of the sun, Jn. xi. 9 [cf. BB.
DD. s. v. Hour; Riehm’s HWB. s. v. Uhr]): Mt. xxiv.
36; xxv. 13; Mk. xiii. 32; xv. 25,33; Lk. xxii. 59; xxiii.
44; Jn.i.39 (40); iv. 6; xix. 14; with r9s quépas added,
Acts ii. 15; of the hours of the night, Lk. xii. 39;
xxii. 59; with ris vuerds added, Acts xvi. 33; xxiii. 23;
dat. Spa, in stating the time when [W. § 31, 9; B.
§ 133, 26]: Mt. xxiv. 44; Mk. xv. 34; Lk. xii. 39 sq.;
preceded by év, Mt. xxiv. 50; Jn. iv. 52; Acts xvi. 33;
accus. to specify when [W. § 32,6; B. § 131, 11]: Jn.
iv.52; Acts x. 3; 1Co.xv. 30; Rev. iii.3; also to express
duration [W. and B. ll.cc.]: Mt. xx. 12 [ef. rougo, I.
1a. fin.]; xxvi. 40; Mk. xiv. 37; preceded by preposi-
tions: dad, Mt. xxvii. 45; Acts xxiii. 23; gos, Mt. xxvii.
45; peéxpt, Acts x. 30; mepi with the accus. Acts x. 9.
improp. used for @ very short time: pu Spa, Rev. xviii.
10 [Rec. ev, WH mrg. ace.], 17 (16), 19; apds pay,
[A. V. for a season], Jn. v. 35; 2 Co. vii. 8; Gal. ii. 5
[here A. V. for an hour]; Philem. 15; mpos xaipiv dpas,
for a short season], 1 Th. ii. 17. 4. any definite
time, point of time, moment: Mt. xxvi. 45; more precisely
defined — by a gen. of the thing, Lk.i.10; xiv.17; Rev.
iii. 10; xiv. 7,15; by agen. of the pers. the fit or oppor-
tune time for one, Lk. xxii. 53; Jn.ii. 4; by a pronoun
or an adj.: 9 dpte apa, [A. V. this present hour], 1 Co.
iv. 11; éoxarn Spa, the last hour 1.e. the end of this age
and very near the return of Christ from heaven (see
éoyatos, 1 p. 253), 1 Jn. ii. 18 [ef. Westcott ad loc.];
adr 77 Spa, that very hour, Lk. ii. 38 [here A.V. (not
R.V.) that instant]; xxiv. 33; Acts xvi. 18; xxii. 13; év
airy vi Spa, in that very hour, Lk. vii. 21 [R GL txt.];
xii. 12; xx. 19; ev 77 Spa éexelvy, Mt. viii. 13; ev éxeivy
th Spa, Mt. x. 19 [Lchm. br. the cl.]; Mk. xiii. 11; [Lk.
vii. 21 Lmrg. T Tr WH]; Rev. xi. 13; dn’ éxeivns rhs
é&pas, In. xix. 27; dwd ris Spas éxeivns, Mt. ix. 225 xv.
28; xvii. 18; by a conjunction: épa ére, In. iv. 21, 23;
y. 25: xvi. 253 iva (see iva, II. 2 d.), Jn. xii. 235 xiii.
1; xvi. 2,32; by cai and a finite verb, Mt. xxvi. 45;
by a relative pron. Spa ev 7, Jn. v.28; by the addition
of an ace. with an inf. Ro. xiii. 11 (otm@ apa cvvax6qvat
ra krivn, Gen. xxix. 7; see exx. in the Grk. writ., fr.
Aeschyl. down, in Passow s. v. vol. ii. p. 2620°; [L. and
S. s. v. B. I. 3]; so the Lat. tempus est, Cic. Tuse. 1, 41,
99; ad Att. 10, 8). Owing to the context épa some-
times denotes the fatal hour, the hour of death : Mt. xxvi.
45; Mk. xiv. 35,41; Jn. xii. 27; xvi. 4 [here LTr WH
read 4 épa airy i.e. the time when these predictions
are fulfilled]; xvii. 1; 4 Spa rwds, ‘one’s hour’, i.e.
the time when one must undergo the destiny appointed
him by God: so of Christ, Jn. vii. 30; viii. 20, cf. xvi. 21.
[On the omission of the word see é£aurjs, (ap’ bs? ch
@mpatos
p 58° top), W. § 64,5s.v.; B. 82 (71); on the omission
of the art. with it (e.g. 1 Jn. ii. 18), see W. § 19s. v.]
patos, -a, -ov, (fr. dpa, ‘the bloom and vigor of life’,
‘beauty’ in the Grk. writ., who sometimes join the word
in this sense with ydpus [which suggests grace of move-
ment] or xdAdos [which denotes, rather, symmetry of
form]), fr. Hes. down, ripe, mature, (of fruits, of human
age, ete.); hence blooming, beautiful, (of the human
body, Xen., Plat., al.; with 79 dyer added, Gen. xxvi.
7; xxix.17; xxxix.6; 1K.i. 6): addes, Ro. x.15; of a
certain gate of the temple, Acts iii. 2, 10; [tao kexo-
vapévor, Mt. xxiii. 27]; oxedos, 2 Chr. xxxvi. 19. [Cf
Trench, Syn. § evi.}*
@ptopar; depon. mid.; Sept. for sw; to roar, to howl,
(of a lion, wolf, dog, and other beasts): 1 Pet. v. 8
(Judg. xiv.5; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 14; Jer. ii. 15; Sap. xvii.
18; Theoer., Plut., al.); of men, to raise a loud and in-
articulate cry: either of grief, Hdt. 3, 117; or of joy,
id. 4, 753 to sing with a loud voice, Pind. Ol. 9, 163.*
as [Tree. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 és; cf. W.
462 (431); Chandler § 934, and reff. in Ebeling, Lex.
Hom. s. v. p. 494° bot. ], an adverbial form of the rela-
tive pron. 6s, 7, 6 which is used in comparison, as, like
as, even as, according as, in the same manner as, ete.
(Germ. wie); but it also assumes the nature of a con-
junction, of time, of purpose, and of consequence.
On its use in the Grk. writ. ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2,
ch. xxxyv. p. 756 sqq.; [L. and S. s. v.].
I. os as an adverb of camparison; 1. It
answers to some demonstrative word (ovras, or the like),
either in the same clause or in another member of the
same sentence [cf. W. § 53, 5]: ovrws ... as, Jn. Vil. 46
[L WH om. Tr br. és ete.]; 1 Co. iii. 15; iv. 1; ix. 26;
Eph. v. 28, 33; Jas. ii. 12; otras... as cay [T Tr WH
om. edy (cf. Eng. as should a man cast etc.)]... Badn,
sa etc.... as if ete. Mk. iv. 26; a... ovrws, Acts viii.
32; xxii, 11; 1 Co. vii. 17; 2 Co. xi.8 [RG]; 1 Th.v.
2; as dv (édv) foll. by subj. [(cf. ay, IT. 2 a. fin.)]...
ovrws, 1 Th. ii. 7sq.; &s...odrw kai, Ro. v. 15 [here
WH br. cai], 18; 2Co.i. 7 LT Tr WH; vii. 14; &s(T
Tr Wii xabads] ... xard ra aird [LG raid, Rec. tadta |,
Lk. xvii. 28-30; ioos ... d&g kat, Acts xi. 17; sometimes
in the second member of the sentence the demonstrative
word (ovras, or the like) is omitted and must be sup-
plied by the mind, as Mt. viii. 13; Col. ii.6; ds...
kai (where ovrw kai might have been expected [W. u.s.;
B. § 149, 8 c.]), Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2 [here G T Tr WH
om. L br. the cl.]; Acts vii. 51 [Lehm. cadés]; Gal. i. 9;
Phil. i. 20, (see kai, II. 1 a.); to this construction must
be referred also 2 Co. xiii. 2s mapdv 1b Sebrepor, Kal
darayv viv, as when I was present the second time, so now
being absent [(cf. p. 317° top); al. render (cf. R. V.
mrg.) as if I were present the second time, even though
T am now absent). 2. ws with the word or words
forming the comparison is so subjoined to a preced-
ing verb that otrws must be mentally inserted before
the same. When thus used &¢ refers a. to the
680
¢
@S
verb, and is equiv. to in the same manner as, after the
fashion of; it is joined in this way to the subject (nom.)
of the verb: Mt. vi. 29; vii. 29; xiii. 43; 1 Th. ii. 11;
2 Pet. ii. 12; Jude 10, etc.; to an ace. governed by the
verb: as dyamav tov mAqoiov cov os ceautdy, Mt. xix. 19;
xxii. 39; Mk. xii. 31, 33; Lk. x. 27; Ro. xiii. 9; Gal. v.
14; Jas. ii. 8; add, Philem.17; Gal. iv. 14; [here many
(cf. R. V. mrg.) would bring in also Acts iii. 22; vii. 37
(cf. c. below)]; or to another oblique case: as Phil. ii.
22; toa subst. with a prep.: as os év kpumr@, Jn. Vii.
10 [Tdf. om. ds]; as év quepa ohayis, Jas. v. 5 (RG;
al. om.s]; cs dia Enpas, Heb. xi. 29; add, Mt. xxvi. 55;
Ms xy. 48 3 Lk. xxii..52- Ro. exit, 13¢9 Heb:yitieg8 =
when joined to a nom. or an acc. it can be rendered like,
(like) as, (Lat. instar, veluti): Mt. x. 16; Lk. xxi. 35;
xxii. 81; 1 Co. iii. 10; 1 Th.v. 4; 2 Tim.ii. 17; Jas. i.
10; 1 Pet. v. 8; 2 Pet. iii. 10; xadeiv 7a pr) OvTa os OvTa
(see kadé, 1 b. 8. sub fin.), Ro. iv. 17. b. as joined
to a verb makes reference to the ‘substance’ of the
act expressed by the verb, i. e. the action designated by
the verb is itself said to be done ws, in like manner
(just) as, something else: Jn. xv. 6 (for 7d BadAcoOat
Zé@ is itself the very thing which is declared to happen
[i.e. the unfruitful disciple is ‘cast forth’ just as the
severed branch is ‘cast forth’]) ; 2 Co. iii. 1 [Lchm. és
[ep ]]; generally, however, the phrase as cai is employed
[W. § 53, 5], 1 Co. ix.5; xvi. 10 [here WH txt. om. cai] ;
Eph. ii.3; 1 Th.v.6 [L T Tr WH om. cai]; 2 Tim. iii.
9°; Heb-i-2; 2 Pet. ii.46. c. os makes refer-
ence to similarity or equality, in such expres-
sions as eivat és Twa, i. e. ‘to be like’ or ‘equal to’ one,
Mt. xxii. 830; xxviii. 3; Mk. vi. 34; xii. 25; Lk. vi. 403
xi. 44; xviii. 11; xxii. 26 sq.; Ro. ix. 27; 1 Co. vii. 7,
29-31; 2 Co.ii.17; 1 Pet. i. 24; 2 Pet. iii. 8; ta pa os
kat’ dvdykny TO dyabdy cov 7, that thy benefaction may not
be like something extorted by force, Philem. 14; yiver@at
&s rua, Mt. x. 25; xvili. 3; Lk. xxii. 263 Ro. ix. 29; 1 Co.
iv. 13; ix. 20-22 [in vs. 22 T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br.
as]; Gal. iv. 12; pévew &s twa, 1 Co. vii. 8; movetv iva
&s twa, Lk. xv. 19; passages in which éoriv, qv, dv (or
6 év) is left to be supplied by the reader: as 4 dovy
aitod &¢ hori bddrwv, Rev. i. 15; dpOadpods, sc. dvras,
Rev. ii. 18; miorw sc. odcav, Mt. xvii. 20; Lk. xvii. 63
add, Rev. iv. 7; ix. 2, 5, 7-9,.173. x. 13 xii. 155 xiii. 2\:
xiv. 2; xx. 8; xxi. 21; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37, [many (cf.
R. V. mrg.) refer these last two pass. to a. above]; x.
11; xi. 5, ete.; before os one must sometimes supply
ri, ‘something like’ or ‘having the appearance of’ this
or that: thus s 6ddacca, i. e. something having the ap-
pearance of [R. V. as it were] a sea, Rev. iv. 6 GLTTr
WH; viii. 8; ix. 7; xv. 2, (so in imitation of the Hebr.
3, ef. Deut. iv. 32; Dan. x. 18; ef. Gesenius, Thes. p.
648° [ Soph. Lex. s.v. 2]); passages where the compar
ison is added to some adjective: as, éyijs os, Mt. xii. 183
Aevka os, Mt. xvii. 2; Mk. ix. 3 [R L]; add, Heb. xii. 163
Rev. i. 145 vi.125 viii. 10; x.9; xxi. 23 xxii. 1. da.
és so makes reference to the quality of a person,
manner (‘form’) of the action expressed by the finite ‘ thing, or action, as to be equiv. to such as, exactly like, as
@S
wz were; Germ. als; and a. to a quality which
really belongs to the person or thing: ds éovoiay
éxov, Mt. vii. 29; Mk. i. 22; ds povoyevovs mapa trarpés,
Jn. i. 14; add, [((L T Tr WH in Mt. v. 48; vi. 5, 16) ];
Acts xvii. 22; Ro. vi. 13 [here L T Tr WH det]; xv.
15; 1Co.iii.1; vii. 255 2 Co. vi. 4; xi. 16; Eph. v. 1,
8, 15; Col. ili. 12; 1 Th. ii. 4; 1 Tim. v. 1 sq.; 2 Tim.
ii. 3; Tit. i. 7; “Philem. 9, 16 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.];
Heb. iii. 5 sq. ; vi. 19; xi. 9; xii. 17; 1 Pet. i. 14,195 ii,
2,5, 11; ili. 7; iv. 10, 15sq.19[ RG]; 2 Pet. i. 19; 2Jn.
5; Jas. ii. 12; Rev. i.17; v.63 xvi. 21; xvii. 12, ete.;
@s ovk ddjdws sc. Tpéxov, as one who is not running
etc. 1 Co. ix. 26; concisely, as é& eiduxpueias and ék
G00 sc. Aadodvres, borrowed from the neighboring
Aadoduev, 2 Co. ii. 17; twa Ss twa or te after verbs
of esteeming, knowing, declaring, etc. [W.
§§ 32, 4 b.; 59, 6]: as, after Aoyifew, AoyiferOa, Ro.
vili. 36; 1 Co. iv. 1 (where ovrws precedes); 2 Co. x.
23 qyeioOa, 2 Th. iii. 155; eye, Mt. xiv. 5; xxi. 26, 46
[but here L T Tr WH read eis (cf. Zo, I. 1 £.)], (rds
@s Geovs, Ev. Nicod. c.5); dmodecxviva, 1 Co. iv. 9;
trapaBaddew [or duoody (q. v.)], Mk. iv. 313 dvaBdrrew,
pass. Lk. xvi. 1; edéyxeu, pass. Jas. ii. 9; edpioxewv, pass.
Phil. ii. 7 (8). B. to a quality which is supposed,
pretended, feigned, assumed: @s duapt@dds xpi-
vopat, Ro. iii. 7; os movnpdv, Lk. vi. 22; add, 1 Co. iv. 7;
vill. 7; 2 Co. vi. 8-10; xi. 15 sq.; xiii. 7; 1 Pet. ii. 12;
frequently it can be rendered as if, as ihough, Acts iii.
12): xxiii. 15,20; xxvii. 305 1 Co. v. 3; 2 Co. x. 14; xi.
17; Col. ii. 20; Heb. xi. 27; xiii. 3; esucrodjs ds Ov
Hpav, Sc. yeypaupérns, 2 Th. ii. 2. 3. &s with the
gen. absol. presents the matter spoken of — either as
the belief of the writer, 2 Co. v. 20; 2 Pet. i. 3; oras
some one’s erroneous opinion : 1 Co. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 12;
ef. W. § 65, 9; [B.§ 145, 7; esp. $144, 22]. In gen-
eral, by the use of &s the matter spoken of is presented —
either as a mere matter of opinion: as in as ée& épywr
se. 6 Iopand vopov dixavocivns ediwgev, Ro. ix. 32 (where
it marks the imaginary character of the help the
Israelites relied on, they thought to attain righteous-
ness in that way [A. V. as it were by works]);—or
as a purpose: mopeverOa as émt Addaccar, that, as
they intended, he might go to the sea, Acts xvii. 14, cf.
Meyer ad loc. ; W. 617 (573 sq.), [but L T Tr WH
read ws, as far as to etc.];— or as merely the thought
of the writer: Gal. iii. 16; before drs, 2 Co. xi. 21; —or
as the thought and pretence of others: also before éru,
2 Th. ii. 2: cf. W. u. s.3 [B. § 149, 3; on ds dre in 2 Co.
v.19 (A.V. to wit) see W. and B. Il. ce. (cf. Esth. iv.
14; Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 11, 1 and Miiller’s note ; L. and S.
s.v. G. 2; Soph. Lex. s. v. 7)]; as ay, as tf, as though,
2 Co. x. 9 [ef. W. 310 (291) ; but cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 1,
and see dv, IV. ]. 4. és has its own verb, with which
it forms a complete sentence ; a. ws with a finite
verb is added by way of illustration, and is to be trans-
lated as, just as, (Lat. sicut, eo modo quo) : Eph. vi. 20;
Col. iii. 18; iv. 4; 1 Pet. iii. 6; 2 Pet. ii. 1; 1Jn.i. 7;
Rev. ii. 28 (27) [this ex. is referred by some (cf. R. V.
681 Bs
mrg.) to 2 a. above]; vi.13; ix. 3; xviii. 6 [here ds cal;
the ex. seems to belong under 2 b. above]. in phrases
in which there is an appeal —either to the O. T. (ds
yéypanta), Mk. i. 2 [here T Tr WH xa6és]; vii. 6; Lk.
iil. 4; Acts xiii. 33; or in general to the testimony of
others, Acts xvii. 28; xxii. 5; xxv. 10; Ro. ix. DSI
Co. x. 7RG (cf. Samep, b.). in phrases like zovets
os mpooéragev or ouvéragker, etc.: Mt. i. 24; xxvi. 193
xxviii. 15; Lk. xiv. 22 [here TTrtxt. WH 6]; Tit. i.
5; likewise, Mt. viii. 18; xv. 28; Rev. x. 7; se. yernOn-
To pot, Mt. xxvi. 39. in short parenthetic or inserted
sentences: os ei@Oer, Mk. x. 13 as évopitero, Lk. iii. 23;
ws Aoyifoua, 1 Pet. v. 12; ws taokapBdvere, Acts ii. 15;
@s Aéyouow, Rev. ii. 24; as dv nyeobe, [R. V. howsoever
ye might be led] uteunque agebamini [ef. B. § 139, 13;
383 sq. (329); W. § 42, 3 a.], 1 Co. xii. 2. &¢ serves
to add an explanatory extension [and is rendered in
A. V. how (that)]: Acts x. 88; riv... dmaxony, ds ete.
2 Co. vii. 153; rod Adyov Tov Kupiov, os elmer ait@, Lk.
Xxli. 61; rod pnyaros, was eheyer, Acts xi. 16, (Xen. Cyr.
8, 2, 14; an. 1, 9,11); cf. Bornemann, Schol. ad Lue.
p- 141. b. as is used to present, in the form of a
comparison, a motive which is urged upon one, —as
apes juiv ra dpednyara jyar, as kai juets apnxapev (RG
ddiepev) xr. (for which Lk. xi. 4 gives cai yap adrot
adionev), Mt. vi. 12, —or which actuates one, as ydpw
exo TO Ged... ds adiddermtov Exw THY mEpl cod pyeiay,
2 Tim. i. 3 (for the dear remembrance of Timothy moves
Paul’s gratitude to God) ; [cf. Jn. xix. 33 (ef. LI. a. be-
low) ]; in these examples ws has almost the force of a
causal particle; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 766; [L. and
Sis: Vv. bs LV2se Wee 448) (207). c. ws adds in a
rather loose way something which serves to illustrate
what precedes, and is equiv. to the case is as though
[R. V. ¢t ts as when]: Mk. xiii. 34, where cf. Fritzsche
p- 587; unless one prefer, with Meyer et al., to make it
an instance of anantapodoton [cf. A. V. ‘For the Son
of Man is asaman’ ete.]; see Somep, a. fin. 5. ac:
cording as: Ro. xii. 8; 1 Co. iii.5; Rev. xxii. 12. 6.
és, like the Germ. wie, after verbs of reading, nar-
rating, testifying, and the like, introduces that
which is read, narrated, etc. ; hence it is commonly said
to be equivalent to dri (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 765);
put there is this difference between the two, that dru ex-
presses the thing itself, ds the mode or quality
of the thing [hence usually rendered how], (cf. W. § 53,
9; [Meyer on Ro. i. 9; cf. L. and S. s. v. B. I.]): thus
after dvaywadoxew, Mk. xii. 26 (where T Tr WH sas) ;
Lk. vi. 4 [here Tr WH br. os; Ltxt. reads ras]; puna O7-
va, Lk. xxiv. 6 [Lmrg. doa]; OeGoOa, Lk. xxiii. 55;
imoprqaoat, Jude 5 [here dre (not ws) is the particle], 7
[al. regard és here as introducing a confirmatory illus: |
tration of what precedes (A.V. even as etc.) ; ef. Huther,
or Briickner’s De Wette, ad loc. |; eiSéva, Acts x. 38;
Ro. xi. 2; 1 Th. ii. 11; émicracOa, Acts x. 28 [here many
(cf. R. V. mrg.) connect os with the adj. immediately
following (see 8 below)]; xx. 18, 20; dmayyé\\ew, Lk.
viii. 47; eényeioOa, Lk. xxiv. 35; wdprus, Ro. i. 9 [here
e
@S
al. connect &s with the word which follows it (cf. 8
below) ]; Phil. i. 8. 7. &s before numerals denotes
nearly, about: as, ds Surxidtor, Mk. v. 13; add, Mk. Viii.
9; Lk. ii. 37 (here LT Tr WH éas); viii. 42; Jn. i. 39
(40) ; [iv. 6 L T Tr WH]; vi. 19 (here Lehm. oget) ;
xi. 18; [xix. 39GLTTrWH]; xxi. 8; Acts i. 15 [Tdf.
éoci]; v. 7, [36 LT Tr WH); xiii. [18 (yet not WH
txt.) ; ef. ai, I. 2f.], 20; xix. 34 [WH aoei]; Rev. viii.
1, (2,158. xi. 1; xiv. 2, ete.); for exx. fr. Grk. writ.
see Passow s. v. vol. ii. p. 2631>; [L. and S.s. v. E;
Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]. 8. ds is prefixed to adjectives
and adverbs, and corresponds to the Lat. quam, how,
Germ. wie, (so fr. Hom. down): ws pata, Ro. x. 15;
add, Ro. xi. 33; &s dciws, 1 Th. ii. 10, (Ps. Lxxii. (1xxiii.)
1); with a superlative, as much as can be: ws taxvoTa,
as guickly as possible (very often in prof. auth.), Acts
xvii. 15; ef. Viger. ed. Hermann, pp. 562, 850; Passow
ii. 2 p. 2631> bot.; [L. and S. s. v. Ab. III.].
II. as as a particle of time; a. as, when,
since; Lat. ut, cum, [W. §41 b. 3,1; § 53, 8]: with the
indic., ds 3¢ émopevovro, Mt. xxviii. 8 (9); Mk. ix. 21 [Tr
mrg. €€ 00]; Lk. i. 23, 41, 44; ii. 15, 39; iv. 25; v. 4;
Vii. 125 xi. 13) Xv..255) Xix. 5, 295 Xxll. 665 xxiii. 26;
xxiv. 32; Jn. ii. 9, 23; iv. 1, 40, [45Ddf.]; vi. 12, 16;
Vile Ose vinie a) ueXt O20) 2958 OPESCa XVII Os) [Che xix.
33 (see I. 4 b. above) ]; xx. 11; xxi.9; Actsi.10; v.
243 vil. 233; viii. 36; ix. 23; x.7,17, 25; xiii. [18 WH
txt. (see I. 7 above) J, 25, 29; xiv.5; xvi. 4,10, 15; xvii.
IBS Saptls HS ssbelh Ble rec I Ie Soak eye Wi scat
TI osexxvel4exxyvitne 1 a2 0 sexo. 45:( Eom.) Elst,
600; 2, 321; 3,21; Hdt. 1, 65, 80; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 4.
8. 20; oftenin the O. T. Apocr. esp. 1 Mace. ; cf. Wahl,
Clavis apocr. V. T., s. v. [V.e. p. 507 sq.). b. while,
when, (Lat. dum, quando): Lk. xx.37; as long as, while,
Jn. [ix. 4 Tr mrg. WH mrg. (cf. éws, I. 2)]; xii. 35, [36],
LTTr WH [(cf. gos, u. s.)]; Lk. xii. 58; Gal. vi. 10
[here A.V.as (so R.V. in Lk. 1. ¢.); T WH read the subj.
(as we may have etc.); Meyer (on Jn. xii. 35; Gal. 1. ¢.)
everywhere denies the meaning while; but cf. L. and S.
s. v. B. V. 2.3 Bp. Lehtft. on Gal. 1.¢.]. Cc. ws dv, as
soon as: with the subj. pres. Ro. xv. 24 [A. V. here
whensoever]; with the 2 aor. subj. having the force of
the fut. perf., 1 Co. xi. 34 [R. V. whensoever]; Phil. ii.
23. ([Cf. B. 232 (200); W. § 42, 5a.3 Soph. Lex. s. v.
6.]
III. ws as a final particle (Lat. ut), in order that,
in order to [ef. Grildersleeve in Am. Journ. of Philol. No.
16, p. 419 sq. ]: foll. by an inf. [(ef. B. 244 (210); W. 318
(299) ; Kriiger § 65, 3, 4), Lk. ix.52 Lmrg. WH]; Acts
xx. 24, (3 Mace. i. 2; 4 Mace. xiv. 1); bs eros eimeiv,
so to say (see etrrov, 1 a.), Heb. vii. 9 [L mrg. efmev].
IV. os as a consecutive particle, introducing a
consequence, so that: so (acc. to the less freq. usace)
with the indic. (Hdt. 1, 163; 2, 135; W. 462 (481)),
Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3, (Hebr. wx, Ps. xciv. (xev.) 11);
{but many interpp. question this sense with the indic.
(the exx. fr. Hdt. are not parallel), and render os in
Heb. Il. cc. as (so R. V.)].
682
@OrrEp
dravva [see WH. Intr. § 408; but L'T dc.; see Idy.
Proleg. p. 107], (derived from Ps. exvii. (cxviil.) 25
N) Twin, ie. ‘save, I pray’, Sept. cdcov 67; [in
form the word seems to be the Greek reproduction of
an abbreviated pronunciation of the Hebr. (si-pwin) 5
al. would make it niywin (‘save us’); cf. Hilgenfeld,
Evang. sec. Hebraeos (ed. alt. 1884) p. 25 and p. 1225
Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 173]), hosanna; be
propitious: Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9sq.; Jn. xii. 13; with
7® vid Aavid added, be propitious to the Messiah, Mt.
xxi. 9, 15, [ef. cava r@ Oe@ AaBid, ‘Teaching’ 10, 6
(where see Harnack’s note) |.*
do-attas, (ws and avrws), adv., [asa single word, Post-
Homeric], in like manner, likewise: put after the verb,
Mt. xx. 5; xxi. 30, 36; put before the verb, Mk. xiv. 31;
Lk. xiii. 3 (here LT Tr WH 6poios), 5 (T Trtxt. WH);
Ro. viii. 26; 1 Tim. v. 25; Tit. ii. 6; as often in Grk.
writ. the verb must be supplied from the preceding con-
text, Mt. xxv. 17; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xx. 31; xxii. 20[ WH
reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xi. 25; 1 Tim. ii. 9 (sc. SovAopat,
cf. 8); iii. 8 (sc. det, cf. 7), 11; Tit. ii. 3 (sc. ampere
eivat).*
do-el, (ss and ef [Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]), adv., fr. Hom.
down, prop. as 7f, i. e. a. as it were (had been), as
though, as, like as, like: Mt. iii. 16; ix. 36 [Treg. és];
Lk. iii. 22 (LT Tr WH ois); Acts ii. 3; vi. 153; ix..18
[LT TrWH 4s]; Ro. vi. 18 LT Tr WH; Heb. i. 12;
also Ree. in Mk.i.10; Jn. i. 325; yiveoOar ooei, Mt. xxviii.
4 KG; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the
pass.]; etvat éoei, Mt. xxviii. 3 [LT Tr WH os], and
Ree. in Heb. xi. 12 and Rev. i. 14; daivecOat ocei tt, to
appear like a thing, Lk. xxiv. 11. b. about, nearly:
a. before numerals: Mt. xiv. 21; Lk. i.56 [RG]; iii.
23; ix. 14, 28; xxii. 41,59; xxiii.44; Jn. vi 1O[RGL
(al. @s)]; Acts ii.41; iv.4[RG]; x.3 [in LT TrWH
it is strengthened here by the addition of wepi]; xix. 7;
also, Rec. in Mk. vi. 44; R Gin Jn. iv. 6; xix. 14 [@?],
39; Acts v. 36; Lehm. in Jn. vi. 19, (Judg. iii. 29; Neh.
vii. 66; Xen. Hell? 1, 2,9; 2, 4, 25). B. before a
measure of space: @aei AiOov BoAnv, Lk. xxii. 41.*
‘Qoné [G T Tr, but RL ‘Qe.; see WH. Intr. § 408;
Tdf. Proleg. p. 107], (ywin ‘deliverance’), 6, Hosea, a
well-known Hebrew prophet, son of Beeri and contem-
porary of Isaiah (Hos. i. 1 sq.): Ro. ix. 25.*
do-mep, ({ef. Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]; fr. és and the enclit.
particle mép, which, “in its usual way, augments and
brings out the force of &»” Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 768;
see mp), adv., [fr. Hom. down], just as, even as; a.
in a protasis with a finite verb, and followed by otras or
ovrws xai in the apodosis [ef. W. §$ 53, 53 60, 5] Mt.
xii, 40; xill. 40; xxiv. 27, 37 sq. 38 (LT Tr [ef. és init.]
WH ds); Lk. xvii. 24; Jn. v. 21, 26; Ro. v. 19,213 vi.
4,19; xi. 830; 1 Co. xi. 12; xv. 22; xvi.1; 2Co.i.7 (here
LT Tr WHas); Gal. iv. 29; Eph. v. 24[(LT Tr WH
ws]; Jas. ii. 26; Somep... iva «ai ([ef. W. § 43, 5 a;
| B. 241 (208); cf. wa, I. 4 b.J), 2 Co. viii. 7; evAoyiay
+++ €roiuny eivat (ct. W. § 44, 1 ¢.] odras ws eddoyiav Kat
uy Sorep etc. ‘that your bounty might so be ready as a
@oTrepel
matter of bounty and not as if” ete. 2 Co. ix. 5 [but only
Rec. reads éomep, and even so the example does not
strictly belong under this head]; the apodosis which
should have been introduced by odrws is wanting [W.
§ 64, 7b. p. 569 (530) ; cf. B. § 151,12 and 23 g.]: Ro.
v. 12 (here what Paal subjoined in vs. 13 sq. to prove the
truth of his statement rdvres jyaproy, prevented him
from adding the apodosis, which had it corresponded
accurately to the terms of the protasis would have run
as follows: otrw kal d¢ évds dvOparov @ Sixatocivn eis Tov
Kéopov cian Oe cali did rhs Suxacoovwns | Can* Kal ovTws eis
ndvras avOparous f toi) duededoerat, ep @ mavres Sikatw-
@qoovra; this thought he unfolds in vs. 15 sqq. in an-
other form); Mt. xxv. 14 (here the extended details of
the parable caused the writer to forget the apodosis
which he had in mind at the beginning; [cf. as, I.
4¢.]). b. it stands in close relation to what pre-
cedes: Mt. v. 48 (LT Tr WH és); vi. 2, 5 (LT Tr
WH 4s), 7,16 (L T Tr WH ds); xx. 28; xxv. 323 Acts
iii. 17; xi. 15; 1Co. viii. 5; 1Th.v.3; Heb. iv. 103 vii.
27; ix. 25; Rev. x. 3; é0mep yéypanta, 1 Co. x. 7LT
Tr WH; eiut Somep tts, to be of one’s sort or class (not
quite identical in meaning with és or dceé tis, to be Like
one [cf. Bengel ad loc.]), Lk. xviii. 11 [but L Tr WH
mrg. ds]; yivona:, Acts ii. 2 (the gen. is apparently not
to be explained by the omission of jxos, bat rather as
gen. absol.: just as when a mighty wind olows, i. e. just
as a sound is made when a mighty wind blows [R.V. as
of the rushing of a mighty wind]); éotw aoe Somep 6
€Ouxds xrr. let him be regarded by thee as belonging to
the number of etc. Mt. xviii. 17.*
do-mep-el, (Gonep and e [Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]), adv.,
fr. Aeschyl. down, as, as it were: 1 Co. xv. 8.*
bore, (fr. ds and the enclit. ré [Tdf. Proleg. p. 110]),
a consecutive conjunction, i.e. expressing conse-
quence or result, fr. Hom. down, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii.
2 p. 770 sqq.; W. § 41 b. 5 N. 1 p. 301 (282 sq.) ; [B.
§ 139, 50]; 1. so that, [A. V. frequently insomuch
that]; a. with an inf. (or acc. and inf.) [B. § 142,
3; the neg. in this construction is py, B. § 148, 6; W.
480 (447)]: preceded by the demonstr. ovrws, Acts xiv.
1; rocovros, Mt. xv. 33 (so many loaves as to fill etc.) ;
without a demonstr. preceding (where dore defines
more accurately the magnitude, extent, or quantity),
Mt) viii; 24,28); xii. 225 xiil. 2, 32, 543 xv. 31; xxvil.
14; Mk. i. 27,45; ii. 2, 12; iii. 10, 20; iv. 1, 82, 37; ix.
QGrexve on muKavinds Xl 1s) ACtS In 193 Volds <V. 39s
Xvi. 26;-x1x. 10,12, 16s Ro. vii. 6s xv. 193 1 Co. i. 75 v.
Pe xin. 222 Co, 1.3311. 7; ili. 75 vil. 7; Phil. i. 133-1
Th. i. 7sq.; 2 Th. i. 4; ii. 4; Heb. xiii. 6; 1 Pet. i. 21;
it is used also of a designed result, so as to i.q. in
order to, for to, Mt. x.1; xxiv. 24 [their design]; xxvii.
1; Lk. iv. 29 (Ree. ets 7d); ix. 52 [L mrg. WH 4s, q. v.
T1.J; and L T Tr WH in Lk. xx. 20 [RGeis rd], (1
Mace. i. 49; iv. 2, 28; x. 3; 2 Macc. ii.6; Thue. 4, 23;
Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,16; Joseph. antt. 13, 5, 10; Eus. h.e. 3,
683
@pér.pos
28, 3[cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. 5]); ef. W. 318 (298); B. § 139,
50 Rem. b. so that, with the indicative [B. 244
(210) ; cf. W. 301 (283); Meyer or Ellicott on Gal.
as below]: Gal. ii. 13, and often in prof. auth. ; preceded
by ovras, Jn. iii. 16. 2. so then, therefore, wherefore :
with the indic. (cf. Passow s.v. II. 1 b., vol. ii. p. 2639";
[L. and S.s. v. B. I. 2; the ney. in this constr. is 0%,
B. § 148, 5]), Mt. xii. 12; xix. 6; xxiii. 31; Mk. ii. 28;
x. 8; Ro. vii. 4, 12; xiii. 2; 1 Co. iii. 7; vii.38; xi. 27;
xiv. 22; 2 Co.iv. 12; v.16 sq.; Gal. iii. 9, 24; iv. 7, 16;
once with a hortatory subj. 1 Co. v. 8 [here L mrg. ind.].
before an imperative: 1 Co. iii. 21; [iv. 5]; x. 12; xi.
33; xiv. 39; xv. 58; Phil. ii. 12; ‘iv. 1; 1 Th. iv. 18;
Jas. i.19 [LT Tr Wi read iove; cf. p.174*top]; 1 Pet.
DVet on
ardpvov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of ods, ards; cf. yuvatkdptop
[W. 24, 96 (91)]), i.q. &riov (q. v.), the ear: Mk. xiv.
47 LTTr WH; Jn. xviii. 10 TTr WH. (Anthol. 11,
75, 2; Anaxandrides ap. Athen. 3, p. 95 c.) *
arlov, -ov, 76, (dimin. of ods, ards, but without the
dimin. force; “the speech of common life applied the
diminutive form to most of the parts of the body, as ra
pwia the nose, Td dupatiorv, ornGidiov, xehiviov, oapkiov
the body ” Leb. ad Phryn. p. 211 sq. [ef. W. 25 (24)]),
a later Greek word, the ear: Mt. xxvi. 51; Mk. xiv. 47
[RG(c.@ tpov)}; Lk. xxii. 51; Jn. xviii. 10 [RG L
(cf. dtdpov) |, 26. (Sept. for i, Deut. xv. 17; 1S. ix.
15; xx. 2, 18; 2S. xxii. 45; Is. ]. 4; Am. ili. 12.) *
adédera [WH -Aia (cf. I, ¢)], -as, 9, (@peAns), fr. [Soph.
and] Hat. down, usefulness, advantage, profit: Ro. iii. 1;
Tis Spereias yap (Pelyb. 8, 82, 8 [yet in the sense of
‘booty’]), Jude 16. (Job xxii. 8; Ps. xxix. (xxx.)
10.)*
adedéw, -; fut. dPeAnow; 1 aor. dpéAnoa; Pass., pres.
dSpeodpar; 1 aor. apPerHOnv; 1 fut. dpeAnPyoopar (Mt.
xvi. 26 LT Tr WH); (dedos); fr. Aeschyl. and Hat.
down; Sept. for Spin; to assist, to be useful or advan-
tageous, to profit: absol. Ro. ii. 25; with acc. ovdev, to be
of no use, to effect nothing, Mt. xxvii. 24; Jn. vi. 63; xii.
19, [in these exx. (Jn. vi. 63 excepted) A.V. prevail];
twa, to help or profit one, Heb. iv. 2; rend re to help, profit,
one in a thing ({but the second ace. is a cognate acc. or
the ace. of a neut. adj. or pron.; ef. W. 227 (213) ] so fr.
Hat. 8, 126 down): ovdév tua, 1 Co. xiv. 6; Gal. v. 25
ri Sperjoee [or dpedet (rdv)] avOpwmor, édv wrd.; [(T
WH follow with an inf.)], what will (or ‘doth’) it profit
aman if ete. [(or ‘to’ etc.)]? Mk. viii. 36; pass. opedov-
pat, to be helped or profited : Heb. xiii. 9; with ace. under,
Mk. v. 26; odSév, 1 Co. xiii. 3; with acc. of the interrog.
ri, Mt. xvi. 26; Lk. ix. 25 [here WH mrg. gives the
act.]; Tl &« Twos (gen. of pers.), to be profited by one
in some particular [ef. Mey. on Mt. as below; ék, II. 5],
Mt. xv. 5; Mk. vii. 11.*
cxpéAtpos, -ov, (@peréw), profitable: rwi (dat. of advan-
tage), Tit. iii. 8; mpds re (Plat. de rep. 10 p. 607 d. [W.
213 (200)]), 1 Tim. iv. 8; 2 Tim. iii. 16.*
, ee
i
= 7
a
By
3
‘e
i x.
;
: 2s
se :
4 -
at He) va ta]
> ae a
) i ¥ ‘ ~ sy “a
bi 2 - j
. f * $
=) tet
m. ‘ b=
{ a ~
p -
= : i “
i ‘ Se : ; 7 Tew ee” ee © ih a
Enc : i ‘ iy id ‘ ry - ry i eldet : obi ry
> ‘ » Deel all ie
- i
— 1a © « . * - My :
f i = ‘ iH 7 brow yee OTT ans %
ae A. 7 : I Seis Oe atab
: ee i Spyuante ie) en ee
¥ =» 2. -
sd } ; eae 612. ay ey ek 4 ; Lx CO? Iti 9 [Fabs 14 pte T°. .
" i; bad | : nr ‘ ry . ca i
a a sf ae ce | P j ‘> a ; Bath © ol ate eee Hest f
, $ o ~ - f
as : 9 : faa wi iis | i Ps maa oF) a
ve _ ie ' Ay ) onion Me te mab 7 i wont
ae all - M6) Gr 2 1 < ~
m1 4 L repay: ; ijerre lho 4 ’ a “aol ip, 201 chee eee
: ra. : 2 TS 200 eee 2 ? ire ‘ , 4 “5% 2eT 4 724 chive meiayaia Pears
" : ss ej
ree 2 hia c2 al lor {dur fy 5) 1 5
ba { y
fe ~ ; —_ P mh
ae) ie » va c a ~ 3 +e “ ae yy 2 dLsteh 2 |. 5
= 5 oe a ‘ .
J 7 = ‘
i. + ‘ z ° ‘ “4
Az tase tf ecakt bat
F ————
7 4 7 4 pHa et. 5.3 —:
L # ' r Fea Ses ae : > ee :
" ch Loe 2» yy 7. yh
~ -
ES . Zz 154 - ae a
* | 9
r ’ '
i 1 oft
> 2 = : -_ ‘ rT? ig! F
' ae 7 a ar @ TI ie tsb » ae: i ay \\ ee cae
Pee ts Tags MLSs . ‘ rv. Lik edie aemlene
n> see gw F; ; 7 ¥ a ; : . , "
= ‘ 3] ey’ orade) Frits ls 5 |
4 ion : ; eh:
a 4 ; ond x a. "3
J = ‘ % i f ‘ i i 1 feli rere
aii 7 “s ; - Be:
Pi i : +e1e. i i Lm Gis eu +
; - ? ' ° . 4
. ,* ah # Mel” io Le oO
2-7? J a
= ES yay Ze ort ae ey bib Ane f oie ial na eho ak
~ 4 A : i ae = > “ i rs * j " ; P foal ! t hr aule a
> i I 7 PX cle, .
- Te m ‘ . bt -ias7D o ic} Laatste
— s 7 hs : Ay
‘ i '
> oa : j
- Era, ¥ naa 3 :
| fe r
- BS va ’ ), t j rt pte. ‘eth
. 4 . 4 onal ey ite oP
‘ a 4 i =i rea a.
- Py .
“g 7 a a ¥ a Aa
= - *
; Sar ad Beer. rf on
is » ti
AS '
Eis ‘
oe tlant ,
i
aS . a. neg
4 i =
? “a
a » Qn
‘ 78 At ad
( es
4
¥
=
oe
APPENDIX.
ye
PREFATORY REMARKS.
Eon lists of words herewith subjoined, as an aid to researches involving the language of the
New Testament, require a few preliminary remarks by way of explanation.
In the attempt to classify the vocabulary of the New Testament, words which occur in
secular authors down to and including Aristotle (who died B.c. 322) are regarded as belonging
to the classical period of the language, and find no place in the lists.
Words first met with between B.c. 322 and B.c. 150 are regarded as “Later Greek” and
registered in the list which bears that heading; but between B.c. 280 and B.c. 150 they have
“Sept.” appended to them in case they also occur in that version.
Words which first appear in the secular authors between B.c. 150 and B.c. 100 and are also
found in the Septuagint are credited to “Biblical Greek” (list 1 p. 693), but with the name of
the secular author added.
Words which first appear between B.c. 100 and a.p. 1 are registered solely as “Later Greek.”
Words which first occur between A.D. 1 and a.p. 50 are enrolled as “Later Greek,” but
with the name of the author appended.
Words which appear first in the secular authors of the last half of the first century of our
era have an asterisk prefixed to them, and are enrolled both in the list of “Later Greek”
and in the list of “ Biblical Greek.”
A New Testament word credited to Biblical Greek, if not found in the Septuagint but
occurring in the Apocryphal books of the Old Testament, is so designated by an appended
* Apocr.” >
Whenever a word given in either the Biblical or the Later Greek list is also found in the
Anthologies or the Inscriptions, that fact has been noted (as an intimation that such word
may possibly be older than it appears to be); and if the word belong to “ Later Greek,” the
name of the oldest determinate author in which it occurs is also given.
The New Testament vocabulary has thus been classified according to hard and fast
chronological lines. But to obviate in some measure the incorrect impression which the rigor
of such a method might give, it will be noticed that a twofold recognition has been accorded
to words belonging to the periods in which the secular usage and the sacred may be supposed to
overlap: viz., for the period covered by the preparation of the Septuagint, for the fifty years
which followed its completion, and for the last half of the first Christian century. Nevertheless,
the uncertainty inseparable from the results no scholar will overlook. Indeed, the surprises
1 It should be noted that in the following lists the term “Sept.” is used in its restricted sense to designate merely
the canonical books of the Greek Old Testament ; but in the body of the lexicon “Sept.” often includes al] the
books of the Greek version, — as well the apocryphal as the canonical. In the lists of words peculiar to individuat
writers an appended “ fr. Sept.” signifies that the word occurs only in a quotation from the Septuagint.
688
almost every one has experienced in investigating the age of some word in his vernacular which
has dropped out of use for whole stretches of time and then reappeared, may admonish him of
the precarious character of conclusions respecting the usage of an ancient language, of which
only fragmentary relics survive, and those often but imperfectly examined. The rough and
problematical results here given are not without interest; but they should not be taken for
more than they are worth.
The scheme of distribution adopted will be rendered more distinct by the subjoined
CHRONOLOGICAL CONSPECTUS.
Words in use before B.c.322. .- +. +. ++ + «+ + + are ranked as classical, and remain unregistered.
Words first used between B.c. 322 and Bc. 280 . . . ++... -+-- =. - . are enrolled as Later Greek.
receive a single enrolment but double notation, viz.
as Later Greek with Sept. usage noted.
receive a single enrolment but double notation, viz.
as Biblical Greek with secular usage noted.
. . . are enrolled simply as Later Greek.
Words first used between B.c. 280 and B.c. 150 . «. . . 4
are enrolled as Later Greek but with the name of the
Words first used between B.c. 150 and B.c. 100 . ... -
Words first used between B.c.100 and a.D 81. ... -
Words first used between a.D. landa.p. 50 ..-+. .- author appended.
receive a double enrolment, viz. both as Biblical and
as Later Greek (with asterisk prefixed and name
of secular author appended).
Words first used between a.D. 50 and 2p.100.....
The selection of the distinctive New Testament significations has not been so simple a
matter as might be anticipated : —
It is obvious that the employment of a word in a figure of speech cannot be regarded as
giving it a new and distinct signification. Accordingly, such examples as évaxd\iw in the
description of future blessedness (Mt. viii. 11), aveuos to designate the ever-changing doctrinal
currents (Eph. iv. 14), drapxy of first converts (Ro. xvi. 5), wédus of the consummated kingdom
vi God (Heb. xiii. 14 etc.), cravpdw as applied to the oapé (Gal. v. 24 etc.), y<ip to denote God’s
power (Lk. i. 66 etc.), and similar uses, are omitted.
Again, the mere application of a word to spiritual or religious relations does not in general
amount to a new signification. Accordingly, such terms as ywoxew Oedv, S0dd0s Xpiotod, Srypérys
tod Adyov, A¥Tpov and paprvpéw in the Christian reference, new in St. John’s phraseology, and
the like, have been excluded. Yet this restriction has not been so rigorously enforced as to
rule out such words as éxA€yopat, kadéw, «npvoow, Kpivw, tpodyrevw, and others, in what would be
confessed on all hands to be characteristic or technical New Testament senses.
In general, however, the list is a restricted rather than an inclusive one.
An appended mark of interrogation indicates uncertainty owing to diversity of text. In
the lists of words peculiar to individual New Testament writers —
a. When the use of a word by an author (or book) is unquestioned in any single passage
such word is credited to him without an interrogation-mark, even though its use be disputed by
some edition of the text in every other passage of that author.
6. When a word is found in one author (or book) according to all editions, but though
occurring in others is questioned there by some form of the text in every instance, it is credited
to the first, and the name of the others is appended in parenthesis with a question-mark.
689
e. When a word is found in two authors (or books), but in one of them stands in a
quotation from the Septuagint, it is credited to the one using it at first hand, and its use by
the other is noted with “Sept.” or “fr. Sept.” appended.
d. A word which is found in but a single author (or book) is credited to the same with a
question-mark, even though its use be disputed by one or another form of the text in every
instance of its occurrence.
e. A word which is found in two or more authors (or books) yet is disputed by one or
another form of the text in every instance, is excluded from the lists altogether.
The monumental misjudgments committed by some who have made questions of authorship
turn on vocabulary alone will deter students, it is to be hoped, from misusing the lists
exhibiting the peculiarities of the several books.
Explanations which apply only to particular lists are given at the beginning of those lists,
Proper names of persons, countries, rivers, places, have been omitted.
In drawing up the lists free use has been made of the collections to be found in Winer’s
Grammar, the various Introductions and Encyclopedias, the articles by Professor Potwin in
the Bibliotheca Sacra for 1875, 1876, 1880, such works as those of Holtzmann on the Synoptical
Gospels and the Pastoral Epistles, and especially the copious catalogues given by Zeller in his
Theologische Jahrbiicher for 1843, pp. 445-525.
In conclusion, a public expression of my thanks is due to W. W. Fenn, A. B., a student in
the Theological department of the University, for very efficient and painstaking assistance.
73 Bee s Sau Me
I. Larter, ¢.e. post-ARISTOTELIAN, GREEK WoRDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT .
CONTENTS.
IL. Borrowep Worps . . J Ne eacite. Sent eeliee
1. Words borrowed ae as ee ea a
2. Words borrowed from the Latin . . . . . « « «
3. Words borrowed from other Foreign Tongues .. .
Til. Brpricat, te. New Testament, GREEK. . . . « « « ©
Deiblical WOLds oc! co Wie ce ws, « oye 6. eee LORE
2., Biblical Sicnificatians -s. «. «0.s0.+7<. vip eum ion se ae
IV. Worps pecutrar To Inpivipvat New TesTAMENT WRITERS
fi. <ComMlatthow: ‘so eset eM er iG 51. Se ee ere
Delo gious Me sets eh ce ere Vel ae
So Dociu ke mrs ier J. adele ie forks Ie eeete biomes
4. To all three Sess Ses: Mae eco eee
Oe LOM ORM ae oes aN eas ee aha et ours Tele ec memte
G6. Oar ailoe soe 6 Me ea Ap
a. To the Longer Epistles and phiienea! sie
b. To the Pastoral Epistles
e. To both the Pastoral and the other Pauline Epistles
. To the Epistle to the Hebrews . . . . ....
SLOLOGIMCS «5 5 6 ee 4 eee es os: oe fe ete
Ae NO SC eer Cre ra elie Me AOE AES ees v4
PAu ANC a hare er hoe rn eee aE
~ alo the Anoealypse ss. < 6). +) «iis uneh aie setae ane
. To the Apocalypse and the Fourth Gospel . . . .
OF VERBS e ° ° e e e ° ° e e e e e e e e
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS! 5. Av egisl«- ss bouton cece
125
LATER, te POST-ARISTOTELIAN, GREEK WORDS IN THE
“ayaborouds Plot.
dyvénua
adn\drns
ad.adeinras
aOeoo0s
abérnows Cicero
aOXnows Polyb., Inser.
dka.peopas
dxaradvtos
dkatdmavoros
axpacia
*dxpoarnptov Plut.
akupsa
ddBacrpov (-rov Hat.)
d\extopopwvia Aesop
“AdreEavdpuvos (or -dpivos)
a\ndo Anthol.
a\Anyopew Philo
dpapdavtwos Inscr.?
duetdaberos
es
*avayevvdw J oseph.
avadevEts
dvdGeua Anthol.
avabewpew
avavtippnros
dvaytippyntes
dvarrodyyrtos
*avardocopa Plut. (Sept. ?)
avayvots
“averraicyuvros Joseph.
*dvOuratevo Plut.
avdvracos Inscr., Polyb.
dvridcarcOnpt Philo
*dvrtdordopéw Plut.
* AvrLoxevs
*4vrAnua Plot.
avropbahuee
avuTroTaKTos
anapaBatos
dmapriopds
dravyacpa Philo
APPENDIX.
L
N. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Remarks.
*dreipactos Joseph.
*amexdvouat Joseph.?
dx(or dp-)eAri¢o
arrepiamdoras
*dmddextos Plut.
arobnaaupiva
drroxapadoxia
aréxpiya Polyb., Inser.
dmonely@
amroropia
aroNvTpaats
adrooracia Archim., Sept.
aropoprigopat Philo
*adxpnots Plut.
ampdovros
”Apayy Strab.
dpotpid@
*domaypds Plut.
aprépev Vitruv.
*apyvepatixds J oseph., Inscr.
*Aotdpxns Strab., Inscr.
doodpwov Anth., Dion. Hal.,
Inser.
doroxew
apbapaia Philo
*arwOos Aret. (-Ocov Xen.
on).
Babéws
*Banriopds Joseph.
*Bantiotns Joseph.
Baorns Philo (Giards Pind.)
*yayypawa Plut.
ya¢a Theophr., Inser.
yovuTreréw
ypawdns Strab.
*yupynrevo Plut.
SevotSaupovia Polyb., Inser.
*SeopopvaAaé Joseph.
*Snvaptov Plut.
diayvepi¢eo Philo
dudraypa Sap., Inscr.
diavydfo
Scadypive
didaxrixds Philo
Oveppnveva
Steria Philo, Inser.
d:ddAacaos
divvxos Philo
dovraywyéw
duc evréptov (-repia Hippocr.)
Suceppnvevtos
éyKakéw or éxxaxéw
éykormn OF éxxomy
é6vapxns Philo
€Oixds
éxOarravaw
€xOapBos
éxOavpatw Sir.
éxvnpw Anthol.
éxmadat Philo
éxmAnpoots
éxrévera
*ehappia Aret.
€Aenuocivn Sept. (Gen.)
éevots
*upaivoyat Joseph.
é€um\oky
*évddunows Joseph.
évépynpa
“evoprivo? Joseph., Inser.
éva@rtov
*éEapri¢w Joseph., Inser.
ekicxto
*eEopxiotns Joseph.
*éunvos Joseph.
*érayovi¢onat Plut., Inser.
*érabpoitw Plut.
érdy (B.C. 265)
émapxia
érappila
*érevdva Joseph. (-8ive Ht.)
émBapéw Dion. Hal, Inscr.
émOavarios
*Emixoupecos
NEW TESTAMENT.
emurknvd@
*émowperwo Plut
émray))
émixopnye@
érepoyhoogos
evdvdpopew
evKaipéw
€UKomTros
*edvovxyifw Joseph.
*evrroria Joseph., Inser.
*edrpdadexros Plut.
*etuxéw Joseph., Anthol.,
Inser.
Ceords
qycOavns Anthol.
HpL@prov
fpcuoe
*“Hpediavoi Joseph.
Gevdtns Philo
“Geérvevotos Plut., Ora.
Sibyl.
“Oedérns Plut.
| Onpropaxew
1 Opnoxeia (-«in Hat.)
OprapBevw
Avdivos
| Gupopaxێw
icpoupyew Philo, Inser.
iparvopds
*"Tovdaixds Joseph.
*"Tovdaixas Joseph.
igdruos Philo
*xabeéjs Plut., Insc
caOnpepivds
Kaxovxe@
xaraBapéw
xaraBapuve
xarayaviComas
kardkpua
KaTavTaw
*xarapriows Plate
kardornpa
LATER GREEK.
caravya{o? Apo. Rhod.,
Anthol.
*carevdoyew ? Plut.
KaTnXe@
catorTpi{ouat Philo
kavpatico
kavortnpiato ?
xevodokia
kevddo&os
kevTupiov
keppatioTns
kodona (-via, etc.) Inser.
*xopBav (-Bavas) Joseph.
epaBarros or KpaBBaros
KpunTn
xtntwp Diod., Inscr., Anth.
kTigpa
K@orro\s
*uabnrevo Plut.
padnrpia
*yaxeddov Plut.
papyapirns
*naratodoyla Plut.
peeppnvevo
*uecoupdynpa Plut.
perapoppda
petptomabew Philo
*waopos Plut.
ptuov
poppdo Anth.
poppocts
vapdos Anth.
*vexpow Plut., Anth., Inser.
*véexpwois Aret.
VE@TEPLKOS
ynolov
*£éorns ? Joseph., Anthol.
Evpdw (Evpéw Hat.)
ddnyéds
oixéreva ? Strab., Inser.
*oixcaxés Plut.
1. Words borrowed from
the Hebrew.
N. B. Hebraisms in signifi-
cation and construction
(whether ‘proper’ or ‘improper ’)
are excluded ; so, too, are words
of Semitic origin which had pre-
viously found their way into
Greek usage.
*ABadday
*ABBa
Axed Saye
692
*olkodeomoréw Plut.
oikrippov Theocr., Sept.,
Anthol.
Ovdptov
nadvyyevecia Philo
mavdoxeiov ? (-ketov Arstph.)
mavdoxevs ? (-xevs Plato)
maparnpnots Epigr.
mapuxetuaoia
jmapeloakros
Tape.oepxopas
TAPEKTOS
mat porrapadotos
Inscr.
TepiAdumrw
Teploxn
mepiTreipw
mepmepevopat M. Antonin.
mo\AarrAaglov
*rovpepas Joseph.
modvtpdérws Philo
mopiop.os
morarés (modamds Aeschyl.)
*“pattwptov Joseph., Inscr.
mpaimabeva (-6ia) ? Philo
*rpoyvects Plut., Anthol.
mpoeAtri¢w
mpoevayyehigouat Philo
*mpoxatayyéAA@ Joseph.
mpokomn
*rpocairns Plut.
mpocavexw ?
mpooKarpos
mpookAnpow Philo
mpoakALors ?
mpooKoTN
*“rpoopryvupe Joseph.
mpooparws
mpogpnrixos Philo
padvovpynpa
pyTas
Diod.,
poutndov
poudaia Sept.
*gaBBariopos Plut.
*Zaddoukaios Joseph.
cadmorns Theophr., Inser.
(-riyerns Thuc.)
oanetpos
capow
aéBacpa
oeBaords Strab., Inser.
onpetow
onptkos s
*atxapios Joseph.
oivame
*ourtaros Joseph.
oxoria Apoll. Rhod., Sept.,
Anthol.
oxvBadrov Anthol., Strab.
oKoAnkoBpartos
oThow
orao.acrths ?
oTparodoyew
orpatromedapyns
otpnvos Lycoph.,
Anthol.
*ovyyevis? Plut., Inser.
ovyxardabecis
*ovyxaraynpite Plat.
ovykAnpovouos Philo
ovyxpdaopuat ¢
ov tntnots ?
ovpBaciwevo
ovpBovrAcov Inser.
ovuppepiCw
ovppoppos
ovupTviyo
ovvab\éw
ovvexdnpos Palaeph,
ovrnArxatns Inscr.
Ovveatavevo ?
*cuvodevo Plut.
Sept.,
II.
BORROWED WORDS.
ddAnrovia Sept.
ayunv Sept.
Baros Apocr.
BeeACeBovad (-Bov8)
BeNiap (-Alad)
Boavepyes
TaBBaa
yéevva (yaev. Josh.
Todyoda
xvill. 16)
“EBpaixds
‘EBpaios Sept.
*EBpais Apocr.
‘EBpaiort Apocr.
doit (cf. HAL)
*Enpavounr Sept.
epdaba
Ci¢dwov
AL or HAL or HA! (cE. eAwi)
Iovdaitw Sept.
*Tovdaixds Apocr. and -xés
BorrowED WORDS
ovvuTroKpivopat
ovorapacow
avoratixos (-k@tepov Aris
tot.)
*cvoracvaorys ? Joseph.
ovoTorxéw
*coparixas Plut.
codpovucpos Philo, Aesop
*ramevvoppoovvn Joseph.
taxwos Theocr., Sept.
TaxLov
Teh@vioy
tetpad.tov Philo
*retpapxéw Joseph.
TeTpapxns
TOM@TEPOS
TpteTia
TploTEeyos
tpoxiad Nicand., Sept.
Anthol.
*rupeoues Plut.
viobecia Diod., Inser.
bmeprrAcovato
troypaupos Philo
vToAturave
bronddiov Chares, Sept.
*broaroAn Joseph.
umotayn
vmotima@ots Quint.
“pedonevas Plut.
prradergia (Alex. ?) Philo
Andovos Anth.
dpvacow + Callim.,
Anth.
xapicpa Philo
xetpoypadoy Polyb., Inser.
xoptacpa Phylarch., Sept.
oxo
@rtiov Sept., Anth.
Toray 318 (75*, 16 2)
Sept.
"Tovdaionds Apocr.
Kavavaios ?
Kavavirns?
katnyep ?
kopBav or xopBavas
képos Sept.
KoDpt OF KOU OF KOU
Aapd or Aappa or Aeud or
Anud, ete.
papeovas
pdvva Sept.
Borrowep Worps.
Hapay d6d (papavaéd)
Meooias
Modéy Sept.
(wpe ?)
maoxa Sept.
mpoodBBarov? Sept. Apocr.
paBBi, -Bei
paBBovi, -Bovvi, -vei
paxd or paxa or paxd
oaBay Gavi, -vei
oaBawé Sept.
oaBBaticpds
oaBBarov Sept.
Zaddovxaios
oatay or caravas Sept.
oarov Sept.
oixepa Sept.
tahi6a
693
| Soowmos Sept.
Papicaios
XepovBip, -Beiv, Sept.
@oavva
ToTAu 57.
2. Words borrowed from
the Latin.
N. B. Proper names are ex-
cluded, together with Latinisms
which had already been adopted
by profane authors.
Snvdptov
Oideps épyaciar i. q. operam
do
€x@ i. q. aestimo
Knvoos
xodpavrns
kodvia ete.
KovoTwdia
AapBavw (q.v. I. 3 e.) iq.
capto
TO ixavov AapBaveu i. q. satis
accipere
ovpBovruov AapBdvew i. q.
consilium capere
Aeyeoy (through Aram. ?)
Aévtvov
AuBeprivos
pedkeAXov
pep Bpava
pddtos
&éorTns
T PALT@ptov
peda or -y? (cf. 3 below.)
otKdptos
Hit.
BrsricaL Worps.
ouptxivOcoy
govdaptoy (cf. IIT. 1)
omekovatap
TaBepvat (ai)
tithos
paworns paenula (cf. at
Advns in IIT. 1)
épov
ppayédAuov
ppayedow
xX@pos (?)
Tora 30,
8. Words borrowed from
other Foreign Tongues.
Baiov (Egyptian)
6é8a or -3n (Gallic? cf. 2)
BIBLICAL, ze NEW TESTAMENT, GREEK.
1. Biblical Words.
*ABaddav Sept.
"ABBa
GBvooos, 7, Sept. (as adj.
Aeschyl. et sqq.)
dyaboepyew (-Bovpyéw ?)
dyaborrovéw Sept.
dyaborrovia
*dyaboroids Plut.
dyabaotvn Sept.
dyadXiaows Sept.
dyaAidw Sept.
ayarn Sept.
dyeveahoynros
ayidtw Sept., Anthol.
dy.aopos Sept.
aywétns Apocr.
dyootvn Sept.
adyvapos
éynopos Sept., Inser.
d&yvorns Inser.
ddeAporns Apoer.
adiapbopia?
aberéw Sept., Polyb., Inscr.
aiparexxvola
aiveots Sept.
sioypoxepsas
sirioua ?
N. B. For explanations see the Prefatory Remarks.
aiypatwaota Sept., Polyb.
aixpakwrevo Sept.
aixpadori¢a Sept., Inser.
axabaptns ?
axarayveoros Epigr., Inscr.,
Apocr.
dxaraxdAurros Sept., Polyb.
dkaTakpiros
dxatdmacros ?
dkaracracia Sept., Polyb.
dxardoxeros Sept.
*AxeAdapd
*axpoarnptov Plut.
éxpoBvoria Sept.
dxpoywuatos Sept.
aha?
dAdAntos Anthol.
d\tevo Sept.
ddioynpa
ddAndovia Sept.
dddoyerns Sept.
Gd orpt(o)emioxoros
addy Sept. ? [Apocr.
dudpavros Orae. Sib., Inscr.,
duéOvoros Sept., Anthol.
dunv Sevt.
aupuag@ Sept., Anthol.
| *dvayevvaw Joseph.
dva¢aw Inscr.
dvafavvupe Sept.
dvabepati¢w Sept., Inscr.
dvakatvow
dvakalveots
dvaretpos? Apocr. (-mnpos,
Plato sqq.)
dvactatow Sept. ?
*avaracoopat Plut. (Sept. ?)
dvekOunynros
avexAaAntos
avéXeos ?
avepilo
avévdextos
ave&ixakos
dve&txviaoros Sept.
*dveraicxuvtos Joseph.
dverd¢w Sept.?
avetOeros
dvOpwmdpeakos Sept.
*dvOurarevo Plut.
dvitews ?
dvrardbopa Sept.
dvrarroxpivopat Sept., Aesop
*gyridowWopéw Plut.
dvriturpov Sept., Orph.
dyriperpew ?
aytyuo Oia
dvyturapépxopat Anthol.
Apocrs
avtixpioros
*avtAnpa Plut.
avutroxpiros Apocr.
arracragopat ?
*dmeipactos Joseph.
arrekdێxopmat
*arexSvouae Joseph. ?
amexdvots
amreheyp.os
aredrriva
Anth.
anévavrt Sept., Polyb.,Inscr.
arrepitpnros Sept.
dmrodexarow Sept (revo ?)
*dmodexros Plut.
dmoxaduis Sept.
dmoxara\\doow
dmoxeharita Sept. (David
over Goliath)
dmokuvio Sept.
’ AmoANv@v
amookiacpa
dmoovvayayos
dropbeyyoua Sept.
*amoxpnots Plut.
dmpookoros Apoer.
ampoowmoAn(m)rrws
dpyupoxomos Sept., Inser.
doxeros Chrysipp., Anthol.
Sept., Polyb.,
BrsticaL WorDSs.
‘Appayedav etc.
*dpraypos Plut.
appaos
dpoevoxoirns Anthol., Orac.
Sibyl.
apttyevyntos
ol dprot ths mpobécews Sept.
apxayyedos
*dpyceparixos Joseph., Inser.
dpxeroipnv
apx.ovvaywyos Inser.
apxireh@vns
dpxetpixAwvos
dcaivw? (q. Vv.)
domAos Anthol.
dotarew Anthol.
dotnptxtos Anthol.
aopari¢~w Sept., Polyb.
avdevréw
avToKaTaKptTos
agedpav
apedorns
apbopia?
adirdyabos
adtAdpyupos
adumvow Sept., Anthol.
advorepew Sept., Polyb.
dyetporroinros
axpevow Sept., Polyb.
*ayivOos Aret. (-cov from
Xen. on)
Baad Sept.
Babnos Sept.
Baiov Sept. ? Apocr.
Banricpa
*Barriopos Joseph.
*Barriotns Joseph.
Bap
Baciricxos? Sept., Polyb.,
Aesop, Inser.
Baros Apocr.
Barrodoyéew
Bdedvypa Sept.
Qdedukrds Sept.
BeBndow Sept.
BeehCeBovr (-BovB)
BeAlap (-Atad)
BnpvAdos Apocr., Anthol.
BiBXapidvoy
Biwors Apocr.
BAnréos
Boave (or-y-) pyés
Borifa
Bodis Sept., Anthol.
Bpadum\0€ew
Bpoxn Sept.
Bupcevs Inser.
TaBBada
*ydyypawa Plat.
yalodvAdxtor Sept.
694
apivo
yeewva (Sept. Josh. xviii. 16)
yewpytov Sept.
yroorns Sept.
yoyyutw Sept.
yoyyvopos Sept.
yoyyvorns
Todyo6a
*yupynrevo Plut.
yupvorns
Sapomadys
SevrypariCo
dethiaw Sept.
dexadvo Sept.
Sexae& Sept.
Sexaoxro Sept.
dexarévre Sept., Polyb.
dexaréacapes Sept., Polyb.
dexarow Sept.
Sexros Sept.
beEvoBddos (-AdBos)
*SecpopvAaé Joseph.
devrepdmparos ?
*8nvap.ov Plut.
Stayoyyv(@ Sept.
dtaypnyopew
Svaxabapi¢o
Otaxateheyyopat
Svadiwrava Apocr.
diavevw Sept., Polyb.
StarraparpiBn ?
dtacxopri¢w Sept., Polyb.
Svaorropa Apocr.
diarayn Sept., Inser.
didpaypov Sept.
didaps épyaciay
SvevOupéopar?
Svepynveia?
Steppnveutns ?
Scxatoxpicia Sept. ?
diAoyos
d10dedw Sept., Polyb., Inser.,
Anthol.
Suopupias ?
Ov@ktns
Soypari¢e Sept., Anthol.
Soxeun
Soxipsov (-petov, Plato)
doAtdw Sept.
dédrns Sept.
Suvapdw Sept.
Suvarew
dvoBacrakros Sept.
Sadexadvadov Orac. Sib.
Swpodopia?
€Bdounxovrakis Sept.
€BSounkovrarevre Sept.
‘EBpaikos
“EBpatos Sept.
“EBpais Apocr.
‘EBpaiort Apocr.
éyxaiva Sept.
éyxawviCo Sept.
eyxavydopa ? Sept, Aesop
éyKouBdopat
édpaiwpa
€GehoOpnokeia
e6uikos
eidwAciov Apocr.
e(OwddOuros Apocr.
eidwAodarpela
eidw@Aoddtpys
elpnvorrovéw Sept.
éxyapiCa ?
exyapioxe ?
exduxéw Sept., Inser.
exdixnots Sept., Polyb., In-
scr.
éx(nréw Sept.
exCntnots ?
exOapBew Sept.? Apocr.,
Orph.
exuuktnpiCw Sept.
exmetpatw Sept.
exrepiooas ?
exrropvev@ Sept.
expi(dm Sept., Orac. Sib.,
Inser.
&xtpopos ?
eAawv Sept.
*ehadpia Aret.
éhaytordétepos
edeypds ? Sept.
édeyéis Sept.
€Xeos, 76, Sept., Polyb.
€\Noydw (~yéw)
edai Sept. (cf. nAd)
*€upaivoua. Joseph.
*Eppavound Sept.
euperw ?
eumatypoun ?
éumatypds Sept.
eumaixrns Sept.
eumepuraréw Sept.
évayxadiCoua Sept., Anthol.
évavre? Sept.
evdidioxo Sept.
*evdounots Joseph.
evdoEalw Sept.
évdupa Sept.
evdvvauda Sept.
évedpov ? Sept.
evevdoyew ? Sept.
évvevnkovTaevvea
*évopki¢w? Joseph., Inser.
évraApa Sept.
evraguatw Sept., Anthol.
evradiacpds
évrpouos Sept., Anthol.
evariCouat Sept.
.BrsricaAL Worps.
é£ayopatw Sept., Polyb.
e€axodovbéw Sept., Polyb.
efamiva Sept.
eEaropew Sept., Polyb.
*éEapri¢w Joseph., Inscr.
e€aotparre Sept.
e&€papa
e&nxéw Sept., Polyb.
e€odobpeva Sept.
eEopodoyéw Sept.
*eEopxiatys Joseph.
e€ovdevéw (-vdw) Sept.
eLovbevéw (-vdw) Sept.
éEvrvitw Sept.
*Eumvos Joseph.
é€atepos Sept.
*érayovitopat Plut., Inser.
*éraOpoita Plut.
émavarravw Sept.
émapxetos Inscr.
emavpiov Sept.
*érevddw Joseph. (-dive
Hat.)
éxvyapBpevo Sept.
ériyveots Sept., Polyb.
émidvaTdooopat
emtdtop6dw Inscr.
émtxatdparos Sept., Inser.
*Emrxovupetos Anthol.
emdelxo ?
emtAnopovn Apocr.
émovoLos
émimdOnots
émimdOnros
émumobia
eximopevopuat Sept., Polyb.
emippant@
émuoxom Sept.
emouvayo Sept.
Aesop
émuvvaywyn Apocr.
Polyb.,
emLTUvTpEX@
emurvotacis Sept.
*éricapev@ Plut.
émupavokw Sept.
erupooke Inscr.
emxopnyla
épipaacs Sept.
épiguov ? Apocr.
érepodidacKkanew
érepotuyew
evayyeAoTns
evdpeotos Apocr.
evdoxéw Sept., Polyb.
evdoxia Sept., Inscr.
evkorr@tepov (-komos Polyb.)
evAoyntés Sept.
evpeTadoros
*edvovyif(w Joseph.
evmdpedpos ?
BIBLICAL Worps.
*edrouia Joseph., Inser.
*eimpoodextos Plut.
evmpooedpos
eUTpocwnéw
€Upaxvov
€vpo(or-v-)KAv8av }
*eiuxéw Joseph., Anthol.,
Inscr.
?pnuepia Sept.
eppada
(evernpia
C.Caviov
rt (cf. Awe)
“Hpwécavoi Joseph.
WrTnpa Sept.
OcarpiCo
Oevadns
6édnous Sept.
Oeodidaxros
deouaxos Alleg. Homer.
*Oconvevotos Plut., Orac.
Sibyl.
*deorns Plut.
OopvBatw ?
OpnoKos
dvoracrnpiov Sept.
teparevpa Sept.
ieparevo Sept., Inser.
ixavow Sept.
idaporns Sept.
idacpés Sept.
itaornpios Sept.
ipariCo
‘Tovdaitw Sept.
*Tovdaixos Apoer.
*lovdaixas Joseph.
*Iovdaicpos Apocr.
todyyeXos
xabapito Sept. (Hippocr. ?)
xalapiopos Sept.
*xabeEjs Plut., Inser.
kadodtdaoKados
kadorrovéw Sept. ?
Kdpros ?
Kavavatos ?
Kavavitns ?
KapS.oyvaotns
karayyeAeus
katrddepua ?
carabepariCw?
xaraxavxdopat Sept.
caraxAnpodoréw? Sept. ?
karaxAnpovopew ? Sept.
caraxodovbew Sept., Polyb.
KarakpLows
kara\aAua
kaTradados
cardAvewpa? Sept.
karadbalw
xardAvua Sept., Polyb.
695
xatavabena?
katavabepartica?
katravraw Sept., Polyb,
katavvéis Sept.
xaravvoow Sept.
katarréracpa Sept,
*xaraptvots Plut.
kaTaptic 10s
kataoxnvects Sept., Polyb.,
Inser.
caracopifoua Sept., Inser.
kaTaoTpnuidw
katacxeots Sept.
karapporntns Sept.
kareidwXos
«arévavtt Sept., Inser.
kateveamov Sept.
xate£ovotao
*catevdoyew? Plut.
karepiornps
katinyop ?
katriow Apocr.
karouxntnptov Sept.
karoxia Sept., Polyb.
kavoow
kavowy Sept.
kavxnots Sept.
Kevodovia
kepadtow (-Aatdw Thue.)
knvoos Inser.
kAvdevitopat Sept.
kodpavtns
koxkuvos Sept.
Kodagpifa
koAwvia ete.
*xopBav or kopBavas Joseph.
Kopos Sept.
koopoxpatap Orph., Inser.
Kove etc.
KovoTadia
Kpatatow Sept.
KpvotadriC@
KUAtopa ? or KuAuruds ?
xuptaxos Inser.
KuploTns
Aap ete.
Aakeurés Sept.
Aaropew Sept.
Aeyrov ete. (cf. list IL. 2)
hecroupytkos Sept.
hevriov
AiBeprivos Inser.
AoBoréw Sept.
Noyia (7)
oyopayew
Noyouaxta
Autpwrns Sept. (Philo)
Avyvia Sept., Inser.
*uabnrevo Plut.
*uaxedrov Plut.
paxpdbev Sept., Potyb.
paxpobupéw Sept.
paxpobipws
papevas
pavva Sept.
Hapdy aéd (uapavabd)
*waratodoyia Plut.
para.orns Sept., Inser.
paratow Sept.
peyadedrns Sept. Inser.
peyadwovrn Sept.
peyotav Sept.
peOodeia
perioaros? (-aios, Nicand.)
peu Bpdva
pepiorns
peoitns Sept., Polyb.
pecorotxop (-xos, Eratos.)
*vecovpavnpa Plut.
Meooias
petocxeoia Sept., Anthol.
*ptaopos Plut.
pucOarodocia
pc Oarrodorns
piotos Sept., Anthol.
poy(y)cAddos Sept.
podtos
potxanris Sept.
podvopos Sept.
poo xoTroew
purses?
porwos ? Inser.
pros Sept., Anthol., Orac.
Sibyl.
(pwpé ?)
*vexpow Plut., Anthol., In-
ser.
*véxpwors Aret.
veoduros Sept. (lit.; so Ar-
stph. in Pollux 1, 231)
vixos Sept., Anthol., Orph.
vurTnp
vopodidoKados
vooo.d? Sept. (veooora Hat.,
al.)
vuppov Apocr.
vuxOnpuepov Orac. Sibyl.
£evodoxéw Graec. Ven. (-xéo,
Hat.)
*£éorns? Joseph., Anthol.
*oixvaxds Plut.
*oixodecmorew Plut.
oixodoun Sept. (Aristot. ?)
oixoupyos ?
éxranuepos (Graec. Ven.)
ddvyomuaria ?
odvyomaTos
ddtyoyrvyos Sept.
dAtyos Anthol.
dArobpeutns
BrsuicaL Worps.
GAo(or -e-)bpetw Sept., An-
thol.
ddoxavT@pa Sept.
odokAnpia Sept.
dpeipouat? Sept. ?
oporacw ?
dvedtopos Sept.
ouKds
érrdve Sept.
értacia Sept., Anthol.
dpborodéw
6pOoropéw Sept.
opOpi¢a Sept.
épOpios ? Sept., Anthol.
dpxopooia Sept.
épobecia
ova
ovat Sept.
dpern
dpbarpodovrcia
6xAoTroLew
oydpeov
naywevw Sept.
ma.dudbev
mapmd\nbet
mavtoxparwp Sept., Anthol.,
Inser.
mrapaBiatopa Sept., Polyb.
mapaBoXevopa ?
mapaBovAcvouat?
mrapadiarpiBn ?
mrapaderypati¢o Sept., Polyb.
mapatndow Sept.
TapaduteKos
Tapartkpaivea Sept.
mapamixpacpos Sept.
maparropa Sept., Polyb.
tmapadppovia
maperridnuos Sept., Polyb.
mapotkia Sept.
mapopovaca ?
mapopytopos Sept.
maoyxa Sept.
matpiapxns Sept.
meOos
metpacp.os Sept.
TELopLovn
meAexiCw Sept., Polyb.
mevrekatoexaros Sept.
memotOnas Sept.
mepactpanta Apocr.
mepiOeors
meptxabappa Sept.
mepixepadaia Sept., Polyby
Inser.
mepixparns Apocr.
TepiKpuTTa@
mep.ovatos Sept.
nepiooeia Sept., Inser.
mepttoun Sept.
BisticaAL WorDs.
mepiyynua Sept., Inscr.
mAnupopa ete. Sept., Anthol.
mAnpopopia
TVEYPATLKOS
modurdpxns Inser., Epigr.
*roAvpepas Joseph.
moAvoTAayxvos
_ moppupora@dis
motapopdpntos
*rpatrdpov Joseph., Inser.
mpeoBureptov Inscr.
MpoarTidopat
mpoapaprdves
mpoBrera Sept.
*npdyvoors Plut., Arthel,
mpoevapxopat
mpoeTrayyehnw
*mpoxarayyéAAw Joseph.
mpdoKpta
Tpokupd@
mpopapTopopat
Tpopepipvaw
mpoopiva
mpocdBBarov ? Sept.?, Apo-
crypha
*rpocairns Plut.
(mpocayéo ?)
mpooSaravaw Inscr.
Tpocedw
mpoceyyifa? Sept., Polyb.,
Anthol.
mpocevxn Sept., Inser.
mpoonavutos Sept.
mpooKapréepyots
mpockoppa Sept.
mpooxuyntns Inser.
mpocoxbifea Sept. Orae.
Sibyl.
mpooraiw? (Soph. ?)
Tpdotretvos
*rpoopnyvus Joseph.
mpoopaytov Inser.
mpoaxvots
mpoowmodn(jz)rréw
mpoowrroAn(m)atys
mpogwmodn (1) pia
mpodnreta Sept., Inser.
mpwivds Sept.
mpwrokabedpia
mpetoxAroia (7) Apocr.
mperordkia (ra) Sept.
peroroxos Sept., Anthol.
(-rékos, act., Hom. down)
16 Tip Td aidnov etc.
muppaga? (-pitw Sept.)
sai, ~Bel
paBBovi etc.
paxa ete,
parrifw Sept.
éavrioyos Sept.
696
pédn or peda
pumapevopat?
oaBayOavi, -vel
caBow8 Sept.
*vaBBaro;:ds Plut.
adBBarov Sept., Anthol.
caynyn Sept.
*Saddouxaios Joseph.
odpdwos ?
capdiovvé ?
caray or caravas Sept.
aarov Sept.
oeAnviacopar
anroBpwros Sept., Orac.
Sibyl.
aGeviw
*ouxdptos Joseph.
cikepa Sept.
oupexivOcov
owrdlo
*ourtorés Joseph.
otrouerpiov (-rpov Plut.)
oxavoanriva
oxavdadov Sept.
OKnvorroLos
okAnpoxapdia Sept.
oKAnpotpaxnros Sept.
oxoti¢w Sept., Polyb.
opapaydwos
opupvil@
aovddpiov (cwdaptov Her-
mippus)
orekovAdrwp
omdayxvigona Sept. ?
ornke Sept.
otpatorédapyos ?
arvyvato Sept., Poly’.
*ovyyevis? Plut., Inser.
ovykaxorrabéw
ovykakxovyéew
*ovyxaraynpite
ovyKowvaves
ovdntntns
ovlwororew
ovKoLopéea
ovraywyew
ovd\aréo Sept.,
ouppemnrhs
ovppoppite?
cuppoppdow ?
oupmpeoBurepos
ouppvderne
ounpervncts
oupuyxos
Tvvalxpadwros
ovvavakcear Apocr.
ovvavapiyrups Sept. ?
cvvavarratvouar? Sept.
ovvayTihapBdvopat
Inscr.
[Inser.
Polyb.,
Sept.,
ovvapporoyew
ouveyeipw Sept.
auvekexTos
ovvOpirre
*cuvodevo Plut.
cvvopopew
ciconuov (Menander in
Phryn.), Sept.
ovcTw@pL0S
*cvotacvao7ys Joseph.
ovoTavpow
odvdpor?
*coparias Plut.
taBépvat (ai)
Tania
tanewoppeorv? Sept.
*rarewoppocvvy Joseph.
TapTapow
rexviov Anthol.
rexvoyoveo Anthol.
TeAELWTHS
TeccapaKxovradve?
Tecoapakovtarecoapes ?
*rerpapxéw Joseph.
titdos Inscr.
tord¢uov Sept.
tporopopew? Sept.
tpopopopéw? Sept. ?
tpuparid Sept. (Sotad.)
TumiKas ?
*rupavixos Plut.
imaxon Sept.
Unavdpos Sept., Polyb.
travtnots Sept.
tmepéxewva
bmepexmepioood Sept. t
imepexrreptooas ?
imepexretvw Anthol.?
bmepexyuva Sept. ?
bmepevrvyxava
bmepyika@
brepmepiooev@
bmepmreptoc@s
trepuow Sept.
UroAnuiov Sept.
tromdta?
trom\éo Anthol.
*trootoAn Joseph.
broortpavyvups Sept.
doownos Sept.
torépnua Sept.
vorepnats
ivnrodpovew ?
d\ropua Sept., Orac. Sib.
ayos
ga(or He-)Adyns (hawwdAns
Rhinthon, ¢. B.c. 300, in
Pollux 7, 61)
@apicatos
*Peouevws Plut.
BrsBLIcaAL SIGNIFICATIONS.
Prromporevo
opov
payehdtor
ppaychr\ow
Ppevararaw
pevararns
dvaAakifw Sept.
hroiwots
doornp Sept., Anthol.
oricpos Sept.
xarwaywyew
xarkndeav (Pliny)
xadxkodiBavov
xapirow Apocr.
XepouBip etc. Sept.
xoikos
xpewperderns
Aesop
xpnorevouas
xpnororoyia
xpucodakrvALos
xpuaorbos Sept.
xpucémpacos
Xopos
evdaderAgpos
evdarroaro\os
WrevdodsdaoKaros
Wevdorpodpnrns Sext.
Wevdoxpioros
Wubupiouos Sent.
pixtov
Wopiov Sept.
@oavyd
ToTAL 767, (76*, 89 7)
etc. Sept.,
2. Biblical Significations.
N. B. ‘‘ Sept.” or “ Apocr.” ig
added to a word in case it occur
in the same sense in the Septua-
gint version or (if not there) in
the Apocryphal books of the O.T.
Moreover, characteristic N. T.
significations which also occur
in Philo and Josephus but in no
other secular authors have been
included in the list, with the
proper designations appended,
See the Prefatory Remarks, p,
688,
7 @Bvacos (Sept.)
dyarn 2
dyyedos 2 (Sept., Philo)
adehpn 2
adedés 2 (Sept., Philo), 4,
5 (Sept.)
adudkpetos 2
adporns
aduvaréw b. (Sept.)
atpeats 5
aipetixds 2
BIBLICAL SIGNIFICATIONS.
aiav 2 (Apocr.), 8
adnbea I. 1c.
adnbedo b.
dpuaptia 3, 4
auntop 5 (Philo)
dvaOepa 2 a., b.
(dvacravpdw)
dvapepw 2 (Sept.)
avOouoroyéouat 3 fin. Sept.)
avopos 1
avopws
avoxn
avriknyis (Sept.)
avridoyia 2 (Sept.)
avtituros 1, 2
arareap
aravyacpa (Apocr.)
amdérns fin. (Joseph.)
adrodyncke II.
droxainrw 2 c. (Sept)
arokadvyis 2 a.
arroxpive 2 (Sept.)
ardAhvme 1 a. B.
arroNvtpacts 2
aroatdotov 1 (Sept.), 2
amooroAn 4
amoartonos 2, 3
aroctopativo
aroraco 1
dro ea 2 b.
dpeoxeia (Philo)
apxn 5
davveros fin. (Apoc.)
avyatw 2 (Sept.)
avtés II. 2 (Sept.)
agurvée b.
advatepew 2 (Sept.)
Banri¢o II.
Barricpds (Joseph.)
Baovreia 3
Bdéro 2 c. mid.
yapéw 2
yeveots 3
yervaw 2 b. (Philo), ¢., d.
yhéoca 2 init.
ypapupa 2 c. (Philo, Joseph.)
ypapparevs 2 (Sept.)
Saiuwv 2 (Joseph.)
b€w 2 ¢.
6 didBodos Sept.
diabyxn 2 (i. gq. 3)
S.iaxovia 3, 4
Sudxovos 2
Staxpivopat 3
Stavolye 2
dtamrovotpa c. (Apocr.)
Biarideua Siadnxnv - ete.
(Sept.)
Sida IV. 5
Stkaocivy 1 ¢.
697
Sixardw 2, 3, (Sept.)
dtkaiwots
diAoyos 2
Stake 3
dd&a III. (Sept.)
dofateo 4 (Sept.)
Suvayus b.
ddpa 3 (Sept.)
Sewped b. (Sept.)
eyyvs 1 b.
eyeipw 2, 4
éeyepors fin.
€Ouxds 3
€Ovos 4 (Sept.), 5
ei I. 5 (Sept.), II. 9 (Sept.)
eid II. 3 (Sept.)
eiSwdov 2 (Sept.)
eiui II. 5 (Sept.)
eixov 5 (Sept.)
eipnvn 3 (Sept.), 4, 5, 6 (Sept.)
ex 1. 7 (Sept.)—
éxBaots 2 (Apocr.)
exdoxyn 4
éxxAnoia 2 (Sept.), 4
exéyouat (Sept.)
éxdextés (Sept.)
ékXoyn
exotacis 3 (Sept.)
édeos 2, 3
“EAAnvis 2
euBarevw 2 (Apocr., Philo)
€uSpiyzdopat fin.
ev I. 6 b., 8 b. (Sept.), 8 ce.
evavriov 2 fin. (Sept.)
evepyew 3
e€avaoraots fin.
Z£08os fin. (Philo)
eEopodoyéew 2 (Sept.)
e€ovaia 4 c. BB., d.
émepotaw 2 (Sept.)
emepatnpa 3
ervyapBpevo 2 (Sept.)
emtxadew 2 (Sept.)
emuoxerroua b. (Sept.)
enuokorn b. (Sept.), ce. (Sept.)
éniokoros fin.
emustpopn Apocr.
émutipia Apocr.
épevyopar 3 (Sept.)
evayyeri¢o III.
evayyeduov 2 a., b.
evdoxew 2 (Sept.)
evrdoyéw 2, 3, 4, (Sept.)
eddoyia 3 Sept., 4, 5 (Sept.)
evordayxvos (Apocr.)
éyo I. 1 f.
Caw I. 2
Con 2 a., b.
(woyovew 3 (Sept)
Cworrorew 2
jHEépa 1b., 3 (Sept.)
jovxa@ c. (Sept.)
Oavaros 2 (Sept., Philo)
Gedo 4 (Sept.)
Geds 4 (Sept.)
Oewpéw 2 c. sub fin.
OptapBevw 2
Opoew fin. (Sept.)
6vyarnp b. (Sept.)
Oupiatnpiov 2 (Philo, Jo-
seph.)
tos 1 d. (Apocr.)
iepeds b.
iAacpuds 2 (Sept.)
iAaarnptov, rd, 1 (Sept.), 2
loxtw 2 a. (Sept.)
kaapif{w 1 b. (Apocr.), 2
(Sept.)
xabevda 2 b. (Sept.)
kaxia 3 (Sept.)
kaxd@ 2 (Sept.)
kaxodoyew 2 (Sept.)
kadéw 1 b. B.
Kappoo (Sept.)
karte b. (Sept.)
kavoy 1
kapmds 2 c. (Sept.)
karacxvve 2 fin. (Sept.)
katdmavots 2 (Sept.)
katacToAn 2 (Sept.)
KaTaTouNH
képas b. (Sept.)
kehadatow 2
knpvypa (Sept.)
knpv€& 1 fin.
knpvooe b.
k\npovopew 2 fin.
kAnpovopia 2 a., bd.
kAnpovdpos 1 b., 2 (Sept.)
kAnpow 4 (Apocr.)
KAnows 2
kAntés a., b.
kowria 5 (Sept.)
xowds 2 (Apoer.)
kowdw 2 (Apocr.)
kowaovia 3
komm 2 (Sept.)
Komidw 2 (Sept.)
koopukds 2, 3
kdopos 5 (Apocr.), 6, 7, 8
(Sept.)
kpiva 5 a. B., 6 (Sept.)
kpiows 3 b., 4(Sept.), 5 (Sept.)
Kpirnptov 3
kpirns 2 (Sept.)
kriots 2 (Apocr.), 3
kriopa
k@\ov
Aap Bdve I. 3 e. (cf. list I. 2)
AdoKw 2
BisLicaL SIGNIFICATIONS,
Aecroupyew 2c. (Apocr.)
Aecroupyia 3 b.
AtBavards 2
Ackudw 3 (Sept.)
Adyos ITI.
AUtpwors fin. (Sept.)
pabntevo 2
paxpobupew 2 (Sept.)
paxpoOupia 2 (Sept.)
paptus Cc.
peattedvo 2 (Philo)
petaipo 2
potxadis b. (Sept.)
poocxés fin.
pvornptoy 2, 3 (Sept.)
pepaive 2 (Sept.)
Hepds fin. (Sept.)
vexpos 2
vearepos a.
vdpos 2 (Apocr.), 3,4 (Sept.)
vipn 2 fin. (Sept.)
oixodopew b. B.
oikodopn 1
bpodroyew 4
dvoya 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept.), 4
dricw 2 (Sept.)
ovpavds 2 (Sept.)
dpetderns b.
bpetdnua b.
Opetro C.
dpOarpés in phrases (Sept.)
dxtpopa 2 (Sept.)
7 Oia
dWanov 2
mawbeta 2 b. (Sept.), c. Sept.)
madeva 2 b. (Sept.), c. (Sept.)
mais 2 fin. (Sept. ; ig. TAY)
mapakAnros 3 (Philo)
mapaBorn 8, 4, (Sept.)
mapadercos 3, 4
Tapakon 2
mapaokevn 3 (Joseph.)
mapOevos 2
mapotxos 2 (Sept.)
mappnata 3 (Philo)
naracow 2 (Sept.), 3 (Sept.)
meipatw 2 d. (Sept.)
metpacpds b., c., (Sept.)
mevtnkootn (Apocr.)
mepurarew b.
mepiroinats 2, 3
mepiooeia 4
mepiooevpa 2
meproceva 2
TEPLTOULN Bs Yoy De
mortevo 1 b.
motes 1 b.
mvedpa 3 Coy Oey 4
mvevpattkos 3
mopeta
BIBLICAL SIGNIFICATIONS.
mopevo b. (Sept.)
mopveia b. (Sept.)
mopvevwo 3 (Sept.)
mopyn 2
motnptov b.
mpeoBurepos 2 a., b., C
mpodyw 2 b.
mpocavex@ 2
mpocevxn 2 (Philo)
mpoondutos (Joseph.)
mpookadew b.
mpooriOnut 2 sub fin. (Sept.)
mpdowmor 1 b., c., 2, (Sept.)
mpopnreva b., c., d., (Sept.)
mpopnrns II. 1 (Sept.)
mparorokos b.
Biya 2 (Sept.)
fifa 2 (Sept.)
698
odBBarov 2
capxikds 1
odpkwos 3
adpé 2 b. (Sept.), 3 (Sept.), 4
oeBatopat 2
oxavdarifw (Apocr.)
oxavdarov b. (Sept.)
oxnvornyia 2 (Sept)
oxéros b.
copia b.
ataupés 2 b.
orépavos b. a.
otnpit b.
oro.xetov 3
ordépa 2 (Sept.)
orparia 3 (Sept.)
ov(ntéw b.
ouphiBdlo 8 fin.
ovvaye c. (Sept.)
avvaywyn 2 (Joseph., Philo)
auvaipw 2
ovvdcéata 2
cuveyeipo fin.
auvedprov 2 b.
auvtehéw 5 (Sept)
cvvtpizpa 2 (Sept.)
cxiopa b.
chtw b. (Sept.)
capa 3
carnp (Sept.)
cwrnpia a. (Sept.), b., ec.
carTjptov, rd (Sept.)
rexvov C. (Sept.)
ris 1 e. y. (Sept.)
Tpaxnril@ 2
tumos 4 y.
IV.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
viobecia a., b.
vids 2 (Sept.)
vids rod avOpmrov 3 (Sept.)
vids rod Beod 2, 3, (Sept.)
imoxpitns 3 (Sept.)
bmomvew b.
Uroturaots b.
udakrnptov 2
puddoow 2 b. (Sept.)
ghorita 2 c. (Sept.)
xapicopat b.
xapts 2 sub fin., 3 a
xdpiopa (Philo)
Xapitrdw 2
xprords 2
xpto a., b.
Wyn 1e., 2b.
Wopiteo b. .
WORDS PECULIAR TO INDIVIDUAL NEW TESTAMENT WRITERS.
N.B. A word which occurs only in a quotation by the N. T. writer from the Septuagint isso marked. In the Apocalypse, which
contains no express quotations, a word is so designated only when the context plainly indicates a (conscious or unconscious}
reminiscence on the part of the writer.
1. To Matthew
ayyeiov
dtyKtoT pov
adaos
aipa dOgov
aiua Sixatov
aipoppoew
aipetiCa
akpny
duiBAnotpov (Mk. 7)
axpi Bow
avaBiBalo
avairtos
aynbov
anayxo
arrovinre
Bap ?
Bapitipos?
Bacanorns
(Bacircia Tr&v odpavay, see
ovpavos)
Barrohoyéw
Biaorns
Bpoxn
Saipov (Mk. ? Lk.? Rev.?)
Odvevov
é 8eiva
déopun
diaxadapifo (Lk. ?)
StakwrAvo
SiaAdoow
diacapéw
didpaxpov
dieE0Sos
Suerns
Siordlo
OwriCo
duxalo
€Bdounkovrdxs
eyepats
éyxpumto (Lk. ?)
6 €Ouxds (3 In. ?)
evOvpéonar (Acts ?)
eidéa (idéa)
elpnvorro.ds
ék\apra
"Eupavouna fr. Sept.
europia
eumpnbo
e€opkiv@
e€arepos
emvyapBpevo
émixabiCa
€TTLOPKE@
émuoteipw?
€pevyopuat
For other explanations see the Prefatory Remarks, p. 688 sq.
épicw
épiguov?
éTaipos
evdia?
evvoe@
evvovyivea
evpvxwpos
CuCaviov
NAL
Gavpdovos
(Océ voc.)
Geporns
Epivos ?
Oupdo
(?8éa, see e’S€a)
lora
Kada
kadnyntns
katadepariCo?
katapavOavea
karavabeparivo ?
katarrovriv@
kntos fr. Sept,
KovoTwdia
Kpudaios ?
KUpLtvov
Kove [ovpB.)
(AapBdvew ovpBovrAcLov, see
padakia
peraipo
perotkeoia
picov
picbda
pray?
vopu..o pa
voociov (Lk. ?)
oikereta ?
oiktakds
Odvyomotia?
évap (xar’ dvap)
évexds (Mk. ? Lk.?)
ovdapas
Baotdela Tay ovpavar
mrayWevo
mapabaddooos
mapaxovw (Mk. ?)
mapartOévat trapaSoAny
mapoporata ?
mapovis
me(os?
mxpas (Lk. ?)
mAaTUs
mAnpovy 76 pnbev
modvdoyia
mpoBiBatw (Acts ?)
mpoomaia ?
mpopbdve
muppata ?
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
pax(or -x-)a (or paka)
barriCe
gayi
oeAnuidCopas
owrtoTos
oratnp
ovpBovdcoy Aap Bdvew
ovvaipw (Adyov)
ouvavrnors ?
ovvavéave
ovrracow
tTddavtov
rad
TeAeuTn
Tovvoua?
tpameCirns
Tpvmnpa ?
TUpe
nui?
ppato
guy (Mk. 2)
uhakryptow
oureia
Xavavatos
xAapvs
Wevdopaprupta
Wixe
Tora 137 (2 fr. Sept., 21 ?)
2. To Mark.
dypevo
adaXos
ad exropopavle
aAXaxov?
apprBdarrw F
appodoy
dvaxvAlw?
dvahos
dvarnddaw ?
dvacrevalo
amédnpos
droareyato
aria } 9
arTip.o@
adppila
Boave(or-n-)pyés
yoaped s
dnravyds ? (cf. TAavyos)
dcaprateo (Mt. ?)
SuoryiAcoe
ddvous?
SvoKoAos
éyytora ?
eirev?
éxOapBéw
éxOavpato?
éxrepisoas ?
exoBos (Heb. fr. Sept.)
Aw
evaykartoneas
évethéw
evvuxos
efamwa
€£ovd(or-6-)evda ?
emBaddo (intr.)
emixeadatov ?
€mippantw
emovvTpexo
€oxaras (Exew)
eppaba
OapBéw (Acts?)
Oavacipos
Guydrptov
TO ikavoy trovety
kataBapvve ?
kaTad@K@
KaTaKOTT@
katevioyew?
katoiknots
KevTUpl@v
keadaidw }
kepadida
kovpe etc.
Kudlo
K@pdrroXes
peOdptov ?
pnkdve
poy(y)tAdAos
pupil
VOUVEX@S
&éarns
dSorrotew ?
(686v trovéw PY
dppa (Mt. ?)
domep?
ova
dxetos?
dyuos (adj.)?
ma.o.obev
maprronus ?
mavraxdbev ?
TrapojmoLos
men (Mt. ?)
TEpITpeX@
mpacia
mpoavAtov
Tpoueptuvaw
mpocdSBarov?
mpoceyyiCa?
mpooxepadacov
mpocoppica
mpoomropevopat
muypn?
oxorré fr. Sept.
opupyiva
orrexovAdT@p
oractaarns ?
ari Bas (orotBas)?
699
oTiABo
ovddAuTréw
ovpBovAcov rrorety ?
Gupmdootov
ovvOrXiBo
Supahouwikicoa
Supopowixiooa ?
Supopoincca
ovoonpov
ovotaciacris ?
Taha
TpAravyas? (cf. SpAavyas)
tpi¢e
tpvpadid (Lk.?)
brepnpavia
Umepreptagas
UmoAnviov
XaXkiov
ToTau 102 (1 fr. Sept., 32 ?)
8. To Luke.
N. B. Words found only in the
Gospel are followed by a G.;
those found only in the Acts, by
an A.; those undesignated are
common to both.
ayaboupyew A. ?
aykadn G.
dynopos A.
dyv@oros A.
Gyopatos A.
aypa G.
dypapparos Ac
dypaviéw G.
dyavia G.?
anda G.?
*A@nvaios A.
abpotle G.?
aivos G. (Mt. fr. Sept.)
aicOavopat G.
airtov(T0)
airi@pa (-apa) A.
aixpahoros G. fr. Sept.
GkKaTAKpITOS A.
axpiBea A,
axpiBns A.
dxpoarnptoy A.
akoAUTaS A.
*AreEavdpevs A.
*AdeEarOpivos (or -rds) A-
aXioynua A-
GAXoyevns Ge
Addopuvdros A.
Gpdprupos A.
GpmeAoupyds Ge
Gpvve A.
dudua(or -é-) fw G.?
dvaBabpds A.
avaBdadrw A-
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS,
dvaBreYns G. fr. Sept.
avaBonn A.
avayvepitea a.? fr. Sept.
avadeixvupe
avddev&ts G.
avadidope A.
ava(nréw
dvabépare avabeuaricew A.
avdOnpa G.?
avaidea G.
dvaipeots A.
avaxabifw A. (G.?)
avdxpiows A.
avadn(p) Wis Ge.
GvayvTippnTos Ac
dvavtippntas Ae
avarrei(Ow A.
dvdretpos } oo
avarrnpos
avantvcow G.?
avackeval@ Ae
avaoTraw
dvatacoopat Ge
dvatpépe A. (G-?)
avahaive
dvapovew G
avayuéis A.
avéxAeut Tos Ge
avevdextos Ge
dveTal@ As
dvevOeros A.
dvevpicKo
dvOoporoyeopat Ge
dvOuratev@ A.?
avOuraros A.
dvotxodopew A. fr. Sept.
dvretmov
avTiBaddrAw Ge
QVTLKAAE® Ge
GyTikpv etc. Ae
dvriTapepxopae Ge
avturépa(-v) fe
ee ;
avrimepa
avTuTint@ A.
dvropOahpéw Ae
GV@TEPLKOS As
(dévdo w. inf.)
dratéw G-
amaptio pes G.
dmaoraCopas A»?
Goreyst abeO Ae
GTrEAAUU® Ac
dmeheypos A-
dm(or a-)edrri{o G-
dmepitpntos A. fr. Sept
amoypapn
drrodexarev@ G?
drrodexouat
aroOXtBo G.
dmokaracTacts Ae
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
drokdelo G.
arrodeix@ G.?
aropdoo@ G.
amomint@ A.
Gro NEw Aw
drom\vva G.?
drorviyo G. (Mt. ?)
amropia G.
droppinra A.
Grockevdl@ A.?
amooropatila Ge
émotwacc@
amopbeyyopat A.
amopoprifopat Ae
arowix G.
dipdye (dpa ye) A»
GpyupOKOmoS As
"Apa A.
"Apelos mayos As
"Apeomayitns Ac
(dpnv) apvos Ge
Gporpov G-
GpTEMov As
apyveparuxds Ae
dpxtredovns Ge
donpos A.
*Acvavos A.
Ao.dpyns Ae
douria A.
GowTos As
adoKé@ A.
Ao MEVaS As
docop A.?
dorodnre G.
ouphovos A.
dooTwy G.
GTeKVOS Ge
rep G.
avy) A.
Avyovoros Ge
avotnpds G.
avTomnrns Ge
avtoxerp A.
apartos G.
aeAdrns A.
apednifa (cf. dredmife) c.
args A.
advo A.
adpés G.
adpurvdé@ G.
axdvs A.
Babéas c.?
Babuvo c.
Bad(A)dyriov G.
Banrw c. (Jn.? Rev. ?)
Baptve G.?
Ta Bacidea G.
Baots A.
Baros (Heb. Bath) a.
Beddvn G. ?
Bepovatog A»
Bia A.
Biatos A.
Biwors A.
Body G.
Bodi¢@ A.
Bouvds G. fr. Sept.
Bpadvm\o0€@ A-
Bpvxo A.
Bpeotpos G.
Bupoeus A.
Bapds A.
yata A.
TaAarikos As
yeAd@ G-
yepovata Ae
ynpas G-
YAEUKOS Ao
YYOOTNS As
SaxrvAos G-
dav(€)toTHS Ge
damavn G.
Sevordatpovia Ae
Serordaipov A.
dexadvo A. ?
OexaoxT@ G.?
deEvoBdros ? } i
SeEvodaBos
AepBaios A.
Secpéew G.?
SecpopvAag A.
Secparns A-
Sevrepaios A.
devrepdmpwros GF
Snunyopew@ A.
Ojpos A.
Onpdotos A6
dtaBadr@ G.
divayyéAAw (Ro. fr. Sept.)
Staywooke A.
Scayvwpico G.?
didyvaots A.
Stayoyyila Ge
dtaypnyopew G.
Stadéxopar A.
diadoxos a.
diadidwpe (Jn.? Rev. 7)
diaxabaipw G.?
Suaxareheyxopar A-
Stakovo A.
dvadadéo G.
Svadcirro G.
dudAexros A.
Stadiprdvo AP
dtarvo A.
Scapaxopat Ae
Stapeptopds Ge
Stavépo A.
Siavevw G.
Stavéna Gs
700
dvavuxrepedoo G.
dado A.
Starr éw A.
Ovarrovew A.
SvaTropéw
duarpayparevopas G.
Starrpio A.
diavelo G.
Svactreip@ A.
dudotnpa A.
dvarapaoow G. fr. Sept.
Otatehéw A.
Starnpéew
duaedyo A.
diapGopa A.
dvapvAdcow «G. fr. Sept.
Staxerpif@ A.
diaxdevato A. ?
Stayapifo G.
StevOvpéopas A. ?
dveEpyopat A?
dveporaw A-
Steria A.
durynots G.
d:6ddacaos As
Oulornpe
SvioyvpiCopas
duxate G.?
ducaotns A. (G- ¥)
dr0devo
Svomerns Ae
didpOwpa A.?
Atdokovpot A.
SovAn
Sox7 G.
dpaxpy G.
dvaBacraktos G. (Mt. ?)
dvcevrepia (-réptov) A-
Swdexadvdov A.
éa G. (Mk. ?)
€BdopunKovra
éBdSopunxovtaée& A.?
€BSounkovramevre A. ?
“EBpaixds G.?
eyxaberos G.
éykAnua A.
éy(or ev-)Kvos G.
edapito c. fr. Sept.
eSagos A.
eGilo G.
elokadéopat A.
elomndaw A.
eloTpex@ A.
éxatovrdpyns A. G.? (Mt. ?)
éxBoAn A.
exyapioxo G.?
exdinyéopat A.
ExOoTos As
ekeioe A.
€xOapuBos A.
InDIVIDUAL WRITERS
&xOeros A.
éxkodupBdw A-
éxxopil@ G.
éxxpépapat (or éxxpépopat) G.
éxAadéw A.
éxdeime G.? (Heb. fr. Sept.)
expuKTnpil@ G-
exTepm@ A.
éxmmOdaw A.?
exTAEw Ac
exmrAnpd@ Ae
exTAnpooes Ae
exo ol@ A?
exTapaoo@ As
exTeAcw G.
exTeveid A.
éxreveoTepov Ge?
éxriOnps A.
exxopew G.
éxixo A.
éAaav A. (G.?)
*Eday(e)itns Ae
édevows A.
EAkd@ G.
“EAANULOTHS Ae
€uBaddro G.
€uBiBalo A.
éupaivopat A.
éumurpaw A.?
éu(or év-)mvéw A.
eudavns A. (Ro. fr. Sept.)
évavte?
evdens A.
evdexerat (impers.) G.
évdiddoKw G. (Mk.?)
evédpa A.
evedpevo A. (G.?)
évedpov A.?
évicxvo A. («.?)
évkvos cf. &yxvos
évyéa G.
€v(v)eds A.
EvVEV®@ G.
(ra) évdvra G.
€évoxhéw G.? (Heb. fr. Sept.)
évrvew cf. éumvew
évtémuos A.
évrpopos A. (Heb. ?)
évirmoy A. fr. Septe
évariCouat A-
e€atéw G.
e&adopat A.
efaotpante G.
eEeupt A.
é&ns
e€odrobpeva
eEoebpevoo }
CEopKuoTys Ae
e€oxT Ac
eéumvos A.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
eEwbew A.
erradpoilw G.
ématrew G.
€makpodopas A.
emavayKes A.
erravépyouat G.
€mapxetos A. ?
émapx(e)ia Ae
éxaviis A. fr. Sept.
5 ;
eTreyeip@ A.
ereLOnmep G-
ém(or €p-)€iSov
Erreur (elute) A.
€rrevoépyopat G.?
énéxewwa A. fr.
TO emiSaddop G.
emt BiBaceo
emtBodw@ A. ?
emBouvdn A.
emyivopat As
emLONnMe@ As
émtKeAX@ A. ?
*Emxovp(€)uos A.
€mKovpia As
émixpivo G.
émidelx@ G.?
€TLpeNELA Ae
€TLMLEA@S Ge
EmwevW An
émivowa A.
émumopevopas G.
émotTio pds G.
émtoxeval@ A. ?
émotatns G.
émiatnpil@ As
émotpopy A.
emioanns A-
ETLTXU® Ge
émitoauté A.?
émitpoTrev@ G.?
emiTpomn A.
éenupavns A.? fr. Sept.
eripaven
emixetpe@
emlxew Ge
ém\noOn xpdvos } .
ém\noOnoay hpépar}
€TFOKEAN@ A. ?
épeidw A.
Zpnpot (al) Ge
ZrOnows ?
éomépa
éorepwvds Ge?
edye G.?
evepyeTew As
evepyeTns G-
evOvdpopew As
evOupos A.
wWOipws A?
[Sept.)
emippinra G. (1 Pet. fr.
701
evdaBns
eUmopéw A.
€vmopia A»
evpaxvAwv
evpoxAvoor A.
evpukvdev
eUTOvas
evpopew G.
evppoovry A.
épaddopat A.
(€peidov, cf. éreidov)
*Edécuos A.
édnuepia G-
Cedyos G.
Cevernpia A.
(ata A.
Cwoyove (1 Tim. ?)
TYEHOVEVH Ge
nyepovia G
npuCarns Gs
nxos (76) Ge
XO Ge?
OapBos
Odpaos A.
Ged A.
Oeopayéw Ae?
Oecopayos Ae
Oépyn A-
dewpia Ge
Onpebw Ge
OopuBalo G.? (cf. rupBatw)
Opava G. fr. Sept.
OpopBos G.?
Oupudo G.
Ovpopaxew@ A.
tacts
iSpas c.?
iepatevo G.
iepdovdos A.
ikpds G-
immevs Ac
iodyyeXos Ge
tows G.
*ITaAtKOS Ac
KaOdTT@ As
KabeEns
KaOnwepwvds Ao
KaOinue
KaOddov Ae
KaboTrAil@ Ge
kaOore
kaxeibev A. G. ? (Mk. ?)
kdkwows A. fr. Sept.
KapOLoyvaotns Ae
Kapmropdopos Ae
xataBaots G.
kaTayyeAevs Ac
KaTabew G-
karadixn A. ?
karakNel@
KarakAnpodotéw ? fr.
karakAnpovopew ? }
katak\iva G
katakoovbew
karakpnuviC@ Ge
kataiOalw G.
katddouros A. fr. Sept.
KATAPLEV@ Ac
KaTavev@ G.
KaTavioo@ A.
katarinrw@ A. (G.%)
kataTAéw G.
KarapiOpew Ax
KaTacelw A.
karacopitoua: A. fr. Sept.
kaTaoTehA@ A
KATATUP® Ge
katarpatw Ge
KaTaoXeous A.
KaTATpEX@ Ao
Katapéepw A.
katrapporntns A. fr. Sept.
katawWuy@ G-
Kareid@dos A-
karePioTnps As
KaTotkia A.
karépOopa At
KepajLos Ge
KepaTLov Ge
knpiov G.?
Kixpnue Ge
kAdous
k\wvdptov Ae?
krivet f mépa G
KAuvidwoy G.
kK\uola G.
KOLT@V A.
KoAvPBA® As
xohovia (-vera ett.) A»
komreTés A.
korpia G.
KOmptov Ge?
Kopa& G.
kdpos G.
kovpila As
kpatravn Ge
KpdaTtoros
kpuntn (or Kpvwr) G.
KTNT@p Ae
hakriC@ Ae
apmporns A-
apmpas G-
Aakevros G.
AdoK@ A.
Neios G. fr. Sept
emis Ac
Anpos G-
ArBeprivos A.
Aexpdo G. (Mt. ?)
uuny A.
“* Sept.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
dp a.
Adytos A.
Avxaovoti A.
Avpaivopar A»
Avowreet G.
AuTpaTNs Ae
payela (a) &
Mayev@ A.
padntpia A.
paxpoOvpas Be
pavia A.
pavrevopas A.
paoTila@ As
pactos G. (Rev. 7)
peyaneios A. (G-!)
peAloows GP
pepiorns G.
peonuBpla Ae
PETTOW Ao
peeTaBdAr@ Ax
peTaKaréw A.
perarepme A.
perewpil@ Ge
peroukil@ A.
perpios A.
pndapas A-
pymou A?
picO.os G.
picbapa As
pva G.
poyts Gt
pooyorrovew Ap
VaUKANPOS A«
vaus A.
veavias A.
veooods (vooods) & tr. Sept.
VE@KOPOS As
vnotov A-
vooo.d G.?
vooo6s, See yeorods
dySonxorta G.
ddevo G.
SdotTropew Ac
dduvaw
OO6N As
OUKNPG Ae
oixoddpos Act
olkovopew G.
OKVE® As
d\oKAnpta As
duBpos G.
Gpirew
dpdrexXvos A-
dvetdos G.
Sirdre G. &
OmTave) Ac
omrds G.
Opyuid. As
dp(e)uwds G.
dpbpi{e G.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
dpOptos G.?
bpué G.?
dpobecia A.
ovpavddev A.
ovcia G.
opus G.
dxhéw A. (G-?)
OxAoTrOLew A.
maOnrds A.
mais, 1), G.
mapmdnbei G.
mavdoxetov (or -Kiov) G.
mavdoxevs (Or -Kevs) G.
mavoukl (OY-kel) A.
mavraxy OY mavrayn A?
mavtn (or -Tn) A.
mapaBaddro A. (Mk. ?)
mapaBiagopat
mapadogos G.
mapabewpew A.
Tapawe@ A.
mapaxabeCopat G. ?
mapaxabilo G.?
TapakadvTT@ Ge
Tapad€yopat Ae
mapaAtos G.
Tapavopew A.
TapaTew A-
TAPATHLOS Ac
Taparetv@ A.
Tapatnpyots G.
TApaTvyXav@ A-
TAPAXElAaTla Ac
mapenBarrAw G. ?
TAPEVOXANEW Ae
mapOevia G.
Tapotxopat As
TAPOTPUVM Ac
TATpP@S A-
mediwos G.
meCev@ A.
metpaw A. (Heb. ?)
TEVLYPOS Ge
TEVTEKALOEKATOS Ge
Tepartépw A. ?
Tepiantra G.?
Tepiaotpante A
mepixabifa G.?
TEPLKPATNS Ac
TEPLKPUTTT@ Ge
TEPLKUKAG® Gs
Tepidaumre
TEPLLEVOD As
TEPLE As
Teprorkéw G.
TeplotKos G.
TEPLOXN A.
meptp(p)iryrupe A.
TEPLOTTAw G.
TEPITPETrO) A.
102
’
myavov G.
mela Ge
1 ?
TUpTpa@ A.
muvakid.ov G. ?
qmivakis G. ?
mAew (Rev. ?)
m)hnpe()vpa (or ipa) G.
m\dos A.
TVUKTOS As
mvon A.
moNitns (Heb.?)
rodXarAactov Gc. (Mt. ?)
moAurapxns A-
[Sept.)
Tlovrixds A.
noppo G. (Mt. and Mk. fr.
moppupdT@Xts A.
Tpayparevopat G.
TpaxTop G.
mpeo Bela G.
Tmpnvns A-
TpoBarAw
mpoxatayyeAAw A. (2 Co.?)
MpoKnpvoo@ A.
MpopedeTaw G-
Tmpoopaw A.
mporropeve
mpocavaBaiva G.
mpocavanicKa G. ?
mpotavex@ A.?
TPOTATELAEW Az
mpocayew A.?
mpooOaravde G.
mpood€eopat A.
mpoadoxia
Tpocwedw A.
mpooepyacopat G.
Tpooexelv EavTots
TPookKANPs@ S.
mpookNiva A.?
mpoo\anrew A.
MpOometvos A.
Tpoomnyvupe A.
mpoorrotew G. (Jn. ? ?)
mpoopnyvupe G. (Mt. ?)
mpoogaras A.
mpooava G.
TporwmoAn(m)rTyS A.
Mpordoaw A.?
MPOTELV@ A.
MPOTPET@ Ax
Tpovimapy@
mpopepa G.
Mpoyelpil@ A«
MPOXELPOTOVE@ A.
mp (or -@-, or -@-) pa A.
Mporoorarns A.
mporas A. ?
MTOE® G.
TTVTT@ Ge
wUOwY A.
Tupa A.
paBdodxos A.
padiovpynpa Ae
padvoupyia A.
piyya G.
pnt@p A.
*‘Popaikds G. ?
Povvupe A.
addos G.
cavis A.
ocBacrds A.
Sidanmos
ovKaptos A.
oikepa G.
oupukivOtov Ac
oiiato G.
oureuTos G.
gitiov A.?
OLTOmeTpLov Ge
OKanT@ G.
oxadn A.
oKeun A-
oKnvorrouos A.
OKIpTa® G.
oKAnpoTpaxnaros A.
oxvAov (or cKvAov) G.
OK@ANKOBpwTos A.
copds G.
orapyavdw G.
oOTEpwoAdyos A.
oTéupa A.
OTEPEOW A.
oTlypn G-
otpatnyds
otparia (cf. 2 Co. x. 4 Taf.)
orparoredapxns? } re,
otparorédapxos?
otpatéredov G.
Srwikds A.
ovyyéevera
ovyyevis G.?
OVYKAAUTT@ Ge
ovykataBaive A.
ovykaratiOnpt Ge
ovykataynpite A.
ovyKivew A.
ovykopic@ A.
OVYKUTT® G-
ovykupia G.
Ovyyxew A.
Gvyxvots A.
ov(v)nrnots A.?
OvKdputvos G.
ovKOLOpea
-wopéa fe
-epata
Ovkopavtéw Ge
ovadoyiCopat Ge
oupBadrr
ouurrapayivopat G.(2Tim.?)
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS
Oupraperp A.
cupTreptAap Bava As
cuprive A.
ouprintea G.?
oupmAnpow
cuppa G.
ouppavia G.
ouplnpit@ A.
auvabpoita A. (G.?)
auvaxodovbéw G. (Mk.?}
ovvarilo A.
ovva\\doow A.?
ovuvaprate
ovvdpopn A.
ovveErpe (eipi) Ae (c.?)
ouveuse (et) G.
cvvedavvw A. ?
ouveritiOnpe A.?
Guverropat A.
ouvediornpt A.
cvvOd\aw G. (Mt. ?)
ovvOpimra A.
ovuvearaved@ A.?
ovvodevo A.
cuvooia G.
uvopiew A.
CvVOPOpE@ A.
ouvrépos A. (Mk. ? ?)
avvtpodos A.
CurTvyxdve G.
cuv@pocia A.
Supos G. (Mk. ?)
Suptis (or ciptis) A.
ovorapacow G. (Mk. ?)
ovotpépe A. (Mt. ?)
cvoTpopy A.
opdayoy a. fr. Sept.
opodpas A.
odvdpov a.?
odupov a.?
OXOAN A.
TAKTOS A.
Tavov (ra viv) A.
,
Tapaxos A.
Taxiora A.
TEKUNpLOV A.
Teheaopew G.
Teg TapakovTaeTns Ae
TETTApETKALOEKATOS A.
TeTpad.ov A.
TetparrAdos G.
TETpAapXew G. [xapdia
tiecOar eis ta Sra or ev
TUL@pe@ A.
TOLXOS A.
Tpavpa G.
TpavpatiCo
Tpaxus
TpteTia A.
TpluTeyos A.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
TpLoxiAsoe A.
Tporropopew ?
Teiobonda? } A. fr. Sept.
tpvyev G. fr. Sept.
tupBalo G. ? (cf. dopyBato)
Tuptos A. |
Ttuparikds A.
typds G.
Udpwmikds
Umepetoov A.
UMEPEKXUVO Ge
Umep@ov A.
UMNPETEW A.
troBaddXe A.
vmoCavyupe A.
Umokpivopat G.
vrodauBava (3 Jn. ?)
Umovoew@ A.
UmomA€@ A.
Uromvem A.
UTooTPavvypt Ge
UmoTpexXe@ A-
Uroxwpew G-
tpaive Ge
cdavracia Ae
papayé c. fr. Sept.
dats A.
arvn G.
diravOparas A.
_ Piry (7) G.
tdoverkia G.
dirdaoos A.
Pprodpovas A.
poBnOpov(or -rpov) G-
pdpros a.?
Ppovipas G.
pvacow A. fr. Sept.
ppvyavoy A.
udakif@ A.
pura€ A.
Xandaios As
xdpak G.
xaopua Ge
xeLual@ A.
XELpayw@yew Ae
xetpuywyos Ae
xAevato A.
xopds G.
xopTacpa A.
xpeoperderns (or xpeoPr.) G.
xpovorpiBew A.
Xpa@s A-
X@pos A-
Wax G-
@veopat A.
@Ov G
Gospel 312 (11 fr. Sept., 52?)
Acts 478 (15 fr. Sept., 49?)
Both 61.
Tora 851 (26 fr. Sept., 101?)
703
4. To all three Synoptists.
dyavaxréw
ayedn
dda?
a\dBaorpov
aAtevs
apny eyo tpiv
dvaBodw ?
avak\ivo
avektos
arraipo
arrobnpew
amroxeanito
dmrokuXtw
ot dprou THs mpobEerews
do Beotos
aoKos
Bantiotns
BeehCeBovr (-Bov8)
yahnvn
yapioxa ?
diaBréro ?
dtaroyigoua (Jn.?)
dvoKkdAws
éxatovrarAactov ?
exdlOape
€umraivo
euTTVM
emi(BAnpa
See
emutuvay@
épnpoois
EVKOTTOTEPOV E0%%
Gépos
Onralo
KakOs Exe
Kapnros
KaTayehd@
Kpaomedov
Kpnpvos
Kaos
Aeyewr (-ywor)
Aeémpa
Aempos
pakpos ?
p.ddwos
vuppov
oikodeomdotns
opxéopat
mapadutikds?
mevoepa
mepihumros
mpa [Sept.)
(réppo Mt. and Mk. fr.
mivaké
mpoBaive
mparoxabedpia
mpwrokdota
jmupyos
pais?
pnyvupe (Gal. fr. Sept.)
olvant
owdav
oKUAA@ ?
omhayxvicopas
Ta oTépiya
oTaxvus
aTeyn
oupmviye
ovvTNpEew
Teh@UNS
TeN@vov
TIAA®
tpiBos fr. Sept.
vids Aavid
bmoKpttns
$eyyos?
xoipos
Wevdouaprupew (Ro. ?)
apexiov
Tota 78 (1fr. Sept., 10 ?)
5. To John.
N. B. Words peculiar to the
Gospel, or to one or another of
the Epistles, are so marked.
dyyeNia 1 Bp.
ayyéAXo G. ?
GALevo G.
addday dev G.
aQGn G.
dpaptiav eye G., 1 Bp.
auny apny G.
dv (édv) G.? 1 Ep?
dvapdptntos G. (vill. 7)
dvaorao.s coms | G.
| kploews
avOpakia G.
avOpwrroxrovos G., 1 Bp.
avrixptoros 1 bp., 2 bp.
avThé@ G.
dytAnpa G.
dmexpiOn kal elie G.
dmépxopat eis Ta Origw G.
dmoguvaywyos G-
dp(p)agbos 6.
apxitpixAwvos G.
6 dpyev rod kdopov (rovTov) G.
airépapos G. (viii. 4).
Baiov G.
Baowrloxos G.?
BiBpackw G.
TaBBaéa c.
yeveTn G.
yen Oivar avabev G., €k (Tov)
Geod G. 1 Bp.y €k (Tod) mvev-
waros G.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
yepov G.
yAwoodkopoy G.
Saxpio G.
deudw G.
Onmore G.? (v. 4)
dialovvia G.
didvpos G.
eykaina G.
eivat €k TOU KOopOoD G., 1 BP.
eivat { ee sey she } G
€k TOV KATO
exvevo
exvew }
evypa G.?
€umdpwov G.
eupuode G.
e&épyeoOa €x (amd, mapa)
Tov Oeod G.
e€vrrvil@ G.
émdpatos G. ?
emevOuTys G.
erdéxouat 3 EP.
erixplo G.
()) €oxdrtn npepa G.
Covvups G. (Acts ?»
Aros G.
Amep G.?
Oeore Bins Ge
Onkn G.
Opeupa G.
iAacpos 1 EP.
xaOaipw G. (Heb. ?)
cataypape G.? (viii. 6).
kéOpos G.?
keupia G.
Képpa G.
KeppatioTns Ge
Kntroupos G-
kiunots G. (Vv. 8)
KANG G
Kolunots G-
KoAvpBnOpa G-
Kopaporepov EXEL Gx
KplOwos G.
NevTiov G.
NLOdaTpwToe Ge
Nitpa G.
oyxn G-
peco@ Ge
Meooias G.
perpntis Ge
plypa Cue
povn G.
vikn 1 Ep.
vurTnp G-
voonua G.? (v. 4)
vioo@ G.
LG) G.
60dmov G. (Lk. ?)
duov G. (Lk.?)
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
évdptov G.
ov«Koop G.
oy aptoy G.
matddpiov G. (Mt.?)
mevOepos G.
mepidéw G. [3 up.
mepurareiv év dAnbcig 2 Br.
mepirareiy ev tH oKoTia (Or
évy T@ oKOreL) G., 1 Le,
mepurareiy cv tT Hort 1 Ep.
qroveiy THY GAnOeLav G., 1 Ep.
TOTEpos G.
mpoBarTixn G-
mpoBarvoy G. ?
mpocattéw G. (Mk.? Lk.?)
MpPOTKYINTHS Ge
mporpaytov G.
mTépva G-
MTVU Ge
pew G.
‘Papaiori Ge
oxédos G-
oxnvorrnyia G.
CvyXpdopus Ge?
Cuppabntis G
ovveroepyopae G.
texviov G., 1 Ep. (Mk.? Gal. ?)
TeTapTaios G.
TeTpapNvos Ge
tidevar Wuxny G., 1 Ep.
tithos G.
tdpia G.
bran now G. (Mt. ?)
tpavtds G.
aves G.
prorparetw 3 Ep.
dvapéw 3 Ep.
payéAduoy G.
xXapal G-
Xaprns 2 Ep.
xeluappos G-
xXo\de G.
xpiopua 1 sp.
apuxny tiOévat, see reGévat vp.
Yopiov G.
Gospel 114 (12 ?)
Epp. 11
Gospel and Epp. 8 (1 ?)
Tora. 133 (18 ?)
6. To Paul.
a. To THE LoNnGER EPISTLES
AND PHILEMON,
N. B. Words peculiar to any
single Epistle are so designated
by the appended abbreviation.
aBapns 2 Co.
dyabactvn
avauos 1 Co.
704
dyavdxtnors 2 Co.
dyevns 1 Co.
dywovvn
dyvdrns 2 Co.
dyves Vhil.
dyptehaos Ro.
dypunvia 2 Co.
dddmavos 1 Co.
adnArws 1 Co.
adwadeintos
ddporns 2 Co.
aa cf. papav a6
adeos Eph.
ddvupéw Col.
aivvypa 1 Co.
aia@noes Phil.
aicxpodoyia Col.
aisypérns Eph.
airidopat Ro.
aixpadwrevo Eph. fr. Sept.
(2 T.?)
akarpéonar Phil.
dkataxaduntos 1 Co.
axov 1 Co.
a\dAnros Ro.
arnbevo
d\Anyopew Gal.
adumos Phil.
dpéuntos 1 Th.
dperakivntos 1 Co.
aperapedntos
dperavonros Ro.
ayerpos 2 Co.
avadddo Phil.
dvakawvow
avaxahimro 2 Co.
dvaxepadada
avakérto@ Gal.?
avadoyia Ro.
dvapévw 1 Th.
dvavedo Eph.
ava&vos 1 Co.
avakiws 1 Co.
dvaroddyntos Ro.
avSpife 1 Co.
dvexduyyntos 2 Co.
dvehennov Ro.
dveEeped(or -pav-)ygros Ro.
dveEtyviarros
dveids Col.
avnke
dvOpa& Ro. fr. Sept.
avOpwamdpeckos
avOpamuvov Néyw Ro.
dvovsts Eph.
avopos Ro.
avoxn Ro.
avravarAnpdw Col,
ayrarddoots Col.
avtidn(p)Yes 1 Co.
avriuobia
dyriorparevoua Ro.
dmahyéw Eph.
dmaddorpi0a
dmapackevaoros 2 Co.
dn(or dd-)eidov Phil.
Greys absum
Gretrrov 2 Co.
amexOvopar Col.
améxdvows Col.
dmedevbepos 1 Co.
aneptondotas 1 Co
am\étns
andbeéus 1 Co.
amoxapadoxia
dmoxatah\\docow
amékpipa 2 Co.
adrophpavifa 1 Th.
droatvyew Ro.
arotive Philem.
drrotroApdw Ro,
amoropia Ro.
arovoia Phil.
dméxpnots Col.
dpa otv
apa Ro.
appaBav
dpecxeia Col.
dppolw 2 Co.
dépraypés Phil.
appnros 2 Co.
dpyirextov 1 Co.
doaive 1 Th. ?
aoéemmpa Bo.
aoopos Eph.
doris Ro.
dotaréw 1 Co.
aovvberos Ro.
acynpovéw 1 Co,
doynpov 1 Co.
araxtéw 2 Th.
araxtos 1 Th.
araktas 2 Th,
Gropos 1 Co.
avyaga 2 Co.?
avOaiperos 2 Co
avdds 1 Co.
avénous
avrdpkns Phil.
agecdia Col.
apn
adixvéonat Ro.
*Ayaixes 1 Co.
dypevd@ Ro. fr. Sept.
&xonotos Philem.
&puxos 1 Co.
BadA Ro. fr. Sept.
Backaivw Gal.
BeAiad or BeAiap 2 Co.
Bédos Eph.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS
BpaBetov
BpaBevto Col.
Bpdxos 1 Co.
BvOds 2 Co.
Taddrns Gal.
yeapycov 1 Co.
yyoias Phil.
yparrés Ro.
yupyntedto 1 Co.
Odkvw Gal.
Aapaoknvos 2 Co.
Sevypari¢o Col. (Mt. %
diaipeots 1 Co.
dvacroAn
didaxrds 1 Co. (Jn. fr. Sept.»
Stepunveta 1 Co. ?
Svepunvevtns 1 Co.?
dtxatoxptoia Ro,
Stxaiwors Ro.
dudvrep 1 Co.
duyooracia
dios 1 Co.
Soyparif{e Col
OoKip7)
dddAtos 2 Co.
doAidw Ro. fr. Sept.
dodow 2 Co.
ddrns 2 Co.
dovdaywyéw 1 Co.
dpaccopa 1 Co.
dvvapdw Col. (Eph.? Heb. %
duvatéw 2 Co. (Ro.?)
dvodnuew 1 Co.?
Svodnpia 2 Co.
Swpodpopia Ro.?
éyypape 2 Co. (Lk. ?)
eyytrepov Ro.
éyxavydona 2 Th. ?
eyxevtpifa Ro.
éyxomn (or ékk-, or éve-) 1 Ca
éykparevopas 1 Ca
éykpiva 2 Co.
€dpatos
€dcdoOpnoxeia Cob.
€Ovapxns 2 Co
eOuxds Gal.”
eidwdetov 1 Co.
eixn, -Ky (Mt. ?)
eiko Gal.
eihexpiveva (or -via)
eipnvorrotew Col.
eiadéxopa 2 Co.
éxatovraetns Ro.
exSatravaw 2 Co.
éxOnuéw 2 Co.
€xdixos
éxdvoxo 1 Th. (Lk.?)
éxxaio Ro.
| exxAdw Ro.
' éxkdei@
=—— = -
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
éxxomr7} cf. éyxony
éxun po 1 Co.
éxovcos Philem.
éxrerdvyvype Ro. fr. Sept.
éxrtvo Gal.
éxtpépo Eph.
éxrpopa 1 Co.
éexpoBéw 2 Co.
é€x@v
eAarrovew 2 Co. fr. Sept.
€\adpia 2 Co.
€Xaxtorérepos Eph.
€\doyd@ or -yéw
éuBarevo Col.
éurepuraréw 2 Co. fr. Sept.
€vdpxopat
evdevrypa 2 Th.
evberEes
evdnuew 2 Co.
évdokd(@ 2 Th.
evepyera
évépynua 1 Co.
evo Ch. éyxom}
evopkitw 1 Th.?
évorns Eph.
évtpom 1 Co.
evtuTrow 2 Co.
eEayopalo
eéaipw 1 Co.? and fr. Sept.
e€avdoraots Phil.
ééaratdw (1 Tim. ?)
éarropéw 2 Co.
eEeyeipa
é€nxéo 1 Th.
e&iaxvo Eph.
éopratw 1 Co.
emaxova 2 Co. fr. Sept.
éravanipynoke Ro.
éreinep Ro. ?
érexteivo Phil.
erevova 2 Co.
émiBapew
émdiatdcoopa Gal.
émidv@ Eph.
émOavartos 1 Co.
értOupnrns 1 Co.
émixadirrt@ Ro. fr. Sept.
éntxarapatos Gal. fr. Sept.
(Jn. ?)
érundOnots 2 Co.
émurd@nros Phil.
énurobia Ro.
émioxnvow 2 Co.
émotmaw 1 Co.
éniriuia 2 Co.
enupavorw Eph.
émtxopnyta
érrovopatw Ro.
éxraxioyirsot Ro.
épebita 2 Co. (Col.?)
Eppnveta 1 Co.
€punveutns 1 Co.?
ti épodpev Ro.
érepoyAwooos 1 Co,
érepotuyew 2 Co.
érépws Phil.
érotzacia Eph.
edvora Eph. (1 Co. %)
evmapedpos ha Ca:
edrpoaedpos
evrpooanéw Gal.
evonpos 1 Co.
evoxXnLoves
evoxnuoourn 1 Co.
evtparehia Eph.
evpnpia 2 Co.
evpnuos Phil.
evxapioros Col.
evrvyéo Phil.
evodia
épevperns Ro.
edixveouat 2 Co.
6 iyamnpévos (of Christ)
Eph.
7} ayvoeire Ro.
7Otora 2 Co.
#Oos 1 Co. fr. Menander
qvixa 2 Co.
#rot Ro.
TT
WIT@Y OF joT@v
nxew 1 Co. (Lk. ?)
Gevdtns Ro.
bédo év Col.
Geodidaxros 1 Th.
Geoarvyns Ro.
Gedrns Col.
Onpa Ro.
Onptopayéw 1 Co.
Ourros
oprap Beto
Oupeds Eph.
tapa 1 Co.
icpdburos 1 Co.?
icpoovdéw Ro.
icpoupyéo Ro.
ixavorns 2 Co.
ixavow
idapds 2 Co.
itapdérns Ro.
ivecpopat (? cf. dueipopac)
iva (‘where’)?
Tovdaitw Gal.
"lovdaixas Gal.
"Iovdaiopds Gal.
iadrns
iodwrvxos Phil.
icropéw Gal.
kabaipeois 2 Cow
cad (1 Pet.?)
705
cabopaw Ro.
kawvérns Ro.
kaxonOeva Ro.
kahapn 1 Co.
kaddueAavos Ro,
kadorrovew 2 Th.
Kddvppa 2 Co.
Kdpnto@
kavov
kamndedw 2 Co.
xataBapew 2 Co.
xaraBpaBevw Col.
katadovAd@
karaxahunta 1 Co.
xaraxpiya Ro.
kardxptois 2 Co.
katdAanos Ro.
katrddeyupa Ro. ?
karadhayn
kata\hacow
katavapxde 2 Co.
xardvvéts Ro. fr. Sept.
katdprisis 2 Co.
kataptiopos Eph.
katackoréw Gal.
karaotpavrvyu 1 Co
katatoun Phil.
xatavyd¢eo 2 Co.?
kataxOdmos Phil.
kataxpdopnat 1 Co.
katontpiCopar 2 Co.
kat@tepos Eph.
KeAevopa 1 Th.
kevodoéia Phil.
cevddoéos Gal.
kevom
knudw 1 Co.?
kivduvos
kAnpéw Eph.
kKNipa
kAvdovitona Eph.
ko\akeia 1 Th.
Kowaw 1 Co.
Kopn 1 Co.
koopoxparap Eph.
Kpéas
xpi, -p7 Eph.
xuBeia Eph.
kuBépynots 1 Co.
xupBarov 1 Co.
kupsaxov Seimrvor 1 Co.
KUpo@
Aaodixeds Col. (Rev. ?)
Adpuyé Ro.
Aejupa Ro.
AAs Phil.
Aoyia 1 Co.
Aoytopds
AoiSopos 1 Co.
Avous 1 Co.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS,
paxapiopss
pakedXov 1 Co.
paxpoxpéuos Eph.
papav a64 (papavabd) 1 Co.
pataiow Ro.
peyddos Phil.
péyebos Eph. . |
peOodeia Eph.
pébvoos 1 Co.
peodrotxov Eph.
petaxivéw Col.
peta\Adcoe Ro.
peraoxnpari¢e
peroxn 2 Co.
ireye (uitre ye, pip Te ye) U
c0)
porvopds 2 Co.
poppy Col.
popdéa Gal.
p6x Gos
pvew Phil.
pouxrnpife Gal.
popdopa 2 Ca.
peopia 1 Co.
popodoyia Eph,
vexpaots
vn 1 Co.
unmiato 1 Co.
vonpa
vonobecia Ro.
voupnvia Col.
vuxOnpepov 2 Co.
veros Ro. fr. Sept.
oixteipo Ro. fr. Sept.
éxranpepos Phil.
6A€Opios 2 Th.?
OduydWuxos 1 Th.
ddobpeutns 1 Co.
6doreAnjs 1 Th.
6pelpopa: 1 Th.? (cf. imetp.)
opidia 1 Co. fr. Menander
évivnpt Philem.
dparés Col.
dpeéts Ro.
6pborodéw Gal.
doye Ro.
éotws 1 Th.
dodpnacs 1 Co.
opOahpoSoviela
dxvpopa 2 Co.
ma0os
madayayos
maitw 1 Co. fr. Sept.
madaidérns Ro.
may Eph.
mavovpyos 2 Co.
mapaBoAevouat ? | Phil
mapaBovAevopas ?
mapatnis@
TANAKELLAL
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
mapauvdia 1 Co.
mapapvOrov Phil.
mapanAnovov Phil.
mapautixa 2 Co.
mapappovew 2 Co.
mapedpevwo (cf. mpocedp.) 1
Co.?
mapetoaktos Gal.
Taperrepyopae
mapeows Ro.
mapnyopia Col.
mapodos 1 Co.
mapopyiva
tapopycnds Eph.
marpixds Gal.
metOds 1 Co.
(Teva 1 Co.?)
mevopovn Gal.
més 2 Co. fr. Sept.
mevraxis 2 Co.
memotOnots
meptepyatoua 2 Th.
mepixdbappa 1 Co.
meptxeparaia 1 Th. (Eph.
fr. Sept.)
meptdeinw 1 Th.
mepinua 1 Co.
meprrepevonat 1 Co.
mépuat 2 Co.
mOavoroyia Col.
mdtns Ro.
mracpa Ro.
7d mAetorov (adv.) 1 Co.
mA €oveKTEew
m)eovextns
tAnopovn Col.
mAouriva
Troinwa
moNtrevpa Phil.
moAvroixtios Eph.
mperBevo
mpoatpéw 2 Co.
mpoariaopnat Ro.
tmpoaxovew Col.
mpoapaptrave 2 Co,
mpoyivonat Ro,
mpodidope Ro.
mpoeArrifo Kph.
mpoevapyopnat 2 Co.
mpoerayyeAdkw Ro, (2 Co. ?)
Tpoeroruace
mpoevayyedcCopat Gal.
mpoex@ Ro.
wponyeoua Ro.
mpobeoptos Gal.
mpoxadréw Gal.
mpoxaraptifw 2 Co.
mpoxupd Gal.
mpoeye
mponacye 1 Th.
706
mporarap Ro. ?
mporaywyn
mpocavarAnpda 2 Co.
mpocavatiOnus Gal.
mposedpevo (cf. mapedp.) 1
Co.?
mpoonddw Col.
mpoxaptéepnots Eph.
mpookorn 2 Co.
mpdaArn(p)Yus Ro.
mpooopeiAw Philem.
mpooraris Ro.
mpoogudns Phil.
mporiOnut
mpoteva Col.
mtmva (rd) 1 Co.
mrvpo Phil.
mrTwxevo 2 Co.
muktevo 1 Co.
prow
puny ? } 1 Co.
porn ?
puris Eph.
caivecOa 1 Th.?
capyayn 2 Co.
carav (not -vas) 2 Co.?
oeBagopar Ro.
onpevow 2 Th.
oxjvos 2 Co.
okAnporns Ro.
oxodoy 2 Co.
oxords Phil.
oxvBarov Phil.
SkvOns Col.
orovdaios 2 Co. (2 T.?)
oreyw
oTe\w
orevoyapéw 2 Co.
orevoywpia
orepéwpa Col.
oriypa Gal.
ovyyvopun 1 Co.
avykxabifo Eph. (Lk.?)
ovykdunto Ro. fr. Sept.
ovykatdbects 2 Co.
ovyKpive
aov(ntntns 1 Co.
avgvyos Phil.
oulworrorew
ovAraywyéw Col.
avAdw 2 Co.
avpBouros Ro. fr. Sept.
ouppaprupéw Ro. (Rev. ?)
ouppepifa 1 Co.
oupperoxos Eph.
ovupptnrns Phil.
cuppoppitw Phil. ?
ovppoppos
ouppoppow Phil. ?
ovurapaxarew Ro.
ovprrapapevw Phil.?
Oupracx@
cupréprw 2 Co.
ovprodirns Eph.
ovppnut Ro.
avppopov, 76, 1 Co.?
ovppurerns 1 Th.
oupduros Ro.
ovppaovnats 2 Co.
avppwvos 1 Co.
cipwvxos Phil.
cuvayavifopa Ro.
ovvabdé Phil.
Ovvatypad@ros
ovvavapiyvupe
cuvavaravopa Ro.?
ovvarroaréAAw 2 Co.
cuvapporoyew Eph.
ovvdoéatw Ro.
ouveyeipo
ovrndopat Ro.
ourmArtkiatys Gal.
ouvbantrea
cvvotxodopew Eph.
ouvréuve Ro. fr. Sept.
ovvtrpipa Ro. fr. Sept.
ouvurokpivonat Gal.
ouvuTroupyew 2 Co.
cuvodive Ro.
otvoowpos Eph.
ovorarixes 2 Co.
ovotevatw Ro.
ovorotxew Gal,
OvoTpat.atns
oxnpa
copatixas Col,
taypa 1 Co.
Taxa
tive 2 Th.
ToAunporepoy or -répws Ro.
Tpaxnrov wrorievae Ro.
tpopes 1 Th.
tumuas 1 Co.?
ei TUxot, Tvxdv, 1 Co.
viobecia
Dpvos
Umavdpos Ro.
bmepaipw
brépaxpos 1 Co.
tmepavéava 2 Th.
trepBaive 1 Th.
brepBadddvrws 2 Co.
hmepBadrA@
trepBorn
brepeyo 2 Co. .
trrepexewa 2 Co.
Drrepexmepiraov
brepexrreptocas 1 Th.?
tmrepexreiva 2 Co.
tmepevtuyydve Ro.
InpIVIDUAL
imepriav 2 Co.
tmepvixdw Ro.
Umeprepiowevo
irepuow Phil.
umepppovew Ro.
trodtkos Ro.
troddequpa Ro. ?
trodeira Ro.
tromdta 1 Co.?
dopa
davéepwois
pedopevas 2 Co. :
pboyyos 1 Co. (Ro. fr. Sept.)
pbovew Gal.
@ikurmnotos Phil.
diroverkos 1 Co.
drocogia Col.
girccropyos Ro.
rroripeopat
dpevarataw Gal.
pny 1 Co.
dpovnpa Ro.
Pupapa
duowww
gvoiwots 2 Co.
doticpos 2 Co.
xetpoypagpoy Col,
xoikos 1 Co.
xpnuaticpos Ro.
xpos Ro.
xpnotevopa 1 Co.
xpnotodoyia Ro.
WevdadeAgos
Wevdardorodos 2 Co.
Wedoua Ro.
Wbupicpos 2 Co.
Ybupiotns Ro.
Yopivo
@otrepel 1 Co.
Ro. 113 (13 fr. Sept., 6 2)
1 Co. 110 (2 fr. Sept., 12 2)
2 Co. 99 (4 fr. Sept., 4 ?)
Gal. 34 (1 fr. Sept., 1?)
Eph. 43 (1 fr. Sept.)
Phil. 41 (4?)
Col. 38
1 Thess. 23 ( 5?)
2 Thess. 11 (2 ?)
Philem. 5.
Common to two or more Epis-
tles 110.
Tora 627 (21 fr. Sept., 34 ?)
6. To THE PASTORAL
EPISTLES.
N. B. Words peculiar to some
single Epistle of the three are
so designated.
dyaboepyew 1 T.
avveia 1 T.
WRITERS.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
ayoyn 2 T.
adndorms 1 T.
adiapopia Tit.? (cf. dpbo-
pla
ab\éo 2 T.
aides 1 T. (Heb. ?)
aipertkos Tit.
aicxpoxepdns
aixyahorevo 2 T.? (Eph.
fr. Sept.)
axaipas 2 T.
dkxarayveores Tit.
axpatns 2 T.
‘adds 1 T.
dpaxos
auoBn 1 T.
avalomupew 2 T.
avddvors 2 T.
avavrnpa 2 T.
dvatpéra
avawixo 2 T.
aySparodiocrns 1 T.
avdpspovos 1 T.
aveEixaxos 2 T.
averraicxuvtos 2 T.
averriAnnros 1 T.
avnuepos 2 T.
dvoatos
avridiariOns 2 Te
avrideots 1 T.
4vrinutpoy 1'T.
draidevtos 2 ET.
arépavros 1 T.
aroBarnros 1 T.
arodexros 1 T.
arodoyn 1 T.
drobnoaupifo 1 T.
drorpénw 2 T.
ampoctros 1 T.
dprios 2 T.
damovdos 2 T. (Ro. ?)
daToxéw
avdevréw 1 T.
avroxardkpitos Tit.
apbopia Tit.? (cf. ddiapdo-
pia)
aprdyabos 2 T.
avevdns Tit.
BaOpds 1 T.
Bacwreds tov alovew 1 T.
Bdedukros Tit.
BeAriov 2 T.
BdaBepos 1 T.
yayypava 2 T.
yeveadoyia
yons 2 T.
(ra) iepa ypdppara 2 T.
ypawdns 1 T.
yeuvacia 1 T.
yevatkdproy 2 T.
107
Seria 2 T.
dtaBeBardopat
didBodos (as adj.)
Suayo
Scarraparpi87 1 T.? (cf. wapa-
Scarp137)
dcatpogpy 1 T.
Stdaxrixds
SAoyos 1 T.
Staxrns 1 T.
eykpatns Tit.
édpaiwpa 1 T.
éxyova (ra) 1 T.
€kdnros 2 T.
éex(ytnots 1 T.?
exdextol ayyeAot 1 T.
éxotpeda Tit.
€Aarrov (adv.) 1 T.
edeypos 2 T.?
7) pakapia eAmis Tit.
evdvve intrans. 2 T.
evrevéis 1 T.
évtpepo 1 T.
émavopOacts 2 T.
émapkew 1 T.
émdtopbow Tit.
émiopxos 1 T.
énurAnooo 1 T.
émiotopica Tit.
éemicwpevo 2 T.
érepodidackakéw 1 a.
evperadotos 1 T.
evoeBas
qpepos 1 T.
Oedrrvevoros 2 T.
deoc Bea 1 T.
icporpenns Tit.
*Iovdaikos Tit.
kadodiddokados Tit.
katahéyw 1 T.
karaotnua Tit.
kataoToAn 1 T.
katractpnudae 1 T.
karaotpopn 2 T. (2 Pet.?)
katapbeipo 2 T. (2 Pet.?)
katnyopia (Lk. and Jn. ?)
kavotnpiateo ? } 1T.
kautnpiagea ?
kevopavia
KnOw 2 a
kotvovtxos 1 T.
kooptos 1 T.
kocpiws 1 T.?
hoyopaxyew 2 T.
Aoyouayia 1 T.
Aoyos byins Tit.
pappn
paraodoyia 1 T.
paraoddyos Tit.
pepBpava 2 T.
peradn(p)Yus 1 T.
pnderore 2 T.
Entpadgas? } iT
pntpodeas? :
pntpérods 1 T.
povow 1 T.
veopuros 1 'T.
vearepixos 2 T.
mpadeos
vopipas
vooewm 1 T.
Eevodoyéo 1 T.
oikodeomorew 1 T.
otkodopia 1 T.?
olxoupyos? } Tit.
oixoupos ?
7) Kad} Opodoyia 1 T.
dporoyoupevas 1 T.
épyiios Tit.
opboropéw 2 T.
mapadcatpiBn 1 T.? (cf. dta-
mapar ptf)
mapaOnkn 2 T. (1 T.?)
mapaxarayky 2 T. (1 T.?)
mapo.vos
Tratpadeas ? } iT
matpoh@as ? .
mreptictrac ba (“to avoid ””)
meptovowos Tit.
mepireipw 1 T.
mepippovew Tit.
motos 6 doyos (cf. Rev. xxi.
5 etc.)
motow 2 T.
mréeypa 1 T.
mAnKTNS
ropicpos 1 T.
mpayyareta 2 T.
mpaimdbeva (-Aia) 1 T.?
mpesBiris Tit.
mpoyovos
mpoxpia 1 T.
mpdoKdnyous? } 1T.
mpookAtors ?
mpopytns (of a poet) Tit.
pyres 1 T.
oepvorns
oxéracpa 1 T.
orepavda 2 T. (Heb. fr.
Sept.)
oropaxos 1 T.
orparodoyew 2 T’.
orvyntos Tit.
ovykaxorrabéw 2 T.
cate eis tiv Bacwdelav xrh.
DN
cwrtnpwos (as adj.) Tit.
[Mk. ?) | cadporito Tit.
pererdol T. (Acts fr. Sept.,! capponouds 2 T.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS,
coppdves Tit.
oadpev
TEKVOYovEw
rexvoyovia 1 T.
texvorpopew 1 T.
Tupow
tyiaive metaph. (79 dydmn,
miotet, bropov7, etc.)
bdSpororéw 1 T.
imepmAcovatw 1 T.
trovota 1 T.
tmoriuTaais
athovns ?
spate } 2 T. (cf. IIL 1)
grdyabos Tit.
pirardpos Tit.
rapyupia 1 T.
didavtos 2 T.
prndovos 2 T.
ircbeos 2 T.
urcrexvos Tit.
dvapos 1 T.
hpevanarns Tit.
dpovrifw Tit.
xarkevs 2 T.
xapts, eos, eipnyy dwd 0.
(as a salutation)
xpnousos 2 T.
Wevdoroyos 1 T.
Wevdarupos 1 T.
apedtpos
1 Tim. 82 (6°)
2 Tim. 53 (22)
Tit. 33 (22)
ToTAL 168 (10 ?)
e. Boru To THE PASTORAL
AND THE OTHER PAULINE
EPISTLES.
adudderrros
> a,
adavacia
aicxpos
aixparoredw?
aXalov
> ,
dioaw
dvakaivoots
dveyk\nros
arroropes
apoevoxoirns
dorovdos ?
doropyos
aruuia
avrapKew
adpéapcia
> UA
apoppy
(A
yunovos
exxabatpeo
eVOLKE®
éfamarae?
IypIVIDUAL WRITERS.
émitayn
émupavera
epus
evxpnoros
mos ?
iepos (Mk. 2)
xepdos
Aourpoy
pela
poppocts
vavaye®
vovecia
6d0vn
oiketos
oikew
ddeOpos
éorpaxwvos
TAdTOw
mpolornus
TpoKomr
Tpovoew
oeuvos
onevOo
orpareta?
ov(do
ovupBaciredo
TopEvM
bBpworrns
brepoxn
tmorayn
broriOnus
tWnrodpovew #
xpnororns
Tota. 58 (6 2)
%. To the Epistle to the
Hebrews.
dyeveahoynros
dytorns (2 Co.?)
ayvonpa
aernots
aOAnoes
aiyewos
aiparexxuotes
aiveots
aio Onrnpow
airtos (6)
axardAvutos
akhuins
axpoOinow
advotreAns
dperabetos
apunrep
avaxawiCos
avahoyiCouas
dvapiOpnros
avacraupd@
avrayovitouu
avrixabiornp
arrapaBaros
ararep
anavyac pa
drreipos
aroBier@
dréorodos of Christ
dppos
agpavns
apanopos
dpopowde
adpopaw
BonOos fr. Sept.
Bois ? fr. Sept.
Borayn
yeveahoyew
yeopyew
yvoos
Sapadts
dexarn
dexaTow
déos ?
déppa
Snproupyos
Onmov
dudraypa ?
Siahopwtepos
Suqvekns
Stixvéopar
SudpOacrs
Soxtpacia ?
Suceppnvevtos
eavmrep
(7) €B56pu9
eyyvos
eyxaviC@
ei pnp ?
éxBaive?
éxdoxn
exNavOaveo
exrpopos? —
édeyxos (2 Tim. ?)
eumavy}10$
evuBpiCo
e&us
emevoaywyn
emAelTr@
émuoxorew (1 Pet. 7}
€mros
evapertéw
evapeaTas
evdurns fr. Sept.
evAaBeva
evAaBéopuae (Acts?)
evmrepioraros
evmotia
4h pny? (cf. ef pj)
dearpiCa
déednows
OeweAtoy KaraBadrXAouat
708
Oeparrav
Ovedra
Oupuarnpvoy
icpwotvn
ikernptos
kabaporns
kairot (Lk. ?)
KaKovxXe@
Kaptepew
Kataywvi Comat
katadnAos
karavarioxw
KatacKiat@
KaTaoKoTros
xararo€eva? fr. Sept.
kavows
cepaAts fr. Sept.
conn fr. Sept.
KpiriKos
kodor fr. Sept.
RecroupytKos
AeviriKxos
pepio pos
peoirev@
perabeots
poereretra
petptorrabéw
pndéra
pnharn
po barrodocta
pc OarroAdrns
pvedos
vepos
vobos
vopwoberéw
voOpos
dykos
7) ockoupern 9 peAXovTA
ddtyopéw fr. Sept.
ddobpeva, drcOpevo
dpovoTns
6 dverducpos ToD Xpiorod
6pkopocia
Taviyyupts
mrapaderypariceo (Mt. ?)
Tapamtkpatve
naparixpacpos fr. Sept.
maparinre
maparAnoios
Tapappew
mapinut (Lk. ?)
mapotxew (Lk. ?)
meipa
Tiyyvupe
ToAvpEpOs
ToAUTPOTOS
mpiCo (mpiw)
mpoBr€re
Tpodpopmos
mpowayopev@
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
mpoooxbitw fr. Sept.
mpoaparos
mpoaxvats
TpwroroKia
pavritw (Mk.? Rev.?)
oaSBatio pos
6 oxoros ?
orapvos
ovyKakovxéew
ovupmabew
ouvarrodAupe
avvdew
CuveTtpapTupEew
TeAEL@TNS
Tiopia
TOP@TEPOS
Tpayos
Tpaxnr\C@
Tplipnvos
Tpoxia fr. Sept.
TuptraviCa
imetko
bmooroAn
davrave
poBepos
xapakrip
XepouBip, -Beiv
Tora 169 (12 fr. Sept., 11 2)
8. To James.
A
aye
%. ,
advaxpttos
axatdoratos
dxataoxertos ?
< ‘
GXvuKos
ap.aw
avéXeos ?
> Ld
avepivo
dvirews ?
ameipaotos
zee
amos
amroKvew@
aTrookiaopa
amroTeAew (Lk. Fda)
> / ?
avxew
aduorepew ?
Bon
-
Bpve
yedes
Satpovrmdys
divuxos
EIKO
euros
> re
evaA.os
TINO)
éouxa (see EIKQ)
emAnopovn
emloTnpav
émiTndetos
InpivipuaL WRIiTERs.
709 INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
6 evOivov dt
pi aie a 1 Kakorrotds 1 (In. ?) WevdodidaoKados 2
bare O, decpos 2 katakdule@ 2 @ptopa 1
edmpemeta alo xpoxepdas 1 kavodw 2 1 Epistle 63 (1 fr. Sept., 2 2)
€pucpos axararactos ? } Kéos 1 2 Epistle 57 (5 2), tt
aa Seog! kparatos 1 Common to Both 1
pnoKos GXorpt(o)erioxomos 1 ktiorns 1 Torat 121,
iés (Ro. fr. Sept.) Doors 2 KUAto pa ?
raxoTrabeva apaéns 2 kuAuopds ? }
Ul > ,
Karnpeva dpapavrivos 1 ANén 2 10. To Jude.
imo ad ; aiepavros al ; peyadompenns 2 ee Pa
rarouxifa Guopnros 2 (Phil. ?) placpa 2 erent gee pees
Kevis eee ere mp0 mavrds Tov aiévos
Papaya dvayxaotas 1 pynun 2 drrodtopita
peyahavxea? avalavvupe 1 puwndta 2 drrauoros
paeye dvaxvors 1 porowy 1 fr. Sept. ne a
perarpeme ? avexdadAntos 1 pdpos 2 deiypa ;
vopoberns dytidowWopew 1 oivopAvyia 1 ekTOpvEevce
é é f ‘ ya > ,
ddorvite CREA Bdlyes ? 2 évurmato (Lk. fr. Sept.)
dpoiwors fr. Sept.
> ,
amdGeots
Opixrn ? 2
efedeyyo ?
dynos dmovépw 1 beeen emayovifopat
mapa\hayy dropevya 2 émAi¢eo 1 secre
amKpos drpocwmod(u)rres 1 meparitea® HEprpipoipos
moia? apyew 2 napapporia 2 dricw capkds
moinots dpreyevynros 1 mapecoayw 2 ag pees
, > 1 eee Aavnrns
modvoTrAayKVvos apxeroiunv 1 mapevapepw 2 brnials BY) f
mpoowmoAn (pw) arée dornpikros 2 maTpomrapadoros 1 ee Bavpageo
mpa(or-d-)ipos avxpnpos 2 mepiects 1 Ho?
pirifa Buda 1 mwAaoros 2 ae. ,
e p , ; Poworepivds
pumapla Bréupa 2 qroros 1 Vs
pumapés (Rev. ?) BopBopos 2 mpobipos 1 puotkds
onre Bpadurns 2 TpopapTupouas 1 Tora 20 ql ?)
ontoBpatos yvvatketos 1 mronous 1
Takaurapew diavyat@ 2 porgndov 2
tadatwpia (Ro. fr. Sept.) | dvovdnros 2 pvros 1 SCION SL
Taxus éyxarouke@ 2 cepa ? eu RAL too
Tpomn éykouPdopat 1 cetpos ? |2 *ABadddv
Tpoxds éxdorore 2 oupos ? aixuakoola (Eph. fr. Sept.)
tpupaw éxmadut 2 abevow 4 dxaddprns
BAN éxrerms 1 (Lk. ?) smropa 1 dkpato
guria éxrevas 1 (Lk. ?) ornprypos 2 dxparos fr. Sept.
proyite eheykis 2 oTpeBrsw 2 G@AXAnAovia
hpicce epmavypovy 2 ouprabns 1 ada (see 75 A kat rd Q)
xahwaywyéw épmdokn 1 oupmpeoBurepos 1 dpébvoros
xen évdvors 1 avvechexros 1 6 apny
xpvoodaxrvhuos évtpupdaw 2 ovvoikew 1 duopov ?
Tora 73 (1 fr. Sept., 9?) eEayyé\Aw 1 (Mk. ? ?) rarewoppov 1? ava eis exaaTos
e€axohovdew 2 Taptapow 2 Amol vov
e&€papa 2 Taxwvos 2 dpkos or Gpxtos
é€epavvdw ? Tedelws 1 “Appayedav etc.
9. To Peter. aeeie. } . Teppow 2 ayw6os
emayyeApa 2 TKo 2 BddXew oxdvdadov évemow
N. B. Words peculiar to one | epeparnpa 1 towadbe 2 Bacanopes
Epistle or the other are so| , 3 , 5
marked by the numeral which emtxaduppa 1 ToApyTns 2 Barpaxos
follows them; words unmarked | ezri\ouros 1 bmoypappos 1 Bnpvddos
are common to both. trotuyiov 2 (Mt. fr. Sept.) | 8i8rapidiov
émidvots 2
emipaptupew 1 bmodtpmdve 1 BuBrtSdptov 2
dyaboroiia 1 éemonteva 1 Bs 2 Borpus
ayaborotds 1 emontns 2 rradeAgos 1 Bvaowos
adehpérns 1 feparevya 1 propper 1 ? 7d Sdxpvov ?
adixws 1 igoryos 2 dacdopos 2 7o Sێxaroy as subst.
INDIVIDUAL WRITERS.
diadnpa
duavyns ?
duapavns ?
Surddo
Siopuptas 2
dpaxav
dwd€exaros
€yx plo
cikicow ?
eepartivos
‘EAAnuixds (Lk. ?)
epew
eupere@ ?
evOopnats (évdapnors)
/ €Eaxdcvot
’Edecivos ?
revo?
Evrov rhs Cons fr. Sept.,
(ons mnyat tddrov? fr.
Sept., (7d) vdwp “rijs)
Cons fr. Sept.
Ceards
uLa@ptov (Hyiwpov)
6 ny
6 Oavaros 6 Sevrepos
Gaipa (2 Co. ?)
Guia (wéya) Oavpagew
Gevwdns :
Ocoddyos ?
. Ovivos
taomes
immexds
ipts
xarabepa F
piesa } HSS
xaraoppayila
KaTnyop ?
kavpa
kepapixds fr. Sept.
kepavyupe
xiOapwdds
ku (v) dp@p.ov
kA€upa
KoAAovptov (KoAAvpLov)
KptOn
Kpvotarnrigo
KpvoTadXos
KuKNEv@ ?
KukAdev
fy Kuptak 7)pépa
AevkoBvaawvov?
AtBavards
Nivov ? (Mt. fr. Sept.)
Aurapos
patos? }
pacdds ?
pdppapos
pac(o)dopas
pecovpaynpa
pér@rov
npds
povotkds
puKdopae
poduwos?
vedpos fr. Sept.
NuxoAairns
ddvvbos
Optdos ?
mov éxet (Hebr. OW TWN)
ér@pa
dpaots (Lk. fr. Sept.)
dpynua
dpveov
7) ovat
ovai w. ace. of pers.?
ovpa
710
mapoants
meeKiC@
TE LTTOS
meptp(p)aiva ?
(merdopat) méTopat
TANTT@
mArvvo (Lk. ?)
moonpns
novos (Col. ?)
morapnopopntos
mpwivos etc.
6 mparos k. 6 €axaros
mupwes
muppos
éBy (fea)
purraiva ?
purrapevopat?
pumdw ?
caAmorns
oametpos
oadpdivos ?
odpo.ov ?
capoidvue ?
capdovvé ? }
oepidarts
onpixds (orpexds)
oidnpos
oxorow (Eph. ?)
opapaydivos
opapaybos
Spvpvaios ?
OTpnvid@
oTpnvos
oa@para slaves
taaytiatos
Tecoapaxovradvo?
Tecoapakovtatéaoapes ?
TETPayavos
INDIVIDUAL WBITERS.
TUyLLOTHS
ToEov
romactov
Tpixwos
taxivOwos
vaxwOos
tddwos
vados
appakevs?
appakov?
cappakés
eddy
xarala
xaAkeos
xadknoav
xadkonriBavow
xAcapés
xoinE
xpuadAOos
xXpvaompacos
xpvdow
To Q (see Td A kal Td Q)
ToraL 156 (7 fr. Sept., 33 ?}
12. To the Apocalypse and
the Fourth Gospel.
Bpovry (cf. MK. iii. 17)
d€xatos
‘EBpaiott
EKKEVTE®
KukAev@ ?
ois
mop Pupovs
oKnvow
going
Tota 9 (1 2)
V.
FORMS OF VERBS.
The List which follows is not intended to be a mere museum of grammatical curiosities on the one hand, or a catalogue of all the
verbal forms occurring in the Greek Testament on the other ; butit is a collection of those forms (or their Foe ranctsevoay which ma:
possibly occasion a beginner some perplexity. The practical end, accordingly, for which the list has been prepared has ameihate
generous liberty as respects admission to it. Yet the following classes of forms have been for the most part excluded: forms which a:
traceable by means of the cross references given in the body of the Lexicon, or which hold so isolated a position in its alphabet that so
a tyro can hardly miss them; forms easily recognizable as compounded, in case the simple form has been noted; forms readily Sn
able by the analogy of some form which is given.
Ordinarily it has been deemed sufficient to give the representative form of a tense, viz., the First Person (or in the case of the Imperay
tive the Second Person) Singular, the Nominative Singular Masculine of a Participle, etc.; but when some other form seemed likely tg
prove more embarrassing, or was the only one found in the New Testament, it has often been the form selected.
The word “ of”’ in the descriptions introduces not necessarily the stem from which a given form comes, but the entry in the Lexicon
under which the form will be found. The epithet “ Alex.”, it is hardly necessary to add, has been employed only for convenience and in
its technical sense.
Gydyere, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ayo.
dydyy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dye.
dyvieOnr, 1 aor. pass. impv. of déyvitw.
atcOwvrat, 2 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. of aicOavopas.
airetrw, pres. impv. 3 pers. sing. of airéw.
axfkoa, 2 pf. act. of drove.
GdAayhoropat, 2 fut. pass. of d\Adcoo.
a@Adéat, 1 aor. act. inf. of ddd\acco.
ADAdéa, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of ddAacow.
duaptioy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of éyaprdne.
éunordyrev, 1 aor. act. ptep. gen. plur. of dude.
évéBa and dvéBnr, 2 aor. act. impv. of dvaBaive.
avaBéBnxa, pf. act. of dvaBaive.
dvayayety, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvdyo.
dvayvots, 2 aor. act. ptcep. of avaywacke.
dvayvavar, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvaywacko.
éyayvecty, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dvrywoore.
évaxextAirrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dvaxuAlo.
évadot, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. sing. of dvahioxe.
évahwbfre, 1 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. plur. of dvaAioxe.
dvapvijow, fut. act. of dvapipynoKe.
évarafcopat, fut. mid. of dvaratw (cf. also rave, init.).
évarecrat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of dvaninto.
ovdrece, dydrrecov, 2 and 1 aor. act. impv. of dvarinra.
évaora and dvéern%, 2 aor. act. impv. of dvicrnme.
évarebpappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of dvarpépo.
évare(hy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dvarédXa.
avaréradxev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of avaréAAo.
évapdvayres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of dvagaive.
évadavévtes, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. of dvadaive.
évaxévres, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of avdya.
dvdbavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of avanto.
dvéyvore, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of dvayworke.
dveOéAere, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of dvabdAAw.
évAéuny, 2 aor. mid. of dvariOnps
dyvé@n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of avinus.
dveOpéaro, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of dvarpéepa.
dvet\ero (-aro, Alex.), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers, sing. of dvatpéw.
dvetdov (-are, -av, Alex.), 2 aor. act. of dvatpéw.
dvexopny, impf. mid. of dvéxa.
avedci, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of dvatpéw.
Gyedciv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvatpée.
dyéhwot, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of dvapéw.
dyevéykat, -kas, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of avapépa.
dveveyxeiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvapépe.
dvévres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of dvinut
dvéfopar, fut. mid. of dvéyo.
avémrecrov (-cav, Alex.), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dvarinta.
dvéreoa, 1 aor. act. of dvaceio.
éverroidnpev, 2 aor. pass. 1 pers. plur. of dvaorpépe.
dverxopny, 2 aor. mid. of avéeya.
dvérada, 1 aor. act. of dvareddo.
&verpddn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dvarpépa.
&veSpov (-av, Alex.), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dvevpicxm
dvéwya, 2 pf. act. of dvolyo.
dvewypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of dvolye.
dvewyéra, 2 pf. act. ptep. acc. sing. masc. of dvoiye.
évéwta, 1 aor. act. of dvotye.
dvewxPAvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of dvotye.
dvfyayov, 2 aor. act. of dvayo.
évfyyetda, 1 aor. act. of dvayyéAXo.
évnyyeAny, 2 aor. pass. of dvayyéAha.
dvfveyxev, 1 or 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dvadépa.
dvypeOnv, 1 aor. pass. of dvatpéw.
&vfihen, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of avdrre.
dvhxOnv, 1 aor. pass. of avdye.
évOéferas, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of avréya.
év0érrnxe, pf. ind. act. 3 pers. sing. of avOiornus
évOlerayrat, pres. mid. 3 pers. plur. of dvOiornus
dvOloraro, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of dvOiotpuse
forms or VERBS.
dvévres, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of dvinus.
dvoryhoerot, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of d dvotye.
avoryaotv, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. “blur, of dvolyo.
dvottat, 1 aor. act. inf. of dvolye.
évolfq, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dvotyw.
dvortov, 1 aor. act. impv. of dvolye.
dvolow, fut. act. of dvapéepa.
dvorxOhoerat, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of avolyw.
évoix0dorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of dvotyw.
dvraroSotvat, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvramodidopme.-
évramosécw, fut. act. of dvrarodidape.
ayvréoryy, 2 aor. act. of dvOiornut.
dytirrivot, 2 aor. act. inf. of dvOicrnm.
dvtloryre, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of dvOiornps.
év6, 2 aor. act. subj. of dvinut.
darodAdEy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dra\Adooo.
dmap0q, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of draipw.
dmapvyncdc0w, 1 aor. mid. impv. 3 pers. sing. of drapyéopat.
drapvioy, fut. 2 pers. sing. of dmapvéopat.
dratdrw, pres. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of drarda.
drarniecica, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of dmarde.
GréBnoay, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of droBaive.
GaréSekev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dmodeixvups.
aréSero, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of drodidape.
dreS(Socav, drediSovv, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of drodiSaue.
améSoro, -SoaGe, etc., 2 aor. mid. of arodidopt.
dréSaxev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of drodidopt.
arélavev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dmofvncKe.
drevrape0a, 1 aor. mid. 1 pers. plur. of deimop.
dmetxov, impf. act. of dréxa.
Grexaterté0nv, 1 aor. pass. of droxabiornus
drexatéotyy, 2 aor. act. of dmoxabiotnpe.
drexplOny, 1 aor. pass. of dmoxpive.
GrexravOnv, 1 aor. pass. of dmroxkreivo.
Grehndieacav, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of dmépyouce
drehOdv, 2 aor. act. ptep. of dmépyoua.
Gareveyxetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of drodépo.
GrrevexOfvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of dropépw.
daervlyn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dromviye.
drénvigay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dromviye.
drextadyy, 2 aor. pass. of drogréAAow.
drérradka, pf. act. of drooréAho.
drerradpévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of drocréAAo.
Gréoretha, 1 aor. act. of drooréAXo.
dréorn (yrov), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of dqi-
ornpe.
drerrpdbyoav, 2 aor. pass. 8 pers. plur. of droarpédan
dmrerdfaro, 1 aor. mid. 8 pers. sing. of drordouw.
dmrjerav, impf. 3 pers. plur. of metus.
dirfAacev, 1 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of darehaivon
darndynkétes, pf. act. ptcp. nom. ‘plur. masc. of dradyéw.
darA\Gov (Bay, Alex. 3 pers. plur.), 2 aor. act. of dmrépyouas.
dam \Adx Bar, pf. pass. inf. of dradAdoo.
darmpvycduny, 1 aor. of drapvéopar.
dryoracduny, 1 aor. of dmacmdCopat.
GroBdvres, 2 aor. act. ptcp. of droBaive.
droBhcero, fut. 3 pers. sing. of dmoBatve.
GaroSeSerypévov, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of dmoSelxvups.
712
Forms or VERBS.
daroSexvivra (-Seryviovra), pres. act. ptep. acc. sing. masc.
of dmodeikvupe.
daroSetéat, 1 aor. act. inf. of dmodetevups.
drobiSdvat, -86rw, pres. act. inf. and impv. (8 pers. sing.)
of dmodidap.
daro$.S05v, pres. act. ptep. neut. of dmodidap
droS00Avat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of dmodidwpe.
daroBot, -84, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of amodidepu.
dard80s, -Sore, 2 aor. act. impv. of drodidape.
dmoSosvat, -Sovs, 2 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of arodiSape
daroSen, 2 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of drodidwu.
drroPavetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of drobvnckw.
droxabiord, raver, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of doxabiornpe
drokarnAAdynte, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of doxara\-
doco.
daroxpvOels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of dmoxpive.
daroxtalvw, -Krelva, -KTévva, -KTEVvo, Pres.; See dmoxTeiva-
dmoxravlets, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of droxreive.
daroxtévvuvtes, pres. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of dzoxreive.
daroxrevo, fut. act. of dmoxreive.
dmrohecat, -Aéow, 1 aor. act. inf. and subj. of dmdAAupe.
drodéow, fut. act. of awodAvpe.
drrododpat, fut. mid. of awd\Aupe.
arrod&, fut. act. of dmdAdupt.
drédoda, 2 pf. act. of dadAdupe.
daro(p)pipavras, 1 aor. act. ptep. ace. plur. mase. of
amro(p) pinto.
dmocrahs, 2 aor. pass. subj. of drooreAdo.
darooret\as, 1 aor. act. ptep. of drocréAXo.
darorry, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ddiornus
dmoorhoopat, fut. mid. of ddiornue
dréoryre (-cTH}Tw), 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. (3 pers.
sing.) of dpiornpe.
drroctpadjs, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. sing. of droortpepo
drdéorpefov, 1 aor. act. impv. of droorpépea.
droragdpevos, 1 aor. mid. ptep. of arordcaw.
tarrov, pres. mid. impv. of dra.
drédeoa, 1 aor. act. of drd\Aupe.
drodspnv, 2 aor. mid. of dmoAAupe.
droacédpevos, 1 aor. mid. ptcp. of drwbéw.
dpat, 1 aor. act. inf. of aipe.
dpas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of aipe.
dpéoet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of dpécxw.
dpéoy, 1.aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of F dpécxen
&py, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of afpe.
dei (-Qacwv), 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of
aipo.
dpOhoerat, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of aipe.
dpOnr, 1 aor. pass. impv. of apo.
dpkéorg, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dokéw:
dpov, 1 aor. act. impv. of aipe.
dprayévra, 2 aor. pass. ptep. ace. sing. masc. of dprate.
dp (-otcw), fut. act. 1 pers. sing. (3 pers. plur.) of aipe
at€04, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of adéape.
deOnv, 1 aor. pass. of ddinut.
dpetrev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of adaipéw.
dpeivor, 2 aor. act. inf. of dinu.
deis, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of (dbéw) dhigm
Forms or VERBS,
dpels, 2 aor. act. ptep. of dpinus.
apedct, fut. act. 8 pers. sing. of dpapéo.
dpedeiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of dparpéa.
aéry, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dparpéw.
apes, 2 aor. act. impv. of ddinus.
dbéovras, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of dpinu:.
apy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ddinus
apijxa, 1 aor. act. of apinut.
ateyev, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of dpinus
aptevrar, -ovrat, pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. of dpinus.
dhixero, 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. of duxvéopat.
dplouev, pres. act. 1 pers. plur. of (ddiw) dbinus.
Gprotor, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of (ddd) dpinpas.
apteraco, pres. mid. impy. of dgiornu.
adioraro, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of dpiornus.
dhoptet, oto, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. and plur. of do
pitw.
GhaGpev, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of dé
Ghoporwpévos, pi. pass. ptcp. of dpoporda.
Gx Gfjvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ayo.
dx OAcecGe, 1 fut. pass. 2 pers. plur. of dye.
dias, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of dzta.
Gq, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dares,
Bod, fut. act. of Baw.
BoAw, -Ay, (-Ae), 2 aor. act. subj. (impv.) of Baro.
BapetcGw, pres. impv. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Bapée-
Bay, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of Barre.
BeBappévov, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of Barre.
BeBAnkey, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of BadrAe.
BeBAnpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of BudArAw.
BeBAnra, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of BdAAs.
BAnbels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of Badro.
BAqeqr, 1 aor. pass. impv. of Ba\rAw
yopncdtwcay, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. plur. of yapdes.
yeyevnpat, pf. pass. of yivoyan
yeyevvnpat, pf. pass. of yerrdw.
yéyovay (-vés), 2 pf. act. 3 pers. plur. (ptep.) of yivouas
yeyéve, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. (without augm.) of
yevdyevos, 2 aor. mid. ptep. (Tdf. ed. 7) of yivopas.
yevécdw, 2 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing. of yivopat
yevnOrjrw, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of yivopas
yévnobe, 2 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of yivopas
yévevrat, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of yiwopas
yfipas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of yapéw.
yiens, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing. of yapéw.
wot, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ywacna
yvots, 2 aor. act. ptep. of ywooke.
-yvG, yv@, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 3 pers. sing. of ywoors.
yvab, 2 aor. act. impv. of ywwooKw.
yvopotew, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of yrwpife-
yrwo'y, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of yrdoxe.
yoootricerat, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ywadoxe
yrocropar, fut. of ywwocko.
qvére, 2 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of ywoome
718
Forms oF VERBS
Sapfropor, 2 fut. pass. of Bépa.
Sé5exrar, pf. 3 pers. sing. of d¢xopar-
SeSexds, pf. act. ptep. of dé.
SéSepar, pf. pass. of do.
Sediwypevos, pf. pass. ptep. of dudko.
SeSorat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of diSaps.
deScxerray, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of di8ape
S€q, pres. subj. of impers. dei.
SeOAvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of dé.
delpavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of 8épe.
Sefar, 1 aor. impv. of d¢youat.
d€Eqror (-wvrat), 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of 8éxopsan
Sica, 1 aor. act. inf. of déo.
Sieg, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of 8ée.
SiaBds, 2 aor. act. ptep. of diaBaivo.
SiaBAvat, 2 aor. act. inf. of diaBaivo.
SudSos, 2 aor. act. impv. of d:adidope.
Staxaldpat, 1 aor. act. inf. of dsaxabaipa.
StadAAcynO, 2 aor. pass. impv. of dadAaooe.
Svapetvy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of diapéve.
Stapepevnkdres, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of Seapéves
Stapévers, pres. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of dvapeva.
Stapevets, fut. ind. act. 2 pers. sing. of diapéeve.
dvavolyOnrt, 1 aor. pass. Impv. of d:avoiyo.
Stap(p)ygas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of diappryvupe.
Siacmapévtes, 2 aor. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of Se
OTE PW.
Stacrac6y, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dacmde.
Siactdons, 2 aor. act. ptep. gen. sing. fem. of diiornue
Stacrpépar, 1 aor. act. inf. of dsacrpédo.
Siarayels, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of diardoco.
Saray Gévra, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. neut. of diardooes
Siareraypevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of diardoco.
Siareraxévar, pf. act. inf. of diardoo.
SiSdacr, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of didape
SuéBnoav, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of duaBaiva
Suctdov, 2 aor. act. of drarpéw.
Sevéyeg, 1 or 2 aur. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dahépe.
Suep(p)hyvuro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dsappyyvupe.
Siép(p)nfev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of duappyyvupe.
Step(p){ooero, impf. pass. 8 pers. sing. of duappryvupe
Suerddycay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of duacadéa.
Steed pnoray, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of dacmeipw.
SuerrdaPat, pf. pass. inf. of diaomdo.
Sterrethduny, 1 aor. mid. of dcacréAdo.
Siérrn, 2 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of duornpe
Steetpappevos, pf. pass. ptep. of duacrpépe
Stérata, 1 aor. act. of dardcow.
StehOdpny, 2 aor. pass. of SrapOcipw.
SuehOappevos, pf. pass. ptep. of duapdeipw.
Sunxdvovy, impf. act. of Sraxovéw.
Sufvoryev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. Of davotyax
durjvoitev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of diavoiyw.
SinvolxOncav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of diavotpas
Stopvyfvat, 2 aor. pass. inf. of duopyccw.
StopuxOfvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of duoptace.
S.dSeve, impf. 3 pers. sing. of diodedo.
Siwfdrw, 1 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of didxe
Forms OF VERBS.
SidEqre, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of 3dxw.
SiwxOjoovrat, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of didko.
S00cicav, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. acc. sing. fem. of didope
$004, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ida.
So0fvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of didape
So, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of didaps.
B65, Sére, Sérw, 2 aor. act. impv. of 8idcope.
Sotvar, 2 aor. act. inf. of didapu.
Sous, 2 aor. act. ptep. of didap.
Sivp, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of dvvapat.
80, 84y, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of 8i8ops
Sun, 2 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of didape.
Sapev, SAre, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 and 2 pers. plur. of &8ap:.
Séoy (-copev), 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. (1 pers.
plur.) of didps.
Baroy (-av, Alex. 3 pers. plur.), 2 aor. act. of BdAAw.
éBdoxave, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of Bacxaive.
&BSedvypevos, pf. pass. ptep. of BdeAvoow.
&BéBAnro, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Ba\Aw.
€BA7Onv, 1 aor. pass. of Barro.
éyytet, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of éyyife.
éyyloat, 1 aor. act. inf. of éyyife.
éyeysver, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of yivopa
éyepat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of éyeipe.
éyetpar, 1 aor. act. inf. of éyeipe.
éyelpov, pres. pass. impv. of éyeipa.
éyevfOnv, 1 aor. pass. of yivopat.
éyevvOny, 1 aor. pass. of yevvde.
éyepet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of éyeipa.
éyepQels, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of éyeipa.
éyepOyjoerar, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of éyelpar
éyép0yrt, 1 aor. pass. impv. of éyeipw.
éyfyeppor, pf. pass. of eyeipw.
éynpa, 1 aor. act. of yauéo.
éykpivar, 1 aor. act. inf. of éyxpive.
eyvaxay (i. q. éyydxaow), pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of yendono.
éyvoxévar, pf. act. inf. of ywooke.
éyvov, 2 aor. act. of ywacke.
tyvwora, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ywooxw.
éyxptoat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of éyypio.
éyxpioa, 1 aor. act. inf. of éyypto.
éyxptrov, 1 aor. act. impv. of éyypiw.
adrotoww, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of édapife.
éSéero, eSectro, éSetro, impf. 3 pers. sing. of déomax
Se, impf. of impers. det.
e€epay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of 8épe.
€Syoo, 1 aor. act. of déw.
éSiwta, 1 aor. act. of didko.
@odvotcav, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of Bodtdée.
ESpapoy, 2 aor. act. of rpexo.
ev, éSvcev, 2 and 1 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of Supe.
Env. effire, Efov, impf. act. of Cda.
é{noa, 1 aor. act. of (de.
€€ynv, 2 aor. mid. of riOnue.
ero (-evro), 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of ri6nus.
€6yxa, 1 aor. act. of riOnue.
714
Forms oF VERBS
Gov, 2 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of riOqus.
€pepa, 1 aor. act. of rpépa.
46, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Ove.
ela, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of édw.
elaca, 1 aor. act. of édw.
etSa, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of eiSw.
elOiopévov, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of ete.
caro (-ero), aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of aipéo.
eAnrra, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of AauBdvw.
etAndes (-has), pf. act. 2 pers. sing. of AauBdve.
etAxov, impf. act. of €xa.
eiAxwpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of édxda.
elEapev, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of eikw.
eloSpapotca, 2 aor. act. ptep. fem. of eiorpéya.
eloeArjAvav (-Avbacrv), pf. 3 pers. plur. of eicépyopat.
eloyjer, impf. 3 pers. sing. of etoeupe.
elolacwv, pres. ind. 3 pers. plur. of eloerus
eiorhxeocay, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of torn.
elxav, elxooay, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of ya.
ely, impf. of édw.
éxa0é(or &)picev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cabapife.
éxaQe(or a)ploOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of cabapif{e.
€xSdcerar, -Sdoerat, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. Of éxdidcps.
éxéxpota and éxpata, 1 aor. act. of kpdfe.
éképaca, 1 aor. act. of cepavyupe.
éxépSnoa, 1 aor. act. of cepdaive.
éxxaddpare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of éxxabaipe.
éxxaddpy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of éxxabaipw.
éxxexupévos, pf. pass. ptep. of éxyéa.
éxxomyoy, 2 fut. pass. 2 pers. sing. of ékxérra.
&xxowov, 1 aor. act. impv. of éxxéaTo.
&kAaca, 1 aor. act. of KAda.
ékAavoa, 1 aor. act. of KAaio.
&AeAnoe, pf. mid. 2 pers. plur. of éxAavOdve.
éA7Onv, 1 aor. pass. of kadéw.
éxdpao0e, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. plur. of kéate.
éxmAcedoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of éxadEew.
éxpaga, 1 aor. act. of kpato.
éxptBn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Kpimrrw.
éxkoGoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of ékcwla.
éxrevets, fut. act. 2 pers. sing. of éxreive.
éxtynodpny, 1 aor. of erdopat.
éxriorat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of crite.
éxtpozry, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of éerpére.
éxtparhoovras, 2 fut. pass. 8 pers. plur. of éxrpéra.
éxpty, pres. subj. or 2 aor. act. subj. 8 pers. sing. of éxpve
éxuyq, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of éepve.
éxxéar, 1 aor. act. inf. of exxéo.
éxxéare, 1 aor, act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of éeyéo.
éxxéere, pres. (or 2 aor.) act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of éeyée,
xx vuvvdpevos, exxvvdpevos, see exyew.
&AdéPare (-Bere), 2 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of AauSdve.
&dxynoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of Adcock.
®raxe, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of Aayydve.
€Xéyoov, 1 aor. act. impv. of éAcéw.
Actoopnar, fut. of goyoua.
&nAakéres, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of éAadpe.
AsArv0a, pf. of Zpyopat
ForMS OF VERBS.
€bacOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of Addge.
éAxvorat or €Aktoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of ZAK.
€\doyaro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of édAoyéo.
€dopevos, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of aipéo.
&motow, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of édrito.
épaGov, 2 aor. act. of pavOave.
ehaccdvto, guacdyro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of pao(o)dopat.
éuBas, 2 aor. act. ptep. of éuBaive.
épBayas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of éuBarre.
epBAvar, 2 aor. act. inf. of éuBaive.
épuge, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of piyvups.
éurretrAnopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of eumimAnue.
éurdakels, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of eumAnooo.
éuwAno 8, 1 aor. pass. subj. I pers. sing. of éumimAnue.
éveSuvapotro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of évduvapdw.
évetxev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of éveyo.
évévevoy, impf. act. of évveva.
éverAnoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dumiaAnu.
éverAfoOnoay, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ¢umimAnpe.
évémpyoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éumpnbw.
évérrvoy, -cav, impf. and 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of éumrve.
évertnkéta, pf. act. ptep. acc. sing. mase. of éviornpe.
éver Ota, -Arav, -Gros, pf. act. ptep. acc. masc. and fem.
and gen. sing. of éviornut.
éveretAapny, 1 aor. mid. of evréANo.
évebdviray, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of eudavita.
évedvonoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éuduoda.
évex Gels, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. of dépo.
évapynka, pf. act. of evepyéo.
évkptvar, 1 aor. act. inf. of éykpiva.
évorxody, pres. act. ptep. nom. sing. neut. of évouéw.
évreAcirat, fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of évré Aw.
évréraArat, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of évTéhdo.
évtpamy, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of évtpéma.
évrparfcovrat, 2 fut. pass. 3 pers. plur. of évtpémo.
@vvée, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of ricce.
évioragay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of vuardla.
évknoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of évorkéw.
eEad(e)ipOAvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of eEadreipo.
éEavacrioy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of eEaviornus.
éavéornocayv, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of éEaviornpe.
éEdpare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of égaipw.
éfapetre, fut act. 2 pers. plur. of é£aipo.
é€ap0q, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of efaipw.
é€éSero or Soro, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of ékdidope.
éfe(Naro or éfe(Aero, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of éfarpéw.
&€exatOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of éxxalo.
é€éxdwway, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of éxkdive.
éfexéarns, 2 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing. of éxxdmro.
éeXe, 2 aor. act. impv. of eFaipéw.
é€edéEw, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ékAéyo.
egéAnrat, 2 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. of e£aipéw.
éfevéykavres, 1 aor. act. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of ékpépo.
é€eveyxeiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of expepo.
éévevra, 1 aor. act. either of exvevw or exvéa.
ekeréraca, 1 aor. act. of éxmeravyups.
éemAdynoay, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of ékmAnoow.
éfémdet, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of éxmdéw.
715
Forms OF VERBS.
eEeoraxéven, pf. act. inf. of é&lornpt.
é&éorpawrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of éxarpépa.
éferdoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of ééerdta.
&erpdrnoay, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of éxrpéme.
éexee, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éxyéo.
e€exvOnoay, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of éxyéo.
é€éwoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of eEwbéo.
eEjeoav, impf. 3 pers. plur. of expe.
éEnpappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of énpaive.
eEfjpava and -pdvOny, 1 aor. act. and pass. of Enpatve.
eEjpavrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Eypaive.
eEnpedvyoa, 1 aor. act. of e&epevvda.
eEnptiopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of é€aprite.
e€qxyTat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of eEnxéw.
efevon, pres. inf. of Eee.
eurtavey, cirrav, see eElornpu.
eolcovor, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of éxpépw.
eEGoar, 1 aor. act. inf. of €Eabéw.
eEwoev or eEGoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of é£abew
édpaxa, pf. act. of dpdw.
érayayetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of émdya.
éraQev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of maoyo.
éravarrahoopat, fut. mid. of éravaravw (see ratw).
émdfas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of érdye.
érdpas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of éeraipa.
émeipdow, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of meipdto.
éretparo (-pGvro), impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of wetpden
érevoa, 1 aor. act. of reiOw.
éreloOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of welOo.
éretxev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of éméyo.
éméxetAay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of émKéAro.
émexexAnro, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of émKahéw.
émeAdOero (-Bovro), 2 aor. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of émAay
Oavopiat.
érédetxov, impf. act. of émiAelyo.
érerrol0e, 2 plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of meida.
émeca, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of miro.
éneorycayv, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of épiornue.
éréoxev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éeméyo.
éreriwa, impf. 3 pers. sing. of émutisde.
éwerpdan, 2 aor. pass. 8 pers. sing. of émirpémo.
émedavn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of émipaive.
éréxpioev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of émypia.
érnxpodvro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of émaxpodopate
éryveoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of émawéo.
éarntev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers sing. of myyvupe.
érfipa, 1 aor. act. of éeraipa.
émfpOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of eraipa.
érfpxev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of éraipa.
érgoxivOny and érarxivOny, 1 aor. of érarcxvvopa.
étBAeWat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of éemPBéro.
émBréyar, 1 aor. act. inf. of émBdérw.
ér(Bdehov, 1 aor. act. impv. of émPAéra.
mde, impv. of éeidoy.
émiOes, 2 aor. act. impv. of émriOnu.
émuxekAnoat, pf. mid. 2 pers. sing. of émxadéw.
émuxexAnro, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of emtxadew.
émuxAnQévra, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. ace. sing. masc. of émuwadew,
Forms or VERBS.
émixpdvOnoay, 1 aor. pass. 8 pers. plur. of wuxpairw.
émdcAnopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of émAavOdvopas.
émpedHOnrt, 1 aor. pass. impv. of dmeeddopat.
&mov, 2 aor. act. of ive.
emits, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. sing. of érenAncow.
émumoOqoare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of émurobéw
émordoa, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of épiornus
éxlorarat, pres. ind. mid. 3 pers. sing. of épiornps
értorarat, pres. ind. 3 pers. sing. of ériorapan
émlorn or, 2 aor. act. impv. of épiornpe.
émct0ms, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. sing. of sorde.
émireOq, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of émeriOnps.
émuribéacr, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of émeriOnus.
émuriOer, pres. act. impv. of émeriOnue
émrisfioor (-phoar), 1 aor. act. inf. (opt. 3 pers. sing.)
of émiripdo.
érupavar, 1 aor. act. inf. of émupaive.
érhavfOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of mAavde.
érAdo On, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of mAdoco.
érAfyn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rAjocw.
%rAycay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of miwmAnps.
émdjobn (-Qncav), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plar.) of
mipTAnpte
émAourfeate, 1 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of sdouréw.
émAouticOnre, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of zAaurifw.
&rdvvay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of Adve.
&xveveay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers, plur. of rvéa.
éxviyovro, impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of mviyo.
énvigav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of mviya.
émpdOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of murpdokw.
érploOncay, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of zpito.
érpophrevov (-0a), impf. (1 aor.) act. of mpopyreda.
@rrvoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of rrvo.
émdxedav, 1 aor. act. 8 pers. plur. of érokéAXo.
ép(p)dvrire, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of gavritw.
€p(p)darurav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of Jamite.
Eppi{opevor, pf. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of pefdo.
ép(p)ippévor, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of pisrra.
&p(p)urrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of pire.
p(p)upay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of pirre.
ép(p)ioaro, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of Svopaz.
€p(p)icbny, 1 aor. pass. of propat.
Eppwco, Eppwobe, pf. pass. impv. of padvrupe.
érddmice, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of oakrrile.
%orBeray, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of oBevvups.
éveloOnv, 1 aor. pass. of cela.
éoxvdpévor, pf. pass. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of exvAXo.
éorappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of ozeipa.
éordfny, 1 aor. pass. of torn.
éordvat, éordvar, pf. act. inf. of ferns.
éorjkeacay, -kecav, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of forme.
Eorykev, impt. 3 pers. sing. of orpKw.
éornkds, pf. act. ptep. of tornut.
gory, » aor. act. of formu
€xrnprypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of ormpito,
toriipucrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ornpitan
dorés (-ds), pf. act. ptep. neut. (mase, and neut.) of tornye.
lotpdpncay, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of orpegor.
716
Forms or VERBS
éorpwpevov, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of orpevia.
Yrtpwcay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of erpavwe.
trrwcay, impv. 3 pers. plur. of eipi.
érhaypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of opatw.
éxdpayiopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of appayifa.
éoxynxa, pf. act. of éxa.
éoxnxéra, pf. act. ptep. ace. sing. masc. of éy
érxov, 2 aor. act. of xa.
érdn, 2 aor. pass. 8 pers. sing. of Odmrra.
éréOnv, 1 aor. pass. of riOnye.
éreOvixet, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of OvycKw.
érexev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of rikrw.
éréx0n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rikro.
érl0e., impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ri@nps.
érv0n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Ada.
einpertykévar (edaperrnkévar), pf. act. inf. of edapeoréen
evtdpny (edalpnv), 1 aor. (opt.) of evyopat.
eVpapev, edpav, (Alex.) 2 aor. act. of etpicke.
edpdpevos and edpspevos, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of etipicxe.
etpeQSorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of etpiokwes
cdpykevar, pf. act. inf. of eipicxa.
evdpdvOnrt, 1 aor. pass. impv. of eddhpaive.
%bayov, 2 aor. act. of eabia.
ébaddAcpevos, epadrdpevos, 2 aor. ptep. of épddAopat.
éddvyy, 2 aor. pass. of daive.
Zpackev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of Pack.
éhelraro, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of deidopat.
éheoras, pf. act. ptep. of epiornur.
ébOaka, «oa, pf. and 1 aor. act. of Pbdva
ébOdpnv, 2 aor. pass. of Péeipa.
Epide (ErSe), impv. of émeidov.
éire, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of diréw.
éblorarat, pres. mid. 3 pers. sing. of édiornpa
%dpatay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dpdcaw.
ébpiatav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dpvacow
épvyov, 2 aor. act. of dedya.
éxdpnv, 2 aor. pass. (as act.) of yatpw.
éxpioa, 1 aor. act. of xpia.
éxpavro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of xypdopat.
épetow, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of yrevSopat.
édpaxay, -pdxacty, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of dpde.
éwpdxe, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of épdw.
€wpaxds, pf. act. ptep. of dpde.
édpov, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of épde.
tBévvere, pres. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. (Td£.) of oSévpums
ty, tav or Liv, tis, 6, see (do.
{Goar, 1 aor. mid. impv. of Covvope.
‘fdoe, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of Céovmuus.
WPovrAnAny, etc., see BovAouas
Hyayov, 2 aor. act. of dye.
yyara, impf. act. 8 pers. sing. of dyamde.
Hyornkéot, pf. act. ptep. dat. plur. of dyamde.
HyyetAay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dyyéAXo.
HyyKa, -ra, pf. and 1 aor. act. of éyyitw.
Forms OF VERBS.
wyetpev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of éyelpe.
yepOqy, 1 aor. pass. of éyeipa.
wyero (-yovro), impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of &yc.
Hynpot, pf. of nyeouat.
viyvixdres, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of éyvite.
ayvirpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of éyrite.
qyvoovy, impf. act. of dyvoew.
WSecay, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of ofda (see e’Se, I.).
WSivaro (€6ivaro), impf. 3 pers. sing. of divazas.
Advv7{On, WSvvacOn, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of divapyas.
n8edov, impf. of Oro.
ykacr, pf. act. 3 pers. plur. of Fro.
WKoAovoyKapev, pf. act. 1 pers. plur. of deodovbéc.
qAaro, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of GAopat.
yAattwopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of édarréw.
qAatvero, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of éAabve.
mAcenonv, 1 aor. pass. of eAeéw.
aAenpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of éAecw.
nAénoa, 1 aor. act. of éAcéw.
“wAeupa, 1 aor. act. of drcida.
qAkopevos, pf. pass. ptep. of éAxdw.
qAAagav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dAAdcos.
aAXcro, impf. 3 pers. sing. of G\Aopat.
qAmiKka, -oa, pf. and 1 aor. act. of édmitw.
aqpaptyka, pf. act. of duaprdave.
Yaprov, 2 aor. act. of duaprdve.
ype0a, ypev, impf. 1 pers. plur. of eipi.
peddov and épedAov, impf. of péAAw.
apn, impf. of edi.
sprerpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of dudrévmupee.
qveyka, 1 aor. act. of dépo.
averxopny, impf. mid. of dvéyo.
ajveorxspny, 2 aor. mid. of dvéxo.
yvéxOny, 1 aor. pass. of hepa.
qvewypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of dvoiyw. .
jvewta (yvéwga Tr ?), 1 aor. act. of dvotys.
qvedxOnv, 1 aor. pass. of dvoiya.
qvotyny, 2 aor. pass. of dvotyo.
avouypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of dvoiyw.
qvouga, 1 aor. act. of dvoiya.
yvolxOnv, 1 aor. pass. of avotya.
jeer, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of Fkw.
Hey, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of Fra.
aétov, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of a&ide.
ygiwrar, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of d&tdw.
yraTHn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dmardw.
ymelOycay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of dmebéw.
qmeWouv, impf. act. of dmebéo.
yrether, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of dmeAew.
qmicrovy, impf. act. of dmoaréw.
yrdper, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of dropéw.
yrrovro, impf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of dre.
7pa, 1 aor. act. of aipo.
ae-(elp-)yatopny, -rdpnv, impf. and 1 aor. of épydfomac.
pé8ica, 1 aor. act. of epebi¢a.
pera, 1 aor. act. of dpéoka.
Hpeokov, impf. act. of dpecko.
HenpoOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of épnude.
717 Forms or VrerRBs
npnHopevny, pf. pass. ptep. acc. sing. fem. of épnuce.
ypOnv, 1 aor. pass. of aipa. ,
yexev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of aipe.
jppévos, pf. pass. ptep. of alpe.
jpvetro, impf. 8 pers. sing. of dpvéopat.
Apyynpor, pf. pass. of dovéopat.
Hprvnpévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of dpveopan
Apvncduny, 1 aor. of dovéouar. :
npviow, 1 aor. 2 pers. sing. of dpvéopas.
ypedpny, 1 aor. mid. of dpyo.
ipmayn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dprd{o.
jptace, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dpmate.
pdo8y, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of épmdte.
yptvpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of dptia.
jpxovro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of épyopat.
Ypotevv, jpdtev, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of épwrde.
as, 4r8a, impf. 2 pers. sing. of edpé.
qo%.ov, impf. act. of érbio.
yood0nre, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of grrde.
qtyKkapev, pf. act. 1 pers. plur. of airéw.
ty7o4, -cdpny, 1 aor. act. and mid. of airéw.
yripacra, 1 aor. act. of drysdago.
ytipnoo, 1 aor. act. of dripde.
ariu.opéevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of drepde.
yrolyaxa, pf. act. of érommdte.
qrotvro, impf. mid. 3 pers. plur. of airéw.
arTHOynre, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of yrrde.
Arryrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of yrraw.
ro, pres. impv. 3 pers. sing. of etyi.
nvSdKyoa, 1 aor. act. of evdonéw.
nvSoxodpev, impf. act. 1 pers. plur. of eddoxéw.
nixatpovy, impf. of edxarpéw.
nddhoapev, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of atAéw.
nvdcyer, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of evAoyea.
niddynka, -oo, pf. and 1 aor. act. of edvroyéw.
nvéqoa, 1 aor. act. of avfave.
nvropetro, impf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of edmopéw.
niptoxero, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ebpioxe.
nipirkov, impf. act. of eipicxe.
nrddpyoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of edpopéw.
nidpdvon, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of edppaive.
nrxapicrnoay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of edyapiorée.
noxopny, impf. of e#xopuat.
Adue, impf. 3 pers. sing. of ddinut (adic).
4xOnv, 1 aor. pass. of dyo.
Ax persOnoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of dxypeda.
abdunyv, 1 aor. mid. of drrw.
Odor, 1 aor. act. inf. of Parra.
Gcivar, Oels, 2 aor. act. inf. and ptep. of riOnpe.
Oépevos, 2 aor. mid. ptep. of riOnue.
Oéyres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of riAnpe.
Oéo0e, 2 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. of ri@nps.
Oére, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of riOnut.
Otyns, Olyq, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 and 8 pers. sing. of Oey
yaa.
04, 2 aor. act. subj. of réOnuc.
ForMs Of VERBS.
td (-04), 1 aor. pass. ind. (subj.) 8 pers. sing. of ddopas.
tarat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ‘dopa.
laras, pres. 8 pers. sing. of /dopas.
taro, impf. 8 pers. sing. idopas.
‘Say, tSov, collat. forms of efdov.
tract, 3 pers. plur. of the 2 pf. ol8a (see ia, Il.).
tr6., impv. 2 pers. sing. of eli.
tordvopev and torapev, pres. ind. 1 pers. plur. of tornps.
torre, 2 pers. plur. ind. or impv. of ofda (see ei8a, I1.).
lorixev, plpf. act. of torn.
lopevos, pres. ptep. of idopat
xaOapret, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of kaBapifa.
KaSaploa, 1 aor. act. inf. of cabapifa.
xaSaploy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of « @.
KaSaplcOnr, 1 aor. pass. impv. of kadapife.
kaGetre, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of kabapéw.
KabeXd, fut. act. of kadaipéw.
Ka0y, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of xdOnuas.
ka0fKav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cabins.
Kadyoecbe, fut. 2 pers. plur. of xa
xafpe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers, sing. of xadamre.
kadov, pres. impv. of caOnpuat.
Kadéoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of cadéo.
kdderoy, 1 aor, act. impv. of kadéw.
Kdpnre, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of «dupe.
kardBo, and KardBner, 2 aor. act. impv. of earaBalve.
karaBds, 2 aor. act. ptep. of caraBaivo.
xaraBeBynka, pf. act. of caraBaivo.
karaBy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of «araBalve.
Karaxahooper, 2 fut. pass. of xaraxaio. .
Karaxatoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of carakaio.
Karaxavx6, pres. impv. of caraxavxdopat,
karaddBy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of caradauBdvw.
karamty, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of xatamive.
' xarao0y, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of xaramive.
kataprica., 1 aor. act. inf. or opt. (3 pers. sing.) of Ka-
tapriva.
katacKyvoty (-voty), pres. act. inf. of xkataoxnvda.
Katdoxwpev, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of caréxo.
kateayaouv, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of cardyrums.
karéagay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of carayvupe.
kared£e, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of kardyvupe.
karéBy (-qoav), 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of «araSaine.
kateyvoopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of caraywoonw.
kareAnppévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of caraAauBdvo.
karendévar, pf. act. inf. of caraAauBdve.
katekdn, 2 aor. pass. 8 pers. sing. of xaraxal.
katékAace, 1 aor. act. 8 pers. sing. of caraxAde.
karékheora,, 1 aor. act. of KarakAelo.
karevexOecls, 1 aor, pass. ptcp. of carapépw.
Karevdynoay, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of caraviaow.
kateréoryoay, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of xareplornpe
karéme, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of xaramive.
xarerdOny, 1 aor. pass. of xararive.
wareoxappéva, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. neut. of xara-
onanto.
718
Forms or VERBS.
kareotpeppvos, -rrpappevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of xaracrpepax
katertpa0yoay, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of raraorpavvups.
karev0dvar, 1 aor. act. inf. of carevdiva.
katevOivat, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of carevOvve.
karépayov, 2 aor. act. of xarecOio.
KaryyyeAa, 1 aor. act. of karayyéAro,
karnyyéAn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of karayyéAA@.
karyveyka, 1 aor. act. of carapépa.
KarhvTnKka, -ra, pf. and 1 aor. act. of karavraw.
Karnpacw, 1 aor. 2 pers. sing. of karapdopat.
Karfpyntat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of carapyéw.
katnpticpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of karaprifa.
katnpticw, 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. of xaraprife.
Karyoxiveny, 1 aor. pass. of karaurxive.
karhxnvrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of karnyéw.
Katnx7o#, 1 aor. act. subj. of carnxéa.
kattwrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of cari.
karwkurev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of xarotki{e.
KavOrowpat, KavXirwpaL, see Kala.
kavxdoat, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of xavydopat.
kexada(or €)pirpévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of xabapife.
kexalappévos, pf. pass. ptep. of Kabaipo.
kekaduppévos, pf. pass. ptep. of kadvmra.
Kexavpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of kato.
Kexepacpévov, pf. pass. ptep. gen. sing. masc. of xepdvvyps
KékActopat, pf. pass. of Keio.
kéxAnka, pf. act. of Kadéa.
kékAnrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of kadéw.
KékAuKev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of KAive.
Kéxpnxas, pf. act. 2 pers. sing. of kdyve.
Kekoperpevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of kopévvupe.
kéxpaye, 2 pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of xpdtw.
kexpdfovrat, fut. mid. 3 pers. plur. of «page.
kexpatykévat, pf. act. inf. of kparéw.
kexparnvrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. plur. of xparéw.
kekplke, plpf. act. 3 pers. sing. of xpive.
kéxptpar, pf. pass. of xpive.
kekpuppévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of xkpumra.
kepdorare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of repdvvups.
kepSavd, kepSxjow, fut. act. of xepdaivw.
kepSdve, 1 aor. act. subj. of xepdaive.
Kexdpropat, pf. of yapiCopa.
Kexapiropéevn, pf. pass. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of yaperde.
Kéxpnpar, pf. of ypdouas.
kexoptopevos, pf. pass. ptep. of yapitw.
Kypvéar (al. knptéar), 1 aor. act. inf. of kypvace.
KAdoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of KAdo.
kXavcare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of «Aaa.
KAatow, KAatcopat, fut. of Kalo.
Ker Pdorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of KAele.
KAnOxs, KANOdpev, KAnOFivar, KANOev, 1 aor. pass. Of Kadéor
kASpev, pres. ind. act. 1 pers. plur. of «Ado.
kAdpevov, pres. pass. ptcp. neut. of KArdo.
kAdvres, pres. act. ptcp. nom. plur. mase. of «Ado.
Kownapevos, pres. pass. ptcp. of Kodo.
koAAWOyTL, 1 aor. pass. impv. of KoAAde.
koptctrat, (Attic) fut. mid. 3 pers. sing. of xopito.
koulraca, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of coulfe.
Forms or VERBS.
Koper Gévres, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of kopevvups.
koipas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of kémrrw.
kpafov (not xpdfov), pres. ptcp. neut. of «pdte.
kpdfas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of «pdtw.
Kpdfoverv, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of kpdtw.
kpdret, pres. impv. of xparéw.
KpOrjrerGe, 1 fut. pass. 2 pers. plur. of kpive.
KpOdorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of kpive.
KpuBfvar, 2 aor. pass. inf. of kpimra.
KtycacGe, 1 aor. mid. impy. 2 pers. plur. of «erdoyat.
«rhonote, 1 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of «rdopat.
AdiBe(-By), 2 aor. act. impv. (subj. 3 pers. sing.) of AauBdve.
AaGetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of AavOava.
Aaxotcr, 2 aor. act. ptep. dat. plur. of Aayyave.
Adxwpev, 2 aor. act. subj. 1 pers. plur. of Aayydvo.
Aehov(c)pévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of Aovo.
AéAvorar, pf. pass. 2 pers. sing. of Avo.
An()$0q, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of hawSava.
Ayj(p)Youar, fut. of AawBavo.
Alrrg, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of dela.
padere, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of pavOava.
pdOnre, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of pavOdva.
paddy, 2 aor. act. ptep. of pavOava,
pakaptotor, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. plur. of paxapitw.
paxpolipncoy, 1 aor. act. impv. of paxpodupéo.
peOiordvar, pres. act. inf. of peOiornu.
pebve8Sorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of pedica.
petvat, 1 aor. inf. of pévo.
pelvavres, 1 aor. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of péve.
pelvare, petvoy, 1 aor. impv. of péva.
pelvy, -nre, -wowv, 1 aor. subj. of peva.
pedéra, pres. act. impv. of pederdw
pepadykds, pf. act. ptep. of pavddva.
pepevyketoay, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of uéve.
peprappevos or -rpévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of praiva.
peplavrar, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. or plur. of piaive.
peprypevos, pf. pass. ptep. of piyvupe.
pépvnoee, pf. mid. 2 pers. plur. of pipynoke.
pepinpat, pf. pass. of pve.
pevetre, fut. ind. 2 pers. plur. of péva.
pévere, pres. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of yéva.
peraBa, peraBnOr, 2 aor. act. impv. of peraBaive.
peracra0s, 1 aor. pass. subj. of peOiornme.
petactpadyre, 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of peta-
oTpéepa.
peréOnxev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of perariOnus.
peréotycev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of peOiornme.
peréoxnxev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of peréxo.
pereréOno-av, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of perariOnuc.
peryAAagtav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of peradAdoow.
perfipev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of peraipw.
perouxrd, (Attic) fut. act. of peroukic.
petwxucrev, 1 aor. act. 3 vers. sing. of peroixilo
719
Forms or VERBS,
piavOdorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of praive.
pyncOAvar, 1 aor. pass inf. of pywrynoke.
Bio OqT, -re, 1 aor. pass. impy. of pypypoKa.
Hvn0 06, -Ojs, 1 aor. pass. subj. of pyyrqoke.
vevicnka, pf. act of vukde.
vevopobérnro, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of vouoberéo.
vipare, 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of rpdo.
vdev, pres. act. impv. of voéw.
vootpeva, pres. pass. ptcp. neut. plur. of voéw.
oSuvasat, pres. ind. mid. 2 pers. sing. of ééuvde.
oto, fut. act. of Pepa.
opvivar, opvderv, pres. act. inf. of duviw.
dpdoat, -as, 1 aor. act. inf. and ptecp. of duria.
dpooy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of duvio.
évaiunv, 2 aor. mid. opt. of dvivnus.
opdoat, pres. act. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of dpdw.
6pbels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of dpdw.
Swe, oy, fut. 2 pers. sing. of dpaa.
oerGe, fut. 2 pers. plur. of épao.
snob, 1 aor. mid. subj. 2 pers. plur. of épdw.
madetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of raya.
wd0y, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of macya.
matic, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of raiw.
mapaBoXevodpevos, 1 aor. ptcp. of mapaBodevouae.
Tmapafovdevodevos, 1 aor. ptcp. of rapaBovAcvopat.
mapadeddkercav, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of rapadidapme.
mapadibot, mapas, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of rapadiSoue.
mrapadisovs (apasots), pres. (2 aor.) ptep. of mapadidape.
mapas (-Sot), 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of mapadidape.
mapadeivar, 2 aor. act. inf. of mapariOnue.
mapdfov, 2 aor. mid. impv. of mapari6nue.
mapaddov, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of mapariOnpe.
mapa.Tod, pres. impv. of mapatréopat.
mapaxekaduppevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mupaxahirro.
mapakexepaxort, pf. act. ptep. dat. sing. of mapayempdgo.
mrapakdndacry, 1 aor. pass, subj. 8 pers. plur. of mapaxahéw
mapakiipas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of mapakinro.
mapahn(p)Orjoerar, 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing. of mapahap-
Bavo.
maparedoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of rapanhéo.
mapap(p)vapev, 2 aor, pass. subj. 1 pers. plur. of mapappéw.
mapacrqcat, 1 aor. act. inf. of mapiornut.
mapacrycare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of mapiornu
mapacrire, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of mapiornpe.
mapacxv, 2 aor. act. ptep. of mapexa.
maparibécQwoay, pres. impv. 3 pers. plur. of mapariOnus.
mraped(Socrayv, impf. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of tapadidope.
mapéGevro, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of mapariOnpue.
amdpev, pres. ind. 2 pers. sing. of mapetps.
amapeipevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mapinus.
mapetvat, 2 aor. act. inf, of rapinpt and pres. inf. of wdpeqm
maperdtovew, fut. act. 3 pers. plur. of mapeadyo.
Forms OF VERBS.
mapecedénoay, 2 aor, pass. 3 pers. plur. of rapedvo.
wapeoéSvorav, 1 aor. act. 8 pers. plur. of rapetrdvo.
mopecevéykavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of
maperapéepa.
mapecrrykecav, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of wapiornue
mapeixav, impf, (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of mapéxw.
wapexopny, impf. mid. of mapéxa.
mrapexuipev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of mapakimra.
mapeAdBorav, 2 aor. act. (Alex.) 3 pers. plur. of mapa-
AapBavo.
mapeActoovrat, fut. 3 pers. plur. of mapépyopat.
mrapedndvdévar (-0ds), pf. act. inf. (ptep.) of mapépxopat.
mape\Odro (-0érw), 2 aor. act. impv. 3 pers. sing. of
mapépxopar.
amapeveykeiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of rapadpépa.
wapétet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of mapéxo.
wapeéy, fut. mid. 2 pers. sing. of rapéxo.
waperixpavay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of mapamepaive.
moperkevarrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rapackevdto.
mwapertnkdres and waperrates, pf. act. ptep. nom. plur.
mase. of mapiornpe.
wapertrcare, 1 aor. act. 2 pers. plur. of mapiornpe.
maperewve, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of rapateive.
maperrpovv, impf. act. 3 pers. plur. of wrapatnpéw.
wapryyetAay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of mapayyéAAo.
mapykodovOnkas (-cas), pf. (1 aor.) act. 2 pers. sing. of
mapakodovbéa.
mwapyver, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of mapawia.
mapyTnpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of maparréopar.
mapyticavro, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of mapacréopat.
mapaKyoev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of maporkéw.
mapwtivero, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of arapoéive.
mwapotpuvay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of saporpive.
mapaxnpéevos, pf. ptep. of mapotyopa.
mavodre, 1 aor. act. impy. 8 pers. sing. of rave.
aetv, 2 aor. act. inf. of tivo.
aeloas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of meida.
aeloo, fut. act. of meido.
nérmavrar, pf. mid. 3 pers. sing. of rave.
memreipapevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of mespde.
metrevpacpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mewpdto.
Témeopar, -uevos, pf. pass. ind. and ptcp. of wreibe.
memieopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of melo.
memorevkacav, plpf. act. 3 pers. plur. of moreva.
memiotevkoot, pt. act. ptep. dat. plur. of moreva.
metravyoGe, pf. pass. 2 pers. plur. of rAavdo.
wethdruvrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rAarive.
memAnpoxévat, pf. act. inf. of arAnpde.
aérovWa, 2 pt. of reidw.
mérovOa, 2 pt. of rdcyxa.
merrotiKev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of roritw.
wémpaxe, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of murpdoxe.
memrpapevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mumpacke.
mémpaxa, pf. act. of mpdooo.
mémtoka, -Kes, kav, pf. act. of mimra.
mervpopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of rupda.
mémroxe (-Kav), pi. act. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of wise.
®erwpopcvos, pf. pass. ptcp. of rwpde.
720
Forms oF VERBS.
aepidpas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of mepidrre.
arepiSpayévres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of meperpéxo.
aepuedéSero, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of meprdée,
arepteLworpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of mepeCorrda.
arepuexpuBov, 2 aor. of sepuxpuare (or impf. of aepexpiBo)
aeptedctv, 2 aor. act. inf. of mepratoéo.
wepierrerov, 2 aor. act. of mepurimre.
mepreomaro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of menomde.
amepieaxov, 2 aor. act. of meprexa.
areptérepov, 2 aor. act. of mepitépva.
mepi{worat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of mepitavvia.
aepiypetro, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of mepiatpéw.
aepbévres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of weperiOnpe.
mepttotaco, pres. mid. (pass.) impv. of wepiiornpe
mepiméonte, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of mepurinro.
areptpepappevoy, pf. pass. ptep. neut. of mepippaive.
amepip(p)rgavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. of mepupprryvyyee.
mepiocedoat 1 aor. act. inf., and mepircetdoat 1 aor. act.
opt. 3 pers. sing., of meprroeto.
mrepiteTpmpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mepirépve.
mepiTib€aciv, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of weperiOnpee
mepiTpnOAvot, 1 aor. pass. inf. of mepiTépvo.
aeceiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of zizro.
meceirar (-obvrar), fut. 3 pers. sing. (phiw.) of rimre.
méoete, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of rimta.
wérytat, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of réropuat.
ameTopevos, pres. ptep. of merdopuar.
mepavépwrar (-vepSo8ar), pf. pass. (inf.) of davepdo.
meplpooo, pf. pass. impv. of diyda.
mdoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of maga.
ate, 2 aor. act. impv. of rive.
muety, 2 aor. act. inf. of ziva.
alert, wleoOe, fut. 2 pers. sing. and plur. of wipe.
aty, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of riva.
auxpavet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of muxpaive.
aiv, 2 aor. act. inf. of rive.
mio, 2 aor. act. subj. of tive.
tAdoas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of mAdoow.
wA€Eavres, 1 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of méxo.
TAeovderat, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of mreovdta.
mAnPivat, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of zAnOive.
wAnPiver, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of mAnbdve.
wAnOvvet, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of mAnOivo.
TAndvvOAvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of mAnOivo.
TAnpwOH, -Of Te, -04, -Bdorv, 1 aor. pass. subj. of mAnpdo.
mAnpSocar 1 aor. inf., and wAnpdoa 1 aor. opt. 3 pers.
sing., of mAnpdo.
wAjoas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of mipmAnue.
wAnoOels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of mipAnpe. .
wAnoOys, 1 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. sing. of wivadnpe.
mvéy, pres. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of mvéo.
roujoeav, (Aeolic) 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. plur. of rrotéo.
mrowpatyer, pres. act. 3 pers. sing. of rotmaive.
motsdvare, 1 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of zompaive.
motpavet, fut. act. 3 pers, sing. of sotmaive.
mopevov, pres. mid. impv. of aopeva.
mpadev, 1 aor. pass. ptcp. neut. of mupdoxe.
wpabfvar, 1 aor. pass. inf. of rurpdoxw.
Forms oF VERBS
mpoBds, 2 aor. act. ptep. of mpoBaive.
mpoBeByxvia, pf. act. ptep. fem. of mpoBaive.
mpoyeyovoray, pf. act. ptep. gen. plur. of mpoyivouan
mpoeBiBacav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of posto.
mpoeyvaopevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mpoywacke.
mpochevoerat, fut. 3 pers. sing. of mpo¢pyoua.
mpoeviiptaro (-ac0e), 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. (2 pers. plur.)
of mpoevdpxopat.
mpoernyye(\aro, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of rpoerayyéAdo.
mpoemnyyeApevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mpoerayyéA.
mpoerrares, pf. act. ptep. aom. plur. masc. of spatornus.
mpoéreway, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of mporeive.
mpoedyrevov, impf. act. of mpopyreda.
mpoépOacey, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of mpopbdve.
mpoewpakdres, pf. act. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of mpoopde.
mpofyev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of mpodyo.
®ponmukdras, pf. act. ptep. acc. plur. masc. of mpoeArife.
TponpapTynKds, pf. act. ptep. of mpoayaprdve. :
mpoytiacdyeda, 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. of mpoatridopas.
mpontolwaca, 1 aor. act. of mpoeroindto.
mMpokeknpvypévos, pf. pass. ptcep. of mpoxnpioca.
ampokexerptrpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of mpoxerpita.
™poKexetporovnpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of mpoyerporovéw.
mpoopopnv and mpowpduny, impf. mid. of mpoopde.
mpocavedevto, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. plur. of mpocavariOnpe.
mpoceipydocato, 1 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of mpocepyd-
Copa.
ampooek\(6n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of mroocKAivw.
mpocekoAAOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of *rpoaKoAAde.
mpocekvvouy, impf. act. of rpocKuvéw.
apocevyvoxev, pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of mpordépa.
mpocemece, -ray, cov, 2 aor. act. of mpoominrea.
mpocép(p) nga, 1 aor. act. of mpoopryvupe.
mpooéoxnka, pf. act. of mpocexya.
mpocehove, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of rporpavéw.
mpooeavros, pres. act. ptcp. gen. sing. of mpovede.
mpoorveyka (-kov), 1 aor. (2 aor.) act. of mpoapépo.
mpoonvexOn, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of apoopépw.
mpoonpydsaro, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of mpocepyaCopat
mpoonvéaro, 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. of mpocevyouac.
ampoonvxero, impf. 3 pers. sing. of mpocedxopat.
mpoo%es, 2 aor. act. impv. of mpaoridnue.
mpockivycoy, 1 aor. act. impv. of mpookuvéw,
mpocAaBod, 2 aor. mid. impv. of mpocAapBdvw.
mpocpetvat, 1 aor. act. inf. of mpocpéve.
mpoomytas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of mpoomiyvups.
mpoorivat, 2 aor. act. inf. of xpotornps.
mpocwpyloOycay, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of spooop-
pita.
mpoooxPcoa, 1 aor. act. of mpocoxbilo
mpotpeyduevos, 1 aor. mid. ptep. of mporpere.
mpouripxov, impf. act. of mpovmdapxe.
wralrnre, 1 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of mratw.
wrondévres, 1 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of mro€w,
mronOfre, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of sroée.
mrigas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of mricow.
aricas, 1 aor. act. ptep. of mre.
mv0dpevos, 2 aor. ptep. of ruvPdvopas.
721
Forms or VERBS.
pavrlowyrat, 1 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. plur. of favritw.
bepayticpévor (or pepayr. or éppavr.), pf. pass. ptcp. nom.
plur. mase. of pavrito.
Peptppevos (or épptppévos or épipp..), pf. pass. ptep. of dlaren
petoovory, fut. 3 pers. plur. of péw.
pijgov, 1 aor. act. impv. of pryvups.
brgeow, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of piryvype.
pipav (better pipav), 1 aor. act. ptep. neut. of irre.
puTavOrr«, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of pumaivw.
fuTapevdj7w, 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of pumapeto
pat.
picoat, -rdo0w, 1 aor. nid. impv. of siopae.
pve (-OGpev), 1 aor. pass, subj. 1 pers. sing. (plur.) of
pvopat.
capot, pres. ind. 8 pers. sing. of capde.
oPéoat, 1 aor. act. inf. of oBevvupe.
oféoe, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of cBévvyt.
oPeorOoera, 1 fut. pass. 8 pers. sing. of cBévvums,
ceradcvpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of carevw.
cwecapwpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of capda.
céonme, 2 pf. act. 3 pers. sing. of nme.
ceorynpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of ovyde.
cécaka, pf. act. of gala.
cicworta and cécwrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rdf.
onpavat, 1 aor. act. inf. of onpaivo.
clevdoat, 1 aor. act. opt. 3 pers. sing. of cbevdes.
olevace, fut. act. 3 pers. sing. of cdevdo.
cyto, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ovyde.
oKdddov, pres. mid. impv. of oxvAXo.
oapels, 2 aor. pass. ptcp. of omeipa.
oretcov, 1 aor. act. impv. of omevda.
ora0y, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of tornpe.
oralfvar, 1 aor pass. inf. of tornps.
ords, 2 aor. act. ptep. of torn.
ori (orfvar), 2 aor. act. impv. (inf.) of fcrnue.
ornpléa, 1 aor. act. inf. or 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing. of
ammpita.
oripitov and orrpicov, 1 aor. act. impv. of ornpi{e.
otnpite, oryplow, ornprd, fut. act. of ornpite.
orion, oTHOYS, oTHTATE, etc., 1 aor. act. subj. of terns.
orioopat, 1 fut. mid. of torn.
otpadels -bévres, 2 aor. pass. ptep. of orpéeda.
orpabfre, 2 aor. pass. subj. 2 pers. plur. of orpépa.
otpdcov, 1 aor. act. impv. of orpavrie.
ovykararebepevos, pf. mid. ptep. of ovyxarariOns.
ovykarariépevos, pres. mid. ptep. of ovyxarariOnme.
ovykexepacpevos and ovykexpapévos, pf. pass. ptep.
OvyKEpavyype.
ovykéxurat, pf. pass. 8 pers. sing. of ovyxéw.
ov\AaBotca, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. sing. fem. of ovAAap-
Bavo.
ovAdr() vq, fut. 2 pers. sing. of ovAdapBdro.
ovprapaxdnofvat, 1 aor. pass. inf. of ovpmapaxadéo.
cvprapdvres, pres, ptep. nom. plur. masc. of cvumaperpe.
cvudvetrat, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of cvpdie.
evuvaydyere, 2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur. of suvayo.
Forms oF VERBS.
ovvavéxewro, impf. 3 pers. plur. of cuvavdkewpar.
ovwanaxdévres, 1 aor, pass. ptcp. nom. plur. masc. of
ouvaTraye.
cvvarédavoy, 2 aor. act. of cuvarobyjck.
ovvaryxen, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers sing. of cuvarayo.
ocvvarédero, 2 aor. mid. 3 pers. sing. of guvamd\Avme.
ovvapat, 1 aor. act. inf. of cvvaipa.
ovvaxOrcopat, 1 fut. pass. of cvvdyo.
cvvdeSeuevor, pf. pass. ptep. nom. plur. masc. of ovvdéw.
ovvétevtev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cuged-yrupe
ovvédevro, 2 aor, mid. 3 pers. plur. of ovvri@npe.
ovveSvuins (or-as), pf. act. ptep. gen. sing. fem. of cuveidov.
cvvernpvia, pf. act. ptep. fem. of cvAdayBdve.
cuvelrero, impf. 3 pers. sing. of cuveropat.
ovvelxero, impf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of cuvéxo.
cuvexopicay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cvyxopiga.
cvvednrv0eicav, plpf. 3 pers. plur. of cvvépyopar.
cuvedyrvdviat, pf. ptep. nom. plur. fem. of cuvépxopat.
ouveréory, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cuvedpiornue.
cuvérov, 2 aor. act. of cupmive.
ouvermdpatey, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cvamapdaca.
cuverradpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of cvareAho
cvvertaca (-rdéta), 2 pf. ptep. nom. sing. fem. (neut.
plur.) of cuviornut
cuvérata, 1 aor. act. of cvvrdcow.
ouveraypev, 2 aor. pass. 1 pers. plur. of cvvOdnroa.
ovvere, 2 aor. act. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of cuvinue.
ovveréSeavro, plpf. mid. 3 pers, plur. of cuvriOnpe.
cuverrpet, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of ovvtnpew.
ovvédayes, 2 aor. act. 2 pers. sing. of cuverGio.
ovvéxeay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cvyxéa.
cuvéxeov, impf. (2 aor ? ef. ékyé) 3 pers. plur. of ovyyéa.
ovvexi0n, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of cvyxéo.
cvvelbypioay, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cvpWndito.
cuvnyepOynte, 1 aor. pass. 2 pers. plur. of cvveyeipa.
cvvnypevos, pt. pass. ptep. of ovrdya.
cvv7PAnoav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cuvabdéw.
cvvn9poirpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of cvvabpoifa.
cvvaKav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of cuvinue.
cvvyAacev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing of cuvedaivo.
cuvydAacoev, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of cuvadAdoow.
cuvyvTngev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of cvvartda.
ovvapye, impf. 3 pers. sing of ouvepyéa.
ouvnprdxe, plpf. act. 3 pers sing. of cvvaprdto.
ovvipracav, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. plur. of ovvapTragw
ovvijcay, impf. 3 pers. plur. of civerpe.
ovvicbiev, impf. 3 pers. sing. of cvverbia.
cuvijre, 2 aor. act. subj. 2 pers. plur. of cuvinus.
cvv7yxn (-noray), 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. (plur.) of ovraye.
guvidot, cvyiotct, cvvlover, pres. act. 8 pers. plur. of
ouvins.
cuvdoy, ptep. of cuveidov.
guviels, cvviev, cvvidv (not -dv), pres. ptep. of cuvinus.
ovviere, pres. ind. or impv. 2 pers. plur. of ouvinus.
cvviovros, ptcp. gen. sing. of civerpe (etue).
ovueray, -dv, pres. inf. and ptep. of cvviornue.
guvieot and sundae, pres. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ovvinus.
ovvevrav, ptcp. gen. plur. of otverue (ei).
722 ForMSs OF VERBS.
ovvradévres, 2 aor. pass. ptep. nom. plur. mase of ou»
barra
cuvredco els, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of cvrredéw.
cuvretpnpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of cvrréuva.
cuvrerpippévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of cvryrpiBa.
cuvrerpiOar or -rpibat, pf. pass. inf. of cvyrpiBo.
cvvtp(Bov or -rpiBov, pres. act. ptep. neut. of cuvrpiBo. ,
cuvuTrekp(Onoav, 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. of cuvumokpi=
vop.at.
cvvacr, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. plur. of ovvinut.
ow0y, -Ofvar, OAT, -Odowv, 1 aor. pass. of gala.
oéoa, 1 aor. act. inf. of cola.
raxroerat, fut pass. 3 pers. sing. of tyke, q. Vv.
rapaxOfvat, 1 aor. pass. inf of tapacce.
reOéarat, pf. 3 pers sing. of Gedopar.
réBerxa, pf. act. of riOnpe.
reOepedtwro, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of Gepedsda.
re0y, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of riOnps.
reOAtupévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of AAiBo.
reOvevat, 2 pf. act. inf. of OyncKe.
reOvykévar, pf act. inf. of @yjcko.
reOpappevos, pf. pass. ptcp. of rpédo.
rpavopevos, pf. pass. ptep. of Arava.
reOvpeéva, pf. pass. ptcp. neut. of Ava.
reOSouv, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur of riO@nue.
réxy, 2 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of rixrw.
reXeoOSouy, 1 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. plur. of reréo.
rééy, fut. 2 pers. sing. of rikra.
reraypévos, pf. pass. ptep. of racoe.
réraxrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of racco.
rerapayevos, pf. pass. ptep. of tapacca.
rerdpaxtat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rapacc.
reraxevar, pf. act. inf. of racoo.
reréheotat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of redew.
rérevya, pf. act of ruvyxdvo.
retypykay, -acwv, pl. act. 3 pers. plur. of rypéw
reTuinpevos, pf. pass. ptep. of rude.
retpaxndtopévos, pf. pass. ptep. of rpayndifo.
reridorat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of rudda.
réruya, TervyyKa, pf. act. of rvyyave.
Tex Gels, 1 aor. pass. ptep. of rikrw.
7WWéacwv, pres. ind. act. 3 pers. plur. of riOnue.
ticover, fut, act. 3 pers. plur. of rive.
dmeSerga, 1 aor. act. of imodetavupe.
treOnka, 1 aor. act. of dori@nue.
tmédaPBev, 2 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of vroAayBave
tmedelpOnv, 1 aor. pass. of brodeimo.
drépeva,, 1 aor. of dropeva.
tmépevov, impf. of dropeva.
vrepvycOny, 1 aor. pass. of tropiupyncKe.
vreveyketv, 2 aor. act. inf. of daopépe
vmevoovy, impf. act. of imovoew.
vrerretoapev, 1 aor. act. 1 pers. plur. of dromdew.
urepiSav, ptep. of brepetSov.
wea
Forms OF VERBS.
Sréctpapa, 1 aor. act. of imoorpépo.
Smectpavvvov, impf. 3 pers. plur. of iroorpdvvupe.
Srerdyn, 2 aor. pass. 3 pers. sing. of dmordoow.
Urérats, 1 aor. act. of vrordoca.
Urijyov, impf. act. of irdya.
Smyjxovov, impf. act. of draxove.
Smyveyka, 1 aor. act. of imopépa.
Srfipxov, impf. act. of drdpyo.
troS5exrat, pf. 3 pers. sing. of imo8éxouas.
troSchnpévos, pf. pass. ptep. of iodo.
SrdSyou, 1 aor. mid. impv. of irodéw.
SroSpaydvres, 2 aor. act. ptep. nom. plur. mase. of imo-
TPEXw.
Sropetvas, 1 aor. act. ptcp. of dopevo.
trropepevnxora, pf. act. ptcp. acc. sing. mase. of tmopuevo.
Sropvijcat, 1 aor. act. inf. of daopmprjcke.
Sropvyicw, fut. act. of tmopimrvpoKo.
Uronvetcavros, 1 aor. act. ptep. gen. sing. of tromvew.
srocre(Anrat, 1 aor. mid. subj. 3 pers. sing. of iwoardAAw.
§rorayy, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of drorau rw.
Srorayycopnor, 2 fut. pass. of drordcow.
Srordynre, 2 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. plur. of txordace.
Urordgéar, 1 aor. act. inf. of imordooo.
Uroraccécworav, pres. mid. impv. 3 pers. plur. of imo-
Taso.
Sroréraxrat, pf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of trerdoow.
vorepynkévar, pf. act. inf. of torepéw.
Syo0d, 1 aor. pass. subj. of ida.
ddyeorar, fut. 2 pers. sing. ot érbio.
odvy, 1 aor. act. subj. 3 pers. sing. of daive.
avi, -vijs, -vaorv, 2 aor. pass. subj. of paivw.
davycopat and havodpat, 2 fut. pass. of paiva.
delropar, fut. of peidopar
dettopar, fut. of devyo.
0apy, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of hbcipw.
d0apycopar, 2 fut. pass. of dbeipw.
Odowpev, 1 aor. subj. 1 pers. plur. of péavw.
bepet, fut. act. 8 pers. sing. of Pbeipw.
ipoiv, -pody, pres. act. inf. of dipdw.
yd0n7, 1 aor. pass. impv. 2 pers. sing. of diude.
payy, 2 aor. pass. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ppdcow.
payyoopor, 2 fut. pass. of dpacce.
dpacoyv, 1 aor. impv. of dpata.
poveloOw, pres. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. of chpovia.
7238
Forms OF VERBS.
$vév, 2 aor. pass. ptep. neut. of piw.
pvra£ov, 1 aor. act. impv. of duddcaw.
is, 2 aor. act. ptep. of dio.
puretOyr, 1 aor. pass. impv. of dureva.
ported, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of porite.
XaAdorv, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of yadde.
Xapfiver, 2 aor. pass. inf. of yaipa.
Xapryocopat, fut. mid. of xaipo.
xepyre, 2 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. of yafpe.
Xapfire, 2 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. of yxaipa.
xepoitor, fut. 3 pers. plur. of yaipw (Rev. xi. 10 unique).
Xpficat, 1 aor. mid. impv. of xpaopat.
Xpyonrat, 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. sing. of ypdopat.
Xpficov, 1 aor. act. impv. of kiypnpe-
Xpfirar, pres. subj. 3 pers. sing. of xpdopat.
xpoviet, (Attic) fut. 3 pers. sing. of ypovite.
xp, pres. impv. of ypdouat.
Xopfioa, 1 aor. act. inf. of ywpew.
xploat, 1 aor. act. inf. of xwpica.
Xpotcat, pres. act. ptcp. nom. plur. fem. of ywpée.
x@potor, pres. act. 3 pers. plur. of ywpéw.
WnAadrjorerav, (Aeolic) 1 aor. opt. 3 pers. plur. of Wydadde.
uyjoerat, 2 fut. pass. 8 pers. sing. of oye.
Youlow, 1 aor. act. subj. of Wapito.
gKodépyro, plpf. pass. 3 pers. sing. of ofkodouew.
e@Kodopovy, impf. act. of ofcodopéw.
optre, impf. act. 3 pers. sing. of dusAco.
cpoddyouv, impf. act. of duodoyéw.
dpooa, 1 aor. act. of durum.
dvelBtoe, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dvedigo.
dvépaca, 1 aor. act. of dvopate.
SpOprtev, impf. 3 pers. sing. of dpOpi¢w.
dpica, 1 aor. act. of dpige.
dpirpévos, pf. pass. ptcp. of spite.
Sppyoa, 1 aor. act. of éppaw.
dputev, 1 aor. act. 3 pers. sing. of dpicca.
apxroacGe, 1 aor. 2 pers. plur. of dpyeopuat.
dperov, impf. of dpeirw.
ShOny, 1 aor. pass. of dpa.
=
~~
=.
/
——
ie
\
‘
o
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
1 fee printing of the Lexicon was nearly finished before the plan of the Appendix, as respects its details,
had been decided on. Consequently facts respecting a word’s use are occasionally assumed there
which are not expressly stated under the word itself. Professor Grimm held it to be unnecessary to refer to
profane usage in the case of familiar and current words. And although the number of classic vouchers for the
age of a word has been greatly multiplied, they have not been given with that invariable completeness which
the chronological distribution of the vocabulary in the Appendix renders desirable. Consistency would require
that it be expressly noted that the following words are in use as early as Homer or Hesiod : dykiotpov, ayvas,
yen aD riaae> aO€éus(o)ros, "A@nvaios, Atyimrios, AlOioW, aicypds, 8, dia(or n)Kdctor, etal, exeiOev, exeioe, ‘Eds,
ENAny, évexa, evtedOev, €&, eEdyw, e€aina, Ee, eépyouar, éEnxovra, e&a, emeyelpw, emel, emerdn, emeidov, émetta,
emikadinTa, eros, Extd, Aros, Oaptéw, Odpoos. Kpns, Krjua, pykére, pytis (unre), vitro, xidvor; that the following
are as old as Pindar, Herodotus, or the Tragedians: dyvwcia, aipoppoéa, exdoxn, evoukew, €Eaxdorol, e£aber,
Erawvos, Edéatos, Opoéw, Kowdw, Kordew, Kpdaomedov, Makedav, pdraos, pévtot, petéxo, pndémote, pndéma, M7dos,
papaive, vn, otkody, ovxl, dxeTds, mapaonuos, rdpotKos, méua, mpoordris, oTrddiov, oraTNp, rod, TvvoiKéw@, XadOaios ;
that the following may be found inThucydides, Aristophanes, Plato, or Xenophon: dypduparos, ddaravos, ad7nOa,
*Axaia, éyyiota, eyyttepov, émidects, emabitw, émurxevatw, Katadad€a, Hatraoddyos, pytvye, pva, povotkds, vuvl,
6Odv0v, mapowwos, padis, crovdalas, oTdpvos, cuvayayn, Tuvaipo, opupis, pacts, pirocodia; that the following are
in use from Aristotle on: émekreivw, emvatnpi€@, evOutns, AxXos, KEpatiov, Komn, papyapitns (Theophr.), vapdos
(Theophr.), mporas; that the following may be found in the 3d century before Christ: BaOéws, émav (inscr.
B. C. 265), — dexacé and dexaoxra in the Sept. ; that the following appear in Polybius: ’AAe£avdpivds, "Avtioxevs,
mpocavexw ; while Diod. Sic., Dion. Hal., or Strabo vouch for ”Apayp, "Aovapyns, "Emxovpetos, Taytov.
Other words without vouchers either first make their appearance in the New Testament writings, or are
so treated in the Lexicon as to furnish a student with the means of tracing their history.
Many interesting facts relative to noteworthy New Testament forms, and even constructions, will be found
in Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen Inschriften, Berlin, 1885 (2d much “ enlarged and improved” edition
1888). See, for example, on the various forms of Sidwps, tnut, tornus, riOnus, § 74; on the intrusion into the
2 aor. of the a of the 1 aor. (qveyxay, eimas, ebpdpevos, etc.) § 66, 6. 7. 8; on yi(y)vopat, yt(y)rcka, § 63, 20. 21;
on éu and éveore, § 74, 12; on (é)6édw, § 63, 23; on the fut. yapyoopat, § 64, 7. On anomalies or variations in
augment, § 62; on éAmis, kad’ idiav, § 32, 2. 4; on evexer, eivexev, § 83, 26; on the use of the cases and prepo-
sitions, §§ 82, 83; of the art. with mas, § 84, 41; etc., etc. References to it (of necessity restricted to the first
adition, 1885) have been introduced into the body of the Lexicon where the plates easily permitted.
p- 27%, s. v. adnOns, fin., add to the reff. A. Schlatter,
Der Glaube im Neuen Testament (Leiden, 1885), p. 169.
p- 72>, last line but one, after “ Arabian king ” insert
Aretas IV., styled Admarpis ‘lover of his country,’
who reigned B.C. 9 (or 8) to A.D. 39 (or 40) (see Gut-
schmid’s List of Nabathaean kings in J. Euting, Nab.
p. 1°, s. v."APa ; respecting its accent see Td/. Proleg.
p- 102; Kautzsch, Grammatik d. Biblisch-Aramaischen
u. s. w. (Leipzig, 1884) p. 8.
p. 4°, line 1, add “See Westcott, Epp. of St. John,
p- 48 sq.”
p. 7, first paragraph, add to the reff. E. Issel, Der
Begriff der Heiligkeit im N. T. (Leiden, 1887).
p- 13°, s. v. dOeos, 1. 8; on the application of the term
to Christians by the heathen see Bp. Lghtft.’s note on
Ign. ad Trall. 3, vol. ii. p. 160.
p- 19%, line 13 from bot. before Longin. insert of am’
aiévos ‘Papaio, Dion Cass. 638, 20, 2 cf. 5;
Inschriften aus Arabien, Berlin 1885, p. 84 sq.)
p- 74%, s. v. ‘Apyayedar, fin., add But see WH u.s.
p. 74>, s. v. dpraypds, fin., add to the reff. Wetzel in
Stud. u. Krit. for 1887, pp. 535-552.
p. 788, s. v. dpxtepeds 3, for the application of the
term to Christ by the early writers see Bp. Lghtft. on
726
Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36 p. 118 sq., and on Ign. ad Philad.
9 vol. ii. p. 274.
> 82%, s. v. "Aovyxpiros, line 1, after "Aavy«p. add (cf.
ov», II. last paragraph)
p- 87°, first paragraph, i line, for Rev. viii. 6, etc.).
read Rev. viii. 6; xviii. 7; cf. Scrivener’s Greek Tes-
tament (1887) p. v. note). Tr reads atray in Rev.
vu. 11.
ibid. after “Cf.” insert Meisterhans ed. 2 § 59, 4. 5;
Dol elem Lo eaarn moon —probably the article
should be stricken out; cf. Prof. Geo. F. Moore in the
Andover Review for aly 1887, p. 105.
p- 98%, s. v. Baowela, fin., to the reff. add Edersheim,
Jesus the Messiah, i. 264 sqq.
p. 98, s. v. Barrage, line 1, before fut. insert impf. 3
pers. sing. ¢Baoratev; and after 1 aor. eSaoraca; add,
Pass., pres. inf. BaorafecOa; impf. 3 pers. sing. éBa-
oraceTo ;
p- 100%, s. v. BeeACeBova, last line but one, add (within
the brackets) But see Baudissin in Herzog ed. 2, vol.
ii. p. 209 sq.; Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.
p- 101%, top, —On the recent identification of the
pool (‘twin pools’) of Bethesda, near the church of St.
Anne, see Pal. Kxplor. Fund for July, 1888
p. 1074, line 1, for -6a WH read -6a Tr WH
v. 107, s. v. Faga, line 7, for 16, 30 read 16, 2, 30
p- 108°, s. v. FaAwaia, last line but four, for 16, 34
read 16, 2, 34
p- 111°, s. v. yéewva, line 29, for 2 K.i. read 2 K. i. 10-12
p. 120>, une z, add to the reff. (within the brackets)
Caspari, Chron.-geogr. Einl. pp. 88-90; Schiirer, Neu-
test. Zeitgesch. §23, I. vol. ii. p. 83 (ng. trans. ii}
p- 94)
p- 1819, Syn. add The words are associated in 2 Co.
Klass
p- 164%, s. v. “E@pais fin., add to the reff. Kautzsch
p- 17 sq.; Neubauer in Studia Biblica (Oxford, 1885)
pp. 39-74.
p- 198%, insert in its place “ ék-mepuooot, see éxmepic-
o@s and vrepexmepicood.”
p- 2562, s. v. ed, line 3— “contrary to ordinary Grk.
usage” etc.; yet cf. Schmidt, vol. iv. p. 398.
p- 268°, s v. éws, II. 2¢., for gws mpds in Lk. xxiv.
50, note the rendering given ir R. V.: until they were
over against etc.
p. 274%, s. v. (wn, fin., to the works referred to add
“ Westcott, Epp. of St. John, p. 204 sqq.”
p- 276%, s. v. ndvocpos, fin., add to the reff. “ Léw,
Aram. Pflanzennamen, § 200.”
p- 2875, s. v. eds, 1 fin., add to the reff. “For Geol
in application to (deceased) Christians, see Theoph. ad
Autol. 2, 27; Hippol. refut. omn. haer. 10, 34; Iren.
haer. 3, 6,1 fin.; 4, 1, 1; 4, 38, 4; ef. esp. Harnack,
Dogmengesch. 1. p. 82 note.”
S. v. Oeds 2, add “On patristic usage cf. Harnack,
Dogmengesch. i. pp. 131, 695 ; Bp. Lghtft. Ignat. vol. ii.
Dzone
s. v. beds 3, add “On 6 eds and 6eds, esp. in the
writings he Jolin, see Westcot, Epp. of St. John, p.
165 sqq.”
p. 2924, s. v. OptapBevw, add to the reff. at the close
“ Findlay in the Expositor, vol. x. p. 403 sqq.; xi. 78;
Waite in the ‘Speaker’s Com.’ on 2 Co. l. ec. p. 404
sq.”
p. 297%, first paragraph, last line but six, kar’ ‘diay —
add, On kar idiav (WH’s ‘alt.’ in Mt. xiv. 23; xvii. 1,
19; xx. 17; xxiv.3; Mk. iv. 34; vi. 31; ix. 28; xiii. 3),
see their App. pp. 143, 145; Meisterhans n. *°6
p- 300%, s. v. "Ingots, line 10, read “in the Zeitschr.
f.d. Luth. Theol. 1876, p. 209 sq.; [Keim i. 384 sq. (Eng.
trans. ii. 97 sq.) ].”
p- 306%, Syn., last line, add to the reff. EH. Héhne in
the Ztschrft. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. s. w. 1886, pp.
607-617.
p. 314°, s. v. kaOodtxds, line 5, after “Smyrn. c. 8”
insert “[see esp. Bp. Lghtft.’s note] ”
p- 319%, s.v. xaiw, line 7, to the reff. on xavynowpar
add “Bp. Lghift. on Col., 7th ed., p. 395 n.”
p- 354% line 15, the words eis rods KéAmous ad’roy are
wanting in good Mss.
p- 8584, s. v. cope; add “See Edersheim, Jesus the
Messiah, i. 631 note.”
p- 365°, line 18, on this use of xvpios add ref. to Bp.
Leghtft. on Ign., mart. Polye. 8, p. 959.
p. 876%, s. v. Aempa. add to the reff. Clark in the
‘Speaker’s Com.’ on Lev. pp. 559 sqq. 570 sqq. ; Sir Ris-
don Bennett, Diseases of the Bible. 1887. (“ By-Paths
of Bible Knowledge ” vol. ix.)
p- 382%, first paragraph, line 15, add For a transla-
tion of Liicke’s discussion see Christian Examiner for
1849 pp. 165 sqq. 412 sqq. To the reff. given may be
added Mansel in Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Philosophy; Zeller,
Philos. der Griechen, 3te Theil, 27, p. 369 sq. (1881);
Drummond, Philo Judaeus, vol. ii. pp. 156-273.
p- 4028, line 18 sq., on év weow and avd peooy cf. R. F.
Weymouth in Journ. of Philol. 1869, ii. pp. 318-322.
p. 4175, insert in its place (before povyj) pdvas, see
kaTapovas.
p- 420°, s. v. Meojs, line 1, “ constantly so in the text.
Rec.” — not quite correct ; Rec.st uses Miojs in Acts
Vi. JAS Vil 3d, Sis axvedls D2, imeniaSemrlCb a xe TOs
p. 421%, line 20, “by L. Tr WH” — Tr does not seem
to be consistent; he uses the dixresis, for example, in
Acts xv. 1, 5; 2 Tim. iii. 8; Heb. ix. 19.
p- 425°, s. v. pnoreva, line 6, after xviii. 12 insert [(cf.
‘Teaching’ 8,1 and Harnack or Schaff ad loc.) ]
p- 433%, introduce as line 1 (before 6, 7, 70) — O, 0: —
on its interchange with omega see Q, a.
p- 445°, s. v. duoi@pa, last line “p. 301 sqq.” — add
Dickson, St. Paul’s Use of the Terms ‘Flesh’ and
‘Spirit’ (Glasgow, 1883), p. 322 sqq.
p- 465», line 32 mid., add see H. Gebhardt, Der Him-
melim N. T., in Ztschr. f. kirchl. Wissensch. u. kirchl.
Leben, 1886 pp. 555-575.
T
p- 474%, Syn. sub fin., on the elasticity of the term ais
as respects age, see Bp. Lyht/t. Apostolic Fathers, Pt.
II. vol. i. p. 432 note.
p- 501, under c. 6., after Ro. viii. 3 add [al. find
here the same idiom as in Heb. x. 6 below (cf. R. V.
txt.) ]
p- 508°, line 18 sq., add to the reff. Lipsius, Apokr.
Apostelgesch. ii.1 (1887) p. 1 sqq.
p- 512°, s. v. meorixds, line 9, add [but see Rev. Wm.
Houghton in Proc. of Soc. of Bibl. Archaeol. Jan. 10,
1888]
p. 514%, to the reff. s. v. miarts add A. Schlatter, Der
Glaube im Neuen Testament (Leiden, 1885).
p- 521%, paragraph 4 a., line 4, “the Sept. renders by ”
etc. — not correct; the rendering of the Sept. in both
passages is 76 mv. Td dytov.
p. 529%, par.c., line 5 sq., “so moAAjs Spas, Polyb.
5, 8, 3” — but see p. 679°, line 2.
p- 536%, line 15, after 1 Pet. v. 1 sq.insert [T WH om. ]
p- 5375, s. v. mpoBarixds fin.— see under BnOedd,
p- 101* above.
p- 566°, s. v. Sada insert [Lchmn. Sada]
p- 568, line 2, add On the Christology of the Sa-
maritans see Westcott, Introd. to the Study of the Gos-
pels, 5th ed., p. 159 sq.
p- 5724, first paragraph, end; add to the reff. Dorner,
System d. Christ. Glaubenslehre, § 85, vol. ii. 1 p. 188
ADDITIONAL
p. 42, line 1, after Jn. ii. 15 add [WH txt. avérpeler]
p. 250%, 8. v. gounvedo, line 1, after ‘Epune insert [but see
Curtius § 502]
p. 268°, line 20, after Hdt. 2, 148 add [here modern
edd. read éc¢ 6
p. 268», line 21, before Plut. insert [Polyb. 4, 19, 12],
p. 281%, line 7, after 22—N.B. here WH R mrg. read
airov (for aire rnc), and thus make the daughter's
name Herodias (as well as the mother’s); but see Schirer,
Gesch. § 17>, note °°.
p. 298%, s. v. ‘Teovy, last line, add see esp. Schiirer,
Gesch. § 15, note *°.
p. 299°, according to Professor Sayce (in 8. S. Times,
Feb. 7, 1891, p. 88) it appears from the Tel el-Amarna
tablets that Uru-salim is equivalent to ‘the city of the
god Salim.’
2
T
sqq-; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2, xv. 358 sq. ;
esp. Weser in Stud. u. Krit. for 1882 pp. 284-303.
p- 584%, line 24, for “ Delitzsch, Br. a. d. Rom. p. 16
note?” read Geiger, in Zeitschr. d. deutsch. Morgenl.
Gesellsch. 1858, pp. 307-309; Delitzsch in Luth. Zeitschr.
1877 p. 603 sq.; Driver in the Expositor for Jan. 1889
p- 18 sq.
p: 608%, s. v. cuorpatiwrns, line 1, for T Tr WH ov»
(so Lchm. in Philem.; read L T Tr WH ovr (
p- 619%, s. v. reXog 1 a., line 2, — “in the Grk. writ.’
etc. add cf. Schmidt ch. 193 esp. §$ 3 and 9.
p- 626°, line 38, before 2 Jn. 4 insert Acts xix. 33
R.V. mre. (cf. cupBiSaco, 3 fin.) ;
p- 6534, s. v. Buadehpeca, line 3, “ The White City ”
(Sayce), add, al. “the pied or striped city” (cf. Bp.
Lghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. I. vol. il. sect. i. p. 245)
p. 665», s. v. yapi€opat, last line, after ib. 16 add [but
GLTTr WH om. eis az.]
p- 669, line 7, add to ref. Schaff, Hist. i. 841 sqq. ;
the Expositor for Nov. 1885, p. 381 sq.; Salmon, Introd.,
Lect. xiv.
p. 672%, s. v. Xpurriavds, line 7 sqq., add — yet see Bp.
Lghtft. Apost. Fathers, Pt. I. vol. i. p. 400 sqq.
p- 678», s. v. oye, fin., add [Comp.: ava-, dro-, éx-,
xata-, also ev-Wriye. |
p- 708, col. 2, insert (in its place) “ eévoxNew fr. Sept.
(@RISh))
CORRECTIONS.
p. 386%, s. v. uaOnrhe, line 5, after Jn. ix. 28; insert
[adrov i. e. of Paul, Acts ix. 25 LT Tr WH];
p. 548°, line 9, after reject; add [in Jn. iv. 22 the un-
expressed antecedent of 6 (d¢s) may be in the acc. or in
the dat. (after the analogy of vs. 21); in vs. 23 both con-
structions occur];
p. 548°, s. v, wpoopévw, line 5, after 7 xvpiy insert
[WH prefix éy in br. ]
p. 6058, line 8 from bottom, after xvii. 18; insert [Acts
vii. 25°];
p. 621%, line 6, for the gen, or dat. read the gen., dat.,
or nom.
p. 680%, s. v. Tpaywviric, at end, add esp. Schirer,
Gesch. § 17°, note *.
p. 658°, s. v. ¢pdvmoc, line 5, after Ro. xi. 25 insert
[here Tr txt. WH txt. é» éavroic, |
p. 664°, s. v. Xavaay, line 1, dele [lit. ‘lowland’]
=
=. s
‘ =~
.
i
~ = ‘Bais E
.
.
-
2 =
i
?
‘
.
'
*
oth rm?
Py
>
we Te,
a
i
i aah
i
ne
K
i
fit i
"f
sani
ah
ale
«i
bi
Rel
raze
es
mas
itt ft
ut
Mi
iS
; i
a
ait
i
Ssteee
SS
exec
fsa
t
iH
i!
a
} ht
a
hat
Serie
Coss
ss
Smet
See
u y Hh
Heat
Hp
iM
i
‘
Hi
Soi
Sie
hide
i
hh
}
i
eas
i
Hi
rt)
u
Hi
H
i
if
i
]
i
tt
)
i
a)
,
Hi
1,
tf
t
v
i)
i
i arbetie
i
it}
th
Menten
Pratt a
a (sania Hi
tees) H
ri i ive
ie
ety
aay
Heit
i}
tf
i}
ft
i"
t
i}
2
y
a
ts
Comer
rs
4)
ri}
i
4
4
i}
+
ra
i
4
HH!
i
ih
t
i
it
th
i}
:
IS)
tf
G
th
i}
Stree
roared
i
ie
Ht mate
bay
uf
i
poets?
y
i
Sea
he
its
|
tH
i
i
HM
Hi
fen ee a ne
esc eeies:
ere
eres
=e
:
oe
Aral
ii
vet aeee
unt
a)
rites
ai
rats 43.
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11